A DICTIONARY OF PALI

PARTII

g-n

BY

MARGARET CONE

Published by
The Pali Text Society
Bristol
2010
 © 2010 Pali Text Society

ISBN-lO O 86013 487 3

ISBN-13 9780 86013 487 9

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means. electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or any information storage and
retrieval system. without prior permission in writing from the Pali Text Society, c/o CPI Antony Rowe
- .\felksharn. Unit 4 Pegasus Way, Bowerhill Industrial Estate, Melksham, Wilts, SN12 6TR, U.K.

Printed in Great Britain by CPI Antony Rowe, Chippenharn

 To

Peter Khoroche

tadisarp kalyal)arnittarp bhajarnana api bala pal)Qita assa

 Texts
to be added to those listed in Part l

AV Atharva Veda
Buddha-c Buddhacarita, ed. E.H. Johnston, Calcutta 1935-36
Dhatuk-a included in Dhatuk
Dukap Dukapaghana, ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, PTS London 1906
Kkhl Kailkhavitara~i, ed. D. Maskell, PTS London 1981
Kkh 2 Kailkhavitara~i, ed. K.R. Norman and W. Pruitt, PTS Oxford 2003
Mhv-t Varp.satthapakasini, ed. G.P. Malalasekera, PTS London 1977
Mp-t Ailguttaranikayapka catuttha saratthamañjüsa, ed. P. Pecenko, PTS Oxford 1996-99
Nett-a Nettippakara~a-atthakatha, ed. Widuropola Piyatissa Thera, Colombo 1921

Pa~ A~tadhyayi of Pa~ini

1
S 1Ee Sarp.yuttanikaya 1, ed. L. Feer, PTS London 1884
2
S 1 Ee Sarp.yuttanikaya 1, ed. G.A. Somaratne, PTS Oxford 1998
Subodh Subodhalailkara, ed. P.S. Jaini, PTS Oxford 2000
Subodh-t Pora~atika on Subodhalailkara ed. P. S. Jaini, PTS Oxford 2000
Yam-a Yamakappakar~atthakatha, ed. C.A.F. Rhys Davids, JPTS 1910-12, pp. 52-107

Works cited
to be added to those listed in Part 1

V.S. Agrawala 1968 Ancient Indian Palace Architecture, Shri Mahavira Jaina Vidyalaya Golden
Jubilee Volume, Part I, Bombay, pp. 242-259
L. Alsdorf 1974 'The Impious Brahman and the Pious Ca~<;lala', Buddhist Studies in Honour of
!.B. Horner, ed. L. Cousins et al., Dordrecht, pp. 9-13
N. Balbir 2000 'Jain-Buddhist Dialogue: Material from the Pali Scriptures, JPTS XXVI, pp. 1-42
H. Berger 1955 Zwei Probleme der mittelindischen Lautlehre, Munich
Bhikkhu Bodhi 2001 The Middle Length Discourses of the Buddha, PTS Oxford
J. Brough 1980 'Sakaya niruttiya: Cauld kale het', The Language ofthe Earliest Buddhist
Tradition, ed. H. Bechert, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht in Gottingen, pp. 35-40

C. Caillat 1960 Deux études de Moyen-In di en, lAs, pp. 41-60

A.K. Coomaraswamy
1931 Early Indian Architecture 111: Palaces, Eastern Art III, Philadelphia
1956 La Sculpture de Bharhut, Annales du Musée Guimet Bibliotheque d'Art, Nouvelle
Série VI, Paris

vii
C. Cox 1992 Mindfulness and Memory: the Scope of sm!ti from Early Buddhism to the
Sarvastivadin Abhidharma, In the Mirror of Memory, Reflections on Mindfulness
and Remembrance in Indian and Tibetan Buddhism, ed. Janet Gyatso, SUNY

R. P. Das 1988 Surapiila 's V!k:jiiyurveda, kritisch ediert, übersetzt und kommentiert, mit einem
Nachtrag van G. Jan Meulenbeld zu seinem Verzeichns 'Sanskrit Names of Plants
and their Botanical Equivalents', Steiner, Stuttgart

P. Harrison 1992 'Is the Dharmakiiya the Real 'Phantom Body' of the Buddha?', JIABS 15:1,
pp. 44-94
A. Hazlewood 1986 In Praise of Mount Samanta, PTS London
O. von Hinüber 1968 'Vedic niviité and Pa1i niviitake', MSS 23, pp. 21-28 (=1994, pp. 9-16)
1972 'Pa1i Phi1o1ogy and the Tibetan Trans1ation of Buddhist Texts', IIJ 14,
pp. 198-203
change 1978 to 1978a
1978b 'Pali gotrabhü: Die sprachliche Vorgeschichte eines philosophischen Begriffs',
ZDMG 128, pp. 326-32 (=1994, pp. 91-100)
2008 'The Foundation of the BhikkunisaiJ.gha', ARIRAB, pp. 1-29

P.A. Khoroche 1987 Towards a New Edition of Aryasüra 's Jiitakamiilii, Indica et Tibetica 12, Bonn
1989 Once the Buddha Was a Monkey, Chicago

J. Liyanaratne 1994 'South Asian flora as reflected in the twe1fth-century Pa1i 1exicon
Abhidhiinappadfpikii', JPTS XX, pp. 43-161

G. J. Meu1enbe1d 1974 The Miidhavanidiina and its chief commentary, Appendix 4, Sanskrit names of
plants and their botanical equivalents (pp. 520-611)
1988 Nachtrag to R. P. Das 1988

R. Morris 1884 Notes and Queries, JPTS pp. 69-108

1893 Notes and Queries, JPTS pp. 2-75

Ñal}amo1i change 1984 to 1982

K.R. Norman 1960 'Midd1e Indo-Aryan Studies (1)', JOI(B) IX, pp. 268-73 (= 1990b, pp. 15-20)
1961 'Midd1e Indo-Aryan Studies (11)', JOI(B) X, pp. 348-52 (= 1990b, pp. 25-29)
change 1971 to 1971a
1971b 'Midd1e Indo-Aryan Studies (VIII)', JOI(B) XX, pp. 329-36 (= 1990b pp. 122-29)

Vlll
 1987-88
'The me tres of the Lakkha1_1a-suttanta (11)', IT XIV, pp. 285-94 (= 1993b, pp. 36-45)

1980 'The dia1ects in which the Buddha preached', The Language ofthe Earliest
Buddhist Tradition, ed. H. Bechert, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht in Gi:ittingen,
pp. 61-77
1983 'The Pratyeka-Buddha in Buddhism and Jainism', Buddhist Studies (Ancient and
Modern), ed. P. Denwood andA. Piatigorsky, pp. 92-106
1990a 'Pali Lexicographica1 Studies VIII', JPTS XV, pp. 145-54 (= 1993b, pp. 155-163)
change 1990 to 1990b
1993a 'The me tres of the Lakkha1_1a-suttanta (III)', Encounter of Wisdom between
Buddhism and Science (Essays in Honour of Professor Keisho Tsukamoto ),
pp. 79-91 (= 1994a, pp. 119-131)
1993b Collected Papers Volume IV, PTS Oxford
change 1994 to 1994a
1994b 'Pali Lexicographical Studies XII', JPTS XX, pp. 211-30
2001 The Group of Discourses, 2nd edition, PTS Oxford
2007 The Elders' Verses I, 2nd edition, PTS Lancaster

T. Oberlies 1991 'Die Verwendung des Part. Priis. als Konditional im Pali', IIJ 34,
pp. 121-122
l995a 'Beitriige zum Pa1i-Lexikon (Miscellanea Palica 11)', IIJ 38, pp. 105-147
l995b 'Beitriige zum Pali-Lexikon (Miscellanea Palica III)', HS 108 pp. 127-164
1995c 'Die Wurzel gad im Mittelindischen', HS 108 pp. 190-91
1996 'Stray remarks on Pa1i phonology, morphology, and vocabulary (Miscellanea
Palica V)', MSS 56 pp. 91-130
1997 'Pali, Pa1_1ini and "Popular" Sanskrit', JPTS XXIII, pp. 1-26
2001 Piili: A Grammar ofthe language ofthe Theraviida Tipifaka, Walter de Gruyter,
Berlin
2002 'Language economy: "shortened" case-endings in Indo-Aryan', Bulletin d'Études
Indiennes 20.1, pp. 193-97

O.H.Pind 1997 'Pali Miscellany', BauddhavidyiisudhiikaraJ:t, Studies in Honour of Heinz Bechert

on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday, ed. P. Kieffer-Pülz and J-U. Hartmann,
(Indica et Tibetica Band 30) Swisttall-Odendorf, pp. 515-536

~-R. Reat 1987 'Sorne Fundamental Concepts of Buddhist Psychology', Religion 17, pp. 15-28
L.Renou 1975 Grammaire Sanscrite, Librairie d' Amérique et d'Orient Adrien Maisonneuve, Paris

lX
 D. Seyfort Ruegg 1974 'PaJi gotta/gotra and the term gotrabhü in PaJi and Buddhist Sanskrit', Buddhist
Studies in Honour of /.B. Horner, ed. L. Cousins et al., Dordrecht, pp. 199-21 O
1981 'A further note on Pali gotrabhii', JPTS IX, pp. 175-77

G. Schopen 1996 'The Suppression of Nuns and the Ritual Murder of their Special Dead in
Two Buddhist Monas tic Texts', Journal of Indian Philosophy, vol. 24, pp. 563-92
J.S. Strong 1977 '"Gandhakufi": The Perfumed Chamber of the Buddha', History of Religions,
vol. 16, No. 4, pp. 390-406

V. Trenckner 1908 Critica! and Philological Notes to the First Chapter of the Milinda-pañha, JPTS

Krom Phraya VajirañaJiavarorasa

1969 Vinayamukha (The Entrance to the Vinaya), vol./, Bangkok
1973 Vinayamukha (The Entrance to the Vinaya), vol.//, Bangkok
1983 Vinayamukha (The Entrance to the Vinaya), vol.///, Bangkok

C. Vogel 1971 'Pali Lexical Studies', 1/J 13, pp. 20-30

A.K.Warder 1982 Introduction to ÑaJiamoli, 1982, pp. v-lxiv

O.H de Wijesekera 1979 'The etymology of Pali gotrabhü', Piili and Buddhist Studies, Memorial Volume
in Honor of Bhikkhu Jagdish Kashyap, Delhi, pp. 381-82

Abbreviations
to be added to those listed in Part I

ARIRAB Annual Report of the Intemational Research lnstitute for Advanced Buddhology at Soka
University
intens. intensive
SAF J. Liyanaratne, 1994
Vinmu Krom Phraya VajirañaJiavarorasa 1969, 1973, 1983

X
 g
ga 1, m. [ts], the sound 'g'; the consonant 'g'; Sadd 604,19
(ka kha ga gha na); 605,31; 622,11 (ko gassa); -
0
-kara,m., the letter or sound 'g'; the syllable 'ga';
Sp 125,7 (bhavesu vantagamano ti vattabbe
bhavasaddato bhakiira1p gamanasaddato -a1p
vantasaddato vakara1p ca dlgha1p katva adaya bhagava ti
vuccati); PsI 118,8 (e!amuga ti e!amukha, khakarassa -o
kato); It-a I 8,22 (niruttinayena takarassa -a1p katva);
Patis-a 47,1 (pariyogaha1.1e ñal)an ti ... -a1p rassa1p katva
pi pathanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gakara1p); Ap-a 530,28
(dakarassa -a1p katva);- ifc see bakara-.
ga 2 , mfn. [ts], going; moving;- ifc see akkhi- (sv akkhi\
atiga, atthailga, addha- (sv addha[n]), anuga, anta-
(sv anta\ anta1ikkha- (sv anta1ikkha\ uddhagga
2 tatrayantena; Be, Se vane unnadayantena slhena viya);
(sv uddha1p), ura- (sv ura[s]), tura-, turail- (sv tura),
dugga, panna- (sv pajjati\ para-, majjha-, samlpa-; -
see also gu 1, taggamanasa (sv ta[d]), ninnaga (sv ninna).
ga 3 , m., (gr.t.t.) (an arbitrary technical term for) the
vocative case; Sadd 642,2o (amantal)e si gasañño).
gmp, sg. acc. ofgo qv.
gagana (sometimes written gaga1.1a), n. [ts], the sky;
Abh 45; Th 1068 (umapupphena samana -a
v' abbhachadita ... tesela ramayanti ma1p, Be so; Ce, Se
ummapupphena; E e ummapupphavasamana; Th-a III
140,16/oll.: tato eva saradassa gagana-abbha viya
ka!ameghasañchadita, nílaval)l)a ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee saradasamaye -a1p abbha1p viya; see K. R. Norman,
1969, p. 270); Vv 53:7 (paripüra1p -a1p va tarakahi);
Ap 538,27 (orohitvana -a vanditva isisattama1p);
Cp 1:9:51 (Maddiya diyamanaya -e deva pamodita);
Mil202,6 (-e vehasailgamo); Vism 58,6' (cando -e viya
sobhati); Sp 64,25 (bhinna1p viya -a1p udaka1p
1
paggharati); Sadd 442,12';- 0 -tala, n. [gagana + tala ],
the vault ofthe sky; Ja I 57,Jo (aha1p mama putta1p ... -e
vicaramiina1p passitukamo); III 364,18 (-a!p
abhilailghantam eva paripUI)l)alp candama1.1<;1ala!p Rahu
avatthari); Spk II 165,15.
gaggara 1, mfn. and-a, (m)f(n). [S. gadgada], stammering;
indistinct; Ja VI 457,6· (ha1psagaggarabhiil)ini ti ... -ena
madhurena bhaññena samannagata, Ce, Ee so; Be -ena
madhurena sarena samannagata; Se -ena madhurena
sarabhaññena); Ap 541,4 (tad' Anando niranando assuna
pUI)l)alocano -ena saren' aha samagacchantu
bhikkhavo);- gaggara, (m)f(n). (scil. asani), a type of
lightning; Sv 569,21 foil. (navavidha hi asaniyo
asañña ... -a kapislsa ... -a gaggarayamana pata ti); -
1 -alp bhinditva bhümi1p sama1p katva, Ee so; Ce, Se -e;
ifc see ha1psagaggarabhiil)i(n) sv ha1psa ; - see also
gaggarayanta, gaggarayamana.
gaggara2 , see sv gaggarayamana2.
gaggara3 , m. [= gaggarl'qv], a smith's bellows; -
0
-naJi,f the nozzle of a smith 's bellows; Sv 765,19 (yatha
nama kammarassa bhasta1p ca -ilp ca tajja1p ca
vayama1p paticca vato aparapara1p sañcarati) = PsI
249,2s; Ps II 289,8 (kammaragaggariya ti kammarassa
-iya).
gaggaraka, m. [S. gargaraka], a kind of fish (Pimelodus
gagora); Ja V 405,33* (aligaggarakakil)l)a).
1
gaggarayanta, mfn. [part.pr. of *gaggarayati ; cf S.
gadgadyati], stammering; making an indistinct or
hesitant sound; Sv 879,5 (sihanado ti setthanado, n' eva
dandhayantena na -ena slhena viya uttamanado nadito ti
attho; Sv-pt III 75,7: na -ena ti aparisailkantena) =
Spk III 208,3o (Ee so; Ce n' eva davayantena na
1
- see also gaggara , gaggarayamana1.
gaggarayamana , mfn. [part.pr. of *gaggarayati 1,
1
cf S. gadgadyati], making an indistinct noise; Sv 569,25
(gaggara [asani] -a patati);- see also gaggarayanta.
2
gaggarayamana 2, mfn. [part.pr. of *gaggarayati from
2
*gaggara <S. gargara, "whirlpool, eddy"], eddying,
whirling; Mil 3,7 (gailgaya iimivega1p -a1p disva; or to
gaggarayamana1 ?); - see also gaggalaka.
gaggan,f l. [S. gargañ], a chum; Abh 499 H manthani);
- 2. [BHS gargari], (the nozzle of?) a smith 's bellows;
Abh 527 (-i); Mhv 88:107 (-1, in long cpd);- ifc see
kammara-;- see also gaggara3.
gaggalaka, n. [cf S. gargara], a whirlpool, eddy; Mil 197,19
(in long cpd).
gagghati, 3 sg. [of fut. of gacchati ?], will go; A IV
30!,!7foll. (yena yen' eva -asi phasu yeva -asi, yattha
yattha thassasi phasu yeva thassasi ... , Be so; Ce, Ee
gacchasi; Se tagghasi; Mp IV 142,23: -as! ti gamissasi,
Be so; Ce, Ee gacchasi ti; Se tagghasl ti) quoted
Sadd 833,23/oll. (gamissa ghamma gaggha: ghammati
ghammatu -ati ... yena yen a -asi ... ).
gañgeyya, m.n., one of the types of elephant; Abh 361;
Sv 573,16' (gocari kalambo -o piilgalo
pabbateyyako ... ); Ps II 25,35' (ka!avaka1p ca -a1p
Pa!.l<;lara!p tambapiilgala1p ... ); 26,4 (ya!p dasanna1p
ka!avakana1p bala1p ta1p ekassa -assa).
gaccha, m. (and n. ?) [S. lex. id.; cfS. guccha], a small
tree; a bush; Abh 540 (-o tu khuddapadapo) =
Sadd 330,32*; A IV 74,1 (-a1p pi <;laheyya daya1p pi
<;laheyya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce kaccha1p; cfMp IV 39,24:
nirarakkha1p arañña1p); Ja I 249,28 (koci rukkho va -o va
natthi); III 288,5 (-a nikkhamitva); 289,16 (rajapurisa
Be -e chinditva); Nidd I 355,19 (pabbato va -o va lata
va, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -a1p) = 449,21; Vism 183,17 (sace
-o hoti, so pi sindi va karamando va ka1.1av!ro va ... );
gacchati
Dbp-al 171,21 (daJ.19ena -e ca bbumiy~ ca paharitva,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se bbumirp ca); Vibb-a 446,2o (cetiyarp
-ehi parivaritarp); Thup 199,15 (kaJ.ltakasamakil).l).a-
sakhebi nana -ebi); ~ gaccho in Ee at Ud-a 333,1o is wr
for gel).9U (Be, Se so) or 1e99u (Ce so); ~ ifc see
1 6
padumini-; ~ see also kaccha , kaccba .
gaccbati 1, gamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gaccbati, gamati],
Dbatum 3 (gamu. .. gatimhi); Sadd 413,16 (gamu
gatiy~: -ati); 462,w; gacchati (see
Sadd 462,32-463,12): l. (i) (of people, animals, rivers,
roads etc) goes; moves, walks; goes away, leaves; goes
to ( + acc. or santike/santikarp etc); often with ah sol., eg
adaya -ati, gahetva -ati, goes with, takes; pahaya -ati,
goes offwithout, leaves behind; Vin 173,24 (-atba bhaJ.le
paccant~ uccinatba ti); 82,9 (eso te Rabu1a pita, -assu
dayajj~ yacahi ti); 105,11 (parivitakko udapadi -eyyarp
vah~ uposatb~ na va -eyy~); 277,14 (yena dvarena
iccbati tena dvarena -atu); 352,38 (battbiniyo kayarp
upanigbarpsantiyo -anti); 11 193,4 foil. (ma kho tvarp
avuso imina maggena -a, imina maggena -ahi ti aññena
maggena uyyojesi); 200,26 (-ama may~ avuso
bhagavato santike); Ili 6,11 (esah~ bbagavant~
Gotam~ saraJ_l~ -ami dbammarp ca bhikkhusailgh~
ca; Sp 171,33: bhavant~ Gotamarp -ami bbajami
sevami payirupasami); IV 73,14 (navaya -anti); M 1
497,1 (banda kaharp pana tumbe ayasmanto -atha ti);
III 5,9 (ay~ maggo Rajagaharp -ati, tena mubuttarp
-a); A 1 225,31 (anuvat~ yeva gandbo -ati no
pativat~); III 325,22 (ekacco hatthiratanarp pi
dassanaya -ati); Kbp 8:8 (et~ adaya -ati); Sn 326
(kalena -e garunarp sakasarp); 564 (yo marp icchati
anvetu yo va n' iccbati -atu); Tb 175 (ebi Nandaka
-ama upajjhayassa santik~); Tbi 27 (daJ.19arp olubbba
-ami); 323 (ebi sarathi -ahí rath~ niyadayah' imarp);
Ja 11 80,2o* (yambi jive tamhi -e); 360,13* (tvarp marp
mocaya bbaddan te mutto -eyya pabbatarp; 360,19':
mutto pabbatam eva -eyyarp); III 139,1* (digb~ -atu
addban~); V 58,24* (ebi kho pahito -a Vidburassa
upantik~); 161,13* (na isipalobbika -e, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee isipalobbiy~; 161.15·: na -eyy~): 321,2* (magg~
no Sona akkhahi yena -emu assam~. Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
-ama): 363.2s· (vakkailga ... cajami te tarp bbattararp
-ath · ubho yathasukh~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gacchatu
bbo): VI 26.16* (ratya amogba -anti); 176,13* (etba -atba
u~etba khipp~ papetba brahmaJ.!~); 323,27* (mano
manussassa yatha pi -e tato pi sailkhippatararp ahosi,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be pi 'ssa kbippatar~; 324,6·: -e ti mano
nama kiñcapi na -ati, dure arammaJ_larp gal).banto pana
gato ti vuccati); 437,26* (sace -asi Pañcalarp khipp~
attarp jahessasi); 539,29* (ay~ ekapadi eti ujurp -ati
assamarp); Nidd 1 201,21 (na -ati ti nago); 414,35 (navaya
mahasamudd~ -ati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se pakkhandati);
Ap 184,3* (-ate vithiy~ viro); 426,22 (uddharanta va
-are pathamarp dakkhil).arp pad~); Kv 329,14 (akase
pakkhiyo -anti, candimasuriya -anti, tarakariipani
-anti); Mil 359,3o (naviko . . . Suval).l).abbumirp -ati);
405,26 (sappo urena -ati); Vism 343,29 (keci -a re
mul).9aka ti adibi pbarusavacahi samudacaranti); ~
(ii) goes to another existence, another birth, world, etc;
S 1 173,2* (-ati anivattant~ yattba gantva na socati);
2 gacchati
A 11 5,3* (idh' eva narp garahanti peccapayarp ca -ati);
12,20* (satta -anti sarpsararp jatimaraJ_lagamino );
Dbp 224 (-e devana santike); Sn 508 (ken' attana -ati
brahmalok~); Tb 138 (-ama dani nibban~ yattba
gantva na socati); 1170 (yo ca jatisatarp -e sabba
brahmaJ_lajatiyo); Ja VI 83,2* (nirayarp nuna -ami);
194,23* (saggarp -anti dayaka); Kv 476,3o (kappagho
kappe 9aybante kattba -ati ti); ~ (iii) follows a course;
follows a future course; Vin 1 283,zofoll. (yo na
chandagatirp -eyya na dosagatirp -eyya ... ); D 11 202,20
(tato -eyya sugatirp); Dbp 317 (satta -anti duggatirp);
It 77,18* (ito bbo sugatirp -a manussanarp sabavyat~);
~ (iv) goes to an activity; goes to do something; Vin 11
263,38 (sabbo bhikkbunisailgbo ovad~ -ati); 286,10
(sannipat~ -eyyan ti); S 1 147,11 (-eyyasi pana tvarp
marisa tassa bbagavato upagbanarp); Sn 291 (metbunarp
dbamm~ nassu -anti brahmaJ_la); Ja 1 149,28
(devasik~ migav~ -ati); IV 362,7* (pesanani pi -anti;
365,3o·: dasakammakara viya pesanani pi -anti);
V 435,3* (uccarapassav~ abbil).ba -ati); ~ (v) goes to
in a sexual sense; has intercourse with; V in 1 268,14
(Ambapalika gal).ika ... abhisata attbikanarp attbikanarp
manussan~ paññasaya ca rattirp -ati); A III 221,15
(pub be sudarp ... brahmaJ_la brahmaJ_lirp yeva -anti no
abrahmaJ.!Írp); Ja VI 295,18* (na bajb~ ittbirp -eyya
sampass~ tejasailkbayarp); 572,27* (paradar~ na
-eyy~ sadarapasuto siyarp); Mil214,s (paradar~ pi
-ati); ~ 2. goes to a state or condition; undergoes;
reaches, obtains; V in 1 359,18* (paccatthika yena vajanti
niggah~ mabajano paññapan~ ca -ati); 11 160,11
(kinti nu kho vibaro kbipparp pariyosanarp -eyya ti);
M 1 176,2 (so ninbarp -eyya maba vata bbo nago ti);
184,2s (yani kanici ... padajatani sabbani tani batthipade
samodbanarp -anti); 188,8 (yena ca asitapitakbayita-
sayitarp samma paril).amarp -ati); 11 98,18 (te pi corassa
Ailgulimalassa battbattb~ -anti ti); S 11 263,4 (sabba ta
samuggbat~ -anti); A1 44,2 (dbamma
bbavanaparipurirp -anti ti); 257,21 (tarp jataruparp na
samma paripakarp -eyya); Dbp 46 (adassan~
maccurajassa -e) = Ud61,25* = Ja V 151,15*; Niddl
266,22 (uppanna ca bboga parikkbay~ -anti); Mil67,s
(pasiil).o nerayikaggimbi pakkhitto kbaJ_lena vilayarp -ati
ti); Vism 421,3 (CU!).l).avicm_ll).a butva abbavarp -anti); ~
esp. atthaq:-¡ -ati, abbbattbarp -ati, ends, disappears; M I
115,6 (abbbattbarp -ati); Dbp 293 (attbarp -anti asava);
Tb 636 (satanarp sampajananarp attb~ -anti asava); ~
see also attbailgameti; ~ vasarp -ati, falls into a
person's (gen.) power; becomes subject to; A 11 177,35
(loko ... cittassa uppannassa vasarp -ati ti); Ud 15,2*
(agbavino parijunna maccurajassa vas~ -anti); Ja IV
354,12* (lobbassa na vas~ -e); VI 572,28* (tbín~
vasarp na -eyy~); ~ sailkb~ -ati, is reckoned as; is
called; obtains the appellation of ... ; V in 11 237,37 (ya
kaci mahanadiyo . . . ta mahasamuddarp patta ...
mahasamuddo tv eva sailkharp -anti); M 1 190,17 (akaso
parivarito agaran t' eva sailkb~ -ati); 487,3o (aggi ...
anabaro nibbuto t' eva sailkbarp -ati ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tv eva sailkbyarp -atí ti); A 1 68,7 (so balo tv eva
sailkh~ -ati); Mil 114,12 (akalamegbo t' eva sailkbarp
-ati); ~ 3. goes to as a criterion, relies on; A 111 39,29
gacchati
(naharp ettha bhagavato saddhaya -iimi, aharp p' etani
janami); - see M II 154,21, 170,25 below at aor. 2 sg.
agamasi; - 4. observes; understands; Sp 171,30 foll.
(bhagavantaJ11 Gotamarp sara!)arp -iiml ti ... bhavanta111
Gotamarp -ami bhajiimi sevami payirupasiimi evarp va
jiinami bujjhaml ti, yesaJ11 hi dhatünaJ11 gati attho buddhi
pi tesa111 attho tasma -ami ti imassa janami bujjhaml ti
aya111 pi attho vutto) t PsI 130,3sfoll. = Mp II
107,6foll.; - S. the first person present is not rarely
used to express an immediate or near future sense: 1 am
going; 1 am going to go; we are about to go; V in I 8,25
(dhammacakkarp pavattetuJ11 -iimi Kasina111 puraJ11);
III 260,29 (ahaJ11 pi senaya -iimi, dujjiinaJ11 jivita111
dujjiinaJ11 maral)an ti); A II 181,23 (handa ca diini maya111
bho Gotama -ama bahukicca mayarp bahukara!)Iya ti);
Th 14 (semanako pi -ami natthi sango vijiinataJ11;
cfTh-a I 63,3o: tasma sayano pi araññam eva gamissami
ti); Ja 11 212,25 (kada -iima miil)ava ti); V 27,9* (sace
tuva111 -asi yeva raja ahaJ11 pi -ami); VI 495,18* (aharp hi
vana111 -ami ghora111 va1amigayutaJ11); 516.9*
(avaruddhati marp raja Vankarp -ami pabbataJ11;
516,13·foll.: tasma Vankam eva gamissami); 523,1* (na
te brahma!)a -ami nadiJ11 udakahiiriya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-iima; 523,4·: tava udakahiirika hutva nadiJ11 na
gamissami ti); Ap 505,21 (vane -iimi ekako); Mi1275,17
(a1aJ11 tata Kal)hajina111 nivattehi, aham eva -iimi
yakkhena saha); - gacchati in Ee at Sv 395,26, Mp II
239,29 and 239,30 is wr for gajjati (Be, Ce, Se so), and
gacchatha in Ee at Spk I 68,12 is prob. wr for gajjatha
(Be, Ce so; Se tajjetha); - see also below for gacchati
as a future form; - part.pr. (a) gaccha(t), mfn., M II
99,21 (ayarp samal)O -a111 yev' aha !hito ahaJ11); 232,17
(viil)ijassa val)ijjayo -ato); A IIl 34,19* (yatha pi cando
vima1o -arp iikasadhatuya sabbe tiiraga!)e 1oke abhaya
atirocati) = Ap 27,9; Sn 960 (kati parissaya 1oke -ato
agata111 disaJ11); Ja VI 26,19* (yatha varivaho püro -a111
nupanivattati eva111 ayu manussiinarp -arp nupanivattati);
180,3• (ajjaka1aJ11 padaJ11 -a111 ajjhagaharp mal)iJ11 imaJ11;
180,c ajjakalaJ11 pato va pada111 mahamagga111
-anto ... ); Ap 279,15 (-arp vehasayen' aham
addasa111 ... ); - neg. agaccha(t), mfn., Ja IIl 345,4*;
(b) gacchanta, mf(-anti)n., Vin I 269,19 (ka1ass' eva
rajupanhanaJ11 -anta); 11 138,3o (bhikkhuno ... Savatthim
-antassa); MI 496,35 (addasa ... te bhikkhü dürato va
-ante); Ud 91,5 (tena panthena -antassa); Thi 218
(upavijañña -anti addasa 'haJ11 patiJ11); Pv 12:7 (yatha pi
diirako candarp -anta111 anurodati); Jaiii 135,1o
(gamissiimi -anti ca ranno na anarocetva gamissami);
IV 3,11 (samuddapighena -anto); V 28,23* (taJ11 -ata111
tava pita viditva, Ee so, me; Be, Ce, Se -antaJ11);
Ap 320,18 (-anto jinasantikaJ11); Mi1179,7 (bhagavato
-antassa ayarp acetana mahapa!havi ninna111 unnamati
unnata111 Ol)amati ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -amiinassa);
Sp 334,2 (ta111 nava111 eva111 -antiJ11 ... neti, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se -antaJ11); Dhp-a I 319,7 (-ante -ante ka1e); -
gacchantanarp in Ee, Se at Sp 1262,13 is perhaps wr for
bhattiinaJ11 (Be, Ce so); neg. agacchanta,
mfiagacchanti)n., Ja III 345,7·; Vism 635,2 (mayi
agacchante); Sp 1061,25 (agacchantana111 dukkataJ11);
Cp-a 135,32 (agacchantiJ11); (e) gacchamiina, mfn., S IV
3 gacchati
97,2s (cittaJ11 ... -amiinarp); Ja IV 3,3 (ta ... -amana);
4 71 ,27* (khattiyo ca isiJ11 disva -amiinaJ11 vihayasarp);
V 165,22* (val)ijja ranhadhipa -amiino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
val)ijja; 167,18·: viil)ijjakammarp karissami ti -anto);
Ap 381,8 (vanagge -amiinassa disva ra111siJ11 mahesino );
Vism417,2o (madhurodakarp parikkhayaJ11 -amiinaJ11);
- neg. agacchamiina, mfn., Sp 943,4 (sanketaJ11 katva
agacchamiina purisiinarp anto sokarp paveseti ti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee agacchamanam);- see also agacchamiinaka;
- pr. 3 sg. gamati, goes; Ap 566,4 (vi1apanti gamam'
ahaJ11); Nidd-a II 31,27 (na bhaveyya ti abhavarp
gameyya); Sadd 462,1o (gamu ... gatiya111: gacchati
gamati ghammati); 464,9 (gamati gamanti gamatu
gamantu gameyya gameyyuJ11 sesa111 sabba111
vittharetabbarp); - fut. 3 sg. (a) gamissati, Thi 130
(peto manussarüpena sa111saranto gamissati); Ja VI
348,26 (ko niima evarüparp itthi111 pahaya gamissati ti);
Sadd 828,4 (-issati gamissati); (b) gacchissati, V in IV
228,1 (kathaJ11 hi niima ... bhikkhuni eka gamantararp
2
-issati); Sadd 463,2sfoll.; (e) gacchati , Ja V 302,12*
(gayha dhailko -ati yenakama111; 303,9·: khadanto
yenakiimarp -issati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ati); - 2 sg.
(a) gamissasi, D 11 343,18 (kuhiJ11 gamissasi ti amukarp
niimajanapadan ti); M II 71,4 (tvarp pana yathiikammarp
gamissasi ti); Th 359 (viriyadhuraniggahito na-y-ito
düra111 gamissase citta); Thl 379 (jara111 gamissasi);
(b) gañchasi, gañchisi [<*gam-t-syasi], Sn 665 (gañchisi
kho papatarp cirarattarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -asi); Ja V
183,27* (na hi gañchisi no akamiinarp, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
-asi); 304,14* (sajja lohitasañchanna gañchisi
YamasadanaJ11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -asi); VI 62,11* (yena
gañchisi duggatiJ11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -asi); (e) gacchasi,
gacchisi, A IV 301,17 (yena yen' eva -asi ... yattha
yattha !hassasi ... , Ce, Ee so; Be gagghasi; Se tagghasi;
Mp IV 142,23: -as! ti gamissasi, Ce, Ee so; Be gagghasi
ti; Se tagghasi ti); Th 356 (tva111 olaggo na -isi
dviiravivaraJ11 gajo va alabhanto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -asi;
Th-a 11 151,24: na diini yatharuci111 gamissasi); Thi 302
(puttasoka na -asi); Ja VI 543,16* (ekarattiJ11 vasitvana
pato -asi brahmal)a; 543,25·: gamissasi ti); - 1 sg.
(a) gamissiimi, gamissaJ11, Vin I 346,23 (tena hi bha!)e
miil)avaka rathaJ11 yojehi migava111 gamissiimi ti);
Vv 24:15 (ito cuta gamissami manussiinaJ11 sahavyataJ11);
Th 538 (handa eko gamissami araññarp); Ja II 257,3* (so
'haJ11 tattha gamissami yattha gantva na sacare);
IV 471,14* (vehasaya111 gamissan ti); V 26,22*
(sacciinurakkhi pun' aham gamissaJ11); VI 496,4*
(subhara te gamissami, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se bhavissiimi);
Ap 195,8 (karp su niima aharp yoni111 gamissiimi ito
cuto); Mil48,17 (sve gahetva gam1ssam1 ti);
(b) gacchissami, gacchissarp, gañchissaJ11, V in I 294,1
(ni!!harp ettha -issami); Vv 63:21 (ahaJ11 pi danhuJ11
-issa111 jinarp appa!ipuggalarp); Th 95 (sayamiino pi
-issa111 na sahayena papen a); Bv 2:22 (imarp kayaJ11 ...
chac.h:_layitviina -issa111); Ap 577,17 (ahaJ11 pi tattha
-issa111 pasuto yattha me pati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gañchissaJ11); (e) gacchiimi, gaccharp, (or pr. for fut., see
above) Mili 171,31 (tarp gatiJ11 pecca -iimi ti)= All
174,23; Th 150 (janarp ohaya -a111 ta111 he!hayitva bahu111
jana111; Th-a II 26,31: anupadduta111 !hanarp -eyyarp
gacchati
papu!).eyyan ti attho); Thi 306 (tassaha~ santike -~so
me sattha bhavissati); 426 (apucchituna -a~ marituye
pabbajiss~ va); Ja I 174,10* (aññ~ sepa!).!).i~ -ami na
me te ruccate pha1a~; 174,15': ti!!ha tva~ aha~ aññattha
gamissaml ti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -issaml ti); VI 21,25*
(-a~ puttanivedako; 22,3': -an ti gamissami); 507,31*
(-a~ yeva rathesabha; 509,3-: gamissami yeva); -
3 pL (a) gamissanti, S I 52,5* (te hi sotthi~ gamissanti);
Ja II 130,7• (vyasanan te gamissanti; 130,w: te
mahavinas~ papu!).issantl ti); (b) gacchissanti, A III
443,13 (nibbanapo!).a~ ca me manasa~ bhavissati
s~yojana ca me pahan~ -issanti paramena ca
samaññena samannagato bhavissaml ti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
gacchanti); (e) gacchanti, A III 443,13 (sa~yojana ca me
pahan~ -anti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -issanti); Ja VI 516,20*
(516,23': -antl ti gamissanti); - 2 pl, (a) gamissatha,
Ja V 191,27-; (b) gacchittha, gañchittha, Ja V 191,21*
(atha gañchittha devapur~. Ce, Se so; Ee dev~
pur~; Be agacchittha devapur~; L. Alsdorf, 1967,
p. 278: atha -ittha devapur~; 191,2r: gañchittha ti
gamissatha, Ce, Se so; Ee gacchittha ti; Be agacchittha
ti); - 1 pl. (a) gamissama, V in I 191 ,3o (ehi bhante
gamissama ti); D II 350,15 (ubho siil).asuttabhar~ adaya
gamissama ti); Ap 530,18 (saha yeva gamissama
nibbana~ puram uttama~); (b) gacchamase, Ja V 78,11*
(o haya -amase sabbakame; 79,1o' foll.: dibba-annadayo
sabbakame ajja maya~ ohaya chac;Ic;Ietva gamissama);
200,21* (ubho va -amase assam~ t~; 200,2rfoll.:
mam~ pitu arocetva ubho va gamissama); -
periphrastic future ganta, see sv ganta(r); - cond. 3 sg.
(a) agamissa, It 36,10 (ime ce . . . dve sukka dhamma
lo k~ na paleyyu~ . __ sambheda~ loko agamissa);
Sp 707,27 (yadi ariyasavako nabhavissa aññathatt~ pi
agamissa); Sadd 828,4 (agamissa); (b) agacchissa,
Sadd 828,4; - see also Sadd 463,32foll.; - 2 sg.
(a) gacchissa, ? Ja VI 543,20* (nanamU!apha1aki!).!).e -iss'
adaya brahma!).a, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gaccha tv adaya;
543,29': -issa ti gamissasl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se omit;
cfT. Oberlies, 2001, p. 248 fn 3); (b) agacchisse,
Sadd 463,32 (tv~ agacchisse); 1 sg. (a) agaccha~.
Th 1098 (kada nu kho ya~ vidita~ mahesina ...
agaccha~ paññaya t~; Th-a III 152,19: agacch~
pa!ivijjhissa~ adhigamissan ti attho); (b) agamiss~.
Spk III 39,6 (sace aha~ pi agamiss~ mayhaq¡ p' esa
sampatti abhavissa); - aor. 3 sg. (a) agama, Sn 408
(agama Rajagah~ buddho); Pv 38:44; Ja IV 438,14*;
Ap 536,1; Mhv 5:42; Sadd 828,3; (b) agamasi, Vin I
270,3o; M II 156,18; Th 490; Ja III 226,23*; Nidd I 418,2o
(Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr aggamasi); Mhv 4:44; Sadd 840,29;
(e) agam1, gaml, Thi 399 (agaml); Ap 536,3 (gaml, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se kaml); Sadd 828,4 (agami); (d) agacchi,
agañchi, Ja IV 384,21* (agacchi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
agañchi); Ap 536,2 (agañchi); Vv-a 307,18 (tena agama
agacchi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se agañchi); Sadd 828,3
(agacchi); (e) gacchi, gañchi, Thi 129 (ayacito tato
gacchi, Ee, Se so, prob. wr; Be, Ce tat' agacchi); Ja V
255,19* (dipa~ so najjhaga gacchi agati yattha
pakkhinaq¡ so ca tatth' eva papattha, so read ? Be so
najjhagagañchi; Ee so na ajjhagacchi; Ce, Se so na
ajjhagañchi; 256,23' foil.: attano pati!!hanaq¡ na ajjhaga
4 gacchati
nagañchl ti attho, Be so; Ee na ajjhagacchl ti adhigañchl
ti attho; Ce na ajjhagañchi nadhigañchl ti attho; Se na
ajjhagañchi nadhigacchl ti attho); Sadd 840,27 (gañchi);
(f) agaccha, agañcha, Sadd 828,3 (agaccha); 840,27
(agañcha); - 2 sg. (a) agama, Vv 53:14; Ja VI 314,9•;
(b) agamasi, M II 90,11 (ma kho ma~ tva~ maharaja
saral).aq¡ agamasi); 154,21 (pub be kho tva~ . __ jati~
agamasi); 170,25 (saddh~ agamasi); Pv 20:6; (e) gami,
Th! 163; Ja III 255,2o*; IV 2,17 (ma gaml ti); VI 506,21*;
Ap 540,1; - 1 sg. (a) agama~, MI 176,4; Th 258;
(b) agamasi~. DI 91,13; Ap 274,5; (e) agami~.
Ap 483,8; Nidd-a II 116,11 (anukkamena samatha-
vipassanaparipuri~ agami~. Be, Se so; Ee agami~; Ce
samathavipassana paripuri~ agam~su); (d) agacchi~.
agañchi~. DI 81,31 (agacchi~. Be, Ce so; Se agañch~;
Ee wr agañci~) =f. M I 278,24 (Be so; Ce, Se agañchi~;
Ee agañchi~); JaiV 331,8* (Be, Se agacchi~; Ce, Ee
agañchi~); Ap 4,22 (Be agacch' aha~; Ce, Ee, Se
agañch' aha~); 332,12 (Ee agacch' aha~; Be, Ce, Se
agañch' aha~); Bv 6:10 (Saral).a~ tass' agacch' aha~,
Ee so; Ce tassa gacch' aha~; Be, Se tassa gañch' ahaq¡);
Cp 2:2:1 (deva1okaq¡ agacch' aha~, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
agañch' aha~); (e) gacchi~. gañchi~, Vv 50:9 (Ce, Ee
gacchi~; Be agañchi~; Se agacchi~); Ap 20,19 (Be, Ce,
Ee gacchi~; Se gañchi~); 149,3 (Be gacchi~; Ce, Ee, Se
gañchi~); 524,25 (Ce, Ee gacchi~; Be, Se gacchaq¡);
(f) agacchis~, Th 258 (samsaram hi niray~
agacchis~. Ee, Se so; Be agacchiss~; Ce
agañchissa~; Th-a II 106,33 foiL ussadaniraya~ ca
pa!isandhivasena upagañchi~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
upagacchi~); - 3 pl. (a) agama~su, Vin I 353,16;
III 63,18; S V 274,15; Vv 80:6; Ja V 54,14*; Vism 144,3;
Sadd 840,31; (b) agami~su, gami~su, S V 274,18 (akase
pi pallaii.kena agami~su seyyatha pi pakkhi sakU!).O, Ee
so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se kami~su); Ja II 80,5 (Be, Ce
so; Se agama~su; Ee wr agami~su); 416,23; IV 166,6'
(khemena gami~su); Mp II 268,25 (gami~su e' eva
agami~su ca ti); (e) agamu~. Sn 290; Ap 156,2o
(agamu~ buddhasantikaq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
agam~su); Cp 1:9:40; Mhv 4:36; (d) gacchi~su, V in V
29,15; Ja II 427,10; (e) agañchi~su, Sadd 840,28;
(f) gañchlsu, Ap 563,18 (E e so, prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
gacchi~su); (g) gacchu~. gañchu~, Ap 577,20
(gacchum ovadaq¡, Be, Ce so; Se gañchum; Ee gañchu);
- 2 pl. (a) agamittha, gamittha, V in I 42,25 (ma
agamittha, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se gamittha); S I 105,29 (ma
ekena dve agamittha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr agamettha);
Ja I 263,21 (ma gamittha); Dhp-a II 194,11 (tumhe , ..
agamittha ti); (b) gamuttha, Sadd 841,1;
1 pl. (a) agamamha, Vin III 16,7 =f. M II 62,28; Cp-a 88,21;
(b) agamimha, agamimhase, Pv 15:10 (agamimhase);
Th-a III 51,16 (t~ saral).a~ agamimha); Dhp-a IV 116,1o
(agamimha); (e) agamhase, Ap 243,9 (devatta~ ca
agamhase); 473,6; (d) gamimha, Dhp-a I 18,16
(may~ --· cirena gamimha ti); (e) gamumha,
Sadd 841,1; - see also Sadd 463,14foll.; - perf
3 sg. jagama [see O. van Hinüber, 1982a, p. 30], V in III
147,22* (adassana~ yeva tada jagama, so read? eds
tadajjhagama) = Ja II 285,23' (eds tadajjhagama); Sn 379
(so pi taya mantayitva jagama, so read ? eds
gacchati
mantayitvajjhagama); - inf (a) gantuf!l, Vin II 201,3o
(diiteyyaf!1 gantuf!l arahati); D III 133,21 (abhabbo
khinasavo bhikkhu chandagatiJ:!l gantuf!1); Sn 672; Ja VI
507,16* (tattha kirp. gantum icchasi); Ap 269,11;
Sadd 856,22;- neg. aganturp., Vism 77,6 (ekadivasaJ:!l pi
susanarp. aganturp. na vagati); (b) gamiturp., Sadd 465,5;
856,22; (e) gantave, Thi 332 (icche Savatthirp. gantave);
Ja IV 221,26* (dukkho vaso araññasmirp. raghaJ:!l icchami
gantave);- absol. (a) gantva, Vin I 47,13 (upajjhayassa
pighito pittilito gantva); M II 113,11 (nagena gantva);
A V 81 ,26 (raja ... aññatararp. itthirp. gantva na sarati, sa
tena gabbhaJ:!l gaJ!hati); Sn 79 (yattha gantva na socati);
Thi 93 (kilesanaJ:!l vasarp. gantva); Ja V 194,29* (phltaJ:!l
janapadarp. gantva); Ap 23,4 (paññaya paramirp. gantva);
Bv 20:6 (te pi dhammavaraJ:!l gantva; Bv-a 239,4: gantva
ti tassa dhammarp. ñatva); Sadd 465,5; - neg. agantva,
Ja IV 162,17 (tumhe aññattha agantva idh' eva vasatha
ti); Vism 94,1; Ps III 276,21; - (b) gantvana, Sn 998
(khippaf!1 gantvana Savatthirp.); Vv 52:19 (ko devalokato
manussalokaJ:!l gantvana); Thi 437 (tass' etaJ:!l
kammaphalaJ:!l yatha pi gantvana paradaraJ:!l); Ja V
251 ,13* (uyyanabhiimirp. gantvana); Ap 580,17 (gharaJ:!l
ekena vatthena gantvan' etarp. mam abravi); Sadd 465,5;
856,25; neg. agantvana, Ap 102,17 (vinipiitaJ:!l
agantvana manussattaf!1 gamissati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
agantvana); - agantvana in Ee at Ap 95,6 is wr for
agantvana (Be, Ce, Se so); (e) gamitva, Sadd 465,5; -
gamitva in Ee, Se at Nidd I 19,3o (vyantikaritva
anabhavaJ:!l gamitva) = 107,3o is prob. wr for gametva
(Be, Ce so); (d) gamitvana, Ap 464,12 (HimavantaJ:!l
gamitvana); 501,n; Sadd465,5; (e)gamya, JaV 31,8•
(matu ca hetii paraloka gamya, Ee so; Ce, Se gamya; Be
gantva; 31 ,11' foll.: matu va hetu paralokaJ:!l gantva); -
see also Sadd 465,6 (gamiya gamiyana gamma); 856,25
(gantiina); - pass. 3 sg. gamyati, gammati, gamlyati
[S. gamyate], is understood; is meant; Sadd 465,1
(gammamanaJ:!l gamlyamanarp.); 465,4 (gammati
gamlyati); 724,28 (tasmil!l niddharaJ!e gammamane );
725,8 (anadaramhi ca gamyamane); 866,31
(tabbhavakiriyayarp. gamyamanayarp.); 867,18 (akkose
gamyamane); - pp gata, mfn. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.)
(i) gone; gone to; who has gone; Vin I 16,38 (upasakaJ'!l
maJ:!l bhagava dharetu . . . saraJ!aJ:!l -an ti); II 171,8
(papikanaJ:!l icchanarp. vasarp. -a); D II 255,3* (ye keci
buddhaJ:!l saraJ:_J.af!1 -ase) quoted Sadd 842,8; MI 487,25
(so aggi ito katamaJ:!l disarp. -o); Vv 53:20 (sugatirp.
e' arnhi -o); Pv 12:2 (tasma etaJ:!l na rodami -o so tassa
ya gati); Th 205 (kass' indriyani samathaJ:!l -ani);
Thl 128 (maggaJ:!l ca kho 'ssa janasi agatassa -assa va);
Ja V 200,19* (pita mamaJ:!l miilapha1esanaf!1 -o); Nidd I
20,15 (yo pi pararp. -o so paragii); Ap 507,4 (tato cuto -o
saggarp.); Dhp-a IV 118,9 (idani 'ssa ñ1ii)af!1 paripakaJ:!l
-an ti); - (ii) gone along; travelled; D III 255,23
(bhikkhuna maggo -o hoti); - very frequently ifc in
meanings: gone to, arrived at; being in, contained in;
fallen into (a state or condition), under the influence of;
connected with, belonging to; - see atthagata,
atthaligata, addha- (sv addha[n]), adho-, anabhava-il.-,
2 pana haraJ!apaccaharaJ!asaiikhataJ:!l --paccagatavattaf!1
abhidosa- (sv abhidosaJ:!l), akasa- (sv akasa ), apatha-,
ukkaJ:!lsa-, evarp.-, kaya-, kala- (sv kala\ khara-
S gacchati
(sv khara\ khari- (sv khara\ gati-, giitha-, taJ!ha-,
tamo- (sv tama[s)), thama-, divali- (sv diva), disali-
(sv disa), vaiika-; - 2. (n.) going; motion; DI 70,31 (-e
~ite nisinne sutte jagarite bhasite tuJ:_J.hibhave
sampajanakari hoti; Sv 202,12: -e ti gamane); Ja I 300,21
(thlnarp. bhavo durajano macchassevodake -arp.);
V 448,27* (-en' eta palobhenti pekkhitena mihitena ca);
Sp 116,33 (sobhanagamanatta ... sugato, gamanaJ:!l pi hi
-an ti vuccati, tarp. ca bhagavato sobhanaJ:!l); Mp IV 16,1
(kirp. rañño tattha -ena ti); Sadd 875,25; - ifc,
1
apparently pleonastic, se e agha- (svv agha , agha\
iccha-, giitha-, taJ:_J.ha-, tama- (sv tama[s)), dit~i-, pañña-,
mutta- (sv mutta2); - see also duggata, sugata; -
1
-'-atta, mfn. [gatatta , gata + atta(n)], whose self has
gane (to the highest point);? ofperfected self;? DI 57,32
(niga1,1tho -'-atto ca yatatto ca thitatto ca ti; Sv 168,7:
-'-atto ti kotippattacitto ); - -' -addha, mfn. [from gata +
addha(n)), who has accomplished a joumey, followed
the road; who has finished the journey of sarp.sara;
Nidd I 20,33 (so vughavaso ciJ:_J.J:_J.aCaraJ!o -'-addho gata-
diso gatakotiko palitabrahmacariyo; Nidd-a I 85,3foll.:
SaJ:!lsaraddhanaJ:!l atikkanto ); - -' -addhi(n), mfn., who
has accomplished a joumey; who has finished the
joumey of sarp.sara; Dhp 90 (-' -addhino visokassa
vippamuttassa sabbadhi; Dhp-a II 166,1 foll.: - '-addhino
ti gatamaggassa . . . kantarapatipanno yava icchita-
ghiinaJ:!l na papuJ:_J.ati tava addhiko eva, tasmirp. pana
patte - '-addhi nama hoti, vagasannissita pi satta yava
vage vasanti tava addhika eva ... van~ pana khepetva
thito kh!J:_J.asavo - '-addhi nama hoti, Ee so; Be, Ce
gataddhi nama hoti; Se gataddha nama hoti); -
-'-agata, n., going and coming; going and retum; MI
340,27 (CampaJ:!l -' -agataJ:!l karissati; Ps III 7,13foll.:
assamaJ:_J.<;Ialato yava Campanagaradvara gamanarp. ca
agamanarp. ca karissati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee Campaya
nagaradvaragamanaJ:!l ca); - -' -ayu, mfn., whose vital
power or lije is gone; Ap 478,17 (-'-ayusaf!1 gataklesaJ:!l,
Ce, E e so; Be, Se -' -ayurp. sukkhakilesarp.); -
--kotika, mfn., who or which has reached the end or
highest point; Nidd I 20,33 (so vughavaso ... --kotiko
palitabrahmacariyo; Nidd-a I 85,5 foil.: anupadisesa-
nibbanakotirp. gato hutva thito ); Pp-a 187,23 (--kotike hi
kale kappavinaso nama hoti); - --tta, n., abstr.
[gatatta2], the fact of having gone; Sp 116,32foll.
(sundaraJ:!l thanaJ:!l --tta samma --tta samma ca gadatta
sugato); Pj I 183,2o (sut~u --tta sughu eva ca gadatta
sugato); - --paccagata, --patiyagata, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) going and retuming; gone and come back;
Vin III 74,25 (--paccagatena diitena); Sp 570,6
(--paccagatamaggo); - 2. (n.) (scil. civara), (a robe)
gone and retumed; Vin V 129,16 (pañca paf!1sukiilani
gokhayitarp. ... --patiyagataJ:!l); Vism 63,8 (--paccagatan
ti yarp. manussa susanarp. gantva paccagata nahatva
cha<;l<;lenti); Sv 1010,19 (--paccagatan ti matakasarlraJ:!l
parupitva susanarp. netva anitacivararp.);
--paccagatavatta, n., the going and returning observance
(going for alms and retuming without losing
concentration on the kammatthana); Sv 191,28 (imarp.
piirento, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se --paccagatikavattaJ:!l) =
gacchati
Vibh-a 354,s; Pj II 52,15foll.; - --paccagatika, mfn.,
one who ful.fils the going and retuming observance;
Vism 442,21 (--paccagatikabha vena); Sv 189,15
(--paccagatikavattr up piirento, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
--paccagatavattarp.); - --pubba, mfn. [gata + pubba2],
l. (pass.) previously gane to, previously visited; A II
117,10 (disrup peseti yadi va --pubbarp. yadi va
agatapubbrup); Nidd I 471,16; - 2. (act.) (who has)
previously gane, previously visited; Ja I 386,8 (aharp.
kada tava santikarp. --pubba tvarp. va mama santikarp.
agatapubbo); Sv 368,16; - --satta, mfn. [gata + satta3],
l.lifeless, dead; Pv 8:1 (khada khada ti lapasi --sattrup
jaraggavarp.; Pv-a 40,2: --sattan ti vigatajivitarp.) = Ja III
156,II*; - 2. a being who has gane (to); Pp-a 217,4
(saggrup --sattanrup pamaJ?.rup natthi); - --singa, mfn.
[gata+ siilga2 ?], with the young gane;? Ja V 92,21* (sa
ca assamarp. agañchi pamutta purisadaka ni)rup
phalinasakui).I va --siilgarp. va alayrup, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
pa)inrup sakuJ?.I va; 93,4· foll.: yatha sakul).ika
mukhatuJ?.9akena gocarrup gahetva kenaci upaddavena
sakul).apotakanarp. phalinatta pha1inasakuJ?.I ni)arp.
agaccheyya yatha va --siilgan ti nikkhantavacchakarp.
a1ayrup suññrup vacchakasa1arp. vacchagiddhini dhenu
agaccheyya evrup suññrup assamarp. agañchi ti attho, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be ... pajinatta pa)inarp. sakuJ?.ini)arp. ... ); -
neg. pp. agata, mfn., l. who has not gane; Ja I 290,5
(pariyesitva purisantararp. agatarp. ekrup matugamarp.);
V 341,9· (aharp. ito gato pi agato pi maral).ato amutto va);
- 2. not (yet) gane to, unvisited; or where there is no
going, no going on (ie a2 + gati); Dhp 323 (na hi etehi
yanehi gaccheyya agatrup disrup; Dhp-a IV 6,9:
agatapubbatta agatan ti sailkhatrup nibbanadisarp.);
Sn 960 (kati parissaya 1oke gacchato agatarp. disrup, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee amatrup; Nidd I 471,14: agata disa vuccati
amatrup nibbanrup. Be. Ce so: Ee. Se agatadisa; Pj II
572.1:-: agatrup disan ti nibbanarp.. trup hi agatapubbatta
~ tatha niddisitabbaro disa ca ti. Be. Se so: Ce. Ee
~ disan ti tam hi amatan ti tatha ... ~: -
lÍ'P 1 a 1 pnlabba. m_m. and n. impen .. l. 1Tnfn. 1 li ~ to be
~~ ro: w be annined: V in I 13-k:" m o ... sabhikkhuka
aya_;;¡¡ abhil.:.ldluko a\ aso -ül: II 263.36 ma bhikkhaw
bhi};j¡j¡uniya ovado na -o1: Kv 622.!~ lparadaro -o):
Spk I -B.:3 1ayam lokuttaradhammo yena yena attana
adhigato va hoti tena tena parasaddhaya --taiiJ hitva
paccavekkhanañiil).ena sayarp. datt}labbo ti);
neg. agantabba, mfn., Vism 683,29 (ariyehi agantabbatta
agati ti vuccati);- (ii) to be travelled; to be gane along;
D III 255,!9 (bhikkhuna maggo -o hoti); Vism 132,19;-
2. (n. impers.) one must go; Vin II 108,3 (na bhikkhave
naccarp. va gitrup va vaditarp. va dassanaya -arp.); D II
124,12 (nittharp. ettha -arp.); Ja IV 97,11* (na brahmaJ?.e
addhike tighamane -arp.);- (b) gamaniya\ mfn., 1. to
be gane to; to be reached; attainable; D II 246,!4 (-o
samparayo; Sv 669,10: paraloko pana avassarp. gantabbo
va) f- SI 108,29; Pjl 18,28 (buddhassa --ttarp.); 18,31
(buddho yev' ettha -o); 223,17 (-a pana te te gativisesa);
Sv 669,16 (samparayassa ca avassarp. --ta);
neg. agamaniya, mfn., not to be gane to; forbidden;
Spk II 145,23 (agamaniyatthanrup nama purisanam); Pj I
223,16 (bhoganrup agamanlyato);- 2. to be gane along,
6 gaja
to be travelled; Sp 1101,23 (ekadivasena -e magge);-
see also adayagamaniya, pahayagamaniya;
(e) gamma 1, mfn., to be gane to; to be reached,
attainable; Abh 745 (pattabbarp. gammarp. asajjrup);
Sadd 848,! (gamanlyrup gammarp.); (d) gamiya, mfn., to
be gane;- ifc see adayagamiya; (e) gamitabba, mfn., to
be gane to; Sadd 856,22 (gantabbrup gamitabbam); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) gameti, -ayati, gameti, gamayati,
l. causes to go (to); sends; Vin II 292,1 (sabbe v' ime
samal).a Sakyaputtiya yoniso upanenti na ku1avarp. -enti
ti); M III 166,20 (tattarp. ayokhllarp. hatthe -enti) =
Kv 597,12; A I 254,14 (vyantikaroti anabhavarp. -eti);
Sn 390 (cittrup hi te tattha -enti diire); Ja VI 244,24*
(ahrup tarp. nissrupsayatarp. -emi); Nidd I 434,23
(anabhavrup -essasi ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gamissasi ti,
prob. wr); Sp 874,34 (sasanarp. vuddhirp. virii)hirp.
vepullarp. -ayissanti); Sv 811,26 (va99heyyan ti vuddhirp.
-eyyrup); Ps II I00,2I (abhavarp. -essami ti); Spk I 18,2
(ayarp. hi . . . satte adho -eti); 23,25 (rattiyo ...
puggalrup .. . tarayanti sigharp. sigharp. -ayanti); Pj I
249,II (vepullrup -aye); Sadd 462,16 (gamati ti gacchati,
karite Devadattrup -eti -ayati ti riipani bhavanti);
830,! foll. (gameti -eti gamayati -ayati); - part.pr.
(a) gamenta, gamenta, mfn., Spk I 336,11 (yakkho
kumararp. saral).arp. -ento, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gamento) =
Pj II 239,24; (b) gamayamana, mfn., Ps II 167,28;- aor.
3 sg. gamesi, Ja III 233,16; Vis m 399,21; - absol.
(a) gametva, Ja I 417,5 (narp. sa attano vasarp. -etva);
Nidd I 19,30 (vyantikaritva anabhavarp. -etva, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se gamitva, prob. wr); 490,II; (b) gamayitva,
Sp 429,n;- pp gamita 1, mfn. [ts], caused to go; Ja III
233,18 (caJ?.9alen' asi padantarena -ito ti); Spk II 382,14
(jatimaraJ?.anrup parrup nibbanrup gamita hotha, Ee so,
perhaps non-caus.; Be, Se gamaka; Ce gamal).aka); Pj II
201,4 (vaslkata ti vasarp. -ita); fpp
(a) gametabba, mfn., Nidd-a II 46,I; (b) gamayitabba,
mfn., Nidd-a II 58,28; - 2. goes, goes to;
pp gamita2 , mfn., gane; Spk II 382,14 (jatimaraJ?.anrup
parrup nibbanarp. gamita hotha, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be,
Se gamaka; Ce gamal).aka); - see also atthailgameti; -
caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) gaccheti, gacchayati, Sadd 465,3; -
(e) gacchapeti, gacchapayati, Sadd 465,3; - see also
gagghati, ghammati.
gaeehati2, fut. 3 sg., see sv gacchati 1.
gaeehana, n. [from gacchati], going; - agaeehana, n.,
not going; Mp III 78,17 (nagan ti chandadihi -ato
pahinakilese puna anagacchanato) ;- --dhamma, mfn.,
not liable to go; Pj II 530,21 (chandadivasena
--dhammo hutva) =Nidd-a I 241,22.
gaja, m. [ts ], an elephant; Abh 360; V in V 3,12* (-o va
duppadhrupsiyo); Th 1139 (viriyena tarp. mayha vas'
anayissarp. -arp. va mattarp. kusalailkusaggaho ); Ja IV
494,17* (matta -a bhinnagaja pabhinna); V 41,21*
(chabbisiil).arp. -arp. setarp. addasrup supine ahrup);
VI 147,9* (idam assa hatthiratanarp. Eravai).O -o); Ap 68,8
(-o yiitha va nissato ); Cp 1:3:5 (brahmaJ?.anarp. adrup
-rup); Mil 346,15* (maha eso -o iti); - ifc see disa-; -
o• -aggamegha, m., a thundercloud which is an excellent
elephant;? Ja II 217,8* (-ehi hayaggamalihi ...
parivarita Takkasi1a; 217 ,16': -ehi ti aggagajameghehi
gajakattharaf}a
koñcanadaJ'!l gaJJita¡p gajjantehi mattavaravarai_la-
valahakehl ti attho);- -'-attharal}a, n., a covering for
an elephant; Vv-a 104,13 (in cpd, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -gaja-
1
kattharai_la-, prob. wr); - 0
-kumbha , m. [gaja +
2
kumbha ], the frontal lobe on the forehead of an
elephant; Ps Ili 20,s (rattakambalena -al!l
pariyonaddhanto vi ya) t Ud-a 411,11; - --tii,f, a herd
of elephants; Abh 362.
gajakattharal}a in Ce, Ee in cpd at Vv-a 104,13 is prob.
H·r for gajattharal).a (Be, Se so).
gajakumbha\ m., see sv gaja.
gajakumbha 2 , m., a snail; ? a tortoise; ? a chameleon; ?
Ja III 140,12 (-o nam' esa ... alasiyo, evariipo hi sakala-
divasa¡p gacchanto pi ekailguladvailgulamattam eva
gacchatl ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be rajakumbho; cf 140,18*:
katha¡p karosi pacalaka eva¡p dandhaparakkamo); 140,22
1-o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be rajakumbho ); VI 538,24' (pacalaka
ti -miga).
8
gajati, gajeti, gajayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gajati,
gajayati, Wg §§ 7:72 (gaja gaji ... sabdarthiil,J. ... gaja
madane ca); 32:105], sounds; roars; Sadd 345,27
1gaja ... gajja saddattha: -ati); 530,2o (gaja maddana-
saddesu: -eti -ayati gajo; maddana- perhaps wr).
gajja, n. [S. gadya], prose; elaborate prose composition;
Sadd 610,4* foil. (-a¡p pajjaJ'!l ca geyya¡p ca ... Yal!l
CUI).l).Íyeh' eva padehi-m-abhisailkhata¡p veyyakaral).a-
sai!khata¡p tal!l -an ti pavuccati).
gajjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. garjati], emits a deep sound; roars;
thunders; asserts strongly or loudly; shouts; blusters;
Dhatup 76 (gajja sadde); Dhiitum 90 (gajja saddane);
Th 522 (yada nabhe -ati meghadundubhi); Ja IV 432,31 *
1matto thullani -asi; 433,2·: mahagajjitani -asi, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se tajjasi); Ap 45,1 (bhikkhusailghe nislditva
eval!l -ati Gotamo Upalissa samo natthi vinaye
khandhakesu ca); 304,10 (-assu); Sp 64,24 (megha -anti);
-1-+8,24 (imassa balenayaJ'!l -ati, Be so; Ce, Ee gacchati;
Se tajjati); Sv 395,26 (app eva nama siya ti ettha pana
pa~amavacanena bhagava -ati dutiyena anugajjati, Re,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr gacchati ... anugacchati); Spk I 68,12
1rumhe Kapilavatthuvasike gahetva -atha, Be, Ce so; E e
gacchatha; Se tajjetha); Sadd 345,28 (gaja . . . gajja
saddattha: gaJatl . . . gajo -ati megho -ati);
part.pr. (a) gajja(t), mfn., Ja II 217,15*; Ap 28,15 (sabbe
miga uttasanti migarajassa -ato); 42,15
1Padumuttarabuddhassa dhammameghena -ato);
lb) gajjanta, mf(-anti)n., Ja II 217,17' (gajjital!l -antehi
mattavaravarai_lava1akeh1 ti); IV 81,27 (CanuraMughika
yuddhamai_l<,lala¡p agantva vagganta -anta apporhenta
\Ícari¡psu); Nidd I 172,3 (-anto uggajjanto abhigajjanto
eti); Spk I 166,2o (thanayan ti -anto); 227,23 (Dhanañjanl
gajjital!l nama -antl pañca gathasatani abhasi, Be, Ce, Ee
5o: Se tajjita¡p nama tajjenti); - neg. agajjanta, mfn.,
Th-a II 139,16; (e) gajjamana, mfn., Ja VI 486,13 (aya¡p
pa~avl mattavaravaral).o viya -amana pakampi, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se tajjamana); Ap 42,12; Mp III 147,22; - aor.
3 sg. (a) gajji, Ap 370,3o (migaraja ... -i so asan! vi ya,
Be. Ce, Se so; Ee medinl viya); Spk III 254,2 (devo
sukkhagajjita¡p -i); (b) gajjittha, Darh 5:29 (vasumatl ...
-ittha sadhuvacanaJ'!l va samuggirantl); 2 sg. gajji, Ja II
-112,2 (ma tval!l ettakena -i); 3 pl. gajji¡psu, Ap 500,25
7
(-i¡psu ca payodhara); Ud-a 149,25 (assa hasi¡psu viiral).a
-i¡psu); - absol. gajjitva, Ja IV 25,7 (parhamam eva
-itva idani kodhen' eva thaddho hutva maya saddhi¡p na
sallapatl ti); Sv 569,29; - pp gajjita, mfn., m. and n.
[S. garjita], l. (mfn.) roared; asserted; Ap 304,13 (-aJ'!l
kho taya deva miccha taJ'!l bahu -a¡p); Mil346,21*
(dhammarajena -a¡p); - 2. (m.) a roaring, furious
elephant; Abh 362 (-o); - 3. (n. and m.?) roaring;
thundering; strong assertion; Abh 49; S 1 100,21* (detha
detha ti bhasati ta¡p hi 'ssa -a¡p hoti devasseva
pavassato); Ja VI 452,3* (moghaJ'!l te -al!l raja,
bhinnamanto si khattiya); Vism 380,22 (sise pahara¡p
adasi yassa meghassa viya -o saddo ahosi, Ee, Se so; Be
gajjato; Ce gajjayato); Sv 449,25 (meghassa viya -o saro
maha hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gajjato ); Spk Ili 251,23
(buddhana¡p arrhane -al!l nama natthi); - ifc see inda-,
kari- (sv kari[n]); - --ghana, m., a thunderous cloud;
Samantak 521; - caus. part.pr. gajjenta, mfn., making
roar; making thunder; Ap 5,17 (nadento pabbata¡p se1aJ'!l
gajjento baha1aJ'!l giri¡p); - absol. gajjayitva (without
caus. sense ?), It 66,13* (yatha pi megho thanayitva
gajjayitva pavassati; It-a II 60,19: sakalanadlkandarani
ekaninnada¡p karonto gajjayitva).
gajjana, n. [S. garjana], roaring; thundering; Th-a III
0
154,19 (jalaghosatthanitena hetuna surrhu -Slla);
Sadd 376,1o (-al!l vassana¡p ca);- ifc se e megha-.
2
gajjamiinaka, mfn. [part.pr. of gajjati + ka ], roaring;
asserting strongly; Vism 312,33* (Visakho -o).
gajji(n), mfn. [from gajjati], roaring; crying; - ifc see
sugajji(n).
gajjita(r), m. [from gajjati], one who roars or thunders;
one who makes strong assertions; A II 102,6foll. (cattaro
'me ... valahaka ... -a no vassita vassita no -a n' eva-a
no vassita -a ca vas sita ca); 102,14 (katha¡p ca ...
puggalo -a hoti no vas sita . . . puggalo bhasita hoti no
katta) t Pp 42,35 foil.; Bv 1:58 (-a kalamegho va;
Bv-a 49,zo: gajjatl ti -a).
gañchasi, gañchisi,fut. 2 sg. ofgacchati qv.
gañchi, aor. 3 sg. of gacchati qv.
gapa, m. [ts], l. a multitude, a number; a group, a class, a
tribe; a company, an association (of persons sharing a
common purpose); esp. a company offoilowers attached
to a teacher; Abh 629; 1050; V in 1 42,22 (sabbe va tayo
imaJ'!l -al!l pariharissama ti); Ili 173,1o (pakkha¡p
pariyesati -a¡p bandhati); D II 30,17 (yannünahaJ'!l eko
-asma vüpakanho vihareyyan ti); MI 231,11 (imesal!l
pi .. . sai!ghiina¡p -ana¡p seyyathldaJ'!l VajjlnaJ'!l
Malliinal!l ... ); III 221,4 (sattha -a¡p anusasitu¡p arahatl
ti); Th 1051 (na -ena purakkhato care... -a¡p na
rocaye); Ja III 357,19* (-a¡p va parihare dhlro eko va pi
paribbaje); IV 450,11* (parivarita accharasa¡p -ena);
VI 313,1o* (taJ'!l [rhana¡p] nagakaññacarita¡p -ena;
313,19': carita¡p -ena ti tal!l nagakaññana¡p -ena
carita¡p); Nidd I 77,9 (satthara¡p gai_lhati
dhammakkhana¡p gai_lhati -a¡p gal).hati dighi¡p
gai_lhati ... ); Ap 317,17 (ete sabbe samagantva -al!l
bandhama ekato); Bv 5:8 (mahavlro ovad! titthiye -e);
Cp 2:4:3 (anapekkha kule -e; Cp-a 133,28: kule ti
upa!!hiikakule, -e ti tapasagai_le ); Mil 191 ,3 foil. (mahiya
-a vattanti ... tesa¡p tesal!l rahaSSaJ'!l tesu tes u -esu yeva
gal}a
carati avasesanaJ11 pihitaJ11); Vism 93,22 (tena -a111
pahaya yattha naJ11 na jananti tattha ekakena
caritabbarp); Sv 280,11 (pubbe nagarassa anto agar_1a bahi
nikkhamitva o -ta111 patta ti gar_1ibhuta, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-sampanna ti) -:f- Ps III 416,3 (eds -a sampanna ti); Ps IV
158,7 (-o ti nanajanasamodhanaJ11); Mp IV 15,21 (-ena
saddhirp yuddhaJ11 nama bhariyaJ11 eko pi moghappaharo
nama natthi); Ud-a 349,25 (dve puga ti dve -a);
Sadd 536,23 (eko dve ti adina gar_1etabbo ti -o);- ifc see
ariya-, ühaniyarüpa- (sv ühati), kako1a-, tara-, dhamma-
(sv dhamma 1), nekavassa- (sv neka), miga-, sakul]a-; -
2. a group within a Buddhist sarigha; an assemblage of
bhikkhus for carrying out formal acts, a quorum;
Abh 1050; Vin 1 58,33/oll. (bhikkhü duvaggena pi
tivaggena pi -en a upasampadenti . . . na bhikkhave
ünadasavaggen a -ena upasampadetab bo ); 197,31
(anujanami bhikkhave evarupesu paccantimesu
janapadesu vinayadharapa ñcamena -ena upasampadaJ11);
11 15,31 (sarigharp va -arp va puggalaJ11 va
nimantetukamo ); IV 216,11 (n' ev' attana pa~icodesi na
-assa arocesi ti); 283,28 (ya pana bhikkhuni -assa
civaralabhaJ11 antaraya111 kareyya ... ; 283,31: -o nama
bhikkhunisarigho vuccati); 316,17 (anapa1oketva
sarighaJ11 va -a111 va; 316,26: sarigho nama bhikkhuni-
sarigho vuccati -o nama sambahu1a bhikkhuniyo
vuccanti): Vism 93.24 (-o ti suttantikagar_1o va
abhidha.mmilagar;w val: Sp 339.29 ldighabhiil]akadi-
bbedas.sa pana -assa ekapuggalassa va¡: 81-L- (tehi -o
na pfuati gar_1apürako ca animantito tena -o bhijjati ti):
11-0..:: foil. 'üne -e ti ertha -o ti canaro va atireka va¡:
.\fu\· }4:8-:- 'bhikkbüninaJ11 -assa1: Sadd 536.1o 1-o ti
bhikkbusamü ho¡;- {te see abhidhammika -. suttantika-:
- 3. lgr.t.l.) a series of roms or words following the
same rule and called after the first word of the series;
Sadd 502,12* (Kaccayane vutto gahadinarp -o visurp);
518,17* (pavakkhami .. . curadikagaJ]aJ11 nama namato
aghamaJ11 -aJ11); - ifc see dhatu-, bhuvadi-; - gaJ]iinaJ11
in Ee at M III 1,16 is wr for gar_1akanarp (Be, Ce, Se so);
- see also ekagar_1ika (sv eka), tegar_1ika, digar_1ika
(sv dvi), bhuvadigar_1ika; 0
-m-aggena, ind., by
groups; ? Vin 1 117,24 (anujanami bhikkhave
tadahuposathe gar_1amaggena va gar_1eturp sa1akaJ11 va
gahetun ti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce namaggena; Se
namamattena); - o• -iiriima, mfn., finding pleasure in a
company; M III 110,17 (-o gar_1arato); A III 422,28/oll.
(-o gar_1arato --ta111 anuyutto; Mp III 410,17: suttantika-
ga!_ladisu pana gar_1esu attano va parisasarikhate gar_1e
ramati ti -o); Vism 107,11 (--ta);- 0 iivavassagga,m .,
see below; - 0 -0hiyana, gar_1amha-ohiyana, n., falling
behind the group, being left behind; Sp 275,13 (in long
cpd: ... -vippavasagar_1a-ohiyanapattihi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr -ohiyanapattihi); 1392,6 (in long cpd:
-nadiparaga!_lamha-ohiyana1akkha!_1ena, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
-gar_1hamha-; Se -gaJ]arnha-ohiyyana-); - ga!_lan-
gal}upiihanii (and 0
-il-ga!_la-upahana),f [cfBHS
gai_laguJ]a], sandal(s) with a so/e of severallayers; Vin 1
185,26 (na -a dharetabba, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
gul).arigul).üpahana; Sp 1083,22: tiguna ti tipa~ala, -a ti
catupatalato paghaya vuccati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
gul).arigul]-); 196,1 (app eva nama bhagava
8
AvantdakkhiJ]apathe -arp anujaneyya, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
guJ]ariguJ]üpahanaJ11); Ps III 411,15 (pata1iyo ti -a, Be so;
Se gal).ariga!_la-upahana; Ce a~aliyo ti gai).arigaJ]a-
upahana; E e a~aliyo ti gal).ariga!_la-üpahana) = Spk 1 346,1
(Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ata1iyo ti -a); Vin-vn 3089
(gai).arigai_la-upahana); - o -ciiri(n), mfn., moving in a
group or crowd; Ja 111 477,24* (makkhika -ini arigare
vasarp kappeyyurp); IV 347,24* (kumbhllaka sakuJ]aka
sarighino -ino);- 0 -püra, mfn., (one) who makes up the
number; Vin-vn 2606 ('saJ11vasapuggalarp -a111
karontassa); - 0 -püraka, mfn., (one) who makes up the
number, completes the quorum; Vin 1 143,12
(anussavessam i va -o va bhavissami ti); Sp 814,2o
(sesanarp --tta); 1107,20 (sace purimikaya upagata
cattaro va honti tayo va . . . itare -e katva ka~hina111
attharitabbaJ11); Vin-vn 2607; 0
-bandha, m.,
l.joining together in a group (to do something); Spk II
178,13 (aññe pi papiccha -ena ku1esu viññapetva); -
2. one who belongs to a group; Ja V 466,11 (sesa -a
macchamarpsa dini khadanta, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
sesagaJ]aban dha);- 0 -bandhana, n.,joining together in
a group (to do something); a joint endeavour; Ja V
427,27' (cha!_1aka1e ... suvaJ]J]akara -ena ... maJ]gaparp
karetva ... surapanarp arabhirpsu, Ce so; Ee -e; Be, Se
0
-bandhena); Dhp-a 11 160,1 (ekavithivasino manussa
samagga hutva -ena danaJ11 datva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-bandhena); - 0 -bandhika, (and 0 -bandhiya), n. (or
mfn. ?), (connected with) joining together in a group;?
acquiring a following; ? V in 1 59,28 (ati1ahurp kho tvarp
moghapurisa bahullaya avatto yad idaJ11 -aJ11; Sp 984,2o:
gar_1abandho etassa bahullassa atthi ti -arp bahullaJ11)
quoted Ud-a 266,18 (eds 0 -bandhiyaJ11) ;- 0 -bhojana, n.,
receiving and eating food in a group; V in IV 71 ,33 (-e
pacittiyan ti; 74,3o: yattha cattaro bhikkhu pañcanna111
bhojananarp aññatarena bhojanena nimantita bhuñjanti
etaJ11 -a111 nama; Sp 812,3: -e ti gar_¡assa bhojane, idha
gar_1o nama cattaro bhikkhü adirp katva taduttarirp
bhikkhü adhippeta); Utt-vn 788; - 0 -riija, mfn., having
the group as ruler; Sp 212,22 (mayarp hi LicchavinaJ11
-ünaJ11 rajje vasama); Ps III 16,2o (-ano hi te, tasma
uppanna111 kicca111 ekassa vasena na chijjati, sabbesarp
chando 1addhurp vagati);- 0 -Va(t), mfn., attended by a
company; Pj 11 422,21 (sarighino ti 0 -Vanto); Nidd-a II
28,zo (gar_1igar_1i ti 0 -vantanarp ativa 0 -va); Sadd 145,3•
(gul).ava 0 -Va e' eva ba1ava yasava tatha); - gal}ii-
vavassagga, m. [gar_1a + vavassagga with rhythmical
lengthening ?], giving up the group, renouncing
company; Nidd 1 145,3 (kathaJ11 -'-atthena eko pubbe
caritvana); - 0 -Vassika, mfn., used for severa/ years;
Sn 279 (güthakupo yatha assa sampul]I)O -o; Pj II 310,26:
-o anekavassiko bahüni vassani mukhato güthena
puriyamano ); - o -saiigal}ikii,f., association with
groups; the society of companies of people; Sp 222,4
(asarpvare !hitassa atta -aya e' eva kilesasarigar_1ikaya ca
SaJ11Vattati); Spk III 122,16 (yogavacaro ... kayavivekena
-a111 [vijjhati]); Dhp-a 1 162,10; Ud-a 231,19 (-aJ11 pahaya
vivittavaso kayaviveko nama);- 0 -saiighaviiri in Ee at
S 1 127,3* is wr for 0 -sailghacari (Be, Ce so); -
0
-satthiiraka, m., the teacher of a group; Ap 213,24 (-o
ahaJ11, Be so; Ce gar_1asattha ahos' ahaJ11; Ee wr
 9 gal}eti
gal_lasantharako; Se gal)asantharako);- agaQa, mfn., not
in a group; Sv 280,10 (pubbe nagarassa anto -a bahi
nikkhamitva gal)asampanna ti) f. Ps III 416,3; -
sagal)a, mfn., with a group, with a following; Ap-a
431,19 (Vipassirp bhagavantarp -arp disva); - se e also
anekavassagal)ika (sv eka), nekavassagal)ika (sv neka).
gaQaka, m. [ts], l. one who counts, reckons, calculates; an
accountant, a treasurer; Vin III 42,31 (atthi ca me
darugahe -o sandittho; Sp 294,16: darugahe -o ti rañño
darubhai_!qagare darugopako); DI 51,12 (-a muddika);
M III 1,16 (-anarp gal_lanajlvanarp, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
gal)anarp gal_lanajlvanarp); S IV 376,5 (atthi te koci -o va
muddiko va sankhayako va yo pahoti gañgaya valukarp
gal)eturp ettaka valuka iti; Spk III 113,12: -o ti
acchiddakagal)anaya kusalo); Mil293,11 (yo -o
sighasigharp gal)etva khipparp dassayati so -o cheko
nama); Mhv 11 :20; - 2. an astrologer; Abh 347 (-o tu
0
muhuttiko); - -mahamatta, m. (or 0 -mahamatta,
m.pl.) [cfS. gal_lanamahamatra], a minister offinance; an
accountant; (or accountants and ministers;) Vin 11
130,34 (ete kho ayyo tumhakarp bhaddanta
chattapaggahita agacchanti seyyathapi -a ti); D III 64,31
(amacca parisajja -a anlkanha dovarika mantassajlvino
sannipatitva; cfSv 852,4: -a ti acchiddakadipa!}laka-
gai_!aka e' eva maha-amacca ca); Ps V 43,2 (rajjakarita-
attabhavo nama n' eva gal)akena na -ena gal_leturp
sakka, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee rajjarp karita-attabhavo [Ee
karitabhavo] nama n' eva gal)ako na -o gal)eturp
sakkoti).
gaQaki, f [ts "wife of astrologer"], the wife of an
accountant (or astrologer); Vin III 135,24 (ajivikasavaka
agantva tarp -irp etad avocurp); 136,11 (sa -i tesarp
ajivakasavakanarp dhitararp adasi); Sp 553,4 (purill)a-
gal)akiya ti ekassa gai_!akassa bhariyaya, sa tasmirp
jivamane -i ti paññayittha, mate pana purill)agal)aki ti
sañkharp gata, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr pural)agai_!ikiya ...
gai_!iki ... purill)agai_!iki ... ).
gaQati, pr. 3 sg. [?], goes; Sadd 358,13 (gal_la ral,la gatiymp:
-ati, eds so, perhaps wr; see kai_!ati2); - gal)ami in Ee,
Se at Thi 418 is wr for bhai_!ami (Be, Ce so).
gaQana, f, gal_lana, n. [ts], reckoning, counting;
calculation, computation; numbering; Vin I 77,21 (sace
kho Upali -arp sikkhissati ur' assa dukkho bhavissati);
IV 7,5 (ukka¡tharp nama sipparp mudda -a lekha); DI
ll,1o (mudda -a sañkhanarp; Sv 95,2o: -a ti
acchiddakagal)ana); Ja I 35,2 (pa!hamasannipate -a nama
natthi, dutiye ko!isatasahassarp bhikkhü ahesurp);
III 360,w (tato pararp -a nama buddhanam eva visayo);
Bv 23:5 (dhammabhisamayo tassa -ato asañkhiyo);
Vibh 422,33 (manussanarp -aya kittakarp hoti); Mil 79,3o
(-aya sikkhitatta gai_!aka bahurp pi gal_lenti); Vism 127,18
(tattha arahattarp pattanarp ca -a natthi); Sp 1089,12
(yava aharitva va na dinnarp . . . tava -arp na upeti);
Dhp-a I 11,3 (sarpsarava¡te tava anakkhikakalassa -a
natthi); Pa!is-a 441,8 (tani -ani vissajento); Cp-a 12,23
(asañkhiya, -arp atikkanta ti attho); Sadd 799,s (-e);-
ifc see añgunha-, añgughigal)ana, acchidda- (sv chidda),
acchiddaka-, acchinna- (sv chindati); - 0 (a)-patha, m.
the range of computation; the limit of calculation; Ja IV
73,19 (sotapannadinarp -o natthi); V 154,26' (vanadukkhe
patinhita satta -arp atikkanta); Mil20,3 (devatanarp pana
dhammabhisamayo -arp vitivatto); Sp 32,11; Spk I
213,31; 11 97,27; - agaQana, mfn. (?), without number;
beyond calculation; ? Ja VI 359,29' (asañkhan ti -arp
kalarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se asañkhyan ti -arp;
ad 359,2o* foll.: yam etam akkha udadhirp mahantarp
savanti najjo sabbakalarp asañkharp [Be, Se
asankhyarp]).
gaQi(ni, m(jn). [S., BHS gal)in], one who has a company
of followers or pupils; a leader, a teacher; DI 47,17
(ayarp ... Püral)O Kas sapo sañghi e' eva -i ca gal_lacariyo
ca ñato yasassi titthakaro) f. M 11 3,3 (ayarp pi kho
samal)O Gotamo ... ); M 11 3,6 (samai_!abrahmai_!anarp
sanghinarp -inarp gal)acariyanarp); Sn 955 (sattha Tusita
-i-m-agato; Pj 11 571,29: Tusitakaya cavitva matu-
kucchirp agatatta Tusita agato, gal_lacariyatta -i; Nidd I
44 7,7 foll.: gal)acariyo ti -i gal_lassa sattha ti -i gal)arp
pariharatl ti -i gal)arp ovadati ti -i); Thi 305 (ahumha
pubbe -ino); Ja VI 222,24* (Gul,lO Kassapagottayarp suto
citrakathi -i); Ap 364,21 (yavata -ino loke satthavaha
pavuccare); Mil4,13 (sañghi -i gal_lacariyo); Mhv 16:18
(devamanussagal_la -inarp tarp tarp ca gal)arp ... upecca).
gaQi(n) 2 , m. [?],a kind of deer or elk; Abh 612 (gokai_!l)O
gai_!ikal)!aka); Ja V 406,7* (el)eyya varaha e' eva -ino;
406,30': -ino ti gokai_!l)a) =VI 277,24'.
gaQika 1, f l. [ts], a courtesan; a prostitute; Abh 233;
Vin I 268,11 (Ambapalika -a abhirüpa hoti ...
padakkhil)a nacce ca gite ca vadite ca abhisa!a
atthikanarp atthikanarp manussanarp paññasaya ca rattirp
gacchati); Th 939 (-a va vibhüsayarp); Ja VI 276,24*
(vesi ca -ayo ca); Ap 4,5 (-a lasika e' eva naccantu;
Ap-a 110,1: -a naccitthiyo ca lasika mukhena
saddakaraka ca); 613,14 (dasajatisahassani o -ttarp
akarayirp); Mil122,3 (aharp hi nagare Pa!aliputte -a
rüpüpajivini antimajivika); Pv-a 195,14 (kiliHhakamma-
upajiviniya -aya);- 2. [S. lex. id.] a female elephant; ?
Spk I !86,26 (yatha araññarp tosetva pesita 0 -hatthiniyo
araññakaq:l kuñjaraq:l ... palobhetva bandhitva anayanti,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se yatha araññato pesitagal)ikara-
hatthiniyo ... ).
gaQika2 , f [ts], (the science of) computation, counting;
Mil 3,31 (bahüni e' assa satthani uggahitani honti
seyyathidarp ... -a gandhabba tikiccha ... ).
gaQiki in E e at Sp 553,4 is wr for gai_!aki qv.
gaQibhüta, mfn. [pp of *gal)a + bhavati)], gathered in
groups; in large companies; DI 112,11 (brahmal)a-
gahapatika Campaya nikkhamitva sañghasañghi -a, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee sangha sanghi gai_!ibhüta; Sv 280,11: pubbe
nagarassa anto agal_la bahi nikkhamitva gal)asampanna ti
-a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gal)atarp patta ti) f. M 11 164,13;
Ud-a 380,14.
gaQeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gal)ayati], l. counts, numbers,
adds up; reckons, calculates; Dhatup 574 (gal_la
sañkhyane); Dhatum 806 (gal,la sañkalane); Ja I 462,12
(-essami); Mil 79,3o (gai_!aka bahurp pi -enti);
Vism 279,9 (eka dve ti sakkhararp khipitva khipitva -eti,
Be, Ce so; Se eko dve ti; Ee ekarp dve ti) = Sp 419,26
(Ce, Se so; Be, Ee eko); Sp 1016,33 (aharp dasavasso va
visativasso va ti musa vatva bhikkhuvassani -eti);
1165,3 (rattiyo -ayissami, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -issami ti,
 10
prob. wr); Spk I 241,8 (-ehi maharaja ti); Sadd 536,9
(gaJ.Ia sati.khane: -eti -ayati gaJ.Iana gaJ.lO );
part.pr. (a) gaJ.Ienta, mfn., Ja I 462,13; Vism 278,22
(-entena) = Sp 419,4 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e -ayantena);
Spk I 241,9 (rañño ekaf!1 dve sat3I)1 sahassan ti -entassa
ati.gu1iyo na ppahonti); (b) gaJ.Iaya(t), mfn., Dhp 19 (gopo
va gavo -3I)1 pares3f!1); Vism 279,2 (tassa evaf!1 -ayato)
= Sp 419,19; (e) ganay anta, mfn., Sp 419,4 (-ayantena,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -entena); Ps III 378,16 (nakkhattani
-ayanta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gaJ,lhayanta); - aor.
3 sg. gaJ.Iesi, D III 8,8 (Sunakkhatto ekadv!hikaya satta
rattindivani -esi; Sv 821 ,12joll.: ek3f!1 dve ti vatva
-esi ... yatha asaddahamano koci -eyya evaf!1 -esi); -
2. takes into account, values; takes notice of, cares
about; Ja I 237,19 (na ill3f!1 esa kisi)liñci -ayissatl ti);
300,16 (manatthaddha hutva samikaf!l na -enti); 303,23'
(na hi . . . mahasamuddaf!1 va pana sosanakavato
khuddakata~ak3f!1 kismiñci-d-eva -eti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
gaJ,lhati); IV 267,18 (raja ... aññaf!1 manussaf!1 manusso ti
pi na -eti); Spk III 84,32 (rajavallabho ... seghisenapati-
adayo padena paharanto pi na -eti); Dhp-a IV 14,1
(hatthino tasmii)l ka1e ati.kuse va kuntatomare va na
-enti CaJ.Iqa bhavanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee kuntatomare
khaJ.Iqanti); Sadd 640,21 (bhagava pana vacaniin3f!1
1ahugarubhav3f!1 na -eti); - inf (a) gaJ.IetUI)l, Vin I
117.:1 lanujanami bhikkhave bhikkhii -etun ti): S IV
376.- •yo pahoti gati.gaya Ya1uk3f!1 -etuf!1 ettaka valuka
ti': tb• gaJ.Ietuye. 8,- ~:28 tyatha pi sagare iim! na sakka
ti g3I_!etuye: 8\·-a 152.:>: -eruye ti -erum sati.khatui)ll:
- ahwl. •a• gaJ.Ief\·a \"in I 285.:• •bhikkhii -en·a1:
Ja \1 3~.· •dit!hasupinadiYasato parrJ1aya -et\al:
~W 293.. •gaJ.Ial.:o s!ghas!gham -ena1: Sp 380.1o
okil!'lvassani -ena1:- neg. agaJ.Ien·a Ps II 321.22 (core
tÍ1,13I)1 pi agaJ.Iet\al: l'd-a 68.21: 13~.3-1: (b) gaJ.Iitva, Ja I
261.-1- ( -itva gahitena sahassena): - neg. agaJ.litva,
Mp IV 104,zo (anadiyitva ti amanasikatva agaJ.litva);
(e) gaJ.Iayitva, Nidd-a I 401,9; - neg. agaJ.layitva, Ja II
435,28·; Ps II 160,17; - pass. pr. 3 sg. gal}-lyati,
Mil 114,9 (loke tayo yeva megha -anti); Mp V 84,4
(Dasamo ti . . . dasame thane -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
-issati); Saddh 434 (seghesu ca -ati); - part.pr.
gaJ,llyamana, mfn., Ja II 16,19· (saradosatai)l hi -amanaf!1
vassasatam eva hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
gaJ.1hiyamanal)1); Sp 239,31 (bhikkhiisu -amanesu);
833,11 (-amiiniil13f!1 gaJ.lanaya anto natthi); Sadd 802,5
(ekato paghaya -amana); - pp gal}-ita, mfn. [ts],
counted, numbered; reckoned; taken into account;
Abh 710; Sn 677 (te -a vidiihi tilavaha ye padume
niraye upan!ta); Spk I 59,13 (sahassaf!1 sahass3f!1 katva
-iinaf!1 purisiinaf!1); Ud-a 5,9* (padan' etan' Udanassa
-ani); - neg. agaJ.lita, mfn., Mil114,21 (avasesa nadiyo
nad!gaJ.Ianaya agaJ.Iita); 147,26; - fpp gal}-etabba,
gaJ,litabba, mfn. and n. impers., Vin I 117,22 (kada nu kho
bhikkhii -a ti); Vism 278,3o (ete dose vajjetva -3I)1) =
Sp419,11; Dukap235,19 (anulomapadani gaJ.Iitabbani);
Sadd 536,23 (eko dve ti adina -o ti gaJ.Io); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. gal}-lipeti, M III 1,19 (mayai)l hi ... antevas!
1abhitva patham3I)1 evaf!1 -ema ekai)l ekakaf!1 dve
duka ... ); Dhp-a I 358,13 (iilgha te -etha ti); - part.pr.
gaJ.lapenta, mfn., Dhp-a I 358,13; - absol. gaJ.Iapetva,
Vibh-a 407,33 (raja divase -etva sattahe vttivatte
kujjhitva therassa hatthapade chindapesi).
gal}-fha is an occasional vl for gantha qv.
gal}-fhana, see sv ganthana.
gal}-fhabhedaeoro in Ee at Dhp-a II 30,17 is prob. wr for
gaJ.Ithibhedakacoro (Be, Ce, Se so).
gal}-fhi, m.f [S. granthi, m.], l. a knot; a tangle; a bunch; a
knot tied in a garment (for keeping money ); S IV 199,3
(makka!af!l . . . da~haya rajjuya bandhitva majjhe -ii)l
karitva ossajjeyya); Sp 766,12/oll. (sace pi hi tiJ.13I)1 va
lat3f!1 va -ii)l karontassa bhijjati, -ii)l pi katui)l na
vattati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -i pi na katabbo); - ifc see
anta- (sv anta\ - 2. the knot or joint in a reed;
Abh 600 (pabb3f!1 tu phalu -i); Ja I 172,1 (na!o anto
kiñci -ii)l asesetva sabbatthakam eva susiro ahosi);
Sv 163,27 (nigaJ.I!higabbha ti -imhi jatagabbha
ucchuve~una~adayo sandhaya vadati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
niggaJ.l!higabbha ti); - 3. a knotty problem, a difficulty;
Mil119,21 (ay3I)1 pi ubhatoko!iko pañho -ito pi 0 -taro);
Spk II 66,22 (pañhassa ev3f!1 °-bhavena, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be, Ce, Se ekati.gaJ.likabhavena); - 4. a knot used as
a button, a button; a toggle; ? Sp 863,23 (Maha-
paccariyaf!1 patte va -iyaf!1 va na vagatt ti); - S. a
bulbous root; a bulb or tuber; Sp 833,26 (duvidho kando
d!gho ca rasso ca bhisakif!1sukakandadi vago ca
uppa1akaserukandadi, yaf!1 -1 ti pi vadanti); - 6. a
swelling, a hardening; Sp 998,31/oll. (sace pana janiihi
va kapparehi va n~ikerapasiiJ.lad!hi va ghatetva mutto
hoti sañre e' assa -iyo paññayanti, na pabbajetabbo,
phasuk3f!1 katva eva -!su sannisinnasu pabbajetabbo);
Sv 936,29 (tattha tattha lohitai)l sa1.1!hati -i -i hutva anto
va pubb3I)1 gaJ.Ihati anto va bhijjati); - ifc see medo-
sv meda(s); - 7. the name of a plant; Ap 162,9
(
0
-pupphaf!l apiijayii)l, Be, Ee so; Ce gandhapupph3f!1;
Se gatamaggai)l); Mhv 30:59 ( 0 -pupphanibhe subhe cha
medavaJ.lJ.lapasane aharif!1su; Mhv-! 542,w: bandhu-
j!vakapupphapiJ.lqasadise); - 8. a stick, a branch;?-
ifc see candana-; - 0 -jata, mfn., knotty; entangled; ?;
Dhp-a I 321,6 (dabbasambharatthika hi manussa ...
avasesaf!1 pana susiraf!l ca piitikai)l ca -3I)1 ca chinditva
tatth' eva chaqqenti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gaJ.l!hikajat3I)1);
Pa!is-a 411,5 (ayai)l loko paccayakaraf!1 ujuf!1 katuf!1
asakkonto dvasaghidighigatavasen' eva -o hutva) t-
Spk II 97,3 (ayai)l paja ... -a, Ce so; Be gaJ.l!hikajata; Ee
guJ.l!hijata; Se guFgaJ.I!hikajata; = Sv 496,9: eds gaJ.l!hika-
jata); - see also gu~aguJ.l!hikajata;- 0 -Uhana, n., a
difficult passage, a crux; a knotty problem; Ja III 538,1
( -am eva pabbatamatthaka nadif!1 otarento vi ya osaresi,
Be so; Ce, Se gaJ.I!higaJ.I!hi!!hiinai)l; Ee wr
gaJ.I!higaJ.l!itthiinai)l); Vism 248,28 (sabb3I)1 -ai)l
chinditva); Mhv 5:107 (vedesu -ani pucchi so tani
vyakari); - 0 -pañha, m., a very difficult question; Ja VI
351,29 (-o esa, na sakka mahajanamajjhe kathetuf!1, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se gaJ.I!hiko esa pañho); Ps II 359,24; -
0
-pada, n., a difficult passage or word; Vism 442,19
(paripuccha nama pa!i-aghakathadisu --atthapada-
vinicchayakatha; Vism-mh! [Be]II 84,9: yassa hi
padassa attho duviññeyyo t3I)1 -3I)1); PsI 17,1 (evaf!1
kathíte ca amhiik3f!1 -3I)1 nama n' atth! ti); -
0
-pasakapatfaka, m.pl. [gaJ.I!hi + pasaka 1 + pagaka],
 gm;tthika
backing strips for toggles and loops; Vin-vn 3038
(catukm¡.a va vananti -a); - 0 -pasa, m.pl. [ga!J~hi +
pasa 1], knots or toggles and loops; Vin-vn 3036; -
0
-baddha, mfn., knotted; in a tangle; Spk II 96,17
(akulal\1 tantaip. kañjiyal\1 datva kocchena paha~aip. tattha
tattha gujakajatal\1 hoti -aip.) f. Pa~is-a 410,2o (Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee 0 -bandhal\1); - 0 -bhedaka, m., "a money-knot
cutter", a purse-cutter, a thief, Sp 739,25 (coro si -o si
ti); - --cara, m., id.; Dhp-a II 29,12 (--core arabbha);
30,17 (--coro, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ga!J~habhedacoro, prob.
wr); - niggal).!hi, mfn., free from knots; free from
dijficulties; Mil 105,27 (naracassa sudhotassa vimalassa
-issa, Be, Ce so; Ee nigganthis sa; Se nigaf.l~hissa); Sv
1055,18 (dakkho vejukaro ... vejuip. müle chetva -al\1
katva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nigganthiip.); Ps li 269,3o (thero
khaggena kumudanajaip. chindanto viya pucchita-
pucchital\1 nijja~aip. -iip. katva kathesi); Mp II 202,5
(parisuddhal\1 nijja~aip. -iip. katva desenti).
gai.J.thika 1, m. [= gmghika ?], l. a knot; a plait; a toggle;
Ja VI 335,37' (nanavaf.lf.iehi suttehi -e bandhitva
katasuttaga~Jthikapilandhanaip., Ce, Ee so; Se -aip.; Be
ganthike); Sp 291,11 (-e pi sobhakaraf.iatthal\1 lekha va
pilaka va na vagati); 1245,12 (añjanikara~J<,Iako -o
gaf.l~hive~hano añjani, Ee, Se so; Be añjanakara[.l<,lako
ga!J~ika vidho añjani; Ce añjanako karaf.i<,laga~J~iko
pitho añjani); - 2. a join, a mend; ? Sp 838,29 (sace pi
patto duddhoto hoti . . . o-pattassa va o' -antarena sneho
pavigho hoti, Ce so; Be, Se o• -antare; Ee ga[.l<,likapattassa
va ga~J<,Iikantarena ... ); - ifc see catupañca- (sv catu[r]);
0
- -kasava, n., a knotted yellow robe;? Ja IV 446,4
(kii~aja~ilaip. ekaip. -aip. nivasetva ekaip. parupitva ...
disva; = Cp-a 189,9: eds gandhika-) ; - 0 -jata, mfn.,
knotted; entangled; ? Sv 496,9 (ayaip. paja paccayaka re
ujuip. katuip. asakkonti diHhigatavasena -a hutva) =
Spk II 97,3 (Be so; Ce gaf.l~hijata; Ee gmghijata; Se guJI-
ga~J~ikajata; f. Pa~is-a 411,5: ayaip. loko ... gaf.l~hijato);
Dhp-a I 335,7 (kusalo malakaro ... taruf.imnakulani ca
paf.lakaviddhani ca milatani ca gal).thikajatani ca
pupphani vajjetva); - see also af.liga~J~ikahata (sv af.ii),
gujaguf.l(hikajata.
gai.J.thika 2 , mfn. [gaf.l(hi + ka2 ?], knotty; ? Sp 1286,13 (na
pharusena ka~(hena ti phalitakag hena va kharena va -ena
va kaf.l(akena va susirena va putina va na
avalekhita bbam).
gai.J.thika ,f [g~~i + ka 2], l. a knot; a bunch; Sp 619,17
(khandhe ~hapitakasavassa ubho ante aharitva -aip. katva
tasmiip. pasibbake viya pupphani pakkhipan ti, ayal\1
vuccati ai\lSabhaf.l<.lika, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be
bha[.l<,likaip. katva; Se ga~J<,Iiip. katva); Pv-a 127,9 (malan ti
o• -adibhedaip. pupphal\1. E e so, prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
ganthitaganthitabhedal\1); - 2. a button; a toggle
(fastened by a loop, pasaka); V in I 46,18 (sagUf.lai\1 katva
sanghatiyo parupitva -aip. pa~imuñcitva); II 136,27 (vata-
ma~J<,Ialikaya sanghatiyo ukkhipiyiip.su . . . anujanami
bhikkhave -al\1 pasakan ti . . . chabbaggi ya bhikkhii
uccavaca -ayo dharenti sovaf.if.iamayal\1 riipiymnayaip.);
136,36 (bhikkhü -aip. pi pasakaip. pi civare appenti,
civarai\1 jirati); Ps II 280,6 (buddha nama -al\1
pa~imuñcitva pa~icchannasañra parisati dhmnmal\1
desenti); Dhp-a I 394,6 (tasmiip. tasmiip. ~hane muddika
11 ga1_u;la
yojetva kata suVa!Jf.laiDaya -a honti rajatamaya pasaka
... ); Utt-vn 670 (-a kappiya vutta ekadas' eva);- 3. an
executioner's block (cf ga[.l<,lika); Jai 151,12 (migaraja
-aya nipanno, Ee, Se so; Be dhmnrnaga~J<,Iikaya; Ce
ga~J<,Iikaya); III 41,14 (so pharasuip. gahetva -ayal\1
~apetva hatthe chindi, Se so; Be ga~J<,Iiyal\1; Ce, Ee
ga~J<,Iiya); V 303,24 (Maddaraj a pi pharasuip. ca -aip. ca
gahetva coraghato idh' eva agacchatii ti af.lapesi, E e so;
Be, Ce, Se ga~J<,Iikaip.); - ifc see aghatana-, dhmnrna-
(sv dhmnma 1); - o> -aiigulika, O> -anguli, m.fin)., having
lumpy or knotted (arthritic ?)fingers; Sp 1030,17 (-o ...
singiverapha~Jasadisahi angulihi sarnannaga to, Ee, Se so;
Be ga~J!hikanguli; Ce gaf.l~hikanguli); Vin-vn 2511 (-o pi
va); - 0 (a)-paUak a, m., a backing strip for the toggle;
Sp 290,21 (-aip. ca pasakapagakaip. ca aghakof.iakal\1 pi
sojasakof.iakaip. pi karonti); - 0
(a)-phalak a, n., a
backing piece (of wood ?) for the toggle;? Vin II
136,36/oll. (bhikkhii ga~J(hikaip. pi pasakal\1 pi civare
appenti civarai\1 jirati . . . anujanami bhikkhave -aip.
pasakapha lakan ti); - niggai.J.thika, mfn., free from
knots; free from dijficulties; Vibh-a 224,12 (nijja~aip. -aip.
kamrnaghanal\1 kathetabbaip., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
niggaf.l(hiip.).
gai.J.thita, n. [cf S. grathita ?], (the knotty plant?) a
bamboo or reed; It-a II 2,26 (tacasaran ti -al\1. vejun ti
attho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ka!J~hikal\1);- gaf.l~hita in Ee at
It-a I 55,20 is wr for ganthita (Be, Ce, Se so); -
ga~Jthitagal).(hita- in Ee at It-a li 59,5 is wr for
ganthitaganthita- (Be, Ce, Se so);- see also kaghaka.
gai.J.theti, see sv ganthati.
gal}.<.(a, m. [ts ], l. the cheek, the side of the face; Abh 262;
1048 (-o ... kapolmnhi); - 2. (i) a swelling, a lump; a
boil; boils; Abh 1048 (-o pho¡e); Vin 1 71,34 (pañca
abadha ... ku!(haip. -o kilaso soso apmnaro) f. Nidd 1
13,5; V in IV 196,14 (yo ... ekato va ubhato va -aip. katva
bhuñjati; Sp 893,25: makka(o viya -e katva katva); 316,4
(bhikkhun i pasakhe jataip. -aip. purisena saddhiip. eken'
eka bhedapesi) ; M 1 435,34 (te dhamme aniccato
dukkhato ro gato -ato sallato ... anattato samanupas sati;
Ps III 146,6: anta dosaghena -ato); S IV 83,25 (-o ti ...
imass etaip. . . . kayassa adhivacanaip.); Thi 491
(sattisiilupama karna rogo -o); Ja I 293,2 (sise kapparena
pahari . . . sise -o ughahi); V 202,18* (dvassa -a ure
sujata; 205,27·: -a ti thane sandhay' aha); Pv-a 55,21
(abhihata~~anesu rnahanta rnahanta gha~appamaf.ia -a
u~~ahitva rnuhutten' eva pacitva paribhedap patta honti);
- ifc see akkhi- (sv akkhi\ Uf.lf.ligaf.l<.la, rneda-
(sv rneda[s]), visa1a-ak khi-;- (ii) a swelling on wood, a
knot; ? Spk II 330,16 (palaga~J<,Iassa ti va<.l9hakissa, so hi
olarnbakasankhataip. palal\1 tiretva darunal\1 -aip. harati ti
palaga~J<,Io ti vuccati, Ce so; Ee palaga~J<,Iissa ti; Be palaip.
dharetva; Se palabha~J<,Iassa ti . . . palaq¡ dharetva) =
Mp IV 63,11 (Be, Ce, E e phalaga~J<,Iassa ti ... phalal\1
caretva ... ; Se phalagaf.l<,lassa ti ... balal\1 dharetva ... );
- ifc see pala-; - 3. an elephant's temples; Abh 364
(-o kato); - oagal}.<.(ajata, mfn., covered in boils and
swelling; Dhp-a III 297,14 (tassa sariraip.
uppakkuppakkaip. -aip. ahosi sa ka~J<,Iiivanti gantva
sayane nipajji); - 0
-kal}.l).a, mfn., (one) who has a
suppurating ear; Sp 1029,3 (-o . . . sada paggharita -
 gal}c;laka
pubbena kat.u;¡ena saruannagato); - 0 -ppadesa, m., the
regían of the cheek, the cheek; Sp 1293,21 (-e ...
visesakatr~ karonti);- 0 -passe, ind., on the cheek, near
the cheek; Ja V 284,w; Spk II 192,18 (gaccha slghan ti -e
pahari); 0
-pana, n., a honey drink;?
(cfmadhugat]9a ?) Spk 1 338,13 (nevasika -atr~
sajjayiipsu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gandha-); Ps 11 303,2/oll.;
0
- -phalana, n., bursting, lancing a boil; Sp 1289,15
(-'-adini vejjakammani); 1327,34; Ap-a 124,7;
0
-badhipubbo in Ee at Sp 610,12 is wr for
gaddhabadhipubbo (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -bheda, m., the
bursting, lancing of a boil; Ap 211 ,20 (kusatakatr~
gahetvana ... mantarp ca anusikkhami -assa pattiya, Se
so; Be ganthadosassa; Ce, Ee kai]9abhedassa);
Vism 583,3; Spk 111198,10 (yatha pana pakke gat)9e -ena
pubbalohitatp akamataya nikkhamati); - 0 -maipsa, n.,
the flesh of the cheek; Pj I 46,28 ( -arp gal)9appadese
thapitakarañjabljasa!]thanatr~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee g31]9a-
ppabheda!hapita-); - o -mattika,j, wormcasts; ? V in 11
151,31 (kiQava!]I]O anibandhanlyo hoti ... anujanami
bhikkhave -atr~ datva pii.I]ikaya patibahetva ka)avat]!]atr\
nipatetun ti, Ce, Ee so; Be ga!]9u-; Se 131]9u-; Sp 1219,9:
ga!]9uppadaguthamattikatr~); - 0
-madhupana, n., a
honey drink; Spk 1 316,1 (madhuplta va seyyare ti -atr~
pita viya sayanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gandha-;
cfThi-a 59,zfol/.: madhuplta va acchare ti yatha
gat]9atnadhuip gahetva madhurp pltavanto, Ce so; Be,
Ee. Se bhat]9aJlladhurp gahetYa):- agal}l}.a, n.,freedom
from boils: ·? Pap.s 11 238.:- (pañcannarp khandhanatr~
nirodho -atr~ nibbanan ti passanto. Be. Ce, Ee so: Se
nigaJ?90I:- sagal}l}.a.n[fn .. hm·ing m·el/ings or bumps;
unnen; ~lp 11 18 L" 1 [nemi] sadosa ti -a UI]I]ato!]ata-
tthiinayunal; - see also avagat]9akarakatn. ureg31)9a,
galagat]9il n 1 1s¡· gala 2). parininnakkhig31]9aka.
gai}¡J.aka 1• m. [cf S. /ex .. BHS gat]9aka], l. a rhinoceros;
Abh 613 (palasado ca -o); Ap 17,5 (pasada ca varaba ca
catnara -a bahu, Be so; Ce, Se vaka bherat]9aka bahu;
Ee vakabherat]9aka) quoted Ap-a 217,6* (Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee baka roda!]9aka bahu); - 2. a sort of fish; Abh 672
(na)amlno ca -o).
gal}l}.aka2 , m. or n. [g31)9a + ka2], a cheeliful; a bulge in
the cheek; ? Spk 1 109,1o ([Rahu suriyavimanarp] kadaci
avagat]9akarakarp bhuñjanto viya kapolantare thapeti,
vegatr~ pana vareturp na sakkoti, sace varessaml ti -atr~
katva tigheyya matthakarp tassa bhindítva
nikkhameyya).
gal}l}.ati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ga9ati, Wg § 19:15], drops;
runs as a liquid; Th-a 11 129,17 (g31]9atnülo ti avijja, sa
hi -ati savati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee sa hi savati).
gai}¡J.ati 2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gal)9ati, Wg § 9:79: ga9i
vadanaikadese; see Wg p. 135: vadanaikadesarambha-
lak~31]akriya; MW: "to affect the cheek"], ?
Dhatum 146-7 (ga9i vattekadesamhi ga9i sannicaye pi
ca); Sadd 356,7 (ga9i vadanekadese: -ati ga!]9o).
gal}l}.ati3 , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. k31]9ati, Wg §§ 8:30; 9:78], is
exultant; Sadd 356,27 (ga9i made: -ati).
gai}¡J.atindurukkhe in Ee at Ja V 99,4 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
gandhatindukarukkhe; Se bha!]9uti!]9uka-.
gal}l}.amba (in Be kat]9amba), m. [g31)9a + amba], the
name of a tree (beneath which the Buddha performed the
12
yamakapatihariya qv ); perhaps N.pr.: Gm:u;la 's mango;
Ja IV 264,32 (Gat]9o nama rajuyyanapalo . . . imarp
aghirp uyyanapalassa ... ropanatthaya dehi, esa -o nama
bhavissati, Ce, E e so; Se gal)9iimbo; Be K31]9o ...
kat]9ambo ... ); Mil349,2o (0 -müle, Ce, Ee so; Be
kat]9amba-; Se ga!]9ii.mba-); Sp 88,28 (Savatthiyatr~
0
-mule, Ce, E e so; Be k31]9amba-; Se gat)9amba-);
Sv 57,6 (Savatthinagaradvare 0 -rukkhamüle, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be kat]9atnba- ); Ps V 7,11 (0 -müle paññatta-
buddhasane nislditva, Ce, Ee so; Be ka!]9atnba-; Se
ga!]9ii.mbarukkha-); Dhp-a III 207,2o (so pana G31]9ena
ropítatta 0 -rukkho tv eva paññayi, Ce, Ee so; Se
gai]9amba-; Be Ka!]9ena ... k31]9ambarukkho ... ); Th-
a II 37,7 (0 -müle katatr~ yaruakapatihariyarp disva, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se kat]9amba-) t Ap-a 564,8 (E e, Se so; Be
kai]9amba-; not in Ce); Bv-a 146,13 (0 -rukkhamüle, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se k31]9amba-); Mhv 17:44 (yamakarp
patihariyatr~
0
-mule buddho va akari, Ee so;
vl kai]9amba- ); Dath 5:54 (0 -rukkhatn eva
titthiyamaddanaya).
gal}l}.i, f, l. an executioner's block; Ja III 41,14 (so
pharasurp gahetva -iya thapetva hatthe chindi, Ce, Ee
so; Be -iyatr~; Se gat]thikayarp); - 2. [BHS gat]91],
something (a wooden block ? a bowl ?) struck to
summon the bhikkhus or announce the time; Ja I 237,29
(-irp paharanto dvararp akotento pabodheturp
nasakkhirp); Vism 181,3o (so -irp paharitva g31]arp
sannipatetva, Ce, Se so; Be ghat]9irp; Ee ghat]!irp);
Sp 382,4 (-irp paharitva kalatr~ ghosetva, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be gh31]tirp); 1124,28 (-iya pahataya bhikkhusaitghe
sannipatite, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ghat]tiya); Spk 1 291,20
(suriyatthangamane -irp paharitva); Pj I 251,28 (masassa
at!hasu dhatnmasavanadivasesu -irp akotetva
ussaretha ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gha!]9irp); Dhp-a 11 54,4
(nakhapighen' eva -irp paharitva, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
ghat]9irp); 247,4 (akale -i pahara kassaci aphasukarp
bhavissatl ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gh31]9i); - see also
gh3l]!l, ghat]9l.
gal}l}.ika, gat]9iya, mfn. [from gat)9a], suffering from boils,
afflicted with boils; Vin 1 93,25 (upasampanna dissanti
kughika pi -a pi kilasika pi ... ); Ja III 356,21 (bahu no
hatthi -a jata, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee Vat]ita); Kv 31,32
([puggalo] kutrhiyo gat]9iyo kilasiyo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr gandhiyo).
gal}l}.ika, f [ga!]9i + ka2], l. a block; an executioner's
block; Ja 1 151,12 (varappatto migo gantva dharuma-
gat]9ikaya slsatr~ !hapetva nipajjatu . . . laddhabhayo
migaraja -aya nipanno, Ce so; Be dhammaga!]9ikaya
nipanno; Ee, Se dharumaga!]thikaya . . . gat]thikaya
nipanno); V 303,24 (Maddaraja pi pharasurp ca -arp ca
gahapetva coraghatako idh' eva agacchatu ti ai]apesi, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee gat]thikarp); - ifc see aghatana-,
CU!]I]aka-, dhamma- (sv dhatnma 1);- 2. a striking block
(or bowl ?); As 319,14 (in cpd: -gat]9ikakoranadisaddo,
Ce, Ee so; Be -gha!]tika-; Se -g31]9ikakoganadisaddo);
- ifc see yama-; - 3. a bulb (of garlic); Ja 1 474,3o
(upasako bhikkhunisaitghatr~ lasunena pavaretva
khettapalarp ii.I]apesi . . . ekekaya bhikkhuniya dve tayo
-a dehl ti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se bh31]9ike; Ce
bha!]9ika; t Vin IV 258,9: eds bh31]9ike); - 4. a join; a
 13
mend; ? Sp 838,29 (sace pi patto duddhoto hoti ...
gaJ::t~ikapattassa va ga1,1~ikantarena sneho pavigho hoti,
Ee so; Ce gaJ::tthikapattassa ... gaJ:.lthikantarena; Be, Se
ga1,1thikapattassa ... gru::tthikantare);- ifc se e catupañca-
sv catu(r);- 0 '-iidhiina, n., the placing of a comice;?
V in 11 172,12 (--mattena pi navakamma111 den ti, Ce, Ee
so, perhaps wr; Be bhal,l~ikarrhapana-; Se
bhru::t~ikadhana-; Sp 1245,23: --mattena ti dvarabahana111
upari katena kapotakagru::t~ikayojanamattena, Ce so; Be
bhru::t~ikatthapanamattena ti . . . kapotabhru::t~ikayojana­
mattena; Ee, Se bha1,1~ikadhanamattena ti . . . kapota-
bhru::t~ikayojanamattena).
gai_u~u, m. [= gaJ::t~a ?], a sweiling; a boil; Ja V 72,2*
(yavanto udabindüni kayasmi111 nipati111su me tavanto -ü
jayetha addhabe1uvasadisa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ga1,1~a;
74,10·: -ü jayetha ti gru::t~a jayi111su, Ce, Ee so; Be gaJ::t~a
jayetha ti; Se gaJ::t~a jayetha ti); Sp 921,13 (-u111 va vru::tal11
va paharitu111 vattati, Se so; Be, Ce, E e ga1,1~~).
gal}c;luppiida, gaJ::t~upada, m. [cf S. gaJ::t~üpada], a worm,
an earthworm; Abh 675 (-o mahllata); M III 168,11 (klta
pu~ava -a); Ja V 210,6 (ki1esa nam' ete -piil,l~ upadaya
0
sabbaba1ajanasadharaJ::ta, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se gaJ:.l~u­
ppadakapiiJ:.lak~); Kv 599,7 (atthi tattha kita patañga ...
satapadi -a ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gaJ::t~upada ti); Spk I
151,5 (paccantavasina111 hi -a pi igha honti ... majjhima-
desavasinal11 atijeguccha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gaJ::t~upada);
Pj II 317,6 (-a kira mahapathaviya khayabhayena matta-
bhojino honti na bah u mattika111 khadanti).
gal}c;lupplidaka, m. [ga1,1~uppada + ki], a worm, an
earthworm; Vism258,31; Spkii 194,12 (tata ime ki111
khadantl ti pucchi, -e ayya ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gaJ::t~U­
ppade) = Mp I 178,17 (eds gaJ::t~uppade).
gal}c;lula, mfn. [S. ga~u1a, gaJ::t~u1a], hunch-backed;
Abh 319 (khujjo ca -o).
gal}c;lüsa, m. [S. gaJ::t~ü~a], a mouthful; a mouthful of
water; Pj II 56,26 (udak~ gahetva -a111 katva) =
Ap-a 146,19; - ifc see udaka-, khira-; - 0 -tela, n., oil
for rinsing the mouth; oil to be taken by mouth; ? Pj I
64,25 ([medo] yo sinehasañkhato pi hutva parama-
jegucchatta na matthakate1attha!11 na -' -attha111 na
d!pajalanattha111 sañgayhati; f. Vism 262,27 foil.: y~
sinehasañkh~ gat~ pi paramajegucchatta n' eva
muddhani te1atthaya na nasatelad!na111 atthaya gaJ::thanti
= Vibh-a 246,2foil.).
*gal}ha, m. [from gaJ::thati], taking; seizing; - ifc see
duggru::tha, sugru::tha.
gal}haka in Ce, Ee at Spk 11 255,14 and Ps III 323,2o
(añkusagru::thakasippe) is prob. wr for gru::thanaka qv.
gal}hana, n. [from gaJ::thati], taking; sezzzng;
understanding; Ja I 344,27' foil. (akarru::tassa karru::tan ti
gahru::takale karru::tassa akara1,1an ti cha~~anakale
abhütassa bhütan ti o -ka1e, E e, Se so; Be, Ce
gahru::takale ... gaha1,1akale); IV 83,16 (amhaka111 nagar~
0
-ka1e); V 309,21 (sattün~ -~ nama mayh~ bharo);
PsI 277,34 (nayato -a111 viya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
gahaJ::t~); As 328,25 (sukhum~ pi attano visay~
sukhen' eva 0 -samatthani cakkhadini indriyani); - ifc
see patisandhi-;- agal}hana, n., not taking, not seizing;
Ps IV 27,4 (anupadiyanavasena --vasena); As 126,38;-
see also gahru::ta 1.
gal}hiiti
gal}hanaka, mfn. and m. [gaJ::thana + ka2], taking, holding;
one who takes, grasps; Ja 111 175,17'
(pabbatasanugocaran ti ghanase1apabbatesu ca
p~supabbatesu ca gocara111 -a111, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
gru::thanta111); Spk 11 255,14 (ah~ rüpa111 mama rüpan ti
ev~ ta1,1haditthihi gi1itva parinitthapetva -o nama hotl ti
attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ga1,1hako, prob. wr); 393,19
([patt~] gh~sanena parikkhiJ:.lal11 na~ikodanamattam
eva -~ jata111) f. Ud-a 252,13; Mp III 137,24 (sathalika ti
tisso sikkha sithi1agahru::tena -a); Cp-a 266,22 (rajj~ ...
mama antepura111 ca acchinditva gahitak~ -a111
amittarajana111 nissaya ... passi111 ah~. Ce, E e so; Be,
Se gahitaka111 gaJ::thant~);- ifc see pacta-.
-gal}hamhli- in Ee at Sp 1392,6 is wr for -gaJ::tamha- (Be,
Ce, Se so).
gal}hayantli in Ee at Ps III 378,16 is prob. wr for
ga1,1ayanta (Be, Ce, Se so).
gal}hliti, gaJ::thati (and, rarely, gahati), pr. 3 sg. [S. grh1,1ati]
(imperat. 3 sg. gaJ::thatu [and gaJ::thatu]; 2 sg. ga1,1ha,
gaJ::thahi, ga1,1hassu; 3 pl. ga1,1hantu; 2 pl. gaJ::thatha,
ga1,1hatha, ga1,1havho; 1 pl. ga1,1hamase); Dhatup 388
(gaha upadane); Dhatum 731; Sadd 458,22 (gaha gaha1,1e:
-ati paggahati); 503,4 (gaha upadane: ... gheppati -ati
va); 503,16 (-ati -anti-as! ti);- l. takes, takes hold of,
grasps; gets, obtains; receives, accepts; V in I 191,2
(bhikkhü . . . gav!n~ . . . ViSaJ:.leSU pi -anti kaJ:.lJ:.leSU pi
-anti); 271,36 (handa je im~ sappi111 picuna -ah! ti);
III 247,12 (-atu bhante thero pattan ti); MI 459,6 (-atha
pattacivara111. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -atha); III 160,3 (puriso
varrak~ sithi1a!11 -eyya, so tassa hatthato uppateyya);
S V 148,21 (so t~ 1epa111 upasañkamitva hatthena -ati);
Pv 40:8 (-a ucchu111); Th 714 (na -ati bhav~ kiñci, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -ati); Thi 284 (na te hirañña111 -anti na
suvru::tJ:.l~); Ja III 334,2* (d~h~ -ahi); IV 433,21 *
(koda1,1~akani -atha); 434,12* (say~ utthaya -avho;
434,17·: -avho ti pha1ani -atha); V 73,2' (dvihi bahahi
mama g!va111 sugahita111 -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ga1,1hi);
232,11' (kin nu dru::t<;la111 ... -asi); 319,12* (abandhanani
-atha, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -atha); VI 151,12* (-assu
hatthabhara1,1ani; 151 ,2r: -assü ti pi1andhassu); 182,13*
(-amase mru::ti!11 tata; 182,15': -amase ti -ama);
228,18* foil. (ka1im eva nüna -ami asippo dhuttako yatha
katal11 A1ato -ati kitava sikkhito yatha); 282,5 (jüt~
kl~anto bhassamane pasake sañka<;l<;lhitva -ati, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -ati); 294,2* (nassa kosadhan~ -e; 294,15':
kosadhan~ na thenetva -eyya); 529,28* (puriso amba-
pakkani -ati, me); Mi1220,n (ummattako ... kupit~ pi
asivis~ -ati); Sp 343,11 (bhaga111 ma -atha ti vareti);
Mhv 8:23 (-antu pahü me dhitara111); - 2. catches;
seizes; overpowers; Vin I 148,33 (bhikkhü v~ehi ubb~ha
honti, -anti pi paripatenti pi); D II 262,1* (etha -atha
bandhatha); III 204,17 (ay~ yakkho -ati ay~ yakkho
avisati; Sv 970,12: -aH ti sarlre adhimuccati); Ja I 263,27
(rajja111 -atü ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -atü ti); III 202,23 (sace
saliyacchapal11 passeyyasi -eyyasi ti, ama -eyyan ti);
VI 354,11 * (-eyya SUJ:.lO sasa111 bi~ara111); Sp 331,3
(macche -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ati); - 3. holds,
contains; V in IV 243,24 (ukkattho nama patto
a<;l<;lha~akodana111 -ati); - 4. takes, chooses; takes on,
approves; holds (an opinion or belief); holds to; Vin II
gaQhati
73,28 (idaJ!l satthusasana111 imaJ!l -ahi ima111 rocehi ti);
A II 46,17* (anatthaJ!l parivajjeti atthaJ!l -ati PaJ.19ito);
Th 468 (-e 'ha111 sabbalokassa niccal!l kayagatasati111);
Ja I 104,7• (etad aññaya medhavi ta111 -e yad
apal)l)akaJ!l); Nidd 1 77,8 (satthara111 -ati); Mil 254,9 (so
dukkhaya vedanaya phunho samano aniccan ti dathaJ!l
-ati); Vism 594,12 (yo pan' etaJ!l yathabhiltadassanaJ!l
pahaya satto atthi ti -ati); Spk 11 68,33 (yassa hi ayaJ!l
dighi so ... sarire ucchijjante jivita111 ucchijjati ti -ati);
Dhp-a 1 74,16 (nakha sobhana ti -ati);- S. receives into
the mind, apprehends, leams; accepts (instruction or
criticism); Vin I 270,5 (Jivako komarabhacco bahu111 ca
-ati lahulTl ca -ati sunhu ca upadhareti gahitaJ!l e' assa
na pamussati); D III128,11 (aya111 kho ayasma atthaJ!l ...
miccha -ati); A Ili 199,8 (te maya eva111 vuccamano na
padakkhil)aJ!l -anti); Ja 1 159,16 (so kira bhikkhu
dubbaco ovadaJ!l na -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ati); -
6. takes a road; A IV 193,23 (ummaggaJ!l -ati); -
7. seizes sexually; ? J a V 17 ,3* foll. ( sassu111 pi -eyya
atho pi sul)haJ!l . . . dasa111 pi -e; 19,10' foll.: -eyya ti
bhariyasaññaya kilesavasena hatthe -eyya, dasaJ!l pi -e
ti attano dasaJ!l pi kilesavasena samiko me ti -eyya); -
gabbhaJ!l -ati, conceives, becomes pregnant; A 11 73,28
(assatañ attavadhaya gabbhaJ!l -ati); Ap 42,12 (meghesu
gajjamanesu gabbhaJ!l -anti ta sada): Mil368,26 (dipini
~ ye,·a gabbhal!l -ati): - namaJ!l etc -ati, names,
mentions: la III 305.:5· ma namagottaJ!l -anti raja
sammaggatan · ujjugatana deYal:- gaJ_lhati in Ce. Ee. Se
at la I 303.:' i5 prob. 11-rfor ganeti tBe so):- gaJ_lhatl ti
in Ee at Sp 1265.:9 is liT for gai_lhahi ti (Be, Ce, Se so):
- fut. 3 sg. (a) gahessati (and gahissati) [S. grahi~yati].
S IV 179,25 (na avagaggaho gahessati, Be so; Se
gahiyati; Ce avanaggaha hessatha; Ee avanagaho
hessatha) = 181,9 (Be so; Ce, Ee gahissati; Se gahiyati);
A Ili 423,1 (cittassa nimitta111 gahessati ti, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce gaJ_lhissatl ti); Ja VI 552,2* (ko ne hatthe gahessati;
552,13·: gahessati ti kilamathavinodanatthaya ko
gaJ_lhissati); (b) gaJ_lhissati, J a IV 316,2o (yo eta111 ekikam
eva -issati tassa dassama ti); As 375,8; 1 sg.
(a) gahessami, gahessaJ!l, V in Ili 51,33 (patita111
bhaJ.19al!l gahessami ti); Ja I 263,12 (Bariil)asirajja111
gahessami ti); V 183,26* (hatthe pi te gahessaJ!l);
Cp l :9:29 (ahaJ!l Jali111 gahessami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gahissami); (b) gaJ_lhissami, gaJ_lhissaJ!l, Ja I 263,18
(Kosalaraja kira Baranasirajja111 -issami ti agacchati);
279,4 (ta111 sayaJ!l dipakato agacchantam eva -issami ti);
Vism 39,4 (sve silani -issami ti); Sp 331,25 (ime macche
-issami ti); Mhv 18:19 (katha111 nu sakhaJ!l -issa111);-
gaJ_lhissaJ!l in Ee, Se at Thi 398 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
gaJ_lhiya; 3 pl. (a) gahessanti, V in I 191,6 (kathaJ!~ hi
nama . . . gavinaJ!l . . . visal)esu pi gahessanti); Ja III
34,19* (ya111 nu cora111 gahessanti); (b) gaJ_lhissanti, Ja III
34,8 (sace .. . ima111 coraJ!l -issanti); Sv 622,26; -
part.pr. (a) gai_lha(t), mfn., Vism 570,13 (sassato aya111
atta ti -ato); Sp 485,2o (-ata); Sv 519,6 (smi.kadini -ataJ!l
koso va99hati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gaJ_lhantanaJ!l);
As 371,2o (so paraJ!l maraJ_la hoti ti -ato pa~hama
sassatadi!1hi); neg. a(g)gaJ_lha(t), mfn., Sv 518,30
(agaJ_1hata111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se agaJ_lhantanam);
(b) gaJ_lhanta, mfi-anti)n., Vin I 85,12 (mukhodana111 pi
14
-anta kilamanti); A I 24,2o (pa~hama111 sa1akaJ!l
-antanaJ!l); Thi 507 (adipita til)ukka -antaJ!l dahati
n' eva muñcanta111); Ja III 275,13 (gocaraJ!l -anto carati);
V 161,11 (sa tassa santika vara111 -ant!); Spk I 235,2s
(madhu111 -antiyo ); Pv-a 18,1 (nama111 -anto Kuveran ti
adim aha); - neg. a(g)gaJ_lhanta, mfn., A III 423,2
(cittassa nimittaJ!l agaJ_lhanto); Ja III 276,4 (tumhakaJ!l
sahayo ma111 attano vacana111 agal)hanti111 pi!1hiya111
pahari ti); Spki 217,12; Ud-a 245,25 (tassa vacanaJ!l
agal)hanto na111 anadiyanto); (e) gaJ_lhamana, mfn., Ja III
442,20' (sotas' eva kahapal)e -amano, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
-anto); Mp III 206,10 (evaJ!l punappunaJ!l cuti-
pa~isandhiyo -amano); - neg. a(g)gal)hamana, mfn.,
Nidd I 108,2; - aor. 3 sg. (a) aggahesi, V in 1 308,15;
III 58,8 (theyyacitto aggahesi); MI 194,1; SI 84,12
(jivagahaJ!l ca naJ!l aggahesi); A III 376,3; Pv 40:9; Ja I
52,25; VI 282,17* (raja kali111 vicina111 aggahesi); Spk II
150,25; (b) gahesi, Ja III 296,4•; (e) aggah\', Ja III 373,13*;
IV 329,21*; V 91,4* (SambulaJ!l aggahi bhuje; 91,25·:
aggahesi); VI 282,1s*; Cp 2:2:5; Mhv 9:19; 25:7;
(d) gaJ_lhi, Ja I 149,17 (bodhisatto migayoniyaJ!l
pa~isandhi111 -i); V 158,22*; 375,2o·; Dhp-a I 113,19;
2 sg. (a) aggahesi, Vin III 58,14 (ma bhante mayha111
sa~akaJ!l aggahesi ti); (b) gahi, Ja V 371,t8* (katha111 gahi
ti; 371,24·: kathaJ!~ gaJ_lhi ti); (e) gaJ_lhi, Ja V 371,24';
1 sg. (a) aggahesi111, V in I 308,22; (b) gahesi(lTl),
Ap 372,17 (gahes' aha111); Ap-a 282,3; (e) aggahi111,
Th 97; Ja V 70,28* (givaJ!l bahahi aggahi111; 73,5·:
aggahesi111); Cp 1:9:30; (d) gahi111, Ap 74,2o;
(e) agaJ_lhi(lTl), Ap 42,16 (agaJ_lhi 'haJ!l, Ce, Ee so; Be
agaJ_lh' aha111; Ap-a 282,3: agai_1hi111 gahesi111);
(f) gaJ_1hi111, Th 1024 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gal)hi); Ps III
112,zo; - 3 pl. (a) aggahesu111, Vin I 88,31; Sn 847
(saññaJ!l ca dighi111 ca ye aggahesu111); Ja IV 251 ,3*;
Sadd 503,21; (b) gahesu111, Ja III 34,13* (ma taJ!l gahesu111
rajano); Cp-a 179,13; (e) aggahu111, Ap 77,8; Sadd 503,21;
(d) aggahi111su, Sadd 503,z1; (e) agaJ_lhUlTl, Ja IV 116,23*
(pitaraJ!l me maharaja cora agai_1hu111 kanane; 117 ,11·:
agaJ_lhun ti -i111su); (f) gai_1hi111su, Vin I 148,31; Ja I
254,12; 2 pl. gaJ.!hittha, A III 350,6 (ma puggalesu
pamiil)alTl -ittha); Ja I 254,4 (tumhe maJ!l kimatthaya
-ittha ti); - inf (a) gahetu111 [cf S. grahitu111]. V in I
92,37 (nahaJ!l ussahami therassa nama111 gahetu111); S V
218,20 (nasakkhi pañhassa pariyanta111 gahetu111): A III
52,11 (na sukara111 puññassa pamiil)aJ!l gahetu111): Ja I
263,15 (rajja111 gahetu111 samattha); Sp 154,19; Spk II
323,4 (sankhara pi na sakka niccadivasena gahetu111);
Mhv 8:23; Sadd 503,7; - neg. a(g)gahetu111, Sp 357,26;
- (b) gal)hitu111, Ja III 281,5 (tvaJ!l ma111 maretva
mantaJ!l gaJ.!hitukama si ti, Be so; Ce, Se gaJ.!hitukama ti;
Ee wr gaJ.!hitakama ti); VI 282,1o (gal)hitu111 nasakkhi);
Nidd I 177,7; Sp 373,12; Sadd 503,5; - absol.: taking;
holding; seizing; with; mentioning, referring to;
(a) gahetva, V in I 8,31 (Upako ajiviko ... ummaggaJ!l
gahetva pakkami); 30,1t (tato phalaJ!l gahetva); M III
163,28 (coraJ!l agucari111 gahetva); 179,13 (tam enaJ!l ...
nirayapala nanabahasu gahetva Y amassa ranno
dassenti); S IV 176,19 (vamena hatthena rasmiyo
gahetva); A I 160,6 (til)hani satthani gahetva
aññamaññassajivita voropenti); Sn 673 (jivha111 balisena
gal}hati
gahetva); Vv 30:6 (pithaq¡ gahetva paharam adasi me);
Ja I 151,20 (ahaq¡ ... tassa santakaq¡ maral).aq¡ gahetva
idha nipanno); IV 250,25 (ekaq¡ thirasatakaq¡ catüsu
kaJ:!.IJ.esu gahetva); Nidd I 102,9 (gahetva uggahetva
gal).hitva ... ); Sp 1178,11 (tassa namaq¡ gahetva ayaq¡
itthannamo bhikkhu ti kammavaca katabba); PsI 32,8
(bhute subha sukhita ti gahetva); Spk II 150,23 (sikkha-
padani gahetva); It-a II 113,15 (ye pana il).aq¡ gahetva
patidatuq¡ asakkonta); Sadd 503,7; - neg. agahetva,
aggahetva 1, Ja I 159,19 (ovadaq¡ agahetva); II 66,5
(bhikkhusaii.ghassa namaq¡ agahetva); IV 250,7;
Sp 323,9; Ud-a 245,24; It-a II 2,8; - (b) gahetvana,
Vin IV 259,11 * (haq¡sarajaq¡ gahetvana); Sn 309;
Pv 21 :2; Ja II 280,4* (bahaya maq¡ gahetvana laghiya
anuta!ayi); Ap 395,9; Mhv 36:93; (e) gal).hitva, Ja I
222,13; Thi 123; Ap 25,27 (hatthena hatthaq¡ gal).hitva);
Nidd I 92,31; Mhv 6:6; Sadd 503,5;- neg. a(g)gal).hitva,
Dhp-a I 116,11; (d) gal).hitvana, Mhv 32:16; (e) gal).hiya,
Thi 398 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gal).hissaq¡, prob. wr);
Mhv 29:16; (f) gayha 1, Ja V 302,12* (gayha vako
gacchati yenakamaq¡; 303,s·: vako gahetva) = 302,20' (Se
so; Ee wr gayha; Be siii.galasaii.gha parikac.l<;lhissanti; Ce
sigalasaii.gha parika¡)<)hayanti); Ap 50,11; Mhv 18:6;
(g) gahaya, Sn 791 (kapi va sakhaq¡ pamuñcaq¡ gahaya,
Ee so; Be gahayaq¡; Ce, Se pamukhaq¡); (h) gahaq¡
[IJ.amul; cf S. graham], seizing; so as to take; ? - ifc se e
jiva-;- see also gaheta(r);- pass.: is held, is taken; is
understood; is mentioned, is meant; pr. 3 sg.
(a) gayhati, V in I 88,35 (sace mayaq¡ -eyyama); S II
198,18 (ayaq¡ akase piil).i na sajjati na -ati na bajjhati);
Sp 1065,23 (akaro nama yena tesaq¡ ... acarasaJ:!.thanaq¡
-ati); Ps III 433,2sfoll. (yadi ca jatiya brahmaiJ.o
bhaveyya, so pi attano patiññaq¡ paresaq¡ va upadesaq¡
vina khattiyato ... visesena -eyya, na ca -ati, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee gaiJ.heyya); Spk II 268,16 (na paritassati ti na -ati
na bhayati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se na gal).hati na gahati);
It-a li 46,32 (seghavasen' eva hi saral).aq¡ -ati);
Vv-a 135,s (kittisaddaggahai_lena ca kittisaddahetubhüta
gul).a -anti); Sadd 503,12 (gaha ... kammani -ati); -
part.pr. (a) gayhanti, (m)j(n)., Sv 92,15 (gharago)ikaya
makkhika -anti mutta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gahetva);
(b) gayhamana, mftz., A IV 6S,2o (darake gahite va
-amane va); Ja VI 429,6 (gehesu -amanesu); Sp 330,15
(koci maccho -amano ito e' ito ca dhavati); Ud-a 54,6
(pubbe pañcavaggiyehi -amanaq¡ bhagavato gottaq¡
anussaranto); Mhv 17:47; - neg. agayhamana, mftz.,
Sv 710,3;- pr. 3 sg. (b) gaJ}.h'íyati, Nidd I 420,16 (-anti
uggal).hiyanti); Sv 668,24 (tavatakaq¡ aharapiyatu -atu,
yattakaq¡ icchatha tattakaq¡ gaiJ.hatha ti vuttaq¡ hoti, Be
so; Ce gayhatu; Ee aharapeyyatu -atu; Se aharapeyyatu
gal).hapeyyatu); Patis-a 416,19 (upadiyati ti bhusaq¡ -ati,
upadiyati ti va patho, Be, Se so; Ce upadiyanti ti -anti,
upadiyati ti va patho; Ee upadiyanti ti bhusaq¡ gal).hanti,
upadiyati ti va patho); Sadd 503,12 (kammani gayhati .. .
-ati va); (e) giyate, Nidd I 420,16 (giyanti kathiyanti .. .
athava giyanti gal).hiyanti uggal).hiyanti; cfPj II
567,sfoll.: tattha sikkhanugiyanti ... anekasikkha
kathiyanti uggayhanti va); - gal).hiyamanaq¡ in Ee at
Ja II 16,19" is wr for gal).iyamanaq¡ (Be, Ce, Se so); -
pp gahita, gahita, mftz. and n. [S. grhita], l. (mftz.) taken,
15
seized, held; grasped in the mind, apprehended, leamt;
mentioned, referred to, meant; V in I 45,37 (-o hoti
upajjhayo); III 8S,12 (aññataro bhikkhu amanussena -o
hoti); Mili l66,1o (pasaiJ.o -o); Alll 201,17 (bahuq¡ ca
gal).hati -aq¡ e' assa na pamussati ti); Th 786 (coro yatha
sandhimukhe gahito); Ja II 336,7* (khagge gahite
tikkhii_le); III333,26* (maha me -o maccho); IV 337,3*
(sace hi tyahaq¡ dhanahetu gahito, Be, Ee so, me ? Ce, Se
-o); V 497 ,8* (parosataq¡ khattiya te gahita; 497 ,12·: te
gahita ti taya -a); Sp 371,15 (theyyacittena ca -aq¡); Ps II
343,1o (vedana sañña viññaiJ.an ti imani tiiJ.i gahetva
pañña kasma na -a); Spk I 111,4 (kamasaññaya ...
kamabhavo rüpasaq¡yojanena rüpabhavo -o); It-a II
59,10 (seyyagahal).ena e' ettha asanaq¡ pi -an ti
daghabbaq¡); Spk li 69,1 (--tta); Mhv 14:53; -
--patisandhika, mftz., who has taken a new existence, has
been conceived; Ja I 51 ,2s (--patisandhikassa bodhi-
sattassa); Vism 424,9; Sv 502,17; - 2. (n.) grasping,
holding; grasp; Vin III 121,23 (gahal).aq¡ nama
--mattaq¡);- neg. agahita, aggahiti,mftz., Jai 217,12
(senasanesu agahitesv eva); Mil 83,26 (asi ... aggahito
hatthena); Sp 1230,17; PsI 134,1 (agahitam eva hoti
sarai_laq¡); II 253,31; Spk I 354,7 (agahitatta); -
duggah\'ta, mftz. and n., taken improperly; grasped badly
or wrongly; wrongly apprehended; what is wrongly
grasped, a mistaken opinion or belief, Vin I 308,26
([civaraq¡] duggahitaq¡); MI 133,2 (attana duggahitena,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se duggahitena); 133,31 foll. (dhamma
duggahita ... duggahitatta ... dhammanaq¡ ... , Ce, E e so;
Be, Se duggahita ... duggahitatta ... ); A II 147,2o
(bhikkhu duggahitaq¡ suttantaq¡ pariyapul).anti, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se duggahitaq¡); Dhp 311 (kuso yatha duggahito
hattham evanukantati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se duggahito);
Ja VI 307,16 (ayaq¡ loko duggahitena nassati, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se duggahitena); 308,4* (na capi me duggahit' atthi
kiñci); 308,2o (VaruiJ.ena duggahitaq¡ gahetva Pm_ll).ako
aiJ.atto bhavissati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se duggahitaq¡);
Mhv 4:34; - sugahita, suggahita, mftz., properly taken;
grasped well or correctly; apprehended or leamt well;
Vin I 308,25 ([civaraq¡] suggahitaq¡); MI 134,13foll. (te
dhamma suggahita ... suggahitatta ... dhammanaq¡ ... ,
Ce, E e so; Be, Se sugahita ... sugahitatta ... );A II 148,14
(bhikkhü suggahitaq¡ suttantaq¡ pariyapul).anti, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se suggahitaq¡); Ud 59,25 (suggahitani bhikkhu
so!asa aghakavaggikani sumanasikatani supadharitani;
cfUd-a 312,19: suggahitani ti samma uggahitani);
Th 1028 (suggahitaq¡ ca gal).hati atthaq¡
copaparikkhati,); Ja I 222,26 (ahaq¡ taq¡ sugahitaq¡
gahetva gamissami ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be suggahitam);
II 177,6* (suggahitasmiq¡ katthasmiq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
suggahitasmiq¡); Vism 98,25 (bhagavato santike
gahitakammatthanaq¡ sugahitaq¡ hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
suggahitaq¡); - fpp (a) gahetabba, mftz. and n. impers.
[cf S. grahitavya], V in I 45,31 (evaq¡ ca pana bhikkhave
upajjhayo -o); 191,12 (na bhikkhave gavinaq¡ visaiJ.ena
-aq¡); II 265,3 (bhikkhuhi bhikkhuninaq¡ ovado -o ti);
Ja I 346,29 (-aq¡ gahapetva); Mi1400,1 (sihassa satta
aii.gani -ani ti); Vism 185,6 (pañcavidhena nimittaq¡
-aq¡); Sp 231,19 (attanomati ... -a); 1069,22 (taq¡ n' eva
atthakathayaq¡ na pa!iya vuttaq¡ tasma na -aq¡); Spk III
 16
17,25 (aban ti va maman ti va -a111 kiñci adisva);
Dhp-a III 309,11 (idh' eva bhikkha -a ti); V v-a 135,3o
(--taya); Ap-a 51,21 (vittharato pan' esa attho
Cariyapitakato -o ti); As 337,27 (--tta); Sadd 433,1o
(ayam eva patho -o);- neg. a(g)gahetabba, mfn., Ja III
117,5 (yuddhena agahetabb~ katva nagara111 ajjhavasi);
VI 380,3·; Patis-a 247,1o; As 337,25 (agahetabbatta); -
(b) gal}hitabba, mfn., Ja IV 164,12" (na ve suga!_lhan ti na
ve sukhena -a111); Nidd I 183,17 (na -a na
paramasitabba); Vism 70,11 (gai_!hantena ca
pama¡;¡ayuttam eva -~); Sp 506,9 (mügabbata111 -~);
- (e) gayha2 , mfn.; - ifc see indriya-, dvihattha-; -
-'-upaga, -'-upaka, mfn.,fit to be taken or seized; worth
holding or taking, valuable; able to be gol hold of or
obtained; susceptible; Ja IV 219,13 (kañci -'-üpaga111
adisva, Ce so; Be, Se -' -upaga111; Ee -' -üpaka111);
Mil 325,10; Vism 663,24 (aphalo vatay~ rukkho n' atth'
ettha kiñci -'-u pagan ti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se -'-u pagan ti);
Pj II 283,24 (samaka ti dhunitva va sisani uccinitva va
-'-u paga ti¡;¡adhaññajati); Dhp-a I 337,2 (yatha mañci
dürethitana111 ... -'-u paga vi ya hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-'-upaga); 1129,15 (eko [coro] dhammakatha111 assosi,
eko attano -'-upaga111 olokesi); Pv-a4,12 (cora pana
ghara111 pavisitva --upaga111 bhai_1c;la111 gahetva); -
neg. agayhupaga, mfn., Ja III 118,5' (agayhupagassa
ti¡;¡assa ca anadana111, Be so; Ce, Se agayhupakassa; Ee
agayhüpakassa); IV 174,14' (ya111 ya111 cammassa
agayhüpagaghan~ hoti ta111 t~ cajitva upahan~
katva, Be so; Ce, Se agayhupaga-; E e agayhüpaka- );
V 367,28. (agayhüpagaghena mañci, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
agayhupagaghena); Spk 11 322,3foll. (yatha ca so
[bubbu~o] abalo agayhüpago ... agayhüpagataya vedana
bubbu~asadisa. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agayhupago); -
agayha, mfn .. not to be got hold of, Mil387,zo (akaso
sabbaso agayho ); -caus.: causes to take (or lay hold
of); causes to be taken or seized; hands over, distributes,
allots (to, dat./gen.); causes to learn, teaches; pr. 3 sg.
(a) gaheti, -aya ti, Vin 11 88,11 foll. (bhikkhunina111
pakkh~ -eti ... pakkha111 -essati); 167,z5foll. (na
bhikkhave nissime thitassa senasan~ -etabba111, yo
-eyya apatti dukkatassa ti); M I 238,33 (te imehi kaya111
bala111 -enti nama briihenti nama); A I 199,11*
(uparambh~ na sikkheyya khalita111 ca na -aye); Ja VI
215,1' (ta111 ta111 vatva micchagaha111 -entl ti, Be, Ce so;
Se -ayanti ti; Ee wr gahenti ti); Kv 165,30 (handa hi
vimati111 -ayissama ti); Vism 167,2 (aya111 so, gai_!hatha
nan ti ta111 pi -ayati) = Sp 154,23 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
gahapayati); 1230,6 (ma avuso eva111 -etha); 1250,14
(purimadivasesu amhehi na laddha111, idani ta111
amhak~ -etha ti); It-a 11 159,8 (asuka111 na vagati ti
-en ti sikkhapenti); Sadd 503,10 (-eti -ayati); -
part.pr. gahenta, mfn., V in 11 167,17 (seyyaggena -enta
seyya ussadiyi111su; cfSp 1223,5: -enta ti seyya-
paricchedena -iyamana); Sp 1230,10; - aor. 3 sg.
(a) gahesi, V in II 199,2 (Devadatto ... salak~ -esi ...
salak~ gai_!hatii ti); (b) agahayi, Ja III 203,7* (yo 'y~
saliyachapo ti kai_1hasappa111 agahayi); (e) gahayi,
Ap 82,16 (salak~ -ayi jino);- inf (a) gahetu111, Vin 11
166,36; Sp 1265,25 (Be so; Ce gahetu111; Ee, Se -itu111,
prob. wr); Mhv 33:48; - neg. agahetu111, Sp 1251,19;
gal}hiiti
(b) gahayitu111, Vism 167,6 = Sp 154,27; - gahitu111 in
Ee, Se at Sp 1234,17 is wr for gahita111 (Be, Ce so); -
absol. (a) gahetva, S V 47,8 (te tattha kay~ vac;Ic;Ihetva
bala111 -etva); Vism 63,26; Sp 1250,24; 1259,23 (Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se wr gahetva); Mhv 20:45; - neg. agahetva,
Sp 1265,22; (b) gahayitva, Mhv 10:31; (e) gahayitvana,
Mhv 33:47; 35:11; (d) gahiya, Mhv 37:4 (vinayavadi
maya111 raja ¡tJ -iya bhiipati111); -pass.
pr. 3 sg. gahiyati, Sp 1250,22 (-iyati); - part.pr.
gahiyamana, mfn., Sp 1192,29 (salakaya -iyamanaya);
1250,21; - pp gahita, mfn., distributed, allotted; given;
made to hold; Vism 78,5; Sp 511,7 (duddassanassa
-ita-tta duddasika); 1231,16 (-ite senasane); Pv-a 244,29
(micchagaha111 -ito);- gahitatta in Ee at Sp 1266,10 is
wr for gahitatta (Be, Ce, Se so); - gahita in Be, Ee at
Ja IV 337,3* is prob. me for gahita qv;
neg. agahita, mfn., not (yet) distributed; Sp 1259,14
(agahite yeva patte); - sugahita, mfn., well or properly
allotted or given; Sp 1253,2o; - fpp gahetabba, mfn.,
Vin 11 166,37 (kena nu kho senasan~ -etabban ti);
Sp 358,6; 1229,23; 1265,3o (salaka -etabba, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se wr gahetabba); - caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) gahapeti,
-ayati, Vin I 271,38 (sappi111 picuna -essati); II 134,32
(bhikkhü .. . madhusitthakena pi nasikaloma111 -enti);
134,37 (yo -eyya); D III 189,24 (acariya ... antevasi111 ...
suvinita111 vinenti suggahit~ -enti); Sp 154,23 (ta111 pi
-ayati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gahayati) = As 177,14;
Sp 1230,31 (aññ~ -ehi ti); Sv 602,2o (alimpessama ti
aggi111 -essama); Spk 11 323,24 (maya ca mahajan~
vañceti, y~ kiñcid eva . . . mutta ti pi -eti);
Khuddas 8:19 (-ayanti sabbhava111); Sadd 503,10
(-essati); - part.pr. gahapenta, mf( -enti)n., Sp 355,2o
(utu111 -entassa); Ps II 70,8 (-en tiya, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
gai_!hapentiya);- aor. 3 sg. (a) gahapesi, Ja II 344,21 (Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee gai_!hapesi); Spk I 192,18; (b) gahapayi,
Pv 36:42; 2 sg. gahapesi, Ja V 374,12' (dhammasotukamo
kira no -esi); 3 pl. gahapesu111, Ja I 53,7; - absol.
(a) gahapetva, Vin I 94,7 (upajjh~ -etva); Ja I 458,24
(khadaniyabhojaniyani ca -etva); 11416,1 (mahajan~
tava katha111 -etva); Sp 55,17 (kumar~ cha¡;¡avesa111
-etva); 323,6 (vata111 -etva); Dhp-a I 193,12
(Cai_!c;lapajjoto pi Uden~ jivagaham eva -etva);
IV 232,17 (u¡;¡hodakassa kaja111 purisena -etva, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee gahapetva); Mhv 11:21; - neg. a(g)gahapetva,
Sp 1025,9; Spk II !68,15; (b) gahapetvana, Cp 2:4:7
(-etvana cetake; Cp-a 135,29 foil.: cetakehi gai_!hapetva
cetake va attano rajapurise il¡;¡apetva t~ paribbajik~
ga¡;¡hapetva); Mhv 20:44; (e) gahapayitva, Mhv 7:49; -
pp gahapita, mfn., Ja II 378,s (kedarato salisisamutthi
-ito); Sp 137,28 ([a¡;¡c;Iani] kukkutagandh~ -itani ti) =
Mp IV 61,4 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gai_!hapitani ti); Dhp-a IV
13,12; - fpp gahapetabba, mfn., Vin I 94,6 (patham~
upajjha111 -etabbo); Sp 765,28 (sama!_ler~ ukkhipitva
phal~ -etabb~); Nidd-a II 124,33; - caus. pr. 3 sg.
(e) gal}hapeti, -ayati, Vin IV 163,3o (uggai_!hapeyya ti
añña111 -eti); Ja VI 387,8· (senaka111 -ehi ti); Sp 333,28
(vat~ -eti); Ps 11 82,15 (kulehi saddhi111 vera111 -eti ti);
III 304,2 (n~ gahetva kasayani niharitva gihives~
-etha ti); IV 126,8 (desitasuttassa nama bhagavata
nam~ na gahita111, hand' assa nama -essami ti
gal}hiipaka
cintetva ... ); Spk I 177,23 (samadapet! ti -eti); Nidd-a I
194,18 (vohareyya nanavidhena -eyya hoti ca na ca hot!
ti); Sadd 503,8 (gaha ... karite -eti -ayati); - part.pr.
(a) gal).hapenta, mf(-entl)n., Ja II 105,13 (uyyanapalo
akalapupphani pupphapento akalaphalani -ento );
Sp 137,26 (utuq1 -entiya); 191,5 (gabbhaq1 -entassa);
Cp-a 76,5 (vare -ento); (b) gal).hapaya(t), mfn., Sp 690,25
(ekaq1 gal).hato va -ayato va); - aor. 3 sg. gal).hapesi,
Ja VI 144,3 (raja pi andhabalo puna tassa vacanena putte
-esi); Spkii 221,14; Jpl.gal).hapesuql, JaiV 338,w;
1 pl. gal).hapayimha, Ps III 327,23 (matapitaro tata
kucchigatam eva taq1 saral).aql -ayimha ti sarenti); -
absol. gal).hapetva, Ja I 264,6 (Sllavamaharajanaq1 ...
-etva); Sp 140,18; Ud-a 242,6; - pp gal).hapita, mfn.,
Ps Il 251,10 (upajjhaq1 -itani pañca bhikkhusatani
aheSUql).
gal}hapaka, m(jn). ffrom gal).hapeti, caus. of gal).hati qv],
one who causes to take or hold; Spk III 224,6
(samadapako ti idaq1 e' idaq1 ca gal).hatha ti evaq1 -o);
- se e also gahapaka.
gal}hiipana, n. ffrom gal).hapeti, caus. of gal).hati qv],
causing to take or hold; Ja IV 200,19 (akale phalaq1
0
-mantaql janati); Sv 1055,28 (ayaq1 hi appamado nama
sllapüral).e . . . vipassanagabbhaq1 -e . . . aghasu vijjasü
ti... kusaladhammesu bahüpakaro); - see also
gahapana.
gal}hiipeta(r), m. ffrom gal).hapeti, caus. of gal).hati qv],
one who causes to take or hold; Nidd-a I 107,31 (tighiiql'
ahaq1 samadapeta ti ahaq1 -a pati~~apeta tit!hami).
gal}hita- in Ee at Pv-a 43,16 (gal).hitamattaql) is wr for
gahita- (Be, Ce, Se so); and in Ee at Ps III 330,1o
(gal).hitamattam eva) is wr for gal).ita- (Be, Ce so; Se
gahita-).
gal}hiya, absol. of gal).hati qv.
gata, mfn. and n., pp of gacchati qv.
2 mahanasa); VI 526,14* (yo yacataq1 -1 asi savant!naq1 va
gataka, m(jn). [gata+ ka ], (one) who has gone, (one) who
went; Ja I 86,5 (raja n' eva -o va agacchati na sasanaq1
süyatl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Sen' eva gato); Vism 97,6 (añño
esa avuso -assa maggo nama ti; Vism-mh~ [Be] I 118,27;
-assa ti pa~ipattigamanena gatassa di~~asaccassa); - ifc
see tatha-, paccha-.
gati (and gati me), f [S. gati], Abh 793 (bhavabhede
patinhayaq1 nitthajjhasayabuddh1su vasaghane ca
gamane visadatte gatlrita, Ce so; Be visa~atte gatlrita);
Sadd 465,23 foil. (-1 ti gatigati nibbattigati ajjhasayagati
vibhavagati nipphattigati ñal).agat! ti bahuvidha -i
nama); Ps III 364,21 foil. (gatisaddo . . . bhavabhede
vattati . . . nivasanaghane . . . paññaya . . . visa~abhave,
idha pana ninhaya vattati ti veditabbo); l. (i) going,
moving; gait; progress, movement; Abh 793 (gamane);
A I 112,4 (taq1 [cakkaq1] pavattitaq1 samanaq1 yavatika
abhisailkharassa -i tavatikaq1 gantva ... ; Mp II 181,11:
payogassa gamanaq1); Vism 104,31 (mohacarito
parivyakulaya -iya gacchati); Sp 151,22 (bhümiyaq1 viya
purisassa cittassa -i sukha hoti); 172,2 (yesaq1 hi
dhatünaq1 -i attho, buddhi pi tesaq1 attho); Ud-a 152,23
(yatha ruci tatha gataq1 -i gamanaq1 kayavacicitta-
ppavatti etassa ti tathagato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee agati) =
It-a I 136,19; Vibh-a 446,29 (ahaq1 dubbalo tava -iya
gantuq1 na sakkhissami); Sadd412,13 (chama -imhi);
17 gati
413,16 (gamu -iyaq1); - ifc see mudu-, vañka-; -
(ii) progress in knowledge; understanding; ? MI 82,33
(paramaya satiya ca -iya ca dhitiya ca samannagata;
Ps II 52,2: padasataq1 pi padasahassaq1 pi vadantass'
eva . . . adharal).a-upanibandhanasamatthata -i nama);
Th 557 (dandha mayhaq1 -1 así; Th-a II 239,19: -1 ti
ñal).agati); - 2. where one goes or has gone; course,
path; way, method; Abh 395; MI 154,24 (imaq1 ...
nivapaq1 ... paribhuñjanti na ca nesaq1 jan ama agatiq1 va
-iq1 va); Dhp 92 (akase va sakuntanaq1 -i tesaq1
durannaya); Ja III 255,17* (na me rucci Migalopa yassa te
tadisa -i atuccaq1 tata patasi); V 44,25* (kathaq1 vijanemu
-iq1 gajassa); Ap 375,15 (-i tesaq1 upacchinna ...
pil).<;laya te na gacchanti oruddha nadikaya); Pv-a 6,6
(ayyo Mahamoggallano ... tassa -iq1 janeyya); - ijc see
paji-; - 3. where one goes, where one moves; one's
sphere; Abh 793 (vasaghane); D III 264,14
(paccantimesu janapadesu paccajato hoti ... yattha natthi
-i bhikkhünaq1 bhikkhun1naq1); S IV 197,26 (bhikkhu
rüpaq1 samannesati yavata rüpassa -i); A II 161,35
(yavata . . . channaq1 phassayatananaq1 -i tavata
papañcassa -i); Ja VI 46,4* (ko tesaq1 -im apaye;
46,1Yfoll.: ko maq1 tesaq1 paccekabuddhanaq1 nivasana-
ghiinaql papeyya); Ap 392,27 (ñal).e te upama natthi
yavata jagato -i. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ca gato -i); -
4. where one goes to; one 's destination; a refuge, a
recourse; Abh 793; Vin V 149,22* foil. (-i miganaq1
pavanaq1 akaso pakkhinaq1 -i vibhavo -i dhammanaq1
nibbanaq1 arahato -i; Sp !353,22foll.: ajjhokase
vyagghadihi paripatiyamananaq1 miganaq1 pavanaq1 ...
-i pa~isaral).aql hoti . . . avassaq1 upagamana~~ena pana
vibhavo -i dhammanaq1 ... ); Dhp 380 (atta hi attano
natho atta hi attano -i; Dhp-a IV 117 ,to: -i patigha
saral).aql); Ja IV 293,14* (putta mam' a~~a -im agato
'smi); V 339,2o* (ka nu pasena baddhassa -i añña
sagaro); Nidd I 411,11; Vism 647,14 (na lel).aql na -i na
pa~isaral).aql paññayati); Spk 11 268,4 (attanaq1 d1paq1
tiil).aq1 lel).aql -iq1 parayanaq1 patighaq1 katva viharatha
ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -i); Ap-a 159,26 (patibaddhacitto
ti ahaq1 imaq1 vina na jivami esa me -i esa me
parayal).an ti);- 5. where one goes in lije, one's career,
destiny; what happens to one; outcome, issue; Abh 793;
Vin II1 14,23 (sace Sudinno nabhiramissati ... pabbajjaya
ka tassa añña -i bhavissati, idh' eva paccagamissati);
D II 16,13 (mahapurisassa dve -iyo bhavanti anañña ...
raJa hoti cakkavattt dhammiko . . . arahaq1 hoti
sammasambuddho); Sn 1001 (dve va tassa -iyo tatiya hi
na vijjati); Ja I 56,18 (asaq1sayaq1 buddho bhavissat! ti
ekam eva -iq1 addasa); III 65,10* (ka su bhante -I
mamaq1; 65,15': ka nipphatti bhavissatl ti pucchi);
Cp 3:2:11 (rathiya rathiyaq1 dassetha sa -i jatilahijita;
Cp-a 191,24: yehi ayaq1 ja~ilo hijito tesaq1 jatilah1jitanaql
sa -i sa nipphatti so vipako ti); Mil 264,3o (yo gih1
arahattaq1 patto dve v' ass -iyo bhavanti anañña tasmiq1
yeva divase pabbajati va parinibbayati va); - 6. where
one goes after death; one 's future course, state of
existence; Abh 793 (bhavabhede); Vin I 293,34
(itthannamo bhante bhikkhu kalaq1 kato, tassa ka -i ko
abhisamparayo ti); DI 162,15 (yo 'haq1 ... imesaq1
gati
tapasslnatp. evatp. agatitp. ca -itp. ca cutitp. ca upapattitp.
ca yathabhiitatp. pajanami); MI 73,18 (pañca kho ima ...
-iyo . . . nirayo tiracchanayoni pittivisayo manussa
deva); III 165,6foll. (yavata hoti ... katakibbisanatp. -i
tatp. -itp. pecca gacchami); SI 19,5* (tasma satatp. ca
asatatp. ca nana hoti ito -i asanto nirayatp. yanti santo
saggaparayana); Dhp 31 O (apuñña1abho ca -1 ca papika);
Sn 644 (yassa -itp. na jananti deva gandhabbamanusa
kh!l).asavatp. arahantatp. ... ); Vv 44:16 (tassa -itp. brühi
kuhitp. upapanna sa); Pv 12:4 (gato so tassa ya -i);
Th 215 (satp.saratp. d!gham addhanarr -!su parivattisatp.;
Th-a II 106,31: pañcasu -!su cavana-upapajjanavasena
aparaparatp. satp.saranto ); 216 (sabba -1 samucchinna
natthi dani punabbhavo); Ja V 265,1* (katp. -itp. pecca
gacchanti nara dhammaticarino; 265,24': katarasmim
niraye paccantl ti pucchati); Nidd I 249,21 (-iya yena
tatp. vadeyyutp. nerayiko ti va tiracchanayoniko ti va);
Ap 443,2 (duve bhave satp.sarami devane atha manuse
aññatp. -itp. na janami); Pa!is 1 11,13 (pa!isandhi
abhiññeyya appa!isandhi . . . -i abhiññeyya agati .. .
nibbatti ... anibbatti ... upapatti ... anupapatti ... jati .. .
ajati ... ); Kv 261,2; Vism 237,1; Mi1108,28 (bhagava .. .
Devadattassa -itp. o1okento addasa Devadattatp. .. .
nirayena nirayatp. vinipatena vinipatatp. gacchantatp.);
Sp 397,24 (puthujjananatp. -i aniyata); Ps II 36,22 (ettha
sukatadukkatakammavasena gantabba ti -iyo); Pj II
345;; (vijjatp. Janatl yassanubhavena chavaslsatp.
ako!etva sattanarr -irr janati); Nidd-a 1 91,6 (nirayadi-
pañcannatp. -lnatp.J: Thiip 231,19* (cittappasadamattena
sugate -i uttama 1abbhat! ti); - ifc see pañca-; - see
also duggati. sugati: - (gaty)-akkhepa, m., convulsion
of mm·ement, convulsive movement; ? Sadd 334,28 (raghi
1aghi -e, -o gatiya akkhepo; cf however S. Dhatup
Wg § 4:35-7: aghi vaghi maghi gatyak~epe [dvandva ?];
Wg § 4:33-4: raghi 1aghi gatyarthai).);
(gaty)-avasiidana, (gaty)-iivasiidana, n., bringing
movement to an end; Dhatup 150 (sada visaral).a-
gatyavasadanesu); Sadd 384,1o (sida visaral).agaty-
avasadanesu: . . . gatyavasadanatp. gamanassa avasanatp.
osanatp. abhavakaral).am, nisidanan ti attho);
0
-gata, mfn. gone the fuil course; gone through the
proper process; settled; ? Vin II 85,3 (katame dasa
adhammika sa1akagaha, oramattakatp. ca adhikaral).atp.
hoti, na ca -atp. hoti na ca saritasaritatp. hoti ... ;
Sp 1192,24 foil.: dve tayo avase na gatatp. tattha tatth' eva
va dvattikkhattutp. avinicchitatp.); Ps III 364,24
(gatisaddo . . . -an ti adisu visa!abhave [vattati]); -
neg. agatigata, mfn., (or see agati below and BHS) Ja II
1,6 (Kosalaraja ekatp. agatigatatp. dubbinicchayatp. attarr
vinicchinitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gatigatatp.);- 0 -nivatti,
0
-nivutti,f [cf S. Dhatup Wg § 22:30: stha gatiniv¡ttau],
cessation of or refraining from movement; Pv-a 189,17
(tighasl ti idatp. !hanasaddassa 0 -nivatti-atthatta gatiya
patikkhepavacanatp.); Dhatup 359 (tha 0 -nivuttiyatp.); -
o -pailkavisosana, mfn., drying up the mud of future
existence; ? Ap 390,16 (nibbanagamanatp. maggatp. -atp.);
465,7 (sutva ca vimalatp. vakyatp. -atp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
o -paiJ.kavisodhanatp. ); - o -patighiita, m., the impeding
of movement; Sadd 355,12 (su!ha -e: gamana-
patihananarp -o); - 0 -ma(t), mfn. (sg. nom. 0 -ma,
18 gati
0
-manto), (according to cts) possessed ofunderstanding;
D III 107,4 (satima ka1ylil).apa!ibhano 0 -ma dhitima
m u tima ... ; Sv 893,21: gamanasamatthaya pannaya
samannagato); A 1 25,1 (etadaggatp. ... 0 -mantanatp.
yadidatp. Anando; Mp 1 287,3; ayam eva e' ayasma
ekapade !hatva satthipadasahassani gal).hanto satthara
kathitaniyamen' eva sabbapadani janati, tasma
0
0
-mantanatp. aggo nama jato); Th 1049 ( -manto
satlmanto dhitimanto .. . Anando; Th-a III 121 ,9:
0
-manto ti asadisaya ñlil).agatiya samannagato); Ja VI
286,26* ( 0 -ma dhitima mutima ... Vidhuro; 287,1o·:
ñlil).agatiya 0 -ma); Ap 263,13 (0 -ma dhitima e' eva satima
ca bahussuto ); Sp 552,24 (pal).<;lita ti pal).<;liccena
samannagata 0 -manta); Th-a III 208,28 (0 -mantataya);-
0
-va.iiita, mfn., without refuge or recourse; Mhv 72:286
(pa1ayitva sakatp. ratthatp. pavisi -o);- 0 (1)-vinivutti,f,
cessation, discontinuance, of movement, Dhatum 587
(!ha -iyarr);- 0 -vivajjita, mfn., deprived ofmovement,
unable to move; Cp 3:6:10 (mugo ahositp. badhiro
pakkho -o); - 0
-sampattipatibii}ha, mfn., opposed,
prevented, by a good future course; Vibh 338,19
(ekaccani papakani kammasamadanani -ani na
vipaccanti; Vibh-a 439,3!: gatisampattl ti sampanna gati
deva1oko ca manussa1oko ca); Mp II 219,14;- agati,f,
l. where one does not go or move; what is not one 's
sphere; a lack of recourse or resource; MI 158,29
(yattha -i Marassa ca Maraparisaya ca); SI 115,25
(yattha ca ... natthi cakkhu ... -i tava tattha papima);
133,21* (-i yattha Marassa tattha me nirato mano; Spk I
193,5: yattha tuyhatp. Marassa -i, tattha ti tasmitp.
nibbane); Ja V 255,16* (samuddarr .. . -i yattha
pakkhinarr); Ps II 167,16 (1okassa -l ti lokuttara); Pj II
241,17 (evatp. appasanna kasma pabbajita ti ce, -iya);-
2. not a future course; freedom from further existence;
where there are no (future) existences, nibbana; Ja V
489,10' (dhammo hi sugatitp. va -itp. va papeti adhammo
duggatitp., Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sugatitp. papeti nibbanatp.
va); Pa!is 1 12,10 (gati dukkhatp. -i sukhan ti); 15,9 (gati
saiJ.khara -i nibbanan ti); Dhp-a III 158,4 (so sugatitp.
e' eva -irr ca gacchanto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se sugatitp.
e' eva nibbanatp. ca); - 3. wrong or evil way of
behaviour or course (apparently especiaily in relation to
biased or dishonest judgments or decisions); V in I 339,38
(nalatp. ... chanda dosa moha bhaya -itp. gantutp.); Ja I
260,2 (catasso -iyo vajjetva dasa rajadhamme akopento);
339,26 (chandadivasena -itp. gacchanta rajjatp.
karessanti); Vism 683,28 foil. (-l ti chandadosamoha-
bhayehi akattabbakaral).assa kattabbakaral).assa ca
adhivacanatp., tatp. hi ariyehi agantabbatta -I ti vuccati);
Sp 7,14 (Ánando kiñcapi sekho abhabbo chanda ... -irr
gantutp.); Pj II 522,28 (titthiya mayaya va manena va
etatp. -itp. gacchanti); - ifc see chanda- (sv chanda\
2 --gama, m.,
dosa- (sv dosa ), bhaya-, moha-; -
foilowing a wrong course, corrupt behaviour; Sp 873,9*
(--gamatp. ca na gacchati, Ee so, prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
--gamanatp.; quoting Vin V 158,28*: eds --gamanatp.);-
--gamana, n., foilowing a wrong course, corrupt
behaviour; V in V 158,24* (--gamanatp. ca gacchati ediso
vuccati alajjipuggalo) quoted Sp 872,13*; D III 228,14
(cattari --gamanani, chandagatitp. gacchati dosagatitp. ...
gatika
mohagatilJl ... bhayagatilJl ... ) t A 11 18,14; Ja V 98,25
(raja --gamane thito adhammena pamatto rajjalJl karesi);
Vism 670,24 (dhammiko raja vinicchayaghane nisinno
voharikamahamattanalJl vinicchayal)1 sutva --gamanalJl
pahaya majjhatto hutva); Sp 591,2 (nanu na yuttal)1
vinayadharanalJl --gamanan ti); - --gami(n), mfn.
1
[agati + gami(n) ], l.leading to freedom from (further)
existence; Ps 11 29,9 ([patipada1J1] sabbatthagaminin ti
sabbagatigaminilJl ca --gaminilJl ca); - 2.following a
wrong course, behaving corruptly; Sv 944,28 (tassa
--gamino kittiyaso pi parivarayaso pi nihlyati); - see
also agatika, aññagatika (sv añña2), attagatika
3
(sv atta[n]), eval)1gatika, kil)1gatika (sv ka ), taggatika
(sv ta[d]), dai_l<;lagatika, dandhagatika, duggata,
dhaññagatika (sv dhañña2), dhatugatika, niyatagatika
(sv niyacchati), pajjunnagatika, paññagatika, bhikkhu-
gatika, yal)1gatika (sv ya[d]), sabbaññutañ~agatika
(sv sabba), samanagatika (sv samana\ sugata, sobhal).a-
gatika.
gatika, mfn. [gati + ki], having a destiny or outcome;
following a course; Sp 659,6foll. (mü1aclvarassa
uppannadivasato yava vlsatimo divaso tava uppannalJl
paccasaclvaralJl mü1aclvara1Jl attano -al)1 karoti, tato
uddhalJl mülaclvaralJl paccasaclvaralJl attano -al)1 karoti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits second paccasaclvaralll;
Sp-t [Be] 11 397,26/oll.: uppannalll paccasaclvaran ti
paccattavacanalJl attano -al)1 karotl ti karaJ_lakiriyaya
kattubhavato, antara uppannalll hi paccasaclvaralll
masaparamalJl mülaclvaralll thapetulll adatva attano
dasahaparamataya eva paricchindatl ti attano -alll
karoti);- ifc see citta- (sv citta 1).
gatito in Ee at Ja III 242,7* is wr for gathito (Ce so) or
gadhito (Be so).
gatta, n. (and m.) [S. gatra, n.], (sg.) the body; (pl.) the
limbs ofthe body; Abh 151 (sarlralJl vapu -alll); Vini
47,24 (attano -alll vodakalll katva nivasetva upajjhayassa
-ato udakalll pamajjitabballl); II 133,10 (attano nakhehi
-ani vi1ikhitva); D II 175,29 (tassa ... itthiratanassa slte
Ul).hani -ani honti Ul).he sltani); Sn 1001 (yass' ete honti
-esu mahapurisa1akkhal).a); 1017 (ath' assa -e disvana
paripüralJl ca vyañjanalJl); Pv 34:1 (mall kiñtJ kayürl -a
te candanussada; Pv-a 211,9: -a ti sañravayava); Thl 17
(vedhamanehi -ehi); Ja V 14,22* ( -ehi te rasmiyo
niccharanti): 69,6* (-al)1 kammasaval).l).alll te); Ap 312,8
(siniddhalll hoti me -al)1); 401,14 (vato -e na samphuse);
Cp 1:10:15 (photetva rajagate -e); Dhp-a I 321,23
(killlkarai_la -al)1 pütikalJl jatal)1); Mi1198,2s (pañho ...
api sunipul).iinalJl manujanalll -e sedalJl moceyya);
Vism 264,27 (addhanalJl gatassa vayodhatu kuppati -ani
dukkhanti); It-a 11 77,1 (-ehi seda muccanti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr -ahi); - gattal)1 in Ee at Thl 466 is prob. wr
for bhastarp (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc see aru-,
candana1itta-, nibbiddha- (sv nibbijjhati), pakka-
(sv pacati\ parida<;l<;lha-; - 0 -dharathalJl in Ee at
Spk II 379,12 is wr for bhattadarathal)1 (Be, Ce, Se so);
-
0
-Vicm;u;tana, n., grinding, bruising, the limbs or the
body; Sadd 537,8 (val).a -e);- sugatta, mfn., who has a
beautiful body; fair-limbed; Ja IV 19,28* (sabbassa no
issara tvalll -e); V 404,25*.
gathasukhatthaip in Ee at Th-a II 277,27 is wr for gatha-
19 gaddula
(Be, Ce, Se so).
gathita, mfn., pp of ganthati qv.
gada, m. [e;{ S. gada], l. speech, speaking; Vism 203,28
(samma e' esa gadati yuttaghane yuttam eva vacalJl
bhasatl ti samma 0 -tta pi sugato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
samma padatta ti)= Sp 117,14 = Nidd-a II 39,2o; Sv 66,3o
0
( -attho hi ettha gatasaddo, evalll tathavaditaya
tathagato); Pj I 183,21 (sughu gatatta sutthu eva ca 0 -tta
sugato); It-a 11 190,29 (0 -attho ayal)1 gatasaddo dakarassa
takaralJl katva); Patis-a 482,1 (samma -o assa ti su gato);
- 2. disease, sickness; Abh 323; 1099 (-o roge);
Mhv 62:67 (tibbena phugho mahata -ena rajjena
saddhilll vijahittha dehalll); Sadd 322,11 * (abadho -o); -
3. poison; Ps 11 107 ,1o (-o ti hi visassa niimalJl, tal)1 tassa
alalll paripUl).J:.lalJl atthl ti a1agaddo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gaddo ti);- ifc see diddha-;- 0 -diddha, mfn., smeared
with poison; Spk 11 208,7 (diddhagadena ti -ena, Ee so;
Be, Ce diddhagatena ti gatadiddhena; Se diddhagatena ti
gatadighena);- see also agada.
gadati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gadati], speaks articulately; speaks;
relates; Dhatup 148 (gada vyattavacane); Dhatum 222;
Vism 203,27 (samma e' esa -ati yuttatthane yuttam eva
vacalll bhasatl ti samma gadatta pi su gato) = Sp 117,13 t
Ud-a 89,9; It-a 11 190,3o (tathalll -an ti tathagato );
Sadd 375,22/oll. (gada viyattiyalll vacayal)1: -ati ...
sughu -atl ti sugato); - pp gadita, mfn. [ts], spoken;
related; named; Abh 132; 755 (kathital)1 -al)1);
Ud-a 153,15 (pariyattidhammo pi ... bhagavata tatha gato
-o pavattito ti tathagato) = It-a I 137,11; Th-a I 55,13
(mama mantital)1 -alll kathital)1, Be, Se so; Ce cintital)1
-al)1; Ee mantitalll kathalll kathitarp, prob. wr); -
fpp gaditabba, mfn., Sv 914,2o; - caus. pr. 3 sg. gadeti,
-ayati, thunders; Sadd 543,18/oll. (gada devasadde:
devasaddo vuccati meghasaddo, -eti -ayati).
gadana, n. [ts], telling, speaking, relating; Sv 914,21
(yatha yatha gaditabbalJl tatha tath' eva -ato dakarassa
takaralll katva tathagato ti vuccatl ti attho ); Pj I 196,4
(yalll ca tath' eva hoti tassa -ato tathagato ti vuccati, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se gamanato); It-a I 137,23.
gada, f [ts], a mace, a club; Abh 394; 1099 (-a satthe);
Spk I 324,15 (cattari kira avudhani 1oke seghani,
Sakkassa vajiravudhalJl Vessaval).assa gadavudhalJl ... )
= Pj II 225,14; Spk I 324,19 (Vessaval).assa kujjhanaka1e
vissajjita -a, Se so; Ee vissajjitalJl gadavudhalJl; Be
VessavaJ_lena ... vissajjitam gadavudha1J1; Ce puthujjana-
ka1e vissajjitalJl gadavudhalJl) = Pj II 225,19 (Ce, Ee, Se
puthujjanakale vissajjita -a; Be vissajjitagada);
Mhv 23:58 (pita -al)1 akarayi aghati1J1sailgu1avana1Jl
so)asahatthadighakalJl ).
gaddati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gardati, Wg § 3:20], makes a
sound; Sadd 377,4 (gadda sadde: ... -ati).
gaddabha¡;uJa, m. [S. lex. gardabhal).<;la], the Ptirsplpal
tree; [SAF]: the lndian tulip tree, umbrella tree,
Thespesia populnea Sol. ex Correa; Abh 562 (-o
kapltano ); Samantak 734 (gaddabha1,1<;lajjuna).
gaddula, gaddüla, m.n. [BHS gardula, gardüra, gardüla], a
leash; a dog-lead; Abh 520 (sabandhanalJl tu gaddülo);
Ja 11 246,14 (puriso . . . sunakhalll disva . . . gaddü1ena
bandhitva tal)1 adaya pakkami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gaddalena); III 204,9 (darake gaddü1ehi bandhitva, Ee so;
gaddühana
Be, Ce, Se kuda~gakehi); Kv 336,3o (sa -ena sailgahlto);
Spk II 327,3 (-o vi ya di~~i); Th!-a 266,2 (yatha -ena
baddho sunakho); As 367,4 (daJhabandhanatrhena -arp.
viya ti -arp., t~ha va -arp. t~hagaddularp., Be, Se so; Ce
gaddülarp.; omissions in Ee); - ifc see ta~ha-; -
gaddularp.ta~ha in Ee at Dhs 1059 (andAs 367,5) is wr;
read t~haja1arp. t~hagaddu1arp. ta~hasamuddo with Be,
Ce, Se;- 0 -baddha, mfn., tied with a leash, on a leash;
M II 232,25 (sa -o daJhe thambhe va khlle va
upanibaddho, Be, Ce so; Ee gaddüla-; Se gadda1abandho;
Ps IV 22,13: da~gake rajjurp. pavesetva baddhasunakho)
i- S III 150,7; As 367,3 (sunakha -a yadicchakarp.
niyyanti);- 0 -bandhana, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) tied on
a leash; PsI 39,25 (sa va -o); Ud-a 213,18
(t~habandhanena baddha -a viya sarameya, Ce so; Ee
sarameyo; Be, Se gaddülabandhana viya sa); -
2. (n.) tying on a leash; a leash as a tie; Th-a II 122,19
(-en a vi ya thambhe sarameyarp.; Ce so; E e sarameyo;
Be, Se 0 -bandhitarp. viya thambhe sarameyarp.); -
0
-bandhita, mfn., fastened on a leash; Th-a II 122,19
(-arp. viya thambhe sarameyarp., Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
o -bandhanena).
gaddühana, gadduhana, n. [cf S. godohana, BHS godoha;
cfT. Oberlies, 1995a, p. 119: <*garp.dohana], the time
required for milking a cow; a short time; M III 127,2
(nabhijanami abadharp. uppannapubbarp. antamaso
0
-mattarp. pi; Ps IV 195,2ofoll.: gavirp. thane gahetva
ekakh1rabindudühanaka1amattarp. pi); S II 264,23 (yo va
pubb~hasamayarp. antamaso -mattarp. pi mettacittarp.
0
bhaveyya, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee gadduhana-; Spk II 224,ll:
0
-mattan ti godühanamattarp., gaviya ekavararp. agga-
tthanakagghanamattan ti attho, gandühanamattarp. va ... ,
Ee so; Ce gandhühanamattarp. va ... ; Se gandha-ühana-
mattarp. va ... ; Be gadduhanamattan ti goduhana-
mattarp. ... gandha-ühanamattarp. va) t A IV 395,29 (Ee,
Se so; Be gandhohana-; Ce gandhuhana-; Mp IV
187,1foil.: gandhühanamattan ti ... apare pana 0 -mattan
ti paJirp. vatva gaviya ekavararp. thana-añchanamattan ti
attharp. vadanti, Ce so; Ee apare pana gadduhanamattan
ti; Be gandhohanamattan ti ... apare pana gaddohana-
mattan ti ... ; Se 0 -mattan ti ... apare pana godohana-
mattan ti ... ) quoted It-a I 91,33 (eds o -mattarp.);
Mi1110,11 (na kiñci bhante apuññarp. apajjeyya antamaso
0
-mattarp. pi ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se goduhana-);
Ud-a 238,28 C-mattarp. pi kalarp. cittasamadhanassa
abhavato na samahita ti); Th-a III 78,34 (gadduhana-
mattarp. pi samadhanabhavato); Vibh-a 466,6
(gadduhanamattarp. pi mayharp. vyadhi nama n' atthl ti).
gaddha, m. [S. grdhra), a vulture; Abh 637 (gijjho -o);
Sp 869,7 (-e badhayirp.sü ti 0 -badhino) = Ps II 102,20;
Sadd 548,11 (gaddheti gaddhayati -o); - o -badhi-
pubba, mfn., who was previously a vulture-catcher; ?
belonging to a family of vulture-hunters; ? Vin II 25,12
(Ari~~assa nama bhikkhuno -assa) = IV 133,34
(Sp 869,7 foil.: gaddhe badhayirp.sü ti gaddhabadhino,
gaddhabadhino pubbapurisa assa ti -o, tassa -assa
gijjhaghatakaku1appasutassa ti attho, Be so; Ce, Se
-ppasütassa ti; Ee wr -ppasuttassa ti) t M I 130,4; - see
also gijjha.
gaddheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gardhayati,
20 gadhita
Wg § 32:124], desires, is greedy (jor); Sadd 548,11
(gaddha abhikankhayarp.: -e ti -ayati gaddho ); - see
also gijjhati.
gadrabha, m. [S. gardabha], an ass, a donkey; Abh 502
(-o tu kharo); Vin III 52,25 (catuppadarp. nama hatthl
assa otrha go~a -a pasuka); MI 334,29 (-o
vahacchinno ... jhayati pajjhayati); III 167,24 (assa go~a
-a aja miga ye va pan' aññe pi keci tiracchanagata p~a
ti~abhakkha); Ja II 96,24 (ye -a sindhavanarp. nivaparp.
vahirp.su); III 477,26* (yada bimbotrhasampanno -o
sumukho siya kusa1o naccagltassa); Kv 30,17 (-o hoti,
Be, Se so; Ee wr gadrabbho); Mi1365,23 (-o ... yattha
katthaci sayati na sayanabahu1o hoti);- 0 -bharaka, m.,
a load carried by a donkey; Ja II 109,23 (eko v~ijo -ena
vohararp. karonto vicarati); Dhp-a I 123,6 (-ehi
Takkasi1arp. gantva); - 0 -rava, m. [gadrabha + rava2],
the braying of an ass; Ja II 110,s; Vism 415,4.
gadrabh!, .f [S. gardabhl], a she-ass, a female donkey;
Ja II 338,24 (Ku~gal! nama -!); Dhp-a I 123,9 (so
gadrabho parikhapighe caramano ekarp. -irp. disva
upasari.kami).
gadha, mfn. [pp of gahati ? cf ogadha and S. gagha],
entered into, immersed; - ifc see anto-.
gadhita, mfn. and n. [prob. = gathita, pp of ganthati qv;
possibly pp of gijjhati qv; cf S. gardhita, AMg gaghiya,
and cts below ], l. (mfn.) tied, bound; or greedy, greedily
desiring; DI 245,24 (ime . . . pañca kamagu~e tevijja
brahma~a -a mucchita ajjhopanna ... paribhuñjanti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee gathita; Sv 403,25: gedhena abhibhüta
hutva) t III 43,28 (-o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gathito;
Sv 837,1s: gedhajato); SI 186,31* (upadh!su jana -ase
di~~hasute patighe ca mute ca, Be, Se so; Ee -a; Ce
gathitase; Spk I 270,s: -a ti giddha, Be, Se so; Ce gathita
ti; Ee gathitase ti)= Th 1216 (eds -ase; Th-a Ili 190,14:
pa~ibaddhacitta); S IV 332,28 (te ca bhoge -o mucchito
ajjhopanno ... paribhuñjanti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce gathito) =
A V 178,6 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce gathito ); Sn 823
(oghati~~assa pihayanti kamesu -a paja, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee gathita); Th 733 (rasat~haya -o; Th-a III 22,7 foil.:
ganthito ti rasat~haya tasmirp. tasmirp. rase ganthito
baddho, -o ti ca pa~hanti, gedharp. apanno ti attho ); Ja IV
5,26' (ye anugijjhanti giddha -a hutva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
gathita); V 274,24' (pagiddha ti -a mucchita); Nidd I
35,18 (giddha -a mucchita ajjhopanna 1agga 1aggita
pa1ibuddha ti); Pv-a 262,9 (paccuppannasukhe giddha ti
vattamanasukhamatte giddha -a hutva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
gathita); - 2. (n.) a bond, a fetter; or greediness;?
Sn 940 (yani 1oke -ani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gathitani;
Nidd I 420,18foil.: -a vuccanti pañcakamagu~a ...
kirp.kar~a -a vuccanti pañca kamagu~a. yebhuyyena
devamanussa pañca kamagu~e icchanti sadiyanti
pihayanti abhijappanti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce gathita; Pj II
567,10: pañca kamagu~a pa~i1abhaya gijjhantl ti katva
-anl ti vuccanti, Be, Se so; Ce, E e gathlyantl ti ...
gathitanl ti);- 0 -citta, mfn. [gadhita + citta 1], with mind
or thoughts fettered; or with heart greedily desirous
(for); D II 266,7* (tayi -o smi, Se so; Ee gathitacitto; Be,
Ce gedhitacitto) quoted Sadd 671,4 (tvayi -o 'smi); -
agadhita, mfn., not tied, not bound; or not greedy; D III
224,27 (c!varam -o amucchito anajjhopanno ...
ganta(r)
paribhuñjati,Be, Se so; Ce, Ee agathito; Sv 1013,32: -o ti
vigatalobhagiddho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee agathito ti
vigatalobhakhandho) t S II 194,7 (-o, eds so) t A I 74,16
(-a, Se so; Be, Ce, E e agathita) t 1127,23 (-o, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee agathito); Nidd I 54,5 (agiddho -o amucchito ...
vltagedho vigatagedho ... , Be, E e, Se so; Ce agathito );
Mil401,2 (slho ... 1addha pi bhojanaJil -o amucchito
anajjhapanno paribhuñjati, Be, Ee so; Ce agathito); -
see also giddha 1 (sv gijjhati), gedhita.
ganta(r), m. [S. gantr], l. one who goes (to); A I 130,10
(ekacco pugga1o aramarp. -a hoti abhikkhal).aJil
bhikkhunarp. santike dhammasavanaya); 11 117,11 (rañño
nago yarp. enaJil hatthidammasarathi disarp. peseti yadi va
gatapubbaJil yadi va agatapubbaJil tarp. khipparp. yeva -a
hoti); Ja VI 297,11 * (khettarp. -a e' assa abhikkhal).aJI!,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gantva; 297,18·: -a ti gamanasllo);
Sv 767,17 (satto gacchati satto titrhat! ti vuccati, atthato
pana koci satto -a va thata va natthi, Se so; Be, Ce
gacchanto va thito va; Ee atthi eta pana koci satto
gacchanto va thito va natthi) = Ps I 251,25 (Ce, E e na
koci satto -a va thito va atthi; Be, Se atthi pana koci
satto gacchanto va thito va natthi); Sadd 668,13 (-araJI!);
- 2. (as periphrastic future of gacchati qv) (one who)
will go; Ja IV 273,17* (-a tuvarp. Vetaral).irp. Yamassa,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se hantva no ce tuvaJI!; 273,21·:
Vetaral).inirayaJI! gato bhavissasl ti); V 267,19* (-a so
nirayarp. adho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gantva); 270,12* (ye
migena migarp. han ti ... -a te nirayussadaJI!, Be, Ce so;
Ee nirayarp. adho; Se gantva; 216,11·: -a te ti -aro te, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se gantva te ti te gantva); It-a I 55,28
(saJI!sararp. aparaparaparivattanavasena -aro upagantaro
honti); - aganta(r), m., one who does not go; (one
who) will not go; S V 377,15 (ayarp. ... puggalo -a
nirayaJI! -a tiracchanayonirp. ... ; Spk 111 288,10: yasma
ca parimuccati tasma ganta nama na hot! ti -a ti vutto,
na gacchat! ti attho ).
gantabba, mfn.,fpp ojgacchati qv.
gantmp, inf of gacchati qv.
gantva, gantvana, absol. of gacchati qv.
gantha (sometimes written gal).tha or gandha), m.
[S. grantha] (pl. acc. ganthe, ganthani), l. tying, binding;
a tie; D 111 230,18 (cattaro -a, abhijjha kayagantho
vyapado kayagantho sllabbataparamaso kayagantho
idarp.saccabhiniveso kayagantho); SI 14,25* (pahlna-
manassa na san ti -a); Dhp 211 (-a tesarp. na vijjanti
yesarp. natthi piyappiyarp.); Sn 347 (ye keci -a idha
mohamagga) = Th 1267 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gandha);
Sn 912 (visajja -ani); Nidd I 105,32 (-o eso 1ambanaJil
etaJI! bandhanaJI! etarp. pa1ibodho eso); Patis I 129,27
(catühi -ehi ganthito 1okasannivaso ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gal).thehi gal).thito ); Dhs 1135 (katame dhamma -a);
Vibh 65,2ojoll. (cattaro khandha no -a, sankhara-
kkhandho siya -o siya no -o); Nett31,29 (-ehi ca
vippayutto bhavati, Be, Ce so; Ee gandhehi); Vism 90,2*
( ... ñati abadho -o iddhl ti) = Sp 416,9* (Be, Ce so; Ee
gandho; Se gal).tho ); Vism 683,24 (-a ti namakayassa
e' eva rüpakayassa ca ganthanato abhijjhadayo cattaro,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gal).tha ti ... gal).thanato ); It-a I 11,26
(sabbarp. yogaJil sabbaJil -aJil sabbarp. sarp.yojanarp.
samucchinditva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gal).thaJI!); - 2. an
21 ganthati
arrangement of words (i) of 32 syllables, a s1oka;
Sadd 357 ,29* (gatha e' eka mato -o -o battirp.sat-
akkharo);- (ii) a composition, treatise, text; Abh 965;
1006 (potthakaJI!... -e); Vin IV 15,21 (yebhuyyena
pagul).arp. -arp. bhal).antarp. opateti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gandharp.); D III 94,18 (ekacce satta ... nigamasamantarp.
osaritva -e karonta acchanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gal).the ...
gacchanti; Sv 870,29: tayo vede abhisañkharonta e' eva
vacenta ca); Ja 11 48,4 (acariya imasmirp. -e ettakaJI!
padaJI! paccabhattharp.); Sp 789,3o (yena pana suttantato
ca vinayato ca vuttappamal).O -o uggahlto); Sv 525,17
(eko ohlyanamanako -o hoti, paññavantaJI! bhikkhurp.
sañgal).hitva tena taJI! -arp. ukkhipapenta, Ce, Ee so; Be
o1iyamanako; Se o1iyamanako gal).tho . . . gal).tharp.) =
Mp IV 18,18 (ollyamanako); PsI 173,26 (til).I).aJil
vedanaJil paragu ti adisu hi -o vedo ti vuccati); Spk I
231,27 (sutava bahu ti bahunanappakarake -e sutava);
II 124,25 (uttamakavitaya savakanaJil -aJil bandhitva
deti); Mhv 37:240 (-ato atthato va); - ifc see
khuddaka-, gütha- (sv guhati); (iii) leaming,
knowledge of a text; memorisation of a text; Vism 95,17
(-o ti pariyattipariharal).arp. tarp. sajjhayad!hi niccaJil
vyavatass' eva pa1ibodho hoti na itarassa); Sp 219,16
(ayaJI! jatiya va gottena va ko1aputtiyena va -ena va
dhutañgena va ñato yasassl, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gal).thena);
695,23 (yo pana kotiYaJI! thito -o tassa puggalassa
accayena nassissati, Be, Ce so; Ee gal).tho; Se gal).tho);
789,29 (yassa pana satthakatharp. pi vinayapitakaJil
abhidhammapitakarp. ca pagul).arp. suttante ca
vuttappakaro -o natthi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gal).tho); It-a I
98,6 (attano sllarp. va -aJil va dhutañgagul).arp. va ...
sambhaveti); - 0 -kara, m., an author; Abhp. 182,15*
(aharp. pi --ttaJI! patto); - 0 -dhura, n., the burden or
duty of leaming texts; learning texts as the main
concern; Sp 561,16 (te kira sasane vipassanadhuraJI! ca
-aJil ca ti dve pi dhurani cha<Netva navakammam eva
dhuraJI! katva paggal).hirp.su); Dhp-a I 1,18joll. ( -arp.
vipassanadhuran ti dve yeva dhurani ... ekarp. va dve va
nikaye sakalaJI! va pana tepitakaJil buddhavacanaJil
uggal).hitva tassa dharal).aJI! kathanaJil vacanan ti idarp.
-aJil nama); IV 38,1 ( -aJil patthapetva tlni pitakani
uggal).hi).
ganthati, gantheti, -ayati, (and gal).theti ?) pr. 3 sg.
[S. grathnati, granthayati], l.fastens, strings together;
binds; Dhatup 581 (gantha ganthane); Dhatum 814
(gantha sandabbhe); Vin 11 9,33 (ma1avaccharp. ropenti ...
-en ti pi -apenti pi); 12,18 (-essanti); MI 387,2
(ma1akaro ... malaJI! -eyya); SI 215,1* (dadarp. mittani
-ati); Ja 1 452,17 (pupphani -iturp. na janantl ti); IV 289,3
(mitte tava -etü ti); 361,25* (osadhikayo -enti nhapayanti
japanti ca; 365,19' foll.: idaJI! imassa rogassa bhesajjaJil
idarp. imassa ti evaJI! pi1otike bandhitva manussanarp.
denti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se siloke bandhitva); V 292,19
(pupphani -atu); VI 239,3* (malarp. -enti);
Nett 116,10joll. (abhijjhaya kayaJil -ati ayaJil vuccati
abhijjhakayagantho, Be, Ce so; Ee gandhati, prob. wr) t
Pet 245,3; Sv 576,29 (tumhe kassa -atha ti); Spk 1 111,18
(ekatoval).tikamaladivasena -enti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gal).thenti); Patis-a 440,8 (dighi yeva kilesakayaJil -etl ti
dighigantho); Sadd 542,3foll. (-eti -ayati); - part.pr.
ganthana
(a) ganthanta, mfn., As 11,31 (gaganatale tarakarupani
-anto viya, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce gal).hanto; Se
gal)ento); (b) ganthamana, mfn., Vv 38:1 (dibbamalaq¡
-amana); Sv 576,27; (e) ganthenta, mfi-entl)n., Ps II
127,27; Vv-a173,2o (-entl); Asl8,13 (pupphadamaq¡
-entena viya); - 2. compases (a literary work); Pj II
322,29 (yannuna mante -eyyama ti); aor.
3 pl. (a) ganthesu~. Ps III 425,7; (b) ganthayi~su, Ja VI
210,14' (yaññasuttaq¡ nama -ayi~su ti attho, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr gandhayi~sü ti); - absol. (a) ganthetva,
ganthitvil, Sn 302 (mante -etva); Ja VI 232,17' (ta~
malya~ ocinitva -itva); Sp 272,15 (kusaclran ti kuse
-etva kataclraq¡, Be so; Ce, Ee -itva; Se gal).!hitva);
618,7 (val).!ena va val)!a~ -etva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gal).!hitva); Sv 357,6 (ulükapakkhani -etva, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -itva) f. Mp II 355,8 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -itva);
Th-a III 56,6 (aii.guliyo suttena -itva); Nidd-a I 256,13
( -etva, E e so; Se gal)!hetva; Be, Ce gumbetva);
(b) ganthitvana, Ap 174,18 (-itvana va!a~saka~. Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee bandhitvana); (e) ganthayitva, Ap 503,5
(catasso gathayo -ayitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
ganthavitva); - pp (a) gathita (with frequent vl
gadhita qv), mfn. and n. [S. grathita; AMg gaghiya],
l. (mfn.) tied, bound; DI 245,24 (ime . . . pañca
kamagul)e tevijja brahmal).a -a mucchita ajjhapanna ...
paribhuñjanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gadhita; Sv 403,25:
gedhena abhibhuta hutva) = MI 173,27 (Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se gadhita; Ps II 193,15: tal).haganthena -a, Ce so; Ee
ganthita; Be, Se tal).hagedhena gadhita); S IV 332,28 (te
ca bhoge -o mucchito ajjhopanno ... paribhuñjati, Ce
so; Be, Ee, Se gadhito) = A V 178,6 (Be, Ce -o; E e, Se
gadhito); A III 68,13 (itthirupe ... satta ratta giddha -a
mucchita ... , Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gadhita); Sn 794
(adanagantha~ -a~ visajja, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gadhita~); 823 (oghatiz:¡l)assa pihayanti kamesu -a paja,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gadhita); Ja III 242,7* (-o ca ratto ca
adhimucchito ca kamesvahaq¡, Ce so; Be gadhito; Se
gedhito; Ee wr gatito; 242,11·: abhijjhavyapada-
kayaganthena baddho); IV 371,15* (bharami putte dare ca
gharesu -o aha~. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gadhito); Pv-a 262,9
(paccuppannasukhe giddha ti vattamanasukhamatte
giddha -a hutva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gadhita); -
1 gal).!hirahita ... ) = Ps II 234,8 (Be gal).thanaki1eso pali-
--citta, mfn. [gathita + citta ], with thoughts fettered;
with thoughts fixed (on); D II 266,7* (tayi --citto 'smi,
Ee so; Be, Ce gedhitacitto; Se gadhitacitto;
Sv 702,19joll.: tayi baddhacitto smi, gedhitacitto ti va
gedha~ ajjhupetacitto, Be so; E e gedhi!acitto va ... ; Ce
gathitacitto va ... ; Se gadhitacitto ti va ... ) quoted
Sadd 671,4 (gadhitacitto); - 2. (n.) a bond, a fetter;
Sn 940 (yani loke -ani, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gadhitani;
Nidd I 420,18: -a vuccanti pañcakamaguz:¡a, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se gadhita; Pj II 567,10: pañca kamagul)a pa!ilabhaya
gathlyantl ti katva -anl ti vuccanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
gijjhantl ti ... gadhitanl ti); - neg. agathita, mfn., not
bound; not tied; D III 224,27 (agathito, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
agadhito); S II 269,25 (ta~ labha~ agathita ...
paribhuñjanti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se agadhita); IV 333,2
(agathito amucchito anajjhopanno, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
agadhito) =A V 178,11 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se agadhito); A I
74,16 (Be, Ce, Ee agathita; Se agadhita); II 27,23 (Ce, Ee
22 ganthima
agathito; Be, Se agadhito); - see also gedhita; -
pp (b) ganthita, mfn. [S. lex., BHS granthita; AMg
ga~!hiya], tied, bound; Th 572 (catuganthena -o); Ja VI
529,33* (mala va -a !hanti); Nidd I 99,1 (ganthe gathite
-e); Spk III 4,22 (-a~ baddha~); Mp II 148,15 (gathita ti
tal)haya -a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gadhita ti tal).haya gadhita);
Ud-a 347,2o (attano santanassa --tta vinibaddhatta ca,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gathitatta);- -aganthita, mfn., bound
together and not bound; It-a II 59,5 (mala ti -aganthita-
bhedaq¡ sabba~ puppha~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gal).!hitagaz:¡!hita-) f. Pv-a 127,9 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gal).!hikadibheda~. prob. wr); Vv-a 58,2 (-aganthitehi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gandhika gandhikehi); -
neg. aganthita, mfn., not tied; Sp !88,11 (yatha suttena
aganthitatta abaddhatta eva~ vikirati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
agaz:¡!hitatta); V v-a 285,2 (ganthitehi ca aganthitehi ca
pupphehi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gandhitehi ca pupphehi
agandhitehi); - fpp (a) ganthanlya, mfn. [or from
ganthana qv ?] subject to ties, liable to be bound;
Dhs p. 3,28 (-a dhamma aganthaniya dhamma; As 49,6:
arammaJ).akaraz:¡avasena ganthehi ganthitabba ti -a);
Dhs 584 (sabba~ rupa~ . . . sa~yoJanlya~ -a~
oghaniya~); Vibh 65,21 foil. (rupakkhandho -o cattaro
kkhandha s1ya -a s1ya aganthaniya); Kv 238,27
(sa~yojanlya~ -a~ oghanlya~ ... citta~); Vism 475,2
(oghaniyato yoganiyato -ato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gal).!haniyato ); Th-a II 245,8 (--bhavena vinandhito ); -
neg. aganthanlya, mfn., Dhs 1142; Vibh 117,15 (dve
sacca ganthaniya dve sacca aganthaniya);
(b) ganthitabba, mfn., As 49,5; (e) ganthetabba, mfn.,
Moh 100,14 (ganthehi ganthetabba ti ganthanlya); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. ganthapeti, V in II 9,33 (-en ti); 12,18
(-essanti).
ganthana (and gal).!hana), n. [S. grathana, grathana,
granthana], tying, binding, stringing together,
Dhatup581 (gantha -e); Sadd410,6 (dabhi -e);
Vism 683,24 (gantha ti namakayassa e' eva rupakayassa
ca -ato abhijjhadayo cattaro, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gal).!hanato); Sv 144,24 (arnhakaq¡ gaz:¡!hanaki1eso
palibundhanakileso natthi, kilesagal).tharahita mayan ti
evaq¡vaditaya laddhanamavasena nigal).tho, Be, Se so;
Ce, E e ... gandhanaki1eso palibuddhanaki1eso ... ki1esa-
bujjhanaki1eso ... ki1esagal)tharahita ... ; Ce, Ee 0 -ki1eso
palibujjhanaki1eso .. . kilesagal).!hirahita ... ; Se o -ki1eso
palibandhanaki1eso ... kilesagantharahita ... ); Sv 1024,1
( -vasena gantha); Spk III 137,6 (gantha ti -a gha!ana).
0
ganthika, mfn. and m. [gantha + ika; cf S. granthika],
(one) who memorises, knows the text(s); Dhp-a I 156,2
-bhikkhu~ pa!hamajjhane pañhaq¡ pucchitva); 156,s
0
(
(-o eka~ pi kathetu~ nasakkhi); - ganthike in Ee at
Ja VI 276,25* is wr for gandhike (Be, Ce, Se so).
2
ganthima, (mj)n. [gantha + ima , or from ganthati], tied
together, bound (a type of wreath or garland);
Sp 6!8,3foll. (cha pupphavikatiyo veditabba -a~
gopphimaq¡ vedhima~ . . . -aq¡ nama sadal).gakesu va
uppa1apadumadlsu aññesu va d!ghaval).tesu pupphesu
da!!habba~, dal).gakena dal).gakaq¡ Val).!ena va Val).!aql
ganthetva katam eva hi -a~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gal).!hima~ ... gal).!hitva ... ); Vin-vn 463.
ganthikaral}a
ganthikara1,.1a, n. [gantha + karaJ:~a, as from *gantha +
karoti], making a tie; stringing together; Sadd 405,10
(gantho -arp}
gandha\ m. (and n.) [ts], l. a smell, odour; a scent;
Abh 94; 1129 (-o ... ghayan1ye); Vin I 21,19* (riipa
sadda -a rasa photthabba ca); 205,9 (yasmirp telapake
majjassa na VaJ:ll)O na -o na raso paññayati); D 1 182,2
(ghanena -arp ghayitva); M 1 112,5 (ghanarp e' avuso
paticca -e ca uppajjati ghanaviññál)arp); S 1 115,3o (tav'
eva papima ghanarp tava -a); 226,29* (-o is1nam asuci);
A 1 226,29* (na pupphagandho pativatam eti ... satarp ca
-o pativatam eti, sabba disa sappuriso pavati) = Dhp 54;
Th28 (kacci s!lamayarp -arp tvarp vasi); Jaiii 289,11*
(gaJ:!hahi navarp vilepanarp yassa -o na kadaci chijjati);
Ap 268,22 (candanasseva me kaya tatha -o pavayati);
347,2o (tani -ani ghayanto); Patis 1 145,7 (idarp puppharp
ayarp -o); Kv 67,10 (ghanarp suññarp -a suñña) = Nidd 1
439,26 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -arp suññarp); Mil80,12
(ghayitatta -arp sarati); Vism 447,1 (ghanapatihanana-
lakkhal)O -o); Ps 11360,22 (pupphasmirp -arp viya attani
riiparp samanupassati); Pj 1 ?2,10 (aggipakkhittassa
kesassa -arp ghayitva satta nasikarp pidhenti); - ifc see
ama- (sv ama2), panna- (sv pajjati\ - 2. a fragrant
substance; scent, perfume; (iic fragrant, scented);
Vin 111 38,38 (itthiyo -arp ca malarp ca adaya aramarp
agamarpsu); D 11 159,21 (bhagavato sañrarp ... malehi
-ehi sakkaronta); A 1 215,3* (malarp na dhare na ca -am
acare) = Sn401; Jal 50,15 (-ehi vilimpapetva); 452,16
(-e pirpsiturp ... na janantl ti); IV 76,25* (dadati saddho
ma!arp ca -arp ca vilepanarp ca); Nidd 1 114,24 (baharp
-ena limpeyyurp); Mil309,21 (-arp va malarp va dussarp
va ... adhighahitva cetiye ukkhipati); Sp 84,18 (pattarp
gahetva -ehi ubbattetva);- ifc see anulepana-; - 3. the
mere smell of anything, a whiff, a small quantity;
Abh1129 (-o thoke); Nidd-al 37,s (niravasesarp
0
-mattarp pi atthapetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee khandha-
mattarp); - 4. the name of a type of elephants; Abh 361
( ... pingaJo -o); Ps 11 25,36' (0 -mangalahemarp); - see
gandhahatthi(n) below; - gandha is an occasional wr
(or altemative form ?) for gantha qv; - gandharp in E e
at Spk III 70,29 is pro h. wr; Be, Ce, Se vatarp; - gandha
in Ee at Ap 3,26 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se gantva; -
o• -ayatana, n., the object of sense that is odour; D III
243,18 (cha bahirani ayatanani ... -arp rasayatanarp ... );
Dhs 625-8 (katamarp tarp riiparp -arp); Vism 452,6; -
o• -alepa, m., a fragrant or perfumed ointment; V in I
206,26 (anujanami bhikkhave -arp katun ti); Ap 516,7; -
0
0daka, n. [gandha + udaka], fragrant or perfumed
water; Ja 111 178,22 (tam enarp ... mata -ena nahapetva
alañkaritva k1japayamana nisinna); Ap 105,n; Ps 111
214,24 (sUVaJ:~l)aghate ca rajataghate ca -assa püretva);
Th-a 1 131,7 (bodhirukkharp -ehi nahapesi);
Thüp 241,2o; - 0 'fipahara, m., the bringing of a foul-
smelling or fragrant substance; Vin 111 74,31; 77,23 (-o
nama amanapikarp gandharp upasarpharati . . . imarp
ghayitva jegucchata patikulyata marissatl ti ...
manapikarp gandharp upasarpharati ... ); - o' -ühana,
0
-ühana, 0 6hana, n., considering a fragrant substance;
smelling; ? A IV 395,29 (yo ca antamaso gandhohana-
mattarp pi mettacittarp bhaveyya, Be so; Ce
23 gandha
gandhuhana-; Ee, Se gaddühana-; Mp IV 187,1: --mattan
ti gandha-ühanamattarp, dv1h' añgul!hi gandhapil)9arp
gahetva upasiñghanamattarp, apare pana gadduhana-
mattan ti pajirp vatva ... , E e so; Ce apare pana
gaddühanamattan ti ... ; Se apare pana godohanamattan
ti ... ; Be gandhohanamattan ti ... apare pana gaddohana-
mattan ti ... ); Spk 11 224,12 (gaddühanamattan ti
godühanamattarp ... -mattarp va dv1hi añgul!hi gaJ:~9a­
0
pil)9arp gahetva ekavararp ghayanamattan ti attho, Ce
so; Ee gandühanamattarp va ... ; Se gandha-ühanamattarp
va ... ; Be gadduhanamattan ti goduhanamattarp ...
gandha-ühanamattarp va ... );- see also gaddühana;-
0
-katfha, n. [gandha + katthi], a fragrant or sweet-
smelling piece o.f wood; Spk 11 380,3 (bahüni -ani
samodhanetva); Ps V 63,2o;- -kuti,f, the fragrant or
0
peifumed hut (the name o.f the Buddha 's cabin,
especially that in the Jetavana; see J.S. Strong, 1977);
Abh 211; Ja 1 92,23 (Jetavanarp . . . kir.litva . . . majjhe
dasabalassa -irp karesi); Ap 186,3; Sp 651,7 (bhagavati
divapatisallanatthaya -irp pavitthe); Dhp-a 11 135,4
(sattha ... -iyam eva nisinno); Ud-a 184,11 (harpsa-
vattakachannena kata sabbakarasampanna buddhassa
bhagavato -1 kutagarasa!a nama); Mhv 4:32; -
0
-kutika,f, id., Sv 407,21 (-aya ca salaya ca antare);-
0
-gandha, m., l. the scent o.f perfume(s); Sp 750,12
(agarukunkumad1narp gandhanarp gandho -o); -
2. perfume from .fragrant plants; ? a totally fragrant
plant; ? S III 250,12 (santi bhikkhave mülagandhe
adhivattha deva . . . pattagandhe . . . pupphagandhe ...
phalagandhe ... rasagandhe ... -e; Spk II 350,2t:
mülagandhe adhivattha ti yassa rukkhassa müle gandho
atthi tarp nissaya nibbatta . . . -e ti müladigandhanarp
gandhe, yassa hi rukkhassa sabbesarp pi mülad1narp
gandho attthi so idha gandho nama tassa gandhassa
gandhe tasmirp adhivattha); Ps III 35,19 (Gandha-
madanakütarp . . . pupphagandho phalagandho -o ti
imehi dasahi gandhehi ussannarp) = Mp IV 108,13 (Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce khandhagandho ti) = Ud-a 300,2o; -
0
-gandhi(n), mfn., fragrant with scent; V in IV 18,14 (sa
itthi . . . alañkatapatiyatta -1m; Sp 750,12: agaru-
kunkumad1narp gandhanarp gandho gandhagandho, so
assa atth1 ti -in!); Ap 432,19 (parisa tassa -1 bhavissati);
-
0
-gandhita, mfn., fragrant with scent; Ap 180,4
(puppharp ocinitvana sugandharp -arp, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Se 0 -gandhikarp; Be, Ce gandhitarp subharp); -
0
-ghayana, n., smelling an odour; Spk I 151,28 (gütha-
dassane pana tesarp cakkhuviññál)arp, tassa -e ghana-
viññál)arp);- 0 -CUI,,I,,a, n., fragrant powder; powdered
scent; Ja III 277,7 (tassa vilimpantassa padamüle -arp
patissati); Vism 346,3o; Spk 1 262,22 (sañrarp te1ena
abbhañjitva ubbattetva - '-ad1hi nahapesurp); Il 185,27
(pattarp dhovitva -en a ubbagetva); Th-a 1 171,18
(gandhodakena -ena ca püjarp akasi);- -CUI,,I,,aka, n.,
0
fragrant powder; Sp 1312,31 (-ena nhayeyya); -
0
-thena, m., a scent-thief, one who steals the .fragrance
of something; S 1 204,30' (yam etarp varijarp puppharp
adinnarp upasinghasi . . . -o si) = Ja III 308,17*; -
0
-dharo in Ee at Sv 127,3 is wr for ganthadharo (Be, Ce
so; Se ganthadhuro ); - o -dhatu,f, the constituent
element that is odour; M 111 62,12 (agharasa ...
gandha
dhatuyo. .. ghanadhatu -u ghanaviññai).adhatu ... );
Dhs 625; Vibh 413,35; Vism 484,29; Spk II 131,12
(gandharammm:_Illl!l -u); - 0 -pañcaiigula, n., a mark
made by the spread hand (which has been dipped) in a
fragrant substance; Ja IV 153,27 (rukkhe -lll!l datva, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se -pañcailgu1ikaq¡); Ap 3,22
(
0
-pañcailgu1ailkita, Ee so; Be 0 -pañcailgu1akata; Ce
0
-pañcailgu1ikata; Se 0 -pañcangu1ailkata; Ap-a 109,4:
0
-pañcailgu1ailkita ti pañcahi ailgulehi limpita gandhehi
a1ailkata, Ce so; Ee o -pañcailgu1alailkita ti; Be, Se
o -pañcailgu1a1ailkata ti .. . limpitagandhehi ... ); Spk I
242,25 (setamalahi e' eva -ehi ca alailkata, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se 0 -pañcailguHhi);- 0 -pañcaiigulika, n., a mark made
by the spread hand (which has been dipped) in a
fragrant substance; Vv 33:47 (-lll!l ahaq¡ adasiq¡ ...
bhagavato thüpasmiq¡; Vv-a 147,4: -an ti gandhena
pañcailgulikadanaq¡); Ja II 256,2 (cetiye -lll!l detha ti
gandhe adasi); Ps II 261 ,lo ([usabhe] -ehi mai).geti);
Dhp-a III 374,9 (gOJ:_Iiinlll!l -ani datva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
pañcailgu1ikani); - 0 -php.sanaka, m. (or n.) a grinder
of fragrant substances; (or the grinding of fragrant
substances;) Sv 924,16 (--nisadaya, Ce, Se so; Be
0
-pisanakanisadaya; Ee gandhaq¡ piq¡sanakanisadaya);
-
0
-Va(t), mfn. possessing fragrance; Ps III 222,10
(Vai).l)avantlll!l 0 -vantlll!l rasavantlll!l);- 0 -Váha, m., one
of the winds in the body; Abh 38; - -sára, m., sandal-
0
wood; Abh 300 (candano ... -o); -
0
-hatthi(n), m. [cf
BHS gandhahastin; cf S. gandhagaja, "elephant in rut"],
a kind of elephant; Ps II 26,7 (Ylll!l dasannlll!l
piilgaliinlll!l [kayaba1lll!ll tlll!l ekassa -ino); Cp-a 50,5
(-ino ayobandhanlll!l chinditva vanagamanlll!l viya); -
ifc see tathagata-; - agandha, mfn., without a scent;
Ja III 253,24' (--taya gandhena na tappeti, Be, E e so; Ce
agandhitataya; Se agandhitaya); VI 92,n· (na hi tattha -o
nama rukkho atthi);- duggandha, m. and mfn., l. (m.)
a bad smell, a stink, a stench; Abh 146; Ja III 455,24
(kayato ca mukhato ca sugandhaq¡ -aq¡ viya karissati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gandhlll!l -lll!l); Dhs 625; Spk III 14,3*
(pañca gai).hant' anatthani ... -aq¡ asuciq¡ vyadhiq¡ ... );
Th-a I 92,29 (dussBatta yeva dussHamayaq¡ -aq¡ vayati);
- --kara, mfn., making a bad smell; Th 1152
(sarirlll!l . . . --karaq¡ karisaparibandhaq¡, so read with
Th App II p. 237,20*? Be, Ce --karlll!l paribandhlll!l; Ee
-lll!l kariparibandha; Se duggandhaklll!l parivajjeyya);
- atiduggandha, m., a very bad smell; Cp-a 142,6 (ati-
duggandhavayanena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee akitti-
duggandhavayanena); 2. (mfn.) evil-smelling,
stinking; V in II 148,27 (vihara avatapanaka honti ... -a);
A I 34,27 (appamattako pi gütho -o hoti); Sn 205
(dipadako 'Ylll!l asuci -o parihirati); Pv 6:1 (nagga
dubbai).l)arüpa si -a püti vayasi); Ja VI 111 ,24* (rahado
aylll!l muttakarisapüro --rüpo ); Mil 172,14 (-aq¡ pi go-
muttaq¡ pitaq¡); Vism 108,15; Sp 1193,27 (--taya); Mp IV
121,19 (pütimuttam eva vuccati --tta); Dhp-a I 51,2 (tlll!l
thiinlll!l . .. --tarlll!l ca hoti); - atiduggandha, mfn.,
extremely evil-smelling; Pj II 286,9;- niggandha, mfn.,
free from scent; odourless; Ja V 236,1; Dhp-a I 51,1;-
sugandha, m. and mfn., l. (m.) a fragrant or pleasant
smell; Ap 510,2 (taq¡ gharlll!l vasayiq¡su -ena); Dhs 625
(-o duggandho ); Mp I 234,24 (sakalanagarlll!l
24 gandhabba
--gandhitlll!l hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be --gandhiklll!l; Se
gandhagandhaklll!l); 2. (mfn.) sweet-smelling,
fragrant; D III 199,34* (-lll!l tai).gu1aphallll!l); Ja III 277,8
(-a bhavissami); Ap 397,18; Th-a I 84,25 (mayhaq¡
sañram eva -aq¡ hotü ti); - atisugandha, mfn., very
sweet-smelling; Ps III 215,5 (pasado atisugandho hoti,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se atisugandhagandho); - see also
agandhaka, duggandhiya, devagandhika, pütigandhaka,
sagandhaka.
gandha2, n.(?) [?], (according to ct) the heart; Sp 268,8
(-an ti hadaylll!l vuccati tlll!l uppatenti ti uppa1agandha);
- see also uppalagandhapaccatthika, uppa1agandha-
thena (sv uppala).
gandha3 , m. or n.. [cf gandheti], cutting, hurting; It-a II
57,14 (chedanattho hi idha 0 -saddo uppalagandha-
paccatthika ti adisu viya); Sadd 548,2 ( -saddo ca
0
uppa1agandhatheno ti ettha chedane vattati ti daghabbo );
-
0
-piip.sana, n., grinding and hurting; ? Sadd 565,22
(addanam -an ti vadanti).
gandha4 , ~-. vl for gantha qv.
gandha(r), m. [?], one who cuts; ? Ap 461,6 (tata tanta ca
hanta ca ... anejo virajo khatta gandha vatta, Be, E e, Se
so; Ce ganta).
gandhaka, m. [cf S. gandhaka], perfume; a fragrant
substance; ? Sadd 872,5 (khandho andho gandho, evlll!l
khandhako andhako -o ti); ? - ifc see sisalepana-
(sv sisa 1);- gandhaka in cpd in Ee, Se at Thi 255 is wr;
Be, Ce -khandhaka-.
gandhati in Ee at Nett !16,wfoll. is wr (or altemative
form ?) for ganthati (Be, Ce so).
gandhana, n. [from gandheti; S. lex. id.], l. hurting,
injury; Sadd 489,7 (va gati-gandhanesu);- ifc see ku1a-;
- 2. pointing out, indicating; Sadd 529,25 (su ca -e); -
gandhana- in Ce, Ee at Sv 144,24 is wr for gai).thana- (Be,
Se so); - gandhana in Ee at Pet 94,14 is prob. wr; Be
patthanaganthana-; Ce patthana ganthena.
gandhabba 1, m. [S. gandharva], l. one of a class of
heaven-dwelling beings, noted especially as musicians;
Abh 13 (bhüto ca -o guyhako yakkarakkhasa); 902 (-o
devatantare); V in II 238,16 (mahasamuddo mahataq¡
bhütanaq¡ avaso tatr' ime bhüta timi ... asura naga -a);
D III 169,21 (deva manussa asura naga -a); 197,5*
(-iinlll!l adhipato Dhatarattho); A II 39,4* (-o va
vihailgamo); Dhp 105 (n' eva devo na -o na Maro saha
brahmuna); Ja IV 252,2o· (sace deva va -a va
bhaveyyuq¡ nacceyyuq¡ e' eva gayeyyuq¡ ca); V 6,11*
(tassa jananti pi taro -a ca sadevaka); VI 265,5* (ke -e ca
rakkhase; 265,9·: ko -o va rakkhaso va); Nidd I 73,3o
(ayaq¡ ditthi allll!l ... 0 -ttaya); Ap 307,22 (deviinlll!l
asuriinlll!l ca -iinlll!l ca sakkato); Mi1267,19; Mhv 12:20
(himavante ca -a yakkha); - 2. a musician; Abh 902
(gayake... -o); Th 164 (anaccuq¡ tattha -a cha
sahassani sattadha; Th-a II 41,1: -a ti nata); Ja II 254,24
(mayaq¡ maharaja -a nama sippaq¡ nissaya jivama,
mülaq¡ 1abhanta vadeyyama ti); III 188,9 (rañño pana
Saggo nama -o atthi);- 3. a horse; Abh 902 (asse -o);
- 4. an expression for that impulse or entity which
takes (re-)conception; MI 266,4 (yato ... matapitaro ca
sannipatita honti, mata ca utuni hoti -o ca paccupaghito
hoti, evlll!l til)l)lll!l sannipata gabbhassavakkanti hoti;
gandhabba
Ps II 310,25 foil.: -o ti tatrüpagasatto ... kammayanta-
yantito pana eko satto tasmiq:¡ okase nibbattanako hotl ti
ayaq:¡ ettha adhippayo) quoted Mi1123,11; M II 157,4
(jananti ... bhonto . . . SO -o khattiyo va brahma1_10 va
vesso va suddo va ti); Mi1129,1 (yadi tattha -o yato
kutoci agantva a1_1c,laje kule uppajjati so tattha a1_1c,lajo
hoti); Sadd 622,6 (dho tassa gabbhokkamanasanne satte:
-o ca paccupanhito hoti);- -kayika, mfn., belonging
0
to the assemblage of the gandhabbas; S Ili 250,13
(san ti ... millagandhe adhivattha deva ... gandhagandhe
adhivattha deva, ime vuccanti ... -a deva ti); Sv 688,3
(ayaq:¡ Cittaseno -o devaputto ); o -vatika,
0
-vattika, mfn., undertaking devotion to the
gandhabbas; ? Nidd 1 89,23 (eke sama1_1abrahma1_1a vata-
suddhika . . . -a va honti, Be, Ce so; E e, Se vatta-
suddhika ... 0 -vattika); -
0
-hattha, m., a wooden
instrument for rubbing the body; Vin-vn 2784 (kayaq:¡
-ena ... na ghaq:¡seyya); - 0
-hatthaka, m. [cfS.
gandharvahastaka, "the castor-oil tree"], (according to
ct) a wooden instrument for rubbing the body with
powder while bathing; Vin II 106,7 (chabbaggiya
bhikkhil -ena nahayanti; Sp 1199,23: -ena ti nahanatitthe
thapitena darumayahatthena, tena kira cu1_11_1ani gahetva
manussa sariraq:¡ ghaq:¡santi); - see also gandhabbl.
2
gandhabba , n. (and m. and -a, f) [S. gandharva; BHS
gandharva], music, song; Abh 902 (gayane gayake ...
-o); Ja II 249,3foll. (tesaq:¡ Guttilagandhabbassa -e jata-
paricayanaq:¡ tassa -aq:¡ kilañjaka1_1c,lilvanaq:¡ viya hutva
upanhasi); III188,15 (ahaq:¡ gandhabbo ... tumhakaq:¡
-aq:¡ karissami); 188,23 (vi1_1aq:¡ mucchetva tantissarena
gítassaraq:¡ anatikkamanto -aq:¡ akasi); Vv-a 139,22
(chajjadicatubbidhaq:¡ pi -aq:¡ ahapetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr chejjadicatubbidhaq:¡); Mil 3,31 (bahilni e' assa
satthani uggahitani honti seyyathidaq:¡ . . . ga1_1ika -a
tikiccha ... ); - 0 -sippa, n., the art of music; musician-
ship; Ja Il 248,21 (-e nipphattiq:¡ patva); Mp III 389,2o
(ayaq:¡ -e cheko ).
gandhabbaka, m. [cf S. gandharvaka, gandharvika;
BHS gandharvika], a musician; V v-a 36,24 (yato chekena
-ena payuttavaditato viya ativiya manoharasaddo
niccharati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee manohara sadda
niccharanti).
gandhabbí, f [cf S. gandharvi], a .female gandhabba; D Ili
203,9 (amanusso yakkho va yakkhini va ... gandhabbo
va -I va); Ja IV 459,13* (devata nu si -I).
gandhayhpsü ti in Ee at Ja VI 210,14' is wr for
ganthayiq:¡sil ti (Be, Ce, Se so).
gandhasila, m. or -a,f [?],a kind of(fragrant ?) plant;?
Ja VI 537,24* (haliddaka -a hirivera ca guggula, Be, Ce
so; Ee gandhasíla; Se gandhasela).
gandhara, mfn., m. and -i. f [cfS. gandhara], l. (mfn.)
from Gandhiira; Ja VI 500,1* (-a pa1_1c,lukamba!a; 501,22·:
gandhararatthe uppanna satasahassagghanika . . . ratta-
kambala); - see also gandharaka; - 2. (m.f) the name
of a magic spell; DI 213,14 (atthi ... -I nama vijja, taya
so bhikkhu anekavihitaq:¡ iddhividhaq:¡ paccanubhoti;
Sv 389,11: -I ti Gandharena nama isina kata Gandhara-
ratthe va uppanna vijja, tattha kira bahil isayo vasiq:¡su);
Ja IV 498,33' (ghoraq:¡ va -iq:¡ va vijjaq:¡ savetva osadhiq:¡
adaya te paccatthikanaq:¡ adassanaq:¡ vajanti); - i.fc see
25 gandheti
1
culla- (sv culla ), maha-;- 3. (m.) the third ofthe seven
saras or primary notes of music; Abh 132 (chajja-
gandharamajjhima).
gandharaka, mfn. [cfS. gandharaka], from Gandhiira;
Sv 752,13 (-o rattakambalo sukhumo ujjalo sukha-
samphasso ti).
gandhi(n)\ mfn. [S. gandhin], smelling of; having a smell;
- i.fc see gandha-, giltha-, candana-, su-, hemacandana-.
1
gandhi(ni, m. [from gandha ], a peifumer; a seller o.f
perfumes; Pv-a 127,13 (magadha ti -ino); - see also
2
gandhika .
3
gandhi(n) 3 , mfn. [from gandha or gandheti], hurting,
injuring; - ifc see kulagandhini (sv kula); - see also
1
antimagandhina (sv antima ).
1
gandhika\ mfn. [from gandha ; cf AMg gaq:¡dhiya],
fragrant; smelling (of); Ja VI 510,14* (-ena vilimpitva
agarucandanena ca rajojallani dharenta kathaq:¡ kahanti
daraka, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gandhakena); - ifc see
kaddama-, candana-; - gandhikaq:¡ in Ee at Ap 348,29
(vanasa1_1c,le va gandhikaq:¡) is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
panasaq:¡ devagandhikaq:¡; - gandhika in Ee at
Vv-a 58,2 (gandhika gandhikehi) is wr; Be, Ce, Se
ganthitaganthitehi; - 0 -kasava, n., a perfumed yellow
robe; ? Cp 189,9 (kütajatilaq:¡ ekaq:¡ -aq:¡ nivasetva ekaq:¡
parupitva... disva; = Ja IV 446,4: eds gaJ.lthika-
kasavaq:¡); - sugandhika, mfn., very fragrant; Ja VI
530,25* (nanava1_11_1ehi pupphehi kusaleh' eva -a, Ce, Ee
so; Be sugandhita; Se gandhika); Ap 347,s (setavañ -a);
461,18 (tato cuto manussesu jato homi -o);- see also
gandhita, duggandhiya.
gandhika2 , m. [S. gandhika, BHS gandhika], a perfumer, a
dealer in peifumes; Ja VI 276,25* (malakare ca rajake -e
atha dussike, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ganthike); Ap 359,17
(usukara capakara ca pesakara ca -a); Mil262,14
(lohitacandanaq:¡ va -aq:¡ papu1_1itva kittiq:¡ labheyya);
Sadd 786,24 (gandhaq:¡ assa bha1_1c,lan ti -o, Ee so; Ce
gandho assa ... );- see also gandhi(nl
1
gandhita, mfn. [pp of*gandhayati, denom. from gandha ?
1 ? cf AMg gaq:¡dhiya],Jragrant, perfumed;
or = gandhika
Ap 19,26 (phalagandhena -o hoti assamo); 180,4 (taq:¡
pupphaq:¡ ocinitvana sugandhaq:¡ -aq:¡ subhaq:¡, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee sugandhaq:¡ gandhagandhitaq:¡): Bv-a 171,9
(dhilpitan ti vasitaq:¡ -aq:¡); - gandhita in Ee at
Nett 116,17 is wr for ganthita (Be, Ce so);- gandhita
and agandhita in E e at V v-a 285,2 are wrr .for ganthita
and aganthita (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc see gandha-
1
sv gandha ; - sugandhita, mfn., very .fragrant; Ja VI
530,25* (nanava1_11_1ehi pupphehi kusaleh' eva -a, Be so;
Ce, Ee sugandhika; Se gandhika); Ap 509,24 (gabbhaq:¡
me vasato mata dehenasi -a, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
sugandhika).
gandhina, mfn. [new stem .from -gandhiní, f of
gandhi(ni qv; or possibly wr], hurting, injuring; - (fe
1
see antima- (sv antima ).
gandhiyo in Ee at Kv 31,32 is wr for ga1_1c,liyo (Be, Ce, Se
so).
gandheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. l. [cf S. gandhana, "pointing
out the Jaults o.f others"], points out; reveals;
Dhatup 592 (gandha silcane); Dhatum 825; Vism 481,16
(-ayati ti gandho, attano vatthuq:¡ silcayatl ti attho) f.
gabba
Patis-a 79,7 (-ayanti ti gandha); Sadd 547,26 (gandha
sucane ... -eti -ayati); 585,7 (-ayati ti gandho, attano
vatthuJT! sucayati idaJT! sugandh3JT1 idaJT! duggandhan ti
pakaseti); - 2. [S. Dhatup gandhayate, Wg § 33:11;
cfgandha3], hurts; destroys; cuts; Sadd 585,10
(gandha . . . addane ca . . . atha va -ayati chindati
manapagandho sugandhabhavena duggandh3JT!).
gabba, m.n. [S. garva, m.],pride; Abh 171 (-o 'bhimano);
Sadd 351,32 (-aJT! dappanaJT!).
gabbati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup garbati, Wg § 11 :28], goes;
Sadd 405,15 (gabba ... gatiyaJT!: ... -ati).
gabbati2 , gabbeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup garvati,
garvayate, Wg §§ 15:74; 35:53], is proud; is confident;
Dhatum 289 (gabba dappe); Sadd 406,27 (gabba
dappe: . . . -ati); 554,21 foll. (gabba mane: . .. -eti
-ayati . . . -etl ti na sailkucati); - pp gabbita, mfn.
[S. garvita], proud; self-confident; Abh 1075; Ja II
340,13' (yaso hayati issariy3JT1 --bhavo parihayati ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be issariyagabbitabhavo; Se issariya-
1abhitabhavo); Ap 609,4 (sutvana nopagacchami mama
rupena -a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gabbhita); Sv 929,6 (na
apamadena na d!nena na -ena ti attho, Ce so; Be na
appamodena na dlnena na gabbhitena ti; Ee na
apamadena na d!tena na -ena ti attho; Se na appamadena
na dinnena na vambhitena ti; Sv-pt Ili 142,17foll.:
odagyasabhavatta na dino dhammupasaJT!hitatta gabba-
yutto ti aha, Ee so; Be gabbhayutto ti); Sadd 554,22 (-o);
- --sabhava, mfn., proud or conceited by nature; Ja III
264,11' (dittasabhavam --sabhavam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
omits);- see also gabbhati 2. . III 119,16 (viharo abhirupo hoti ... majjhe -o samanta
gabbana, n. ffrom gabbati2], pride; confidence;
Sadd 554,21 (gabbeti gabbayati -aJT! gabbito).
gabbha, m. [S. garbha], l. the womb (of humans or
animals); Abh 943; Vin III 139,34 (sarakkha nama -e pi
pariggahita hoti mayhaJT! esa ti); SI 174,14*
(punappunaJT! -am upeti mando; Spk I 258,6: -an ti
sot:tasiga1adinaJT! pi tiracchanagatanaJT! kucchiJT!) f.
Th 17; A IV 290,13* (otit:tt:to satarüpena puna -aya
gacchati); Dhp 126 ( -am eke upapajjanti nirayaJT! papa-
kammino saggaJT! sugatino yanti; Dhp-a III 37,18: idha
manussagabbho va adhippeto ); Sn 278 (-a -aJT! tama
tamaJT!); Ja VI 228,11* (-amhi kumbhadasiya yato jato
suduggato); Nidd I 17,11 (-e thitimülakaJT! dukkh3JT1);
Ap 509,24 (-aJT! me vas ato); Ps II 310,8 foll. (katthaci hi
-o ti matukucchi vutta . . . katthaci -e nibbattanasatto );
- ifc [also "interior of", "containing"] see garu-
(sv garu\ cakkavata- (sv cakka), civara-,
dvandakammadharaya-, paduma-, himava1ahaka-; - see
also ailgaragabbhaka, ailgaragabbhe sv ailgara; - 2. the
foetus; the embryo; offspring, progeny; sprout; Abh 943
(-o kucchighasatte); Vin II 268,24/oll. (aññatara itthi
pavutthapatika jarena gabbhini hoti, sa -aJT! patetva ...
etad avoca hand' ayye imaJT! -aJT! pattena nihara ti); D II
14,7 (itthika nava va dasa va mase -aJT! kucchina
pariharitva vijayanti); M I 265,35 (tit:tt:taJT! ... sannipata
gabbhassavakkanti hoti); Pv 6:7 (tassa dvemasiko -o
lohitaJT! yeva pagghari); Ja I 50,32 (deviya te kucchimhi
-o patighito); II 301,15 (tvaJT! me bhariyaJT! paharitva
-3JT! patesi); Nidd I 382,21 (gabbhakarat:t!ya -aJT!
sat:tthapenti); Mi168,3; Sp 441,4 (aho vatayaJT!
26 gabbha
kucchigato -o na sotthina abhinikkhameyya ti, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se kucchigataJT! -3JT!); Nidd-a 1 416,17 (-o hi
vatena pat:takehi kammena ti tihi karat:tehi vinassati);
Sadd 408,29 (-o ti matukucchi pi vuccati kucchigataputto
pi); - -aJT! gat:thati, conceives, becomes pregnant;
Vin II 188,19 (seyyatha pi bhikkhave assatari atta-
vadhaya -aJT! gat:thati); A V 81,n; Ja II 140,5 (sa ... puna
-aJT! gat:thi); Ap 16,13 (-aJT! gat:thanti paduma); 42,12
(meghesu gajjamanesu -3JT! gat:thanti ta [balaka] sada;
Ap-a 281,31: at:tt;l3JT! dharenti ti attho); Mil368,25 (dlpinl
sakiJT! yeva -3JT! gat:thati); Sp 70,7 (sa t3JT1 divasam eva
-3JT! gat:thitva); - also metaphorically: conceives; is
conceived: Vism 144,26 (plti -aJT! gat:thanti paripakaJT!
gacchanti); Sp 191,5 (ñat:taJT! paripacentassa -aJT!
gat:thapentassa); 416,2 (si!e paripure samadhi -aJT!
gat:thati); Ps IV 101,25 (vipassanam eva -aJT! gat:thapeti
nama); - -o ughati, vughati, a baby is born, is
delivered; V in II 278,27 (tassa pabbajitaya -o vughati,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se vughasi); - ifc see apagata-
(sv apagacchati), ariya-, ahíta- (sv adahati), nigat:tthi-,
pathama-, pariput:tt:ta- (sv paripurati), mutha-
(sv muyhati), visata-, saññi-, sannisinna- (sv sannisidati),
sali-; - 3. the abdomen; the belly; Abh 271 (-o kogho );
- 4. an inner room or apartment; (in a vihara) a
separate room or cell; Abh 214 (-o ovarako); 943;
Vin II 152,18 (anujanami bhikkhave tayo -e
sivikagabbhaJT! natikagabbh3JT! hammiyagabbhan ti);
303,36 (-e ayasmato Sabbakamissa senasanaJT!
paññattaJT! hoti 0 -pamukhe ayasmato Revatassa);
pariyagaro ); Ja I 351,19 (Sakko sattaratanapure -e
vivarapetva); III 276,8 (te . . . ranno smsayane
nipannakale -aJT! pavisiJT!su); Mil10,6 (antopasade
ekasmiJT! -e); Kkh 2 158,21 (vihare ti -e va aññatarasmiJT!
va sabbaparicchanne guttasenasane); Sp 282,8 (-e
nipajjantena 0 -dvaraJT! va pamukhadvar3JT1 va yaJT! kiñci
saJT!varitva nipajjituJT! vagati); 980,26 (-assa ca cattaro
kot:ta pamajjitabba ti); Dhp-a I 221,6 (ta agata -e
pavesetva dvarani pidahitva); Vv-a 220,27 (mahavihare
catuhi -ehi patimat:tt;litaJT! catussalaJT! karetva);
Sadd 409,3foll. (api ca -o ti avasaviseso, -aJT! pavittho ti
adisu hi ovarako -o ti vuccati); - ifc see anantara-
(sv antara), cetiya-, dipa- (sv dipa 1), dhatu-, natika-,
paccha-, siri-, sivika-, hammiya-; - o• -asaya, m., the
afterbirth, the placenta; the excretions of childbirth;
Abh 239 (-o jalabu); Pv 30:3 ( -aJT! pakkhigat:ta haranti;
Pv-a 198,14: -an ti gabbhamalaJT!); Th-a II 254,21 (tassa
susan3JT1 netva jhapiyamanaya -o na jhayi); Sadd 239,21;
- o• -okkantika, mfn. [gabbha + okkanti + ka2],
connected with conception; It-a I 116,11 (-' -adivasena
anekehijati-adidukkhehi);- gabbhokkantika- in Ce, Ee
at Sv 32,25 (gabbhokkantisamayo) and at Th-a II 105,15
(gabbhokkantikamülakadi-) is prob. wr; Be, Se
gabbhokkanti-; - 0 -karal}a, n., (the art of) causing or
aiding conception; Sn 927 (-aJT! tikicchaJT! mamako na
seveyya); - 0
-karal}iya, m(fn)., (one) who aids
conception or strengthens the foetus; ? Nidd I 382,21 (-a
gabbhaJT! sat:tthapenti; Nidd-a I 416,16: -a ti
vinassamanassa gabbhassa puna avmasaya
osadhadanena gabbhasat:tthanakaraka, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
gabbhaka
gabbhasaQ.thanakaral).a); - 0 -(g)gahal).a, n. [gabbha +
gahal).a 1], l. conceiving; becoming pregnant; Sp 140,13
(vipassanañal).assa pariQ.amaka1o vagghitaka1o --ka1o;
Sp-t [Be] I 353,7: sa maggañal).agabbhal11 dharenti viya
hot! ti aha --kalo ti); 2!3,31foll.; Ap-a 281,29 (pume
avijjamane kathaJ11 balaki:inaJ11 -a111 hoti ti); -
2. swelling; sprouting; ? Ja II 135,2 (sassana111 --kalo
jato); - 2. the mention of "gabbha"; Pj II 41,1
(gabbhaseyya111, tattha -en a jalabujayoni seyyagahal).ena
avasesa ... veditabba); - 0 -dharini, (m).f(n)., bearing,
carrying the foetus; Ja VI 470,23' (-i111 matara111, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr -a111; 472,15': yaya tva111 kucchina dharito);
-
0
-pariharal).a, n., carrying, nourishing of the foetus;
Ja I 409,3 (kucchina --dukkhaJ11); Vism 500,21 (idaJ11
--mii1akal11 dukkha111): - 0 -parihara, m., (necessaries
for) the care and nourishing of the foetus; Ja IV 188,22
(abhiramitu111 yeva janasi -a111 na janasi ti); Ps II 19,s
(raja -a111 adasi) f. Dhp-a I 4,1;- 0 -pataka, mf(n)., one
who causes a miscarriage; Ja V 274,30' (-i:inaJ11
paccananirayaJ11 dassento, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); -
0
-patana, n., causing a miscarriage; a means of causing
a miscarriage, esp. a concoction; Vin I 97,4 (yo ... jivita
voropeti antamaso -a111 upadaya); lii 83,26foll. (ingh'
ayya -a111 janahi ... tassa -a111 adasi, darako kalam akasi;
Sp 468,15: -an ti yena paribhuttena gabbho patati
tadisa111 bhesajjaJ11); 84,7 (ingh' ayya -aq1 janahi ti, tena
hi bhagini maddassii ti sa madditva gabbhaq1 patesi);
Pv 6:6 (akari111 -a111): Ja IV 181,24 (dassanen' eva
--samattha111 ghorariipaJ11 ... sunakha111 katva, Be, Ce,
Se so; E e --ppakaraq1); Dhp-a I 47,7 (-aq1 yojetva deti,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se --bhesajja111); - 0 -patini, (m)f(n)., a
woman who causes a miscarriage; Ja V 269,12' (patanti
-iyo duggaq1 Vetaral).iql nadiJ11, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
gabbhapatiyo; 275,1·: yahi gabbhapatanakhara-
bhesajjadini pivitva gabbha patita ta -iyo itthiyo, Ce, Se
so; Be -khara-; Ee wr ya hi gabbhapatanani khara-
bhesajjani pivitva gabbhapatita ... ); 275,5· (-Inaq1
nirayaq1 dassetva); - 0
-mala, n., the excretions of
childbirth; the afterbirth; Ja I 238,23; Vism 63,1
(sotthiyan ti -a111 puñchitva chaggitavatthaq1); Ps III
272,24 (yakkhiniq1 . . . -aq1 paccasiJ11samana111 disva);
Dhp-a IV 215,7 (tassa jatadivase -assa dhovitva
anapanitataya); Ud-a 291,4 (ses a -a111 nissaya nibbatta);
Pv-a 80,1o (pasiiti:inaqi itthina111 lohitaq1 -a111 ca); -
0
-visa, mfn., twenty-years old, counting from conception;
Vin I 93,15 (ayasma Kumarakassapo -o upasampanno
hoti); - 0
-vutthana, n., birth; delivery; Ja I 52,27
(salasakha111 gahetva titthamanaya eva e' assa -a111
ahosi); Nidd I 46,22 (--miilakena dukkhena); Ps III 78,2
(mal).gape vasantiya eva -aq1 ahosi); Mp I 458,4
(paresaq1 gehe -aq1 nama appatiriipan ti): Dhp-a I 399,21
(ajaññav~avaya -a111 ahosi); -
0
-Vokkanti,f, coming
into being of the foetus in the womb, conception; Th 790
(-ito dukkhaq1, Be, Ce so; E e, Se gabbhe vokkantito;
Th-a III 41,22: -ito panhaya sabbasaJ11silrappavatti-
dukkhaqi); - 0
-seyya,f, the womb; Vin I 236,3
(yassa . . . ayatiqi -a punabbhavabhinibbatti pahina);
Sn 29 (naha111 puna upessaq1 -a111); Vv 53:24; Ja III
434,3' (ayaq1 hi me antima -a); Kv 616,2 (atthi -aya
0
dhammabhisamayo ti); Mil 368,2s; - -Seyyaka, mfn.,
27 gama
(one) being in the womb; who takes conception in a
womb; Vibh 413,24 (-anaq1 sattana111 uppattikkhal).e
sattayatanani patubhavanti); Vism 272,4 (sabbesa111 pi
-ana111 matukucchito nikkhamanakale); 499,4 (-ana111
patisandhito panhaya); Mp II 17 ,s (--ttaJ11
apajjamanana111); - agabbhaseyyaka, mfn., not carried
in a womb, not conceived in a womb; Mil 128,21 (sabbe
pi deva agabbhaseyyaka satta yeva);- sagabbha, mfn.,
l.pregnant; Ap 475,7; Vism 513,11 (na phalena -o
[hetu] pakativadinaqi pakati viya); Sp 966,7 (-a111 itthiJ11
kalakata111 disva); - 2. with the foetus; Sp 455,17 (sace
gabbhinl patitva -a marati dve pill).atipata).
gabbhaka, m. [gabbha + ka2], a small room, a niche; -
ifc see d!pa (sv dipa\
gabbhati\ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. garbhita ?], contains;
Sadd 408,29 (gabbha dhiiraQ.e: -ati gabbho).
gabbhati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup galbhate, Wg § 10:32], is
bold; is confident; Dhatup 211 (gabbha pagabbhiye);
Dhatum 305; - pp gabbhita, mfn., bold; confident;
Sp 258,18 (-en a hirotappasampannena satthupatibhagena
hutva kathetabban ti, Be, Ee so; Ce gabbitena; Se
tabbhitena; Sp-t [Be] II 84,15: -ena ti sañkocaq1
anapajjantena); Sv 929,6 (na dinena na -ena ti, Be so;
Ce, Ee gabbitena ti; Se vambhitena ti); - see also
gabbate.
gabbhara, n.m. [cf S., S. lex. gahvara], a cleft, a natural
cave; a hiding-place, a thicket; Abh 609 (lenaq1 tu -a111
guha); 1092; - ifc see giri-, pabbata-; - see also
gavhara.
gabbhi(n), mfn. and gabbhini, f [S. garbhin, garbhiQ.I],
(mfn.) pregnant; filled, swelling; (f.) a pregnant woman;
Abh 239 (garugabbhapannasatta ca -ini); V in I 269,5
(itthi kho -m1 punsana111 amanapa); IV 317,10
(bhikkhuniyo -iniJ11 vutthapeti); D III 81,29 (dissanti ...
brahmal).iyo utuniyo pi -iniyo pi vijayamana pi ... ); A I
240,5 foil. (kassakassa gahapatissa natthi sa iddhi ... ajj'
eva me dhaññani jayantu sve va -Ini hontu uttarasve va
paccantii ti . . . tani dhaññani utuparil).ilmini jayanti pi
-!ni pi honti paccanti pi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr -iniyo
hontu ... -in! pi honti; Mp II 354,14: diyagghamasaq1
patva gahitagabbhani honti); Pv 6:6 (sapattl me -in! asi);
Jai 151,16 (-in! miga); Mil365,s (-iniya dve aiigani
gahetabbani); Kkh 2 350,4 (gabbhinita); Sp 455,17 (sace
-in! patitva sagabbha marati, dve pal).atipata); Mp III
105,19 (visamapilini sassani bhavanti ti ekasmiq1 thane
-Ini honti ... , Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr -ini); Mhv 5:41
(devl .. . -in!); - gabbhini-alaya, m., a pretence of
being pregnant; Ja IV 37,19 (-aq1 katva ete vañcessaml
ti); - agabbhini,f, not pregnant; not a pregnant
woman; Vin IV 317,33 (-iya gabbhinisañña); 318,3 foil.
(-iJ11 --sañña vunhapeti).
gabhira, mfn. [ts], deep; Abh 669 (gabhiraninna-
gambhira).
gama, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) going, going to; - ifc
see aghasigama, adho-, uddhaii- (sv uddhaq1), tiriyaii-
(sv tiriyaq1), divaii- (sv diva), diiraii- (sv diira),
nabhasigama (sv nabha[s]), nibbana-, yenakamaii.-
(sv ya[d]), hadaya-; - 2. (m.) going, course; march;
Abh 395 (patthana111 ca -o gati); Sadd 464,3o (gati
gamanaq1 -o agamo); - ifc see agati- (sv gati), attha-
gamaka
gama, atthailgama, turail- (sv tura); - gamena in Ee at
Ap 580,12 (santo gamenasi) is prob. wr; Be gm_1enapi; Se
duggama, mfn.,
gul).enas1; Ce satthagamenasi;
difficult to be travelled over; impassable; Abh 192; S I
48,23 (-o bhagava vis amo maggo ti); Ja IV 74,25
(Himavanto nama dure -o ca); V 275,4· (dugga!Tl -~
visama!Tl Vetaral).i!Tl patanti); Spk III 201,7 (dugga ti -a);
- suduggama, mfn., very difficult to travel over;
Vv 84:3; Ja VI 523,27'.
gamaka, mfn., l. [ts] making clear, explanatory;
conveying the ( same) meaning; Sadd 641,8 (llnass'
atthassa -a!Tl nipphannavacana!Tl liilg~ nama bhavati);
745,1 (tlsu padesu anantaritassa sapekkhasaddassa -tta
0
uttarapadena saha kvaci samaso hoti); 763,27 (atha va
vasita sanü vasitasanü, sapekkhatte sati pi -tta samaso);
0
-2. going (to); (one) who goes (to); Vism 513,3* (atthi
nibbuti na nibbuto puma magga!Tl atthi -o na vijjati);
Spk II 382,14 (jatimaral).ana!Tl pilra!Tl nibban~ -a hotha,
Be, Se so; Ce gamal).aka; Ee gamita); Pj I 13,23'
(buddha!Tl saral).agamana!Tl -a!Tl ca vibhavaye);
agamaka, mfn., not explanatory; not conveying the
(same) meaning; Sadd 744,2o ( --tta).
gamati, pr. 3 sg., see sv gacchati.
gamana, n. (and mfn. ?) [ts], l. (i) (n.) going, moving;
(freedom of) movement; walking; going away, setting
out, departure; Abh 395 (niyyana!Tl -a!Tl yatra); Vin III
48,29 (-a!Tl upacchindati); IV 81,12 (-e patippassaddhe;
Sp 820,26joll.: antaramagge upaddava!Tl va disva
anatthikataya va maya!Tl idani na pesissama na
gamissama ti eva!Tl -e patippassaddhe upacchinne);
l06,1s (kocid eva paccayo sena!Tl -aya); MI 134,37 (na
cassa nava santaraJ;~í uttara~etu va apara para!Tl -aya); S I
62,23* (-ena na pattabbo lokass' anto kudacana!Tl);
Dhp 178 (pathavya ekarajjena saggassa -ena va); Sn 40
(vase thane -e carikaya); 691 (attano -a!Tl anussaranto;
Pj 11 488,13: patisandhivasena aruppagamana!Tl); Ja I 51,9
(pailgula padasa -a!Tl patilabhi!Tlsu); 99,1 (bodhisatto pi
pacchato -e bahü anisa!Tlse addasa); VI 544,1• (na vasa!Tl
abhirocami -a!Tl mayha ruccati); Cp 3:7:1 (píjito
su!Tlsumarena -~ na labham' ah~); Nidd I 225,32
(-a!Tl sal).thapeti thilna!Tl sal).thapeti nisajja!Tl santhapeti);
316,25 (arahato khíl).asavassa agaman~ -a!Tl ... natthi);
Mil 306,12 (tassa sarassa -~ upacchinnan ti);
Vism 313,9 (kissa rodas! ti tumhakaq:I -aq:I paticca ti);
Sp 383,5 (sükarassa -a!Tl nivareti); Sv 867,12foll.
(suriyassa ujuk~ -a!Tl sígha!Tl tiriya!Tl -a!Tl dandha!Tl);
Ps 111 66,9 (al~ aññattha -ena rajuyyane vasatha);
Mhv 3:24 (sekhena -~ tahi!Tl na yutta!Tl te);- ifc see
agati- (sv gati), anivatta- (sv nivattati), atthagamana,
atthailgamana, duggati-, nigha-, nibbana-, pahil).a-,
vehasa-, sundara-; - (ii) (mfn.) going; moving;
Sp 1096,25 (bhavanetti samühata ti bhavato -a
sandhavana tal).hilrajju sughu hata chinna appavatti kata,
Ee, Se so; Be bhavagamana; Ce omits); - 2. (n.)
understanding; Sadd 315,8 (-a!Tl duvidh~
kayagamana!Tl ñal).agamanaq:I va); - gamana!Tl in Ee, Se
at Ap 600,22 (cikkhallabhümi!Tl -~) is prob. wr; Be, Ce
asuci!Tl;- 0 '-agamana, n., coming and going; going to
and fro; Vv 83:6 (-~pi dissati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
camanagaman~; Vv-a 326,21foll.: divase divase
28 gamika
ogamanuggamanavasena candasuriyana!Tl gamana!Tl
agaman~ ca dissati); Nidd 1 316,25 (arahato
khíl).asavassa agaman~ gaman~ -~ ...
jatijaramaraJ;~a! Tl natthi); Vism 244,w; Sv 551,15
(cutipatisandhivasena kismici thane -~ n' atthi ti);
Vv-a 139,6 (ev~ -a!Tl karontassa ta!Tl thana!Tl
vigatatil).~ ahosi); - --sampanna, mfn., suitable for
coming and going; accessible, convenient, Vin I 39,3
(ya!Tl assa gamato n' eva avidüre na accasanne
--sampanna!Tl); A V 15,26 (senasana!Tl natidür~ hoti
naccasanna!Tl --sampann~); Ja I 85,5 ( --sampann~
buddharaha!Tl senasana!Tl); Ap-a 342,19 (manussilna!Tl
--sampanne sañcaraJ;~aghane);- -kiriya,f, the activity
0
of going; a verb of "going ", the verb "to go "; Pj I 17,32
(-aya kammadvayabhavato ); Ud-a 22,23 (gavísu
duyhamanasu gato duddhasu agato ti ettha gavína!Tl
dohanakiriyaya -a lakkhíyati); Ev-a 46,34 (amhe ti
mayan ti imesa!Tl dvinn~ saddan~ purimassa -aya
sambandho datthabbo pacchimassa vandanakiriyaya); -
0
-m-patha, m., a way for going; Bv 2:15 (yatha añhi
pariruddho vijjante -e na palayati so puriso, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr gamane pathe; Bv-a 71,27: -e ti gamanapathe,
chandavinasatth~ anussaragama!Tl katva vutta!Tl); -
agamana, n., l. not going; Ja V 15,9·; Sp 987,25;- 2. a
wrong course; - ifc see chanda- (sv chanda\ -
duggamana, mfn., where it is difficult to move or walk;
Sv 855,1 (--ghana!Tl); Pv-a 102,26 (dugge ti ... --ghane,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se duggamatthanani); Patis-a 413,23
(sa!Tlsaro yeva hi -' -atthena viduggo ).
2
gamanaka, m(jn). [gamana + ka ], going; (one) who goes;
Mp 11 349,27 (kolañkolo ti kula kula!Tl -o); Cp-a 33,12
([nava] samma gahetva 0 -Vatena erakavatayutta; -¡. Ja IV
21,1·: gacchantena vatena yutta).
gamanl, f [?], a prostitute; Ja V 425,11 (na khalu samma
Pm:wamukha vesiyo nariyo -iyo, Be, Ee so; Ce
gamal).iyo; Se gamaníyo; 431 ,17·: gaJ;~ikayo ).
gamanika in Ee at Spk 11 204,25 (heghagamanika) is prob.
wr for gamaníya (Be, Ce, Se so).
gamaniya\ mfn.,.fpp of gacchati qv.
2
gamaniya , gamaniya, mfn. [ts], connected with going;
tending to go; going; leading; - ifc see adho-,
adhobhavañ- (sv adho), apaya-, uddhail- (sv uddha!Tl),
uparibhavail- (sv upari), tiracchanayoni- (sv tiracchana),
disa-. devaloka- (sv deva), niraya-, pettivisaya-,
manussaloka- (sv manussa), hadayail-, hegha-.
gamani, f, going; Sadd 867,22 (na -i agamani); -
agamani,f, not going; what is not to be gane to;
Sadd 867,19 (namhi akkose -ani ... -i te jamma deso
lamakapurisa deso taya na gantabbo ti attho ).
gamika, gamiya, mfn. and m. [BHS gamika], (one) about
to take a journey, (one) intending to leave; (one) on a
journey, away from home; Abh 424 (aññattha gantum
icchanto -o); Vin I 292,29 (-o bhikkhu attano bhatt~
pariyesamano sattha va vihayissati ... ); 11 211,1ojoll. (-a
bhikkhü darubhal).q~ mattikabhal).q~ apatisametva ...
pakkamanti . . . -an~ bhikkhün~ vatt~
paññapessami); A III 41,14 (agantukassa dilna!Tl deti
-assa dana!Tl de ti); Ja VI 31,24 (Kalacampanagar~ -a
nama atthí ti); Sp 797,25 (yo catuddasikapal).J).arasikesu
va uposathesu patipade va gantukamo so -o, Be so; Ce,
gamitabba
Ee, Se gamiyo); 1269,5foll. (agantuko agantukabhattam
eva 1abhati, -o agantukabhatt~ pi gamiyabhattarp pi
1abhati, avasiko pi pakkamitukamo -o hoti
gamiyabhatt~ 1abhati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -bhatt~);
0
1321,29 (gamiyo gamiyavatt~ apüretva); Dhp-a III
335,26 (-assa tai)<,iu1adipatheyy~ viya); Sadd 852,zo
(gamu ice etasma ikapaccayo hoti bhabbe: gamissati
ganturp bhabbo ti -o bhikkhu); - ifc see Jambudlpa-
(sv jambu), disaii.- (sv disa); 0
abhisaiikhara,
gamiyabhisaii.khara, m., the ímpetus or determination to
go; preparations for going; Vin I 233,31 (Sihassa
senapatissa yo ahosi -o bhagavantarp dassanaya so
patippassambhi) = A IV 180,17 (eds gamiyabhisankharo;
Mp IV 94,27: hatthiyanad!narp yojapanagandhama1adi-
gahai)avasena pavatto payogo ); o -citta,
gamiyacitta, n. [gamika + citta 1], an intention to go on a
joumey, to leave; Vin V 129,36 (uppann~ gamiyacittarp
duppativinoday~) =A III 185,3 (eds -~); Vism 94,17
(-arp); Sp 987,3o (gamiyacitte uppanne); - (gamiya)-
manussa, m., a person on a joumey, away from home;
Sp 4 71,11 (gamiyamanusso va gi1ano hutva vihararp
-vatta, gamiyavatta, n., the proper
0
pavisati); -
behaviour of a bhikkhu about to leave; Ja I 87,12
(gamiyavatt~ püressantl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -arp);
Vism 99,24 (-~ pana püretva); Sp 777,23 (gamiya-
vatt~ püretva gantabb~); 1282,19 (-e); Dhp-a I 379,16
(karoti ... na agantukavattarp na -arp).
gamitabba, m.fn.,fpp of gacchati qv.
gamitmp, inf of gacchati qv.
gamina (or gami[n]), m.fn. [cf S. gamin], about to take a
joumey; on a joumey; Sn 587 (aññe pi passa -ine
yathakammüpage nare; Pj II 461,5: -ine ti gamike,
paralokagamanasajje thite ti vutt~ hoti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -ine ti gamite).
gamiya, m.fn. and m., se e sv gamika.
gamissati,fot. 3 sg. of gacchati qv.
gami, aor. 3 sg. ofgacchati qv.
gameti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofgacchati qv.
gambhiranamo in Ee at S V 270,11 is wr for
gambh!ranemo (Be, Ce, Se so).
gambhira, m.fn. and n. [ts], l. (m.fn.) (i) deep;
unfathomable; Abh 669; A II 105,16/oll. (uttano
gambh!robhaso -o uttanobhaso uttano uttanobhaso -o
gambh!robhaso ime . . . cattaro udakarahada); IV 106,2o
(paccantime nagare parikha hoti -a e' eva vitthata ca);
Dhp 82 (rahado -o vipasanno anavi1o); Pv 13:19 (-a
caturassa ca pokkharañño sunimmita; Pv-a 77,14: -a ti
agadha); Ja IV 195,3* (anekata1e narake -e suduruttare );
VI 100,3• (nad! Sida -a duratikkama); Mi170,n
(mahasamuddo -o appameyyo duppariyogaho);
Sp 443,1o (-o avato); 456,13 (t~ opat~ -tar~ va 0
uttanatararp va... karoti); PsI 122,3 (-aya ...
giriguhaya); II 259,8 (gunn~ VaJ.la vaMhanti -a honti);
- (ii) deep in sound, deep-toned; Abh 129; D II 211,24
!brahmuno Sanaii.kumarassa . . . saro hoti . . . avisar! ca
-o ca ninnad! ca; Sv 640,33: -o ti nabhimü1ato pattJlaya
0
-samuttJlito) t M II 140,7; - acc. -~. adv., deeply,
sonorously; A I 188,7 (usabho suññaya gosalaya -~
naditabbarp maññati; Mp II 304,nfoll.: jeghaka-
vasabhassa nada-sadisarp gambhlranad~ naditabb~
29 gambhira
maññati); - (iii) profound; hard to fathom; hard to
penetrate or investigate or understand; V in I 5,10*
(patisotagamirp nipu1,1arp -arp duddas~ aJ.IUip ragaratta
na dakkhanti); D I 17,5 (ime .. . dhamma -a duddasa
duranubodha); MI 386,12* (appameyyassa -assa
monapattassa ... bhagavato; Ps III 97,12: -assa ti
gambh!ragUI,laSSa gu1,1ehi va -assa); 487,35 (-O
appameyyo duppariyogaho seyyatha pi mahasamuddo);
A I 70,4 (uttana ca parisa -a ca parisa; Mp II 143,22:
uttana ti pakata apaticchanna, -a ti güjha paticchanna);
IV 32,6 (-arp ca kath~ katta hoti; Mp IV 24,28: -an ti
guyh~ rahass~ jhananissitarp vipassanamagga-
pha1anibbananissit~); Th 953 (dhamme -e Uragocara);
Ja V 58,9 (ay~ pana pañho -o buddhavisayo); Ap 3,1o
(-arp nipu1,1arp tJlanarp paññaya vinibujjhare); Patis II
21,5 (-ani thanani vuccanti jhanani ca vimokkha ca
samadhl ca ... ); Nett 66,3o (-o appameyyo asaii.kheyyo);
Mi1101,31 (pañho -o uttanlkato); Sv 486,20 (Ánanda
tv~ mahapañño visadañiil,lo tena te -o pi
paticcasamuppado uttanako viya khayati); Ps II 176,22
(dhammassa ca --tarp paccavekkhantassa); Spk II 18,14
(pacchim~ hi saccadvayarp --tta duddas~); 94,21
(paticcasamuppado catühi -tahi -o); Sadd 65,18 (yes~
0
pana -o attho tes~ [padan~] abhidheyy~
kathessama);- 2. (n.) the deep; a bottomless place; SI
176,20* (andhakare pure hoti -e gadham edhati); A V
203,6 (paritto . . . attabhavo -e gadh~ na vindati);
Khp 8:1 (nidhirp nidheti puriso -e odakantike; Pj I
217,31: ogahetabbatthena -~); Sn 173 (appatitthe
analambe ko -e na s!dati); Th 758 (-e patitassa me
thal~ piil,lirp ca dassaye, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr piil,li;
Th-a III 30,21 foll.: atigambhire sarpsaramahoghe
patitassa mayh~); Ja VI 35,26* (-e appameyyasmirp
Ur~ yassa na dissati); Ap 27,13 (-e uttJlita ümi na ve1am
ativattati); - 0 avabhasa, m.fn., appearing deep; D II
55,9 (yava gambh!ro cayarp bhante paticcasamuppado -o
ti); S II 36,27 (Spk II 87,1: gambh!ro va hutva avabhasati
dissatl ti attho ); - o• -obhasa, m.fn. [gambh!ra +
obhasa2], appearing deep; A II 105,16 (uttano -o
gambhiro uttanobhaso ... ); - 0
-pañña, m.fn., (one) of
profound wisdom; understanding abstruse matters; S V
412,9 (--taya s~vattantl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --ttaya);
Sn 230 (ariyasaccani ... -ena sudesitani; Pj I 187,9: -ena
ti appameyyapaññataya sadevakassa pi 1okassa ñiil,lena
alabbhaneyyapatighapaññena, sabbaññuna ti vuttarp
hoti); 627 (-~ medhavirp; Ps III 438,7 foll.: gambhlresu
arammaJ.lesu pavattapaññarp); Th 1231 (-o medhavl ...
Sariputto); Mi122,12*;- 0 -pañña,f, profound wisdom;
the understanding of abstruse matters; Patis II
192,zs foil. (katama -a, gambhlresu khandhesu ñiil,l~
pavattatl ti -a ... ); - o -sita, o -sita, m.fn., yielding a deep
furrow; A IV 237,9 (khettarp ... na ca-~ hoti, Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se gambh!rasit~; Mp IV 124,12/oll.:
thaddhabhümitaya gambhiranugatarp nali.galamagg~
katva kasiturp na sakka hoti, uttananali.ga1amaggam eva
hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee unnali.ga1amaggam eva); -
agambhira, m.fn., not deep, shallow; Sp 328,17 (-e
udake padasa gacchantassa); Spk III 11,12;
atigambhira, m.fn., l. too deep; very deep; Vin IV
262,15 (-arp udakasuddhikarp adiyantl); Ja VI 337 ,26'
gamma
(aya111 nadl -a bahil Ca!).t;iamaccba ti, Se so; Be
bahuca!).t;iamaccbakil:_¡lfa ti; Ce, Ee -a Ca!).t;iamaccba ti);
PsI 154,22;- 2. very profound, very difficult; A I 219,31
(-a!Tl pañba!Tl puccbati); Sv 485,25 (atikkamma
pamiilfa!Tl gambb!ro -o ti attbo); Ud-a 1S,2o; Sadd 58,5
(aya!Tl bi nayo . . . -o ca mahasamuddo vi ya); -
sugambbira, mfn., very deep; very profound; Tb 421
(-o ... ariyo agbaiJ.giko maggo); Ap 32,27 (dbara1fi!Tl pi
-a111 ... kbobbeyya!Tl); Mi1124,2 (pañbo -o sunipul)o);
As 10,16; Saddb 530 (su1famano bi saddbamma!Tl ... -a!Tl
avitatha111).
1 -ena).
gamma , mfn.,fpp ofgaccbati qv.
2
gamma , mfn. [S., BHS gramya], belonging to the village
(lije), common, vulgar; esp. relating to the sensual
pleasures of the village; V in I 10,12 (dve 'me bbikkhave
anta pabbajitena na sevitabba . . . yo caya111 kamesu
kamasukba1likanuyogo bino -o potbujjaniko anariyo
anattbas~ito) f. S IV 330,29 (Spk III 108,!9:
gamavaslna!Tl dbammo ti attbo ); D III 126,22 (bbasita!Tl
b1na111 -a!Tl potbujjanika111 ... ); M III 114,1 (ye 'me
vitakka bina -a potbujjanika ... ); A III 325,27 (dassana111
b!na111 -a!Tl potbujjanika!Tl ... ); Saddb 254 (blna!Tl -a!Tl
3 ebi bbo satta ... samma garahitabba111 -a, Be, Ce so; E e,
anariya!Tl); - se e also gama .
gamya, absol. of gaccbati qv.
gamyati, gamma ti, pass. pr. 3 sg. of gaccbati qv.
gayha\ absol. of gal)hati qv.
2
gayba , mfn.,fpp of ga!).bati qv.
1 2
gaybaka, mfn. or gaybaka!Tl, ind. ? [gayba or gayba +
ki], a captive; or having seized, captured; S I 143,25*
(yam E1fikil1asmi jana111 gablta!Tl amocayl -a!Tl
n!yamana111; Spk I 211,13 foll.: gahetva nlyamana!Tl kara-
maral11 nlyamanan ti pi attho) = Ja III 361,2* (gaybaka-
nlyamana!Tl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gaybakaniyyamana111;
361,n·: karamaragaba111 gahetva nlyamana111, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee niyyamana!Tl; cfkaramaranlta sv karamara).
gayhati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of ga1)bati qv.
2 pabbajite -anti jiguccbanti); 279,31 (naba111 bbante
gayhamanaka, mfn. [pass. part.pr. of ga!).bati + ka ],
being taken; being caught; Dbp-a III 175,9 (cbekena
sakul)ikena jalena ottbaritva -esu vattakesu, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se gaybamanesu).
garati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dbatup garati, Wg § 22:39],
sprinkles; pours; Dbatup 249 (gara ... secane);
Dbatum 360; Sadd 425,26 (gara ... secane -ati); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. garayati\ Pj II 488,17 (assilni pateti gatayati,
-atl ti pi patbo; ad Sn 691: gatayati assukani); - see
also ka1ati2.
2 -antiya);
garate, gareti, garayati , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dbatup gurate,
gilrayate, Wg §§ 28:103, 33:21: udyamane], rises;
Sadd 430,J6foll. (gara uggame: -ati garu, garil ti mata-
pitadayo garavayuttapuggala, te bi -anti uggaccbanti
uggata pakata bontl ti); 559,6 (gara uggame: -eti -ayati
garu).
1 1
garayati , see sv garati .
2 2
garayati , see sv garati .
gara}a, n. [S. lex. garala], the venom of a snake; Abb 655
(ViSal11 ... -a111).
garahaka, mfn. and m. [from garahati], (one) who
disparages, blames; Vism 425,13 (ariyana!Tl upavadaka
ti . . . antimavattbuna va gul)aparidbal11sanena va
upavadaka akkosaka -a ti vutta111 boti) f. It-a II 39,w;
30 garahati
Mp IV 72,s (piyagarahl ti piyajanassa nindako -o);
Tb-a II 36,25 C-pugga1a ca tbera!Tl kbamapesu!Tl); - ifc
see apa-, teja- (sv teja[s]), deva-, patbavl-, bbilta-, vaya-
(sv vaya[s]).
garaha1,1a, garahana, n., -a, f [S. garbaJ).a, garbaJ).a],
censure; reproach; Vibb 353,6 (ya paresa!Tl akkosana
vambbana -a ... ); Jai 155,13' (dbirattbil ti o•-atthe
nipato); Vism 29,6 (-a ti assaddbo appasanno ti adina
nayena dosaropana); Mil 357,13 (dighadbammika111
b!tana111 kbltana!Tl -a!Tl uppal)t;iana!Tl ... ); V v-a 16,4
(ki!Tlsaddo .. . -e agato); Nidd-a I 286,Jo (nindaya ti
garahati, -eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. garbati, garbate,
garbayati, garbayate; BHS garahati], reproaches;
censures; dispraises, finds fault with (a person, action or
state ); Dhatup 340 (garaba nindaya!Tl); Dbatum 501;
V in III 129,10 (ava!).J!al11 bbal)ati nama dve magge
kbu!Tlseti vambbeti -ati; Sp 547,25: -ati ti dosa111 dasseti,
Ce, Ee so; Be deti; Se vadeti); DI 161,Jo (sama!).O
Gotamo sabba111 tapa111 -ati); III 92,27 foil. (yannilna
maya!Tl eka!Tl satta!Tl sammanneyyama, so no samma
kh!yitabba!Tl khlyeyya samma garahitabba!Tl -eyya ...
Se wr -i); MI 361,7 (ma111 ... anuvicca viññil -eyyu!Tl
piilfatipatapaccaya); S I 190,31 (banda dani bbikkhave
pavarayami vo, na ca me kiñci -atba kayika!Tl va
vacasika!Tl va); IV 320,14 (so anekapariyayena
pa1fatipata!Tl -ati vigarahati piilfatipata viramatba ti aba);
A II 7,30* (ubbayena n~ -anti s!lato ca sutena ca);
Sn 313 (yajaka!Tl -ati jan o); Tb 160 (pare ca na111 -anti;
Tb-a II 36,21: nindanti upakkosanti va ti attho ); Ja I
130, 17* ( -issanti ta!Tl viññil asuci!Tl nagariko yatha);
IV 248,8* (attana!Tl yeva -asi ettba; 248,w: para!Tl
agarahitva attana111 yeva -eyyasi); 259,26* (kinnu ruril
-as! migana111; 260,3·: migana111 aññatara!Tl -asi); 260,6
(na miga111 na pakkbi!Tl -ami); Mi1222,3o (avasese
Nagasena Vessantarassa danapatino dana!Tl -ami); Ps II
406,21 (anicca dukkba anatta ti patbavi!Tl -ast
jiguccbasi); Saddb 382 (corajegbassa -e ko na jlvika111);
Sadd 458,3 (garaha . . . kuccbane: -a ti garaha); 569,3
(garaha vinindane: -eti -ayati); part.pr.
(a) garahanta, mf(-anti)n., Tb 965; Jaiii 92,9· (dbirattbu
man ti attana!Tl -anto aba); Mi1169,26 (hJtento -anto
jiguccbanto); Sp 1296,27; Ud-a 276,2o (tassa ka1akiriyal11
-anto); Tb!-a 172,6 (aññataraya yakkbiniya itthibbava111
neg. agarahanta, mfn., Pj II 561,2o;
(b) garahamana, mfn., D III 95,23 (kbattiyo pi saka111
dbamm~ -amano agarasma anagariya111 pabbajati);
Ja VI 575,13; Mil313,31; - aor. 3 sg. (a) garahi, D III
93,8; M III 14,31 (garayba!Tl ... bbava!Tl Gotamo jbana111
-i, pasa111sa111 pasa!Tlsi); Ja III 524,4; (b) garahittbo,
Ja VI 65,!2* (pessika ma!Tl -ittho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
garahita); 2 sg. garahittba, SI 240,2* (agarahiya111 ma
-ittba); 3 pl. garahi!Tlsu, Jaiii 27,18; Mp I 412,4; -
absol. garahitva, Ja V 79,16; Vism 95,15; Sp 170,9; -
neg. agarahitva, Ja IV 248,14·; - pass. part.pr.
garahiyamana, mfn., Ja III 367,7 (Videbo eva -iyamano
garaha!Tl asahanto); Vism 419,! (te asaddbamma-
patisevanapaccaya viññilbi -iyamana vibethiyamana);
garahana
- pp garahita, mfn. and n. [S. garhita], l. (mfn.)
censured; dispraised (by, instr. or gen.); Vin I 153,33
(bhagavata anekapariyayena musavado -o); IV 113,21
(aya¡p ukkhittako va vambhito va -o va); D Il 192,19
(dukkha sapekhassa kalakiriya -a ca sapekhassa
kiilakiriya); Dhp 30 (pamado -o sada); Th 935 (ya katha
satthu -a); Ja V 453,23* (so idha -o parattha ca); Nidd 1
384,1o (nindito -o upavadito ); Mil288,14 (-a paribhüta);
- neg. agarahita, mfn., not censured; praiseworthy;
Ja Ili 419,16·; Pv-a 89,12 (anindita ti agarahita pasa¡psa);
- 2. (n.) censure; Nidd I 299,2 (--kiira!fa; Nidd-a I
363,16: avaññahetuna);- fpp (a) garahitabba, mfn. and
n. impers., Vin II 5,11 (kamrna¡p na -a¡p); D III 92,2s;
M Ili 77 ,29; A II 31 ,5 (yo ... imani cattari dhammapadani
-a¡p patikkositabba¡p maññeyya ... ); Ja II 346,26'
(Vissaseno yev' ettha -o); Kv 141,3o (te p' ime tayo
niruttipathe adhivacanapathe paññattipathe na -a¡p na
patikkositabba¡p amaññi¡psu); Th-a II 124,3 (viññühi
--ta¡p pappoti); Patis-a 217,2 (na viññuppasatthanl ti
kusalehi --tta); Sadd 848,2; - neg. agarahitabba, mfn.,
It-a II 147,1 (agarahitabbataya); Th-a Ili 11,6; -
(b) garayha, mfn. and m.n., l. (mfn.) to be censured;
deserving or involving reproach; Abh 700; Vin I 234,2o
(na ca koci sahadhammiko vadanuvado -a¡p thana¡p
agacchati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se garayhaghana¡p) f. D I
161,17 f. Mlll 77,31; Vinlll 186,19 (te ca bhikkhü -a);
IV 176,11 (patidesetabba¡p tena bhikkhuna -a¡p avuso
dhamma¡p apajji¡p asappaya¡p patidesaniya¡p ta¡p
patideseml ti); A II 241,12 (papaka¡p vata bho aya¡p
puriso kamma¡p akasi -a¡p slsacchejja¡p); V 190,18 (-a¡p
kho pana bhante bhagava garahanto pasa¡psiya¡p
pasa¡psanto vibhajjavado bhagava, na so bhagava ettha
eka¡psavado ti); Sn 141; Ja VI 462,3* (ubhinna¡p hoti -o
attano ca parassa ca); Vism 155,9 (sabb' eva -a assama
ti); Sadd 848,2;- neg. (a) agarayha, mfn., Th 590 (ajlvo
sodhito agarayho); Ja VI 36,4· (ana!fo hoti agarayho);
Spk I 355,26; Ud-a 204,26 (sabbasippana¡p agarayhataya);
(b) aggarayha, mfn. (me), Ja VI 200,28* (tad aggarayha¡p
hi vinindamano; 201,3·: tasma agarayha¡p brahma!fa¡p
vinindamano);- 2. (m.n., or mfn., scil. dhamma ?) the
classification of a sailgha offence (see V in IV 176,11
above); Vin V 148,34 (patidesaniyan ti .. . -an ti
pavuccati); Utt-vn 798 (das' eva pana -a, dvesattati ca
sekhiya); 820 (cattaro pana -a bhikkhüna¡p
patimokkhake); fpp (e) garahiya, mfn., Vin V 219,1
(kuddho aradhako hoti kuddho hoti -o);
neg. agarahiya, mfn., SI 240,2* (agarahiya¡p ma
garahittha; Spk I 355,26foll.: agarayha¡p khll).asava-
puggala¡p ma garahittha).
garahana, n., -a,f, see sv garaha!fa.
garaha, f [S. garha], reproach; censure; Abh 121; DI
135,14 (aha¡p eta¡p dassukhlla¡p vadhena va bandhena va
janiya va -aya va pabbajanaya va samühanissaml ti;
cfSv 296,18: -aya ti pañcasikhamul).9akara!fa¡p
gomayasiñcana¡p glvaya kudal).9akabandhanan ti eva¡p
ad!ni katva garahapapanena); Ili 92,21 (adinnadana¡p
paññayati -a paññayati musavado pannayati
da!f9adana¡p paññayati); Th 668 (-a va seyyo viññühi
ya¡p ce balappasa¡psana); Ja V 79,17* (ko n!dha Ül).l).a¡p
-a¡p upeti); Nidd I 384,w (nindaya -aya upavadena ...
31 garu
na vedheyya); Mil 259,s (ta¡p tesa¡p -a¡p paribhava¡p
vinodehi); Sp 1334,18 (ayasato va -ato va muccati); PsI
144,29 (aho vata ti ... -aya pi dissati); III401,17
(antevasike sikkhapetu¡p nasakkhl ti mayha¡p -a
uppajjissati); Dhp-a I 389,21 (ki¡p aya¡p maharaja
gahapatiko viya dhavatl ti aññadatthu -a¡p labhati); -
0
(1Í)-parimocana, n. setting free from censure; Ps Ili
356,19 (rañño -'-attha¡p);- 0 (a)-mokkha,m. [garaha +
1
mokkha ], liberation from censure; Ps III 335,15 (-a¡p
sampassamano, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr garaha¡p
mokkha¡p).
garahi(n), mfn. [S. garhin], reproaching; censuring; - ifc
see atta- (sv atta[n]), ariya-, dhamma- (sv dhamma\
papa-, buddha-, sari.gha-.
garu 1, m. [S. garut], a wing; Abh 627.
garu 2, mfn., m. and n. [S. guru; cfS. garlyas, gari~tha]
(pl. nom. -ü, -uno), l. (mfn.) (i) heavy, weighty;
burdensome; difficult; Abh 840; Vin I 24,21 (sace te ...
agaru vaseyyama ekaratta¡p agyagare ti, na kho me
mahasama!fa -u); M I 266,s (mata ... gabbha¡p kucchina
pariharati mahata sa¡psayena -u¡p bhara¡p); S III 26,14*
(nikkhipitva -u¡p bhara¡p añña¡p bhara¡p anadiya); Ja 1
196,1* (yato yato -u dhura¡p); II 338,1 (sace hi imassa
-u¡p akatva idan' eva okasa¡p karissami, Ce, Ee so; Be
garuka¡p; Se guruka¡p) f. 339,18 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
guruq¡); VI 234,26* (viil).ijana¡p yatha nava appamiil).a-
bhara -u); Ud-a 229,15 (-u¡p civara¡p parupanto
kilamati); - (ii) heavy on the stomach, indigestible;
Abh 840; Sadd 430,26* (dujjare ... -saddo pavattati);-
0
2. (i) (mfn.) important, serious; weighty, grave; Abh 840
(-u ... mahante); Ja V 77,18* (nanumitto -u¡p attha¡p
guyha¡p vedetu¡p arahati); Mhv 18:18 (me ... bhatuno
vacana¡p -u); Vin-vn 2044 (dutiyatikkame -u [apatti]);
- (ii) (n.) a serious offence; Vin-vn 393 (hoti
thullaccayaq1 tesu pathame dutiye -u¡p); Utt-vn 619
(pañca apattiyo honti musavadassa kara!fa, parajika¡p
-u¡p thullaccaya¡p pacitti dukkata¡p); - see also
garudhamrna below, garuka; - 3. (i) (mfn.) highly
prized; of great account; (to be) esteemed, venerated;
MI 33,1o (sabrahmacañna¡p piyo e' assa¡p manapo -u
bhavaniyo ca ti; PsI 156,32: -ü ti tesa¡p garughaniyo
pasal).acchattasadiso); A IV 154,7 (aya¡p pi dhammo
piyattaya 0 -ttaya bhavanaya ... sa¡pvattati); Ja IV 371,1o*
(acariyo briihmal).O mayha¡p ... -u ca amanta!fiyo ca);
VI 14,14* (sakkatva sakkato hoti -u hoti sagaravo; 15,3·:
paresu ca sagaravo saya¡p pi tesa¡p garuko hoti);
Ap 320,26 (durüpasailkama buddha -ü honti); Mi1373,22;
Vism 536,16 (ya¡p aramma!fa¡p -u¡p katva cittacetasika
uppajjanti); Sp 234,19 (satthusasana¡p -u¡p katva); Spk I
66,10 (dosagarü ti dosa¡p -u¡p katva adaya viharanto);
III221,2o (buddha nama mahapasiil).acchatta¡p viya
-uno);- (ii) (m.) any venerated person (a parent, elder
etc); esp. a (religious) preceptor, a teacher; an
authority; Abh 840 (acariyadimhi -u matupitusv api);
D Ili ?2,10 (acariyabhariya ti va -üna¡p dara ti va;
Sv 853,38: -üna¡p dara ti cullapitumahapitu-adina¡p
bhariya); MI 265,18 (sattha no -u satthagaravena ca
maya¡p vadema ti; Ps II 309,15: tattha -ü ti bhariko
akama anuvattitabbo); A III 37,23 (ye te bhattu -uno
bhavissanti mata ti Va pita ti va Sama!fabrahma!fa ti va);
garu
Sn 325 (kalaññu e' assa -unarp dassanaya, Ce, Ee so; Be
-ünarp; Se gurunarp); Th 588 (sussüsa ca -ünarp; Th-a II
252,13: -ünarp acariyupajjhayadlnarp ka1yfu_lamittanarp
ovadassa sotukamyata); Ja V 169,27* (bhavarp hi me
aññataro -ünarp; 170,18': -ünan ti matapitunnarp me
tvarp aññataro ti vatva nisldapeti); Mi191,21 (-una pi
saha pavivittapavanarp pavisitva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
guruna); Vism 101,6; Sp 1416,12 (Buddhaghoso ti -ühi
gahitanamadheyyena therena); PsI 10,5 (bhagava ti -u,
-urp hi 1oke bhagava ti vadanti, ayarp ca
sabbagu!)avisitthataya sabbasattanarp -u); Mp II 305,29
(ayarp sama!)O amhakarp -u, imassa katharp gaheturp
yuttan ti); Ud-a 219,27 (attani -umhi ca ekatte pi bahu-
vacanarp dissati); Sadd 430,16joll. (-ü ti matapitadayo
garavayuttapugga1a . . . api ca pasa!)acchattarp vi ya
bhariyaqhena -ü ti vuccanti); 691,23 (kattünarp
pañcavidhattarp api icchanti -ü); 758,19 (-ünarp
matan tare ... ); - ifc (prizing, esteeming; respectful,
obedient to) see appamada- (sv pamada), kodha-, dosa-
(sv dosa\ dhamma- (sv dhamma\ vihara-, satthu-
(sv sattha[r]); - 4. (mjn.) (gr.t.t.) long, heavy (of a
vowel!syllable in prosody ); Sadd 607,19 (d!gho -u, a 1 ü
1 an observance of respect ?), one oj the eight specific
bhü dh! ma); - o• -üpavasa, m. [garu + upavasa ?],
living with, associating with, one's teacher(s), pupilship;
Ps II 89,7* (-o uddeso udditthaparipucchanarp ... , Ce, Ee
so, perhaps wr; Be, Se garusarpvaso ); - o -karal}a, n.
and mfn. rJrom garukaroti qv], l. (n.) respect,
venerating; Pj I 144,15 (garukaro -arp garavata); Th-a Il
115,3o (yassa pugga1assa garavo -arp na vijjati); -
2. (mjn.) inducing respect; Vin V 92,30 (ayarp pi
dhammo sarm;uyo piyakara!)O -o saii.gahaya ...
sarpvattati; Sp 1316,22: -o ti tarp pugga1arp sa-
brahmacarlnarp garurp karoti) = D III 245,17 = A III
289,22; - 0 -kara, m. rJrom garukaroti qv], (an act oj)
respect, veneration; Vin IV 58,14 (--hetu); D III 203,15
(na me so ... amanusso 1abheyya ... sakkararp va -arp
va); Vv 5: lO; Mi1386,3 (sakkare asakkare -e agarukare,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gurukare); Mp II 196,22 (sakkatva
garukatva ti sakkararp e' eva -arp ca katva); V v-a 24,14
(-ena pan' ettha bahuvacanarp vuttarp); As 373,7;
Sadd 18,16 (ekass' atthassa --vasena bahuvacana-
ppayoga); - 0 -gabbha, (m)j(n)., pregnant; Abh 239;
Ja III 231,26 (tassa ca -aya gabbho bhümiyarp pati);
Sp 1209,22; Mp I 422,11 (ghara!)l me -a); Dhp-a I 164,12
(devl 0 -gabbhataya .. . vegena ganturp nasakkhi); -
0
-garu, mjn., very heavy; MI 332,7 (kinnu kho me
kucchi -u viya, Ce, Ee so; Be -o; Se 0 -garutaro; Ps Il
416,5 foil.: -u vi ya ti garugaruko viya thaddho pasa!)a-
puñjasadiso, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -o viya ti; cfPs-t [Be] II
320,5foll.: ukarassa hi okararp katva ayarp niddeso);-
0
-garava, n., respectful veneration; Ja V 415,6';
Ap 30,13; Sp 122,18 (--yutto so bhagava); Spk I 86,33;-
0
-tthaniya, 0 -tthanika, mjn. and m., (one) taking the
place oj, having the status oj, a venerated or esteemed
person; D III 241,4 (sattha dhammarp deseti aññataro va
-o sabrahmacarl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee garutthaniko); A III
393,12 (satthararp upanissaya viharati aññatararp va -arp
sabrahmacarirp); Ja V 265,13' (pabbajita nama -a);
Nett 8,3; Vism 344,3 (tathiirüparp -arp bhikkhurp va
lajjirp manussarp va disva); Mp IV 71,16 (-an ti
32 garu
garavuppattipaccayabhütarp garubhavanlyarp); It-a I
159,26 (garünan ti mahapitucullapitujetthabhatu-adlnarp
-anarp); Cp-a 311,24 (kalyfu_lamittanarp -anarp); -
0
-tara, mjn., heavier; more to be esteemed; D II 334,25
(yada pana so kalakato hoti tada -o ca hoti patthlnataro
ca); Dhp-a I 381,3 (-anarp santike nis!ditva); Pv-a 191,27
(salipalase ... -e katva); - 0 -dakkhil}ii,f, a teacher's
jee; V v-a 229,24 (kin te -arp deml ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
guru-); Th-a Ili 55,35 (nitthitasippena nama antevasina
acariyassa -a databba); - 0
-dhamma, m. [garu +
dhamma 1], l. an important or serious offence; a breach
of a serious rule of observance; V in I 49,18 (sace
upajjhayo -arp ajjhapanno hoti parivasaraho ... );
IV 51,34 (na kho pan' etarp bhagavantarp uddissa
pabbajitaya kasayavatthavasanaya -arp ajjhapannapubbo
hoti; Sp 790,33: -an ti gihikale bhikkhuniya kaya-
sarpsaggarp va sikkhamanasiimaiJerlsu methuna-
dhammarp va anajjhapannapubbo hoti) -¡. A IV 280,5;
A IV 277,6 (-arp ajjhapannaya bhikkhuniya ubhato-
saii.ghe pakkhamanattarp caritabbarp; Mp IV 135,12: -an
ti garukarp saii.ghadisesapattirp); - see also garuka; -
2. an important or exacting rule of observance (perhaps
rules of behaviour imposed on bhikkhunls; V in Il 255,5
(sace ... Mahapajapatl Gotaml aqha -e patiga!)hati sa
v' assa hotu upasampada, vassasatupasampannaya
bhikkhuniya tadahusampannassa bhikkhuno
abhivadanarp ... katabbarp, ayarp pi dhammo sakkatva
garukatva ... yavajlvarp anatikkaman!yo ... ); IV 315,6
(ovado nama aqha -a); Sp 791,16joll. (-eh! ti garukehi
dhammehi, te hi garavarp katva bhikkhunlhi
sampaticchitabbatta -a ti vuccanti); Dhp-a IV 149,19
(maya Mahapajapatiya Gotamiya agha -a dinna);
Vin-vn 2970;- 0 -bhai}!Ja, n., property or goods held in
common by the saii.gha; Vin III 90,12 (yani tani saii.ghassa
-ani garuparikkharani seyyathldarp aramo aramavatthu
viharo ... ); Sp 484,14 (ettha pañcamasakagghanakarp -an
ti vuccati); 678,1o (senasanassa --tta); lll0,2 (-arp na
bhajetabbarp); 1244,1 (imesu tava yarp kiñci khuddakarp
va hotu mahantarp va saii.ghassa dinnarp -arp hoti);
Kkh 2 233,4 (rasivasena hi pañca -ani vuttani); Nidd-a I
398,5 (katararp pana daru -arp hoti katararp na hotl ti);
Vibh-a 334,1 foll.; Vin-vn 181; 2872 (rajjuka yottakani
va... gacchanti --tarp); neg. agarubhal)<;!a, n.,
Kkh 2 233,n; - 0 -bhai}!Jaka, n., id.; Vin-vn 2858; -
1
neg. agarubha!)<;!aka, n., Vin-vn 2857;- 0 -bhara , m., a
heavy burden, a heavy load; Ja IV 233,27* (-arp
asahamano); Th-a II 277,29 (atibharena -ena p!Jito, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee mahabharena 0
-bhavena);
0
-bhara 2 , mjn., carrying a heavy load; burdened; Ja 111
322,27 (assarp gahetva gamanakale --taya ollnavegarp
s!harp); - -a,f, pregnant; Vin IV 317,12 (-a, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se 0 -gabbha); Ja VI 420,16 (sa pana tada -a ahosi
tasma sa vegena palayiturp nasakkhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-gabbha); Vism 144,1 (tvarp -a akale cariturp na
sakkosi); Spk III 220,9 (--tta); - 0
-vacana, n., an
expression of respect or esteem; V in I 103,14 (ayasmanto
ti piyavacanarp etarp -arp etarp sagarava-
sappatissadhivacanarp etarp); Nidd I 140,2; It-a I S,21
3
(bhagava ti -arp);- 0 -vasa, m. [garu + vasa ], residing
garuka
with one's teacher; pupilship; PsI 58,3o (idani mayarp.
yavajlvarp. -arp. vasissama, mahanta ete acariya nama,
Be so; Ce, E e guruvasarp.; Se o -sarp.vasarp.); Th-a JI
157,16 (-arp. sappunsupassayarp. ca pasarp.santo );
Cp-a 268,6 (disapamokkhassa acariyassa santike -arp.
vasanto); sagaruvasa, m., id.; Vibh-a 499,26
(sagaruvasarp. avasanatrhena agaravabhavo );
neg. agaruvasa, m., Th-a II 16,23 (dukkho kho panayarp.
loke yadidarp. agaruvaso ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee loko); -
0
-saqlVasa, m., residing with, associating with one's
teacher( s ), pupilship; Nidd I 359,27 (mohacaritarp.
bhagava puggalarp. uddese paripucchaya . . . -e niveseti;
Nidd-a I 385,11: -e ti garünarp. payirupasane); Mil408,5
(-e kalyaryamittasevane, Be, Ce, E e so; Se guru-
sarp.vase); It-a I 165,15; - agaru, mfn., l. not burden-
some; not difficult; V in I 24,2o (sace te Kassapa -u
vaseyyama ekarattarp. agyagare ti); DI 89,26 (-u kho
pana bhagavato evarüpehi kulaputtehi saddhirp.
kathasallapo hoti ti); MI 111,26 (vibhajat' ay asma
Mahakaccano -urp. katva ti, Be so; Ce agarukatva; Ee, Se
agarukaritva; Ps II 76,3ofoll.: punappunarp. yacapento pi
hi garurp. karoti nama ... duviññeyyarp. katva kathento pi
garurp. karoti yeva nama, evarp. akatva amhe
punappunarp. ayacapetva suviññeyyarp. pi no katva
kathehl ti vuttarp. hoti) f::- S IV 95,13 (eds -urp. karitva) f-
A V 257,15 (Be, Ce -urp. karitva; Ee agarukaritva; Se
agarukatva); - 2. not esteemed; A III 110,16 (bhikkhu
sabrahmacarlnarp. appiyo ca hoti amanapo ca -u ca
abhavanlyo); - 3. not esteeming; without respect;
Th 953 (lahuka -ü dhamme aññamaññarp. agarava;
Th-a Ili 84,35: saddhamme garavarahita);
agarukulavasika, mfn., not living in the house of a
teacher; not being a pupil; Mil288,18 (--kulavasiko ...
puggalo [lokasmirp. oñato avañato]); - atigaru, mfn.,
very esteemed; very venerated; Sp 208,32 (-una
pabbajjüpagatena samiputtena saddhirp., Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee atigarunamapabbajjüpagatena); Ps III 351,14 (-uno
sammasambuddhassa);- see also garukaroti, guru.
garuka, mfn. and n. [garu2 + ka2; AMg garua], l. (mfn.)
heavy, weighty; burdensome; difficult, hard; Vin I 297,16
(ayasmato Mahakassapassa parp.sukülakato -o hoti);
D Ili 256,10 (tassa me kayo -o akammañño); M III 94,31
(puriso -arp. silagutarp. allamattikapuñje pakkhipeyya);
Th 604 (ohito -o bharo); Ja I 134,16 (tassa vajirapürita
viya -a kucchi ahosi); Cp 1:9:29 (-o bhatiko hi so);
Dhs 648; Mil102,2o (varp.sanatassa ... aka<;l<;lhiyantassa
-arp. hoti agamanarp. dandharp.); Vism 76,25 (-arp. hi
idarp. dhutangarp.); 108,7 (ayopatto va -o); Ud-a 277,1
(bhagava . . . matugamassa . . . pabbajjarp. anujananto
-arp. yeva katva anujanati na lahukarp.); - -arp., adv.,
heavily, with difficulty; Mil 102,16 (tarp. cittarp. -arp.
uppajjati dandharp. pavattati); Mp Ili 408,15 (-arp. na
khipparp.); - 2. (i) (mfn.) weighty, grave; severe;
important, serious; Vin I 150,25 (-o kho sanghabhedo
vutto bhagavata); Dhp 138 (-arp. va pi abadharp.); 31 O
(raja ca dary<;larp. -arp. paryeti); Vism 601,15 (apararp. pi
catubbidharp. kammarp. yarp. -arp. yarp. bahularp. yad
asannarp. ka!atta va pana kamman ti); Kkh 2 230,27 (cha
kammani -ani); Ps Ili 87,8 (esa -arp. mantarp. janati);
Sp 641,26 (ito 0 -tarani hi ñattidutiyakammani pi
33 garukaroti
apaloketva katabbanl ti vuttani); 998,2o (yo koci corikarp.
va aññarp. va -arp. rajaparadharp. katva palato);- esp. of
an offence: Vin I 65,7 (lahukarp. apattirp. na janati -arp.
apattirp. na janati); V 115,4 (-a apatti janitabba;
Sp 1319,13: -a ti -ena vinayakammena visujjhanato
sañghadisesa apatti, kenaci akarena anapattibhavarp.
upaneturp. asakkuryeyyato parajikapatti ca); M II 247,29
(bhikkhü bhikkhurp. evarüpaya -aya apattiya codenti
parajikena va parajikasamantena va); Sp 1381,18 (-a dve
vutta ti parajikasañghadisesa); Vin-vn 2060 (hoti
bhikkhuniyapatti -a); - (ii) (n.) a serious offence;
Sp 538,15* (yathaniddighaniddese -arp. tattha na dissati);
Vin-vn 436 (bhikkhu ... avacanlyam attanarp. karoti -arp.
siya); Utt-vn 167 (kayen' amasato kayarp. bhikkhussa
-arp. siya); 797 (parajikani cattari -a sotasa);- 3. (mfn.)
(to be) prized, esteemed, venerated; of great account;
valuable; held in common (by the sañgha,
cfgarubhary<;la); Vin Ili 54,15 (pañcah' akarehi adinnarp.
adiyantassa apatti parajikassa . . . -o ca hoti parikkharo
pañcamasako va atirekapañcamasako va ... ); Thi 368
(-e mama satthu sasane ya sikkha sugatena desita;
Thi-a 234,3o: -e pasiil,lacchattarp. viya garukatabbe
mayharp. satthu sasane); Ja I 287,3 (acariyo pana -o ti);
Mil 190,25 (bhikkhubhümiya 0 -tta, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gurukatta); 206,26 (samikassa -taya kharyarp. na passi,
0
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gurukataya); 240,5 (kinnu kho bhante
Nagasena tathagato sañgharatanato na bhariko na -o na
dakkhiryeyyo ); Spk I 291,10 (tumhehi -assa satthu
santike kamma!!hiinarp. gahitarp.); Vin-vn 2887 (sabbarp.
darumayarp. gehasambhararp. -arp. matarp.); Utt-vn 685
(haranto -arp. bhary<;larp. theyyacittena puggalo ); - ifc
(prizing, esteeming, respectful of) see tag- (sv ta[d]),
dhamma- (sv dhamma\ nahana-, nibbana-, pa!isallana-,
brahma-; - 4. (mfn.) long, heavy (of a vowel!syllable);
Sp 1400,23 (-e vattabbe lahukarp. lahuke va vattabbe
-arp. vadati); Mil 344,2 (in cpd); - agaruka, mfn. or n.,
not respectful; or a lack of respect; Dhp-a III 162,2 (na
etai"fl chinnakesanakhassa . . . bhikkhaya carantassa
ayyassa -an ti, Be, Ce so; Se atigarukan ti; Ee
atigarugaravan ti); - atigaruka, mfn., l. very difficult;
very heavy; Ja I 277,10 (-o pi bharo ); Sv 425,22 (idarp.
-arp., Be, Se so; Ce, Ee garukarp.); - 2. very important;
very esteemed; ofvery great account; Ps JI 337,17 (ayarp.
[dhammadesana] ... -a bhavissati pasaryacchattasadisa).
garukaroti, pr. 3 sg. [garu 2 + karoti], honours, venerates;
esteems; treats as important; Vin I 105,27 (tumhe ce
brahma1,1a uposatharp. na sakkarissatha na -issatha na
manessatha na püjessatha); DI 91,3 (na brahma1,1e
sakkaronti na brahma1,1e -onti); M I 335,36 (sakkarotha
-otha); JI 9,6 (na marp. te imina dhammena sakkareyyurp.
-eyyurp. ... , Ce, Se so; Be garurp. kareyyurp.; Ee
garükareyyurp.); Ja III 17,18·; part.pr.
(a) garukaronta, mfn., D II 160,2 (bhagavato sarlrarp.
naccehi gltehi vaditehi malehi gandhehi sakkaronta
-onta manenta püjenta); Ili 181,5 (pitu vacanarp.
sakkaronto -onto ... ); Pa!is II 160,6 (dhammarp. -onto
pavattetl ti dhammacakkarp.); Ja II 14,9·; Cp-a 285,2o;
(b) garukurumana, mfn., Nidd I 401,1 (namassamano
sakkurumano garukurumano ... , Be so; Ce sakkurumano
garurp. kurumano; Ee, Se sakkaramano garukaramano,
 garuJa
prob. wr); - aor. 3 pl. garukarüpsu, V in I 354,2;
Pv-a 54,28 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se garuq1 kariq1su); - inf
garukatuq1, Ja 11 198,4 (imaq1 arahaddhajaq1 maya
garukatuq1 vattatl ti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee garuq1 katuq1); -
absol. garukatva, Vin II 255,8 (ayaq1 pi dhammo
sakkatva garukatva manetva pujetva yavaj!vaq1
anatikkamanlyo); M 11 3,9 (Ce, Se so; Be garuq1 katva;
Ee gariikatva); SI 140,3; A I 125,1 (atthi ... puggalo
sakkatva garukatva sevitabbo);- for agarukatva, agaru-
karitva see agaru sv garu 2; pass. pr. 3 sg.
garukanyati, Bv-a 253,8 (tada kira brahmaJ).a khattiyehi
sakkañyanti -lyanti); - part.pr. garukariyamana, mfn.,
D III 44,14; - neg. agarukariyamana, mfn., V in I 353,34;
pp garukata, mfn. [cf S. gurukfta], honoured,
venerated, esteemed; Vin 111 89,34; DI 114,17 (bhavaq1 hi
So1_1ada1_1<;lo rañño Magadhassa Seniyassa Bimbisarassa
sakkato -o manito pujito apacito); M 11 3,8 (sakkato
-o ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gariikato); S IV 117,7; Ja II 90,5
(evaq1 bodhisatte tena rañña sakkate -e tattha vasante);
Mil 21,24 (rajunaq1 rajamahamattanaq1 sakkato -o ... );
- neg. agarukata, mfn., Ud 12,13 (aññatittbiya pana
paribbajaka asakkata honti agarukata amanita ... );
Nidd I 166,32; Sp 739,2 (acittlkatan ti agarukataq1, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se na garukataq1); - fpp garukatabba, mfn., DI
117,9 (atitbi . . . amhehi sakkatabbo -o manetabbo
pujetabbo ... );M 111 205,19 (-aql na garukaroti); 291,15
(kathaqlriipa ... samal_labrahmal_la ... na -a); Ja I 341,22·
(n' eva pesale bhikkhu -e maññissanti); It-a 11 164,2o
(-esu gariisu, Be, Ce, Se so; E e garukatabbesu);
V v-a 39,7 (garukaro ti --ta); - see also garukara1_1a,
garukara sv garu 2.
garuJa, m. [S. garu<;la], a mythical bird (son of Kasyapa
and Vinata); one of a race of mythical birds (the
enemies of the nagav); a bird; Abh 633 (supai_JJ.lO
Venateyyo ca -o vihagadhipo); Jall 163,25 (yatth'
abbhida -o uttamaiJ.gaq1; 164,6·: -o ti saku1_1o, sabba-
sakul_liinaql h' etaq1 sagaravasappatissavacanaq1, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr -o ti saku1_1esu); VI 181,14* (nahaq1
dijadhipo homi, na digho -o maya); Nidd I 358,zo (ye
keci pakkhl antamaso -aql Venateyyaq1 upiidaya ... );
Ap4l,21 (-o yatha opatati pannagaq1 bhakkham attano);
452,27 (yavata vanasa1_1<;lamhi yakkha bhuta ca rakkhasa
kumbhal).<;ia -a capi ... ); Milll7,28 (asura -a naga
yakkha); Vism 206,20 (-anaq1 simbalirukkhassa); Spk 11
349,27 (pattanaq1 VaJ).I_lavantataya -a supal_ll_la ti vutta);
Ap-a 391,3 (nage gaJ).hanatthaya garuq1 bhiiraq1 pasanaq1
gilant1 ti -a); Sadd 432,6 (garuq1 liiti adadati gaJ).hatl ti
-o yo supa1_11_10 dijiidhipo nagiiri karop ti ca vuccati); -
0
-pakkhaka, m.(?) a type of building ( cfa<;l<;lhayoga
sv a<;l<;lha 1); Sp 334,1o (ubhosu passesu suval_ll_larajatiidi-
maya gopanasiyo datva --nayena kata sandamanika, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -pakkhanayena).
gareti, pr. 3 sg., see sv garati 2.
gala\ gaJa1, m. and mfn. [from galati 1], dripping; oozing;
dropping; - ifc see anelagala, eja- (sv ela\ bhinna-
(sv bhindati); agaJa, mfn., not dripping; not
dropping, not omitting; Spk I 275,30 (anejagajaya ti
anejaya -aya niddosaya e' eva agajitapadavya ñjanaya
ca, therassa hi katbayato padaq1 va vyañjanaq1 va na
parihayati) f. Ud-a 313,3; niggaJa, mfn., not
gala
dropping, notfalling; Ja VI 64,18* (kumarike upaseniye
niccaq1 --ma1_1<;lite, Be, Se so; Ce nigajama1_1<;lite; Ee
nigajama1_1qike; 64,21 ': agalitama1_1<;1anena mal_l<;lana-
sllike ti vadati, Be so; Ee agalita-; Se aggalita-; Ce
agajitama1_1<;1ane ).
gala 2 (and occasionally gaja\ m. [S. gala], the throat; the
neck; the dewlap; Abh 263 (-o ca kal).tho glva ca); Ja I
194,12 (gamadaraka siri.gisu pi ka1_11_1esu pi -e pi gahetva
olambanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -esu pi); 498,15
(lonudakena ca -e sussamane); III 26,2 (ekassa slhassa
maq1saq1 khiidantassa aghi -e lagge, -o uddhumayi);
IV 382,16* (-e gahetva khalayatha jammaq1); Mil229,25
(-aq1 paJ).ametva morapekkhitaq1 pekkhati); Kkh 2 194,2
(-ena ajjhoharaJ).Iyataya); Sp 1029,33 (dlghagalo va
bakagalasadisena -en a samannagato ); Pv-a 11,15 (mama
sañraq1 -ato paghaya hegha manussasaJ.lthiinaql);
Mhv 19:11 ( 0 -mattaql jalaq1 tahiq1 ogahetva); - gale in
Ee at Th1217 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se galake; - ifc
see adhogalaq1 (sv adho), para-; - 0 -kañcuka, m., a
throat-guard, a gorget; a covering or armour for the
throat; Vism 251,35 (glvattaco --SaJ).thano; Vism-t [Be] 1
305,15: -aq1 kaJ.lthattal_laql) Vibh-a 234,32;
0
-gaJ,Il}i(n), mfn., having a swelling on the neck, having
a goitre; V in 1 322,23 (Sp 1027,17: -1 ti yassa
kumbha1_1<;laq1 viya gale ga1_1<;lo hoti); - 0
-ggaha,
0
-gga:ha, m. [gala+ gahi, gaha2], seizing by the throat;
DI 144,21 (dal).<;iappahiira pi -a pi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
galaggaha); Ja IV 42,3· (galavinltena ti -ena, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se galaggahena); Sp 686,21 (galaggahena viya
matthakatajane na viya ca); - 0 -naJikii,f, the throat;
Kkh 2 194,1 (mukhadviiran ti -aq1);- 0 -niiJi, 0 -nlili.f,
the throat; Ja I 510,25 (-iyaq1 <;!asitva); Spk I 183,24
(satthena -1q1 chindi); Dhp-a li 257 ,17;
0
-ppamliJ,Ia, mfn., of a depth reaching to the neck; Ja 1
264,8 (-e avate); Vism 302,14 (-aq1 bhumiq1 khal_litva,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gala-); Spk I 266,18 (-aql udakaq1
otaritva); - 0 -ppavedhaka, m. or n., trembling of the
neck or throat;? MI 371,7 (so pa1_1o -ena anlyamano;
Ps III 51,9: -ena ti yottena gaJe bandhitva ka<;l<;lhito
galena pavedhentena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -ppavethakena
ti ... galena pavethiyamane na va);- 0 -lohita, n., blood
from the throat; Ja III 416,16 (te s!saq1 chindissanti atha
te -aq1 pivitva veraq1 muñcissami); VI 139,3 (tvaq1
attano putte miiretva tesaq1 -ena yaññaq1 yajassu ti);
Vism 307,10 (maretva -aq1 gahetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
gaja-); Spk I 197,6 (s!saq1 kantitva -aq1 nlharitva);
Dhp-a 11 15,7 (devata cintesi ayaq1 raja ... tesaq1 -ena
mayhaq1 baliq1 katukamo ... ); - 0
-vataka, m., the
hollow of the throat; the base of the neck; Vism 185,18
(yaq1 sañre ninnatthiinaql akkhikupo va antomukhaq1 va
-o va); 258,8 ([antaq1] okasato upari -e heqha ca
kañsamagge vinibandhatta --kañsamagga pariyante
sañrabbhantare thitaq1): Sp 336,19 (slsassa tava
purimagale -o ... ayaq1 heghimaparicc hedo); Spk 111
226,18 (tikhi1_1avaq1sakoti acariyassa -e va nalate va
thapitaghanaql bhinditva gaccheyya); Vin-vn 1878 (-ato
uddhaq1 s!saq1); - 0 -Vinita, n., leading by the neck; ?
controlling by the neck;? Ja IV 41,26* (tato -ena purisa
nlhariq1su maq1; 42,3·: -ena ti galaggahena, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se galaggahena).
galaka
galaka, m. [ts ], the throat; the neck; Thi 217 (-e api
kantanti, Be, Ce so; Se -e apakantanti; Ee gale
apakantanti, prob. wr; Th!-a 172,13: attano gival]l pi
chindanti); Ja III 481 ,23* (e)ikiya ruhailghaso -al]l
anvamaddi; 482,2·: glval!l maddi, 9asitva pha1esl ti
attho); Sp 336,19 (-ass' eva ubhosu passesu, Ee so; Be,
Ce ga1ass' eva; Se galava!akass' eva).
galagalanti in Ee at Mil 122,5 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
ga)aga)ayantl.
galati 1, ga!ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gala ti], drops; drips, oozes
(with liquid or source as subject); falls down (to) or off;
vanishes; Vin I 204,14 (natthu -ati .. . anuJanamt
bhikkhave natthukara1,1in ti); 286,27 (majjhena [clvaral!l]
laggenti rajanal!l ubhato -ati); Ja V 15,22* (-eyya yam
pltva pate papatal]l; cf 18,18·: -eyya ti gacchanto pade
pade parivageyya, yal!l pltva pate ti yal!l pivitva
pateyya); Vism 310,25 (pun ti vuccati nirayo tasmil!l
-anti ti puggala gacchantl ti attho); Sp 320,15 (tal!l hi
yava bahirantato na -ati tava kumbhigatam eva hoti);
Spk I 349,2o (cívarani pi 'ssa ji1,11,1ani tato tato suttani
-anti); PsI 118,to (duppaññiinal!l hi kathentiinal!l Jala
mukhato -ati); Nidd-a I 247,20 (cavan ti jlvita -ati, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be jlvital]l);- part.pr. galanta, ga)anta, mfn.,
MI 126,5 (bhinnena slsena 1ohitena -antena); Th 524
(deve -antamhi; Th-a Il 220,17: vughidharayo
paggharante vassante); Ja V 472,12 (khanul!l pit!hipadena
nikkhami, so lohitena -antena lailghamano yati, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se paggharantena); Pj Il 189,19 (mukhena khe)al]l
-antena ghurughurupassasl dukkhal!l vediyati, Ce so; Ee
-anto; Be, Se paggharantena); - absol. galitva, Ja V
438,30' (slhamukhakul)9alal!l ka1,11,1ato -itva); 455,w
(devaloka ca manussaloka ca -itva); Pj I 67,9 (tena
chiddena dadhipil)9al!l -itva bahi papateyya); Dhp-a II
146,5 (suriyo majjhaghanato -itva gato); - pp galita,
ga¡ita, mfn. and n. [S. galita], l. (mfn.) (i) (act.) having
dropped; dripping, oozing; fallen off or down; vanished,
perished; Abh 751; Ja VI 553,3o (tesal!l hatthato
bandhanm~1 muñcitva -atp, Se so; Ce, Ee gata1p; Be
bandhanavalli muccitva gata); Nidd I 300,3 (te suddhi-
maggal!l ... viraddha aparaddha khalita -a ... ; Nidd-a I
364,1: -a ti tato bhaghii); Sp 342,25 (sakha pi 'ssa pütika
jata challiyo pi -a); 647,24 (dupagassa ekasmil!l pa!ale
chidde va jate -e va adhighanal!l na bhijjati; perished ?);
692,5 (tesal!l hatthato -al!l ... pal!lsukülal!l); Sv 419,tt
(lohitena -ena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ga)antena); Dhp-a U
146,7 (suriyo majjhaghanato -o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
galitva gato); Ap-a 292,12 (buddhuppadakkhal)al!l vo
tumhe ma viradhetha -al!l ma karotha);- (ii) (pass.,
n. impers.) there was afalling off,? Nidd I 312,8 (sllal!l
va vattal!l va s!labbatal!l va viraddhal!l maya ... khalital!l
maya -al]l maya); 312,t3 (puññabhisailkharal!l ...
aparaddhal!l maya khalital!l maya -al!l maya);- 2. (n.)
a falling off; a slip; - --m-esi(n), mfn., searching for a
slip;? Nidd I 165,19 (randhamesl virandhamesl
aparaddhamesi khalitamesl --m-es! vivaramesl ti;
Nidd-a I 286,19: --m-es! ti patanagavesl); - --vatta, n.,
a particular way of reciting;? Sp 1202,16 (sarabhaññe
kira tarailgavattadohakavattagalitavattadlni dvattil!lsa-
vattani atthi; Sp-! [Be] III 381,to: tarailgavattad!nal!l
uccaral)avidhanani nanhappayogani); - neg. aga)ita,
gafagafayati
agalita, mfn., not dropping; with nothing dropped or
omitted or lost; ? distinct; ? not dripping, fluent; ? Ja V
203,27* (akakkasal!l aga)ital!l muhul!l mudul!l ujul!l
anuddhatal!l acapalal!l assa bhasital!l, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
agga)ital]l); Ps II 53,7 (bhagavato ... vacanal!l aga)ital!l);
Spk I 275,3o (ane)aga)aya ti ane)aya aga)aya niddosaya
e' eva aga)itapadavyañjanaya ca, therassa hi kathayato
padal!l va vyanJanal!l va na parihayati);
aga)itamal)9ana, n. and!or aga)itama1,19ana, (m)fin)., an
omament not fallen off, not taken off, ? or with
omaments notfallen off,? Ja VI 64,21' (niga)ama1,19ite ti
aga)itama1,19ane mal)9anasilike ti vadati, Ce so; Be
nigga)ama1,19ite ti agalitama1,19anena ... ; E e niga)a-
mal)9ike ti aga)itama1,19anena ... ; Se niggalama1,19ite ti
aggalitama1,19anena ... );- caus. pr. 3 sg. ga!eti, -ayati
(and ga)eti ?) [S. galayati], causes to drop or drip;
sheds; Sn 691 (-ayati assukani; Pj II 488,n: assüni pateti
-ayati, garayatl ti pi pa!ho ); Sp 320,1 (theyyacittena
mukhava!!iyal!l gahetva kumbhil!l aviñjati telal!l
-etukamo, padagghanake ga)ite parajikal!l, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee ga)etukamo).
galate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup galati, Wg § 15:39;
AMg .Jgal], eats; Dhatup 262 (gala adane); Dhatum 385;
Sadd 436,3o (gala adane: -ati ... -anti adanti ajjhoharanti
etena ti galo).
galana, n. [cf S. galana], dropping; falling down; It-a I
72,7 (so hi yathapaccayal]l kusalakusaliinal]l
tabbipakanal!l ca püra1,1ato mara1,1avasena -ato ca
puggalo ti pavuccati); Th-a II 10,24 (jaramara1,1ehi tassa
tassa sattavasassa püra1,1ato -ato ca puggalo ).
galagalmp, ga!aga!atp, in d. [onomat. ? cf ga)aga)ayati and
Th-a II 60,t: ga)aga)a ti ca karonto gajjatl ti], or
galagala(t), ga)aga)a(t), mfn. [intensive formation from
1
galati ?], noisily, rumblingly;? or continually falling,
slipping; ? Ja V 453,25* (gacchat! aniyato ga)aga)al!l
dutrhagadrabharatho va uppathe, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
galagalal!l; 455,t9·: devaloka ca manussaloka ca galitva
apayam eva gacchati ti).
galocati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup glocati, Wg § 7:18] steals;
Sadd 335,22 (gucu galocu theyyakara1,1e: ... gocati -ati).
galod',f, see sv ga)od.
ga!a 1, m. and mfn., cf gala 1.
2
ga!a , m., c.fgala2 •
3
ga!a , m. [cfAMg gala], (according to cts) a hook, afish-
hook; Sn 61 (sango eso parittam ettha sokhyal]l
appassado dukkham ettha bhiyyo -o eso iti ñatva, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se ga1,1.9o; Nidd II [Be] 282,24: -o ti va
ba)isaf!1 ti va amisan ti va 1agganan ti va bandhanan ti va
palibodho ti va pañcann' etal]l kamagul)iinal]l
adhivacanar¡1, Be, Ce so; Se ga1,19o ti; Nidd-a II 140,s: -o
eso ti assadal]l dassetva aka99hanavasena ba)iso eso ti
yadidar¡1 pañca kamagu1,1a; = Pj II 114,11: Be, Ce, E e so;
Se ga1,19o eso ti) = Ap 11,13 (Be so; Ce giiho; Ee, Se
ka1,19o; Ap-a 189,24 [Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ka1,19o eso ti) =
Pj II 114,tt).
ga!aga!ayati, pr. 3 sg. [prob. onomat.], thunders; roars;
Th 189 (devo ca vassati devo ca -ati; Th-a II 60,1: devo
megho vassati ca ga)aga)a ti ca karonto gajjatl ti,
gajjantassa hi anukaral)al]l etal!l); Mil116,t3
(gaganal!l . . . nadati ravati -ati); part.pr.
gaJati
(a) ga~ag~aya(t), mfn., Th-a I 132,3 (tattha tattha gajjata
-ata mahameghato niccharantiyo saterata);
(b) ga~ag~ayanta, mfi-anti)n., D 11 131,17 (deve vassante
deve -ante vijjutasu niccharantisu); Mi1122,5 (sa
mahagaii.ga -anti patisotarp. sandittha, Be, Ce so; Ee
galagalantl, Se galagalant!, prob. wrr); Pj I 163,26 (-anto
catusu disasu mahamegho vunhasi).
gaJati, pr. 3 sg., see sv galati 1.
gaJagaJaip, ind., see sv galagalarp..
gaJocl, galod, f [S. gu<;!üci; AMg galo!], a plant; SAF:
Guduch, heart-leaved moonseed, Tinospora cordifolia
(Willd.); Abh 581 (pütilata -I);- 0 (i)-lata,f, the g~oci
creeper; Ja I 177,6· (komala pi -a pütilata ti, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se galoci-) f. Ps 11 377,6 (tadahuja:ta pi ca -a pütilata
tv eva vuccati, Ce so; Be, E e, Se galoci-) f. Dhp-a III
110,21 (taru~a pi -a pütilata ti vuccati, Ce so; Be, Se
g~oci-; Ee galoci-); Pj 11 40,26 (pütilatan ti -arp., Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se g~oci-).
gaJhito in Ee at Th-a 11 244,13 (güthaküpena gajhito) is
prob. wr; Ce gajhito; Be, Se güthaküpanigajhito.
gava\ m..f [iic and ifc, = go qv] an ox; a cow; cattle; -
ifc se e jara- (sv jara 1), pañca-; - o• -akkha, m. [go +
akkha4; S. gavak~a], a round window; a window;
Abh216 (vatapanarp. -o ca); Mhv9:17 (-amhi
<;!asapetva rattirp. kakkatayantakarp. aruyha); - --jala, n.
[gavakkha + jala1], the lattice-work of a window;
Sp 94,21 (itare [müla] pi --jalasadisarp. anusibbanta
nikkhanta);- 0 '-akkhita, mfn. [S. gava:k~ita],forming a
lattice; - ifc se e maladama-; - o' -acchita, mfn.
[S. gavak~ita], fumished with windows or lattice-work;
forming a lattice; Vv-a 276,15 (suv~~ajalavitato ti pi
parho, -o ti attho); - ifc see kiñjakkha-, sannaha-; -
o• -aghatana, n., a slaughter-house; a place for
butchering cows; Vin I 182,3 (caii.kamo lohitena phuro
hoti seyyatha pi -arp.; Sp 1081,19: -an ti yattha gavo
haññanti tadiso ti attho); - 0 assa, 0 '-assa2, n., 0 assa,
3
o• -assa, m.pl. [go + assa , S. gavasva], cattle and horses;
DI 5,17 (in cpd); Sn 769 (-arp. dasaporisarp. ... yo naro
anugijjhati) f. Ja IV 240,25*; Ja V 408,29* (hatthi -a, Be
so; Ce, Se gavassa; Ee hatthigavassa, unmetrical);
VI 251 ,25* (ji~~arp. posarp. -arp. ca ma ssu yuñji yatha
pure, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gavassarp.); Ap 309,19 (dasidase
gavasse ca ... labham' aharp.); - at Ja III 408,21* read
hatthigavassa with Be, Ce, me; Ee, Se hatthi -a; -
0
-kkhandha, m., a crowd of cattle; ? As 265,9 (-e nadirp.
tarante pi); Vibh-a 2,4 (na appamattaka gavo -o); -
0
-sata, n. [gava + sata 1], a hundred head of cattle; Ps 11
26,27 (--jeqhako usabho); Mp I 93,18 (-assa 0 -sahassassa
va antare); Ap-a 473,4 foil. (-assa jeqhako vasabho
0
-sahassassa jeHhako nisabho --sahassassa jeHhako
visabho 0 -kotisatasahassassa jeHhako asabho, Be, Se so;
Ee usabho ... vasabho ... nisabho ... asabho; Ce omits)
f. 388,11foll.; - 0 -sahassa, n., a thousand head of
cattle; Ja VI 261,26 (narp. ... püjeti ... -'-adihi ti); 363,22"
(tassa -assa usabharp. katva alaii.katapatiyattarp.
arohaniyarp. nagarp. dammi ti); - sagava, m.f [sa5 +
gava], one's own cows; one's own cattle; All 109,1
(cattaro 'me bhikkhave balivadda ... --c~<;lo no
paragavaca~<;!o paragavaca~<;!o no --ca~<;!o ... , Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee sakagavac~<;!o, but see fnl: mss sagavac~<;!o;
gavetthi
Mp III 119,24: yo attano goga~arp. maddati na
paragoga~arp. ayarp. --ca~<;!o na paragavac~<;!o ti); Spk I
220,17 ( --c~<;!o go~o vi ya sabrahmacari anovijjhanto
aghaqento ).
gava2 , n. [cf S. gavya], cow's milk; Sadd 645,13 (gobhi
nibbattarp. khirarp. -arp.);- 0 -pana, n., a dish or drink of
rice cooked in milk; Bv 4:11 (saii.gharp. . . . -ena
tappayirp.); Ja I 33,23 foil. (-an ti mahante mahante
kolambe khirassa püretva uddhanesu aropetva
ghanapakapakke khire thoke ta~<;!ule pakkhipitva
pakkamadhusakkaracu~~asappihi abhisaii.khatabhojanarp.
vuccati) Ap-a 36,29foll. Bv-a !49,39foll.;
Thüp 155,24 (sailghassa sattaharp. -arp. nama danarp.
adasi); Sadd 645,14 (khirarp. gavarp., patabbatrhena
panarp., gavarp. ca tarp. panarp. ca ti -an ti bhavati); -
0
-pphala, mfn. [gava + phala 1], with milk as fruit;?
Ja VI 327,17* (rukkho ... -o; 328,11": -o ti
pañcavidhagorasaphalo ).
gavarp., sg. acc., pl. gen. of go qv.
gavakkha, gavakkhita, gavacchita, se e sv gava 1.
gavaja, see sv gavaya.
gavati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gavate, Wg § 22:52], sounds;
Sadd 334,13 (gu sadde: -ati); 467,23.
gavati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup guvati, Wg § 28:106],
defecates; Sadd 333,1 (gu karisussagge: ... -ati).
gavati3 , pr. 3 sg. [? cf S. .Jgu, gavate ?], becomes visible,
appears; Sadd 334,14 (gu uggame, uggamo uggamanarp.
pakarata: -ati, saddasatthavidü pan' imasarp. gate gavate
ti attanobhasattam vadanti).
gavampati, m. [pl.· gen. of go + pati2; S. gavampati], lord
ofthe cows, a bull; Sn 26 (usabho pi gavampatidha atthi,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -I ca; Pj 11 39,16: gavo agocararp.
pariharitva gocare caretva sihavyagghadibhaya
parittayitva aneti, tatharüpo usabho pi -i idha mayharp.
gom~<;lale atthi ti dasseti); PsI 46,32* (muhuttajato va -I
yatha samehi padehi phusi vasundhararp.).
gavaya, gavaja, m. [S. gavaya], the Gaya[ ox; Abh 616
(gavajo -o sama); Ja V 406,6* (palasada ca gavaja) =
VI 277,23* (277,zr: gavaja ca ti -a); VI 497,12* (yada
sihassa vyagghassa khaggassa -assa ca vane sossasi);
Mil149,9 (mahisassa -assa ... bhayati); As 331,24
(hatthinarp. aharato o -goka~~amigadinarp. aharo
sukhumo); Vibh-a 382,35 (tato migassa tato -assa tato
assassa tato hatthissa vadho mahasavajjo); Sadd 622,14
(jo yassa: gavajo -o va).
gavassa\ sg. dat./gen. ofgo qv.
1
gavassa 2 , n., gavassa, m.pl., see sv gava .
gava, sg. abl., pl. nom. ofgo qv.
gavaghatana, gavassa, see sv gava 1.
gavi, [?]a creeping plant;- 0 -pphala, n., the fruit of the
gavi plant; Sn 239 (mülapphalarp. -arp. . . . añhamana;
Pj 11 283,28 foil.: -an ti yarp. kiñci rukkhavalliphalarp. ...
va . . . --gaha~ena udake jatasiilghatakakaserukadi-
phalarp. veditabbarp.); - gavi in Ce at Abh 1114 is wr
for havi (Be so).
gave, sg. loe. of go qv.
gavetthi, f [cf S. gavi~ti], seeking; desire; Vibh 353,14
(enhi -i pariyenhi . . . ayarp. vuccati labhena labharp.
nijigirp.sanata) quoted Vism 23,27 (29,31: -I ti maggana);
Sadd 567,17.
gaveruka
gaveruka, n. [S. lex. id.], red chalk; Sadd 922,20 (gemkaJ11
-a~ ... Vai_JI).abhedo 'yaJ11);- se e also gemka.
gavesa, mfn. [S. -gave~a], searching for;- ifc se ego-.
gavesaka, mfn. [from gavesati; BHS -gave~aka], looking
for, seeking, searching for (usual/y ifc); Ja IV 151 ,22· (so
pana matu1o imina marito ti rañño otaraJ11 -o carati, Ee
so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se gavesanto); Ap 68,19
(uttamatthaJ11 -a~, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce uttamattha-
gavesaka~); -¡. 369,22 (-a, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be uttamattha-
gavesaka); Sadd 567,16 (-o); - ifc see uttamattha-
(sv uttama), hirottappa- (sv hiri); - agavesaka, m(jn).,
(one) not seeking; Mp III 351,2 (kusa1adhammanaJ11
anesako -o hutva).
gavesati (and gaveseti), pr. 3 sg. [S. gave~ate, gave~ayati],
looks for, seeks, searches for; inquires (for), examines;
Dhatup 298 (gavesa maggane); Dhatum 453; V in I
23,22foll. (katama111 nu kho tumhaka~ varaJ11, Ya!11 va
tumhe itthi~ -eyyatha Ya!11 va attana111 -eyyatha ti); MI
188,22 (nahamdaddu1ena pi aggi~ -anti); A II 249,21
(nagha~ na -anti jil).l).aJ11 na pa!isai!kharonti); Dhp 146
(andhakarena onaddha pad!paJ11 na -atha, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee gavessatha); Ja II 169,6* (ayaJ11 so Ya!11 -asi); Nidd I
35,2o (ye pi kame esanti -anti pariyesanti); Ap41,2
(agada~ so -eyya); 559,22 (attanaJ11 te -assu); Mi1326,8
(magga~ ayühati -ati bhaveti); Vism 296,22 (nimittaJ11
avuso -ah! ti); Sp 526,31 (sotthi~ -a ti); 582,29 (ime ca
bhikkhü anuyuñjatha -atha janatha ti); Ps II 380,13
(tathagata111 esatu -atü ti); Sadd 567,16 (gavesa maggane:
-eti -ayati);- fut. 3 sg. gavesissati, D II 341,27 (katha~
hi nama ayoniso aggi~ -issatl ti); 1 sg. (a) gavesissa~ 1 ,
Ja III 500,23* (tesa111 müla~ -issa~; 501,1·: -issa~
pariyesissami); Ap 274,2; (b) gavesissami, Ja IV 121,7·
(amatamahanibbanaJ11 -issami); 3 pl. gavesissanti, D II
338,7; 1 pl. gavesissama, Mp II 255,9 (samanassa
Gotamassa santika111 gantva niyyanikamaggaJ11 -issama
ti); - part.pr. (a) gavesa(t), mfn., Ap 329,4 (-a~
pa!isallana~ mam' assamam upagami); 587,16
(mayha~ . . . -ato buddhadhamme, Be, Ce so; Se
buddhadhammaJ11; Ee -anta buddhadhamma~); Ps III
74,10 (sabbaññutaJ11 -a111 dhíro, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
sabbaññutagavesanadh!ro ); (b) gavesanta, mf( -ant!)n.,
Vin I 23,10 (taJ11 itthi~ -anta); D II 331,23 foil. (ayoniso
dayajja~ -antl ... ayoniso para1oka~ -anto, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr gavessant!); Dhp 153 (gahakaraka~ -anto);
Ja VI 527,18* (rajaputtaJ11 -anto bako maccham ivodake);
Vism 296,23 (so -anto acariyassa matabhava111 ñatva);
Ps III 216,9 (brahmal).a mantehi atitta mante -anta
vicaranti); - neg. agavesanta, mfn., Mp III 259,24; -
gavesanto in Ee at Ja IV 432,13' is wr for gavesanato (Be,
Ce, Se so); (e) gavesamana, mfn., Ja IV 238,13; Ap 41,3
(-amano passeyya agada~ visaghatakaJ11); Ps II 171,1
(ki~ kusa1an ti -amano); Spki 353,23 (esamana
-amana); aor. 3 sg. gavesi, Ps III 368,1;
1 sg. (a) gavesi~. Ap 367,8; Ps II 414,32 (bhava111
nabhivadin ti ... na -in ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, E e na
gahesin ti); Pv-a 202,22 (vicini~ -i~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
vicini -i); (b) gavesissaJ11 2, Ap 301,12 (kummaggena
-1SSaJ11 pubbakammena varito) Ud-a 266,2*;
3 pl. gavesisu~, Cp 1: 10:6; - inf gavesitu~, A III
439,2o; Ja I 61,9 (ajj' eva maya gharavasa~ cha<;J.<;J.etva
gaha
nikkhamma pabbajitva nibbana~ -itu~ vagati);
Vism 393,13; Spk I 191,2o;- absol. gavesitva, Ja I 4,26;
Sp 909,11 (te voharika karake -itva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-etva, prob. wr); Psiii 71,7; Cp-a291,31; -pass.
pr. 3 sg. gaveslyati, Pa!is-a 580,13 (sappurisehi magglyati
-lyatl ti maggo ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits -Iyat!); -
pp gavesita, mfn. [S. gave~ita], sought for; Abh 753;
Nidd I 343,26 (mahasakkhehi va sattehi esito -o
pariyesito ... ti mahesí ti); Sv 499,11 (tes u esitesu -es u
pa!i1addhesu); Sadd 567,16; - fpp gavesitabba, mfn.,
Ja III 374,24' (sabbesa111 sukham eva esitabba~ -an ti);
Sp 769,8 (-a ettha yutti); Ud-a 54,11; Ap-a 207,18
(vimokkhamaggo -o ti); Sadd 748,14 (attho -o);- caus.
aor. 3 sg. gavesapesi, Mhv 35:109 (raja ... kañña~ ...
gavesapesi).
gavesana,f, -a, n., [S. gave~ai_Ja; BHS gave~al).a], seeking
after; searching for; Abh 428 (pariyeghi -a);
Dhatum 756 (magga -e); Ja IV 432,13' (luddo viya
migana~ -ato Miga1uddo ti vutto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
gavesanto); Vibh 353,14 (esana -a pariyesana aya111
vuccati 1abhena 1abha~ nijigi~sanata) quoted
Vism 23,28; Spk III 143,17 (víma~sanaJ11 o1okana~ -a111
apajjati); It-a II 16,21 (-a pariyesana maggana);
Sadd 567,16 (-a); 748,15 (aññassa atthassa -a111 icchanti);
- agavesana, n., the not seeking; failure to search for;
Ja I 4,19 (yaJ11 tassa -a~ na so tatakassa doso purisass'
eva doso) = Ap-a 5,4 = Bv-a 70,28.
gavesi(n), mfn. [S. -gave~in], seeking, looking for,
searching for (usual/y ifc); DI 95,16foll. (bhagavantaJ11
yeva tiil).a~ -1 . . . lel).aJ11 -1 . . . sarai_Ja~ -1 ...
bhagavanta~ etad avoca; Sv 265,1o: tal).an ti
gavesamano; [or better as cpds ?]) -¡. M I 231,37 foil.;
Nidd I 343,9 (mahanta~ s!lakkhandha~ esí -1 pariyesl ti
mahesi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se esi -i); 405,29* (satta
mokkha~ -ino, Se so; Ee pamokkha~; Be, Ce mokkha-
gavesino); Ap 47,16 (osadha~ pha1alabh!na~ puñña-
kkhetta~ -ina~; Ap-a 292,28: -!na~ pariyesantanaJ11);
420,3 (yugamatta111 pckkhamana uttamattha~ -ino );
Vibh-a 500,14 (randhassa gavesita randhagavesita);- ifc
see kama-, ki~usa1a- (sv ka\ pakkha1ana-, para-,
randha-, 1el).a-, suci-.
gavhara, n.m. [cf S., S. lex. gahvara], a cleft, a natural
cave; a hiding-place, a thicket; - ifc see giri-; - see
also gabbhara.
gasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. grasati, grasate], eats; swallows;
Dhatup 293 (gasa .. . adane); Dhatum 431; Sv 449,26
(rasa~ -antl ti rasaggasa) = Ps III 380,22; Sadd 449,3
(gasu adane: -ati).
gassetmp in Ee atAs 324,13 is wr for dassetu~ (Be, Ce, Se
so).
gaha 1, m.n. [S. grha; cf BHS gaha], a house; a home; a
storehouse; Abh 206 (gharaJ11 -aJ11); 919 (ghare -o);
D II 243,25* (tasma 'ha~ na -e rame; Sv 667,19: -e ti
gehe); Ja III 396,4* (na -e rame, brahmacariyassa ka1o,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se gehe); Ap 274,13 (pitu -e, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se ghare ); Pa!is-a 685,6 (-an ti geha~ vuccati); -
ifc see dam-;- 0 -karaka, 0 -kara, m., a housebuilder; a
masan, a carpenter; Dhp 153 (sandhavissa~ ... -a111
gavesanto, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -kara~; Dhp-a III
0
128,6 foil.: imassa attabhavagehassa karakaJ11 tai_Jha-
gaha
va~h;lhakiJTI gavesanto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se attabhava-
sankhatassa gehassa) t Th 183 (0 -karaJTI); Dhp 154 (-a
digho si puna gehaJ11 na kahasi) = Th 184; Sadd 548,Jo
(vaddhakl ti -o);- 0 -küfa, n. [gaha + küta 1], the roof-
peak of a house; Dhp 154 (sabba ete phasuka bhagga,
-aJT~ visankhitaJT~; Dhp-a III 128,22 foil.: imassa taya
katassa attabhavagehassa avijjasailkhataJT~ kal)l)ika-
ma~J<;la1aJ11 pi maya viddhaJ11sitaJ11); Sadd 636,3; -
0
-ftha, m., 0 -ttha,f [BHS gahastha], one who lives in a
house; a householder; a lay-person (very often
contrasted with pabbajita); Abh 446; V in III 89,35 (püjito
apacito -anaJTI e' eva pabbajitanaJT~ ca); M II 205,17 (-o
hi . . . mahattho mahakicco mahadhikaral)o maha-
samarambho, na satataJTI samitaJT~ saccavadl hoti); S I
234,28* (ye -a puññakara sllavanto upasaka dhammena
daraJTI posenti te namassami); Dhp 404 (asaJ11satthaJ11
-ehi anagarehi cübhayaJTI); It 112,6* (-a gharamesino );
Sn 487 (yo yacayogo danapatl -o puññatthiko yajati
puññapekho); Ja VI 286,!8* (vasamanassa -assa sakaJTI
gharaJ11); Ap 573,28 (ekakinl -a 'haJ11); Kv 42,21;
Sp 1143,12 (yo nibaddhaJTI cetiyapatijaggako hoti
pabbajito va -o va); It-a II 55,32 (-a hi anibaddhaslla
honti, yaJTI yaJTI sakkonti taJTI tad eva rakkhanti); Th-a 11
212,24 (--sllaJ11 nama pañcasikkhapadasllaJTI yaJTI -ena
rakkhituJTI sakka); Bv-a 92,6 (pabbajita yeva hi
bodhisatta sambodhiJTI adhigacchanti na -a); -
sagahattha, mfn., with householders; including
laypeople; Vin 1 115,24 (Devadatto sagahatthaya parisaya
patimokkhaJ11 uddisati);- 0 -lfhaka, mfn., belonging to
or suitable for one who lives in a house; A 11 35,25 (yani
kho pana tani -ani kiJ11karal)lyani tattha dakkho hoti
analaso ); III 296,8 (yatha no so)asavassani -aJTI brahma-
cariyaJT~ samaCil)l)aJTI); - 0
-pata, 0 -patiini, 0 -pati,
0
-patika, see svv; - 0
-ppavesamailgala, n. the
ceremony of entering a new house; Nidd-a 1416,2 (-aJT~
katabbaJ11, Ce, E e so; Be geha-; Se gehappavesana-); -
0
-Vibhava, m., domestic property or wealth; Thl 327
(phltaJTI e' imaJTI -aJT~ pahaya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se geha-
vigataJ11, prob. wr; Thl-a 220,23: -aJTI gehüpakara~JaJ11);
- agaha, see sv agiha;- see also giha, geha 1.
gaha 2, m. [S. graha, graha], a seizer, one who seizes;
seizing, laying hold of; one who holds; Abh 762 (-o
gahe); 919 (gahal)e . . . -o); Dhp 251 (natthi ragasamo
aggi natthi dosasamo -o; Dhp-a III 362,23joll.:
yakkhagaha-ajagaragahakumbhllagahadayo ekasmiJTI
yeva attabhave gal)hituJTI sakkonti, dosagaho pana
ekantam eva gal)hatl ti); - ifc see ailkusa-, kara-
(sv kata\ kali-, gala- (sv gala2), jaya-, dhanu-, tharu-,
nava- (sv nava 1); - esp. (i) a planet, a heavenly body;
Abh 919 (adiccadimhi . . . -o); Ap 533,11 (pabhatakale
vyasanaJTI -anaJT~ disvana niyyati va candalekha);
Saddh 591 (in cpd);- ifc see uju-; - (ii) a rapacious
water-creature; a crocodile or alligator; Ap 363,7
(kumbhlla suJ11sumara ca kacchapa ca -a bahü); - see
also gaha2; - o• -iili,f [gaha + ali5], a row, a crowd, of
planets; Samantak 682; 0
(gahan)-giimaQi, m.
[cf S. grahagramal)l], the sun (chief of the planets); ?
Samantak 682 (gahali-m-abhitoyatagahailgama~Jisan­
nibho, Ee so; better -gahaggama~Ji-? cf A. Haze1wood,
1986: "moon"); - 0
-pürita, mfn., surrounded by
38
planets; Bv 25:42 (cando va -o; Bv-a 269,s: parivesa-
gahaparikkhitto pUI)I)acando viya); - duggaha, m.,
taking hold of wrongly; a bad seizing; V in 11 99,s (sace
Janatl adhammavadl bahutara ti -o ti
paccukka<;l<;lhitabbaJ11; Sp 1198,14 foil.: duggahita
sa1akayo ti vatva puna gahetva yavatatiyaJTI gahetabba);
- sagaha, mfn., containing rapacious water-creatures;
It 57 ,20* (so 'maJ11 samuddaJTI -aJTI sarakkhasaJ11 ümi-
bhayaJ11 duttaraJ11 accatari; It-aii 37,19foll.: samuddan ti
saJ11sarasamuddaJ11 . . . -aJTI sarakkhasan ti attano
gocaragatilnaJTI anatthajananato cal)<;lamakaramaccha-
kacchaparakkhasasadisehi visabhagapuggalehi sahitaJT~,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -macchadakarakkhasa-); 114,5 (rahado
sa-ummi savano -o sarakkhaso); 114,17 (-o sarakkhaso
ti kho bhikkhave matugamass' etaJ11 adhivacanaJ11, Ce,
Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be gaharakkhaso ti; quoted
Spk III 3,9: Be, Se gaharakkhaso ti; Ce sarakkhaso ti; Ee
sagahasarakkhaso ti); - suggaha, m., taking hold of
rightly; a good seizing; Vin II 99,6 (sace janati
dhammavadl bahutara ti -o ti savetabbaJ11; Sp 1198,17:
suggahita salakayo ti savetabbaJ11).
gahaka\ n. [gaha 1 + ka2], a house; a small house; Th 183
(aniccani -ani; Th-a II 55,29: tasmiJTI tasmiJTI bhave
punappunaJ11 nibbattamanani -ani attabhavagehani na
niccani).
gahaka2 , m. (gaha2 + ka2], a rapacious water-creature
(perhaps a kind of crocodile or alligator); Ap 347,9
(kumbhlla su m sumara ca -a tattha jayare).
gahal}a 1 (occ~sionally wrongly written gahana 1), n.
[S. grahal)a], l. seizing, taking hold of; grasping; grasp;
acquiring; Vin III 121,16joll. (-aJT~ chupanaJ11 ... -aJTI
nama gahitamattaJ11); MI 134,31 (kullüpamaJ11 vo
bhikkhave dhammaJTI desissami nittharal)atthaya no
o• -atthaya); Ja I 222,31 (amhakaJTI pana -aJT~
sugahal)aJTI); 279,10 (kacci nu kho ettha mayhaJTI
o• -atthaya kumbhllo nipanno ti); 344,27' foil. (akaral)assa
kara~Jan ti o -ka! e kara~Jassa akaral)an ti cha<;l<;lanakale
abhütassa bhütan ti 0 -kale, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -kale ...
gal)ha~Jaka1e ); III 479,14 (dlpikassa .. . -aJTI
anupagantva); Ap 581,19 (dane ca -e e' eva); Cp 2:1:8
(yadi 'haJTI tesaJ11 pakuppeyyaJ11 upetaJTI -aya maJ11, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce upetanaJ11); Sp 227,28 (manussitthiya pi hi
dassanaJTI pi -aJT~ pi amaSanaJTI pi ... ); 324,22 (-aJT~ va
amuñcanto); 645,16 (acchinditva -ena); Spk 11 204,14
(adikena ti adanena -ena); Sadd 880,23* foil. (asaddo ...
-e . . . pavattati . . . -e adiyati); - ifc see acchara-g-
(sv acchara\ u tu-, kañña-, gabbha-, nama- (sv nama2),
nikkhepa-, patisandhi-; - 2. holding, contammg;
Spk III 119,! (yodharatho . . . dvinnaJTI Ü~J~JaJTI va
janilnaJTI o -samattho ); - 3. holding an opinion or belief,
approving, accepting; Mil 160,3 (mayhan ti pi
tathagatassa -aJT~ natthi); Ps 1 70,zs (purima pi tlsu
ka1esu atthl ti -ato sassatadighi); As 46,2 (mayaJ11 atta ti
-aJTI gamissama ti); ifc see uccheda-;
4. apprehending, leaming; comprehension, grasp;
Vism 114,Jjoll.; Spk III 4,16; Saddh 532
(saddhammassldha -aJT~ na hoti sava~JaJTI vina, -ena vina
atthaparikkha nopajayati); - ifc see odhiso- (sv odhi),
mm1tta-; - 5. mention, employment (of a word or
expression); reference; la IV 14,5' (vacldvaraJTI pi
gahai].a
etesarp. -ena gahitam eva ti veditabba111); Ps 1 34,4
(Maraggahal)-en' eva e' ettha Maraparisaya pi -arp.
veditabbarp.); Spk 1 139,13 (lajjigahal)-ena e' ettha
ottappa111 pi gahitam eva hoti); 203,23 (devagahal)-ena
e' ettha Marabrahmesu gahitesu pi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-esu pi, prob. wr); Ud-a 58,29 (satigahal)-en' eva e' ettha
sampajaññarp. pi gahitan ti); - ifc see gabbha-; -
6. "what is to be grasped", an idea, an expedient, ?
Ja IV 474,7 (sa aññarp. -a111 apassanti); Mhv 70:327
(gahetabbai!l apassanto o• -aññarp. mahlpati ... );
Sadd 848,17 (gahai)-Iyai!l -arp.); -
0
-küp., n. [gahal)-a +
kü~a ], a kind of cheating in commerce ( "cheating in the
2
holding" ?); Ps II 210,15 (-a111 nama gal)-hanto müle
rajju111 gal)-hati dadanto agge) = Spk III 305,2o; -
2 -ena -a111 . . . papatami); Ja V 46,22 (agharasa -ani);
o -mana, n. [gahal)-a + mana ; cf S. graha, "ladle;
ladleful", grahal)-a, "taking up a liquid" ?], the amount
of the ladle or container; a ladleful; Spk III 24,6
(aramiko -arp. püretva ukkhipi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
thalakarp. gahal)-üpaga111 puretva); - agahal}a, n. and
mfn., l. (n.) not holding, not taking: absence of
grasping; not accepting; lack of mention; Ja I 468,3';
Vism 585,1s; Spk II 262,12 (-ena aparitassana111);
Dhp-a II 163,2 (pa~inissaggasali.khate -e); Pj II 478,21
(buddhanarp. pi ovadarp. -ena); As 44,1 (itaratha hi
ahetukanarp. -arp. bhaveyya); - 2. (mjn.) not holding;
not grasping; free from grasping; Spk 1 354,7 (sadanesu
anadana ti sagahal)-esu sattesu ... -a); Dhp-a IV 158,9
(yo pana akiñcano -o tam aha111 brahmal)-ai!l vadami ti);
- duggahal}a, mfn., hard to grasp; It-a 1 67,13
(Devadatto hi Ajatasattu111 -a111 gahapetva);
niggahal}a\ mfn., free from grasping; not holding
(anything); without acquisitions; Ja II 368,3 (manussa
dubbhojana rogabhibhüta -a putte hatthesu gahetva
vicaranti); Mp III 163,13 (kiñcanabhavavirahitarp.
nippalibodha111 -am eva pa!ipadai!l); IV 174,12
(anupadisesan ti upadanasesarahita111 -a111); Dhp-a IV
70,19 (anadano ti khandhadisu -o); - sagahal}a, mfn.,
grasping; holding; Ps IV 66,20 (sa-upadano ti -o); Spk 1
354,6; - se e also gal)-hana.
2
gahal}a 2, see sv gahana .
gahal}i, f [S. grahal)-i], a part of the body where heat
assists digestion; its digestive heat; (according to cts
also: womb); Abh 271 H ... udara111); 972 (udare tu
tatha pacanalasmi111 -1); D Il 177,27 (raja ... appabadho
ahosi appataii.ko samavepakiniya -iya samannagato
natisHaya naccul)-haya; Sv 628,13: -iya ti kammaja-
tejodhatuya) t- MIl 67,7 t- A III 65,1s; Pj II 462,26
(sarp.suddhagahal)-iko ti . . . udaraggi -1 ti vuccati idha
pana matukucchi); - see also accul)-hagahal)-ika
(sv accul)-ha), atisltagahal)-ika (sv sita), du~!hagahal)-ika
(sv dussati \ sarp.suddhagahal)-ika (sv sa111suddha),
sitagahal)-ika (sv sita).
gahal}iya in Ee at Spk III 242,1 (kal)-~akena va
visamagul)-ena va gahal)-iya phutthassa) is prob. wr; read
kal)-~akena va viddhassa maii.kulena va daghassa
paccattharal)-e va valiya phu~~hassa with Be, Ce, Se.
gahal}hato in Ee at Sp 845,23 is wr for gal)-hato (Be, Ce, Se
so).
1 1
gahana , see sv gahal)-a .
2 2
gahana (occasionally wrongly written gahal)-a ), mfn. and
39 gahapata
n. [ts], l. (mfn.) deep, dense, thick; of dense growth,
overgrown, entangled; impenetrable; Abh 719 (-a111
kalila111); MI 340,24 (-arp. h' eta111 bhante yadidarp.
manussa uttanaka111 h' etarp. bhante yadidarp. pasavo);
Dhp 394 (abbhantara111 te -a111 bahira111 parimajjasi) =
Ja I 481 ,29' (482,4· foil.: tava abbhantara111 hadaya111
ragadosamohagahanena -arp. pa!icchanna111); Sp 417,22
(ayarp. pana -e padese mahahatthipatha111 niharanto viya
0
sabbattha asammüJho ); Ps III 7,2 (manussana111 ... -ta);
Mp lii 384,3 (-e ni!Iyanaghane ); Nidd-a I 377 ,3o (tibbo
ca vanasal)-qo ti -o ca rukkharasi); - 2. (n.) a place
hard to pass through, an impenetrable place; a hiding-
place; a place of dense growth, a thicket, a wood;
Abh 536 (-arp. vipina111 vanarp.); MI 79,4 (vanena vana111
0
Mil 269,1 foil. (vanato vanatararp. pavisama -ato -tarai!l
pavisama); Ps II 161,13 (-esu gumbavatipadadisu
asayai!l kappayii!lSU); Ud-a 179,21 (kiñci -arp. va
pa~isaral)-arp. va apassanta); - ifc see omissaka-, kalala-
1 2
(sv kalala ), kasa- (sv kasa ), tina-, tirivaccha-, tulasi-,
dabba- (sv dabba ), manussa-, v~tta-, sara- (sv sara ) ; -
2 1
0 2 + ta], the
-cchannata,f, abstr. [gahana + channa
being covered with entangling plants, overgrown; Ja I
7,15 (pañc' ime cali.kamanadosa nama ... -a ... ); -
0
-nissita, mfn., relying on or taking refuge in a hiding-
place, orina place of entanglement; V in V 168,29 (ayarp.
visamanissito va -o va balanissito va; Sp 1368,n: -o ti
micchadighi -an tagg ahikadi ghisaii.khatai!l gahana'!l
nissito); A I 153,26 (mahacoro visamanissito ca hoti -o
ca hoti ba1avanissito ca hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e gahal)-a-);
154,17 (papabhikkhu ... -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gahal)-a-);
Ja I 158,16 (-o vatamigo); - agahana, mfn., without
entanglements or obstructions, not overgrown; not
impenetrable; Vv 18:7 (maggo ... akal)-!ako -o uju, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee agahal)-o; V v-a 96,2: kilesadighiduccarita-
gahanasamucchedanato -o); Ja V 260,13 (akal)-!akai!l
-arp. pa!ipanno mahapatha111); Mil 104,26 (--tta
varp.sassa); 160,19 (gahana111 -arp. kata'!l);
atigahana, mfn., very deep, very obscure; ? Sp 730,24
(tasma ima111 -a111 vyañjanavicaral)-ai!l akatva, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee ida'!l -arp., ... ); - sagahana, mfn., overgrown;
obstructed; Ja V 260,15* (magga111 ... sakal)-~aka111 -arp.);
Mp III 139,15 (sakal)-~ake -e vane, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gahane vane ).
1
gahapata, mfn. [from gahapati ; cf S. garhapata,
garhapatya], belonging to or connected with a gahapati;
MIl 7,16 (aha'!l ... appekada -ani civarani dharemi, E e,
Se so; Be, Ce gahapaticivarani); S II 202,14 (tva111
Kassapa -ani e' eva clvarani dharehi nimantanani ca
bhuñjahi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce gahapatikani; Spk Il
170,12 foil.: pai!lsukülikaii.garp. vissajjetva gahapatihi
dinnaclvarani dharehi ti); Ja IIl 466,13* (dakkha111 -arp.
sadhu sarp.vibhajja'!l ca bhojanarp., Se so; Be dakkha111
gahapati; Ce, E e dukkha111 -a111; 466,16'foll.: ghar-
avasai!l vasantanarp. gahapat1na111 bhoguppadanatthaya
analasyachekakusalabhavasailkhata111 dakkharp. nama
sadhu dakkhabhavo bhaddako, Be so; Ce, Se dukkharp.
nama sadhu dakkhabhavo laddhako; E e dukkharp. ...
dakkhabhavo laghako); - see also gahapataggi
(sv gahapati\ gahapatika.
gahapatani
gahapatani, f [S. grhapatni], the mistress of a house; the
wife of a gahapati; Vin III 213,3o (gahapatirp va -irp va
eivararp viññapeturp); 219,5 (-iyo nama ya kaci agararp
ajjhavasanti); MI 125,4 (Vedehika nama -i ahosi; Ps II
98,32: -i ti gharasamini); A III 295,16 (Nakulamata -i
Naku1apitararp gahapatiJ:p etad avoca); Kkh2 110,16 (-in
ti bhikkhunlsu apabbajititthirp); Dhp-a I 376,18 (eka -1
putta¡thane thapetva Pathikarp nama ajivakarp
pa¡ijaggati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr eko -1).
gahapati 1 , m. [gaha 1 + pati 2; S. grhapati] (sg. gen. -issa,
-in o; pl. nom.!acc. -i, -ayo, -ino; voc. -ayo), the master
of a house, the head of a family; one whose business is
trade or agriculture (a member of the third class in
society, after khattiya and brahmaQ.a); V in I 16,11
(seghirp -irp etad avoca putto te -i Y aso na dissati ti);
III 212,36 (-i nama yo koci agararp ajjhavasati);
IV 162,24 (AnathapiQ.t;likassa -issa); MI 86,19 H pi -ihi
vivadanti); 505,3 (-i va gahapatiputto va at;!t;!ho
mahaddhano mahabhogo pañcahi kamaguQ.ehi
samappito samaii.gibhüto parieareyya); A I 229,32 (tin'
imani ... kassakassa -issa pub be karaQ.iyani); II 57,26
(cattaro 'me -ayo sarpvasa); Pv 21:28 (Aii.girarasassa
-in o saddhassa gharamesino ); Ja IV 227,6• (-1 rajapurise
mahasale ca brahmaQ.e); VI 135,16* (te tattha -ayo
avocirpsu puttadaraparikiQ.Q.a); Kv 268,17 (nanu Yaso
kulaputto Uttiyo -i Setu miil).avo gihissa vyañjanena
arahattarp patta ti); Mil 17,16 (aharp -i Nagaseno nama
ti); Kkh 2 110,15 (-in ti bhikkhüsu apabbajitamanussarp);
Sp 1119,22 (gahapaticivaran ti -ihi dinnaeivararp); Ps III
216,10 (-ino pana muddhagal).anamattarp uggahitakalato
paghaya sampattirp yeva anubhavanti); Mp III 130,9
(-!su katharp tata na vo rajakulato daQ.t;lena va balina va
pita atthi, samma devo dhararp anuppavecchati sassani
sampajjanti ti evarp pa¡isanthararp karoti); Pa¡is-a 685,7
(gahan ti geharp vuccati, gahe pati -i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
gehe pati -i); Ap-a 547,6 (aeirapakkante se¡thimhi
-imhi); Sadd 636,4 (gehass' ekaro akararp ikararp ca
samasataddhitesu ... -i gaha¡tho gihi);- o• -aggi, m. [or
gahapata + aggi; cfS. garhapatya], the householder'sfire
(one of the three sacred fires); D III 217,20 (tayo aggl,
ahuneyyaggi -1 dakkhil).eyyaggi); A IV 45,8foll.
(katamo ca brahmaQ.a -i; Mp N 29,6: gahapati ti pana
gehasamiko vuccati . . . tarp aticaranto matugamo
nirayadisu nibbattati tasma so ... anudahanaghena -i ti
vutto); - 0 -kula, n., a family or community of the
gahapati class (the class of merchants, farmers etc);
Vin II 161,10 (khattiyakula pabbajito ... brahmaQ.a-
kula ... -a pabbajito ... ); Ja I 218,2; Ps V 14,2 (-e jato
seghighanarp amaecakuladisu jato senapati¡¡hanadini
labhati); - 0 -civara, n., a robe or robe-material given
by a householder; Vin III 171,21 (yavajivarp
parpsukülika assu, yo -arp sadiyeyya vajjarp narp
phuseyya); M III 126,1 (asiti me avuso vassan1
pabbajitassa nabhijanami -arp sadita); Vism 62,3o; -
0
-necayika, m., a tradesman who is a ski/fu/
accumulator, a rich tradesman; DI 136,25 (-a negama
e' eva janapada ca); III 16,2o (brahmaQ.amahasala -a
nanatitthiya samaQ.abrahmaQ.a; Sv 825,28: -a ti gahapati-
mahasala, tesarp hi mahadhanadhaññanicayo tasma
necayika ti vuccanti); - 0
-mahasala, m. a rich
40 gahitaka
householder; a rich merchant, tradesman etc; Abh 339;
D III 258,25; M III 100,8; S I 71,11 (-a at;lt;lha
mahaddhana mahabhoga ... ; Spk I 137,21: yesarp
gahapatinarp cattiitisako¡idhanarp nihitarp hoti kahapaQ.a-
kumbho valañjanatthaya gehamajjhe rasirp katva thapito
hoti te -a nama); - 0 -ratana, n. [gahapati + ratana1],
"the householder-treasure" (one ofthe seven ratanas of
a eakkavatti[n] emperor); M III 175,14 (rañño
cakkavattissa -arp patubhavati; Ps IV 229,8: rañño
cakkavattissa dhanakaraQ.iyanarp kieeanarp yathasukharp
pavattanattharp -arp patubhavati, so pakatiya va
mahabhogo mahabhogaku1e jato rañño dhanarasi-
vat;lt;lhako seghi gahapati hoti); A III 167,29 (-assa
patubhavo dullabho lokasmirp); Mil327,14; Spk III
154,12 (yojanappamaQ.e padese antopa¡havigatanarp
nidhinam dassanasamatthassa -assa).
gahapati2 : (m)f(n).? [from gahapati 1; cfS. garhapatya], (a
place for storage or cooking, kappiyabhümi or
kappiyaku¡i) built or given by laymen; V in I 239,34
(anujanami bhikkhave tisso kappiyabhümiyo
ussavanantikarp gonisadikarp -in ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gahapatikan ti; Sp 1099,17 foll.: manussa avasarp katva
kappiyaku¡irp dema paribhuñjatha ti vadanti, esa -i
nama ... Andhaka¡thakathayarp ... tesarp gehani va tehi
dinna kappiyaku¡i va -i ti vuccati ti vuttarp);
Vin-vn 2667 (¡hapetva bhikkhurp aññehi dinnarp
kappiyabhümiya atthaya santakarp tesarp geharp -' ev'
idarp).
gahapatika, m. and mfn. [gahapati 1 + ka2], l. (m.)
[BHS grhapatika] the head of the family; one whose
business is trade or agriculture; one who belongs to the
gahapati class; Vin III 219,5 (-a nama ye keci agararp
ajjhavasanti, Ee so; Be, Ce gahapati; Se gahapati nama
yo ... ajjhavasati); DI 61,22 (kassako -o karakarako
rasivat;lt;lhako; Sv 170,17: gehassa pati ekagehamatte
jeghako ti -o); II 250,4 (raja va hoti raññarp brahma va
brahmaQ.anarp devata va -anarp); III 44,3 (rajano
rajamahamatta khattiya brahmaQ.a -a titthiya); A I
66,sfoll. (ko paccayo yena khattiya pi khattiyehi
vivadanti brahmaQ.a pi brahmaQ.ehi vivadanti -a pi -ehi
vivadanti ti); Ja VI 229,19' (brahmaQ.esu ca -esu ca);
Mil 73,4 (kassako -o); Vism 27,6; Ps II 204,22 (itarehi ca
kulehi nikkhamitva pabbajita nama na bahuka -a va
bahuka); 418,2 (ibbha ti -a); Ud-a 378,1 (-a ti
khattiyabrahmaQ.e vajjetva ye keci agararp ajjhavasanta
vueeanti visesato vessa) "/= It-a II 162,7 foll.; - ifc see
brahmaQ.a-;- 2. (mfn.) [cf BHS garhapatika] belonging
to or connected with a gahapati; S II 202,14 (-ani e' eva
civarani dharehi, Ce so; sBe, Ee, Se gahapatani; Spk II
170,11: -ani ti ... gahapatihi dinnacivarani dharehi ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se gahapatani ti); Sp 1120,4 (te kira itaritarena
eivarena ti etassa -ena va parpsukülena va ti evarp
attharp sallakkhayirpsu);- see also gahapata.
gahapetva in Ee at PsI 115,7 and II 152,19 is wr for
gahapetva (Be, Ce, Se so) or gaQ.hapetva.
gahaya, absol. ofgaQ.hati qv.
gahi, gahhp, aor. 2 sg., 1 sg. ofgal).hati qv.
gahita, mfn.,pp ofgaQ.hati qv.
gahitaka, mfn. [gahita + ka2], taken; held; Ja VI 3,11
(Candadeviya pi vararp adasi, sa -arp katva ¡hapesi);
gahissati
Sp 767,24 (tatthajatakehi pi uddharitva -ehi pi);
Cp-a 266,22 (rajjaq¡ ... mama antepuraq¡ ca acchinditva
-a¡p. gal)hanta¡p. amittarajana¡p. nissaya ... passi¡p. ahaq¡,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -a¡p. gal)hanaka¡p.).
gahissati,fot. 3 sg. ofg~hati qv.
gahita, mfn., pp of g~hati qv.
gaheta(r), m. [cf S. grahitf], one who takes hold oj. one
who grasps; one who mentions; M III 126,17
(nabhijanami matugamassa anuvyañjanaso nimittaq¡ -a;
prob. rather absol.); Dhp-a I 139,2 (manussa ete
pariyesanti, mama nama¡p. -a pi natthi).
gahetmp, inj. ofg~hati qv.
gahetva, gahetvana, absol. of gal)hati qv.
gahesi, aor. 3 sg. ofgal)hati qv.
gahessati,fut. 3 sg. of g~hati qv.
gakara, m. [ga + kara1], the syllable 'ga'; Pa!is-a47,1
(pariyogahal)e ñ~an ti ... -a¡p. rassa¡p. katva pi pathanti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gakara¡p.).
gati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. v'ga, jigati], goes; Sadd 334,12 (ga
gatiya¡p.: -ati); 467,27.
gat¡2, see sv gayati.
gathaka, m. or -a, j. [gatha + ka2; cf S. gathika], a short
verse; a verse; Ja III 507,25* (ekaq¡ me dehi -aq¡; 507,27·:
-an ti khuddakaq¡ gathaq¡); Ap 208,4 (in uddana:
atthata1isa -a).
gatha, j. [ts], l. a verse; a stanza (especially a s1oka
stanza); Abh 1090 (pajje -a); V in I 5,6 (api ssu
bhagavantaq¡ ima anacchariya -ayo patibha¡p.su pubbe
assutapubba); 38,13 (ima -ayo giyamano); SI 38,21* foll.
(eh ando nidanaq¡ -ana¡p. akkhara tasa¡p. viyañjana¡p. ...
kavi -anaq¡ asayo); A II 178,14 (catuppadaya ce pi
bhikkhu -aya atthaq¡ aññaya ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
catuppadaya, prob. wr); Khp p. 2,32 (bhagavanta¡p. -aya
ajjhabhasi; Pj I 117,20 foll.: bhagavantaq¡ akkharapada-
niyamitaganthitena vacanena ajjhabhasi ti attho ); Th 968
(bh~I -a gajo atthopasa¡p.hita); Ja III 419,7/oll. (iti
brahmai)O -am eva vadati attha¡p. pana na katheti tasma
imaya -aya kiccaq¡ deviya apakata¡p.); IV 394,3o* (-a
sugita); Ap 22,4 (saii.ghamajjhe nislditva imaq¡ -a¡p.
abhasatha); Mil220,13 (na-y-imaq¡ -a¡p. bh~eyya);
Vism 49,12 (arahatta¡p. patva bhikkhusaii.ghassa imahi
-ahi vyakasi); Ps II 167,23 (CUI)I)iyapadehi va -ahi va);
III 341,18 (ima tisso -a attano paritta¡p. katu¡p. aha); 373,8
( ... satimato ti adika -ayo vatva pakkami, Ce so; Ee wr
-aya; Be, Se adigathayo); Spk I 94,24 (akkharaq¡ hi
pada¡p. janeti, pada¡p. -a¡p. janeti, -a attha¡p. pakaseti ti);
Dhp-a I 244,16 (catühi masehi eka¡p. -a¡p. pi gahetu¡p. na
sakkosi); Cp-a 147,21 (-a¡p. suval)l)apatte likhapetva
saka1anagare vacapesi); Sadd 357,28* foll. (agh' akkhara
ekapada¡p. eka -a catuppadaq¡ -a e' eka mato gantho
gantho batti¡p.satakkharo ); 739,24 (akkharavipallaso
paJiya¡p. -asu yeva 1abbhati na CUJ)J)iyapadesu); - ifc
see avasana-, osana-, thera-, theñ-; - 2. the name of one
of the nine categories (ai1gas) of the scriptures; V in III
8,7 (appakaq¡ ca nesaq¡ ahosi suttaq¡ geyyaq¡
veyyakaral)a¡p. -a udanaq¡ itivuttakaq¡ jatakaq¡
abbhutadhamma¡p. vedallaq¡); A IV 113,15 (bhikkhu
dhamma¡p. janati, suttaq¡ ... -aq¡ udana¡p. ... vedallaq¡;
Mp III 6,3: dhammapadatheragathatherigatha suttanipate
nosuttanamika suddhikagatha ca -a ti veditabba); Nidd I
41 giidha
143,29 (sutta¡p.... -a udanaq¡ . . . vedalla¡p., ida¡p.
pariyattisasanaq¡); Pet 5,15; Mil263,2; Sp 28,5 (kathaq¡
[buddhavacanaq¡] ali.gavasena navavidha¡p., sabbam eva
h' ida¡p. sutta¡p. . . . -a udana¡p. . . . vedallan ti nava-
ppabhedaq¡ hoti); - 0 abhigita, mfn., (what has been)
sung over; over which verses have been sung; SI 167,6•
(-a¡p. me abhojanlya¡p.; cfSpk I 232,11: iti gayanena
gayitva laddha¡p. vi ya idaq¡ bhojanaq¡ hoti) = Sn 81
(cfPj 11 151,31: -an ti gathahi abhigita¡p. gathayo
bhasitva laddhan ti vuttaq¡ hoti) quoted Mil228,2•; -
0
-pada, n., 0 -pada, m., a quarter of a verse; a line or
half-line; Dhp 101 (sahassa¡p. api ce gatha
anatthapadasa¡p.hita eka¡p. -a¡p. seyyo ya¡p. sutva
upasammati); Ja IV 272,1, (-anaq¡ ca subhasitana¡p.
attha¡p.); Ap 497,22; Sp 741,13 (padan ti eko 0 -pado
adhippeto); Pj I 123,7 (idani -anaq¡ atthav~J)ana hoti);
Ud-a 4,33 ( 0 -padato tevlsati catussatadhikani agha
sahassani, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -ato; Ce, Ee wr agha-
visasahassani, cf 5,11 *); Patis-a 487,7 (yatha buddhena
desita ti -assa pana ... ayaq¡ sa¡p.sandana, Ce, E e so; Be,
Se 0 -padassa);- 0 -bandha, m., 0 -bandhana, n., a verse
composition; verse; Ja V 432,27' (-en a ta¡p. atthaq¡
pakatatara¡p. katu¡p. eva¡p. aha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-bandhanena); Sp 29,12 (-esu pañhapucchana¡p. eko
dhammakkhandho vissajjanaq¡ eko); Ps III 24,12
(CUJ)J)apadehi va -ena Va yattakaqt sakkoti tattaka¡p.
vattabba¡p., Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -bandhanena) = Spk Ill
49,21 (Be, Ee so; Ce 0 -bandhanehi; Se 0 -bandhanena) i=
Ud-a415,3 (eds -ehi); Ps IV 129,6 (-ena namani
acikkhanto); Spk I 38,4 ( -bandhanena ime pañhe
0
samodhanetva bhagavantaq¡ pucchi); Ap-a 3,4 (sa
[katha] . . . -ena pana agatatta na sutthu pakata); -
0
-racana,j., verse composition; Sadd 131,11; 529,14;-
0
-rucika, mfn., who takes pleasure in verses; PsI 177,32
(gatha hi vuccamana tadatthadlpanattham eva va -anaq¡
vuccanti visesatthadlpanattha¡p. va); It-a I 44,26 (-ana¡p.
puggalana¡p. ajjhasayavasena); - see also uttaragatha-
pckkhapada (sv uttara\ niggathaka, pa!igatha,
sagathaka.
gadha 1, n. [ts], firm footing (in water); firm ground; SI
47,33* foll. (yava na -a¡p. 1abhati nadlsu ayühati
sabbagattehi jantu -a¡p. ca 1addhana thale thito so
nayühati paragato hi so ti; Spk I 105,19: -an ti
patigha¡p.); 127,16* (pataJe -am esatha); A V 202,23
(maha . . . attabhavo gambhire -a¡p. vindati); Ja VI
440,16* (atiradassl puriso mahante udak~l)ave yattha so
labhate -a¡p. tattha so vindate sukha¡p.); Ap 31 0,1s
(saddhamme -aq¡ vindami, Be, Ee so; Se gaJha¡p.; Ce
cetoñal)a¡p. ca vindami); Vism 586,8* (gambhlre
paccayakarappabhede .. . yatha -a¡p. labheth'
eva-m-anuyuñje); Saddh 394 (paccayaq¡... gathito
paribhuñjanto -aq¡ khal)ati attano); - agadha, mfn.,
deep; unfordable, without firm footing; Abh 669;
Mil 105,1o (mahasamudda¡p. gambhiraq¡ vitthata¡p. -aq¡
apara¡p. disva); Vism 585,3o (ida¡p. hi atigambhirato
-a¡p.); Pv-a 77,14 (gambhira ti -a); Samantak 478
(sasassa sindü va --paro); Sadd 394,13 (gambhirato
-a¡p.); -se e also ogadha 1, patigadha.
gadha2 , m. or n. [cf gadhati 2 and gahati; cf S. gaha, "depth,
1
innermost recess"; or = gadha , "firm footing" > "saJe
gadhati
place"], a hale; a refuge; A II 107,3o (catas so ima .. .
müsika ... -arp katta no vasita vasita no -arp katta ... ,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -arp khatta; Mp III 119,21: yo avatarp
khal).ati na ca tattha vasati, so -arp katta no vasita ti
vuccati, khanta ti pi patho) = Pp 43,22foll. (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -arp khatta; Pp-a 225,sfoll.: attano asayarp bi1arp
küparp kha1_1ati no tattha vasati); Sadd 394,12 (gadha
patighanissayaganthesu: gadhati -arp khatta); - see
also gaha .
1 bhütagamo); Patis-a 690,14 (bhütanarp -o ti pi
1
gadhati , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gadhate, Wg § 2:3],
l. stands firm, has a firm footing; Dhatup 167 (gadha
patighayarp); Dhatum 238; DI 223,7* (kattha apo ca
pathaví tejo vayo na -ati; Sv 392,33: na patighati) =F S 1
15,16* = Ap 478,24; S III 59,3o (ye supatipanna te
imasmirp dhammavinaye -anti); Ja III 499,23* (rago doso
mado moho yattha pañña na -ati); Sadd 394,12 (gadha
patighanissayaganthesu: -ati); - 2. strings together;
Sadd 394,12.
2 (sadhu bhante bhikkhü yavajívarp araññaka assu, yo
gadhati2 , pr. 3 sg. [cfogadha and S. gahate], plunges
into, enters; ? Ja I 474,9* (candabharp suriyabharp ca yo
'dha paññaya -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee bhavati, prob. wr;
1 khemarp appatibhayarp); S IV 37 ,II; Sn 710 (tato ratya
or to gadhati ? 474,13·: yo . . . idarp kasiJ:.ladvayarp
paññaya -ati aramma!Jarp katva anupavisati tattha va
patighahati, Be, Se so; Ce bhaveti; Ee bhavati) quoted
Mp 1 131,3* (131,6foll.: odatakasiJ:.larp candabharp nama
pítakasiJ:.larp suriyabharp nama ti tarp ubhayarp yo
paññaya -ati pavisati pakkhandati ... ).
gana, n. [ts], a song; Abh 130 (gítarp -arp ca gítika).
gapayi, caus. aor. 3 sg. of gayati qv.
gama', m. [from gacchati? cf gama], going;? Ap-a 420,1
(sailgamo supatinhito ti sarp sughu -o kalahatthaya
upagamanan ti sailgamo ).
gama 2 , m. [S. grama] (pl. acc. occasionally gamani), l. an
inhabited place; a village; the people of a village;
Abh 225 (-o sarpvasatho ); 1107; Vin I 39,3 (yarp assa
-ato n' eva avidüre na accasanne); 207,38 (pañca
aramikasatani padasi, patiyekko -o nivisi); III 26,17 (-o
me atthi tena paharp jívissamí ti); 46,23 foil. (-o nama
ekakutiko pi -o dvikutiko pi -o . . . yo pi sattho
atirekacatumasanivigho so pi vuccati -o); 184,9
(bhikkhu ... aññatararp -arp va nigamarp va upanissaya
viharati); D II 337,12 (majjhe -assa thito tikkhatturp
sailkharp upa]asitva); III 255,28 (bhikkhu -arp va
nigamarp va piJ:.l4aya caranto); SI 69,17* (-e va yadi
varaññe yattha passe bhujailgamarp); 123,3* (agurp nu
-asmirp akasi kiñci); 200,29 (ayasma Nagadatto atika1ena
-arp pavisati atidiva patikkamati); Dhp 47 (suttarp -arp
mahogho va maccu adaya gacchati); Sn 118 (yo hanti
parirundhati -ani nigamani ca); 619 (yo hi koci
manussesu -arp ragharp ca bhuñjati . . . raja eso na
brahmal).o); 683 (so bodhisatto ... jato Sakyanarp -e
janapade Lumbineyye); Th 14 (-e me vasati k ayo
araññarp me gato mano); JaiV 362,17* (-amhi ca
vanamhi ca); 364,1* (nikkhantabhikkharp bhuñjanti -esv
eke purohita); V 98,2s (gamaghane -o nama nahosi);
Ap 349,7 (-e va yadi varaññe pabbharesu guhasu va);
Mi147,I9 (ghararp jhayamanarp -arp jhapeyya);
Sp 1012,28 (saka1ena ku1ena va -ena va anuññatarp hoti);
Ps III 330,2o (-o osaritva nigame aghasi, nigamo
nagare ... ); Pj I 17,33 (na h' ettha ajarp -arp netl ti adisu
42 gama
viya dvikammakattarp akkharacintaka icchanti);
Cp-a 97,13 (koci puriso kassaci santike -arp va
janapadarp va keniya gahetva); Mhv 6:22 (ubbasíyati so
so ca yarp yarp -am upeti so);- ifc see gocara- (sv go),
jata- (sv ,/jan), tiro-, dhura-, nigama- (sv nigama\
nivasana- (sv nivasani), paccanta-, padvara-; - 2. a
class, a collection; Abh 1107 (gaJ:.le -o); Sp 761,9 (-o ti
rasi, bhütanarp -o ti bhütagamo, bhüta eva va -o
bhütagamo ti vadanti); - ifc see bíja-, bhüta-, matu-; -
3. a musical scale; Mp III 390,3* (satta sara tayo -a
mucchana ekavísati thana ekünapaññasarp ice ete
saramaJ:.l4alarp; Mp-t [Be] III 120,26: chajjagamo
majjhimagamo sadharaJ:.lagamo ti tayo -a, samüha ti
attho); - ifc see chajja-, majjhima-, sadharaJ:.la-; -
game in Ee, Se at Sp 1165,3 (gacchato game) is prob.
1
wr; Be, Ce gacchato me;- 0 '-anta, m. [gama+ anta ],
the neighbourhood of a village; a village; Vin III 171,19
-arp osareyya vajjarp narp phuseyya); DI 73,6 (so ...
tarp kantararp nitthareyya sotthina -arp anupapuJ:.leyya
vivasane -am abhiharaye); Th 962 (kicchanta vana-
patthani -esu vasissare; Th-a III 87,6: -esü ti gamanta-
senasanesu gamasamípesu senasanesu gamadvaresu va
senasanesu); Ja I 154,12 (tvarp kho si ayya pabbateyyo
balamigo -o ca nama sasañko sappatibhayo);
Vism 115,16 (-arp osaritva gihíhi sarpsagho hutva); Ps 1
248,4 (itthipurisahatthi-assadisaddasamakularp -arp
2
apariccajitva); - o• -antaka, n. [gama + antaka ; cf S.
gramantika], the neighbourhood of a village; a village;
Ja JI 40,17* (-ani sevassu etarp matalayarp tava, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce gamantikani; 40,2o·foll.: etarp gamantarp
ukkaraghanarp amakasusanaghanarp ca tava matu
a1ayarp geharp vasanaghanarp tattha gaccha ti); -
o• -antara, n. and mfn., l. (n.) another village, a different
village; the next village; Vin IV 62,3o (yo pana bhikkhu
bhikkhuniya saddhirp sarpvidhaya ekaddhanamaggarp
patipajjeyya antamaso -am pi pacittiyan ti; 63,28:
kukkutasampate game -e -e apatti pacittiyassa;
Sp 806,27 foil.: anantaragamassa upacarokkamane pana
bhikkhuno pacittiyarp); 227,33 (bhikkhuní eka -arp
gacchatl ti); Sp 807,21 (-e cetiyavandanattharp gamato
nikkhamantarp bhikkhurp disva); Ps JI 258,21 (dve tíl).i
-ani va atavirp va vicaranto); Vin-vn 2033 (-arp
nadípararp gaccheyy' eka); - 2. (mjn.) relating to
(going to) another village; Sp 1185,12 (aharp ayye ekarp
apattirp apajjirp -arp, saharp ayye sailgharp ekissa
apattiya -aya pakkhamanattarp yacam¡ ti);
--kappa, m. "different village practice", the practice of
eating a second time in a different village; Vin II
300,33foll. (ko so avuso --kappo ti kappati bhante idani
-arp gamissamí ti bhuttavina pavaritena anatirittarp
bhojanarp bhuñjitun ti n' avuso kappatí ti);
o• -opacara, m., the environs, the outskirts, of a vi/lag e;
Vin 1 110,1 (thapetva gamarp ca -arp ca); III 46,27 (-o
nama parikkhittassa gamassa indakhíle thitassa
majjhimassa purisassa 1e4Qupato, aparikkhittassa
gamassa gharüpacare thitassa majjhimassa purisassa
leQQUpato); Ja II 440,9 (bodhisatto ekasmirp -e
gama
erai)<;Iarukkhadevata hutva nibbatti); Sp 1050,17 (-o ti
parikkhittassa parikkhepo); - 0
-kamma, n., village
work, village affairs; Ja I 199,1o (te ca tirpsaku1amanussa
ekadivasarp gamamajjhe thatva -arp karonti); Sv 710,27
(--karaJ?,aghanarp); o -küta, o -kütaka, m.,
magistrate, a village chief (with a connotation of
dishonesty ?); Vin III 100,19* C-kütako, in uddana);
106,35 (eso ... satto imasmi¡p yeva Rajagahe -o ahosi;
Sp 510,6: -o ti vinicchayamacco ); Ja IV 179,3 (kütavedi
ti kütajananako -o va 1okassa anatthakarako va ... , Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be 0 -kütako); Spk I 116,5 (yatha game -a
nanappakarena janarp pi)etva); - 0
-(k)khetta, n.,
village land or territory; a village field; Vin 11 185,26
(tassa evarüpo attabhavapati1abho hoti seyyatha pi nama
dve va tiJ?.i va Magadhakani -ani) =A III 122,26 (Mp lii
277,13foll.); DI 117,3 (ye ... keci samaJ?,a va brahmaJ?,a
va amhakarp -arp agacchanti atithi no te honti); 11 166,1
(bhagava amhakarp -e parinibbuto ); M III 10,11 (te
mayarp tadahuposathe yavatika ekarp -arp upanissaya
viharama, te sabbe ekajjharp sannipatama); Thi 340
(hitvan' aharp ... -ani phitani); Ap 124,9 (gamarp ca
-arp va sahassarp va 1abheyya 'ha¡p); - 0 -gamika, m.
[gama + gamika2], a village headman; A III 76,22 (yadi
va -assa yadi va pügagamai)ikassa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
0
-gamai)ikassa; Mp III 261,15: gamanarp gamikassa,
gamasamikassa ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gamanarp
gamaJ?,ikassa); 300,9 (-o pügagamai)iko, Ce, E e so; Be,
Se 0 -gamai)iko; Mp III 350,25: gamabhojako); -
0
-ghata, m. and m(jn)., l. (m.) plundering of a village;
marauding; DI 135,s (janapado sakaJ?.tako sa-upapl)o -a
pi dissanti); Ja IV 435,15' (alopa ti diva -a, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -o); Kv 173,32 (araha aññaJ?,apakato . . . -arp
kareyya); 622,14 (ekadhippayena ... -o katabbo, E e so;
Be, Se 0 -ghatako); Sp 997,15 (yo -arp .. . karonto
vicarati);- 2. (m[ft¡].) (one) who plunders a village; a
marauder; S 11 188,21 (digharattarp vo ... cora -a ti
gahetva sisacchinnanarp 1ohita¡p pasannarp paggharitarp,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -ghataka ti);- -ghataka, m(jn). and
0 0
m., l. (m[ft¡].) [gama+ ghataka 1] (one) who plunders a
village; a marauder; S IV 173,3o (imarp suññagamam
cara -a pavisanti, Be so; Ce, Ee vadhissanti; Se 0 -ghata
pavisanti); Mi120,19 (te pubbe -a cara); Vism 505,26;-
2. (m.) [gama + ghataka2] the plundering of a village;
marauding; Ja I 200,3 (bahü cora -' -adini karonta
vicaranti ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -ghatadlni); Ud-a 179,18;
It-a 11 53,34; - 0
-jetthaka, m., a village headman;
Abh 920; Ja 11 136,8· (ambho -a); IV 311 ,1r (gamaJ?,I ti
-o); - 0
-ta,f, a group of villages; Sadd 789,22
(jananarp samüho janata eva¡p . . . -a);
0
-tthakanaka, mfn., closing up a village, being the gate
of a village; Sp 281,6 (-arp cakka1akayuttadvararp);-
0
-dhamma 1, m. [gama+ dhamma 1], the rule or customs
of a village; Ap 566,15 (na -o na nigamassa dhammo na
cap! yarp ekaku1assa dhamrno, sabbassa 1okassa
sadevakassa eso va dhammo yad ida¡p aniccata); -
0
-nissandhena in Ee at Vism 250,10 is wr for
0
-nissandena (Be, Ce, Se, Vibh-a 233,4 so); - 0 -patta.
0
-pattana, 0 -pada, 0 -paddhana, n.(?), the site of a
village; ? D 11 349,3o (te yena so janapado yen'
aññatara¡p 0 -pagarp ten' upasañkami¡psu, Be so; Ce
43 gama
0
-pattharp; Ee 0 -paddhanarp; Se 0 -pajjarp; Sv 812,27:
0
-pagan ti vughitagamappadeso vuccati, 0 -padan ti pi
patho, aya¡p ev' attho, Be so; Ce 0 -paganan ti; Ee
0
-paddhanan ti; Se 0 -pajjan ti; Sv-pt 11 449,2o: 0 -pattan ti
a gamo eva hutva apajjitabba¡p, suññabhavena
anamasitabbarp, Ee so; Be anavasitabbarp);- 0 -pati, m.
[gama+ pati2], a village chief; a squire; Ja 11 136,5* (tarp
tarp -i brümi; 136,s·: ambho gamajeghaka); -
0
-patika,f, the site of a village; ? the wife of a village
chief, ? Ud-a 122,14 (tassa avidüre eka -a ahosi, sa pi
tassa yakkhassa iiJ?.apavattighane nivinhatta ten' evarp ca
paripa1itatta KuJ?,<;Iiya ti voharlyittha, Be, Se so; Ce
0
vamapatika; Ee aJ?.apitatthane); -poddava,
0
-pütava, m. or mfn., (according to ct) (une) given to
bodily embellishment; Vin 11 105,9 (katha¡p hi nama
samaJ?,a Sakyaputtiya nahayamana rukkhe kayarp
uggha¡psessanti ... seyyatha pi mallamughika -a ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be 0 -moddava; Se 0 -pütava ti; Sp 1199,15:
o -pütava ti chaviragamai)<;Iananuyutta nagarikamanussa,
0
-potaka ti pi patho, es' ev' attho, Ee, Se so; Be
0
-muddava ti ... 0 -moddava ti pi patho; Ce gamupaddava
ti ... -a ti pi patho); - 0 -bandhana, n., restraint in a
village, restnctwn to a village; Vin Ill 47,10
(bandheyyu¡p va ti rajjubandhanena va . . . nagara-
bandhanena va -ena va ... ); Nidd I 403,3 (tarp enarp raja
bandhapeti ... -ena va nagarabandhanena va; Nidd-a I
354,35: -ena ti adisu tasma tasma thanato nikkhamitu¡p
alabhanto -'-adlhi baddho nama hoti); Kv 272,12 (labbha
arahato kayo . . . -en a bandhiturp nigamabandhanena
bandhitu¡p ... ); - o -bhojaka, m. a village chief (who
lives off the village); a squire; Ja I 199,27 (-o cintesi
aharp pub be ... dai)<;Iabalivasena ca dhana¡p labhami);
11 134,24 (tassa bhariya dusslla -ena saddhi¡p anacararp
carati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gamabhojanakena, prob. wr);
Ps 11 252,8 (janapade uppanno ago -arp papuJ?,ati);
Dhp-a I 69,5; Sadd 471,9 (mah!bhujo -o ... );
2
0
-Vasi(n), mf(n). [gama+ vasi(n) ], (une) who lives in a
village; a villager; Ja I 480,18 (-ino sakkaccarp tapasa¡p
upaghahanti); Vism 96,33; Sv 72,14 (gamadhamma ti
-lnarp dhamma); PsI 74,25 H puriso); Mp I 143,9 (-Ihi
saddhi¡p); Dhp-a III 89,7 (-1 bhattagandharp ghayitva va
nagaravasi¡p aha);- 0 -vasika, mf(n)., (one) who lives in
a village; a villager; Ja I 221,7 (avuso mayarp -a
dullabhapaccaya); 297,t (cara ... -ehi yeva bhaJ?,<;Iika
ukkhipapetva); Vism 706,17 (-a sannipatitva ...
aharpsu); Mp III 360,!7 (gamman ti -anarp dassana¡p);
- agama, m. and mfn., l. (m.) not a village; an
uninhabited place; M 11 97,27 (coro Aii.gulima1o hoti ...
tena gama pi -a kata); A I 159,33 (manussanarp khayo
hoti tanuttarp paññayati gama pi -a honti); Sp 482,12;
1050,31 (manussa ... aññattha gata, -o yeva esa); -
2. (mfn.) without a village, not having a village; Ja V
99,28' (bahü hi khattiya jlna attha¡p ragha¡p pamadino
atho pi gamino 'gama anagara agarino, perhaps so
read ? eds gamino gama; cfl Ol,4· foil.: attha¡p raghan ti
janapadavaslnarp vuddhi¡p e' eva sakalaragharp ca bahü
pamadino jlna ... gamino ti gamabhojaka pi te gama pi
bahü pamadadosena jlna parihlna vinagha, anagara
agarino ti pabbajita pi pabbajitapatipattito gihl pi
gharavasato e' eva dhanadhaññadlhi ca bahü jina
gama
parihina ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gammo ti gama-
bhojaka pi te te gamino bahupamadadosena ... ); - see
also agamaka.
3
gama , mfn. [S. gramya], belonging to the village (lije),
common; esp. relating to the sensual pleasures of the
village; Spk III 108,18 (-o ti gammo, gammo ti pi patho,
2
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -o ti gammo); - 0 -dhamma , m.
1 -a upasali.kamitva otthubhanti pi omuttenti pi
[gama + dhamma ], sexual intercourse; Abh 317 (-o
asaddhammo vyavayo methunaJ?l rati); Vin III 21 ,2
(tVaJT! asaddhammarp. -arp. ... samapajjissasi; Sp 221,5:
-an ti gamanarp. dhammaJ?l gamavasikamanussanarp.
dhamman ti vuttaJT! hoti); DI 4,10 (abrahmacariyarp.
pahaya brahmacañ samm:w Gotamo aracañ virato
methuna -a ti; Sv 72,14: gamavas!narp. dhamma); Ja II
180,4* (akovida -assa Seggu); Nidd I 139,8
(methunadhammo nama yo so asaddhammo -o
2 parikaQ«;;hasi; cf K.R. Norman, 2007, p. 321); Cp 3:15: 1
vasa1adhammo ... ); Sadd 408,s•; - see also gamma ,
tiro-gamaka ( sv tiro).
1
gamaka , m. [S. gramaka], a small village; a village;
Vin III 249,2o (ayasma Pi1indavaccho tasmirp. -e
kulüpako hoti); IV 227,27 (amukasmirp. -e etissa
ñatiku1aJ?1 tattha gantva vicinatha ti); Ja II 300,14
(ekasmirp. -e vasarp. kappesi); IV 432,15' (araññe
coranarp. vasanatthaya katarp. -aJT~ addasa); Ap 555,18
(cuta Isigillpasse -amhi ajayi 'haJ?l); Mi1205,15 (itthi -e
thapita); Pv-a 67,5 (Magadharanhe kira Inhakavati ca
Digharaj! ca ti dve -a ahesurp.); Cp-a 121,23 (-e pi ...
nagare ... ); Sadd 803,19 (ko . . . khuddakatthe: -o
rathako ... );- ifc see paccanta-.
2
gamaka , m. [cfS. gramika], a villager; Ja V 107,2" (yatha
'harp. ajja khajjami -ehi araññajo, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr;
Be, Se gamikehi; 107,4·: gamavasihi); - see also
gamika2.
2
gamal}ika, m. [gama~!+ ka ], a village chief, headman; a
leader, chief; SI 61,12* (dupposarp. katva attanarp. game
-a viya; Spk I 116,5: yatha game gamakuta
nanappakarena janaJ?l pijetva ... ); Mp III 261,15
(gamagam~ikassa ti gamanarp. -assa, gamasamikassa ti
attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gamagamikassa ti gamanarp.
2 tiracchana-, tiracchanayoni-, dukkhanirodha-, duggati-,
gamikassa);- (fe see cara- (sv cora\ puga- (sv pilga );
- see also gam~!ya.
gamal}l, m. and mfn. [S. grama~!], l. (m.) a village chief,
headman; a leader, chief, Abh 920 (-i ... adhipe gama-
jetthake); Vin Il 296,34 (M~icujako -1 tarp. parisarp. etad
avoca); S IV 308,17 (yodhajivo -i, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -i);
323,wfoll. (Asibandhakaputtarp. -irp. Niga~tho Nataputto
etad avoca . . . Asibandhakaputtena -in a . . . ); Th 707
(natthi cetasikarp. dukkhaJT! anapekkhassa -i); Ja I 137,1·
(katthaci gamikapuriso pi gamajeghako pi -i, idha pana
sabbajanajetthakaJT! attanarp. sandhay' aha, Be, Ce so; Ee
-i; Se gamani); IV 31 O, 1* (so -i hotu sahayamajjhe
naccehi gitehi pamodamano; 311 ,13·: -i ti gamajeghako );
351,21* (va~ija... pakkamirp.su ekarp. katvana -irp.;
352,31': -in ti ekaJ?l paññavantataraJ?l satthavahaJ?l
katva); Sadd 189,4 (-i senan1); - ifc se e gahali.gama~i
(sv gaha2), cora- (sv cora\ - 2. (mfn.) chief, pre-
eminent; Abh 695; 920 (tisu -i setthasmim).
gamal}iya, m. [cf S. lex. grama~i, BHS gram~iya], a
groom; (a headman or officer; ?) Abh 368 (-o tu
matali.gahayadyacaro bhave); Ja V 258,28* (matali.ga ...
44 gamika
ariljha -ehi; 260,21': -ehi ti hatthacariyehi); 259,4*
(sindhava ... ariljha -ehi; 260,23': -ehi ti assacariyehi)
259,9* (satthi rathasahassani ... ariljha -ehi; 260,25': -eh!
ti rathikehi); VI 503,3* fo11. -t Ap 353,9 foil.; - see also
gama~ika.
1
gamal}c.J.ala, goma~¡;lala , m., a young man, an (insolent ?)
village youth; ? a young cowherd; ? M I 79,32 (marp. ...
paJ?lsukena pi okiranti ka~~asotesu pi sa1akarp. pavesenti,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se goma~¡;la1a; Ps II 48,35: -a ti gopa1aka-
daraka, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se goma~¡;la1a ti gopaladaraka);
II155,14 (ko nayarp. 0
-rilpo viya sattannaJ?l
brahma~isinarp. patth~«;Ji1e cali.kamamano; Ps III 411,18:
gamadarakarilpo viya); Th 1143 (catubbipallasavasaJ?l
adhitthitaJ?1 -aJT~ va parinesi citta marp.; Th-a III 161,23:
ambho citta, marp. gamadarakarp. viya ito e' ito ca
(-a upagantva rilpaJ?l das sen ti 'nappakarp., Be so; Ce, Ee
goma~¡;lala; Se gamam~«;Ja1a; Cp-a 269,22: gamadaraka)
= Ja I 47,8* (Be so; Se gamama~«;Ja1a; Ce, Ee gom~«;Jala
upagantva) quoted Ap-a 51,17* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
gom~«;Jala upagantva) and Bv-a 61,10* (Be, Se -a
upagantva; Ce, Ee gom~«;Jala upagantva).
-gami- in Ee at Sp 309,8 (katipayagamisamika) is wr for
-gama- (Be, Ce, Se so).
gami(n) 1, mfn. [S. gamin], going; moving (to); directed to;
relating to, influenced by; behaving; MI 8,15 (ayarp. nu
kho satto kuto agato so kuhirp. -i bhavissatl ti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee kuhirp.gami, better ?) -t Nidd 1 419,7 quoted
Vism 599,n; A li 19,24* (jana ... chanda ca dosa ca
bhaya ca -ino ); PsI 111,22 (pubbali.gamo ti purato -1
nayako); Spk II 77,8 ([patipada] sadisa va hutva -ini);
Pj II 508,13 (tividhaJT! pi taJT~ maccurp. hitva -ino );
Sadd 869,23 (gamiturp. silarp. pakati yassa so hoti -1); -
ifc see akanigha-, agati- (sv gati), agha- (sv agha\
advejjha- (sv dvejjha), adho-, anujju- (sv uju), apacaya-
(sv apacaya\ apaya-, avassaJ?l-, acaya-, apatti-,
udayattha- (sv udaya), uddha- (sv uddhaJ?1), uddhali.-,
chanda- (sv chanda\ chejja- (sv chindati), cheda-,
düra-, desana-, dosa- (sv dosi), dvaya-, dvicaturali.ga-
(sv dvi), nikkhippa- (sv nikkhipati), nibbana-,
nibbanogadha-, niraya-, vughana-, sigha-, hana-.
gami(n) 2 , m. [cf S. gramin], a villager; a village headman;
Ja V 99,28* (bahü hi khattiya jina attharp. ragharp.
pamadino atho pi -in o 'gama anagara agarino, perhaps
so read? eds -ino gama; 101,6·: -ino ti gamabhojaka;
2
se e agama above sv gama ).
1
gamika , mfn. [S. -gamika, of a road], going; going to;
leading to; Pet 164,3 (yatha vato sigharp. gacchati añño
va koci sigharp. -o vuccate vatajavo ti pakkhigamiko ti,
Ce, Ee so; Be gamako; or read sighangamiko ?); - ifc
se e apatti-, jambudipa- (sv jambu), pakkhi-.
gamika 2 , m. and mfn. [S. gramika, m.], l. (m.) a villager;
a leading villager; a village headman; Vin 1 179,9
(raja ... asltiya gamasahassesu issaradhipaccarp. rajjaJ?l
kareti ... tani asltirp. o -sahassani sannipatetva; Sp 1081,2:
tesu gamesu vasantanaJ?l ku1aputtanarp. asitisahassani);
Ja IV 330,7* (usabho ahü ba1ava -assa); V 107,2*
(yathaham ajja khajjami -ehi araññajo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
giiminiya
gamakehi; 107,4-: -ehl ti gamavaslhi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
gamakehl ti); Kv41,13 (añño gamo añño -o, Be, Ee so;
Se gamiyo); Mi1147,21 (gamasamiko ... sabbe -e
fu:J.apeti); PsI 156,13 (avoharakusala ime -a); Spk II
133,27 (eko kira amaccaputto -ehi parivarito gamamajjhe
~atva kamma~ karoti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se gamiyehi);
Mp III 261,15 (gamagamikassa ti gaman~ -assa
gamasamikassa ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gama-
gamar_J.ikassa ti gamana~ gamar;ükassa); Mhv 28: 19; -
ifc see gama- sv gama2; - 2. (mfn.) belonging to the
village, in the villages; Vism 437,25 (viññfu:J.~ -assa
purisassa); Sv 715,35 (te pi tetti~sa -a manussa, Ee so;
Be 0 -manussa; Ce gamiya manussa; Se gamiyamanussa);
Mhv 33:27 (-an~ ca bhikkhüna~ bhesajjani adapayi,
Ee so, perhaps wr; cfvl gamikana~).
gaminiya, mfn. [from gami(n) 1 ?], leading to; - ifc see
tiracchanayoni- (sv tiracchana), devaloka- (sv deva),
niraya-, pettivisaya-, manussaloka- (sv manussa).
gamiya, mfn. and m .. [= gamika2 ? or cf S. grameya ?],
belonging to the village; a villager; Sv 715,35 (te pi
tetti~sa -a manussa, Ce so; Ee gamika; Be gamika-
manussa; Se 0 -manussa); Spk I 179,15 (bhagavanta~
0
-manussavesena upasail.kami); II 133,27 (eko kira
amaccaputto -ehi parivarito gamamajjhe thatva
kamma~ karoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gamikehi); - ifc see
mahallaka-.
giimilla, gamillaka, m(jn). [AMg gamilla, gamellaya;
cfBHS grameluka], (one) who lives in a village, a
villager; As 279,3 (sutta~ dovariko ca -o ambo ... , Be,
Ce, E e so; Se gamilako ); 280,21 (-o ti sambahula
gamadaraka antaravlthiya~ pa~sukl!~ kljanti, Be, Ce
so; Ee gamillako ti; Se gamilako ti).
giimeti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of gacchati qv.
giimeyya, mfn. [S. -gramlya], belonging to the village; -
ifc see sagameyya.
giiyaka, m. [ts], a singer; Abh 902 (gayane -e ...
gandhabbo); Ja VI 410,29 (raja -e pakkosapetva);
Ap 546,22 (Var_J.l).ayitva Vejuvan~ -e gapayl mam~);
Ps III 288,1 (-ena gayitva laddh~ viya); - ifc see
amatasana- (sv marati), nataka-.
giiyati (and gati 2 ?), pr. 3 sg. [S. gayati, occasionally gati],
sings; recites in a singing manner, Dhatup 393 (ga
sadde); Dhatum 627; Vin I 346,1o (tva~ bhar_1e
mfu:lavaka -assu vil).~ ca vadehl ti); II 108,6/oll.
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü ayatakena gltassarena dhamm~
-anti . . . yo -eyya, apatti dukkatassa); S V 170,5
(Janapadakalyfu:ll naccati -atl ti); Sn 682 (sejenti -anti
ca vadayanti ca); Ja III 447,16* (atha -asi vattani); 507,25*
(ek~ me gahi gathaka~, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
dehi; cfJa III 507,23: ek~ me gltak~ dehi); IV 393,24
(gantva rañño santike -issasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -i);
394,3 (tumhe tava deva tumhak~ glta~ -atha athah~
patiglta~ -issaml ti); 470,23* (avidüramhi -atu); V 250,2
(ima~ patiglta~ rañña saddhi~ gahi, Ee so, perhaps wr;
Be, Ce, Se gayahi); Ap 3,28 (karavlka ca -antu);
Sadd 333,2 (ge sadde: -ati); - gayissanti in Ee, Se at
D III 73,17 is wr; read sabhagayissanti with Be, Ce; -
part.pr. (a) gaya(t), mfn., Vism 689,19 (madhurena
sarena -ato matugamassa); (b) gayanta, mf(-antl)n.,
Vin II 108,16 (dhamm~ -antassa); A IV 55,12
45 gaya ti
(matugamassa sadd~ sul).ati ... bhar_1antiya va -antiya
va vadantiya va); Ja III 447,7 (glt~ -anto); Spk III
103,12 (naccanta viya -anta viya ca nataves~ gahetva
paccanti); (e) gayamana, mfn., Vin I 38,13 (ima gathayo
-amano, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr glyamano); Ja IV 470,17*;
Vism 120,5 (sakaharika -amana p:ll).l).~ uccinantiyo);
Spk I 30,22; - gayamano in Ce, Ee at Pv-a 151,17 is
prob. wr; Be, Se vayamamano; - aor. 3 sg. gayi, V in I
345,35; A IV 263,18 (eka va -i eka va nacci eka va
accharika~ vadesi); Ja III 409,3o (bodhisatto ... imahi
dvlhi gathahi udanaglta~ -i); Vism 121,23 (eka
yakkhinl ... -i); 3 pl. gayi~su, Ja VI 410,27; Sp 1202,8
(amhak~ acariya pi upajjhaya pi ev~ -i~sü ti);
Dath 5:31; 1 pl. agayimha, gayimha, Ja I 362,18*
(apayimha anaccimha agayimha rudimha ca; 362,21-:
mukh~ vivaritva ayatakena sarena -imha); -
inf gayitu~, Ja II 329,12; Spk III 295,16 (sa pi pasadika
naccitu~ -itu~ cheka); - absol. gayitva, Vv 32:2;
Ja III 507,12 (naccitva -itva); IV 470,13 (sa ...
agganakhehi vil).a~ vadentl madhurena sarena -itva t~
palobhesi); Sadd 467,6;- neg. agayitva, Ja V 249,21;-
pass. (a) pr. 3 sg. giyati2 , Nidd I 420,15 (anuglyantl ti
-anti nigglyanti kathlyanti, Be so; Ce -antl ti; Ee, Se
-ann ti -anti kathiyanti); Th-a I 8,6 (-an ti gatha); -
part.pr. giyamana, mfn., Ja VI 60,22* (-amanesu gltesu);
- giyamano in Ee at Vin I 38,13 is wr for gayamano
(Be, Ce, Se so); - pass. (b) aor. 3 sg. agayittha (or
act. ?) Sadd 850,4 (gayan~ agayittha ti va glt~
naccan~ anaccittha ti va naccam); - pp (a) gita, mfn.
and n. (and -a, f ?) [ts], l. (mfn.) sung, chanted; V in I
245,18 (id~ etarahi brahmar_1a porfu:l~ mantapada~
-a~ pavutta~ samihit~ tad anugayanti) = DI 104,11
(Sv 273,17 foil.: sarasampattivasena sajjhayit~); Ja III
61,25 (tumhehi imasmi~ gltake -e);- 2. (n.f) singing;
a song; Abh 130 (-~ gan~); Vin I 268,12 (gar_1ika .. .
padakkhil).a nacce ca -e ca vadite ca); 345,37 (assosi .. .
mañjuna sarena -~vil).~ ca vadit~); IV 267,29/oll.
(ya . . . bhikkhunl nace~ va -~ va vaditarp va
dassanaya gaccheyya pacittiy~ . . . -~ nama y~
kiñci -a~; Sp 925,!2foll.: y~ kiñci natadln~ va-~
hotu ariyan~ parinibbanakale ratanattaya-
gul).üpasa~hit~ sadhukijitaglt~ va as~yata-
bhikkhüna~ dhammabhfu:J.akaglta~ va sabb~ p' et~
-am eva); D II 159,21 (bhagavato sañra~ naccehi -ehi
vaditehi ... sakkaronta); Ja III 223,4* (na-y-idha nacca~
va -a~ va tal~ va susamahita~); V 330,7*
(thanakhirena -ena ... rodant~ putt~ toseti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr gitena); VI 410,25 (atimanoharani -ani
bandhitva); Ps II 209,3 (attana naccananaccapanadi-
vasena nacca ca -a ca vadita ca); - ifc see jüta-, nacca-;
- see also pa!iglta (sv patigati); - --ssara, m. [glta +
sara5], the sound or tone of singing; a singing accent or
tone; Vin II 108,6 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü ayatakena
--ssarena dhamm~ gayanti); D II 267,16
(samsandati . . . tantissaro --ssarena --ssaro ca
tantissarena); Ja III 188,23 (tantissarena --ssar~
anatikkamanto gandhabba~ akasi); - dugglta, mfn.,
sung badly or incorrectly; D I 99,11 (esa . . . brahmuna
SanaiJ.kumarena gatha suglta na dugglta);
sugita, mfn., sung well or correctly; DI 99,11; Th 51
gayattl
(vassati devo yatha sugita111; Th-a I 134,21: sundara111
gita111 vi ya gajjanto ); Ja IV 394,3o* (gatha sugita);
V 506,11 * (bahu111 sug1ta111 ca suvadita111 ca); -
pp (b) gayita, mfn., Ja IV 393,22 (dv!su gltesu gayitesu);
Dhp-a III 233,17 (taya imasmi111 gite gayite); -
fpp (a) geyya, (mj)n. [cf S. geya], the name of one of the
nine categories (ailgas) of the scriptures; Vin III 8,7
(appaka111 ca nesa111 ahosi sutta111 -a111 veyyakaraQ.a111
gatha udana111 itivuttak3111 jataka111 abbhutadhamm3111
vedalla111); M III 115,18 (na kho. .. arahati savako
satthar3111 anubandhitu111 yadida111 sutta111 -a111
veyyakar3J).a111 tassa hetu, Be, Ce so; Ee veyyakar3J).assa
hetu, prob. wr; Se suttageyyaveyyakaraQ.assa sotu111);
A IV 113,15 (bhikkhu dhamm3111 janati sutt3111 -a111 ...
vedall3111; Mp III 5,n: sabb3111 pi sagathaka111 sutta111 -an
ti veditabb3111, visesena sa111yuttake sakalo pi sagathaka-
vaggo); Nidd I 143,29 (sutt3111 -a111 ... vedalla111, ida111
pariyattisasan3111); Pe! 5,15; Mil 263,2; Sp 28,5 (kath3111
[buddhavacan3111] ailgavasena navavidh3111, sabbam eva
h' ida111 sutta111 -a111 . . . vedallan ti navappabhed3111
hoti); Sadd 610,w• (sagathatta ta111 -an ti pavuccati);-
fpp (b) gayitabba, mfn., Vin II 108,22 (na bhikkhave
ayatakena gltassarena dhammo -o); caus.
(a) pr. 3 sg. gayapeti, Spk lii 120,24 (manussa nama
vaQ.Q.abhiiQ.akana111 dhan3111 datva attano darikana111
vaQ.Q.aglta111 -enti, Be, Se so; Ce V3Q.Q.abh3Q.ana!!hana111
patva attano dayakan3111 V3Q.Q.agita111 -enti; Ee V3Q.Q.a-
bhiil).akaghan3111 patva attano vadakana111 V3Q.Q.aglta111
-enti); - part.pr. gayapenta, mfn., Sp 1201,26 (saya111
gayantassapi -entassapi dukka!am eva); - aor.
3 sg. gayapesi, Dhp-a III 231,14 (dh1tar3111 ... naccapetva
-esi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee naccetva -eti); -
absol. gayapetva, Ja VI 410,15 (tani kabbani Mithilaya111
-etva);- caus. (b) aor. 3 sg. gapayl, Ap 546,22 (gayake
gapayl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee papayl, prob. wr); - see also
pa!igati.
gayattl, f [S. gayatñ], the name of a metre; Abh 417
(gayattipamukh3111 chand3111); Spk I 94,21 (gayatti-adiko
chando gathan3111 nidan3111, Be, Ce so; Ee gayattl-; Se
gayati-).
gayana, n.m. [ts], l. (n.) singing; Abh 902 (-e ...
gandhabbo ); Spk I 232,11 (-ena gayitva laddha111 viya,
Be, Se so; or m. ?; Ce, Ee gayantena); Vv-a 315,15
(naccane ca -e ca); Nidd-a I 411,31 (gltan ti -a111); -
2. (m.) a singer;- ifc see na!anagaka-.
garayha, mfn. and m.n.,fpp of garahati qv.
garava, m.n. (and mfn. ?) [from garu; AMg,
BHS garava, n.; cfS. gaurava, n.], l. (m.n.) respect,
reverence; esteem; Vin II 168,34 (ayasma Upali !hitako
uddisati therana111 bhikkhün3111 -ena); V 92,4 foil.
(katame cha -a, buddhe -o dhamme . . . sailghe ...
sikkhaya ... appamade ... pa!isanthare -o); D III 284,25
(yatth' assa tibba111 hirottapp3111 paccupaghit3111 hoti
pemaq¡ ca -o ca); A IV 97,5 (nassa hirl na ottapp3111 na
vaco hoti -o; Mp IV 48,n: vacanassapi garubhavo na
hoti); Sn 265 (-o ca nivato ca); Th 278 (yassa
sabrahmacarisu -o nüpalabbhati); Ja I 465,11 (acariye
-ena papakammato pi viramitva); Ap 389,15 (satthu
0
-taya); 438,11 (saha avajjite thüpe -3111 hoti me tada)
quoted Sadd 255,21; Sp 1315,11 (yo buddhe dharamane
46 gahita
upa!!hiin3111 na gacchati ... n' atth' etassa buddhe -o ti
veditabbo ); Ps III 244,23 (kh!Q.asavan3111 hi Usu ratanesu
mahant3111 -a111 hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se mahanto -o);
Pv-a 121,29 (bhante ti devaputt3111 -ena alapati);
Sadd 791,13 (-o -3111); - ifc see garu- (sv garu 2),
1
dhamma- (sv dhamma ); 2. (n.) heaviness;
Vism 636,1 (tassa... nisinnassa kayacittanaq¡ n' eva
daratho na -a111 na kakkha)ata na akammaññata ... ) :f.
Nidd-a II 106,18 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee na garavakakkhalata)
:f. Pa!is-a 589,37 ("-ta); - 3. (mfn.) respectful; full of
esteem; Vin V 161,31* (niray3111 gacchati dummedho na
ca sikkhaya -o, or noun? Sp 1362,28: so khato
upahatindriyo paññayabhavato dummedho tlsu sikkhasu
asikkhanato na ca sikkhaya garavo kayassa bheda
nirayam eva upagacchati); - ifc see tibba-, dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ - 0 adhivacana, n., a respectful form of
address; Nidd I 142,26 (bhagava ti -aq¡); Sp 198,5
(bhante ti -am eta111); - agarava, m. and mfn., l. (m.)
lack of reverence; disrespect; V in V 92,1 foil. (katame
cha -a, buddhe -o dhamme -o ... ) :f. D III 244,12foll.;
Th 966 (-o ca kasave tada tesa111 bhavissati); Ja V
437,15' (patimhi -en' eva ... aticarinl hoti); Sv 1034,33
(ekabhikkhusmi111 pi hi -e kate sailghe -o kato va hoti);
Ps 1 110,35 (unnatappadese nisinno -3111 pakaseti); -
2. (mfn.) disrespectful; lacking reverence; D III 244,12
(bhikkhu satthari -o viharati appatisso); M 1 469,11
(sabrahmacañsu -o hoti appatisso); A III 7,2o; Th 953
(aññamañña111 -a); Ja V 435,12* (aticarinl hoti tath' eva
-a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se apetagarava); Dhs 1325
( ... anadarata --ta appa!issavata aya111 vuccati
dovacassata); Vibh-a 507,12foll.; - sagarava, mfn.,
respectful; showing reverence; V in I 45,29 (aññamaññ3111
-a sappatissa sabhagavuttino viharanta); D III 244,n;
A 111 331,21 * (hiri-ottappasampanno sappa!isso -o);
Vv 16:12 (-a sirimato dhammarajino; Vv-a 86,1 foll.:
sirimato dhammarajino ti bhummatthe samivacan3111);
Th 589 (buddhesu --ta); Ja II 348,15* (yatha pi je!!ha
bhaginl kanighaka -a hoti sakamhi sarnike); IV 283,3
(rajagatena bahumanena -ena nis!di); Ap 329,13 (sissa
sabbe -a); Vism 36,4* (supesala hotha sada -a); -
sugarava111 in Ee, Se at Sp 1101,31 is wr; read mama ca
tumhesu garavaq¡janayittha with Be, Ce.
garahiya, n. [from garahati], censure, dispraise;
Dhatum 881 (h!)a -e).
garugaravayutto in Ee at It-a I 6,2 is wr for
garubhavayutto (Be, Ce, Se, Ud-a 24,9 so).
garugul}.ayogato in Ee at It-a 1 6,3 is wr for garu- (Be, Ce,
Se, Ud-a 24,9 so).
gaJava, m. [S. lex. galava], the lodh tree, Symplocos
racemosa Roxb.; Abh 556 (-o tu ca loddo ).
gaJeti, se e sv galati 1.
gaJha, mfn., pp of gahati qv.
gaJhaka, mfn. [ga)ha + ka2], firm, strong;
acc. -3111, adv., firmly, strongly; Ja 1 265,4 (-3111 g3l).hi,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ga)h3111).
gaJhita, mfn. [= ga)ha? cfatiga)hita and S. ga"ha, gahita],
pervaded, penetrated (by); ? pressed together, ? Th 568
(pubbaruhirasampUQ.Q.O güthaküpena -o . . . kayo sada
sandati pütika111, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se güthaküpe niga)hiko;
Th-a II 244,12{oll.: güthaküpena -o ti vaccaküpena
gavatika
vaccen' eva va bharito; guthakupanigajhito ti pi paji,
vaccaküpato nikkhanto ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce güthaküpe
nigajhito ti pi paji; Ee guthakupe nigajhiko ti ...
guthaküpena gajhito ti pi pali ... ).
gavatika in Ee at Ps IV 156,7 is wr for gavutika qv.
gavi, f [a specifically f fonn produced from go qv;
AMg id.], a cow; Abh 498 (-1 ca singin1 go ca); V in I
193,12 (sa -1 vacchagiddhini tarp papabhikkhurp pitthito
pitthito anubandhi); III 144,35 (manussa ... -1 pi disva
palayanti bhikkhü ti maññamana); D II 244,19 (dakkho
goghatako ... -irp vadhitva); MI 343,36 (ekissa -iya
sariipavacchaya yarp ekasmirp thane kh1rarp hoti tena
raja yapeti); A IV 138,5 H vajjha aghatanarp
niyyamana); Vv 21 :4 (tam enarp avadhi -1 ca1,1galirp);
Thi 440 (so 'harp tato cavitva goviil,lijakassa -iya jato
vaccho); Ja III 355,14 (aharp maharaja akiñcano
pabbajito na me -Ihi attho ti); V 105,25* (c~ga atanaka
-I yarp pure na duhamase, Be, Ce so; Ee atanakagav1; Se
akatthana -1); Ap 320,16 H yatha vacchagiddha evaharp
vicinirp jinarp); Vism 108,12 (-1 vi ya vaje pavesetva);
Ps II 258,22 (aññesarp -!su attano gog~arp paviqhasu);
Dhp-a I 396,6 (-1narp vajato nikkhamitva); Ud-a 22,22
(-!su duyhamanasu gato duddhasu agato; quoted
Sadd 241,16: gosu); Pj II 323,24 (-iyo ghateturp); 323,33
(-imhi sattharp nipat! ti); V v-a 308,16 (-iyo
masakkhettarp pavisanti); Sadd 208,34 foil.; 209,13 foil.
gavmp, sg. acc. of go qv.
gavuta, n. [AMg gauya; cf S. gavyüta, gavyuti, goyuta], a
measure of length (one quarter of a yojana qv ); (being)
a gavuta in extent; loe. -e, at a distance of a gavuta;
Abh 196 (-am usabhas!ti yojanarp catugavutarp); Ja I
57,12 (catusu disasu -e -e arakkharp !hapesi); Bv 23:27
(tatth' eva tassa thüpavaro -arp nabham uggato);
Vism 118,8 (yo añño -e va agghayojane va yojanamatte
2 t~hamanadighigaha
pi va sappayo viharo hoti); Kkh 140,25 (-ato
atirekappamiil,le); Sp 813,17 (-e pi bhuñjiturp vaqati);
PsI 79,12 ( -mattarp ekapathen' eva agamarpsu);
0
II 101,16 (imissa gañgaya gambh!raghanarp -arp pi atthi
agghayojanarp pi yojanarp pi); 188,24 (bodhim~gato hi
Gaya ti1,1i -ani); V 103,2 (manussaparisa -arp ahosi
devaparisa yojanika); Spk I 348,21 (-arp pi
agghayojanarp pi tigavutarp pi yojanarp pi vicaritva);
II 153,18 (0 -mattarp pi addhanarp gantvana hatthapada
s!danti); Dhp-a I 396,2 (cüjavajassa dvararp vivaritva tisu
-esu tisso bheriyo gahetva titthatha); 396,6 (gav!narp
vajato nikkhamitva -arp gatakale);- see also tigavutika
(sv ti\
gavutika, mfn. rJrom gavuta], extending for a gavuta, a
gavuta in extent; Sv 284,9 (sañkho -o elo aggha-
yojaniko); Ps IV 156,7 (petanagarani ca -ani pi aggha-
yojanikani pi petabharitani honti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
gavatikani).
gavo,pl. nom./acc. ofgo qv.
gaha 1, m. [cf S. gaha ?], hiding-place, retreat; or diving in,
penetrating; MI 153,21 (app eva nama tatiyanarp
migajatanarp asayarp passeyyama yattha te -arp
2 matugamavasena -arp sarakkhasarp, Be, Se so; Ce omits
gaccheyyun ti; or rather to gaha ?; cfPs II 161,24foll.:
yattha te ti yasmirp thane te -arp agamarpsu tarp !hanarp
addasarpsü ti attho);- see also gadhi.
gaha 2, mfn. and m. (and n.) [S. graba], l. (mfn.) seizing;
47 gaha
holding; - rfc see asi- (sv asi\ ahi-, dabbi-, dhura-,
rasmi-; - 2. (m.n.) (i) seizing; seizure; getting hold of;
taking, taking up; receiving; Abh 762 (gaho -e); MI
153,21 (app eva nama tatiyanarp migajatanarp asayarp
passeyyama yattha te -arp gaccheyyun ti; or perhaps to
gaha 1; cfPs II 161,24 foil.: yattha te ti yasmirp thane te
-arp agamarpsu tarp thanarp addasarpsü ti attho );
Sp 594,2 (yadi -o adhikar~arp nama eko attadanarp
gahetva ... ; Sp-! [Be] II 353,14: -an ti asukarp codessam!
ti manasa codanaya gah~am; Vjb [Be] 198,23: -an ti
aharp codessam! ti attadanaggah~arp); Ps III 234,3
(ayarp vado ito e' ito ca sandhavati -arp na upagacchati
amaravikkhepo ti vuccati); Nidd-a I 418,2o (amaro nama
maccho .. . ito e' ito ca dhavati -arp na gacchati);
Mhv 18:65 (-ato sattarasame divase);- ifc see avaqa-
3
(sv avatta\ kata- (sv kata ), katacchu-, karamara-, kali-,
gala- (;v gala ), jaya-, J!va-, ~aya-, nama- (sv nama\
2
padakkhi1,1a-, bhüta- (sv bhavati), yakkha-, salaka-
(sv salaka), hattha-; - (ii) seizure by a planet, eclipse;
(the appearance of an influential planet; a sign of amen
in the sky ?); Ja II 428,2 (kirp acariya rattirp te
nakkhattarp dighan ti ama deva ti atthi koci -o ti ama
maharaja ajjarattirp tumhe amittavasarp gantva
muhutten' eva mutta ti); - ifc see canda-, nakkhatta-,
suriya-; - (iii) holding an opinion or belief; a
conception, notion strongly held; conviction; standpoint,
Ja II 387,16 (sace tumbe attano -arp vissajjetha); Nidd I
50,z (ya evarüpa diqhi dighigatarp . . . -o patiggaho
abhiniveso ... ; Nidd-a I 163,2: surpsumaradayo vi ya
purisarp aramm~arp dajharp g~hati ti -o) t Dhs 381
(ya . . . dinhi dit!higatarp . . . -o patiggaho . . . ayarp ...
micchadit!hi hoti) t Vibh 145,6; Vism 637,16 (tayo -a);
Ps V 100,15 (ayarp hi desana ti1,11,1arp -anarp vasena
vagarp dasseturp araddha . . . etarp mama ti adisu
va veditabba); Spkii 31,1
(pucchitapucchitaghane pana -am eva nisedhetabbarp,
Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se gah~am); 345,21 (-ena va
takkena va uppannaditthi); Dhp-a IV l00,1s (yassa ahan
ti va maman ti va -o natthi);- ifc see atta- (sv atta[n]),
aviruddha- (sv virujjhati), ekarpsa- (sv eka), odhi-,
vipañta-; see also antaggahika (sv anta\
ekarpsagahika (sv eka), viparltagahi(n);
(iv) apprehending; Spk III 4,19 (ime pana dve -a
ekajavanavare pi labbhanti); - ifc see anuvyañjana-
(sv anuvyañjana\ nimitta-; - 3. (m.) "a seizer", a
rapacious water-creature; Ps II 259,31 ([gaviyo]
sagaharp gambh!rarp tittharp oti1,11,1a kumbh!ladayo -a
2
g~hanti); - see also gaha ; - gaharakkhasa in Ee at
It-a II 170,13 foll. is perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se gaha-; -
gahanakkhattataraka in Ee at Ud-a 98,14 is prob. wr;
read laddhanama gahanakkhattataraka with Be, Ce, Se;
- niggaha\ mfn., free from rapacious water-creatures;
Ps II 259,28 (tittharp ... sagahan ti va -an ti va na janati)
= Mp V 89,2o; - sagaha, mfn., containing rapacious
water-creatures; S IV 157,9 (atari cakkhusamuddarp
sa-ümirp savagarp -arp sarakkhasarp; Spk III 3,9:
-arp; Ee sagahasarakkhasarp); Ps II 259,28 = Mp V 89,zo;
- sagaho in Ee at It-a II l66,1s is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se,
It 114,5: sagaho.
gahmp
gahaq¡, ind., l).amul absol. of gal).hati qv.
gahaka, m., gahika, f [S. grahaka, grahika], (one) who
receives, a recipient; one who holds; V in I 307,13
(vassai]1 vuttho bhikkhu anuppanne clvare pakkamati,
sante patirüpe -e databbai]l); Sp 1143,27 (sati -e);
Sv 438,32 (na tesaq¡ -a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gahaka) =
Ps IV 185,5; - ifc see asi- (sv asi2), il).a-, katacchu-,
khagga-, camara-, camarachatta-, camari-, chatta-,
talaval).ta- (sv tala\ valavljanl- (sv vala 1).
gahati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gahate; Wg § 16:48: gahü vilo<;lane],
penetrates; plunges into; disturbs; Dhatup 349 (gaha
viloJane); Dhatum 504; Sadd 458,2o (gahü vilo!ane:
-ati); - absol. gahitva, Mhv 5:255 (janumattaq¡ jalaiJ1
raja -itva); - pp gaJha, mfn. [S. ga<;[ha], l. plunged in,
immersed in; Th-a 111 170,2o (pagiJ:!ho labhasakkare ti
labhe ca sakkare ca tal).havasena pakarato -o ogaJho);-
2. tight, ji171l; strong; vehement; A 11 174,2 (tam enaiJ1
aññataro -o rogataiJ.ko phusati); III 257,7 (-ai]l
rogataiJ.kaq¡ phusati); Ja III 297,17* (pure visai]1 -am
upeti maccaiJ1); Pet 60,11 * ( -ai]l karoti bandhanaiJ1, Be,
Ee so; Ce da!haq¡; quoting Dhp 349: eds d~haiJ1);
Sp 82,5 (thero amhe -ena ovadena ovadati); Ud-a 229,29
(-aq¡ rogataiJ.kaq¡ papul).ati); Ap-a 66,36 (ayaq¡ kappana
ativiya -a); - acc. -aq¡, instr. -ena, adv., (i) strongly,
firmly; vehemently; too ji171lly; M III 159,25 (puriso
ubhohi hatthehi vagakaq¡ -ai]l gal).heyya, so tatth' eva
patameyya); Ja I 291,7 (ubhohi hatthehi pade -ai]l
gahetva); Vism 105,24 (dosacarito -ai]l sammajjaniq¡
gahetva); Sp663,19 (-aq¡ p!Jiyamana); Sv1047,2 (-ena
pharusena kakkhaJena vuccamano); - (ii) deeply; very
much; Mil 370,25 (kummo ... tatth' eva nimujjati -ai]l
ogahati); - -'-üpalepana, mfn., smeared with a thick
ointment; thickly smeared; M 11 216,6 (puriso sallena
viddho assa savisena -'-üpalepanena; Ps IV 2,11joll.:
bahalüpalepanena punappunaq¡ visarañjitena) = 256,28 =
259,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gaJhupalepanena); -
--tara, mfn., ji171ler, stronger; --taraq¡, more ji171lly; Ja I
490,1 (muggarai]l .. . --tarai]l aggahesi); Sp 228,5
(anuppaññatti ... --taraq¡ karontl uppajjati, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr karonti);- --palepana, mfn., smeared with a
thick ointment; thickly smeared; M I 429,3 (sallena ...
savisena --palepanena; Ps III 142,6: bahalalepanena);-
--bandhanaq¡, ind., (with) a ji171l binding; so as to be
firmly bound; Ja V 461,11 (atha naiJ1 senapati
--bandhanam eva sayapetva); - esp. --bandhanaiJ1
bandhati, binds fast, ties up tightly; Vin I 344,19
(Dlghitiq¡ KosalarajiinaiJ1 . . . da!haya rajjuya
pacchabahai]l --bandhanaq¡ bandhitva) t Ja I 264,7; DI
245,10 (so . . . da!haya anduya pacchabahaiJ1
--bandhanaq¡ baddho); S IV 344,8 (dissati ... ekacco
daJhaya rajjuya pacchabahaiJ1 --bandhanaq¡
bandhitva ... slsaiJ1 chijjamano); Cp 3:2:13 (tesahaiJ1
evam avacai]l bandhatai]l --bandhanaq¡; Cp-a 192,6:
--bandhanaq¡ bandhantanaiJ1 tesaq¡ karal).ikapurisiinaiJ1);
- --vedhi(n), mfn. [ga!ha + vedhi[n]\ piercing deeply;
Ja I 155,10* (dhi-r-atthu kal).<;linaq¡ sallaiJ1 purisai]1
--vedhinaq¡; 155,18·: mahantai]l val).amukhai]l katva
balavappaharaiJ1 dento ga!haq¡ vijjhat! ti --vedhi); -
agiJ:!ha in Ee, Se at Pp 32,34 (aga!hena) is wr for
agiJ:!ha qv; - atigaJha, mfn. [S. atiga<;lha], very ji171l or
48 gijjha
tight; too firm or tight; Ja I 62,7 (ayaiJ1 kappana atigiJ:!ha,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atida!ha) = Bv-a 282,4; Vism !06,1
(clvaradharanaiJ1 pi ca ragacaritassa natigiJ:!haq¡ nati-
sithilaq¡ hoti); Mp 111 390,11 (accaraddhan ti atiga!haiJ1);
-se e also ajjhagahayi, atiga!hita, gadha.
gahana, n. [from gal).hati], handing over, distributing; (or
taking, receiving; ?)- ifc see salaka- (sv salaka); -
gahanaq¡ in Ee at Spk III 54,4 is prob. wr; read maha-
samuddogahana-ajapathasaiJ.kupathapatipajjana-ubhato-
vyü!hasangamapakkhandanadivasen a with Be.
gahanaka, (mj)n., getting hold of; fastening; ? - ifc se e
chattadal).<;la- sv eh atta 1.
gahana, f [cf gahal).a; cf also S. grahi(n)], grasping,
comprehending; scrutinizing; ? Pet 122,21 (khandhesu va
dhatüsu va . . . vicayo . . . vlmaiJ1sa . . . -a aggahana
pariggahana ... ).
gahapacca, m(jn). (scil. aggi) [S. garhapatya], the
householder' s jire (one of the three fires of brahminical
ritual); Abh 419 (gahapaccahavanlyo dakkhil).aggl tayo
'ggayo).
gahapaka, m(jn). f!rom gahapeti, caus. of gal).hati qv],
(one) who causes (something) to be taken; (one) who
distributes; Mp III 334,5 (vassikasatikaya -o); It-a 11
152,34 (samadapaka ti citte patighapanavasena tass' eva
atthassa -a); - ifc see patisandhi-, patta- (sv patta\
salaka- (sv salaka), satika- (sv satika); - see also
gal).hapaka.
gahapana, n. f!rom gahapeti, caus. of gal).hati qv], causing
to take, accept, obtain; Spk I 174,13 (pade pakkhaletva ti
utuq¡ o• -atthaq¡ dhovitva, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
utugahapanatthai]1); Mp 11 239,4 (vassiko [pasado]
sattabhümako ahosi, bhümiyo pan' ettha dvinnaiJ1 pi
utünai]l o• -atthaya nati-ucca natinlca akai]lSU); Pj 11 286,2
(vañcananl ti asUVal).l).aq¡ SUVal).l).an ti o• -adlni); - see
also gal).hapana.
gahapeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of gal).hati qv.
gahi, imperat. 2 sg., see sv gayati.
gahi(n), mfn. [S. grahin], seizing, grasping; holding;
taking, receiving; apprehending; - ifc see anuvyañjana-
(sv anuvyañjana\ apal).l).akaggaha-, adhana-, uda-
(sv uda3), udaka-, dughulla- (sv dughulla\ nimitta-,
appatikülagahita (sv patiküla), padakkhil).a-, piya-,
salaka- (sv salaka).
gaheta(r), m. f!rom gaheti, caus. of gal).hati qv], one who
causes to take or be taken; one who teaches; Ps I 111,24
(bhavai]l tesaiJ1 Gotamo samadapeta ti, te kulaputte
bhavaiJ1 Gotamo adhislladlni -a sikkhapeta).
gaheti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of gal).hati qv.
giligamaka, n. [?], a kind of necklace; Abh 289
(uggatthanai]l -aq¡; Abh-sücl: battiq¡sayaghiko hara-
bhedo adina aghahara miil).avako ekavall nakkhatta-
maladayo harabhedo ca gayhanti); Ja VI 590,11*
(uggatthanai]l -ai]l . . . sassü SUI).haya pahesi; 590,26·:
etani pi dve abharal).iini).
giijha, m. and mfn. [S. grdhra], l. (m.) a vulture; Abh 637
(-o gaddho); Vin 111 105,37 (tam enaq¡ -a pi kaka pi
kulala pi... vitacchenti; Sp 507,13joll.: ete pi
yakkhagijjha e' eva yakkhakaka ca yakkhakulala ca
paccetabba) = S 11 255,13; MI 364,28 (-o va kaiJ.ko va
kulalo va maiJ1sapesiq¡ adaya u<;l<;layeyya); Sn 201 (kaka
gijjhati
-a ca khadanti); Ja II 51 ,25* (yannu -o yojanasatarp.
km-_¡apani avekkhati kasmajalaJ11 ca pasarp. ca asajjapi na
bujjhasi); V 302,s• (slvathikaya majjhe padehi -a
parika99hayanti); Kv 136,34 (amo kayo ... kakehi -ehi
kulalehi sadharaJ.lO ti); Ps 11 63,25 foll. (Gijjhakü~e
pabbate ti tassa pabbatassa o -sadisa111 kü~arp. atthi ... -a
va tassa kü~esu nivasantl ti pi Gijjhakü~o ti vuccati);
Sadd 484,26 (gijjhati -o gaddho ); - 2. (mfn.) greedy for,
eagerly desiring; Ja V 256,29' (giddha ce na vamissantl ti
yadi -a hutva kame na vamissanti na cha99essanti, Ee
so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se giddha hutva); - ife see
kama-;- see also gaddha, giddha1 (sv gijjhati).
giijhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. grdhyati], eovets, eagerly desires; is
greedy (jor, loe.); Dhatup 423 (gidha abhikailkhayaJ11);
Dhatum 661; Sadd 484,26 (gidhu abhikailkhaya111: -ati
gijjho); Nidd I 12,3 (anugijjhatl ti kilesakamena
vatthukamesu -ati anugijjhati paligijjhati ... ; Nidd-a I
55,16: -an ti kilesakamena pattheti); As 363,1o (imina
satta -anti gedharp. apajjantl ti gedho );
pp (a) giddha\ mfn. [S. grddha (and grdhra)], (aet.)
eagerly desiring; hungry, greedy (jor, loe.); Abh 729 (-o
tu luddho lo lo); A III 68,13 (itthirüpe ... satta ratta -a
gadhita mucchita ajjhopanna); Sn 774 (kamesu -a pasuta
pamü)ha; Pj II 516,n: kamesu paribhogataJ.lhaya -a);
Pv 41:2 (paccuppanne sukhe -a na te passiJ11SU
'nagataJ11); Th 63 (cuta patanti patita -a ca punar agata;
Th-a I 155,2: -a ti gedharp. apanna); Ja III 243,19* (satta
sakaye na jahanti -a); IV 373,23* foll. (ranhesu -a rajano
kiccakiccesu brahmaJ.la isl mülaphale -a vippamutta ca
bhikkhavo ); V 255,24* (-a ce na vamissanti, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se giddhl; 256,29·: yadi -a hutva kame na vamissanti
na cha99essanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gijjha hutva);
VI 268,29* (sa Pu~~ako kamavegena -o, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se kamaragena -o); Vism 346,4 (ratto -o gadhito);
Pv-a 271,1 (abare -a abhigijjhanta hutva); - neg.
agiddha, mjn., not greedy; free from greed; Sn 210
(vltagedho agiddho); Th 923 (yapanattharp. abhuñjiJ11SU
agiddha nadhimucchita); Ja II 293,15* (tasma mattaññuta
sadhu bhojanasmi111 agiddhata, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
agiddhita); VI 101 ,1s· (isayo jivhaviññeyyarase agiddha);
Nidd I 53,29 (rüpe agiddho sadde agiddho . . . agadhito
amucchito ... ); - see also apihagidha (sv piha); -
sugiddha, mfn., very greedy; Sn 248 (ete sugiddha
viruddhatipatino, so read? eds etesu giddha); -
pp (b) giijhita, mfn., (pass.) greedily desired; Th! 152
(patthita rajaputtehi senhiputtehi -a; Th!-a 134,3o:
abhigijjhita paccas1sita); - see also gaddheti, gadhita,
gedhita, pa~igiddha.
giijhana, n. [from gijjhati], eager desire; the being greedy
(jor); Nidd-a I 171,22 (0 -vasena gedho); 434,5 (aharp. hi
ima111 akassanasailkhatarp. taJ.1haJ11 rüpad1su -ato gedha111
brümi).
giñjaka, f [?], a briek; a ti/e; Abh 220 (-a tu ca i~~aka);
Sv-ppi 180,27 foll. (-a vuccanti i~~aka, -ahi eva kato
avasatho ti giñjakavasatho); - ife see bhañjita-
(sv bhañjati\ - o• -avasatha, m., the briek hall; V in I
232,32 (tatra sudaJ11 bhagava Ñatike viharati -e) = D II
91,21 t- MI 205,16 =S 11 74,14 (Spk II 75,3: inhakahi kate
mahapasade).
gi1,1iiti, gi1,1oti, girati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. -vlgf, g~ati,
49 gimha
Wg § 31:28], makes a sound; speaks; Dhatup 510 (gi
sadde); 517; Dhatum 710 (gi saddane); Ap-a 390,7 (girati
saddaJ11 karotl ti giri, ko so, silapaJ11sumayapabbato, Be,
Se so; Ce giri, kiJ11 ta111; Ee giñ ti saddarp. karotl ti giri,
kin tarp. ... ); Sadd 493,23 (ge sadde: -oti -ati); -pass.
pr. 3 sg. ginyati, is spoken; As 324,31 (giriyatl ti gira, Ee,
Se so; Ce, Be giñyatl ti).
gitena in Ee at Ja V 330,7• is wr for gltena (Be, Ce, Se so).
giddha\ mjn., pp of gijjhati qv.
giddha 2 , m. (or n.) [from gijjhati ?], hungry desire; eager
desire; Ja VI 555,31' (matugiddhino ti matari -ena
samannagata ba1avasineha eva111 vilapiJ11sü ti);
Ap-a 192,27 (gedha111 akaran ti -arp. akaronto tai,lharp.
anuppadento ti attho, Ee so, prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
giddhiJ11; = Pj II 118,7 and Nidd-a II 144,3: giddhiJ11);-
ife see vigata1obha- (sv vigacchati).
giddhi, f [AMg id.; BHS grddhi; efS. grdhya], greed;
hungry desire; Ja V 343,14* (hotu -i tavasmasu; 343,2o·:
mayi 1obharp. uppadehl ti vadati); Pj II 118,7 (gedhaJ11
akaran ti -i111 akaronto tai,lharp. anuppadento ti attho) =
Nidd-a II 144,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -i111 gedhanaJ11) =
Ap-a 192,27 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee giddharp., prob. wr);
Sadd 487,15 (lubha -iyarp.); - 0 -gata, mfn., eagerly
desiring; Ja IV 329,19* (ahaJ11 pure -o kapotiya); -
0
-ma(t), mjn., fnll of greed; eagerly desiring; - ife see
kama-, rasa-; - agiddhima(t), mfn., not greedy; Ja II
294,s· (agiddhita pi sadhu, pa)iyarp. pana agiddhima ti
likhitarp., tato ayarp. anhakathapa~ho va sundarataro, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce agiddhata pi sadhu);- 0 -mana, m. (or n.)
[giddhi + mana 1], greed and pride; Sn 328 (kuhanarp.
-a111 ... hitva; Pj 11 334,19: paccayesu giddhi jati-ad!hi
mano); - 0 -lobha, m. greed and eovetousness; greedy
desire; M I 360,25 (agiddhilobhaJ11 nissaya -o pahatabbo;
Ps III 39,4: gedhabhüto lobho pahatabbo); Ps III 41,14
(appamattakarp. pi -arp. akaraJ.lasasane pabbajitva); -
agiddhilobha, m.,jreedomfrom greed and eovetousness;
MI 360,25; - 0 -lobhi(n), mfn., greedy and eovetous;
greedily desiring; M 1 362,22 (yesarp. ... saJTlyojananaJTI
hetu -1 assarp.);- agiddhi1obhi(n), mjn., not greedy and
eovetous; M I 362,29 (agiddhilobhissa); - see also
gedhi.
giddhi(n), mfn. [S. grddhin, grdhnin], greedy for; eagerly
longing for; - ife see kama-, vaccha-; - see also
agiddhita, gedhi(n).
giddhika, mfn. [giddhi(n) + ka2], greedy; eagerly desiring;
0
- -ta,f, 0 -tta, n., abstr., greed; eager desire; Ja VI
213,23* (vaca kata 0 -ta gah!ta; 216,n·joll.: labha-
giddhikataya brahma~ehi gahita); Vibh 351,31 ( ... ke)ana
parike)ana 0 -ta 0 -ttaJTI capalata capalyaJ11, idaJ11 vuccati
capalyarp.; Vibh-a 477,29: 0 -ta ti gedhayuttata, 0 -ttan ti
tass' eva vevacanarp.; t- Nidd I 380,17: Be, Ce gedhitata
gedhitattarp.; Ee, Se gedhikata gedhitattarp.); - see also
gedhika.
*gidha,f [S. *grdhra ?], greed;- see agidha.
gini, m. [ef S. agni], jire; Abh 34 (aggi -i bhanuma);
Sn 18foll. (channa ku~i ahito -i ... viva~a ku~i nibbuto
-i); Ja IV 26,17* (tam eva ka~~arp. 9ahati yasma so jayate
-i; 27,6·: -1 ti aggi); Sadd 184,23joll.;- ife see maha-;
- se e also aggi, aggini.
gimha 1, m. [S. gñ~ma] (pl. loe. -asu, -isu, -esu), l. the
 gimha
hot season, summer; Vin I 79,29 (bhagava tatth' eva
Rajagahe vassaq¡ vasi tattha hemanta~T~ tattha -a~T~);
Nidd I 19,2 (vasse hemante -e); Pa~is I 30,32 (-e pi
asevati); Mi1274,6 (kissa hemante suriyo ka~ina~T~ tapati
no tatha -e ti); Vism 620,34 (hemante pavattarüpaq¡ -aq¡
appatva tatth' eva niruddhaq¡); Sp 1033,29 (vassano
hemanto -o ti eva~T~ utuppamiilJaq¡ acikkhitabbaq¡);
Spk 11 351,9 (yaq¡ ... -e ca uppannaiTI slta~T~); - 2. a
summer month; (pl.) the (four months ofthe) hot season;
Vin III 70,22 (-anaq¡ pacchime mase iihata~T~ rajojalla~T~;
Sp 404,13: asa!hamase); 252,34 (maso seso -anan ti
bhikkhuna vassikasa~ikacivaraiTI pariyesitabbaq¡;
Sp 719,29: catunnaiTI 0 -masanaiTI eko pacchimamaso
seso); MI 79,26 (-ana~T~ pacchime mase diva abbhokase
viharami ratti~T~ vanasal)qe); A IV 138,28 (utusata~T~
hemantiina~T~ utusataq¡ -anaiTI utusata~T~ vassana~T~);
Sn 233 (-ana mase pa~hamasmi~T~ -e; Pj I 192,9 foil.: ye
cattaro -iina~T~ masa tesaiTI catunnaq¡ o -masanaq¡
ekasmi~T~ mase, katamasmi~T~ mase iti ce, pa~hamasmi~T~
-e, citramase ti attho, so hi pa~hamagimho ti ca
balavasanto ti ca vuccati, Be so; Ce, Ee cattaro gimhana-
masa . . . catunnaiTI gimhananaiTI; Se gimhamasa ...
gimhiina~T~); Vv 79:6; Ja IV 463,22* (aggi~T~ va -asu
vivajjayantu, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -esu); V 63,10* (yatha pi
rammako maso -iina~T~ hoti); Dlp 1:58 ühite majjhantike
kii1e -anaiTI suriyo yatha); - ifc see agga- (sv agga\
hemanta-; - 3. the heat of summer; heat; Sn 233 (-ana
mase pa~hamasmi~T~ -e); Spk 1 210,32 (ghammani ti -e);
0
- iibhitatta, mfn., heated by the summer heat;
Vism 231,12 (-iina~T~ kunnadinaiTI khayo viya); -
0
-klila, m. [gimha + kala1], the hot season; Ja V 38,26 (-e
udakavataiTI sampa~icchamano ); Mp 11 319,2 (-asmi~T~);
Vism 343,18 (-e vatavegena samuqhitehi paiTlsUtil)a-
rajehi okil)l)asarirena caritabba~T~); Saddh 275 (piyo ...
-e va ambudo);- 0 -nibbapana, n., co,oling; dispersing
heat; Ap 211,6 (tiilaval)~aiTI maya dinnaq¡ ... -' -atthaya).
gimha 2, mfn. [cfS. grai~ma], belonging to the summer;
jlowering in summer; Ja VI 534,32* (paduma ... dissare
-a hemantika phulla; 535,3·: -e ca hemantike ca
pupphitapaduma, Be so; Ce, Ee -ehi ca hemantikehi ca;
Se gimhe ca hemante ca supupphita paduma).
gimhlina, m. or n. [prob. from pl. gen. of gimha1,
cfSn 233: gimhana mase; cf also S. grai~mayal)a], the
hot season: a month of the hot season; Abh 78 (caturo
caturo masa ... hemantagimhanavassana utuyo); V in III
253,14 (arena ce maso seso gimhanan ti atirekamase sese
-e vassikasa~ikac!varaq¡ pariyesati); Spk 11 351,12 (yaq¡
-e Ul)ha~T~ ta~T~ utusamughanika~T~ paka~ikam eva); Pj I
192,10 (ye cattaro -masa, tesaq¡ catunnaq¡ -anaq¡
0
ekasmi~T~ mase, Ce, Ee so; Be cattaro gimhanaiTI masa .. .
catunnaq¡ gimhamasiina~T~; Se cattaro gimhamasa .. .
catunna~T~ gimhanaq¡); Dlp 15:1 (-e pa~hame mase
pUI)l)amase uposathe).
gimhika, mfn. [from gimha 1; AMg gimhaa], belonging to
the hot season; for the hot season; Vin 1 15,3 (tassa tayo
pasada honti, eko hemantiko eko -o eko vassiko) f. D 11
21,8 f. MI 504,26 (Ps III 214,16: -e thambhii pi bhittiyo pi
ucca honti, dvaravatapanani pan' ettha bahiini
vipu1aja1ani bhavanti ... ) f. A I 145,18 (Mp II 238,17: -o
pana pañcabhiimako ahosi); Sp 772,14 (cattaro hemantike
50 giri
cattaro ca -e aqha mase).
girm,1a, n. [cf S. gira!) a, "swallowing"], ejecting from the
mouth, oozing; ? Dhatup 483 (gira -e); Th-a I 240,24
(se1o hi .. . pasavanadivasena ja1assa sarabhiitiina~T~
bhesajjadivatthiinaiTI ca -ato giri ti vuccati, Be, Se so; Ee
girikaral)ato giñ ti; Ce passaval)adivasena jalasaya-
sarabhiitiinaq¡ . . . -ato giñ ti; cfSadd 429,10: gira
niggiral)e, niggiral)aq¡ paggharal)aq¡) f. Sadd 429,14
(himavamanadivasena jalassa ... ); - see also girati 2,
gilana.
gira ti\ pr. 3 sg., se e sv gil)ati.
girate, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. girati, Wg § 28:117: gf nigaral)e],
swallows; ejects from the mouth; oozes; ? Dhiitup 483
(gira gira~Je); Dhatum 558 (giro nigara~Jadisu);
Sadd 429,1o (gira niggiral)e, niggiral)aq¡ paggharal)am:
-ati giri, Be, Ee so; vl nigiral)aq¡);- see also gi1ati.
girassa in E e, Se at Sp 831,34 is wr for girissa (Be, Ce so).
gira, f (and gira, n. ?) [AMg gira; S. gir], verse; speech,
words; voice; Abh 105 (vaca -a vacl); V in IV 2,16 (vaca
-a vyapatho vacibhedo ... ); D II 256,12* (y e vo 'haq¡
kittayissami -ahi anupubbaso; Sv 685,32: -iihi ti
vacanehi); Dhp 408 (akakkasaq¡ viññapani~T~ -aq¡
saccaq¡ udiraye); Sn 350 (khippam -aq¡ eraya vaggu
vagguq¡; Pj 11 349,14: vacanaiTI bhasa); Vv 50:18 (-aq¡
sul)itvana nelaq¡ atthavatiq¡ suciq¡); Thi 316 (kassa tvaq¡
dhammam aññaya -a~T~ bhasasi edisa~T~); Jall 134,1* (na
kho pan' etaq¡ subhal)aq¡ -a~T~ saccupasaq¡hitaq¡; 134,3':
-an ti vacanaq¡, vacanaiTI hi yatha idani -a evaq¡ tada
-an ti vuccati, so hi sukapotako lingaq¡ anadiyitva evam
aha); V 362,27* (vakkango cajanto manusi~T~ -aq¡);
Ap 22,7 (buddhassa -am aññaya); 472,18 (puthavi ...
vinadi karul)aq¡ -aq¡); Dhs 637; Sv 61,29* (muhutta-
jato . . . Gotamo . . . aghangupetaq¡ -am abbhudirayi);
Ps 11 65,29 (suiTlsumaro sadda~T~ akasi, -a~T~ niccharesi);
Bv-a 61,26 (karavikasakul)assa vi ya madhura -a yassa so
karavikamadhurangiro, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee madhuraq¡
-aq¡); - gira-m-udira1,1a, n., the utterance of speech:
Mil145,23 (natthi buddhanaq¡ bhagavantanaq¡ akara~Jaq¡
ahetukaq¡ -an ti); - 0
-sakhilanelañ ga, mfn. [see
ne1ailga 1 (sv nela 1), nelangi], whose smooth frame is
friendly speech; ? whose interior part is friendly
speech; ? Ja VI 252,22* (kayo te rathasaññato ... -o
mitabhii1Jisi1esito; 253,1s·: -o ti sakhilaya Sal)havacaya
niddosailgo ma!!harathailgo); - sugirli,f, a good
speech; good words; D III 172,23 (avivada-
vaqqhanakariq¡ -aq¡ bhinnanusandhijananiq¡ abhal)i, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr ciraq¡); - see also karavika-
madhurangira (sv karavika).
giri, m. [ts], a mountain; a hill; Abh 605 (pabbato -i selo);
SI 127,15* (-iq¡ nakhena khal)atha); Th 115
(Nesadakena -ina yasassina); 1144 (rammaq¡ -i~T~ pavisi
abbhama1inaq¡); Ja 11 214,8* (tayo -iq¡ antaraiTI
kamayami, <giñn? 214,1z'foll.: tayo -in ti tayo -i,
ayam eva va pa~ho . . . idhiipi tini nagarani tayo -in ti
adhippetani); 219,21* (-i-m-iva anilena duppasaho;
220,4·: yatha pabbato vatena ... duppasaho); V 42,22*
(atikamma so satta -i brahante); 91,16' (-imhi
dibbavimanaq¡); VI 126,7* (Sudassanassa -ino dvaraq¡
h' etaq¡); 568,4* (samanta vijjuta aguq¡ -inaiTI va
pa~issuta); Ap 29,2o (bharito bhavabhiirena -im uccarito
girlyati
yatha, Be, Ee so; Ce Neru~; Se Neru); Vism 340,33'
(yatha va -im arüJho attano yeva jal)l)Uka~ olubbhati);
Spk I 339,26 (ya~ -ino patham~ paribhal)¡;la~);
Cp-a 95,4 (haghatugho -i~ unnadento viya);- giñ ti in
E e at Ap-a 390,7 is prob. wr for gira ti (Be, Ce, Se so);-
1
o• -aggasamaija, m.n. [giri + agga + samajja], a festival
held at Rajagaha; Vin IV 85,12 (Rajagahe -o hoti;
Sp 831,33: -o ti girimhi aggasamajjo girissa va aggadese
samajjo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr girassa va); Ja III 538,9
(--sadisa~ mahanta~ chal) a~ ghosayi~su); Sp 974,n;
Dhp-a I 89,8 (Rajagahe ca anus~vacchara~ -o nama
hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -a~);- 0 -kai.J.I.J.Íkli,f, the plant
Clitoria tematea L.; Ja VI 536,10' (pupphita -a); Ps III
259,21 (girikal)l)ikapupphadini pana dissamanani
setadhatukani honti); Dhp-a I 383,13 (in cpd); -
0
-kai.J.J}.i,f, the blue clitoria, Clitoria tematea L.;
Abh 584 (girikal)l)Y aparajita); - 0
-gabbhara (and
0
-gavhara), n.m. and mfn. l. (n.m.) a mountain cleft or
cave; a thicket on a mountain; D II 255,24' (ye sita -a~;
Sv 684,22: ye hi bhikkhii girikucchinissita ti attho);
Sn 416 (siho va -e; Pj II 384,4: -guhaya~); Vv 63:5
0
(ida~ pi paniya~ sita~ abhata~ -a); Th p. 1,3*
(sihana~ va nadan tan~ dathina~ -e; Th-a I 7,4 foil.: -e
ti pabbataguhay~ ... 0 -gavhare ti keci pathanti,
pabbatesu vanagahane vanasal)¡;le ti attho); Th 1103;
Ap 424,12;- 2. (mfn.) emerging from a mountain cleft;
Ja VI 518,12* (dakkhasi ... nadi~ ... gambhira~ -am;
519,1·: -an ti giñna~ kucchito pavatt~);- 0 -guha,f,
a mountain cleft or cave; a gorge; Vin II 146,7
(bhikkhii . . . viharanti araññe rukkhamiile pabbate
kandaray~ -aya~ susane ... ) f. DI 71,16 (vivitta~
senasana~ bhajati arañña~ ... -a~ ... ) = M 1 269,24 =
A II 210,31 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr giri~ guha~; Mp III
201,14: -an ti dvinna~ pabbatana~ antara~ ekasmi~
yeva va ummaggasadisa~ mahavivara~); Ja IV 286,20*
(te pabbata taca kandara taca -ayo); Mil369,1s (yogina
yogavacarena viveka~ sevitabbam aranna~ ...
kandara~ -a~ susana~ ... ); PsI 122,4 (pabbatantare
gambhiraya ghanavanapaticchannaya -aya);
0
-Cara, mfn. and m., living in the hills, on the mountains;
a mountain-dweller, a monkey; Ja V 71,25* (-o ...
pabbatam aruhi; 74,s·: -o ti giricari vanaro);- --nadiyo
in Ee at Ja IV 287,1• is prob. wr; Be girivana-; Ce
gmvara-; Se girinadiyo; cflV 288,18*: Be
girivananadiyo; Ce, Ee, Se girivara-; - 0 -Cliri(n), mfn.,
living in the hills, on the mountains; Ja V 74,6· (-i
vanaro, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -carivanaro);- 0 -dañ,f, a
mountain cave; Jaiii 331,4* (bharami matapitaro vuddhe
--saye); - 0 -dugga, n., a place in the mountains
difficult of access or passage; difficult terrain; a defile;
Ja III 402,2* (pavisu~ -ani nadin~ pabhavani ca);
IV 195,4* (patito -asmi~ kena tv~ tattha namari);
V 70,12* (so 'h~... appatitthe analambe -asmi
papat~; ?2,2r: girivisame); Ap 300,4 (vematubhatar~
pub be ... pakkhipi~ -asmi~, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -esu);
Cp 2:5:2 (pabbhare -e ca); - 0 -dvara, n., a mountain
approach; a mountain pass; Ja VI 562,30'; 586,3*
(rajaputti -e pattika anupahana);- 0 -nela, m., a kind of
flowering plant or tree;? Ap 201,12 (-assa pupphanam
mutthi~ buddhassa ropayi~); -
0
-punnaga, m., a
51 gilati
plant, the mountain punnaga; its flower; Ja VI 530,2*
(punnaga -a; 531 ,6·: -a ti mahapunnaga) f. Ap 16,s;
Ap 416,13 (gahetva -~);- -bbaja, m. [giri + vaja], a
0
place enclosed by hills or mountains (like a cow-pen); a
dell; Th 1097 (-e; Th-aiii 152,13: -e ti
pabbatakandaraya); Ja III 479,4 foil. (Moggallanatthero
giriparikkhitte ekadvare --senasane vihasi ... eJapalaka
eJaka ettha carantii ti -a~ pavesetva kiJanta viharanti);
V 260,16* (sihasseva -a~; 261,19·: -an ti sihapotikana~
vasanaghana~ kañcanaguha~); VI 589,9* (acari~su
ramaniye -e; 589,16·: ramaniye VaiJ.kagirikucchimhi);-
esp. a name of (the area of) Rajagaha, capital of
Magadha; Vin I 43,16* (agato kho mahasamal)o
Magadhana~ -a~; Sp 976,3o: Magadhana~ janapadassa
-a~ nagara~); MI 31 ,2s (Rajagahe viharami -e; Ps 1
15l,IOfoll.: Rajagahan ti tassa nagarassa nam~,
samantato pana giriparikkhepena vajo viya sal)thitatta
-an ti vuccati); S II 185,21* (Vepullo pabbato maha
uttaro Gijjhakutassa Magadhan~ -e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr -o; Spk II 159,2fo11.: Magadharaghassa -e,
giriparikkhepe thito ti attho ); Ud-a 265,6 (-e puravare );
Utt-vn 783 (kati Vesaliya vutta kati Rajagahe kata ...
dasa Vesaliya vutta ekavisa -e); Dip 5:5 (Magadhan~
-e); - 0
-mallika,f, a kind of tree (Wrightia
antidysenterica); Abh 573 (kutajo -a); Samantak 735 (in
cpd); - 0 -muddha(n), m., the top or crest of a hill or
mountain; Thi 297 (-ani); - 0
-raja, m., "king of
mountains", Mt. Sineru; Ap 21,12 (Ap-a 227,2: -a Meru
pabbataraja); Mi1224,11 (Sineru -a... na kampati);
Ps IV 121,9 (Sineru -a segho mahanto);
0
-Vidugga, n., a place in the mountains difficult of
access or passage; difficult terrain; Ja VI 518,26* (gantva
-ani nadin~ pabhavani ca, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
0
girividuggana~, prob. wr; cf Ja III 402,2* at -dugga
above); - 0 -sanu, m.n., the ridge of a mountain; a
plateau; Ja III 302,13' (--dañsu carati ti --daricaro);
V 4,17* (vyagghi va --ja).
girl'yati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of gil)ati qv.
gilati (and occasionally giJati), pr. 3 sg. [S. girati, gilati],
swallows; devours, eats; Dhatup 488 (gila adane);
Dhatum 386; 563; D II 348,2o (eko akkhadhutto
agatagata~ kali~ -ati); 349,6* (-a re -a papadhuttaka) =
Ja I 380,10* (380,14: -a re ti -ahi are); MI 306,10 (app
eva nam' eta~ maluvabija~ moro va -eyya); Ja II 398,3
(mukhe pakkhipitva -issami nan ti); III 338,17 (eko pana
puriso tetti~saiJ.gul~ tikhil)adhar~ asiratan~ -ati);
V 62,s• (sada ma~ -ati maccu); 452,14* (ta [nariyo] -anti
purisassa pabhata~; 454,21·: dhana~ -anti nasenti);
Ap 379,2 (ajagaro ... kaJevara~ me -ati); Mill06,2o
(puriso ... mukhagat~ bhojana~ -eyya); Sp 286,1o
(ay~ pabbato ime isi -ati ti tad upadaya tassa Isigi1i tv
eva samañña udapadi); Sadd 436,29 (gila ajjhoharal)e:
-ati); - part.pr. (a) gila(t), mfn., D II 349,s• (litta~
paramena tejasa -am akkha~ puriso na bujjhati) = Ja 1
380,9•; Ja I 380,14' (me -ato); (b) gilanta, mf(-anti)n.,
D II 348,zz (addasa kho dutiyo akkhadhutto ta~ akkha-
dhutt~ ... kali~ -ant~); Ja 1 341,26 (-mal)¡;liikiyo
mahante kal)hasappe ... -antiyo addasa~); III 338,3; -
aor. 3 sg. gil!, Ps IV 191,1; 2 sg. gil!, SI 51,13* (ma Rahu
-i cara~ antalikkhe); Dhp 371 (ma lohaguJa~ -i
 52
gitana
pamatto); - inf gilitul!l, Ja IV 383,3-; Mi1312,22; -
absoL gi1itva, Vin II 165,n; Thí 508 (puthu1omo va
baFsal!l -itva); Ja IV 195,11*; Mi1153,5; Spk II 261,27
(ajjhosaya tit\hatl ti -itva parinighapetva gal).hati); -
pass, partpr. gi1iyamana, mfn., Ja I 508,20 (so pathavil!l
phalamanal!l viya . . . pathaviya attanal!l -iyamanal!l
viya . . . samanupassi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se so pathavil!l
gi1amanal!l viya ... ); Nidd-a I 164,l3; - pp gilita, mfn.
[ts ], swallowe d; eaten; Abh 757 (-o khadito bhutto );
Ja II 240,5 (Devadatto pa\haviya -o ti); Ps IV 192,6
(tuyhal!l putto aññena macchena -o bhavissati); Spk II
24,33 (mm.u;lükadayo hi sappadíhi -a antokucchigata pi
kiñci ka1~ jívanti yeva); Dhp-a III 36,1o (imina so ma1fi
-o); - fpp gi1itabba, mfn., Vism 57,7* (aditta gilitabba
ayoguta yena); - caus. pr. 3 sg. gilapeti, Ja III 338,1
(samajj~ karetva asil!l gilitul!l janantena asil!l -ema,
Ce, Ee so; Be -etva; Se janante asil!l -etva); -
absoL gilapetva, Ja II 424,13 (t~ bhal).<)-ik~2 ek~
mahamukh~ macch~ -etva); - see also girati .
gilana, n. [ts], swallowing; eating; Ja I 342,1
(mm;t<)_ükapotikan~ asívise kal).hasappe -ka1o); Dhp-a
0
I eva kalal!l katva); As 250,13 (idal!l pana cittal!l
276,16 (maccho
0
-kale nailgutt h~ ca1esi);
Ud-a 303,2foll. (timil!l -samattha timingala timil!l ca
0
timingalal!l ca o -mattha timitiminga1a ti vadanti); - ifc
2
see asi- (sv asi ), pathaví -;- see also giral).a.
gilabaJisa, mfn. [gi1a(t) + batisa? or cf S. gila ?],
swallowing the hook; who has swallowe d the hook; S II
226,14foll. (maccho -o baFsikassa anayal!l apanno ...
ayal!l vuccati bhikkhave bhikkhu -o Marassa anay~
apanno, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gilita-; Spk II 206,14: -o ti
gilitabatiso, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits -o ti) f-
IV 159,1foll. (Se so; Be, Ce, E e gi1ita-); Ja VI 113,17'
(vailkaghasta ti -a, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee gilita-); Th-a III
28,2o (-o maccho viy a ti).
gilana, mfn., pp of gi1ayati qv.
gilanaka, mfn. and m. [gi1ana + ka ; BHS g1anaka,
2 alayal!l katva nipajjitva); - -'-upagha ka, mf(-l)(n).,
gilanaka], unwell, ill; one who is unwell, a sick person;
Vin I 311,4* (kucchivi karo gilano ubho e' eva-a, Be, Ce
so, in uddana; Ee, Se gilayana); A III 38,2 (-an~ ca
balabalal!l janissama); 142,2o (addasa kho bhagava
aññatar~ bhikkhul!l dubbal~ -al!l); Mil 74,24 (kin nu
kho . . . so vejjo -al!l sampatte ka1e bhesajj~ payeti
udahu asampatte kale ti); Mhv 5:39 (Asoko . . . agato
Pupphapural!l Bindusare -e)_
gilani,f [cfS. g1ani], weakness; illness;- -pucchana, n.,
0
inquiring about an illness, about someone 's state of
health; Bv-a 163,21 (Varul).o nama aggasavako ...
abadhiko ahosi, tal!lgi1anipucchanatthaya ... , Ce so; Ee
wr t~
0
-pucchinatthaya; Be, Se tattha gilana-
pucchan atthaya) ;- 0 -puccha ,f, id.; Bv-a 163,32* (tassa
-aya ye tada upagata, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gilanapucchaya;
quoting Bv 6:9: eds gilanapucchaya); - see also gilana-
pucchana, gilanapuccha (sv gilayati), gelaññapucchana.
gilayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. g1ayati], feels aversion; is weary;
Dhatup 439 (gi1a hasakkhaye); Dhatum 680; Sadd 437,5
(gile pítikkhaye: -ati gilano gelaññ~); - part.pr.
gilayamana, mfn., V v-a 328,18 (gilano ti -amano ti
attho); - pp gilana, gilayana, mfn., m.f(-a) and n.
[AMg gilii~fa; BHS gilana, g1ana, glanya; cf S. g1ana],
l. (mfn., m.f) unwell; ill; unfit; one who is unwell, a sick
giHiyati
person; Abh 322 (-o vyadhitatura); Vin I 64,9 (na
patibalo hoti ... -al!l upaghatul!l); 176,19 (ayasma kho
-o, -o ca ananuyogakkhamo vutto bhagavata); 198,27*
(gi1ayano, Be, Ee, Se so, in uddana; Ce gilanaka); 270,38
(Hvako ... manusse pucchi ko bha1fe -o kal!l tikicchamí
ti); IV 181,3 (agi1ano nama sakkoti pilf<)_aya caritul!l -o
nama na sakkoti pil).<)-aya caritul!l); 338,2 (anujanami
bhikkhave -aya bhikkhuniya chattupahanal!l); A I 120,31
(ekacco -o ... n' eva vughati tamha abadha); Thí 27
(kiñcapi kho 'mhi kisika -a bathadubbala); Ja I 150,21
(kilamanti pi -a pi honti maraJ).al!l pi papul).anti);
Ili 392,13 (kuhil!l me mata iti pucchitva -a ti sutva);
Mil 231,3 (Sariputto . . . rattibhage -o samano );
Vism 33,5; Sp 1123,4 (-o attano 0
-taya [na
vughapet abbo]); 1210,6 (-assa chattan ti ettha yassa
kayadaho Va cittakopo va hoti cakkhUI!l va dubbal~
añño va koci abadho vina chattena uppajjati tassa ...
chatt~ vaqati); Mp I 304,21 (sattha -o ti sutva
ko
bhante abadho ti); V v-a 76,3 (-aya tava ay~ etissa
rüpasobha); Pv-a 14,1 (sokavegena -o hutva na ciren'
sadarath~ ... akammaññal!l -~ vailkal!l ... ); - ifc
see nighapa tta-;- 2. (n.) sickness; D III 256,17 (bhikkhu
-a vughito hoti aciravut\hito ge1añña; cfSv 1044,to: -o
hutva paccha vughito hoti) f- Vibh 386,36 f- Ja V 424,15
(tal!l ... -a vughital!l aciravughital!l ge1añña, Ce, E e, Se
so; Be gilanavughit~; 425,26': pathamal!l gilanal!l
paccha vughital !l);- -atiritta, (mj)n., (what is) left over
from a sic k person 's meal; V in IV 82,15; Sp 829,24;
Vin-vn 1308; - -atirittak a, (mj)n., id.; Utt-vn 643; -
-' -alaya, m.n., a pretence of sickness, of being ill;
Vin III 62,17 (so puriso sunkaqhan~ passitva -'-alay~
karitva attano bhal).<)-ik~ tassa bhikkhuno adasi); Ja II
395,18; VI 262,17 (yan nünahal!l tassa me hadaye dohato
uppanno ti -'-alayal! l kareyyan ti); Cp-a 188,4 (-'-
(one) who cares for a sick person; (one) who attends the
sick; Vin I 92,16 (tassa -' -upaghakassa bhikkhuno);
303,3 (gilano supaghako .. . atthakamassa
- '-upaqhak assa yathabhüt~ abadhal!l avikatta hoti);
A I 26,23 (etad aggal!l .. . -' -upaghakínal!l yadid~
Suppiya upasika); Ja III 49,1; Spk III 2l7,3o; -
--paccaya , m., (medica/) support, remedy for the
(bhikkhu who is) sick; Vin III 99,27 (yo te --paccaya -
bhesajjaparikkharal!l paribhuñji); D III 130,18 (yo vo
maya --paccayabhesajjaparikkharo anuññato al~ vo so
yava-d-eva uppannanal!l veyyabadhikan~ vedananal!l
patighataya); S II 194,22; A II 65,18*; Ja VI 120,29'
(paccayan ti --paccay~ ad~sü ti); Vism 34,27
(--paccay o va bhesajjal!l --paccayabhesajjal!l, y~ kiñci
gilanassa sappayal!l bhisakkakammal!l te1amadhu-
phiilfitadí ti); Sp 386,2o (senasanena --paccay ena va
kilamantesu); Sv 205,24 (ayal!l assa --paccay e
yathalabhasantoso); Th-a III 76,14 (jívitan~ pavattiya
parikkhiirabhüte bhesajjasailkhate paccaye --paccay e );
Mhv 5:216 (thero nivedan~ rañño --paccay e pi ca ...
patikkhi pi);- --puccha ka, m., --pucchi ka,f, (one) who
asks about (the health of) a sick person; (one) who visits
the sick; Vin IV 88,12 (--puccha ka bhikkhü gilane
bhikkhü etad avocul!l kacc' avuso khamaníy~ kacci
gilita
yapaniyan ti); 346,22 (--pucchika bhikkhuniyo ); S I
238,31 (Sakko deviinam indo yena Vepacitti asurindo
ten' upasaiikami --pucchako); Ps IV 195,15 (bhikkhuni-
upassayal11, t~ pana --pucchakena gantul11 vanati); -
--pucchana, n., inquiring about (the health of) a sick
person; visiting the sick; Ap-a 304,35 (Sariputtatthero
Revatassa --pucchan~ . . . karissiimi ti upagañchi);
Thüp 248,20 (--pucchanatthaya); see also
giliinipucchana, gelaññapucchana; - --puccha,f, id.;
Bv 6:9 (tassa --pucchaya ye tada upagata); Th-a I !86,10
(dhammasenapati --pucch~ gantva); - see also
giliinipuccha; - --sala,f, a sick-room; an infirmary;
S IV 210,25; Vism 259,5 (ya111 tesa111 kimlna111
sütighara111 vaccaku~l --sala susan~ ca hoti); Spk II
256,28 (--siil~ gantva gilane assasetva); - --seyya,f,
a sick-bed; a death-bed; Ja VI 197,10 (so pi masa111
pe)aya kilanto --seyyaya sayi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
--seyy~); Spk I 79,31 (--seyya h' esa tathagatassa);
Ps IV 125,5 (tassa --seyyaya nipannassa nirayo
upanhasi); - agiliina, mfn. and m.f, not ill, well, fit; a
well person, a fit person; Vin I 357,23 (sabbeh' eva
ekajjh~ sannipatitabba111 giliinehi ca agilanehi ca, na
kehici chando databbo); IV 347,3 (bhikkhuni agiliina);
Kkh 2 175,18 (agiliinata); Ps IV 38,2o; - niggiliina, mfn.,
free from sickness; healthy,fit;? As 151,12 (paguññata ti
paguJ;Iabhavo, anaturata niggilanata ti attho); 151,15
(viññaJ;Iakkhandhassa niggilaniikiiro va kathito); - see
also agilayati, gelañña.
gilita, mfn., pp of gilati qv.
gilevati,pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup glevate; Wg § 14:32: glevu
sevane], sprinkles; ? Sadd 440,22 (sevu . . . gevu
gilevu ... secane: ... gevati -a ti, eds so; perhaps wr for
sevane ?).
gilesati,pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gle~ate, Wg § 16:13] desires;
seeks; Sadd 447,21 (gilesu anvicchaya111, punappuna111
iccha anviccha: -ati).
giJitani in Ee at Sp 710,3 is wr for ga)itiini (Be so) or
galitani (Ce, Se so).
giha, n. [AMg id.; S. grha], a house; - ifc se e agiha; -
see also gaha 1, gihi(n), geha 1.
gihi(n), m., [S. grhin] (sg. gen./dat. -ino, -issa; pl.
nom./acc. -1, -ino; iic usually gihi-, occasionally gihi- ),
one who possesses a house, a householder; one who
lives the household (worldly and sensual) lije (often
contrasted with pabbajita); Abh 446 (gahatthagiirika -!);
Vinii 129,15 H bhikkhave mailgalika); Mili 261,22
(na . . . -lna111 odatavasanan~ evarüpl dhamml katha
pa~ibhati); S IV 180,18 (idha bhikkhu -lhi sa111saW10
viharati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -1, read gihlsa111sa~~o ?); A 1
69,15 (micchapa~ipatti111 na VaJ;IJ.lemi -1ssa va
pabbajitassa va); III 211,22 H111 odatavasan~);
IV 281,11 (may~ bhante -1 kiimabhogl puttasambadha-
sayan~ ajjhavasama kasikacandana111 paccanubhoma
miilagandhavilepan~ dhiirayiima jatarüparajata111
siidiyama); Dhp 74; Sn 220 (-i diiraposl); Th 101 (hitva
0
-tval11, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce 0 -tta111); 939 (bhesajjesu yatha
vejja kicciikicce yatha -!); Ja III 105,23* (alaso -1
kiimabhogl na siidhu); VI 63,27* (y~ hoti catta111 -ino
sunakhassa va); Ap 67,22 (na -1 napi saññato, Be, Ce so;
Se -i; Ee wr gihina napi paññatto); Mi1264,29 (yo -1
53 gihi(n)
arahatta111 patto dve v' assa gatiyo bhavanti ananna
tasmil11 yeva divase pabbajati va parinibbayati va);
Vism 40,18 (guJ;Iehi pasannan~ -In~ santika uppanna
paccaya); Ps 1 264,19 (eko daharo [bhikkhu] hatth~
pasiirento kayas~sagg~ patva ten' eva karaJ;Iena -1
jato); Dhp-a III 257,2 (ye -ino ... pabbajita va ... ); -
0
-gata, gihlgata, mfn., [cfO. von Hinüber, 2008],
associated with householders; known to householders;
(f.) associated with a householder, married; ? V in II
288,17 (sant' amhaka111 sikkhapadiini -iini gihl pi no
jananti id~ vo samaJ;Iiin~ Sakyaputtiyiin~ kappati
ida111 vo na kappati; Sp-~ [Be] III 449,24 foil. -iinl ti
gihipa~isa111yuttanl ti vadanti, gihlsu gatiini tehi ñatiini
-iinl ti eva111 pan' ettha attho danhabbo); IV 322,2
(ünadviidasavassa bhikkhave -a akkhama hoti sltassa
UJ;Ihassa ... ); 322,6 (ya pana bhikkhuni ünadvadasa-
vassal11 -a111 vu~thapeyya pacittiyan ti; 322,10: -a nama
purisantaragata vuccati); Vin-vn 2376; 2378;
0
neg. agihlgata, mfn., Sp 942,4; - -(d)dhaja, m., the
emblem or characteristic sign of a householder; Vin II
22,27 (na -o dhiiretabbo; Sp II59,sfoll.: odatavatthiini
acchinnadasiini pupphadasiini ca na dharetabbiini); -
0
-niyama, m., the manner of a householder, Dhp-a I
!6,10; 0
-nivattha, n., the kind or style of
(under)garment wom by a householder; (or
0
-nivattha111, adv., in the way a householder wears his
(under)garment;) Vin II 137,5foll. (chabbaggiya
bhikkhü -a111 nivasenti hatthisoJ;I<;Iak~ maccha-
viilakal11 . . . na bhikkhave -a111 nivasetabb~ hatthi-
soJ;I<;Iak~ ... );- -patirüpakara, mfn., appropriatefor
0
householders; D III 164,2* (idha mahipatissa kamabhoga
gihipatirüpakara bahü bhavanti, so read with vl in Ee ?
see K.R. Norman, 1987-88, p. 288; Be, Ce gihi-
patirüpaka; Ee, Se gihlpatirüpaka); - 0 -paruta, n., the
kind or style of upper garment wom by a householder,
(or 0 -piirutam, adv., in the way a householder wears his
upper garment;) V in II 137,llfoll. (chabbaggiya bhikkhü
-~ parupanti . . . na bhikkhave -~ parupitabb~;
Sp 1213,5: parimaJ;I<;ialalakkhaJ;Iato aññatha piirut~
sabba111 eta111 -a111 nama);- 0 -bandhana, n., the bonds
which bind a householder, Sn 44 (chetvana viro -ani;
Pj II 91,23 foil.: kiimabandhanani, kama hi gihln~
bandhanani) = Ap 9,13; Ja I 9,22 (pahln~ me -~);
Cp-a 133,25 (-abhava111 dassetva idani pabbajitan~ pi
kesañci ya111 hoti bandhana111 tassapi abhav~ dassetu111,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gihibandhabhav~, prob. wr); -
0
-linga, n., the distinctive marks or appearance or
character of a householder; V in III 34,22 (bhikkhu ...
-ena methun~ dhamma111 pa~isevi; Sp 272,13: -ena ti
gihivesena odatavattho hutva); Mil265,14 (n' eso
maharaja doso arahattassa -ass' eso doso yadida111
liiJ.gadubbalata); Ps III 334,14 (tavad ev' assa -~
antaradhayi samaJ;Ialiilga111 paturahosi); Cp-a 283,2
(pabbajitass' eva patthana samijjhati no -e ~hitassa);-
0
(i)-vikata, 0 -Vikata, mfn., (what is) produced by,
belonging to, a householder, ? Vin II 163,28 (anujaniimi
bhikkhave ~apetva tlJ;Ii asandi111 pallaiik~ tülika111 -~
abhinislditu111; Vjb [Be]477,16: -an ti gihlna111 atthaya
kata111; Vmv [Be] II 240,14: -an ti gihihi kata111
paññatt~, gihisantakan ti attho); Sp 1240,22 (k~sa-
gihini
lohavagalohabhajanavikati sanghikaparibhogena va -a
va vagati); 1241,10 (suva~~arajata-arakil!ajatiphalika­
bhajanani -am pi na vaganti; cfVin-vn 2865:
siilgisajjhumayal]1 harakil!aja!J1 phalikubbhava!J1
bhajanani na vaganti gihina!J1 santakani pi); -
0
(i)-vyañjana, n., a distinctive sign of a householder,
Sn 44 (oropayitva -ani; Pj 11 91,18: kesamassu-odata-
vatthalankaramalagandhavilepanitthiputtadasidasadini);
Mil 11,11 (kamanissitani ... vatthani kamaniyani -ani,
Ce, Ee so; Se kammaniyani; Be kamanissitani
--bha~qani); Ps III 38,16 (sabban' eva hi -ani tassa
gihibhava!J1 paka!a!J1 karontl ti); Vibh-a 515,16 (-ena
gahagho ahan ti); - 0 -Saipyojana, n., the fetter that
binds a householder; MI 483,6 (atthi nu kho ... koci gihi
-al]1 appahaya kayassa bheda dukkhass' antankaro ti;
Ps III 196,4: -an ti o -bandhanal]1 o -parikkharesu nikanti);
Kv 267,6 (natthi arahato -an ti); Spk III 297,7
(pabbajitena ti -al]1 chinditva pabbajjupagatena); -
0
-sale in Ee at Ps IV 193,4 is wr for gihikale (Be, Ce, Se
so).
gihini, f [S. grhi~i] (pl. nom. -iyo and -i ?), the wife of a
householder; a woman who lives the household (worldly
and sensual) life; Vin III 40,8 (Licchavikumaraka
bhikkhu!J1 gahetva ... -iya vippa!ipadesu!J1); D III 124,12
(upasika e' assa savika honti -iyo odatavasana brahma-
cariniyo); A III 298,12 (yavata ... mama savika -i odata-
vasana silesu paripilrakariniyo Nakulamata gahapatani
tasa!]1 aññatara, eds so); Sp 928,1o (-i homi odatavattha
homi).
gifakaip in Ee at Spk I 274,15 is wr for gitakal]1 or gitika!]1
(Be, Ce, Se so).
gita, mfn. and n., gita,f, see sv gayati.
gitaka, n. [ts], a song; Ja III 507,23 (eka!]1 me -al]1 dehi);
Spk I 273,25 (-al]1 gayantiya sadda!J1 sutva, E e so; Be,
Ce, Se gitika!]1); Pj 11 398,1 (ima!J1 -al]1 sutva, Ee so; Be,
Ce, Se gitika!J1); - gitaka in Ee at Ap 317,9 is wr for
ce!aka (Be, Ce so);- ifc see gha!acetika- sv ghata 1.
giti,f [ts], a song; singing; Sadd 852,29 (gital]1 -i sangiti).
gitika,f [ts], a short song; Abh 130 (gital]1 gana!J1 ca -a);
Ja III 507,21 (ekal]1 na!J1 -al]1 yacitva parisamajjhe tal]1
gayantl jivikal]1 kappessami ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
gitaka!J1); Spk 1 274,3 (ima!J1 -al]1 gayantiya cetikaya
sutva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gatha!]1; = Pj 11 397,2o: eds
gita!]1); 274,15 (imal]1 -al]1 sutva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gitaka!J1) = Pj 11 398,1 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gitaka!]1);- ifc
se e ghatacetika- sv ghata 1.
giyati\ pass. pr. 3 sg. of ga~hati qv.
giyati 2 , pass. pr. 3 sg. of gayati qv.
giva, n. [cf S. graiva], a necklace; a chain wom round the
neck of an elephant; Ja V 297,16* (nekkha!]1 giva!J1 te
karessa!]1; 297 ,23' foil.: tava giveyyal]1 sabbasuva~~a­
mayam eva karessami ti attho, nekkha!J1 giva!J1 te
karissami ti pi patho, tava givaya nekkhamaya!J1
pqandhanal]1 piJandhessami ti attho, ? Be so; Ee tava
gival]1 . . . givaya nekkhassa piJandhana!J1 bandhessami
ti; Ce, Se tava giva!J1 sabbasuva~~am eva; c/297,14:
giveyyakal]1 dassami ti); Sadd 922,23 (-al]1 geval]1
giveyyal]1 ... v~~abhedo 'ya!]1).
givanto in Ee, Se at Nidd 1 466,25' and 467,5 is wr (or vl)
for kivanto (Sn 959 Be, Ce, Ee so).
54 giveyyaka
giva\f [S. griva], the neck (ofmen and animals); the neck
of ajar; Abh 263 (galo ca k~!ho -a ca); 1129; Vin 1
191,2 (bhikkhil ... nadiya gavina!J1 tarantina!J1 ... -aya pi
g~hanti); III 80,15 (aññataro bhikkhu tassa bhikkhuno
-ayal]1 pahara!J1 adasi); M III 169,16 (api nu so k~o
kacchapo amukasmi!]1 ekacchiggale yuge -al]1
paveseyya ti); Thi 81 (pakkhipi!J1 pasa!J1 -aya!J1); Ja 1
424,2 (nidhikumbhiyo -aya -al]1 ahacca thita); II 261,18*
(bahuni narasisani ... -asu patimukkani); V 70,25' (ehi
me pighim aruyha -al]1 g~hahi bahuhi); VI 199,16*
(khippa!]1 -al]1 pasarehi na te dassami jivita!]1 ...
chedayissami te sira!J1); Mil418,9 (issattho sare
patayanto . . . ailgu1iyo nirantara!J1 karoti -al]1
pagga~hati ... ); Vism 124,23 (uccatare msmnena -al]1
onamitva oloketabba!]1 hoti); Sp 348,9 (sisato va k~~ato
va -ato va hatthato va alankara!J1 chinditva); 849,s
(sam~ero kutassa -al]1 pattassa mukhavagiyal]1
thapetva avajjeti); 1008,32 (Janapadakaly~i. .. -al]1
pasaretva olokesi); Ps V 17,2 (kathetukamo -al]1
pagga~hati hanuka!]1 ca1eti); Mhv 7:20 (yakkhil]1 adaya
-aya naracavalayena so); o• -ayamakaip, ind.,
stretching the neck; so as to stretch the neck, to extend
the throat; ? Sv 83,22 (tato pi manapamanapa!J1 -a!J1
bhuñjati yeva; Sv-p! 1 162,25: -an ti giva!J1 ayamitva
ayamitva yatha ca [vi va] bhutte atibhuttataya giva
ayamitabba va hoti) = Nidd-a I 404,3o; - see also
isakayatagiva (sv isaka!J1), oghagivi (sv ogha 1), nilagiva
(sv nila).
giva 2 , f [= giva 1 ?] responsibility; liability (to make
reparation); requirement of payment of damages; (see
O. van Hiniiber, 1979c, pp. 277-79); Abh 1129 (i~e -a);
Ja 11 300,25 (go~e adisva corehi hatabhaval]1 jananto pi
Gam~issa -al]1 karissami ti tal]1 upasailkamitva bho
go~e me dehi ti aha); 305,16 (go~ana!J1 aniyyaditatta
go~a tava -a); V 23,4 (yassa passena migo palayati tass'
eva-a ti aha); Sp 319,29 (suddhacitto va uddharati n' eva
avaharo na -a); 356,5 (sace koci agantuko ... dvara!J1 va
vivarati yattaka!]1 cara haranti sabbal]1 tassa -a); 909,15
(yal]1 tesa!J1 da~qal]1 karonti sabbal]1 pi bhikkhuniya -a
hoti); 999,26 (no ce deti sabbal]1 i~a!]1 -a hoti).
giveyya, n., (and -a, f ?) [S. graiveya], a necklace; a
chain wom round the neck of an elephant, Abh 285
(k~thabhusa tu -a!]1); Ja IV 395,17* (kaccha!J1 naganal]1
bandhatha -al]1 patimuñcatha); VI 590,9* (tato khomal]1
ca kayura!J1 -al]1 ratanamayal]1 sassil su~haya pahesi);
Vism 247,31 (yassa yassa ca pi1andhanavikatiya
akailkhati ... yadi ku~qalaya yadi -aya yadi suv~~a­
malaya, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se giveyyakaya; quoting A I
257,28: giveyyake); Sadd 922,23 (-a!]1).
giveyyaka, n. (and -a, f ?) [S. graiveyaka], l. a necklace;
M III 243,21 (yassa yassa ca pilandhanavikatiya
akailkhati ... yadi ku~qalaya yadi -aya yadi suva~~a­
malaya) =A I 254,9 (-e; Mp II 362,11: -e ti givalankare)
f. 257,28 (-e) quoted Vism 247,31 (Ce, Se -aya; Be, Ee
giveyyaya) f. A III 16,17 (Be, Ce -aya; Ee, Se -ena);
Ja V 297,14 (-al]1 dassami ti);- 2. the neckpiece (of a
bhikkhu's robe); neck-binding; Vin 1 287,25 (-a!]1 pi
nama karissati; Sp 1127,19: -an ti givavethanat!hane
da)hikara~attha!J1 añña!J1 suttasa!]1sibbita!]1 agantuka-
pata!J1).
gu
gihisotapannanaip in Ee at It-a II 39,9 is wr for gihl- (Be,
Ce, Se so).
gu 1, gü, mfn. [S. -gu], going; going to; having reached;
behaving; cfSadd 846,13 (paradigamito rii, parad!hi
upapadehi parasma gamidhatumha paro riipaccayo hoti
va tass!ladisu atthesu); - ifc see addha- (sv addha[n]),
anta- (sv anta\ inda-, chanda- (sv chanda 1), dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ panha- (sv panha\ paddha- (sv paddha\
pantha-, para-, veda-;- see also ga2 .
gu 2 , mfn. [S. -gup], protecting, defending; - ifc see
dhamma- (sv dhamma 1).
gu 3 , [S. -gu], = go qv; - ifc see UI).ha-, citta- (sv citta2),
tighagu, di- (sv dvi).
guggula, m., guggulu, n. [S. guggula, guggulu], a plant
yielding a fragrant gum resin, lnidan bdellium (Amyris
agallocha Roxb. or Commiphora mukul Engl.); Abh 557
( -u kosiko); Ja VI 537,24* (hirivera ca -a);
Sadd 921,15foll. (mattabhedo tava ... -o guggulu).
guccha, m. [ts ], a bunch of flowers, a cluster of blossoms;
Sadd 922,2o (-o gulaccho ... VaQ.I).abhedo 'yaip).
*gujati, guñjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. guñjati; S. Dhatup gujati;
Wg §§ 7:23, 28:76], hums; buzzes; Dhatup 77 (guja ...
avyatte sadde); Dhatum 91; Sadd 345,19 (guji avyatta-
sadde: ... guñjati).
gujjhati, pr. 3 sg. [;/gudh 1; S. Dhatup gudhyati,
Wg§26:13], wraps up; covers; Sadd485,12 (gudha
parive~ane: -ati godho).
guñja, f [ts], l. a plant (Abrus precatorius) with red and
black berries; its fruit; Abh 585 (jiñjuko e' eva -a);
Dhp-a IV 133,2 (nagaraja ... kujjhi, guñjavaQ.Q.ani 'ssa
akkhini ahesuip, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jayakusumaval).I).ani);
Vibh-a 447,3Ifoll. (guñjacocarukkhattacaip guñja1ata-
pattehi saddhiip ekato ko!!etva); - 2. a jeweller's
weight ( either a guñja berry or an artificial weight);
Abh 479 (cattaro vihayo -a).
guttha, see go!~a sv go.
gul).a, m. [ts] (pl. nom.!acc. occasionally gul).ani), l. a
secondary element; a quality, an attribute; esp. a good
quality, a virtue; accomplishment, attainment,
excellence; Abh 787 (-o ... appadhane ca silado ); D III
153,18* (anavamatena -ena yati saggaip); Ja I 59,29
(sarathi kiñcapi ... pabbajitaip va pabbajitagul).e va na
janati devanubhavena . . . pabbajjaya -e vaQ.Q.esi);
266,29 foll. (ahaip manussabhiito pi samano tumhakaip
-aip na janami . . . pana . . . yakkhehi tava -a ñata);
III 55,24 (sasapaQ.~ita tava -o saka1akappaip paka!o hotii
ti); Nidd I 349,22foll. (katame attano -a uccakula
pabbajito va assa ... vinayadharo va assa ... araññiko va
assa . . . pa!hamassa jhanassa labh! ti va assa ... );
Ap 75,18 (upasampadesi sambuddho -am annaya
cakkhuma); Bv 2:31 (upagamiip rukkhamiilaip -e
dasah' upagataip); 13:35 (so ca buddho asamasamo -ani
ca tani atu1iyani; Bv-a 208,1: -ani ca tan! ti -a ca te
sabbaññutañiil).adayo -a ti attho, 1iil.gavipallasena
vuttaip); Cp 2:1:1 (na tada atthi mahiya -ena mama
sadiso); Mil237,15 (ayaip maharaja dasasahassi
lokadhatu .. . ekass' eva tathagatassa -aip dhareti);
Sp 110,19 (so hi bhikkhusaii.gho -ehi pi maha ahosi
yasma yo tattha pacchimako so sotapanno); 216,5
(jhanadinaip -anaip alabha); 876,1 (Upalittherassa -aip
55
bhasati thometi pasaipsati); Ps II 245,32 (silad!hi -ehi ...
abhiññato); III 436,7 (na jatiya brahmal).O -ehi pana
brahmal).O hoti); IV 82,6 (Mahamoggallanattherassa
iddhima ti -o paka!o); Bv-a43,zlfoll. (ayaip
gul).asaddo ... dissati ... sampatti-atthe);- ifc see appa-,
abhitthuta- (sv abhitthavati), dhuta- (sv dhunati); - 2. a
good deed, a good result; an advantage; a merit;
Abh 767 (anisaipso -o); 787; Ap 310,15 (cetosukhaip
kayasukhaip iriyapathajaip sukhaip ime -e pa!ilabhami);
Mil197,23 (appavattassa -aip pavatte ca bhayaip
d!payamano ); Vism 313,10 (mayi idha vasante tumhakaip
ko -o ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -a ti); Sp 356,2 (mayi ca
mate saii.ghassa ca senasane vinanhe -o n' atthl ti); 436,1
(jlvite ad!navaip dassento maraQ.assa -aip val).Q.ema
anisaipsaip dassema ti); Ps III 293,7 (sace ayaip
pabbajjaip alabhamano marissati na koci -o labbhati ti);
Bv-a 43,21 foll. (ayaip gul).asaddo .. . dissati ...
anisaipsatthe); - 3. a strand; a subdivision; a string, a
tie; a bow-string; the string of a musical instrument;
Abh 388 (-o jiya); 787 (-o ... bandhane ... jiyaya ca);
Vin I 182,36 (yada te vii).aya tantiyo n' eva accayata honti
natisithila same -e pati!~ita; Sp 1081,24: majjhime sare
!hapetva mucchita) f. A III 375,16; D II 274,7* (nago va
sannani -ani chetva, Be so; Se santani; Ce, Ee
sandanagul).ani); Pe! 156,23 (yo kamesu satto yo ca tattha
kamanaip -o); Ps II 55,32 (kamagul).a ti kamayitabb-
anhena kama va bandhananhena -a); Bv-a 43,21 foil.
(ayaip gul).asaddo ... dissati ... bandhanatthe);- ifc see
anta- (sv anta\ kama-, mala-; - 4. (with numerals,
usually ifc) a multiple; ... times, -fold; Abh 787 (-o
pa!alaraslsu); Pv 36:9 (anekabhagena -ena seyyo ayam
eva siilo nirayena tena; cfPv-a 221,19: anekako!!hasena
anisaipsena); Mi1106,9 (yaip idaip sabbaññiibuddhanaip
cittaip taip . . . asaii.kheyyena -en a parisuddhaip ca
lahukaip ca); Bv-a 43,21joll. (ayaip gul).asaddo ...
dissati ... paralatthe); - ifc see agha- (sv agha2 ), eka-,
catu- (sv catu[r]), ti- (sv ti 2), dasa- (sv dasa\ di- (sv dvi),
du- (sv dvi), dvi-, pañca-, sata- (sv sata\ satta-
(sv satta4), sahassa-;- 5. (gr.t.t.) the first gradation of a
vowel; Sadd 865,27 (kvaci dusa ice etassa dhatussa ukaro
-aip apajjate ); 6. colour; ? Abh 787 (-o ...
sukkadimhi); - gul).e kayatanibhiitaip in Ee at Ap 476,4
is wr; read gul).oghayatan!bhiitaip with Be, Ce, Se; -
gul).a in Ee at Jaiii 431,12 and431,19* is wr forghul).aqv;
- o• -agacchitamanase in Ee at Ap 568,5 is wr; Be
gul).avaddhita-; Ce, Se gul).ava~~hita-; - o• -üpeto in Ee
at Pv-a 10,5 is wr; read khuppipasabhibhiito peto with
Be, Ce, Se; - 0
-karaka, mft-ika)n., doing good,
producing an advantage; Ja IV 463,17' (kammakatan ti
katakammaip evaip -aip tumhadisaip yo na janati); -
atigul).akarika, (m)f(n)., very much doing good; Ja V
329,14 (mata nama atigul).akarika); - 0
-khal).ana, n.
1
[gul).a + khaQ.ana ], injuring merits or accomplishments,
detracting; Mp III 387,8 (khantin ti attano -aip); -
0
-gul}.ikajata, see sv guJagul).!hikajata;
0
-Ii-gul).üpahana is a vl (esp. in Be) for gaQ.aii.-
gaQ.upahana qv; - o -ghosa, m. [gul).a + ghosa ], a
1
proclamation or report of the merits; Dhp-a III 114,2
(anekani jatisatani mssaya pavattaip satthu -aip
e' eva ... dhammadesanaghosaip ca sutva, Be, Ce, Se so;
 56

Ee 0 -ghosakarp., prob. wr); - 0 -tthava, m., praise of III 150,25 (mallante pi -e a1aggitva); Spk I 115,26 (yasma
good qualities; Ap 461,23 (-assa sabbarp. tarp. phalarp., gu!fakathaya saddhiq1 nigguJ;lassa -o pakato hoti); -
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -assa puppharp.); 2. (mfn.) without a (bow-)string; Ja V 433,s (-aq1
0
-dhmp.saka, mfn., destroying, denying merit; dhanuq1; 435,3o·: -an ti jiyarallitaq1); - atigu1,1a, mfn.,
detracting; Ps II 282,11; -
0
-dhaQisana, n., destroying, having extraordinary qualities; Mil 278,9 (ma1_1i --taya
denying merit; detracting; Dhp-a Ili 353,12 (paresarp. kamadado ); atigu!fakarika, see above;
--taya dharp.sina, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gm_1arp. nigguJ,Ia, mfn., having no good qualities; bad;
dhaq1sanataya);
0
-dhaQisi(n), mfn. [gu1_1a + worthless; Ja II 327,14* (gu!favanto -a honti); III 126,12;
dharp.si(n)
2], destroying, denying merit; Mp III 167,9;- Mil 180,29; Spk II 398,7 (gu!favantanarp. gu!fe kathite
0
-n-dhara, mfn., possessing good qualities; Ap 533,24 -anarp. gu!fabhavo ca pakato bhavissati ti); Pp-a 207,23
(-a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ra1_1antaga) = Thi-a 143,6*; - ( --taya); - sagu1,1a\ mfn., having good qualities; Ps III
2 79,18 (danarp. nama -assa pi niggu!fassa pi yassa kassaci
0
-nama, n. [gu1_1a + nama ] a word describing a quality;
an adjective; Ja V 153,12' (sadhara1_1ena -en' alapanto, databbaq1); Spk III 15,15 (ayaq1 khattiyo va brahma1_1o
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee namen'); Pv-a 231,19 (jhay1 susllo va ... niggu!fo va -o va ti visesarp. na karonti); - see
aralla vimutto ti adihi -ehi); As 391,2 (dhammakathi ko also kamagu!fika (sv kama), gu!fibhüta, tagguJ;la-
2
paq1suküliko vinayadharo tipitako saddho pasanno ti samviññana (sv ta[d]), yarp.guJ;lanemittika, sagu!fa ,
evaruparp. gu1_1ato agatanamarp. -aq1 nama, bhagava sagu!fa3. .
araharp. smasambudd ho ti ad!ni pi tathagatassa gu1,1aka, n. (or m.), stitching to strengthen the end of a
anekani namasattani -an' eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee saddho belt;? Vin II 136,15 (kayabandhana ssa anto jirati
sattho ti) f. Sadd 879,11 (saddha saddho ti); Sadd 247,25; anujanami bhikkhave sobha1_1aq1 -aq1; Sp 1212,3: -arp.
702,21; - 0 -nemittaka, mfn., produced by a quality or nama mudingasa1_1thanena sibbanaq1, evarp. sibbita hi
excellence; Pj I 107,11 (bhagava ti nama -arp. namarp.); anta thira honti, Be so; Ce, E e, Se muddikasantha nena).
- o -paridhaQisak a, mfn., destroying, denying merit or
guJ,Ii(n) 1, m(jn). [S. guJ;lin], (gr. t. t.) whar'. possesses
accomplishment; detracting, disparaging; Ja III 243,6· qualities or attributes, a noun; a substantive; Sadd 79,2o
(anatthakarakarp. pan' imarp. -arp. lobhajatarp., Be, Ce, Se (gul_livacakarp. padhanapadarp.); 759,26 (yatha hi
so; Ee lobharp. janaq1); 456,21 (musavado nama bhariyo ballubbihisadd o -ini thito, tatha sakalo payaq1 samaso
-o catusu apayesu nibbattapeti) ;- -paridhaQisan a, n.,
0
-ini thito).
destroying, denying merit or accomplishment; guJ,Ii(n.) 2 , mfn. [cf S. guJ;lin], (according to ct) wearing a
detracting, disparaging; Vism 425,12 (antimavatthun a va string (of flowers or jewels); (perhaps: having good
3
-ena va upavadaka); Sp 165,16 (-ena upavadati ti); It-a II qualities;? or to guni(n) qv ?) Ja VI 153,1* (ime te pi
39,9; - 0
-paJ,Iako in Ee at Ja Ili 431,12 is wr for mayharp. putta -ino kayüradharino raja, of children;
ghu1_1apill_lako (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-makkhaka, mfn., 153,1w: -ino ti malagul_la-abharal_lehi samannagata).
3
disparaging merit or accomplishment; detracting; gu1,1i(n) , (or guJ;li ?), m. [cf S. lex. guJ;lin, "fumished with
Mp III 273,11 (makkhi ti -o); -
0
-makkhana, n., a string, a bow"], (according to ct) armour, mail; but
disparaging merit or accomplishment; detracting; perhaps: a bow;? Ja VI 449,1* (avudhabalavantanarp.
Sv 1035,32 (makkhi ti paresarp. --lakkha1_1ena makkhena guJ;likayüradharinaqi . . . yodhanaq1; 449,2r: -i vuccati
kavacarp., kavacani e' eva kayürabhara1_1ani ca
samannagato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits makkhena); It-a I
0
-rasayo in Ee at dharentanaq1, kavacasailkhat ani va kayürani
49,27 (paresarp. -acthippayena) ; -
Spk I 23,26 is wr; read gu1_1a, rasayo ti attho with Be, Ce, dharentiinaq1, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -i);- see also guni(nl
Se; - 0 -Va(t), mfn., possessed of good qualities or guJ,likaQI in Ee at Ap 546,16 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
virtues; excellent, estimable; Th 956 ( -vanto pi
0
guJ;lato.
sailghamhi voharanta); Th1400 (dve bhikkhuniyo guJ,liflha, mfn. [super/. of gu!fi(n) "having good
0
-vatiyo); Pv 21:72 (sllavantesu
0
-Vantesu tadisu; qualities" ? cf gu!fava(t) sv gu1_1a], most excellent; most
Pv-a 139,3o: jhanadigu1_1ayuttesu); Ja III 126,12 (yava accomplished; Sadd 686,18 (mantu vantu vi ice etesaq1
0
-vanta na uppajjanti tava niggu1_1a labhagga- paccayanarp. lutti hoti iya ittha ice etesu paccayesu:
yasaggappatta allesuq1, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -vanto);
0
guJ;liyo -o satiyo satigho ... ); - see also gu1_1iya.
V 501,21 ( 0
-Vantassa acariyassa vacanarp. nama guJ,Iita, mfn., pp of gu!feti qv.
bhindituq1 na vagati); Ps Ili 436,8 (yattha katthaci kule gu1,1iya or guJ,Iiya(s), mfn. [campar. of gm;ti(n) "having
jato yo 0 -va so brahma1_1o); Cp-a 299,7 ( -vati maya kopo
0
good qualities"? cjgu1_1ava(t) sv gu1_1a], more excellent;
na katabbo ti); Sadd 145,22foll.; 654,21 ( -vatarp.
0
more accomplished; Sadd 686,18 (mantu vantu vi ice
0
-Vantanarp.); see also gu!fittha, gu!fiya; etesarp. paccayiinaq1 lutti hoti iya igha ice etesu
0
-Vani.ijaQI in E e at Sp 181,6 is wr for guJ;laVal_lijjarp. (Ce, paccayesu: -o gu!fittho satiyo satittho ... ); - se e also
0
Se so) or gu!favill_lijjarp. (Be so); - -vinasana- gu!fittha.
dhaQisa, m., the destruction and removal of merit; guJ,libhüta, mfn. [pp of *gu!fa + bhavati; ts], subordinate;
Sv 388,24 (na -ena dharp.semi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se secondary; Ud-a 15,22 (satiya vyaparo adhiko, pañña
0
-vinasanena); - agu1,1a, m. and mfn., l. (m.) a lack of tattha -a hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, E e vyaparo adi ... guJ;la-
good qualities, deficiency; failing; fault; Ja II 2,17 (idani bhüta ... ) =It-a I 26,14 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e gu!fabhüta).
maya attano -arp. pariyesituq1 vagati); VI 230,3 (Gu!fo guJ,Ieti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. l. [S. gu1_1ayati], multiplies;
attano --taya vandanaq1 pi nalattha); Ps II 95,28 (ima Dhatum 164 (gu!f' abhyase);- absol. gu!fitva, Nidd-a I
bhikkhuniyo anacara dubbata pagabbha ti -arp. katheti); 382,16 (sallassacakkava~anarp. sallassabhagen a -itva, Ee
gm;tthijata
so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se gal)etva); - pp gul}ita, mfn.
[ts], multiplied; Mp III 125,7 (imehi catuhi gul)ehi -a);
Dhp-a II 226,14 (yo eko sailgamayodho sahassena -arp
sahassaJTI manuse ekasmiJTI sailgame jineyya);- ifc see
catu- (sv catu[r]), dasa- (sv dasa 1), dvi-; - 2. [S. Dhatup
gul)ayati; Wg § 35:41], invites; Sadd 536,27 (kul)a gul)a
amantal)e: ... -eti -ayati gul)O gol)o);- caus. pass. pr.
3 sg. gol)apiyati, ? Sadd 536,29 (gol)apiyati amantapiyati
attani patiqhito puggalo daghuJTI sotUJTI pujitUJTI ca
icchantehi janehi ti gul)O ).
gul}thijatii in Ee at Spk II 97,3 is prob. wr; Be, Sv 496,9:
gal)!hikajata; Ce gal)~hijata; Se gu!Jgal)~hikajata.
gul}thitva in Ee, Se at Sp 1084,s (paliJTI gul)thitva) is prob.
wr; read paligul)~hitva with Be, Ce.
*gul}theti [cfS. Dhatup gul)thayati, Wg § 32:46; or <
V*grnth, see S. Katre, 1965, p. 69], envelops; covers;
Dhatup 563 (ve!ha ve~hane gul)~ha ca); Dhatum 790
(gul)~ha ogul)thane); - pp gul}thita, mfn., covered;
veiled; Kkh 2 374,2* (in uddana: ve~hito -o c'eva, Ce so;
Ee gul)<;lito, prob. wr; verses not in Be; cfVin IV 202,34
(quoted Sp 896,5, Kkh 2 269,2): ogul)~hitasisassa); - see
also ogul)thita, ogul)thitva, kul)~hita, gutagul)~hikajata.
Vgul}l1 [S. Dhatup gul)<;!ayati, Wg § 32:46], to cover,
envelop; Dhatum 793 (gu<;!i vethe); - pp gul)<;lita, mfn.,
covered; veiled; Kkh 2 374,2* (in uddana: gul)<;!ito, Ee so,
but prob. wr; Ce gul)!hito; verses not in Be); - see also
kul)<;!eti 1.
gul}hante, gul)hami ti, gul)heyya in Ee at Vibh-a
442,17 foll. are wrr for gal)hante, gal)hami ti and
gal)heyya (Be, Ce, Se so).
gutta, mfn., [pp of *Vgup; S. gupta], l. protected;
defended, kept saJe; guarded; controlled; Abh 754
(rakkhitaJTI gopitaJTI -aJTI); MI 503,15 (cakkhuJTI ...
tathagatassa dantaJTI -arp rakkhitaJTI saJT!vutaJTI); S IV
117,17 (-ani dvarani surakkhitani ahesuJTI); Dhp36
(cittarp -aJTI sukhavahaJTI); 315 (nagaraJTI yatha
paccantaJTI -arp santarabahiraJTI); Ja II 33.25* (tay' ajja -a
viharemu divasarp); IV 487,7* (amhehi -a anusasa
rajjarp); V 213,zo* (nivesanaJTI. .. pakarena pal)<;!u-
mayena -aJTI); Sp 350,12 (-e thane); Th-a I 242,17
(cakkhudvaradinarp 0 -tta); ifc see dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ - 2. guarded, watchful; controlled,
keeping a control; V in I 195,29 (dakkhissasi ... dantaJTI
-arp yatindriyaJTI nagaJTI) -¡. A II 38,7; Sn 250 (sotesu -o
vijitindriyo care); Ap313,9 (sada -o); Niddi 221,5
(vacayato ti yatto patiyatto -o gopito rakkhito sarpvuto
vupasanto); Dhp-a IV 117,3 (attana va 0 -taya attagutto);
- 3. hidden, concealed; Abh 746 (gutho tu -o); -
4. who protects, a defender, preserver; Dhp 257
(dhammassa -o medhavi dhammaqho ti pavuccati; or
gen. in sense ofinstr.; Dhp-a 111 382,10: so dhammagutto
dhammarakkhito dhammojapaññaya samannagato);
Vv 84:21 (ahaJTI hi yakkho kantariyo val)l)Upathamhi -o;
Vv-a 341,9: -o ti gopako); - ifc see dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ - 0 -dvara, mfn., with means of access
(of the sensejaculties) guarded, defended; controlled;
D I 70,7 foll. (katharp ca . . . bhikkhu indriyesu -o
hoti ... );M 111 2,14 (ehi tvarp bhikkhu indriyesu -o hohi,
cakkhuna rupaJTI disva ma nimittaggahi ma
'nuvyañjanaggahl); Sn 413 (sapadanarp caramano -o
57 guda
susaJTIVUto); Pv 38:43 (okkhittacakkhu satima -o
susaJTIVUto); Th 116 (cha phassayatane hitva -o
susaJT!vuto); Dhs 1347 (katama indriyesu --ta);
Pet 148,14; Kv 616,6 (atthi gabbhaseyyaya ... indriyesu
--ta); Mi1343,5* (-a susaJT!vuta); Vism 19,11; - neg.
aguttadvara, mfn., D III 213,7 (indriyesu aguttadvarata ca
bhojane amattaññuta ca); MI 32,w; S IV 119,25/oll.
(kittavata nu kho ... aguttadvaro hoti ti ... ); It 23,3; Ja III
532,4; Dhs 1345; 0
-bhasana, n., prívate or
confidential talk; Dhatup 578 (manta -e); Sadd 539,19
(manto ti -arp); - agutta, mfn., l. unprotected,
unguarded; not controlled, not watched over; Vin I
284,31 (sailghassa bhal)<;lagare civaraJTI -arp hoti);
11 148,21 (vihara -a honti); S IV 70,3 (cha-y-ime ...
phassayatana adanta -a arakkhita asarpvuta); A I 7,3
(cittaJTI bhikkhave -arp mahato anatthaya sarpvattati ti);
lt 23,12* (cakkhu sotaJTI ca ghanaJTI ca jivha kayo tatha
mano etani yassa dvarani -ani 'dha bhikkhuno; It-a I
101,12joll.: yassa bhikkhuno etani manachaqhani
dvarani sativossaggena pamadaJTI apannatta satikavatena
apihitani); Ja IV 247,5 (nagararp -aJT~); Vism 22,1
(dvaraJTI pi -arp hoti); Sp 388,2o (yo pana sailghiko
dabbasambharo -o deve vassante temeti atapena
sukkhati); 778,15 (seyyamattam eva nasseyya thanassa
--taya); - 2. unguarded, unwatchful; not controlled;
A I 281,1* (-aJT~ cakkhusotasmiJTI indriyesu asaJTIVUtarp);
- sugutta, mfn., well-guarded, well-defended; carefully
watched over; Vin V 133,5 (attano silakkhandho -o hoti
surakkhito); S IV 70,13 (cha-y-ime. .. phassayatana
sudanta -a ... ); It 24,11* (etani yassa dvarani -ani 'dha
bhikkhuno); Th 1141; Ja V 29,2* (mata ... -a, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee sugatta); Sp 1129,28 (araññakassa pana viharo na
-o hoti); Spk I 321 ,4 (Atavakassa pana vimanaJTI
bhummaqhaJTI -aJT~ pakaraparikkhittarp); - see also
gopayati, gopeti 1, jigucchati.
gutti, f [S. gupti], protecting, protection; guarding;
controlling; D III 148,27* (-!su rakkhavaral)esu ussuko );
195,zz (uggaifhatu ... bhagava atanatiy~ rakkhaJTI
bhikkhunaJTI ... -iya rakkhaya avihiJT!saya); A IV 106,17
(suparikkhittaJTI hoti ... nagaraJTI abbhantaranaJTI -iya);
Ja IV 295,15' (na vayame attajanassa -iya); Dhs 1347
(imesaJTI channaJTI indriyanaJTI -i gopana arakkho
saJT!varo) = Vibh 248,41; Mi1402,19 (pel)ahika ... sayarp
pakkhigal)aJTI upeti attano -iya); Sp 356,11 (evaJTI -iJT~
katva, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce guttaJTI); Ps III
321,4 (rakkhavaral)aguttin ti rakkhasailkhatarp e' eva
avaral)asailkhataJTI ca -iJT~); Dhp-a IV 8S,11 (tasmiJTI
dvare saJT!varo thakanaJTI pidahanaJTI -i kata nama hoti);
Mhv 37:110 (sukhite sabbabhoganaJTI jlvitassa ca -iya);
- agutti,f, not protecting; lack of control; Dhs 1345
(imesarp channarp indriyanarp -i agopana anarakkho
asaJT!varo) = Vibh 248,25; Saddh 341 (indriyanaJTI -ito);
- se e also nagaraguttika.
guthagataip in E e at PsI 71,20 is wr for gütha- (Be, Ce, Se
so).
guthaphassaip in Ee at Sp 51 0,1s is wr for gütha- (Be, Ce,
Se so).
-guthadini in cpd in Ee at Ps I 283,9 is wr for -guthadlni
(Be, Ce, Se so).
guda, n. [ts], the anus; Abh 274 (payu tu ... -aJTI).
V'gudh
~gudh 1 , see gujjhati.
2
~gudh , [S. Dhatup gudhnati, Wg § 31:45], to be angry;
Dhatum 237 (gudha rosane).
gunda, f [S. lex. gundra], a kind of Cyperus; SAF: rush
nut, Cyperus rotundus L.; Abh 599 (-a ca
bhaddamutta111 ca); M 11 83,17 (ayasma Mahiikaccano
MadhurayaJ11 viharati 0 -vane; Ps III 319,12: 0 -vane ti
ka~hagundavane).
gunnaip, pl. gen. of go qv.
gumugumayati, pr. 3 sg. [onomat., ef S. guJ11kara,
gumagumayita], hums; part.pr.
gumagumayamana, mfn., Bv-a 95,3 (bhamaraga~ehi
-ayamana111 . . . Rammanagara111 pavisitva, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se gumbagumbayamanaJ11); 179,24 (bhamara-
madhukarayuvat!hi anubhütappacarahi samantato
-amane . . . pavane, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gumba-
gumbayamane).
~gumb, [?] to eolleet, group; Dhatum 293 (gumb' abba
gumbane); - absol. gumbetva, Paris-a 507,28 (ti~a­
santharadayo ti~adlni gumbetva kata).
gumba, m. (and n. and -a, f ?) [S. gu1ma, m.], l. a clump
of trees or plants, a thieket; a bush, a shrub; Abh 454;
550 (thambo -o ca akkhandhe, Be so; Ce thambho tu -o
akkhandho); 861; Jaii 19,22 (hatthi1a~~aJ11 udakena
nadiJ11 otaritva gacchantaJ11 . . . ekasmiJ11 -e laggitva
aqhasi); IV 438,6 (sunakha . . . -a111 pavisitva udarena
nipajjiJ11su); Mil 326,27 (pupphuqhana111 -o atthi
phaluqhana111 rukkho atthi); Sp 486,13 (sakha-
pa1asapallavadicchadanena -am iva gaccham iva ca
attana111 dassetva); Ps III 332,22 (so kira ekaJ11 -a111
ghaqetva mige ughapeti); Ud-a 104,3 (candanagalu-
km1kumatagarakappüradi -a nama); Vv-a 66,9 (esa -o
paññayati eta111 nlharitva gehaJ11 karehl ti); - ife see
e)aga1a- (sv e)agala\ kamboji- (sv kambojl); - 2. a
troop of soldiers, a guard; Abh 861 (-o ... balasajjane );
Vin I 345,17 (te manussa ... -aJ11 rhapetva pakkamiJ11SU);
D III 194,7 (catuddisa111 rakkhaJ11 thapetva catuddisa111
-a111 rhapetva); Ja III 436,3 (raja nagaraguttikaJ11
~apetva tattha tattha -aJ11 rhapetva coraJ11 ga~hapetva
slsa111 assa chindatha ti aha); - 3. a troop, erowd; a
group; Abh631; 861 (-o ... samühe); JaVI 52,2
(tadisana111 assana111 -e); Sv 226,21 (macchana111 -a111
ghara ti macchagumbaJ11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a) = Ps 11
324,11 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a) = Mp 1 57,14;- ife see
maccha-; - 0 -gumba, mfn., 0 -gumbaJ11, ind., in troops;
in groups; Mi1117,19 (-a111 va1ahaka gagane
sandhavanti); Sv 869,36 (ka1apabandha viya -a hutva);
922,13 (-aJ11 hutva carantehi corehi virahitan ti); Pj 1
119,31 (manussa -a hutva); - agumba, m., not a
thieket; not a bush; Spk 1 64,32 (so hi -o va samano
siikhap~~adiparicchadanena gumbava~~a111 dassetva);
- niggumba, mfn., free from bushes, clear; free from
obstruetions or obseurities; Ja 1 187,6 (ummaggaJ11 ...
maggasadisa111 titthasadisa111 nijjara111 -a111 katva);
Mil 420,2 (Milindo raja ... ratanattaye sunikkailkho -o
nitthaddho hutva); Sv 102,17 (dvasaqhi dirrhigatani
bhinditva nijjara111 -a111 katva kathetuJ11); 497,17 (paccaye
nijjare -e katva); Th-a 1 226,11 (kammaqhana111 -aJ11
nijjaraJ11 katva acikkhanto viharati); Sadd 119,22 (-aJ11
nijjaraJ11).
58 guru
gumbana, n. [ef~gumb, gumba], eolleeting, grouping;?
Dhatum 294 (abba -e).
gumbiya, m. [from gumba], one of a troop of soldiers, a
guard; Vin 1 345,19 (Dlghavukumaro Bara~asiJ11
pavisitva sura111 nlharitva -e payesi).
gumbetva, se e sv ~gumb.
guyha\ mfn.,fpp ofgühati qv.
guyha2 , n. [from guyhati; ef S. guha], eoneealment;
keeping seeret; a hiding-plaee; ? Ja II 174,16' (ta111
[taru~asassa111] hi yada antopaviqhakiikaJ11
paricchadetuJ11 sakkoti tada guyhatl ti -aJ11, kiJ11 guyhati,
kiikaJ11, iti kiikassa -aJ11 kiikaguyhan ti); VI 381 ,5*
(guyhassa hi -am eva sadhu, na hi guyhassa pasattham
avikammaJ11).
guyhaka, guhaka, m. [S. guhyaka], one of a class of non-
human beings, attendants of Kubera; a kind ofyakkha;
Abh 13 (siddho bhüto ca gandhabbo -o
yakkharakkhasa); Ap ?2,10 (kumbh~~a -a tatha, Ee so;
Ce, Se kumbha~~a garu)a; Be garu)a kumbhayakkhaka)
= Be II 181,6 (Be so; not in Ce, Ee, Se; Ap-a 569,3:
kurnbhamattani a~~ani yesa111 devanaJ11 te kumbh~~a,
paricchadetva nigühitva paricchadanato garu)a -a nama
jata, Be, Se so; Ee wr garu)ha -a nana jata; not in Ce)
quoted Th-a (Be) 1 395,24 (Be, Se kumbh~~a garu)a
tatha; Ce kumbh~~a ca yakkha tatha; not in Ee);
Samantak 525 (sattha ... disvana 0 -jane); 531 (guhaka,
me); 578 (guhakakapayo, me); Sadd 458,28 (guhü
sa111var~e: ... -o).
guyhati, see sv gühati.
guyhitabba, mfn.,fpp of gühati qv.
guru, mfn. and m. [ts], respected, venerable; a respected
person, esp. a (religious) preceptor, a teacher; Ja IV
102,12* (na tuyha vu~~a ca -ü ca atthi, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee garü) = Cp-a 165,2* (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se garü);
Ap 460,26 (-üsu pi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se garüsu); Mi191,21
(-una pi saha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se garuna); 95,s (-uno
pade sirasi añja1iJ11 katva, Ee so; Se -ussa; Be, Ce
garuno); Ps 1 204,18 (bhavanlyassa -uno santike
sikkhapadaJ11 gahetva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se garuno);
Pv-a 3,21 (sam~abrahm~agurujanesu, eds so);
Cp-a 310,30 (-u bhavanlyo ca, Ce, E e so; Be, Se garu);
Saddh 417 (gurüsü pi, Ee so, but ms garusü pi);
Sadd 430,27 foil. (keci panacariya -u garü ti ca dvidha
gahetva bhariyavacakatte garusaddo rhito
acariyavacakatte pana 0 -saddo ti vadanti, ta111 na
gahetabbaJ11, pa)ivisaye hi sabbesaJ11 yathavuttanaJ11
atthana111 vacakatte garusaddo yeva icchitabbo ...
sakkarabhasavisaye pana o -saddo yeva icchitabbo );
923,3foll. (garu iti Magadhika bhasa ... -u iti pana
sakkarabhasa pavacane adassanato, Bodhiva111se pana
0
-car~aparicariyavasane
0
ti ca ettha -saddo
lokiyamahajane pasiddhabhavena sakkarabhasato naya111
gahetva acariyehi vutto ti darrhabbaJ11; cfMhbv 2,10: Ee
garu- ); - 0
Upadesa, m., instruction from a teaeher;
Saddh 227 (-' -agamato, E e so, but ms garüpadeso
gamato);- -dakkhil}.a,f, a teacher's fee; Vv-a 229,24
0
(kin te -aJ11 deml ti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se garu-); -
0 3
-Vasa, m. [guru + vasa ], residing with a teacher; pupil-
ship; Ps I 58,3o (-a111 vasissama, Ce, Ee so; Be garu-; Se
garusa111vasaJ11); - se e also garu 2.
gula echa
gulaccha, m. [S. !ex. guluccha], a bunch of flowers, a
cluster of hlossoms; Sadd 922,2o (guccho -o ... Va!).l).a-
bhedo 'yaJT!).
gulasi, f [?], a kind of plant; Sp 835,24 (anujanami
bhikkhave pal).l).iini bhesajjani nimbapal).l).aJTI ...
patolapa!).l).aJT! o -pal).l).aJTI kappasikapa!).l).aJTI, Se so,
perhaps wr; Be sulasi-; Ce tulasi-; Ee sulasa-; quoting
V in 1 20 l ,22: sulasipal).l).aJTI); l 093,4 (ul).hayaguya
0
-pal).J).ani ... pakkhipanti, E e so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce
sulasi-; Se tulasi- ).
gulika, ? Patis-a 410,27 (gulagul).thikajato ti ... gula nama
sakul).ika, tassa kulavako ti pi eke,
gulikasakul).ikakulavako ti eke, Ce, Ee so; not in Be, Se).
1
-/guJ , [?], to release;? Dhatum 576 (gula mokkhe).
2
-/guJ , [?] to rol! around; ? to exchange; ? Dhatum 577
(gula parivattanamhi).
1
guJa (sometimes written gula), m. [S. gu<,Ja], a ball or
glohe; a round die; Abh 1088 (gole ... -o); Sp 621,12
(akkhena ti -ena); Sv 812,25 (akkhehi dibbissama ti -ehi
ki)issama); Ps V 35,27 (etaJTI -aJTI gahetva hatthena
vagetva); Dhp-a III 455,15 (Sammadighikaputto -aJTI
khipamano); IV 124,6 (chasu khattiyesu püve lakkhaJTI
katva -ehi kilantesu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -e); - ifc see
ayo- (sv aya[s]), kila-, daru-, pasal).a-, puppha-, mal).i-,
2 bhattaJT! catukkabhattaJT! -an ti aññani pi cattari bhattani
mala-, loha-, sutta- (sv sutta ), sela-;- 0 -kiJa,f, a game
with dice (or halls); Dhp-a 1 178,13 (seghino putto
darakehi saddhiJTI -aJTI kilanto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se gulaJT!)
f- Patis-a682,I7 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gulaka-); Dhp-al
178,2o (Ghosako kira -aya cheko; f- Pa¡is-a 682,24: eds
gulaka- ); III455,14 (dve daraka abhikkhaJ?.aJTI -aJTI
kilanti); - 0
-pasaQa, m., a round stone; Thüp 222,9
(yodhehi -e attharapetva kammarakü¡ehi ahanapetva
CUJ).l).avicul).l).e karesi);- 0 -pasaQaka, m., a round stone;
Mhv 29:3 (yodhehi aharapetva -e);- 0 -maQ¡Jala, n., a
circular area for dicing (or for playing ball);? Dhp-a 1
134,17 (tassa [patiya] -e thapetva ugghatitamattaya
püvagandho sakalanagare chadetva thito );
0
-valaka, mfn., with a thick (or knotted? or matted ?)
fringe; D II 354,17 (therakani ca vatthani -ani, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce gülaga)akani; Sv 814,12: -ani ti guladasani,
puñjapuñjavasena thitamahantadasani ti attho ).
2
guJa (sometimes written gula), m. (and n.) [S. gu<,Ja], a
form of sugar, in lumps or liquid; treacle, molasses;
Abh462 (-o ca phlil).itaJT! khal).(,lo); 1088; Vinl
210,3 foil. (-e pighaJT! pi charikaJTI pi pakkhipante
disvana akappiyo -o samiso, na kappati -o vikale
paribhuñjitun ti); 226,19 (anujanami bhikkhave gilanassa
-aJT!, agilanassa gulodakan ti); Ja I 448,22 (ekacce
mlil).ava -aJT! dadhina bhuñjiJTISU ekacce khirena);
Vism 521,9 (yatha loke semhassa paccayo -o sernho -o
ti vuccati); Spk III 23,23 (rañño kira pañcahi sakatasatehi
-aJT! ahariJT!su); As 204,2 ( -aJTI phal).itaJTI sakkaraJTI
samagghaJT!labbhati); Mhv 34:5; - o ' -asa va, m. [gula+
asava 1], spirit distilled from sugar or molasses; Vin IV
110,16 (merayo nama pupphasavo . . . -o sambhara-
saJT!yutto) f- Vv-a 73,14; Sp 859,29 (-o nama ucchu-
rasadihi kañyati); - 0
-piQ!Ja, m. a lump of sugar;
Vin IV 112,11 (mahantaJTI -aJT! adasi); Sp 848,28 (imassa
-assa ettakaJTI padesaJT! ga!).ha ti); Sv 83,27 (bhikkhuno
pana vasanatthane eka ta!).(,lulana)i eko -o catubhaga-
59 gu}iigul)thikajiita
mattaJTI sappi ti ettakaJTI nidhetuJTI vagati); Spk 1 259,23;
-
0
-piQ!Jaka, m., a lump of sugar; Sp 852,3o; Sv 731,12
(-e nilinamakkhika viya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -pil).<,like) f-
0
Ps V 24,15; - 0 -püva, m., 0 -püvaka, n., a sugar-cake;
Ps 1178,26 (madhupil).<,likan ti mahantaJTI -aJTI); Mhv 10:3
(dhitu me 0 -püvakaJT!); - 0 -phala, m., a kind of tree;
SAF: rack tree, toothhrush tree, Salvadora persica L.;
Abh 554 (-o pilu); - 0
-yanta, n. a sugar-mill;
Bv-a 114,28 (ucchuyantaJTI va pi)itan ti ... -aJTI va pilitan
ti pi patho, so yev' attho); Mhv 34:4 (-amhi katvana
1
bhatiJTI laddha gule tato); - see also go)ika , talagula-
1
patala (sv tala ).
guJaka, m. [S. gu<,Jaka], a hall, a die; a lump; a cluster;
Ja I 380,13' (akkhan ti -aJTI); Sv 495,25 (yatha pana
akulaJTI tantaJTI kañjiyaJTI datva kocchena pahataJTI tattha
tattha 0 -jataJTI hoti ga!).\hibaddhaJTI, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
kulaka-) = Spk II 96,17 = Patis-a 410,zo (eds kulaka-); -
ifc see kila- (sv kila), baddhasattu- (sv bandhati); -
0
-ki!a,J, a game with dice (or balls); Patis-a 682,24
(Ghosito kira -aya cheko; f- Dhp-a 1 178,zo: eds gula-);
- o -bhatta and!or gulhakabhatta, n., a mea! served to
those bhikkhus allotted small balls; ? a concealed
mea!; ? or one distributed by means of a secret lottery; ?
Sp 1271,9 (aghakathayaJTI pana viharabhattaJT! aghaka-
vuttani, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gulhaka-); 1271,19
(mahabhisaiJ.kharikena atirasakapüvena pattaJT! thaketva
dinnaJTI -aJTI nama, Ce so; Ee, Se mahabhisaiJ.kharitena;
Be pattaJTI püretva thaketva ... gulhakabhattaJT!); 1271 ,2o
(aparaJTI pi -aJTI nama atthi, idh' ekacce manussa maha-
dhammassavanaJTI ca viharapüjaJTI ca karetva sakala-
saiJ.ghassa datuJTI na sakkoma, dve til).i bhikkhusatani
amhakaJT! bhikkhaJT! ga!).hantü ti bhikkhupariccheda-
jananatthaJT! gu!ake den ti).
guJajivha in Ee at Sv 938,28 is wr for gülhajivha (Be, Ce,
Se so).
guJati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gu<,Jati, Wg § 28:77], guards;
Sadd 461,1 (gula rakkhay~: -ati gulo).
guJa, gula,f [?],a bird; Sv 495,3o (-a nama sakul).ika, Ee
so; Be, Ce kula; Se gul).a) = Spk II 96,22 (Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be kula) = Mp III 205,12 (eds gula)= Patis-a 410,26 (Ce,
Ee gula; Be, Se kula).
guJaguQthikajata, gulagul).<,likajata, mfn. [cfBHS
gu<,Jaguñjikabhüta, gul).avagul).thitabhüta; cf also
1
gal).thijata, ga!).\hika , *gul).theti], hecome enveloped in a
tangled hall; ? knotted in a hall; ? in a tangle of
threads; ? D II 55,15 (etassa ... dhammassa ananubodha
appativedha evaJT! ayaJTI paja tantakulakajata
gulagul).\hikajata muñjababbajabhüta . . . saJT!SliraJT!
nativattati, Ee so; Ce guJagul).(,likajata; Se gul).agaJ?.thika-
jata; Be kulagaJ?.thikajata; Sv 495,3ofoll.: guJagul).(,likaJTI
vuccati pesakaranaJTI kañjiyasuttaJT!, gu\a nama
sakul).ika, tassa kulavako ti pi eke, Ee so; Ce
guJagal).thikaJTI ... kula nama ... ; Se gul_lagaJ?.thikaJT! .. .
gul).a nama ... ; Be kulagal).thikaJTI ... kula nama ... ;
Sv-pt 11 118,10 foll.: vinanato gula ti itthiliilgavasena
laddhanamassa tantavayassa guJ.lthikaJTI nama
akulabhavena aggato va mülato va duviññeyyavayavaJT!
khalitathaddhasuttan ti, Ee so; Be kula ti ...
ga!).\hikaJTI ... khalitatantasuttan ti) = S II 92,15 (Ce -a;
guJika
Ee gu)igandhika-; Se guFgu1_1~ika-; Be kulaga1_1¡hika-;
Spk II 96,21: guJagul_l~ika~ ... guJa nama ... , Ce so; Ee
gu!agu1_1¡hika~ . . . gu)a nama ... ; Se guFgaJ.lthika~ ...
gu)a nama ... ; Be kulaga1_1¡hika~ ... kula nama ... ) t
IV 158,s (Ce -a; Ee gu1_1agu1_1ika-; Be kulaga1_1¡hika-; Se
kulagu1_19ika-) quoted Vism 586,4 (Ce, Ee -a; Se
gu1_1iga1_1thika-; Be kulaga1_1¡hika-) t A 11 211,33 (aya~
loko ... guJaguJ.19ikajato, E e so; Ce gulagu1_19ika-; Be, Se
gulagu1_1¡hika-; Mp III 205,11: gulagu1_19ika~ ... gula
nama ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gulagu1_1¡hik~ ... gula
nama ... ) t Pa¡is I 127,16 (lokasannivaso ... -o, Ce, Se
so; Ee gulagu1_1¡hika-; Be kulaga1_1¡hika-; Pa¡is-a410,25:
gulagu1_1¡hika~. .. gula nama ... , Ee so; Ce gula-
gu1_19ika~ . . . gula nama ... ; Be, Se kulaga1_1~ik~ ...
kula nama ... ) quoted Ud-a 142,25 (Ee gulagu1_1¡hika-; Be
kulagu1_19ika-; Se kulaku1_19ika-; Ce omits) and It-a l
143,29 (Ee gulagu1_1¡hika-; Ce gulagu1_19ika-; Be, Se
kulagu1_1¡hika-).
guJika, f [S. gu9ika], a small hall or globe; a globule, a
pill; S V 462,3 (puriso mahapa¡haviya satta
kolatthimattiyo -a upanikkhipeyya; Spk 11 130,12: -a ti
mattikaguJika, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr matthika-); Spk 11
156,29 (t~ pa¡havi~ bhinditva vuttappamiil_l~ -a~
karitva); Th1-a 240,18 (vattani-r-iva ti lakhaya -a viya);
263,16joll. (Jambud1po ti sailkhat~ mahapathavi~
kolatthimatta badaratthimatta -a katva . . . ta -a
matamatüsv eva na ppahonti); - ifc see dadhi-, ma1_1i-,
mutta-;- 0 (a)-kalapaka, m., a string of balls or beads;
Sp 1200,2 (kuruvindakasuttiya ti kuruvindakapasal_la-
cul_ll_lani lakhaya madditva kataguJikakalapako vuccati) t
Ps III 280,17 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee katavuJikalapako, prob.
wr).
guJigandhikajata, see sv gu)agu1_1¡hikajata.
guJha, mfn., pp of gühati qv.
guJhaka, see sv gü)haka.
guJhodakan ti in Be, Ee at Pe¡ 103,7 is prob. wr for
gu)odakan ti (Ce so).
guha, m. [ts], the god Skanda;? Sadd 458,28 (guhü
sa~varane: gühati ... -o guyhako).
guhaka, m., see sv guyhaka.
guhana, see sv gühana.
guha (in Ee sometimes written güha), f [ts], l. an
enclosed (hiding) place or space; a cave, a cavern;
Abh 609 (le1_1a~ tu gabbhara~ -a); Vin I S8,2o
(atirekalabho viharo a99hayogo pasado hammiy~ -a);
139,34 (upasakena sailgh~ uddissa ... -a karapita hoti);
D 11 269,29 (andhakaro -ay~ antaradhayi aloko
udapadi, so read with Be, Ce, Se); Vv 50:16 (s1ho va
-am assito); Th 602 (vasita~ me araññesu kandarasu
-asu ca); Ja 11 383,7* (vasimha selassa -aya); V 15,23*
(pate papat~ sobbh~ -~ candaniyoligall~);
Ap 413,28 (kü¡agara -a ramma); Vibh 251,12 (le1_1a~ pi
senasan~ -a pi senasan~ rukkhamül~ pi
senasan~; Vibh-a 366,9: -a ti bhümidañ va yattha
ratttindiva~ d1p~ laddhu~ vattati pabbataguha va
bhümiguha va); Mil 398,25 (passati ... rukkhamüla~ va
-a~ va pabbhara~ va); Sp 573,12 ( -~ pi ighakaguh~
va silaguha~ va daruguh~ va bhümiguh~ va
mahant~ pi karontassa anapatti); Ps lll 220,23 (tassa
-aya dvare pilakkharukkho ahosi); Ap-a 153,36 (tisso
60 gütha
-ayo suva1_11_1aguha ma1_1iguha rajataguha ti); - ifc see
giri-;- 2. the (cave of the) body; Sn 772 (satto -aya~
bahunabhichanno; Nidd I 23,8: -a vuccati kayo; Pj II
515,30: -ayan ti kaye);- 0 -saya, mfn. and m. [guha +
saya2], l. (mfn.) being in the body; A IV 98,3 (itaya~
kodharüpena maccupaso -o); Dhp 37 (dürailgama~
ekacara~ asar1ra~ -a~ ye citt~ s~yamessanti;
Dhp-a I 304,11: guha nama catumahabhütaguha, ida~ ca
hadayarüpa~ nissaya pavattatl ti -a~ nama jata~); Ja V
367,6* (khara ca bandhana e' eta maccupasa -a, Be so;
Se guhalaya; Ce, E e maccupaso -o; 367 ,3o· foil.: itthiyo
nama sañraguhaya~ puna vasanakamaccu nama eta, Ee,
Se so; Ce omits puna; Be sar1raguhasayavasen' eva
maccu);- 2. (mfn. and m.) (one) who lives in a hiding-
place, a snake; (one) who lies in a cave; Nidd 1 8,3
(sappo ... guhay~ setl ti -o); Ap 3,1 (kesañ va -a;
Ap-a 107,24: -a guhay~ sayamana).
guhitabba, mfn.,fpp ofgühati qv.
-
gu, see sv gu 1.
gütha, m.n. [S. lex., BHS id.], excrement, Jaeces; dung;
excretion; Abh 274; Vin IV 266,2 (uccaro nama -o
vuccati); D 11 347,19 (so... yava agganakha -ena
makkhito); A I 34,27 (appamattako pi -o duggandho
hoti); Vv 52:11 (kin nu -~ ca mutta~ ca asuc1
pa¡idissati); Pv 9:1 (-a~ ca mutta~ ruhir~ ca pubb~
paribhuñjati kissa aya~ vipako); Ja V 144,34' (tes~
bhikkhabhajanani -assa pürapetva); Vism 301,18 (ubhohi
hatthehi vltaccike va ailgare -a~ va gahetva para~
paharitukamo puriso vi ya); Ps 11 292,34 (sunakho ... -a~
disva akhaditva gantu~ na sakkoti); Spk I 303,24 (so
-a~ viya aggi viya ka1_1hasappo viya ca parivajjetabbo);
Dhp-a 11 57,22 (naggo -a~ khadanto kese luñcanto
bhümiya~ sayanto); Nidd-a I 207,18 (til_laPal_ll_lehi viya
-a~ kayavac1kammehi papa~ chadetl ti); - ifc see
akkhi- (sv akkhi\- o• -adi(n), mf(n). (or 0 ada, mj{-J]),
eating excrement; (one) who feeds on dung; S 11 228,24
(m!Jhaka -1 güthapüra pu1_11_1a güthassa, purato e' assa
maha güthapuñjo; Spk II 207,13: -1 ti güthabhakkha);
PsI 39,19* (-1 sa va güthasmi~ hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be -1
viya; Se güthani sa va);- 0 -küpa, m. a cess-pit; V in lll
107,1 (addasa~ purisa~ -e sas1sak~ nimugg~ ubhohi
hatthehi gütha~ khadanta~); MI 74,36 (-o
sadhikaporiso püro güthassa); A I 127,8 (-o kat¡hena ...
ghattito bh1yosomattaya duggandho hoti; Mp JI 198,11:
-o ti güthapul_ll_lO küpo gütharasi yeva va); Sn 279 (-o
yatha assa sampu1_11_10 ga1_1avassiko); Th 568 (-ena
ga)hito ... kayo, Be, Ce so; E e, Se -e niga)hiko; Th-a 11
244,12joll.: vaccaküpena vaccen' eva va bharito,
--nigaJhito ti pi paJi, vaccaküpato nikkhanto ti attho, Be,
Se so; Ce -e nigaJhito ti pi; Ee -ena gaJhito ti pi); Ja VI
370,2 (te agate ... -e khipapetva); - 0 -gata, mfn. and n.
l. (mfn.) fallen into dung, covered with dung; smeared
with excrement; S III 93,17 (chavalat~ ubhato paditt~
majjhe -~; Spk 11 302,23: majjhe -makkhita~) t
0
It 90,5; A I 126,22 (ahi -o kiñcapi na 9~sati atha kho
na~ makkheti); Bv 2:13 (-o puriso taJaka~ disvana
pürita~ na gavesati t~ taJaka~ na doso taJakassa so;
Bv-a 71,2o: -o ti 0 -küpagato, güthena gato makkhito va);
- 2. (n.) excrement; dung; MI 424,6 (tejo suci~ pi
9ahati asuci~ pi 9ahati -~ pi 9ahati muttagata~ pi
güthaka
gahati ... na ca tena tejo aniyati ... ; Ps III 140,9: -an ti
adisu gütham eva -arp.); A IV 374,26 (pathaviyarp. ...
-arp. pi nikkhipanti ... na ca tena pathavi attiyati ... ); Ja I
288,28' (-' -adibhedarp. asucirp. pi ... khadati); As 214,16
(ettha ditthiyo eva dighigatani -arp. muttagatan ti adini
viya); Sadd 637,17 (vacasi1ighattharp. antagatadini patanti
padante: . . . -arp. muttagatarp. ... ); - o -gandhi(n), mfn.
1 nisidanti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se gulhani); Ps IV 91,5 (yasmirp.
[gütha + gandhi(n) ], smelling of excrement; Pv 15:15
(kenasi -ini); - 0
-naraka, m., a pit (or hell) of
excrement; Vism 501,25* (yarp. capi -e viya matugabbhe
satto vasarp.);- 0 -niddhamanapana!i,f, afoul drain, a
sewer; Ps II 418,18 (sama1o nama -i, Be, Se so; Ee
samalarp.; Ce sama1arp. nama o -niddhamanapalika; f.
Spk II 231,17: Ee gamato -niddhamanamaggo, but prob.
0
wr; Be, Ce, Se samalo ti gamato 0 -nikkhamanamaggo);
-
0
-niraya, m., the excrement hell; M III 185,1/oll.;
Ja IV 493,7 (dasamase lohakumbhiniraye viya -e viya ca
matukucchimhi vasitva); Dhp-a IV 34,18 (kayassa bheda
-e pi nibbattanti); Vv-a 226,23; Saddh 194;
0
-paharal}aka, m(jn)., (one) who throws dung;
Vibh-a 492,18 (-arp. gütho vi ya pathamatararp. makkheti
ti); - 0 -pal}aka, m., a dung-eating insect, a dung-
beetle; Ja II 212,8;- 0 -bhakkha, mfn., (one) who feeds
on excrement; M Ill 167,29 (san ti ... tiracchanagata pfu.la
-a); Dhp-a II 61,4 (tvarp. ... -o bhümisayo naggo
vicaranto ); Pv-a 192,7 (jatajatanhane -a bhaveyyan ti);
-
0
-bhastá,f, a bag of dung; Th 1151 (-e taconaddhe
uraga1_1gapisacini); - 0
-makkhana, n., smearing with
excrement; Sp 1014,6; - 0 -hanaka in Ee at Spk II
207,13 is wr for güthapfu).aka (Be, Ce, Se so).
güthaka, m. [ts], an excretion; - ifc see akkhi-
(sv akkhi\ kai_!I_la-, danta- (sv danta\
güdha in Ee at It-a I 158,32 (güdhamakkhito) and Il 179,34
(-güdhadini) is wr for gütha (Be, Ce, Se so).
güJha, mfn., pp ofgühati qv.
2
güJhaka, gu~haka, mfn. [gü~ha + ka ], hidden; secret;
Vin II 98,37 (anujanami bhikkhave ... tayo salakagahe
-arp. sakal_li.J.ajappakarp. vivatakarp. ... ); Sp 1198,9 (alajj-
ussannaya parisaya -o salakagaho katabbo); Sv 1041,29
(
0
-vivatakasakai_!I.J.ajappakesu tisu salakagahesu, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se gu~haka-) = Ps IV 44,4 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
gu~haka- ); - see also gu~hakabhatta (sv gulaka).
gühati, guyhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gühati], covers; conceals,
hides; keeps secret; Dhatup 337 (guha sarp.varal_le);
Dhatum 488; Ja II 174,16' (tarul_lasassarp. .. . yada
antopavitthakakarp. paticchadeturp. sakkoti tada guyhati ti
guyharp., kirp. guyhati, kakarp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kirp.
-ati); IV 197 ,22* (tassa guyharp. na -ati); 204,28' (sace
-así manta te nassissanti ti, Be, Ce so; Se guyhisi; Ee wr
sace guyharp. pi); V 78,29' (rakkhiturp. guyhiturp. na
sakkhirp., Ee so; Be, Ce, Se omit guyhiturp.); VI 292,26'
(na rakkhati na -ati katheti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se na
guyhati); 423,18 (na dan' esa mayharp. rahassarp.
guyhissati, Se so; Be guhissati; Ce, Ee nigühissati);
Ap 586,26 (itthimal_lge na -ami, Be so; Ce itthima1_1ge; Ee
itthibha1_1gena -ami; Se itthibhal_lge na guyhami) f. 594,1o
(Ce itthibhange na -ama; Be itthibha1_1ge; Ee
itthibha1_1gena -ama; Se itthibhal_lge na guyhama);
Sadd 458,28 (guhü sarp.vara1_1e: -ati); aor.
2 sg. guyhittho, Ja IV 204,22* (ma ca ssu me pucchito
61 gühati
namagottarp. guyhittho);- pp güJha, gulha, mfn. and n.
[S. gügha; ~V gülha], l. (mfn.) (i) covered; concealed,
hidden; Abh 746; Ja V 341,6* (-am asajja bajjhanti, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se guyham; 342,31': tesu pasesu yo -o
paticchanno paso tarp. asajja bajjhanti, Ee so; Be, Ce
gulho; Se guyho ); Vism 18,3o (kulanarp. ovarakani -ani
ca paticchannani ca yattha kulitthiyo kulakumariyo
kale nirodhasamapatti sisarp. hoti nirodhassa varo
agacchati phalasamapatti -a hoti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
gu~ha); - (ii) secret; esoteric; having a hidden or
ulterior meaning; undetected; Ja V 147,6·
(gambhirapañhan ti atthato ca palito ca gambhirarp. -arp.
paticchannarp., Ee so; Be gu~harp.; Ce, Se guyharp.);
Nidd I 169,1 (-o va attho paticchanno va attho) f. Patis II
195,1 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gu~ho; Patis-a 647,21: lokuttaro
accantatirokkhatta -o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gulho); Nidd I
463,26 (gambhirarp. -arp. nipul_larp. paticchannarp.
lokuttararp. suññatapatisarp.yuttarp. katharp. katheti);
Vism 115,32 (-arp. gantharp. na sikkhapeti, Be, Ce so; E e,
Se gulharp.); As 374,28 (yarp. -arp. gantharp. va
kathamaggarp. va janati tarp. aññarp. na janapetukamo
hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gulharp.); Ps II 197,24 (ime
khattiyapa1_1gita -arp. rahassarp. pañharp. ovagikasararp.
katva agata, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gu~arp.); Spk I 18,15 (iti
bhagava -arp. paticchannarp. katva pañharp. kathesi, Ce,
Ee so; Be gulharp.; Se guyharp.); - gülhagantha,
guyhagantha, m., an abstruse or esoteric text; a text with
a concealed or ulterior meaning; Ps II 264,28 (palirp. va
atthakatharp. va dhammakathabandharp. va -arp. va na
sikkhapenti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se guyha-; Ps-t [Be] II
198,17: saccasattapatisandhipaccay akarapatisarp.yuttarp.
suññatadipanarp. guyhagantharp.) = Mp V 97,1 (Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se gulha-); - gülha-paticchanna, mfn.,
l. undetected and not known about; Sp 811,15 (so kira
Ajatasattuna rajanarp. marapetva pi ... --pa~icchanno va
ahosi, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se gulha-); - 2. having a secret
and hidden meaning; Dhp-a I 402,19 (--paticchanne dasa
ovade adasi, Ce, Ee so; Se guyha-; Be guyhe
paticchanne);- gü~ha-purisa, m., a disguised or secret
agent; Abh 347 (caro ca --puriso); - (iii) secret,
private (ie heterodox); ? disguised, altered; ?
Sp 232,8/oll. (bahirakasuttarp. va hoti siloko va aññarp.
va garayhasuttarp. gülhavessantaragü~avinaya­
vedalladinarp. aññatarato agatarp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
gu~a-; Sp-t [Be] II 47,JOfoll.: bahirakasuttan ti tisso
sailgitiyo anarulhagulhavessantaradini mahasailghika-
nikayavasinarp. suttani); Sv 566,31 foll. (suttapatipatiya
katthaci anagantva . . . gülhavessantaragü~a-ummagga­
gülhavinayavedallapitakanarp. aññatarato agatani
paññayanti ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gu~ha- ); Spk II
201,27 foil. (tisso pana sailgitiyo anarü~arp. ... bahirarp.
--vinayarp. --vessantararp. --mahosadharp. Val_ll_la-
pitakarp. . . . vetullapitakan ti idarp. abuddhavacanarp.
pariyattisaddhammapatirüpakarp. nama, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
gulha-; Ee omits gulhamahosadharp.; Be, Se
... paribahirarp. ... veda11apitakan ti); - 2. (n.) a secret
or esoteric matter; what has a hidden or ulterior
meaning; Nidd I 180,7 (tathagatarp. upasankamitva
pucchanti -ani ca paticchannani ca ; Nidd-a I 301,13:
 gühana
atthajatani ti pathaseso) = Patis II 196,13 (Be, Ce, E e so;
Se guJhani); - fpp (a) guyha\ m.fn. and n. [S. guhya],
l. (what is) to be covered or concealed; the parts of the
body which should be covered, esp. the prívate parts;
(what is) to be kept secret, secret, prívate; a secret;
Abh 352 (rahassarp. -am uccate); 1061 (-aq¡ liiige
rahasy api); D III 187,12 (-aq¡ assa acikkhati); Thi 74
(pilandhanaq¡ vidarp.sentl -arp. pakasikaq¡ bahuq¡, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se pakasitarp.; Thi-a 76,32foll.: ürujaghana-
thanadassanadikaq¡ guyhaq¡ e' eva padajanusiradikarp.
pakasarp. ca ti ... ); Ja V 76,6 (idarp. amhakarp. -aq¡
rahassaq¡); 77,22* (tassaharp. akkhiq¡ vivariq¡ -am
attharp.); 81 ,16* (thiya -arp. na sarp.seyya amittassa ca
PaJ.19ito); 196,12* (vidarp.sayann aiigani -aq¡ pakasitani
ca; 196,16': -arp. ca rahassaiigaq¡ pakasitani ca pakatani
mukhahatthadini); VI 383,3o (mahasatto sabbesaq¡ pi
-aq¡ paccakkhaq¡ akasi); Mil 92,25 (nav' ime pugga1a
mantitaq¡ -arp. vivaranti na dharenti); 168,30 (na
maharaja bhagava -arp. dassesi iddhiya chayaq¡ dassesi);
Spk I 93,26 (aññesaq¡ akathetabbassa pi -assa
kathetabbayuttataya bhariya parama sakha nama); - ifc
see vattha- (sv vattha\ - 2. to be hidden in; ? Ja II
174,7* (pu~~aq¡ nadiq¡ yena ca peyyam ah u jatarp. yavarp.
yena ca -am ahu, a riddle for kaka; cfl74,1s'foll.: tarp.
[taru~asassaq¡] hi yada antopaviqhakakaq¡
paticchadetuq1 sakkoti tada guyhat! ti guyhaq¡, kiq1
guyhati, kakaq1, iti kakassa guyhaq¡ kakaguyhan ti tarp.
vadamana kakena guyhavacanassa karaJ_labhütena
guyhan ti vadanti); - see also guyha2; - guyhaq¡ pi in
Ee at Ja IV 204,28' is wr, for guyhasi, or for gühasi (Be,
Ce so);- --ppakasiya, m.fn., to be concealed and to be
revealed; prívate and public; Ja VI 230,13* (ma
upagacchuq¡ atthesu --ppakasiyesu ca, Be so; Ce, Ee ,
Se --ppakasiyesu ca);- --bhaJ.l<;laka, n., the (ornaments
of the) covered part of the body; ? Ja V 434,4 (katiq¡
ca1eti --bhaJ.l<;iakaq¡ sañca1eti) f. Dhp-a IV 197,7; -
--manta, m. and m.fn., l. (m.) a secret or prívate
discussion or plan; Vin IV 159,26 (rañño antepure
abbhantara --manta bahiddha sambhedaq1 gacchanti);
A III 129,13 (Mp III 279,2: --manta ti guhitabbamanta);
Ja V 77,14* (yo --mantarp. parirakkhaneyyaq1 moha naro
saq¡sati); - 2. (mfn.) keeping discussions or plans
secret; Ja V 82,3* (ye --manta aviki~~avaca da!ha
sadatthesu nara; 82,12·: --manta purisa evarüpa honti
attano guyhaq1 attano anto yeva jlrapenti na aññassa
kathentl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee güJhamanta purisa ...
attano güJhaq¡ ... ); - fpp (b) guhitabba, guyhitabba,
gühitabba, m.fn., Sv 447,16 (vatthaguyhan ti vatthena
guhitabbarp. aiigajatarp. vuccati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
guyhitabbarp.) = Ps 111 377,21 (Be so; Ce, Ee
guyhitabbarp.; Se gühitabbarp.); Mp III 279,2
(guhitabbamanta);- caus. pr. 3 sg. gühayati, conceals;
Sadd 830,8 (guha dusa ice etesaq1 dhatünaq1 saro kvaci
dighattarp. apajjate karite: -ati düsayati); - part.pr.
gühaya(t), m.fn., Saddh 189 (bhayena vinimilento aiigarp.
aiige va -aq¡).
gühanii (and guhana), f [cf S. gühana], concealing,
hiding; Nidd I 79,24 ( ... -a parigühana chadana ... ayarp.
vuccati maya, Be, Ce so; Se guhaJ_la; Ee kuhana
parikuhana) = 378,25 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce guhana) = 422,1o
62 gedha
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee guhana) f. Vibh 358,4 (Ce, Be so; Ee,
Se guhana; Vibh-a 493,23: kayadihi sarp.vara~ato -a) f.
Pp 19,30 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se guhana).
gühii, see sv guha.
ge•:u;lu\ m. [S. lex. id.], a hall (to play with); a bead; Spk I
150,13 (duppaññassa hi katha udake -u viya upp1avati,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ge~<;!uko) =Ud-a 333,1o (Be, Se so; Ee
wr gaccho; Ce 1e9<;1u viya n' upp1avati); Ja I 386,14
(
0
-mayani bahüni piJandhanani karetva, Be, Se so; Ce,
E e wr bhe~<;!u- ); - ifc se e sata- (sv sata\
geJ,u;lu 2 , m.(?) [?], a kind of plant; ? Vin-vn 472
(piqhakacamayarp. damaq¡ 0 -pupphamayaq1 pi ca khara-
pattamaya mala sabbarp. katuq¡ na vattati); - see also
ge~<;!uka .
2
1
geJ,uJuka , m. [S. lex. id.], a hall (to play with); Abh 316
(-o kanduko ); Ja IV 30,25 (ath' assa putto ... -en a k!Ji,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr bhe~<;lukena); V 196,11* (assamassa
ca sa dvare -en' assa k!Jati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr
bhe~<;iuken'); VI471,zr (k!Janatthane kumaro raja-
dh!tararp. -aq¡ pi pasakaq1 pi aharapeti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
wr bhe~<;lukaq¡); Spk II 250,12 (kukkutaJ_l¡;laq¡ . . . -aq¡
viya gahetva khipantena va paharantena va na sakka
ki!ituq1); Dhp-a III 364,5 (tesarp. mukhesu pañca-
VaJ.l~anarp. suttanarp. -a pakkhitta honti); Cp-a 246,s; -
ifc see citta- (sv citta2).
gel}c.J.uka 2 , m.(?) [?], a kind of plant; ? Sp 620,19 (na
kevalarp. ca pupphaguJadamam eva, pitthamayadamaq1
pi 0 -pupphadamaq1 pi Kurundiyarp. vuttarp., Be, Ce so; Se
ge~<;!u-; Ee wr bhe~<;luka-; Sp-t [Be] II 372,3o: 0 -khara-
pattadamanaq¡ patikkhittatta ce1adihi katadamarp. pi na
vattati; Se ge~<;!u-);- see also ge~<;!u 2 .
gedha 1, m. (and -a,.f. ?) and mfn. [from gijjhati], l. (m.f)
[cfS. gardha, grdhya, BHS gardha], greedy, hungry
desire; eager longing; S I 73,31 (na ca kamesu -aq¡
apajjanti); A III 312,14 (cittaq1 ... nikkhantarp. muttarp.
vunhitarp. -amha, -o ti kho bhikkhave pañcann' etaq¡
kamagu~anaq1 adhivacanaq¡); Sn 65 (rasesu -aq¡ akaraq1
alo1o); 945 (-aq¡ brümi mahogho ti; Niddi 429,11: -o
vuccati taJ_lha); Thi 352 (-o suvisamo e' eso mahanto
mohanamukho); Ap 145,3 (ghasesu -am apanno);
Dhs 1059 (iccha muccha ajjhosanaq¡ -o paJigedho ...
ayaq1 vuccati 1obho; As 363,10: imina satta gijjhanti
gedharp. apajjant! ti -o) f. Nidd I 8,15; Nett 18,8 (sekhena
dvisu dhammesu cittaq¡ rakkhitabbarp. -a ca rajaniyesu
dhammesu dosa ca pariyutthaniyesu); Dhp-a I 366,9
(asampattesu patthanavasena sampattesu 0 -vasena
vividhenakarena asattacittarp.); It-a II 14 7,3 (appataya
parittasassa avatthuta, su1abhataya -aya avatthuta ...
das sita hoti); Sadd 484,27 (gidhu abhikañkhayaq1 ... -o);
- ifc see eta- (sv eta[d]); - 2. (mfn.) greedy; eagerly
longing; Ap-a 409,31 (miganarp. maraJ_le 1uddo 1obhi -o ti
miga1uddo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce chedako ti); -
agedha, m., absence of greed; freedom from greed;
Mi1276,9 (--ta niralayata cago ... ); Vism465,7 (a1obho
arammaJ_le cittassa --1akkhano); - see also giddhi,
gedhi.
gedha 2, geha2, m.fn. or m. [?], thick, dense, entangled; ora
thicket; A I 154,1 (mahacoro ti~agahanarp. va nissito hoti
rukkhagahana111 va -aq¡ va pana vanasaJ_l<;laq¡, Ce so; Ee
-arp. va mahavanasa~<;laq¡ va; Be, Se rodhaq1 va
gedhaka
mahavanasru.u;la!11 va; Mp II 254,6: -an ti ghanaq1
arannaq1 saq1sattasiikhaq1 ekabaddhaq1 mahavana-
saJ?.<;la!11, Ce, Ee so; Be rodhan ti ghanaq1 aññrunaññaq1
saq1saghasiikhaq1 ... ; Se gehan ti) = lii 128,23 (Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se rodhaq1 va mahavanasaJ?.<;ia!11 va); As 363,11
(baha1aghena va -o -aq1 va pavanasaJ?.<;lan ti hi
bahalatthen' eva vuttam) Nidd-a I 38,15;
(geha)~~nissita\ mfn., wh~ resorts to a thicket; ? Ja I
158,22' (vatamigaq1 gehanissitaq1 vasam anesi rasehi
Sañjayo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gahananissitaq1; 159,3·: geha-
nissitan ti gahanaghananissitaq1, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
gahananissitan ti; cf 158,16: evarüpo gahananissito vata-
migo, eds so).
1 2
gedhaka, mfn. [gedha + ka ], greedy; eagerly desiring;
Ap-a 316,20 (kamesu -o, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se
gedhito; Ce gadhito);- see also gedhika.
gedhana, n. [from gijjhati; cf S. lex. gardhana], greedy,
hungry desire; Nidd-a II 144,3 (gedhaq1 akaran ti
giddhiq1 -aq1 akaronto taJ?.haq1 anuppadento ti attho, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se omit -aq1; = Pj II 118,7: giddhiq1 akaronto,
eds so).
gedhi,f [from gijjhati; cf AMg gehi, BHS grddhi], greedy,
hungry desire; wanting; M I 330,27 (ma savakesu -iq1
akasi ma pabbajitesu); Ili 116,5 Hi11 apajjati, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se gedhaq1); - see also giddhi,
gedha.
gedhi(n), mfn. [from gedha], greedy for, eagerly longing
for; - ifc see abara-; - 0 (gedhi)-kata, mfn., made
greedy, become greedy; longing for,? MI 330,33joll.
(te ... savakesu --citta pabbajitesu, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
gedhitacitta); - see also giddhi(n).
2 -am ... hoti) f Nidd-a II 106,19 ( 0 -ta) = Patis-a 590,1;
gedhika, mfn. [gedhi(n) + ka ; cf Pkt gehia], greedy;
eagerly desiring; Nidd I 380,17 (c!varamaJ?.<;lana ... 0 -ta
gedhitattaq1 capa1ata capa1yaq1 ayaq1 pabbajitassa
vibhüsa, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce gedhitata; Nidd-a I 413,11:
0
-ta ti abhikañkhitata, Ee so; Be, Se gedhitata ti; Ce
gadhitata) f Vibh 351,31 (giddhikata giddhikattaq1); -
see also giddhika, gedhaka.
1 gi1anaseyyaya nipanno -' -atthaq1 agataya mahatiya
gedhita, mfn. [cf gedha and Pkt gehia; perhaps se en as pp
of (caus. oj) gijjhati qv; cf S. gardhita], greedy, eagerly
desiring; Nidd I 380,17 foll. (clvaramaJ?.<;lana ... 0 -ta
0
-ttaq1 capa1ata capa1yaq1, ayaq1 pabbajitassa vibhüsa,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gedhikata 0 -ttaq1; Nidd-a I 413,11: 0 -ta
ti abhikañkhitata, 0 -ttan ti giddhabhavo abhikañkhita-
bhavo, Be, Se so; E e gedhikata ti .. . 0 -ttan ti; Ce
gadhitata ti .. . gadhitattan ti ... ) f Vibh 351,31 (eds
giddhikata giddhikattaq1); Ap-a 316,2o (kamesu -o, Be,
Se so; Ee gedhako; Ce gadhito);- 0 -citta, mfn. [gedhita
+ citta 1], with thoughts greedily desirous (of), longing
(for); D II 266,7• (tayi -o 'smi, Be, Ce so; Ee gathita-; Se
gadhita-; Sv 702,19 foll.: -o 'sml ti bhadde .. . tayi
baddhacitto smi, -o va gedhaq1 ajjhupetacitto, Be so; Ce
gathitacitto sml ti ... gathitacitto va ... ; Ee gathitacitto
'sml ti ... gedhiracitto va ... ; Se gadhitacitto sml ti ...
gadhitacitto ti va ... ) quoted Sadd 671,4 (tvayi
gadhitacitto 'smi); M I 330,33 foil. (te ... savakesu --citta
pabbajitesu, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se gedhikatacitta); -
0
-mana, mfn. [gedhita + mana(s)], with mind greedy
(for); Pv 20:2 (adata -o amisasmiq1; Pv-a 107,s:
kamamise 1aggacitto gedhaq1 apanno); - see also
63 geha
gathita (sv ganthati), gadhita.
geyya, (mj)n.,fpp ofgayati qv.
geruka (and gerika), m.n. and -a, f [S. gairika, n.,
gairika], red ochre; ruddle; Abh 610 (gerikadiko ); 817
(dhatu ... o• -adisu, Be so; Ce gerikadisu); V in 1 203,14
(imassa bhante ayasmato cakkhurogabadho ...
anujanami bhikkhave añjanaq1 ki'Qañjanaq1 . . . -aq1
kapa11an ti; Sp 1091,1: -o nama suVaJ?.J?.ageruko);
II 151,1sjoll. (pharusaya bhittiya -a na nipatati); A I
210,31 (ukkaq1 ca paricca 10J?.aq1 ca .. . -aq1 ca ...
purisassa ca tajjaq1 vayamaq1 paricca ... upakki1ighassa
jatarüpassa upakkamena pariyodapana hoti; Mp 11
324,16: -an ti 0
-CUJ?.J?.aq1); Sadd 922,20 (-aq1
gaverukaq1 ... vaJ?.J?.abhedo 'yaq1);- 0 -parikamma, n.,
treating or decorating with red ochre; Vin II 151,1o
(anujanami bhikkhave vihare setavaJ?.J?.al11 ka)aVaJ?.J?.aq1
-an ti); Ps III 377,24 (jatihingulakena majjitva dipi-
ctarhaya ghaq1sitva -aq1 katva); - --kata, mfn., treated
or decorated with red ochre; Vin I 48,s (sace --kata
bhitti kaJ?.J?.akita hoti); II 151,7 (--kata bhitti);- se e also
gaveruka.
gelañña, n. [from gilana; AMg gelaJ?.J?.a, ge1anna;
BHS gai1anya, glanya], sickness, illness; weakness;
Abh 323 (ge1aññakallam abadho); D II 99,16joll.
(bhagava gi1ana vughito aciravughito -a ... dhrunma pi
maq1 na paribhanti bhagavato -ena) = S V 153,3foll.;
A III 298,5 (gahapati gi1ana vunlüto aciravunhito -a
daJ?.<;la!11 o1ubbha); Ja II 31,2o (ime dve kürassa ... aññe
asse <;tasitva -aq1 papenti); Vism 478,32 (gelaññupruno
vedanüpadanakkhandho abadhakatta); 636,2
(kayacittanaq1 n' eva daratho ... na akammaññata na
Kkh 2 364,11 (idha maggagamanaparissamo . pi -aq1);
Sp 983,33 (kasasasasemhadina va -en a ... na sakkoti ...
kammavacaq1 savetuq1); Mhv App A 17 (p. 327 ,1s: nara
bhassita navato bhümiq1 -enabhimaddita);
0
-pucchana, n., inquiring about (the health oj) a sick
person; visiting the sick; Cp-a 124,25 (mahapuriso
nagaparisaya ... dhammaq1 desetva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
gilana-); - se e also gi1anapucchana (sv gi1ayati), gilani-
pucchana; - agelañña, n., freedom from sickness or
weakness; fltness, health; Vism 466,8 (ta kayacittana111
--bhava1akkhaJ?.a); As 62,35 (rüpakaye anaturataya -ena
nivyadhitaya arogyanhena kusa1aq1 vuttaq1);
niggelañña, mfn., free from sickness; Sv 386,3
(--bhavaq1); Ud-a 126,6 (--taya).
geva, n. [S. graiva], a necklace; a chain worn round the
neck of an elephant; Sadd 922,23 (g!vaq1 -aq1
g!veyyaq1 ... VaJ?.J?.abhedo 'yaq1).
gevati,pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup gevate, Wg § 14:31: gevu ...
sevane], sprinkles; ? Sadd 440,23 (sevu . . . gevu
gilevu .. . secane: .. . -ati, eds so, perhaps wr for
sevane).
geha 1, n. (pl. nom. -ani, -a) [AMg id.; S. grha, geha], a
house, a dwelling; a shelter; a home, a household; esp.
the dwelling of a layman, living a worldly lije in a
family; Abh 207 (-aq1); V in III 16,7 (nanu nama tata
Sudinna sakaq1 -aq1 gantabban ti); D II 244,2* (yaq1 ca
sutva jahasi no -e runhe ca keva1e); III 155,13' (-am
geha
avasati ca tathavidho ); M II 62,27 (kuto no ... amhaka~
-a~ agarasma anagariya~ pabbajitana~); Dhp 154
(gahakaraka din:l10 si, puna -a~ na kahasi; Dhp-a III
128,20: puna imasmi~ s~saravarre attabhavasaftkhata~
mama -~ na kahasi) = Th 184; Pv 15:22 (apa1,1a -am
ehiti); 29:4 (musavadena chademi natthi eta~ mama -e);
Th 111 (duppabbajja~ ve duradhivasa -a); Ja I 145,2o
(-e anabhirata pabbajitukama hutva); 290,27 (purohitassa
-a~ sattabhümaka~ sattadvarakon:haka~ hoti); 355,7*
(da<;h;lhani -ani jano ca nito); II 18,9 (ekabhümika-
dvibhümikadibhede -e sajjetva, Ce, Ee so; Be geha-
sambhare; Se pasade); IV 477,19* (adhicca vede pariyesa
vitt~ putte -e tata patighapetva); Ap 160,12 (y~ me
atthi sake -e amisa~ paccupaghita~ taha~ buddhassa
padasi~); Cp 3:3:4 (satta ... nirarakkha sake -e
va<;h;lhanti sakañatibhi); 3:5:3 (kada 'h~ -a nikkhamma
pavisissami kanana~); Mil 396,24 (gorüpo sak~ -a~
na vijahati); Sp 282,10 (ekakm;l<;lake -e); 573,18
(mahanta~ pi tiJ.laCchadan~ -a~ katu~ varrati,
ullittadibhavo eva hi kutiya 1akkhaJ.1~); Ps IV 111,15
(bodhi-atth~ hi -~ na gehatthaya bodhi); Dhp-a I
151,4 (devasika~ Anathapi1,1<;likassa -e dve bhikkhu-
sahassani bhuñjanti); Ap-a 58,19 (atthi nu kho amma
kiñci -asmi~ dan~ dassami ti); Cp-a 133,22
(nikkhamanaya -ato nikkhami pabbaji ti attho );
Sadd 861,10 (t~ ta~ vatthu~ ga1,1hati ti -a~, -o ti pi
pulling~ icchanti); - ifc see cora- (sv cora\ jara-
(sv jara\ tapana-, dhura-, paccha-, pacchima-; -
0
-Cchiidaka, m. [geha + chadaka1], a roofer; Sp 562,27
(chadanatthaya -ana~ [santika~ gantva], Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se 0 -chadanakana~); - 0 -jana, m. [geha + jana1], (a
member of) the household; the servants; Jall 347,10
(-a~ tajjenti paharanti carati); Dhp-a I 72,6 (-a tena
saddhi~ parihasa~ karonta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
paribhas~ karonto); Pv-a !6,26 (ta~ rodanti~ koci pi
-o saññapetu~ nasakkhi); - 0 -jjhiiyana, 0 -jjhana, n.
[geha + jhayana1, jhana2], the buming of a house; Ja I
347,21 (--bhayena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -jjhana-) = Dhp-a I
370,18 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce geh~ jhayanabhayena); -
o -(j)jhiipana, n., house-buming; Vism 326,23 (in cpd);
0
- -diisi,f., a female house-slave; Sp 361,13 (-iya
kucchismi~ dasassa jato antojatako); Vibh-a 441,24;
Sadd 261,1;- 0 -nissita 2 , mfn., connected with, attached
to, rooted in, the household (sensual) life; A II 14,5* (yo
vitakka~ vitakketi papaka~ -~; Mp III 16,17: -an ti
ki1esanissita~) = It 117,17* (lt-all 174,36foll.: -an ti
ettha gehavasihi apariccattatta gehavasin~ sabhavatta
gehadhammatta va geh~ vuccati vatthukamo, atha va
gehapatibaddhabhavato ki1esakaman~ nivasaghana-
bhavato t~vatthukatta va kamavitakkadi -~ nama);
Sn 280 (y~ evarüpa~ janatha ... -~ papiccha~; Pj II
311,13 foll.: ya~ evarüpa~ pañcakamagu1,1anissita~
janeyyatha); Ap 438,7 (yada kilesa jayanti vitakka -a);
Mi145,27 (cha-y-imani maharaja -ani somanassani cha
nekkhammanissitani ... ); o -(p )pavesana, n.,
0
-(p)pavesa, m., entering a house; Ja II 169,1 (itarassa
-a~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ppaves~); Ap-a 256,37 (tassa
0
saha -ena); - --maftgala, n. the ceremony of entering a
new house; Dhp-a III 307,13 (geha~ karetva
--maftga1a~ ca chattamaftga1~ ca ekato va karonto );
64 geha
Nidd-a I 416,2 (--manga!~ katabba~, Se so; Be
0
-ppavesa-; Ce, Ee gahappavesamaftgal~);
0
-pema, n., affection rooted in (and appropriate only to)
the household (sensual) life; Vin-vn 1979 (bhikkhuno
methuno rago -~ pi va bhave);
0
-rakkhaka, mf(-ika)n., guarding the house; Spk I 165,3
(-e darake va matugame va thapetva); Dhp-a IV 103,25
(ekam eva dasi~ 0
-rakkhik~ thapetva);
0
-rakkhaJ].a, 0 -rakkhana, n., protecting the house;
guarding the house; PsiV 111,14 (-'-attha~);-
0
-rakkhaJ].aka, mfn., guarding the house; Vv-a 76,zo
(--darake, Be, Ce, Se so; E e geharakkhike darake, prob.
wr); - 0 -lañchaka, ? Ap 358,1 (tato pasadam aruyha
ubbiddha -a tattha naccehi gltehi parivarem' ah~ tada,
Ee so, with fn.: All MSS read gehalañjaka; Ce tayo
pasada~; Be, Se tato pasad~ aruyha mahabhoge
valañjako); - 0 -Viisi(n), mf(n). [geha + vasi(n) 2], (one)
who lives in a house; living in the house; Ja IV 377,3;
It-a II 174,36foll. ( -ihi apariccattatta -ina~ sabhavatta);
Ps III 72,25 (-ino);- 0 -Viisika, mf(n)., (one) who lives
in a house; Ps III 72,17; - 0 -Vigataip in Ee, Se at
Thi 327 is wr; Be, Ce gahavibhava~;
0
-sambhiira, m., materials for making a house; Ja IV
492,7; Vism 593,33 (yatha ca katthadisu -esu eken'
akarena akasa~ parivaretva thitesu gehan ti
voharamatt~ hoti, paramatthato geh~ nama natthi);
Sp 287,27 (sabb~ -~ mattikamayam eva katva); -
0
-sita, mfn. [geha + sita2], connected with, attached to,
rooted in the household (sensual) life; appropriate
(only) to the household life; MI 123,26 (ye -a chanda ye
-a vitakka te pajaheyyasi; Ps II 96,27: -a ti
pañcakamagu1,1anissita); III 136,16 (-ana~ ca silana~ ...
-an~ e' eva saftkappan~ abhinimmadanaya ... ); SI
186,24* (arati~ ca rati~ ca pahaya sabbaso -a~ ca
vitakka~) = Th 1214; S IV 71,19* (manomay~ -~ca
sabba~ panujja nekkhammasita~ iñyati); Vibh 356,17
(ñatake arabbha -o takko vitakko ... ); 381,33fo/l.
(katamani cha -ani somanassani ... ); Nett 53,25foll.
(yani eh a -ani domanassani . . . ta1,1hapakkho, ta1,1haya
et~ vevacan~ . . . ya eh a upekkha -a ay~ dighi-
pakkho); Vism 318,24; Ps III 132,13 (attabhav~ nissaya
-a~ chandarag~ uppadesi); 372,19 (kin nu kho samaJ.lO
Gotamo --vasena parís~ ussadento va apasadento va
dhamma~ deseti udahu no ti);- --pema, n., affection
rooted in (and appropriate only to) a household life;
Sp 211,9 (tata ti vacan~ --pemena aha na sama1,1a-
tejena ... gahapatl ti ida~ pana vacanm:p sama1,1atejen'
aha); 541,29 (ay~ me mata aya~ dhita aya~ bhagini ti
--pemena amasato pi dukkatam eva); 902,19 (purisassa
methunarago va --pem~ va suddhacitt~ va hotu);
Ps II 9,11 (arnhaka~ acariyo amhak~ upajjhayo ti
--pem~ hoti); It-a II 69,27; - ageha, mfn., homeless,
without a house; Ja 11 423,3' (-o pabbajito hutva); Spk I
291,32 (aniketa -a bhikkhavo); Pj II 403,1 (agiho ti -o,
nitta1,1ho ti adhippayo, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se agaho ti); -
niggeha, mfn., homeless, without a house; Spk 1 106,1
(anagariy~ --bhav~ upetassa);- sageha, mfn., with
the houses;? Sp 1050,31 (manussa ... poriiJ.lakagam~
va -am eva cha<;l<;letva aññattha gata, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
sace geham eva);- see also gaha 1, giha.
geha
geha 2, m., see sv gedha2.
go, m.f [ts] (sg. nom. go; acc. gavmp, gavmy¡, gaq¡;
dat./gen. gavassa 1; abl. gava; loe. gave; pl. nom. gavo,
gava; acc. gavo; instr. gohi; gen. gavaq¡, gunnaq¡;
loe. gosu; see also Sadd 209,6foll.; 214,32foll.; iic go-
and, esp. befo re initial vowel, gava 1- qv; ifc -gava 1, -gu 3,
-go); l. (m.) an ox; (j.) a cow; (pl.) cattle; Abh 495
(go!)O go vasabho vuso); 498 (gavi ca siilgini go ca); 869
(go pumitthiyaq¡); V in I 150,9 (gavuq¡ va te demi gaviq¡
va te demi); DI 201,2s (gava khirmp khiramhi dadhi ... );
MI 429,32 (yadi va gavassa yadi va mahisassa ... ); SI
6,9* (gomiko gohi tath' eva nandati) = Sn 33; SI 221 ,34*
(ajjharühati dummedho go va bhiyyo palayinaq¡);
IV 181,12foll. (tena hi tvaq¡ Nanda samikanaq¡ gavo
niyyadehi ti, gamissanti bhante gavo vacchagiddhiniyo
ti); A I 162,12* (gosu parevatasu va); 1142,16
(yatharüpe ... yaññe gavo haññanti); 75,33* (gunnmp ce
taramananmp jimhmp gacchati puilgavo sabba ta jiq¡hmp
gacchanti) f. Jaiii 111,17* (gavaq¡ ce taramananmp);
Sn 296 (gavo no parama mitta yasu jayanti osadha); 31 O
(adhammo iti pakkanduq¡ yaq¡ satthmp nipati gave; Pj 11
323,33: yasma gavimhi satthaq¡ nipati ti vuttaq¡ hoti);
580 (ekameko va maccanaq¡ go vajjho viya niyyati); Ja I
336,11* (usabha rukkha gaviyo gava ca); 11 428,19* (ahaq¡
gamavarmp icche brahmai)I ca gavmp satmp); IV 481 ,12*
(gavaq¡ va naghmp puriso yatha vane pariyesati);
V 15,27* (ahi!)<;)ati go-r-iva bhakkhasadi; l8,21: go-r-iva
ti go!)o viya); Cp 1:9:26 (datva dasidasaq¡ gavmp
dhanmp; Cp-a 85,2o: gavan ti dhenuq¡); Mil267,21 (atthi
hatthi assa gavo mahisa ... ); Vism 166,33 (gopo ekasmiq¡
vaje sabba gavo samaharati); - ifc see kü~ago
(sv kü~a2 ), dammago (sv dammati), paghitago
(sv paghita); - see also cittagu (sv citta2), jaraggava
(sv jara\ tighagu, digu (sv dvi); - 2. (m.) an organ of
sense; Sadd 241,13* (go go!)e e' indriye... vattate);
241,18 (gavo cakkhadin' indriyani caranti ettha ti
gocaro);- 3. (m.) the earth; Abh 181 (vasumati go ku);
Sadd 241,13* (go ... bhumyl~I!l ... vattate); Ps III 435,29
(go ti hi pa~haviya nammp); - 4. (m.) speech; under-
standing; Sadd 241,13* (go... vacane e' eva
buddhiyaq¡ ... vattate ); 241,28 foil. (ten' ah u poriil)a gan
tayati ti gottaq¡, Gotamo ti hi pavattamanmp gaq¡
vacanmp buddhiq¡ ca tayati ekmpsikavisayataya rakkhati
ti gottmp); - 5. (m.) the sun; Sadd 241,14* (go ...
adicce .. . vattate); 242,12 (gosaddo adicce vattati
gogottaq¡ Gotammp name ti); - 6. (m.) a ray of light;
Sadd 241,14* (go ... rasmiymp ... vattate); 242,21 (u!)ha
gavo rasmiyo etassa ti UI)hagu suriyo); - see also
UI)hagu (sv UI)ha); - 7. (m.) water; Sadd 241,14* (go .. .
paniye pi ca vattate ); 242,24 (gositacandanan ti .. .
gosaddena hi jalaq¡ vuccati, go viya sitmp candanaq¡);
-
0
-kal,.lj:aka, m. [go + kal)~aka 1 ], l. a plant, SAF: small
caltrops, Turkey blossom, Tribulus terrestris L.;
Abh 583 (-o ca siilgha~o ); - 2. a sharp clod chumed up
by cattle; Kkh 2 151,24; Sp 756,18 (-o nama gavinmp
khuracchinnakaddamo vuccati); 1088,4 (te kira -e
ekapa~alika upahana rakkhituq¡ na sakkonti); -
--hata, mfn., chumed into sharp clods by cattle; Vin I
195,37 (kal)huttara bhumi khara --hata) f. A I 136,32
(Mp 11 225,11foll.: navava~~he deve gavihi
65 go
akkantakkantaghane khurantarehi kaddamo uggantva
tirthati, so vatatapena sukkho kakacadantasadiso hoti
dukkhasamphasso ... gunnmp khurantarehi chinna ti pi
attho);- 0 -ka1,.11,.1a, m., l. a span; Abh 267;- 2. a kind
ofdeer or elk; Abh612 (-o gal)ikal)~aka); Jaiii 75,22
(eko sükaro eko -o eko mahiso eko gavayo ... );
V 406,30' (ga!)ino ti -a); PsI 120,9 (in cpd);
Ap-a 536,10*; - gokai)I)a [ti] in Ee at Sv 834,20 is wr for
goka!)a qv; - 0 -ka1,.11,.1aka, m., a kind of arrow;? a
spike; ? Mhv 76:48 (tikkhagge vara!)atthaya vara!)anaq¡
ayomaye -e nekasatasahassaga!)ite; vl gokal)~ake); -
0
-klil,.lli,f [go + ka!)a 1], a cow blind in one eye; D III
38,14 foil. (Be, E e, Se so; Ce go kiil)a; Sv 834,2o: -a ti
ekakkhihata ka!)a gavi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gokal)l)a ti);
53,18 (-aq¡ pariyantacariniq¡ karotha); - 0 -kula, n., a
cattle-shed; a cow-pen; Abh 190 (goqhaq¡ tu -mp vajo);
S IV 289,5 (adhivasentu me thera svatanaya -e bhattan
ti); Ja VI 297,18·;- 0 -khliyitaka, mfn., (to be) grazed by
cattle; Vism 415,3 (sassesu pana --mattesu jatesu;
Vism-mh~ [Be] 11 50,22: gohi khaditabbappamiil)esu) =
Pa~is-a 368,12 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
0
-khayitamattesu);
Sadd 327,zo; - 0 -gavesa, mfn., searching for cattle;
Ja V 70,1* (eko caraq¡ -o mü!ho accasariq¡ vane; 72,u·:
naghago!)e gavesanto); - 0
-ghaqtsikli,f, a cow-
rubber" ? a roller, a rod; V in 11 117,3o (kathinmp
paribhijjati, anuJanamJ bhikkhave -aya kathinmp
sailgharitun ti ka~hinaq¡ vive~hiyati ... ; Sp 1207,3: -aya
ti velum va rukkhadandakam va anto katva tena saddhim
sailgharltun ti attho); ·_:_ 0 -ghlitaka, m. [go + ghataka 1 i,
one who kills cows, a butcher; Vin III 105,30 (Sp 508,13:
-o ti gavo vadhitva vadhitva arthito mmpsmp mocetva
vikki!)itva jivikmp kappanakasatto); D 11 294,18; A III
302,15; Ja V 270,4* (cora -a ludda); Vism 348,14; -
0
-ghlitana, n., cattle-killing, cow-slaughter; Pj 11 323,25
(taq¡ -aq¡ disva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -ghatakaq¡); -
0
-cara, m. [cf S., BHS gocara] l. grazing; a search for
food; where and on what animals feed; the particular
feeding-ground, the particular fuud uf un animal; V in III
147,31 (maha saku!)asailgho tasmiq¡ pallale divasmp -mp
caritva); D III 23,22 (tikkhattuq¡ sihanadaq¡ naditva -aya
pakkameyyaq¡; Sv 827,14: aharatthaya pakkameyyaq¡);
Dhp 135 (yatha dal)<;)ena gopalo gavo pacceti -aq¡);
Sn 39 (migo ... yenicchakaq¡ gacchati -aya); Jai 221,31
(imasmiq¡ sare udakmp parittaq¡ -o ca mando nidagho
ca mahanto); III 26,2 (ekassa sihassa ... galo uddhumayi,
-aq¡ ga!)hituq¡ na sakkoti); 52,1 (attano --rthane -aq¡
gahetva); Mil 393,14 (bi!aro asanne yeva -aq¡
pariyesati); PsI 117,9 (jaraggavo diva -e caritva);
Vv-a 218,31foll. (gavo caranti ettha ti -o, -o viya ti -o
ghasesana~~hanaq¡); Moh 167,8foll. (gavo caranti ettha ti
-o gunnmp caral)arthanaq¡, taq¡sadisataya pana sabbo pi
pavattivisayo -o ti veditabbo); Mhv 19:73 (rañño
mailgalahatthi ... aqhasi -aq¡ carmp); - ifc se e vana-
(sv vana\ vari-; - 2. a bhikkhu 's begging-round;
where bhikkhus (properly) beg for food; Vin 11 208,22
(-o pucchitabbo agocaro pucchitabbo; Sp 1281 ,s:
gocaragamo asanne udahu dure ... ); Pv 36:43 (addasa
sama!)aqt . . . pa~ikkantaq¡ -ato nivattmp; Pv-a 240,22:
pi!)<;)apatapa~ikkantmp, ten' aha -ato nivattan ti); Thi 427
(ayya Jinadatta agacchi -aya caramana; Thi-a 247,28:
go
-aya ti bhikkhaya); Ap 294,2o; Vibh 247 ,11joll.; Sp 788,3
(vesiyadi-agocararp pahaya saddhasampannakuladina ca
-ena sampanno ); Nidd-a I 451,1 (-o ti pi1,1<;!apatadinarp.
atthaya upasaii.kamiturp. yuttaghanarp); - ifc see acara-,
maha- (sv maha[t]), vesiya-; - --gama, m., the village
where bhikkhus or other ascetics beg for food; a village
where bhikkhus can (properly) beg for food; M 1 167,6;
Ja IV 8,9 (ekarp. indavaru1,1ikarukkharp. --gamarp katva);
Vism 97,29 (metta bhiivetabba ... --gamamhi issarajane);
Sp 285,16; 1267,2 (amhiikarp. --game pi1,1<;laya caritva);
Ps II 174,4 (sampattapabbajitanarp sulabhapi1,1<;larp.
--gamarp. ca addasarp.); Pv-a 12,18 (sundaro 'yarp.
--gamo manussa ca saddhasampanna paJ.lltarp. piJ.l<;ia-
patarp. den ti ... ); - 3. (i) where the mind (properly)
ranges and finds sustenance; a field or scope or sphere
of action or attention; D III 58,19 (-e bhikkhave caratha
sake pettike visaye; Sv 846,2o: -e ti cariturp. yuttaqhane);
S V 148,1 (ko ca bhikkhave bhikkhuno -o sako pettiko
visayo, yad idarp. cattaro satipaghana); Dhp 22 (pa1,1<;lita
appamade pamodanti ariyanarp -e rata); 93 (suññato
animitto ca vimokho yassa -o)= Th 92; Sn 961 (kyass'
assu idha -a); Th 1085 (accherarp. vata buddhanarp.
gambhiro -o sako); Ap 48,1o (vinayo mayharp. -o);
Patis I 180,6 ( -arp. ca pajanati; Patis-a 512,n: -an ti
vipassaniikha1,1e saii.khariirammaJ.larp., maggakkha1,1e ca
phalakkha1,1e ca nibbaniirammaJ.larp); II 150,13 (ime
panca dhamma dhammapatisambhidaya iiramma1,1a
e' eva honti -a ca); Vism 19,16 (-o pana tividho
upanissayagocaro arakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaro ti);
Sv 465,15 (patibharpsil ti patibhaJ.lasaii.khatassa ña1_1assa
-a ahesurp.); Patis-a 232,3o (samadhissa -esu kasi1_1adisu
iirammaJ.lesu .. . chekabhavo); - ifc see arakkha-,
upanibandha-, upanissaya-; - -'-ajjhatta, (mj)n., what
is interna! as the scope of action or attention; a sphere
of attention within oneself; ? Spk III 206,4 (-' -ajjhatte
pavattaya satiya); It-a 11 168,10 (ajjhattarato samahito ti
evamadisu vuttarp idarp - '-ajjhattarp. nama); Th-a 111
167,6 (-'-ajjhatte sutthu samahita hutva); - (ii) the
range of the organs of sense; an object of sense; Abh 94
(rilparp saddo gandharasa phasso dhammo ca -a);
Kv 252,17 (marp.sacakkhussa visayo iinubhavo -o);
Sv 224,15 (aruppe pana dibbacakkhussa -o n' atthi ti);
Vibh-a 47,14 (cakkhadinarp pana --tta); - agocara, m.
l. not the proper feeding-ground; an unsuitable feeding-
ground (for a particular animal); Ja II 40,14 (imarp
thanarp. tava agocaro); 60,2 (tiracchanagata pi agocare
caranta sapattahattharp gacchanti); Pj II 39,15 (ta gavo
agocararp. pariharitva gocare caretva); 2. an
unsuitable place for bhikkhus to beg, an unsuitable
person for bhikkhus to beg from; Vin li 208,22
(Sp 1281,7: agocaro nama micchiidinhikanarp. va gamo
paricchinnabhikkho va gamo); MI ll,2 (yatharilpe
anasane nisinnarp yatharilpe agocare carantarp. ... ; Ps I
80,32: ayutto gocaro agocaro, so vesiyadibhedo pañca-
vidho ); Nidd I 473,sfoll. (Nidd-a I 451,2: ayuttaghanarp.
agocaro) f. Vibh 246,3sfoll.; Pj I 237,2 (chabbidhe ca
agocare carati, seyyathidarp vesiyagocare vidhavathulla-
kumiirikapaJ.l<;iakabhikkhunlpiinagiiragocare ti); - 3. not
being within the range (oj), not a field or seope or
sphere of action or attention; where the mind should not
66 go
range or find sustenance; an unsuitable field of action or
attention; S V 147,16foll. (ma agocare carittha
paravisaye . . . ko ca bhikkhave bhikkhuno agocaro
paravisayo, yad idarp pañca kamagu1,1a); Ja VI 438,32
(agocaro esa mayharp. gahapatisippam evaharp. janami);
Pj I 246,9 (a1_1uka ti marp.sacakkhussa agocara
dibbacakkhuvisaya); Ud-a 319,s (vacaya agocararp.
ariyanarp. kathaya avisayarp. musavadarp. bha1,1anti ti);
321,29 ([maccurajassa] adassanarp. agocararp gaccheyya);
- sagocara, mfn., having the same feeding-ground or
sphere of action; Ja li 31 ,25' (Suhanu pi tadiso yeva yo
So1,1assa sagocaro; 32,s'foll.: yath' eva hi So1_1o
assagocaro asse <;iasanto carati tatha Suhanu pi, imina
nesarp samanagocaratarp. dasseti);- 0 -Caral}.atthiiya in
Ee at Ja VI 335,1w is prob. wr; Be, Se gocaratthaya; Ce
cara1_1atthaya; - 0 -cari, 0 -carika, 0 -cariya 1, m. one of
the types of elephant (the lowest); Ja IV 234,12'
(gocariyadini artha hatthikulani abhibhavitva
atikkamitva uposathakule jato); V 418,13' (gocarikiidi-
bhedena dasavidhena nagakulena, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
gocariyadi-); Sv 573,16* foll. (gocari kalambo
gaii.geyyo ... yarp. dasannarp. gocarisaii.khatanarp. pakat-
ihatth!narp balarp tarp. ekassa kalambassa ti); Ps 11 6,20
(chaddanto nagaraja na gocariyahatthikuladisu navasu
kulesu uppajjati chaddantakule yeva uppajjati); - see
also kaJavaka; - 0 -cariya 2 , mfn. [cfBHS gocarika],
(according to cts) of a reddish or brownish colour,?
Vin III 226,25 (navam pana bhikkhuna santhatarp
karayamanena dve bhaga suddhakaJakanarp
eJakalomanarp. adatabbii tatiyarp odatanarp. catuttharp
-anarp.; Sp 684,21: -anan ti kapilaVaJ.ll)anarp.); V 36,1; -
0
-Hha (and guttha ?), m.n., a cow-pen; a cattle-fold;
Abh 190 (-arp tu gokularp vajo); MI 79,14 (ye te -a
patthitagavo apagatagopalaka; Ps II 47,1: -a ti govaja);
li l86,2 (brahmaJ.l.O bahi nagare gavo -e dohapeti); Ja IV
223,7* (-arp. majjarp ... iiraka parivajjehi, Be, Ce, E e so;
Se gugharp.; 223,22foll.: -arp majjarp kiratan ti ayarp
potthakesu patho, aghakathayarp pana -arp. majjarp
kirasarp. ca ti vatva -an ti gunnarp thitaghanarp., Be so;
Ce gughamajjarp. kirasarp. ca ti ayarp potthakesu
patho ... ; Se guttharp majjarp. kirasarp ca ti ayarp
potthakesu patho ... ; E e gughimaccharp gharasava ti
ayarp potthakesu patho aghakathayarp pana
goqhimajjakirasava ti vatva goghin ti gunnarp
thitaghanarp, prob. wr); Bv-a 264,15 (yatha usabho -arp.
bhinditva yathasukharp. icchitaghanarp papu1_1ati); -
--phala, n. [cf S. ku~tha], a type of (medicinal) fruit;
Vin I 201,29 (anujanami bhikkhave phalani bhesajjani
vilari.garp. pipphalirp. ... amalakarp --phalarp, Be, Ce so,
with vl koghaphalarp.; Ee, Se gothaphalarp) quoted
Sp 836,26 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se koqhaphalarp); Vin-vn 1357
(--phalarp.);- see also kugha2, kogha 1; - 0 -tta, n., see
sv; - 0 -thana, m., the teat of a cow's udder; Sp 996,4
(UJ.ll).Ígal,l<;la nama honti -a viya ari.gulika viya ca tattha
tattha lambanti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gothanika); -
0
-thanika, m. or -a,f, a small teat of a cow's udder;
Sp 996,4 (-a vi ya aii.gulikii vi ya ca, Ee, Se so, perhaps
wr; Be, Ce gothana);- 0 -damaka, m., a cattle-tamer; a
cattle-driver: M Ili 222,10 (-ena . . . godammo sarito
ekarp yeva disarp dhavati); Spk II 220,2 (silto ti
go
assadamako, -o ti pi vadanti yeva);- 0 -damma, m. [go
+ damma 1], a bullock to be tamed, a young bul/ock; M II
129,5 (hatthidamma va assadamma va -a sudanta
suvinlta); lii 222,10; Ja I 337,22' (dhuravahe ...
mahagm_1e . . . ayojetva tarul).e -e dhure yojente
addasarp); - 0 -duhana, 0 -dühana, n. [go + duhana 1,
dühana 1], the time requiredfor milking a cow; Mill10,11
(na kiñci bhante apunnarp apajjeyya antamaso
0
-duhanamattarp pi ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee gaddühana-
mattarp pi ti); Spk II 224,11 (gaddühanamattan ti
o -dühanamattarp, gaviya ekavararp aggatthan-
aka<;l<;lhanamattan ti attho, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gadduhana-
mattan ti 0 -duhanamattarp); Th-a II 36,18 (asuko bhikkhu
jagariyarp nanuyuñjati antamaso 0 -dühanamattarp pi
kalarp, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -duhana-; Ce gal).<;!üsahanana-); -
see also gaddühana; - 0 -dohaka, m., a milkman, one
who milks cows; Ja V 105,13 (eka kü~adhenu -arp padena
paharitva); Spk 1 258,2;- 0 -dharaJ1i, (m)f(n.)., a COW in
calf; Sn 26 (Pj 11 39,1o: -iyo ti gabbhiniyo);- 0 -dhüma,
0
-dhuma, m., "earth-smoke", grain, wheat; Abh 450
( ... -o varako yavo); V in IV 264,29 (amakadhaññarp
nama sali vihi yavo -o kangu varako kudrüsako, Ee, Se
so; Be, Ce 0 -dhumo; Sp 822,12: yavagodhumesu bhedo
natthi); Mil267,28 ( ... varako -o muggo ... , Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se 0 -dhumo); Ps II lll,3o (yavo -o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-dhumo); Sadd 94,25* (-o saqhiko yavo);- 0 -naiigula,
o -nangu~~ha, m., a kind of black monkey; Abh 614 (-o);
Th 113 (--migayuta ... sela; Th-a I 237,32fol/.: gunnarp
viya nangularp nangu~~harp etesan ti -a, kajamakkata,
pakatimakka~a
ti pi vadanti yeva); Ja V 70,15*
(kapi-m-agañchi -o daricaro, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
o -nail.guqho; 72,23' foil.: -o ti gunnarp nail.guqhasadisa-
nail.guqho, 0 -nail.guqho ti pi pa~ho, 0 -nanguli ti pi
pa~hanti, Be, Ee so; Ce -nanguqho ti ... nail.guqhi ti pi
0
pa~ho; Se -nanguqho ti ... nangu~~ho ti pi pa~ho ... );
0
Ps IV 73,9 (--makka~o, Se so; Be 0 -nail.gala-; Ce, Ee
0
-nail.guqha-);- 0 -0asa, 0 -nasa, m. [go +nasa, nasa], a
kind of large snake; Abh 651 (-o); Sp 259,1
(ahigahal).ena sabba pi ajagaragonasadibheda dighajati
sail.gahita, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -gonisadi-); Sadd 922,25
0
( -naso -o ... val).l).abhedo 'yarp); Samantak 330 (in cpd:
gonasoragasappadi-);- 0 -nisa.üana,f, the sitting down
ofcattle; Sadd 385,10;- 0 -nisada, m. [go + nisada3], the
sitting down, settling of cattle;? Sadd 385,1o (-o ti
0
-nisajjana);- o -nisadl, (m)f(n )., (a place for storage or
cooking, kappiyabhümi or kappiyakuti) sited informal/y
in an unfenced settlement; ? Vin-vn 2665; 2672 (aramo
aparikkhitto sakalo bhuyyato pi va duvidho pi hi viññühi
0
-i ti vuccati); - -nisadika, (m)f(n). [cf BHS go-
ni~adika], (a place for storage or cooking, kappiyabhümi
or kappiyakuti) sited informal/y in an unfenced
settlement; ? (as cows settle? or like encampments of
cowherds (nomads)? or among the cattle ?) V in I 239,34
(anujanami bhikkhave tisso kappiyabhümiyo
ussavanantikarp -arp gahapatin ti; Sp 1099,9 foll.: -a
duvidha aramagonisadika viharagonisadika ti, tasu
yattha n' eva aramo na senasanani parikkhittani honti
ayarp aramagonisadika nama, yattha senasanani sabbani
va ekaccani va parikkhittani aramo aparikkhitto ayarp
viharagonisadika nama, iti ubhayatrapi aramassa
67 go
aparikkhittabhavo yeva pamill).arp); o -nisadi-
nivittha, mfn. (according to cts) not settled in an
organised way, settled with dwellings in small groups;
V in lii 46,25 (parikkhitto pi gamo aparikkhitto pi gamo
-o pi gamo; Sp 298,3o: -o nama vithisannivesadivasena
anivisitva yatha gavo tattha tattha dve tisso nisidanti
evarp tattha tattha dve til).i gharani katva nivinho); -
0
-nisinnakaip, adv., in the way a cow sits; Ja I 163,w
(gosinnakavasena ti, Ce, Ee so; Be nipannakavasena ti;
Se o -nipannakarena ti); 321,11 (bodhisatto pacte
sammiñjetva -arp nisidi); - 0 -pa, m. [go + pa4], a
cowherd; Abh 495; M 11 180,14 (-o va adinnarp
adiyamano ); Dhp 19 (-o va gavo gal).ayarp paresarp);
Sn 18 (pakkodano duddhakhiro 'ham asmi iti Dhaniyo
-o); Pj 11 26,27 (-a nama nibaddhavasino na honti); 28,1s
(gunnarp palanato -o, yo hi attano gavo paleti so -o ti
vuccati); Vism 166,33; - -nisada, m.pl. [gopa +
nisada 1], cowherds and bandits; Ja IV 364,14* (brahmal).a
vessapathesu tiqhanti . . . sama --nisadehi; 366,zr:
--nisadehi ti gopalakehi e' eva nisadehi ca gama-
ghatakacorehi sama ti vuttarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nesadehi
ca); - see also gopi below;- 0 -pakhuma, mfn., with
eyelashes like a cow 's (one of the 32 characteristics of a
mahapurisa); D II 18,28 (ayarp hi deva kumaro -o;
cfSv 451,12foll.: ettha pakhuman ti sakalacakkhu-
gal).<;larp adhippetarp); III 167,15 (imani dve mahapurisa-
lakkhal).ani patilabhati abhinilanetto ca hoti -o ca); M II
137,7 (-o kho pana so bhavarp Gotamo); Ap 426,19
(netta -a tesarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gopamukha);
0
Vv-a 279,25; - -pada, n. a cow's hoofprint; A III
188,10 (parittarp -e udakarp, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se 0 -padak:e);
IV 102,7; Mil287,13 (visusseyya pi ce maharaja
mahasamuddo ... -e udakarp viya);- 0 -padaka, n. [go
+ padaka2], a cow's hoofprint; Ps III 420,3
(mahasamuddarp upanidhaya -arp); - 0 -pallika,f, a
hut, a cow-shed; Ja 1 388,10 (eko gopalako ... gavo
gahetva araññarp pavisitva tattha -arp katva rakkhanto
vasati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be gosalarp); - 0 -pasü, m.pl.,
cattle and other domestic animals; A 111 394,21 (Mp III
401,26: -ü ti gavo ca ajika ca);- 0 -pala, m., a cowherd;
Abh 495; Dhp 135 (yatha dal).<;!ena -o gavo paceti
gocararp); Spk I 22,3 (-en a gogal).o niyati);
0
-palaka, m., a cowherd; Vin I 152,36 (bhikkhü chatte
vassarp upagacchanti, manussa ujjhayanti ... seyyatha pi
-a ti); M 1 222,19 (ekadasahi ... ail.gehi samannagato -o
bhabbo gogal).arp parihariturp phatikattmp ... ); Ja I 388,8
(eko -o ... seqhino ... gorasarp aharati); Mil18,14 (-o
gavo rakkhati aññe gorasarp paribhuñjanti); Vism 380,27;
Dhp-a I 323,1 foil. (N ando nama -o ... --ttena rajapijarp
pariharanto attano kutumbarp rakkhati); Pj II 28,19 (yo
paresarp [gavo paleti] vetanena bhato hutva so -o); -
0
-palika,f, a cowgirl; Vin III 38,w; - 0 -pita(r), m.
[gopita(dJ, a leader of the herd; MI 222,25 (ye te
usabha -aro goparil).ayaka; Ps II 261,7: gunnarp
pituqhanarp karonti ti -aro); - 0
-pipasaka, m.,
o -pipasika,f, ? a thirsty cow or ox; thirsty cattle; ?
Ja IV 56,26* (bhavanti h' eke purisa gopipasikajatika
ghasanti maññe mittani vacaya na ca kammana, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se gopipasaka-; E e gharpsanti; 57 ,16· foll.:
gunnarp pipasakajatika viya, pipasitagosadisa ti vuttarp
go
hoti yatha pipasitagavo titth~ otaritva mukhapür~
udakaq¡ pivanti na pana udakassa kattabbayuttak~
karonti evam ev~ ekacce id~ ca idaq¡ ca karissama ti
madhuravacanena mittani ghasanti piya-
vacananucchavik~ pana na karonti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
gh~santi); -
0
-pi,f, a cowherd's wife; Sn 22 (-i
mama assava alola iti Dhaniyo gopo); Pj II 36,!3 (etehi
gu1_1ehi -iya tugh~ Dhaniy~);- 0 -pitakaip, adv. [go
+ pitaka 1], drinking like a cow; as a cow drinks; A III
188,16 (yannünah~ catuku1_1<;!iko nipatitva -~ pivitva
pakkameyyan ti; Mp III 296,19 foil.: gaviyo vi ya
mukhena aka<;l<;lhanto pivitva); - 0 -pura, n., a town-
gate; Abh 204 (gopuradvarakotthako); 1065; Ja VI 433,!
(nagare ... agharasahattho pakaro -'-agalako); Mil66,I9
(pakaraq¡ karapeyyasi -aq¡ karapeyyasi agalakaq¡
karapeyyasi); Ap-a 150,6 (te gantva -aq¡ kha1_1itva rañño
asanaghare ughahiq¡su); Mhv 35:97; - 0
-purisa, m., a
cowman, a cowherd; Ja V 449,3* (hatthibandh~
assabandhaq¡ -aq¡ ca ca1_1<;lal~; 449,33·: -o ti vuccati
gopalako); Patis II 213,14 (antamaso assabandhagopurise
upadaya, Be so; Ce assabandhagobandhapurise; Ee, Se
assabandhagopake purise; Patis-a 677,4: -a nama
gunnaq¡ rakkhaka); - o -balivaddañayena, adv., in the
way of "a bull of cattle" (denoting a pleonasm);
V v-a 258,8 (sati pi Sakkagandhabbanaq¡ devabhave
tesaq¡ visuq¡ gahitatta -ena tadaññadevavacako
devasaddo daghabbo); - 0
-ma(t), m(jn)., one who
possesses cattle; Abh 495 (0 -ma tu gomiko py atha); SI
6,9* ( -ma gohi tath' eva nandati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
0
gomiko) = Sn 33 (Be so; Ce, Ee gomiko; Se gopiko);
Sadd 793,n; - 0
-mm.ujala 2 , n., a herd of cows; Ps Il
258.Is (goga1_1an ti -~); V 12,10 (-e rogo pata ti); Spk I
31,21 (gosamiko pi sampann~ -~ disva gavo nissaya
pañcagorasasampattiq¡ anubhavamano gohi nandati, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se gomiko pi sampu1_11_1~ ... ); Th-a I 109,Is
(tasmiq¡ ca kule bahuq¡ -~ ahosi, taq¡ gopalaka
rakkhanti); - --paribbü~ha, mfn., surrounded by herds
of cows; Sn 301 (--paribbü~haq¡ nañvaraga1_1ayutaq¡
u~ar~ manus~ bhog~ abhijjhayiq¡su brahma1_1a; Pj II
320,10: --paribbü~han ti goyüthehi pariki1_11_1~); Ja VI
27,2o* (--paribbü~o dasasailghapurakkhato rajj~
karehi; cf27 ,2r: subhasitarajakaññanaq¡ ma1_1<;lalena
parikhitto, Ce, Ee so; Be subhailgln~ rajakaññanaq¡
ma1_1<;lalena purakkhato; Se subhaggln~ rajakaññanaq¡
ma1_1<;lalena purakk:hito); - 0
-maya, n.m., cow-dung;
Abh 499 (-o nitthl); Vin III 16,19 (haritena -ena
pa!haviq¡ opuñjapetva); MI 79,16 (yani tani
vacchakanaq¡ taru1_1akanaq¡ dhenupakan~ -ani tani
sud~ aharemi); S II 85,4 (maha aggikkhandho jaleyya
tatra puriso kalena kal~ . . . sukkhani ca -ani
pakkhipeyya); A I 209,! (kharaq¡ ca paticca -aq¡ ca
paticca udakaq¡ ca paticca . . . upakkilighassa vatthassa
upakkamena pariyodapana hoti; Mp II 323,2o: -an ti
gomuttaq¡ va ajala1_1<;lika va); V 263,17 (allani -ani
amaseyyasi); Mil54,4 (ma1_1i na siya atapo na siya -~
na si ya jayeyya so aggi ti); Vism 603,9* (yatha na suriye
aggi na ma1_1imhi na -e); Ud-a409,22 (-~ nama
sabbamali.galesu vattati ti); Sadd 794,21 (gohi nibbattaq¡
-~); - --piil_laka, m., a dung-beetle; Ja II 157,14; -
--bhakkha, mfn., eating cow-dung; DI 166,23; A I 241,9;
68 go
Niddi 417,2;- 0 -rnika,m., see sv;- 0 -mi!ha,m.n.,
cow's urine; Abh 499 (-o gomayo nitthl);- -mutta, n.
0
[go + mutta2], cow's urine; Ja I 464,6 (-e pana
pañcapa1_11_1ani tiphaladlni ca pakkhipitva); Mil 172,14
(duggandh~ pi -aq¡ pltaq¡ .. . sattanaq¡ vyadhiq¡
hanati);- --paribhavita, mfn., mixed with cow's urine;
Sp 1092,2o (muttaharitakan ti --paribhavit~
hañtakaq¡); - --vailka, mfn., crooked like (the course
of) a cow's urine, zig-zagging; Sv 980,32 (ekacco hi
bhikkhu pathamavaye ekavisatiya anesanasu chasu ca
agocaresu carati majjhimapacchimavayesu ca lajji
kukkuccako sikkhakamo hoti, ayaq¡ --vailkata nama);
As 151,2Ijoll. (yo hi papaq¡ katva va na karomi ti
bhasati so gantva paccosakkanataya --vailko nama
hoti . . . yassa va ti1_1i pi kammadvarani asuddhani so
--vailko nama hoti ... d!ghabhiil_laka pan' ahu
ekacco ... ); - 0
-muttaka, m. l. a kind of gem;
Ud-a 103,27 (pav~o jotiraso -o gomedako ... ) f.
Sadd 873,3; V v-a 111,28 (in cpd); - 2. a type of
decoration or omament (a zig-zag ?); Sp 292,11
(añjaniyaq¡ ... malakammalatakammamakaradantaka-
gomuttaka-a<;l<;lhacandakadibhedaq¡ va vikararüp~ na
vagati);- 0 -illel}qa, m., a cowherd, a cattle-keeper; Ja I
288,30' (hatthimel_l<;!agomel_l<;ladayo va hontu hinajacca);
-
0
-medaka, m., a kind of gem; Ud-a 103,27 (gomuttako
-o) f. Sadd 873,3; Vv-a lll,zs (in cpd);- 0 -medha, m.,
a cow-sacrifice; Pj II 323,!7 (tada kira brahma1_1a
yaññavataq¡ gavm~ püretva mailgala-usabh~
bandhitva rañño mülaq¡ netva maharaja --yaññ~
yajassu, evaq¡ te brahmalokassa maggo visuddho
bhavissati ti ahaq¡su); - 0 -rakke in Ee at DI 136,!
(kasigorakke) is wr for -gorakkhe (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-rakkha, m(jn)., n., and -a, f, l. (m.) a cowherd;
Vin IV 8,24 (kassako si viil_lijo si -o si ti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee omits); Sp 253,22 (kassako viil_lijo -o); - 2. (n.f)
keeping or breeding cattle; Abh 446 (-a pasupalan~);
Vin IV 6,34 (ukkaghaq¡ nama kammaq¡ kasi viil_lijja -a);
M I 85,33 (yadi kasiya yadi va1_1ijjaya yadi -ena; Ps II
56,21: -an ti attano va paresaq¡ va gavo rakk:hitva
pañcagorasavikkayena jivanakammaq¡); Sn 612 (yo hi
koci manussesu -aq¡ upajlvati . . . kassako so na
brahma1_1o; cfPj II 466,!2: tattha -an ti khettarakkhaq¡,
kasikamman ti vuttaq¡ hoti, pathavi hi go ti vuccati
tappabhedo ca khettaq¡); - 0
-rakkhal}a, n., cattle-
tending; Ps II 82,3o; - o -rava, m. [go + rava2 ], mooing,
lowing; Ps II 267,4 (mata purato purato huq¡ hun ti -~
katva saññ~ dadamana); Ud-a 367,1; - 0 -ravaka, m.,
mooing, lowing; MI 225,34 (vacchako taru1_1ako tavad
eva jatako matu -ena vuyhamano);- 0 -rasa, m. [go +
rasa 1], a dairy product, milk and its derivatives;
Abh 501; Vin I 244,34 (anujanami bhikkhave pañca -e
khir~ dadhiq¡ takk~ navanit~ sappiq¡); Jai 388,1!
(eko gopalako ... seghino ... -aq¡ aharati); Mill8,I4
(gopalako gavo rakkhati aññe -aq¡ paribhuñjanti);
Dhp-ai 157,19 (pañca -e paribhuñjituq¡); Pjii 319,7
(yasu pittadinaq¡ bhesajjabhüta pañca -a jayanti); -
neg. agorasata,f, abstr., the not being a dairy product;
Spk II 105,22;- -rüpa, m.n., a cow; an ox; Ja I 355,11'
0
(gavo ti -ani); Mil 396,22joll. (-assa cattari ailgani
gahetabbani ti ... ); 396,29 (-o adil_ll_ladhuro
gocati
sukhadukkhena dhuraq¡ vahati); Vism 505,25 (-aq¡ viya
~aq¡samakasadayo . . . vibadhenta); Sp 208,8 (antamaso
dasakammakaranaq¡ pi -anaq¡ pi aparibhogaraho ); Ps I
256,22 (-anaq¡ nikkhamanavelayam eva);
--sílaka, mfn., having the behaviour of a cow (ie
innocent and harmless); Vibh-a 383,6 (adinnadanaq¡
dussllassa santake appasavajjaq¡ tato --sílakassa santake
mahasavajjaq¡ tato sanu_1agatassa ... ); - se e also
gosíladhatuka below; - 0 -lakkhal).a, n., signs of amen
or health on a cow; DI 9,21 (te evarupaya
tiracchanavijjaya micchajivena jivikaq¡ kappenti ...
usabhalakkha1_1aq¡ -aq¡ ajalakkha1_1aq¡ ... ) f. Nidd I
381,30 (Ee so; Be, Ce go1_1a-; Se omits);- 0 -loma, n., a
cow's hair (from which dubba grass is said to spring);
Vism 543,22 (-avi1oma-); 0
-lomika, 0 -lomi, n.
[cfBHS golomakaq¡], a type of beard; Vin II 134,6foll.
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü . . . massuq¡ va~~hapenti -aq¡
karapenti ... na -aq¡ kiirapetabbaq¡; cfSp 1211,3: -an ti
hanukamhi dighaq¡ katva thapitaq¡ eJakamassukaq¡
vuccati); 144,29* (in uddana: massuq¡ kappenti va~~henti
golorni caturassakaq¡);- 0 -lomi,f, the name ofvarious
plants; SAF: white conch grass, Cynodon dactylon (L.)
Pers.; myrtle flag, sweet flag, Acorus calamus L.;
Abh 584 (-i tu vaca); 599 (-i sa sita bhave);- 0 -vata,
0
-vatta, n. [go + vata2, vatta2] the "cow-practice",
behaviour as of a cow (a practice of certain ascetics);
M 1 388,21 (tassa taq¡ -aq¡ digharattaq¡ samattaq¡
samadinnaq¡ ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -Vattaq¡); 389,5
(sampajjamanaq¡ -aq¡ gunnaq¡ sahavyataq¡ upaneti
vipajjamanaq¡ nirayan ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -Vattaq¡);
Nidd I 92,26 (vatani ti hatthivataq¡ va assavataq¡ va -aq¡
va . . . Be, Ce so; E e, Se vatani ti . . . govattaq¡ va);
As 355,z4; - 0 -Vatika, 0 -vattika, m(jn)., observing the
"cow-practice", (one) who lives or behaves like a cow;
MI 388,2o (ayaq¡ ... Pu1_11_10 KoJiyaputto -o, Be, Ce, E e
so; Se 0 -vattiko; Ps III 100,18: -o ti samadinnagovato,
sise sitigani thapetva natigutthaq¡ bandhitva gavihi
saddhiq¡ ti1_1ani khadanto vi ya carati); Nidd I 89,18 (-a,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se govattika); Nett 99,8;- 0 -vikatta, m.,
a butcher's knife; Saddh 381 (ti1_1hena -ena); -
0
-Vikantana, n., a butcher's knife; Vin III 89,14 (ti1_1hena
-ena kucchi parikanto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
0
-vikattanena) f. MI 449,2 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
0
-vikattanena); MI 244,15 (dakkho goghatako ... ti1_1hena
-ena kucchiq¡ parikanteyya) f. S IV 56,26 f. A III 380,10;
-
0
-Vittaka, mfn. [go + vittaka 1 or vittaka2], rich in
cattle; or making a living by cattle; Ja 1 191,21 (ekaq¡
-aq¡ setthiq¡ upasatikamitva); - 0
-sailkhya, m., a
cowherd; Abh 495; - 0 -samita, mfn. [go + samita2],
like cattle, equal to cattle; SI 6,17* (natthi -aq¡ dhanaq¡,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -samikaq¡; Spk I 33,2: gohi samaq¡)
0
quoted Pj II 28,16; - -sitacandana, n., a type of
sandal; Vism 350,11 (satadhotasappigositacandanadi-
lepaq¡, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -gosisa-) = Ps II 228,1 (Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se -gosisa-) = Vibh-a 69,22 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-gosita-); Pj 11 95,23 (Val_ll_ladasi -aq¡ piq¡sati, Be, Se so;
Ce, E e gosisa-) = Ap-a 17 4,28 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e
gosisa-); V v-a 179,24 (-ena bahalataranulittaq¡, Be, Ee
[see p. 373], Se so; Ce gosisaka-); Sadd 242,22 (-an ti
ettha [gosaddo] paniye vattati, gosaddena hi jalaq¡
69 gol}a
vuccati, go viya sitaq¡ candanaq¡); - 0 -sila, n., the
practice of living or behaving like a cow; M I 388,30
(-aq¡ bhaveti); Nidd-a I 209,26 (papakaq¡ sílaq¡ nama
ajasílaq¡ -aq¡);- --dhatuka, mfn., being by nature cow-
like (ie innocent and harmless); Ps V 71,lo
(puthujjanasllava nama --dhatuko hoti asatho amayavi
paraq¡ apiJetva dhammena samena kasiya va va~_~ijjaya
va jivitaq¡ kappeta); - see also gorüpasllaka above; -
0
-Sisa, n. [go + sisa 1], l. the skull of a cow or ox;
Pv 36:16 (-aq¡ setaq¡ gahetvana narakasmiq¡
nikkhipiq¡); Ap 245,17 (aramadvara nikkhamma -aq¡
santhataq¡ maya; Ap-a 474,32: gosisaghi maya
santharitan ti attho); Pv-a 215,28;- 2. [S. gosir~a] a type
of sandal; Abh 301 (-aq¡ telapa1_11_1ikaq¡); Vism 350,11
(satadhotasappigosisacandanadilepaq¡, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
-gosita-) = Ps II 228,1 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -gosita-; =
Vibh-a 69,22: Be, Ce, Se -gosita-; E e -gosita-); Pj II 95,23
(va~_~l_ladasi --candanaq¡ piq¡sati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
gosita-) = Ap-a 174,28 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gosita-);-
0
-Sisaka, m. [S. gosir~aka], a kind of sandal; Thi-a 236,26
(gosisakadisaracandanena ma~_~~itataya surabhi-
gandhikaq¡); Vv-a 179,24 (0 -candanena, Ce so; Be, Ee
[see p. 373], Se gosita-); - 0 -hanu, m., a cow's jaw-
bone; Ja VI 509,¡· (-una katithiilakaq¡ kottapetva);
Sp 1029,29 (--sadisena hanuna samannagato );
0
-hanuka, m. (or n.), a cow's jaw-bone; Vin II 266,22
(bhikkhuniyo . . . -ena jaghanaq¡ kogapenti); Ja IV
188,13' (hatthapadapitthiyo -ena kogapetva ussade
dassetva); V 303,13" (-ena paharitva); - see also
gaddühana, gava 1, gavampati, gavi.
gocati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup grocati, Wg § 7:17], steals;
Sadd 335,22 (gucu galocu theyyakara~_~e: . . . -ati
ga1ocati).
gocara, see sv go.
gocchaka, m. [S. lex. gucchaka, gutsaka], a bunch, a
cluster; a section of a work; Abh 545 (thabako tu ca -o);
Dhatuk 113,7* (satta -e, in uddana); 124,25* (samatiq¡sa
pada honti -esu dasasv atha, in uddana); As 37,13 (sabbe
pi satta -a veditabba); 410,17 foll. (imina nayena
ka1_11_1ikaq¡ ka1_11_1ikaq¡ ghataq¡ ghataq¡ -aq¡ -aq¡ katva
atthuddharavasena kusaladidhamme dassento kathetva
adasi);- ifc see hetu-.
gotavisa, m. [?], (a nautical term) a large oar used as a
rudder; ? a stern-rope; ? a dinghy; ? Abh 666
(pacchabandho -o); Ja VI 225,27* (niyatani hi bhütani
yatha -o tatha; 226,1·: -o vuccati pacchabandho, yatha
navaya pacchabandho navam eva anugacchati tatha ime
satta niyatam eva anugacchanti ti vadati, Be, Ce so; Ee
pacchimabandho; Se vuccati pacchimabandha nava,
yatha khuddakanava mahanavaya pacchimabandha
mahanavam eva anugacchati ... ).
gofhaphala, n., see gotthaphala sv go.
gol}.a 1, m. [AMg, BHS id.; cfC. Caillat, 1960, pp. 55-60],
an ox; a bullock; Abh 495 (-o go vasabho vuso ); V in III
52,25 (catuppadaq¡ nama hatthi assa ogha -a gadrabha
pasuka); MI 10,36 (ca~_~~aq¡ -aq¡ parivajjeti); A III 393,20
(-o kighado damena va baddho vaje va oruddho); Ja 1
194,18 (tassa -a sakatani uttaretuq¡ na sakkonti);
II 165,26* (dve me -a maharaja yehi khettaq¡ kasamase);
Mil 253,26; Vism 664,28 (na ime mayhaq¡ -a rañño -a ti
 70
sañjanitva); Ps 11 354,21 (manussa kira -ehi khalaJTl
maddapenta); Mp III 394,4 (-amhi mate); V 89,2
(gunnaJ11 khiraJTI chijjati -ilnaJT~ javo hayati ubhayesaJ11
jivitantarayo pi hoti); As 83,14 (cheko sarathi ...
patodala~thiya -e ako~eti); Sadd 645,2ofoll. (garünaJ11
matan tare gosaddassa sabbass' eva o• -adeso hoti va su
naJTl hi ice etasu vibhattisu: -esu -anaJTl -ehi -ebhi, va ti
kiJTl, gosu gOI).aJTI gohi gobhi . . . amhakaJ11 pana mate
gul).a amantal).e ti dhatuvasena nipphannatta gosaddassa
'-adeso na icchito); - ifc see kü~a- (sv kü~a ), jara-
2
0
1
(sv jara ), dhura-;- 0 -sira, m., a wild ox; (ora kind of
deer; 'l) Ja VI 538,1 * (kakka~a katamaya ca ikka -a bahü;
538,21·: -a ti araññagol).aka, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
araññagol).a).
gol}a 2 , m. [= gol).aka2], a iong-haired woollen rug or
cover;- 0 -santhata, mfn., spread with a woollen cover;
Vv 81 :8 (pallañke muduke -e, E e, Se so; Be
gonakatthate; Ce colasanthate).
1
gol}aka 1, m. [gol).a + ka2], an ox;- (fe see arañña-.
2
gol}aka , gonaka, m. (and -a, f ?) [BHS gol).ika], a iong-
haired woollen rug or cover; Abh 312 (mahanto kojavo
dighalomako -o mato); Vin I 192,6 (chabbaggiya
bhikkhü uccasayanamahasayanani dharenti seyyathldaJ11
asandiJTl pallailkaJTI -aJTl cittakaJTl ... ; Sp 1086,4: -o ti
d!ghalomako mahakojavo, caturailguladhikani kira tassa
lomani) f- DI 7,8 f-A I !81,21; Ja VI 510,12* (pallañke su
sayitvana -e cittasanthate; 51 0,19· foil.: mahapighiyaJ11
kaJakojave e' eva vicittake santhare ca); Vin-vn 2659;
-
0
'-atthata, mfn., spread with a woollen cover; D II
187,13 (caturaslti pallañkasahassani ahesuJ11 soval).l).a-
mayani ... -ani ... ); A IV 94,19 (kiñcapi so pallañke seti
-e pa~ikatthate . . . atha kho so dukkhaJTl yeva se ti
kodhabhibhüto); Pv26:17 (pallañke -e) f- 33:1 (Be, Ee
so; Ce gol).akatthake; Se gol).asal).~hite); Ap 96,5
(satasahassapal1añkaJ11 soval).l).aJTI -aJTl ... paññapayiJ11);
-
0
(a)-vikatika,fpi., gol).aka and vikatika covers;
Ap 525,15 (-ahi paññapetva mam' asanaJ11, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se gol).akacittakadlhi) = Thi-a 52,20* (Be, Ee so; Ce
gonakavikatikadihi; Se gol).akacittakadihi).
gol}apiyati, caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ofgul).eti qv.
gotta, gotra, n., and -a, m.pl. [S., BHS gotra], l. (n.) an
exogamous kinship group, claiming descent from a
common ancestor (often a Vedic r~i); a sept, a clan; the
clan name; Abh 332; 1060 ( -aJT~ name ca vaJ11se); V in I
93,2 (ayasma Anando evaJTl aha nahaJ11 ussahami
therassa namaJ11 gahetuJ11, garu me thero ti ... anujanami
bhikkhave -ena pi anussavetun ti; Sp 1033,4:
Mahakassapassa upasampadapekkho ti evaJ11 -aJTl vatva
anussavetUJTl anujanaml ti attho); IV 6,7 (dasahi akarehi
omasati jatiya pi namena pi -ena pi); 6,22foll. (dve -ani
hlnaJ11 ca -aJTl ukkatthaJT~ ca -aJTl, hlnaJ11 nama -aJTl
KosiyagottaJTl BharadvajagottaJ11 . . . ukkatthaJT~ nama
-aJT~ GotamagottaJ11 MoggallanagottaJ11 Kaccayana-
gottaJT~ Vasi~~hagottaJ11 ... ); M III 262,II* (etena macea
sujjhanti na -ena dhanena va); Dhp 393 (na ja~ahi na
-ena na jacca hoti brahmal).o); Sn 423 (Á.dicca nama
-ena Sakiya nama jatiya); Vv 84:45 (kiJTl namadheyyaJTl
kiJTl pana tassa -aJ11); Ja IV 148,4 (matu -aJTl nama kiJTl
karissati pitu -am eva pamiil).an ti); 332,5* (so maJTl
avedi gatim agatiJTl ca namaJ11 ca gottaJ11 caral).aJTI ca
gotrabhu
sabbaJ11); Ap 32,12 (Gotamo nama -ena sattha loke
bhavissati); Nidd I 341,9 (Suriyo Gotamo -ena bhagava
pi Gotamo -ena); Mil 267,4 (anaññataJT~ maharaja
arahato itthipurisanaJ11 nilmaJTl pi -aJTl pi); Sv 144,Is
(Pakudho ti tassa namaJ11 Kaccayano ti -aJ11); 257,28
(namagottan ti paññattivasena namaJTI pavel).ivasena
-aJTl); Ud-a 200,9 (Kosiya ti SakkaJTl devilnaJ11 indaJTl
-ena a1apati); Pj 11 403,18 (brahmai).O nu bhavaJTl
Bharadvajo nu bhavan ti evaJ11 jatiJ11 pi -aJTl pi
pucchanti); Mhv 15:125 (Kassapo -ato jino); Sadd 359,s
(gaJTI vacanaJTl buddhiJTl ca tayati ekaJ11sikavisayataya
rakkhat! ti -aJT~); 870,22foll. (-aJTl . . . [garünaJ11]
mate... gotraJ11 ... ); - ifc see kathaJ11-, nama-
(sv nami); - 2. a reiated group or class; a group of
similar individuals or concepts; a religious group; V in I
127,29 (na janati tassa apattiya namaJ11 -aq¡);
Sp 1177,31 foll. (idaq¡ hi sabbaq¡ pi parivasadikaJ11
vinayakammaq¡ vatthuvasena 0 -vasena namavasena
apattivasena ca katuq¡ vagati yeva. tattha sukkavisatthl ti
vatthu e' e va -aJTl ca, sañghadiseso ti namaJ11 e' e va
apatti ca); Ud-a 302,12 (nadi ninnaga ti adikaJ11 -aJT~,
ganga yamuna ti adikaq¡ namaq¡); - 3. (m.pl.) the
(members of the) kinship group; Vin III 142,19
(gottarakkhitaya -a bhikkhuq¡ pahil).anti);
0
-caral}a, n., the conduct appropriate to one's clan or
family; Spk I 231,6 (vijjacaral).asampanno ti ettha vijja ti
tayo veda caral).an ti -aq¡); As 213,3 (atthacattallsa -ani
veditabbani);- 0 -pafisari(n), mfn., referring to, relying
on lineage; DI 99,14* (khattiyo settho janetasmÍJTl ye
-ino) = MI 358,28* (Ps III 34,2foll.: ye jane tasmiq¡
gottaq¡ pa~isaranti ahaq¡ Gotamo ahaJTI Kassapo ti);
Spki 219,19 (tesu loke -!su khattiyo se!tho); -
sagotta, m.f, (one) beionging to the same gotta; a
kinsman; V in III 139,32 (gottarakkhita nama -a rakkhanti
gopenti ... ; Sp 555,7: gottaJT~ ... na rakkhati -ehi pana ...
rakkhita gottarakkhita); Vv-a 116,13 (--taya vuttaJT~
buddhassadiccabandhuno ti); Nidd-a I 55,II (-o
gottabandhu);- see also gotrabhu.
gotti, f [S. goptri], one who protects or cherishes; Ja V
329,19* (pubbe rasadadi -1 mata puññüpasaq¡hita;
329,23': -1 ti gopayika).
gotthati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup go~thate, Wg § 8:4],
assembles, collects; Dhatum 189 (gotthu VaJ11se);
Sadd 367,20 (gottha vaq¡se: -ati gotthu1o gotthu).
gotthu, gotthula, [= gottha ?] ? Sadd 367,20 (gottha
VaJ11Se: gotthati gotthulo gotthu); 8?2,12 (musa1o
gotthu1o potthu1o ).
gotra, n., se e sv gotta.
gotrabhÜ., mfn. or m.n. (cfSadd 86,33* foil.: -u iti
rassattavasena kathitaq¡ padaq¡ napuJ11sakan ti
viññeyyaq¡ ñal).acittadipekkhakaq¡, -ü iti ... pulliñgam
1t1 vmneyyaq¡ pugga1adikapekkhakaJ11; 234,21 foil.;
870,22foll.: pavacanasmiJTl hi na kadaci pi chatraJT~
gotraq¡ ice adlni dissanti, -ü ti pade pana samase
vattamanatta takaro trakaraJ11 pappoti va; Pa~is-a 26,26:
puthujjanagottabhibhavanato ariyagottabhavanato -ü),
l. [gotrabhü <* gotrahu < gotrahan ? see
O. van Hinüber, 1978b; O.H. de Wijesekera, 1979; but
perhaps meaning 2., see D. Seyfort Ruegg, 1981],
destroying the lineage, the spiritual succession of the
goda ti
Buddha; ? M III 256,7 (bhavissanti . . . anagatam
addhana111 -uno kasavaka~tha duss!la papadhamma;
cfPs V 74,3: -uno ti gottamattakam eva anubhavamana
namamattasam~a ti attho);- 2. [see D. Seyfort Ruegg,
1974; see also K.R. Norman, 1987, for gotrabhil
very beginning
< gotrabhrtl. a state or stage which is the
of spiritual progress, a first acknowledgement and
acceptance of the Buddha 's way (perhaps then the
[mere] move into the "clan" of Buddhists and Buddhist
experience and belief). The term can be applied to (i) a
person at such a stage, one no longer a puthujjana and
not yet sotapanna (but likely to become so?); M III 256,7
(bhavissanti ... anagatam addhanaJ11 -uno kasavaka~tha
dussíla papadhamma, or meaning 1.; Ps V 74,3: -uno ti
gottamattakam eva anubhavamana namamattasam~a ti
attho); A IV 373,s (nava-y-ime bhikkhave puggala
ahuneyya . . . araha arahattaya patipanno anagam1
anagamiphalasacchikiriyaya patipanno sakadagami
sakadagamiphalasacchikiriyaya patipanno sotapanno
sotapannaphalasacchikiriyaya patipanno -il; Mp IV
170,11: -u ti sotapattimaggassa anantarapaccayena
sikhapattabalavavipassanacittena samannagato ); Pp 13,3
(yesa111 dhammana111 samanantara ariyadhammassa
avakkanti hoti tehi dhammehi samannagato puggalo
ayaJ11 vuccati -u); Kv 309,1 (-uno puggalassa
sotapattimagge ña~aJ11 atthi ti, na h' evaJ11 vattabbe ... );
Vv-a 155,23 (antamaso gotrabhüpuggalesu pi dana111
dadanti); Sadd 77,2ofoll. (gottasailkhataJ11 amata-
mahanibbiinaJ11 aramm~a111 katva bhilto ti -u); 78,1 (api
ca sam~o ti gottamattaJ11 anubhavamano kasava-
k~thasama~o pi -il, so hi sam~o ti gottamattaJ11
anubhavati vindati na sama~adhamme ); - (ii) the first
stage of spiritual progress, an elevated state of
consciousness at the very outset of the Buddhist path;
Patis I 66,4 foil.; Ps I 23,2o (namarilpavavatthena
sakkayadighiya . . . -una sailkharanimittagahassa
pahiinaJ11) = As 352,w; PsI 61,15 (dhammato yava -u
okasato yava bhavagga111 savantl ti va asava); 74,2o
(kasma sotapattimaggo dassana111 pathamaJ11 nibbana-
dassanato. na nu -u pathamataraJ11 passatl ti, no na
passati, disva kattabbaJ11 kicca111 pana na karoti
saJ11yojananaJ11 appahanato) t As 356,34; Patis-a 275,22
(gottattho e' ettha bijattho, vattanippakara~e kira vutta111
gottaJ11 vuccati nibbiinaJ11 sabbaparipanthehi guttatta ta111
patipajjatl ti -il ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gottatthe e' ettha
bijattho vattati, pakar~e ... ); - (iii) a consciousness-
or thought-moment immediately preceding the extra-
ordinary, supramundane consciousness-moments of
jhana (or iddhi); Tikap 172,14 (anuloma111 -ussa
anuloma111 vodanassa -u maggassa vodiinaJ11 maggassa
asevanapaccayena paccayo ); Vism 137,27 foil.
(manodvaravajjana111 uppajjati, tato tasmi111
yevaramm~e cattari pañca va javanani javanti ... YaJ11
e' ettha sabbantimaJ11 ta111 parittagottabhibhavanato
mahaggatagottabhavanato ca -u ti pi vuccati . . . ettha
pathamaJ11 parikamma111 dutiya111 upacara111 tatiyaJ11
anulomaJ11 catutthaJ11 -u, pathamaJ11 va upaciiraJ11
dutiya111 anuloma111 tatiya111 -u catuttha111 pañcama111 va
appanacittaJ11 ... tato paraJ11 javana111 patati, bhavailgassa
varo hoti) t Sp429,24foll.; Vism673,14foll. (yatha hi
71 godhii
mahamatikaJ11 lailghitva paratlre patitthatukamo
puriso ... rajjuJ11 va yaghiJ11 va gahetva ullailghitva ...
tam muñcitva vedhamano paratlre patitva sa~ikaJ11
patighati, evam evaya111 yogavacaro ... anulomacittena
0
ullailghitva... -cittena visailkhare paratirabhüte
nibbane patati. ekaramma~e pana aladdhasevanataya
vedhamano so puriso viya na tava suppatighito hoti tato
maggaña~ena patighati ti); Spk III 201,22 (nimitta111 na
ugga~hati ti idaJ11 me kammaghana111 anuloma111 va -u111
va ahacca thitan ti na janati); Ud-a 33,25 (yasmiJ11 hi
javanavare ariyamaggo uppajjati tattha yada dve
anulomani tada tatiya111 -u catutthaJ11 maggacittaJ11, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee -il); As 23!,15 (mahapaññassa pana dve
anulomani honti tatiya111 -u catutthaJ11 maggacitta111 ti~i
phalani tato bhavailgotara~aJ11, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -il);
Sadd 86,22joll. (paññattaramm~aJ11 mahaggat-
aramma~aJ11 va -u cittaJ11, ta111 hi kamavacaragotta111
abhibhavati mahaggatagottaJ11 ca bhaveti nibbatteti ti -u
ti vuccati); 0
-ñiil}a, n., gotrabhu knowledge
(knowledge of a gotrabhu, belonging to the gotrabhu
stage, which is gotrabhu ?); Patis I 66,zfoll. (katha111
bahiddhavutthiinavivagane panna -aJ11, uppadaJ11
abhibhuyyati ti gotrabhü ... bahiddhasailkharanimittaJ11
abhibhuyyitva nirodha111 nibbana111 pakkhandatl ti
gotrabhil); Nidd-a II 110,1 (tato paraJ11 nirodhaJ11
nibbanaJ11 aramma~a111 kummiinaJ11 puthujjanagottaJ11
atikkamamanaJ11 ariyagotta111 okkamamanaJ11
nibbanaramm~e pathamasamannaharabhil~ apunar-
avattakaJ11 -aJ11 uppajjati); 110,6 (-e nimddhe ...
sotapattimaggo uppajjati); Bv-a 83,12 (udayabbaya-
vasena samapaññasa lakkh~ani disva yava -a111
vipassana111 va<ol<olhetva); As 233,7 (-a111 nibbanam eva
aramm~a111 katu111 sakkoti na kilesatama111 vinodetuJ11);
Sadd 86,25 foll. (gotrabhil ti nibbanaramma~a111
maggavithiyaJ11 pavatta111 -a111 va sailkhararamma~a111 va
phalasamapattivithiya111 pavattaJ11 -aJ11).
godati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup godate, Wg § 2:23], plays,
sports; Sadd 383,3 (guda kijayam eva: ... -ati).
1
godha, m. [cf godha , S. godha], l. a lizard; Ja V 489,32'
(pañcanakhesu sattesu sasako sallako -o ... , Ee, Se so,
perhaps wr; Be, Ce godha); - 2. leather wrapped round
the left arm; ? Sadd 485,12 (gudha parivethane: gujjhati
-o, Ee so; Be godha).
godhaka, m. [?], a kind of bird; Ja VI 538,12* (celavaka
piilgulayo -a ailgahetuka, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be gotaka;
539,1·: celavaka piilgulayo ti dve saku~ajatiyo ca tatha
-a ailgahetuka ti, Ee, Ce, Se so; Be gotaka).
1
godhii , f [ts] (iic also godha-), a large kind of lizard, a
varan; Abh 622 (-a ku~<o~o ); Ja I 488,1 (-a nikkhamitva
makkhikayo khadanti); III 85,23* (ehi -a nivattassu)
quoted Sadd 197,23 (-e); Jaiii 106,24joll. (so puriso
bhariyaJ11 paniyatthaya pesetva sabba111 -a111 khaditva
tassa agatakale bhadde -a palata ti aha); 538,24 (-e, ma
kampi); IV 364,23* (sasabi]are biidhenti a -a
macchakacchapaJ11, Ee so; in Be, Ce, Se written agodha;
366,31·: thalajesu tava a -ato mahante ca khuddake ca
pa~ayo badhenti marenti jalajesu macchakacchape);
Sp 1030,4 (godhagatto va yassa -aya viya gattato
cu~~ani patanti, Be, Ce so; Se -a viya; Ee -a viya gatto,
prob. wr); Sv 94,21 (ekasmiJ11 kira vihare cittakamme
godha
-arp aggi111 dhamamana111 aka111su); As 273,26 (bi1arp
pavighaya -aya); Mhv 28:10; Sadd 799,1 (devata vagaka
-a ti ca vutte itthipurise samadhigacchanti); -
o -pi!fhisadisacUI}I}a-okiral}akasarira, mfn., whose
body sheds a powder (oj dead skin) like the back oj an
lizard; Sp 995,27 (-arp pi pabbajetu111 na vagati, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se -okiraJ_!aka-, prob. wr); - 0
-pillaka,
0
-pillika, m., a young lizard; Ja I 487,9 (tassa putto -o,
Be so; Ce godhapillako; Ee, Se godhapilliko); - see
also godha, go!ika.
godhie, f [cjS. godhavil)aka], a kind oj musical
instrument; Ja VI 580,29* (paJ_!ava sailkha -a
parivadentika dindimani ca haññantu kutumba dindimani
ca, Ce, Se so; Ee tindimani; Be kutumpadindimani;
581 ,8·: -a parivadentika dindimani kutumbadindimani ti
imani cattari turiyan' eva, Ce, Ee so; Be kutumpa-
dindimani ti; Se dindimani kutumbani ca ti).
godhuka, m., a kind ojtree; Ap 16,1 (ketaka kandali e' eva
-a til)asülika, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se kebuka) quoted
Ap-a 214,15* (214,17: 0 -rukkha ca til)asülikagaccha ca).
gopaka, m. [ts], a cowherd; a guardian, a keeper; Vin III
65,15 (anapatti bhikkhave -assa dane); M III 13,21 (yatha
tarp tumhadisehi rakkhehi -ehi ti); Ja VI 261,17'
(dhammagü ti dhammassa -o e' eva dhammaññü ca);
Ap 182,4 (rañño antepure asi111 -o); Ps III 428,25 (yatha
-o attana rakkhitabbabhaJ.19al11 thenento akiccakañ hoti);
Mhv 22:52 (rañño mailga1avajino -ena aka metti111); -
ifc see ajika- (sv ajika), amba- (sv amba2), assa-
(sv assa\ inda-, hatthi- (sv hatthi[n]).
gopati,pr. 3 sg., see sv gopeti 1.
gopana, n., -a, f [ts], protection; guarding; controlling;
Dhs 1347 (ya imesa111 channa111 indriyanarp gutti -a
arakkho sarpvaro aya111 vuccati indriyesu guttadvarata) =
Vibh 248,41 = Pp 24,36; Mp II 251,4 (matapitunnarp
rakkhana111 -arp patijagganarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
rakkhanagopanapapjagganarp); Ap-a 489,25 (sundara-
rakkhena -ena visesena so sita); Sadd 562,15 (rakkhaJ.!al11
tiil)agopanarp avanarp pa1anarp ... ); ifc see
sikkhapada-; - agopanii,f, not protecting; not
controlling; Dhs 1345 (imesarp channa111 indriyanarp
agutti -a ... ) = Vibh 248,25 = Pp 21,2; As 401,19 (ya
agutti ya -a); - see also gopayana.
gopanaka, n. [gopana + ka2], protection; Dhatum 260
(gupa -e).
gopayati1, se e sv gopeti 1.
gopayati2 , see sv gopeti2.
gopayita(r), gopayita(r), m. [from gopayati 1, gopayati;
cj S. gopayitr], one who protects, a protector; PsI 123,19
(1okassa rakkhita -a ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gopayita ti; t
It-a II 84,12: gopita);- see also gopita(rf
gopanasi, f [BHS id.], a rafter, a curved roofbeam;
Abh 221 (valabhicchadidarumhi vailke -itthiyarp);
Vin III 81,33 (aññataro bhikkhu ... -i111 uccaresi); M I
80,17 (seyyatha pi nama jarasalaya -iyo o1uggavilugga
bhavanti evam eva ssu me phasu!iyo o1uggavi1ugga
bhavanti); S II 263,2 (kütagarassa ya kaci -iyo sabba ta
kü~ailgama kü~asamosaral)a) t A III 364,3o t Mi138,22;
Ja III 317,13 (kaJ_!I;lÍkarp aropetva -iyo pavesitamatta
honti); 318,12* (ya ti111sati saramaya anujjuka parikiriya
-iyo samarp thita); Sp 334,10 (ubhosu passesu
72 gopeti
suVaJ_lJ)arajatadimaya -iyo datva garu!apakkhakanayena
kata sandamanika); Ap 321,15 (-iyo datvana); 321,21
(agha -i datva); - 0 -bhoggasama, mfn. [gopanasi +
bhogga 1 + sama3], like a curved rooj-beam; bent like a
rooj-beam; Ja III 395,8* (passami ... nari111 ... daJ_1<;ia111
gahetvana pavedhamanarp -arp caranti111, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se o -bhaggasamarp; 395,21" joll.: gopanaslsamarp
bhogga111 gopanasl-akarena bhaggasarira111 onamitva
naghakakaJ_!ikarp pariyesanti111 viya caramanan ti attho);
-
0
-vañka, mfn., bent like a rooj-beam; D II 22,1
(addasa . . . Vipassi kumaro . . . purisa111 jil)l)arp -arp
bhoggarp dal)<;!aparayanarp ... ) t M III 180,14; SI 118,11
(aññataro brahmaJ_!o ... ji!)!) O -o ghurughurupassasi).
gopiiyati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gopayati], protects; keeps saje; Ja 11
234,17" (esa dijo anille na rakkhati na -ati, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce gopayati); PsI 27,8 (ayadini mamayati rakkhati -ati,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee gopayati); Mp II 205,13 (attano pajarp
pa~ijagganti -anti); 244,2 (attanarp pariharati patijaggati,
-ati ti attho);- pp gopayita, mfn., [S. lex. id.], guarded,
protected; Abh 754 (tata111 gopayitavita); - see also
gutta, gopeti 1.
gopiiyana, n., -a,f [S. gopayana], protection; controlling;
Ja V 226,15 (tva111 vinicchayadhammapavel)idhamma-
sucaritadhammanarp -ena dhammagutto, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr gopaya tena dhammagu); Sv 850,16 (coradi-
upaddavanivaraJ_lattharp -a gutti); Mp IV 13,26 (rakkha
eva ... yatha icchita111 na nassati eva111 -ato gutti); -
agopayana,f, not protecting; lack oj control;
Sp 1325,19 (catüsu paccayesu mahicchata asantughita
kilesasal1ekhanapatipattiya -a); - see also gopana.
gopayika, (m)j(n). [cjS. gopayaka], (one) who protects or
keeps saje; Ja V 329,23" (gotti ti -a).
gopayita(r), see sv gopayita(r).
gopita(r)\ see sv go.
gopita(d, m. [from gopeti 1; cjS. gopayitr], one who
protects, a protector; It-a II 84,12 (1okassa rakkhita -a ti;
t PsI 123,19: Be, Ce, Ee gopayita; Se gopayita); - see
also gopayita(r).
gopeti 1, gopayati1 (and gopati), pr. 3 sg. [S. gopayati],
guards, protects; preserves, keeps saje; covers, closes;
Dhatup 181 (gupa rakkhaJ.!e); Dhatum 260 (gupa
gopanake); 261 (gupa sarpvaraJ_le); V in I 295,26
(atikhuddakarp nisidanarp na sabbarp senasanarp -eti);
III 139,27 (maturakkhita nama mata rakkhati -eti
issariyarp kareti vasarp vatteti; Sp 555,2: -eti ti yatha
aññe na passanti evarp guttaghane thapeti); Dhp 315
(eva111 -etha attanarp); Ja II 34,25' (te bhagavanto marp
pa1entu rakkhantu -entu); IV 448,21* (te rakkhati -ayat'
appamatto; 448,2s-: vati111 katva -ayati); V 330,12* (yarp
ca matu dhanarp hoti yarp ca hoti pitü dhana111 ubhayarp
etassa -eti); Ap 555,8 (sali111 -em' aharp tada); Cp 2:7:4
(yadi 'ha111 tassa pakuppeyya111 yadi slla111 na -aye);
Nidd I 262,3o (ime marp rakkhissanti -issanti
sampartvanssanti ti); 368,6 (rakkheyya -eyya
pidaheyya); Mi1151 ,26 (parittarp rakkhati -eti);
Sp 691,11 (so ce vadati -ayissami bhante guttatthanarp
dassetha ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ayissama); Sv 1013,18
(imani dve dhutailgani püreti -eti); PsI 27,8 (ayadini
mamayati rakkhati -ayati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gopayati);
Dhp-a 1 300,8 (tvarp pi cittarp -ehi); IV 117,15 (attanarp
gopeti
sarryamaya -aya); Sadd 403,16 (gupa rakkhaQ.e: -ati
gopako); 403,23 (gupa gopanajigucchanesu: -ati
jigucchati); - part.pr. (a) gopenta, mfn., Vin III 53,1
(ahatarr bhaQ.qarr -ento); Nidd I 130,24 (cittarr ...
rakkhanta -enta caranti); (b) gopaya(t), mfn., Th 729
(indriyani ca -ayarr); Nidd I 155,18 (tassa evarr rakkhato
-ayato te bhoga vippalujjanti); (e) gopayanta, mfn.,
Nidd-a I 280,34 (-ayantassa); Mhv 4:32 (satthussa no
gandhakutirr -ayanta); (d) gopayamana, mfn.,
Vism 574,4 (sandighike va pana kame patthayamano
patiladdhe ca -ayamano); Nidd-a 1 255,24; - aor.
1 sg. (a) gopesirr, Ap-a 559,25; (b) gopayirr, agopayirr,
Ap 74,17 (uggayha UQ.i saraQ.e paripUQ.Q.iini -ayirr, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -ayarr, prob. wr); 74,22 (tavata
saraQ.agamanarr paripUQ.Q.aJ11 agopayirr); 3 pi.
gopayirrsu, Dhp-a III 488,9; - inf (a) gopeturr, Vin III
65,13 (-eturr ime issara na-y-ime datun ti);
(b) gopayiturr, Dhp-a III 488,w; (e) gopiturr, Th-a III
22,24 (rakkhiturr -iturr na sakkoti); - absol.
(a) gopetva, gopitva, Ap 77,13 (paripUQ.Q.iini -etva
pañcasikkhapadan' aharr, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -itva);
Mil 360,7; Sp 358,2 (jaggitva -etva); 386,7 (te rakkhitva
-etva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -itva); (b) gopiya, Ap 75,29
(paggayha tiQ.i saraQ.e pañcasllani -iya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-aya, prob. wr); -pass. pr. 3 sg. goplyati, Pj I 217,11
(nidh!yatl ti nidhi, thaplyati rakkhlyati -lyatl ti attho ); -
pp gopita, mfn. [ts], l. guarded, protected; defended,
kept saje; Abh 754 (rakkhitarr -arr guttarr); Vin II
184,18 (so kho aharr bhante evarr rakkhito -o pi santo
bh!to . . . viharami); III 46,33 (yarr adinnarr
anissagharr ... rakkhitarr -arr mamayitarr; Sp 301,32:
mañjusadisu pakkhipitva --tta -arr); Ap-a 381,21; -
2. guarded, watchful; controlled; Nidd 1 221,5 (vacayato
ti yatto pariyatto gutto -o rakkhito vupasanto); -
neg. agopita, mfn., not guarded, not protected; not
controlled; Vism 22,5 (sabbarr bhal).qarr arakkhitarr
agopitam eva hoti); Mp I 54,13 (aguttan ti agopitarr sati-
sat~wararahitatp); III 270,2 (indriyehi apihitehi
agopitehi); sugopita, mfn., well-guarded; well
protected; well-controlled; Ap 75,21 (sugopitarr me
saraQ.arr); Ja VI 458,12; Mil 345,24 (bhagavato dhamma-
nagararr . . . evarr surakkhitarr evarr sugopitarr);
Vism 22,13; Dhp-a III 331,1 (te idhalokasmirr
suparisarrvuta surakkhita sugopita supihitadvara ti); -
fpp (a) gopetabba, mfn., Vin V 125,18 (atthi parikkharo
rakkhitabbo gopetabbo mamayitabbo paribhuñjitabbo );
Ja 1 8,34 (yatha hi narr [satakarrl paccatthika na gal).hanti
tatha gopetabbo hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gopetabbarr) =
Ap-a 10,15 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce gopetabbarr);
(b) gopitabba, mfn., Saddh 398 (idarr durakkharr
gopitabban ti); -se e also gutta, gopayati, jigucchati.
gopete, gopayati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gopayati,
Wg § 33:98], speaks; shines; Sadd 553,17 (gupa ...
bhasayarr: -eti -ayati).
goppima in Ee at Vin-vn 463 and 465 is prob. wr for
gopphima qv.
goppetva in Ee at Vin-vn 465 is prob. wr for
gopphetva qv.
*goppha\ m. [cfS. lex. gumpha], tying or stringing as a
garland; - see gopphima.
73 gora
goppha2 , m. [S. gulpha, kulpha; cf AMg gopha, "heel"],
the ankle; MI 187,34 (mahasamudde ... 0 -mattarr pi
udakarr saQ.thati, Ee so; Be, Ce gopphaka-; Se goppaka-;
f. A IV 102,5: Be, Ce, Ee gopphaka-; Se goppaka-);
Mhv 34:53 (manosilasu . . . cetiyaii.gaQ.e thitasu
0
-mattasu).
gopphaka, m. [goppha2 + ka2; cf S. gulpha], the ankle;
Abh 277 (-o padagaQ.thi pi); 864; V in IV 112,23 (upari
2
-e udake hasadhippayo nimujjati) f. Kkh 204,12; M II
137,17 (na ca -ena -arr sali.ghaqento gacchati); A IV
102,5 (janukamattarr pi 0 -mattarr pi mahasamudde
udakarr SaQ.thati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se goppaka-); Ja V 472,5
(brahmaQ.arr pade gahetva pighiyarr adhoslsakarr
olambetva s!sarr -ehi paharanto ukkhipitva payasi);
Sv 446,29 foil. (aññesarr hi pighipade -a honti ...
mahapurisassa pana arohitva upari -a patiqhahanti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se goppaka); Ps IV 235,23 (dve pada yava -a
lohapathavirr pavigha); Dhp-a II 80,2o (dvlsu -esu
satthu pade gahetva vandi).
gopphana, n. [cf S. lex. gumphana], stringing together;
tying together as a garland; Sp 618,14 (gopphimarr
nama suttena va vakad!hi va vassikapupphad!narr ...
-arr, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se goppimarr ... goppanarr);- see
also gopphima, gopphetva, gophati.
2
gopphima, (mj)n. [*goppha1 + ima , or from *goppheti],
(what is) tied together, strung together (a kind of
garland or wreath); Sp 618,4 (sabba pi cha
pupphavikatiyo veditabba, ganthimarr -arr vedhimarr
vethimarr purimarr vayiman ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
goppimarr); 6l8,12joll. (-arr nama suttena va vakadlhi
va vassikapupphad!narr ekatovaQ.tika-ubhatovaQ.tika-
malavasena gopphanarr, va.karr va rajjurp. va dviguQ.arr
katva tattha tattha avaQ.takani nlpapupphad!ni pavesetva
patipatiya bandhanti, tarr pi -am eva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
goppimarr); Vin-vn 463 (ganthimarr -arr nama
vedhimarr .... , Be so; Ee goppimarr); 465 (-arr nama
gopphetva suttad!hi kañyati ekatovaQ.tikamala
ubhatovaQ.tika ca tarr, Be so; Ee goppimarp.);- see also
gopphetva, gophati.
gopphetva, ind. [absol. of *goppheti; cf S. gumphayati],
tying together; stringing together; Sp 281,9 (dv!su tlsu
thanesu veQ.usalaka gopphetva paQ.Q.akutlsu katarr
salakahatthakadvararr, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gopetva);
Vin-vn 465 (Be so; Ee goppetva); - see also gopphima,
gophati.
gophati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup guphati, Wg § 28:31], strings
together; ties as a garland; Sadd 405,10 (gupha ganthe,
gantho ganth!karanarr: -ati);- see also gopphetva.
gomal}cJ,ala\ see sv gamaQ.qala.
gomal}cJ,ala 2 , see sv go.
gomika, m. [cf S. gomin], a cattle-owner, one who
possesses cows; Abh 495; S I 6,9* (-o gohi tath' eva
nandati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be goma, metrically better) =
Sn 33 (Ce, Ee so; Se gopiko; Be goma).
gometi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gomayati,
Wg § 35:24], smears with (cow-dung); Sadd 558,17
(goma upalepane: -eti -ayati).
gora, mfn. [S. gaura], white; pale; Abh 95 (sukko -o
sitodata); Sadd 362,14* (akaQ.harr -arr odatarr
setanamani honti hi).
goraka
goraka, m. [cf S. gaur!, gauraka], a kind of plant or
perfume; ? Ps IV 11,8 ( 0 -piyailgumattenapi sarlra~p
vi1impetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee coraka-).
gori,.f [cf S. gaurl, S. /ex. gaurika], an eight-year-old girl;
Sadd 364,1 * H ca darika kañña); 364,3 (aqhavassika -1
ti pi darika ti pi vuccati).
golika, goJika, f [cf S. godhika, go1ika] a kind of lizard;
- ifc see ghara-.
golisa, m. [cf S. go1iha, goli9ha], the plant Bignonia
suaveolens; SAF: weaver's beam tree, Shrebera
swietenioides Roxb.; Abh 563 (-o jhata1o ).
goJa\ m. [S. gola], a ball; a lump; Abh 1088 (-e
ucchumaye guJo);- ifc see pha1ika-.
go!a , m. [?],a dwaif; Ja VI 334,19* (maip.saip. go~o ganthi
2
suttaip. putto 0 -rathena ca, Ce, Ee so; Be goto rathena ca;
Se godho; 337,16·: goJarathena ca ti -ena ca rathena ca
gh
gha 1, m. [ts], the sound 'gh'; the consonant 'gh';
Sadd 604,19 (ka kha ga gha Ii.a); 622,23 (gho khassa:
nigha~9u); 830,19 (gahassa ghe ppe); -
0
-klira, m., the
letter or sound 'gh'; Sp 1400,5 (bhante sailgho ti
vattabbe bhakaraghakarana1:p. bakaragakare katva bante
sailgo ti).
gha 2 , m., (an arbitrary technical term for) -a as the final of
feminine stems; Sadd 642,27 (akaro gho: akaro itthiyaip.
vattabbayaip. ghasañño hoti).
gha 3 , ind. [ts], (emphatic particle) surely; indeed; - ifc
se e iilgha, taggha1; - see also yagghe.
gha 4 , mfn. [ts], striking; killing; destroying; - ifc see
dosa- (sv dosa 1).
gharpsati, gha1:p.seti, pr. 3 sg. [S. ghar~ati, ghar~ayati],
rubs, rubs to and fro; rubs against; grinds; pounds;
Dhatup 318 (gha~psa gha1:p.sane); Dhatup 464; S II 238,19
(ba1ava puriso da!haya va1arajjuya jailgha1:p. vethetva
-eyya, sa chavi1:p. chindeyya); Ja II 418,12* (yavata
ma~i!p. -ama bhiyyo vodayate ma~i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
yava yava nigha1:p.sama); Vism 591,2o (atha kho naip.
punappuna~p -ati); Sp 757,3o (hattha~p dhovissama ti
pathaviya~p -anti); Sv 996,25 (padena -ahi ti); Ps II 59,24
(kocchehi khara1:p. -anti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -enti) =
Nidd-a I 279,6 (eds -enti); Ps III 280,2o (sañra~p -anti);
Mp 11 323,7 (piqhiip. -enti); - gha1:p.santi in Ee at la IV
56,26* (gha1:p.santi maññe mittani) is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
ghasanti; part.pr. (a) gha1:p.santa, mf( -antl)n.,
gha1:p.senta, mfn., Vin III 48,13 (-anto niharati, apatti
thullaccayassa); Ja I 216,5 (sakhasu annamanna~p
-antisu cu~~aip. patati); Sp 838,29 (aii.guliya -antassa);
Ps II 166,3 (yo hi cu~~amattikad!hi gattani ubbaqento
mallakamüladihi -anto nahayati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-ento); 238,18 (padena pada~p -anto pakkhalesi); Spk 11
393,17 (thapento pi -anto va p~ametva thapeti,
ga~hanto pi -anto va aka99hitva g~hati, Be, Ce, Se so;
74 gharpsati
eko kira laku~takatta -o kalava~~atta ca kaJo ti Go!akaJo
nama puriso, Ce, Ee so; Be goto ti eko kira laku~takatta
goto . . . Gotaka!o nama puriso; Se godho ti eko kira
puriso laku~takataya ca ka!ava~~ataya ca Godhaka!o
nama; cfMhv 23:50: laku~takasañratta ahu Gothaka-
namako).
goJaka, m. [S. golaka], a ball; a lump; Abh 1017 (pi~9o ...
-e);- ifc see k!Ja-, madhu-.
go!ika 1 , m. [from guJa2 ; BHS golika, gaulika], a sugar
merchant; Sadd 786,25 (gandha~p assa bha~9an ti
gandhiko eva1:p. teliko -o);- see also koliyaka.
goJika 2 , (mj)n. [S. gau9ika], (food) prepared with
molasses; Sadd 786,17 (tilena saip.satthaip. bhojana1:p.
telika~p eva1:p. -aip.).
goJika,f, se e sv golika.
Ee -ento va -etva ga~hati, prob. wr) =Ud-a 252,wfoll.
(eds -ento .. . -ento ... ); - neg. agha1:p.santa, mfn.,
Sp 758,1; (b) ghaip.samana, mfn., Ja I 216,6 (ima dve
sakha -amana aggiip. vissajjessanti); As 396,22 (sotaip.
-amana viya pavisati); - aor. 3 sg. gha1:p.si, Ja I 485,7;
- inf gha~psitu1:p., J a I 190,4* (nala1:p. kabala1:p. padatave
na ca pi~9a1:p. na kuse na -itu!p. maññami; 190,11·:
nahapiyamano sarira~p pi -itu1:p. nalaip., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ghasitu1:p., prob. wr); - absol. gha1:p.sitva, Ja VI 331,23
(taip. osadha1:p. gahetva nisadaya -itva thoka~p nalatante
makkhesi); Vism 428,2o; Sp 287,3o (sabbamattikamaya~p
katva pa~ikaya -itva sukkhapetva); 290,12 (lekha pi
-itva va apanetabba); 308,4 ([vasi] -itva va nisita);
967,33 (daharakumarako pana sayaip. udaka1:p. otaritva
gomayamattikahi -itva nhapetabbo); Ps 11 58,27
(sisakataha~p thülasakkharahi -itva); Spk II 37,17 (eva~p
-itva koqetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -etva); III 305,31
(suva~~apatiip. pasa~e -itva); Dhp-a I 58,16 (hatthena
kaqhani -itva aggiip. pateti); - pass. pr. 3 sg.
gharpslyati, Vin I 204,32 ([dhümanettani] ekato -anti);
II 112,28 (pattamüla~p -ati ... anujanami bhikkhave
pattam~9alan ti); - part.pr. ghaip.siyamana, mfn., Ja 11
418,6 (ta~p ma~i!p. gha~psanti, so sükaralomehi -amano,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ghaWyamano); Dhp-a 111 199,18
(eka ... ghatika pas~ehi -amana); - pp (a) ghatta 1,
ghaqha, mfn. [AMg ghaqha; S. ghr~ta], rubbed; rubbed
so re; la IV 20,15· (u~havalukaya ghaqhapadaip., Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se ghaqitapada~p) = Cp-a 32,33 (eds --pada~p);
Pj 11 582,7 (maggakkama~ena --padatalo);
(b) gharpsita, mfn. [S. ghar~ita], rubbed; Ps II 198,34
(vatarukkhadinaip. khandhapadese --qhana1:p.);
fpp gharpsitabba, mfn., Sp 288,29 (ma pa~e patabbe -e
eva maññl ti; Sp-t [Be] 11 117,3o: -e ti ghaqayitabbe,
vinasitabbe ti attho); 291,4 (civaraip. ... hatthehi gahetva
do~iya~p pi na -a1:p.); Ps IV 48,5 (dhammanetti
ghaipsana
samanumajitabba ti dhammarajju anumajjitabba ñii!).ena
-a upaparikkhitabba); - caus. pr. 3 sg. gharpsapeti,
causes to rub; has (someone) rub; Vin II 266,22
(bhikkhuniyo aghillena jaghanarp -enti);
part.pr. gha¡p.sapenta, mfn., Vibh-a 442,2o (bhümi¡p.
pi~~iya -ento, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -etva); -
fpp gha¡p.sapetabba, mfn., Vin II 266,28 (na bhikkhave
bhikkhuniya aghillena jaghana¡p. -etabba¡p.);- see also
ghassati.
gharpsana, n. [AMg gha¡p.sal)a; S. ghar~al)a], rubbing;
scraping; Dhatup 318 (gharpsa -e); Vism 428,27 (ukkaya
-a¡p. viya punappuna¡p. pavesana¡p., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ukkagharpsana¡p.); Sp 375,3 (-en a chavimatta¡p. chinna¡p.
hoti); Ps 11 288,10 (aññassa rukkhassa sukkhasakhaya
saddhi¡p. 0 -matten' eva aggino abhinibbattana¡p.); Spk II
393,18 (-ena parikkhigarp, Be, Se so; Ee ghaganena; Ce
sailghasanena) = Ud-a 252,12; Cp-a 125,22 (bhümiya¡p.
-a¡p.).
gharpsani, f rJrom gha¡p.sati], something with which to
rub, a scraper; - ifc see pada-.
gharpsika, f rJrom gha¡p.sati], something with which to
rubor grind; a roller; ? - ifc see go-.
ghacca, f [of fpp of ghateti qv; see K.R. Norman, 1989,
pp. 220-21], killing; destroying; - ifc see milla-, sa-
(sv sa6), sabbasunakha-.
ghañña, n. or -a, f [cf S. ghana, "killer, destroyer"; see
K.R. Norman, 1989, pp. 221-22], killing, destroying;-
ifc se e atta- (sv atta[ n]).
ghata 1, m. [ts], l. a pitcher, a pot, esp. for water; a large
water-jar; Abh 457; Vin I 213,18 (yannünaha¡p. nave ca
tile nava¡p. ca madhu¡p. kolambehi ca -ehi ca arama¡p.
harapeyyan ti); Ja 1 l66,2s ( -arp bhindanto vi ya
mahahasita¡p. hasitva); Ili 435,18 (eka¡p. küparp netva ito
me paniyarp ussiñca ti rajju¡p. ca -a¡p. ca dassesi);
Ap 105,22 (vicitta¡p. -am adaya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
vicittagha~am); Bv 2:169 (gha~anekasahassani
kumbhina¡p. ca sata bahü; Bv-a 116,7: -a ti -anarp
sami-atthe hi idarp paccattavacanarp, -ana¡p.
nekasahassani ti attho); Vism 120,20 (kumbhadasiyo pi
-ehi nigha¡p.santiyo gacchanti); Ps 1 178,s (te -ehi pi tato
udakarp aharapetva nahayanti); V v-a ll8,2o (-a¡p.
gahetva udakatittha¡p. gantva); Pv-a 38,9 (tassa pana
hadaye -e padipo viya sotapattiphalassa upanissayo
pajjalati); As 91,2o (udakabharite -e khitte -o pi bhijjati
udakarp pi nassati); Sadd 353,16 (-o vuccati kumbho ); -
ifc see paribhojaniya-, paniya-, pugga- (sv püreti),
vacca-; - 2. a kind of drum; - iic see below; -
0
'-assita, mfn., hiding in ajar;? Ja V 371,27' (pada¡p.
etassa anvesa¡p. appamatto -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
bhavassito; 372,r: -o ti ca~ipañjaranissito, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se catipañjare nissito hutva); - 0
-cetika,f, a servant
girl (who fetches water); - --gitika,f gitaka, n., the
song of a servant-girl; Spk 1 273,22 (sace pi [vaca]
milakkhabhasapariyapanna --gitikapariyapanna pi hoti
tatha pi subhasita va, Be, Ce, Se so; E e o -ce~akagitaka-)
f. 274,18 (Be, Ce so; Ee --gitaka-; Se -anarp
gitikapariyapanna) f. Pj II 397,8 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
--gitaka-); - o -daddaravadaka, m.pl., players of ghata
and daddara drums; Ja VI 277,2· (kumbhathünike ti -e).
1
ghata , m., see sv gha~a .
2
75 ghatati
ghata 3 , n., = ghata qv.
ghataka 1, m. [cf S. ghataka; AMg gha9aka], l. a water-
jar; a pitcher; Vin II 129,32 (patiggahesi bhagava -a¡p. ca
sammajjani¡p. ca); Ap 252,13 (-a¡p. ca upaghasi¡p.
paribhogaya tadino ); Sp 1241,8 (-o pana telabhajana¡p.
va padagal)hanakato atirekam eva garubhag9a¡p., Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se -arp, prob. wr); - 2. a (pot-shaped) feature
or form of decoration on a pillar or handle; Ja I 32,28
(tassa suvaggamayesu thambhesu rajatamaya -a
ahesu¡p.); Sp 290,9 (chattadag9e gehatthambhesu viya -o
va va)arüpa¡p. va na vaqati); Ps II 303,32
(suvaggatthambhe passa ... tesa¡p. yeva suvaggadimaye
-e va)arüpakani passa ti, Be so; Se suvaggadimaya-
gha~ake; Ce, Ee SUV<Il)l).adimayagha~ike); Vin-vn 3030
(chinditum addhacandarp va pagge makaradantaka¡p.
-a¡p. va)arüpa¡p. va lekha dag9e na vagati); - 3. a kind
of drum; Sp 931,4 (kumbhathügika nama -ena ki)anaka).
ghataka2 , mfn. [cf gha~eti sv ghatati; cf S. ghataka],
carrying on, continuing; Ps III 72,11 (eka yeva no
piyadhita pavegiya -o añño darako n' atthi ti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee pavegighatanako).
ghatati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ghatate], l. is busy with; strives (for),
exerts oneself (for, loe. or dat.); Dhatup 98 (ghata
ihaya¡p.); Dhatum 122 (ghar ihane); D II 141,21 (ingha
tumhe Ánanda sadatthe -atha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
saratthe); S 1 217,19 (ughaheyyatha -eyyatha
vayameyyatha appattassa pattiya anadhigatassa
adhigamaya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyaya); A II 143,17
(so ughahati -ati vayamati anavaññapa~ilabhaya);
Thi 176 (-atha buddhasasane, E e so; Be, Ce, Se -etha);
457 (appossukka -issa¡p. jatimaragappahanaya;
Thi-a 258,1: -issan ti vayamissarp bhavana¡p. anu-
yuñjissami); Vism 15,7• (sampannasilo -ati
samadhatthaya yo pana, Be. Ce, Ee so; Se -eti); 77,28'
(samma atho -ati nibbutim esamano); Sp 411,17
(sikkhati ti evarp -ati vayamati); Sadd 353,16 (ghata
cetaya¡p.: -ati ghato); - part.pr. (a) gha~a(t), mfn., MI
86,2 (tassa ce bhikkhave kulaputtassa evarp ughahato
-ato vayamato ... ; cfPs 11 57,10: -ato ti ta¡p. viriya¡p.
pubbenapara¡p. -entassa); A IV 293,21; Pp 51 ,7; -
neg. aghata(t), mfn., A IV 294,13 (tassa anughahato
aghatato avayamato labhaya); (b) ghatanta, mfn., Ja IV
131,2 (yuñjanto -anto vayamanto accaraddhena viriyena
temasarp kammaghana¡p. bhavetva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
-ento); Sp 224,22 (sikkhattayaparipüriya -anta na
kilamanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -amana); Ud-a 71,23 (-anto
vayamanto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -ento); Saddh 450
(abhinibbati atandito -anto); - neg. aghatanta, mfn.,
Vism 15,s• (tuqhassa silamattena agha~antassa uttari¡p.,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agha~entassa); (e) gha~amana, mfn.,
Sp 224,2o; - neg. agha~amana, mfn., Thi 513 (na ca
sakka aghatamanena); - ah sol. ghatitva, Dhp-a I 336,2
(-itva vayamitva arahattarp pattu¡p. asakkonto, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be gha~etva); - fpp ghatitabba, (mj)n., impers.,
Thi 493 (anubaddhe jariimaral)e tassa ghataya
-itabbarp); Mil 390,3o (yogina yogavacarena ...
ughahitabba¡p. -itabba¡p. vayamitabba¡p.); Vism 298,9•;
- 2. is in connection or united (with); Sadd 352,16
(gha~a sailghate: ... -ati ghato);- 3. is possible; suits,
is fitting; Mhv 76:80 (ta¡p. parakkamabahuttarp amhakarp
ghatati
-ate kathaf!1);- caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. ghateti 1 , ghatayat¡I
(afien wr or vl for ghageti qv), l.joins together,
connects; ties; brings together; makes continuous;
makes carry on; Ja VI 96,18 (mama vaf!1Saf!1 aham eva
-essami ti); Sp 647,27 (pat}lamaJTI chinditva paccha -eti);
Ps II 162,24 (brahmaiJa. .. vagupacchedabha yena
pave1,1if!1 -ayissama ti dhana111 pariyesitva bhariyaf!l
gahetva ... ); 206,23 (saccena saccaf!l sandahati -eti ti
saccasandho) f Mp II 326,12 (sandahanti -enti ti, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se ghagenti ti); Spk Il 391,16 (santanessati ti
-essati, vicchedam assa papul,litUTfl na dassati, Ce, Se so;
Be yogavicchedam; Ee wr avicchedam); As 49,4
(vagasmif!1 ganthenti -enti ti gantha); 363,21 ([ta1,1ha]
vagasmiJTI satte cutipa~isandhivasena sibbati -eti, Be,
Ce, E e so; Se ghageti); Sadd 531,22 (gha~a saiJ.ghate);-
part.pr. (a) gha~enta, mfn., Ja VI 96,21 (tumhakaf!l
vaf!1SaJ11 -ento); Sp 497,8 (pa~hamajjhanena saddhif!l
ekaf!l ekaf!l padaf!1 -entena); 869,32 (thü1avakehi
saddhif!l atisukhumasuttaf!l -ento viya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
upanento) = Ps II 103,12 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be upanento);
Ps III 312,21 (attano vaf!1sassa nemif!l -ento viya, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee ghagento, prob. wr); Spk Il 30,1o
(desananusandhif!1 -ento); Pj I 178,23 (saka1af!1 pi hi
Jambudlpaf!l pallail.kena pallailkaf!l -enta nisinna, Be, Se
so; Ce, E e ghagenta, prob. wr); Vibh-a 449,21 foll.
(talapai)I,laf!l phaletva phaletva vasidai)<;iake bandhitva
-ento -ento bhümiyaf!l patetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
ghat~ento, prob. wr); (b) gha~ayamana, mfn., Spk II 81,15
(sasanappave1,1if!1 pana -ayamano, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ghatayamano); Mp III 96,23 (puññena saddhif!1 puññaf!1
-ayamana, Be so; Ce, Ee ghagayamana; Se
ghagiyamana); - aor. 3 pl. gha~ayif!1SU, Spk Il 228,3o
(al,lif!l -ayif!1su); - 2. strives; exerts oneself (for); A Il
143,26 (na ughahissama na -essama na vayamissama, Be
so; Se -ayissama; Ce, E e -issama); Thl 461 (-en ti
saññapetuf!1 pasadata1e chama patitaf!1, eds so; but read
gha~ati with App //, p. 245,13 ?); 477 (appossuka -enti
jatimaraiJappahan aya, eds so; cf App 11, p. 247,2:
ghatanti, and Thi 457: -issaf!1); Ja V 369,6· (atthe
yuñjanti -enti vayamanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -anti);
Spk II 274,16 (sama1,1adhammaf!1 karoti -eti); Ud-a 388,21
(ughahatha -ayatha vayameyyatha ti); 431,31 (cetenti
-ayanti vayamanti, Be, Se so; Ee -anti; Ce omits);
Sadd 531,19 foll. (gha~a gha~ane gha~ana111
vayamakafai)aJ11: -eti -ayati); - part.pr. (a) ghatenta,
mfi-entl)n., Pe~ 28,1s (so yuñjanto -ento vayamanto);
Ps II 306,9 (aparabhage -ento vayamanto cha abhiñña
sacchakasi); Spk I 294,29 (viriyaf!l paggayha -ento);
Dhp-a II 229,11; Thi-a 159,27 (pabbajitva ca -en ti yo
vayamantiyo na cirass' eva arahattaf!1 papul,lif!1su);
Mhv 5:172 (-ento uparaja so chatabbhiñño 'raha ah u);
- gha~ento in Ee and gha~enta in Ce at Ps III 67,15 are
prob. wrr for ghagenta (Be, Se so);- gha~ento in Ce,
Ee at Cp-a 83,5 is prob. wr for ghagenta (Be, Se so);-
gha~ento in eds at Spk II 242,2 is prob. wr for ghagento;
- agha~entehi in Ee, Se at Sp 1285,2 (kayena kayaf!1) is
prob. wr; Ce aghagentehi; Be aghagentena; -
part.pr. (b) gha~aya(t), mfn., Vism 299,16 (tass' eva111
-ayato vayamato); (e) gha~ayanta, mfn., Th-a II 8,12
(-ayanto vayamanto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr ghagayanto);
76 ghatati
- absol. (a) gha~etva, Ja I 139,22 (ossakkamanaJTI attano
vaf!1saf!1 -etva); 139,28 (bhagava ... anusandhif!l -etva
jatakaJ11 samodhanesi); Sp 494,28 (tasma yo jhanena
-etva imina nama jhanena suññagare abhiramaml ti
vadati); Sv 54 7,6 (yena jivitaJTI saiJ.khañyati chijjamana111
-etva t}lapiyati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghagetva); Ps III
420,26 (dve ve1,1ü -etva); Spk II 75,19 (padanupadaf!1
-etva); - gha~etva in Ee at Spk III 10,16 (paraf!1
gha~etva gha~etva) is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se padaf!1
ghayitva ghayitva; - neg. agha~etva, Sp 494,26 (Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee aghagetva, prob. wr); - (b) gha~etvana,
Mhv 37:144 (phaletva matthakaJ11 raja... kapalani
-etvana kasi paka~ikaf!l kha1,1e); - pass. pr. 3 sg.
ghat'lyati, is connected, is joined; is made continuous; is
carried on; Jaiii 136,1r (dhirilnaf!1 hi metti bhinna pi
puna -ati); IV 444,27 (sadhu vat' assa sace raja puttaf!1
1abheyya pave1,1i -etha ti); Vism 662,3 (vipassana
maggena saddhiJTI -ati); Sp 571,21 (lepo na -ati, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be ghatayati); 582,18 (yasma Dabbassa ca imissa
ca vacanaf!1 na -ati, tasma Mettiyaf!1 bhikkhuniJTI
nasetha ti, Ce, Ee so; Be gha~ayati; Se ghatati); Ps II
206,25 (tassa musavadena antaritatta sacca111 saccena na
-ati); 238,3o (kacci vo jivita111 yapeti -ati); Mp III 310,2
(idani pave1,1i -issati ti); Dhp-a I 174,9 (nagarasobhiniyo
hi dhltaraJTI patijagganti na puttaf!1, dh!tara hi tasa111
pave1,1I -ati);- gha~Iyanti ti in Ce, Ee at Nidd-a II 83,9
is prob. wr for ghag!yanti ti (Be, Se so); -
ghatiyamilnaf!1 in Ee, Se at Sp 1193,27 is prob. wr for
ghagiyamanaJTI (Be, Ce so); - aghatiyamano in Ee at
Nidd II 99,4 is wr; Se aghagiyamano; Be, Ce
anaghatiyamano; - pp gha~ita, mfn. [ts], connected,
brought together; put together; made continuous; S II
266,29 (tassa Dasaraha Anake [mudiilge] -ite aññaf!1
a1,1if!1 odahif!1SU,? Be, Ee so; Ce, Se phatite); Ja IV 12,33'
(punappuna uppadavasena -ita suttena pupphani viya
baddha); V 344,13 (cammaJTI cammena -itaf!1, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se ghagitaf!1) t- 364,7 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghagitaf!1);
Sp 571,15 (1epassa -itatta apatti saiJ.ghadisesassa); 589,3
(asakyaputtiyo si ti adlhi vacanehi saddhif!1 -ite yeva
sisaJ11 eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr gha~Ite); Ps II 162,26
(vagaf!l na ucchinna111 pave1,1i -ita); III 425,13 (pal,l1,1asa
saghi andha patipatiya -ita andhave1,1I ti vuccati); Mp II
203,24 (puttakanaJTI hi matapitühi jlvitaf!1 apaditaf!1
palitaf!1 -itaJ11 anuppabandhena pavattitaf!1, Be so; Se
ghaWtaf!1; Ce, Ee omit) f It-a II 159,28; Thl-a 39,4; -
gha~itasantif!1 in Ee at Nidd I 75,3 is wr for ghagita- (Be,
Ce, Se so); - ghatita-asiviso in Ce, Ee at Ps III 79,3 is
prob. wr for ghaWta- (Be, Se so);- gha~ito in Ce, Ee,
Se at Cp-a 136,11 is prob. wr for ghagito (Be so); -
neg. aghatita, mfn., Sp 495,9 (itara pi catasso vijja
ña1,1ena agha~ita parajikavatthüni na honti); V v-a 276,1
(so pana aporisataya akittimo sayaf!1jato kenaci agha~ito
yeva); - fpp gha~etabba, mfn., Sp 1047,3o (nimittaf!1 ...
pa~hamakittitanimittena saddhÍTfl -etabbam);
gha~etabbo in Ee, Se at Sp 1226,12 and 1290,21 is wr for
ghagetabbo (Be, Ce so);- caus. (b) pr. 3 sg. gha~eti 1 ,
gha~ayati 1 , Sadd 829,31foll. (gha~adinaJTI dhatünaJTI
asaññogantanaf!1 vuddhi hoti vikappena kareti: gha~eti
gha~eti gha~ayati gha~ayati); - (e) pr. 3 sg. ghatapeti,
gha~apayati, Sadd 830,1; (d)pr. 3 sg. gha~apeti,
ghatana
ghatapayati, Sadd 830,1.
ghatana, n., -a, f l. [S. ghatana; AMg gha<;la1_1a] striving
after, exertion; Dhatup 347 (iha -e); Sadd 531,19 (ghata
-e, -a111 vayamakara1_1a111);- 2. [S. ghatana] connection,
union; joining up; continuation; Ja II 230,24 (eva111 puna
mayha111 taya saddhirp. cittassa -arp. nama n' atthi);
Tikap 289,IOjoll.; Sp 572,7 (sace mattikaya kutirp. karoti
chadanalepena saddhirp. -e apatti); 1048,24
(pathamakittitanimittena saddhirp. -a katabba); Ps IV
19,25 (punappuna upapajjitva aparapararp. ghatanavasena
vuddhirp., Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se
va<;l<;lhanavasena); Spk III 137,7 (gantha ti ganthana -a);
As 363,20 ([ta1_1ha] o• -atthena sibbani, Be, E e so; Ce
ghatthatthena; Se ghattanatthena) = Nidd-a I 38,26 (Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce ghattanatthena); Vibh-a 492,8 (purimena
saddhirp. pacchimassa -a); - ifc see lepa-; - ghatana-
in Ee, Se at Sp 1244,5 (ghatanaphalakarp. va
ghatanamuggaro va) is wr; Be, Ce ghattana-; -
ghatanarp. in Ee at Nidd I 406,15 and 409,3 is wr for
ghattana111 (Be, Ce, Se so).
2
ghafanaka, mfn. [ghatana + ka ], carrying on; continuing;
Sp 483,21 (te tantirp. pavel).irp. -a sasanajotaka ti
veditabba, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
tantipavel).ighatanaka); - ifc see tantipavel).i-, pavel).i-;
- see also ghataka2.
1 2
ghat3 ,f, ghafa , m. [S. ghata], a number, a collection; a
group, a troop; Abh 630 (-a samiti sarp.hati rasi
puñjo ... ); 1 128; Ja IV 415,6 (migaga1_1o bhayitva tihi
-ahi palayi); V 422,22· (oghavane ti etesa111 oghena -aya
samannagate vane); Sv 226,21 (macchiina111 gumbarp. -a
ti macchagumba111, Ce so; Ee ghata ti; Be, Se gumba) =
Ps II 324,11 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gumba) = Mp I 57,14;
Spk I 55,10 (tesa111 ghatavasen' eva v1manani
nibbattirp.su, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee vattavasen' eva); As 36,31
(cha duka ganthato ca atthato ca
aññamaññasambandhena kal).l).ika viya -a viya hutva
thitatta hetugocchako ti vuccati); Sadd 531,23 (-a ti
samüho macchaghata ti adisu viya); - ifc see itthi-,
deva-, brahma-, maccha-, vana- (sv vana\ hatthi-
(sv hatthi[n]).
ghata 2 , f [S. lex. id.], exertion; or connection; Abh 1128
(-a ghatanarasisu).
3
ghat3 , ghata, f [cf kumbha and S. ghata. ghata; see
E.H. Johnston, 1931, pp. 582-83], part ofthe head (of an
animal); the nape of the neck;? S IV 196,7foll.
([gol).al11] nasaya suggahita111 ga1_1heyya ... upari -aya111
suniggahitarp. nigga1_1heyya upari -ayarp. suniggahitarp.
niggahetva ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee upari ghataya ... upari
-aya111 ... ; Spk III 65,19: upari -ayan ti dvinna111
sirigana111 antare ... -ayarp. patittbite nasarajjuke sutthu
niggahita111 katva nigga1_1heyya, Be, Se so; Ce nasaya111
patitthite; E e ghatayan ti . . . nasayarp. patighite
nasarajjukena).
2
ghati, f [for ghatika qv ], part of the fastening of a door;
V in II 178,1 * (in uddana: süci -i talachiddam,).
ghatika\ f [ts], l. ajar, a pot; a water-pit~her; Thi 422
(nikkhipa pontirp. ca -a111 ca; Thi-a 247,14joll.:
pilotikakhan<;la111 ca bhikkhakapa1a111 ca cha<;l<;lehi); Ja I
417,16' (udaka111 viya -a yena yen' atthika hoti tarp. tarp.
aka<;l<;lhati yeva ti); - ifc see ussiñcana-; - 2. a (pot-
77 ghati
shaped) feature or form of decoration on a pillar or
handle; - ifc see thambha-; - 3. a period of time, 24
0
minutes; Abh 74 (0 -satthY ahoratto); - (a)-dama-
olambaka, m., a hanging garland (shaped like a
jar ?); ? Sp 620,14 (kalambako ti a<;l<;lhacandakantare -o
vutto; Sp-t [Be] II 372,21: -o ti ante ghatikakarayutto
yamakadama-o1ambako); 0
(a)-muggara, m., a
2
"water-pot" stick or club; ? (or to ghatika ?) Ps V 85,5
(dal).<;lena ti catuhatthada1_1<;lena va -ena va; Ps-t [Be] III
423,7: -ena ti daJ.1<;\iinal11 kira aggapasse ghatakararp.
dassenti tena so -o ti vuccati) f. Spk II 374,11
(catuhatthada1_1<;lena khadirada1_1<;lena va -ena va, Be, Se
so; Ce catuhatthada1_1<;lena khadiramuggarena va; Ee
catuhatthada1_1<;lena va atirekada1_1<;lena va; Spk-t [Be] 11
297,24: -ena ti ekasmirp. pakkhe ghatika111 dassetva
katena rassada1_1<;lena).
ghatika2,f [BHS id.], l. a piece ofwood; a stick; a small
piece; S II 178,13 (puriso Yal11 imasmirp. Jambudipe
til).akatthasakhapalasal11 tacchetva ekajjharp. sa111haritva
caturarigu1a111 caturarigula111 -arp. karitva nikkhipeyya,
aya111 me mata tassa me matu aya111 mata ti); Thi 499
(pitusu caturarigulika -a pitupitusv eva na ppahonti;
Thi-a 263,25: -a ti caturarigu1appamiil).ani kha1_1<;lani);
Vism 171,16 (siniddhani saradaruni phaletva
sukkhapetva -a111 -a111 katva); Mp 11 292,11 (nekkha111
jambonadan ti surattaval_ll).assa jambonadasuval_ll).assa -a,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee rattasuval_ll).assa); Vin-vn 127;- ifc see
ucchu-, upadhana-, kaliilgara-, khadira-, candana-,
pasaka- (sv pasaka2); - 2. a game played with sticks;
sticks used in a game; Vin III 180,24 (khalikaya pi kitanti
-aya pi ki!anti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ghatikena, prob. wr) f.
Nidd I 379,9; DI 6,25 ( ... santikarp. khalikarp. -a111
sa1akahattha111 akkha111 ... ; Sv 85,27: -a ti vuccati
dighada1_1<;lakena rassada1_1<;lakapahara1_1akita); MI 266,15
(yani tani kumarakanarp. kitapanakani tehi kitati
seyyathidarp. varikaka111-arp. ... ) f. A V 203,17; Mi1229,1
(kitabhaJ.l<;lakani denti seyyathidarp. varikaka111 -arp. ... );
- 3. part of the fastening of a door (perhaps the bar of
a latch); V in 11 120,17 (anujanami bhikkhave kavatarp. ...
sücika111 -a111 talacchiddarp. ... ; Sp 1207,25: sücika ti
tattha majjhe chidda111 katva pavesita -a ti upari yojita);
207,10 (aññataro pi agantuko bhikkhu anajjhavuttharp.
vihara111 -a111 ugghatetva kavatal11 pa1_1ametva sahasa
pavisi); Sp 356,7 (bha1_1<;lagariko ghatikamatta111 datva
nipajjati); 1204,27 (kavatal11 va pa1_1ameturp. -arp. va
ukkhipiturp. sücirp. va kuñcikaya apapuriturp. na labhati;
Sp-t [Be] III 387,19: -an ti upari yojita111 aggata111); Ps 11
385,33 (-al11 ukkhipitva dvara111 vivaritva); Th-a 11 151,1o
(iil).idvararp. ... yarp. 0 -chidde iil).imhi pakkhitte y antena
vina abbhantare thitehi pi vivariturp. na sakka, Be, Se so;
Ce sarighatitachidde; Ee sarighatikachi<;l<;le); - ifc see
süci-.
-ghatike in Ce, Ee at Ps 11 303,32 (suval_ll).adimayaghatike)
is prob. wr; Be, Se suval).l).amaye ghatake.
ghati, f [ts ], a jar; a pot; Ud 29,28 (-iya odana111
uddharitva pattarp. püretva ayasmato Mahakassapassa
padasi; Ud-a 198,28: -iya ti bhattagha?to, gha?-odanan ti
pi patho, tassa ghati-odanarp. nama devana111 koci
aharaviseso ti attharp. vadanti) quoted Dhp-a 1 428,1o (Be
so; Ee -ito; Ce gha?kodana111 uddharitva; Se ghati-
ghatite
odanaq¡ uddharitva); Dhp-a I 426,2 (ghati-odanaq¡ nama
-iya uddharitva pattaq¡ piiretva therassa hatthe thapesi,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -ito) = Ud-a 198,25 (eds -ito);
Sadd 353,18* (ghato kumbho -1 kumbhl);
0
(i)-kafáha, n., a bowl that is a water-pot (ora turtle's
shell); ? Vin li 114,37 foll. (bhikkhii -e piJ?.~aya caranti
manussa ujjhayanti .. . seyyatha pi titthiya ti .. . na
bhikkhave -e piJ?.~aya caritabbaq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-ena; Sp 1205,3: -an ti ghatikapalaq¡); - 0
-yanta,
ghatiyanta, n., a contrivance of pots (on a wheel) for
raising water; a noria; Abh 524 (ugghatanaq¡ -aq¡);
Ud-a 223,29 (aniccataya va bhaviidisu kammavega-
kkhitto -aq¡ viya anavattbanena paribbhamanato
gamanasllo ti, Be, Se so; Ce anavadiinena; Ee ghati-
yantaq¡ viya anavadiinena) = It-a II 127,2o (Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se ghatiyantaq¡); Th-a II 81,1 (-aq¡ viya pari-
bbhamanto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ghatiyantaq¡); - ifc see
arahata-.
ghatite in Ee at Sp 589,3 is wr for ghatite (Be, Ce, Se so).
ghateti\ ghatayati\ see sv ghatati.
2
ghatete, ghatayati , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ghatayati,
Wg § 33:49], hurts; injures; Sadd 532,2t (ghata sari.ghate
hantyatthii ca : -eti -ayati).
ghatta 1 , mfn., pp ofghaq¡sati qv.
ghatta 2 , mfn. or m. ffrom ghatteti], striking; knocking;-
ifc see sisa- sv s1sa 1.
ghattaka, mfn. and m. ffrom ghatteti], rubbing, striking;
(one) who insults or offends; Spk I 155,5 (rosako ti -o,
1
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghatako);- ifc see citta- (sv citta ).
ghattati in Ee at Sp 541,1 is wr for ghaqeti (Be, Ce, Se so).
ghattana, n., -a, f [S. ghaqana], rubbing; knocking,
striking; insulting; Ja II 270,7· (0 -taya rosako); Nidd 1
140,9 (upaghataq¡ pijanaq¡ -aq¡ upaddavaq¡ upasaggaq¡
briihi); 409,3 (pijanaq¡ -aq¡ upaddavo ... avis! ti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr ghatanaq¡); Vism 458,t2 (cakkhupasadassa
-a hoti); Sp 227,29 (manusitthiya pi ... amasanaq¡ pi
phusanaq¡ pi -aq¡ pi duqhullam eva); Ps II 225,22
(sabbaq¡ vacaya -am eva vuttaq¡); Spk II 393,18
([pattaq¡] -ena parikkhiJ?.aq¡, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
ghaq¡sanena; = Ud-a 252,t2: ghaq¡sanena); Vv-a 55,25
(ayaq¡ asajjasaddo asajja naq¡ tathagatan ti adisu -e
agato); Th-a II 99,2 (dvinnaq¡ bhikkhiinaq¡ sahavase -a
pi bhaveyya ti); Ap-a 122,22 (tesaq¡ -ena utthita papatika
agantva bhagavato piidapitthiyaq¡ pahari, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee te saq¡ghattane, prob. wr); As 263,6 (so pi
ghaqanavasena hoti ti veditabbo, Be, Se so; Ce ghaqana
[vasena]; Ee -a, prob. wr); - ghaqana in Ee at
Sp 572,t foll. (lepaghattanen' eva) is wr for ghatana (Be,
Ce, Se so); - ifc see koqana-, pakkhalana-; -
0
-maijanakkhama, mfn., tolerant of rubbing or
knocking and polishing; Ps IV 147,2t (pasiidhanaq¡ hi
-aq¡ na hoti); Spk I 125,t6 (nekkhan ti atirekapañca-
SUVaJ?.J?.ena katapijandhanaq¡ taq¡ hi -aq¡ hoti); Dhp-a III
329,t3 (-aq¡ jambonadanikkhaq¡ viya);- aghattana,f,
not rubbing against, not striking; not knocking; Pj II
96,t4 (gaJ?.avase sati sari.ghattana ekavase -a ti, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se asari.ghattana ti) = Nidd-a II 129,tt = Ap-a 175,t2
(Ce, Ee so; Be, Se asari.ghattana ti).
ghattanta~p in Ce, Ee at Mp III 141,25 is prob. wr for
ghattentaq¡ (Be, Se so).
78 ghatteti
ghaffápana, n. ffrom caus. of ghaqeti], causing to rub; -
ifc see iiru-.
ghatteta(r), m. f!rom ghatteti], one who insults or offends;
Spk I 155,4 (rosetaran ti -araq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ghatetaraq¡).
ghatteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ghattayati], rubs; rubs
smooth; rubs against, knocks, strikes; shakes, stirs,
disturbs; strikes with words, insults, offends; Dhatup 88
(ghana ghanane); 554a (ghatta calane); Dhatum 780;
Vin III 39,2t (ehi bhante urantarikaya -ehi); A III 343,2
(imaq¡ ayasmantaq¡ ariimiko va -essati samaJ?.uddeso va
taq¡ tamba samadhimha cavessatl ti, Ee so; Se ghatessati;
Be upatthahissati; Ce omits); Pv 45:9 (uraq¡ sisaq¡ ca
-ema abo no appapuññata; Pv-a 271 ,to: attano uraq¡
sisaq¡ ca patighmpsama yeva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
patihaq¡sama, prob. wr); Ja I 218,29 (me etassa
aggasiikha nabhiq¡ -eti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghateti);
IV 93,5• (khiiJ?.uq¡ piidena -eti); Sp 547,24 (khuq¡seti ti
vacapatodena -eti); Sv 579,24 (apehi ma maq¡ -eh! ti
vattabbakaraJ?.aq¡ nama n' atthi, Ce, Se so; Be
vattabbiikaraq¡ nama; Ee wr ma -ehi kiq¡
vattabbakaraJ?.aq¡); PsI 120,20 (vato va PaJ?.J?.akasataq¡
eren ti vato va paJ?.J?.akacavaraq¡ -eti); II 417,29 (rosetha
ti -etha); III 51,14 (tvaq¡ kiq¡ samaJ?.O nama
akappiyamaq¡saq¡ te khaditan ti -eti); Spk I 173,t6
(samaJ?.o Gotamo padhiinaq¡ anuyutto sukhena nisinno
-ayissami nan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ghattayissami);
III 70,14 (saddo ... sotappasadaq¡ -eti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ghateti); Th-a II 76,6 (na -aye na asadeyya); As 72,21
(sakuJ?.o iikasena agantva rukkhagge nillyamiino va
rukkhasiikhaq¡ -eti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghateti);
Sadd 531,25 (ghana calan e: -eti -ayati); - ghattessiimi
ti in Ee at Spk IIl 149,15 is wr for ghatessami ti (Be, Ce,
Se so); - part.pr. (a) ghattenta, mf( -enti)n., Vin III
118,24; Sv 256,3; Ps II 351,3o (iirammaJ?.esu pasiide
-entesu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghatentesu); III 67,t5 (ime
pana ... maq¡ yeva -enta vijjhanta parisamajjhe kathenti,
Be, Se so; Ce ghatenta; Ee ghatento); 183,17 (civarena va
januna va -ento nisidati); Spk 1 314,3
(suVaJ?.J?.akiñkiJ?.ikaq¡ -ento viya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ghatento ); II 242,2 (patbamaq¡ tava te ajan antena kataq¡,
idani maq¡ -ento va akasi, so read? eds ghatento);
Ud-a 250,22 (upanighaq¡santiyo ti -entiyo); Cp-a 83,5 (te
kira briihmaJ?.a ... hatthavikaradihi -enta agamaq¡su, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee wr ghatento); Mhv 25:91 (kaJ?.~aql khipi
mukhe tassa -ento rajakuJ?.qalaq¡); neg.
aghattenta, mfn., Sp 1285,2 (nikkharnitabbaq¡ kayena
kayaq¡ aghanentena, Be so; Ce aghattentehi; Ee, Se wr
aghatentehi); Spk I 220,ts; (b) ghanayanta, mfn., Sn 847
(te -ayanta vicaranti loke); Th 125 (makkato pañca-
dviirayaq¡ kutikayaq¡ pasakkiya dviirena anupariyeti
-ayanto muhuq¡ muhuq¡; Th-a II 7,13: abhikkhaJ?.aq¡
-ayanto calento); Cp 2:8:4 (dhure dhuraq¡ -ayanta, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se ghatayanta); Vism 18,t5 (there bhikkhii
-ayanto pi titthati -ayanto pi nisidati); - neg.
aghattayanta, mfn., Ps III 23,2t * (aghattayanto niyyati
ubho jiiJ?.ii ca gopphake) = Spk III 49,10 (Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se aghatayanto) = Ud-a 414,ts•; (e) ghattayamiina, mfn.,
Spk I 80,3o (Devadattaq¡ -ayamiina vadanti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se ghatayamana); As 309,24 (atthato pana pasadaq¡
ghattha
-ayamanam eva rüpaq1 patihaññati nama, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee ghagiyamanam);- neg. aghagayamana, mfn., Ps III
303,18; - ghattayanto in Ce, Ee at Th-a II 8,12 (-ayanto
vayamanto) is wr for ghatayanto (Be, Se so); - aor.
3 sg. (a) ghattesi, Vin Il 118,7 (aññataro upasako taq1
bhikkhuq1 abhivadento upahanayo slsena -esi); M II
4,36; Ja VI 168,7; Ps III 248,24 (vacaya pi maq1 -esi ti
kujjhitva); Mhv 21:18 (dhenu ghaJ.ltaqi taqi -esi);
(b) aghagesi, MI 338,3o (iti Maraq1 aghattesi bhikkhu,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atajjesi; = Th 1208: eds atajjesi);
(e) ghattayi, Ps III 303,7; 3 pl. (a) ghattesuqi, Ja III
510,11 (dve sakha annamannaq1 -esuq1);
(b) ghattayiqisu, Ps III 62,26; Spk I 65,27 foll. (ta kira
devata bhagavantaq1 kayena vacaya ti dvlhi pi -ayiq1su,
tathagataqi avanditva akase patitthamana kayena
-ayiq1su ... ,Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghatayiqisu);- 2. (i) [for
ghateti qv sv ghatati] joins together, connects; Mp II
326,12 (saccena saccaq1 sandahanti -entl ti saccasandha,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ghatentl ti); III 403,12 (phassaqi ca
phassasamudayaq1 ca sibbati -eti, eds so; cf As 363,21:
taJ).ha . . . sibbati ghateti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se -eti); -
part.pr. ghagayamana, mfn., Mp III 96,23 (puññena
saddhiqi punnaq1 -ayamana, Ce, Ee so; Be
ghatayamana; Se ghagiyamana); - (ii) [cfghatlyati
sv ghatati] is joined; is connected; Th-a III 161,15 (yada
pana vipassana ... maggena -eti); Thi-a 42,25 (na nu kho
mayhaq1 vipassana maggena -eti ti); aor.
3 sg. ghagesi, Thi-a 114,14 (tassa cittaq1 samahitaq1 ahosi
vipassana vlthiqi otari maggena -esi); - absol.
(a) ghagetva, V in III 36,33; Ja VI 489,21 (mahajanaq1
hatthavikaradlhi -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be ghagenta; Se
ghatenta); Sv 276,25 (asajja ti -etva); Ps III 95,1 (ubhosu
passesu sutthu vimaghaqi -etva); 332,22 (so kira ekaq1
gumbaq1 -etva mige utthapeti); Spk I 68,10 (rajaku1anaqi
jatiq1 -etva -etva); Sadd 604,9 (so cittajasaddo ... pañca
thanani -etva vaJJJ;~attaqi upagacchati); - ghagetva in
Ee at Sp 498,3 is wr for ghatetva (Be, Ce, Se so); -
neg. aghagetva, Sp 523,17 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
aghatetva); Ud-a 408,23; - aghagetva in E e at Sp 494,26
and 498,4 is wr for aghatetva (Be, Ce, Se so);
(b) ghagayitva, Ps II 422,17; Th-a III 172,6; - pass.
pr. 3 sg. ghattlyati, Nidd I 5,18 (ruppati kuppati -ati
pJ!iyati) f. Spk II 290,6 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghatiyati);
Sp 267,6 (upadinnakena anupadinnakaqi -atu); -
part.pr. ghattlyamana, mfn., Ja II 418,6 (taq1 maJ;~iqi
ghaq1santi, so sükara1omehi -amano, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
ghaq1siyamano); V 199,4·; Sp 540,31 (-amana anatthaya
saq1vatteyya ti na ghageti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr na
ghagati); Ps II 56,3o (ruppamano -amano ); Sp 1193,27
(giithaqi va muttaq1 va -amanaq1 duggandhataya
badhati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ghatiyamanaqi) = Ps IV 50,3;
- neg. aghagiyamana, mfn., Nidd I 175,8 (avirujjh-
amana aghattiyamana, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be appahlyamana)
f. II 99,4 (Se aghagiyamano; Be, Ce anaghatiyamano; Ee
wr aghatiyamano); - pp ghattita, mfn. [ts], l. rubbed;
rubbed smooth; struck; shaken, stirred; A I 124,8
(duttharuko katthena va kathalaya va -o
bhiyyosomattaya asavaq1 deti) = Pp 30,8; Ja VI 294,1o*
(siiken' akkhl va -aqi); Nidd I 150,26 (pi~ito -o
vyadhito); 397,2 (khuq1sito -o vambhito garahito); Spki
79
133,26 (yena ba1ena -o taqi ba1aqi ... qaq1seyya, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se ghatito); 214,23 (sltadihi ca niccaq1 pavedhitaqi
calitaqi -aq1 rüpaqi disva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghatitaqi);
Cp-a 136,11 (kenaci purisena -o ... asiviso viya, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se ghatito); As 272,3 (tena pasade -e); -
ghagitindriyo in Ee at Ja III 344,23' is perhaps wr for
kupitindriyo (Be, Ce, Se so);- neg. aghattita, mfn., Ja V
203,5* (aghagita niccak:I~aq1 karonti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
avighagita, perhaps wr); Nidd 1 353,12; Mil 260,29
(udakaqi aghagitaq1 kehici na ca1ati); Spk II 170,28
(yatha pana aghattita bheri-adayo saddaq1 na vissajjenti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se aghatita);- 2.joined, connected; Ja V
344,13 (cammaq1 cammena -aq1, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
ghatitaqi) f. 364,7 (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ghatitaqi); -
fpp (a) ghattetabba, mfn., Vin II 220,2 (na ca vuqqho
sailghatikaJJJJena ghattetabbo ); Sp 291,2 (clvaram
rañjitva sailkhena va maJ).ina va yena kenaci na
ghattetabbaqi); Ps II 282,12 (asadetabban ti
ghagetabbaqi); (b) ghattayitabba, mfn., Sv 828,29; Spk I
65,27 (asadetabban ti ghagayitabbaq1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ghatayitabbaqi); (e) ghattaníya, mfn., Th-a III 190,17
(patighe ti ghattaniye phoghabbe, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
ghattite); Patis-a 109,23 (sitadihi ghattanlyaqi
dhammajataq1 rüpan ti); - neg. aghattaniya, mfn.,
As 326,2 (na haññati ti aghaqi aghaganiyan ti attho);
Vibh-a 72,4 (aghaganiyataya aghaq1); - caus. part.pr.
ghattapenta, mfn., Vin III 117 ,3o (üruq1 ghattapentassa).
ghattha, mfn., pp of ghaq1sati qv.
-ghatthana in Ee atAs 87,7 (upadinnakaghaghanassa) is
wr for -ghanana (Be, Ce so).
ghatthita- in Ee at Pj 1 49,25 is wr for ghagita- (Be, Ce, Se
so).
ghal}j:a, gha~Jqa, f [S. gha~Jta], a bell; Ja IV 215,s (attano
glvaya -aq1 bandhapetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se kaJ.lqaqi);
Ps III 70,11 (ekena hatthena pacchiq1 ekena -aqi gahetva
ussaretha ayya CaJ.lqalo 'han ti janapanatthaq1 taq1
vadento, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ghaJ;~qaqi); Spk II 226,29
(attano givaya -aq1 pi~andhapetva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
ghaJJqaqi); Vv-a 36,23 (kuñjarassa ubhosu passesu
mahako~ambappama~Ja maJ.limuttadikhacita hemamaya
anekasata mahantiyo -a tahaq1 tahaq1 o1ambamana
pacalanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gha~Jqa); Mhv 21:15
(sayanassa siropasse -aq1 so dighayottakaqi 1ambapesi
VÍravetUqi icchantehi VÍnÍcchayaqi); - 0 abhighata, m.,
the striking of a bell; Vism 142,10 (-o viya cetaso
pathamabhinipato vitakko . . . ghaJ.ltanuravo viya anu-
ppabandho vicaro, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ghaJ.lqabhighato) =
As 114,33 (Be, Ee so; Ce ghaJ.lthabhighato; Se
gha~Jqabhighato) f. Sp 144,21 (--saddo viya cetaso
pathamabhinipato vitakko ... , Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gaJ).q'- );
1
- see also khuddagha~Jtika (sv khudda ).
ghal}tl. ghal}!Jl, f [from confusion of gai).qi and
gha~Jta qqv ?], something struck to summon the bhikkhus
or announce the time; a bell or gong or block;
Vism 181,30 (so ghaJ.ltiqi paharitva gaJJaqi sannipatetva,
Ee so; Be ghaJ;~qiqi; Ce, Se gaJ;~qiqi); 408,3 (vihare
ghaJ.ltisaddo bherisaddo sailkhasaddo ... , Ee so; Be, Se
gha!Jqi-; Ce gaJ).qi-); Sp 382,4 (ghaJ.ltiqi paharitva ka1aqi
ghosetva, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se gaJ).qiqi); 1124,28 (ghaJ.ltiya
pahataya bhikkhusailghe sannipatite, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
ghal}fika
ga!)<fiya); 1406,25 (ghaJ?.tif!! paharitva, Be so; Ee
ghai_J<fif!!; Ce, Se gai)<fÍf!!) -:f- Mp III 340,17 (Be so; Se
ghaJ?.<fif!!; Ce, Ee gai_!<fif!!); Pj I 251 ,2s (masassa anhasu
dhammasavanadivasesu ghai_J<fil!l akotetva ussiiretha ... ,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se gai)<fif!!); Dhp-a II 54,4 (nakhapitthen'
eva ghai_J<fil!l paharitva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gaJ?.<fif!!); 247,4
(akale ghaJ?.<fi pahata kassaci aphasukaf!! bhavissati ti, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se gaJ?.<fi); Cp-a 203,13 (gha!)tisaññaya
pai_JJ?.asalato nikkhamitva, Be so; Se ghai_J<fi-; Ce, Ee
gai_J<fi-).
ghal}tika, m. [S. ghii.J?.tika], a ballad-singer with a bell;
Abh 396 (cakkiko tu ca -o).
ghal}teti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gha!)tayati,
Wg § 33:94], speaks; or shines; Sadd 532,24 (ghata gha~i
bhasay3f!!: ... -eti -ayati).
ghal}thanaip in Ee at Mhv 27:38 is wr for gha!)tiin3f!! (vi
so).
ghal}«J,a, m. [S. lex. id.], a bee; Sadd 871,24 (ka<fi gha<fi
ca<fi ice evamadito dhatuto kapaccayo hoti kaJ?.<fo -o
vai_J<fo ... , E e so, perhaps wr ?).
ghal}«J,ii, see sv ghaJ?.ta.
ghal}«J,i, see sv ghaJ?.~f.
ghal}I}ati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ghJl.lJ?.ate, Wg § 12:3],
takes, grasps; Sadd 358,s (ghiJ?.i ghuJ?.i ghaJ?.i gahane:
ghiJ?.J?.ati ghUJ?.J?.ati -ati).
3 kukku!ai_!<fasai_Jthano -o nama m3f!!sapiJ?.<fo nibbattati) i-
ghata (occasionally written ghata ), n. [S. ghfta], clarified
butter, ghee; Abh 499 (sappi -af!!); Nidd I 372,6
(
0
-panaf!l te1apii.naf!! ... , Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ghata-);
Ap 384,2 (mahasamudda cattiiro -3f!l sampajjare mama);
Cp 1:1 0:8; Mi141 ,2 (khlr3f!! duyhamii.n3f!! kalantarena
dadhi parivatteyya, dadhito navanltaf!! navanitato -3f!l
parivatteyya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghataf!!); Vism 28,21
(kumbhiy3f!! tai_J<fu1e ghate -3f!l disva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ghate ghataf!!) = Vibh-a 484,16; Ud-a 314,5 (-af!! pivitva
ba1af!! hoti); Mhv 32:40 (-e pakke mahaja1apüve); -
2 gajjita- sv gajjati;- 3. (n.) a class ofpercussive musical
0
íisana, m(jn). [ghata + asana ], "whose food is ghee",
fire; Ja I 472,14* (dakassa majjhe ja1ate -o, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee udakassa); V 63,19* (pavako ... -o dhümaketu, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se gha~asano ); 446,5• (-3f!l kuñjaraf!! kai_Jha-
sappaf!! ... ete naro niccayato bhajetha); Ap 142,26 (-3f!l
va ja1itaf!! adittaf!! va hutasanaf!!; Ap-a 415,15foll.:
ghat3f!! vuccati sappi, ghatassa asanaf!! adhiiran ti -3f!l
aggi, atha va t3f!! asati bhuñjati ti -3f!l aggi yeva);
Sadd 334,9* (aggi ... -o vayusakho dahano ... ); -
0
-binduviliyana, n., the melting of a drop of ghee;
Saddh 201; - 0
-sitta, mfn., sprinkled with ghee;
Vv 83:8 (aditt3f!! vata m3f!! santaf!! -af!l va pavakaf!!
viirina viya osiñcaf!!) = Ja III 157,7•; Ja VI 171,s•
(virocasi -o va aggi, Be, Ce, E e so; Se ghata-); -
saghata, mfn., together with ghee; ? Ap 582,2 (-af!!
sakkaraf!l ad3f!!, Be, E e, Se so; Ce sakkharaf!!).
ghatayamano in Ee at Spk II 81,15 is prob. wr for
gha~ayamano (Be, Ce, Se so).
1 2
ghatva , absol. ofghayati qv.
2
ghatva , absol. ofhanati qv.
ghana (sometimes in Ee [wrongly] written ghai_Ja), mfn.,
m. and n. [ts; AMg ghaJ?.a, ghana], l. (mfn.) (i) salid;
thick, dense, compact; hard, firm; Abh 707 (nirantar3f!!
-3f!l sand3f!!); 820 (nirantare ca kathine); Ja III 282,3
(ek3f!! sukhumaf!! -3f!l sücif!! katva); IV 70,19* (vai_JJ?.ava
80 ghana
abhirüpo si -o sañjatarohito cakkavaka; 70,23·: -o ti
ghanasariro); Mi1382,16 (pathavi nirantara acchidda
asusira bahala -a); Vism 417,12 (kath3f!! tava mahantaf!!
udakarasif!! -3f!l karoti ti); Sp 1106,12foll. (tes3f!! kira
civarani -ani, tesu patitaf!! udakaf!! na paggharati, o -tta
putabaddh3f!! viya tittbati); 1123,24 (id3f!! thülaf!! idaf!!
sai_Jhaf!! idaf!! -af!! id3f!! tanuk3f!!); Sv 198,s
(uJ?.hapakatikassa pana dubbalassa ca civar3f!!
sukhum3f!! sappayaf!! sita1ukassa -af!! dupagaf!!, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee ghai_Jaf!!); Mhv 30:59 (cha medavaJ?.J?.apasii.J?.e
aharif!!su -e tato); - ghanaf!!, adv., compactly; firmly;
Ja I 264,19 (sabbe pi avatesu otaretva P3f!!SUf!l akiritva
-af!! akotetva agamaf!!su); - (ii) deep (of sound); dark
(of colour); - iic see below; - 2. (m.n.) (i) what is
(apparently) salid; any compact mass; Vism 640,6
(anatta1akkhai_Jaf!! nanadhatuvinibbhogassa amanasikara
-ena pa~icchannatta na upatthati) -:f- Vibh-a S0,2o; Pj II
149,24 (yatha ... naiiga13f!l bhümighan3f!! bhindati ...
ev3f!! bhagavato . . . paññanañgalaf!! yathavuttaf!! -af!!
bhindati);- ifc see abbha-, eka-;- (ii) an iron club or
hammer; Abh 820 (lohamuggarameghesu -o);- ifc see
ayo- sv aya(s);- (iii) the human embryo (in the fourth
week after conception); SI 206,12* foll. (abbuda jayate
pesi pesi nibbattati -o -a pasakha jayanti, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee pesi; Spk I 301,16: tato pesito sattahaccayena
Ja IV 496,26* (Be so; Ce nibbattate; Ee, Se pesiya jayate
-o); Mi140,12 (añña pesiya mata añña -assa mata);
Vism 236,19 (abbudakale pesika1e 0 -kale); - (iv) a
cloud; Abh 47 (megho valahako ... -o); 820; It-a II 57,31
(abbhaghana ti abbhasañkhata -a ghanameghapa~a1a va
vimutto cando viya); Mhv 19:50 (mahamegho
pavassittha himagabbha samantato mahabodhif!!
chadayif!!su sita1ani -ani ca); Sadd 407 ,23* (imani pana
meghassa namani: megho valahako ... -o ... ); - ifc see
instruments, idiophones, such as the cymbal; Abh 139;
142 (susir3f!! V3f!!Sasañkhadi sammataladikaf!! -3f!!);
820; Ps II 300,19 foll. (pañcañgikaf!! turiy3f!! nama
atat3f!! vitat3f!! atatavitat3f!! susir3f!! -an ti . . . -af!!
sammadi) i- Vv-a 37,3; - 0 opala, n. [S. lex. id., m.],
hail; Abh 50 (karaka tu -af!!); o -kottima,
0
-kugima, mfn., salid and beaten;? (or with a thick
inlay; ?) Mp I 169,15 (tassa -ahi .. . rattasuvai_JI)a-
it!hakahi yojanubbedh3f!! cetiyaf!! arabhif!!su, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee ghanakotthimahi) = Th-a III 125,37; Dhp-a I
414,16 (pasadakü~arp --rattasuvai)J)en' e va saghi-udaka-
ghatagaJ?.hanak3f!! karesi, Ce, Ee so; Be ghanakottita-; Se
ghanako~ima- ); III 281,12 (ativiya pasadikarp -3f!l
itthirüp3f!! karapetva); Mhv 38:71 (dathadhatukarai_J<f3f!l
ca raf!!Sif!! ca o -kuWmaf!! mahagghamai_Jisañkil)l)3f!l ...
da~hadhatumhi püjesi); - --suvaJ?.I)a, n., salid beaten
gold; ? Thüp 154,22 ( --suvai_JJ?.i!thakahi); 232,32
( --suvai_JJ)amayarp buddhapatimarp nisidapesi); 235,33
(raja ettakani rüpakayani --suvai_JJ?.eh' eva karesi); -
0
-ghatima, mfn., penetrating a salid mass or a hard
substance; Ja III 282,23* (-3f!l patitthaddh3f!! ko sücirp
ketum icchati; 282,26·: ya ghatiyamana adhikarai_Jif!!
anupavisati ay3f!! -a ti vuccati, tadisi ti attho); -
5
0
-ninnadasussara, mfn. [sara ], having a beautiful voice
ghanika
with a deep timbre; Ap 568,3 (sugato ... -o); -
0
-nila, mfn., dark blue-black; Mhv 38:63 (mal).lhi -ehi);
-
0
-puppha, 0 -pupphaka, n and mfn., a deep (red)
dye; a deeply-dyed coverlet; dyed deeply with a (red)
dye;? ([a coverlet] with thick flowers; ?) Abh 313
( -pupph~ pa~alika); Ja 1 500,25' (mama bhariya eka¡p
0
kusumbharatt~ nivasetva eka¡p parupitva eva¡p
0
-puppharattena vatthayugena acchanna); Sp 1086,7
(pa~alika ti -pupphako Ul).l).ilmayattharako, Ee, Se so; Be,
0
Ce Ul).l).ilmayalohitattharal).o; Vmv [Be] 11 184,12:
0
-pupphako ti bahalarago) f. Sv 87,1 ( 0 -pupphako Ul).l).a-
mayattharal).o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -puppho Ul).l).amayo
attharako) f. Mp 11 293,1 CO-puppho); Ps 11 39,15
(pa~alikatthato ti o -pupphakena Ul).l).amaya-attharal).ena
atthato, Be so; Se 0 -pubbakena; Ce, Ee 0 -pupphena
Ul).l).amayena attharakena) f. Spk 11 325,6 ( -pupphena);
0
0
-pürita, mfn., tightly packed, closely filled;
Sp 690,29 (sithilapiirite va bhajane ... -e, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee ghal).a-); - 0 -baddha, mfn., firmly or compactly
formed; tightly bound; Sp 663,Io (sal).ha¡p -~
antaravasak~ disva, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se
ghanamagh~); 690,28 (sithilabaddhaya thavikaya
sithilapiirite va bhajane riipagal).anaya apatti, -e pana
ghanapiirite va eka va apattl ti vutta¡p, Be, Ce so; Ee
ghal).a-; Se -bandhe); 842,24 (thero ti thiro -o;
0
Sp-~ [Be] III 70,4: -o ti ghanam~sena sambaddho,
ka~inasa¡phatasañro ti vutta¡p hoti); -
0
-ratta, mfn.
1
[ghana + ratta ], deep-red; Vism 625,2o (asokailkur~ hi
adito va tanuratta¡p hoti, tato dv!hatlhaccayena -a¡p);-
2 in sg. sense; ghara, gharani in pl. sense; see also
0
-Vinibbhoga, m. [ghana + vinibbhoga ], separation,
analysis ofwhat is (apparently) so lid; Vism 694,28 (-a¡p
katva anicca¡p khaya~~ena ti ev~ khaya¡p passato
ñana¡p, tena ghanasaññaya pahan~ hoti); Sv 756,33
(nanappakarato samiihavasen' eva kayasailkhatassa
vatthuno dassanena -o dassito hoti); Ps 1 272,7 (yava
imam eva kaya¡p yatha~hita¡p yathapal).ihita¡p -a¡p katva
dhatuso na paccavekkhati); As 56,36 (pabhedato hi
desana --pa~isambhidilñal).ilvaha hotl ti);
0
-sañchanna, mfn., thickly covered; Pv-a 258,3 (ucchiihi
-~ mahant~ ucchuvana¡p nibbatti);
0
-Sannivesa, mfn., densely put together; closely
connected, closely stuck together; Sp 716,2 (bahii pil).~il
CUI).l).etva ekabhajane pakkhitta honti -a ... , Be, Ce, Se
so; E e ghal).a-); Th!-a 200,27 (kanana¡p ... sahit~ -a¡p);
- o -slira, m., camphor; Abh 305 (-o sitambo ca
kappiira¡p); - 0
-SuVai}I}akottima, mfn., inlaid with
salid gold;? of salid beaten gold;? Dhp-a IV 135,16
(Visakhaya karitesu -esu senasanaku~esu, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se -suval).l).ako~imesu); - atighana, mfn., too thick,
0
very thick; Sp 703,s (natighano natitanuko ...
muggasiipo ).
ghanikli, m.pl. [?], the (followers oj) a class of deities; ?
Mill91 ,7 (yatha va pana maharaja mahiya gal).a vattanti
seyyath!da¡p malla atol).il . . . s1va vasudeva -a
asipasa ... ,Be, Ce, Ee so; Se omits).
ghanibhüta, mfn. [pp of *ghana + bhavati; ts], become
hard, become thick; Nidd-a 11 19,!2 (na dosavasena
0
-citto, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce hatlbhiitacitto).
ghamma, m. [S. gharma] (sg. loe. -e, -ani; Sadd 231,18
also -asmi¡p, -amhi), heat, warmth (of the sun or fire );
81 ghara
the hot season; Abh 954 (gimhe -o nidagho ca); S 1
143,21* (y~ tv~ apayesi bahii manusse pipasite -ani
samparete; Spk 1 210,32: -anl ti gimhe) = Ja 111 360,28';
Sn 353 (vari¡p yatha -ani 0 -tatto vacabhikailkhami) =
Th 1273 (Th-a III 201 ,27: o -kale ul).habhitatto puriso
kilanto tasito); Pv 40:3 (parivattami varicaro va -e);
Ja III 361,14' (-ena samparete ativiya phu~~e); IV 20,10•
(-e pathe brallmal).a ekabhikkhu¡p ugghagapad~
tasit~ kilant~ pa~ipadayi Sailkha upallanalli); 172,Io*
(tato na¡p apara¡p kame -e tal).ha¡p va vindati; 173,10': -e
gimhakale); - ghammani ti in Ee at Spk 1 169,22
(piyaritta¡p va -anl ti) is wr; Be, Se dhammanl ti; Ce
vammanl ti; - 0 íibhitatta, mfn., ajjlicted by, suffering
from, the heat; D 11 266,4• (sltodaka¡p pokkharal).i¡p ...
nago -o va ogalle te thaniidar~); M 1 74,37 (puriso
agaccheyya -o ghammapareto kilanto tasito pipasito);
Ja VI 109,29* (-a manuja pivanti; 110,9·: nerayikasatta
aggisantapena tatta); - 0 -jala, n. perspiration; Abh
1088 (sedo -e); - 0 -pareta, mfn., half-dead from the
heat, quite overcome by the heat; MI 75,1 (puriso
ghammabhitatto -o) f. S 11 110,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ghamma pareto ); As 117,26.
ghammati,pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup hammati, Wg § 13:24?],
goes; Sadd 462,Io (gamu sappa gatiya¡p: gacchati gamati
-ati); 833,23 (gamissa ghamma gaggha: -ati -atu
gagghati).
ghayamlinassa in Ee at Spk 1 206,!8 is wr for ghay-
amanassa (Be, Ce, Se so).
ghara, n., gharli, m.pl. [AMg, BHS ghara], (ghar~, ghara
1
jaragharo sv jara ) l. a building, a house; esp. the
household of a layman, living a worldly lije in a jamily;
Abh 206 (-~); Vin III 181,15 (ehi bhante -~
gamissama ti); IV 66,28 (-ato ca nikka~~hi); 311,6
(amhaka¡p -ani agantva); SI 37,4* foil. (ki¡p su mitta¡p
sake -e... mata mitt~ sake -e); Dhp 241
(asajjhayamala manta anughanamala -a); Sn 43
(gahagha -am avasanta); 337 (saddhaya -a
nikkhamma); 899 (sattha va hino pavasa¡p -amha);
Pv 21:7 (yass' ekaratti¡p pi -e vaseyya); 27:22 (na
manusseseu ldisa yadisa no -a idha); Th 712 (aditta va
-a mutto ); Th! 18 (hitva -e pabbajitva; Th!-a 23,s: -e ti
geha¡p, o -saddo hi ekasmi¡p pi abhidheyye kadaci
bahiisu blj~ viya ruthivasena vohañyati); 420 (atha
m~ adasi tato a~~hassa -amhi); Ja 11 232,17* (sukha -a
Vacchanakha sahirañña sabhojana); IV 371,15' (bharami
putte dare ca -esu gathito aha¡p); V 82,2o* (hitva -a¡p
pabbajito acelo); VI 301,21* (katva -esu kiccani
anusasitva saka¡p -~); Ap 274,13 (pitu -e, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce gahe); Mi147,I9 (til).a¡p jhayaman~ -a¡p
jhapeyya); Kv 329,24 (akasa¡p parivaretva -ani karonti);
Vism 663,!3*; Sp 652,25 (-e ti 0 -paricchedo ekakulassa
nivesan~ hotl ti); 1007,2 (ki¡p uppa~ipa~iya
issarajanan~ -ani agam~su); Cp-a 154,8 (yassa
gharadvare eva¡p nipajjitva Cal).~alo marati tena -ena
saddhi¡p sattasattagharavasino Cal).~ala hontl ti); 206,21
(pañcakamagul).asamiddh~ -am eva avasatu);
Mhv 37:11 (bhinditva Lohapasad~ sattabhiimikam
uttam~ -e nanappakare ca ito 'bhayagiri¡p nayu¡p);
Sadd 858,29 (gaha ice etassa dhatussa gharadeso hoti va
gharaka
1_1apaccaye pare ti ... -a111 -ani); - ghare karoti, brings
home as a wife; marries; Ja I 290,5 (pariyesitva
purisantara111 agatarp ekarp matugama111 -e karissami ti);
V 226,11· (sace hi aha111 viya añño raja tava bhariyaya
paribaddhacitto abhavissa ... tava sisarp chindapetva tarp
attano -e kareyya); 442,23; Dhp-a I 45,2o (kumarikarp ...
tassa -e akasi); - suññarp/suññakarp ghararp, solitude;
Ap 273,7 (ma1_1<;Iape rukkhamiile va vasato suññake -e);
326,7 (suññe -e ma1_1<;Iaparukkhamiilake vasami nicca111
sukhito anasavo); Sv 360,5 (suññagare ti suññe ghare,
ekeko va nislditva ti adhippayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
suññaghare); - gharam in Ee at Ja VI 448,13* is wr for
saram (Be, Ce, Se so);- ifc see anto-, andu-, aparuta-
(sv apapurati), asana- (sv asana\ odanika-, odanlya-
(sv odaniya\ kara-, cetiya-, jantaghara, jara- (sv jara\
parima-, bodhi-, bhattiya-, sayani-, sura-, sil ti-; - 2. a
floor or storey of a building;? S V 452,13 (aharp
kuragarassa hetthimaJ11 -arp akaritva uparimarp -arp
aropessam1 ti; Spk III 301,16: thambhabhitti-
padussapanadina -assa heghimabhagarp akatva); - 3. a
case; a container; - ifc see kuñcika-, suci-; -
0
ajira, n., a house-yard; Vism 144,4 (ghare oh!yitva -e
rhatva); - o• -avasa, m.' living in a house; household,
family life; V in I 197,5 (cirarp diqho me bhante kamesu
adlnavo api ca sambadha -a bahukicca bahukara1_1lya ti);
DI 63,3 (sambadho -o rajopatho abbhokaso pabbajja);
A III 295,22 (na sakkoti darake poseturp -arp santharitun
ti); Sn406; Ud59,31; Jai 6l,s (maya -a111 cha<;I<;Ietva
nikkhamma pabbajitva nibbana111 gavesiturp vaqati);
Ps III 24 7,29 (-e ad!nava111 brahmacariyavase anisarpsarp
ca dassetva); Pv-a 61,3 (na dani me -ena attho
abhiramissami brahmacariyavase ti); - o• -asa va ti in
Ee at Ja IV 223,22" is prob. wr; Be kiratan ti; Ce, Se
kirasan ca ti); - 0
'upacara, m.n., the immediate
surroundings of a house, the ground belonging to a
house; Vin III 46,29 (aparikkhittassa gamassa -e rhitassa
majjhimassa purisassa le<;l<;lupato); IV 100,25; Vism 72,10;
Spk II 356,7 (manussanarp hi antogharaJ11 viya cha
ajjhattikayatanani -a111 viya cha bahirayatanani); -
o -ka pota, m., a domestic pigeon; Mil 364,6 (-assa eka111
añgaJ11 gahetabbarp, Be, Ce so; Ee 0 -kaporassa; Se
0
-kapotakassa); 403,3 (yatha maharaja -o paragehe
vasamano na tesarp kiñci bha1_1<;Iassa nimittarp ga1_1hati
majjhatto vasati saññabahulo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
o -kaporo ); - o -golika, o -go}ika,f, a house-lizard;
Abh 621 (sarabil -a); Jaii 147,15"; Sv 92,14 (-aya
makkhika gahetva mutta); Mp III 104,4; - 0 -dasa, m.,
0
-dasi,f [ghara + dasa 1, dasi], a domestic slave; a
house-slave; Pv 15:21 (-iyo); Ja V 436,2· (-Ihi saddhirp
sarpvasati); Sp 1000,21 (antojato nama jatidaso -iya
putto); Sv 157,13 (dasakaputta ti balavasineha
0
-dasayodha, Ce, Ee so; Se dasikaputta ti ...
0
-dasikaputta); 0
-dinnakabadha, m., a sickness
caused by a magic potion given in a house; ? Vin I
206,19 (aññatarassa bhikkhuno -o hoti ... anjanami
bhikkhave sitalo)irp payetun ti; Sp 1092,14: -o ti vasl-
karal_lapanakasamuqhitarogo; Sp-~ [Be] III 304,14: -o
nama vasikara1_1atthaya ghara1_1iya dinna-
bhesajjasamutthito abadho .. . gharasaddo e' ettha
abhedena ghara1_1iya vattamano adhippeto );
82 gharm;li
0
-dhüpana, n. [ghara + dhilpana2], perfuming or
fumigating the house; Sp 716,3 (-'-adlsu upanetabbaJ11);
718,21;- 0 -pafipati,f, a series or (regular) succession
of houses; Sp 624,27 (-i pi v1thippama1_1a va hoti ti);
Nidd-a II 144,14 ( -irp acha<;I<;Ietva a<;l<;lhakularp ca
da)iddakularp ca nirantara111 pi1_1<;laya pavisamano); -
0
-paripatiya, adv., successively from house to house,
from house to house in arder; Ja V 253,12·; Vism 343,14
(kapalahatthena -iya gamavithlsu caritabbaJ11 hoti);
Sp 207,5 (-iya bhikkhaya pavisati); Ps I 148,29 ( -iya
carantassa); Pj II 278,27 (manussa . .. puna -1ya
ekekadivasa111 danarp adarpsu);- 0 -bandhana, n. (and
m.) l. confinement in a house, detention; Vin III 47,9
(sankhalikabandhanena va -ena va nagarabandhanena
va ... bandheyyurp); - 2. the bondage of the household
life; marriage; Ja V 312,29 (brahma1_10 brahma1_1irp
amantetva bhoti puttaJ11 Sonakumararp -ena
bandhissama ti aha); Dhp-a I 4,6 (te vayapatte -ena
bandhirpsu); Ud-a 70,22; Th-a I 93,23 (-e chinditva
pabbaji);- 0 -mesi(n) (interpreted by cts as 0 -m-esi[n]),
m(jn). [cfS. grhamedhin], a householder; SI 215,3*
(yass' ete caturo dhamma saddhassa -ino; Spk I
333,14foll.: gharavasa111 pañca va kamagu1_1e esantassa
gavesantassa kamabhogino gahatrhassa) = Sn 188; A III
354,14* (saddhassa -ino; Mp III 377,15: gharavasa111
pariyesantass' eva vasamanassa va); It 112,6* (sugatarp
pana nissaya gal!agha -ino; It-a II 163,23: -ino ti ghararp
esino, gehe rhatva gharavasarp vasanta bhogilpakaral_lani
e' eva gal!aqhaslladlni ca esanaslla ti attho); Pv21:28
(Pv-a 124,9: -ino ti ghararp avasantassa gaharthassa);
Ja VI 575,14' (dukkata111 vata bho rañña saddhena -ina;
575,2o-: ghara111 avasantena);- 0 -vicaraka, m., one who
looks after houses; la 1 364,27 (sace ajja evarupo buddhi-
sampanno -o nabhavissa corehi . . . sabbarp geharp
viluttarp assa; see 364,18: tarp geharakkhakarp katva
agamasi); - 0 -sappa, m., a kind of (non-poisonous)
snake, a rat-snake; Abh 652 (silutto -o); Ja I 372,17
(-arp vi ya tarp yugasatakaJ11 yatthikoriya gahetva, Se so;
Be ajagarasappaJ11; Ce, Ee agarasappaJ11); VI 194,1s·
(siluttassa ti -assa); Dhp-a II 256,21 (nayarp aslviso -o
ti); - 0 -samika, m., a householder; Ja IV 28,26 (eko
coro ... paribuddhehi -ehi e' eva arakkhamanussehi ca
anubaddho); Vism664,Il; Psii 318,21; Spki 325,17 (-o
viya itthagarassa majjhe nisinno si);- 0 -(s)samini,f, a
housewife; the w(fe of a householder; Sp 532,21
(kulitthiyo nama -iyo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ghara-
samiyo); Ps li 98,33 (gahapatanl ti -!); Pv-a 276,18 (tarp
attano jetthaputtassa -irp akasi); - see also saghara
5
(sv sa ).
gharaka, m.n. [ghara + ka2; AMg gharaka, gharaya], a
house; a small house; Ja II 268,10* (gaccha tVaJ11 -arp
yathasukharp); VI 232,8* (kacci bahuvidharp malyaJ11
ocinitva kumariyo -e karotha paccekarp khi<;l<;laratirata
muhurp; 232,18·foll.: pupphagal!akani pupphagabbhe ca
pupphasanapupphasayanani ca kacci karotha); Mhv 5:42
(-arpada);- ifc see ji1_11_1a- (sv jarati 1).
gharaJ:.la, n. [from gharati], sprinkling; Sadd 341 ,3o (sica
-e: secati).
gharaf,li, f [AMg, BHS ghara1_1!, ghari1_11], a housewife;
Abh 237 (kalattarp ca -1 bhariya); Vin I 271,37
gharati
(acchariyaiTI yava lükhayaiTI -1 yatra hi nama imaiTI
chac;lc;laniyadhammaiTI sappiiT~ picuna gahapessati);
Pv 26:9 (mayaiTI pubbe papadhamma -1 kulamataro;
Pv-a 174,16: -1 ti gharasaminiyo); Ja VI 142,2* (gaha-
patayo -iyo ca nagaramhi); Sp 557,10 (itthannamassa
bhariya jaya pajapatl puttamata -1 gharasaminí ... ); Mp I
422,11 H me garugabbha); Pj II 181,1 (ehi tattha
gacchama -í me bhavissasi idarp ca te id~ ca dassamí
ti parabhariyaiTI va paradasiiTI va vañcento ).
gharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jigharti; S. Dhatup gharati,
Wg § 22:40], sprinkles; wets; Dhatup 250 (ghara
secane); Dhatum 359; Sadd 425,26 (ghara secan e: ... -ati
gharaiTI); - (jor gharanti in E e at Sp 671,4 read gharan
ti); - part.pr. gharanta, mfn., Sv 812,16 (uggharantan ti
upari -antaiT~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee uttarantarp).
1 cf Wg § 17:58: ghr~u sailghar~e).
ghavati, ghoti , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghavate, Wg § 22:55],
makes a sound; Sadd 334,27 (gha sadde: ghoti -ati);
467,23 (gu ghu ... sadde: gavati -ati).
ghasa, m. [cf S. ghasa], an eater, a devourer; Sv 702,24
(vailkaghasto va ambujo ti bajisarp gilitva rhitamaccho
viya, -o ti pi parho, ayam ev' attho, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
ghasto so ti pi parho);- ifc see kala- (sv kala\ maha-g-
(sv maha[t]), sabba-.
ghasati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghasati, Wg § 17:65; cf
S aghasat etc], eats; devours; destroys; Dhatup 294
(ghasa adane); Dhatum 432; MI 32,24 (imarp
dhammapariyayaiTI sutva pivanti maññe -anti maññe
vacasa e' eva manasa ca; PsI 152,29: abbhanumodanta
manasa -anti viya); Ja II 260,20* (kalo -ati bhütani
sabban' eva sah' altana); III 210,13* (yo va~~hamano
-ate patitth~; 210,1r: -ate ti khadati vinasetl ti attho);
IV 56,26* (bhavanti h' eke purisa gopipasikajatika -anti
maññe mittani vacaya na ca kammana, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
gopipasaka-; Ee gh~santi; 57,2o·: gunnarp
pipasakajatika viya, pipasitagosadisa ti vutt~ hoti yatha
pipasitagavo titth~ otaritva mukhapür~ udakam
pivanti na pana udakassa kattabbayuttakaiTI karonti evam
ev~ ekaccce idaiTI ca idaiTI ca karissama ti
madhuravacanena mittani -anti piyavacananucchavikaiTI
pana na karonti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gh~santi); IV 71,17'
(utrasto -as! bhlto); - part.pr. (a) ghasa(t), mfn.,
Th 749 (antovailkagato asiiTI maccho va -am amis~;
Th-a III 28,2o foll.: amisaiTI -anto khadanto maccho vi ya,
gi1abajiso maccho viya ti adhippayo); Spk I 274,10*
(etaiTI ... maral)ena bhijjati etarp maccussa -am amisarp,
Ee so, nom. n. ?; Be, Ce ghasam; Se ghasam amisarp
gataiTI; metre uncertain) = Pj II 397,26* (eds so); -
(b) ghasanta, mfn., Ja II 260,25·; Th-a III 28,2o;
(e) ghasana, mfn., Vin II 201,25* (mahavarahassa mahirp
vikubbato bhisaiTI -anassa nadlsu jaggato, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee ghasamanassa, unmetrical; Sp 1276,16: bhisam
-anassa ti bhis~ khadantassa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
-amanassa ti); - inf ghasituiTI, Ja V 24,s· (jighaññan ti
-itukamo 'smi ); - ghasiturp in E e at J a I 190,11' is prob.
wr; Be, Ce, Se ghaiT~situiT~:- pp ghasta, mfn., who has
eaten, swallowed; ifc see vailka-; - fpp
ghasitabba, mfn., Ps IV 199,s (til)aghasan ti -aiTI til)arp,
khaditabban ti attho, eds so); - see also jighacchati.
1
ghasati2 , pr. 3 sg. ? [= ghasati ?], eats;? pleases,
satisfies; ? Ja IV 56,26* (bhavanti h' eke purisa
83 ghataka
gopipasikajatika -anti manne mittani vacaya na ca
kammana, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se gopipasaka-; Ee ghaiT~santi;
57 ,2w: gunnaiTI pipasakajatika viya, pipasitagosadisa ti
vuttaiTI hoti yatha pipasitagavo titth~ otaritva
mukhapür~ udakaiTI pivanti na pana udakassa
kattabbayuttakaiTI karonti evam ev~ ekaccce idaiTI ca
idaiTI ca karissama ti madhuravacanena mittani -anti
piyavacananucchavikarp pana na karonti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee ghamsanti).
ghasana, n. [ts], eating, devouring; Sadd 461,3 (küja -e:
küjati).
ghasmara, mfn. [ts], voracious, gluttonous; Abh 734 (-o
tu ca bhakkhako).
ghassati, pr. 3 sg. [= ghaiTlsati qv ?], rubs; Sadd 443,3
(ghusu saiTlharise, s~hariso sailghaqanarp: ghassati;
2
ghapma, n. lfrom gharati; or from ghareti ?], exertion;
striving for; or connection; or shining; ? Dhatup 554
(ghara -e); - gharanakammaiTI in Ee, Se at Spk I 144,5
is wr for ghatana- (Be, Ce so).
3
ghata,f' se e sv ghara .
ghapko in Ee at Ps IV 71,5 is wr for ghatito (Be, Ce, Se
so).
ghatitesu in Ce, Ee at Ps V 88,17 is wr for ghatitesu (Be,
Se so).
ghateti , -ayati , caus. pr. 3 sg. ~fgharati qv.
1 1
2 2
ghateti , -ayati , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gha!ayati,
Wg § 33:93], speaks; (or shines;) Sadd 532,23 (ghara
ghari bhasayaiTI: ... -eti -ayati); - gharesi in E e at Ps V
62,24 and Spk I 70,5 is wr for ghatesi (Be, Ce, Se so);-
gharetva in Ee at Ps III 413,21 and IV 71,5 is wr for
ghatetva (Be, Ce, Se so).
ghliJ,Ia, see sv ghana.
ghlita, m. and m(fn)., l. (m.) [ts] a blow; slaying,
destruction; Abh 403 (miiral)aiTI hananaiTI -o); Thí 473
(vassasataiTI pi ca -o seyyo dukkhassa e' eva khayo, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se paghato; Th!-a 259,32: yathavutto
sattighato seyyo ); 493 (anubaddhe jaramaral)e tassa -aya
gharitabbaiT~): Ja V 458,s (pakkhadivasesu uposathika
hutva ma -aiTI kareyyatha ti); Vism 377,2 (sukhadln~
paccayanaiTI -ena); Sp 180,9 (tadisassa vacanassa -o
samucchedo ti); Dhp-a III 156,2o (attano 0 '-attham eva
phaleti); Mhv 35:22 (ar!hi -ato seyyo taya -o imassa tu);
- ifc see akkhohil)í-, arahanta- (sv araha[t]), il)a-, ümi-,
2
khal)U-, gama- (sv gama ), tala- (sv tala'), nagara-,
nigama- (sv nigama'l, pantha-, pitu- (sv pita[r]), matu-
(sv mata[r]'), muqhi-, setu-; - 2. (m[fn])., killing; one
1
who kills; - ifc see cara- (sv cora ); - aghato in Ee at
Ps II 118,24 is wr for aghato (Be, Ce, Se, MI 140,17 so).
ghlita(r), m. [from ghateti], a destroyer; Sv 229,19
(bhagava me saral)aiTI parayanaiTI aghassa -a hitassa ca
vidhata ti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee tata) =Ud-a 287,16 (Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce ghateta; f. Sp 171,32: eds tata;= PsI 131,1: Be
tata; Ce, Ee, Se hanta) f. It-a II 44,4 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
hanta) f. It-a I 65,1 (aghassa -a)= Th!-a 171,16 (Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se ghatahatassa).
ghatarp., ind., l)amul absol. ofhanati qv.
1 1
ghataka , m., ghatika ,f [ts], (one) who strikes or kills; a
killer, a murderer; a destroyer; V in I 334,25* (in uddana:
matu pitu ca -~); Sp 444,2ojoll. (imaiTI vatthuiTI
ghataka
miiremi ti cetanaya atthibhavato -o ca hoti
anantariyakammarp. ca phusati ... ); Cp-a 191,27
(kiiraQ.ika ti -a, coraghataka ti attho); 229,20 (vadhako
ekanten' eva-o paccatthiko); Sadd 398,30 (upaghato -o
pa!igho);- ifc see arahanta- (sv araha[t)), itthi-, gama-
(sv gama\ go-, cora- (sv cora 1), thi-, pitu- (sv pita[r]),
matu- (sv mata[r]\ samika-.
ghataka 2, n. [ghata + ka2], striking, slapping; killing;
devastation, destruction; - ifc see gama- (sv gama2],
tala- (sv tala\ matu- (sv mata[r] 1).
ghatana, m.f( -I)n. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.) striking, attacking;
destroying; Pj II 390,17 ([sena] abhippaharini ti samaQ.a-
brahmaQ,anarp. -1 nippothani antarayakañ ti attho) =
Nidd-a I 233,28 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se ghatinl); Mhv 25:116
(sabbesarp. -irp. tarp. manasi ca kayiraniccatarp. sadhu
sadhu);- 2. (n.) striking; killing; Abh403; lai 177,t4
(dubbalanarp. yeva -ato); VI 424,26 (acchariyarp. tassa
rañño evampena upayena -an ti); Mill86,tt (yarp. pana
bhante Nagasena coranarp. -arp. tarp. tathagatanarp.
anumatan ti); Spk I 144,5 (ettakanarp. pana pasünarp.
0
-kammarp. nama bhariyan ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
gha!ana-); Vibh-a 381,8 (piil).atipata ti piil).assa atipata, -a
miirana ti attho); - ifc see go-, tala- (sv tala 1), matu-
(sv mata[r] 1).
ghatapana, n. ffrom ghatapeti, caus. of ghateti;
AMg ghayavaQ.a], causing to kili; incitement to killing;
Sp 1277,22 (rañño -arp. n' atthi).
ghati, pr. 3 sg., see sv ghayati 2.
ghati(n), m.f(n). [S. ghatin], killing, destroying; (one) who
kills; a murderer; Ja VI 87 ,16* (tarp. ekaputtarp. -imhi
katharp. cittarp. na kopaye, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ekaputta-
ghatamhi; 87,17': -imhi ti ghatake, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ghatamhi ti); Nidd-a I 233,28 ([sena] abhippaharini ti
samaQ,abrahmaQ,anarp. -ini nippothani, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
ghatani; = Pj II 390,17: eds ghatani); - ifc see para-
viriya- (sv para), paQ.a-.
ghatika, mfn. [cf S. ghiirtika], mixed with ghee; ?
Sadd 786,17 (tilena sarp.sagharp. bhojanarp. telikarp., evarp.
goJikarp. -arp.); - -ghatika in Ee at la VI 87 ,22· (putta-
ghatikamhi) is wr; Be, Ce -ghatakamhi; Se -ghatamhi.
ghatika\ se e sv ghataka 1.
ghiitika2, f [BHS id.; cf S. lex. ghati], destruction; killing;
- ifc see dubbala-.
ghatima, mfn. ffrom ghata], striking, piercing; destroying;
- ifc see ghana-.
ghatuka, mfn. [ts], murderous; hurtful; Abh 731 (himsa-
sllo ca -o).
ghatUip, inf of ghateti qv.
ghateta(r), m. ffrom ghateti], one who causes (someone)
to kili or be killed, who incites killing; D I 56,s (n' atthi
hanta va -a va)= MI 517,28.
ghatetaya, mfn.,fpp ofghateti qv.
ghateti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ghatayati; denom. from
ghata qv, used sometimes as caus. ofhanati qv], strikes;
kills, slays, puts to death; causes to kili or be killed;
Vin III 74,37 (evarp. vijjha evarp. pahara evarp. -ehi ti);
IV 308,19 (imina Kappitakena amhakarp. ayyaya thüpo
bhinno banda narp. -ema ti); Dhp 405 (yo na hanti na
-eti; Dhp-a IV 176,3: n' eva kañci sayarp. hanti na aññe
-eti) = Sn 629; la I 175,16 (dinbadirtharthane sunakhe
84 ghiiteti
-etha ti); IV 449,17* (balayarp. balassa vaco nisamma
ahetuna -ayate janindo ); V 182,22* (-emi karp. avajjharp.
ñatinam udikkhamananarp.); VI 139,2o* (atha no
akaraQ,asma yaññatthaya deva -esi); 491 ,IO* (katharp.
Vessantararp. puttarp. satthena -ay amase; 491 ,12': -amase
ti -essami, Ce, Ee so; Be -ayissama; Se-essama); Nidd I
216,24 (kodho parapuggalarp. -etva attanarp. -eti);
Mil 278,14 (suriyo atippabhataya timirarp. -eti); Sp 54,2
(paccantarp. vüpasamenta core -enti); Mp I 369,2o (raja
imarp. corarp. dakkhiQ.advarena niharitva -etha ti aha);
Dhp-a II 43,14 (raja marp. -etu va rarthato pabbajetu va);
Mhv 7:35 (ajjeva yakkhe -ehi); 7:36 (tattha saddarp.
karissami tena saddena -aya); Sadd 398,19 (vadhati
vadheti -eti ice api mpani bhavanti); - opt. 3 sg.
(a) ghateyya, la VI 140,z• (anantararp. pi tarp. deva
-eyya); Ps III 345,3; Spk III 61,13 (caQ.c)o kumiiro
-eyyapi man ti); (b) ghataye, Dhp 129 (na haneyya na
-aye); Sn 705; la VI 140,1* (ma tassa saddahesi na marp.
KhaQ.c)ahalo -aye, Ce, Ee so, prob. wr; Be, Se -eyya);
(e) ghatayeyya, Sn 394 (paQ.arp. na hane na ca -ayeyya);
3 pl. ghateyyurp., Nidd I 397,8 (he!heyyurp. vihe!heyyurp.
-eyyurp. upaghateyyurp.); Sv 80l,t9; - fut. 3 sg.
(a) ghatessati, la VI 424,22'; Cp-a 255,12 (ayarp. marp. kin
nu kho -essati udalm no ti); (b) ghatayissati, la VI
424,18*; Cp 3:12:6; 1 sg. (a) ghatessarp., la VI 137,8*
(-essarp. Candarp. ca Suriyarp. ca, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
-issarp.); - ghatessarp. in Ce, Ee at la I 255,5 (yan-
nünaharp. ... -es san ti) is prob. wr for ghateyyan ti (Be,
Se so); (b) ghatessami, Vin IV 225,26 (mayharp. pajapati
aticarati tarp. -essami ti); Ps III 329,2t; (e) ghatayissarp.,
la VI 137,12' (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -essarp.);
(d) ghatayissami, la VI 151,28*; Cp 2:6:10; - part.pr.
(a) ghatenta, mfn., Vin III 89,3o (hananto -ento
chindanto chedapento ... ); la V 231,t5; Ps II 29,II
(bahusu pi manussesu ekam eva paQ.arp. -entesu); Spk III
268,2 (attano pi savake aññamaññarp. -ente niviireturp. na
sakkoti);- neg. aghatenta,mfn., laiii 203,It*; (b)neg.
aghataya(t), mfn., SI 116,19 (sakka nu kho rajjarp.
kiireturp. ahanarp. aghatayarp. ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
aghatanarp.) quoted Dhp-a IV 32,t; (e) neg.
aghatayanta, mfn., Spk I 180,28 (ahanantena
aghatayantena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se agha!entena);
(d) ghatayamana, mfn., la I 256,12' (anavasesa
aññamaññarp. -ayamana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aññarp.); -
aor. 3sg. (a)ghatesi, JaVI 141,15*; Mil20l,t5; Sp41,23
(te sabbe Asoko ... Tissakumiirarp. !hapetva -esi); Ps V
62,24 (sili.gena vijjhitva -esi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gha!esi);
(b) ghatayi, aghatayi, Sn 308 (raja... gavo yaññe
aghatayi); 309 (ta visaQ.e gahetvana raja satthena -ayi);
Ap 490,6 (-ayi); Mhv 7:37 (aghatayi); 2 sg. (a) ghatesi,
aghatesi, la III 176,12' (yo tvarp. mama dubbalaya puttake
vadhi -esi ti); VI 150,5* (ma tata no aghatesi);
(b) ghatayi, aghatayi, la V 69,13* (karp. avajjharp.
aghatayi); VI 142,3* (ma -ayi orasarp. puttarp.);
(e) ghatayittha 1, Sp 588,31 (tvarp. ... manussarp. -ayittha);
(d) ghatayesi, la VI 139,21* (pubbe va no daharake na
hanesi na -ayesi, L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 41 so; Be, Se
daharakale . . . na -esi; Ce daharake samane . . . na
-ayesi; Ee daharake ca samane . . . na -ayesi;
140,zzfoll. ': kasma sayarp. va na hanesi aññehi va na
ghatva
-apesi); 3 pi. (a) ghatesu~, aghatesu~, Ja III 177,15* (ete
nag~ aghatesu~; 177,w: aghatesun ti vadhi~su);
Sv 153,27 (Nagadasa~ ... ranhavasino kupita -esu~);
(b) aghatayu~, Ja IV 211,3* (aññarnañña~ vivadena
aññarnañña~ aghatayu~; 211,w·: aghatayun ti
-apesu~); (e) ghatayi~su, Ja I 254,28; As 245,J9;
2 pL ghatayittha2, Ja VI 491,J6' (ma tumhe ... -ayittha);
- inf (a) ghatetu~, M 11 122,J; Ja IV 192,J9* (na itthi-
karai_J.a raJa putt~ -etum arahasi); Sp 56,J4;
b) ghatayitu~. Mi1186,17; (e) ghatu~? Ap-a 562,3J
(karnm~ asodhetva ghatukamatta va jlvantam eva ta~
süle uttasesi); - absoL (a) ghatetva, Ja I 166,26;
Vism 602,1 (saya~ kusa1~ pi akusa1a~ pi samarr~
añña~ dubbalakamma~ -etva); Sp 998,32 (jarriihi va
kapparehi va najikerapasal).ad!hi va -etva); Ps IV 61,3
(khuddakarnige -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee gha~etva);
Cp-a 249,6; Mhv 25:7 (-etva Darnije); (b) ghatetvarra,
Ja VI 140,2•; (e) ghatayitva, Mil219,J6; As 245,s; -
pass. pr. 3 sg. ghatiyati, Mi1186,J4 (yo so maharaja
-ati); Ps 11 332,J6 (-antu); V 31,26 (upahaññatl ti -ati);
- part.pr. ghatlyarnarra, mfn., Ja I 175,J7 (te digha-
dighaghane -amarra palayitva ... ); Ps 11 133,24 (ime
satta ... kilesakamehi -amarra); - pp ghiitita, mfn.,
struck; killed; Ja I 167 ,Jo (--tta); Sp 1023,6 (mata -a);
Ps III 349,J8 (me matu1o adosakarako nikkarai_J.ena -o ti);
V 88,J7 (ghatessama ne ti cintetva idh' eva -esu sabba~
van~ eka~ kul).ap~ bhavissati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr
gha~itesu); Ud-a 265,J2* (macchake -e disva);
Th!-a 262,33 (ya~ ca paccatthikehi -arra~ rudhira~);
Mhv 25:109 (diya<;l<;lharnanuja v' ettha -a);- ghatite in
Ee at Sp 1106,8 is wr for gha~ite (Be, Ce, Se so); -
neg. aghatita, mfn., Sv 926,6 (pares~ aghatitabhava~);
-fpp(a)ghiitetabba,mfn., Mi1186,Jo (coro ... bandh-
aniyo bandhitabbo ghatanlyo -o ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ghatitabbo ti); 407 ,J6 (yogina yogavacarena ... kilesa-
makkhika ... tatth' eva -a); Ps III 413,21 (matara~ pi
pitara~ pi ghatetva atta va -o ti, Be, Se so; Ce jotetabbo
ti; Ee wr gha~etva); Cp-a 61,2 (yajana mutto ti Khai_J.<;Ia-
hajena vihitayaññavidhito vuttanayena -ato mutto ); -
neg. aghatetabba, mfn., Ja V 182,26' (aghatetabb~, Be
Ce, Ee so; Se agha~etabb~); (b) ghatanlya, mfn.,
Mi1186,JO; (e) ghatetaya, mfn., MI 231,2 (vatteyya
rañño . . . vaso ghatetay~ va ghatetu~ japetay~ va
japetu~ pabbajetay~ va pabbajetu~; Ps 11 276,34:
ghatarah~ ghatetabbayutta~ ghatetu~) f. 11 122,1;
(d) ghacca; - see sv ghacca; - caus. pr. 3 sg.
ghiitiipeti, Vin I 277,7 (cai_J.<;Iay~ raja -eyyapi m~. Be,
Ce, Se so; E e wr -eyyasi); 343,36 (sabbe va tayo -essati);
Ja IV 124,26 (putte -eyya ti); V 230,25 (sve -etha n~
maharaja ti); Cp 3:2:9 (-emi); Sv 318,3 (attano putte jate
sattakkhattu~ -etu~ upakkarni, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
ghatetu~) = Ps 11 390,25 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se marapetu~);
- part.pr. ghatapenta, mfn., Dhp-a I 359,5;- aor. 3 sg.
ghatapesi, Ja VI 140,23'; 3 pL ghatapesu~, Ja IV 211,1o-;
- absol. ghatapetva, Ja I 260,23 (sahassa~ -etva);
Vibh-a442,27;- pp ghatapita, mfn., Sp 1277,2o (rañño
-itatta); - fpp ghatapetabba, mfn., Cp-a 191,15 (kumaro
nasiyo nasetabbo -etabbo ).
ghiitvii, absoL of ghayati2 qv.
ghiina (and occasionally ghiil).a), n. [S. ghriil).a], the nose;
85 ghayati
the organ of smelling; Abh 150 (nasa ca nasika -a~);
Vin IV 2,22 (na -erra ghayita~); MI 112,5 (-a~ e' avuso
pa~icca gandhe ca uppajjati gharraviññal).~); S III 232,6
(yo -asmi~ chandarago cittass' eso upakki1eso); IV 7,3
(-assa assado ); Dhp 360 (-erra s~varo sadhu, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee ghiil).ena); It 24,8• (cakkhu sota~ ca -a~ ca
jivha kayo tatha mano etarri yassa dvarani suguttarri 'dha
bhikkhuno ); Nidd I 233,18 (-ato gandhatai_J.ha [savati]);
Dhs 605 (y~ -~ catunna~ mahabhiitarra~ upadaya
pasado attabhavapariyapanno anidassano sappa~igho ... ;
As 310,28foll.: ghayatl ti -~. ta~ sasarnbhara-
ghanabi1assa anto ajapadasal).~harre padese
yathavuttappakar~ upakara-upatthambhananupa1ana-
parivara~ ghanaviññal).ad!n~ yatharah~ vatthudvara-
bhava~ sadhayarnarra~ tinhati); 606 (yarnhi -arnhi
anidassanamhi sappa~ighamhi gandho anidassano
sappa~igho pa~ihaññi); Vibh 70,1o (-~ arrice~
dukkha~ anatta viparil).amadhamma~); Mi154,2o (yo
bhante abbhantare jivo ... -erra gandha~ ghayati); 55,31
(-e uggha~ite); Vism 444,2 (upadariipa~
catuvisatividha~ cakkhu sota~ -~ jivha kayo riipa~
saddo gandho ... ); As 315,6 (-~ pi akasajjhasay~
vatupanissayagandhagocara~); Sadd 334,17 (gha
gandhopadarre: ghati "'~);- o•ayatana, n., the sense-
organ that is the nose; the sphere of olfactory
perception; D II1 243,15 (cha ajjhattikarri ayatanarri
cakkhayatana~ sotayatan~ -~ ... ) f. S 11 3,31;
Dhs 605; Vibh 136,16; Vism 481,6;- 0 '-indriya, n., the
sensejaculty that is the nose; D III 239,11 (pañc'
indriyarri cakkundriya~ sotindriy~ -a~ ... ); S IV
169,2; Vibh 122,3; Vism 491,6; Pa~is-a I 85,3 (gharrarn
eva ghayana1akkhai_J.e indagha~ karetl ti -a~, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee ghal).am); - 0 -dviira, n., the access that is the
nose (as sense-organ); Nidd I 130,26; Vism 624,16;
As 73,17 (ta~ gandharammai_la~ -e apathagata~ viya
hoti); - 0 -dhiitu,f, the constituent element that is the
nose (as sense-organ); M III 62,12 (-u gandhadhatu
gharraviññiil).adhatu); Vibh 87,11; Vism 484,29; Spk 11
131,12 (0 -ppasado -u);- 0 -pasiida, m., the tranquillity
(resulting in sensitivity) of the sense-organ that is the
nose; the receptive power of the sense-organ that is the
no se; Spk 11 131 ,JI; - o-rata in E e at It-a I 171,26 is wr
for jharrarata (Be, Ce, Se, It 40,2o* so);
-Viññeyya, mfn., cognisable by the sense-organ that is
0
the nos e; Vin I 184,23 (-a gandha); D III 234,5 f. M l
85,25; Dhs 589 (-a~ riip~); Mi1270,15 (nibbana~ ...
na -a~); -aghiinaka, mfn., without (the sense-organ
that is) a nose; Yam I 58,2o (sacakkhukarra~ -arra~
uppajjantarr~); 11 73,14; - saghiinaka, mfn., with (the
sense-organ that is) a nose; Yam I 59,2o; 1173,10.
ghiiyati1, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. k~ayati ?] burns; is consumed; ?
- part.pr. ghayarnarra, mjn., Mi1397,4foll. (goriipo
chandena -amarro pan1y~ pi va ti .. . yogina
yogavacarena acariyupajjhayana~ anusatthi chandena
pemena pasadena -arnanena pa~iggahetabba, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se ghasarnarro ... ghasarnarrena);- se e also jhayati 1.
ghiiyati 2, ghati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jighrati, ghrati], l. smells;
Dhatup 394 (gha gandhopadarre); Dhatum 628; S IV
72,26 (ye te gharraviññeyya gandha aghayita ... na ca
-asi na ca te hoti -eyyan ti); A III 237,27 (puriso
ghiiyana
candanaghatikal)l adhigaccheyya . . . so y ato y ato -etha
yadi mülato yadi majjhato yadi aggato adhigacchat' eva
surabhigandhal)l); Vv 38:7 (-ase tal)l sucigandhal)l);
Dhs 605 (yena ghanena ... gandhal)l . . . -i va -ati va
-issati va -e va); Kv 126,34 (antena ghanena atltal)l
gandham -atl ti); Mil 54,20 (yo bhante abbhantare
jlvo ... ghanena gandhal)l -ati); Sadd 334,17 foil. (gha
gandhopadane: ghati . . . -ati); part.pr.
(a) ghaya(t), mfn., S IV 75,3• (-ato gandhal)l) = Th 811;
Sv 736,9; (b) ghayanta, mfn., Ap 347,2o; Ps III 110,1;
(e) ghayamana, mfn., Spk I 206,18 (slla-gandhal)l ...
-amanassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ghayamanassa); 297,27;
1 --parama, mfn., having or wanting nothing more than
- aor. 3 sg. ghayi, Dhs 605; - absol. (a) ghatva ,
ghatva, S IV 71 ,5' (gandhal)l ca ghatva surabhil)l, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee ghatva); 75,1• (na so rajjati gandhesu
gandhal)l ghatva patissato, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ghatva) =
Th 810 (eds ghatva; Th-a III 44,13: ghatva ti -itva);
Sadd 334,17 (ghati ghanal)l gandhal)l ghatva);
(b) ghatvana, Ap 268,26; (e) ghayitva, Vin III 77,24;
M III 167,3o (pilf.la guthabhakkha ... guthagandhal)l-itva
dhavanti); Ja III 52,16 (uddo macchagandhal)l -itva);
Vibh 248,18 (ghanena gandhal)l -itva); Mil347,1•;
Sp 586,1s; - neg. aghayitva, Ps 11 293,1; - 2. sniffs;
kisses; - absol. ghayitva, Ja V 328,21 (puttal)l Nandal)l
alingitva slsal)l -itva cumbitva tava hadaye sokal)l
nibbapehl ti);- pp ghayita, mfn. [cf S. ghrata], smelled;
Vin IV 2,22 (amutal)l nama na ghanena -al)l na jivhaya
sayital)l ... ); Patis 1 79,17; Mil 80,12 (--tta gandhal)l
sarati); Ps III 211,10;- neg. aghayita, mfn., not smelled;
(what has) not (be en previously) smelt; S IV 72,25 (ye te
ghanaviññeyya gandha aghayita aghayitapubba ... );
Ps III 211,10 (aghayital)l ghayitabbal)l ghayital)l
samatikkamitabbal)l, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee agghayital)l); -
fpp ghayitabba, mfn., Mil55,33 (gandho ghayitabbo);
Ps II1 211,10.
2 karoma); Ap 420,18 (uddharami bhisal)l tattha -u);
ghayana, n. [from ghayati ], smelling; the action of
smelling; Dhatup 34 (singha -e); Patis 1 79,15 (gandhesu
o• -atthaya avajjanakiriyavyakata viñña!)acariya); Spk I1
224,13 (dvlhi angullhi gandhapi!)c;lal)l gahetva ekaviiral)l
ghayanamattan ti attho ); Th-a III 10,21 (yatha
khaditabbakhaditabbassa so!)c;laya paramasanal)l -al)l ca
hatthinagassa vlmal)lsa nama hoti); As 283,34 (ghanal)l
o• -atthal)l jivha sayanattha); - ifc se e gandha-
(sv gandha 1).
2 grasps; Sadd 358,7 (ghi!)i ghu!)i ghal)i gahane: -ati
ghayi(n), mfn. [from ghayati ], smelling; Sadd 859,21 (karl
-1 dayl, perhaps wr; se e 859,fn.b).
ghayire in Ee at Pv-a 60,8 is prob. wr for jhayare (Be, Ce,
Se, Pv 11:10 so).
ghasa, m. (and n. ?) [cf S. ghasa], pasturing; fodder; food;
eating; Abh 465 (aharo bhojanal)l -o); 602 (-o tu
yavaso); 1103 (-o tv anne ca bhakkha!)e ); D III 94,6 (te
-al)l patilabhitva puna-d-eva araññayatane pal)I)akutJsu
jhayanti); A III 347,3* (-am acchadanal)l laddha [or
ghasa-m-acchadanal)l], Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ghasa-
acchadanal)l) = Th 698; Ja 1 511 ,2• (tam eva -al)l kurute
vyaggho sañjlviko yatha; 511 ,8·: so dussllo papapuggalo
ghasati sankhadati vinasal)l papeti); IIl 201 ,5* (Gumbiyo
-am e sano araññe odahl visal)l); Ap 145,3* (-esu
gedham apanno); Sp 383,19 (yo pi baddhasukarassa -al)l
ca panlyal)l ca datva); Spk I 274,10* (etal)l maccussa -am
86 ghnl}l}ati
amisal)l, Be, Ce so; Ee ghasam; Se -am amisal)l gatal)l;
metre uncertain; = Pj 11 397,26*: eds ghasam); Cp-a 90,28
(etth' eva te slsal)l chinditva mayhal)l sunakhanal)l -al)l
karissaml ti); - 0 '-aeehada, m., food and clothing;
M III 169,3o (kule paccajayati datidde ... yattha kasirena
-o labbhati) f. S 1 94,1 f. A 1 107,25 (Mp II 176,3/oll.:
yasmil)l ku1e dukkhena yagubhattaghaso ca koplna-
mattal)l acchadanal)l ca labbhati); - o• -aeehadana, n.,
food and clothing; Ja V 477,14 (-al)l sal)lvidahatha ti);
Mil351,13; Sp 53,2 (titthiya parih1na1abhasakkara
antamaso -al)l pi alabhanta); Spk I 260,19 (te cattaro pi
pal)ltehi - '-adihi upat!hahanta); Vv-a 23,2o;
(mere) food and clothing; DI 60,22 (sal)lvuto vihareyya
--paramataya santuqho); MI 360,9 (idha me ... yal)l
ah o si dhanal)l va dhaññal)l va ... sabbal)l tal)l puttanal)l
dayajjal)l niyyatal)l, tatthahal)l . . . --paramo viharami;
Ps III 39,1 foll.: ghasamattal)l e' e va acchadanamattal)l
ca paral)l katva viharami, tato paral)l n' atthi na ca
patthemi ti dipeti); Ps I 111,34 (pabbajitva --paramataya
o• -esana,f (and -esana, mfn.), (/.)a
0
santuqhe); -
search for food; the begging round; (mfn.) connected
with the search for food; S I 141 ,24• (-al)l iriyati
sitibhuto; Spk I 207,18: aharapariyesanal)l carati); Sn 711
(na muni gamam agamma kulesu sahasa care -al)l
chinnakatho na vacal)l payutal)l bha!)e; cfPj II
497,7 foll.: chinnakatho vi ya hutva obhasaparikatha-
nimittaviññattipayuttal)l ghasesanavacal)l na bhal)e );
Ja IV 223,4• (tattha -al)l care); Cp-a 24,21 (ekadivasal)l
dvikkhattul)l -a na sallekho ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -al)l na
sallekhan ti); - 0 -haraka, m(jn)., (one) who fetches or
carries fodder; Th 910 (daFddo -o; cfTh-a III 72,2o: -o
ti 0 -mattassa atthaya bhatil)l katva jivanako); -
0
-hetÜ, ind., for the sake of food, for food; Ja Ili 522,7•
(na -u pakaroma papal)l, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -u pi
Cp 1:10:11 (sadhu kho si anuppatto -u mam' antike;
Cp-a 106,9: -u ti aharahetu).
ghasana- in Ee at Vv-a 218,32 (ghasanaqhanal)l) is wrfor
ghasesana- (Be, Ce, Se so).
1
ghasitabba, mfn.,fpp ofghasati qv.
ghh.toti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghfl.loti, Wg § 30:7], shines;
Sadd 507,s (ghi!)U dittiyal)l: -oti).
ghil}l}ati,pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghi!)I)ate, Wg § 12:1], takes;
ghUI)I)ati gha!)I)ati).
ghutati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghutati, Wg § 28:91], strikes
against, opposes; Dhatum 112 (ghuta ghose patighate);
Sadd 353,27 (ghuta patighate: -ati ghotako).
2
ghuUha, mfn., pp of ghusati qv.
ghul}a, m. [ts], an insect found in timber; a woodworm;
Ja III 431,12 (pasadakai)I)ikaya ... eko o -pilf.lako vasati,
so tattha pheggul)l khaditva tasmil)l khil)e siiral)l
khaditul)l nasakkhi, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr gu!)apilf.lako );
431, 19* (khi!)abhakkho maharaja sare na ramati -o, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr gu!)o); - 0
-eUJ}J}a, n., powder
produced by wood-insects; ? Sp 849,32 (patiggahitake
teladimhi kal)ika ugheti singiveradimhi -al)l, Ce, Se so;
Be, Ee ghanacUI)I)al)l).
ghUJ}l}ati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghu!)I)ate, Wg § 12:2],
ghm;tl}ati
takes; grasps; Sadd 358,7 (ghü:li ghu!)i gha!)i gaha!)e:
ghi!)!)ati -ati ghal)!)ati).
2 -e, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sañghu!!he); As 406,23 (nakkhatte
ghm,n_1ati , pr. 3 sg. [S. ghill'l).ati; Wg §§ 12:5, 28:49], goes
or moves about; Sadd 358,9 (ghu!)a ghU!)!)a gamane:
gho!)ati -ati).
ghurati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ghurati; Wg § 28:55: ghura
bhlmarthasabdayoJ:!], cries frightfully, terr(fies (with
cries); Dhatup 487 (ghura bhlme); Dhatum 562;
Sadd 430,3 (ghura bhimatthasaddesu: -ati ghoro).
ghurughuru, ind. [onomat.; cf S. ghuraghura, ghuru-
ghura], a noise of snoring or snorting or wheez.ing;
Th-a IIl 56,39 (so parihlnajavo -il ti passasanto kacchehi
sedarp muñcanto padarp uddhariturp pi asakkonto, Ce
so; Ee -u ti; Be, Se 0 -passasl); - 0 -passasa, mfn.,
breathing with a snort, snoring; wheezing; Ja 1 160,28
(tesu niddarp upagatesu ekacce -a kiikacchamana dante
khadanta nipajjirpsu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se gharugharu-); -
0
-passasi(n), mfn., breathing with a snort, snoring;
wheezing and puffing; S 1 117,21 (ji!)!)O gopanasivail.ko
-!); Sv 42,27 (dante khadanta kiikacchamiina -ino
sayanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se gharugharu-); Pj li 189,19 (so
akkhihi niggatehi ... -1 dukkharp vediyati, Ce, E e so; Se
vedayati; Be gharugharupassasl dukkharp vedayati);
Th-a I 73,19 (nisinno -I niddayat' eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr -irp).
ghurughurayati, ghuraghurayati, pr. 3 sg. rJrom ghuru-
ghuru; cf S. ghuraghurayate; Pkt ghurughurarpti], utters
gurgling sounds; snorts, snores; Dhp-a I 307,4 (tassa ...
mukhato 1a1a gajati nasa -ati, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ghura-
ghurayati); - part.pr. ghurughurayanta, mfn., Ja III
538,2t (rukkhamüle nipajjitva -anto niddarp okkami, Be,
Ee so; Ce, Se ghuraghurayanto).
ghusati\ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ghurp~ate, Wg § 16:50],
beautifies; Sadd 449,4 (ghusl kantikaral)e: Ikaranto 'yarp
tena ito na niggahltagamo: -ati).
ghusati 2, ghosati, pr. 3 sg. [S. gho~ati], sounds; cries
aloud; proclaims; announces; Dhatup 622 (ghusa
sadde ); Dhatum 44 7; 863; Sadd 441 ,25 (ghusa sadde:
ghusati ghosati patighoso ... ); part.pr.
ghosanta, mfn., Sp 1097,18 (pa!iikarp parihareyyun ti
pa!iikarp ukkhipitva nagare ghosanta iihindeyyurp; 1-
Ps III 89,3: Be, Ce, Ee ghosenta; Se ugghosenta); -
pass. pr. 3 sg. ghussati, Sv 650,4 (masassa pana
anhadivasesu deva1oke mahadhammasavanarp ghussati,
Ce so; Be ghusati; Se ghosati; Ee wr sussati); As 324,34
(ghussatl ti ghoso, Be, Ce, E e so; Se ghusiyatl ti);- aor.
3 sg. aghosittha, aghosatha, Ja VI 156,33* (nandi ppavesi
nagararp bandhanamokkho aghosittha, so read with
L. Alsdoif, 1967, p. 292 (metre arya); Be, Ce, Ee
bandhana mokkho; Se bandhamokkho aghosatha) I-
VI 592,34* (bandhanamokkho aghosatha, Ce, Ee so
(s1oka); Be bandhana mokkho; Se bandhamokkho;
593,5·: sabbasattiinarp bandhana mokkho ghosito, Be, Ce
so; Ee bandhanamokkho; Se ugghosito);
pp (a) ghuttha, mfn. [S. ghu~!a], proclaimed;
announced; Ja I 50,4 (tada kira Kapi1avatthunagare
asajhinakkhattarp -arp ahosi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
sail.ghunharp); V 374,2o* (abhayarp ca taya -arp imayo
dasadha disa; 374,28': catilsu kal)!)esu !hatva
ghosapitarp); Ps IV 41,17 (yo pana dhammasavane -e
87 ghusati
sakkaccarp na gacchati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sañghu!the);
Dhp-a IIl 100,w (sattaharp suracha!)o bhavissatl ti chal)e
-e, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sañghughe);- ifc see dura-, Vt!)a-;
- (b) ghusita, mfn., sounding, making a sound; Ja VI
578,3* ([darake] ku!)ga1e -e ... raja ail.ke karitvana, eds
so; read ku!)ga1aghusite with L. Alsdoif, 1957, p. 57?
578,9·: ku!)ga1e ti ku!)galani pilandhapetva -e ti
ugghosite manoramarp ravarp ravante; cfT. Oberlies,
1995b, p. 134, referring to S. ghr~!a); - caus.
(a) pr. 3 sg. ghoseti, -ayati, cries aloud; proclaims,
announces; Pv 21:38 (k o chatt' icchati gandharp ca ... iti
ssu tattha -en ti kappaka sildamagadha); 41 :3 (te 'dha
-enty adissanta pubbe dukka!am attano; Pv-a 262,15:
adissamanarilpa -enti kandanti); Ja IV 362,6*
(kiñki!)ikayo gahetvana -enti purato pi te); VI 251,20*
(annahattha ca te vyamhe -ayantu pure tava; 252,2':
-entu); As 79,3 (sayam eva dhammasavanarp -eti
dhammakatharp katheti ... ); Mhv 14:34 (dhamma-
ssavanaka1arp tvarp -eh! ti apucchi so savento kittakarp
!hiinarp bhante -em' aharp) 1- Sp 78,13/oll.; Sadd 566,30
(ghusi visaddane, visaddanarp ugghosanarp: -eti -ayati);
568,11 (ghusa sadde: -eti -ayati); - part.pr.
ghosenta, mfi -enti)n., Ps III 89,3 (pa!iikarp ukkhipitva
nagare -enta iihi!)ganti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ugghosenta) =
Mp IV 98,16 1- Sp 1097,18 (eds ghosanta); Spk I 130,26
(manussapathe devata -entiyo vicaranti); - aor.
3 sg. (a) ghosesi, Ja li 112,4 (samuddadevata navaya
!hatva atthi Jambud!pagamika ti -esi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-eti); Sp 78,t8; (b) aghosayi, Mhv 14:35 (dhammaka1arp
aghosayi); 3 pi. (a) ghosesurp, Ja III 445,5; Ps V 102,15;
(b) ghosayirpsu, Ja 111 538,10 (mahantarp cha!)arp
-ayirpsu); VI 588,17 (mukhamail.ga1ika mañga1ani
-ayirpsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nigghosayirpsu);
(e) aghosayurp, Mhv 14:38; - absol. ghosetva, Ja IIl
52,18 (atthi nu kho imesarp samiko ti tikkhatturp -etva);
Sp 1131,2 (gal)girp paharitva ka1arp -etva); Ud-a 365,t2;
neg. aghosetva, Sp 382,6; - pp ghosita, mfn.,
l. proclaimed, announced; Th 932 (nara k.i1esavatthiisu
sasañgame va -e, Be, Ce so; Ee. Se sayarpgiihe); Ja JI
13,10 (Bariil)asiyarp ussave -e mahasamajjarp ahosi);
Sp 1229,9 (kiile -e sannipatite sail.ghe); Vv-a31,2s
(nakkhattarp -arp); Pv-a 107,s (diiraghughan ti diirato
eva gu!)akittanavasena -arp, sabbattha vissutarp paka!an
ti attho); - 2. sounding; filled with sound; Ap-a 547,26
(cakkavakakukku!aharpsadihi kiijita -a nadita sa
pokkhara!)l ti); - 3. summoned; ? (or to meaning 2. ?)
Bv 2:2 (Amararp nama nagararp ... dasahi saddehi
avivittarp ... khadatha pivatha e' eva annapanena -arp;
or n., a proclamation; ? e' eva < ti eva ? syntax unclear;
cf S. ghu~!iinna, "food given away by proclamation" ?
Bv-a 66,20: -arp abhinaditan ti attho); Spk 1 354,1
(tiyamarattirp asanighosena -a viya dhammarp kathenta
pi tu!)hibhiita samam caranti yeva nama);
fpp ghosetabba, mfn., Sv 969,3o (sabbasannipato
ghosetabbo ); - caus. (b) pr. 3 sg. ghosapeti, -aya ti,
has (something) announced; causes (something) to be
proclaimed; announces, proclaims; Cp 1:4:2 (tatthiiharp
divase tikkhatturp -emi tahirp tahirp ko kirp icchati
pattheti kassa kirp d!yatii dhanarp) Spk li 116,31
gheppati
(nagarassa e' eva va¡¡.!).a~ 1okassa ca pariharaHibh~
-etha ti);- aor. 3 sg. ghosapesi, Ja V 426,8· (raja yatha-
ruc~ pati~ ga!).hatü ti vatva say~var~ -esi);
Sp 576,1 (abhayaghosana~ ca -esi); 1 pl. ghosapayimha,
Sp 78,21; - absol. (a) ghosapetva, Ja I 71,3o; Sp 73,13
(raja nakkhatt~ -etva); 1123,10 (bhajetun ti ka1~
-etva pa!ipa!iya bhajetu~. Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ghosetva);
Cp-a 85,11 (asavayitva ti -etva, Ce so; Be, Se savayitva
ti; Ee ayacayitva ti); Mhv 17:42; (b) ghosapayitvana,
Mhv 32:31 (ka1a~ -ayitvana); - pp ghosápita, mfn.,
caused to be announced; proclaimed; Ja V 374,28'
(ghunhan ti ... -~); Mhv 14:37 (sotu~ sambuddha-
vacan~ kalo -o).
gheppati, pr. 3 sg. [see R. Pischel, 1957, §§ 107, 212 for
Pkt gheppai < *ghippati < *ghrryati], takes; Sadd 503,3
(-ati ga!).hati va ... ); 825,8 (gahadito yatharah~
akhyatatte namatte ca ppa-!).ha ... -ati ga!).hati); 830,19
(gahassa ghe ppe: -ati).
ghotaka, m. [ts], an inferior or bad horse; Abh 370 (-o tu
khalunko); Ja VI 452,1o· (maharaja taya amhaka~ raja
assakhalunkena sindhavo viya dugga!).ho, -~ iirulhena
ajanly~ aruyha gacchanto viya
javasampanna~
gahetu~ na sakkotl ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
kha1unk~); Ps II 6,22 (yatha ca va1ahako assaraja na
gadrabhaku1e va o -ku1e va uppajjati); Sadd 417 ,26* (-o tu
kha1unkassa valavo ti ca vuccati).
ghotati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup gho!ate, Wg § 18:6],
exchanges; Sadd 353,14 (ghu!a parivattane: -ati).
ghol}ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ghu!).ati, gho!).ate,
Wg §§ 12:4, 28:48], goes or moves about; Sadd 358,9
(ghu!).a ghU!).!).a gamane: -ati ghu!).!).ati).
ghoti\ see sv ghavati.
ghote, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup dyauti, Wg § 24:31],
approaches; goes against; Sadd 334,2o (ghu
abhigamane, abhigaman~ adhigaman~: -oti).
ghotehi in Ee at Ja I 454,24' (kasahi ghotehi) is wr; Be, Ce,
Se kasabhighatehi).
ghora, mfn. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.) awesome; terrifying;
terrible, frightful, dreadful; Abh 167 (bherav~ ... -~
pa!ibhay~); Vin II 147,33* (tato vatatapo -o sañjato
patihaññati); SI 96,9* (upeti niray~ -a~); Pv 24:15
(saha~ -a~ ca sapatha~ musavad~ abhasisa~;
Pv-a 159,10: -an ti daru!).~); Thl 291 (asaya palipa -a
nasakkhi~ param etase); Ja IV 183,12* (ka!).ho ca -o
ca ... sunakho; 183,15': -o ti passantana~ bhayajanako);
274,2* (vivanasmi~ -e); V 49,15* (viddho ca nago
koñcam anadi -~); VI 352,3* (mahajanasamagamamhi
-e); 507,11* (disva sampatite -e dumaggesu
plavangame); Ap 46,5 (buddho -o uggatapo jino;
Ap-a 289,24: -o aññehi ghagetu~ asakku!).eyyatta);
476,21 (bhi~sanake -e patito makarakare); Mi1117,26
(-a bubbula utthahanti); - 2. (n.) a magic formula or
charm; Ja IV 496,1o* (vijjadhara -am adhlyamana
adassan~ osadhehi vajanti; 498,33' foll.: -~ nama
vijj~ adhlyanta osadhehl ti -a~ va gandhari~ va
vijj~ savetva osadhi~ adaya te paccatthikana~
adassan~ vajanti);- -tara, mfn., morefrightful, more
0 Ps V 37,23 (-o pi so tava maharaja tattha n' atthi,
dreadful, more terrifying; Cp 3:3:6 (muccitva matu
kucchito tato -e dukkhe puna pakkhitt' ayoghare);
Pv-a 251,6 (-o saddo süyati);- -rüpa, mfn., terrible in
0
88 ghosa
appearance; absolutely dreadful, quite terrifying;
Vv 52:25 (paccam' ah~ niraye -e); Ap 186,2o
(rakkhaso asi~ -o mahabba1o); 516,1 (-a~ sudaru!).~
niray~ nüna gacchami); - -~, adv., quite
terrifyingly; Ja V 49,16* (sabbe va naga ninnadu~ -~);
- sughorarüpa, mfn., very terrible in appearance; quite
absolutely dreadful and terrifying; Ja V 197,29*
(asadayi~ acch~ sughorarüp~); VI 115,25* (uccavaca
'me vividha upakkama nirayesu dissanti sughorarüpa);
-
0
-visa, mfn. and m. l. (mfn.) having terrible poison,
fiercely poisonous; Vin I 24,22 (ca¡¡.<;!' ettha nagaraja
iddhima asiviso -o; Sp 220,14: ghor~ ca¡¡.<;!~ assa
visan ti -o); MI 236,8 (siya ... aslvis~ -~ asajja
purisassa sotthibhavo); A III 260,32 (pañc' ime
bhikkhave adinava ka¡¡.hasappe ... kodhano upanahl -o
dujjivho mittadubhl); 261,5 (tatr' id~ ... matugamassa
--ta, yebhuyyena ... matugamo tibbarago); Ja I 371,12*
(passa -o nago sllava ti na haññati); V 18,4* (y~
manussa vivajjenti sappa~ -am iva); Cp 2:10:1
(dathavudho -o dvijivho uragadhibhü); - 2. (m.) a
poisonous snake; Cp-a 201,14 (yakkha~ viya rakkhas~
0
viya -~ viya asivis~ viya ... ); - -ssara, m(jn).
5
[ghora + sara ], (one) who makes a dreadful or terrifying
sound, an ass; Mi1363,3 (-assa añga~ gahetabba~, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be gadrabhassa); 365,21 (-assa eka~ añga~
gahetabb~ ... yatha maharaja gadrabho nama ... , Ce,
Ee so; Se -assa gadrabhassa; Be gadrabhassa); -
atighora, mfn., extremely awesome; very terrible; Pj II
387,3 (-~ tapa~ karoti kadaci mama visaya~
atikkameyya ti); Bv-a 289,15 (maraparisa pi mahasattassa
-~pila~ akasi);- sughora, mfn., very frightful, very
terrible; Bv-a 211,24* (dukkha~ -a~ narake 'nubhoti).
ghorati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup khorati, Wg § 15:44],
limps, is lame; Sadd 423,7 (ghora gatipatighate, gati-
patighata~ gatipatihanan~: -ati);- see also kho1ati.
ghosa 1, m. [S. gho~a], l. w hat one hears, any cry o r
sound; rumour, report; an announcement, a
proclamation; Abh 128; 1081 (rave -o); Vin II 155,24
(-o pi kho eso ... dullabho 1okasmi~ yad id~ buddho
buddho ti); D II 211,26 (na e' assa bahiddha parisaya -o
niccharati); MI 294,2 (dve kho avuso paccaya samma-
di!!hiya uppadaya parato ca -o yoniso ca manasikaro);
II 84,1o (-o yeva kho eso maharaja lokasmi~ brahma¡¡.a
va settho VaJ!.!).O hlno añño Va!).!).O); A II 71,16* foll. (ye ca
rüpena piimi~su ye ca -ena anvagü . . . samantavara¡¡.o
balo sa ve -ena vuyhatl) -:/= Th 469 foll. (Th-a II 198,26:
so paraneyyabuddhiko balo -ena pares~ vacanena
vuyhati nlyati); Sn 696 (buddho ti -~ yada parato
su!).asi); Pv 28:4 (dundubhln~ va -o); Ja VI 489,14*
(samaku1a~ pur~ asi -o ca vipulo maha); Ap 245,9
(-a~ assos' aha~ tattha na ca passami t~ jin~, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se saddam; Ap-a 474,22: buddho uppanno ti-~
assosi~); Dhs 637 (gira vyappatho udlra!).a~ -o
-kamm~ ... ay~ vuccati vaca); Pet 1,11 (katamo
0
parato -o ya parato desana ovado anusasanl saccakatha
saccanulomo ); Nett 8,10 (parato -a sutamayl pañña);
dassan~ pana kuto ti); Mhv 14:39 (tena -ena devan~
sannipato maha ahu); - ifc see abhaya- (sv bhaya),
1
gu!).a-, sunandi- (sv nandi ); - 2. (gr.t.t.) voicing (of
ghosa
consonants);- see below;- 0 -ppamiiJ}a, n. and mfn.,
l. (n.) the authority of report or reputation; report as
criterion; Mp III 102,9 (-arp gahetva pasanna ti); -
2. (mfn.) who takes report as authority, who judges by
report or reputation; A 11 71,12 (-o ghosappasanno);
Pp 53,3o (idh' ekacco pugga1o paravai).J).anaya para-
thomanaya parapasarpsanaya paraval).l).aharikaya tattha
pamal).arp gahetva pasadarp janeti ayarp vuccati pugga1o
-o ghosappasanno); It-aii 10,14; Ap-a412,31 (--tta);-
0
-ppamiil}ika, mfn., who takes reportas authority, who
judges by report or reputation; Dhp-a III 114,1 (-a pi
anekani jatisatani nissaya pavattarp satthu gul).aghosarp
e' eva aghaiJ.gasamannagatarp dhammadesanaghosarp ca
sutva pasidanti); Pj II 242,22;- 0 -va(t), mfn., l. making
a noise; soundíng; Ja III 189,14* (vati gandho timiranarp
kusamuddo va 0 -va; 189,18·: 0 -va ti maharavo); Nidd-a I
438,27 (ninnadi ca ti -vanto ca); - 2. (gr.t.t.) (of con-
0
sonants) voiced, sonant; Sadd 608,6 (tatiyacatuttha-
pañcama yara1avah~a -vanto); 608,9 (saddasattha-
0
vidhuno niggahitasaiJ.khatassa anusvarassapi 0 -vantattarp
icchanti, sasanika pana tassa ghosaghosavinimuttattam
yeva icchanti);- aghosa, mfn., (gr.t.t.) (of consonants)
unvoiced, surd; Sadd 608,4 (pa~hamadutiyani so ca -a:
ka kha ca cha ~a ~ha ta tha pa pha sa);
nigghosa\ mfn., free from noise; quiet; Sn 959 (-e
ca 1, m. [ts], the sound 'e'; the consonant 'e'; Sadd 604,19
(ca cha ja jha ña); 605,31; 827,19 (vyañjanantassa
dhatussa co hoti chapaccaye pare: jigucchati); -
0
-kara\ m., the letter or sound 'e'; Sp 1400,zsfoll. (-o
jakararp apajjati jakaro -arp apajjati); Ap-a 376,14
(arohaparil).aharüpavayanarp sundarataya sakarassa -arp
katva Cundo ti namarp karirpsu); Sadd 635,9 foll.
(pakarassa ca --ttarp); 854,25; - cakararp in Ee at Pj II
205,26 is wr for cakararp (Be, Ce, Se so);- 0 -vagga, m.,
the palatal consonants; Sadd 608,29 (ival).l).acavagga-
yakara ta1uja); 826,14 (abbhase vattamano kavaggo
--ttarp apajjati).
ca 2 , índ. [ts], l. an enclitic conjunctive particle
(connecting parts of sentences or whole sentences; when
connectíng two words, follows both or only the second;
when connectíng more than two words, follows each
word, or some, or only the final word; the .first ca is
often strengthened with eva); (i) and, both, also;
moreover, as well as; Abh 1187 (samuccaye samahare
'nvacaye cetañtare . .. ca casaddo ); M 1 92,37 foll.
(carato ca me tighato ca suttassa ca jagarassa ca);
93,wfoll. (tarp ca pan' amhakarp ruccati e' eva khamati
ca tena e' amha attamana ti); SI 189,32 (ayasma
Sariputto bhikkhü dhammiya kathaya sandasseti ... te ca
bhikkhü . . . dhammarp SUJ).anti); III 65,12 (evarp kho
bhikkhave bhikkhu sattaghanakusalo hoti. katharp ca
89 ca
sayanasane; Nidd I 467,17: appasadde appanigghose).
ghosa 2, m. [S. gho~a], a settlement of herdsmen; Abh 226
(-o gopalagamako ); 1081 (gopagame ... -o).
ghosaka, m(jn). [S. gho~aka], (one) who declares,
proclaíms; - ífc see dhamma- (sv dhamma\ -
-ghosaka in Ee at Dhp-a III 114,2foll. (gul).aghosakarp
e' eva... dhammadesanaghosakarp) is prob. wr for
-ghosarp (Be, Ce, Se so).
ghosati, se e sv ghusati 2.
ghosana\ n., -a,f [S. gho~al).a, gho~al).a]. stating aloud; a
proclamatíon, announcement; a loud sound; Abh 117
(-a t' uccasaddanarp); Ja V 450,28* (sakena hatthena
haneyya -arp, Ce so; Se ghosarp; Ee sakena talena; Be
hatthena kareyya ghosarp; 451 ,21': ekena attano hatthena
tam eva hattharp hanitva ghosarp uppadeyya); Sp 832,1
(so kira sattame divase bhavissati ti nagare -a kayirati);
Ps II 194,29 (ito ettakehi divasehi nagararp padakkhil).arp
karissati ti puretaram eva -a kayirati); Spk II 118,2o
(jatikantaradinittharal).iinisarpsassa ca -arp); Ap-a 54 7,15
( -arp karonto alu)iyati ti samuddo ); - ifc see abhaya-
(sv bhaya).
ghosana 2 , mfn. [cf S. gho~al).a], soundíng; noisy; ?
Sadd 846,10 (ghosanasi!o ghosanadhammo ghosane
sadhukari ti -o).
ghoseti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of ghusati 2 qv.
bhikkhave bhikkhu tividhüpaparikkhi hoti); Dhp 256
(yo ca attharp anattharp ca ubho niccheyya pan"ito); 261
(yamhi saccarp ca dhammo ca ahirpsa sarpyamo damo );
Ud 3,27 (ayasma ca Sariputto ayasma ca Maha-
moggallano ... ; Ud-a 57,18: casaddo samuccayattho );
It 41,6 (jagaro e' assa bhikkhave bhikkhu vihareyya sato
sampajano samahito pamudito vippasanno ca; It-a I
172,26: casaddo sampil)."anattho, tena vakkhamane
satadibhave sampil)."eti); Th 295 (yarp e' amhi putto
buddhassa yarp ca dhammesu cakkhuma; Th-a II 125,18:
yan ti yasma, casaddo samuccayattho); 600 (yarp ca
aññe na rakkhanti yo ca aññe na rakkhati); J a 1 151,23
(tuyharp ca tassa ca abhayarp dammi ti); 167,1 (tvarp
mahasaddena hasi e' eva rodi ca); III 82,24* (subhaddako
e' eva supesalo ca); 127,5 (macchamarpsena e' eva
phalapha1ena ca pa~ijaggirpsu); 190,6* foll. (sa marp
annena panena vatthena sayanena ca attana pi ca ... );
V 184,22* foil. (koso ca tuyharp vipu1o koghagararp ca
tuyharp paripürarp pa~avi ca tuyharp vijita); Mi118,21
(dibbani candanacUI).J).ani e' eva dibbani ca
mandaravapupphani abhippavassirpsu); Vism 59,8foll.
(silarp e' eva suparisuddharp bhavissati vatani ca
sampajjissanti); Mhv 6:21 (attito puttasokena na ca
khadi na capivi); 25:97 (iti vatva maharaja kataññü idam
aha ca); Sadd 887,1Rjoll. (ca iti anvacaye itaretarayoge
samahare vyatireke . . . ca pavattati . . . anvacaye
cakati
bhikkharp. ca dehi gavarp. canehi ti . . . itaretarayoge
sama1_1o ca tighati brahma1_1o ca tighati . . . samahare
sltarp. ca u1_1harp. ca situ1_1harp. ... ); 903,21 foil. (ca va ice
ete padavasane ca dvinnarp. sarnanadhikara1_1apadanarp.
majjhe ca nipatanti na padadimhi, tarp. yatha sama1_1o ca
brahma1_1o ca . . . eso ca sama1_1o sadhurtipo eso ca
brahma1_10 sadhurtipo); - (ii) (according to cts)
including unexpressed objects similar to that or those
expressed: etc; and so on; Sn 118 (gamani nigamani ca;
Pj II 178,3o: ettha casaddena nagarani ti pi vattabbarp.);
Th 647 (mettarp. ca abhijanami apparna1_1arp. subhavitarp.;
Th-a 11 273,25: casaddena karu1_1arp. muditarp. upekkharp.
ca ti itarabrahmavihare sanga1_1hati); 770 (passa
cittakatarp. rtiparp. ma1_1ina ku1_1galena ca; Th-a III 35,24:
casaddena sesabhara1_1alailkare sail.ga1_1hati); Bv 10:5
(papu1_1I kevalarp. bodhirp. buddhaña1_1e ca cuddasa;
Bv-a l85,JOfoll.: casaddo sampi1_1ganattho, tena aparani
[ña1_1ani] ... sakale ca buddhagu1_1e papu1_1I ti attho);
Cp 1:4:4 (iti sayarp. ca pato ca ghosapemi; Cp-a 42,19:
ettha casaddena majjhantike ca ti aharitva vattabbarp.);
- (iii) expressing immediate connection between two
actions or their simultaneous occurrence; Thi 479 (sa
e' evarp. bha1_1ati pitararp. Anikaratto ca . . . upayasi ...
vareyyarp.); 481 (sa ca tahirp. samapanna Anikaratto ca
agato nagararp.); 482 (sa ca manasikaroti Anikaratto ca
aruhi turitarp.); - (iv) in grammatical texts, connecting
the statement with words in previous statements;
Sadd 330,!7 (kakha hasane: kakhati. jakkha bhakkhane
ca, hasananukaqqhanattharp . cakaro: jakkhati); 566,22
(darp.sa darp.sane: darp.seti ... dasi dassane ca, cakaro
darp.sanarp. apekkhati); - 2. a disjunctive particle: but,
on the other hand; yet; A I 58,Is (yasma ca kho
bhikkhave sakka akusalarp. pajahiturp.); It 3,30 (sabbarp.
bhikkhave anabhijanarp. . . . sabbarp. ca kho bhikkhave
abhijanarp.; It-a I 54,12: casaddo vyatireke); Sn 1003
(sace agaram ajjhavasati ... sace ca so pabbajati agara
anagariyarp.); Th 106 (ekai!gadassi dummedho satadassi
ca pa1_1gito; Th-a I 227,Isfoll.: pa1_1qito pana ... sabbaso
passati); 130 (yo ca kho annapanassa labhi hoti 'dha
puggalo; Th-a II 10,2ofoll.: casaddo vyatireke ... ayarp.
h' ettha attho, yo pana puggalo ... ); 276 (pare ca na
vijananti . . . vijananti ca y e dhammarp. ... ; Th-a II
115,12: ye pana satthu sasanadhammarp. yathabhiltarp.
jananti); Thi 128 (yassa maggarp. na janasi ... maggarp.
ca kho 'ssa janasi); 144 (nakkhattani namassanta ...
bala ... aharp. ca kho narnassanti sambuddharp. ... ); Ja II
110,19* (cirarp. pi kho tarp. khadeyya gadrabho haritarp.
yavarp. paruto sihacammena, ravamano ca dilsayi;
11 0,22·: attana pana gadrabharavarp. ravarnano ... );
160,!!* (mahati vata te bondi na ca pañña tadilpika);
111 128,3* (adassanena morassa . . . kakam ...
apiljesurp. . . . yada ca sarasampanno moro Baverum
agarna ... ); Sadd 887,Isfoll. (ca iti ... vyatireke ...
vyatireke yo ca buddharp. ca dhammarp. ca ti gathayarp.
yo ca ti ettha casaddo vyatirekatthavacako so ca casaddo
pub be vuttatthapekkhako . . . ettha yo ca ti yo pana ti
attho);- 3. in the protasis of conditional sentences: if;
also frequently in a second conditional clause; (note
also ca = but, in a following sentence rejecting the
condition); DI 186,3 (oJariko ca hite ... atta abhavissa
90 cakoraka
rup1 . . . añña va sañña abhavissa anno atta); II 36,9
(aharp. e' eva kho pana dhammarp. deseyyarp. pare ca me
na ajaneyyurp., so mam' assa kilarnatho); A I 58,2Ifoll.
(akusalarp. ca h' idarp. bhikkhave pahinarp. ... dukkhaya
sarp.vatteyya, naharp. evarp. vadeyyarp. akusalarp.
bhikkhave pajahatha ti, yasma ca kho bhikkhave
akusalarp. pahinarp. . . . sukhaya sarp.vattati ... );
V 87,22foll. (ime ca... dasa dhamma loke na
sarp.vijjeyyurp. . . . y asma ca kho . . . ime das a dhamma
loke sarp.vijjanti); Th 468 (buddho ca me vararp. dajja so
ca labbhetha me varo; Th-a Il 197,27 foil.: sace buddho
bhagava ... mayharp. ... vararp. dadeyya) f. Ja V 216,!*;
Ja V 185,22* (idarp. ca tuyharp. rucitarp.); VI 208,I*foll.
(etarp. ca saccarp. vacanarp. bhaveyya ... y asma ca etarp.
vacanarp. abhiltarp.); - 4. an emphatic particle,
emphasising the preceding word; an expletive particle;
Abh 1187 (padapilra1_1amatte ca casaddo avadhara1_1e);
DI 207,6foll. (atha ca pana bhavarp. Ánando evam aha
atthi e' ev' ettha uttarirp. kara1_1Iyan ti); MI 91,9 (evarp.
caharp. bhante bhagavata dhammarp. desitarp. ajanami);
Th 675 (rajam ilhatarp. ca vatena yatha meghopasamaye;
Th-a Ili 4,12: ca iti nipatamattarp.); Ja III 188,!3 (so ...
Bharukaccharp. papu1_1i. tada ca Bharukacchavi.il_lija
navaya Suva1_11_1abhilmirp. gacchanti); Sp 879,I9foll. (sace
ca mayarp. janeyyama ti sace mayarp. janeyyama, cakaro
pana nipatamattam eva); Mhv 25:109 (sagga-
maggantarayo ca natthi te tena kammuna);
Sadd 887,Isfoll. (ca iti ... avadhara1_1adisu ca pavattati);
- na ca, and not, rather than; Ja I 153,2 (aharp. rajjarp.
jaheyyarp. na ca tarp. patiññarp.); - 5. ca following an
3
interrogative pronoun, makes it indefinite; - see sv ka ;
- 6. cafollowing a relative pronoun probably makes it
indefinite, while itself retaining a conjunctive sense; S II
65,Is.foll. (yarp. ca kho bhikkhave ceteti yarp. ca
pakappeti yarp. ca anuseti aramma1_1arp. etarp. hoti
viñña1_1assa !}litiya ... y ato ca kho bhikkhave no e' eva
ceteti no ca pakappeti no ca anuseti ... ); Dhp 256 (yo ca
attharp. anattharp. ca ubho niccheyya pa1_1<;lito); Ja VI
211 ,2* (bhovadi bhovadina marayeyyurp. y e capi tesarp.
abhisaddaheyyurp.); - 0
-klira 2 , m., the word 'ca';
Sp879,2o (-o pana nipatamattam eva); PsiV 137,16 (te
ca ti -o agarnasandhimattarp.); As 297,21 (-o
sampi1_1ganattho ); Ap-a 194,9 (actito vuttarp. -arp. parato
netva); Sadd 566,22; - cakaram in Ee at Pj II 205,26 is
wr for cakaram (Be, Ce, Se so).
cakati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cakati, cakate, Wg §§ 4:19;
19:21], is satisfied; resists; Sadd 322,23 (caka
tittipatighatesu: ... -ati):- see also cakita.
1
caklira\ see sv ca .
caklira , see sv ci.
2
cakita, mfn. [ts], trembling; frightened; alarmed; - ifc
see patibhaya-, bhaya-;- see also cakati.
cakora, cailkora, m. [S. cakora], the Greek partridge
(Perdix rufa); Abh 625 (vattako jivañjivo cakoratittira);
Vv 35:8 (in cpd: koñcamayuracakorasai!g hacaritarp.);
Ja VI 538,7* (cailkora kukkuta naga aññamaññarp.
paküjino).
2
cakoraka, m. [cakora + ka ], the Greek partridge (Perdix
rufa); Ps III 322,12 (pubbe kira so etasmirp. dipe
vasamano 0 -sakul_lapotake khadi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
cakori
vasamano samacchandena saku~apotake ).
cakori, f [ts], a female Greek partridge; Th!-a 237,25
(akkhlni ca turiya-r-iva ti . . . -iya-r-iva ti va pa!i,
cakorakukku!iya ti vutta~p. hoti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
koriya-r-iva ti va ... kuñcakarakukku!iya ti vuttaJTI hoti).
cakka, n. [S., BHS cakra], l. a wheel (i) of a cart or
carriage; Abh 373 (-aJTI rathaiJ.gam akhyataJTI); 781;
Vin 1 231,37 (Ambapall . . . Licchavlna~p. !saya lsam
yugena yugaJTI -ena -am akkhena akkhaJTI pa!ivattesi);
D II 343,14 (kaddamamakkhitehi -ehi gadrabharathena);
A 1 111,11 (rathakaro chahi masehi charattiinehi ekaJTI
-aJTI ni!thapesi); Dhp 1 (tato naJTI dukkham anveti -am
va vahato padaJTI); Ja 1 429,2R* (sayam vipakkhika seti
hata -ena sa!ika; 430,4·: yanacakkena hata); V 445,16*
(-assa nemi vi ya parivattati); Mil 27,4 (-ani ratho ti, na
hi bhante ti); Sp 59,2 (ekena -ena slmaJTI akkamitva
ratho tighatu); 850,26 (yanaJTI kaddame laggati, daharo
-aJTI gahetva ukkhipati); Mhv21:17 (vacchakaJTI ...
glvaJTI akkamma -ena asañcicca aghatayi); 21:18 (ten'
eva -ena slsaJTI puttassa chedayi); - the pattem of a
wheel on the soles of the foot (one of the marks of a
mahapurisa, see meaning 4 below); Abh 781
(lakkh~e ... -aJTI); D III 143,1o (mahapurisassa hettha
padatalesu -ani jatani honti sahassarani sanemikani
sanabhikani) = MIl 136,9; Ap 20,1s (sahassarani -ani
dissanti car~uttame); Ps III 375,4foll.; Sadd 521,13;-
(ii) a potter' s wheel; the wheel (ie grinding stone ?) of a
mili; Abh 782 (-aJTI ... kulalabh~<;ie); Ja IV 4,5 (ida~p.
maJTI -aJTI s~hakara~iyaJTI viya tilani pimsamanaJTI
otarati); V 291,2 (ekaJTI mattikapi~<;iaJTI -e !hapetva -am
avijjhi); Bv 2:167 (telayante yatha -aJTI evaJTI kampati
medinl; Bv-a 114,31: yatha -an ti cakkikanaJTI
mahacakkayanta~p. viya); As 115,22 (kumbhakarassa
d~<;lappaharena -aJTI bhamayitva bhajanaJTI karontassa);
- ifc see kula!a- sv kulala 1; - 2. a circular missile, a
discus; Abh 394; 782 (-aJTI . . . ayudhe ); D 1 52,27
(khurapariyantena ce pi -ena yo imissa pa!haviya pa~e
ekamaJT!sakhalaJTI ekamaJT!sapuñjaJTI kareyya) = MI
404,27 =S III 208,26; Ja IV 82,17 (Vasudevo -aJTI khipi,
ta~p. dvinnaJTI pi bhatikanaJTI slsani patesi); Pv-a 111,22
(Vasudevadayo bhataro . . . sabbe rajano -en a j1vita-
kkhayaJTI papetva); Sadd 521,24 (khurapariyantena ce pi
-ena ti ettha pahara~acakke);- ifc see asani- (sv asan!);
- 3. a wheel or discus as an instrument of torture;
Abh 781; Ja III 206,22* (yaJTI me sirasmim ohacca -aJTI
bhamati matthake); 207,25 (MittavindikaJTI pana
kathentam eva nipiJT!samanaJTI taJTI -aJTI bhassi, tena so
puna kathetUJTI nasakkhi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be khura-
cakkaJTI); IV 4,24* (icchahatassa posassa -aJTI bhamati
matthake; 5,22': tassa te icchahatassa posassa idaJTI -aJTI
matthakaJTI nipiJT!samanaJTI idani kumbhakaracakkaJTI
viya matthake bhamatl ti attho); - ifc see ura-
(sv ura[s]), khura- (sv khura\ - 4. the "wheel" of
sovereignty, of authority; sway; ( extracted from
cakkavatti(n) qv below ?); Abh 782 ( -aJTI . . . a~ayam);
D III 149,11* (sace na pabbajjam upeti tadiso vatteti -a~p.
pa!haviJTI pasasati); A 1 110,3 foil. (raja cakkavattl ...
dhammen' eva -aJTI pavatteti, taJTI hoti -aJTI
appa!ivattiya~p. kenaci manussabhiitena paccatthikena
pa~ina; Mp II 179,27 foil.: taJTI tena evaJTI pavattita~p.
91 cakka
~acakkaJTI appa!ivattiyaJTI hoti); III 148,24 (rañño
cakkavattissa jeqho putto pitara pavattitaJTI -aip.
dhammen' eva anupavatteti); Sn 554 (raja 'ham asmi
Sela ti bhagava dhammaraja anuttaro, dhammena -aJTI
vattemi -aip. appativattiya~p.); 684 (aggapuggalo ...
vattessati -aip. Isivhaye vane); Ja III 412,7* (dada bhuñja
ca ma ca pamado -aJTI vattaya Kosaladhipa;
cf 412,13 'foil.: kusalajjhasaya maharaja patirupadesa-
vasadikaJTI catubbidhaJTI dhammacakkaJTI pavattehi;
cf also Ps II 27,21 foil.: cakkasaddo ... dada bhuñja ca
maca pamado -aJTI vattaya sabbap~inan ti ettha dane);
Bv 2:211 (vatti -aJTI mahavlro, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
cakkum; Se vattacakko ); ifc se e dhamma-
(sv dhamma 1); - se e al so cakkaratana below; - 5. an
attainment, success, accomplishment (as a means, as
wheels are a means to progress ?; cfSn 260); Abh 781
(-aJTI sampattiyaJTI); D III 276,6 (cattari -ani, pa!iriipa-
desavaso sappurisüpassayo attasammap~idhi pubbe ca
katapuññata ime cattaro dhamma bahukara); A Il
32,2foll. (cattar' imani ... -ani yehi samannagatanaJTI
devamanussanaJTI catucakka~p. pavattati, yehi
samannagata devamanussa na cirass' eva mahantataJTI
vepullataJTI papu~anti bhogesu . . . pa!iriipadesavaso ...
pubbe ca katapuññata; Mp III 63,16: -anl ti sampattiyo);
Ja III 412,13'foll. (pa!iriipadesavasadikaJTI catubbidha~p.
dhammacakkaJTI pavattehi, pakatiratho hi dv!hi -ehi
gacchati ayaJTI pana kayo imehi catuhi -ehi devalokaJTI
gacchati tena te dhammacakkan ti saiJ.khyaJTI gata);
As 58,2s (pa!iriipadesavaso ... pub be ca katapuññata ti
cattari -ani vuttani, tani va ekajjhaJTI katva okasaqhena
kha~o ti veditabbani, tani hi kusaluppattiya
okasabhiitani); - ifc see catu- sv catu(r), dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ - 6. a circle; Abh 781 (-a~p. ...
ma~<;lale); Mil5l,IOfol/. (thero pa!haviya -aJTI alikhitva
MilindaJTI rajanaJTI etad avoca, atthi maharaja imassa
-assa anto ti, natthi bhante ti); - ifc see alata-, joti-; -
7. a circle of possible cases, a series of permutations;
Vin I 330,16 (yatha heqha tatha -a~p. katabbaJTI);
III 170,25 (ekekaJTI miila~p. katiina -aJTI bandhitabbaJTI);
Sp 1148,11 (adhammena vagga~p. adhammena samaggaJTI
dhammena vagga~p. dhammapa!iriipakena vaggaJTI
dhammapa!iriipakena samaggan ti imesaJTI vasena -aJTI
bandhitva); - 8. a posture; Abh 781 (iriyapathe -a~p.);
Spk I 53,3 (catucakkan ti catu-iriyapatha~p., iriyapatho hi
idha -an ti adhippeto); Sadd 521,13; - ifc see catu-
(sv catu[r]);- 9. a force, a troop of soldiers; Abh 381
(camii -aip. balaJTI); 781 (-a~p. ... bale); - 10. giving,
generosity; Abh 782 (-a~p. . . . danarasisu); Ps II 27,30
(cakkasaddo ... dada bhuñja ca ma ca pamado -aip.
vattaya sabbapa~inan ti ettha dane; cf Ja III 412,6* foil.
above) -1- Sadd 52l,13foll.; - 11. a multitude; Abh 782
(-aJTI ... danarasisu); - 12. a branch of knowledge or
skill (probably in augury);- ifc see antara-, miga-, sa-
(sv sa6); - o• -ailkita, mfn., marked with a wheel; Ja I
231,1o (sa -esu satthu padesu nipatitva); Ap 467,2 (jalina
-ena mudukomalapa~ina, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
saiJ.khalaiJ.kena); 532,24 (-e padatale); - 0 aticakka, n.
(and m.?), wheel(s) on wheel(s);? cart(s) on cart(s);?
Ja II 253,14 (rajaiJ.g~e -e mañcatimañce bandhiJT!su);
331,22 (kumarassa yasaJTI passissama ti sakalanagaraJTI
cakka
sailkhubhi, pasadantare -ani mañcatimañcani bandhanti,
Be, Ce, E e so; Se -al!l); IV 81,25 (-al!l mañcatimañcam
bandhil!lSU); - 0 aDUVattaka, mjn. and m., (one) who
turns the wheel afterwards, who keeps the wheel rolling;
Th 1014 (-o thero; Th-a III 105,s: -o ti satthara
vattitassa dhammacakkassa anuvattako); Bv 6:8 (yo so
paññaya asamo tassa -o); - 0 -cchinna, mfn., churned
up by the wheels; dried up, lessened, because of the
wheels; D II 128,27 (idani ... pañcamattani saka~asatani
atikkantani, tal!l -al!l udakal!l parittal!l 1uJital!l avi1al!l
sandati) = Ud 83,11; - 0 -dhiiri(n), mfn., bearing the
wheel (of torture); Ja III 207,18* (ye ca tal!l anugijjhanti
te honti -ino; 207,23·: khuracakkal!l dharenti ti); IV 4,28*;
-
0
-pa1,.1l, m(fn)., (the one) who has a discus in his
hand, the god Vi~1,.1u; Abh 16 (vasudevo hari ka1,.1ho
kesavo -i); Samantak 724; - 0
-bhañjani, (m)f(n).,
destroying attainments or good fortune; ? (or breaking
the wheel of authority; ?) Ja V 113,2* (usuyyake du-
hadaye purise kammadussake kalaka1,.11,.1I maharaja ramati
-I; 114,27·: eval!l sa kalaka1,.11,.1I maharaja ramati patirüpa-
desavasadino kusa1acakkassa bhañjani); - 0 -bheda, m.,
breaking the wheel of authority, destroying the unity or
sway of the religion; V in II 196,32 (mayal!l avuso
sama1,.1assa Gotamassa sailghabhedal!l karissama -an ti)
111 171 ,s; 111 172,2o (kath~ nama Devadatto
bhagavato sailghabhedaya parakkamissati -aya ti;
Sp 607,15: -aya ti iil,.1abhedaya); - 0
-yanta, n., an
instrument with a wheel, a mili; a turning machine;
Vism 674,2sfoll. (eko . . . issaso . . . -e atthasi, añño
puriso -al!l avijjhitva ... ); PsI 65,9 (-e niyuttabalivaddo
vi ya... ava~~aparivattal!l karoti); Spk III 50,n
(yojanikal!l madhubha~J<;ial!l -ena pijetva madhupanal!l
payamano viya); - 0
-yuga, n., a pair of wheels; A I
111,7 (sakkhasi me samma rathakara naval!l -al!l katun
ti); Vv 83:2 (uppanno rathapañjaro mama tassa -~ na
vindami) = Ja IV 60,17*; - 0
-ratana, n. [cakka +
ratana 1], l. "the wheel-treasure" (one of the seven
ratanas of a cakkavatti(n) emperor, symbol of his
sovereignty and sway, which appears in the sky and
moves over the emperor's territory; it also apparently
has the power to transport the emperor to other worlds);
D II 172,16 (dibbal!l -al!l . . . sahassar~ sanemikal!l
sanabhikal!l sabbakaraparipur~); 172,19foll. (raja
Mahasudassano ... vamena hatthena bhiilkaral!l gahetva
dakkhi1,.1ena hatthena -~ abbhukkiri pavattatu bhav~
-al!l abhivijinatu bhav~ -an ti); 173,1 (yasmil!l kho ...
padese -am patitthasi tattha raja Mahasudassano vasal!l
upagacchi saddhil!l caturailginiya senaya); III 59,4; 59,3o
(yassa rañño cakkavattissa dibb~ -~ osakkati ~hana
cavati na dani tena rañña ciral!l jivitabb~ hoti ti); Ja I
63,19 (Maro ... marisa ma nikkhami, ito te sattame
divase -al!l patubhavissati dvisahassaparittadipa-
parivaranal!l catunnal!l mahadipanal!l rajjal!l karessasi,
nivatta marisa ti ah a); II 311,24 foil. (so -al!l
abbhukkiritva saddhil!l parisaya catumaharajikadeva-
lok~ agamasi . . . pari1,.1ayakaratanam -al!l actaya
saddhil!l parisaya manussapathal!l otaritva attano
nagaram eva pavisi); Mil107,21 foil. (yatha maharaja
cakkavattiraja yada -al!l sarati upetu me -an ti sarite
-~ upeti); PsI 225,33foll.; IV 215,2foll.
92 ca k ka
(puññakammapaccay~ utusamutthan~ nilama1,.1i-
sañghatasadisal!l pacinasamuddaja1atalal!l chindamanal!l
viya akasal!l alailkuruman~ viya dibbal!l -~
patubhavati); 218,1 (n' ev' esa pUJJJJacando na suriyo na
devavimanal!l, na h' etes~ evarüpa sirisampatti atthi,
-ena pan' etena bhavitabban ti); 219,5 foll.;
Vibh-a 436,34 (dvidha -assa antaradhanal!l hoti cakka-
vattino kalakiriyaya va pabbajjaya va); - 2. the pattern
of the wheel on the soles of the feet; Bv 2:218 (sa ca
iddhi so ca yaso tani ca padesu -ani); - 0 -vatfaka, m.
or n., a wheeled device for raising water from a well, a
noria; V in II 122,16 (anujanami bhikkhave tulal!l kara-
ka~akal!l -an ti, bhajana bahul!l bhijjanti; Sp 1208,9: -an
ti araha~agha~iyantal!l);- 0 -vatti(n), m(fn). and m. [see
K.R. Norman, 1969, pp. 241-42 (=2007, pp. 274-5)], (a
king) whose sovereignty and sway extend over the whole
earth; a universal emperor; Abh 335; D 1 88,33
(agatani . . . amhakal!l mantesu dvattil!lsa
mahapurisalakkha1,.1ani yehi samannagatassa maha-
purisassa dve gatiyo bhavanti anañña, sace agar~
ajjhavasati raja hoti -i dhammiko dhammaraja caturanto
vijitavi janapadatthavariyappatto sattaratana-
samannagato . . . sace kho pana agarasma anagariy~
pabbajati, arahal!l hoti sammasambuddho loke vivatta-
cchaddo; Sv 249,24foll.: cakkaratanal!l vatteti catuhi
sampatticakkehi vattati tehi ca paral!l vatteti parahitaya
ca iriyapathacakkan~ vatto etasmil!l atthi ti -I, ettha ca
raja ti samaññal!l -I ti visesanal!l); II 172,13 foil. (yassa
rañño khattiyassa muddhavasittassa ... dibbal!l cakka-
ratanal!l patubhavati ... so hoti raja -I ti); SI 191,12
(seyyatha pi ... rañño -issa je~~aputto pitara pavattital!l
cakkal!l samma-d-eva anupavatteti, evam eva kho tval!l
Sariputta maya anuttar~ dhammacakkal!l pavattital!l
samma-d-eva anupavattesi ti); A I 28,5 foil. (yal!l ekissa
lokadhatuya dve raJano -I apubbal!l acarimal!l
uppajjeyyul!l n' etal!l ~hanal!l vijjati . . . y~ itthi raja
assa -I n' etal!l ~anal!l vijjati); 109,18 (yo pi so ... raja
-I dhammiko dhammaraja so pi na arajakal!l cakkal!l
vatteti ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se so pi nama arajak~);
III 365,8 (ye keci khuddarajano sabbe te rañño -issa
anuyutta bhavanti, raja tesal!l -i aggam akkhayati);
Sn 552 (raja arahasi bhavitul!l -i rathesabho caturanto
vijitavi jambusa1,.1<;lassa issaro); Ja 11 395,2* (id~ phalal!l
bhutva doha)i1,.1I nari -il!l vijayati); Ap 513,5 (tato cuta
manussatte rajünal!l -inal!l ma~J<;la!Inal!l ca rajün~
mahesittal!l akarayil!l); Bv 13:11 (ahal!l tena samayena
catud1pamhi issaro antalikkhacaro asil!l -1 mahabba1o );
Vibh 336,29 (rajano -ino); Ps IV 22L4 (vas~ upagate
-imhi); 225,21 (mahiddhik~ -ino hatthiratanal!l hoti);
Spk III 152,18 (pavattatu bhav~ cakkaratanan ti
puññanubhavena abbhuggataya vacaya codento cakkal!l
vatteti ti -i); - ifc see saddhamma- sv sa(t); -
--ko1ahala, n., uproar about (the appearance of) a
cakkavatti(n) emperor; Spk I 130,32; Pj 1 121,9
(kamavacaradeva eva vassasatassa accayena -1 raja loke
uppajjissati ti manussapathe vicaritva arocenti idal!l
--kolahal~ nama); Ap-a 52,24;- --halahala, n. uproar
about (the appearance of) a cakkavatti(n) emperor; Ja I
48,11 (--halaha1~, Ce, E e so; Be, Se --kolahalal!l); -
0
-vaka, m., the Cakra bird (the ruddy sheldrake ?);
cakkala
Abh 641; Ja III 520,21 (sUVal).l).aVal).l).e dve -e seva1e
khaditva vasante disva); V 406,2* (h~sa koñca mayilra
ca -a ca kukkuha); Ap 44,2 (sada rakkhanti rajan~ -o
va dukkhit~; Ap-a285,19joll.: dukkhappatt~ sak~
ñatirp rakkhanto -o pakkhi iva ti attho ); 113,2 (-o ah~
tada; Ap-a 387,15: cakkarp sigh~ gacchant~ iva
udake va tha1e va akase va sigharp vati gacchati ti -o);
Mil401 ,18joll. (-o yava jivitapariyadana dutiyikarp na
vijahati . . . -o seva1apal).akabhakkho . . . -o piil).e na
vihet}layati); - -abhikiljita, mfn., resounding with the
calls of cakkavaka birds; Pv 24:3;- -'ilpakiljita, mfn.,
echoing to the calls of cakkavaka birds; Ja IV 359,1*
(ima pokkharal).iyo ramma -'ilpakujita); Ap 333,17
(pokkharal).I -'ilpakiljita, Ce so; Se -'upakujjita; Be
cakkavakapakiljita; Ee wr cakkavaka pakiljita) t 362,26
(Be, Ce so; Se -'upakujjita; Ee cakkavakapakujita); -
0
-vaki,f, the female Cakra bird; Ja III 524,9 (-I
Rahu1amata cakkavako aham eva ti); VI 189,11* (sa nilna
-I va pa11a1asmirp anildake);- 0 -vaJa, n.m., l. (n. [and
m. ?]) one of innumerable worlds, encircled by a
cakkava!a mountain-range, containing four continents;
Ja I 203,22 (addha aññehi pi -ehi Sakka agacchanti);
Ap 380,19 (-am upadaya sakanan~ sapabbat~);
Bv 1:64 (sattakayo ca akaso -a e' anantaka; Bv-a 52,22:
akasassa pi anta natthi tatha -ani anantani eva);
Vism 205,2o (ekarp -~ ayamato ca vittharato ca
yojananarp dvadasasatasahassani catuttirpsasatani ca
pannas~ ca yojanani); Ps III 373,19 (-~
atisambadharp bhavagg~ atinicarp); IV 114,13foll.
ühapetva im~ -arp aññasmirp -e buddha uppajjanti ti
suttarp natthi, na uppajjanti ti pana atthi); 121,16foll.
(ekissa 1okadhatuya ti ekasmirp -e... buddha hi
uppajjamana imasmirp yeva -e uppajjanti); 177,13
(til).l).arp til).l).arp -an~ antara ekeka 1okantarika hoti,
til).l).arp sakatacakkan~ pattan~ va aññamaññ~
ahacca t}lapitanarp majjhe okaso viya); V 7,18 (dasahi
--sahassehi sannipatitahi devatahi parivuto); Spk II
159,25joll. (imamha -a satta paracakkava!~ para-
cakkava!a ca im~ -arp s~saranti); Mhv 18:53 (cha-
bbal).l).arasmiyo ... -~ saka1~ sobhayirpsu ca); -at
Ap 585,17 and 593,5 read cakkava!asam~ with Be, Ce,
Se (Ee cakkaval~ samarp); - 2. (m.) the mountain-
range believed to encircle a world; Vism 421,14 (-a -ehi
himavanta himavantehi Sineril Sinerilhi aññamaññ~
samagantva CUI).l).avicul).l).a hutva vinassanti; or world ?);
Sv 446,1 (samuddo -o himava Sineru candimasuriya-
nakkhattadini ... ); Spk III 76,1 (-~ va sinerurp va
ahacca);- -'-addika, m., the mountain-range believed
to encircle a world; Samantak 767 (himalayo -' -addiko
ca); - --gabbha, m., what is within the cakkavi\!a
mountain range; the interior of a world; Mp III 319,7
(--gabbh~ pilretva thita mahapat}lavi); Dhp-a IV 74,18;
- --pabbata, m., the mountain-range believed to
encircle a world; Ja III 32,16' (samudd~ parivaretva
t}litena --pabbatena saddhirp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
samudde); Vism 421,9 (--pabbatarp pi sinerupabbat~
pi vato ukkhipitva akase khipati); Sp 1137,5foll. (--sima
nama --pabbaten' eva paricchinna); Ps II 254,33 (cakka-
nabhiyo viya --sahasse sinerusahass~ pakat~ hoti,
ara vi ya dipa pakata honti . . . nemiyo vi ya --pabbata
93 cakkika
pakata honti); Spk III 6,14 (--pabbatarp kampento viya);
- --si1uccaya, m., the mountain-range believed to
encircle a world; Vism 206,26* (dve-asitisahassani
ajjhoga!ho mahal).l).ave accuggato tavad eva --si1uccayo
parikkhipitva t~ sabb~ 1okadhatum ay~ thito) =
Sp 119,24* = As 299,5•; - 0
-viddha, n. [cakka +
viddha 1], "circle-piercing", a feat of archery; Ja V
130,21 (mahasatto catilsu kal).l).esu catasso kadaliyo
thapetva . . . ekarp kadalirp sandhaya khipi, naraco tarp
vijjhi tato dutiyarp tato tatiyarp tato catutth~ ... raja
kirp sipp~ nam' et~ tata ti -~ nama deva ti); -
0
-vyüha, m., a form of battle arra y or tactic; Ja II 404,10
(yuddhe nama padumavyilho -o sakatavyilho ti tayo
vyilha honti, Ce, Se so; Be yuddho nama tividho
padumavyilho -o sakatavyilho ti; Ee yuddho nama
padumavyilho ... ); IV 343,17 (in cpd); - 0 -vha, m. the
Cakra bird; Abh 641 (cakkavako tu -o);
0
-Samarü!ha, mfn., mounted on carts; ? A I 178,21 (hoti
so samayo y~ bhay~ hoti atavisailkopo -a janapada
pariyayanti; Mp II 284,23 foil.: ettha iriyapathacakkarp pi
vattati yanacakkarp pi, bhayasmirp hi sampatte yes~
yanakani atthi te attano parikkharabhal).<;i~ tesu
aropetva palayanti, yes~ natthi te kajena va adaya
sisena va ukkhipitva palayanti yeva ti; cfMp I 120,17:
cakkasaddo . . . -a janapada pariyayanti ti ettha
iriyapathacakke) t III 66,10; Sp 807,28 (ratthabhede -a
janapada pariyayanti); - sucakka, mfn., having good
wheels; Ud-a 370,28 ( -arp . . . ajaññarath~ katva); -
se e also anudhammacakkappavattaka, sacakkaka.
cakkala, n.(?), a ring; a disc; a wheel; Sp 1220,6
(sarpsaral).akitiko nama --yutto kitiko);- ifc see akkhi-
(sv akkhi\ visama-.
cakkalaka, cakkalika 1, n., a ring; a disc; a wheel;
Sp 281,7 (phalakesu va kitikasu va dve tll).i -ani yojetva
katarp sarpsaral).akitikadvararp); Vism 255,14 (satta
givatthini dal).<;iena vijjhitva patipatiya thapitav~sa­
ka!Iracakka1akasal).thanani) Vibh-a 238,17 (eds
-cakka1ika-) t Pj I 50,26 (Be, Ce, Se -ka!Jrakhal).<;ia-
Sal).thanani; Ee -ka!Iradal).<;iasal).thanani);- ifc see 1oha-.
cakkalika\ see sv cakkalaka.
cakkalika2 , n., a (circular) pad; ? V in II 174,27 (-arp
uppannarp hoti, anujanami bhikkhave padapuñchanirp
katun ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se cakkali uppanna; Sp 1248,27:
kamba1adihi vethetva katacakka1ik~; Sp-t [Be] III
405,24: -an ti kamba1adihi vethetva cakkasal).thanena
padapuñchanayogg~ katarp); Sp 1216,15 (-an ti ettha
colakapadapuñchan~ bandhiturp anujanami ti attho, ad
Vin II 148,32: anujanami bhikkhave vatapanacakka1ikan
ti); - ifc see vatapana-.
cakkali, f., a (circular) pad;? Vin II 174,27 (-I uppanna
hoti, anujanami bhikkhave padapuñchanirp katun ti, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce cakkalik~ uppannarp; Sp 1248,27: -I ti
kambaladihi vethetva katacakka1ikarp, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
cakkalikan ti); 178,3• (in uddana: vedija1asa1ak~ ca -I
santharena ca, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se -i); 179,23* (in uddana:
cammacakkali co1akarp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se camma-
cakka1i).
cakkika, m. [S. cakrika], l. a bard; Abh 396 (veta!iko
bodhakaro -o tu ca ghal).tiko); - 2. an oil-miller;
Bv-a 114,31 (-an~ mahacakkayantarp viya).
cakketi
cakketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cakkayati,
Wg § 32:56], hurts, inflicts pain; Sadd 521,11joll. (cakka
cukka vyathane: -eti -ayati ... -eti vyathati hiq¡satl ti
atthena cakkam).
cakkhati 1, pr. J sg. [cf S. Vcak~, ca~ re], speaks; tells;
appears; sees; Dhatum 22 (cakkha dasse); It-a 11 26,29
(-antl ti cakkhilni, samavisamaq¡ acikkhantani viya
pavattantl ti attho ); Bv-a 33,15 (-a ti ti cakkhu,
samavisamaq¡ vibhavayatl ti attho); Sadd 332,22 (cakkha
viyattiyaq¡ vacayaq¡ . . . -atl ti cakkhu, samavisamaq¡
abhivyattaq¡ vadantaq¡ viya hoti ti attho); - see also
cikkhati.
cakkhate, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. vjak~, jak~iti], eats; eats with
relish, enjoys; Vism 481,12 (-atl ti cakkhu, rilpaq¡
assadeti vibhaveti ca ti attho ); It-a II 26,29 foll. (-anti ti
cakkhüni ... madhuq¡ -ati vyañjanaq¡ -atl ti, imani ca
iiramma~Jarasaq¡ anubhavantani assadentiini viya hontl ti
cakkhanarthena cakkhüni); Sadd 332,23joll. (atha va
silpaq¡ -ati madhuq¡ -atl ti adisu viya yasma assadattho
pi cakkhusaddo bhavati tasma -ati viñña~Jadhit¡hitaq¡
rilpaq¡ assadentaq¡ viya hoti ti assadattho pi gahetabbo ).
2 sappatighena rilpaq¡ sanidassanaq¡ sapparighaq¡ passi va
cakkhana, cakkhm}a, n. [from cakkhati ; cf S. lex.
cak~al).a, jak~al).a], eating, eating with relish, enjoying;
It-a 11 26,3ofoll. (atha va 0 '-aghena cakkhilni, kim idaq¡
-aq¡ nama, assadanaq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cakkhaghena,
prob. wr).
cakkhavayatanadi- in Ee at It-a II 37,19 is prob. wr for
cakkhayatanadi- (Be, Ce so) or for cakkhvayatanadi- (Se
so).
cakkhi(n), mfn. [from cakkhu ?], having eyes; having
insight; Sadd 188,18* ( ... hatthl -1 pakkhl darhl ... ).
cakkhu, n. [S., BHS cak~us] (sg. nom. -u, -uq¡; gen.
-ussa, -uno; pl. nom. -ilni, -il); l. the eye; the organ of
sight; the faculty of seeing, sight, Abh 149 (locanaq¡
cacchi -u ca); 835; Vin I 34, n (-uq¡ bhikkhave adittaq¡
rilpa aditta cakkhuviñña1,1aq¡ adittaq¡ ... ); III 188,33 (raho
nama -ussa raho sotassa raho); DI 70,8 (bhikkhu -una
rilpaq¡ disva na nimittaggahl hoti niinuvyañjanaggahi);
II 183,22 (pasado duddikkho ahosi musati -üni); 308,1o
(-uq¡ loke piyarilpaq¡ satarilpaq¡ etth' esa ta1,1ha
uppajjamana uppajjati); MI 503,14 (-uq¡ ... rilpiiramaq¡
rilparataq¡ rilpasammuditaq¡); II 121,9 (passami eke
sama~Jabrahma~Je kise 1ükhe . . . na vi ya maññe -uq¡
bandhante janassa dassanaya; Ps Ili 353,7 foil.: -uq¡
abandhante viya, apasiidikaq¡ hi disva puna olokana-
kiccaq¡ na hoti, tasma so -uq¡ na bandhati nama,
pasadikaq¡ pana disva punappuna olokanakiccaq¡ hoti,
tasma so -uq¡ bandhati nama); 169,4foll. (yada me
sama1,1o Gotamo -una -uq¡ upasaq¡harissati athahaq¡
sama1,1aq¡ Gotamaq¡ pañhaq¡ pucchissaml ti ...
bhagava . . . yen a Kapa~hiko miil)avo tena -ilni
upasaq¡hasi); III 279,24 (ariyasavako -usmiq¡ nibbindati
rilpesu nibbindati); 298,19 (andho hi ... -una rilpaq¡ na
passati); SI 115,22 (tav' eva papima -u tava rilpa tava
cakkhusamphassaviññiil)ayatanaq¡); III 232,4 (yo ...
-usmiq¡ chandarago cittass' eso upakkileso); IV 54,8
(-uq¡ . . . suññaq¡ attena va attaniyena va); 133,23 foil.
(bhikkhu -uq¡ aniccan ti passati . . . -uq¡ dukkhan ti
passati ... -uq¡ anatta ti passati); A III 279,14 (bhikkhu
-una rilpaq¡ disva n' eva sumano hoti na dummano,
94 cakkhu
upekkhako viharati ... ); IV 55,8 (api ca kho matu-
gamassa -una -uq¡ upanijjhayati pekkhati ... ); Dhp 360
(-una saq¡varo sadhu sadhu sotena saq¡varo ); It 24,8*
(-u sotaq¡ ca ghiinaq¡ ca jivha kayo tatha mano etani
yassa dvarani suguttani 'dha bhikkhuno ... ); Sn 922
(-ühi n' eva lol' assa gamakathaya avaraye sotaq¡);
1142 (pass ami naq¡ manasa -una va); Pv 18:1 (yo ca
tuyhaq¡ sako bhata hadayaq¡ -uq¡ va dakkhi1,1aq¡);
Thi 396 (handa te -uq¡ harassu taq¡ tassa narassa adasi
tavade); Ja II 131,23* (-üni e' assa na dadati pari1omaq¡
ca vattati; 132,3': -una -uq¡ ahacca pamukho hutva na
oloketi, aññato -üni harati) = IV 197,19* (198,18':
o1okentaq¡ na oloketi); IV 137,16 (lo1,1ajalapaharani dve
pi -üni nassiq¡su); 408,27* (tato so katipahassa
uparil!hesu -usu); VI 493,8* (hadayaq¡ -uq¡ p' ahaq¡
dajjaq¡ kiq¡ me bahirakaq¡ dhanaq¡); Nidd I 233,17
(tesaq¡ -uto rilpatal).ha savati ... ); Ap 520,2 (uddhaq¡
adho ca tiriyaq¡ sabbaq¡ passami -una); Cp 1:8:16 (na
me dessa ubho -ü); Dhs 597 (yaq¡ -uq¡ catunnaq¡
mahabhütanaq¡ upadaya pasado attabhavapariyapanno
anidassano sapparigho yena -una anidassanena
passati va ... ); Pe~ 83,7 (-u aniccan ti ekaq¡sa-
vyakaral)lyo ); Nett 30,9 (-uq¡ bhikkhave anavaghitaq¡
ittaraq¡ parittaq¡ pabhailgu); Vism 21,21 (yada
rilparamma~Jaq¡ -ussa apathaq¡ agacchati); 589,13 (yaq¡
1oko setakal).hama~J<oialavicittaq¡ ayatavitthataq¡ akkhi-
kilpake naharusuttakena abaddhaq¡ maq¡sapil)<oiaq¡ -ü ti
sañjanati); Spk III 40,28 (mayhaq¡ -u pasannaq¡ ahaq¡
appamattakaq¡ pi rilparamma~Jaq¡ pativijjhituq¡ sakkoml
ti); 264,11 (kayo pi ki1amati -üni pi vihaññanti); Pj I
150,23 (anekani jatisahassiini -umhi rogo va doso va
ussada va pi!aka va na honti); Ud-a 149,18 (tassa taq¡
siriq¡ daghukama viya andha -ilni parilabhiq¡su);
Cp-a 72,18 (bodhisattassa saccakiriyaya -ilsu
uppannesu); - dibbaq¡ cakkhu, superhuman sight
(enabling one to see people or things at a great
distance, or to see those in other states of being); Vin I
8,7 (addasa kho bhagava dibbena -una visuddhena ati-
kkantamiinusakena pañcavaggiye bhikkhil Bariil)asiyaq¡
viharante Isipatane migadaye); Ili 5,1 (so dibbena
-una ... satte passami cavamane uppajjamane ... ); D II
20,13 (jatassa ... Vipassissa kumarassa kammavipakajaq¡
dibbaq¡ -uq¡ paturahosi, yena sudaq¡ samanta yojanaq¡
passati diva e' eva rattiq¡ ca); 87,11 (addasa kho bhagava
dibbena -una . . . ta devatayo . . . vatthilni pari-
gal).hantiyo); 329,19 (te tattha appamatta atapino pahitatta
viharanta dibbaq¡ -uq¡ visodhenti, te dibbena -una ...
imam eva 1okaq¡ passanti paraq¡ ca satte ca opapatike);
MI 213,26 (bhikkhu dibbena -una ... sahassaq¡ 1okiinaq¡
voloketi); Ud 40,12 (addasa kho ayasma
Mahamoggallano dibbena -una . . . tena yakkhena
ayasmato Sariputtassa sise paharaq¡ diyamiinaq¡);
Th 996 (na pi dibbassa -uno ... pal).idhl me na vijjati);
Ap 448,7 (dibbaq¡ -uq¡ visuddhaq¡ me samadhikusalo
ahaq¡); 2. insight, knowledge, understanding;
Abh 835 (-u paññayaq¡ . . . dhammacakkhumhi ca);
V in I 11,2 (idaq¡ dukkhaq¡ ariyasaccan ti me bhikkhave
pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu -uq¡ udapadi ña1,1aq¡
udapiidi pañña udapadi ... ); D II 33,6 (samudayo
cakkhu
samudayo ti kho ... pub be ananussutesu dhammesu -urp
udapadi; Sv 460,28: -urp udapadl ti dassanatthena); MI
51 0,16foll. (tarp hi te Magandiya ariyarp -urp natthi
yena tvarp ariyena -una arogyarp janeyyasi nibbanarp
passeyyasl ti; Ps Ili 219,2o: ariyarp -un ti parisuddharp
vipassanañfu_larp e' eva maggañai:Iarp ca); S IV 233,26
(ima vedana ti me ... -urp udapadi); A I 128,33/oll.
(ekaccassa puggalassa tathariiparp -u na hoti
yathariipena -una anadhigatarp va bhogarp
adhigaccheyya ... ; Mp II 200,6: paññacakkhu na hoti);
III 243,3 (pañc' ime bhikkhave vassassa antaraya yarp
nemitta na jananti yattha nemittanarp -u na kkamati);
It 52,17* (marpsacakkhu dibbacakkhu paññacakkhu
anuttararp etani t!I:II -uni akkhasi purisuttamo );
Nett 191,15 ( ... -una vijjaya buddhiya ... ); Mill0,13
(sakim eva -urp udapadi); 94,25 (tesu me pañhesu -urp
dehi paravadanarp niggahaya ti); Spk II 354,7 (-un ti
dve -üni, ñfu_lacakkhurp e' eva marpsacakkhurp ca); -
3. the eye of the world (as the means of man 's seeing );
power of seeing, vision; (perhaps: light;) Vin II 284,17
(atikhipparp sugato parinibbuto atikhipparp -u¡p loke
antarallitan ti) = D II 158,2; A I 22,29 (ekapuggalassa
bhikkhave patubhava mahato -ussa patubhavo hoti
mahato alokassa patubhavo hoti mahato obhasassa
patubhavo hoti ... ; Mp I 117,10: katamassa -u ssa ti
paññacakkhussa); Sn 599 (-u¡p lo k e samuppannarp
mayarp pucchama Gotamarp; Pj II 463,27:
avijjandhakare loke ta¡p andhakara¡p vidhamitva lokassa
dighadhammikadi-atthasandassanena -urp hutva
samuppannarp); Th 1031 (-u sabbassa lokassa
püjaneyyo; Th-a lii 119,6 foll.: yasma sadevakassa
lokassa samadassanena 0 -bhüto, tasma -u sabbassa
lokassa püjanlyo); - ifc see okhitta- (sv okkhipati),
ñai:Ia-, dibba-, dhamma- (sv dhamma \ pañña-, pasada-,
buddha-, marpsa-, vivata- (sv vivarati), samanta-; -
o• -ayatana, n., the sense-organ that is the eye; the
sphere ofvisual perception; D III 243,14 (cha ajjhattikani
ayatanani, -a¡p sotayatanarp ... ); SIl 3,3o; Dhs 597
(As 308,26: sañjatisamosar~aghena -arp p' etarp);
Vism 482,23 (cakkhu ca tarp ayatanarp ca ti -a¡p); -
0
'-indriya, 0 -'ndriya, n., the sense-faculty that is the
eye; D III 226,3 (rakkhati -arp, -e sarpvararp apajjati);
MI 295,7 (-arp sotindriyarp ghanindriya¡p ... ); S V
216,23 (dissati ca indriyana¡p aññathattarp -assa
sotindriyassa . . . kayindriyassa ti); Th 730 (-arp ce
riipesu gacchantarp anivarayam); Ja III 344,23' (-am eva
sandhaya kupitindriyo si ti aba); Dhs 597 (As 308,2s:
dassanalakkh~e indagharp karetl ti -arp p' etarp);
Spk III 240,24 (cakkhu ca cakkhudvare nibbattana¡p
dhammanarp adhipateyyasaiJ.khatena indaghena
indriyarp ca ti -arp); - o• -uppatana, n., tearing out of
the eyes; Mill66,29 (cara attakatena -arp sülaropana¡p
slsacchedanarp papui:Ianti); o -kara1,1a, mf( -!)n.
[cakkhu + kar~a ], producing sight or insight; Vin I
1
10,16 (ete ... ubho ante anupagamma majjhima patipada
tathagatena abhisambuddha -1 ñai:Iakarai:II ... ; Sp 965,10:
-1 ti paññacakkhu¡p sandhay' aba) f. MI 15,27; S V 97,27
(satt' ime bhikkhave bojjhaiJ.ga -a ñfu.!akarai:Ia); It 82,22
(tayo 'me bhikkhave kusalavitakka anandhakar~a -a
ñfu.!akarai:Ia); - acakkhukar~a, mfn., not producing
95 cakkhu
sight or insight; blinding, deluding; S V 97,14 (nlvarai:Ia
andhakarai:Ia acakkhukar~a); A I 216,2o (raga ... andha-
karai:lo acakkhukarai:Io ... ; Mp II 330,21: paññacakkhurp
na karotl ti acakkhukarai:Io); It 82,10; - 0 -klilusiya, n.,
obscuration, dimness of the eyes; Pv-a 124,26 (piya-
cakkhühi oloketabbe -arp uppadesi¡p); - 0 -da, mfn.
[cakkhu + da3], giving sight, giving vision; SI 32,9* foll.
(kirpdado hoti -o ... d!pado hoti -o; Spk I 83,12: andha-
kare cakkhumantanarp pi riipadassanabhavato dlpado -o
nama hoti);- 0 -dada, mfn., giving sight, giving vision;
Th 3 (alokada -a bhavanti ye agatanarp vinayanti
kaii.kharp; Th-a l 36,33: paññamayam eva cakkhurp
dadant! ti -a); - 0
-dala, n., the eyelid; Ps II 362,32
(heraññiko kahapai:Iarp hatthe thapetva ... na -en' eva
parivatteturp sakkoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -balen' eva);-
0
0
-dvlira, m., the means of access that is the eye (as
sense-organ); Nidd I 130,22; Mil55,3o; Vism 432,35 (-e
cakkuviññai:Iam eva riiparp passati na itarani); 624,7;
Spk III 4,27 (-asmirp hi apathagate aramm~e); -
0
-dvarika, mfn., connected with the means of access
that is the eye; Th-a III 44,18 (-ena viññai:Iasantanena);
Vibh-a 406,18 (-a¡p avajjanarp); - -dhatu,f, the
0
constituent element that is the eye (as sense-organ);
M lii 62,10 (agharasa kho ima ... dhatuyo: -u riipadhatu
cakkhuviññai:Iadhatu ... ); Dhs 597 (As 308,27: suññata-
sabhavanissattatthena -u p' esa); 703; Vibh 413,34;
Vism 489,15 (bheritalarp viya -u datthabba dai:I<;lo viya
riipadhatu saddo vi ya cakkhuviññai:Iadhatu); Spk II 131 ,s
(cakkhuppasado -u riiparamm~arp riipadhatu); -
0
-patha, m. and n. l. (m.) the range or reach of sight;
D II 210,8 (devanarp tavatirpsanarp -asmi¡p); Ja IV
189,5 (ath' assa tathagatassa -arp atikkantakale);
Vv-a 119,1 (yava -a¡p samatikkama, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
--samatikkama); - 2. (n.) (means of sight ?) the eye;
Ja IV 403,21* (kenanusittho idha-m-agato si ... -ani
yaciturp; 403,24·: -anl ti cakkhünarp etarp namarp);
404,5* (dadabi me -arp anuttararp yam abu nettarp
purisena duccajarp ); - o -(p )pasada, m., the tranquillity
(resulting in sensitivity) of the sense-organ that is the
eye; the receptive surface or power of the sense-organ
that is the eye; Vism 446,3* (yena -ena
riipani-m-anupassati); Sv 1003,1 (marpsacakkhurp -o);
Ps II 77,8 (nissayabhavena -arp ca aramm~abhavena
catusamutthanikariipe ca paticca cakkhuviññai:Iarp nama
uppajjati); As 309,14 (vijjunicchar~adikalesu anoloketu-
kamassapi riiparp -arp ghageti); - 0
-bhüta, mfn., like
an eye, seeing; full of insight, possessing vision; Vin III
105,23 (-a vata bhikkhave savaka viharanti, ñfu_labhüta
vata bhikkhave savaka viharanti; Sp 508,3: cakkhu
bhütarp jatarp uppannarp tesan ti -a, bhütacakkhuka
uppannacakkhuka, cakkhurp uppadetva viharann ti
attho); MI 111,12 (bhagava janarp janati passarp passati
-o ñai:Iabhüto dhammabhüto brahmabhüto; Ps II 76,22:
svayarp dassanaparii:Iayakatthena -o) = A V 226,25
(Mp V 72,8: -o ti cakkhu viya bhüto jato nibbatto); Ja I
146,32* (nindito -ehi kayo balabhinandito);
-ma(t), mfn. and m., l. possessing eyes, gifted with
0
sight; (one) who has eyes, who can see; one who has the
gift of sight; V in III 6,8 (seyyatha pi ... andhakare va
telapajjotarp dhareyya 0 -manto riipani dakkhintl ti evam
cakkhussa
eva . . . bhota Gotamena anekapariyayena dhammo
pakasito) =MI 290,5; D II 13,22 (tam ena~ 0 -ma puriso
hatthe karitva paccavekkheyya ... ); M III 299,15
(seyyatha pi ... 0 -ma puriso umm!letva va nimlleyya
nimlletva va ummlleyya); S V 121,29 (0 -ma puriso
saka~ mukhanimitt~ paccavekkhamano); A I 124,15
0
( -ma puriso rattandhakaratimisaya vijjantarikaya rüpani
passeyya); Ud 50,33* ( 0 -ma visamani va ... pa!).<;lito ...
papani parivajjaye); Th 501 ( 0 -m' assa yatha andho
sotava badhiro yatha); Ja II 33,22* (udet' aya~ 0 -ma
ekaraja harissava!).l).O pathavippabhaso; 34,1· foll.: -ma
0
ti sakalacakkav~avasina~ andhakara~ vidhamitva
cakkhupati1abhakaraJ).ena ya~ tena tes~ dinna~
cakkhu~ tena cakkhuna -ma); IV 404,w• (ubhayani
0
[cakkhüni] dadam' ah~ sa 0 -ma gaccha; 404,13': 0 -ma
ti so tva~ mama cakkhühi -ma hutva); Mi1328,1 (yo
0
koci 0 -ma puriso); Vism 38,21 (ajja dani 0 -mante nissaya
ñatan ti); Ps II 245,32 ( -mantan~ gaganamajjhe thito
0
suriyo viya ... pakato); - 2. (one) who possesses
insight and vision; wise; DI 191,12 (sabbe va kho ete
Potthapada paribbajaka andha acakkhuka, tv~ yeva
nes~ eko -ma); III 195,28* (Vipassissa nam' atthu
0
0
-mantassa sirimato); A 1 117,17 (katha~ ca bhikkhave
bhikkhu 0 -ma hoti, idha bhikkhave bhikkhu id~
dukkhan ti yathabhüta~ pajanati); It 108,18* (aloka-
kara!).a dhira 0 -manto ral).anjaha); Th 295 (Rahu1abhaddo
ti m~ vidu y~ e' amhi putto buddhassa y~ ca
dhammesu 0 -ma); Thi 189 (satimati 0 -mati bhikkhuni
bhavitindriya); Ja II 327 ,13* ( 0 -ma andhita honti
matugamavas~ gata) quoted Sadd 145,3o; Ap 20,16
(buddho nu kho na va buddho, handa passami -m~); 0
371,13 (yada buddha 0 -manto uppajjanti pabhaii.kara, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr -manta); Dhp-a III 175,1 (yes~
0
paññacakkhu atthi te eva o -manto); - esp. used of the
Buddha: Abh 1 (bhagava natho 0 -ma); D II 123,11*
(dukkhass' antakaro sattha 0 -ma parinibbuto); 166,12'
(bahujjano 0 -mato pasanno); SI 30,4• ( 0 -mata
anubuddho; Spk 1 81,16/oll.: 0 -mata ti pañcahi cakkhühi
0
-mantena tathagatena); 121,15* (pade vandami 0 -ma);
Dhp 273 (virago settho dhamman~ dipadan~ ca
0
-ma); Sn 570 (y~ t~ saral).~ agamha ito aghami
0
-ma, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr 0 -ma) = Th 838; Vv 12:5
(upasika 0 -mato ahosi~); Ap 21,6 (antojalagata ete tava
ñiil).amhi 0 -ma, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr 0 -ma; Ap-a 226,19:
0
-ma pañcahi cakkhühi 0 -manta, alapana~ et~);
Ud-a 154,9• (tatha ay~ Sakyamuni pi agato tathagato
vuccati tena 0 -ma); Pj II 42,26 (0 -ma ti bhagava pakati-
dibbapaññasamantabuddhacakkhühi ti pañcahi cakkhühi
0
-ma); - cakkhumanto in Ee at Spk 1 77,5 is wr for
cakkhumantena (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -lola, mfn., greedy
with the eye, greedy for sights; or with a restless eye;
Nidd I 366,2/oll. (ekacco -o ... adittha~ dakkhitabb~
dittha~ samatikkamitabban ti . . . dighacarika~ ...
anuyutto viharati rüpadassanaya . . . atha va . . . disa-
vidis~ pekkhamano gacchati ... atha va ... na rakkhati
cakkhundriy~ cakkhundriye na sa~vara~ apajjati); -
0
-loliya, n. greed for sights; or restlessness of eye;
Nidd 1 366,2 (Nidd-a I 389,33: cakkhudvare uppanna-
lobhavasena -ena); 367,22 (-~ pajaheyya);
0
-ViññiiQa, n., cognizance by the sense-organ that is the
96 cankama
eye; Vin I 34,18 (cakkhu~ bhikkhave aditta~ rüpa aditta
-~ aditta~ cakkhusamphasso aditto); D III 243,2o (cha
viññiil).akaya, -~ sotaviññal).~ ... ); M III 264,33
(cakkhu~ avuso Channa -a~ --viññatabbe dhamme
et~ mama eso 'h~ asmi eso me atta ti
samanupassasi); 281,8 (cakkhu~ ca paticca rüpe ca
uppajjati -~); S IV 39,1 (yattha ... atthi cakkhu~ atthi
rüpa atthi -~ atthi --viññatabba dhamma atthi tattha
Maro va Marapaññatti va); Ja VI 247,9· (-assa uppatti-
nivara!).~ andhatam~); Dhs 556; Mil 52,13
(cakkhusmi~ ca kho maharaja sati rüpesu ca -a~ hoti
-e sati 0 -samphasso hoti 0 -samphasse sati vedana hoti);
Vism 458,23 (0 -dvare tava dassanakicca~
sadhayaman~
0
-pasadavatthuka~ -~); As 262,8
(kiiral).abhütassa cakkhussa viññal).~ cakkhuto va
pavatta~ cakkhusmi~ va nissit~ viññiil).an ti -a~); -
0
-viññeyya, mfn., cognisable by the sense-organ that is
the eye; Vin 1 184,2o (bhusa ce pi -a rüpa cakkhussa
apatha~ agacchanti); A III 411,4 (pañc' ime bhikkhave
kamagul).a, -a rupa ittha kanta . . . sotaviññeyya
sadda ... ); Dhs 589; 1095; Mil64,11 (1ol).~ maharaja
-an ti); PsI 216,3 (na hi jara -a hoti); II 56,7 (-a ti
cakkhuviññal).ena passitabba); As 83,31 (ay~
hatthadin~ akaro -o hoti, viññatti pana na -a, mano-
viññeyya eva);- sacakkhu, mfn., having eyes, sighted;
Ja IV 408,8* (-u brahma!).o asi andho raja upavisi);
Dhp-a I 20,7 (--kale); see also acakkhuka,
amisacakkhuka, dibbacakkhuka, disacakkhuka,
visamacakkhuka, sacakkhuka.
cakkhussa, mfn. [S. cak~u~ya], pleasing to the eyes;
wholesome for the eyes; Vin II 137,34 (pañc' ime
bhikkhave anisa~sa dantakaghassa khadane: -~
mukha~ na duggandh~ hoti ... ) = A III 250,26; -
acakkhussa, mfn., unpleasant for the eyes; not whole-
some for the eyes; Vin II 137,3o (pañc' ime bhikkhave
adinava dantakaghassa akhadane: -a~ mukh~
duggandh~ hoti ... ; Sp 1213,28: -an ti cakkhün~
hit~ na hoti parihani~ janeti) = A III 250,19 (Mp III
326,14: na cakkhün~ hit~ cakkhu~ visuddha~ na
karoti); Vin II 148,27 (vihara avatapanaka honti -a
duggandha); A III 256,14 (pañc' ime bhikkhave adinava
aggismi~ ... -o dubba!).l).akaraJ).O dubbalakaraJ).O ... ).
cañkama, m. (and n.) [BHS caii.krama], l. the act of
walking; walking about, walking up and down; M III
112,32 (tassa ce ... bhikkhuno ... -aya citt~ namati ...
thanaya ... nisajjaya ... ); A I 114,11 (bhikkhu divas~
-ena msaJJaya avara!).Iyehi dhammehi citt~
parisodheti); Mil216,3 (thanena -ena divaratti~
vitinamenti); Vism 108,2o (than~ va -o va vagati);
Spk III 170,15 (-~ adhitthahantassa uppannaviriy~);
- ifc se e thana-; - 2. a place for walking up and down,
a (raised) walkway, a terrace; Abh 213 (-o); Vin I 15,26
(-a orohitva paññatte asane nisidi); II 120,3 (-o nica-
vatthuko hoti, udakena otthañyati); DI 105,21 (bhagava
vihara nikkhamma -a~ abbhutthasi); Th 271 ( -~
abhirühanto tatth' eva papati~ chama); Ja II 273,24
(uyyan~ gantva pa!).l).aSaJ~ karetva -~ mapetva);
Ap 93,2o (sudhaya 1epana~ katva -~ karayi~ aha~);
99,12 (itthakahi cinitvana -~ karayi~ ah~); 212,z7
(bhagavato -~ sodhit~ maya); Bv 1:5 (-am
cañkamati
mapayissami nabhe ratanam;u:¡qitarp; Bv-a 28,7: -an ti
cailkamitabbatthanarp vuccati); Vism 292,29 foll. (-e
1ekharp katva aharp ito -kotito parakotirp gantva
0
nivattamano imarp 1ekharp patva va parinibbayissami ti
vatva); Cp-a 40,32 (-arp katva va1ukarp okiri);
Vibh-a 474,35 (mayharp -amha otaraQ.akale ti);
Mhv 5:226 (Sumittathero nibbayi cailkamanto va -e);
- acailkamarp in Ee, Se at Th 1174 is prob. wr; read
adhogamarp with Be, Ce and eds at Th-a III 170,15; -
see also thanacailkami(n), thanacailkamika.
cailkamati, pr. 3 sg. [intens. of kamati qv;
S. cailkramyate; BHS cailkramati], walks, walks about;
walks up and down; Vin I 15,25 (bhagava rattiya
paccüsasamayarp paccutthaya ajjhokase -ati); 32,1o
(yannünaharp samanta udakarp ussaretva majjhe
reQ.uhataya bhümiya -eyyan ti); IV 18,25 (sa ittthi
satakarp nikkhipitva ayasmato Anuruddhassa purato -ati
pi titthati pi nisidati pi seyyarp pi kappeti); M III 12,1
(akase pi pallailkena -ati seyyatha pi pakkhi sakuQ.o);
Th 540 (gattani parisiñcitva -issami ekako ); Ja II 385,5
(eko posavaniya1o1amakkato ... ekassa sllavahatthissa
pi!!he nisiditva ... pitthiyarp -ati); Vism 400,16 (thero
mukhena pavisitva anta kucchiyarp pacmena ca
pacchimena ca -ati); PsI 234,26 (padesu avahantesu
j;u:¡Q.ukehi -ati); Sv 251,30 (kasma pana tasmirp samaye
-antl ti pal).itabhojanapaccayassa thinamiddhassa
vinodanattharp); Sadd 411,27 (kamati -ati); - part.pr.
(a) cailkama(t), mfn., V in 1 182,2 (tassa
accaraddhaviriyassa -ato pada bhijjirpsu); Sp 1085,12
(sa-upahanassa -ato apatti); (b) cailkamanta,
mft-anti)n., Vin I 133,23 (SUQ.anti ... -antanarp pada-
saddarp); II 120,6 (bhikkhü cailkame -anta paripatanti);
M 1 21,7; S 1 179,12 (bhagavantarp -antarp
anucailkamamano); Ja V 156,17' (paramena itthivilasena
-antiya); Ap 372,1; Mi1374,s• (-anta pi titthanto);
Pv-a 105,26 (raja Ajatasattu .. . uparipasadavaragato
-anta); - neg. acailkamanta, mfn., Sp 12,13 (imasmirp
sasane anipanno anisinno atthito acailkamanto ko
bhikkhu arahattarp patto ti vutte Anandatthero ti vatturp
vanati); (e) cailkamamana, mfn., Vin I 187,9foll.
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü satthari anupahane -amane
theresu pi bhikkhüsu anupahanesu -amanesu saupahana
-anti); Sp 400,25; Bv-a 36,36; - aor. 3 sg. cailkaml,
Vin I 32,12; Ja V 132,17 (cailkamarp aruyha katipayavare
aparapararp -i); Ap 68,22 (buddho akase -i tada);
Mhv 38:106; 3 pl. cailkamirpsu, Sv 400,2; Spk II 141,15;
- inf cailkamiturp, Vism 186,n; Ps IV 162,11;- absol.
(a) cailkamitva, S 1 107,12 (bhagava bahu-d-eva rattirp
ajjhokase -itva); Ja III 177,9 (tassa khandhe -itva);
Spk I 39,7; (b) cailkamitvana, Ap 166,6;
pp cailkamita, (mf)n. (or mfn. ?), walking; (or walked
over; ?) Sp 757,26 (--t!hanarp dassessama ti
punappunarp bhümirp bhindanta cailkamanti);
Mhv 15:208 (tassa --t!hane dipadipassa sadhuno); -
fpp cailkamitabba, mfn. and n. impers., Vin I 187,3o (na
bhikkhave acariyesu . . . anupahanesu cailkamamanesu
sa-upahanena -arp); II 33,21 (na nice cailkame
cailkamante ucce cailkame -arp); Vism 186,23
(asubhanimittadisabhimukhe bhümippadese -an ti
attho); Bv-a 28,7 (cailkaman ti --t!hanarp vuccati); -
97 cañgotaka
caus. pr. 3 sg cailkamapeti, Pj II 59,12 (pariggahetva va
narp cailkamapenti nisidapenti vunhapenti);
absol. cailkamapetva, Ja III 9,9 (assassa sannaharp
mocetva cailkamapetva udakarp payetva . . . til).arp
adasi).
cailkamana, n. [S., BHS cailkram;u:¡a], l. walking (about);
walking up and down; Ap 18,11 (pal1ailkena nisajjaya
thana -en a ca vitinamenti te rattirp); Sp 977,32
' -atthaya va dhotapadaparihar;u:¡atthaya va patimukka
0
(
upahana padagata honti); Spk III 199,1 ( -ka1e); It-a II
0
92,9 (cararp va ti bhikkhacaravasena -vasena ca
0
caranto); - ifc see thana-; - 2. a place for walking
about or up and down; a (raised) walkway, a terrace;
Abh 213 (-arp tu cailkamo); Ap 203,20 (-arp
samarü)ho); Bv 1:17 (dibbarp mandaravarp puppharp ...
-e okiranti sabbe deva samagata; Bv-a 36,36: tasmirp -e
cailkamamanarp bhagavantarp püjenti ti); Ps II 165,3
(-arp aruyha aparapararp cailkamati); Dhp-a I 20,4 (-e
paQ.ake disva); - 0
-koti,f, the end of the walkway;
Ja IV 329,s (-iyarp pasiil).aphalake nisidi); Vism 41 ,3o
(-iyarp rukkhe adhivat!ha devata); PsI 258,7; Spk III
187,15; Pv-a 79,s (sa pavisitva -iyarp !hatva therassa
attanarp dassesi);- 0 -khañja, m(fn)., lame and walking
on ... ; ? Sp 1030,31foll. (aggapaden' eva -o va
paQ.hikaya -o va ... ); - 0 -Slila,f, a hall or enclosure
for walking about in; Vin II 120,sfoll. (bhikkhü
ajjhokase cailkamanta sitena pi UQ.hena pi ki1amanti ...
anujanami bhikkhave -an ti, -aya tiQ.aCUQ.Q.arp
paripatati).
cailkora, see sv cakora.
cailkolapupphatp in Ee at Ap 215,24 is wr; Be, Ce
ailko1a-; Se vaku1a-.
cailgavlira, n. [?; cf AMg cailgabera, "a large metal pan"],
a strainer; a sieve; MI 142,3lfoll. (addasa -arp, -arp
bhadante ti, Ce, Ee so; Be -o bhadante ti; Se pailka-
vararp, pailkavaro bhadante ti; Ps II 128,w: -an ti khara-
parissavanarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cailkavaran ti); 144,21
(-an ti kho bhikkhu pañcann' etarp nivar;u:¡anarp
adhivacanarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se pailkavaran ti); Ja V
186,14* (upaniyat' idarp maññe parittarp udakarp va
-arnhi, Ce, Ee so; Be cailkavaramhi; Se pailkavaramhi;
186,27'joll.: yatha parittarp udakarp rajakanarp khara-
cailgavare pakkhittarp sigharp pariyadiyati, Ce, Ee so;
Be kharacailkavare; Se kharapailkavare); Ud-a 403,14 (-e
pakkhitta-udakarp viya parikkhayarp gatarp).
cailgavliraka, n. [cailgavara + ki], a strainer, a sieve;
Mil 365,13 (-assa dve ailgani gahetabbani, Be, Ee so; Ce
vailgavarakassa (?); Se pailkavarassa).
cailgotaka, cailkotaka, m.n. [?; cf AMg cailgeñ, cailgeria,
"a flat basket to keep flowers in"], a box or basket (often
of bamboo, or of gold, esp. for flowers ), a trug; Abh 317
(-o kar;u:¡qo ca, Ce so; Be cailkotako); Ja V 110,7 (-e
kappasapicurp attharitva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cailkotake);
303,2o· (tesarp pupphanarp -arp püretva, Ce, Ee so; Se
cailkotakarp; Be suv;u:¡Q.acailkotakarp); Ap 118,6 (-e
thapetvana anojarp puppham uttamarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
cailkotake); 434,28 ( -arp gahetvana, E e so; Se
cailkotakarp; Be, Ce sakosakarp); Vism 173,3 (pupphani
gahetva . . . -arp va karaQ.qapata1arp va pattehi yeva
samatittikarp püretva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cailkotakarp);
cacea ti
Sp 1244,15 ( ... vljanl -a111 pacchi ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
cailko~akaJ11); Dhp-a IIl 101,20 (ta -ehi gandhamalad!ni
gahapetva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cari.ko~akehi); Vv-a 158,19
(suval).l).apupphehi gandhajatehi ca puritani -am
gahapetva gantukama, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cari.ko~akani);
Ap-a 392,27 (-a111 puretva, Ce so; E e -asmiq1; Be, Se
cañko~akaq1);- ifc see dhatu-, mala-.
cacea ti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup carcati, Wg §§ 17:67, 28: 17],
abuses; avoids; ? Sadd 335,25 (cacea jacca paribhasana-
vajjanesu: -ati caccu, perhaps wr; cfWg § 17:67:
paribha~al).ata¡janayol,l).
caceara, n. [BHS, AMg id.; cf S. careara, K.R. Nonnan,
1960, p. 268; and S. catvara, BHS catvara], a square
(where severa[ roads meet); a thoroughfare; Abh 203
(catukkaJ11 -e); 218 (ajiraJ11 caccarari.ganaqi); ViniV
271,7 (siri.gha~ako nama -aq1 vuccati); Ap 43,19
(siri.gha~akaqi -aq1 ca suvibhattantarapal).aqi karayeyya;
Ap-a 284,21: siri.gha~akaJ11 catumaggasandhiq1 ca -aq1
antarav!thiqi ca karaye); 44,9 (pañña te -aq1 mune;
Ap-a 286,6: pañña -a111 maggasamodhanaq1 nagaravlthl
ti attho ); Mill ,2o (nagaraq1 .. . suvibhattavlthicaccara-
catukkasiri.gha~akaqi); - ifc see rathiya-.
caccu, m. ? f ? [?], ? Sadd 335,25 (cacea ... paribhasana-
vajjanesu: caccati -u).
cacceti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup carcayati,
Wg § 33:38], studies; Dhatup 545 (cacea ajjhene);
Sadd 529,7 (cacea ajjhayane: -eti -ayati).
caja, m. [S. -tyaja], giving up, abandoning; giving away;
- ifc see duccaja, succaja, suduccaja.
cajati, pr. 3 sg. [S. tyajati], l. leaves, abandons; gets rid
of, frees oneself from; Dhatup 65 (caja haniyaq1);
Dhatum 81; Th 868 (so 'haq1 -issami sahassapapaJ11);
Ja II 205,13* (-e -antaJ11 vanathaJ11 na kayira; 205,20':
attanaqi jahantaq1 jaheth' eva); III 67,26 (ahaq1 imaq1
snehena -ituqi asakkontl); IV 417 ,16* (na taq1 -ituq1
icchanti jlvitassa pi karal).a); VI 462,2* (yo -etha
maharaja bhattara111 dhanakaral).a); - cajati in Ee at
Ap-a 444,21 is wr for candati (Be, Ce, Se so); - part.pr.
neg. acajanta, accajanta, mfn., Ja V 342,2· (tassa
acajantassa); Sp 2,29* (tesaq1 matim accajanta); 681,29*
(sallekhaq1 accajantena); - 2. gives up, lets go,
surrenders; esp. pal).aJ11 or jlvitaqi -ati, risks, surrenders
or loses one's liJe; gives up (to someone else), gives
away; S I 224,27* (kama111 -ama asuresu pal).aJ11
ma-y-ime dija vikulava ahesuq1); Dhp 290 (-e matta-
sukhaqi dh!ro sampassaq1 vipulaq1 sukhaJ11); Ja V 32,10*
(-asi piil).aq1 pituno pamokkha, Ce, E e so; Be -asi; Se
cajjasi); 363,25* (-ami te taq1 bhattaraq1 gacchath' ubho
yathasukhaJ11); 500,24' (piil).aJ11 -anti santo nap1
dhammaq1); 500,28* (-e dhana111 yo pana ailgahetu;
501 ,7·: bahuq1 pi dhanaq1 -eyya); Cp 2:2:8 (nirantaraq1
jatisataJ11 -eyyaq1 mama jlvitaq1); Sadd 346,3 (caja cage:
-ati); - part.pr. (a) caja(t), mfn., Ja I 46,2* (-ato);
Sadd 346,3 (-aqi -anto -amano); (b) cajanta, mfn., Ja I
203,16' (pal).aJ11 -antesu); III 69,3• (kiq1 hi tassa -antassa
vacaya adada pabbataJ11, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee tass'
acajantassa; 69,6· foil.: tassa me yacitassa taq1 -antassa
kiq1 hi -eyya, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee na -antassa); Cp 1:9:48
(sake putte -antassa Jüjake brahmal).e); Milll8,12;
Dhp-a I 359,1o (khattiya pana jlvitaJ11 -anta pi dasi-
98 caja ti
puttehi saddhiq1 na bhuñjanti); - neg. acajanta, mfn.,
Ja V 341,23; (e) cajamana, mfn., Ja VI 570,19* (Maddi-
deviqi . . . -aman o na cintesiq1 bodhiya yeva karal).a);
Ap 67,9 (nahaq1 kopemi aj!vaq1 -amano pi jlvitaq1); -
3. lets go, discharges; emits; A I 62,4 (te pi tatth' eva
muttakarlsarp -eyyuq1) f. It-a II 160,16; - part.pr.
(a) cajanta, mfn., Ja V 362,27* (ariyaq1 bruvano
vakkari.go -anto manusiq1 giraq1; 363,2·: -anto ti
vissajjento): (b) cajamana, mfn., A II 33,14; Ja II 342,25
(sabbavarana maral).abhayabhlta . . . muttakarlsaJ11
-amana palayiq1su); - aor. 3 sg. caji, Ja III 69,2*
(succajarp vata na ccaji vacaya adadarp giriq1); V 464,9*
(putte -i ñatake ca); Mil ll8,1 1 (Vessantaro raja Ya!11
loke duccajaJ11 taqi -i); 1 pi. cajimha, Ap 594,7 (neka-
ko~isahassani jlvitani -imha no, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
-imhase); - part.perfact. (a) cattavi(n), mfn., who has
abandoned, got rid of, Nidd I 114,29 (kathaJ11 araha
cattavl ti tadi, arahato rago catto vanto mutto ... ); 459,19
(bhagava cattav1 ti tadi); Ps III 342,15;
(b) cajitava(t), mfn., id.; Nidd-a I 245,6 (cattavl ti kilese
cajitava); - absol. (a) cajitva, A III 50,23* (so ducc~aq1
sappuriso -itva); Ja V 348,28·; Nidd I 303,22 (hitva -itva
pariccajitva jahitva ... , Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr cajjitva);
Sv 665,4 (upakaral).atal).haqi -itva, Be, Se so; Ce
vajjetva; Ee vajjitva); (b) cajitvana, SI 209,1o* (yo ca
kame -itvana, Be, Ce, Se, Spk I 308,4, Th-a I 122,17* so;
Ee kame va jitvana, prob. wr); Th 96 (ekapupphaJ11
-itvana); Ja V 495,20*; Bv 3:22 (maharajjaJ11 -itvana
pabbajiqi); Mhv 34:72 (-itvana sakaJ11 pal).aqi);- pass.
pr. 3 sg. cajlyati, Sv 800,38 (nibbanarp ca agamma tal).ha
-iyati ... ) = Pa~is-a 160,3o (-lyati); Spk II 264,18 (tal).ha
asesato viraJJatl nirujjhati -iyati pa~missaJJiyati
vimuccati); - pp (a) catta, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.)
[S. tyakta] left, abandoned; got rid of; renounced, given
up; given away; Abh 754 (-arp hlnaJ11 samujjhitaJ11);
Vin IV 27,15 (moho me -o vanto mutto pahlno ... ); D III
270,8 (puthupaccekasaccani . . . honti panunnani -ani
vantani muttani pahlnani pa~inissanhani); Ja II 336,20*
(pubbe va me jlvitaq1 asi -a111); VI 16,4* (pitu
matuccaharp -o ranhassa nigamassa ca atho sabba-
kumaranaJ11 natthi mayhaq1 sakarp gharaq1; 16,s·: pitara
ca matara ca ... ); 61,31* (-a maya janapada mittamacca
ca ñataka); 63,27* (na . . . so abhakkho yaq1 hoti -a111
gihino sunakhassa va); Vibh 254,9 (tassa th!namiddhassa
--tta vantatta ... ) =As 381,19;- --jlvita, mfn., ready to
risk or abandon one's liJe; Ja V 41,14* (mamatthe
--j!vita; 41 ,18·: yaq1 ahaJ11 icchami taqi karontl ti); -
neg. acatta, accatta, mfn., not given up; not got rid of;-
acattatal).ha, accattatal).ha, mfn., with craving not got rid
of, Nidd I 49,3; Nidd-ai 160,s;- 2. (n.) abandoning;
leaving; -ena, adv., with renunciation, giving up;
absolutely giving up;? Vin I 265,19 (bhikkhu pakkamati
tamha avasa -ena vantena muttena anapekkhena na
paccessan ti; Sp 1114,4foll.: yena -ena so avaso -o hoti
taq1 -aq1 nama, tena -ena); III 252,12
(anupasampannassa -ena vantena muttena anapekkho
datva; Sp719,sfoll.: yena cittena bhesajjarp -aq1 ca
vantaJ11 ca muttarp ca hoti taq1 citta111 -aq1 vanta111
muttan ti vuccati tena cittena puggalo anapekkho
vuccati; Sp-~ [Be] II 435,2o: yena pariccajitukamata-
cajana
cittena);- pp (b) cajita, mfn., see cajitava(t) above.
cajana, n. [S. tyajana], abandoning; giving up, letting go;
giving away; Mp II 160,3 (amisassa -a~ amisacago
dhammassa -a~ dhammacago); l66,2o (cagaya ti
0
'-attha~); Nidd-a I 220,20 (0 -vasena muñcanti);
Sadd 346,3 (cajati ... cago pariccago -a~); 845,14.
cajjantassa in Ee at Sp 1221,2 is wr for cajantassa (Be,
Ce, Se so).
cajjitva in E e at Nidd I 303,22 and 331,4 is wr for cajitva
(Be, Ce, Se so).
cañcati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cañcati], goes, moves; Sadd 335,19
(cañcu ... gatiy~ ... -ati).
cañcala, mfn. [ts], wandering; moving to and fro;
unsteady; Abh 712 (lota~ tu -a~ cala~); 1107 (caro
caramhi -e); Ja IV 498,4· (calacalan ti -a~ sakabhavena
rhatu~ asamatth~); 498,9' (yatha esa paro ca dumo ca
-a eva~ sattan~ jlvita~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -o);
Sv 105,23 (thusarasimhi nikhatakha1_1u viya -a~); Th-a II
194,8 (puthujjanacitta~ nam' et~ -a~); Cp-a 241,16
(
0
-bhavato); Saddh 598 (in cpd);- acañcala, mfn., not
moving; steady, firm; Ja VI 293,32' (-en a sutthu
rhapitena cittena samannagato, Ce, Ee so; Be acapalena;
Se acalena); Cp-a 319,32 (adhislladi-adhirthan~ tattha
ca --ta); Saddh 317 (kata~ saggassa sopana~
sukharoh~ -a~).
cañcalati, pr. 3 sg. [intens. of calati qv; cf S. cañcalyate],
is unsteady; moves to and fro; Sadd 826,6 (kvac'
adival)l_lassa ekasarassa dvitt~ ... cailkamati -ati); -
see al so cañcalita.
cañcalita, mfn. [ts], caused to shake; disturbed; Nidd-a I
169,24 (vyadhijaramara1_1ehi e' eva labhadlhi ca loka-
dhammehi --taya calato, Ce, Se so; Be pacalitataya; Ee
calitataya; = Vism 612,w: Se calitataya; Be, Ce, Ee
pacalitataya); - see also cañcalati.
cataka, m. [ts], a sparrow; Abh 643 (kalaviitko tu -o).
catati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup varayati, Wg § 19:17,18:
vara bhara paribhasa1_1e], speaks; abuses; Sadd 353,2o
(cara bhara paribhasane: ... -ati bharati, perhaps wr).
catu, m.n. [ts], flattery; flattering words; Sadd 921,13
(mattabhedo tava ... -u caru).
catula, mfn. [ts], trembling; unsteady; constantly moving;
Mhbv 148,14 (0 -turaitganikaramukharavabadhiñkata-
dasadisaya . . . sen aya, E e so; vll carucula-; cathüla-;
batula-; -mukhararava-).
cateti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup carayati,
Wg § 33:47], splits; breaks; Dhatup 559 (cara ...
bhedane); Dhatum 785; Sadd 532,18 (cara ... vibhede:
-eti -ayati).
cal).aka, m. [ts], the chick-pea; Abh 451 (-o ca katayo);
Spk I 218,1o (katayamattiyo ti 0 -mattiyo, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se valakamattiyo) = Mp V 59,1o = Pj II 475,2o (Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se varakamattiyo);- see also cha1_1aka.
CaJ}ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ca1_1ati, Wg § 19:34], gives;
Sadd 358,14 (ca1_1a sa1_1a dane: -ati Sal)ati).
cal).!Ja, mf( -a -i)n. [ts ], l. of quick or violent temper;
impetuous, fierce, intemperate; savage, enraged;
Abh 711 (-am ugga~ khara~); 732 (-o tv accanta-
kodhano); Vin I 24,22 (ca1_1<;!' ettha nagaraja iddhima asi-
viso ghoraviso); 278,15 (raja ca -o so raja ghatapeyyasi
m~); II 194,3o (Nalagiri nama hatthl -o hoti manussa-
99
ghatako); DI 90,27 (-a bho Gotama Sakyajati, pharusa
bho Gotama Sakyajati; Sv 256,6: -a ti mananissitakopa-
yutta); MI 126,12 H Vedehika gahapatanl anivata ...
anupasanta ... ; Ps II 99,16: -I ti aso rata kibbisa);
S I1 242,2ojoll. (-assa kukkurassa nasaya~ pitta~
bhindeyyu~ eva~ hi so kukkuro bhiyyosomattaya
0
-taro assa); A IV 92,23' (pharusa ca -1 duruttavadini,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -i) = Ja II 348,5•; Pv 15:4; Ja II
349,27 (tassa mata kodhana ahosi -a pharusa akkosika
paribhasika); V 105,25* (-a aranaka gavl); Cp 3:2:12
(kara1_1ika gantva -a ludda akaru1_1a; Cp-a 191,27: -a ti
kuriira); Mp Ili 397,18 (-assa hatthissa asanne na
rhatabbam); Dhp-a IV 14,1 (madakale ... hatthino ... -a
bhavanti); - 2.jierce; violent; Ja I 450,8 (tada
Himavante -o nidagho ahosi); Sp 220,14 (ghora~ -a~
assa visan ti ghoraviso ); 1050,1 (sa kira nadi
Gijjhakurato otaritva -ena sotena vahati); Dhp-a Ili
339,7 (-o atapo ahosi); - Cal)<;lamal_l<;lala~ in E e at
Ps III 75,21 and 75,29 is wr for canda- (Be, Ce, Se so);-
atical).!Ja, fr!fn., very fierce; very savage; -a~. adv., very
fiercely, violently; Ja VI 34,17 (sa [nava] -a~ gantva
vahitu~ nasakkhi, Ce, Ee so; Be --vegena gantva; Se
--umivegena gantva); Dhp-a IV 14,2 (so pana -o yeva);
- se e also ca1_1<;!Ikata.
cal).!Jaka, mfn., see sv ca1_1<;lika.
cai}!Jati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ca1_1<;!ate, ca1_1<;!ayate,
Wg § 8:26], is angry; Dhatum 142 (ca1_1<;la ca1_1<;likke);
Sadd 356,16 (ca<;Ji kope: -ati Cal)<;lo ca1_1<;!alo ca1_1<;likkam).
cal}l}.ala, m. [S. ca1_1<;lala, ca1_1<;lala], a man of one of the
outcaste communities, an outcaste; Abh 517 (sapako
e' eva -o matailgo sapaco bhave); Vin IV 7,26 (-o si
ve1_1o si nesado si rathakaro si pukkuso si ti bhal)ati);
Sn 137 (0 -putto sopako Matailgo iti vissuto); Thi 509
(kahinti khu ta~ kama chata sunakha~ va -a); Ja III
233,3 (nassa -a kalakal)l_li adhovata~ yahi ti); IV 391,12
(dve kira -a jati~ paricchadetva sippa~ ugga1_1hanti ti);
VI 213,19* ( 0 -putto pi adhicca vede bhaseyya mante
k u salo mutima); Ap 3 77,21 (-o as' ah a~ tattha asandi-
pirhakarako); Mil5,1o (ye te brahma1_1a vessa sudda -a
pukkusa); Vism 54,17 (niraso saddhamme 0 -kumarako
viya rajje); 195,19 (asuciduggandhajegucchaparikülataya
rañño va -assa va sarlre vematta~ nama natthi);
Dhp-a II 25,18 (tass' eva nagarassa ekasmi~ dvara-
gamake -ana~ kulasahass~ parivasati); Cp-a 60,17
(ta~ -a~ katva bahinagare vasapessama ti); 154,7 foil.
(yassa gharadvare eva~ nipajjitva -o marati tena
gharena saddhi~ sattasattagharavasino -a honti ti); -
0
-jatika, mfn., a Cal)<;lala by birth; Ja VI 421 ,25';
Pv-a 175,3o (ca1_1<;lali ti -a); - 0 -bhasa,j, the cal)<;lala
dialect or language; Ja IV 391,27 foll. (so ... -aya eva~
khaJu khaJu ti aha ... so pi ... -aya niggala niggala ti
aha); - 0
-Vaipsa, m., a bamboo pole used in an
acrobatic feat; S V l68,2ojoll. (ca1_1<;lalava~siko -~
ussapetva Medakathalika~ antevasi~ amantesi, ehi
tv~ samma Medakathalike -a~ abhirühitva mama
uparikhandhe tiqhahi ti ... sotthina ca -a orohissama ti);
- --dhovana, n., the name of an acrobatic feat (when
one man balances a pole on his forehead or chin or
chest, and another man climbs up and balances on the
top of the pole; see Spk Ili 226,8foll.); DI 6,13 (te
ca~u}.alika
evarüpaq1 visükadassanaq1 anuyutta viharanti
seyyathidalTI naccaq1 gitalTI ... sobhanakaq1 --dhovanalTI
hatthiyuddhaqJ ... , so read? Be, Ce, Se caQ.galaqJ
valTISaql dhovanaq1; Ee caQ.galaqJ valTISaql dhopanalTI;
Sv 84,24 foil.: caQ.<Jalan ti ayogu)aki)a, caQ.<JalanaqJ
saQ.adhovanaki)a ti pi vadanti; vaiT~san ti veQ.UITI
ussapetva ki)analTI; dhovanan ti aqhidhovanaq1 ...
ekacce pana indajalena aWlidhovanaqJ dhovanan ti
vadanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhopanan ti) = Nidd I 366,24
(eds CaQ.<JalalTI valTISalTI dhovanaq1; Nidd-a I 392,3 foil. =
Sv); Ja IV 390,18 (te ubho pi .. . --dhovanaq1 nama
sippalTI uggaQ.hitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --dhopanalTI,
prob. wr); - 0
-Vaipsika, m., a (caQ.<Jala) bamboo
acrobat; S V l68,2o; - atical}c1iila, m., surpassing a
caQ.<Jala; ? an absolute outcaste; ? Sp 739,2o (yo pi -o si
atibrahmaQ.o si duqhacaQ.<Jalo si dughabrahmaQ.O si ti
adini vadati).
cal}c1alika,f [caQ.<Jali +ka; cf S. lex. id.], a woman of one
of the outcaste communities; Ja VI 421,12* (yalTI yalTI
kami kamayati api -a:m api; 421 ,14·: -a:m api ti -aiT~ api).
cal}c1ali, f [ts], a woman of one of the outcaste
communities, an outcaste; A Ill 226,5 (so brahmaQ.ilTI
yeva gacchati .. . na suddiiT~ na -iiT~ na nesadiiT~ ... );
Pv 26:13 (-I kapaQ.a honti); Ja V 306,14* (veQ.i tvam asi
-I adu si kulagandhini); Mhv 33:2 (ativa carurüpaya
satto -iya ahu).
cal}c1ika, caQ.<Jiya (and CaQ.<Jaka ?), mfn. [caQ.<Ja + ika;
cf S. caQ.<Jika, a name of Durga], of quick or violent
temper; intemperate; angry; Vv 33:71 (sassulTI cahaq1
sasuraq1 ca -e kodhane ca pharuse ca anusüyika
upaghasim; Vv-a 147,11: -e ti CaQ.<Je); Pv 15:5 (yatha
tvalTI -a ahu); Ja III 259,11* (maharajass' ahaq1 dhita
Virüpakkhassa caQ.<Jiya; 259,w: caQ.<Jiya ti kodhana,
kodhabhavena hi mayhalTI caQ.<JI ti namaq1 kariiT~su);
Nidd-a 1 322,9 (-o vuccati CaQ.<Jo thaddhapuggalo, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee CaQ.<Jako) = As 258,13 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
CaQ.<Jikko); - acal}c1ika, mfn., not intemperate; good-
tempered; As 396,1 (-assa bhavo acaQ.gikkaiT~, Be, Se so;
Ce --bhavo; Ee acaQ.<Jabhavo).
cal}c1ikata, see sv CaQ.<Jikata.
cal}c1ikka, n. [from CaQ.<Jika? AMg id.], quick or violen!
temper; intemperance, fierceness; anger, rage; Nidd I
215,28 ( ... virodho pativirodho -aqJ asuropo
anattamanata cittassa, ayalTI vuccati kodho; Nidd-a I
322,w: CaQ.<Jiko vuccati CaQ.<Jo thaddhapuggalo, tassa
bhavo -aqJ, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee CaQ.<Jako vuccati CaQ.go) f.
Dhs 418 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr CaQ.<JittaiT~) f. Vibh 86,22 f.
Pp 18,15 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr CaQ.<JittaiT~); Vism 470,17
(doso ... 0 -lakkhaQ.o pahatasiviso viya); Dhp-a 11 227,15*
(ussüraseyyaq1 alasyaiT~ -aiT~ ... etalTI brahmaQ.a sevassu,
anatthaq1 te bhavissati); Utt-vn 244 (ya hi 0 -bha:vena
gaQ.alTI tu paribhasati); Sadd 356,16 (ca<Ji kope: caQ.<Jati
CaQ.<Jo CaQ.<Jalo -aqJ); - acal}c1ikka, n. lack of anger or
fierceness; good temper, forbearance; Dhs 1341
( ... adhivasanata -aq1 anasuropo .. . khanti);
Vism 465,1o (adoso --lakkhano); As 396,1 (acaQ.gika-
bhavo -aiT~, Ce so; Ee acaQ.<Jabhavo; Be, Se acaQ.gikassa
bhiivo).
cal}c1igata, see sv CaQ.<Jikata.
cal}c1itta in Ee at Dhs 418 and Pp 18,15 is wr for
100 catu(r)
caQ.<Jikka qv.
Cal}c1iya, see sv CaQ.<;lika.
cal}c1i, se e sv cal).<;! a.
cal}c1ikata, CaQ.<;likata, mfn. [pp of *caQ.<Ja + karoti;
S. caQ.<;likfl:a], angered, enraged; in a temper; Vin IV
310,2o (ya pana bhikkhuni -a gal).aql paribhaseyya,
pacittiyan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee caQ.<;likata; 310,23: -a
nama kodhana vuccati); V 65,38 (-aya gaQ.aql
paribhasantiya pacittiyalTI kattha paññattan ti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee caQ.<;likataya); 158,7• (ma kho turito abhaQ.i ma
kho caQ.<;likato bhaQ.i, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce CaQ.<;likkato); Ja I
301,16 (so pana parigaQ.hanto tassa dussllabhavalTI ñatva
-o cittavyiikulataya sattaqhadivase upaghanalTI na
agamasi, Se so; Be, Ce bhaQ.<;lito; Ee bhaQ.<;liketo);
Sp 1308,10 (akkosacaQ.<JI macchari ti bhikkhulTI
akkoseyya va paribhaseyya va CaQ.<;iikata gal).aql
paribhaseyya); Mp I 278,12 (eko puriso taiT~ ativiya
CaQ.<;likataiT~ gacchantaiT~ disva, Be so; Ce, Ee caQ.<Ji-
gataiT~, prob. wr; Se CaQ.<;litaqJ); 11 195,19 (caQ.<;likatassa
caraQ.alTI); - acal}c1ikata, mfn., not angry; good-
tempered; V in V 163,32 (-ena bhavitabbaq1 vacana-
kkhamena mettacittena bhavitabbam).
catati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup catati.' catate, Wg § 21:5],
asks, begs; Dhatum 529 (cata yacane); Sadd 362,2o (cata
yacane: -ati, so read? eds vata ... vatati); - se e also
cadati.
catate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup crtati, Wg § 28:35], hurts;
ties; Sadd 362,27 (cati hiiT~saganthesu: ... -ati).
catassanna~p, catasso, see sv catu(r).
catu(r), mfn., num. [S. catur] (nom.!acc. m. cattaro, caturo;
n. cattari; f catasso (and caturo); instr. m.n. catühi,
catuhi (and catubbhi); f catühi, catuhi; gen.!dat.
m.n. catunnalTI; f catunnaq1 (and catassannalTI, see
Sadd 288,5-29 ); loe. m.n.f catüsu, catusu; iic catur-
before a vowel except u [which is afien rhythmically
lengthenedj, catu- (and catura- ? see caturavimana)
before a consonant; catu(r) + v- > catubb-), four; V in I
4,16joll. (cattaro maharajano .. . catuddisa cattaro
selamaye patte bhagavato upanamesulTI); 58,11
(anujanami bhikkhave upasampadentena cattaro nissaye
acikkhituiT~); 112,13 (cattari parajikani uddisitva); 115,1o
(anujanami bhikkhave catühi pañcahi patikkosituiT~, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee catuhi); 124,6 (anujanami bhikkhave
catunnaq1 patimokkhaq1 uddisitun ti); 11 239,18 (cattaro
'me VaQ.Q.a khattiya brahmaQ.a vessa sudda); 264,6
(catasso pañca bhikkhuniyo ovadaq1 gacchanti); V 217,2
(sailghadisesa caturo bhaveyyulTI); DI 13,7 (catühi
vatthühi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce catuhi); 102,2 (imahi catühi
disahi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee catuhi); 215,24 (cattaro
mahabhüta); 11 49,3 (catüsu vassesu nikkhantesu, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee catusu); 123,3o (cattaro 'me bhikkhave
mahapadese desessami); III 173,6* (danta idha ... caturo
dasa 'ssa mukhaja susaQ.thita; Sv 938,23: caturo dasa ti
cattaro dasa cattañsaiT~); 222,4 (cattari jhanani); M 1
213,6 (so catunnaq1 parisanaq1 dhammaq1 deseti, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se catassannaq1); 11 24,4 (catühi ... dhammehi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catuhi); III 30,4 (imesu catüsu
voharesu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee catusu); SI 43,2• (etesu
dhammesu thito catüsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catusu,
unmetrical); 148,1* (tayo ca supaQ.Q.a caturo ca haq1sa);
catu(r)
V 342,6 (ra.ja cakkavatti catunnarp d!panarp
issariyadhipacca~ rajjarp karetva); A II 154,33
(imasa~ ... catassannarp patipadanarp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
catunnarp); V 63,9 (imasarp catunnarp patipadanarp, eds
so); Dhp 190 (cattari ariyasaccani sammapaññaya
passati); 273 (maggan' anhaiJ.giko senho saccanarp
caturo pada); Ud 91,29 (pañca pi ... cattaro pi ... tl!.li pi
bhante Savatthiya manussa devasika~ kalarp karonti,
Be, Ce so; Se tayo pi; Ee cattari pi); Sn 229 (catubbhi
vatehi asampakampiyo); 969 (caturo sahetha parideva-
dhamme); 1122 (disa catasso vidisa catasso); Vv 32:7
(catubbhi thanehi visesam ajjhaga); 53:3 (yattha ca
dinnamahapphalam lihu 1 catusu suclsu purisayugesu,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se catüsu); 67:5 (adasi~ caturo phale);
Pv 10:12 (uddharp catühi masehi); 11:4 (assatarlrathena
catubbhi yuttena); 24:5 (pasada . . . abhenti samanta
caturo disa; Pv-a 157,17 foll.: samantato catasso pi
disayo); Thi 456 (cattaro vinipata dve ca gatiyo); Ja I
204,4* (caturo ca mahanta; 204,17': cattaro maharajano
vutta); 414,5* (catubbhi agh' ajjhagama; 414,8'foll.:
samuddantare catasso vimanapetiyo labhitva tlihi
asantugho . . . aghadhigato si ti attho ); III 51,26 (te
cattaro pi par_1gita ekato vasanta); 481,1 * (yavata caturo
d!pa sasamudda sapabbata); IV 10,23* (ete me caturo
vare; 10,30': ete nikkodhadike caturo mayharp vare dehl
ti vadati); V 398,22* (kañña catasso kanakattacüpama);
VI 261,2* (catubbhi dhammehi samaiJ.gibhütarp); 512,13*
(yacito patipadesi catunnarp caturo haye); Nidd I 93,16
(catüsu maggesu); Bv 2:124 (tath' eva catusu bhümlsu
sllani paripüraya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se catüsu); Ap 42,22
(caturo ca phale sabbe; Ap-a 282,18foll.: caturo ca phale
sabbe ti cattari samaññaphalani sabbani sacchi-akasin ti
attho); 553,9 (parislihi ca catühi, Be, Se so; Ce catuhi so;
Ee catassohi); Dhs 1096 (cattaro asava); Kv 274,21
(catühi phassehi catühi vedanlihi); 322,3o (atthi
catunnarp nibbananarp uccanlcata, Be, Se so; Ee wr
cattunnarp); As 58,16 (tesu paccayasamaggl samavayo
khar_1o pana eko va navamo ñeyyo cakkani caturo pi va);
- catu(r) is frequently found as the first member of
dvigu n.sg. cpds, most of which are not listed he re; -
(catur)-a~sa, mfn., see sv caturassa 1 below;
(catur) 0 -aóga, mf( -I ?)n. and n. [catu(r) + aiJ.ga2]
l. (mfn.) consisting of four parts; with four factors or
facets; Abh 71 (-arp tama~); Ja V 251,11* (tato ca raja
payasi senaya -iya) =VI 433,w; Sp 171,14 (andhakare ti
kii!apakkhacatuddasl-aggharatti-ghanavanasar_lgamegha-
pata1ehi -e tamasi) = Sv 229,2 (-e tame, Be, Ce, E e so;
Se --tame); Ps III 194,24 (kamarp taco ca ti imina -arr
viriya~ dasseti, Ce, Ee so; Be --viriya~; Se --viriyarp);
Saddh 64 (parassa daresu -o atikkamo ); - 2. (i) (n.) the
four factors (of viriya); Spk II 49,21 (idani 'ssa -arr
dassento kama~ taco ca ti adim liha); Dip 1:6 (-e
patitthaya nisidi purisuttamo);- (ii) (n.pl.) four parts;
four characteristics; Ja II 192,12 (katamehi -ehi
samannagato si ti); IV 497,18" (caturaiJ.ginin ti hatthi-
adihi -ehi samannagatarp); Bv-a 126,9 (--samannagate
sannipate ... -ani nama sabbe va ehibhikkhü honti ...
par_1~arasüposathadivaso ca ti imani cattari aiJ.gani); -
(catur)-añgasamannagata, mfn., conszstmg of four
parts or aspects; with four Jactors or aspects; M I 77,23
101 catu(r)
(abhijanami ... -arr brahmacariyarp carita; Ps 11 43,16:
catubbidhassa dukkarassa katatta -an ti vuttarp); Ja I
390,12 (-a~ brahmacariyavasarp vasi~. tapassi sudarp
homi paramatapassi, 1ükho . . . jegucchi . . . pavivitto
sudarp homi paramavivitto ti); 11 192,8 (ayarp ...
Chattap~i -o); VI 169,18 (-arp uposatha~ adhitthaya);
Nidd I 355,17 (yada... suriyo ca atthaiJ.gamito hoti
kaJapakkho ca uposatho hoti tibbo ca vanasar_1go hoti
maha ca akalamegho abbhutthito hoti, evarüpe pi -e
andhakare); Pet 139,w (dutiyarp jhana~ -arr piti-
sukhena cittekaggataya ajjhattarp sampasadanena imani
cattari aiJ.gani uppadetva sampadetva viharati); -
(catur)-añgi(n), mfn., having four parts; consisting of
four parts; Abh 359 (sena hi -in!); Vin I 241,4 (-iniya
senaya ... payasi); SI 82,25 (Ajatasattu Vedehiputto
-ini~ sena~ sannayhitva; Spkl 154,3: -inin ti hatthi-
assarathapattisaiJ.khatehi catühi aiJ.gehi samannagata~);
Pv 38:4; Ja V 319,19* (tato ca raja payasi senaya -ini;?
319,23'foll.: -in! ti -iniya senaya agamasi; cfJa V
251,11*: payasi senaya caturaiJ.giya; see T. Oberlies,
2002, p. 195; or read sena ca ... ?); 322,18* (hatthi-assa-
rathapatti sena ca -ini samantanupariyanti, Be so; Ee, Se
hatthi-assarathapattisenaya -ini samanta anupariyati [Se
anupariyanti]; Ce hatthi assaratha pattl senaya -ini
samanta anupariyanti) f. Ap 22,11 (hatthi assa ratha patti
sena ca -ini); Vism 146,31; Mhv 18:29;
(catur)-añgika, mfn., consisting of four parts or factors;
with four characteristics; Dhs 147 (-o maggo hoti);
Pet 184,18 (ida~ dutiya~ jhanarp -a~); Sp 149,22
([dutiyarp jhana~] sampasadadihi -an ti veditabbarp);
Sv 418,2 (Vipassissa bhagavato pathamasannipato -o
ahosi); Pj I 85,26 (-a viya sena); Saddh 58; -
(catur)-añginika, mfn. [caturaiJ.gini + ka2 ?], consisting
of four parts; Bv-a 163,23 (-e sannipate);
(catur)-añgiya- in Ee at It-a 11 171,9 is prob. wr; Be, Ce,
Se caturaiJ.ganadi-; - (catur)-añgula, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn. measuring four fingers' breadth, measuring
four inches; Vin I 46,29 (civararp sarpharantena -arp
kar_1~arp ussaretva clvararp sa~aritabbarp ma majjhe
bhailgo ahosi ti; Sp 979,11: kar_1~a~ --ppam~arp
atireka~ katva); S 11 178,13 (-a~ -arp ghatika~
karitva); Th 1137 (vutthamhi deve -e ti~e sampupphite
meghanibhamhi kanane); Ja I 507,12* (ekapar_1~o ayarp
rukkho na bhumya -o; 507,15': bhümito --mattarp pi na
vagghito); VI 534,7* (tülaphassasamüpama t1~an1
nativattanti samanta -a; ? cf534,2w: ti~ani samantato
-an' eva vattanti tato pana uttari na vagghanti);
Kkh 2 96,15 (tiriyantena pana --ta veditabba); -
2. (n.) (something) measuring four inches; a four-inch
piece; Ja IV 210,21* (issassa upakhandhamha okkacca
-arp tena nemi~ pariharesi);- -arp, adv., ata distance
of four inches; ? Ja V 320,15* (kassa kadambayo kajo
vehasarp -arp a~sarp asamphusarp eti udaharassa
gacchato ); - --pacchima, mfn., measuring at least four
finger breadths; Vin II 138,13 (anujanami bhikkhave
--pacchima~ dantakaghan ti); (catur)-
añgulika, mfn., measuring four fingers' breadth;
Thi 499 (pitusu -a ghaP,ka pitupitusv eva na ppahonti);
(catur)-adhikaral}a, n.pl., the four disputes;
Ap-a 294,zo• (vivadarp anuvadarp ca apattadhikara~a~
catu(r)
tatha kiccadhikarm:ta¡p. e' eva -a mata); - (catur)-
adhitfhana, -adhighana, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) having
0
four supports (or resolutions); M III 239,!1 (puriso ...
-o; Ps V 51,14: -o ti ettha adhiqhana¡p. vuccati patiqha,
catupatiqhano ti attho ); 240,9 (-o aya¡p. . . . puriso ...
ki¡p. e' eta¡p. pa~icca vutta¡p., paññadhiqhano
saccadhitthano cagadhiqhano upasamadhi~~ano); -
2. (n.) the four supports (or resolutions ); It-a I 14,7
(--paripilñ); 14,9 (--samudagatassa tathagatassa);
Cp-a 324,25 (abhisambodhiya¡p. -a¡p. paripm:n;an ti keci,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se caturadhiqhana¡p.); - (catur)-
adhippayika, mfn. [from catu[r] + adhippaya 1], with
four possible meanings or interpretations; Sadd 918,!1
([pada¡p.] -a¡p. yatha: eko ayano ekayano, ekena
ayitabbo ekayano, ekassa ayano ekayano, ekasmi¡p.
ayano ekayano ice evamadi); - (catur)-anta,f [from
catu(r) + anta 1], "bordered on all four sides, bordered
by the four (oceans) ", the earth; S v 249,32 (-aya issaro
ti caturanto, catusamuddantaya catubbidhad!pabhusitaya
ca pa~haviya issaro ti attho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
caturantaya issaro) = Ps III 365,!5/oll. (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr caturanto) =It-a I 77,11 = Pj II 449,IR;- caturanto in
E e at Ap 34,12 and 107,4 is wr for caturanto (Be, Ce, Se
so); - see also caturanta; - (catur)-apassena,
0
-apassena, mfn., having four supports; D III 269,IOfoll.
(bhikkhu pañcaiigavippah!no hoti . . . ekarakkho -o ...
sati.khay' eka¡p. pa~isevati saiikhay' eka¡p. adhivaseti
sailkhay' eka¡p. vinodeti saiikhay' eka¡p. parivajjeti
eva¡p. ... bhikkhu -o hoti); A V 29,12; Nidd-a I 88,20
(paññaya pa~isevanaparivajjanavinodanapajahanana¡p.
vasena catunna¡p. apassayana¡p. ito e' ito ca
aparivattamanana¡p. vasena -o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee catur-
apasseno); - (catur)-apaya, n., the four unhappy
destinies in sa¡p.sara; Ap-a 124,27 (-e dukkha¡p.
anubhavitva); 406,2R (-a¡p. adisva devamanussa-
sampattiyo anubhavitva); (catur)-asita, mfn.,
characterised by 84, plus 84; Tikap-a 237,20 (-ani satta
satani); - (catur)-asiti, -i¡p.,f, num. [cf BHS caturaslti;
AMg caurasli¡p.; Pkt caurasli], 84; A IV 393,17 H
suvm;l).apatisahassani adasi rilpiyapilrani); Th 1024 H
sahassani); Ja II 311,16 (-i vassasahassani kumarak!)a¡p.
ki)i); Ap 511,1 (nava gathasatan!ha -im eva ca);
Kv 205,II; Sp 50,3 (-i¡p. ca viharasahassani passati);
Mil 350,17 (-iya pal).asahassana¡p. dhammabhisamayo
ahosi); Mhv 5:78; Sadd 800,12 (cullaslti sahassani -i
sahassani); - see also cullaslti; - (catur)-assa\
0
-a¡p.sa, mfn. and m. (or n.) [catu(r) + assa2 or a¡p.sa3],
l. (mfrz.) (i) four-comered, quadrangular; four-sided,
square; M III 96,28 (-a pokkharm:tl); Ja V 49,2 (-a¡p.
ava~a¡p. khal).itva); Vl518,29' (so dakkhasi
pokkharal).i¡p. ... sama¡p. ca -a¡p. ca); Dhs 617 (rilpa¡p. ...
vaqa¡p. parimm:t<;lala¡p. -a¡p. cha)a¡p.sa¡p., Ce so; Be, Ee,
Se catura¡p.sa¡p.; As 317,23: catilhi a¡p.sehi yutta¡p. -a¡p.,
Ce so; Be, Ee, Se catura¡p.sa¡p.); Sp 532,6 (majjhe -a¡p.
gabbha¡p. katva); 1046,17 ([slma¡p.] -a¡p. va tikol).a¡p. va
sammannantena); Ps II 258,4foll. (tisso katha ekana)ika
-a nisinnavattika ti . . . apm:t<;litagopalaka¡p. dassetva
apm:t<;litabhikkhu¡p. . . . Pm:t<;litagopalaka¡p. . . . pal).<;iita-
bhikkhu¡p. dassetva ti catukka¡p. bandhitva kathana¡p. -a
nama); V 42,1 (manapani vata akkharani samaslsani
102 catu(r)
samapantlni -anl ti, Be, Se so; Ee catura¡p.sanl ti; Ce
caturassaranl ti); Pj II 265,2 (-e va aqha¡p.se va
thambhe ); Vibh-a 497,3 (kidiso ... jlvo ... -o cha)a¡p.so
agha¡p.so ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se catura¡p.so); -
(ii) regular, four-square; ? with full measure; ?
Sp 1202,14 (na bhikkhave ayatakena ti ... -ena vattena
parimm:t<;lalani padavyañjanani dassetabbani;
Sp-~ [Be] III 381,10: -ena vattena ti paripUI).l).ena
uccarm:tavattena; Vjb [Be] 522,9: --vatta¡p. nama
catuppadagathavatta¡p .);- 2. (m. or n.) a four-cornered
figure, a square or rectangle; V in III 232,23 (vaqa¡p. va
-a¡p. va chinditva ekadese va santharitabba¡p.; or 111:frz. ?);
- catura¡p.saso hitaya in Ee at Pv-a 189,24 is wr; read
caturassasobhitaya with Be, Ce, Se; - (catur)-
assa2, mfn. [catu(r) + assa3], yoked with four horses,
four-horsed; Thi 229 (iddhiya abhinimmitva -a¡p.
ratha¡p.; Thi-a 190,21: catilhi assehi yojita¡p. ratha¡p.); -
(catur)-assaka, mfn., four-comered, quadrangular;
Abh 209 (pasado -o); Vin II 134,6 (chabbaggiya
bhikkhil massu¡p. kappapenti . . . golomika¡p. karapenti
-a¡p. karapenti; Sp 1211,4: -an ti catukol).a¡p.); Ap 314,5
(kappasatasahassani pallaiika -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
caturassara, prob. wr); - (catur)-assara in Ee at
Ap 314,5 is prob. wr for caturassaka qv; caturassara- in
Ce, Ee at Sv 84,2o and Dhp-a I 126,6 is prob. wr for
caturassa- (Be, Se so); - (catur)-assavalli,f, a kind of
creeper; ? Sp 762,s; 766,2o; Spk II 293,6 (in cpd); -
(cat')-uttari, ind., with an addition of four, plus four,
Vin V 88,34' (apattl cattarlsa -i; Sp 1313,1: etani sabbani
pi catucattalisa sikkhapadani vuttani) = Kkh2 373,6•; -
(cat')-ussada, mfn., with an abundance of four things;
with four protuberances; Ja IV 309,26' (-a¡p. gamavara¡p.
samiddha¡p. dinna¡p. hi so bhuñjatu Vasavena;
3ll,rfoll.: -an ti... manussehi ... dhaññena ...
daruhi ... udakena ti catilhi ussanna¡p. --samannagatan ti
attho); 422,5• (dammi ... -a¡p. ca pallaiika¡p.
ummapupphasirinnibha¡p., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se caturassa¡p.;
422,12·: -an ti caturussada¡p., catu-uss!sakan ti attho, Be,
Ce so; Ee caturassadam; Se caturassan ti
catutthussada¡p.);- (cat)-üha, (cat)-uha, m.n. [catu(r) +
aha(n)], a period of four days; D III 90,4 (satto ... sali¡p.
ahasi sakid eva -aya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catuhaya); S II
191,4 (pabbata¡p. -ena arohanti -ena orohanti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee catuhena); - catilha, within four days; Vin III
204,32 (-a karetabba¡p.); - --pañcaha, m., a period of
four or five days; V in I 91,35 (--pañcaha¡p. agametu¡p.);
IV 280,19 (na sibbapanaya ussukka¡p. kareyya aññatra
--pañcaha; 280,29: aññatra --pañcaha ti ~hapetva
--pañcaha¡p.); Mil229,6 (--pañcaha¡p. tela¡p. payeti, Be
so; Ce, Ee catuha-; Se -a¡p. pañcaha¡p.);
--pa~icchanna, mfn., concealed for four days; Vin II
5l,zo;- catilhattha- in Ee, Se at Sp 891,2 and 895,5 is
wr for catuhattha- (Be, Ce so); - (catu)-kkarpsa, mfn.
[catu(r) + ka¡p.sa 1] worthfour ka¡p.sas; Vin-vn 2123;-
--parama, mfn., worth at the most four ka¡p.sas; Vin IV
255,29 (garupavural).a¡p. pana bhikkhuniya cetapentiya
--parama¡p. cetapetabba¡p.; 256,1: so)asa-
kahapm:tagghanaka¡p. cetapetabba¡p.; Sp 919,1:
--paraman ti ettha ka¡p.so nama catukahapal).iko hoti,
tasma padabhajane so)asakahapm:tagghanakan ti
catu{r)
vuttarp); Sp 1340,13; Vin-vn 2123;- 0 -(k)kai}I.ta\ mfn.,
heard by four ears only; Abh 352 (manto . . . -o
dvlgocam); Ja VI 391,23 (-o yeva manto bhavissati);
Ps 111 351,22 (ayarp raja sama!).ena Gotamena saddhirp
2
--mantarp mantetva); - 0
-(k)kal}l}a , mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) four-comered; M III 167,15 (mahanirayo -o
catudvaro) t Pv 10:13; Ja III 255,19* (-arp va kedararp
yada te pathavi siya); - 2. (n.) the four comers;
Mhv 30:94 (ph~ikagghiye -e ekeka ca mahiimaQ.i); -
0
-kal}l}aka, mfn., having four comers visible;? V in 11
137,6 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü gihinivattharp nivasenti
hatthisoQ.9akarp ... -arp ... ; Sp 1212,8: -arp nama upari
dve heghato dve ti evarp cattaiO ka!).Q.e dassetva
nivattharp); - 0 -kkama, mfn., four-footed; going in
four directions; ? Vv 64:8 (va)I . . . sahita -a;
Vv-a 278,16: catühi padehi kamanti gacchantl ti);
Pv 11:3 (kuñjarena setena nagena -ena; Pv-a 57,26: -ena
ti catuppadena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catuppadena); Ap 50,9
(migaraja -o; Ap-a 301,6: -o ti catuhi disahi kamo
ganturp samattho);- 0 -(k)kahiipal}ika, mfn. worthfour
kahapa!).as, equal to four kahapa!).as; Sp 919,2 (karpso
2 sañrayantarp); As 60,15 (patirüpadesavasadiko ca
nama -o hoti); Kkh 306,18; - 0 -(k)kutika, mfn. [from
catu(r) + kutf], consisting of four houses; V in III 46,24
(-o pi gamo);- 0 -kuttika, -kmJ<Jika, mfn. [see ku99a],
with four walls; Ja 111 243,29'foll. ( 0 -kugikanirayo nama
kataro ti vutte matukucchim eva vatturp vagati ...
matukucchiyarp... ito e' ito ca ganturp na sakka
atisambadhe okase catukotena catusailkutiten' eva hutva
acchitabbarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -kuQ.9ikanirayo);
Sv 524,1o C-ku99ike gehe, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -kugake);
0
-
0
-(k)kui].<Jika, mfn. [cf BHS catu~kumbhika], on
one's hands and knees, on all fours; D III 6,9 (acelo
Korakkhattiyo kukkuravatiko -o chama nikiQ.Q.am
bhakkhasarp mukhen' eva khadati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-kkoQ.9ikarp; Sv 819,zo: -o ti catusailghatito dve jiil).üni
dve ca kappare bhümiyarp thapetva vicarati, Ee so; Be
catusailghattito; Ce catusailghatiko; Se catusailghagiko);
MI 79,15 (Ps 11 47,4: dve hatthe dve ca ja!).!).Ukani
bhümiyarp thapetva evarp -o upasailkamitva ti attho );
A 111 l88,1s (yannünaharp -o nipatitva gopltakarp
0
pivitva ... , Be, Ee so; Ce 0 -guQ.9iko; Se -kuQ.thiko);
Pv 27:4 (-o bhavitvana); - 0 -kulika, mfn., containing
four households; Mp IV 51,22 (-e game );
0
-kota, mfn., bent in four places;? Ja III 244,2·
(atisambadhe okase -ena catusailkutiten' eva hutva
acchitabbarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -kuQ.9ena); -
0
-kotika, mfn., four-pointed, four-pronged; having four
top edges; Vism 251,14 ([danta] catumüla -a) t Pj I 44,s
(-a catumülika, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -koti); Ps 11 112,23
(imesarp vasena -a suññata kathita); Ud-a 114,1s; -
0
-kol}a, mfn., with four comers, four angles; Sp 886,9
(siilghatakan ti -arp va tiko!).arp va maggasamodhana-
ghanarp); 1211,4; Pv-a 52,18 (catukkaQ.Q.an ti -arp); -
0
-kkhattmp, ind., four times; V in IIl 221,36; Thl 37
(-urp pañcakkhatturp vihara upanikkhamirp);
Sadd 868,11 (cattaro vara -urp); - 0 -khaQ<Jika, mfn.
[from catu(r) + khaQ.9a], consisting of four parts, four
pieces; Cp 3:2:11 (sisarp tatth' eva chinditva katvana
-arp; Cp-a 191,21: caturo khaQ.9e katva);
0
-(g)gul}a, mfn.,four-fold; four times; foldedfour times;
103 catu{r)
of four thicknesses; Vin I 290,13 (anujanami
bhikkhave ... utuddhatanarp dussanarp -arp sailghatirp);
D 11 135,12* (-arp patthara me nipajjarp, Ce, Ee so; Be
santhara; Se santhari me nipajjirp); Ja I 213,6 (Ánando
satthu nisidanatthaya -arp sailghatirp paññapesi);
Sp 1218,16 (kambalam eva -arp va pañcagu!).arp va
pakkhipitva); Saddh 240; - 0 -gul}ita, mfn., multiplied
by four; Vibh-a 123,29; - 0 -gui].<Jika in Ce, Ee, Se at
Mp III 296,17 foil. is prob. wr for catukuQ.9iko (Be so);
-
0
-Cakka, (mj)n. and n., (mfn.) (that) which has four
postures, or four limbs, or four attainments (ie the
body ); (n.) the four attainments or means; S I !6,2* (-arp
navadvararp; Spk I 53,2: -an ti catu-iriyapatharp) quoted
Pet 86,23 (87,2foll.: -an ti cattaro va hatthapada ... atha
va -an ti cattaro upadana); A II 32,3 (cattar' imani
bhikkhave cakkani yehi samannagatanarp deva-
manussanarp -arp vattati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se pavattati;
Mp III 63,17: -arp vattatl ti cattari sampatticakkani
vattanti ghatiyanti yeva ti attho, Be so; Se ghagiyanti
yeva ti; Ce, Ee vattanti pavattanti ghatfyanti yeva ti);
Sp 481,23 (tumhakarp idarp -arp navadvararp
--sailkhato okasaghena khaQ.o vutto);- 0 -cattiirisa(Ip),
o -cattalisa(rp), o -cattiqisa(rp), f num. and mfn.
(nom.!acc. -a, -arp), l. (f.) 44; DI 30,26 (-aya vatthühi,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se o -catta)Isaya); S 11 56,32 (-arp vo
bhikkhave ñaQ.avatthüni desissami, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
o -catta)Isarp); Patis I 139,3o ( 0 -catta)Isaya akarehi);
Kv 219,8 (-aya ñiil).ehi, Be, Ee so; Se 0 -cattalisaya);
Vism 330,26 ( 0 -cattiqisarp pi sañña); - 2. (mfn.) the
44th; Ap 396,13 (ekaviharivaggo -o, Ee so; Se
0
0
-cattaliso; Be, Ce -cattalisamo);
0
-cattiilisama, mfn., the 44th; Ap-a 487,3 (-e vagge, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce 0 -catta)Isatimavagge); - 0 -cara, mfn.,
going about or living in a group of four, Spk 11 5,11
(bhikkhü .. . ekacara dvicara ticara -a ... );
0
-Ciiri(n), mfn., going on four (feet), four-footed; Ps III
24,7* ( -1 va kesari) = Spk 111 49,17* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
catucari; Spk-t [Be] II 336,26: catühi padehi cara ti ti -I)
= Ud-a414,25* (eds carucañ); - 0 -ja, mfn. [catu(r) +
ja2], born from four things; Vism 452,2;
0
-(j)jiita, mfn. and n. [cf S. caturjata], of four kinds; an
aggregate of four kinds (of fragrant substances);
Ap 582,7 (-ena gandhena nicayitva tam ighakarp); -
--samayojita, mfn., combined withfour kinds offragrant
substances; Ps IV 228,6 (--samayojitassa
haricandanassa gandho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se catujjati-; =
Sv 627,1: Be, Ee catujjati-, Ce, Se catujati-); -
0
-(j)jiitigandha, m., -ii, m.pl., (an aggregate oj) four
kinds of fragrant substances; Abh 147 (kuilkumarp
e' eva yavanapuppharp ca tagararp tatha turukkho ti -a);
Ja 1 265,28 (--samuggarp aharitva, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
catujjatiya-); 11291,10 (-ehi bhümilepanarp akarpsu, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se catujatika-); III 244,26' (na -ehi vilimpitva,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr -arp); 291 ,1o· (--vilepanasadisan ti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catujatika-); Sv 654,5 (-arp pirpsati, Ee
so; Be catujjatiya-; Ce catujatiya-; Se catujjatika-);
Spk III 134,7 (-ehi paribhaQ.9arp karetva); Ap-a 543,11
(-en a vilimpesi); - o -(j)jiitiyagandha, o -U)jatika-
gandha, m., -ii, m.pl. [cfS. caturjataka], (an aggregate
catu(r)
of) four kinds of fragrant substances; Ja I 178,22
( -jatikagandhiipalittayam eva bhiimiyaJ11 tighati, Ce, Ee
0
so; Be catujjatika-; Se --vilittaymp); IV 377,28 (bhiimirp
ca -ehi opuñchetva); V 79,9- (malarp ca dibbarp -a111 ca
ucchadanaJ11 ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mala ca dibbarp catu-
jatigandha-ucchadanaJ11 ca); Ps III 18,9 (-ehi limpitva,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -jatigandhehi); Spk III 45,1 (-ehi
limpapetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catuhi jatiyagandhehi,
prob, wr); Dhp-a III 136,2 (-ehi paribha!).<;laJ11 katva, Be
so; Ce, Se catujjatika-; E e catujatika-); Pv-a 127,8
(-' -adikaJ11 gandharp); Bv-a 277,9 (rajabhavana111
0
-jatikagandhena upalimpitva); - 0
-tála, mfn, or
-arp, ind. [catu(r) + tala 1], measuring the height offour
palm-trees,- to the height of four palm-trees; M 1 187,25
(-arp pi udakaJ11 SaJ).thati) f. A IV 101,25;- 0 -tálisa(qt),
0 2
-táJisa(qt), num. [catu(r) + tal!sa ], 44; Ap 276,8 (eka111
gathasata111 e' eva -am eva ca); - 0 -(t)tiqtsa, n. num,
and mfn., l. (num.) 34; Vism 619,8 (adito tettirpsa
vassani pathamavayo nama, tato -a majjhimavayo
nama); Sp 26,22 (brahmajalad!ni -a suttani); 335,3;
Th-a 1 4,1o (tirpsanipate eka theñ -a gatha); Ap 105,14
(-e kappasate);- 2. (mfn.). the 34th; Ap 137,1 (-mnhi
kappmnhi raja asirp); 276,9 (gandhodakavaggo -o, Ee,
Se so; Be catutirpsatimo; Ce catuttirpsatimo); -
--kkhatturp, ind., 34 times; Ap-a310,25 (eds so, but ad
Ap 53,7: eds catuttirpsati-); - 0 -ttiqtsati, num., 34; -
--kkhatturp, ind., 34 times; Ap 53,7; 58,17;
--vara, m.pl., 34 times; Ap-a 320,zs;
0
-ttiqtsatima, mfn., the 34th; Mhv p. 288,12 (-o
paricchedo); - 0
-ddasa, num. and mfn. [catu(r) +
1
dasa ], l. (num.) 14; D II 206,9* (ito satta tato satta
saJ11sarani -a); SI 170,11 (-a balivadda naqha honti);
V 109,24 (atthi .. . pariyayo Ya!11 pariyayaJ11 agamma
pañca nlvaraJ).a dasa honti satta bojjhali.ga -a ti); Ja II
56,1 * (Upasiqhakanamanarp sahassani -a asmirp padese
da<;l<;lhani); Ap 55,1o (vittharena -aJ11); 117,10 (-a te
rajano); 278,27 (-esu kappesu devaloke ramirp ahaJ11);
327,19 (-ani kappani devarajjaJ11 karissati); PsI 119,9
( -anna111 piira!).l eka ratti); Mhv 2:8; Sadd 800,6
(cuddasa coddasa -a); - see also cuddasa, coddasa; -
2. (mfn.) the 14th; Ap 114,7 (-amhi kappmnhi caturo
asurp uggata); 192,10 (ito -e kappe); Mhv 29:14 (asa)ha-
sukkapakkhassa divasamhi -e); - catuddasirp in Ee at
Vv-a 71,24 is wr for catuddasirp (Be, Ce, Se and Vv 15:6
so); - se e also catuddasa, catuddasika, catuddasl,
cuddasa; - 0
-ddasama, mfn., the 14th; Pv p. 93,26
(bhogasarpharapetavatthu -aJ11, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
cuddasamaJ11); - see also cuddasama; - 0 -ddasikadi-
patikkhepo in Ee at Spk 1 115,19 is wr for
catuddasikadi- (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0
-ddisa, n.,
0
-ddisli,fpl., the four directions, the four quarters;
Sadd 754,8foll. (samaharadigu tava: . .. -arp
pañcindriyaJ11 ... asamaharadigu yatha: ... tibhava -a);
- catuddiso in Ee at Ap 9,3 and Ap-a 169,6 is wr for
catuddiso (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -ddisaqt, 0 -ddisa, adv.,
l. towards the four quarters; in all directions, all
around; Vin 1 16,12 (seqhi gahapati -a assadiite
uyyojetva); DI 251,6 (saii.khadhamo appakasiren' eva
-a viññapeyya); III 23,2o (samanta -a anuvilokeyyarp);
Ja IV 359,23* (digha maya vimana obhasenta -a);
104 catu(r)
V 168,25* (-aJ11 ambavanaJ11 surammarp; 169,3': -an ti
tassa pokkhara~iya catiisu disasu); - 2.from the four
directions, from four sides; ? Vin I 4,17 (cattaro
maharajano ... -a cattaro selamaye patte bhagavato
upanamesurp; Sp 960,22: -a ti catiihi disahi); - 3. in the
four directions, on four sides; at the four cardinal
points; Vin I 26,5 (cattaro maharajano ... -a aqharpsu
seyyatha pi mahanta aggikkhandha); 344,22 (Kosala-
rajanaJ11 ... catudha chinditva -a bilani nikkhipatha ti);
D II 12,22 (cattaro naJ11 devaputta -a111 rakkhaya
upagacchanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catuddisarp) = M III
120,22 (Be, Ce -arp arakkhaya; Ee, Se
catuddisarakkhaya); D Il 207,21 (cattaro ca maharajano
-a nisinna honti, puratthimaya disaya Dhataraqho .... ,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce catuddisa); III 194,6foll. (-arp
rakkhaJ11 thapetva -a111 gumbaJ11 thapetva -a111 ovaraJ).aJ11
thapetva; Sv 960,6: catusu disasu arakkhmp thapetva);
S II 266,1 (cattaro ... dhanuggaha ... -a thita as su); Ja I
420,8* (1addha gama -a; cf 420,3: catusu disasu cattaro
game adasi); V 398,17 (catasso devakañña -a111
aqhaJ11su, Siri paclnadisaya aghasi ... );VI 278,10* (pass'
ettha pokkharaJ).iyo suvibhatta -a); Ap 3,23 (-a
pokkharañño ... khayantu; Ap-a 109,6: pasadassa -a);
50,13 (-a111 namassitva buddhasegharp naruttamarp;
Ap-a 301,15: catusu disasu namassitva); Mhv 30:89
(-arp te cattaro maharaja thita ahurp); - se e also
catuddisa, catuddisika; - 0 -(d)dipika, see sv
catudd!pika; - 0 -dm.tika, containing four do~as; Vin I
240,16 (ekaJ11 yeva -a111 pitakaJ11 upanislditva);
Patis-a 685,25 (-a111 vlhipitakarp adaya); - 0 -dha, ind.,
in four parts; into four pieces; in four ways; (as)
fourfold; Vin I 344,22 ( -dha chinditva); D Il 341,4
0
(araJ).isahitaJ11 ... 0 -dha phalesi); Vism 472,31; Sv 232,28*
(--dha vibhaje bhoge pa!).<;lito ); PsI 62,9 (asava ... o -dha
agata); 132,25 (ta-y-idaJ11 o -dha pavattati); It-a II 31,4
(ayarp hi atltadivibhago addhasantatisamayakha~a­
vasena 0 -dha veditabbo); Sadd 803,24; - 0 -dhatuko in
Ee and 0 -dhaturo in Be, Ce, Se at Vibh-a 261,27 are
prob. wrr for chadhaturo (M III 239,10 so); -
0
-(n)navuta, mfn., l. the 94th; Ap 55,19 (-e ito kappe);
Bv 17: 10; Sv 411,11;- 2. characterised by 94, plus 94;
Tikap-a 237,27 (-ani dve satani); - 0 -(n)navuti, num.,
94; Vin II 33,32 (--parivasikavattarp nighitaJ11); Ap 114,3
(-i kappani duggatirp nupapajjatha, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
kappanarp); - --kappa, n., the 94th aeon; Th!-a 32,4
(ito --kappe, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce catunavute kappe);
Ap-a 406,27 (--kappato patthaya); - 0 -namaka, mfn.,
having four names; Ps Il 353,15 (aññe cattaro dhamma
ekanamaka atthi, eko dhammo -o atthi);- 0 -nikayika,
0
-nekayika, mfn., knowing the four nikayas; Mil22,11*
(te ca tepitaka bhikkhii pañcanekayika pi ca 0 -nekayika
e' eva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -a bhikkhii); Sp 695,26
(--Tissattherassa upajjhayo ); Vibh-a 47 4,12 (asuko -o
mayhaJ11 antevasiko); Mhv 33:72 (--thero);
0
-pañca, num., four or five; Vibh-a 184,16;
-ahaJ11, adv., for four or five days; Ja Il 362,15;
VI 400,22; - --ga~thikahata, --ga!).<;likahata, mfn., fixed
with four or five joins or mends; Sv 199,9 ([patto]
--ga!).thikahato dubbisodhanlyo asappayo ca, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se --ga~<;likahato) = PsI 266,12 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
catu(r)
--ga!).<;iikahato) = Spk Ili 195,26 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
--ga!).<;likahato) = Vibh-a 360,23 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
--gaQ.<;likahato); - --dha, adv., in four or five parts;
Vism 680,23*; - --yojana, mfn., four or five yojanas in
extent; Ja I 103,6; - 0 -paññasa, 0 -paQ.Q.asa, num. and
mfn., l. (num.) 54; Ja I 82,23 ( 0 -pal).Q.asa jane
ehibhikkhupabbajjaya pabbajetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-ppaññasa); Ap 63,6 (-a sahassani); 213,9 (-a gathaka);
Kv 138,14 (-a dhatuyo ti); Vism 559,23 (-a dhamme
apanetva); 624,Jo (0 -pa!).Q.asa); Sp 240,24 ( 0 -pa!).Q.asa
sahayaka, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -ppaQ.Q.asa); Sv 1052,16
(
0
-pal).Q.asarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -pa!).Q.asa); Dhp-a I 4,8
( -Pa!).Q.asako~idhanarp vissajjetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
0
-ppaññasa-); As 316,18 (-a rüpani); - 2. (mfn.), the
54th; Ap 123,21 (--kappamhi, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
0
-pa!).Q.asakappamhi); 145,16 (-' ito kappe); 488,27
(kaccanavaggo -o, E e, Se so; Be, Ce -paññasamo ); 0
Dip 7:24 (--vassamhi Asokadhammo abhisitto); -
0
-paññasama, mfn., the 54th; Ap-a 490,12 (--vagge, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce 0 -paññasatimavagge); - 0
-ppatta, mfn.
[catu(r) + patta2], having four feathers; Ja IV 260,21 * (so
'harp -am imarp vihangamarp ... ossajami; 260,2s·: -an
ti catühi vajapattehi samannagatarp);- -ppatha, m., a
0
crossroads; Ja IV 460,17* (-e sammati nagaraja; 460,20':
-e ti catukkamaggassa asannaqhane ekasmirp
vammlke); Cp 2:10:2 (-e mahamagge); - 0
-ppad,
mfi: -ppad!)n. and m., having four feet; a quadruped; SI
0 0
6,22* (khattiyo dvipadarp se~~o balivaddo 0 -ppadarp);
Ja Ili 265,25* ( -ppadl tvarp kalyani dipadaharp
0 0
manorame, Be, Ce so; Ee 0 -ppada; Se 0 -ppadi); Dhp-a I
124,18* (0 -ppadirp sailkhamukhirp narirp ... anayissami);
-
0
-ppada, mfn. and m.f, l. (mfn. and m.) having four
feet; a quadruped; Abh 620; Vin 11 110,11 * (-ehi me
mettarp mettarp bahuppadehi me); D 11 57,1o
(manussanarp va manussattaya -anarp va --ttaya
pakkh!narp va pakkhittaya); A 11 34,13 (satta apada va
dvipada va -a va bahuppada va; Mp III 74,7: catuppada
ti hatthi-assadayo); Sn 603 (-e pi janatha khuddake ca
mahallake); Vv 32:10 (s!ho ... pasayha hantva itare -e);
Ja 11 10,27* (-o aharp samma tvarp pi samma -o);
III 57,19* (devamanussa -a pakkhigal).a uraga ca
bhogino); 83,4* (ma ... V!SSasam apajji -assa);
Mil 295,19 (kissa ime manussa ca dija ca dipada miga -a
ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -ppada); Sp 95,lo (meghanarp
gajjitehi -anarp ravehi pakkhlnarp virutehi); Mhv 27:37;
- 2. (mfn.) consisting of four parts; consisting of four
padas, four verse sections; M I 480,23 (atthi bhikkhave
-arp veyyakaral).arp; Ps III 193,25: -arp veyyakaraQ.an ti
catusaccavyakara!).arp sandhaya vuttarp); 111 126,18
(nabhijanami . . . matugamassa dhammarp desita
antamaso -arp pi gatharp); A II 178,14 (-aya ... gathaya
attharp aññaya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -ppadaya); Ps II
197,19 (dupadarp pi tipadarp pi -arp pi pañharp karonti);
Pj II 184,5 (tisso gathayo aba, tasu dve -a eka chappada,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be 0 -ppada); - 0 -ppadika, (m)f(n).,
consisting of four pactas; Ps II 336,15 (-arp ca gatharp
nikkhipitva, Be, Ce, E e so; Se 0 -ppadikarp); Spk I 112,12
(-aya gathaya tava pa~hamapado adi); Th-a li 241,29
(-arp gatharp catühi pi masehi gaheturp nasakkhi); -
0
-(p)pada, mfn. and m., having four feet; a quadruped;
105 catu(r)
Ja Ili 247,5 (sakul).a -a ca, Ee so; Ce, Se sakuQ.a sasa -a
ca; Be sakuQ.asailgha 0 -ppada ca); Pj l 235,3 (--pl~haka­
qhanamattarp pi);- 0 -ppadaka, mfn., having four feet,
quadruped; A IV 360,12 (pal).ako -o; Mp IV l68,1: -o ti
assagol).agadrabhadiko yo koci); Vibh-a 455,5; -
0
-ppadika- in Ee at Spk I 199,15 (--gathavasane) is
prob. wr for catuppadika- (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-purisa, mfn., involving four men; Vin IV 105,17
(tipuriso asso -o ratho; Sp 858,17: eko sarathl eko yodho
dve iil).irakkhaka ti evarp -o hoti); - see also catuposa
below; - 0
-porisa, mfn., -arp, ind., measuring the
height of four men; to the height of four m en; D II 171,2
(esika ... -a ubbedhena, E e so; Be, Ce, Se dvadasa-
porisa); A IV 102,3 (-arp pi ... udakarp);- -posa, mfn.
0
[catu(r) + posa1], involving four men; Vin-vn 1572 (eko
sarathi yodh' eko aQ.irakkha duve jana -o ratho vutto);
- see also catupurisa above; - 0 -pphadadini in Ee at
Ps III 383,1 is wr for catuppadadlni (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-bbagga, m. [catu(r) + vagga], the group of the four
human pursuits; Abh 318 (tivaggo dhammakamattha -o
samokkhaka, Ce so; Be 0 -vaggo);- see also catuvagga
below; - 0 -bbaJ}J}a, 0 -Val).Q.a, n., -a, m.pl. [catu(r) +
val).Q.a], the four classes; Ap 27,7 (ime -a pabbajitva ...
buddhaputta ti ñayare, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -Val).Q.a);
0
Ap-a 367,1 (caruVaJ).l).O va sobhaml ti... -Va!).Q.ehi
sobhaml ti pi pa~ho, Be, Se so; Ce 0 -Va!).Q.aya; Ee
-Va!).Q.O); Mhv 80:41 (sankiQ.Q.arp ca -arp asankiQ.Q.arp
vidhaya so); 75; - see also catUVa!).Q.a; - 0 -bbidha,
-Vidha, mfn. [catu(r) + vidha], of four kinds; fourfold;
Vin V 89,11 • (samuqhana -a paññatta); Ja III 374,17'
(-arp agatigamanarp pahaya); Nidd I 57,20 ( -anarp vacl-
duccaritanarp pahanarp); 402,8 ( -vidharp vacl-
0
duccaritarp, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -arp); Pe~ 83,5 (so pañho
-o); Vism 209,2s (-arp va namarp); Ud-a 304,2o
(arammaQ.assa pana kayadivasena --tta); It-a I 35,11
(--tarp nativattantl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr cattu-);
II 12,31 (vedana ... -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr catubidha);
Pj li 46,16 (sabbasuttanarp -a uppatti); - -arp,
-ena, adv., in four ways; in a fourfold way; MI 286,11
(-arp vacaya adhammacariyavisamacariya hoti); Nidd I
80,1 (-ena mano ... ); Dhs 587 (-ena rüpasangaho );
Ja 111 291 ,4· ( -ena); - o -bbisa(Ip), num. [catu(r) +
visa(rp)], 24; Ap 17,27 (-a sahassani sissa); 34,17
(bhavanarp ... ayamato -arp vittharena ca dvadasa, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se -a; Ap-a 267,27: d!ghato uccato ca
catuvlsatiyojanarp); 55,9 (ayamena --yojanarp asi tavade
vimanarp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -a yojanasirpsu); 327,22 (-e
kappasate vokiQ.Q.arp sarpsarissati, Be, Ce so; Ee
catubbise; Se catuddase);- see also catuvlsa below;-
-bbisatima, mfn. [catu(r) + vlsatima], the 24th;
0
Ap 222,5 (udakasanadayivaggo -o, Ee so; Be, Ce
0
-vlsatimo; Se 0 -bb!so);- see also catuvlsatima below;
-
0
-bbeda, m.pl., the four Vedas; Mil3,31 ( ... tikiccha
-a puraQ.a itihasa ... , Be, Ce so; Ee catubbeda; Se
dhanubbedha); - 0
-byüha, see catuvyüha below; -
-(b)bhaga, m., thefourth part; a quarter; V in III 243,27
0
(ukkaqho nama patto a<;t<;lha!hakodanarp gaQ.hati -arp
khadanarp tadüpiyarp vyanJanarp; Sp 702,28foll.:
odanassa catutthabhagappamiil).arp khadanarp); Dhp l 08
(sabbarp pi tarp na -am eti); Th! 296; Ja V 385,18; -
catu(r) 106 catu(r)

0
-bhittika, 0 -bhittiya, mfn., with four walls; Ja VI 10,28 A III 28,15 (-e ajaññaratho yutto assa thito, Be so; Ce,
(-a¡p. avata¡p. kha~itva); Sp 1043,19 (--1e~e pi, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se catu-; Mp III 236,1: dvinna¡p. maltamaggana¡p.
Ee, Se 0 -bhittiya-); Nidd-a I 156,14 (-e gehe); - vinivijjhitva gataghane ); J a I 200,29 (-e maltanta¡p.
0
-bhümika, 0 -bhümaka, mfn., l. having four storeys; sa1a¡p. karessama ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catu-); V 174,12"
Sp 781 ,2o (-a pañcabhümika va pasada); - 2. belonging (-e khatapokkhara~l viya); Vism 235,12 (-e thapite
to four spheres; belonging to four planes of existence; 1akkhamhi, Be, Ce, E e so; Se catu-); Sv 711 ,8; - se e
Vism 410,2 (avasesa¡p. -am kusalavyakata¡p. citta¡p. a/so catummahapatha; - 0
-(m)mahabhütik a is an
vltaraga¡p., Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -bhümaka¡p.); Sp 964,11
0
occasional wr for catu(m)mahabhütika qv;
(sabbavidü ti sabba¡p. --dhamma¡p. avedi¡p. aññasi¡p., Ee,
0
(m)maharajika is an occasional wr for
Se so; Be 0 -bhümaka-; not in Ce)= Ps 11 189,4 (Se so; catu(m)maharajika qv; - 0 -marabhibhava, m., defeat
Be, Ce, Ee 0 -bhümaka-); III 200,25 (anabhijjhadayo tayo of the four Maras; Pj TI 436,5; -
0
-masa, n.,
2
-a pi vattanti, Be, Se so; Ce -bhümaka; Ee nayo
0 0
-masa, m.pl. [catu(r) + masa ], a period of four
o -bhümaka); IV 107,3 (-esu saii.kharesu, E e so; Ce, Se months; four months; Vin 11 123,14 (chabbaggiya
0
-bhümakesu; Be 0 -bhümakesu sali.khatasali.kharesu); bhikkhü -a¡p. nisldanena vippavasanti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
Spk I 155,24 (avasesa -a kusa1adhamma, Ce, Se so; Be catu-); IV 1O1,11 (iccham' alta¡p. bhante sangha¡p. -a¡p.
0
-bhümaka; Ee avasesacatubhümika); 11280,14 bhesajjena pavaretun ti, Be so; Ce, E e, Se ca tu-);
(--kkhandhana¡p. paññatti kathita, Be, Se so; E e Bv 25:4 ( -a¡p. yada buddho loke carati carika¡p.;
0
-bhümaka-; Ce 0
-bhummaka-); 318,9 (sabbe Bv-a 265,3: -an ti catumase, ayam eva va patho);
0
tebhümakasali.khara anicca ... sabbe -bhümakadhamma Mi1121,13 (-e -e saccakiriya¡p. katva); Vism 620,33
anatta, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -bhummaka-); III 82,19
0
(vassane -a¡p. pavattarüpa¡p.); Pj 11 116,19 (-e -e
(kayika kamavacare yeva labbhanti cetasika -a pi); 82,23 uyyanak!Ja¡p. gacchati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee catutthamase);
0
(upekkhindriya¡p. -a¡p., Ce so; Be, Ee, Se -bhümaka¡p.); Dlp 1:24 (parinibbute -e hessati pathamasali.gaho );
Mp I 20,16 (ya¡p. rüpa¡p. rüpagarukassa purisassa -a¡p. Mhv 25:12 (Kapis!sa¡p. -ena aggahi); 34:27 (rajja¡p. ...
-a¡p. akarayi);- see also catumasi;- -masika, mfn.,
0
kusalacitta¡p. pariyadiyitva g~hitva khepetva tighati, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee 0 -bhümakakusa1acitta¡p.); 20,27 (uppatti¡p. being at the age of four months; Nidd I 120,11; -
pan' assa nivarayamanam eva -a¡p. pi kusa1acitta¡p.
0
-(m)mülaka, 0 -mülika, mfn., havingfour roots; having
ga~hati e' eva khepeti ca ti veditabba¡p., Se so; Be, Ce, four bases; Vin III 97,5; Pj I 44,5 (aghadanta catukotika
Ee 0 -bhümaka¡p.); 11314,19 foll (--dhamma sabbaññuta-
0
-mülika; f. Vism 251,13: 0 -müla); Sp 497,23 (-a satta-
ña~assa apatha¡p. agacchamana bhagavati patisaranti .. .
0
v!sa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -mülika); -
0
-yuttaka, mfn.,
pativedhavasena phasso agacchati . . . vedana .. . yoked with four (oxen); Sp 335,2;-
0
-yojana, mfn. and
sanna . . . saii.khara . . . viññ~a¡p. agacchati, aha¡p. n., l. (mfn. )four yojana~ in extent; Ps 11 122,21 (cetiya¡p.
bhagava ki¡p.naman ti, tva¡p. vijananaghena viñña~a¡p. karissama ... -a¡p. ... hotü ti); - 2. (n.) (a distance of)
nama ti eva¡p. --dhammana¡p. yathasabhavato pati- four yojanas; Ap 71,27 (-am ubbiddho buddhathüpo );
ekka¡p. pati-ekka¡p. nama¡p. ga~hanto ... , Se so; Be, Ce, Bv 5:34 (jinathüpo -am uggato; or -a-m-uggato); -
Ee 0 -bhümaka-); V 4,17 (sabbesa¡p. kusa1adhammana¡p.
0
-yojanasatika, mfn., measuring 400 yojanas; Vin TI
karapaka-appamado aggo ti datthabbo. nanu e' esa 238,1s (attabhava -a pi); MI 187,2o (-ani pi udakani);
1okiyo va kusa1adhamma pana 1okuttara pi, aya¡p. ca Sv 487,4 (timipili.galo -o); -
0
-yojanika, mfn., four
kamavacaro va kusaladhamma pana -a, katha¡p. esa yojanas in extent; V in I 106,22 (simayo . . . -a); -
tesa¡p. aggo ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -bhümaka); Dhp-a I
0 0
-yonika, mfn., having four types of birth or origin; Ja V
21,25 (mano ti kamavacarakusalad ibheda¡p. sabba¡p. pi 115,s (catummaltarajikana¡p. hegha -a deva, --tta yeva
--citta¡p.); Sadd 560,17 (-o pana saka1akkh~a¡p. dharetl kira te gandhabba nama jata); Ps 11 36,12 (bhummadeva
ti dhammo); - catubhümaka¡p. in Ee at Bv 20:35 pana -a); - 0 -ratanika, 0 -rataniya, mfn., measuring
(lakkh~a¡p. catubhümaka¡p.) is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se four ratanas; Spk 111 280,2 (-e pi hi gabbhe); Mp Il 340,5
1akkha~a¡p. ca kusumita¡p.;- -mattha, mfn. [catu(r) +
0
(-e avate udaka¡p. gahetva, Be, Se so; Ce, E e o -rataniye );
1; but prob. wr for chadumaghaqv], (according IV 186,11 (so antamaso o -rataniya p~~asala pi hotu
magha
to ct) cleansed, clean, pure in four ways, or by four catuddisa¡p. sali.gha¡p. uddissakataviharo tveva vuccati);
1
things; concealed by four things; Ja 11 107,27' (ya¡p. -
0
-Vagga, m. and mfn. [catu(r) + vagga ], a group of
supa~~o sup~~ena devo devena mantaye, ki¡p. te 'ttha four; consisting of a group of four; Vin I 299,11
-assa, Be, Ce so; Se kim tattha -assa; Ee ki¡p. tattha (bhagavata paññatta¡p. -o pacchimo sali.gho ti); 319,27;
catumagassa; 107 ,29· foil.: -assa ti sarlrena jatiya sarena Sp 1185,2 (-a¡p. ga~am sannipatapetva); Vin-vn 2602
gu~ena ti imehi catühi maghassa suddhassa ti (-ena akattabba¡p.); - se e also catubbagga above; -
akkharattho, asuddha¡p. yeva pana ta¡p. pasa¡p.savacanena o -vaggika, (mj)n., ( statement) conceming a group of

nindanto evam aha, catühi 1amakassa ki¡p. te ettha four;? Vin-vn 3026 (dutiye -e; see Vin I 318,9foll.);-
-Val).l).a, see catubba~~a above;- -Vassa, m(fn)., l. of
0 0
siga1assa ti aya¡p. ettha adhippayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
catumagassa ti... magassa ... ); V 142,22* (katha¡p. four years' standing; one who has been ordained for
VlJanna --rüpa¡p. segha¡p. sarikkha¡p. athava pi hlna¡p., four years; Sp 1085,7; - 2. of four years; four years
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be catupattharüpa¡p.; 142,26·: catühi old; Ja VI 6,6 (--darakana¡p. nama bhojana!p. piya¡p. hoti,
iriyapathehi paticchannasabhava¡p.); Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -vassikadaraka nama bhojana¡p.
0
-(m)mahapatha, m., a crossing of high-roads, a main piyayanti); Ap 374,11 (jatiya -o 'ha¡p.);
crossroads; S V 325,1 (-e, Be, Ce, E e so; Se catu-);
0
-Vassika, mfn., being four years old; lasting for four
catu(r)
years; ? Ja VI 6,6 ( --daraka nama bhojanarp piyayanti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -vassadarakanalp nama bhojanalp
piyarp hoti); Nidd I 120,t5; Sp 1246,5 ([navakammalp]
-alp);- 0 -Vahi(n), mfn., drawn by four (horses); Ja VI
511 ,3* (-ilp rathalp yuttalp sigham aruyha); Cp 1 :9:28
(-ilp rathalp datva; Cp-a 85,2t: caturo ajaññasindhave
rathalp ca brahma~ana111 datva); - 0 -vidha, mfn., see
catubbidha above; - 0 -Visa, num. and mfn., l. (num.)
24; Vin III 204,31 (dvihuppanne mülacivare .. . -e
uppanne,for 24 days ?); Ap 18,22 (--sahassehi chaditalp
hoti ambararp, Be so; Ee catuvisalp-; Ce, Se catubbisa-);
Sadd 297,26 (tevisa -a ice adisu pi); - 2. (mfn.) the
24th; Ap 217,18 (-amhi kappamhi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
catuvisatikappamhi); 231 ,l (-e ito kappe);- se e also
catubbisa above; - 0 -Visati,f, num. (nom./acc. -i,
-ilp), 24; Vin II 271,21 (-i antarayike dhamme
pucchitulp, Be, Ce, Se so; E e -ilp); V 172,to (-iya
akarehi anatthatarp hoti ka!hinalp); D II 181,26 (-i
sopanani); A IV 139,3 (-i yeva addhamasasatani jivati,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -ilp); Ja I 121,9 (-iya kahapa~esu
jatesu); VI 281,12 (aya nama . . . santibhadradayo -i);
Vism 254,t H phasukaghini); Ev-a 62,17 (sabbe
Dipmi.karadayo -i buddha idha atitabuddha ti
adhippeta); Mhv 1:10 (-i); - --akkhohi~l,f, 24
battalions; 24 akkhohi~is; Ja V 319,25' (--akkhohini-
sari.khena ba1akayena saddhim, Ee so; Ce -smi.khatena;
Be --akkhobha~ismi.khatena; Se --akkhobhinisari.khena);
320,2 (--akkhohi~iparivarena, Ee so; Be --akkhobha~i­
panvarena; Ce -iya akkhohi~ipavarehi; Se -iya
akkhobhiniparivarehi); Cp-a 215, t5 (--akkhohi~iparisa
buddhaparisa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se --akkhobhaniparisa);-
--yojanika, mfn., extending for 24 yojanas; Dhp-a III
213,t4; - --vidha, mfn., of 24 kinds; Vism 444,t
(upadarüpalp --vidharp); - --vidhena, adv., in 24
ways; in 24 parts; Mi112,3o; As 9,t2;
0
-visatima, mfn., the 24th; Dhp p. 101,3 (ta~havaggo
-o); Bv p. 95,t9 (Kassapassa bhagavato varpso -o);
Kkh 2 264,t5; Mhv p. 196,ts; Sadd 811,14 (taddhitakappo
nama -o paricchedo ); - se e also catubbisatima above;
-
0
-Vokara, n., 0 -Vokara, m.pl., the four constituents
(the four non-material khandhas); Nidd I 9,t8 (--bhave;
Nidd-a I 45,2: catiihi arüpakkhandhehi voki~~o bhavo,
cattaro va vokara assa bhavassa ti --bhavo); Kv 326,23
(akasanañcayatanalp --bhavo ti); PsI 217,4 (--vasena
khandhanalp bhedo); - 0
-vyüha, mfn., being or
conveying a fourfold arra y; Pe! 91 ,18* (nirutti adhippayo
ca vyañjana desanaya ca suttattho pubbaparasandhi eso
haro -o) =f. Nett 3 ,20*; Pe! 15 9,28 (katamo -o haro); -
0
-sailkhepa, mfn., containing four groups; Ja VI 435,5
(senaya nagara111 tisandhilp -arp parikkhipitva);
Vism 200,27 (iti bhagava etalp -alp tiyaddharp
visatakaralp tisandhilp pa!iccasamuppadalp sabbakarato
janati) =f. PsI 53,6; - 0 -sacca, n., 0 -saccani, n.pl., the
four truths, the four facts; V in II 293,13* (tajjito
brahmada~t;!ena -alp apapu~i); Ap 556,w; Mil 334,3o
(-alp dhammalp su~anti); Ps II 118,15 (-am eva
paññapemi ti); Pa!is-a 86,32 (-es u ni!!hitaña~akiccassa
khi~asavassa); 207,4 (eko va anacariyako -alp bujjhitava
ti paccekabuddho); Sadd 754,9 (cattari saccam
samaha!ani -alp);- 0 -sacca(p)pakasaka, mfn., making
107 catu(r)
known the four truths; Ap 486,27; - 0
-sacca-
paticchadaka, mf( -ika)n., covering, concealing, the four
truths; Sp 169,23; PsI 128,t7 ( 0 -saccapa!icchadika
avijja); - 0 -satthi,f num. and mfn., l. (num.) 64;
Vin V 217,25 (-i apattiyo apajjeyya); Jaii 193,2· (-iya
padamii1akehi saddhilp); Pa!is I 117,3t (imani agh'
a!!hakani -i honti); Ap 11 0,3o (-ilp ca khattulp so
cakkavatti bhavissati, Ee, Se so, split cpd ?; Be -i
cakkhattulp; Ce --kkhattulp); Kv 205,6 (so!asa kappe
tighati battilpsa kappe ti!!hati -i kappe tiqhati);
Vism 253,30 (-i hatthatthini, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -i);
Pv-a 75,tt (-i kapparukkha); Mhv 24: 12; - 2. (mfn.)
the 64th; Ap 50,25 (karayissati issara111 mahiya -iya;
Ap-a 301 ,2s: -iya jatiya issara111 issarabhava111 rajjalp
karayissati ti attho); - --kkhattulp, ind., 64 times;
Ap 361,10;- 0 -(s)sata, num. and mfn. [catu(r) + sata 1],
(numbering) 400; Ja V 90,25* (bhariya mayhalp -a);
Dhp-a IV 235,3* (gatha dhammapade ... satevisa -a);
Sadd 801,6 (satassa catukkarp -alp); - o -sattati,f num.
and mfn., l. (num.) 74; Ap 338,9 (-i gathayo); Dhp-a I
106,23 (--sahassaja!i1a);- 2. (mfn.) the 74th; Ap 215,27
(-' ito kappe);- --kappa, m., the 74th aeon; Ap 265,tt
(--kappamhi);- --kkhattUlp, ind., 74 times; Ap 278,28
(-ulp ca devarajjalp akarayilp); 361,11 (-u111 ca
cakkavatti bhavissati, Se so; Ee wr -kkhatulp; Be, Ce
catusaghikkhattulp raja); - 0 -sandhika, mfn., of four
parts; ? involving four joints; ? Ps V 49,8 (-alp
pallmi.kalp abhujitva);- 0 -Samutthana, mfn., having a
fourfold origin; Ja III 524,2· (bho kaka v~~o nam' esa
-o so na aharamatten' eva hoti); Vism 590,t4 (-a catasso
dhatuyo); Sp 807,3o (-arp kayato kayavacato kayacittato
kayavacacittato ca samu!!hati); 924,3; Ps II 262,7
(ettakarp rüpalp ekasamughana111 ... ettakarp -alp); -
0
-samutthanika (and 0 -samughaniya ?), mfn., having a
fourfold origin; originating in the four (citta, kamma,
utu and abara); Vism 617,3 (u tu --rüpanarp pavattiya ca
vinasassa ca paccayo hoti); Ps l 287,29 (bahiddhii
--riiparp ca . . . paJanati, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
0
-samughaniyarüpe); Mp I 26,8 (itthiya -arp
gandhayatanalp); Nidd-a I 152,27 (-iinalp pa!havi-apa-
tejavayanalp mahabhiitiinalp); As 306,3o (imani dasa
--tta cattalisa honti); Vibh-a 3,t5 (sabbalp pi -alp rüpalp
rüpakkhandho); - 0
-sahassa, n. and mfn., four
thousand; of four thousand; M III 101,17 (-o brahma;
1O1,19 foil.: pañcasahasso .. . brahma pañcasahassi-
lokadhatulp pharitva adhimuccitva viharati); Ps II 408,35
(-ana111 . . . brahmanarp); Cp-a 170,28 ( --parima~arp
dhana111 datva); - 0 -(s)sala, n. [from catu(r) + sala], a
court surrounded by four halls or rooms; four halls
enclosing a square (see V.S.Agrawala, 1968, p. 249);
Cp 1:6:2 (mapayitvana -arp catummukhalp; Cp-a 53,26:
-an ti catiisu disasu sambandhasiilarp); Sp 781,21 (catu-
bhiimika pañcabhumika pasada chasattakotthakani va
-ani, Be so; Ce, Ee -ani va; Se catiirassasa1ani); 1161,19
(--bhattalp; Sp-! [Be] Ill 369,17: --bhattan ti bhojana-
salayalp pa!ipa!iya diyyamanabhattalp); Dhp-a III 291,12
(Isipatanamahavihare catiihi gabbhehi pa!ima~t;!italp
-a111 karetva); Kkh 115,29; Mhv 37:15 (-arp ca karesi);
73:23 (-alp catummukhalp visiilananasiilalp so
karapetva); - 0 -ssikha, mfn. f!rom catu(r) + sikha],
catuka
with four crests or tops; Utt-vn 870 (taru111 timülaJ11
navapattam ena111 -aJ11 sattaphalaJ11 chapuppha111 janati
yo ... ); - 0 -hattha, mfn. and n., measuring four hattha
measures; four hattha measures; Vin IV 200,27 (da1_19o
nama majjhimassa purisassa -o da1_19o); Ja V 284,2
(andhakare pi -e gabbhe padlpakiccaJ11 nama natthi, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee --gabbhe); Bv 1:73 (-e cailkame);
Sp 93,24 ( --ppamal_laJ11 padesa111 thapetva); 94,13 (-a -a
pañca mahasakha); Ps 11 408,36 (-aya pilotikaya); - se e
also cattarivassasahassayuka (sv cattari), cattarlsa(J11)
dvicatu(r) (sv dvi).
catuka- in Ee at Sp 1271,9 and 1271,17 is wr for catukka-
(Be, Ce, Se so).
catukka , m.n. and mfn. [S. catu~ka], l. (i) (m.n.) a set of
1
four, a collection of four, a tetrad; a section consisting
of sets of four; V in V 128,6 (-aJ11 ninhitaJ11); M III 1 ,2o
(mayaJ11 . . . antevas! labhitva pathamaJ11 eva111
ga1_1apema: ekaJ11 ekaka111 ... cattari -a ... ); Dhs 587;
Vism 512,17 (-ato ti atthi e' ettha dukkhaJ11 na ariya-
saccaJ11, atthi ariyasacca111 na dukkhaJ11, atthi dukkhaJ11
e' eva ariyasacca111 ca, atthi n' eva dukkhaJ11 na
ariyasaccaJ11); Pet 259,2o (yani -ani akusalani kusalani
ca slhavikljite naye niddinhani); Sp 633,32 (sesa111 ettha
-e uttanadhippayam eva); 661,25 (ettha t11_1i -ani
vuttani); PsI 254,33; It-a II 88,13 (anicca111 anicca-
lakkhal_lal11 aniccanupassana anicc-anupassl ti idaJ11 -a111
veditabbaJ11); Nidd-a I 51,22 (upakaravasena ca
aparihlnavasena ca gu1_1avasena ca apare tayo -a vutta);
Vibh-a 503,1 (imehi catühi -ehi sojasa mahabhayani
nama kathitani); Sadd 799,1o (dvikatikacatu(k)ka-
pañcakachakkasattaka-aqhakanavakanaJ11);- (ii) (mfn.)
consisting of four, fourfold; Pet 19,16 (eko ca -o niddeso
sadhara1_1o, eds so; or read catukkaniddeso with
Ñtil}amoli, 1964, p. 23); - 2. (n.) a place where four
roads meet; a square (where roads meet); Abh 203
( -a111 caceare maggasandhi siilghatakaJ11); Ja I 326,1
(etaJ11 gahetva pacchabahaJ11 bandhitva -e -e paharanta
nagara nikkhametva); II 194,29' (-' -adlsu ma1_19ape
karetva panlyacatiyo thapapesi); Mil365,z4 (yatha
maharaja gadrabho nama sailkarakiite pi -e pi
sailghatake pi ... yattha katthaci sayati); Sp 1251,31
(gamadvare va vlthiyaJ11 va -e va antaraghare va);
Dhp-a IV 52,11; Cp-a 86,23 ( 0 -sailkhate catummaha-
pathe); - 0
-jjhanika, mfn. [from catukka + jhana2],
connected with, bringing about, the set of four jhanas;
Vism 111,14 (anapanasatiya saddhiJ11 dasa kasi1_1a -a
honti); - 0 -nipata, m., a section consisting of sets of
four; A 11 257,11 (-o niqhito, Se so; Be --paji niqhita;
Ce, Ee catukkaJ11 samattaJ11); It 123,22 (-o niqhito, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -a111 ninhitaJ11); Thp. 33,1;- 0 -bhatta, n.,
a mea[ of four foods; a mea! for four bhikkhus; V in lii
160,29 (kalya1_1abhattiko gahapati sailghassa -a111 deti
niccabhattaJ11, so bhattagge saputtadaro . . . aññe
odanena . . . anne su pena . . . aññe telena . . . anne
uttaribhailgena pucchanti; Sp 580,12/oll.: -a111 detl ti
cattari bhattani deti, taddhitavoharena pana -an ti
vuttaJ11); Sp 1271,8 foil. (viharabhattaJ11 aqhakabhatta111
-aJ11 gujakabhattan ti . . . aqhanna111 bhikkhüna111 dema
catunnaJ11 dema ti eva111 dinnaJ11 pana aqhakabhatta111
e' eva -aJ11 ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr catukabhattaJ11); -
108 catuttha
0
-magga, m. a group of four roads, a crossroads; a
group of four ways, a fourfold way; Ja IV 460,17*
(catuppathe sammati nagaraja; 460,2o·: catuppathe ti
-assa asannaqhane ekasmiJ11 vammlke); Pep44,11
(ayaJ11 patipada ... -ena ariyadhammesu niddisitabba);
Nett 113,14 (ye hi keci niyyi111su va niyyanti va
niyyissanti va te imahi eva catühi patipadahi, evaJ11 ariya
-a111 paññapenti);- see also sabbacatukkayañña.
catukka 2 , chatukka, jatukka, mfn., [?], little, trifling;?
Ja IV 441,8* (pato ca kho uggate süriyamhi -aJ11 nadiJ11
uttariyana ludda; 442,17': -an ti tucchaJ11); Nidd I 12,15
(omaka lamaka jatukka paritta, Ee, Se so; Be chatukka;
Ce chattaka; Nidd-a I S6,11: jatukka ajjhasayahlnena, Ee
so; Be, Se chatukka; Ce chattaka); II 90,s (appadassa
parittadassa thokadassa omakadassa lamakadassa
jatukkadassa, E e, Se so; Be chatukka-; Ce jatuka-).
catuttha, mf( -a -l)n., n. and -!, f [S. caturtha], l. (mfn.)
the fourth; a fourth kind of, V in I 288,13 (-aJ11 bhagava
clvara111 parupi); 11287,2 (-a111 pan' avuso Upali
parajikaJ11 kattha paññattan ti); III 4,17 (adukkha-m-
asukhaJ11 upekkhasatiparisuddhiJ11 -aJ11 jhana111
upasampajja vihasiJ11); D II 108,17 (ayaJ11 -o hetu -o
paccayo mahato bhümicalassa patubhavaya); 178,17
(raja ... imaya -iya iddhiya samannagato ahosi, Be, Ce
so; E e, Se -aya); III 105,22 (aya111 -a dassanasamapatti);
188,21* (ekena bhoge bhuñjeyya dvlhi kamma111
payojaye -a111 ca nidhapeyya apadasu bhavissati); M I
158,s (-a samal_labrahmal_la eva111 samacintesuJ11); II 6,19
(ima111 . . . bhagavati -a111 dhammaJ11 samanupassami
yena bhagavanta111 savaka sakkaronti); III 181,25 (na
tva111 addasa manussesu -a111 devadütaJ11 patubhütan ti);
254,33 (ayaJ11 -1 patipuggalika dakkhi1_1a); SI 178,25*
(matari pitari capi atho jeqhamhi bhatari acariye -amhi
tesu na mana111 kayiratha); A I 192,8 (upekhasahagatena
cetasa .. . ekaJ11 disa111 pharitva viharati tatha dutiya111
tatha tatiya111 tatha -iJ11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -aJ11); Sn 436
(kama te pathama sena... -1 ta1_1ha pavuccati); Ja I
431,2* (-e lailghayitvana pañcamay' asi avuto, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce pañcamiyasmiJ11 avuto; 431 ,6·: -e sattithale
apatitva attanaJ11 lailghitva ... idani pañcamaya sattiya
avuto si ti); III 55,3 (-a111 gatham aha); V 497,28* (eta111
varana111 -aJ11 varami); VI 63,14* (yo pi -e bhattakale na
bhuñje); Ap 71,2 (tatiya riipiyamaya -1 phalikamaya, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se -a); Nidd I 100,3 (aya111 -a sima);
Mil 320,18 (ayaJ11 maharaja bhojanassa -o gu1_1o
nibbanaJ11 anupavinho); Vism 416,17 (tato pi dlghassa
addhuno accayena -o suriyo patubhavati); 677,8
(sakadagaml nama -o ariyapuggalo hoti); Sp 297,24
(sabbajanapadesu kahapa1_1assa -o bhago pado ti
veditabbo); Sadd 796,15 (catunna111 püra1_1o -o); - ifc
see atta- (sv atta[n]), taJ11- (sv ta[d]);- catutthaJ11, adv.,
for a fourth time; Sn p. 31 ,27 (-a111 pi kho Ajavako
yakkho bhagavantaJ11 etad avoca); Ja IV 352,11 * ( -aJ11
samacintesu111 bala mohena paruta); As 243,18 ( -a111 pi te
khare datva);- catutthe, adv., in a fourth case, in the
fourth place;? DI !6,16; - 2. (n.) the fourth letters in
the first five classes of consonants (ie gh, jh, 9h, dh and
bh); Sadd 607,27 (vaggesu pathamatatiyaJ11 sithilaJ11 ...
dutiyacatutthaJ11 dhanitaJ11);- 3. catutthl, (m)f(n) and f
[scil. vibhatti], (gr.t.t.) (the termination of) the fourth
catutthaka
case, the dative; Sadd 60,4 (pat}lama .. -I ... chaghi ca
sattami ca ti honti satta vibhattiyo); 60,28 (sampadana-
vacane -I vibhatti bhavati); 642,7 (sa narp. iti -I); -
catutthitappurisa, m., a tappurisa cpd in which the first
member, if uncompounded, would be in the dative case;
Sadd 756,6 (agantukanarp. bhattarp. agantukabhattaq¡ .. .
evaq¡ agantukanarp. atthaya bhattarp. agantukabhattaq¡ .. .
ayarp. catutthitappuriso);- 4. catutthi,f [scil. ratti], the
fourth (day or) night of the lunar half-month; Ps II
192,25 (Vappatthero pa!ipadadivase sotapanno ahosi
Bhaddiyatthero dutiyayaq¡ . . . Assajitthero -iyaq¡);
Mp II 233,8 (-iyaq¡ uposathika honti);
0
-,Ühanika, mfn. [from catuttha + jhana2] connected with
the fourth jhana, belonging to the fourth jhana;
Vism 111,17 (catutthabrahmaviharo cattaro ca aruppa -a
ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee catukkajjhanika ti); 165,1; Ps II
366,19 (imassa pana -a pha1asamapatti, sa na
samu!!hapeti); III32,19 (-arp. upekhasatiparisuddhiq¡);
-
0
-bhatta, n., (only) the fourth meal; Ja V 424,25
(susanamajjhe vasanti -aq¡ pariJ.llimayamana);
0
-mana, m., the tongue;? Ja V 155,29* (paJ.lgaravaraJ.la
vaggu --sannibha; 156,27' foll.: paJ.lgaravaraJ.la ti
dantavara1,1a, --sannibha ti -o vuccati --vatthabhüta
jivha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catutthavatthubhüta); -
acatuttha, mfn., not a fourth; without a fourth; Pe! 20,11
(tividho samudayo -o apañcamo).
catutthaka, mf( -I?)n .. [S. caturthaka], l. the fourth; V in V
225,33* (in uddana); S V 41,18* (in uddana: nibbananinno
dvadasaki -I cha!t}llinavaki); Ap 120,6 (ito -e kappe);
540,8 (pat}lamarp. jhanarp. uttamarp. dutiyarp. tatiyaq¡ capi
samapajji -aq¡); Vism 64,29 (0 -clvararp. pa!ikkhipami
tecivarikailgarp. samadiyami ti); - 2. (of a fever)
retuming every fourth day, quartan; Sp 629,21 (yatha
tatiye catutthe ca divase hoti ti jaro tatiyako -o ti ca
vuccati).
catura, catura, mfn. [S. catura; cf S. lex. catura], clever,
skilful; charming, agreeable; Abh 721 (-o
dakkhapesa1a); Ja III 266,22* (-a nari); V 398,27* (kañña
catasso caturo catuddisa; ? 399,w: caturo ti -a, ayam
eva va pat}lo, caturiyena samannagata ti attho); VI 25,19*
(kusa1a naccagitassa sikkhita -' -itthiyo; 25,2r: -a vilasa
itthiyo atha va -a nagara itthiyo ... , Be, Se so; Ce, E e -a
nagarakitthiyo ); Vibh 351,22 (siri.garp. siri.garata o -ta
caturiyaq¡ parikkhattata parikkhattiyaq¡, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be caturata; Vibh-a 476,26: 0 -bhavo --ta, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se caturabhavo caturata) quoted Mp III 42,2o (Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be caturata) and It-a II 164,27 (eds caturata) and
Th-a III 86,21 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se caturata); Pv-a 57,29
(suvaggitena ti sundaragamanena 0 -gamanena, Ce so;
Be, Secatura-; Ee va tura-, wr);- see also caturiya.
caturavimana, n. [catu(r) + vimana ?], four vimanas;
Vv p. 43,11 (anantaraq¡ -arp. yatha vatthadayikavimanaq¡
tatha vittharetabbaq¡, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dif.ferent) f.
p. 43,26.
caturo, see sv catu(r).
caturomaya, mfn. [?], square;? Ap 303,12 (asandiyo
pi!hake ca pallailke caturomaye ... karetva; ? cf Ja IV
422,5•: dammi... catussadarp. ca pallailkaq¡; 422,12·:
catussadan ti caturussadarp., catu-ussisakan ti attho ?).
catta, mfn., pp of cajati qv.
109 cattarisa(Ql)
cattaro in Ee at S 1 176,7 andA JI 239,2 is wr for cattaro
(Be, Ce, Se so).
cattaraip in Ee at Ps V 50,2 is wr for vattaraq¡ (Be, Ce, Se
so).
cattari, n.pl. [of catu(r) qv], four; - cattarivassa-
sahassayuka, mfn., having a lzfespan of 4,000 years;
D JII 74,3o (dvevassasahassayukanarp. manussanarp. -a
putta bhavissanti, eds so).
cattarisa(Ip), cattalisa(q¡), cattalisa(q¡) (and cattariq¡sa ?),
f num., and mfn. [S. catvariq¡sat, catvariq¡sa], l. (j.)
(nom.!acc. -a, -arp.; [and -a]; instr.!dat./gen./loc. -aya),
40; Vin IIl 69,21 (-arp. pi bhikkhü ekahena jivita
voropesi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se catta!Jsarp.); V 88,34* (apatti
-a catuttari); D 1 15,31 (anussarati ... -aq¡ pi saq¡vana-
vivagani, Ce, Ee so; Be cattalisarp.; Se cattalisarp.); 11 5,31
(eko savakanaq¡ sannipato ahosi -aq¡ bhikkhusahassani,
Ee so; Be cattalisa; Ce, Se cattl!lisa); 239,3
(Mahagovindo brahma1,1o . . . -a bhariya sadisiyo etad
avoca); MI 377,27 (-aq¡ pi purisa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
catta!Jsaq¡); 11 90,23 (sace . . . SUJ.leyyama tarp.
bhagavantaq¡ visatiya yojanesu ... -aya yojanesu, Be so;
Ce, Se catta!Jsaya; Ee catta!Isaya); III 79,8 (appekacce
thera bhikkhü -arp. pi bhikkhü ovadanti, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se catta!Jsaq¡); S JI 85,1 (tiq¡saya va . . . -aya va
kanhavahanarp. maha-aggikkhandho jaleyya); A 1 65,13
(devata ... -arp. pi hutva, Ce, Ee so; Be catta!Isarp.; Se
cattl!lisarp.); V 306,27 (-aya ... dhammehi samannagato,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catta)Isaya); Ud 92,7 (yesarp. -arp.
piyani -aq¡ tesaq¡ dukkhani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
catta!Jsarp.); Sn p. 87,8 (-aya pi dadami, Ce, E e so; Be
catta!Isaya; Se catta!Jsaya); Ja V 433,28 (cattl!lisaya ...
!hanehi itthi purisaq¡ accavadati, Ce so; Be, Se
cattalisaya; Ee wr catta!Isahi); Nidd I 356,16 (catta!Isarp.
pi lokadhatuyo passeyya, Be so; Ee, Ce, Se cattalisaq¡);
Ap 589,22 (-arp. ko!isata, E e so; Be catta!Isa; Se cattalJsa;
not in Ce); Mil 24,5 (catta!Isaya bhikkhusahassanarp.
navakataro hoti, Be, Ee so; Ce catta!Jsaya; Se cattalJsa-
bhikkhusahassanarp.); 291,3o (dasa pi purise passami ...
-aq¡ pi ... , Ce so; Be, Ee catta!Isaq¡; Se cattl!lisaq¡);
Vism 110,21 (catta!Jsaya kammanhanesu, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se catta!Isaya); Dhp-al 41,14joll. (so pana
mahanubhavo atite cattalisa anagate catta!Isa ti
asitikappe anussarati, Be so, Ce, Ee, Se catta!Jsa); It-a 1
52,14 (cattaro dasaka -arp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catta!Jsarp.);
Sadd 297,28 foll. (catta!Isa catta!Isarp. cattalisaya
cattalisayaq¡ -a ice adi pi); 799,14 (tiq¡saq¡ catta!Isaq¡
paññasaq¡); 800,9 (cattalisarp. cuttalisaq¡ cotta!Isaq¡); -
2. (mfn.) the 40th; Ap 121,6 (cattalisamh' ito kappe
Varu1,1o nama khattiyo, Be so; Ee cattalise; Ce, Se
cattl!lise); 338,3 (Pilindavaggo cattl!liso, Se so; Be
cattalisamo; Ce catta!Jsatimo; Ee cattariq¡so);- ifc see
agha- (sv anha2), eküna- (sv eka), catu- (sv catu[r]), cha-
(sv cha2), ti- (sv ti 2), dva-, dve- (sv dve\ pañca-,
bacattalJsa; - 0 -chabbassasatayuka, mfn., having a
lifespan of 640 years; D lii 74,27 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
cattl!lisachavassa-); - 0 -dija, mfn., having 40 teeth;
Ap 426,18 (battiq¡salakkha1,1a buddha cattalisadija pi ca,
Be so; Ce 0 -dvija; Ee 0 -ddija; Se cattari va dija); -
0
-vassasahassayuka, mfn., having a lifespan of 40,000
years; D III 68,17 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catta!Isa-); -
caWirisaka
0
-vassayuka, mfn., having a lifespan of 40 years; D III
74,21 (Be, Ee so; Ce cattal!sati-; Se cattaJisa-); -
0
-vassika, mfn., being 40 years old; Nidd I 120,18 (-o pi,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se cattaJisa-);- cattaJisa-hattha, n. and
mfn., l. (n.) 40 hattha measures; Ja I 42,28 (sarirmp
-' -ubbedhmp ahosi, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee cattallsa-);
Bv-a 224,3 (--vitthataq¡ tii.1asantharaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
cattal!sa-); - 2. (mfn.) 40 hattha measures in extent;
Bv-a 297,37 ([pallaiJ.ka] -a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cattal!sa-);
- see also cuttalismp, cottallsmp, tal!sa(q¡), niccattaJisa.
cattarisaka, cattallsaka, cattlqisaka, n. and mfn.,
(conceming) a group of 40; Vin II 62,5 (cattallsakaq¡
samattmp, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se catta)Isakaq¡); - ifc see
maha-.
cattaro, see sv catu(r).
cattalisa(Ip), catta!Jsa(q¡), see sv cattarisa(q¡).
cattalisama, catta!Jsama, mfn., the 40th; Ap-a 480,19
(--vagge, Be, E e, Se so; Ce catta!Jsatime vagge); -se e
also catu- (sv catu[r]), cha- (sv cha2), dvi-, pañca-,
bacatta!Jsama.
cattukkaq¡ in Ee at Ps II 258,8 is wr for catukkmp (Be,
Ce, Se so).
cattutiipsasmp in Ee at Ap 150,1 is wr for catuttiq¡sasu
(Be, Ce, Se so).
cattunnaip in Ee at DI 91,3o and Kv 322,3o is wr for
catunnmp (Be, Ce, Se so).
cattuppadapatibandha in Ee at Pa!is I 172,23 is wr for
cittuppadapa!ibaddha (Be, Ce, Se so).
cattubbidhataip in Ee at It-a I 35,11 is wr for
catubbidhataq¡ (Be, Ce, Se so).
cadati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cadati, cadate, Wg § 21:5],
asks for; begs; Sadd 385,15 (cada yacane: ... -ati); -
se e also cata ti 1.
cana, ind. [ts], a particle used after interrogatives, making
them indefinite; Abh 1145 (asakalye cana ci); - see
svv ka3, kiñcana 1, kiñcana2; - see also ca2, ci.
canaip in Ee at V in III 121,27 foil.: read ca naq¡ with Be,
Ce, Se.
canda, m. [S. candra], l. the moon; Abh 51 (indu -o ca
nakkhattaraja); V in I 246,35* (nakkhattanaq¡ mukhaq¡
-o); D III 185,2 (nihiyati klqapakkhe va -o); M III
276,14 (uno nu kho -o pUI).I).O nu kho -o ti); A I 215,7*
(-o ca suriyo ca ubho sudassana); Sn 465 (ye
vitaraga ... -o va Rahugahal).a pamutta); 598 ( -aq¡ yatha
khayatltaq¡ pecca pañjalika jana vandamana
namassanti); Pv 12:7 (yatha pi darako -aq¡ gacchantaq¡
anurodati evmpsampadam ev etmp yo petaq¡
anusocati); 18:6 (-ato sasam icchami); Thi 87 (aggiq¡
-aq¡ ca siiriymp ca devata ca namassi 'hmp); 384 (-aq¡
ki)anakaq¡ gavesasi); Ja III 52,6 (bodhisatto akasaq¡
oloketva -mp disva sve uposathadivaso ti ñatva); 154,6*
(udeti apiirati veti -o); IV 162,3* (tipañcarattiipagatamhi
-e vego maha hohiti sagarassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tipañcarattiipagamamhi -o); VI 278,17' (passa -mp ca
suriymp ca obhasante catuddisa Sineruq¡ anupariyante);
Ap 419,26 (-amhi sasakaq¡ yatha); Cp 1:10:4
(uposathamhi divase -aq¡ disvana piiritmp); Mil388,3o
(-o m saya carati); Vism 418,6 (candamal).galaq¡
patubhavati, te taq¡ disva . . . amhakmp chandaq¡ ñatva
viya ughito, tasma -o hotii ti -o tv ev' assa namaq¡
110 canda
karonti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chando hotii ti chando ... );
Sadd 380,2o foil. (-o ti somo, so pi candayati hiladayati
sitagul).asampattiya attano pabhaya sattanaq¡ pari)ahaq¡
viipasamento sukhaq¡ uppadeti ti -o ti vuccati, atha va
dippati siriya virocati ti -o, agamaghakathasu pana
chandaq¡ janeti ti -o ti vuttaq¡); - ifc see aggha-
(sv aggha\ nava- (sv nava\ paripUI).I).a- (sv paripurati),
pUI).I).a- (sv piirati); - 2. the god of the moon, Canda;
D II 259,23* (Candassiipanisa deva -am agu
purakkhatva); Ja V 383,12 (putto pi 'ssa tath' eva danmp
datva -o hutva nibbatti); Sv 710,35 (-o nama devaputto );
As 318,4 (mal).i-mayaq¡ rajatapa!icchannmp
ekiinapal).I).asayojanayama-vittharaq¡ -assa devaputtassa
vimanaq¡ canda-mal).galaq¡ nama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
SOVal).I).amayaq¡); Sadd 148,25foll. (-o mal).imayavimane
vasati ti adisu Candadevaputto -o ti vutto); -
o• -attharaka, m. a rug pattemed with moon-shapes;
Ps III l8,12 (in cpd: assattharakasihattharaka-
vyagghattharakacandattharakasuriyattharaka-, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce -kañcanattharakasuriy-; Ps-! [Be] III 10,15foll.:
assattharakasihattharakadayo pi assasihariipadivicitta
eva attharaka) = Spk III 45,4 (Be, Se so; Ce
-kañcanatthara-suriy-; E e -kacanattharakasuriy-); -
0
iinugata, mfn., following, accompanying the moon;
Ap 533,13 (bhikkhuniyo jinaggmp tara va -a Sumeruq¡
padakkhil).mp katva); - o• -abha (and
0
-r-abha),f
[canda+ abha 1], radiance ofthe moon; moonshine; A II
139,16 (catasso ima bhikkhave abha ... -a suriyabha
aggabha paññabha); Ja I 474,9* (-aq¡ suriyabhaq¡ ca yo
'dha paññaya gadhati; 474,w: -an ti odatakasil).aq¡
dasseti); Dhp-a IV 191,3 (sattha ... -aya antaradhanmp
akasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --antaradhayanaq¡);
Sadd 688,6 foil. (gathavisaye candasaddassa sabbass'
eva candara ice adeso hoti va abhasadde pare: atibhonti
na tass' abha candarabha sataraka [quoting Ap 72,17: Be,
Ce, Se candasiira sataraka; Ee candasurasataraka] ettha
ca candarabha ti -a. -a ti ca idaq¡ sakka!abhasabhavaq¡
patva dakararakara-saññogavasena tighati,
Magadhabhasattaq¡ pana patva candarabha ti visuq¡
titthati); 0
-kanta, m. [canda + kanta1], the
,;_~onstone; Mil ll8,21;- 0 -ggaha, m. [canda+ giilla2],
an eclipse of the moon; DI 10,21 (evaq¡vipako -o
bhavissati; Sv 95,6: -' -adayo asukadivasaq¡ Riillu
candaq¡ gahessati ti vyakaral).avasen' eva veditabba);
Ja I 374,9·; Mill78,18;- 0 -nissitaka, mfn., attached to,
supported by, Canda; Sv 690,12 (-a deva);
0
-ma!J.I}.ala, n., the disc of the moon; Vin V 121,2 (-mp
viva!aq¡ virocati no pa!icchannaq¡) i= A I 283,6; Ja I
253,29 (pacinalokadhatuto paripul).I).aq¡ -mp u~!hahi);
III 55,25 (pabbataq¡ pi)etva pabbatarasmp adaya -e
sasalakkhal).mp alikhitv a); S p 119,26 (-mp
ekiinapaññasayojanmp); 828,27 (yane va hatthi-
assapi!!he va -e va suriyamal).gale va nisiditva); Ps II
159,8 (ayasma PUI).I).O Sariputtathermp -mp iillacca
~hapento viya ukkhipi); -
0
-lekha,.f., a digit of the
moon; ? the crescent moon;? Ap 533,12 (pabhatakale
vyasanmp gahanaq¡ disvana niyyati va -a, Ce so; Ee hi
-a; Be, Se byasanaiJ.-gatanaq¡); Vism 168,8; (diva
suriyappabhabhibhava . . . vijjamana pi -a aparisuddha
hoti); Dhp-a I 408,3 (gagana-tale -a viya paññayamana);
candaka
-
0
-vatika, 0 -Vattika, mfn. [cjS. candravratika and
candraylll)a ?], one who has vowed to behave like the
moon; acting in the manner of the moon, eating less
food each day as the moon wanes; ? (or worshipping the
moon; ?) Nidd I 89,24 (-a va honti suriyavatika va honti
indavatika va honti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -vattika); -
0
-Vidu, m(jn)., (one) who knows the grammar of
Candra; ? Sadd 379,3o (khidi avayave ti -uno vadanti,
tesaq¡ mate khindat! ti rüpaq¡, perhaps wr; cfCandra-
Dhatupatha I 22 .Jbidi); - 0 -vimana, n. [canda +
vimana 1], the palace or vehicle of the god of the moon,
ie the moon; Ps III 76,15 (-assa anto pavisitva); Spk I
109,3 (-aq¡ suriyavimanaq¡ va); Sadd 148,3o (cando ti ca
candima ti ca Candadevaputtassa pi -assa pi naman ti
veditabbaq¡); 793,2o (candasaii.khato devaputto asmiq¡
vijjatl ti candima, -aq¡); - 0 -sama, (mf)n. [canda +
sama3], (what is) like the moon; Ja VI 232,10' (kena va
vikalaq¡ tuyhaq¡ khippaq¡ abhiharantu te mano karassu
kuggamukhi api -amhi pi, Ce, Ee so; Be kiq¡ khippaq¡
aharanti te; Se kiq¡ khippaq¡ ahiharanti te; 232,24·: -arnhi
pi ti candato dullabhataro nama natthi, tadise pi ruciq¡
katva mamacikkha, sampadessami te ti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr candana dullabhataro); - 0
-savhaya, mf(n).,
cailed Canda; Cp 1:7:1 (kumaro -o; Cp-a 58,4: -o ti
candasaddena avhatabbo, candan amo ti attho) quoted
2 a stick of sandalwood; A 111 237,26 (puriso -aq¡
Sadd 456,1s;- 0 -süra, m. [canda+ süra ], the sun and
moon; representations of the sun and moon; Ap 2,2
(-ehi mlll)gita, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se 0 -suriyehi; Ap-a 105,13:
-ehi 0 -süriyarüpehi ca maJ)gito so pasado ti attho, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee 0 -suriyehi); 72,17 (abhibhonti na tass' abha -a
sataraka, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atihonti hi tass' abha
candasurasataraka); 541,24 (satara -a ca lañchita
kanakamaya, Be, Ee so; Ce -suriya; Se -sura); - see
0 0
also acandamullokika, candama(s), candima(s),
mar.ücandaka (sv mar.ü).
candaka, m. [S. candraka], the eye of a peacock's tail;
Abh 635 (-o mecako);- ifc see mayura-.
candati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup candati, Wg § 3:31], shines,
is bright; is glad or refreshed; gladdens, refreshes;
Dhatup 140 (canda dittihiladanesu); Dhatum 198 (cadi
kantihiladane); Ap-a 444,21 foil. (-ati parijahaq¡
vüpasametl ti candanaq¡, atha va -anti
sugandhavasanatthaq¡ sariraq¡ vilimpanti etena ti
candanrup., Be, Se so; Ce atha va
candanasugandhavasanatthaq¡ ... ; Ee wr caja ti . . . atha
va candanan ti); Sadd 380,16 (cadi hiladane dittiyaq¡
ca: ... -ati candano cando);- caus. pr. 3 sg. candayati,
gladdens, refreshes; Sadd 380,18 (-ayati hilad ay ati
sitagu~a-samaii.gitaya sattanaq¡ parijahaq¡
vüpasamentaq¡ sukhaq¡ uppadetl ti candanam).
candana, m.n. [ts], sandal (the tree, wood, or peifume
preparedfrom the wood); Abh 300 (-o nitthiyaq¡); Vin I
203,15 (añjanupapisanehi attho hoti... anupnam1
bhikkhave -aq¡ tagaraq¡ kajanusariyaq¡ ... ); M 11 152,3
(salassa va salajassa va -assa va padumakassa va
uttararlll)iq¡ adaya aggiq¡ abhinibbattentu); A I 145,13
(na kho pan' assahaq¡ bhikkhave akasikaq¡ -aq¡
dharemi; Mp 11 237,19: akasikaq¡ -an ti asa~haq¡ -aq¡);
Dhp 55 (-aq¡ tagaraq¡ va pi uppalaq¡ atha vassiki etesaq¡
gandhajatanaq¡ silagandho anuttaro; Dhp-a I 422,17: -an
111 candana
ti 0 -gandho); Ja V 323,9• (anu1itta -ena); VI 151,s•
(handa ca vilepanaq¡ te pacchimakaq¡ -aq¡ vilimpassu);
Ap 268,22 (-ass' eva me kaya tatha gandho pavayati, Be,
Ce so; E e, Se -ass' eva me vasso ); Dhp-a IV 189,13 foil.
0
(bahu -aq¡ piq¡sapetva patiq¡ puretva. .. -pujaq¡
akasi ... cetiyakucchiyaq¡ -en a canda-mlll)galaq¡ akasi);
As 127,24 (parijahavinayanaraso va -aq¡ viya);
Sadd 380,2o (candayati hi1adayati sitagu~a-samaii.gitaya
sattanaq¡ parijahaq¡ vüpasamentaq¡ sukhaq¡ uppadeti ti
-aq¡); - candano in Ee, Se at A I 9,27 is perhaps wr;
Be, Ce phandano; - ifc see kasika-, gosita- (sv go),
ratta- (sv rañjati), lohita-, hari- (sv hari\
o• -ussada, mfn., abundantly anointed with sandal;
Th 267 (alaii.kata suvasana ma1ini -a) = Ja VI 266,10';
Pv 34:1 (gatta te -a) i= Ja V 9,25' (aii.gadi -o; 9,32': -o ti
dibbacandanavilitto); -- 0 0kkhita, mfn. [candana +
ukkhita or okkhita], sprinkled or anointed with sandal;
Thi 145 (alaii.kata suvasana malini -a; Thi-a 133,17: -a ti
candananulitta); - 0 -gal}thi,f, a piece of sandalwood;
Vin 11 110,28 (mahagghassa candanasarassa -1 uppanna
hoti; Sp 1202,31foil.: candanaghatika uppanna hoti);-
1
0
-gandhi(n), mfn. [candana + gandhi(n) ], smeiling of
sandal; Jaiii 190,4* (sa ... -ini);- -gandhika, mfn.
0
1
[candana + gandhika ], smeiling of sandal; Ja V 156,6•
2
(tuyhaq¡ kesa -a);- 0 -ghatika,.f. [candana + ghatika ],
adhigaccheyya haricandanassa va lohitacandanassa va
so yato yato ghayetha . . . adhigacchat' eva
surabhigandhaq¡ asecanakaq¡); Spk I 284,5 (ekeka
devata caturaii.gulamattaq¡ -aq¡ ahari); - 0 -CUI}I}a, n.,
powdered sandal, sandal-powder; D 11 137,25 (dibbani
pi -ani antalikkha papatanti); JaiV 213,7 (rajanaq¡ tena
udakena nahapetva -ena okiritva); Mil13,11; Spk I
323,23 (accu~ha kukku1a... -aq¡ hutva nipatiq¡su);
Cp-a 75,7 (sukhumaq¡ -aq¡ karetva samuggaq¡ püretva);
-
0
-phosita, mfn., sprinkled with sandal; Ja VI 47,16'
(kutagare 1itte -e; 51 ,28·: -e ti 1ohita-candanena
paripphosite);- 0 -bhüsita, mfn., adorned with sandal;
Ja VI 492,10' (suvattho -o); - -mal}¡;lita, mfn.,
0
decorated with sandalwood;- --saragandhika, mfn., of
exceilent scent because decorated with sandalwood;
Thi 378 (abhiruha sayanaq¡ maharahaq¡
--saragandhikam, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -aq¡
saragandhikaq¡; Thi-a 236,25: --saragandhikan ti
gosisakadisaracandanena mlll)gitataya surabhi-
gandhikaq¡); - 0
-marakatagatta in Ce, Ee at Ja VI
147,16' foil. is prob. wr; Be candanamuduka-; Se
candanamaruka-; 147,29': lohitacandanalittagattehi; -
0
-littagatta, mf( -a, -i)n., with body or limbs anointed
with sandal; Ja 111 161,12' (sama ca kho -a, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -1); VI 307,29' (sucimhitaq¡ -aq¡, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -iq¡);- 0 -sara, m., the pith of sandalwood; the very
best sandal; essence of sandal; Vin 11 110,28 (-assa
candanaga~thi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be candanassa); Ja I 53,23
(Sakko devaraja agantva -aq¡ hatthe thapetva gato);
Ps III 298,24 (pheggu-paticchanno -o viya);
--litta, mfn., anointed with the best sandal; Vv 52:6;
Ja V 215,15*; - --vasita, mfn., perfumed with the best
sandal; Vv 64: 15; see also tagaracandani(n)
(sv tagara).
candani
candani, f [= candanika qv], a pool; Vin II 144,18* (in
uddana: dol).i -i pakarrup).
candanika (and candaniya), f, -a, n. [cf BHS
syandanika], a pool; esp. a stagnant pool, a cess-pit; a
sewer; Abh 683 (-a); Vin II 122,28 (bhikkhü arame
tahaiTI tahrup nahayanti, aramo cikkhallo hoti ...
anujanami bhikkhave -an ti, -a pakata hoti bhikkhü
hiriyanti nahayitu~T~); M 1 11,1 (cal).t;irup kukkurrup
parivajjeti ... papatrup -a~T~ oJigallaiT~; PsI 80,25: -an ti
ucchitthodakagabbhama1adinaiTI chat;lt;!anatthanaiTI); A 1
161,24 (ye pi te -aya va oJigalle va piil).a; Mp II 258,8:
-aya ti asucikalalaküpe); Th 567
(nanakulamalasampui).I).O maha-ukkarasambhavo -a~T~ va
paripakka~T~); Mil220,23 (-rup pi oJigallaiT~ pi omaddati);
Vism 264,37 foil. (seyyatha pi -ayaiTI pakkhitte amukhe
raval).aghate 0 -raso pavisati); Saddh 132 (pütimacche
Val).e va pi tatha -aya va); - candaniy' -oJigalla, n. a
cess-pit andlor a sewer; Ja V 15,23* (pate papatrup
sobbhrup guhrup -a~T~; 18,20': -an ti candanikrup ca
oJigallaiT~ ca, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se candaniyaiTI ca).
candama(s), m. [S. candramas], the moon; Sadd 793,22
(candima ti hi paJi dissati, keci pana sakkatabhasato
nayrup gahetva -a ti pathanti, trup na yutta~T~); -
candama- in Ee atA II 74,34foll. (candamasuriya-) is
almost certainly wr for candima- (Be, Ce, Se so); - se e
also candima(s).
candariphalii in Ee, Se at Ap 346,15 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
badariphala.
candika, f [S. candrika], moonlight, Abh 54 (komudi -a
jul).ha).
candima(s), m. [S. candramas] (iic usually candima-,
occasionally candima-), the moon; the god of the moon;
Abh 52 (sasaiJ.ko -a); Vin V 168,35* (nihiyati tassa yaso
kaJapakkhe va -a); M II 104,22 (so 'mrup 1okrup
pabhaseti abbha mutto va -a); S 1 50,17 (-a devaputto
Rahuna asurindena gahito hoti); 67 ,16* (samuddo
udadhinrup segho nakkhattiina~T~ va -a); Dhp 208
(trup .. . bhajetha nakkhattapatha~T~ va -a); Vv 73:1
(dibbe vimanarnhi yathapi -a, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
yathasi); Ja V 14,21* (obhasayrup srupvari~T~ -a va);
VI 201,25* (Somo Yamo -a Vayu Suriyo); Ap 414,18
(addasrup Kosikrup buddhrup pUI).I).amase va -a~T~);
Sadd 148,29 (cando ti ca -a ti ca candadevaputtassa pi
candavimanassa pi naman ti veditabba~T~); 793,18/oll.
(candavimanasaiJ.khato cando assa atthi ti -a,
Candadevaputto, atha va candasaiJ.khato devaputto
asmi~T~ vijjati ti -a, candavimanrup);- 0 -yutta, mfn., in
conjunction with the moon; Bv 2:95 (visakha -a); -
0
-suriya, 0 -süriya, m.pl., the sun and the moon; the
gods of the sun and moon; Vin II 295,21 (cattaro 'me
bhikkhave -anrup upakkilesa); D 1 240,s foll. (passanti
tevijja brahmal).a -e ... yato ca -a uggacchanti yattha ca
ogacchanti ayacanti thomayanti pañjalika namassamana
anuparivattanti); II 319,23 (ime ... -a parasmi~T~loke na
imasmi~T~, deva te na manussa ti); A 1 170,25 (ekacco
anekavihita~T~ iddhividhrup paccanubhoti . . . ime pi
-e ... pal).ina parimasati); Vv 30:1 (atirocasi -a viya);
Mil191,6 (-a siridevata kalidevata ... ); Vism418,9
(-anaiTI pana patubhütadivase yeva
sinerucakkavaJahimavantapabbata patubhavanti); Ps IV
112 ca palana
76,7 (-anrup pabhrup makkhetva chabbal).l).a
yamakabuddharasmiyo); Spk II 360,17 (yatha hi -a
sabbesaiTI aloka~T~ karonti); Mp III 109,3 (kena nu kho -a
kata); Pj II 310,21 (-ehi pi aviddhrupsaniya
asurakayatama);- see also canda, candama(s).
candi, (m)j(n). [cf S. candrin, candrika], belonging to the
moon;? It 20,1 (ya kaci tarakarüpanrup pabha sabba ta
-iya pabhaya kala~T~ nagghanti soJasiiT~, candappabha
yeva ta adhiggahetva bhasate, Be, Ee so; Ce
candimapabhaya; Se candappabhaya; It-a I 90,4: -iya ti
candassa ayan ti -i, tassa -iya pabhaya, jul).haya ti attho,
eds so) f- S III 156,22 (candimappabhaya ...
candappabha tasrup aggam akkhayati; = V 44,18: Ee, Se
candimapabhaya; Be, Ce candimappabhaya =A V 22,12:
candappabhaya).
capa ti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup capati, Wg § 11 :5], consoles;
Dhatum 278 (capa santve); 545.
capala, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) (i) unsteady, inconstant;
thoughtless, inconsiderate, ill-mannered; frivolous;
(according to cts) given to show and adornment;
Abh 1075 (lo le ... -o); M 1 32,9 (uddhata unnaJa -a
mukhara vikil).l).avaca; Ps 1 152,11: -a ti
pattacivaramal).t;ianadina capallena yutta) f- S V 269,26 f-
A 1 70,7; Dhp 33 (phandanaiTI -rup citta~T~ dürakkha~T~
dunnivarayaiTI ujuiTI karoti medhavi; Dhp-a I 288,4:
ekiriyapathena asal).thahanto gamadarako viya ekasmi~T~
arammal).e asal).thahanato -a~T~); Th 157 (uddhato -o
casi~T~; Th-a II 33,6/oll.: -o ti vanamakkato viya
anavaghitacittataya lolo kayamal).t;iana-
vatthamal).t;ianadicapalyayuttataya va -o); 960
(telasal).hehi kesehi -a añjanakkhika rathiyaya
gamissanti; Th-a 111 86,21:
kayamal).t;!anaparikkharamal).t;!anadina capallena yutta);
Mil 93,6 (darako --taya mantitrup guyha~T~ vivarati na
dhareti); Pañca-g 64 (niccappaduttha -a parapiJakara
nara); Nidd I 380,18 (imassa va pütikayassa bahiranrup
va parikkharanaiTI maJ).t;iana . . . keJana . . . gedhitata
gedhitattrup --ta capalyrup ayrup pabbajitassa vibhüsa,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr capalana; Nidd-a 1 413,12: --ta ti
alaiJ.karakaral).rup); Vism 619,26 (puggalassa pathamani
dasa vassani mandadasakrup nama tada hi so mando hoti
-o kumarako);- (ii) quick, swift; Abh 1075 (sighe -o);
- (iii) slavering; ? (or merely shaking; ?) Ja VI 548,27*
(dighuttarottho -o kaJaro bhagganasako; 549,18': -o ti
paggharitalalo); - 2. (m.) one who has thoughtlessly
committed a crime; Abh 738;- capalasakkhara in Ee,
Se at Ja 1 295,11* is wr, prob. for ca lapasakkhara (Be
and Ja V 448,29* so; Ce ca palasakkhara); -
acapala, mfn., not thoughtless or inconsiderate; steady,
constant; M 1 470,16 (araññakena bhikkhuna ...
anuddhatena bhavitabba~T~ -ena); A 1 10,12 (anuddhata
anunnaJa -a); Th 682 (anuddhato -o nipako
srupvutindriyo) Ja VI 293,28* (293,30': -o ti
amal).t;ianasilo); Ja V 203,28* (anuddhatrup -am assa
bhasitrup; 206,24': patitthitataya -a~T~); Pp 35,8; - see
also capalya.
capalaka, n. [cf S. capala], a metal from the Pisaca
country; Vibh-a 63,29.
capalana in Ee, Se at Nidd 1 380,18 is wr for capalata (Be,
Ce so).
capalayika
capalliyikli in Ee, Se at Nidd I 423,11 and
capaHiyikabhavass' in Ee at It-a II 177,12 are wrr Jor
pacalayika and pacalayikabhavass' (Be, Ce so).
capucapuklirakarp, ind. [capu + J?.amul absol. oJ karoti],
making the sound "capucapu"; Vin II 214,24 (na -a¡p
bhuñjitabba¡p); 221,35 (-mp pi acamenti); IV 197,11
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü -arp bhuñjanti; Sp 893,28:
capucapü ti evarp sadda¡p katva katva).
capeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup capayati, Wg § 32:82:
capa parikalkane], pounds; (or cheats;) Sadd 553,12
(capa kakkane: -eti -ayati).
cabbati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup carbati, Wg § 11:31], goes;
Sadd 405,15 (cabba gatiya¡p: ... -ati).
cabbate, -eti, cambati, pr. 3 sg. [S. carvayati; S. Dhatup
carvati, Wg § 15:70], eats; chews; Dhatum 295 (cabba
adane); Sadd 406,25 (camba adane: cambati); - absol.
cabbetva, Sp 1205,7 (calakani ti -etva apaviddhamisani,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se chaqqetva vametva appavighamisani).
camati, pr. 3 sg. [S. camati], eats; drinks; Dhatum 552
(camu adane); Sadd 411,22 (camu ... adane: -ati camü);
556,2o (ayarp pana dhatu bhuvadigaJ?.ikatte -an ti
bhakkhaJ?.attharp gahetva tighati).
camanligamanarp in Ee at Vv 83:6 is wr Jor
gamanagamanarp (Be, Ce, Se so).
camara, m.n. [ts], l. (m.) (i) a kind oJ ox, the yak; Ja l
149,21 (valadhi -assa viya ahosi); V 416,19 (in long cpd,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -camari-); Ap 347,16 (-a bahü); -
(ii) a kind oJ deer; Abh 619 (-o pasado);- 2. (n.) the
bushy tail oJ the yak, used as a Jan or fly-whisk, a
chowry; Sadd 921,11 (-mp camara¡p); - 0
-Vlila,
1 Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr campatha-); Sv 280,3 (--vane);
0
-Vli!a, m. [camara + vala ], the hair oJ a yak's tail;
Sp 272,19 (va1akambalo ti -ehi vayitva katakambalo, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se camari-); As 342,17 (kesamassu
hatthidanta assavala -a ti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se camari-); -
0
-Vijani,f, a Jan or fly-whisk made Jrom a yak's tail, a
chowry; Vin Il 130,22 (na bhikkhave -I dharetabba, Ee
so; Ce camañ-; Be, Se camari-);- see also camara.
camari, f [ts], the Jemale yak; Ja I 21,2* (parirakkha
sabbada sila¡p -I viya valadhirp) Bv 2:124
(cJBv-a 106,6: -I ti camarimigo); Ja III 18,7 (yatha ... -I
va1arp appamadena rakkhati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se camarl);
VI 537,33* H calan! lailghi jhapita makkata picu, Ce, E e
so; Be, Se camañ; perhaps a Jemale camara deer;
538,19·Joll.: camaramiga ca calan! ca langhi cati
vatamiga ca, Ce so; Ee camara miga ... langhi ca calan ti
vatamiga ca; Be camarimiga ca calanimiga ca
langhimiga ca; Se camañmiga ca calanimiga ca
vatamiga ca); Ap 6l,21 (kiki va aJ?.qarp rakkheyya
-1-r-iva valadhirp, Ee so; Be camari viya; Ce -I viya; Se
camañ-r-iva); Mil 365,9 (-iya ekarp ailga¡p gahetabbarp,
Be, Ce, E e so; Se camariya); Vism 36,1 * ( -I va
valadhirp... tath' eva sllarp anurakkhamanaka) =
Sv56,3* = Saddh621;- 0 -miga,m., a yak; (ora
camara deer; ?) Ja I 20,23 (yatha -o nama jivita¡p pi
anoloketva attano valam eva rakkhati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
camara-) = Ap-a 23,4 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce camari-) =
Bv-a 105,1s; Pj I 237,27 (yatha ... -o valadhirp ...
rakkhati, Be, Ce so; Ee camara-; Se camañ-); -se e also
camañ.
camasa, m. [ts], a cup or ladle used at sacrifices; Ja VI
113 camma
528,24* (dharento brahmaJ?.arp VaJ?.J?.arp asadarp -mp
jatmp, so read; eds asadañ ca masa¡p; 529,9·Joll.:
ailkusarp ca aggijuhanakatacchurp ca jatamaJ?.qala¡p ca
dharento, Be so; Ce aggijuhanakatacchusankhata¡p
masarp ca jatarp ca; Se aggijuhana¡p ca masa¡p ca jatmp
ca; Ee ailkusarp ca aggi-dahana¡p ca jatarp ca) = 529,4* =
539,32*.
camu, f [S. camü], an army or division oJ an army;
Abh 381 (sena -ü); Ja 11 22,22* (AIInacittarp nissaya
pahagha mahati -ü Kosala¡p senasantugharp jivagaharp
agahayi; 23,2foll.: haghatugha hutva mahatl sena);
Sadd 411,22 (camu ... adane: camati -ü); 921,14 (-u -ü);
-
0
(ü)-pati, m. [camü + pat?], a general, a
commander; Abh 340 (senani tu -i); Mhv 23:4 (ahu
E1ararajassa Mitto nama -i); Dath 1:4 (Parakkamo
karuJ?.iko -i).
camüru, m. [ts], a kind oJ deer; Abh 620 (piyako -u
kadalimigadi cammayonayo, Be so; Ce camuru).
campa, m. [prob. = campaka qv], a kind oJ tree; Ja VI
151 ,7* (--kadalivitimissayo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se campa-
kadalamissayo; perhaps read campakadalamissa ya with
L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 290); Ap 362,24 (--rukkh' ettha
pupphita).
campaka, m.n. [ts], l. (m.) a tree, a species oJ magnolia
with highly Jragrant flowers; SAF: golden champa,
Michelia champaca L.; Abh 568 (campeyyo tu ca -o);
Ja V 420,2 (in long cpd); VI 270,18' (-a ca naga ca, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se campeyyaka); Apl5,19 (-a sa1ala nipa
nagapunnagaketaka) f Bv 2:50; Ap 368,3; Mil 338,15 (in
long cpd); Vism 514,33 (supupphitarp --rukkharp disva,
Ps 11 196,14 (--puppha¡p ... pasadika¡p e' eva
sugandharp ca); - 2. (n.) a flower oJ the champa tree;
Ap 288,16 (ekarp -am adaya upagacchirp naruttamarp).
campeyya, m. [S. campeya], the Golden champa tree;
Abh 568 (-o tu ca campako ).
1 2
campeyyaka , m. [campeyya + ka ], the champa tree;
Ja VI 269,15* (-a nagamalika; 270,1s·: campaka ca naga
ca).
2
campeyyaka , mfn. [cJ S. campeya], connected with the
town oJ Campa; Vin 11 307,1 (kattha patikkhittan ti -e
vinayavatthusmin ti; see Vini 312,3Joll.); V 114,13; DI
112,23 (yena -a brahmaJ?.agahapatika ten' upasankama);
A IV 59,7 (sambahula -a upasaka); Utt-vn 313.
cambati, see sv cabbati2.
camma, n. [S. carman], l. skin (oJa man oranimal; either
skin generally, or, in contradistinction to chavi, the
inner layer oJ skin, the hypoderma); Abh 1107 (-mp ...
tace); 1109 (taco -ani); Vin I 25,1 (anupahacca chavirp
ca -arp ca ma¡psarp ca nharurp ca aghirp ca aghimiñja¡p
ca); M III 185,3 (sücimukha pilJ?.a chavirp chindanti
chavirp chetva -arp chindanti ... ) ; J a III 184,8 (akaqqhi
-mp chindi, puna akaqqhi marpsarp chindi, puna
akaqqhi naharurp chindi); Cp 2:2:4 (chaviya -ena
marpsena naharu-aghikehi va); Ps IV 111,4 (Jivako pana
tathagatassa ruciya satthakena -mp chinditva); Nidd-a I
304,1 (sakalasañrarp pariyonandhitva pakatakilomakassa
upari chaviya hegha thitarp -mp); Sadd231,17 (-e
-asmirp -amhi -ani); - ifc see atthi-; - 2. the flayed
skin oJ an animal, a hide; leather, Abh 442 (-mp tu
camma
ajinaf!1); Vin I 193,1o (vacchakaq¡ vadhitva -aq¡
vidhünitva); 196,4 (Avantidakkhi!lapathe bhante -ani
atthara!lilni eJakacarnmaf!l ajacarnmaq¡ migacarnmaq¡);
D II 332,27 (Ímaf!l purisaq¡ jivantaq¡ yeva kumbhiya
pakkhipitva mukhaf!l pidahitva aliena -ena onandhitva);
Ja III 82,4 (tassa kira -am eva nivasanaf!1 ca parupanaf!1
ca); IV 172,27* (rathakaro va -assa parikantaf!1
upahanaq¡); VI 77,11* (na me maq¡sani khajjani -en'
attho na vijjati); Sp 1088,29 (manussacarnmaq¡ rhapetva
yena kenaci -ena upahana vattati); Ps II 45,10 (daddulan
ti carnmakarehi -aq¡ likhitva cha99itakasaraq¡);
Vin-vn 2650 (eJakajamiganaq¡ tu -aq¡ vattati
bhikkhuno); - ifc see ajina-, uddalita-, eJaka-
(sv eJaka 1), tela-; - 3. a shield; leather annour,
Abh 377 (sannaho kaiJ.karo -aq¡); 392 (kherakaq¡
phalaka~p. -aq¡); 1107 (-af!l tu phalake); Ja V 373,23* (na
te . . . passe . . . -a~p. va kira~p. va vammite ca
dhanuggahe; 373,28·: -an ti saraparittanacammaf!1);
VI 580,3* (aropentu dhaje tattha -ani kavacani ca); -
ifc see así- sv asi 2; - 4. the parchment sounding board
of a villa; S IV 197,13 (do!liq¡ ca paricca -a~p. ca paricca
da!l9a~p. ca paricca . . . purisassa ca tajjaq¡ vayamaq¡
paricca evayaq¡ bhante v1!la nama... anekehi
sarnbharehi sarnaraddha vadati); Mi153,2o (vi!laya
pattaq¡ na si ya -aq¡ na si ya do!li na si ya ... purisassa ca
tajjo vayamo na siya jayeyya saddo ti); - S. bellows; ?
Thüp 185,1 (dipika -ani calenti; not in Sp); -
o• -al}l}.a, m. a leather water-bag; Ja I 250,17 (udakaf!l
siñcanatthaya tesaq¡ -e e' eva darukure ca datva, Ce, Ee
so; Be 0 -kure; Se 0 -küre); - 0 '-atthara, n., a leather
covering or rug; Vin-vn 3089 (-o . . . majjhadese na
vattati); - o• -attharal}a, n., a leather covering or rug;
Sp 1332.27 (-ani); Th-a II 155,9; Utt-vn 595 (-aq¡); -
o• -attharal}aka, n., a leather covering or rug;
Utt-vn 849 ( -af!l);- 0 ávanaddha, mfn. and n., covered
with skin; a drum; Niddi 181,15 (Ídaf!l sañraq¡ ... -aq¡
chaviya paricchannaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be 0 -vinaddhaq¡; Se
cammavinaddhaq¡; Nidd-a I 303,29 foil.: o-vinaddhan
ti . . . cammena vinaddhaf!l pariyonaddhaf!l, -an ti pi
paJi, eds so); Bv-a 40,9 (-ani ti 0 -vinaddhani ...
devadundubhiyo ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -naddhani
ti);- o•-uppatana, n., tearing offthe skin; Ja VI 430,16
(veJupesikahi pinhiyaf!l -af!llabhitva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
pighicammupparanaf!l); Saddh 140 (--dukkhena
phandanta gavi-adayo);- 0 -kara, m. [camma + kara 1],
a worker in leather, a shoemaker, Abh 508 (-o
rathakaro); Vin IV 8,zs; Ja V 45,27 (-e pakkosapetva tata
amhakaf!l kumbhabharagahikaq¡ cammabhastaq¡ katuq¡
vattati, cammayottavarattahatthi-pada-
upahanacarnmachattehi pi no attho, sabbaq¡ sighaq¡
katva aharatha ti); Ap 317 ,s (-a ca nhapika, Be, Ce, E e
so; Se tunnavaya); Mil331,9 ( ... -a rathakara
dantakara ... ); Sp 884,13 (yatha hi -o cammaf!1 vitthata~p.
karissami ti ito e' ito ca samañchati);
0
-kari(n), m(jn)., a worker in leather; Pv-a 175,28
(rathakañ ti -ino); - 0
-khal}l}.a, m.n., a piece of
leather, esp. one used for sitting upon; Vin II 122,17
(bhajana bahuq¡ bhijjanti, anujanami bhikkhave tayo
varake lohavarakaq¡ daruvaraka~p. -an ti; Sp 1208,to:
-af!l nama tulaya va karakarakena va yojetabbakaf!l
114 camma
camma-bhajanaq¡); IV 40,28 (taWkaq¡ va -aq¡ va
padapuñchani~p. va . . . ajjhokase santharitva); París I
176,1s (taWka va -o va); Ap 213,26 (-af!l maya dinnaq¡);
Mil 366,3 (yattha katthaci -aq¡ pattharitva yattha
katthaci sayitabbaf!l); Vism 99,1 (akase -af!l
paññapetva); Sp 776,6 ( -aq¡ nama
sihavyagghadipitaracchacarnmadisu pi ya~p. kiñci
cammaf!1); Kkh 92,to; Ps 11 215,6 (cilimika -o
ti!lasantharo P~!lasantharo ti ida~p. santhatasenasanaf!1
nama); - 0 -khandho in Ee at Nidd I 131,17, 377,5,
466,9 and 481,16 is wr for cammakha!l9o (Be, Ce, Se so);
-
0
-khila, m. or n. [carnma + khila 1 or khila2 ?
cf S. carmakila], a wart; Sp 257,31 (nimitte jataq¡ ... -aq¡
va piJakaq¡ va paveseti; Sp-r [Be] II 83,19: -an ti nimitte
utthita~p. carnmam eva, U!1!1iga!l9o ti pi vadanti) f.
Kkh 2 39,18 (Ce, Se so; Be, Ee 0 -khilaq¡);
0
-dhara, mfn., carrying a shield; (or wearing leather
armour; ?) Ja VI 592,16* (karoriya -a khaggahattha;
592,22·: -a ti ka!l9avar~acammadhara);
0
-naddha, mfn. and n., covered or bound round with
skin; a drum; Bv 1:31 ( -ani vadenti; Bv-a 40,9: -ani ti
0
-vinaddhani, ayarn eva parho, devadundubhiyo ti attho,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cammavanaddhani ti); Bv-a 79,26*
(avadita kenaci -a supokkhara dundubhiyo ca villa); -
0
-nillekhana, n., the scrapings from a skin;? Ps II
228,17 (naharudaddulena ti -ena; Ps-r [Be] II 174,5: -af!l
camma~p. likhitva cha99itakasaraq¡);
0
-pakkha, m(jn)., leather-winged; a bat; Sp 363,18
(vagguli-adayo -a); Sv 498,5 (pakkhino ti ye keci
atthipakkha va -a va lomapakkha va); - 0 -patta. m.
[cf S. carmapatta], a flat leather thong; ? V in II 266,17
(na -ena pasuka narnetabba); Vin-vn 2955 (vilivena ca
pattena -ena va tatha); - 0
-pariyonaddha, mfn.,
covered with skin; Ps II 300,2o (-esu bheri-adisu); -
0
-pasibbaka, m.n., a leathern bag or sack; Abh 526
(bhasta -aq¡); Ja III 343,7 (baddhasattu-
abaddhasattünaf!1 -aq¡ püretva); Spk I 168,7 (-e
püretva); Thi-a 258,31 (ku!lapabharitaq¡ -aq¡);
0
-baddha, mfn., bound, put together, with skin; Sv 440,6
(tantibaddha villa -a bheriyo ca) = Ps IV 186,14 (Be so;
Ee, Se 0 -bandha; Ce omits); - 0 -bhasta,f, a leathern
bag or sack; Ja V 45,zs (kumbhabharagahikaq¡ -a~p.
katu~p. vanati); 46,3 (-ayaq¡ pakkhipi);- 0 -maluka,f
[?], a leathern bag or sack; Ja VI 431 ,2o (mahatlhi
-' -adihi paq¡suq¡ haritva, Ce so; Ee
mahaticammamalukadihi, prob. wr; Be mahantehi
0
-pasibbakehi valukapaq¡suq¡ haritva; Se 0 -pasibbakahi);
432,1 (-' -adihi pa~p.suq¡ haritva, Ce, Ee so; Be
0
-pasibbakehi; Se 0 -pasibbakahi); - 0 -yodhi(n), m., a
soldier who wears leather armour or is anned with a
shield; DI 5l,lo ( ... süra -ino dasakaputta ... ; Sv 157,11:
-ino ti ye cammakañcukaf!l va pavisitva saraparittanaf!1
cammaf!1 va gahetva yujjhanti) f. A IV 107,14; -
0
-yoni, m.(?), source of hides, an antelope; Abh 620
(kadalimigadi -ayo); - 0 -rüpa, n., a leather puppet;
Mhv 66:133 (karesi -'-adikiJadassakasannibhe); -
0
-vatta, m., 0 -vatti,f, a strip of skin;? Ja V 73,18'
(olambanta~p. -i~p. hatthena gahetva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
0
-bandha~p.); Ps II 59,6 (heqha givato paqhaya -e
kantitva gopphake patenti, Ce, Ee so; Be 0 -baddhe; Se
cammaka
0
-page) Mp II 89,14 Nidd-a I 278,22;
0
-Viisi(n), mfn. [camma + vasi(n) 1], wearing hides,
wearing a garment of animal skins; Ja VI 528,25' (-i
chama seti; 529,w·: -i ti ajinacammadharo); 530,28';
Ap 456,3 (-i tada asirp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhammavadi);
-
0
-Vinaddha, mfn. and n., bound or covered with skin;
a drum; Vin I 194,2 (mañcarp pi pitharp pi
cammonaddhani honti -ani); Nidd I 181,15 (idarp
sañrarp ... -arp chaviya paticchannarp, Be so; Ce, Ee
cammavanaddharp; Se cammavinaddharp; Nidd-a I
303,29 foil.: -an ti .. . cammena vinaddharp
pariyonaddharp, cammavanaddhan ti pi paji, eds so);
Sp 545,II (-ani vil).abheri-adini anamasani); Bv-a 40,9
(cammanaddhani ti -ani ... devadundubhiyo ti attho, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee cammavanaddhani ti);
0
-vedhaviddha, mfn. [camma + vedha + viddha 1],
struck with a piercing of the skin; A 11 114,23 (ekacco
bhaddo assajaniyo ... -o sarpvijjati sarpvegarp apajjati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee marpsavedhaviddho; Mp III 121,7: -o
ti chavicammarp chindantena patoda-vedhena viddho );
- niccamma, mfn.,flayed; skinless; S 11 99,!4 (gavi-a;
Spk 11 111,14: -a ti khurato paqhaya yava siilgamüla
sakalasarirato uddalitacamma kirpsukarasi-val).l).a); Ja III
281,5 (atha narp raJa... piqhirp -arp karetva
vissajjapesi); Sp 509,9 (e)ake vadhitva -e katva);- see
also titikkhacammasannaha (sv titikkha),
nippakkhacamma (sv pakkha 1).
cammaka, n.(?) [camma + ka2], a skin; a piece of leather;
Ja I 13,27* (kese muñcitv' aharp tattha vakacirarp ca -arp
kalale pattharitvana) = Bv 2:51 (Bv-a 89,33: -an ti
camma-khal).¡;larp); - ifc see ajina-.
cammi(n), mfn. [cf S. carmin], armed with a shield; ?
Sadd 188,19* (chatti mali -l).
cammika, mfn. [cf S. carmika], a leather-worker; a
shoemaker; ? Ap 317,7 (usukara bhamakara -a e' eva
tacchaka, Ce so; Be, Se cammakara ca tacchaka; Ee
usukara -a ca tacchakara ca sOI).I).akara ca).
caya, m. and mfn. [ts], l. (m.) a mound, apile; a raised
platform; accumulation, assemblage; Abh 629; 1128
(-o bandhanarasisu); Vinll 117,16foil. (anujanami
bhikkhave uccavatthukarp katun ti, -o paripatati.
anujanami bhikkhave ciniturp tayo -e i¡rhakacayarp
silacayarp darucayan ti); Sp 1247,26 (sace akata¡rhane
-arp va pamukharp va karoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ca yarp);
Mp IV 53,II (-arp cinitva); As 44,15 (tato eva
acayasailkhata -a apetatta nibbanarp apetarp -a ti
apacayo ); Sadd 495,25 (-o sañcayo ); - ifc se e kesa-,
nana-, puñña-; - 2. (mfn.) collecting; having an
accumulation; ? M I 451,36 foil. (gahapati . .. a9<;!ho
mahaddhano mahabhogo nekanarp nikkhagal).anarp -o
nekanarp dhaññagal).anarp -o nekanarp khettagal).anarp
-o ... ; Ps Ill 169,13: -o ti santanato katasannicayo ).
*cayati\ ¡.Jd; Lf S. ciketi], honours; - se e cayitabba; -
see also cayati.
cayati 2 , pr. 3 sg. ¡.Jci3; S. Dhatup cayate, Wg § 14:5].
goes; Sadd 417,3o (caya ... gatiyarp: ... -ati).
cayana, n. [ts], piling up; apile, a raised platform;- ifc
se e inhaka- (sv i¡rhaka); - o• -itthaka, o• -iqhika,f, a
brick for building a platform;? Sp 1245,!7 (-a
chadaninhaka, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se cayaninhika).
115 cara
cayitabba, mfn. [fpp of *cayati 1 qv], to be honoured; Pj I
221,30 (-an ti cetiyarp, püjetabban ti vuttarp hoti).
cara, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (i) (mfn.) moving, going about;
(usually ifc) going; living, being; performing,
practising; having one's home (in); Abh 711 (jailgamarp
ca -arp c'eva); 1107 (-o caramhi cañcale, Ce so; Be -o
-amhi); Mi1415,22 (yogina yogavacarena kilesanarp
upari muddhani -ena bhavitabbarp, or cpd:
uparimuddhani-carena ?); Ap-a 390,10 (giriduggacaro
as in ti ... tasmirp giridugge pabbatantare -o caral).asllo
asirp ahosirp); - probably read cpds at A V 60,8
(antalikkhecara, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se antalikkhe -a);
Vv 63:1 (luddo vanecaro, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vane-o);
Ja IV 425,21* (antalikkhecaro dijo; Ce, Ee, Se antalikkhe
-o; Be antalikkhacaro ); and Ap 332,6 (Ee antalikkhe -a;
Be, Ce, Se antalikkhacara); - ifc see atisima- (sv sima),
attha- (sv attha\ antara-, antalikkha- (sv antalikkha\
antalikkhecara, udaka-, udakecara, eka-, giri-, catu-
(sv catu[r]), jala-, ti- (sv ti 2 ), thala-, dvi-, pañca-, patrha-
(sv pa¡rha\ paddha- (sv paddha3), pure-, baddha-
(sv bandhati), vanecara, saddhirp-; - (ii) (m.) going
about; practising, performing; Ja VI 190,Io* (disodisarp
gamissama bhatupariyesanarp -arp; or l).amul absol. of
carati? cf 190,13': -an ti amma tayo pi jana bhatu-
pariyesanarp caranta); - ifc see go-; - see duccara,
sucara below; - 2. (m.) a spy; a secret agent; a scout;
Abh 347 (-o ca gü)hapuriso); 1107; SI 79,8 (ete bhante
mama purisa -a ocaraka janapadarp ocaritva agacchanti,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se cara; Spk I 150,17: ocaraka ti
he¡rhacaraka, -a hi pabbatamatthakena caranta pi
hetthacaraka va honti) = Ud 66,5 (eds cora ocaraka); -
0 ii~ara\ n., what moves and does not move, the animate
and inanimate world; Cp-a 166,3o (sakalarp -arp
dharentl pi mahapathavi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se varavararp);
-
0
'-acara 2 , mfn., moving; Abh 711 (tasarp ñeyyarp
-arp); - o• -adesita, mfn., shown, indicated by spies or
scouts; Mhv 66:99 (--magga te . . . nikkhamurp); -
0
-purii..f(?) [from cara+ pura(s) ?], (according to ct) a
retinue in .front and behind; (or with scouts ahead; ?)
A V 133,19 (sambahula abhiññata abhiññata Licchavi
bhadrehi bhadrehi yanehi -aya . . . Mahavanarp
ajjhogahanti, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be parapuraya; Se
pararpparaya; Mp V 51,19: -a ti cararp vuccati
pacchimabhago pura ti purimabhago, purato dhavantena
pacchato anubandhantena ca mahaparivarena ti attho,
Ce, Ee so; Be parapuraya ti pararp vuccati ... ; Se
paramparaya ti pararp vuccati ... ); - 0 -purisa, m., a
spy, an agent; a scout; Ja II 404,9 (-a tesarp katharp
sul).anta agharpsu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cara-); VI 469,12 (-o
viya hutva upayena rajanarp pañharp pucchitva, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee ahutva); Vism 121,1s (atha narp -o ayan ti
maññamana anayavyasanarp papenti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
cara-); Dhp-a liT 45,1o (so pi -arp pesesi gacch' assa
katharp sutva ehi ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cara-); 66,21 (raja
Ajatasattu core pariyesanatthaya -e payojesi, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se cara-)= Ap-a 242,1;- 0 -Viidappamokkhaya in
Ee at S Ill 12,11: read cara vadappamokkhaya; -
duccara, mfn., dif.ficult to practise, hard to do; Vin III
26,26 (asakyaputtiyabhavarp patthayamano ... duce aran
ti vadati viññapeti ... na sucaran ti vadati viññapeti); -
caraka
sucara, mfn., easy to practise; Vin III 26,26; - see also
okacara (sv oka\
caraka, m. and mf(-ika)n. [cf S., BHS caraka, AMg caraa,
caraga], l. (m.) one who goes about or roams; a
wandering ascetic; SI 106,31* (-a bahu bherava bahii
atho <;iaJT~sasiril)1sapa bahii; Spk I 173,28: -a ti
sihavyagghadika sañcaraQ.asatta); Ja V 395,11* (yo
sabba1okaJTI -o mahamuni dhamme !hito Narado
saccanikkamo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be sabba1okaccarito );
Ap 37,16 (-a tapasa e' eva caranti mahiya tada); 358,13
(addhika pathika sabbe yacaka -a bahii upagacchanti te
niccal)1 bhikkhayanta mamaJTI ghare, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
varaka); - ifc see vana-; - 2. (mfn.) (one) who
practises or performs; one who acts habitually; - ifc
see attha- (sv attha2), hegha-.
caral}a, m.n. and mfn. [ts], l. (m.n.) afoot; Abh 277 (pado
-al)1 ca va); A III 346,22* (tapo ca brahmacariyaJTI -a
nagassa tyapare; Mp III 372,3 foil.: te buddhanagassa
apare dve pacchimapada); Th 694 (sati ca sampajaññaJTI
ca -a nagassa te pare); Ja V 431 ,9· (vajamigo ...
pañcavudho ti mukhassa e' eva catunnal)1 ca -iinal)1
vasen' etal)1 vuttaJTI, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee pañcahattho ti);
VI 500,15* (yassa muduta1a hattha -a ca sukhe !hita);
Ud-a 125,3o (bhagavato -ani tava sirasa vandahi);
Nidd-a 1 124,22 (-a ti hi pada vuccanti); Bv-a 224,32
(cakka1ailkatatalehi -ehi); - 2. (n. and mfn.) (i) (n.)
going about, motion; roaming; doing, acting,
performing; observance; Ja III 73,2 (evariipena balena
saddhil)1 -ato ekacariya va seyyo ti); Sp 198,4 (CarikaJTI
-'-atthaya); 929,3 (brahmacariyassa -ena); 1106,33
(anamantetva -aJT~ kappissati); Ps II 242,36 (antogame
piQ.<;iaya -al)1); Dhp-a III 485,1 (vesiyadike agocare -ena
sailkilighaJTI); It-a I 143,11 (savisayasmil)1 yeva -ato, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr caranto); Pjll 383,18 (-ena ti
gamanena); Sadd 423,12 (cara -e: carati); - ifc see
carika-; - (ii) (mfn.) going about; moving; Ja 1 29,8*
(ahal)1 tena samayena ja!ilo uggatapano antalikkhamhi
-o pañcabhiññasu paragii) = Ap-a 32,6*; Mi1343,4*
(antalikkharnhi -a dhammanagare vasanti te); -
(iii) (n.) behaviour, conduct; esp. good and moral
conduct; M 1 358,4 (yaJTI pi . . . ariyasavako
sllasampanno hoti idal)1 pi 'ssa hoti -asmil)1; Ps III
33,5 foil.: idal)1 pi sllavantassa bhikkhuno -al)1 nama
hott ti attho, -aJT~ nama bahu1J1 anekavidha1J1 slladayo
paQ.Q.arasadhamma, tattha idaJTI pi ekaJTI -an ti attho,
padatthato pana carati tena agatapubbaJTI disal)1 gacchatl
ti -aJT~); S 1 168,9* (ma jatil)1 puccha -aJT~ ca puccha) =
Sn 462; Ja III 236,19* (dukkha pamuñce -aJT~ apatva);
IV 332,5* (so maJTI avedl gatim agatil)1 ca namaJTI ca
gottaJTI -al)1 ca sabbaJT~); Ap 45,19 (-ena ca sampanno );
Pet254,29 (vijja ca -al)1 ca); Mi124,21* (-ena e' eva
sampannalJ1 ... disva raja NagasenaJTI); Vism 202,3ofoll.
(-an ti sllasal)1varo indriyesu guttadvarata bhojane
mattaññuta jagariyanuyogo satta saddhamma cattari
riipavacarajjhanani ti ime PaQ.Q.arasa dhamma veditabba,
ime yeva hi paQ.Q.arasa dharnma yasma etehi carati
ariyasavako gacchati amataJTI disaJTI tasma -an ti vutta);
- ifc see gotta-, ciQ.Q.a- (sv carati), vijja-, sampanna-,
sampannavijja- (sv sampajjati); - 3. (n.) a travelling
picture, a painting on cloth which is carried around;
116 cara ti
S III 151,24 foil. (ditthaJTI vo bhikkhave -aJT~ nama cittan
ti, eval)1 bhante. taJT~ pi kho bhikkhave -aJT~ nama cittaJT~
citten' eva cintital)1, tena pi kho bhikkhave -ena cittena
cittal)1 yeva cittataraJTI; Spk II 327,19: -al)1 nama cittan ti
vicaraQ.a-cittaJT~. Sañkhya nama brahmaQ.apasaQ.<;iika
honti, te pa!a-koghakal)1 katva tattha nanappakara
sugatiduggativasena sampattivipattiyo 1ekhapetva idal)1
kammal)1 katva idal)1 pa!i1abhati idal)1 katva idan ti
dassenta taJTI cittal)1 gahetva vicaranti); As 64,14
(kasmil)1 pi -al)1 nama cittal)1 aticittam eva hoti. tal)1
karontanal)1 cittakaranalJ1 eval)1vidhani ettha riipani
katabbani ti cittasañña uppajjati); Sadd 538,3o (citta-
saddo ... di!!haJTI vo bhikkhave -al)1 nama cittan ti adisu
cittakamme);- caraQ,a in Ee at Ap 327,33 is prob. wr;
Be, Ce carata; Se carite; - o• -antaga, mfn. [caraQ,a +
antaga], who has reached the end of, ie perfection in,
good conduct; Ap 467,25 (-o ... mahamati, Be so; Se
caraQ,antako; Ce, E e maraQ.antago; Ap-a 495,9: tada ffiaJTI
-o ti .. . slladi -paQ.Q.arasannaJTI caraQ.adhammanaJTI
antago pariyosanaJTI patto paripiirakari ti attho.
maraQ.antago ti pi pa!ho, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce mal)1
paQ.Q.arasantago ti); - 0 aravinda, n., a 'foot-lotus', a
beautiful foot; Sadd 240,7;- o• -ayudha, m(jn)., whose
weapons are the feet, a cock; Sadd 484,7 (-o ti
kukku!o);- 0 -va(t), mfn., of good conduct; Sn 536 (yo
idha caraQ.esu pattipatto ... 0 -Va so);- 0 -Vipanna, mfn.,
whose behaviour is wrong; failing in good conduct; A II
163,32 (puthujjano hi ... aññatra vijja-caranena -o kho
avuso yathabhutaJTI na janati na passati);
0
-Sampanna, mfn., perfect in good conduct; MI 358,26
(vijjasampanno iti pi -o iti pi vijjacaraQ.asampanno iti
pi; Ps III 33,17: -o iti pi ti pañcadasahi dhammehi
caraQ.a-sampanno iti pi); A 11 163,33 (-o yathabhiitaJTI
janati passati).
caral}aka, m. and n. ? [caraQ.a + ka2], l. (m.) one who
goes about; ? Sv 946,3 (tassa puttadaraparijanassa rattil)1
--bhavaJTI ñatva cora suññagehaJTI pavisitva YaJTI
icchanti taJT~ haranti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee caraQ,a-); Mp I
334,22 (ayal)1 mahatapo tapacaraJTI gaQ,hitva --brahmaQ.o,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be caraQ,abrahmaQ,ako);- 2. (n.) going,
moving about;? As 143,5 (arammaQ,e --vasena caro, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se caraQ.a-); - 0 -patta, n., the bowl for
going, or the bowl of one who goes; Sp 977,6
(uttighapattan ti piQ.<;iaya -al)1).
carati, pr. 3 sg. [S. carati], l. moves, goes, walks; goes
about; roams; grazes; Dhatup 243 (cara
gatibhakkhaQ,esu); Dhatum 362; Vin III 108,3o (sañgame
ca nandi -ati rañña Licchavi pabhagga ti; Sp513,1:
nandi -atl ti vijayabheri ahiQ.<;iati); DI 26,24
(vobhindanta maññe -anti paññagatena ditthigatani);
M 1 280,1 (ayal)1 kho udakarahado . . . tatr' ime
sippisambuka pi sakkharaka!hala pi macchagumba pi
-anti pi tighanti pi ti; Ps 11 324,13: ettha
sakkharaka!halaJTI tighati yeva, itarani -anti pi ti!!hanti
pi); 449,4 (varaJTI te bhikkhu tiQ.hena govikantanena
kucchi parikanto na tv eva yal)1 rattandhakaratimisayaJTI
kucchihetu piQ.<;iaya -as! ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ya ...
carasa ti); S I 30,8* (ye keci ariyadhammal)1 vigarahanta
-anti dummedha); A 11 15,6* (yatal)1 -e yatal)1 tighe
yatal)1 acche yataJTI saye) = It 120,9•; Sn 20 (kacche
carati
rüJhatii¡.e -anti gavo; Pj II 33,3o: -antl ti bhattakiccatp.
karonti); Th 50 (vijjuta -ati nabhe; Th-a I 132,4: saterata
iikase ito e' ito ca vicaranti); 532 (punappunatp.
yacanaka -anti punappunatp. danapatl dadanti); 946
(yatha kal_l!akanhanamhi -eyya anupiihano satitp.
upanhapetvana evatp. game muni -e); Ja III 275,13
(nagaraja . . . gocaratp. ga1_1hanto -ati); IV 331,4•
(vammikathüpasmitp. kipillikani nippothayanto tuvatp.
pure -asi); 460,29* (ossaghakayo urago -atu; 461,4·: -atü
ti -atu); V 16,4* (ace1o va naggo -eyya game
visikhantarani); 100,15* (upassutitp. mahiiraja ranhe
janapade -a); Ap 13,26 (paccekabuddhanatp. subhasitani
-anti 1okamhi sadevakamhi; Ap-a 205,27: -anti
pavattantl ti attho); Mi1373,27 (makka!o rukkhe yeva
-ati tinhati nisidati); Sadd 423,12/oll. (cara cara1_1e: -ati
vicarati anucarati, cara gatibhakkha1_1esu: -ati vicarati
anucarati ... -aH ti gacchati bhakkhati va, tatha hi -an ti
padassa gacchanto khadanto ca ti atthatp. vadanti garü);
- 2.joumeys, wanders (through); travels over; Ja IV
209,3* (Iso vanani -asi samani visamani ca); 453,7*
(parinibbuta lokam imatp. -anti); V 23,23* (-ami
kacchani vanam ciihatp.); Ap361,1s (uttamatthatp.
gavesanto -issati mahitp. imatp.); Sv 737,33 (seghanhena
brahmatp. ariyamaggatp. -antl ti brahmacañ, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -atl ti); Sadd 870,11 (maggatp. -issatl ti maggatp.
-issatp.);- 3. goes about (one's lije), goes one's way;
lives; behaves, conducts oneself; is habitually; acts (in a
certain way ); Vin I 350,6* (abhibhuyya sabbani
parissayani -eyya ten' attamano satima); DI 8,15 (-a
vadappamokkhaya, nibbe!hehi va sace pahosi ti);
II 254,19* (te -anti suddha vimala cakkhumata sudanta
susunaga); SI 57,13* (-anti bala dummedha amitten' eva
attana) = Dhp 66 (Dhp-a II 36,16: -anti ti catühi
iriyapathehi akusa1am eva karonta vicaranti); SI 69,19*
(uccavacehi vm:.u¡.ehi urago -ati tejasi); 108,24* (-eyy'
adittasiso va natthi maccussa nagamo); 127,4* (acchejja
tal).hatp. ga1_1asaftghaciiri addha -issanti bahü ca saddhii,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee bahü ca satta; Spk I 188,4: aññe pi
saddha bahujana ekatp.sena -issanti, Be, Se so; Ee addha
aññe pi bahujana; Ce tarissanti ti addha aññe pi bahujana
ekatp.sena tarissanti); 210,21 * (saddhammassa anaññaya
amma dukkhatp. -amase); A I 236,9* (sato guttindriyo
-e); Dhp 142 (alaftkato ce pi samatp. -eyya); Sn 35 (eko
-e khaggavisiil).akappo); Th 1015 (sada -ati nibbuto);
1074 (patthaddhagivo -ati aharp seyyo ti maññati); 1122
(nibbanam evabhimano -issatp.); Thi 4
(sabbayogavisa~p.yutta -a loke anasava; Thi-a 11,22:
vihariihi ti attho ); Ja I 61 ,s (aharp hi nibbanatp. gavesanto
-ami); IV 107 ,2o• (ya~p.hetu satta visamatp. -anti; 107 ,2s-:
satta kayaduccaritadivisamatp. -anti); 222,1o* (yatto
casivise -e; 222,13": asivisassa santike yattapa!iyatto
-eyyasi); 487,12* (aharp pi eka -issami loke); Nidd I
26,31 (eko -ati viharati iriyati vattati piileti yapeti yapeti,
ayatp. kayaviveko); Ap 42,8 (nirupadhi vippamutto
upasanto -am' aharp); Cp 3:11:2 (arati me -ati manase;
Cp-a 242,6: mama manase citte arati -ati pavattati);
Mil 25,23 (ko kamesu miccha -ati);- 4. very often with
acc.: acts, peifonns; practises; does what is ... ; lives
in; eg atthatp. -ati, serves the interest (of), helps; S I
162,31* (ubhinnatp. atthatp. -ati attano ca parassa ca) =
117 cara ti
Th 443; Ja III 370,3 (na bhikkhave idan' eva pubbe pi
tathagato ñatinatp. attharp -at' eva ti); IV 293,15* (attharp
-etha mama viirichanna; 293,19": atthatp. me -iihi ti);
VI 312,11 * (atthatp. mayi -as su); - dhammarp -ati, does
one's duty, does what is right; lives righteously;
practises the dhamma; SI 19,11* (dhammarp -e yo pi
samuñchakarp -e) = Ja IV 66,6*; Dhp 168 (dhammarp
sucaritarp -e); Thi 430 (puttaka -iihi tatp. dhammarp;
Thi-a 247,33: pabbajitva -itabbarp brahmacariyadi-
dhammatp. -a); Ja III 268,6* (dhammatp. -atha ñatayo;
268,8·: kayasucaritadibhedatp. dhammarp karotha);
393,22* (dhammarp -a brahmacariyassa ka1o, Ee so; Be,
Ce, Se -a); IV 53,6* (dhammarp -ama na musa
bhal).ama); VI 224,19* (kathatp. dhammarp -e maceo
matapitüsu); - manapatp. -ati, does what is agreeable;
acts pleasantly; A III 38,18 (bhattu manapatp. -ati) =
IV 266,23*; - vadharp -ati, kills; Vv 53:12 (ma ca
pal).avadhatp. vividharp -assu asucirp); - also tapatp.
-ati, peifonns austerities; migavatp. -ati, goes hunting;
esanarp -ati, makes a search, searches; see below; -
esp. also with related acc., eg caritarp -ati, peifonns an
action; S III 241,23 (sac' ajja mayarp kayena sucaritatp.
-eyyama); A II 85,3o (kayena sucaritarp -ati); Dhp 231
(kayaduccaritarp hitva kayena sucaritatp. -e);- ciirikatp.
-ati, makes a joumey; S I 105,26 (-atha bhikkhave
carikatp. bahujanahitaya ... ); Ja III 492,3* (-a ciirikarp
1ohitatul).«;ia); - brahmacariyatp. -ati, Uves a celibate
life; practises the holy life; Vin I 12,37 (-atha
brahmacariyarp samma dukkhassa antakiriyaya ti);
181,24 (na-y-idarp sukaratp. agaratp. ajjhavasata
ekantaparipul).l).atp. ekantaparisuddhatp. saiJ.kha1ikhitarp
brahmacariyatp. -iturp); MI 163,35 (iccham' ahatp. ...
imasmirp dhammavinaye brahma-cariyatp. -itun ti); S I
169,23* (arahatp. ahatp. brahmacariyatp. -ami); Sn 32
(brahmacariyatp. sugate -amase; Pj ll 43,21 foll.: -amase
iti -ama, yarp hi tatp. sakkatena -amas! ti vuccati, tatp.
idha -amase iti, aghakathacariya pana se iti nipato ti
bha1_1anti, ten' eva e' ettha ayacanattharp sandhaya -ema
se iti pi pa!hatp. vikappenti. yatp. ruccati tatp.
gahetabbatp.); Ja IV 108,28* (brahmacariyatp. -eyyasi);
Ap 470,16 (-atha brahmacariyatp.); - 5. undergoes,
undertakes; Ja IV 299,14 (ekacce vaggulivatarp -antu);
also manattarp -ati, undergoes the manatta penance; se e
below; - part.pr. (a) cara(t), mfn., D III 58,2o (gocare
bhikkhave -atatp. sake pettike visaye na 1acchati Maro
otiiratp.); M I 92,37 (-ato ca me tighato ca suttassa ca
jagarassa ca); Dhp 61 (-arp ce nadhigaccheyya seyya~p.
sadisam attano ); It 115,12 (-ato ce pi bhikkhave
bhikkhuno uppajjati kama-vitakko; It-a II 173,11: -ato ti
gacchantassa caftkamantassa va); Sn 823 (munino -ato
kamesu anapekhino ); Th 1119 (susa~p.vutatto
visikhantararp -arp ku1esu); Ja V 70,1* (eko -atp.
gogaveso); VI 190,10* (disodisatp. gamissami bhatu
pariyesanatp. -atp.); Mhv 19:73 (maii.galahatthi ... anhasi
gocararp -arp); - caratp. in Ee at Nett 66,26 is wr for
carantarp (Be, Ce so); (b) caranta, mfi -anti)n., Vin I
117,5 (manussa bhikkhü pil).«;iaya -ante pucchanti);
II 46,8 (manattarp -anto); III 50,8 (dhammarp -anto
samikatp. parajeti, apatti parajikassa; Sp 339,10 foll.:
bhikkhusaftghe va rajaku1e va vinicchayatp. karonto);
carati
MI 11,2 (yathariipe agocare -antaJTI); SI 29,7* (lukhaJTI
tapaJTI vassasataJTI -anta); 154,2o* (kula ku1~ pil:¡.gikaya
-anto); A 1 150,2 (passanti deva ca tathagata ca
1okasmiJTI balaJTI visam~ -ant~); IV 333,1 (gam~ va
nigamaJTI va pii:~gaya -anto); Ud 77,19* (na taJTI
nitt~haJTI muniJTI -ant~ navajanati sadevako pi 1oko);
Ja III 395,8* (pass ami . . . nariJTI ...
gopanasibhoggasamaJTI -antiJTI); V 55,24* (yam
addasatha dahariJTI kumilriJTI kasayavatthaJTI anagariyaJTI
-antiJTI); Cp 2:4:3 (-anta gamanigamaJTI Bar~asim
upagamuJTI); Mi1186,17 (purisaJTI ... vlthiy~ -antaJTI);
Vism 42,23 (antesu nikkhamitva bhümiy~ -antesu pi);
(e) caramana, mfn., V in 1 8,32 (bhagava anupubbena
carikaJTI -aman o yena Barai:lasl . . . ten' upasaiJ.kami);
D 1 87,3 (bhagava Kosalesu carikaJTI -amano); MI 111,7
(puriso saragavesl sarapariyesan~ -aman o); Sn 413
(sapadii.naJTI -amano guttadvaro susaJTIVUto); Vv 29:8
(pii:~gaya -amanassa); Thi 427 (atha ayya Jinadatta
agacchi gocaraya -amana); Ja 1 478,13 (sa müsika
gocaraya -amana); Mi1405,2s (paññaya -amanassa ...
yogino); Vism 63,2s (co)akabhikkhaya va -amanehi
laddh~ na taJTI paJ:TlsukülaJTI); Ps III 7 4,26 (bhikkhaJTI
-amano); 309,24 (say~hasamaye viharacarikaJTI
-amano); (d) carana, mfn., Sadd 870,12 (maggaJTI -ano
vajati); - cond. 3 sg. acarissa, acarissatha, Ja V 414,33'
(sace pana sattha agaraJTI ajjhavasissa ...
khattiyaparivaro va acarissa, Se so; Be avicarissa; Ce, Ee
abhavissa) = Sv 675,s (Se so; Be avicarissa; Ce, Ee
acarissatha); Mp 1 191,8 (sace mama putto agaraJTI
ajjhavasissa ... Rahu1akumaro khattiya-gai:~ena saddhiJTI
taJTI parivaretva acarissa) = Ap-a 270,19 (Be, Se so; Ce
agamissa; Ee acarissa); - aor. 3 sg. (a) acari
[cf S. acañt], D III 178,2* (hitam api ca bahujanasukh~
ca acari, so read with K.R. Norman, 1984, p. 178; Be,
Ce acari, Ee, Se acari, unmetrica[); Dhp 326 (idaJTI pure
cittam acan carikaJTI yenicchakaJTI yatthakam~
yathasukhaJTI) = Th 77 (Th-a 1 181,2: acañ ti vicari,
anavaqhitataya nanarammai:lesu paribbhami); Sn 354
(yadatthiyaJTI brahmacariyaJTI acari); Ja II 163,22* (acar'
utay~ vitudaJTI vanani, Ee so; Be, Se acari vatayaJTI; Ce
acaritay~; 164,1': acari vata ayaJTI, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
acari vata ay~); IV 438,13* (migavaJTI acari so); V 87,4*
(papaJTI bahuJTI duccaritaJTI acari, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se acari;
87,1o-: acarl ti akasi); (b)acari, cari, DII 196,7
(brahmacariyaJTI -i); III262,25foll. (anatth~ me acañ ti
aghataJTI bandhati) = A V 150,16 -t Dhs 1060; Th 1264
(so taJTI namassaJTI acari; Th-a III 199,2o: namassaJTI
acari ti namassamano vihasi); Ja 11 133,7 (sa tassa
nikkhantaka1ato pa!lhaya anacilraJTI -i); 360,2* (kahan nu
bhikkh~ acari); VI 264,21* (sa... avassutiJTI -i);
Bv 10:21 (sattahaJTI padhanacariy~ acarl 1okanayako);
Vism 312,32 (samappavattavasaJTI vasamano -i);
1 148,1 (-aJTI kho pana bhota Assalayanena paribbajakan
(e) carittha , Bv-a 288,35* (kavandhariipaJTI gagane
-ittha); 2 sg. (a) acañ, Ja V 222,4*; (b) acari, cari, Ja III
492,3* (-a carik~ 1ohitatui:~9a m a -i, E e so; Ce macari;
perhaps wrr; Be, Se ma mari); V 226,7' (tvaJTI ...
sabbaJTI dhammaJTI acari); 1 sg. (a) acari(JTI), cari(JTI),
Th 423 (madamatto acari 'haJTI); Thl 79 (kisa pai:~gu
viv~I:la ca satta vassani cari 'haJTI); Th-a II 180,31
(manatthaddho acarin ti yojana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
118 cara ti
avacarin ti); (b) acarisaJTI, Pv 34:5 (attano 'haJTI
anatthaya jlva1oke acarisaJTI pesuññamusavadena
nikativañcanaya ca); (e) acariJTI, cariJTI, M III 294,12
(pii:~gaya acariJTI); S III 29,3 (assadapariyesan~
acarim); Thl 107 (lünakesl pailkadhari ekasati pure
-iJTI); Ja V 10,16* (acariJTI dlgham addhii.naJTI pares~
ahitay' ah~); Ap 512,25 (agare va vataJTI -iJTI);
3 pl. (a) acariSUJTI, Sn 284 (pañca kamagui:le hitva
attadattham acarisuJTI; Pj 11 314,26: attano atth~
akaJ:Tlsu); (b) acaruJTI, Ja VI 114,9*; (e) acaruJTI, Sn 289
(vijjacarai:~a-pariyitthiJTI acaruJTI brahmai:la pure);
(d) acariJTISU, cariJTISU, V in V 64,3 ( -iJTISU); A 1 205,29
(ajja kho gavo amusmiJTI ca amusmiJTI ca padese -iJT~su);
Sn 809 (munayo pariggah~ hitva acariJTISU
khemadassino); Jalii 310,24 (ki)ikaJTI kl)itva -iJT~su);
2
Ap 512,23; 2 pl. carittha , S V 147,16 ( ... bhikkhave ma
agocare -ittha paravisaye); Ja I 428,22; 1 pl. acarimha,
carimha, A II 186,29 (yattha may~ pubbe
brahmacariy~ acarimha ti); Th 138 (vadh~ -imha te
kama; Th-a II 16,1: -imhase ti pi patho, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -imhase ti); Ja VI 236,32* (-imha amara viya); -
absol. (a) caritva, MI 505,10 (so kayena sucarit~
-itva); SI 83,8 (SavatthiyaJTI pii:~gaya -itva); Mil402,1s;
Vism 284.27 (te goi:le divasabhagaJTI -itva... disva);
Sp 1173,1 (charatt~ manatt~ akhai:~gaJTI -itva); PsI
117,9 (jaraggavo diva gocare -itva); Cp-a 4,9
(chabbassani dukkarakarikaJTI -itva); - neg. acaritva,
Dhp 155; Dhp-a 111 165,12; (b) caritvana, D II 211,14*
(sugatasmiJTI brahmacariyaJTI -itvana); Sn 816 (eko
pubbe -itvana methun~ yo nisevati; Pj 11 536,16:
-itvana ti . . . viharitva); Th! 17 (pii:~gapataJTI -itvana);
Ja V 123,16* (idha dhammaJTI -itvana raja sagg~
gamissasi); 330,17* (matari miccha -itvana nirayaJTI so
1
upapajjati); Ap 201,23; (e) cariya , D III 153,17* (kariya
-iya saiJ.gahaJTI bahunn~; Sv 929,4: -iya ti -itva); -
pass. pr. 3 sg. carlyati, Pet 142,12 (vitakke appeti vicaro
-iyati ca anuvattati ca, eds so; Ñaf}amoli, 1979, p. 190,
reads vicare, and translates: "in exploring he wanders
about"); Ud-a 211,17 (aqhailgikamaggabrahmacariy~
-iyati bhavlyatl ti); It-a I 109,13 (vussati ti vasiyati -iyatl
ti attho, Ee so; Be, Se vaslyati -Iyatl ti; Ce vasissati
-issatl ti); II 163,4 (id~ sasanabrahmacariyaJTI magga-
brahmacariy~ ca vussati -Iyatl ti);
pp (a) carita, mfn. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.) (i)joumeyed
through; lived in; Ja IV 465,1* (taJTI nagakañña -aJTI
gai:lena anvaruh! Kasiraja pasanno; 465,9· foil.: -aJTI
gai:lena ti taJTI nivesanaJTI nagakaññii.naJTI -aJTI
anusañcaritaJTI) "t VI 313,1o*; V 440,4 (saka1aJambudlpe
-e pi sabba itthiyo evariipa bhavissanti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee cari te); Th-a JI 247,28 (s!havyagghadl-pava)amigehi
-aJT~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee slhavyagghadi-va)amigacaritaJT~);
- (ii) habitually practised; observed; performed; M II
ti; Ps III 408,zo: taJTI sabbaJTI bhota -aJTI sikkhitaJTI);
Ja III 541,18* (-a vai:~ijja); IV 406,4* (sataJTI ca dhammo
-o pur~o); V 57,17* (kicco va dhammo -o rañño hoti);
PsI 127,33 (vusitan ti vutthaJTI, parivutthaJTI kat~ -aJTI
nitthitan ti attho); - 2. (n.) (i) there is going; going,
going about; Vin 1 350,12* (ekassa -~ seyyo natthi bale
sahayata) = Dhp 330; Dhp-a III 141,13foll. (yena pana
cara ti
vo anutire -arp so naiJ.guttha~ gal).hatu yena gambhire
-a~ tassa sísarr hotu); Th-a lii 53,23 (pubbe maya
gacchantenapi hatthigívaya hatthikkhandhe nisiditva
yata~ -a~); - (ii) what is or has been done; habitual
conduct, behaviour; acts, deeds; fonner actions
(affecting one's present state, theref'ore also) character,
disposition; Ja V 56,4* (cirarattasa~sita~ uccavacarr
-am ida~ pura!) a~ ... saya~ abhiññaya abhasi buddho;
56,25-joll.: attano --vasena uccatta ... Sonuttarassa ca
--vasena nlcatta uccanicacarita~ ida~ puriil)arr ...
attana janitva buddho abhasi); Cp 1:1:1 foll. (etthantare
yarr -a~ sabbarr ta~ bodhipacana~ ... imamhi kappe
-a~ pavakkhissarr SUI)ohi me; Cp-a 17,13:-an ti cariya);
Nidd 1 179,18 (sabbesa~ sattana~ bhagava asaya~
janati anusaya~ janati -a~ janati adhimutti~ janati;
Nidd-a 1 298.9: -an ti pubbe kata~
kusalakusalakammarr); Patis 1 124,5 (katama~ ca
sattana~ -a~. puññabhisaiJ.kharo apuññabhisaii.kharo
aneñjabhi-saii.kharo); Nett 190,n (te -ehi niddigha
samanvesitabba); Mil 310,1 (-arr disva suparisuddharp);
Sp 196,27 (acil)l)an ti -a~ vattarr anudhammata); Mp 11
169,6 (bala ca paJJ9ita ca attano attano -en' eva pakata
honti ti attho); - ifc see tac- (sv ta[d]), taryha-, dighi-.
dosa- (sv dosa2), buddhi-, mana- (sv mana\ moha-,
raga-, vitakka-, saddha-; - duccarita, mfn. and n. (and
m.), (mfn.) badly or wrongly performed or observed;
(n.m.) wrong action; evil practice; Abh 84
(duccaritadukkata~); D III 214,23 (tíl)i duccaritani
kayaduccarita~ vaclduccarita~ manoduccarita~) = apayiko nerayiko ti); Cp-a 20,14 (caritan ti -arp
Nett 126,1; A II1 267,1o (pañc' ime adínava duccarite);
Dhp 169 (dhammarp care sucaritam na na~ duccaritarr
care); Sn 665 (bahu duccaritani caritva, so read me; Be,
Se bahiini; Ce, Ee bahuni ca); Pv 9:4; Ja V 500,12·
(papan ti kammapatharp apatta~, duccaritan ti
kammapatha-ppatta~); Nidd I 115,4 (sabbe kilesa sabbe
duccarita . . . catta); Mi1406,4 (yogina yogavacarena
duccarita~ parivajjentena caritabba~); Vism 199,24
(ekacco . . . kamupadanapaccaya kayena duccarita~
carati . . . duccaritaparipuriya apaye uppajjati);
Sp 1328,27 (dutthu caritani viriipani va caritani
duccaritani); Spk 1 122,10 (sabbe kilese sabbe
duccarite . . . nadhivaseti pajahati); - sucarita, mfn.
and n., (mjn.) well-perfonned, well observed; (n.) good
or virtuous action; D III 215,1 (tíl)i sucaritani) =
Nett 81 ,14; A 11 85,3o (so kayena sucaritarr carati);
Dhp 168 (dhammarr sucaritarr care); Ja III 212,4*
(nañña~ sucarita~ raja nañña~ raja subhasita~ tayate
maral)aka1e; 212,12·joll.: nañña~ sucarita, ayam eva va
patho, thapetva sucaritarr aññarr na passami ti attho, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nañña sucarita); Vism 199,30 (sucaritarp
carati sucaritaparipuriya sagge uppajjati); Sp 1328,28
(sutthu caritani sundarani va caritani sucaritani); Pj 11
294,22 (na sakka kiñci adaya ganturr aññatra sucaritena);
pp (b) ch,ll}a, mfn. and n. [S. clfl)a], l. (mfn.)
(i)joumeyed through; travelled or roamed (over); lived
in, experienced; (n. impers.) a joumey was made; there
was going about; Th! 11 O (-a Aii.ga ca Magadha V ajji
Kas! ca Kosa1a); Ja III 541,18' foil. (-a Kaliii.ga carita
val)ijja vettacaro saii.kupatho pi -o natehi -arp saha
vakurehi; 542,5·foll.: -a Ka1iii.ga ti viil)ijakana~
119 cara ti
bhal)9arr vahantena kira tena Kaliii.garatthe -a ...
saiJ.kupatho pi -o ti khiil)ukamaggo pi valañjito, natehí ti
jivitahetu yeva natehi pi saddhi~ -arp saha vakurehí ti
vakura~ vahantena vakurehi saddhi~ carita~, Be, Ce,
Se so; E e Ka1ingarattha~ -arp . . . vakarehí ti
vakaravahantena vakarehi pi saddhirr carita~); VI 27,25*
(kim dhanena yarr jiyyetha kirr bhariyaya marissati ki~
yobbanena -ena ya~ jara abhihessati; 28,14·: -ena ti
caritena anubhiitena); - (ii) practised, observed;
habitual/y engaged in; done; (of a penance) undergone;
V in 11 61,35 (yarp manatta~ -arr sucil)l)af!l avasesa~
caritabbarr); Ja V 160,22* (maha attho maya -o
tidasana~ yasassinarp); 223,26' (dhammo -o
sukhavaho); Cp 3:6:13 (yass' atthaya tapo -o so me
attho samijjhatha); Mi157,19 (katha~ bhante Nagasena
yattha cakkhuviññal)a~ uppajjati tattha manoviññiil)a~
pi uppajjati ti, ninnatta ca maharaja dvaratta ca --tta ca
samudacaritatta ca ti); 105,12 ( --tta sakavisayassa
mahantatta ca mahasamuddassa); 360,1 (imehi terasahi
dhutagul)ehi pubbe asevitehi nisevitehi -ehi paricil)l)ehi
caritehi upacaritehi paripüritehi); Cp-a 221 ,3o
(dukkaracaraJJa~ -arr caritarp); - 2. (n.) practising,
observance; conduct; habitual conduct or practice;
Vin 1 293,22 (kirr nu kho nama tumhaka~ ayye
daharanarp brahmacariya~ -ena, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr
-e; Sp 929,2: brahmacariyena -ena atha va
brahmacariyassa caraJJena) f. IV 278,7; S IV 320,2 (atthi
kho pana maya kamesu miccha -a~. aharp p' amhi
danadipatipatti); - CÍI)J)ana~ in Ee, Se at Ap 590,17
(dhammesu ciryl)ana~) is prob. wr; read dhamme
sucil)l)iinarp with Be; - --caral)a, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.)
who has habitually practised (good) conduct; who has
conducted himself properly; Nidd 1 20,33 (so vughavaso
--caral)O gataddho ... ); It-a 1 165,16 (vutthavaso
--caral)O ti vusitava, Be, Se so; Ce cittacararyo; Ee wr
cintacaraJJo);- 2. (n.) practised behaviour; a practised
action; Jall 167,3· (appapañña~ nama pugga1arp
niyyamo yogga~ --caraJJa~ na tayati na rakkhati ti, Ce
so; Ee yogga; Se yogo; Be yoggacil)l)arp caral)af!1); -
--tthana, n., a place or area roamed o ver or grazed;
Ja II 159,10 (kirr tva~ --ghane yeva carasi); Ps II 260,24
(mahata hi gogal)ena --nhanarr bheritalarr viya
suddha~ hoti nittirya~); - --manatta, mfn., who has
undergone the manatta penance; Vin III 186,16
(--manatto bhikkhu yattha s1ya vlsatigal).o
bhikkhusaiJ.gho tattha so bhikkhu abbhetabbo); IV 242,15
(--manatta bhikkhuní); Sp 1180,24 (--manattassa ca
tadanuriipam eva kammavacarp katva); Vin-vn 538; -
--vasi(n), mfn., who has acquired mastery by habitual
practice; Vism 154,1o (anena tasmi~ yeva tava
pathama-jjhane pañcah' akarehi --vasina bhavitabba~);
Ps III 263,1 (manomayiddhiya~ --vasitaya. Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee --vasitasu); Spk III 144,35 (phalasamapattiya~
attano --vasita~ dassento); Mp 1 132,22 (cil)l)a~ kir'
eta~ therassa catuparisamajjhe dhamma~ kathento
cattari saccani amuñcitva katheti ti eva~ --vasito pi
thero maha-paññataya etadaggatthana~ 1abhi); 356,13
(arahattaphalena saddhi~ yeva iddhivikubbane --vas!
ahosi); 360,11 (buddhavacanarr gal).hanti vinayapitake
cara ti
--vas! ahosi); III 389,21 (ay~ gandhabbasippe cheko
--vas!); Th-a I 35,13 (ahoratt~ jhanesu --vasi ahosi);
Thi-a 73,12 (arahattaq1 pana patva pubbenivasañfu_le
--vas! ahosi); Vibh-a 297,27 (ekacco pana
aghasarnapattlsu --vasi hoti); --vasThhava, m.
and mfn., l. (m.) mastery acquired by habitual or
frequent practice; Mp I 285,24 (iti imina --vasibhavena
parisambhidappattan~ aggo nama jato, Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se --vasena) f. Th-a I 32,31 (katadhikarataya
--vaslbhavena ca); París-a 602,27 (phalasamapattiya
attano --vas!bhavaq1 dassento); - 2. (mfn.) who has
acquired mastery by habitual practice; Vism 331,28
(viññfu_lañcayatan~ bhavetukamena pana pañcah'
akarehi akasanañcayatanasarnapattiyaq1 --vas!bhavena);
Sv 781,28 (vinayapaññattiy~ --vasibhavataya); PsI
286,10 (vinaye --vasibhavassapi .. . vicikkiccha
pahlyati); II 52,12 (koci sipparn eva uggm_J.hati katahattho
na hoti, ay~ pana katahattho --vasibhavo) f. Spk II
225,13 ( ... ime pana kata-hattha --vasibhava, Be, Se so;
Ee --vas!bhavo; Ce --vasika va); Ps III 260,9 (imesu
pana aghasu abhibhayatanesu --vas!bhava yeva
abhiññavosanaparamippatta nama, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
--vasibhavo); As 167,4 (--vasibhavo hi
aWJ.asarnapatti1abhl actito paghaya matthak~ papento
pi samapajjituq1 sakkoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
--vasibhavo); - sucil)l)a, mfn., well practised or
observed; (what is) well practised; properly undergone;
V in II 61,35 (y~ manattaq1 CÍJ!J!~ sucil)l)aq1); S I 42,9*
(dharnmo sucil)J!O sukharn avahati) = Sn 182; Pv 30:7
(kissa sucil)l)assa ay~ vipako); Ja V 276,20* (yatha taq1
sucil).l)aq1 nanutappeyya paccha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nanutappeyya pecca); Ap 77,23 (sUCÍJ!I).~ me
pañcasll~); - fpp caritabba, mfn. and n. impers.,
Vin II 255,18 (garudhamm~ ajjhapannaya bhikkhuniya
ubhatosaiJ.ghe pakkharnanatt~ -aq1); III 101,9 (na ca
bhikkhave pal).idhaya piJ!9aya -~); S I 108,3o
(kattabb~ kusa1~ -~ brahmacariy~); Ap 547,24
(paccha jil)l).ena dhmo 'yaq1 -o subhaddako);
Mil 373,3 (yogina yogavacarena ... s~vutehi indriyehi
-aq1); Vism 68,4; Ps III 293,1o (piJ!9aya -aq1); 428,18
(koricthanena pi brahmal).ena bhikkha -a va); Pj I 234,27
(na bhikkhave antovasse carika -a ti); Cp-a 39,7
(kamesu micchacaro na -o); caus.
pr. 3 sg. (a) careti, -ayati, causes to move, directs,
moves; causes to go about; causes to graze; Ja V 10,1·
(indriyani dibbavisayesu -esi); Ap 515,25 (tassa rañño
ahuq1 bhariya ekajjhaq1 -ayam' ahaq1, Be, Ce so; ? Ee
ahaq1 . . . ekaccam; Se ah~ . . . ekacc~ vadayam'
ahaq1) f. 601,14 (Be so; Ce ahaq1; Ee, Se ah~ ...
ekaccaq1 vadayam' ahaq1) f. 517,22 (Ce carik~ -ayam'
ah~; Be varit~ varayam' ahaq1; Ee na mal~
padayam' ah~; Se nagu1~ padayam' ah~); Sp 323,6
(moro akase yeva pakkhe -eti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
pasareti); Spk I 174,7 (tikhil)asattisall~ ce pi urasmiq1
-ayeyyuq1, Be, Ce so; Ee -eyyuq1; Se dhareyyuq1);
Ud-a 334,1 (indriyani samantato -essanti kl!apessanti
va); Pv-a 58,6 (paricarayanti ti dibbesu kamagul)esu
attano indriyani ito e' ito ca yathasukhaq1 -enti); -
part.pr. (a) carenta, mfn., Ja I 174,5 (ambho rukkha,
pubbe tv~ o1arnbak~ -ento viya ujukarn eva pha1ani
120 carati
patesi, Be, Ee so; Ce otarento; Se calento); III 479,25
(e!akapalesu e!ake -entesu, so read? eds carantesu; see
479,5foll.: e!akapalaka e!aka ettha carantü ti giribbaj~
pavesetva); V 429,5· (e!ikapalassa tasmiq1 padese e!ika
-entassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee varentassa); Vism 332,2
(tass' ev~ tasmiq1 mmltte punappun~ citt~
-entassa); Ps III 389,17 (o1ambak~ -ento viya, Ce, Ee
so; Be dharento; Se varento); Mp II 280,12 (upavicarati ti
tattha man~ -ento upavicarati); (b) carayarnana, mfn.,
Spk II 169,18 (yarnakavijjut~ -ayarnano viya, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee dassarnano); - aor. 3 pl. caresuq1, Sp 737,3o
(ajja game pacchikahi püve -esun ti, Be, Ee so; Ce
varesun ti; Se hariq1sü ti); Ps IV 7,5 (nagare
sahassabhal).9ik~ -esuq1, Be, Ee so; Ce varesuq1; Se
hariq1su); - absol. caretva, Vism 185,24 (saka1asarlre
ñfu.l~ -etva); Sp 173,32 (abbhantare yeva khantiq1
-etva tul)hibhavena adhivasesi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
dharetva) = Sv 277,10 (Ce, Ee -ento; Be, Se dharento) f.
Mp II 299,6 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dharetva); Pj II 39,15
(gavo . . . gocare -etva); pass.
part.pr. cariyamana, mfn., Ja IV 2,22 (ka!akal).l)isalaka
-iyamana Mittavindakass' eva hatthe tikkhattuq1 pati, so
read ? Ce, Ee variyamana; Be kariyarnana; Se
viciniyarnana); - fpp (a) caretabba, mfn., Ps II 260,24
(ekadisaya gogal).~ -etva punadivase tattha na
-etabbo); (b) carayitabba, mfn., Mil377,12 (manas~
-ayitabb~. Se so; Be, Ce, Ee sañcarayitabb~); -
carito in Ee at Ps IV 40,13 is wr for varito (Be, Ce, Se
so);- caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) carapeti, makes move, makes
go about; sends out; causes to graze; esp. bheriq1 -eti,
sends round the drum, ie makes a public proclamation;
Ja III 3,1o (ta ... gamanigarnarajadhaniyo -etha); 326,16
(bherim -ema ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se carapessama ti);
Sp 295,19 (rajano kira abhisittamatta yeva
dhammabheriq1 -enti dinn~ yeva
samal).abrahmal).i\naq1 til)akaghodak~ paribhuñjantü ti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se carapenti); Spk I 241 ,1o (nagare bheriq1
-ehi sabbe bahudh!tikabrahmal).assa Íl).ayika rajaiJ.gane
sannipatentü ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se carapehi); III 143,16
(tattha ñfu_laq1 -eti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce carapeti);
Pv-a 75,14 (suttakantika itthiyo ma sutt~ kantiq1sii ti
bheriq1 -etha ti vatva); Cp-a 308,29 (maghatabheriq1
-eti); Vibh-a 442,24 (asukena nama kassa kiq1 avahatan
ti nagare bheriq1 -eyya, Be, Ce, E e so; Se carapeyya);-
part.pr. carapenta, mfn., Vibh-a 313,2 (anicc~
dukkh~ anatta ti tattha paññ~ -ento); - aor.
3 sg. carapesi, Ja II 245,15 (nagare bheriq1 -esi, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se carapesi); Spk I 165,2; Dhp-a I 398,11 (fu_laq1
-esi mama dh!tara saddhiq1 gantukama gacchantü ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be bheriq1 -esi; Se bheriq1 carapesi); Cp-a 21,21;
3 pl. carapesuq1, Cp-a 100,3o; - absol. carapetva, Ja I
68,13 (dhenusahassaq1 Laghi-madhukavane -etva, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se carapetva); 267,4 (ur!hite suriye bheriq1
-etva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se carapetva); II 404,18 (raja
saiJ.gamabheriq1 -etva, Be so; Se carapetva; Ce, Ee
paharapetva); V 510,18 (nagare bheriq1 -etva nagare
sannipatetva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se carapetva); Pe! 239,27
(uccasadd~ ma kari ... ti bheriq1 -etva); Ps II 264,3
(sukhumat!hanesu attano ñfu.l~ -etva); III 453,16
(v!maq1sl ti vlm~sako paññacaraq1 -etva evaq1vadi);
carasa ti
Mhv 25:72 (pure bherirp -etva); Mhv p. 31, fn. (gavo
tattha -etva vajam anenti dipiyo); - pp carapita, mfn.,
Mp I 89,21 (ekavararp -ite nama su~Janta pi honti
assuJ.!anta pi ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se carapitenapi);
Dhp-a III 49,5 (rañña sabbe sannipatantü ti bheriya
-itaya, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se carapitaya); Pp-a 192,19 (anena
pañña sutthu -ita hotl ti).
carasli ti in Ee at M I 449,4 is prob. wr for carasi ti (Be,
Ce, Se so).
carahi, ind. [cf S. tarhi; according to H. Smith,
Sadd p. 274, fn 5: <*tyarhi, cf S. tyad; perhapsfor tarahi
under influence of severa! words begining with e- used
with an interrogative], then, at that moment; in that
case; yet; (as emphatic particle) then; Vin II 189,4
(ayarp -i Devadattassa bhagavati pathamo aghato ahosi,
Be, Ce so; Se ayarp ca -i; Ee ayarp ca tarahi, prob. wr);
292,3 (ayarp -i ayasmato Anandassa pa!hamarp
civarabhikkha uppajji civarasahassarp); M 1 330,2foll.
(handa -i te marisa antaradhayami ti, handa -i me tvarp
brahme antaradhayassu sace visahasi ti, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee handa ca hi); III 128,26 (aharp -i te rajakumara
yathasutarp yathapariyattarp dhammarp deseyyarp, tvarp
ca me bhasitassa attharp na ajaneyyasl ti); A II 119,1
(kiñcapi kho idarp thanarp amanaparp katurp atha carah'
idarp thanarp kayiramanarp atthaya sarpvattati ti);
Ud 11,7 (ayarp -i tesarp bhikkhünarp antarakatha hoti
vippakata; Ud-a 104,29: ettha -i ti nipatamattarp);
Sn 988 (bhoti -i janati; cfPj 11 582,24: bhotl ce janati);
- commonly used as emphatic particle (preceded by
atha) in interrogative clauses, often expressing
exasperation or indignation: who then ... ? whatever in
that case ... ? why on earth ... ? esp. in the second clause
of a conditional sentence: if ... , then who in that
case ... ? if ... , then how on earth ... ?; V in 1 36,24* (ettha
ca te mano na ramittha ... atha ko -i devamanussa-loke
rato mano; Sp 973,2: atha ko -1 ti atha kuhirp -i); 105,2s
(tumhe ce brahma~Ja uposatharp na sakkarissatha ... atha
ko -i uposatharp sakkarissati); D II 82,32 (te Sariputta ...
sammasambuddhesu cetopariyaña~Jarp natthi, atha kirp
-i te ayarp Sariputta u!ara asabhi vaca bhasita); 115,15
(saddahasi tvarp Ananda tathagatassa bodhin ti, evarp
bhante ti, atha kirp -i tvarp Ananda tathagatarp yava
tatiyakarp abhinippi!esi ti); M 1 147,37 (kimattharp
carah' avuso bhagavati brahmacariyarp vussati ti);
321,35 (atha kirp -i tumhe moghapurisa ... mukhasattihi
vitudanta viharatha); S IV 47,8 (no ce kira tvarp bhikkhu
sila-visuddhattharp maya dhammarp desitarp ajanasi,
atha kimattharp -i tvarp bhikkhu maya dhammarp
desitarp ajanasi ti); A V 194,3 (atha kirp -i bhota
Gotamena vyakatan ti); Ud 7,7 (atha kho ke -i sadevake
loke arahanto va arahattamaggarp va samapanna ti;
cfUd-a 83,26: ke -i ti ke etarahi); Sn 999 (katharp -i
janemu); 1047 (atha ko -i devamanussaloke atari jatirp
ca jararp ca; Pj II 590,4 foil.: atha idani ko añño atañ ti);
Ja III 312,2 (sace mayarp na vighasada atha ke -i te
vighasada ti); 315,9* (atha kirp -i te samma ka~Jthe
ki!Jaki~Jayatl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se kiñci hite); Ap 535,11
(katharp -i sabbaññü vanditabba tathagata); Mil 25,19
(sace . . . puggalo nüpalabbhati, ko -i tumhakarp
civarapiiJ<;!apatasenasanagilanapaccayabhesajjaparikkhar
121 ca rima
arp deti); Sp 50,29 (atha katharp -i bhante sasanassa
dayado hoti ti); - carahi in Ee at D IIl 100,16 (ettha
carahi te) is prob. wr; Be ettha ca hite; Ce, Se ettha hi
te; - se e also tarahi.
carlina, mfn., part.pr. of carati qv.
carika, mfn. [from carati; cf carita, cariya], practising
habitually;- ifc see tac- (sv ta[d]).
carita, mfn., pp of carati qv.
carita(r), m. [from carati], one who practises, observes;
M 1 77,24 (abhijanami. .. caturari.gasamannagatarp
brahma-cariyarp -a, eds so; perhaps better absol.; note
vl in Be: caritva); Sadd 423,14 (carati ... cariya -a).
2
caritaka, n. [carita + ka ], action, behaviour; (good)
conduct; Th 36 (sadhu sutarp sadhu caritakarp; Th-a 1
106,13foll.: sadhu -an ti tad eva appicchatadicaritarp
ciiJIJarp, sadhucaritam eva hi -an ti vuttarp) j Nidd 1
494,25* (sadhu -arp sadhu sucaritarp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
caritarp).
carima, mfn. and n. (and m. ?) [AMg, BHS id.; S. carama],
l. (f11:fn.) (i) last, ultimate, final; Abh 715 (-arp);
It 18,24{oll. (yo pi nesarp assa -o alopo -arp kabalarp
tato pi na asarpvibhajitva bhuñjeyyurp; It-a I 88,5: nesarp
sattanarp yo sabbapacchimako alopo si ya); Th 202 (-o
'yarp samussayo) quoted Nidd 1 22,3*; Th 452 (upeti -a
ratti, na te kalo pamajjiturp; Th-a II 190,15foll.:
carimakacittasahita ratti upagacchati); Ap 32,23 (idarp
pacchimakarp mayharp -o vattate bhavo); 76,25 (vattante
-e citte mama silarp anussarirp, Be, Ce so; Ee sampatte
-e; Se vattate -e);- (ii) subsequent, later; Abh 1200
(paticicarime paccha); - (iii) lowest, least; J a V 120,26*
(tattha bahabalarp nama -arp vuccate balarp); - 2. (n.
and m., scil. cittam or bhavo ?) the last moment, the last
thought; the final existence; coming to an end; ?
Ap 62,18 (-arp vattate mayharp bhava sabbe samühata,
Be, E e, Se so; Ce -a) = 114,21 (eds -o) = 145,14 (eds
-arp) = 207,16 (eds -arp); 74,23 (-e vattamanamhi
sara~Jarp tarp anussarirp); Nidd-a II 6,31 (tayo -a
bhavacarimo jhanacarimo cuticarimo ti; j Vism 291,29:
2
tayo carimaka); - ifc see cutí-, jhana- (sv jhana ),
1
bhava-;- -citta, n. [carima + citta ], thefinal thought-
0
moment (befare death); Dhp-a II 163,7 (--nirodhena);
Pj 11 518,1o (--nirodha);- -arp in Ee at Ps II 205,1o is
perhaps wr for carimakacittarp (Be, Ce, Se so); -
2
0
-Vata, n. [carima + vata ], the lowest practice; (see
L. Alsdorf, 1974, p. 12: "untouchables' practice");
Ja III 28,20* (sabbarp idarp -arp ubho dhammarp na
passare, Ce, Ee so; Be carimarp katarp; Se camarikatarp;
28,23' foll.: yarp amhehi tihi janehi katarp sabbarp idarp
kiccarp lamakarp nimmariyadarp adhammikarp) =
Vin IV 204,6 (Be carimarp katarp; Ce camarigatarp; Ee,
Se ca parigatarp);- acarima, mfn., not subsequent, not
later; - -arp, adv., not subsequently, not later;
apubbarp -arp, not befare nor after (each other ),
simultaneously, at the same time; DI 185,23 (udahu
sañña ca ñii!Jarp ca apubbarp -arp uppajjanti ti); M III
65,16 (atthanarp etarp anavakaso yarp ekissa lokadhatuya
dve arahanto sammasambuddha apubbarp -arp
uppajjeyyurp; Ps IV 114,22foll.: apure apaccha ekato na
uppajjanti, pure va paccha va uppajjanti ti vuttarp hoti);
A IV 13,24 (tassa apubbarp -arp asavapariyadanarp ca
carimaka
hoti jlvitapariyadanaJYI ca; Mp IV 6,15: ekakkhal)e yeva);
Kv 102,3 (apubbaJTI -aJTI maggo ca bhavlyati kilesa ca
pahlyantl ti); Mil40,3o (dhammasantati sandahati, añño
uppajjati añño nirujjhati apubbaJYI -aJTI viya sandahati);
Vism 690,2 (padlpo apubbaJYI -aJTI ekakkhal)ena cattari
kiccani karoti); Sp 250,2 (taJTI khal)aJTI yeva pana
apubbaJTI -aJT~ dujjanaJYI); 1113,6 (dve palibodha
apubbaJTI -aJTI chijjantl ti).
2
carimaka, mfn. [carima + ka ; BHS id.], last, ultimate,
final; M I 426,1 (ye pi te -a assasapassasa te pi vidita va
nirujjhanti no avidita ti); Vism 291,24foll. (api ca -anaJTI
assasapassasanaJYI viditabhavakaral)ato pi 'ssa
mahanisaJT!sata veditabba ... tattha nirodhavasena tayo
-a bhavacarimaka jhanacarimaka cuticarimaka ti; t
Nidd-a II 6,31: tayo carima); - ifc see cuti-, jhana-
2 1
(sv jhana ), bhava-;- 0 -citta, n. [carimaka + citta ], the
final thought-moment (befare death); Sp 203,15foll. (yad
etam sikkhattayabrahmacariyaJTI ekaJYI pi divasaJTI
akhal)<;iaJTI katva -aJT~ papetabbataya ekantaparipU!)l)am
caritabbaJTI ekadivasaJYI pi ca kilesamalena amalinaJTI
katva -aJTI papetabbataya ekantaparisuddhaJTI .. .
caritabbaJTI) = Ps II 205,7 foil. (Be, Ce, Se so; E e -aJTI .. .
carimacittaJTI) Spkii 179,3ofoll.; Ud-a 168,1o
(paJhamacittato yava -aJY~); 216,12 (--kkhal)e
khandhamaro maccumaro .. . abhibhuto);
0
-bhattapil}""a, m., the last portian of food; Dhp-a IV
99,17 (-o pi mayham eva anucchaviko ).
1
cariya , ah sol. of carati qv.
• 2 . -
canya , n., see sv canya.
cariyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of carati qv.
cariyamanussa, m. [cf carapurisa sv cara], a man to roa111
about;? a scout, a spy; an agent; Ja III 361,30' (cora ...
antaramagge -e ~hapetva pabbatabilaJTI pavisitva, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be caraya-); 361 ,34" (-a disva coranaJTI
aroceSUJTI, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be caray a-).
cariyii, .f (and cariya2, n.) [BHS cariya; S. carya; cf also
BHS cari], l. going about, motion; action, performance,
deeds; behaviour, conduct; esp. good conduct, Vin I 9,22
(taya . . . -aya taya patipadaya taya dukkarakarikaya
n' ev' ajjhaga uttarimanussadhammaJTI alamariyañiil)a-
dassanavisesaJTI; Sp 965,6: -aya ti dukkaracariyaya);
Ja VI 475,7* (-a taJTI anubandhittho ekadukkhasukho
tava; 475,12foll.: daharakale janapadacarikaya
pakkantaJTI taJTI anubandhi; cf 475,n: yatha -aya pub be
maJTI anubandhanto); 475,17* (-a maJTI ayaJTI ayye
pajagghittho maya saha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -aya ayaJTI
ayye); 508,3* (bahuhi vata -ahi kumarl vindate patiJTI);
Nidd I 378,18 (maya vuccati vañcanika -a); Patis I 79,4
(tisso -ayo, viññiil)acariya aññal)acariya ñal)acariya);
II 16,31 (katih' akarehi pañcannaJTI indriyanaJTI -a
daghabba); 225,3foll. (agha -ayo); Nett 20,28 (ima dve
-a anuññata bhagavata eka visuddhanaJTI eka
visujjhantanaJTI); Ps II 66,2s (apadane ti attano -aya);
204,sfoll. (brahmacariyan ti seghaghena brahmabhutaJTI
-aJTI, brahmabhutanarp va buddhadinaJTI -an ti vuttaJTI
hoti); 329,15foll. (adhammassa -a adhammacariya,
adhammakaral)an ti attho, visamaJTI -a visamassa va
kammassa -a ti visamacariya); Spk I 348,15
(bodhisattacariya viy' assa -a ahosi); Mp IV 92,14 (ime
rajano -aya val)l_laJTI arabhiJT!su); Mhv 37:109 (-aJTI
122 cala
bodhisattanaJTI dassento); Sadd 863,1 (caral)aJTI -a); -
cariyaJTI in Ee at Bv-a 292,2 is wr for vlriyaJTI (Be, Ce,
2
Se so); - ifc see attha- (sv attha ), adhamma-
(sv dhamma\ uñcha- (sv uñcha), eka-, ñana-, dhamma-
1
(sv dhamma ), nagga-, buddhi-, bhikkha-, vikala-,
samadhi-; see also uñchacariya (sv uñcha),
brahmacariya; - 2. acting; character, disposition;
Vism 101,23foll. (cha -a ragacanya dosacariya
mohacariya saddhacariya buddhicariya vitakkacariya
ti . . . -a pakati ussannata ti atthato ekaJTI); 107,23
(acariyo -aJTI ñatva kammaghanarp kathessati); - for
cariyarp in Ee at Ps III 288,2o (carikarp cariyarp
sandhaya) read cari, yaJTI with Be, Ce, Se; - 0 anukula
in Ee, Se in Vism is wr for cariyanukiila (Be, Ce so);-
0
anuküla, mfn., suitable to one's character or
disposition; Vism 98,12 (catta)lsaya pana kammaghanesu
yaJTI yassa -aJY~, Be so; Ce, Ee caritanukulaJTI, prob. wr;
Se wr cariyanukulaJTI); 101,23 (attano -an ti ettha cariya
ti cha cariya ragacariya ... , Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr
cariyanukulan ti); Th-a I 81,21 (-aJTI kammaghanaJTI
gahetva); As 168,9 (attano -aJTI kammaghanaJTI
upaparikkhantena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr cariyanuku1aJTI);
-
0
anuvidhiiyaka, mfn., acting in conformity with the
conduct (oj); Spk II 2,16 (bhikkhu ... segha
anagariyabhavaJTI adiJTI katva satthu --tta) = Pj II 395,13;
-
0
-pitaka. n., one of the collections making up the
Khuddakanikaya of the PaJi Canon; Ja IV 406,14
(samma-sambuddho pi
dhammasenapatisariputtatherassa -aJTI desento );
Mi1281,1s (bhasitaJTI p' etaJTI maharaja bhagavata
devatidevena -e ... ); Sp 742,10 (buddhabhasito ti
sakalaJTI vinayapi~akaJTI abhidhammapitakaJTI
dhammapadaJTI -arp .. . brahmajaladlni ca suttani);
Sv 15,27 (majjhima-bhiil)aka pana
--apadanabuddhavarpsehi saddhiJTI sabbaJTI pi taJTI
khuddakaganthaJTI suttantapitake pariyapannan ti
vadanti); Pj I 12,10 (khuddakapatho dhammapadaJTI ...
buddhavarpso -am ... khuddakanikayo); Cp-a 2,7 joll.
(ken • atthena -aJTI. atltasu jatlsu satthu cariyanubhava-
ppakasinl pariyattl ti katva, pariyatti-attho hi ayaJTI
pitakasaddo ... );- -'-aghakatha,f. the co111111entary on
the Cariyapitaka; Cp-a 1,2 (paramatthadlpanl nama
-' -aqhakatha); - --va1_11_1ana, --SaJY~Val_ll_lana,f, the
commentary on the Cariyapitaka; Th-a I 10,7
(--Val)l_lanayaJTI vittharato vuttam eva ti); Cp-a 28,2o
(paramatthad!paniya --saJT1Va1_11_1anaya
akittipa1_1<;litacariya-va1_11_1ana nighita); 336,8 (--va1_11_1ana
nighita).
caru, 111. [ts], an oblation for the gods; Abh 418
(havyapake -u mato).
caruka, 111. [cf S. caru], l. a saucepan, a cooking pot;
Sp 846,JOfoll. (sace pi -ena bhatte akiriyamane -ato
masi va charika va patati; Sp-~ [Be] III 71,14: -ena ti
khuddaka-bhajanena); Vin-vn 1442 (bhatte akiramane tu
-ena);- 2. an oblation; Pj II 405,11 (añño jano bhuñjati
puraJasaJTI -aJTI ca pilvaJTI ca ti).
careti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. carayati, Wg § 33:71],
ascertains; Sadd 559,7 (cara asaJT!saye: -eti -ayati).
cala, 111jn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) 111oving, trembling;
unsteady, unstable; transient; Abh 712 (lolaJTI tu
calaka
cañcala111 -a111); S IV 68,2 (eta111 dvaya111 -a111 e' eva
vyay~ ca anicca111); Th lll O (sabba111 ida111 -am iti
pekkhamano; Th-a III l54,3o: -a111 anavaghitan ti); 1111
(citt~ -a111 makkatasannibha!11); Ja VI 215,34' (pabbata
hi acala , , , ekaghana , , , ighakani -ani na ca
ekaghanani); Patis li 239,2o (pañcakkhandhe -ato
passanto; 242,2: -ato ti aniccanupassana); Mil 93,10*
(nav' ete puggala loke ittara calita -a); Vism 172,22
(uggahanimitta111 uddhanato otaritamattassa payasassa
usumavagisadisa111 -a111 hutva upanhati); Ps III 247,5
(puthujjaniddhi nama -a anibaddha); Th-a II l 00,23 (-a
assapinhe thapitakumbhaJ?,t;la!11 viya); Mhv 38:97 (eva111
sampattiyo nama -a vijjullatopama); Saddh 494 (-am iti
bhavagatam akhila111 ñatva); - 2. (m.) shaking,
trembling; Dhatum 188 (vyatha bhiticalesu ca); 675
(khubho cale);- ifc see kiñci- (sv ka3);- calatta in Ee
at Pet ll 0,17 is prob. wr for calita qv sv calati; - -cala
in Ee at Spk I 224,25foll. and III 253,33 is prob. wr jór
-cala (Be, Ce, Se so); - oacala, mfn., continuously
moving; unsteady; ever-changing; Ja IV 494,27* (-a111
paJ?,abhuno 'dha jivita111; 498,4-: -an ti cañcala111
sakabhavena thatu111 asamattha111); Ap 540,6 (anicca111
sankhatam sabba111 viyoganta111 -a111); Mil 92.6
(sailkame [mantito] -o bhavati); Mhv 22:88 (-aya111
gatiya111 hi paJ?,ino upenti puññena yatharuci111 gatüp);-
0
avadhi, mfn. [cala + avadhi 1], having a moving
starting-point or limit; Sadd 709,2 (hatthi-adi apadan~
calamariyadabhiitatta -i nama); - 0
-(k)kaku, mfn.,
having a tremulous or quivering hwnp;? Ja III 380,19*
(usabhaha111 adda111 . . . -u111 VaJ?,J?,abaliipapanna!11);
IV 330,8* (usabho ahii balava gamikassa -ii
VaJ?,J?,abaliipapanno, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se calakkakudho;
331,1Y: -ii ti calamanakakudho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
calakkakudho ti); Nidd I 177,16 (usabhena -una, Be, Ce,
Nidd-a I 292,5 so; Ee, Se balakkakuna, prob. wr); -
0
-(k)kakudha, mfn. [cala + kakudha 1], having a
tremulous or quivering hump; ? Spk I 322,2 (--maha-
usabhasamipe tadahujatavacchako viya); Ja III 381 ,5'
(calakkakun ti -a111); - 0 -citta, mfn. [cala + citta 1],
fickle-minded; changeable; Jall 299,11 (makkata nama
-a); V 345,23 (rajano nama -a); Sp 787,2 (--taya); -
0
-pañka, n., shifting mud; unstable ground; Mp IV
164, u; Ud-a 217,6 (tassa kira nagarassa dvaranhana111
muñcitva samantato -a111 hoti, ta111 -a111 nissaya thitatta
volokentana111 calamana111 viya upanhati);
acala, mfn. and m., l. (mfn.) unmoving; immovable;
steady, unwavering; D III 173,10* (parisa 'ssa hoti
'nugata -a); S I 232,23* (yassa saddha tathagate -a
supatinhita) = Th 507; S V 444,18 (indakhllo va
gambhiranemo sunikhato -o asampakampi); Ud 27,29*
(yatha pi pabbato selo -o suppatinhito) = Th 651
(Th-a II 274,34: pakativatehi -o akampaniyo hoti);
Th 264 (patthento -a111 sukh~; Th-a II 109,25foll.: -a111
sukhan ti nibbanasukh~, ta111 pi hi akuppabhavato -an
ti vuccati); Ja VI 546,6* (yananava ca me hotha -a
bhavasagare); Patis II 239,22 (pañcanna111 khandhan~
nirodho -a111 nibbanan ti passanto); Ap 75,4 (mittan~
-o homi); 112,1R (patto 'mhi -a111 ttana111 hitva
jayaparajayam; Ap-a 386,23: nibban~ patto amhi
bhavami); 310,27 (-o homi kenaci); Mil 164,11 (-a hi sa
123 cala ka
maharaja pabbajja); Vism 158,7 (ativiya --tta); Sp 141,21
(citta111 pi me .. . samahitatta eva ca ekagg~ -a111
nipphanda111); PsI 160,30 (thero -o va nisidi); Dhp-a II
153,5 (--taya anavilo); Mhv 42:2 (Sumeru111 --ttena
gambhirena mahodadhi111); - !fe see samaJ?,a-m-; -
2. (m.) a mountain; Abh 605 (nagacalasiluccaya);
Vv-a 136,24 (mahindharanamaka111 pabbata111 -~
avasitva ti); Sadd 429,15* (pabbato -o selo ... );- ifc see
atthá- (sv attha\ uccá-, udayá-, kanaká-;
-'-ambudhi-vasi(n), mfn., living in an unmoving
ocean; ? Dath 2:16 (naga - '-ambudhivasino );
-' -asanabandha, mfn. [acala + asana2], sitting
unmoving; ? Ps III 136,12 (aya111 - '-asanabandho hutva
nisinno, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se acalo anobaddho); -
--ppatta, mfn. [acala + patta6], who has attained
stability, steadiness;? unwavering; A I 108,2 (rañño
khattiyassa muddhavasittassa jenho putto hoti abhiseko
anabhisitto --ppatto, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
anabhisitto-m-acalappatto; Mp II 176,26: -o ti ... sojasa-
vassuddesiko pana paññayamanamassubhedo -o nama
hoti, mahanta111 pi rajj~ vicaretu111 samattho, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee macalapatto ti -o ti); Mp III 361,2 (ekanta111 gato
-o ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee acalasaddho ti); -
niccala, mfn., motionless; unmoveable; stable; Ja 1
441 ,2R (thambho calito, eka111 saratthambha111 aharitva
ta111 -a111 karotha ti); IV 2,22 (nava sattame divase
Mittavindaka111 nissaya samuddapinhe -a anhasi);
Sp 59,14 (upa¡;l¡;lhabhagathitam eva udaka111 cali
avasesa111 -a111 ahosi ti); 1085,19 (-a asa111hariya);
Sv 506,17 (dighigatikassa ... --ta nama natthi); Mp IV
180,2 (jajjararathake upanite aya111 -o ettha sukha111
nisiditun ti); Ap-a 232,6 (acala111 -a111 nibbana-pada111
patvana); 290,32 (yatha pi bhiimi pathavi acala -a tatha
buddho acalo ti attho); - -a111, adv., immoveably;
firmly; Ja I 415,14 (t~ alane -a111 bandhitva); Mp IV
104,23 (cattaro pade ... -~ thapetva);- -ávadhi, mfn.
[niccala + avadhi 1], havinf? a stationary starting-point;
Sadd 709,4 (pabbatadi apadanam
niccalamariyadabhiitatta -ávadhi nama);
aniccalabuddhi(n), mfn., of unstable, unsure,
understanding; Ja IV 429,13'.
calaka 1, m. [?],a military officer; (according to cts, one
who plans the disposition of the army ); D I 51,9
(hattharoha assaroha rathika dhanuggaha celaka -a ... ;
Sv 156,23: -a ti idha rañño thana111 hotu, idha
asukamahamattassa ti eva111 senavyiihakaraka) t A IV
107,13.
calaka 2, n. [?],a piece offood thrown away after having
been chewed; Vin II 115,13 (bhikkhii -ani pi anhikani pi
ucchighodaka111 pi pattena niharanti; Sp 1205,6: -ani ti
cabbetva apaviddhamisani, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se cha¡;l¡;letva
vametva appavinhamisani); IV 266,3 (vighasa111 nama
-ani va anhikani va ucchighodaka111 va); Sp 1205,Is
(maccham~saphalaphaladini khadanto ya111 tattha
anhi!11 va -a111 va cha¡;l¡;letukamo hoti); Vin-vn 2178
(cha¡;l¡;leti yadi ucchinh~ udak~ -ani va); -
o• -atthikani, n.pl. [calaka + aghika2], thrown away
chewed food and bones; Vv-a 222,12 (bhikkhi'ina111
bhuttaghane attana bhuttavasesani sitthani
maccham~sakhaJ?,¡;lamissitani -ani ca pakiritva).
cala ti
calati, pr. 3 sg. [S. calati], is moved; shakes, quivers; zs
agitated or disturbed; Dhatup 261 (cala kampane);
Dhatum 374; SI 107,3* (nabharr phaleyya pathavi
-eyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr pathavirr; Spk I 174,5:
-eyya ti pokkharapatte vatahato udakabindu viya
-eyya); Sn 752 (anissito na -ati); Ja III l88,2o (mayi
pana gandhabbarr karonte maccha -issanti); Nidd I
441,18 (na iñjati na-atina vedhati); Ap 595,7 (-ati ravati
puthavi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -ati ravati) = Bv 2:167 (Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be -ati); Mil260,1 foil. (kissa ... pakatikarr
udakarr na -ati . . . kissa pana aggigatarr -a ti
khubbhati ... ); PsI 78,6 (sitena -ati kampati); III 229,5
(esikatthambho viya thitatta na -anti); Mp II 64,11
(kütagararr ... -atil ti adhitthaya); As 237,1 (evarüpassa
hi mahabhiññappattassa savakassa patipada -ati,
sesanarr kif!1 na -issati); Sadd 437,3o (cala kampane:
-ati calito); 468,12 (cala kampane: ... -ati); - part.pr.
(a) calanta, mfn., Ja III 140,20' (so hi -anto -anto
gacchati); Ps II 380,27 (yatha pana udake -ante va
bubbulake va muñcante anto maccho atth! ti ñayati);
Cp-a 169,19;- neg. acalanta, mfn., Ps III 56,3o (acalanto
vacisacce patighahitva); (b) calamana, mfn., Mil 254,16
(kaye -amane cittarr na -ati); Ps II 281,9 (oghehi
-amanehi); Ud-a 217,7; - neg. acalamana, mfn., Ja II
330,14'; Ps JI 65,12 (aniñjamano ti acalamano); - aor.
3 sg. cali, acali, Ja I 303,4 (tass' abbhantare kileso -i);
Sp 59,w (cakkapado -i); Cp-a 79,31 (akampi ti acali);
2 sg. cali, Cp 2:9:3 (bhakkho si mama ma -1;
Cp-a 169,19: hatthaparipphandanadivasena ma -i,
-antarr pi aharr tarr khadissaml ti); 3 pl. calirrsu, Ja I
52,25 (assa kammajavata -irrsu); III 188,24 (tena saddena
sammatta hutva maccha -irrsu); PsI 185,14 (therassa
tarr upanijjhayato saghivassani vikkhambhitakilesa
-irrsu); Spk I 73,28 (mahavanassa kira samanta devata
-irrsu); - calirrsu in Ee at S V 262,24 is wr for
phalirrsu (Be, Ce, Se so); - absol. calitva, Sp 784,1
(bhitti kampati tato mattika -ati -itva sithila va hoti
patati va); As 279,9; - pp caJita, mfn. and n. [ts],
l. (mfn.) moving, shaking; unstable; agitated, disturbed;
shaken; stirred; Abh 744 (dhuto adhünacalita); S V
123,16 (udapatto vaterito -o bhanto ümijato) = A III
232,2o; Ja I 441 ,27 (thambho -o, ekarr sarathambharr
aharitva tarr niccalarr karotha ti); III 57,21 * (evarr -arr
asaiJthitarr sukhadukkharr manujesv apekkhiya); 418,19*
(tada hi -a sakha manussena migena va); Nidd I 488,28
(kayaduccaritena cittarr avilarr hoti luFtarr eritarr
ghaqitarr -arr bhantarr avüpasantarr); Ap 530,11 (-a
bhümi nadita devadundubhi); Mil251,14 (ye keci ...
capala -a ittara balajana); Vism 612,1o
(vyadhijaramararyehi e' eva labha1abhadihi ca
lokadhammehi --taya calato, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
pacalitataya) = Nidd-a I 169,24 (Ee so; Be pacalitataya;
Ce, Se cañcalitataya); Ps III 212,18 (sarrviggo -o
kampito); Dhp-aiV 113,16 (--tta);- 2.(n.) trembling;
agitation; M III 266,6 (nissitassa -arr anissitassa -arr
natthi -e asati passaddhi; Ps V 83,1: -an ti vipphanditarr
hoti) =S IV 59,wfoll. =Ud 81,6 partly quoted Pet 110,17
(anissitassa -arr n' atthl ti, Be, Ce so; Ee calattarr);
Ap 312,14 (-arr marr na janami agatarr manasarr
mamarr, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se khalitarr pi na
124 cala ti
janami abhantarr manasarr mama); - neg. acalita, mfn.
and n., unmoving, stable; undisturbed; what is
unmoving, stable; SI 133,20* (sabbo loko pakampito,
akampitarr aca1itarr aputhujjanasevitarr agati yattha
Marassa tattha me nirato mano); Ja V 454,10* (accantarr
acalitarr asali.khatarr; 455,33·: kilesehi akampitarr);
Nidd I 353,12 (agha¡tito acalito aluFto ); Cp-a 24,24
(macchariyena acalito);- aticalita, mfn., very agitated,
very disturbed; Nidd-a II 32,s (khitta ti calita, ukkhitta ti
aticalita); - niccalita, mfn., undisturbed, fixed; ? Ps II
252,33 (ekaccassa hi uggahitabuddhavacanarr dhatarr
pagUI).aJT! niccalitarr na hoti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
niccalikarr; = Mp III 28,18: eds niccalikarr); - neg. fpp
acalaniya, mfn., not to be moved; not to be shaken;
Vv-a 215,24 (acala kenaci acalanlya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
acalanlya); Th-a III 32,1 (patipakkhehi acalanlyatta
da~harr); - caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) caleti, -ayati, causes to
move, shakes; SI 109,24* (sace pi kevalarr sabbarr
Gijjhakütarr -essasi, Be, Ee so; Ce -eyyasi; Se
ga~eyyasi); Pet 44,14 (bhikkhu api himavantarr
pabbatarajanarr -eyya, Ee so; Be, Ce caleyya); Th-a II
260,1 (velayati va dussilyarr -ayati viddharrseti ti vela,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee veleti); Patis-a 129,34 (kucchite papake
dhamme salayanti -ayanti kampenti viddharrsenti ti
kusala) = As 39,2; Patis-a 507,5 (akuppo -ayiturr
asakkuryeyyo arahattaphaladhammo assa ti
akuppadhammo); (b) ciileti, -ayati, causes to move,
shakes; causes to quake; stirs, disturbs; Ja III 99,13*
(-eti kaiJI).af!1); Kv 329,16 (akase ... biihurr -enti);
Sp 324,14 (thana cavanarr akaronto -eti); 1093,5 (yagurr
nibbapeml ti pana -eturr vagati); Ps II 389,15 (mama
saddharr -eturr asamattharr); III 365,zo (janapade
dhuvabhavappatto na sakka kenaci -eturr); V 17,3
(kathetukamo ... hanukarr -eti); Dhp-a II 195,19 (tesarr
hi dibbapatibhagani pi arammaiJani cittarr -eturr na
sakkonti); part.pr. (a) calenta, mfn., Sp 383,26
(sükaro pasarr -ento ... pa1ayati); Spk II 88,14 (tassa
kira dakkhil).aka!).l)aJT! -entassa); Cp-a 148,28
(suvaryl).akili.kiryikarr -ento viya); - neg. acalenta, mfn.,
Sp 621,5; (b) calayamana, mfn., Ps II 160,23 (kal).l).e
-ayamana); - aor. 3 sg. calesi, Vin III 21,37 (sa
makkatl ... katirr pi -esi cheppaf!1 pi -esi); Ja I 71,20
(tani til.1ani agge gahetva -esi); PsI 160,29 (devata pi
sakalarukkharr -esi); Spk III 24,7 (siimaiJero ali.gulirr
-esi); Mhv 5:262 (mahirr -esi iddhiya);
3 pl. (a) calesurr, Sv 545,21; (b) calayirrsu, Sv 694,23
(lomarr pi na -ayirrsu); - absol. caletva, Ja II 439,19
(jambusiikharr -etva phalani patesi); Sp 472,6 (udakarr
hatthena -etva); Ps III 20,16 (mahapathavirr -etva);
Dhp-a III ?8,2o (hatthikkhandha-varagato va sisarr -etva
vanditva pakkami); - neg. acaletva, Sp 1327,6; Spk III
146,7; - pp calita, mfn., shaken; stirred;? strained;?
Vin I 202,29 (gilananarr bhikkhunarr cury1,1ehi bhesajjehi
-ehi attho hoti); Mp IV 138,19 (udumbararukkhe -e);-
fpp calanlya, mfn., Th-a I 53,11 (satena pi sahassena pi
calanlyo ti); - neg. acalanlya, mfn., Vv-a 215,24 (acata
kenaci acalanlya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acalanlya); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. (e) calapeti, causes (something) to be moved;
Sp 347,15 (yo pana rukkharr dubbalarr katva paccha
caletva pateti aññena va -eti); - see also cañcala,
calana
cañcalati, cañcalita.
calana, mfn. and m.n., calanii, f [S. calana, mfn. and n.],
l. (mfn.) moving, shaking; Nidd-a I 68,20
(cittappakopano ti cittassa pakopano -o, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se dharpsano); Sadd 846,11 (-o kampano phandano);-
2. (m.n. andf) moving, shaking; agitation, disturbance;
Abh 712 (kampanarp -arp catha); Dhatup 186 (kampa
-e); Ja III 188,21 (manusamatte gandhabbarp karonte
macchanarp -arp nama natthi); Pa~is I 184,36 (iñjana
phandana -a kampana); Pe~ 110,23 (-a); Nidd-a I 322,26
(na ca tava hanusañcopano hoti ti dvinnarp hanilnarp
aparapararp -o na tava hoti); Sp 565,1o (ubbegarp
iñjanarp -arp pa~ilabhanti); Sadd 437,31 (-arp);- ifc see
kiñci- (sv ka3), bhavaJiga- (sv bhava); - acalana, n.,
acalanii,f, lack of movement or shaking; stillness,
stability; Pa~is I 185,5 (kayassa . . . aphandana -a
akampana); Ps III 171,28 (idarp catutthajjhanarp
aniñjanarp -arp nipphandanan ti vadami); Cp-a 303,13
(yatha-samadinnesu sambharesu ca -ato
lobhadipa~ipakkharp adhitthanarp); 320,19 (-arp); -
duccalana, mfn., hard to shake or disturb; Ja II 214,14"
(devanagararp yujjhitva duggm¡.hataya --taya).
calani, f (or m. ?) [cf S. lex. calan a], a kind of deer;
Abh 618 (vatamigo tu -1); Ja VI 537,33* (camañ -1
langhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se camari; 538,19·foll.:
camaramiga ca -i ca laJigh1 cati vatamiga ca, Ce so; Ee
camara miga ca -i ca laJigh1 ca calanti vatamiga ca; Be
camarimiga ca 0 -miga ca laJigh1miga ca; Se camarimiga
ca 0 -miga ca vatamiga ca).
cavati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS cavati; S., BHS cyavate],
Dhatup 35; Dhatum 55; Sadd 337,3o (cu cavane: -ati);
467,27 (cu ... gatiyarp: -ati); - l. moves or falls from
one's place, goes away; falls away, deviates (from),
abandons; Vin III 24,25 (bhikkhu ukkm¡.!hito anabhirato
samanna -itukamo; Sp 247,w: samm¡.abhavato
apagantukamo); D III 59,3o (yassa rañño cakkavattissa
dibbarp cakkaratanarp osakkati ~hana -ati); A III 6,31
(asaddho bhikkhave bhikkhu -ati na ppatighati
saddhamme); Khp 8:4 (nidh1 va ~ana -ati sañña va 'ssa
vimuyhati); Ja V 223,16* (dhammarp pamajja khattiyo
ra!~a -ati issaro); Niddi 311,14 (dv1hi karm¡.ehi
sHabbatato -ati); Sp 392,21* (samaññagu1_1a -ant!dha
puthujjana); - 2. moves or falls from one state of
existence (to another); dies (in one state); falls away,
perishes, ceases; DI 14,3 (satta sandhavanti sarpsaranti
-anti upapajjanti); SI 61,23 (yattha ... na jayati naj1yati
na m1yati na -ati na upapajjati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
uppajjati); V 71,17 foil. (sa [satisambojjhaJigo] ce pi me
-ati idappaccaya me -a ti ti pajanami); Sn 1073 (-etha
viññiii_Iarp tathavidhassa, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se bhavetha,
prob. wr; Niddii [Be] 108,9 [Ee 142,11foll.]: tassa
viññiil_larp -eyya ucchijjeyya nasseyya vinasseyya na
bhaveyya ti); Vv 84:34 (ayukkhaya puññakkhaya
-issarp); Th 121 (uppajjanti ca te khandha -anti
aparapararp); Ja II 124,21* (sagga ca -ati ~ana;
124,24 foil.: saggasaJikhata ~han a devaloka ti attho,
adhammikaraja hi appa~ilabhavasena deva1oka -ati
nama); Nidd I 5,6 (ti~~ant' eva te bhoga so -ati marati
antaradhayati vippalujjati); Ap 262,2 (yada devo
devakaya -ati ayusañkhaya); Kv 326,13
125 cava ti
(akasanañcayatane satta jayanti j1yanti m1yanti -anti
upapajjanti ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee uppajjanti ti); Spk I
29,28 (pañcasu hi marm¡.a-nimittesu uppannesu ...
-1ssama -issama ti paridevamana devata);
part.pr. (a) cava(t), mfn., Sadd 167,9 (jayarp jararp -arp
m!yarp); (b) cavanta, mf(-anti)n., It 78,17* (deva devarp
yada vidil -antarp anumodanti); Ap 336,24 (devaloka
-antassa nibbattantassa jan tuno); Yam II 174,17
(-antinarp, with fn); Dhp-a I 259,s; (e) cavamana, mfn.,
Vin III 5,2 (dibbena cakkhuna ... satte passami -amane
upapajjamane) = MI 248,34; It-a II 138,17 (ye pana
asanna-cutika idani -issanti ti te -amana); - aor.
3 sg. (a) cavi, MI 337,5 (Dils1 Maro tamha ca ~hana -i
mahanirayarp ca upapajji); III 158,5
(vicikicchadhikarai_Jarp ca pana me samadhi -i); Ja I
328,12 (Vessavm¡.o maharaja -i, Sakko annarp
Vessava1_1arp ~hapesi); - at Ja V 158,8* (cavi tamhi)
read cavitamhi with Be, Ce; (b) cavittha, S II 217,21
(-ittha pana Thullatissa bhikkhun1 brahmacariyamha ti;
Spk II 176,18: -ittha ti cuta, na mata va nattha va);
3 pl. cavirpsu, Ps III 318,11 (chattirpsa Sakka -irpsu);-
absol. (a) cavitva, D I 17,28 (aññataro satto ayukkhaya
va puññakkhaya va abhassarakaya -itva suññarp
brahmavimanarp upapajjati); II 12,4 (Vipass1 bodhisatto
Tusita kaya -itva sato sampajano matu kucchirp
okkami); Mi18,19; Vism 102,32; Sp 854,16 (~hanato -itva
patte va hatthe va patati); PsI 235,18 (pañcasata
accharayo ... -itva niraye upapanna); (b) cavitvana,
Ja IV 469,7• (brahma1oka -itvana devaputto mahiddhiko
rañño putto udapadi); Ap 32,13 (niraya so -itvana
manussattarp gamissati); Bv 1:68; Ps II 17,3•; (e) caviya,
D III 150,zo• (-iya punar idh' agato samano; Sv 926,25:
-itva puna idh' agato); (d) caviyana(rp), D III 178,7*
(laddha manusakarp bhavarp tato -iyanarp, so read with
K.R. Norman, 1984, p. 179? Ee caviya na; Se caviya
puna; Be cavitvana; Ce cavitva); - pp (a) cota, mfn.
[S. cyuta], l. moved or fallen (jrom one 's place); (who
has) fallen away; who has abandoned (the holy lije);
Abh 751 (-arp ca dharpsitarp); D III 59,15 (yada ...
passeyyasi dibbarp cakkaratanarp osakkitarp ~hana -arp);
S I 226,27 (gandho is1narp ciradikkhitanarp kaya -o
gacchati malutena) = Ja V 138,25*; Sn 899 (sace -o
silavatato hoti); Ja III 28,21* (ubho pakatiya -a);
IV 293,12* (-a pi eke khalita sakammuna
mittanukampaya patighahanti; 293,16·: ekacce hi yasato
va dhanato va -a pi sakammana khalita pi ... ); VI 14,22*
(darito pabbatato va rukkhato patito naro -o pati~~harp
labhati) f. Ap 402,15; Sp 753,16 (so bhikkhubhavato -o);
Spk II 176,1s (cavittha ti -a, na mata va na~~a va);
Th-a I 154,32 (-a ti bhagha); Vin-vn 70 (!hana caveti ce
morarp sayarp ~hana -o siya); - 2. (who has) fallen
from one state of existence (to another); who has died;
ceased, come to an end; Vin II 132,28 (eso bhikkhave
bhikkhu acirarp goyoniya -o); IV 217,13 (-a nama
kalañkata vuccati); D II 286,3 (cutallarp diviya kaya
ayurp hitva amanusarp); M III 158,6 (samadhimhi -e
obhaso antaradhayati); S V 474,23 (appaka te satta ye
manussa -a manussesu paccajayanti) =A I 37,6; It 19,15*
(ito -a manussatta saggarp gacchanti dayaka); Sn 774
(kirp su bhavissama ito -ase); Ja VI 141,11* (yadi kira
ca vana
yajitva puttehi devaloka111 ito -a yanti); Ap 195,8 (kam
su nama aha111 yoni111 gamissami ito -o); Kv 26,8 (atthi
ca koci rupadhatuya -o arupadhatu111 upapajjati ti);
Mil 6,34 (aya111 . . . Milindo raJa Ito -o manussesu
uppanno); It-a II 70,26 (ito -a apayesu nibbattanti);
Pa¡is-a 442,7 (yebhuyyena hi satta sugatito -a
duggatiya111 yeva nibbattanti); Cp-a 41,11 (bodhisatto pi
yavatayuka111 puññ~ katva devaloke nibbattitva tato -o
manussaloka111 agacchanto ); Mhv 38:1 O (Mittaseno
bahu111 punna111 katva vassena so -o);
neg. accuta, mfn. and n., not fallen or falling, finn,
steady; not falling away (from) or abandoning; (what is)
imperishable, permanent; that from or in which there is
nofalling (away) (ie nibbana); Abh 8 (mokkho nirodho
nibbana111 ... pal).It~ accut~ pada111); S IIl 143,11'
(careyyadittaslso va patthaya111 accuta111 pad~; Spk II
324,14: accut~ padan ti nibbanam); A IV 295,5 (na ca
labhl na ca socl na ca paridevl accuto ca saddhamma);
Dhp 225 (te yanti accuta111 ¡hana111 yattha gantva na
sacare); Sn 204 (ajjhaga amat~ santi111 nibbanarp
padam accut~, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nibbanapadam; Pj II
253,2: tal).hasankhatavanabhavato nibbanam
cavanabhavato accutan ti sarpval).l).ital11 padam ajjhaga
ti)= Vv 50:21; Th 212 (phusahi tam uttamam accutarp
padam; Th-a II 78,11: niccasabhavataya accuta111 padam
tarp nibbanam); Ja II 439,7* (acento jambusakhaya
moracchapo va kiijati; 439,9·: accuto ti na cuto
sunisinno); Ap 164,24 (yena ñal).ena patto si accutarp
amata111 pada111); Nidd I 308,5 (avivadabhiimi111 khemato
tal).ato lel).ato saral).ato sabhayato accutato amatato
nibbanato passanto); Kv 226,6 (dve parayanani dve
accutani dve amatani ... dve nibbananl ti); Mill65,3o
(yani tattha phalani sarani d<4habandhanani tani tatth'
eva accutani ti!!hanti); Ps 1 172,4 (acalena accutena
pasadena); Th-a 1 18,13 (natthi ettha cut! ti accutarp);
Sadd 70,30* (nibban~ vibhavo mokkho . . . pal).Itarp
accuta111 ca ti); - accutadassi(n), mfn., seeing the
imperishable; Nidd I 130,5 (accutadassino
amatadassino); - pp (b) cavita, mfn., fallen; fallen
away (from), having abandoned; Ja II 194,23* (patta111
bhinditva -o); V 158,8* (-amhi brahmacariya, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se cavi tamhi; 158,n·: tamha jhana brahmacariya
-e); - caus. pr. 3 sg. ciiveti\ -ayate, causes to move
or fall, shifts; causes to fall away (from), to abandon;
drives (from); Vin I 120,3o (sace kho may~ gilanarp
¡hana -essama, abadho va abhivaMhissati kalaq¡kiriya
va bhavissati ti); III 46,36 (adiyeyya hareyya avahareyya
iriyapatharp vikopeyya ¡hana -eyya sanket~
vitinameyya); 48,4 (kumbhirp . . . ¡hana -eti, apatti
parajikassa); 163,23 (app eva nama narp imamha
brahmacariya -eyyan ti; 164,1 foil.: bhikkhubhava
-eyyarp samal).adhamma -eyyarp sHakkhandha -eyy~
tapogul).a -eyy~); D III 24,27 (n' eva asakkhi acel~
Pa¡ikaputtarp tamha asana -eturp); A III 343,3 (t~
tamha samadhimha -essatl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
bhavessatl ti; Mp III 367,17: samadhimha unhapessati,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vutthahissati) = IV 343,26 (Be, Ce so;
Ee wr -issatl ti; Se gamissatl ti); Ja II 124,1 (ko nu kho
marp Sakkattato -etukamo); VI 482,11* (ramma -esi
m~ ¡hana vato va dharal).lruha111) = Cp 1:9:3;
126 cavanaka
Vin-vn 50 (kumbhi111 ¡hana -eti); Sadd 337,30 (cu
cavane: ... karite -en ti rup~); 529,8 (cu cavane: -e ti
-ayati); part.pr. (a) caventa, mfn., Sp 329,4;
Vin-vn 39 (¡hana -ento pi parajito); neg.
acaventa, mfn., Sp 323,8; (b) cavayamana, mfn., Vin III
47,17 (¡hana -ayamano);- aor. 3 sg. (a) cavesi, Vin III
56,25 (duss~ passitva theyyacitto ¡hana -esi); Ja V
134,5 (Dal).c;lakiraj a eka111 laddhasakkara111 gal).ikarp
¡hana -esi); (b) acavayi, Sn 442 (ma ma111 ¡hana
acavayi); - ah sol. cavetva, Ja Il 329,26 (narp sa ...
itthikuttena palobhetva jhana -etva brahmacariy~ assa
antaradhapesi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se hapetva); Vism 301,16
(sasanato -etva); Ps V 55,26 (cheko bhisakko
visavikar~ disva vamanarp karetva visa111 ¡hanato
-etva upari aropetva ... ); Ud-a417,J9 (samaññato
-etva); Vin-vn 124 (-etva pa¡hama111 ¡hana); -
neg. acavetva, Sp 329,3o; - pp cavita, mfn., Sp 329,31
(¡hana -itesu); Kkh2 44,13; - fpp cavetabba, mfn., Vin 1
120,32 (na bhikkhave gilano ¡hana -etabbo ).
ca vana, n. [cf S. cyavana; AMg caval).a], falling; falling
away from, abandoning; falling from one state of
existence (to another); dying; ceasing; Abh 404
(maral).arp kalakiriya ... -arp); Dhatup 35 (cu -e); Ja V
7,13* (viddh~sanarp -arp jlvitassa; 7,25·: -an ti cutirp);
Vism 460,13 (t~ tato 0 -tta cut! ti vuccati); Sp 584,24
(kupito ti kuppabhav~ pakatito --bhav~ patto); -
0
-tii,f, abstr., the state of falling from one existence;
death; MI 49,24 (tesarp tesarp sattan~ tamha tamha
sattanikaya cuti -a bhedo antaradhana111 maccu
maral).al11 kalakiriya) = S II 3,1 = Nidd I 123,3o = Pa¡is I
38,2;- 0 -dhamma, mfn. and m. [cavana + dhamma 1],
l. (mfn.) liable to fall from one existence (to another);
liable or about to die; D 1 20,6 (maya111 tamha kaya cuta
anicca addhuva appayuka -a itthattarp agata ti); MI
326,28 (-a111 yeva saman~ acavanadhamman ti
vakkhati); It 76,14 (yada ... devo devakaya -o hoti pañca
pubbanimittani patubhavanti; It-a II 76,1: -o ti
maral).adhammo, ayukkhayena va puññakkhayena va
upa!!hitamaral).o ti attho); Ja VI 482,s (sa attano --t~
~anantl); Mill29,J6 (idha maharaja kula111 hoti
aputtaka111 ... devaputto ca ussannakusalamiilo -o hoti);
Cp-a 77,3 (-anarp sa!!hi-sahassan~ devaputtana111):-
acavanadhamma, mfn., not liable to die; not liable to fall
away from or abandon; MI 326,10 (ida111 niccarp idarp
dhuv~. .. idarp acavanadhamm~) = SI 142,26;
Ud-a 278,28 (koci acavanadhammo nama n' atthl ti
dasseti); 393,14 (acavanadhamma111 anirodharp amatan ti
attho); It-a II 127,11 (patimokkhasHato
acavanadhammataparidlpana111) = Ud-a 223,21; Th-a 1
!8,12 (acavanadhammatta);- 2. (m.) the liability to die,
the imminence of death; Ja V 411,14 (Kosiyassa ta111
khal).~ yeva -o jato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nassanadhammo); - acavana, mfn., not dying; not
ceasing; Nidd-a I 251,7 (sassato ti -o).
cavanaka, mfn. and n. [cavana + ka2], l. (mfn.) falling
from one existence (to another); dying; Ps II 405,Jo (koci
jayanako va ... -o va upapajjanako va n' atthl ti, Be, Se
so; Ce, E e omit-o va)= Spk 1 208,14; Dhp-a I 258,21 (-e
upapajjanake satte dibbena cakkhuna olokento); -
2. (n.) falling from existence, dying; Ps 1 216,27 (cut! ti
casa ka
0
-vasena vuccati) = Spk Ill2,31 t- Vibh-a l00,1s.
casaka, m. [S. ca~aka], a drinking-vessel, a cup; Abh 534
(sarako -o).
casati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ca~ati, Wg § 21 :24], eats;
Sadd 449,21 (casa bhakkhai_le: -ati).
cahati, -eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cahati, cahayati,
Wg §§ 17:80, 35:14: caha parikalkane], goes about;?
boasts;? (deceives; ?) Sadd 457,19 (caha parisakkane:
-ati; perhaps read parikakkane ?); 568,24 (caha
parikatthane: -eti -ayati; perhaps read parikakkane ?).
cakara, m., the syllable 'ca'; Pj Il 205,26
(salTlsuddhacarai_lo ti ... chandavasena e' ettha dighalTI
katva -~ aha, salTlsuddhacarar:w ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr cakaralTI).
caga, m. [S. tyagaj, l. leaving, abandoning; getting rid of,
Abh 1129 (-o tu danahanisu); Vin 1 10,35 (id~ ...
dukkha-nirodh~ ariyasaccalTI yo tassa yeva taJ.lhaya
asesa-viraganirodho -o pa!inissaggo mutti analayo) t-
M 1 49,3 t- Pa!is I 40,25 t- Vibh 103,9; MI 6,13 (taJ.!hilnalTI
khaya viraga nirodha -a ... ); - 2. giving up; gift,
donation; generosity, liberality; Abh 420 (-o
vissajjanalTI dan~); 1129; MI 465,18 (saddhalTI ca
sil~ ca sut~ ca -alTI ca paññalTI ca anussarato);
III 245,26 (eso hi bhikkhave paramo ariyo -o yadidalTI
sahhupadhipa!inissaggo): SI 215,4* (yass' ete caturo
dhamma ... sacc~ damo dhiti -o sa ve pece a na socati)
= Sn 188; A I 92,1 (dve 'me bhikkhave -a ... amisa-
cago ca dhammacago ca); III 287,4 (ariyasavako attano
-alTI anussarati . . . yo 'h~ . . . yacayogo
danasalTlvibhaga-rato ti); Ja II 112,19* (passa saddhaya
sllassa -assa ca ayalTI phalalTI; 112,24·: -assa ti
deyyadhammapariccagassa e' eva kilesapariccagassa
ca); Ap 469,1 ( -ena paJ.lidhihi ca); Mi1276,9 (das a gu1.1e
anudassati . . . agedhata niralayata -o pahanalTI ... );
Vism 223,13 (attano -o anussaritabbo); Saddh 214
(annadidanavatthilnalTI -o);- cago in eds at Pe! 39,23 is
prob. wr; perhaps read e' agu with Ñii~amoli, 1964,
p 50, fn 13311; - 0 adhitthiina, n. and mfn., l. (n.)
fixing the mind on abandoning, giving up and/or on
giving; resolution for liberality and/or for abandoning;
D III 229,19 (cattari adhighanani, pañña-adhinhan~
saccadhi!!han~ -alTI upasamadhiHhanalTI;
Sv 1022,33joll.: tatiyena amisa-pariccago ... kathito ...
va . . . amisapariccagalTI adilTI katva aggamaggena
kilesapariccago); M III 245,25; Pe! 171,21 (saddha -ena
niddisitabba); Cp-a 323,23 (vatthukama-
kilesakamapariccagehi -alTI); 2. (mjn.) having
resolve for liberality andlor abandoning; M Ill 240,11
(puriso ... -o);- 0 adhimanasa, mfn., intent on giving;
Ja VI 488,13* (raja -o; 488,15': cagena adhikamanaso);
-
0
anussati,f, the calling to mind of one's liberality;
A I 30,15; Nidd I 7,7 HITl bhavento); Kv 155,16;
Vism 197,16 (cagalTI arabbha uppanna anussati -i,
muttacagatadicagaguJ.larammaJ.laya satiya et~
adhivacan~);- -abhibhavena in Ee at Pv-a 120,21 is
0
wr; read lobhassa ca abhibhavena with Be, Se; -
oabhivyañjita, mfn., made manifest by liberality; It-a I
14,8 (sabba hi paramiyo saccappabhavita -a
upasamanubruhita paññaparisuddha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
vacabhivyañjita; t- Cp-a 323,38: 0 -parivyañjita);
127
0
-pari-vyañjita, mfn., very clearly manifested by
liberality; Cp-a 323,3s (sabba pi paramiyo
saccapabhavita -a ... ; t- It-a I 14,8: cagabhivyañjita); -
0
-va(t), mfn., liberal, generous; A III 183,6 ( 0 -va
bhikkhave cagakathaya kacchamanaya nabhisajjati ... );
IV 266,11 ( 0 -vatl . . . yacayoga danas~vibhagarata);
Ja II1 262,19* (akkodhano mittava 0 -va va; 263,21·: 0 -va ti
dhanapariccagayutto); Dhs 1328 (puggala saddha
sllavanto bahussuta 0 -vanto paññavanto); Pj I 34,23
0
( ... kataññuta katavedita amaccharita -vantata
sllavantata ... ) t- It-a II 57,1 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
bhogavantata, prob. wr); Mhv 27:21.
cagi(n), mfn. [S. tyagin], giving up, abandoning; giving;
liberal; Vv 84:39 (saddho ca -1 ca supesalo ca);
Cp-a 328,30* (sacco -1 upasanto paññava anukampako);
Mhv 5:192 (dharamane pi sugate natthi -I taya samo);
- ifc see kama-, hita- (sv dahati\
cati, ca!I, f [cjHindi ca!I? CDIAL 4736], a large vessel
or jar; V in I 153,1 foil. (bhikkhu -iya vassalTI
upagacchanti . . . na bhikkhave -iya vassalTI
upagantabbalTI; Sp 1072,23: -iya ti etthapi mahantena
kapallena . . . ku!ilTI katva upagantulTI vagati); Ja IV
343,14 (lalako vatayalTI Kosalaraja ca!i-mattalTI
bhojanam eva bhuñjitulTI janatl ti); V 13,2ljoll. (te
pañcasu 0 -satesu sur~ saJ.l!hapetva musikabhayena
0
-rakkhai_latthaya ekekaya -iya santike ekek~ bi~ar~
bandhilTlsu); Sp 1091,25 (udakakoghe -ilTI va doJ.lilTI va
UJ.lhodakassa pilretva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr
udakako!!hakalTI pa!ilTI); Sv 58,23 foil. (kolambe udakalTI
-iyalTI udak~ na papuJ.lati -iyalTI udakalTI
mahakumbhiy~ udakalTI na papuJ.lati); Ps 11 189,24
(nalTI ekaya -rya vasapesulTI); III 214,2o
(vatapanasamipesu e' ettha nava -iyo !hapetva udakassa
puretva nlluppaladihi sañchadenti); V 91 ,s (abbhantare
e' assa anto -iyalTI padipo viya arahattassa upanissayo
jalati); Th-a III 95,6 (na sakkomi -i hutva udañcan~
hotun ti); Mhv 27:22 (gulatelasakkhara-madhupura ca
nekaca!iyo); Sadd 353,19* (mahantabhajanalTI -I); - ifc
see tela-, patara- (sv patara\ panrya-;
0
-kahapal}a, m., money for the jars; ? Ja I 199,28 (ahalTI
pubbe etesu suralTI pivantesu pfu_latipatadini karontesu
-' -adivasena e' eva daJ.l<;iabalivasena ca dhanalTI
labhami); - 0 -pañjara, m.(?), a pot used as a hide; ?
Ja V 358,1o (so tattha gantva -e nisiditva halTlsan~
caraJ.la!!hanalTI vim~si); 358,15 (h~sesu saralTI
anotiJ.lJ.lesu yeva -e nisinno t~ !hiinalTI gantva avidure
pañjare attanalTI pa!icchadetva chiddena olokento acchi);
372,3· (gha!assito ti --nissito, Ce so; Be, Se -e nissito;
Ee wr bhavassito ti); - 0 -pala in Ee at Ja V 373,29' is
prob. wr for ca!ikapala qv.
catikapala, n.(?), a shield or screen; ? Ja V 373,29' (ki!an
ti ki!ak~ -~ vuccati, 0 -hattha pi te santike n' atthi ti
dipeti, Ce so; E e ca!ipalalTI; Be kit~ - '-adi vuccati; Se
ki1,1italTI -an ti pi vuccati).
catu (and catu), m.n. [ts], pleasing talk, flattery;
Sadd 921,14 (mattabhedo tava ... ca!u -u);- 0 -kamya,
kamma,f, aiming at flattery, flattery; ? Ps III 5,17
(cUJ.lJ.lamattika-dan~ deti -~ karoti muggasñpiyalTI
paribhaty~ jari.gha-pesaniy~ karotl ti, Be so; Ce, Ee
0
-kammalTI; Se patukamyalTI); 0
-kamyatli,
ciitaka
kammata,f, the desire to please;? aiming at flattery,
flattery, sycophancy; Nidd I 388,4 (anuppiyabhiiJ.!ita -a
muggasüpyata paribha~yata ... ayaq¡ vuccati 1apana, Ce
so; Be catu-; Ee, Se wr patu-) f- Vibh 352,31 (Be, Ce so;
Ee pa~u-; Se patu-) quoted Vism 23,13 (Vism 27,26: -a ti
nicavuttita attanaq¡ heghato heghato ~hapetva vattanaq¡);
Vibh 246,24 (idh' ekacco ve)u-danena va pattadanena
va . . . -aya va muggasüpyataya va paribha~yataya va
jaitghapesanikena va aññataraññatarena
buddhapa~iku~~ena miccha-ajivena jivitaq¡ kappeti, Be,
Ce so; Ee pa~u-; Se patu-; Vibh-a 338,3: -a vuccati
attanaq¡ dasaq¡ viya nica~~ane thapetva parassa
khalitavacanaq¡ pi saJ;t~apetva piyakamataya
paggayhavacanaq¡) quoted Vism 17,7; Mi1370,t (yogina
yogavacarena ... mukhodaka-danena va ca~ukammataya
va muggasuppataya va . . . micchajivena nipphaditaq¡
bhojanaq¡ na paribhuñjitabbaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be
catukamyataya; Se patukamyataya); Pj I 236,27 (-aq¡,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se patu-);- see also ca~.
cataka, m. [ts], a kind of bird, Cucculus melanoleucus;
Abh 641 (saraitgo tu ca -o).
ca tu, see sv catu.
catu(r) is the vrddhi fonn of catu(r) qv in cpds (sorne of
which do not seem distinct in meaning from cpds with
catu[r]); - see catucari(n), catuddasa, catuddasika,
catuddasi, catuddisa, catuddisika, catuddipa,
catuddipika, catumassa, catumasa2, catumasini,
catumasi, catummahapatha, catummahabhütika,
catummaharajika, catuyama, caturanta, catUVaJ;~J;ti(n).
catukummasa~p in Ee at V v-a 308,13 is prob. wr; Be, Ce,
Se mayhaq¡ ca kummasaq¡ datva.
catucari(n), mfn. [from catu(r) + cari(n)], going on four
(feet); Spk III 49,17* (-I va kesañ, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
catu-cañ; = Ps III 24,7•: eds catucañ =Ud-a 414,25*: eds
caru-cañ);- see also catucari(n) sv catu(r).
catuddasa, n., mfn. and m. [from catuddasa qv sv catu(r);
cfS. caturdasa], l. (n., scil. aha[n] ?) thefourteenth day
(of a lunar fortnight); Vin I 87,3o (-e pannarase
at~amiya ca pakkhassa uposathaq¡ upavasa); 102,3; Ja 11
369,1 (pakkhassa tayo divase -e pannarase at~amiyaq¡
ca agacchati); Sp 793,27 (sace pana vassaq¡
upagantukama bhikkhü -e viharaq¡ agacchanti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr catuddese); Kkh 2 5,15; Ps V 102,21 (tattha
-e he~~apasade kathesi . . . uposathadivase uparipasade
kathesi); Thüp 222,27 (asii)hisukkapakkhassa 0 -divase
bhikkhu-saitghaq¡ sannipatetva); - 2. (mfn.) on the
fourteenth day (of a lunar fortnight); (m.,
scil. uposatha ?) the uposatha observance on the
fourteenth day (of a lunar fortnight); Vin I 132,18
(avasikanaq¡ bhikkhünaq¡ -o hoti, agantukanaq¡
pannaraso); 11240,35 (tadah' uposathe -e va pannarase
va); M III 276,12 (seyyatha pi bhikkhave tad-ahuposathe
-e na hoti bahuno janassa kaitkha va vimati va üno nu
kho cando pUJ;!J;IO nu kho cando ti, atha kho üno cando tv
eva hoti).
catuddasika, mfn. [from catuddasi; cfS., BHS
caturdasika], on the fourteenth day of a lunar fortnight,
Vin I 111,25 (dve 'me bhikkhave uposatha -o ca
pannarasiko ca; Sp 1056,31: ettha -assa pubbakicce
ajjuposatho catuddaso ti vattabbaq¡); 160,25 (dve 'ma
128 ciituddasi
bhikkhave paviiraJ;~a -a pannarasika ca; Sp 1074,18: ettha
-aya ajja paviiraJ;~a catuddasi ti evaq¡ pubbakiccaq¡
katabbaq¡); 175,2o (anujanami bhikkhave tehi bhikkhühi
dve tayo uposathe -e katuq¡ kathaq¡ mayaq¡ tehi
bhikkhühi pa~amataraq¡ pavareyyama ti;
Sp 1079,15 foll.: ettha catutthapañcama dve -a tatiyo
pana pakatiya pi -o yeva ti tasma tatiyacatuttha va
tatiyacatutthapañcama va dve tayo -a katabba); Spk I
115,19 (pannarase ti -'adipatikkhepo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
catuddasikadi-).
catuddasi, f and mfn. [from catuddasa qv sv catu(r);
AMg cauddasi; cf S. caturdasi], l. (f., scil. ratti) the
fourteenth day (night) of a lunar fortnight; MI 20,28 (ya
ta rattiyo abhiññata abhi1akkhita -I pañcadasi aghami ca
pakkhassa; PsI 119,8: -I ti pakkhassa pa~amadivasato
pabhuti catuddasannaq¡ püraJ;~I eka ratti); J a I 81 ,22
(-iyaq¡ paccüsasamaye); Sp 98,25 (Anuradhapure pi
mahasakkaraq¡ katva 0
-divase yeva
va<;l<;lhamanakacchayaya mahabodhiq¡ uttaradvarena
pavesetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catuddasa-) = Thüp 203,15
(Ee so; mss catuddasa-); Sv 458,6 (sve visakhapUJ;tJ;tama
bhavissati ti 0 -divase); Dhp-a IV 202,4 (ajja -I ajja
pannarasi uposathaq¡ karotha dhammaq¡ suJ;tatha ti);
Cp-a 103,17 (iuJ;thapakkhe -iyaq¡ Isakaq¡
aparipuJ;tJ;tabhavena candaq¡ na paripüritaq¡ disva); -
acc. catuddasiip, adv., on the fourteenth day; for the
fourteenth day; M 11 81,1 (uposathaq¡ ca upavasati -iq¡
pañcaddasirp a~~amirp ca pakkhassa); A I 142,28 (-irp
bhikkkhave pakkhassa catunnaq¡ maharajanarp putta
imaq¡ 1okarp anuvicaranti, Be so; Ce, Se -iyarp; Ee wr
-I); 144,1* (-irp pañcadasirp ya ca pakkhassa aghami
pa~ihariya-pakkharp ca aghaitgasusamagataq¡ uposathaq¡
upavaseyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -I) f- Vv 15:6 f- Thi 31
(Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -I pañcadasi ... ; Thi-a 36,7 foll.:
cuddasannaq¡ püraJ;~I -i . . . tarp -irp pañcadasirp ca,
pakkhassa ti sambandho, accantasarpyoge e' etaq¡
upayogavacanaq¡) f- Ja IV 320,19*; Sn 402 (tato ca
pakkhass' upavass' uposatharp -irp pañcadasirp ca
at~amirp ... ); JaiV 460,16* (-irp pannarasirp ca raja
catuppathe sammati nagaraja); VI 228,14* (-irp
pañcadasirp sada upavasam' aharp); Mhv 37:202; -
2. (mfn.) on the fourteenth day of a lunar fortnight;
Sp 1075,29 (sace catuddasika hoti, ajja me pavaraJ;~a
-i ... ti evaq¡ adhi~~atabbarp).
catuddisa, mfn. [from catu(r) + disa], l. [BHS caturdisa],
coming from the four quarters, ie from the whole world;
universal, total; Vin 11 147,26 (tvaq¡ gahapati te sa~~irp
vihare agatanagatassa -assa saitghassa patighapehi ti);
DI 145,11 (yo ... -arp saitghaq¡ uddissa viharaq¡ karoti);
Pv 27: 14 (pi1otikarp pa~aq¡ katva saitghe -e ada;
Pv-a 185,9: catühi disahi agatabhikkhusaitghassa adasi);
Ja I 93,14 (imaq¡ Jetavanaviharaq¡ agatanagatassa -assa
buddhapamukhassa sailghassa dammi ti); Ap 298,3
(ekaq¡ 1eJ;tarp maya kataq¡ -assa saitghassa); Mhv 32:34
(-assa ubhatosaitghassa mahato maya ... mahadanaq¡ ...
pavattitaq¡); - 2. having control in the four quarters;
unrestricted; pervading the four quarters (with the
brahmaviharas); A III 135,3 (pañcahi bhikkhave
dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu -o hoti; Mp III 280,5:
-o ti catusu disasu appatihatacaro ); Sn 42 (-o appatigho
dituddisika
ca hoti; Pj II 88,9 foil.: -o ti catusu disasu
yathasukhavihañ ... va ... brahmaviharabhavanapharita
catasso disa assa santl ti pi -o)= Ap 9,3 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr catuddiso); Th 1057 (sa ve -o naro); Vism 76,5
(nissailgata o -ta appicchatadin~ anulomavuttita ti);
Sp 789,7 (ayarp bahussuto hoti -o); Mp lii 282,2o (0 -tta);
It-a II 148,18 (santughiya 0 -bhavena disa nappatihanti);
Pj II 87,14joll. (may~ maharaja -a nama ti, bhante -a
ti imassa ko attho ti, catusu disasu katthaci bhayarp va
cittutraso va amhakarp natthi maharaja ti).
ciituddisika, catuddisiya, mfn. [catuddisa + ika or iya],
coming from the four quarters; universal; Mhv 45:54
(so pi tarp catuddisiyasailghassa paribhogaya vissaji);
73:155 (0 -bhikkhünarp); 74:150 (karetva mahatirp tattha
danasalarp catummukharp o -dinanarp anapparp
danavagakarp paghapetha ti pesesi); 79:17
(
0
-sail.ghassa); - catuddisika- in Ee at It-a II 58,14
(catuddisikamahamegharp) is wr for catuddipika- (Be,
Ce, Se so).
ciituddipa, mfn. rJrom catu(r) + dipa2; BHS catudvipa,
caturdvipa], belonging to the four continents; extending
over the four continents; having control over the four
continents; Thi 486 (-o raja Mandhata); Ap 384,5 (-a
ime rukkha padapa dharal)Iruha, Be, Ee so; Ce catudipa;
Se catuddisa) = 436,22 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catuddisa);
505,7 (-o mahamegho tavade sampavassatha); 598,5 (-a
bahü kañña, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catuddipa); -
catuddipamhi in E e, Se at Ap 81 ,4 (-amhi issaro) is
prob. wr for catudipamhi (Be, Ce so).
ciituddipika, catuddipaka, catu(d)dipika, mfn. rJrom
catu(r) + dipa2; cf BHS caturdvipaka], extending over
the four continents, ie over the whole world; Vin I 290,33
(-o mahamegho pavassi) -t Ja IV 314,31 (Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee catuddipako); Mp II 169,12 (catudipikameghena
gatamaggo vi ya hoti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se catuddisika-);
Nidd-a I 292,8 (rañña cakkavattina ti 0 -cakkavattina);-
0
-mahii-megha, m., a great cloud extending over the
four continents; Sv 440,21 (-o vassi, Be so; Ce, Ee
catuddipaka-; Se catuddisika-); 441,29 (--vassanarp, Be
so; Ce catu-ddipaka-; Ee catuddipaka-; Se catuddisika-)
= Ps IV 188,19 (Be so; Ce, Se -assa vassan~; Ee
catuddipika-mahameghassa); Ps III 22,2 (-ato
nikkhantavijjullata viya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catuddisika-)
= Spk III 47,32 (Be, Ce so; Ee catuddipika-; Se
catudipika-) = Ud-a413,2; Th-aiii 195,27 (-o viya, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e catuddipaka-); Bv-a 83,16 (-o vi ya
dhammavassarp vassento, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
catuddipika-).
ciituddese in Ee at Sp 793,27 is wr for catuddase (Be, Ce,
Se so).
ciitubbedii in Ee at Mil 3,31 is prob. wrfor catubbeda (Be,
Ce so).
ciitumassa (and catumasa 1), (mj)n. [cfS. caturmasya],
(that day) which ends a four-month period; -
0
-komudi,f, the full-moon day in the month Kattika
which ends a four-month period (of rains); Ja VI 221 ,14*
(-iya amacce sannipatayi, Ce, E e so; Be, Se catumasa
komudiya; 221,2r: catumassa ti catunn~
vassikamasanarp pacchimadivasa-bhütaya, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se catumasa ti ... pacchimadivasa-bhütaya rattiya);
129 ditummahabhütika
221 ,18* (-' ajja jul)h~ vyapagatarp tamarp, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se catumasa komud' ajja; 221,26·: komudajja ti
komudi ajja).
Ciitumahiipatha, see SV catummahapatha.
ciitumahiibhütika, see sv catummahabhütika.
ciitumahiiriija, see sv catummaharaja.
ciitumahiiriijika, see sv catummaharajika.
1
ciitumiisa , see sv catumassa.
2
ciitumiisa , catummasa, n., ciitumiisii, m.pl. rJrom catu(r)
+ masa2 ; cf AMg caummasa], a period of four months;
Vin II 123,14 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü -arp nisidanena
vippavasanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catu-); IV 101,17
(iccham' aharp bhante sailgh~ -arp bhesajjena
pavaretun ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be catu-); Ja IV 484,2o· (-arp
tatth' eva vasanti); Ap 538,7 (-e upaghiya, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce catu-); Sp 1039,5 (yassa pana Idisesu vughikalesu
vassanassa -e sot~ na pacchijjati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
catummase); Sv 83,23 (ev~ -arp vitinameti, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se catu-); Dhp-a I 393,6 (idani vassakalo agato na
sakka catummasarp vicariturp, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
catumas~); Dip 1:37 (hemant~ -amhi idha vihara
Gotama); - ifc see omaka-; - see also catumasa
(sv catu[r]).
ciitumiisini, (m)f(n). or f rJrom catumasa2], (the day ofthe
full moon) which ends a four-month period (of rains-
residence); Vin I 177,24 (agame komudiya -iya sailgho
pavareyya); DI 47,6 (tadahuposathe pannarase
komudiya -1ya pul)l)aya pUJ:.lJ:.lamaya rattiya;
Sv 139,29foll.: -iya ti catumasiya, sa ... catumasi, idha
pana -I ti vuccati); M III 79,2o (idh' evaharp
Savatthiy~ komudirp -irp agamessami ti; Ps IV
137,23foll.: komudi -I ti pacchimakattikapUJ)l)ama sa hi
kumudan~ atthitaya komudi catunn~ vassikanarp
masanarp pariyosanatta -I ti ca vuccati, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se komudirp -in ti); Ja V 262,1o (komudiya -iya);
Kkh 2 15,2o;- ifc see kattika-.
ciitumiisi, (m)f(n). or f [cfS. caturmasi], (the day of the
full moon) which ends a four-month period (of rains-
residence); Sv 139,29 foil. (catumasiniya ti -iya, sa hi
catunnarp masanarp pariyosanabhüta ti -I); - see also
kattikacatumasipUJ:.lJ:.lama sv kattika.
ciitummahiipatha, ciitumahiipatha, m. rJrom catu(r) +
mahapatha; cf BHS caturmahapatha], a crossing of
highroads; a main crossroads; DI 102,1 (-e catudvararp
agararp karitva); II 142,5 (-e rañño cakkavattissa
thüparp karonti); MI 58,2 (dakkho goghatako ... gavirp
vadhitva -e bilaso pativibhajitva nisinno assa, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be catu-; PsI 271,zo: catasso disa gatan~
mahapathanarp vemajjha-ghanasailkhate -e); 124,19
(subhümiy~ -e ajaññaratho yutto assa thito, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be catu-) = S IV 176,!6; Ja I 200,29 (-e mahantarp
salarp karessama ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee catu-); Cp 1:9:28
(!hatva -e, Be, Ce, E e so; Se catu-); Sv 298,23 (-e
khatapokkharai)I viya hutva); Dhp-a III 83,1 (-e thüp~
karesi, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee catu-); - see also
catummahapatha (sv catu[r]).
ciitummahabhütika, ciitumahiibhütika, mfn. rJrom
catu(r) + mahabhüta; BHS caturmahabhütika,
caturmahabhautika; cf S. caturbhautika], consisting of
the four main elements; D I 34,8 (ay~ atta rüpi -o
 ciitummahiiriija
matapettikasambhavo kayassa bheda ucchijjati
vinassati) f. Vibh 383,27; MI 515,9 (-o ayaJTI puriso
yada ka1~ karoti pathavl pathavlkayaJTI anupeti ... ) =
S 111 206,34 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catu-) quoted Ja V 239,27'
(Be, Ce so; Ee, Se catu-); S 11 94,5 (imasmiJTI -asmiJTI
kayasmiJTI; Spk 11 98,6: -asmin ti ... catu-mahabhiitehi
nibbatte catumahabhütamaye ti attho, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nibbatto ... catumahabhiitamayo); Mi1379,24 (imaJTI kho
ah~ -aJTI kayaJTI sammasanto); Ps IV 153,27 (im~
catumahabhiitik~. eds so).
catummaharaja, catumaharaja, n. ffrom catu(r) +
maharaja; but perhaps wr for catu(m)maharaja], the
group of four world guardians; Ja I 48,16
0
( -sakkasuyama-
santusitasuparanimmitavasavattimahabrahmehi
saddhiJTI, Ce, E e, Se so; Be ca tu-) f. Ap-a 52,29 (eds so);
Mp 1 245,7 (sattha ... 0 -dattiyena selamayapattena taJTI
patiggahetva, Ce, E e, Se so; Be catu-); Dhp-a 111 207,3
0
(thero -dattiy~ pattaJTI nlharitva hatthe thapesi, Se so;
Be, Ce catu-; Ee maharajadattiyaJTI).
catummaharajika, catumaharajika, mfn., n., m. and-a,
m.pl. ffrom catu(r) + maharaja; BHS caturmaharajika],
l. (mfn. and m.) belonging to the company attending the
four great kings, the world guardians; a god or the gods
belonging to that company; Abh416; Vin1 12,4 (-a
deva); DI 215,28 (so ... bhikkhu yena -a deva ten'
upasailkami); M ll 194,3 (manussehi ... -a deva seyyo
ti); III 100,17 (-a deva dlghayuka Va!).l)avanto
sukhabahu1a ti); S V 409,28 (-ehi kho avuso devehi
tavatiJT!sa deva abhikkantatara ca pal)ltatara ca); Ja 11
311,4 (0 -devaloke rajjaJTI karenta); Nidd I 44,3 (api ca
-anaJTI devanaJTI jlvitaJTI upadaya manussanaJTI appakaJTI
jlvit~; Nidd-a 1 154,16joll.: -aJTI devanan ti
Dhatarartha- Virii~haka- Viriipakkha-Kuvera-sailkhata
catumaharaja issara etesan ti -a); Vibh 422,3
(uppattideva nama -e deve upadaya tadupari deva);
Vism 416,31 (sa aggijala ughahitva -e ga!).hati);
Sv 966,35 (so kal~ katva -esu Kuvero nama devaputto
jato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr catu-); Spk 1 8l,1s
(Pajjunnassa nama vassa-va1ahakadevarañño -assa
dh!ta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -a 'ssa); 245,17 (0 -bhavanaJTI,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee catum-maharajaka-, prob. wr); 295,23
(idaJTI hi nakkhattaJTI yava -ehi ekabaddhaJTI hoti);
Dhp-a I 54,21 (-aJTI adiJTI katva ya va akanitrhabhavana
pan' idaJTI kolahalaJTI agamasi); Ud-a 282,15 (-a deva
navutivassasatasahassani dibba-sukhaJTI dibbasampattiJTI
patiiabhanti); Vibh-a 519,14 (-a nama Sinerupabbatassa
vemajjhe honti); 2. (n.) the world of the
catummaharajika gods; AI 227,34 (cattari
maharajasahassani sahassaJTI -anaJTI sahass~
tavatiJT!san~ sahassaJTI yamanaJTI ... sahassaJTI brahma-
lokan~; Mp 11 340,31: sahassaJTI 0
-devalokan~);
Kv 609,19 (-e titthati .. . tavatiJT!se tirthati .. . yame
tirthati ... brahmaloke tiHhatl ti).
catuyama, m. ffrom catu(r) + yama; AMg caujjama], the
group of four restraints; (se e N. Balbir, 2000, pp. 9-12 );
Spk I 126,29 foil. (catuyamasusaJT!vuto ti -ena
susaJT!vuto, -o nama sabbavarivarito ca hoti
sabbavariyutto ca sabba-varidhuto ca sabbavariphuto ca
ti ime cattaro konhasa); - -sa1pvara, m., control in
130 ciituvai}I}Í(n)
regard to the four restraints; D 1 58,2 (nigal)tho
Nataputto ... -aJTI vyakasi); III 48,Is (tapassl --SaJT!vuto
hoti); MI 377,1 (idh' assa nigal)tho -SaJT!vuto
sabbavarivarito sabbavariyuto sabbavaridhuto sabba-
variphuto); - 0
-Susaipvuta, mfn., well-controlled in
regard to the four restraints; SI 66,17* (devaputto
nigal)th~ NataputtaJTI arabbha ... im~ gath~ abhasi,
jegucchi nipako bhikkhu -o).
catura, mfn., see sv catura.
caturanta, mfn. ffrom catu(r) + anta 1; cf BHS caturanta],
l. bounded by the four (oceans); consisting of the four
(continents); Ja 11 343,19* (pathavya -aya suppiyo hosi
me tuv~; 343,22': imissa hi catiisu disasu samudd~
patva thitaya -aya pathaviya tvaJTI mayham suqhu piyo
ti); IV 309,16* (sa -arp mahiJTI avasatu); Sv 443,12
(puratthima-samuddad!naJTI catunn~ samuddanam
vasena -aya pathaviya); Ps IV 223,21 (rañña
cakkavattina -aya pathaviya adhipacc~ adhigat~
hoti); - see also caturanta sv catu(r); - 2. ruling over
(the earth which is) bounded by the four (oceans) and
consists of the four (continents); lord of the whole
world; D 1 88,33 (sace agaraJTI ajjhavasati raja hoti
cakkavatti dhammiko dhamma-raja -o vijitavl ... ;
Sv 249,32: caturantaya issaro ti -o, catu-samuddantaya
catubbidhadlpabhiisitaya ca pathaviya issaro ti attho, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se -aya issaro ti) quoted Kv 286,3; D li
169,2o (khattiyo muddhavasitto -o vijitavl ... ); Sn 552
(raja arahasi bhavituJTI cakkavatti rathesabho -o vijitavl
Jambusa!).<;!assa issaro ); Ja VI 476,24* (-o maharaqho ...
pathavya ekaraja 'si); Ap 51,28 (-o vijitavl cakkavatti
bhavissati; Ap-a 304,18: -o catusu dlpesu issaro).
caturiya, n. ffrom catura; S. caturya], cleverness, skill;
charm, agreeableness; Ja III 267,4' (catura ti -ena
samannagata); Vibh 351,22 (siilg~ siilgarata caturata
-aJTI parikkhattata parikkhattiyaJTI) quoted Mp 111 42,2o,
It-a 11 164,27 and Th-a III 86,21; Vism 104,27 (ragacarito
hi pakatigamanena gacchanto -ena gacchati, Sal)ikaJTI
padaJTI nikkhipati samaJTI nikkhipati samaJTI uddharati
ukkutik~ e' assa pad~ hoti); Thi-a 214,19 (riipena
val)l)ena kittimena -ena ti); Dath 5:30 (naccesu -am
acchariyaJTI janassa sandassayiJT!su); - 0 -vilasa, m.pl.,
charm and grace; Ja VI 410,14 (tassa ri'ipasampattiJTI ca
-e ca kavlhi gHabandhanena bandhapetva, Ce, Ee so; Se
-aJTI; Be -ena kavlhi gH~ bandhapetva).
catuvai}.J].a, n., -a, m.pl. ffrom catu(r) + Va!).l)a], the four
classes; Ja IV 304,12' (ekacce aññal)a brahmaJ).a
akaraJ).en' eva-e suddhiJTI paññapenti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
catuval)l)aJTI saddhiJTI); Ps Ili 290,1 * (sarajikaJTI -aJTI
posetUJTI yaJTI pahossati raghapalakul~ nama, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee catUVa!).l)iJTI, prob. wr); Bv 18:12
(
0
-parivutaJTI Tiss~, Ce, Se so; Be, E e catuval)l)a-;
Bv-a 230,22: o -parivutan ti catuparisaparivutaJTI ...
catuval)l)ehi parivutan ti pathanti keci, eds so); Ps Ili
410,12 (ettha -a ti niyamo natthi, pañcamo hi
parisakaval)l)O pi atth1 ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
padasikaVaJ).l)O ); -se e also catubbal)l)a (sv catu[r)).
catuvai}.J].Í(n), mfn. [from catu(r) + val)l)a], connected with
the four classes; M li 132,23 (-iJTI suddhiJTI may~ ...
bhagavant~ apucchimha); Ps IIl 408,8 (-in ti
catuVaJ).l)asadharaJ).aJTI); Ps III 410,11 (yad etaJTI
capa
brahmal)a va -1 ti vadanti); - catuvai)I)ÜT\ in Ce, Ee at
Ps III 290,1' is prob. wr for catuval)l)aq¡ (Be, Se so).
capa, m.n. [ts], a bow; Abh 388 (dhanu kodal)~aq¡ -o);
Vin IV 201,8 (avudhaq¡ nama -o kodal)~o); MI 429,19
(yava na taq¡ dhanuJ?1 jan ami yen' amhi viddho yadi va
-o yadi va kodai)~O ti); Dhp 320 (ahaq¡ nago va
saiJ.game -ato patitam saraq¡ ativakyaq¡ titikkhissaJ?1);
Ja III 323,7' (yatha -o ninnamati jiya capi niküjati);
VI 482,30' (kucchi anunnato assa -aq¡ va likhitaq¡
samaq¡); 580,4* (vipphalentu ca -ani); Ap 419,2 (-aq¡
tatth' eva nikkhippa); Mil 372,16 (-o sutacchito mito
yav aggamülaq¡ samakam eva anunamati na
pa~itthambhati);- ifc see inda-; -
0
-kara, m. [capa+
1
kara ], a bow-maker; Ap 359,17 (usukara -a, Ee so; Be,
Ce, Se bhamakara); - 0 -na!i,f, bow and quiver;? (or
simply bow; ?) Ja 11 88,21 (suval)l)akañcukaq¡
pa~imuñcitva -iq¡ pighiyaJ?1 sannayhitva, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr -i);- 0 -lasui].a, m., a kind of (garlic or) onion;
(a spring onion; ?) Vin IV 259,26 (ya pana bhikkhuni
lasul)aq¡ khadeyya pacittiyan ti ... anapatti palal)~uke ...
hañtake -e süpasampake; Sp 920,17: -o amiñjako
2
aiJ.kuramattam eva tassa hoti); Kkh 309,11 (-e, Be, Ee
so; Ce cavalasune); see also cavala;
0
-hattha, mfn., with bow in hand, armed with a bow;
Ja V 259,9' (aru!ha gamal)iyehi -ehi vammihi) =
VI 49,23' = Ap 353,13; Ap 354,23 (khaggahattha ca purisa
-a ca vammino); - see also illiyacapadhari(n)
(sv i11iya).
capala, m., see sv cavala.
capalya, capalla, n. [from capala qv; S. capalya],
unsteadiness; thoughtlessness; indulgence in show and
ornament; MI 470,13 (sace ... araññako bhikkhu ...
uddhato hoti capa! o tassa bhavanti vattaro ... imass·
ayasmato ... uddhaccaJ?1 -aJ?1 bahullkataq¡; Ps III 184,27:
capa! o ti ... tarul)adaraka va -en a samannagato. Be so;
Ce, Ee tarunadarakacapa11ena; Se
tarul)adarakacapalyena); Nidd I 380,18 (mal)~ana
vibhüsana keJana parike[ana gedhitata gedhitattaJ?1
capalata -aq¡) f. Vibh 351,32; Vism 106,34 (ragacaritassa
ca maya ... singaq¡ -an ti evaq¡adayo dhamma bahulaJ?1
pavattanti); Th-a III 86,27 (capala ti
kayamal)~anaparikkharamal)~anadina capa11ena yutta);
- ifc see vigata- (sv vigacchati).
capika, m(jn). [capa+ ika; cf S. capin], one armed with a
bow, a bowman; Sadd 787,2 (capo assa avudho -o).
camara, m.n. [ts], the bushy tail of the yak, used as a Jan
or jly-whisk, a chowry; Abh 357 (valavijani ... -aq¡);
Sn 688 (suval)l)adal)~a vltipatanti -a); Ja VI 51 0,2o·
(camara-morahatthehi ti -ehi e' eva morahatthehi ca
vljitanga); Ap 302,23 (laggapesiq¡ ... morahatthe ca -e);
Sp 75,8 (Asoko .. . pahil)i chattaq¡ -am khaggaJ?1);
Sadd 921,12 (mattabhedo tava ... camaraq¡ -aJ?1); -
0
-gahaka, m., one who holds the chowry; Ja VI 218,28'
(-en a ankena pariggahlta hutva, Ce, Se so; Be camari-;
Ee camañ-);- 0 -chattagahaka, m.pl., those who hold
the chowry and parasol; Sn 688 (na dissare -a); - see
also camara, camarL
camari, f, l.[= camari], the female yak; Ja III 18,7
(yatha ... -i valaq¡ appamadena rakkhati, Be, E e, Se so;
Ce camañ); Ap 61,21 (kiki va al)~aq¡ rakkheyya -i viya
131 caraka
valadhiq¡, Be so; Se -i-r-iva; Ce camari; Ee camari-r-
iva; Ap-a 325,12: valaJ?1 rakkhamana kal)~akesu vale
laggante bhindana-bhayena anaka~~hitva maramana -i
viya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce camañ viya);- 2. [S. lex. id.], a
chowry; Ap 309,27 (mora-hatthe -iyo datva sanghe
gal)uttame); - 0
-gahaka, m., one who holds the
chowry; Ja VI 218,28' (-ena ankena pariggahlta hutva,
Ee so; Be camari-; Ce, Se e amara-); - se e also camari,
camara.
camikara, camikara, n. [S. camikara], gold; Abh 488
(-aJ?1); Vv-a 12,9 (in long cpd: Be, Ce, Se
suvisuddhacamikara-; E e -camikara-); 13,20 (-ato
satakumbhaq¡ [senhaq¡], Be, Ce, Se so; Ee camikarato);
!66,20 (in long cpd: Be, Ce, Se suparisuddhacamikara-;
Ee -camikara-); Mhv 73:74 (0 -vitanehi mahagghehi
vibhüsitaq¡); Sadd 397,15' (suval)l)aq¡ ... jambünadaq¡
singikam ca -an ti bhasita).
cayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cayati, Wg § 21:16], honours;
observes; Dhatup 237 (caya püjayaq¡); Dhatum 339
(cayu sampüjane); Sadd 421,27 (cayu püjanisamanesu ...
-ati apacayati);- pp cayita, mfn., honoured; Ud-a 64,s
(tasma taq¡ ~hanaq¡ manussa -aq¡ karonti kalena kalaq¡
baliq¡ ca upaharanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cittiq¡karonti); -
se e also cayati 1.
cara, m. [ts]. l. going, going about; grazing; going about
(one's l(fe), behaviour; S IV 189,7 (kathaq¡ ca bhikkhave
bhikkhuno -o ca viharo ca anubuddho hoti, yatha
carantaq¡ viharantaq¡ ... akusala dhamma nanusavanti)
f. Patis II 19,4; Dhs 8 (yo tasmiq¡ -o vicaro anuvicaro
upavicaro cittassa anusandhanata anupekkhanata ayaq¡
tasmiq¡ samaye vicaro hoti; As 143,5: arammal)e
caral)akavasena -o); Mil 162,27 (-o viharo saq¡yamo
saq¡varo ... ); Spk I 253,11 (kamagunasaiJ.khate agocare
-aq¡ nivaretva); Dhp-a 11 23,2o (catu-iriyapathacaraq¡
agahetva manasa -o veditabbo); Vv-a 72,2s.foll. (aticca
-o aticaro lokamariyadaJ?1 atikkamitva agamaniyaqhane
kamavasena -o micchacaro ti attho); As 167,29
(attabhavassa myanaq¡ vuttiq¡ palanaq¡ yapanaq¡
yapanaq¡ -aq¡ viharaq¡ abhinipphadeti); Patis-a 542,27
(-o cariya ti hi atthato ekaq¡); - ifc see anamanta-
(sv amanteti), eka-, kama-, ñal)a-, nagavikkanta-,
pamada-, pil)~a-, miccha-, ragamoha-, saiJ.ghati-,
samavattha-, sahasa-; - see also aticara; - 2. a spy; a
secret agent; a scout; Abh 1107 (caro -amhi cañcale);
SI 79,s (ete bhante mama purisa -a ocaraka janapadaq¡
ocaritva agacchanti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee cara; = Ud 66,5:
eds cora ocaraka); - ifc see nija-; - cara- in Ee at
Ud-a 105,18 (akayappacalakacaravikkantagamano) is
prob. wr; read akayacapallena caruvikkantagamano with
Be, Ce, Se; - acara, mfn., not to be gone through,
impassable; Samantak 501 (-aJ?1 purassa mokkhassa
visaladvaraq¡ avapuri no bhagava).
1
caraka , m. [ts], a prison; Vism 479,4 (in long cpd) =
Vibh-a 32,11; Vism 495,s (tatiyasaccaq¡ pana y asma
nisaddo abhavaJ?1 rodhasaddo ca -aq¡ dipeti, tasma
abhavo ettha saq¡saracarakasankhatassa dukkharodhassa
sabba-gatisuññatta); Mhv 46:40 (uparajaJ?1 gahetvana
Dathasivaq¡ khipapayi -e); 51:127 (raja pi disva tam
kuddho khippaq¡ pakkhippa -e); Sadd 873,26 (attani
pavesite satte carati bhakkhati ti -o,
caraka
corabandhanacarako ca samsiiracarako ca).
caraka 2, m. [cf carlll).a2], a. street-singer; a wandering
actor; Mhv 90:74 (na¡akicarakaraddhanaccagHa-
manoharam).
caral}.a\ n.. [BHS id.], going about, motion; motivation;
behaviour, conduct; Nidd II (Be) 160,4 (cfEe 243,33)
(kiq¡ su tassa vicarlll).an ti kiq¡ su tassa -aq¡ vicarlll).aq¡
pa¡ivicarai_laq¡); 160,23 (ime nava vitakka lokassa -a
vicara¡;¡a pa¡ivicara¡;¡a, imehi navahi vitakkehi loko cara ti
vicarati pa¡ivicarati ti); - ifc see nagavikkanta-,
saq¡suddha-; - carlll).O in Ee at Pe¡ 157,15 (indriyo -o)
is wr; Be, Ce indriyotara¡;¡o.
caral}.a 2 , m. [ts], a street-singer, a wandering actor;
Mhv 89:35 (na¡acara¡;¡avaggehi).
caral}.ika, f (?) [cf cara¡;¡a? or from cara¡;¡a2 ?], a painted
cloth ( carried round by wandering actors); a play
peiformed by wandering actors; ? Th 1129 (na niina
dubbhissasi maq¡ punappunaq¡ muhuq¡ muhuq¡ -aq¡ va
dassayaq¡, Be, Ce so; Ee varlll).ikaq¡ va dassahaq¡; Se
Viirlll).ikaq¡ va dussahaq¡; Th-a III 158,9 foil.: abhi¡;¡haso
carlll).iirahaq¡ viya mano dassento cara¡;¡arahaq¡ purisaq¡
vañcetva caragopakaq¡ nipphiidento viya punappunaq¡
taq¡ taq¡ bhavaq¡ dassento ).
cari, m. or f [from carati; cf AMg cari, ciiñ, "food of
beasts, grass"], going about; the possibility of going
about; accessibility; (the possibility of) grazing; S V
148,10 (atthi ... dugga visama desa yattha n' eva
makka¡anaq¡ -i na manussanaq¡; Spk III 201,7: -I ti
sañcaro; Spk-¡ [Be] II 470,15: sañcaro ti sañcarlll).aq¡);
Mp I 219,1o (assavii¡;¡ijo sakalanagare assanaq¡ -iq¡
alabhitva tassa sahassaq¡ datva taq¡ ti¡;¡aq¡ ga¡;¡hi;
Mp-¡ [Be] I 161,25: -in ti khaditabbati¡;¡aq¡);
0
-bhümi,f, a place where there is (the possibility of)
grazing or feeding; Sp 569,25 (etesaq¡ pana -i na gahita,
Ee so; Be, Se carabhiimi; Ce gocara-bhumi); Spk III
56,21 (yatha nama -iq¡ oti¡;¡¡;¡o mahahatthi hatthena
gahetabbaq¡ hatthen' eva luñcitva glll).hati; Spk-¡ [Be] II
342,24: -in ti gocaraghanaq¡); - 0
-magga, m., a
passable road; a path for journeying on; ? Ap 378,28
(-en a gacchami, Ce, Se so; Ee carimamaggena; Be
tadimaggena).
cari(n), mfr¡. [S. carin], moving, going about; living;
behaving; observing, practising; Pj II 127,18 (pasayha
abhibhuyya ti ubhayaq¡ ciiñsaddena saha yojetabbaq¡
pasayhacañ abhibhuyyacañ ti); Mhv 87:50 (game game
karaq¡ rajadeyyaq¡ adaya -ino disva; perhaps better
iidayacarino); Sadd 188,19* ( ... cañ cagi ... ); - ifc see
akala- (sv kala\ adhamma- (sv dhamma\ adho-,
aniketa- (sv niketa), anudhamma- (sv anudhammaq¡),
antoghara- (sv anto), abhibhuyya- (sv abhibhavati),
ambu-, asail.ga- (sv sail.ga), iikasa- (sv iikasa2), agu-
(sv agu 2), ara- (sv ara2), eka-, kala- (sv kiila\ ga¡;¡a-,
giri-, catu- (sv catu[r]), caru-, dhamma- (sv dhamma\
nabha-, pakkhanda-, pamatta- (sv pamajjati\
balasail.gata- (sv bala), brahma-, manapa-, yata-
(sv yamati), vrpma-, vihail.gapatha- (sv vihaiJ.ga),
saq¡yata- (sv saq¡yamati), sacchanda- (sv sa5), sapadana-
(sv sapadanaq¡), sama- (sv sama\ see also
atidhonacari(n), catucari(n).
carika, mf( -a, -I)n. [cari(n) + ka2; cf BHS carika], going
132 caritta
about; living; practlsmg; journeying around; a
wandering ascetic; Ap 519,9 (nagare Haq¡savatiya -I as'
ahaq¡ tada aramena ca aramaq¡ carami kusalatthika, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se carini) = 527,2 (Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -a);-
carika in Ee at Ps V 90,4 (na pi¡;¡gaya carika bhikkhii) is
prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se nabhacarika bhikkhii; - ifc see
attha- (sv attha2), iikasa- (sv iikasa2), uñcha-, eka-, oka-
(sv oka 1), ti- (sv ti 2), dvi-, nabha-, niketa-, pañca-, pure-.
carika (and cariya ?) f [BHS carika; cf S. carya], a going
about; a journey, a tour; V in I 8,10 (bhagava ... yena
Barii¡;¡asi tena -aq¡ pakkami); DI 87,3 (ekaq¡ samayaq¡
bhagava Kosalesu -aq¡ caramano; Sv 239,2ofoll.: -aq¡
caramano ti addhanagamanaq¡ gacchanto, -a ca nam'
esa bhagavato duvidha hoti turitacarika ca aturitacarika
ca); SI 105,27 (caratha bhikkhave -aq¡ bahujanahitaya
bahujanasukhaya . . . ma ekena dve agamittha; Spk I
171,28: -an ti anupubbagamanaciirikaq¡, divasaq¡
yojanaparamaq¡ gacchantii caratha ti vadati); Dhp 326
(idaq¡ pure cittam acari -aq¡ yenicchakaq¡) = Th 77;
Sn 40 (vase ¡hane gamane -aya; Pj II 85,3:
janapadacarikasaiJ.khataya -aya) = Ap 8,3o; Ja II 394,13
(bodhisatto . . . lo¡;¡ambilasevanatthaya pabbatapada
otaritva -aq¡ caramano Barii¡;¡asiyaq¡ patva uyyane
vasaq¡ kappesi); III 492,3* (cara -aq¡ lohitatu¡;¡ga);
Ap 85,2o (addhanaq¡ pa¡ipannassa carato -aq¡ tada);
Mill4,23 (anupubbena -aq¡ caramano); Kkh2 332,10
(-aq¡ pakkamanan ti); Ps III 288,2o (sattha ... lokahitaya
-aq¡ cari, yaq¡ sandhaya vuttaq¡ ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
-aq¡ cariyaq¡); Dhp-a IV 24,1 (cittaq¡ nam' etaq¡
naniiramma¡;¡esu digharattaq¡ -aq¡ carantaq¡
aniggai_lhantassa sotthibhiivo nama natthi); Mhv 3:13
(Jambudipamhi te thera vicaritvana -aq¡); 4:11
(Yasatthero caraq¡ Vajjisu -aq¡); - carikaya in Ee at
Sv 601,25 is wr for charikaya (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc se e
anavattha- (sv avattha), ussada-, eka-, nibaddha-
(sv nibandhati), vihara-; - 0 -caraJ}.a, carikacarlll).a, n.,
going on a journey; making a tour; Sp 962,27 (ughehi ti
bhagavato dhammadesanatthaq¡ carikacarlll).aq¡ yacanto
bhlll).ati, Be so; Ee, Se ciirikañcarlll).aq¡; not in Ce) =
Sv 4 71,1 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e carikaq¡ cara¡;¡aq¡) = Ps II
179,4 (Be so; Ce, Ee -aq¡; Se carikañcara¡;¡aq¡); Spk III
279,16 (bhagavato hi -aq¡ pi aru¡;¡ughapanaq¡ pi
niyataq¡); - 0
(a)-pakkamana, n., setting out on a
journey; Mp I 86,21 (vinayapariyayena nimantitassa
vassavasaq¡ vasitva apaloketva -aq¡ pavaretva -aq¡
agantukehi saddhiq¡ pa¡hamaq¡ pa¡isantharakarlll).an ti
idaq¡ aci¡;¡¡;¡aq¡) = Sp 1279,14/oll. (eds cariya-).
carito in Ee at Ps IV 40,13 is wr for varito (Be, Ce, Se so).
caritta, n. [S., BHS caritra], l. going about, walking
around; M II 257,9 (ma ca vatatape -aq¡ anuyuñji); -
-aq¡ apajjati, goes about (among, loe.); has dealings
(with, loe.); visits; Vin IV 98,26 (yo pana bhikkhu
nimantito sabhatto samano purebhattaq¡ kulesu -aq¡
apajjeyya pacittiyan ti); MI 470,1 (iiraññaken' avuso
bhikkhuna . . . na purebhattaq¡ paccha-bhattaq¡ kulesu
-aq¡ apajjitabbaq¡); S II 270,13 (aññataro bhikkhu
ativelaq¡ kulesu -aq¡ apajjati); Vin-vn 1554 (apajjeyya
kulesu ce carittaq¡); - esp. has sexual relations (with);
D III 69,21 (ye te satta dubbai_l¡;¡a te va¡;¡¡;¡avante satte
abhijjhayanta paresaq¡ daresu -aq¡ apajjiq¡su; Sv 853,3:
dirimamaggena
-an ti micchacaraq¡); M I 286,22 (kamesu micchacari
kho pana hoti, ya ta maturakkhita ... tatharupasu -aq¡
apajjita hoti; Ps II 330,17 foil.: evariipasu itthisu ...
vitikkamaq¡ katta hoti); S IV 346,22 (ayaq¡ ambho puriso
kulitthisu kulakumañsu -aq¡ apajji); Ja III 46,2o
(paresaq¡ rakkhitagopitesu daresu -aq¡ apajjitva); Spk II
74,1 (imina... mayhaq¡ daresu -aq¡ apannaq¡); -
2. (i) habitual manner of acting, conduct; custom,
tradition; Jai 90,1 (-aq¡ etaq¡ maharaja amhakan ti);
VI 134,1 (yaññavare vati-parikkhepanaq¡ -an ti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se caritan ti); Sp 58,12 (etaq¡ kira -aq¡
rajakulesu); Ud-a 242,3o (asane yeva nisidanaq¡
ariyadesavasinaq¡ -aq¡); Mhv 21:21 (raja -aq¡
anupalayaq¡); 26:7 (abhisittanaq¡ -aq¡ canurakkhituq¡,
so read ? Ee carittaq¡); - ifc see desa-; - (ii) good
conduct; positive morality, duties to be performed (as
opposed to viiritta, abstention from immorality ); Th 591
(-aq¡ atha varittaq¡ . . . etaq¡ sam~assa patiriipaq¡;
Th-a II 252,33: -an ti caritva paripüretabbasllaq¡, varittan
ti viratiya akar~ena paripüretabbasllaq¡); Ja V 326,7*
(ye ca ... -ena ca sampanna na te gacchanti duggatiq¡;
326,15·: -ena ca ti acarasllena sampanna); Mill33,7
(-aq¡ ca varittaq¡ ca sllaq¡ samattaq¡ paripüreyyuq¡);
Vism !!,19 (yaq¡ bhagavata idaq¡ kattabban ti
paññattasikkhapadapür~aq¡ taq¡ -aq¡, yaq¡ idaq¡ na
kattabban ti patikkhittassa akar~aq¡ taq¡ varittaq¡);
Cp-a 309,23 (tayidaq¡ sllaq¡ -aq¡ varittan ti duvidham);
Sadd 870,32 (vaditanaq¡ g~o vadittaq¡, evaq¡ -aq¡
varittaq¡ ice evamadi); - ifc see vailka-;
0
-kilamatha, m., weariness from walking around (jor
alms); A III 320,2o (-o pi 'ssa, tasmiq¡ samaye
appatippassaddho hoti; Mp III 356,25: -o ti piQ.<;Iapata-
cariyaya uppannakilamatho ).
carimamaggena in Ee at Ap 378,28 is perhaps wr; Ce, Se
carimaggena; Be tadimaggena.
cariya,f, see sv carika.
caru, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) [ts], beautiful, lovely;
agreeable; Abh 693 (manuññaq¡ carusundaraq¡); Ja VI
529,22* (-ü timbarukkha e' ettha, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be,
Ce, Se carutimbarukkha; 530,29·: suvaQ.Q.atimbarukkha);
It-a II 56,3 (0 -ta muduta sucita); Pj II 453,4 (ram~iyaq¡
-u eva dassanaq¡ assa ti carudassano); Mhv 33:31
(mahathüpassa parito -uno Hemamalino );
caru(q¡), adv., in a beautiful way; charmingly,
agreeably; Ps III 24,6• (-uq¡ gacchati lokaggo hasayanto
sadevake) = Spk III 49,16* = Ud-a 414,24*; V v-a 36,10
(vaggü ti -u, kiriyavisesanaq¡ e' etaq¡ makaro
padasandhikaro, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee vaggun ti -uq¡;
ad Vv 5:3: vaggum); 2. (n.) gold; Abh 487
(suvaQ.Q.aq¡ ... -u hemaq¡ ca); 1108; Ja V 322,9*
(ukkamukhe paharthaq¡ va khadirailgarasannibhaq¡
mukhaq¡ -u-r-ivabhati, ko eti siriya jalaq¡, Ee so; Be,
Ce, Se mukhaq¡ ca rucira bhati) =VI 217,34* (Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be mukhaq¡ ca rucira bhati); VI 450,5· (-u vuccati
suv~Q.aq¡); - -cari(n), mfn., moving beautifuily,
0
pleasingly; Ud-a 414,25* H va kesañ; = Ps III 24,7•:
catucari; = Spk III 49,17*: Ce, Ee catucari; Be, Se
catucari); - 0 -dassana, mf(-a, -I)n., lovely to look at,
beautiful; Sn 548 (paripUQ.Q.akayo suruci sujato -o
suv~Q.aV~Q.O si bhagava; Pj II 453,3foll.: suciraq¡ pi
133 cavala
passantanaq¡ atittijanakaq¡ appatikülaq¡ ram~iyaq¡ caru
eva dassanaq¡ assa ti -o, keci pana bhananti -o ti
sundaranetto) = Th818; Pv31:14 (sañraq¡ -aq¡);
Thi 396 (uppa!iya -a na ca sajjittha asailgamanasa);
Ja V 155,19* (kumari -a); VI 449,7* (sobhanti kumara
-a; 450,4·: -a ti caru vuccati suv~Q.aq¡, suv~Q.aV~Q.a ti
attho); 550,12* (K~hajinaq¡ apassantl kumariq¡ -iq¡);
Ap 417,5 (tattha addasasiq¡ sambuddhaq¡ pattikaq¡ -aq¡);
Saddh 512 (katva Jetavane ramme viharaq¡ -am); -
0
-nayana, mfn., with lovely eyes; Ap 472,4 (Vipassi
nama nayako uppajji -o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be carudassano);
-
0
-pubbaiigi, (m)f(n)., having lovely limbs, having a
beautiful body; ? Ja V 4,22* (put!ha si me -i briihi; 5,24·:
-i ti caruna pubbailgena varalakkh~ena sam-annagate);
-
0
-bhüsana, mfn., wearing beautiful (or golden ?)
ornaments; Ap 548,8 (vedimajjha varassoQ.i rammorii
-a); - 0 -var,ll}a, mfn., the colour of gold, like gold; ?
Ap 90,11 (-o va sobhami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catuv~Q.aya;
Ap-a 366,35 foil.: suv~Q.aV~Q.O iva sobhami ti virocami
ti attho, catuv~Q.ehi sobhami ti pi pa!ho, Be, Se so; Ce
catuvaQ.Q.aya; Ee catuv~Q.o); - sucaru, mfn., very
beautiful; Pv 24:11 (tato tuvaq¡ ailgapaccailga -ü
piyadassana); - --riipa, mfn., very pleasing, absolutely
beautiful; Ap 272,8 (--riipaq¡ disvana; Ap-a 310,3foil.:
sundaraq¡ caruq¡ manoharariipavantaq¡ . . . sambuddhaq¡
disva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sundaraq¡ -uq¡); 310,10
(--riipo ... homi); - -riipaq¡, adv., in a very pleasing
or splendid way; ? S I 181 ,2* (-riipaq¡ vata bhikkhu
jhayasi; Spk I 265,9: atisundaraq¡ vata jhanaq¡ jhayasi ti
vadati).
cala, m. [ts], moving, shaking;- ifc see bhümi-.
calana, n. [ts], causing to move, shaking; Dhp-a I 386,10
(Jotiya-adinaq¡ mahaku1anaq¡ -aq¡ nama pa!haviya
--sadisaq¡); - ifc see k~Q.a-.
calana, f ffrom ca1eti ?], (agitating; ?) reproof;
Sadd 542,19foil. (codana ti -a, -a ti dosaropana ti attho).
calani, f [ts; AMg calaQ.i], a strainer, a sieve; - ifc see
CUQ.Q.a-, dussa- (sv dussa 1).
calaniya, mfn., caus . .fpp of cala ti qv
caleti, -aya ti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of calati qv.
ciivana, n., -a, f [S. cyavana], causing to move or fall,
moving; causing to fall away (from) or abandon; V in III
112,24 (!hanato -a vuccati visat!hi ti; Sp519,15foil.:
visanhi ti visaggo, atthato pan' etaq¡ thana -aq¡ hoti);
Vism 229,24 (taq¡ khaQ.aq¡ yeva thana 0 -samatthena
kammuna); Sp 314,28 (!hana -aq¡ e' ettha chahi akarehi
veditabbaq¡); 365,26 (tassa !hana -e parajikaq¡);
Vin-vn 224 (!hanato -e cuto); Saddh 61 (theyyadisv
ekacittaq¡ ca thana -am eva ca); - 0 adhippaya, mfn.
and m. [cavana + adhippaya1], l. (mfn.) intending or
wishing to cause (someone) to fail away (from) or
abandon; V in II 79,27 (amhehi sa ussahita kupitehi
anattamanehi -ehi ti) = III 163,6; V 189,5 (-o vatta hoti;
Sp 1375,15: -o ti sasanato cavetukamo); - 2. (m.) the
intention to cause (someone) to fall away (from) or
abandon; Sp 597,8 (ayaq¡ hi adhippayo nama -o
akkosadhippayo kammadhippayo dhamma-
kathadhippayo ti anekavidho ).
ciivala, capala, m. [cf capalasuQ.a ?], a kind of (garlic or)
onion, a spring onion;? Vin-vn 2133 (pal~¡;luko
 134 ciccitayati
caveti

udakacikkhal1o ughahit va yava anisada paharati, Idise

bhañjanako harito -o pi ca 1asm:ta pana cattaro vagant'
-e ti); Cp-a 14,15 (samma sambud dho buddha savaka ca
eva sabhavato, Ee so; Be capa1o; cfVin IV 259,26:
ma -a¡p akkama ntü ti); Vin-vn 1601 (udaka¡p kañjiya¡p
anapatti ... capa1asu~e); 2134 (-o setako, Ee so; Be
va pi -a¡p va pi vikkhi pa¡p);- 2. (mfn.) muddy; V in Il
capalo); 2135 (-o hot' amiñjako, Ee so; Be capa1o).
1 120,34 Gantaghara¡p -a¡p hoti); IV 312,11 (vala sunakha
ciiveti , -ayati , caus. pr. 3 sg. of cava ti qv.
1

ca~qo ba1ibaddo -o okaso); Mi1286,10foll.

ciiveti , -ayat¡2, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cyavayati,
2
(mahapa~havi . . . asittoda ka 0
-jata puna-d- eva maha-
Wg § 33:72], endures; Sadd 529,9 (cu cavane: -eti
meghe abhivag e bhiyyos omattay a -tara assa); - ifc see
0

-ayati. añño cu sahane iti brüte: -eti -ayati, sahat! ti

udaka -;- 0 -Va(t), mfn.,fu ll of mud, muddy; Pv-a 225,24
attho).
(cikkha llamagg e ti -Vati patham hi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
0

ci, ind. [S. cid], a particle used after interrog ative

cikkhal lapathe ti).
pronou ns and adverbs, making them 2indefinite;
cikkhallikii, m.pl. [cf S. cikhalli], the name of a people; ?
Abh 1145 (asakalye tu cana ci);- see also ca , cana.
Sp 27,3 (samüh anivasa hi nikiiyo ti vuccanti, naha¡p
~d, [S. ~ci, cinoti], se e sv cinati.
2 1 bhikkha ve añña¡p ekanikaya¡p pi samanupassam1
~ci , [cf S. ~ci, ciketi], see apacaya , cayati .
2
2. eva¡pcitta¡p yathayida¡p bhikkha ve tiraccha nagata p~a.
~ce, [S. Dhatup ~cay, cayate], see cayati e' ettha
po~ikanikayo cikkhal likanika yo ti eva¡p adini
cikicchaka, m(fn ). [from cikicchati; S. cikitsaka], a
siidhakani sasanato 1okato ca; Sp-t [Be] I 92,7 foil.:
physician; Sadd 361,2 (tikicchati cikicchati cikicch a -o); ikayo
po~ika -a ca khattiya , tesa¡p nivaso po~ikan
- se e also tikicchaka. = Sv 23,5 =As 25,13.
cikkhal likanika yo ti vuccati )
cikicchati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cikitsati], treats medically, cures; 1
Sadd 361,2 (kita nivase rogapan ayane ca ketati ...
*cikkhassati, pr. 3 sg. [desid. ofkhan ati , cf S. cik~a~i~ati,
or of hanati, cf S. jigha¡p sati (se e H. Kern, 1916, Il
tikicchati -ati; cf S. Dhatup, Wg § 23:24); 826,15 (see R. Morris, 1884,
p. 139); or of (caus. oj) kharati
(abbhase vattama no kavagg o cavaggatta¡p apajjati: index p. 1376)], wishes to
p. 87); or ofkasa te (see Sadd
-ati); - pp cikicchita, (mj)n. [S. cikitsita], medica /
n, healing ; Pj I 188,2Ifoll. (sabbaki1esavyadhi- destroy; causes to ooze out; wishes to cough up; ? -
attentio
part.pr. cikkhassanta, mfn., Mil 152,16 (koci ahina dagho
vüpasamanato pañña -an ti vuccati, ta¡p pañña-
mantap adena visa¡p patiyam ano visa¡p -anto uddha¡p
cikicchita¡p ito vigata¡p tato va paññaci kicchita ida¡p
adho acamay amano, Be, Ce, E e so; Se different).
vigatan ti vicikic chita¡p );- see also tikicchati.
ciilgula, n. [?],a toy windmill; Sp621,18 (-a¡p vuccati
cikicchii, ¡: [S. cikitsa], medica / attention, healing;
talapa~~adlhi kata¡p vatappa harena paribbhamana-
Vism 471 ,1o (vigata -a ti vicikiccha) t Nidd-a I 63,3 =
cakka¡p tena kitanti, Ee so, perhap s wr; Be, Ce, Se
429,14 (Be, Se so; Ee tikiccha; Ce vigata kicchay a ti
cingulaka¡p vuccati).
vicikiccha) t As 259,9 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr vigata
ciilgula ka\ ciilgulika, n. [?], a toy windmill; Vin II 10,21
vicikiccha); Sadd 361,2 (tikicchati cikicchati -a
(-en a pi ki~anti) = III 180,26 (Sp 621,18: -a¡p vuccati
cikicchako ); - see al so tikiccha.
talapa~~adihi kata¡p vatappa harena paribbhamana-
cikkana, cikka1a, mfn. and n. ? [cf S. cikka~a. BHS cikka],
cakka¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ciilgu1a¡p) t Nidd I 379,11;
unctuous; sticky, gummy ; gum;? Sp 318,29 (ya¡p pacitva mokkhacika¡p -am
si1eso viya -a¡p DI 6,26 ( ... vailkaka¡p
~hapita¡p pana madhuph~ita¡p a¡p); MI
patta~haka¡p ... , Ce, Se so; Be, Ee ciilgulik
akaqqhanavikaqqhanayogga¡p hoti; Sp-t [Be] JI 136,n: vailkaka¡p
266,15 (kilapa nakani. .. seyyathlda¡p
-an ti thaddha¡p; vl baddha¡p); 1201,3 (sitthate1akena ti aka¡p ... , Be, Ce,
ghatika¡p mokkha cika¡p -a¡p patta~h
madhusitthakaniyyasadisu yena kenaci cikkalena, Be,
Ee so; Se ciilgulika¡p) = A V 203,17 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
Ee, Se so; Ce cikka~ena; Sp-t [Be] lii 381,8: cikka1ena ti
piilgulika¡p) t Mil 229,2; - see also ciilgu1ayati.
si1esena). 2
ciilgulaka , see sv ciilgülaka.
cikkhati, pr. 3 sg. [redupl. form from ~ya; cf S. ~cak~,
ciilgulayati, -iiyati, -eti, pr. 3 sg. [?], tums or whirls
Wg § 24:7], says; speaks; Dhiitup 19 (cikkha vacane);
round (intrans.); Sadd 565,16 (ciilgula paribbh amane:
Dhatum 23; Sadd 332,2o (cikkha cakkha viyattiya¡p
-eti -ayati, -ayitva , Be, Ee so; Ce -ayati -ayitva ); -
vacaya¡p: -ati ... cakkh ati);- acikkhitukama, mfn., not
absol. ciilgulayitva, -ayltva , A I 112,1 ([cakka¡p]
wishing to speak; Sp 1097,14 (anabbh akkhatu kama ti
yavatik a abhisailkharassa gati tavatika¡p gantva -ayitva
abhibha vitva -a. Ee, Se so; Be na acikkhitukama; Ce 181,12: -ayitva ti
1 bhümiya111 papa ti; Mp JI
omits ); - se e also khati, cakkhat i . foil. (Ce so; Be, Ee
paribbh amitva) quoted Sadd 565,17
cikkhanii, ¡: [from cikkhati; cf S. cak~a~a], speakin g;
-ayitva ).
telling; - acikkh aniiJ, not speaking; absence of 2
ciilgülaka, cingula ka , m. [?], a kind (}{ grass or grain;
telling; Pv 36:12 (-a appasan nassa hoti, Se so; Be, Ce,
Pj II 283,25 (samaka ti . . . ti~adhaññajati, tatha -a
Ee nacikkhana; Pv-a 222,19: -a appasannassa hot1 ti ad Sn 239:
ka~avirapupphas~thanasisa honti, eds so;
akathana appasan nassa hoti, Ee so; Be, Se nacikkha~a; Ce, Se -ciilgula ka-; Ee
Be samakaciilgülakaclnak ani;
Ce nacikkh ana).
-giilgul aka-).
cikkhalla, m.n. and mfn. [AMg id.; cfS. lex. cikhalla;
BHS ciilkha1a], l. (m.n.) mud, mire; Abh 663 (-a¡p
ciccitayati, ciccitati, pr. 3 sg. [onomat.], hisses, makes a
hissing sound; Vin I 225,27 (seyyatha pi nama phalo
kaddamo); Vin Il 159,33 (so da1iddo tunnavayo sama¡p
divasa¡p santatto udake pakkhitto -ayati ci~ici~ayati
-a¡p madditv a inhakay o cinitva kuqqe utthapesi); A III
sa¡pdhüpayati sampad hüpaya ti) = SI 169,s (Be, Ce, Ee
394,16 (devo vassanto raja¡p antariidhapeyya -a¡p
Sp 1106,11 (akkant akkanta qhane so; Se vicitaya ti vi~icitayati) = Snp. 15,11 (Pj Il 154,24:
patukareyya);
ciccitayana
-ayati ci~ici~ayatl ti eva111 saddaJ11 karoti); A I 127,7
(tinduka1ataJ11 kanhena va ka~halaya va ghagita111
bhiyosomattaya -ayati ci~ici~ayati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
cici~ayati; Mp 11 198,4 foil.: ta111 hi jhayamana111 pakatiya
pi papa~ikayo muñcantaJ11 -ati (or cicci~a ti ?) ci~ici~a ti
saddaJ11 karoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cici~ati cicira ti) =
Pp 36,32; Mil 258,28 (ima111 udakaJ11 aggimhi
tappamilnaJ11 -ayati ci~icirayati saddayati bahuvidhaJ11,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se pipidayati pa~ipidayati); Thi-a 6,16
(-ayati ci~ici~ayati); Sadd 587,13 (saddo cicciram iva
attana111 acarati -ayati); 822,s (dhatuliilganukara¡;¡ehi
paccaya ... -ayati).
ciccitayana, n. [from cicci~ayati], hissing; Vism 408,s
(pakkughita-udakassa o -saddo ).
cicciti, ind. [onomat.], (a hissing sound) ssssssss! hiss!
Thi 24 (ragaJ11 ca ahaJ11 dosaJ11 ca -i -I ti vihanami, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se vicchindanti viharami; Thi-a 28,22: -i -I ti
imina saddena saddhiJ11 vihanami vinasemi, pajahami ti
attho, eds so)- see also ci~ici~i.
ciccheda, perf 3 sg. of chindati qv.
ciñcli, f [ts], a tree; SAF: tamarind, Tamarindus indica
L.; its fruit; Abh 562 (-a ca tinti¡;¡i); Ja V 38,2 (tato
madhurapha1aJ11 ciñcavanaJ11); Sp 716,31 (in long cpd);
Pj 11 78,14 (ciñcambi1adhotatambabhajanaJ11 iva suddha
jata) f. Ap-a 163,4; Samantak 734 (in cpd).
v'cit\ see cerati1.
v'cie, [cfkhe~ati ?], tofrighten;? Dhatum 121 (ci!' uttase).
citicitayati, pr. 3 sg. [onomat.; BHS ci~ici~ayati], sputters,
makes a sputtering sound; Vin 1 225,27 (seyyatha pi
nama pha1o divasa111 santatto udake pakkhitto ciccirayati
-ayati saJ11dhüpayati sampadhüpayati) = SI 169,8 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se vici~ayati vi~ici~ayati) = Snp. 15,12 (Pj 11
154,25: cicci ~ay ati -ayati ti ev a111 saddaJ11 k aro ti); A I
127,7 (ti¡;¡9ukalataJ11 katthena va karhalaya va ghagita111
bhiyosomattaya cicci~ayati -ayati; Mp 11 198,4foll.: ta111
hi jhayamanaJ11 pakatiya pi papa~ikayo muñcanta111
cicci~ati (or cicci~a ti) ci~ici~a ti saddaJ11 karoti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se cici~ati cici~a ti) = Pp 36,32; Mil 258,28 (ima111
udakaJ11 aggimhi tappamana111 cicci~ayati -ayati
saddayati bahuvidhaJ11, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se pipidayati
pa~ipidayati); Thi-a 6,11 (cicci~ayati -ayati).
cilicili, ind. [onomat.], (a sputtering sound) pssssss! tssss!
Sv 137,7 (khadirailgarehi -I ti pacatha ti nahapite pesesi,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se khadirailgarehi vitaccitehi); 137,18
(khadirailgarehi -I ti paciJ11SU, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
vitaccitehi);- see also cicci~i.
CÍI}I}a, pp of cara ti qv.
cil}ha, n. [AMg id.; S. cihna], a mark, a sign; Abh 55
(lakkha¡;¡a111 -aJ11, Ce so; Be cihanaJ11); - see also
cihana.
cita, mfn., pp of cinati qv.
citaka, m.n., -a, f [AMg ciaga, ciyaga; cf S. cita, citika],
l. a funeral pile; Abh 405 (-o cita); V in I 345,2o foil.
(kaghani sailka99hitva -a111 karitva matapitunna111
sañra111 -aJ11 aropetva aggiJ11 datva pañjaliko tikkhattu111
-a111 padakkhi¡;¡aJ11 akasi); D 11 163,2o (na tava bhagavato
-o pajjalissati yav' ayasma Mahakassapo bhagavato
pade sirasa na vandissati ti); Ja I 255,2o (daruni
uddharitva -a111 katva acariyaJ11 jhapetva); V 488,24* (-a
aya111 tava sadhümika va); VI 576,27 (-a viya me kayo;
135 citta
577 ,Y foil.: idani mama kayo ailgaracitakaya aropito
viya); Ap 151,6 (-amhi püjaJ11 katva vanditva -a111
ahaJ11); 542,17 (-ani karitvana sabbagandhamayani te);
Ps 11 417,22 (-o padipasikha viya pajjali); Spk 1 284,6
(ekeka devata caturailgulamattaJ11 candanagha~ikaJ11
ahari, -o navayojaniko ahosi); Pv-a 80,s (-asmi111
9ayhamananaJ11 k~evarana111 vasate1aJ11 ca, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -aya); Th-a II 104,17 (gandhodakena -a111
nibbapesi); Mhv 1:37 (parinibbutamhi sambuddhe -ato
va iddhiya adaya jinagivanhiJ11 thero ); 36:121 (pituno
-aya samantato); - 2. a heap, a mound; Ja VI 559,14*
(-a pariki¡;¡¡;¡ayo assamassavidürato; 560,1s-: -a ti
sañcitanicita valikapuñja); Ap 237,11 (satta ma1uva-
pupphani -' aropayiJ11 ahaJ11, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce citam
aropayiJ11; Ap-a 472,3: ahaJ11 maluvapupphani satta-
pattani gahetva -e va1ukarasimhi va1ukahi thüpaJ11 katva
püjesin ti attho ); - ifc se e ailgara-, suva¡;¡¡;¡a-.
citikataip in Ee, Se at Vibh 2,26 and acitikataJ11 in Ee, Se
at Vibh 2,21 are prob. wrr for cittikata111 and acittikata111
(Be, Ce so).
citupplido in Ee at Sp 419,7 is wr for cittuppado (Be, Ce,
Se so).
citta 1, n. (and mfn. ?) [S. citta, n.], l. the process of
thinking; thinking; thought; thoughts; intention; state of
mind; (cf S. Hamilton, 1996, pp. 105-114); Abh 152
(-a111 ceto mano ... viñña¡;¡a111 hadaya111 tatha manasaJ11);
Vin I 5,12 (iti ha bhagavato pa~isañcikkhato
appossukkataya -a111 namati no dhammadesanaya);
351,29 foil. (yaJ11 nünahaJ11 sakaJ11 -a111 nikkhipitva
imesa111 yeva ayasmantanaJ11 -assa vasena vatteyyan ti);
III 120,33 (yo pana bhikkhu oti¡;¡¡;¡o viparil)atena -ena
matugamena saddhiJ11 kayasa111saggaJ11 samapajjeyya ...
sailghadiseso ti); V 4,2 (kayato ca vacato ca -ato ca
samutthati); DI 20,17 (aññamaññamhi -ani padüsenti);
71,22 (abhijjhaya -a111 parisodheti); 76,13 (so eva111
samahite -e parisuddhe . . . ~hite anejjappatte
ñiil)adassanaya -a111 abhiniharati abhininnameti); 79,31 *
(saraga111 va -a111 saragaJ11 -an ti pajanati); 175,26
(pañhaJ11 ca nesa111 pugho vyakaroti, pañhassa
veyyakara¡;¡ena -a111 aradheti); 209,2sfoll. (kamasava pi
-a111 vimuccati bhavasava pi -a111 vimuccati avijjasava
pi -a111 vimuccati); 11 142,21 (aya111 tassa bhagavato
arahato sammasambuddhassa thüpo ti ... bahujano -a111
pasadeti, te tattha -a111 pasadetva kayassa bheda paraJ11
mara¡;¡a sugatiJ11 saggaJ11 lokaJ11 upapajjanti); MI 26,10
(rago -a111 anuddha111sessati); 71 ,2s (ta111 .. . vaca111
appahaya taJ11 -a111 appahaya taJ11 dighiJ11
appa~inissajitva); 97,24 (na papiccho bhavissami na
papikanaJ11 icchanaJ11 vasa111 gato ti -a111
uppadetabbaJ11); 214,36foll. (bhikkhu -a111 vasa111 vatteti
no ca bhikkhu -assa vasena vattati); 11 l06,11 (na kho te
gahapati sake -e ~hitassa indriyani, atthi te indriyana111
aññathattan ti); III 173,32 (hatthiratanaJ11 patubhavati ...
disvana rañño cakkavattissa -a111 pasidati bhaddakaJ11
vata bho hatthiyana111 sace damathaJ11 upeyya ti); 234,22
(taramanassa bhasato kayo pi kilamati -a111 pi
upahaññati); SI 129,24* (-amhi susamahite); 178,6 (-a111
me sama¡;¡o Gotamo janati ti); 200,13* (tattha -a111
pa¡;¡idhehi yattha te vusitaJ11 pure); 207,19* (-a111 va te
khipissati hadaya111 va te pha1essami); II 94,13 (yaJ11 ca
citta
kho etai?J. bhikkhave vuccati -ai?J. iti pi mano iti pi
vmnal).ai?J. 1t1 pi, tatrassutava puthujjano niilai?J.
nibbinditmp. niilaip. virajjitu1p. niilai?J. vimuccitu1p.; Spk 11
98,18foll.: -an ti adi sabbai?J. manayatanass' eva nama1p.,
tai?J. hi cittavatthutaya cittagocarataya sampayutta-
dhammacittataya ca -aip.); V 92,22foll. (pañc' irne -assa
upakkilesa yehi upakkilesehi upakkiliHhai?J. -aip. na
e' eva mudu hoti na ca kammaniyai?J. ... na ca samma
samadhiyati asavana1p. khayaya); 273,2 (ahosi te pubbe
-ai?J. aramai?J. gamissami ti, tassa te aramagatassa Yai?l
tajjaip. -ai?J. tai?J. patippassaddhan ti); 351,18 (na kho pana
mayai?J. bhante abhijanama tasu bhaginisu papaka1p. -ai?J.
uppadeta); A 11 234,37 (tathagatassa padutthena -ena
lohita1p. uppadita hoti); IV 210,26 (komari1p. kho
panaha1p. . . . darai?J. pariccajanto nabhijanami -assa
aññathattai?J.); Dhp 35 (dunniggahassa lahuno
yatthakamanipatino -assa damatho sadhu, -ai?J. dantai?J.
sukhavaham); 37 (diirailgamai?J. ekacarai?J. asarirai?J.
guhasayai?J. ye -ai?J. Sai?J.yamessanti mokkhanti
Marabandhana); It 43,18 (bhavarama bhikkhave
devamanussa . . . tesai?J. bhavanirodhaya dhanune
desiyamane -a1p. na pakkhandati na pasidati na
santighati nadhimuccati); Sn 50 (kama hi citra
madhura . . . mathenti -ai?J.); Pv 25: 17 (metta1p. -ai?J.
abhavesi); Th 477 (anoggatasmi1p. suriyasmi1p. tato -ai?J.
vimucci me); 1250 (-alp. nesai?J. samanvesai?J.
vippamuttai?J. niriipadhiip.); Ja 11 100,17 (me -a1p. avilai?J.
jatai?J. mante parivattetu1p. na sakkomi ti); IV 222,23*
(itthiyo . . . haranti yuvino -ai?J.); V 15,26* (Yai?J. pitva
-asmi1p. anesamano ); 215 ,27* (yada:ddasa1p. nai?J.
tinhantiip. ... tato sakassa -assa navabodhami kiñcana1p.,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee yathaddasa1p.; 216,29·: sakassa -assa ti
attano -assa anissaro jato 'mhi ti adhippayo); Nidd 1 3,4
(mano ti Yai?l -ai?J. mano manasai?J. hadayai?J. pai).<;Iarai?J.
mano manayatana1p. manindriyai?J. vmnai).ai?J.
viññiil).akkhandho); Ap 59,6 (tattha -ai?J. vimucci me
arahatta1p. apapul).iip.); 106,24 (khamaniyai?J. vatajavai?J.
-aip. nibbattate mama; Be so; Ce khamaniya vatajava -a
nibbattare; Ee khamaniya vatajava -e nibbattare; Se
vitti); 556,23 (-asmi1p. vasibhiitasmiip. iddhipada
subhavita:); Patis 1 48,17 (eko samadhi -assa ekaggata);
Kv 528,24joll. (tena -ena tai?J. -ai?J. pajanati ti); Mi187,8
(imesai?J. arupmai?J. cittacetasikanai?J. dhammanai?J.
ekarammal).e vattamanana1p. vavatthanai?J. akkhatai?J.
ayai?J. phasso ayai?J. vedana ayai?J. sañña aya1p. cetana
ida1p. -an ti); Sp 59,2o (ki1p. pana te maharaja atthi -a1p.
ayai?J. viharai?J. gantva bhikkhii ghatetii ti); Ps 1 117,36
(-a1p. nanarammai).esu paribbhamati vanamakkato vi ya
vanasakhasu); Dhp-a 1 194,2 (sañrassa me issaro na pana
-assa ti); Cp-a 284,33 (mahapuriso . . . mahabodhiyai?J.
-ai?J. santitthati); As 63,31 foll. ( -an ti arammai).ai?J. cinteti
ti -ai?J., vijanati ti attho ... vipaka1p. kammakilesehi citan
ti -a1p.. api ca sabba1p. pi yathanuriipato cittataya -a1p.,
cittakarai).ataya -an ti eva1p. p' ettha attho veditabbo, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee kammakilesehi -an ti -a1p.) quoted
Sadd 537,18foll.; As 112,20 (cakkhuna hi ditthaip.
riiparanunal).aip. -en' eva vijanati); Mhv 38:89 (na janasi
-ai?J. etassa); Sadd 537,17 (cinta cintayai?J.: cinteti
cintayati -ai?J. cinta cintana);- ifc see añña-, adhimutta-
(sv adhimuccati), anaggahita- (sv aggahlta\ anasatta-
136 citta
(sv asatta), aneka- (sv eka), apeta- (sv apeti), alina-
(sv Hna), avaharai).a-, avisiillata- (sv visiillata),
uparambha-, ubbhanta-, ekagga- (sv eka), khitta-
(sv khipati\ gathita- (sv ganthati), gadhita-, gamika-,
gedhita-, cala-, theyya-, nikattha- (sv nikagha2),
nikkattha- (sv nikka<;l<;lhati), patipesita-, patibaddha-
(sv patibandhati), pariyadinna- (sv pariyadiyati),
pariyughita- (sv pariyutthati), lahu-, vikkhitta-
(sv vikkhipati), vipphandamana- (sv vipphandati),
vibbhanta- (sv vibbhamati), vyapanna- (sv vyapajjati),
samoha- (sv moha); - 2. a single thought; a thought-
moment; a moment of consciousness; Abh 838
(viññiil).e . . . -ai?J.); V in 1 93,21 (yai?J. bhikkhave matu
kucchismiip. pathamaip. -ai?J. uppannai?J. pathamai?J.
viññiil).a1p. patubhiitaip. tadupadaya sa v' assa jati;
Sp 437,16: pathamai?J. -an ti pathamai?J. patisandhi-
cittai?J.); Patis 1 57,3o (riiparammai).ata -ai?J. uppajjitva
bhijjati); Dhs 1 (yasmiip. samaye kamavacarai?J. kusala1p.
-aip. uppannaip. hoti somanassasahagata1p. nal_la-
sampayuttai?J. riiparammanai?J. ... ); Vibh 87,23 (cakkhu1p.
ca paticca riipe ca uppajjati -ai?J. mano manasai?J.
hadaya1p. ... viññal).ai?J. viññiil).akkhandho tajja cakkhu-
viññiil).adhatu, ayai?J. vuccati cakkhuviññiil).adhatu);
Kv 41,29foll. (-e -e puggalassa paññatti ti, amanta, -e
-e puggalo jayati jiyyati miyyati cavati upapajjati ti na
h' evai?J. vattabbe); 270,5foll. (upapattesiyena -ena
arahattai?J. sacchikaroti lokiyena sasavena ... ); Pet 169,14
(ya1p. sattharammai).ai?J. -a1p. pavattai?J. ayai?J.
buddhanussati); Nett 16,2sjoll. (pañcindriyani kusalani
cittasahabhiini -e uppajjamane uppajjanti, -e
nirujjhamane nirujjhati); Vism 615,4foll. (tattha -aip.
nama ekiinanavuti -ani); Sp 244,25 (kamavacarani pana
atthakusalacittani lokiya-anhasamapatticittani ca
ekajjhai?J. katva -am eva ti veditabbani); Ps IV 88,15foll.
(yatha hi ten' eva ai!gulaggena ta1p. angulagga1p. na
sakka phusituip. evam eva ten' eva -ena tassa -assa
uppa:do va thiti va bhai!go va na sakka janitu1p. ... yadi
pana dve -ani ekato uppajjeyyu1p. ekena -ena ekassa
uppa:do va thiti va bhailgo va sakka bhaveyya janitu1p.);
As 60,35 (yava pan' uppannai?J. riipai?J. tighati tava sojasa
-ani uppajjitva bhijjanti, Ce, Ee so; Be yava
patuppannai?J.; Se yava paccuppanna1p.); 63,32foll.
(yasma va -an ti sabbacittasadharai).o esa saddo tasma
yad ettha lokiyakusalakusalamahakiriyacittai?J. ta1p.
javanavithivas ena attano santanai?J. cinoti ti -ai?J.);
Vibh-a 355,15* (aññam uppajjati -ai?J. aññai?J. -ai?J.
nirujjhati avicim anusambandho nadisoto va vattati); -
ifc see kiriya-, carima-, carimaka-, cuti-, patisandhi-,
vithi-; - 3. (n., nom. pl. -a, -ani, or mfn. ? se e
Sadd 227,1foll. and 229,2foll.) mental state, type of
consciousness; or connected with thinking or with
thought; mental; Dhsp. 5,11 (-a dhamma no -a
dhamma; As 49,25: cintanaghena -a vicittatthena va -a,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -alp. ... -ai?J., prob. wr); Dhs 1187
(cakkhuviññiil).ai?J. sotaviññiil).ai?J. ghanaviññiil).ai?J. jivha-
viññanai?J. kayaviññanai?J. manodhatu manoviññiil).adhatu
ime dhanuna -a); 1188 (vedanakkhandho
saññakkhandho sailkharakkhandho sabbai?J. ca riipai?J.
asailkhata ca dhatu ime dhamma no -a); Vibh 79,5
(manayatanai?J. -a1p., ekayatana no -a); 118,35 (tii).i sacca
citta
no -a, dukkhasacca~ siya -a~ siya no -a~); 403,4o
(katamani satta -ani, cakkhuviñña!f~ sotaviññana~ ...
manodhatu manoviñña!fadhatu); 427.36 (cha -a
abhiññeyya pariññeyya na pahatabba ... manoviññii!fa-
dhatu abhiññeyya pariññeyya si ya pahatabba ... ); 430,3
(satta -a na digha na suta na muta viññata);- citta~ in
Ee at SI 126,10* is wr for vitta~ (Be, Ce, Se so); -
citta~ in Ee, Se at JaiV 177,21* and in Ee at JaV
116,25* is wr for vitt~ (Be, Ce so); - citta~ in Ee at
As 154,19 (vedayitaghena eko va dhammo -~) is prob.
wr; read vedayitaghena eko va dhammo vedana ...
cittavicittatthena eko va dhammo -a~ with Be, Ce, Se;
-
0
adhipati, m.' thought or consciousness as the
dominant influence; Kv 508,33 (nanu -i sahajatana~
dhammana~ adhipatl ti); As 213,15 (dvinna~ pana
cittan~ ekato abhavena sampayuttacittassa -i nama
natthi); - 0 anugatika, mfn., adapted to the thought;
imitating thought; Vism 405,2 (kaya~ gahetva citte
aropeti -~ karoti s1ghagamana~); Ud-a 93,26 (-a~
kaya~ adhit!hahantassa); - 0
anuparivattin, mfn.,
moving after or along with thought; changing in
conformity to thought; Dhs 671 (kayaviññatti
vaciviññatti ida~ t~ rüpa~ -i); 1522 (vedana-
kkhandho saññakkhandho saiJ.kharakkhandho kaya-
viññatti vac1viññatti ime dhamma -ino); Kv 437,2 (slla~
na -1 ti); As 337,19 (--taya);- oanupassana,f, -a, n.,
contemplation of the thinking or thoughts; Patis I 190,12
(citte -a satipatthanabhavana ti); 191 ,29 (cattari
suttantikavatthüni citte -aya); Pet 95,3 (citte -a
nirodha~ bhajati); PsI 279,29 (sojasavidhena -a~
kathetum); Nidd-a I 54,7 (samatikkamati -ena); -
0
anupassi(n), mfn., considering, contemplating the
thinking or thoughts; D 11 299,7 foil. = MI 59,29 foil.;
Pet 159,7 (-issa patighatena khiyana ida~ thlna-
middha~, Be, Ce so; Ee wr cittanupassassa); PsI 280,22
(saragadipariga!fhanena yasmi~ yasmi~ kha!fe ya~
ya~ citta~ pavattati t~ ta~ sallakkhento attano va
citte parassa va citte ka1ena va attano ka1ena va parassa
citte -1 viharati); - 0
anumajjaka, mfn., applying
(continuous) pressure of thought or on the thoughts;
As 181,29 (tassa padaparimajjakapuriso viya imassapi
aramma!fe -o vicaro, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
cittanumajjanako); - 0 anurakkhi(n), mfn., who guard
the thoughts; Th 1140 (pahomi magga~ patipajjitu~
si va~ -1hi sada nivesit~); - o• -antara, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) having the interval of a thought-moment; ? A V
300,9 (itthiya va bhikkhave purisassa va naya~ kayo
adayagaman1yo, -o ay~ bhikkhave maceo; Mp V
77,25foll.: -o ti cittakara!fo, atha va citten' eva antariko,
ekass' eva hi cuticittassa anantara dutiye patisandhicitte
devo nama hoti ... ); - 2. (n.) the difference between
thought-moments; ? the variety of thought-moments; ?
Ps li 256,13 (sukhuma~ pana -~ khandhantara~
dhatantar~ ayatanantar~ . . . abhidhammikadhamma-
kathikass' eva pakata~; Ps-t [Be] II 191,6:
cakkhusannissitam eva pana viñña!f~ cakkhuviñña!fa~
tadanantar~ sampaticchana~ tadanantar~ santlra!fan
ti adina sa!fha~ sukhum~ ati-ittarakha!favant~ -~
cittananatta~); - o• -anvaya, mfn., linked to, dependent
on the thoughts; M I 238,8 (-o kayo hoti, cittassa vasena
137 citta
vattati); - 0 -alail.kara, mfn., which adorns or improves
(makes fit ?) the thoughts; A IV 62,5 (-a~
cittaparikkharal!l dan~ deti, Se so; Ce -a~ citta-
parikkharan ti dan~; Be --cittaparikkhar~ dan~; Ee
-~ cittaparikkharatthal!l danal!l, prob. wr; Mp IV
33,17 foll.: samathavipassanacittassa a1aiJ.karabhüt~
e' eva parivarabhütal!l ca); 0
-a1ail.karacitta-
parikkhara, m., adornment or improvement (making
fit ?) and equipping of thinking; D lii 258,15 (-' -atthal!l
dan~ deti; Sv 1044,27foll.: samathavipassanacittassa
a1aiJ.karatth~ e' eva parivarattha~ ca deti, danal!l hi
0
citt~ mudu~ karoti) = A IV 237,1; - -anantariya,
0
-anantarika, n., the immediate succession of thought-
moments or consciousnesses; Patis I 17,24 (cittattho
abhiññeyyo, -'-agho abhiññeyyo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
cittanantarikagho; Patis-a 99,3: cittassa anantariyal!l
-a~); II 121,6 (-'-attha~ bujjhantl ti bojjhaiJ.ga, Be, Ce
so; E e, Se cittanantarikatthal!l); - o• -abhoga, m. [citta
1
+ abhoga2 (or abhoga ?)], concentration of thought;
consciousness; Abh 159 (-o manakkaro);- '-avara~ 0
in Ce, Ee and cittavaral!l in Se at Ps IV 229,22 are wrr
for cittacar~ (Be so); - 0 '-utrasana, n., mental fear
or dread; Nidd-a I 426,29 (bhayan ti -al!l); -
o' -uppi!aka, o' -uppiJanaka, mfn., pressing the
thoughts; As 181,28 (hatthapadupp1janakapurisa-
catukkal!l vi ya . . . aramma!fe o• -upp1jako nekkhamma-
vitakko, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se 0 '-upp1janako); 182,1
(
0
' -uppllakavitakkasahanena, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
o• -uppljanaka-); - o• -ekagga, m., concentration of
thought; Vin II 235,23* (asuddhas!lo duppañño -a~ na
vindati); Sv 562,11 (na mayha~ --kara!fe bharo atth1 ti,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se o• -ekaggatakara!fe) = Ps lii 258,21 (Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se o• -ekaggatakara!fe); PsI 124,29 (imani ...
cattari jhanani kesañci -'-atthani honti, Ce, Ee, Se so;
0
Be 0 '-ekaggatatthani; = Sp 156,t8: eds '-ekaggat-
atthani); 186,s (jhan~ pan' assa --matt~ karoti);
Thi-a 75,15 (cittassa upasamal!l -a~ na ajjhagan ti); -
0
-kali, m., a mind that is bad-luck, a mind of ill-omen;
Th 214 (tlihal!l -i~ brümi; or read citta ka1i~; Th-a II
79,16/oll.: t~ tasma pamattabhavato ambho -i~
cittaka1aka!flfÍI!l aha~ kathayami, Ce so; Be, Se omit
ambho; Ee ambho citta kalicitta ka!aka!f!fil!l ah~
kathayami); 356 (na ca -i punappunal!l pasahal!l
paparato carissasi); - 0
-kalusiya, 0 -ka1ussiya, n.,
dirtiness, soiling of the thoughts; Ud-a 164,5 (--kara!fato
cittappakopa ragadayo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
cittaka1ussiya-); - 0 -ke!i,f (and 0 -kejiya ?), sport to
2
suit oneself; se(f-indulgent amusement; ? (or to citta ?)
Ja III 43,21 (te paresa~ rakkhitagopite matugame
aparajjhitva -il!l k1janta bahul!l papakamm~ katva);
Sp 512,5 (kayavacidvarehi asaññato bhinnajivo -i~
kijanto vicari; Sp-r [Be] 11 295,15: -in ti cittaruciy~ t~
t~ kijanto) f. Spk II 222,16 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se citta-
ki!al!l); Sp 1011,16 ( -iya~ kijitu~ pa1ato ti, eds so); -
cf cittaruciya below; - 0
-kelisa, m. [me for citta-
kilesa ?], an affliction, a defilement of the thoughts;
Th 1O1O (kamacchando ca vyapado th1namiddhal!l ca
bhikkhuno uddhaccal!l vicikiccha ca pañc' ete
cittake1isa; cfTh-a III 104,3z: yes~ kamacchandadayo
cittüpakkilesa avigata, te asadhü);- cf cittak1esa below;
citta
0
- -kkhepa, m., derangement of the thoughts; Vin V
189,31 (ummada -a añña111 vyakaroti) =A III 119,10; MI
237,3o (ummada111 pi papm.lissati -a111); Dhp 138
(garuk~ vapi abadha111 -a111 va papul)e; Dhp-a III 70,2o:
-an ti ummad~); Ap 330,32 (-o ca me asi tena sokena
agito, Be, Ce so; Ee -a111; Se cittukkhepa111); Sp 26,7
(abhidhamme duppatipanno dhammacinta111 atidhavanto
acinteyyani pi cinteti tato-~ papul)ati) = Sv 22,17 (Be,
Ce, E e so; Se 0 -Vikkhep~); Spk I 320,8 (Á)avako ...
idhagatana111 pana -~ pi karoti hadaya111 pi pha1eti);
Pv-a 39,3o (ummattariipo ti ummattakasabhavo viya -a111
patto viya); - see also cittavikkhepa below; -
0
-klesa, m., an affliction, a defilement of the thoughts;
S V 24,25* (pariyodapeyya attan~ -ehi pal)<;lito) = A V
232,30* = Dhp 88 (Dhp-a 11 162,17: -ehi ti pañcahi
nlvaranehi); - cfcittakelisa above; - 0 -gatika, mfn.,
following (the course of) the thoughts; ? Sv 404,13 (yatha
ca brahmal)a -a honti cittassa vase vattanti); Ap-a 320,37
(manomayo, yatha citta111 pavattati tatha kaya111 pavatteti
-~ karoti ti attho); -
0
-ghattaka, mfn., striking,
impeding the thoughts; Pj 11 365,25 (patighan ti
patighatak~. -an ti vutta111 hoti, dosavisesanam ev'
eta111); - 0 -cetasika, mfn., and -a, m.pl., l. (mfn.) (of
dhammas) of thinking and mental properties; which is
consciousness and its concomitants; ? Dhs 1022 (paritte
dhamme arabbha ye uppajjanti -a dhamma, ime
dhamma parittarammal)a); Vibh 262,12 (akas-
anañcayatanan ti akasanañcayatana111 samapannassa va
uppannassa va diqhadhammasukhaviharissa va -a
dhamma); Kv 537,27 (nanu kammassa katatta uppanna
-a dhamma vipako ti); Pe! 119,9 (ta111sampayuttan~ ca
-anam dhammana111 mül~); Mi149,16 (ya111 tattha
maharaja o)arika111 eta111 rüpa111 ye tattha sukhuma -a
dhamma eta111 naman ti); 87,6 (imesa111 ariiplna111 -ana111
dhammana111 ekarammal)e vattamanana111 vavatthan~
akkhat~. aya111 phasso aya111 vedana aya111 sañña ay~
cetana ida111 cittan ti); Vism 702,21 (ka nirodhasamapattl
ti ya anupubbanirodhavasena -ana111 dhammana111
appavatti);- 2. (m.pl.) thinking and mental properties;
consciousness and its concomitants; Vism 84,26
(ekarammal)e -ana111 sam~ samma ca adhana111
thapanan ti); 129,2 (ajjhattike bahire ca vatthumhi
avisade uppannesu -esu ñal)al?1 pi aparisuddh~ hoti);
PsI 276,5 (tasmi111 arammal)e -ana111 pathamabhinipate);
III 30,19 (tad ubhaya111 pi rüpa111 ta111samuqhapika -a
arüpa111); Pj 11 423,18 (kopan ti -ana111 avilabhava111);-
0
-(t)thapana, n., -a,j, fixing the thinking; establishing
a thought, an intention; Spk 11 138,3o (pal)idhi ti -~,
Be, Ce, E e so; Se -a); III 1O1,2z (ijjhissati s!lavato
cetopal)idhi ti samijjhissati s!lavantassa -a, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se cittapatthana); Mp V 70,1 (pal)idh! ti devo va
bhavissami devaññataro va ti -a);- 0 -dubbhaka, m., a
mind that is an injurer; a treacherous mind;? Th 214
(t~ brümi -~; cfTh-a 11 79,18: t~ brümi kathemi
-a111 cittasailkhatassa attano bahüpakarassa santanassa
anatthavahanato cittadubbhil?1); - 0 -nipphadita, mfn.,
brought about by thought; As 64,34; - 0 -ppakopa, m.,
mental tumult; anger; Th!-a 246,32 (bhatta mayha111
viddessate viddessa111 -~ karoti); Cp-a 100,17 (-~
akatva);- 0 -ppakopana, mfn., agitating, irritating the
138 citta
thinking or thoughts; A IV 96,20* (kodho -o); It 83,22*
(lobho -o; It-a 11 97,10: -o ti cittasailkhobhano, 1obho hi
lobhanlye vatthusmi111 uppajjamano citta111 khobhento
pakopento ... uppajjati); - 0
-(p)pakkhandana, n., the
springing (into) of thinking; enthusiasm of thought,
Sp 395,5 (imani pa!hamassa jhanassa dasa 1akkhal)ani .. .
majjhimassa samadhinimittassa patipatti tattha -a111 ... );
-
0
-patirüpaka, mfn., seeming like thinking; which
counterfeits thought; Kv 625,23 (atthi na citta111 -a111);-
0
-ppabhanasaka, mfn., destroying the radiance of
thought; Nidd-a I 68,12 (mala suvai)I)assa malam viya
-a); - 0
-ppamaddi(n), mfn., crushing the thoughts;
Th! 357 (kama -ino, Be so; Ce 0 -ppamathino; Ee
0
-pamathino; Se 0
-ppamadino; Th!-a 227,29:
0
-ppamathino ti .. . -ino ti va patho, eds so);
0
-(p)pamathi(n), mfn., troubling, harassing the
thoughts; Th! 357 (kama -ino, Ce, Ee so; Be
0
-ppamaddino; Se 0 -ppamadino; Th!-a 227,2s; -ino ti
pari)ahuppadanadina sampati ayati111 ca cittassa
pamathanas!la, -ppamaddino ti va patho, so ev' attho,
0
ye pana o -ppamadino ti vadanti tesa111 cittassa
pamadavaha ti attho, eds so); - 0 -ppamadi(n), mfn.,
making one's thinking heedless; Thi-a 227,3o
0
( -ppamathino ti .. . ye pana -ino ti vadanti tesa111
cittassa pamadavaha ti attho);- -parikkhara, m. and
0
mfn., l. (m.) equipping, making fit the thinking; - ifc
see cittalankara- above; - 2. (mfn.) which equips,
makes fit the thinking: A IV 62,5 (cittalailkara111 -an ti
dana111 deti, Ce so; Be citta1ailkaracittaparikkharal?1
dana111; Se -a111 dan~; Ee cittalailkara111 -' atth~
dana111, prob. wr; Mp IV 33,17 foll.: samatha-
vipassanacittassa alankarabhüta111 e' eva parivarabhüt~
ca); - 0
-pariggahaka, mf(-ika)n., taking hold of,
enveloping the thinking or thoughts; PsI 280,25/oll.
(kevala111 hi idha -pariggahika sati dukkhasaccan ti
0
eva111 yojan~ katva -assa bhikkhuno yava arahatta
niyyanamukh~ veditabba111); Mp 11 43,7 (tam eva
citta111 °-pariggahikaya anupassanaya anupassanto ti, Ce,
Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se pariggahikaya); -
o -paridamana, n., the taming or controlling of the
thoughts; Vism 375,29 (adhigatappanassa cuddasah'
akarehi -a111 bharo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee citt~
paridaman~); Th-a I 222,31 (cuddasavidhena -ena);-
0
-ppavatti,f, activity of thinking; the course of one's
thoughts; Vism 614,10 (imina nayena yavatayuk~ -i
veditabba); Sv 369,28 (-iya111 dosa111 disva acittakabhavo
santo ti); Ud-a 82,27 (cetoparivitakkan ti tassa -i111
annaya ti janitva); - 0 -piiguññatii,f, abstr., mental
fitness; good condition of the consciousness faculty;
Dhs 49 (ya . . . viññal)akkhandhassa pagul)ata pagul)a-
ttal?1 pagul)abhavo, aya111 .. . -a hoti); Vism 463 ,6;
As 131,4 (cittassa paguññabhavo pi -a); - 0 -pi)ii,f,
faintness; loss of consciousness; Abh 173 (-a visaññita);
Nidd-a I 322,22 (cittavilakaral)amatto hotl ti ...
--karal)amatto ti pi patho ta111 na sundara111, tassa
cittassa kilmathakaral)amatto ti attho, Se so; Be
citta1asa-; Ce, Ee cittalapa-); 0
-bhañga, m.,
dissolution of thought, disruption of consciousness;
Vism 238,27* (-a mato loko, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se --mato)=
Nidd I 42,26* (Ce so; Be 0 -bhagga; Ee, Se 0 -bhangamato;
citta
Nidd-a I 151,15foll.: -a mato ti dvihi cittehi ekakkha~e
ajivanabhavena -en a mato ... uparito -a ti pi paJi tarp
ujukam eva, Ce so; Be, Se o -bhagga mato ti ... ; E e -a
mato ti ... uparato cuto bhmi.go ti pi paji) = Spk I 22,24*
(Be, Ce so; Ee, Se --mato; Spk-t [Be] I 64,25foll.:
cuticittassa viya sabbassa pi tassa tassa cittassa bhmi.ga-
ppattiya ayarp 1oko pararnatthato mato nama hoti); -
0
-bhavana,f, mental development or accomplishment;
D III 219,15 (tisso bhavana kayabhavana -a
paññabhavana; Sv 1003,19: agha samapattiyo pi -a
nama); MI 237,25 (kayabhavananuyogarp anuyutta
viharanti no -am; Ps 11 285,3: -a ti pi samatho vuccati);
A I 10,14 (assutavato puthujjanassa -a n' atthi ti; Mp I
63,4: o -ghiti o -pariggaho natthi); Pet 44,23;
0
-mañjüsa,f, a casket, a collection of thoughts, of
consciousness moments; Sp 395,1 (tarp patharnajjhana-
smi.khatarp -arp nissaya vipassanarp va<;Ighetva, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se -mañjusarp) = Spk III 266,20 (Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se -mañjusarp; Spk-t [Be] 11 519,21: ki1esacorehi
anabhibhavaniyatta jhanarp -an ti vuttarp);
Vibh-a 462,31 (nivar~ani pana vikkhambhetva -ayarp
cittarp thapeturp acheko, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -mañjusaya);
Pp-a 180,15 (upacararp papento appanarp papento -arp
labhanto ); o -rucika, o -rucita, o -ruciya, mfn.
[cfS. rucita, rucya], pleasing, agreeable to one's
thinking; Ja I 207,4 (sa attano 0 -rucitarp samikarp
varesi); Sp 518,16 (ekarp aññarp va 0 -ruciyarp kamma-
ghanarp gahetva); Ps 11 87,26 (attano 0 -rucitarp kamma-
ghanarp gahetva) f. 236,2s ( -ruciyarp) f. 358,6 (Ce, Ee
0
0
-rucikarp; Be, Se 0 -rucitarp) f. V 52,24 (Ce, Ee
0
-rucikarp; Be, Se 0 -rucitarp) f. Spk I 85,19 (Ce, Ee
0
-rucikarp; Be, Se 0 -rucitarp); Mp I 273,15 (0 -ruciyesu
thanesu nisiditva) = Th-a I 42,17 (Be, Ce 0 -rucikesu; Se
o -rucitesu; Ee 0
-rucisu); Cp-a 190,27 (yadicchakarp
0
-ruciyarp tassa cittanukü1arp pavattehi);
0
-ruciya, ind. [cfS. rucya], at one's pleasure; as one
wills; Ja V 287,4 (hatthavikaradivasena 0 -ruciya kejirp
dassesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -ruciyarp kiJarp); Ps III 135,13
(attano 0
-ruciya bhikkhacararp gacchanti);
0
-rüpaip., ind., as one's intention; in accordance with
one's thoughts; satisfactorily;? Vin 11 78,2 (te ten' eva
somanassena na -a111 rattiya supirpsu) = Ill 161,19
(Sp 580,26: na -an ti na cittanurüpam, yatha pubbe
yattakarp icchanti tattakarp supanti na evaip. supiJTlsu,
appakam eva supirpsü ti vuttarp hoti); IV 177,11
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü yavadattharp bhuñjanti, aññe
bhikkhü na -aJTI bhuñjanti); Sp 54,23 (so kira kumaro
sattarne marp divase maressanti ti na -arp nahayi na
bhuñji na supi atlVlya lükhasañro ahosi);
0
-1ahuka, mfn., having or connected with quickly
moving or changing thoughts or intentions; ~ Sp 237,4
(adinnadanamanussaviggahavitikkama pana sukhuma
-a; Sp-t [Be] 11 50,5: cittarp 1ahu sighaparivatti etesan ti
-a); 255,2o (-assa puggalassa cittavasen' eva ma
atikhippaJTI vinaso ahosi ti devataya santike sikkha-
paccakkhanarp patikkhipi); - 0
-Va(t), mfn., possessing
understanding; having a mind (of one's own), having
thoughts; Ja 11 298,22* (na idaJTI 0 -vato lomarp;
298,24" foll.: yarp idaJTI etassa sarire pharusalomaip. idarp
vicar~apaññaya sampayuttacittavato na hoti,
139 citta
paka¡ikacittena pana acittako nama tiracchanagato
natthi); IV 254,4* (sabbo loko 0 -va samhi citte, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr cittavasarnhi citto; 254,15·: sabbo pana loko
attano hinena va p~itena va cittena -a nama, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee cittena cittarp janati); As 213,17 (sace 0 -Vato
kusalarp hoti);- -Vasamhi in Ee at Ja IV 254,4* is wr;
0
read cittava samhi citte with Be, Ce, Se; -
0
-Vasika, mfn., under the control of one 's own thoughts;
Ja V 273,1o· (-o hutva isisu aparajjhitva at¡hasu maha-
nirayesu paccati); Sp 374,7; Spk I 36,22 (-o pi sama~a­
dharnmarp katurp na sakkoti); Dhp-a I 300,6 (dummedho
attano cittarp rakkhitu111 sarnattho nama natthi -o hutva
anayavyasanarp papu~ati); - neg. acittavasika, mfn.,
Ps 11 256,32 (aho vata sabrahmacañ acittavasika hutva
cittaJTI attano vase vattetva ... );- 0 -vara, m., a moment
of consciousness; a segment of consciousness;
Vism 707,35 (ekarp va dve va -e atikkarnitva acittako
hoti nirodharp phusati); Vibh-a 153,10 (tadaramrna~e dve
-a agata); Ps 11 352,28 (ekarp dve -am eva pavattitva
bhavmi.garp otarati) f. As 265,7 (-e pavattitva); Ps 11
378,29 (cetopariyayan ti -aJTI cittaparicchedarn);
Bv-a 53,17 (vessantarattabhavato cavitva dutiye -e
tusitabhavane nibbatto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nibbattiJT~); -
0
-vikkhepa, m., distraction, derangement ofthought; SI
126,1 (umrnadarp va papu~eyya -arp va, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be cittakkheparp); Pp 69,3o (ummada -a sosaniko hoti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -o); Vism 429,8 (bhayaJTI uppajjati
yena -arp patva jhanavibbhantako hoti); Ps 11 285,2
(taya [vipassanaya] -a111 papu~anto nama natthi); Mp I
378,24 (ayarp puttasokena -arp patta bhavissati); - see
also cittakkhepa above;- 0 -vinivattana, n., the turning
away of the thoughts (from); It-a I 169,1
(rüparamma~adito -ass' eva abhavato );
0
-vipariyasakata, mfn., ajjlicted with delusion of
thought; Vin 11 80,33 (Gaggo bhikkhu ummattako hoti
-o) f. 100,1s;- see also cittavipallasa;- 0 -Vipariyesa,
see sv 0 -vipallasa; - 0
-vipaiHisa, 0 -Vipariyesa, m.,
delusion, error of thinking; A 11 52,4 (anicce bhikkhave
niccan ti saññavipallaso -o dighivipallaso) = Patis 11
80,6 f. Vibh 376,6 ( -vipariyeso); Pet 21,4 (-o lobharp
0
akusalamülarp pava<;l<;!heti); Kv 306,27 (atthi arahato
saññavipariyeso -vipariyeso ditthivipariyeso ti); -
0
0
-Vipphandana, 0 -Vipphandita, n., quivering, trembling
of the thoughts; Nidd-a I 389,14 (cittacalana111
0
-Vipphanditarp sammati vüpasarnmati) = Patis-a 522,17
CO-vipphandanaJTI) = As 144,27 (Ce, Be, Ee so; Se
0
-vipphandanarp); - 0 -vibadhana, n., ajjliction of the
thoughts; Pj Il 310,16; - 0
-Vibbhama, m., madness,
0
insanity; Abh 172 (ummado -o); - -Vivatta. m.,
turning away, severing, of the thoughts; Patis I 108,31
(katharp adhighane pañña -e ña~aJTI; Pa¡is-a49,4foll.:
kamacchandadipahanavasena cittassa vivat¡ane ñ~arp);
110,19 (vijananto vivagati ti -o); - se e also cetovivaga
sv ceta(s); 0
-Vossajjana, n., surrendering the
thoughts; Sv 851,2 (pañcasu kamagu~esu --sari.khata
pamada ca pa¡ivirata); - 0 -sañkhara, m., a mental
motive force; mental acttvtty; Vin 111 71,6
(passambhayaJTI -aJTI assasissami ti); MI 54,10 (tayo
'me ... sari.khara, kayasmi.kharo vacismi.kharo -o); 296,15
(yvayarp . . . mato kalakato tassa . . . -a niruddha
citta 140 citta

pa~ipassaddha); 301,29 (sañña ca vedana ca cetasika ete calante); 0

-sampakkhandanat:a,j, abstr., the
dhamma o -pa~ibaddha, tasma sañña ca vedan a ca -o; springing (into) of consciousness; the enthusiasm of
0
Ps II 364,23: -pa~ibaddhatta cittena sailkhariyati thinking; Pa~is 11 48,11 (animittaya ca dhatuya -aya); -
nibbattiyatl ti -o); Pa~is I 188,27 (digharp assasavasena 0
-Sampayuttaka, mfn., connected with, dependent on,
sañña ca vedana ca cetasika, ete dhamma 0 -patibaddha thought or consciousness; Ps IV 140,22 (vitakkavicare
-a); Vibh 135,28 (manosañcetana -o); Kv 327,29 ~hapetva sabbe pi -a dhamma -sailkhare sailgahita ti);
0

(nirodharp samapajjantassa pa~hamarp nirujjhati vaci- 0

-sampi}ana, n., mental affliction; Pe~ 118,7
sailkharo tato kayasailkharo tato -o ti); Spk II 17,28 (-o (--lakkhal}arp domanassarp); Nett29,7 (-arp
ti cittato pavattasailkharo, kayavac!dvare copanarp domanassarp);- 0 -sambhütat:ayo in Ee at It-a 11 96,25
akatva raho nisiditva cintentassa pavattanarp is wr for 0 -sambhutataya (Be, Ce, Se so); -
1okiyakusa1akusa1avasena ekünatirpsamansañcetananarp 0
-hetuka, mfn., caused, brought about by thinking or
etarp adhivacanarp);- 0 -Sailkhobhana, mfn., agitating consciousness; Dhs 667 (rüparp 0
-jarp -arp
the thoughts; It-a 11 97,to (cittappakopano ti -o); - 0
-samunhanarp) t 767 t Vibh 157,24; - acitta, mfn.,
0
-saññatti,f, mental convzctwn or agreement; without consciousness; without understanding; lacking
information of mind; Mil 256,13 (na me tattha -i a (particular) thought or intention;? Ja III 273,19 (imarp
bhavati); Vism 181,29 (yo - '-atthaya slvathikadassanarp -arp kaliilgarakal}¡;iarp pi tava gul}arp janati, Ee so; Be,
gacchati, so gal}¡;iirp paharitva gal}arp sannipatetva pi Ce, Se acittakarp); IV 254,3* (sabbo loko paracitto -o,
gacchatu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -sarpyattatthaya; Ee so; Ce paracittena -o; Be paricitto aticitto, Se
Vism-mh~ [Be] I 203,22: attano cittassa saññatti-attharp paracittena aticitto; 254,t2'foll.: asappuriso hi
saññapanattharp);- 0 -santati,f, continuity, continuous piil}atipatadicittena sappuriso pal}atipataveramaJ!I-
series of consciousness; Kv 458,14 (-i samadhi ti); adicittena -o ti, evarp sabbo loko paracittena -o ti attho,
Vism 604,6* (tath' eva patisandhimhi vattate -i purimarp Ee so; Be aticitto ti ... paricitto aticitto ti attho; Ce, Se
bhijjati cittarp pacchimarp jayatl tato); Sadd 492, tO* atJcJtto ti . . . paracittena aticitto ti); PsI 125,9
(sotasaddo .. . -iyarp); - cittasantatirp in Ee at (nirodhasamapattirp samapajjitva sattaharp -a hutva);-
As 419,20 is wr for cittasannissitarp (Be, Ce, Se so); - duccitta, ducitta, mfn., with bad thoughts; ill-
0
-Santana, n., continuity, continuous series of intentioned; Ja V 114,25' (duhadaye -e, Ce, Se so; Be
consciousness; Vism 460,18 (bhavagati~hitinivasesu ducitte; Ee wr duccite); - niccitta, mfn., without
sarpsaramananarp sattanarp avicchinnarp -arp pavattati thought; without consciousness; Dhp-a I 217,7 (ayarp hi
yeva); Sv 46,12 (bhagava katabhattakicco tesarp nama -o nijjivo saro); - see also acittaka, adhicitta,
sattanarp -ani oloketva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee santanani); adhicittarp, adhicitte, abbhutacittajata (sv abbhuta\
PsI 85,6 (bhavetl ti va¡;l¡;iheti, attano -e punappunarp ekacittakkhal).ika, ekacittasamayutta, khittacittaka
janeti, abhinibbattetl ti attho ); 142,1 (sailki1iHhacitto (sv khipati \ niccittaka, sacittaka, hitacittaka
kalarp karissatl ti ... ayarp pana avisodhetva -arp ka1arp (sv dahati\
karissat! ti); Spk I 250,23 ([saddha] -e patitthahitva); citta 2, citra 1, mfn. and n. [S. citra], l. (mfn.) (i) bright,
It-a I 54,1 (cittarp avirajayan ti .. . attano -arp na bright-coloured; decorated; many-coloured;
virajayarp na virajjanto); - 0
-sant:apana, n. and/or extraordinary, wondeiful; Abh 838 (vicitte -am); V in II
mfn., burning the mind; mental affliction; Ap 309,24 113,3 (chabbaggiya bhikkhu citrani pattamal}¡;ialani
(daratharp nabhijanami -arp mama); 526,15 dharenti rupakokil}l}ilni bhatikammakatani); M 11 65,3*
(domanassarp na janami -arp mama); Pa~is-a 606,11 (añjani va nava -a piltikayo alailkato) = Th 773 (Th-a III
(santapan ti yatha tatha va -arp); 36,11: yatha añjani ... ma1akammamakaradantadivasena
0
-sanniggal}hal}a, n., subduing, controlling the -a, bahi manha ujjala dassanlya anto pana na dassaniya
thoughts; Vism 303,2 (ayarp dani te --ka1o); hoti); Dhp 171 (etha passath' imarp lokarp -arp
0
-sannissaya, (mf)n., (that) which has consciousness as rajarathupamarp; Dhp-a lii 167,21: -an ti sattaratanadi-
suppport; ? Pe~ 196,5 (cittena ca -arp [dhareti], so read vicittarp rajaratharp viya vatthalailkaradicittitarp);
with Ña'(lamoli, 1979, p. 265? eds -e); Vv 36:3 (soval}l}amaya lohitailkamaya ...
0
-Samadhana, n., fixing, concentration of the thoughts; parevatakkhihi maJ!Ihi 0
-ta,? Vv-a 167,22/oll.:
profound meditation; Thi-a 43,19 (-arp a1abhitva); parevatakkhisadisehi mal}Ihi yathavuttamaJ!Ihi ca
Pa~is-a 281,2o (vipassamano puna samadhirp pavisitva sailkhatacittabhava ima tava kesahatthe ratanamala ti
-arp ca yath' eva kareyya tath' eva vipassanan ti); - adhippayo); 47:9 (passa ... accherarp -arp
0
-Samutthana, mfn., having its origin in thought or kammaphalarp idarp; V v-a 202,26: -an ti vicittarp
consciousness; arising from the mind or consciousness; acinteyyarp); 78:4 (citra manorama bhumi na tatth'
M II 26,t3 (akusalaslla ... -a); Nidd I 371,6 (ajjhattikarp uddharpsati rajo); Ja V 417,1 (Kul}a1o nama sakul}o ...
-arp bhayarp); Dhs 585 (atthi rüparp -arp atthi rüparp na ativiya -o ativiya cittapattacchadano; 418,2Y: -o ti
-arp) = Vibh 13,9; Vibh 225,24 (tayo iddhipada -a); mukhatul}¡;lake henha udarabhage pi citro va); VI 127,2*
Kv 415,14 (nanu vaca -a cittena sahajata cittena saha- (citra... at~arpsa sukata thambha; 127,8·: citra ti
ekuppada ti); 416,32 (nanu kayakammarp -arp); PsI nanaratanavicitra); Nidd I 380,13 (citra upahana;
260,27 (abhikkamami ti citte uppajjamane ten' eva Nidd-a I 413,4/oll.: suval}l}arajatadivicitta morapiñjadi-
cittena saddhirp -a vayodhatu viññattirp janayamana parikkhata upahana); Ap 113,24 (vasudha yatha-
uppajjati); - 0
-Samutthanika, mfn., arising from ppameyya -a vanava~arpsaka); Mil1,to* (Nagasenakatha
thought or consciousness; As 84,17 (-e pana kaye citra opammehi nayehi ca); Sp 1087,6 (ekam eva
citta
upadhanaq¡ . . . rattaq¡ va hotu padumava~~aq¡ va -aq¡
va); - (ii) variegated, speckled; Abh 99 (kammaso
kabato -o); Vin I 193,4 (vacchako hoti taru~ako ... citro
seyyathapi dipicchapo); Jaiii 251,17" (tasmiq¡ kira
uyyane rukkhalatadinaq¡ pabha tattha pavigha-
pavinhanaq¡ devanaq¡ sañrava~~aq¡ -aq¡ karoti, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se citraq¡); V 69,1* (brahm~am addakkhi setaq¡
citraq¡ kilasinaq¡; 69,17": kabarakughena citraq¡, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se vicitraq¡); - (iii) various, different, manifold;
M II 74,5* (kama hi citra madhura) = Sn 50 (Pj II 99,23:
rüpadi-anekappakaravasena citra); Ja III 245,16* (citrahi
gathahi subhasitahi; 245,18": citrahi ti
anekatthasannissitahi); VI 211 ,8* (-ehi v~~ehi mukhaq¡
nayanti; 214,3o·: ayaq¡ te yüpo parattha kamaduho
bhavissati sassatabhavaq¡ avahissati ti citrehi kara~ehi
mukhaq¡ pasarenti); As 64,12 (evaq¡ tava 0 -taya cittaq¡);
Mhv 37:247 (katva puññani citrani);- 2. (m.) a kind of
bird (the speckled cuckoo);? Ja VI 276,15" (ku~alaka ti
klQakokila, citra ti citrapattakokila, ad 276,12*: ku~alaka
bahü citra; but rather adj.? cfJa V 406,28": ku~alaka ti
kokila, citra ti citrapatta); - see also citrakokila below;
- 3. (n.) (i) something brilliant or diverse or extra-
ordinary; a wonder; S I 22,24* (na te kama yani citrani
loke sailkapparago purisassa kamo) -t A III 411,12*
(Mp III 407,8: citrani ti citracitraramm~ani); Th 674
(bahüni loke citrani; Th-a III 4,4 foil.: rüpadivasena
tatthapi nilapitadivasena itthipurisadi-vasena ca anekani
loke cittavicittani aramma~ajatani); - (ii) a painting, a
picture; Abh 838 (cittakamme -am uccate); S III 151,24
(dighaq¡ vo bhikkhave car~aq¡ nama -an ti ...
taq¡ ... car~aq¡ nama -aq¡ citten' eva cintitaq¡); As 64,15
(car~aq¡ nama -aq¡ aticittam eva hoti); Sadd 538,3o
(cittasaddo ... di!!haq¡ vo bhikkhave car~aq¡ nama -an
ti adisu cittakamme); - ifc see aneka- (sv eka),
patibhana-, lepa-; - 0 agara, n., a decorated pleasure-
house; V in IV 298,4foll. (uyyane -e patibhanacittaq¡
kataq¡ hoti, bahü manussa -aq¡ dassanaya gacchanti;
Sp 934,13; -an ti kijanacittasalaq¡); Vin-vn 2278
(rajagaraq¡ -aq¡ ... datthuq¡); - (citr) 0 '-aggaJa, m., a
decorated door-bolt; Ja VI 483,5* (citraggaje-r-ughusite
suramaq¡sappabodhane, instr.pl. ? cfL. Alsdorf, 1957;
483,2o· foil.: pañcailgikaturiyasaddasadisaq¡ manoramaq¡
ravaq¡ ravantehi sattaratanacittehi dvarakavatehi
ugghosite, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sattaratanavicittehi); -
o• -ailgada, mfn., wearing bright or variegated
bracelets; Ja V 400,12* (ka ... -a kambuvimaghadharini;
400,19": citrehi ailgadehi samannagata); - o• -atthara,
citratthara, n., a multi-coloured rug; Ja IV 458,24 (-e
pejaq¡ !hapetva, Se so; Ce, Ee citratthare; Be
vicittatthare) = Cp-a 129,19 (Ce so; Ee citratthare; Be, Se
vicittatthare ); - o' -attharaka, citrattharaka, m., a
multi-coloured rug; Ja VI 191,20 (-e ratanapejaq¡
!hapetva, Se so; Ce, Ee citrattharake; Be cittatthar~e);
Spk III 45,5 (-suriyattharakacittattharakadihi nana-
v~~ehi attharakehi); -kata, mfn., painted;
0
decorated; M II 64,25* (passa -aq¡ bimbaq¡ arukayaq¡
samussitaq¡) = Dhp 147 = Th 769 (Th-a III 35,6: -an ti
cittaq¡ kataq¡, cittakataq¡, vatthabhar~amaladihi
vicittaq¡ katan ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cittaq¡ kataq¡
cittikataq¡); Ps III 302,18 (gandhadihi ma~iku~<;lalehi ca
141 citta
-aq¡ pi rüpaq¡ vatthehi sah' eva sobhati, vina vatthehi
jegucchaq¡ hoti anolokanakkhamaq¡); Bv-a 62,6
(vlQamiga . . . ukkhittaq¡ padaq¡ anikkhipitva -a vi ya
tighanti); - 0
-katha, mfn., who speaks brilliantly;
whose talk is varied; SI 199,15* (te -a bahussuta);
IV 375,1 (Khema ... bahussuta -a kaly~apatibhana ti,
Be, Ce so; E e, Se cittakathi, prob. wr); Thi 449 (silavati
-a bahussuta, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr cittakathika); -
0
-katha,f, brilliant speech; a varied discourse; Mp I
285,13 (dhammakathaq¡ kathento .. . upamahi ca
kar~ehi ca m~<;letva -am eva katheti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
cittakathikaq¡); o -kath(i)n, citrakathi(n), mfn.,
speaking brilliantly; whose talk is varied; D II 317,9
(p~<;lito vyatto medhavi bahussuto -I kaly~apatibhano)
= M II 83,21; Vv 84:26; Th 234 (ye -I bahussuta
sam~a; Th-a II 93,4 foil.: vicittadhammakatha ... nana-
nayehi paresaq¡ ajjhasayanurüpaq¡ dhammassa kathana-
sila ti attho); Ja III 507,24* (bahussutaq¡ -iq¡ ganga
vahati Patalaq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -aq¡); VI 222,24* (suto
citrakathi g~I); Ap 497,14 (vaggussaro -I para-
vadappamaddano); Mill ,5* (asajja raja citrakathiq¡
ukkadharaq¡ tamonudaq¡);- 0 -kathika, mfn., speaking
brilliantly; whose talk is varied; A I 24,28 (etadaggaq¡ ...
mama savakanaq¡ bhikkhünaq¡ . . . -anaq¡ yadidaq¡
Kumarakassapo; Mp I 283,11: -anan ti vicittaq¡ katva
dhammaq¡ kathentanaq¡) f. Ja I 148,3o (Be so; Se citra-
kathikanaq¡; Ce, Ee citrakathinaq¡); Ap 545,6 (nipu~a
-a); - 0 -kamma, n., a painting, a picture; decoration;
Vin V 129,33 (--danaq¡; Sp 1335,9 foil.: avasaq¡ karetva
tattha -aq¡ karetuq¡ vagati, idaq¡ pana patibhana-
cittakammadanaq¡ sandhaya vuttaq¡); Ja VI 333,12
(nighitaya salaya cittakare pakkosapetva ... rama~Iyaq¡
-aq¡ karesi); Mil278,31 (--danaq¡); Vism 38,18
(manoramaq¡ bhante -an ti); 306,18 (akase -assa vi ya ...
patighanaghanaq¡ na hoti); Ps IV 69,7 (ekadivasen' eva
sattabhümako pasado na sakka katuq¡ vatthuq¡ sodhetva
thambhussapanato paghaya yava --kara~a); As 64,13
(lokasmiq¡ hi -ato uttariq¡ aññaq¡ cittaq¡ nama natthi);
- --kata, mfn., painted; decorated; Ja VI 481,5
(--kataya viya uracchadamalaya alailkatena urena
jatatta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cittakammena kataya);
Sp 1236,29 (yaq¡ kiñci --kataq¡);- --rüpa, --rüpaka, n.,
a figure in a painting; Ja IV 408,11 (uggatena maq¡sa-
pi~<;lena püretva --rüpakassa viya akkhini ahesum) "t
Cp-a 70,5 (--rüpassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cittarüpassa);
Sv 448,18 (mahapuriso ... --rüpakaq¡ viya ca khayati);
- see also cittarüpa2 below; - 0 -kara, m. [citta +
kara 1], a painter; Abh 508 (railgajivo -o); S II 101,31
(-o . . . itthirüpaq¡ va purisarüpaq¡ va abhinimmineyya,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cittakarako; = III 152,10: 0 -karako);
Ja VI 333,12 (ni!!hitaya salaya -e pakkosapetva ...
ram~Iyaq¡ cittakammaq¡ karesi); Ps II 183,17 (tani -ena
tülikaggena paricchinnani viya ahesuq¡); As 64,15
(-anaq¡ evaq¡vidhani ettha rüpani katabbani ti cittasañña
uppajjati); Vibh-a 331,25 (yatha ... cheko -o rüpaq¡
likhitukamo actito va bhittiparikammaq¡ karoti tato
aparabhage rüpaq¡ samutthapeti); Mhv 32:4 (-ehi karesi
vedikaq¡); - cittakaro in Ee at Ps V 74,17 is wr for
cittikaro (Be, Ce, Se so);- 0 -karaka, m., a painter; S II
101,31 (-o . .. itthirüpaq¡ va purisarüpaq¡ va abhi-
citta
nimmineyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cittakaro) = III 152,w;-
0
-ke!i,f, (and 0 -keFya ?) various sports, amusements;?
(orto citta 1 qv ?) Ja III 43,21 (te paresaiTl rakkhitagopite
matugame aparajjhitva -11!1 k!Janta bahuiTl
papakamm~
katva); Sp 512,5 (kayavac!dvarehi
asaññato bhinnajlvo -iiTl k!Janto vicari; cfSp-! [Be] II
295,15: -in ti cittaruciyaiTl taiTl t~ k!Janto) t Spk II
222,16 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cittak!J~); Sp 1011,16 (-iyaiTl
k!Jitum pa1ato ti, eds so); - (citra)-kokila, m., the
speckled cuckoo; Ja V 416,6foll. (dve citrakoki1a ...
at!ha citrakoki1a ... t~ citrakoki1~ parivaretva, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee anha cittakoki1a); Ap-a 519,14 (citrakoki1o
3
hutva nibbatto); - 0 -gu, citragu, mfn. [citra + gu ],
possessing speckled cows; Bv-a 32,18 (uttamasatto ti
visesanassa pubbanipatapathato -ü paddhagü ti ettha
viya ti nayaiTl doso); Sadd 774,28 (citra gavo yassa
ku1assa taiTl ku1a1Tl citragu); - o -geJ.uJuka, citra-
gel)<;iuka, m. [citta + gel)<;iuka 1], a brightly-coloured hall;
Ja V 196,2 (rajadh!tar~ . . . tantubaddh~ -aiTl
gahapetva, Be so; Se citragel)<;iukaiTl; Ce wr citra-
bhel)<;iuk~; E e wr cittabhel)<;iukaiTl); 196,24' (citra-
gel)<;iukassa adighapubbatta rukkhaphalena tena
bhavitabban ti maññamano, Be, Se so; Ce wr citra-
bhel)<;iukassa; Ee wr citrabhel)<;iukena);- (citra)-chatta
in Ee at Ja VI 540,4· is wr; Ce, Se citrapatta; Be
vicitrapatta; - (citra)-chada, mfn., with variegated
wings; Th 1108 (citrachada vihañgama; Th-a III
154,17 foil.: vicitrapekhul)apakkhino, mayüra ti attho );
- (citra)-tm~u;Iula,f, a plant; SAF: embelia, Embelia
ribes Burm.f; Abh 586 (viJangaiTl citrata1,1<;1u1a); -
0
-tara, mfn., more variegated or diverse; more extra-
ordinary; S III 151,28 (tena ... caral)ena cittena citt~
yeva -aiTl; Spk II 327,26: tassa cittassa upayapariyesana-
cittaiTl tato pi -aiTl); 152,5 (tehi pi ... tiracchanagatehi
pal)ehi cittaiTl yeva -aiTl); As 64,26;- 0 -tilaka, m. [citta
+ tilaka 1], an ornamental or sectarian mark on the
forehead; Nidd-a I 20,28foll. (ath' assa nalate ekam eva
manosilabinduiTl kareyya tassa na ettavata -o nama hoti,
nanaval)l)ehi pana parivaretva bindusu katesu -o nama
hoti) t As 138,31 foil.; - see also cittaka2; -
0
-pata, m., coloured cloth; a painting; It-a I 140,34
(dürato -aiTl pekkhantassa viya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
cittapatipekkhantassa); Th-a I 211,26 (-e buddhacaritaiTl
SUVal)l)apatte ca paticcasamuppadaiTl likhapetva); -
0
-patatti(n), mfn., with variegated wings; Ja VI 590,19*
(sakul)l manusinl va jata -in! ... rajaputtl asobhatha, so
read? Ce, Ee, Se cittapatta pati; Be cittapatta patl;
cf590,w foil.: yatha manussasañrena jata manusinl
nama sakul)l cittapatta akase uppatamana pakkhe
pasaretva gacchant! sobhati evaiTl ... ); - 0 -(p)patta,
2
citrapatta, mfn. [citta + patta ], with variegated feathers;
Ja VI 540,4 (citrapatta, Ce, Se so; Be vicitrapatta; Ee wr
citrachatta); 591,1· (sakul)l -a); - cittapatta pat! in eds
at Ja VI 590,19* is wr (unmetrical), perhaps for citta-
patattinl);- 0 -pattacchadana, mfn., with a covering of
variegated feathers; Ja V 417,1 (sakUI)O ... ativiya citto
ativiya -o); - see also sucittapattacchadana below; -
0
-patali, citrapataH,f, a kind oftree; S V 238,16 (ye keci
asuranaiTl rukkha -1 tes~ aggam akkhayati); Ja I 202,15
(devanaiTl paricchattako viya -1 nama kappa!!hiya-
142 citta
rukkho hoti); Vism 206,19 (asuran~ citrapataliya) =
As 298,2s (-iya); Bv-a 168,2o (sudassananagaradvare
-iya müle yamakapatihariyaiTl katva);- 0 -puññaip in
Ee at Ap 552,4 is prob. wr; Be cittaiTl muñjaiTl; Ce, Se
cittamuñj~;
0
(citra)-pekhuJ.Ia, -pekhuna,
0
-pekkhul)a, -pekkhuna, mfn., with variegated tail-
0
feathers; Ja I 207,10 (mal)iVal)l)aglvaiTl citrapekhul)~
mor~ disva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se citrapekkhul)~);
VI 497,16* (yada moñhi parikil)l)~ al)<;iajaiTl
citrapekkhun~ moram dakkhisi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
citrapakkhin~); 539,6* (sakul)a ... a1,1<;laja citrapekhul)a,
Be so; Ce citrapekkhul)a; Ee citrapekhuna; Se
citrapekkhal)ii; 540,3· foll.: al)<;iena jata citrapatta, Ce, Se
so; Be vicitrapatta; Ee wr citrachatta); 564,22* (mayüra
citrapekhul)a, Be, Se so; Ce citrapekkhul)a; Ee
cittapekkhana); - 0
-phalika, m., speckled crystal;
Ud-a 302,32 (masaragallan ti kabaramal)i, -an ti pi
vadanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee masaragallaiTl pana
kabaracittaphalikan ti vadanti); - (citra)-bimba-
mukhi, (m)f(n)., with painted or decorated bodies and
faces; ? Ja V 452,29* (ta upenti vividhena chandasa citra-
bimbamukhiyo alankata; 454,32' foll.: alañkaravasena
citrasar!ra vicitramukhiyo va hutva); - 0 -bheJ.I(.Iuka,
citrabhel)<;iuka in Ce, Ee at Ja V 196,2 and 196,24' are
wrr for 0 -gel)<;iuka, citragel)<;iuka qqv; - (citra)-
miga, m., the spotted antelope; Ja VI 538,25' (citraka
capi d!piyo ti citramiga ca d!pimiga ca, Ce, Ee so; Be
citrakamiga; Se vicitramiga); - 0 -rüpa 1, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) very extraordinary, wonderful; very varied;
Ja IV 98,2* (tapo nu te brahmal)a bhiiTlsarüpo, manta nu
te brahmal)a -a; 99,1c udahu vicitrarüpa sabbattha-
sadhaka manta te atthi); Mp V 24,16 (--sadiso hutva
pañcakappasatani ti!!hati); - see also sucittarüpa
below; - 2. (n.) a very strange thing, a wonder; Ja VI
512,18* (-~ va dissati) = Cp-a 86,5* (86,s: -~ va ti
2
acchariyarüpaiTl viya);- 0 -rüpa , n., a paintedfigure, a
figure in a painting; Cp-a 70,5 (akkhlni . . . uggatena
maiTlsapil)<;iena püretva -assa viya ruhiiTlsu, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se 0 -kammarüpassa); 125,10 (soJasehi nagakañña-
sahassehi -aiTl viya paricariyamano devalokasampatti-
sadise nagalokissariye !hito pi ?); see also
cittakammarüpa above;- 0 -Sañña,f, the idea of or for
a picture; (or to citta 1: a mental concept, a creative
idea; see A.K. Coomaraswamy, 1931, p. 218);
As 64,15foll. ([cara!)~] karontan~ cittakaranaiTl
ev~vidhani ettha rüpani katabbanl ti -a uppajjati, taya
-aya 1ekhagahal)arañjana-ujjotanavattanadinipphadika
cittakiriya uppajjanti, Be, Ce so; Se -nipphadita; Ee
uppajjati, cittaya saññaya lekhaya, prob. wr); -
0
-sibbana, citrasibbana, mf( -a, -I)n., with many-
coloured embroidery; with a bright or variegated
covering; Sn 300 (rathe cajaññas~yutte sukate -e, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se citrasibbane; Pj 11 319,34: -e ti
slhacammad!hi a1añkaral)avasena citrasibbane); Ja IV
395,16* (yojentu ve rajarathe sukate -e); VI 218,21*
(suvannavikata citra sukata citrasibbana ko so omuñcate
pada, Ce, Ee so; Se citrasibbinl; Be citta... -a;
219,7· foll.: citra ti sattaratanavicitra .. . citrasibbana ti
citrasibbaniyo, ko so omuñcate pada ti ko esa padato
evarüpa paduka omuñcatl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
citta
citrasibbinl ti vicitrasibbiniyo ); - aticitta, aticitra, mfn.,
very extraordinary, very wonderful; very diverse;
Mil 28,26 (aticitrani pañhapa!ibhanani vissajjitanl ti);
As 64,15 (lokasmi~ hi cittakammato uttari~ aññ~
citt~ nama natthi, tasmi~ pi cara!_la~ nama citta~ -am
eva hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr kasmi~ pi); - sucitta,
sucitra, mfn., of very many colours, very variegated;
beautifully decorated; S I 226,32* (sucitrapupph~ va
sirasmi~ mala~ gandh~ eta~ pa!ikaiJ.khama bhante);
Dhp 151 (j!ranti ve rajaratha -a; Dhp-a III 122,19fol/.:
sattahi ratanehi aparehi ca rathalaiJ.karehi sughu cittita,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se sughu citta); Thi 73 (vibhusetva im~
kaya~ -a~ balalapana~); Ja IV 21,16* (nava~ -~
abhinimminitva); Ap 258,16 (-a vi ya tiqhante akase
pupphasanthara); - --pattacchadana, mfn., with a
covering of very variegated feathers; Th 1136 ( --patta-
cchadana vihañ.gama); Ja III 265,1&* ( --pattacchadana,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se --pattacchadana; 265,2o·: -ehi pattehi
katacchadana, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se katacchadana); -
--ropa, mfn., very beautifully decorated or painted; very
wondeiful; Pv 10:9 (--rüp~ rucira~ vimana~ te
pabhasati; Pv-a 51,3 foil.: hatthi-assa-itthipurisadivasena
e' eva malakammalatakammadivasena ca sughu
vihitacittarüp~); Ja V 203,20* (nihanti so rukkhaphala~
pathavya --rüp~ rucir~ dassaneyy~); - see also
kañcanacittasantika, vanacittaka.
citta 3, n., cittii,f [S. citra], the constellation Citra; Abh 59
(hattho -a ca sati pi visakha); 838; Sadd 359,18
( ... hattho -am svati visakha ... sattavlsati nakkhattani).
citta4 , citra2, m.. [AMg, BHS citta; S. caitra], the name of a
month of spring; Abh 75 (-o visakha jegho ); 838; Spk II
351 ,2o (cittavesakhamasesu abbha~); Sadd 583,17 foil.
(cittamasadayo dvadasa masa seyyathida~ -o visakho
jegho . . . tatra -o maso rammako ti vuccati); -
0
-miisa, m., the month Caitra; Ja V 64,2" (rammako ti
-o); Pj I 192,11 (pa!hamasmi~ gimhe citramase ti attho );
Pv-a 135,22 (bahu mase ti -'-adike bahu aneke mase, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -e ti-' -adike, prob. wr); Mhv 1:46 ( -assa
kalapakkhe uposathe); Sadd 251,2 (citramaso); 538,27
(cittasaddo ... Citto gahapati -o ti adisu paññattiya~
dissati).
cittaka\ m. [S. citraka], a plant; SAF: leadwort,
Plumbago indica L.; Abh 580 (-o tv aggisaññito);
Samantak 736 (0 -japa).
cittaka 2, n. [S. lex. citraka], an ornamental mark; an
ornamental or sectarian mark on the forehead; Abh 300
(tilako ... -~); Sp 1293,17 (hatth~ kogapentl ti agga-
bah~ kogapetva morapattad!hi -a~ karonti, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be cittalañ.kara~);- 0 -dharakumma, m., a kind of
land turtle or tortoise (with a marking like a tilaka ?);
Mil408,13 (-o udakabhaya udak~ parivajjetva
2 acitti-; Se acitti~-; Ps IV 8l,sfoll.: deyyadhamme pi
vicarati); - see also cittatilaka (sv citta ).
cittakadhümo in Ee at Sp 1245,26 is wr for citakadhümo
(Be, Ce, Se so).
cittaka (and cittika\ f, cittaka, m. (and n. ?) [from
citta2], a many-coloured woollen covering; Abh 312
(Ul)l)iimay~ tv attharal)a~ -a vanacittaka~, Ce so; Be
-~); Vin I 192,15 ( ... gol)ako -a pa!ika pa!alika ... , Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se -o; Sp 1086,6: -o ti vanacitro Ul)l)a-
mayattharal)O, Ce so; Be -a ti; Ee, Se -o ti vatacitta-
143 cittikaroti
Ul)l)iimayattharako, prob. wr)-¡ II 169,33 (Ee, Se -a; Be,
Ce -o)-¡ A I l8l,21 (Ce, Ee -a; Be -o; Se cittika; Mp 11
292,3o: -o ti vanacitta~ Ul)l)amayattharal)~, Be so; Ce,
Ee cittika ti; Se -o ti ratanavicitra-Ul)l)iimayattharal)a~);
Ap 314,11 (rulika vikatikayo kaghissa -a bah u ...
labhami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cittika).
cittapatipekkhantassa in Ee at It-a I 140,34 is wr for
cittapa!~ pekkhantassa (Be, Ce, Se so).
3
cittii,f, se e sv citta .
cittaro in Ee at Ps V 68,22 is wr for cattaro (Be, Ce, Se
so).
2
cittika, n. (or cittika2. f) [from citta ], a painting, a
picture; Thi 393 (yatha haritalena makkhit~ addasa
-a~ bhittiya kata~; Thi-a 240,4: yatha kusalena
cittakarena bhittiya~ haritalena makkhita~ litta~ tena
lepa~ datva kat~ alikhita~ -~ itthirüpa~ addasa
passeyya).
cittika\ see sv cittaka.
cittika 2 , see sv cittika.
cittikara, see sv cittikara.
cittita, mfn., pp of citteti qv.
cittibhiiva~ in Ee at Vv-a 277,4 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
vicittabhav~.
cittikaroti, citthpkaroti, (and in Ee) cittikaroti, pr. 3 sg.
[from citta1 + karoti ? cf S. cittilqta; but cf also
2
BHS citrlkaroti; or perhaps *citi to v'ci ], shows respect;
thinks highly of; values; PsI 119,29 (lokiya ...
aramavanarukkhe cittlkaronti pujenti, Be, Ce so; Se
citti~aronti; Ee bhatti~ karonti); Pj I 170,27 (sabbo pi
jano cakkaratanamal)iratanam eva cittlkaroti pujeti, Ce
so; Ee citti-; Se citti~-; Be cittikara~ karoti); Ud-a 64,s
(tasma ta~ !han~ manussa citti~aronti kalena kala~
bali~ ca upaharanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cayit~ karonti);
absol. (a) citnkatva, cittikatvana, M III 24,12
(sappuriso sakkacca~ dana~ deti sahattha dana~ deti
citt!katva dan~ deti, Be, Ce so; E e citti-; Se citti~-) -¡
A III 172,3 (Be, Ce so; Ee citti-; Se citi~ katva);
Pv 21:55 (cira~ padasi khattiyo sakkacca~ ca sahattha
ca citt!katva punappuna~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vitti~
katva; Pv-a 135,17 foil.: garavabahumanayogena cittena
karitva pujetva); Th 936 (sabbakarukasippani
citt!katvana sikkhare, Ce so; Be citti~atvana; Ee
cittikatvana; Se citta~ katvana; Th-a III 78,32foll.:
sakkacc~ sadar~ katva); Bv 1:80 (sabbasampatti-
pa!ilabha~ citt!katva sul)atha me, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
citta~ katva; Bv-a 63,4: citte katva buddhanussati~
purakkhatva ti attho); Vv-a 30,16 (citti~katva dan~
kalena danan ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee citta~ katva);
Cp-a 307,11 (cittlkatva deti); Dlp 1:2 (cittikatva sul)atha
me); neg. acittikatva, acittikatva, M III 22,2o
(asappuriso ... acittikatva dana~ deti, Be, Ce so; Ee
puggale pi na cittlkara~ katva deti) -¡ A III 171 ,3o (Be,
Ce so; Ee acitti-; Se aciti~ katva); Sadd 699,2o
(acittikatva asakkatva bhikkhussa bhatt~ adasi);
(b) citti~karitva, citti~aritvana, Sn 680 (disvana deve
muditamane udagge citti~karitva idam avocasi tattha,
Ce, Ee so; Se idam avoca; Be citti~karitvana idam
avoca tattha; Pj 11 484,19: adar~ katva); - pp cittikata
(and cittikata), mfn. [cf S. cittikrta, 'made an object of
cittita
thought'; BHS citrik[ta, citrik[ta], thought highly of;
respected, honoured; valued; Vin IV 6,20 (ah!!itaJ11
aparibhiitaJ11 -aJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee citti-; Se cit!-) f::-
Vibh 2,26 (Be, Ce so; E e, Se cit!-); Mil 240,23 (sailgho
mam' accayena -o bhavissat! ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se citti-);
Sv 443,26* (-a111 mahagghaJ11 ca atulaJ11 dullabha-
dassanaJ11 anomasattaparibhogaJ11 ratana111 tena vuccati,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e citti-) = Spk III 152,22* = Pj 1 170,9*
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee citti-) PsI 119,23 (-' -aghena hi te
cetiyani ti vuccanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se citti-); Spk I 92,23
(ye ca loke -a tesa111 -o bhagava); Ud-a 63,25 (cetiye
ti ... manussana111 --tthane); Sadd 874,3o (cittikata111 ice
adi evaJ11 ikaragamo); 875,31joll. (keci pana
cittikataghena ti ettha vicitrakataghena ti atthaJ11
vadanti, taJ11 na gahetabbaJ11, idha cittasaddassa
hadayavacakatta cittikatva SUI)atha me ti ahacca piqiyaJ11
vi ya . . . citte kata111 cittikatan ti attho yeva gahetabbo );
- -aJ11, adv., ? with respect; showing respect; D 11
357,7 (sakkacca111 danaJ11 datva sahattha danaJ11 datva
-aJ11 danaJ11 datva, Be, Ce so; E e, Se citti-); -
neg. acitt!kata, acittikata, mfn., l. not respected or
honoured; not valued; belittled; Vin IV 6,17 (hl!itaJ11
paribhiita111 acittlkataJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee acitti-; Se acit!-;
Sp 739,2: acittlkatan ti na garukataJ11, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
acit!katan ti) f::- Vibh 2,21 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se acit!-);
Mil 229,23 (hi!ito khijito garahito paribhiito acittlkato,
Be, Ce so; E e, Se acitti- ); - acitt!kataJ11, adv., without
respect, not showing respect; D 11 356,2 (asakkacca111
dana111 datva ... acitt!kataJ11 dana111 datva, Be, Ce so; E e,
Se acitti-; Sv 814,18: citt!karavirahitaJ11, na citt!kiiraJ11 pi
paccupaghapetva na p~!tacittaJ11 katva adasi); -
2. being without respect; PsI 169,22 (raja-
rajamahamattadihi sakkato garukato acariyupajjhayesu
acitt!kato caramano); - fpp cittikatabba, mfn. to be
respected, thought highly of, ? Sadd 876,8 (ayaJ11 n!ti
purima vi ya sukhuma vaca pi -a).
cittita, mfn., pp of citteti qv.
cittikaral}a, n. [from citta2 + karoti; S. citrikar~a],
making variegated; decorating; Sadd 523,23 (liilga -e:
-aJ11 vicitrabhavakar~aJ11).
cittikara, cittikara, m. [from cittikaroti qv], honouring,
respect; thinking highly of, Th 589 (buddhesu
sagaravata dhamme apaciti yathabhiitaJ11 sailghe ca citti-
karo, etaJ11 sam~assa patiriipaJ11, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -o,
unmetrical; Th-a 11 252,19: ariyasailghe -o sakkaro
sammananaJ11); Vism 123,12 (anisa111sadassavi ratana-
sanm hutva -aJ11 upatthapetva sampiyayamano);
Sp 1315,15 (yo theranavamajjhimesu -aJ11 na
paccupaghapeti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se citti-); Ps V 68,22
(pacchima janata sailghe hi -arp. uppadetva cattaro
paccaye databbe maññissati, Be, Se so; Ce, E e citti-);
Spk I 349,15 (mahajano pi rajagataJ11 -aJ11 pahaya
paccekabuddham eva olokesi, Be, Ce, E e so; Se citti-);
Pj I 171,8 (Asokamaharaja sakalaJambudipe caturasiti
viharasahassani patinhapesi ko pana vado aññesarp.
-anaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se citti-); Mhv 38:28 (cittikarena
theramhi bhattarp. pakkhippa bhiimiyarp. bhuñji); -
acittikara, acittikara, m., lack of respect; disrespect;
belittling; Vibh 371,9 (agaravata appatissavata
anadda ... -o idaJ11 vuccati anadariyaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee
144 cinati
ac1tt1-; Se aciti-); Vism 108,15 (ye -ena yagubhattarp.
cha<;l<;lenta vi ya parivisanti); Ps 11 73,21 (taJ11 pi na
aññatukamataya -en' eva pucchati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
acitti-); Mp III 291,5 (acitt!katva den ti -ena agaravena
deti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acitti-); Cp-a 307,9 (na -ena deti);
- --kata, mfn., lacking respect; showing disrespect;
Nidd I 228,12 (ekacco sailghagato --kato there bhikkhii
ghagayanto pi titthati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se acitti-; Nidd-a I
337,8: --kato ti bahumanakiriyarahito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr accittikarakato) =Vism 18,14.
citteti, cittayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. citrayati, Wg § 35:63],
l. makes variegated; decorares; paints; Sadd 541,8 (citta
cittakar~e . . . cittakaral)arp. vicittabhavakar~aJ11: -eti
-ayati cittaJ11); - absol. cittayitva, Mhv 32:6 (lakha-
kailkughakeh' etaJ11 -ayitva sucittitaJ11); - 2. throws a
momentary glance; Sadd 541,8 (citta cittakar~e
kadacidassane pi: . . . -eti -ayati); - pp cittita, mfn.
[S. citrita], made variegated, made diverse; decorated,
painted; S III 151,27 (tarp. .. . car~a111 nama cittaJ11
citten' eva -aJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se cintitaJ11; Spk 11
327,24joll.: citten' eva -an ti cittakarena cintetva katatta
cittena -arp. nama, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cintitaJ11 nama);
152,4 (te ... tiracchanagata pal)a citten' eva -a, Be, Ce
so; Ee cittata, prob. wr; Se cintita; Spk 11 327,28:
kammacitten' eva -a); Vv 63:28 (ur' assa muttahi
m~ihi -o); Th 736 (naravlrakatarp. vaggu111 samuggam
iva -arp.); Ap 33,18 (katvana hammiyaJ11 tattha
talapantihi -aJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se katvana agghiyarp.;
Ap-a 266,18: -aJ11 sobhitarp.); V v-a 277,4 (rajihi 1ekhahi
-a vicittabhavaJ11 gata, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cittibhavaJ11
gata); Bv 13:34 (pavacanarp. arahantehi -aJ11, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se cittakaJ11);- sucittita, mfn., well-painted; Thi 390
(dinha hi maya sucittita sombha darupillakani va;
Thi-a 239,11: hatthapadamukhadi-akarena sughu cittita
viracita); Mhv 32:6.
citya, f [ts], a layer or piling up (of wood or bricks);
Ja VI 204,16* (ete ca aññe ca naga mahanta -a kata
yaññakarehi-m-ahii; 204,24' foll.: ighakahi cinapetva
asanani karesi, tada -a asanapithika brahm~anarp.
anubhavena va<;l<;lhitva ... pabbata jata, Be, Ce so; Se
sayanapithaka; Ee cityavayatapitthika) = 212,22•; 215,32'
(yadisani itthakani gahetva yaññakarehi -a kata).
citra\ see sv citta2.
citra 2, see sv citta4.
citraka, m. [from citra], the speckled antelope; Ja VI
538,4* (akucca pacalaka ca -a capi dipiyo; 538,2s-:
citramiga ca dipimiga ca, Ce, Ee so; Be citrakamiga; Se
vicitramiga).
citrasayitva in E e and citra sayitva in Ce at Ja V 241 ,25*
are prob. wrr, perhaps for vitrasayitva; Be utrasayitva;
Se hantva sayitva.
cinana, n. [from cinati], heaping up; accumulating; Mp 11
161,9 (amisassa -a111 va<;l<;lhanarp. amisasannicayo).
cinanaka, mfn. [cinana + ka2], who piles up, constructs;
- ifc see pakara-.
cinapaj:a in Ee at Sp 1104,12 is wr for cinapaga (Be, Ce
so).
cinati, cinoti,pr. 3 sg. [vb 1; S. cinoti], heaps up, piles up;
constructs; accumulates; Dhatup 496 (ci caye);
Dhatum 716; Ja 11 302,5 (dve pitaputta najakara ki1añjarp.
cinayati
-anti, Be, Ce, Ee so, but prob. wr for vinanti; Se
vlnanti); VI 432,2 (pakar~ -anti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
acinanti); Sp 570,24 (parpsurp uddharati -ati, Be, Ce so;
Ee cinati ti; Se minan ti); 1276,2s (pamad~ -atl ti
anucÜp)O, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce anucinati ti); Spk II 296,21
(apacinati no acinatl ti vagarp vinaseti n' eva -ati);
As 63,34 (javanavlthivasena attano santanarp -otl ti
citt~); Sadd 493,24 (ci caye, l)akarassa nakarattarp,
pakararp -oti); 495,23 (ci caye: puññ~ -ati pakar~
-ati); - part.pr. cinanta, mf( -anti)n., Ap-a 265,34foll.
(aggirp -antl janata ti janasamuha ajahanatthaya aggirp
-anta rasirp karonta, eds so, ad Ap 33,10: eds
udaggacittajanata); As 214,11 (purise ... pakar~ -ante,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se upacinante); - inf ciniturp, V in II
117,17 (anujanami bhikkhave -iturp tayo caye
ighakacayarp silacayarp darucayan ti); Sp 1207,26; -
absol. (a) cinitva, Vin II 159,33 (cikkhallarp madditva
ighakayo -itva ku99e ughapesi); Ja VI 432,6 (itthakahi
-itva); Ap 94,11 (-itva puññasañcayarp, Ce, Se so; Be
va99hetva; Ee vinditva); Sp 1044,25 (kutantar~ -itva
va puretva va); Sv 631,32 (pokkhara!firp otaritva ... anta
pasa!fehi -itva bahi ka!ftakavatilp parikkhipitva);
Patis-a 507,26 (tagika ti talapa!f!fadlhi -itva kata; =
Nidd-a256,11: eds vinitva); (b)cinitvana, Ap99,12
(ighakahi -itvana cailkamaip karayirp ahaip); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. ciyati, -ate, is accumulated; increases; D II
136,22* (sarpyamato veraip na -ati) = Ud 85,21*; MI
338,28* (karoto -ati pap~) = Th 1207 (Be, Ce -ate; Ee,
Se wr miyyate); Sn 428 (pahutarp -ate puññarp); Ja V
7,14* (na -atl tassa narassa pap~; 7,n·: evarüpassa
narassa paparp na -ati na va99hati); - pp cita, mfn.
and n., -a,f [ts] l. (mfn.) (i) heaped, piled up; built;
accumulated; Vin Il 159,34 (tena akusalakena -a vailka
bhitti paripati); D Il 178,27 (pokkharal)lyo ... ighakahi
-a ahesurp); A IV 402,27 (y ato kho avuso bhikkhuno
cetasa cit~ hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cetasa citt~
paricitarp hoti; Mp IV 191,14: cittavarapariyayena
cittavarapariyayo -o va99hito hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
cittacarapariyayena cittacarapariyayo ); Spk III 251,16
(paricita ti samantato -a suva99hita); Pj I 221,31
(cayitabban ti cetiyarp ... --tta va cetiyarp); As 44,2o
( -arp -arp ighak~ viddharpsayamano puriso viya);
63,35 (vipak~ kammakilesehi -an ti cittarp, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr cittan ti); Mhv 30:51 (pupphadhanattayarp
thupe ighakahi -~ -aip samarp pathaviya katva);
Sadd 493,24 (-arp kusalarp); 495,25 (-o pakaro ); -
-' -antar~sa, mfn., whose back is flat ( ie not hollow)
between the shoulder-blades (one of the 32
characteristics of a mahapurisa); D II 18,13 (ayarp ...
kumaro -'-antararpso); M II 136,26 (-'-antararpso kho
pana so bhavarp Gotamo; Ps III 380,2: antararpsmp
vuccati dvinnarp koganarp antar~. t~ citarp
paripU!flf~ assa ti -'-antar~so);- (ii) covered; Ja III
468,10* (-o bhanumata-m-iva, Ce, E e so; Be thito
bhál)umata-m-iva; Se thito bha!fumakasi va; 469,6· foil.:
vltaccikailgarehi samanta parikil)l)O viya sarire utthitena
maha9ahena 9ayhanto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee parikil)l)e);
Vv-a 182,27 (hemajalehi kumbhalailkaradibhedehi
hatthalailkarehi -arp amutt~ ... gajarp, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee citt~); - 2.lf.n.) apile; a funeral pyre; Abh 405
145 cintanaka
(citako -a); M II 73,7* (-arp samadhaya tato 9ahanti, Ce
so; Be, Ee, Se samadaya) = Th 779 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
samodhaya); Ap 98,14 (suphull~ padumarp gayha -am
aropayirp aharp, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce citakam; Ap-a 372,29:
-~ citakarp aropayirp puje sin ti attho ); 227,4 (-~
katvan' aharp tada sañrarp tattha jhapesirp); 406,25 (-es u
kayiramanesu, Ce so; Ee kiramanesu; Be citasu
kurumanasu; Se citakesu kurumanesu); - citass' in Ee
at Thi 67 is wr for cittass' (Be, Ce, Se so);- citatta in
Ee at Cp-a 28,34 is prob. wr; read
sakkharavalikanicitatta with Be, Ce, Se;
1 (b) ceyya, mfn., Sadd 847,19
fpp (a) cetabba , mfn.,
(cetabbarp ceyy~); (e) cinitabba, mjn., Sp 570,28
(ighakahi cinitabbaya iqhakarp acinati dukkatarp, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee cinitabbayarp); Ap-a 344,21 (upari
cinitabban~ itthakanarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
upacinitabban~); - caus. pr. 3 sg. ciniipeti, -ayati,
Mil 81,14 (parikh~ kha!fapeyyatha pakaraip -eyyatha);
- aor. 3 sg. cinapayi, Mhv 35: 119 (Abhayuttaramaha-
thuparp vaMhapetva -ayi); - absol. (a) cinapetva,
Ja VI 204,24' (it!hakahi -etva asanani karesi); Sp 88,19
(vatthurp -etva); (b) cinapetvana, Mhv 17:35 (sukkha-
kaddamakha!f9ehi -etvana t~sam~); - see also
ceta(r).
ciniiyati, pr. 3 sg. [for *jinayati, S. v]ña ? cf -jina < -jña],
regards, considers; Sadd 401,12 (cine maññanayarp: ...
-ati ocinayati ... ocinayatü ti avamaññatü ti); - se e
also ocinayati.
cintaka, mfn. [ts], (one) who thinks or reflects on; Ja V
375,18' (atthacintaka ti paticchannan~ atthanarp -a);
Ps IV 80,1 (asappurisacintl ti asappurisacintaya -o);
Ap-a430,19 (ajjhay~ karotl ti ajjhayako -o ti attho);-
2
ifc see akkhara- (sv akkhara\ attha- (sv attha ), nHi-;-
0
-jiitika, mfn., being by nature one who thinks; having a
disposition to thought or reflection; Ps II 78,29 (cetaso ti
-o); Pj II 461,18 (kusalo --taya); - acintaka, mfn.
[cf cinta], without anxious thoughts, without ca re; Pj II
82,21 (ma cintaya, ehi gacchama ti, kumaro naharp
cintemi, -o 'mhi jato ti ah a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se different).
cintana, n., -a, f (and mj[ -i]n. ?) [cf S. cintana, cinta], l.
(n.f) thinking, reflecting upon; thought; anxious
thought; Dhatum 808 (cinta -e); Ja I 211,16· (tarp tassa
domanassappattaya -arp m~ badhati ti); Ap 44,26 (yo
koci vinaye pañharp pucchati buddhasavako tattha me
-a natthi; Ap-a 287,23: me mayharp -a vimati kailkha
natthi); Sv 532,13 (gihínarp ayya sukhi hontu avera
avyapajjha ti -~ mett~ manokamm~ nama); PsI
156,21 (ko ettha anis~so ti gamikan~ -~ viya);
II 138,21 (na aññamaññarp -a va sammantana va ahosi);
IV 218,21 (-~ cintayati); Dhp-a IV 95,4 (tass' eva
dhammassa punappuna --taya dhamm~ anu-
vicintayarp) =It-a II 91,27 (Ce -ato; Be, Se vicintanato;
Ee wr cintanto) = Th-a III 119,14 (Ce, Ee -ena; Be, Se
vicintanena); Sadd 537,17 (cinta -a cintanako); 849,17
(-arp cinta); - ifc se e dhamma- (sv dhamma\ -
2. (mjn.) thinking, reflecting upon; Ja III 499,18' (esa
nipu!fa sadhunarp atthanarp -I pañña, Ce, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be, Se cintini);- ifc see sadhu-.
2
cintanaka, mfn. (and n. ?) [cintana + ka ], thinking about;
caring about, anxious for; Ja I 222,3 (pathamakappikato
cintan a
paghaya macchana~ -bako nama natthi, Be, Ce, Ee so;
0
Se cintanabako); Patis-a 388,6 (aniccadlna~ -vasena
0
cinta, yassa uppajjati t~ aniccad!ni cintapetl ti pi
cinta); Sadd 537,17 (cinta cintana -o).
cintanii, f, se e sv cintana.
cintanto in Ee atlt-aii 91,27 is wr, prob.forcintan ato (Ce
so; Be, Se vicintanato).
cinta, f [ts], thought, reflection; meditation; anxious
thought, worry; Abh 171 (-a tu jhanam uccate );
Dhatup 401 (jha -ay~); 577 (cinta -aya~); S V 418,23
(n' esa bhikkhave -a atthasa~hita); Th 726 (sama1.1assa
ahü -a; Th-a III 20,s: -a ti dhammacinta
dhammavicar~a); Ja I 32,11 (ta~sa sa -a ... devarañño
pal.19ukambalasi1asanassa u1.1habhava~ janesi); V 384,26
(sami p~9uv~1.1o si jato kinnu te kaci -a atthi udahu
raja te kupito ... ); Nidd I 45,2 (pañña . . . nepuñña~
vebhavya -a upaparikkha bhüri medha) = Patis I 119,7
(Patis-a 388,6 foil.: aniccadin~ cintanakavasena -a,
yassa uppajjati ta~ aniccadini cintapeti ti pi -a) f.
Dhs 16 f. Vibh 250,27; Pet 234,3 (sutena sutamayi-
paññ~ pati1abhati -aya cintamayipañña~ bhavanaya
bhavanamayipañña~ pati1abhati, Be, Ce so; Ee -aya
cintamayi dighiya bhavanamaylpañña~ pati1abhati,
prob. wr); Sp 180,32 (ekabhikkhussa pi -a va vighato va
natthi); Ps II 137,2 (atha me ima~ temas~ ... dan~
datu~ na labhissaml ti -a uppanna ti); III 411,11 (na
ettha -a katabba ti ma1.1ava~ upatthambhento ima~
desanaJ.!l arabhi); Saddh 165 (kinnu me pillaka atthi iti
-a pi natthi va); 216 (cittassopakkilesan~ ya -a
patipakkhika); - ifc see akkhara- (sv akkhara\ appa-,
dhamma- (sv dhamma\ 1oka-, sakatika-; -
0
-kavi, m.
2 part.pr. (a) cintenta, mj( -entj)n., M II 140,1 (sabbaloka-
[cinta + kavi ], one who produ¡·es a poem after
(considerable) thought; A II 230,12 (-i sutakavi
atthakavi patibhanakavi; Mp III 211,9: yo cintetva
kavyaJ.!l karoti, aya~ -i nama); -
0
-maJ,li, m.f,
0
-m~ika, m., "thought-gem" , l. a magic gem giving al!
one's desires; Dhp-a III 92,18; V v-a 32,9
(puññakamma~ nama --sadis~ kapparukkhasadisaJ.!l);
Bv-a 293,3 (-i viya sabbakamadado ahaJ.!l pi); - 2. a
kind of magic power (esp. to know the thoughts of
others); Ja III 504,26 (aha~ eka~ -i~ nama vijja~
janami); Sv 389,23; Spk I 131,4 (--vijjadini ugga1.1hitva;
Spk-t [Be] I 171,1o: --vijja nama paracittajanapanavijja,
sa Kevagasutte m~ika ti agata); Mp II 271,29
( -m~ikavijj~ jananta pi hi agacchantam eva disva
0 nanappakarehi -ayato pi sukhumatthadhigamo na hotl
ay~ idaJ.!l nama vitakkento agacchati ti pajananti); -
0
-maya, mf(-a, -J)n., produced by thinking, by
reflection; D Ili 219,5 (tisso pañña, -a pañña sutamaya
pañña bhavanamaya pañña); Ja VI 43,26* (na hi -a
bhoga itthiya purisassa va; 44,7·: sattan~ hi bhoga
cintaya anipphajjanato -a nama na honti); Vibh 325,3
dhammanijjhanakhantiJ.!l parata assutva
(ya~ . . .
patilabhati, ayaJ.!l vuccati -a pañña); Pet 72,6 (tisso ima
bhikkhave pañña sutamayl -I bhavanamayi); 186,s (yo
samadhi pubbaparanimittabhaso anomagatitaya yatha-
kamo ay~ -I pañña); Nett 8,6foll. (ya vima~sa tulana
upaparikkha manasanupekkhana aya~ -I pañña ...
paccattasamughita yonisomanasikara -I pañña);
Vism 439,13 (attano cintavasena nipphannatta -a).
cintiipana, n. [from cintapeti, caus. of cinteti qv], causing
146 cinteti
to think; Sadd 698,2o (sarattho nama uttamattho o• -attho
va).
cinti(n), mfn. [S. -cintin], thinking, reflecting; thinking of;
anxious; Ja Ili 499,1s- (esa nipu1.1a sadhüna~ atthana~
-ini pañña, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cintan!, perhaps wr); - ifc
see ajjhatta- (sv ajjhatt~). appa-, eka-, duccintita-
(sv cinteti), sadhu-, sucintita- (sv cinteti).
cinteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cintayati], thinks, reflects;
thinks about, considers ( + acc. or gen.); thinks
seriously; is anxious (about), worries; Dhatup 577 (cinta
cintayam); Dhatum 808; DI 137,3o (patibalo atitanagata-
paccuppanne atthe -etu~); SI 229,14 (Sakko ...
sahassa~ pi atthanaJ.!l muhuttena -eti); V 418,15 (ma
bhikkhave papakaJ.!l akusal~ citta~ -eyyatha); 447,1
(lokacinta~ -essaml ti); Sn 717 (allnacitto ca siya na
capi bahu -aye); Th 111 (yutta~ -etu~ satatam
aniccatta~); Jai 221,3o (amhakaJ.!l ki~ -esi ayya ti);
V 350,z· (ma bhonto -ayantu); VI 389,6· (mukhena
aññaJ.!l katheti hadayena aññaJ.!l -eti); Cp 2:3:3 (ya~ so
v~1.1aJ11 -ayati . . . tassa cittanuvattento homi
cintitasannibho ); Kv 314,3o (tena cittena ta~ citt~
-eti); Mil 233,26 (bhisakko sallakatto . . . ev~ -ayati
kena nu kho upakkamena . . . imassa vyadhi
vüpasameyya ti); 406,6 (sappo manusse disva tappati
socati -ayati); Ps II 418,1o (jhayantl ti -ayanti); Dhp-a I
294,16 (sacah~ kiñci ayutt~ -ayissami); Pj II
82,2ojoll. (ma -aya, ehi gacchama ti, kumaro nah~
-emi, acintako 'mhi jato ti aha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
d(fferent); Pv-a 116,2 (anattha~ manasa pi na -eyya na
piheyya); As 112,13 (aramman~ -en ti cittan ti);
Saddh 289; Sadd 537,17 (cinta cintaya~: -eti -ayati);-
hitam eva so bhav~ Gotamo -ento nisinno hoti); S V
448,15joll. (-enta ca kho tumhe bhikkhave id~
dukkhan ti -eyyatha); Jai 221,29 (tumhak~ -ento
nisinno 'mhl ti); Ap 390,23 (-ento jinasasana~); PsI
223,4; Cp-a 93,11 (Maddidevl .. . -en ti); Vibh-a 106,15
(ettaka no ñataka ettaka bhoga nagha ti -entan~
balavadomanassaJ.!l uppajjati); - neg. acintenta, mfn.,
Ja VI 353,5 (kiJ11 pa1.19ita cintita te pañho ti mayi
acintente añño ko cintessati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acintite,
prob. wr); Vv-a 121,11 (sa ... yuttayutt~ acintentl);
(b) cintaya(t), mfn., Kv 414,3; Ps II 364,32 (raho
msmnassa -ayato); Sadd 537,24 (duppaññassa hi
ti); (e) cintayanta, 1~/( -ayantl)n., Sn 834 (manasa
ditthigatani -ayanto); Ja III 59,23 (sa ... -ayantl);
VI 127,5*; Cp 1:9:14 (sabhav~ -ayantassa akampitaJ11);
Vism 313,2 (ay~ nu kho maggo udahu ayan ti -ayanto
atthasi); Saddh 162; - neg. acintayanta, mfn., Ja I
435,9* (nacintayanto puriso vises~ adhigacchati);
(d) cintayamana, cintiyamana, mfn., A II 179,10
(sabbalokahitam eva -ayamano -eti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr cintamano); Ja VI 384,22* (kiJ11 -ayamano dummano
si); Sp 1379,21 (aññavihito ti aññ~ -ayamano); Ps II
400,11; Ud-a 210,10 (yatharuci cintiyamano pi, eds so);
- aor. 3 sg. (a) cintesi, Ja I 279,7 (aya~ pasa1.1o idani
uccataro khayati, ki~ nu kara1.1an ti -esi); Mi19,16;
Vism 90,16; Spk I 28,12; Mhv 28:7; (b) cintayi, Vin I
266,16*; Sp 216,26; Mhv 28:3 (iti -ayi);
cinte ti
3 pl. (a) cintesmp, Ja I 149,28 (manussa -esurp); Sv 8,16;
Dhp-a I 134,10; (b) acintesurp, Ja II 420,18' (jaraggava
acintesurp, Se so; Be, Ce vicintesum; Ee jaraggavasa
-esurp); (e) cintayirpsu, Ja III 514,5; Sv 854,34; Ps II
161,26 (te kira evarp -ayirpsu); III 423,26; (d) acintayurp,
Sn 258 (bahü deva manussa ca manga1ani acintayurp);
- absol. (a) cintetva, Ja V 379,10; Ap 302,14; Mil 3,14;
Sp 199,13; Cp-a 32,8 (Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr cintentva);-
neg. acintetva, Ja V 378,17* (Sumukho ca acintetva
vissaji pharusarp girarp; 379,4·: mama imarp
gul)asampattirp acintetva); Vism 299,24; Mp III 49,7;
(b) cintayitva, D II 209,6 (yen' atthena deva ... honti
sannipatita, tarp attharp -ayitva tarp attharp mantayitva);
Ja V 380,23* (sabbarattirp -ayltva mantayitva
yathatatharp. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ayitvana); Mil 309,21
(yoniso -ayitva); Sv 8,2o; - neg. acintayitva, Dhp-a I
296,2; II 236,10 (tapaparihanirp acintayitva); Mhv 28:44;
(e) cintayitvana, Ap 38,21; Bv 2:27; Cp 1:8:11;
Vism 49,1*; (d) cintiya, Mhv 7:17 (imaya khalu bhacca
me gahita nü ti -iya); - pp cintita, mfn. and n. [ts],
l. (mfn.) thought, thought of; imagined; reflected upon;
thought out; Vin I 5,30' (paturahosi Magadhesu pubbe
dhammo asuddho sama1ehi -o) = MI 168,26*; Vin V
216,7 (pañha m' esa kusalehi -a); S III 151,27 (tarp ...
caral)arp nama cittarp citten' eva cintitarp, Ee, Se so: Be,
Ce cittitarp); Ja V 71,18* (tarp tena papadhammena
paparp papena -arp); Ap 495,24 (evarp pavacanarp tassa
arahantehi -arp); 550,5 (aho samma upayo te -o 'yam
arindama); Mil 83,6 (iilgha tvarp maharaja Kalasigamam
cintehl ti -o bhante ti); Nidd-a I 286,3o (-an ti
vlmarpsitarp); - ifc see brahma-; - 2. (n.) what is
thought or thought about; thought, reflection; Ja I
435,10* ( -assa phalarp pass a; 435,13·: idani pana maya
--kammassa phalarp passa); IV 270,3* (acintitarp pi
bhavati -am pi vinassati); 451 ,1* (anisamma katam
kammarp anavatthaya -arp); - --cintita, mfn. and n.,
variously thought of; whatever is thought of, Spk III 41,9
(manena me --cintitassa alabho nama n' atthl ti, Be, Ce,
Se so; E e vamena me ... alabho nama natthi va ti, prob.
wr); Dhp-a I 204,5 (ayarp devaraja amhehi --cintitam
sabbarp deti); 303,3 (upadharento tena --cintitam
sabbarp ñatva); - acintita, mfn., not thought of; not
imagined; A 11 83,s• (in uddana); Ja IV 270,3* (acintitarp
pi bhavati cintitarp pi vinassati) = VI 43,25*; -
duccintita, mfn. and n., wrongly thought; a bad or
foolish thought; Ja V 224,s· (duccintitarp etarp tassa);
Ps IV 210,13 (duccintitam eva cinteti); - duccintita-
cinti(n), mfn., thinking bad or foolish thoughts; M IIT
163,9 (balo duccintitacintl ca hoti dubbhasitabhasl
dukkarakammakarl) = A I 102,2o (Mp 11 169,21 foll.:
duccintitacintl ti cintayanto abhijjhavyapadamiccha-
dassanavasena duccintitam eva cinteti); Pj li 249,21
(etarp evarp nanavidhakul)apabharitarp pi kayarp
duccintitacintl balo subhato maññati); - sucintita, mfn.
and n., well or cleverly thought; a good thought; Ja I
434,14 (tena sucintitena mutto ); II 183,4* (sarhassa
sarheyyam idarp sucintitarp); Mp I 156,27 (amhakarp
ubhinnarp pi sucintitarp); - sucintitacinti(n), mfn.,
thinking good thoughts; M III 170,20 (pal)<;lito
sucintitacintl ca hoti subhasitabhasl sukatakammakarl) =
147 cipita
A I 102,31;- fpp (a) cintetabba, mfn. and n. impers., to
be thought about; to be imagined; within the scope of
thought; there must be thought; (one) must be
concerned about; Vin IV 142,19 (paripañhitabban ti -arp
tulayitabbarp); A 11 80,17 (buddhanarp ... buddhavisayo
acinteyyo na -o); Ja V 380,25' (yarp kiñci attharp tehi
saddhirp -arp ca mantetabbarp ca); Mi1212,16
(bhikkhuna... -arp); Ps III 348,23 (sappicariya
bhinnapaccaya na -an ti); Sadd 137,1o* (idarp tu
sukhumarp rhanarp -arp punappunarp);
neg. acintetabba, ~n;fn., Pj I 61,5 (acintetabbarp cinten ti);
(b) cintayitabba, (mf)n., impers., Mi1406,9 (yogina ...
tappitabbarp socitabbarp cintayitabbarp, pamadena me
divaso vltinamito, na so puna sakka laddhun ti);
(e) cintanlya, mfn., Pañca-g 111 (maccurogajara tv eva
cintanlyarp idarp tayarp); Sadd 36,2 (yatha attho saddena
saddo e' atthena na virujjhati tathatthasadda cintanlya);
- neg. acintanlya, mfn., Pj II 154,16 (acintanlyarp va
ettha kiiral)arp buddhavisayo eso ti);
(d) neg. acinteyya, mfn., l. not to be thought about;
unimaginable; A 11 80,17 (buddhanarp bhikkhave
buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo yarp cintento
ummadassa vighatassa bhagl assa; cfMp III 108,19:
acinteyyanl ti cinteturp ayuttani); Ps III 85,1 (iddhimato
iddhivisayo acinteyyo); It-a I 142,13 (buddhanarp
bhagavantanarp ñal)assa acinteyyata); Vv-a 323,16
(acinteyyena buddhanubhavena); Ap-a 339,11
(acinteyyatta iddhivisayassa); 2. unforeseeable,
unexpected; Sadd 415,26 (acinteyyo hi niruttinayo);
510,17 (acinteyyo hi pa¡inayo yebhuyyena
saddasatthanayavidhuro ca, so read? cf510,fn d);
(e) neg. acintiya, mfn., unthinkable, beyond thought;
unimaginable; Th 967; Ap 6,15joll. (evarp acintiya
buddha buddhadhamma acintiya acintiyesu pasannanarp
vipako hoti acintiyo; Ap-a 114,13: acintiya cinteturp
asakkul)eyya); 319,29 (thamo yassa acintiyo);
Mil l88,2s foll. (iddhimato iddhivisayo pi kammavipako
pi dve acintiya, acintiyena acintiyarp apanayitabbarp);
Sadd 77,15 (dissamano pi tav' assa rüpakayo acintiyo);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. cintiipeti, -ayati, Sp 770,36 (lamakato
va -entl ti); Paris-a 388,7 (yassa uppajjati tarp aniccadlni
-etl ti pi cinta); 623,17 (nijjhapetl ti -eti); Sadd 537,1s
(cinta cintayarp: ... karite -eti -ayatl ti rüpani); - see
also acintita(r).
cinto in Ee at Ps Ill 168,18 is perhaps wr; or read so
evarpcinto pi; Ce evarp citto pi; Be, Se evarp cintetva pi.
cipifa, mfn. [ts; cf AMg cipi<;!a, cimi<;lha], blunted;
flattened, flat; Ja VI 185,25 (khuddako vago -o eka-
phal)O dviphal)o . . . odato mañjeHhako hohi, so read ?
Ce, Ee vippito; Be vammito; Se khippito; = Cp-a 121,14:
eds viphal)O ); Sadd 922,3 (-o cipuro .. . mattabhedo
'yarp); - 0 -niisa, 0 -niisika, ~n;fn., flat-nosed; Sp 1029,9
(atimahantanasiko va atikhuddakanasiko va 0 -nasiko va,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se vipiranasiko); Vin-vn 2499 (mahanaso
atikhuddakanasiko tatha o -naso va naro );
0
-virüpaniisika, mfn., with a flat and ugly nose;
Vv-a 222,31 (-a paril)atadarha lohitakkha);
0
-hanuka, mfn., blunt-jawed; Sp 1029,3o (dlghahanuko
va -o va antopaviqhena viya atirassena hanukena
samannagato, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se vipirahanuko);
 cipitaka
Vin-vn 2505 (-o va pi rassena han una yuto, Be so; E e
cippitahanuko ).
cipip!ka, mfn., [cipita + ka2], blunted; flat; -
0
-virüpanasa, mfn., with a flat and ugly nose;
Bv-a 143,28 (so yakkho . . . visamavirüpakutilabh!ma-
datho -o kapilapharusad!ghakeso ).
ciputa, mfn. [cf S. lex. ciputa], blunted; flat; Sadd 922,3
(cipito -o ... mattabhedo 'yaiTI).
cippiyamana, mfn. [cfBHS cipyamana], being crushed;?
Mil 261,28 (yadi maharaja udakaiTI j!veyya mahantan~
hatthinagan~ . . . kucchiiT~ pavesayantanaiTI t~ pi
udakaiTI tesaiTI dantantare -~ saddayeyya, Be, Ee so;
Ce khip!yaman~; Se p!JiyamanaiTI); 261,3o (tahi
[mahanavahi] pi -aiTI udakaiTI saddayeyya, Be, Ee so;
Ce khipiyamanaiTI; Se p!JiyamanaiTI)·
cippitahanuka, see sv cipita.
cimili, f [= cimilika qv], an (under-)mat of strips of
cloth; ? Vin-vn 1064 ( -iiT~ tagik~ cammaiTI ...
abbhokase thapetva).
cimilika, cilimika, f [cf BHS cilimilika, ciliminika;
AMg cilimii.ll, cilimiliga, cilimill], a strip of cloth; an
(under-)mat of strips of cloth;? Vin II 150,14 (co)akaiTI
uppannaiTI hoti ... anujanami bhikkhave -aiTI katun ti,
Be, Se so; Ce cilimika; E e cilimik~); IV 40,26 (-aiTI va
uttaratthar~~ va ... ajjhokase santharitva, Be, E e, Se
so; Ce cilimikaiTI; Sp 775,34: -a nama sudhadi-
parikammakataya bhumiya v~J)anurakkh~atth~ kata
hoti, taiTI hettha pattharitva upari katasarakaiTI
pattharanti, Be, Se so; Ee -~ nama; Ce cilimika nama);
Sp 666,26 (bhummatthar~an ti ... -ahi kata-atthar~aiTI,
Be, Ce so; Se vilimikahi; Ee -ahi katva attharanti;
Sp-t [Be] Il 403,1: -ah! ti patapilotikahi); 884,6 (tiil~
onaddhaiTI ettha ti tiilonaddh~. tiil~ pakkhipitva upari
-aya onaddhan ti vuttaiTI hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
cilimikaya) t Kkh2 244,22 (Be, Ee so; Ce ci)imikaya);
Sp 1110,26 (da)h!kammakar~amattena ti dve -ayo ekato
katva sibbitamattena, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce cilimikayo);
1218,32 (ullok~ akaritva ti hettha -aiTI adatva, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce cilimik~); 1344,19 (dasa senasanan! ti
mañeo . . . bimbohan~ -a uttarattharal)~ ...
til)asantharo p~l)asantharo ti, eds so); Ps II 215,5 (-a
cammakh~<;lo til)asantharo pal)l)asantharo ti id~
santhatasenasan~ nama, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cilimika) =
Mp III 200,12 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cilimika); Pv-a 144,13
(sailkarakutadito paiTlsukiil~ gahetva dhovitva bhisiiTI
ca -~ ca katva bhikkhün~ adasi, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
bhisiñcimillikañ ca); Vin-vn 1070 (bhisi -a).
cira, mfn. (and n.) [ts], l. (mfn.) long, lasting a long time;
Ja II 443,11 * (-~ kho sa karissati; ? 443,23·: sa imaiTI
pavattiiT~ ajanamana mama agaman~ -~ karissati
-aiTI me gatassa piyassa na ca agacchati ti evaiTI
cintes san ti attho ); III 388,7· (-~ kalaiTI saggamhi
dibbasampattiiTI anubhavanta, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
cirakal~); Ap 486,2 (na -en' eva kalena papul)iiTI
asavakkhayaiTI); Vism 127 ,5* (na -en' eva kalena hoti
kassaci appana); Sp 184,17 (-aiTI assa thiti -a va assa
thitl ti ciratthitikaiTI); - ifc see k!va- (sv k!va[t]); -
2. (n.) a long time; delay; Vin I 197,4 (kissa pana tv~
bhikkhu evaiTI -~ akas! ti, -aiTI digho me bhante
kamesu ad!navo, api ca sambadha gharavasa bahukicca
148 cira
bahukar~!ya ti) t Ud 59,29joll.; Sv 143,11 (-aiTI
pabbajitassa assa ti cirapabbajito); Mp IV 19,7 (-aiTI
pabbajitan~ etesan ti cirapabbajita); - acc. ciraiTI,
adv., l.for a long time; Abh 1136 (cirass~ tu -~);
Vin I 43,2o (na bhikkhave so saddo -~ bhavissati,
sattaham eva bhavissati, sattahassa accayena
antaradhayissati); D II 4,4 (yo -~ j!vati so vassasat~
appaiTI va bhiyyo); 225,6 (aho vata marisa so bhagava
appabadho appatailko -~ d!gham addhan~ tittheyya);
M III 243,28 (ayaiTI upekha ... -~ d!gham addhan~
tittheyya); A III 77,1o ( -~ j!va d!ghaiTI ayuiTI paleh! ti);
IV 228,6* (avijjanivuto poso . . . jatimaral)as~saraiTI
-aiTI paccanubhossati); Dhp 248 (ma t~ lobho
adhammo ca -aiTI dukkhaya randhayuiTI); Pv 11:1 O (peta
-~ jhayare <;Iayhamana); JaiV 121,31' (-aiTI t~
datthum icchami, ma pabbaji Yuvañjaya); VI 283,3o*
(-aiTI vi vado mama tuyham assa); 500,28* (-aiTI
dukkhena jhayiss~ suññaiTI agam' imaiTI pur~);
Ap 299,11 (tena kammavipakena niraye saiTlsariiTI -aip);
Pp 32,23 (so ca khvassa kodho -~ d!gharattaiTI anuseti);
Vism 106,2o (vimhayajato viya -~ oloketi); Sp 785,23
(uparüparicchanno hi viharo -~ anovassako hoti ti);
Sadd 900,17 (-aiTI cirassaiTI ice ete d!ghakale);- ifc see
k!va- (sv k!va[t]); - na cir~, naciraiTI, not long; not
for a long time; D II 22,9 (eso ... jil)ryo nama, na dani
tena -~ j!vitabb~ bhavissati ti); III 156,10 (kinti ... na
-aiTI kilisseyyun ti); M III 207,22 (k!vacir~ pabbajito
si ... ti, na -arp avuso, tll)i vassan! ti); SI 238,21* (na vo
cirah~ kujjhami kodho mayi navatitthati); Ja VI 183,5•
(na -~ vedayissasi); Mil88,11 (sace 'h~ bhante
agarasma anagariyaiTI pabbajeyyaiTI na -aiTI j!veyyaiTI
bahu me paccatthika ti); Ps III 107,1 (acirüpasampanno
ti upasampanno hutva na -am eva); - 2. it is a long
time since ... ; (only) a long time ago; Ja IV 161,10 (-aiTI
pita no sura ucchurasena meray~ katva pivissama ti,
Be, Ce so; Ee -~ pi te no süra; Se -~ vata no süra);
Pj II 531,24 (-aiTI digho si putta maya ti, E e, Se so; Be,
Ce ciradigho); - 3. over a long time; after a long time;
Ja VI 441,7• (ma no raja Brahmadatto -~ dukkhena
marayi); - na cir~. naciraiTI, not after a long time;
soon; D II 114,3o (na -aiTI tathagatassa parinibban~
bhavissati) = A IV 311 ,25; Ap 559,26 (pabbajitvana na
-aiTI arahatt~ apapul)iiTI); - ciraiTI in Ee at D III
172,23 is wr for giraiTI (Be, Ce, Se so); and at Ap 85,25
(kantaiTI ciraiT~) is prob. wr; Be, Ce kantaiTI piy~; Se
kantayidaiTI; - instr. cirena, adv., after a long time;
after too long a time; late; Abh 1136; Vin I 96,19 (so
tassa methunarp dhammaiTI patisevitva -ena agamasi,
bhikkhü ev~ ahaiTISU kissa tvaiTI avuso evaiTI -~
akas! ti); III 249,8 (vissaritva -ena satiiTI patilabhitva);
IV 86,24 (kissa tvaiTI avuso -ena gamaiTI pil)<;laya
pavisas! ti); Ja VI 212,27' (na itthaka honti sila -ena pi);
Sp 345,21 (yo pi -ena me udakavaro bhavissati, idaiTI ca
sass~ mi!ayat! ti); PsI 119,17 (dhammasavan~ -ena
hot! ti tato . . . dhammasavanadivas~ thapesuiTI);
III 200,6 (vasatelamakkhitapilotik a viya -ena sujjhanti);
Dhp-a I 18,16 (pubbe may~ gamanakale -ena gamimha
ti); Cp-a 93,9 (-ena assamaiTI patva); As 239,4
(sakadagamissa kilesa kiñcapi -ena uppajjanti bahala va
hutva uppajjanti); - ifc see k!va- (sv k!va[t]); - na
cira
cirena, nacirena, not after a long time; not long ago;
soon; quiekly; Ja VI 407,s (na -en' eva vo nagaral!l
gahetva dassaml ti); Ap 534,2o (buddho pi nibbutil!l
gacchati na -en' eva aggi viya nirindhano); Vism 282,21
(id~ kammaghan~ manasikaroto kassaci na -en' eva
nimitt~ ca uppajjati); Sv 572,32 (na -ena bhagava
parinibbayissatl ti); Spk I 218,1 (acirapakkantassa ti
pakkantassa sato na -en' eva); Pj I 42,2 (tikkhapaññassa
na -ena bhavana sampajjatl ti); - cirena in Ee at Ps II
259,14 is wr for clrakena (Be, Ce, Se so); -
dat. ciraya, adv., for a long time; Dhp 342 (dukkham
upenti punappun~ -aya); Vv 84:35 (1addha viman~
atu1~ -aya); - ciray' atidiva in Ee at Spk III 38,16 is
wr; Be, Ce, Se kil!l avuso cirayasi, diva hoti; - cirato
[ef S. cirat prabh¡ti ?], for a long time; from a long time
ago; Ja IV 481,8 (ah~ -ato paghaya pabbajitukamo
va); Sv 705,9 (cirapatikahal!l bhante ti -ato ah~, -ato
paghayahal!l dassanakamo ti attho ); Spk II 314,9
(cirapatiko ahal!l, -ato paghaya ahan ti attho; f-
Sp 972,9: cirakalato pat!haya); - gen. cirassa, adv.,
after a long time; at last; Vin I 299,3o (manussa -assapi
thera agata ti saclvarani bhattani ad~su); Ja IV 446,29*
(-assa passami tal!l bhumipa1a, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
-ass~); - ife see klva- (sv klva[t]); - na cirassa,
nacirassa, na cirass' eva, nacirass' eva, l. not long after;
after a short time; soon; Vin I 269,1 (ga1,1ika na -ass'
eva padakkhi1,1a ahosi nacce ca glte ca ... ); DI 220,36
(Mahabrahma na -ass' eva paturahosi); II 35,23 (na
-ass' eva anupadaya asavehi citt~ vimucci); MI 164,25
(ah~ bhikkhave na -ass' eva khippam eva t~
dhammal!l sayal!l abhiñña ... );S IV 302,12 (na -ass' eva
yass' atthaya ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits na); A IV 117,s
(pa1,19upalaso dani paricchattako kovi!aro na -ass' eva
dani sattapalaso bhavissatl ti); Ja V 167,3* (na -assa
nago dibbena me paturahu); Bv 26:23 (ahal!l pi na -ass'
eva ... idh' eva parinibbiss~); Mil 88,1 (ediso acariyo
bhaveyya madiso ca antevas! na -ass' eva PaJ:.l9ito
dhamm~ ajaneyya ti); - 2. not long ago; reeently;
Ja II 165,13 (na -ass' eva me raja dit!ho idan' eva go1,1e
yacitul!l na yuttal!l); Sv 809,6 (bhagava pana tato pubbe
na -ass' eva sudhabhojaniyajatak~ kathesi); PsI 100,7
(acirapakkantassa ti pakkantassa sato na -assa, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se na cirena); Spk I 220,2 (acirapakkante ti ... na
-ass' eva Ve!uvanato Gayasls~ gate);- cirass~, [-1!1
added to make adverbial status clear ?], after a long
time; at last; after so long; it's a long time sine e ... ;
Abh 1136 (-ass~ tu cir~); DI 179,17 (-ass~ kho
bhante bhagava imal!l pariyay~ akasi yadid~ idh'
agamanaya); SI 1,21* (-ass~ vata passami brahmaJ:.lal!l
parinibbut~; Spk I 20,13: -assan ti cirakalassa
accayena ti attho ); A IV 93,12* (ya c!dha disvana patil!l
pamodati sakh! sakhar~ va -assam agat~) = Ja II
348,20* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -assa); Th 868 ( -ass~ vata
me mahito mahesi mahavan~ sama1,1o paccapadi); Ja II
179,18 (kil!l upasaka -ass~ agato si ti); III 528,18*
(-assam abbhagamanal!l hi vo idha); V 23,12* (-ass~
vata me udapadi ajja bhakkho maha sattamibhattakale);
Sadd 900,17 (-~ -assal!l ice ete d!ghakale); - na
cirassal!l, soon; Vin II 195,21 (na -ass~ vata bho nago
nagena sali.gamessatl ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit na); -
149 cira
oacira, mfn., of a long or short time; V v-a 117,1o (ayuno
va --bhav~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cirabhav~); -
0
aciraip, ind., see sv; - oanuvuttha, mfn., living with
for a long time; who has lived with (someone)for a long
time; Ja II 42,w• (na santhaval!l kapurisena kayira ... -o
pi karoti pap~); V 445,9* (-~ pi piy~ ... avasu
kiccesu can~ jahanti);- o• -antaraip, ind.,for a long
time; Ja V 401,18* (tapanti lükhal!l pi tap~ -al!l; 402,3·:
-an ti ciraka1al!l); - o• -iigata, mfn., long returned;
returned after a long time; Ja II 133,20* (pavasa agato
tata idani na -o; 133,23·: so e' amhi idan' eva agato na
-o); V 328,13 (ciravippavuttho te kani!!ho ev~ -~pi
tal!l yacitul!l na visahami); - 0 -kiila, m. and mfn. [cira
+ kala1], a long time; lasting a long time; Spk I 20,13
(cirassan ti -assa accayena ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
cirassa kalassa); Pj II 13,25 (-taya purliJ:.l~ ca ti
sailkhagat~); - aee. -~, adv., for a long time;
Mp III 120,4 (-al!l na pl!eti); It-a I 75,24 (d!gharattan ti
-al!l); Pv-a 19,2 (assa petassa -al!l hitaya atthaya); -
-ato, ind., (from) a long time ago; Ja Il 305,2 (-ato
paghaya na paññayasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cira); Sp 972,9
(cirapatika ti -ato paghaya); Ps II 382,s (-ato pat!haya
imina samannagato, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se aticirakalato);
Ud-a 115,22 (-ato pat!haya ahal!l upasali.kamitukamo );
Pj II 324,16 (-ato pabhuti pavattatta porlil,lo ); - -e, ind.,
for a long time; a long time ago; ? Spk III 234,9
(cirabhasitan ti asukasmil!l thane asukal!l nama me
bhasitan ti, ev~ -e bhasit~); Cp-a 136,1o (-e sayito,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cirakalasayito); 186,16 (aho vata eko
putto uppajjeyya ti ev~ -e patthito);
-abhisamacita, mfn., aeeumulated (for) for a long
time; ? Ud-a 406,11 (sattha attana -aya anupadisesaya
nibbanadhatuya parinibbuto ti, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr;
Be, Se cirakalabhipatthitaya); - 0 -kuttha, n. [cira +
kugha 1], a ehronie skin-disease; or a kind of skin-
disease;? Ps III 218,1 (upahatindriyo ti -ena nama
upahatakayappasado, Ce, Ee so; Be kimirakughena; Se
timirakughena); 0
-kriya, mfn., dilatory, slow;
Abh 727 (d!ghasutto -o); - 0 -!thiina, n., remaining for
a long time; a long-lasting stay; Vism 151,24 (appana-
mattam eva ijjhati na -~); PsI 69,29 (udake -ena
sltibhut~ attano ilrul!l maccho ti cintetva); Ud-a 325,25
(mama -al!l yacissati);- 0 -!thitika, mfn., enduring for
a long time; long-lived; enduring for a longer time;
Vin II 256,11 (sace Ananda nalabhissa matugamo ...
pabbajj~, -~ Ananda brahmacariyal!l abhavissa);
M III 176,15 (raja cakkavattl d!ghayuko ahosi -o ativiya
aññehi manussehi); S V 172,8 (tathagate parinibbute
saddhammo na -o hoti); A I 283,27 (pathaviy~ 1ekha
khipp~ Jujjati vatena va udakena va na -a hoti);
Vv 80:1 (ucce vimanamhi ciraghiHke, E e so, me; Be,
Ce, Se -e); Vism 175,1 (id~ itarehi -al!l hoti); Ps II
122,11 (amhakal!l pi bhagava ah~ na -o, appakehi
sattehi ahal!l di!!ho ... ti); Cp-a 331,34 (d!ghayukata
--ta);- neg. aciraghitika, mfn., Ja III 158,2o (pharusena
nama Jaddh~ issariyal!l acirat!hitik~ hoti); V 507,28*
(tha1e yatha vari janinda vut!h~ anaddhaneyyal!l
acirat!hiHkal!l, Be so, me; E e vag~; Se vughal!l ... na
-~; Ce vagal!l... aciraghitik~); Vism 37,3
(patimokkhasal!lvarasn~ pi anaddhaniy~ hoti
cira 150 cira

aciraghitikmp);- 0 -tara, mfn., longer; It-a II 77,2 (-aqi
kalarp aparimitadukkho taqi adhivasetuq1 asakkonto ); -
aee. -aqi, adv., for a longer time; for a very long time;
more slowly; D II 178,13 (yatha tmp mayaq1 -mp
passeyyama ti); III 151 ,4* (bhavati yadi gihi ciraq1
yapeti, -aq1 pabbajati yadi tato hi); Pv 20:7 (yena tuvaq1
-aq1 pii.lito si ya; Pv-a 109,21: -an ti cirakalaq1 ); Mil 82,31
(yo idha kalakato brahmaloke uppajjeyya yo ca idha
kalakato Kasmire uppajjeyya ko -aqi ko sighataran ti);
Ud-a 400,3 (app eva nama paribhuñjitva -aq1 tit!heyya
ti); Spk III 57,31 (rogena aturo -mp sesabhesajjani katva,
Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ciraqi tani tani
bhesajjani); - instr. ciratarena, adv., after a longer
time; more slowly; Dhp-a I 96,13 (kasma [Sariputtathero]
Mahamoggallanat o -ena savakaparamiña~arp papu~i ti);
-
0
-tta, n., abstr. [or for ciraratta, efT. Oberlies, 2001,
p. 114], long duration; A IV 228,4* (va~ijo va at!tattho
-aqi anutapessati; Mp IV 117,5: cirarattmp socissati);-
0
-dikkhita, mfn., long-eonseerated; initiated long ago;
S I 226,26* (gandho isinmp -anaq1 kaya cuto gacchati
ma1utena; Spk I 346,5: -anan ti cirasamadinnavatanaqi)
= Ja V 138,24* (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr -dakkhitanaqi;
0
138,2s·: cirapabbajitanmp) quoted Sadd 332,3;
2 with long fermentation; Ps I 61,17 foil. (-' -anhena
0
-dittha, mfn. [cira + digha ], seen (only) a long time
ago; not seen for a long time; Vin 1 344,29 (-a kho me
matapitaro, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cirmp dittha); D II 189,11
0
Be, Ce, Ee --sova~~aphalakaq1); - -parivasika,
0
-parivasiya, see svv ciraparivasika and ciraparivasiya
below; - 0 -ppavasi(n), mfn., long absent from home;
Dhp 219 (-iq1 purismp dürato sotthim agataq1 ñatimitta
suhajja ca abhinandanti agatmp; Dhp-a III 293,8: -in ti
cirappavutthmp) = Vv 52:1;- -ppavuttha, mfn., long
0
absent from home; who has be en away a long time; Ja II
383,13* (-a atha va na te ime, Be, Ce, E e so; Se ciraq1
pavuttha; 383,26·: kin nu kho ime ciraq1 vippavasitva
dighassa addhuno accayena agatatta maq1 so yeva ayan
ti na sañjananti); V 173,28* (-o 'smi ahmp janinda;
175,22·: ahmp manussalokato -o); Thi-a 189,1o (atha nmp
sassu evaJD aha mama putto -o tvaq1 ca gabbhini,
papakmp taya katan ti); -
0
-parivasika, mfn., left
standing for a long time; (long fermented; ?) PsI 61,19
(lokasmiqi hi -a madiradayo asava ti vuccanti, Be, Ce
so; Ee 0 -parivasika; Se 0 -pparivasika) = Mp JI 183,4 (Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -parivasika) =It-a I 114,7 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee 0 -parivasika) = As 48,15 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-pparivasika); Thi-a 28,18 (mama bhattapacana-
bhajanaqi --bhavena aparisuddhataya udakasappa-
gandhaqi vayati); - 0 -parivasiya, mfn. (or n. ?) [or =
ciraparivasika ?], standing for a long time; associated
madiradayo asava viya ti pi asava, lokasmirp hi
o -parivasika madiradayo asava ti vuccanti, yadi ca

(-o kho me raja Mahasudassano, Ce, E e so; Be, Se -' -aghena asava ete eva bhaviturp arahanti, Be so; Ce
-piirivasik-; Ee 0 -parivasikatthena ... -parivasika .. .
0 0
cirmp digho); Sp 83,7 (maharaja amhehi -o samma-
sambuddho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cirmp digho); Cp-a 243,25
0
-parivasik-; Se 0
-pparivasiy- ... 0
-pparivasika .. .
(-o me sahayo ti); - o -nivasi(n), mfn. [cira + 0
-pparivasik-) = Mp li 183,2foll. (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nivasi(n) 2], staying for a long time; M III 68,27 (pañca 0
-parivasiy- ... 0 -parivasika ... -parivasiy-) = It-a I
0

paccekabuddhasat ani imasmiq1 Isigilismiq1 pabbate -ino 114,5 foil. (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-parivasiy- ...
ahesuq1); S II 227,4 (aññatarasmiqi udakarahade
0
-parivasika ... 0
-parivasik-) = As48,13foll. (Be, Ce so;
mahakummakulaq i -i ahosi); Vism 90,22 (ayaq1 hi Ee -' -atthena... 0 -parivasika ...
0
-parivasik-; Se
imasmiq1 nagare -i ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ciraq1 nivasi ti); o -ppiirivasiy- .. .
0
-pparivasika .. . o -pparivasiy-) f.
-
0
-nisinna, mfn., having sat for a long time; V in II Ud-a 176,5 foil. (- '-aghena madiradayo asava vi ya ti pi
236,1o (nikkhanto pathamo yamo -o bhikkhusaiJ.gho); asava .. . tesaq1 --ta veditabba, Be, Se so; Ce
Ud 26,3o (-a agantuka bhikkhü); - -patika, ind.,
0 0
-parivasiy- .. . 0 -parivasikata; Ee
0
-parivasik- ...
2 ? efS. ciraJD 0
-parivasikata); - 0
-yapana,f, living for a long time,
0
and!or -patika, mfn. [cira(qi) + pati + ka
prati], for a long time, sine e a long time ago; or being long lije; D III 151,2* (tihi purisavaraggalakkha~ehi
for a long time; V in I 33,2 (-a mayaq1 bho mahasama~e -aya kumiiram adisanti, Be, Ce, Ee so, me; Se
abhippasanna; Sp 972,9: -a ti ciraka1ato paghaya;
0
-yapanaya; Sv 926,35: -aya ti cirarp yapanaya
2
Vjb [Be] 414,5: -a ti cirapabhuti); D JI 270,6 dlghayukabhava ya);- 0 -ratta, m. or n. [cira + ratta ], a
(cirapatikahaqi bhante bhagavantmp dassanaya long time; - aee. -rattmp, adv., for
0
a long time; SI
upasaiJ.kaJDitukamo; Sv 705,9: cirato ahaq1, cirato 30,10* ( -aq1 dukkhaJD anubhavanti); Sn 665 (gañchisi
paghayahaq1 dassanakamo ti attho) =S III 120,23 (Spk JI kho papatmp -mp); Th 1218 (-aq1 samahito); -
314,9: -o ahaq1, cirato paghaya ahan ti attho) =Ud 13,9 dat. 0 -rattaya, adv., for a long time; Abh 1136; MI
(Ud-a 115,22: -o ahmp, cirakalato patrhaya ahmp 338,28* (karoto ciyati paparp -aya); Pv 9:4 (idhagata
upasaitkaJDitukamo ti sambandho ); se e also -aya khadati); Ja V 267,23* (sa Ka)asutte niraye -aya
cirapatikaiJ.kha; - 0 -patikalikha, mfn., having wished paccati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cirmp rattaya) = 268,6* (Be, Ce
for a long time; ? Ja II 176,22 (-o 'haq1 rajanarp so; Se ciraq1 rattaya; Ee -ani, prob. wr); VI 80,13* (sa
ovaditukamo upayaq1 upadharento carami); - see also nüna kap~a aJDma -aya rucchiti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
cirapatika; - 0
-ppanattha, mfn., long disappeared; cirmp rattaya); Mil 244,9 (tmp khippaiD eva samijjhati
D III 160,19 (-e sucirappavasino ñatl suhajje sakhino no -aya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cirmp rattaya); -
samanayi); - 0
-pabbajita, mfn., who took up the loe. 0 -ratte, adv., a long time ago; Ja V 56,22" (ito -e
aseetie life a long time ago; D JI 77 ,s (bhikkhü thera anekavassakotima tthake saq1sitarp caritaq1 anuci~~aq1,
rattaññü -a saiJ.ghapitaro) f. MI 220,22; Mp II 40,1o Be, E e so; Ce, Se cirato; ad 56,3*: cirarattasamsitaJD ...
caritam); - --nivasi(n), mfn. [ciraratta + nivasi(~) ],
2
(--taya); IV 19,s (cirmp pabbajitanaq1 etesan ti -a); -
0
-parimajjita, mfn., polished for a long time; dwelling for a long time; Ja VI 92,19* (--nivasini); -
Thi-a 202,11 (-mp sova~~apha1akmp viya sobhate, Se so; aticirarattmp, a very long time; Sv 659,28;
cirantana
0
-Vippavuttha, mfn., long absent; M JI 253,25 (puriso
sakamha gama va nigama va -o assa);
0
-santhuta, mfn., known intimatelyfor a long time; Ja l
365,16* (so 'haq¡ katha111 attasukhassa hetu -a111
Ka!akaJ.ll)i!11 jaheyyarp., Be, Ce so; Ee wr 0 -satthuna111;
Se -Sai_l~hita!11); III 63,s• (asanthuta111 ma111 -ena nimlni
0
Sama adhuvaq¡ dhuvena; 63,12': asanthutan ti
akatasa111sagga111, -ena ti cirakatasa111saggena) t 221 ,25*;
-
0
-ssuta, mfn. [cira + suta 1], heard (only) a long time
ago; not heard for a long time; M l 160,22 (-a no avuso
Ánanda bhagavato sammukha dhammi katha) t A IV
59,11; - acira, mfn., not of long duration, recent;
Sadd 765,15foll. (-aq¡ pabbajita111 yassa so 'yarp.
acirapabbajito . . . -a111 pakkantaq¡ yassa so 'yarp.
acirapakkanto); - acc. acira111, adv., 1. not long ago,
recently; Vin II 132,28 (eso bhikkhave bhikkhu -arp.
goyoniya cuto); Ap 56,14 (-a111 gate pilgagal)e); Sv 384,s
( -a111 parinibbute bhagavati); - 2. soon; Dhp 41 (-arp.
vat' aya111 kayo pa~havi111 adhisessati); Thi 468
(nibbuyhati susanaq¡ -aq¡ kayo apetaviññiil)o); Ja VI
573,13* (-arp. vata te tato pita taq¡ daqhum essati);
Ap 76,2 (-arp. arahattaq¡ vo sabbe pi papul)issatha); -
instr. acirena, adv., soon; Ja III 438,20' (khippa111 ca ti
-ena ca); VI 154,17' (-a vata ti -ena vata); 573,14'; -
ah l. acira, adv., soon; Ja VI 153,27* (-a vata netti111so
vivattissati rajaputtana111 khandhesu, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
-aq¡); 528,5* (-a cakkhilni j!yare ); -gen. acirassa, adv.,
not for long; recently; Mp III 381,1 (acirapakkantesil ti
arahatta111 vyakaritva -ass' eva pakkantesu); -
-'-ilpasampanna, mfn., recently ordained; Vin I 181,3s;
MI 494,14 (-'ilpasampanno kho pan' ayasma Vaccha-
gotto addhamasilpasampanno);- --kaladhikarika, mfn.,
referring to a short time; Sp 554,1 (tarp.khai)O ti
acirakalo vuccati, ta111khal)ikan ti --kaladhikarika111); -
--qhitika, mfn., see sv ciraqhitika above;
--(p)pakkanta, mfn., (who has) recently left, gane away;
Vin I 17,33 (atha kho Yaso kulaputto --ppakkante
seqhimhi gahapatimhi bhagavanta111 etad avoca); D II
8,1 (tesa111 bhikkhilnaq¡ --pakkantassa bhagavato aya111
antarakatha udapadi); MI 68,7 (Sunakkhatto
Licchaviputto --pakkanto hoti imasma dhammavinaya;
Ps II 21,15: adhuna pakkanto); II 253,26 (purisa111
passeyya tamha gama va nigama va --pakkanta111, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee acirakapakkantaq¡, wr ?); A 11 73,13
(bhagava Rajagahe viharati Gijjhakil~e pabbate
--pakkante Devadatte; Mp IIl 104,9: --pakkante
Devadatte ti sañgha111 bhinditva na cirapakkante);
Mil 88,20 (--pakkante ca ayasmante Nagasene); Spk I
217,38 (--pakkantassa ti pakkantassa sato na ciren' eva);
Sadd 765,16foll. (apakkaml ti pakkanto puriso, -arp.
pakkantassa yassa so 'yal11 --pakkanto, atha va ... -a!11
pakkanta111 yassa so 'ya111 --pakkanto ti pi samaso
katabbo); - --pabbajita, mfn., who took up the ascetic
life recently; Vin I 40,2o (aha111 kho avuso navo
--pabbajito adhunagato imarp. dhammavinaya111); S I
185,7 (ayasma Vañg!si navako hoti --pabbajito
ohiyyako viharapa1o); Ja V 205,24·; Sv 143,12
(--pabbajitassa hi katha okappaniya na hoti); PsI 155,33
(--pabbajitana111 va duppaññana111 va); Thi-a 183,29
(tassa --pabbajitaya eva uposathagare kalavaro papul)i);
151 cirayati
- --ppabha,f, lightning; Abh 48 (vijjuta cacira-
ppabha); Bv-a 48,24 (yadi cira~~hitika --ppabha assa); -
--parinibbuta, mjn., (who has) recently died (in
parinibbana); D I 204,4 (--parinibbute bhagavati); S V
163,27 (--parinibbutesu SariputtaMogga11anesu);
Sn p. 59,17 (Nigrodhakappo nama thero AggaJave cetiye
--parinibbuto hoti); Sadd 765,13 (-a111 parinibbutassa
yassa so 'yaq¡ --parinibbuto); - --vibbhanta, mfn.,
(who has) recently left the sailgha; Vin IV 216,s
(Sundañnanda kho ayye --vibbhanta vijata); -
--suta, mfn. [acira + suta 1], heard recently; Sp 76,14 (so
--suta111 ta111 sasanapavattit11 anussaramano );
aticirarp, too long; (for) a very long time; Vin II 182,12
( -a111 samma satta vassani naharp. sakkomi satta vassani
agametun ti); 215,1o (atidilre pi tiqhanti accasanne pi
tighanti -a111 pi ti~thanti); MI ll6,12 (api ca kho me -a111
anuvitakkayato anuvicarayato kayo kilameyya); Ja V
233,24* (-a111 nivasena piyo bhavati appiyo); Sp 461,27
(-arp. passiturp. pi na deti); PsI 264,7 (hatthapade -aq¡
sammiñjitva pasaretva eva va ~hitassa khal)e khaJ.le
vedana uppajjanti); - aticirena, after too long; too
late; Ja IV 126,4 (tumhe -ena agata); Ps lii 248,15; -
sucira, mfn., very long; Sp 128,31 (atthavyañjana-
madhurataya -a111 pi kalaq¡ saretu111); Bv-a 211,23* (-aq¡
pi kalarp. dukkhaq¡ sughora111 narake 'nubhoti); -
sucirarp., for a very long time; Ap 431,3 (-a111
vihatattamo maya); Mi1115,2!; Sv 227,27 (-a111 vat'
amhi dasabalassa gul)anubhava111 ajananto vañcito ti);
Pj II 453,3 (-a111 pi passantana111 atittijanaka111); -
sucirena, after a very long time; Ja III 260,18' (-ena pi
tassa anatthakarako);- sucirass' eva, after a very long
time; SI 193,31 (ayasma AññasiKondañño sucirass' eva
yena bhagava ten' upasañkami; Spk I 280,3: sucirass'
eva ti kivacirassa, dvadasanna111 Sa111vaccharanam); -
se e also ciraciraq¡.
cirantana, mfn. [ts], existing from ancient times, from
long ago; Abh 713 (puratanasanantana -o); - see also
ciratana.
ciracirarp, ind. [repetitive cpd from cira], after a long
time; at long intervals; Vin IV 261,11 (raja kho ayye
tumhe -a111 gacchati, katha111 tumhe dharetha ti;
Sp 921,19: -a111 gacchati ti cirena cirena gacchati); Ja V
233,22* (tasma nabhikkhaJ.!aq¡ gacche na ca gacche -arp.;
234,15': -an ti ciraka1aq¡ v!tinametva cira111 na
gaccheyya na upasañkameyya).
ciratana, mfn. [prob. cirantana, cf sanantana,
S. sanatana; cf also S ciratna], existing from ancient
times, from long ago; Sv 663,34 (sanantanan ti -arp.
poral)akam, Ee so; Be, Se ciratanaq¡; Ce cirantanaq¡) t
Cp-a 49,3 (sanantanan ti -aq¡ poral)a!11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
ciratana111).
cirayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cirayati, cirayate], delays; is absent
a long time; Ja I 8,22 (ativiya -anti ti); Ps III 316,4
(nahaq¡ deva1oka!11 gantva -issami); Spk III 38,16 (ki111
avuso -asi, diva hoti, gacchama ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ciray' atidiva, prob. wr); Dhp-a I 16,4 (samanero pi -ati,
so silavipatti111 patto bhavissati ti); - part.pr.
(a) cirayanta, mfi -anti)n., Ja V 91,27' (ma111 -anti111
viditva); Dhp-a III 75,5 (bodhisatto pi taq¡ -antaq¡ disva
Candakumara111 pesesi); 75,9; (b) cirayamana, mfn., Ja V
cirayana
93,9'; Mp I 425,15; - neg. acirayamiina, mfn., Pj II
349,14 (acirayamiino vacanarp. bhasa) -¡. Th-a III 200,29
(Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ataramano, prob. wr); - aor,
2 sg. cirayi, Ja VI 280,4 (tena hi deva ma -i); Dhp-a III
305,1 (sace marp. ativiya je -1 ti tajjetva patodalanhiya
paharissati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se cirayitan ti) = Vv-a 64,25
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -atl ti, prob. wr); Ud-a 313,16 (evarp
cirarp akasl ti evarp. -i, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr cira si); 3
pl. cirayirpsu, Ps II 291,4 (dhatiyo khajjabhojjantare
vicaramiina thokarp. -irpsu); 2 pl. cirayittha, Ja III 36,18
(te agacchante disva kirp -ittha ti pucchi); - absol.
cirayitva, Ud-a 313,26; Vv-a 208,15 (tvarp ajja
udakatittharp gata -itva agata); - pp cirayita, (mj)n.,
delaying; there was delay; Dhp-a I 308,9 (imasmirp te
vare -an ti); III 305,1 (marp. ativiya je -an ti tajjetva, E e
so; Se te -an ti; Be, Ceje cirayl ti); - --tta, n., abstr.,
delaying; Ps III 449,17 (dandhayitattan ti ayarp. nu kho
maggo ayarp. nu kho ti kaii.khavasena --ttarp.); - see
also aticirayati.
cirayana, n. [from cirayati], delaying; being absenta long
time; Mp I 428,zo (tassa -bhavarp ñatva); Cp-a 93,2o
0
(taya 0 -karal).e kathite).
cirifi, m. [cf S. ciri~lka, ciñ~lka], a kind of bird; Ja V
202,27* (ta pirpsare carato miil).avassa 0 -saii.gha-r-iva
pavusamhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tiri~isaii.gha).
cirm}liti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ciril).oti, Wg § 27:30],
injures; Sadd 495,5 (ciri ... hirpsayarp: ... -ati).
cilati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ci1ati, Wg § 28:63], puts on
clothes; Dhatum 565 (cila vasane); Sadd 439,24 (cila
vasane: -ati).
cilimika,f, see sv cimilika.
cilimaip in Ee at M III 274,34 and 275,16 is wr for
vilimarp.sarp. (Be, Se so) or vil!marp.sarp (Ce so).
cillati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cillati; Wg § 15:26], becomes
loose; Sadd 436,18 (cilla se~hille: ... -ati).
cillaka in Ee, Se at Th! 390 is wr; read darukapillakiini va
withBe, Ce.
cihaciha, m. [onomat.], the name of a bird; ora chirping
sound;- abhinadita, n., the sound of cihaciha birds;
0
or the sound of chirping; Th 49 (-e sippikabhirutehi ca
na me tarp phandati cittarp., Be so; Ce, Ee, Se viha-
vihabhinadite, prob. wr; Th-a I 129,29 foil.: cihaciha ti
abhil).harp. pavattasaddataya cihaciha ti laddhanamanarp
vagakiinarp. abhinadananimittarp. viravahetil ti attho, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce vihaviha ti).
cihana, cihal).a, n. [S. cihna], a mark; Abh 879
(vyañjanarp. -e pade, Be so; Ce cihal).e); 1020 (cihal).e
lakkham uccate); 1064 (ketumhi -e dhajo); 1105 (ketu
tu -e dhaje); Sadd 351,6 (saññiil).an ti -arp.); 360,1;- see
also cil).ha.
ciketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup clkayati, Wg § 34:21],
endures; Sadd 522,14 (clka slka amasane: -eti -ayati).
cina, m. (and m.pl. ?) and mfn. [cfS. clna], l. (m.) China;
(the Chinese;) Ap 359,2 (ara va -ranha ca agacchanti
0
mamarp. ghararp); Mil121,12 (atthi maharaja -visaye 0
0
-raja); 359,29 (naviko . . . mahasamuddarp. pavisitva
Varigarp. Takkolarp. -arp Sovlrarp ... gacchati); -
2. (mfn.) (Chinese), silken; Ap 2,1o (kambala dukilla -a
pattU!).l).a pal).¡;lupavura; Ap-a 106,5: -a ti clnapanehi
kata, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se clnapa~ehi); Vin-vn 552
152 cirika
(dukillarp. e' eva pattunnarp. -arp somarapagakam); -
0
-paffa, -pa~a, m., 'Chinese cloth ', silk; Bv 24:11
0
(pattU!).l).arp. -aip ca ... adasim); Vism 550,24 (--somara-
pagadivasena, Be, Ce so; Ee --somarapa~adi-; Se
clnapa~asomarapa~adi-) -¡. Vibh-a 159,12 (eds clnapa~a­
somarapara.di-); Sp 1104,12 (dukillarp. patul).l).arp. -arp
somarapagarp. iddhimayikarp. devadattiyan ti apariini cha
[clvarani] anuññatiini, Be, Ce so; Se clnapararp.; Ee wr
cinapa~arp.; Sp-r [Be]III 333,2ofoil.: clnadese sornara-
dese ca sañjatavatthiini cinasomaraparani); Ap-a 378,34
(--kamba1adini attharitva); - o -pi!tha, n. [eIn a +
pigha 1], red lead; Abh 494 (-arp); - --CU!).l).a, n.,
powdered red lead; Sv 40,4 (in long cpd); Ps III 132,5
(--CUI).l).apiljitarp sUVal).l).acetiyarp viya); As 14,6
(disabhaga --CU!).l).arañjita viya);- 0 -mugga, m., a kind
of bean; Sp 835,13 (pattakhadaniye ... umma -o maso);
Pj II 283,27; Vin-vn 1342 (vatthulo -o ca); - see also
c!naka.
cinaka, m.n. [cfS. cinaka], a kind of bean; Pj II 283,26
(-iinl ti aravipabbatapadesu aropitajata clnamugga,
ad Sn 239: samakacirigulakaclnakiini . . . añhamiina);
Ja V 405,26* (samakanlvara-m-atho pi -a; 406,19': -a ti
khuddakarajamasa).
ciyati, ciyate, pass. pr. 3 sg. of cinati qv.
cira, n. [ts], l. a strip; a strip of bark or cloth; Abh 985
(-e koplnam uccate); - 2. an ascetic's garment (of
strips of bark or grass etc); Ja VI 500,9* foll. (katharp. nu
-arp dharenti rajapabbajita jana katharp. kusamayarp.
1
-arp. Maddi paridahessati); - ifc see kusa- (sv kusa ),
daru-, darumaya-, vaka-, SUVal).l).a-; - clra- in Ee at S II
285,19*, Sp 193,29, It-aii 183,19 and Cp-a 19,2 is wr for
cira- qv; - se e also olambamiinac!raka (sv olambati).
2
ciraka, n. [cira + ka ], l. a strip of bark or cloth; Ps II
259,14 (Val).O bhesajjarp datva vakena va -ena va
bandhitva pa~icchadetabbo hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
cirena); - 2. an ascetic's garment (of strips of bark
etc); Ja V 206,4' (mayarp til).amayarp va vakamayarp va
-arp. dharema, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee vakaclrarp. katva
dharema); - ifc see nivatthakañcana-, SUVal).l).a-; -
1
0
-vasana, mfn. [ciraka + vasana ], wearing an ascetic's
garment; J a V 117 ,21' (kapal).O hutva -o kapalarp. adaya
1
carati); - 0 -vasika, n. [ciraka + vasika ], 'wearing
strips', a kind of torture; MI 87,15 (tarp enarp rajiino
gahetva vividha kammakaral).a karenti . . . -arp. pi
karonti; Ps II 59,9 foil.: -an ti --kammakaranarp., tarp.
karonta tath' eva cammavane kantitva ka~iyarp. rhapenti,
ka~ito paghaya kantitva gopphakesu ~hapenti, uparimehi
he~~imasañrarp clrakanivasananivattharp. viya hoti) =
Nidd I 154,13-¡. A I 48,1; Mil197,9 (-arp pi dukkharp.).
cirika, ciriya, f [cf S. lex. clruka, c!lika], a cricket;
Sp 715,25 (-a nama sapakkha dlghamakkhika, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se cirika); - 0 (a)-sadda, m., the sound of the
cricket; A III 397,23 (-o antaradhayeyya, Be so; Ce
clriliyasaddo; E e, Se clriFkasaddo; Mp III 402,11: -o ti
jhallikasaddo, Be so; Se c!riFkasaddo ti; Ce, Ee c!ri!iya-
saddo ti ciriyasaddo ); - se e also clri!ika, ciñ.
ciri!ika, ciriliya,f [cf S. lex. clruka, cilika], a cricket; -
0
-sadda, m., the sound of the cricket; A III 397,19foil.
(raja ... vanasal).¡;le ekarattirp vasarp. upagaccheyya tattha
hatthisaddena assasaddena . . . -o antaradhayeyya ...
ciri
thiinaJI! h' etarr avuso vijjati YaJI! so raJa . . . tamha
vanasaJ).<;ia pakkameyya, atha puna-d-eva -o patu-
bhaveyya ti, Ee, Se so; Be cirikasaddo; Ce clriliyasaddo;
Mp III 402,n: -o ti jhal1ikasaddo, Se so; Be clrikasaddo
ti; Ce, Ee ciriJiyasaddo ti ciriyasaddo); - see also
cirika, ciñ.
ciri, f [ts], a cricket; Abh 646 (-1 tu jha1lika, Be so; Ce
-i);- see also cirika, cirijika.
civati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup civati, Wg § 21:15], takes;
covers; Sadd 440,28 (civu adanasaJI~varesu civati).
civara, n. [ts], one of the three robes of a bhikkhu
(antaravasaka, uttarasailga and sailghati), or one of the
five robes of a bhikkhuni (those three plus sailkacchika
and udakasatika), especially the uttarasailga or sailghati
(prob. both sewn of pieces as a patchwork, and dyed a
yellowish-red); one of the extra robes allowed; material
for making the robe(s); Abh 296 (arahaddhajo ca
kasayakasavani ca -e); V in I 202,14 (tassa 1asikaya -ani
kaye 1agganti); 255,25foll. (bhikkhu atthatakathino -aJI~
adaya pakkamati, tassa bahis!magatassa eVaJI! hoti idh'
ev' imaJI! -arr karessaJI! na paccessan ti); 281,35
(anujanami bhikkhave cha -ani khomarr kappasikarr
koseyyaJI! kambalaJI! sal_laJII bhailgan ti); 297,14
(anujanami bhikkhave ayamena aghailgu1aJI!
sugatailgu1ena caturailgu1arr vitthataJI~ pacchimaJI~ -arr
vikappetun ti); 11217,19 (pattarr thavikaya pakkhipitva
arrse a1aggetva -arr khandhe karitva upahana arohitva);
III 45,25 (mahapuññ' attha tumhe avuso, bahurr
tumhakarr -arr uppannan ti); 202,35 (tassa taJI! -arr
kayiramiinaJI! na ppahoti); 208,3o (mayarr ... matugama
nama kicchalabha, idarr ca me antimaJI! pañcamarr
-arr); 211 ,34 (yo pana bhikkhu aññatakaJI! gahapatirr va
gahapatanirr va -arr vmnapeyya, nissaggiyarr
pacittiyan ti); 213,1 (-arr nama channarr -anaJI~
aññatararr -arr vikappanupagapacchimaJI!); IV 280,4
(sa bhikkhuni tarr -aJI~ visibbetva Thullanandaya
bhikkhuniya adasi); V 117,35 (dve -ani gahapatikarr ca
parrsukiilarr ca); D Il 163,26 (ekarrsaJI~ -arr katva
añjalirr pagametva); III 130,6 (yaJI! vo maya -aJI~
anuññatarr, alarr vo tarr yavad eva sltassa patighataya
ughassa patighataya darrsamakasavatatapasirirrsapa-
samphassiinaJI! patighataya yavad eva
hirikopinapaticchadanattharr); M 11 139,2! (na ca tassa
bhoto Gotamassa kaye -aJI~ accukkagharr hoti na ca
accokkatthaJI! na ca kayasmirr alHnarr na ca kayasmirr
apakatthaJI~); A Il 209,34 (so santugho hoti
kayapariharikena -ena kucchipariharikena pig<;lapatena);
III 108,24 (bhavissanti bhikkhave bhikkhü anagatam
addhiinaJI! -e kalyiil_lakama); It 102,19 (paJI!sukülarr
bhikkhave -anarr apparr ca su1abharr ca tarr ca
anavajjaJI~); Sn 339 (-e pig<;lapate ca . . . tagharr ma
kasi); Th 127 (chavasitto va me patto parrsukülarr ca
-aJI~); Ja IV 25,2 (bodhisatto pi -aJI~ sibbento nisidi);
VI 20,17* (arahante sitibhüte sakkaccarr patipadayurr
-arr pig<;lapataJI! ca paccayaJI! sayanasanaJI~); Nidd I
224,27 (kirr samaJ).assa mahagghena -ena); Ap 567,6
(sailkaraküta ahatva susana rathiyahi ca tato
sailghatikarr katva 1ükharr dhareyya -arr): Sp 55,II
(-arr ca uttarasailgarr ca akase 1aggetva nahayiturr
araddho ); 177,15 (pattacivararr adaya ti pattarr hatthehi
153 civara
-arr kayena adiyitva); 929,5 (idaJI! udakasarikarr
sandhaya vuttaJI!, na aññarr -arr); Sv 1009,34 (-asmirr
hi tayo santosa); Ps 11 212,2 (bhikkhuno agha parikkhara
vaganti, t11_1i -ani patto dantakatthacchedanavasi eka
suci kayabandhanarr parissavanan ti); Dhp-a I 172,16
(-arr nama ekakena dukkararr katurr); Thüp 230,18
(tumhe -arr katva parupatha ti); - ifc see aka1a-
(sv kala\ acceka-, acchinna- (sv acchindati), avasatha-,
karhina- (sv karhini), ka1a- (sv ka1a 1), gahapati-
(sv gahapati\ jiggatara- (sv jarati\ ti- (sv ti 2), te-
(sv ti 2), thüpa- (sv thüpa\ paccasa-, 1ükha-,
vassasarika-, vihara-; - 0 -kamma, n., the making of a
robe; working on a robe; Vin IV 60,35 (ayasma Udayi
pagho hoti -arr katurr); MI 438,Io (sambahu1a bhikkhü
bhagavato -aJI~ karonti; Ps III 149,24: -arr karonti ti
manussa bhagavato civarasarakarr adarrsu, tarr gahetva
clvararr karonti); Mi1367,25; Ps IV 157,18 (-an ti
jiggamalinanarr aggaJanhanuppadanadhovanadihi
kataparibha!).<;iarr pi clvaratthaya uppannavatthanaJI~
vicaragasibbanadihi akatasarrvidhanarr pi vanati);
Pv-a 145,8 (paccekabuddharr -arr karontarr disva); -
0
-karasamaya, m. [clvara + kara 1 + samaya], a time for
making or working on robes; V in III 256,4 (chabbaggiya
bhikkhü -e bahurr suttarr viññapesurr); IV 72,27
(anujanami bhikkhave -e gaJ).abhojanaJI! bhuñjiturr);
100,3o (-o nama clvare kariyamane; Sp 813,3: civare
kayiramane ti yada sarakarr ca suttarr ca labhitva
clvararr karonti tada, visurr hi -o nama natthi); M III
110,15 (-o no bhante vattati ti); S 11 277,13 (na
bhikkhünaJI! veyyavaccarr karoti -e); - neg. acivara-
karasamaya, m., not a time for making robes; Ps IV
158,4; - 0 -kala, m. [clvara + ka1a 1], the (proper) time
when robe-material is given; Sp 722,13; 1131,22
(sakalaJI! pi -arr SaJ).ikarr sagikaJI! denti yeva); Pj 11
573,28 (-e clvarasailkhyarr vasanaJI! va 1addha); -
--samaya, m., id.; Vin III 261,1 (te accekaclvarani pati-
ggahetva --samayarr atikkamenti); 261,22 (patiggahetva
yava --samayarr nikkhipitabbarr); 261,36 (--samayo
nama anatthate kathine vassanassa pacchimo maso,
atthate karhine pañca masa); IV 286,22 (katharr hi nama
ayya Thullananda dubbalaclvarapaccasaya --samayarr
atikkamessati ti); - 0 -gabbha, m., the interior of the
robe; Psll 237,25 (-ena paticchadetva); MpiV 166,18
(chabbaggarasmiyo -e paticchadetva); - 0
-ceta-
0
pannmp. in Ee at Sp 674,23 is wr for -cetapanarr or
0
-cetapannarr; - 0
-cetapana, 0 -cetapanna, n., some-
thing to be exchanged for robe material; the purchase
price for robe material; Vin III 216,11 foil. (bhikkhurr
pan' eva uddissa aññatakassa gahapatissa... -aJI~
upakkhatarr hoti imina -ena civaraJI! cetapetva
itthannamarr bhikkhurr clvarena acchadessaml ti, Ee, Se
so; Be, Ce 0 -cetapannarr; 216,25: -arr nama hiraññarr va
suval_lJ.laiii va mutta va magi va ... suttarr va kappaso va,
Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -cetapannaJI~; Sp 670,21: -an ti
0
0
clvaramülaJI!, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -cetapannan ti;
Sp-! [Be] 11 406,6foll.: civaraJI~ cetapenti parivattenti
etena ti 0 -cetapannarr, nakaragamaJI! katva 0 -cetapannan
ti vuttaJI! -an ti pi pathanti); 1309,4 (-arr, Se so; Be, Ce,
0
Ee -cetapannarr); - -dussa, n. [clvara + dussa 1], (a
0
piece of) cloth for making robes; Vin IV 279,32
civara
(aññatarissa bhikkhuniya mahagghe -e clvararp
dukkatarp hoti dussibbitarp); Vism 65,2; Spk I 217,6
(-ani ca sarpharirpsu); Pv-a 73,19 (-arp na ppahotl ti
ñatva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tassa hotl ti); -
0
-dhara, mfn., who wears an ascetic's robe; Ps II 325,31
(imasmirp hi sasane -o bhikkhu sailghatiko ti na
vuccati); - 0 -dharal}a, n., -a,f, the wearing of the
(ascetic's) robe; keeping a robe; Vin V 139,24 (dasa -a;
Sp 1344,13 foil.: sabbanllakani clvarani dharentl ti
vuttavasena dasa ti Kurundiyarp vuttam); 213,23' (dasa
-a; Sp 1388,26: dasa -a ti dasa divasani atirekaclvarassa
dharai_la anuññata ti attho); Th 975; Vism l06,1 (-am pi
ca ragacaritassa natiga~harp natisithilarp hoti);
Utt-vn 664 (sabbanlladayo vutta dasa -a);
0
-dhovana, n., washing the robe or robe-material;
Sp657,17 (-'-atthaya); Psi 299,34 (in long cpd);-
0
-nidahaka, 0 -nidahaka, mfn., (one) who keeps or stores
the material for robes; Vin 1 284,1 (anujanami
bhikkhave ... bhikkhurp -arp sammanniturp, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -nidahakarp; Sp 1121,1s: -an ti -patisamakarp,
0
Be so; Ce o -patisamanakarp; Ee, Se -nidahakan ti
0
-patisamanakarp); 284,15 (-a bhikkhü mm;qape pi
rukkhamüle pi nimbakose pi clvararp nidahanti, Ce so;
Ee, Se 0 -nidahaka; Be -o bhikkhu . . . nidahati); -
0
-paccasa,f, the expectation o.f receiving a robe or
materialfor a robe; Vin III 203,9 (atthi pana te bhikkhu
-a ti); IV 286,14; Sp 931,w (dubbalaya -aya); -
0
-patiggahaka, m(jn)., (one) who receives robe-
material (on behalf o.f the sailgha); V in I 283,19
(anujanami bhikkhave ... bhikkhurp -arp sammanniturp;
Sp 1121,17: -an ti yo gahapatikehi sailghassa
d!yamanarp clvararp gm;hati); A lii 274,32; Sp 1122,s;
0
-pativhpsa, 0 -pativlsa, (0 -pativisa), m., a share or
-
portian of material.for a robe; Vin 1 285,21 (anujanami
bhikkhave ... bhikkhü gaifetva vaggarp bandhitva -arp
thapetun ti, Ce so; Be o -pativlsarp; E e, Se o -pativisarp);
305,2 (katharp nu kho gilanupatthakassa samaiferassa -o
databbo ti, Ce so; Be -pativlso; E e, Se -pativiso );
0 0
Sp 1124,1joll. (dasa dasa -e ekekarp vaggarp
bandhitva ... ekarp -arp !hapeturp anujanaml ti ... evarp
thapitesu -esu kuso patetabbo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
0
-pativlse ... 0 -pa?visarp ... -pativlsesu); -
0 0
-pati-
samaka, -patisamanaka, mfn., (one) who stores or puts
0 daJ.!qake va); Dhp-a IIl 342,13 (clvaraqi ... sarpharitva -e
away material.for robes; Sp 1121,18 (clvaranidahakan ti
-arp, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -patisamanakarp); -
0
0
-parivatta, m., -parivattana, n., an exchange o.f
0 having robe material woven; Sp 1309,14 (suttarp
robes; Sv 602,2 (kayato apanetva kaye -parivattanarp
0
akasi); Spk II 200,10 (0 -parivattanarp katva) f. Mp I
182,29 ( 0 -parivattarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr clvararp
parivattarp) = Th-a III 135,9 ( -parivattanarp); -
0
0
-parupana, n., the putting on, wearing, o.f a robe;
Sv 198,21; Ps Il 242,35; Dhp-a III 340,3 (bhikkhünarp
--kale); - 0
-bhajaka, mfn., (one) who distributes
material for robes; V in I 285,12 (anujanami
bhikkhave . . . bhikkhurp -arp samanniturp); 285,17
(-anarp bhikkhünarp etad ahosi katharp nu kho clvararp
bhajetabban ti); A lii 275,2; Sp 1125,2 (-en a imassa
bhikkhuno kotthasena ettakena bhavitabban ti
takketva ... clvararp databbarp); -
0
-bhajana, n., the
distribution o.f material .for robes; Sp 1131,29 (--kalarp
154 civara
sallakkhetva) ;- 0 -bhajanlya, n., the sharing out,
distribution o.f material for robes; Sp 379,8 (imasmirp
thane kusasailkamanavasena -am eva ekarp agatarp);
1271,26 (iti clvarakkhandhake -arp ... vuttarp); -
0
-bhisi,f, a roll o.f robes; Vin 1 287,31.foll. (addasa ...
bhikkhu ... -irp karitva khandhe pi -irp karitva katiya pi
-irp karitva agacchante; Sp 1128,2: -in ti ettha bhisl ti
dve tllfi ekato katva bhisisailkhepena sarpharitaclvarani
2
vuttani);- 0 -bhoga, m. [clvara + bhoga ], the .fold of a
robe, where the robe is .folded; Sp 580,2 (salakayo
pacchiyarp va -e va pakkhipitva alo~etva) f. 1261,24;
979,1s (kayabandhanarp sarpharitva -e pakkhipitva
thapetabbaqi); Ps lii 392,13 (-' -antararp pavesetva
pattarp udarena akkamitva gm;hati);- -rajana, n., the
0
dyeing of a robe; Sp 983,4; Spk IIl 36,6 (janapade
-'-adlni katva agamissama ti); -
0
-rajanaka. mfn.,
(one) who dyes the robe; Sv 924,7 (-arp kappiyakarakaq1
pi adasi, Be so; Se -arp pi; Ce, Ee --kappiyakarakarp
pi); - 0
-rajju,f, a rape over which to hang a robe;
Vin I 47,4 (clvaraqi nikkhipantena ekena hatthena
civararp gahetva ekena hatthena clvaravarpsaqi va -urp
va pamajjitva parata antarp orato bhogarp katva clvararp
nikkhipitabbarp); Il121,36 (bhikkhü jantaghare chamaya
clvararp nikkhipanti, clvaraqi paq1sukitaq1 hoti ...
anujanami bhikkhave civaravarpsaqi -un ti); 222,10
(civaravarpse va -uya va civararp nikkhipitva sadhukaq1
ataramanena vaccakup pavisitabba); III48,33 (bhaJ_lqarp
vehasagataq1 hoti ... c!varavaq1se va -u ya va ... rukkhe
va Jaggitarp hoti); - 0
-liikha, n.(?), roughness or
shabbiness of robes; Pp 53,32 (ekacco puggalo -arp va
passitva pattalükharp va passitva . . . vividharp va
dukkarakarikarp passitva; Pp-a 229,28: -an ti clvarassa
dubbaififadibhavena lükhatarp); Ps Il 2,2o
(JükhappamaifO pi bhagavato -arp disva);- 0
-lesa, m.,
an oblique or indirect statement connected with a robe;
Vin III 169 ,3o (-o nama parpsuküliko dittho hoti ...
gahapaticivaradharo di!tho hoti ... ); -
0
-varpsa, m., a
bamboo rod over which to hang a robe; Vin II 121,36
(anujanami bhikkhave -arp civararajjun ti); III 261,2
(tani civarani -e bhaifqikabaddhani tit!hanti); Ja I 9,12
(-e Jaggitaqi ... vakaclrarp gahetva); Sp 325,17 (-e ti
clvarathapanatthaya bandhitva thapite varpse va kattha-
thapetva); - 0 -vac;lc;lhaka, m., a cutter or maker o.f
robes, a tailor; Ja I 220,16 foil.; - o -vayapana, n.,
viññapetva -aq1); - o -vicaral}a, n., considering,
planning (the making of) a robe; Vin I 254.28 (na
--mattena atthatarp hoti kathinarp; Sp 1110,2o.foll.:
pañcakaq1 va sattakarp va navakarp va ekadasakaqi va
hotü ti evarp vicara!famattena); Sv 1043,33
(-'-adikammar p katabbarp hoti); -
0
-vippavasa, m.,
being awayfrom one's robe(s); Sp 1107,2 (asamadana-
caro ti ticivararp asamadaya caralfarp, -o kappissatl ti
attho); Th-a II 155,9;- 0 -Vibhaiiga, m., the distribution
of material for robes; Vin IV 284,17 (na tava clvararp
bhajiyissatl ti -arp patibahati); Sp 1308,4;
0
-Saiikamaniya , n., a robe which is to be handed
back;? a borrowed robe;? V in IV 282,25 (ya pana
bhikkhunl -arp dhareyya, pacittiyan ti; 282,28foll.: -arp
civariyati
nama upasampannaya pañcannaJ11 clvaranaJTI aññataraJTI
clvaraJTI tassa va adinnaJTI taJTI va anapuccha nivaseti va
parupati va apatti pacittiyassa; Sp 930,4; -an ti
saiJ.kametabbaJTI clvaraJTI aññissa santakaJTI anapuccha
gahitaJ11 puna patidatabbaclvaran ti attho ); 1311,24 (-am
dhareyya);- 0 -sataka, m., (a strip oj) clothfor making
robes; Ja IV 117,20 (raja tesaJTI dhammaJ11 sutva
pasannacitto -e ca bhesajjani datva paccekabuddhe
uyyojesi); Ps III 149,24 (manussa bhagavato -alTl
adaJ11SU, taJTI gahetva clvaraJTI karonti); Spk I 308,22
(tena hi tata upasampadaJTI karohl ti -e adasi, so
ticlvaraJTI karapetva upasampanno ... ); - 0 -Sal}i,f, a
screen made of a robe; Spk II 234,17 (rattiJTI pana nesaJTI
antare -ÍJTI pasaren ti); - 0 -hetu, ind., for the sake of a
robe; Vin IV 58,13 (amisahetü ti -u pi!)~apatahetu ... );
D lii 224,25 (na ca -u anesanaJTI appatirüpaJTI apajjati);
MI 105,23 (na kho panahaJTI -u agarasma anagariyaJTI
pabbajito ); A II 248,26 (-u . . . bhikkhuno ta!)ha
uppajjamana uppajjati); Nidd I 269,6 (-u ...
sampajanamusa bhasati); - acivara, mfn., without a
robe; Vin I 99,31* (in uddana); - aticivara, n., extra
robe-material; ? Sp 1131,19 (kalacivararp pi saiJ.ghassa
ito va dassama, visurp sajjiyamane -aJTI hotl ti, Ee, Se
so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce aticirarp); - sacivara, mfn.,
1. with a mhe, wearing a robe; Th 1102 (kada nu ffiaJ11
pavusaka1amegho navena toyena -aJTI . . . ovassate);
Vism 66,3* (sapattacaral)O pakkhl va -o va yogivaro);-
2. together with a robe or material for a robe; Vin I
299,3o (manussa ... -ani bhattani adarpsu); Jai 41,25
(-arp mahadanaJTI pavattetva); - --bhatta, n., a meal
and robe material; Vin III 265,4 (aññatarassa pügassa
saiJ.ghassa --bhattarp patiyattarp hoti bhojetva civarena
acchadessama ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee civarabhattaJ11);
IV 72,12 (manussa clvaradanasamaye --bhattaJ11
patiyadetva); Sv 133,21 (buddhapamukharp bhikkhu-
saiJ.ghaJ11 --bhattena santappetva);- see also aclvaraka,
acchinnaclvaraka (sv acchindati), ji!)I)aclvaraka
(sv jarati\ tintaclvaraka (sv temati), teclvari(n),
teclvarika, naghaclvarika (sv nassati).
civariyati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from clvara], wishes for a
robe; Sadd 587,19; 823,7 (atticchatthe namato: namato
attano icchatthe lyapaccayo hoti: attano pattam icchati
pattlyati evarp vatthlyati parikkharlyati -ati patlyati).
civeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup clvayati, Wg .§ 33:101],
speaks; Sadd 565,24 (clva bhasayaJ11: -eti -ayati).
cukketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cukkayati,
Wg .§ 32:56], inflicts or suffers pain; Sadd 521,11foll.
(cakka cukka vyathane: ... -eti -ayati).
cuccu, cuccü, f [ts], a kind of vegetable; SAF: radish,
Raphanus sativus L.; Abh 598 (mülako ... -ii);
Sp 832,28 (mülakhadaniye ... -mülarp ... , Ce, E e so; Be
0
caccu-; Se puccu-); 835,11 (pattakhadanlye mülakaJ11
kharako -u tambako ... , Ce, E e so; Be caccu; Se puccu);
836,5 ( 0 -pupphaJ11 ... , Ce, Ee so; Be caccu-; Se puccu-);
Nidd-a I 397,4 (mülakhajjakan ti mülakamülarp
kharakamülaJ11 °-mülan ti evamadi); Vin-vn 1324
(mülakaJTI kharakaJ11 e' eva ... -u, E e so; Be caccu);
1342 (-u, Ee so; Be caccu).
cuijamana, mfn. [pass. part.pr. of *cudati/codati (or of
codeti); cfS . .Vcud, codati], being pressed (for payment);
155 CUI}.J.}3
being urged; Sn 120 (yo have i!)am adaya -o palayati,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se bhuñjamano; Pj II 179,14joll.: tena
ÍJ)ayikena dehi me ÍJ)an ti codiyamano ); - se e also
endita, codati.
cutati, cuteti\ cutayati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cutati,
cotayati, Wg .§.§ 28:84; 32:72], cuts; Dhatum 124 (cuta
chedane); Sadd 353,23 (cuta chuta tuta chedane: -ati);
531,28 (cutachu¡akuttachedane: -eti -ayati ... ).
cutete, cutayate, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup catayati,
Wg .§ 33:47, and cotayati, Wg .§32:72], splits; breaks;
Sadd 532,19 (cata cuta puta phuta vibhede: .. . -eti
-ayati ... ).
cutteti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cuqayati, Wg .§32:24], is or
beco mes small; Sadd 532,1 (put¡a cut¡a appabhave: ...
-eti -ayati, apparp bhavati ti attho ).
cu<}<}ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cu~~ati, Wg .§ 9:63], exhibits
passion; Sadd 356,5 (cu~~a havakara!)e: -ati); - see
also cullati.
CUI}teti, cul}tayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup CUJ)tayati,
Wg .§ 32:116], cuts; Sadd 532,14 (cuti chedane: -eti
-ayati).
CUI}I}a, m.n. [S. ciifl)a], l. (m.n.) a hard substance ground
into a powder or dust; powder, particles, dust; aromatic
powder; Abh 395 (-o parpsu rajo); 1021 (dhüliyaJ11 -o
-aJTI ca vasacUI)I)ake); Vin I 202,25 (anujanami
bhikkhave yassa k al)~ u va pi!aka va ... -ani bhesajjani);
Ja I 64,5 (dibbehi gandhehi malahi -ehi dhüpehi
püjayamana); 216,5 (tassa rukkhassa sakhasu
aññamaññaJ11 ghaJ11santisu -aJTI patati); II 16,8 (-o
agantva tassa nasaputesu pavisi); Vism 364,18 (-ato ...
dhatuyo manasikatabba); Sp 713,8 (sasapadlnarp -ehi
adiccapakena sakka telarp katurp); 1030,5 (yassa
godhaya viya gattato -am patanti); Ps IV 2,17
(agadangaran ti jhamaharitakassa va amalakassa va
-aJT~); - ifc see ghu!)a-; - -alTl karoti, reduces to
powder or dust, pulverises, destroys; Ja V 49,17* (tinarp
ca kat¡harp ca -aJTI karonta dhavirpsu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
ra!)aJ11 karonta; 50,7· foil.: ti!)aJ11 ca kaghaJ11 ca
CUJ)I)avicu!)I)aJ11 karonta, Be, E e so; Ce, Se -alTl
karonta); Sp 823,24 (da)haJ11 kot¡etva -alTl karonti); Mp I
244,26 (pañcakatukaJTI gahetva -arp katva);
esp. (i) powder used, mixed with water, for washing;
Vin I 47,12 (sace upajjhayo jantaghararp pavisitukamo
hoti, -alTl sannetabbarp mattika temetabba ... ; Sp 980,s:
-aJT~ sannetabban ti nhanacUI)I)aJ11 udakena temetva
pÍI)~ikatabbaJ11, Ee, Se so; Be pi!)<;ii katabba; Ce pi!)<;li
katabba); II 280,19 (na bhikkhave bhikkhuniya -ena
nahayitabbarp); III 185,2 (kulani düseti ... -ena va
mattikaya va ... ; Sp 628,6: -ena ti ettha pana attano
santakarp siñsacUI)I)arp va aññarp va kasavakasavalTl
kulasaiJ.gahatthaya deti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -e ti); D II
324,18 (tarp purisarp telena abbhañjitva sukhumena -ena
tikkhatturp suppadhotarp karotha ti); A I 208,4
(kathaJ11 . . . upakkilitthassa kayassa upakkamena
pariyodapana hoti, sottiJTI ca paticca -alTl ca paticca
udakarp ca paticca purisassa ca tajjaJ11 vayamaJTI
paticca); Th 937 (mattikarp telarp -alTl ca ... gihinarp
upanamenti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se telacUI)I)arp);
Sv 629,5 (nahapesun ti añño sañraJTI ubbagesi añño -ani
yojesi); - (ii) a powder (of crushed shells or lime)
CUI}I}aka
chewed with betel leaves; Mhv 35:62 (sa tambi1laiJ1
o -vajjitaiJ1 Vasabhassadasi); 35:63 (rajagehaduvaramhi
tambi1laiJ1 o -vajjitaiJ1 senapati udikkhitva taiJ1 o' -atthaiJ1
visajjayi); - ifc see anJana- (sv añjana2), aya-
(sv aya[s]), kacchu-, kuruvindaka-, gandha-
(sv gandha\ candana-, nahaniya-, masi-, vasa-
(sv vas a\ suvm:t~a-; - 2. (m.) plaster, lime; Abh 1021
(sudhayaiJ1 ... -o); - 0 -ciilani,f, a strainer; V in 1
202,3o (gilananaiJ1 bhikkhiinaiJ1 cu~~ehi bhesajjehi
calitehi attho hoti ... anujanami bhikkhave -in ti, E e, Se
so; Be, Ce 0 -calinin ti); - 0 -cm;u;mip (hutva), ind.,
being ground to a powder; having be en reduced to dust;
Sv 772,18 (cu~~akajatani ti -aJ!l hutva vippaki~~ani, Ce,
Se so; Be, Ee cu~~aiJ1 cu~~aJ!l) = Ps 1 273,31 (Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be cu~~aJ!l cu~~aJ!l); - see also cu~~avicu~~aiJ1
0
below; - -telaviilal}.qupaka, n., powder, oil and
bristle pad; Vis m 142,28 (-en a parimajjantassa) =
Nidd-a 1 128,19 (Be, Se so; Ce 0 -te1m:t¡;liipakena; Ee
cu~~ate1aiJ1 vaJm:t¡;lupakena) = Patis-a 182,12 =As 115,19
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr cu~~aJ!l va te1aiJ1 va 1eqqiipakena);
-
0
-padani, n.pl. [cfS. Cii!1,lapada], prose; Ps III 24,11
(-ehi va gathabandhanena va yattakaiJ1 sakkoti tattakaiJ1
vattabbaiJ1, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be cun~iya-) = Spk III 49,21
(Ee so; Ce cu~~aka-; Be, Se cu~~iya-) f- Ud-a415,3
(-ehi gathabandhehi ... , Ee so; Be, Ce, Se cu~~iya- );
Spk 1 279,2 (gatha bandhanto -ani karonto vicarati ti,
Ce, E e so; Be cu~~iya-; Se padani) = Th-a III 196,1 (Ee
so; Ce cu~~iya-, Be, Se Vm:t~a- ); - see also
cu~~iyapada; -
0
-VicUJ}.J}.a, mfn., 0 -ViCUJ}.J}.aip, adv.,
l. (mfn.) (i) crushed to powder; absolutely pulverised;
broken piecemeal; Ja 1 26,4 (ghatadini
ku1alabhajanani . . . annamannaiJ1 paharantani -ani
ahesuiJ1); 493,4 (sisatthini -ani ahesuiJ1); 11216,16
(sabbavada tassa padamiilaiJ1 patva -a honti ti);
III 497,13 (maya pi mara~amukhe -ena bhavitabban ti);
Vism 421,3 (-a hutva abhavaiJ1 gacchanti); Spk 1 78,4
(silaiJ1 ukkhipitva sama~o Gotamo -o hotii ti pavijjhi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -a); Nidd-a 1 28,23 (vippalujjanti ti
-a hutva apagacchanti); - (ii) divided or analysed into
particles;? Vism 272,11 (evaJ!l -a pi assasapassasa
hatthisarire ahisañre ca tesaJ!l attabhavasailkhataiJ1
dighaJ!l addhanaiJ1 sa~ikaiJ1 piiretva sa~ikam eva
nikkhamanti tasma digha ti vuccanti) = Sp 409,s
(Sp-t [Be] 11 189,12: -a pi anekakalapabhavena);
Patis-a 491,7 (-a assasapassasa digharassa nama na
honti); - 2. (adv.) as powder or dust; (i) cu~~a­
vicu~~aJ!l karoti, crushes to powder or dust; pulverises;
Ja 1 73,2 (vata ... gamanigame -aJ!l katuiJ1 samattha pi,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -e); 11 120,25' (atthini bhañjanta -aiJ1
katva); Sp 287,2 (ti~akutiyo bhinditva ti na
dm:t¡;lamuggarappaharadihi -aJ!l katva); Ap-a 203,4
(pabbatadayo -aiJ1 kurumano vicarati ti); 227,7
(Neruraja... cu~~ito -aJ!l kato asi); - (ii) cu~~a­
vicu~~aJ!l bhavati, apajjati, is crushed; becomes powder
or dust; Ja III 438,4 (so tatth' eva -aiJ1 hutva mari);
Spk 1 191,31 (pabhailguna ti -aJ!l apajjanadhammena);
III 42,1 foil. (yatha hi avatte patitadarukhandho ... -aiJ1
hoti, evaiJ1 pañcakamagu~avatte patitapuggalo ... --taiJ1
apajjati); 226,13 (evaiJ1 arakkhito antevasiko patitva -aiJ1
hoti); see also iimippabhedasamuggatajala-
156 CUJ}J}iya
cu~~aparikigga, godhapitthisadisacu~ga-okirm:takasañra
(sv godha 1).
CUJ}.J}.aka, n. [cf S. Ciif!faka], a hard substance ground into
a powder or dust; aromatic powder; powder for
washing; D 11 142,11 (tattha ye malaJ!l va gandhaJ!l va
-aiJ1 va aropessanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee va~gakaJ!l, prob.
wr) = 161,28 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee va~~akaiJ1); Ap 303,21
(udakassa katacchii ca -aiJ1 rajanammm:taJ!l); Ps 11 325,17
(ayacu~~aJ!l . . . koñcasakuge khadapenti . . . nesaJ!l
kucchiiJ1 phaletva . . . -aiJ1 gahetva); Th-a III 35,3o
(mukhaiJ1 -ena makkhitaiJ1);- 0 -gal}.qikii,f, a powder-
0
block; (or -bha~qika,f, sorts of powder;) Ps III 302,24
(cu~~akamakkhitan ti sasapakakkena mukhapiJakadini
haritva lo~amattikaya dutthalohitaiJ1 viliyapetva
tilapitthena lohitaiJ1 pasadetva haliddiya va~~aJ!l
sampadetva -aya mukhaiJ1 paharanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
cu~~akabha~qikaya); -
0
-jata, mfn., become powder;
tumed to dust; D 11 297,17 (atthikani piitini -ani) =M 1
58,37 f-A III 324,23;- 0 -makkhita, mfn., smeared with
powder; M 11 64,29* (mukhaJ!l -aiJ1) = Th 771 (Th-a III
35,32: mukhacu~~akavilepanaJ!l karonti).
1
CUJ}.J}.ati, se e sv cu~~eti .
CUJ}.J}.ana, n. [S. Ciif!fana], pounding; grinding; powdering;
Dhatum 804 (cu~~a -e); Sadd 473,12 (pisa -e); - ifc
see madda-.
CUJ}.J}.ika, see sv cu~~iya.
CUJ}.J}.iya, cu~~ika, mfn. and n. [perhaps < cu~~ita, pp of
1
cu~~eti qv; or cu~~a + ika; cf S. ciif!fa, ciif!faka,
ciif!fita; AMg cu~~ia], l. (mfn.) divided; analysed; ?
small, minar; ? Sv 202,19 (gate thite nisinne sutte ti idha
pana khuddaka -a iriyapatha kathita, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
khuddakacu~~iya-iriyapatha) = Ps 1 269,13 (Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se khuddakacu~~iya-iriyapatha; Ps-t [Be] 1
362,23 foil.: addhana-iriyapatha cirappavattika
dighakalika iriyapatha, majjhima bhikkhacarm:tadi-
vasena pavatta, cu~~iya-iriyapatha vihare aññattha pi ito
e' ito ca parivattanadivasena pavatta ti vadanti); -
2. (mfn. and n.) (with pada) in prose; prose; Sadd 11,18*
(attanopadayuttani -esu padesu hi ativ' appani, gathasu
padani 'tibahuni tu); 205,6* (gathayaiJ1 -e capi); 610,5*
(yaiJ1 -eh' eva padehi-m-abhisailkhataJ!l veyyakara~a­
sailkhataJ!l taiJ1 gajjan ti pavuccati); 610,9* (gathahi -eh'
eva padehi pi ca sailkhataJ!l missitva YaJ!l sagathatta taiJ1
0
geyyan ti pavuccati); - -pada, n., 0 -padiini, n.pl.,
prose; prose composition; Ps 11 167,22 (buddhanaiJ1
sañravm:t~aJ!l va gu~avm:t~aJ!l va -ehi va gathahi va ...
kathetuiJ1 vattati); III 24,11 (-ehi va gathabandhanena va
yattakaiJ1 sakkoti tattakaJ!l vattabbaJ!l, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
cu~~a-) = Spk 111 49,21 (Be, Se so; Ee cu~~a-; Ce
cu~~aka-) f- Ud-a415,3 (-ehi gathabandhehi ... , Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee cu~~a- ); Spk 1 279,2 (gatha bandhanto -ani
karonto vicarati ti, Be so; Ce, Ee cu~~a-; Se padani);
Sadd 190,6 (bhikkhave ti amanta~apadaiJ1 -esv eva
dissati na gathasu); 628,2 (gathasu ... -esu ... );
739,24foll. (akkharavipallaso paJiyaiJ1 gathasu yeva
labbhati na -esu . . . atthakathasu pana katthaci -es u pi
labbhati); - --racana,f, a composition in prose; a
pros e passage or work; Sadd 85,6 (--racanayaiJ1); 204,27
(mhiyantani itthilingariipani gathasu yeva paññayanti na
--racanayaiJ1); - (cu~gika)-piiduddhiira, m. [cf S.
cm;u;likaral).a
CÜ!l).apada ?], a movement of the feet, walking back and
forth; ? Nidd-a I 459,22 (abhikkante patikkante ti ettha
bhikkhacaragama¡p. gacchato agacchato ca addhana-
gamanavasena kathito, gate !hite ti ettha vihare --vasena
kathito ti veditabbo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -paduddhara-) f-
Vibh-a 364,33 (--iriyapathavasena); (cUJ?J?ika)-
maipsa, n., ground meat; small pieces of meat;? Ja I
243,23 (ki¡p. nu kho mahamaipsaip khadami udahu -an ti
cintetva -ena nama khippa¡p. kucchi¡p. püretu¡p. na
sakka ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se CUJ?J?ika¡p. ma¡p.san ti); -
(CUJ?J?ika)-manasikiira, m., attention to what is dust, or
to minar movements;? Sv 1056,17 (anapanaip catu-
iriyapatho satisampajañña¡p. dvatti¡p.sakaro catudhatu-
vavatthana¡p. dasa asubha nava sivathika -o kesadisu
cattari rüpajjhanani ti; Sv-pt III 358,24foll.: atthikani
terovassikani pütini CUJ?J?akajatani ti eva¡p.
pavattamanasikaro -o ti vadanti, apare pana bhaJ?anti
CUJ?J?ika-iriyapathesu pavattamanasikaro ti).
cm;n;tikaral}a, n. [S. lex. CÜ!l).ikaraJ?a], pounding,
grinding; breaking up, analysing; ? Vibh-a 52,13 (ko
ettha taya atibahu¡p. -a¡p. karontena attho ); Sadd 404,5
(peraJ?a¡p. -aip pi¡p.sana¡p.).
CUI}l}eti\ CUI}l}ayati, pr. 3 sg. rJrom CUJ?J?a; S. cüruayati],
reduces to powder; grinds; crushes; Dhatup 573 (CUJ?J?a
SaiJlCUJ?J?ane); Dhatum 804; Ja VI 161,26 (eta¡p.
udukkhale pakkhipitva musa1ehi kottetva -etu¡p. vanan
ti, Ce so; Ee udukkha1amusalehi pakkhipitva kottetva;
Be CUJ?J?aViCUJ?J?aiJl katu¡p.; Se CUJ?J?aiJl katu¡p.); Spk I
323,4 (vata ... jiJ?J?ahatthisaladini -en ti, Ce, Ee so; Be
-enta; Se CUJ?J?anta); Sadd 535,2o (CUJ?J?a peraJ?e: -eti
-ayati CUJ?J?aip); - part.pr. (a) CUJ?J?enta, mfn., Spk I
323,4 (vata ... jiJ?J?ahatthisaladini -enta, Be so; Ce, Ee
-enti; Se CUJ?J?anta) = Pj II 224,6 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
CUJ?J?anta); (b) CUJ?J?ayamana, mfn., Ja IV 457,23 (assa
atthini -ayamano viya saka1asariraip madditva, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se -iyamano); Sp 968,18 (Indasani viya pabbate
ki1esapabbate -ayamana¡p. yeva ñ~aip pavattati, Be, Ce
so; Se CUJ?J?iyamanam; Ee wr -iyamanaip yeva ña¡p.
pavattaJ?ti);- aor. 3 pl. CUJ?J?ayu¡p., Mhv 25:46 (Dami)e
tattha -ayu¡p.);- absol. CUJ?J?etva, Sp 716,1 (bahü piJ?qa
-etva ekabhajane pakkhitta honti); Mhv 23:80
(mahise . . . hatthena pacte gaJ?hitva bhametva
sisamatthake asumbhi bhümi¡p. -etva tesaip atthini
manavo); - pass. pr. 3 sg. CUJ?J?ati [cfS. cümyate ?]
Pañca-g 42 (paJ?ino ye -ayanti tatr' ayomusaleh' eva te
-anti punappunaip); - part.pr. CUJ?~iyamana, mfn.,
Ja VI 185,9 (atthini -iyamanani viya ahesu¡p.) =
Cp-a 120,25; - pp CUJ?J?ita, mfn. [S. cüll).ita], ground to
dust; crushed; Ap 21,14 (Neru ... -ito aJ?Ubhedena koti-
satasahassiyo); Mhv 29:3 (pas~e -ite ... mahahatthihi
maddayi).
2 maraJ?a ti -ato uddhaip); Ps IV 174,8 (-a¡p. na janati
CUI}l}eti , pr. 3 sg. rfrom CUJ?J?a], powders; covers with
powder; Vin II 107,24 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü mukha¡p.
alimpanti mukhaip ummaddenti mukhaip -en ti ... ;
Sp 1201,17: -enti ti mukhaCUJ?J?akena makkhenti);
Sv 88,31 (mukhaCUJ?~akena mukha¡p. -enti);
fpp CUJ?J?etabba, mfn., Vin II 107,29 (na mukhaip
-etabbam).
cuta, mfn., pp of cavati qv.
cuti,f [BHS id.; S. cyuti], l.falling from one existence (to
157 cuti
another), death; cessation; DI 162,15 (imesaip
tapassina¡p. eva¡p. agati¡p. ca gati¡p. ca -i¡p. ca upapatti¡p.
ca yathabhutaip pajanami); M I 49,24 (tesa¡p. tesa¡p.
sattanaip tamba tamha sattanikaya -i cavanata bhedo
antaradhanaip maccu maraJ?a¡p. kalakiriya) = Nidd I
l23,3o t- Pet 117,8; A II 159,22 (tamha kaya -i hoti);
Dhp 419 (-i¡p. yo vedi sattana¡p. upapatti¡p. ca sabbaso );
Ud 80,15 (tatrapahaip bhikkhave n' eva agati¡p. vadami
na gati¡p. na thiti¡p. na -i¡p. na upapatti¡p.); Jai 19,7* (-i
ca upapatti ca khaJ?e tasmi¡p. na vijjati) = Bv 2:106
(Bv-a 102,9: -i ti maraJ?aip); Ja III 358,27 (so hi n' eva
uparibrahmalokato -i¡p. na tattha upapatti¡p. anussari);
Pe! 9,19 (katama -i ca upapatti ca); Mil368,28
(patisandhi¡p. upapatti¡p. gabbhaseyya¡p. -i¡p. bhedaip
khaya¡p. ... disva); Vism 423,28 (yo hi 0 -mattam eva
passati na upapata¡p. so ucchedadighi¡p. gaJ?hati); 460,13
(ekasmi¡p. hi bhave ya¡p. sabbapacchimaip
bhavailgacittaip ta¡p. tato cavanatta -i ti vuccati);
Sp 439,1 (patisandhito pana yava -i etaip
addhanapaccuppanna¡p. nama); Sv 496,17 foil. (-ito
patisandhi¡p. patisandhito -in ti eva¡p. punappuna
cutipatisandhiyo gaJ?hanta); Nidd-a II 31,25 (tassa
viññ~aip caveyya ti tassa akiñcaññayatane uppannassa
vmnaJ?aip -i¡p. papuJ?eyya); 2.falling away;
abandoning (the holy life); Vin-vn 86 (vamantena
phuttha!hanaiJl atikkamayato -i); - 0 '-üpapiita, m.,
dying and coming into existence, death and rebirth;
D III 220,16 (sattanaip -e ñ~aip vijja); M III 266,s
(agatigatiya asati -o na hoti); S II 67,6 (-e sati ayati¡p.
jati jaramaraJ?a¡p. sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupayasa
sambhavanti); A II 183,11 (sattana¡p. -o bhikkhave
cakkhuna sacchikaraJ?iyo, Be, Ce so; Se cutupapato; Ee
wr cutuppato); Sn 902 (-o idha yassa natthi); Kv 230,19
(savako sattanaip -a¡p. janati ti); 235,12 (sattana¡p. -e
yathabhütaip naJ?aip tathagatabalaip ariyan ti);
Vism 543,36* (-e ... vimuyhati);- 0 -uppaijanavasena
in Ee at Spk II 372,27: read cuti, upapajjanavasena with
Be, Ce, Se;- -carima, m., the coming toan end which
0
is death; Nidd-a II 6,3ofoll. (assasapassasana¡p.
nirodhavasena tayo carima bhavacarimo jhanacarimo -o
ti ... ye pana cuticittassa purato so)asamena cittena sah'
uppanna te cuticittena saha nirujjhanti aya¡p. -o nama);
-
0
-Carimaka, mfn., final, coming toan end, in death;
Vism 291,z8foll. (tattha nirodhavasena tayo carimaka
bhavacarimaka jhanacarimaka -a ti . . . y e [assasa-
passasa] pana cuticittassa purato so)asamena cittena
saddhi¡p. uppajjitva cuticittena saha nirujjhanti ime -a
1
nama);- 0 -citta, n. [cuti + citta ], the thought-moment
at death; the final thought-moment of an existence;
Vism 460,19 (yo pan' ettha arahattaip papuJ?ati tassa -e
niruddhe niruddham eva hoti ti); Sp 166,31 (para¡p.
cutikhaJ?e pi cavami ti janati); Spk I 184,13 (tesu
jivitindriyaip -aip khepeti, aVIJJa maggacitta¡p.);
III 114,24 (imaip ca kayaip nikkhipati ti -ena
nikkhipati); Mp V 77,26 (ekass' eva hi -assa anantara
dutiye patisandhicitte devo nama hoti nerayiko nama
hoti tiracchanagato nama hoti); - o -pafisandhi-
0
paficchiidaka, -patisandhicchadaka, mf(-ika)n.,
concealing death and rebirth; Sp 167,22 (sattana¡p.
cuttiilisarp
0
-paticchadika avijja, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -patisandhi-
0
cchadika) =PsI 126,28 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -patisandhi-
0
cchadika) = Mp II 263,5 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -patisandhi-
cchadika); Sp 169,22 (sattanarp -arp avijj~gakosarp
pada1etva); Sv 1006,15 ( -patisandhicchadakarp tamarp
0
vijjhati . . . vijja) f::. As 408,18 (Be, Ce, E e so; Se
--tamarp); - 0 -pariyanta, mfn., ending with falling
from existence, with death; PsI 69,19 (patisandhiq¡ adirp
katva -arp sabbarp pi vattamanaka1arp gahetva) = Spk II
42,14; - accuti,f, absence of falling or death;
Vism 496,4 (nirodhasaccarp --rasarp); Th-a I 18,12
(accutarp pactan ti nibbanarp, tarp hi sayarp acavana-
dhammatta adhigatanaq¡ --hetubhavato ca natthi ettha
cutl ti accutarp);- see also asannacutika (sv as!dati).
cutuddase in Ee at Ap 165,23 is wrfor catuddase (Be, Ce,
Se so).
cuttiilisaq¡, f, num. [S. catvarirpsat], 40; Sadd 800,9
(cattallsarp -arp cottallsarp); - see also cattal!sa(q¡)
(sv cattarlsa[m)), cottallsam.
cudita, mfn. a~d m. [pp oÍ *cudati; cf S. v'cud, codati],
l. roused or exhorted to action; impelled; MI 337,30'
(yo ve buddhena -o bhikkhusali.ghassa pekkhato; =
Th 1192: eds codito); - 2. criticised, reproved; esp.
accused (of an offence); a bhikkhu accused of an
offence; Vin I 173,21 (so ce bhikkhave -o bhikkhu
parajikarp ajjhapanno ti patijanati); II 251,2 (-en' Upali
bhikkhuna dv!su dhammesu patiqhatabbarp sacce ca
akuppe ca ti); M I 95,31 (bhikkhu -o codakena codakarp
patippharati); A III 196,27 (akalen' ay asma -o no
ka1ena ... ); Sn 973 (-o vac!hi satimabhinande; Nidd I
503,5foll.: -o ti upajjhaya va acariya va ... codenti idarp
te avuso ayuttarp idarp te appattarp ... ; Pj II 57 4,9 foil.:
upajjhayadihi vacahi codito samano); - ifc see
dhamma- (sv dhamma\ - see also cujjamana, codita
(sv codati).
2 cuddasama, mf( -a, -J)n. [from cuddasa; AMg coddasama;
cuditaka, mfn. and m. [cudita + ka ], accused of an
offence; the bhikkhu accused of an offence; V in I 178,29
(codako -o ca); V 115,2o (-o pugga1ojanitabbo); 161,13
(-ena dvisu dhammesu patipajjitabbarp sacce ca akuppe
ca); Sp 585,15 (yarp parajikarp codakena -amhi pugga1e
n' eva dittharp na sutarp na parisali.kitaq¡ idaq¡ ...
amiilakarp nama); 590,18 (codakena vatthusmirp arocite
-o pucchitabbo santaq¡ etarp no ti); 1320,21 (codako
nama yo vatthuna va apattiya va pararp codeti; yo pana
evarp codito ayaq¡ -o nama); Sadd 542,18 (codako -o);
1 Ee cuddasaya); Mhv p. 109,4* (nagarappavesanarp nama
- ifc see dhamma- (sv dhamma ).
cuddasa, num. and mf( -a, -I)n. [= catuddasa qv sv catu(r);
AMg ca-uddasa, ca-uddasi, coddasa], l. (num.,
nom.lacc. cuddasa; instr. cuddasahi; gen./dat.
cuddasannarp; loe. cuddasasu) 14; Vin III 204,25
(dvThuppanne mil1acivare ... -e uppanne millacivare,for
14 days ?); DI 53,33 (-a kho pan' imani yonipamukha-
satasahassani); III 181,21 (so evaq¡ --papakapagato;
Sv 943,21: etehi -ahi papakehi 1amakehi apeto); M IIl
254,27 (-a kho pan' ime .. . patipuggalika dakkhil).a);
Ja Ili 211,15 (idani mayharp matapitughatakarp corarp -a
khal).gani katva chindissaml ti); Bv 10:5 (papul).l
kevalaq¡ bodhiq¡ buddhañiil).e ca -a); Vibh 436,7 (satt'
indriya rilpa -' indriya arilpa jivitindriyaq¡ si ya rilparp
siya arilparp); Mil349,3o (-a pal).akotiyo); Vism 240,9
158 cubuka
(imesarp -annaq¡ pabbanaq¡ vasena kayagatasati-
kammaqhanarp niddittharp); Sp 1279,7 (tayo parajika -a
sali.ghadisesa); Ps V 71,1 (-asu thanesu dinnadanarp
patipuggalikaq¡ nama hoti ti); Dhp-a IV 237,9* (sukhe ca
piyavagge ca gathayo honti dvadasa -a kodhavaggamhi,
Be, Ce [at end of Dhp] so; Ee, Se [at end of Dhp] -a);
Pv-a283,16 (-a game adasi); Th-aiii 11,28 (-ahi
upamahi mal).getva); Mhv 34:1 (MahacilF Mahatisso
akarayi rajjarp -a vassani); Sadd 800,5 (catilhi adhika
dasa -a coddasa catuddasa); - 2. (i) (mfn.) the 14th;
Pj II 183,11 (-aya [gathaya], Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
cuddasamaya); 489,9 (-ayarp [gathayarp)); Th-a II 75,4
(ito -e kappe); - (ii) (mfn.) containing (poems of) 14
verses; Th p. 68,29* (-amhi nipatamhi gathayo
aghavlsati); - (iii) H,f, scil. ratti) the 14th day of a
lunar fortnight; Mhv 19:39 (mahabodhiq¡ piljayanto ...
anayitva -iyaq¡ Anuradhapurantikarp);
0
-kappa, m.n., the 14th aeon; Ap 219,3 (ito -amhi
ahosiq¡ Amitañja1o); - 0 -kkhattuq¡, ind., 14 times;
Dhp-a IV 62,21 (-urp parivattitva); Vism 399,36;
0
-vassa, mfn., of 14 years; 14 years old; Ja VI 8,6
(--ka! e, Ce, E e so; Be, Se 0 -vassikakale); -
0
-vidha,mfo., 14-fold; of 14 kinds; Vism616,11 (-arp
rilparp); Sp 415,27 (-arp mahavattan ti);- -ena, adv., in
14 ways; PsI 240,16 (-ena kayanupassanarp bhavetva);
Mil 12,23 (sali.gaho asali.gaho ti adina -ena vibhattarp
0
dhatukathapakar~aq¡); Vism 679,31; - -hattha, mfn.,
measuring 14 hattha measures; Jai 71,2o (tavad eva-o
pallaii.ko ahosi); Sv 458,29 (-arp pallali.kaq¡ paññapetva);
- see also catuddasa (sv catu[r)), catuddasi, coddasa.
cuddasaka, m. and mfn. [from cuddasa], a set of 14;
containing (poems of) 14 verses; Th p. 68,3o ( -nipato
0
niqhito, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee cuddasanipato); Th-a I 3,21
(
0
-nipate dve thera aqhavlsati gatha, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
cuddasanipate ).
cf S. caturdasama], the 14th; Vin V 106,3o (yatthavaraq¡
nighitarp -arp); M III 255,13 (ayarp -1 patipuggalika
dakkhil).a); A I 94,17 (santharavaggo -o); Snp. 216,11
(posa1amiil).avapuccha -a, Be, Se so; Ce posalasuttarp
-arp; Ee posalamiil).avapuccha nighita); Ja I 341,24
(terasamaq¡ kathehi ti ... -arp kathehl ti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee cuddasaq¡, prob. wr); VI 230,33' (-e divase ); Sp 72,8
(Jambudipe Udayabhadrassa -e vasse idha Vijayo
kalam akasi); Pj II 183,11 (-aya [gathaya], Be, Ce, Se so;
-o paricchedo);- see also catuddasama (sv catu[r)).
cunda, m. [cf S. lex. kunda], a turner; a carver; Ja VI
261 ,15* (acchecchi kali.kharp vicikicchitani -o yatha
nagadantarp kharena; 261,22"joll.: yatha dantakaro
kakacena hatthidantaq¡ chindeyya); Mi1331 ,6
( ... nahapaka -a malakara ... ); Mp I 349,23 (itthiyo ...
-anaq¡ santikaq¡ pesetva karal).gakarp aharapetva attana
attana gahitadarake tattha nipajjapetva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-karakanaq¡ ... kar~~ake ... ) = Thi-a 179,28 (Ce so;
0
Be, Ee, Se 0 -karakanarp ... kar~gake);- -kara, m., a
turner; a carver; Abh 509 (-o bhamakaro ); Ja VI 339,12'
(khadiradaJ!gakaq¡ aharapetva . . . -ena sughu
likhapetva); Sp 1242,2 (in long cpd).
cubuka, cubilka, n. [S. cubuka], the ehin; Abh 262 (-aq¡
combata
tv adhara adho, Be so; Ce cublikaql); Sadd 921,23
(mattabhedo tava ... -o clibuko ).
cumbap., n. [cf Pkt cuqlbhala, and CDIAL 4869], a coil, a
ring; a circular roll of cloth (used as a stand for a
vessel, esp. when carried on the head); Vin III 140,5
(obhatacumba~a nama -aql oropetva vaseti; Sp 555,31:
obhatacumba~a. kaghaharikadinaql aññatara, yassa
sisato -aql oropetva ghare vaseti, tassa etaql
adhivacanaql); Ja V 413,11foll. (dasisu udakatthaya
nadiql gantva -ani bhlimiyaql nikkhipitva sukhakathaya
nisinnasu ekissa -aql eka sakasaññaya gm¡.hi); Spk I
350,22 (so pi -aql aruyha kapa1aql adaya da~9arp
o1ubbha); Mhv 41:95 (mahacetiyattaye 'kasi
sudhakarnma111 ca -aql); - ifc see obhata-, duküla-; -
o -kalaha, m., the quarrel about the head-coil (se e 1a V
413,11foll.); Mp IV 132,8 (-e, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
cumba~aka- ); Th-a I 216,15 (--vlipasamatthaql satthari
gate);- see also udakacumba~akalaha.
cumbataka, n. [cumba~a + ka2], a coil, a ring; a circular
roll of cloth (to support a vessel); a ring of flowers;
Abh 458 (a~9lipakaql -aql); Ja III 87,6 (kakkarüni nama
dibbapupphani tehi katacumba~akaql pilandhitva ussava-
dassanaql agamiqlSU, Be, Ce so; Ee katacumba!aql; Se
katacumbitakaql); V 292,13 (nanavidhaql ma1avikatiql
ganthitva ... nanarupavicitra111 eka111 -a111 akasi, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se cumbitakaql); Ps II 158,29 (cela~9ukena ti
ettha ce1aql vuccati vatthaql, a~9ukaql -aql,
vatthacumba~akaql sise katva); Dhp-a I 139,12 (cattaro
asivise catlisu hatthapadesu ekaql givaya pilandhitva
ekaql sise -a111 katva ekaql ekaqlsaql karitva); II 88, 1s
(pañcahi sa~akasatehi saddhiql -ani katva); V v-a 33,23
(pithe atthataql sa~akaql -aql katva); Thlip 208,27 (raja
sannahaql -aql katva pattaql vissajjesi); - ifc see
duküla-; - 0 -kalaha, m., the quarrel about the head-
coil (see Ja V 413,11foll.); Mp I 313,8 (-e, Ce, Ee so; Be
cumba~aka-; Se cumbi~akulageha).
cumbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cumbati], kisses; Dhatup 197
(cumba vadanasaqlyoge); Dhatum 285; Ja V 434,1**
(darakaql ... -ati -apeti) = Dhp-a IV 197,4; Sv 530,25
(mata -issami ti onata); Sadd 405,21 foil. (cuba
vadanasaqlyoge: puttaql muddhani -ati, mukhe -ati); -
part.pr. cumbanta, mfn., Ja II 193,3o· (puttaql me disva
raja tam eva -anto parissajanto ); Ud-a 88,11 (bhagavato
pade sambahanto -anto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
paricumbanto);- absol. cumbitva, Ja V 328,21 (puttaql
Nandaql a1iilgitva sisa111 ghayitva -itva); VI 291 ,3* (te
agate muddhani Dharnmapalo -itva putte
avikampamano); Vv-a 260,26 (raja puttaql a1iilgitva sise
-itva); - caus. pr. 3 sg. cumbapeti, Ja V 434,1 ** =
Dhp-a IV 197 ,4.
cumbana, n. [ts], kissing; Ja V 436,2r ( 0 ' -adisu);
Sp 535,19 ( 0 ' -adisu yaql ajjhacaraql icchati); Sadd 329,26
(nikkha -e); 405,24 (pabbatakli~e arnbudharabindlina111
-arn vuttan ti).
cullai, clija 1, cüla, mfn. [S. k~udra, k~ulla; cf BHS cli9a,
clilla; AMg culla] (in Be usually elija; in Ce usually
culla; allforms in Ee, Se); small; minor; lesser; Abh 705
(kisarn tanu cullarn, eds so); 1119 (cullo khudde, eds
so);__:__ (cli!')-aqlS~, m. [elija+ a111sa3], the smaller side
or edge; Sv 423,24 (suvm¡.~i~~aka karetva -ena chadetva
159 colla
viharaghanaql ki~iqlSU ); - (cli!')-añguli,f, the 1itt1e
finger; Dhp-a II 86,17 (taql karnbalaql -iya ve¡hetva
aggahesi, Be, Se so; Ce, E e cülail.guliya); - o• -antara-
duka, clijantaraduka, n., the minar intermediate paír( s);
Dhsp. 3,6 (-aql, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se clijantaradukaql;
As 36,34 foil.: satta duka aññarnaññe asambandha ...
gocchakantare !hapitatta aññehi ca mahantaradukehi
cullakatta -a veditabba, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se clijakatta
clijantaraduka); As47,26 (-esu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
clijantaradukesu); - 0 -upatthaka, clijÓ.paghaka, m., a
personal attendant; Ja II 325,9 (ekaql abhirüpaql
muduhatthaql -aql sajjaql katva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
clijupa\\hakaql); Ps V 42,16 (añño koci daghuql na
1abhati, eko va -o pavisati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
clijupa\\hako); Spk III 84,3o (rajavallabho clijupaghako,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce cüllipaghako); Dhp-a I 135,6 (sa -aql
pucchi atthi kiñci patiyaql tata ti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
clijlipa\\hakaql); II 260,19 (sa ekena attano -ena saddhiql
vippa~ipaJJI, Ce so; Be, Ee clijlipaghakena; Se
clijupa~~akena);- -gandhara, clijagandhara, m., 'the
0
minar gandhara', the name of a magic spell; Th-a I 54,3
(clijagandhara111 nama vijjaql sadhetva, taya vijjaya
akasacañ paracittavidli ca hutva) = Ap-a 321,27 (Be, Se
so; Ce -aql; Ee cüla-); - 0 -dvara, clijadvara, n., a
smaller door; a small gate; Ja II 114,18 (-ena
nikkharnitva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be elija-); VI 391,28 (ahaql
hi -ena nagaraql pavisitva, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee elija-);
459,13 (asiti mahadvarani catusanhi -ani, Se so; Be, Ce,
E e elija-); Dhp-a II 199,15 (clijadvarani pi pidhaya
nagaraql uparundhatli ti); - 0 -nataka, n., or -a,f, a
group of junior dancing gírls, of concubines; ora junior
concubine; Ja V 279,10 (pa~hamaql tava ekaql sattahaql
-aql dharnmana(akaql katva vissajjetha, sace sa puttaql
labhissati sadhu, noce atha majjhimana!akaql
vissajjetha); o -niddesa, clijaniddesa, m., se e
sv niddesa; - (clija)-nipphava, m., a kind of pulse;
Sp 836,7 ( --pupphaql, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee clijhanippava-,
prob. wr);- 0 -pati, clijapati, m., a brother-ín-law; Ja V
288,26 (bodhisattassa bhatujaya -ino aññaql plivaql
pacissami ti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee elija-); - 0 -pita(r),
clijapita(r), m. (nom. -a; acc. -araql; instr. -ara;
gen.ldat. -u, -uno, -ussa; voc. -a; iic 0 -pitu-, 0 -piti-),
one's father's brother, an uncle; an elder male relative;
Ja I 387,25 (cullarnatara -ara, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se elija-);
II 5,26 (mata bhata bhagini cullamata -a ti sabbe pi
ñataka, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be elija-); 393,7 (ayasmato
[Rahu1assa] ... -a Anandatthero pita sarnmasambuddho,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se elija-); III 456,9 (raja . . . amhakaql
¡hanantaraql mama -ussa dassati ti, Se so; Be elija-; Ce,
Ee petteyyassa); Mi1204,17 (Sariputto anekesu
jatisatasahassesu bodhisattassa pita ahosi mahapita ahosi
-a ah o si bhata ahosi ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be elija-); Sp 7,5
(Sakyakulappasuto cayaql ay asma [Á.nando]
tathagatassa bhata clijapituputto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
cüla-); 4 70,9 foil. (aparesaql pi dasanna111 katuql
vanati . . . clijarnatuya mahamatuya clijapituno maha-
pituno pitucchaya matulassa ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce cüla-);
Ps II 61,19 (Mahanamo ti Anuruddhattherassa bhata,
bhagavato 0 -pituputto, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be elija-); 235,5
(dvinnaql cullapitimahapitiputtanarp dve gama, Ce, Ee,
cuila
Se so; Be cüJapiti-); Dhp-a I 220,12joll. (cüJapitu
sasan3111 pahil).i ... kirp etarp cüJapita ti);- 0 -mata(r),
cüJamata(r),f [cf AMg cullamau, cullamauya,
"stepmother"] (nom. -a; acc. -ar3111; instr. -ara;
gen./dat. -uya, -aya), one's mother's sister, an aunt;
Jai 387,25 (-ara cullapitara, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cü!a-);
II 5,26 (mata bhata bhagini -a cullapita, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be cü!a-); Sp 470,Jo (cü!amatuya mahamatuya, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce cüla-); 1011,23 (matapitaro mata, darako
cü!amatadin3111 santike s3111va99ho ); Ps I 69,24 (-aya
kira putto mul).9o mahamataya putto amul).9o, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se cü!a-) = Spk II 42,19 (eds cüJamataya); Ud-a 168,6
(matucchaputto ti cüJamatuputto ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee cülamatu-); Sadd 410,27 (mata ti janika va cüJamata
va mahamata va); - 0 -sayanaka, n., a small bed, a
couch; Ja III 283,2 (kumarika .. . pitar3111
darathapatippassambhanattharp -e nipannarp tala-
V31).!ena vijayamana, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be cü!a-);- -Sila, 0
cüJasila, n., the lesser (rules of) moral behaviour, DI
5,27 (-3111 ni!!hit3111, Ce, Se so; Be cü!a-; E e cüla-); Ja I
276,8 (id3111 -arp nama, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cü!a-);
Mil 336,20 (-arp majjhimasilarp mahasilarp, Ce, E e so;
Be, Se cü!a-); Ps V 39,25 (cüJasilamajjhimasila-
mahasiladini ekadesena likhitva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -3111
majjhimasil3111 mahasiladini, prob. wr); Dhp-a IV 30,12
(-arp majjhimasilarp mahasi\3111, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
cü!a-); - 0 -Sotiipanna, cüJasotapanna, m., a 'lesser
stream-enterer'; Vism 605,6 (imina pana n3J).ena
samannagato vipassako ... niyatagatiko -o nama hoti,
Ce, E e so; Be, Se cü!a-); Ps II 120,25 (poral).akathera
pana evarüp3111 bhikkhurp cüJasotapanno ti vadanti).
culla 2, m. [cf S. culli], a fireplace, hearth; Abh 1119 (-o
khudde ca uddhane); Vin I 286,7 (anujanami bhikkhave
rajanarp paciturp -3111 rajanakumbhin ti, Be so; Ce
cullirp; Ee -rajanakumbhin ti; Se cüJarajanakumbhirp);
0
Ap 577,22 (tada udakam ahatva okiritvana kumbhiya -e
thapetva asina tato cittarp samadahirp);- see also culli.
cullaka, cüJaka, mfn. and n.(?) [culla 1 + ka2;
cf S. k~ullaka], l. (mfn.) small; lesser; As 37,2; (satta
duka ... gocchakantare ~apitatta aññehi ca mahantara-
dukehi -tta cullantaraduka veditabba, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
cüJakatta cü!antaradukaso); - 2. (n.) [perhaps rather
connected to catu(r), catuttha; cf cullasiti], a small part,
a quarter; Sp 626,23 (Mahapaccariy3111 cüJakarp daturp
vanati ti VUtt3111, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cü!hakarp, wr;
Sp-! [Be] II 376,18: cü!akan ti upa99habhagato pi
upa99h3111, catutthabhagass' etarp adhivacan3111); Ps IV
6,21 (KaJavilangiyo pi t3111 than3111 patto -arp labhi, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se cülakam); - see also addhacüla
(sv addha\- 0 '-addha(n), m., a short time; ·~iv 596,2
(rattavasesan ti balavapaccüse parinibbutatta rattiya
avases3111 -anarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cullak31).9iinarp,
prob. wr);- (cüJaka)-cchanna, mfn., partly covered, a
quarter covered; Sp 749,25 (sabbaparicchanne cüJaka-
cchanne dukkat3111: Sp-! [Be] III 10,14: yassa catüsu
bhagesu eko channo sesa acchanna idarp cü!aka-
cchann3111).
cullati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cuilati, Wg § 15:24], exhibits
passion; Dhatum 403 (cuila havakriye); Sadd 436,13
(cuila havakar31).e: havakar31).3111 vilasakar31).3111, -ati);
160 cüJa
-se e also cuMati.
cullasiti, cüJasiti, num. [= caturasiti qv sv catu(r);
cf AMg culasi, culasii], 84; D I 54,11 (-i mahakappuno
satasahassani yani bale ca p31).9ite ca sandhavitva
sarpsaritva dukkhass' antarp karissanti) = MI 518,5 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se cüJasiti) t Pv 38:32 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
cüJasiti; Pv-a 254,12: -i ti caturasiti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
cü!asm ti); Thi 51 (-i sahassani sabba Jivasanamika, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se cüJasiti); Ja VI 226,21* (anupubbena no
suddhi kappan3111 -iya); Ap 21,11 H sahassani
ajjhogaJho mah3l).l).ave .. . giriraja); Nidd I 42,18* H
sahassani kappa tit~anti ye marü, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
cüJasiti); Sadd 800,12 (-i).
culli, cüJi, cüli, f [S. culli], a fireplace, hearth; oven;
Abh 455 (athoddhanarp ca-!); Pj I 50,3 (kati!!hini dve pi
ekabaddhani hutva kumbhakarehi katacullis31).!hiinani,
Be so; Ce -culli-; Ee -cüli-; Se -cüli-; = Vism 254,22: eds
kumbhakarika-uddhanasal).thanani); - see also culli.
cuJikabaddha, see sv cülikabaddha.
cücuka, n. [ts], a nipple; Abh 270 (-am tu
thanaggasmirp).
CÜJ]eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cül).ayati, Wg § 32:99],
contracts; Sadd 535,19 (CÜI).a sankocane: -eti -ayati).
cüta, m. [ts], the mango; Abh 557 (ambo -o); Bv-a 168,29
(in long cpd); Samantak 609 (in long cpd); - cüta in Ee
at D II 274,21* (cüta maya te sati paccalatthurp) is
probably wr; Se cudita; Be, Ce codita . . . satim
ajjhalatthurp.
cütaka, m. [S. !ex. id.], the mango; Samantak 390 (in long
cpd).
cübuka, m. [S. cubuka], the chin; Sadd 921,23
(mattabhedo tava ... cubuko -o); - see also cubuka.
cülikabaddha, mfn. [cf BHS cü9ikabaddha,
cü9ikavabaddha], filled full, crammed; ? S II 182,17
(ayas3111 nagar3111 ... pUI).I).3111 sasapan3111 -arp, Ce so; Ee
cuJikabaddharp; Be gu¡ikabaddh3111; Se gu!ikabandharp).
cüJa 1, se e sv cuila 1.
2
cüJa , see sv cüJa2 .
cüJaka, see sv cuilaka.
cüJanika, mfn. [cfcü!a and BHS cü9ika], small; lesser;
A I 228,3 (yavata . . . candimasuriya pariharanti disa
bhanti virocana tava sahassadha loko . . . ayarp
vuccati ... sahassi -a lokadhatu ... yavata ... sahassi -a
lokadhatu tava sahassadha loko ayarp vuccati ...
dvisahassi majjhimika Iokadhatu; Mp II 341,3: -a ti
khuddika); Nidd I 356,17 (sahassirp pi -3111lokadhaturp
passeyya).
1
cüJa ,f [S. cü9a], l. a lock or tuft of hair left on the crown
of the head after tonsure; a knot of hair, a topknot;
Abh 258 (-a sikha); 864; Ja I 64,31 (dakkhil).ahatthena
asirp g31).hitva vamahatthena moliya saddhirp -arp
gahetva chindi); 462,2 (matthake -a viya thokani lomani
attharpsu); II 363,9 ([kakassa] sakalasariralomarp
luñcitva matthake -3111 ~apetva); V 153,14' (Isisingan ti
tassa kira matthake migasingakarena dve -a
unhahirpsu); 187,9 (rañña -arp chinditva savethana -a
mahajanantare khitta bhavissati); VI 135,18' (sabbe amhe
matthake -arp thapetva attano cetake karohi); Ps III
112,25 (te ... nisinnake yeva -asu gahetva); Spk II 30,1
(moli ti -a vuccati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se cüla); 76,27 (yatha
cüJa
hi -aya gahite puriso gahito va hoti); Dhp-a I 294,28
(saha bhm.JJ;!akena cora111 -aya ga~hantl viya); - 2. a
cock's comb; a peacock's crest; Abh 634; Ja 11
4l0,12foll. (sabbaseto ... kukkuto suv~~apañjare
pakkhipitva thapito atthi, tassa -aya siri patitthasi ...
tassa -ato apagantva uss!sake thapite m~ikkhandhe
patighasi); 111 311 ,21· (sikh~<;lino ti -aya samannagata);
- ifc see tamba-; - 0
-mat}i, m., a jewel worn on the
top of the head; Abh 283 H sirom~i); Ja I 382,13 (ath'
ekadivasa111 rañño -i nagho ); V 441 ,31 (dve pute katva
ekasmi111 payasa111 pakkhipitva ekasmi111 -i111 thapetva);
Ps V 43,5 (saddhi111 -ina kesakalapa111 parisamajjhe
patesi); Spk I 248,9 (sakalaJambudlpe manussana111 sise
-i viya abhavissa); Mhv 33:46 (datva -i111 subh~); -
see also tambacülaka (sv tamba), pañcacüla,
pañcacülaka, lambacülaka.
cüJa 2, f (or cü)a2, m.) [cf cü)ika], the root or base of the
ear (of an elephant); - ifc see k~~a-.
cüJasiti, see sv cullaslti.
cüJi, cüli, see sv culll.
cü!ika, f [S. cülika], the root of the ear (of an elephant);
Abh 363 (ka~~amülan tu -a);- ifc see k~~a-.
cü!ha- in Ee at Sp 833,10 (cülhapañcamül~) and
Sp 836,7 (cülhanippavapuppha) is wr for cüla- (Be, Ce,
Se so).
cü!haka in Ee at Sp 626,23 is wr for cülaka (Be, Ce, Se
so).
cüsati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cü~ati, Wg § 17:22], drinks;
Sadd 441,26 (cüsa pane: -ati).
ce, ind. [S. ced] (never at beginning of sentence or
phrase), if (usually with present indicative or opt., so
even for conditions in the past); Abh 1147 (ce tu sace
yadi); Vin I 275,12 (ah~ ce t~ gahapati na vadeyy~
ettaka111 pi tva111 na nipajjeyyasi); 111 105,28 (ah~ ce
ta111 vyakareyya111 pare ca me na saddaheyyu111 ... tes~
ta111 assa dlgharatta111 ahitaya dukkhaya); 265,12 (turnhe
ce amhaka111 na dassatha atha ko carahi amhaka111
dassati); D I 3,5 (tatra ce tumhe assatha kupita ...
tumh~ yev' assa tena antarayo); A V 131,11
(akailkheyya ce bhikkhave bhikkhu ... ; Mp V 49,8:
akailkheyya ce ti yadi iccheyya); Dhp l (manasa ce
padutthena bhasati va karoti va tato n~ dukkham
anveti); 64 (yavajlva111 pi ce balo p~<;lit~ payirupasati
na so dhamm~ vijanati); 157 (attan~ ce piya111 jañña
rakkheyyya na111 surakkhit~); It 19,5* (ev~ ce satta
janeyyu111 yatha vutt~ mahesina; It-a I 87,14: ce ti
parikappane nipato); Sn 457 (brahma~o ce tv~ brüsi
ma111 ca brüsi abrahma~a'Tl); Th 129 (api ce hoti
tevijjo ... appaññato ti na111 bala avajananti); Ja 111 SS,21
(sakalo pi ce lokasannivaso m~ danena vlm~seyya);
lll ,20* foil. (so ce adhamma111 carati pag eva itara paja
sabba111 ragh~ dukkha111 seti raja ce hoti adhammiko);
Mil297,9 (vassasate pi ce maharaja puriso kata111
kusal~ avajjeyya); Vism 48,10* (appassuto pi ce hoti
s!lesu asamahito ubhayena na111 garahanti); Sadd 900,2o
(ce yadi ice ete sailkavatthane); - ce in Ee at Ja V
508,1* and 508,5* is wr for ve (Be, Ce so; Se wr me);-
atha ce, so if; then if, Sn 18 (channa kuti ahito gini atha
ce patthayasl pavassa deva; Pj 11 28,26foll.: idani yadi
icchasl ti vutt~ hoti) f. Th 51; -ti ce, (at the end of an
161 cetaka
objector's statement), ifit be argued that ... ; (at the end
of a query), if someone asks ... ; Vism 297,5 (ta111
virujjhati na hi tattha attani bhavana vutta ti ce, ta111 ca
na virujjhati); 499,13 (kasma pan' esa dukkha ti ce,
anekes~ dukkhana111 vatthubhavato); Sp 146,21
(avuttatta ekaggata ailg~ na hotl ti ce, t~ ca na,
kasma, vuttatta eva); Sv 863,22 (t~ kasma ti ce
yasma ... ); Nidd-a 11 52,18 (katha111 anussaratl ti ce
amutrasin ti adina nayena);- no ce, ifnot; Vin III 150,2
(no ce sabbo sailgho ussahati kutivatthui11 oloketu111);
176,9 (sace patinissajjanti ice et~ kusala111 no ce
patinissajjanti apatti dukkatassa); Dhp 329 (no ce
labhetha nipak~ sahaya111); Ja 11 l90,1o (idani me ...
uyyanapala111 mapehi no ce mapessasi jlvitan te n' atthl
ti); Vism 67,20* (deva pihayanti tadino no ce
labhasilokanissito); Sp 676,25 (no ce icchati na
kathetabba111); Sv 822,8 (sace katheti sundara111 no ce
katheti sam~a'Tl Gotama111 musavadena niggahessaml
ti); Spk 11 212,13 (sace musa bh~asi matar~ te
vissajjessama, no ce bha~asi na vissajjessama ti);
Ap-a 565,2o (ten' assa idan' eva pabbajitu111 yutt~ no
ce pabbajissati parinibbayissatl ti); - ya111 ce, (after
comparative) than; than that; V in III 90,28* (seyyo
ayogulo bhutto tatto aggisikhüpamo ya111 ce bhuñjeyya
dussllo ratthapi~9ai11 asaññato); SI 176,18* (d~<;lo va
kira me seyyo y~ ce putta anassava); Dhp 106 (sa yeva
püjana seyyo y~ ce vassasata111 huta111); Ja I 249,3*
(seyyo amitto medhavl y~ ce balanukampako;
cf249,s foil.: ya111 ce balanukampako ti ettha yan ti
liii.gavipallaso kato, ce ti namatthe nipato, yo nama balo
anukampako tato satagu~ena sahassagu~ena p~<;lito
amitto honto pi seyyo yeva ti attho, atha va yan ti
patisedhanatthe nipato, no ce balanukampako ti attho);
VI 495,27* (tad eva mar~a111 seyyo y~ ce jlve taya
vina); Sadd 902,1 (ya'Tl ce iti patisedhatthe);- see also
sace.
cecea, absol. of ceteti qv.
ceta, m. [ts], a servant, an underling; Ja III 478,6* (yada
samuddika111 nav~ ... -o adaya gaccheyya, Be Ce, Ee
so; Se ceto; 478,2o'foll.: yada evarüp~ nav~
khuddako gamadarako hatthena gahetva gaccheyya ti
attho); Sadd 353,13 (ceta cetay~: cetati -o);- ceto in
Ee at Spk I 56,23* is prob. wr for ceto (Be, Ce so).
cetaka\ m. [ts], a servant; a slave; Abh 514 (daso ca -o
pesso); Vin IV 66,21 (ki111 pana tv~ gahapati mahanage
titthamane -e nimantesl ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se cetake);
Ja 111 281,2 (raja -e kasa gahapetva ubhosu passesu
paharapesi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se coraghatake); IV 82,16
(raja g~hatha dasa bhatike -e ti ughahi, Be so; Se
cetake ti; Ce, Ee bhatikacetake ti); VI 135,18' (sabbe
arnhe matthake cüla111 thapetva attano -e karohi);
Ap 317,9 (bhataka -a e' eva, Be, Ce so; Ee gltaka; Se
celaka); Cp 2:4:7 (tassa sarattagadhito gahapetvana
-e ... antepur~ pavesayi; Cp-a 135,29: -ehi g~hapetva
-e va attano rajapurise a~apetva ta111 paribbajika111
ga~hapetva); Mil 222,28 (dasidasacetakaparivaraka-
manussa); Ps V 46,14 (rajja111 pahaya antamaso mukha-
dhovanadayakai11 pi -a111 agahetva); Mhv 33:37 (eko
brahmanacetako ).
cetaka 2, ·m. . [cf AMg ce<;laya], a class of sam~era;
 cetaki
Sp 253,35 (kumarako ti ma~ dharehi cellako -o
mojigallo sama1_1uddeso ti ma~ dhareh1 ti eva~
sama1_1eravevacanena sikkhapaccakkhan~ hoti, Be so;
Ce, Ee monigallo; Se -o petako mo1_1igallo; Sp-t [Be] II
80,2: kumarako ti kumaravattho ativiya daharasama1_1ero,
cellako ti tato mahantataro khuddakasama1_1ero, -o ti
majjhimo, mojigallo ti mahasama1_1ero; t Vmv [Be] 1
135,zo f Vjb [Be]99,19).
cefaki, f [from cetaka 1], a female servant; Bv-a 220,6
(itthiyo ca tasa~ paricarika -iyo ca thapetva, Ce, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Se cetikayo).
cetati\ pr. 3 sg. [,/cit 1; S. Dhatup cetati, Wg § 9:28], sends
out; Dhatum 113 (cit' akkose ca pesane); Sadd 352,3o
(cita pesane: -ati cetako).
cetate, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. ce~tate], moves, acts, exerts oneself;
Sadd 353,13 (ceta cetaya~: -ati ceto).
cetika,f [ts], afemale servant; Spk I 274,3 (ima~ g1tika~
gayantiya -aya sutva arahatt~ patto); Th!-a246,11
(aggaku1ika vibhavasampanna pi patiparicarika -a viya);
Bv-a 220,6 (paricarika ca -ayo thapetva, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee cetakiyo); Mhv 5:60 (Asoko madhudo 'sandhimitta
devl tu -a);- ifc see ghata- (sv ghata\
ceti, f [ts ], a Jemal e servant; Abh 236 (-1 kutadharika);
Mhv 5:51 (tittha~ jalattha~ gacchanti eka -1 tam
addasa).
ceta 1, cheta, m., Npr. (of people [hunters ?), see Ja VI
514,9* foll.) but sometimes used to denote a hunter; ? SI
198,23 (ayasma Kassapagotto divaviharagato aññatar~
-a~ ovadati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se cheta~; Spk I 289,3o:
-an ti ek~ migaluddaka~. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se chetan ti;
cfJa VI 527,6: Cetaputto migaluddako hutva araññe
vicaranto); 198,30* (giriduggacar~ -~ appapaññ~
acetasa~ akale ovad~ bhikkhu, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
cheta~); Spk 1 56,23* (-o kütani oMetva sasaka~ avadh1
tada, Be, Ce so; Ee ceto; Se cheto; Spk-t [Be] I 100,21:
-o ti vyadho); Ap 17,10 (-a ca luddaka e' eva upaj1vanti
t~ sara~); Sadd 143,18 (-o ti citta~ eva~namako va
luddo .... luddo pana pa1_11_1attivasena).
ceta2 , m. [from cinati], a builder; Sadd 495,25 (cinati ti -o,
iqhakava<;h;lhaki).
ceta(r), m. [from cinati/cinoti], one who piles up; a
builder; Sadd 143,17 (cinoti ras1karoti ti -a, pakara-
cinanako puggalo, iqhakava99hak1 ti attho ).
ceta(s), n. [S. cetas] (sg. nom.lacc. ceto; instr. cetasa;
gen. cetaso; cfSadd 143,27: ceto ceta cet~ cete cetasa
cetena ti manoga1_1anayena [padamala] ñeyya; iic ceto-),
the mind as the process of thinking, thinking; thought,
thoughts (often not to be distinguished from citta qv );
Abh 152 (citt~ -o mano); Vin I 4,33 (bhagavato
rahogatassa patisallinassa eva~ -aso parivitakko
udapadi); 28,2o (mahiddhiko kho mahasama1_1o
mahanubhavo yatra hi nama -asa pi citta~ pajanissati);
11 184,22 (araññagato pi... abhito anubbiggo ...
appossukko pannalomo paradavutto migabhiitena -asa
viharami) t MI 450,6 (Psiii 167,5:/oll.:
apaccasi~sanapakkhe thita hutva viharanti); DI 37,13
(vitakkavicarana~ viipasama ajjhatta~ sampasadan~
-aso ekodibhava~ avitakka~ avicara~ samadhija~
p1tisukh~ dutiya~ jhan~ upasampajja viharati);
II 157,15* (pajjotasseva nibban~ vimokho -aso ahii ti)
162 ceta(s)
t A I 236,17* (Mp 11 352,22/oll.: cittassa vimutti
vimuccana appavattibhavo hoti) = IV 3,10* (Mp IV
1 ,13 foll.: tassa .. . kh11_1asavassa d!panibban~ vi ya
carimakacittassa vattharamma1_1ehi vimokho hoti,
gatatthan~ na paññayati); D III 242,8 (dhamma~ -asa
anuvitakketi anuvicareti manasa 'nupekkhati): M 1
120,37 (-asa citta~ abhinigga1_1hitabb~); 127,7
(sabbavantam 1oka~ mettasahagatena -asa ...
appama1_1ena... pharitva viharissami ti); 140,17
(tathagatassa na hoti aghato na appaccayo na -aso
anabhiraddhi); 277,34 (so imam eva kaya~ parisuddhena
-asa pariyodatena pharitva nisinno hoti); III 196,27
(appatiladdhassa pati1abhaya citt~ pa1_1idahati, -aso
pa1_1idhanapaccaya tad abhinandati); S III 13,12 (yo
chando yo rago ya nandi ya ta1_1ha ye upayupadana -aso
adhiqhanabhinivesanusa ya); V 64,32 (-aso ca linatt~);
278,28 (kath~ bhikkhave bhikkhu vivatena -asa
apariyonaddhena sappabhasa~ citt~ bhaveti); A I
138,6* (upasanto sukha~ seti santi~ pappuyya -aso;
Mp 11 226,zsfoll.: cittassa kilesanibban~ papu1_1itva,
kara1_1avacana~ va eta~ ... -asa nibbana~ papu1_1itva ti
attho ); III 186,26 (labhati ca kalena ka1~ -aso vivara~
-aso pasada~); 449,2 (-aso vikkhepassa pahanaya
anapanassati bhavetabba); IV 461,10 (yassa citta~ na
namati atappaya . . . padhanaya aya~ pathamo -aso
vinibandho); V 160,6 (naha~ t~ samma alik~
avaca~ tucchaka~ avaca~ api ca aham eva ummad~
papu1_1i~ -aso vipariyayan ti); Dhp 79 (dhammap1ti
sukha~ seti vipasannena -asa); Ud47,21* (sabba disa
anuparigamma -asa nev' ajjhaga piyataram attana
kvaci); It 23,18* (9ayhamanena kayena 9ayhamanena
-asa diva va yadi va ratti~ dukkha~ viharati tadiso);
Sn 232 (kiñcapi so kamma~ karoti papak~ kayena
vaca uda -asa va); Th 514 (tato me pa1_1idhi asi -aso
abhipatthito na nis1de muhutt~ pi ta1_1hasalle aniihate);
1250 (-asa anupariyeti Moggallano mahiddhiko citta~
nes~ samanves~ vippamutt~ niriipadhi~; Th-a III
197,13: -asa ti attano cetopariyañiil_lena); Ja VI 265,29*
(atha na~ avacasi Irandati pubbapanthanugatena -asa);
Ap 4,18 (manuññ~ bhojan~ sabba~ labhantu mama
-asa); Dhs 91 (-aso abhiniropana sammasali.kappo );
1160 (-aso vippatisaro manolekho ida~ vuccati
kukkucca~; As 384,7 foll.: so pana -aso na sattassa ti
ñapanattha~ -aso vippatisaro ti vutt~); Pet 143,15
(ajjhatta~ -o sampasidati); Mil 10,2s (ayasma
Roha1_1o . . . Nagasenassa darakassa -asa ceto-
parivitakka~ aññaya); As 49,26 (avippayogavasena -asi
niyutta ti cetasika, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cetasmi~. prob.
wr); Mhv 29;13 (karetva parikammani vippasannena
-asa); Sadd 143,20 (citt~ cetayati cinten ti atthavasena
-o); 772,3o (evamadik~ attha~ -asi sannidhaya); -
cetasa ceto paricca, grasping, comprehending the
thoughts (of others) with one's own thoughts; Vin 11
186,16 (-asa -o paricca vidito me bhante Kakudho
devaputto); MI 69,25 (iti pi so bhagava parasattan~
parapuggalana~ -asa -o paricca pajanati); 497,13
(pubbe va me bhikkhave Vacchagotto bhikkhu -asa -o
paricca vidito, tevijjo Vacchagotto bhikkhu mahiddhiko
mahanubhavo ti); Ud 25,31 (bhagava . . . bhikkhiin~
-asa -o paricca manasikaritva; Ud-a 184,14/oll.: attano
ceta(s)
cittena tesary¡ cittary¡ paricchijja manasikaritva); It 12,17
(idhahary¡ bhikkhave ekaccary¡ pugga1ary¡ paduqhacittary¡
evary¡ -asa -o paricca pajanami); - cetasi in Ee at la IV
157,15* is wr for cetesi (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -khila, m.,
sterility or rigidity of thought; D III 237,24 (pañca -a);
M 1 101,6 (yassa kassaci bhikkhave bhikkhuno pañca -a
appahina; Ps II 68,3: -a ti cittassa thaddhabhava
kacavarabhava kha~ukabhava); A III 248,29; Ja III 291 ,s·
(pañcavidhena papary¡ pañca -a); Vibh 377,22foll.; -
o -pariccañal}a, n. [cf ce tasa ceto paricca abo ve],
knowledge encompassing, comprehending, the thoughts
(of others ); Thi 71 ( -ary¡ ca sotadhatu visodhita) = 227
(Thi-a 190,11: -an ti cetopariyaña~ary¡);- 0 -pariya, n.
(and mfn. ?), (according to cts) the encompassing,
comprehension, of the thoughts (of others); Th 997
(-aya iddhiya ... pa~idhi me na vijjati; Th-a III 103,6:
-aya ti cetopariyaña~assa, iddhiya ti iddhividhañana~sa)
= Kv 257,33*; Th 1248 (mahanubhavo tevijjo --kovido;
= SI 194,22*: cetopariyaya-; cf K.R Norman, 2007,
p. 337) f. Ap 76,3; Vism 409,7 (cetopariyaña~aya ti ettha
pariyati ti pariyary¡, paricchindati ti attho, cetaso pariy ary¡
-arp); Sp 495,11 (iddhividhassa dibbaya sotadhatuya
-assa 1abhi 'mhi ti); - 0 -pariyañiil}a, n., knowledge
(that is the) encompassing, comprehending, the thoughts
(nf nthers); DI 79,28 (-aya cittary¡ abhiniharati
abhininnameti, so parasattanary¡ parapugga1anary¡ cetasa
ceto paricca pajanati); II 83,7 (na kho me bhante
atitanagatapaccuppannesu arahantesu samma-
sambuddhesu -ary¡ atthi) =S V 160,16 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
cetopariyayaña~ary¡); Ap 543,1o (-assa vasi); Ps Ili
175,23 (-ena bhagavato pasannabhavary¡ aññasi);
Vism 409,6foll. (cetaso pariyary¡ cetopariyary¡, ceto-
pariyary¡ ca tary¡ ña~ary¡ ca ti -arp); - o -pariya-
ñal}aka, n., knowledge (that is the) encompassing the
thnughts (of others ); Ap-a 295,21 * (iddhividhary¡ dibba-
sotary¡ -arp); - 0 -pariyaya, m. [cf BHS cet~paryaya],
way of thought, manner of thinking; M 1 317,25
(vimary¡sakena bhikkhave bhikkhuna parassa -ary¡
ajanantena; Ps II 378,29: -an ti cittavarary¡ citta-
paricchedary¡); S I 194,22* (mahanubhavo teVIJJO
--kovido) = Th 1248 (eds cetopariya-); A III 393,9
(dujjanary¡ kho etary¡ avuso parassa -arp ajanantehi);
Kv 309,33 (-e ña~ary¡); - o -pharal}a, n., the suffusing
or pervading of the thoughts (of others); Ps IV 148,14
(-ary¡ nama 1okadhatusahasse sattanary¡ cittajananary¡);-
o -pharal}atii,f, abstr., id.; D III 277,26 (pitiphara~ata
sukhaphara~ata -a a1okaphar~ata; Sv 1059,22: paresary¡
ceto pharamana uppajjati ti cetopariyapañña -a nama) f.
Patis I 48,23; Patis-a 655,13 (catutthajjhanary¡ -a, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee catujjhanani);- 0 -Vasippatta, mfn., who has
become in control of his thoughts, who has attained
mastery over his thoughts; D U 108,4 (sama~ o va hoti
brahma~o va iddhima -o): A II 6,17* (-o samahitindriyo
sa ve thitatto ti naro pavuccati; Mp III 5,5 foil.:
cittavasibhavary¡ patto, evarüpo khl~asavo hoti, idha
pana anagami kathito); 36,11 (iti -o hoti vitakkapathesu);
Patis II 207,28; Mi182,19 (evam eva iddhima bhikkhu -o
Jambudlpe antarahito brahma1oke patubhaveyya ti); 85,7
(iddhima bhikkhu -o kayary¡ citte samaropetva
cittavasena vehasary¡ gacchati ti); Vism 382,17 (ayary¡
163 ceta(s)
-anary¡ ariyanary¡ yeva sambhavato ariya iddh! ti
vuccati); - 0 -vimutta, mfn., whose thoughts are freed
or free (from defilement or obstruction) in or through
advanced stages of meditation; A III 84,13 (yato kho
bhikkhave bhikkhu -o ca hoti paññavimutto ca ayary¡
vuccati bhikkhave bhikkhu ukkhittapa1igho iti pi ... );
Ps III 147,10 foil. (samathavasena gacchato cittekaggata
dhurary¡ hoti, so -o nama . . . Dhammasenapati
paññavimutto jato Mahamoggallanathero -o); - see
also cetovimutti(n) below; - 0 -Vimutti,f, the freeing
or freedom of thought (from defilement or obstruction)
by advanced stages of meditation (a state attained
temporarily in meditation and permanently with
arahatship; see L. de Silva, 1978); Vin I11,3o (ña~ary¡ ca
pana me dassanary¡ udapadi akuppa me -i ayary¡ antima
jati natthi dani punabbhavo ti); DI 156,25 (bhikkhu
asavanary¡ khaya anasavary¡ -iry¡ paññavimuttiry¡ dighe va
dhamme sayary¡ abhiñña sacchikatva upasampajja
viharati; Sv 313,16: -in ti cittavimuttiry¡, sabbaki1esa-
bandhanavimuttassa arahattapha1acittass' etary¡
adhivacanary¡) f. M 1 35,36 (PsI 164,29foll.: ettha ceto-
vacanena arahattapha1asampayutto samadhi, pañña-
vacanena tary¡sampayutta pañña ca vutta); D l 251,7
(evary¡bhavitaya... mettaya -iya yary¡ pam~akatary¡
kammary¡ na tary¡ tatravasissati na tary¡ tatravatiqhati):
MI 197,32 (ya ca kho ayary¡ bhikkhave akuppa -i
etadatthary¡ idary¡ bhikkhave brahmacariyary¡ etary¡sarary¡
etary¡pariyosanan ti); 210,11 (tary¡ ca -iry¡ paññavimuttiry¡
yathabhutary¡ pajanati yatth' assa te papaka akusa1a
dhamma aparisesa nirujjhanti); 297,9 foil. (ya cayary¡
avuso appam~a -i ya ca akiñcañña -i ya ca suññata -i
ya ca animitta -i); 351,24 (ayary¡ pi kho metta -i
abhisailkhata abhisañcetayita); III 111,1 (samayikary¡ va
kantary¡ -iry¡ upasampajja viharissati asamayikary¡ va
akuppan ti; Ps IV 158,24: -in ti rüparüpavacarary¡
cittavimuttiry¡, vuttary¡ h' etary¡ cattari jhanani catas so ca
arüpasamapattiyo ayary¡ samayiko vimokho ti); S IV
297,16 (sa kho pana akuppa -i suñña ragena suñña
dosena suñña mohena); A I 38,nfoll. (acchara-
sailghatamattary¡ pi ce bhikkhave bhikkhu . . . mettary¡
-iry¡ bhaveti ... karu~ary¡ -iry¡ bhaveti ... muditary¡ -iry¡
bhaveti ... upekkhary¡ -iry¡ bhaveti ... ); 61,13 (ragaviraga
-i avijjaviraga paññavimuttl ti); 64,5 (so aññatarary¡
santary¡ -iry¡ upasampajja viharati, so kayassa bheda
parary¡ mar~a aññatarary¡ devanikayary¡ upapajjati; Mp II
134,15: aghasu samapattisu aññatarary¡ catutthajjhana-
samapattim, sa hi paccanikaki1esanary¡ santatta santa,
teh' eva ca ki1esehi cetaso vimuttatta -1 ti vuccati);
Ud 36,3 (aparipakkaya . . . -iya pañca dhamma
paripakaya sary¡vattanti; Ud-a 220,24: ki1esehi cetaso
vimuttiya); Pa!is Il 132,2 (imehi aghah' akarehi sabbe
satte mettayati ti metta, tary¡ dhammary¡ cetayati ti ceto,
sabbavyapadapariyughanehi vimuccati ti vimutti, metta
ca ceto ca vimutti ca ti metta -i); Ps II 355,6 foll.
(animitta -iyo nama terasa dhamma, vipassana cattaro
aruppa cattaro magga cattari pha1anl ti ... nibbanary¡ pi
animittam eva, tary¡ pana -i na hoti, tasma na gahitary¡);
Mp I 47,14foll. (metta -1 ti sabbasattesu hitaphar~aka
metta, yasma pana tary¡sampayuttacittary¡ nivara~adihi
paccanlkehi vimuccati, tasma sa -I ti vuccati, visesato
cetaka
vyapadapariyunhanena vimuttato cetasa -1 ti veditabba);
III 289,3 (-i~ paññavimuttin ti arahattasamadhi~ e' eva
arahattapha1añfu.la~ ca); Vibh-a 75,19 (vyapadena
vimuttassa cetaso vimutti -i); - 0 -Vimutti(n), mfn.,
whose thoughts are freed or free (in or through
advanced stages of meditation); MI 437,9 (atha
kiñcarahi idh' ekacce bhikkhü -ino ekacce
paññavimuttino ti, ettha kho tesah~ Ánanda indriya-
vemattata~ vadaml ti); - see also cetovimutta above;
-
0
-Vivatfa, m., the turning away of the thoughts; A I
24,4 (etadagg~ bhikkhave mama savakan~
bhikkhün~ . . . --kusa1ana~ yadida~ Cü)apanthako,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr cetovivaddhakusalan~; Mp I
210,9 foll.: Cü)apanthakatthero catunn~ rupavacara-
jjhanan~ 1abhitaya --kusa1o ti vutto Mahapanthaka-
tthero catunn~ arüpavacarajjhanan~ 1abhitaya
saññavivanakusa1o ti, Cu)apanthako ca samadhi-
kusa1ataya --kusa1o nama Mahapanthako vipassana-
kusalataya saññavivaqakusa1o nama); Patis I 2,23
(nanatte panna -e ñana~; Patis-a I 48,31: -e ñfu.lan ti
cetaso kamacchandadito vivanana~ nekkhammadisu
ñfu.l~); II 70,8 (cetayanto vivanan ti -o); - see also
1 0
-VivaraJ,Iasappiiya, mfn.,
cittavivaqa (sv citta ); -
beneficia[ for clearing the thoughts of obstructions; ?
M III ll3,26 (katha abhisallekhika -a, Ee so; Be, Ce
0
-vinlvar<n:Jasappaya; Se 0 -vicar<n:Jasappaya) f. A IV
358,4 (Mp IV 162,10: samathavipassanacittassa vivar<n:Je
sappaya upakaraka ti -a) f. Ud 36,12 (Ud-a 226,29: -a ti
cetaso paticchadakana~ nlvar<n:Jan~ duñbhava-
kar<n:Jena cetovivar<n:JasaiJ.khatan~ samatha-
vipassanana~ sappaya); - aceta(s), acetasa, mfn.,
l. without the ability of thinking; senseless;
unintelligent; S I 198,30 (giriduggacar~ ceta~
appapañña~ acetasa~ aka1e ovada~ bhikkhu; Spk I
290,18: acetasan ti kar<n:Jajananasamatthena cittena
rahita~); Ja V 66,12• (yatha mu)ho acetaso; 67,1·: yatha
mu)ho acetano andhaba1aputhujjano); VI 12,24* (rañño
mugo ca pakkho ca putto jato acetaso; 12,n·: acetaso ti
acittako viya jato, so)asavassani akathitatta eva~ aha,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acetano ti); Dhp-a lii 356,21 (asaññata
ti kayasaññamadirahita, acetasa ti pi parbo acittaka ti
attho);- 2. not in conformity with one's thoughts,false,
feigned; Ja IV 57,5* (mittarüpen' idh' ekacce sakhallena
acetasa vividhehi upayehi tadis~ pi nasmase; 58,3·:
acetasa ti acittakena, vacanam eva hi nesa~ maqha~
citta~ pana thaddh~ pharus~; or nom.pl. ?); -
sacetasa, mfn., intelligent, rational; A I 254,13 (ta~
ena~ -o bhikkhu dabbajatiko pajahati vinodeti; Mp II
362,14: cittasampanno); sucetasa, mfn., very
intelligent, wise; S I 4,23* (mana~ pahaya susamahitatto
-o sabbadhi vippamutto; Spk I 27,6: -o ti
ña1,1asampayuttataya sundaracitto); 46,26*; - see also
appamfu.lacetasa (sv pamfu.la), cetasa, parittacetasa
(sv paritta\ papacetasa.
cetaka, m. [?], (according to cts) a tame or decoy bird;
Abh 520 (dlpako tu ca -o; Abh-süci: citi pesaniye,
1uddena peslyate ti -o); Ja III 357,13* (ahito bhavati
ñatln~ sakm.J.an~ va -o; 357,29·: -o ti yatha tittira-
sakuJ.lan~ dlpakatittiro divas~ pi vassanto aññe
sakul)e na mareti ñatake va mareti); - cetaka is an
164 cetana
1
occasional reading in E e, Se for cetaka qv.
cetakedu in Ee at Ja VI 538,11 * is prob. wr for
ce1akedu qv.
cetati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cetati, Wg § 3:2], makes a mark;
designates; ? Sadd 360,1 (citl sann<n:Je: sannal)~
cihan~ 1akkhal)akaral)a~. -ati cihana~ karotl ti attho ).
cetana, mfn., see sv cetana.
2
cetanaka, n. (or-a, f) [cetana + ka ], intention, volition;
Ja VI 304,26' (uccavaca -a bhavanti; 304,3w: khal)e
kh<n:Je uppajjamana cetana ucca pi avaca pi uppajjanti);
3 2
- acetanaka, mfn. and n. [or a + cetana/cetana + ka ],
l. (mfn.) (one) who is without intention; lacking
volition; Vibh 419,29 (asaññasatta deva ahetuka anahara
aphassaka avedanaka asaññaka -a acittaka
patubhavanti); Kv 414,25 (asaññakassa vaca -assa vaca
acittakassa vaca ti); - 2. (n.) what is without intention;
an unintentional act; Ja II 375,15 (tumhak~ deva ete
ki1amantu ti citt~ natthi -a~ kamm~ na hoti);
VI 178,14 (ki~ pana bhante tassa supal)l)assa akusa1a~
hotl ti, sace na janati -~ nama, akusa1~ na hotl ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be acetanakamma~; Se acetanatta); -
sacetanaka, mfn., having intention or volition;
Kv 416,14 (nanu saphassakassa kayakamma~
savedanakassa ... sasaññakassa ... -assa ... sacittakassa
kayakamman ti).
cetana, f, -a, mfn. [cfS. cetana, cetana; cf also cetati],
l. (j.) (i) sign; designation; ? Ps III 39,12
(pabbajitaka1ato panhaya gihl ti -a natthi samal)o ti -a
hoti, gihl ti vacan~ natthi sam<n:Jo ti vacana~ hoti ... );
Sadd 542,23 (-a saññfu.l~. Ee so; Be cehana); -
(ii) consciousness; intention; volition; Vin III 112,12foll.
(amhaka~ ca supinantena asuci mucci, atthi e' ettha -a
1abbhati; Sp 518,22 foll.: ettha ca supinante assadacetana
atthi upalabbhati); MI 391,4 (y~ ida~ kamm~
kal)ha~ kal)havipak~ tassa pahanaya ya -a); S II 3,35
(vedana sañña -a phasso manasikaro id~ vuccati
nama~); 99,32 (tassa purisassa araka v' assa -a araka
patthana araka pal)idhi); A III 415,7 (cetanah~
bhikkhave kamm~ vadami, cetayitva kamma~ karoti
kayena vacaya manasa; Mp III 408,8: cetanahan ti -a~
aha~, idha sabbasaiJ.gahika vidahanacetana gahita);
V 2,21 (sllavato bhikkhave sllasampannassa na -aya
kar<n:Jiya~ avippatisaro me uppajjatu ti, dhammata esa
bhikkhave y~ sllavato sllasampannassa avippatisaro
uppajjati); Ja II 372,20 (maharaja tumhaka~ pfu.l~
vadhissaml ti -a natthi, ta~ vina pfu.latipato nama na
hoti); Ap 328,1 (clvare pil)¡;lapate ca -a me na vijjati);
423,8 (y ato sarami attan~ . . . etth' antare na janami
-~ amanoram~); Dhs 1 (yasmi~ samaye
kamavacara~ citt~ uppanna~ hoti ... tasmi~ samay e
phasso hoti vedana hoti sañña hoti -a hoti citt~
hoti ... ); Vibh 40,3ifoll. (chabbidhena
saiJ.kharakkhandho cakkhusamphassaja -a sota-
samphassaja . . . ghanasamphassaja . . . jivhasamphassa-
ja ... kayasamphassaja ... manosamphassaja -a); 135,18
(kusa1a -a kamavacara rupavacara danamaya sllamaya
bhavanamaya aya~ vuccati puññabhisaiJ.kharo); 146,8
(ya cetana sañcetana sañcetayitatt~ aya~ vuccati
avijjapaccaya saiJ.kharo); Kv 465,1 (sabba -a savipaka
ti); Pet219,2 (ay~ pañcasu kamagu1,1esu
cetabba
pathamabhinipato cittassa ya -a yassa tattha
assadanupassissa aneka papaka akusala dhamma citt~
arüpavatiyo honti); Nett 43,2o (dve kammani -a
cetasik~ ca); Mi161 ,19 (kirpJakkha!)a -a ti); 63,8 (sakka
imesarp dhammanarp . . . nanakaral).~ paññapeturp
ay~ phasso ay~ vedana ay~ sañña ay~ -a id~
viññ1i.l).~ ayarp vitakko ay~ vicaro ti); Vism 7,1foll.
(-a sll~ nama p1i.l).atipatad!hi va viramantassa vatta-
pativatt~ va pürentassa -a); Sp 115,31 (rüpa-
sañcetanadayo cha -a); 444,2o (im~ vatthurp mareml ti
-aya atthibhavato ghatako ca hoti); 736,11 (vaca ti
micchavacapariyapannavacanasamutthapika -a, gira ti
taya -aya samutthapitasaddarp dasseti); Ps lli 54,13
(kasma pana -a kamman ti vutta, cetanamü1akatta
kammassa); Spk II 16,31 (-a phasso manasikaro ti
saiikharakkhandho veditabbo); Mp III 145,z3foll. (kaya-
dvare sayarpkatamülaka vlsati -a al).attimülaka vlsati
sampajanamülaka vlsati asampajanamülaka vlsati ti asHi
-a honti, tatha vacldvare); As 111,7 (cetayati ti -a);
111,23 (khettasamipuriso vi ya hi -a); 163,13 (suttadisu -a
pi cetanasampayuttadhamma pi maggo nama);
Mhv 5:264 (paticcakammarp n' atthí ti ki1iqh~ -~
vina); - ifc see apara- (sv apara\ magga-, vidahana-,
sanniqhapaka-, saraga- (sv raga);- 2. (mfn.) conscious,
sentient; intelligent; 0
-sampayuttaka, mfn.,
connected with, dependent on, intention; Vism 538,16;
As 88,11 (kirp pan' etarp kammarp nama, cetana e' eva
ekacce ca -a dhamma); - acetana, mfn., l. (one)
without consciousness, inanimate; MI 227,25 (thül).~
ce p' ah~ -arp vadena vadarp samarabheyy~ sa pi ...
saiikampeyya sampakampeyya sampavedheyya, ko pana
vado manussabhutassa ti); S III 143,5* (ayu usma ca
viññ1i.l).~ yada kay~ jahant' imarp apaviddho tada seti
parabhattam -arp); Ja VI 311 ,9· (-assa rukkhassapi);
Ap 392,11 (-a pi turiya sayam eva pavajjare); Pet 190,15
(yatha aneka -a te UQ.hena milayanti sltena avasussanti);
Mi1174,3 (na rukkho sal1apati rukkho -o); Vism 353,16
(iti kesa nama imasmirp sarlre patiyekko kotthaso -o
avyakato suñño nissatto thaddho pathav!dhatü ti);
Sv 560,6 (ay~ pan' attho pathavidevataya vasena
veditabbo, mahabhütapathaviya pan' etarp natthi --tta
ti); Spk I 235,13 (so dakkhil).eyye juhati nama na -e
aggimhi pakkhipanto); PsI 265,29foll. (clvararp pi -arp
kayo pi -o); II 183,28 (idani pi me ayam eva -a
kaghakaliii.garüpama mahapathavl sakkh! ti hatth~
pasaresi); It-a II 50,19 (rüpasantano so --taya
kaghaka1ili.garüpamo ti); 2. senseless, without
understanding; without awareness; Th! 453 (bala te
duppañña -a ... na bujjhare ariyasaccani); Ja III 92,7*
(dhi-r-atthu m~ mahakay~ dhi-r-atthu m~ -arp;
92,w': mahasaríratta 1ahubhavagarubhavassa ajanana-
taya -~); - niccetana, mfn., without consciousness;
inanimate; Sadd 76,22joll.;- sacetana, mfn., (one) who
has consciousness, who is animate; who has
understanding; Ja I 74,2o (mayharp pana imasmirp thane
-o koci sakkhl nama natthi); V 341,16' (tava pana
cetayanassa -assa paññavato); Kv 239,4 (-arp cittaJ!I
vimuccati); Mi1220,2 (t~ ca pana ragavasena visaññina
no -ena ti); 268,5 (-a va acetana va ajaramara 1oke
natthi); Dhp-a II 249,13 (ay~ nama acetano hutva pi
165 cetasi ka
imassa gul).~ janati aharp -o pi na janamí ti);
Ud-a 380,24 (so pana udapano acetano pi samano -o
viya bhoto gul).~ jananto viya); Nidd-a I 428,2 (-anarp
sabbarp yobbaññ~).
cetabba\ mfn.,fpp ofcinati qv.
cetabba2 , mfn.,fpp ofceteti qv.
cetayana, mfn., part.pr. of ceteti qv.
cetayita, mfn., pp of ceteti qv.
cetasa, mfn. [from ceta(s)], with the ability of thought;
thinking, intelligent; MI 114,11 (evam eva kho bhante
-o bhikkhu dabbajatiko ... 1abheth' eva attamanatarp;
Ps II 78,29: -o ti cintakajatiko, eds so, but perhaps wrr?
cfsacetasa sv ceta[s]); - cetasa in long cpd in Ee at
Ja V 420,1 ** is prob. wr; Be, Se -vedisa-; Ce -vetasa-; -
acetasa, sucetasa, mfn., see sv ceta(s).
cetasika, mfn. and m. (scil. dhamma ?) and n.
[BHS cetasika, caitasika], l. (mfn.) mental; connected
with thought or intention; D II 306,14 (y~ kho
bhikkhave -arp dukkh~ -arp asatarp manophassaj~
dukkharp asatarp vedayit~ idarp vuccati bhikkhave
domanass~; Sv 799,22: -an ti cittasampayutt~) f-
Patis I 38,26; MI 301,28 (sañña ca vedana ca -a ete
dhamma cittapatibaddha); lli 288,1 (tassa kayika pi
daratha pavac,lc,lhanti -a pi daratha pavac,lc,lhanti; Ps V
103,15: -a ti manodvarikadaratha); A II 143,8 (te
bhikkhave satta dullabha 1okasmirp ye -ena rogena
muhuttarp pi arogy~ patijananti aññatra khíQ.asavehi);
Th 707 (natthi -arp dukkharp anapekkhassa); Ja V
201 ,29* (nagharp nu kirp -arp ca dukkharp, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -añci; 202,9· foil.: kirp nu te nattharp va, kirp va
cetasikadukkh~); Ap 387,12 (atho -arp dukkharp
hadaye me na vijjati); Dhs 1189 (vedanakkhandho
saññakkhandho sañkharakkhandho ime dhamma -a);
Vibh 118,36foll. (dve sacca -a, nirodhasacc~
acetasikarp, dukkhasaccarp siya -~ siya acetasik~);
194,33 (yo -o viriyarambho . . . sammavayamo id~
vuccati atapparp); Kv 339,9* (citt~ h' id~ -a ca
dhamma anattato sarpviditassa honti); Pet227,15
(aniccasañña -esu dhammesu na tu anattasañña, so read
with Ñii!Jamoli, 1964, p. 308; eds attasañña); Mi1253,2
(araha ek~ vedan~ vediyati kayikarp na -an ti);
Vism 7,3 (-~ sllarp nama p1i.l).atipatad!hi viramantassa
virati); - 2. (m.n.) a mental state, a form of thought or
intention; DI 213,26 (bhikkhu parasattan~
parapuggalan~ citt~ pi adisati -~ pi adisati
vitakkit~ pi adisati vicarit~ pi adisati; Sv 389,17: -an
ti somanassadomanassarp adhippetarp); Pet 94,7 (citte
atthl ti ditthi -esu niccan ti, eds so; read with Ñii!Jamoli,
1964, p. 126: citte atta ti ditthasavo -esu niccan ti
avijjasavo ?); 172,16 (y~ s!larp id~ kayik~
vacasik~ sucarit~, yo cago idarp -arp alobho
sucarit~); Nett 43,2o (tani dve kammani cetana -~
ca); Vism 589,3 (avisesena ca tehi cittehi sahajato
phasso vedana sanna cetana jlvitarp cittatthiti
manasikaro ti ime satta -a ti); Patis-a 117,28 (cittassa
anussaho th!narp -anarp akammaññata middharp);- ifc
see citta- (sv citta\ - cetasik~ in eds at Pet 43,17*
and 218,8 is prob. wr for cetayit~ (Ñiil}amoli, 1964,
pp. 57 and 294 so); - cetasikahi in Ee at Pet218,7 is
prob. wr for cetayit~ hi (Ñii!Jamoli, 1964, p. 294 so);
cetii
- cetasika in eds at Pet 227,18 is prob. wr; see
Ñtil}amoli, 1964, p. 308; - acetasika, mfo., not a
property of thought; not connected with thought or
intention; Dhs 584 (sabbarp. ri.iparp. . . . -arp.
cittavippayuttarp. ... ) = Vibh 12,24; Dhs 1513 (cittarp. ca
ri.iparp. ca nibbanarp. ca ime dhamma -a); Vibh 67,5 (tayo
khandha cetasika dve khandha -a); Kv 433,29 foil.
(stlarp. -an ti).
ceta, f [cf S. ce~ta], action; exertion; Sadd 353,13 (ceta
-ayarp.); 353,16 (ghata -ayarp.).
cetlipaka, m. [from cetapeti], one who causes to buy or
exchange; Sadd 865,22 (a!)apayatl ti 3:1)apako, evarp.
phandapako -o ... ).
cetlipana (and cetapanna), n. (and -a,f ?) [from cetapeti],
exchanging; basis for exchange or purchase; asking for,
Sp 697,25 (dukkatavatthuna pana dukkatavatthuno -arp.
n' eva idha, na tattha paFyarp. vuttarp.); 1309,23 (viññatti
aññarp. -a dve sailghika ... ti ya pana bhikkhun! aññarp.
viññapetva annarp. vmnapeyya ti ad!ni nava
sikkhapadani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se aññacetapana; ad Vin V
87,33: aññacetapana); Kkh 2 117,6 (dilto ... tassa
[veyyavaccakarassa] hatthe -arp. datva therassa c!vararp.
ki!)itva deh! ti gacchati); Sadd 865,15 (cetapayate -arp.
a!)apayate a!)apanarp.); - ifc see añña- (sv añña\
c!vara-, ri.ipiya- (sv ri.ipiya\
cetlipeti (and cetapayate), pr. 3 sg. [caus. of ceteti?
cf BHS cetayati], (of a bhikkhu or bhikkhunl) has
someone give or exchange or buy; (of a layman)
exchanges; buys; Vin III 216,33 (k!disena te bhante
clvarena attho, kldisarp. te clvararp. -eml ti); 217,7
(ayatarp. va vitthatarp. va appitarp. va Sal)harp. va -eti,
payoge dukkatarp.); 222,24 (so va nikkhipissati so va
parivattissati so va -essatl ti); 222,32 (-ehi me clvaran
ti); 246,11 (yo pana bhikkhu ilnapañcabandhanena
pattena aññarp. navarp. pattarp. -eyya; 246,22: -eyya ti
viññapeti); Kkh 2 126,16 (imarp. ahara parivattehi -eh! ti);
Th-a I 98,14 (parivatteyyarp. -eyyarp.); Vin-vn 2112
(aññam -etva pubbarp. paccha aññarp. -eyya);
Sadd 865,14 (-ayate cetapanarp.); part.pr.
cetapenta, mfi: -entl)n., Vin IV 255,29 (garupavura!)arp.
pana bhikkhuniya -entiya catukkarp.saparamarp.
cetapetabbarp., tato ce uttari -eyya, nissaggiyarp.
pacittiyan ti; 255,33: -entiya ti viññapentiya); Sp 667,26
(attano kappiyabhal)<;lena kappiyavoharen' eva c!vararp.
viññapentassa -entassa parivattapentassa anapattl ti); -
aor. 3 sg. cetapesi, Vin V 58,31; 3 pl. cetapesurp., Vin V
58,1s; - absol. cetapetva, Vin III 216,13 (imina
clvaracetapanena c!vararp. -etva itthannamarp. bhikkhurp.
c!varena acchadessam! ti; 216,28: -etva ti parivattetva;
Kkh 2 113,10: -etva ti parivattetva, karetva va ki!)itva va
ti attho); 237,10 (ayyassa pativisarp. darakassa dehi,
aññarp. -etva ayyassa dassama ti); IV 250,3o
(bhikkhuniyo tena parikkharena bhesajjarp. -etva
paribhuñjirp.su); Ps li 123,9 (upasako te1atal)<;luladlni
kammakaranarp. bhattavetanattharp. pahi!)ati, avasesehi
suVal)!)arp. -etva pahi!)ati); Utt-vn 197 (-etva hi aññarp.
ce -eti tato pararp. payoge dukkatarp., cetapite
nissaggiyarp. siya); - pp cetapita, mfn., asked for;
exchanged; bought; Vin III 246,32 (ayarp. me bhante
patto ilnapañcabandhanena pattena -o nissaggiyo );
166 cetiya
IV 256,7 (-arp.); Sp 697,13 (--tta); Utt-vn 197 (-e
nissaggiyarp. siya); - fpp cetapetabba, mfo., Vin IV
255,3o (garupavural)arp. pana bhikkhuniya cetapentiya
catukkarp.saparamarp. - arp.).
ceti,f (?) [for cetiya qv; BHS id.], a place ofveneration; a
1
(funeral) mound;- ifc see dhamma- (sv dhamma ).
cetiya, cetya, m.n. [S. caitya; BHS also cetiya], l. a place
or object of veneration, a sanctuary or shrine (near a
village ), perhaps a sacred tree and mound; Abh 207
(cetiyayatanani tu); 955 (devalaye ca thilpasmirp. -arp.
cetiyaddume); Vin I 288,4 (tatra sudarp. bhagava
Vesa!iyarp. viharati Gotamake -e); D II 75,26 (Vesaliyarp.
viharami Sarandade -e; Sv 52!,3ofoll.: Sarandade -e ti
evarp.namake vihare, anuppanne kira buddhe tattha
Sarandadassa yakkhassa nivasanaqhanarp. -arp. ahosi);
102,6 (yena Capalarp. -arp. ten' upasailkamissami
divaviharaya ti); III 11,11 (acelo ... sabban' eva
Vesa!iyani -ani samatikkamitva); Sn 1013 (Pasa!)akarp.
-arp. ca ramal)lyarp. manoramarp.); Ja VI 68,6 (sa
mahaparidevarp. paridevitva rañño thitatthane -arp.
karetva gandhamalad!hi piljetva nivatti); Spk I 351 ,3
(aramacetya ti aramacetiyani ... citt!katatthena cetyarp.
veditabbarp.); Pj II !94,15foll.; 344,28 (anuppanne hi
bhagavati . . . anekani -ani ahesurp. yakkhanagad!narp.
bhavanani); Ap-a 357,36foll. (tesarp. yakkhanarp.
nivasanaqhanarp. piljan!yaqhanatta -an ti vuccati, evarp.
idarp. bhagavato vasanaqhanarp. -an ti vuccati); - 2. a
place or object ofveneration connected with a buddha;
a funeral monument or thilpa (containing relics of a
buddha or arhat or king), especially a thilpa in a vihara;
Abh 436 (thilpo tu -arp. bhave); 955; Vin III 143,32
(anapatti sailghassa va -assa va gilanassa va kara!)!yena
gacchati); Khp 8:7 (nidh! sunihito hoti itthiya purisassa
va -amhi ca sailghe va puggale atith!su va; Pj I
221,30 foil.: cayitabban ti -arp., piljetabban ti vuttarp. hoti,
citatta va -arp., tarp. pan' etarp. tividharp. hoti ...
bodhirukkho paribhogacetiyarp. buddhapatima
uddissakacetiyarp. dhatugabbhathilpa sadhatuka
dhatukacetiyarp.); Ja I 237,16 (-arp. ca bodhirp. ca
piljetva); Ap 84,9 (Padumuttarassa nathassa padumarp.
nama -arp. s!hasanarp. karayitva suva!)J)enabhilepayirp.;
Ap-a 358,2: idarp. bhagavato vasanaqhanarp. -an ti
vuccati, na dhatunidhanakacetiyan ti veditabbarp.);
Mil 341,5 (sabbapal)arp. kho maharaja bhagavato
navailgarp. buddhavacanarp. sarlrikani paribhogikani -ani
sailgharatanarp. ca); 366,18 (yogina yogavacarena kalena
samayen' eva cetiyailganarp. sammajjitva .. . sarlrarp.
patijaggitva nahayitva -arp. vanditva); Bv 3:38
(Kondañño pavaro buddho Candaramamhi nibbuto tatth'
eva -o citto sattayojana-m-ussito); Sp 86,20 (bhagava
dhammakarakarp. datva pakkami, tarp. anto pakkhipitva
Patiyarame -arp. akarp.su); 92,28 (Thilparame
dakkhi!)akkhakadhatu -amhi patiqhanadivase yamaka-
patihariyarp. karotil ti); 387,12 (-assa padlpatthaya);
456,24 (-arp. va patighapetva bodhirp. va ropetva); 623,33
(-e gandhapiljarp. karotha pupphapiljarp. karotha ti); PsI
253,23 (-arp. disva pi hi buddharamma!)arp. .. . pltirp.
uppadetva); III244,21 (saya!)hasamaye mahabhikkhu-
sailghe -arp. vandamane); 412,15 (attano anto nivesane
yeva -arp. karesi); V 92,15 (sañrarp. jhapetva dhatuyo
ceteti
adaya -a!11 akasi); Spk I 284,15foll. (mahaparhavi¡p
bhinditva rajatabubbujasadisa¡p -a¡p nikkhami, sattha
sahatthena -e dhatuyo nidhesi, ajjapi kira ta¡p -a!11
dharati yeva ti); Mp I 383,27 (uposathadivase -ato
nllarasmi niggacchanti); Pj I 200,23 (maya tassa -e
paraka aropita chattaJ11 ca baddha¡p); Ud-a 97,7 (thüpa¡p
e' assa karotha ti assa Bahiyassa sariradhatuyo gahetva
-a!11 ca karotha); 408,5 (Savatthiya¡p Dhamma-
senapatino -a¡p karapetva); Mhv 25:73 (ta¡p deha-
patitarrhane kuragarena jhapayi -a!11 tattha karesi
parihara¡p adasi ca); Thüp 216,6 (raja kunta¡p
parikkhipapetva -a¡p ta¡p parikkhipapetva vihara¡p ca
karesi); Sadd 875,16 (cete cetasi citte kata¡p rhapitan ti
-aJ11); Sadd 928,1* (sañrike paribhoge cetye uddissake pi
ca sabbe arakkhaka deva sukhaJ11 yantu nava¡p nava¡p);
- ifc see akasa- (sv akasa2), arama-, uddissaka-,
kañcuka-, dhamma- (sv dhamma 1), dhatu-, dhatuka-,
dhatunidhayaka- (sv dhatu), pada-, paribhoga-, pujina-,
rukkha-, vana- (sv vana\ sañra-; - 3. veneration,
respect; - ifc see dhamma- (sv dhamma\ -
0
-ailgaJ}.a, n. [cetiya + ailgai_J.a 1], the open space befare a
thüpa; the terrace of a thüpa; Ap 457,21 (aha¡p pure
bodhipattaJ11 ujjhitaJ11 -e ta¡p gahetvana cha<;l<;lesi¡p);
Mil 366,16 (-a!11 sammajjitva); Vism 392,23 (Tissa-
mahavihare -asmi¡p nisiditva); Ps 111 245,4 (thero ...
dakkhii_J.advarena -a¡p arujho); IV 125,13 (pitara¡p
mañcena -a!11 haritva mañee nisidapetva); Spk II 204,2s
(yo -a¡p arohanto chatta¡p dhareti upahana¡p dhareti ...
aya¡p satthari agaravo nama); - 0 -gabbha, m., the
inner room of a thüpa; Ja I 52,2 (bodhisattena
vasitakucchi nama --sadisa na sakka hoti aññena
avasitu¡p); Ps IV 127,24 (-e yamakamahadvara¡p
vivaranta viya ta¡p pabbata¡p dvedha katva); -
0
-ghara, n., a shrine; a building or shrine containing a
thüpa or an object of veneration; Vism 213,3
(buddhagui_J.anussatiya ajjhavutthaJ11 e' assa sarira¡p pi
-am iva püjarahaJ11 hoti); Sp 474,31 (sabba¡p pi therena
dinnakaJ11 -e ekaJ11 varapotthakacittattharai_J.a¡p na
agghati); 748,16 (dighapamukha¡p -a¡p hoti);
Ap-a44l,zs (mahajano ... cetiya¡p karetva püjesi ...
aya¡p upasako tass' upari candanasarena -a¡p karetva
mahapiljaJ11 akasi); Mhv 31:60 (cetiyaJ11 -a¡p passa
bhikkhu sunimmitaJ11); - 0
-cchatta, n. [cetiya +
1
chatta ], the decorative parasol on top of a thüpa;
Sp 1069,27 (--vedikadisu);- 0 -tfhana, n., l. a suitable
object of veneration; Sv 606,to (amhaka¡p ayuva<;l<;lhano
-a¡p puññakkhettu¡p ... bhagava) = Thüp 174,31; -
2. the place or site of a thüpa or shrine; a thüpa;
Sp 745,4 (sa kira kuri kavarabaddha gandha-
paribhaQ.<;lakata samosaritapupphadama -am iva tiqhati):
Sv 554,21 (Udenacetiyan ti Udenayakkhassa -e
kataviharo vuccati); Vv-a 156,28 (kanakathüpe
kariyamane darika ... -a¡p gantva);- 0 -f!haniya, mfn.,
being a suitable object of veneration; Sp 473,4
(pabbajitaparibhogo hi agarikanaJ11 -o, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
wr agarikana¡p 0 -ghaniyyo); - 0 -patijaggaka, mfn.,
attending to, in charge of, the thüpa or shrine;
Sp 1143,12 (yo nibaddhaJ11 -o hoti pabbajito va gahagho
va, Ee so; Ce 0 -jaggak:o; Se 0 -parijaggiko; Be
nibaddhacetiyajaggako); - 0 -maha, m., a festival of
167 ceteti
(worship at) a thüpa; Ap-a 442,9 (nibbutassa bhagavato
-e vattamane); Sadd 457,26 (viharamaho -o); -
0
-rukkha, m., a tree that is an object of veneration, a
sacred tree; Vin III 155,31 (aññatara¡p -a¡p chedapesi
gamapüjita¡p; Sp 575,3: cetiyan ti sammata¡p rukkha¡p
-a¡p); Vism 74,5;- -Vandanaka, mfn., doing homage
0
to the thüpa; Sp 1336,17 (-a cattaro thera, Ce, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be cetiyavandaka; Se cetiya¡p vandaka); -
0
-vedikasadisa, mfn., like the rail of a thüpa; Sp 1216,13
(vedikavatapanan ti -aJ11);- see also ceti.
ceteti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [S. cetayati], forms an idea in the
mind; thinks about, is intent upon; has in mind (to);
intends, forms an intention (to); strives mental/y (for);
V in III 19,38 (tva¡p avuso bhagavata viragaya dhamme
desite saragaya -essasi; Sp 217,25: saha ragena
vattamanaya methunadhammaya -essasi kappessasi
pakappessasi etadatthaJ11 vayamissasi ti attho, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr vayamissati ti); 113,3o (ajjhattarüpe -eti
upakkamati muccati apatti sailghadisesassa; Sp 524,2o:
mocanassadasampayuttaya cetanaya muccatü ti -eti);
172,17 (ime kho samai_J.a Sakyaputtiya dhuta sallekha-
vuttino, samai_J.o pana Gotamo bahulliko bahullaya -eti
ti; Sp 607,12: bahulataya -eti kappeti pakappeti, katha¡p
hi nama mayha¡p ca savakanaJ11 ca civaradibahulabhavo
bhaveyya ti evaJ11 ussukka¡p apanno ti adhippayo, Be,
Ce so; Ee bahullattaya -eti; Se bahullatthaya); D I
184,19 foil. ( ahaJ11 ce va kho pana -eyyaJ11
abhisailkhareyya¡p ima ca me sañña nirujjheyyu¡p, añña
ca ojarika sañña uppajjeyyu¡p, Ya!11 nünaha¡p na -eyyaJ11
na abhisailkhareyyan ti; Sv 373,14foll.: -eyyaJ11
abhisailkhareyyan ti padadvaye jhanaJ11 samapajjanto
-eti nama punappuna kappeti ti attho, uparisamapatti-
atthaya nikanti¡p kurumano abhisaiJ.kharoti nama); M III
21,29 (asappuriso attavyabadhaya pi -e ti
paravyabadhaya pi -eti; Ps IV 80,8: attavyabadhaya -eti
ti ... dasa akusalakammapathe samadaya vattissami ti
eva¡p attano dukkhatthaya cinteti); SI 121,17* (savako te
mahavira marai_J.aJ11 ... akailkhati -ayati); II 65,15 (ya¡p
ca kho bhikkhave -eti Ya!11 ca pakappeti Ya!11 ca anuseti
arammai_J.a¡p eta¡p hoti viññai_J.assa thitiya); IV 201,15
(sace so bhikkhave assutava puthujjano
ayatipunabbhavaya -eti); A I 192,22 (na kho panahaJ11
kassaci papa¡p -emi); IV 118,15 (yasmi¡p samaye
ariyasavako agarasma anagariyaJ11 pabbajjaya -eti;
Mp IV 59,21: pabbajissami ti cinteti); Sn 973 (janavada-
dhammaya na -ayeyya; Pj II 574,15: cetanaJ11 na
uppadeyya); Vv 84:40 (parüpaghataya na -ayeyya);
Th 1204 (na ve aggi -ayati aha¡p bala¡p <;lahami ti;
Th-a III 179,23foll.: eva¡p na aggi abhisañceteti napi
<;lahanaya payoga¡p parakkama¡p karoti); Ja III 146,16*
(rakkhaya me tva¡p vihito nu s' ajja udahu me -ayase
vadhaya, Be, E e so; Ce, Se vayamase ); Paris II 131,38
(ta¡p dhamma¡p -ayati ti ceto); Per 222,w (ye puna-
bbhavaJ11 na icchanti na -ayissanti na ca patthayissanti);
Spk II 380,32 (vedana vedeti cetana -eti sañña sañjanati
ti); Ud-a 431,31 (na hi khii_J.asava aparikkhii_J.e
ayusankhare paresa¡p apavadadibhayena parinibbanaya
-en ti gharanti vayamanti); As 111,7 (-ayati ti cetana);
Sadd 538,33 (cita sañcetane: -eti -ayati);
part.pr. (a) cetenta, mfn., Sp 524,21; Sv 373,21;
cetya
(b) cetaya(t), mfn., Patis I 108,19 (nekkhammekattaq1
-ayato kamacchandato cittaq1 vivattatl ti);
neg. acetaya(t), mfn., DI 184,23; (e) cetayanta, mfn.,
Kv 343,28; Sp 60,8 (-ayantam eva hi kammaq1 phusati
nacetayantaq1); - neg. acetayanta, mfn., Kv 343,24;
(d) cetayamana, mfn., DI 184,18 (-ayamanassa me
papiyo acetayamanassa me seyyo); PsI 276,13 (na
kevalaq1 phasso va uppajjati tena saddhiq1 tad eva
arammanaq1 anubhavamana vedana uppajjati
sañjanamana sañña pi -ayamana cetana pi vijanamanaq1
viññfu)aq1 pi uppajjati); It-a II 83,8 (saq1sare adinavaq1
disva pabbajjaya -ayamano); neg.
acetayamana, mfn., DI 184,19; (e) cetayana, mfn. [ts],
having sense, having understanding, reasonable; Ja V
339,21* (ka nu pasena baddhassa gati añña mahanasa sa
kathaq1 -ayanassa muttassa tava ruccati; 341,16·: tava
pana -ayanassa sacetanassa paññavato muttassa kathaq1
ruccati); - aor. 3 sg. cetayl, Vin V 218,21 (na capi so
parammarai_laya -ayi); Ap 562,12 (corappapataq1 netvana
pabbataq1 -ay! vadhaq1); 1 sg. acetayiq1, Pv 6:6 (sapatti
me gabbhini as1 tassa papaq1 acetayiq1);
absol. (a) cecea, V in III 73,19 (sañcicca ti jananto
sañjananto cecea abhivitaritva vitikkamo; Sp 437,8:
cecea ti vadhakacetanavasena -etva pakappetva);
Vin-vn 999; Sadd 539,8 (cecea ti abhivitaritva ti attho);
- neg. acecca, Vin II 91,31; (b) cetetva, Mp V 1,16 (na
cetanaya karai_liyan ti na -etva kappetva pakappetva
katabbaq1); Vv-a 146,23; Sadd 539,3; - neg. acetetva,
Sp 463,w; (e) cetayitva, A III 415,7 (cetanahaq1
bhikkhave kammaq1 vadami, -ayitva karnmaq1 karoti
kayena vacaya manasa); Mi161,25 (ekacco puggalo
akusalaq1 kamrnaq1 cetanaya -ayitva); Sadd 539,4; -
pp (a) cetayita, mfn. and n., (mfn.)formed (as an idea)
in the mind; intended; (n.)forming an idea; an
intention; A V 187,3foll. (sa kho pan' esa dinhi bhilta
saiJ.khata -a paticcasamuppanna, yaq1 kho pana kiñci
bhiltaql saiJ.khataq1 -aq1 paticcasamuppannaql tad
aniccaq1; Mp V 63,8: -a ti kappita); Pe! 26,4 (yaq1 -aq1
pakappitaq1); 218,6foll. (yaq1 -aq1 kayavacasikanaq1
kammanaq1, kiq1karm¡.a, -aq1 hi cetana manokamma ti
vuccate, so read with Ñii~Jamoli, 1964, p. 294? eds yaq1
va cetasikaq1 kayikaq1 cetasikaq1 karnmaq1 kiq1karai_1a,
cetasika hi cetana manokamma ti vuccate); Sadd 539,7
(-an ti cetanakaro ); - --tta, n., intention; forming an
idea; Dhs 281 (ya tasmiq1 samaye tajja
manoviññfu.Jadhatu samphassaja cetana sañcetana --ttaq1
ayaq1 tasmiq1 samaye cetana hoti); Sv 998,1 (danaq1
arabbha danadhikicca ya uppajjati cetana sañcetana
--ttaq1, ayaq1 vuccati danamayo puññabhisaiJ.kharo); -
--lakkhai_la, mfn., of which the distinguishing mark is
forming an idea or intention; Mil 62,5 (--lakkhal).a
cetana abhisaiJ.kharai_lalakkhal).a ca ti); Spk II 292,31
(--lakkhai_lassa saiJ.kharassa); As 111,8 ([cetan a]
--lakkhai_la, cetanabhavalakkhai_la ti attho);
pp (b) cetita, mfn., formed (as an idea) in the mind;
Pe! 220,5 (evaq1 saiJ.khara -a pakappita ca
arammal).abhilta honti); Ps II 361,28 (saiJ.khato ti -o
kappito pakappito ... ); III 13,27 (abhisañcetayitan ti -aq1
pakappitaq1, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se cetayitaq1) f. Mp V 84,27
(Ce, Ee, Se -aq1 kappitaq1; Be cetayitaq1 kappayitam);
168 celaka
fpp (a) cetabba2 , mfn., (b) ceteyya, mfn.,
--rilpa, (mf)n., (what is ) very much to be thought of or
held in mind; Ja IV 157,15* (cetabbarilpaql cetesi, Ce so;
Ee wr cetasi; Be ceteyyarilpaq1; Se cetayarilpaq1;
157,17'foll.: ñatlsu muducittataya cintento cintetabba-
yuttakam eva cintesi);- see also cetapeti.
cetya, n., se e sv cetiya.
ceyya, mfn.,fpp of cinati qv.
cela (sometimes ceJa), n. (and m. ?) [S. cela], cloth; a
garment; Abh 290 (-am acchadanaq1 vatthaq1); S V
440,5 (aditte bhikkhave -e va sise va kiq1 assa karai_11yan
ti); Ap 364,7 (-e va qayhamanamhi); Bv 1:22 (bhamenti
-ani ca ambare tada); Vism 217,4 (adittaq1-aq1 va s1saq1
va ajjhupekkhitva pi bhavanavasena); Ps II 265,6
(manussa -ani telacatiyaql temetva ukka katva);
Sadd 353,7 (dussaq1 acchadanaq1 vatthaq1 -o, Ee so; Be,
Ce -aq1); 436,21 (-an ti vatthaq1); - ifc se e dhati-
(sv dhatl); - 0 -aJ,Iquka, n., a roll of cloth; MI 150,17
(-en a ce pi sabrahmacañ ayasmantaq1 PUI).I).aql
Mantfu)iputtaq1 muddhana pariharanta labheyyuq1
dassanaya, Be, Ee so; Ce celai_lqilkena; Se velai_lqukena;
Ps II 158,28joll.: ettha celaq1 vuccati vatthaq1 al).qUkaql
cumbatakmp, Ce, Ee so; Be ai_1qupakaq1; Se velaq1
vuccati ... ai_1¡)ilpakaq1);- 0 -ukkhepa, m., throwing up
or waving of cloths; Ja III 285,16 (kammarasahassaq1
aiJ.guliyo pothesi -a pavattiq1su); V 67,16
(sadhukarasahassani adasi -e ca aii.gulipothe ca
pavattesi); VI 156,25* (-aq1 akaruq1 samagata rajaparisa
ca; 157 ,4· foil.: nanaVai_ll).ehi vatthehi dhaje ussapetva
uttariyani akase bhamenta -aq1 kariq1su); Ps II 195,9
(ukkutthiyo e' eva-a ca vattanti);- 0 -patika, 0 -pattika,
f. [cela + patika1], a cloth covering; a length of cloth;
Vin II 128,29 (saq1harantu rajakumara dussani, na
bhagava -aq1 akkamissati, Be so; Se ceJa-; Ce, Ee
0
-pattikaql; Sp 1209,!3: -an ti 0 -santharaql) =M II 93,2
(Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -pattikaql); Dhp-a III 136,3
(ummarato patthaya -aq1 patthari, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-pattikaql);- aceta, mfin)., unclothed, naked; a naked
ascetic; DI 161,4 (-o Kassapo yena bhagava ten'
upasaiJ.kami; Sv 349,12: -o ti naggaparibbajako); III 6,9
(-o Korakkhattiyo kukkuravatiko catukul).giko ... ); SI
78,2 (satta ca jatila satta ca nigai_l!ha satta ca -a satta ca
ekasataka ... ); Ja V 16,3* (yaq1 ve pivitva -o va naggo,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se pitva acelako va; 18,24·: acelako viya);
82,2o* (hitva gharaq1 pabbajito -o naggo mul).go carati
ghasahetu); Mp III 329,15 (eka micchadi!!hika yakkhini
-a hutva dve hatthe pasaretva jivhaq1 nillaletva . . . );
Th-a II 118,27 (varaq1 te bhikkhu .. . aiJ.gullhi kese
luñcitva -assa sato gilthamuttaharajivanan ti); -
acelaya in Ee at Ps III 321,6 is wr for avelaya (Be, Ce,
Se so); - niccela, mfn., without clothes; Ps II 43,26
(acelako ti -o naggo); Spk II 34,24 (acelo Kassapo ti
liii.gena acelo -o, namena Kassapo);- see also acelaka,
sacelaka.
celaka, m. [?], a standard-bearer; D I 51,9
( ... dhanuggaha -a calaka pil).gadayaka ugga ... ;
Sv IS6,21: -a ti ye yuddhe jayaddhajaq1 gahetva purato
gacchanti) f. A IV 107,13 f. Mil331,4;- celaka in cpd
in Ee at Spk I 165,19 (nigai,lthacelakaparibbajakadisu) is
wr; Be, Ce, Se nigal).thacelaka-; - celaka in Ce, Ee at
celakedu
Kkh 2 372,25* (verses not in Be) is prob. for 'celaka (or
read dan tapo1_1en' acelaka; cf 195,26 fo ll. ).
celakedu, m. [?], a kind of bird; Ja VI 538,11 * (maddalaka
-u bha1_1t;lutittiranamaka, Ce so; Ee cetakedu, perhaps
wr; Be mandalaka celakeru; Se ma1_1t;Ialaka celakeju;
538,32': maddalaka ca -u ca, Ce, Ee so; Be manda!aka
e' eva elaketu ca; Se ma1_1t;lalaka e' eva pelakejü ca).
celati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup celati, Wg § 15:29], moves;
Dhatup 277 (cela ... calane); Dhatum 410; Sadd 436,2o
(celu ... gatiyaJ!l: ... -ati).
1
cellipaka, m., celapika, f (and celavaka , celavika) [?], a
kind of servant; a nursemaid or playmate; ?; D 11 333,21
(rakkhanti taJ!l tamhi samaye khujja pi vamanika pi
ce!avika pi komarika pi ti, Se so; Be velasika; Ce
kejasika; Ee velamika; Sv 811,2: vilatadarika, Se so; Be
khit;lt;Iaparadhika; Ce, E e bala va darika); Ja V1483,4* (in
cpd: khujjacelapakakiJ.lJ.le südamagadhava1_11_1ite, Be, Ce
so; Ee khujjatecalillhakaki1_11_1e; Se khujja-
celavakakil_ll_le); Ap 358,5 (ce1apika vamanika kuñjavasi
timajjhika, Be so; Ce ve1apika; Ee velamika; Se
celavaka); 526,17 (dhatiyo maq¡ upanhanti khujja
celapika bahü, Be so; Ce khejasika; Ee ce1avika; Se
celavaka);- celapaka in Ee at Ja V 418,2o· is prob. wr
for ce1avaka2 qv.
cellivaka\ see sv celapaka.
celavaka 2 , m. [?], a kind of bird; Ja V 416,26** (in long
cpd: -jivajivakacelavakabhiilkarakaravika-; 418,2o·: -a ti
pi eke saku1_1a yeva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr celapaka);
VI 538,12* (-a piilgu1ayo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce celabaka;
539,1·: -a piilgu1ayo ti dve saku1_1ajatiyo, Be so; Ce, Ee
ce1abaka; Se celavaka).
celavika, see sv celapaka.
cellaka, m. [cf BHS cailaka ?], a class of sama1_1era;
Sp 253,34 (kumarako ti maq¡ dharehi -o cerako
mojigallo sama1_1uddeso ti maq¡ dharehi ti evaq¡
sama1_1eravevacanena sikkhapaccakkhanaJ!l hoti, Be so;
Ce, Ee monigallo; Se cerako perako mo1_1igallo;
Sp-r [Be] 11 80,2: kumarako ti kumaravattho ativiya
daharasama1_1ero, -o ti tato mahantataro khuddaka-
samal_lero, cerako ti majjhimo, mojigallo ti maha-
samal_lero) -t Vmv [Be] I 135,20 (-o ti tato kiñci
mahanto); Vjb [Be] 99,1s: (-o ti athero, cerako ti
majjhimo mojigallo mahasama1_1ero ).
cevati, pr. 3 sg. [?], ? Sadd 440,29 (cevi cetanatu1ye: -ati).
cokkha, mfn. [S. cok~a, cauk~a; AMg cukkha, cokkha],
pure; clean; Ja III 21,26' (vaggü ti -a nimmala, Be so;
Ce, Se pokkha; Ee vokkha); - 0 -cokkha, mfn., very
pure; Ps 1 150,3 (jaññajaññaJ!l viya ti -aq¡ viya manapa-
manapaJ!l viya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se mokkhamokkhaJ!l;
Ps-r [Be] I 252,14: taq¡ paramaparisuddhaJ!l manoharaJ!l
ca hoti ti aba -an ti);- 0 -jatika, mfn., clean; disposed
to purity; Th-a II 135,20 (yaq¡ ... mataq¡ ka1ebaraq¡
taq¡ ... eke -a jigucchanti oloketuq¡ pi na icchanti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee mokkhajatika; - acokkhajatika, mfn.,
unclean, impure; Ud-a 52,27 (manavasena ca kodha-
vasena ca sabbaJ!l acokkhajatikaq¡ passitva jigucchanto
huhun ti karonto vicarati, so read ?; Be, Se avokkha-
jatikaJ!l; Ce, Ee atakkajatikaq¡); - 0 -brahmaJ1a, m., a
clean brahman; a brahman concemed with purity;
Vibh-a 424,17 (sucikamo -o güthaq¡ viya kiñci
169 coda ti
sailkharaq¡ sukhato upagacchati, Be so; Ce, Se
pokkharabrahma1_1o; Ee bhokkhi brabma1_1o) -t Ps IV
107,21 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se pokkharabrahma1_1o); -
0
-bhava, m., purity; PsI 177,27 (lokkhasammata ti
1ükhabhavasammata, lükhabhavan ti -aJ!l, visuddha-
bhavaq¡ deti ti evaq¡ sammata ti, Be so; Ce, Ee lokhya-
sammata ti; Se mokkhabhavaq¡, visuddhibhavaq¡ deti ti).
coca, n. [[fS. coca], a kind of(kernelled ?) plantain; Ja V
420,3 (in long cpd: -devadarukacocagahane; 422,2r:
devadarurukkhehi e' eva kada!Ihi ca gahane);
Vibh-a 447,31 (guñjacocarukkhattacaJ!l guñjalatapattehi
saddhiq¡ ekato kogetva); Samantak 737 (in long cpd);
Vin-vn 1354 (phalaq¡ khajjüriya pi ca labujassa ca -assa
mocassa madhukassa ca); - 0 -pana, n., a drink made
from the plantain; Vin I 246,16 (anujanami bhikkhave
agha panani ambapanaq¡ jambupanaq¡ -a!!l mocapiinaJ!l
madhupanaq¡ ... ; Sp 1102,9: -an ti atthikakadaliphalehi
katapanaq¡, mocapananti ti anaghikehi kadaliphalehi
katapanaq¡, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se aghikehi kadaliphalehi) -:F
Kv 552,28.
cotati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup corati, Wg § 9:39], becomes
small; Sadd 353,9 (cura appibhave: -ati).
co9ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup cu1_1ati, Wg § 28:84], cuts;
Sadd 358,29 (cu1_1a chedane: -ati).
cotati, pr. 3 sg. [S. cotati, cyotati, Wg § 3:3], flows,
trickles; Sadd 360,21 (cuta asecane khara1_1e ca: cotati).
cottalisaip, f, num. [S. catvariq¡sat], 40; Sadd 800,9
(catta!Isaq¡ cutta!IsaJ!l -aq¡); - see also catta!Isa(q¡)
(sv cattarisa[q¡]), cuttalisaq¡.
codaka, mfn. and m. rJrom codeti; BHS id.], (one) who
reproves, or exhorts to action; (one) who aa·uses (ofan
offence); Vin 11 248,17 (-ena ... bhikkhuna paraJ!l
codetukamena pañca dhamme ajjhattaJ!l paccavekkhitva
paro codetabbo); V 158,17 (-o aba apanno ti); 160,2
(anuvijjakena -o pucchitabbo Ya!!l kho tVaJ!l avuso
imaq¡ bhikkhuq¡ codesi kimhi naq¡ codesi ... ); MI 95,31
(bhikkhu cudito -ena -aq¡ parippharati); S 1 63,31 (-o
bhante ayasma Sariputto, papagarahi bhante ayasma
Sariputto; Spk I 124,1: -o ti vatthusmiq¡ oti1_11_1e va
anoti1_11_1e va vitikkamaJ!l disva avuso bhikkhuna nama
evaq¡ nivasetabbaq¡ . . . evaq¡ bhuñjitabban ti
codanavasena anusinhiq¡ deti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tantivasena); A I 55,10 (evaq¡ ... -o bhikkhu sadhukaJ!l
attana va attanaq¡ paccavekkhati); Mil 380,22 (yogina ...
-aq¡ papagarahiq¡ ovadakaq¡ . . . kalyiil_lamittaq¡
sabrahmacariq¡ upan1ssaya vasitabbaJ!l); Sp 235,zs
(sannipatite sailghe oti1_11_1e vatthusmi111 -ena ca
cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe sahasa avinicchinitva va
cha thanani oloketabbani); 1320,2o (-o nama yo
vatthuna va apattiya va paraJ!l codeti); Sv 40,15 (bhikkhü
sabbe va appiccha santurrha pavivitta asaJ!lsagha -a
papagarahino vattaro vacanakkhama); - ifc see
dhamma- (sv dhamma 1).
codati, pr. 3 sg. [S. codati], exhorts, admonishes; Spk I
115,23 (samagamakale -issami ti, eds so; perhaps for
codessami); - caus. pr. 3 sg. codeti, -ayati [S.,
BHS codayati], Dhatup 585 (cuda codane); Dhatum 818;
Sadd 542,1s (cuda sañcodane a1_1attiyaJ!1 ca: -eti -ayati
codako cuditako); l. incites, causes to move quickly,
drives on; exhorts to action; Dhp 379 (attana -ay'
coda ti
attan~) f- Th 637; Spk I 206,19 (saqlVejeyyan ti
-eyy~ sammapa~ipattiyarp yojeyyarp); Mp II 227,4
(sarpvegajanananhena idani te maccusamip~
gantabban ti -enti viya tasma devaduta ti vuccanti); -
2. importunes; presses (for payment of a debt or
promise); SI 170,32* (na hi nün' imassa sama¡;¡assa
paccüsamhi i1_1ayika detha detha ti -enti); A III 352,7
(y~ pi bhikkhave daliddo . . . va99hirp pa~isu1_1itva
ka1abhatarp va99hirp na deti -enti pi narp ... ); Ja II
135,15 (marpsamülarp dehi ti punappuna -eyyasi ti);
136,7* (appattakale -esi); VI 245,26* (luddarp t~
bhont~ niraye vasantarp ko -aye paraloke sahassarp);
Pj I 218,29 (bhavissanti me i1_1ayika te marp i1_1arp dehi ti
-essanti); - 3. criticises, reproves; admonishes; Vin I
43,15 (api ssu bhikkhü disva imaya gathaya -enti); DI
230,7 (tayo ... sattharo ye loke codanaraha yo ca pan'
evarüpe sattharo -eti sa codana bhuta); la VI 378,3
(a1ikena sarenti -en ti); Nidd I 503,7 (upajjhaya va
acariya va ... -en ti idarp te avuso ayuttarp idarp te avuso
appattarp ... ); Ap 67,26 (isayo -ayissanti tarp sada); Ps 11
273,22 (sace no micchadiqhika -essanti, kasma tumhe
sama1_1arp Gotam~ vandittha ti); Spk I 309,14 (na
mayharp khadaniy~ va bhojaniy~ va pariyesasi ti
punappunarp matararp -eti); - 4. accuses (o.f an
offence, instr.); makes an accusation; Vin I 114,25
(anujanami bhikkhave kate pi okase puggalarp tu1ayitva
apattiya -etun ti); 11 82,15 (bhikkhu apattirp apanno hoti,
tam en~ -eti sangho va sambahula va ekapugga1o va
sarat' ay asma evarüpirp apattirp apajjita ti); 1O1,9 (idha
bhikkhu bhikkhurp sanghamajjhe garukaya apattiya
-eti); 252,3* (kalabhütena sa1_1hena atthamettena -aye);
282,35 (in uddana: okasarp -e sarenti); III 164,17 (t~ ce
-eti dinho maya parajikarp dhammarp ajjhapanno si);
IV 217,10 (n' ev' attana pa~icodeyya ti na sayarp -eyya);
V 160,3foll. (y~ kho tvarp avuso imarp bhikkhurp -esi
kimhi narp -esi . . . silavipattiya va -emi acaravipattiya
va ... ditthivipattiya va -emi ti); MI 27,19 (apattirp ca
vata apanno ass~. anuraho marp bhikkhü -eyyurp no
sanghamajjhe ti); A IV 168,24 (bhikkhü bhikkhurp
apattiya -en ti); - part.pr. (a) codenta, mf( -enti)n.,
Vin 11 276,16 (na -etabbo ... -entiya apatti dukka~assa);
la V 112,12 (rajanarp tava pamadena -ento ); VI 444,27
(yatha maharaja ti -ento pacchato yati); 450,2o
(vajirankusena nagarp -ento); Spk III 152,17 (pavattatu
bhavarp cakkaratanan ti puññanubhavena abbhuggataya
vacaya -ento cakkarp vatteti ti cakkavatti); Th-a 11 58,2
(tassa hitanukampini devata tam -enti);
neg. acodenta, mfn., Spk I 76,26 (samappavattesu
sindhavesu .. . sarathi .. . acodento avarento tiqhati);
(b) codayamana, mfn., Vin III 221,34 (dvittikkhatturp
-amano sariyamano t~ civar~ abhinipphadeyya, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee codiyamano) quoted Sp 673,7; Mp IIl
299,18 (codakena ti .. . catühi codanavatthühi
-ayamanena); - aor. 3 sg. (a) codesi, Vin III 60,11 (so
janitva t~ -esi asama¡;¡o si tvan ti); Th 376 (mama
sankappam aññaya -esi narasarathi; Th-a II 161,32: -e si
nigga¡;¡hi); la IV 232,21 (ganturp nago nasakkhi, raja
punappuna -esi); VI 222,26* (raja -esi sarathirp ...
yuttarp yanarp idhanaya; cf223,11': -esi ti iil_lapesi);
Th-a II 141,21 (mata kasma tvarp ekeko santaruttaro va
170 coda ti
idhagato si ti -esi); (b) codayl, acodayi, la V 112,14*
(pamatto appamattarp marp pita putt~ acodayi);
Ap 477,1 (tato me cittam aññaya -ayi pubbadevata, Ce,
Se so; Be -ayi; Ee wr codayitva); 3 pl. (a) codesurp,
Vin III 58,3; Sp 874,7 (amülakena antimavatthuna
-esurp); Spk I 321,32 (imani pi tvarp avuso acchariyani
naddasa ti -esurp); (b) codayirpsu, Spk I 310,27 (tarp ...
puttaka -ayirpsu); - absol. (a) codetva, V in Ili 183,6
(pa~hamarp ... bhikkhü -etabba -etva saretabba saretva
apattirp ropetabba vyattena bhikkhuna pa~ibalena sangho
ñapetabbo ... ); 223,3 (catukkhattarp -etva); la VI 69,16
(imasmirp ku1e putto va bhata va il_larp -etva ga¡;¡hanto
nama n' atthl ti); - neg. acodetva, Vin II 3,12; Ps IV
47,16 (acodetva asaretva); (b) codayitva, Vin V 218,5
(-ayitva sarayitva);- codayitva in Ee at Ap 477,1 is wr
for codayf (Be, Ce, Se so); - neg. acodayitva, Vin V
218,1;- pass. part.pr. (a) codiyanta, mfn., la VI 249,4·
(sucodiyantan ti su~thu -iyantarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
sucodayantan ti suqhu codayan~; ad 249,29* foll.:
sandhavamanarp tarp rathesu yuttarp . . . patodalatthlhi
sucodiyantarp ko codaye paraloke sahass~. Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se sucodayantarp); (b) codiyamana, mfn., Vin V
188,16 (parajikena -iyamano sanghadises~ ajjhapanno
pa~ijanati); A III 196,21 (ekaccarp pugga1~ passami
aka1ena -iyamanarp no kalena kupitam); la VI 521,12
(brahma¡;¡aku1a . . . -iyamana kahapa¡;¡e daturp
asakkonta); Vibh 387.18 (so bhikkhu bhikkhuhi apattiya
-iyamano na sarami na sarami ti asatiya nibbetheti);
Sp 1115,s (taya purimapatthanaya -iyamano);
Cp-a 145,1o (i1_1ayikehi -iyamano);- codiyamano in Ee
at Vin IIl 221,34 is wrfor codayamano (Be, Ce, Se so);
- neg. acodiyamana, mfn., Vin III 223,32; Sp 1192,10;
- pp codita, lr!fn· [ts], l. incited, driven on; exhorted
(to action); admonished; D 11 274,21 • (tass' ete putta
satiya vihina -a maya te satim ajjhalatthurp, Be, Ce so;
E e cüta .. . sati pacca1atthurp; S e endita .. . sati
pacca1atthurp); M IIl 187,3* (-a devadütehi ye
pamajjanti ma1_1ava te digharatt~ socanti); A IV 190,25
(assakha1unko pehi ti vutto viddho samano -o
sarathina); Sn 819 (atha satthani kurute paravadehi -o);
Th 1164 (-o bhavitattena . . . Migaramatu pasad~
padanguqhena kampayirp); Thi 212 (matara -o santo
aphusirp santim uttamarp); la VI 249,21* (tam aruhanti
nariyo nara ca paradaragü -a sattihatthehi Yama-
niddesakarihi); 525,25* (so -o brahma¡;¡iya brahma¡;¡o
kamagiddhima); Ap 32,15 (so paccha pabbajitvana
kusa1amülena -o; Ap-a 240,22: -o uyyojito ); Ps 11 121,24
(satthararp pañharp puccha ti atthakamaya devataya -o);
Pv-a 152,3 (itthiyo .. . kirp ayarp tatharüparp paparp
akasi udahu nakasi ti -a); Cp-a 87,12 (devata
mahasattassa puññatejena -a); Mhv 37:221 (tena hi
tvarp sakarp vadarp otarehi ca -o);- ifc se e sarathi-; -
codita in Ee at Ap 363,25 is prob. wr; Be, Ce codenta; Se
codento;- neg. acodita, mfn., la V 169,23*; Ps V 13,27;
- 2. accused (of an offence ); V in 11 276,16 (-o pi
acodito); M II 248,22 (bhikkhu -o va acodito va apattirp
sarati vivarati uttanikaroti); Sp 227,24 (coro viya
paccakkh~ disva --tta); - neg. acodita, mfn., Vin II
276,16; M II 248,22; see also cudita;
.!PP codetabba, 111;{n. and n. impers., Vin I 114,17 (na
codana
bhikkhave anokasakato bhikkhu apattiya -o); II 248,19
(codakena ... bhikkhuna ... pañca dhamme ajjhattarp.
paccavekkhitva paro -o): 250,10 (yatha na añño pi
bhikkhu abhütena -arp. maññeyya ti) = A III 197,19;
Vin III 221,33 (dvittikkhatturp. -o saretabbo attho me
avuso clvarena ti); DI 230,15 (so evarp. assa -o);
Vism 95,6; Sp 425,15 (attana va atta -o); 470,18 (sace
patidenti gahetabbarp., no ce denti na -a); Sv 1028,23
(pararp. codentena hi parisamajjhe va . . . na -arp.);
Sadd 100,16 (aqhane ayarp. kathita ti na -arp.); 640,23 (na
katthaci akkharanarp. bahuta va appata va -a ti);- caus.
pr. 3 sg. codapeti, causes ( someone) to make an
accusation or criticism; drives on, incites; Vin III 163,36
(anuddharp.seyya ti codeti va -eti va; Sp 587,6: -etl ti
attana samlpe thatva aññarp. bhikkhurp. fu;!apeti so tassa
vacanena tarp. codeti); 165,2o (tarp. ce -eti diqho si
parajikarp. dhammarp. ajjhapanno si); Vin-vn 417 (codeti
va tathasaññl -eti parena va); - codapeti in Ee at
Ud-a 361,15 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se vodapeti; -
part.pr. codapenta, mfn., Sp 589,21 (attana codentassa
parena -entassapi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -entassa ti);- aor.
3 sg. codapesi, Spk II 175,27 (sampaharp.sesl ti
pati1addhagm_lena -esi, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se
modapesi; Ce vodapesi); - see also cujjamana, cudita.
codana, f, codana, n. [S., BHS codana; S. codana],
l. exhorting to action; admonition, reproof, criticism;
DI 230,7 (sa -a bhilta taccha dhammika anavajja);
Sp 295,13 (iii.gha ti -'-atthe nipato); Spk I 115,19
(upasañkami ti -'-atthaya upagato); 298,2o (devataya -a
kira sugatanusatthisadisa); Pv-a 88,16 (handa ti - '-atthe
nipato, Be, Se so; Ce uyyogatthe; Ee upasaggatthe);
Cp-a 98,5 ([mahapurisanarp.] añgajlvitapariccage ya -a
sa pi visodhita ti); Sadd 542,19 (-a ti ca1ana, ca1ana ti
dosaropana ti attho ); 898,3 (iilgha handa ice ete
-'-atthe); - 2.pressing (for payment of a debt or
promise); Vin III 223,10 (atirekatikkhatturp. -aya); A lli
352,7 (codenti pi narp., -a pi bhikkhave dukkha
1okasmirp. kamabhogino ti); - 3. accusation (of an
offence); V in l 136,23 (in uddana: -amhi); II 29,26 (in
uddana: okaso -arp. e' eva silra!).a sampayojana);
V 125,38 (catasso -a, s!lavipattiya codeti acaravipattiya
codeti ... ); Sp 587,13 (imissa -aya ekarp. vatthurp. eko
codako); 592,14 (evarp. yaya kayaci -aya vasena sañgha-
majjhe osate vatthusmirp., Be, Ce so; Ee yassa kassaci;
Se yassa kissaci); 1359,22 (vatthurp. ca apattirp. ca
dassetva -a); Mhv 37:38 (tassa viharagahissa Tissa-
therassa -a antimavatthuna);- 0 -vatthu, n., groundfor
criticism or accusation; Vin V 120,12 (tll).i -üni diqhena
sutena parisañkaya) = D III 218,s; Spk II 45,10
(sammasambuddhassa te patijanato ime dhamma
anabhisambuddha ti ad!su -usu); - 0 -sodhana,f, the
answering of objections or criticism; Vism 276,1
(Patisambhidayarp. pan' assa saddhirp. -ahi evarp. attho
vutto) = Sp413,2o; Sadd 140,15 (-a catra bhavati: ... );
192,13; - acodana,f, lack of, freedom from,
accusation; absence of pressing; Ps IV 45,2 (bhikkhühi
codiyamano va puna - '-atthaya amü]havinayarp. yacati);
Kkh 2 119,6 (-aya 1addhe).
codapaka, m. [from codapeti, caus. of codeti qv], one who
causes (someone) to make an accusation; Sp 587,8
171 cora
(-ass' eva vacaya vacaya sañghadiseso); Kkh 2 73,1
(-ass' e va vuttanayena apattiyo ).
codeta(r), m. [from codeti], one who admonishes; one
who accuses (of an offence ); V in V 184,3 (yathadhamme
yathavinaye yathapattiya -a hoti); Sp 47,26 (ko ayarp.
tata upajjhayo nama ti, vajjavajjarp. disva -a sareta
maharaja ti); 1372,15 (na bhütena vatthuna apattirp.
saretva -a hoti).
codeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of codati qv.
coddasa, [= catuddasa qv sv catu(r); AMg id.; As (Nigllva)
codasa], 14; Sadd 800,6 (cuddasa -a catuddasa).
copati, pr. 3 sg. [S. copati, Wg § 11:9], moves (slowly);
Dhatup 191 (cupa mandagamane); Dhatum264;
Sadd 403,2! (cupa mandagatiyarp.: -ati); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. copeti, copayati, moves (trans.); M III 133,22
(n' eva purime pade -eti na pacchime pade -eti); -
part.pr. (a) copenta, mfn., As 93,22 (kayañgarp. -ento);
- neg. acopenta, mfn., Ud-a 242,19; - acopentassa in
Ee at As 79,15 is wr for fu;!apentassa (Be, Ce, Se so);
(b) neg. acopayamana, Sp 902,5 (bhikkhuni nicca1a
hutva citten' eva adhivaseti kayañgarp. acopayamana pi);
- aor. 3 sg. acopi, Spk Il 313,27 (mañcake samacopi ti
samantato acopi, ca1anakarena apacitirp. dassesi, Ee so,
but perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se samadhosi ti samantato
adhosi; ad S TTT 120,2: Ce, Se samañcopi; Be, Ee
samadhosi); absol. copetva, As 94,37;
neg. acopetva, Sv 277,Io (bhagava kayañgarp. vacañgarp.
va acopetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr avopetva); As 79,5.
copana, n. [cf S. copana], moving; movement; action;
Ps III 53,22 (ubhayadvare -arp. pana appatva manodvare
uppanna ekünatirp.sakusa1akusa1acetana manokammarp.
nama, Be, Se so; Ce, E e ubhayadvaracopanarp.); Spk II
17,24 (kayadvare --vasena pavattanarp. . . . kaya-
sañcetananarp.); As 89,34 foil. (kayavacidvaresu hi -arp.
patva kammapatharp. appattarp. pi atthi . . . yo migavarp.
gamissami ti dhanurp. sajjeti . . . vattharp. paridahati
ettavata kayadvare -arp. pattarp. hoti, so araññe divasarp.
caritva antamaso sasabi1a1amattarp. pi na 1abhati, idarp.
akusa1akayakammarp. hoti na hoti ti, na hoti); 96,16
(yada ... manodvarikajavanarp. ... suddharp. kayadvara-
sailkhatarp. -arp. papayamanarp. uppajjati); 105,2o foll.
(tam kayavacidvaresu -arp. pattarp. akusalarp.
kayakammavacikammarp. hoti, -arp. appattarp. akusa1a-
manokammam eva);- 0 -kaya, m., the body as physical
movement; Spk II 396,3 (rakkhiten' eva kayena ti ettha
-o, kayaviññatti ti attho); Ud-a 320,21 (thitena kayena
ti . . . samma ~hapitena -ena, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
dhopitakayena); It-a I 100,29 (kayo pana -o karajakayo
samühakayo pasadakayo ti); Dhp-a IV 85,19 (kayena
sarp.varo ti tattha pana pasadakayo pi -o pi 1abbhati,
ubhayarp. pi pan' etarp. kayadvaram eva ... copanadvare
pi tarp.vatthuka pal).atipato adinnadanarp. micchacaro ti).
coma in long cpd in Ee at Sp 836,20 is wr for coca (Be,
Ce, Se so).
cora 1, m. [S. cora, caura], a thief, a robber; a bandit;
Abh 522 (takkaro mosako -o); Vin I 75,7 (ayarp. so
karabhedako -o); II 131,18 (bhikkhu ... vikale
aññatarena gamadvarena atikkamati, manussa es' ayyo
-o gacchati); I1I 45,s (kittakena kho ... raja . . . -arp.
gahetva hanati va bandhati va pabbajeti va ti); 67,10
cora
(upaghakakulmp -ehi upaddutmp hoti dve ca daraka nlta
honti); MI 86,12 (te bhoge rajano va haranti -a va
haranti aggi va qahati); 129,15 (ubhatodal_lqakena ce
pi ... kakacena -a ocaraka angamangani okanteyyurp);
II 74,1* (-o yatha sandhimukhe gahito); 97,25 (-o
Angulimalo nama hoti luddo lohitapa!)l hatapahate
nivigho adayapanno pa!)abhütesu); A I 47,10 (ekacco
passati -arp agucarirp rapno gahetva vividha
kammakaraJ.la karente); 68,21 (yasmirp ... samaye -a
balavanto honti rajano tasmirp samaye dubbala honti);
IV 223,19 (avudhabala -a); Khp 8:2 (rajato va duruttassa
-ato pi!itassa va); Ud 90,31 (ayasmato Nagasamalassa
tena panthena gacchantassa antaramagge -a
nikkhamitva hatthehi va padehi va akotesurp pattarp ca
bhindirpsu sanghatirp ca vipphalesurp); Sn 135 (yo ve
anaraha santo araharp patijanati -o sabrahmake loke);
Th 724 (sutvana -a isino subhasitarp nikkhippa satthani
ca avudhani ca); Ja III 34,6 (tasmirp pana kale -e
gahetva nimbasüle uttasenti); V 16,21* (-ana dhuttanarp
gatl niketo ); 100,4* (iddhmp phltarp janapadarp -a
viddharpsayanti tarp); Ap 562,7 (-arp vadhatthmp
niyyantarp disva); Mil20,14foll. (paresarp bhogaharaka
-a . . . gamaghataka -a . . . panthadüsaka -a);
Vism 190,22 (yattha rajano -e chindapenti); Sp 54,2
(paccantarp vüpasamenta -e ghatenti); Sv 801,JR (yatha
ca aravito -e anetva nagarassa dakkhi!)advare
ghateyyurp); Ps III 328,18 (kirp ekacorako udahu
rajjadüsako -o ti); Dhp-a I 312,9 (tvarp bahirake -e jini
taya jitmp puna ajitam eva hoti, maya pana ajjhattiko
lobhacoro jito so puna marp na jinissati); It-a I 97,22
(nagaradvarena hi pavisitva -a yad icchanti tmp
hareyyurp); Vibh-a !8!,22 (andhakare -assa
hatthappasaral_larp viya); Mhv 33:38; - corena in Ee at
Ja IV 470,23* (ingha agaccha corena) is wr; Be, Ce, Se
agacchat' orena; - ifc see ummagga- (sv ummagga\
gaJ.lthibhedaka-; - 0 abhinita, mfn., driven by bandits;
brought low by bandits; M I 463,23 (na -a agarasma
anagariymp pabbajita); S III 93,7 (n' eva rajabhinlta na
-a na i!)atta; Spk II 301 ,25 foll.: y e pana corehi ataviymp
gahetva ... ekacce maymp sami tumhehi vissagha
geharp anajjhavasitva pabbajissama, tattha yarp yarp
pupphagandhapüjadipuññmp karissama tato tumhakmp
pattirp dassama ti tehi vissagha pabbajanti te -a nama,
te pi hi nama corehi maretabbatarp abhinlta ti -a nama);
Mil 32,3 (keci -a pabbajanti); a• -upaddava,
o• -üpaddava, m., oppression by thieves or bandits;
violence or insurrection by bandits; Ja I 267,8 (ito
pat!haya tumhakmp uppanno -o mayharp bharo );
Sp 381,20 (paccante -ena gamesu vughahantesu); 723,7
(mahagghmp vassikasatikmp nivasetva nahayantassa -o
apada nama); Th-a III 56,13 (atha manussa tmp -arp
Kosalarañño arocesurp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
coruppadavarp); - 0 -kamma, n., thievery; banditry;
Ja VI 487,7 (mahantarp chatakmp pavatti manussa
jiviturp asakkonta -arp karonti); Sp 365,17
(asarpvihitarakkhmp bhaJ.l<:laJP aññassa -arp katurp
patibalassa aroceti); 997,21 (pubbe mahajane pakato
coro, paccha -arp pahaya); Spk I 318,16 (manussa -ato
pativirata); - 0 -gamal;_li, 0 -gamaJ;,Iika, m., a thieves'
leader, a bandit chiej; Vin III 208,7 (addasa kho
172 coraka
0
-gama!)iko Uppalava!)I)arp bhikkhunirp; Sp 662,28:
corajeghako); Th-a III 12,20 (0 -gama!)I); - 0 -geha, n.
[cora + geha 1], a prison; Ja VI 4,12 (katharp nu kho
imamha -a mucceyyan ti); Dhp-a I 193,13 (Udenmp
jlvagaham eva gahapetva ekasmirp -e pakkhipitva
dvarmp pidahapetva);- 0 -ghata, m., an executioner; a
torturer; V in III 86,2 (bhikkhu aghatanarp gantva -arp
etad avoca, avuso ma-y-imarp kilamesi, ekena paharena
jlvita voropehl ti); D II 321,23 foll. (agamentu tava
bhavanto -a . . . vippalapantass' eva -a slsarp
chindeyyun ti); Ja V 303,24 (pharasurp ca ga!)thikarp ca
gahetva -o idh' eva agacchatü ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
0
-ghatako); Mp II 217,13 (-assa kusalakammarp
akusalarp upapJ!esi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -ghatakassa);-
1
0
-ghataka, m. [cora + ghataka ], an executioner; a
torturer; Vin III 107,21; MI 343,24 (ekacco puggalo
orabbhiko hoti ... coro -o bandhanagariko) f. A II 207,s;
Ja III 41,1 foll.; Pv-a 5,15 (so pana puriso -ehi aghatanmp
netva slsacchedarp patto);- 0 -jetthaka, m., a leader of
thieves; a bandit chief, Ja II 341,17 (esa mmp
mariyamanarp -arp yacitva mocesi); As 245,13 (dvadasa
-a anekehi purisasahassehi saddhirp raghmp
vilumpanti); Dhp-a li 203,9; 0
-tta, n., abstr.,
banditry; Ja III 216,28 (devana sakka paccantarp gantva
-arp katurp);- 0 -pakatika, mfn., having the nature of a
thief, naturally dishonest; Ja II 424,2;
0
-paccatthika, m., a hostile bandit; a thief who is an
enemy; Vin III 33,19 (rajapaccatthika -a
dhuttapaccatthika; Sp 268,6: cora eva paccatthika -a);
Ap 310,5; - 0 (p)papata, m., a steep rock or cliff from
which criminals were hurled; Ja IV 191.21 (gacchatha
narp -e patetva vinasmp papetha ti); Ap 562,12; Dhp-a II
219,18 (ekmp passmp chinnatatarp, pabbatamatthake
thita tena passena core patenti te kha!)qakhaJ.lqarp hutva
bhümiymp patanti tasma -o ti vuccati); - 0 -vosapaka,
0
-Vosasaka, m., an executioner; ? Th-a II 22,31
(Kosalarañño bhojakassa a -vosapakassa putto hutva
nibbatti, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -vosasakassa; Ce 0 -ghatakassa);
-
0
-sadharal;_la, mfn., vulnerable to thieves; A III 259,19
(rajasadharal_la bhoga -a bhoga ... ); - acora, m., one
who is nota thief; not the thief, Ja I 175,26 (idani pana
coranmp kiñci bhayarp natthi, -a mara!)arp labhanti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee omit bhaymp); 385,16 (imehi pañcahi pi
-ehi bhavitabbarp); Mill86,3 (coro niggahetabbo -o
paggahetabbo ti); Ps III 110,20 (pathamavaca -mp yeva
coro ti ... pavatta); - niccora, mfn., free from thieves
or bandits; Ja II 422,18' (immp nissaya no nagarmp -arp
jatan ti); Sp 195,18 (nirabbudo ti abbudavirahito, abbuda
vuccanti cora, -o ti attho, cora ti ca imasmirp atthe
dussila adhippeta); Sv 922,6 (akhilmp animittmp
akaJ.ltakan ti -mp); - sacora, mfn., infested with
bandits; Vism 647,28 (savisarp viya bhojanarp -o viya
maggo ); - se e also acorahara!)a.
cora 2, m. (?) [cf S. lex. cora], a kind ofplant; Ja VI 537,25*
(corakogha kappüra ca, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee coraka kugha
kappüra ca); - 0 -phala, n., a cora fruit; Ap 346,18
(a]aka isimugga ca tato -a bahü, Ee so; Be, Ce moda-
phala; Se soraphala).
1
coraka 1, m., corika ,J [S. coraka, caurika], a thief; Vin III
60,29 foll. (samika te -e anubandhirpsu, -a samike
coraka
passitva bhaJ.lgika~ patetva palayi~su); 64,26 (-a gavi~
hantva ma~sa~ khaditva); - ifc see kattika-, jambu-;
- acorika,f, not a thief; Vv 31:5 (pal)atipata virata
-a ... no ca musa abhill)i~; Vv-a 130,5: -a ti coriya-
rahita, adinnadana pa~ivirata ti attho, virata ca coriya ti
pi pa~ho, theyyato virata ti attho ).
coraka 2, m. [cf S. lex. coraka, cauraka], a kind of
(fragrant) plant; a peifume; Ja VI 537,25* (vibhedika -a
ku~~a kappüra ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se corakottha kappüra
ca); Ps IV 11,8 (corakapiyaiJ.gumattenapi sarlra~
vi1impetva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se goraka-).
coraka 3 , m. [?],a kind of bean; ? - ifc se e varaka-.
corika\ see sv coraka 1.
corika 2,f [S. lex. id.; S. caurika], theft, stealing; banditry;
Abh 522 (theyya~ ca -a moso); Vin I 75,4 (puriso -~
katva karaya baddho hoti); Ja III 508,26 (narinde utthaya
-a~ karonte ko pa~ibahissati); Sp 998,19 (yo koci -~
va añña~ va garuka~ rajaparadha~ katva palato); PsI
198,28 (adinnassa adan~ adinnadan~ parassa haral_la~
theyy~ -a ti vutt~ hoti); Cp-a 243,10 (are dutthaja~ila
ratti~ -a~ katva diva tapasavesena caras! ti); -
instr. corikaya, by stealing, by robbing; clandestinely;
Vin I 208,25 (niss~say~ -aya abhata ti); Mill58,9
(-aya kata~ M arena papimata, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
coriyakamm~); Sp 385,3o (-aya attana va khadanti);
Ud-a 179,19 (cara gamaghatakad!ni katva -aya jlvanta);
Pv-a 4,2 (-aya paresa~ santaka~ gahetva).
coriya, n. [S. caurya], theft, stealing; Dhatup 595 (thena
-e); Dhatum 832; Vv-a 130,6 (virata ca -a ti pi pa~ho,
theyyato virata ti attho ); Th-a 11 272,2o (ki~ bhante
tumhehi id~ -~ kat~ va na va ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
corikakamma~); Ap-a 562,27 (aya~ coro, imina -a~
katan ti); Sadd 550,5 (thena -e, corassa bhavo -a~).
coñ, f [S. cauñ], a female thief or robber; Vin IV 226,8
(katha~ hi nama bhikkhuniyo -i~ pabbajessant! ti);
V 56,5 (-i~ vutthapentiya saiJ.ghadiseso); A IV 92,21* (-!
ca bhariya ti ca sa pavuccati); Ja I 295,7• (-In~ bahu-
buddh!n~ yasu sacc~ sudullabh~ th!n~ bhavo
durajano); 11 363,15' (kaya~ balaka sikhinl -1; 363,2o·:
kulassa ananuññaya kulaghar~ kakassa va aruciya
kakapacchi~ pavinhatta -1 ti vadati); V 448,29* (-iyo
kathina h' eta; 449,n·: sambhatassa dhanassa vinasanena
-iyo); Kkh 2 288,17 (carita corisaññita ... );- corim eva
in Ee at Ps III ll0,22 is wr for cora~ yeva (Be, Ce, Se
so); - 0 -vutfhapana, n., ordaining a (female) thief,
Vin V 89,33 (jayati t!hi dvarehi -~ id~); Sp 948,9
(-a~ gamantar~ aramasikkhapada~. Be, Se so; Ce
coñ-u~~apan~; Ee coñ ughana~); Utt-vn 192; 338;-
0
-vutfhapika,f, one who ordains a thief; Utt-vn 182
(-a capi ñattiya dukka~~ phuse);- acoñ,f, one who
is not a thief, Vin IV 227,14 (-iya corlsañña);
Kkh 2 288,14; Mp III 248,17 (athenl ti atheniyo -iyo).
coreti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. corayati], steals; Dhatup 530
(cura theyye); Dhatum 743; Sp 195,2o (assamal_la hutva
samaJ_lapatiññataya paresa~ paccaye -enti); 351,12
(aparo patt~ -essaml ti); Sadd 518,18foll. (cura
theyye: . . . -eti -ayati . . . -etu~ -ayitu~ . . . dhan~
-eti); - absol. (a) coretva, (b) corayitva, Sadd 518,2o;
pass. pr. 3 sg. coñyati, Sadd 518,23;
pp carita, mfn. [ts], stolen; Sadd 518,23 (-it~ dhana~);
173 colaka
- caus. pr. 3 sg. corapeti, Sadd 518,21 foil. (-apeti
-apayati -apetu~ -apayitu~ -apetva -apayitva).
corovassikaip in Ee, Se at Nidd II 85,3o is wr for tero-
vassika~ (Be, Ce so).
coJa, cola, m.n. [cf S. cola; BHS coga]; cloth; a piece of
cloth; a garment; Abh 290 (dussa~ -o ca sa~ako);
Vin II 150,29 (addasasu~ kho bhikkhü samajjaghane
bahu~ Ul)l)a~ pi -a~ pi vaka~ pi til)a~ pi PaJ.ll)a~ pi
chaggitani, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be colak~); SI 34,17*
(dalidde jayare kule -a~ pil)go rat! khigga yattha
kicchena labbhati); Th 170 (sabbe -a samucchinna
natthi dani punabbhavo; cfTh-a 11 46,5foll.: sabbe -a
samucchinna ti cora viya kusalabhaJ_lgacchedanato,
sadhühi alatabbato asaiJ.gahetabbato saiJ.karakü~adlsu
chaggitapilotikakhal)g~ viya issarajanena ariyajanena
jigucchitabbataya -a viya ti va -a ti laddhanama kilesa
samucchinna; see K.R. Norman, 2007, p. 178); Thl 1
(sukh~ supahi therike katva -ena parata); Ja VI 297,15*
(-a~ ca nes~ pil)g~ ca aslnan~ va dapaye);
Sp 646,16 (mahante -e); 1293,15 (co!apagadlsu
co!akasava~ -an ti veditabba~); Sadd 353,6* (pa~o -o
sa~ako ca vaso vasanam a~suk~ ... ); - ifc see
nahana-, val_lacchadana-, saiJ.kara-; - 0 -pafta, m., a
strip of cloth; Vin 11 266,12 (bhikkhuniyo . . . -ena
phasuke namenti colavel)iya ... colavagiya ... );Mil 74,2
(so VaJ.lO . . . sukhumena ca -ena palive~hlyat! ti); -
0
-bhisi,f, a cushion stuffed with cloth; Vin 11 150,31
(anujanami bhikkhave pañca bhisiyo Ul)l)abhisi~ -i~
vakabhisi~ til)abhisi~ pal)l)abhisin ti); - 0
-vatti,f, a
roll of cloth; Vin 11 266,12;- -Vel}.i,f, a twist or plait
0
of cloth; Vin 11 266,12; - acoJa, mfn., without clothes;
Spk I 82,26 (yasma surüpo pi ducco!o va -o va virüpo
hoti); - duccola, duccoJa, mfn., wearing poor clothes;
wearing a robe made from poor cloth; V in I l 09,25 (tani
clvarani nassanti pi gayhanti pi undurehi pi khajjanti,
bhikkhü -a honti lükhaclvara ti); IV 245,2o
(bhikkhuniyo ... -a lükhac!vara; Sp 916,21: -a ti virüpa-
co!a jil)l)aco!a ti attho ); Spk I 82,26; - niccola,
niccoJa, mfn., without clothes; Pv-a 43,13 (ah~ sami -a
ativiya jighacchapipasabhibhüta vicarami, dehi me
vatth~ annapan~ ca ti); Nidd-a I 430,3 (acelako ti -o
naggo);- see also dhuvacola (sv dhuva).
coJaka\ colaka\ n. [cf S. colaka, BHS cogaka], a pie ce of
cloth, a rag; Vin I 48,9 (sace gerukaparikammakata
bhitti kaJ.ll)akita hoti, -~ temetva p1!etva pamajjitabba);
11 118,15 (anujanami bhikkhave parissavanan ti, -a~ na
ppahoti); 150,13 (-~ uppann~ hoti, anujanami
bhikkhave cilimika~ katun ti); 208,17 (upahana
puñchantena pa~hama~ sukkhena -ena puñchitabba
paccha aliena); Pv 13:7 (bhikkhün~ alop~ datva
piil)imatta~ ca -a~; Pv-a 70,2ojoll.: ekahattha-
ppamal)a~ co!akhal)gan ti attho); Mil53,33 (yato ...
aral)i siya araJ.lipotako siya aral_liyottaka~ siya uttararal)i
si ya -a~ siya purisassa ca tajjo vayamo si ya jayeyya so
aggl ti); PsI 266,32 (-ani pi kesañci sal_lhani kesañci
thülani papul)anti); Spk 11 297 ,s (so p~sukülatthaya
Savatthi~ pavisitva -~ pariyesanto vicari); - ifc see
ani-.
coJ~ka 2 , mfi-ika)n., colaka 2, co!ika, mfn., [cfS. cola,
colaka], belonging to the Cola country; Sp 1212,6
 eh a
(hatthisoq.9ik~ nama nabhimülato hatthisoq.9a-
saq.rhan~ oiambakaq¡ katva nivatthaq¡ cojika-itthinaq¡
nivasan~ viya, Be so; Ee colaka-itthinaq¡; Se co~aka-
eh
cha 1, m. [ts], the letter or sound 'eh'; the consonant 'eh';
Sadd 604,19 (ca cha ja jha ña); 828,1 (gamiss' anta
sabbesu cho va: gamu ice etassa dhatussa anta makaro
cho hoti va sabbesu vibhattipaccayesu: gacchati gameti).
cha 2, and (befare following initial vowel sometimes) cha~,
num. [AMg id.; S. ~a~J, (nom.!acc. cha; instr.!abl. chahi,
chabbhi; gen./dat. channaq¡; loe. chasu, chassu; cha is
often written as cpd with noun in nom. or acc., with
doubling of the intial consonant of noun; iic befare
vowels: chal; cha(!) + v- > chabb-); six; Vin I 14,36 (tena
kho pana samayena cha ioke arahanto honti); 281.15
(anujanami bhikkhave cha civarani khomaq¡
kappasikaqt ... ); DI 54,4 (cha~ abhijatiyo arrha
purisabhümiyo); II 302,15 (chasu ajjhattikabahiresu
ayatanesu); III 181,9 (cha disa namassitabba ti); MI 8,16
(chann~ dirrhin~ aññatara dirrhi uppajjati); S III
203,23 (imesu chasu rhilnesu kai!kha pahina hoti);
IV 70,25* (cha~ eva phassayatanani); 71,21* (evaq¡ mano
chassu yada subhavito); A III 282,9 (chahi bhikkhave
dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu ahuneyyo hoti); 441,2
(channaq¡ bhikkhave patubhavo dullabho lokasmiq¡);
Snp. 87,6 (pañcannaq¡ pi dadami chann~ pi dadami);
Pv 38:35 (oraq¡ me chahi masehi kalakiriya bhavissati);
la I 67 ,n (mahasattassa cha vassani dukkarakarikaq¡
karontassa, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee chabbassani); 95,13 (cha
nisajjadose v<Ujetva); 366,27* (atthassa dvara pamukha
cha~ ete); IV 310,17* (so bajjhatu pasasatebhi chabbhi,
Be, Se so; Ee chambhi; Ce chambhi; 311 ,3o·: catUsu
padesu givaya karibhage ca ti chasu rhanesu) quoted
Cp-a 206,7* (eds chamhi); la V 43,12 (itarehi chahi
pabbatehi uccataro); Ap 3l,lo (cha~ abhiñña sacchikata,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cha9abhiñña); 422,21 (chahi gathahi
sabbaññuq¡ kittayitva); Dhs 1347 (imesaq¡ channaq¡
indriyan~); Vibh 334,21 (katama chasu abhiññasu
pañña); Kv 360,2 (cha gatiyo ti); Per 194,16 (eh~
indriy~) Mil298,5 (cha-y-ime maharaja supinaq¡
passanti); Mhv 33:29 (cha~ eva vassani); Sadd 297,5;
647,8foll.; - (ch~)-arpsa, mfn. [cha + aq¡sa3], six-
sided; Dhs 617 (catur~saq¡ -~ atthaq¡saq¡
so~asmpsaq¡); Ps IV 212,13 (aghaq¡saq¡ pi -aq¡ pi
karonti); - (chaj)-aliga, n. and mfn. [cha + ailga2],
l. (n.) (i) a group of six parts or factors; that which has
six parts or factors; - -' -upekkha ,f, the sixfold
dísínterestedness (in regard to the objects of the six
sen ses); Nidd I 241,21 foll. (upekkhako ti -' -upekkhaya
samannagato ... ); Sv 1037,33 (chasu dvaresu pi
upekkhako viharati ti imina - '-upekkha kathita);
As 172,17; - --samann agata, mfn., a. with six parts or
174 eh a
itthinaq¡; Ce colakitthinivasanaq¡) = Kkh 2 252,23 (Be, E e
so; Ce colikitthinaq¡); Mhv 36:112 (bhikkhu cojiko).
six characteristics; A III 336,13 (--samann agata
dakkhiq.a); - f3. possessed of the sixfold disinterested-
ness; D III 269,19 (bhikkhu --samann agato; Sv 1051,9:
-'-upekkh aya samannagato hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
cha~upekkhaya); - (ii) the six works auxiliary to the
Vedas, the six Vediirigas; - (iii) the science of
auspicious marks (on the six principal parts of the
body? cf S. ~a9aiJga); Ap 318,12 (-e paramili.gato); 343,1
(tattha mante adhiyami -aq¡ nama lakkhaq.aq¡) f- 369,14;
Mil 178,18 (irubbedaq¡ yajubbedaqt .. . nighaq.9u
kerubhaJD ... veyyakaraq.aq¡ . . . supin~ nimitt~ -~
candaggah~ ... ); - --va, --va(t), mfn., knowing the
science of auspicious marks; (or knowíng the six
Vediirigas? in la these are the brahmans who prophesy
Gotama 's future); la I 56,6* (brahmaq.a --va mantaq¡
viyakariq¡su) = Ps II 186,34*; Mi1236,7 (jativantaqt
padak~ veyyakaraq.~ --vantaq¡ ... brahmaq.~); -
2. (mfn.) with the six Vediirigas; Vv 63:16 (ye mant~
parivattenti -aq¡ brahmacintitaq¡; V v-a 265,14: mantan ti
ved~, kappavyakaraq.aniruttisikkhachandovicitijoti-
sattha-saiJkhatehi chahi ailgehi -~) = Pv 18:13; -
(chaD-a«J«Jha, m. or n. [cha + a99ha 1]. three; Mhv 5:121
(pasadesu .. . ti su --utusadhusu); (chai)-
abhiñña, mfn. (from cha + abhiñña2], possessing the ;íx
special knowledges or powers; Vin III 87,29 (asuko
bhikkhu -o ti); SI 191,23 (saghi bhikkhü tevijja saWü
bhikkhü -a); Ap 2i,n; Mi1309,28 (khii).asavassa pi
-assa); Spk 11 233,27 (theraq¡ --taq¡ papesi); Mhv 13:4
(-aq¡ mahiddh ikaq¡);- (ch~)-abhiñña,f andfpl. [cha
+ abhiñña2], the six special knowledges or powers;
Ap 502,19 (-asu yojeti kañci sattaq¡ naruttamo);
Mil 369,18 (-asu vasibhavaq¡ papuQ.ati); Ap-a 234,33
(tevijjaya ca -aya ca iddhiya ca paramiq¡ pariyosan~
gata); Thüp 153,33; - (chaD-asiti, chajasiti ,f, num. and
mfn., l. (j) 86; Pv 35:6 (chajasiti sahassani); Ap 159,15
(kappanaq¡ -iya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ch~asitiya,
unmetrical); 396,12 (in uddana: -i ca gathayo, Be so; Ce,
Se cha~asiti; Ee chalasit iq¡);- 2. (mfn.) the eíghty-sixth;
Ap 202,5 (ch~asitirnh' ito kappe); - oasita, mfn.,
characterised by 86, plus 86; Tikap-a 237,22 (-ani cha
satani); - 0 asititama , mfn., the eighty-sixth; Mhv (11)
p. 482,1 (-o paricche do);- 0 aha, m.n. [cha + aha(n)], a
period of six days; six days; Sp 713,19; Ps III 75,28;-
--paricchanna, mfn., concealed for six days; Vin II 51,20
(eka apatti --paricc hanna);- chahaq¡ bhuttanaq¡ in Ce,
Ee at la III 471,12 is perhaps wr; Be, Se evaq¡ chadivase
nimantetva sattame divase ... ); - (ch~)-uttari, ind.,
with an addition of six, plus six; Ap 585,7 (thin~
eha
satasahassana111 navutlnaJ11 -i, Ce, Se so; Be chaduttari;
Ee -iJ11); - 0 -(k)kai}.J].a, mfn., heard by six ears, by
three people; Abh 352; Ja VI 392,17 (catukal).I).O me
manto ti maññasi, idan' eva-o jato);- 0 -kufika, mfn.,
consisting of six houses; Spk III 17,22 (te cha cora -aJ11
suññagama111 pavisitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chakutiyaJ11,
prob. wr);- 0 -kkhattuJ11, ind., six times; Vin III 223,4
( -u111 codetva); D II 198,24; Dhp-a I 306,22 (so -u111
pabbajitva uppabbajito); Ja VI 487,4 (ekamasassa -uJ11);
0
-cattiirisa, 0
-Cattiqisa(J11),f num. and mfn.,
l. (j.) 46; Vin I 178,17 (-a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -cattaFsa);
V 146,32* (-a, Ee so; Be, Ce -a; Se 0 -cattatfsa); S III
249,18 (0 -cattiqisa111 suttanta, Be, Se so; Ee 0 -cattalisa;
Ce omits);- 2. (mfn.) the forty-sixth; Ap 407,9 (jagati-
dayakavaggo -o, Ee so; Se 0 -cattatfso; Be, Ce
0
-cattalisamo); - 0 -Cattiilisatima, mfn., the forty-sixth;
Mhv (Il) p. 78,1;- 0 -cattii!isama, mfn., the forty-sixth;
Ap-a 487,12 (-e vagge);- 0 -catudassi in Ee at Sp 868,1
is wrongly printed; Ce cha catuddassi-uposatha; Be cha
catuddasika-uposatha; Se cha catuddasika uposatha; -
0
-Hhanika, mfn., belonging to or connected with six
states or stages; It-a II 29,15;- 0 -tiila, mfn. or -aJ11, ind.
[cha + tala 1], measuring the height of six palm-trees; to
the heíght of six palm-trees; M I 187,24 (-a111 pi udakaJ11
Sal).thati) f. A IV 101,25; - 0 -ttiipsa, 0 -ttiJ11Sa,f num.
and mfn., 1. (j.) 36; Abh 194 (-a); Vin I 333,33 (imamhi
khandhake vatthi.ini -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ani ti); S II
114,31 (imehi -aya vatthi.ihi); A IV 37,1; Sn 660 (-a ca
pañca ca abbudani, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce 0 -ttiJ11sati pañca) =
A II 3,33* (Ee so; Be 0 -ttiJ11Sati; Ce 0 -ttiJ11satiJ11; Se
0
-ttiJ11Sati); Jall 312,21 (-a Sakka caViJ11SU); Kv 513,7;
Vism 46,27* (-a); Mp III 21,1 (-aya indanaJ11); Mhv 2:7
(-a); - --kkhattuJ11, 36 times; A IV 89,10; Ap 266,14; -
2. (mfn.) the thírty-sixth; Ap 142,18 (-amhi ito kappe);
285,28 (saddasaññakavaggo -o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
0 0
-ttiJ11Satimo); - -tíiJ11Saka, (mj)n., (the group)
consisting of 36; Vin II 62,32;- 0 -ttiipsati, 0 -ttiJ11sati,f
num. and mfn., l. (j.) 36; SI 152,33* (-i pañca ca
abbudani) = A V 171 ,24*; Dhp 339 (-i sota); Dhp-a IV
48,16 (-iya sotehi samannagata); - 2. (mfn.) the thirty-
sixth; Ap !!6,15 (-imhi asi111su kappamhi manujadhipa);
0
- -UiJ11Satima, mfn., the thirty-sixth; Sp 72,3 (-e
vasse); Mhv p. 304,1 (-o paricchedo);- 0 -ddanta, m.,
see sv;- 0 -(d)disa, adv., towards the six directions;-
--paticchadi(n), mfn., covering, protecting, in the six
directions; D III 181,21 (Sv 943,23: --paticchadi ti cha
disa paticchadento ); 188,23 (kathaJ11 ca ... ariyasavako
--paticchadi hoti; Sv 952,18: yatha chahi disahi
agamanabhayaJ11 na agacchati khemaJ11 hoti nibbhayaJ11
evaJ11 viharanto --paticchadi ti vuccati);
0
-dvarika, mfn., l. connected with the six means of
access (which are the senses); Mp III 38,25; Dhp-a IV
221,16 (-a111 tal).haJ11 jahitva); - 2.fumished with six
gates; Spk III 60,27 (--nagaraJ11); - 0 -(d)dha, ind., in
six ways; Mi1419,23 (ayaJ11 mahapathavi -a
pakampittha); Ud-a 177,2; Pj II 14,18 (rattindivaJ11 -a
0
vibhajitva); - -dhatuka, mfn., consisting of six
elements; Ps V 51,11 (yaJ11 tva111 puriso ti sañjanasi so
-o); - 0 -dhatura, mfn., consisting of six elements;
M III 239,!o (-o aya111 ... puriso; Ps V S0,22: -o ti cha
175 eha
dhatuyo VlJJamana puriso avijjamano) quoted
Vism 485,22 and Vibh-a 261,27 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-dhatuko); - 0 -nnavuta, mfn., characterised by 96,
plus 96; Tikap-a 237,29 (-aJ11 salaJ11, E e so, perhaps wr;
Be, Ce, Se 0 -navutisataJ11); - 0 -(n)navuti, -i,f num.,
96; Abh 441 H ete); Spk I 74,6 ( -iya pagana-
kotisatasahassesu); Mhv 29:43 (-i sahassani); -
0
-nnavutima, mfn., the ninety-sixth; Mhv (Il) p. 534,1
(-o paricchedo);- 0 -ppakararp., 0 -ppakara, adv. [cha +
pakara3], in six ways; Ap 411,19 (-am akampittha kevala
vasudha ayaJ11, Se so; Be, Ce sabbakiiraJ11; Ee
chabbikaraJ11); B v 1:71 (dasasahassi lokadhatu -aJ11
pakampatha); Bv-a 114,26 (calati ti -a kampi, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee cakkakaraJ11); - 0 -ppañca, num., five or six;
AIII 259,2; Cp 1:7:3 (api -a rattiyo); Sp 1265,8;-
--vassika, mfn., lasting for five or six years; Vin II
172,26 (--vassikaJ11 navakammaJ11 datuJ11);
o -(p )paññasa, o -(p )paññasaJ11, o -(p )pal).I).asa,f num. and
mfn., l. (j.) 56; Vin V 145,25* (-a); Ap 132,20 (in
uddana: gathayo -a pakittita, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -a) f.
175,16 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a); 511,2 (-a111 pañcasata
apadana pakasita, Se so; Be, Ee sapaññasa111; Ce
sapaññasa); As 168,29 (0 -pal).I).asa dhamma); Dip 3:15
(-a111 ca khattiya); Mhv 2:7;- 2. (mfn.) the fifty-sixth;
Ap 127,1 (-amhi kappamhi); 184,8 (-e ito kappe); -
0
-ppaññasatima, mfn., the fi.fty-sixth; Mhv (Il) p. !6!,1
(-o paricchedo); - 0 -(p)paññasama, mfn., the fifty-
sixth; Ap-a 544,1 (-e vagge ); - o -pai}.J}.arasani in E e at
Spk III 7,31 is wr; read chapal).I).asadhikani dve satani
with Be, Ce, Se; - 0 -ppada, mfn. and m., six-footed;
l. (m.) a bee; Abh 635 (-o ca madhubbato);- 2. (mfn.)
consisting of six padas, six verse sections; Spk I 331,18
(ima111 -a111 gatham aha); Th-a I 8,7 (anughubhadivasena
isihi pavattitaJ11 catuppada111 -a111 va vacanmp); -
chappade in Ee at Ap 326,6 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
sañchanne; Se vappadese;- 0 -porisa, mfn., measuring
the height of six men; MI 187,28 (-a111 pi udakaJ11
sal).thati) f. A IV 102,2; - 0
-phassayatanika, mfn.,
connected with the six spheres of perception; MI 337,7
(mahanirayassa tayo namadheyya honti -o iti pi
sailkusamahato iti pi paccattavedaniyo iti pi); S IV
!26,4foll. (dittha maya bhikkhave -a nama niraya ... -a
nama sagga) quoted Kv 2!0,!9foll.;- 0 -bbaggiya, mfn.
and m.f [from cha + vagga 1], (one) who belongs to the
group of six (bhikkhus or bhikkhunis who are
represented as continually violating vinaya rules or
expected behaviour); Vin III 45,22 (-a bhikkhi.i);
IV 107,9 (aññataro pi -o bhikkhu); 314,23 (-a
bhikkhi.i ... -a bhikkhuniyo ovadanti); Ja I 360,24 (-a
panahaJ11su); Sp 373,17 (-' -adinaJ11. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
chabbagikadinaJ11); Ps III 187,1 (ime cha jana -a nama);
Mp II 366,19 (-ana111 anacare); Dhp-a III 330,3; -
0
-bbassa\ n. [cha + vassa], a period of six years, six
years; Mhv 2:27; - 0 -bbassa 2 , mf(n). [cha + vassa],
l. of six years' standing; one who has been ordainedfor
six years; Sp 1085,5 (avassikassa -o acariyamatto); -
2. of six years; six years old; Ja VI 6,17 (--daraka nama,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se chavassika-); - 0 -bbassika, mfn.
[from cha + vassa], lasting for six years; Ps III 241,1
(--mahapadhanena); - se e also chavassika below; -
chaka
0
-bbikaraip, [eh a+ vikara], in six ways; Ap 411,19 (-aq¡
pakampittha kevala vasudha ayaq¡, Ee so; Be, Ce
sabbakaraq¡; Se chappakaram); 426,29 (-aq¡ pakampenti,
Ee, Se so; Be, Ce chappakaraq¡);- 0 -bbidha, mfn. [cha
+ vidha], sixfold; of six kinds; Vism 199,11 (kamabhave
sa)ayatanaq¡ kamabhave -assa phassassa paccayo hoti);
529,2 (--ta); Sp 1370,16 (-e civare); Pj I 237,2 (-e ca
agocare carati); - -ena, adv., in six ways, in six parts;
in a sixfold way; la Ili 291 ,Y ( -ena papaq¡ cha agarava);
Nidd I 80,6 (-ena mano ... ); Mi112,25 (-ena vibhattaq¡
pugga1apaññattiq¡); Dhp-a III 458,5 (yesaq¡pana -ena
cittaq¡ subhavitaq¡);- 0 -bbisa,f num. and mfn. [cha +
visa(q¡)], l.(/.) 26; Vin III 204,32 (dvihuppanne
mülacivare ... -e uppanne,for 26 days ?); V 156,13 (-a
mülani); As 325,9; Mhv 16:2 (-a divase); - 2. (mfn.)
the twenty-sixth; Ap 209,17 (-amhi ito kappe); -
0
-bbisati, 0 -bbisati,f num. and mfn. [cha + visati],
l.(/.) 26; S III 221,6 (in uddana: ime -i sutta); Pa~is II
77,1 (ime -i dhamma); Dhp p. 119,23* (ete -i vagga);
Ps II 333,Js (-i devaloka nama); Sv 1033,31 (-iya
pañcakanaq¡ vasena); Spk II 346,11 (tehi yeva -iya
suttehi vutto); - 2. (mfn.) the twenty-sixth; Ap 117,25
(-imhi kappamhi); Nidd-a II 152,3* (rañño Sirinivasassa
Sirisailghassa Bodhino -imhi vassamhi ninhita
NiddesaVaJ.lJ.lana); - 0 -bbisatima, mfn., the twenty-
sixth; Dhp p. 119,4 (brahma1,1avaggo -o); Ap 230,s
(thomakavaggo -o); Mhv p. 209,1 (-o paricchedo); -
0
-(m)masa, m.n., -a, m.pl., -ani, n.pl. [cha + masa2], a
period of six months; six months; S IIl 155,6 (-ani udake
pariyadaya); Bv 14:18 (-aq¡ padhanacaraq¡ acari
purisuttamo); Dhp-a IV 59,17 (saq¡vacchare va -e va
sampatte Rajagahaq¡ gantva); Ap-a 482,26/oll. (dvisu
se~~iku1esu ekekasmiq¡ -aq¡ -aq¡ va<;l<;lhati);
Vibh-a 250,2 (evaq¡ -e sajjhayo katabbo); Mhv 34:26
(rajjaq¡ karesi -aq¡); - see also anuchamasaq¡; -
0
-(m)masaka, mfn., worth six masakas; Sp 366,!9 (-aq¡
garubhan<;laq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -masikaq¡); 1392,13
0
(-aq¡ bha1,1<;laq¡ avahariq¡su); Utt-vn 728;
0
-(m)masika, mfn., lasting for six months; being at the
age of six months; Vin I 240,!4 (dasakammakara-
porisassa -aq¡ vetanaq¡ deti); Nidd I 120,13 (-o pi ...
cavati); Sv 727,11 (temasikaq¡ -aq¡ navamasikaq¡ va
pa~ipadaq¡ gaJ.lhati); Bv-a 297,1 (-a [padhanacariya]);-
0
-mülaka, mfn., with six bases; Vin III 97,6; -
0
-yojanasatika, mfn., measuring 600 yojanas; MI
187,21 (-ani pi udakani); - 0
-yojanika, mfn., six
yojanas in extent; V in I 106,26 (sima ... -a); la V 38,19
(catasso sakha -a); - 0 -vassika, mfn., six years old;
lasting for six years; la VI 6,17 (--daraka, Be, Se so; Ce,
E e chabbassa-); Nidd I 120,16; Sp 1246,6; - see also
chabbassika above; - 0 -satthi,f, num., 66; Ap 203,5
(in uddana); Kv 138,24 (-' indriyani ti); 513,!9 (-i); Pj II
59,17 (-iya dhatihi); Ap-a 210,11 (-i dhatiyo); -
0
-satthitama, mfn., the sixty-sixth; Mhv (II) p. 224,1 (-o
paricchedo); - 0 -sattati,f, num., 76; Vin V 87,4* (-i
ime sikkha); Vism 488,!2 (-i dhamma); Mp III 146,2;-
0
-Sattatima, mfn., the seventy-sixth; Mhv (II) p. 380,1
(-o paricchedo); - 0 -sahassa, mfn., numbering six
thousand; D II 256,16* (-a hemavata yakkha); la IV
353,27' (-a ca vammino); - see also charatta, dviccha
176 chakka
(sv dvi(r)), sa)ayatana, saha.
chaka, n. [BHS id.; S. salq't], exerement; Abh 274 ( -aq¡);
la V 268,11* (tattaq¡ -aq¡ ka~him' ayogu1aq¡ ca, so read
with O. von Hinüber, 1979, p. 21? Be tattaq¡
pakkuthitam ayogulaq¡ ca; Ce pakka~~itaq¡; Ee
pakanhitaq¡; Se pakkughitaq¡; 273,3r: pakkuthitaq¡
güthakalalaq¡ e' eva jalita-ayogulaq¡ ca, Be so; Ce, Ee
pakkat¡hitagüthakalalaq¡; Se pakkut¡hitagüthakalalaq¡);
- chaka in Be, Ee at la VI 281, fn 7, is prob. me for
chakka qv.
chakaQa, chakana, n. [S., AMg chaga1,1a; cf S. sakna,
saknas, instr., gen., of sakf!:], dung; Abh 275; Vin I
202,25 (anujanami bhikkhave yassa kaJ.l<;iu va pi)aka
va ... agilanassa -aq¡ mattikaq¡ rajananipakkaq¡, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se chakanaq¡); 285,36 (bhikkhu -ena pi
paJ.l<;iumattikaya pi civaraq¡ rajanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
chakanena); - 0 -piQI}.a, m., a lump of dung; la VI
392,14; - 0
-harika, (m)f(n)., one who earries dung;
la III 386,13' (kumbhakarassa dinna -a).
chakaQaka,f [chakaJ.la + ka2], dung; MI 87,2 (te ... -aya
pi osiñcanti, Be so; Se chaka1,1a~iya; Ce, Ee pakkaghiya;
Ps II 58,7: kuthitagomayena; see O. von Hinüber, 1979,
p. 21) = Nidd II 122,34 (Be so; Ee, Se chakaJ.laliya; Ce
pakkaghiya).
chakaQatif [chaka1,1a + ti 3 ?], dung; MI 87,2 (te ... -iya
pi osiñcanti, Se so; Be chaka1,1akaya; Ce, Ee pakka~~iya)
= Nidd II 122,34 (Ee, Se so; Be chakaJ.lakaya; Ce
pakkaghiya).
chakala, chagala, m. [S. chagala], a he-goat; Abh 1111
(-e pasu, Ce so; Be chagale); la VI 237,12' (-o
uddhatapphalo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be chagalo); Sadd 921,15
(mattabhedo tava ... -o chaka1ako).
chakalaka, chagalaka, m. [S. lex. chaga1aka], a he-goat;
Abh 502 (-o, Ce so; Be chagalako); Vin III 166,34
(addasaq¡su -aq¡ ajikaya vippa~ipajjantaq¡, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce chagalakaq¡); la VI 237,34. (-o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
chaga1ako); Sadd 921,15.
chakali, f [S. chagali], a she-goat; la VI 559,10* (-i va
migi chapaq¡ ... ohaya, Be, Ce, E e so; Se chagili);
559,20* (-iq¡ va migiq¡ chapa ... pavi1okenti, Be, Ce so;
Ee wr -i va migi chapa; Se chagili).
chakka, n. (pl.nom. -a, -ani) [AMg id.; S. ~a~ka], a set of
six; a seetion of sets of six; Vin V 134,23 (-aq¡
ninhitaq¡); M III l,2o (evaq¡ gaJ.lapema ekaq¡ ekakaq¡
dve duka... cha -a satta sattaka ... ); 280,33 (idaq¡
pa~hamaq¡ -aq¡); 1a VI 281, fn 7 (jütagita verses:
aghakaq¡ malikaq¡ vuttaq¡ savat¡añ ca chakaq¡ mataq¡,
Be so, prob. me; Ee a~hakaq¡; Se a~~a mali samakhyata
savati -am eva ca; not in Ce; see H. Lüders, 1907,
p. 35); Dhs p. 177,36 (evaq¡ chabbidhena rüpasailgaho,
-aq¡); Vibh 87,6; Mi146,J (imani cha -ani); Sp 1340,16
(pa~hamani cha ekaq¡ -aq¡); Pa~is-a 472,21 (tihi -ehi
a~~arasa upakkilese niddisitva); Sadd 801,7 (satassa
-aq¡ chasataq¡); - ife see a<;l<;lha- (sv a<;l<;lha\ -
0
-nipata, m., a seetion eonsisting of sets of six; A III
452,29 (-o samatto, Ce, Ee so; Se nit¡hito; Be --pa)i
nínhita); Thp. 48,14 (-o ni~~ito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
chanipato) = Thip. 140,10 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chanipato);
Mp II 184,4; Th-a I 3,15 (-e cuddasa thera caturasiti
gatha).
chagala
chagala, m., see sv chaka1a.
chagalaka, m., see sv chaka1aka.
chacdi in Ee at Vin I 266,33* (in uddana: chacca vippakata
gati) is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se chakke.
chajja, m. [S. ~a9ja], l. the first (or fourth) of the seven
saras or primary notes of music; Abh 132 (usabho
dhevato e' eva chajjagandharamajjhima ... ); Vv-a 139,15
C' -adisattavidhasaradlpanato ca sattatanti111, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr chejjadi-); Mp-~ (Be) III 120,24 (satta sara ti -o
usabho gandharo majjhimo pañcamo dhevato nisado ti
ete satta sarii); - 2. a musical mode or improvisation; ?
V v-a 139,21 (saragatadivibhagato a• -adicatubbidh~
gandhabb~ ahapetva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr chejjadi-);
-
0 2
-gama, m. [chajja + gama ], the chajja gamut or
scale; Mp-~ (Be) III 120,25 (chajjagamo majjhimagamo
sadharaJ_lagamo ti tayo gama, samüha ti attho); -
0
-sarpvadi(n), mfn., making a sound consonant with the
chajja note; Th-a II 77,22 (mora... -1 kekasadda111
muñcanta).
chattana, n. [= cha99ana qv], throwing away; Sadd 532,9
(chana -ane: cha~~eti).
chatteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [= cha99eti qv], throws away;
Sadd 532,9 foil. (chana chanane, -e ti -ayati, atray~
paF sace so -eti ice eta111 kusa1a111 ... ; quoting Vin III
238,nfoll.: eds cha99eti); SI 169,3 (appaharite va -ehi,
Be, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce, Se cha99ehi).
chattha, mfi -a, -1)n. and chanh1, f [S. ~a~~ha], l. (mfn.)
(i) sixth, the sixth; Vin 11 203,32 (ekato ... dve honti
ekato tayo -o anussaveti); IV 159,37 (aya111 bhikkhave
-o ad1navo rajantepurappavesane); D 11 112,13
(akiñcaññayatana111 upasampajja viharati aya111 -o
vimokkho); III 253,23 (ay~ -1 viññaQ.at~hiti); SI 121,2
(-a111 .. . cetovimutti111 phusi); A IV 102,14 (-o suriyo
patubhavati); Sn 437 (-a [sena] bh!rü pavuccati); Ja IV
376,2o ( ... catuttho pañcamo -o); VI572,32* (-~ eta111
var~ vare); Ap 568,19 (-a tassas' aha111 dh!ta);
Vibh 386,29 (id~ -~ kusltavatthu); Mi1105,1 (-a111
citta111); Vism 677,24 (anagaml nama -o ariyapugga1o
hoti); Dhp-a III 236,21 (Kassapadasaba1o -e -e mase
1
uposatha111 akasi); - ifc see a99ha- (sv a99ha ); -
(ii) [cf BHS ~a~~h!], numbering six; ? Ja VI 238,32* (thl-
bhava pi na mucciss~ -a nigatiyo ima, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se -a va gatiyo ima; [vl in Ee only: chaja; note similarity
of ! and nh in Burmese script;] 240,6foll.: deva1oke
pana pañca aya111 ca eka ti ima cha gatiyo itthibhava na
muccissan ti vadati); - 2. chaqhl, f [scil. ratti], the
sixth (day or) night ofthe lunar half-month; Mp 11 233.9
(uposathika honti... -iy~); - 3. chanhl, (m)f(n).
andf [scil. vibhatti], (gr.t.t.) (the termination of) the
sixth case; the genitive; Bv-a 39,5 (niddhiiraJ_la-
1akkhaJ_laya -iya samaso pa~isiddho); Sadd 60,3o (sami-
vacane -1 vibhatti bhavati); 642,8 (sa na111 iti -1);
721,15foll. (-1 samimhi); - chanhltappurisa, m., a
tappurisa cpd in which the first member, if
uncompounded, would be in the genitive case;
Sadd 756,21foll.;- achaqha, mfn., without a sixth; Pet
244,8 (ima catasso patipadayo apañcama achaqha); -
see also sanha 1.
chatthama, mf( -a, -1)n. [S. ~a~thama], the sixth; Sn 103
(-o so parabhavo ); Ja III 280,2 (-a111 gatham aha, E e so;
177 cha44eti
Be, Ce, Se chanha111; cfSadd 795,7foll. below);
Bv 2:141 (dakkhi111 -~ khantiparami111); Kv 362,7 H
sa gati); Sadd 795,7 foll. (gathavisaye padakkhara-
paripüriya mapaccayo sakatthe cha~thasaddato paro
hoti . . . chaqho eva -o . . . gathayan ti ki111, cha~tha111
gatham aha).
chatthi, f [= satthi], sixty; Sadd 799,14 (cattallsa111
paññasa111 -i sattari sattati).
chatthi,f, see sv cha~tha.
cha!J!Jaka, mj(-ika)(n). [from cha99eti], (one) who throws
away;- ifc see kacavara-, chava-, puppha-, rüpiya-.
cha!J!Jana, n. [from cha99eti; AMg cha99aJ.la], throwing
away; abandoning; spilling; being abandoned;
Cp 3:6:12 (sabbe ekamana hutva -a111 anumodisu111;
Cp-a 221,26: bhümiya111 nikhaQ.anavasena mama -~);
Vism 137,8 (te1achaManabhaya); Pv-a 199,18 (gaJ.likaya
kucchiya nibbattan~ susane -an ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
cha99itan ti); Nidd-a 11 25,4 (khipana111 -~); -
accha!J!Jana, n., not abandoning, not getting rid of,
Ps III 358,1 (dhurassa -~. Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be,
Se acchindanan ti).
2
cha!J!Janaka, m. [cha99ana + ka ], a receptacle for
throwing (something) away; Sadd 533,27 (cha99eti
cha99ayati -o);- ifc see kacavara-.
cha!J!Jani, f [from cha99eti], a receptacle for throwing
(something) away;- ifc see kacavara-.
cha!J!Janiya, cha99aniya, mfn.,fpp ofcha99eti qv.
cha~~llipana, n. [from caus. of cha99eti;
AMg cha99aval).a], causing to be vomited or abandoned;
Kkh 2 314,5 (cha99an~ va -a111 va); Cp-a 152,17
(anatthe uggiraJ_lato bahi -ato).
cha!J!Jita, mfn., pp of cha99eti qv .
2
cha~!Jitaka, mfn. [cha99ita + ka ], thrown away;
abandoned; Sp 842,17 (susanad!su -ani
khadanlyabhojanlyani); Ps II 15,18 (na mayh~
kahapaJ.la -a atthi, dullabha kahapaJ_la); Spk I 116,13
(apaviddha ti -a).
cha~!Jiya\ absol. of cha99eti qv .
cha~!Jiya , mfn.,fpp ofchaMeti qv.
2
cha~!Jüna, absol. ofcha99eti qv.
cha~!Jeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [BHS chaddeti; cf S.
chardayati], Dhatup 571 (cha99a cha99ane);
Dhatum 802; Sadd 533,27 (cha99a cha99ane: -eti
-ayati); - l. vomits; spits out; M II 255,18 (puriso
manuññabhojana111 bhuttavl -eyya); Ja I 498,15 (te
mukha111 püretva püretva udak~ bahi -enti); V 256,29'
(kame na vamissanti na -essanti); - 2. throws away;
abandons; rejects; Vin II 234,1* (in uddana: charik~
-aye); IV 197,1 (kacavara111 -ento sittha111-ayati, Be, Se
so; Ce -lyati; Ee -iyyati); 266,31 (sailkar~ va vighas~
va harite -eyya va -apeyya va pacittiyan ti); D 11 124,14
(ida111 ... imassa ca bhikkhuno duggahltan ti iti h' eta111
bhikkhave -eyyatha); 350,13foll. (tva111 ca siil).abhar~
-ehi ah~ ca siil).abhar~ -essami); III 8,3 (ka1akatal11
ca na111 ... susane -essantl ti); M II 138,17 (pattodaka111
-eti natidüre naccasanne); Kv 346,25 (na paribhuñjati
-eti); Mi12,29 (ehi samaQ.era im~ kacavara111 -eh! ti);
Mhv 22:76 (sambuddhasasan~ tumhe yadi -etha); -
3. spills; lets slip; Ja I 393,28 (te1apatto ... haretabbo
puriso ca t~ ukkhittasiko ... anubandhissati, yatth' eva
cha,.hJhayitvana
nai)1 thokai)1 pi -essasi tatth' eva te sirai)1 patessatl ti);
V 105,18' (yai)1 pasu kh!rai)1 -eti); Vism 137,7 (vegena
[na]ii)1] purento te1ai)1 -eti); Sp 1399,9 (ekaf!1
kammavacal)1 anussavento akkharai)1 va -eti padaiJ1 va
duruttal)1 karoti); - part.pr. cha~~enta, mfi: -entl)n.,
V in IV 265,11 (-en ti); V 31,22 ( -entassa); Dhp-a JI 44,18;
Cp-a 202,3 (kame ... -entai)1 patikkhipantai)1, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee wr cha~~hental)1); - neg. achaMenta, mfn.,
Vism 137,5 (yo te1ai)1 achaMento na)ii)1 pureti); - aor.
3 sg. (a) cha~~esi, Vin I 269,17 (sa das!... tai)1
darakai)1 .. . sailkarakute -esi); Sv 906,18 (uJ.!haiJ1
1ohitai)1 -esi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr chaddesi); Mhv 25:40
(dathapl]anaverai)1 tal)1 -esi); (b) cha~~ayi, It-a I 11,4
(vami uggiri khejapiJ.l~ai)1 viya anapekkho -ayi, Be, Se
so; Ce -ay!; E e wr -eyi) "t 11 ,2s; 3 pl. (a) chaMesui)1,
Vin V 31,25; D III 8,12; (b) cha~~ayii)1SU, Ja JI 406,18
(sukara pi -ayii)1su); VI 335,27' (goJ.la tiJ.lam eva
-ayii)1su); inf (a) chaMetUI)1, Vin IV 190,2
(piJ.!~apatai)1 patigaJ.lhanti -etukama viya); Dhp-a I
169,23 (nahai)1 jívantam eva puttai)1 -etui)1 sakkhissam!
ti); - neg. achaMetUI)1, Sp 322,6 (achaMetukamo );
(b) cha~~itui)1, Ja I 245,21 (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee jahitui)1);
Sadd 533,28; (e) cha~~ayitui)1, Sadd 533,28; - absol.
(a) cha~~etva, D JI 344,13; Th 427 (manaiJ1 madai)1 ca
-etva); Ap 22,27 (asltikotí -etva pabbajissati 'kiñcano);
Cp 3:9:5 (kulavake maiJ1 -etva attanai)1 parimocayui)1);
Patis JI 86,26 (assaddhiyai)1 kasatai)1 -etva); Mill5,8;
Mhv 37:6 (Mahaviharai)1 -etva); - neg. acha~~etva,
Ps II 87,24 (kammaghanai)1 nama muhuttai)1 pi
acha~~etva); Pj II 118,19 (anupubbacarl gharapatipatif!1
acha~~etva); (b) cha~~ayitva, Ja VI 464,8* (yatha petai)1
susanasmii)1 -etva caturo jana evai)1 kampilliye tyamha
-ayitva idhagata, Ce so; Be kapilayye tyamha; Se
kappiliye tyamha; Ee kampilliyaratthe); Cp 3:4:8
(amitadhanai)1 -ayitva); (e) cha~~ayitvana, Th 934;
Bv 2:8 (yannun' imai)1 putikayai)1 nanakuJ.Japapuritai)1
-ayitvana gaccheyyal)1 anapekkho anatthiko );
(d) cha~~iya , Th!98 (dhanadhaññai)1 ca cha~~iya);
1
(e) cha~~una, Thí 469 (-una nai)1 su sane, E e, Se so; Be,
Ce chuddhuna; Th!-a 259,s: naiJ1 ka]evarai)1 susane
cha~~etva); - pass. pr. 3 sg. eha<J<Jiyati, cha~~iyyati,
V in IV 197,1 (kacavarai)1 cha~~ento sitthai)1 -ati, Ce so;
Ee cha~~iyyati; Be, Se cha~~ayati); Sp 322,7 (te1al)1
-ati); Spk II 279,12 (na -issanti); Sadd 533,27
(cha~~íyati); - aor. 3 sg. chaMiyittha, Ja I 450,23
(atirekal)1 -ittha); - pp eha<J<Jita, mfn. and n. [AMg
cha~~iya], l. (mfn.) thrown away; abandoned; vomited;
Vin JI 150,29; D JI 350,2 (addasaf!1su pahutai)1 saJ.lai)1
-ai)1); M I 58,1o (bhikkhu . . . passeyya sarlrai)1
slvathikaya -al)1); Vv 30:5; Th 710 (visai)1 pitva va
-ital)1; Th-a III 15,13: pamadavasena visaf!1 pivitva
tadisena payogena -ai)1 viya maraJ.le me bhayal)1 n' atthí
ti attho); Ja IV 485,21 (andhabala pana tehi -al)1
vamitaiJ1 khaditva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee --vamitai)1);
Sp 349,23 (--tta); Dhp-a I 319,23 (ayal)1 saddhi-
viharikadíhi -o); Th-a III 157,25 (--taya paricattataya ca
vanta); Mhv 37:36 (Mahaviharo nava mase evai)1
bhikkhühi -o); - neg. acha~~ita, mfn., Spk II 256,24;
279,9;- 2. (n.) what is thrown away; throwing away or
abandoning; - --paccaya, mfn., caused by throwing
178 ehatta
away;? Vin V 211,19; Sp 1384,1s (ima --paccaya pañc'
apattiyo honti); - fpp (a) eha<J<Jetabba, mfn., Vin IV
199,17 (na sasitthakal)1 pattadhovanaiJ1 antaraghare
-ai)1); D JI 345,22 (na -ani puraJ.lani tiJ.!ani); Ud-a 297,24
(s!lavantehi --tta ca kasambujatai)1); Sadd 336,22 (vacati
vacan ti ti adlni kiriyapadarupani. .. -an1 ti);
(b) eha<J<Janiya, mfn., Mil252,23 (te lohitacandana-
sarantare putikadesam iva -a); Pj I 127,17 (--tai)1 ca
jigucchaniyatai)1 ca apajjati viññünal)1); Th-a I 79,9 (tal)1
ekai)1sena -am eva ti);- --dhamma, mfn., to be thrown
away; V in I 271,38 (imai)1 --dhammai)1 sappii)1 pi cuna
2
gahapessati); Ili 15,29; (e) chaMiya , mfn., - chaMiya-
dhamma, mfn., to be thrown away; MI 12,31 (siya ca me
ayam piJ.!~apato atirekadhammo cha~~iyadhammo, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be cha~~anlya-; PsI 94,12: atireko va
atirekadhammo, tatha cha~~iyadhammo, adhiko ca
chaMetabbo ca); - caus. pr. 3 sg. eha<J<Jlipeti, makes
throw away or abandon; causes to be thrown away or
abandoned; makes vomit or to be vomited; Vin IV
265,34 (cha~~eyya va -eyya va); Ja I 358,1o (ekai)1
maggai)1 mahiso -eti ti); VI 334,23' foll. (daraka
mai)1sapesii)1 -es sama ti senaiJ1 anubandhii)1su . . . -ehi
sami ti); Vism 182,15 (pativatal)1 gacchantassa hi
kuJ.!apagandho ghanai)1 paharitva ... aharai)1 va -eyya,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr chaMapeyya; Vism-mht [Be] I
204,9: vamanaiJ1 karapeyya); part.pr.
2 aor. 3 sg.
chaMapentl, (m)f(n)., Kkh 314,13;
cha~~apesi. Vism 63,4; Dhp-a I 174,7 (imai)1 darakai)1 ...
sailkarakute cha~~ehi ti -esi); - absol. cha~~apetva,
Ja VI 185,s; PsI 93,2;- see also chageti, chaddeti.
eha<J<Jhayitvlina in Ee at Ap 581,17, cha~~hital)1 in Ee at
Pv-a 78,24, cha~~hetabbai)1 in Ee at Sp 722,29, chaMheti
in Ee at Sp 319,31, cha~~hetva in Ee at Sp 334,25, 665,23,
678,11, 918,11,936,24 andCp-a 144,15, 199,14, cha~~henti
in Ee at Sp307,11, and cha~~hentai)1 in Ce, Ee at
Cp-a 202,3 are wrr for cha~~ayitvana etc.
eha¡;ta, m. [S. k~al,la], a festival; a holiday; Abh 178
(ussavo tu -o maho); Viniii 187,23 (yaññesu -esu
ussavesu; Sp 631,18: avahavivahamailgaladisu antar-
ussavesu); Ja II 372,9 (tal)1 -ai)1 ki]anta rajano);
III 538,10 (tada Jambudipe giraggasamajjasadisal)1
mahantai)1 -ai)1 ghosayii)1su); VI 524,13' (nakkhatta-
yogavasena va channaiJ1 utunai)1 tassa tassa pu bba-
vasena va pavattesu -esu); Sp 73,14 (raja nakkhattai)1
ghosapetva -ai)1 karotha ti amacce iiJ.lapetva); Dhp-a Ili
l00,1o (sattahal)1 surachaJ.!O bhavissati ti -e ghutthe);-
ifc see kattika-.
eha¡;taka, m. or n. [= CaJ.!aka qv ?], a kind of plant; the
chick-pea; ? Mil 352,27 (in long cpd: kusalo issattho ...
til,lapuris aka -chaJ.laka-tiJ.la-pa1a1a-mattika-puñj a-phalaka-
lakkhavedhe anusikkhapetva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
-chakal,la-).
eha¡;t<Jaka in Ee at Sp 918,1 is wr for chandaka qv.
eha¡;t<Jita- in Ee at Ps II 45,12 is wr for chaMita- (Be, Ce,
Se so).
2
ehatukka, see sv catukka .
1
ehatta , chatra, n. (nom.pl. -ani, -a) [S. chattra], a
parasol, a sunshade; an umbrella; a parasol erected on
a thupa; Abh 357; 1130; Vin I 152,35 (bhikkhu -e
vassaf!1 upagacchanti); JI 131,6 (na bhikkhave -al)1
chatta
dharetabba111); IV 200,11 (tini -ani setacchatta111
kilañjacchatta111 pal)l)acchatta!11 mal)<;lalabaddha111
salakabaddha111); Ja III 329,10' (khagga111 -a111 ca pati111
ca gacch' ev' adaya miil)ava); IV 55,2' (-~ mahanta111
vi ya vassakale); Ap 3,15 (-a titrhantu ratana, Be, Ce so;
Se chattatichatta tighanti; E e suval)l)ajalabhi sa111yutta111;
Ap-a !08,21 foll.: -a tighantu ratana ti adi111 aha, tattha
ratana sattaratanamaya -a); 170,22 (pupphacchadana111
katvana -amhi abhiropayi111); 369,31 (yo me -am
adharesi pasanno sehi pal)ihi); 405,4 (pal)<;laral11 -am
adaya addhana111 patipajj' aha111); 536,5 (Sineru111
dal)<;ia!11 katvana -a111 katva mahamahi111); Mil415,27
(-a111 vatatapameghavughiyo patihanati); Sp 545,7
(cetiyassa va upari bandhissami -a!11); 894,30 (yal11 pi
tattha jatakadal)<;lakena kat~ ekapal)l)acchatt~ hoti
ta111 pi -am eva); - a parasol as a sign of sovereignty;
esp. as part of the regalia of a king; chatta111 ussapetu111,
to raise the royal parasol ( equivalent to "crown" or "be
crowned" ); the parasol as the symbol ofthe royal power
("the crown", "the throne"); D 11 15,9 (dhammata
esa . . . sampatijato bodhisatto . . . sattapadavltiharena
gacchati setamhi -e anuhlramane); SI 226,16joll.
(Vepacitti asurindo . . . khagga111 olaggetva -ena
dhariyamanena . . . Sakko devanam indo . . . khagga111
aññesa111 datva -a111 apanametva ... assama111 pavisitva);
Sn 688 (anekasakha111 ca sahassamal)<;lala!11 -a111 marü
dharayum antalikkhe); Ja IV 125,1K (Bharatakumaro
mama bhatara111 Ramapal)<;lita!11 arañña anetva -a111
ussapessaml ti); V 264,24' (nikkhippa pañca kakudhani
kaslna111 raghava<;l<;lhano vaJavljanim Ul)hlsa111 khagga111
-a111 e' upahana111); 322,10' (kassa paggahita111 -a111
sasalaka111 manoram~ adiccara111savaral)~); VI 31,11
(-a111 va me detha yuddh~ va ti); 470,31" (ta111 rajana111
visena maretva brahmal)assa -a111 ussapetva); Cp 3:6:4
(addasa0 pal)<;lar~ -a111 yenah~ niraya111 gato);
3:6:14 (vethetva rajavethana0 -ena abhisiñcitva
karesu0 purapadakkhil)a0; Cp-a 223,1s: setacchattena
dhariyamanena); Sp 75,7 (Asoko ... pañca rajakakudha-
bhal)<;lani pahil)i -a111 camara111 ... ); Sv 612,29 (anagate
Piyadaso nama kumaro -a111 ussapetva Asoko
dhammaraja bhavissati); Spk I 295,2o (rajaputto -a0
pahaya pabbajito); Mp 11 239,13 (raja cintesi putto me
vayappatto -a111 assa ussapetva rajjasiri0 passissaml ti);
Cp-a 221,9 (tayo antaraya paññayanti jlvitassa va -assa
va mahesiya va); Mhv 33:40 (0 '-atthaya visajjesu0
lekh~ bhüpatisantika111); Sadd 870,2o foll. (-a0 ...
[garün~] mate chatra0 ... ); - ifc se e eka-, kilañja-,
cetiya-, dhura-, seta-; - 0 atichatta, 0 adhichatta, n., a
parasol upon a parasol, a double parasol; Ap 170,2o
f-a0 karetva thüpamhi abhiropayi0, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
"adhichatta0; Ap-a 439,21: chadiyati sa0variyati
atapadin ti chatta0, chattassa atichatta0 chattassa
uparikatachatta0 -a0, chattassa uparüpari chattan ti
attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 iidhichatta0); Dhp-a III
439,!3foll. (raja ... bhagavato -~ katva dve seta-
cchattani ... dharetva ... bhagavato catühi ekamekassa
bhikkhuno dvihi dv!hi setacchattehi -ani sajjetva, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee 0 adhichatta0 . . . 0 adhichattani);
'-gahaka, m., one who holds the parasol; Ps II 194,13;
-
0
-daJ.u.J.agahanaka, n., where one or which holds or
179 chatta
fastens the shaft or handle of a parasol; ? Sp 290,5
(talapal)l)acchatta0 . . . ekaval)l)ena . . . suttena anto va
bahi va sibbitu111 -a0 sa1akapañjara111 va vinandhitu0
vattati, Ce, Ee so; Be o -dal)<;laggahaka111; Se o -dal)<;la-
ggahal)aka0); - 0 -dharaJ.Ia, n., -a,f, carrying of a
parasol; Ap 308,7 (imaya jatiya natthi me -a); 370,12
(-am ajjapi vattate niccaka1ika0, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
ajjasi matthake); Mp I 201,29 (-a111); - 0 -na!i,f, the
hollow handle of a parasol; ? M II 116,3o (bahitika ...
-iya pakkhipitva pahita);- 0 -paggahita, mfn., carrying
a parasol; V in II 130,2sjoll. (chabbaggiya bhikkhü -a
ahil)<;lanti . . . -a agacchanti seyyatha pi gal)aka-
mahamatta ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chatta111 paggahetva
ahil)<;lanti); 207,6 (agantuka bhikkhü sa-upahana pi ... -a
pi arama0 pavisanti);- 0 -paJ.IJ.Ia, n.m., l. (n.) a leaf of
a parasol or a leaf used as a parasol; Ap 297,2o (-e
thapetvana); Sp 290,7 (-es u makaradantaka0 ...
chinditu0 na vagati, chattadal)<;ie ... ); - 2. the name of
a tree; SAF: devil's tree, white wood, Alstonia scholaris
0
(L.) R.Br.; Abh 555 (sattapal)l)l -o); - -paJ.Ii, mfn.,
with a parasol in one's hand; Vin IV 158,17 (addasa ...
upasak~ rathiyaya -i0 gacchant~); 199,33 (na -issa
2
dhamm~ desessaml ti sikkha karal)lya ti); Kkh 266,2o
(-imhi);- -paduka,f, a rest or standfor a parasol;
0
Sp 895,1 (añño chatta0 dhareti -aya va thita111 hoti;
Sp-t [BeJ III 108,4: -a vuccati chattadharo, yasmi111
chatt~ apatamana111 katva ¡hapenti); -
0
-piJ.I!.J.ika,J,
the hall of the closed parasol; ? Ja VI 370,17 (rañño
chatte adhivattha devata . . . -a0 vivaritva, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee chattapil)<;likavivare thatva);
0
-pil)<;likavivara, n., the opening or hollow inside of the
parasol; or a slit in the parasol; ? Ja VI 376,27 (devata
0
-pil)<;likavivarato nikkhamitva upa<;l<;lhasañra0 dassentl,
Ee, Se so; Ce chattapil)<;li-; Be -am vivaritva
nikkhamitva);- 0 -mañgala, n., the ceremony ofraising
the parasol (installing as king or chief); Ja III 407,28
(pitu accayena rajje patitthasi ... --divase pan' assa ... );
Sp 1008,2s; Dhp-a III 307,13 (raja ... tassa seghichatt~
adasi . . . so . . . gehappavesanamailgala0 ca -a111 ca
ekato va karonto);- 0 -maJ.I!.J.alika, n., or -a,f, (a part
of) the circular framework of a parasol; Sp 290,14
(vatappaharena acalanattha0 -~ rajjukehi gahetva
dal)<;ie bandhanti; Sp-t [Be] II 119,s: -an ti chattassa anto
khuddakamal)<;la1a0); - achatta, n., what is not a
parasol; Sadd 587,16 (-a0 chattam iva acarati
chatt!yati); - atichatta, adhichatta, n., a super-
umbrella; a pre-eminent umbrella; a parasol on top of a
parasol; ? Ap-a 439,2o (chattassa -a0 chattassa
uparikatachatta0 chattatichatta111, chattassa uparüpari
chattan ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adhichatta111); As 2,19
(ya111 atirekappamal)~ visesaval)l)aSal)than~ ca
chatta0 ta0 -an ti vuccati); Vibh-a414,17 (omakatara-
ppamiil)a0 chatta0 va dhaja0 va upadaya atireka-
ppamiil)a0 -~ atidhajo ti vuccati); - sachatta, mfn.,
carrying a parasol; Sp 1315,1o (cetiyali.gal)e -o sa-
upahano carati); - see also camarachattagahaka
(sv camara), dhammapal)<;larachattaka (sv dhamma 1).
2
chatta , n., fungus seen as part of a plant; ? Abh 593
(müla111 patt~ ka!lragg~ kand~ miñja phal~ tatha
taco puppha111 ca -an ti sak~ dasavidha111 mata0).
chatta
chatta 3 , m. [S. chattra], a pupil, a scholar; (or N.pr.); Ja 11
428,20* (-o ca ajaññarathaf!1 [icche], Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
putto; cf 428,10: putto chattamaQ.avo nama); III 117,23*
(idhagama brahmacar! braha -o bahussuto; cf 117,2s-: -o
ti tassa nilmaf!1).
chatta 4 , n. [?], a corpse; Abh 1130 (-~ tu chavake pi
ca).
chattaka, n., 1• [S. lex. chattraka] a parasol; Th! 23
(Th!-a 28,12: jlvitahetukena kariyaman~ -a111 pi me na
ruccatl ti attho ); Dhp-a III 448,s (thüpassa upari attano
-a111 bandhitva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chatt~); - ifc see
dhammapaQ.<)ara- (sv dhamma 1); - 2. [S. lex., BHS
chattraka], a mushroom; Sp 765,14 (al1arukkhato pana
-a111 gal).hanto, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ahi-
cchattakaf!1); - ifc see ahi-.
chatti(n), mfn. [S. chattrin], fumished with a parasol;
Vism 210,2 (daQ.<)I -1 sikhi kar! ti ev~adi 1ingik~
[nam~]) = Sp 122,23 =Pj 1 107,7; Sadd 188,19.
chattiyati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS chattrivkr], uses as a parasol;
Sadd 587,17 (achatta111 chattam iva acarati -ati).
chada, m., [ts], l. a cover, covering; a screen, a fence;
Ap 272,Is (-a111 karonto [satako] atthasi, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se chadaf!1); - ifc see uttara- (sv uttara\ ura-
(sv ura[s]), tiro-, danta- (sv danta\ dasana-; - see also
vivattacchada; - 2. a leaf, Abh 543 (pai).Q.af!1 patt~
-o); - 3. a wing; Abh 627 (piñja111 -o); - ifc se e citra-
(sv citti), sucipaQ.<)ara-; - nicchada, mfn., without a
covering, open; Nidd-a 1 171,24 (nicchato ti ... -o ti pi
patho, taQ.hachadanavirahito).
chadana, n. [ts; see also S. chadman] (nom. pl. -a, -ani),
l. a cover, a covering; a roof, Abh 218; Vin 11 154,22
(anujanami bhikkhave pañca -ani itthakachadan~
silachadan~ sudhachadana111 tiQ.acchadanaf!1 paQ.Q.a-
cchadanan ti); 195,17 (manussa pasadesu pi hammiyesu
pi -esu pi aru!ha acchanti); Ap 51,2o (navaya -~
katva); 166,Io (yavata nagar~ asi pupphan~ -a111
tada); Nidd 1 405,15* foil. (hetthato ca samutthaya acci-
kkhandho ... -asmi111 patihaññati, -amha samutthaya ...
bhümiy~ patihaññati); Sp 366,12 (geha111 gantva -a111
va bhinditva sandhif!1 va chinditva); - ifc see itthaka-,
cittapatta- (sv citta\ dabba- (sv dabba2), sucittapatta-
(sv citta2); - 2. a leaf, foliage; hair; Abh 543 (palasaf!1
-~); Th 527 (duma .. . pha1esino -a111 vippahaya;
Th-a 11 223,28: puriil).apaQ.Q.anl pajahitva
s~s!napaQ.<)upalasa ti attho);- ifc see sukaQ.hakaQ.ha-
(sv kaQ.ha); - 3. a covering, what obscures or conceals;
Nidd I 9,4 (yo rago sarago ... avaraQ.af!1 n!varaQ.af!1 -af!1
bandhan~ ... ) = Dhs 1059 (Ce so; Be, Se chadana111;
Ee wr chandilnaf!1) = Vibh 362,5 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
chadan~); Pet 119,2o; Sv 251,2 (ragadosamohamana-
ditthi-avijjaduccaritachadanehi sattahi paticchanne
kilesandhakare loke t~ -a111 vivattetva samantato
sañjata1oko hutva thito ti vivanacchado ); Ap-a 476,1
(rago -a111 doso -~ moho -~ sabbaki1esa -a ti); -
4. an externa! (false) covering, a disguise; a pretence;
Sn 89 (-a111 katvana subbatan~ pakkhandi ku1adüsako
pagabbho; Pj II 164,25foll.: patirüp~ karitva ves~
gahetva ling~ dharetva ti attho . . . dussllo hi
güthapaticchadanatthaf!1 tiQ.apaQ.Q.adicchadanaf!1 viya
attano dussHabhavapaticchadanatth~ subbatan~ -~
180 v'chand
katvana); Ja V 241 ,27* (-a111 katva vañcayantl manusse;
243,26·: pabb:tijalingena -~ katva attan~ chadetva);
-
0
-pamukha, n., a projection to the roof;? Sp 1220,s
(osarakan ti analindake vihare vamsam datva tato
daQ.<)ake osaretva kata111 -~); - acchadana, mfn.,
without a covering; without a roof; Sp 756,22 (puriil).a-
senasanaf!1 hoti -~ va vinatthacchadanaf!1 va); - see
also chadana.
chadanaka, n. [chadana + ka2], a covering; a roof, Spk II
368,12 (-e dve as!visapotaka ki!anti, E e so; Be, Ce, Se
leQ.acchadane).
chadi, n. [S. chadis], a cover; a roof, Abh 940 (patalaf!1 ...
-imhi); Ap 518,8 (satta uppalapupphani ... -i111 karonta
buddhassa matthake dharayanti te, Be so; Ce chadaf!1;
Ee, Se chadif!1);- see also chadi.
chadumattha, mfn. [cf Jain S. chadmastha, Pkt
haumattha], covered, veiled; disguised; (without proper
knowledge; ?) Ja II 107,27* (y~ supaQ.I).O supaQ.Q.ena
devo devena mantaye, kif!1 te 'ttha -assa, so read with
H. Lüders, 1954, p. 111 ?; Be, Ce catumatthassa; Se kif!1
tattha catumatthassa; Ee kif!1 tattha catumattassa;
cf 107,29' foll.: sarlrena jatiya sarena guQ.ena ti imehi
catühi maghassa suddhassa ti akkharattho, asuddhaf!1
yeva pana ta111 pas~savacanena nindanto evam aha,
catühi lamakassa kif!1 te ettha sigalassa ti aya111 ettha
adhippayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mattassa); V 142,22*
(katha111 vijañña --rüpaf!1 setthaf!1 sarikkha111 athava pi
hlnaf!1, so read? Ce, Ee, Se catumagha-; Be catupattha-;
cf142,26·: catühi iriyapathehi paticchannasabhav~);­
se e also chadda.
chadeti in Ee at Pet 203,18 is wr for chadeti (Be, Ce so).
chadda, n. [S. chadman; cf AMg chauma], a roof; what
covers or obscures; a disguise; Abh 218 (chadanaf!1
pata!~ -~); - ifc see vivatta- (sv vivagacchada); -
se e also chadumattha.
chaddanta, m. [ch~2 + danta 1 ?], one of the types of
elephant (the most superior); Abh 361; Sv 573,18*
(gocari kalambo ... -o yeva dasamo); Ps 11 6,2ofoll.
(yatha ca -o nagaraja na gocariyahatthikuladisu navasu
kulesu uppajjati 0 -kule yeva uppajjati); 25,36*; 26,II
(yaf!1 dasanna111 uposathana111 [kayabal~] ta111 ekassa
-assa ya111 dasannaf!1 -an~ t~ ekassa tathagatassa);
Pj 1 172,19 foil. (hatthiratana111 uppajjati ... uposathakula
va 0 -kula va, uposathakula agacchanto sabbajetthako
agacchati 0 -kula sabbakaninho); Dhp-a III 248,1
(hatthajan!yo 0 -kule va uposathakule va uppajjati);
Ap-a 299,22 (-ehi nagehi upatthiyamano );
Vism-mht (Be) I 359,26 (chabbaQ.Q.akiraQ.avantadantataya
hite hatth! -a ti vuccanti na chaddantavantataya).
chaddika, f [S. chardika], vomiting; Abh 327 (-a
vamathu).
chaddeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. chardayati], vomits, ejects;
Dhatup 590 (chadda vamane); Dhatum 820; Sadd 542,21
(chadda vamane: -eti -ayati);- see also cha<)<)eti.
chaddesi in Ee at Sv 906,18 is wr for cha<)<)esi (Be, Ce, Se
so).
chanesü in Ee at Sp 631,17 is prob. wr for chaQ.esü (Be,
Ce, Se so).
Vchand [cfS. Vchad, Vchand], to desire; Dhatup 587
(chanda icchay~); Dhatum 821;- see also chadete.
chanda
chanda 1, m., chanda(s) 1, n. (and -a,f ?) (sg. nom. -o;
aee. -aJ)l; instr. -ena, -asa; pl. nom. -a) (S. chanda,
chandas; BHS chanda], desire; longing for; will; (i) in a
bad sense: desire, appetite (for, loe.); affeetion;
partíality; Abh 162; 945; Vin I 21,2o* (rüpa sadda
gandha rasa phot~:habba ca manorama ettha me vigato
-o); 11 285,12 (-a dosa moha bhaya agatiq¡ gantuq¡);
IV 38,3 foil. (-aya Dabbo Mallaputto senasanaq¡
paññapeti -aya ca bhattani uddisatl ti; dat. or f. ?
Sp 771,1: -aya ti -ena pakkhapatena, attano attano
sandiqhasambhattanaJ)l paQ.Itani paññapetl ti
adhippayo); DI 25,6 (yattha me assa -o va rago va doso
va patigho va taq¡ mam' assa musa; Sv 116,22: -o
dubba1arago rago ba1avarago ); 11 277,21 (-o ... vitakka-
nidano vitakkasamudayo vitakkajatiko vitakkapabhavo);
MI 123,26 (ye gehasita -a ye gehasita vitakka); 191,4
(pañcas' upadanakkhandhesu -o alayo anunayo
ajjhosanaq¡ so dukkhasamudayo); Sn 835 (nahosi -o api
methunasmiq¡); Th 1105 (pada1aye kamaguQ,esu -aq¡);
Ja IV 116,20* (parad3.raJ!1 ca disvana -o me upapajjatha);
Nidd I 2,6 (-o kamo rago kamo chandarago kamo ... );
262,13foll. (pañca -a ... ); Pet 246,4 (ragena -a agatiq¡
gacchati); Spk 11 234,5 (Ánandattherassa satthari
adhimatto -o ca pemaJ!l ca); - ife see kama-; - (ii) in
a good or neutral sense: will, íntentíon; appetite for;
eagerness; Abh 766; 945; Vin 111 175,2 (amhakai)l ca
Devadatto -aJ)l ca ruciq¡ ca adaya voharati); D 11 312,26
(anuppannanaq¡ kusalanaJ!l dhammanaJ!l uppadaya -aJ)l
janeti vayamati viriyaq¡ arabhati); MI 480,7 (dhamma-
nijjhanakkhantiya sati -o jayati chandajato ussahati); S I
202,32 (ahu pure dhammapadesu -o); V 263,19
(chandasamadhipadhanasailkharasamannagataq¡ iddhi-
padaq¡ bhaveti iti me -o na ca atilino bhavissati na ca
atipaggahlto bhavissati ... ); 272,26 (ahosi te pubbe -o
aramaJ!l gamissam1 ti); A I 229,7 (tibbo no -o bhavissati
adhisllasikkhasamadane); 11195,14 (-o ca vayamo ca
ussaho ca ussojh1 ca); Ja V 351,28* (eso capi mama -o
ciraJ)l passeyya vo ubho); VI491,19* (eso ce siv1naq¡ -o
-aJ)l na panudamase ); 517 ,9* (na me -o mati atthi
rajjassa-m-anusasituq¡); Patis 11 23,27 (saddhindriyassa
bhavanaya -o uppajjati); Vibh 208,27 foll. (yo -o
chandikata kattukamyata kusa1o dhammachando ayaJ)l
vuccati -o); Cp 3:5:4 (tesaJ!l pi -am acikkhiq¡);
Pet 155,24 (tayo -a); Mi1127,7 (yo tava -o so hotu);
161,17 (n' esa buddhanaq¡ adhimutti n' eso paQ.<;iitanaq¡
-o); As 132,38 (kattukamyata1akkhaQ.o -o);
instr. chandena, chandasa, aeeording to one 's will;
voluntarily, willíngly; aeeording wíth one's (own)
wíshes; A III 50,18* (yo ujjubhütesu dadati -asa); Ja 11
326,15* (yaq¡ eta upasevanti -asa va dhanena va; 327,s-:
attano va -ena ruciya pemena); V 452,28* (ta upenti
vividhena -asa; 454,24': -asa ti pemena); VI 380,28* (ya
naJ!l poseti -asa piyena); Ap 425,6 (bhojanaJ!l matuya
mama -ena nibbattati yadicchakaq¡); Pj 11 153,18 (nahaJ!l
arahami taJ)l attano -ena kassaci datun ti); -
chandaso, adv., voluntarily, willíngly; Sp 1302,33 (ya
pana bhikkhuni -aso methunaq¡ dhammaq¡ patiseveyya;
Kkh 2 278,22foll.: -aso ti methunaragapatisaq¡yuttena
-ena e' eva ruciya ca, -e pana asati ba1akkarena
padhaJ)lsitaya anapatti) f. Vin-vn 1965;- (iii) consent;
181 chanda
esp. consent to an offieial aet of the sailgha, given by
proxy by an absent bhikkhu; Vin I 121,28foll.
(anujanami bhikkhave gilanena bhikkhuna -aJ)l datuq¡);
357,23 (sabbeh' eva ekajjhaq¡ sannipatitabbaJ!l gi1anehi
ca agilanehi ca na kehici -o databbo); IV 151,22
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü c1varakammaq¡ karonta ekassa
-aJ)l adai)lsu); 231,25 (anaññaya gaQ.assa -aq¡); Ja III
422,15 (tassa -aJ)l agahetva samajatikaku1a kumarikaq¡
anesi); Sp 1395,23 (chandarahanaJ!l -aq¡ aharitva); Ps III
16,22 (sabbesaq¡ -o 1addhuq¡ vaqati); Vin-vn 2643; -
0
agati,f., a wrong eourse of behaviour beeause of
partiality or desíre; V in III 238,24 (yo na -iq¡ gaccheyya
na dosagatiq¡ gaccheyya ... ); V 167,34 (kathaJ!l -iq¡
gacchati, idh' ekacco ayaq¡ me upajjhayo va acariyo
va ... sambhatto va ñatisa1ohito va ti tassanukampaya
tassanurakkhaya adhammaq¡ dhammo ti dipeti ... ); D 111
133,21 (abhabbo kh1Q.asavo bhikkhu -iq¡ gantuq¡);
Vibh 376,1; Sp 581,27 (yatra sattha pi savakesu -iq¡
gacchati); - 0
agamana, n., a wrong eourse of
behaviour beeause of partiality; J a 11 172,20* (-aJ)l na
ppasaq¡santi paQ.<;iita); Sp 7,6;- anunita, mfrz., led by
0
desire; led by one 's own will or wishes; S IV 71 ,8*;
Sn 781 (-o ruciya niviqho; Nidd I 64,3o: -o ti sakaya
diqhiya sakaya khantiya sakaya ruciya sakaya 1addhiya
yayati niyyati ... ); - 0 araha, mfn., entitled to give
eonsent by proxy; Vin I 318,17 (-iinai)l chando abato
hoti); V 221,32 (avasesa pakatatta -a);
0
-giimi(n), mfn. [chanda + gami(n) 1], influeneed by
partiality; V in III 183,34 (te sari.ghena pabbajaniya-
kamma-kata na sammavattanti . . . bhikkhü na
khamapenti akkosanti paribhasanti 0 -gamita dosagamita
mohagamita bhayagamita papenti; Sp 625,26foll.: ete
-in o ca ... bhayagamino ca ti evaJ!l 0 -gamitaya pi ...
bhayagamitaya pi papen ti, yojenU ti attho ); 184,18 (-in o
ca bhikkhü dosagamino bhikkhü ... ); IV 237,34 (-iniyo
ca bhikkhuniyo dosagaminiyo ca bhikkhuniyo ... ); -
0
-gü, mfn. [chanda + gu 1], influeneed by partiality or
one's desires; Sn 913 (na -ü; Nidd I 331,18: na
chandagatiq¡ gacchati na dosagatiq¡ gacchati . . . na
vaggehi dhammehi yayati ... saq¡hariyatl ti na -ü); -
0
-tii,f., will, intention; wanting; Bv 2:58 (manussattaJ)l
1iri.gasampatti hetu sattharadassanaq¡ pabbajja
guQ,asampatti adhikaro ca -a) = Ps IV 122,15* = Pj 11
48,16* (49,19: -a ti kattukamyat a);- (a) 0 -nidana, mfn.,
having its origin in appetite; Sn 865 (-ani piyani 1oke,
chanda- f., or me ?; Pj 11 551 ,3o: -an1 ti kamacchandadi-
chandanidanani); - 0
-riiga, m., appetite and desire;
desire that is appetite; D 11 58,34; M 111 114,24 (pañcasu
kamaguQ,esu -o); Sn 364 (adanesu vineyya -aJ)l);
Pet 161,17 (kamacchando -o pemaJ!l nikantl ti
vevacanaq¡); - -avaka<;l<;ihana, n., the removing of
appetite and desire; Spk 11 11 0,9;
nicchandaraga, mfn., wíthout appetíte and desire; Ja IV
286,9; Ps V 77,10 (kh1Q.asavena katakammaJ!l pana
nicchandaragatta kusalaJ!l va akusa1aJ!1 va na hoti);
Spk 11 103,2; Mp IV 173,9 (thero attano sar1re
nicchandaragataJ)l kathesi); - sacchandaraga, mfn.,
with appetite and desire; Mp 11 148,23;
0
-Viisini, (m)f(n). [chanda + vasi(n) 2], a wife obtained
with her free will; Vin III 139,24 (dasa bhariyayo
 eh anda
dhanakkita -i bhogavasini ... ; 140,!: -i nama piyo
piya111 vaseti; Sp 555,!8: chandena attano ruciya vasatl ti
-i . . . sa na attano chandamatten' eva bhariya hoti
purisena pana sampaticchitat ta) f. Ps 1 199,!9 =
Vv-a 73,2; - see also sacchanda (sv sa\
chanda 2, chanda(s) 2 , n. [S. chanclas] (sg. nom. -a111, -o;
iic chanda-, chando-), l. metre; a metrical te.xt; Abh 417
(gayattipamukhaJTl -3111); 945 (-o ... vedecchanunh ubh-
adisu); Vin 1 246,33' (aggihuttamuk ha yañña savitn -aso
mukhaJTl) = Sn 568 (Pj 11 456,21: vede sajjhayantehi
patham3111 ajjhetabbato savittl -aso mukhan ti vuttaJTl;
taking it as meaning 2. ?); S 1 38,21 * (-o nidan3111
gathanaJ11; Spk 1 94,21: gayatti-adiko -o gathanaJTl
nidanaJ11); Pj 11 16,24 (udacchida ti ucchindati ... atlta-
kalikiin3111 pi hi -asi vattamanavacanaJTl akkharacintaka
icchanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chindatl ti); Sadd 843,sfoll.
(yattha -o ca vutti ca rakkhitabba hoti tattha bhagava
-a111 ca vuttÍJTl ca rakkhati);- 2. the (jorm of the) text
of the Vedas; (the language of) a brahmanical text;
Abh 847 (vedo -así); 945 (-o... vede); V in II
139,11 foll. (handa maya111 bhante buddhavacan3111 -aso
aropema ti . . . na bhikkhave buddhavacana111 -aso
aropetabbaJTl; in the way of brahmanical texts, in
Sanskrit? see J. Brough, 1980, pp. 35-40; K.R. Norman,
1971b, pp. 329-31; 1990a, pp. 146-47; Sp 1214,16: -aso
aropema ti vedaJTl viya sakkatabhasay a vacanamagg3111
aropema); Thi-a 63,6 ([nibbanaJTl] tesa111 tesa111 sama~a­
brahm~anaJTl -aso patiññayamanaJTl voharamattam ev'
et3111; orto chanda1 ? see K.R.Norman, 1971b, p. 331);
0
- '-aijhena, n., study of, learning in, the Vedic texts;
Pj 11 432,15 (y3111 --mattena akkharacintaka sottiy3111
va~~enti voharamattaso ttiyo so); - 0
avinasa, m., non-
destruction, preservation, of the metre; Bv-a 71,27
(gamana111 pathe ti gamanapathe, -' -atth3111
anussaragamaJTl katva VUtt3111); - 0
(0)-bhanga, m.
[chanda + bhanga 1], disruption ofmetre; Sadd ll8,19;-
0
(a)-vasena, adv., for metrical reasons; Sv 691,33 (asa
devata -ena asava ti vutta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr asava
devata); Pj II 205,25 (saJ11suddhacara~o ti . . . -ena
e' ettha dighaJTl katva cakaraJ11aha, saJ11suddhacara~o ti
attho); Sadd 15,28 (-ena puggala iti rassakara~3111
danhabb3111); - 0 (0)-viciti,f, metrical science (one of
the Vedangas); Abh 110 (nirutti ca -i); Ap 502,26
(--kovido); Vv-a265,I4 (in cpd); Sadd 118,19;- see
also chandasa.
chandaka, n. [BHS id.], a free-wíll offering, a general
collection; Vin IV 250,25 (upasaka bhikkhunisang hassa
civaratthaya -a111 s3111haritva aññatarassa pavarikassa
ghare parikkhara111 nikkhipitva; Sp918,I: -an ti idaJTl
nama dhammakicca111 karissama, yaJTl sakkotha t3111
detha ti evaJTl paresa111 chand3111 ca ruciJTl ca uppadetva
gahitaparikkha rass' et3111 adhivacanaJTl, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr cha~<;lakan ti); Ja 11 45,17 (sakalanagarav asino
-3111 s3111haritva sabbaparikkharadanaJTl sajjetva); 85,25
(manussa . . . g~abandhanena -3111 saJ11haritva dana111
sajjetva isig~assa mahadana111 pavattayi111su); 248,25
(va~ija . . . -aJTl SaJ11haritva bahUJTl malagandha-
vilepanaJTl ca khajjabhojjad'ini ca adaya ki)ananhane
sannipatita vetanaJTl datva eka111 gandhabbaJTl anetha ti
ahaJTlsu);- ifc see nava- (sv nava 1).
182 chapaka
chandati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup chadati, Wg § 19:52:
chadir urjane], gets rid of; (is strong;) Sadd 384,s (chadi
ujjhane: -ati; perhaps wrfor ujjane ?); - chandati in Ee
at Ps III 158,18 is wr for chindati (Ce so) or chindanti
(Be, Se so).
chandaniya, mfn. [from chanda 1, or chadeti 2, cf
S. chandana, or -Jchand], arousing appetite or
eagerness; ? Vibh-a 290,12 (yo -vasena chando, Be, Ce,
0
E e so; Se chandaniya-).
chandasa, m. [S. chandasa], one familiar with the text of
the Vedas, a brahman; Abh 408 (brahm~o sottiyo -o).
chandasa, f (or pl. of chanda(s) 2 ?) [cf S. chanclas],
metrical science; Mil 3,32 (bahüni e' assa satthani
uggahitani honti ... jotisa maya hetu mantana yuddha -a
mudda).
chandava, m. [?], name of a class of brahmans; D 1 237,II
(addhariya brahm~a tittiriya brahm~a chandoka
brahma~a -a brahm~a. Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
omit).
chandi(n), mfn. [from chanda1], having appetite or will;
- 0
(i) -kata, mfn., havíng appetite or will; eager;
Th 1029 (khantya -o hoti ussahitva tuleti t3111, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce chandikato; Th-a 111 118,29: -o chandajato
hoti);- see also sacchandi(n).
chandika, chandika, mfn. [from chanda 1; BHS chandika],
having appetite or will; eager; A lii 436,12 (saddho ca
hoti -o ca paññava ca); Patis 1 124,29 (saddha -a pañña-
vanto) = Vibh 342,4 f. Kv 94,23; Pet 217,4 (ye nibbanena
-a bhavissanti puttadare t~haJTl pajahissanti); -
0
-tii,.f, abstr., appetite, will; eagerness; Vibh 208,27 (yo
chando -a kattukamyata kusalo dhammacchan do, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se chandikata; Vibh-a 290,13: -a ti 0 -bhavo
chandakar~akaro va) quoted Sv 642.18 (Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se chandikata) and Spk III 256,21 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
chandikata); - acchandika, mfn., lacking appetite or
will; A 111 436,3 (asaddho ca hoti -o ca duppañño ca);
Patis 1 124,24 (assaddha -a duppañña, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr acchandita; Patis-a 402,22: -a ti kattukamyatak usala-
cchandarahita) = Vibh 341,39 f. Kv 94,8; Vism 177,19 (-a
ti apaccanikapatipadayaJTl chandavirahita ); Sv 689,22
0
( -tta).
chandiyana, n., the having appetite or will;? Spk 11
258,Io (-ato chando, Be, Se so; Ce, E e chandiyanato).
chandoka, m. [cfS. chandoga], an udga(f priest, the name
of a class of brahmans; DI 237,II (addhariya brahm~a
tittiriya brahma~a -a brahma~a ... ).
channa\ m. [?], an ordinance; ? Abh 834 (-aJTl ...
paññattiya111 pume).
channa2 , mfn.,pp ofcha:deti 1 qv.
channa 3 , mfn.,pp ofcha:detí 2 qv.
channaq¡ is also gen. of cha2 qv .
channaka, mfn. [channi + ka2], covered; - ifc see
palala-.
chapaka, chavaka 1, m. [cfS. svapaca, svapaka ?], a man
of a low, outcaste tribe; Vin IV 203,27 foll. (aññatarassa
-assa pajapati gabbhini ahosi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
chavakassa; = story of Ja lii 27,wfoll.: Ce, Ee, Se
chavakajataka, Be chavajataka; Sp 896,8: -assa ti
c~<;ialassa); Ja V 449,6* (kulaputta111 pi jahanti
akiñcan3111 °-samasadisam api, W.B. Bollée, 1970, p. 65
chapaki
so; Be, Ce chavakasamasadisarr pi; Ee chavakasamarr
sadisam api; Se chavakasamarr sadisarr; 450,1, foil.:
sunakhamarrsakhadakaca~<;lalena samam sadisarr);
Mil 200,27 (bodhisatto chavakac~<;la!o ahosi vijjadharo,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chavakaca~<;la!akule).
chapaki, f [cf S. svapacl, svapakl ?], a woman of a low,
outcaste tribe; V in IV 203,29 (-1 tarr chapakarr etad
avoca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chavakl; Sp 896,s: -I ti
candali).
Vch~~ [?], to despise; Dhatum 553 (chamu hllane),
chamati 1, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup champayati,
Wg § 32:76 ?], goes; Sadd 412,14foll. (chama gatimhi:
... -ati ... -anti gacchanti ettha ti chama).
chamate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup chamati, Wg § 13:27], eats;
Dhatum555 (chamu ... adane); Sadd411,n (camu
chamu ... adane: ... -ati).
chama 1, ind. [S. k?ama, instr. of k~amj, on the earth, on
the ground; on to the ground; D III 6,9 (Korakkhattiyo
kukkuravatiko catuku~<;liko -a nikil).~aJTI bhakkhasarr
mukhen' eva khadati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikkinnam; or
prob. cpd ofchama2 qv) f MI 387,19 (-a nikkhitt-~, Be,
Ce, Ee so, written as cpd; Se chamayarr nikkhittarr);
Ud 77,x* (yassa mülarr -a natthi pa~l).a natthi kuto lata;
cfUd-a 371,24: asavanivara~a-ayonisomanasikarasail­
khata -a pa~avi natthi); Vv 41:4 (-a nisldirr); Thl 112
(bijani pavaparr -a; Thl-a 113,21: -a ti chamayarr,
bhummatthe hi idarr paccattavacanarr); Ja III 232,5*
(gabbho ca patito -a; 232,s : -a ti bhümiyarr);
IV285,11* (-a seti); VI89,9* (cando va patito -a;
LfSadd 632,25: gathasu chandamabhedattharr akkhara-
lopo ... cando va patito chamaya cando va patito -a); -
0
-giri,J, an ornamental stone set into the ground;?
Ja V 406,9* (-1 pupphavicitrasanthata; 406,31':
bhümiyarr patthata pighipasa~a, Ce, Ee so; Be bhümi-
samapatthata; Se bhümisamamatthaka).
chama ,f [S. k~ama; or perhaps Pa\i rather formedfrom
2
chama 1], the earth; Abh 181 (vasundhara -a bhümi);
Sadd 412,14 (-a ti pathavi); - acc. chamarr (or for
chama 1 ?), on the ground; to the ground; Thl 494
(disvana -arr nisinne; Thl-a 262,22: -an ti chamayarr);
514 (kese va -arr khipi Sumedha); Ja VI 89,18 (chama ti
-aya pathaviyan ti attho, -an ti pi patho, pathavirr
patitarr vi ya ti attho ); - loe. chamaya(JTI), on the
ground; on to the ground; Vin I 286,22 (bhikkhü -aya
clvararr pattharanti); M III 164,25 (balarr __ . -aya va
semanarr); Sn 401 (mañee -ayarr va sayetha santhate );
Pv 40:3 (paripatami -ayarr); Thl 88 (-aya seyyarr
kappemi); Ja VI 195,19* (-ayarr ce nisiñcissarr);
Mil 101,2 (patamane pi -ayarr candimasuriye);
Dhp-a III 273,15 (-aya nisinna suttarr kantati); -
0
-nikh.ll.la, mfn., strewn on the ground; D 111 6,9
(Korakkhattiyo kukkuravatiko catuku~<;liko -arr
bhakkhasam mukhen' eva khadati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-nikki~~mP; or perhaps chama 1 and not a cpd); -
0
-nikkhitta, mfn., thrown down on the ground; M 1
387,19 (Seniyo kukkuravatiko dukkarakarako -arr
bhuñjati, Ce, Ee so; Be -arr bhojanarr; Se chamayarr
1 acchambhi(n), achambhi(n), mfn. [BHS acchambhin,
nikkhittarr bhojanarr; or perhaps chama and not a
1 astambhin], not stiff or rigid (with fear); unafraid; M II
cpd);- see also khama .
chambha, m. [cf S. skambha, stambha], stitfness, rigidity
183 chambhi(n)
(through fear); Ps 1 116,29 (chambhi ti kayatthambhana-
lomaharrsanakarena -ena samannagato, Ee so; Ce kaya-
tthambhana1omaharrsanakarena; Se kayachambhana-
lomaharrsanakarena; Be kayathambhanalomaharrsana-
karena thambhena).
chambhati, pr. 3 sg. [(f S. stambhate, S. Dhatup
skambhate, BHS chambati], becomes stiff or rigid; is
paralyzed (with fear); (but apparently understood also
as) shakes; Vin I 359,7* (na -ati parisagato na vedhati);
M II 138,8 (na -ati na kampati na vedhati na paritassati;
Ps III 389,24: na -atl ti na bhayati); Jal 71,17
(puratthimadisabhage pana sabbabuddhanarr pallailka-
ghanam, tarr n' eva -ati na kampati); Mp IV 105,25 (na
vedhatl ti na -ati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se na vyathatl ti na
vedhati na -ati); - pp chambhita (or o{ caus.
*chambheti), mfn. [cf S, stambhita, BHS chambhita],
stiffened, benumbed, para/yzed (with fear); (but
apparently understood also as) shaking; Vism 104,32
(mohacarito parivyakulaya gatiya gacchati -o viya
padarr nikkhipati -o vi ya padarr uddharati); Ud-a 66,11
(iirutthambhakasarirassa --bhavarr); - --tta, n., abstr.
[LfBHS chambitatva, chambhitatva], stiffness, rigidity,
paralysis (through fear); Vin 11 155,38 (andhakaro
paturahosi, bhayarr --ttarr lomaharrso udapadi); M III
158,25 foil. ( --ttarr kho me udapadi --ttadhikar~arr ca
pana me samadhi cavi); S l 106,15 (Maro papima
bhagavato bhayarr--ttarr lomaharrsarr uppadetukamo );
V 386,2foll. (puthujjanassa hoti uttaso hoti --ttarr hoti
samparayikarr mara~abhayarr); Th 190; Ja II 336,9*
(tasmirr bhayasmirr mara~e viyü\he kasma nu te nahu
--ttarr; 336,12': --ttan ti sañracalanarr); Nidd I 414,24
(ya evariipa kailkha , . . apariyogahana --ttarr cittassa
manovilekho idarr kathailkathasallarr; Nidd-a 1 429,27:
nicchayavasena aramm~e pavattiturr asamatthataya
--ttam cittassa thaddhabhavo ti attho) f Dhs 425 (eds
thambhitattarr); Ap 271,15; Vibh 367,12 (jatirr paticca
bhayarr __ . --ttam lomaharrso . "; cfVibh-a 496,1s:
--ttan ti bhayavasena gattacalanarr); Mil22,29
(Milindassa rañño sahasa Nagaseno ti saddarr sutva va
ahud eva bhayarr ahud eva --ttarr ahud eva
lomaharrso); Sp 401,14foll. (--ttan ti hadayamarrsarr
adirr katva sarlracalanarr hoti, atibhayena
thaddhasarlrattan ti pi eke, thambhitattarr hi --ttan ti
vuccatl ti); - neg. acchambhitatta, n., abstr., lack of
fear; fearlessness; Pj TI 470,14 (acchambhitattena
usabhasadisataya usabharr) = Dhp-a IV 231,21 (Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se acchambhitaghena); - see also khambhati,
thambhati.
chambhi(n), mfn. [from chambha or chambhati; cf S.
stambhin, BHS chambin], stiff, rigid (with fear); (but
apparently understood also as) shaking; MI 19,12(oll.
(ye kho keci sama~a va brahma~a va -I bhlrukajatika , ..
na kho panaharr -I bhirukajatiko); S 1 99,1 (bhlru -1
utrasi palay!; Spk I 165,3o: -I ti pavedhitakayo); Ja IV
310,17* (so bajjhatü pasasatehi -1, Ee so; Ce -i; Be, Se
chabbhi; cf31 1,30': catüsu padesu glvay a katibhage ca ti
chasu ~anesu) quoted Cp-a 206,7* (eds chamhi); -
13S,s (so -I akampl avedhi aparitassl); Th 482 (-I ca
chambhittaip
abhito ca vyakasirp. satthuno aharp.); Sn 42
(parissayanarp. sahita -1; Pj II 88,21: thaddhabhavakara-
bhayabhavena -1); Ja VI 322,11* (-1 abbhito aloma-
ha!!ho; 322,17-: -1 ti nikkampo); Mil339,13 (amailku-
bhiito abhiru -1 anutrasi vigatalomaharp.so parisarp.
upasailkamati); Sv 561,8 (abhito Ánanda tathagato -1
sato sampajano ayusailkhararp. ossaji ti); Pj I 33,26 (--ta).
chambhittarp. in Ee at Ja I 345,3 is probably wr for
chambhitattarp. (Be, Ce, Se so).
Vchar [cfS. Dhatup churati, Wg § 28:79 ?], to cut;
Dhatum 364 (chara cchede).
charikaya in Ee at Sv 384,28 is wr for charikaya (Be, Ce,
Se so).
chala, n. [ts], a pretext; a misleading or ambiguous
expression; stumbling, error, Abh 1108 (lese tu khalite
-arp.); Kv-a 16,14 (sakavadissa pana paravadina 0 -vadarp.
nissaya pa!ikammarp. katva attana sadhito jayo dujjayo);
157,19 (imarp. patiññarp. gahetva laddhirp. patighapentena
-ena patighapita hoti); Moh 259,4 (tadisassa lesa-
vacanassa 0 -vadassa okasarp. adadamano); Mhv 67:20
(cararp. purasannavane sayarp. ca migavacchala
magganumagge viññasi); Sadd 919,22 (attha-
vikappupapattiya vacanavighato -arp., yatha nava-
kambalo 'yarp. puriso, raja no sakkhi ti evamadi).
challi, f [S. lex., AMg. id.], bark; a piece of bark; a husk;
(a growth on a tree; ?) Sp 342,25 (sakha pi 'ssa putika
jata -iyo pi gajita); 347,7 (so chijjamano sace ekaya pi
-iya va vakena va sakalikaya va phegguna va sam-
baddho va hutva bhiimiyarp. patati); 833,27 (sabbesarp.
kandanarp. jil)l)ajaraghanarp. ca -i ca sukhumamiilani ca
yavajivikani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jallirp., prob. wr); 1104,31
(sace hi -irp. pi anapanetva sakalen' eva najikeraphalena
saddhirp. piil)akarp. pa!iggahitarp. hoti); Sv 566,32 (sutta-
pa!ipa!iya katthaci anagantva -irp. ughapetva gujha-
vessantaragüjha-ummaggagujhavinayavedallapi!akanarp.
aññatarato agatani paññayanti ti attho) = Mp III 160,7
(Mp-~ [Be] II 357,6foll. :-irp. ughapetva ti arogassa
mahato rukkhassa ti~~hato upakkamena challikaya
sakalikaya papa~ikaya va ughapanarp. viya arogassa
sasanadhammassa tighato vyañjanamattena tap-
pariyapannarp. viya hutva challisadisarp. pubbapara-
viruddhatadidosarp. ughapetva paridipetva); Dhp-a II
165,15 (Vai)O rukkhato -i viya apagato); Vin-vn 1031;-
zfc see pottha-.
2 funeral pot; Th 127 (-o va me patto parp.sukiilarp. ca
cha!, see sv cha .
chava, m.f and mfn., 1. (m.f) [S. sava] a corpse, a dead
body; Abh 405 (kul)apo -o); 1026; A II 57,27 foil. (-o
-aya saddhirp. sarp.vasati -o deviya saddhirp.
sarp.vasati ... ; Mp III 94,22: gul)amaral)ena matatta -o);
Spk I 191,9 (salaya -arp. cha<;i<;ietva agantva pabbajjarp.
yaci); Mhv 37:205 (-arp. susana anetva); - 2. (mfn.)
[BHS chava, sava], vile, base; wretched, inferior, paltry;
Abh 1026 (-o . . . lamake so tiliilgiko ); V in II 112,5
(-assa darupattassa karal)a); D III 24,19 (ke ca -e sigale
ke pana sihanade ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ko ca -o sigalo;
Sv 828,16foll.: ko ca lamako sigalo ... sigalassa ca
silianadassa ko sambandho ti adhippayo); MI 374,Jo
(kirp. hi sobhati -o manodal)<;io imassa evarp. ojarikassa
kayadal)<;iassa upanidhaya); A III 311,25 (ko pana vado
-aya avijjaya); Ja II 120,15* (imarp. cajamrnarp. musalena
184 chavi
hantva luddarp. -arp. paradarüpasevirp.; 120,26': -an ti
gul)abhavena nijjivarp. matasadisarp.); III 269,17* (-arp.
h' imarp. vinasetha nayarp. sarp.vasanaraho; 269,29': -an ti
lamakarp.); - o• -atthi, n., the bone of a corpse;
Cp 3:15:1 (susane seyyarp. kappemi -im upadhaya 'harp.,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se chavaghikarp.); - o• -atthika, n.
[chava + aghika2], the bone of a corpse; MI 79,31
(aharp. ... su sane seyyarp. kappemi -ani upadhaya; Ps II
48,33: -ani ti upa<;l<;lhada<;l<;lhani aghini) f. Cp 3:15:1
(-arp. upanidhaya 'harp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chavaghirp.);
-
0
alata, n., a firebrand or kindling for the funeral
pyre; S III 93,16 (-arp. ubhato padittarp. majjhe gütha-
gatarp.; Spk II 302,21: -an ti chavanarp. da<;l<;lhaghane
alatarp.); It90,Jl* (-arp. va vinassati); Ap67,19 (-arp.
yatha kagharp. na kvaci kiccakarakarp.); Vism 54,12 (-am
iva ubhato paribahiro); - 0 -kutika,f, a shelter or
platformfor corpses; Vin I 152,3o (bhikkhü -aya vassarp.
upagacchanti; Sp 1072,18: -a nama ~ailkitamañcadi­
bheda ku~i); - 0 -kuti,f, a shelter or platform for
corpses; Vin-vn 2610 (chatte ca~ichavaku!iSU va); -
0
-cchac.Jc.Jaka, m(jn)., (one) who disposes of corpses;
Ja III 195,16' (--cal)<;iala); - 0 -c.Jaha, 0 -daha, m(jn).,
(one) who bums corpses; Ja V 449,4• (-a puppha-
cha<;l<;lakií sadhanarp. anupatanti nariyo, L. Alsdorf, 1967,
p. 279, W.B. Bollée, 1970, p. 65 so; eds chava<;iahakarp.);
-
0
-c.Jahaka, 0 -dahaka, mfi-ika)n., (one) who bums
corpses; Vin I 152,32 (bhikkhü chavaku~ikaya vassarp.
upagacchanti, manussa ... vipacenti seyyatha pi -a ti);
Ja V 449,4* (-arp. pupphacha<;l<;lakarp., eds so; read
chavadaha, chava<;laha with L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 279 and
W.B. Bollée, 1970, p. 65; 449,34': -an ti chavanarp.
<;lahakarp. susanagopakan ti vuttarp. hoti, Ce, Se so; Be
susanapalan ti; Ee susanagopanan ti, prob. wr);
Mil331,15 (-a pupphacha<;l<;laka); Vism 230,11; Dhp-al
68,15 (eka susanagopika kajl nama 0 -<;lahika); Th-a III
39,29 (matasatto -ehi samma jhapeturp. siilehi
1
tujjamano); - 0 -dussa, n. [chava + dussa ], clothes
from corpses or very poor clothes; DI 166,27 (-ani pi
dhareti parp.sukiilani pi dhareti; Sv 356,2o: -ani ti
matasañrato cha<;l<;litavatthani, erakatil)adini va
ganthetva katanivasanani) f. A I 240,31 f. Nidd I 417 ,4;
-
0
-Sarira, n., a dead body, a corpse; Vism 178,llfoll.
(tatharüpassa -ass' etarp. adhivacanarp.); -
0
-sitta, n.
2
[chava + sitta ], a pot used at rites for the dead, a
civararp.; Th-a II 8,31: mayharp. patto --sadiso, matanarp.
khirasecanakundasadiso ti attho);- -Sisa, n. [chava +
0
1
sisa ], a skuiz; Vin II 115,5foll. (so -assa pattarp.
dhareti); Pj II 345,6 (-arp. ako~etva sattanarp. gatirp.
janati, Be, Ce, E e so; Se matasisarp.); Ap-a 528,27 (-arp.
nakhena akotetva).
chavaka1 , see ~v chapaka.
2
chavaka2 , m. and mfn. [chava + ka ], l. (m.) a corpse;
Abh 1130 (chattarp. tu -e pi ca; Abh-suci: -e kajevare);
- 2. (mfn.) vile, base, inferior;? Mi1156,15 (yarp.
tathagatassa . . . anupamassa appa~isamassa -arp.
lamakarp. parittarp. paparp. anariyarp. Maro labhantarayarp.
akasi ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -o lamako paritto papo
anariyo ... ).
chavi, f [ts] (sg. nom. -i, -irp.), l. skin; esp. the outer
chata
!ayer of skin, the epidennis (in contradistinction to
camma qv ); an integument; V in I 83,1 (puttapemaJTI
bhante -iJTI chindati -iJTI chetva cammarp chindati ... );
216,12 (sambadhe bhikkhave sukhuma -i); Mili 184,11
( -iJTI pi gayhati cammarp pi gayhati marpsarp pi
gayhati); Sn 194 (-iya kayo paticchanno yathabhüt~
na dissati); Thi 244 (mate sHarp -iJTI hane); Ja V 269,6'
(kimiyo . . . -ir¡¡ chetvana khadanti); VI 548,11 (-i
chijjati, 1ohitaJTI paggharati); Ap 458,2 (sukhuma
sukumarika -i me sabbada hoti); Vism 251,21 (taco ti
saka1asarirarp vethetva thitacamm~. tassa upari ka~a­
samapHadivai_li_la -i nama) = Vibh-a 234,1s; Ps II 184,32
(1ohite pasanne -i pasidi); Nidd-a I 303,30 (saka1a-
sañr~ pariyonandhitva pakataki1omakassa upari -iya
hettha thit~ camm~); ifc see uppatita-
(sv uppateti), korai_lgaka-, tanu-; - 2. the covering of a
cushion; Vin II 150,27 (-irp uppatetva haranti); Sp 667,1
2 nicchata, mfn., free from hunger or craving; MI 341,11
(mañcabhisiya va pithakabhisiya va -i); Kkh 156,14;-
3. beauty, splendour; Abh 54 (sobha juti -i); Sp 219,26
(ananucchavikarp, tes~ -irp chay~ sundarabhavarp
na anveti; Sp-t [Be] II 22,13: tes~ pabhassarakarai_larp
-irp); - 0 -rañjita, mfn., coloured, tinted by the skin;
Ps II 129,1o (ay~ [kayo] ... maJTisava1epano al1a-
cammapariyonaddho -o);- nicchavi, mfn., without an
outer skin; skinless; V in III 106,sfoll. (addasarp -iJTI
purisarp vehas~ gacchant~ . . . -ir¡¡ itthirp ... ) = S li
256,2ofoll.; Ps II 20,3foll. (evarp -i aheSUJTI ... te --taya
va llnacchavitaya va Licchavi ti paññayirpsu) = Pj I
159,J3foll.; - sacchavi, mfn., covered;? A III 371,5
(nigrodharaj~ pavattesi ummül~ akasi ... nigrodha-
raj~ ussapesi -ini mülani ahesuJTI; Mp III 386,25: -ini
ti samanacchavini pakatitthane thitani); - succhavi
(and succhavi[n] ?), mfn., having fine skin; having a fine
surface; Vin I 218,1o (maha vai_lo rü~ho ahosi -i
1omajato, Ce, Ee, Se so; but better suchavi1omajato with
Be?); D III 159,29* (vatthani sukhumani -ini); Ja V
207,9' ([hattha] vana ca -i ca); 344,14 (pado sarprü~ho -i
sañjata1omo ahosi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee sañjatachavi);
407,23' (suttaca ti -i, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -i); Ap 310,19
(sabbattha -i homi); Sp 602,1 (satakapatto ti 1ohapatta-
sadiso susaJ.lthano -i siniddho);- see also tanucchava
(sv tanu), sukhumachavika.
chata, mfn. and n. [AMg chaa; cf S. lex. psata and BHS
chata], l.(mfrz.) hungry; Abh756 (-o c'eva
bubhukkhito); Pv 13:13 (uppai_lgukirp kis~ -aJTI;
Pv-a 72,21: -an ti bubhukkhit~ khudaya abhibhütaJTI);
40:4 (-o ki1anto ca pipasito ca); Thi 509 (kahinti khu
tarp kama -a sunakharp va cai_lgala; Thi-a 266,7 foil.:
yatha chatajjhatta sapaka sunakharp 1abhitva anaya-
vyasan~ papenti ti attho); Ja III 199,2* (matto -aJTI
hanasi mar¡¡; 199,9·: -an ti jighacchabhibhütaJTI
dubbal~ kapa!_l~); V 71,6* (yannün' imaJTI vadhitvana
-o khadeyya vanararp); VI 551,31 * (amma -' amha detha
no); Mi1247,2sjoll. (-o puriso ... tarp bhatt~
abhuñjitva -o va parivatteyya); Sp 363,10 (0 -tta); Spk I
240,34 (mahallakatthero pi digharattarp -o yavadatth~
y agur¡¡ pivi); Dhp-a I 170,26 (sattaghadivase o -taya);
Ylhv 7:24 (ime -a ti); - 2. (n.) hunger, craving
appetite; Ps III 10,5 (nicchato ti -aJTI vuccati tai_lha); -
=·-ajjhatta, or 0 -jhatta, mfn., hungry; (whose self is
185 *chiidati
hungry? consumed or weakened by hunger ?); Ja II
83,14 (mlil)avo saka1adivasaJTI maggagamanena ki1anto
-o); 203,3 (n~ antaramagge -~ disva); Sp 382,22
([sükararp] -aJTI disva; Sp-t [Be] II 165,4: -an ti
jighacchadukkhena pi!ita-attasantanarp); Ps II 40,13
(--taya); Thi-a 266,7 (yatha -a sapaka sunakhaJTI
3
1abhitva); - 0 -afta, mfn. [chata + aga ], distressed by
hunger; V v-a 76,29 (-o pi, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
chatajjhatto); - 0 -jhatta, see sv 0 '-ajjhatta above; -
achata, mfn., not hungry; Mi1139,3 (chatass' eva
bhojanena karai_liyaJTI hoti, -assa kiJTI bhojanena); -
aticchata, mfn., very hungry; too hungry; D III 184,6
(-o smi ti kammaJTI na karoti); Ja li 30l,s; Sp 165,25 (-o
vatayaJTI mahallako ); Spk I 35,23 (-átisitadika1esu, Be,
Se so; Ce -átisHavatadika1esu; Ee -a-atisitavatadisu
kalesu, prob. wr); 100,12 (-' -adivasena agantukalasiyaJTI,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr aticchata-adivasena); -
(ditrhe va dhamme -o nibbuto sltibhüto; Ps III 10,6:
chataJTI vuccati tai_lha, sa assa n' atthi ti -o); A IV 410,29
(addha te ayasmanto -a nibbuta tii_li_la paragata; Mp IV
193,21: tai_lhadinhicchatan~ abhavena -a); It 46,22*
(vedananarp khaya bhikkhu -o parinibbuto); Sn 707 (sa
ve icchaya -o aniccho hoti nibbuto); Thi 132 (sajja
abbü~hasallaharp -a parinibbuta); Patis II 243,3 (-o
muccati ti vimokkho ); Pj II 495,5 (--tta).
2
chataka, m.n. and mfn. [chata + ka ], l. (m.n.) hunger;
dearth, famine; Ja li 367,18 (devo na vassi, tasmirp
avassante saka1araghe -~ jatarp); VI 540,11' (puriso
tattha assame -arp va paniyapipas~ va ukkaJ.lthitaJTI va
na pati1abhati ti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se chatarp); Nidd I
486,25 (khuda vuccati -o, -ena phuttho); Cp 1:3:3
(avughiko janapado dubbhikkho -o maha;
Cp-a 35,2ofoll.: mahati jigacchabadha vattati ti attho);
Sp 176,27 (-arp ca vattati); PsI 256,15 (etesaJTI
anubhavena n' eva bhaye bhay~ na -e -~ janama);
Dhp-a I 170,2 (-ato balavatara vedan a uppajjati); - ifc
2
see akkhakkhayika- (sv akkha ), ekan~ika- (sv eka); -
2. (mfrz.) hungry; Ja I 245,27 (ehi putta -o si ti); III415,1s
(sigaliya potaka -a viravirpsu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se chata);
Cp 1:4:3 (ko -o ko tasito ); Ps II 60,1 ( -ehi sunakhehi
khadapenti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee chatasunakhehi); -
0
-ajjhatta or 0 -jhatta,mfrz., hungry; Mpi 431,5 (pita
digharattarp -o atirekaJTI bhuñjitva ka1am akasi, Se so;
Ce, Ee chatajjhatto; Be chatakatta); Dhp-a I 367,13
(ek~ -aJTI janapadamanussaJTI ... disva, E e so; Be, Ce,
Se chatajjhatt~).
chadaka\ m.f(-ika)n. [ts], covering; (one) who covers;-
ifc see geha- (sv geha\ cutipatisandhi- (sv cuti); - see
also kanducchadikasatika.
chadakai,. n., the givi~g enjoyment; pleasantness; ? -
acchadaka, n., the not pleasing, not giving enjoyment;
unpleasantness;- ifc see bhattá-.
*chadati, *chadayate, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. chadayati,
chandayati], is pleased with, likes; - part.pr.
3
chadamana, chadayamana , mfn., Ja V 31,25* (-amano
mayharp tvam adesi marpsarp, Se so; Be, Ce -ayamano
mayh~ tv~ ... ; Ee -ayamano me yaJTI tv~ ... ; all
unmetrical; 32,4· foll.: mama sarirato tvarp -ay aman o
rocayamano y~ yarp icchasi t~ tarp marps~ adesi
chadana
khadeyyasi ti attho); 33,2* (yatha yatha mmn -amano
adesi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -ayamano); - aor. 1 pl.
chadimhase, Pv 11:8 (bahu~T~ pitva na dhata homa na
-imhase mayaiTI; Pv-a 59,22foll.: na ruccama, na ruci~T~
uppadema, na ta~T~ mayaiTI attano ruciya pivissama ti
attho);- see also chadeti 2.
ehiidana, n., -ii,f [from chadeti 1; S. chadana], covering,
cover; roofing; concealing; Abh 51; V in V 120,33 (tisso
-a, vatthum chadeti no apattim ... ); Ap 98,1 (aro pita ca
te puppha -am assu satthuno, Ce, Ee so; Be chadanaiTI;
Se chadanam assa); 518,11 (mahanelassa -a~T~ dharenti
maJTia muddhani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee chadanaiTI); Nidd I
9,4 (yo rago ... nivaranaiTI -am bandhanaiTI ... ) =
Dhs 1059 (Be, Se so; Ce chadanam; Ee wr chandana~T~)
= Vibh 362,5 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce chadanaiTI); Nidd I 79,25
(maya ... -a paricchadana; Nidd-a I 207,19: tii;¡ap~!)ehi
viya gutha~T~ kayavacikammehi papaiTI chadetl ti -a) =
Vibh 358,4; Sp 785,I2foll. (maggena -a~T~ nama
aparikkhipitva ujukam eva -a~T~. ta~T~ i~~hakasilasudhahi
labbhati); Mp IV 55,11 (gehanaiTI ca o• -atthaya); Th-a II
188,2s (apattiya hi -a~T~).
ehiidayati 1, se e sv chadeti 1.
ehiidayati 2 , see sv chadeti 2.
*ehadayate, see sv *chadati.
ehadi, f [from chadeti 1], covering, shelter; Ja IV 351,2+*
(te ca tattha nis!ditva tassa rukkhassa -iya; 353,1·: -iya ti
chayaya); Ap 518,s (-i~T~ karonta buddhassa, Ee, Se so;
Be chadi~T~; Ce chada~T~); - ifc see ka!)c,lu-, tala-
(sv tala\- see al so chadi.
ehadiya 1, n., covering; what covers; Ja VI 354,22* (-am
aharati ayam imassa; 354,31': -an ti gehacchadanaiTI.
ti!)an ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce gehacchadanaiTI; Ee geha-
cchadanatinan ti attho ).
ehiidiya 2 , ah~ol. of chadeti 1 qv.
ehadiya 3 , mfn.,.fpp ofchadeti 1 qv.
ehadeti 1, -ayati 1, [S. chadayati], covers, covers over;
hides, conceals; Dhatup 586 (chada saiTlvar~e);
Dhatum 819 (chadapavara!)e); Vin ll 62,35 (ta apattiyo
na -eti); 233,7* (in uddana: bhikkhu sari.gha~iya -e);
Dhp 252 (attano [vajjani] pana -eti kali~T~ va kitava
sa~ho); Pv 29:4 (musavadena -emi natthi et~ mama
gehe); Ap 72,6 (-ayissama); 436,6 (sakananam
sapabbata~T~ khomadussehi -eyyam); Sp 389,27
(saitgho .. . saitghikam avasam -eti); 390,4 (attano
senasanam -eh! ti); Sadd 542,14 (chada saiTlvarane:
geham -eti -ayati); 544,3 (chada apavara!)e: -eti -ayati
chattam); - part.pr. (a) chadenta 1, mf( -enti)n., Vin IV
48,3; Ja III 420,3o* (sakhahi -ento); Sp 1393,15;
Kkh 2 298,4 (bhikkhuniya hi apatti~T~ -entiya);
(b) chadaya(t), mfn., Ap 325,29 (-ayam madhuna
mahim): Sp 1175,5 (-ayato); (e) chadayamana 1, mfn.,
Sp 1395,s (apajjitva anadariyena -ayamana pi
bhikkhuni); Sv 452,4 (sakalanala~am -ayamanam); -
aor. 3 sg. (a) chadesi, acchadesi 2, Vin IV 216,6 (yava
gabbho taru!)O ah o si tava -esi); DI 106,14 (kevala~T~ pi
nalatama!)c,lala~T~ jivhaya -e si); Ja VI 581 ,21* (abbha~T~
rajo acchadesi); Ap 272,13 (yavata buddhaparisa tava
-esi sa~aka~T~); 536,!! (aitgu1aggena -esi bhakar~
sanisakar~); Spk II 257,25 (ma!)c,lap~ -esi);
(b) chadayl, acchadayi, Ja V 49,II* (kha!)itvana kasuiTI
186 chadeti
phalakehi -ayi); Ap 38,4 (yavata buddhaparisa puppheh'
acchadayi tada); 321 ,s (nala~anta~T~ keva1a~T~ -ay! jino );
3 pi. (a) chadesuiTI, Mil 224,5 (bhagavato ku~i~T~ -esuiTI);
Ap-a 421,5; Mhv 37:238 (devata ... -esuiTI potthaka~T~);
(b) achadayuiTI, Ap 71.18 (buddhathüp~ achadayuiTI);
- ahso/. (a) chadetva, Vin III 82,15 (bhikkhu viharaiTI
-etva otarati); Ja II 253,26 (saddo nagaraiTI -etva
anhasi); V 243,26' (pabbajjaliitgena chadan~ katva
attanaiTI -etva); Ap 602,2; neg. achadetva,
Kkh 2 298,5; (b) chadayitva, Mhv 1:41; (e) chadayitvana,
Vin V 213,28* (apattiyo -ayitvana); Ap 350,s
(m~c,lapaiTI -ayitvana); (d) chadiya , Mhv 33:86: -
2
pass. pr. 3 sg. chadlyati, Vin TI 211,31 (ussukka~T~ va
katabba~T~ kinti nu kho viharo -iyetha ti); Ap-a 372,23
(viharo padumapupphehi -Iyati); 427,Io (varlyati -iyati
anena ti varaiTI); 439,!9 (-iyati saiTlvariyati atapadin ti
chatta~T~);- part.pr. chadiyamana, mfn., Kkh 2 165,s;-
aor. 3 sg. acchadiyittha, Ps III 69,9 (tassa rajjaiTI
sanhiyojanubbedhena valikatha1ena acchadiyittha, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se avacchadiyittha); - pp (a) ehanna 2 , mfn.
and n. [ts], l. (mfn.) covered, covered over; roofed;
concealed; secret; Abh 353; 748; 834; V in ll 68,2 (-a
hoti apatti); S I 9,1 * (-o ka1o na dissati); Sn 18 (-a ku~i
ahito gini; Pj TI 28,23: -a ti ti!)apa!)!)acchadanehi
anovassaka kata, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anovassakata); Th 1
(-a me ku~ika); Ja IV 58,II* (mittariipena bahavo -a);
V 270,12* (asanto rajasa -a); VI 214,8* (na bujjhat!
oghapatham va -am); Nidd I 24,4 (bahukehi ki1esehi
-o); Sp 1072,17 (pañcann~ chadananaiTI aññatarena
-a~T~ ... senasanaiTI); - ifc se e cü!aka- (sv cullaka); -
--paribbajaka, m., a clothed wandering ascetic;
Sp 974,23 (Sañjayassa --paribbajakassa); Spk III 81 ,5;-
see also gahanacchannata (sv gahana2); - neg.
acchanna, achanna, mfn., Vin IV 17,19; Sp 745,3!
(bahutaraiTI ~hanaiTI -~ appaiTI acchannaiTI); 1174,11
(apatti pana acchanna hoti); Th-a I 134,5 (acchannasu
ku~ikasu); - 2. (n.) what is covered or roofed; a
covered place, a roofed place; Vin II 240,24* (-am
ativassati viva~aiTI nativassati) quoted Nett 153,!*;
V in IV 220,21 (chabbaggiya bhikkhuniyo .. . -a~T~ pi
anupavisanti); M II 8,22 (mama savaka rukkhaJTiülika
abbhokasika agha mase-~ na upenti); Vism 74,2 (-~
patikkhipami rukkhamülikari.g~ samadiyami ti); Spk II
181 ,2s (mayaiTI -e vas ama so abbhokasaJTihi yeva
vasati); - neg. acchanna, achanna, n., what is not
covered; an uncovered place, a roofless place;
Pet 204,II; Ps ll 215,35 (abbhokasan ti acchannaiTI); -
ducchanna, mfn., badly covered; with a poor roof; A I
261,3o; Dhp 13 (agaraiTI ducchannaiTI vughi
samativijjhati) = Th 133; Sp 785,14;- succhanna, mfn.,
well covered; well roofed; A I 262,13; Dhp 14 (agaraiTI
succhannaiTI) = Th 134; - pp (b) ehadita, mfn. [ts],
covered, covered over; concealed, disguised; Abh 748;
Ja IV 304,s• (nanarattehi vatthehi vimanaiTI bhavati
-am); VI 437,22* (vaitka~T~ maiTlsena -a~T~. Be, Ce, Se so;
E e vaitkamaiTlsena); Ap 18,22 (catuvlsasahassehi -a~T~
hoti ambara~T~); Sp 1191,2 (--tta); Sv 150,12 (pabbata-
kü~ena cando -o); Th-a I 134,26 (ti!)adlhi -a ayarr me
ku~ika); Mhv 14:47;- neg. acchadita2, mfn., Sp 1174,9;
- fpp (a) ehiidetabba, mfn., V in TI 211,30 (sace viharo
chiideti
ovassati sace ussahati -o); S II 217 ,1s (avuso nagaJY! ...
talapattikaya -aq1 maññeyya); Sv 935,s
(vatthacchadiyan ti vatthena -aJT~ vatthaguyhaq1);
(b) chadiya3, mfn., - ifc see vattha- (sv vattha\ -
caus. pr. 3 sg. chadapeti, Vin IV 47,6foll. (viharaJY!
punappunaq1 -eti ... -essati); Sp 785,15 (punappunaq1
-etuq1 labbhati); - aor. 3 sg. chadapesi, Dhp-a IV
203,11 (gandhaku(iqi karetva ... -esi); Kkh 2 164,9;-
absol. (a) chadapetva, Sv 474,33 (khadirapakaraJY!
karetva kilañjehi -etva); Mhv 1:39; (b) chadapetvana,
Mhv 25:100.
chadeti 2, chadayate, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. chadayati,
chandayati], l. seems good (to, dat., sometimes acc.),
pleases, is enjoyable (esp. of food); Vin ll 137,32
(bhattaqi assa na -eti; Sp 1213,29: na -etl ti na ruccati);
D I 72,6 (puriso abadhiko assa . . . bhattaJY! e' assa na
-eyya); S II 110,7 (pivato hi kho taJY! -essati Yal)l)ena pi
gandhena pi rasena pi); A III 396,1 (purisaq1 pal)lta-
bhojanaqi bhuttaviqi abhidosikaqi bhojanaqi na -eyya);
Ja III 144,25* (katham samakanlviiraqi a!Ol)aqi -ayanti
tam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nadayanti; 145,1·: -ayantl ti
-ayati pll)eti toseti, gathabandhasukhatthaq1 pana
anunasiko kato); Sadd544,1sfoll. (chad! icchayaq1: ...
purisassa bhattaq1 -eti -ayati, ruccatl ti attho, purisassa
bhattaJY! -ayamanaq1 tiHhati -entaq1 va); - part.pr.
(a) chadenta2, mfn., Mi1238,1 (puriso yavadatthaqi
bhojanaq1 bhuñjeyya -entaqi) quoted Ps IV 119,22;
Sadd 544,21; neg. acchadenta, mfn., Pj II 97,22
(missakabhattaqi . . . kumaro acchadentaJY! pi ...
jighacchavasena bhuñjamano); (b) chadayamana2, mfn.,
Vibh-a 14,27 (sukhaq1 hi uppajjamanaq1 sakala-
sañraqi ... -ayamanaq1; or to chadeti 1 ?); Sadd 544,2o;
- 2. gratifies, pleases; Th! 409 (-emi u panay ami ca
demi yaq1 yassa pa(iliipaqi; Th!-a 246,4: -eml ti
upacchademi); - aor. 3 sg. chadesi, acchadesi 3, DI
72,11 (bhattaqi ca me na -esi); IIl 85,21 (tassa
rasapa\haviqi anguliya sayato acchadesi); Ja V 463,1
(ekamacchaqi khadi tassa taq1 maJY!SaJT! -esi);
1 sg. chadayim, Ap 466,6 (tathagataJY! ... dussehi -ayiq1
tada; or to chadeti 1 ?); - pp channa 3 , mfn., suitable;
fitting; Abh 834; V in Il 79,1 (idaq1 bhante na -aq1 na
pa(irüpaJY!); III 135,9 foil. (kumarika ... dakkha analasa,
-a sa kumarika imassa kumarakassa ti; Sp 552,28: -a ti
anucchavika); D I 91,5 (tayidaq1 ... na -aJT~ tayidaq1 na
pa(irüpaJY! yad ime Sakya ... na brahmal)e garukaronti);
Pv 24:14 (n' etaq1 -aJY~; Pv-a l59,5foll.: na etaqi
yuttaJY!); Ja III 315,22* (tvaq1 yeva mal)ina -o, Be, Ce, Se
so: Ee mal)ino; 315,24': mal)ina ti mal)ino, ayam eva va
pa(ho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mal)ino ti mal)ina); V 307,25*
1 madisassa na taJY! -aqi yo 'haqi a¡ariko bhave);
\'I 572,2* (tvaq1 yeva Maddiya -o Madd! ca patina saha;
572.s·: -o ti anurüpo); Nidd I 132,19;- see also Vchand,
.::hadati.
chapa. m., chapl,.f [S. sava, m.], the young of an animal;
,; chick Abh 251; Vin II 161,27 (yadahaq1 ... -o homi);
J.i \'I 559,10' (chakall va migl -aq1 .. . ohaya putte
::.lkkhamiq1); Th-a I 230,9 (eka migl vijayitva tarul)aqi
-am rakkhantl); - ifc see bhinka-, mal)<;lüka-, hatthi-
'· hatthi[n]).
dlapaka. m., chapika, .f [S. savaka, m.], the young of an
187 chiirikii
animal; a chick; Ja III 268,2o (amhakaq1 al)<;!akani ca -e
ca olokeyyasl ti); Mil402,12 (yatha maharaja pel)ahika
sakapatimhi usüyaya -e na posayati); Nidd-a I 292,3
(tarul)ako ti -o); - ifc see kukkuta- (sv kukkuta\
makka(a-.
chaya, .f [ts], l. (i) shade; shadow; Abh 953 (-a tu
atapabhave); Vin III 202,11 (yaq1 majjhantike kale
samanta -a pharati); M li 235,15 (yaq1 -a jahati taJY!
atapo pharati); III 164,29 (mahantanaq1 pabbatakütanaqi
-a sayal)hasamayaJY! pa(haviya olambanti); A II 198,35
(thül)aqi pa(icca -a paññayati); Dhp 2 (tato naq1 sukham
anveti -a va anapayinl); Pv 31 :5 (-aq1 u pemi Ul)hesu );
Ja IV 29,23 (tadisassa s!lavato -a mayhaJY! sukha ti);
428,4* (kacci ara amitta te -a dakkhil)ato-r-iva; 428,18':
yatha nama dakkhil)adisabhimukha -a na va<;l<;Ihati evaJY!
kacci te amitta na va<;l<;lhant! ti); V 34,14 (yakkhiinaJY! ...
-a na paññayati); Pa(is I 144,24 (añño rukkho añña -a);
Ap 199,5 (-a na jahi taq1 muniq1, so read with Be, Ce,
Se; Ee chayay' na jahitaq1 muniq1); 442,6 (tll)i
pupphani ... -aq1 kubbanti satthuno ); Mhv 30:38 (s!taya
-aya); - ifc see kabara-, pacchima-;- (ii) the shadow
(eg of a measuring-stick) measuring the time; the length
of shadow (at the time of a bhikkhu 's upasampada);
Vin I 95,36 (-a metabba utuppamiil)aqi acikkhitabbam;
Sp 1033,28: ekaporisa va dviporisa va ti -a metabba);
II 300,31 (kappati bhante dvangulaya -aya vltivattaya
vikale bhojanaq1 bhuñjitun ti); Sp 1034,2foll. (tvaq1 kiq1
labhasi ka te -a kiq1 utuppamanaq1 ko divasabhago ti ...
ayaq1 me -a ... ; Vmv [Be] II 138,26foll.: ettake
chayapamal)e ... maya upasampada laddha ti); 1253,18
(-aq1 pucchitva); - se e also talacchaya (sv tala\ -
2. (i) rejlected image; reflection; a counterpart of a real
form, an image; Abh953 (-a tu ... pa(ibimbe); Jai
462,4 (-aJY~ olokento cu¡aq1 disva); Mi1169,1 (na
maharaja bhagava guyhaq1 dassesi iddhiya pana -aq1
dassesl ti); 298,18 (adaso na sayaq1 kuhiñci gantva -aq1
vicinati napi añño koci -aq1 anetva adase aropeti);
Vism 112,9 (adasabhitt!su attano -aJT~ disva); Ps IIl
383,2o (so attano va -aq1 disva ñataka me agata ti
maññamano); As 144,14 (adase viya -a paññayati); -
(ii) a suspicion, possibility; semblance; what seems
like ... ; - ifc se e parajika-, vughana-; - 3. play of
light, lustre, light; Abh 953 (-a ... pabhaya); Sp 219,26
(ananucchavikam, tesaq1 chaviq1 -aq1 sundarabhavaq1
na anveti; Sp-\ [Be] II 22,14: -an ti tesaq1 pakasakaq1
obhasan ti attho ).
charatta, m. [cha2 + ratta2; cf S. ~a<;Iratra], (a period of) six
nights; -aq1, for six nights; Vin II 38,11 (sangho
Udayissa bhikkhuno ... -aq1 manattaJY! detu); III 186,15
(parivutthaparivasena bhikkhuna uttariq1 -aq1 bhikkhu-
manattaya patipajjitabbaqi; Sp 629,29: uttariq1 cha
rattiyo); III 264,3o (anapatti -aq1 vippavasati); -
0
iitirekaqt, ind.,for more than six nights; Sp 732,4 (-aq1
pi vippavasituq1 vanati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a pi, prob.
wr); - o• -üna, mfn., less six nights; A I 111,10 (ratha-
karo chahi masehi -ehi ekaJY! cakkaJY! ninhapesi); -
0
-paramaqi, ind., for six nights at the most; Vin III
263,24 (-aq1 tena bhikkhuna tena clvarena
vippavasitab baq1).
charika, chariya, .f [AMg chariyá, charia; BHS chayika,
chasita
chayika], ash; ashes; Abh 35; Vin I 210,s (gu~e pitthaf!l
pi -aq1 pi pakkhipanti ti); II 220,22joll. (yo pathamaqJ
jantagharaf!1 gacchati sace -a ussanna hoti -a
cha<!<fetabba); D Il 164,6 (jhayamanassa kho pana
bhagavato sarirassa yaf!l ah o si eh avi ti . . . tassa n' eva
-a paññayittha na masi sañran' eva avasissif!1su); Ja IV
88,3 (khadiraghatikaqJ jhapetva -aqJ nadiya
pakkhipif!1su); Cp 2:3:4 (yadi 'haq1 tassa pakuppeyyaq¡
khal).ena -aq¡ kare); Sp 854,27 (-aya asati sukkhadaruq¡
jhapetva -a gahetabba); Sv 384,2s (sunakho ...
uddhanantare -aya nipanno, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
charikaya); 601,25 (imaq¡ mahallakaf!l ... -aya sisaf!l
okirapetva niharapessami, Se so; Be, Ce omit sisam; Ee
wr carikaya okirapetva); Ps II 350,27 (-aya arigare
pidhaya); Mp 11 323,19 (kharan ti -aq1); Dhp-a I 256,7
(bala dummedhino jana -aya e' eva gomayena ca
sañraq1 makkhetva); - 0 -khiira, m., potash; ? Spk JI
316,3o (use ti -e); As 243,!2 (usakharaiTI -aq¡ gomaya-
kharan ti tayo khare datva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee chariya-
kharaqJ); - niccharika, mfn., free from ash; Spk I
259,23 (-aq¡ guJapil).qaq¡).
chasita. mfn., see sv cha 2.
chiiha, se e sv cha2•
chi(d), mfn. [S. -chid], cutting; - ifc see kiitarigacchi(d)
(sv kiita 1) - see also chida 1.
chiggala, chigga!a, m.n. [?], a hale; Abh 650 ( -aqJ); S V
459,II' (in uddana: -ena); Spk III 302,16/oll. (pakkhitta-
yugassa hi chiggaJena);- ifc se e eka-, tala- (sv tala2).
chijja 1 , absol. of chindati qv.
chijja 2 , mfn.,fpp of chindati qv.
chijjati\ see sv chindati.
chijjati2, pass. pr. 3 sg. of chindati qv.
chijjana, n. ffrom chijjati 1 or chijjati 2], cutting, breaking;
being cut; Vism 136,21 (eko aticheko ... uppalapattaqJ
dvidha va chindati udake va paveseti, aparo accheko
0
-pavesanabhaya satthakena phusituf!l pi na visahati);
Sadd 480,26 (chidi -e: suttaf!l chijjati).
chijjanaka, mfn. ffrom chijjati 2], to be cut; breakable;
Sp 766,9 (-aqJ chijjatu bhijjanakaq1 bhijjatu carikamita-
tthiinaqJ dassessami ti sañcicca padehi akkamanto ); -
acchijjanaka, mfn., not to be cut or broken; Vv-a 212,22
(bandhanapasaq¡ thiraq¡ -aq¡ katva).
chida\ mfn. [S. -chid, -chida], cutting, cutting off; - (fe
see atthi-, karikha- (sv kaii.kha), tal).ha- (sv tal).ha), tan u-;
- see also chi(d).
chida2 , m. or n. [cf S. chida], cutting, cutting up;
Dhatum 140 (khaqi -e); 354 (khura -asmiq1).
chidda, mfn. and n. [S. chidra], l. (mfn.) having a hale or
hales; split; having gaps; defective; Vin I 289,36
(bhikkhuno antaravasako -o hoti); S IV 316,Io
(udakamaQ.iko -o); Ja I 73,7 (vughidharavegena pathavi
-a ahosi); 419,s (pattanaq¡ 0 -taya); II233,3• (evaq1 -aq¡
durabhibhavaq1 ko gharaq¡ patipajjati; 233,!3·: taya taya
parihaniya -aq¡); 345,11 (imaJ:!l thanaq¡ -af!l aviruJha-
rukkhaq¡); V 497,25' (-aq¡ te raghaq¡; 498,¡·: -an ti na
ghanavasaq1, tattha gamadinaJ:!l utthitatta savivaraq¡);
Patis I 43,29 (evariipani sllani khal).qani -ani sabalani
kammasani); Sp 877,Is (pado va bhijjati sisaq1 va -aq¡
hoti, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se bhinnaq1); Mp III
345,!4 (yassa pana [sllaq1] vemajjhe bhinnaq¡ tassa
188 chiddeti
0
-satako viya -aq¡ nama hoti); 388,2o (ial).l).Ukani pi
hatthatalani pi bhijjif!1su -ani ahesuf!1); Pj II 249,17
(susiran ti -aq1); - 2. (n., pl. acc. -ani, -e) a hale; a
split; an opening; a weak point; Abh 649 (vivaraqJ
-aq¡); 1013; Vin II 141,21 (majjhe -af!l katva); SI
43,!8' foll. (cha lokasmif!1 -ani yattha cittaq¡ na
tighati ... te -e sabbaso taf!l vivajjaye; Spk I l00,12foll.:
te -e ti tani cha -ani vivarani); A IV 54,II (kiq1 ...
brahmacariyassa khal).qaq¡ pi -aqJ pi sabalaq1 pi
kammasaq1 pi ti); Ja V 442,15 (siil).iya hatthappamiil).aqJ
-aiTI katva); Mil 94,!2 (acariyena antevasimhi ... -aqJ
disva adhivasetabbaf!1); Vism 174,32 (tena -ena dipa!oko
nikkhamitva bhittiyaqJ mal).qalaf!l karoti); Ps IV 145,15
(otaran ti vivaraq¡ -aq1); Mp I 369,10 (tasmiiTI tasmif!l
ghare -am eva paññayati ti); 442,9 (taqJ sappapotakaq¡
antovil).aya pakkhipitva -aq¡ pidahapesi); Vibh-a 500,19
(tunnakaro satakaf!1 pasaretva -am eva oloketi);
Mhv 10:8 (-ena pavisitva); - ifc se e aviñjana-, kal).l).a-,
kuñcika-. tala- (sv tala2), nasa- (sv nasa);
0
avachidda, mfn., full of hales; with large and small
hales; A IV 377,8 (puriso medakatha!ikaqJ parihareyya
-aqJ uggharantaq¡ paggharantaq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
chiddaq¡ vichiddaf!1; Mp IV 173,1: -an ti paritta-
mahantehi chiddehi samannagataq1, eds so); Jai 419,5
(sabbani pattani -an' eva ahesuf!1); Niddi 181,15
(sariraq¡ . . . -af!1); Vism 252,1 (mukhattaco -o kita-
kulavakasaQ.thano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee --kitakulavaka-
sal).thano ); Dhp-a I 122,11 (ducchannan ti virala-
cchannaJ:!l -af!1);- 0 -kari(n), mfn., making a split (in);
making defective; A II 187,26 (ayaq¡ ay asma khal).qakañ
-i ... sllesu); - 0 -Va(t), mfn., having a hale; defective;
Abh 915 ( 0 -Vante ca susiraq¡); M 1 272,1 (parisuddho no
kayasamacaro bhavissati uttano vivato na ca 0 -Va
saq1vuto ca); - acchidda, mfn., without hales; not
split; peifect, complete; Vin I 184,28 (selo pabbato -o
asusiro); II 248,22 (parisuddhen' amhi kayasamacarena
samannagato -ena); D Il 80,24 (silani akhal).qani
-ani ... ) i: Patis I 44,24; S IV 316,Io (udakamaQ.iko -o);
A IV 54,6 (akh31).4af!1 -aq¡ asabalaq¡ akammasaq¡
paripUI).l).aql parisuddhaq1 brahmacariyaf!1 carati ti);
Bv 13:27 (rukkho ghanakkhandho -o; Bv-a 207,9: -o ti
appacchiddo); Mil416,4* (chattaqJ vipulaf!l -aq¡); -
--kari(n), mfn., allowing no split (in); making perfect;
A II 187,31; - --gal).ana,f, counting in an unbroken
series; Ps II 56,!6 (gal).ana ti --gal).ana, Be, Ce so; Ee
acchinna-; Se gal).anaya ti --gal).anaya; Ps-t [Be] II 41,26:
-a ti ekaq1 dve ti adina navantavidhina nirantaragal).ana)
= Nidd-a JI 130,26; - --pathaka, m., (an accountant)
who counts in an unbroken series; Sv 157,19 (gal).aka ti
-a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se acchiddakapathaka); -
nicchidda, mfn., without defects; uninterrupted; Mp III
349,II (santharitun ti -aq¡ katuq¡ Sal).thapetuq¡,
pavattetun ti attho); Dhp-a I 239,3 (kayadihi saf!1yatassa
-assa); see also acchiddaka, uddhachiddaka
(sv uddham), sukhumacchiddaka.
chiddaka, ~. [chidda + ka2], a hale; - ifc see ja!a-
(sv jala1).
chiddeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. chidrayati], peiforates,
pierces (the ear); Sadd 543,22 (chidda kal).l).abhede: -eti
-ayati chiddaf!1); - pp chiddita, mfn. [S. chidrita],
chindati
peiforated; Abh 748.
ehindati, ehijjati\ pr. 3 sg. (a) ehindati [S. chinatti],
Dhatup 382 (chida dvedhakara1_1.e); Dhatum 615;
Sadd 472,13 (chidi dvedhakara~_~.e: -atí ti chedako);
l. cuts; chops; cuts off; cuts out; inscribes; Vin I 83,1
(puttapem~ bhante chavi111 -ati); III 76,17 (lekh~
-ati); DI 56,32 (yo pi ti1_1.hena satthena sísa111 -ati); SI
39,24* (sabba111 -ati bandhan~); II 88,7 (so ta111
rukkha111 müle -eyya); Sn 657 (purisassa . . . kuthañ
jayate mukhe yaya -ati attan~); Vv 6:1 (padm~ -asi
pa1_1.ina); Pv 38:27 (parassa -ate sir~); Ja II 120,17*
(imissa ... jívantiya -atha ka1_1.1_1.anas~); 253,21 (ek~
tanti111 -a ti); VI 493,14* (n' eva dana viramissa111
kam~ -antu sattadha); Nidd I 403,16 (hatth~ pi -ati
pad~ pi -ati); - 2. cuts down, destroys; cuts out,
removes; Vin III 85,32 (rukkha111 -anti); A I 153,23
(mahacoro sandhi111 pi -ati); Dhp 283 (van~ -atha ma
rukkh~); Vv 53:5 ( -ati ra111si pabhaiJ.karassa ... abha;
V v-a 236,12: -ati ti vicchindati, pavattitu111 adento
patihanati ti attho); Th 15 (pañca -e pañca jahe); Ja IV
269,3o* (as~ na -eyya sukhagamaya); Ap 551,16
(kaiJ.kh~ -ahi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kaiJ.kha); 585,4
(kaiJ.kha111 -assu sasane); Ps V 12,18 (upacchedaka-
kammal11 agantva ayu111 -ati); Mhv 25:63 (-am' eta111
sapha1akal11);- 3. crosses (water); SI 49,8* (-a sota111
parakkamma) Dhp 383; Vism 690,36 (nava ...
orimatira111 pajahati sota111 -ati bha~_~.<;l~ vahati parim~
tlr~ appeti); - fut. 3 sg. (a) checchati [S. chetsyati],
Dhp 350 (esa cchecchati Marabandhan~); Th 761;
Ja III 209,2* (so te mammani checchati); (b) chejjati,
Spk III 127,21 (avijja111 chejjati ti, Ee so, prob. wr; Ce
checchati ti; Be, Se bhindissati ti; ad S V 10,26: Be, Ee,
Se bhindissati; Ce bhecchati); (e) chindissati, Ja II 252,21
(Musilo pi tanti111 -issati); 2 sg. (a) checchasi, Ja VI
453,22* (sace me hatthapade ca kaJ_11_1.anasa111 ca
checchasi); (b) chejjasi [wr influenced by chijj- forms ?],
Spk I 227,18* (sace me aiJ.gamaiJ.gani kam~ chejjasi
brahmaJ_la, eds so); 1 sg. (a) checch~, Ja III 500,23*
(checch~ raga111 sabandhan~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
chejj~; 501,4·: rag~ -issami ti); VI 51,17*
(kadah~ ... kamas~yojane checch~); (b) chejjami
[wr influenced by chijj- forms ?], Spk I 227,12* (ka!Iram
iva chejjami, eds so); (e) chindissami, Ja V 359,4;
Ap 305,6 (-issam' ettha sa111saya111); - part.pr.
(a) chinda(t), mfn., Vin V 119,19* (in uddana: -~); DI
52,22 (-ato chedapayato; Sv 159,16: pares~ hatthadini
-antassa); MI 404,24; (b) chindanta, mf( -anti)n., Vin III
89,28 (ahi1_1.<;lissami hananto ghatento -anto chedapento);
Sp 870,4 (bhabbapuggalana111 as~ -anto); Mp I 362,15
1Dhammadinna khaggena uppa1ana1e -antl viya); 423,17
1sakatacakk~ -anta111 gamissati ti, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
bhindant~); Th-a II 32,2 (vegena sota111 -anto); -
chindante in Ce, Ee at Ps III 448,22 is wr for chijjante
1Be, Se so); (e) chindamana, mfn., Ja I 70,16 (sa sota111
-amana nadimajjh~ gantva); II 209,18' (kakana111 sisani
-amano); Ps II 267,4 (mata ... urena udaka111 -amana
gacchati); - aor. 3 sg. (a) acchecchi [S. acchaitsit], M I
12A (acchecchi tai_lh~ vivattayi s~yojan~) f. S IV
205.17 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se acchejji) f. A I 134,6 (Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se acchejji); SI 12,11* (acchecchi ta1_1.h~ idha
189 chindati
namarüpe, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se acchejji; Spk I 46,24:
acchecchí ti chindi) = Sn 355 = Th 1275; Ud 75,5*
(acchecchi vatta111, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se acchijji);
(b) acchejji [wr influenced by chijj- forms ?], S IV
205,17 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce acchecchi) f. A I 134,6 (Se so;
Be, Ce, Ee acchecchi) f. It 47,10 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
acchecchi); (e) acchida, Sn 357 (acchida maccuno
jal~; = Th 1277: Be, Ce, Ee acchecchi; Se pacchinda);
Ja III 124,17*; (d) acchidam, M II 35,18 (acchidam
1
bhagava kath~); (e)chincÍi , Vinii 110,23; Ap29;2
(vimati111 -i piil_lina111); Mp II 208,1; (f) acchindi2,
Dhp 351 (acchindi bhavasallani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
acchidda, wr ?; Dhp-a IV 70,18: sabbani pi bhavagamini
sallani acchecchi, Ce, Ee so; Be acchindi; Se acchejji;
perhaps to acchindati qv); Mhv 5:240 (acchindi asina
sisa111); 2 sg. (a) acchecchi, Ja VI 261,14' (tv~ ...
acchecchi dhíro vicikicchitani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
accheccha; 261 ,20': tvam dhiro amhakam vicikicchitani
2
-i, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ~hinda); (b) chimÍi , Vin IV 34,8
(ma ... mayh~ bhavana111 -I ti); 1 sg. chindi111, Pj II
41,27; 3 pl. (a) acchecchu111, Ja VI 502,17* (acchecchu111
vata bho rukkh~; quoted Sadd 342,2: acchocchu111);
(b) acchidu111, SI 35,w; (e) chindi111su, Vin V 15,3;
Ja VI 504,21·; - perf 3 sg. ciccheda [ts], Sadd 826,12
(abbhasagatanarp. dutiyacatutthan~ pathamatatiya honti
ciccheda bubhukkhati babhüva dadhati);
inf (a) chettu111, chetu111 [S. chettum], Sn 28 (chettu111);
Th 408 (dhamani111 chettum attano); 1121 (müle taru111
chettu tam eva icchasi, me); Ja IV 208,23* (ki111 daru111
chetum icchasi); Sp 1103,21 (kese chettu111, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce chedetu111); (b) chinditu111, Vin I 206,3; Th-a II
173,35; - absol. (a) chetva, Vin I 83,1 (chavirp. chetva
camm~ chindati); MI 225,27 (gaiJ.gaya sota111 chetva);
SI 19,24* (chetva vadhitva atha socayitva, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se ghatva); 41,16* (ki111su chetva sukha111 seti, Be, Ee so;
Ce jhatva; Se ghatva); Dhp 283 (chetva van~ ca
vanath~ ca nibbana hotha bhikkhavo ); Sn 29
(usabho-r-iva chetva bandhanani, me); Th 298; Ja V
158,s• (chetva dandhaparakkam~); Ap 111,6;
Vism 523,18; Mhv 28:24;- chetva in Ce, E e at Th 1263
is prob. wr for chetta (Be, Se so);- neg. acchetva, M 1
434,3o (tac~ acchetva pheggu111 acchetva saracchedo
bhavissati ti); Sp 315,27 (atha mül~ acchetva va1ay~
ito e' ito ca sareti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits);
(b) chetvana, SI 77,18*; A III 347,4* (sabba111 chetvana
bandhan~); Sn 44; Ja V 53,13* (chetvana dantani
gajuttamassa); Ap 24,5 (yatha saratthiko poso kada1il11
chetvana pha1aye, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chetva); 206,5;
(e) chejja 1, Ap 11,33 (anissito chejja sinehados~, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee chetva snehapados~; = Sn 66: Ce, Ee, Se
chetva; Be chetva); (d) chinditva, Vin IV 299,2s;
V 176,23; DI 224,14 (puriil_l~ bandhan~ -itva); Nidd I
123,14 (sabb~ gharavasapalibodh~ -itva); Ap 364,17
(s~sarasot~ -itva); Mhv 35:36; - neg. acchinditva ,
2
Ja II 155,6 (vissas~ acchinditva); Vism 36,14; Sp 340,27
(tasmi111 khile nama111 chinditva va acchinditva va);
(e) chinditvana, Mp III 373,13 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -itva);
Ap-a 326,21 (chetvana -itvana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
bhinditvana); (f) chindiya, Thi 480 (kese khaggena
-iya); Ja VI 548,7* (1at~ dantehi -iya); Sadd 857,19;
chindati
(g) chijja 1, Sadd 857,19; - pr. 3 sg. (b) ehiijati 1 [quasi
4th class, in form identical with pass.; the meanings
overlap], (intrans.) breaks, breaks off; dries up, comes
to an end; Dhatup 406 (chida dvedhakaraJ.le);
Dhatum 640; V in II 271,8 (suttaka¡p. -ati); D III 21,23 (ta
varatta -era¡p., Ce, Ee so; Se -eru¡p.; Be -eyyu¡p.;
Sv 826,34: -eran ti -eyyu¡p., Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -eyyun ti
chindeyyurp); Ja III 289,11 * (yassa gandho na kadaci
-ati); Sp 1126,27 (yava rajabindu ga1ita¡p. na -ati); Mp V
89,2 (gunna¡p. khlra¡p. -ati); Sadd472,16foll. (ida¡p. pana
bhidichididvaya¡p. divadigaJ.la¡p. patva bhijjati -atl ti
suddhakattuvacaka¡p. riipadvaya¡p. janeti); 480,26 (chidi
chijjane: sutta¡p. -ati);- aor. 3 sg. (a) chijji 1, Ja I 329,27
(JetavanapokkharaJ.~iya pi udaka¡p. -i); III 289,18
(dhuttana¡p. suramado -i); (b) chijjatha, Th 1055 (angul!
p' ettha -atha) quoted Mil 395,12*; (e) chijjittha,
Sv 822,1 (nesa¡p. valH -ittha); Cp-a 237,6 (tasmi¡p. sare
udakam khlyittha -ittha); 3 pi. chijjimsu, Ps IV 186,16;
Bv-a 79,30* (-imsu sabbattha ca bandhanani, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e wr chijJa¡p.su); - absol. chijjitva 1, Ja I 167,27
(eka pasaJ.lasakalika -itva); Sp 92,21 (mahabodhissa
dakkhiJ.lasakha sayam eva -1tva suvaJ.lJ.lakatahe
patiqhatii ti);- pass. (a) pr. 3 sg. ehijjati2 , is cut, is cut
ojj; is cut down; is destroyed; is brought to an end;
V in V 177 ,36* (katamo palibodho pathama¡p. -ati); M I
344,8 (ettaka rukkha -antu yiipatthaya); SI 13,25* (sa
-ate jata: intrans.? Spk I 50,29: nibbana¡p. agamma -ati,
nirujjhat! ti); It 70,23' (sa¡p.sagga vanatho jato
asarpsaggena -ati); Th 75 (kankha -ati); Ja III 181,13*
(baha -anti); Mil40,15 (hatthapada -antl ti); Sp 859,4
(yatha sañcaro -ati evam ruddha hoti); Sv 660,2o
(mahajanassa kailkha -issati); Ps II 252,13 (atto ... raja-
vacanen' eva -ati); III 140,15 (rukkhe -amane sah' eva
-eyya);- part.pr. (a) chijjanta, mfn., Ja IV 156,16; Ps II
206,32 (asina sise -ante pi dve katha na katheti) t
III 448,22 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr chindante);
(b)chijjamana,mfn., Viniii 48,27; SIV 344,11
(dissati .. . ekacco. .. slsa¡p. -amano); Ja VI 250,23*
(vedhami rukkho viya -aman o): Ap 417,29 (kesesu
-amanesu arahatta¡p. apapuJ.li¡p.); neg.
acchijjamana, mfn., Sp 32,5* (para¡p.paraya vinaya¡p. ...
acchijjamana¡p. anesurp); 340,10;- aor. 3 sg. (a) chijji 2,
Ja I 455,15 (nasika asidharaya patihata dvidha chijji);
V 359,5; Mhv 22:57; (b) chindi 3, Ja II 358,8* (etha
vyaggha nivattavho ... ma vanarp chindi nivyaggha¡p.;
cf358,13'foll.: amhaka¡p. vanasaJ.lqa¡p. ... manussa m a
chindi¡p.su); - absol. chijjitva2, Ja V 73,16' (maha-
camma¡p. -itva olambi); Ps II 421,21 (kuthariya pahata¡p.
viy' assa ayu tatth' eva -itva gatan ti); It-a II 66,26; -
pass. (b) aor. 3 sg. chijjiyittha, Ja I 458,1 (khipitena nasa
chijjiyittha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be chijjlyittha); -
pass. (e) pr. 3 sg. chindlyati, Sadd 472,14 (chindlyatl ti
chinno); - pp (a) ehinna, mfn. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.)
having broken; dried up; come to un end; Vin IV 339,31
(suttake -e); Sp 88,12 (udaka¡p. -a¡p. hoti); Ps II 50,12
(lohite -e ma¡p.se mi1ate);- ifc see cakka-;- 2. (mfn.
and n.) cut; cut off; cut away; cut down; destroyed;
cutting; Vin I 189,11 (tani talatarunani -ani milayanti);
MI 227,12* (-a¡p. papimato sota¡p.); Th 775 (-a pasa
migavassa); Ja II 114,22* (-a pi ji ya sandhiyyate puna);
190 chindati
IV 156,13* (sukham nu khaJ.lqaso -arp ... khaJ.~qaso -am
icchasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chinda¡p.); 396,26* (na]o -o va
sussati); VI 99,14' (maraJ.lacakkena -o); Ap 309,9 (tanha-
sallassa --tta); 480,21 (kesesu chijjamanesu diqhi -a
samiilika, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr chinnasamiilika); Kv 90,7
(atthi -assa chediyan ti); Mil 288,5 (dasa pi bandhanani
bodhisattassa -ani); Sp 260,s (asakyaputtiyo paribhaqho
-o parajito sasanato ); Ps III 334,2 (sobbhe ti samantato
-e); Spk II 180,15 (dasana¡p. --kalato paqhaya pilotika ti
vuccati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dasacchinnakalato); Mp II
320,2 (avijjamiilassa --kalo); - ifc see akkha-
(sv akkha 1), ailguli-, aqhi-, aja-, amaka-, kaJ.lqara-
(sv kaJ.lgara), kaJ.lJ.la-, java-, nasa- (sv nasa), netti-
(svnetti1), pada-, sisa-, hattha-;- -'-atumo in Ee at
Pv-a 258,15* and 259,29 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se and
Pv 40:2: chinnathamo; but cf O. van Hinüber, 1994,
p. 166; - --iriyapatha, -'-iriyapatha, mfn., whose
movement is destroyed, who is unable to move; a
cripple; Abh 319; Vin I 91,14 (-'-iriyapatha¡p.
pabbajenti);- --gandharp in Ee at SI 12,12* is wrfor
chinnagantha¡p. (Be, Ce, Se so);- --tata, m. and mfn., a
steep or sheer slope or bank; with a steep slope or bank;
Ja I 303,21 (-tate virii]hagacchaka¡p.); PsI 80,25 (sobbhan
ti sabbato --tata¡p. papatan ti ekato --tatarp); II 266,12
(parimarp tlra¡p. patva --tata¡p. e' eva kaJ.ltaka-
gumbagahana¡p. ca disva); Dhp-a II 219,16 (tassa hi
ekena passena manussa abhiruhanti eka¡p. passa¡p.
--tata¡p.); Nidd-a I 106,2o (samantato --tate narakavate
patito viya); - --patitaqhane in Ee at Sv 303,35 is prob.
wr for jiJ.lJ.la- (Be, Ce, Se so); - --papata, m. [but
cf S. prapatabhimukha], a steep cliff or precipice;
Vism 138,23 (puriso --papatabhimukho dhavanto ...
thaturp na sakkoti papate eva patati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
--tatabhimukho); - --papata¡p., --pata¡p., adv., falling
as if cut down; or with a sudden or steep fall; ?
headlong, precipitately; Vin II 284,15 ( ... kandanti
--papata¡p. papatanti avaganti ... , Ce, Ee so; Be
--patarp; Se --pada va patanti; cfSp-t [Be] III
447,wfoll.: chinnana¡p. pato viya --pato, tarp --patarp,
bhavanapurpsakaniddeso 'ya¡p.) t D II 140,5 (Ee so; Be,
Ce --pata¡p.; Se --pada¡p. viya; Sv 581,3foll.: majjhe
chinna viya hutva yato va tato va patanti) t Nidd-a I
75,4 (eds so) = Vibh-a 105,26 (eds so); Ja VI 303,11
(--ppapata¡p. patitva, Ce so; Be, E e, Se --pacta vi ya);-
--pilotika, mfn. [cf BHS chinnaplotika, -pilotika],
revealed, uncovered;? MI 141,22 (dhammo uttano
vivato pakasito --pilotiko; cfPs II 119,19 foll.); -
--bhabbhara, --babbhara, mfn., not making the sound
bharabhara;? M 1 128,22 (bi]arabhasta ... chinnasassara
--bhabbhara . . . aharp imarp bi]arabhastarp . . . kaqhena
va kathalena va . . . sarasararp karissami bharabhararp
karissaml ti, Be so; Ce, Ee --babbhara; Se --pabbhara;
Ps II 101,33: --bhabbhara ti --bhabbharasadda, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se --pabbhara ti --pabbharasadda); -
--miilaka, mfn., with its root(s) cut away; A II 147,31
(--miilako suttanto; Mp III 137,21: miilabhiitanarp
bhikkhiina¡p. upacchinnatta --mulako, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
ucchinnatta); Th 90 (pañcakkhandha pariññata tiqhanti
--miilaka); Sv 226,13 (-a rukkha viya);
--vatuma, mfn., who has brought the path to an end;
chindati
who has broken the cycle; D Il 8,5 (tathagato atlte
buddhe parinibbute chinnapapañce --varume ... jatito pi
anussarissati ... ; Sv 425,28: --varume ti ettha varuman ti
kusalakusalakammavaqalp vuccati) f. M III 118,17 f.
S IV 52,27 (Spk Il 370,28: ta!)havatumass' eva chinnatta
--varume); - --vatumaka, m(jn)., (one) who has
brought the path to an end, who has broken the cycle;
Vism 410,31 (--varumakanussaral)adisu) = Sp 158,22
(Sp-r [Be] I 388,27 foll.: --varumaka sammasambuddha
--varumaka pana sabbe va anupadisesaya
nibbanadhatuya parinibbuta chinnasatr~saramaggatta);
Sv 410,9 (--varumakanussara!)aJTI); As 414,29 (atite
buddha maggatr~ bhavayitr~su phalatr~ sacchakaJTISU
nibbanadhatuya parinibbayitr~sü ti --vatumakanu-
ssara!)avasena maggaphalanibbanapaccavekkhal)ato ); -
--visa!)aka, mfn., with horns cut off; Spk IIl 223,15*
(usabho yatha --visa!)ako); - --sassara, mfn., not
making the sound sarasara;? MI 128,22 (bitarabhasta ...
--sassara chinnabhabbhara . . . ahaJTI imatr~
bilarabhastalp . . . kaqhena va karhalena va sarasaraJTI
karissami; Ps II 101,32: --sassara ti --sassarasadda); -
--sota, mfn. [chinna + sota2], who has crossed or cut off
the stream, who has brought the jlow tu an end; Sn 715
(--sotassa bhikkhuno; Pj II 498,10: ki1esasotacchedena
--sotassa); 948 (--soto abandhano; Nidd I 433,18: sota
vuccati ta!)ha .. . yass' esa sota tal) ha pahina .. . so
vuccati --soto); Ud 76,27* (Ud-a 370,19: chattitr~satiya
sotanaJTI anavasesato pahinatta --soto nama hoti); -
neg. acchinna2, mfn., not cut, not cut off; not stopped or
dried up; continuous, uninterrupted; V in 1 50,11 (na ca
acchinne theve pakkamitabbatr~: Sp 981,nfoll.: yadi
appamattakalp pi rajanaJTI ga1ati); III 51,21 (dantapo!)atr~
nama chinnalp va acchinnaJTI va); Ja Il 78,7* (atthi
rukkhassa acchinnatr~ khajjatatr~ yeva ti!)c;iukatr~: 78,1o-:
imassa rukkhassa phalanaJTI akac;lc;lhanaparikac;lc;lhana-
vasena acchinnalp bahutr~ rhanatr~ atthi, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se acchinnabahukaratr~ atthi); Kv 243,17; Vism413,19
(acchinnassa ca chedanato); Sp 768,13 (acchinnatta);
It-al 107,s (satr~yojanani acchinnani); Th-al 231,5
(ta!)hasail.gassa acchinnataya); - acchinnagal)ana,f,
counting in an unbroken series; Ps 11 56,16 (ga!)ana ti
acchinnaga!)ana, Ee so; Be, Ce acchidda-; Se ga!)anaya ti
acchiddaga!)anaya; = Nidd-a JI 130,26: eds acchidda-);
Sadd 803,8 (ga!)ana ti acchinnagal)ana, ekatr~ dve ti
adina navantavidhina nirantaragai:~ana ti attho; f.
Ps-r [Be] II 41,26: acchiddagai:~ana); acchinna-
dasika, mfn. [acchinna + dasika 1], with the ends (uf the
robe-material) uncut; Vin 1 311 ,8* (in uddana: --dasika;
cf306,25: acchinnadasani civarani); acchinna-
dhara, mfn. [from acchinna + dhara 1], with an unbroken
stream or jlow; Ja II 269,1o (acchinnadhare deve
vassante) f. Ili 73,12; Nidd I 42,2s* (yatha ninna
pavattanti chandena parii:~iimita acchinnadhara vattanti
sa]ayatanapaccaya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se acchinnavara,
prob. wr); Ps V 58,6 (acchinnadharatr~ katva akasa-
gail.gaJTI otarento viya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee avicchinna-
1
varatr~): - acchinnadhara,f [acchinna + dhara ], an
unbroken stream or jlow; Ja I 330,21 (devo acchinna-
dharatr~ vassanto; or adv. tu acchinnadhara, raining with
an unbroken stream ?); - acchinnasota, mfn. [acchinna
191 chindati
+ sota 1], having a continuous, unbroken flow;
Ud-a 370,18 (pakatirathassa hi sukhavattanatthalp
akkhasisesu nabhiyaJT~ ca upalittanatr~ sappite1adinaJTI
soto savanam sandanaJTI hoti, tena so acchinnasoto nama
hoti); - succhinna, mfn., well cut; properly cut;
Sp 1094,3;- pp (b) ehindita, mfn. and n. l. (mfn.) cut,
cut off; Ps III 162,7 (ekatr~ pattatr~ pi .. . -alp va
khai:~c;!italp va nahosi);- 2. (n.) cutting; SI 66,6* (idha
chinditamarite hatajanisu Kassapo na papaJTI
samanupassati; Spk I 126,18: --marite ti -e ca marite
ca);- (e) chijjita, mfn., cut, cut down; Ja III 389,17* (so
mato seti allapiilkatr~ va chijjito, Ce, Ee so; Be vacchito;
Se vicchito; 389,2! ,: chijjito ti chinno, Ce, Ee so; Be
vacchito ti; Se vicchito ti vicchinno);
fpp (a) eheija 2 , mfn. and n. l. (mfn.) [S. chedya], (i) to
be cut; to be cut o.ff; Ja VI 536,31* (-a indivara; 537,1w:
SUVai:~I:~a-indlvara munhina chinditabba); Mil83,27
(ussahati -alp chinditun ti); Ps V 97,1 (kuthañ ... -alp
chindati); - (ii) leading tu the cutting off; leading tu
cutting off (from the sail.gha);? Sp 905,15 (kayasalpsaggo
methunadhammassa pubbabhagatta paccayo hoti iti -a
siya methunadhammapaccaya ti ettha imina pariyayena
attho veditabbo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -atr~: (or chejja,f ?)
quoting Vin V 218,35*: eds -aJT~); - ifc see slsa-
(sv sisa\ - 2. (n.) cutting; cutting off; cutting off uf
hands etc; cutting off' from the sail.gha; V in V 218,22
(salakaJTI dentassa hoti -atr~; Sp 1393,28: salakatr~ pan'
assa dentassa hoti -atr~ parajikaJTI hoti); 218,35* (-am
stya methunadhammapaccaya; Sp 1394,6joll.: stya
methunadhammapaccaya parajikan ti); Sp 1388,13
(navasu janesu yo salakatr~ gahetva sail.gham bhindati
tass' eva -alp hoti Devadatto vi ya parajikatr~ apajjati);
Spk I 61,5 (-atr~ va hotu marai:latr~ va);
1
--gami(n), mfn. [chejja + gami(n) ], leading tu cutting
off from the sailgha; Sv 100,28 (ayaJTI apatti ayaJTI
anapatti ayaJTI --gamini ayaJTI vuqhanagamini); -
--bhejja, n., cutting and breaking; physical punishment;
Vin III 4 7,2 (y e va pana --bhejjaJTI anusasanti); Ps III
415,2o; Thi-a 63,25 (satta kamehi --bhejjalp papui:~anti);
- --vatthu, n. [chejja + vatthu1], a ground for cutting
off (someone) from the sailgha; V in III 109,29* (in
uddana: methunadinnadiinaJTI ca manussaviggahuttari
parajikani cattari --vatthu asaJTlsaya); V 216,29*
2
(apajjeyya garukatr~ --vatthutr~);- neg. acchejja , mfn.,
not tu be cut, not to be destroyed; Ja VI 226,10* (satt'
ime sassata kaya acchejja avikopino ); Mp II 196,14
(arahattamaggañai:~ena acchejjanatr~ ki1esiinaJTI
natthibhavo); (b) chediya, mfn., Kv 90,13* (chinnassa
chediyaJTI natthi); - ducchediya, mfn., hard tu cut;
Ja IV 483,13' (tatr~ bandhanatr~ ducchediyaJTI hoti, Ce, Ee
2
so; Be, Se ducchedaniyatr~): (e) chijja , mfn., Ps IV 162,1
(chijjesu pharasu viya kammaghane manasikaro vahati);
ducchijja, mfn., hard to cut; Ps III 166,18;
(d) chetabba, chettabba, mfn. [S. chettavya] Vin II 110,24
(aññamhi ... chetabbamhi aññaJTI chindi, Be, Ee so; Ce
chettabbamhi; Se chinditabbamhi); Mi1293,22 (so
dal)c;liiraho vadhitabbo chettabbo bhettabbo, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se chedetabbo); Vism 413,18 (chinnassa puna
chetabbabhavato, Be, Ee so; Ce chedetabb-; Se
cheditabb-) = Patis-a 366,28 (eds chettabbabhavato );
chindana
(e) chinditabba, mfn., Mil86,14 (yarp kiñci
chinditabbarp); Vism 122,27 (d!ghani kesanakhalomani
chinditabbani); Spk I 254,13 (chinditabbarp) = Pj II
148,29 (Be, Se so; Ce chettabbarp; Ee chetabbarp);
(f) chedan!ya, mfn., Pet 217,10 (yarp tattha chedan!yarp
ayarp nirodho, eds so, perhaps wr; Ñtil}amoli, 1979,
p. 292 would read yarp ta1,1hachedanarp);
(g) *chindiya; - ifc see ducchindiya; - caus. (a)
pr. 3 sg. chedeti, -ayati, cuts, cuts off; causes to cut off,
Ja III 179,17* (hatthe me deva -ehi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-ahi, me?); IV 372,7* (na chindami na -aye); V 448,21*
(chindeyyurp pi -ayeyyurp , Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
chedapeyyurp pi); VI 199,17* (-ayissami te sirarp;
199,24': -ayissam! ti chindissami); Sadd 543,3o (cheda
dvedhakarUI,~e: . . . -eti -ayati); - aor. 3 sg. chedayi,
achedayi, Ja III 42,6* (yo te hatthe ... -ayi); V 144,3 (yo
khUI,l~aso pabbajitarp achedayi); Mhv 35:43 (achedayi);
36:43 (-ayi); 1 sg. chedesirp, Ap-a 280,6 (chindirp
-esirp); - absol. chedetva, Th 512 (kesamassüni -etva
pabbajirp anagariyarp); - fpp (a) chedetabba, mfn.,
Vin I 50,15 (na ekaccassa kesa -etabba, Be, Se so; Ee wr
chedatabba; Ce patiggahetabba); 74,9 (upajjhayassa ...
s!sarp -etabbarp); (b) cheditabba, mfn., Kv 622,12
(sandhi -itabba, Ee so; Be, Se -itabbo); - caus. (b)
pr. 3 sg. chedapeti, -ayati, Vin II 134,19/all. (cha-
bbaggiya bhikkhü kattarikaya kese -en ti ... yo -eyya);
III 155,34 (-essanti); IV 34,28 (tumhe .. . rukkharp
chindatha -etha pi ti); Ja V 439,6 (slsarp assa -ehi ti);
Mil 193,11 foil. (hattharp pi 'ssa bhante -eyyama, padarp
pi -eyyama, yava s!sarp kajlracchejjarp -eyyama, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se chindapeyyama); Sp 762,23 (sayarp va
chindati aññena va -eti); Mhv 35:42 (-aya);- part.pr.
(a) chedapaya(t), mfn., DI 52,22 (chindato -ayato);
(b) chedapenta, mfn., Vin III 89,3o (chindanto -ento);
MI 404,3o; - aor. 3 sg. chedapesi, Vin III 155,31
(ay asma Channo . . . aññatararp cetiyarukkharp -esi);
Mil 203,17; - absol. (a) chedapetva, Vin III 43,w (tani
daruni khUI,l~akhUI,l~ikarp -etva); A IV 274,31
(Mahapajapati Gotam! kese -etva); Ja V 145,25';
(b) chedapayitvana, Th198 (kese -ayitvana pabbajirp
anagariyarp); - pp chedapita, mfn., (caused to be) cut
or cut off, Vin I 148,23 (bhUI,l~arp -itarp hoti);
Vism 302,33; - fpp chedapetabba, mfn., Vin I 50,16 (na
ekaccena kesa -etabba); II 134,21 (na bhikkhave
kattarikaya kesa -etabba); - caus. (e) pr. 3 sg.
chejjapeti [wr injluenced by chijj- forms ?], Mil 90,11*
(chejjapessami me1,1qake, Be, Ce so; Ee chejjapessami;
Se chedapessami); - caus. (d) pr. 3 sg. *chindayati,
Ja V 337,16' (adhipatayissan ti chindayissam); - absol.
chindayitvana, Mhv 9: 17; caus. (e) pr. 3 sg.
chindiipeti, -ayati, Ja I 325,28 (slsarp -essam! ti);
IV 30,12 (imarp sülarp cammasamarp -eh! ti);
Vism 190,22 (yattha rajano core -enti); Sp 701,7
(nahapitena k ese -eti); Spk I 131,22 (jivharp pi -eyya);
- aor. 3 sg. chindapesi, Ja I 455,18 (nasikarp -esi ti);
Sv 612,28 (ay asma Mahakassapo .. . suvUI,~I,lapatte
akkharani -esi); 3 pl. chindapayirpsu, Ja IV 264,23
(ambarukkhe -ayirpsu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -esurp); -
absol. chindapetva, Ja II 197,5 (-etva); Spk I 264,22
(rukkharp -etva); - pp chindapita, mfn., Sp 1069,25
192 chuddha
(bhUI,l~atp chedapitan ti ... -itarp).
chindana, n. ffrom chindati], cutting; cutting off; bringing
to an end; Ja IV 353,17 CO'-atthaya rukkhamülarp
upagate); VI 472,34' (sisarp 0 -kalo viya); Vism 178,22
(vicchiddarp vuccati dvidha -ena apavaritarp, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se apadharitarp); Sp 1093,22 (pasa~,~asakalikaya va
nakhena va -arp); Spk I 24,15 (idhapi -arp ca jahanarp ca
atthato ekam eva); Cp-a 198,18 (tUI,~habandhanassa
-ena); - 0 adhifthan ii,f (?), a support for cutting, a
cutting block; Th!-a 63,23 (adhikuttana ti -a, accadhana-
tthanan ti attho); - acchindana 2 , n., not breaking;
Ps III 358,1 (dhurassa -an ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
accha~~anarp).
chindita(r), m. ffrom chindati], one who cuts; M III 126,4
(nabhijanami satthena clvararp -a, or rather absol. ?);
Patis-a 413,13 (palibodharp cheta ti tarp palibodharp -a,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee chedeta ti).
chindiya, absol. of chindati qv.
chinna, mfn.,pp afchindati qv.
chinnaka 1, mfn. [chinna + ka2], l. cut; made up of cut
pieces of cloth; Vin I 287,28 (anujanami bhikkhave -arp
sañghatirp -arp uttarasañgarp -arp antaravasakan ti);
297,25foll. (ticivare kayiramane sabbarp -arp na
ppahoti, anuJanamr bhikkhave dve -anr ekarp
acchinnakan ti); Ja VI 187,17' ([padumarp] hatthagatan ti
hatthena -arp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be chinditarp); Pj II 262,31
(idani katharp -ani parpsukülani dharetha ti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee jil,ll,lakiini parpsukülakani); - 2. dried up, come
to an end; Ja I 330,7 (udakarp -arp kalalamattam eva
avasighan ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se chinnarp); -
acchinnaka, mfn., not cut; not made up of cut pieces;
Vin I 297,31 (na ca bhikkhave sabbarp -arp
dharetabbarp); Sp 346,13 (chinnake -e ca).
chinnaka2 , mfi-ika)n. [cf S. lex. chinna, Pkt. chi1,11,1a],
wanton, shameless; of loase morals; Vin III 128,1 (ya ta
itthiyo chinnika dhuttika ahirikayo ahesurp, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se -a; Sp 546,24: chinnika ti chinna-ottappa);
IV 61,15/all. (chinnika ima bhikkhuniyo dhuttika
ahirikayo ... ye te pi -a dhuttaka ahirika); Ja II 114,3 (sa
pana brahmUI,li thokarp chinnika dhuttikadhatuka);
Mil 122,20 (coriya dhuttiya asatiya chinnikaya
papiya ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se omits).
chiyati, pr. 3 sg. [S. chyati], cuts, cuts off; Sadd 479,1 (cho
chedane: -ati -anti avacchitarp avacchata rp);- see also
choti.
chisu in E e at Ud-a 51,1 is wr for chasu (Be, Ce, Se so).
chutati, -eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup chutati,
chotayati, Wg §§ 28:84, 32:72], cuts; Sadd 353,23 (cuta
chuta tuta chedane: ... -ati); 531,28 (cuta chuta kuna
chedane: ... -eti -ayati).
chuttfla, see sv chuddha.
chmJ(,lüna, se e sv chuddhüna.
chuddha, chugha, mfn. [cf AMg chü~ha, Pkt chuttha,
chuddha? connected with v'chubh ? or with nitthubhati,
cf S. ~thyüta ? or with S. v'chrd, *chrtta ? ·;ee also
J. Brough, 1962, p. 225], l. thrown away, rejected,
abandoned; ? Dhp 41 (kayo ... -o apetaviññill,lo, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se chu~~o; Dhp-a I 320,19 foll.: apaviddho
apagataviññill,lataya tuccho hutva sessati ti); Thi 468 (-o
kaliilgararp viya, Be, Ce so; Ee chunho; Se cha~~ito;
chuddhüna
Thi-a 259,5foll.: -o ti chaggito, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
chugqo ti); Ja V 302,4* (taJTI ... mukhaJT~ ... -aJTI vane
rhassati khattiyehi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chugqaJTI; 303,4·:
khattiyehi chagqitaJTI); - ifc see vana- (sv vana\ -
2. [cf Pkt churra?] released; emerged from; ? Bv 2:96
(bilasaya darisaya nikkhamanti sakasaya te p' ajja asaya
-a; or meaning 1.; cfBv-a 101,22: -a ti suchuddha
suvuddharita ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ... suvuddharita,
nikkhanta ti attho); Ap-a 536,23* (suva~~acitrahaJTlsa ca
javahaJT!Sa vihacara te sabbe asaya -a jinadassana-
vyavara).
chuddhüna, chuggüna, ind. [absol., from vlchubh or
S. vfchrd ? cf Pkt vlchuh and choghü~a ?], having thrown
away, rejected, abandoned; Thi 469 (chuddhüna naJTI
susane, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se chaggüna; Thi-a 259,8:
chuddhüna naJTI susane ti naJTI k~evaraJTI susane
chaggetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se chugqüna).
chupati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup chupati, Wg § 28:125],
l. touches; Dhatup 480 (chupa samphasse);
Dhatum544; Vin I 191,16 (yo -eyya); 11161,29
(aggailkurakaJTI me udaraJTI -ati); III 121,30 foil. (kayena
kayaJTI ... g~hati -ati); D II 355,16 (pada pi na iccheyya
-itUJTI, Ee so; Be, Se samphusituJTI; Ce phusituJTI);
Th 1134 (na jatu bhastaJT~ ubhatomukhaJTI -e); Ja IV
82,4 (na naJTI hatthena -issami ti); Vism 398,3 (ekadese
va -ati); - part.pr. chupanta, mfn., Vin III 37,8;
Sp 266,16; Vin-vn 25; - neg. acchupanta, mfn., Vin III
37,11; V 33,15; Ja lii 123,1o (raja bhattapatiyaJTI bhatte
acchupante yeva parhamaJTI gatham aha, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee araddhe yeva); Sp 980,21; Vin-vn 1461; - aor.
3 sg. chupi, V in III 127,1s; Ps 11 145,33 (eko daharo
hatthaJTI pasarento ekissa daharabhikkhuniya kayaJTI -i);
3 pl. chupiJTISU, Sp 266,7; - absol. chupitva, Ja VI
166,17·; Vism 249,29; Sp 757,8 (laggapaJTISUJTI pana
allahatthena -itva); Vin-vn 1462; - neg. acchupitva,
Dhp-a I 166,9; - 2. drops;? [see CDIAL 5055;
cf Pkt vfchuh], - aor. 3 sg. chupi, Thi 514 (kese va
chamaJTI -i Sumedha, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
khipi; Thi-a267,9foll.: attano khaggena chinne kese ca
bhümiyaJT~ khipi chaggesi); - absol. chupitva, Pj 11
151,23 (vagghetva ti -itva, akiritva ti vuttaJTI hoti); -
pp chupita, mfn., touched; V in Ili 37,31 ( --matte
vipparisañ ahosi); Ja VI 218,9* (vatena -a); Sp 539,3o
(amagho va -o va); Pj I 153,9 (phutthassa ti phusitassa
-itassa); - fpp chupitabba, mfn., Vin I 191,15 (na ca
bhikkhave rattacittena ailgajataJTI chupitabbaJTI);
Sp 849,29.
chupana, n. [Jrom chupati], touching; Vin III 121,23 (-aJTI
nama phunhamattaJT~); IV 213,36 (gah~aJTI va -aJT~ va);
Sp 1318,17; - oanucchavika, mfn., fit to touch or be
touched; Ja VI 387,17' (arajapatto ti ... etassa kuttharogo
uppanno, so rajiinaJTI pattUJTI ayutto, -o na hoti, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se rajünaJTI); - acchupana, n., not touching;
Sp 540,18 .
.Jchubh, [cf Pkt vfchubh, vfchuh], to reject, throw out; ?
Dhatum 550 (chubha nicchubhe); see also
upacchubhati, chuddha, chuddhüna, nicchubhati.
churiká, f [S. k~urika, churika], a knife, a dagger;
Abh 387; 392 (-a sattyasiputti); Th1302 (idani te imaJTI
puttaJTI d~gena -aya va bhümiyaJTI va nisumbheyyaJTI;
193 chejjii
Thi-a 214,29: -aya ti khurena); Ja III 370,27 (amba-
pakkan ti sutva -aya chinditva); Mi1339,2o ([amittaJTI]
kayüpagataJT~ -aya vinivijjhissami ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
kuntimantena); Dhp-a III 19,3 (nivasanantare -aJTI
bandhitva).
cheka, [< *seka, see H. Berger, 1955, p. 70; AMg chea;
cf S. sikva] l. competent, expert, knowledgeable
(about); ski/fui, skilled (in, usually loe.); clever, good at
(+ inf); Abh 721; Vin II 96,1 (vinaye kho pana -o hoti
asaJTlhiro, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se rhito); Ja I 302,15' (p~gita
-a buddhisampanna); III 40,5 (gitavaditanaccesu -a
narakitthiyo ); V 356,13 (-aJT~ nesadaJTI pakkosapetva);
VI 554,4 (ativiya palayituJTI -a tumhe ti); Mi1293,12 (so
gal)ako -o hoti); Vism 336,28 (aho vata re -a acariya);
Sp 665,6 (pago ti -o samattho pariba1o); PsI 138,3
(m~avaka -aJTI vyattaJTI acariyaJT~ agamma khippam
eva sippaJTI ugg~hanti); 251,28 (-amhi sarathimhi
pajente); Mp III 300,12 (atthakusa1o ti arthakathaya -o);
Dhp-a I 253,16 (rajano nama -a honti); III 139,14 (thero
dhammakathaJTI kathetUJTI -o); It-a II 167,26 (naVaJTI va
bandhituJTI netUJTI ca -aJTI purisaJTI nissaya); Vv-a 36,24
(-en a gandhabbakena); 131,25 (naccagltadisu o-taya);
215,1o (kusalassa ti ovadadane veneyyadamane -assa);
Ap-a 224,28 (nakkhattaparhe ca -tta); - 2. [BHS id.]
0
good, bright, pure; proper, true, genuine; MI 509,19
(-aJTI vata bho odataJTI vatthaJTI abhirüpaJTI nimmalaJTI
sucin ti; Psiii 219,6: -an ti pasannaJTI); Sv315,7
(heraññiko ... kahapaJ!aJTI o1okento ayaJTI kuro ayaJTI -o
ti janati) f. Vism 437,16 (Vism-t [Be] 11 75,19: -o ti
mahasaro); Sv 929,9 (suvagguJTI ca sutthu -aJTI
dassaneyyaJTI ca daghabbayuttaJT~); -
0
-tara, mfn.,
campar., more skilled; cleverer; Mp III 165,15 (chekehi
-o p~gitehi pa~gitataro ti); - accheka, acheka, mfn.,
not skilled; not clever; not knowledgeable (about);
Mi1250,3o (-a asikkhita asippino); Vism l36,z8foll.;
Sv 811,30 (avyatto ti avisado -o); Ps III 444,16 (--tadihi);
Spk I 343,22 (catusaccadhamme -a); - aticheka,
aticcheka, mfn., over-clever, too sharp; Vism 136,11
(yatha hi -o madhukaro asukasmiJTI rukkhe pupphaJTI
pupphitan ti ñatva tikkhena vegena pakkhanto taJTI
atikkamitva ... aparo acheko mandena javena ... cheko
pana samena javena ... , Ce, Ee so; Be acheko
madhukaro; Se accheko madhukaro); 136,19 (sallakatta-
antevasikesu ... eko -o vegena satthaJTI patento ... aparo
acheko ... cheko pana samena payogena ... , Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be eko acheko); 136,3o (-o niyamako, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be acheko).
chekika, mfn. [cheka + ika], skilled; clever; Sadd 921,15
(mattabhedo tava: ... cheko -o).
checchati, ft¡t. 3 sg. of chindati qv.
cheija\ absol. of chindati qv.
cheija 2 , mfn. and n.,fpp ofchindati qv.
cheijati,ft¡t. 3 sg. of chindati qv.
2
cheijá, f [= chejja ?], cutting off; cutting; Vin III 47,7
(haneyyuJTI va ti hatthena va padena va kasaya va
vettena va addhadal)gakena va -aya va haneyyuJTI;
Sp-r [Be] II 131,17: -aya ti hatthapadasisadinaJTI
chedanena); Sp 905,15 (kayasaJTlsaggo methuna-
dhammassa pubbabhagatta paccayo hoti iti -a siya
methunadhammapaccaya ti ettha imina pariyayena attho
chejjadi-
veditabbo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -al)1; quoting Vin V
218,35*: eds -arp; orto chejja, mfn., qv sv chindati ?);
chejjadi- in Ee at Vv-a 139,15 is wr for chajjadi- (Be, Ce,
Se so).
chejjapeti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of chindati qv.
chec;ll}.etva in Ee at Sp 349,21 is wr for cha9detva (Be, Ce,
Se so).
cheta, see sv ceta 1.
chetabba, mfn.,fpp ofchindati qv.
chetmp., inf of chindati qv.
chetta(r), cheta(r), m. [S. chettr], one who cuts; one who
cuts off or away; Sn 343 (yo vicikicchanaiJ1 -a) t
Th 1263 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee chetva; Th-a Ili 199,11: -a
chedako); Ja VI 226,12* foil. (satt' ime kaya yesarp -a na
vijjati); Ap461,4 (-a); Parisi 128,21 (n' atth' añño koci
palibodhaiJ1 -a aññatra maya, Ce so; Be cheta; Ee, Se
chedeta); Ud-a 382,10 (yo ... mulato ppabhuti tal!haya
-a so tal!hahetukassa icchitalabhassa abhavato ... , Be,
Se so; Ce, E e chettatta, prob. wr).
chettabba, mfn.,fpp ofchindati qv.
chettmp., inf of chindati qv.
chetva, absol. of chindati qv.
cheda, m. (and mfn.) [ts], cutting, cutting off; a cut;
division, interruption; breaking (intrans.); deprivation;
Ja 1 485,2 (upa99hav!hiiJ1 khadissati bahu me -o
bhavissati); N idd 1 164,25 foll. (kathaiJ1 -al)1 karissami
katharp ma!!9alarp karissam! ti ... -o te akato ma1!9alarp
te dukkararp; Nidd-a I 285,26: -an ti vadachindanaiJ1,
man9alan ti vadasailghatarp, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se chedanan
ti); Sp 767,16 (dharaya -arp va vedharp va dassentena);
It-a I 44,14 (tassa rukkhassa -e asati yani phalani
nibbatteyyul)1); Pj II 285,26 (hatthapadad!naiJ1 chedanarp
-o); Ap-a 124,8 (satthena -o); Bv-a 8!,18 (bandhananaiJ1
sayam eva-o); Sadd 43,17 (itica ti etthapi i iti ca ti -arp
katva); 316,8 (itayan ti iti ayan ti -o); - ifc se e al!9a-,
kankha-, pada-; - 0 -gami(n), mfn. [cheda + gami(n/J,
going to nought, ending in loss; certain to break; A II
81,27 (ko paccayo yena-m-idh' ekaccassa tadisa va
v~ijja payutta -in! hoti; Mp Ili ll0,2joll.: chedarp
gacchati, yal)1 patthitaq¡ tal)1 sabbarp nassatl ti attho );
Ja V 453,22* (devatahi nirayarp nimissati -i mal!iyal)1 va
viil!ijo; 455,17: yatha balaval!ijo mahagghabhan9aiJ1
datva -i lamakarp mal!ikarp gal!hati, Ce, Ee so; Be
--maryikarp; Se -il)1 mal!ikaiJ1); - accheda 2, m.,
absence of cutting (off); non-cessation; It-a 1 107,9
(yassa hi sarpyojanani acchinnani tassajatijaraya -o);-
duccheda, mfn., hard to cut; Paris-a412,32 (--tta): -
se e also vadhacchedabandhana.
chedaka, m. [cheda + ka2; cf S. chedaka], one who cuts or
brings to an end; a cutter; a cutting instrument; Spk 1
254,9 (niddanan ti -arp lavakarp, upparakan ti attho) =
Pj II 148,24; Ud-a 382,4 foll. (mUlato chetta ti pi parhanti
t~haya mülarp müle yeva va -o ti attho, atha va ...
mUlato paqhaya tal!haya -o, Be, Se so; Ce chetta ti
attho; Ee chetva ti attho); Th-a III 161,25 (dasannarp
bandhanilnaiJ1 -al)1 karul!ikarp mahamunirp); Nidd-a 1
275,5 (tlf,li satthan! ti tayo -a); Sadd 472,13 (chindat! ti
-o, evarp chetta);- chedakan! ti in Ee at Sp 1348,34 is
wr for chedanakan! ti (Be, Ce, Se so); - for saddha
chedakavaraiJ1 in Ce, Ee at Ps IV 4,11 prob. read saddha-
194 eh o ti
chedakavadarp with Be, Se; - ifc see al!9a-, kali.kha-,
mamma-.
chedana, n. [ts], l. cutting; cutting off; destruction; Vin 1
254,29 (na --mattena atthataq¡ hoti karhinarp); V 17 4,28
(vicaral!ena -ena); DI 5,23 (in long Lpd; Sv 80,19: -an ti
hatthacchedanadi); Th1191 (hatthapadana -arp); Ja V
299,1 * (labhati jivhaya -arp); Mil 86,15 (natthi dutiyarp
paññaya -an ti); Sp 446,2o (vijjhanarp va -aiJ1 va
bhedanarp va); Spk 1 253,31 (niddanan ti -arp lunanarp
upparanaiJ1); Dhp-a III 63,21 (tvarp maya ettake kathite
evarüparp -am akasi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee chedam);
Nidd-a I 412,4 (kattarikaya -arp); II 24,24 (mahato
avijjarasissa -al)1); - ifc see kailkha-; - 2. a cutting
instrument; - ifc see nakha-; - 0
-bandhana, n.,
cutting and binding; Sn 367 (virato -ato bhikkhu, Ce,
Ee so; Se -ato; Be -a ca); - 0 -bhañjana, n., cutting
and breaking; Nidd-a 1 408,26 (-' -adikarp vikopanarp) =
As 146,6 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -'-ad!narp); -
0
-bhedana, n., cutting and breaking; Kv 136,33 (kayo
paggahaniggahüpago -'-u pago ti); 350,38 (parhav! ...
-'-üpaga ti); Ps Ili 128,2 (ayamusalena va -arp).
chedanaka, mfn. [chedana + ka2], l. (one) who or which
cuts; Pv-a 7,zo (attano santane lobhad!narp pariccajanaka
-a); - see tipucchedanakasatthaka (sv tipu), suval!l!a-
cchedanakasatthaka (sv suval!l!a); - 2. (of [the
expiation of] an offence): entailing cutting; Vin IV
!68,26 (naval)1 pana bhikkhuna mañcarp va p1rhaiJ1 va
karayamanena aqhailgulapadakarp karetabbaiJ1 . . . tarp
atikkamayato -arp pacittiyan ti; 169,3: chinditva
pacittiyarp desetabbarp); 173,23 (yo pana bhikkhu
sugatac!varappamiil!arp c!vararp karapeyya atirekaiJ1 va
-al)1 pacittiyaiJ1); II 307,2o (kirp apajjat! ti -e pacittiyan
ti; Sp !300,5foll.: chedanakasikkhapade vuttarp
pacittiyaiJ1 apajjan ti attho ); V 128,26 (pañca -a
apattiyo); 146,22 (kati -ani kati bhedanakani, scil.
sikkhapadani ?).
chedana, f(?) cutting;? Vin JI 232,3o* (in uddana:
ukkhepo -a gal!9arp; cf214,21: na kabalavacchedakarp
bhuñjitabbaiJ1); V 133,13* (in uddana: puggala -a e' eva;
Lj 128,26: pañca chedanaka apattiyo ).
chedaniya, mfn.,fpp ofchindati qv.
chedapana, n. [from chedapeti], causing to cut;
Kkh 2 69,23 (0 -vatthusmirp paññattabhavo).
chedapeti, -aya ti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of chindati qv.
chediya, mfn.,fpp ofchindati qv.
chedeta(r), m. [from chedeti qv sv chindati], one who
cuts; París I 128,21 (n' atth' añño koci palibodharp -a
aññatra maya ti, Ee, Se so; Ce chetta; Be cheta).
chedeti, -aya ti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of chindati qv.
cheppa, f [cfS. sepa, sepya; AMg chippa; Pkt cheppa],
the tail; V in I 191,2 (bhikkhü ... gavinaiJ1 ... givaya pi
g~hanti -aya pi gal!hanti); III 21,37 (kariiJ1 pi cale si
-aiJ1 pi calesi; Sp 227,19: -an ti nailguqhaiJ1).
choti, pr. 3 sg. [S. chyati], cuts, cuts off, Sadd 342,1 (chu
chedane: -oti); - aor. 3 pl. acchocchuiJ1, Sadd 342,2
(acchocchuiJ1 vata bho rukkharp; = Ja VI 502,17*: eds
acchecchuiJ1); - absol. chotvana, Sadd 342,1 (chotvana
moJiiJ1 varagandhavasitarp; = Ja 1 65,6: eds chetvana);-
se e also chiyati, vicchita.
 195
.
J
ja 1. m. [ts]. the sound 'j'; the consonant 'j'; Sadd 604,19
(ca cha ja jha ña); 605,31; 826,2o (hassa jo: hakarassa
abbhase vattamanassa jo hoti jahati ... ); - 0 -kara, m.,
the letter or sound 'j'; Sp 1400,28 (suttantikatthera ...
cakaro -af!1 apajjati -o cakaraf!1 apajjati ... ti vadanti);
Pa~is-a 481.33 (parijita ti vattabbe -assa cakaraf!1 katva
paricita ti vuttam); Ap-a 437,19 (natthi rajo ... etassa ti
~arado, -assa dakaraf!1 katva Narado ti kuladattikaf!1
nilmaf!1).
ja~. mfn. [ts], born from; produced or caused by;
belonging to, connected with; appropriate to; - ifc see
agga- (sv agga\ aggi-, an9a-, atta- (sv atta[n]), atraja,
ambu-, ura- (sv ura[s]), urasija, eka-, ogha- (sv ogha\
kantha-, kanthottha-, kanthatalu-, kamma-, kara-
1S\: kara\ k~~m1~~- (sv ka~~lra), kimi-, ku- (sv ku\
kula-, khandha-, khetra-, catu- (sv catu[r]), jala-, tajja,
tato-, tattha-, tanu-, talu-, ti- (sv ti 2), thala-, daka-,
dantogha-, danta- (sv danta 1), dvi-, n1ra-, nJ!a-,
suddakhatta-.
jaqtseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup j~sayati,
Wg § 32: 127], protects; Sadd 566,3 Gasi rakkha¡;¡e: -eti
-ayati).
jakkhati 1 , pr. 3 sg. [S. jak~iti, -v1ak~, redupl. from v'ghas],
eats: Sadd 330,18 Gakkha bhakkha ca: ... -ati).
jakkhate, pr. 3 sg. [S. v'jak~. redupl. from v'has], laughs;
Sadd 330,18 (kakkha hasane: kakhati, jakkha bhakkhane
.:a: hasananuka99hanatth~ cakaro, -ati); - see also
jagghati.
jaga(t), n. [S. jagat], living things; the world; A II 15,8'
'uddhaf!1 tiriyaf!1 apaclnaf!1 yavata -ato gati; Mp III
18.1: -ato gatl ti 1okassa nipphatti) = It 120,14* (It-a JI
18-1-.19 foil.: yattaka sattasailkharabhedassa lokassa
pavatti) t Ap 392,27 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ca gato gati);
- Gagat)-ogadha, mfn. ljaga(t) (or jagatl qv) +
ogadha2], immersed in the world, within the world; S I
186.cs* (yam idha puthavif!1 ca vehasaf!1 rüpagataf!1 ca
-~) = Thl215 (Th-aiii 190,6: yam kiñci idha
pa~havigat~ bhüminissitaf!1 vehasaf!1 vehasaghaf!1
deva1okanissitaf!1 . . . -af!1 1okikam bhavattayapariy-
apannaf!1 sailkhataf!1 ).
jagati in Ee at Ps III 206,22 is wr; Ce, Se jahati; Be
pajahati.
jagatl. f, l. [S. jagatl] the earth; Abh 182 (puthuv1 -1
bhiiñ); 997; Vin V 171,9 (bhümiya va pa~haviya va
dhara1,1iya va -iya va); Ja VI 371 ,20* Hf!1 jagatlpa1a
avasanti vasundharaf!1); - 2. the floor or platform of a
ierrace or verandah; a platform or ledge for offerings;
.-\bh 997 H .. . mandiralindavatthuni); Ap 221,11 H
karita mayhaf!1 buddhassa thüpa-m-uttame;
Ap-a 467,25foll.: bhagavato sañradhatunidhapitacetiye
-i chinnabhinna-alindapupphadhanasailkhata -i maya
karita, Be, Se so; Ce -pupphadanaghanasailkhata; Ee
.::hinnabhinna-alinda pupphadanatthaya sailkhata);
.;.o2.11 (Dhammadassissa munino bodhiya
padaputtame ... -if!1 karayif!1 ahaf!1; Ap-a 487,13: taf!1
uttamabodhirukkhassa samantato alind~ ahaf!1 karayin
ti attho); 402,15 (-iya idaf!1 phalaf!1); Sp 747,24foll.
(bhümiyaf!1 vina -iya pamukhaf!1 sandhaya kathitan
ti ... dasahatthubbedha pi hi -i parikkhepasailkhyaf!1 na
gacchati); - o• -ogadha, mfn. ljagatl (or jaga[t] qv) +
ogadha2], plunged into the earth, within the earth; S I
186,28* (yam idha puthavif!1 ca vehasaf!1 rilpagataf!1 ca
-af!1; Spk I 270,3 foil.: jagatiya ogadhaf!1,
antopa~haviyaf!1 nagabhavan~ gatan ti attho) =
Th 1215 (cfTh-aiii 190,6: -af!11okikaf!1);- 0 (1)-pala,
m., a king; Abh 334; Ja VI 371,2o* (372,2: -a rajano);
-
0
(i)-ruha, m. ljagati + ruha 1], a tree; Ja 1 216,11*
(yaf!1 nissita -af!1 vihamgama; 216,14·: jagati vuccati
pa~havi, tattha jatatta rukkho -o ti vuccati);
Sadd 330,3o*.
jagama, perf 3 sg. of gacchati qv.
jagü, jagu, m. or n .. [= jaga(t) ?; cfjailgama], a living
being, a man; Nidd I 3,15 (satto naro miil,lavo poso
puggalo j1vo -ii jantu indagii ... , E e so; Be, Ce jagu; Se
jatu; Nidd-a I 26,12: cutito jatif!1 gacchatl ti jagü, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se jagu; quoted Sadd 466,10: Be -u; Ee -u); 4,18
Gantuno ti ... j1vassa -ussa jantussa ... , Ee so; Be, Ce
jagussa; Se jatussa); Sadd 465,2 (hiilgu -ü indagü, Ee
so; Be -u).
jaggaka, mf(-ika)n. (and jaggika, mfn.) [from jaggati],
(one) who looks after, attends to; Vin-vn 2307 (anapatti
-af!1 alabhantiya; cfSp 936,22: pa~ijaggikaf!1 na labhati);
- ifc se e aggi-, nibaddha- (sv nibandhati).
jaggati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jagarti, jagarati, 3 pi. jagrati;
AMg jaggai], l. is awake, is watchful; Dhatup 22 (jagga
niddakhaye); A lii 156,7 (pañc' ime bhikkhave appaf!1
rattiya supanti bahuf!1 -anti); Ja III 404,16* (tesu
suppamanesu ahaf!1 -ami devate); V 269,20* (d1ghaf!1
-anti s~varif!1); Mil300,23 (-ati); Sv 727,13 (ekaf!1
yamaf!1 -ati); Spk 1 25,s (suttesu pañcasu nlvara1,1esu
pañc' indriyani -anti nama, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee jagarani
nama); Nidd-a I 406,25 (-eyya ti, E e, Se so; Be
pa~ijaggeyya ti; Ce jaheyya ti; ad Nidd 1 377,24: Ee, Se
jagareyya; Be, Ce pa~ijaggeyya); part.pr.
(a) jagga(t), mfn., Vin 11 201,26* (mahavarahassa mahim
vikubbato bhisarp ghasanassa nad1su -ato;? Sp 1276,19:
hatthinago sayanhasamayaf!1 taf!1 nadinamikam
pokkharanif!1 ogahetva k1Janto sabbarattirp vltinamesi
jagarik~ karoti, tena vuttaf!1 nad1su -ato ti, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce jalikaf!1 karoti; cfSp-~ [Be] III 416,28:
hatthiyiithaf!1 palentassa); S 1 111 ,2* (-af!1 na sailkemi
na pi bhemi sottuf!1); (b) jagganta, mfn., Ja lli 403,21
(aniddayitva -anto); 450,9* (pa~ivijjhetha -ato;
450,1o·foll.: -ato ti -anto ... bhavananuyogaf!1 anuyutto
-anto kulaputto pa~ivijjhetha); Mil 299,11 (yo supin~
passati so niddayanto passati udahu -anto passatl ti, Ce,
E e so; Be, Se jagaranto ); Spk 1 25,4 (-antesu, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee jagarantesu); - neg. ajagganta, mfn., Dhp-a 1
310,1 (tassa -antassa ajaggantassapi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
jagarantassapi ajagarantassapi); - 2. watches over;
jaggana
looks after, attends to; takes ca re of, Sp 936,21
(anissajitva ti rakkhaQ.atthaya adatva, ima~ -eyyasl ti
eva~ anapucchitva); 1228,4 (viharamagg~ -atu);
1246,16 (-atha eta~ avasan ti); 1409,12 (-ah! ti); Mp 11
158,13 (attana~ -ati gopayati); part.pr.
jagganta, mfn., Sp 1132,31; Spk II 82,16 (im~ aggi~
-anto); - aor. 2 sg. jaggi, Sp 390,8 (tva~ ma -i);
3 pl. jaggi~su, Ps IV 192,!2; 2 pl. jaggittha, Sp 1409,19
(bahu~ tumhehi khayit~ idani ma -ittha bhikkhu-
sangho yeva -issati ti); - absol. jaggitva, Sp 46,6 (pato
va sañr~ -itva, Be so; Se pa!ijaggitva; Ce, Ee wr
jaggetva); 283,7 (bahud eva ratti~ -itva, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee jagaritva); Ps V 95,!0; pass. part.pr.
jaggiyamana, mfn., Ps IV 13,7 ( -iyamanass' eva atta-
bhavassa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se rakkhiyamanass' eva); -
neg. ajaggiyamana, mfn., Sp 779,4; - pp jaggita, mfn.,
watched over, looked after, taken care of, Sp 1133,2o;
1246,31; - neg. ajaggita, mfn., Ps II 269,4 (gilane
pucchanto ajaggitanhana~ jagganto );
sujaggitatara, mfn., more well looked after; very well
looked after; Sp 1230,27; - fpp jaggitabba, mfn.,
Sp 282,n (dve pi dvarani jaggitabbani); 1281,18; -
caus. pr. 3 sg. jaggiipeti, Spk III 8,23 (aslvise -enti);-
aor. 3 sg. jaggapesi, Ap-a 505,6 (kumar~ ... -esi, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee pa!ijaggapesi); - absol. jaggapetva, Ps li
172,9;- fppjaggapetabba,mfn., (of persons) to be
made to loo k after; (of things) to be caused to be looked
after; Sp 387,!3 ([aramo] vetana~ datva pi -etabbo);
390,2 (so ce bhag~ icchati bhag~ datva pi
[til).avatthu] -etabb~); 1406,5 (ay~ bhikkhu
issaravataya vicaretl ti kathapacchindanattha~ pana ...
sailgha~ pucchitva va -etabbo ); - se e also jagarati.
jaggana, n. [from jaggati], attending to; looking after;
Sp 470,25 ( 0 -nhane); 527,26 (0 ' -atthaya); 1406,24
( -kamma~); 1409,18 ( -kale); Sv 953,32 (matapitaro ...
0 0
-'-adlhi sammapa!ipanna); Vin-vn 487 ( 0 -\!hiine);- (fe
see daraka-, dvara-.
jagganaka, m(jn). [jaggana + ka2 ], (one) who looks after,
attends to; Sp 1247,4 (-e pana asati); Pj 11 104,29
0
( -purisa, Se so; Be jaggana-; Ce jagaraka-; Ee
jagaral).a-) = Ap-a 182,4 (0 -purisa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-parisa);- ifc see aggi-, avasa-.
jaggika, mfn., see sv jaggaka.
jagghati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. vjak~, redupl. from vbas], laughs;
Dhatup 31 (jaggha hasane); Dhatum 38; Ja III 223,5*
(ki~ nu -asi sobhane); V 434,4 (436,35·: -atl ti
mahahasit~ hasati); Sadd 334,21 (jaggha hasane: -ati);
- inf jagghitaye, Ja III 226,10* (ala~ hi te -itaye
mama~ disvana edisa~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jagghitase;
226,12·: jagghitaye ti hasitu~, Be so; Ce, Ee hasitva; Se
jagghitase ti hasitva; see O.H. Pind, 1997, pp. 534-55);
- absol. jagghitva, Sadd 334,22; - pp jagghita, (mj)n.,
laughing, laughter; Ja VI 522,13* (-ita~ pi na sobhati;
522,28": khal).<;ladante vivaritva hasantassa mahallakassa
hasita~ pi na sobhati) quoted Sadd 334,22 (jagghitu~);
- see also jakkhati2 .
jagghana, n. [from jagghati], laughing; - ifc see saha-
(sv saha 1).
jaghana, n. [ts], the buttocks; the hips and loins; Abh 272;
Vin II 266,22 (bhikkhuniyo a¡¡hillena -a~ gh~sapeti
196 jailgha
gohanukena -a~ kogapenti; Sp 1293,16: -an ti
ka!ippadeso vuccati); Ja V 204,!0* (vivariya iiru~ -ena
pljayi);- ifc see anuvagaghana- (sv anuvaga).
jaógama, mfn. [ts], moving; living; Abh 711 (-~ ca
cara~); MI 184,27 (-an~ piil).ana~ padajatani, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se jangalan~; Ps 11 218,4: pa¡havltalacañna~)
=SI 86,31 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jangalana~) = A V 21,19
(Ce so; Be, Ee, Se jangalan~); Sv 39,32 (bhagavant~
addasa ... rattakambalaparikkhitta~ vi ya -~ kanaka-
girisikhara~); Spk I 247,27 (-am iva padumasara~); Pj I
217,18 (das!dasa~ hatthigavassavajav~ ... ya~ va pan'
añña~ pi evariipa~ iriyapathapa¡isa~yutt~ ay~ -o
nidhi); V v-a 4,3 (sañjhapabhanurañjito vi ya ca -o
añjanagirisikharo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sañjhatapanurañjito
viya ca jailgalo kañcanagirisikharo); Mhv 76:55
(navana~ sañcayo d!po -o vi ya dissatha); Sadd 81,16
(thavara ca -a ca);- see also jangala.
jaógamati, pr. 3 sg. [intens. of gacchati; S. janganti,
jangamlti], goes; moves about; Sadd 826,15 (cailkamati
-ati cañcalati); - part.pr. jangamamana, mfn., Spk I
98,18 (pavajamananan ti -amanana~ padasa
caramanan~ gavo segha, Se so; Be, Ce jangamana~;
Ee jangamanana~, against mss); Bv-a 94,38 (sañjha-
ppabhanurañjitavarakanakagirisikharo viya -amano, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee omit).
jaógala, m.n. and mfn. [S. lex., BHS jangala, S. jangala],
l. (m.n.) rough, arid ground; jungle; Abh 183
(bhiibhage thaddhaliikhamhi -o); Vv-a 335,15 (-a~
vuccati liikhadhiisaro anudako bhiimippadeso ); -
2. (mfn.) (i) arid; sterile; S IV 315,5 (ek~ khetta~
agg~ eka~ khetta~ majjhima~ eka~ khetta~ hlna~
-a~ usar~ papabhiimik~; Spk III 104,19: -an ti
thaddh~ na mudu); Pj 1 217,33 (atthi gambhlr~ na
odakantik~ -e bhiimibhage satikapuriso ava¡o viya);
- (ii) wild; coming from arid land, from the jungle; M 1
184,27 (-an~ paQ.an~ padajatani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
jangamanam) = S 1 86,31 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
jangamana~) = A V 21,19 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
jangamana~; Mp III 384,16: pathavltalacañn~
sapadakapiil).ana~; Mp-! [Be] III 117,!3foll.: yo ...
thaddhaliikho bhiimippadeso so -o ti vuccati,
tabbahulataya pana idha sabbo bhiimippadeso -o,
tasm~ -e jata bhavati va -a . . . pathavltalacañnan ti
imina jalacarino ca nivatteti adissamanapadatta); Ja IV
71,1* (na vaham et~ bhuñjami -an' odakani va; 71,3·:
-ani va odakani va m~sani).
jaógha, m. (?) [connected with jangha? or = jangha ?], a
walking, living being;? Ja VI 34,16 (satta 0 -satani
[nava~] abhiriijhani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vaQ.ijasatani);
Sv 453,3o (sattahi o -satehi saddhi~ sotapattiphale
pati¡!hasi; Sv-p¡ 11 56,6: sattasatamattena orodhena
saddhi~ padasa va therana~ santik~ upagatatta satahi
0
-satehi saddhin ti vutt~); 718,3o (accharaya gahitak~
0
-sahassena saddhi~ paribhuñjeyyama ti); Ps III 330,1
0
( -sahassa~ ghatehl ti); V 93,22 (pañcadasasatani ca
pañcadasisatani ca ti -sahass~ ); Mp II 253,32 (yattha
0
sakka hoti dv!hi t!hi pi 0 -sahassehi saddhi~ nillyitu~).
jaóghala, m(jn). [cfS. janghala], (one) who runs;?
Sadd 65,1 (yo so janghaya ulati so satto -o idha).
jaóghii,f [ts] (iic usually jangha-), l. the shank, the shin;
jaógheyyaka
V in III 106,29 (ta suc1yo . . . urusu pavisitva -ahí
nikkhamanti -asu pavisitva padehi nikkhamanti); D III
157,4• (-a manuñña 1abhate susaJ.lthita); A IV 129,11
(ubho -a vethetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -e); Sn 610 (na
-ahi na ürühi); Th 312 (ubho jannukasandhihi -ayo
papatantu me); Dhp-a III 119,11 (onatasarira -a!11
dhovituif! arabhi); Ja V 336,11 (ma akaraJ.lena -ayo
kilamento vicari); - 2. part of a thüpa; ?; a walk-way; ?
Ap 71,5 (-a maJ.limaya asi vedika ratanamaya, of a
thüpa; Ap-a 344,21: -a ti cetiyakaral).aka1e
upacinitabbanaJ11 it!hakanaJ11 thapanatthaya
nibandhiyamanasopanapanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibandhiyamana paslil).apanti); Ap-a 568,23 (-a maJ.li-
maya as! ti manussehi katathüpe -a pupphavahatthaJ11
caritaghanaJ11 mal).imaya indanilamaJ.lina kata ti attho,
Be, Se so; E e rattit!hanaif!; not in Ce); - o• -atfikato in
Ee at Sp 889,7 is wr for janghaghikato (Be, Ce, Se so);
0
(a)-ummagga, 0
'-ummagga, m. [jangha +
2
ummagga ], a tunnel large enough only for those on
foot; Ja VI 426,5 (gavutamattaJ11 -a!11 a<_l<_lhayojanikaJ11
maha-ummaggaJ11 karetva, Ce so; Be jangha-umangaif!;
E e janghamaggaJ11; Se jangha-ummailgaif!); 428,1 (-o
bhavissatl ti, Ce so; Be jangha-umango; Ee
=·-ummaggo; Se jangha-ummango); 435,9foll. (puttaif!
ca dhltaraJ11 ca o• -ummaggena anetva, Ce, Ee so; Be
jangha-umangena; Se jangha-ummangena);
'(a)-padikamagga, m., a (narrow) footpath; Ja V 175,s
tekayane ekagamane -e); - 0 (a)-pil;u,li,f [S. jangha-
pi.J:¡<_II], the calf; It-a II 147,14 (pil).<_liya1opo ti -iya ba1ena
caritva ghare ghare alopamattaJ11 katva 1addhabhojanaif!;
= Mp III 43,18: 0 -pil).<_liyabalena); - 0
(a)-ph;u,lika,
'la)-pil).<_liya,f., the calf; Vism 252,25 (0 -pil).<_lika-
IDaJ11SaJ11); Sp 1030,13 (het!ha orü!hahi va upari arü!hahi
\¡¡ mahatihi -ahi samannagato); Mp III 43,18 (0 -pil).<_liya-
balena caritva);- 0 (a)-pesana, n. [BHS janghapre~al).a],
undertaking commissions on foot; Nidd I 372,23 (na
pahmakammena na -ena na vejjakammena, Se so; Ee
'-pesanikena; Be, Ce 0 -pesaniyena) = 495,24 (Ee so; Se
'-pesanikena, Be, Ce 0 -pesaniyena); - 0 (a)-pesanika,
'1a)-pesanl'ya, n., executing orders onfoot; undertaking
commissions on foot; V in III 185,3 (ku1ani düseti ...
Yejjikaya va -ena va; Sp 628,16: -ena ti ettha
janghapesaniyan ti gihinaif! düteyyasasanaharaJ.la-
kammaif! vuccati); Ja II 82,4 (bhikkhü . . . -ena ...
JlYÍkaif! kappeSUif!); Vibh 246,25 (paribhatyataya va -ena
va... miccha-ajivena jivitaif! kappeti; Vibh-a 338,18:
-an ti gamantaradesantaradisu tesaJ11 tesaJ11 gihinaJ11
sasanapa!isasanaharaJ.laJ11) f. Mil 370,2 (0 -pesaniyena);
Ps III 5,18 (-a!11 karotl ti); Vin-vn 496 (gihinaJ11 pana
düteyyaif! -a!11 pi ca); Utt-vn 640; - 0 (a)-magga, m., a
.iootpath; Abh 191 (janghasakatamagga); Ja II 251,24
assa gamanagamanaif! karontass' eva ... -o nibbatti);
\. 321,8· (ayaJ11 ekapadiko -o); Sp 1038,7 (-o va
~atamaggo va vagati);- (a)-val_lija, m., a merchant
0
,, ho travels on foot; Ps V 62,16 (na Takkasi1akanaif!
-anaJ11 santikaJ11 agamasi); Spk II 243,25;
'-Yihiira, m. [BHS id.], walking to exercise the legs; MI
i08,cl (Sakko -a!11 anucankamamano anuvicaramano) f.
Cd 34,14 f. Snp. 105,6 (Pj II 448,1: janghaya hitaif!
\ihliraJ11 -aif!, cirasanadijanitaJ11 parissamaJ11 vinodetUif!
197 jajjara
janghapasaraJ.latthaif! ad!ghacarikan ti vuttaJ11 hoti);
Ja IV 74,1o (janapadacarikalfl gacchama evaJ11 ... -o ca
kato bhavissatl ti); Ap 318,13 (-aif! vicaraJ11);- see also
el).ijangha (sv el).l'), el).eyyajangha (sv el).eyya),
vijanghaka.
jangheyyaka, n. rJrom jangha], the bottom section of a
bhikkhu's c!vara (the part which hangs by the shins);
Vin I 287,25 (g1veyyakaJ11 pi nama karissati -aif! pi nama
karissati; Sp 1127,19joll.: g!veyyakan ti givavethana-
t!hane da!h1karaJ.1atthaJ11 annaJ11 suttasaJ11sibbitaJ11
agantukapataJ11, -an ti janghapapul).aghane tath' eva
saif!sibbitaif! pataJ11, g!vaghane ca janghatthane ca
!hapitapatanaif! etalfl naman ti pi vadanti).
jacca, mfn. [S. jatya], belonging to the family or class (of);
being by birth ... ; - ifc see ajacca, ittara-, evaJ11-, kiif!-
(sv ka3), khattiya-, dujjacca, nana-, nih!na- (sv nihiyati),
n!ca-, brahmal).a-, sama- (sv sama3), sujacca, hina-
(sv jahati).
jaccajaJa, mfn. [jati + ja!a, jacca- by analogy with
jaccandha], dull from birth, naturally dull; Sadd 626,4
(jatisaddassa jaccadeso hoti kvaci vyañjane pare: ... -o
jatija!o va);- see also jatija!a (sv jati 1).
jaccati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jartsati, jarcati, Wg § 17:66:
paribha~aJ.latarjanayoJ:l; Wg § 28:17: paribha~al).a­
bhartsanayoJ:l], abuses; avoids; ? Sadd 335,25 (cacea
jacca paribhasanavajjanesu: ... -ati).
jaccandha, mfn. and m. [jati + andha, S. jatyandha], blind
from birth, congenitally blind; a person blind from
birth; D II 328,3 (-o puriso na passeyya kaJ.lhasukkani
rüpani); Ud 68,sfoll. (yavatika Savatthiyaif! -a te sabbe
gahetva ... -anaJ11 hatthiif! dasseh1 ti); Ja I 45,1*
(jayamana manussesu -a na bhavanti te); IV 192,9*
(sakaJ.l!akaJ11 so gilati -o va samakkhikaJ11); Vibh412,4o;
Vism 596,25 (p1thasapp1 -assa aJ11saküte nis!ditva);
Nidd-ai 225,11* (yatha pi nama -o naro aparil).ayako
ekada yati maggena ummaggenapi ekada); Sadd 624,3.
jaccandhakiya, mfn. rJrom jaccandha], ? Sadd 789,15
(jatiyaJ11 niyutto jatikiyo, evaif! andhakiyo -o).
jaccabadhira, mfn. and m. [jati + badhira, jacca- by
analogy with jaccandha], deaf from birth; a congenitally
deafperson; Vibh413,7 (-anam); PsiV 186,17 (-a
saddaif! SUI).iif!su); Pj II 50,2 (na jaccandho hoti na -o,
Be, Se so; Ce jacca badhiro; Ee jacceva badhiro) =
Ap-a 141,17; Sadd 626,4 (jatisaddassa jaccadeso hoti
kvaci vyañjane pare: -o jatibadhiro va); - see also
jatibadhira (sv jati 1).
jacca, see sv jati 1.
jajati, jañjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jajati, jañjati,
Wg § 7:68-69], fights; Sadd 345,23 (jaja jaji yuddhe: ...
-ati jañjati) .
jajjara, mfn. [S. jarjara], decrepit; wom-out; falling to
pieces; Th1 270 (samussayo -o; Thi-a 202,25: -o ti
sithi1abandho); Ap 381,15 (dhuvatthasiddhiif! papponti
etesaif! -o bhavo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ajaro bhave);
Bv 2:23 (yatha pi -aif! navaJ11 pa1uggaif! udakagahiniif!
sam1 cha<_l<_letva gacchanti; Bv-a 73,27: -an ti jil).l).aif!);
Sp 320,2 (-a!11 karoti); Mp II 315,18 (tassa cittaif!
0
-bhavaJ11 agamasi); Vin-vn 3080; - 0 -rathaka, m., a
decrepit carriage; S I 90,4 (-ena yati); Mp IV 180,2; -
ajajjara, (mj)n., what is not decrepit or wom-out; S IV
jajjarita
369,23 (-arp ca vo bhikkhave desissami --giimii]l ca
maggaf]l; Spk III 112,9: jaraya ajaritatta -af]l, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee ajajjaritatta); Nett 55,8*.
jajjarita, mfn. [S. jarjarita], become decrepit, wom-out;
Cp-a 153,7 (0 -mukhabhagaf]l ver.lUda!J~arp gahetva); -
ifc see jara-; - ajajjarita, mfn., not worn-out; Spk III
112,9 Garaya ajajjaritatta ajajjaraf]l, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
ajaritatta).
jajjaribhuta, m. Uajjara + bhiita; S. jarjaribhuta], become
decrepit, wom-out; Sp 130,1 Gii:r.r;¡e ti -e jaraya
khar;¡~iccadibhavaf]l apadite); Pv-a 63,9 (-af]l sarp tanui]l
attano sañrai]l hitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jajjaribhütaf]l);
Nidd-a I 78,27 (bhinnarp navan ti sithilabandhanai]l
navam -am va).
jajjharika,i, -a, n. Uajjhari + ka2], a kind of plant; Ps II
407,27 (0 -gumbato pi nicataro, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
jhajjharika-); Vin-vn 1324 (tambakarp -arp ca cuccu);
- se e al so jhajjharika.
jajjhari,f (?) [?],a kind of plant; Sp 832,3o (0 -miilan ti);
835,12 (pattakhadaniye ... -i); 836,6 (0 -pupphaf]l, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee jajjhali-); 846,14 ( 0 -sakadii]l);
Vin-vn 1343;- see also jhajjhañ.
jañjati, see sv jajati.
jañña\ mfn. [BHS janya; cf S. jan ya], not disgusting; fit
for people; fine, splendid; Ja JI 437,17* (ajaññam
0
-sailkhataf]l); - 0 -jañña, mfn., very fine; MI 30,29
(kim ev' idai]l hariyati -arp viya ti; PsI 150,2: -af]l viya
ti cokkhacokkharp viya manapamanapaf]l viya, api ca
vadhukapar;¡r;¡akararp viya ti pi vuttarp hoti, vadhuka hi
jani ti vuccati, tassa niyamanapar;¡r;¡akarai]l jaññam,
ubhayatthapi adaravasena va pasaf]lsavasena va
punaruttarp; Ps-! [Be] I 252,13: janassa dassanayogyaf]l
dassaniyarp jaññaf]l); - ajañña, mfn. and n. [cf S.
ajanya], l. (mfn.) unfit for people; disgusting; unclean;
Ja II 437,17* (-af]l jaññasailkhataf]l asucif]l suci-
sammataf]l nanakur;¡apaparipürarp jaññariipaf]l apassato;
437,2s·: -af]l jaññasailkhatan ti pa!ikiilaf]l amanapam eva
baliinaf]l manapan ti sailkhai]l gatarp . . . jaññariipaf]l
apassato ti apassantassa andhabalassa puthujjanassa
manapaf]l sadhuriipaf11 paribhogasabhavaf]l hutva
upatthati) quoted Vism 49,17*; Vis m 652,13 (-ato
duggandhato jegucchato ); Vibh-a 251,33 (kesa nama -a
duggandha jeguccha pa!ikiila ti); - 2. (n.) a portent;
Abh 401.
jañña2 , mfn.,fpp ofjanati qv.
jaññati, see sv .;jan.
jañña, opt. (and absol. ?) ofjanati qv.
jaññu, opt. 3 sg., 3 pl. ofjiinati qv.
jata, m. [?], handle; grip; - ifc see vasi- .
jatati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ja!ati, Wg § 9:18], becomes
entangled; Dhatup 95 Ga!a ... sailghate); Dhatum 118;
Sadd 352,14 Ga!a ... sailghate: -ati ja!a ja!ilo jati); -
pp jatita, mfn., entangled; SI 13,18* Ga!aya -a paja;
Spk I 49,22: -a vinaddha saf]1sibbita ti attho) quoted
Vism 1,11*;- ifc see sakhaja!a-.
jata,f [ts], l. the hair twisted together; tangled or twisted
locks of hair (wom by ascetics; tied together in a roll or
plait?); Abh947; SIV 118,3* (kharajinai]l -a pailko);
Dhp 141 (na naggacariya na -a na pailka ... sodhenti
maccarp avitir;¡r;¡akailkhaf]l); 393 (na -ahi na gottehi na
198 jatila
jacca hoti briihmar;¡o ); J a I 481 ,28* (kim te -ahi
dummedha); IV 387 ,9* (-a ca kesa ajina nivattha);
V 203,11* (yada ca so pakirati ta -ayo); VI 540,25
(Maddif11 -asu gahetva akaMhitva); Ps III 84,7 (udakaf11
acamati -a dhovati); 399,11 (kasayani dhareti -a ca
bandhati); - 2. a tangle; a tangle of branches; desire;
Abh 162 (chando -a); 947; SI 13,1s*foll. (-aya ja!ita
paja ... ko imai]l vija!aye -af]l; Spk I 49,!3foll.: -a ti
tanhaya jaliniya adhivacanai]l . . . ve~ugumbadinai]l
sakhajalasailkhata -a vi ya ti -a) quoted Vism 1,11 *foil.;
Pa!is I 127,2o (n' atth' añño koci -af]l vija!ita aññatra
maya ti); Nett 126,9 (tisso -a ragaja~a dosaja~a
mohaja!a); Mil 130,19 (andhakaro aloko kato -a vija!ita);
- o• -al}f}uva, n., a roll of twisted hair; S I 117,20
(brahmaiJavar;¡r;¡arp abhinimminitva mahantena -ena
ajinakkhipanivattho; Spk I 181 ,24: -ena ti ja~a­
cumba~akena);- 0 '-akase in Ee at Ap-a503,1s is wr
for aja!akase (Be, Se so; Ce jagadakase); -
0
-dhara, mf(n)., (one) who wears his/her hair in twisted
locks; Abh 440 Ga~ilo tu -o); Ja V 407,12* (ice abravi
attamana -af]l);- 0 -dharal}a, n., wearing one's hair in
twisted locks; MI 282,31 (--mattena);
0
-dhari(n), mfn., wearing one's hair in twisted locks;
Ud-a 74,16 (--taya); Ap-a 342,28 Ga~ilo -1 tapaso); -
0
-missa, n., twisted locks of hair; Vin I 33,6 (te jatila
kesamissam -af]l kharikajamissaf]l aggihuttamissaf]l
udake pavahetva; Sp 972,w: kesamissan ti adisu kesa
eva kesamissaf]1, esa nayo sabbattha) = Ap-a 556,25; -
ajata, mfn., untangled; open,free;- -'-akasa, m. [aja!a
+ akasa2], open space, empty space; Ap 468,s (udito
-· -akase, Be, Se so; Ce jagadakase; E e jaladakase;
Ap-a 503,1s: sakalakase udito); Spk III 69,s (pakkhi
-'-akase sukhai]l vicarissami ti); Nidd-a I 151,23
(-' -akaso ti paññattiya natthidhammai]l pa!icca
kathanai]l viya); As 14,25 (-'-akasarp pakkhandif]1su);-
nijjata, mfn., disentangled, free from entanglements;
clear; Ja I 187,6 (ummaggaf]l. .. -arp niggumbarp
katva); Mil 3,25 (dhammavinayaf]l ... -af]l niggumbai]l
katva vibhajissanti ti); Vism 591,5 (riiparp suvikkhalitarp
hoti -arp suparisuddhai]l); Sv 497,17 (paccaye -e
niggumbe katva kathitatta); Ps II 269,3o (pucchita-
pucchitaf]l -af]l niggar;¡!hif]l katva kathesi); Th-a I 226,12
(kammatthiinai]l niggumbai]l -arp katva acikkhanto);-
see also antojara (sv anto).
jati(n), mfn. and m.f [S. ja!in], with matted hair, wearing
one's hair in twisted locks; an ascetic with twisted
locks; Vin I 99,10* (in uddiina: tayo -!); 99,21* (in
uddana: -i); Sn 689 H KaiJhasirivhayo isi); Ja V
196,13* (par;¡r;¡asalagato -i ... idarp vacanam abravi);
VI 563,2* (ahaf]l ... -in! brahmacarinj); Mil128,26 (keci
-in o vakaciradhara honti);- ifc see kaiJha-.
jatila, m. [ts], an ascetic with twisted locks of hair;
Abh 440 (-o tu jatadharo); V in I 24,12foll. (Uruvelayaf]l
tayo -a pa!ivasanti); IV 108,26 (-assa assame); D II
339,25 (aññataro aggiko -o araññayatane paiJr;¡akutiya
vasati); S I 78,1 (satta ca -a satta ca niga9-tha satta ca
acela ... ); Ud 6,13 (Ud-a 74,16: -a ti tapasa, te hi
jatadharitaya idha -a ti vutta); Ja III 236,4* (kharajina -a
pailkadanta dummukhariipa ye 'me japanti mante);
IV 348,13* (ussahito -ena luddenamisacakkhuna);
jatilaka
Ap 384,2o (aharp tena samayena -o uggatapano); 483,12
(nibbanapadarp esanto -esu paribbajirp); Dip 1:38;
Mhv 1:16; - 0
-hi!ana, n., offending an ascetic;
Cp-a 191,24 (--hetu); 0
-hiJita, mfn. and/orn.,
(mfn.) connected with offending an ascetic; offending an
ascetic; (n.) offending an ascetic; Cp 3:2:11 (sa gati -a;
Cp-a 191,23 foil.: -a ti yehi ayarp jatiJo hilito, tesarp
-anarp sa gati sa nipphatti so vipako ti, -a ti va
jati1ahqanahetu sa tassa nipphatti ti evarp e' ettha attho
datthabbo ).
2 hiilgu hiilgujatu ... ); Sp 837,26; Ps IV 53,16 (khuddaka
jatilaka, m. [jatila + ka ], an ascetic with twisted locks of
hair; V in I 71,25 (y e te bhikkhave aggika -a te agata
upasampadetabba; Sp 994,31: -a ti tapasa); MI 282,6
(naharp bhikkhave -assa jatadhiiral).amattena samaññarp
vadami); 282,35 (0 -ttarp); A 111 276,32; Mil202,2 (yada
Devadatto manusso ahosi pavane -o).
jatukakaQQa, see sv jatuka.
jathara, n. [ts], the stomach, the belly;
o• -aggiteja(s), n., the heat or energy of the digestive
Jire; Mil 175,23 (-assa hitarp).
jal,la, mfn. [ts], dull, stupid; Mp III 281,5 (jalo ti -o, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee jalo ti jalo); - see also j~a.
jaQQU, jannu, n. [S. janu], the knee; Abh 276 (j~u -u ca);
D II 160,32 (Kusinara yava sandhisamalasali.kat~ra
0
-mattena odhina mandaravapupphehi SalJthata hoti, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se jannu-); MI 187,34 ( -mattarp pi udakarp
0
saJ?.thati, Ce, Ee so; Be j~uka-; Se jannu-); Ja IV 326,16
(-una patitthaya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce jannuna); PsI 80,27
(tarp -mattarp pi asucibharitarp hoti); III 420,25 (velu
0
bhagavato -mattarp papuJ?.i, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
0
j~umattarp); Dhp-a I 394,8 (dvisu jannusu, Ee so, wr ~
Se jannukesu; Be, Ce jattusu); 111234,6 (-una va
akkamanto, Be so; Se jannuna va; Ce jattuneva; Ee
jannun' eva); Ud-a 414,18* (aghattayanto ... ubho -u, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se ja~Jü; = Spk III 49,1o*: Be, Se j~u; Ce, Ee
2 kal).J?.o); - 0 -bharita, mfn., full of bats; Vism 107,31
janu); - 0
-taggha, mfn. [jaJ?.J?.U + taggha ; cf S.
janudaghna and BSU § 143], reaching to the knee;
Abh 742 (-o jaJ?.J?.Umatte); Ja VI 534,32' (paduma
phulla ... -a upatthara, Be, Ce, Se so; E e jannu-; 535,4·:
jaJ).J?.Upama~Je udake upatthara phulla honti santhata vi ya
khayanti); - 0 -patha, m., a path where one has to go
on one's knees;? (or Npr ?) Nidd I 155,6 (marukantararp
gacchati -arp gacchati ajapatharp gacchati ... ; Nidd-a I
280,2: -an ti jaJ?.ühi gantabbamaggarp);
'-ppamaQarp, adv., to the height of the knees; Ja VI
593,13 (sakalanagare -arp vassapesi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
j~u- ); -se e also jan u.
2 (a) jaññati, produces, creates; Sadd 485,16 (jana janane,
jai}QUka, jannuka, n. (and m., and -a, f) [jaJ?.J?.U + ka ],
the knee; Vin I 291,37 ( -mattesu pi oghesu
0
pavattamanesu, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se jannuka-); D II 17,27
1ayarp . . . kumaro thitako va anonamanto ubhohi
p~italehi -ani parimasati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se jannukani)
=M II 136,16 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jannukani); D III 163,16*
1 phusati karehi ubhohi -ani, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
jannukani); M II 122,12 (-ena ghattesi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
Jannukena); Th 985 (pallaiJ.kena msmnassa -e
nabhivassati) quoted Mil 366,1o*; Ja III 458,19 (yava -a
pathavirp pavisi); Vism 124,24 (-ani rujjanti, Be, Ce so;
Se jannukani; Ee wr -a nirujjhanti); Sp 1337,17 (-ehi
patitthaya); Ps 1 69,32 (so patibujjhitva attano -ani dve
199 v'jan
yakkha ti cintetva pahari); Spk III 26,1o (amaccaputto
-ehi patitva [tittiramarpsarp] mukhena gal).hi, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se jannukehi); Dhp-a 11 57,1 (ekarp padarp
ukkhipitva -e thapetva, Be, Ee so; Ce, Ee jannuke); Pj II
582,s (-ena va -arp ahacca ghagapado); Th-a 1 209,5
(urena -ahi ca bhumiyarp sayanto, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
jannukahi); Mhv 17:25 (jannukehi kart thatu); - see
also januka.
1
jatu , n. [ts], a gum or resin; lac; Abh 305 (lakha -u);
Vin 1 201,33 (anujanami bhikkhave -uni bhesajjani
mutthipasa~Jamatta -una va silesena alliyapetva
3
patisandhaturp sakka); - 0
-mattha, n. [jatu + magha ]
a stick of gum or resin; Sp 1306,28 (talaghatakarp -arp
udakasuddhikadiyanarp ca); - 0 -matthaka, n., a stick
of gum or resin (used as a dildo); Vin IV 261,12 (raja
kho ayye tumhe ciracirarp gacchati katharp tumhe
dharetha ti, -en a ayye ti; 261,25: -arp nama jatumayarp
katthamayarp pitthamaym:p mattikamayarp); V 59,23;
Sp92l,zz (-e ti jatuna kate maghadal).gake, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee jatumagake); Vin-vn 2143; Utt-vn 164; -
0
-masaka, m., a coin made of or marked with lac;
Vin 111 238,3 (rajatarp nama kahapaJ?.o lohamasako
darumasako -o ye vohararp gacchanti; Sp 690,1: -o ti
lakhaya va niyyasena va rüparp samutthapetva
katamasako) -t Psii 209,17 -t As318,22; Pjii 315,1
(hiraññarp ca brahmaJ?.anarp antamaso -o pi nahosi).
2
jatu , j [S. jatüs], a bat; - 0
-kaQQi(n), Npr., "Bat-
eared"; Sn 1096; - 0
-kaQI}ika, Npr., "Bat-eared";
Ap 361,32;- see also jatuka.
jatuka, jatuka, jatuka, f [S. jatuka], a bat; Abh 646 (-a);
Sadd 921,4 (mattabhedo tava . . . -a jatuka);
0
(a)-kaQQa, mfn., bat-eared, with ears like a bat's;
Sp 1028,30 (musikakal).!).O va -o va khuddakahi kaJ?.J?.a-
sakkhalikahi samannagato, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee jatuka-
(senasanarp tava ragacaritassa ... rajokiJ?.J?.arp -arp
oluggaviluggarp; Vism-mht [Be] I 129,11: -an ti
adhomukhahi olambamanamukhahi khuddakavaggulihi
2
paripUJ?.J?.arp);- see also jatu .
2
jatukka, see sv catukka .
jattu, n. [S. jatru], the collar-bone; the shoulder; Abh 264;
Dhp-a I 394,8 (dvisu -usu, Be, Ce so; Ee jannusu; Se
jannukesu); II 55,14 (dvinnarp -unarp upari padarani
datva, Ce, E e so; Be, Se arpsakutanarp); Dath 4:49
(phutakumudakalape -un' eke vahanta).
v'jan [S. v)an, janati, janayati, jayate], pr. 3 sg.
sakammako 'yal)l dhatu, -ati t' imassa ruparp, karoti ti
attho); - pr. 3 sg. (b)janeti, -ayati [10th class or
caus.], brings into being; generates; produces; Vin II
89,15 (so sali.ghe vivadarp -eti); D II 190,29 (ettha deva
chandarp -ehi); M 1 25,17 (na chandarp -essati na
vayamissati); SI 37,18* (taJ?.ha -eti purisarp); Ja VI
143,25* (dukkhal)l kho me -ayasi); 576,28' (bhiyyo
sokarp -etha mm:p; 577,4·: -etha man ti -etha me, ayam
eva va patho); Nidd I 146,18 (puthu kilese -enti ti
puthujjana); Ap 353,2o (-ayissanti); Kv 525,3o (paro
parassa alobhm:p kusalamülarp -eti); Pet 62,2 (yo ca
suramerayapanm:p anuyuñjati ... amitte -ayati, Ce so;
.Jjan
Be, Ee amitta -ayanti); Mil 94,14 (-em' ima111 sippesü ti
janakacitta111 upaghapetabba111); Vism 108,29 (plti-
pamojj~ -ayati); Sp 348,14 (na parajika111 -eti); Spk 1
94,24 (akkhara111 hi pad~ -eti); Sadd 485,16/oll. Gana
janane . . . karite . . . -ayati, sukh~ -eti -ayatl ti
janako ... tattha -eti -ayatl ti rüpani curadigal,l~ patva
suddhakatturüpani bhavanti, karoti ti hi tes~ attho,
hetukattuvasena pi tadattho vattabbo, nibbattetl ti); -
opt. 3 sg. (a) janaye, Ja VI 526,33* (nandi111 so -aye
mam~); Pj 1 248,15 (ida111 metta111 manasa111 bhavaye
punappuna -aye vacNhaye ); (b) janayetha, Th 370 (yo
ve ... -ayetha pem~); (e) janeyya, A IV 72,18 (aggi111
pi -eyya dhüma111 pi -eyya); (d) janayeyyatha,? Ja V
347,4* (so 'y~ eva111gato pakkh! dijo paramadhammiko
madisassa hi luddassa -ayeyyatha maddava111, eds so;
347,31': attani mettacitt~ janesi); - part.pr.
(a) janenta, m.f( -entl)n., Ja II 407,23 (tasmi111 ussah~
-ente); Pj II 100,25 (kilesaturabhava111 -enta); Pv-a 32,23
(sa peti ... s~veg~ -entl); (b) janaya(t), mfn., Ja VI
165,21* (Kasln~ -ay~ bhay~); Ap 376,9;
(e)janayanta, m.f(-ayantl)n. andf, l. (mfn.)producing,
generating; Ja VI 155,15* (bhay~ assa -ayanto);
Vism 417,30 (sürabhava111 -ayanta111 ... suriyamai_l~alal11
patubhavati); Sp 8S,2o; Mhv 1:4 (-ayanta); - 2. (/.)a
mother; Ja V 268,26* (amanussa... hantar~
-ayantiya ... pl!ayanti; 274,15': hantara111 -ayantiya ti
matughatak~); 330,6* (tena sa -ayanti ti janettl tena
vuccati); (d) janayamana, mfn., Sv 866,3o; Spk III 190,1
(vayodhatu viññatti111 -ayamana uppajjati); - neg.
ajanayamana, mfn., Nidd I 51 ,23; - aor. 3 sg. (a) janesi,
ajanesi, V in II 17,15 (sa potak~ -esi); M II 177,9
(ajanesi vata me bhav~ Gotamo samai_lesu
samai_lapemal11); Ja VI 213,16* (mano manuss~ ajanesi
pubbe); 485,11*; Sp 5,17 (bhikkhün~ ussah~ -esi);
Mhv 22:7 (putta111-esi); (b)janayi, Th! 162 (Maya -ayi
Gotama111); (e) janayittha, D III 177,28*; (d) ajan!,
Ap 507,13 (tato me ajan! mata); - absol. (a) janetva,
MI 306,3o; A IV 72,18; Sn 695 (vipul~ -etva p1ti111. Ee
so, me; Be, Ce -etva; Se -etvana; Pj II 489,16: vipula
-etva ti vipul~ -etva, ayam eva va pat}lo, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se vipul~ -etvana ti vipula111 -etva ... ); Ja III
184,17; Ap 327,27; PsI 4,3 (sotukamat~ -etva);
(b)janetvana, JaVI 27,17*; Ap94,19; (e)janayitva,
Mil154,4; Vism 54,22; Ps II 304,22; (d) janayitvana,
Ap 150,18; Cp 1:7:2;- pp janita, mfn. [ts], brought into
being, produced; Th 150 (ko hi tassa janen' attho janena
-ena va); Kv 478,28 (vippatisariy~ -an ti); Nidd I
308,2o (puthujja puthujjanehi -a); Sp 400,17 (apuññ~
upacita111 -a111 va); Ps II 129,13 (tal,lhaya --tta); III412,1
(yaya tumhe -a sa vo janika mata, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ya
sa tumhe janika, prob. wr); - ifc see nimisa-; - janita
in Ee at Ps V 64,15 is prob. wr for janika (Be, Ce, Se so);
- fpp (a) janetabba, mfn., Mil412,22* (bhiyyo haso
janetabbo ); Ps IV 31 ,15; Nidd-a I 294,22 Ganetabbassa
ariyamaggassa kusa1o ); (b) janitabba, mfn., Sadd 858,7;
- see also ajaneti; - pr. 3 sg. (e) jayati, jayate, is
born, is produced; comes into existence; grows;
Dhatup 428 Gana janane); Dhatum 664 Gan' uppade);
Vin III 50,15 (yattha pubba1,11,1~ va apara1,11,1~ va -ati);
V 226,14* (yassa -ati vimati parivarena chijjati); D 1 97,7
200 .Jjan
(tes~ sa111vasa111 anvaya putto -etha); II 30,26 (kicch~
vatay~ 1oko apanno -ati ca jlyati ca mlyati ca); S I
34,16* (sace enti manussatta111 daFdde -are ku1e); 149,17*
(purisassa hi jatassa kut}lañ -ate mukhe); 168,10* (kattha
have -ati jatavedo); IV 249,4 (patirüpe ku1e -eyyan ti);
A I 240,4 (ajj' eva me dhaññani -antu sve va gabbh!ni
hontu uttarasve va paccantü ti); Dhp 193 (dullabho
purisajañño na so sabbattha -ati); 212 (piyato -atl
soko); Sn 296 (gavo no parama mitta yasu -anti
osadha); 920 (majjhe yatha samuddassa ümi no -ati);
Ja III 208,23 (nigrodho nama yamhi rukkhe -ati
va~~hanto t~ naseti); 459,13* (thiyo va tassa -anti na
puma -are kule, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee thiyo tassa pajayanti);
V 72,2* (yavanto udabindüni kayasmi111 nipati111su me
tavanto gal,l~ü -etha; ? 74,1w: gal,l~ü -etha ti gai_l~a
-i111su); V 100,2o· (punappuna s~sare -ati e' eva mlyati
ca); Nidd II 164,35 (dvikkhattu111 -ati dijo); Ap 46,22
(kopo buddhe na -ati); Mi153,34 ( -eyya so aggl ti); Ps V
12,12 (vapita111 sass~ na -ati); Pj I 30,25 (deve va
vassante kaddamo -ati); Ud-a 140,23 (aya111 nama gati
1mma nama kamrnuna -ati); Sadd 485,24 Ganl
patubhave: lkaranto 'ya111 akammako dhatu . . . putto
-ati, jato); - fu t. 3 sg. (a) jayissati, Vin I 294,5
(pamujja111 -issati); Ja IV 473,23 (sace tava gehe putto
-issati); Ps III 290,2* (tattha -issate aya111); (b) jayihiti,
Ja V 165,21* (sutvana me -ihiti ppasado; 167,18':
mayh~ pasado somanassa111 -issati); - part.pr.
(a) jayanta, mfn., Sn 208 (yo jatam ucchijja na
ropayeyya -antam assa nanuppavecche); Ap 154,2
(-antassa Vipassissa aloko vi pulo ahu pathavl ca
pakampittha); (b) jayamana, mfn., V in IV 259,6 (puna
-amana patta seta sampajji111su); A III 43,16 (matapitaro
putta111 icchanti kule -aman~); Ja IV 26,10* (yasmi111 ca
-amanasmi111 sadattha111 navabujjhati); Ap 369,33
(imassa -amanassa devatte atha manuse dharessati sada
chatt~); Kv 285,18 (bodhisattassa -amanassa); Pj 1 78,2
(khandhesu -amanesu jlyamanesu mlyamanesu ca
khai_le kha1,1e tv~ bhikkhu -ase ca jlyase ca mlyase ca
ti); - jayamana in Ce, Ee at Ps III 409,4 is wr for
janayamana (Be, Se so); - neg. ajayamana, mfn., M III
246,22 (ajayamano ki111 jiyyissati); - aor. 3 sg.
(a) jayatha, ajayatha, Ja V 411,8* (dh!ta mahindassa
mahesi -atha); VI 581,20* (nemighoso ajayatha);
Ap 196,17 (parí! ah o ajayatha); Bv 11:2 (yamhi buddho
ajayatha); Mhv 5:48 (pema111 e' asmi111 ajayatha);
(b) jayi, ajayi, Ja IV 305,9 (aparo pi putto -i); Ap 501,19
(tada ajayi Siddhattho); Sadd 855,16 (ajayl ti jato);
1 sg. (a) ajayi(l11). Ja VI 238,23 (ajayi111 nandane vane);
Ap 555,18 (gamakamhi ajayi 'ha111); (b) ajayis~, A IV
90,11* (acNhe ajayis~ kule); 3 pl. (a) jayi111su, Ja IV
290,1s; Ap 597 ,13; Kv 457,13 Gatidhamma satta m a
-i111su ti); Mil 203,19; Mhv 19:58 (att}la ari.kura -i111su);
(b) ajayisu111, D III 171 ,15* (na lomaküpesu duve
ajayisu111); Mhv 4:45; - absol. jayitva, S IV 249,6
(patirüpe kule -itva); Sp 764,29; - pp jata, mfn. and n.
[ts], l. (mfn.) (i) born; produced; grown, growing,
arisen; who has been born; Abh 1077; Vin III 162,36
(yato ah~ bhante -o); D II !6,2 (putto te deva -o);
118,3o (y~ t~ -~ bhüta111 sankhat~
pa1okadhammal11); 265,17* (van de te pitar~ ... yena -a
 201
si); MI 75,t3 (rukkho visame bhumibhage -o); S l
132,29* (-assa maral)aiTl hoti -o dukkhani passati);
134,1* (atthi Sakyakule -o buddho); S III 39,24 (tilp~
-aiTl patubhut~); Dhp 331 (atthamhi -amhi sukha
sahaya); It 70,22* (saiTlsagga vanatho -o); Sn 780
(vadaiTl ca -aiTl muni no upeti); 828 (ete vivada
samal)esu -a); Th 553 (-a -a marantldha evaiTldhamma
hi piil)ino); Ja VI 526,19* (assatthaiTl va pathe -aiTl);
Ap27,t9 (udake -a kumuda); Spki 137,3o (--tta yeva
jaramaral)ato mokkho nama natthi); Mp 11 176,1s
(nlcakule --taya); Mhv 5:9 (-a Sabbatthavadlhi
Kassapiya); - ifc see anujata, anto-, avajata, ama-
(sv ama3); - (ii) become; present, apparent; M 11 75,5
(yada me ... passeyyasi sirasmiiTl palitani -ani); Ja I
63,29 (bodhisatto . . . nikkhamitva ca puna nagaraiTl
apaloketukamo -o); 138,15 (mahallako 'mhi -o); 186,2
(Devadattassa parivaro mahanto -o); 333,5 (paccüsakale
-e); 406,15 (bodhisattassa kalakiriyasamayo -o); 11 12,10
(tesaiTl veribhavo saka1anagare pakaro -o); 410,9
(Anathapil)giko duggato hutva puna issaro -o); V 337,1
(tato paghaya Nalagiri Dhanapa1ako nama -o):
Mhv 35:107 (tava issariye -e); - ifc see CUI)I)aka-; -
(iii) of earth: natural; productive; ? Vin IV 33,7 foil.
(dve parhaviyo -a ca pathavl ajata ca pathavl, -a nama
pathavl suddhapaiTlsu suddhamattika appapasiil)a ...
yebhuyyena paiTlsu yebhuyyena mattika, adaggha pi
vuccati -a parhavl, yo pi paiTlsupuñjo va mattikapuñjo
va atirekacatumas~ ovagho ayaiTl pi vuccati -a
parhavl); Vin-vn 972; 973: - (iv) very frequently ifc
with noun: possessed of; full of; involved in; - see
agha- (sv agha\ attha- (sv attha2 ), adhikaral)a-, umi-,
1 namassati); Mil 220,21 (ummattako khittacitto jalitaiTl pi
kalaha-, gal)thi-, gal)thika- (sv gal)thika ), thama-,
domanassa-, pakkha- (sv pakkha\ somanassa-; -
2. (n.) (i) a collection of things forming a class:
Abh 630; 1077; - ifc: a kind of, a sort of,' the class o.f.
- see ailga- (sv ailga2), catu- (sv catu[r]); - (ii) birth;
being bom; ? iic see below; - -apacca,f, a woman
who has bom a child; Abh 235; - jatiimal)ga, m. ?
[cfiimal)ga],? Vv-a 10,5 (mayasaddo ... may~ nissaya
hemaya -o dar! subha ti ettha paññattiy~, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se jatamal)go);- --'ovaraka [or jati + ovaraka], m.,
a lying-in room; (or the room where one was bom; ?)
Ja V 125,22 (Sariputtathero ... -'-ovarake parinibbayi);
Spk III 214,25 (atthi bhante Magadhesu Na!akagame
-' -ovarako tatthahaiTl parinibbayissaml ti); 217,7
1-'-ovarakaiTl patijaggatha); - --kamma, n., a birth-
ceremony; Pv-a 198,24; Mhv 62:45 (--kammadik~
YidhiiTl);- --kammaiTl in Ee, Se at Th!437 is wr; read
sattahajatakaiTl m~ with Be, Ce; - --kalako in Ee at
Ps III 124,2o is wr for --kalato (Be, Ce, Se so); -
--gama, m. [jata + gama2], the village of one 's birth;
Thl-a 213,18 (so hi tassa --gamo); Ap-a 304,31; -
--rrhana, n., the place of one 's birth; J a II 80,6 (idaiTl me
--ghanaiTl vagghitaghanaiTl); Ps II 135,n (jatibhumi ti
--ghiinaiTl); - --divasa, m., the day of one's birth;
Ja IV 138,5 (etassa hi --divase yeva mata mari);
Sv 440,3 (mahapurisassa hi --divase dasasahassi-
lokadhatu kampi); Bv-a 54,3 (Rahulabhaddassa
--divase); - --nagara, n., the town of one 's birth;
.\lp III 75,25 (Kassapassa sammasambuddhassa
--nagaraiTl); Ap-a 47,22 (tassa bhagavato --nagaraiTl
Baral)asl nama ahosi); --nagaradika, mfu.,
conceming the town of birth etc; Bv-a 129,3
(sabbabuddhan~ --nagaradiko paricchedo dassetabbo );
- --tilpa 1, n., l. gold; Abh 487; Vin II 239,38 (pava!aiTl
rajataiTl --tilp~); M l 38,15 (ukkamukhaiTl va pan'
agamma --rüp~ parisuddhaiTl hoti); S V 92,2 (pañc'
ime bhikkhave --tilpassa upakkilesa); Pv 19:5 (pahut~
me --tilpaiTl); Th 790 (kame adittato disva --tilpani
satthato; Th-a III 41,20 foll.: katakatappabheda sabba-
suval)l)avikatiyo); Ja IV 102,8* (na --tilpena hananti
1oha1Tl); VI 574,14* (nikkhaiTl va -assa); Ap 68,9; -
--tilpaparirupaka, n., false gold; what looks like gold
(but is not); S 11 224,15; Spk II 202,3; - 2. a piece of
gold, a gold coin; Ja VI 577,16* (--tilpasahass~ ca
2
puttanaiTl dehi nikkay~); - --tilpa , n., one 's natural
(naked) body;? Sv 142,26 (assa cora vatthani
acchindiiTlsu, so pai)J)ena va til)ena va paticchadetuiTl pi
ajananto --tilpen' eva ekaiTl gamaiTl pavisi); Ud-a 78,23
(so vatthiinaiTl bhassitva samudde patitatta --tilpen' eva
samuddatlre nipanno); 127,5 (Paracaraya ... ummadaiTl
patva .. . --tilpen' eva carantiya); Thi-a 108,3 (sa ...
nivatthavatthaiTl pi patamanaiTl na sañjani ... --tilpen'
eva . . . vi1apanti paribbhamati); --veda,
--veda(s), m., jire; Abh 33 (--vedo); SI 168,10* (kagha
have jayati --vedo); Ud 93,23* (jalato --vedaso
anupubbüpasantassa yatha na ñayate gati, Be, Ce so; Se
--vedassa; Ee wr --vedasso) = Ap 543,15; Ja I 214,17*
(--veda patikkama; 214,22' foil.: --veda ti aggiiTl alapati,
so hijato va vediyati paññayati tasma --vedo ti vuccati);
V 326,27* (jalaq1 va --vedato ); VI 528,25* (--vedaiTl
--vedaiTl akkamati); Ps IV 102,13 (apparisandhika
nirupadano viya --vedo parinibbayanti, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se anupadana viya --veda); Nidd-a II 6,28
(nirindhanassa viya --vedassa); - --s~vagghitagama,
--saiTlvugghagama, m., the village where one was bom
and grew up; Pv-a 149,7 (tassa --s~vugghagamaiTl
puna-d-eva anayitva, Be, Se so; Ce --s~vagghita-; Ee
wr --saiTlvagghitaiTl gam~); - --(s)sara, m. [jata +
sara3], a natural pond or lake; V in I 111,4 (sabbo
--ssaro asimo); Ja V 406,21·; Ap 276,14 (--ssaraiTl
samoggayha); Sp 1052,23 (--saro nama yena kenaci
khal)itva akato sayaiTljatasobbho samantato udakena
purito tighati); Mhv 10:77; - ajatasara, m., not a
natural pond; a man-made pond; Sp 1056,1 (sace ...
udakatthaya avat~ va pokkharai)I-adini va khal)anti
t~ rhan~ ajatasaro hoti);- --sasana, n., news of the
birth, that someone has been bom; Dhp-a l 85,6
(Rahulakumarassa --sasan~ sutva); Ap-a 325,1
(Suddhodanamaharajena pesitaiTl kumarassa --sasan~
sutva); - ajata, mfn., l. unbom; who has not been
bom, not (yet) come into being; not present; not subject
to birth; MI 163,1 (jatidhamme ad!nav~ viditva -~
anuttar~ yogakkhem~ nibban~ pariyesati); Ud 80,23
(atthi bhikkhave -aiTl abhütaiTl akataiTl asañkhataiTl;
Ud-a 395,2foil.: na jat~ na nibbattan ti -~ ... va ...
ay~ e' etassa asañkhatakatabhütabhavo sabbena
sabbaiTl ajatidhammatta ti dassetuiTl -an ti vutt~);
Ja IV 26,6* (yamhi jate na passati -e sadhu passati so ...
 Vjan
kodho ); Patis I 70,21' (-a¡p. jhapeti jatena, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee ñapeti; Patis-a 280,33: attano santane patubhiltena
tena tena lokuttarajjhanena ta¡p.samailgl puggalo -am
eva ta¡p. ta¡p. kilesa¡p. jhapeti dahati); Vibh l ,20 (katama¡p.
rilpa¡p. anagata¡p., ya¡p. rilpa¡p. -a¡p. abhilta¡p. ... ); Dhp-a I
228,2o (nibbana¡p. ... --tta na jiyyati na miyyati tasma
amatan ti vuccati); Th!-a 163,16 (ya¡p. kiñci dukkha¡p.
nama ta¡p. sabba¡p. jato eva nigacchati na -o); - 2. of
earth: stony; unproductive, barren;? Vin IV 33,!3foll.
(-a nama pathavl suddhapasaq.a suddhasakkhara ...
yebhuyyena marumba yebhuyyena valika, daggha pi
vuccati -a pathavl, yo pi pa¡p.supuñjo va mattikapuñjo
va omakacatumasa¡p. ovagho aya¡p. pi vuccati -a
pathavl);- atijiita, mfn. [ts], superior to one's parents;
It 63,1 (It-a II 42,29: -o ti attano guq.ehi matapitaro
atikkamitva jato, tehi adhikaguq.o ti attho); Ja VI 380,24'
(anuppanna¡p. yasa¡p. uppadento -o nama); Ps III 404,14;
-se e also anujata, avajata;- dujjiita, mfn., of ignoble
birth; ignoble; DI 93,26 (-o ... akulaputto); JaiV 77,11'
(aha¡p. jatisampanno ime -a ti); Pj II 192,13 (-a ete
kulassa angarabhilta); - sujiita, mfn., l. well-bom, of
good birth; noble; V in IV 160,18 (khattiyo nama ubhato
-o hoti matito ca pitito ca); DI 93,19 (-o ... Ambagho
maq.avo kulaputto ca ... ); Ja II 138,14* (attho atthi
-asmi¡p.; 138,18': -e pi purise vugghi atthi, jatisampatti
hi pi icchitabba yeva); V 421,22 (itthlna¡p. -ana¡p.
kuladh!tana¡p. sammapatipannana¡p., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
sajatana¡p.; 423,8·: -anan ti samanajatikana¡p., Ce, Ee so;
Be samajatikana¡p.; Se sajatanan ti samanajatikana¡p.); -
2. well-grown; growing well; well-formed; of an
excellent kind; D Ili 171,14' (uq.q.a -a bhamukantare
ahu); MI 124,34 (salalaghiyo ujuka -a; Ps II 98,24: -a ti
susaq.thita); Sn 548 (paripuq.q.akayo suruci -o
carudassano suvaq.q.avaq.q.o si bhagava; Pj JI 453,1: -o ti
iirohapariq.ahasampattiya saq.thanasampattiya ca
sunibbatto) = Th 818; Ja IV 153,22 (eka¡p. -a¡p.
ujuka¡p. . . . mangalasalarukkha¡p. disva);
fpp jayitabba, mfn., Th! 455 (punappuna¡p. jayitabbassa;
Th!-a 257,29: aparapara¡p. upapajjamanassa); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. jiipeti 1 , -ayati 1 , generales; produces; brings
into being; Vibh-a 409,14 (-eti janeti pavattetl ti);
Sadd 485,28 (jan! patubhave ... kiirite -eti -ayati); -
absol. japetva1, Vibh-a 409,27; pp japita, mfn.,
brought into being, produced; Vibh-a 409,29 (-ita janita
pavattita);- japitattha, mfn., with its goal brought into
being; ? Vibh 309,42 (atthajapika pañña japitattha
pañña); 324,29 (catilsu bhilmlsu vipake arahato
uppannaya abhiññaya uppannaya samapattiya kiriya-
vyakate pañña japitattha pañña; Vibh-a 409,26foll.:
kamavacaravipakattha¡p. japetva thita ti japitattha ...
sabba pi va esa attano attano karaq.ehi -ita janita
pavattita saya¡p. pi atthabhilta ti japitattha); - see also
jan ati.
jana 1, mj(-!)n., and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) generating;- see
janlpita(r), janlmata(r); - 2. (m.) (sg.) people; the
people; people of the household; ( rarely) a person;
(pi.) people; persons; creatures; Abh 93 (jantu -o loko);
Vin I 124,4 (maya¡p. e' amha cattaro -a); 276,8 (-a¡p.
ussaretva); D II 89,28* (kulla¡p. hi -o pabandhati tiq.q.a
medhavino -a); 262,14' (modanti saha bhutehi savaka te
202 jana
-e suta; Sv 694,29: -e suta vissuta pakata abhiññata);
111 83,19 (dhammo hi ... sertho -' etasmi¡p.; Sv 864,1: -e
etasmim imasmi¡p. Ioke ti attho); 169,16 (maha 'ssa -o
anvayiko hoti); SI 33,17* (ke -a saggagamino); 197,13'
(-o -asmi¡p. vinayassu chanda¡p.; Spk I 288,9: tva!Tl -o
aññasmi¡p. -e chandaraga¡p. vinayassu); IV 306,19 (so
nato ... -a¡p. haseti rameti); A I 69,12 (bahujanasukhaya
bahuno -assa atthaya); Dhp 99 (ramaq.lyani araññani
yattha na ramatl -o); 222 (tam aha¡p. siirathi¡p. brilmi
rasmiggaho itaro -o); 249 (dadati ve yathasaddha¡p.
yathapasadana¡p. -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadanti); Sn 807
(eva¡p. pi piyayita¡p. -a¡p. peta¡p. kalakata¡p. na passati);
Th 149 foll. (-o -amhi sambaddho -am ev' as sito
-o ... ko hi tassa -en' attho ); 883 (pamadam anuyuñjanti
bala dummedhino -a); Th! 157 (yo ma¡p. dukkha
pamocesi añña¡p. ca bahuka¡p. -a¡p.); Ja I 72,24 (aya¡p.
ettako -o ma¡p. ekaka¡p. sandhaya mahanta¡p.
vayama¡p. . . . karoti); III 288,15* (puq.q.aya¡p. don!
suvaminl thita bahuke -e pasapaq.ike no ca kho me
patibhati bhuñjitu¡p., Be, Ce, Ee so, sg.nom. ? Se bahuko
-o; 288,21' foll.: na kevala¡p. ca ayya va, añño pi bahuko
-o pasapiil).iko thito ); IV 4 70, 18' (-a¡p. so paripucchatha;
472,3·: -an ti attano santikavacaraJTl paricarikajana¡p.);
V 102,24' (raghasmi¡p. kiltarajassa bahu adhammiko -o);
VI 301,21* (katva gharesu kiccani anusasitva saka¡p.
-a¡p.); 525,14' (so -o ta¡p. avacasi ye tatthasu¡p.
samagata); Nidd I 121 ,2s (-a ti khattiya ca brahmana ca
vessa ca sudda ca gahanha ca pabbajita ca deva ca
manussa ca); Ap 63,9 (sabbe -e hasayanto); Bv 2:158
(yatha pi udaka¡p. nama kalyiil).e papake -e sama¡p.
pharati sltena); Cp 1:9:45 (Maddi phala¡p. aharati poseti
sa tayo -e); 2:8:7 (saha -en' okkamitva; Cp-a 166,21:
mayha¡p. parijanena saddhi¡p.); Vibh 351,9 (ekacco
assaddho samano saddho ti ma¡p. -o janatil ti icchati);
Mi1409,27 (rukkho upagatana¡p. anuppavinhana¡p. -ana¡p.
chaya¡p. deti); Sp 46,17 (aya¡p. -o sabbo pi
vikkhittacitto ); Ps 11 391 ,2s (seqhissa hi gehe ... sabbo
-o uposathiko hoti); - jano in Ee at It-a II 115,5 is wr
for jino (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc see adhama-, antajana,
anto-, ama- (sv ama\ geha- (sv geha\ pacura-; -
0
adhipa, m., a king; Abh 334; SI 86,n•; Pv 20:6 (purato
-assa); Ja IV 134,1*; Ap 60,7 (imasmiJTl bhaddake kappe
eko aSÍJTl -o); - 0
adhibhü, m., a king; Ap 79,6 (raja
asi¡p. -u); - o• -iilaya, m., a pavilion, a temporary hall;
Abh 210 (maq.gapa¡p. va -o); - 0 '-inda, m., a lord of
men; a king; a god; D 11 275,s• (buddha¡p. namassama
jina¡p. -a¡p.); Ja IV 357,19' (janindasegha ti -ana¡p.
devana¡p. senha ti); 449,17* (ahetuna ghatayate -o);
Ap 13,21 (-a lokappad!pa ... paccekabuddha);
0
-kheda, m., physical distress of the people; Mhv 34:94
(akariya -a¡p.);- -tii,f [cf BHS janita], an assemblage
0
of people; people; living beings; Vin 1 5,33* (yatha pi
passe -a¡p. samantato ... sokavatiq.q.a¡p. -a¡p. apetasoko
avekkhassu); DI 151,27 (sadhu bhante ... 1abhata¡p. esa
-a bhagavanta¡p. das san aya ti; Sv 310,25: esa -a ti esa
janasamuho ); III 166,22* (ubbadhanaya paritajjanaya va
na hethayl -am ahethako ahu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jantum);
MI 230,32 (ki¡p. hi te Aggivessana mahatl -a karissati);
S I 42,2o* (ki¡p.sudha bh!ta -a aneka); Pv 30:8 (puja¡p.
akasi -a u]ara¡p.); Ja III 442,7* (nisedhayanto -a¡p.
jana
tathavidharr); Ap 60,9 (soharr pañcasu sllesu thapetva
-arr bahurr): 72,3o (ima ca -a tugha kararr kubbarr na
tappare, Be, Se so; Ce kubbantanappakarr; Ee kubbanti
tappare); Mil336,s* (vyadhitarr -arr disva); Sv 267,n
(janetasmin ti -asmirr, pajaya ti attho, ? Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be janitasmirr) = Ps lii 34,1 (Ee so: Be, Ce, Se
janitasmirr) = Spkl 219,17 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
janitasmirr); Mhv 17:65 (-aya hitarr sukharr ca); -
pacchima janata, people in the future; the people who
follow; Vin 11 108,19 (pacchima -a dinhanugatirr
apajjati ); 128,3o (pacchimarr -arr tathagato anukampati
ti); M I 23,37 (anukampitarüpa vatayarr bhota Gotamena
pacchima -a);- 0 -pada, 0 -padi(n), 0 -padika, see svv;
0
-pa1obhika, (m)f(n)., a seducer of people;
Mil122,2o (coriya dhuttiya ... -aya ti, Se so; Be
andhajanapalobhikaya ti; Ce, Ee andhajanavilopikaya
ti); 0
-maraka, m., a killer of people;
Thi-a 172,15 foil.; --majjhagata, mfn., among
killers; ? (having a killer within; ?) Thi 217 (appekacca
sakirr vijatayo galake api kantanti sukhumaliniyo visani
khadanti --majjhagata ubho pi vyasanani anubhonti;
cfThi-a 172,15 foil.: -o vuccati müJhagabbho, matu-
gamajanassa marako, majjhagata -a kucchigata, müJha-
gabbha ti attho ... apare pana bha1_1anti -a nama kilesa);
-
0
-rasasmp.va!,hJhito in Ee at Sp 209,22: read
subhojanarasasarrva<;l<;lhito with Be, Ce, Se;
0
-Va(t), mfn., crowded with people; loe. 0 -vati, in a
place filled with people; A IV 172,3* (sa1_1havaco o -vati
sama1_1o viya bhasati; Mp IV 75,9: 0 -vatl ti janamajjhe);
-
0
-sambadha, m., a throng or crowd of people; a
press ofpeople; Sp 653,3; Ud-a 307,17 (--bhayena); -
nijjanasambadha, mfn., free from crowds of people, not
crowded with people; Vism 342,12 (nijjana-
sambadhani ... tapovanani, Ce, Se so; Be, E e nijana-);
Bv-a 21,15;- -sammadda, m. a press or trampling of
0
people; Sp 305,21 (ko Idise -e kasavarr lacchati);
Vv-a 158,28 (mara1_1abhayabhitesu manussesu
palayantesu -ena patitarr Pesavatirr mahajano
akkamitva maresi); - du.üana, m.pl., bad people;
Mil 246,17 (ime -a ... pabbajitva patinivattitva); 250,24;
Sadd 695,23; - sajana, mfn., with its people; Cp 3:3:3
1vasudharr ... sanigamarr -arr: Cp-a 197,s: aparimitena
parivarajanena saddhirr -arr).
jana2 , n. (and -a,f ?) [cf S., BHS jana, jana], generating;
birth; ? S I 38,26* (jara ajarasa mittarr vatthu tiJ.li janani
ca. in uddana for three sections beginning kirr su
janeti ... ); Nidd-a 1 272,3o (puthu sabbagatihi avughita ti
ettha janetabba jayanti va ettha ti -a, gatiyo, puthü -a
etesan ti puthujjana, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be janetabba
_ianayanti).
janaka, mfi-ika)n., m., and janika,f (and janika, mfn.)
[e( S. janaka], begetting; generating, producing; (one)
"·ho gives or has given birth (to); (m.) a progenitor, a
tather; a parent; (f) a mother; Abh 243 (tato tu -o pita);
2..1-f (janettl janika); Vin IV 335,4 (matapitaro nama -a
Yuccanti); Ja II 261,4· (tena bhütapacanirr paci ti vuccati,
pajanin ti pi patho, janikarr nibbattakin ti attho, Be, Ce
so: Se janitarr nibbattitan ti attho; Ee jatikirr nibbattikin
ti attho) =PsI 58,26 (eds janikarr nibbattikan ti); Nidd 1
S. 6 (yo rago ... maya janika sañjananl) = Dhs 1059 =
203 janapada
Vibh 361,n; Nidd 11 207,23 (pita ti yo so -o); Ap 429,23
(imassa janika mata Maya nama bhavissati); Bv 2:206
(Sumedha nama janika Dlpail.karassa satthuno );
Mil 218,22 (puttarr yoniya janayitva mata janika ti
vuccati); Vism 601,26foll. (catubbidharr kammarr -arr
upatthambhakarr upapiJakarr upaghatakan ti); PsI
300,29 (tass' eva kho pana dukkhassa janikarr
samutthapikarr purimatal_lharr): III412,1 (janika mata ti
yaya tumhe janita sa vo janika mata, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
janimata ti ya sa tumhe janika sa vo janika mata, prob.
wr); 412,4 (yo janiko pita); V 12,26 (patisandhi-
nibbattakarr pana kammarr 0 -kammarr nama, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr -dammam); Spk II 29,17 (tass'
0
attabhavassa -anarr avijjasaiJ.kharanarr dighaka1o ); Pj II
160,14 (maggadhammassa 0 -tta); Th-a II 259,34 (ka1yiil_la-
dhammanarr matubhütarr -an ti attho); Mhv 63:17;
Sadd 865,19 (janeti ti -o); - ifc see patibhana-; -
ajanaka, mf(-ika)n., not generating, not producing; who
does not give or has not given birth (to); Sp 1023,4
(manussitthibhüta pi ajanika posavanika mata); Sv 105,6
(vañjho ti ... aphalo kassaci -o ti); PsI 192,32 (ye keci
akusala dhamma patisandhijanaka va -a va);
Vibh-a 154,14 (--tta).
janati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dhvanati? or cf S. janati, "produces
(a song ofpraise etc)"?] produces a sound; Ja VI 64,19*
(kasma te eko bhujo -ati eko na -atl bhujo; 64,z1·: -ati ti
sanati saddarr karoti) quoted Sadd 397,22foll. (jana ...
sadde: -ati).
janana, mfi -l)n., n., and -i,f [ts], l. (mfrz.) producing;
causing; Sadd 865,8 (panudatl ti panudano evarr ... -o);
- ifc see anattha- (sv attha2), ananda-, dukkha-, nandi-,
bhaya-;- 2. (n.) birth; production; producing, bringing
into being; Sv 797,29 (-arr jati); Dhp-a III 454,3 (tisu
bhavesu sattanarr -ato ta1_1ha mata nama); Ap-a 469,11
(anandarr tutthirr -ato Anando nama paccekabuddho
ti); Cp-a 140,22 (bhayarr -ato bhayanakadassano);
Sadd 865,11 (jayate -arr): - 3. (-I,f) a mother;
Abh 244; Th-a II 127,12 (sakaputtassa mataran ti mama
orasaputtassa -irr).
-jananaka in Ee at Ja IV 183,15" (bhayajananako) is prob.
wr for -janaka (Be, Ce, Se so).
-janananto in Ee at Spk I 129,12 (pitipamojjasaiJ.khata-
sammodajanananto) is wr for -jananato (Be, Ce, Se so).
janapada, m. [ts.] (pl. nom. -a, -ani; acc. -e, -ani), a
country; a district; the country, a country district (as
opposed to a town); the people of a district, a
community; Abh 1089 (dese -o jane); Vin I 197,21 (tatr'
ime paccantima -a); II 17,12 (va1_1ija puratthimarr -arr
agamarrsu); III 233,9 (bhikkhuno Kosalesu -esu
Savatthirr gacchantassa); DI 135,26 (khemaghita -a
aka1_1taka anuppiJa); II 349,25 (aññataro -o vughasi);
M II 71,28 (addasarr mahantarr -arr iddharr e' eva
phitarr ca bahujanarr iiki1_11_1amanussarr): Sn 683
(Sakyanarr game -e Lumbineyye ); Ja II 300,13 (-e
kassakakammarr katva); III 513,9 (sabbo pi -o rañña
rakkhitabbo); VI 59,1* (bahü hatthi ca asse ca nagare
-ani ca hitva); Nidd I 366,5foll. (gamena gamarr
nigamena nigamarr nagarena nagararr ratthena rattharr
-ena -arr); Kv 559,6 (ratthani -ani ti); Sp 88,22
(saka1anagararr ca -o ca . . . sannipati); 575,5 (-o ti
janapadi(n)
ekassa rañño rajje eko ko~thaso); Ps 1 225,5 (Kurii nama
janapadino rajano, tesa¡p nivaso eko pi -o rii)hisaddena
Kurii ti vuccati); 11 122,29 ( -ana¡p jeghako hutva seghi);
V 32,7 (amhaka¡p -e bhajana¡p pati ti vuccati); V v-a 8,21
(pi~hika ti pana ekaccesu -esu desavoharena apal).a¡p,
Be, Ce so; Se asana¡p; Ee ekaccesu -esu tesa¡p voharena
asanabhütapi~hika, prob. wr); Nidd-a 1 392,5 (ekaccesu
kira -esu kalakate ñatake na jhapenti nikhal).itva
~hapenti); As 180,10 (-ato nagara¡p agato); Mhv 36:87
(ekasmi¡p me -e nare dehi ti); - ifc see tiro-, negama-,
paccanta-;- 0 -kalyal}i,f [BHS id.], the most beautiful
girl in the country; D 1 193,5 (aha¡p ya imasmi¡p
janapade -i ta¡p icchami ta¡p kamemi ti); S V 170,5 (-I
naccati gayati ti ... mahajanakayo sannipateyya; Spk 111
227,19: -i ti janapadamhi kalyal).I uttama chasariradosa-
rahita pañcakalyal).asamannagata); Ud 22,15 (Sakiyani
bhante -i ghara nikkhamanta¡p ... ma¡p etad avoca); -
0
-tudana, n., hurt to the country; D III 179,1 * (na ca
-a¡p; Sv 940,19foll.: yo tassa ... janapado tassa aññena
tudana¡p pi)a va abadho va natthi); - 0 -tthavariya, n.,
stability in or of the country; - --patta, mfn., who has
achieved stability in the country, whose country is
stable; whose position is secure; D 1 88,34 (raja hoti
cakkavatti dhammiko dhammaraja caturanto vijitavi
--ppatto sattaratanasamannagato; Sv 250,5: janapade
dhuvabhava¡p thavarabhava¡p patto na sakka kenaci
caletu¡p, janapado va tamhi thavariyappatto anussukko
sakammanirato acalo asampavedhi ti --ppatto ); S 1
100,3o (rañña¡p khattiyana¡p ... --ppattana¡p); Kv 286,3;
- --ppatti,f [+ patti2], achieving stability in the
country; It-a 1 78,7);- 0 -nirutti,f, a local terminology;
an ordinary way of speaking (in a particular
community 7 ); M 111 230,2o (-i¡p nabhiniveseyya
samañña¡p natidhaveyya ti); 234,32 (katha¡p ... -iya ca
abhiniveso hoti); Vism 522,14 (so karoti so
pa~isa¡pvedeti añño karoti añño pa~isa¡pvedeti ti vada-
ppahana¡p -iya anabhiniveso samaññaya anatidhavanan
ti; Vism-mh~ [Be] 11 236,18: itthi puriso ti voharena -i);
Nett 33,11; - 0
-vasika, mfn., living in the country;
Spk 11 5,1o (pañcasata -a bhikkhü); - ajanapada, m.,
not a district, an uninhabited place; M 11 100,22
(janapada -a kata); A 1 160,2; Sp 482,13.
janapadi(n), mfn. ffrom janapada; cf S. janapadin], living
in the country, ruling the district; Sv 239,5 (Kosala nama
-ino rajakumara, tesa¡p nivaso eko pi janapado
rii)hisaddena Kosala ti vuccati) t Ps 1 225,4 t Pj 11
135,26;- see also janapadi(n).
janapadika, mfn. [janapadi(n) + ki], living in the
country, ruling the district; Pv-a 163,14 (eko pi hi
janapado -ana¡p rajakumarana¡p vasena ru)hiya
pañcalanan ti bahuvacanena niddisiyati, Be, Se so; Ce
janapadadhikatana¡p; E e wr janapadadhikana¡p ...
pañcala ti).
janastaip in Ee at Ja VI 109,14* is a misprint for janata¡p
(Ce so; Se sakul).a¡p; Be vihe~hayitva sakul).a¡p).
janika,f, see sv janaka.
janita, mfn., pp ofjaneti qv sv vJan.
janita(r), m. [S. janitr], a progenitor, afather; Sadd 859,31
(katta -a pacita).
janitta, n. [S. janitra], a birthplace; Ja 11 80,15* ( -a¡p me
204 jantaghara
bhavitta¡p me; 80,21· foil.: ida¡p mama jataghana¡p ida¡p
mama va<;i<;lhitaghana¡p) quoted Sadd 85,z6; - see also
janitta.
jani,f [ts], a woman, a wife; Thi 518 (sakhiyo tisso -iyo,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee til).i) = Ap 512,7 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tini); Ps 1 150,5 (vadhuka hi -I ti vuccati, Ce, Ee so; Be
ja~etti vuccati; Se janani ti vuccati);- see also jani 1.
janipita(r), janipita(r), m. [jana 1 + pita(r)?], one's natural
father;? M 11 156,23 (jananti pana bhonto yo -a
brahmal).i¡p yeva agamasi no abrahmal).in ti, Ee so; Se
janipita; Be, Ce janako pita; Ps III 412,4: yo -a ti yo
janiko pita, yo janiko pita teva va pa~ho, Ce, Ee so, wr ?;
Be yo janako ti yo janako pita yo janiko pita teva va
patho; Se yo janako ti yo janako pita tveva patho); 156,26
(yo -u pita, Ee so; Se janipitu; Be, Ce janakapitu).
janimata(r), janimata(r), f [jana 1 + mata(r) ?], one's
natural or birth mother;? M 11 156,17 (jananti pana
bhonto ya -a brahmal).a¡p yeva agamasi no abrahmal).an
ti, Ee so; Se janimata; Be, Ce janika mata; Ps 111412,1:
-a ti ya sa tumhe janika sa vo janika mata, Ce, Ee so,
prob. wr; Be, Se janika mata ti yaya tumhe janita sa vo
janika mata); 156,2o (ya -u mata, Ee so; Se janimatu;
Be, Ce janikamatu; Ps III 412,3: janikaya matu).
janiyati in Ee at M III 241,15 is wr for jiñyati (Be, Ce so)
or jiriyati (Se so).
janeti, -ayati, see sv vjan.
janettl, f [S. janayitñ; BHS also janetri; cf also S. janitri],
one who gives or has given birth (to); a mother,
Abh 244 H janika); Vin 11 255,1 (Mahapajapati
Gotami . . . bhagavanta¡p -iya kalankataya thañña¡p
payesi) = M III 253,22; D 11 7,1 (Vipassissa ...
bhagavato . . . Bandhumati nama devi mata ahosi -i);
Th 335 (anusigho -iya); Thi 207 (visarada va bhal).asi
etam attha¡p -i me); Ja V 69,12* (-i ya pi te mata na ta¡p
iccheyya passitu¡p); 318,16* (pita mayha¡p -i ca);
Mi1193,28 (Bodhisatto ... kula¡p viloketi -i¡p vi1oketi);
Sp 1112,u foil. (matika ti matara, -iyo ti attho,
kathinubbhara¡p hi eta agha -iyo); Ps 11 70,6 (taya -iya
kukkutiya).
janettika, janettiya,f [janettl + ki], one who gives or has
given birth (to ); a mother; Ja 11 381 ,25* (Sariputto tada
setthi . . . Mahesi Rahu1amata Mayadevi janettiya
Kururaja bodhisatto, eds so) quoted Dhp-a IV 89,21 (eds
-a); Bv 26:13 (mayha¡p -a mata Mayadevi ti vuccati).
jantagga, n. [prob. janta <S. yantra + agga2), a heated
room; Vin 111 55,28' (in uddana: -ena saha dasa, Be, Ce
so; E e wr jantagghena; Se jantagharena).
jantaghara, n. [prob. janta < S. yantra + ghara;
cf AMg ja¡pta and BHS janta (and jantugrha ?)], a
heated room; a room with a jire (normally used befare
bathing, not for bathing ?); Abh 214 (-a¡p tv aggisala);
V in 1 47,11 foll. (sace upajjhayo -a¡p pavisitukamo hoti
CUJ).l).aJP sannetabba¡p . . . -e upajjhayassa parikamma¡p
katabba¡p ... ; Sp 980,10: -e parikamma¡p nama ailgara-
mattika-ul).hodakadanadika¡p sabba¡p kicca¡p); 139,38
(-a¡p karapita¡p hoti 0 -Sala karapita hoti); 11 119,37
(anujanami bhikkhave cankama¡p ca -a¡p ca ti); 120,15
(-assa kavata¡p na hoti); 120,25 (-e aggi mukha¡p
9ahati); 220,zofoil. (bhikkhüna¡p 0 -vatta¡p paññapessami
yatha bhikkhühi -e samma vattitabba¡p); 280,29 (na
jantiya
bhikkhave bhikkhuniya -e nahayitabbarp); M III 126,28
(nabhijanami -e nahayita); Nidd I 229,1 (katharp -e
kayikaq¡ pagabbhiyaq¡ dasseti); Ap 39,3; Vism l8,23;
Dip 13:45.
jantiya in Ee at Sv 296,16 is prob. wr for janiya (Be, Ce,
Se and DI 135,14 so).
jantu 1. m. [ts], a creature; a person; Abh 93; V in I 359,31'
(osarat)arp taq¡vusitassa -uno); D III 166,22*
(ubbadhanaya paritajjanaya va na hethayl -um ahe~hako
ahu, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se janatam, better metrically); S I
117,4• (kamesu so -u kathaq¡ nameyya); A IV 227,25'
(atthakamena -una); Dhp 107 (yo ca vassasataq¡ -u
aggiq¡ paricare vane); Sn 808 (namam evavasissati
akkheyyarp petassa -uno); 1103 (Maro anveti -uq¡);
Ja VI 60,25' (manussehi phalakamehi -uhi, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se -ubhi); Nidd I 3,15 (maceo ti satto naro ... -u;
Nidd-a I 26,12: jayatl ti -u, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jiyatl ti);
4,18 (-ussa); Ap 74,16 (puññakammena -una);
Vism 311,1 (sabbe -ü sabbe jlva); It-a 1 87,8 (-uno ti
sattassa, satto hi jayanaghena -ü ti vuccati);
Sadd 189,32foll. (-u -ü -uyo -uno -avo ... ).
jantu2 , m. or n. [? cf AMg jaq¡tuga], a kind of grass; Vin I
196,6 (seyyatha . . . majjhimesu janapadesu eragu
moragu majjaru -u evam eva ... Avantidakkhii,1apathe
cammani attharal_lani); Sp 1088,5foll. (eragu moragu
majjaru -ü ti ima catas so pi til_lajatiyo . . . -ussa
manisadiso vanno hoti).
jantu'ka, m. [j~t~ 1 + ka2], a creature;- ifc see khudda-
(sv khudda 1).
jannu, see sv jat)I_lU.
jannuka, see sv jat)I,lUka.
japa, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) muttering, whispering; -
ifc see kal_ll_la-, kal_ll_lejapa; - 2. (m.) muttering;
muttering prayers; rehearsing or reciting the Vedas to
oneself; A III 56,24' (-ena mantena subhasitena
anuppadanena pavel_liya va . . . labhetha attharp, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se jappena; Mp III 254,26: jappena ti Vat)I_la-
bhat)anena) = Ja III 205,5* (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jappena;
205,17': mantaparijapanena, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se manta-
parijappanena) t 114,13' (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jappena;
114,28·: ajjhenena ti attho); Sn 328 (hassaq¡ -arr
paridevaq¡ padosarp ... hitva, so read me ? eds jappaq¡;
cfPj II 334,15foll.: vipassakena hi bhikkhuna ...
niratthakakathajappo na bhasitabbo);- ajapa, mfn., not
muttering, not muttering prayers; Ud-a 51,14 (na japantl
ti -a, mantanarp anajjhayaka ti attho ); - see also
. 1
pppa.
japati, japeti, pr. 3 sg. [S. japati], whispers, mutters (esp.
prayers or spells); rehearses or recites (the Vedas) to
oneself; Dhatup 189 (japa jappa vacane); Dhatum 269
(japa jappa vace vyatte); SIV 117,21' (ime ca
vokkamma -amase ti, Be, Ce so; Ee jappamase ti; Se
jahamhase ti; Spk II 398,17 foil.: mayarp -ama
sajjhayama ti, Be so; Ce, Se jahama sajjhayama ti; Ee
jappama kathayama ti); Ja III 236,5• (kharajina ja~ila
pail.kadanta dumukkharüpa ye 'me -anti mante, Ce, Ee,
Se so [Ee omits mantel; Be jappanti; 236,11': ye ime
mante sajjhayanti) = IV 299,26' (Ce, Ee so [Ee omits
mante]; Se ye mantaq¡ -anti; Be ye mantarp jappanti);
N 361,25' (nahayanti -anti ca; 365,21·: bhütavijjarp
205 jappati
parivattenti); V 158,19* (na juhe na -e mante);
Ud-a 75,24 (keci anekasahassavararp savitti-adike -anti,
Be, Se so; Ce svatthi-adike; Ee suvatthi-adike);
Pv-a 97,27 (parivattentl ti vedarp anuparivattenta homarp
karonta -anti);- part.pr. (a) japa(t), mfn., Ja IV 204,12*
(-aq¡ pi mante, Ce, E e so; Be, Se jappaq¡; 204,14': -anto
pi parivattento pi, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se jappanto);
VI 185,13* (-arr mantapadani ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jappaq¡); Sadd167,9; (b)japanta,mfn., JaVI 185,2
(dibbamantaq¡ -anto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jappanto) t
Cp-a 120,17 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jappanto);
(e) japenta, mfn., Mp I 334,19 (mantarp -ento viya o~~e
caletva caletva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jappento); -
absol. (a) japitva, Sv 97,7 (tarp kira [vijjarp] -itva, Ce,
Ee so; Be jappitva; Se jappetva); Ud-a 421,2o (sipparp
-itva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jappetva; = Sv 540,16: Be, Se
jappitva; Ce, Ee jappetva); Th!-a 195,17 (mante -itva,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jappitva); (b) japetva, Mp 1 268,11
(mantaq¡ -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jappitva; t Spk I
285,29, eds jappitva);- see also jappati 1.
japana, see sv jappana.
japa, f [ts], the China rose, Hibiscus rosa-sinensis L.;
Abh 580; Samantak 736 (cittakajapa).
jappa\ n. [S. japya; or = jappa2 ?], whispering; a
muttered prayer or spell; a recitation ofthe Vedas; A III
56,24' ( -ena manten a subhasitena anuppadanena
pavel_liya va ... labhetha atthaq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
japena; Mp III 254,26: -ena ti Vat)I_labhat)anena) = Ja III
205,5* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee japena; 205,17': manta-
parijappanena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mantaparijapanena) t
114,13* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee japena; 114,28·: ajjhenena ti
attho); Sn 595 (padak' asma veyyakaral_la -e acariya-
sadisa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jape; = M II 196 [omitted in
Ee]; Pj II 463,17:-e ti vede; cfPs III 432,14foil.:
kathana~~ane mayaq¡ acariyasadisa yeva); Ja IV 75,5•
(kiq¡ su naro -arr adhicca kale kaq¡ va vijjaq¡ katamaq¡
va sutanaq¡, or part.pr. ofjappati 1 qv? 75,12' foil.: puriso
mail.galaq¡ icchanto . . . kiq¡ su nama jappanto tlsu
vedesu kataraq¡ va vedarp . . . adh!yitva . . . katharpkaro
etesu jappad!su kiq¡ kena niyamena karonto, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee kiq¡ kidisena kena kena niyamena); - ifc see
kat)I_la-; - see also sakat)I_lajappaka.
jappa2 , m. [S. jalpa], l. talk, speech; SI 166,7• (bahuq¡ pi
palapaq¡ -arr na jacca hoti brahmat)o; or part.pr. of
jappati 1 qv ? Spk I 231,9 foil.: bahuq¡ pi palaparp
jappanto, brahmat)O visujjhat! ti evarp vacanasahassaq¡
pi bhat)anto ti attho); - 2. idle talk, chatter; Sn 328
(hassam -arr paridevarr padosarr . . . hitva; Pj 11
334,15foll.: vipassakena hi bhikkhuna ... niratthaka-
kathajappo na bhasitabbo; but read rather japarp me ?);
- 3. a kind of disputation; Sadd 919,wfoll. (tisso katha
vado -o vitat)~a ti . . . yena chalajatiniggahaghanehi
pakkhapa~ipakkhanarp pati~~apanapa~ikkheparambho so
-o).
jappati 1, jappeti 1, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. jalpati], l. speaks;
converses with; prattles; mutters; Dhatup 190 (japa
jappa vacane); Dhatum 270 (japa jappa vace vyatte);
Vin IV 270,23 foil. (ek en' eka santi~~ati pi sallapati pi
nikal_ll_likarp pi -eti . . . sallapissati pi nikat)I,lÍkaq¡ pi
-issati ... sallapeyya va nikal_ll_likarp va -eyya; Sp 927,5:
jappati
kaggamüle -eyya ti vuttaiTI hoti); V 161,36
(upakal)gakaiTI -ati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -eti; Sp 1363,1:
upakaggakaiTI -ati ti ... kal)gamüle manteti, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -eti ti); SI 141,16* (kiiT~ -asi brahmapath3IT1
ajanaiTI; Spk I 207,4: kiiT~ -asi vippa1apasi); IV 117,21*
(ime ca vokkamma -amase ti, Ee so; Be, Ce japamase;
Se jahamhase; Spk II 398,17 foil.: -amase ti may3IT1
-ama kathayama ti, Ee so; Be japama sajjhayama ti; Ce,
Se jahama sajjhayama ti); Sn 899 (sa -ati patthayatidha
suddhiiT~, Ce so; Ee -ati; Be, Se pajappati; cfNidd I
312,17: sil3IT1 va -ati .. . silabbat3IT1 va -ati pajappati
abhijappati ti; Pj II 558,17: -ati ca vippalapati pattheti
ca); Pv 18:1 (Ghato -ati Kesava; Pv-a 94,13: -ati ti
sasaiTI me detha ti vippalapati) = Ja IV 84,24*; Mil 31,8
(sadhu bhante atth3IT1 -ehi ti); Sp 1372,12 (nissitajappi
ti . . . evaiTI annaiTI nissaya -ati); - part.pr.
1
jappa(t) , mftz., SI 166,7* (bahuiTI pi palapaiTI -aiTI na
jacca hoti brahmago; or no un ? Spk I 231,9 foil.: bahuiTI
pi pa1ap3ITI -anto, brahmal)O visujjhati ti ev3IT1
vacanasahass3IT1 pi bhaganto ti attho); - 2. mutters
(prayers or spells); recites (the Vedas); - part.pr.
(a) jappa(t)2, mftz., Ja IV 204,12* ( -aiTI pi mante, Be, Se
so, unmetrical ? Ce, Ee japaiTI; 204,1c-anto pi
parivattento pi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce japanto); VI 185,13'
(-aiTI mantapadani ca, Be, Se so; Ce, E e jap3IT1);
(b)jappanta 1, mftz., Ja VI 185,2 (dibbamantaiTI -anto,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee japanto) fe Cp-a 120,17 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee japanto); (c)jappenta, mftz., Mp I 334,19 (mant3IT1
-ento viya onhe caletva caletva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
japento); - absol. jappitva, jappetva, Sv 97,7 (t3IT1 kira
[vijj3IT1] -itva, Be so; Ce, Ee japitva; Se -etva); 540,16
(sipp3IT1 -itva devatahi saddhiiT~ mantayamana viya
mapenti, Be, Se so; Ce, E e -etva) = Ud-a 421 ,2o (Be, Ce,
Se -etva; Ee japitva); Spk I 285,29 (mantaiTI -itva
ali.gu1iya paharitva) fe Mp I 268,11 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
japetva); - pp jappita\ mftz. and n. [S. jalpita], spoken;
muttered; recited; what is spoken, speech; Abh 755;
Sv 97,5 (tasmiiTI kira mante ... -ite);- ifc see samanta-;
- caus. pr. 3 sg. jappapeti [or to jappati 2 ?], Nidd-a I
40,22 (aduiTI mayh3IT1 idaiTI mayhan ti va asukena me
idaiTI dinnaiTI id3IT1 na dinnan ti va evaiTI satte -eti ti
jappa);- see also japati.
jappati2 , pr. 3 sg. (perhaps = jappati1], (prays for; ?)
desires; longs for, Sn 839 (bhavaiTI na -e; Nidd I
!90,23foll.: kamabhav3IT1 na -eyya rüpabhavaiTI na
-eyya ... ; Pj II 546,3: apihetuiTI apatthetuiTI samattho
si ya); 902 (sa kena vedheyya kuhiñ ca -e; Nidd I 317,16:
kuhiiT~ va -e ti kuhiiT~ va -eyya kimhi -eyya kattha
-eyya pajappeyya abhijapeyya ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
kuhiiT~ pajappe ti kimhi -eyya ... ); Spk II 108,5• (na
-ami 'nagataiT~, Se so; Be na ppajappami; Ce, Ee na
ppajappam' anagataiT~; Ja VI 25,6•: eds na
ppajappam'); Nidd-a II 15,28 (-anti ti paccasiiTlsanti);-
part.pr. (a) jappa(ti, mftz., Sn 773 (te duppamuñca ...
ime va kame purime va -aiT~, sg. for expected pl., or
gamul absol.; Nidd I 35,2foll.: atite pañca kamaguge
-anta pajappanta abhijappanta; Pj li 516,19:
patthayamana); (b) jappanta2, mftz., Nidd I 35,3 (-anta;
but cfNidd-a I 109,1s: -anta ti gugavasena kathenta);
(e) jappamana, mftz., Ud-a 229,5* (atit3IT1 nanusocanto na
206 jambaka
-aman' anagat3IT1, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se na
ppajappam anagataiTI; fe S 1 5,6*: eds nanusocanti na
ppajappanti 'nagataiT~); - pp jappita2 , n., longing;
desire; Sn 902 (patthayamanassa hi -ani; Nidd I 316,13:
-ani ti jappana vuccati tagha); - --tta, n., abstr.,
longing; desire; Nidd I 8,21 (tal)ha ... jappa pajappa
abhijappa jappana pajappana --tt3IT1) fe Dhs 1059 =
Vibh 361,29.
jappana (and japana ?), n. [from jappati 1 (and japati);
cf S. japana, ja1pana], l. muttering (prayers or spells);
Sv 97,7 (vijjaya -3ITI, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vijjajapan3IT1);
Vin-vn 248 (paraiTI maretukamassa vijjaya -aiTI pana);
- ifc see kal)ga-; - 2. speaking; talk; Vism 28,15
(samantajappa ti samip3IT1 katva -3ITI) = Vibh-a 484,9;
- ifc see samanta-.
jappana, f [from jappati2], longing, desire; Sn 945
(ajavaiTI brümi -3ITI; Nidd 1 429,2o: -a vuccati tagha;
Pj 11 567,33: idaiTI mayhaiTI id3IT1 mayhan ti jappa-
karagato -an ti ca); Nidd I 8,21 (tal)ha ... jappa pajappa
abhijappa -a pajappana jappitatt3IT1) t Dhs 1059 =
Vibh 361,28.
jappa\ f [from jappati 1], speech, talk; - ifc see
samanta-;
jappa2 , f [from jappati 2; BHS ja1pa], longing; desire;
Sn 1033 Gappabhi1epan3ITI brümi; Nidd 11 [Be]27,9 foll.:
-a vuccati tal)ha ... imaya -aya 1oko litto saiT~litto ... ;
Pj II 586,6foll.: tagha assa lokassa makka!alepo vi ya
makka!assa abhilepan3IT1); Nidd 1 8,21 (-a pajappa
abhijappa -a jappana jappitatt3IT1, Se so; Be, Ce, E e -a
pajappa abhijappa jappana pajappana jappitattaiTI;
cfNidd-a 1 40,22foll.: asukena me idarp dinnaiTI id3IT1 na
dinnan ti va evaiTI satte jappapeti ti -a, parato dve
padani upasaggena vaMhitani, tato paraiTI aññenakarena
vibhajituiTI araddhatta puna -a ti vutt3IT1) fe Dhs 1059 =
Vibh 361,28.
jappayana, f [from jappati2], longing, desire; Nidd 11
152,31 (abhijappa jappana -a jappitattaiT~, Ee so; Se ad
Sn 38 so; Se ad Sn 1033, Be, Ce abhijappa jappana
jappitatt3IT1).
jappi(n), mftz. [from jappati 1; cf S. japin, jalpin],
muttering; whispering; speaking; - ifc see upakal)gaka-
(sv upakaggakaiT~). nissita- (sv nissayati).
jappeti 1, se e sv jappati 1.
jappete, pr. 3 sg. [?] produces; ? Vibh 353,29 (ekacco
jatiya va gottena va ... manaiTI -eti; Vibh-a 486,8foll.:
seyyo 'harp asmi ti manarp pavatteti karoti); Sp 1154,12
(na manatimanarp -eti);- neg. part.pr. ajappenta, mftz.,
Th-a III 141,23 (nahaiTI seyyo ti va kiñci manaiTI
ajappento ).
jabhati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup jabhate, Wg § 10:28:
gatraviname], stretches, bends the body: ? opens the
jaws wide; ? Sadd 408,25 Gabha jabhi gattaviname: -ati
jambhati);- see also jambhati.
jamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jamati, Wg § 13:28], eats;
Dhatum 555 (chamu Uamu] adane, editors' conjecture);
Sadd 411,23 (chamu jamu jhamu ... adane: ... chamati
-ati jhamati).
jampati, m.pl. (or dual) [S. lex. and BHS id], husband and
wife; Da!h 5.1;- se e also jayampatl (sv jaya), dampati.
jambaka, m. [S. jambuka], a jackal; Sadd 921,3 (matta-
jambala
1 below the jambu tree ( ie India); ? Ap 342,24 (-assa
bhedo tava: ... -o jambuko);- se e also jambuka .
jambiila. m. [ts ], mud; clay; Abh 663 (-o kalal~ panko ).
jambali, f [from jambala], a muddy pool at the outskirts
of a village; a cess-pool; Abh 684 (-i oligallo ca
gamadvaramhi kasuyarp); A II 166,t4foll. ( -i
anekavassagar.lika . . . tassa . . . -iya na ajippabhedo
pa~ikankho; Mp III 155,14: -i ti gamato nikkhanta-
udakassa patinhanabhüto maha-ava~o ).
jambi in Ee at Ja III 22,1o· is wr for jammi (Be, Ce, Se so).
jambira, m. [ts], the lime tree; Samantak 733 (in cpd); -
see also jambhira.
jambu, jambü, f and n. [ts], l. (j.) the rose-apple tree;
Abh 547 (-ü); V in 1 30,3 (yaya -u ya 'yarp Jambudipo
paññayati); Vv 6:7 (tilaka ca -uyo); Th 309 (karp nu
tattha na ramenti -uyo); Ja II 160,9• (alam etehi ambehi
-ühi panasehi ca); III 477 ,7* (-u talaphalarp dajja);
V 167,t• (samotatarp -uhi vetasahi); 438,3 (-urp
aruyha); Ap 368,11 (amba -ü ca); Bv 17:9 (-uto phalam
ahatva); Mil 165,zs; Vism 206,18' (-u yassanubhavena
jambudipo pakasito); Sp 1056,11 (ambo e' eva -ü ca ti
dve rukkha); - 2. (n.) the fruit of the rose-apple tree, a
rose-apple; V in III 61,13 (sanghassa -urp theyyacitto
avahari); Ja IV 363,7* (ambarp -urp vibhitak~ ...
vipal)enti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ambajambuvibhi~ak~);-
0
-coraka, m. !jambu + coraka1], a rose-apple thief,
Vin III 60,36;- 0 -dipa, m. !jambu + dipa2], the central
continent, India (named for a giant jambu tree [or for its
abundance of jambu trees]); Abh 183; Vin V 3,3* (-a
idhagata); 226,10* (sasanarp parivaresi -arp va sagaro );
D II 167,23* (aghadol)~ cakkhumato sarir~
sattadol)arp -e mahenti); Thi 498 ([sara] mahirp -am);
A 1 227,31 (sahassarp -anarp); Ap 585,18 (-~ sarirato);
Mil 3,26 (tesu samal)ero -e Sagalanagare Milindo nama
raja ahosi); Sv 429,16 (tisu dipesu buddha na nibbattanti
-e yeva nibbattanti ti); Mp 11 34,21 (jambuya paññato
paka~o dipo ti -o, imassa kira dipassa pañña1,1abhuta
yojanasatubbedha . . . himavantapabbate jata kappa-
qhayini mahajambu nama atthi); Pj 1 177,2 (pubba-
videharp . . . uttarakururp . . . aparagoyanarp . . . -~ ca
ti); Dip 12:36 (palina -ato harpsaraja va ambare) quoted
Sp 71 ,2o• (Ce -ato; Be -a te; Se pajina -ato; E e palina
-ato) and Sadd 808,2 (pajina -ato... ayarp
chandadighata nama); Ps IV 223,5 (dakkhil,lasamudda-
pariyant~ -arp vijetukamo);- --gamika, mfn., who is
intending to journey to Jambudipa; Ja II 112,4
(samuddadevata navaya ~atva atthi --gamika ti ghosesi,
Be so; Se -~ gamika ti; Ce, Ee --gamika);
1
--gamika, mfn. !jambudipa + gamika ], going to
Jambudipa; Ja 11 112,4 (atthi --gamika ti, Ce, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be --gamika; Se -arp gamika); - see also
sakalajambudipagghanika;- 0 -dipaka, mfn., belonging
to Jambudipa; S V 237,2o (ye keci -a rukkha jambü
tes~ aggam akkhayati); A IV 396,9 (Uttarakuruka
manussa deve ca tavatirpse adhiga~,~hanti -e ca
manusse); - 0 -pakka, n., a ripe rose-apple fruit; Ja 11
439,1 (eko kako jambusakhaya nisinno -ani khadati);
Ps IV 148,1 (-anarp patitaqhane); Vism 409,2o (kajak~
--sadisarp); - 0 -palaka, m., a guardian of the rose-
apple trees; V in III 65,16;- 0 -pesi,f, rose-apple peel;
Ja V 465,s• (-irp aladdhana);- 0 -mal}qa, m., the area
207 jambhati
issaro, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -Sal)<;iassa) = 414,28 (Be, Se so;
Ce, E e o -sa~,~<;iassa); Ap-a 248,17 (-assa issaro ti; =
Th-a IIl 176,3: eds --Sal)<;iassa); - see also jambusa~,~<;la;
-
0
-Sal}qa, m. [cf S. jambükhal)<;la; see J. Brough, 1962,
p. 242], the wood or multitude ofjambu trees; the jambu
island (=India); A IV 90,6* (cakkavatti ahmp raja -assa
issaro, Ee, Se so; Be -ma~,~<;lassa; Ce 0 -dipassa) = Sn 552
0
(Pj II 453,2o: -assa ti jambudipassa) = Th 822 =
Ap 107,4 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jambudipassa) = 342,24 (Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se -ma~,~<;lassa); Th-a III 176,33 (vanan ti
0
jambudiparp, so hi vanabahulataya vanan ti vutto, ten'
aha -assa issaro ti; = Ap-a 248,17: eds 0 -mal)<;iassa); -
see also jambava.
jambuka 1, m. [ts], a jackal; Abh 615 (sigalo -o); Ja I
492,29 (-arp kañcanaguhayarp nipajjapetva); II 107,27*
(bilarp pavisa -a); III 114,10* (sa seti nagena hato va -o);
Sadd 921,3 (mattabhedo tava: ... jambako -o); - see
also jambaka.
2
jambuka2 , m. or jambuka, f !jambu + ka ;
cf S. lex. jambuka], the rose-apple tree; Ja VI 553,16*
(ime te -a rukkha) quoted Sadd 206,2ojoll. (ettha pana
rukkhasaddarp apekkhitva -a ti pullmganiddeso kato ti
daqhabb~ ... atha va itthilingavasena jambü eva -a, -a
ca ta rukkha ca ti jambukarukkha ... pullingapakkhe va
samasavasena jambukarukkha ti vattabbe gathavisayatta
chandanurakkhal)atth~ digharp katva jambukarukkha ti
vuttarp).
jambonada, jambunada, mfn. and n. [S. jambünada;
BHS jambünada], l. (mfn.) (i) (of gold) coming from the
river Jambü; Ja VI 268,18* (-assa pakassa suva~,~I)assa
uracchado; 268,21·: -assa pakkassa rattasuva~,~I)assa, Be
so; Ce only rattasuva~,~I)assa; E e o -pakapakkhassa
rattasuval)I)assa; Se jamborasato jatassa pakassa
rattasuva~,~I)assa); - (ii) golden, made of gold (jrom the
river Jambü); M III 102,17 (nekkharp -arp; Ps IV 147,25:
-an ti jambunadiyarp nibbattarp) t S I 65,3 (Spk I
125,17: -an ti mahajambusakhaya pavattanadiy~
nibbattarp, mahajambuphalarase va pa~aviy~ pavighe
suval)I)a1ikura ughahanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee mahajambu-
palase va) t A I 181,16 (Mp II 292,10: -an ti suratta-
val)I)assa jambonadasuva~,~I)assa gha~ika, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -an ti rattasuval)I)assa ... ); Ja VI 218,1* (kassa -arp
chattarp); Ap 2,15 (kañcanatoral)a -a saramaya atho
rajatamaya pi ca; Ap-a 106,1s: -a jambonada-
suva~,~I)amaya);- 2. (n.) goldfrom the river Jambü; any
gold; Abh 488 (jambunad~); A 11 8,5* (nekkh~
-asseva; Mp III 7,9 foil.: jambunad~ vuccati
jatisuva~,~I)~, tassa jambunadassa nekkh~ viya) =
Dhp 230; Vv-a 13,2o (satakumbhato jambunad~
[segharp] jambunadato smgrsuva~,~I)~, eds so);
Sadd 397,15* (jambünadarp);- 0 -uttatta, mfn., glowing
with gold;? Vv84:17 (-am id~; cfVv-a340,9foll.:
id~ tava viman~ yebhuyyena uttattajambunada-
bhasur~).
jambhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jrmbhate (and jambhate)], opens
the jaws wide; yawns; stretches the body; ? Dhatup 208
(jambha gattaviname); Dhatum 298; 549 (jambha
jambhane); Sadd 408,25 (jabha jabhi gattaviname:
jabhati -ati); - part.pr. jambhamana, mfn., Ja VI 40,\s
 jambhana
(siho viya -amano pasada111 abhirühi, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be, Ce vijambhamano; Se vijimhamano);- see also
jabhati.
jambhana, f, jambhana, n. [S. j)ll1bhaJ.!a], yawning,
stretching the body; Vibh 352,11 (ya kayassa -a
vijambhana anamana vinamana . . . aya111 vuccati
vijambhika; Vibh-a 478,33joll.: -a ti phandana,
punappunarp. -a vijambhana) quoted Mp I 34,6;
Dhatum 549 (jambha -e).
jambhira, m. [S. jambira; S. lex. jambhira], the tree; SAF:
the true lime, Citrus liman (L.) Burmj; Abh 553;- see
also jambira.
jambheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jambhayati; Wg § 33:42],
crushes, destroys; Sadd 556,6 (jabhi nasane: -eti -ayati).
jamma, mf(-l)n. and mj(-1) [S. jalma] (j. voc. jammi,
jamme), l. contemptible, low; of low birth; a
contemptible person, a wretch; Abh 516 (nico -o
nihinako); SI 176,14' (asanta kira marp. -a tata tata ti
bhasare; Spk I 261 ,21: -a ti 1amaka); V 217 ,9' (dhi ta111
-i jare atthu, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -1; Spk III 245,4foll.:
lamake jare dhi ta111 tuyharp. hotu); Dhp 335 (Yal11 esa
sahatl -1 taJ,lha loke visattika) = Th 400; Thi 106 (dhi
tav' atthu jare -e, Be, Se so; Ce chamme (misprint ?); E e
thitivatthuj' aneja mhi; Thi-a 97,15: jare -e lamake hine
tava tuyha111 dhi atthu); Ja I 249,4* (passa rohiQ.ikarp.
-irp.; 249,9·: -in ti lamikarp. dandharp.); II 73,5* (passa
sakhamigarp. -arp.); 110,12* (paruto sihacammena -o
nadati gadrabho ); 120,14' (imarp. ca -arp. musalena
hantva ludda111 chavarp. paradarüpasevirp.); 428,21* (ya
e' esa PUQ.Q.ika -1; 428,24': ya esa ... PUQ.Q.ika nama das!
sa -1 1amika, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jammika); IV 380,27* (na
madisa tuyhal11 dadanti -a; 381,2'foll.: madisa
jatisampannanarp. udiccabrahmaJ.lana111 denti na tuyha111
CaJ.!<;Ialassa, gaccha -a ti); 382,2o (ayarp. vo -o CaJ,l<;lalo
diW10 ti); V 103,n• (dubbhasitarp. hite -i); 421,26 (nassa
tvarp. samrna -a vasala); Sp 37,4* (eva111 aniccata111 -irp.
ñatva durabhisambhavarp.); Ps III 80,14 (imarp. -arp. ...
bahi niharatha ti); - 2. acting without consideration;
Abh 729 (anisammakañ -o).
jamma(n), n. [S. janman], birth; Sadd 458,26 (ruha -ani
patubhave, so read? Be, E e cammani; cf S. Dhatup,
Wg § 20:29: ruha [bija]janmani pradurbhave ca);- see
also jammana.
jammana, n. [AMg jammal).a; cfS. janman], birth;
Sn 1O18 (adissa -a111 brühi gottarp. brühi salakkhal).arp.;
Pj II 584,28: amhakarp. acariyassa jatirp. brühi ti
pucchati); - see also jamrna(n).
jammika, (m)f(n). [jammi (j. of jamma) + ka2], low; of
low birth; Ja II 428,24' (ya esa ... PUQ.Q.ika nama dasi sa
-a lamika, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jammi).
jaya, mfn. and m. (and n. ?) [S. jaya, mfn. and m.; BHS
also n.], l. (mfn.) conquering; winning; - ifc see
ajitañjaya (sv jayati); - 2. (m.n.) victory; winning;
Abh402 (-o); 761 (-ojayana111jiti); Vin IV 1,23 (ete ...
titthiyo nama yena kenaci jetabba n' eva tesarp. -o
databbo ti); D I 10,5 (imassa -o bhavissati imassa
parajayo bhavissati); S I 83,32 (upasanto sukharp. seti
hitva -arp. parajayarp.); 163,29* (-a111 e' ev' assa ta111 hoti
ya titikkha vijanato; Spk I 230,4: ass' eva tarp. -arp. hoti,
so -o hotl ti attho ); Sn 681 (yada pi asi asurehi sailgamo
208 jaya
-o surana111 asura parajita); Th 70 (paññava pana uttamo
manussesu ca devesu silapaññal).ato -a111; or part.pr. of
jayati qv; Th-a I 169,22foll.: silapaññaQ.ahetu pati-
pakkhajayo kamaki!esajayo hotl ti attho) = 619 (Th-a II
261 ,21: -an ti ca lingavippallaso danhabbo, ahü ti va
vacanaseso); Ja I 75,5* (-o hi buddhassa siñmato aya111
Marassa ca papimato parajayo); II 11,22* (sace
yujjhitukamo si -arp. samma dadami te); Mil 24,26*
(nissarp.sayarp. parajayo mama ajja bhavissati -o ca
Nagasenassa); Sp 907,26 (tasmirp. attapariyosane
bhikkhuniya -e pi parajaye pi sailghadiseso); Mp II
270,8 (so gantva ana111 katva -am eva papuQ.i); Dhp-a II
228,8 (yo pana kilesajayena attana111 jinati tassa -o
seyyo); Mhv 25:86;- 0 -kusuma, n., a kind of plant or
tree (with [pale} red blossoms ?); Sp 1083,25 (lohitika
--pupphavaJ.ll).a, E e, Se so; Be, Ce jayasumana-); Mp I
198,22 (--VaJ.ll).al11 candanasarapatta111, Se so; Be, Ce, E e
jayasumana-); Dhp-a IV 133,2 (--VaJ,ll).iini 'ssa akkhini
ahesurp., Be, Se so; Ce, Ee guñjaVaJ.!Q.iini); - see also
jayasumana below; - 0 -ggaha, 0 -ggaha, m. [jaya +
gaha2, gaha2], a winning catch (at dice); Ja IV 322,27'
(kataggaho ti ... 0 -ggaho, Be, Ce, E e so; Se 0 -ggaho) f.
Ps III 117,24 (kataggaho ti 0 -ggaho, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
kataggaho ti) f. Spk III 110,3 (kataggaho ti 0 -ggaho, Ee
so; Be, Se kataggaho ti 0 -ggaho; Ce kataggaho ti
basaggaho[?]) = Mp III 377,14 (eds kataggaho ti
0
-ggaho) = Sadd 640,6 (kataggaho ti 0 -ggaho) f. Th-a II
195,17 (kataggaho ti .. . 0 -ggaho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-ggaho); Ja VI 282,25' (0 -ggaha111 gal).hi); Nidd-a I 90,14
0
( -ggaharp. gahetva); -
0
-nada, m., a roar of victory;
Mhv 25:93 (Bhalluke patite tasmirp. -o pavattatha); -
0
-pana, n., a drink of victory, a feasting to celebrate
victory; Abh 398 (raJ.le jitassa sampana111 -arp.); Ja VI
392,4 (sakalajambudipe rajja111 gahetva -arp. pivissama
ti); Dhp-a I 193,14 (tayo divase -arp. pivi); -
0
-sadda, m., a shout of victory; Sv 149,4;
0
-sumana, n., a tree (with [pale] red blossoms); SAF:
shoe flower, Pentapetes phoenicea L.; Abh 575
(bandhuko -arp.); Ja V 163,21 (--pupphasadisena sisena);
Sv 482,5 (--pupphaVaJ.ll).a pal).<;!ukamba1asila, Ce so; E e
--pupphakaVaJ.ll).a; Be, Se jayakusumapuppha-) = Ps I
225,31 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jayakusuma-); Ps V 7,6 (paJ,l<;lu-
kambalasilayan ti rattakambalasilaya111, tassa kira
rattakambalass' eva --puppharasissa viya VaJ.ll).O, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se --puppharasi viya VaJ.ll).O); Dhp-a I 17,8;
Bv-a 84,26 (--kusumasadisarp. .. . celavitana111
bandhitva); 86,21 (--kusumasadisaVaJ.ll).arp. dupana-
civararp. timaQ.<;Iala111 paticchadetva); - see also jaya-
kusuma above; - dujjaya, mfn. and m. l. (mfn.) hard
to conquer; hard to win; S I 162,30* (kuddharp.
appatikujjhanto sailgamarp. jeti -arp.) = Th 442; It 76,6*
(yo tva111 -am ajjhabhü jetvana maccuno sena111; It-a II
75,5 foll.: pacurajanehi jeturp. asakkul).eyyarp.
kilesavahinirp. abhibhavi); Sv 666,7 (na sunimmadaya
ti ... duppajaha -a ti attho, Be, E e so; Ce omits; Se
dujjaha ti); - 2. (m.) a poor victory, a false victory;
Kv-a 16,15 (sakavadissa pana paravadina chalavada111
nissaya patikammarp. katva attana sadhito jayo -o); -
sujaya, m., a good victory, a real victory; Kv-a 16,18
(paravadissa pana sakavadina dhammavadarp. nissaya ...
jayati
jayo -o ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se omits).
jayati, jeti, jinliti 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. jayati, ~i; cf S. jinati,
~ya], wins, is victorious; conquers, defeats; wins
something (acc.) from someone (acc.); Dhatup 56 (ji
jaye); 357; 495; Dhatum 98; 583; 717; - jayati:
Vv 33:2 (na taJ11 -issati sisso sissam acariya jessasi) =
Ja II 252,15'; Ja IV 494,7• foll. (caturaitginiJ11 sena111
subhiJ11sariipaJ11 -anti raghadhipatl pasayha na maccuno
-itum ussahanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jinituJ11); VI 487,29
(brahma~a ... hatthe pasaretva -atu bhava111 Vessantaro
ti ahaJ11su); Vism 216,7 foil. (yatha rathena -an ti rathiko
evaJ11 navavidho pi 1okuttaradhammo sandighiya -atl ti
sandin!liko) f- Sadd 787,16 (sandighiya ki1ese -at1 ti
sandighiko); It-a II 158,18 (pa~ipakkhaJ11 -anti ca ti
deva); Sadd 344,6 (ji jaye: jeti jayati); - part.pr.
(a) jaya(t), mfn., S I 83,31' (-a111 veraJ11 pasavati
dukkhaJ11 seti parajito; or ~amu1 absol.; Spk I 154,21:
jinanto vera111 pasavati) = Dhp 201 (Dhp-a III 259,21:
-an ti para111 jinanto vera111 pa~i1abhati); SI 85,30' (hanta
1abhati hantara111 jetaraJ11 1abhate -aJ11; Spk I 155,3:
-anto pugga1o paccha jetaraJ111abhati); V 6,16' (niyyanti
dhira 1okamha aññadatthu -aJ11 -aJ11, sg. for pl. ? or
~amu1 absol. ?; Spk III 122,33: ragadayo sapatte jinanta
jinanta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jinanta jinanti); Th 70
(paññava pana uttamo manussesu ca devesu
sllapañña~ato -a111; or to jaya qv; Th-a I 169,22foll.:
sllapaññ~ahetu pa~ipakkhajayo kamaki1esajayo hot! ti
attho) = 619; Ja V 153,2' (ath' abravi braha indo
vatrabhü -a!aJ11 pita; 153,5·: -antana111 jayapattana111
sesanaJ11 tetti111saya devaputtanaJ11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
omits jayapattanaJ11); 322,22' (indo va -ata111 pati);
VI218,18* (-am Indo va sobhati; or ~amu1 absol.;
219,6·: jayappatto Indo viya); Sadd 167,9 (-aJ11); -
jayataJ11 in Ee at V in I 246,36* is wr for yajata111 (Be, Ce,
Se so);- (b) jayanta, mfn., Ja V 153,s-; VI 526,10* (raja-
puttaJ11 ... -antam aparajitaJ11); Pa~is-a 265,15 (visesena
-anto adhijayatl ti); - jeti, S I 162,30* (saitgamaJ11 jeti
dujjayaJ11) = Th 442; Ja II 3,27* (sadhu111 pi sadhunajeti);
Ja VI 273,6* (ko va pi no jeti varaJ11 dhananaJ11, Ee so;
Ce vara111 dhanena; Be, Se varaddhanena); Ps III 62,11
(purohito gantva rañño purato ~hatva jetu maharaja ti
vatva, Ce, E e so; Be, Se jayatu); Sadd 344,6 (ji jaye: jeti
jayati); 344,14 (ji abhibhave: jeti);- fut. 3 sg. jessati 1,
Ja IV 102,2• (yuddhasmi yo jessati tassa maggo);
2 sg. jessasi, Vv 33:2 (sissam acariya jessasi) = Ja II
252,15*; - jinliti 1, D II 348,23 (tva111 kho samma
ekantikena -asi, dehi samma akkhe); SI 20,24* (appa pi
santa bahuke -anti); Dhp 354 (ta~hakkhayo
sabbadukkhaJ11 -ati); Th 411 (ma ta111 ... -atu
maccuraja); 415 (jhayahi -ahi); Ja I 290,2 (eva111 kl!anto
pana raja niccaJ11 -ati); III 5,2 (Ka1ili.go -issati Assako
parajissati); 114,14* (so vipu1aJ11 -ati); IV 347,10* (eko va
Indo asure -ati); V 510,3· (kii~anena -ati); Pa~is I 173,1
(-ati papake akusa1e dhamme); Mi1117,12foll.
(Vessantaro . . . raja akkodhena kodha111 -ati asadhuJ11
sadhuna -ati ... ); Dhp-a II 228,7 (yo pana ki1esajayena
attanaJ11 -ati); Sadd 344,12 (ji jaye: jeti jayati ... imassa
pana dhatussa kiyadiga~a111 pattassa -ati -itva ty adini
rüpani bhavanti); 495,29 (ji jaye: -ati); - fut.
1 pl. jissama? Ja VI 280,12* (dhammena jissama
209 jayati
asahasena jito ca no khippam avakarohi, Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se jiyyama; 280,16': kl!anta ca mayaJ11 dhammena
jissama, dhammen' eva no asahasena jayo hotu, sace
pana tva111 jito bhavissasi ... , Be so; Ce jiyissama; E e
jlyissama; Se jineyyama); - part.pr. (a) jina(t), mfn.,
Ap 477,14 (satthuno sada -aJ11 passami vima1ananaJ11;
Ap-a 513,5 foil.: sada sabbaka1aJ11 -a111 -anto
parajitakopo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -aJ11 na -anto
parajitako); (b)jinanta, mfn., Ja III 5,13 (-antassa kiJ11
pubbanimitta111 bhavissati); Dhp-a II 225,18; Ap-a 513,6;
- opt. 3 sg. (a) jeyya1, Dhp 103 (ekaJ11 ca jeyya-m-
attanaJ11; Dhp-a II 226,19 foil.: attana111 jineyya); (b) jine,
Dhp 103 (yo sahassaJ11 sahassena saitgame manuse jine );
Ja II 4,16* (akkodhena jine kodhaJ11); VI 572,30* (putto
me . . . dhammena jine pa~haviJ11; 573,8·: dhammena
jinatu); (e) jineyya, Ja III 205,3o· (paccatthike jineyya ti);
Dhp-a II 227,1; - aor. 3 sg. (a) ajesi, Vin II 1,12 (ma
kho tumhe ayasmanto eso ajesi); M III 70,11* (Aparajito
Maraba1am ajesi); Ja VI 2R2,21* (ajesi yakkho
naravlraseqhaJ11); (b) ajini, jini, Vin I 349,30* (ajini ma111
ahasi me) = Dhp 3; Ja II 404,23 (Kosalaraja kira ...
Ajatasattu111 jinl ti); Ap-a 419,8 (ki1ese ajini jinati
jinissatl ti jino ); 2 sg. (a) ajayi, ajjayi, It-a II 75,6 ([yo
tvaJ11] dujjayam ajjhabhü ti ... ajjayl ti pi pa~anti, ajinl
ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjinl ti attho, prob. wr); 75,12
(yo tva111 dujjaya111 ajayi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajjayi);
(b) ajini, jini, Dhp-a I 312,9 (tvaJ11 bahirake core jini);
It-a II 75,7 (ajinl ti); 3 pl. jini111su, D II 285,8 (deva
jiniJ11su asura va paraji111su;); Ja II 409,14* (vyagghaJ11
miga yattha jiniJ11su da~hino); Dhp-a I 178,16 (ime ma111
daraka bahuJ11 1akkhaJ11 jini111su); - part.perf.act.
(a) jitava(t), jitavanta, mfn., who has conquered;
Ap-a 289,25 (jino pañca mare jitava); 304,18 (vijitavl
jitavanto bhavissat1 ti); Sadd 495,3o (jitava jitavl);
(b) jitavi(n), mfn., who has conquered, who has won;
Ja V 407,w (tidiva111 jitavinl; 408,2·: jitavinl ti jaya-
ppatta hutva); Sadd 344,Jo (jitavi); - inf (a) jayituJ11,
Ja IV 494,9* (na ... -itu111 ussahanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
jinituJ11); (b) jetuJ11, S I 102,25' (na capi mantayuddhena
sakka jetuJ11 dhanena va) quoted Vism 232,23*; Ja VI
202,21* (yo sappina asakkhi jetum aggiJ11, Ce, Ee, Se so,
perhaps wr; Be bhojetu111; read yo sappinasakkhi
bhojetum aggi111 with L. Alsdorf, 1977, p. 40? 202,24':
bhojetun ti santappetuJ11, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se jetun ti);
It-a II 75,5 (pacurajanehi jetu111 asakku~eyyaJ11);
Sadd 344,11; (e) jinituJ11, Ja VI 193,23' (yuddhe jinitu111
icchati); Spk I 168,15 (jaramar~aJ11 jinitu111 na sakka,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr jlnituJ11); Cp-a 198,28 (maccu nam'
esa na sakka kenaci jinituJ11); - absol. (a) jetva, S II
279,9* (jetva MaraJ11) f- Th 177; Sn 439; Ja III 105,19*
(jetva jito ti bhasati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jino; 106,4· foil.:
saya111 va pana paraJ11 jitva ahaJ11 jito 'mhl ti bhasati);
Ap 50!,z5; - neg. ajetva, Th-a II 230,3; - (b) jetvana,
SI 122,21* (jetvana maccuno senaJ11) quoted Dhp-a 1
433,8* (Be, Ee so; Se jitvana; Ce jitva namucino senaJ11);
A V 46,24*; (e) jitva, Th 336 (jitva namucino senaJ11, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se jetva); Ja III 106,4· (para111 jitva, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se jinitva); Sadd344,11; (d)jinitva, AIV 151,5'
(ye sattasa~~a111 pa~avi111 jinitva, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
vijetva); Ja I 293,14 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee janitva); Ps V 24,9
jayati
(vipaka1p jinitva); Ap-a 115,17 (pañca mare Jlmtva
buddho jato ti); Sadd 344,13;- neg. ajinitva, Pj II 114,1s
(Be, Se so; Ce, E e avijitva) = Ap-a 189,3o; Mhv 32: 18;
-(e) jiya, Ap 8,3 (hitva papañce jiya phanditani, Be so;
Ce vijiya; Ee, Se papañca1p jitaphanditani, prob. wr;
Ap-a 129,33: phanditani dvasatthi diqhigatani jinitva, Be,
Se so; Ce jitabandhitani sabbani tani dvasatthi ... ; E e
jitabandhitani ti bandhikani sabbani tani dvasatthi ... );
(f) (¡¡.amu1) jaya1p (jor *jaya1p ?), S I 83,31' ( -a1p vera1p
pasavati dukkha1p seti parajito; or part.pr.; cfSpk I
154,21: jinanto vera1p pasavati) = Dhp 201; S I 85,30*
(hanta 1abhati hantara1p jetiiralp 1abhate -a1p; or
part.pr.; cfSpk I 155,3: -anto pugga1o paccha jetara1p
labhati); V 6,16* (niyyanti dhira lokamha aññadatthu
-a1p -a1p; cfSpk III 122,33: ragadayo sapatte jinanta
jinanta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jinanta jinanti); Ja VI 218,18*
(-am Indo va sobhati; or part.pr.: 219,6·: jayappatto
Indo viya); - pass. pr. 3 sg. (a) jiyati 1, jiyyati, is
defeated, loses (something, acc., in dicing or gambling);
M III 170,7 foll. (akkhadhutto pathamen' eva
ka1iggahena putta1p pi -etha dara1p pi -etha
sabbasapateyya1p pi -etha; or to jiyati3 ?); Ja VI
193,23'joll. (sace hi so -issati mayha1p pañcasahassani
dassati, sac' aha1p -issami aham assa dassami, Be so; Ee
-issati ... jiyissami; Ce jiyissati ... jiyissami; Se sace so
ma1p jinissati aha1p assa pañcasahassani dassami
sacaha1p jinissami mayham eva dassati); 280,12*
(dhammena jiyyama asahasena jito ca no khippam
avakarohi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jissama; 280,16': ki)anta ca
maya1p dhammena jiyissama, dhammen' eva no
asahasena jayo hotu, sace pana tva1p jito bhavissasi ... ,
Ee so; Be jissama; Ce jiyissama; Se jineyyama);
(b) jiniyati, Sadd 495,29; - pp jita\ mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) (i) [ts] beaten, defeated; conquered; won; Vin I
8,29* (-a me papaka dhamma tasma 'ha1p Upaka jino);
232,9 (jit' amha vata bho ambakaya); D II 266,5* (-a1p
me tuttatomara1p); SI 163,27 (brahma¡¡.o bhagavanta1p
etad avoca -o si sama¡¡.a -o si sama¡¡.a ti); Dhp 104 (atta
have -a1p seyyo ya caya1p itara paja; or noun ? Dhp-a II
228,17 foll.: -an ti 1iilgavipallaso, attano ki1esajayena
atta -o seyyo ti attho); Ud 27,17* (yassa -o
kamaka¡¡.tako); Ja II 11,27 (siho me -o ti); VI 274,7
(tva1p jute -o ki1p dassasi); 571 ,8* (sabba -a te paccüha
ye dibba y e ca manusa); Dhp-a I 44,12 (taya pi koci ...
kütasakkhi!p otaretva -o bhavissati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr okaretva); V v-a 284,4 (indriyana1p ... aggamaggena
--tta); Cp-a 167,28. (Jayaddiso nama ti rañña attano
paccatthike -e jato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee rañño);- (ii) [or
to jiyati3, cf S. jita] who has lost something (acc.) to
someone (in dicing or gambling); Vin III 220,36 (yo
paccha agacchati paññasa!p baddho ti . . . kissa tva!p
ayyo paccha agato paññasa1p -o si ti, Ce so; Ee, Se jino
si ti; Be jino si ti; Sp 672,14: jino si ti -o si, Be so; Ce
jino si ti -o asi; Ee -o si ti -o asi; Se jino si ti -o si);
Thi 419 (-a 'mhase rüpini1p lakkhi1p, Be so; Ce jit'
amhase; Ee, Se jina 'mhase; Thi-a 247,1: -a vat' amha
rüpavati1p siri1p); Ja V 428,27' (itaro sahassa1p -o, Be,
Ce so; Se sahassena; Ee sahasslUito); Sp 553,26
(abbhutam aka1psü ti yadi karissati tva1p ettaka1p -o
yadi na karissati aha1p ettakan ti); 672,11 (paññasa1p -o
210 jayati
hoti pannasa1p dapetabbo ti adhippayo); Ps IV 214,4
(yasma bahu1p -o); Mp I 425,2 (aha1p bhatika darakehi
saddhi1p ki)anto ettaka1p nama -o);- 2. (n.) what has
been won; conquest; Dhp 104 (atta have -a1p seyyo ya
caya1p itara paja; or mfn. ? cfDhp-a II 228,17 foll.: -an ti
liilgavipa11aso, attano kilesajayena atta -o seyyo ti
attho); 105 (na Maro saha brahmuna -a1p apajita1p
kayira); 179 (yassa -a1p navajiyati -a1p assa no yati koci
loke; LjPDhp 276: -am assa na upeti antako; Uv 29:52:
-am anveti na ka[1p]cid eva 1oke; Mvu Ili 91: -a1p asya
na jinati antako ); Ja I 313,23* (na ta1p -a1p sadhu -a1p
ya1p -a1p avajiyati; 313,25foll.: ya1p paccamitte
parajinitva ra(tha1p -a1p patiladdha!p puna -ehi
paccamittehi avajiyati ... aparo nayo, -a1p vuccati jayo,
yo paccamittehi saddhi1p yujjhitva adhigato jayo); -
jitaphanditani in Ee, Se at Ap 8,3 and jitabandhitani in
Ce, Ee at Ap-a 129,33 are prob. wrr for jiya phanditani
(Be so);- --vijaya, mfn., who has won a victory, with
victory won; Spk I 342,21 (Sakko --vijayo, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se vijitavijayo); - --sailgama, mfn., who has won
the battle, with battle won; Ja II 91,2 (satta rajano
palapetva --sailgamo, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee vijita- );
Ap 323,!5 (usabho --sailgamo sampakampesi medini1p,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --sailgame, prob. wr); - neg.
ajita, mfn. and n., undefeated; what is undefeated; being
undefeated; Ja I 313,18 (taya ... sailgamasatasahassa1p pi
jinantena dujjitam eva kilesana1p ajitatta); VI 222,3*
(ajita1p ojinamase; 222,28·: ya1p no ajita1p ta1p jinama);
Sv 250,Jo (cakkavattiraja cakkaratanena ajita1p jinati);
Dhp-a I 312,10 (tva1p bahirake core jini, taya jita1p puna
ajitam eva hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee avajita1p); -
ajitañjaya, mfn., having victory over the undefeated;?
(whose victory is not defeated; ?) Ap 463,20
(Padumuttaro nama jino anejo ajitañjayo, Ce, Ee so; Be
ajita1p jayo; Se ajitañjino); - dujjita, mfn. and n. (?),
not well defeated, not completely defeated; not a
complete conquest; Ja I 313,17 (taya .. . sangama-
satasahassa!p pi jinantena dujjitam eva ki1esiina!p
ajitatta); Dhp-a III 197,16 (jita1p ... navajlyati dujjita1p
nama na hoti); - fpp (a) jetabba, mfn., Abh 379;
V in IV 1,22 (ete .. . titthiya nama yena kenaci -a);
Sv 892,12 (titthiya nama dhammena pi adhammena pi -a
ti); neg. ajetabba, mfn., Ja VI 51,zs·;
(b)jinitabba,mfn., Jalll 205,21' (paccamitta -a);
Dhp-a III 313,9 (musavad! saccavacanena -o ti);
(e) jeyya2 , mfn., Abh 379; 1022; Sadd 495,3o; - neg.
ajeyya 1, mfn., unconquerable; not to be defeated; not to
be won; Khp 8:8 (eso nidhi sunihito ajeyyo anugamiko;
Pj I 223,4: ajeyyo ti parehi jetva gahetu1p na sakka);
Ja V 509,19* (na so raja yo ajeyya1p jinati; 510,1 ·: ajeyya
nama matapitaro ); VI 4 7 ,9* (V edehe phite ajeyye ...
pahaya; 51,28': paccamittehi ajetabbe); 155,3* (yacam'
aha!p patim ajeyya1p, so read with L. Alsdorf, 1967,
p. 292 ? Be, Ee yacam' aha1p pati maha1p ajeyya1p; Se
yacami vo; Ce ajiyya1p; cf 155,9·: pati!Jl aha1p ma
ajeyya1p, Be so; E e pati; Ce pati1p . . . ajiyya1p; Se
ajeyyan ti paccatthikehi ajeyyam ajita1p); Spk I 324,12
(yannunaha1p kenaci ajeyya1p dussavudha!Jl muñceyyan
ti); Mhv 32:18 (kilesasattu1p aJlmtva ajeyyo
maccusattuko); (d) jitabba, mfn., Sadd 495,3o; - caus.
jayana
1 jara2 , m. [S. jvara], fever; Abh 329; A V 110,4 ( ... pinaso
pr. 3 sg. (a) *japeti [cf S. japayati], causes to win;
conquers; - see japaka; - (b) jaylipeti, wishes
(someone) victory; - aor. 3 sg. jayapesi, Ja IV 97,5
(brahm~o ... hatth~ pasaretva -esi) =F V 476,24;
Cp-a 250,9 (jayatu bhav~ maharaja ti vatva -esi);
3 pl. jayapesu~, Ja II 369,12; - absol. jayapetva, Ja li
213,22 (Sakko pavisitva -etva ekamanta~ arthasi);
III 348,24 (brahmaryo rajana~ upasailkamitva -etva);
1 2
Cp-a 64,23;- see also jigi~sati, jina , jina , nijjita •
1
jayana, n. [S. lex. id.], conquering, victory; Abh 761 (jayo
ca -~jiti); Sadd 344,9.
jayampatl, m., see jayapati (sv jaya).
jayampatika, m.pl., see jayampatika (sv jaya).
jara 1, jara(t), mfn. [S. jarat], old; worn-out;
o• -udaplina, o• -üdapana, n. [BHS jarodapana], an old
well, an abandoned well; S II 198,3 (puriso -a~ va
o1okeyya; Spk II 168,11: -an ti jiryryaküp~); Ja II 296,1o•
(-a~ kh~amana varyija udakatthika); IV 387,1o' (-a~
va mukh~ parü!ha~; 387,w: tiryagahanena jiryryaküpo
viya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jiryryaküpe); - (jara)-kapi, m.
[me or <*jaratkapi], an old monkey; Ja 11446,14* (daharo
pi ta~ na saddheyya na hi jiryryo -i; 446,1r: jinryo -i
1
mahallakamakka~o); - 0 -ggava, m. [jara(t) + gava ;
S. jaradgava], an old bull or ox; Abh 496 (-o); Pv 8:1
(khada khada ti 1apasi gatasatta~ -a~; Pv-a 40,3:
ba1ivadda~ jiryryagorya~) = Ja III 156,11*; Th 1154 (ettha
e' eke visidanti pailkamhi va -o); Jaii 420,18* (-a
vicintesu~, Be, Ce so; Se acintesu~; Ee -asa cintesu~);
PsI 117,8 (eko kammamutto -o); Sadd 106,22 (jaranto ca
so go ca ti -o); - 0 -geha, jarageha, n., an old house;
Ja 11427,5 (so duggato hutva ekasmi~ -e vasati, Be, Ce,
1 142,14 (id~ nicca~ id~ dhuv~ ... ida~ hi na jayati
Se so; Ee jaragehe);- 0 -goJ!a, m. [jara+ gorya ], an old
ox; Ja II 135,4 (eka~ -~ gahetva m~sa~ khadi~su);
143,7; - (jara)-ghara, m. [me or <*jaradghara, or to
jara qv], an old house; Thí 270 (ay~ samussayo ... so
'pa1epapatito -o; Thí-a 202,29: -o ti jirynagharasadiso,
jaraya va gharabhüto ahosi);- 0 -ttha, n .. [cj S. jara~ha,
"old" ?], an old part; ? Sp 833,Ifoll. (vajakalímüle -a~
chinditva chat;i<;lenti . . . mülakakharakajajjhañmü1ana~
pana -ani pi amisagatikan' eva ti vutta~, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se jarat;!t;lh~ . . . jarat;lt;lhani); 834,26 (jararthabundo
yavajlviko, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jarat;!t;!habundho);
Vin-vn 1326 (chat;!t;!enti jara~ha~ chetva ya~ ta~
vajakalissa tu ta~ yavajívika~ vutta~); 1338
(jaranhabundo);- 0 -tli,f, abstr., old age; Abh 251 (-a
jara); Ohs 585 (atthi rilpa~ rüpassa -a atthi rilpa~
rilpassa na -a; As 329,5: rilpaparipaka1akkharya rilpassa
-a); - 0 -sakata, n., an old cart; O II 100,14 = S V
153,z8; Ja 11 142,25 (-a~ pi disva bhindapeti); -
0
-sakka, m., "Old Sakka", (a term of disrespect); Ps 111
317,23 (nasakkhi -o man~ sandharetu~); Spk I 342,18
(-a na tva~ sabbaka1~ jinissasi); Ohp-a I 279,3 (asura
vañcit' amha -ena ti ta~ anubandhi~su); - 0 -Sli1li,f,
an old hall or shed; M I 80,16 (-aya gopanasiyo
o1uggavi1ugga bhavanti); Pv-a 78,24; 0
-sigala,
0
-Siiigala, m., a jackal, a wretched jackal; O III 24,3
(tassa -assa etad ahosi ko cah~ ko sího migaraja); S 11
230,18 (Spk 11 208,13: tadahujato pi siilgalo -o tv eva
vuccati); Ja II 244,2s; Mi1395,1; - 0 -hatthi(n), m., an
old elephant, Ja I 502,15.
211 *jarati
t;laho -o kucchirogo ... ); Nidd I 47,4 ( ... t;!ahena -ena
kucchirogena ... ); Sp 629,21 (yatha tatiye catutthe ca
divase hotl ti -o tatiyako catutthako ti ca vuccati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee jaro); Saddh 288; Sadd 426,10 (jara
1
roge: ... jarati -o);- see also dara .
jara(s),f [S. jaras], ageing; old age; Sn 804 (atha kho so
-asa pi miyyati; Nidd I 121,2joll.: jaraya pi cavati
marati); 1123 (manuje ... -asa parete); - ajara(s),f,
freedom from ageing, from decay; S I 37 ,1• (síla~ -asa
sadhu; Spk I 93,9: -asa ti ajíraryena, avipattiya ti attho,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -asa ti ajarena, prob. wr).
1
jaraJ!aka, mfn. [from jarati ], wearing out, consuming;
Mp II 332,22 (ki1ese o -pa~ipada ki1ese va nijjararyato
nijjara, Ce, Ee so; Be ki1esajlr~akapa~ipadaya ...
nijjlraryato nijjaraya; Se ki1ese jlr~akaparipadaya).
*jarati 1, jiyat¡2, jiyyati\ jirate, [cfS. vJf], grows old,
ages; wears out; perishes; Ohatup 252 (jara jlrarye);
Ohatum 356; - pr. 3 sg. (a) *jarati 1, - part.pr.
(a) jara(t), mfn. [S. jarat], growing old; old: Sadd 167,9
(jay~ -a~ cava~ mlya~); - see jarakapi, jaraggava
(svjara\ (b)jaranta,mjn., Sadd 106,22 (-anto ca so go
ca ti jaraggavo); - pr. 3 sg. (b) (or caus. ?) jareti,
jarayati 1, Sadd 560,8 (jara vayohanimhi: -eti -ayati jara,
2
pa!iya~ pana jlrati ti pa~ho); - pr. 3 sg. (c)jiyati ,
1
jiyyati [S. jlryati], grows old; decays, wears out;
perishes; o u 30,26 (kiccha~ vataya~ 1oko apanno,
jayati ca -ati ca miyati ca cavati ca upapajjati ca); 32,3o
(jayetha va -etha va); M III 168,8 (parya andhakare
jayanti andhakare -anti andhakare miyanti); 246,22
(ajayamano ki~ -issati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se jiyyissati); SI
na -ati na mlyati); Ja III 336,10' (dhana pi tattha -anti
3
rajakoso ca vat;!t;!hati; or jlyati ? cf336,14'joll.: tattha te
vivadapanna dhanato pi jlyanti attano santaka
parihayanti); V 103,zz• (yassa ranhamhi -anti appatika
kumarika, Be, Ce, Se so; E e rarthasmi~ jlvanti appatita);
VI 27,24' (ki~ dhanena y~ -etha ki~ bhariyaya
marissati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se jiyyetha; 28,11·: khaya~
gaccheyya); 528,5• (acira cakkhüni -are; 528,9·: na
cirass' eva cakkhüni -issantl ti); Kv 41,31 (citte citte
pugga1o jayati -ati mlyati cavati upapajjatí ti, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se jiyyati); Pe~ 58,11* (-ate); Mi1320,29 (akaso na
jayati na -a ti na mlyati); Sadd 344,21 (je khaye: -ati ...
saddasatthavidü pana jayatí ti rüpa~ vadanti); 593,10
(jara vayohaniy~ jírati jiyyati); part.pr.
(a) jíya(t), mfn., Ja IV 398,19* (varyrya~ jara hanti narassa
-ato; 398,2s·: jlramanassa narassa); (b) jiyamana,
jiyyamana, mfn., Pj I 78,3 (paramatthato ca khandhesu
jayamanesu -amanesu miyamanesu ca, Be, Ce so; Ee
omits miyamanesu; Se jiyyamanesu); neg.
ajiyamana, mfn., M lii 246,22 (ajayamano ki~ jiyissati
ajlyamano ki~ miyissati, Be, Ce so; Ee Se ajiyyamano);
- aor. 3 sg. jiyittha, S 1 54,17 (nandasi sam~a ti, ki~
1addha avuso ti, tena hi sam~a socasi ti, ki~ -ittha
avuso ti; Spk I 112,3o: yassa hi kiñci manapa~
clvaradivatthu jiryry~ hoti so socati, Be, Se so; Ee yo hi
kiñci manapaclvaradivatthu jlno hoti; Ce jiryryo hoti); Ja I
468,2' (ma me mitti -ittha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se bhijjittha;
468,1o: mama sahayena saddhi~ metti ma bhijjittha, Ce,
*jarati
Ee so; Be, Se mitti); - pr. 3 sg. (d) jirat¡I (sometimes
written jirati in Ee, Se) [S. jiryati], l. grows old; wears
out; decays; perishes; Vin I 237,34 (na ca pana te
ayasmanta -anti tarp bhagavantarp asata tuccha musa va
abhutena abbhacikkhanta, Ce, Ee so; Be jiridanti; Se
kiranti) = A IV 188,4 (Ce, E e, Se so; Be jiridanti; Mp IV
103,8foll.: abbhacikkhanta na -anti abbhakkhanassa
anta111 na gacchantl ti attho atha va 1ajjanatthe idaJ11
jirantl ti padaJ11 daghabbaJ11, na 1ajjantl ti attho, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be jiridanti . . . jiridantl ti); V in II 120,19
(jantagharassa km;h;lapado -ati); S I 43,12* (rüparp -ati
maccanarp namagottaJ11 na -ati); A III 54,22 (sabbesarp
sattana111 jaradhamma111 -ati); Dhp 152 (appassutaya111
puriso ba1ivaddo va -ati; cfjirati3); Ja III 38,8* (sandhi
tesarp na -ati); IV 109,12* (deva na -anti yatha
manussa); V 233,23* (ka1ena yacarp yaceyya eva111 mitta
na -are); 280,13 (sace pi me sañra111 jiJ?.J?.ai]l rago pana na
-ati); Sp 1246,15 (sace so avaso -ati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
jirati); Sv 942,10 (vatthani kilissanti -anti); Dhp-a I
11,14* (cakkhüni -antu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -anti);
III 407,6 (anatta tima -antu ma miyantü ti vase vattetu111
na sakka ti); Sadd 593,9 (jara vayohaniya111 -ati); -
part.pr. (a) jiranta, mft¡., Ja IV 109,23·; Spk I 138,24
(rathesu -antesu); (b) jiramana, mft¡., A I 179,22 (puttaJ11
-amanaJ11); Th 32 (Th-a I 98,9 foil.: -aman en a ti
-antena, khaJ?.e khaJ?.e jara111 papuJ?.antena); Ja IV 398,2s·
(-amanassa narassa, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se jiramanassa);
V 123,w· (yatha natagaraJ11 mUlato paghaya -amana111
appatitthaJ11 patati);- 2. is consumed; is digested; Ja II
362,23 (sesa111 ajjhohatamattam eva -ati); Vism 101,15
(bhattarp na -ati); Sp 1089,24 (na cchadentl ti na -anti na
vatarogaJ11 patippassambhetuJ11 sakkonti); Ps li 416,16
(sabba111 -atu phasuka111 hotü ti hatthena kucchiJ11
paramasissa); Mhv 22:76 (ma -atu kucchigata111 idarp
vo ti); - aor. 3 sg. (a) jiri, A I 179,23 (aharp -ami ma
me putto -i ti); Dhp-a I 172,14 (civaraJ11 -i); III 102,14
(tasa111 kucchiya111 sura -i); (b) ajiratha, Ja VI 55,22*
(raghe vi1umpamanarnhi na me kiñci ajiratha, Ce, Ee so,
wr? Be ah!ratha; Se aharatha [mistake for ahiratha ?]);
3 pl. jiriJ11su, Kv 457,16 (jaradhamma satta ma -i111su, Be
so; Ee, Se jiri111su; Ce jiyiJ11SU) f. 607,29 (Be so; Ee
jari111su; Se jiri111su; Ce jiyi111su); - pp jil}I}a, mft¡.
and m. [S. jirJ?.al. l. (mft¡. and m.) old; worn out; an old
man; Abh 254; V in III 252,2o (-aya vassikasatikaya);
IV 278,s (yada -a bhavissatha tada brahmacariyarp
carissatha); D II 22,9 (eso kho deva -o nama na dani
tena cirarp jivitabbarp bhavissatl ti); M I 82,3o (aharp ...
-o vuc!<)ho maha11ako addhagato vayo anuppatto as!tiko
me vayo vattati); S I 176,16* (asso va -o nibbhogo
khadana apaniyati); A I 246,29 (-o . . . potthako
dubbaJ?.J?.O ca hoti dukkhasamphasso ca appaggho ca);
II 249,29 (naghaJ11 gavesanti -a111 patisañkharonti); Sn 1
(so bhikkhu jahati orapara111 urago -am iva tacarp
puriiJ?.arp); Th 73 (-arr ca disva dukkhitarp ca vyadhita111
mata111 ca disva); Ja V 509,22* (na te putta ye na bharanti
-arp); VI 175,25* (pabbajissami -o smi na kame
abhipatthaye); 522,12* (natthi khic;lc;la natthi rati -ena
patina saha); Mi1224,4 (andhe -e matapitaro poseti);
Vism 118,24 (navattaJ11 --ttaJ11); Ps II 111,28
(paribhogena va -arp); Spk I 349,2o (civarani pi 'ssa
212 *jarati
-ani, tato tato suttani galanti); Pj II 313,5 foil. (-a ti
jajjañbhüta . . . api ca -a ti poriiJ?.a, cirakalappavatta-
kulanvaya ti vutta111 hoti); Th-a I 140,4 (--taya); II 203,35
(tapasakale katapaJ?.J?.asala -a palugga ahosi); Mhv 35:81
(avase -e ca patisañkhari); - 2. (mft¡.) digested; Ja I
297,26 (pabuddho -aya suraya, Be, Se so; Ce jiJ?.J?.asaya;
Ee jiJ?.J?.asayasuraya); V 14,5 (bitaJa pi suraya -aya
ughahitva kitanta vicariJ11su); - see also ajiJ?.J?.a,
ajiJ?.J?.aka; - 3. (n.) old age; the being old; - see iic
below; - jiJ?.J?.O in Ee at SI 123,2* is prob. wr for jino
(Be so; Ce jito; Se jinno);- jiJ?.J?.O in Ee at Ap 485,20 is
prob. wr for dino (Be, Ce, Se so); - jinJ?.a in Ee at
Pet 96,2 is prob. wr for nijjiJ?.J?.a (Be, Ce so); -
--katasara, m., an old mat; As 180,13 (--katasaramattena
paticchadetva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se --katasaraka-); -
--kalasmiJ11, --kale, in old age; when one is old; Ja I
308,29 (puttehi --kale matapitaro patijaggitabba);
VI 252,7· (--kalasmi111 hi te tani kammani katu111 na
sakkonti); Spk I 261,2s (so asso eva111 --kale ...
nibbhogo); - --gharaka, n., an old house; As 120,28
(--gharakarp ... tighati, E e so; Be, Ce, Se jiJ?.J?.agharaJ11);
- --civaraka, --civarika, mft¡., whose robes are old or
worn-out; Ja II 25,11 (thero ... pañca satakasatani
--civarakanarp adasi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be --civarikanaJ11);
Mp I 232,18 (eko --civariko paccekabuddho); Dhp-a I
219,s (sesani --civarakanarp dassami, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
--civarikanaJ11); - --tara, mft¡., older; Ja IV 108,24* (-a
si ajja); - --taracivara, mft¡., whose robes are older;
Dhp-a I 219,10 (--taracivaranaJ11, Ee so; Be, Ce
--taracivarikanaJ11; Se --taracivarakanaJ11);
--patisañkharaJ?.a, n., repairing what is old or worn-out;
Ja V 429,18 (--patisañkharaJ?.aJ11 karoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
--patism1kharaJ?.arp); Ps IV 150,n; --pati-
sañkharaka, mft¡., (one) who repairs what is old or
worn-out; Ja V 429,13 (rajanivesane --patisailkharako
eko caJ?.c;ia1o); - atijiJ?.J?.a, mft¡., very old; too old;
Sv 568,13 (natitaruJ?.assa natijiJ?.J?.assa ekajeghaka-
sükarassa); sujiJ?.J?.a, mft¡., properly worn-out;
legitimately worn-out; Sp 1248,11 (sañghikaparibhogena
paribhuñjantassa . . . jiJ?.J?.aJ11 sujiJ?.J?.aJ11); fpp
ajeyya2, mft¡., imperishable; Ja VI 323,16*
(ajjeyya-m-esa tava hotu metti; 323,2o·: esa ...
piyasaJ11vasamettl ajeyya hotu); - caus. pr. 3 sg.
(a) jarayat¡2 [S. jarayati], wears out, breaks up; makes
perish; Ja V 501,14* (na tena mitti111 -ayetha pañño, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se jirayetha; 501,19·: na -ayetha na vinaseyya,
Ce, Ee so; Be na jirayetha; Se na jirayetha) = VI 375,22*
(Ce so; Be mettiJ11 -ayetha; E e mittarp -ayetha; Se
mettiJ11 jirayetha; 3 75 ,25' foil.: mittabhava111 nama na
jireyya na naseyya ti attho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jaheyya);
Vv-a 35,6 (kUJ11 va pathaviJ11 . . . -ayatl ti kuñjaro; f.
Pv-a 57,24: jirayati); - (b) jireti, jiraya ti, l. wears out,
breaks up; makes perish; Pv-a 57,24 (kuñjarena ti ku111
pathaviJ11 -ayati); Ja VI 375,26' (na -eyya na naseyya ti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jaheyya); - 2. digests; Ja I 274,19
(ta111 avudhaJ11 -etu111 na sakkhissasi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jirapetuJ11); 274,25 (marpsakhaJ?.c;iaJ11 mayhaJ11 kucchi
-etuJ11 na sakkhissati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se kucchiJ11
jirapetuJ11);- (e) jirapeti, l. wears out; makes perish,
brings to an end; Sp 352,15 (paribhuñjanto -eti); Mp I
jarati
264,9 (tvarp. pubbe katakammarp. yavajjadivasa -eturr na
sakkosi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jirapeturr); II 156,26 (il)arr
-emi ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -essami ti); Thi-a 247,35
(nijjaressami ti -essami vinasessami); - part.pr.
jirapenta, mfn., Ps II 271,13 (unhay' ughaya dukkham
eva -enta ahil)<;latha ti); - 2. digests; Ja III 314,7'
(ettakarp. bhuñjitva -eturr sakkhissami ti); VI 581,lo
(Jüjako pi pamiil)atikkantarp. bhuñjitva -eturr asakkonto
tatth' eva kalam akasi); As 404,lo (-eturr); - neg.
absol. ajirapetva, not having used up; ? befare using
up;? Ja II 309,lo (ekassa hatthato bhatirr gahetva tarr
ajirapetva aññassa hatthato na gal)hati); 381 ,s (aharp.
gahitabhatirr ajirapetva va aññena diyyamanaya bhatiya
2
hattharp. pasaresirr); - (d) japayati , makes perish;
brings toan end; Ja VI 108,8* (ye keci pügaya dhanassa
hetu sakkhirr karitva il)arr -ayanti; 108,w foll.: tarp.
dhanarr yatharucirr khaditva . . . asukaghane amhehi
ettakarp. dinnan ti kütasakkhirr datva tarp. il)arp. -ayanti
vinasenti); - ahsol. japayitva, Ja VI 108,9* (te -ayitva
janatarp.); - caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. jiriyati, jirlyati
(jirati2), jariyati 1 [S. *jaryate ?], is made old; is made to
wear out; (or to jarati2 qv); MI 188,7 (ajjhattarr
paccattarp. tejo ... yena ca santappati yena ca -ati yena
ca pari<;!ayhati yena ca asitapitakhayitasayitarp. samma
paril)iimarp. gacchati, Be so; Ce jiñyati; Ee jiriyati; Se
jirati; Ps II 227,34: yena ayarr kayo jirati
indriyavekallatarp. balaparikkhayarp. valitapalitadi-
bhavarp. ca papul)ati) = III 241,15 (Be, Ce so; Se jiriyati;
Ee wr janiyati) =f. Vibh 83,28 (Be, Ce -ati; Ee jirate; Se
jirati; Vibh-a 69,19: yena ayarr kayo -ati) quoted PsI
30,2o (Be -ati; Ce, Ee jañyati; Se jiriyyati) =f. Vism 363,8
(Be -ati; Ce jiriyati; Ee jirayati; Se jariyati); Sadd 593,14
(yena tejogatena kupitena ayarr kayo ekahikadi-
jararogena jariyati jarati, atha va yena ca jariyati yena
ayarp. kayo jirati indriyavekalyarr balakkhayarp.
palitavalitadirr ca papul)ati); - pp jarita, mfn. [ts],
aged; old; Ap 609,8 (tiss' itthiyo nidassesi iddhiya ...
tarul)irr -arr matarr, Be, Ce so; Se jarikarr; Ee tarul)I -a
mata); - neg. ajarita, mfn., Spk III 112,9 (jaraya
ajaritatta ajajjararr, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ajajjaritatta); -
se e also jarati2.
jarat¡2, pr. 3 sg. [S. jvarati], is feverish; Sadd 426,9 (jara
roge: ... -ati jaro); 593,9 foll. (jara roge -ati -iyyati jara
vayohaniyarp. jirati jiyyati ... yena ca santappati yena ca
jariyyatl ti adi, tattha yena ca jariyyatl ti yena tejogatena
kupitena ayarp. kayo ekahikadijararogena jañyati -ati,
atha va yena ca jañyati yena ayarp. kayo jirati
indriyavekalyarp. balakkhayarr palitavalitadirr ca
papul)ati; ad MI 188,7 etc qqv at jiñyati sv jarati\ -
caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. jariyati2, jariyyati [S. jvaryate], is
made feverish, becomes feverish; Sadd 593,9 foll. - se e
also darati 1.
jarayati\ see sv jarati 1.
jarayati2 , caus. pr. 3 sg. ojjarati 1 qv.
jarii,f [ts], l. the becoming old; old age; Abh 251 (jarata
-a); Vin I 10,21 (jati pi dukkha -a pi dukkha); D II 22,21
(dhir atthu kira bho jati nama yatra hi nama jatassa -a
paññayissati ti); S I 36,22* (sllarr yava -a sadhu);
V 217,9* (dhi tarrjammi -e atthu); Dhp 135 (evarp. -a ca
maccu ca ayurr pacenti piil)inarp.); Sn 311 (tayo roga
213 jara
pure asurr iccha anasanarr -a); Thi 106 (dhi tav' atthu
-e jamme, Be, Se so; Ce chamme (misprint ?); Ee
thitivatthuj' aneja mhi; Thi-a 97,15: -e jamme lamake
hine tava tuyharr dhi atthu); 252 (muddhaja . . . -aya
sal)avakasadisa); Ja IV 121 ,3* (diparp. ca katum icchami
yarr -a nabhikirati); Ap 584,23; Dhs 1366
(sarrvejaniyarr thanan ti jati -a vyadhi maral)arr);
Vibh 99,17 (-a jiral)ata khal)<;iiccarp. pa1iccarp. ... );
Mil253,12 (-a vyadhi maral)arr); Vism 199,28
(khandhanarr nibbatti jati paripako -a bhedo maral)arp.);
- 2. digestion;- see dujjara below;- abhivega, m.,
0
the agitation or impetus of old age; Spk I 274,2* (satta
-ena maddiyantl ti, Ce so; Ee -ehi; Be maddiyanti ti; Se
-ehi maddiyantl ti) =f. Pj II 397,18* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-ena milayanti);- 0 -kapi, see sv jara1; - 0 -ghara, m.
[or to jara1 qv], an old house; a house of old age;
Thi 270 (ayarp. samussayo . . . so 'palepapatito -o;
Thi-a 202,29: -o ti jil)l)agharasadiso, Jaraya va
gharabhüto ahosi); - 0 -jajjarita, mfn., decrepit, feeble
through old age; Dhp-a I 7 ,IO* (-a honti hatthapada
anassava); - 0
-dhamma, mfn. [jara + dhamma1],
subject to ageing, to old age; MI 167,12 (attana -o
samano ... ajararp. anuttararp. yogakkhemarp. nibbanarp.
ajjhagamarr); A III 71,26 (-o 'mhi jararr anamo ti);
Kv 457,16 (-a satta ma jirirrsu); Bv 2:7 (jatidhammo -o
vyadhidhammo e' aharr tada); 0
-maral}iibhi-
sambandha, mfn., connected with old age and death;
Vism 576,9 (-a . . . sokadayo ca dhamma);
o -maral}asañghata, m., a meeting, a joining, of or with
old age and death; It 37,15* (jatarr bhütarp. .. . -arp.
rogani!arp. .. . na1arr tad abhinanditurr, Be so; Ce
-sailghatarp.; E e, Se -sailkhatarr; It-a I 163,27 foll.: jaraya
maraJ)ena ca ekanten' eva sailghatitarp. sarp.satthan ti
-arp., 0 -maral)asailghatan ti pi pa!hanti, jaraya maral)ena
ca upaddütarr piJitan ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
sarrsanhan ti 0 -maral)asailghatarp., 0 -maral)asailghanan ti
pi pathanti); - 0 -rogabhipiJita, mfn., oppressed by
sickness and old age; Saddh 278; -ajara, mfn. and n.,
free from old age; not subject to ageing; that which is
free from old age, where there is no old age; MI 163,2
(jaradhammo samano ... -arp. anuttararr yogakkhemarr
nibbanarp. pariyesati); Th 32 (-arr jiramanena ...
nimissarr; Th-a I 98,7 foll.: -an ti jararahitarr, nibbanarp.
sandhayaha, tarp. hi ajatatta natthi ettha jara, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e ajaratta); Thi 511 (-amhi vijjamane kirr tava
kamehi yesu Jara; Thi-a 266,17: -amhi nibbane
vijjamane); Ja V 302,22* (-a nüna hes san ti bhakkhayitva
Pabhavatirr); Bv 2:7 (-arp. amararp. khemarp.
pariyesissami nibbutirr); Mi1333,1 (ajatirr -arr
amararp. ... nibbananagararp. pavisitva); - ajarena in Ee
at Spk I 93,9 is prob. wr for ajiral)ena (Be, Ce, Se so);-
-amara, mfn., free from old age and death; Vv 63:11
(kaya va pana vijjaya bhaveyyarp. -amaro); Ja III 515,23*
(assa Indasamo raja accantarp. -amaro); Ap 41,lo
(-amararr sitibhavarp. nibbanarp. phassayirr aharr);
535,s (sabbalokassa atthaya bhavassu -amaro);
Mil 268,6* (sacetana va acetana va -amara loke natthi);
- ajara,f, freedom from old age; Patis I 12,14 (jara
dukkharr -a sukhan ti abhiññeyyarr); 67,7 (jaraya
vut!hitva -arp. pakkhandati ti); - dujjara, mfn., difficult
jarita
to digest; Abh 840 (garu tlsu mahante dujjaralahukesu
ca); Sadd 430,24* (-e alahumhi ca... garusaddo
pavattati); - nijjara 1, mfn., not growing old; a god;
Abh 12 (nijjaranimisa dibba); Sadd 477,24* (devo
suro ... -o amaro); - see also jatijaramara1_1lya, jati-
jarupaga, jatijaliipagami(n) (sv jati\
jarita, mfn., caus. pp ojjarati 1 qv.
jariyati , caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjarati 1 qv.
1
jariyate, caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjarati 2 qv.
jareti, se e sv jarati 1.
jala, n. [ts], water; Abh 661 (apo payo -aq¡ vari); Sn 845
(-en a pailkena e' anupalittaq¡; Nidd I 203,2: -aq¡ vuccati
udakaq¡); Ja I 222,8 (ayaq¡ -e pi thale pi samattho ti);
Ap 577,26 (tejodhatuq¡ adhighaya khippaq¡ santapayiq¡
-aq¡); Cp 1:3:5 (-aq¡ hatthe akiritva); Sp 119,8* (-aq¡
vate patighitaq¡); Ud-a 181,16 (macchagaha1_1atthaq¡ -e
jalaq¡ pakkhipitva); Sadd 408,16*;- jalena in Ee at Ja V
450,26* is wr for jalena (Be, Ce, Se so);- jala in Ee at
Mp II 38,1 is wr for jaJa (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc see
aparisal_l!hita- (sv parisal_l!hati), ghamma-, netta-; -
0
'-iidhiira, m., a lake or pond; Abh 677 (0 '-asayo -o);
- o• -iiyuka, m.n., o• -iiyukii,f [S. jalayuka], "living in
water", a lee eh; Sadd 922,4 foll. (-a jaloka ja!Uka -o
jaloko ja!Uko -aq¡ jalokaq¡ ja!Ukaq¡ . . . mattabhedo
'yaq¡); - se e also ja!Uka, jalo ka below; - o' -ala ya, m.,
a lake or pond; a river; Abh 658 (vetara1_1i lohakumbhi
tattha -a, Ce so, perhaps wr; Be jalasaya); -
o' -iisaya, m., a lake or pond; a river; Abh 677;
Ap-a 566,n; Ud-a 379,2s (pokkhara1_1i-adayo -a); -
o• -üka, m.n., o• -ükii,f, [S. lex. ja!Uka; S. jalauka;
BHS jaluka], "whose home is in water", a leech;
Abh 675 (-a); Sv 117,2 (rago hi amuñcitukamataya
aramma1_1aq¡ ga1_1hati -a viya); Ud-a 212,2 (yavadatthaq¡
pltatta suhitaya -aya viya ruhirapipasa); Vibh-a 258,3s
(-a gacchamana yava purato patinhaq¡ na labhati tava
pacchato nailgu!!hena gahita!!hanaq¡ na muñcati);
Mil 405,13 (-a . . . ruhiraq¡ pivati); Sadd 922,4 foil.
(ialayuka jaloka -a jalayuko jaloko -o jalayukaq¡
jalokaq¡ -aq¡ ... mattabhedo 'yaq¡); - ifc se e ka1_11_1a-;
- see also jalayuka, jaloka;- 0 '-üpikii,f, "belonging
to water", a leech; Mi1407,6* (in uddana); -
o• -oka, m.n., o• -okii,.f. [S. jalauka, jalauka; S. lex.
jaloka; AMg jaloya], "whose home is in water", a leech;
Sadd 922,4foll. (ialayuka -a jaluka jalayuko -o ja!Uko
jalayukaq¡ -aq¡ jalukaq¡ ... mattabhedo 'yaq¡); - se e
also jalayuka, jaluka above; - 0 -kaka, m., the diver-
bird; Ap-a 536,26* (-a sarakukkuta); - 0 -kukkuta, m.
[jala + kukkuta 1], a waterjowl; Ap 223,2 (jatassarassa
vemajjhe vasami -o; Ap-a 468,w: jatassare caramana-
kukkuto); - 0 -cara, mfn. and m., moving, living in
water; an aquatic animal; a fish; Abh 671 (maccho
mino -o); Ja VI 278,6· (kumbhlla ti ime evarupa -a
antonadiyaq¡ vicaranti); Mil 117,24 (tasan ti -a satta);
Patis-a 296,23 (thalajalacara ca pa1_1ino athale ajale ca
thita pi thalacara -a tv eva vuccanti) = As 62,22; -
0
-ja, mfn. and m.n. [jala + ja2], l. (mfn.) produced or
growing or living in water; Ap 27,23 (yatha padumaq¡
-aq¡ jalamajjhe viliihati); Pj II 13,22 (urago ... kamarüpi
pi duvidho -o ca thalajo ca); - 2. (m.n.) (i) an aquatic
animal; a fish; Ja IV 335,3 (-esu maccha kacchapa
214 jalati
kakkataka); (ii) a water-plant, esp. a lotus or water-lily;
Ja V 445,20* (Kambojaka -en' eva assam; 446,27·: -ena
ti jalajatasevalena); Ap 264,26 (-aq¡ aharitvana
sattapattaq¡ manoramaq¡); Ap-a 571,1 (jalato jato -o,
kiq¡ taq¡ padumaq¡); - see also na!inajalajaki1_11_1a
(sv naJina); - jalajaq¡ in Ee, Se at Ap 593,11 is wr for
jaladhiq¡ (Be, Ce so); - 0 -ttha, mfn., living in water;
Mhv 1:62 (te -e thalaghe ca bhujage . . . sllesu
patighapesi); - 0 -thalapatha, m., a (trading) joumey
by land or by water; Dhp-a Ili 132,21 (-'adihi bhoge
sa1_1thapetuq¡ asamatthabhavo); - 0
-da, mfn. and m.
3
[jala + da ], giving water; a cloud; Dath 5:32 (in cpd);
Mhv 68:8 ( --varina); ifc see desana-;
sajalada, mfn., with clouds; Vism IO,s* (sajalada vata) =
Bv-a 121,19*; - jaladakase in Ee at Ap 468,8 is prob.
wr; Be, Se ajatakase; Ce jagadakase; - jaladuttama-
nayako in Ee, Se at Ap 63,10 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
jalajuttaranamako; - 0 -diiyaka, m., a golden pitcher;
Abh 359 (bhiilkaro -o); - 0
-dhara, m., "holding
water"; l. a cloud; Ja II 217,15* (yatha vijjuta -assa
gajjato); Da!h4:55 (-'-ali);- 2.the ocean; Mil117,31
(khubhite luJite -e pakampati mahapa!havi, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se -dhare); -
0 0
-dhi, m. [jala + dhi 3], the ocean;
Ap 593,11 (-iq¡, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se jalajaq¡); Sadd 849,4;
-
0
-niggama, m., a watercourse, a drain; Abh 660
(bhamo tu -o); - 0 -nidhi, m., the ocean; Abh 659;
Ps IV 222,27 (--jalaq¡); - 0 -pathakammika, m., an
administrator concemed with (trading) joumeys by
water; a harbour-master; Jai 121,14/oll.
(so ... thalapathakammikena ca -ena ca saddhiq¡ mitta-
santhavaq¡ akasi ... tassa --sahayako arocesi paganaq¡
mahanava agata ti) t Mp I 219,3/oll. (eds samudda-
kammikasahayako); - 0 -yana, n., a boat; Sadd 426,2•;
467,32; - 0 -sutti,.f. [jala + sutti 1], a bivalve shell;
Abh 676; - 0
-seka, m., sprinkling with water;
V v-a 307,13 (dhuvaq¡ -aq¡ karotl ti attho);- ajala, n.,
(what is) not water; Patis-a 296,23 (thalajalacara ca
piil_lino athale -e ca thita pi thalacara jalacara tv eva
vuccanti) =As 62,21.
jalati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jalati, Wg § 20:3], is rich;
Sadd 438,1 (jala dhaññe: -ati jalaq¡).
jalati2, pr. 3 sg. [S. jvalati], bums brightly; blazes; glows;
Dhatup 264 (jala dittiyaq¡); Dhatum 377; D II 264,22
(-ati su nam' ajja Vediyako pabbato, Be so; Ce -ati ssu;
Ee wr jalit' assu; Se -at' assu ... );M 1487,11/oll. (sace
te purato aggi -eyya janeyyasi tvaq¡ ayaq¡ me purato
aggi -ati ti); SI 148,3* (vimanaq¡ -ate); IV 399,2o (aggi
sa-upadano -ati no anupadano); Vv 46:2 (padipo
e' ettha -ati); Ja I 213,4 (aggi na -issati); 472,14*
(dakassa majjhe -ate ghatasano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
udakassa); IV 124,21 (mayhaq¡ dve putta aggikkhandha
viya -anti); Ap 4,3 (diparukkha -antu te); 210,9
(buddhassa anubhavo so -ate pabbatantare); Mil336,13
(-anti pajjalanti); Sadd 437,24 (jala dittiyaq¡: -ati); -
part.pr. (a) jala(t), mfn., V in II 203,9* (-aq¡ va yasasa
a!tha) = It 86,3•; D III l88,1o• (pa1_1gito ... -aq¡ aggi va
bhasati); Ud 93,23* (-ato jatavedaso); Ja V 322,7* (ko eti
smya -aq¡); (b) jalanta, mfi -anti)n., D II 266,2*
(parinibbapaya maq¡ bhadde -antam iva varina); Ja V
161 ,7* (taq¡ okkam iva ayantiq¡ -antiq¡ vijjutaq¡ yatha,
jalana
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -antaq¡); 271 ,28' ( -antehi
avudhehi); 322,2* (taq¡ ca disvana ayantaq¡ -anta-r-iva
tejasa; 322,26': -antaq¡ vi ya); Ap 243,23 (-antaq¡ citakaq¡
disva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee katva); Kv 332,19;
(e) ja1amana, mft¡., Vin 111 160,4 (mi.gu1iya -amanaya);
Ja VI 404,2o (tassa hatthe -amanaq¡ ma¡;¡iratanaq¡ disva);
Mi1283,24 (-amano maha aggikkhandho); - aor.
3 sg. ajali, MI 487,29 (aggi ti¡;¡akanhupadanaq¡ pa!icca
aja1i); 3 pl. ja1iq¡su, Ap 527,2o; - absol. jalitva, Ja II
44,3 (aggi -itva ... pa¡;¡¡;¡asa1aq¡ jhapesi, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee omits); Ap 70,24 (-itva aggikkhandho va sambuddho
parinibbuto); - pp jalita 1, mft¡. [S. jvalita], buming,
b/azing; glowing, brilliant; M III 167,16* (ayomaya
bhumi -a tejasa yuta); Sn 396 (abrahmacariyaq¡
parivajjayeyya mi.garakasuq¡ -aq¡ va viññu); 686
(kumaraq¡ -am iva suva¡;¡¡;¡aq¡ ukkamukhe); Ja V
145,17' foil. (nirayapala -ehi avudhehi konetva -aq¡
ayapabbataq¡ aropenti); 493,7* (asivisaq¡ -aq¡
uggatejaq¡); Ap 20,10 (sambuddhaq¡ . . . indivaraq¡ va
-aq¡ adittaq¡ va hutasanaq¡); Cp 1:10:18 (-aq¡ aggiq¡
pavinhassa mamaq¡); Mil146,1 (nerayika satta -a); Ps II
185,3o (gandhatelena dipa -a, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jalita);
Pa!is-a 237,33 (--tta); - ja1it' as su in Ee at D II 264,22 is
11T; Be ja1ati su; Ce jalati ssu; Se jalat' assu; -
-·-aggija1aka, mft¡., possessing blazing flames of fire;
~fi1146,2 (tamha -'-aggijalaka mahaniraya cavamana);
- caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. jaleti, jalayati, sets light to, lights;
SI 169,21* (ajjhattam eva -ayami jotiq¡, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be ev' ujjalayami; Spk I 236,25: ña¡;¡ajotiq¡ ja1emi); Ja V
32,12* (sambhañja karthani -ehi aggiq¡; 32,13': aggiq¡
jaletva niddhume aii.gare kara, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -etva);
- inf ja1etuq¡, jalayituq¡, Mi1295,31 (sakka te1ena
padipo -eturp, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce ja1eturp; Se
pajja1iturp); Sv 668,3 (aggirp -ayiturp araddho asiq¡, Ce,
E e so; Be aggi . . . asi; Se aggi pajjalayiturp asi); -
absol. (a) ja1etva, Mi147,2 (aggirp -etva, Ee so, perhaps
11 r: Be, Ce ja1etva; Se ja1apetva); (b) ja1ayitva, Ps 111
19.17 (te1appadipaq¡ -ayitva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
telappadipe jalayitva; f. Ud-a 410,18: eds ja1ayitva); -
pp jalita2, mft¡., set onfire, set alight; Ja IV 221,21, (aggi
pi taya na -ito, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ja1ito); Pj 1 195,9
•pujanatthaya -itesu padipesu, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
Jalitesu); Pj II 28,25 (ahito ti abhato, -ito ti va, E e so; Be,
Ce. Se ja1ito); - fpp jalitabba, mft¡., Ps V 73,29 (sappi-
telani pana gahetva dipa -itabba, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
jalitabba); - caus. (b) pr. 3 sg. jaleti2 , jalayati2 , sets
!ight to; lights; M II 203,zo (aggiq¡ -eyya); Ps II 58,29
•diparp -enti); Dhp-a 1 162,11 (tvaq¡ tava pabbate aggiq¡
-eyyasi aharp mama pabbate aggirp -essami); -
Jaleyya in Ee at S II 85,2 is wr for ja1eyya (Be, Ce, Se
so); - part.pr. (a) jalenta, mft¡., Sv 227,26 (dipa-
-;ahassaq¡ -ento viya); As 158,25; (b)ja1aya(t), mft¡.,
Kkh 2 206,26; - aor. 3 sg. ja1esi, Ps II 182,24; -
fnf. jaleturp, ja1iturp, M II 203,25 (aggiq¡ -ituq¡, Ee so;
Be. Ce -eturp; Se ja1iturp);- absol. (a) ja1etva, Vv 46:8
· padiparp tattha -etva); Ja I 346,32 (bhariya pi 'ssa
uddhane aggirp -etva kapallakarp aropetva);
·bi ja1ayitva, Ps 111 19,17 (te1appadipe -ayitva, Ce, Ee
so: Be, Se te1appadipaq¡ jalayitva) f. Ud-a410,18 (eds
-ayitva); -pass. part.pr. ja1iyamana, mft¡., Ud-a 433,1
215 jalla
([sañrassa] jhayamanassa ti -iyamanassa);
pp jalita, mft¡., set on Jire, set alight; Ja IV 221,21' (aggi
pi te na -ito, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se jalito); Pj I 195,9
(pujanatthaya -itesu pad!pesu, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
ja1itesu); Pj II 28,25 (ahito ti abhato, -ito ti va, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee jalito); Nidd-a I 156,14 (dlpe -ite, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be jalite); As 316,6 (pañcava¡;¡¡;¡ena kappasena vanirp
katva dlpe -ite, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jalite); -
fpp ja1etabba, jalitabba, mft¡., Sp 1060,31 (kapale aggi pi
-etabbo); Ps V 73,29 (dlpa -itabba, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jalitabba); - caus. (e) pr. 3 sg. jalapeti (and ja1apeti),
causes to take light; lights; causes (someone) to light, to
set light to; Sv 924,32 (imina d1paq¡ -etha ti); Spk II
296,24 (nibbapeti na -eti); - part.pr. jalapenta, mft¡.,
Sp 862,19 (vijjhatarp puna -entassa); aor.
3 sg. (a) ja1apesi, Spk 1 290,9 (thero mi.gunhakarp -esi);
(b) jalapayi, Mhv 35:79; - absol. jalapetva (and
jalapetva), Ja I 31,26 (saka1asañraq¡ -etva); 111 375,4
(raja ... d1pe -etva); IV 292,1o (-etva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
jalapetva); Dhp-a IV 122,23 (vaWrp temetva -etva);
Ud-a 251,5 (darüni -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e jalapetva);
- pp ja1apita, mft¡., set light to, lit; Vibh-a 70,s
(kacavararp smi.kagghitva -ito aggi kacavaraggi); - see
also daddallati, da1ati 1.
jalana, m.n. [cfS. jvalana], fire; buming, b/azing;
lighting; Mil 256,s (natthi bhante aggissa -aya udake
hetu, dat. ?); Pañca-g 16 (so jalaq¡ -e jantu tappate
Tapane rudaq¡; vl jalajjalane); - ifc see aggi-, mi.gu1i-,
d!pa- (sv d1pa 1).
jalabu, n. [S. jarayu], the placenta, the afterbirth;
Abh 239 (gabbhasayo -u); Ja IV 38,7 (-urp e' eva
gabbhama1arp ca attharitva puttarp chaggetva agamasi);
Ps II 36,5 (-umhi Jata 0 -ja); Sadd 623,22foll.
(jarayusaddaq¡ patinhapetva rakarassa 1akare kate
yakarassa ca bakare kate -u ti rüparp sijjhati, jaram
jlra¡;¡arp bhedaq¡ yati upetl ti -u, gabbhaseyyakasattanaq¡
palive!hanasayo); - 0 -ja, mft¡., viviparous; Abh 741
(narad! tu -a); M 1 73,3fo/l. (catasso kho ima ...
yoniyo . . . -a yoni ye kho te . . . satta vatthikosa111
abhinibbhijja jayanti ayarp vuccati . . . -a yoni); S III
240,18 (-a naga); Ja II 53,15* (sandhirp katva amittena
a¡;¡gajena -a; 53,1s'joll.:-a ti naku1aq¡ alapati, so hi
ja1abumhi jatatta -o ti vuccati); Ap 92,3 (yatha¡;¡gaja ca
saq¡seda opapatl -a); Mil127,1o (-aya... yoniya);
267,16 (atthi 1oke satta a¡;¡gaja -a saq¡sedaja opapatika).
ja1ayuka, jalüka, jaloka, se e sv jala.
ja1ogi, jaJogi, m. or f [?], toddy, the unfermented (?))u ice
ofthe palm; Vin II 301,11foll. (kappati bhante -irp patun
ti, ka sa avuso -1 ti, kappati bhante ya sa sura asuta
asampatta majjabhavaq¡ sa patun ti, Be so; Se asuta; Ce
kappati bhante -i patun ti ko so avuso -1 ti . .. sura
asutta ... ; E e kappati bhante -i patun ti ko so avuso -1
ti ... sura asurata ... ; Sp-! [Be] 1 112,12: -1 ti taru¡;¡asura);
Mhv 4:10 H ca).
jalla 1, n. [AMg id.; cf S. jhallika ?], dirt; scum; dirt from
sweat; Dhp 141 (na naggacariya ... rajo va -aq¡ ...
sodhenti maccarp, Ee so; Be, Se rajojallaq¡; Ce rajo va
-aq¡); Ja VI 578,25* (kesesu ja!arp bandhitva kacche -am
adharayi); Th-a II 119,35 (rajo sañramalasmi.khata111 -arp
ca kayena dharayirp);- ifc see rajo-; - 0 -Saógaha, m.,
jalla
what is comprised by wetness (Ñi'il;amoli, 1964, p. 192
so); Pe~ 143,22 (ojahi -aq¡);- see also rajojallika.
jalla2 , m. [cf AMg jalla, S. jhalla? cfMhbh 2:4:5: tatra
malla na~a jhalla.J:¡ suta vaitalikas tatha], a prize-fighter;
an acrobat; (according to ct: a barber;) Ja VI 277,8*
(vetalike ca -e ca mai).imhi passa; 277,12·: -e ti massuni
karonte nahapite); Ap 358,1o (-a malla ca te sabbe).
jalli in Ee at Sp 701,2 (rajanajalligai).anaya), in Ce, Ee at
Sp 833,27 and at Sv-pt 111 137,17 (jalli-adirañjana-
vatthuq¡) is wr for challi (Be, Se so).
jallika, f [AMg jalliya; cf S. jhallika], dirt; scum; dirt
from sweat; a dirty mark; Ja VI 578,31' (jallam adharayl
ti ubhehi kacchehi -aq¡ dhareti kiliHhavesena vicaratl
ti); Ps III 370,9 (buddhanaq¡ kai).I).asotesu malaq¡ va -a
va natthi); Pj II 249,4 (sedajallika ti sedo ca lo!).apatala-
malabheda -a ca);- ifc see kata-, khlra-, sura-, seda-.
jaJa, mfn., [S. jac;la], dull, stupid; Abh 721 (-o mutho);
D III 265,9 (duppañño -o ejamiigo); A 11 252,14; Th 582
(yatha -o va mugo va); Kv 94,1 (-a etamuga aviññu);
Pep37,5 ( 0 -ta); Mil251,1; Sp278,18 (bhikkhu -a
dummedha); 737,19 (0 -tta); As 416,22 (attano ahetukataya
hlnataya 0 -taya); Vibh-a 15,32 (ahetukaq¡ hlnaq¡ -aq¡
vedanaq¡ sukhumaq¡ nama karonto);- ifc see jaccaja)a,
jati- (sv jati\ - ajaJa, mfn., not dull; D III 265,16
(paññava -o ane)amiigo); A III 441,8 (--ta
anejamiigata); Th 1015 (-o jajasamano); Kv 94,16; It-a 11
56,3o (analasata --ta).
java, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) swift; Vv 16:2 (haya ...
aghasigama ball -a; Vv-a 78,33: -a ti javanaka,
ba1avanto e' eva vegavanto ca ti attho); Ja VI 238,18*
(pasii ... -o bhadro); Spk III 154,28 (cakkavattino assa-
ratanaq¡ slghaq¡ 1ahu -aq¡); - 2. (m.) speed, swiftness;
mental quickness, swiftness of understanding; Abh 40
(vego -o); M 111 184,10 (so tattha slghena -ena dhavati);
S Il 266,8 (javano puriso paramena -en a samannagato );
A 1 288,19 (bhikkhu .. . ayaq¡ dukkhanirodhagaminl
pa~ipada ti yathabhutaq¡ pajanati, idaq¡ assa -asmiq¡
vadami; Mp 11 381,9 foil.: ayaq¡ assa ña!).ajavo ti
vadami); Sn 221 (sikhl yatha ... haq¡sassa nopeti -aq¡);
Ja 11 290,16 (tena hi 'ssa -aq¡ passissaml ti); VI 22,16*
(thiila -ena hayanti); Mil4,3 (Milindena rañña samo
koci nahosi yad idaq¡ thamena -ena siiriyena paññaya);
Mp III 120,18joll. ( -ena ti padavegena... puggala-
gu!).aiJ.gesu -ena ti ñi\I).avegena); Dhp-a I 197,17 (ahaq¡
atis!ghena -ena gato e' agato ca); - ifc see mano-; -
instr.javena,adv., swiftly; ata rush; Jall 377,13 (te
sindhava -ena pakkhandiq¡su); Ps 1 259,2o (na
turitaturito viya -ena gacchati); - 0 adhika, m., a very
swift horse; Abh 370; - 0 -Cchinna, mfn., who lacks
swiftness; Dhp-a 1 262,1 (-o dubba1asso vi ya); -
0
-Va(t), mfn., swift, speedy; Vv-a 278,4 (sujava ti
sundarajava 0 -vanto mahajava, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
javanto); - atijava, mfn., very swift; Vv-a 253,6
(mahajavan ti -aq¡ slghagamiq¡, Be, Ce so; Ee
atijavanaq¡; Se abhijavantaq¡); Bv-a 281,37 (ekaq¡ -aq¡
sindhavaq¡ kappehl ti); - sujava, mfn., very swift;
Vv 64:7 (vajl .. . -a; V v-a 278,4: -a ti sundarajava
javavanto);- see also purejava (sv pure).
javati, pr. 3 sg. [S. javate], l. hurries on; moves, moves
quickly; runs; Dhatup 57 (ju jave); Dhatum 99; Ja IV
216 javana
213,11 (dve haq¡sapotaka suriyena saddhiq¡ -issama ti);
268,5 (vegena ... -anti); Pa~is 11 200,12 (sabbaq¡ riipaq¡
aniccato khippaq¡ -atl ti javanapañña); 200,23
(riipanirodhe nibbane khippaq¡ -atl ti javanapañña);
Spk 1 117,17 (muhuttaq¡ vissamitva puna -ati); 11284,8
(taru!).avacchako viya aparaparaq¡ -ati); Ud-a 41,21
(avijjamanesu -ati vijjamanesu na -an ti avijja);
Sadd 344,17 (ju gatiyaq¡: ettha slghagati adhippeta, -ati
javanaq¡); - 2. pulsa tes; ? As 265,5 (chasu dvaresu
balavarammai).e pa1obhayamane apathagate javanaq¡
-ati); - part.pr. (a)java(t), mfn., Spkll 284,8 (-ato
pan' assa); Sadd344,18 (-aq¡ -anto); (b)javanta,mfn.,
Ja 11 377,21 (aparaparaq¡ -anta ki1amanti); Pa~is-a 318,18
(sattasu pi javanesu -antesu); - javanto in Ee at
V v-a 278,4 is wr for javavanto (Be, Ce, Se so);
(e) javamana, mfn., Dhp-a 1 389,17 (cattaro jana -amana
na sobhanti); - aor. 3 sg. javi, Ja 111 77,24* (beluvaq¡
patitaq¡ sutva duddubhan ti saso -i); Da~ 5:24; -
inf javituq¡, Ja IV 213,13; - absol. javitva, Ja IV 214,1
(-itva kilami); Sp 428,26 (upacarasamadhi
kusalavlthiyaq¡ -itva bhavaiJ.gaq¡ otarati); As 270,13
(javanaq¡ hutva cha satta vare -itva tadaramma!).assa
varaq¡ deti); Vibh-a IS6,2o (javanaq¡ -itva bhavaiJ.gaq¡
otarati); - pp javita, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) who has
moved quickly; which has pulsated; Vis m 459,35 (-aq¡
javanaq¡); Ps 11 226,13 (ragadivasena evai]J me javanaq¡
-an ti avajjato); III 251,7 (kamme pana -e
arammai).arasaq¡ anubhavitva niruddhavipako bhutva
vigataq¡ nama); As 265,5 (javanaq¡ javati, tasmiq¡ -e
bhavaiJ.gassa varo); - 2. (n.) moving quickly, racing;
pulsating; Spk II 226,22 (yava majjhantika javitva natthi
-ena attho ti nivatto ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ko -ena attho
ti); As 279,18 (javanassa arammai).e --kalo); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. javapeti, makes move; impels; incites; It-a I
57,22 (antavirahite saq¡sare satte -etl ti va avijja); -
absol. javapetva, Ja IV 428,21' (paññajavena ti
pannavegena, pannaq¡ -etva tani tani kiccani
paricchindituq¡ samattha ti); Spk II 39,31 (sa avijja ca
tai).ha ca kammaq¡ -etva pa~isandhiq¡ akac;lc;lhitva).
javana, mfn., m., n. and -a,f, l. (mfn.) [ts] swift; fleet of
foot; Abh 379 (-o turito vegl); S 11 266,11 (-o puriso
paramenajavena samannagato);- 2. (m.) [S. lex. id.] a
swift horse; Abh 370; - 3. (j.) movement; impetus;
Pa~is I 80,28joll. (manapiyesu riipesu ragassa o• -atthaya
avajjanakiriyavyakata vmnai).acanya ragassa -a
aññi\I).acariya);- 4. (n.) (i) speed, swiftness; movement,
Ja IV 214,9 (mayhaq¡ suriyena saddhii]J -aq¡ nama
niratthakaq¡); Sp 808,4 (uddhaq¡ -ato); Sadd 418,7
(rayanaq¡ -aq¡ rayo); - (ii) a (karmically operative)
movement or pulse of perception (thought-moments 9-15
of a 17-moment act of perception; the actual conscious
sense-perception, coloured, as the earlier moments are
not, by passions etc); Vism 22,7 (-e dussllyadisu
uppannesu); 138,11 (tato paraq¡ -aq¡ patati, bhavaiJ.gassa
varo hoti); 408,21 (cattari pañca va -ani javanti);
Sv 194,22* foil. (bhavaiJ.gavajjanaq¡ e' eva dassanaq¡
sampa~icchanaq¡ santlra!).aq¡ voghapanaf!l -aq¡ bhavati
sattamaf!1 . . . sattakkhattuq¡ -aq¡ javati) PsI
262,13* foil.; Ps 11 349,13 (cakkhudvare -aq¡ rajjati va
dussati va muyhati va); As 74,35 (riiparammai).aq¡ hi -af!l
javanaka
cakkhudvare pi uppajjati manodvare pi); 272,1
(paribhuttakalo viya -assa arammal_larasaq¡ anubhavita-
ka1o); 274,18 (-am arammanarasam anubhavati ti); -
0
-kkhal}a, m. [ja~ana + khal_la 1]: l. the moment of
movement or impetus; ? Patis II 72,19 (kusalakammassa
-e tayo hetü kusa1a; c.fPatis-a 571,6: javanavíthiyaq¡
punappunaq¡ uppattivasena sattavaraq¡ -e, pavattanakale
ti attho);- 2. the time ofthe pulse( s) ofperception; PsI
75,36 (-e pana sace dussílyaq¡ va mutthasaccaq¡ va ...
upp~jati); V 100,7 (vipakavedanapaccaya -e
uppannatal_lha); Mp I 61,2o (idaq¡ bhavañgacittaq¡ nama
pakatiparisuddhaq¡ pi -e uppannehi 1obhadíhi
upakki1esehi upakki1itthan ti); It-a 1 72,21 (na hi -e
ka1akiriya atthi); 0
-pañña, mfn., of swift
understanding; of ready intelligence; ? D III 158,9
(mahapañño hoti puthupañño hasapañño -o ... ); M III
25,8 (-o bhikkhave Sariputto); A 1 45,19 (--taya
saq¡vattati); - atijavanapañña, mfn., of very swift
understanding; Pj II 372,2o; - 0
-pañña,f, swift
understanding, ready intelligence; ? Patis II 185,13
(aniccanupassana bhavita bahulíkata -aq¡ paripüreti;
Patis-a 639,17: sa hi sakavisayesu javati ti javana, javana
ca sa pañña ca ti -a); 200,7 foll. (katama -a ... sabbaq¡
rüpaq¡ aniccato khippaq¡ javatí ti -a);
0
-patipadaka, mfn. [javana + patipadaka 1], leading to
perception, making reach a pulse of perception; ? (but
Ñii'(lamoli, 1956, p. 527: "controller of impulsions");
Vism 466,27 foll. (manasikaro . . . arammm:_¡apatipadako
víthipatipadako -o ti tippakaro . . . -o ti mano-
dvaravajjanass' etaq¡ adhivacanaq¡) = As 133,7 foll.; -
atijavana, mfn., very swift; V v-a 253,6 (mahajavan ti
-aq¡ síghagamiq¡, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce atijavaq¡;
Se abhijavantaq¡).s
javanaka, mfn. [javana + ka2], swift; Vv-a 78,33 (balí ti
ba1ino java ti -a, balavanto e' eva vegavanto ca ti attho).
javanika, f [ts ], a curtain or screen; Abh 298 (-a sa
tirokaral_lí).
jasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ja~ati, Wg § 17:37], hurts;
Sadd 442,16 (kasa sisa jasa ... hiq¡sattha: ... -ati);- see
also jaseti 1.
jaha, mfn. (and m. ?) [from jahati], l. (m.fn.) [BHS id.]
abandoning, giving up; - ifc see atta-ñ- (sv adiyati\
oka-ñ- (sv oka\ kappa-q¡-, nandi-q¡-, ral_la-ñ-, sabba-ñ-;
-2. (m.) abandoning, giving up;- ifc see dujjaha.
jahati, jahati, pr. 3 sg. [vha; S. jahati], leaves, leaves
behind, abandons; gives up, lets go; Dhatup 327 (ha
cage); Dhatum 509; 604; V in II 237,36 (ya kaci
mahanadiyo ... ta mahasamuddaq¡ patta -anti purimani
namagottani); 239,2o (cattaro 'me val_ll_la ... agarasma
anagariyaq¡ pabbajitva -anti purimani namagottani);
D II 136,23* (kusalo ca -ati papakaq¡); 244,2* (yaq¡ ca
sutva -asi no gehe amhe ca keva1e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
pajahasi); 246,4* (sace -atha kamani, Ee so; Be, Ce
jahatha; Se pajahatha); M II 235,15 (yaq¡ chaya -ati taq¡
atapo pharati); SI 3,5* (vayogul_la anupubbaq¡ -anti);
32,3* (atha antena -ati sañraq¡ sapariggahaq¡); III 143,4*
(ayu usma ca viññal_laq¡ yada kayaq¡ -ant' imaq¡); A IV
31 ,22* (apadasu na -ati); Dhp 91 (haq¡sa va palla1aq¡
hitva okamokaq¡ -anti te); Sn 1 (so bhikkhu -ati
oraparaq¡ urago jil_ll_lam iva tacaq¡ pural_laq¡); 589 (-ati
217 jahati
idha jívitaq¡); Thí 301 (-anti putte sappañña); Ja III
57,18* (sabbe va saríradharino anupubbena -anti
jivitaq¡); 248,2* (handa Neruq¡ -amase); 295,20* (kissa
nu maq¡ -asi); V 100,12* (sirí -ati dummedhaq¡);
VI 550,24* (tani ajja -amhase); Kv 103,29 (odhisodhiso
ki1ese -ati ti); Mil154,3 (arakkhaq¡ -ati); Ps III 263,21
(sayam eva kañcukaq¡ -ati); Mp III 90,2 (tadiso va hoti,
pakatiq¡ na -ati); Ud-a 407,11 (akusalaq¡
vikkhambhanavasena -ati pariccajati); Nidd-a I 204,24
(-a ti ca gal_lhati ca); Sadd 454,1 (ha cage: -ati ... -ituq¡
-atave); 826,s (kvac' adival_ll_lass' ekasarassa dvittaq¡ ...
dadati -ati); - imperat. 2 sg. (a)jahassu, SI 187,22*
(manapathaq¡ ca -assu asesaq¡); Sn 1121 (-as su rüpaq¡
apunabbhavaya); Ja VI 31 0,28* (so dhammiyo hohi
-assu adhammaq¡); (b) jaha, Th 83 (-a síghaq¡
samussayaq¡); 1116 (yato ca dukkhaq¡ samudeti taq¡
-a); - fut. [cf S. hasyati, jahi~yati], 3 sg. jahissati, A II
174,12; Ja III 279,16* (tena -issat' attanaq¡);
2 sg. (a) jahissasi, jahessasi, Ja III 328,11 * (appakena
tuvaq¡ yakkha thullam atthaq¡ -issasi); VI 416,16* (sace
gacchasi Pañcalaq¡ khippam attaq¡ -issasi, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -essasi) = 437,26* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -essasi);
(b) hahasi, Ja III 172,26* (hahasi jíva1okaq¡, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se hayasi; 173,4·: tvaq¡ imaq¡ jívalokaq¡ hahasi
jahissasi, marissasí ti attho ); 1 sg. (a) jahissami,
jahessami, A II 174,5 (piya vata maq¡ kama -issanti piye
cahaq¡ kame -issamí ti); Ja IV 416,14* (na taq¡ ahaq¡
-issami idha hessami jivitaq¡, Ce, E e so; Be -issami ...
hissami ... ; Se -essami ... hessami ... ); (b)jahissaq¡,
Vv 83:2 (tena dukkhena -issaq¡ jívitaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Se
-issami; both unmetrical; Be -ami) = Ja IV 60,18* (Se
-essami; Be, Ce, Ee -ami); (e) hassami 2, hissami,
hessami3, J a IV 416, 14* (idha hessami jívitaq¡, Ce, E e, Se
so; Be hissami); 420,20* (ajja hassami jivitaq¡, Ee so; Be,
Se hissami; Ce hessami; 420,26': jívitaq¡ -issamí ti);
V 465,7* (aladdha manusaq¡ maq¡saq¡ maññe hassami
jívitaq¡, Ee so; Be hissami; Ce, Se hessami; 466,3·:
hassamí ti -issami, hasamí ti pi patho, Ee so; Be, Ce
hessamí ti -issami, hissamí ti pi patho; Se hessamí ti
-essami, hissamí ti pi patho); 3 pl. jahissanti, A II 174,4;
Ja IV 185,23·; 1 pl. (a) jahissama, Ja VI 441,10·;
(b) hissama, hessama2, Ja VI 441,6* (aññamaññaq¡
vadhitvana khippaq¡ hissama jívitaq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
hessama);- opt. 3 sg. (a) jahe, SI 23,1* (kodhaq¡ -e)=
Dhp221; Al 136,18* (sabba duggatiyo -e); Jaiii 19,24*
(brahmal_lo hi kathaq¡jahe); Vism 135,34* (tatha pi na -e
yogaq¡ vayameth' eva pal_l~ito ); (b) jaheyya, S III
143,10* (-eyya sabbasaq¡yogaq¡); A II 6,13' (sahapi
dukkhena -eyya kame, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee paheyya) =
It 115,6*; Ja IV 206,28* (dhamme thitaq¡ taq¡ na -eyya
manto); (e) jahetha, Ja II 205,zo· (caje cajantaq¡ ... ti
attanaq¡ -antaq¡ -eth' eva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -eyy' eva);
- part.pr. (a) jaha(t), mfn., SI 72,14* (antakenadhi-
pannassa -ato manusaq¡ bhavaq¡); (b) jahanta, mfn.,
Jaii 205,zo; IV261,z9 (ahaq¡ hi rajjaq¡ -anto pi);
Nidd-a 1 343,8 (sappi pana ciranikkhittaq¡
val_ll_lagandhaq¡ -antaq¡ pi rasaq¡ na -ati ti); -
neg. ajahanta, mfn., Sp 234,22 (ajahanto, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee avijahanto); (e) neg. ajahamana, mfn., Ap-a 196,27
(ariñcamano ajahamano anissajjamano); - aor. 3 sg.
jabati
(a) jahl, M III 70,10* (Pass! -1 upadhiJ11 dukkhamü1aJ11);
Ap 199,5 (chaya na -i ta111 muniJ11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
chayay' na jahitaJ11); 505,14 (yada ca taJ11 na jjahi
jambuchaya); Mhv 41 :4; - jahl in Ee at Ja V 92,9• is wr
for dahl (Be so; Ce, Se dahi); (b) jahasi, Ap-a 422,27
(ayusañkhara111 ossajji pariccaji jahasl ti attho, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee different); - 3 pl. (a) jahiJ11su, Ja III 20,4-;
Ap 306,1s; (b) jahuJ11, Ja III 19,23* (te dhamma111 -um
atthika; 20,c -i1:11su); - inf (a) jahituJ11, Ja III 462,4'
(pura~adutiyikaJ11 -ituJ11 na sakkoti); Nidd-a I 104,25
(duccaja ti sukhena -ituJ11 na sakka); (b) jahatave,
Sadd 454,1; - absoL (a) hitva [ts], D III 81,15 (tumhe
seghaJ11 va~~a111 hitva hlna111 attha va~~aJ11 ajjhupagata);
Dhp 201 (upasanto sukha111 seti hitva jayaparajayaJ11);
Pv 21 :22 (so hitva manusa111 dehaJ11); Thl 18 (hitva
ghare pabbajitva); Ja IV 53,12* (hitva asante na jahama
sante); Ap 588,22 (slho va pañjara111 hitva, Se so; Be, Ce
bhetva; Ee wr hetva); Mi1400,24; Vism 79,18*
(seyyasukhaJ11 middhasukhaJ11 hitva araddhavlriyo );
Mhv 5:39; (b) hitvana, D 11 286,18* (ayuJ11 hitvana
manusaJ11); Sn 894 (hitvana sabbani vinicchayani); Ja IV
222,7* (arañña111 hitvana); Ap 483,6 (dighiJ11 hitvana
papikaJ11); (e) jahitva, jahetva, Sn 500 (-itva
jatimara~a111 asesaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -etva, perhaps
wr; read -itva jatlmara~aJ11, me; cfPj 11 416,12: -itva ti
hitva, -itvana ti pi patho, ayam eva attho, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -etva ti pi patho ); Ja V 21 ,24 (attabhava111 -itva);
401,16* (-itva dhaññaJ11 ca dhana111 ca ñatake, me);
Ap 35,2o (-itva manusa111 dehaJ11); Bv 9:28 ( -itva
sabbasailkhare nibbuto so); Sp 533,5 (pakati111 -itva, Ce,
Se so; Ee -etva, perhaps wr; Be pajahitva); Sadd 454,2;
(d) jahitvana, Ja III 144,8* (manussindaJ11 jahitvana);
V 500,21* (p~a111 -itvana pi dassam eva); Ap 64,19
(saka111 dighiJ11 -itvana); Cp 1:1 :6; (e) jahaya,
Sadd 454,2; -pass, pr, 3 sg, (a) hiyati, hiyyati, l.falls
short (of, abL); is deficient or wanting, lacks,- decreases,
grows less,- comes to an end; A I 150,4* (na -ati
saccaparakkamo muni); Ja 11 65,3* (tasma na -etha naro
sapañño, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se hiyyetha; 65,w: samaññato
na parihayetha); IV 481,25' (hiyyo ti -ati poso pare ti
parihayati, Ce, Se so; Be hiyyati; Ee wr hiyyo ti hiyyo ti
poso ... ); Sadd 834,2 (-ati); - partpr, hlyamana,
hiyyamana, mfn., Sn 944 (-amane na soceyya, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se hiyyamane; Nidd I 428,13: -amane hayamane
parihayamane vemane vigacchamane antaradhayamane
na soceyya; Pj 11 567,25: -amane ti vinassamane);
Th 114 (-amanamhi jlvite, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
hiyyamanamhi); - 2. suffers loss, loses;? Ap 331,22'
(eVaJ11 mata pita tuyhaJ11 SaJ11 tanUJ11 idha -are, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se hiyyare);- pass. pr, 3 sg. (b) hayati, hayate,
decreases, grows less; declines, deteriorates; is
deficient, fails; is inferior; falls short (of, abL); is
deprived of (instr, or abl.); Dhatup 462 (ha parihane);
Dhatum 700 (ha hane); V in III 132,27 (kassaham kena
-ami ti); IV 178,27 (ku1aJ11 .. . saddhaya vagghati
bhogena -ati); DI 113,19 (bhoto So~ada~gassa yaso
-issati sama~assa Gotamassa yaso abhivagghissati);
118,3 (yassa kho yaso -etha bhoga pi tassa -eyyuJ11);
11 208,1o (dibba vata kho kaya paripürenti -anti
asurakaya ti); A IV 12,4 (sa saddha n' eva -ati no
218 jabati
vagghati); Sn 817 (yaso kittl ca ya pubbe -ate vapi tassa
sa); Ja 11 231 ,2* (evaJ11 -ati atthamha); 327 ,12' (balavanto
dubba1a honti thamavanto pi -are); 442,15' (so ayaJ11-ati
e' eva pürat' eva mahodadhi); IV 108,26* (-at' eva tato
v~~o ahorattanam accaye); V 488,23* (na -ate khaditu1:11
mayha111 paccha; 488,27' foil.: khaditun ti khadanaJ11,
tava khadana111 mayha111 paccha va pure va na
parihayati); 507,19* (kajapakkhe yatha cando -at' eva
su ve su ve); VI 22,16* (thü1a javena -anti); 312,1 * (api
-atu nagaku1assa attho); Ap 458,22* (tato na -ate ayu
tighate yavatayukaJ11); Mi1297,16 (socati tappati -ati
khlyati); Spk 11 190,9 (mayaJ11 puññena na -issama);
Dhp-a I 11,to• (cakkhüni -antu); Vv-a 138,25 (nahaJ11
acariyato -ami); As 120,3o (sabbakusa1adhammehi na
-ati na parihayati); Sadd 490,22 (ha parihaniya111: -ati
parihayati); - part.pr. hayamana, mfn., MI 445,5
(sattesu -amanesu saddhamme antaradhayamane);
Spk 11 204,17 foil. (pariyattiya -amanaya patipatti -ati,
patipattiya -amanaya adhigamo -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
pariyattiya parihayamanaya); - aor, 3 sg. (a) hayi,
ahayi, Vin 11 173,27 (bhikkhu navakamma111 gahetva
pakkamati, ma sailghassa -1 ti aññassa databbaJ11); D III
88,7 (anutthuniJ11SU ahu vata no ahayi vata no pada1ata ti;
Sv 869,3: sano etarahi antarahita ti); (b) ahayatha, Ja III
128,8* (atho 1abho ca sakkaro titthiyana111 ahayatha); -
absoL hayitva, Sv 867,22 (cando anukkamena -itva); -
pp bina, mfn. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.) (i) (what is) inferior;
worst; mean, low; impaired, defective; Vin I 10,12 (yo
caya111 kamesu kamasukhallikanuyogo -o gammo
pothujjaniko anariyo ); IV 6,9 (-a ca jati ukkagha ca
jati); D I 82,27 (satte passati cavamane upapajjamane -e
pa~lte suva~~e dubba~~e sugate duggate); III 83,9
(brahma~o va segho v~~o -o añño v~~o); S 1129,6 (na
bhikkhave -ena aggassa patti hoti); IV 88,10 (seyyo
'haJ11 asml ti va hoti sadiso 'haJ11 asml ti va hoti -o 'haJ11
asml ti va hoti); A 1125,5 (ekacco puggalo -o hoti sllena
samadhina paññaya; Mp 11 196,23: upadayupadaya --ta
veditabba); V 59,1o (agge virajjati pag eva -asmiJ11);
Dhp 167 (-aJ11 dhamma111 na seveyya; Dhp-a III
163,7folL: -esu ca nirayadlsu thanesu nibbattapetl ti -o
nama); Sn 799 (-o na maññetha vise si vapi); Vv 24:13
(-e citta111 p~idhaya); Th 620 (-a111 kamma111 mama111
asi ahosiJ11 pupphachaggako); Thl 93 (riñcitva paramaJ11
atthaJ11 -am attha111 asevi 'haJ11); Ja III 472,26* (-ena
brahmacariyena khattiye upapajjati majjhimena ca
devatta111 uttamena visujjhati; 473,32foll.: methuna-
viratisllamattakaJ11 hlnabrahmacariyaJ11 nama); V 141,29*
(kathaJ11 nu -assa vaco khametha); 453,13* (-am ev'
upagata hi nariyo); Nidd I 319,27 (-o nihlno omako
1amako); Patis I 49,8 (rüpavacaro samadhi atthi -o atthi
majjhimo atthi p~lto); Ap 47,1 ( --tta111 ajjhupagato);
92,30 (-o va jatiya santo Upa1i nama hessati); Dhs 1025
(katama dhamma -a); Vibh 2,19 foil. (katamaJ11 rüpaJ11
-aJ11); 354,36 (ekacco -o hoti jatiya va gottena va);
Mil 357,27 (appatirüpo -o kujatiko); Dhp-a II 75,19 (taya
upasako saddho pasanno -ena khu1:11sito ti); - (ii) left
behind; lost or strayed; Sn 899 (sattha va -o pavasa111
gharamha); Ja VI 549,8* (migl va khlrasammatta yütha
-a pakandati); - (iii) deprived of; bereft of; deficient
in; PsI 117,18 (hlnaviriya ti -a viriyena rahita viyutta,
jabati
nibbiriya ti vutta!Tl hoti); Vibh-a 471,2 (rajadhltaya -o
parihino); - ifc see addhana-, ekailga- (sv eka); -
2. (n.) the inferior, what is inferior; esp. lay life (as
opposed to life as a bhikkhu); Thi 80 (vara!Tl me idha
ubbandh~ ya!Tl ca -a!Tl punacare; Thi-a 78,3o:
samaJ?adhamma!Tl katu!Tl asakkontl -a!Tl gihibhavarp
puna acare acareyy~); - esp. -aya avattati, turns
back, returns to lay lije; Vin I 17,24 (abhabbo ... Yaso
ku1aputto -ay' avattitva kame paribhuñjitu!Tl seyyatha pi
pubbe agarikabhüto ti); Ili 17,37 (ehi tva!Tl tata Sudinna
-ay' avattitva bhoge ca bhuñjassu puññani ca karohi ti;
Sp 211,6: uttama!Tl ariyadhaja!Tl pabbajita1iri.g~ pahaya
-aya gihibhavaya avattitva); S IV 103,25 (-ay' avatto);
A III 393,19 (so raganuddha!Tlsena cittena sikkharp
paccakkhaya -ay' avattati); Ud 21,21 (na sakkomi
brahmacariy~ sandharetu!Tl sikkha!Tl paccakkhaya -ay'
avattissami ti); Ja I 206,23; V 117,23' (-ay' avattati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr -aya vattati); Mi1246,1~; -
-· -ailgata,f, abstr. [hina + ari.ga2 + ta], the being
crippled; Ja V 359,8 (rañño pana - '-ailgata nama
ananucchavika ti); - -átikkanta in Ee, Se at Nidd I
297,24 is prob. wr for rhanatikkanta (Be, Ce so); -
-ádhimuttika, mfn., inclined towards what is inferior, or
what is low; S II 156,24 (-ádhimuttika -ádhimuttikehi
saddhi!Tl sa!Tlsandanti samenti); A III 435,13; Ja III 87,19;
It-a II 65,32 (sari.kilesadhammesu abhinivigha
-ádhimuttika); Th-a I 179,21 (-ádhimuttikataya); -
--jacca, mfn., of low or inferior birth; SI 100,11*
(ariyavutti!Tl medhavi!Tl --jacca!Tl pi püjaye); Pj II 176,6
(--jaccata); J a I 130,2· (--jaccana!Tl kevatradina!Tl idarp
kamma!Tl); IV 429,5*; VI 102,7· (--jacco va hotu jati-
sampanno va); Mi1249,3o; Saddh 416;- --jatika, mfn.,
oflow or inferior birth; JaiV 429,26'; Psiii 417,17;
Pv-a 175,22 (--jatika kapagavuttino, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
nihinajatika); - --tama, mfn., superl., worst; lowest;
Sadd 792,8; - --tara, mfn., campar., inferior; worse;
worst; M II 35,15 (VaJ?IJO kimina khajjopanakena --taro
ca patikitthataro ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nihinataro);
Cp 2:5:8 (tato --taro bhave); Ps III 411,s (mayi jatiya
--tare tumhe setrhatara samana); Mp II 197,15 (attano
--tar~ pugga1~ sevanto); Sadd 792,8;
--vada, mfn., whose argument is defective or
insufficient; defeated or worsted in debate; Sn 827
(socati --vado; Nidd I 167,4: --vado nihinavado
parihinavado parihapitavado na paripürivado ti); Ja IV
339,11* (te nihata --vada ahetuka ye na vadanti
kamma!Tl); - ahinindriya, mfn., with unimpaired
faculties; having all faculties; D I 77,11 (so imamha kaya
aññ~ kay~ abhinimminati rupiiTI manomaya!Tl
sabbari.gapaccailgi!Tl ahinindriy~; Sv 222,5:
SaJ?thanavasena avikalindriya!Tl); M III 121 ,20
(bodhisatt~ ca bodhisattamata tirokucchigata!Tl passati
sabbari.gapaccailga!Tl ahinindriya!Tl, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
abhinindriya!Tl; Se ahinindriya!Tl); Vibh 384,9 (atthi kho
bho añño atta dibbo rüpi manomayo sabbailgapaccari.gi
ahinindriyo; Vibh-a 510,4: paripuggindriyo); Kv 493,24
(sabbari.gapaccari.gi ahinindriyo matukucchismi!Tl
okkamatl ti);- atihina, mfn., very mean; very inferior;
A IV 282,21 (sama!Tl jivik~ kappeti na accog~ha!Tl
natihina!Tl; Mp IV 138,9: natihinan ti natikasir~); Pj II
219 jabati
309,28 (tassa evarüpassa jivit~ atipapa!Tl atihin~); -
pass. pr. 3 sg. (e) jahiyati, is given up, is abandoned;
Nidd I 124,4 (pahiyati -ati); - pp jahita, mfn. [ts],
l. (pass.) given up; abandoned; Khp 6:10 (tayassu
dhamma -a bhavanti) = Sn 231; Ja III 32,3 foil. (na hi
paqqita saki!Tl --ki1ese puna gaJ?hanti, saki!Tl -arp hi
nitthubhakhe)asadisa!Tl hoti ti); Ap 351,3 (-a purima
jati); Ps II 98,19 (tehi .. . kattabbarp katam eva
akattabba!Tl -am eva);- neg. ajahita, mfn., Ja VI 14,19*;
- 2. (act.) who has given up, abandoned; Mi1261,19
(tena hi maharaja -o si sakasamay~ paccagato si
mama visaya!Tl); - jahit~ in Ee at Ap 199,5 is wr;
read chaya na jahi ta!Tl with Be, Ce, Se; -
fpp jahitabba, mfn., Sp 233,32; caus. pr. 3 sg.
(a) hapeti\ -ayati [S. hapayati], l. misses, misses out,
omits; neglects; causes to fail or fall short; Vin I 359,7*
(attha!Tl na -eti anuyyuta!Tl bhaga!Tl); V 221,2 (savanarp
-eti; Sp 1399,4foll.: sabbena sabb~ kammavacaya
anussavan~ na karoti); A IV 25,12 (bhikkhudassana!Tl
-eti); 61,9 (na arahami poraga!Tl ku1ava!Tlsa!Tl -etun ti
dana!Tl deti); Dhp 166 (attadatth~ paratthena bahuna pi
na -aye); Sn 37 (mitte suhajje anukampamano -eti
atth~ paribaddhacitto; Pj II 74,4: -eti vinaseti); Ja II
437,22* (yattha ppamatta adhimucchita paja -enti
magg~ sugatüpapattiya); V 195,22* (eso aggi 'ssa
sailkhato eso dhümo padissati maññe no aggi!Tl -eti; but
possibly hapeti 2 ; 195,26·: aggim no -eti, juhati paricarati
maññami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na aggim -eti); VI 296,28*
(dinnapubba!Tl na -eyya dan~ samaqabrahmaJ?e);
Per 87,22 (na ca -eti sasan~); Sp 984,3 (vyañjan~ va
pada!Tl va -eti); Spk II 49,32 (parihapeti ti -eti na
papugati); - 2. makes grow less; diminishes; lowers;
makes suffer loss; Ja V 230,8 (tena hi maharaja
pakatiparihara!Tl assa -etha); VI 113,10* (agghena
aggh~ kaya!Tl -ayanti); 113,20' (aggha!Tl -enti);
Sp 703,13 (tani hi odanagatikan' eva n' eva -etu!Tl na
vaqqhetu!Tl sakkonti); - 3. gives up, lets oneself fail; ?
Ja IV 424,21 * (ma anighaya -esi kama!Tl Sumukha
pakkama; cf 424,27·: ito gantva pattabbaya
niddukkhabhavaya viriy~ ma -esi); VI 36,14* (jañña so
yadi -aye; cf36,23' foil.: so yadi tadisesu rhanesu
viriya!Tl -eyya janeyya tassa kusltabhavassa pha1a!Tl); -
hapeti in eds at Sn 90 is prob. wr for h' apeti; see
K.R. Norman, 1992, p. 167, and H. Lüders, 1954,
p. 113; - part.pr. (a) hapenta, mfn., Ja VI 113,21·; -
neg. ahapenta, mfn., Vin V 164,7 (vutta!Tl ahapentena
avutt~ appakasentena; Sp 1365,7: codakacuditakehi
vuttavacan~ ahapentena); Sp 969,22 (bukara-
dhakaradin~ vyanJanan~ rhanakaraJ?asampada!Tl
ahapentena); 1232,28 (caturarakkh~ ahapenta);
(b) neg. ahapaya(t), mfn., A III 44,2• (kulavarpsa!Tl
ahapay~); (e) neg. ahapayanta, mfn., Ja V 221,12*
(dhamme rhito kiñci ahapayanto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kañci
na tapayanto);- aor. 3 sg. hapesi, Jal 252,18' (loqa!Tl
pakkhipitva varuqi!Tl -esi parihapesi vinasesi); V 230,11
(anupubbena tassa parihara!Tl -esi); Ps III 197,1
(mahasatto ... viriy~ na -esi); - absol. hapetva, A II
77,13 (-etva 1ambetva aparipüra!Tl avittharena parassa
VaJ?Qa!Tl bhasita hoti); Ja I 124,23 (aggha!Tl -etva);
V 342,16' (vega!Tl -etva SaJ?ikarp agamasi); Mp II 284,6
jahana
(cattari ariyasaccani na imani cattari dve va tlr.li va ti
ev~ -etva pi); Dhp-a lii 159,21 (tena
upajjhayadivattani pi -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee bhavetva);
Vism 83,7 (pañca -etva); - neg. ahapetva, A 11 77,8;
Jaiii 448,22 (mama gaman~ ahapetva); Psiii 310,11
(yo pi so pubbarajiihi brahmaJ!iinarp dinnapariharo t~
ahapetva pakatiniyamen' eva adasi); Mp II 339,3
(ekavyañjan~ pi ahapetva sakalasuttant~ uggal}hi);
Dhp-a III 4,3 (kalyfu_lakammarp karontena hi
uppannacittarp ahapetva tarp khaJ!arp yeva katabbarp);
- pp hapita 1, mfn., neglected; omitted; Ja V 159,15"
([aggihutt~] pahapitan ti -itarp, pakaro
upasaggamatt~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ahapitan ti -it~
akaro ... ); MpiV 117,4 (atttattho ti -it'-attho);-
fpp hapetabba, mfn., to be omitted; to be neglected; to be
diminished; Sp 674,13; 1364,25 (na vinicchayo -etabbo);
Ps 1 291,18 (saddhindriyarp balavarp hoti ...
amanasikarena -etabbarp); Mp 1 248,23 (aññesarp hi
saddha va<;l<;lhetabba hoti therassa pana -etabba jata);
Dhp-a III 159,17 (upajjhayadivattarp va na -etabbarp);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) jahapeti, causes to abandon;
makes give up; Ja VI 561,31 (kakkh~akathaya narp
puttasokarp -essaml ti); - part.pr. jahapenta, mfn.,
Ps III !86,10; Cp-a 316,33 (tattha asangarp pajahanto pare
ca tattha t~ -ento);- aor. 3 sg. jahapesi, Ps III l86,1o
(imani dve bhojanani ekappaharena ajahapetva ekasmirp
samaye divavikalabhojanam eva -esi, puna kalarp
atinametva rattivikalabhojan~ -ento evam aha);
3 pl. jahapesum, Ja I 166,14 (sakalajambudlpavasike
etarp kammarp -esurp); - absol. jahapetva, Ps V 25,7
(ev~ sarikkhaken' eva sarikkhakarp -etva); -
neg. ajahapetva, Ps III 186,9; - pp jahapita, mfn.,
Sp 584,17 (puggalo tena dosena diisito hoti
pakatibhavarp -ito ).
jahana, n., -a,f [from jahati], abandoning, giving up; Ja I
344,28 (abhiitassa bhiitan ti gahal}akale bhiitassa abhiitan
ti 0 -kale, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); Spk 1 24,16
(chindan~ ca -arp ca atthato ekam eva); It-a 11 155,1o
(ragadiraJ!an~ -ato jahapanato ca rat:~añjaha ti); - ifc
se e kilesa-.
jahapana, n. [from jahapeti], causing to abandon or give
up; Sp 585,6 (pakatibhav~ -ato, Be, Se so; Ce pakati-
jahapanato; Ee pakatijahanato); Ps III 207,8 (laddhirp
-' -attharp); It-a 11 155,1o (ragadirat:~anarp jahanato -ato
ca raJ!añjaha ti).
jahita, mfn., pp ofjahati qv.
jahitaka, mfl-ika)n. Uahíta+ ka2], (what or who has been)
abandoned, given up; Ja 1 148,1 (samat:~o Gotamo
Devadattena jahitikarp adaya caratl ti, Ee, Se so; Be
jahitarp; Ce -arp); 310,22 (Sariputto ekavar~ -arp
jlvit~ pariccajanto pi na gal}hati yeva ti); 311,2 (maya
ekavar~ -arp puna na gahitapubb~, nah~ maya
jahitavis~ aka9<;1hissaml ti, Be, Se so; Ce ekavararp
0
-visarp; Ee ekavararpjahitavisakarp,prob. wr).
jahesi(n), mfn., [quasi part. fut. of jahati], about to
abandon, intending to abandon; ? Bv 26:7 (phalam
akankhamananarp bhavacchandajahesinarp catusacc~
pakasesim; Bv-a 293,10 foil.: bhavacchandajahesinan ti
bhavatal}hapahayin~, bhavatal}harp pajahitukaman~).
jagara, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) awake; watchful;
220 jagarika
Vin III 162,38 (nabhijanami supinantena pi methunarp
dhamm~ patisevita pag eva -o ti); D 11 130,28 (saññl
samano -o); S 1 3,22* (kati suttesu -a); Th 203 (-o sa hi
suttesu amogharp tassa jlvitarp); Ja III 404,3* (ko dha
jagaratarp sutto ko dha suttesu -o); Mil300,3o;
Sp 1295,12 (-a va niddarp okkanta); Spk I 25,8
(pañcindriyani -ani nama, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jagganti);
144,17 (-assa tava rattiya dighabhavo pakato); Dhp-a I
309,19foll. (saddhadihi pañcahi 0
-dhammehi
samannagatatta -o nama); - !fe see bahu-; - 2, (m.)
waking; watchfulness; Abh 768 (-o jagariy~); S 1
44,20* (pañña lokasmirp pajjoto sati lokasmi -o); PsI
152,18 (jagariyarp ananuyutta ti -e ayutta, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee jagaraJ!e); Ap-a 203,14 (jagarat:~arp -o, niddatikkamo
ti attho);- jagara in Ce, Ee at Ud-a 335,28 is prob. wr
for garava (Be, Se, It-a 17,6 so).
jagaraka, mfn. [ts], waking, awake; watchful; It-a 1 172,13
(jagaro ti -o vigataniddo jagariyarp anuyutto ); Pj II
104,8 ( -purise thapetva, Ce, Ee so; Be jaggana-; Se
0
jaggika-; = Ap-a 181,20: eds patijagganaka-); 104,29
0
( -purisa, Ce so; Ee jagarat:~a-; Be jaggana-; Se
jagganaka-; = Ap-a 182,4: Ce, Ee jagganakapurisa; Be,
Se jagganakaparisa).
jagaraJ].a, n. [ts], waking, being awake; watchfulness;
Mil 301,2 (yatha maharaja kotiihalasaddo evarp -~
daghabbarp, Ce, Ee so; Be jagararp; Se jagaro); Ps 1
269,6 (jagarite ti -e); Mp 11 185,2 (jagariy~ anuyutto
ti... -e yeva yuttapayutto ti attho); It-a 1 174,28
(saddhad!hi o -dhammehi samannagamena jagaro
jaggati); Nidd-a 1 171,34 (jagariy~ anuyutto ti
pañcaj agaral}av asen a).
jagarati, jagaroti, pr. 3 sg. [S. jagarti, jagarati], is awake;
is watchful; Dhatup 254 (jagara niddakhaye);
Dhatum 369; Pv 48:1 (-atha ma pamajjatha); Th 411
(ma niddabahulo ahu -assu; Th-aii 175,18/oll.: -assii ti
-a, jagariy~ anuyutto hohi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -assu
jagariyanuyutto hohi); Nidd 1 377,24 (-eyya, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce patijaggeyya); Patis-a 652,13 (-atina niddayati);
Sadd 428,19/oll. (jagara niddakkhaye: -ati ... ayarp ca
dhatu tanadigal}arp patva jagaroti patijagarott ti riipani
janeti); - part.pr. (a) jagara(t), mfn., S 1 3,22* (kati
-at~ sutta); Dhp 39 (natthi -ato bhayarp); Ja III 404,12*
(katharp -atarp sutto; 404,21·: katharp tvarp -atarp
sattan~ antare sutto nama hosi); Sadd 518,3 (jagara
niddakkhaye: -oti -arp); (b)jagaranta, mf(-antl)n.,
Vin III 29,33 (manussitthirp -antirp . . . suttarp ... );
It 41,15* (-anta sut:~ath' et~); Mi1300,16 (-anta supin~
na passatl ti); - neg. ajagaranta, mfn., Dhp-a 1 310,1
(-antassapi ajagarantassapi, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
jaggantassapi ajaggantassapi); (e) jagaramana, mfn.,
Dhp 226 (sada -amananarp); Ja III 404,18*;
absol. jagaritva, Sp 283,7 (bahud eva rattirp -itva, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se jaggitva); - pp jagarita, (mj)n., being awake;
watchfulness; D 1 70,31 (sutte -ite bhasite tut:~hibhave
sampajanakarl hoti; Sv 202,13: -ite ti jagaraJ!e) =
Vibh 244,15; It 41,15* (sutta -itarp seyyo); Mi1378,14;-
see also jaggati.
jagarika, f [= jagariya? BHS id.], staying awake,
wakefulness; Sp 1276,19 (nadlsu jaggato ti ...
pokkharaJ!irp ogahetva ki)anto sabbarattirp vltinamesi,
jagariya
-~ karoti, Ee, Se so; Ce jalikaq1; Be kilanto ...
jalik~ ... ).
jiigariyii,f, -a, n. [S. lex. jagarya; BHS jagarika, jagarya],
wakefulness; watchfulness; Abh 768; MI 273,35 (-aq1
anuyutta bhavissama); S IV 104,3o (kathaq1 e' avuso
-~ anuyutto hoti); A JI 40,28* (bhojanamhi ca mattaññü
-aq1 anuyuñjati); Sn 926 (niddaq1 na bahulikareyya -~
bhajeyya atapi); Jaiii 483,w; Ap 610,11 (yutta -e pi ca,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -esu ca); Mil352,9; Ps JI 316,18joll.
(-aq1 anuyutta ti rattindiv~ cha koghase katva
ekasmiq1 koghase niddaya okasaq1 katva pañca koghase
-amhi yuttappayutta); Patis-a 652,15 (jagarassa bhavo
kammaql va -aql); - 0
anuyoga, m., application,
devotion to wakefulness; D III 107,2 (-aq1 anuyutto
atandito); A IV 168,9 (id~ kho bhikkhave Nandassa
-asmiq1); Patis II 199,2 (-~ paripüreti); Vibh 244,7;
Kv 616,7; Nett 34,9; Mil 388,25.
jiigaroti, see sv jagarati.
jiijarantii in Ee at It-a I 174,18 is wr for jagaranta (Be, Ce,
Se so).
jiii,m, see sv janu.
jiil).uka, see sv januka.
jata, pp of vjan qv.
jiitaka1, n. [BHS id.], a birth; a story describing a
previous lije of the Buddha (when he was a bodhisatta);
the name of one of the nine categories (angas) of the
scriptures; one of the collections making up the
Khuddakanikaya of the PaJi Canon; Vin III 8,8
(appakaql canes~ ahosi suttaq1 geyy~ veyyakar~~
gatha udan~ itivuttak~ -aq1 abbhutadhamm~
vedallaq1) f- MI 133,25 f- Vibh 294,23 f- Pet 5,16; Ja I
1.13* (-aq1 nama sailgitaq1 dhammasailgahakehi yaq1);
JI 359,11 (imasmiq1 kira -e bodhisatto paramamajjhatto
ahosi upekkhaparamiq1 püresi); III 177,27 (aññesu -esu);
Ap 505,8 (tada hi -aq1 buddho vessantaraq1 adesayi);
~idd I 143,3o (suttaq1 geyyaq1 ... itivuttak~ -~ ...
vedall~ id~ pariyattisasanaq1); Sp 28,23
1apa1_11_1akajatakadini paññasadhikani pañca jatakasatani
-an ti veditabbaq1); 180,13 (pubbacaritakar~ayutt~
-~ va kathayissama); Spk I 68,3o (kalaha-
vüpasamanatthaql t11_1i -ani kathessami); Ps II 331,30
1sutt~ nu kho katheti -aq1 nu kho ); IV 205,21 (ay~
gatha -e agata); Mp I 89,7 (gacchante gacchante kale
-~ pi dharetuq1 na sakkonti, atha tes~ patham~
\essantarajatak~ parihayati); Pj I 12,9 (khuddakapatho
dhammapadaq1 udanaq1 . . . therigatha -~
niddeso ... khuddakanikayo); 200,9 (ev~ at1taq1
dassetva t~ -~ paccuppannena anusandhento );
~lhv 12:37 (mahanaradakassapavhaq1 -~ kathayi
rahiq1); Sadd 321,21 foil. (jataq1 bhütaq1 atit~
bhagavato cariy~. t~ kiyati kathiyati etena ti -aq1,
jatakapiqi hi idha -an ti vutta, aññatra pana jati eva -an
ti gahetabbaq1); - o• -atthakathii,f, the commentary on
rhe Jataka; Ja I 62,2o (yaq1 pana -aya tada sattahajato
Rahu1akumaro hoti ti vutt~ t~ sesaghakathasu
natthi); Ud-a 124,2o; Cp-a 16,13; Sadd 177,3;
'-ppakaral).a, n., the book of birth-stories;? Sp 1219,14
1--asadisadanadini);- 0 -pii!i,f, the canonical text (the
ierses) of the Jataka; Sadd 108,7; 147,s (imissa -iya
atthakathayaq1); - 0 -bhiil).aka, m., one who leams and
221 jati
recites the Jataka; Mil 341 ,2s (suttantika venayika
abhidhammika dhammakathika -a dighabha1_1aka ... );
Sp 789,2o (-ena saghakathaq1 jatak~ uggahetabbaq1);
Ps JI 305,6; Pj I 151,12; Cp-a 154,18 (tassa pitthi111
abhirühitva ti -a vadanti).
jiitaka2 , mfn. !jata + ka2; AMg jataga], bom; grown,
growing; Vin III 48,1 (tattha -aq1 kaghaq1 va lataq1 va
chindati, or cpd; Sp 312,6: ciranihitaya kumbhiya upari
-aq1 kaghaq1 ... ); MI 225,33 (vacchako tarm_1ako
tavadeva -o; Ps JI 267,2: tavadeva -o ti t~divase -o);
Ja III 218,22· (kharaputta ti so kira gadrabhassa -o tena
naq1 evam aha); Sp 316,14foll. (tassa samipe -~ chetva
aharati atatthajatakatta n~ chindato pacittiy~); 542,29
(khettamajjhena gacchata tattha -~ pi dhaññaphal~
na amasantena gantabbaq1, or cpd); 888,29joil. (tattha
-an ti arame -am eva, or cpd); Ps JI 67,9 (tattha -~
tilakaq1 va pi~akaq1 va, or cpd); Ud-a 67,27 (ekavar~ -o
pathamuppattivasen' eva nibbattatta, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jato); Mhv 27:34 (nanaratanapadumani tattha tattha
yatharahaq1 -ani ca tattheva asuq1 so1_11_1a1atantare ); -
jatakaq1 in E e at Sp 311,14 is wr; read jatakakatthalata-
chedanatth~ with Be, Ce, Se; - jatakadukkh~ in Ee
at Ja I 239,1 is wr for chataka- (Be, Ce, Se so);- ifc see
anto-, tattha-, sattaha- (sv satta4).
jiiti 1, f [S., BHS id.] (sg. instr. jatiya, jacca; pl. nom./acc.
jan, jatiyo, jacca), birth; Abh 792; Vism 498,26joil.
(ay~ hi -saddo anekattho ... ); l. birth, being bom; the
0
possibility of being (re-)bom; Abh 90 (-i jananam);
Vin I 93,22 (y~ bhikkhave matukucchismiq1 patham~
citt~ uppann~ patham~ viñña1_1~ patubhüt~
tadupadaya sa v' assa -i); III 5,34 (khi1_1a -i vusitaq1
brahmacariyaq1 kat~ kar~Iy~); D JI 22,21 (dhir atthu
kira bho -i nama yatra hi nama jatassa jara paññayissati
ti); MI 50,12 (ariyasavako ev~ -iq1 pajanati evaq1
0
-samudayaq1 pajanati evaq1 °-nirodh~ pajanati ev~
0
-nirodhagaminipatipad~ pajanati); SI 68,24 (daharo
e 'eva -iya navo ca pabbajjaya ti); 88,22 (mam~ hi ...
kaly1il_lamittaq1 agamma jatidharnma satta -1ya
parimuccanti); 132,25* foil. (kiq1 nu -iq1 na rocesi jato
kamani bhuñjati . . . buddho dhamm~ adesesi -iya
samatikkam~); II 31,7 (ka ca bhikkhave -iya upanisa);
Dhp 153 (anekajatis~sar~ sandhaviss~ ...
gahakarak~ gavesanto dukkha -i punappun~);
Sn 1045 (ataru -iq1 ca jaraq1 ca marisa); Th 479 (-iya
sattavassena laddha me upasampada); Thi 14 (dhatuyo
dukkhato disva ma -iq1 punar agami, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
wr -i); Ja III 395,6* (narim asitik~ navutik~ ca
jacca); Patis I 15,12 (-i sailkhara ajati nibbanan ti
abhiññeyy~); 54,1 ( -paccaya jaramar~~ asati -iya
0
natthi jaramaranan ti; Patis-a 252,23: liilgavipallaso kato,
asatiya -iya ti vutt~ hoti); Ap 351,12 (aho me sukat~
kammaq1 parimutto 'mhi -iya); Bv 2:12 (evam eva -i
vijjante ajati p' icchitabbakaq1, Be, Se so; Ce ajati
p' icchitabbaka; Ee ajatiq1 p' icchitabbakaq1; Bv-a 70,22:
-iya vijjamanaya ti attho, lingabhedaq1 ca vibhattilopaq1
ca katva vutt~); Dhs 1336 (bhavapaccaya -i
jatipaccaya jaramara1_1aq1); 1366 (s~vejaniyaq1 thanan
ti -i jara vyadhi mara1_1aq1); Vibh 99,13foll. (ya tes~
tes~ sattanarp . . . -i sañjati okkanti abhinibbatti
khandhan~ patubhavo ayatananaq1 pa?Jabho ay~
jati
vuccati -i); Pet 100,14 (yo bhavo ay~ vipako ya -i ya
ca Jaramar~arp ayarp nissando); Mi169,4 (na
parimuccanti -iya jaramar~ena sokena ... ); Sp 113,23
(khandhan~ nibbatti -i paripako jara bhedo mar~~);
Dhp-a III 153,4 (-ito paghaya dasa akusa1akammapathe
karonto); - ifc see dvi-; - 2. a birth, an existence;
Vin III 4,21 (anekavihitarp pubbenivas~ anussarami
seyyathidarp ekarp pi -irp dve pi -iyo ... ; Sp 159,11:
ekarp pi -m ti ekarp pi patisandhimül~
cutipariyosanarp ekabhavapariyapannarp khandha-
santanarp); D II 15,12 (ay~ antima -i natthi dani
punabbhavo ti); Vv 3:6 (ah~ manussesu manussabhüta
purimaya -iya manussa1oke); Pv 14:14 (Sariputtass'
ah~ mata pubbe annasu -isu); Thi 511
(mar~avyadhigahita sabba sabbattha -!yo, so read me;
eds -iyo); Ja VI 16,28* (purimarp saram' aharp -irp
yattha rajjam akarayirp); 238,31 * (satta jacca maharaja
niccarp sakkatapüjita; 240,5·: eta satta -iyo niccarp
sakkatapüjita va ahosin ti dasseti); 240,25* (yo icche
puriso hoturp -irp -irp punappun~. Be, Se so; Ee, Se
jatijatirp); Ap 324,25 (ayarp me pacchima -i bhava sabbe
samühata); PsI 127,29 (ekacatupañcakkhandhappabheda
-i); Spk I 231 ,3o ([pubbenivasarp yo] ved! ti
pubbenivasañaJ?,ena -irp pativijjhi, Ce, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be, Se jani); - 3. (i) type of birth, class, lineage;
good birth; Vin III 222,12 (brahmaJ?,o nama -iya
brahmaJ?,o ); IV 6,9 (-i nama dve -iyo hin a ca -i ukkagha
ca -i ... ); V 163,12 (na -i pucchitabba na nam~
pucchitabb~ na gottarp pucchitabbarp); DI 121 ,3o (kirp
hi -i karissati); 122,5 (apavadat' eva . . . vaJ?,J?,arp
apavadati mante apavadati -irp); 118,6 (tathagato atlte
buddhe . . . -ito pi anussarissati namato pi anussarissati
gottato pi anussarissati); M 11 103,2o (yato ah~ bhagini
ariyaya -iya jato; Ps III 337,12foll.: n' esa tava -i
gihlka1o esa ... idani pana te ariya nama -i); SI 168,9*
(ma -irp puccha car~~ ca puccha); Sn 136 (na jacca
vasa1o hoti na jacca hoti brahmaJ?,o); 139 (na narp -i
nivaresi brahma1oküpapattiya); 423 (adicca nama
gottena sakiya narna -iya tamha ku1a pabbajito); Ja 111
194,26* (mogha -i ca V~J?.O ca silam eva kir' uttamarp);
232,25 (tassa -irp nissaya mahanto mano ahosi); IV 76,9*
(yo navajanati sahayamatte sippena kulyahi dhanena
jacca); 391,12 (dve kira caJ?,¡;iala -irp paticchadetva
sipparp uggaJ?,hanti ti); Ap 353,12 (ajaniya ca -1ya
sindhava slghavahana); Vibh 353,17 (ekacco -iya va
gottena va kolaputtiyena va . . . manarp jappeti);
Mil 200,29 (ettha tava bodhisatto Devadattato -iya
nihlno); Spk Il 200,15 (thero bhagavantarp nissaya
ariyaya -iya jato ti bhagavato putto); Pj II 355,23 (ah~
pi khattiyo ti -irp acikkhi); 422,3o (so kira -iya daso);-
(ii) type, kind; species; Sn 600 foil. (vyakkhissarp ...
0
-vibhailgarp pi!J?.anarp aññamañña hi -iyo); Sp 639,9
( ... kambalarp si!J?.~ bhailgan ti imes~ chann~
aññatar~. etena clvarassa -irp dassetva idani pami!J?.~
dasseturp ... ); Sadd 19,19 (jatyapekkhekavacan~);
736,s (ekavacanarp hoti ... -iy~ sañcicca pi!J?.o jlvita
na voropetabbo); - ifc see agha- (sv agha2), digha-,
valli-; - 4. natural or true state; nature; iic: natural;
true, genuine; naturally, by nature; V in III 225,32 (-iya
kajakarp va rajanaka!ak~ va); Ja IV 155,13* (ah~ na
222 jati
passami thullarp kayena te dumarp arohapariJ?,ahena
abhirüpo si -iya); - S. a kind of (specious) argument
(S.: "a self-refuting reply"); Sadd 919,23 (düsanabhasa
-iyo, uttarapatirüpaka ti attho); - 6. [to 3. or 4. ?]
iic: noble, excellent; (or naturally; ?); see below; -
0
'-aggi, m. [or jata+ aggi ?], a jire (kindled) at one's
birth; ? Ja I 494,3 (tassa jatadivase matapitaro -irp
gahetva thapesurp); 1143,19 foil. (matapitaro tassa -irp
gahetva tarp sojasavassapadese thitarp aharpsu kirp tata
-irp gahetva aranne aggirp paricarissasi);
0
-araññaka, m(jn)., a genuine liver in the wild; one who
by nature prefers living in the wild; ffollowing the
excellent practice of living in the wild; ?] Spk II 199,18
(im~ bhikkhurp -arp -parpsukülikarp -ekasanik~
0 0
karissarnl ti); 200,3;- -UI}I}a,f, very fine wool; wool
0
of a new-bom lamb or kid; Vism 552,22 (-aya ekena
arpsuna uddhatasappimaJ?,¡;iappamaJ?,arp kalalan ti) f-
Sp 437,25 (Sp-t [Be] 11 252,sfoll.: tadahujatassa ejakassa
Iom~ -a ti keci, himavantappadese jatimanta-
ejakalom~ -a ti apare ... gabbh~ phaletva gahita-
ejakalom~ -a ti aññe); Vibh-a21,31 (-a nama
sukhuma); - 0 '-ovaraka, m. [or jata + ovaraka], a
lying-in room; (or the room where one was bom; ?);
Ja V 125,22 (Sariputtathero ... -e parinibbayi); Spk III
214,25 (atthi ... Magadhesu Najakagarne -o); 217,7 (-~
patijaggatha); - 0 -kaJaka, mfn., naturally black; PsI
167,22 (-e viya eJakalome); - 0 -khaya. 0 -kkhaya, m.
Uati + khaya2], the destruction of (re-)birth, of the
possibility of birth; SI 167,2* (atho 0 -kkhayarp patto;
Spki 231,31: 0 -kkhayan ti arahattarp) = Dhp423; Al
150,6* (so ca phusl -arp padhanava); It 93,17*
CO-kkhayam abhiññaya nagacchanti punabbhav~); -
-'-anta, m., l. the destruction of (re- )birth; It-a I 171,20
(khayo eva anto ti khayanto, jatiya khayanto -'-anto
nibbanarp);- 2. birth and death; It-a I 171,21 (khayo va
mar~arp -' -anto nibbanam eva); -'-anta-
dassi(n), mfn., seeing the destruction of (re-)birth; or
seeing the destruction of birth and death; S V 168,12*
(ekayan~ -'-antadassl magg~ pajanati hitanukampl;
Spk III 226,2: jatiya khayo ti ca anto ti ca nibbanarp, tarp
passati); It 40,17' (paññuttararp - '-antadassirp; se e It-a I
171,20 foil. above); Sn 209 (sa ve m un! - '-antadassl;
Pj II 257,21: jatiya maraJ?,assa ca antabhütassa nibbanassa
diqhatta -'-antadassl); Jaiii 434,1* (as~sayarp
-· -antadassl na gabbhaseyyarp punar avajiss~; 434,5·:
jatiya khayantasailkhatassa nibbanassa dighatta
-' -antadassl); - o -jaramaral}lya, o -jararnar~ika, mfn.,
producing (further) birth, old age and death; D III 57,7
(akusala dhamma ... dukkhavipaka ayatirp -a; Sv 843,9:
jatijaramar~anarp paccayabhüta) f- MI 250,7 -¡_
Kv 458,5; A II 11,13 (akusalehi dhammehi ... ayatirp
0
-jararnar~ikehi); It-a 1 152,25; -
0
-jarüpaga, mfn.,
undergoing birth, old age and death, subject to birth,
old age and death; S V 433,9*; Dhp 341;
0
-jarüpagami(n), mfn., undergoing birth, old age and
death; A 11 6,9* (punappun~ -i te, Be so; Ee -!; Ce
0
-jarüpagahino; Se 0 -jarüpaga hite);- 0 -jaJa, mfn., dull
from birth, naturally dull; Ps IV 186,19 (-anarp pi
ejamüganarp sati patitthasi); Sadd 626,5 (jaccaja!o -o
va); - see also jaccajaja; - 0 -jatika, mfn., bom,
jati
arzszng from, birth; S 11 36,34 (jaramaraJ.lal!l ...
0
-nidanal!l 0 -samudayal!l -al!l 0 -ppabhavan ti); -
0
-tii
in Ee at Spk 111 27,22 (aghisailghatajatita) is wr for -jatita
(Be, Ce, Se so); - -thera, m(frz)., old, senior, from
0
(time of) birth; old; D 111 218,3 (tayo thera -o
dhammathero sammutithero; Sv 999,1: -mahallako gihi
0
1 356,18* (sujatimanto pi ajatimassa yasassino pessakara
-o nama);- 0 -dhamma, mfn. [jati + dhamma ], subject
to, characterized by, birth; fiable to come into being;
MI 161,36foll. (ekacco attana -o samano -~ yeva
pariyesati); S IV 27,1 (cakkhul!l bhikkhave -al!l; Spk II
365,3: -an ti jayanadhammal!l nibbattanasabhav~);
Bv 2:7 (-o jaradhammo vyadhidhammo e' ahal!l tada);
Kv 457,13 (-a satta ma jayil!lsil ti 1abbha iddhiya
paggahetun ti); Ps II 170,1; - ajatidhamma, mfn., not
subject to or characterized by birth; Patis-a 157,18
(pahinasamudayesu sadhilsu VlJJamilnal!l ajati-
dhammatt~); 420,6 (so atta ajatidhammato na jato
nama); It-ai 161,29; - 0 -parpsukülika,m(frz)., who
natural/y, by nature, wears only rag-robes; a genuine
wearer of rag-robes; ffollowing the noble practice of
wearing rag-robes; ?] Spk II 199,18 (imal!l bhikkhul!l
0
-araññak~ -al!l
0
-ekasanikal!l karissami ti); 200,3;
Th-a III 135,7; - -pal}<}.arakesaka, mfn., having
0
naturally light-coloured hair; Vin-vn 2493;
0
-palita, mfn., naturally grey or light-coloured;
Sp 1028,15; 0
-pil}<}.apiitika, m(frz)., (one) who
naturally, by nature, eats only alms-food; Vibh-a 467,14
(avasesa bhikkhil antara piJ.l<;lapatika jata ahal!l pana -o
ti); - 0
-phalika, 0 -phaJika, m., natural crystal;?
Sp 543,17; 0
-badhira, mfn., deaf from birth,
congenitally deaf, Sadd 626,4 (" -saddassa jaccadeso hoti
kvaci vyañjane pare: jaccabadhiro -o va); - see also
jaccabadhira; -bhümaka,
0 0
-bhilmika, mfn.,
belonging to the Buddha's place of birth; MI 145,15
(sambahu1a -a bhikkhil -bhilmiy~ vassal!l vugha, Be,
0
Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -bhilmika; Ps II 135,12foll.: -a ti
o -bhümivasino .. . na aññesal!l sattanal!l jataghanal!l
0
-bhilmi ti vuccati .. . sabbaññubodhisattassa jata-
qhanal!l Sakiyajanapado Kapi1avatthaharo sa 0 -bhilmi ti,
Be, Ce so; E e, Se o -bhilmika ti); A III 366,10 (-anal!l
upasakanal!l, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -bhilmikanal!l 0
upasakan~); Pj 11 446,21 (-e bhikkhil):- -mal}i, m.,
0
a natural or genuine gem;? Ja 11 417,23' (-il!l ki1i!!h~
karissama ti vayamanta pi nasakkhil!lsu kili!!hal!l katun
ti); Mp II 329,14 (ekavassikave~UVaJ.lJ.lal!l hi veJuriyal!l -i
nama); - ifc see niddhota- (sv niddhovati); - 0 -ma(t),
0
-manta, mfn. (sg. acc. -mant~. -mam; iic jatimanta-
0 0
qv below), of high birth or rank; genuine; excellent; D I
76,21 (maJ.li ve~uriyo subho 0 -ma; Sv 221,6: 0 -ma ti
parisuddha-akarasamut!hito); SI 166,3o (tihi vijjahi
sampanno 0 -ma sutava; Spk I 231,25foll.: yava sattama
pitamahayuga parisuddhaya jatiya samannagato );
Sn 420 (VaJ.lJ.lfuohena sampanno 0 -ma viya khattiyo);
Ja IV 382,8· (na hi 0 -manta saggadayaka); V 399,23*
(tayanugutto Siri -mam api peseti dasal!l viya; 400,2·:
0
=-mam api ti -sampannal!l pi sippavijjacaraJ.labuddhi-
0
kammehi sampannal!l pi pesen ti); Ap 17,28 (sabbe va
brahmaJ.la ete 0
-manto yasassino); Bv 23:15
(mahakul~ ...
0
-mant~ mahayas~; Bv-a 257,10:
=-mantan ti abhijatimant~ uttamabhijat~); Mi1216,!s
223 jati
(manussesu eko 0 -ma eko dhanava eko vijjava ... );
Spk II 242,21 (madiso 0 -ma kil!l evarilpal!l CaJ.l<;ial~
khamapessati, or Npr ?); Mhv 15:27 (therassa
upanamesi jatipupphani 0 -ma); - jatima in Ee at
Sn 1136 is prob. wr for jutima (Be, Ce, Se so); -
ajatima, mfn., not of high birth; of low birth; Ja VI
bhavanti);- sujatima(t), mfn., of very high birth; Ja VI
356,18*;- -mantakulaputta, m., a noble youth ofhigh
0
birth; Ja I 342,31' (uppadutanal!l -anal!l);
0
-mantüpapanna\ mfn. [jati + manta + upapanna],
possessed of high birth and of Vedic leaming; Ja III
82,25* (brahmanam -am); IV 381 ,20*;
-mantüpapanna : mfn.
2
0
[jatima(t) + upapanna],
fumished with, adomed with excellent (gems); Ja V
169,22* (ve~uriyamay~ ... subhal!l manil!l -~ ...
asan~; 170,15' foil.: aññehi maJ.lihi -mantehi upetal!l
0
subh~ ve~uriyasanal!l); -
0
-ranga, m. (?), a kind of
gem; ? Ap-a 441,18 (--mal)ivejuriyamal)i-adihi anekehi
maJ.lihi katavedikavalayal!l parivaretva, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee --maJ,livedimal)i-); - 0
-rasa, m. [jati + rasa 1],
natural juice or sap; ? Sp 859,28 (madhvasavo nama
muddikanal!l -en a kato ); 1102,11 (madhukapanan ti
madhukan~ -ena katapanal!l) = Nidd-a I 396,2o (Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee madhupanan ti muddikan~ -ena
katapan~);- -riijiino in Ee at Ja I 338,17' is wr; Be,
0
Ce vijatirajano; Se omits; - 0 -loha, n., a natural,
unalloyed metal; Vibh-a 63,26 (ayo sajjhal!l suval)J.l~
tipu sis~ tambalohal!l vekantakalohan ti imani satta
-ani nama);- 0 -Va(t), mfn., ofhigh birth or rank; Ja VI
100,9* ("-vant31!1 ajaccal!l ca ahal!l ujjugatal!l naral!l ...
namassissam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -mantam); Mil236,6
1
0
( -Vantal!l .:. brahmaJ.lal!l);-
0
-Vana, n. Úati + vana ],
a naturally growing wood; Ps II 73,5 (aropim~ -al!l);
-
0
-vibhanga, m., the division or classification of
species or kinds; Sn 600 (vyakkhissal!l . . . -al!l
paJ.lanal!l, aññamañña hi jatiyo; Pj II 464,6: -an ti
0
-vittharal!l); - 0 -Viraha, m., absence, lack of, birth;
Vism 501,31 ([dukkhal!l] n' ev' atthi -ena, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -e)= Nidd-a I 77,9* (-e)= Patis-a 145,15* (-e)=
Vibh-a 98,7* (-e); - 0
-Virahitatta, n., abstr., the being
free from birth; Patis-a 700,4 (ajatan ti -a anuppann31!1);
-
0
-Vil}ii,f, (according to A.K. Coomaraswamy,
1950b, p. 250) a viJ.la adapted to the playing of jatis
(although jati in the sense of [musical] mode is not
attested in Piifi); or excellent ViJ.la; ? Ja II 249,24
(bodhisattassa -al!l disva); - 0
-Sambheda, m., a
confusion of classes or rank; a contamination of class;
DI 92,21 (te --bhaya sakahi bhaginihi saddhil!l
sal!lvas~ kappesul!l; Sv 260,18: asadisasampayogena ca
no uppanna putta matito va pitito va aparisuddha -al!l
papul)issanti); Ja VI 547,3 (koci nicajatiko .. . tava
bhaginil!l bhujissal!l katva -al!l kareyya); Dhp-a I 166,4
(-ato bhayami ayya ti ka si tvan ti khattiya ti ahal!l pi
khattiyo va ti); Ps III 74,11; - 0 -ssara, mfn. [jati +
sara4], (one) who remembers a previous birth or
previous births; Ja VI 237,16'; Mil 79,1 (aññe pi keci -a
jatil!l saranti); Sp 920,4 (so h~so -o ahosi); Sv l06,2s
(catubbidho takki anussutiko -o labhi suddhatakkiko ti);
-
0
-hingula, m., natural verznilion; Ja III 303,24 (sa
jati
o -hingulakapati111 aharapetva . . . pi!!hiya111
pañcangulika111 datva . . . pi!thiya111 katajatihiilgula-
pañcailgulikapurisal11 gai,J.hatha ti, Be, Ce so; Ee
katajatihiilgulikapuris~; Se jatihingulikkha111 gai,J.hatha
ti); - 0 -hiñgulaka, n., natural vermilion; Ja IV 489,17
(ye keci pabbajitukilma ime parikkhare ga~hantil ti -ena
bhittiya akkharani likhitva); V 67,2o (suva~~apane -ena
pañhavisajjan~ likhitva); Sv 447,18 (-ena majjitva
dlpida!haya gha111sitva ... suva~~arilpakasadiso ); Spk I
327,8; Vv-a 168,!3 (--rasena majjitva dukilla-
cumba!akena majjitakañcanapa!imasadise); Th!-a 221,2o;
- -hiñgulika,f, natural vermilion; Ps V 38,!2 (-~
adaya .. . suva~l).apane akkharani likhanto ); V v-a 4,2
0
( -hiilgulikadhilravicchurito viya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-hiilgulikadhara vijjulata viya); 324,22 (tapetva -aya
majjitva dhovitva silkaralomena majjitaku1,1<;lalo ); -
ajati,f, n. and mfn., l. (j.n.) the absence of birth; the
impossibility of birth; Ja I 4,15* (evam eva jati vijjante -i
pi icchitabbaka111. Be so; Se -i icchitabbak~; Ee -i111
pi; Ce -i pi icchitabbaka) = Bv 2:12 (Be, Se -i
p' icchitabbak~; Ee -i111; Ce -i p' icchitabbaka;
Bv-a 70,24: -i pi ti jatikhepan~ ajatinibbana111 pi
icchitabba111); Pa!is I ll,16 (jati abhiññeyya -1
abhiññeyya); 12,13 (jati dukkh~ -i sukhan ti
abhiññeyy~);- 2. (mfn.) free from birth; where there
is no birth; Ja I 3,23 (ah~ ca jatidhammo
jaradhammo . . . evambhiltena maya -i111 ajar~ ...
amatamahanibbana111 pariyesitu111 vagati);
atijatita,f, abstr. [cf S. abhijatata], the being of very
noble nature; nobility; Mil 278,15 (s!ho -aya
vigatabhayo); - see also atijaccata, catujatigandha
(sv catu[r]), pahlnajatika (sv pajahati), sajati.
jati2, f [S. jaU], the great-flowered jasmine; Abh 576
(sumana jatisumana malat! -i); Cp-a 187,4
0
( -atimuttakadipupphagacche); 0
-kusuma, n., a
jasmine flower; jasmine blossom; Ps III 22,26 (beginning
long cpd, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ca ti kusuma-) = Spk III
48,21 =Ud-a 413,31;- 0 -puppha, n., a jasmine flower,
jasmine blossom; Ap 141,23 (Siddhatthassa bhagavato
-am adasi 'h~; Ap-a414,lljoll.: jatisumanapupph~
adasi111 ahan ti vattabbe gathabandhasukhatth~
sumanasaddassa lopa111 katva vutta111); Sp 280,9
( --gumbana111); Mhv 15:27 (therassa upanamesi -ani
jatima); - 0 -püja, 0 -püjana,f, paying homage with
jasmine;? Ap 154,2joll. (jayantassa Vipassissa ...
--pilja111 akas' aha111 edisa piljana natthi yadisa
--piljana; cfTh-a I 185,2!: jatisumanapupphehi pilja111
akasi);- see also jatisumana.
jate, f [cf S. jatr, jatrl ?], a mother; Bv 1:70 ( -ito
abhinikkhame; Bv-a 55,29 foll.: -ito ti ettha jayati etaya
matuya ti mata -1 ti vuccate, tato -ito matuya ti attho,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jan! ti ... janito matuya ti).
jatika, jatiya1, mfn. [BHS -jatika, -jat!ya], ifc l. of such a
birth; of such a class; bom from ... ; - see ahi-, eka-,
ki111- (sv ka\ khattiya-, cai,J.<;Iilla-, jati- (sv jati 1), tai,J.hil-,
d!gha-, du-j-, namarilpa- (sv nama2), nlca-, brilhmai,J.a-,
samana- (sv samana2), suci-, h!na- (sv jahati); - 2. of
such a kind; of such a disposition, being by nature ... ;
naturally disposed to; see adhivasaka-,
apparajakkha-, alasa-, ev~-. kaly~a-, cintaka-,
224 jana
cokkha-, dabba- (sv dabba\ dubbaca- (sv vaca[s]),
dharaka-, nagarika-, nirati-, nisamaka-, mai,J.<;Iana-,
matugama- (sv mata[r]\ mana- (sv mana\ hu111hunka-;
- see also catujatiyagandha (sv catu[r]).
jatiki111 in Ee at Ja II 261,4· is prob. wr; Be, Ce janika111;
Sejanit~.
jatikiya, mfn. [?], ? Sadd 789,14 (niyuttatthe kiyo, jatiya111
niyutto -o, eva111 andhakiyo jaccandhakiyo ).
jatikosa, m. [ts], nutmeg; Abh 304 (jatikosajatiphala111).
jatiphala, n. [ts], nutmeg; Abh 304 (jatikosajatiphala111);
Sp 837,4; Vin-vn 1357.
jatiya 1, mfn., see sv jatika.
jatiya2 , mfn. or m. [cf S. jatya ?], being of such a kind, of
such a class; ? or type of birth, class, lineage; ? A I
162,16* (evam eva manussesu yasmi111 kasmiñci -e
khattiye brahma~e vesse sudde ca~<;lalapukkuse, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se jatiya111; Mp II 258,27: yattha katthaci kule
jate) = lii 214,6• (eds so).
jatisumana, f, and -a, n., and jatlsumana, f, a kind of
jasmine; the great-flowered jasmine; a jasmine flower,
jasmine blossom; Abh 576 (sumana -a malat! jati
vassikl); Ja V 420,6 (jatisumanamadhugandhika-,
beginning long cpd); Nett 142,16* (paggayha -a111
pahagho, Be, Ce so; Ee jat!-); Mil358,I9
(-a-mallikad!n~ viya pupph~); Dhp-a I 423,1 (vassikl
ti -a); Ap-a 440,23foll. (jayamanam eva janan~
sundar~ mana111 karotl ti -~. -am eva pupph~
--pupphan ti); 458,14 (0 ' -adi-anekani
sugandhapupphani); 535,20* (mallika -a); Mhv 29:61
(-a-pupphesu);- se e also jati2.
jatissami ti in Ee at Ps V 2,16 is wr, prob. for janissaml ti
(Ce so; Be, Se karissaml ti).
jatu, ind. [ts], at all; ever; certainly; Abh 1140 (-u ve
have); Vin II 203,6* (mil -u koci 1okasmil11 papiccho
udapajjatha; Sp 1276,24: mil kadaci pi koci satto
lokasmi111); SI 154,28* (ida111 hi -u me digh~
na-y-id~ itih!tih~; Spk I 221,5: ek~sena maya
digha111); Sn 152 (na hi -u gabbhaseyya111 puna-r-eti);
Th 1268 (no ce hi -u puriso kilese vato yatha
abbhaghana111 vihane); Ja I 374,6* (yugayogadhigato na
-u-m-eti; 374,2I·joll.: puna pa!isandhivasena eka111sen'
eva im~ loka111 na eti na gacchati); IV 261,2* (santo
vadh~ nappasa111santi -u); V 29,7* (manopadosa111
nilha111 sare -u-m-ÁI!nasatte); VI 120,5• (nilha111 eva111-
gata111 -u ... sadd~ samabhijanami); Vibh-a 509,14 foll.
(so sada vijjamanatta atlte pi na -u nilhosi anagate pi na
-u na bhavissati); Mhv 37:155 (pubbaveñ ay~ -u);
Sadd 895,22 (-u kilma111 sasakka111 jatucche ice ete
ek~satthe);- jatucca, jatucche (cf S. jatu cid?), at all,
ever; Ja VI 59,II • (na Migajina jatucca ah~ kañci
kudacan~ adhammena jine ñati111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jatucche; 59,!3': jatucca ek~sen'eva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jatucche) quoted Sadd 895,28 (jatucche).
jana 1, mfn. [from janati; BHS id.], (one) who knows, who
has understanding; Sn 349 (vipassina111 -am
upagamamha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce jhanam; but perhaps
jana111, adv., qv; cfPj II 349,9foll.: may~ pi vipassin~
sabbadhamme yathabhilt~ passanta111 bhagavanta111
jananta) f. Th 1269 (Th-a III 200,26 Be, Ce, Se = Pj II;
Ee janantam eva); Ja Il 289,27* (jananto -am agamma;
jana
290,5': ahaf!l attano balaf!1 jananto janantam eva taf!l
agamma, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee janam eva taf!l agamma);
III 24,2* (-o ajanantam imaf!1 palasaf!1 , , , sukhaseyyaf!l
pucchasi; 24,5': -o ti tuvaf!1 janamano hutva); -
ajana, mfn,, not knowing,' not having understanding;?
(orto jana2 ?) Th 129 (api ce hoti tevijjo, .. appaññato ti
naf!l bala avajananti --ta, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ajanaka;
Th-a II 10,15joll.: --ta ajananakanu_1a gm_1anaf!l
ajananam eva va tattha karal).an ti dasseti, Be, Se so; Ce
ajanana ajananakaral).a; Ee ajanana ajananagm_lanaf!1).
jana2 , n. (?) [from janati], knowing; ? - ifc see dujjana,
sujana.
janaip, adv. [from janati, either from part.pr. or l_lamnl
absol., used with sg. and pl. m. f n. agent;
cfSadd 169,11 •: tatra janan ti adini katthaci parivattare
vibhattilingavacanavasena ti vibhavaye; 181,25 foll.],
knowingly; with knowledge; V in III 265,22joll. (kathaf!1
hi nama chabbaggiya bhikkhü -af!l sañghikaf!1 labhaf!l
paril_lataf!1 attano paril_lamessantl ti ... yo pana bhikkhu
-af!l sanghikaf!1 labhaf!l paril_lataf!1 attano paril_lameyya
nissaggiyaf!l pacittiyan ti); IV 67,1o (bhagavata
patikkhittaf!l -af!l bhikkhuniparipacitaf!1 pil_l<;lapataf!l
bhuñjitun ti); 307,22 (ya pana bhikkhuni -af!l
sabhikkhukaf!1 il.rlimaf!1 anapuccha paviseyya pacittiyan
ti); V 17,33 (-af!1 bhikkhuniparipacitaf!l pil_l<;!apataf!l
bhuñjantassa pacittiyaf!1); D 1 192,2o (api ca pana tumhe
ayasmanto ekantasukhaf!110kaf!1 -af!l passaf!1 viharatha
ti); A 1 149,17 (santi kho pana me sabrahmacañ -af!l
passaf!1 viharanti); Sn 349 (vipassinaf!1 -am
upagamamha, Be Ee, Se so; Ce jhanam; Pj 11 349,9foll.:
yathabhutaf!l passantaf!1 bhagavantaf!l jananta; but
perhaps rather to jana1 qv) f. Th 1269;- neg. ajanaip,
unknowingly; without knowledge; Vin 1 76,33 (bhikkhü
-af!1 yeva ahaf!1SU na janama ti); M 1 195,25 (ahaf!1 asmi
janam passaf!1 viharami ime pan' aññe bhikkhü -af!1
apassaf!1 viharanti ti); S 1 141,16* (dure ito brahmal_li
brahmaloko ... kif!l jappasi brahmapathaf!1 -af!1, Be, Se
so: Ce, Ee ajananti; Spk 1 207,3: taf!1 brahmapathaf!l
ajananti); Ja VI 234,7• (kammaf!1 vidüsenti bahü -af!l;
234,18': bahujana ajananta).
jlinaka, m(jn). [BHS id.], (one) who knows; who is wise;
Sadd 865,2o (janati ti -o);- ajanaka, mfi:-ika?)n. [BHS
ajanaka, mfn.], ignorant; unwitting; Th 129 (appaññato
ti naf!1 bala avajananti -a, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ajanata);
Thi 240 (ko nu te idaf!1 akkhasi ajanantassa -o, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee ajanato; Thi-a 196,4: kammavipakaf!1
ajanantassa te sabbena sabbaf!l kammavipakaf!l ajanato
-o aviddasu ba1o); Ja VI 368,22 (tani aharif!lSll, tato
ajanikaf!1 katva gahapatiputtassa gehaf!l pessessama ti,
Ee so; "using an unwitting agent" (they send a slave-
f!ir/)? or ajanika,f, "secrecy" (so CPD); Ce tato
ajananakaf!l katva gahapatiputtassa; Be tato arnhakaf!l
gehe aghapetva gahapatiputtassa ... ; Se different); -
ajanaka in Ee at Ja V 433,3* is wr for ayanaka (Be, Ce,
Se so).
jlinana, n., -a, f [AMg jlll_lal).a, jal_lal).a], knowing;
knowledge; Abh 1173; Ja 1 145,19 (sa attlinaf!l 0 -ka1ato
paghaya ... pabbajitukama hutva); IV 110,26' (tassa
\·adassa -ato vadaññu); Pet 68,22 (-a passana);
Yism 665,9 (yakkhini ayan ti -af!l viya); Sp 204,28
225 janapaticchanna
(anubhavanatthe ca -a); 588,15 (taf!lkhal_lam yeva ca
-af!l nama dukkaraf!l); Kkh 2 !66,16 (siñcanena plil_laka
marissanti ti -af!1); Ps 1 64,7 (tattha -a bahuvidha);
IV 162,9 (sampajjati me kammaghanan ti -ena
sampajano hoti); - 0 -ta,f, abstr., the fact or state of
knowing; Pj 1 144,9 (katassa -a kataññuta);- jananataf!l
in Ce, Ee at Spk III 245,16 is prob. wr for jananakaf!l
(Be, Se so); - 0 -manta, m., a spell or charm giving
knowledge;? (or a spell that is known;? cjjananaka
with manta below); Ja 1 200,19 (tumhakaf!l -af!1 kathetha
ti); Ili 277,18 (tumhakaf!1 -af!l mayhaf!l detha ti;
cf276,2o: sabbarütajananamantaf!l datva);
ajanana, n., -af, the not knowing; ignorance; Ja V
199,8 (matugamassa adinhapubbatta methuna-
dhammassa ca --bhavena); Th 129 (api ce hoti
tevijjo ... appaññato ti naf!1 bala avajananti -a, so read ?
Be, Ce, Ee ajanata; Se ajanaka; Th-a 11 10,15fo/l.: bala
dummedha puggala avajananti, kasma, -a --karal).a
gul)anarr -am eva va tattha karaJ).an ti dasseti, Ce so;
Be, Se ajanata --karal).a; Ee -a ajananagul_llinaf!1);
Mil 266,12 (dvihi kilral).ehi [apattif!1) apajjanti
anadariyena va -ena va); Sp 180,1 (buddhanaf!1 -af!l
nama natthi); Mp 111 1,7 (ananubodha ti abujjhanena
-ena); Vibh-a 499,36 (avadaññuta ti . . . dehi karohi ti
vacanassa -a);- --ta,f, abstr., the factor state of not
knowing; Jaiii 92,1w; Sp370,5; Dhp-al 197,6 (gehe
bhattassa nitthitanit!hitabhavaf!1 --taya); It-a 11 56,11.
jananaka, mfn. [janana + ka2], l. (one) who knows, who
has knowledge; Ja 11 47,9 (hatthisuttaf!l -a acariya
kahaf!1 vasanti ti); Sp 1255,16 (thitikaf!1 -a pi bhikkhü);
Ps II 349,2 (aññatra maya kuhif!l etassa -af!l labhissasi)
= Spk III 245,16 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jananataf!1, prob. wr);
Dhp-a III 75,2o (devadhamme -e thapetva avasese
labhami ti); - 2. known, in one's knowledge; what is
known; Sp 1058,31 (manussa attano -af!l bhikkhuf!l
pucchanti); Mp 1 269,5 (ahaf!1 attana -af!1 mantaf!l
tumhakaf!l dassami, Be, Ce so; E e, Se jananakamantaf!1);
374,12joll. (tVaf!1 pana tuyhaf!1 -af!l puccha ti, sa ...
sabbam eva attano -af!1 vadaf!l pucchi thero sabbaf!1
vissajjesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jananavadaf!1); As 391,28 (te
hi ayaf!l kif!l rukkho nama ti pugha khadiro palaso ti
attana -af!l namaf!l kathenti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
jananakanamaf!1); - ajananaka, mfn. [BHS id.], (one)
who does not know; not knowing; ignorant; Ja 11 249,9
(sayaf!1 pi -o viya hutva tantiyo sithile vadesi);
Sp 758,26 (yo pana -o bhikkhu); Ps III 44,16; Dhp-a IV
60,23 (kiñci -assa putta ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ajanakassa);
- ajananaka- in Ee at As 239,14 is wr for ajananaka-
(Be, Ce, Se so).
janapaticchanna, mfn. ffrom janaf!1 + paticchanna ?], (of
an apatti) known and concealed; recognised and not
revealed; Vin 11 55,14joll.(bhikkhu dve sañghadisesa
apattiyo apajjati dvemasapaticchannayo eka apatti -a
eka apatti ajanapaticchanna ... yayaf!l avuso apatti -a
dhammikaf!1 tassa apattiya parivasadanaf!1 . . . ya ca
khvayaf!l avuso apatti ajanapaticchanna adhammikaf!l
tassa apattiya parivasadanaf!l . . . etissa avuso apattiya
bhikkhu manattaraho ti; cf55,35: eka apatti
saramanapaticchanna eka apatti asaramanapaticchanna,
and 63,38: ya apattiyo janati ta apattiyo chadeti).
janapada
jiinapada, mfn. and m.f [ts], belonging to or living in a
country or district; belonging to the countryside (as
opposed to the town); a countryman or countrywoman;
V in I 220,21 (-a manussa); DI 136,31 (y e rañño janapade
kbattiya anuyutta negama e' eva -a ca; Sv 297,17:
negama ti nigamavasino -a ti janapadavasino); M II
74,27 (brabma~Jagabapatikesu negamesu e' eva -esu ca);
Ja II 388,3 (eko kurumbiko ekassa -assa sahassaiTI
kahapa~Je datva); V 102,22* (arakkbita -a
adbammabalina bata); 117,1 * (sayaiTI -aiTI attb~
anusasa ratbesabba; ll8,24·: janapadavaslnaiTI attb~
sayaiTI attapaccakkhen' eva anusasa); VI 487,8
(dubbbikkbap!Fta -a raJangal).e sannipatitva
upakkosiiT~su); Ap 558,30 (naraiTI -~ disva, Ce, Se so;
E e wr janapad~; Be jarapatiiT~); Cp 3:6:12 (tato -a
sabbe senapatipurobita); Dbp-a IV 54,3 (tiiT~samatta pi
kbo -a bbikkhu satthar~ danbukama); Mbv 29:22
(pora -a e' eva tbüpanban~ upagamuiTI); - ifc see
negama-.
jiinapadi(n), mfn. [from janapada], living in the district;
ruling the district; Ps II 326,27 (Kosala nama -ino
rajakumara) tUd-a l82,12;- see also janapadi(n).
jiiniiti, ñati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. janati], knows, knows about
( someone or something); is aware (of), experiences;
gets to know, finds out; knows how (to, inf); has
knowledge or understanding; Dbatup 358 (ña
avabodbane); 497; Dhatum 584; 718; Vin I 21,21 (atba
kbo Maro papima -ati maiTI bbagava -ati m~ sugato ti
dukkb! dummano tattb' ev' antaradbayi); II 63,38 (ya
apattiyo -ati ta apattiyo cbadeti); III 13,6 (na tvaiTI ...
kiñci dukkbassa -asi); M I 310,1o (sevitabbe dbamme na
-ati); 366,21 (-ami kbo panah~ rukkb~ arobituiT~);
427,18 (sace bbagava -ati sassato loko ti sassato loko ti
me bbagava vyakarotu ); II 157,8 (-atba k e tumbe botba
ti); SI 162,24 (bbavantaiT~ kbo GotamaiTI sarajika parisa
evaiTI -ati arahaiTI samai).O Gotamo ti); 196,20*
(pubbenivasaiTI -ami); A I 149,28* (atta te purisa -ati
saccaiTI va yadi va musa); IV 96,22* (kuddbo attb~ na
-ati); V 3,11 (dbammata esa bbikkhave y~ samahito
yatbabbüt~ -ati passati); Ud 31,25 (ko nu kbo avuso
sippaiTI -ati); Vv 84:9 (disaiTI na -ama pamü!bacitta);
84:47 (-amase y~ tvaiTI vadesi yakkba); Tb374
(attbaiTI ca yo -ati bbasitassa); Tb! 346 (-atha maiTI
pabbajitaiTI kamesu bbayadassiniiT~); Ja I 253,6 (aññataro
brahmal).o vedabbb~ nama mant~ -ati); 344,3foll.
(mayaiTI ... rajan~ na -ama raja pi ambe na -ati);
II 243,24 foll. (maybaiTI -asi na -as! ti, sa ama -ami ti
sampariccbi, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr ajanami); V 242,31 *
(amaiTI cbindati yo pbalaiTI rasaiTI e' assa na -ati);
VI 82,28* (ajaramaro 'bam asiiTI ajj' etaiT~ ñami no pure;
83,w·: ajja -ami); 435,2o (ko -ati kiiT~ bbavissatl ti);
526,35* (ah~ -an ti yo vajja; pr. 1 sg. ? so
K.R. Norman, 1981b, p. 170; 527,c ahaiTi vessantaraiTI
-ami ti yo vadeyya ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se vessantarassa
vasanartban~ -ami ti); Ap 308,1 (sltaiTi Ul).baiTi na
-ami); Vibb 294,22 (bbikkbu dbammaiTI -ati suttaiT~
geyy~ ... ); Kv 56,5 (paracitt~ -ati); Mil 69,24 (yo na
labbati nibbanaiTI -ati so sukbaiTi nibbanan ti); 107,19
(tatbagatassa avajjanaparibaddbaiTi sabbaññutañill).~
avajjitva yadiccbakaiTi -aH ti); Mbv 37:220 (ah~ -e ti
226 janati
vutto); Sadd 350,26joll. (ña avabodbane: ñati ñanti ñasi
ñatu ñantu ñeyya ñeyyun ti ... ñatl ti -ati); 496,16 (ña
avabodbane: -ati); - janatba ti in Ee at Sp 93,1o is wr
for janatba ti (Be, Ce, Se so); - janati in Ce, E e at
Mp IV 71,7 is wr for jinati (Be, Se, A IV 151,12* so);-
imperat. 3 sg. janatu, Vibb 351,10 (saddbo ti m~ jano
-atu ti icchati); 2 sg. (a) janahi, Vin I 272,36 (tadis~
vejjaiTI -ahi yo maiTI tikiccheyya ti); IV 76,10 (maha kho
avuso bhikkhusañgho, -ah! ti); 225,26 (mayh~ pajapatl
aticarati taiT~ ghatessaml ti -ah! ti); SI 174,27 (iilgba me
tvaiTI Upavana Ul).hodakaiTi -ah! ti); Th! 59 (ev~ -ahi
papima nihato tvam asi antaka); Ja I 507,6 (etassa tava
rukkbapotakassa pal).l).~ khaditva rasaiTI -ah! ti);
(b) jana, Vin IV 33,29 (imaiTI -a imaiTI debi); S IV
374,13; A I 276,36 (tatharüpaiTI avasath~ -a yattb' ajja
may~ ekarattiiT~ vibareyyama ti); Ja III 513,11 (asuko
nama coro ti -a deva ti); Sp 615,15 (im~ rukkhaiTI -a);
(e) janassu, Ja VI 270,3o·; 439,22* (na taiT~ sakkomi
mocetuiT~ tvaiTI pi -assu khattiya); Dhp-a IV 131, 10;
2 pl. janatha, Mbv 17:4 (karessami ahaiTI tbupaiTI tumbe
-atha dhatuyo); - fut. 3 sg. (a) ñassati [cf S. jñasyati],
Vin III 105,26 (evarüp~ ñassati va dakkhati va); A I
9,13; Sn 909 (disvana va ñassati tani-m-eva, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se vaññassati; Nidd I 325,11: ñassati niccato sukbato
attato); Saddb 73; (b) janissati, M III 118,13; Ja IV 209,1
(esa ratbanucchavikaiTI daruiTi -issati); 1 sg. (a) ñassami,
Sp 305,26; see also anaññataññassamltindriya
(sv ajanati); (b) janissami, DI 88,21; Ja II 181,11 (sve
-issami punadivase -issaml ti); Ap 304,14 (-issami
tuvaiTI ajja sabbadhamme patirthitaiT~); (e) janissaiTI,
Ja VI 438,27* (kim evabaiTi ... atthani -issaiTI yatha pi
aññe, Ce, Se so; Ee wr añño; Be -ami); - opt.
3 sg. (a) jañña (and jaññu ?), Vin I 135,18 (y~ jañña
sakkomi ajj' eva gantun ti); M III 187,27* (ajj' eva
kiccam atappaiTI ko jañña mara~JaiTI suve); A III 352,32
(ma maiTI jañña ti icchati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se jaññü ti;
Mp III 377,5: ma maiTI jañña tima maiTI -atu, Ce, E e so;
Be, Se ma maiTI jaññü ti); Dbp 157 (attanaiTI ca piyaiTI
jañña); Th 1O (lokassa jañña udayabbayaiTI ca; cf Th-a I
57,11: jañña ti -itva); JaiV 478,21* (yo capi jañña na
marissaiTI kadaci); (b) janeyya, DI 80,18 (mukha-
nimittaiTI ... sakal).ikaiTI va sakal).ikan ti -eyya ... );
Sn 781 (yatba bi -eyya tatba vadeyya); Ja IV 197,13*
(amittaiT~ -eyya medbavl); Mi141,21; (e)ñeyya 1,
Sadd 350,26 (ña avabodhane: . . . ñeyya ñeyyun ti);
2 sg. (a) jañña, Ja II 346,17* (kathaiTI hi mül~ adisva
rukkhaiTI Janna patirtbit~); V 63,2* (pucchitva
Sambhav~ jañña attbaiTi dhammaiTI ca brahma~Ja;
63,2s·: jañña ti -issasi); (b) jaññasi, Ja VI 194,11* (asajja
kho naiTI jaññasi; 194,14·: Jannast ti -eyyasi);
(e) janeyyasi, V in III 15,35 (yaggbe 'yye -eyyasi
ayyaputto Sudinno anuppatto ti); JaiV 215,14;
(d) janiya, Ja IV 112,7* (kayo parabbojanan ti ñatva
saiTlsare sugatl ca duggatl ca ittaravaso ti -iya Udaye ma
pamada, Ce, Ee so [or absol. ?]; Be -iyana; Se -itva;
112,26·: etaiT~ ubhay~ pi ittaravaso ti -itva;
cfSadd 834,2o: ña ice etaya dhatuya paraya
eyyavibbattiya iyañña-adesa bonti va: -iya vijaniya
jañña); 3 pl. (a) jaññu, jañña, A III 352,32 (ma maiTI
jaññü ti icchati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce jañña; but cfMp III
jiiniiti
377,5: ma ma¡p jaññü tima maJTI -atu, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
jañña ti); Ja V 218,26* (naññatra taya maya va sabbapi
kammassa katassa jañña; 224,2'foll.: añña sabba pi paja
imassa katassa akaramattaJTI pi na jañña na -issanti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee añño sabbo pi jano); Nidd-a I 207,3
([ad Nidd I 79,21] ma maJTI jañña ti icchaU ti mayhaJTI
kataJTI papaJTI pare ma -iJTISÜ ti paccasiJT!Sati, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e jaññü ti); (b) janeyyuJTI, M I 27,12 (na ca ma¡p
bhikkhü -eyyuJTI apattiJTI apanno ti); Ja II 109,9* (sarena
kho ta¡p -eyyuJTI); Mil 69,28 (yesaJTI na cchinna
hatthapada -eyyuJTI te maharaja dukkhaJTI
hatthapadacchedan an ti); (e) ñeyyuJTI, Sadd 350,26;
2 pl. janiyatha, Pv-a 214,20 (tato puññato vivecayetha
vivecapayetha paribahire -iyatha ti, Ee so; Ce -eyyatha
ti; Be, Se janayetha ti); 1 pl. (a) jaññama, Ja VI 245,24*
Gaññama ce sllavantaJTI vadaññuJTI; 246,Y folL: yadi
maya¡p bhavanta¡p , . . vadaññü ti -eyyama);
(b) janiyama, janiyamase, Sn 873 (taJTI -iyama; Nidd I
279,16: ta¡p -eyyama); M II 143,11* (yatha ta¡p
-iyamase); (e) janemu, D II 240,11 * (ajananta taJTI
pucchama kathaJTI -emu taJTI mayaJTI); S I 34,24*; Sn 76
(brühi yatha -emu te kasiJTI); Ja IV 209,15* (yatha -emu
phandanaJTI); (d)janeyyama, Vinii 161,23 (aho nüna
mayaJTI -eyyama yaJTI amhakaJTI jatiya mahantataraJTI);
IV 151,3o (sace ca mayaJTI -eyyama tuyhaJTI kammaJTI
karissau ti na mayaJTI chanda¡p dadeyyama ti);
Mil 330,2; - part.pr. (a) jana(t), m.fn., Vin V 4,19 (tena
bhagavata -ata passata arahata sammasambuddhe na);
D I 84,8 (tassa evaJTI -ato evaJTI passato kamasava pi
cittaJTI vimuccati); MI 164,1o (addha Ájaro Kalamo
imaJTI dhammaJTI -aJTI passaJTI viharati ti); 286,28
(ajanaJTI va aha -ami ti -a~p va aha na -ami ti); A II
19,31*; Dhp 384 (ath' assa sabbe saJT!yoga atthaJTI
gacchanti -ato); Vv 34:22 (taJTI me buddho viyakasi
-aJTI kammaphala¡p sakaJTI); Ja II 126,7* ( -aJTI sihena
rakkhitaJTI; 126,12': sihena rakkhita ayan ti -anto);
VI 233,19* (Ruja... -a~p pubbaparaJTI dhamma¡p
pitaraJTI etad abravi; 233,26': pubbadhammaJTI ...
anagatadhamma¡p ca -anti); Sv 912,35 (-ata ti
sabbaññutañaJ?ena -antena); Mhv 14:24 (iti -aJTI pi
bhüpati); - neg. ajana(t), mfn., Vin III 90,36 (ajana¡p
evaJTI avuso avaca¡p janami apassaJTI passami tucchaJTI
musa vi1apin ti); DI 40,2 (samaJ?abrahmaJ?anaJTI
ajanataJTI apassataJTI); M III 287,18; Sn 320 (saya¡p
ajana¡p avitiJ?J?akmi.kho); 599 (ajanataJTI no pabrühi); Ja
VI 98,17* (-a¡p akkhas' ajanato); - ajanato in Ee at
Thi 240 is perhaps wr for ajanako (Be, Ce, Se so); -
se e al so janaJTI; (b) jananta, mf( -anU)n., V in III 6,29 foll.
1-anta pi tathagata pucchanti -anta pi na pucchanti); MI
97.23; Thi 387 (tadisikaJTI pa1obhaya -antiJTI); Ap 269,17;
Pa~is I 46,23 (-anto sikkhati); Spk III 55,31 (tvaJTI yeva
nu kho imaJTI dassanavisuddhika ¡p nibbana¡p -asi udahu
aññe pi -anta atthi ti); Mhv 20:58; neg.
ajananta, m.f(-anU)n., Vin III 92,22; MI 310,12 (so
-.evitabbe dhamme ajananto); S III 140,14 (puthujjana¡p
andhaJTI acakkhukaJTI a janantaJTI apassantaJTI); A lii
393.9; Th 129 (api ce hoti tevijjo ... appaññato ti na¡p
bala avajananti ajanata, Be, Ce, Ee so, me? Se ajanaka;
or from ajana ? c.fTh-a li 10,15 foil.: ajanata
J.Ji\nanakilraJ?a guJ?ilnaJTI ajananam eva va tattha kilraJ?an
227 jiiniiti
ti dasseti, Be, Se so; Ce ajanana ajananakilraJ?a; Ee
<ljanana ajananaguJ?ilnaJTI); Thi 159 (yathabhuccaJTI
ajananU); Ja III 246,2o (tesaJTI guJ?aguJ?am ajanantanaJTI
manussanaJTI); VI 367,2 (pacituJTI ajananU); Mi1158,!7;
(e) janamana, mfn., V in I 103,36 (saramano ti -amano
sañjanamano); MI 199,33 (saran ti -amano); Cp 1 :4:9;
Mi1109,25; Vism 635,7 (-amana kathayissama ti); -
neg. ajanamana, m.fn., Ja II 356,24; Sp 943,w; Ps li
357,21; - aor. 3 sg. (a) aññasi 2 (but some occurrences
may belong to aññasi 1 qv sv ajanati), Vin I 16,1 (yada
bhagava aññasi YasaJTI ku1aput!aJTI kallacitta¡p ... , Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr aññasi); D III 217,13 (mame idaJTI paro
aññasi ti); MI 166,23 (yaJTI dhammaJTI Ramo aññasi taJTI
tvaJTI dhamma¡p -asi); Nidd I 286,5 (so dhammaJTI vedi
aññasi apassi); Sp 18,1; Ja V 95,17 (atthibhava¡p pi 'ssa
va na aññasi); Mil 24,12 (akaren' eva aññasi eso kho
ettha Nagaseno ti); Vism 674,6 (nakkhattayogaJTI
aññasi); Mhv 37:127; (b) ñasi, Sn 471 (dhammaJTI ca
ñasi paramaya dit!hiya, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce
e' aññasi); (e) jani, aJam, Sn 536 (sabbada ajani
dhammaJTI); Ja V 245,12' (raja ... attano aparadha¡p -i);
Ps V 16,29; Spk I 231,3o ([pubbenivasa¡p yo] vedi ti
pubbenivasañiiJ?en a -i pa~ivijjhi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
jatiJTI); Mhv 30:22; - 3 pi. (a) aññiJTISU, añña¡psu,
Ud 44,7 (Ud-a 259,30: aññiJT!sü ti -iJT~su); Vv 22:4
(Bhadditthika ti maJTI aññiJTISU, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
aññaJT!su) quoted Vv-a 112,19* (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
aññaJT!su); Ja VI 307,27* (yatha ma¡p aññiJTISU
sukamanitaJTI; 308,13': yatha man ti yasma maJTI,
aññiJTISÜ ti -iJTISU, Be so; Se amaññiJTISU -iJT~sU; Ce, Ee
yasma maJTI su~~hu esa kamena nito ti sukamanitaJTI
anmJTISU [Ee aññaJT!su]); (b) aññaSUJTI, Vv-a 83,4
(avediJT!sü ti aññasuJTI, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee añña¡psu);
(e) jilniJT!su, V in I 128,36; li 32,19 (ma maJTI -iJTISÜ ti);
Vv 35:10 (Sesavatl ti tattha -iJTISU mamaJTI); Ja JI 105,4;
1 pl. (a) janimha, MI 150,2s; A V 198,w; Ja I 443,4;
(b) aññasimha, Ja V 307,21 * (yaJTI taJTI aññatavesena
n' aññasimha idhagataJTI, Ce, Se so; Be naññasimha; Ee
na ñasimha, prob. wr); - cond. 3 sg. aññassa [S.
*ajñasyat ?], A V 143,27 (na-y-idha Puril.J?O Isidattassa
gatiJTI pi aññassa);- inf (a) ñatuJTI, DI 187,11; SI 61,24
(ñil.tuJTI va daghuJTI va papuJ?itUJTI va); Ja II 362,11
(pamaJ?aJTI ñatuJ11 vaHatl ti); VI 430,27 (n' eva sakasena
na parasena ñatuJTI sakka); Ap 426,13 (mayaJTI pi ñatum
icchama); Sv 248,3o (yatha sakka so ñatu111 tatha me
acikkha ti);- ñatuJTI in Ce, Ee at Ja I 502,3' is prob. wr;
Be avamaññituJTI; Se avaññatuJTI; (b) janituJTI 1, V in Ili
150,5; Ja I 300,7 (tassa bhava¡p -ituJTI asakkonto);
Ap 43,21; Mil7l,3 (sakka -ituJTI buddho anuttaro ti);
Sp 1113,9; Dhp-a IV 73,25; (e) janituye, Ja IV 463,9*
(arahasi no -ituye katani, Be so; Ce -itaye; Ee -itaye;
Se -itave; 463,10' [Be]:-ituye ti -ituJTI);
absol. (a) ñatva, Vin I 36,2o* (etaJTI malan ti upadhisu
ñatva); M II 67,9 (kiJTI bhavaJTI RaHhapalo ñatva va
disva va sutva va agarasma anagariya¡p pabbajito );
It 9,5* (evam adinava¡p ñatva); Sn 520 (virajo ñatva
imaJTI paraJTI ca 1oka¡p); Thi 315 (saha¡p nissaraJ?a¡p
ñatva jatiya maraJ?assa ca); Ja I 15,17 (Gotamo nama
buddho bhavissaU ti ñatva); 133,9 (pitu kalakatabhava¡p
ñatva); Ap 246,15 (pasannacitta¡p ma¡p ñatva); Sp 868,17;
janati
Mhv 18:25; - neg. añatva, aññatva, Sp 1094,28 (ñatva
va añatva va khadantassa apatti yeva); Sv 255,26 (ki111
pana bhagava tassa kujjhanabhav~ ñatva evam aha
udahu añatva ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee aññatva ti);
(b) ñatvana, S IV 205,4* (e~ dukkhan ti ñatvana);
Ud 38,9* (ñatvana udayabbay~); Vv 16:9 (ñatvan'
aha111 virajapad~ asañkhat~); Ja III 491 ,24* (khll:_¡an ti
ñatvana dum~ pha1accaye); Ap 549,13; Mhv 22:36;
(e) janitva, V in III 244,27 (na matta111-itva); Ja III415,23
(bodhisatto mantanubhavena tassa rava111 -itva); Nidd I
84,21 (ñatva -itva tulayitva); PsI 52,31; Mp I 150,17
(ay~ puriso nissa111saya111 buddho ti -itva); Mi1169,23;
Vism 74,18 (-itva channe arm;¡a111 ughapitamatte ti
Aii.guttarabhffi.!aka); Mhv 14:60; - neg. ajanitva, Vin II
64,3 (pubbe ajanitva ... paccha -itva); IV 232,7; Ja II
10,s (attano bala111 ajanitva); Mi1256,18 (aggi ajanitva
akkamanta111 qahati ti); Sp 1014,34 (bhikkhuno ajanitva
pi... majj~ pivantassa pacittiy~); As 135,19
([desana] ajanitva kathita natthi sabba -itva kathita va);
(d) neg. ajanitvana, Dlp 5:34 (n1tattha111 e' eva
neyyatth~ ajanitvana bhikkhavo); (e) janiya, janiyana,
Thi 388 (saii.khatam asubhan ti -iya; Thi-a 239,5: ñatva);
Ja IV 112,7* (ittaravaso ti -iya, Ce, Ee so [or opt. ?]; Be
-iyana; Se -itva; 112,26·: ittaravaso ti -itva;
cfSadd 827,7: ña ice etassa dhatussa ja jan na ice ete
adesa honti va: -ati -eyya -iya jañña nayati); -
neg. ajaniya, Mhv 37: 132; (f) jañña, [jan- +ya?], Th 10
(1okassa jañña udayabbaya111 ca, but prob. opt.; Th-a I
57,11: jañña ti -itva); (g) [1:_1amul] jan~. se e sv; -pass.
pr. 3 sg. (a) ñayati, nayati, is known; is known as;
Vin V 86,6* (namamatta111 na -ati, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
nayati; Sp 1305,7: namamatta111 pi na paññayati); D II
274,20* (Sakyamuni ti -ati); Ud 93,24* (yatha na -ate
gati); Ja II 442,16* (nassa nayati pitanto; 442,19' foil.:
pariyanto na paññayati); Ap 27,8 (jahanti purima111
nama111 buddhaputta ti -are); 72,16 (rattindiva na -anti);
Nett 34,31 (ev~ -ati); Mil 25,7 (kath~ bhadanto -ati
kinnamo si bhante ti); 71,8 (Tissatthero nama
lekhacariyo ahosi ... katha111 so -ati ti, 1ekhena bhante
ti); Vism 236,16* (animitta na -are, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nayare); 423,13 (yena ñffi.!ena sattana111 cuti ca upapato ca
-ati); Dhp-a II 73,10 (janena -ati pakato paññato hoti);
Sadd 496,16 (janati -ati nayati); part.pr.
ñayamana, mfn., A IV 218,22 (sante yeva attani kusale
dhamme na icchati parehi -amane); Nidd-a I 6,21; -
neg. aññayamana, mfn., Mhv 22:16; - aor. 3 sg.
ñayittha, Mhv 5:189 (Ca1:_1qasoko ti -ittha pure papena
kammuna); - pr. 3 sg. (b) ñeyyati, Sadd 839,5 (ñass'
anto etta111 ca . . . dhammo purisena ñeyyati); -
pp (a) ñata, mfn. and n. [S. jñata], l. (mfn.) (i) known;
found out; known as; well-known; (it is) known;
Abh 757; Vin IV 226,3o (aññehi manussehi -a hoti
vajjha esa ti); D II 83,11 (dovariko pa1:_1qito ... aññatan~
nivareta -an~ paveseta); MI 265,27 (sam~ -a111
sam~ diqha111 sama111 vidita111); S JI 210,10 (bhikkhu -o
yasassi labhi ... ); Th 141 (-o attho sukhavaho ); Ja I
465,9 (acariyena me dussilabhavo -o); III 125,16
(kumaro -o 'mhi pitara idani m~ nasessati ti); V 227,s-
(sakalajambudipe --tta uggato ); VI 353,13 (-o te Senaka
pañho ti); 382,17 (imasmi111 rahasse rañña -e mayha111
228 janati
JIV!t~ n' atthi ti); Patis I 134,1 (yavata dukkhassa
dukkhaqho sabbo -o aññato dukkhaqho n' atthi ti
sabbaññutañffi.!al11); Vibh 329,10 (imina dhammena -ena
dighena); Mil21,13 ( ... ga1:_1acariyo -o yasassi
sadhusammato ... ); Spk 1 19,9 (iti mayha111 -am eva
bahu111 appa111 aññat~); Dhp-a II 12,3 (bhante ajja me
rattiya dighabhavo -o ti); III 279,10 (hotu bhante -~
maya ti); It-aii 100,22 (pa1:_1qito ti -o); Mhv37:116
(kara1:_1a111 te mahanaga -a111 agamane maya);- (ii) who
has known; knowing;? Nidd-a 1 221,32 (so
satthasaññitani vedani gato -o atikkanto va hoti);
Vibh-a 416,10 foil. (upayogatthe va kara1:_1avacana111,
ima111 dhamm~ -ena ti attho, catusaccadhamma111
janitva thitena maggañffi.!ena ti vutta111 hoti;
ad Vibh 329,10: imina dhammena -ena dighena);
Sadd 850,12 (budha gama ice evamadihi kattari
tapaccayo hoti sabbakale: sabbe saiikhatasaiikhata-
sammutibhede dhamme bujjhati abujjhi bujjhissati ti
buddho, eva111 saranaii gato samathaii. gato -o ice
evamadi); - 2. (n.) knowing;? iic see below; -
-'-aqha, m., l. the sense or meaning of knowing;?
Patis I 1,24 (abhiññapañña --aqhe ña1:_1a111; Patis-a 35,27:
--aqhe ñffi.!an ti jananasabhava111 ñffi.!~); 22,13 (ye ye
dhamma abhiññata honti te te dhamma ñata honti, ta111
--aqhena na1:_1a111 pajananaqhena panna;
Patis-a 108,10 foil.: tes~ vuttappakarana111 dhamman~
jananaqhena ñffi.!~); Vism 200,29 (t~ -' -aqhena
ña1:_1a111 pajananaghena pañña, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
ña1:_1aghena; Vism-mht [Be] I 224,16: -·-aghena ti
yathasabhavato jananaghena) = Sp 114,27; Sv 460,29
(ñffi.!al11 udapadi ti -' -atthena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
ñffi.!aghena, prob. wr); Patis-a 701,32
(jhanapaccavekkha1:_1avasena vipassanavasena magga-
paccavekkhal:_lavasena - '-aghena nekkhammadika111
nana111 nama ti); - 2. the sense of what is (to be)
known; the sense of being known; Patis I 20,10
(dhatugho abhiññeyyo --aqho abhiññeyyo
sacchikiriyattho abhiññeyyo; Patis-a 102,28: --agho ti
janitu111 sakku1:_1eyyagho); 105,23 (dvadasahi akarehi
sabbe dhamma ekasañgahita tathaghena anattaghena .. .
dhatughena --aghena sacchikiriyaghena ... ;
Patis-a 331,20: --aghena ti 1okiyalokuttarehi ñffi.!ehi
ñatu111 sakku1:_1eyyaghena); - --pariñña,f. [ñata +
pariñña1], the understanding consisting in knowing; ?
Ja VI 259,8· (khandhadin~ sabhavajanana111 --pariñña
nama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ñffi.!apariñña); Nidd I 53,5
(ay~ cakkhusamphasso ... aya111 paccuppanno phasso
ti janati passati ti ay~ --pariñña); Vism 606,25 (tattha
ruppanalakkha1:_1a111 n1p~ vedayitalakkha1:_1a vedana ti
ev~ tesa111 tes~ dhamman~ paccattalakkhal:_la-
sallakkhal:_lavasena pavattapañña --pannna nama);
Sv 1057,2 (abhiññaya --pariñña kathita, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr --pariññatathita); Dhp-a II 172,2 (yagu-adin~ hi
yagubhavadijanana111 --pariñña); - neg. aññati, mfn.,
not known, unknown; (what is) not known; MI 430,1
(aññatam eva t~ ... tena purisena assa atha kho so
puriso ka!~ kareyya); S V 221,4 (yesa111 hit~ bhante
aññat~ assa adigha111 avidita111); Ud 4,27* (anaññaposi111
aññat~ danta111 sare patighit~; Ud-a 63,5 foil.:
aññatan ti abhiññat~ . . . athava aññatan ti . . . na
jiiniiti
ñata111); Ja II 261,9 (mama tumhehi aññatassa bahuno
jananabhava111 na janatha): VI 292,18* (na hi rajakul~
patto aññato labhate yas~; 292,22': aññato ti
apakatagm_lo aviditakammapadano ); Patis II 194,26
(natthi tassa bhagavato aññata111 adittha111 avidit~);
Ap 324,24 (aññata111 ca vijaneyya111); Vibh 124,16 (tes~
dhammana111 aññatan~ adit!hana111); Sp 1166,4
(aññatatta); Spk I 18,25 (aññate pi ñatasaññino, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee aññate viññatasaññino); Nidd-a I 296,10
(sabbadhammana111 ñatatta aññat~ nama natthi);
Mhv 6:4; aññatavesava(t), mfn,, in disguise;
Mhv 34:2 (gantva aññatavesava);- aññatavesena, adv,,
in disguise; not in one 's own identity; Ja V 307,21 * (ya111
ta111 aññatavesena n' aññasimha idhagata111); Bv 2:54
(ki111 me aññatavesena dhamma111 sacchikaten' idha
sabbaññut~ papm:litva buddho hessa111 sadevake;
Bv-a 90,27: aññatavesena ti apakatavesena aviññatena
paticchannena); see also aññataka 1;
pp(b)janita,mfn. [AMgjfu.lia], known; Mpii 309,19
(aññavade na SaJ.l!hatl ti ñatavade janitavade na
sa1_1thati); - janita111 in Ee at Pe! 147,14 is prob. wr;
read ajjhattasampasadanajanitapiti-m-anugata with
Ñiinamoli, 1979, p. 199; Be, Ce janita111;
neg. ajanita, mfn., not known, not understood; Ja II
266,13* (yesa111 dhamma ajanita; 266,1r:
sotapattimaggassa anadhigatatta appatividdha); Mp II
87,3; - part.perf.act. ñatava(t), mfn., who has known,
knowing; Patis-a 537,19 (catusacca111 buddhava, ñatava ti
attho); - fpp (a) ñatabba, mfn. [S. jñatavya], to be
known, to be understood; M III !29,3o (y~ ta111
nekkhammena -~ nekkhammena datthabba111);
Mi1121,22 (saccabal~ -~); 330,16* (anumanena -a111
atthi so dipaduttamo); Sv 22,27 (eta111 buddhavacana111
tividhan ti -~.Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -o); Sadd 848,4;
(b) ñiiteyya, ñatayya, mfn., S I 61,26 (nah~ ta111
gamanena lokassa ant~ -~ dattheyya111 patteyyan ti
vadaml ti; Spk I !!6,24: -an ti adisu ñatabb~
datthabb~ pattabban ti attho) =IV 93,6 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee ñatayya111) =A II 48,6 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ñatayya111)
quoted Vism 204,16 (eds -a111); A V 36,32 (yatha yatha
va pana ta111 -a111 ... tatha tatha ñassati, Be, Ce, E e so;
Se ñatayya111); Sadd 847,2o (ñatabb~ -a111);
(e) janitabba, mfn., V in I 354,2o (at!harasahi ... vatthühi
adhammavad! -o); V 115,3 (apatti -a anapatti -a); A I
34,w; Ja IV 199,5 (amitto ca mitto ca -o); Nidd I 178,15;
Pe! 120,1 (vipallasa -a); Mil 94,5; Vism 518,3 (kath~
ida111 -an ti ce, bhagavato vacanena); Ps II 210,25
(katha111 imesa111 suvai_ll_labhavo -o ti); - neg.
ajanitabba, mfn., Dhp-a I 440,12 (satthu me ajanitabb~
nama n' atth! ti, amadibhed~ sabb~ janati); Nidd I
360,16* = It-a II 189,31*; - see also janitabbaka;
(d) ñeyya , neyya 1, mfn. [S. jñeya; perhaps sorne
2
con.fusion with neyya2 qv], to be known; knowable;
beíng an object of knowledge; M I 293,29 foll.
(nissatthena . . . pañcahi indriyehi parisuddhena
manoviññfu.lena ki111 neyyan ti . . . ananto akaso ti
akasanañcayatan~ neyy~; Ps II 345,13: ki111 neyyan ti
ki111 janitabb~); Nidd I 178,15 (ya111 kiñci -~ nama
atthi janitabb~. Ce so; Be, Ee, Se neyya111; Nidd-a I
296,26: janitabban ti pad~ -an ti padassa
229 jan ati
atthavivara1_1attha111 vutta111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se neyyan ti)
f. Patis II 194,30 (Ce -a111; Be, Ee, Se neyya111); Nidd I
178,27 (yavatak~ -a111 tavatak~ ña1_1~, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se neyy~; Nidd-a I 297,2o: janitabban ti -~. Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se neyya111) = Patis II 195,10 (Ce so; Be, Ee,
Se neyy~); Nidd I 360,17* (sabbam abhiññasi yad atthi
-a111, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se neyya111) = Patis I 133,16* (eds
neyy~); Nidd II 73,7 (niddesa duvidha -a);
Nett !9,3ofoll_ (yada hi sekho -a111 parijanati tada ...
neyya111 pariññata111 bhavati, eds so); 161,25 (ñfu.l~ -a111
ña1_1a111 ca -a111 ca); Vism 209,17 (ya111 pana kiñci atthi
-~ nama tassa sabbassa buddhatta) = Sp 122,9 (Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee neyy~); Vism 563,2* (tatha neyy~
vibhavina); Sp 20,26* (tayo pi vinayadayo -a); 1374,23
(-tta); Spk II 386,17 (vedagu vedasañkhatena ña1_1ena
-esu gato, Ee so; Be, Se neyyesu; Ce omíts); Sadd 496,19
(ñatabba111 -a111);- ñeyyo in Ee atA II 135,11 is wr for
neyyo; see sv neyyi; (e) jañña2, mfn,, (?) Bv-a 127,8
(vittharika111 mahantappatt~ ca bahühi paJ.19itehi
devamanussehi niyyanikan ti jaññ~ janitabba111 .. , tena
vutta111 vittharika111 bahujañña111 ... , Be, Se so; Ce, E e
nlyanikatta ñat~ ca); - ifc see bahujañña; - caus.
pr. 3 sg. (a) ñiipeti\ -ayati\ [S. jñapayati], makes
(something) known; causes (someone) to know, informs,
teaches; Ja VI 433,21 (attano agatabhava111 -etu111);
Sp 126,15 (pavedetl ti bodheti -eti pakaseti); PsI 236,19
(tena ten' eva pana suttena t~ t~ atth~ -eti);
Nidd-a I 263,9 (paññapehi ti -ehi); Sadd 351,6 (ña
avabodhane: ñati . . . karite -eti); - ñapeti in Ee at
Patis I 70,21* is prob. wr for jhapeti (Be, Ce, Se so);-
part.pr. ñapenta,mfn., Jaii 133,26; Pj II 184,3;- aor.
3 sg. (a) ñapesi, V in II 285,23 (ayasma Mahakassapo
sañgha111 -esi su1_1atu me avuso sañgho); Ja IV !60,21
(manussabhav~ -esi); (b) ñapayi, Mhv 30: 17; 35:111;
- absol. ñapetva, Ja II 337,2; Ps III 419,17; Ap-a 86,33
(ah~ bhikkhave araha111 sammasambuddho ti attano
buddhabhava111 -etva); - pass. pr. 3 sg. ñapiyati,
Sadd 481,5; - pp ñapita, mfn. [S. jñapita], Pj II 321,22
(saññatto ti -ito); - fpp ñapetabba, mfn., Vin I 56,1o
(vyattena bhikkhuna patibalena sañgho -etabbo su1_1atu
me bhante sañgho; Sp 984,6: sañgho janapetabbo);
II 97,13; M II 250,7; Pj II 410,1 (paravediyan ti parehi
-etabb~); As 22,3o (yatha yatha -etabbo attho);- see
also duññapaya; - caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) janapeti, makes
(something) known; declares; makes (someone) know
(somethíng); ínforms; Ja II 329,1 (ah~ !al1l palobhetva
kamarasa111-essam! ti); III 537,28 (attano pagu1_1abhav~
amhe -ehi ti); Sp 1082,3 (araha ahan ti -eyy~);
Sv 738,27 (attano sotapannabhava111 -eti); Pj II 384,24
(ay~ pana raja ajananto evam aha, handaha111 t~ -eml
ti); Dhp-a IV 124,16 (mama puttena n' atthl ti pad~ na
sutapubba111, katha111 nu kho t~ natthibhav~ -eyyan
ti); Mhv 37: !59 ( -essami); - part.pr. janapenta, mfn.,
Ja V 20,13 (Sakko devattabhav~ dassetva attan~
-ento); Spk I 334,16; - neg. ajanapenta, mfn., Ja IV
255,8; - aor. 3 sg. janapesi, Sp 1088,24; Ps III 245,11
(samai_lero ukkasitva attano agatabhava111 -esi); -
absol. janapetva, Ja I 350,23 (kammaphalasambandh~
-etva); VI 336,19' (mahasatto t~ karaJ.l~ mahajan~
-etva); Sv 261,21;- neg. ajanapetva, Jai 107,8 (ev~
jiiniipanii
attanmp ajanapetva); Vism 92,32; Ps III 88,2 (raja aññaJ11
ajanapetva sayam eva gantva);- pp janapita, mfn., Ja V
442,31 (maya sabbe tumhe -ita); Sp 483,24; 880,19
(-itatta); neg. ajanapita, mfn., Nidd-a I 198,14
(apucchito ti ajanapito ); Cp-a 246,32 (maya kassaci
ajanapitabhavo); - fpp janapetabba, (mj)n., Ja I 349,12
(ku1adamakena nama bhikkhuna . . . buddhagul)e
-etabban ti) t Dhp-a I 374,10 (eds buddhagul)aJ11);
Kkh 2 226,4 (ahaJ11 ettha ti va vatva -etabbaJ11).
janapana,j (and-a, n. ?) [cf S. jnapana], making known;
Sp 1365,25 (attho 0 '-atthaya); Ps III 70,12 (cal)<;ialo ti
o• -atthmp); Ud-a 63,9 (attanmp
0
-vasena); Patis-a 581,22
(paññapana ti -a);- ajanapana,j, or-a, n., not making
known; Sp 879,14 (ajanapanavasena); - see also
ñapana.
jani\ f [cf S. -jani], a wife; - 0 -pati, 0 -patayo, m.pl.,
husband and wife; Abh 242 (-I); A 11 59,3* (te honti
-ayo chava saJ11vasam agata; Mp III 95,3: -ayo ti
jayampatika); Sadd 184,19 (-ayo); -se e also jan!.
jane, f [S. jyani], loss, deprivation; fine, confiscation;
Abh 763; DI 135,14 (ahaJ11 eta111 dassukhilaJ11 vadhena
va bandhena va -iya va garahaya va pabbajanaya va
samühanissami ti; Sv 296,16: -iya ti haniya, satmp
gal)hatha sahassa111 gal)hatha ti eva111 pavattitadal)<;lena ti
attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr jantiya ti); Ud 48,14' (taJ11
sabbaJ11 -iJ11 k u salo viditva; Ud-a 278,3o foil.: sabbassa
sattassa -iJ11 haniJ11 maral)aJ11 sabbmp va 'ssa sattassa
haniJ11 vinasa111 pabhaiJ.gutaJ11 . . . janitva); Thi 345
(vadho bandho parikleso -i sokapariddavo; Thi-a 226,4:
-I ti dhanajani e' eva parivarajani ca); Ja I 55,11
(evarüpmp mahapurisa111 buddhabhüta111 datrhuJ11 na
labhissami mahati vata me -i bhavissati ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se hani); Kv 546,18' (labhate ... kammena -iJ11 ca
vadhmp ca bandhmp); Sv 538,35 (jhanato satta-
ariyadhanato ca -iJ11 nigacchati); Ps II 186,16
(sattadivasabbhantare pattabbamaggaphalato parihinatta
mahati -i assa ti mahajaniyo); Spk I 229,10 (samal)ena
Gotamena mayhmp jetthakabhataraJ11 pabbajentena -i
kata pakkho bhinno ti);- ifc see dhana-, maha-.
janita(r), m. [from janati; cf S. jñatr], one who knows;
Mp IV 105,19 (viññata ti atthanatthassa atthaJ11 -a, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee omits viññata ti).
janitabbaka, mfn. Uanitabba (fpp of janati) + ka2], to be
known; Mp III 173,4 (pal)<;litavedaniyan ti pal)<;litehi
-mp); IV 71,28 (janaJ11 janati ti -am eva janati, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se janitabbaJ11) = V 72,6 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
janitabbam).
janitmp1 , inf ofjanati qv.
janitmp2 , ind. [inf of denom. from jani2 ?], to fine; to
cause loss; ? Ps III 353,23 (japetaymp va japetun ti
dhanena Va japetabbayuttakaJ11 japetUJ11 janitUJ11
adhanmp katUJ11, eds so).
janituye, inf ofjanati qv.
janitta, n. [= janitta qv], a birthplace; Ja 11 81,1· (ta111
janittaJ11 bhavittaJ11 ca ti ta111 jatatthanaJ11 ca
va<;l<;lhitaghilnaJ11 ca, -mp bhavittan ti dighavasenapi
patho, so yev' attho).
janiya, opt. 3 sg. (or absol.) ~fjanati qv.
janiyaiJI in Ee at Thi 114: prob. read vajaniya111 (me for
v' ajaniyaJ11) with Be, Ce.
230 jiimiitika
jani,.f [S. lex. id.], a mother; Bv-a 55,29 foil. ( -ito ti ettha
jayati etaya matuya ti mata -I ti vuccate, tato -ito
matuya ti attho, Ce so; Ee jatito ti; perhaps wrr; Be, Se
jatito ti ... jan ti ... jatito matuya ti; ad Bv 1:70: eds
jatito abhinikkhame).
janu, jlll)u, n. [S. janu], the knee; Abh 276 (jlll)u jai)I)U ca);
Th1109 (nihacca -UJ11 vanditva, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
jai)UJ11); Ja VI 471 ,35' (te -una patighaya onamitva
gal)hanti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se jlll)una); Ap 426,21 (na tesaJ11
-u nadati sandhisaddo na suyyati); Sp 1212,14 (-uto
paghaya); Sv 254,29 (vessa nabhito sudda -uto, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se jlll)uto ); Ps 11 317,14 (-una -umhi
saiighagiyamane, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jlll)una jal)umhi);
III 23,21 • (aghagayanto niyyati ubho -u ca gopphake, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee jal)ü) = Spk III 49,10' (Ce, Ee -u; Be, Se
jlll)ü) = Ud-a414,18' (Be, Ce, Se jlll)ü; Ee jal)l)ü);
Pv-a 181,1o (catukul)<;liko dvihi -ühi dvihi ca hatthehi
gacchanto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jlll)ühi); Nidd-a I 280,2
(jai)I)Upathan ti jal)ühi gantabbaJ11 maggaJ11); Mhv 25:29
(-ühi thatva); Sadd 873,8 (jlll)u); - 0 -IDal)c;lan ti in E e
at Sp 889,6 is wr for janumal)<;lalan ti (Be, Ce, Se so);-
0
-mal)c;lala, n. [BHS janumal)<;lala], the knee-cap; the
knee; Vin I 5,22 (Brahma Sahampati ekaJ11SaJ11
uttarasaiigaJ11 karitva dakkhil)aJ11 -a111 pathaviymp
nihantva); IV 185,19 (parimal)<;lalmp nivasetabbaJ11
nabhimal)<;lalaJ11 -aJ11 paticchadentena); A III 241,7
(kimi . . . padehi ussakkitva yava -a paticchadesuJ11);
Dhp-a 111 470,6 (buddhana111 dakkhil)assa -assa santike
nisinna pi na dissanti); Vin-vn 1872 (-ato hegha
aghangulapamlll)akaJ11 otaretva nivatthabbaJ11); - ifc
see adho-, ubbha- (sv ubbhmp); see also
ubbhajanumal)<;lalika (sv ubbhaJ11), jai)I)U, brahmajanuka
(sv brahma[n]).
januka, jlll)uka, n. Uanu + ka2], the knee; A IV 102,5
(katimattaJ11 pi o -matta111 pi ... udakmp sal)thati, Ee so;
Be, Ce jal)l)uka-; Se jannuka-); Sp 291,3 (bhümiymp
-ani nihantva, Ce, Se so; Be jal)ukani; Ee -a, prob. wr);
Mp 11 89,22 (ubhosu kapparesu ca -esu ca, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee jlll)ukesu); Thi-a 107,7 (dvihi jlll)ukehi dvihi hatthehi
ca); - see also jal)J)Uka.
japaka, ll!fi:-ika)n. (or japika, mfn.) [from japeti 1 or
japeti2], producing; mastering; - ifc see attha-
(sv attha2).
japayati\ caus. pr. 3 sg. ofjayati qv sv Vjan.
japayate, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofjiyati 2 qv sv jarati 1.
japayate, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofjinati 2.
japeti\ caus. pr. 3 sg. ofjayati qv sv -vl.ian.
japete, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofjayati qv.
japeti3 , caus. pr. 3 sg ofjinati 2.
jamata(r), jamatara, m. [S. jamatrl. a son-in-law; Abh 247
(-a); Thi 422 (bhikkhaya ca vicarantaJ11 ... me pita
bhal)ati so hi si me -a, Ee so; Be, Ce hohisi; Se so sihi;
Thi-a 247,13: -a ti duhitupati); Ja 11 63,16 (yadiso
tumhakaJ11 -a); IV 219,25 (tatharüpo pana me putto va -a
va gehmp vicaretUJ11 samattho n' atthi ti, Be so; Ce, Se
jamataro; Ee jamato, prob. wr); V 311,9* (hontu -aro);
VI 313,29* (nagaraja pubbe va -aram ajjhabhasatha);
433,28' (-ara nama sasuro vandiyo ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
jamatarena); Dhp-a I 235,14 (tmp -armp akasi).
jamatika, m. [BHS id.; S. jamatrka, yamatrka], a son-in-
jambava
law; - 0 -sasura, m.pl., father-in-law and son-in-law;
Spk 1 345,29 (Sakko ca devanam indo Vepacitti ca ti ime
dve jana -a).
jambava, n. [ts], the fruit of the rose-apple tree; Abh 547
(-a~. Ce so; Be jambuva~).
jayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv Jjan.
jayana, n. [from jayati], being bom; coming into
existence; Ps 1 217,17 (0 '-aghena jati); Th-a III 153,7
(matukucchito a~u;lakosato ca ti dvikkhattu~ 0 -vasena
dijassa).
2 223,21* (jina pati~ ca -~ ca); 350,9 (bhariya pi 'ssa
jayanaka, mfn. Uayana + ka ], being born; who is bom,
who comes into existence; Ps II 405,10 (id~ hi na jayatl
ti ad!su imasmi~ t}lane koci -o va jiyanako va
mlyanako va ... n' atthi ti) = Spk 1 208,13; Nidd-a II
!6,22 C-vasena jati ida~ ettha sabhavapaccatta~) t
Vibh-a 95,1o (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee jayamanakavasena).
2 jayattane va ti jaya bhavissasi, -e va ti jañ bhavissasi;
jayamanaka, mfn. Uayamana (part.pr. of jayati) + ka ],
being bom; Vibh-a 95,1o ( -vasena jan ti ida~ ettha
0
sabhavapaccatt~, Be. Ce, Ee so; Se jayanaka-; t
Nidd-a II !6,22: eds jayanaka-).
jaya, f [ts], a wife; Abh 237; V in II 259,21 (-ayo ima
imesa~ jariyo ima imesa~); Ja III 92,8' (yattha -ay'
aha~ jara~ avahami vahami va); Ap 538,4 (sabbesa~
tattha yo jenho tassa -a ah os' aha~); Vism 404,1;
Sp 557,w (bhariya -a pajapatl puttamata ... ); -
2 mati~ . . . aroceti ti
0
-jina, m(fn). Uaya + jina ; cf S. strljita], overcome,
ruled, by one's wife or wives;? Ja V 421,28 (ko nu taya
viyatto -ena ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jayayacitena ti, prob.
wr; 423,w·: -ena ti jayajitena, ayam eva va patho, eva~
itthiparajitena taya sadiso ko nama vyatto atthi ti ta~
puna evarüpassa vacanassa abhaJ:~anatthaya apasadeti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jayayacitena ti); - 0 (a)-ttana, n.,
abstr., the state ofbeing a wife; marriage; Vin III 138,2
(yo pana bhikkhu sañcaritt~ samapajjeyya . . . -e va
jarattane va; 139,16: -e va ti jaya bhavissasi; Sp 554,14:
-e ti jayabhave); - 0
-pati, jayampatl, m.pl. (or dual)
[cf S. jayampatl, jayapati], husband and wife; Abh 242
(-I janipatl jayampati); Ja V 311,26' (ubhayo ca
jayampati); Dath 5:2 ( -Ina~); - jayapati in Ee at
Pv-a 159,2 is wr; read jaya hi pati~ atikamma caraJ:~ato
with Ce; Be, Se bhariya hi pati~; - see also jampati,
dampati; - jayampatika, jayapatika, jayapatika,
jayampatika, m.pl. [cf S. jayampatika; BHS also
jayapatika, jayapatika], husband and wife; S II 98,9 (dve
-a, Be so; Ce, Ee jayampatika; Se jayapatika; Spk II
103,25: jaya e' eva pati ca); Ja 1 301,11 (jayampatika, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se jayapatika); IV 70,13 (jayampatike dve
cakkavake disva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jayapatike);
Sv 180,14 (dve -a vasanti, Be so; Ce, Ee jayampatika; Se
jayapatika); Ps 1 211,29 (dve kira -a, Be, Ee so; Ce
jayampatika; Se jayapatika); Mp 1 169,3 (dve -a, Be so;
Ce, Ee jayampatika; Se jayapatika); Dhp-a III 34,2o
(jayampatika, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jayapatika); Ud-a 198,3
(te -e ... disva, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se jayampatike);
V v-a 286,25 (te dve -a, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jayampatika);
Th-a Il 187,15 (puttama~sa~ -a yatha ... khadi~su, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee jayampatika); Thi-a 172,2o (ubho pi
jayapatika); Nidd-a 1 455,2o (-an~, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
jayampatikana~).
jayika, f [from jaya], a wife; M 1 451,1 (eka -a na
231 jala
paramarüpa; Ps III 168,12: -a ti kapal).ajaya); Mhv 14:56
(Mahanagassa -a~ ... pakkosapesi).
jayu, m. [ts], medicine; Mhv 76:49 (visapitasalta-
tikkhan~
0
s~jataval).ana~ santihetave -jatani
gosiilganihitani ca; doubtful reading; mss gajatani ?).
1
jara , m. [ts], a lover, an illicit or adulterous lover;
Abh 240; Vin III 83,25 (aññatara itthi pavutthapatika
-ena gabbhini hoti); IV 91,10 (-o te eso samaJ:~o ti); Ja II
!68,1 (tassa -o ta~khaJ:~~ oloketva ta~ geh~ pavisi);
III 92,s' (yattha jayay' aha~ -~ avahami vahami va);
tasmi~ khal).e -ena saddhi~ nisinna hoti); -
0
-ttana, n., abstr., the state of being a lover; a lave
affair; Vin III 139,s (yo pana bhikkhu sañcaritt~
samapajjeyya itthiya va purisamati~ purisassa va
itthimati~ jayattane va -e va ... sailghadiseso ti; 139,16:
Sp 554,14/oll.: -e ti 0 -bhave, purisassa hi mati~ itthiya
arocento jayattane aroceti, itthiya mati~ purisassa
arocento -e aroceti, api ca purisass' eva mati~ itthiya
arocento jayattane va aroceti nibaddhabhariyabhave, -e
va micchacarabhave; Sp-t [Be] II 327,5 foil.: -e ti
nimittatthe bhumm~ ... o -bhavatthan ti vutta~ hoti ...
-e ti pana niddesassa ubhayaliilgasadharal).atta
purisaliilgavasena pi yojetva attha~ dassento itthiya
adim aha . . . patiy~ pana
itthiliilgavasena yojana kata).
2
jara2, m. [= jara qv], fever; Sp 629,21 (yatha tatiye
catutthe ca divase hotl ti -o tatiyako catutthako ti ca
vuccati, E e so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se jaro).
1
jari,f [from jara ], a Jemal e lover; an adulterous woman;
Abh 238; Vin Il 259,21 (jayayo ima imesa~ -iyo ima
imesam); III 139,16.
jala 1, n.· (and m., and jala 1, f ?) [S. jala, n.], l. a net;
network; a web; Abh 521; 948 (-a~
macchadibandhane); DI 45,3o (dakkho kevano ...
sukhumacchikena -ena paritta~ udakadah~
otthareyya); II 183,7 (eka~ -a~ soval).l).amayam); S 1
48,22* (chetva maccuno -a~); Dhp 347 (saya~kata~
makkatako va -a~); Sn 71 (vato va -amhi asajjamano;
Nidd [Be] II 302,10: dve -a, tal).hajal~ ca dighijala~
ca); Ja I 208,3o (upari -e khitte, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
-~); 209,15' (sammodamana gacchanti -am adaya
pakkhino); II 51,12 (tattha tattha pase e' eva -ani ca
oqqapesi); VI 488,23 (pitthiya~ muttajala~
kañcanajala~ maJ:~ijalan ti til).i -ani); Ap 516,8
(patta~... -ena pidahitvana); Sp 330,12 (maccha~
balisena va -ena va kuminena va hatthena va gal).hati);
Ps III 215,7 (ratanamaJ:~qapamatthake sukhuma-
cchiddaka~ -~ baddh~ ahosi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
jalabandhana~, perhaps wr); Spk II 228,18 (rajun~
uparisote -a~ pasaretva gailgaya ki)antana~); Pj II
115,2 (eko mahamaccho -~ bhetva palayi); Th-a II
129,22 (taJ:~hajalo samuhato ti tal).hasailkhato -o maggena
samugghatito); Ap-a482,19 (kevana ta~ maccha~ -ena
gahetva, Ce so; Be, Se -aya; Ee -a); Sadd 563,17 (jala
apavaral).e: jaleti jalayati -a~); - jala~ in Ee, Se at
Nidd I 90,1 is wr for phala~ (Be, Ce so); - ifc see
inda-, kiilkil).ika- (sv kiilkil).ika), gavakkha- (sv gava\
tal).hii-, pabbata-, bhumma-, sira-; - 2. a (lattice)
jala
window; Abh 216 (-aq1 ca sihapañjaraq1); 948;- 3. a
collection, a multitude; Abh 631; 948 (samühe ca -aq1);
Sadd 536,16*; jala in Ee at Ud-a 57,23
(pañcajaladhajaparivarito) is wr; Be, Se pav¡qadhaja-; Ce
pavala-; - o• -akkhika, n. [jala+ akkhika4], the hale of
a net; Ja I 208,26; - o• -agul}thita, mfn., covered with a
network; ? (see jalahatthapada below); Th-a II 2,10
(--mudutalunadighañgulihatthaq1, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
jalagmHhika-); - 0 -karal}qaka, m. [cfJm p. 176,8,15], a
netted enclosure; Ja II 104,18 (tass' ekadivasaq1
mahanadiyaq1 -e ki)antassa); Dhp-a III 199,14 (senhi
parissayamocanatthaq1 e' eva pamadena galitanaq1
abharaJ.)adinaq1 rakkha!.)atthaql ca -aq1 parikkhipapetva
gailgaya udakaki!af!1 kiji); - 0 -kucchi, m., the inside of
a net; Ja I 427,18; - 0 -khipanakumina, m.pl. [jala +
khipana 1 + kumina], nets, traps and baskets; Sv 789,23
(-' adihi gahitakale; = Ps I 293,9: jalakkhipakuminadihi);
0
- -cchiddaka, n., a hale in a net or network; Sp 620,5
(pupphajalaq1 karontassa ekamekamhi -e dukkataf!l); -
0
-tambanakha, mfn., with a network (of lines ?) and
with copper-coloured nails; ? Vv 81:16 (mudühi paQ.ihi
-ehi ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jali-; Vv-a315,3ofoll.:
jalavantehi abhilohitanakhehi, tena jalahatthataq1
mahapurisalakkhaJ.)aql tambanakhataq1 anuvyañjanaq1
ca dasseti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jalihatthataq1); -
0
-pacchanna, mfn., covered by a net; Th 297
(kamandha -a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -sañchanna; Th-a II
125,32: visattikajalena pakarato channa paliguQ.thita, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se samantato channa; = Ud 76,5•: eds
0
-sañchanna; quoted Nett 36,10•: Be, Ce 0 -sañchanna; Ee
0
-sacchanna); 0
-püva, m., a "lattice-cake";?
Vism 108,4 (nivasanaparupanaq1 antacchinnaq1 olamba-
vilambasuttakakiQ.Q.af!l --sadisaq1; Vism-mht [Be] I
129,15: jalakarena katapüvaq1 -aq1) f. Dhp-a I 319,14
(pubbalohitamakkhitaq1 --sadisaq1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-püpa-); Thüp 251,17 (ghatapakkajalapüve bhattena
saddhiq1 niccaq1 dapesiq1);- 0 -bandhanaip in Ce, Ee
at Ps III 215,7 is prob. wr; Be, Se jalaq1 baddham); -
0
-Va(t) 1, mfn., "netted", marked with a network of
lines; ? Vv-a 315,3o ([paQ.ihi] 0
-vantehi
abhilohitanakhehi, tena jalahatthataq1 mahapurisa-
lakkha!.)af!l tambanakhataq1 anuvyañjanaq1 ca dasseti);
0
- -vatapana, n., a lattice window or shutter; Vin II
148,29 (anujanami bhikkhave tiQ.i vatapanani
vedikavatapanaq1 -aq1 salakavatapanan ti; Sp 1216,14:
-aq1 nama jalakabandhaq1); Mil 55,28 (imesu -esu
ugghatitesu); Mp I 451,10 (-aq1 vivaritva); - o -vicitta,
0
-vicitra, mfn., omamented with a net (of lines ?); Ja VI
561,10' (-a hatthapada, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
kañcanajalavicitta; ad 561 ,3*: hatthapada ca jalino );
Vism 40,6 (-ena hatthena, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -vicitrena);
0
0
- -Saitkhata, mfn. and m., (that) which is called the
net; Th 135 (pahino -o; cfTh-a II 14,8: sattasantanassa
ottharaJ.)ato nissarituq1 appadanato ca -o ti ca
laddhanama dighi avijja ca pahina); Spki l06,1o
(maccuno -aql kilesajalaq1 chinditva); - 0 -hattha, m.
and mfn., l. (m.) a "netted" hand (with a network of
lines ?); Ps II 238,16 (-ehi .. . udakaq1 gahetva);
V v-a 315,3o (--taq1 mahapurisalakkhaJ.)am, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee jalihatthataq1); - 2. (mfn.) with net( s) in hand;
232 jali(n)
Ja I 234,19 (kulasahassaq1 -aq1 .. . macche
pariyesantaq1); - 0
-hatthapada, mfn., with "netted"
hands andfeet, prob. with hands andfeet marked with a
network of lines (one of the 32 marks of a mahapurisa);
D II 17,23 (ayaq1 hi deva kumaro -o; cfSv 446,21 foil.:
na cammena patinaddha-ailgulantaro . . . mahapurisassa
pana catasso hatthailguliyo pañcapadailguliyo
ekappamiil}a honti . . . jalalakkhaQ.aql annamannaq1
pativijjhitva titthati, ath' assa hatthapada kusalena
va<;i<;lhakina yojitajalavatapanasadisa honti; Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se yava lakkhaJ.)aql); M II 136,13 (-o kho pana so
bhavaq1 Gotamo); - sajala, mfn., with lattice-work;
Mp II 238,19 (dvaravatapanani . . . savivaram -am
ahesuq1); -se e also antojalagata, antojallkata (sv anto ),
indajalika (sv inda).
jala2, m., jala\{. [S. jvala, jvala], aflame; Abh 35 (sikha
jalacci); 872; 1102; Ja V 326,27* (adhigat' amha tame
ñaQ.aql -aq1 va jatavedato); Vism622,31 (-a); Ps II
350,28 (yada pan' assa puna -aya attho hoti); IV 235,22
(imesaq1 channaq1 -anaq1 majjhe nibbatto Devadatto );
Dhp-a III 261 ,8 (dhümaq1 va -aq1 va añgaraq1 va
adassetva anto yeva jhapetva); As 316,6 (dipe jalite
kiñcapi -a ekabaddha viya hoti); Mhv 5:221 (-a sarira
nikkhamma . . . <;lahi therassa sakalaq1 kayaq1);
Sadd 563,18 (-a ti aggijala); - ifc se e aggi-, eka-,
pakkhanda-, patutara- (sv patu); - 0 (a)-va(t)2 , mfn.,
possessing aflame; Spk I 133,28 (jalinan ti 0 -Vantaql);-
nijjala, mfn., without flames; Ja V 488,29' (niddhümake
-e aggimhi pakkamaq1saq1 sadhu pakkaq1 nama hoti);
- see also analajalakkhandha (sv anala 1), ekajalikata,
ekajallbhüta (sv eka), jalitaggijalaka (sv jalati\
jalaka, n. [ts; cf BHS jalika], l. a net, network; a web;
Mil407,12 (yadi tattha -e laggati kimi va makkhika va);
Vv-a 167,11 (hemamayena -ena chaditasañre);- ifc see
muttakinkiQ.ika-; - 2. a bud; a collection of buds;
Abh 544 (kharako tu ca -aq1); - 0 -jata, mfn., covered
in small buds; ? A IV 117,14 (devanaq1 tavatüpsanaq1
paricchattako kovilaro pannapalaso hoti . . . -o hoti ...
kharakajato hoti .... , Be so; Ce sannapalaso; Ee, Se
sattapalaso; cfMp IV 58,4: -o ti sañjatapattapupphajalo,
tassa hi pattajalaq1 ca pupphajalaq1 ca sah' eva
nikkhamati; Mp-t [Be] III 193,6: kharakajato ti
jatakhuddakamakujo . . . -o ti tehi yeva khuddaka-
makujehi jatajalako sabbaso jalo viya jato) quoted
Sv 649,11; - 0
-bandha, m., a lattice construction;
Sp 1216,14 (jalavatapanaq1 nama -aq1, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
0
-baddham).
jalana, n. r.irom jaleti2 qv], lighting;- ifc see aggi-, dipa-
(sv dipa 1).
jali(n) 1, mfn., m., and jalini, f, [from jala1; cfS., BHS
jalin], l. (mfn.) (i) having a net, ensnaring (esp. as an
epithet of taJ.)ha); S I 107 ,23* (yassa -ini visattika taJ.)ha
natthi) = Dhp 180 (Dhp-a III 198,4: taQ.ha nam' esa
saq1sibbitapariyonandhananhena jalaq1 assa atthi ti pi
jalakarika ti pi jalüpama ti pi -ini); A II 211,31 (ta!.)haf!1
vo bhikkhave desessami -iniq1 saritaq1 visataf!1
visattikaq1); 213,3 (taJ.)ha -ini, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
-ina); Vism 1,14 (jata ti taJ.)haya -1mya etaq1
adhivacanaq1); - (ii) marked with a network (of
lines ?); D III 153,20* (karacaraJ.)amudutaql ca -in o
 jali(n)
ca ... pa~ilabhati; cf 153,1/oll.: muduta1unahatthapado
ca hoti jalahatthapado ca); Ap 467,2 (-ina cakkankitena
mudukomalapal)ina; Ap-a 494,32: -ina ti jalayuttena);-
2. (m.) one who has a net, a fisherman; Ja II 178,21*
(-in o muñcath' ayira maJT!; 179,4·: kevane alapati, te hi
jalassa atthitaya -in o ti vuccanti); - 3. lf., scil. tal)ha)
the ensnarer, desire; Abh 162; M III 70,28* (Usabh'
acchida -iniJT! dukkhamülaJT!); Th 162 (abbahitvana
-iniJT!); Nidd I 8,16 (tal)ha yo rago . . . sibbini -in!
sarita ... ) f. Dhs 1059 Vibh 361 ,24;
0
(i)-tambanakha, mfn., with a network (of fines ?) and
with copper-coloured nails;? Vv 81:16 (mudühi pal)Ihi
-ehi ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jala-; Vv-a315,3ofoll.:
jalavantehi abhilohitanakhehi, tena ja1ahatthataJT!
mahapurisa1akkhal)aJT! tambanakhataJT! anuvyañjan~
ca dasseti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jalihatthataJT!).
jali(ni, mfn. ffrom jali], possessing flames; S I 69,22*
(pahütabhakkhaJT! -inaJT! pavak~ kal)havattaniJT!
daharo ti navajaneyya).
jalika\ m. [ts], one who uses a net, a fisherman or bird-
catcher; Abh 514; 670 (kevagajalika).
jalika2 , m(fn). [cf S. jalya ?], what is fiable to be caught in
a net; ? Sadd 787,1 (jalena hato -o suttena baddho
suttiko).
jalika, f [ts], chain-mail; Abh 378; Mi1199,w (puriso
sailgamasilro abhejjakavacajalikaJT! sannayhitva); Ja VI
397,17' (in long cpd);- sajalika, mfn., wearing chain-
mail; Sv 157,9 (silra ti ekantasilra ye -a pi samudd~
tarituJT! sakkonti, Ee so; Ce sañjalika pi; Be, Se -a pi
sacammika pi) f. Mp IV 54,25 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a pi
savammika pi).
jaleti 1, jalayati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ja1ayati,
Wg § 32:10], covers; Sadd 563,17 (jala apavaral)e: -eti
-aya ti jalaJT! jala).
jaleti2 , jalayate, caus. 3 sg. ~fjalati 2 qv.
jaseti\ -ayate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jasayati,
Wg § 32:129], hurts; Sadd 566,18 (jasa hiJT!sayaJT!: -eti
-ayati); - see also jasati.
jaseti2 , -ayati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jasayati, Wg § 33:44],
strikes; Sadd 566,27 (jasa ta!ane: ... -e ti -ayati).
ji, mfn. [S. lex. id.], conquering, victorious; - ifc see
sailgama-j-uttama.
jigacchaya and jigacchita in Ee at Pv-a 271,1 are wrrfor
jighacchaya and jighacchita (Be, Ce, Se so).
jigirpsaka, jigisaka, mfn. ffrom jigiJT!sati], who wishes to
gain, desirous of, pursuing; Sn 690 (-o
lakkhal)amantaparagil, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jigisako;
cfPj II 488,6: -o ti jigiJT!santo, magganto pariyesanto
upaparikkhanto ti vuttaJT! hoti, Ce, Ee so; Se -o ti
jigisanto; Be jigisako ti jigisanto ).
jighpsati (so usually Ce, Ee, Se), jigisati (so Be), pr. 3 sg.
[des id. ofjayati; S. jigi~ati; and ofharati? cf S. jihir~ati],
wishes to win or obtain; desires, covets; Vin III 147,21*
(na taJT! yace yassa piy~ -e, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jigise;
cfSp 566,s: -e ti yaJT! assa sattassa piyan ti janeyya, Se
so; Be jigise ti; Ce yassa sattassa piyan ti ... ; E e -eyya ti
yassa sattassa piyan ti ... ) = Ja II 285,20* (Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be jigise); Ja V 372,10* (cittaJT! nu te vipariyattaJT! adu
kiJT! nu -asi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jigisasi); Sv 703,16 (yatha
so buddhamuni amat~ nibban~ -ati pariyesati, Ce,
233 jigucchati
Ee, Se so; Be jigisati); Th-a III 25,14 (jigisati, eds so);
Sadd 822,20 (haritmp icchati -ati); 827,23foll. (gi se
harassa jigisati, jissa ca, jidhatussa jigi-adeso hoti se
paccaye pare vijigisati); - part.pr. (a) jigiJT!sa(t), mfn.,
A III 213,27* (puññatthassa -ato, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
jigisato; Mp III 304,15/oll.: puññena atthikassa puññ~
gavesantassa); Sn 700 (bhikkhacariy~ -ato, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be jigisato; Pj II 491,9: pariyesamanassa); Th 1110
(amataJT! padaqJ. jigisaJT!, eds so); Ja IV 406,23*
(uddhatva cakkhilni mamam -ato, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
jigisato); VI 181,10* (nagaJT! -am anvesi, Ee, Se so; Ce
anveti; Be jigisam); 268,30* (IrandatiqJ. nagakaññaJT!
-~. Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jigisaJT!; 270,7': -an ti
patthayanto); (b)jigiJT!samana, mfn., D III 154,3*
(piyavadu hitasukhataJT! -amano, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
jigisamano); (e) jigiJT!sana, mfn., D II 267,6* (amataJT!
muni -ano, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jig!sano; Sv 703,17: so
amat~ -ano esanto gavesanto vicarati, Ce, Ee so; Se
-amano; Be jig!sano ).
jighpsana, n. ffrom jigiJT!sati], desire to obtain; desire to
conquer; Dhatum 309 (dubha -e, perhaps wr;
cfWg § 26:88: druha jighiiJT!saya); - 0 -ta, f, abstr.,
desire for, covetousness; Vibh 353,10 (katama labhena
labhaJT! -a . . . ya evarilpa amisena amisassa enhi
gaveHhi pariye~~hi esana gavesana pariyesana, Ee, Se so,
perhaps wr; Ce nijigiJT!sanata; Be nijigisanata; quoted
Vism 23,24: Ce, Ee, Se nijigiJT!sanata; Be nijig!sanata);
-see al so jigiJT!sa.
jigirpsa, f [from jigiJT!sati; cf S. jigi~a], desire to conquer;
Dhatup 213 (dubha -ayaq1.; better with vi jighaJT!sayaJT!
? cfWg § 26:88: druha jighiiJT!saya); - see also
jigiJT!sana.
jiguccha, mfn. ffpp (?) from jigucchati; cf S. jugupsya],
disgusting; Ja V 269,3* (jigucchaJT! kul)apaJT! piltiqJ.
duggandhaJT! güthakaddamaJT! pubbalohitasailkas~
rahadam ogayha tinhati, Be, Ce, Se so, but perhaps wr ?;
Ee jighaññ~; 274,2o·: jegucche duggandhe pa~iküle
mahante gilthakalala-ava~e khipanti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
jegucchaduggandhapa~ikkille); Vism 108,15 (dubbal)l)a
duddassika kili!!havasana duggandha -a, Ee so, prob.
wr; Be, Ce, Se jeguccha); Sadd 774,6 (-aJT! ann~
kadannaJT! -~ asan~ kadasanam); - jiguccha- in Ee
at Pv-a 56,3 (jigucchabibhacchadassana) is prob. wr for
jeguccha- (Be, Ce, Se so);- see also jeguccha.
jigucchaka, mfn. ffrom jigucchati], who dislikes or
disapproves of; who spurns or recoils from; - ifc see
apa-, teja- (sv teja[s]), deva-, pa~havi-, papa-, bhilta-
(sv bhavati), vaya- (sv vaya[s]), viññatti-m-anesana-
(sv viññatti).
jigucchati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. jugupsate, desid. of vgup],
shuns, avoids; loathes, detests; is disgusted with or
horrified at (instr. or acc.); Vin I 87,1 (aññataro nago
nagayoniya agiyati harayati -ati); DI 213,23 (imaJT! ...
iddhipa~ihariye adinavaJT! sampassamano iddhi-
pa~ihariyena aWyami harayami -ami); MI 120,1
(manussakul)apena va kal)~he asattena aniyeyya
harayeyya -eyya); A I 115,5 (na nu tumhe ...
agiyeyyatha harayeyyatha -eyyatha ti); IV 174,3o (ahaJT!
hi brallmal)a -ami kayaduccaritena vaciduccaritena
manoduccaritena); Sn 215 (-ati kammehi papakehi; Pj II
jigucchana
266,10: papaldini kammani güthagatarp viya muttagatarp
viya ca -ati, hiriyati ti vuttarp hoti); Th 316 (yarp hi eke
-anti matarp disvana papakarp); 961 (-issanti kasavarp
odatesu samucchita); Ja III 233,15 (mama sarire
pahatavatarp -as! ti); V 139,11' (duss!le yeva hi deva
-anti na sllavante ti); Ap 67,25 (-issanti tarp viññü
asucirp); Mil 222,3o (avasese pabbajite garahanti -anti);
Vism 346,12* (bhuñjati abhinandanto nikkhamento -ati);
Vibh-a 232,18 (yagupatte va bhattapatte va kesaval)l)arp
kiñci disva kesamissakarp idarp haratha nan ti -anti);
Sadd 403,23 (gupa gopanajigucchanesu: gopati -ati);
822,11 (gupa cho nindayarp -ati, nindayarp ti kirp,
gopati); 826,4; 827,2o (vyañjanantassa dhatussa co hoti
chapaccaye pare -ati tikicchati jighacchati); -
part.pr. (a) jiguccha(t), mfn., Nidd I 466,7 (agiyato
harayato -ato); Cp-a 271,11 (labhasakkararp -ato);
Sadd 403,23; (b) jigucchanta, mf( -anti)n., Vin III 68,21
(sakena kayena at¡iyanta harayanta -anta); Th! 469; Ja II
67,19* (jatim assa -anta); Mil 169,26 (garahanto -anta);
Th!-a 28,24 (sa kira attano samikarp -anti); -
neg. ajigucchanta, mfn., Ja II 287,9; Sp 968,1;
(e) jigucchamana, mfn., V in III 24,26 (bhikkhubhavarp
agiyamano harayamano -amano); M III269,11; Ud 23,21
(ay asma N ando .. . upakkitakavadena ca at¡iyamano
harayamano -amano, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -iyamano);
It 43,21 (bhaven' eva .. . agiyamana harayamana
-amana); Th! 468 (chuttho kaliilgararp vi ya -amanehi
ñatihi); Ja IV 33,w•; Sadd 403,23; neg.
ajigucchamana, mfn., Mil395,4; - aor. 3 sg. jigucchi,
Sp 165,25 (itaro tarp -i aticchato vatayarp mahallako);-
absol. (a) jigucchitva, MI 419,29; Ja V 442,18' (dh! dh!
pisaci ti -itva); Sv 244,27 (matukucchivasarp -itva);
Sadd 403,24; neg. ajigucchitva, Ja I 422,2o;
(b) jigucchiya, Bv 2:19 (yatha pi kul)aparp puriso kaJ.!the
baddharp -iya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -iyarp) = Ja I 5,24* (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se -iyarp); pass. part.pr.
jigucchiyamana, mfn., Ja I 206,28 (manussehi
-iyamano); Sv 260,32 (Baral)asiraja kuttharogi orodhehi
ca natakehi ca -iyamano);- pp jigucchita, mfn. and n.
[cfS, jugupsita], l. (mfn.) disliked, detested; Th 621 (-o
manussanarp paribhüto ca vambhito); Sp 738,31 (h!Jitan
ti -arp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jegucchitarp); Mhv 6:3 (devena
deviya capi ... -a); - 2. (n.) avoidance; abstention;
Sn 901 (tamüpanissaya -arp va atha va pi digharp va
sutarp mutarp va, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tapüpanissaya; Pj II
558,31: te -arp amarataparp va dighasuddhi-adisu va
aññatararp va upanissaya); - fpp jigucchitabba, mfn.
and n. impers., MI 419,28 (evarüpe te Rahula
manokamme agiyitabbarp harayitabbarp -arp); A 1 126,7
(atthi bhikkhave puggalo -o na sevitabbo na bhajitabbo
na payimpasitabbo); Pp 36,7 (katamo puggalo -o ... );
Th-a 11 46,7 (--taya); - neg. ajigucchitabba, mfn.,
Th-a Ill 86,32; - see also jigucchanlya, jeguccha,
jegucchi(n).
jigucchana, n. [cf S., BHS jugupsana], dislike, disgust;
avoidance, recoiling from; Abh 1200; Dhatum !55 (Jac,li
-e); Vism 159,17 (virago nama vuttappakaraya pltiya
-arp va samatikkamo va); 464,33 (papato o -lakkhal)a
hiri); Mp II 242,18 (evarp -arp na patirüparp bhaveyya);
Sadd 403,23 (gupa gopanajigucchanesu);
234 jighaccha
ajigucchana, n., a la ek of disgust; not recoiling from;
Vism 468,2o (ahirikarp kayaduccaritad!hi --lakkhal)arp
alajjalakkhal)arp va).
jigucchaniya, jigucchaneyya, mfn. [from jigucchana or
fpp of jigucchati; cf S. jugupsanlya], to be avoided;
loathsome, disgusting, detestable; Ja VI 64,s·
(adhammaladdharp pana sahassagghanakarp pi -am
eva); Sp 209,23 (imarp -arp abhidosikarp kummasarp ...
paribhuñjissasi ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jigucchaneyyarp) =
Ps III 297,23 (eds jigucchaneyyarp); Sp 221,13 ( 0 -tta);
1259,2o (so bhikkhu bhikkhühi -o assa, Be, Ee so; Se
jigucchaniyo; Ce tarp bhikkhü jigucchanti); Mp II 220,9
(kacavararp va chac,lc,lapenti aññarp va pana -arp
kammarp karenti, Se so; Be, Ce 0 -kammarp; Ee
jigucchaniyakammarp); Pj II 77,31 (-o matugamo; =
Ap-a 162,26: jeguccho); Th-a II 246,2 (0 -taya); - see
also jeguccha, jegucchanlya, jegucchiya.
jigucchii, f [cf S. jugupsa], disgust for, detestation;
avoidance, shunning; scrupulousness; Abh 121 (-a
garaha); Ja I 13!,13' (sitalassa güthamakkhitassa -aya
agal)hanarp viya); Vism 108,2 (yarp olokentass' eva -a
uppajjati); Sv 359,17 (tapa ti ti tapo ... tad eva te kilese
jigucchatl ti -a); Mp II 241,27 (asucirp vi ya disva -arp
uppadeti); Th-a III 139,15 (therassa tarp ajjhoharantassa
-a na uppajji); Sadd 558,32 (yu -ayarp);- ifc see tapo-
(sv tapa[s]).
jighaqtsii, f [S. jigharpsa], the desire to strike or kili;
malice; Dhatup 213 (dubha -ayarp, so read with vlfor
E e jigirpsayarp ? cf Wg § 26:88: dmha jigharpsaya).
jighacchati, pr. 3 sg. [des id. of ghasati 1; S. jighatsati], has
a desire to eat; is hungry; Sadd 822,2o (ghasiturp icchati
-ati); 826,15 (abbhase vattamano kavaggo cavaggattarp
apajjati cikicchati -ati); 827,20 (vyañjanantassa dhatussa
co hoti chapaccaye pare . . . -ati); - part.pr.
jighaccha(t), mfn., D II 266,1* (aturass' eva bhesajjarp
bhojanarp va -ato); - pp jighacchita, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) [BHS jighatsita] hungry; wanting to eat;
Abh 7 56 (-o tu khudito ); M I 30,32 (-anarp pi na
bhottukamyata assa); Ja IV 64,27' (aharp aññesarp datva
sayarp -o ca pipasito ca bhavissaml ti); Ap 320,15
(pipasito va udakarp bhojanarp va -o, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
jigacchito; Se jigacchato ); Mil358,2o (-assa vi ya
paJ.!Itabhojanarp); PsI 94,16 (keci -a pi na dubbala honti
sakkonti jighaccharp sahiturp); Dhp-all 145,5 (-ena
paribhutto aharo tassa khudarp patihanitva sukharp
vedanarp aharati); Nidd-a I 13,12 (-aya mppanarp
pettivisaye e' eva dubbhikkhakale ca pakatam); -
atijighacchita, mfn., very hungry; Ja VI 258,11'
(atijighacchito pi, Ce. Ee so; Be atijighacchapl~ito pi; Se
jighacchaya pi\ito pi); - 2. (n.) hunger; Ps IIl 272,19
(daraka te -arp sandhareturp na sakkonti ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se jighacchataya SaJ.lthareturp).
jighacchii, f [S. jighatsa; cf AMg digirpcha], hunger;
Abh 468 (khuda -a); Vin 1 18,21 (ünavlsativasso
bhikkhave puggalo akkhamo hoti sltassa Ul)hassa -aya
pipasaya) f. A II 117,33 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dighacchaya,
poss. wr); SI 18,19' (-a ca pipasa ca yassa bhayati
macchañ) = Ja IV 64,23* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dighaccha,
poss. wr); Ja II 445,28* (kirp -aya mlyasi); Mil 302,29*
(-aya pipasaya . . . akale tattha mlyati); Vism 32,23
jighañña
(vihimsa nama -a abadhaghena); Mp III 55,1 (-aya
pa~ivinodana111 idaJ11 ettha nissaral).an ti evaJ11
paribhuñjanaJ11 paribhogasantoso nama, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se jigucchaya); Dhp-a III 264,3 (-aya samo rogo natthi,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee jighacchasamo); Pv-a 271,1(cirakalaJ11
-aya jighacchita ahare giddha abhigijjhanta hutva, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr jigacchaya jigacchita);
0
-dubbalyapativinodana, n., the dispeiling ofweakness
from hunger; Mil 320,20.
jighañña, mfn. [S. jaghanya], last; lowest; inferior;
Abh 715 (-aJ11 carimaJ11); 1069 (-o 'ntadhamesu ca);
Ja V 24,4* (ta111 khadiyana pasadaJ11 -a111 khadissa111
paccha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dighaññaJ11, prob. wr; cf24,s·:
-an ti ghasitukamo 'smi); 402,13' (0 -namavhayanan ti
apara ti ca pacchima ti ca eva111 -ena lamakena namena
vuccamana111 disa111 pati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dighañña-,
dighaññena, prob. wrr); 403,30* (0 -rattiJ11 arunasmi
ilhate, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dighañña-, prob. wr; 404,7·:
pacchimarattiJ11, rattipariyosane ti attho;
cf S. jaghanyaratre).
jiñjuka, m., the guñja shrub, Abrus precatorius L.;
Abh 585 (-o e' eva guñja); Ja IV 333,12 (dve akkhini
0
-phalasadisani); V 156,3* (0 -phalasannibha ... netta);
Ap 426,19 (netta gopakhuma tesa111 °-phalasannibha);
Dhp-a I 177,12 (ghanajato 0 -gumbo).
jil;ll}a, mfn.,pp ofjarati 1 qv.
jiJ;tl}aka, mfn. and m. [jii,1l).a + ka2 ; S. jifl).aka], old; rather
old; an old man; Abh 254; A III 103,16 (yenahaJ11
dharnmena samannagato -o pi phasu viharissami ti);
Sn 98 (yo matara111 va pitararp va -am gatayobbana111 ...
na bharati); Ja V 433,11 (0 -ta); VI 522,11* (taJ11 ca
dukkha111 ca tippaJ11 ca yaJ11 passe -aJ11 patiJ11); Nidd I
88,24 (-o ti va vyadhito ti va mato ti va ... ); Spk I 318,23
(kulapa~ipatiya ekamekaJ11 -arp pesema, so pakatiya pi
maccupathe vattatl ti); Th-a I 136,23 (manussehi
chaqgita111 -aJ11 asandirp labhitva); Mhv 35:88
(catusalaJ11 ca -a111 pa~isankhari); Saddh 299 (vajjitva
-arn salarn).
jita\.mjn., ~p ofjayati qv.
jita2 , mfn., pp ofjinati 2 qv.
jiti.f [ts], victory; Abh 761 Gayo jayanarp-i).
jiteyya in Ee at Spk I 154,28 is wr for jineyya (Be, Ce, Se
so).
jina 1, m. [ts], the victor, the conqueror (a designation, in
ascetic sects, of an enlightened person [esp. or solely
the founder or leader of the sect ?], involving often
ideas of omniscience, cfjina3); Pv 38:33 (-o sabbaJ11
pajanati samiljha itara paja, evaJ11dinhi pure asi111 ...
micchadighi ca dussllo; Pv-a 254,29 foil.: o -bhilmiyarp
thito kevalarp pajanati sa111sarassa sarnatikkantatta); -
ifc see loka-;- for Buddhists a designation usuaily only
of a buddha; rarely of a paccekabuddha (cf Sadd 496,9:
'-saddo hi kevalo sabbaññumhi pavattati, sopapado pana
paccekabuddhadisu); Abh 4; V in I 8,29* Gita me papaka
dharnma tasma 'ham Upaka -o); D Ili 197,23* (-a111
vandatha Gotamarp); Th 477 (pabbajetvana maJ11 sattha
viharaJ11 pavisi -o); 722 (sabbaññü sabbadassavi -o
acariyo mama); Ja I 214,11* (saritva pubbake -e);
Ap 14,1 (paccekabuddhehi -ehi vutta gatha;
Ap-a 206,6 foil.: kilese jinanti jinirpsü ti -a, tehi -ehi
235 jinati
paccekabuddhehi vutta); 70,23 (Padumuttaro -o
sabbadharnmana paragü; Ap-a 344,16: -o jitapañcamaro
bhagava); 529,25 (-assa matuccha Mahagotami
bhikkhuni); Bv 2:109 (advejjhavacana buddha amogha-
vacana -a); Kv 560,19 (-o sattha sammasambuddho);
Nett 177,29 (katha111 -o kena -o ti vissajjaniyaJ11, katamo
-o ti avissajjaniyaJ11); Mi1341 ,23* (asailkhataJ11 ca
amata111 atthi sabbapaJJe -e); Mhv 2:22
(Suddhodanamaharañño putto Mayaya no -o);
Sadd 496,4 (ajini ti -o sabbaññü dhammaraja); 850,14 (ji
ice etaya dhatuya inapaccayo hoti sabbakale kattari
papake akusale dhamme jinati ajini jinissatl ti -o);- ifc
see odhi-; - jino in Ee at Ja Ili 105,19* is prob.wr for
jito (Be, Ce, Se so);- 0 -aipsumiili(n), m., the sun who
is the Buddha; Jinak 1,5* (vande -irp); - 0 -bhümi,f,
the stage of the enlightened; (or of one who knows; ? se e
jina3 below; cf also A.L. Basham, 1951, p. 246);
Sv 162,29foil. ( ... sekhabhümi samal).abhümi -i
pannabhümi ti ima a~~apurisabhumiyo atthi ti vadati ...
acariyarp sevitva jananakale -i nama, bhikkhu ca
pannako jino na kiñci aha ti evaJ11 alabhiJ11 sarnaJJarp
pannabhümi ti vadati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee acariya111
sevitva sevitva vijananakalo; Sv-p~ I 290,27 foil.: tattha
pannako bhikkhaya vicaraJJako, tesarp va pa~ipattiyarp
pa~ipannako. jino ti jil).l).O jaravasena hinadhatuko, attano
va pa~ipattiya pa~ipakkhe jinitva ~hito, so kira tathabhüto
dharnma111 pi kassaci na katheti; ad DI 53,24foll.:
Makkhali Gosalo ma111 etad avoca . . . aqha
purisabhümiyo) = Ps III 230,16foil. = Spk 11 343,11 foil.;
Pv-a 254,29 (jino sabba111 pajanati -iyarp ~hito kevalarp
pajanati sa111sarassa samatikkantatta).
2
jina2 , mfn. [pp of jayati, or = jina qv sv jinati ?] beaten,
conque red; or deprived (of property ); V in III 220,36 (yo
paccha agacchati paññaSaJ11 baddho ti . . . kissa tVaJ11
ayyo paccha agato paññasaJ11 -o si ti, Ee, Se so, perhaps
wr; Be jino si ti; Ce jito si ti; Sp 672,14: -o si ti jito asi,
Ce so; Be jino si ti jito si; Ee jito si ti jito asi; Se -o si ti
jito si); D III 183,17 (jaya111 vera111 pasavati, -o vitta111
anusocati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce jito; Sv 946,31: -o ti aññena
jito samano ya111 tena ... vittaJ11 gahitaJ11 ta111 anusocati,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce jito ti); Ja VI 544,29* (-o dhanarp ca
dase ca, Be, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce jino; Se chinno)
quoted Sadd 496,14 (jino ); Thi 419 (-a 'mhase rilpiniJ11
lakkhirp, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be jita; Ce jit' amhase;
Thi-a 247,1: jita vat' amha rilpavatirp sirirp); - ifc see
jaya-.
jina3 , mfn. [S. jña ?], knowing; knowledgeable; - ifc see
odhi-, khetta-, magga-.
jinana, n. (and mfn.) [S. jinana, n.], winning, conquering;
Ap-a 485,26 (daharakalato paghaya sabbasailgamesu
-ato ... Vijayo nama raja ahosi ti);- 0 -riija(n), m., the
winning king, the king who conque red; ? Ja III 7 ,5· (ice
eva te bhasitan ti evaJ11 taya kü~atapasa lañcaJ11 gahetva
parajinakarajanaJ11 jinissati -anaJ11 ca parajissati ti
bhasitaJ11, Be so; Se jinakarajanaJ11 ca; Ce parajjana-
rajanaJ11 ... -aJ11 parajjissatl ti; E e parajjhanarajana111 ...
-a111 ca parajjhissatl ti).
jiniiti\ see sv jayati.
jinate, pr. 3 sg. [S. jinati, Jjya], oppresses; deprives
someone of property, confiscates someone 's property;
jinnaip
fines; A IV 151,12* (yo na hanti na ghateti na -ati na
japaye; Mp IV 71,7: na attana parassa janiq¡ karoti) =
It 22,3* (It-a I 95,10 foil.: sarambhaviggahikakatha di-
vasena na kiñci -ati sarambhass' eva abhavato
janikara!_lavasena va agakaral).adina na kiñci -ati) =
Ja IV 71 ,24* (72,4·: dhanajaniq¡ na karoti, Be Ce, Ee so;
Se dhanahaniq¡) quoted Mil402,8*; Sadd 496,13 GI
janiyaq¡: -a ti, na -ati na japaye jino ... ); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. jiyati3 , jiyyati2, [S. jiyate], is oppressed; is
deprived oj; loses (acc. or abl.linstr.); M III 170,8
(akkhadhutto pa~hamen' eva kaliggahena puttaq¡ pi
-etha daraq¡ pi -etha sabbasapateyyaq¡ pi -etha; or
jiyati 1 ?); Sn 950 (sa ve loke na -ati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
jiyyati; Pj II 568,31 foil.: janiq¡ nadhigacchati); Th 247
(tattha kiq¡ jiyyate muni; or jiyati2 ? Th-a II 100,3o: ka
tassa han! ti attho); Ja II 75,22* (appena bahuq¡ jiyyama,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jeyyama; 75,2sfoll.: appakassa atthassa
karal).a bahuka attha parihayama); III 336,1o* (dhana pi
tattha -anti rajakoso ca va<;l<;lhati; 336,15': tattha te
vivadapanna dhanato pi -anti attano santaka
parihayanti); V 100,6• (raghe vilumpamanamhi
sabbabhogehi -asi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se jiyyasi); 269,9*
(cakkhuma pi hi cakkhühi tena gandhena -ati, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se jiyyati); VI 150,24' (Candaq¡ amma tuvaq¡ -ase
puttaq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jiyyase); 556,20* (ubhayen' eva
-etha patiq¡ putte ca lakkhaJ_la, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
jiyyetha); Spk I 317,23 (svahaq¡ bhavantaq¡ pi -eyyan ti
na muñci, Be, Se so; Ce jiyyeyyan ti; Ee svahaq¡
bhavaq¡ taq¡ pi jiyeyyaq¡ khadanan ti, prob. wr); Th-a II
195,18 (bhogehi na -ama); - aor. 2 sg. jiyi, Ja IV
107,21* (ma taq¡ ratiq¡ -i tuvaq¡);- pp (a) jina, mfn.
(and n. ?) [cf S. lex. jlna], l. (mfn.) deprived of; who has
lost (something, usually acc. ); Vin III 220,36 (yo paccha
agacchati paññasaq¡ baddho ti . . . kissa tvaq¡ ayyo
paccha agato paññasaq¡ -o si ti, Be so; Ee, Se jino si ti;
Ce jito si ti; Sp 672,14: -o si ti jito si, Be so; Ce jino si ti
jito asi; Ee jito si ti jito asi; Se jino si ti jito si); S I 123,2*
(vittaq¡ nu -o uda patthayano, Be so; Ce jito; Ee jii).I).O;
Se jinno; Spk I 185,19: sataq¡ va sahassaq¡ va jito si nu,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e -o si nu); Ja III 335,28* (-a udda
vivadena; 336,s·: dve [udda] pi vivaden' eva imaq¡
macchaq¡ -a); V 99,27* (bahü hi khattiya -a atthaq¡
raghaq¡ pamadino, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jil).l).a); 401,7*
(val).ija ... navaq¡ samaruyha paren ti al).l).ave te tattha
sidanti ... -a dhana en ti vinaghapabhata, so read ? Be,
Ce, Ee jinadhana; Se jinadhana; cf401,24': jinadhana ti
jinadhana, Be, Ce so; Ee jinadhana ti jinadhana; Se
jinadhana ti jinadhana); VI 544,29* (-o dhanaq¡ ca das e
ca, Ce so; Be, Ee jino; Se chinno) quoted Sadd 496,14
(-o); Ap 577,16 Givitenalam atthu me -aya patiputtehi
vu<;l<;lhaya pi varakiya, Ee so; Se jinaya; Be, Ce cattaya);
It-a II 115,5 (parihino ti -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr jano);
- 2. (n.) loss, deprivation; ? Ja V 343,13* (tuly' asma
vayasa ubho na te 1abhena jinatthi etena nimina tuvaq¡,
Ce, Ee so; Be jivatthi; Se jinatthi);- pp (b)jita 2 , mfn.
[cf S. jita; or to jiyati 1 qv sv jayati], who has lost
something (usually acc.); fined; Ja V 428,27' (itaro
sahassaq¡ -o, Be, Ce so; Se sahassena; Ee sahassajito);
Sp 553,26 (abbhutaq¡ akaq¡sü ti yadi karissati tvaq¡
ettakaq¡ -o yadi na karissati ahaq¡ ettakan ti); 672,11
236 jimha
(paññasaq¡ -o hoti paññasaq¡ dapetabbo ti adhippayo);
Ps IV 214,4 (yasma bahuq¡ -o); Mp I 425,2 (ahaq¡
bhatika darakehi saddhim kílanto ettakam nama -o);-
fpp neg. ajeyya3, mfn. [~f S. ajyeyatÚ not to be
oppressed; not to be deprived; not subject to loss; ~
A IV 7,15* (yassa ete dhana atthi ... sa ve mahaddhano
1oke ajeyyo devamanuse); Sn 288 (avajjha brahma!_la
asuq¡ ajeyya dhammarakkhita; or ajeyya 1 qv sv jayati;
Pj II 315,27: vihiq¡situq¡ pi anabhibhavaniyatta ajeyya);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) japeti3 , japayate, confiscates; has
someone's property confiscated, has someonefined; MI
231,3 (vatteyya rañño ... vaso ghatetayaq¡ va ghatetuq¡
japetayaq¡ va -etuq¡ pabbajetayaq¡ va pabbajetuq¡; Ps II
277,1 foil.: dhanajanirahaq¡ japetabbayuttaq¡ -etuq¡
niddhanaq¡ katuq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jil).l).adhanaq¡
katuq¡); II 88,12 (ghateyyama va... -eyyama va
pabbajeyyama va); A I 252,2 (orabbhiko va
urabbhaghatakova . . . urabbhaq¡ . . . pahoti hantuq¡ va
bandhituq¡ va -etuq¡ va yathapaccayaq¡ va katuq¡, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se jhapetuq¡; ? Mp II 361 ,2s: -etuq¡ va ti
dhanajaniya -etuq¡. jhapetuq¡ va ti pi pa~ho, ayam ev'
attho, eds so); IV 151, 12* (na jinati na -ay e; Mp IV 71,8:
na parena parassa janiq¡ kareti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee karoti)
= It22,3* = JaiV 71,24* quoted Mi1402,8*; Mil227,14
(raja nama al).arp vitikkamantaq¡ vigarahati -eti
dhaq¡seti, Ce, Ee so; Be jhapeti; Se omits); - neg.
part.pr. ajapaya(t), mfn., SI 116,19 (sakka nu kho rajjaq¡
karetuq¡ ahanaq¡ aghatayaq¡ ajinaq¡ ajapayaq¡ asocaq¡
asocapayaq¡ dhammena ti; Spk I 180,29: ajinaq¡ ajapayan
ti parassa dhanajaniq¡ akarontena akarapentena) f.
Dhp-aiV 32,w;- fpp(a)japetaya,mfn., MI 231,3
(vatteyya rañño ... vaso ... -ayaq¡ va -etuq¡) f. II 122,1;
(b) japetabba, mfn., Ps II 277,1 ( -etabbayuttaq¡);
III 353,22 (-etabbayuttakaq¡); caus. pr. 3 sg.
(b) jinapeti, makes someone lose, be deprived; ?;
Th-a III 25,10 (pare saq¡ abhijigisati ti paresaq¡ santakaq¡
aharituq¡ icchati, pare va sabbatha hapeti jinapeti); -
se e also janituq¡2.
jinnaip in Ee at Sp 767,10 is wr for chinnaq¡ (Be, Ce, Se
so).
jimutta, see sv jimüta.
jimha, mfn. (and n. ?) [S. jihma], oblique; slanting; not
straight, not on the right line; dishonest, false; (what is
not straight; ?) Abh 709; Vin V 161,36 (-aq¡ pekkhati;
Sp 1363,2: dosam eva gavesati); M I 31,36 (ah o vatayaq¡
Samiti yanakaraputto imissa nemiya imaq¡ ca vañkaq¡
imaq¡ ca -aq¡ imaq¡ ca dosaq¡ taccheyya; Ps I 151,28:
-aq¡ nama sappagatamaggasadisaq¡); A V 289,4foll.
(tassa -aq¡ kayakammaq¡ hoti -aq¡ vacikammaq¡ -aq¡
manokammaq¡ -a gati jimhupapatti); Ja III 111,17*
(gavaq¡ ce taramananaq¡ -aq¡ gacchati puil.gavo );
VI 66,11* (usukaro ekaq¡ ca cakkhu niggayha -am ekena
pekkhati); Vibh 359,3o (0 -ta vañkata ku~i1ata ayaq¡
vuccati anajjavo; Vibh-a 494,18: 0 -ta ti candavañkata);
Ps III 7,18 Gimheyyani ti 0 -ttani); Sadd 323,22* (vakkaq¡
ca ku~i1aq¡ -aq¡ ca); - 0 -manasa, mfn., intriguing,
deceitful; Mhv 37:32 (kuhane -e); - ajimha, mfn., not
oblique; straight; honest; Abh 708 (-o pagui).O uju);
Dhs 50 (ujuta ujukata --ta availkata aku~i1ata);
Mi1105,2s (-assa avañkassa aku~i1assa); Vism 219,1.
jimheyya
jimheyya, n. ffrom jimha], the not being straight; deceit,
fraud; M I 340,28 (sabbani tani sa!heyyani kü!eyyani
vailkeyyani -ani patukarissati); A IV 189,2 (kü!eyyani
-ani vailkeyyani; Mp IV 103,21: -eyyanl ti jimhabhavo,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jimhabhava); V 167,2.
jiya, absol. ofjayati qv.
jiya, jya, f [S. jya], a bowstring; Abh 388 (guJ.lo -a jya);
787 (gUJ.lO ... -aya ca); D II 334,2o (imaf!l purisaf!l ...
-aya anassasakaf!l maretva); MI 429,21 (na tavahaf!l
imaf!1 sal1af!1 aharissami yava na taf!1 -af!l janami yay'
amhi viddho yadi va akkassa yadi va SaJ.!!hassa yadi va
naharussa yadi va maruvaya yadi va khlrapaJ.!J.!ino ti);
Ja II 114,22* (chinna pi -a sandhiyyate puna); III 323,2
(dhanuggaho taf!1 vijjhitva asani viya -af!1 po!hesi);
Vism 150,12 (akkantapadilnaf!l ca dhanudaJ.!<)assa ca
-aya ca sarassa ca akliraf!l pariggaJ.lheyya); As 90,3 (yo
migaVaf!l gamissam! ti dhanUf!l sajjeti -af!1 vaneti Sattif!l
niseti ... ); - 0 -kara, jiyakara, jiyakaraka, m. Uiya +
kara 1], a bowstring-maker; Jaii 115,4· (-esu ca
manussesu vijjamanesu, Ce so; Ee jiyakaresu; Be, Se
jiyakarakesu); Mi1331,lo ( ... dhanukara jiyakara
usukara ... );- see also nijjiyadhanu, sajiyadhanu.
jiyyati\ se e sv jarati 1.
jiyyate, pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjinati 2 qv.
jinyati, caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjarati 1 qv.
jiruJ].iiti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jiriJ.!oti, Wg § 27:31],
injures; Sadd 495,5 (jiri ... hif!1sayaf!1: ... -ati).
jivha, f [S. jihva], the tongue; the organ of taste; Vin I
34,24 (-a aditta rasa aditta); DI 106,14 (keva1af!1 pi
na1a!amaJ.l<)a1af!1 -aya chadesi); III 226,5 (-aya rasaf!1
sayitva); MI 109,1 (s!saf!l okampetva -af!1 nilla!etva);
SI 116,1 (tav' eva papima -a tava rasa tava
jivhasampahassaviññaJ.!ayatanaf!1); A IV 131,28 (tattaf!l
1ohagu!af!1 . . . oghaf!1 pi daheyya mukhaf!l pi daheyya
-af!1 pi daheyya); Dhp 65 (khippaf!l dhammaf!l vijanati
-a süparasaf!1 yatha); Sn 673 (-af!1 ba!isena gahetva);
716 (-aya taluf!1 ahacca); Ja II 306,18 (-af!l chinditva);
III 458,21 * (-a tassa dvidha hoti uragasseva); V 282,27
(taf!l suvaJ.lJ.larüpakaf!l -aya avaJ.lJ.laniyasobhaf!1 ahosi);
Nidd I 233,19 (-ato rasataJ.!ha [savati]); Mi164,16
(sabbaf!l 1oJ.laf!1 -aya vijanatl ti); Vism 444,2
(upadarüpaf!l catuvlsatividhaf!l cakkhu sotaf!1 ghanaf!1
-a kayo ... ); 481,17 (jlvitaf!l avhayatl ti -a); Pv-a 198,10
(attano -aya pade 1ihif!1su, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
jlvhaya); Sadd 198,3*;- 0 '-agga, n. Uivha + agga 1], the
tip of the tongue; A III 109,5 (-ena rasaggani
pariyesamana); Ja V 269,27* (tassa vailkena -af!1
nibbahanti sabandhanam); 293,4 (tato thokaf!l -e
~apesi); Vism 344,13; Dhp-a II 33,12; Sadd 609,9; -
o• -ayatana, n., the sphere of perception, the sense-
organ that is the tongue; D III 243,15 (cha ajjhattikani
ayatanani cakkhayatanaf!l . . . -af!1 ... ); Dhs 609
(katamaf!1 taf!1 rüpaf!1 -am); Vism481,7;
o• -indriya, n., the sense-faculty that is the tongue; D III
239,11 (pañc' indriyani, cakkhundriyaf!l . . . -af!1 ... );
Dhs 609; 972; Vism 491,7;- 0 0pagga, n., the part near
the end of the tongue; Sadd 609,s (-af!l muddhajilnaf!l
[karaJ.!af!1]);- 0 -dvara, n., the access that is the tongue
(as sense-organ); Nidd I 130,26; Vism 624,17; Sv 915,s
(rasarammaJ.laf!l -e apathaf!1 agacchati); - 0 -dhatu,f,
237 jiraka
the constituent element that is the tongue (as sense-
organ); M III 62,13 (-u rasadhatu jivhaviññaJ.!adhatu);
Dhs612; Vibh88,13; Vism484,3o; Spkii 131,14
(jivhapasado -u); - 0 -niccharakaip, ind., sticking out
the tongue; Vin II 214,23 (na -af!1 bhuñjitabbaf!1);
IV 197,4 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü -af!1 bhuñjanti;
...... Sp 893,27 foll.: jivhaf!l niccharetva niccharetva); -
0
-nittaddana, n., (according to ct) paralysing the
tongue by means of a spell; (or splitting the tongue; ?
cf AV 19:32:4: jivhlif!l ni qnadmi); DI 11,19 (miccha-
jlvena jlvikaf!l kappenti seyyathidaf!l . . . -af!1, Ee so,
0
perhaps wr; Ce -nitthambhanaf!1; Be, Se
0
-nibandhanaf!1; Sv 96,29: -an ti mantena jivhaya
thaddhakaraJ.laf!1, Ee so; Ce 0 -nitthaddhanan ti; Be, Se
0
-nibandhanan ti... jivhaya bandhakaraJ.laf!1);
o -ninnamana, n., putting out the tongue; Ja l 163,21·; -
o -pasada, m., the tranquillity ( resulting in sensitivity) of
the sense-organ that is the tongue; the receptive power
of the sense-organ that is the tongue; Spk II 131,13;-
0
-mathana, n., shaking or lolling the tongue;
Sadd 356,29 (la<)i -e); - 0 -viññeyya, mfn., cognisable
by the sense-organ that is the tongue; V in I 184,23 (-a
rasa); D II 281,17; M II 42,34; S IV 161,23; Mil64,13;-
ajivhata,f, abstr., the being without a tongue; Ja VI
16,27* (na badhiro asotata nahaf!l -a mügo; 17,1s·:
samparivattanajivhaya abhavena mügo p' ahaf!1 na
bhavami); 295,16' (yatha maccho -aya na katheti); -
ajivhava(t), mfn., not having a tongue, without a
tongue; Ja VI 295,11* (capo v' ünudaro assa maccho
v' assa ajivhava, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ajivhata; 295,17·:
yatha maccho ajivhataya na katheti tatha
mandakathataya ajivhava bhaveyya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
ajivhata bhaveyya); - see also dvijivha (sv dvi),
nilla1itajivha (sv nillaleti), pahütajivha.
jina, mfn., pp ofjinati2 qv.
jinituip in Ee at Spk I 168,15 is wr for jinituf!1( Be, Ce, Se
so).
jimüta, m. [ts], l. a cloud; Abh 47 (dharadharo ca -o);
Sadd 407,23* (megho va1ahako 1ailghl -o); 877,2
(jivanassa müto -o); - 2. the name of a plant; SAF:
bristly luffa, Luffa echinata Roxb.; Abh 578 (devata<)o tu
-o); Ap 468,24 (passath' etaf!1 mahamattaf!1 ... 0 -VaJ.lJ.laf!1
plnaf!1Saf!1 pasannanayanilnanaf!1, Be, Ce so; Ee jimutta-;
Se jümuttaVaJ.!J.laf!1 ruciraf!1; Ap-a 503,3o: o -VaJ.lJ.lan ti
muttaphalasamanavaJ.!J.laf!1 sundarasañra-ppabhan ti
attho, Be, Se so; Ce muttaVaJ.!J.lan ti; Ee jimuttaVaJ.!J.lan
ti).
jiyati\ pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjayati qv.
jiyati2 , see sv jarati 1.
jiyati3 , pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjinati 2 qv.
jiyanaka, mfn. ffrom jlyati2], growing old; who grows old;
Ps II 405,10 (imasmif!1 !hane koci jayanako va -o va
mlyanako va cavanako va upapajjanako van' atth! ti, Be
so; Se jiyyanako; Ce, E e omit-o va) = Spk I 208,14.
1
jiraka\ mfn. ffromj!rati ], growing old;- see ajlraka 1.
jiraka , m.(?) ffrom jlrati 1], digesting, digestion; - see
2
ajlraka2.
jiraka3, m.n. [ts], cumin-seed; Ja I 244,1 (addasiri.giveraf!1
1oJ.lajlrakaya kogetva); Mi163,16 (südo yüsaf!1 va rasaf!1
va kareyya so tattha dadhif!l pi pakkhipeyya ... -af!1 pi
 238
pakkhipeyya); Spk II1 26,2 (tittire adaya parisodhetva
o• -adihi vasetva ailgaresu supakke pacitva); Mp lii 253,7
' -adisambharehi yojetva).
0
( nikkhamanta111 passeyyama ti); SI 206,7* (rüpllJ!1 na -an
1
jiral}.a , n. ffrom jirati 1], growing old; decaying; wearing
out; Abh 763 (-e jani); Ja I 8,3o (paribhogena 0 -bhavo);
Vism 527,25 (-llJ!1 jara); Ps II 170,14 (-ato); Dhatup 252
(jara -e); Dhatum 356; - 0 -tii,f, abstr., the state of
being decayed or aged, old age, decay, decrepitude; M I
49,21 (ya tesa111 tesa111 sattana111 tamhi tarnhi sattanikaye
jara -a khal).<;licca111 pa1iccllJ!1 ... ) = S II 2,29; Dhs 644
(rüpassa jara -a khai).<;liccllJ!1 palicca111 ... ); Pv-a 149,9
(jarajiral).ataya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se jarajiJ]J]ataya); -
ajiraJ}.a, n., freedom from growing old, from decay;
Spk I 93,9 (ajarasa ti -ena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajarena,
prob. wr).
jiral}.a2 , n. [from jirati 3], growing, increasing; Sadd 422,32
(jira brühane: briihana111 va<;l<;lhanam, jirati ... -am).
jiral}.aka, mfn. [from j1reti qv sv jarati 1], making old;
wearing out, consuming; Mp 11 332,22 (ki1ese
0
-pa~ipadaya ki1ese va nijj!raJ]ato nijjaraya, Se so; Be
kilesajiral).akapa~ipadaya; Ce, E e kilese jaral).akapatipada
ki1ese va nijjaral).ato nijjara); III 175,18 (nijjara ti
ki1esajiraJ]akapatipada, Be, Ce, E e so; Se -jaraJ]aka-);
As 327,35 ( 0 -vasena jara).
jirati\ see sv jarati 1.
jirati2 , caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjarati 1 qv.
jirate, pr. 3 sg. [cfWg p. 75,2 ?], grows, increases;
Sadd 422,31 foil. (jira brühane: brühana111 va<;l<;lhanllJ!1
-ati -llJ!1 -aman o ... appassutaya111 puriso balibaddo va
-ati, quoting Dhp 152); Dhp-a 111 126,13foll. (yatha
balivaddo -amano va<;l<;lhamano n' eva matu na pitu na
sesañatakanllJ!1 atthaya va<;l<;lhati atha kho niratthakam
eva -ati).
jiriyati, caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjarati 1 qv.
jiva, mfn. and m.n. [ts], l. (mfn.) living; alive; Ja IV
278,19* (-llJ!1 ca na111 gahetvana anayetha mam' antike;
278,21': jivanta111 yeva na111); V 487,6* (-a111 gahetvana
avassaji ma111; 487,9·: jivagaha111 gahetva, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se j!vamanllJ!1); VI 93,2o* (api -~ maharaja purisllJ!1
gajhavedana111; 93,24': api -an ti jlvamana111 pi); 175,6*
(tllJ!1 ma111 mata111 va -llJ!1 va nabhivedenti ñataka); -
2. (m.n.) (i) a living thing; any living being; Abh 93 (-o
piil]apaja jantu); 1103 (-a111 piil]e jane -o); Vin IV 34,23
(ekindriya111 sama~Ja Sakyaputtiya -a111 vihethentl ti);
DI 53,32 (sabbe satta sabbe paJ]e sabbe bhiita sabbe -a
avasa abaJa avmya; Sv 161 ,zo: sabbe -a ti
saliyavagodhiimadayo sandhaya vadati); Ja V 107,9*
(yllJ!1 tadisa111 -am adeyyu dhailka, or adj.?; cf107,l0·:
-an ti j!vanta111); Nidd I 3,15 (maceo ti satto naro maJ]avo
poso puggalo -o jagii jantu indagii manujo);- (ü) the
principie of lije; vital breath; an individual living
experiencing entity within the physical body (an
individual soul); D I 56,26 (Pakudho Kaccayano mllJ!1
etad avoca ... pathavikayo apokayo tejokayo vayokayo
sukhe dukhe 0 -sattame) t Ja VI 226,12* (tejo pathavl apo
ca vayo sukhadukh~ e' ime -e ca satt' ime kaya, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -o; 226,24': -o ca ti pi patho ayam ev'
attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -e ca ti pi patho); DI 157,15/oll.
(ki111 nu kho avuso bho Gotama tllJ!1 -llJ!1 ta111 sar1ra111
udahu añña111 -llJ!1 añña111 sañran ti) t Nidd I 64,19
jiva
(Nidd-a I 193,22: ta111 -an ti so -o, liilgavipa11aso kato,
-o ti ca atta yeva); D II 333,8 (app eva nam' assa -a111
ti vadanti buddha; Spk I 300,7: yadi rüpa111 satto puggalo
ti evllJ!1 na vadant! ti attho); Pv 38:28 (acchejjabhejjo -o
atthai11SO gujaparimai).<;iaJo yojanan~ sata111 pañca ko
-a111 chettum arahati); 38:30 (so -o añña111 kayllJ!1
pavisati); Ja IV 338,11* (na santi deva ice ahu eke idh'
eva -o vibhavllJ!1 upeti); V 239,18* (idh' eva jlvati -o
pecca pecca vinassati); Kv 26,23 (puggalo ti va -o ti va);
Mil 30,28/oll. (yo so bhante abbhantare vayo -o pavisati
ca nikkhamati ca so Nagaseno ti maññaml ti ... n' eso
-o assasapassasa nam' ete kayasailkhara ti); 54,19 (yo
bhante abbhantare -o cakkhuna rüpllJ!1 passati sotena
sadda111 su~Jati ... ); 86,17 foll. (bhante Nagasena
viññaJ]an ti va pañña ti va bhiitasmil11 -o ti va ime
dhamma nanattha e' eva nanavyañjana ca udahu ekattha
vyañjanam eva nanan ti, vijananalakkha~Jal11 maharaja
viñña~Jal11 pajanana1akkha~Jal11 pañña bhiitasmi111 -o na
upalabbhat! ti); Vism 156,28 (cetaso na sattassa na
-assa); Sv 811,5 (supinadassanakale nikkhamantllJ!1 va
pavisanta111 va -a111 api nu passanti, idha cittacarllJ!1 -an
ti gahetva aha); As 371,15 (bhedanadhammassa sañrass'
eva -an ti gahitatta sañre ucchijjamane -a111 pi ucchijjatl
ti ucchedagahanakarapavatta ditthi); Vibh-a 497,2
(k!diso nu kho amhakllJ!1 abbhantare -o ki111 nu kho
n!lako udahu p!tako .. . chaJai11SO atthai11SO ti);
Kv-a 34,26 (anatta ti attana -ena pugga1ena rahito);
Sadd 440,9 (jlva paJ]adharaJ]e: jlvati jlvita111 -o j1vika);
- (iii) lije; Sn 432 (ki111 -am anupucchasi); Th 670
(marai).llJ!1 dhammika111 seyyo Ylll11 ce -e adhammika111,
so K.R. Norman, 2007, p. 251; or verb); Ja VI 304,27*
(imassa -ena na h' atthi kiñci, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se na
imassa -ena ma111 natthi kiñci; 305,1·: imassa pana
jlvitena tahi111 nagabhavane mama appamattakllJ!1 pi
kiñci kicca111 natthi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se imassa pana
-ena); Sv 852,15 (attana ca jlvahi ti saya111 ca -lll11
yapehi ti attho); - ifc see yavajlvllJ!1 (sv yava); -
0
-(g)gaha, m. [jlva + gaha2], capturing, taking alive; ?
Pj I 218,26 (sandhicchedad!hi dhanaharaJ]ena va ettakllJ!1
hiraññasuvaJ]J]al11 dehl ti -ena va corehi me pljitassa
sato); - 0 -(g)gahaip., ind. [jlva + gaha111 or gaha2 ],
(with gal).hati) captures, takes alive; S I 84,12 (tasmi111
kho pana sailgame raja Pasenadikosa1o raJanllJ!1
magadha111 Ajatasattu111 vedehiputtllJ!1 parajesi -llJ!1 ca
nllJ!1 aggahesi); Ja I 180,11 (sattamllJ!1 rajanllJ!1 -llJ!1
gahetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr j!vagaha111); II 22,23*
(Kosala111 ... -a111 agahayi; 23,4·: amaretva va); IV 259,2·
(ma ma111 vijjhi -am eva mllJ!1 gaJ]ha ti); Pj 11 62,6;
Mhv 35:37; 38:84;- 0 -mataka, mfn. [cfS. jivanm¡ta],
really dead although still alive; Sp 591,29 (-o nama
amakapiitiko nama e' esa);- 0 -laddhika, mfn., holding
a belief in the existence of an individual soul;
Vibh-a 497,1 (-o pana satto khattiyajlvad!na111
vaJ]J]adibhedllJ!1 sutva k!diso nu kho amhaka111
abbhantare jlvo ... ti); - 0 -loka, m., the world of living
beings; SI 21,15* (ye dakkhiJ]eyya idha -e etesu dinnani
mahapphalani); Ud 50,34* (paJ]<;lito -asmi111 papani
parivajjaye; Ud-a 294,5: imasmi111 sattaloke); Pv 34:5
(attano 'ha111 anatthaya -e acarisa111): Ja III 173,4· (tva111
 jivaka
imarp -arp hahasi jahissasi, marissasi ti attho ); 394,28
(evarpvipattipariyosano h' esa bhadde -o ti);
Vism 236,w; Sp 1,9* (bhavabhavarp gacchati -o); -
0
-sumana(s), n., the China rose; SAF: Hibiscus rosa-
sinensis L.; Abh 580 (japa tu -arp, Ce so; Be
jayasumanarp); - 0 -süla, m.n., a stake for execution;
Ja II 443,6 (tarp pana purisarp -e uttasesum); Mil 358,5
(-' -aropanarp); Ps IV 6,25 (bahinagare -e nisinnarp
purisarp addasa); - 0 -soki(n), mfn., leading a lije of
sorrow; Ja VI 509,30* (tyamharp tattha ramessanti araññe
-inarp); - dujjiva, mfn. and n., difficult to live; when
or where lije is dijficult; a difficult lije; Dhp 245
(hirimata ca -am); Ja V 104,6* (-e dubbhare dare kuto
bhatta kumariyo; cf 104,s·: -e ranhe dubbhare dare jate);
- nijjiva, mfn., without lije; without independent
existence; (without a soul; ?) Ja 11 120,26' (chavan ti
gm:;abhavena -arp matasadisarp); Vism 352,5 (apodhatii
ti dhatumattato nissattato -ato avajjitabbarp); 594,33 foil.
(yatha daruyantarp suññarp -arp niñhakam . . . evarp
idarp namarüparp pi sunnarp -arp niñhakarp);
Kkh 2 278,26; Dhp-ai 217,7 (ayarp hi nama niccitto -o
saro);- ifc see niriha- sv iha; - sajiva\ mfn., having
lije; alive; Ja III 539,6· (jivanto -o hutva); Sp 74,17
(nanappakarani catuppadani -am viya khayanti);
Kkh 2 278,25; Mhv 11: 13; - sujiva, mfn., easy to live;
Dhp 244 (-arp ahiñkena kakasiirena dharpsina ...
jivitarp); - see also sajivaka.
jivaka 1, m(jn). [jiva + ka2], living; long-living (as N.pr.):
Ja I 403,14 (acariya -a pi nama maranti ajivaka pi);
403,zo* (-arp ca matarp disva); - ajivaka, m(jn)., not
living; Ja I 403,14.
jivaka2 , m. [S. lex. id.], the name of a (medicinal) plant or
free; SAF: adder's mouth, Malaxis muscijera (Lindl.)
Kuntze); Abh594 (madhurako ca -o); Ap17,1s (-a
sutaka e' eva bahuka mama assame).
jivajiva, jivañjiva, m. [S. lex. jivajiva, jivarpjiva], the
name of a bird, a kind of pheasant (or partridge);
Abh 625 (jivañjivo ); Ap 17,2 (harpsa koñca mayiira ca
koki1a tambaciijaka pampaka jivarpjiva ca upajivanti
tarp sararp, Be, Ce so; Ee sampaka -a; Se campaka -a).
jivajivaka\ jivañjivaka, m. [S jivajivaka, jivarpjivaka],
the name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge);
D III 201 ,24* (jivañjivakasadd' ettha; Sv 967,33: jiva jiva
ti evarp viravantanarp jivañjivakasakm_1anarp pi ettha
saddo atthi, Be, Se so; Ee 0 -sakm_lanarp; Ce jivarp jiva
ti ... 0 -sakm:;anarp); Ja V 406,3* (harpsa koñca mayüra
ca cakkavaka ca kukkuha km:;a1aka bahii citra sikhai,lc)i
-a, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce jivañjivaka) =VI 276,12*; VI 538,9*
(pampaka -a); Ap 333,23 (parevata raviharpsa cakkavaka
nadicara dindibha sajika e' ettha pampaka -a).
jivajivaka2 , ? Ap 297,19 (kumbhamattarp gahetvana
panasarp -arp chattapm:u_1e thapetvana adasirp satthuno
aharp) f. 446,21 (kumbhamattarp gahetvana ajelirp -arp
chattapa1,1Q.arp gahetvana adasirp satthuno aharp).
jivati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jivati], lives, is alive; remains alive;
lil·es by; Dhatup 282 (ji va pill,ladhara1,1e); Dhatum 414;
Vin I 77,13 (kena nu kho upayena Upa1i amhakarp
accayena sukharp ca -eyya na ca kilameyya ti); 269,25
(tassa -ati ti Jivako ti namarp akarpsu); 11 140,2
!bhikkhii -atu bhante bhagava -atu sugato ti
239 jivati
uccasaddarp mahasaddarp akarpsu); 140,s (api nu kho
bhikkhave khipite -a ti vutte tappaccaya -eyya va
mareyya va ti); 140,9 (manussa bhikkhiinarp khipite
-atha bhante ti vadanti); 140,14 (anujanami bhikkhave
gihinarp -atha bhante ti vuccamanena cirarp -a ti vattun
ti); III 72,1 (sace kho so avuso upasako -issati na
mayarp tarp itthirp labhissama); D 111 66,3 (imina ...
dhanena attana ca -ahi matapitaro ca posehi); A 11 54,7*
(micchajivena -anti eke sama1,1abrahmai_1a); IV 138,26
(etarahi kho bhikkhave yo cirarp -ati so vassasatarp
apparp va bhiyyo); Dhp 200 (susukharp vata -ama
yesarp no natthi kiñcanarp); Ud 66,13* (n' aññarp nissaya
-eyya); Sn 440 (sangame me matarp seyyo yarp ce -e
parajito); 589 (api ce vassasatarp -e); 613 (yo hi koci
manussesu puthu sippena -ati); 1029 (cirarp -ahi
ma1,1ava); Ja 11 80,20* (yamhi -e tamhi gacche); Ili 42,12*
(cirarp -atu so raja); VI 183,3* (mittadiibhi hitaccagi
-are capi sussare); Ap 67,zs (sarpvasarp alabhanto hi
katharp -ihisi tuvarp, Ee. Se so; Be -ihisi; Ce -issasl);
Cp 2:6:3 (-ami va marami va); Mil258,29 (kirp nu kho
bhante Nagasena udakarp -ati); Spk I 242,14 (so
brahma!_lo kasil)l nissaya -ati); 264,23 (navakammarp
nissaya -atl ti navakammiko ); Pv-a 111,27 (aharp
vohararp katva -issami); Sadd 440,9 (jiva pill,ladhara!_le:
-ati); - part.pr. (a) jiva(t), mfn., Sn 427 (-a bho
jivitarp seyyo -arp puññani kahasi); Ja 111 539,2* (ma te
muccittha -ato, Be, Ce, Ee so; or me for -anto? Se -ate;
cf539,s-: -ato ti -anto sajivo hutva tava hatthato esa
papadhammo ma muccittha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ate ti);
IV 24,7* (na me mucceyya -ato; 24,w·foll.: yavaharp
-ami tava me na mucceyya); Vism 196,14* (-ato va
matassa va ... piitikayassa, Be, Se so; Ce jivino; E e wr
jivito); Pj 11 231,6 foil. (katharpjivirp -atan ti va patho
tassa -antanarp katharpjivin ti attho);
(b) jivanta, mf( -anti)n., Vin 111 13,7 (kirp pana mayarp
tarp -antarp anujanissama agarasma anaganyarp
pabbajjaya ti); D 11 334,2 (ta ... -antiyo); SI 50,33*
(-anto na sukhal)llabhe); Th 44; Ja I 417,10*; III 464,17*
(so pariccajj' ubho loke -anto va visussati, Be, Ce so; Se
-ant' eva; Ee jivar eva, prob. wr); V 360,23' foll. (tayi
-ante -ami na -ante na -ami ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tayi -ante -ami ti attho); Nidd I 395,21 (ekacco
liikhajivikarp -anto); Dhp-a 11 274,10 (sakalagame hi
pana -antehi mataka va bahutara ti); (e) jivamana, mfn.,
Ja I 307,18 (aharp deva -amana ekarp samikarp
labhissami); IV 292,21* (lacchama putte tayi -amane);
Pv-a 39,13; Mhv 37:210 (pabbajitva kanigho so
-amanamhi bhatari); (d) jivana, mfn.,- ifc see yacana-;
- aor. 3 sg. jivittha, Nidd I 42,13 (atite cittakkha1,1e
-ittha na -ati na -issati); 1 sg. jivirp, Sv 1005,33 (cirarp
-irp cirarp -ami cirarp -issami sukharp -irp sukharp
-ami sukharp -issami ti); 3 pl. jivirpsu, Ja IV 321,1· (te
me yava -irpsu tava ovadarp adarpsu); As 281 ,3o;
1 pl. ajivamha, ajivimha, Pv 50:3 (dujjivitarp ajivamha
ye sante na dadamhase, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ajivimha) =
Ja 111 47,3* (ajivimha);- inf jiviturp, Ja I 263,3 (raja ...
kasma gamarp hanatha ti pucchi -iturp asakkonta deva
ti); - absol. jivitva, A 11 66,10; Mil304,11 (yo koci
bahiini divasasahassani -itva . . . marati); - pp jivita,
see sv; - fpp jivitabba, n., impers., D 11 22,10 (eso kho
jivana
deva jii_li).O nama na dani tena cinup. -mp. bhavissatl ti);
Ja I 351,27 (idani me yavajlvarp kammmp. akatva -mp.
jatarp); Vism 236,17;- see also jlvapatijlva.
jivana, n. [ts], living, means of subsistence, livelihood;
Abh 445 (-arp vutti jlvika); Vism 464,8 C-mattam eva
va tan ti jlvitmp.); Ps II 56,23 (gorakkhan ti attano va
paresmp. va gavo rakkhitva pañcagorasavikkayena
0
-kammarp); Dhp-a III 164,18 (kirp pana tata pil).<;[aya
caritva -arp mama vmp.so ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee 0 -vmp.so);
Pv-a 161,28 (aharp tumhiikarp sukhena 0 '-upaymp. katurp
samattho ti); Th-a II 225,25 (suddhmp. odanarp -mp.
etassa ti Suddhodano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jlvitmp.);
Nidd-a I 264,21 (-assa muto o -müto ti vattabbe jlmüto ti
vakiiranakiiriinmp. vinaso vi ya vijjamiinakkharavinaso );
Sadd 330,23 (dhikkha sandipanaki1esanajlvanesu); -
jlvanasatte in Ee at Ja V 157,8· is prob. wr for jlvanaka-
(Be, Ce, Se so); - ajivana, n., the not living; Nidd-a I
151,15 (dvlhi cittehi ekakkhal).e --bhavena);- see also
nadyambujlvana (sv nadl).
jivanaka, mfn. [jlvana +ki], who lives; who makes a
living; Spk II 160,9 (vassasatam eva -o niima natthi);
Vv-a 349,12 (koccharp ca phalarp ca upanissaya -o);
Nidd-a I 55,7 (bhataka ti bhatiya -a).
jivani, f [S. lex. id.] a medicinal plant; SAF: milky yam,
Ipomoea pestigridis L.: Abh 594 (jlvantl -1 catha).
jivanti, f [ts], a medicinal plant; SAF: milky yam,
Ipomoea pestigridis L.; Abh 594 (-1 jlvanl catha);
Sp 836,11 (0 -pupphan ti); Vin-vn 1349.
jivapatijiva, n. [from imperat. of jlvati and patijlvati],
saying "jlva" and replying "patijlva"; Ja II 15,17 (bhante
-mp. kada uppannan ti);- se e also patijlva1, patijlva2.
jivamlinaka, mfn. [part.pr. of jlvati + ka2], living, alive;
Vism 194,35 (yath' eva hi matasarlrmp. evmp. -mp. pi
asubham eva); Sp 1037,28; Ps IV 108,20 (0 -sarlre
khuddakamakkhikaya pivanamattmp. pi lohitarp
uppadeyya); Ap-a 311,29 (0 -buddhassa viya).
jivar eva in Ee at Ja III 464,17* is prob. wr; Be, Ce jlvanto
va; Se jlvant' eva.
jivi(n), mfn. [S. jlvin], living; making a living; leading a
lije of; Vism 196,14* (-ino va matassa va ... pütikayassa,
Ce so; Be, Se jlvato; Ee wr jlvito); Sv 157,20 (muddika ti
hatthamuddaya gal).anmp. nissaya -ino); Spk I 330,14
(tassa paññaya -ino jlvitmp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pañña-
jlvino); Pj I 210,9 (cirarpjlvantü ti cirmp. -ino dlghayuka
hontu, Se so, perhaps cpd; Be cirajlvino; Ce, Ee omit) =
Pv-a 27,3 (Be, Ee, Se so, perhaps cpd; Ce cirajlvino);-
ijc see ayudha-, kathmp.-, dlgha-, dhamma-
(sv dhamma 1), magga-, sukha-.
jivikakappaka, jlvikakappanarp, see sv jlvika.
jivikli,f [ts], living, livelihood; means of living; Abh 445
(jlvanmp. vutti -a); Vin I 270,25 (sikkhito si bhal).e Jlvaka
a1mp. te ettakmp. -aya ti); DI 9,3 (micchajlvena -arp
kappenti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be jlvitarp); M II 26,21 (miccha-
ajlvmp. pahaya samma-ajlvena -mp. kappeti, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be jlvitarp); S III 93,4 (antarp idarp bhikkhave -iinmp.
yad idmp. pil).<;[olymp.); A V 87,32 (parapatibaddha me -a
ti pabbajitena abhil).hatp. paccavekkhitabbmp.); Pv 31:9
(tato me danarp dadatu tassa ca hotu -a); Ja II 267,15
(dhaññavikkayena -arp kappesi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
jlvitmp.); 422,27* (api ce pattam adaya anagiiro paribbaje
240 jivita
esa va -a seyya); IV 207,3* (kiccha laddha -am
appapañña vinasayl alikarp bhasamano, Ce so; Se laddha
jlvitmp.; Be kiñcapi 1addhii jlviturp; Ee kiccha pi laddha
-am appañña); VI 584,16* (atthi no -a deva ya ca
yadisikldisa) quoted Sadd 440,9 foll.; Sp 508,15
(marpsmp. ... vikkil).itva -arp kappanakasatto, Ce, Ee so;
Be 0 -kappanakasatto; Se jlvitakappanaka-); Th-a II 262,8
(nanu niima kasiviil).ijjadlhi -a kappetabba); 276,26
(evarp niima satte biidhetva kirp imaya -aya ti
sarpvegajato); 0
(a)-kappaka, mfn. [jlvika +
2
kappaka ], making a living; finding a means of living;
Ja II 167,21 (-e kapal).e natakakule nibbattitva, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se jlvita-); IV 366,14" (imani ettakani vikkil).itva -a
viil).ijakabriihmal).a, Be, Ce so; Ee --viil).ijakabrahmal).a;
Se jlvita-); Nidd-a I 401 ,2o (saccalikena -e puggale
bahurp alikarp hoti appakmp. saccarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
jlvita-) = Vibh-a 338,9 (eds jlvita-); - 0 (a)-kappana,
jlvikiikappana, n., making a living; finding a means of
living; Ja III 32,28" (parmp. avihethento kapalahatthassa
mama -mp. rajjenapi varmp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jlvita-);
411,22" (ekavlsatiya anesaniihi -mp. anaciiro niima, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se jlvita-); Sp 239,11 (kasigorakkhadlhi -mp.
hitva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jlvita-); Sv 235,7 (dhammena
samena -mp., Ee, Se so; Ce jlvika-; Be jivita-); Ps II
56,33 (ayarp muddadihi -arp agamma sltadipaccayo
abadho, Be so; Ce, E e jivika-; Se jlvita-) = Nidd-a II
131,9 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e jlvika-); Th-a II 280,1 ( -mp., Be,
E e, Se so; Ce jivika-); - sujivikli,f, a happy or easy
lije; Pv 31:14 (petl ca sukhita asi tassa casi -a, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee sañram ciirudassanam); - see also
antimajlvika (sv anti~a\ dujjlvika. .
jivita, mfn. and n. (or m.n. ?) [S. jlvita, mfn. and n.],
l. (mfn.) living; Cp 3:3:2 (dukkhena -o laddho sampi)e
patiposito? eds so; perhaps m., lije; cfCp-a 196,3o:
tuyhmp. pana ... dukkhena mahata ayasena -o laddho,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -arp laddharp); - 2. (n.) lije, lijetime,
span of lije; living, livelihood; Abh 155; Vini 17,13
(mata te tata Yasa paridevasokasampanna, dehi matu
-an ti); II 191,28 (Devadatto ... Ajatasattukumarmp. etad
avoca purise maharaja al).apehi ye samal).arp Gotammp.
-a voropessantl ti); III 73,1o (yo pana bhikkhu sañcicca
manussaviggaharp -a voropeyya . . . aymp. pi piirajiko
hoti asarpvaso ti; 73,24: -a voropeyya ti jlvitindriymp.
upacchindati uparodheti santatirp vikopeti); IV 179,28
(kirp nu kho nama amhiikarp -en a); D II 190,29 (-e
apekharp karohi); 233,2 (ko nu kho pana bho janati
-iinarp); 331,21 (sa attiinarp e' eva -mp. ca gabbharp ca
sapateyyarp ca vinasesi, so read with Be, Ce, Se);
III 235,5 (abhabbo avuso khil).asavo bhikkhu sañcicca
piil).arp -a voropeturp); M II 73,19* (apparp h' idarp -am
iihu dhlra asassatarp vipparil).amadhammmp.); SI 42,7*
(kathmp.jlvirp -am iihu seghmp.) = Sn 181; S I 121 ,24*
(navakaiJ.khanti -am); A I 155,24* (upaniyati -am appam
ayu); IV 136,26 (appakmp. ... -arp manussiinarp parittmp.
1ahukmp. bahudukkhmp. bahüpayasmp.); Sn 440 (dhi-r-
atthu idha jlvitmp.); 1077 (ñal).üpapannmp. no munirp
vadanti udiihu ve jlvitenüpapannmp.) Dhp 110 (ekiiharp
-arp seyyo stlavantassa jhiiyino ); 130 (sabbesmp. -arp
piyarp); Pv 36:5 (ajja suve -assüparodho); Th 114
(hiyyamiinanlhi -e); Ja I 222,29 (givmp. assa chinditva
jivi ti
-arp harissam! ti); IV 112,15' (dhuva~ marai_Jarp
addhuvarp -an ti); V 238,10* (issaro sabbalokassa sace
kappeti -a~; 238,18': sace brahma va añño va koci
issaro tva~ kasiya jlva tvarp gorakkhena ti evarp
sabbalokassa -arp sa~vidahati); Ap 586,23
(nekako~isahassani -ani pariccaji~); Dhs 19 (ayu ~hiti
yapana yapana iriyana vattana palana -a~
jlvitindriya~); Vibh 246,26 (miccha-aj!vena -arp
kappeti); Vism 235,27 (sattanam -aro assasa-
passasüpanibandha~ e' eva iriyapathüpanibandharp ca
sltuJ!hilpanibandha~ ca mahabhiitilpanibandha~ ca
aharilpanibandha~ ca); 236,17 (-a~ tava ettakam eva
j!vitabba~ na ito paran ti); Dhp-a IV 60,6 (taro eva
na~adh!tara~ labhantassa -arp atthi alabhantassa idh'
eva marai_Jan ti); Vibh-a 411,5 (kasikamme asati
manussana~ -a~ na pavattatl ti); Sadd 440,9 (j!va
paJ!adharaJ!e: jlvati -a~); - jlvitan ti in Ce, Ee, Se at
Ja IV 412,12' is prob, wr for jlvatan ti (Be so); -
o• -asa, mfn. [from jlvita + asa 1], wishing jor lije;
Ap-a 504,28 (-a oro han tu niralaya nis!dantil ti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr jlvite salaya);- 0 '-asa,f [jlvita + asa 1],
wish for lije; A I 86,3o (dve 'roa bhikkhave asa
duppajaha ... labhasa ca -a ca); Dhs 1059 ( ... dhanasa
puttasa -a ... ) ; - 0 '-indriya, n., the jaculty oj lije; the
animating principie; V in III 73,24 (jlvita voropeyya ti
-arp upacchindati uparodheti); S V 204,15 (UJ!' imani
bhikkhave indriyani , . . itthindriya~ purisindriya~
-a~); Nidd I 124,2 (macen maraJ!arp kalakiriya
khandhana~ bhedo ka!evarassa nikkhepo -ass'
upacchedo); Kv 396,10 (nirodha~ samapannassa natthi
-an ti); Dhs 19; Mil 56,28; Vism 32,19 (thit! ti -ass' eta~
adhivacana~); 447,15 (sahajarilpanupalanalakkhai_Ja~
-a~ tesa~ pavattanarasa~ tesa~ yeva
~hapanapaccupaghanarp yapayitabbabhütapada~~hana~);
Dhp-a I 361,5 (maccuraja ... -arp chinditva); Vv-a 72,12
(p~o ti voharato satto paramatthato -a~); -
0
-kappaka, mfn. [jlvita + kappaka2], making a living;
finding a means of living; Ja II 167,21 (-e kapai_Je
na~akakule nibbattitva, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee jlvika-);
Sp 486,15 (sakuJ!e gahetva -assa sakuJ!ikass' eva, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e jlvika-); Nidd-a I 401,20 (saccalikena -e
puggale bahu~ alika~ hoti appakarp sacca~, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se jlvika-) = Vibh-a 338,9;- 0 -kappana, n., -a, f,
making a living; finding a means of living; Dhp-a III
472,14 (jaiJ.ghabala~ nissaya -ena akus!to) t IV 111,12
(-aya akuslte); Nidd-a I 40!,18 (saccalikena --taya eta~
adhivacana~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jlvikarp kappanataya) =
Vibh-a 338,6; - 0 -kappanaka, mfn., making a living;
gaining a livelihood; Cp-a 187,1 (kohaññena -o eko
tapaso, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -saiJ.kappanako); Vibh-a 339,2
(micchajlvena --kammanarp); 0
-nasa, m.,
0
destruction, loss of lije; Saddh 58;- -nikanti,f,fond-
ness, de si re, for lije, attachment to lije; A IV 48,4 (-iya
citta~ pa~illyati); Vism 73,22; Pj II 54,14 (maraJ!a-
satibhavanaya ca -i~ pahaya); Th-a II 5,31 (yadi hi -i
ahararasatai_Jha ca natthi atha kasma piJ!qaya caras! ti);
0
- -panasana, mfn. or m., destroying lije, destructive
of lije; destruction of lije; Nidd I 216,21 (atthi kañci
kala~ kodho ailgamaiJ.gapakaqqhanamatto hoti na ca
tiiva -o hoti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce jlvitavoropano; Nidd-a I
241 jur.thapakkha
323,9foil.: jlvitindriyato panasano na ca tava hoti, Se so;
Ee jlvitindriyato cavapano; Be, Ce voropano); -
o -parikkhara, m.pl., the requisites of lije; M I 104,3o (y e
e' ime pabbajitena -a samudanetabba); A III 120,28
(bhikkhu appagho hoti ... susantoso -esu); V 211,1;-
o -rüpa, mfn., having the appearance of living ... ; ?
absolutely living ... ; ? Ja II 190,24* (sukha~ jlvitarilpo si
ragha vivanam agato; 190,26' foil.: tva~ sukhena
jlvitasadiso sukhe ~ito sukhaparihato viya);
-hara, mfn., taking away, destroying, lije; Sp 867,13;-
0
0
-haral}a, n., taking away, destruction, of lije; Mil175,1
(ki~ nu kho bhante Nagasena so piJ!¡Japato ...
bhagavato --taya mahapphalo, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
0
-harataya); - 0 -haral}aka, mfn., which destroys lije;
Spk III 268,16 (--sattharp pariyesanti); - 0 -hara, m.,
destruction of lije; Mil 265,Io (tena hi bhante Nagasena
arahattassa santabhavo vijahito hoti yena adhigatassa -o
bhavaU ti); - 0 -haraka, mfn., (one) who takes away
lije, who kills; Mil 101,7 (thero Sariputto -e pi kopaJTI na
kareyya ti); Ps V 85,s (-a~ sattharp pariyesanti);
Ud-a 68,6 (ahaJTI te -o ti);- dujjivita, n., a hard lije; a
miserable lije; an evil lije; Vin III 72,15 (kiJTI mayh'
imina papakena -ena mata~ me jlvita seyyo); Pv 50:3
(-a~ aj!vamha y e san te na dadamhase; Pv-a 281 ,31: -an
ti viññühi garahitabba~ j!vita~) = Ja III 47,3* (47,16-:
UJ!i duccaritani caranta -arp lamaka~ jlvita~ jlvanti
nama); Sv 1025,26 (n!ce caJ!qaladikule -e h!nattabhave
nibbattitva); Dhp-a III 354,12 (ta~ -a~ papaj!vitam eva
ti attho);- sajlvita, mfn., having lije, alive; Ja IV 195,1
(tata maya tvarp gambh!re papate khipapito katha~ -o
si ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee sañjlvito);- see also cattajlvita
(sv cajati).
jivi ti in Ee at Kv 457,35 is wr for j!r! ti (Be, Ce so; Se jir!
ti).
jivha- and j!vham in Ee at Sp 893,27 are wrr for jivha-
and jivha~ (Be, Ce, Se so).
jmigati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup juilgati, Wg § 5:51], avoids,
abandons; Sadd 333,29 (yugi jugi vajjane: yuilgati -ati).
juftha, mfn. pp ofjosati qv.
jul}ha\ m. (and n. ?) [cf S. jyautsna], the light half of a
month; Vin I 138,34 (yadi pan' ayya agame -e vassa~
upagaccheyyun ti; Sp 1068,3: agame mase ti adhippayo);
176,I4foil. (te ce bhikkhave bhikkhil bhai_Jqanakaraka ...
adhikaraJ!akiiraka tarp pi -a~ anuvaseyyu~ tehi
bhikkhave bhikkhilhi sabbeh' eva agame -e komudiya
catumasiniya akama pavaretabba~); Ja I 165,18* (kii!e va
yadi va -e yada vayati maluto; 165,2o': ka!apakkhe va
juJ!hapakkhe va); Nidd I 19,2 (ka!e juJ!he vasse hemante
gimhe; Nidd-a I 80,8: ka!e -e ti addhamasavasena);
Kv 607,5 (niccarp -arp hotu; or to juJ!hi ?);
Sadd 504,1 foil. (-o samayo . . . joseti lokassa pHi~
somanassa~ ca uppadeU ti -o).
2
jul}ha , se e sv juJ!ha.
jul}hapakkha, m. and mfn. [juJ!ha (or juJ!ha) + pakkha1],
l. the light half of the month, the bright fortnight, Ja IV
498,14' (yatha tarakaraja ka!apakkhe kh!J!o puna -e
pilrati); Sv 509,3o (ekacce ka!apakkhe dukkhita -e
sukhita honti); - 2. belonging to the bright fortnight;
Jaiii 141,12' (yatha cando -a~ ratti~ jotayamano
ka!apakkharattito ratti~ vibhajanto divase divase
 242
paripürati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr navacando ayarp
juQhapakkharattito ... ).
jm,J.ha, f, juQha2, n. [cf S. jyotsna], moonlight, a moonlit
night; Abh 54 (komud1 candika -a); 69; 917; Ud 39,21
(ayasma Sariputto -aya rattiya navoropitehi kesehi
abbhokase msmno hoti; Ud-a 244,17:
sukkapakkharattiya); Ja VI 221 ,18' (catumassakomud'
ajja -arr vyapagatarp tamarp; 221,26·: -an ti -aya
nissayabhütarp candamaQ<;!alarp abbhuggatarp, Se so; Be
abbhugacchati; Ce, Ee omit -aya); Kv 607,5 (niccarp
1
-arr hotu; orto juQha ?); Sadd 504,4/oll. (-a ratti jotati
sayarp nippabha pi samana candatarakappabhasena pi
dippati virocati sappabha hotl ti -a); - see also dosina.
juti, f [S. dyuti], l. splendour, brightness, effulgence,
light; Abh 54 (kanti sobha -i); M I 328,25 (api ca te
aharp brahme gatirp ca pajanami -irp ca pajanami evarp
mahiddhiko Bako brahma; Ps II 408,15: -irp ca ti
anubhavarp ca pajanami); Vv 51:3 (VaQQarp passa -irp
ca me; Vv-a 219,13: -in ti dvadasayojanani pharaQa-
samattharp pabhavisesarp); Ja VI 315,21 • (iddh1 -1 bala-
viriyüpapatti); Pv-a 122,12 (raso ti -iya adhivacanarp,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee rasso ti); 137,11 (devaparisaya -irp
attano sañrappabhaya abhibhavanto ); Sadd 362,3 (-1 ti
a1oko siñ va); - ifc see nikkhamanaka-, niccharaQa-; -
2. a ray of light; Abh 64; - jutin-dhara, mfn.
[BHS dyutirpdhara], bright, splendid, effulgent; S I
121,17' (tarp nisedha -a); Ja II 353,8• (santi hi dahara
pakkh1 paññavanto -a; 353,12' foll.: paññasampanna
e' eva ñaQobhasadhara ca); Ap 551,17; Bv 20:10
(Bv-a 241,10: -o ti pabhayutto); Cp 3:6:3; - 0
-ma(t),
jutlma(t), 0 -manta, mfn., brilliant, bright; distinguished;
D II 256,14* (sattasahassa va yakkha . . . iddhimanto
0
-manto VaQQavanto yasassino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
jutlmanto); 261,15* (upapanno 0 -manto bhismakayo
yasassi so, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jutlmanto); S V 24,28'
(khiQasava 0 -manto te loke parinibbuta) = Dhp 89 (Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee jutlmanto); Sn 508 (katharp upapajjati
brahma1okarp jutlma, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -ma; Pj II
418,w: jutlma ti bhagavantarp alapati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-ma ti); 539 ( 0 -ma mutima pahütapañño; Pj II 435,15:
0
-ma ti paresarp pi andhakaravidhamanena 0 -sampanno);
Pv 36:34 (tisso vijja anuppatto jutlma, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-ma; Pv-a 230,22: anuttaraya ñaQajutiya 0 -ma); Ja V
405,13' (sa Kosiyenanumata jutlmata; 406,w: jutimata ti
anubhavasampannena); VI 174,4• (iddhi hi tayarp vipula
Sakkass' eva jut!mato); Ap 65,15 (bhagavantarp
0
-mantarp); Vism 256,29 (niddhotajatimaQi viya
0
-mantarp khayati); Ps III 402,18 (0 -mantataya patapava);
Pj II 96,11 (pabhassaran1 ti pabhasanasilani 0 -mantani ti
vuttarp hoti); Sadd 145,13* ( 0 -ma); see also
nikkhamanajutika (sv nikkhamana), mahajutika
(sv maha[t]).
ju!ati\ jo!ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ju<;tati, Wg § 28:37],
goes; Sadd 460,28 (juJa gatiyarp: -ati joJati).
2
juJati , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ju<;tati, Wg § 28:85], binds;
Sadd 461,2 (juJa bandhane: -ati).
juhati, jühati, juhoti, pr. 3 sg. [S. juhoti], sacrifices, offers
(to or in); gives, dedicates; SI 166,2o (aggirp -issami
aggihuttarp paricarissami ti); 168,16* (kalena so -ati
dakkhiQeyye, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dakkhiQeyyo; Spk I
jubati
235,13: so dakkhiQeyye -ati nama na acetane aggimhi
pakkhipanto); A II 207,26 (yarp catutthasmirp thane
khirarp hoti tena aggirp -anti); Sn p. 79,21 (aggirp -ati
aggihuttarp paricarati; Pj II 401,12/oll.: ahuti-
pakkhipanena ja1eti); 1046 (asirpsanti thomayanti
abhijappanti -anti); Th 343 (-ami dakkhiQeyyaggirp);
Ja V 158,19' (na -e na jape mante); 388,24' (sararp ca
-ati poso bahukaya Gayaya ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
sarasarp ca yo -ati; 388,z9·: yarp kiñci sararp upagantva
-ati); 399,7* (Siri ti marp janahi jühatuttama; 399,1s·:
aggirp -antanarp uttama, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se jühantanam);
VI 215,w· (aggirp adaya tavarp ca -a amhakarp ca vittarp
dehi, Ce so; Be, Se jüha; Ee duha); Sadd 826,21 (hassa
jo ... jahati juhoti jahara); 865,19 (juhotl ti havako); -
part.pr. (a) jüha(t), mfn. [cf S. juhvat], Sn 428 (carato ca
te brahmacariyarp aggihuttarp ca jühato; Pj II 387,18:
jühato ti -antassa); (b) juhanta, mfn., Ud 6,zo; Ja II 43,11
(bhikkhü te aggirp juhante disva); (e) juhamana, mfn.,
Ja II 399,10 (tapaso aggim -amano, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
jühamano); - aor. 1 sg. (a) juhirp, Th 341 (yajirp
uccavace yaññe aggihuttarp -irp aharp esa suddhi ti
maññanto); (b) ajuharp, Pj II 411,21 (yarp aharp ito pubbe
brahmanam arabbha aggimhi ajuharp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-ami);- absol. juhitva, Sn p. 79,23; Ja II 43,1s;- pass.
pr. 3 sg. hüyati, is offered; is offered to; Sadd 860,17
(hüyatl ti horno); - part.pr. hüyamana, mfn., Ja V
208,21· (hüyamanassa jotino ); - pp huta, mfn. and n.
[ts], l. (mfn.) (i) offered (in fire); given; Ja IV 19,27•
(yarp kiñci yinharp va -arr va mayharp; 20,1·: -an ti
ahunapahunavasena dinnarp); V 222,1* (tay1 -a deva
mahapphala hi me; 226,1 : tuyharp dinna); - (ii) offered
to; Ja V 201,22* (bhinnani katthani -o ca aggi);- 2. (n.)
offering (in the fire), oblation; Vin l 36,zo• (tasma na
yinhe na -e arañjin ti); D III 264,22 (so ca hoti
micchadinhiko vipañtadassano natthi dinnarp natthi
yinharp natthi -arr ... ); Dhp 106 (sa yeva püjana seyyo
yarp ce vassasatarp -arp); Sn 461 (yattha -arr ijjhate
brühi me tarp);- -asana, m. [huta+ asana2], "oblation-
eating", Jire; Ap 20,10 (addasasirp sambuddharp ...
adittarp va -asanarp) i= 142,26 (cf Ap-a 415,1sfoll.: -arr
vuccati püjasakkaro -assa püjasakkarassa asanan ti
-asanarp); B v 7:28 (-asan o va tapetva nibbuto so
sasavako); - -'-asa, m. [huta + asa2]. "oblation-
eating", Jire; Bv-a 80,3* (nibbayi ghore niraye -'-aso);
- suhuta, mfn. and n., well or suitably offered; a fine
offering; SI 168,17*; A II 44,6* (suhutarp suyigharp
suppattarp dakkhiQeyyesu yarp katarp); Vv 34:26 (tesarp
sudinnarp suhutarp suyittharr ye sailgham uddissa
dadanti danarp); Ja VI 527,25* (tarp me suyigharp
suhutarp tuyharp marpsena brahmaQa);
fpp juhitabba, mfn., Pj II 175,4 (yarp hi kiñci aggimhi
-arp); Cp-a 107,1o (sabbo sañravayavo danamukhe
--tarp upagato);- caus. pr. 3 sg. hapetf [S. havayati],
offers oblations in (thefire); tends (thefire); Ja V 195,22'
(eso aggi 'ssa sailkhato eso dhümo padissati maññe no
aggirp -eti; but probably hapeti 1, "he does not neglect
the fire"; 195,26·: aggirp no -eti juhati paricarati
maññami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na aggim -eti); -
pp hapita2 , mfn., offered oblations; tended; Ja IV 221,zo*
(na te katthani bhinnani na te udakarp abhatarp aggi pi te
juhana
na -ito, Be, E e so; Ce, Se hasito; 221,21,: aggi pi te na
jalito) =V 201,21* (Be, Ee so; Ce, Se hasito) =VI 565,5*
(Be, Ce, Ee so; Se hasito);- ahapitaggi, mftL, who has
not offered oblations in the Jire, who has not tended the
fire; Ja V 201,27* (ahapitaggl si asiddhabhojano, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se ahasitaggn
juhana, juhana, n, [from juhati], offering, sacrifice; D I
12,6 (micchajlvena jlvikarp kappenti seyyath!dai)l, ..
acamanai)l nahapanai)l -ai)l vamanai)l ... ; Sv 98,6: -an ti
tesai)l atthiiya aggijuhanarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee juhanan
ti . . . aggijuhanai)l); - ifc see aggi-; - se e also
aggijuhanaka.
jüta, n. [S. dyuta], sporting; gambling, gaming, playing at
dice; Abh 531; Ja III 198,22* (-e akkhaparajito );
VI 271,20 (tai)l -ena jinitva Vidhurai)l ga1_1hissami); 280,1
(ahai)l tava -e jito imai)l ma1_1iratanai)1 dassami, Ce, Ee
so; Be -e parajito; Se -ena); 282,19* (te tattha -e ubhayo
samagate, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ubhaye; 282,25' foll.: tattha
jutasalaya -e samagate samupagate ubho -ai)l kl]ii)lsu ti
attho, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tattha -e samagata ubho ... );
318,21* (ajesi -e); Dhp-aii 228,19 (-ena va dhana-
haral_lena va sailgame balabhibhavena jita bhaveyya); -
-arp kJ!ati, plays at dice; Ja I 290,16 (rañña saddhii)l -arp
na kJ!i); 293,1o (-ai)l kJ!ama brahma1_1a ti); III 187,22;
VI 282,4 (ayai)l raja madisena yakkhena saddhii)l -ai)l
k!)anto); Sp 620,31 (aqhapadaphalake -ai)l kJ!anti); -
see also duta2; - 0
-kara, m(fn). [juta + kara 1], a
gambler, a gamester; Sv 946,37 (ayai)l akkhaso1_19o -o
ma tassa vacanarp ga1_1hittha ti); - ajutakara, m., nota
gambler; Ja V 117,31 ,; - 0 -kiira, m(fn). [juta+ kara 1], a
gambler, gamester; Abh 531; - o -khalika, see sv
0
-phalaka below; - 0 -gita, n., a verse sung at playing
dice (for luck); Ja I 290,1 (imarp -ai)l gayanto, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ce dutag!tam; Ee utagltam); 293,12;- 0 -phalaka, n.,
a gaming board; a dice-board; Sp 621,6 (-e pasaka-
kl)aya k!)anti); Sv 85,26 (khalikan ti -e pasakakJ!anai)l,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jutakhalike, prob. wr); -
0
-ma~u,lala, n., a gaming circle; a gambling area; Ja 1
293,11 (-ai)l sajjapetva); III91,11; - 0 -vittaka,mftz.
[juta + vittaka2], devoted or addicted to gambling; Ja VI
256,28 (dhammena rajjai)l karesi -o pana ahosi, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se jutacittako); - 0 -siilii,f, a gambling-hall;
Ja VI 281,9 (-ai)l pavisi);- see also duta2.
jüsati, pr. 3 sg. [S, Dhatup ju~ati, Wg § 17:29], hurts, kills;
Sadd 442,17 (jusa yusa hii)lsattha: ... -a ti yusati).
jühana, see sv juhana.
je. ind. [see K.R. Norman, 1994b, pp. 221-25], (enclitic), a
mcative particle, addressed to a female inferior, esp. to
a slave; Abh 1139 (re je); Vin I 232,2 (kissa je Ambapali
daharanai)l dahariinai)l Licchavlnai)l !saya Isai)l ...
akkhena akkhai)l pativaqesl ti); 292,15 (idhahai)l bhante
dasii)l iil_lapesii)l gaccha je aramarp gantva ka1ai)1 arocehi
kalo bhante nighitai)l bhattan ti); IV 21,3 (atha kho
ghara1_1! gharasu1_1hai)1 etad avoca he je kii)l te eso
sama1_1o avoca ti); MI 125,17 foll. (Vedehika gahapatani
Ka)ii)l dasii)l etad avoca he je Ka)! ti kii)l ayye ti kii)l je
diva utthasl ti; Ps II 99,7: he je Ka)I ti are ka)i); Dhp-a l
-+10,8 (Visakha Migaramata ... bhaJ.19ikai)1 bandhitva
dasiya adasi handa je imai)l bha1_19ikam ga1_1hah! ti);
Sadd 895,2 (je iti issarehi ekavacanavasena dasinai)l
243 jegucchi(n)
amanta1_1e); - je in Ee at Ap 420,2 is wrfor te (Be Ce,
Se so).
jeguccha, mftz. and n. [from jiguccha or jigucchati qqv],
l. (mftz.) contemptible, detestable; loathsome,
disgusting; V in 1 276,37 (-ai)l me sappi patikülan ti);
III 77,23 foll. (amanapikai)l gandharp upasarpharati -ai)l
patikulyai)l imai)l gandhai)l ghayitva 0 -ta patiku1yata
marissati ti); MI 30,31 (tassa saha dassanena amanapata
ca sa1_1thaheyya patiku1yata ca sa1_1thaheyya 0 -ta ca
sa1_1thaheyya, Be, Se so; Ce jigucchata; Ee jegucchita);
Ja IV 161,13 (d!pakai)l -ai)l patikulai)l karimsu, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se jigucchai)l); 305,18 (tayo bhava ...
ukkarabhumi viya -a upaqhahanti); VI 63,9 (maharaja
evarüpai)l -ai)l khadasl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jigucchai)l
marpsai)l); Nidd I 231,18 (katamo ca pugga1o -o);
Ap 575,22 (sabbai)l sar!rasañjatarp putigandhai)l
bhayanakai)l susanam iva -ai)l ramante yattha balisa, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce bibhacchai)l); Vism 108,7 (patto ...
slsakapalam iva -o vattati); 108,15 (dubba1_11_1a duddassika
kilighavasana duggandha -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
jiguccha); Ps III 302,19 (rüpai)l ... vina vatthehi -ai)l hoti
anolokanakkhamai)l); Ap-a 163,36 (-o manussaloko);
Mhv 5:282 (-arp .. . naralokai)l); - 2. (n.) disgust;
recoiling from; Th 1056 (bhuñjamane ca bhutte va -arp
me na vijjati); Sv 359,21 (jigucchaya bhavo -ai)l); -
0
-tama, mftz., superl., very disgusting; Ud-a 289,1 (asuci
duggandho -o); 0
-tara, mftz., campar., more
disgusting; Vism 249,32 (tato -o aggimhi pakkhittanai)l
[kesanai)l gandho]); 0
-bibhacchadassana, mftz.,
detestable and fearful-looking; Pv-a 56,3 (-a, Be, Ce so;
Ee jiguccha-; Se jegucchavibhacchadassana);
ajeguccha, mftz., not to be despised; not being
disgusting; MI 31,17 (appatikulyata ca sa1_1thaheyya --ta
ca saJ.lthaheyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajegucchita); Sn 852
(appagabbho -o; Pj II 549,23: -o ti sampannas!laditaya
ajegucchanlyo asecanako manapo); Th 961 (-arp
vimuttehi . . . kasavai)l; Th-a III 86,32: -an ti
ajigucchitabbai)l); Nidd 1231,32 (katamo ca puggalo -o);
- atijeguccha, mftz., very disgusting; Spk I 151,7
(tesai)l ca moramai)lsadlni iqhani honti, itaresai)l tani
-ani); Vibh-a 233,7; see also adhijeguccha,
adhijegucchai)l, adhijegucche, jiguccha.
jegucchaniya, mftz. [from jigucchana or jigucchati qqv;
cf S, jugupsanlya], to be avoided; disgusting; -
ajegucchaniya, mftz., not to be avoided; not disgusting;
Pj II 549,23 (ajeguccho ti sampannas!laditaya -o
asecanako manapo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajegucchaniyo);-
se e al so jigucchanlya, jegucchiya.
jegucchi, m. or n. [from jigucchati], recoiling from;
scrupulousness; M I 78,36 (tapassi sudai)l homi ...
jegucchl sudarp homi . . . ma 'harp khuddake piil_le
visamagate sailghatai)l apadesin ti, idai)l su me Sariputta
-ismii)l hoti; ? cf78,21: idarp su me Sariputta tapassitaya
hoti; Ps II 46,9: -ismin ti papajigucchanabhave).
jegucchi(n), mfn. [from jiguccha or jeguccha ?], who
detests or avoids or recoils from; being disgusted;
scrupulous; fastidious; Vin I 235,18 foll. (-1 sama1_1o
Gotamo, jegucchitaya dhammai)l deseti ... jigucchami
kayaduccaritena ... ); M 1 77,25 (tapassl sudai)l homi
paramatapassl ... -1 sudai)l homi paramajegucch!); SI
jegucchita
66,17* (-1 nipako bhikkhu catuyamasusaq¡vuto, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se -i; Spk I 126,28: -1 ti tapena papajigucchako);
A III 144,19 (-1 hoti uccaraq¡ va passavaq¡ va ...
n1harituq¡); Vism 346,3 (pihitanasiko hoti ... -1
mañkubhiito ); Sp 134,27 foil.; Sadd 403,24; - ifc see
papa-; - ajegucchi(n), mfn. who does not destest or
recoilfrom; A lii 144,30.
jegucchita in Ee at M I 30,3! is prob. wr for jegucchata
(Be, Se so).
jegucchiya, mfn. rJrom jiguccha or jigucchati qqv],
contemptible, detestable; loathsome, disgusting; A IV
386,19 (yaq¡ kiñci pagghareyya asuci yeva pagghareyya
duggandhaq¡ . . . -aq¡ yeva pagghareyya ... ; Mp IV
177,3: jigucchitabbam eva pa!ikiilam eva); Ja 11 437,20*
(dhi-r-atthu taq¡ aturaq¡ piitikayaq¡ jegucchiyaq¡ asuciq¡,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jigucchiyaq¡) = III 244,9* (Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se duggandhiyaq¡); see also jeguccha,
jegucchan1ya.
jettha, mfn., m. and -a, f, l. (mfn.) [S. jye~!ha] better,
best, first, supreme; leading, chief; elder; eldest; first-
bom; elder brother or sister; Abh 254; 694 (pavaro -o);
918; Vin III 3,36 (-o va kaninho va ti); D II 15,11 (aggo
'ham asmi lokassa -o 'ham asmi lokassa segho 'ham
asmi lokassa); S I 178,24* (matari pitari va pi atha -amhi
bhatari acariye catutthamhi tesu na manaq¡ kayiratha);
II 77,9 (sabbaq¡ atth1 ti kho brahmal)a -aq¡ etaq¡
lokayataq¡ ... sabbaq¡ n' atth1 ti kho brahmal)a dutiyaq¡
etaq¡ lokayataq¡); A I I08,1 (rañño khattiyassa
muddhavasittassa -o putto hoti abhiseko anabhisitto-m-
acalapatto); Ja 11 373,9 (tassa kira dve putta -o raja
kaninho uparaja); V 269,26* (ya ca bhariya dhanakklta
samikaq¡ atimaññati sassuq¡ va sasuraq¡ vapi -aq¡ vapi;
275,23·: -an ti samikassa je!!habhataraq¡); 314,12 (ahaq¡
-o matapitaro mamam eva bhara); Ap 581,12 (-assa
bhatuno jaya ahosiq¡); Bv 10:2 (so buddho cakkavattissa
-o; Bv-a 184,6: -o ti pubbajo); Ps III 291,14 (eko va
puttako añño koci -o va kanigho va natthi); Ud-a 434,21
CO-tta seghatta); V v-a 259,24 (tassa -aya deviya putto
Sujato nama kumaro); Sadd 686,10 (jo vu<;l<;!hassa jeyyo
-o); - 2. (m.) [S. jyaiHha] the name of a month (May-
June); Abh 75 (citto vesakhaje!!ho); 918 (mase -o);
Sadd 583,18 (citto visakho -o asajho ... ); - 3. jeqha,f
[S. jye~!ha] (i) the name of a nakkhatta, the eighteenth
lunar mansion; Abh 59 ( ... visakhanuradha -a ... );
Sadd 359,19 ( ... visakha anuradha -a miilaq¡ ... ); -
(ii) misfortune personified as the sister of Lak~mz; - see
je!!habbatika below; - 0 apaciiyi(n), mfn., paying due
respect to one's elders; D III 72,4 (kule -ino); SI 229,25
(yavaj1vaq¡ kule -1 assaq¡; Spk I 347,21 foil.: kule
jeqhakanaq¡ mahapita mahamata cullapita cullamata
matulo matulan1 ti ad1naq¡ apacitikarako); Vism415,zs;
Dhp-a I 265,12* (matapettibharaq¡ jantuq¡ kule -inaq¡);
0
- apacayika, mfn., paying due respect to one 'S elders;
Pv 19:19 (hotha ... kule -a); 38:24 (samatulyani bhiitani
kuto -o; Pv-a 252,9 foil.: jeqho eva natthi kuto -o,
jeghapacayanapuññaq¡ nama n' atthi ti attho) f. Ja VI
225,25* (Be, Se -a; Ce, Ee 0 apacayino); Ja VI 91,24* (kule
-o; 92,¡·: -o ti jeghanaq¡ matapitunnaq¡ sakkarakarako
hoti);- 0 -apacayika,f,? paying due respect to one's
elders; Ja VI 225,25* (samatulyani bhiitani kuto -a, Be,
244 jeta(r)
Se so; Ce, Ee 0 apacayino; = Pv 38:24: eds 0 apacayiko);
Nidd II 164,19 (kule -aya, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce
0
apacayitaya; cf eg Ja II 373,!9: jetrhapacayikakammam
eva pana katuq¡ mayhaq¡ anuriipaq¡); - 0 apacayita,f,
abstr., paying due respect to one's elders; D III 70,26
(asamaññata abrahmaññata na kule -a); 145,28 (kule
-aya) f. Nidd 11 164,19 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 apacayikaya);
-
0
-na(:aka, n. or -a,f, a group of senior dancing girls,
of concubines; or a senior concubine; Ja V 279,12
(pa!hamaq¡ tava ekaq¡ sattahaq¡ cullana!akaq¡
dhammana!akaq¡ katva vissajjetha, sace sa puttaq¡
labhissati sadhu, noce atha . . . -aq¡ vissajjetha); -
0
-bbatika, m. [je!!ha + vatika; cf S. jyeghavrata], a
worshipper of Jeqha; Sp 596,12 (-o si nigal)(ho si aj1vako
si; Sp-t [Be] 11 355,7: -o ti kalidev1vataniyutto, kalidev1
0
kira sir1deviya jetrha); Vin-vn 404;- -masa, m. [jegha
+ masa2], the month je(tha; Pj II 359,24
(--uposathadivase); Bv-a 136,24 (--pUI)l)amaya); -
0
-müla, m., the month jegha; Ja V 412,18 (--mase
sassesu milayantesu); Sp 70,2o (--masapUI)l)amayaq¡);
Sv 6,15 (--sukkapakkhapañcamiyaq¡); Mhv 25:51
(masamhi -arnhi).
jetthaka, mf( -a, -ika)n. [jeqha + ka2], better, best, first,
supreme; chief, leader; elder; eldest; first-bom; elder
brother or sister; Pv 11:3 (amhaka putto ah u -o so;
Pv-a 57,27: -o ti pubbajo); Ja Il 212,15 (tesu pana dvisu
rajaputtesu -o agantva Barill)asiyaq¡ raja ahosi kanit!ho
uparaja); 433,19 (bodhisatto ... asitiya kakasahassanaq¡
-o); IV 124,8 (tassa so)asannaq¡ itthisahassanaq¡ jeghika
aggamahes1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -a); 161,7 (tasmiq¡ pana
kulasahasse pañcannaq¡ pañcannaq¡ kulasatanaq¡ -a dve
0
va<;!<;lhaki ahesuq¡); V 139,25' (bhiitesu -tta bhiipati);
394,6· (ya yeva vo seyyas1 ti ya tumhakaq¡ antare
jetrhika); VI 202,9· (tasma brahmal)a nama imasmiq¡
loke -a ti); 480,16 (candanasaraq¡ jetrhikaya adasi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se -aya); Ap 545,27 (tass' asiq¡ jet!hika dhita,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -a); Sp 1133,27 (samal)erassa -o bhago
databbo); Sv 170,16 (ekagehamatte -o ti gahapatiko);
PsI 224,9 (ya esa paticcasamuppadapadesu jeghika
avijja); III 29,9 (so kira tasmiq¡ kale tassaq¡ parisati -o
pamokkho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tasaq¡ parisatiq¡); Mp I
269,!9 (mantaq¡ uggal)hitva sakalajambud1pe -o
bhavissami); Dhp-a IV 73,7 foll. (tal)hakkhayo ca kasma
-o ti vuccati ti); Pv-a 75,3o (paccekabuddhanaq¡ -o);
Patis-a 107,18 (samadhi kusalanaq¡ dhammanaq¡
pamukho hoti -o); Cp-a 76,28 (taq¡ so)asannaq¡
itthisahassanaq¡ -aq¡ katva aggamahesit!hane !hapesi,
eds so); Vibh-a 308,34 {"-taya); 467,3o (avasesa bhikkhii
mayhaq¡ ovade vattanti ahaq¡ -o ti); - ifc see gama-
(sv gama2), cora- (sv cora1), hatthi-; - 0 -tara, mfn.,
campar., better, superior; Sv 162,24 (ayaq¡ attano
paccayadayake nigal)!hehi pi jetthakatare karoti);
ajefthaka, mfn., accepting no-one as deserving of
respect; Mp III 225,2 (appatisso -o anicavutti);
sajetthaka, mfn., accepting others as deserving of
respect; Ps III 183,!! ([bhavitabbaq¡] sappatissena ti
-ena na attanaq¡ jetthakaq¡ katva viharitabbaq¡); Spk III
249,22 (sappatisso ti -o).
jettha,f, se e sv jetrha.
jeta(r), m. [S. jetr], one who conquers, a victor; S I 85,30*
jeti
(hanta 1abhati hantaral!l -aral!l 1abhate jayal!l);
Sadd 495,29 (-a jino); 496,3 Ginatl ti -a yo koci
pugga1o).
jeti, see sv jayati.
jena, m. [S. jaina ?], a follower of the Jina, a Jain; ?
Sadd 369,16 (tehi -al!l ticivar~ asobhatha brahma-
datt~).
jemati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jemati, Wg § 13:30], eats;
Sadd 411,23 Gamu jhamu ñamu jimu adane: ... jamati
jhamati ñamati -ati, Be so; Ee wr jamu adane).
jeyya 1, opt. 3 sg. ofjayati qv.
jeyya2 , mfn.,fpp ofjayati qv.
jeyya3 , mfn. [cf S. jyayas, jyeya], better; elder; Abh 1022
Getabbe 'tippasatthe 'tivuddhe -~); Sadd 686,10 Go
vw;l<;lhassa -o je~!}Io ).
jevanl'ya, jevanika, n. [?], a kind of (edged) weapon; A IV
107,7 (rañño paccantime nagare bahul!l avudh~
sannicit~ hoti sa1ak~ e' eva -al!l ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
jevanik~ ca; Mp IV 54,2: salakan ti saratomaradi-
nissaggiyavudhal!l, -an ti ekatodharadisesavudh~. Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se jevanikan ti).
jesati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup je~ati, Wg § 17:46], sprinkles;
Sadd 442,27 Gisu ... secane: -ati).
jesat¡2 (and jessati2) pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup je~ate,
Wg § 16:15], goes; moves; Ja V 259,22* (yatha
araññakal!l nagal!l poto anveti pacchato jessant~
giriduggesu samesu visamesu ca; or to jessati 1; 260,29·:
jessantan ti vicarantal!l) =/= VI 496,2*; Sadd 447,23/oll.
Gesu nesu ... gatiy~: -a ti nesati ... dhatvantassa pana
saññogavasena jessati nessatl ti adini pi gahetabbani,
jessamano jessal!ljessanto, quoting Ja V 259,22*).
jessati\jut. 3 sg. ofjeti qv sv jayati.
jessate, see sv jesati2.
jehati, pr. 3 sg. [S. jehate, Wg § 16:43], strives after;
Sadd 458,12 Gehu ... payatane: .. . -ati); - see also
abhijihana.
jotaka, mfn. [S. dyotaka], illuminating; making clear;
expressing, explaining; Spll54,16 (imesal!l atthanal!l -a
ete vibhaliga); Ps V 103,1o (mahantanal!l channal!l
ayatananal!l -~ dhammapariyay~. Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-dhammapariyay~); Sadd 51,6* (padal!l etass' atthassa
-~); - ifc see attha- (sv attha\ dipa- (sv dipa\
nagara-, sasana-; - ajotaka, mfn., not making clear;
Sadd 817,3o (atthassa ajotakatta).
jotati\ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup jotate, Wg § 2:31: jutr
bhasane], speaks; Sadd 362,1 (yuta juta bhasane:
bhasan~ udiran~, yotati -ati).
jotatf, pr. 3 sg. [S. jyotate, dyotate], shines; is bright; is
splendid; Dhatup 120 Guta dittiyal!l); Dhatum 176;
Ud 9,5* (na tattha sukka -anti adicco na ppakasati); Ja V
205,31' (t~ pi -ati pabh~ ca muñcati); VI 100,4*
(nalaggivaQ.Q.a -anti sada kañcanapabbata); 173,29*
(pasada püra kaññahi -are); Ap 34,6 (te pi -anti abhaya
samanta caturo disa); 52,2 (uggacchanto va suriyo -issati
mahabalo); 337,8 (tatrapi me dipasat~ -ate
niccakalik~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -are); 360,12 (obhasento
disa sabba diparukkho va -ati); Bv 2:88 (akasagha ca
bhummagha ratana -anti tavade); Ud-a 358,7(obhasati
-ati dippati, Se so; Be dibbati; Ce, Ee -eti dippati); It-a I
128,14 (attano iddhanubhavena kijanti -anti ca ti deva);
245 jotati
Nidd-a 11 16,14 (yatha hi charikaya pa~icchanno aggi na
-ati) = Spk I 237,5 (-eti); Sadd 362,2 Guta dittiyal!l: -ati
vijjotati); 468,6; - part.pr. (a) jotanta, mf( -anti)n., Ja I
53,4 (kasikavatthe nikkhittamaQ.iratan~ viya -anto
matukucchito nikkhami, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -ayanto; =
Ap-a 57,25: Ce, Ee -ayanto; Be, Se -ento); VI 509,13'
(k~sapajjotane ti suVaQ.Q.abhaya -ante, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se pajjotante); Ap 87,17 (tava ñaQ.amhi -ante andhakara
padh~sita); 410,15 (ñiil).alokena -ant~ ko disva na
pasidati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ental!l); 433,24 (kaQ.ikaral!l
va -antal!l, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ental!l) = 445,2; 579,14
(sattasatasahassani patiyo tattha karayil!l najaggi viya
-antl rataneh' eva sattahi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -ante);
Vv-a 107,16 (attano sarirappabhaya vatthabharaQ.adin~
obhasena ca jalanti -anti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -enti);
(b) jotamana, mfn., Vv 52:5 (suriyassa ral!lsi-r-iva
-aman~); Sv 691,31; aor. 3 pl. (a) jotisul!l,
Ap 158,27* (yasmil!l ca jayamanasmil!l sabbaratanani
-iSUI]l, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -ayurp); (b) jotil!lsu,
Ud-a 150,1 (akasagata sabba jotiyo -il!lSU, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se ja1il!lsu) = It-a I 133,32; Cp-a 45,29 (sabbavudhani
-il!lsu); - caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) joteti, -ayati, illuminates,
makes bright; elucidates; makes appear, makes
manifest; expresses; A I 188,32 (te sakal!l yeva vad~
dipenti -enti paravad~ pana khul!lsenti vambhenti
paribhavanti); 11 51,31 * (bhasaye -ay e dhammal]l) = Ja V
509,29* (510,13·: paQ.<;lito puriso dhamm~ bhaseyya
joteyya); It 108,15* (te -ayanti saddhammal]l; It-a 11
156,4: -ayantl ti pakasenti); Ja 11 208,19* (ekakal!l pi
bahüjano na kiñci atthal]l -eti dhalikasena va kosiyal]l,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jateti; 209,r: attano appamattakal!l pi
va<;l<;lhil!l pabhavetul]l na sakkoti); Pa~is 11 133,3
(nibbattenti -en ti pabhasenti; Pa~is-a 607,10: -enti ti
paka~al!l karonti); Ap 336,27 (yavata nagar~ asi tavata
-ayissati); It-a I 5,3 (te hi vattabbal!l atthal!l -enti);
Pv-a !8,28 (vakkhamanam eva visesal!l -eti);
Pa~is-a 650,14 (atirocati ti ativiya -eti pakasati, eds so);
Mhv 23: 14 ( -ess~ buddhasasanal!l); 25:2 (paragalig~
gamissami -eturp sasan~ ah~); Sadd 101,26 (yadi hi
samanadikaraQ.apad~ sabbattha 1iiigavisesal!l -eyya);
362,2 Guta dittiyal]l: jotati .. . karite -eti, -ayitvana
saddhamman ti payoga); part.pr.
(a) jotenta, mf( -entl)n., Ap 356,16 (ñiil).a1okena -ento );
V v-a 53,5 (sabbapi dasa disa -enti eka1ok~ karonti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee sabba disa) = Pv-a 71,9 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-anti); (b) jotayamana, mfn., Ja III 141,12· (yatha cando
juQ.hapakkh~ rattil!l -ayamano); Ps 11 407,4 (im~
brahmaparis~ sannipatit~ obhasamanal!l
virocaman~ -ayamanal!l passasi ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
omit -ayamanam); - aor. 1 sg. (a) jotesil!l, Ap 462,14;
(b) jotayil!l, Ap 606,9 (-ayil!l jinasasanal!l);
absol. (a) jotetva, Ap 606,6 (-etva jinavakyani); Dhp-a 11
163,5; (b) jotayitva, Nidd I 169,23 (acikkhitva
thambhayitva brühayitva dipayitva -ayitva voharitva);
Ap 490,11 (sasanal]l -ayitva); Sp 33,9* (saligayitvana
saddhammal!l -ayitva ca sabbadhi); (e) jotayitvana,
Bv 2:217 (-ayitvana saddhamrnal!l); Mhv 20:56
(vinayadijinagam~ -ayitvana); Sadd 362,2;
pp jotita, mfn. [cf S. jyotita, dyotita], illuminated, made
bright; elucidated; brilliant; shining; Ap 60,23 (yenayal!l
jotan a
-a seyya adaso va susanthato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -o siya);
323,2 (diparukk:ha111 va -a111); Sv 660,23 (0 -tta pan' assa
palanasamatthataya ca Jotipalo tv eva nama111 aka111su,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -ta:ya); Spk II 48,15 (pakasito ti d!pito
-o); Mp III 163,2o (paveditani desitani -ani ti attho);-
neg. ajotita, mfn., Spk 11 9,17; caus. pr. 3 sg.
(b) jotapeti, makes bright; ? Spk I 177,24 (sampaha111setl
ti patividdhagugena vodapeti -eti); - aor. 3 sg.
jotapesi, Spk 11 175,27 (sampah3111sesi ti patiladdha-
gugena modapesi -esi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee omit -esi); -
se e also jotapaka.
jotana, n., -a, .f [S. dyotana], shining; iilumination,
showing; explanation; Patis I 18,24 (ekatte 0 '-agho
abhiññeyyo); Ud-a 358,27 (tava-d-eva titthiyana111
obhasit3111 attano samayena -3111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
takkikan3111 obhasita111 . . . -a111 balalapana111);
Patis-a 390,13 (-e ti atthad!na111 d!pane);- ifc se e attha-
(sv atthi), sasana-.
jotapaka, m(fn). [from jotapeti, caus. ojjotati 2], (one) who
makes shine, makes bright; ? Spk III 224,s
(sampaha111sako ti pati1addhagugehi modapako -o).
joti, m.n. (and mfn. ?) [S. jyotis, dyotis, n.], l.light,
splendour, radiance; (light, splendid; ?) Abh 884
(nakkhattara111sisv aggimhi -i); D III 233,1o (cattaro
puggala tamo tamaparayano tamo 0 -parayano -i tama-
parayano -i 0 -parayano) f. SI 93,27 (Spk I 162,23: ucce
kule paccajato ti adikena -ina yuttato -i, aloklbhilto ti
vutta111 hoti, Be, Ce so; Ee a<;l<;lhe kule; Se a99hakule
paccha jatiadikena) f. A 11 8S,11 foil.; Pp 52,17 (katha111 ca
puggalo -i hoti 0 -parayano); Vibh-a 380,1 (gatikula-
bhogadivasena 0 -bhave thito piyo); Sadd 362,2/oil. (juta
dittiya111: ... jutl ti aloko sir! va -1 ti patapo, atha va -1 ti
candadini); 362,8 (yo koci jotati khattiyakuladisu jatatta
ca rilpasobhayuttatta ca so -1 ti vuccati); - 2. a
heavenly body, a planet, a star; Abh 57 (nakkhatta111 -i
bh3111 tara); 884; Vv 16:2 (obhasaya111 jalam iva
jotipavako; ? Vv-a 79,17: obhasentl joti-r-iva jalantl
pavako viya ca tighasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee obhasentl
jotidipa111 jalantl pavako viya tit!hasi); Ud-a 149,32
(akasagata sabba -iyo joti111su); It-a I 90,4 (taraka-
rilpanan ti -ln3111, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ina111); Vv-a 79,18
(-I ti candimasuriyanakkhattatarakrilpana111 sadharal_la-
nama111) f. Sadd 362,5; Sadd 329,31 (nakkhatt3111 -i
rikkha111 bh3111 ice ete pariyaya); - 3.fire; Abh 33
(jatavedo sikhl -i); 884 (aggimhi -i); Vin IV 116,7 (yo
pana bhikkhu agilano visibbanapekkho -i111
samadaheyya; 116,14: -i nama aggi vuccati); SI 169,21*
(hitva aha111 brahmal_la darudaha111 ajjhattam eva
jalayami -i111); Th 415 (parinibbahisi varina va -i); Ja IV
206,10* (andho yatha -im adhit!haheyya; 206,18·: aggi111
akkameyya); V 208,22· (hilyamanassa -ino ra111si-
obhasite); Sadd 334,6* (aggi dhilmasikho -i
jatavedo ... ); - 0 -cakka, n. [S. jyotiscakra], the circle
of the heavenly bodies; the zodiac; Bv-a 267,10
(bhilmantalikkhakusalo ti bhilmisikkhasu ca anta-
likkhesu ca -' -acare jotivijjaya ca kusalo ti attho, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee bhilmiparikkhasu ca - '-acare jotivijjaya ca);
-
0
-patha, m. [S. dyoti~patha], the sky; Mhv 3:29
(nimmujjitva pathaviya gantva -ena va);
0
-parayana, mfn., attaining to light or splendour; D III
246 jotika
233,1o (cattaro puggala tamo tamaparayano tamo -o joti
tamaparayano joti -o) f. S 1 93,26 foil. (Spk 1 162,25:
kayasucaritad!hi puna saggilpapattijotibhavilpagamanato
-o) f. AII 8S,11joil.; Pp52,17 (katha111 ca puggalo joti
hoti -o); Sadd 362,7;- 0 -pavaka, m., a brilliant fire;?
light and jire; ?Vv 16:2 (obhasaya111 jalam iva -o;
cfVv-a 79,17: obhasentl joti-r-iva jalantl pavako viya ca
tighasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee obhasentl jotidlp3111 jalantl
pavako viya tinhasi); - 0 -pasaJ.la, m., a ''firestone";
Sv 965,!7 (tattha kira -a nama honti, atha te tayo pasage
thapetva ukkhali111 aropenti, pasiil_lehi tejo samughahitva
ta111 pacati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se jotikapasiil_la); Dhp-a IV
209,16 (sa agacchamana ek3111 tag9ulaniQi111 tayo ca -e
gal_lhi . . . bhattapacanakale tal_l9ule ukkhaliya111
pakkhipitva tesa111 pasiil_lana111 upari thapenti pasiil_la
tavad eva pajjalitva bhatte pakkamatte nibbayanti) f.
Patis-a 677,25; - 0 -ma(t), mfn. [S. jyoti~mat], endowed
with light or splendour, bright, excellent; Sn 348 (na
0
-manto pi nara tapeyyu111; Pj II 348,27: panna-
JOtlsampanna Sariputtadayo); jotimattara, mfn.,
brighter, more splendid; Ps 11 413,17 (nibbanato hi añño
dhamrno sappabhataro va 0 -mattaro va ... natthi, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se jotivantataro):- 0 -malika, n. (and -a,.f ?), a
garland of jire, a certain torture; M 1 87,14 ( -a111 pi
karonti; Ps II 59,2: -an ti sakalasarira111 telapilotikaya
vethetva alimpanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -malakan ti) f. A I
47,24 f. Niddi 154,11; Mill97,7 (-3111 pi dukkh3111, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -malak3111); 358,2 (so labhati
hatthaccheda111 ... -3111 ... );- 0 -rañga, see sv 0 -rasa;-
0
-rasa, m. and ~n;fn. [cf S. jyotlrasa], l. (m.) a certain
gem; Ap 68,28 (mal_li yatha -o akase cailkaml tada); 71,17
(indan!la111 mahanii3111 atho -a111 mal_li111 ekato
sannipatetva); Milll8,2o ( ... mahanilo -o veJuriyo ... );
Dhp-a I 198,6* (pilrentu sabbe sailkappa magl -o yatha;
198,s: -o ti sabbakamadada111 magiratana111 vuccati);
Ud-a 103,27 (vajiro mahanilo indanilo . .. pavalo -o
gomuttako ... , Be, Se so; Ce, E e jotirango, prob. wr);
V v-a 111,28 (--gomuttakagomedakadimagiratanan3111
vasena mañjighobhasa); Vibh-a 64,3 (seso -' -adibhedo
sabbo pi mal_li); Sadd 873,3 ( ... phaJiko pavaJo -o
gomuttako ... ); - 2. (mfn.) brilliant, fuil of light; made
of the jotirasa gem; ? Vv 9:7 (uppajjati -a111 viman3111);
Ja V 207,30* (imasma h3111 -e vanamhi; 208,21·: imasma
ti imasmi111 han ti nipatamatta111 -e ti hilyamanassa
jotino ra111si-obhasite); - 0 -vantatara, mfn., brighter;
more splendid; Ps 11 413,17 (nibbanato hi añño dhammo
... -o va ... natthi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee jotimattaro); -
0
-Vijja,.f, astronomy; Bv-a 267,11;- 0 -sattha, n. [joti +
sattha3; S. jyotil_lsastra], the science of the stars,
astronomy; one of the six Vedic disciplines; Abh 110;
Pv-a 97,28 (in cpd); Sadd 504,17; - atijotita,.f, abstr.,
very great brightness; Mil 278,7 (aggi -aya 9ahati, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se atitejataya); - see also jotisa.
joti(n), mfn. [from joti], shining, splendid; Sadd 1,9*
(tadino silasamadhipaññadivisuddhagugajotino).
jotika 1, n.(?) [from jo ti], a flint; ? a tinder-box; ? V in IV
116,3 (bhikkhil padlpe pi -e pi jantaghare pi
kukkuccayanti, so read with Be, Ce, Se; Sp 862,15: -e pi
ti pattapacanasedakammadlsu jotikaral_le); Sp 275,9 (-3111
ca kattarad3J.l9a111 ca gahetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jotak3111
 jotika
ca kattarayaghi~ ca); - 0
-pasaQa, m., a flint; ?
Sv 965,17 (tattha kira -a nama honti, atha te tayo pasal).e
rhapetva ukkhali~ aropenti, pasi\l).ehi tejo samughahitva
ta~ pacati, Be, Se so; Ce, E e jotipasal).a).
jotika2 , m. ffrom joti; cf aggika2 ], one who tends the
(ritual) fire; Ap 347,23 (aggika -a e' eva vasanti mama
assame).
jotita, mfn., caus. pp ofjotati qv.
jotisa, f [S. jyoti~a] astronomy; Mil 3,32 (bahüni e' assa
satthani uggahitani honti ...... itihasa -a maya ... ).
joJati,pr. 3 sg., see sv ju!ati 1•
joJeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jo<;Iayati, Wg § 32:104],
sends; Sadd 569,1o Gu!a peral).e: -eti -ayati).
jh
jha 1, [ts], the sound 'jh'; the consonant 'jh'; Sadd 604,19
(ca chajajha ña); 605,31.
jha2 , m., (gr.t.t.) (an arbitrary technical termfor) -i and -1
as the final of masculine and neuter stems; Sadd 642,22
Ghalivai).I).UVal).l).a: ivai).I).UVal).l).a yathakkama~
jhalasañña honti).
jhalikara, m. [ts], jingling, tinkling; Mhbv 99,20 (in cpd:
kanakakiilkil,likajalajhailkaraviravil).a~).
jhajjhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jharjhati,
Wg §§ 17:68, 28:17], blames; threatens; Sadd 350,23
Ghajjha paribhasanatajjanesu: -ati).
jhajjharika, f, ljhajjhañ + ki\2], a kind of plant; Ps 11
407,27 ( 0 -gumbato pi nicataro, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
jajjharika-); -se e also jajjharika.
jhajjhari,f [?],a kind ofplant; Abh 598 (-!):- see also
jajjhañ.
-/jhat, [S. Dhatup v]har, Wg § 9:19], to bec·ome entangled;
Dhatup 96 Garajhara pira sailghate); Dhatum 119.
jhatta, mfn., pp ofjhapeti, caus. ofjhayati 1 qv.
jhatva, jhatvana, ind. [absol., perhaps = hatva; or <
*k~atva, to S. vk~i or vk~an,; possibly to jhapeti qv sv
jhayati 1; cf J. Brough, 1962, p. 265], SI 41,16* (ki~su
jhatva sukha~ seti ki~su jhatva na socati, Ce so; Be, Ee
chetva; Se ghatva; = Nett 145,22*: Be, Ce chetva; Ee
jhitva); Jall 262,27* (hantva jhatva vadhitva ca, Ce, Ee
so; Be chetva; Se ghatva; 263,1·: kilametva); IV 57 ,8*
(dübhi~ karoti dummedho t~ cajhatvana gacchati, Ce,
Ee so; Be hantvana; Se hitvana; 58,9·: ta~ ca sahayak~
hantva pi gacchati, Ce, Ee so; Be chetva; Se hitva); 67,6*
(dadanti h' eke visame nivigha jhatva vadhitva atha
socayitva, Ce, Ee so; Be chetva; Se ghatva; = SI 19,24*:
Be, Ce, Ee chetva; Se ghatva); VI 299,22* Ghatva
vadhitva idha katiyana~, Ce, Ee so; Be chetva; Se
ghatva; 299,25': idha rajagehe yeva t~ pothetva
maretva).
-/jham, [? cfjhama ?], to bum; Dhatum 554 Ghamu dahe).
jhamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jhamati, Wg § 13:29], eats;
Sadd 411 ,22 Gamu jhamu ... adane: ... jamati -ati).
247 jhasati
josati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ju~ate (and jo~ati)], is pleased;
practises; Sadd 453,29 Gusi pitisevanesu: -ati); -
pp juttha, mfn. [S. ju~ra], practised; frequented;
Sadd 786,1 (ten' eva ca indena bhagavata kanici
gocarasevanaya kanici bhavanasevanaya junhani ti
indriyani); 854,8; - ifc see inda-; - caus. pr. 3 sg.
joseti\ Sadd 504,2 Gusi pitisevanesu: .. . -eti lokassa
piti~ somanass~ ca uppadeti ti ju1,1ho ).
joseti\ pr. 3 sg., caus. ofjosati qv.
josete, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [?], reflects on, considers;
Sadd 568,7 Gusa paritakkane: -eti -ayati).
jya,f, see sv jiya.
jhaya, m., jhaya,f [Pkt id.; <S. dhvaja], a banner; (but
according to ct: a window or opening;) Ja 11 334,16' (-a
ti kira dvarakavaravatapanan~ nama~, so read? Ce,
Ee jhasa ti; Be samalü ti; Se saha ti); - o• -alu, mfn.
ljhaya + alu 1], adomed with banners;? Ja 11 334,15'
(yüpo ti pasado ... dhajalü ti dhajasampanno haritamayo
ti haritamal).iparikkhitto, anhakathaya~ pana
0
-haritamayo ti parho, haritama1,1imayehi dvarakavara-
vatapanehi samannagato ti attho, Ee so; Ce jhasalu-
haritamayo ti parho; Be samaluharitamayo ti pi parho; Se
sahaluharitamayo ti pi parho; ad 334,5*: yüpo ... dhajalu
haritamayo ).
jhara, m. (and jhara, f ?) [S. lex. id.], a waterfall;
Sadd 922,z7 (nijjharo -o jhari); - o• -asa ya (or
jhara-saya), m(jn)., (one) who lives in a waterfall;?
Bv-a 10!,18 (dañsaya ti -a, ayam eva va parho).
jhari,f [ts], a river; Sadd 922,28 (nijjharo jharo -i).
jhallika, f [S. jhillika], a cricket; Abh 646 (ciri tu -a);
Mp 111 402,11 (cirikasaddo ti jhallikasaddo, Be so; Se
ciritikasaddo ti; Ce, E e ciri!iyasaddo ti ciriyasaddo ).
jhasa\ m. [cf S. jha~a, Pkt jhasa], a fish; (an alligator;)
Abh 671 ('m bujo -o); Thi-a 196,s (nakka ti -a, Ce so;
Be, Ee naga ti vijjhasa; Se naga ti bhujaga).
jhasa2, jhasa2 , f [?], (according to ct) a window or
opening; Ja li 334,16' (-a ti kira
dvarakavaravatapanana~ nam~, Ce, Ee so; Be samalü
ti; Se saha ti); - 0 '-alu, mfn. lihasa + alu 1], provided
with windows and doors; ? Ja 11 334,15' (yüpo ti
pasado . . . dhajalü ti dhajasampanno haritamayo ti
haritamal).iparikkhitto, anhakathay~ pana 0 -haritamayo
ti parho, haritama1,1imayehi dvarakavaravatapanehi
samannagato ti attho, Ce so; Ee jhayalu-haritamayo ti
parho; Be samaluharitamayo ti pi parho; Se
sahaluharitamayo ti pi parho; ad 334,5*: yüpo ... dhajalu
haritamayo ).
jhasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup jha~ati, Wg § 17:38], hurts;
Dhatum 478 Ghasa hi~saya~); Sadd 442,16 (kasa ...
jhasa ... yüsa hif!1sattha: kasati ... -ati ... ).
jhasa
jhasa 1,f [S. lex. jha~a], a plant; SAF: broom weed, lndian
mallow, Grewia orientalis L., Sida spinosa L.; Abh 588
(nagabala e' eva-a).
jhasa2 , see sv jhasa2.
jhlitala, m. [S. lex. id.], a plant; SAF: muccaady tree,
weaver's beam tree, Schrebera swietenioides Roxb.;
Abh 563 (gol!so -o).
jhata, mfn.,pp ojjhayati 1 qv.
jhana\ n .[Jrom jhayati 1], jire; buming;- ifc see geha-
(sv geha 1).
jhana2 , n. (and m.) [BHS dhyana], a meditative state; esp.
one of four stages of absorption in meditation; (also
sometimes) one of the four arüpa stages of meditation;
Abh 171 (cinta tu -am uccate); Vin I 104,4 (pa~amassa
-assa adhigamaya antarayiko); III4,s (savitakkarp
sav1cararp vivekajarp pitisukharp pa~hamarp -arp
upasampajja vihasirp); D II 237,15 (karul).arp -arp
jhayati); III 222,4foll. (cattari -ani); MI 33,31 (catunnarp
-anarp abhicetasikanarp di~!hadhammasukhaviharanarp
nikamalabhi assarp); II 15,5 (yathapa~ipanna me savaka
cattari -ani bhaventi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee cattaro -e);
III 13,33 (na kho brahmal).a so bhagava sabbarp -arp
val).l).esi); S IV 217,5 foll. (pa~hamarp -arp samapannassa
vaca niruddha hoti ... ); 263,20 (pa~hame -e cittarp
Sal).~apehi); V 307,5 (cattaro 'me bhikkhave -a); A IV
422,8 (pa~amarp p' aharp bhikkhave -arp nissaya
asavanarp khayarp vadami); V 157,27 (aharp pa~hamarp
-arp samapajjami pi vutthahami pi); Dhp 372 (natthi
-arp apaññassa); Sn 156 (kacci -arp na riñcati); Th 580
(rasesu anugiddhassa -e na rama ti mano) quoted
Mil 395,23*; Th 1114 (bhavehi -ani); Ja I 296,22 (tassa
silabhedarp katva -arp antaradhapesi); 474,10*
(avitakkena -ena hoti abhassarüpago); II 330,5 (esa
tapaso akasena agato bhavissati -assa parihinatta
samudde patito); III 101,24 (ekarp tapasarp -arp appetva
nisinnarp disva idhaloke ca paraloke ca o -sukhato
uttaritararp sukharp n' atthi ti ... aha); 517,12 (sah'
olokanen' eva pa~ibaddhacitto hutva -a parihayi);
IV 28,14 (himavantapadese assamapadarp katva
pabbajitva unchacariyaya vanamiilaphalaphalena
yapenta pal).l).asavassarp vasirpsu -arp uppadeturp
nasakkhirpsu); Pa~is II 21,6 (gambhirani ~hanani vuccanti
-a ca vimokkha ca ... abhiññayo ca pa~isambhida ca, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se -ani; Pa~is-a 544,9: -ani ti vattabbe -a ti
liilgavipallaso kato); Bv 2:79 (vas!bhüto aharp -e
abhiññasu paramiilgato); Dhs 167 foll.; Vibh 263,22joll.;
Kv 483,22 (tarp -arp tassa -assa arammal).an ti); 595,25
(puthujjano pa~hamarp -arp samapajjeyya ti); Vism 88,8
(paccailgikarp pathamarp -arp); 139,3o (kama-
dhatusamatikkamanato hi kamaragapa~ipakkhato ca
idarp -arp kamanam eva nissaral).arp); 150,2
(arammal).üpanijjhanato paccanikajhapanato va -arp);
415,14 (-arp vina natthi brahmaloke nibbatti); Sv 306,33
(pa~hamarp -arp ekakapparp brahmaloke ayurp deti);
Mp I 231,15 (dasabalassa dhammakatharp sutva saddharp
pa~ilabhitva pabbaji pabbajito upasampadarp labhitva
kamma¡~hanarp kathapetva0
-parikammarp karonto
0
-labhi hutva -am eva padakarp katva arahattaphalarp
papul).i); Pv-a 163,19 (isi ti jhanadinarp gul).anarp
esanatthena isi); Nidd-a I 130,1o (-an ti duvidharp -arp
248 jhapana
arammal).üpanijjhanarp ca 1akkhal).üpanijjhanarp ca,
tattha a~~a samapattiyo pa~havikasil).adi-arammal).arp
upanijjhayanti ti arammal).üpanijjhanan ti . . . vipassana-
maggaphalani pana lakkhanüpanijjhanarp nama);
Ap-a 196,21 (-an ti ... cittaviveko ti vuccati); Sadd 350,4
(jhe cintayarp: jhayati ... -arp); 550,26 (jhapa dahe: ...
nlvaral).adhamme jhapeti ti -arp); - ifc see anirakata-
(sv nirailkaroti); - o• -ajjhayana, n. (or 0 -jjhayana, n. ),
jhana meditation and study; (or practising jhana
meditation;) Thi 401 (--ratayo bahussutayo
dhutakilesayo, so read me with Th App II p. 240 ? eds
jhanajjhayana-; cfThi-a 245,7: lokiyalokuttarassa
jhanassa jhayane abhirata); - o> -ajjhena, n., jhana
meditation and study; Ap 574,13 (mahata ca payattena
--pararp mamarp katurp ca vadate mata, Ce so; Be
mama; Ee jhanajjhena sararp mama; Se jhanajjhena
sararp mamarp);- -anuyutta, mfn., devoting oneselfto
0
jhana meditation, intent upon jhana meditation; Sn 972
(-o bahujagar' assa; Pj II 574,3: -o ti
anuppannuppadanena uppannasevanena ca jhane
anuyutto); Sv 28,21; - 0 '-ukkantika, 0 ókkantika, n.,
missing out a jhana stage; Vism 374,3 (-ato)= As 187,9
(Be, Ce, Se so; E e o' -ukkantito) f. Pa~is-a 344,24;
Vism 374,29 (pa~havikasil).e pana pa~hamarp jhanarp
samapajjitva tatth' eva tatiyarp samapajjati tato tad eva
ugghatetva akasanañcayatanarp tato akiñcaññayatanan ti
evarp kasil).arp anukkamitva jhanass' eva
ekantarikabhavena ukkamanarp -arp nama); Ps II 256,14
(
0
ókkantikarp); - 0 -ki!a,f, the pleasure or sport of
jhana meditation; Ja III 45,12 (isipabbajjarp pabbajitva
jhanabhiññarp uppadetva -arp kilanto); Spk II 190,17
(tiyamarattirp -arp kilitva);- 0 -carima, m., the coming
to an end which is [in] jhana meditation; ? Nidd-a II
6,3ojoll. (assasapassasanarp nirodhavasena tayo carima
bhavacarimo -o cuticarimo ti . . . jhanesu purima-
jhanattaye va pavattanti catutthe nappavattanti tasma so
-o); - 0 -carimaka, mfn., final, coming to an end, in
jhana meditation; Vism 291,33 (jhanesu purime
jhanattaye [assasapassasa] pavattanti catutthe
nappavattanti tasma te -a); - 0
-jjhayana, see
0
'-ajjhayana above; - 0
-(p)pasuta, mfn. [jhana +
2
pasuta ], intent on jhana meditation; Dhp 181 (ye -a
dhira); Sn 709; Nidd I 36,9 (jhayi -o); Pj II 496,7 (--taya
vanantasenasanabhiratirp arahattarp ca kathesi); -
0
-vibbhantaka, mfn., distracted from jhana meditation,
losing jhana meditation; Vism 187,7 (imasmirp hi
kamma~~hane -o nama hoti, kasma, atibheravatta
kammatthanassa); 429,9 (cittavikkheparp patva -o hoti);
- see also ajjhanika, catukkajjhanika (sv catukka\
catutthajjhanika, tarpjhanika (sv ta[d]), tatiyajjhanika.
tikajjhanika, dutiyajjhanika, pañcamajjhanika.
pathamajjhanika.
jhapaka, mfn. [Jrom jhapeti], who sets jire to; - ifc see
kuti-, kula-, pal).l).asala- (sv pal).l).a).
jhapana, n. [Jrom jhapeti], setting jire to, buming;
destroying; Ap 49,24 (kilese o• -atthaya pabbajirp
anagariyarp); Mil356,1 (aggi -aya); Mp I 445.3 (kirp
pana Samavatiya saparivaraya aggina 0 -kamman ti, Be,
Ce, E e so; Se jhayana-); Dhp-a III 106,18 (Sirimaya
0
-kiccarp natthi); Cp-a 106,33 (mama sañrassa
jhapita 249 jhayati

0
-samattho ayarp aiJ.gararasi ti); - ifc see geha- -i); (b) jhayittha, Ja 1 4 71,14 (pal)l)asala -ittha);
(sv geha\ Vism 380,29 (therassa civare arpsumattarp pi na -ittha);
1 1 1
jhapita , mfn., pp ofjhapeti, caus. ofjhayati qv. 3 pl. jhayirpsu , Ja I 239,17 (sattakkhatturp tesarp gehani
jhapita 2
, m. [?], a kind of monkey; Ja VI 537,33' (camari -irpsu, Be, Se so; Ee nijjhayirpsu; Ce omits); 462,1
calan! laiJ.ghi -a makkata picu; 538,w: -a makkata ti dve (tassa sakalasarlre lomani -irpsu); Dhp-a I 227,14
pi makkatajatiyo va). (Samavatlpamukha pañcasata ithiyo gehe aggina -irpsu);
1 2 - absol. jhayitva, Ja V 275,13·; Spk III 6,24; - neg.
jhapitaka, mfn. Uhapita + ka ], bumt; cremated; Ja 11
55,2o (imasmirp yeva thane -anarp pamal)arp natthi). ajjhayitva, Pp-a 187,1s (jhayamano pi ajjhayitva va
1 tigheyya); - pp (a) jhiima, mfn. [S. k~ama], bumt;
jhiipeti,pr. 3 sg., caus. ofjhayati qv.
1 burning to charcoal; Ja I 405,20' (thoken' amhi -o
jhama, mfn.,pp ofjhayati qv.
2 a<;l<;lhajhamako va mutto ti attho ); 11 134,8' (kukkule -o
jhiimaka\ mfn. Uhama + ka ], bumt; Dhp-a III 371,14
(atthi nu kho ukkhaliya tale 0 -sitthanl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; sayati); Sv 798,19 (aggino va til)arukkhadinarp ... --taya
Ee o -sittha ti). va gatamaggo pakato hoti); Dhp-a III 62,6 (gandhakutirp
jhiimaka2 , m., a kind of plant; Ja VI 537,23* (padmaka -arp olokentarp); Nidd-a I 254,2s (soko hi uppajjamano
narada kugha -a ca harel)uka). aggi viya cittarp jhapeti dahati cittarp me -arp na me
2 kiñci patibhati ti vadapeti); - -' -aiJ.gara, m., charcoal;
jhiiyaip,l)amul absol. ofjhayati qv.
2 burnt embers; Sv 879,11; Pv-a 90,6 (ka)! ti ka1aVal)l)a
jhiiyaka, mf(n). [from jhayati ], (one) who meditates; D 111
94,14 (jhayantl ti kho pana Vasettha -a -a tv eva dutiyarp --aiJ.garasadisaVal)l)a ahosi); As 317,7;- --khiil)u, m., a
akkhararp upanibbattarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jhayika); - burnt stump; S IV 193,17 (ka)ako kho ambho purisa
1 kirpsuko seyyathapi -khal)ii ti); - --(k)khiil)uka, m., a
ajjhiiyaka2 , mf(n). [cf ajjhayaka ], (one) who does not
meditate; D III 94,24 (na dan' ime jhayantl ti kho bumt stump; Ja 11 92,22 (--khiil)uke nisinnam);
Vasertha -a -a tv eva tatiyarp akkhararp upanibbattarp, Vism 623,n; Ps III 249,2o; - --(k)khetta, n., a bumt
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ajjhayika; cfSv 247,14foll.: evarp field; Ja I 238,14 (ekarp --kkhettarp disva aiJ.gare
pathamakappikakale jhanavirahitanarp brahmal)anarp viyiihitva); Ps III 249,17; - --thiil)a, m., a bumt post;
garahavacanarp uppannarp) quoted Sadd 350,13; Ja 11 265,23 (eko seyyatha pi --thiil)O ti aha, Be, Ce, Ee
Bv-a 68,9 (na jhayati ti -o jhanabhavanarahito ti attho ); so; Se --khiil)uko ti); Spk III 58, lo (ayarp jhapitagame
2 --thiil)O viya ti aha); - see also a<;l<;lhajhamaka
- see also jhayika .
jhiiyati1, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. k~ayati, k~Iyate], burns, is onfire; (sv a<;l<;lha\ - (b) jhata, mfn., buming; Patis I 49,31
is consumed, wastes away, dries up; Vin 1 l5,s (samarp jhayatl ti samadhi ... samarp jhatatta samadhi;
(sabbarattiyo ca telappad!po -ati); D 11 264,21 (-ati su Patis-a 237,32: samarp jhatatta ti samarp jalitatta); -
nam' ajja Vediyako pabbato jalati su nam' ajja Vediyako caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) jhiipeti, -ayati, l. [cf S. k~apayati]
pabbato, Be so; Ce -ati ssu; Ee pajjhayitassu; Se -at' sets jire to, bums; cremates; cooks; Dhatup 600 (jhapa
as su); M 111 151,10 foll. (telappadlpassa -ato telarp pi dahe); Dhatum 280; 836; Vin IV 265,15 (imasarp
aparisuddharp vagi pi aparisuddha so . . . andhandharp upassayarp -essami ti ummukarp gahetva upassayarp
viya -ati); S 11 86,10 (seyyatha pi bhikkhave telarp ca pavisati); D 11 142,5 (sabbagandhanarp citakarp karitva
paticca vagirp ca paticca telappadipo -eyya); Pv ll:lO rañño cakkavattissa sarlrarp -enti); A III 62,27 (sarirarp
(te khuppipasüpagata parattha peta cirarp -are -etha thüparp e' assa karotha); Ja 11 54,14foll. (ma kho
<;Iayhamana); Ja III 423,9 (nahanodakarp pi accul)harp marp tata aññassa vasalassa jhapitasusane -ehi, ekasmirp
katva pighiyarp asiñcati amma piqhi me -atl ti); pana anucchighasusane yeva marp -eyyasi ti); Cp 2:10:6
VI 189,6• (cirarp dukkhena -issarp); 189,13* foll. (icchamano e' aharp tattha nasavatena -aye); Mil47,6
(kammaranarp yatha ukka anto -ati na bahi evarp -ami (naharp deva imassa khettarp -emi); 47,1s (padipo
sokena Bhüridattarp apassatl); Vism 706,s (ma aggina jhayamano til)arp -eyya); Vism 259,24 (ekarp bhagarp
-atu ma udakena vuyhatu); Spk III 66,3o (saka1ika udaraggi -eti); Mp V 71,2 (tasmirp hi janapade manussa
-issanti); Dhp-a I 222,13 (raja Samavatiya geharp kira ñatake mate na -enti avararp khal)itva bhiimiyarp
-ati ti sutva); Pv-a 33,19 (mama hadayapadeso nidahanti); Pv-a 62,21 (ambho migarp -etha amhakarp
udaraggina parito -ati dhümayati santappati); marpsarp detha chato 'sml ti); Bv-a 125.23 (handa narp
Sadd 350,21 (jhe dittiyarp: dipo -ati daruni -anti, ettha aggina -essami ti, Be, Ce, Se so: Ee wr khapessami ti);
-ati ti jalati); - jhayanti in Ee at Ap 438,7 is wr for Mhv 32:58 (sarirarp saiJ.ghadasassa tumhe -etha me iti);
1 Sadd 550,23 (jhapa dahe: -eti -ayati): - 2. [cf also
jayanti (Be, Ce, Se so); - part.pr. (a) jhaya(t) , mfn.,
1
MI 295,33 (telappad!passa -ato accirp paticca abha khepeti and S. vk~i, k~apayati,] bums up, consumes;
1 Ja I 485,s destroys, brings to ruin; weakens, injures: Vin V 161,35
paññayati); (b) jhayanta , mf( -ant!)n.,
(hatthisa1asu -antisu); Dhp-ai 221,12 (gehe -ante); (tadiso codako -eti attanarp); Ja III 441,22* (na capi -eti
(c)jhayamana 1, mfn., D 11 164,4 (-amanassa pana pararp na attanarp; 442,24·: -eti dahati pl)eti); VI 300,3*
bhagavato sarlrassa); A IV 103,4 (imissa ca bhikkhave (ayiro hi dasassa janinda issaro ghateturp -eturp atho pi
mahapathaviya Sinerussa ca pabbatarajassa -amananarp hanturp); Patis 11 44,3o (kamacchandarp -etl ti jhanarp);
dayhamananarp acci vatena khitta yava brahmaloka pi Ap 49,4 (ki1ese -ayissama); Sadd 550,25 (jhapa dahe: ...
gacchati); Ap 407,22; Mil47,1s (padipo -amano til)arp nivaral)adhamme -etl ti jhanarp); part.pr.
1 (a)jhapenta,mfn., JaVI 110,13'; Patisll 44,31 (-ento
jhapeyya);- aor. 3 sg. (a)jhayi , Ja 11 291,13 (niccarp
gandhatelapadipo -i); Dhp-a 11 240,21 (tassa muccatl tijhanavimokkho); Cp 3:9:4 (anupubbena -ento
jhapiyamanaya thapetva gabbhamarpsarp sesamarpsarp aggi mamarp upagami); (b) jhapayanta, mfn., Ps 11 351,25
 jhayati
(ka:Iakate matapitaro va arahante va -ayantena, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee -entena); (e) jhapayamana, mft¡., Sp 966,11;
Vibh-a 14,3o;- aor. 3 sg. (a) jhapesi, V in III 65,3o; S IV
290,27; Ja I 294,25 (imina saccena ayaip. aggi ma maip.
-esi ti aggiip. pavisituip. araddha); Dhp-a II 66,25
(pa~~asa1aip. -esi); (b) jhapayl', Ja V 123,8· (taip. dhanaip.
ma -ayi m a nasayi); Ap 29,16 (-ay!); Mhv 25:73 (taip. ...
kiltagarena -ayi); 3 pl. (a) jhapesu1p., Ja lii 163,25;
Sv 417,22 (mato ti sal1akkhetva -esuip.); Mhv 32:80
(rañño sarlraip. -esu1p.); (b) jhapayiip.su, Ja V 54,7;
Ap 542,18 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ayisu); Spk II 106,7; -
absol. (a) jhapetva, V in IV 308,15; Ja I 255,2o (daruni
uddharitva citakaip. katva acariyaip. -etva vanapupphehi
piljetva); Mi1134,9 (bhante Nagasena, tathagato sabbaip.
akusa1aip. -etva sabbaññutaip. patto, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-ayitva); Vv-a 38,13; (b) jhapayitva, Mhv 34:34;
(e) jhapayitvana, Ap 371,14;- see also jhatva, jhatvana;
pass. part.pr. jhapiyamana, mft¡., Ja 11 401,24
(saka1asarlraip. yamaka-ukkahi -iyamanaip. viya jataip.);
Vism 379,25 (tassa citakaip. aropetva ... -iyamanaya) ;-
pp (a) jhapita, mft¡., set on fire, burnt; cremated; cooked;
weakened; destroyed; Th 67 (ki1esa -ita mayhaip. bhava
sabbe samilhata; Th-a I 162,18: -ita ti indaggina viya
rukkhagacchadayo ariyamaggan~aggina samu1aip.
da<;l<;lha); Ja I 355,w (aggiip. datva -itani); III 512,4
(etasmiip. susane darucitakaya -ita); Patis I 49,31
(visamaip. -e ti ti samadhi ... visamaip. -itatta samadhi);
Ap 48,15 (ki1esa -ita mayhaip.; Ap-a 295,1: -ita sosita
visosita viddhaip.sita); Mi147 ,23 (añño so aggi yena
gamo -ito); Vism 76,zo (na hi matasañre ajjhapite taip.
susanaip. nama hoti, -itaka:Iato pana paghaya . . . taip.
susanam eva); Dhp-a II 67,5 (maya 'ssa pa~~asala -ita
ti); Nidd-a I 217,21 (da<;l<;lhan ti va ti aggina -itan ti va);
- neg. ajjhapita, mft¡., Ja II 55,23 (pathaviyaip. hi
ajjhapitatthanaip. va asusananhanaip. va . . . 1addhuip. na
sakka ti); Vism 76,2o;- dujjhapita, mft¡., (what is) badly
or incompletely burnt; Sp 453,25 (duddhote va dujjhapite
va patte akkharani paññayanti); 854,22 (-aip. pana na
vattati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dujjhamitaip.);
sujjhapita, mft¡., well-burnt; thoroughly burnt; Sp 854,23
(sujjhapitaip. manussa!thi pi cu~~aip. katva 1ehe
upanetuip. vattati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sujjhamitaip.); Mp I
445,12; - (b)jhatta, mft¡., consumed, dried up;
weakened; S IV 199,11 (yada kho te bhikkhave
chappa~aka jhatta assu kilanta); Vism 623,27 (chataka1e
samuHhitaip. rilpaip. hi -aip. hoti ki1antaip., Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se jattaip.); Sadd 550,23 foll. Ghapa dahe: ... jhatto
jhanaip., tattha jhatto ti khudapareto pacanaggina jhapito
ti jhatto, jhatta assu ki1anta ti ca paji); - ifc see chata-,
chataka-; - fpp jhapetabba, mft¡., Ja II 54,16 (tata ahaip.
tumhakaip. -etabbayuttakaip. !hilllaip. na janami);
V v-a 38,12 (jhayin ti ... tena va -etabbaip. sabbaip.
smi.ki1esapakkhaip. -etva thitaip.); caus.
pr. 3 sg. (b) jhapapeti, jhapapayati, Sadd 550,26 Ghapa
dahe: ... karite pana jhapapeti jhapapayati, E e so; Be
jhapapeti jhapapayati); - see also khiyati 1 (sv khi~oti),
ghayati 1.
jhayati2 (and jhiyayati, and jhati?), pr. 3 sg. [S. dhyayati,
dhyati], meditates, contemplates, thinks upon, broods
over; is thoughtful or meditative; Dhatup 401 (jha
250 jhayati
cintaya1p.); Dhatum 100 Ghe cintay'); 638 (jha
vicintane); MI 334,15joll. (ime pana mu~<;laka
sama~aka ... jhayino sma jhayino sma ti pattakkhandha
adhomukha madhurakajata -anti pajjhayanti nijjhayanti
apajjhayanti, seyyatha pi nama ulilko rukkhasakhayaip.
milsikaip. magayamano -ati pajjhayati ... ; Ps II 418,10:
-anti ti cintayanti); III 14,5 (so kamaragaip. yeva antaraip.
karitva -ati pajjhayati nijjhayati apajjhayati); SI 57,22*
(visamaip. maggam aruyha akkhacchinno va -ati) =
Mi166,30*; SI 126,9* (sokavati~~o nu vanasmiip. -asi);
Dhp 155 Gi~~akoñca va -anti khi~amacche va palla1e);
Ja li 234,10* (dijo ... vilpasantehi pakkhehi mandamando
va -ati); IV 346,17* (kap~o va -asi; 346,19·: kiñci
gocaraip. a1abhitva kapano vi ya -asi); V 251 ,29* (amatiko
apitiko rukkhamiilasmiip. -ati; 251 ,3o·: karuññappatto
-ati ti); Sp 296,11 (ujjhayanti ti ... avajananta taip. -anti
o1okenti 1amakato va cintenti ti attho); Sadd 350,3 Qhe
cintayaip.: -ati nijjhayati ... ); - esp. peiforms religious
meditation; D II 237,15 (yo vassike cattaro mase
patisalliyati karu~aip. jhanaip. -ati); III 94,3 foil. (te
araññayatane pa~~aku!iyo karitva pa~~akuFsu -anti ...
-anti ti kho pana Vasegha jhayaka); SI 123,9* (anasavo
-ami pamattabandhu, eds so; CPD sv anasava would
read jhami me); IV 133,17 (-atha bhikkhave ma
pamadattha); A V 323,5 (ajaniyajjhayitaip. kho Sandha
-atha ma khalmi.kajjhayitaip.); Dhp 371 (-a bhikkhu ma
ca pamado ); Sn 709 (-etha rukkhamillasmiip.); Th 37
(tasma vineyya sarambhaip. -eyya apurakkhato); 212
(sukallarilpo sumanassa -a taip. sunikkamo sadhu
subuddhasasane, Ce so; Be -ataip.; Ee, Se jhayitaip.,
prob. wr); 414 (ma khi<;l<;laratiip. ca ma ca niddaip.
anuyuñjittha jhiyaya Katiyana, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -a;
Th-a II 176,11: -a ti -as su aramma~ilpanijjhanaip.
anuyuñja, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ah! ti, and omit anuyuñja);
415 (-ahi jinahi Katiyana); 466 (tattha bhaddo jhiyayati,
Ce, E e, Se so; Be bhaddo va -ati); Thi 24 (sa
rukkhamillam upagamma aho sukhan ti sukhato -ami);
Ja I 41 0,23* (parosataip. ve pi samagatanaip. -eyyuip. te
vassasataip. apañña); Pa!is II 44,29 (nekkhammaip. -ati ti
jhanaip.); Ap 396,19 (bhagava ca tamhi samaye -ate
pabbatantare); Sp 1215,27 (-issanti vipassissanti ti); -
part.pr. (a) jhaya(t)2, mft¡., V in I 2,3 (yada ha ve patu-
bhavanti dhamma atapino -ato brahma~assa); SI 126,16*
(ekahaip. -aip. sukham anubodhiip.); Sn221; Th 85;
Thi 209 (sabbe me asava khi~a appamattassa -ato;
Thi-a 167,3z: -ato ti appamattaya -antiya); Ja IV 225,17*
(düte te brahme pahesiip. gali.gatirasmiip. -ato); -
neg. :Dhaya(t), mft¡., Dhp 372 (pañña natthi ajhayato);
(b) jhayanti, mfi -anti)n., M II 105,20* (appamatto hi
-anto pappoti vipu1aip. sukham); Dhp 395 (ekaip.
vanasmiip. -antaip. tam ahaip. briimi brahm~aip.);
Vv 50:12; Ja I 67,14 (appa~akaip. jhanaip. -anto);
Ap 520,1s (suññagare ca -anta); Thi-a 167,32 (-antiya);
neg. ajjhayanta, mft¡., Dhp-a IV 110,1;
(e) jhayamana2, mft¡., Ap 175,22 (muniip. vanasmiip.
-amanaip.);- aor. 3 sg. (a) jhayi2, D U 239,2o (karu~aip.
jhanaip. -i); (b) jhayatha, Ja IV 469,12* (tassa e' antepure
asi jhanagaraip. sumapitaip. so tattha patisallino eko
rahasi -atha); 3 pl. jhayi1p.su 2, Pj II 320,15
(abhijjhayi1p.sil ti .. . abhipatthayamana -iip.su); -
jhiiyana
absol. (1_1amul) jhayaJTI [cf S. dhyayam], Th 22 (te
s!tavatakalita sutt~ -~ nibodhenti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
jhanam; (fTh-a I 82,13foll.: jhayan ti samatha-
vipassanajhanehi jhayanasilaJTI bhavananuyuttaJTI); -
pp jhayita, (mj)n., thoughts, preoccupations;
meditation; Mp V 80,5 (kathaJTI kararyakararyaJTI
janantassa sindhavassa -aJTI hoti); - ifc see ajaniya-,
khaluñka-;- jhayitaJTI in Ee, Se at Th 212 is prob. wr;
Be jhayataJTI; Ce jhaya taJTI); see also
khaluñkajjhayati (sv khaluñka).
jhiiyana\ n. [from jhayati 1], burning; cremation;
Pp-a 187,15 (u~~ayhanavela assa ti -kalo bhaveyya);
0
Sadd 350,22 (jhe dittiy~: . . . jhayanajalanasadda hi
ekattha);- ifc see geha- (sv geha 1).
jhiiyana2 , n. [from jhayati2], meditating; being intent on;
It-a 11 67,15 (-ato jhayihi); Th-a III 98,29 (-en' eva ca
pamadarahito); Thi-a 245,7 (jhanajjhayanaratayo ti
lokiyalokuttarassa jhanassa -e abhirata); Sadd 350,6foll.
(-an ti duvidhaJTI -aJTI sobharyaJTI asobhal)aJTI ca, tes u
sobharyaJTI jhayi tapati brahmaryo jhayami akutobhayo ti
adisu daghabbaJTI asobharyaJTI pana tattha tattha jhayanto
nisidi adhomukho pajjhayanto . . . nisidi ti adisu
danhabbaJTI); - 0
-sila, mfn., having the habit of
meditating; V v-a 38,12 (duvidhenapi jhanena -aJTI);
Th-a III 77,5 (mahajjhayi ti mahantehijhanehi -a).
jhiiyi(n) 1, mfn. [from jhayati 1 ?], who destroys; ? - ifc se e
soka-;- see also jhayika 1•
jhiiyi(ni, mfn. [S. dhyayin] (pl. gen. f-In~, -inin~),
meditative, self-concentrated, engaged in jhana
meditation; who habitually practises jhana meditation;
Vin 11 75,37 (ye te bhikkhii -ino tesaJTI ekajjhaJTI
sen asan~ paññapeti); D II 265,2 (durupasañkama ...
tathagata madisena -I jhanarata tadanantaraJTI
patisal!Ina); MI 386,24* (sammaggatassa -issa ...
bhagavato ); 111 13,25 (bhavantehi -Ihi jhanasiiihi, Be so;
Ce omits -Ihi; Ee -Ibhi jhanasiiibhi; Se jhanasi!ehi); SI
24,9* (yaya dhira pamuccanti -ino marabandhana); 46,23*
(bhikkhu siya -I vimuttacitto); A I 25,23 (etadaggaJTI
bhikkhave mama savikan~ bhikkhuninam -In~
yadidaJTI Nanda); 111355,7foll.; IV 426,12 Hh' ete
bhikkhave bhikkhiihi samapattikusalehi; Mp IV 198,3:
ña, [ts], the sound 'ñ'; the consonant 'ñ'; Sadd 604,20 (ca
cha ja jha ña); 605,31;- 0 -kara, m., the letter or sound
'ñ'; Sv-pt 11 180,24 (dve gama natika ti laddhanama,
-assa cayaJTI nakaradesena niddeso animitta na nayare ti
adisu viya, ten' aha [Sv 543,11] ñatigamake ti);
Sadd 351,29 (-' -antadhaturiipani).
ñata~p in E e at Sp 738,31 is wr for ñataJTI (Be, Ce, Se so).
ñatta\ n. [BHS jñatra], skill or accomplishment; a public
reputation (jor skill or intellectual accomplishment);
Dhp 72 (yavad eva anatthaya -aJTI balassa jayati;
251 ñatta
-Ihi jhanabhiratehi); V 156,3 (-ina samapattikusalena);
Dhp 110 (ekah~ jivit~ seyyo si!avantassa -ino); 386
(-iJTI viraj~ asinaJTI katakiccaJTI anasav~ ... tam ah~
briimi brahmaJ.laJTI); 387 (sannaddho khattiyo tapati -I
tapati brahmal)o; Dhp-a IV 144,4: -I ti khl1_1asavo pana
gary~ vinodetva jhayanto virocati); lt 71,8* (pavivittehi
ariyehi pahitattehi -ibhi, eds so) = Th 148 (Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se -ihi); Sn 638 (tiJ.lJ.lO paragato -I); 719 (sutva
dhiranaJTI nigghosaJTI -In~ kamacaginaJTI); Vv 5:8
(disvana guryasampann~ -iJTI jhanarataJTI sat~;
Vv-a 38,w: -in ti ... duvidhenapi jhanena jhayanasii~
tena va jhapetabbaJTI sabb~ sañkilesapakkhaJTI jhapetva
thitaJTI); Pv 36:32 (-I susilo araha vimutto); Th 597
(veramba ramal)Iya te paviveko hi -in~; Th-a 11 256,11:
tadisanaJTI -InaJTI yattha katthaci paviveko yeva
icchitabbo); 1012 (taJTI -inaJTI satatik~... ahu
sappuriso iti); Ja 111 342,22 (brahmaryo mantehi na tappati
-I viharasamapattiya na tappati); Ap 17,25 (silava
vatasampanno -I jhanarato sada); 275,6 (khiryasavehi
suddhehi cha)abhiññehi -ibhi, Be, Se so; Ce
cha)abhiññehi so saha; Ee cha)abhiññahi so saha); 573,1
(-ininaJTI bhikkhuninaJTI aggaqhan~ apatthayiJTI);
Vibh 342,12 (cattaro -I); Mil342,15* (araññaka
dhutadhara -ino liikhacivara); Sp 489,1 (uttarimanussa-
dhamman ti uttarimanussiinaJTI-In~ e' eva ariyan~ ca
dhammaJTI); Thi-a 167,34 (appamatta -ini);
Sadd 350,wfoll. ( -I ti arammaryiipanijjhanena va
lakkharyiipanijjhanena va jhayanasilo cintanasilo -I,
jhanava ti attho); - ifc see apathaka-, khaluñka-; -
ajjhiiyi(n) 2 , mfn., not meditative, not (habitually)
engaged in jhana meditation; Vibh-a 462,17.
jhayika 1, mfn. [from jhayati 1 ?], who destroys; ? - ifc se e
soka-;- see also jhayi(n) 1.
jhayika2 , mf(n). [jhayi(n) + ka2], one who meditates; Spk I
292,31 (jhaya ti dvihi jhanehi -o bhava, Be so; Ce, Ee
jhayi ti; Se jhaya ti ... jhayita; ad SI 200,1*: eds jhaya);
- se e also jhayaka.
jhavuka, m. {S. lex. id.], a tree; SAF: common tamarisk,
Tamarix indica Willd.; Abh 561 (-o picu1o ).
jhitvii, see jhatva sv jhayati 1.
jhiyayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv jhayati2.
Dhp-a II 73.9: -an ti jananasabhavo yaJTI pi sippaJTI janati
yamhi va issariye yase sampattiyaJTI ca thito janena
ñayati pakato paññato hoti tass' et~ nam~); Ps 11
384,11; Sadd 350,27 (ña avabodhane: ... -aJTI); 351,4 (-an
ti jananabhavo); - o• -ajjhapanna, mfn., who has
obtained a good reputation; MI 318,29 (ñattajjhapanno
ayaJTI ayasma bhikkhu yasaJTI patto saJT!vijjant' assa idh'
ekacce adinava ti; Ps 11 384,llfoll.: ñatt~ paññata-
bhavaJTI pakatabhavaJTI ajjhapanno nu kho ).
ñatta 2, see sv ñanta.
ñatti
ñatti 1,f [BHS jñapti], propasa!, motion (for an official act
of the sailgha); V in 1 56,14 (sm_1atu me bhante sailgho,
aya!11 itthannamo itthannamassa ayasmato
upasampadapekkho, yadi sailghassa pattakall~ sailgho
itthannama111 upasampadeyya itthannamena upajjhayena,
esa -i); 317,29 ( 0 -dutiye ca bhikkhave kamme ekaya -iya
kamma111 karoti); 340,23 (yatha maya -i ca anussavana
ca paññatta); IV 152,29 (sailgho yass' atthaya sannipatito
ta111 kamma111 karissaml ti -i111 ~hapesi); V 142,24
(tajjaniyakammassa vatthu ca puggalo ca adi -i majjhe
kammavaca pariyosana111); 220,25 (katha111 -ito kammani
vipajjanti); Kkh 2 229,11 (tisso pi -iyo); Sadd 350,28 (ña
avabodhane: ... -i paññatti);- 0 -kamma, n., an official
act of the sailgha requiring only a motion; Vin II 89,2;
IV 152,9; V 116,25 (dve kammani apalokanakamm~
-a111); Sp 1195,15 (-a111 pi eka111 ñatti111 ~hapetva
katabba111); - 0 -catuttha, mfn., involving a motion as a
fourth requirement (ie with three proclamations [of the
kammavacaj); with the addition of a motion as a fourth
requirement; Vin I 56,s (anujanami bhikkhave -ena
kammena upasampadetu111); 317,37 (-e . . . kamme );
III 24,8 (samaggena sailghena -ena kammena akuppena
~hanarahena upasampanno ti bhikkhu; Sp 242,31: -ena ti
t!hi anussavanahi ekaya ñattiya kattabbena)
Vibh 246,5; A I 99,16; Sp 1195,13 (eva111 -ahi tlhi
anussavanahi kattabbakamma111); 1195,25 (--kamm~
ñatti111 ca tisso ca kammavacayo savetva va katabba111);
0
- -tfhapaka, m(fn)., one who sets out the motion;
Kkh 2 21,11;- 0 -dutiya,mfn., involving a motion as a
second requirement (with one proclamation of the
kammavaca); plus a motion; Vin I 317,29 (-e ...
kamme); III 156,36; V 225,24* (in uddana: -a111
satta~~ana111); Sp 1195,10 (eva111 -aya anussavanaya
kattabbakamma111); Sv 5,25 (athayasma Mahakassapo
-ena kammena savesi); - 0 -Vipanna, mfn., lacking a
motion; Vin I 316,36 (-~ pi kamm~ karonti
anussavanasampanna111); 0
-sampanna, mfn.,
involving a motion; Vin I 316,37 (anussavanavipann~
pi kamma111 karonti -a111); Sp 1383,34 (vatthusampanna111
hi -~ anussavanasampann~ ca kamma111 nama hoti);
- se e also pacchañatti~hapana.
ñatti 2 , pr. 3 sg. [cfñapeti 2, and S. Dhatup, Wg § 19:50],
kills; pleases; sharpens; Sadd 351,17 (ña maral).atosana-
nisanesu ... ñattl ti maretl ti va tosetl ti va nisetl ti va
attho, ay~ ca ñattisaddo . . . akhyatikapadan ti
da~~abbo).
ñatva, absol. ofjanati qv.
ñanta, ñatta2, n. [cf S. nyanta], proxtmlty; Abh 706
(sakasa111 cantika111 ñattam); - loe. ñante, ñatte, near to;
Ja V 26,6* (gaccham' aha111 porisadassa -e, Se so; Be,
Ce, E e ñatte; 26,9·: -e ti tyante santiketi attho, Se so; Ee
ñatte ti; Ce ñatte ti nayante ... ; Be ñatte ti abhyase
santike ti attho) = 486,13* (Se so; Be ñatte; Ce, Ee kante).
ñamati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup, Wg § 13:28], eats;
Sadd 411,22 (ñamu ji m u adane: ... -ati jemati).
ñassati,}Ut. 3 sg. ofjanati qv.
ñliQa, n. (and mfn. ?), l. (n.) [S. jñana) (pl. nom. -ani, -a,
acc. -ani, -e ?), knowledge; understanding; Abh 153;
V in I 7,20 (bhagavato pi kho -a111 udapadi
sattahakalailkato AJara Kalamo ti); 35,8 (vimuttasmi111
252
vimutt' amhl ti -a111 hoti); III 91,35 (-an ti tisso vijja);
D 11 33,7 (cakkhu111 udapadi -~ udapadi pañña udapadi
vijja udapadi aloko udapadi); 256,5* (tesa111 paturahü
-a111 amanussana dassana111); III 214,9 (khaye -a111
anuppade -a111); 220,16 (sattana111 cutüpapate -a111 vijja
asavana111 khaye -a111 vijja); 275,19 foll. (t!l).i -ani
atita111se -a111 anagata111se -a111 paccuppanna111se -~);
MI 167,27 (-a111 ca pana me dassana111 udapadi akuppa
me vimutti aya111 antima jati natthi dani punabbhavo ti);
323,23 (ida111 assa pa~hama111 -a111 adhigata111 hoti ariy~
lokuttara111 asadharal).al11 puthujjanehi); III 251,12foll.
(y~ . . . dukkhe -a111 dukkhasamudaye -a111
dukkhanirodhe -a111 dukkhanirodhagaminiya pa~ipadaya
-a111 aya111 vuccat' avuso sammadit!hi); S 1 129,25*
(-amhi vattamanamhi); III 112,27 (upam~ te karissami
etass' eva atthassa bhiyyosomattaya -aya); IV 298,28
(saddhaya kho gahapati -am eva pal).Hataran ti); V 127,29
(katamo ... hetu katamo pace ayo -aya dassanaya); A I
219,27 (samadhi nu kho bhante pubbe paccha -a111 udahu
-~ pubbe paccha samadh! ti); V 37,3 (etad anuttariya111
Ananda -ana111 yad ida111 tattha tattha
yathabhütañal).~); 195,4 (no ca khvassa eva111 -a111 hoti
ettaka piil).a im~ nagara111 pavisanti va nikkhamanti va
ti); Sn 378 (sabba111 tuva111 -am avecca dhamma111
pakasesi); 789 (-ena va so pajahati dukkha!11); 1078 (na
ctinhiya na sutiya na -ena mun!dha Nanda kusala
vadanti); Pv 30:1 (accherarüpa111 sugatassa -a111;
Pv-a 197,22: aññehi asadharal).~ sammasambuddhassa
-~ asayanusayañiil).adisabbaññutañal).am eva sandhaya
vutta111); Th! 71 (ceto paricca -a111; or cpd); Ja I 142,23
(atha tes~ bhikkhüna111 -a111 paripak~ agamasi);
III 349,5* ( -~ nu te brahmal).a bhi111sarüp~); VI 314,31
(attano 0 -taya upayakosallena); Nidd I 178,27 foll.
(yavataka111 neyya111 tavataka111 -a111 yavatak~ -a111
tavataka111 neyya111); 179,13 (sabbadhammesu buddhassa
bhagavato -a111 pavattati); Ap 20,24/oll. (yena -ena
sambuddho viharati anasavo ta111 -a111 kittayissami); 87,9
(sabbe te tava -amhi anto honti samogadha); 140,22 (-e
citt~ pasadetva); Pa~is 1 59,12 (anuppado kheman ti
santipade -am); 88,11 (yena -ena ime nana dhamma
ñata); 194,3o (katamani catuvlsati samadhivasena -ani):
Vibh 328,34 (katam~ dukkhe -~); Kv 309,22 (sabba111
-~ pa~isambhida ti); 314,w (tena hi anagate -~ atthl
ti); Nett 15,9 (imani dve -ani aññatavindriya111); 191,10
(-a111 paññaya niddisitabb~); Mil42,z (ama maharaja
ya!11 yeva -a!11 sa yeva pañña ti); 285,13/oll. (aparipakke
maharaja -e aparipakkaya bodhiya Gotamo bodhisatto
nekkhamma111 abhinikkhanto aparipakka111 -a111
paripacayamanena dukkarakarika kata ti); Vism 388,21
(pañcasu khandhesu -a111 otaretva vipassana111
vagghetva); 635,10 (atitikkha111 vo bhante -~. kada
tumhe pi aya111 dhammo adhigato ti); 649,6* (dasa -e
pajanati; 650,11: dasa -ani pajanati pa~ivijjhati
sacchikaroti); Ap-a 412,31 (bhagavato dhamma-
desananusarena -a111 pesetva); Sadd 239,2 (-~ -ani -a.
-a111 -ani -e); 390,1 (-a111 janan~); 865,12 (ñayate
-a111); - 2. (mfn.) knowing;? Sadd 865,9 (panudatl ti
panudano eva111 . . . bhavano -o asan o samal).O ev~
kattari); - ñiil).~ in Ee at It-a 11 170,32* and Pa~is I
70,21* is wr for jhan~ (Be, Ce, Se so);- ñiil).ena in Ee
 253
at It-a II 134,5 is wr for ñayena (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc see
indriyaparopariya- (sv indriya), kammassakata-
(sv kamma), cetoparicca-, cetopariya- (sv ceta[s]),
pubbenivasanussa ti- (sv pubba2), - o' -aipsu, m., the
sunbeam of knowledge; Jinak 1,3' (mohandhakaral)l
'tighanal)l pahantva -una dhammavar3f!1suna); -
0
anuparivatti(n), mfn., moving along with, occurring in
conformity to, knowledge; Nidd I 357,16 (sabbal)l
kayakamm3IJ1 buddhassa bhagavato -i; Nidd-a I 297,16:
-1 ti ña1,1al)1 anuparivatti, ñill,lavirahit3I)1 na hotí ti attho,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ñ31,1anuparivattatí ti ñill,lal)l
anuparivattati); Nett 16,22 (sabbo samadhi ña1,1amülako
ña1,1apubbaiJgamo -i); - o• -indriya in E e at Dhs 157 is
wr for manindriya (Be, Ce, Se so);- 0 -karaqa, mf(-l)n.
[ñill,la + kar31,1a 1], producing knowledge or
understanding; V in I 10,16 (ete .. . ubho ante
anupagamma majjhima pa~ipada tathagatena
abhisambuddha cakkhukarru.ü -1); S V 97,27 (satt' ime
bhikkhave bojjhaiJga cakkhukar31,1a -a); It 82,22 (tayo me
bhikkhave kusa1avitakka anandhakar31,1a cakkhukar31,1a
-a); - 0
-kittana, n., praising knowledge; Ap 367,14
(pha1a111 me -e); - 0
-kuntima, m.(?) [cfkunta,
kontimanta], a spear of knowledge; ? Bv 25:47
(satipha1akal)1 datvana tikhil,lal)l -al)l, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
tikhil,laña1,1akuntim3I)1; Bv-a 269,35: tikhil,l3I)1 °-kuntiman
ti pa~ivedhasamatthata tikhil,lavipassanañal,lakunta-
vant3I)1 vipassanañill,lanisitakuntavaran ti attho, Ce, Ee
so; Be pa~ivedhasamatth3I)1; Se 0 -kuntaman ti pa~ivedha­
samattha111); - 0 -cakkhu, n., the eye of understanding,
the eye that is knowledge; Vism 428,36 (id3I)1 rüpal)l
-ussa apath3I)1 agacchati m3I)lsacakkhuno dissaman3I)1
viya hoti); Spk II 354,8 (dve cakkhüni -UI)l e' eva
ma111sacakkhu111 ca); Ud-a 102,1 (attano
viriyabaladhigaten a -una passantassa); It-a I 99,27
(cakkhu111 udapad1 ti id3IJ1 -u nama);- 0 -cariya,f the
júnctioning of knowledge, or the activity that is
knowledge; Pa~is 1 79,5 (tisso cariyayo viñña1,1acariya
añña1,1acariya -a; Pa~is-a 292,6foll.: ñill,lam eva cariya -a
ñill,lena va carati ñate va carati ñill,lassa va car31,1an ti -a);
82,18 (aniccanupassanat thaya avajjanakiriyavyak ata
viññ31,1acariya aniccanupassana -a); II 19,16 (samadhi-
cariya ti catüsu jhanesu -a ti catüsu ariyasaccesu); -
0
-cara, m., the activity that is knowledge; Spk II 155,2
(-en a acari111 anubhavanacarena ti attho );
0
-tassana,f, trembling, agitation, from knowledge;
Sv 111,8 (paritassana ti .. . sa pan' esa tasatassana
ta1,1hatassana di~~hitassana -a ti catubbidha hoti); 111,16
(te pi tathagatassa dhammadesan3IJ1 sutva yebhuyyena
bhayal)l sal)1vega111 santas3I)1 apajjantí ti ayal)l -a nama);
0
- -(t)thavana, n., praise of knowledge; Ap 30,15
(Anomadassissa bhagavato phalam et3I)1 -aya, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee ña1,13IJ1 thavanaya); 393,2 (-ay' ida111 phai3IJ1,
Ee so; Be, Ce 0 -tthavay'; Se 0 -tthumanay'); -
0
-dassana, n., the seeing that is knowledge or
understanding; insight and knowledge; Vin I 11,20
(yavak1v3I)1 ca me bhikkhave imesu catusu ariyasaccesu
ev3f!1 tiparivan3f!1 dvadasakar3IJ1 yathabhütal)l -3I)1 na
suvisuddha111 ahosi); DI 76,15 (-aya citta111 abhin1harati;
Sv 220,3foll.: -an ti maggan31,13IJ1 pi vuccati
phalañill,l3I)1 pi sabbaññutañill,la111 pi paccavekkh31,1a-
ñill,lal)l pi vipassanañill,la111 pi); II 216,15 (sammasamahito
sammav1ppasanno bahiddha parakaye -3I)1
abhinibbatteti); III 134,3 (atít3I)1 kho addhan3IJ1 arabbha
sam31,1o Gotamo atirak3IJ1 -al)l paññapeti); M 1 92,36
(Niga1,1tho avuso Na~aputto sabbaññü sabbadassav1
aparisesa111 -3I)1 pa~ijanati); A II 200,19 (abhabba te -aya
anuttaraya sambodhaya; Mp III 181,9: -aya ti magga-
ñal,lasaiJkhatassa dassanassa); Th 171 (dhammadas3I)1
gahetvana -am attano); Mi1102,6 (bhagava sabbaññü na
ca bhagavato satat3I)1 samita111 -3I)1 paccupanhit3I)1);
Mp IV 143,2 (-an ti dibbacakkhubhüta111 ñill,lasaiJkhat3I)1
dassana111); Pa~is-a 136,4 (janananhena ñill,lam eva
dassana~~ena dassanan ti -a111); - 0
-dassi(n), mfn.,
seeing with knowledge; having insight and
understanding; Sn 478 (sabbesu dhammesu ca -1; Pj
II 411,7: sacchikatasabbaññutaña1,1o); Pj II 411,14
0
( -dassitaya sabbagu1,1asambhavo); - 0
-phusana, n.,
-a,f, touching, attaining knowledge; the contact that is
knowledge; Nidd I 270,22 (ñill,ladhigamaya -aya
ñill,lasacchikiriyaya); Spk 111 74,25 (sutte
sammasanacaraka vedana kathita gathasu -3I)1); Mp III
33,23 (nibbiinal)l t3I)1 hi tena -ena phuHh3IJ1); Dhp-a I
230,22joll. (dve phusana -a vipakaphusana ca, tattha
cattaro magga -a nama);- 0 -bandhu, mfn., associated,
connected with, knowledge; Sn 911; - o -bhüta, mfn.,
júll of knowledge; Vin 111 105,24 (cakkhubhüta vata
bhikkhave savaka viharanti -a vata bhikkhave savaka
viharanti yatra hi nama savako evarüpa111 ñassati va
dakkhati va sakkhil)l va karissati); S IV 94,31 (bhagava
Jana111 janati passa111 passati cakkhubhüto -o);
Sadd 555,11 foll.; o -va(t), mfn., knowledgeable;
intelligent, wise; Ja 111 106,1o· (tassa pa1,1<;litassa 0 -vato
pugga1assa); IV 270,13' CO-vata viriyam eva katabb3I)1);
VI 361,5· (0 -vantassa); Pj I 34,19 (0 -vantata); Nidd-a II
28,21 (munimun1 ti 0 -Vantiin3I)1 atíva 0 -Va);
0
-Vantatara, mfn., more knowledgeable; wiser; Ja V
60,14 (putto me pa1,1<;lito maya 0 -vantataro); -
0
-Vimokkhe in Ee at Pa~is I 70,22' is wr for jhana- (Be,
Ce, Se so); - aññaqa 2 , aña1,1a, n. and mfn., l. (n.) lack
of knowledge; ignorance; Abh 168 (moho 'vijja
tathaññill,lal)l): MI 54,25 (dukkhe -a111 dukkhasamudaye
-3I)1 ... ); 487,2 (etthaha111 bho Gotama -al)l apadil)l ettha
sammoh3I)1 apadil)l); S II 92,14 (etassa Ananda
dhammassa -a ananubodha appa~ivedha ev3f!1 ay3I)1
paja ... S3IJ1SM3IJ1 nativattati, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -al)l; Be
omits); V 126,31foll. (atthi rajakumara hetu atthi
paccayo -aya adassanaya sahetu sapaccayo -3I)1
adassana111 hoti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce sappaccaya); Sn 839
(adiHhiya assutiya aña1,1a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a);
Dhs 390; Kv 173,2 (atthi arahato -an ti); Pe~ 118,23
(catüsu ariyasaccesu yathabhüt3I)1 -3I)1 ay3I)1 avijja);
Ap-a 290,16 (bhante paccekabuddha maya tumhesu -ena
katal)l aparadh3IJ1 khamassu tva111); - 2. (mfn.) without
knowledge, ignorant; Vin V 194,16 (alajjita --ta
kukkuccapakatata) ; Jai 315,21' (uppanna 1obhadhamma
dupp<üaha evarüpe pi pa1,1<;lite -e karontl ti); III 228,6 (so
kira balo ahosi -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aññill,lí); VI 209,34'
(-a pana milakkha udak3I)1 devo ti vadanti); - se e also
aññill,laka, cetopariyañill,laka (sv ceta[s]), pañcaña1,1ika
(sv pañca).
ñiiQi(n)
ñiil}i(n), mfn. [S. jñanin], knowing; having intelligence;
(one) who is possessed of(right) knowledge; A IV 340,11
(-I ti bhikkhave tathagatass' etatp adhivacanatp arahato
sammasambuddhassa); 340,17* (yatp -ina pattabbatp
vimuttena anuttaratp); Ja I 249,5' (medhavi ti pai).qito -I
vibhavi); Nidd I 186,23 (pai).qitehi paññavantehi
buddhimantehi -Ihi); 289,6 (paññavanto buddhimanto
-ino); Kv 410,16 (araha cakkhuviññai:Iasamailgi -I ti
vattabbo ti);- aññiini(n), mfn., not knowing; unaware;
out of one's wits; Ja I 305,28 (so tasmitp ka1e satitp
pati1abhi ettakatp pana ka1atp -I ahosi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
ettake pana ka1e); Patis II 215,4 (hañci cittena abhisameti
tena hi -I abhisameti); Ps II 405,16 (avijjaya gato
samannagato -I andhabhüto); Dhp-aiii 106,1o (so -I
hutva bhattatp bhuñjitutp asakkonto, Be, Ce, Ee so, Se
anaññamano) = V v-a 76,6; Dhp-a III 395,14 (moneyya-
muni nama na hoti tucchasabhavo pana -I ca hoti ti, Se
so; Ee monena muni nama hoti; Be, Ce monena muni
nama na hoti tucchasabhavo pana aviññü ca hoti ti).
ñata, mfn., pp ofjanati qv.
ñiita(r), m. ffrom janati; S. jñatr], one who knows; Mp III
274,18 (rattaññü ti pabbajitadivasato paghaya
atikkantanatp bahunnatp rattinatp -a); Nidd-a I 294,22
(maggaññü ti paccavekkhai).avasena attana uppadita-
ariyamaggassa -a); Sadd 139,10* (jeta boddha -a sota);
144,12 (janati ti -a ti kattukarakavattamanaka1avasena
attho gahetabbo ); 144,16 (-a -aro -aran ti satthunayena
ñeyya).
ñiitaka, m. [cf S. jñati], a male relative, a kinsman;
Abh 243; V in III 26,9 (-a me atthi te maya posetabba ti);
M II 67,29 (ekaccassa bahü honti mittamacca ñatisa1ohita
tassa te -a anupubbena parikkhayatp gacchanti); S IV
239,14 (matugamo daharo va samano patiku1atp gacchati
-ehi vina hoti); Sn 296 (yatha mata pita bhata aññe va pi
ca -a); Ja III 120,26* (sakkaccatp upatighama uttamatp
viya -atp; 121,6·: mataratp viya pitaratp viya); VI 15,21*
(a1atp me tena rajjena -ehi dhanena va); Nidd I 418,2o
(tassa te -a samikatp acchinditva aññassa datukama);
Ap 505,6 (vinayi -e muni); Vibh 356,17 (-e arabbha
gehasito takko); Ps III 414,6 (atthi pan' assa koci -o ti,
atthi eka bhagini ti); Dhp-a IV 202,14 (atthi pana te
o1oketabba -a ti); Pv-a 21,9 (manussa attano -anatp
petanatp atthaya danatp datva); Patis-a 307,8 (nama-
gahai:Iadivase . . . -a kappetva pakappetva ayatp asuko
nama ti namatp karonti); Ap-a 95,24; - aññiitaka, m.,
(one) who is nota relative; Vin III 211,26foll. (ñatako te
Upananda -o ti ... yo pana bhikkhu -atp gahapatitp ...
civaratp viññapeyya nissaggiyatp pacittiyan ti); 212,34
(-o nama matito va pitito va yava sattama pitamahayuga
asambaddho ); Ja lii 17 ,s* (yattha posatp na jananti jatiya
vinayena va na tattha manatp kayiratha vasam -e jane; cf
17 ,19': attano jatigottani ajanantassa janassa santike
vasanto, Ce, Se so; Ee jatigottatp; Be jatigottadini; or
people one doesn 't know [cf S. ajñataka] ?); Mi1294,25;
Vism 95,6 (-assa bhaginiya samikassa bhesajjatp n' eva
katutp na datutp vaqati); Sp 77,22 (atta nama attano
n' eva ñatako na -o ti); Dhp-a I 223,13 (tassa -a pi
1añcatp datva mayatp Magandiyaya ñataka ti
agacchitpsu, Be, Se so; Ce ñatika; Ee Magandiyañatika);
III 267,s (mata va hotu pita va, yena saddhitp vissaso
254 ñatika
natthi so -o va); Mhv 14:20 (santi -a raja); - see also
ñatika 1, ñatika.
ñiitabba, mfn.,fpp ofjanati qv.
ñiitayya, mfn.,fpp ofjanati qv.
ñiiti 1, se e sv janati.
ñiiti2 , m. [S. jñati], a relation, relative; a kinsman;
Abh 243; Vin lii 15,13 (yannünahmp -I upanissaya
vihareyyatp -I matp nissaya danani dassanti puññani
karissanti); D III 165,15* (-Ihi mittehi ca); M II 73,11* (na
miyamanassa bhavanti t~a -I 'dha mitta atha va
sahaya); A I 294,30* (aroga sukhita hotha saha sabbehi
-ibhi); II 115,35 (-I va sa1ohito va dukkhito va kalakato
va); III 78,12* (-Inatp pubbapetanatp); Dhp 139
(parikkhayatp va -inatp); 204 (vissasaparama -I); 288
(antakenadhipannassa natthi -Isu tai:Iata); Sn 104 (yo
naro satp -itp atimaññeti); 200 (yada ca so mato seti ...
anapekkha honti -ayo); Pv 5:3 (idatp vo -Inatp hotu
sukhita hontu -ayo); Thi 346 (tatp matp -I amitta va kitp
matp kamesu yuñjatha); Ja II 353,1 * (sabbehi kira -Ihi
kosiyo issaro kato); III 357,21' (mittassa va -ino va);
IV 156,25* (-I me sukhasatpvaddha .. . te pi 'ham
upahitpseyyatp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -i); VI 36,1 * (anal). O
-inatp hoti devanatp pituno ca so karatp purisakiccani,
Ee so; Be pitunatp ca; Ce -Inatp; Se -Inatp ... pitünatp
ca so); Nidd I 134,2 (mata va pita va ... putto va dhita va
mitta va amacca va -I va sa1ohita va ime satta piya);
Cp 3:10:3 (saha -Ihi pi)ito); Mi1373,6 (vayaso yatp kiñci
bhojanatp disva -Ihi satpvibhajitva bhuñjati); Vism 94,2o
(-I ti vihare acariyupajjhayasaddhiviharika-antevasika-
samanupajjhayakasamanacariyaka ghare mata pita bhata
ti evamadika); Pj II 241,22 (mayhatp samiko ca mata ca
Mahapajapati aññe ca ñataka pabbajita -Ihi vina dukkho
gharavaso ti); Ap-a 93,18 (iti bhagava -ayo vandapetva);
Sadd 496,1s. (ime amhakan ti ñatabbaqhena -I); -
0
-gato in Ee at Ja VI 307,25* is wr for 0 -bhato (Be, Ce, Se
so); - 0 -gatako in Ee at Ja VI 308,w is wr for
0
-bhatako (Be, Ce so; Se 0 -bhatiko); - 0 -dhamma, m.
[ñati + dhamma 1], the duty, appropriate conduct, of
relatives; Khp 7:13 = Pv 5:12; - 0 -parivafta, m., a
circle of relatives; D I 61,27 foil. (appatp va -atp pahaya
mahantatp va -atp pahaya) = MI 179,18 foil. (Ps II
205,22foll.: so visatiya hegha appo hoti visatiya paqhaya
maha) =A II 208,2sfoll.; Sp 206,9 (matapitaro vanditva
assumukhatp -atp pahaya); Ud-a 168,3 (saparijanatp
saka1atp ca -atp nandayanto jato);- 0 -vissiisana, n. or
-a,f, inspiring confidence in, comforting, relatives;?
Ja V 352,17* (eso capi maha attho -a siya; cf352,26·: ya
esa ñatisangahasatpkhata -a siya eso capi mahanto attho,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ñatisanghasankhata); - aññate, m.,
one who is not a kinsman; Ja I 388,1 (ñatihi pi -Ihi pi
dinnake cattaro paccaye paccavekkhitva); - see also
appañatika (sv appa).
ñiitika\ m. [BHSjñatika], a relative; Psii 417,3 (tvatp
mama -o ti pana vutte mudubhavatp anapajjamano nama
natthi); Dhp-a I 223,14 (tassa aññataka pi . . . mayatp
Magandiyaya -a ti agacchitpsu, Ce so; Ee Magandiya-
ñatika ti; perhaps wrr; Be, S e Magandiyaya ñataka ti).
ñatika 2, mfn. [ñati + ka2], belonging to a relative; Ja IV
144,21 (ekatp Sakyadhitaratp anetva aggamahesitp
karissami ti evatp maya saddhitp bhikkhünatp -o viya
 ñatika
vissaso bhavissatl ti, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce
ñatake).
ñiitikii,f [see ñataka], a female relative; V in III 206,13 (-a
te Udayi aññatika ti); 235,19 (-ayo tumhiikaJY! bhikkhave
aññatikayo ti); - aññiitikii, f, (who is) nnt a female
relative; Vin III 235,23 (-iihi bhikkhunlhi); Sp 660,17
(n' eva matusambandhena na pitusambandhena
sambaddha ayaiTI-a nama); Kkh 2 247,27 (--ta).
ñiitmp., inf of janati qv.
ñiiteyya, mfn.,fpp ofjanati qv.
ñiipaka, mfn. [S. jñapaka], who makes known, who
informs; It-a II 152,19 (viññapaka ti ... vividhehi nayehi
dhammanaiTI -a avabodhaka); Sadd 708,21.
ñiipana, n. [S. jñapana], making known, informing;
Abh 1058 (yace viññatti -e); Vism 492,35 (0 ' -atthaip);
Ps 1 13,24 (amantes! ti iilapi abhasi sambodhesi, ayaip
ettha attho, aññatra pana -e pi hoti); Th-a 111 11,23
(aññesaip puthujjananaiTI o' -atthaip); Nidd-a 1 467,6
(aññataiTI o• -atthaya); As 51,37 (tena tena pakarena -ato
paññatti nama); - see also janapana.
ñiipeti\ -ayate, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofjanati qv.
ñiipete, -ayati 2 , [= ñapeti 1 ? see S. Dhatup, Wg § 19:50],
kills; pleases; sharpens; Dhiitup 598 (ñapa maral).a-
tosananisanesu); Dhatum 834 (ñapa tosanisana-
miiral).adisu); Sadd 550,1 O (ñapa tosananisiinesu: -eti
-ayati);- see also ñatti 2.
ñiiya, m. [S. nyaya], a general or universal rule; a right or
fit way; right method; fitness, propriety; Abh 760; 784;
Vin II 251 ,27* (in uddiina: evaip navavidha vutta
yathabhiitena -ato); D II 151 ,29* ( -assa dhammassa
padesavattl; Sv 590,8: ariyamaggadhammassa); 286,9*
(-ena viharissiimi); 290,1o (ekayano ayaiTI bhikkhave
maggo sattanaip visuddhiya . . . -assa adhigamaya
nibbiinassa sacchikiriyaya; Sv 750,3o: -o vuccati ariyo
a~~ailgiko maggo); III 120,8 (addhayasma
ñayapa~ipanno -aiTI iiriidhessatl ti; Sv 909,26: kiiral).aiTI
nipphiidessati); M 1 502,19 (vinlta ariye -e dhamme
kusale; Ps III 211,25 foll.: parisuddhe karal).e dhamme
anavajje); II 181,34 (sammadinhi hoti iiriidhako hoti -aiTI
dhammaip kusalaiT~); S 11 68,14 (ariyo e' assa -o paññaya
p., m. [ts], the sound 'r'; the consonant 'r'; Sadd 604,2o (~a
~a c;la c;lha !).a); 605,31;- 0 -kiira, m., the letter or sound
·r: Nidd-a 1 42,24 (visata ti pattha~a riipadisu ... visa~a ti
tebhiimikavyapakavasena visa~a. purimavacanam eva
takarassa -aip katva vyañjanavisabhagaip katva vuttaiT~);
0
- -vagga, m., the retroflex consonants; Sadd 606,12
(tatiyo -o); 608,3o (--ratakara muddhaja).
taiJl, ind. [onomat.; cf S. ~a~Tlkiira], a dull sound; Ja 1287,25
(pharasuiTI iidaya . . . [ka~!hariipakassa] glvayam eva
paharitva -an ti sadde uppanne rukkhabhavaiTI aññasi,
Ce, Ee so; Be dhan ti; Se thaddhasadde); - see also
255 tailkitamañca
sudi~~o hoti suppa~ividdho; Spk II 73,3 foll.: -o ti
pa!iccasamuppannaip ñatva ~hitañiil).aiTI pi
pa~iccasamuppado pi, yath' iiha -o vuccati pa~icca­
samuppiido ariyo pi a!!hailgiko maggo -o ti); V 169,9 (so
tattha -o ti bhagava avoca yatha Medakathalika antevas!
acariyaip avoca; Spk 111 226,32: YaJY! Medakathalika aha
so tattha -o so upayo taiTI karal).an ti attho ); Ja VI 224,18*
(raja tato pucchi . . . atthaip dhammaJY! ca -aip ca;
225,6· foll.: pati-atthaiTI ca paJiiTI ca karal).ayuttiiT~ ca);
244,25* (nayehi -ehi ca hetubhi ca; 244,29-:-ehi ti
ñal).ehi); Mil405,2s (paññaya caramanassa kho maharaja
yogino cittaiTI -e carati); Vism 219,12 (-o vuccati
nibbiinaiTI, tadatthaya pa~ipannatta o -pa~ipanno );
Sv 752,3 (visuddhiiT~ -aiTI nibbiinan ti tayo visese
avahati); Ps III 436,9 (yattha katthaci kule jato yo gul).ava
so briihmal).O, ayaip ettha -o ti); It-a 11 134,5 (dhammena
ti -ena, sammapaJ:ipattisailkhatena hetuna kiiral).ena, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr ñal).ena); Sadd 804,6 ( -ena yoniso ); -
ifc see gobalivadda- (sv go); - aññiiya 2 , añaya, m., a
wrong way or method; impropriety; Pv-a 279,1o (samena
visamena ca ti ñayena ca -ena ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
añayena); Th-a II 5,21 (na-y-idaip anayena jlvitan ti idaiTI
mama jlvitam jlvika anayena -ena. Se so; Be, Ee
añayena; Ce omits); 279,15 (yo ca labho adharnmiko
adhammena -en a buddhapa~iku~~ena vidhina uppanno ).
ñiiyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjiinati qv.
ñiisi, aor. 3 sg. ofjiinati qv.
ñeyya 1 , opt. 3 sg. ofjanati qv.
ñeyya 2 , mfn.,fpp ofjanati qv.
ñeyyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of janati qv.
-ñña, mfn. [S. jña], knowing; - ifc see akhetta-
(sv khetta), ratta- (sv ratta2), vaiTlsa-;- see also añña 1•
-nnu, mfn. [cf S. jña], knowing; recogmzmg,
acknowledging; - ifc see akkhara-, atta- (sv atta[n]),
attha- (sv atthi), uggha~ita- (sv uggha~eti\ upaya-,
kata- (sv karoti), kala- (sv ka!a\ khal).a- (sv khal).a 1),
khetta-, tatrfipaya- (sv tatra), dosa- (sv dosa\ dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ matta- (sv matta), ratta- (sv ratta2), vara-
(sv vara2), vipañcita- (sv vipañceti), sabba-.
tham, dham.
v'~itk, (*~an'kati, pr. 3 sg.) [cjtailka], to split; Dhatum 12
(~ailka dar al). e).
taitka, m. [ts], a stone-mason 's chisel; Abh 393 (-o
pasiil).adaral).e).
taitkitamañca, m. [pp of*~ailkati; CDIAL 5433], a kind of
platform or couch; a stone (chiselled ?) platform; S 1
207,2 (bhagava GayayaiTI viharati -e Sucilomayakkhassa
bhavane; Spk I 302,9 foll.: -e ti d!ghamañce padamajjhe
vijjhitva a~aniyo pavesetva kate mañee, tassa idaip upari
idaip he!!ha ti natthi, parivattetva atthato pi tadiso va
 tailketi
hoti, ta.J11 devaghane ~apenti, catunna111 ca pasfu_lanaJ!l
upari pasaryaJ!l attharitva katageha.J11 pi -o ti vuccati) =
Snp. 47,25 (Pj II 301,13: -o ti catunnaJ!l pasfu_lana.J11 upari
vitthataJ!l pasaryaJ!l aropetva k ato pasfu_larnañco );
Sp 1072,19 (ettha chavaku¡ika nama 0 '-adibheda kut);
cfSp-t [Be] III 284,15joll.: -o nama ... taJ!l susane deva-
ghane ca ¡hapenti).
faliketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup taiJ.kayati,
Wg § 32:96], binds; Sadd 521,27 (taki bandhane: -eti
-ayati, so read? Be, Ee taiJ.keti taiJ.kayati).
falati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup ¡alati, Wg § 20:4: ¡ala ¡vala
vaiklavye], delays; ? is disturbed; ? Sadd 438,2 (tala tuJa
velambe: -ati tulati).
fikara, m., the sound or syllable 'ti'; Sp 1077,28 (passanto
pa¡I ti sa.J11karato yava ayaJ!l sabbapacchimo -o tava
bhasita lapita apariyosita va pavararya).
fika, f [ts], a sub-commentary (a commentary to a
commentary ); Ud-a 94,9 (vittharo pana ... kathavatthu-
pakararyassa -aya111 gahetabbo); Sp-t [Be] 1 367,17 (yaJ!l
pana vuttaJ!l 0 -karehi acariyadharnmapalatther adihi);
Sadd 326,5 ( ... tika ¡Ika seka gatyattha: ... tekati ¡ekati
¡Ika); 748,2o (0 -karako); 8!8,21 CO-karo na vadeyya);
906,30 (a¡¡hakathat)kadisu pavattasaddagativinicch ayena
saha).
!h
tha, m. [ts], the sound 'th'; the consonant ·~·; Sadd 553,29
(thassa ¡hatta.J11); 604,20 (ta ~a <;la <;!ha rya); 605,31; -
0
-kara, m., the letter or sound 'th'; It-a 1 35,3o
(atthuppatti eva aghupatti thakarassa -a111 katva, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee omit thakarassa -a111 katva).
thaip, ind. [onomat.; cf S. ¡ha], a dull sound; Vibh-a 476,18
(so paro hato otarissami ti -an ti patito); - se e also \a.J11,
dha.J11.
thakati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup stakati, Wg § 19:20:
~taka/staka pratighate ], resists; goes; Sadd 322,2o (thaka
pa¡ighate gatiyaJ!l ca: ... -ati, so read? Be, E e dhaka ...
dhakati).
thatva, thatvana, absol. oftíghati qv.
thapaka, m(jn). [from ¡hapeti; cfS. sthapaka], (one) who
sets out, lays down; - ifc se e ñatti- (sv ñatti 1).
thapana, thapana, n., -a, f [S. sthapana, sthapana],
l. causing to stand, fixing, setting up; placing, putting
(in); setting down; establishment, arrangement; Ja IV
96,7 (so pañcasu ¡hanesu etadagge -aJ!l patva); Nidd 1
463,3 (evarüpa iriyapathassa a¡hapana -a sary~apana ... )
f. Vibh 352,24; Vism 84,27 (kiJ!l ida.J11 sarnadhanaJ!l nama,
ekarammarye cittacetasikana.J11 samaJ!l samma ca
adhanaJ!l -an ti vuttaJ!l hoti); 278,17 (-a ti appana); 622,1
(sannikkhepanaJ!l nama pa¡havitale -a111); Sv 200,26
(a!opassa mukhe -a111); 299,16 (tisso vidha desesi ti tiryi
-ani desesi); Ps V 64,7 (ettha paññapana nama dukkha-
saccadina.J11 dassana -a); Pj 1 132,11 (tass' attano samma
256 thati
tulati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ¡valati, Wg § 20:5: tala ¡vala
vaiklavye], delays; ? is disturbed; ? Sadd 438,2 (tala ¡ula
velambe: ¡alati -ati).
tekati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ¡Ikate, tekate, Wg § 4:29-30],
goes; understands; Dhatup 10 (sakka ¡Ika garnanattha);
Dhatum 16; Sadd 326,5 ( ... tika ¡Ika seka gatyattha: .. .
tekati -ati t)ka); 467,2 (sakka ¡eka lai!gha gatyattha: .. .
-ati t)ka); -pass. pr. 3 sg. tiklyati, Sadd 326,5 (tikiyati
janiyati Sa.J11Val)l)anaya attho etaya ti tika); - se e also
tekati.
-Uha, mfn. and n. [S. -stha], l. (mfn.) standing; located
(in), being based on; staying; - ifc see adharnma-
(sv dhamma\ anlka-, akasa- (sv akasa2), ina-, eka-,
kappa-, kucchi-, kü¡a- (sv kü¡a\ gaha- (sv gaha\ jala-,
tatra-, thala-, dvara-, dhamma- (sv dhamma\ pa~avi-,
pabbata-, phala- (sv pha!a\ bhumma-, vehasa-, sarnipa-;
- see also gahaghaka (sv gaha\ - 2. (n.) a stand, a
place for, - ifc see aggi-, go-; - see also kappa¡~ika
(sv kappa).
-Uhaka, mfn. [-gha + ka2], standing; located (in), being
based on; staying; - ifc see antalikkha- (sv antalikkha\
akasa- (sv akasa\ ubbha- (sv ubbha.J11), tatra-, pa¡havi-,
pabbata-, sañra-.
-tthiiyi(n), see sv ¡hayi(n).
paryidhana.J11 niyuñjanaJ!l -an ti vuttaJ!l hoti); Ud-a 173,3
(samlpe -aJ!l pi); Nidd-a 1 373,27 (bharassa nikkhepanan
ti pañcakkhandhabharassa -aJ!l); Pa¡is-a 50,9 (ekato
0
-taya); 581,22 (paññapana ti janapana ñfu_lamukhe -a
va); Mhv 3:7 (sara111 clvaradana.J11 ca sarnatte -a111 tatha);
25:17 (sarnbuddhasasanass' eva -aya); Sadd 553,26 (opa
thapa thapane); - ifc see aggala-, aggha- (sv aggha\
citta- (sv citta\ pacchañatti-; - 2. causing to stop;
omission, suspension; V in V 114,23 (-aJ!l pucchissa.J11
sanidanaJ!l saniddesaJ!l); 128,23* (in uddana: gilano -ena
ca); 164,18 ( ... pa¡ipuccha 0 '-atthaya okasakamma.J11
codanatthaya ... ); Sp 1412,31 (uposathapavararyana.J11
-aJ!l); - ifc see uposatha-, pavararya-, pa¡imokkha-; -
dutthapana, n., difficulty of fixing, of placing; Dhp-a 1
288,7 (-ato); - se e also ¡hapana, dhotapadaghapanaka
(sv dhovati), patta¡~apanaka (sv patta3).
thapanaka, mfn. [thapana + ka2], fixed, placed; Sp 617,11
(uracchado ti harasadisa.J11 ure 0 -pupphadamam).
thapana,f, see sv ¡hapana.
thapeti, fhapayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftighati qv.
fhavitva in Ee at Ap 159,3 is wr for thavitva (Be, Ce, Se
so).
fhasanta in Ee at Ps 111 44,3 is wr for <;Iasanta (Ce so; or
<;laJ!lsanta: Be, Se so).
thassati,ft¡t. 3 sg. oftit~ati qv.
thatabba, mfn. and n., impers.,fpp ofti¡~ati qv.
fhiiti, pr. 3 sg., see sv tighati.
thatuJP
thatmp, inf oftitthati qv.
thana, n. (and m.) [S. sthana, n.], Abh 91 (nimittarp
karar¡.arp -arp); 846 (-am issariyokasahetusu tbitiyarp pi
ca); PsI 102,7 (ayarp hi -saddo issariyathitikkhaJ_la-
0
karar¡.esu dissati); l. standing; the act of standing, being
fixed or stationary; continuance; V in III 223,1 (-arp
bhañjati); M III 113,2 (-aya cittarp namati); S V 78,4 (y e
keci pal_la cattaro iriyapathe kappenti kalena gamanarp
kalena -arp kalena nisajjarp kalena seyyarp); Sn 40
(amantana hoti sahayamajjhe vase -e gamane carikaya);
Nidd I 462,29 (gamanarp saJ.lthapeti -arp sar¡.thapeti
nisajjarp saJ.lthapeti); Vibh 321,18; Mil 180,6 (udakarp
pliJ.lina gahitarp ailgulantarikahi paggharati passavati na
-arp upagacchati); 216,2 (santi kho pana maharaja
bhagavato savaka thanacailkamika te -ena cailkamena
divarattirp vltinamenti); 237,18 (lokadhatu ... caleyya
kampeyya ... na -arp upagaccheyya); Spk I 19,24 (-e ca
vayame ca dosarp disva atitthanto avayamanto ogham
atarin ti); III 190,18 (paramatthato hi dhatilnarp yeva
gamanarp dhatilnarp -arp dhatilnarp nisajja dhatilnarp
sayanarp); - ifc see cira-; - 2. a place; (i) a locality; a
spot; a site; a location; a suitable place; a worthy
object; V in III 46,36 (adiyeyya ti ... -a caveyya); D II
140,21 (idha tathagato jato ti Ananda saddhassa
kulaputtassa dassanlyarp sarpvejanlyarp -arp); III 59,15
(passeyyasi dibbarp cakkaratanarp osakkitarp -a cutarp);
SI 124,1o (Maro papima ... tamha -a apakkamma);
V 361,13 (ma kar¡.takarp -arp parivajjehi); A II 3,5
(appasadanlye -e pasadarp upadarpseti); V269,11 (-e
kho brahmar¡.a upakkappati no atthane ti); Khp 8:4 (nidh!
va -a cavati); Ja I 108,2o (ettakarp -arp khaJ_litva); 419,6
(raja uyyanarp gacchanto tarp -arp papul_li); IV 138,15
(imassa milsikacchinnarp ekarp -arp atthl ti); 415,11
(bhatika ma idha tittha sasailkarp idarp -an ti); Cp 2:5:2
(hot' ettha -arp mahisanarp); Mil91 ,23 (purisena
mantayitukamena attha -am parivajjayitabbani
bhavanti); Sv 867,11 (nakkhattani pana attano -arp na
Yijahanti); Ud-a 117,25 (kuto ti kasma -a); Vv-a 190,19
1ah o -e vata pariccago kato ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits
-e); Patis-a 384,7 (uppatti-okasatthanarp hi tighati ettha
ti -an ti vuccati); - ifc see aggi-, arakkha-, ukkara-,
uccara-, kaJ.ltaka- (sv kar¡.taka\ cil_ll_la- (sv carati), jata-
151' Vjan), cetiya-, thita- (sv tighati), deva-, nipanna-
2 (imani pañca -ani patigar¡.heyya par¡.c;lito); Vibh-a 437,29
151' nipajjati), nisinna- (sv nisldati), vasana- (sv vasana ),
ürilhana-, vissasika-, saka-, sailkara-; - (ii) region,
5phere; metaphysical or spiritual state; SI 21,6* (dibbani
-ani upeti maceo); 96,16* (tadiso puriso raja mlyamano
janadhipa upeti tidivarp -arp); 129,15* (yarp tam islhi
pattabbarp -arp durabhisambhavarp; Spk I 189,22: -an ti
arahattarp); A I 130,2* (upeti bhaddakarp -arp yattha
gantva na socati); III 51 ,10* (segharpdado settham upeti
-arp); Dhp 225 (te yanti accutarp -arp); Vv 17:1 (idarp
,·imanarp . . . -arp mamarp kammavipakasambhavarp);
33:7 (dibbarp sa labhate upecca -arp); Pv 1:3 (saggarp ca
kamati -arp kammarp katvana bhaddakarp); 15:33
, asokarp virajarp -arp avasarp); Ja IV 111,23* (-arp natthi
dhuvarp cavan ti satta); V 451 ,6* (jatavedo va sarp -arp
khipparp anudahanti narp); VI 210,33* (hato pi so saggam
:.~peti -am); Ap 107,6 (patto 'mhi acalarp -arp);
Sv 1045,10 (yarp -arp patthetva kusalarp katarp tattha
257 thana
nibbattanatthaya sarpvattati); - (iii) one's place or
room, stead; -e, in the place of, instead of; Ja VI 88,2o·
(aharp pana vo puttassa Samassa -e thatva
padadhovanadlni sabbakiccani karissami); Dhp-a I
151,16 (ko nu kho mama -e thatva bhikkhusailgharp
panv1sat1 ti); As 311,!3foll. (cakkhupadassa -e
sotapadadlni rilpapadassa -e saddapadadlni pass! ti
ad!narp -esu sul_l! ti adipadani ca agatani); - (iv) a
place in a text; Sp 303,19 (imasmirp ca -e sabbatthakatha
akula lulita duviññeyyavinicchaya); PsI 175,13
(imasmirp pana -e aññesu ca evarilpesu ... agatatthanesu
suval_ll_lakaranarp musa ukka ti veditabba); Spk 11 32,11
(iti bhagava imasmirp sutte ekadasasu -esu cattari
saccani kathesl ti); Ud-a 283,18 (tasma imasmirp -e
ariyasaccani kathetabbani); Pv-a 120,31 (akkharacintaka
hi Idisesu -e su kammadvayarp icchanti); Mhv 1:4
(pasadajanake -e tatha sarpvegakarake ); - zfc see
gar¡.thi-; - (v) the place of utterance of a sound; - iic
see below; - 3. situation; (i) station, office, position;
Vin II 191,18 (te nlce -e thapesi); D 11 232,15 (raja
Disampati Jotipalarp mlii_lavarp . . . pettike -e thapesi);
284,17 (kirp panayasma devanam indo kammarp katva
imarp -arp patto ti); Ja III 263,24' (mahantarp -arp
vipularp issariyarp patto); Ap 38,24 (ayarp ca pathiko
bhikkhu . . . vinaye agganikkhitto tarp -arp patthaye
aharp); Sv 266,25 (u)are ca narp -e thapesi); Ps IV 103,21
(rajjarp va uparajjarp va aññarp va pana mahantarp -arp
patthento); - ifc see agghapanaka-; - (ii) position;
state; DI 161,17 (na ca koci sahadhammiko vadanuvado
garayharp -arp agacchati); S II 27,26 (dasabala-
samannagato bhikkhave tathagato catilhi ca vesarajjehi
samannagato asabharp -arp patijanati parisasu siha-
nadarp nadati brahmacakkarp pavatteti); IV 249,2foll.
(pañc' imani bhikkhave -ani dullabhani akatapuññena
matugamena . . . patirilpe kule jayeyyan ti idarp
bhikkhave pathamarp -arp dullabharp); A V 130,4
(appiccho bhikkhu appicchakatharp ca bhikkhilnarp katta
ti pasarpsarp etarp -arp); 270,2o (idarp kho brahmar¡.a
-arp yattha thitassa tarp danarp upakappatl ti); Dhp 137
(dasannam aññatararp -arp khippam eva nigacchati
vedanarp pharusarp janirp ... ; Dhp-a III 70,16joll.:
dasasu dukkhakarar¡.esu aññatararp karal_larp); Ap 77,2o
(bhavabhave sarpsaritva ete -e labham' aharp); 376,10
(sakkattadini pi tiJ.li -ani uttamani itthilirigarp ca hinarp);
- (iii) occasion; case, occurrence; matter, Vin V 222,22
(apalokanakammarp katamani pañca -ani gacchati,
osarar¡.arp nissarar¡.arp ... ); S lii 57,27 (bhikkhu assutava
puthujjano atasitaye -e tasarp apajjati); A I 36,15 (appaka
te satta ye sarpvejaniyesu -esu sarpvijjanti); 187,4 foil.
(yarp so til_ll_larp -anarp naññatararp -arp nigaccheyya);
11 118,16 (atthi bhikkhave -arp amanaparp katurp tarp ca
kayiramanarp anatthaya sarpvattati); Ja lii 338,23* (yad
aññarp dukkararp -arp tarp me akkhahi pucchito);
346,20* (bahilni -ani vicintayitva); IV 177,19' (dasa khalu
imani -ani yani pubbe akaritva sa paccha..m-anutappati);
Mil 29,18 (bahukani ca me -an1 pucchitabbani
bhavissanti); Vism 530,1 (avijja ti suttantapariyayena
dukkhadisu catusu -esu aññliJ.larp); Sp 305,1 (pañca -ani
oloketabbani); - ifc see pacchima-; - (n') etarp
thana
(hanarp vijjati, it is (not) the case; it is (not) possible;
Vin II 284,25 (yarp tarp jatarp bhiltarp saii.khatarp
palokadhammarp tarp vata ma palujji ti n' etarp -arp
vijjati); D I 175,1 (-arp kho pan' etarp Kassapa vijjati
yarp aññatitthiya paribbajaka evarp vadeyyurp ... );
III 30,4 (-arp kho pan etarp avuso vijjati yarp aññataro
satto tamba kaya cavitva itthattarp agacchati); 114,27
(yarp ekissa lokadhatuya dve arahanto samma-
sambuddha apubbarp acarimarp uppajjeyyurp n' etarp
-arp vijjati); A I 26,31 (anhanarp etarp bhikkhave
anavakaso yarp dighisampanno puggalo kañci
sali.khararp niccato upagaccheyya n' etarp -arp vijjati);
11 179,30 (-arp kho etarp brahmaJ_la vijjati yarp sappuriso
sappurisarp janeyya sappuriso ayarp bhavan ti); Ja V
235,12 (-arp kho pan' etarp vijjati yarp so imarp nissaya
agaccheyya); Vism 136,2* (hitva hi sammavayamarp
visesarp nama ma~avo adhigacche parittarp pi -am etarp
na vijjati); Pa~is 11 236,9; Nett 92,1o (samma-
sambuddhassa te sato ime dhamma anabhisambuddha ti
n' etarp -arp vijjati); Ps IV 109,20 (diqhisampanno
puggalo saii.gharp bhindeyya ti n' etarp -arp vijjati);-
4. quality; attribute; characteristic; D III 184,21' (ete cha
-a purisarp dharpsayanti); A I 151 ,29* (satarp etani -ani
yani sevetha pa~<;!ito ); III 42,3 (bhojanarp bhikkhave
dadamano dayako pa~iggahakanam pañca -ani deti);
Dhp 224 (etehi tlhi -ehi gacche devana santike);
Vv 32:7 (catubbhi -ehi visesam ajjhaga ayurp ca
VaJ_l~arp ca sukharp balarp ca); Pv 21:59 (dasahi -ehi
Aii.kurarp lndako atirocati); Ja VI 199,28* (ajjhayako
yacayogo ahutaggi ca brahma~o etehi tihi -ehi avajjho
bhavati brahma~o); Mil285,1 (catuhi maharaja -ehi
bodhisattanarp bodhisattehi vemattata hoti); Sv 234,s (te
aññe deve dasahi -ehi adhigaJ_lhanti); - 5. ground,
basis; reason, cause; V in I 250,31 (bhikkhilnarp kismiñci
kismiñci -e kukkuccarp uppajjati kirp nu kho bhagavata
anuññatarp kirp ananuññatan ti); IV 52,24 (tihi -ehi
pavaretabbarp dinhena va su tena va parisaii.kaya va); DI
14,15 (idarp bhikkhave pa~hamarp -arp yarp agamma
yarp arabbha ekacce sama~abrahma~a sassatavada
sassatarp attanarp ca lokarp ca paññapenti); MI 14,17
(thera bhikkhil tlhi -ehi garayha bhavanti); 281,27
(samaJ_lakasa~anarp apayikanarp -anarp duggati-
vedaniyanarp appahana; Ps 11 325,11: apaye
nibbattapanakanarp kara~anam); Ja V 433,1o (aqhahi ...
-ehi itthi samikarp avajanati daliddata aturata ji~~akata
suraso~<;!ata ... ); Sp 258,nfoll. (ko janeyya ettakesu
-esu parajikarp ettakesu thullaccayarp ettakesu dukkatan
ti); - ifc see anussati-, kaii.kha-, kamma-; - 6. stance;
standpoint; condition; ? Vin I 5,1 (duddasarp idarp -arp
yad idarp idappaccayatapaticcasamuppado ); D I 162,22
(tehi pi me saddhirp ekaccesu -esu sameti ekaccesu -esu
na sameti); III 52,26 (tarp . . . -arp uttaritararp ca
paJ_litatararp ca yenaharp savake vinemi); S III 117,18
(tarp tathagato imesu catilsu -esu paññapayamano
paññapeti hoti tathagato parammarai_la ti ... ); A III 54,11
(jaradhammarp ma jiñ ti alabbhaniyarp -arp samaJ_lena
va brahma~ena va); Patis 11 21,5 (gambhirani -ani
vuccanti jhanani ca vimokkha ca samadhi ca ... ); Ap 3,w
(gambhirarp nipu~arp -arp paññaya vinibujjhare);
Mil 327,21/oll. (atthi pana tarp -arp yattha thito samma
258 thana
patipanno nibbanarp sacchikarotl ti . . . siiarp maharaja
-arp);- 7. musical pitch, tone; Mp III 390,4* (satta sara
tayo gama mucchana ekavisati -a ekilnapaññasa ice ete
sarama~<;lalarp; Mp-t [Be] III 121,4: ekekasseva sarassa
satta satta thanabheda); - thanaso, l. at once; on the
spot; in a moment; V in III 70,21 (anapanassatisamadhi ...
uppannuppanne ca papake akusa1e dhamme -aso
antaradhapeti; Sp 404,9: kha~en' eva antaradhapeti); S l
193,4 (kinnu te V aii.gisa ima gathayo pub be parivitakkita
udahu -aso va tarp patibhantl ti); V 381 ,3o (-aso vedana
patippassambheyya, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se patippa-
ssambheyyurp; Spk III 288,27: kha~ena vedana
patippassambheyya, eds so); A III 238,6 (tassa kusalo
bhisakko -aso abadharp nihareyya); IV 263,4
(yadisakarp va~~arp akaii.khama tadisakarp va~~arp -aso
patilabhama); Pv 4:4 (ayarp ca kho dakkhi~a dinna
saii.ghamhi suppatighita digharattarp hitay' assa -aso
upakappati; Pv-a 19,3: tarp kha~arp yeva nipphajjati);
Vism 234,22 (mara~avuqhinipatena -aso vilpasanto);-
2. as to the cause; MI 70,4 (tathagato atitanagata-
paccuppannanarp kammasamadananarp -aso hetuso
vipakarp yathabhutarp pajanati; Ps 11 29,3: paccayato
e' eva hetuto ca); Nett 94,15 (yarp ettha ña~arp hetuso
-aso anodhiso ); - thanesu in E e at It-a 11 95,6* is prob
wr for sa~thanesu (Be, Ce, Se so); _o• -antara, n., l. a
position, office; Ja lll 448,27 (seqhit(hanadihi -ehi
palobhito); VI 389,26 (tesarp -ani patipakatikani
karapesi); Sp 1115,3 (abo vataharp pi evarilparp -arp
papu~eyyan ti); Sv 523,10 (kirp te tatra -an ti pucchirpsu
vinicchayamacco 'harp asmi ti); Dhp-a I 185,22 (raja
dhitima puriso idan' ev' assa -arp dassami ti ...
seqhit(hanarp adasi); Mhv 26:1 (raja mahayaso -arp
sarpvidahi yodhanarp so yatharaharp); - 2. another
place, a different place; Sp 188,9 (vidhamati ti -arp
neti); - 0 araha, mfn., fit to continue, to stand; Vin I
111,10 (kammarp dhammikarp akupparp -arp); III 24,9
(samaggena sali.ghena ñatticatutthena kammena
akuppena -ena upasampanno ti bhikkhu; cfSp 243,4:
-ena ti karaJ_larahena satthusasanarahena);
neg. at(hanaraha, mfn., Vin I 111,12;- 0 '-uppatti,f and
mfn., arising in a particular case; coming into being at
that moment; Sp 963,24 (medhavi ti -iya paññaya
samannagato); Sv 1005,24 (accayikakicce va bhaye va
uppanne tassa tassa tikicchanattharp -iya); V v-a 37,4;-
o• -uppattika, mfn., arising in a particular case; coming
into being at that moment; Ja VI 304,16' (vicakkha~o ti
tarpkha~en' eva -aya kara~avindanapaññaya yutto);
Vism 440,1o (tarpkha~appavattarp -arp kosallarp
upayakosallarp nama); o -karaJ}.asampada,.f.,
perfection, correctness, of place and production of
utterance; Sp 969,22 (bukaradhakaradinarp vyañjananarp
-arp ahapentena; Sp-t [Be] III 203,3: ettha uradini
thanani sarpvutadini kara~ani ti veditabbani); -
0
-cailkama, n. and mfn., l. (n.) standing and walking; (a
place for standing and walking; ? ) Ap 48,9 (vinayo
asayarp mayharp vinayo -arp; Ap-a 294,10: vinayo
mayharp savanadikiccakara~ena thitaqhanarp ca
cali.kamaqhanarp ca); Sp 1232,5 (seyyarp akappetva -ehi
vitinamentu); Sv 190,5 (satta vassani -am eva
adhighasi); - 2. (mfn.) one who (only) stands and
thanika
walks; Mil 342,17' (nesajjika santhatika atho pi -a); -
0
-Cailkamana, n., standing and walking; Ap !8,11
(pallailkena nisajjaya -ena ca, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se thana
cailkamanena); - 0 -cailkami(n), mfn., one who (only)
stand.~ and walks; Ap 19,9 (-ino keci keci nesajjika isi,
Be, Ce, Ap-a so; Ee, Se 0 -cailkamiya);- 0 -cailkamika,
o -cailkamiya, mfn., one who (only) stands and walks;
Ap 19,9 (0 -cailkamiya keci, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce, Ap-a
0
-cailkamino); Mil216,2 (santi kho pana maharaja
bhagavato savaka -a te ~hanena cailkamanena divaratti~T~
vitinamenti);- atthana, n. and mfn., l. (n.) (i) what is
not the case; an impossibility; V in II 194,19 (-a111 eta11J
bhikkhave anavakaso yo parüpakkamena tathagata11J
jivita voropeyya, anupakkamena bhikkhave tathagata
parinibbayanti); D III 1 14,24 (-am eta11J anavakaso y~
ekissa lokadhatuya dve arahanto sammasambuddha
apubb~ acarima111 uppajjeyyu11J); M II 203,27 (-a111 kho
et~ maf.!ava anavakaso ya111 nissaqhatil,la-
kaghupildanam aggi11J jaleyya aññatra iddhimata);
III 64,16 (-a111 eta11J anavakaso y~ di!lhisampanno
puggalo kiñci sailkharaiTI niccato upagaccheyya; Ps IV
!06,26: -an ti hetupa~ikkhepo); 129,21 (--tam ca
anavakasat~ ca pavedetva, Be, Ce so; Se --tta11J; Ee
-a111 ca anavakasa111 ca); A IV 206,15 (-a111 eta111
anavakaso yaiTI tathagato aparisuddhaya pansaya
patimokkha11J uddiseyya); Sn 54 (-a t~
sailgal,likaratassa y~ phassaye samayika11J vimutti11J;
Pj II IOS,1s: -a tan ti -a111 ta~T~ ... anunasikassa lopo
kato); Ja I 256,15; Ap 6!,18 (sace vaseyya agilra11J
cakkavatti bhaveyya so -a~T~ et~ yaiTI tadi agare ratim
ajjhaga); As 30,4; - (ii) not a suitable place; not a
worthy object; A V IS0,22 (aghata~T~ bandhati -e ca
kuppati); 269,2o (ida~T~ pi kho brilhmal,la -a~T~ yattha
~hitassa ta111 danaiTI na upakappati); Ja I 487,13 (tata tvaiTI
-e vissasaiTI karosi); VI 566,15 (-e vide se mata Maddi);
Sp 458,19 (sace pana -e ~hitan ti aññasmi~T~ ~hane
~hapeti);- 2. (mfn.) without a position or office; Vin II
191, 1s (y e te mahamatta eva111 mati111 aka~T~su .. . te -e
akasi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee abhabbe); - aghanaiTI in Ce,
Ee, Se at Sp 1199,19 is prob. wr for agana111 (Be so);-
see also thanika, kammatthanika (sv kamma),
kumbhatthanakatha (sv kumb.ha2), navaghanika
(sv navi).
thanika, mfn. [S. sthanika], l. belonging to a state or
stage or position; - ifc see eka-, cha- (sv cha2), dvi-,
nica-; - 2. taking the place of, - ifc see garu-
(sv garu 2).
thaniya, rhaniya, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) [cfS. sthaniya]
(i) standing, having a certain position; - ifc see ucca-,
dhuva-;- (ii) being a source ora cause (for);- ifc see
asava- (sv asava2 ), kailkha-, domanassa-, dosa-
(sv dosa2); - (iii) being a suitable object for; - ifc see
karul,la-, cetiya-; - (iv) taking the place of, acting as; -
2
ifc see kal,l~aka- (sv kaf.!raka\ garu- (sv garu ); - 2. (n.)
[S. lex. sthaniya] a town; Abh 198 (pura111 nagaram ...
-a111 pu~abhedana~T~).
thapana, n. [S. sthapana], placing; setting, fixing; Pj II
173,4 (tathavidhassa issariyasmi~T~ -a11J, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be ~hapana~T~); Ud-a 111,10 (sata~T~ va sahassaiTI va
0
-vasena dhanadal,l<;lena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kahapaf.la-
259 thiti
vasena); - see also ~hapana.
thapeti, thapayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofti!!hati qv.
thayati\ pr. 3 sg., see sv ti!!hati.
thayate, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup snayati, stayati,
Wg § 22:25], wraps round; Sadd 354,19 (!he ve~hane:
-ati).
1
thayati , !hiyati , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ~!yayati (and
3
styayati), Wg § 22:14], sounds; becomes compact;
Sadd 354,18 Crhe saddasailghatesu ~hiyati); 468,1 foil. (!he
the saddasailghatesu: -ati thayati, bhave !hiyati thiyati,
itthi thi); - see also thiyati.
thayi(n), -ghayi(n), mfn. [S. sthayin], being or living in;
staying, remaining; lasting for; resting on; Pv 11 :9 (ice
eva macea paridevayanti adayaka pecca yamassa -ino;
Pv-a 59,nfoll.: yamalokasaññite yamassa !hane
pettivisaye rhanasila); - ifc see ilruppa-, oja- (sv oja),
kappa-, pariyugha-; - see also isikaqhayi!\hita
(sv isika), esikaqhayighita (sv esika).
thashp in Ee at Ap 570,12 is prob. wr; Be, Se capi; Ce
casi~T~;
thita, mfn., pp ofti!!hati qv.
thitaka, mfn. lrhita + ka2 : BHS sthitaka], standing,
standing up, erect: Vin I 349,23 (sailghamajjhe -o va ima
gathayo abhasi); II 168,34 (ayasma Upa!i -o uddisati
therana111 bhikkhüna111 gilravena); M II 136,15 (-o va
pana so bhava111 Gotamo anonamanto ubhohi pilf.litalehi
jaf.!f.!ukani parimasati); Ja I 317,15 (alambanaphalak~
nissaya -o va niddayanto parivattitva patito); III 327,2
(so yakkho rukkhamüle bhümiya11J -e khaditu~T~labhati);
IV 378,17 (-a va ratti11J vitinametva); Ap 447,27 (akase
-o).
thiti, .f [S. sthiti], standing; standing-place; continuance
of being; continued existence; maintenance of life;
constant nature; steadiness, stability; Abh 1058 (~hane
tu jivite -i); D II 312,28 (uppannana111 kusalan~
dhammana111 -iya); MI 48,4 (cattaro 'me avuso ahara
bhütana111 ... sattan~ -iya); S II 65,16 (arammaf.!aiTI
et~ hoti viññaf.!assa -iya); III 31 ,32foll. (yo bhikkhave
rüpassa uppado -i abhinibbatti patubhavo dukkhass' eso
uppado rogana111 -i jaramaraf.!assa patubhavo); IV 104,25
(bhikkhu pa!isailkha yoniso ahar~ ahareti ... yavad eva
imassa kayassa -iya yapanaya ... ); A V 96,2 ( -i~T~
p' aha~T~ bhikkhave na Vaf.!f.layami kusalesu dhammesu
pageva pilrih3ni11J, vuddhi11J ca kho 'ha11J bhikkhave
vaf.!f.!ayami); Dhp 147 (passa cittakata~T~ bimbai1J ...
yassa natthi dhuv~ -i); Ud 80,14 (tatrapaha11J
bhikkhave n' eva agati111 vadami na gati~T~ na -i111 na
cuti11J na upapatti~T~); Ja I 392,2s· (yasma ca anicca tasma
uppajjitva va nirujjhanti uppajjitva -i~T~ patva pi
nirujjhanti yeva); V 48,9' (disvana nagassa gati~T~ -i~T~ ca,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se rhita~T~ ca; 48,24'/oll.: imina maggena
gacchati idha nahayati nahayitva uttif.lf.lO idha tighati ti
sabba~T~ disva); Nidd I 365,23 (ya cittassa -i saf.!rhiti
ava!!hiti ... sammasamadhi ti) f. Dhs 15; Vism 32,19 (-1
ti jivitindriyass' eta111 adhivacana~T~); 464,17 (nivate
dipaccinai1J -i viya cetaso -i ti daghabbo); Ps IV 88,11
(ten' eva cittena tassa cittassa uppado va -i va bhailgo
va na sakka janitun ti); - (fe see pabandha-; -
0
-bhagiya, mfn., conducive to, connected with,
continuance; D III 277,2 (hanabhagiyo samildhi -o
thitika
samadhi visesabhagiyo samadhi nibbedhabhagiyo
samadhi); A III 427,2 (ime hanabhagiya dhamma ... ime
-a dhamma ... ); Pa~is I 35,34; Nett 77,11; Vism 15,6*
(tassa taJ11 -a111 s!laq¡. bhavati bhikkhuno, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee ~hitabhagiyaq¡.); 88,11 (--ta);- see also aharanhitika,
kappaghitika, kappaghitiya, cira~~hitika, paccayaghitika.
thitika,f [~hiti + ka2 ?] afixed arder or rota (ofbhikkhus,
according to seniority) for receiving cloth or food; Ja I
123,21 foll. (-a111 karonto pi asukavassagge -a ti na
sallakkheti); Sp 1139,19 foll. (viharo maha hoti
therasanato pa~~haya vatthesu d!yamanesu a1asajatika
mahathera paccha agacchanti bhante v!sativassanaq¡.
d!yati tumkhakaq¡. -a atikkanta ti na vattabba, -aq¡.
~hapetva tesaq¡. datva paccha -aya databbaq¡.); 1250,1o
(sañghabhatte -a nama natthi); 1253,6foll. (tena
tikkhattuq¡. -a111 pucchitva sace koci -aq¡. jananto natthi
therasane gahetabbaJ11, sace pana ahaq¡. janami
"a, m. [ts], the sound 'c;!'; the consonant 'c;!'; Sadd 604,2o
üa ~a c;la c;lha !).a); 605,31;- 0 '-adesa, m., substitution
with 'c;!'; Sadd 457,16 (dahati ... dassa -e c;lahatl ti
rüpam).
"arp.sa, m. [S., AMg daq¡.sa], l. a stinging insect; a gadfly;
Abh 645 (-o pingalamakkhika); S I 106,32* (atho -a
siriq¡.sapa bahii, Ee so; Be 9aJ11sasar1sapa, Ce, Se c;!aq¡.sa-
siriq¡.sapa, better metrically); Th 31 (phunho -ehi
makasehi araññasmiq¡. brahavane); Ja V 323,18* (kacci
-a ca makasa ca appam eva siriq¡.sapa); Ap 453,1 (-a ca
makasa ubho ); Vism 31,12 (-a ti 9aJ11sanamakkhika,
andhamakkhika ti pi vuccanti); - 2. a bite; a sting;
Cp-a 246,15 (sahadagho ti -ena sah' eva,
daghasamakalam eva); - 0 íidhipata, m.pl. [c;iaJ11sa +
adhipata2], flies and gadflies; Sn 964 ( -anaq¡.
siriq¡.sapanaJ11; Nidd I 484,21 foll.: c;laq¡.sa vuccanti
pingalamakkhika adhipataka vuccanti sabba pi
makkhikayo ).
"arp.sati, c;!asati (and c;!assati, daq¡.sati), pr. 3 sg. [S. dasati,
daJ11sati; AMg c;!asai, c;!aq¡.sai], hites; Dhatup 313-4
(daJ11sa c;laq¡.sa daq¡.sane ); Dhatum 465-6 (c;ia111sa daq¡.sa
tu dasane); Vin I 148,36 (bhikkhii siriq¡.sapehi ubbajha
honti -anti pi paripatenti pi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee c;!asanti);
MI 519,17 (kukkuro pi -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asati); SI
69,20* (so asajja -e balaq¡. naraJ11, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
c;!ase); A I 126,23 (seyyathapi bhikkhave ahi giithagato
kiñcapi na -ati atha kho naJ11 makkheti, Se so; Be, Ce
daJ11sati; Ee c;!assati); III IOI,5foll. (ekakaq¡. kho pana
ma111 araññe viharantaJ11 ahi va maJ11 -eyya vicchiko va
ma111 -eyya satapad1 va maJ11 -eyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
c;!aseyya); Ja 11 145,27 (d!ghajatika vo na -issanti na
vihe~hessantl ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asissanti); IV 496,2*
(as1visa kupita uggateja -anti marenti pi te manusse, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asanti); VI 195,4* (sa -atu accimukh1
260 4mpsati
dasavassena laddhan ti koci bhal).ati, atth' avuso
dasavasso bhikkhii ti pucchitabbaq¡.); 1258,6 (sace
abhataq¡. bahuq¡. hoti sabbesaq¡. ca bhikkhiinaq¡. pahoti
-aya kicca111 natthi, therasanato paghaya patta111 piiretva
databbaq¡.); Dhp-a III 105,9 (attano vassaggaq¡. kathetva
taq¡. bhikkhuq¡. -aq¡. pucchitva);- ifc see avel).ika-.
thibbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ~~hivati, ~~hivyati, Wg § 15:52], spits
out; Sadd 489,11 ühivu khivu nirasane: -ati khibbati);-
see also thevati.
thiyati 1, s~e sv ~ayati 3 .
thiyate, pass. 3 sg. ofti~~hati qv.
v'thubh, [S. Dhatup v'stumbh, Wg § 31:7?], expels;?
Dhatum 551 (~hubha nighubhane).
thevati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. ~~1vati, ~~hivyati, Wg § 15:52:
~~ivu nirasane], spits out; Sadd 440,7 ühivu khivu
niddassane: -ati khevati);- see also ~ibbati.
pUl).l).a uggassa tejasa, Se so; Ce, Ee dissatu; Be sa taq¡.
c;!aq¡.satv ajamukhi); 437,29* (ahiva ucchañgagato
c;!aseyya); Mi\305,15 (asiviso kupito kañci-d-eva purisa111
-eyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!aseyya); Sp 1057,30
(bhikkhuq¡. sappadayo -anti); Mp III 145,19 (sunakha
anubandhanti -anti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asanti); As 330,31
(sise -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; E e c;!asati); Sadd 446,4 (daJ11sa
dasane: daq¡.sati vidaJ11sati danta); part.pr.
(a) c;laq¡.santa, c;!asanta, mfn., Ja 11 32,8' (asse c;!asanto
carati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se c;ia111sento); Sp 523,26 (tani
lomani añgajata111 -antani viya vijjhanti); Ps 111 44,3
(vitaccheyyun ti mukhatul).c;iakena -anta taccheyyuq¡.,
Be, Se so; Ce c;!asanta; Ee wr ~asanta); - neg.
ac;iaJ11santa, ac;!asanta, mfn., Ja I 370,30 (Be, Se ac;!aq¡.santa;
Ce, Ee ac;!asanta); (b) c;!aq¡.samana, c;!asamana, mfn., Ja I
265,2 (taJ11 g!vaya -amanaJ11, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
c;!asamanaJ11); - aor. 3 sg. (a) ac;!aq¡.si, c;ia111si, c;!asi,
Vv 80:8 (tato ca kal).ho urago mahaviso ac;!a111si pade
turitassa me sato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adaq¡.si); Ja I 310,26
(eka111 janapadamanussaq¡. sappo -i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
c;!asi); Cp 3:11:8 (sappo ... kupito paramakopena ac;!aq¡.si
darakaJ11 khal).e); Dhp-a 11 258,1o (kasma so sappo eta111
na -1 ti, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asi ti; Be -atl ti); (b) ac;!atthi,
Ja IV 32,21* (yo taJ11 ac;!atthi, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce,
Se ac;iaJ11si); 1 sg. ac;!aq¡.siq¡., ac;!assiq¡., Ja IV 330,9* (Be
ac;!a111sim; Ce, Ee, Se ac;!assiq¡.); - inf c;!aq¡.situq¡.,
c;!asituq¡., Ja 1 265,2 (-ituq¡. okasaq¡. dento vi ya, Be, Se so;
Ce, E e c;!asituq¡.); Vism 653,8 (-ituq¡., Be, E e, Se so; Ce
c;!asituq¡.); Spk I 132,25 (-ituq¡., Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
c;!asituq¡.); - absol. (a) c;laq¡.sitva, c;!asitva, Ja 11 102,25
(taJ11 maJ).ikkhandhaJ11 mukhena -itva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
c;!asitva); III 538,26 (g!vaya naJ11 -itva jivitakkhayaJ11
papehi ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asitva); Mil 256,21 (asiviso
-itva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee c;!asitva); Vism 196,7* (pupphaJ11
<Jaipsana
-itva, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce <;!asitva); Dhp-a I 358,18 (ekacce
til).a!11 -itva ekacce natarp gahetva a~tha!11SU, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee <;!asitva); Nidd-a I 221,2 (paramasitva ti <;!asitva,
Ee so, wr? Ce dasitva; Be, Se dassitva); (b) <;!asitvana,
Mhv 37: 136; -pass. aor. 3 sg. da!1lsíyittha, Ap-a 279,2
(visena sappavisena a sarnantato darpsiyittha dagho hoti
ti visado, sappadagho ti attho, eds so);- pp (a) dattha 1,
<;lagha, mfn. and n. [S. da~~a; AMg dagha], l. (mfn.)
bitten; Vin I 206,7 (aññataro bhikkhu ahina -o hoti);
A III 69,2* (asivisarp pi aside yena -o na jivati); Ja III
203,8* (tena sappen' aya!11 -o); VI 191,3o (imina nagena
tapaso -o bhavissati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se <;!a~tho ); 51 0,17*
(-a <;!arpsehi makasehi katharp kahanti daraka, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se phugha); Mi1303,17 (ahihi -o); Vism 367,32*
(patthaddho bhavati kayo -o ka~thamukhena va);
As 330,31 (so <;!aghatta viravati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --tta);
331,7 (<;latthassa viravanakalo viya); - 2. (n.) a bite;
Ja VI 522,10* (na dukkha!11 ahina -arp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
da<;l<;lharp); - ifc see uccalili.gapiil).aka- (sv uccalili.ga);
- --visa, mfn., m. and n., l. (mfn. and m.) [or to
dagha2], (a snake) who poisons with a bite; Ap 47,18
(asiviso --viso eva!11 jhapeti tarp nararp, Ee so; Be, Ce
dighaviso; Se dughaviso; Ap-a 292,34: asiviso -mattena
bhasmakar~ato -viso sappo attana -arp nara!11 jhapeti,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se digharnattena ... dighaviso ... );
Mi1150,s (puriso --visena asivisena -o bhaveyya, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se du~thavisena); Spk III 7,1 (kaghamukho hi
--viso ditthaviso phughaviso vataviso ti catubbidho
hoti); Mp III 103,9 (ahirajakulani ti idarp --visan' eva
sandhaya vutta!11, ye hi keci --visa ... ); - 2. (n.) the
poison from a bite; Ja IV 496,6* (na maccuno --visa!11
hananti); Sp 1092,11; - see also sahadagha (sv saha);
pp (b) <;larpsita, mfn., J a VI 192,2* (kacci nu 9a!1lsito tata,
Se so; Be kacci nu tarp <;!arpsi tata; Ce kacci nu tarp <;!así
tata; Ee kacci t' anu<;!asi tata, prob. wr); - see also
dassita 1; - fpp 9a!1lsitabba, <;!asitabba, mfn., MI 519,23
(kukkurena <;!arpsitabba!11 ahosi ten' arnhi dagho, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee <;!asitabba!11); caus. pr. 3 sg.
(a) l}.a~psayati, darpseti 1, darpsayati 1, causes to be bitten;
Ja VI 193,20* (alarnbano hi nagena marna!11 abhijigirpsati
aharp m~<;lükachapiya -issami brahm~a!11); 194,26*
(aya!11 nago mahiddhiko tejasi duratikkamo tena tarp
-issami); Sadd 566,19foll. (darpsa darpsane: da!1lseti
da!1lsayati da!1lsano . . . da!1lsenti khadaníya!11 va
bhojaniyarp va etena ti da!1lsano ); - (b) l}.a~psiipeti,
<;!asapeti, causes to be bitten; Dhp-a 11 256,18 (tena
sappena attanarp -eti sappo <;larpsiturp na icchati, Be, Se
so; Ce, E e <;!asapeti . . . <;!asiturp); part.pr.
9a!1lsapenta, mfn., Spk I 132,23 (ali.gulirp pi jivha!11 pi
-ento uraga!11 avajanati); Dhp-a 11 257,3 (aharp avuso
tena attanarp -ento pi mukhe ali.gulirp pakkhipanto pi
taip. -eturp nasakkhin ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee <;!asapento ...
.;iasapeturp);- neg. a<;!arpsapenta, mfn., Vism 162,6 (Be,
E e, Se a<;!arpsapento; Ce ada!1lsapento ); - absol.
da!1lsapetva, <;!asapetva, Ja 11 31,7 (asse -etva, Be, Se so;
Ce. Ee <;!asapetva); 176,11 (eka!11 dal).<;lakarp kacchapena
-erva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee <;!asapetva); Mi1303,14 (yo
;mbbe pare ahina -etva mareti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
Jasapetva); Sp 293,4 (sücis~<;!asa!11 karonti yena sücirp
~p. a gha!1lsanti); Ps 11 279,6 (cheko ahitul).<;liko
261 <Jabati
sappadaghavisarp ten' eva sappena puna -etva
ubbaheyya, Be so; Se ubbateyya; Ce, Ee <;!asapetva
ubbameyya).
l}.a~psana, <;!asana, da!1lsana 1, n.m. (and mfn. ?)
[S. darpsana; AMg 9lli1ls~a], biting; a bite; being bitten;
Vism 31,12 (<;la!1lsa ti 0 -makkhika); Dhp-a 111 51,5
(
0
-bhayena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee <;!asana-); Th-a I 97,9
(
0
-silataya 9a!1lsa ti laddhanamahi andhakarnakkhikahi);
As 331,6 (sise -arp vi ya, Be, Ce, Se so; E e <;!asana!11);
Dhatup 313-4 (darpsa 9a!1lsa da!1lsane); Sadd377,7
(khadda darpsane); 566,19 foil. (darpsa da!1lsane: darpseti
darpsayati); - see also dasana.
l}.attha, mfn., pp of 9a!1lsati qv.
l}.ayati, see sv <;!eti 1.
l}.ayhati\ pr. 3 sg., se e sv <;lahati.
l}.ayhate, pass. pr. 3 sg. of <;!ahati qv.
l}.asati, see sv <;!arpsati.
l}.asana, se e sv 9a!1lsana.
l}.assati, se e sv <;!arpsati.
l}.aha, see sv <;laha.
l}.ahati, dahati2 (and <;!ayhati 1 ?), pr. 3 sg. [S. dahati;
AMg <;lahai], bums, consumes; torments; Vin I 204,24
(anujanami bhikkhave dhüma!11 patun ti . . . ta!11 yeva
vaWrp alimpetva pivanti, kal).tha!11 dahati, Ee so; Ce
k~tho -ati; Be, Se k~tho dahati); 11 120,26 (jantaghare
aggi mukharp -ati); IV 33,23 (pa~haviya pathavisaññi ...
dahati va dahapeti va); MI 86,10 (kinti me bhoge n' eva
rajano hareyyurp ... na aggi -eyya, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
daheyya); 333,26 (ayarp sam~o nisinnako va kalakato
handa na!11 -ama ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee dahama ti); 338,25*
(saya!11 -issasi attanarp balo aggirp va sarnphusa!11) =
Th 1205 (Be so; Ce dahissasi; Ee dahissam; Se -issati);
MI 365,s (sa aditta til).ukka hattharp va -eyya bahurp va
-eyya, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee daheyya); 111 186,6foll. (oHha!11
pi dahati mukharp pi dahati kal).~harp pi dahati, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se <;layhati); SI 32,2* (cora haranti rajano aggi
-ati nassati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se <;!ayhati); 69,25* (so asajja
-e bala!11 nara!11); A IV 131,27 foil. (tarp tassa ogharp pi
daheyya mukha!11 pi daheyya ... ); Dhp 140 (atha v' assa
agarani aggi -ati pavako); Pv 21:8 (adubbhapiii).I dahate
mittadubbhirp; Pv-a 116,9: ta!11 mittadubbhirp puggalarp
dahati vinaseti); Th 779 (vatthena narp paruta!11 niharitva
cita!11 sarnodhaya tato -anti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dahanti);
Thi 507 (adipita til).ukka g~hanta!11 dahanti n' eva
muñcanta!11); Ja 11 178,20* (so ma!11 dahati ragaggi;
179,2·: so ma!11 dahati jhapeti); III509,11* (sita!11 yena
vihaññati so ma!11 -ati gattani; 509,13·: so marp -ati ti so
me -ati, ayarn eva va pa~ho); V 204,22* (hattha mudü
tehi ma!11 sarnphusitva ito gato te ma!11 dahanti tata, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se tena marp dahanti tata; 207,12'foll.: te ma!11
-anti ti te tassa hatthasamphassa idani ma!11 dahanti
tatha hi tassa gatakalato patthaya mama sañre <;laho
ut!hito, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se tena ma!11 dahanti ti tena tassa
hatthasamphassena idan' eva marp dahanti ... );
Kv 346,33 (aggi va -ati udakarp va vahati, Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se dahati); Mi145,15 (idha purisassa hatthe tatta!11
ayogutarp nikkhipeyya dutiye hatthe sita!11 himapil).<;larp
nikkhipeyya kin nu kho maharaja ubho pi te daheyyun
ti); 278,7 (aggi atijotitaya -ati); Vism 503,11 * (aggitatto
va naraco bhusa!11 va dahate puna); Dhp-a 111 310,15foll.
lJahana
(sace mama etissa upari kodho atthi id~ sappi mam
-atu, sace natthi ma -atii ti, Se so; Be dahatu ... ma
dahatii ti; Ce dahatu ... m a -1 ti; E e dahatu ... ma dahi
ti); Ud-a 97,6 (jhapetha ti dahatha); Ap-a 292,34 (sappo
attana danha¡p nara¡p jhapeti gayhati dukkhapeti, eds
so); Sadd 457,11 foll. (daha bhasmikaraJJe dhiiraJJe ca: ...
dassa gadese -an ti riipam); - part.pr. (a) gaha(t),
daha(t), mfn., Dhp 31 (sa¡pyojana¡p aJJUipthiila¡p -a¡p
aggl va gacchati); Ja VI 206,11* (daha¡p na tappe);
(b) gahanta, dahanta 1, mf( -anti)n., Dhp 71 (papa¡p
kata¡p kamma¡p . . . -anta¡p ba1am anveti bhasma-
cchanno va pavako ); Pv 31 :6 (aggiva!).!).O ca me vato
-anto upavayati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dahanto); Mil381,15*
(aggi yatha ti!).akanha¡p -anto); Dhp-a III 368,3
(jighaccha . . . balavan hutva udarapata1~ -antl vi ya
uppajjati, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee gayhantl [Ee udarapatale]);
- aor. 3 sg.(a) gahi, dahi, Ja II 261,3· (t~ ña!).aggina
paci dahi bhasma¡p akasi); Mhv 5:221 (jala... -i
therassa sakala¡p kay~); (b) adagghahi, Ja II 44,11*
(santappito sappina payasena kicchakata¡p pa!).!).akuti¡p
adagghahi, Ce so; Be agayhi; Ee adanhahi; Se adaggahi;
44,16joll.: aya¡p aggi maya kicchena kata¡p paJJ!).asala¡p
jhapesl ti; perhaps cf S. intens. dandahiti, imperf
*adandahlt ?); 2 sg. dahi, Ja V 92,9* (ma tv~ dahi
muñca patibbata sa, Ce, Se so; Be dahl; Ee jahl; 92,12':
ima¡p patibbata¡p ma tapeyyasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ma
varaya); 3 pl. dahi¡psu, Pj I 203,14 (bhattasala¡p ca
aggina dahimsu); - inf (a) gahitu¡p, Spk I 134,9
(bhikkhu nama kiñci bhikkhutejasa -itu¡p na sakkoti);
(b) dagghu¡p [S. dagdhu¡p], Bv-a 125,25 (aggi-
kkhandho . . . na hi bhagavato elvare a¡psumatta¡p pi
dagghu¡p samattho ahosi); - absol. (a) gahitva, dahitva,
S II 88,12 (aggina -itva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se gahetva);
Vv 83:12 (putt~ a!ahane saya¡p -itva, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
dahitva); (b) gahetva, dahetva (or caus. ?), S II 88,12
(-etva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e -itva); Thi-a 6,12 (tadavasesa¡p
rag~ aggamaggañaJJaggina dahetva); -pass. pr. 3 sg.
¡Jayhati2 , dayhati, is burnt, burns (intrans.); suffers
pain; Vin IV 283,16 (tassa ku1assa ghar~ -ati, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dayhati); MI 338,23* (na ve aggi cetayati ah~
bala¡p gahami ti balo ca jalita¡p aggim asajjana sa -ati);
SI 188,15* (kamaragena -ami citt~ me parigayhati) =
Th 1223; Al 178,6 (gama pi -anti nigama pi -anti);
IV 103,22 (aya¡p ca pathavl sineru ca pabbataraja -issanti
vinassissanti na bhavissantl ti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
dayhissanti); Thi 219 (mata pita ca bhata -anti
ekacitakaya¡p) f. Ap 330,3o (ekacitakamhi -are); Ja IV
42,11 * (bija¡p aggismi¡p -ati na viriihati); 284,11 *
(hadaya¡p me -ate, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dayhate); Ap 74,13
(tamandhakarapihita tividhagglhi -are, Ce so; Be
mahandhakarapihita; Se dayhare; Ee tamandhakara
pihita tividhaggl pi -are; Ap-a 345,16foll.: tamandha-
karapihita ti mohandhakarena pihita chadita tividhagglhi
-are ti ragaggidosaggimohaggisankhatehi tlhi agglhi
-are -anti, sabbe satta ti sambandho, eds so);
Vism 350,11 (-ami -ami ti kandanto, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dayhami dayhaml ti); Dhp-a IV 206,1s (aggina pi mama
santaka¡p ma -atu); Mhv 20:47 (-ati); - part.pr.
(a) gayhanta, dayhanta, mfl-anti)n., Thi 123 (situ!).hena
ca -anti); Ja III 469,r; Ap 40,29 (bhave sata¡p na
262 lJahana
vindami -anto tihi agglhi); Kv 476,3o (kappattho kappe
-ante kattha gacchati ti); Ps II 402,17 (mahallako ca
dayhanto adhivaseti); (b) gayhamana, dayhamana, mfn.,
Vin IV 304,13 (avasathe -amane, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dayhamane); A IV 103,4 (mahapathaviya sinerussa ca
pabbatarajassa jhayamanana¡p -amanan~, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se dayhamanana¡p); Dhp 371 (ma kandi dukkham
idan ti -amano); Thi 493 (ki¡p mama paro karissati
attano sisamhi -amanamhi); Ja III 201,9* (te aturesu
sukhita -amanesu nibbuta, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
dayhamanesu); Ap 29,19 (-amano tih' agglhi); - neg.
agayhamana, mfn., It 24,16*; Vism 664,13 (agayhamano,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adayhamano);- aor. 3 sg. (a) gayhi,
Ud-a 433,17 (kayo ... anavasesato -i nassi antaradhayi);
(b)gayhittha, Jai 215,18 (pa!).nasala -ittha);
(e) agayhatha, Ja VI 54,3o* (Mithilaya -amanaya na me
kiñci agayhatha, Be, Ce, E e so; Se dayhamanaya ...
adayhatha); 2 sg. (a) gayhittho, SI 188,20* (nibbapehi
maharag~ ma -ittho punappuna¡p); (b) agayha, Ja IV
292,20* (attanurakkhi bhava ma agayha); 1 sg. agayhi¡p,
Ap 487,10 (niraye agayhi¡p); 3 pl. gayhi¡psu, D II 164,14
(dve va dussani na -i¡psu ya¡p ca sabba-abbhantarima¡p
ya¡p ca bahira¡p, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se omit na); -
absol. gayhitva, Mp I 23,8 (ubho pi abbhantare unhitena
ragaggina -itva kalam aka¡psu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ita) f.
23,19 (-itva jlvitakkhay~ papu!).i); - pp da¡J¡Jha, mfn.
[S. dagdha; AMg gaggha, daggha], burnt; what is burnt;
Vin I 149,6 (gamo aggina -o hoti); D II 164,15 (-e kho
pana bhagavato sañre antalikkha udakadhara
patubhavitva); A V 337,9 (aggi mutto gaha¡p yeva
gacchati no -a¡p paccudavattati); Ud 8,29 (-a¡p bhante
Bahiyassa Daruclriyassa sañr~ thiipo e' assa kato);
Ja II 242,10* (-o vahasahassehi sitto ghatasatehi so);
Ili 541,25* (hattha -a pi!).gapatiggahena); Nidd I 53,28
(gedho ... ña!).aggina -o); Mill46,2o (-a sabbakilesa);
- daggha¡p in Ee, Se at Ja VI 522,10* is prob. wr for
danha¡p (Be, Ce so);- neg. adaggha, mfn., Vin IV 33,1o
(yebhuyyena mattika adaggha pi vuccati jata pathavl);
Dhp-a I 222,14 (adagghe sampapu!).itu¡p nasakkhi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se adaggha¡p); - sudaggha, mfn., well,
complete/y, bumt; Dhp-a I 225,7; - fpp gahitabba, mfn.,
Mil 384,12 (sabbe te ñiil).aggina gahitabba); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. dahapeti, Vin IV 33,23 (pathaviya pathavl-
saññi ... dahati va dahapeti va).
¡Jahana, dahana 1, mj(-i)n., m., f, and n. lfrom gahati;
S. dahana; AMg gahaJJa, dahaJJa], l. (mfn. and n.)
buming; Vism 176,1 (yad eva so icchati tassa
0
-samatthata, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dahana-); Spk II 84,26
(aggina o -kalo vi ya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dahana- ); Mp II
223,18joll. (tani [bijani] 0 -puriso viya yogavacaro aggi
vi ya maggaña!).a¡p aggi¡p datva bljana¡p o -kalo vi ya
maggaña!).ena kilesana¡p dagghakalo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
dahana-); Th-a II 144,3o (papassa ca dahanena);
III 179,24 (na aggi abhisañceteti napi -aya payog~
parakkama¡p karoti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dahanaya);
Ap-a 469,16 (jhapesi¡p dahana¡p akasin ti attho, Be, E e,
Se so; Ce adahana¡p); Mhv 30:86 (dahana¡p aggi-
nibbana¡p); Sadd 861,5 (usana¡p dahana¡p usma); -
2. (m., -1, f) jire; Abh 33 (pavako dahano 'nilo);
Bv-a 14l,s (nirupadana dahana viya parinibbayi¡psu);
cJahala
Th!-a 238,23 (dahaniya indhanarr viya ti attho);
Sadd 334,9• (aggi ... -o ka~havattani).
«Jahala, «Jahala, n. [cfS. <;!ahaJa, <;!ahaJa], the name of a
country; ? Sadd 921,11 (tatra mattabhedo tava
<;!ahaJarr <;lahalaf!1, Ee so; Be <;lahaJarr <;lahaJarr; Ce
<;lahaJarr <;!ahaJarr ).
«Jaka, m.n. [cf S. saka], a potherb, a green vegetable;
Abh 459 (sako anitthiyarr -o); Vin I 248,23 (Rojo Mallo
bhattaggarr olokento dve nadassa -arr ca
piqhakhadaniyarr ca); 249,9 (anujanami bhikkhave
sabbarr ca -arr; Sp 1103,6: pakkarr va apakkarr va yarr
kiñci -arr); Vv 19:6 (odanarr kummasarr -arr
Jo~asovlrakarr e' aharr adasirr; Vv-a 99,21: -an ti
ta~<;!uJeyyakadisakavyañjanarr); Ja I 308,8' foil. (yatha hi
araññarr pavisitva ucchaiige katva -arr uccinitva tattha
pakkhipantiya ucchaiige -arr nama suJabharr hoti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee sakarr ... sakarr nama); As319,32
(asiddhadussiddhanarr o• -adlnarr gandho amakagandho,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ukadlnam); - ifc see sukkha-; -
se e al so saka.
«Japeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup <;!apayate, Wg § 33:4],
accumulates; Sadd 553,14 (<;lapa <;lipa saiighate: -eti
-ayati <;!epeti <;!epayati).
«Jaba, <;laha, daha, m. and mfn. [S. daha, m.; AMg <;laha,
daha], l. (m.) buming; fever; heat; MI 244,28 (assasa-
passasesu uparuddhesu adhimatto kayasmirr -o hoti);
S IV 57,2 (evam eva kho me avuso adhimatto kayasmirr
-o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee daho); A V 110,4 ( ... kaso saso
pinaso -o jaro ... , Be so; Ce, Ee, Se <;laho) f. Nidd I 13,4
(Be, Ee so; Ce, Se <;laho; Nidd-a I 60,35: -o ti abbhantare
uppajjanako Ul)ho, Be so; Ce, E e, Se <;laho ti sarlre ... ) f.
47,4 ( ... dahena jarena ... , Be so; Ce, Ee, Se <;lahena);;
Ja I 131,12' (0 -bhayena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dahana-
bhayena) = As 126,37 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se daha-); Ja IV
158,17 (sañre -o uppajji); MiJ325,19 (kayasmirr -o
okkamati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se daho); Dhp-a III 156,1
(kucchiyarr uqhitena -ena santappamano); Th-a III
179,29 (attanarr <;lahissasi <;lahadukkhato na muccissasi,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dahissasi dahadukkhato ... );
Dhatup 600 (jhapa dahe); Sadd 503,24 (usa dahe: daho
Ul)harr); - ifc see anto-, dava- (sv dava\ disa-; -
2. (mfn.) burning; - ifc see chava-; - ni«J«Jaha,
niddaha, mfn., free from buming or fever; Spk 11 258,16
(apari)aho ti -o, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se niddaho).
«Jahaka, dahaka, mfl-ika)n. [S. dahaka; AMg dahaga],
(one) who bums, sets on jire; buming; Ja V 449,34'
(chavanarr -arr susanagopakan ti vuttarr hoti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dahakarr); Dhp-aiii 71,1o (aññasmirr -e
avijjamane pi ... attano va dhammataya utthito pavako
va <;lahati yeva);- ifc see anto-, chava-, dava (sv dava\
«Jahala, se e sv <;!ahaJa.
«Jiitgulaka in E e in cpd at Sn 239 is prob. wr for ciiJ.guJaka
(Be, Ce, Se so).
IJÍJ.l«Jima, dindima, del)<;lima, m.n. [S., AMg <;lil)<;lima], a
kind of drum; Abh 143 (til)avo tu ca -o, Be so; Ce
del)<;limo); D 1 79,14 (so sul)eyya ... saiikhasaddarr pi
pal)avasaddarr pi del)<;limasaddarr pi, Se so; Be saiJ.kha-
pa~avadindimasaddarr pi; Ce, Ee saiikhapal)ava-
de~<;!imasaddarr pi); Ja 1 355,9• (kharassararr -arr
vadayanto, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se del)<;limarr; 355,15·:
263 cJepeti
pa!ahabherirr, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se paha!abherirr);
VI 465,12' (ahaññantu sabbavl~a bheriyo del)<;!imani ca,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dindimani) = 580,28' (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
dindimani); 580,31' (dindimani ca haññantu ku\Umpa-
dindimani ca, Be so; Ce, Se ku!umba dindimani ca; Ee
ku!umba tindimani ca; 581,8·: godha parivadentika
dindimani kutumbadindimanl ti imani cattari turiyan'
eva; Ce, Ee so; Be kutumpadindimanl ti; Se dindimani
kutumbani ca ti); Ap 388,17 (saiikha ca -a, Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se del)<;!ima); Bv 1:32 (saiikha ca pal)ava e' eva atho pi
-a bahu, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se del)<;lima; Bv-a 40,14: -a ti
ti~ava khuddakabheriyo vuccanti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
del)<;lima ti); Ps IV 199,9 (pal)avo ti -o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
del)<;limo); Mp III 121,15 (ti~avo ti -o, Be so; Se
<;!el)<;limo; Ce, Ee de~<;!imo); - see also mukha-
dendimaka ..
IJ!yati: see sv <;!eti 1.
«Je«J«Jubhakaqt in Ee at Vin 11 136,10 is wr for
de<;!<;!ubhakarr (Be, Ce, Se so).
«Jeti 1, <;!ayati, <;llyati, dayati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. <;!ayate, <;!!yate],
flies; goes; Dhatup 360 (<;!! )1 akasagamane);
Dhatum 585; DI 71,7 foil. (sakul)O yena yen' eva <;!eti
sapattabharo va <;!eti; Sv 208,2: <;letl ti uppatati); S IV
199,7 (pakkhl aviñcheyya akasarr <;!essaml ti); Ja IV
347,25' (kumbhllaka saku~aka ... uppatanti <;!ayanti ca,
Be, Ce so; Ee dayanti; Se uyyanti; 348,2·: gocararr
gahetva akasena gacchanti); V 417 ,6' (pañcasata-
dijakaññayo heqhato heqhato <;!enti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
u<;!<;!enti); VI 145,23' (yadi sakul)i marrsam icchasi
<;!ayassu pubbena Pupphavatiya, Be so; Ce, Ee dayassu;
Se uyyassu; 146,9·: Pupphavatiya pubbena puratthimaya
disaya yaññavato atthi tattha gaccha); Spk III 69,9
(pakkhl .. . akasarr <;!etukamo hoti); Ap-a 459,32
(Kol)<;!aññassa ti kul)<;!ito hutva <;!eti pavattatl ti ko~<;!o
1amakasatto, kol)<;!ato añño ti kol)<;!añño a1amako
uttamapuriso ti attho); Sadd 355,25 (<;11 vihayasagatiyarr
gamanamatte ca: <;!eti <;!ayati <;!emano); 479,23 (<;!!
gatiyarr: <;llyatl <;!emano <;lino); 479,25 (ettha <;l!yatl ti
<;!emano ti nibbacanarr gahetabbarr); - part.pr.
(a) <;!emana, mfn., Ja ll 443,10' (ucce saku~a <;!emana
pattayana vihaiJ.gama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr omana;
443,w: <;!emana ti gacchamana caramana, Be, Ce so; Se
<;!emana ti <;!eyamana gacchamana; Ee omana ti caramana
gacchamana); Sadd 355,25; 479,23; (b) <;!ayamana, mfn.,
Ja IV 347,26'; - pp <;!!na mfn. [ts], Sadd 479,23; - see
also dayati3.
«Jeti2 , pr. 3 sg. [cfS. vida, dyati], ties, strings up; fixes (a
noose or trap); Spk I 193,9 (pasarr <;len ti ti pasal)<;la,
sattanarr cittesu diqhipasarr khipantl ti attho, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee o<;!<;lent! ti); Thl-a 161,14 (te hi sattanarr
tal)hapasarr diqhipasarr ca <;!enti o<;!<;!entl ti pasal)<;!a ti
vuccanti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee vuccati); Sadd 355,27 foil. (<;11
khipanu<;!<;!anesu: <;!eti u<;!<;!eti); - see also u<;!<;!eti2,
o<;!<;!eti.
«Jepati, [S. Dhatup <;lipyati, <;lipati, <;!epayati,
Wg §§ 26:121,28:78, 32:132], throws; Sadd 404,15
(<;lipa khepe: -ati).
«Jepeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup <;!epayate, Wg § 33:4],
accumulates; Sadd 553,14 (<;lapa <;lipa sanghate: <;!apeti
<;lapayati -eti -ayati).
 <Jh
!Jha, m. [ts] the sound '<;lh'; the consonant '<;lh';
J.la, m. [ts] the sound '!).'; the consonant '!).'; Sadd604,2o
(ta tha <;la <;!ha !).a); 606,1; 623,4 (!).O nassa: pal).idhiinarp.);
-
0
'-adesa, m. substitution with '!).'; Bv-a 258,4 (atha va
kanakagamanato kol).agamano nama sattha 1oke udapadi,
tattha kakarassa ko-adesarp. katva nakarassa I).adesarp.
ta, m. [ts], the sound 't'; the consonant 't'; Sadd 604,2o (ta
tha da dha na); 606,1; 622,4 (to dassa: tathagato); 622,18
(ko tassa: niyako niyato va);- 0 -kara, m., the letter or
sound 't'; Jai 207,24' (-assa dakaro kato); Sp189,23
(bhirp.sanakatasmin ti bhirp.sanakabhave ti attho, ekassa
-assa 1opo datthabbo); 1400,1 (sul).litu me ti vattabbe
-assa thakararp. katva sul).athu me ti vacanarp. sithi1assa
dhanitakaral).arp. nama); Sv 66,33 (tatho avipañto agado
assa ti dakarassa -arp. katva tathagato ti); Spk I 238,7
(ettha -o padasandhikaro); It-a I 8,22 (bhatava ti bhagava
niruttinayena -assa gakararp. katva).
ta(d), demonstr. pronoun and adv. [S. tad] (sg. nom. m. so,
1 saddharp. patilabhirp.); SI 147,29 (taya ca kho marisa
sa; f sa; n. tarp. , (in vowel sandhi) tad (and tada ?), se;
acc. m.fn. tarp. 1; instr. m.n. tena; f taya; dat./gen.
m.n. tassa; f tassa; abl. m.n. tasma (and tasmat ?),
tamha; f taya (and tamha ?); loe. m.n. tasmirp., tamhi;
f tassarp., tissarp., taya, tayarp. (and tassa ?); pl. nom./acc.
m. te 1; f ta 1, tayo; n. tani; instr. m.n. tehi; f tahi;
dat./gen. m.n. tesarp.; f tasarp. (and asarp., siinarp. ? cf
Sadd 275,2ofoll. and 662,13foll.); loe. m.n. tesu; f tasu;
see also Sadd 274,2Ifoll.; so+ initial vowel sometimes >
sv; so + aharp. > so 'harp., svaharp.; tarp. + aharp. > taharp.;
te+ initial vowel sometimes > ty- qv; iic tarp.- (and ta-)
or, more usually, with assimilation to initial consonant,
eg tad + k- > tank- or takk-, tad + v- > tarp.v- or tabb-;
see Sadd 276,20* foil.), l. he, she, it; this, that (often
referring back to someone/something just mentioned);
Vin I 40,17 (atth' avuso mahasamal).o Sakyaputto
Sakyaku1a pabbajito taharp. bhagavantarp. uddissa
pabbajito ); III 1,13 foil. (iti pi so bhagava araharp.
sammasambuddho ... so imarp. 1okarp. ... sayarp. abhiñña
sacchikatva pavedeti so dhammarp. deseti ... ); 21 ,30
Sadd 604,2o (ta tha <;la <;!ha !).a); 606,1.
katva ekassa kakarassa 1oparp. katva niruttinayena
kanakassa kanakadi-abharal).assa agamanarp. pavassanarp.
yassa bhagavato uppannaka1e so kol).agamano nama, Be,
Se so; Ce, E e omit whole passage).
(bhikkhu . . . makkatirp. am1sena upa1apetva tassa
methunarp. dhammarp. patisevati; cfSp 227,7: tassa ti
bhummavacanarp.); 60,11 foil. (so janitva tarp. codesi
asamal).o si tvan ti, tassa kukkuccarp. ahosi); IV 211,11
(tasu Sundañnanda bhikkhuni tarul).apabbajita abhirüpa
hoti); D II 119,28 (yatha-y-idarp. brahmacariyarp.
addhaniyarp. assa ciratthitikarp. tad assa
bahujanahitaya ... ); III 14,1o (muddha pi tassa vipateyya
ti); MI 487,7 (gambhiro h' ayarp. Vaccha dhammo
duddaso ... so taya dujjano); II 243,19 (tassa ka1akiriyaya
bhinna Nigal).tha); III 33,6 (tassa me tathagato ...
dhammaq¡ desesi taharp. dhammaq¡ sutva tathagate
maya ca sv eva bhagava mahiddhikataro); Dhp 7 (tarp. ve
pasahati Maro vato rukkharp. va dubba1am); 117 (papaq¡
ce puriso kayira na taq¡ kayira punappunarp. na tamhi
chandaq¡ kayiratha); 326 (tad ajj' ahaq¡ niggahessami
yoniso ); It 85,2o* (tad amina pi janatha papicchanarp.
yatha gati); Sn 22 (tassa na sul).ami kiñci paparp.); 80
(evam esa kasi kattha sa hoti amatapphala); 699 (taq¡
tarp. Gotama pucchama; cfPj II 491,4: tan tan ti tasma
tarp.); 855 (tassa no santi ussada); 1052 (aññarp. taq¡
pucchami tad ingha brühi); 1127 (tesarp. buddho vyakasi
pañhe puttho yathatatharp.); Vv 34:15 (pugga1esu taya
dinnarp. na tarp. tava mahapphalarp.); Pv 12:2 (gato so
tassa ya gati); Th 377 (ya me iddhi parittika taharp. tada
nirankatva); 1025 (marp.sani tassa va<;l<;lhanti pañña tassa
na va<;l<;Jhati); Jai 151,7 (sa tassa santika anuggaharp.
a1abhamiina); 151,9 (so tassa vacanaq¡ sutva); 235,5 (so
tato panhaya ekeko va hutva); II 128,5 (tahi dinnarp.);
128,17 (ayaq¡ tasaq¡ dhammata); III 228,2o (tena yacito
atitarp. ahari); 230,11' (avariya nama tassa dhita tassa
ta(d)
vasena avariyapita nama jato); Nidd I 4,2o (te va kama
parihayanti so va kamehi parihayati); Ap 21,10
(pathaviyaq¡ nisidi so); Cp 1:2:9 (ten'evahaq¡ satagu~ato
sukhumiilo sukhedhito; Cp-a 34,5: tena ti tato
paccekabuddhato); Mi125,16 (na h' ettha puggalo
upalabbhati ti kallan nu kho tad abhinanditun ti); 136,11
(dve se1a agantva ... tasaq¡ paharena, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
tayaq¡; Se tesaq¡ dvinnaq¡ sampaharena); Vism 436,8
(tadanantara pana panna bhavetabbii, sa ca
atisailkhepadesitatta viññatuq¡ pi tava na sukara); 534,25
(yo anantarapaccayo sv eva samanantarapaccayo);
Sadd 267,5 (tasaddo parammukhavacano);- sometimes,
for emphasis, connected with a 1st or 2nd person verb or
pronoun, or with other demonstr. or relative pronouns:
this one; that one; Vin II 195,17joll. (ye te manussa
assaddha ... te evaq¡ iihaq¡su); DI 13,23 (so tato cuto
amutra udapadiq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee upapadiq¡); 60,16 (so
vat' assahaq¡ puññani kareyyaq¡); MI 256,15 (tatha 'haq¡
bhagavata dhammaq¡ desitaq¡ ajanami yatha tad ev'
idaq¡ viñña~aq¡ sandhavati saq¡sarati anaññan ti); 369,35
(sutaq¡ m' etaq¡ bhante brahma mettavihiiri ti, taq¡ me
idaq¡ bhante bhagava sakkhi diqho bhagava hi bhante
mettavihiiri ti); S III 28,1 (tassa mayhaq¡ bhikkhave etad
ahosi); A I 120,7 (yvayaq¡ pugga1o saddhavimutto
svayaq¡ arahattaya patipanno); Vv 38:2 (tassa te
naccamanaya); Th 1091 (kada nu'haq¡ ... addutiyo
vihassaq¡ . . . taq¡ me idaq¡ taq¡ nu kada bhavissati;
Th-a III 151,9: taq¡ nii ti e' ettha tan ti nipatamattaq¡);
1099 (tad idaq¡ kada me); Ja I 151,19 (sviihaq¡ attano
jivitaq¡ tassa datva); IV 322,13* (so 'haq¡ Sakko
sahassakkho agato 'smi tavantike ); V 198,3* (svayaq¡
v~o khajjati k~<,Iuvayati); Vism 2,29 (so panayaq¡
visuddhimaggo katthaci vipassanamattavasen' eva
desito); 667,31 (svayaq¡ attho nandakovadasuttena
dlpetabbo); Spk II 87,13 (tad idaq¡ acchariyaq¡ bhante);
-esp. tayidaq¡ 1 [tad + idaq¡], this very ... ; this ... here;
rhis very thing; Vin 1 230,36 (tayidaq¡ bhikkhave
dukkhaq¡ ariyasaccaq¡ anubuddhaq¡ patividdhaq¡); III 2,5
1tayidaq¡ bho Gotama tath' eva; Sp 130,2ojoll.: yaq¡ taq¡
maya sutaq¡ taq¡ tath' eva); DI 16,33 (tayidaq¡ bhikkhave
tathagato pajanati); 92,1 (tayidaq¡ na ppatiriipaq¡ yad ime
Sakya ibbha santa ... na briihm~e sakkaronti; Sv 256,17:
tayidan ti taq¡ idaq¡); SI 148,3* (tayidaq¡ vimanaq¡ jalate
va): A I 68,31 ( ... pesala bhikkhii tasmiq¡ samaye
dubbala honti ... tayidaq¡ bhikkhave hoti bahujaniihitaya
bahujanasukhaya ... ; Mp II 143,1: tayidan ti tad etaq¡
kiir~aq¡); Sn 1077 (tayidaq¡ kathaq¡ su); Pv 3:3
1tayidaq¡ taya N arada samaq¡ diqhaq¡; Pv-a 16,1: tayidan
ti taq¡ idaq¡ mama riipaq¡); Ja IV 397,16' (das' eva
'assadasa imesaq¡ maccanaq¡ idha manussaloke jivitaq¡
tayidaq¡ na niyamena sabba eva eta dasa papu~ati, Be, Se
so: Ce sabba ekiidasa; Ee sabba ekadasa); V 399,2o*
•tayidaq¡ na sadhu yadidaq¡ taya kataq¡); Vism 80,30
•yathiiha tayidaq¡ ay asma Bakkulo dhuto na dhutavado
ti: Vism-mht [Be] I 104,24: tayidan ti nipato, tassa so
ayan ti attho); 581,16; Sv 267,32 (vijja nama tayo veda
.:ar~aq¡ pañcasilani tayidaq¡ amhakaq¡ yeva atthi);
Cd-a 394,18 (nibbanassa ... na kiñci kar~aq¡ vuttaq¡
tayidaq¡ ahetukaq¡); Pv-a 2,4 (tayidaq¡ petavatthu kena
bhasitaq¡); Cp-a 105,12 (sace koci dakkhi~eyyo mama
265 ta(d)
santikaq¡ agacchati tayidaq¡ sakam attanaq¡ tassa dajjam'
ahaq¡); 309,22 (tayidaq¡ si!aq¡ carittaq¡ varittan ti
duvidhaq¡); - 2. as adjective: that; Vin I 233,17 (Siho
senapati niga~thasavako tassaq¡ parisayaq¡ nisinno hoti);
111 1,6 (tena samayena buddho bhagava Verañjayaq¡
viharati); IV 1 ,3 (namo tassa bhagavato arahato
sammasambuddhassa); 212,10 (sa bhikkhuni); V 165,7*
(sa ve tiidisako bhikkhu appatikkho ti vuccati); DI 60,32
(etu me bho so puriso); 74,25foll. (tamha udakarahada
sitavaridhiira ubbhijjitva tam eva udakarahadaq¡ sitena
viirina abhisandeyya); 156,21 (anavattidhammo tasma
loka); MI 37,1 (sa kho so bhikkhave bhikkhu); 333,3o
(taya samapattiya vuqhahitva); 11 55,25 (Raqhapalo nama
kulaputto ... tissaq¡ parisayaq¡ nisinno hoti, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce tassaq¡); S I 6,1 (aññatara devata taq¡ devataq¡
gathiiya paccabhasi); 120,25 (ayasma Godhiko taya
siimayikaya cetovimuttiya parihiiyi, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
tamha); IV 98,3 (tasmatiha bhikkhave se ayatane
veditabbe, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ye; Spkii 391,1: taq¡
kiir~aq¡ janitabban ti attho); A I 8,7 (so vata bhikkhu
micchap~ihitena cittena avijjaq¡ bhecchati ... n' etaq¡
thiinaq¡ vijjati); 185,29 (tasma dharnmavinaya apakkanto
ti); II 159,22 (tesaq¡ sattanaq¡ tamha kaya cuti hoti);
III 123,4 (Devadatto tassa iddhiya parihino ti); Ud 1,1s
(bhagava . . . tayaq¡ velayaq¡ imaq¡ udanaq¡ udanesi);
Sn 291 (aññatra tamha samaya); Vv 79:12 (tad eva
ettakaq¡ kammaq¡ akasiq¡ taya jatiya; Vv-a 308,1: taya
tassaq¡ jatiyaq¡); Ja I 278,28 (eko kumbhilo sapajapatiko
tassa nadiya vasati); II 172,19* (sa raja vibhavaq¡ gato);
IV 91,11 (tasmiq¡ kale rañño mailgalahatthi kalam akasi);
Patis I 23,18 (evaq¡ so dhammo pariññato e' eva hoti
tirito ca); Ap 21,23 (tamhi samaye); 70,7 (tena kammena
sukatena); 477,9 (tad assa sutva vacanaq¡); Vibh 193,25
(so taq¡ nimittaq¡ asevati); Mil 1,3* (Milindo niima so
raja ... upagañchi Nagasenaq¡); 271,25 (cavanti pana te
bhante yakkha tamha yoniya ti); 405,23* (tena cittena
patabbaq¡ vimuttirasam asecanaq¡); Vism 143,12 (tasma
viveka tasmiq¡ va viveke jatan ti vivekajaq¡); Ap-a 335,6
(tattha tassaq¡ jatiyaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tissaq¡); -
3. as correlative to ya(d); Vin I 211,6 (yad api Ananda
anto vutthaq¡ tad api akappiyaq¡); DI 60,26 (yo te puriso
daso ... so deva ... anagariyaq¡ pabbajito); 88,9 (yaq¡
ahaq¡ janami taq¡ tvaq¡ janasi yaq¡ tvaq¡ janasi taq¡ ahaq¡
janami ti); III 14,ufoll. (api nu Sunakkhatta tathagato
taq¡ vacaq¡ bhaseyya ya sa vaca dvayagamini ti); MI
327,17 (yad eva te brahma iiha tad eva tvaq¡ karohi);
II 105,22* (yaq¡ seqhaq¡ tad upagamaq¡); 254,25 (y e
lokiimisasaq¡yojane se pavutte; Ps IV 53,9: se pavutte ti
taq¡ pavuttaq¡); S I 6,10* (na hi so nandati yo nirupadhi);
A I 201,22 (yad api bhikkhave 1obho tad api akusalaq¡);
V 288,29 (yaq¡ kammaq¡ karonti ka1ya~aq¡ va papakaq¡
va tassa dayada bhavanti); Dhp 63 (yo balo maññati
ba1yaq¡ p~<,lito vapi tena so); Ud 24,17* (yassa nitti~~o
pailko . . . sa bhikkhu); Sn 845 (yehi vivitto vicareyya
loke na tani uggayha vadeyya nago); 916 (ya kaci ta~ha
ajjhattaq¡ tasaq¡ vinaya sada sato sikkhe); Thi 58 (yaq¡
tvaq¡ kamaratiq¡ briisi arati dani sa mamaq¡); Ja I 360,23
(bhante yaq¡ tumhiikaq¡ dullabhaq¡ taq¡ vadeyyatha tad
eva mayaq¡ patiyadessama ti); IV 404,11 * (yad icchase
tvaq¡ tada te samijjhatu, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se taq¡ te;
ta(d)
404,14'/oil.: yaq¡ tvaq¡ mama santika icchasi tarp te
samijjhatu) quoted Sadd 627,9; Dhs 734 (yo riipassa
upacayo sa riipassa santati); Kv 4,16 (tena hi y e kate
niggahe se niggahe dukkate); Milll,22 (yarp loke
uttamarp mantarp taq¡ pi jan ami ti); 179,10 foil. (ya sa
sakalika bhagavato pacte patita kissa pana sa sakalika
bhagavato pada na nivatta); - 4. repeated, often with
indefinite sense: each one; anyone; this and that; MI
49,2o foil. (tesaq¡ tesarp sattanaq¡ tamhi tamhi sattanikaye
jara); 234,14 (yaq¡ yad eva hi so bhante kakkatako aJarp
abhininnameyya taq¡ tad eva te kumaraka ... kat!hena ...
sañchindeyyurp); Vv 39:3 (yassa yass' eva sa1assa miile
titthasi devate so so muñcati pupphani onamitva
dumuttamo ); Ja I 2,9 foil. (santikenidanarp pana te su tesu
thanesu viharato tasmirp tasmirp yeva thane labbhatl ti);
Mil 280,3 (yaq¡ yarp hi yacante tarp tad eva databbarp);
Vism 576,10 (tena tena dukkhadhammena phutthassa);
Pv-a 113,9 (yo yo yaq¡ yaq¡ icchati tassa tassa taq¡ tarp
adasi); Mhv 6:22 (ubbaslyati so so ca yarp yaq¡ gamaq¡
upeti so); 25:15 (so so ca gamo 'hu tarptadavhayo);-
acc. taq¡, tad, adv., there, thither; then; thus, in regard
to this; therefore; V in lii 11,27 (yena Barfu).asl tad
avasari); D I 60,6 (tarp kirp maññasi maharaja); II 118,29
(tarp kut' ettha Ananda labbha; Sv 564,6: tan ti tasma);
S I 43,20* (alassarp ca . . . nidda tandl ca te chidde
sabbaso taq¡ vivajjaye; Spk I 100,13: tan ti nipata-
mattarp); 214,7 (na khvaharp tarp avuso nikkhamissami,
Be so; Ee na kho panahaq¡ avuso; Ce, Se na khvaharp
avuso; Spk I 326,2s: na khvahaq¡ tan ti aha ... tan ti
hetuvacanarp, eds so)= Snp. 32,1 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se na
khvahaq¡ avuso ); A I 8,9 (tarp kissa he tu); 240,3 (tassa
kho taq¡ bhikkhave kassakassa gahapatissa natthi sa
iddhi ... ); Khp 8:3 (na sabbo sabbada eva tassa taq¡
upakappati; Pj I 219,27 foil.: tan ti padapiirat_lamatte
ni pato datthabbo ... lingabhedarp va katva so ti vattabbe
tan ti vuttaq¡); Ud 7l,lo* (tarp sañgam aticca;
Ud-a 349,6foll.: tan ti nipatamattaq¡ atha va hetu-attho
tarpsaddo); 77,9* (taq¡ dhiraq¡ bandhana muttarp ko taq¡
ninditum arahati); Pv 2:3 (tarp tyaharp N arada briimi;
Pv-a 11,11: tan ti tasma); Ja V 399,25* (taq¡ taq¡ asaccam
avibhajjasevinirp janami; 400,3·: tarp tan ti tasma taq¡);
- tad amhaq¡ in Ee at Ud 80,13 is wr (see Errata); Be,
Ce tatrapaharp; Se taro aharp; - instr. tena, adv., l. in
that direction, there; V in II 195,7 (Na!agiri hatthl .. .
yena bhagava tena abhidhavi); MI 146,16 (bhagava .. .
yena Savatthi tena carikarp pakkami); Ud 16,7 (yena
sakarp ghararp tena paccayasi); Sn 1143 (yaq¡ yarp
disarp vajati bhüripañño sa tena ten' eva nato 'ham
asmi); Th 82 (yena yena subhikkhani sivani abhayani ca
tena puttaka gacchassu; Th-a I 187,34: tena ti tasmirp
tasmirp disabhage ti attho ); Thi 133 (tena tena
vicari'harp; Thl-a 121,7: tena tena ti gamena gamaq¡
nagarena nagararp vithiya vlthirp vicarirp ahaq¡); Ja VI
283,12* (yen' icchasi tena gaccha); 553,34* (tena tena
padhavirpsu Jali Km¡hajina ubho); Mil57,23 (yena
bhante ninnarp tena gaccheyya ti); 396,13 (migo manusse
disva yena va tena va palayati);- 2. be cause of that, for
that reason, therefore; Vin III 28,21 (eso saq¡vaso nama,
so tena saddhirp natthi tena vuccati asaq¡vaso ti); MI
186,22 (upekha kusalanissita na sai_!thati, so tena
266 ta(d)
sarpvijjati); Vv 1:6 (tena m' etadiso Vai_lJ.lO tena me
idha-m-ijjhati); Ja I 151,22 (maya tadiso . . . na
dighapubbo tena te pasanno 'smi); III 279,16* (tena
jahissat' attanarp); VI 531 ,23· (tena tesaq¡ etan' e va
namani ahesurp); 562,19* (te maq¡ parivarayurp maggarp
tena sayamhi agata); Nidd I 3,19 (ten' aha bhagava ... );
Ap 613,19 (ambasakhantare jata Ambapali ti ten' ahaq¡);
Mil 171,15 (tena vuccati moghapuriso ti); Vism 515,3o
(tena vuttarp tividho khandhattayabhedato ti);
Sadd 898,22; - tena hi, therefore; now then; weil then;
V in III 16,25 (tena hi tvarp vadhu ... alankarena alankara
ti; c;(Sp 210,14foil.: tena hl ti yasma ajja Sudinno
agamissati tena karat_lena . . . tena ti ayarp pi va
uyyojanatthe nipato yeva); 17,1o (tena hi tvam
gahapati ... ; Sp211,16: tena hl ti uyyojanatthe
vibhattipatiriipako nipato); DI 60,3 (tena hi maharaja
tarp yev' ettha patipucchissami); II 22,15 (tena hi samma
sarathi alarp dan' ajja uyyanabhiimiya); MI 14,9 (tena
h' avuso SUJ.latha sadhukarp manasikarotha bhasissaml ti;
cfPs 1 100,31: tattha tena ti karaJ.lavacanarp hikaro
nipato); Ud 44,14 (tena hi Jetavanarp vicinatha ti);
Sn p. 82,2 (tena hi tvarp brahmaJ.la odahassu sotarp
dhammarp te desessami); Vv44:19 (tena h' aññe pi
samadapetha); Ja III 188,22 (tena hi ma mayharp
kujjhittha ti); VI 191,4 (tena hi eh! ti); Ap 498,12 (tena hi
dani Vanglsa thanaso santhavahi marp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tena danena); Mil 19,17 (tena hi bhat_1e bhadantassa
arocetha ti); 75,31 (tena hi bhante Nagasena buddho
brahmuno sisso ti); Vism 48,1 (tena hi marp nisldapetva
okasarp karohl ti ); - abl. tasmli, adv., therefore; on
that account; Vin III 150,21 (khamati sañghassa tasma
tul,lhl); S I 9 ,2* (ka1arp voharp na jan ami channo ka1o na
dissati tasma abhutva bhikkhami); II 223,12 (na h' etarp
avuso atthasarphitaq¡ ... na nibbanaya sarpvattati tasma
tarp avyakatarp bhagavata ti); It 122,4 (yathavadl
tathakañ yathakarl tathavadl tasma tathagato ti vuccati);
Sn 1051 (tasma hi janarp upadhirp na kayira); Th 787
(adlnavaq¡ kamaguJ.lesu disva tasma aharp pabbajito
'mhi raja); Ja VI 144,11 (idani te abhinikkhamanakalo
tasma abhinikkhamma); 485,21* (jato 'mhi vessavlthiyarp
tasma Vessantaro ahurp); Cp 1:8:16 (sabbaññutaq¡
piyarp mayharp tasma cakkhurp adas' aharp); Mil300,11
(tasma jagaranto supinarp na passati); - as correlative
to y asma: M 1 91 ,24 (y asma ca kho te Mahanama so e va
dhammo ajjhattarp appahlno tasma tvarp agaraq¡
ajjhavasasi); S IV 54,6 (y asma . . . suññarp attena va
attaniyena va tasma suñño lo k o ti vuccati); Ud 81 ,2
(yasma ca kho bhikkhave atthi ajatarp abhütarp akatarp
asankhatarp tasma jatassa bhiitassa katassa sañkhatassa
mssarai_larp paññayatl ti); It 19,2 (yasma ca kho
bhikkhave satta na evarp jananti . . . tasma adatva
bhuñjanti); Mil 46,1s (yasma ca kho maharaja
patisandahati tasma na mutto papakehi kammehl ti);
Sadd 898,22; tasmatiha [tasma ti ha ? or
tasma-t-iha ?], (often foilowed by an imperative sense)
therefore; then; D II 57,16 (tasmatih' Ananda es' eva
hetu); A 1 15,9 (tasmatiha bhikkhave evarp
sikkhitabbarp ... ); Sn 460 (tasmatiha tvaq¡ brahmaJ.la
atthena atthiko upasankamma puccha; Pj 11405,16: tasma
pana iha tvaq¡ brahmaJ.la); Ja V 32,11 * (tasmatiha tvaq¡
ta(d)
taramanariipo sambhañja kaghani, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
tasma hi so); - (tad)-agge, ind., beginning from that;
since then; D I 93,3 (-e kho pana Ambagha Sakya
paññayanti; Sv 262,28: -e ti tarp aggarp katva tato
paghaya ti attho ); II 206,22 (yadagge . . . -e aharp
bhante); III 92,2o (-e kho pana Vasegha adinnadanarp
paññayati); Ap 464,1o (tasma -e es' aggo); - (tad)-
aggena, ind., according to that, to that extent; V in I
223,26 (yadaggena ... -ena te bahurp puññarp pasütam);
Sp 596,18 (yadaggena vematiko -ena n' okappeti); Ps IV
54,21 (yadaggena puthujjanassa asappayarp -ena
khl1,1asavassapi asappayam eva); - (tad)-añga, n. [ta(d)
+ ailga2], that characteristic; that factor; that cause;
M III 148,27 (-ena kho ... sant' etth' ekacca devata
parittabha santi pan' etth' ekacca devata appama1,1abha
ti; Ps IV 202,16: -ena ti tassa bhavupapattiya ailgena,
bhavupapattikar~ena ti attho); A IV 411,1 (yattha kama
nirujjhanti ye ca kame nirodhetva nirodhetva viharanti
addha te ayasmanto nicchata nibbuta ti1,11,1a paragata -ena
ti vadami; Mp IV 193,25: -ena ti tena jhanailgena); -
(tad)-acJcJhaka, (mf)n., (being) half of that; Ap 34,19
(ayamato pañcasatarp vittharena -arp; Ap-a 267,31: -arp
tato a~~hakarp tiyaMhasatayojanan ti attho); -
(tad)-anugm}a, mfn., suitable to that; Ud-a 353,5 (-arp
ucchedadassanarp abhinivisanta); (tad)-
anurüpa, mfn., fitting for that, suitable; SI 81,12 (-aya
gathaya); Ja VI 366,31 (püvarp pacitva -arp vyañjanarp
sampadetva); Vism 562,6 (-ani riipani); Sp 1180,n (ath'
assa -arp kammavacarp katva manattarp databbarp);
Ud-a 49,14 (-arp pa~hamarp udanarp udanesi); - -arp,
-ena, adv., according to that; in conformity to that;
Th-a III 154,15 (kasma idani -arp na ppa~ipajjasl ti);
V v-a 5,11 (-en a); - (tad)-anurüpikli, (m)f(n). or (tad)-
anurüpika, mfn., fitting for that, suitable; Sp 565,16
(-arp ca dhammirp katharp katva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tadanuriiparp);- (tad)-anulomika, mfn., which accords
with that; Vin III 21,14 (bhikkhünarp tadanucchavikarp
-arp dhammirp katharp katva); Mil 276,27; - (tad)-ahu,
(tad)-ahe, see sv aha(n);- (tad)-lidhimutta, mfn. [ta(d)
+ adhimutta 1 with rhythmicallengthening ?], set on that,
resolved on that; Nidd I 425,2• (tarpninnacitta -a, Ce so;
Ee, Se tadadhimuttata; Be tadadhimutta); - (tad)-
linuga, m(fn). [ta(d) + anuga with metricallengthening],
his follower, his attendant; Ap 473,5 (araha asi so thero
anagami -o); - (tad)-linucchavika, mfn. [ta(d) +
anucchavika with metrical/rhythmical lengthening], fit
for that or for there; Ap 19,19 (-a ete aññamaññarp
sagarava, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce sadanucchavika); -
(tad)-lirammal}a, (tad)-a1ambana, mfn. and n., l. (n.) the
object of that!them; MI 127,6; Vism 328,28
(riipasaññanan ti saññaslsena vuttariipavacarajjhananarp
e' eva -anarp ca) t Nidd-a II 57,23 (riipasañña ti
saññaslsena vuttarp riipavacarajjhanarp e' eva
tada1ambanarp ca); Vism 328,34 (pa~avlkasil,ladi­
bhedassa -assa e' etarp adhivacanan ti veditabbarp) =
Nidd-a II 57,29; - 2. (i) (mfn.) having that as object;
Vism 482,14 (--tta); 591,6 (yatha yatha hi 'ssa riiparp
suvikkha!itarp hoti . . . tatha tatha -a ariipadhamma
sayam eva paka~a honti); Spk II 243,17 (tal,lha-
khayasailkhate nibbane -aya vimuttiya vimuttarp);
267 ta(d)
Pa~is-a 582,37 (tarpsampayutta -a va piti); - (ii) (n.) a
registering thought moment (thought moments 16-17 of
a 17-moment act of perception); Vism 460,3
(javanavasane pana . . . dvikkhatturp sakirp va vipaka-
viññal,larp uppajjati . . . tassa javanassa aramm~arp
aramma1,1arp katva pavattatta -an ti vuccati); 550,28
(pañcajavanani dve -ani ca uppajjanti); As 265,11 (esa
yarp javanena gahitaramma1,1arp tass' eva gahitatta -arp
nama hutva vipaccati); 269,24 (javanapariyosane pana
-assa varo tasmirp anuppanne yeva bhavailgarp otarati);
270,19 (cakkhuviññ~arp sampa~icchanarp sant!ra1,1arp
-an ti cattari vipakacittani); 287,1 foll. (javitapariyosane
pa~hamavipakacittam eva -arp hoti tarp mülabhavailgarp
-an ti dve namani 1abhati); Vibh-a 154,5foll.; -
ta(d)-liraha, mfn. [ta(d) + araha with metrical
lengthening], worthy of or fit for them; Ja V 393,9*
(pupphuttamarp ... aladdha maccehi va (E e va) danavehi
va aññatra devehi -arp h' idarp; 393,27'/oll.: tesarp yeva
hi tam araharp anucchavikarp); - (tad)-utthliya, ind.,
arising from that; Dhp 240 (tadughaya tam eva khadati,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tatughaya; Dhp-a III 344,2: tato
ughahitva); - (tad)-upabhogi(n), mfn., enjoying that;
Pj I 22,20; - (tad)-ubhaya, (tad)-übhaya, n., the pair,
both of them; Vin III 239,34 (katakatarp nama -arp); D II
302,20 (yarp ca -arp pa~icca uppajjati sarpyojanarp tarp
ca pajanati); M II 257,23 (-ena va1,1o puthuttarp
gaccheyya); SI 134,27* (pathavlrasarp cagamma sineharp
ca tadübhayarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -arp); Ja VI 224,13*
(sabbam etarp tadübhayarp); 529,27* (aññe ama ca pakka
ca bhekava1,11,1a tadübhayarp); (tad)-üpiya,
(tad)-üpaka, mf(-ika)n. [ta(d) + -upiya, -upaka, with
rhythmical lengthening], fit for that, appropriate for
that; Vin III 243,28 (catubhagarp khadanarp -arp
vyañjanarp); D II 198,17 (naJikodanaparamarp bhuñjami
-arp ca süpeyyam); M II 54,10; Ja II 160,11* (mahatl vata
te bondi na ca panna tadüpika); Mil 9,20
(katacchubhikkharp -arp ca vyañjanarp dapetva); -
(tad)-ekattha, mfn. [ta(d) + ekagha2], standing together
with that, conjoined with that; Thi 99 (pahasirp
ragadosarp ca -e ca asave); Nidd I 99,26 (-a ca kilesa);
Pa~is I 94,26 (kamasavo khlyati -o bhavasavo khiyati);
124,2 (-o mano; Patis-a401,13foll.: taya avijjaya
sahajekaghavasena ekato thito); Vibh 366,34 (kamarago
-arp akusa1arp kayakammarp); Ud-a 214,9 (--taya); -
(tak)-kappa, mfn., like that, similar to that; Nidd II
129,14 (paccekabuddho -o tassadiso tappatibhago); -
(tak)-kara\ m(fn). [tad + kara 1; BHS tatkara], (one) who
does that, who follows that; DI 235,18 (ayarp añjasayano
niyyaniko niyyati -assa brahmasahavyataya; Sv 400,12:
yo tarp maggarp karoti patipajjati); Dhp 19 (bahurp pi ce
sahitarp bhasamano na -o hoti naro pamatto); Ja VI
397,3* (yarpvada -a); Ps IV 102,s (ye tava imassa
suttassa paJirp ca aghakatharp ca ugg~hitva -a na
honti); Sadd 845,3 (tarp karotl ti -o); - (tarp)-klila,
takka1a, m. [ta(d) + ka1a 1], that time; -arp, then; at that
time; Abh86 (takka1arp tu tadattarp e' eva); Spki 121,7
(-ato paghaya); (tarp)-kotthlisika, (tarp)-
kotthlisiya, mfn., belonging to that group; Sp 600,21
(tabbhagiyarp tappakkhiyarp tarpkot~asiyarp); Nidd-a I
104,19 (tappatibhago ti tarpkoghasiko);- (tarp)-khaJ.la,
ta(d)
tailkha!)a, m. [ta(d) + khal)a 1], that moment; the same
moment; Sp 553,29 (ettha -o ti acirakalo vuccati); -
tailkhal)a1]1, tailkhal)e, adv., just that moment; at that
very moment; at the same moment; Ja I 120,15 (-e
nakkhattal]1 samanetva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -al]1 yeva);
II413,12 (sarena viddho -al]1 yeva mari); III 130,16 (so
-al]1 agantva akase rhatva); 239,25 (tassa -al]1 yeva
gihilingaiJ1 antaradhayi); Mil 8,3 (ayasma pi Roha!)o
-al]1 yeva nirodha vurrhaya); Vism 379,5 (pubbe va
paccha va -e va); Sp 305,17 (-am eva ca raja pi
cetiyavandanatthaiJ1 agato); Sv 219,14 (-al]1
dhotaparisuddhena); Mp I 306,2 (sabbabhikkhünaiJ1 rogo
-al]1 yeva vüpasanto); Pj I 214,21 (-a1]1 yeva upakappati
na cirena); Nidd-a I 82,3 (lahun ti -a1]1); Bv-a 85,2R
(tavade ti tada -am eva ti attho, Ee so; Ce -al]1 yeva ti;
Be, Se -e yeva ti); Mhv 4:22 (tato nikkhami -a1]1);
25:100 (-e); - (tail)-khaJ.lika, mfn. and -a,f [cfBHS
tatk~a!)ika], just for that time, for a short time;
temporary; (f) a temporary sexual partner; V in III
138,33 (kathaiJ1 hi nama ayyo Udayi -al]1 sañcarittaiJ1
samapajjissatl ti; Sp 554,1: ettha taiJ1khal)o ti acirakalo
vuccati -an ti acirakaladhikarika1]1); 139,9 (yo pana
bhikkhu sañcarittal]1 samapajjeyya itthiya va
purisamati1]1 purisassa va itthimati1]1 jayattane va
jarattane va antamaso -aya pi, sailghadiseso ti; 139,18:
antamaso -aya pi ti muhuttika bhavissasi); 140,8
(muhuttika nama -a vuccati); Sp 554,26 (ya ayaiJ1
ta1]1khal)e muhuttamatte parisaiJ1vasitabbato -a ti
vuccati); Mpiii 132,15 (yasma -al]1 pi uppatt-
inibbattakaiJ1 jhanaiJ1 parilabhati yeva tasma sukkha-
vipassako pi samadhismiiJ1 paripürakañ yeva, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se upapattinimittakaiJ1); - (ta1]1)-khantika, mfn.
ffrom ta(d) + khanti 1], having that preferred view;
Vin III 175,32 (yaiJ1dighiko hoti ya1]1khantiko yaiJ1ruciko
te pi taiJ1dighika honti -a tal]1rucika); PsI 111 ,28; -
(tag)-gatamanasa, mfn., with one's mind on that;
Vv-a 217,26 (sattharaiJ1 dhammaiJ1 desental]1 parisaiJ1 ca
paramena upasamena dhammaiJ1 SUJ)antal]1 disva -o, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee uggatamanaso); - (tag)-gatika, mfn., of
the same kind, belonging to the same type; ? Sadd 138,12
(sattha ti padassa parhamabahuvacanattaiJ1 avassaiJ1
icchitabbaiJ1 tatha vattadhatagantadinaiJ1 pi --tta); 680,21
(dighena nayena adighassa pi -assa nayassa); -
(tag)-gamanasa, mfn., with one's mind on that; Vv 47:5
(nassa maggaiJ1 avekkhissaiJ1 na -a satl, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se tadailgamanasa satl; Vv-a201,16foll.: tassaiJ1
gaviyal]1 gatamana rhapitamana na hontl aññadatthu
bhagavato thüpagatamana eva samana ti attho,
tadailgamanasa satl ti ca parho, tadailge tassa bhagavato
dhatuyaiJ1 ange mano etissa ti); - (tag)-garuka, mfn.,
esteeming that; Nidd I 491,19 (tabbahulo -o tanninno
tappol)o ... ); Ps IV 52,5; París-a 651,35 (sa pañña caritaiJ1
garuka bahu1a assa ti taccarito -o tabbahulo); -
(tag)-guJ.laSaipviññaJ.la, mfn., (gr.t.t.) (o{ a bahuvríhi
compound) expressing an inherent characteristic;
Sadd 760,7 foil. (duvidho bahubbihi -o ataggul)as-
a1]1viññill)o); - ataggul)aSaiJ1Viññal)a, mfn., (gr.t.t.)
expressing a non-inherent, not invariable characteristic;
- (ta1]1)-catuttha, mfn., with that one as the fourth,
consisting of that one and three others; Vin I 320,17
268 ta(d)
(yassa sangho kammaiJ1 karoti -o kammaiJ1 kareyya
akammaiJ1 na ca karal)iyaiJ1); - (tac)-carita,
(tac )-carika, mfn., practising that habitually; Nidd 1 35,21
(y e pi kame e san ti . . . -a tabbahula taggaruka . . . te pi
kamapasuta) t 491, 1s (paññaiJ1 purato katva .. . -o
tabbahulo taggaruko ... , Ce so; Be, Ee, Se taccariko,
perhaps wr) t París II 197,23 (Paris-a 651 ,35: sa pañña
carita1]1 ... assa ti -o); - (taj)-ja, mfn., see sv; -
(ta1]1)-jhiinika, (taj)-jhiinika, mfn. ffrom ta(d) + jhana2],
belonging to that jhana; Sv 804,2o = París-a 194,9 =
Vibh-a 120,35; As 230,3o (yal]1 icchati -o hotl ti); -
(ta)-tta, tatva, n., abstr. [tatta 1], see sv; - (ta1]1)-
dasama, mfn., with that one as the tenth, consisting of
that one and nine others; Vin I 320,26;
(tad)-diguJ.la, mfn., twice that, double that; D III 13,4
(yavatakal]1 yavatakaiJ1 samal)o Gotamo
uttarimanussadhamma iddhiparihariyaiJ1 karissati -al]1
taddigunahaiJ1 karissaml ti); 187,8 (uppannesu
kiccakaral)lyesu -al]1 bhogal]1 anuppadeti; Sv 950,13:
yattakam vadati tato digul)aiJ1 deti); Sv 995,26 (-al]1 -al]1
sampatti1]1 passanto); Paris-a 615,13 (pañcavlsati attha -a
niruttiyo -ani ñal)ani); (ta1]1)-dilthika,
(tan)-diUhika, mfn., holding that belief or theory;
Vin III 175,32; Nidd I 73,23 (yaiJ1dighiko sattha hoti -a
savaka honti); Ps 1 111,27;- (ta1]1)-divase, adv., on that
day; Ps II 267,2 (tava-d-eva jatako ti -e jatako, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee tal]1 divasaiJ1); Spk II 199,14 (bhagavato
samagamo -e yeva ahosi); - (ta1]1)-dipani, (m)f(n).,
explaining, making manifest, that; Th-a I 19,3 (-iyo ...
gatha); - (ta1]1)-dukkha, mfn., having, sharing, that
unhappiness; D II 233,21 (ya1]1dukkho bhavaiJ1 -a
maya1]1); - (tad)-dhita, m.n. [ts; ta(d) + hita], (gr.t.t.)
an affix forming nouns from other nouns; a noun so
formed, a derivative noun; Sp 135,18 (venayiko ti aha ...
vinayatl ti vinayo vinaseti ti vutta1]1 hoti, vinayo eva
venayiko vinayal]1 va arahatl ti venayiko . . . vinayaya
dhammaiJ1 desetl ti venayiko, vicitra hi --vutti); 211,4
(aññaiJ1 pettika1]1 aññaiJ1 pitamahan ti ... pitamahan ti
--lopaiJ1 katva veditabbaiJ1, petamahan ti va parho) =
Ps III 299,25; Sadd 321,18 (kavinaiJ1 idan ti kabban ti
--vasena attho gahetabbo); 782,nfoll. (-an ti apaccadi-
atthesu pavattanaiJ1 l)adipaccayanaiJ1 namaiJ1
parikappadivasena nipphadetabbassa vidhino pi
namaiJ1); 811,1 foil. (vicitra --vutti: nanapaccayesu
ekasmi1]1 pi samane paccaye nana-atthesu vattanato
-anaiJ1 vutti nama vicitra ti veditabba: madisanaiJ1
avisayo gambhiro -o nayo); (ta1]1)-
namaka, mf(-ika)n., called that, named after him/her,
Ja VI 364,23 (ahaiJ1 atltanugate va etarahi va yaiJ1 natthi
tal]1namika ti); Ps IV 62,3; Mhv 10:99 (devakulaiJ1
akaresi mahipati Kumbhal)<;!assa niga!)rhassa
taiJ1namikaiJ1 ahosi ta1]1); 33:84 (tassa -al]1 katva
SomaramaiJ1 akarayi); - (ta1]1)-nimitta, mfn. and
-a1]1, adv., caused by that; because of that; Th-a II
128,25 (dhamme sucÍI)I)e -al]1 duggati1]1 na gacchatl ti);
195,21 (tato ti -a1]1); 280,22 (-anaiJ1 kilesanaiJ1); III 22,24
(puggalaiJ1 -al]1 dukkhaiJ1 anveti); Cp-a 327,35 ( -al]1 na
kampati); - (tan)-nimittaka, mfn., caused by that;
Ud-a 187,3o; Th-a II 60,5; - (tan)-nivasi(n), m(jn).
[ta(d) + nivasi(n) 2], being an inhabitant of that, living
ta(d)
there; Ud-a 115,8 (Icchanaó.galanamako Kosalesu eko
brahma!)agamo, --taya ... Icchanaó.galako); V v-a 337,2
(Aó.gara~~e ca jata smpvac)c)ha -ino); - (tap)-
pakkhika, (tap)-pakkhiya, mfn. [ta(d) + pakkhika2],
siding with, supporting hím/her!that; Ja IV 158,27 (tani
kulani pi -ani hutva, Be, Ee so; Ce tassa pakkhika; Se
tassa pakkhikani); Sp 600,21 (tabbhagiyarp.
tappakkhiya¡p tarp.kotthasiyarp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ta¡ppakkhiyam); It-a I 68,15 (Devadattassa -anarp. ca
tatha niraye nibbattabhavarp. disva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tappakkhiyanarp.); 69,21 (-anmp); As 220,10 (--tta); -
(ta¡p)-pajiinana, mfn., understanding that; Vibh-a 73,11
(-o maggo maggasaccan ti); - (tarp.)-pajiinanii,f, the
understanding of that; Pa~is I 4,5 (-a pañña sutamaye
naJ)arp.; Pa~is-a 61,13: tassa paJanana -a ti
samivacanasamaso); - (ta¡p)-pañcama, mfn., wíth that
one as the fifth, consisting of that one and four others;
Vin I 320,22; - (tap)-parama, mfn., having that as
one's highest aim, totally devoted to that, Nidd I 206,5;
- (tap)-pariiyal).a, mfn., having that as one's chíef
object, totally engaged with that; Sn 1114 (ena¡p janati
vimuttarp. -mp); Th 925 (vihirp.su -a); Nidd I 206,5;
Sv 231,21foll. (--ta nama ajjadirp. katva aharp.
buddhaparaya!)o dhammaparaya!)O saó.ghaparayal).o iti
ma¡p dharetha ti evarp. --bhavo); - (tap)-purisa, m.
[S. tatpuru~a], (gr.t.t.)"his man, his servant", a class of
compounds in which the last member is qualified by the
first; a determinative compound; Sadd 745,11 (so ca
samaso . . . saññavasena avyaylbhavo kammadharayo
digu -o bahubb!hi dvando ca ti chabbidho); 754,JJfoll.
(amadayo samaslyanti parapadehi so -o: ... tassa puriso
-o, tappurisasadisatta ayarp. pi samaso -o ti vuccati ...
uttarapadatthapadhano hi -o, so ca dutiyatappurisadi-
vasena chabbidho hoti);- (tap)-pol).a, (tmp)-pol).a, mfn.
[ta[d] + pol).a2], inclíning to that; Ja III 65,20' (tava
mano ... papakara!)e tanninno -o tappabbharo na hoti);
Pa?s 11 197,24 (tabbahulo tanninno -o ... ) f. Nidd I 35,21;
Vism 643,32 (--ta); Sv 220,17 (vipassanañill).assa
nibbattanatthaya tanninnarp. -arp. tappabbhararp. karoti);
Ps V 86,12 (yena buddho yena dhammo yena saó.gho
tanninna -a tappabbhara hutva); Pj I 17,1 (--ttena);
.'lidd-a I 262,33 (-assa ti tasmirp. natakayassa);
Sadd 276,18; - tabba¡psa, m. [ta(d) + va¡psa]. hís
lineage, that lineage; Th-a 11 224,1 (Bhaglratho nama
adiraja --jatataya Sakiya Bhaglratha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
--jatitaya); - tabbatthuka, mfn., see sv tarp.vatthuka
below; - (tab)-bahula, mfn., full of that, habitually
intent on that; M 11 262,14 (tassa eva¡p pa~ipannassa
--viharino ); Nidd I 139,23 (anuyuttassa ti ... taccaritassa
-assa taggarukassa ... ; cfNidd-a I 262,31: -assa ti tarp.
bahula¡p karontassa); Pa~is 11 197 ,24; Th-a I 137,18
'añjana vuccanti valliyo, --taya tarp. vanarp. añjanavanan
ti nammp labhi); Sadd 790,18 (alupaccayo hoti
tabbahulatthe); tabbipakkha, mfn. [ta(d) +
\Ípakkha], different from that; Sp 604,3o; Pp-a 229,3; -
tabbipaccanika, mfn., see sv ta¡pvipaccanlka below; -
tabbipariyÜya, m., see sv ta¡pvipariyaya below; -
tabbiparita, mfn. [ta(d) + viparlta], opposite to that
one): Ja I 337,29' (vinicchayaghane pi pal).c)ite
\Oharakusale mahallake amacce na ~hapessanti -ana¡p
269 ta(d)
pana tarul).atarul).anarp. yasa¡p dassanti); Vism 290,28
(saó.khatadosadassanena ca -e nibbane tanninnataya
pakkhandatl ti); 450,34 (--taya); Sp 984,5 (aya¡p
appa~ibalo -o imasmirp. atthe pa~ibalo ti veditabbo, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee tabbiparito); Nidd-a I 298,25 (te
suviññapaya -a duviññapaya); - tabbirahita, mfn.
[ta(d) + virahita], free from that; Th-a III 9,29
(kilesavanato -arp. nibbanarp. upagatarp., Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nibbana¡p); - tabbisaya, mfn. [ta(d) + visaya], with
that as object; Pv-a 73,7 (-arp. danamayarp. puññam eva
dasseti); Pa~is-a 54,15; - tabbisesana, n. [ta(d) +
visesana], a distínguishing attribute of that (one); Th-a I
5,8 (da~hlnan ti -mp); - (tam)-bhümika, mfn.,
belonging to that sphere; Ps I 36,22; - (tam)-maya, mfn.
(and m. ?), l. (mfn.) absorbed in that; identifying wíth
that; desiring that; MI 319,31 (etapatho 'harp. asmi
etagocaro no ca tena -o ti; Ps II 387,35: tena pi caha¡p
parisuddhena s!lena na -o na sata!)ho ); Sn 846 (na hi -o
so; Nidd I 206,5: na tal).havasena dighivasena -o hoti
tapparamo tapparaya!)O ); Ps IV 99,18 (-ta vuccati ta!)ha);
- 2. (m.) desire; obsession;? Mp III 415,5 (-a ti
vuccanti tal).hadi!thiyo); Nidd-a I 90,22 (ta!)hadi!thimana
-a ti vuccanti);- atammaya, mfn., not absorbed in that;
not identifying with that; free from desire; M III 42,27
(pathamajjhanasamapattiya pi kho atammayata vutta
bhagavata; Ps IV 99,18: tammayata vuccati ta!)ha
nitta!)hata ti attho); 220,33foll. (atammayatarp. bhikkhave
nissaya atammayata¡p agamma yayarp. upekha ekatta
ekattasita ta¡p pajahatha); A I 150,8• (tadiso lokavidü
sumedho sabbesu dhammesu atammayo muni; Mp 11
245,5: tal).hasaó.khataya tammayataya abhavena
atammayo kh!l).asavamuni, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tammataya,
wr ?); III 444,8 (sabbaloke ca atammayo bhavissami
ahaó.kara ca me uparujjhissanti ... ; Mp 111 415,5:
atammayo ti tammaya ti vuccanti ta!)hadighiyo tahi
rahito); Nidd I 189,1o (tedhatukesu kusalesu dhammesu
atammayata icchitabba; Nidd-a I 90,23: tal).hadighimana
tammaya ti vuccanti tesarp. abhavo atammayata); -
(tam)-mülaka, mf( -a, -ika)n., having that as basis or
origin; rooted in that; Ja I 136,26' (tammülikaya
yasasampattiya); Vism 414,8 (--tta); Sp 253,9
(tammülika pabbajja); Ps II 83,5 (tatonidanan ti -mp);
Mp I 29,4 (-o ... ayarp. anisa¡pso laddho ); Pa~is-a 228,6
(-a ca adhicittadhipaññasikkha dassetukamo ); -
(tarp.)-yathii, índ. [S. tad yatha; Pkt tmp jaha], as follows;
for example; Mil1,13 (ta¡pyathanusüyate); Sadd 461,15
(ta yeva dhatuyo ... pakasayissama ta¡pyatha ... ); 691,12
(yo sayam eva kiriya¡p karoti so suddhakatta nama
tarp.yatha puriso magga¡p gacchati); 696,8; - see also
seyyatha; - (ta¡p)-rucika, mfn., favouring that view;
Vin III 175,32 (ympdit~hiko hoti .. . ya¡pruciko te pi
tarp.di~~ika honti .. . -a); - (tmp)-laddhika, mfn.,
holding that theory; Th-a III 190,37;- (tmp)-vatthuka,
tabbatthuka, mfn. [ta(d) + vatthuka], founded on that;
PsI 28,7 (-mp ca mana¡p, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tabbatthuka¡p); Spk I 43,8 (-ass' eva upayasassa); -
(tmp)-vijiinanaka, mfn., who or which knows that; Pj 11
54,3o (--citta¡p); (tarp.)-vipaccanika, tabbi-
paccanlka, mfn., opposed, opposite, to that; Ps III 116,23
(--sammadinhi, Se so; Ce, E e tabbipaccanlka; Be
tatp
tabbipaccaniyabhiitil); (tarp)-vipariyaya, tabbi-
pariyaya, tabbipariyaya, m. [ta(d) + vipariyaya], a
reversa! of that; Pj II 499,30 (tabbipariyayarp, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee tabbipariyayarp); Th-a I 213,8 (tai)l hi ... nihinarp
idarp pana -ato uttamai)l); III 84,2o (ayatii)l
tabbipariyaye ); Cp-a 315,2 (tabbipariyayena);
(tarp)visa, mfn., with that one as the twentieth,
consisting of that one and 19 others; Vin I 320,3o; -
(tai)l)-vusita, mfn., who has served that (suspension);
Vin I 359,31* (osantJ!.arp -assa jantuno etai)l pi janati
vibhali.gak:ovido); - (ta)-sadda, m., the pronoun ta(d);
Vv-a 9,8 (tesaddo . . . -assa vasena paccattabahuvacane
agato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tamsaddassa, perhaps wr); -
(tai)l)-sadda, m., the word "tai)l"; Ud-a 349,7 (tan ti
nipatamattarp atha va hetu-attho -o); It-a II 16,17
(yai)lsadde hi vutte -o aharitva vattabbo); Sadd 893,5'
(nipatatthamhi -o upayoge ca dissati); - (tai)l)-
sampayuttaka, mfn., connected with that; Tikap 2,23
(cak:khuviññiil).adhatu -a ca dhamma); PsI 209,3o; -
(tarp)-sampapaka, fr!fn., which makes (one) reach that;
Ps II 118,17 (nirodhagaha~Jena ca -o maggo gahito va
hoti ti); Th-a III 30,23 (nibbanatha1arp -ai)l
ariyamaggahattharp ca dasseyya);- (tai)l)-sukha, mfn.,
having, sharing, that happiness; D II 233,20 (yarpsukho
bhavai)l -a mayai)l); - (tai)l)-hetu, ind., because of
that; Nidd I 18,22 (tasma taf)lkara~Ja -u);
(tai)l)-hetuka, mfn., having that as its cause, caused by
that; Sp 211,1s (tatonidanan ti tai)lnidanarp -an ti
paccattavacanassa to-adeso veditabbo);- see also tajja,
tato, tadai)l, taharp, tahii)l, na6, yathatarp (sv yatha).
1
taip , nom. n., acc. m.jn. andform iic ofta(d) qv.
taip2 , sg. acc. andform iic oftvarp qv.
taipyathli, see sv ta(d).
taka\ a suffix; - see ettak:a, kittak:a, tattak:a, tavatak:a,
yattak:a, yavatak:a.
taka 2 , n.(?) [cf BHS tak:a, tak:ak:arJ!.in], a kind of medicinal
resin; Vin I 201,34 (anujanami bhikkhave jatüni
bhesajjani hili.gu ... -arp 0 -pattii)l 0 -pai).J!.ii)l) quoted
Sp 837,21 (Sp-t [Be] III 66,3 foil.: -an ti aggak:otiya
nikkhantasileso, tak:apattin ti pattato nikkhantasi1eso
tak:apai).J!.in ti pa1ase bhajjitva katasileso;); Sp 1090,9
(tak:atakapattitak:apaJ!.I).iyo 1akhajatiyo yeva).
takati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tak:ati, Wg § 5:2], laughs;
Sadd 322,1 (taka hasane: ... -ati).
takka\ n. [S. tak:ra], buttermilk mixed with water;
Abh 500 (-arp tu mathitai)l py atha); 501 (khirai)l dadhi
ghatai)l -ai)l nonitai)l pañcagorasa); 998; Vin I 244,34
(anujanami bhikkhave pañca gorase khirai)l dadhii)l -arp
navanltarp sappii)l); III 86,15 (te tarp -ai)l payesui)l so
kalam ak:asi); Ja I 296,26 (-ai)l vikkil).itva jivati ti);
IV 12,1w (yatha anambi1arp -arp va kañjikarp va
pari~Jamavasena parivattitva ambilai)l hoti); VI 368,27
(-ai)l gal).hatha ti aparaparai)l sañcarati); Mi1173,24 foil.
(dadhii)l manthayamano -ai)l manthemi ti voharati na
tai)l -ai)l yarp so mantheti); Sp 848,2 (-e va khire va
pak:khipanti); 1001,14 (-ai)l sise asittak:asadisa va honti,
pabbajetui)l vagati ti vuttarp; Sp-t [Be] III 243,15 foil.:
yatha adase karonta -ena sisai)l dhovitva adasai)l karonti
evai)l aramikavacanena dinnatta adasa va te adhippayo,
takkasiñcanarp pana siha)adipe carittan ti vadanti); -
270 takka
0
-bhati,f, selling or delivering buttermilk; Ja I 296,25
(-iya va jivikai)l kappetva ... tassa takkai)l vikkil).itva
jivatl ti Tak:kapa~Jl;iito ti namai)l ak:arpsu);
atakka, mfn., without buttermilk; Ja VI 24,28" (evarüparp
alol).ak:arp -ai)l nidhüpanarp randhai)l pattai)l
bhuñjantanai)l, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee a1o~Jambi1ai)1
adhüpanarp); Sv 664,15 (madhupilkarp pana a1ol).arp
adhüpanarp -ai)l udak:ena seditasilkai)l); - se e also
atak:kak:a.
takka 2 , m., tak:ka, .f [S. tarka, tarka; BHS tarka],
l. conjecture; speculation, reasoning; thought,
reflection; estimating; Abh 155 (-o vitak:ko sai)lkappo );
998; M III 73,15 (yo . . . ariyamaggarp bhavayato -o
vitak:ko sali.kappo . . . ayai)l bhikkhave sammasali.kappo
ariyo ... ); 263,9 (yavatak:arp kho Ananda -aya
pattabbai)l anuppattai)l taya); Sn 209 (-ai)l pahaya na
upeti saii.khai)l); 885 (udilhu te -am anussaranti; Pj II
555,19: udilhu attano 0 -mattai)l anugacchanti); Nidd I
501,2o (-a ti nava vitak:ka: kamavitak:ko ... ); Dhs 7 (-o
vitakko sali.kappo appana vyappana cetaso abhiniropana
sammasali.kappo); Vibh 86,8 (kamapatisarpyutto -o
vitakko sali.kappo ... ayai)l vuccati kamadhatu); 356,17
(ñatak:e arabbha gehasito -o vitak:ko sali.kappo ... ayarp
vuccati ñativitak:ko); Sp 1125,6 (civarabhajak:ena imassa
bhikkhuno koghasena ettak:ena bhavitabban ti tak:ketva
nayaggilhena civararp databbarp, tu1aya tulitam eva hi
samasamai)l datui)l na sakkoti, tasma iinarp va hotu
adhikai)l va evarp -ena nayena dinnarp sudinnam eva);
Sv 119,8 (Ájivikadayo viya 0 -matten' eva); Ps II 174,26
(atakkavacaro ti -ena avacaritabbo ogahitabbo na hoti,
ña~Jen' eva avacaritabbo); Spki 351,25 (brahma~Ja
ilhai)lsu tumhe mayarp -ena kathema ti maññatha, idani
passatha ayarp vo brahma sahattha yannai)l
patiggahetUI)l agacchatl ti); Sadd 520,19 (tak:kanai)l -o
ühanan ti vuttarp hoti); - 2. logic; a system of logic;
Ap-a 467,19 (attano 0
-vyilkaral).adisippasmii)l
apatthaddho); Sadd 504,19 (attharasa mahasippani:
su ti . . . pura~Jai)l itihaso niti -o vejjak:ai)l ca ti); -
o• -asaya, m., a disposition to speculation; the store of
harmful thoughts; Sn 972 (-arp kukkuciyüpacchinde;
Pj II 574,7/oll.: kamavitakkaditakkarp ca kamasaññadii)l
tassa takkassa asayai)l ca . . . upacchindeyya); -
0
-pariyahata, mfn., arrived at by conjecture or
reasoning; DI 16,2o (ekacco samaJ!.O va brahma~Jo va
takki hoti vimai)lsi, so -ai)l vimai)lsanucaritai)l
sayai)lpatibhanarp evam ilha sassato atta ca 1oko ca ... ;
Sv 106,22/oll.: tak:kena pariyilhatai)l tena tena pariyayena
tak:ketva ti attho ); MI 68,10 (-ai)l samaJ!.O Gotamo
dhammarp deseti vimai)lsiinucaritai)l sayai)lpatibhanarp)
t Nidd I 294,1o (Nidd-a f 361,29: -an ti vitakkena
samantato ilhatai)l); - atakkavacara, mfn., not within
the scope of speculation or reasoning; Vin I 4,35
(adhigato myayarp dhammo gambhiro duddaso ... -ro
nipui).O pal).l;iitavedaniyo); DI 12,25 (katame ... dhamma
gambhira duddasa ... -a ... ; Sv 99,19: uttamañiil).a-
visayatta na takkena avacaritabba ti); It 37 ,20* (tassa
nissaral).arp santai)l -arp dhuvarp; It-a I 164,18: takka-
ña~Jassa agocarabhavato -ai)l).
takka 3, n. [cf S. tarku], a spindle; Sp 935,7 (ujjavüjjave ti
yattak:ai)l hatthena añchitai)l hoti tasmii)l -amhi vethite
 takka
eka apatti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se tattakamhi vethite); Th-a I
5,31 (yatha kantanatthena adi-antavipallasato -mp
vuccati evam himsanatthena siho veditabbo).
takka 4 , m. [?J, .a ki~d of fruit; Abh 998 (takko ...
süciphale; Abh-sücl: süciphale ambilapattaphale ti).
takkana, n. [S. tarka!).a], speculating; reasoning; thinking
oj; Ps IV 132,25 (0 -vasena takko) t As 142,3o (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr vitakko); Sadd 520,20 (-a111 takko, ühanan ti
vuttam hoti).
takkar~ 1 , m., se e sv ta(d).
takkara 2 , m. [AMg id.; cf S. taskara], a thief; Abh 522 (-o
mosako coro); Th 449 (haññati niccam attiil).o pattada!).<;lo
va -o; Th-aii 189,25: yatha -o coro kataparadho); Jaii
327,17* (panthadübhl va -a); IV 432,4* (tatth' addasa
araññasmi111 -ana111 kuti111 kata111, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
takkarana111; 432,15': coranmp vasanatthaya katmp
gamaka111 addasa).
takkala, takkaJa, n. [?],a bulbous plant, a tuberose; Ja IV
46,7 (na -a santi na alupani; 46,11': pi!).<;lalukanda na
santi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vi!).<;lalukanda); 37!,23* (kha!).ant'
alukalambani bitalitakk~ani ca; 373,5·: bitalikanda-
takkalakandani ca)= VI 578,17*.
takkasilaka, takkasi!aka, mfn. [cf S. tak~asila], from
Taxila; Sp 1115,11 (-a viil).ija, Ce, E e, Se so; Be takka-
si!ato ); Ps V 62,16 (-ana111 jañghava!).ijana111 santikmp,
Ce so; Be, Se takkasi!akana111; E e takkasilakanmp).
takkari, f [S. tarkañ], a tree; SAF: pea tree, Sesbania
sesban (L.); Abh 573 H vejayantika); Thi 297
(kalailgini111 va -i111 pupphitmp girimuddhani;
Thi-a 214,3 foil.: pabbatamuddhani thita111 supupphita-
dalimalatthil11 viya, ukkagarin ti ca keci pathanti, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce supupphitaga!).iki!Jikalatthi111); Ja VI 535,zs·
(dhanutakkañpupphehi ti dhanünmp ca -Ina111 ca
pupphehi sobhita, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhanutakkari-
pupphehi sobhita).
takkala, m., see sv ta(d).
takki(n), mfn. [S. tarkin], (one) who speculates,
conjectures, reasons; D 1 16,19 (ekacco sama!).O va
brahmai).O Va -l hoti Vlillai11Sl, SO takkapariyahata111
vlma111siinucarita111 saya111patibhana111 eva111 aha sassato
atta ca loko ca ... ; Sv I06,15: takkayati ti -1 takko va
assa atthi ti, takketva vitakketva ditthigahino eta111
adhivacanmp): MI 520,21 (-issa ... satthuno vimmpsissa
sutakkita111 pi hoti duttakkitmp pi hoti tatha pi hoti
aññatha pi hoti); Sv 106,28 (catubbidho -1 anussutiko
jatissaro labhi suddhatakkiko ti); Spk II 346,7 (-ino pi
yatha etarahi aha111 ekantasukhi evmp samparaye pi
bhavissami ti [evmp diqhi] uppajjati).
takkika, takkiya, m(jn). [takka2 + ika; cf S. tarkika], (one)
who speculates; who conjectures; Ud 73,11* (evmp
obhasitam eva -anmp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se titthiyanmp;
Ud-a 358,1sfoll.: takketva vitakketva parikappana-
mattena ditthlnmp gahal).ato -a ti laddhanamehi
titthiyehi obhasitmp); 73,12* (na -a sujjhanti na capi
savaka duddi!thl na dukkha pamuccare ); Ja I 104,6*
(apal).!).akai11 thanmp eke dutiymp ahu -a); Patis I 159,3*
(etmp dvaya111 -a nissitase, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se eta111
dvaya111 takkita nissita ye; Patis-a 459,6: takkena vadanti
ti -a, te hi ditthigatika sabhavapativedhapaññay a abhava
kevala111 takkena vattanti); Sv 107,6 (yo pana
271 takkola
labhitaya ... takkayitva ditthi111 gal).hati aymp labhi -o
nama); It-a II 78,23 (dhammo va bhagava dhamma-
bhüto . . . tassa dhammassa vinayo na takkiyanan ti
dhammavinayo ); Patis-a 456,14 (parittakasi!).alabhina111
-ana111 ca nigga!).thajivakiinal11 ca); - ifc see suddha-
(sv sujjhati); - atakkika, mfn. [cf BHS atarkika], who
does not speculate or guess; Mil 248,30 (sutamanta-
padadharo -o roguppattikusalo ... bhisakko sallakatto).
takketi 1, -ayati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. tarkayati], conjectures;
reasons or speculates (about); thinks, reflects; thinks of,
depends on; Dhatup 534 (takka vitakke); Dhatum 747
(takka vitakkane); Vism !80,11 (na-y-ida111 madisassa
bhariyan ti attana111 -ayati); Sv 106,15 (-ayati ti takki);
Sadd 520,19 (takka vitakke: -eti vitakketi); - part.pr.
(a) takkenta, mfn., Ja I 273,14 (bodhisatto attana111-ento);
Ps III 183,9; Cp-a 268,1s (pahomi caha111labhalabhadisu
nibbikaro hotun ti attanmp -ento); (b) takkayanta, mfn.,
Sv 107,1 (yadi Vessantaro va bhagava sassato atta ti
-ayanto ditthi111 gal).hati); (e) takkayamana, mfn.,
Vism 180,12; - aor. 3 sg. (a) takkesi, As !42,3ofoll.
(takkanavasena takko, tassa kittakmp -esi, kumbhmp
-esi sakatal11 -esi yojana111 -esi a<;l<;lhayojanmp -es! ti);
(b) takkayittha, Sv 257,7; - absol. (a) takketva, Ja I
274,2foll. (aha111 .. . na dhanu-adini -etva pavittho
attana111 yeva pana -etva pavigho); 397,17 (aymp ...
kumarika attano kula111 cha<;l<;letva bhavantmp -etva
nikkhanta); Sp 1125,3 (imassa bhikkhuno kotthasena
ettakena bhavitabban ti -etva); Sv 106,16 (takki ... -etva
vitakketva ditthigahino eta111 adhivacanam);
(b) takkayitva, Nidd I 295,4 (takkmp vitakka111
sailkappa111 -ayitva vitakkayitva sali.kappayitva);
Sv 107,6; neg. atakkayitva, Spk II 200,6;
pp takkita, mfn., conjectured; thought out; thought
about previously; (what is) thought; Ap 498,1o (-a pan'
ima gatha thanaso patibhanti ta111, Be so; Ce patibhanti
va; Ee, Se -a nmp ima gatha thanaso patibhanti va);
Mhv 25:104 (ñatva ta111 tassa -mp); Sadd 866,11 (buddho
ito vidito -o); - takkita in Ee, Se at Patis I 159,3* is
prob. wr for takkika (Be, Ce, Patis-a so); - neg.
atakkita, mfn. [S. atarkita], unthought of' unexpected;
Abh 1148; - duttakkita, mfn., incorrectly conjectured;
badly thought out; M 1 520,22 (takkissa .. . satthuno
vima111sissa sutakkita111 pi hoti duttakkitmp pi hoti tatha
pi hoti aññatha pi hoti); - sutakkita, mfn., conjectured
correctly; well thought out; MI 520,22; - neg.
fpp atakkaniya, mfn., not to be conjectured; ? Pj II 385,3
(pararajuhi atakkaniymp virapurisadhitthitabhavmp
e' assa dasseti).
takketi2 , -ayati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tarkayati,
Wg § 33:107], speaks; shines; Sadd 522,13 (takka loka
bhasaya111: -eti -ayati).
takkofaka, m. [?], a kind of worm; Vism 258,30 (-a
gal).<;luppadaka . . . suttaka ice evamadidvattil1lsakula-
ppabheda kimayo) = Vibh-a 242,5 t Pj I 58,5 (Ce, Se so;
Be takkolaka; E e kakkotaka).
takkola\ n. [cf S. kakk~la, takkola], the berry of the
kakkola plant; a perfume made from that berry; Abh 304
(-a111 tu ca kolaka111); Sp 837,5 (jatiphala111 katuka-
phalmp e!a -an ti); Vin-vn 1357 (0 -maricani).
takkola 2 , a particular city (= Ptolemy's Takola); Nidd I
 takkolaka
154,23 (-aq¡ gacchati Takkasilaq¡ gacchati); Mi1359,28
(Vañgaq¡ -aq¡ Cinaq¡ Soviraq¡ Suraghaq¡ Alasandaq¡
Kolapartanaq¡ Suvar.u:_¡abhiimiq¡ gacchati).
takkolaka, n. [cfS. kakkolaka], (a perfume made from)
the berry ofthe kakkolaplan t;- ifc see tambiila-.
takkhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tak~ati, tvak~ati,
Wg § 17:13: tak~a tvacane], covers; Sadd 330,2 (takkha
tapane: tapanaq¡ saq¡vara!).aq¡, -ati).
tagara, n. [ts], the shrub Tabemaemont ana coronaria; a
fragrant powder obtained from it; Abh 147; Vin I 203,15
(añjanupapisanehi attho hoti . . . anujanami bhikkhave
candanaq¡ -aq¡ ... ); Dhp 55 (candanaq¡ -aq¡ vapi
uppalaq¡ atha vassiki); lt 68,13* (-aq¡ ca palasena yo naro
upanayhati patta pi surabhi vayanti); Ja VI 100,5•
(parii!hakaccha -a; 100,18'joll.: tassa pana nadiya tire
kaccha parii!hatagara ahesuq¡ tagaragandhasugandhino );
535,zo• (setagerii ca -a); Ap 246,5 (candanaq¡ -aq¡ capi
pade osiñc' ahaq¡ tada); Sadd 231,1 •;
0
-candani(n)[?] , mfu., belonging to sandal and tagara
powder; Dhp 56 (appamatto ayaq¡ gandho yayaq¡ -i;
cfUv 6:18: yoyaq¡ tagaracandanat; PDhp 123: yoyaq¡
tagaracandane; Dhp-a I 430,11: silagandho so tagare viya
lohitacandane viya ca parittako na hoti);
0
-mallika,fpl., (the scent oj) tagara and jasmine; A I
226,28* (na pupphagandho pativatam eti na candanaq¡ -a
va) = Dhp 54 (Dhp-a I 422,18: imesaq¡ pi gandho eva
adhippeto) quoted Ja III 291 ,14* and Mil333,19*;
Ap 100,6 (candanaq¡ piirayitvana -ahi ca hagho haghena
cittena alepesiq¡ naruttamaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tagara-
mallikahi ... aropesiq¡).
taggaruka, mfn., see sv ta(d).
taggul}.asatpviññiil}.a, mfn., see sv ta(d).
taggha\ [ta(d) + gha3], (affirmative particle) indeed;
certainly; Abh 1140 (tagghekaq¡se); Vin V 144,7•
(yoniso paripucchasi taggha te ahaq¡ akkhissaq¡ yatha pi
kusalo tatha; Sp 1348,8/oll.: taggha ti kara!).atthe nipato,
yasma maq¡ pucchasi tasma te ahaq¡ akkhissan ti attho,
sampaticchanatthe va, taggha ti imina vacanaq¡
sampaticchitva akkhissan ti aha); D III 81,23 (taggha vo
Vasegha brahma!).a porfu_laq¡ assaranta evaq¡ ahaq¡su);
S V 80,14 (taggha bhagava bojjhaii.ga taggha sugata
bojjhaii.ga ti) quoted Sadd 895,25; AI 139,s
(pamadavataya na kalyfu_laq¡ akasi . . . taggha tvaq¡ ...
tatha karissanti yathataq¡ pamattaq¡); Ja V 307,14*
(taggha te dukkataq¡ bale; 307,17·: taggha ti ekaq¡sen'
eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ekaq¡se nipato va); Spk III
215,1ofoll. (konamo ayaq¡ Sariputta dhammapariyayo ti,
sihaniki!ito nama bhante ti, taggha Sariputta sihaniki!ito
taggha Sariputta sihaniki!ito ti); Sadd 895,22 (addha
aññadatthu taggha ... jatucche ice ete ekaq¡satthe); -
esp. confirming a previous statement or question; Vin I
352,1 (kacci pana vo Anuruddha appamatta atapino
pahitatta viharatha ti, taggha mayaq¡ bhante appamatta
atapino pahitatta viharama ti); DI 85,2o (tassa me bhante
bhagava accayaq¡ accayato patiganhatu ayatiq¡
saq¡varaya ti, taggha tvaq¡ maharaja accayo
accagama ... ; Sv 236,26: taggha ti ekaq¡sena); M III 13,18
(kacci bho Ananda Ve!uvanaq¡ ramaJ).iyaq¡ ... taggha
brahma1:_1a Ve!uvanaq¡ rama!).iyaq¡); SI 8,4' (kacci te
kutika natthi kacci natthi kulavaka ... taggha me kutika
272 taca(s)
natthi taggha natthi kulavaka); Sn p. 87,11 (kaccahaq¡
bho Gotama evaq¡ dadanto . . . puññaq¡ pasavami ti,
taggha tvaq¡ mfu_lava evaq¡ dadanto . . . puññaq¡
pasavasi); - see also irigha, yagghe.
taggha2 , mfn., [cfS. daghna; BSU § 143], reaching up to;
- ifc se e jaJ).J:_lU-; - see also tagghati.
tagghati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup dañghati, Wg § 5:54],
protects; Sadd 334,23 (taggha palane: -ati); - see also
tagghi.
tailkati, pr. 3 sg., l. [S. Dhatup tailkati, Wg § 5:3] lives in
distress; Sadd 322,2 (taki kicchajivane: ... -ati ataii.kati
ataii.ko);- 2. [cftaii.gati ?] goes; Dhatum 18 (takidhatu
gatadisu).
tailketi, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tarikayati,
Wg § 32:96], binds; Sadd 521,27 (taki bandhane: -eti
-ayati, Be, E e so; read taki ... tariketi tarikayati ?).
tailgati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tarigati, Wg § 5:41], goes;
Sadd 333,16 (. .. tagi sagi gamane ca: ... -ati tariganaq¡).
tailgana, n. [cf S. tariga!).a], going;? Sadd 333,16 (tagi ...
tarigati -aq¡).
taca(s), n. (or taca, m. ?) [S. tvac, f, tvaca, n.] (sg.
nom. -o; acc. -aq¡; instr. -asa, -ena; gen. -assa),
Abh 1109 (-o cammani vakkale); Sadd 335,28 (taca
saq¡vara!).e: ... tacati -o); l. skin (of a man or animal);
Khp p. 2,s (atthi imasmiq¡ kaye kesa loma nakha danta
-o maq¡saq¡ ... ); S 11 28,24 (kamaq¡ -o ca naharu ca aghi
ca avasissatu sañre upasussatu maq¡salohitaq¡); Sn 1 (so
bhikkhu jahati oraparaq¡ urago ji1:_11:_1am iva -aq¡
pura1:_1aq¡); Ja IV 9,19* (na ka!).ho -asa hoti antosaro hi
brahmaJ).o; 9,21·: -asa ti -ena ka!).hO nama na hoti ti
attho); Mil26,7 (-o ... Nagaseno ti); Vism 251,2ofoll.
(-o ti sakalasariraq¡ vethetva thitacammaq¡, tassa upari
ka!asamapitadiva!).l:_la chavi nama ... ); 354,21 (na sariraq¡
janati ahaq¡ -ena pariyonaddhan ti); Sv 798,15 (valiyo
-asmiq¡ assa ti valittaco, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -amhi); Pj I
45,21 (-assa maq¡sassa ca antarena); Patis-a 80,34 (-o
sakalasariraq¡ pariyonandhitva pakatakilomakassa upari
chaviya hegha thitaq¡ cammaq¡); - ifc see aghi-,
niddhantakanaka- (sv niddhamati); - 2. bark; rind;
peel; Vin III 50,2 (tatthajatakaq¡ miilaq¡ va -aq¡ va
pattaq¡ va . . . theyyacitto amasati); MI 192,22 (na
vatayaq¡ ... puriso aññasi saraq¡ na aññasi phegguq¡ na
aññasi -aq¡ na aññasi papatikaq¡ ... ); A III 44,7
(sakhapattapalasena vaMhanti -ena vagghanti
papatikaya vagghanti ... ); Ja 11 393,17 (raja ambanaq¡
-aq¡ apanetva sakkharaq¡ pakkhipitva); III 491,7
(phalesu khi1:_1esu yaq¡ yad eva avasinhaq¡ hoti aii.kuro va
pattaq¡ va -o va papatika va taq¡ khaditva); Sp 766,1 (-e
va patte ... vilikhantassa dukkatam); Vibh-a 447,13
(manussa natipakkani madhukaphalani bhinditva aghiq¡
adaya -aq¡ chaggetva agamaq¡su); Mhv 28:25; -
o• -otthaf:a, o• -otthata, o• -otata, mfn., covered with skin;
D 111 155,11' (-a, Ce, Se so; Be '-otthata; Ee '-otata);
0 0
-
0
-pañcaka, n., the group with skin as the fifth, the
group of Ji ve (bodily parts) ending with skin ( see
Khp p. 2,5 above); Vism 114,s (kayagatasatiyaq¡ -aq¡
dirthena sesaq¡ sutena ti evaq¡ tassa arammaJ).aq¡
ditthasutena gahetabbaq¡); 242,6 (-' -adini paricchinditva
anulomapatilomavasena sajjhayo katabbo kesa loma
nakha danta -o ti vatva ... ); Spk 11 273,3o (thero
taca ti
--kammanhanmp acikkhitva ta111 pabbajesi); Dhp-a II
88,3 (sakala111 pi hi dvagi111sakarmp kathetu111 vagati
yeva sabbmp kathetu111 asakkontena pana -a111
kathetabbam eva); Vibh-a 258,5 (-asmi111 hi vaJ.ll,la-
saJ.lthanagandhasayokasavasen' eva pañcavidha111 pi
patikulymp labbhati); 0
-pariggal}haka, mfn.,
grasping, comprehending, skin; Vism 252,3 (-ena ca
yogavacarena) = Pj I 45,19; - 0 -maqtslivalepana, mfn.,
with a plastering of flesh and skin; Sn 194
(atthinaharusa111yutto -o chaviya kayo paticchanno);-
0
-slira, m. and mfn. [cf S. tvaksara, tvacisara], (m.) a
bamboo (SAF: thomy bamboo); (mjn.) of which the
essential or strong part is the skin or bark; ? Abh 600
(-o ve1,1u va111so ); S I 70,34' (hi111santi attasambhüta -a111
va sa111 phalmp) = lt 45,18' (It-a II 2,26/oll.: -an ti
ga1,1thitmp, vejun ti attho . . . khadiraslsapadayo vi ya
antosarmp ahutva bahisarataya -an ti laddhanama111
ve]uadi111 yatha attasambhütam eva phala111 hi111sati);
Sp 1037,27 (rukkhanimitte -o talanajikeradirukkho na
vattati); Kkh 2 7,11 ( --rukkha111); - nittaca, mfn.,
without skin, skinned; without bark; Ja Il 412,10
(kukkutmp -a111 katva); V 268,8* (pakkmp ca sattthi
hananti -a111; 273,26': sañra111 -a111 katva); Dhp-a I 288,10
(usukaro araññato eka111 d31,1gakmp aharitva -mp katva).
tacati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tvacati, Wg § 28:18], covers;
protects; Sadd 335,28 (taca sa111vara1,1e: smpvaraJ.lal11
rakkha1,1a111: -ati taco).
tacana, n. rJrom tacati], covering; Sadd 330,2 (takkha -e:
-a111 sa111varaJ.lmp: takkhati, so read ? eds tapane
tapana111; cfWg § 17:13: tak~a tvak~a tvacane).
taccati, pr. 3 sg. [?], hurts; Sadd 335,24 (tacca hi111saymp:
-ati).
taccarita, mfn., see sv ta(d).
taccha 1, m. {S. tak~an], a carpenter; name of the
"carpenter-pig "; Ja IV 344,24 (so -a sükare han ti;
344,25': -a ti ta111 namenalapanti); -
0
-sükara, m.,
"carpenter-pig"; Ja IV 344,3 (vagghaki ... eka111 sükara-
potaka!11 disva anetva -o ti 'ssa nama111 katva posesi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se tacchakasukaro ti).
taccha 2, mfn. and n. [S. tathya], true, being really so; what
is true, truth; Abh 127 (saccmp -a111 yathatathmp); DI
3,29 (iti p' eta111 bhütmp iti p' eta111 -mp atthi e' eta111
amhesu sa111vijjati ca pan' etmp amhesü ti); 230,8 (sa
codana bhüta -a dhammika anavajja); S V 229,29 (atthi
nu kho ito bahiddha añño sam31,1o va brahm31,10 va yo
eva111 bhütmp -mp tatha111 dhammmp deseti yatha
bhagava ti); Sn 327 (-ehi nlyetha subhasitehi; Pj II
334,9: samathavipassanapatismpyuttan' ev' ettha -ani
tatharupehi subhasitehi); Nidd I 76,8 (idmp sacca111 -mp
tatha111 ... ; Nidd-a I 205,15: -an ti tathabhava111
avipañtasabhavmp); Sp 1290,1 (-ena vadanto bhütena
vadati nama); Spk lii 60,11 (khi1,1asavassa dassana111
bhütmp -mp); Sadd 863,16 (tatham avitathan ti -a111);-
ataccha, mfn. and n., (what is) false, untrue, unfounded;
DI 3,16; M III 236,19 (yvaya111 rahovado abhüto -o
anatthas3!11hito sadukkho eso dhammo sa-upaghato );
Ja VI 207,21 •; Nidd-a I 175,29 (müjho hi taccha111 -an ti
-a111 ca tacchan ti g31,1hati, Ee so; Be, Se omit first ti; Ce
tacchmp -an ti ga1,1hati) = As !28,2joll. (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr tacchmp -mp ca tacchati ga1,1hati); Ud-a 260,31
273 tacchati
(parassa dosmp adisva va musavadmp katva abhütena
-ena para111 abbhacikkhanto); Sadd 624,13 (yadi va
taccho yadi va -o); - see also tathiya, yathataccha111
(sv yatha).
tacchaka, m., l. [BHS id.; cfS. tak~aka] a wood-cutter, a
carpenter; Abh 505; 506 (-o vagghaki mato); Dhp 80
(daru111 namayanti -a)= Th19; JaiV 350,11' (sükara
susamagata -mp abhisiñci111su; see tacchasükara above
sv taccha\ Ap 317,7 (usukara bhamakara cammakara ca
-a, Be, Se so; Ce cammika e' eva -a; Ee usukara
cammika ca tacchakara ca sOJ.lJ.laklira ca); Mil413,8foll.
(-assa dve ailgani gahetabbanl ti); Sp 19,15 (-anmp
sutta111 pamlil,la111 hoti); Dhp-a II 142,5 (-a nama avuso ti,
ki111 pana te karontl ti darüni gahetva yanakad!na111
cakkadlni karonti avuso ti); Sadd 344,3 (taccha
tanukar31,1e: tacchati -o daru111); - 2. (belonging to) a
class of nagas; D II 258,17*; Sv 688,11 (saha -aya
nagaparisaya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -nagaparisaya); - see
also kharapatacchika (sv khara), tacchika.
tacchati, taccheti, pr. 3 sg. [S. tak~ati, caus. tak~ayati],
cuts, splits; planes, pares, chisels; forms, fashions;
reduces, makes thin; Dhatup 51 (taccha tanukara1,1e );
Dhatum67 (taccho tanukriye); MI 31,31Joll.
(yanakaraputto rathassa nemi111 -ati ... ah o vataya111 ...
yanakaraputto imissa nemiya ... ima111 ca dosmp -eyya,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nemi111 -eti); lii !66,26 (tam enmp
nirayapala .. . kütharihi -anti) f- Nidd I 404,11 (eds
-enti); Jai 211,2 (sülmp -enti); 247,12 (eko khalita-
vagghak! rukkhmp -ati); VI 348,14 (kuddalena magga111
-ati); Nidd I 114,25 (eka111 ce bahmp gandhena
limpeyyu111 eka111 ca (E e ce) baha111 vasiya taccheyyu111)
f- Mil383,3* (ekmp ce bahmp vasiya -eyya kupita-
manasa, Ce so; Be ekmp ca ... -e; E e ekmp e' evaha111
vasiya -eyya; Se ekmp ca pahmp vasiya -e); Mil413,11
(yatha maharaja tacchako kajasuttmp anulometva
rukkhmp -ati); As 112,1/oll. (tasmi111 hi -itu111 araddhe
te pi -anti tadanuvattitaya); Sadd 344,3 (taccha
tanukara1,1e: -ati tacchako daru111); - part.pr. tacchanta,
tacchenta, mfn., Th 744 (-anto a1,1iya a1,1i111); Ja V 473,24
(süla111 -anto nisldi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -ento); 488,3
(tassa sülmp -antassa nisinnakale); Sp 571,2 ( -antassa,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -entassa); Dhp-a II 147,12 (tacchaka
nemi-adlnmp atthaya -anta); neg. atacchanta,
atacchenta, mfn., Ja III 319,25' (anamasanto ti bahitaca111
tanukmp pi atacchanto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atacchento);-
aor. 3 sg. tacchi, D Il 341,1 (so darako ar31,1isahita111
vastya -i); 3 pi. (a) tacchi111su, Dhp-a II 246,5;
(b) tacchesu111, Ja Il 178,16 (süla111 -esu111, Ce, E e, Se so;
Be tacchi111su); absol. (a) tacchitva, Sv 714,8
(k31,11,1iküpaga111 rukkhmp chinditva -itva, Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se -etva); Nidd-a I 245,17 (yadi ekmp baha111 vagghakl
vasiya -itva -itva tanu111 kareyyu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
-etva -etva); Patis-a478,21 (-itva); (b) tacchetva, MI
124,32 (ya ta salalatthiyo kutila ... ta -etva); S V 441,11
(ti1,1akatthasakhapalasal11 -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr tmp
chetva); Ja I 201,6 (pathamam eva k31,11,1ikarukkha111
sukkhapetva -etva vijjhitva k31,11,1ika111 ninhapetva);
Sv315,12 (vasiya -etva); Psiii 217,23 (nakhehi
va1,1amukhani -etva); - pp tacchita, mfn. [BHS id.],
cut; fashioned; Abh 750 (-a111 tu tanükate); Ja II 178,1R*
tacchana
(na sülo sadhu -o); Ps IV 212,1sfoll. (-arp -arp
paripakatikarp hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tacchitatacchitarp);
Mp II 130,29 (rukkha ... thambhadismghanena -a honti);
- neg. atacchita, mfn., Sp 1245,9; - duttacchita, mfn.,
badly fashioned; Vism 254,18 (urughi duttacchita-
vasipharasudaJ_lqasal)rhanarp) i= Pj I 49,26 i=
Vibh-a 237,18; sutacchita, mfn., well-fashioned;
Mil 372,16 (capo sutacchito); Spk lii 206,27 (caturassa-
cchidde sutacchitarp caturassagha!ikarp pakkhipanto
viya); - fpp (a) tacchitabba, mfn., Ps III 304,10 (anto-
uyyane tacchitabbayuttarrhanani tacchapento, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee tacchitabbakayutta-); (b) tacchetabba, mfn.,
Mil413,14 (yogina... pannavas1rp gahetva kilesa
tacchetabba); - caus. pr. 3 sg. *tacchiipeti, - part.pr.
tacchapenta, mfn., Ps III 304,10; - absol. tacchapetva,
Ja VI 427,2s; Ps III 76,4 (cammagehassa bahirabhagarp
samanta -etva valikarp okirirpsu); - aor. 3 sg.
tacchapesi, Dhp-a III 199,23 (vasikal)l)ena-esi).
tacchana, n. [S. tak~al)al. cutting; planing, paring;
fashioning; Ja II 405,7 (vaqqhakissa rukkhassa 0 -kale
tul)qena rukkharp parivatteti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee rukkha-
tacchanakale); Nidd-a I 245,2o (amusmirp vasiya -e ...
koparp natthi); As 112,1 (yatha ca mahavaqqhaki sayarp
tacchanto itare pi tacchake attano attano 0 -kamme
pavattayati).
tacchani, f [S. lex. tak~al)i], a cutting instrument; an
adze; Abh 393 (vasi tu -I).
tacchikii,f [cftacchaka], a woman of low social standing;
Ja V 306,16' (vei)I ti -a; ad 306,14*: vei)I tvam asi
candali).
tacchftabbaka, mfn. ffpp of tacchati + ka2], to be cut; to
be fashioned; Ps III 304,10 (anto-uyyane 0 -yuttaghanani
tacchapento, Ce, E e so; Be, Se tacchitabba-).
taccheti, pr. 3 sg., see sv tacchati.
ta.ija, mfn. [ta(d) + ja2; cf S. tajja (tat + ja), tadiya], coming
from or belonging to or relating to himlher/that; of the
same kind; appropriate to that; M I 190,zo foll.
(ajjhattikarp ce avuso cakkhurp aparibhinnarp hoti bahira
ca ropa na apatharp agacchanti no ca -o samannaharo
hoti n' eva tava -assa viññal)abhagassa patubhavo hoti;
Ps II 229,32: -assa ti tadanurüpassa); III 163,19 (balo
sabhayarp va nisinno hoti . . . tatra ce jan o -arp
tassarupparp katharp manteti; Ps IV 210,19: tajjatikarp
tadanucchavikarp); 273,35foll. (-arp -arp bhante
paccayarp paricca -a -a vedana uppajjanti -assa -assa
paccayassa nirodha -a -a vedana nirujjhantl ti; Ps V
96,11: -arp -an ti tarpsabhavarp tarpsabhavarp, atthato
pana tarp tarp paccayarp paricca ta ta vedana uppajjanti ti
vuttarp hoti); S V 272,27 (ahosi te pubbe chando aramarp
gamissami ti tassa te aramagatassa yo -o chando so
paripassaddho ti); A III 411,23 (yarp kho bhikkhave
kamayamano -arp -arp attabhavarp abhinibbatteti;
Mp III 407,11: tajjatikarp tajjatikarp); Dhs 3 (yarp tasmirp
samaye -a manoviññal)adhatu samphassajarp cetasikarp
satarp sukharp . . . ayarp tasmirp samaye vedana hoti;
As 139,2o foll.: ettha -a vuccati tassa satassa sukhassa
anucchavika saruppa, anucchavikattho pi hi ayarp
t<tijasaddo hoti ... tehi va rüpadihi arammaJ_lehi imassa
ca sukhassa paccayehi jata ti pi -a); Mil261 ,9 (itthiya va
purisassa va -ena vayamena bheri saddayati);
274 tajjari
Vism 287,3 (kammaragaggariya dhamamanaya bhastarp
ca purisassa ca -arp vayamarp paricca vato sañcarati);
Pv-a 190,2o (tattha cittarp pal)idhaya -arp puññakammarp
katva); - tajja-paññatti,f, a designation based on
what comes from or belongs to that; ? or on what is its
nature; ? Pp-a 174,19 (ya tarp tarp dhammasabhavarp
apekkhitva parhavi tejo kakkha!ata Ul)hata ti adika
paññapana ayarp -i nama); 174,23 H vijjamanapaññatti
yeva); Sadd 714,15 (--sari.khato kakkhalattadi-
samaññakaro ).
ta.ijana, n., -a, f [S. tarjana, tarjana], l. threatening,
frightening; scolding; Dhatup 547" (tajja -e);
Dhatum 86; Vv 50:9 (akkosanarp vadhanarp ca -aya ca
uggata; Vv-a 212,15: -aya ti bhayasantajjanena); It-a 1
69,24 (paribhasa ti .. . bhayuppadavasena -a); -
2. [= tajjaniya qv ], (a formal act of) rebuke, censure;
Vin 11 29,27* (in uddana: -a nupasammati); -
0
-pothana, n.,frightening or scolding and beating; Ja II
169,15 (brahmai_lo ubho pi te yatha na pun' evarüparp
paparp karonti -ehi tatha sikkhapetva yathakammarp
gato).
ta.ijani,f [S. tarjani], the forefinger; Abh 266.
ta.ijanikata, mfn. [= tajjaniyakammakata qv], dealt with by
a formal act of the sari.gha expressing a rebuke; Vin II
29,15* (in uddana: na kare -o, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tajjani- ).
ta.ijaniya, tajjaniya, mfn. ffrom tajjana], concerning a
rebuke; (a formal act of the sari.gha) expressing a
rebuke; Vin 1 49,28 (sace sari.gho upajjhayassa kammarp
kattukamo hoti -arp va niyassarp va pabbajaniyarp
va ... , Be, Ce, Se so; E e tajjaniyarp); 335,31 * (in uddana:
tassa tajjaniyarp karurp); 11 2,33 (-assa kammassa
karal)arp, Be, Ce so; Ee tajjaniyassa; Se --kammassa);
V 124,18* (in uddana: -a niyassa ca pabbajaparisarai)I,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e tajjaniya); Sp 1156,15 (-assa hi
visesena bhal)qanakarakattarp ari.garp . . . vuttarp);
1373,17 (idarp -assa vatthu); - 0 -kamma, n.• a formal
act of the sari.gha expressing a rebuke; Vin 1 328,29
(ayarp kho avuso bhikkhu bhaJ_lqanakarako ... sari.ghe
adhikaral)akarako hand' assa mayarp -arp karoma ti);
II 2,2o (tena hi bhikkhave sari.gho PaJ_lqukalohitakanarp
bhikkhunarp -arp karotu); 4,17 foll. (tihi bhikkhave
ari.gehi samannagatassa bhikkhuno akari.khamano sari.gho
-arp kareyya, bhal)qanakarako hoti ... ); 7,s (sari.gho
PaJ_lqukalohitakanarp bhikkhunarp -arp paripassambheti,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e tajjaniya-); 28,27* (in uddana: al)apesi
-arp Savatthiyarp jino, Be, Ce so; Ee tajjaniya-; Se
tajjaniyarp kammarp); A 1 99,4 ( -arp paññattarp. Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee tajjaniya-); - --kata, mfn., dealt with by a
formal act of the sari.gha expressing a rebuke; under
censure; Vin I 328,32 (ayarp kho avuso bhikkhu
sari.ghena --kato adhammena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -arp
kato ); 11 5,5 foil. (--katena bhikkhave bhikkhuna
sammavattitabbarp); 6,31 (mayarp bhante sari.ghena
--kata samma vattama lomarp paterna netthararp
vattama tajjaniyassa kammassa parippassaddhirp y acama
ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tajjaniya-); - se e also atajjaniya
sv tajjeti.
ta.ijiiri, f [?], a cubic measure; a particle; Abh 194;
Vibh-a 343,13 (paramal)u nama al)u nama -I nama
ratharel)u nama ... ); 343,24 foll. (chattirpsa al)li ekaya
 tajjiyate
-iya pamfu:iam chattüpsa -iyo eko ratharel)U).
taijiyate, pr. 3 sg. [pass. of tajjeti qv ? or wr ?], is
threatened; Spk 1 274,1 (pato phullitakokanadarp
suriyalokena -ate evarp manussattagata satta
jarabhivegena maddiyantl ti, Ce so; Be bhijjiyate; Se
maddiyate; Ee pa(alaphullitakokanadarp suriyalokena
-ate) i= Pj 11 397,17* (Ce, Ee patakaphullitakokanadarp
suriyalokena -ate; Se pato phullarp kokanadarp; Be pato
phullarp kokanadarp ... bhajjiyate ).
taijeti, -ayati (and tajjati), pr. 3 sg. [S. tatjati, tatjayati],
frightens, threatens; scolds, rebukes; Dhatup 75 (tajja
hirpsayarp); 547a (tajja tajjane); Dhatum 86; 770; Vin 1
113,28 (chabbaggiya bhikkhii ... vadhena -en ti); Ja 11
28,9 (sihi sigalirp vihetheti imasmirp (hane kasma
vasatha palayatha ti -eti); Ap 355,w (siilena -ayanti
marp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sillato); Dhp-a 1377,13 (mata me
-essati ti); III 162,11 (kirp tumhe attano upa((hayikarp
atajjetva marp tajjetha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atajjitva mam
tajjissatha); Sadd 345,2o (laja laja tajja bhassane: lajati
lajati -ati); 530,23 (tajja santajjane: -eti -ayati
santajjeti); - part.pr. (a) tajjenta, mf( -entl)n., Ja 11
347,1o (gehajanarp -entl paharantl carati); V 390,9
(mahantarp daJ:.lc;Jarp adaya -ento agacchi); Cp 3:6: 17;
Pv-a 55,24; (b) tajjayanta, mfn., Cp-a 224,5;- aor. 3 sg.
atajjesi, tajjesi, M 1 338,3o* (iti Mararp atajjesi bhikkhu,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee aghartesi) = Th 1208; Ja IV 58,29 (sace
imasmirp rhane vasissasi janissami te kattabban ti -esi);
Ps III 248,16 (atha narp so aticirena agata si ti -esi);
Cp-a 53,17 (nirayabhayena -esi); 3 pi. tajjayirpsu, Ja II
28,2 (putta pi 'ssa sigaliputte tath' eva -ayirpsu, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se tajjirpsu); - absol. tajjetva, Ja 1 269,10 (dhutte
-etva tato palapetva); Vism 392,2s (thero nirayabhayena
-etva saggasukhena ca palobhetva dhammarp desesi);
Ps III 92,7 (kamadinavena -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
-itva); Spk II 192,16; Mhv 36:48; - neg. atajjetva,
Dhp-a III 162,1o (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atajjitva); -
pp taijita, mfn., threatened; frightened, agitated; Vin 11
293,13* (in uddana: -o brahmadal)c;lena catusaccarp
apapul)i); D 1 97,1 (raja Okkako bhito brahmadal)c;Jena
-o); Th 307 (balaka ... kii1assa meghassa bhayena -a;
Th-a 11 131,8: -a ti ... nibbijjita bhirpsapita); Ja I 119,31
(ime buddhagaravena sagarava buddhatejena -a);
VI 166,31 (catilhi ca nagamal)avehi --tta maral)a-
bhayabhito); Ap 40,25 (poso rajadal)c;lena -o);
sutajjita, mfn., greatly frightened; Spk III 66,s; -
fpp (a) tajjetabba, mfn., Sp 800,7 (bhikkhu n' eva
akkositabbo na paribhasitabbo na bhayena tajjetabbo);
1365,15; - fpp (b) neg. atajjaniya, mfn., not amenable to
rebuke; Vism 115,29 (evarp aniyyatitattabhavo hi -o va
hoti dubbaco va anovadakaro ... ); 116,2 (niyyatit-
attabhavo pana n' eva -o hoti na yenakamailgamo
su vaco); - se e also tajjaniya; - caus. aor. 3 sg.
tajjapesi, Pj JI 60,25 (anicchamanarp tajjapesi yadi na
karosi thana pi te cavemi jivita pi voropemi ti);
Pv-a 34,23 (paribhasapayi ca ti bhayena tajjapesi); - see
also tajjiyate.
tañcati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tañcati, tvañcati,
Wg § 7:9,10], goes; Sadd 335,19 (tañcu mañcu
gatiyarp: ... -ati mañcati).
tata, m.n., tati,f [S. tata], a slope, a declivity; a shore, an
275
edge; Abh 608 (papato tu -o); 664 (tlrarp tu kularp ...
-arp tisu); Ja 1 233,5 (ailgarakasuya -e thatva); Sp 460,11
(bhikkhurp anetva sobbhadinarp -e (hapeti); 756,1
(pokkharai)I-adinarp -arp bhijjitva udakasamanta patati);
Sadd 254,2o (-arp -i -o t' ime sadda tlrasailkhate
ekasmirp yev' atthe thipunnapurpsakalinga); 352,18joll.
(-o girita(o naditato -i -arp); - ifc se e chinna-
(sv chindati).
tatatatayati, pr. 3 sg. [onomat.], makes a crackling or
sputtering noise; crack/es; sputters; Sv 707,25
(pakkhittalol)arp uddhanarp viya -ateva, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se -atveva); Ps II 23,21 (ayarp kuddho jhayamanarp
veJuvanarp viya pakkhittalol)arp uddhanarp viya ca
kodhavasena -ati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be pa(apa(ayati);
Dhp-a III 328,17 (vatahatata1apaJ:.lJ:.larp viya -ati, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se ka(aka(ayati); part.pr.
(a) tatata(ayanta, mfn., Ja 1 439,2 (raja aggimhi
pakkhittalol)asakkhara viya kodhena -anto); Vism 622,19
(tattakapale pakkhittati1a viya -anta sailkhara bhijjanti)
quoted Sadd 285, 13; Thi-a 5,2o (sa aggijala sakala-
bhajanarp -antarp jhayati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce taya
aggijalaya); (b)tatata(ayamana,mfn. , Dhp-aiV 176,17
(brahmal)i . . . kupita uddhane pakkhittalol)arp vi ya
-ayamana); V v-a 47,14 (kodhena pajjalanto -amano tarp
bhilmiyarp patetva); 121 ,10; - aor. 3 sg. ta(ata(ayi,
Spk li 200,1 (akaso -i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee akase vato
vayi); - see also ka(akarayati, karakara, pa(apa(ayati.
tatati, pr. 3 sg. [from tata; S. Dhatup ta(ati, Wg § 9:21], is
raised; Sadd 352,18 (tata ussaye ussayo aroho ubbedho:
-ati tato).
tatta, m. [cf BHS tana, tartu], a dish, a platter; ? -
0
-kara, m. [BHS id.], a metalsmith, a platter-maker;
Sp 1242,1 (in cpd: kammaratanakaracundak ara-).
tattaka, m. [tarta + ka2; cf BHS tartuka], a platter; a
salver; Ap 444,14 (labham' aharp rilpimaye ca soval)J:.le
-e ca mal)imaye, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se ta((ike); Sp 1203,9
(
0
' -adini bhajanani); Vibh-a 49,28 (hatthato hi -e va
sarake va .. . patitva bhinne); Vin-vn 753 (phaJika-
kacakarpsanarp o• -adini kanici puggalassa na vananti).
tattika,f [cfCDJAL5990], a (straw) mat; ViniV 41,27
(seyyarp nama bhisi cimilika uttarattharaJ:.larp
bhummattharaJ:.larp -a cammakhal)c;lo ... ); Ja I 141,1o
(ekarp -arp attharitva acariyassa santike yeva nipajji);
Niddi 131,17 (asanarp vuccati yattha nisidanti mañeo
pi(harp bhisi -a cammakhal)c;IO ... ); Vism 97,2 (-aya
nisiditva); Sp 776,6 (talapal)J:.lehi va vakehi va kata
taWka, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee katata\\ika); 1088,6 (ima
catasso pi !ÍJ:.lajatiyo etehi ka(asarake ca -ayo ca karonti);
Pj II 99,6 (mañcake -arp pattharitva sayi).
taJ.Iarp in E e at Sv 265,12 is wr for tal)arp (Be, Ce, Se so).
taJ.I!Jati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tal)c;late, Wg § 8:28], beats;
Dhatum 800 (tac;li sañcalane; ? vl sarptii1ane);
Sadd 356,18 (tac;Ji taJane: -ati vital)c;lati vital)c;la).
taJ.I!Jamattikan ti in Ee at Sp 1219,s is wr; Be gal)c;lu-
mattikan ti; Ce, Se lal)c;la-; ad Vin 11 151,31: Ce, Ee
gal)c;lamattikarp; Be gal)c;lu-; Se lal)c;lu-.
taJ.I!Jila is an occasional wr for thal)c;lila qv.
taJ.I!Ju1a, m. [ts], grain, especial/y rice-grain; husked rice;
V in 1 210,29 (tilarp pi -arp pi muggarp pi viññapetva anto
vasetva anto samarp pacitva bhagavato upanamesi pivatu
 tal}l}ulaka
bhagava tekatulayagun ti); D III 90,13 (kal).O pi -alll
pariyonandhi thuso pi -alll pariyonandhi); M 1 81,3
(abhijanami ... ek~ yeva -alll iihar~ iiharita); Sn 295
(-alll sayan~ vatthalll sappitelalll ca yaciya); J a I 255,1
(eko -e gahetva bhatt~ pacapetulll giim~ pavisi);
III 55,4* (na sasassa tila atthi na mugga napi -a); 123,13*
(thusalll thusalll vivajjetva -alll pana khadare); 425,19*
(pinha tila dhovasi -ani); V 405,28* (pavihayo abhujino
pi -a; 406,22': -a ti nikkul).gakathusa sayallljata-
tal).gulasisani, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nikkul).gakathusani);
VI 366,3o (-e kogetva mülatal).gulehi yagulll majjhima-
tal).gulehi bhattalll kal).ikahi pilv~ pacitva); Mil 259,25
(udakalll -ehi sammissitalll bhajanagat~ hoti pihit~
uddhane aghapit~); Sv 93,6 (sali-adin~ e' eva
til).ajatin~ ca -a); Pj 11 397,22 (aññataraya itthiya
musalena -e ko~~entiya); Nidd-a 1 396,10 (odano ti ...
sattann~ dhaññan~ dhaññanuloman~ ca -ehi
nibbatto); Mhv 5:30 (te sali nitthus' akal).e akhal).getvana
-e ak~su milsika);- ifc see khal).ga-;- 0 -doqa, n., a
vat or dol).a mea su re of rice; Dhp-a III 264,14 (raja -assa
odanalll tadupiyena silpavyanJanena bhuñjati)
IV l5,n; - 0 -naJi, 0 -na!i,f, a naF of rice; a na~i
measure of rice; Ja I 125,16 (sa pana -i killl agghati ti);
VI 397,30' (eko puriso ek~ -illl ca pu~abhattalll ca
kahiipal).asahassalll ca gahetva); Sp 703,2o (naFkodanan
ti magadhana~iya ekaya -iya odan~);- 0 -na!ika,f, a
n~ika of rice; a naFka measure of rice; Ja I 124,28 (so
pañcannalll assasatan~ ekalll -~ aggh~ akasi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se ekatal).qulan~iya aggham akasi); 125,6 (sa
-a idalll nama agghati ti); 126,6* (kim agghati -a 'yalll,
Be so; Ce -aya; Se -a ca; Ee omits);- 0 -pafibhasta, n.,
a bag of rice in re tu m; ? M 11 51,27 (yo icchati -ani va
muggapa~ibhastani va k~ayapa~ibhastani va nikkhipitva
yalll icchati t~ haratil ti, Be, Ce so; Se 0 -patibhastani;
Ee 0
-pabhivattani, prob. wr; possibly read
o -pa~ibhal).qani ?); - o -pabhivattani in E e at M 11 51,27
is prob. wr, perhaps for 0 -pavibhattani ?;
0
-pphala, mfn. [tal).qula + phala 1], producing, being, the
pure grain (without husk); D III 88,14 (akaghapako salí
paturahosi akal).O athuso suddho sugandho -o); 199,34*
(salilll paribhuñjanti manusa akal).alll ... -~; Sv 965,15:
-an ti tal).qula va tassa phal~ hoti); - 0 -mutthi,f, a
handful of rice; Vin III 64,19; Pv-a 131,4;- 0 -homa, n.,
an offering of rice; D 1 9,6; - atal}."ula, mfn., without
grains; Cp 3:2:4 (tam ahalll disvana kuhakalll thusarasilll
va -am);- see also uttandula.
tal}."ulaka, m. [tal).gula .; .ka2], rice-grain; Ap-a 241,24
(cora talll paharanta tal).gulakamattani aghini karonta
bhindilllSU, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tal).gulakal).amattani); -
o -manda,f, liquor from boiled rice; ? Sp 1092,22
(acchakañjikan ti -a, Ee, Se so; Be tal).gulodakamanda;
Ce omits).
tal}."uliya, tal}."uleyya, m. [S. tal).guliya], a plant; SAF:
careless weed, prickly red amaranth, Amaranthus
spinosus L.; Abh 594 (tal).guleyyo 'ppamariso); 1132
(mañso tal).quliye 'yye, Ce so; Be tal).guleyye).
taq4uleyyaka, m. [S. tal).guliyaka], a plant, Amaranthus
spinosus L.; Sp 832,29 (mülakhadaniye ... -mül~ 0
vatthuleyyakamül~ ... ); 835,11 (pattakhadaniye ... -o
papunnago vatthuleyyako ... ); Pj I 72,15 (sailkara~~ane
276
viya 0 '-adini); Vv-a 99,21 (gakan ti 0 '-adi saka-
vyañjana¡p).
tal}.ha, f [S. tr~l).a], l. thirst; craving (for food or drink);
Abh 1057 (-a lobhe pipasaya¡p); D 111 85,21 (tassa
rasapa~avi¡p ailguliya sayato acchadesi -a e' assa
okkami); Pv 13:5 (khudaya -aya ca khajjamana;
Pv-a 69,26: -aya ti pipasaya); Ja 1 346,15' (atthi me eka
-a ti iiha, killl -a sami ti, kapallapilv~ khaditukiimo
'mhi ti); III 366,28 (idani lol).asakkharaya -alll janesi ti);
IV l72,1o* (ghamme -~ va vindati; l73,1w: yatha nama
ghamme gimhakale vatatapena kilanto -alll vindati
paniyapipasalll pa~ilabhati); V 9,19 (ambani khadanto
attano -a¡p pilrehi ti); VI 349,29 (maccham~sagandh~
ghayitva -alll adhivasetu¡p asakkonto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
omit ghayitva -alll); Pa~is-a 414,12 (patu¡p bhuñjitulll
iccha pipasa sa -a eva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit sa -a eva);
-2. (a general) craving; strong desire; Abh 162 (-a ca
tasil).a eja); 1057; Vin I 1,13 (avijjapaccaya sailkhara ...
vedanapaccaya -a 0 -paccaya upadanalll ... ); MI 48,36
(katamo e' avuso dukkhasamudayo, ya 'ya¡p -a
ponobhavika nandiragasahagata tatratatrabhinandini);
S 1 37,18* (-a janeti purisalll); 39,15* foll. (-aya niyati
loko -aya parikissati -aya ekadhammassa sabbe va
vasam anvagu); 39,21* (-aya vippahanena nibbanam iti
vuccati); 124,24 (-a ca arati ca raga ca maradhitaro); A 1
223,22 (kamm~ khett~ viññal).~ bij~ -a sineho);
III 400,1 (-a sibbani -a hi n~ sibbati tassa tass' eva
bhavassa abhinibbattiya); Dhp 216 (-aya jayati soko
-aya jayati bhaya¡p -aya vippamuttassa natthi soko kuto
bhaya¡p); 334 (manujassa pamattacarino -a vaqqhati
maluva viya); It 50,10 (kiimatal).hii bhavatal).hii
vibhavatal).hii ima kho bhikkhave tisso -a ti); Sn 339
(civare pil).qapate ca paccaye sayanasane etesu -~
makasi ma lokalll punar agami); 496 (yesalll tu -a natthi
kuhiñci loke bhavabhavaya idha va huralll va); 916 (ya
kaci -a ~jhattalll tasalll vinaya sada sato sikkhe); Th 161
(-a me susamilhata; Th-a 11 37,26: tasati paritasati ti -a);
Ja IV 172,13* (ev~ mandassa posassa balassa avijanato
bhiyyo -a pipasa ca vagqhamanassa vagqhati); 175,16*
(yo im~ -~ dukkhajananilll parijanati pal).qito);
Vibh l 07,33 (-aya ca avasesan~ ca kilesanalll pahanalll
ayalll V\}ccati dukkhanirodho); Nett 23,29 (sabba hi -a
ajjhosanalakkhal).ena ekalakkhal).ii); 37,15 (ev~ -a
tividh~ phalalll deti dighe va dhamme upap~a va
apare va pariyaye); Mil248,9 (te ima¡p
[kayagatasati]-bhojana¡p bhuñjitva kamarilparilpa-
bhavesu sabballl -~ apanessanti ti); Vism 567,24*
(rilpatal).hadibhedena eh a -a idha dipita); Sv 499,9 foll.
(yaya -aya . . . bhoge esati gavesati ay~ esanatal).ha
niima, ya tesu esitesu gavesitesu pa~iladdhesu -a aya¡p
esitatal).ha nama); Ps li 116,1 (vagamillika -a); IV 104,17
(pañca pi khandha dukkhasacca¡p tesalll samughapika
-a samudayasacc~); Spk I 84,21 (avijja -aya müla¡p -a
avijjaya); Mp 11 226,23 (asattiyo vuccanti -ayo);
Ap-a 197,18 (parassa itthiya -a¡p uppadesi¡p);
Sadd 503,28 (ken' aghena -a tassati paritassati ti
atthena); 634,6 (-a tasil).ii);- 0 adhipanna, mfn., in the
power of, assailed by, craving; S I 29,6* (-a vata
silabaddha; Spk I 81 ,s: tal).haya ajjhotthata); Sn 1123;
Ud-a 365,6 (sabbehi pi padehi tesa¡p --talll yeva vadati,
 277
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tal).havipannata111, perhaps wr); -
0
abhisarai,Ia, n., the movement of craving towards
(loe.); Ud-a 206,22 (okasailkhatesu chasu pi ayatanesu
-assa abhavena anokasarl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tal).habhissara~assa); - 0 -iiluka, mfn. [ta~ha + aluka 1],
subject to cravings, greedy; Ja II 278,22 (-o eso ti); -
-ussiiva, m. [ta~ha + ussavi], the defilement of
0
craving; Dhp-a IV 165,21 ( 0 -ussavabhavena anussuta111,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tal).ha-ussadabhavena anussad~); -
0
-kiiya, m., a group of cravings; D III 244,9 (cha -a
rüpatal).ha saddatal).ha ... ); Pa~is I 130,3 (chahi -ehi
rajjati lokasannivaso; Pa~is-a 418,2!foll.); Vism 199,19;
- (a)-kkhaya, m. [tal).ha + khaya2], the destruction of
0
craving; Abh 6 (mokkho nirodho nibbana111 d!po -o
para111); Vin I 5,3 (id~ pi kho ~hana111 sududdas~
yadida111 sabbasailkharasamatho sabbüpadhipa~inissaggo
-o virago nirodho nibban~); 8,19* (sabbañjaho -e
vimutto); III 20,4 (-aya ... nibbanaya dhammo desito);
S V 87,3 (-a kammakkhayo kammakkhaya dukkha-
kkhayo ti); Dhp 354 (-o sabbadukkh~ jinati); Th! 36
(-o anuppatto kat~ buddhassa sasan~); Ja II 314,9·
(nibbanal11 hi agamma ta~ha khlyati tasma tal11 -an ti
vuccati); Th-a II 271,15 (ta~ha khiyati ettha ti -o
nibban~); Vism 293,zs;- -gata, tal).hagata, mfn. and
0 0
n., l. (mfn.) under the influence of craving; DI 40,2 (tad
api tesa111 bhavata111 samal).abrahmal).ilnal11 ... vedayita111
-an~ paritasitavipphanditam eva); Sn 776 (passami ...
paja111 ima111 tal).hagata111 bhavesu, Be, Se so, me; Ce, Ee
-~; Nidd I 47,25foll.: tai_lhagatan ti -a111 tai_lhanugat~
tal).hanusa~al11 ... ; Pj II 517,7: tai_lhaya gata111 abhibhüt~
nipatitan ti adhippayo ); - 2. (n.) a sort of craving; A IV
68,33 (hoti tathagato parammarai_la ti kho bhikkhu -a111
et~ saññagat~ ... ; Mp IV 38,4: -an ti diqhitai_lha); -
0
-gaddula, gaddüla, n., the leash of craving; Nidd I 9,7
(tal).hanad! ta~hajala111 -a111 tai_lhasamuddo ... ; Nidd-a I
42,16: yatha sunakha gaddu1abaddha yadicchaka111
nlyanti eva111 °-baddha satta ti, d¡¡Jhabandhanatthena
gaddu1~ viya ti gaddu1a111 tal).ha va gaddu1~ -am) =
Dhs 1059 = Vibh 362,8;- 0 -Carita, m(jn)., (one) with a
disposition to craving; Nett 7,15; Vism 578,25 (diqhi-
caritanal11 hi avijja -an~ ca tal).ha s~saranayika);
Sv 754,8; Pj II 504,25; - 0 (a)-cchida, mfn. [tal).ha +
chida 1], who cuts off craving; MI 386,30* (-assa
buddhassa); Sn 1021 (-a pakasehi); Vv 16:13; -
0
-jiitika, mfn., bornfrom craving; MI 67,17 (ime cattaro
upadana 0 -nidana 0 -samudaya -a 0 -pabhava) f. Pa~is 11
111,27;- 0 -jiila, m.n. [tal).ha + jala1], the net of craving;
Th 306 (-o samühato); Ja VI 46,¡z· (maccuno jillan ti
ki1esamarena pasarita111 -~); Nidd I 9,7 (Nidd-a I 42,13:
ajjhottharal).atthena tal).ha va ja1~ -~) = Dhs 1059 =
Vibh 362,8; Pa~is I 127,23 (Pa~is-a 412,6 (tal).ha eva ...
s~sibbitaqhena jalan ti -a111); - 0
-tassanii,f,
trembling or quivering from craving; Sv 111,13 (ah o vata
aññe pi satta itthatta111 agaccheyyun ti ay~ -a nama);
0
- -dutiya, mfn., with craving as one's companion;
A II 10,10* (-o puriso dlgham addhana s~sar~) =
Sn 740; - 0 -nigghiitana, n., the destroying of craving;
Sn 1085;- 0 -mülaka, mfn., having craving as its root;
Vin V 137,28 (nava -a dhamma); A IV 400,z!foll. (nava
bhikkhave -e dhamme desessami); Pa~is I 26,24 (nava
tal}hayana
dhamma pahatabba nava -a); Spk III 149,z2 (y~ -~
kamma111 uppajjeyya ta111 °-pahanena pahiyati); Mp V
43,22 (vaq~ e' ettha pa~hamasutte avijjamülak~
dutiye -a111); As 128,11 (--tta ca jatidukkhassa, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr 0 -mülakatha); - 0 -lepa, m., the stain of
craving; Nidd I 55,19 (dve lepa -o ca dinhilepo ca);
Th-a III 190,23 (yo hi ettha kamagui_le -enana lippati);
Pj II 125,31; - 0 -vatthuka, mfn., being a basis for
craving; Nidd I 2,3 (sabbe pi arüpavacara dhamma -a
ta~harammaJ)a . .. kama; Nidd-a I 17,3: -a ti
patiqhatthena kara~atthena ca tai_lhaya vatthubhüta);
Sv 988,17 (sabbe pi tebhumaka dhamma rajaniya~thena
-a ti); - 0 -vasika, mfn., under the control of craving;
Ja II 215,2o (maharaja -ena nama bhavitu111 na vaqati
tal).ha hi nam' esa vipattimiila111); IV 169,26 (-o hutva
ekena rajjena asantuqho ); Th-a II 171,7 (so -o puggalo
aparapara111 bhavabhave upp1avati);- 0 -vicarita, n., an
exploration, speculation, influenced by craving; an
activity of craving; A II 212,8foll. (aqharasa kho pan'
imani bhikkhave -ani ajjhattikassa upadaya aqharasa
-ani bahirassa upadaya); Vibh 349,26foll.
(Vibh-a513,31: -ani ti 0 -samudacara 0 -pavattiyo);
Vism 511,19 (samudayasacce chattimsa -ani);
-Sarpsivana, n., sewing together, entwmmg, with
craving; Nidd-a I 89,26 (visinetva thito ti -~ akatva
~hito ti); -
0
-sammudita, mfn., finding joy in craving;
S IV 390,28 (tai_lharamassa ... tal).haratassa -assa); -
0
-hetuka, mfn., caused by craving; Vibh 139,25
0
( -paccaya upadana111 -a111); Ud-a 382,11 (tal).haya chetta
so -assa icchitalabhassa abhavato ... , Be, Se so; Ce
chettatta; Ee chettatta -assa icchitalabhassa); -
atitai,Iha, mfn., having great craving; Abh 729 (-o tu
lolupo);- nittai,Iha, mfn., free from craving; Ud 77,19*
(t~ -~ muni111 carant~ navajanati sadevako pi 1oko,
Be so; Ce ta111 t~ -a111; Ee, Se na t~ -a111, prob. wr);
Nidd II 186,32 (-o so udahu sata~ho rüpe asi111sati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -o so uda satal).ho); Nett 38,5 (ya --ta
aya111 sa-upadisesa nibbanadhatu); Sv 903,29 (appicchata
ti--ta); Ps III 341,15 (tasa vuccanti sata~ha thavara -a);
- sata1,1ha, mfn., subject to craving; craving; MI 64,37
(sa pan' avuso ni~tha -assa udahu vltatal).hassa ti); Ja IV
311 ,3 · (purohitanhanatal).haya -o); Nidd I 86,2 (sarago
sadoso samoho samano -o saditthi ... ); - see also
tasii_la, nijjhamatal).ha, nijjhamatal).hika (sv nijjhayati \
tai,Ihiiyati, tai,Ihiyati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from tal).ha],
thirsts; has a craving; S II 13,3zfoll. (ko nu kho bhante
ta~hlyati ti no kallo pañho ti bhagava avoca ...
ki111paccaya nu kho bhante tal).ha ti esa kallo pañho, Ce,
Se so; Be, Ee tasan ti); Vism 544,22 (so indriyasampanno
phusati vediyati tal).hiyati upadiyati gha~iyati, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se tal).hiyati); Spk II 78,21 (n' eva tal).haparitassanaya
na bhayaparitassanaya paritassati na tal).hayati na bhayati
ti attho); Sadd 822,26 (kattuno upamanabhütamha
namato ayapaccayo hoti acaratthe: ... saddo cicci~am iva
attana111 acarati ciccitayati, tal).hayati).
tai,Ihiiyana, n. ffrom tai_lhayati], being thirsty; craving;
Ps IV 94,11 (0 ' -vasena ta~ha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tal).haya
vasena) f. Spk II 114,3 (eds 0 '-vasena); It-a II 19,2o
(
0
' -anhena tal).ha); As 370,21 (sabbattha kama~tha111
viditva o• -atthena kamatal).ha).
tm;thiyati
taQhiyati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv ta~hayati.
tata, mfn., pp oftanoti qv.
tatiya, tatlya, mfn., n. and -a,f [S. tj"tiya], l. (mfn.) the
third; a third kind of, Vin 11 287,1 (-assa parajikassa
vatthurp pi pucchi); III 4,14 (-arp jhanarp upasampajja
vihasirp); 5,36 (rattiya pacchime yame -a vijja adhigata);
DI 16,13 (idarp bhikkhave -arp ¡hanarp yarp agamma ...
eke sama~abrahma~a sassatavada sassata111 attanarp ca
loka111 ca paññapenti); 251,1 (so mettasahagatena cetasa
eka111 disarp pharitva viharati tatha dutiya111 tatha -a111
tatha catutthaJ1l); 11 108,12 (ayarp -o hetu -o paccayo
mahato bhumicalassa patubhavaya); 177,29 (raja Ananda
Mahasudassano imaya -aya iddhiya samannagato
ahosi): MI 152,17 (tatra bhikkhave -a migajata evarp
samacintesuJ1l); 344,2 (yarp -asmirp thane khirarp hoti);
II 6,12 (ima111 kho aha111 bhante bhagavati -arp
dhammarp samanupassami yena bhagavantarp savaka
sakkaronti); A 11 46,12* (ekarpsavacanarp ekarp
vibh~javacanarp pararp -arp pa¡ipuccheyya catuttha111
pana ¡hapaye); IV 101,5 (-assa bhikkhave suriyassa
patubhava); V 135,2 (-assa jhanassa piti kmgako );
Dhp 309 (nindarp tatiyarp nirayarp catuttharp, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se -aJ1l); It 75,23 (ayarp bhikkhave -o devesu
devasaddo niccharati); Sn 436 (kama te pa¡hama sena ...
-a khuppipasa te); 1001 (dve va tassa gatiyo -a hi na
vijjati); Th 128 (-e antaravassamhi tamokkhandho
padalito); Thi 155 (phusayirp -arp phalarp); Ja 11 284,16
(ajja me -o divaso yacantassa dehi dani me etarp
ma~iratanan ti); V 80,10* (matapita parama bandhavanarp
nassa -o anukampak' atthi); Ap 558,15 (tass' asirp -a
dhita); Bv25:12 (nibbuto -e phale; Bv-a267,15foll.:
nimittasattami tatiyaphaladhigamahetu nibbuto ti attho );
Vibh 264,1/oll. (katama111 -arp jhanarp); Mil91,12 (atthi
me bhante Nagasena koci attho tumhehi saddhirp
mantayitabbo na tattha añño koci -o icchitabbo );
Sp 1247,26 (-a111 bhagarp labhati, Ce so; Be
tatiyabhaga111; Ee, Se -arp labhati); Sv 589,17 (pa¡hamo
sotapannasama~o pi tattha natthi dutiyo sakadagami-
sama~o -o anagamisam~o catuttho arahattasama~o pi
tattha n' atthi ti attho); Vv-a 101,9 (tvarp ito -e attabhave
mama mata ahosi ti); Pv-a 69,21 (sa peti ito -aya jatiya
attano petattabhavarp anussaritva); Mhv 1:71 (-e vas se);
Sadd 796,17 (ti~~a111 piira~o -o);- (fe see yava-, saya-
(sv sayarp); - tatiyarp, adv., for a third time; Vin II
188,33 (-a111 pi kho Devadatto bhagavantarp etad avoca);
D II 155,13 (-am pi kho te bhikkhii tu~hi ahesu111);
Khpp 1,10 (-arp pi buddharp sara~arp gacchami); Jai
313,1 (evarp dutiyarp -arp pi ti cha vare ... pabbajito
e' ev' uppabbajito ca); Mil 2,30 (so dutiyarp pi -arp pi
amantiyamano asu~anto viya gacchat' eva); Sp 1185,21
(-arp pi etarp attharp vadami); Dhp-a II 215,3 (tasma
dvikkhatturp pa¡ikkhipitva -arp yacito);- yava tatiyarp
(and yavatatiyarp), up to the third time; three times;
Vin III 173,1 (so bhikkhu bhikkhiihi yava -arp
samanubhasitabbo tassa pa¡inissaggaya); MI 231,28 (yo
koci ... tathagatena yava -arp sahadhammikarp pañhaJ1l
puttho na vyakaroti); A 1 170,1 (yava -arp pi kho
Sailgaravo brahma~o Anandena sahadhammikarp
pañharp puttho sarpsadeti); Ja I 279,13 (pa¡ivacanarp
alabhanto yava -arp); IV 213,15 (te dutiyarp pi -arp pi
278 tato
yaci111su, bodhisatto te yava -a111 varesi yeva); VI 367,23
(yava -arp pesetva); Mil 170,4 (yava -arp pañharp
pu¡¡ho); Ps V 67,2o (evarp yava -arp yaci, bhagava pi
pa¡ikkhipi yeva); Spk I 326,18 (yava -arp nikkhamana-
pavesanarp akasi); Mhv 6:30 (tathasi yava -a111 tato
kujjhi migadhipo); - see also agghatiya, agghateyya
(sv aggha 1); - 2. (n.) the third letters in the first five
classes of consonants (ie g, j, g, d and b); Sadd 607,25
(vaggesu pa¡hamatatiyarp sithilarp); - 3. tatiya (m)j(n).
andf [scil. vibhatti], (gr.t.t.) (the termination of) the
third case, the instrumental; Sadd 60,2s (kara~avacane
-a vibhatti bhavati); 642,7 (na hi iti -a); 718,4 foil.
(kara~e -a: aggina kutil11 jhapeti ... ); - o• -attha, m.
[tatiya + attha2], the sense of the instrumental;
Sadd 697,15 (-e); 733,2o (-e pa¡hama); 804,2 (-e ca so iti
paccayo hoti); - 0
-ijhanika, mfn. rJrom tatiya +
2
jhana ], connected with the third jhana; belonging to the
third jhana; Vism 159,8 (eka111 riipavacararp -arp);
Sv 804,14; - (tatiya)-tappurisa, m., a tappurisa cpd in
which the first member, if uncompounded, would be in
the instrumental case; Sadd 659,26 (-e ca samase añño
sabbanamavidhi katabbo na hoti); 755,2o (issarakata111
sallaviddho ... ice adi ayarp -o); - se e also tatiyaka.
tatiyaka, tatiyaka, mf( -a, -i)n. [S. trtiyaka], l. the third;
D II 115,33 (dve va te vaca tathagato pa¡ikkhipeyya atha
-a111 adhivaseyya); S V 41,6 (amatogadharp dvadasaki
-1); Ja III 150,6 (etesarp -e uppanne bhayarp bhavissati,
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee tatiye); Ap 134,4 (Ruci Uparuci e' eva
Maharuci tatlyako, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se -o); - ifc see
yava-, saya- (sv sayarp); - yava tatiyakarp (and
yavatatiyakaJ1l), up to the third time; three times; V in III
41,24 (yava -arp kho me gama111 pi~gaya pavitthassa
ti~ahariyo ... ti~arp ... acta ya agamarpsu); DI 95,5 (yo
kho ... tathagatena yava -a111 sahadhammikarp pañharp
pu¡¡ho na vyakaroti); II 115,15 (atha kirp carahi tvarp
Ananda tathagatarp yava -arp abhinippi)esi ti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr titiyakarp); A 1 278,2o (sama~ena Gotamena
yava -arp apasadito, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be yava tatiyarp);-
2. (of a fever) retuming every third day, tertian;
Sp 629,21 (tatiye catutthe ca divase hoti ti jaro -o
catutthako ti ca vuccati).
tatuttarita,.f, see sv tato.
tato, ind. [ta[d] + to; S. tatas], Sadd 680,26 (sabbato yato
tato kuto ato ito); (usedfor the abl. ofta[d]): l.from that
place; from there; thence; Vin III 148,9 (tato aharp
bhagava agacchami); DI 13,23 (so tato cuto amutra
udapadirp); M 1 209,36 (bhagavantarp anusarpyayitva tato
pa¡inivattitva); Vv 63:5 (idarp pi paniyarp sitarp ...
rajaputta tato pitva); Pv 12:3 (anabbhito tato aga);
Thi 399 (mutta ca tato sa bhikkhuni; Thi-a 241,9: tato ti
tasma dhuttapurisa); Ja I 198,13 (tato nikkhamitva);
Mil 111,15 (niraye paccitva tato muccitva); Sv 829,23
(tato uddharitva); Pa¡is-a 422,2s (tato Rajagaharp gato
'mhi ti); Mhv 33:51; - 2.from that; than that; than
that ... ; V in IIl 90,34 (tato aparena samayena); 263,25
(charattaparamarp tena bhikkhuna tena civarena
vippavasitabbarp, tato ce uttariJ1l vippavaseyya ...
nissaggiyarp pacittiyan ti); D I 16,36 (tarp ca tathagato
pajanati tato ca uttaritararp pajanati); 18,3o (tarp
pubbenivasa111 anussarati tato para111 nanussarati): SI
tatta
. 59,20 (yo bahiresu janapadesu ayo sañjayati tato
upa99haql antepura111 pavesetha); Dhp 243 (tato mala
malatara111 avijja paramaql malaql); Sn 588 (yena yena
hi maññanti tato taql hoti aññatha); Vv 53:18 (tato para111
na me vijjati aññaql); Thi 420 (tato upa99hasuilkena, eds
so, but better tato or tatto me; see Th App II p. 24l,w);
Ja III 281,6 (sa tato paqhaya pana kathetu111 nasakkhi);
339,17* (kiql dukkarataraql tato); Ap 49,21 (tato
sattamake vasse buddho saccaql kathessati); 182,7 (tato
bhiyyo samokiriql); Pa!is I 167,28 (yo tassa paripantho
tato citta111 visujjhati); Kv 1,6 (yo saccikaqho paramaqho
tato so puggalo upalabbhati saccikaqhaparamaqhena ti);
Vism 69,13 (yamhi bhojane hatthaql otareti tato aññaql
g~hituql na labhati); 124,22 (tato diiratare nisinnassa hi
kasi~aql na upaqhati); Sv 823,3o (yaql labhagga-
yasaggaql patto tato parihino hutva); 826,1o (so tato
dukkha muccitukamo); 950,13 (yattakaql vadati tato
digu~aql deti); Mhv 33:97 (tato pabhuti);
3. thereupon, then; from that, consequently; M I 302,5
(pathama111 nirujjhati vaclsailkharo tato kayasailkharo
tato cittasailkharo ti); S I 188,24* (tato manabhisamaya
upasanto carissasi); Dhp 1 (manasa ce paduqhena
bhasatl va karoti va tato na111 dukkham anveti); Sn 449
(tato so dummano yakkho tatth' ev' antaradhayatha);
Th 376 (tato me asi saqlvego); 517 (tato ratya vivasane);
Thi 102 (das a putte vijayitva asmiql riipasamussaye tato
'haql dubbala ji~~a bhikkhuniql upasailkamiql;
Thi-a 96,25: tato ti tasma dasaputtavijayanahetu); 301
Gahanti putte sappañña tato ñati tato dhanaql); Ja I 64,3o
(añño bodhisattassa kese chindituql yuttariipo natthi tato
sayam eva khaggena chindissaml ti); III 523,26" (tato ti
paccha); Ap 298,1o (tato kammavasesena idha
pacchimake bhave . . . jato 'mhi); Mil 2,31 (tato so
bhikkhu dubbaco ayaql sam~ero ti kuddho ... pahara111
adasi); Vism 97,27 foil. (pathamaql ... slmaqhaka-
bhikkhusanghe . . . metta bhavetabba tato simaqhaka-
devatasu tato gocaragamamhi issarajane tato tattha
manusse upadaya sabbasattesu); Sv 864,26 (addha ...
Maro agato ti tato na111 tvaql Maro ti aha); 1035,18
lbhikkhunlsailgho vivadati tato tesa111 upaqhaka
vivadanti); Mhv 9:16; - 4. (repeated): from that and
that place; here and there; from all sides; M I 115,31 (so
ta gavo tato tato da~9ena akoteyya); Ud 58,6 (tato tato
dasavaggaql bhikkhusailghaql sannipatetva;
Ud-a 310,18foll.: tasma tasma gamanigamadito); Sn 205
lvissavanto tato tato); Vv 52:24 (ice evaql vippalapantiql
phandamana111 tato tato); JaiV 428,12* (kacci te bahavo
putta . . . sammodanti tato tato; 428,n: yattha yattha
niyutta honti tato tato sammodant' eva); Vism51,4 (tato
tato verama~Ivasena); 72,31 foil. (tato tato maggaql
pidahati); Sv 974,2 (tato tato viloketva); Mhv 4:20
1bhikkhavo sannipatita sabbe tattha tato tato); - 5. as
correlative of yato: Vin Ili 162,21 (yato nivataql tato
pavataql); SI 14,2* (yato yato mano nivaraye na
dukkham eti naql tato tato); A IV 229,3o (yato kho tvaql
.-\nuruddha ime aqha mahapurisavitakke vitakkessasi
tato tva111 Anuruddha ... pathamaql jhanaql upasampajja
\iharissasi; Mp IV 120,20: yato ti yada tato ti tada);
299.28 (yato kho te bhikkhu ajjhattaql cittaql thitaql
hoti ... tato te bhikkhu evaql sikkhitabbaql); It 34,18*
279 tattaka
(yato ca hoti papicho ahiñko anadaro tato papaql
pasavati; It-a I 154,w: tato ti tasma avijjapapicchata-
hirikanottappahetu); Ja II 293,14* (yato ca so bahutara111
bhojana111 ajjhavahari tato tatth' eva Saqlsldi; 293,21·:
tato ti tasmiql kale); Vism 39,29 (yato pabbajito tato
patthaya); Ud-a 92,5 (y ato ti yada y asma va ... tato ti
tada tasma va); - (tat')-uttaritii,f, abstr., the being
2
more than that, excess; Kkh 112,zo; cfVin III 214,21:
2
tato ce uttariql sadiyeyya); - 0 -ja, mfn. [tato + ja ],
bomfrom that; S III 96,26 (ta~ha, -o so sankharo; Spk II
306,8 foil.: tato t~hato so sankharo jato);
0
-nidana, mfn., caused by that; Ja III 442,zs- (pl!eti
attanaql pi -ena papena); - 0 -nidanaip, ind. [BHS id.],
because of that; V in l 339,2 (bhavissati sanghassa -aql
bh~9anaql kalaho viggaho ... ); II 201,22 (-aql ca
mara~aql va nigacchanti mar~amattaql va dukkhaql);
D 1 52,29 (yo . . . pa~e . . . ekamaqlsapuñjaql kareyya
natthi -aql papaql); MI 112,2 (yaql papañceti -aql
purisaql papañcasaññasankha samudacaranti); A IV 66,5
(na kho panahaql bhante abhijanami -aql cittassa
aññathattan ti); Ja IV 260,10* (yam uddhariql ... -aql
bhayam agataql mama); Mil175,24 (na maharaja -aql
bhagavato koci anuppanno rogo uppanno); Sp 211,17
(-an ti taqlnidanaql taqlhetukan ti paccattavacanassa to-
adeso veditabbo, samase e' assa tolopabhavo); Ps V 9,8
(-aql Subhassa maya saddhiql eko kathasallapo
bhavissati); Mp III 175,5 (-an ti taqlhetu tappaccaya);
Sadd 681,21 (nidanasaddadisu paresu yatasaddehi
parassa paccattavacanassa kvaci to-adeso hoti
yatonidanaql so -aql); - 0 -nimittaip, ind., because of
that; Th 1100 (-aql vimano na hessaql; Th-a III 152,3o:
pharusavacahetu); Pj li 541,22; -
0
-pabhutika, mfn.,
beginning from that (one ); D I 95,25 (-a ka~hayana so ca
k~hayananaql pubbapuriso ti).
tatta 1, tatva, n. [S. tattva], truth; Abh 1175
( ... sokavyapanatatvesu lakkh~ado siya pari); -
tattato, according to truth; rightly; Ja I 148,11 (ayaql
dahara asukamase asukadivase pabbajita ti -ato ñatva,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tathato); 386,12 (tesaql -ato
acorabhavaql ñatva, Ce, Se so; Ee tatvato; Be tathato);
II 125,25 (ath' assa rañño eko amacco antepure padussi,
raja taql -ato ñatva ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tathato);
III 276,5 (nagaraja -ato ajanitva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
tathato); IV 6,5 (imina devaputtena maya katakamma111
-ato ñataql, Ce, Se so; Ee tatvato; Be tathato); VI 178,5
(tapasassa cailkamanakotiyaql nigrodho eso ti -ato
ñatva, Se so; Ce, E e tatvato; Be tathato).
1
tatta2 , mfn., pp oftapati qv.
1
tattaka , mf(-a, -ika)n. [BHS id.; prob. understood as
1
ta(d) + taka , cfSadd 283,7foll.)], of such a size, so
large; so much; so many; Vin III 258,11 (sa itthi
yattakaql yeva suttaql pathamaql adasi -a111 paccha
adasi); V 211 ,32* (gacchantassa catas so apattiyo thitassa
vapi tattika, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a); Th! 25 (yava
Kasijanapado suilko me -o ahu); Ja ll 78,12" (yavatakena
vo attho atthi -aql khadatha); 260,12 (yattakaql amhe
janama acariyo pi -am eva viseso n' atth! ti); Ap 39,21
(klto satasahassena -en' eva karito Sobhano nama
aramo); Mil86,2 (yattakaql lo~aql -aql udakaql tasma
samuddo ti vuccatl ti); 238,3 (puna-d-eva -aql bhojana111
tattaka
bhuñjeyya); Vism 462,4 (yattako viññ~assa bhedo -o
saññaya ti); Sp 558,29 (yattaka itthiyo -a apattiyo
apajjati); 1297,23 (bhikkhil gai).etva -e pa!ivirpse
!hapesun ti attho ); Sv 118,2o (yattako jhanavego -am eva
killarp tighanti); Spki 213,22 (there kir' assa -en' eva
kathasallapena vissaso udapadi); Dhp-a I 210,14 (bhittisu
yattakena o1oketurp sakka hoti -arp chiddarp katva);
Ud-a 327,24 (kasma pana bhagava kapparp ... !haturp
samattho -arp ka1arp a!hatva ... ayusailkhararp ossaji);
428,11 (yattakani piyavatthuni -ani dukkhani); Th-a I 3,9
(visuttarasatarp thera -a eva gatha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tattika); Ap-a 36,17 (bahirakadanarp hi -arp pi samanarp
bodhisattanarp tughirp katurp na sakkoti); Mhv 10:92;
27:24; Sadd 283,11 foil. (-o -arp tattika); - see also
ettaka, kittaka, tavataka, yattaka.
tattaka 2 , n. [S. taptaka], a frying-pan; a crucible; Ps V
54,14 (ukkamukhe pakkhipeyya ti ailgare viyühitva
ailgaramatthake va !hapeyya -e va pakkhipeyya; t Mp II
364,27: müsaya va pakkhipeyya).
tattha, adv. [tat + thi], Abh 1156 (tattha tatra tahirp
taharp); Sadd 681 ,1o (sattamiya tra tha sabbanamato ...
tatra tattha); l. there, in that place; Vin III 11,35
(Kalandakagamo namo hoti tattha Sudinno nama
Ka1andakaputto se!!hiputto hoti); 41,9 foll. (ay asma pana
Dhaniyo kumbhakaraputto tatth' eva vassarp vasi tattha
hemantarp tattha gimharp); DI 17,21 (sarpvagamane 1oke
yebhuyyena satta abhassarasarpvaganika honti, te tattha
honti manomaya pltibhakkha ... ); 84,14 (udakarahado
accho ... tattha cakkhuma puriso tire !hito); MI 305,30
(te ... nirayarp upapajjanti te tattha dukkha tippa kaWka
vedana vediyanti); SI 124,7* (a1addha tattha assadarp);
A V 269,17 foll. (so .. . nirayarp upapajjati, yo
nerayikanarp sattanarp aharo tena so tattha yapeti tena so
tattha tighati); Khp 7:4 (te ca tattha samagantva ñatipeta
samagata); Dhp 58 (padumarp tattha jayetha); Pv 10:15
(tatthaharp digham addhanarp dukkharp vedissa
vedanarp); Ja I 109,15* (akilasuno VaiJ.!JUpathe khai).anta
udailgai).e tattha paparp avindurp; 109,21': tattha ti
tasmirp val).l).Upathe); II 154,12 (kacchapo pana
dubbalatta tatth' eva nipajji); Mhv 15:40 (attharapesi
tatth' eva raja attharaiJ.arp vararp); - 2. there, to that
place; Vin III 148,19 (so bhikkhu tattha gantva); SI
217,4* (Suvira tattha gacchahi marp ca tatth' eva
papaya); Sn 696 (gantvana tattha); Pv 21:16 (tattha
yacanaka yanti nanagotta VaiJ.ibbaka; Pv-a 120,24:
tasmirp mama avesane); Ja II 159,11 (kirp te tattha gantva
phalapha1arp khaditurp na vagan ti); VI 368,2 (gacchatha
narp tatth' eva netha ti);- 3. as loe. ofta(d): in that; in
regard to that; in that case; on that occasion; V in III
9,27 (tathagato va tattha kalarp janissati; Sp 191,25 foll.:
tattha ti sikkhapadapaññattiyacanapekkharp bhumma-
vacanarp ... tattha tassa sikkhapadapaññattiya tathagato
yeva kalarpjanisssati ti); 186,2o (ayarp tattha samici); DI
26,25 (te marp tattha samanuyuñjeyyurp; Sv 117,15: te
samal).abrahmaiJ.a marp tesu kusalakusaleu); 56,3o (tattha
natthi hanta va ghateta va; Sv 167,20: te su jivasattamesu
kayesu); 174,16 (yavata Kassapa ariyarp paramarp si!arp
naharp tattha attano samasamarp samanupassami kuto
bhiyyo; Sv 359,9: tattha sile pi paramasile pi); MI 300,3
(yo .. . pañcas' upadanakkhandhesu chandarago tarp
280 tattha
tattha upadanan ti); 415,1 (rañño nago ... purimehi pi
padehi kammarp karoti . . . nailgughena pi kammarp
karoti rakkhat' eva sol).<;latp, tattha hattharohassa evarp
hoti ... ; Ps III 128,5: tasmirp tassa hatthino karaiJ.e); SI
133,14* (tattha cittarp paiJ.idhehi); A I 233,11 (yani ca kho
tani sikkhapadani adibrahmacariyakani . . . tattha
dhuvas!lo ca hoti); Dhp 249 (dadanti ve
yathasaddharp . . . tattha yo mailku bhavati paresarp
panabhojane ... ; Dhp-a III 359,13: tattha ti tasmirp
parassa dane); It 2,2 (etarp attharp bhagava avoca tatth'
etarp iti vuccati; It-a I 44,23: tattha ti tasmirp sutte);
Sn 797 (tad eva so tattha samuggahaya; Nidd I 105,s:
tattha ti sakaya di!!hiya sakaya khantiya ... ); 940 (tattha
sikkhanugiyanti); Vv 24:12 (tattha cittarp pai).idhaya
upapannamhi nandanarp; Vv-a 116,6: tattha ti
tavatirpsabhavane); Thi 322 (tattha viññatasaddhammo
pabbajjarp samarocayi; Thi-a 220,9: tattha ti tassarp
catusaccadhammadesanayarp); 397 (tassa ca viramasi
tavade raga tattha khamapayi ca narp; Thi-a 24!,2foll.:
tattha ti akkhimhi tassarp va theriyarp, atha va tattha ti
tasmirp yeva !hane); Ja II 185,9* (dve dve gahapatayo
gehe eko tattha amassuko; !8S,22·: tesu dvisu
gharasamikesu eko ti matugamarp sandhaya vadati
tattha); III 165,1o* (yatha gato tatha gato tattha ka
paridevana; 165,19': tasmirp tassa ito gamane); IV 396,27*
(tattha ka nandi ka khi<;l<;la; 397,21': tattha ti tasmirp evarp
sussamane jivi te ... ); Nidd 1 395,10 (yarp tattha sa!harp
sa!hata sá!heyyarp; Nidd-a 1 420,zo: yarp tasmirp
pugga1e); Ap 57,17 (pabbajitvana tvarp tattha;
cf Ap-a 316,23 foll.: tasmirp Gotamassa bhagavato sasane
tvarp pabbajitva); Bv 2:147 (tattha advejjhamanaso
sambodhil)l papul).issasi; B v-a 110,24: tatthá ti
saccaparamiyal)l); 3:24 (tatth' appamatto viharanto;
Bv-a 139,3s: tatthá ti tassa bhagavato sasane); Vibh l,s
(tattha katamo rüpakkhandho; Vibh-a 3,23: tatthá ti tesu
pañcasu khandhesu); Mhv 27:6 (sOVai).l).apa!!atp
laddhana 1ekharp tattha avacayi); Sadd 2,5 (tattha dhatü ti
ken' a!!hena dhátu); - 3. as correlative to yattha:
Vin III 186,17 (cil).l).amilnatto bhikkhu yattha siya
visatigal).O bhikkhusailgho tattha so bhikkhu
abbhetabbo); DI 124,2joll. (yattha silarp tattha paññá
yattha pañña tattha sllal)l); SI 7,14* (bahü hi tattha
sambadha yattha balo visidatl ti); 133,21 * (agati yattha
Marassa tattha me nirato mano; Spk 1 193,5: tatthá ti
tasmirp nibbane); A 1 134,21 (yatth' assa attabhavo
nibbattati tattha tarp kammarp vipaccati); Nidd 1 25,17
(yattha patighitarp viññ~al)l virü]harp atthi tattha
namarüpassavakkanti); - 4. repeated: in that and that
place, here and there; on this and that; D I 24,27 (tattha
tattha pañharp pugha samana vacavikkheparp apajjanti);
S 1 15,11* (atha aggi divarattirp tattha tattha pabhasati);
A I 125,26 (paripürarp va silakkhandharp tattha tattha
paññaya anuggahessami; Mp II 197,12: tasmirp tasmirp
!hane); Dhp 303 (yarp yal)l padesarp bhajati tattha tatth'
eva püjito); lt 115,9* (vimuttiya phassaye tattha tattha;
It-a II 172,33: tasmirp tasmirp maggaphaladigamanaka1e
vimuttirp nibbanarp phuseyya); Th p.! ,7* (tattha tattha
vipassitva; Th-a 18,3foll.; tattha tattha ti tesu tesu
araññarukkhamülapabbatadisu vivittasenásanesu, tattha
tattha ti va tasmirp tasmirp udanadika1e); Pa!is 1
tatra
172,2o foll. (yattha yattha ak.aiJ.khati tattha tattha
vasippatto hoti); Pv-a 2,14 (satthari tattha tattha
Rajagahadisu viharante); 77,28 (Ya~Tl pan' ettha atthato
avibhattam tattha tattha vuttam eva); Mhv 30:78; -
0
-ja, mfn .. [tattha + ja2], born there; Ap 186,2o; -
0
-jataka, mfn. [tattha + jataka2], growing there; having
its origin there; V in III 48,1 (-aq1 kaghaq1 va lataq1 va
chindati); V 150,26 (-a~Tl adhikaranaq1 ukkoteti;
Sp 1354,26: yasmiq1 vihiire ... adhikaral).aql uppannaq1
hoti tasmiq1 yeva vihare . . . vüpasamenti idaq1 -aq1
adhikaral).aql niima); neg. atatthajataka, mfn.,
Kk:h 2 251,12 (atatthajatakata);- 0 -parinibbayi(n), mfn.,
who realises nibbiina there, in that state; D I 156,20
(bhikkhu pañcanna~Tl orambhagiyanaq1 saq1yojananaq1
parikkhaya opapatiko hoti -i anavattidhammo tasma
loka; Sv 313,12: tasmiq1 uparibhave yeva
parinibbiinadhammo); MI 226,19 (te bhikkhü ... -ino);
466,2o (bhikkhuni ... -in!); Pet 135,16 (ariyasavako hoti
anagam1 -I anavattidhammo tasma loka);
0
-vattaka, m(jn)., staying or rolling about there (one of
the five kinds of gluttons); As 404,2ofoll. (aharahatthako
alaq1satako -o . . . imesaq1 pañcannaq1 brahmal).anaql
bhojana~Tl na phasuviharo nama . . . -o nama urthatuql
asakkonto tatth' eva parivartati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tatravagako ... -o ... vartati; = Nidd-a I 345,13fol/.: eds
tatravagako);- see also kattha, tatra, yattha.
tatra, adv. [ts], Abh 1156 (tattha tatra tahiq1 taha~Tl);
Sadd 681,10 (sattamiya tra tha sabbanamato . . . tatra
tattha); l. there; in that place; to that place; V in III 8,30
(tatra sudaq1 Sariputta bhiq1sanakassa vanasal).qassa
bhiq1sanakatasmiq1 hoti; Sp 189,8foll.: tatra ti
purimavacanapekkha~Tl . . . atha va tatra ti sami-atthe
bhumma~Tl); 15,17 (ayasma Sudinno ... yena Vesa!I tad
avasari, tatra sudaq1 ayasma Sudinno Vesaliyaq1 viharati
Mahavane kutagarasalayaq1); 52,7 (tatra pavisitva
rajaggha~Tl bhal).qaq1 ... theyyacitto amasati); 81,38 (tatra
!hito); DI 1,10 (tatra suda~Tl Suppiyo paribbajako
anekapariyayena buddhassa aval).l).a~Tl bhasati; Sv 36,14:
tatra ti tasmiq1 addhanamagge tesu va dvisu janesu); MI
1,5 (eka~Tl samayaq1 bhagava Ukkaghayaq1 viharati
Subhagavane salarajamüle, tatra kho bhagava bhikkhu
amantesi bhikkhavo ti; PsI 13,14fol/.: tatra ti
desakiilaparidipanaq1, ta~Tl hi Ya~Tl samaya~Tl viharati tatra
samaye yasmiq1 ca salarajamüle viharati tatra
sa1arajamüle ti dipeti); 278,24 (sakamha pi gama amuq1
giimaq1 agañchiq1 tatra eva~Tl arthasiql evaq1 nisidiq1);
III 163,17 foil. (sace bhikkhave balo sabhaya~Tl va nisinno
hoti . . . tatra ce jano tajja~Tl tassiiruppaq1 katha~Tl
manteti ... tatra bhikkhave ba1assa evaq1 hoti ... ; Ps IV
210,18joll.: tatra ce ti yatra nisinno tassaq1 parisatiq1 ...
tatra ti taya kathaya kacchamanaya); Ja I 360,1o
(bhagava . . . agamasi yeva, tatra sudaq1 bhagavati ...
aññatarasmiq1 vanasal).qe viharante); III 64,15
(bodhisatto . . . paccantagamakaq1 agamasi, tatra naq1
manussa disva ... );IV 221,3 (ehi gamavasaq1 gacchama,
tatra hi rüpadayo kamagul).a su1abha ti); VI 66,10* (tatra
ca so usukaro; 66,13·: tatra ti tasmiq1 ca koghake); Nidd I
353,13 (tatra umi na jayati !}lito hoti samuddo ti);
Vism 379,15 (maccho ... Biiriil).asititthalTl agamasi, tatra
ta~Tl macchabandho gahetva ... ); Mhv 37,19 (tatragata~Tl
281 tatra
taq1 sutviina sahaya~Tl); - 2. as loe. of ta(d): in that; in
those; in regard to that; in that case; on that occasion;
V in III 24,9 (bhikkhü ti bhikkhako ti bhikkhu ... tatra
yvaya~Tl bhikkhu samaggena saiJ.ghena ... upasampanno
ayaq1 imasmiq1 atthe adhippeto bhikkhu ti; Sp 243,19:
tatra ti tesu bhikkhako ti adina nayena vuttesu
bhikkhüsu); DI 3,1 (mamaq1 va bhikkhave pare
aval).l).aql bhaseyyuq1 . . . tatra tumhehi . . . na cetaso
anabhiraddhi karal).Iya; Sv 51,31: tatra ti ye aval).l).aql
vadanti tesu); 117,29 (ahaq1 ce va kho pana samal).aql
Gotamaq1 pañhaq1 puccheyyaq1 tatra ce maq1 samal).O
Gotamo evaq1 vadeyya ... ); 223,11 (evaq1 ca kho eso
bhikkhu pañho pucchitabbo . . . tatra veyyak.aral).aql
bhavati); M I 13,6 (tatr' ekassa bhikkhuno evaq1 assa ... ;
Ps 1 94,3o: tesu dvisu ekassa); 442,31 (tatra Bhadda1i
bhikkhunaq1 evaq1 hoti ... ); S II 85,3 (maha
aggikkhandho ja1eyya, tatra puriso ka1ena kiila~Tl
sukkhiini e' eva til).iini pakkhipeyya; Spk II 81,31: tatra ti
tasmiq1 aggikkhandhe); A 1 130,19 (kumbho nikkujjo
tatra udakaq1 asittaq1 vivartati); V 353,3o (yaq1 p' ida~Tl
dirthaq1 sutaq1 . . . tatra pi na saññi assa); Dhp 375
(tatrayaq1 adi bhavati idha paññassa bhikkhuno); Sn 595
(tevijjanaq1 yad akkhataq1 tatra keva1ino smase); Pv 30:8
(pujaq1 akasi janata u!ara~Tl tatr' assa cittass' ahu
aññathatta~Tl; Pv-a 200,13: tatra ti tassaq1 pujaya~Tl);
Mi1106,7 (tatra mahiiraja ... ); Vism 51,15 (yaq1 pana
vuttaq1 . . . kiq1 vodiinan ti tatra vadama ...
akhal).qadibhavo vodanaq1); 150,4 (tatra imasmiq1 atthe
jhanaq1 pathavikasil).an ti veditabba~Tl); 418,33 (tatra
sudaq1 itthi purisaq1 puriso ca itthiq1 ative1a1Tl
upanijjhayati); Pv-a 19,22 (ida~Tl sattha . . . sambahu1e
pete iirabbha kathesi, tatrayaq1 vittharakatha); Sadd 15,15
(tatra thera iti avibhattiko niddeso); - 3. repeated: in
that and that place, he re and there; on this and that; M I
8,24 (yo me ayaq1 atta . . . tatra tatra ka1yiil).apapakiina1Tl
kammanaq1 vipak.aq1 patisaq1vedeti) f. Vibh 382,28
(Vibh-a 509,8: tattha tatra tatra ti tesu tesu
yonigatithitinivasanikayesu iirammal).eSU va); MI 127,12
(so tatra tatra khal).eyya tatra tatra vikireyya ... ; Ps II
100,21joll.: tasmiq1 tasmiq1 thane); A III 426,29 (chahi
bhikkhave dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu abhabbo
tatra tatr' eva sakkhibhabbataq1 papul).ituql sati sati
ayatane; Mp III 411 ,6: tatra tatra ti tasmiq1 tasmiq1
visese); Ja IV 136,25 (tatra tatra upayapannaya
samannagato; or cpd); Nidd I 387,16 (so tatra tatra sajjati
tatra tatra gal).hati tatra tatra bajjhati; Nidd-a I 419,7: tesu
tesu arammal).esu 1aggati); Vism 30,1 (1addhaiT11addhalTl
bhikkhaq1 tatra tatra ku1adiirakiinaql datva); 261,25 (yatra
yatra . . . gal).qapi!akadayo va uppajjanti tatra tatra
[pubbo) tighati); - 0
'-Üpagamaniya, mfn., to be
reached for that; ? Sv 104 7,14 ([ vimaq1saya] tatrüpayaya
ti -a, eds so) = Mp V 6,11 (Be, Se -aya; Ce, Ee tatra
upagamaniyaya);- 0 '-íipapattika, mfn., taking rebirth
there; Mp III 149,!; - 0
'-íipayaññu, mfn. [me for
tatrupaya + -ññu], knowing the appropriate means for
that; Sn 321 (tatrüpayaññü kusalo mutima; Pj II
330,24joll.: tassa navaya aharal).apasiiral).adi-
upayaJananena maggapatipadanena upayaññu);
0
'-upaya, mfn., being the appropriate means for that;
Vin 1 71,3 (tattha dakkho hoti ana1aso -aya vimaq1saya
 tatva
samannagato alal)l katul)l; Sp 992,23: -aya ti tesu
kammesu upayabhütaya) f- A V 90,22; Vibh 326,11
(sabba pi -a pañña upayakosallal)l); - 0 -ttha, mfn.,
being there; belonging to that place; V in I 332,8 (te tassa
tajjaniyakammal)l karonti adhammena vagga, -o sailgho
vivadati ... ); Sp 1046,7 (-o bhikkhu hatthapasal)l
anetabbo ); Mhv 1:41 (raja -o Dughagamal).I);
Sadd 479,1R ( ... ~hiinal)l ~hito tatragho tighal)l ... ); -
0
-tfhaka, mfn., staying there; fixed, permanent;
Vism 124,3 (sal)lharimal)l va -al)l va [kasil).al)l]
katabbal)l); Sv 207,1 (navaparikkharikassa pana seyyal)l
pavisantassa -al)l paccattharal).al)l va kuñcika va vagati,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee --paccattharal).al)l);
0
-tatrabhinanda, mf( -!)n., giving delight he re and
there;? Pa~is-a 158,17 CO-tatrabhinandini ti ... -I ti pi
pa~ho tatra tatra abhinandayati ti attho );
0
-tatrabhinandana, n., -a,f, pleasure in this and that;
delight here and there; MI 294,19 (sattanal)l
tal).hasal)lyojananal)l -a eval)l ayatil)l
punabbhavabhinibbatti hoti ti; Ps 11 347,27: -a ti
rüpabhinandana saddabhinandana ti eval)l tahil)l tahüp
abhinandana, karal).avacane e' etal)l paccattal)l, -aya
punabbhavabhinibbatti hoti ti attho );
0
-tatrabhinandi(n), mfn., finding pleasure in this and
that; taking delight here and there; V in I 10,32 (idal)l kho
pana bhikkhave dukkhasamudayal)l ariyasaccal)l yayal)l
tal).ha ... -in!) f- Pa~is I 39,33 (Pa~is-a 158,14[oll.: yatra
yatra attabhavo nibbattati tatra tatra abhinandini
rüpadisu va arammal).esu -in! . . . o -tatrabhinandi ti pi
pa!ho tatra tatra abhinandayati ti attho) f- N ett 72,22;
M III 287,3o (tal).ha e' assa ... -I sa e' assa pava¡;l¡;lhati);
0
- -vatfaka, m(jn)., staying or rolling about there (one
of the five kinds of gluttons); Sv 780,27 (in cpd:
aharahatthakatatrava!!aka-); Nidd-a I 345,13 foil.
(aharahatthako a1al)lsa~ako -o . . . imesal)l pañcannal)l
brahmal).iinal)l bhojanal)l na phasuviharo nama . . . -o
nama u~~atul)l asakkonto tatr' eva parivagati; Ee tatr'
eva) =As 404,2ofoll. (Be, Ce, Se tatthavagako; E e -o ...
tatthavagako ... va!~ati);- se e also kutra, tattha, yatra.
tatva, n., see sv tatta 1.
tatha, mfr¡. and n. [cf tatha; perhaps extracted from
tathata, tathatta], l. (mfn.) true, real; DI 190,9 (samal).o
Gotamo bhütal)l tacchal)l -al)l pa~ipadal)l paññapeti);
Sn 1115 (etal)l ñiil).al)l -al)l); JaiV 164,15' (idam eva
seghal)l -al)l saccan ti); Nidd 1 76,8 (idal)l saccal)l
tacchal)l -al)l bhütal)l yathaval)l aviparitan ti; Nidd-a 1
205,16: -an ti viparil).iimarahital)l); 287,4 (vado katamo
sacco taccho -o bhüto ... ); Cp 1:8:5 (-al)l nu vitathal)l
n' etal)l handa vlmal)lsayami tal)l; Cp-a 65,2: saccal)l nu
kho udahu asaccan ti attho); Mi1203,22 (yal)l maya
bhal).ital)l tal)l sabbal)l -al)l udahu vitathan ti); Sv 65,21
(-o avitatho anaññatho ); - 2. (n.) truth; D III 171 ,12*
(bhütena tacchena -ena tosayi); S V 430,22foll. (cattar'
imani bhikkhave -ani avitathani anaññathani); Sv 65,1R
( -iinal)l abhisambuddhatta tathagato ti vuccati); -
tathato, truly; as the truth; Ja IV 73,12 (idal)l mailga1an ti
-ato na jiinil)lSU, Be, Se so; Ce, E e tatvato ); 201,10 (-ato
ñatva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tatvato); Sv 72,21 (atathal)l
vatthul)l -ato paral)l viññapetukamassa); Ps 11 113,s
(thetato ti tathato ); Ap-a 420,21 (tal)l -ato ñatva); -
282 tatha
0
-ta,f, 0 -tta, n., see sv tatha; - 0 -dassi(n), tatha-
dassi(n), mfn., seeing what is really so; Sv 65,29 foil.
(kathal)l --taya tathagato) Ps 1 49,29foll. f-
Bv-a 16,23foll.; It-a TI 189,28 (tathadassibhavato);
Bv-a 16,31* (tathakarena yo dhamme janati anupassati -I
ti sambuddho tasma vutto tathagato);- 0 -dhamma, m.
[tatha + dhamma1], a truth; Sv 65,13foll. (kathal)l -e
yathavato abhisambuddho ti tathagato, -a nama cattari
ariyasaccani); It-a II 37,6 (yatha ca te -e dukkhadayo
avipañtato abbhaññil)lSU, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tatha
dhamme ); Th-a II 117,26 (yatha ca rüparüpadhammanal)l
tatha1akkhal).al)l -e ca ariyasaccani agata adhigata
avabuddha tatha ime pi ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tathadhamme); 0
-lakkhal}a, n., the true
distinguishing mark, the true characteristic; ? Sp 146,R
(phalal)l pana nirodhassa -al)l upanijjhayati ti
lakkhal).üpanijjhanan ti vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tatha-)
= Nidd-a I 130,17 f-As 167,17 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tattha
lakkhal).aip); Sv 65,1o (nibbanassa pariyosanalakkhal).aip
tathal)l avitathal)l, eva1p -al)l ñal).agatiya agato . . . ti
tathagato); It-a 11 37,5 (yatha va te khandhadinal)l -al)l
yathavato pa!ivijjhil)lsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tatha-); -
0
-Vadi(n). tathavadi(n) 1, mfn., speaking what is so,
speaking the truth; Kv 65,4 (nanu bhagava saccavadi
ka1avadi bhütavadi -I avitathavadi anaññathavadi ti);
Sv 66,13 (kathal)l --taya tathagato) = Ps 1 50,13foll. (Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee tathavaditaya) f- Bv-a 17,1foll. (Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee tathavaditaya); Bv-a 17,12* (tathavadi jino yasma
tathadhammappakasako, Be, Se so; Ce, E e tathavadi ...
tathadhamma-); - atatha, mfn., not true; D II 64,14
(-al)l va pana santal)l tathattaya upakappessami ti); M II
256,14 (sammanibbanadhimutto 'ham asml ti eval)lmani
assa -al)l samanal)l, Be so; Ce eval)lmiini assa -am sa
manal)l; Ee eval)lmani atthal)l samanal)l; Se evamadi
assa atthal)l samanal)l); Sv 72,21 (-al)l vatthul)l tathato
paral)l viññapetukamassa); V v-a 240,28 (vitathan ti -al)l
musa ti attho);- see also yathatathal)l.
tatha-r-iva, see sv tatha.
tatha, adv. [ts], Abh 1142; Sadd 805,13foll. (sabbanamehi
thatattha pakaravacane: so pakaro tatha, tal)l pakiiral)l
tatha, tena pakarena tatha); l. so, thus; in that way; like
that (frequently followed by eva); Vin III 36,25 (so
bhikkhu tatha akasi); IV 135,26 (eval)l ca pana so
bhikkhu bhikkhühi vuccamano tath' eva paggal).heyya);
D 1 88,22foll. (yadi va tal)l bhavantal)l Gotamal)l tatha
santal)l yeva saddo abbhuggato yadi va no tatha); MI
520,7 (satthuno anussavasaccassa sussutal)l pi hoti
dussutal)l pi hoti tatha pi hoti aññatha pi hoti); S II 100,17
(ambho kathal)l so puriso ti tath' eva deva jivati ti); A II
22,12 (tayidal)l bho Gotama tath' eva); 24,5 (sabbal)l taip
tath' eva hoti no aññatha tasma tathagato ti vuccati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr tatth' eva); Sn 375 (addha hi bhagava
tath' eva etaip); 789 (dighi hi nal)l pava tatha vadana1p);
908 (janami passami tath' eva etaip; Nidd 1 323,14foll.:
etal)l tatha1p tacchaip bhütal)l ... ); Th 118 (rüpam aññam
iva tath' eva santal)l); 374 (atthal)l ca ñatvana tatha
karoti); Ja 11 156,7 (taip rajanal)l tatha paridevamanal)l
disva); III 156,19' (tath' eva tighati sisal)l; 156,23: yatha
pubbe ~hital)l tath' eva tighati); IV 234,25 (raja pan' assa
matabhaval)l ajananto tatha nisinno va ahosi); Pa!is TI
tatha
227,14 (so bahufl1 ce pi adisati tath' eva tafl1 hoti no
aññatha); Ap 83,9 (ye keci padapa sabbe mahiya te
virühare buddhimanto tatha satta rühanti jinasasane);
Mil 123,7 (ev~ etafl1 tatha samparicchaml ti); Pj II
602,11 (tena sabbo pi tatha vuttappakaro 1oko veditabbo);
.\1hv 20:41 (dlpafl1 tu sakalafl1 pana anubhavena
devanaiil tathevalaitkatafl1 ahu); - 2. so also; in the
same way; DI 251,1 (so mettasahagatena cetasa ekafl1
disafl1 pharitva viharati tatha dutiyafl1 tatha tatiy~ tatha
catutthafl1); II 168,1* (manussaseqhehi tath' eva püjito);
Dhp 220 (tath' eva katapuññ~ pi asma loka parafl1
gatafl1 puññani parigal).hanti); It 23,10* Givha kayo tatha
mano); Sn 33 (nandati puttehi puttima ... gomiko gohi
tath' eva nandati); 297 (annada balada e' eta Val).l).ada
sukhada tatha); Vv 64:17 (hatthesu padesu tath' e va
sise); Ja I 137,27 (so caturasltivassasahassani kumara-
k!Jafl1 tatha oparajjafl1 tatha maharajjafl1 katva);
IV 373,29 (paccekabuddho tassa dhammafl1 desetva
sakaqhanam eva gato tatha tapaso); Ap 2,8 (mal).imaya
lohitanka masaragallamaya tatha); Vism 571,11
1kammam eva bhavo kammabhavo tatha uppatti yeva
bhavo uppattibhavo); Sp 994,21 (tassa clvarafl1
pariyesitabbafl1 pattafl1 pi tath' eva); Mp IV 67,21 (api ca
d!ghanikaye sangltisuttavai).J).anayafl1 pi vittharito yeva
tatha majjhimanikaye samagamasuttaval).l).anayam pi ti);
~1hv 23:98 (tassa yodhasatassapi tath' eva pariyesitufl1);
- 3. yes, so be it; Pv 20:6 (tatha ti vatva agamasi tattha
Pv-a 109,13: tatha ti vatva ti sadhü ti vatva) t- 36:41 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se tatha hi); - 4. (as correlative to yathii):
Sadd 896,3o (yatha tatha yath' eva tath' eva ...
paribhagatthe); (i) in that way; in such a manner ... that;
Vin III 12,30 (so 'h~ bhante tatha karissami yatha m~
matapitaro anujanissanti agarasma anagar1y~
pabbajjaya ti); S I 11,29 (sadhu me bhante bhagava tatha
bhasatu yathiih~ ... atth~ janeyyan ti); 114,15 (tatha
nu tvaiil papima akasi yathiihafl1 pil).~aiil na 1abheyyan
ti 1: 186,4* (tatha maccu karissami na me maggafl1 pi
dakkhasi); Dhp 282 (tath' attanaiil niveseyya yatha bhürl
pava~~hati); Ud 25,22 (handa may~ avuso tatha
vihiirafl1 kappema yatha no viharatafl1 bhagava attamano
assa ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atthakamo assa ti); Pv 27:13
<tatha bhante parakkama yatha vatth~ 1abhamase); Ja I
227.21 (yatha ime et~ gharafl1 na pavisanti tatha maya
katufl1 vaqau ti); Vism 208,9 (bhagava hi tatha
purisadamme sareti yatha ekapallaitken' eva nisinna
aqha disa asajjamana dhavanti); - repeated: It 93,19
, tatha tatha bhikkhave bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yatha
yatha upaparikkhato bahiddhii e' assa vmnaJ).afl1
a\·ikkhittafl1 hoti; It-a 11 119,29: tatha tatha ti tena tena
pakarena); - (ii) as . . . so ... ; V in 11 290,8 (yath' eva
maya bhagavato sarnmukha sutafl1 sammukha
patiggahit~ tath' eviihafl1 dharessam! ti); III 109,23
yatha pure tatha paccha parajiko hoti asafl1vaso); DI
60.-1 (tena hi maharaja t~ yev' ettha paripucchissami,
yatha te khameyya tatha n~ vyakareyyasi); SI 114,10
· yatha dhotena pattena . . . brahmal).agiimafl1 pil).~aya
paúsi tatha dhotena pattena parikkami); Dhp 159
· aniinafl1 ce tatha kayira yathaññam anusasati); Sn 705
'yatha ahafl1 tatha ete yatha e te tatha ahafl1 attanafl1
upamaiil katva na haneyya na ghataye); Vv p. 43,12
283 tatha
(anantarafl1 caturavimanaiil yatha vatthadayikaviman~
tatha vittharetabbafl1); Pv 12:3 (yatha gato tatha gato
tattha ka paridevana); Th 497 (atta ca naiil yatha vedi
deva pi nafl1 tatha vidü); Ja 111 105,22' (yatha dhammo
tatha kare); Ap 92,14 (yathodayanto adicco vinodeti
tamafl1 sada tath' eva tvafl1 buddhasegha viddh~sesi
tamaiil sada); Vibh 393,34 (yatha so khattiyo niihafl1 tatha
khattiyo 'sml ti); Vism 243,6 (yatha pana vacasa tath'
eva manasa pi sajjhayo katabbo); Mp 111 225,2o
(tathagatabalanl ti yatha tehi gantabb~ tath' eva gatani
pavattani ñal).abalani); - repeated: DI 185,17 foll.
(yatha yatha kho Poqhapada nirodhafl1 phusati tatha
tatha 'h~ saññaggafl1 paññapemi); MI 32,2 (yatha
yatha ... ajlvikassa ... ce taso parivitakkitafl1 hoti tatha
tatha . . . yanakaraputto tassa nemiya . . . tafl1 ca dosafl1
tacchati; Ps I 151,31: tatha tatha ti ayafl1 pi kalatthe yeva,
tasmifl1 tasmifl1 kale ti vuttafl1 hoti); 171,27 (yatha yatha
kho ah~ bhikkhave upasaitkamifl1 tatha tatha
pañcavaggiya bhikkhü nasakkhifl1su sakaya katikaya
sal).rhiitufl1); SI 237,24 (yatha yatha kho bhikkhave deva
Tavatifl1sa ujjhayanti . . . tatha tatha so yakkho
abhirüpataro e 'eva hoti ... ); A I 249,9 (yatha yathay~
puriso kammaiil karoti tathii tatha tafl1 parisafl1vediyatl
ti); Ja III 205,8* (yatha yatha yattha labhetha atthafl1 tatha
tatha tattha parakkameyya); - yatha va tatha va,
however, in whatever way; Ja V 130,1 (yatha va tatha va
patesi);- tatha·r-iva, [tathii + eva; BHS id.], just so, in
the same way; Abh 1143; Dhatuk 65,3* (tayo paricca
tatha-r-iva phassapañcama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ttariva);
Sadd 618,12 (saramha parassa evasaddassa ekarassa
rikaro hoti pubbo ca saro rasso hoti na va: yatha-r-iva
vasudhatal~ ca sabbafl1 tatha-r-iva gul).ava supüjanlyo);
897,11 (tatha-r-iva bhagava ti); - tatha pi, and so; even
so; nevertheless; Ja II 442,19' (assa mahasamuddassa
sace pi nafl1 sakalo loko piveyya tathapi ito ettakafl1
nama udakafl1 pitan ti pariyanto na paññayati); VI 499,20'
(sace pi me piil).a piyataro so tatha pi naiil pabbajeml ti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee pal).ehi piyataro); Vism 135,34* (sace sa
nappavattati tatha pi na jahe yogafl1); Cp-a 85,18 (imafl1
Vessantaramaharajafl1 danena hetuna Sivayo raqhato
nlharanti pabbajenti, tatha pi puna evarüpafl1 diinafl1 deti
ayan ti); - tatha hi, for so; for thus (it has been said);
for instance; because; Vin III 69,26 (kifl1 nu kho Ananda
tanubhüto vi ya bhikkhusaitgho ti, tatha hi ... te sakena
kayena aqiyanti ... ); 162,12 (kissa m~ ayya nalapantl ti,
tatha hi pana tv~ bhagini amhe Dabbena Mallaputtena
viherhiyamane ajjhupekkhasl ti); D II 348,1 (tumhe khv
ettha bhal).e ummatta tumhe viceta tatha hi pana me
sükarabhattan ti); MI 225,12 (~ kissa hetu, tatha hi
so ... gopalako duppaññajatiko ... ); A V 41,9 (na ay~
ayasma tatha pajanati yatha pajanato lobho na hoti tatha
h 'imaiil ayasmantafl1 lobho abhibhuyya iriyati); !66,21
(nafl1 sabrahmacarl ... na püjenti, tafl1 kissa hetu, tatha hi
'ssa bhikkhave viññü sabrahmacarl ... ); Sn 504 (tv~
h' ettha janasi yathatatha idafl1 tatha hi te vidito esa
dhammo); Pv 50:2 (na anto paridissati tatha hi pakat~
papafl1 mama tuyhafl1 ca); J a 111 199 ,4' (n' e va tafl1 yacito
dajj~ tatha hi bhayatajjito; 199,14·: ah~ taya yacito na
dadeyy~ kifl1kiiral).a, tatha hi bhayatajjito ti); V 214,2o*
(nam~ idafl1 imissa ... katafl1 susadhu tatha hi mayh~
tatha
avalokayanti ummattaka!p Ummadanti akasi); 437,25
(tatha hi: atlte pana Bara~:tasiya!p ... ); Ap 28,16 (sabbe
miga uttasanti migarajassa gajjato tatha hi jatima eso
pasii taseti sabbada); Vism 143,22 (ubbega piti balavatl
hoti .. . tatha hi Pn~:t~:tavallikavasl Mahatissatthero ... );
Sp 228,29 (sasane kira yo yo upaddavo . . . uppajji
sabba!p ta!p Vajjiputtake nissaya tatha hi Devadatto pi
Vajjiputtake pakkhe labhitva sari.gha!p bhindi); Th-a I
26,23 (kutika ti pana matukucchi pi karajakayo pi ...
vuccati, tatha hi mataraJP kutika!p briisi ... ); Cp-a 247,Is
(tatha hi vutta!p ... ); Sadd 370,s; 902,2o (hi tatha hi ice
ete da)hikara~:tatthe vutta!p hi tatha hi vutta!p); -
o• -atta, mfn. [tatha + atta3 ?], being of such a
character; ? D III 176,II * (-o yadi bhavati tathavidho
idha disa ca patidisa ca vidisa ca; Sv 940,4: -o ti tatha-
sabhavo); SI 187,32* (dhammadaso ti tam ahu -a!p, Ce,
Se so; Be pahitattalp; Ee dhammarato ti)= Th 1221 (eds
so; Th-a III 191,34 foll.: ta!p tathabhava!p samma-
patipanna!p yathavato dhammadassi ti pa~:t¡;lita ahu); -
o• -úpama, mfn. [from tatha + upama], similar to that,
like that; MI 156,7 (seyyatha pi te bhikkhave pathama
migajata -e ahaJP ime pathame sama~:tabrahma~:te
vadami); Sn 229 (yath' indakhllo pathavi!p sito si ya ...
-a!p sappurisa!p vadami); Ja V 4,3* (yatha maha
varidharo ... -a!p ambapakka!p); Vl526,2I* (assattha!p
va pathe jata!p ... -a!p maharajalp ko me VessantaraJP
vidii); Pp 33,14 (seyyatha pi so potthako dubb~~:to -o
aya!p puggalo ); Vism 401 ,3o (-a!p eta!p patihariya!p); -
-a!p, adv., like that; in a similar way; Vin I 5,35* (sele
yatha pabbamuddhani ghito yatha pi passe janatalp
samantato -alp dhammamaya!p sumedha pasadam
aruyha samantacakkhu ... avekkhassu) = D II 39,!2* (cf
Sv 470,12: -an ti tappatibhagalp selapabbatiipama!p);
Vv 65:1 (yatha vanaJP Cittalatalp pabhasati .. . -a!p
tuyham ida!p vimanalp obhasayalp tighati); Th 1121
(-a!p citta ida!p karosi); - 0
-gata, see sv; -
0
-gataka, m(fn)., (one) who goes in that way, goes
accordingly; D I 222,3o (sace so samanta tlra!p passati
-o va hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tathapakkanto) = A III
368,29; - 0 (tatha)-tii,f. [or tatha + ta; S. tathata (and
tathata ? see L. Renou, 1975, p. 189); BHS also tathata],
the state of being so; the true state of things; S II 26,5
(ya tatra -a avitathata anaññathata idappaccayata ida!p
vuccati bhikkhave paticcasamuppado); Kv 583,26
(sabbadhammana!p -a asankhata ti); - 0 (tatha)-tta, n.
[and/or tatha + tta; S. tathatva; BHS also tathatva], the
being like that; such a state; the state of being so; the
true state of things; D II 57,12 (tesa!p tesa!p va hi
Ananda sattanaJP -aya jati nabhavissa; Sv 498,8: -aya ti
devagandhabbadibhavaya); III 120,3! (yo ca samadapeti
YaJP ca samadapeti yo ca samadapito -aya patipajjati
sabbe te bahu!p puñña!p pasavanti); MI 87,35 (paraJP va
-aya samadapessanti yathapatipanno kame parijanissati
ti); 301,36 (atha khv assa pub be va tatha cittalp bhavita!p
hoti ya!p ta!p -aya upanetl ti); S V 90,6 (maggo ca
pati1addho yo me bhavito bahu!Ikato tatha tatha
viharanta!p -aya upanessati yathahaJP khi~:ta jati vusita!p
brahmacariya!p napara!p itthattaya ti pajanissami);
Sn 520 (sama~:to tadi pavuccate -a); Mil255,5 (so ca
-aya patipajjeyya); Vism 149,! (purimacitta!p eka-
284 tatha
santatipari~:tamanayena -a!p upagacchamana!p); 512,26
(itara!p pana ariyasaccadvaya!p siya dukkha!p aniccato
na pana yassa pariññaya bhagavati brahmacariya!p
vussati -ena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tathatthena); Pj 11 483,8
(savaka!p moneyyapatipadaJP patipanna!p disva -alp
abhikari.khamano); Sadd 805,I9foll. (tathabhavo -a!p ...
-aya patipajjati ti ca adini nidassanani bhavanti tattha
-aya ti tathabhavaya ti attho);- 0 -dassi(n), mfn., see sv
tatha;- 0 -pavattika, mfn., proceeding so; It-a I 121,15
(-o ti tathagato; = Ud-a 133,8: tatha pavattito );
136,15 foil. (kathaJP -o ti tathagato .. . yatha ruci tatha
gata!p gati gamana!p kayavacicittappavatti etassa ti
tathagato; = Ud-a 152,19/oll.: tatha pavattito); -
0
-bhava, m., the state of being so; such a condition; Ja I
279,27 (bodhisatto tathabhava!p ñatva); Sadd 805,I9foll.;
-
0
-rüpa, mf(-a, -I)n., such a ... ; like this or that; of
such a kind; (i) following a defining phrase: V in II
249,10 (ye te dhamma adika1yiJ.I:ta ... -a me dhamma
bahussuta ... ); III 1,21 (sadhu kho pana -il.na!p arahata!p
dassanalp hoti ti); 191,29 (yo pana bhikkhu -e asane
matugamena saddhi!p ... nisajjalp kappeyya); IV l66,12
(yo pana bhikkhu ... vikale gama!p paviseyya aññatra -a
accayika kar~Iya pacittiyan ti); DI 4,27 (ya sa vaca
nela ... -iJP vacaJP bhasita ti); II 80,31 (yavakivaJP ca
bhikkhave bhikkhii ya 'yaJP ditthi ariya niyyanika
niyyati takkarassa sammadukkhakkhayaya -aya dighiya
dit!hisamaññagata viharissanti ... ); M III 132,3o (ya sa
vaca nela ... -ahí vacahi samudacarati); 169,29 (yani tani
nicakulani ... -e kule paccajayati da)idde ... ); A III
289,32 (ye te labha dhammika ... -ehi labhehi
appativibhattabhogl hoti ... ); 351,21 (yathariipena
Ananda silena Pura~:to samannagato ahosi -ena sllena
Isidatto sammannagato abhavissa); 391,II (ye te bhikkhii
araññaka . . . -esu bhante bhikkhiisu dil.na!p diyatl ti);
Dhp 105 Gita!p apajitam kay ira -assa jan tuno); Ja IV
105,8 (te talp suva~:t~:tariipaka!p sakalaJambudlpa!p
pariharapetva -alp itthi!p alabhanta); Mil 353,9 (-ena
acariyena kalyiJ.I:tamittena); Vism 136,23 (-esu thanesu
kamma!p katva); 707,13 (sattha oti~:t~:te vatthusmi!p
sikkhapadaJP va paññapeti -aya va aghuppattiya
dhamma!p deseti); Sv 546,3 (atha nesa!p rajja-
smsampatti!p disva thitabhikkhu -aya pi nama
sirisampattiya vinaso paññayissatl ti);- (ii)followed by
yathariipa, yatha or another relative pronoun: Vin I 16,!7
(yanniinaha!p -a!p iddhabhisari.khara!p abhi-
sankhareyya!p yatha set!hi gahapati idha nisinno idha
nisinna!p Yasa!p kulaputtalp na passeyya ti); DI 13,!3
(-a!p cetosamadhi!p phusati yatha samahite citte
anekavihita!p pubbenivasa!p anussarati); M I 324,9
(kiñcapi -iJP apattiJP apajjati yathariipaya apattiya
vutthil.na!p paññayati); III 80,8foll. (-o aya!p bhikkhave
bhikkhusari.gho -a 'yaJP bhikkhave parisa yatharupa
parisa ahuneyya ... ); S IV 374,17 (naddasa -a!p
sama~:ta'P va brahma~:taJP va ya!p raja Pasenadi Kosalo
payirupaseyya); AI 277,7 (natthi bhante
Kapilavatthusmi!p -o avasatho yatth' ajja bhagava
ekaratti!p vihareyya); Ja I 71,21 (tani pi kho ti~:tani -ena
sa~:tthanena s~thahi!psu yathariipaJP sukusalo pi
cittakaro va potthakaro va alikhitu!p pi samattho natthi):
-
0
-laddhika, mfn., holding such a theory; Ps III 144,s
tathagata
(therassa --ttii); Nidd-a I 202,24 (sattha yathaladdhiko
bhavati ... savaka pi -a honti); - 0 -vadi(n)\ mfn., see
sv tatha; - 0 -vadi(n)2 , mfn., speaking so, like that;
ViniV 137,4 (-ina Arighena bhikkhuna); DIII 135,18
(iti yathavadi tathakañ yathakari -1 tasma tathagato ti
vuccati); Sn 430 (t~ -ina'Il Mar~ bhagava etad
abravi); Th 1077 (paññavanta'Il -i'Il silesu susamahit~,
Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce tatha tadi'Il; Th-a III
141,26: i~~adisu tadibhavappattiya tadi'Il); Ja IV 470,6*
(t~ -ini'Il raja kumari'Il etad abravi); - 0
-vidha, mfn.
and m.f, of such a kind; (being) like that; such a person;
D III 155,13* (geham avasati ce -o aggata'Il vajati
kamabhogina'Il); S I 53,9• (yo silava ... -~ silavant~
vadanti); It 121 ,6* (satata'Il pahitatto ti ah u bhikkhu'Il
-~); Sn 818 (sutva pares~ nigghos~ mali.ku hoti
-o); 1113 (katha'Il neyyo -o); Vv 84:35 (kath~ nu
soceyya -o so laddha viman~ atu1~); Th 1030 (bahu-
ssut~ dhammadhara'Il . . . ta'Il bhajetha -a'Il); Ja V
268,10* (khare nimujjanti -~ nara'Il); VI 245,30* (na hi
agamo hoti -amha); Ud-a 151 ,3o foil. (kath~ -o ti
tathagato, yathavidha purimaka sammasambuddha aya'Il
pi bhagava -o ti); Pj II 344,26 (tani aññani ca -ani
cha<;l<;Ietva); Pa~is-a 216,4 (itaresu pana tisu silesu -o
bhedo n' atthi ti).
tathagata, m. [BHS id.; cf S. tathagata and PiiJi tadi(n);
cf Pkt tahagaya; possibly from tatha + gati, see
K.R. Norman, 1990a, p. 154], l. the designation of a
buddha, Abh 3 (dhammassami -o); 1099 (-o jine);
Sv 59,31foll. (aghahi karaJ_lehi bhagava -o, tatha agato ti
-o tatha gato ti -o tatha1akkhaJ.l~ agato -o
tathadhamme yathavato abhisambuddho ti -o
tathadassitaya -o tathavaditaya -o tathakaritaya -o
abhibhavana~~ena -o) Ud-a 128,3 foll.
Bv-a 15,11foll.; Pj I 195,29foil. (yasma buddho yatha
1okahitatthaya ussukka'Il apannehi agantabba'Il tatha
agatato, yatha ca etehi gantabb~ tatha gatato yatha ca
etehi ajanitabba'Il tatha ajananato yatha ca janitabb~
tatha jananato ya'Il ca tath' eva hoti tassa gadanato -o ti
vuccati); Sadd 77,8 (visesato pana -o yeva abhibhü);
622,4 (to dassa: -o gato sugato kusito); 918,18 ([pada'Il]
bavhadhippayika'Il pana puthujjano bhagava -o ice adi);
- used (i) by Gotama (a) of buddhas generaily,
including himself Vin I 9,12 (ma bhikkhave -~ namena
ca avusovadena ca samudacaratha); III 2,12 (naha'Il t~
brahma!)a passami sadevake loke . . . y~ ah~
abhivadeyya'Il ... y~ hi brahmaJ_la -o abhivadeyya ...
muddha pi tassa vipateyya ti); 12,28 (na kho Sudinna -a
ananuññata'Il matapitühi putt~ pabbajenti ti); DI 62,24
(idha maharaja -o loke uppajjati arah~
sammasambuddho vijjacaraJ_lasampanno sugato lokavidü
anuttaro purisadammasarathi sattha devamanussan~
buddho bhagava); MI 69,31foil. (dasa kho pan' imani
Sariputta -assa o -balani yehi balehi samannagato -o
asabh~ ~an~ pa~ijanati); S II 25,18foll. (uppada va
-an~ anuppada va -an~ ~hita va sa dhatu
dhammaghitata dhammaniyamata idappaccayata);
V 42,1 (yavata bhikkhave satta . . . -o tes~ aggam
akkhayati araha'Il sammasambuddho); A I 77,13 (-o ca
arah~ sammasambuddho raja ca cakkavatti ime kho
bhikkhave dve thüparaha ti); - (b) specifically of
285 tathagata
himself: Vin I 80,2o (ki'Il nu kho Ananda -o oga!)ena
bhikkhusali.ghena Dakkhi!)agiri'Il carika'Il pakkanto ti);
279,1 (bhagava ayasmanta'Il Ananda'Il amantesi
dosabhisanno kho Ananda -assa kayo icchati -o
virecan~ patun ti); III 9,27 (agamehi tva'Il Sariputta -o
va tattha kal~ janissati); D I 3,32 (appamattaka'Il kho
pan' eta'Il bhikkhave oramattaka'Il silamattaka'Il yena
puthujjano -assa va!)I)a'Il vadamano vadeyya);
II 106,18foll. (na cir~ -assa parinibbana'Il bhavissati
ito ti!)!)~ masan~ accayena -o parinibbayissati ti);
Sn 557 (maya pavattita'Il ... dhammacakk~ anuttar~
Sariputto anuvatteti anujato -a'Il);- (ii) by others (a) of
buddhas generally, including Gotama: Vin II 128,30
(atha kho ayasma Anando Bodhi'Il rajakumar~ etad
avoca sa'Ilharantu rajakumara dussani na bhagava
celapattika'Il akkamissati pacchima'Il janata'Il -o
anukampati ti); III 6,29 Gananta pi -a pucchanti jananta
pi na pucchanti); D II 139,19foil. (devata Ananda
ujjhayanti düra vat' amha agata -~ dassanaya, kadaci
karahaci -a loke uppajjanti arahanto sammasambuddha
ajja ca rattiya pacchimayame -assa parinibban~
bhavissati); 157,s• (brahma sahampati ima'Il gath~
abhasi ... etadiso satthaloke appa~ipuggalo -o balappatto
sambuddho parinibbuto) = S 1 158,28*; D II 265,1
(durupasali.kama kho tata Pañcasikha -a madisena);
271,12 (yada -a 1oke uppajjanti arahanto
sammasambuddha dibba kaya paripürenti hayanti
asurakaya ti); MI 111,14 (so h' avuso bhagava jan~
janati passa'Il passati cakkhubhüto ñill)abhüto
dhammabhüto brahmabhüto vatta pavatta atthassa
ninneta amatassa data dhammassami -o); S III
116,11 foil. (te aññatitthiya paribbajaka ayasmanta'Il
Anuradh~ etad avocu'Il yo so avuso Anuradha -o
uttamapuriso paramapuriso paramapattipatto ta'Il -o
imesu catüsu ~hanesu paññapayamano paññapeti hoti -o
par~ marana ti va na hoti -o para'Il maraJ_la ti va ... ;
cf Spk li 312,29 foil.: tumhak~ sattha -o ta'Il satt~
-~);A 1 150,1* (passanti deva ca -a lokasmi'Il bal~
visam~ carant~); Vv 50:31 (bahunna'Il vata atthaya
uppajjanti -a); Ja III 494,28 (aho -an~
appicchasantughabhavo ti); Ap 162,11 (vandi'Il -a'Il);
Kv 228,33 (-o anuppannassa maggassa uppadeta
asañjatassa maggassa sañjaneta anakkhatassa maggassa
akkhata maggannu maggavidü maggakovido ti);
Mil139,11 (sabbe pi -a pa~isalliyitva sabbaññuta'Il
patta); 217,28 (pubbakan~ maharaja -an~
antaradhanena asati anusasake maggo antaradhayi);
237,sfoll. (yadi bhante Nagasena sabbes~ pi -an~
eka desana eka katha eka sikkha ekanusatthi kena
karaJ_lena dve -a ekakkhaJ.le na uppajjanti); Vism 507,7
(sihasamanavuttino hi -a); Ud-a 290,26 (atite kira
anuppanne -e); Mhv 1:7 (Sumedh~ ca -~ ...
aradhetva mahaviro); - (b) of Gotama specifically:
Vin 1 5,16 (brahmuno sahampatissa ... etad ahosi nassati
vata bho loko . . . yatra hi nama -assa arahato
sammasambuddhassa appossukkataya citt~ namati no
dhammadesanaya ti); 40,28* (ye dhamma hetupabhava
tes~ hetu'Il -o aha tes~ ca yo nirodho ev~vadi
mahasamaJ_lo); D li 8,3foll. (acchariy~ avuso abbhuta'Il
avuso -assa mahiddhikata mahanubhavata yatra hi nama
tathiya
-o ame buddhe parinibbute ... jatito pi anusarissati);
135,6* (ogahi sattha suki1antarüpo -o appa~imo va loke);
135,21 (tassa te avuso Cunda alabha ... yassa te -o
pacchimarp. pil).<;iapatarp bhuñjitva parinibbuto ti);
137,2ofoll. (yamakasala sabbaphaliphulla honti
akalapupphehi, te -assa sañrarp okiranti ajjhokiranti
abhippakiranti -assa püjaya); 149,25 (ayasma Anando
Subhaddmp paribbajakarp etad avoca a1arp avuso
Subhadda ma -arp. vihe~esi, kilanto bhagava ti); M I
210,17 (Dlgho parajano yakkho bhagavantarp etad avoca
1abha bhante Vajjlnarp suladdhalabha bhante Vajjipajaya
yattha -o viharati); SI 158,2 (handa dani bhikkhave
amantayami vo appamadena sampadetha vayadhamma
sailkhara ti ayarp -assa pacchima vaca); A IV 337,13 (ko
paccayo yena appekada -arp dhammadesana patibhati
appekada na pa~ibhatl ti); Vv 50:17 (so marp mudühi
vacahi alapitva -o Rajjumale ti marp voca saral).arp
gaccha -arp.); Th 1205 (evam eva tuvarp Mara asajja
narp. -arp. sayarp <;lahissasi attanarp; cfTh-a III 179,28:
-arp aggikkhandhasadisarp ariyasavakarp.); Ja I 149,1
(ath' ekadivasarp -o pacchabhattarp pil).<;iapatapatikkanto
bhikkhiinarp ovadarp datva gandhakutirp pavisi); V 333,4
(Devadattena hi -arp jlvita voropeturp payojitesu
dhanuggahesu); Pa~is I 125,3 (-o yamakapa~ihlrarp karoti
asadharal).arp savakehi); Mil 95,22 (parinibbuto maharaja
bhagava na ca bhagava piijarp. sadiyati, bodhimiile yeva
-assa sadiyana pahlna kirp pana anupadisesaya
nibbanadhatuya parinibbutassa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
parinibbuto maharaja -o na ca -o püjarp ... ); 108,13 (-o
Janatl Devadatto pabbajitva sailgharp. bhindissati
sailgharp. bhinditva kapparp niraye paccissatl ti);
Mhv 2:33 (-o sakalagul).aggatarp gato); 2. a
designation of an arhat; MI 140,5 (evarp.vimuttacittarp
kho bhikkhave bhikkhurp sa-inda deva . . . anvesarp
nadhigacchanti idarpnissitarp. -assa viññal).an ti; Ps II
117,13 foil.: -assa ti ettha satto pi -o ti adhippeto
uttamapuggalo khil).asavo pi); Nidd I 64,2o (hoti -o
pararp mara!). a ... ; Nidd-a I 193,24: -o ti satto, araha ti
eke ); - 3. a creature, a sentient being; Abh 93 (pai).O
sañrabhütarp. va ... jan o 1oko -o); 1099 (-o ... satte );
D I 27,24 foil. (hoti -o pararp mara!). a na hoti -o pararp.
maral).a hoti ca na hoti ca -o pararp maral).a n' eva hoti
na na hoti -o pararp. maral).a; Sv 118,1: hoti -o ti adisu
satto -o ti adhippeto) t MI 426,14 (yani imani dighi-
gatani bhagavata avyakatani ~hapitani pa~ikkhittani ...
hoti -o pararp maral).a ti; Ps III 141,23: -o ti satto); MI
487,31 foil. (yena riipena -arp. pannapayamano
paññapeyya tarp riiparp -assa pahlnarp; Ps III 199,2:
yena riipena sattasailkhatarp. -arp riipl ti paññapeyya) t
S IV 376,2ofoll. (Spk IIl 113,18: yena riipena digho rassa
samo odato ti sattasailkhatarp. -arp paññapeyya); S III
111,14 (riiparp -o ti samanupassasl ti; Spk II 311,1: -o ti
satto); 112,6 (dighe va dhamme saccato thetato -o
anupalabbhiyamano); Ud 67,14 (santi pan' eke
samal).abrahmal).a evarpvadino evarp.ditthino hoti -o
pararp. maral).a idam eva saccarp. mogharp aññan ti;
Ud-a 340,6: ettha -o ti atta, Ce, Ee so; Be satto; Se satta)
t Nidd I 64,2o (Nidd-a I 193,24: -o ti satto, araha ti eke);
- 4. a designation of the dhamma and the sailgha (but
cf K. R. Norman 2001, p. 213); Khp 6:15 foil. (-arp. deva-
286 tadmp
manussapüjitarp buddharp. namassama suvatthi hotu .. .
-arp. devamanussapüjitarp dhammarp namassama .. .
-arp. devamanussapüjitarp sailgharp namassama suvatthi
hotu; Pj I 196,IOfoil.: maggadhammo yatha yuganaddha-
samathavipassanabalena gantabbarp ki1esapakkharp
samucchindantena tatha gato ti -o nibbanadhammo pi
yatha gato paññaya patividdho sabbadukkhavighataya
sampajjati buddhadihi tatha avagato tasma -o tv eva
vuccati . . . sailgho pi yatha attahitaya pa~ipannehi
gantabbarp tena tena maggena tatha gato ti -o tv eva
vuccati, Be, Ce so; Ee buddhadlhi tatha ga[ta]to .. .
maggena tatha gatato ... ; Se buddhadihi tatha gato .. .
maggena tatha gatato) = Sn 236 foil.; It-a I 117,8 foil.
(tathagatasaddo tava . . . -arp . . . dhammarp . . . hotü ti
adisu dhamme, -arp . . . sailgharp. . . . hotü ti adisu
sailghe);- 0 '-arañjita, (mj)n., (a place) scored by the
tathagata, a mark of the tathagata; M I 181 ,3o (idarp. pi
vuccati brahmal).a tathagatapadarp. 1t1 pi
tathagatanisevitarp iti pi -arp iti pi; Ps II 217,21: -an ti
tathagatassa ñiil).ada~haya arañjitaghanarp.) quoted
Nett 10,5;- 0 '-uppadako in Ee at Ud-a 19,10 is wr for
tathagatuppadadiko (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0
-gandha-
hatthi(n), m., the elephant that is the tathagata; Th-a III
11,21 (nagena maya desitarp nagarp -irp mahanaga
khll).asava .. . vijanissanti); Nett-a 214,5 (-ino) quoted
Sadd 349,s; - 0 -nisevita, (mj)n., (a place rubbed by)
the frequenting of the tathagata, a trace of the tathagata;
M I 181,29 (idarp pi vuccati brahmal).a tathagatapadarp iti
pi -arp iti pi tathagatarañjitarp. iti pi; Ps II 217 ,2o: -an ti
tathagatassa ñiil).aphasukaya nigharpsitatthanarp) quoted
Nett 10,4 (Nett-a 214,7 foil.: tena gocarabhavanasevanahi
· nisevitarp bhajitan ti); - atathagata, m., one who is not
a tathagata; Ps II 55,2s (-o pi atathagatasavako pi
aradheyya).
tathiya (and tathiva), mfn. [S. tathya], true; Sn 882 (na
vaham etarp -an ti briimi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tathivan ti;
Pj II 555,9foil.: aham etarp -arp. tacchan ti n' eva
briimi ... ettha ca -an ti tathivan ti dve pi pa~ha, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se -an ti kathivan ti dve pi pa~a) = Nidd I
289,24* (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tathivan ti); Sn 883 (yam ahu
saccarp -an ti eke, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tathivan ti) = Nidd I
291,1* (Be. Ce so; Ee, Se tathivan ti); Sn 906 (sabbe va
vada -a bhaveyyurp, Be, Ce so; Ee tathiva; Se sabbe
pavada tathiva) = Nidd I 320,22* (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se sabbe
pavada tathiva; 321 ,s foll.: sabbe va vada tatha taccha
bhiita yathava avipañta bhaveyyun ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
sabbe pavada: ... );- see also taccha.
tada, see sv ta(d).
tadmp, n. [ (ta[d] + arp. as id-arp? see O. von Hinüber,
1986, § 377; or tad + idarp.], that; Ud 80,13 (atthi
bhikhave tad ayatanarp yattha n' eva pa~havl na apo .. .
tadamharp bhikkhave n' eva agatirp vadami .. .
anarammal).am eva tarp, Ee so; Be, Ce tatrapaharp; Se
tam aharp; Ud-a 392,6 foll.: tatra ti tasmirp . . . evarp
tasmirp pi ayatane nibbane kutoci agatirp agamanarp.
n' eva vadami .. . tadapahan ti pi paji . .. tarp pi
ayatanarp ... na agantabbataya na agati ... , Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee tadapahan ti pi); Snp. 147,1o (yarp bhikkhave
sadevakassa lokassa . . . idarp saccan ti upanijjhayitarp.
tadam ariyanarp. etarp. musa ti yathabhütarp.
tadatta
sammappaññaya sudinha~p; Pj II 508,16: tadam ariyanan
ti ta¡p ida¡p ariyana¡p anunasika-ikaralopa¡p katva
vutta¡p);- see also tada, yada¡p.
tadatta, n., se e sv tada.
tada, ind. [ts ], then, at that time; in that case; Abh 1161;
D II 157,18' (tadasi ya¡p bhi¡psanaka¡p tadasi
lomaha¡psana¡p); M I 81,5 (tada pi etaparamo yeva
ta1,1<;lulo ahosi seyyatha pi etarahi); II 100,11' (tam ehi
bhikkhü ti tada avoca); SI 36,5' (evam eta¡p tada asi
yatha bhasasi Bhaggava); V 442,25 (yavakiva¡p ca
bhikkhave candimasuriya loke nuppajjanti ...
andhantama¡p tada hoti andhakaratimisa); Vv 84:1
(su1,1otha yakkhassa ca va1,1ijana ca samagamo yattha tada
ahosi); Pv 15:25 (tadaha¡p sukhita hessa¡p sabbakama-
samiddhini); 36:85 (bhikkhusailgha¡p ca sakkacca tada
upaghahi); Th 198 (so 'ha¡p ditto tada santo); 624
(vanditva satthuno pade ekamanta¡p rhito tada pabbajja¡p
aham ayaci¡p); 966 (agaravo ca kasave tada tesa¡p
bhavissati); Ja I 17,22* (pallailkena nisiditva eva¡p cintes'
aha¡p tada); 32,2 (tada amhaka¡p bodhisatto Suruci nama
brahma1,1o hutva); 48,26 (tada hi sattana¡p jatijara-
maraJ:.liini na paññayanti); 50,3 (tada kira Kapila-
vatthunagare asaJhinakkhatta¡p ghugha¡p ahosi); 114,5
(tada balaviil,lijo Devadatto ahosi pa1,1<;litaviil,lijo aham
eva ahosin ti desana¡p niqhapesi); 331,11 (yatha pana
idani evam eva tada pi tasmi¡p raghe devo na vassi);
V 349,13' (tadaya¡p Sumukho yeva pa1,1<;lito
paccabhasatha; 349,26': tada ti tasmi¡p kale); VI 156,16'
(sabbesu vippamuttesu ye tattha samagata tada asu¡p);
489,13* (hatthinage padinnamhi khubbhittha nagara¡p
tada); Ap 430,3 (tadaha¡p ma1,1avo asi¡p Megho nama
susikkhito); Bv 10:14 (tada paha¡p asamasama¡p
sasailgha¡p sapanJJana¡p annapanena tappetva);
Mil 245,6 (tada pi maharaja etarahi pi sa yeva paripada);
420,11 (tada raJa balakayehi Nagasenatthera¡p
payirupasitva ... ); Vism 97,6 (Abhayatthero kira tada
sotapanno hoti); 619,25 (puggalassa parhamani dasa
vassani mandadasaka¡p nama tada hi so mando hoti
capalo kumarako); Sp 297,22 (tada Rajagahe
visatimasako kahapa1,1o hoti); Sv 302,2o (ki¡p pana tva¡p
bho Gotama tada raja ahosi udahu purohito brahma1,1o
ti); Ps III 75,18 (aha¡p tada pi alika¡p na bha1,1ami idani
pabbajito ki¡p vakkhami, saccavadi puriso nam' ahan ti);
Mp I 138,26 (anagate ... Gotamo nama buddho loke
uppajjissati tada etassa patthana samijjhissati ti); Dhp-a I
102,23 (eva¡p te tayo bhataro arahatta¡p patthenta tada
kalyiiJ:.lakamma¡p kari¡psu); Ud-a 58,12 (bhagava tada te
there brahma1,1a ti abhasi); Ap-a 79,28 (mahaparhavi
aha¡p tetada sakkhi ti ... marabala¡p avattharamana vi ya
unnadi); 301,33 (tada Gotamassa bhagavato kale aya¡p
silio rnigaraja brahmaJ:.lakule nibbattissati ti); Sadd 680,27
(sabbada yada tada); 682,11 (tamha dadani: tada tadani);
- as correlative to yada: Vin III 54,3 (so puna iiJ:.lapeti
yada sakkosi tada ta¡p bha1,1<;la¡p avahara ti); IV 103,6
(yada gilano bhavissami tada viññapessami ti); D II
334,23 (yada so jivati tada lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca
kammaññataro ca); S III 143,5* (ayu usma ca viñña1,1a¡p
yada kaya¡p jahanti 'ma¡p apaviddho tada seti); A IV
312.31 (yada bodhisatto Tusita kaya cavitva sato
sampajano matukucchi¡p okkamati tadaya¡p partavi
287 tan u
kampati); Ja I 209,16' (yada te vivadissanti tada ehinti
me vasa¡p); 231,1 (yada pan' assa papa¡p paccati tada
papam eva passati); Ap 547,12 (yada ca pi1,1<;laya muni
Giribbajapuruttama¡p pavigho 'ha¡p tada yeva vana¡p
daghu¡p upagami¡p); Bv 10:12 (yada Verocano nago
dana¡p dadati satthuno tada sami¡psu jinaputta); Mil66,6
(yada tva¡p pipasito bhaveyyasi tada tva¡p udapana¡p
kha1,1apeyyyasi); Vism 101,8 (yada so kissa agato si ti
pucchati tada agamanakiiraJ:.la¡p kathetabba¡p); Mp I1 4,21
(yada pana eva¡p cattaro va atireka va salaka¡p
gahapetva ave1,1ikakamma¡p va uddesa¡p va karonti tada
sailgho bhinno nama hoti); Ud-a 33,25 (yada dve
anulomani tada tatiya¡p gotrabhü catuttha¡p
maggacitta¡p);- tadatta, tadatta, n., abstr. [S. tadatva],
that time; the present time; Abh 86 (takkala¡p tu
tadattam, Ce so; Be tadatva¡p); Vv-a 113,28
(sucaritakamma¡p hi -e ayati¡p ca sukhavasahetutaya
sukhaviharassa avaso ti vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
tadatthe).
tadani, ind. [BHS id.; S. tadanim], at that time, then;
Abh 1161 (-i catada sama); Sadd 682,11 (tamha dadani:
tada -i); 894,27 (yada tada -i).
taddati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tardati, Wg § 3:21], injures;
Sadd 377,5 (tadda hi¡psaya¡p: -ati).
taddamana, mfn., see sv taJeti.
taddhikaqt in Ee at Sp 79,26 is wr for taWka¡p (Be, Ce, Se
so).
taddhita, m., see sv ta(d).
tanana, n. (from tanoti], spreading, extending; displaying;
Vism 481,22 (avisesato pana ayatanato ayana¡p -ato
ayatassa ca nayanato ayatanan ti veditabba¡p . . . te ca
ayabhüte dhamme etani tanonti vittharenti ti vutta¡p
hoti); Pj I 82,32 (ayassa va -ato ayatassa va
sa¡psaradukkhassa nayanato ayatanani).
tanaya, m. [ts], a son; Abh 241 (tanujo -o); Bv-a 161,1 (so
Sudassanaya nama deviya Varu1,1e nama -e jate cattari
nimittani disva); 181,16 (Rammakumaro nam' assa
atirammo -o ahosi); 276,3o (raja alailkatapariyatta¡p -a¡p
aharapetva Devalatapasa¡p vandapetu¡p abhihari, Be, Se
so; Ce -a¡p anapetva; Ee wr tan aya¡p a1,1apetva);
Mhv 9:13 (Dighayussa kumarassa -o DighagiimaJ:.li);-
ifc see raja-.
taniyyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of tan o ti qv.
tan u, mfn. and f [cf S. tan u, tanü, BHS tan u], l. (mfn.)
thin, slender; attenuated, diminished; fine, delicate;
small; (pl.) few; Abh 704 (thokam appa¡p kisa¡p -u);
707 (viraJa¡p pelava¡p -u); 924 (appe viraJe kise); A III
72,14 (yo yobbane yobbanamado so sabbaso va pahiyati
-u va pana hoti); IV 150,21 * (-ü sa¡pyojana honti);
Bv 2:99 (rago tada -u hoti; Bv-a 101,27: oramattako
hoti); Dhs 362 (kamaragavyapadana¡p 0 -bhavaya, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e patanü-); Mp V 30,10 (gattani pi 'ssa -üni
thirani jatani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit -üni); Nidd-a I
245,18 (eka¡p baha¡p va<;l<;lhaki vasiya tacchetva tacchetva
-u¡p kareyyu¡p); Pv-a 46,24 (kesa nila digha -ü mudü
siniddha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tanumudusiniddha);
Sadd 506,13;- 2. (j) the body; Abh !51 (kayo thiya¡p
-u kalebararp.); 924 (tace kaye ca tanv itthi); SI 7,24'
(hirinisedha -uya ye caranti sada sata antarp. dukkhassa
pappuyya caranti visame samarp.; orto tanuya, mfn., qv?
tan u ya
cfSpk I 37,21: -a ti tanuka); Ja III 164,14' (urago va
tacaiTI jil)l)aiTI hitva gacchati saiTI -u~T~; 164,21-: sam -un
ti attano sarira~T~); Ap 331,21 (yatha pi urago jii)I;t~ hitva
gacchati s~ tacaiTI ev~ mata pita tuyha~T~ saiTI -UIT~
idha hiyare, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se gacchati s~ -u~T~); 478,19
(jhapetha -u~T~ sabrahmacarino); 532,21 (dvatti~T~sa­
lakkhal)üpet~ suppabha1ailkata~T~ -u~T~ . . . matuccha~T~
dassayi jino); Vism 79,16' (pal)idhaya ujuiTI -u~T~);
Sadd 506,1; 506,6foll.;- 0 -karai].a, n,, making thinner,
reducing, diminishing; Sp 1203,14 (likhitun ti -'-atthay'
et~ vutt~); Patis-a 130,2 (kucchitanaiTI va sanato -ato
kus~ ñal)a~T~) f. As 39,5; Sadd 344,3 (taccha -e); -
0
-kicca, n,, proper treatment of the (dead) body;
Ap341,27 (-' id~ phal~);- -kriya,n., making
0
thinner, diminishing; Dhatum 67 (taccho -e); -
0
-cchava, mfn. ffrom tan u + chavi], with a fine, delicate
skin; Vv 64:11 (rathe thita ta . , . -a; V v-a 280,1: -a ti
sukhumacchaviyo); - 0 -cchavi, mfn., with very little
integument; Sv 221,8 ([mal)i] accho ti -i) = Ps III 261,23;
-
0
-cchida, mfn. [tanu + chida 1], cutting the body; Ja IV
260,22' (so 'h~ catuppattam ida~T~ vihailgamaiTI -~
hadaye ossajami; 260,26': -an ti sarirachindana~T~); -
2
o -ja, tanüja, m. [tan u + ja ], l. a son; Abh 241 (-o
tanayo); Ja V 83,18' (mata va putta~T~ tarui;taiTI tanujj~
sampassa, Be, Ee so, me; Ce tanüja111; Se -a111; 83,22':
yatha mata -a~T~ attano sarirajata~T~ tarul)aputt~
sampassa disva); 302,16' (matü va putto tarui;to tanüjo,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -o); - 2. a hair of the body; - ifc see
udagga-, paha!!ha- (sv paha~T~sati 2 ); - 0
-tara, mfn.,
fewer; MI 498,5 (ato kho te Aggivessana tanü hi -a
1okasmi~T~ ye evaiTI ah~su ... ; Ps III 205,18: -a appa-
tara ti attho);- tanutaro in Ee at Vin IV 345,3 is wr; Be
thanudara; Ce thanüdara; Se thanudaro); - 0
-tii,f.,
abstr., thinness; diminution; Ja IV 292,13 (hettha udare
kilomaka~T~ -a~T~ gat~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tanuttagat~);
0
- -tta, n., abstr., thinness; diminution, reduction; DI
156,14 (bhikkhu ti!)!)~ sa111yojanan~ parikkhaya
ragadosamohan~ -a sakadagami hoti) f. MI 34,5 (Ps I
163,5: -a ti etesaiTI tanubhavena, --karai;tena ti vutt~
hoti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se o -karai;tena ti); M I 117,30 (maha
migasailgho . . . anayavyasanaiTI -a111 apajjeyya); A I
160,17 (manussan~ khayo hoti -a111 paññayati gama pi
agama honti nigama pi anigama honti); Sp 137,33
(kapalassa -a bahiddha aloko anto paññayati); Spk I
313,33 (buddhapasado -a111 gato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-bhüto); Dhp-a II 268,1o (tassa sañre soko -~
agamasi); - 0
-dehaka, mfn., with a thin body;
Ap 486,32 (passath' et~ purisaka~T~ kuce1a111 -a~T~); -
0
-majjhima, mfn., with a slender waist; Ja VI 456,25'
(nari ... -a; 457,8-: -a ti karamitatanumajjhima, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee kararnitamajjha); Ap 22,17 (nariyo __ . susañña
-a; Ap-a 277,35: -a ti khuddaka-udarapadesa, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr khuddakandara-);- 0 -ruha, n. [tanu + ruha 1],
the hair of the body; Abh 259 (Iom~ -~ roma~T~); -
ifc see hat!ha- (sv ha111sati); - atitanu, mfn,, very thin,
too thin; very few; Sv 454,24 (dvaravatapanani pi' ssa
natibahüni natitanüni, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se natitanukani) =
Ps III 214,10 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit natitanüni); Ps V
38,9 (natitanUITI natibahaJa111 SUVal)l)apatta'11 karapetva,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee natita1u~T~); - sutanu, mfn., having a
288 tanta
beautiful body; Vv 64:12 (ta __ . -ü sucimhita); Ja III
395,2• (passami vo 'ha111 dahari111 kumari111 . . . -UIT~
sumajjha111; 395,11': -un ti sundarasarir~); V 202,13'
(sudassaneyyo -ü; cf205,2o-: sutanü ti sut!hu -o natikiso
natithülo);- see also kanakatanusannibha (sv kanaka),
tanuka, mfn. [cf S, tanuka], thin; small; insignificant;
diminished; few; S II 284,15 (passatha no tumhe
bhikkhave et~ bhikkhu111 agacchanta111 odatak~ -a~T~
tmi.ganasikan ti); A I 136,32 (-o pai)I;tasantharo );
Dhp 174 (andhabhüto ayaiTI loko tanuk' ettha vipassati;
Dhp-a III 175,7: -o ettha na bahu jano aniccadivasena
vipassati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee na bahuko); Sn 994 (sok'
assa -o asi piti~T~ ca vipula111 labhi); Ja I 460,25
(anupubbena müsikagai)O -o jato); VI 339,37' (sappassa
hi nailguttha'11 thül~ hoti sappiniya -a111); Vism 263,34
(khe)o __ . aggajivhaya e' esa -o hoti mülajivhaya
bahalo); Sp 137,31 (kapal~ -a111 hoti); 216,14 (khaditu111
va bhuñjitu~T~ va asakkonto -o ahosi appama111salohito);
402,1 (tanubhüto viya -o mando appako vira)avira)o
vi ya jato bhikkhusail.gho ); 465,5 (-ena vatthena);
Sv 543,26 (ragadayo ... uppajjamana ca puthujjananaiTI
viya bahalabaha1a na uppajjanti macchikapatta~T~ viya
tanukatanuka uppajjanti); Mp II 131,2 (kilese -e katva);
It-a I 146,2 (jivha -a madhura111 vacan~); - a~T~, adv.,
a little; M II 143,12' (kacci pahütajivho si yatha t~
janiyamase ninnamay' eta~T~ -a~T~); Jaiii 319,zs-
(bahitacaiTI -~ pi atacchento); - 0 -tara, mfn., less;
smaller; Ja III 340,6 (soko -o jato);- atitanuka, mfn.,
very small; too thin; too few; Sp 459,18 (mahanta~T~ va
-~ hotl ti khuddak~ karoti, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be
atirek~; Ce omits -a111 hoti ti); 703,8 (natighano
natitanuko . __ muggasüpo ).
tanuya, mfn. [prob. = tanuka qv], little; few; SI 7,24' (hiñ-
nisedha tanuya ye caranti sada sata antrup dukkhassa
pappuyya caranti. visame samaiTI, eds so; or to tanu ?
Spk I 37,21: -a ti tanuka, hiriya akusale dhamme
nisedhetva caranta khii;tasava nama appaka ti attho ).
tanoti, tanute, pr. 3 sg. [S. tanoti, tanute] (see
Sadd 506,17 foil.), stretches, extends; Dhatup 519 (tana
vitthare); Dhatum 732; Vism481,26 (te ca ayabhüte
dhamme etani [ayatanani] -onti vittharenti ti vutt~
hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -anti); Pj II 24,27 (van~ tharati
-otl ti vanatho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits tharati);
Sadd 506,1 (tanu vitthare: -oti ayatana111 tanü, kammani
taniyyati ); 825,18 (tanadito oyira: -oti karoti); 834,28
(uttam okaro ... kurute karoti -ute -o ti);- inf. tanitu~T~,
Sadd 506,4; - absol. tanitvana, Sadd 506,4; - pass.
pr. 3 sg. taniyyati, Sadd 506,7 (tanü ti sañr~ t~ hi
ka1a1ato patthaya kammadihi yathasambhav~ -iyyati
vitthañyati mahatt~ papiyatl ti); - pp tata, mfn. [ts],
stretched, extended, spread out; Abh 746 (visat~
vitthata~T~ -~); Sn 357 (acchida maccuno ja1~ -a111
mayavino da)h~; Pj II 351,19foll.: tebhümakavane
vitthata111 marassa tai;thajal~) f. Th 1277 f. Ja VI 46,3•
(Be so; Ce, Ee, Se tant~); Ja IV 484,13' (-ani jalani
padaliya h~sa, so read? Ce, Ee tantani; Be, Se katani);
V 341,5• (pasa bahuvidha -a; 342,3o-: -a ti vitata m)<)ita);
- for samo tata~T~ in Ee at Ja I 183,26' read samotata111
with Be, Ce.
tanta, tantra, n. [cfS. tantra], l. a thread; a Zoom; the
tantaka
warp; Abh 523 (suttaq¡ tantu pume -aq¡); 878
(suttaq¡ ... -e); 882; Vin III 258,5 (so tantavayo yatha-
bhataq¡ suttaq¡ -e upanetva; Sp 728,1: -e ti -e dighato
pasanu,1e yeva upanetva ti attho); Ud 29,21 (Sakko ...
pesakaraVai.J.I.J.aq¡ abhinimminitva -aq¡ vinati Suja
asurakañña tasaraq¡ püreti; Ud-a 197,29: -aq¡ vinaU ti
pasaritatantaq¡ vinanto viya) t Dhp-a I 424,17 (Sakko
-aq¡ pasareti Suja tasaraq¡ vageti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
va¡;l<;lheti); Ja IV 484, 13* (-ani ja1ani padaliya haq¡sa, Ce,
Ee so, perhaps wr [for tatani ?]; Be, Se katani); VI 26,17*
(yatha pi -e vitate); Sp 272,18 (kesakamba1o ti kesehi -e
vayitva katakambalo); 727,3o (sutthu pavayitaq¡ sabba-
ghanesu samaq¡ katva -e pasaritaq¡); 1140,15 (ekaq¡ -aq¡
uddharitva idaq¡ thanaq¡ tumhakaq¡ papui.J.aU ti);
Sv 495,16 (yatha nama dunnikkhittaq¡ müsikacchinnaq¡
pesakaranaq¡ -aq¡ tahiq¡ tahiq¡ akulaq¡ hoti);
Sadd 870,18foll. (chadadito to: chada... tan u .. . ice
evamadihi dhatühi tapaccayo hoti chattaq¡ . . . -aq¡ ...
[garünaq¡] mate chatraq¡ ... tantraq¡ ... ); - 2. a system;
a literary work, a treatise; Abh 882 (-aq¡ mukhya-
siddhantatantusu); - ifc see kama-, sa- (sv sa5); - 3. a
main point, a principal part; Abh 882;- 0 -akulajata in
E e, Se at Spk II 96,6 is prob. wr for o• -akulakajata (Be,
Ce, S II 92,15 so); - o• -akulakajata, mfn. [or tantu +
akulakajata; cf BHS tantrakulajata], tangled like thread;
D II 55,15 (ayaq¡ paJa -a guJagui.J.thikajata ... ;
Sv 495,15foll.: tantaq¡ viya akulajata, yatha nama
dunnikkhittaq¡ müsikacchinnaq¡ pesakaranaq¡ tantaq¡
tahiq¡ tahiq¡ akulaq¡ hoti) = S II 92,15 quoted Vism 586,3
(cfVism-mht [Be] II 348,25: tantünaq¡ akulakaq¡
tantakulakaq¡, tantakulakam iva jata -a); A II 211,33
(ayaq¡ loko ... -o); - o' -avuta, mfn. [tanta + avuta2],
woven (on the Zoom?); S V 45,2 (yani kanici -anaq¡
vatthanaq¡ kasikaq¡ vatthaq¡ tesaq¡ aggam akkhayati;
Spk III 134,11: -an ti tan te avutanaq¡, tantaq¡ aropetva
vayitanan ti attho, idaq¡ ca paccatte samivacanaq¡) t A 1
286,27;- 0 -bhal}4aka, n., tools etc for weaving; Vin 11
135,32 (anujanami bhikkhave tantakaq¡ vemakaq¡ vataq¡
salakaq¡ sabbaq¡ -an ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -bhai.J.<;ian ti);
-
0
-majjita, n., (like a) rubbing of thread;? Ja IV
457,24 (pagakavethanaq¡ nama vethesi -aq¡ nama majji
nangughe gahetva dussapothimaq¡ nama pothesi, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se tantakamajjanaq¡) Cp-a 128,17;
0
-Vaya, m., a weaver; Abh 507 (-o pesakaro); Vin III
256,7 (aññaq¡ pi suttaq¡ viññapetva -ehi civaraq¡
vayapema ti); Jal 356,23; Mil331,11; Psiii 259,25
(suttakantikayo pi -a pi cheka, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -o);
- see also tantuvaya (sv tantu).
tantaka, n. [cf S. tantraka], thread; ? a Zoom; ? V in II
135,32 (anujanami bhikkhave -aq¡ vemakaq¡ vataq¡
salakaq¡ sabbaq¡ tantabhai.J.<;ian ti).
tan ti, f. [S. tantñ; cf al so S. tan ti], l. a tendon; a string;
Thi 390 (darukapillakani va -Ihi ca khi!akehi ca
vinibaddha; Thi-a 239,13: -Ihi ti nharusuttakehi);
Thi-a 239,18 (-imhi khi!ake ca thanato uddhate);- esp.
the string of a VII.J.a; Abh 882 (-i v!I.J.agui.J.e); Vin I 182,3o
(yada te v11,1aya -iyo accayata honti); S IV 197,14 (do1,1iq¡
ca paticca ... -iq¡ ca paticca ... evayaq¡ bhante vii.J.a);
Ja II 252,19 (api ca tvaq¡ vi1,1aq¡ vadento ekaq¡ -iq¡
chinditva cha vadeyyasi); Mil 53,21; Mp 1 28,5 (vi1,1aya
289 tantra
-iyo same gu1,1e patighapetva); Dhp-a 1 163,18 (vii.J.aya
tisso -iyo dassetva); Ud-a 75,28 (-I vadenti VII.J.aq¡
vadenU ti, Be, Se so; Ce vi1,1a; Ee gayanti vadayanti vi1,1a
vadenU ti); Vv-a 139,15 (sattannaq¡ -Inaq¡); - 2. line,
continuation; tradition; the teaching, the text; a passage
in the canon; Abh 996 (tantipanUsu nariyaq¡ paJi);
Vism 351,17 (dvisu bhikkhüsu bahupeyyalaq¡ -iq¡
sajjhayantesu); 522,18 (ya panayaq¡ bhagavata
paticcasamuppadaq¡ desentena avijjapaccaya sañkhara ti
adina nayena nikkhitta -i); Sp 188,2 (amhakaq¡ sasanaq¡
-i pave1,1I ti); 443,2o (na vittharena apattiq¡ aropetva -i
thapita); 861 ,24 (kathaq¡ ayaq¡ dhammo -i pave1,1I
nasseyya); Sv 2,16 (pathamamahasanglti ... vinayapitake
-iq¡ iirüJha); 20,9 foil. (dhammo ti -i ... pativedho ti -iya
0
-atthassa ca yathabhütavabodho); Ps II 108,2
(atimadhuram buddhavacanaq¡ ma nassatu -iq¡
dharessami vaq¡saq¡ thapessami pave1,1iq¡ palessami ti
pariyapu1,1ati); Spk I 308,3o (dhammapadani ti idha
patiyekkaq¡ sangahaq¡ iirüJha chabbisativagga -1
adhippeta); Dhp-a I 284,10 (ayaq¡ hi appicchata mama -i
mama pave1,1I ti); Patis-a 6,12 (sammasambuddho pi
tepitakaq¡ buddhavacanaq¡ -iq¡ aropento Magadhika-
bhasaya eva aropesi); 299,11 (tesaq¡ ariyanaq¡ vaq¡sa
-iyo pave1,1iyo ti ariyavaq¡sa); Vibh-a 142,28 (abhi-
dhamme pi hi sutte pi ekasadisa va -i niddigha ti);- ifc
0
see kula-; - -kandhanatthanatp in Ee at Sv 699,32 is
wr for 0 -bandhana- (Be, Ce, Se so);- 0 -dharaka, mfn.,
memorising the texts; Ps 11 107,3o; - 0
-pavel}i-
ghaf:anaka, m(jn)., (one) who continues the fine and
tradition; Sp 483,21 (te -a sasanajotaka ti veditabba, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee tantiq¡ pave1,1iq¡ ghatanaka); -
0
-baddha, mfn., l.formed, put together, with strings;
S v 440,6 (-a vii.J.a cammabaddha bheriyo ca) = Ps IV
186,14; As 319,9 (v!I.J.adinaq¡ -anaq¡ saddo); - 2. tied;
Vin 1 312,6 (tattha Kassapagotto nama bhikkhu avasiko
hoti -o; Sp 1145,32: tasmiq¡ avase kattabbatta
0
-patibaddho; Sp-t [Be] III 346,10: -o ti tanti vuccati
vyaparo, tattha baddho pasuto ussukkaq¡ apanno ti
attho); - -ssara, m. [tanti + sara5], the sound or music
0
of strings; Vin I 182,29 (kusalo tvaq¡ pubbe agarikabhüto
VII.J.aya -e ti; Sp 1081,21: v11,1aya tantiya sare); D II
267,16foll. (saq¡sandati kho pana te Pañcasikha -o
gitassarena gltassaro ca -ena); Ja II 329,9 foil. (-ena
gita-saraq¡ gltassarena -aq¡ anatikkamitva madhurena
sarena gayi).
tantigaha, m. [?] a kind of water-creature; Ap 16,19
(kumbhi!a suq¡sumara ca -a ca rakkhasa).
tantu, m. [ts], a string, a thread; Abh 523 (suttaq¡ -u
pume tantaq¡); Vism 622,33 (-umhi -umhi aq¡sumhi
aq¡sumhi jala); Dhatum 623 (sivu -üna santane); - ifc
see dasa- (sv dasa\ pata-; - 0 -baddha, mfn., attached
to a string; Ja V 196,2 (-aq¡ cittagei.J.<;iukaq¡ gahapetva);
0
- -vaya, m. [ts], a weaver; Sadd 921,23 (tatra matta-
bhedo tava ... tantavayo -o);- 0 -santana, m., weaving
threads; Dhatup 390 (siva -e); Dhatum 423; Sadd 440,5
(ve -e: vayati).
tanteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tantrayate,
Wg § 33:5], supports a family; Sadd 540,4 (tanta
kutumbadhiirai.J.e: -eti -ayati satanto).
tantra, see sv tanta.
v'tand
,/tand [cf S. tandrayate], to grow weary; to be lazy;
Dhatum 235 (tanda alasiye); - see also atandita, tandi,
tandiyana, tandiyitatta.
tandati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ,/trd, tfl.latti, Wg § 29:9],
hurts; despises; Sadd 472,2o (tadi hirpsanadaresu: -ati
tandí daddü).
tandati2 , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup trandati, Wg § 3:32: tradi
ce~~ayarp], exerts oneself, Sadd 381,3 (tadi cetayarp: -a ti
tandl).
tandi, tandí, f [S. tandrí], lassitude, laziness, sloth;
Abh 1054 (soppe pamade -I); MI 464,1 H pi cittarp
pariyadaya tiHhati); SI 7,s* (nidda -I vijambhika; Spk I
35,23: -I ti aticchatatisitavatadika1esu uppannarp
agantukarp alasyarp, Ce so; Be, Se aticchatatis!tadi-
ka1esu; Ee aticchata-atisitavatadisu ka1esu) =f. Ja VI
57,24*; Sn 942 (niddarp -irp sahe thinam; Pj ll
567,21foll.: pacalayikarp ca kayalasiyarp ca cittalasiyarp
ca ti ime tayo dhamme abhibhaveyya); Nidd I 378,16 (-i
tandiyana ... a1asyarp ... , Ce, Ee Se so; Be -I) =f. 423,12
(Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -I) =f. Vibh 352,8 (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
-!); Mi1289,12 ( ... thínamiddharp -I a1asyarp ... );
Spk III 140,4; - 0
-manakata,f, abstr., the state of
having one's mind overcome by lassitude or laziness;
Nidd I 378,16 (tandi tandiyana -a, Ce so; Be tandí
tandiyana tandiyitattarp -a; Ee, Se tandi tandiyana
tandiyitattarp tandimanattarp; Nidd-a I 409,24: -a ti
tandiya abhibhütacittata) =f. 423,12 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
tandi tandiyana tandiyitattarp -a) =f. Vibh 352,s; -
0
-manatta, n., abstr., the state of being weary or lazy in
mind; Nidd I 378,17 ( ... -arp a1asiyarp ... , Ee, Se so; Be,
Ce tandimanakata); - nittandi, mfn. [S. nistandñ], not
lazy; Sv 893,6 (atandito ti -I kaya1asiyavirahito, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr nittandiya-); - see also tandikata
(sv tandi[n]).
*tandi(n), mfn. [S. tandrin], sleepy; lazy; - tandi-
kata, mfn. [or tandi + kata], made sleepy; Mil 238,3
(puriso yavadattharp bhojanarp bhuñjeyya . . . so dhato
pii::lito paripm_u:J.O nirantaro -o) quoted Ps IV 119,23 (Be
so; Ce, Ee tandikato; Se taJ.1c:iikato).
tandiyana, f [from *tandiyati, denom. from tandi ?],
lassitude; laziness; Nidd I 378,16 (tandi -a ...
alasyarp ... ; Nidd-a I 409,24: -a ti tandiyanakaro) =f.
423,12 =f. Vibh 352,s; - see also atandita, ,/tand,
tandiyitatta.
tandiyitatta, n., abstr. [from *tandiyati, denom. from
tandi ?], lassitude; laziness; Nidd I 378,16 (tandi
tandiyana -arp tandimanakata alasyarp ... , Be so; Ce
omits -arp; Ee, Se tandi tandiyana -arp tandimanattarp)
=f. 423,12 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se omit -am); - see also
atandita, ,/tand, tandiyana. . kosajassa ca tapanato -o ti vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
,/tap 1 [S. Dhatup tapyate, Wg § 26:50], to rule;
Dhatum 263 (tapa issariye).
,/tap 2 , se e tapati 1.
,/tap 3 , se e tappati 2.
,/tap 4 , see tapati 2.
-tapa, mfn. [ts], distressing, tormenting; - ifc see atta-n-
(sv atta[n]), para-n-.
tapa(s), n. [S. tapas] (sg. nom.!acc. -o, -arp; instr. -asa,
-ena; gen. -assa [and -aso, Sadd 663,15]; loe. -e,
-asmirp [and -asi, Sadd 118,1]; pl. nom. -a; acc. -e),
290 tapa(s)
religious austerity; ascetic practice; (as practised by
non-Buddhists often) self-mortification; Abh 430 (-o ca
sarpyamo silarp); 1062 (-o dhamme vate e' eva); D III
42,17 foil. (idha Nigrodha tapassi -arp samadiyati, so
tena -asa attamano hoti); 44,26 (idarp pi me -asmirp);
239,2 (imina 'harp vatena va silena va -ena va
brahmacariyena va devo va bhavissami devaññataro va
ti); M 11 155,24 (sattannarp brahma1_lisínarp etad ahosi
mogharp vata no -o aphalarp brahmacariyarp); 199,14
(-arp . . . brahma~a dutiyarp dhammarp paññapenti
punnassa kiriyaya kusalassa aradhanaya); 214,9
(pura~ana111 kammanarp -asa vyantibhava); SI 103,19'
(anatthasamhitarp ñatva yarp kiñci amararp -arp, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee apararp -arp; Spk I 169,1sfoll.: amararp -an ti
amarataparp amarabhavatthaya katarp lükhataparp, atta-
kilamathanuyogo ... sabbarp amararp -arp anatthavaharp
hoti ti ñatva, Be so; Ce, Ee -an ti amara~ataparp; Se
apararp -an ti aparabhavatthaya ... ); 172,31 * (saddha
bijarp -o vunhi; Spk I 251,1: akusaladhamme e' eva
kayarp ca tapatl ti -o, indriyasarpvaraviriya-
dhutali.gadukkarakarikanarp etarp adhivacanarp, idha
pana indriyasarpvaro adhippeto); IV 330,15 (sutarp
m' etarp bhante sama~o Gotamo sabbarp -arp garahati);
Dhp 184 (khanti paramaf11 -o); Sn 249 (y e va pi loke
amara bahü -a; Pj 11 29l,zo: -a ti sarirasantapa); Pv 3:2
(laddha ca me -asa VaJ.l~adhatu; Pv-a 15,19: -asa ti
brahmacariyena); Th 219 (suddhimaggam aJananto
akasirp amararp -arp; Th-a 11 84,12fo/l.: suddhiya
nibbanassa maggarp ajananto aggiparicara1_larp viya
pañcatapatappanadi-attakilamathanuyogarp suddhi-
maggo ti saññaya, Be, Se so; Ce pañcatapana-
ppadhanadi-; E e pañcatapanappadhanadi-); Thi 293 (na
hi kodhaparetassa suddhi atthi kuto -o); Ja I 293,13
(brahma~o ma~avikaya -assa bhinnabhavarp ~ananto );
III 519,14* foil. (-o va seyyo kamagu~ehi raja -o
karissami pahaya kame; 519,1rfoll.: silasarpyamatapam
eva karissamí ti); IV 241 ,28* (tarp tadisarp devava~~irp
sabbakamasamiddhinarp disva -o pamajjeyyarp); 466,25'
(-o karomi uposatharp upavasami ti); V 194,12 (tassa -e
bhinne devo vassati ti); Cp 3:6:13 (yass' atthaya -o
ci~~o so me attho samijjhatha); Nett 121,25
(viriyasamadhi bhavito bahulikato -arp paripüreti);
Mil 90,17 (satta divasani agha gu~e samadiyitva -o
caritabbo bhavissati); Sp 136,2 (te -e as si ... vidharpsesí
ti tapassi); Dhp-a 11 57,15 (aharp vatam eva bhakkhami
na aññarp ahararp, aññarp hi me khadantassa -o nassati
ti); Cp-a 24,5foll. (sílarp hi duccaritasali.kilesassa
tapanato -o ti vuccati nekkhammavíriya-
paramitanubhavena va, ta pi hi ta1_lhasali.kilesassa
tapeti vuccati); Sadd 553,24 (akusalanarp tapana~~hena -o
silarp); - ifc see pañca-; - (tapo)-'pakkama, m.
[tapa(s) + upakkama (or + pakkama ?)], the undertaking
of ascetic practices; D l 165,32 (ime kho avuso Gotama
-a; Sv 354,12: -a ti taparambha tapokammani ti, Be, Se
so; Ce tapakammani ti; Ee wr tappakammaní ti);
Sv 357,2s (bhagava si!asampadad!hi vina tesarp -anarp
niratthakatarp dassento); 0
(tapo)-jiguccha,f,
recoiling from, shunning, through austerity; the
scrupulousness that is ascetic practice; scrupulousness
tapañña
and ascetic practice; D III 40,25 (katharpsanta nu kho
bhante -a paripu~~a hoti katharp aparipu~~a ti;
Sv 835,37: -a ti viriyena papajiguccha papavivajjana);
SI 66,11' (-aya susarpvutatto); A 11 200,11 (oghassa
nitthar~arp paññapeti sllavisuddhihetu ca --hetu ca;
Mp III 181 ,zfo/1.: dukkarakarikasailkhatena tapena
papajigucchanahetu); Sv 359,15 (ye -arp vadanti, tattha
tapan ti tapo kilesasantapaviriyass' etarp namal]l, tad eva
te kilese jigucchat!ti jiguccha);- (tapo)-dhana, m., one
rich in austerities, an ascetic; Abh 433 (tapassl bhikkhu
sam~o pabbajito -o); Sadd331,21; (tapa)-
nissitaka, m(jn)., (one) who relies on, practises,
austerity, who is devoted to ascetic practices; Ja VI 99,5'
(tapassino ti -a); Sv 350,14 (aparo -o lukhajlvl
appapuñño hoti); Spk III 108,28 (-e pi na sabbe garahati
na pasal]lsati); - (tapo)-pakkama, m., see above;
see also amaratapa (sv amara), uggatapa (sv ugga 1).
tapañña, mfn., see sv tapanlya3.
tapati 1, tappati 1, pr. 3 sg. [vhp 2; cfS. tapati, tapyati,
tapyate], Dhatup 182 (tapa ... santape); 193 (tappa
santappane); Dhatum 262; 271; 668 (tapa
santapapl~ane); Sadd 404,25 (tapa dhupa santape: -ati
tapodhanarp -ati atapo); 487,9 (tapa santape: tappati
santappati santapo); - l. (i) gives out heat; shines, is
bright; MI 317,12 (adicco .. . sabbarp akasagatarp
tamagatarp abhivihacca bhasati ca -ati ca virocati ca);
Dhp 387 (diva -ati adicco rattim abhati can di m a ... atha
sabbam ahorattil]l buddho -ati tejasa); Sn 348 (na
jotimanto pi nara -eyyurp); Bv 12:27 (cakkavattimanl
nama yatha -ati yojanarp); Mil273,16 (ayarp suriyo
sabbakalarp kathinarp -ati udahu kañci kalarp mandarp
-atl ti); Nidd-a I 321 ,22jol/. (suriyo -atl ti kuppati na
-atl ti kuppati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se tappatl ti) =As 367,11
(eds tappatl ti); Sadd 404,22 (tapa dittiyarp, ditti
virocanarp: diva -ati adicco); part.pr.
(a) tapa(t), mfn., Vin I 246,35* (nakkhattanarp mukhal]l
cando adicco -atarp mukharp); (b) tapanta, mfn., Sn 687
(suriyarp -antarp); Ps III 407,7 (-antanarp aggatta
adicco ... ); (e) tapamana, tappamana, mfn., Ap 350,2o
(mañcike phandamane tappamane ca atape); Spk II
291,23 (suriye uggacchante valikaya -amanaya, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se tappamanaya) = Vibh-a 6,5 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
tappamanaya); - (ii) warms oneself (in or by); -
part.pr. (a) tapanta, mfn., Sv 947,29 (aggirp -anto
nisldati; cf~V agnitap); (b) tapamana, tappamana, mfn.,
PsI 229,4 (tal]l .. . tor~agge nislditva balataparp
-amanarp, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se tappamanarp); Dhp-a I
164,4 (balatapal]l tappamano akasatale nisldi); -
2. shines upon; makes hot, bums; pains; harms; S I 49,12
(akatal]l dukkatarp seyyo paccha -ati dukkatarp, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se tappati) = Dhp 314 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tappati);
SI 198,12' (kasma pabbajitarp -e; Spki 289,13/oll.:
evariipal]l khl~asavarp divasoppam na -ati, tadisarp pana
kasma na -essatl ti vadati, Be, Se so; Ce tappati; Ee
tappati ... tappessatl ti); Ud 46,12* (yarp jlvitarp na -ati
mara~ante na socati; Ud-a 269,23: na -ati na badhati);
Ja 11 178,18* (na mayarp aggi -ati; 178,22': na marp ayarp
aggi -ati na taparp janeti): 202,4* (ma su tvarp akara
paparp yarp tvarp paccha katarp -e; 202,9·: ma tvarp
paparp akara yarp katarp paccha tarp yeva -eyya ti, Ce,
291 tapa ti
Ee so; Se tappeyya ti; Be tvarp yeva -eyya ti) =
III 160,23* (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se yarp tarp; 161,2·foll.: yarp
paparp taya katal]l paccha tarp tapeyya kilameyya, e e,
Ee, Se so; Be -eyya); IV 451 ,12* (vega katarp -ate
bhumipala); Ap 350,21 (na marp -ati atapo m~9apassa
idal]l phalarp); Sp 135,26 (-atl ti tapo, roseti vihesetl ti
vuttal]l hoti); Ap-a 284,7 (-e -eyya santapeyya
dukkhapeyya);- part.pr. tapanta, mfn., Ap 606,4 (-anto
yasasa lokarp); - aor. 3 sg. tapi, tappi, JaiV 443,11*
(ma vo -1 attakammaparadho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tappi);
- 3. is burnt, becomes hot; suffers pain; repents;
Vin IV 116,13 (visibbanapekkho ti tappitukamo); A I
49,3o foil. (so kayaduccarital]l me katan ti tappati akatarp
me kayasucaritan ti tappati; Mp II 93,5: tappatl ti
cittasantapena tappati anusocati); IV 97 ,2* (paccha so
vigate kodhe aggida99ho va tappati); Dhp 17 (idha
tappati pecca tappati); Ja I 375,5* (mokkho kalya~iya
sadhu mutva -ati papikarp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tappati;
375,11': papikarp pharusarp vacarp muñcitva vissajjetva
kathetva so puggalo -ati socati kilamati, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be tappati); 11 432,18* (paccha tappati dummedho;
432,26': tappatl ti socati); IV 172,23* (na so kamehi
tappati; 174,6'foll.: paññaya titto puriso kamehi na
pari9ayhatl ti attho ); 177,21 * (aladdha cittal]l tappati, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se -ati; 178,25': alabhitva tappati socati, eds
so); V 112,26* (yarp tvarp tata -e kammal]l pub be katam
asal]lsayarp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tapokammal]l); Mil 280,15
(na so datva -eyya); 406,6 (sappo manusse disva tappati
socati cintayati); Mp II 198,18 (yo hi palalaggirp ati-
upasali.kamitva tappati tassa sañrarp jhayati); -
part.pr. tappamana, mfn., Th 32 (ajaram jlramanena
tappamanena nibbutil]l; Th-a I 98,11 foll.: ragadlhi
ekadasahi agglhi 9ayhamanena); Mil 258,27 (imarp
udakal]l aggimhi tappamanam); Pj 11 459,31
(suriyatapena tappamane va~tamiile); - 4. inflicts pain
on oneself, practises austerities; Ja IV 299,15 (ekacce
ka~takapassayika bhavantu ekacce pañcataparp -antu
ekacce udakorohanakammarp karontu); V 401,18* (-anti
liikharp pi tapa1p); Sp 53,18 (keci pañcatape tappanti);
Sv 838,5 (pañcatapal]l tappati); part.pr.
(a) tapa(t), mfn., A V 191,24 (yaip .. . taparp -ato);
(b) tapanta, tappanta, mfn., Ja 11 359,17 (ataparp -anto,
Ee so; Be, Ce tappanto; Se tappento); Dhp-a I 150,21/oll.
(so hi kammatappanena tappanto . . . vipakatappanena
pana tappanto ... ); Th-a 11 21,9 (pañcataparp tappanta1p);
- (e) tappamana, mfn., Ja 11 366,3 (atapa1p tappamana)
= Dhp-a IV 87,3; - pp tatta2 , mfn. [S. tapta], heated,
hot; made red-hot; molten; V in III 90,27* (seyyo ayoguJo
bhutto -o aggisikhupamo) = Dhp 308; D III 85,12
(payaso -assa nibbayamanassa upari santanaka1p hoti);
MI 79,29* (so -o so sino eko bhil]lsanake vane); 87,18
(ta1p . . . -ena pi telena osiñcanti); Vv 84:4 (aññatra
parpsuhi ca valukahi ca -ahi u~hahi ca daru~ahi ca);
Ja V 269,1* (ta1p ... rudhira1p attasambhavarp tamba-
lohaviJ1narp va -a1p payenti mattighal]l); VI 110,9·
(nerayikasatta aggisantapena -a); Cp 1:2:2 (-aya
kathinabhumiya); Mil45,13 (-al]l ayoguJal]l); Sp 851,21
(-e udake sama~ero ta~9ule pakkhipati); 999,4 (yassa
pana laJate va uradlsu va -ena lohena lakkh~aip ahataip
hoti); Dhp-a I 197,21 (sarlraip suriyatejena -arp); -
tapa ti
fpp(a)tapaniya 1, tappaniya,mfn., Th-aii 21,10 (ekarp.
pañcataparp. tapantarp. brahmai_larp. disva kirp. brahmai_la
aññasmirp. tapaniye aññarp. tapatl ti aha, Be, Se so; Ce
tappantarp. . . . asmirp. tapaniye ... ; Ee tappantam ...
asmirp. tapaniye aññarp. tappatl ti); 21,16* (tal).ha avijja
bhavasailgatl ca te tappaniya hi na rüpakhandho, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee tapaniya); (b) tapitabba, mfn., A V 191,12
(naharp. gahapati sabbarp. taparp. tapitabban ti vadami);
(e) tappitabba, n., impers., Mi1406,s (yogina ...
tappitabbarp. socitabbarp. cintayitabbarp.); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. (a) tapeti\ -ayat¡l, makes bright; warms;
pains; Ja III 447,23* (na marp. tapati atapo atappa -ayanti
marp.); Sadd 553,23 (tapa dahe: -eti -ayati tapo tapo);-
absol. tapetvana, Ja III 154,7* (attharp. -etvana paleti
süriyo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atthailgametvana; 154,17' Joll.:
süriyo andhakararp. vidhamanto mahantarp. lokapadesarp.
-etvana puna sayarp. attharp. gacchati, Ce so; Ee, Se
tappetvana; Be mahantarp. alokarp. -etvana); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. (b) tapeti, -ayati, Sadd 553,24 (tapa dahe: ...
karite -eti -ayati); l. warms; warms oneself; bums;
Ap 577,2o (-ehi udakarp.); Ps II 101,20 (udakarp. viya
-eturp.); Spk III 243,32 (evarp. sante kirp. -etl ti
rasmitejarp., Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tappatl ti); -
part.pr. tapenta, mfn., Vin III 117,27 (bhikkhuno janta-
ghare udaravanirp. -entassa); Spk III 244,5 (sattha tejarp.
-ento nisinno ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce tappento); Dhp-a III
340,17;- 2.pains,torments; SI 189,18* (tam eva vacarp.
bhaseyya yayattanarp. na -aye; Spk I 274,24:
vippatisarena na -eyya na vihetheyya) = Sn 451 =
Th 1227; Ja III 16,24* (imani marp. Daddara -ayanti
vacaduruttani manussaloke; 17,1·: -ayantl ti
dukkhapenti); V 92,12' (ma tvarp. dahi ti tvarp. imarp.
patibbatarp. ma -eyyasi ti, Be, Ce so; Se -eyya; Ee jahi
ti ... ma varaya); 271 ,2s- (nicca1e satte tapatl ti tapano
ativiya -etl ti patapano); Sp 135,22 (-enti vihesenti);
Dhp-a III 139,6 (pacchanutapanen' eva narp. -etl ti); -
part.pr. tapayamana, mfn., Ja I 417,13'; - aor. 3 sg.
tapesi, Ap 542,4 (majjhailgato pi e' adicco na -esi sasi
yatha); - absol. (a) tapetva, Vin III 84,1o (tena hi
bhagini -ehi ti sa -etva gabbharp. patesi); Bv 7:28
(hutasano va -etva nibbuto so sasavako; Bv-a 171,17:
hutasano va -etva ti aggi viya tappetva, ayam eva va
patho); Mi1259,6 (udakarp. -etva); Sp 698,16 (vasiphalarp.
-etva udakarp. va khirarp. va ul).hapeti); (b) tapayitva,
Ja V 267,25*; - pass. pr. 3 sg. tapiyati, is heated; is
pained; Patis-a 270,33 (cittarp. kilissati -iyati badhiyatl ti
attho); Sadd 404,26 (tapa dhüpa santape: ... kamme
-iyati);- pp tapita, mfn., heated; Dhp-a I 58,21 (udakarp.
te -itarp.); Pj II 487,1 (sukusalena suvai_ll).akarena
sai!ghagitarp. sai!ghanentena -an ti);- iJc see atapa-;-
caus. pr. 3 sg. (e) tappeti\ bums, pains;causes oneself
pain; Ja II 7,27* (sani kammani -enti UI).harp.
v' ajjhohitarp. mukhe; 8,4·: sani kammani -enti socenti
kilamenti); III 235,2o (ekacce kal).takaseyyarp. kappetha
ekacce pañcataparp. tappetha, eds so); As 335,23 (yadi
UI).ha hutva -eyya);- absol. tappetva, Bv-a 171,17.
tapati 2, pr. 3 sg. [v'tap 4; S. trapate], is ashamed;
Dhatum 265 (tapu ubbege); Sadd 404,23 (tapa ubbege: ...
-ati uttapati ottapparp.).
tapana, mj{ -i)n. and m.fn. [cJ S. tapana], l. (mfn. and
292 tapaniya
m.f) (i) warming, shining; the sun; Jire, heat; Abh 63
(dinapati -o ravi); Ja V 201,23* (bhinnani kaghani huto
ca aggi -i pi te samita brahmacañ; 202,3·: -i ti
visibbana-aggisai!khata -i pi te samita va sayam eva
sarp.vidahita va hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee visivana-
aggi!!hasai!khata; or cooking vessel ? cJ S. tapani); -
(ii) causing torment or pain; the name oJ a mahaniraya;
Abh 657 (sailghato -o, Ce so; Be tapano); Ja V 266,14*
(athaparo mahavlci -o ca patapano, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tapano; 271,25': niccale satte tapatl ti -o ativiya tapetl ti
patapano, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tapano); Nidd I 405,5*
(kadariya -a ghora accimanto durasada, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be kadariyatapana; subject not clear; Nidd-a I 425,15:
sabbe pi te ussadehi saddhirp. anha mahaniraya kadariya
niccarp. tapantl ti kadariya -a, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
kadariyatapana); Mil 148,23 (kadariya -a mahaniraya
cavamana, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tapaniya); - 2. (n.)
(i) buming, harming; causing torment or pain (to);
Sp 135,3o (ye akusala dhamma 1okarp. -ato tapaniya ti
vuccanti); Pj I 151,3oJoll. (tapo nama abhijjha-
domanassadinarp. -ato indriyasarp.varo kosajjassa va
-ato viriyarp.); Cp-a 24,6 (sllarp. hi duccaritasai!kilesassa
-ato tapo ti vuccati); - ifc see kaya-; - (ii) pain,
torment; mental distress, remorse; It-a I 1O1,29 Joll. (-arp.
va dukkharp. . . . atha va tapan ti tena ti -arp.
pacchanutapo, vippatisaro ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tappanti tena ti); As 389,34 (katatta ca akatatta ca -arp.
veditabbarp.); -se e also tappana 1, tapana.
tapaniya\ mfn.,fpp oJtapati 1 qv.
tapaniya2 , mfn. [from tapana], connected with, causing,
pain or distress; Vin 111 3,15 (-' aharp. brahmal).a papake
akusale dhamme vadami kayaduccaritarp. vaciduccaritarp.
manoduccaritarp.; Sp 135,3o: ye ~usala dhamma lokarp.
tapanato -a ti vuccanti); A IV 97,7* (-ani kammani yani
dhammehi araka; Mp IV 48,24: -ani ti tapajanakani);
lt 24,22 (dve 'me bhikkhave dhamma -a; It-a I
101,28Joll.: idha e' eva samparaye ca tapanti vibadhenti
vihe!hentl ti -a, tapanarp. va dukkharp. . . . tassa
uppadanena e' eva anubalappadanena ca hita ti -a, atha
va tapanti tena ti tapanarp., pacchanutapo vippatisaro ti
attho, tassa hetubhavato hita ti -a, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tappanti tena ti tapanarp.); Ja IV 177,14 (tumhakarp. -e ca
atapaniye ca dhamme desessami); - atapaniya, mfn.,
not causing pain or distress; A V 243,7 (katamo ca
bhikkhave -o dhammo); It 25,17 (dve 'me bhikkhave
dhamma -a); Dhs 1305.
tapaniya 3, tapañña, tapaneyya, n. [S. tapaniya], gold
purified by Jire; Abh 488 (-arp. hiraññarp.); Vv 84:16
(vimanarp. ... 0 -pagehi ca sadhu channarp.; Vv-a 340,7:
0
-mayehi anekaratanamayehi ca chadanehi tattha tattha
sunhu chaditarp.); Thi 374 (0 -kata va dhitika;
Thi-a 235,29: rattasuvai_ll).ena vicarita, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
viracita); Ja V 408,26* (tapaneyyasannibharp.); VI 145,7*
0
( -kappanehi turailgehi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee turagehi; read
tapaniyakakappanehi turagehi with L. Alsdorf, 1967,
p. 286 ?); 218,6* (tapaññamai_lidai,l<;liini, Ce, Ee so; Be
kañcanamai_li-; Se suvai_ll).amai_li-; 218,30': 0 -SUVai_ll).ena ca
mai_lihi ca khacitadai_l<;lani); Sadd 397,14* (suval).I).assa hi
anekani namani ... jatarüparp. -arp. ... );- 0 -nibha, mfn.,
resembling gold purified by Jire; Ja V 372,16* (yassa
tapassatha
lohitaka tiila -a subha urmp. smp.hacca tiqhanti, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se tapaneyya-).
tapassatha in Ee at Dhp-a I 53,3 is wr; read kirp. na
passatha ... with Be, Ce, Se.
tapassi(n), mfn. and m.f [S. tapasvin] (m. sg. acc. -irp.,
-inarp.;pl. nom. -!, -ino), Sadd 793,3foll. (sí tapad!hi: -1
yasassl ... ); l. (mfn.) wretched; poor, miserable;
Abh 937 H tv anukampayarahe vutto); Sp 135,29 (loke
kap~apuriso -1 ti vuccati); Spkii 189,11 (devl rañño
sampattirp. disva aho -1 ti karuññakararp. dassesi, Be, Ce
so; Se aho vata -1 ti; Ee wr aho na pass! ti)= Mp I 172,30
(Be, Ce, Ee so; Se aho vata -1 ti) = Ap-a 258,21 (eds aho
vata -1 ti);- 2. (m.f) (one) who practises austerities; a
(non-buddhist) ascetic; Abh 433 (tapassl bhikkhu
sama1,1o); 937 H ... tapodhane); Vin I 234,31foll.
(atthi . . . pariyayo yena mmp. pariyayena samma
vadamano vadeyya -1 sam~o Gotamo tapassitaya
dhammarp. deseti); DI 161,23 (ekaccarp. -irp. lükhajlvirp.
passami); III 42,21 (aymp. ... -in o upakkileso hoti); S I
29,3* (pañcaveda satarp. sammp. -1 brahmal,la cararp.;
Spk I 81,2: -1 ti tapanissitaka hutva); 201 ,26* (bahü hi
sadda paccüha khamitabba -ina); Sn 284 (isayo pubbaka
asurp. saññatatta -ino; Pj II 314,24: -ino ti
indriyasarp.varatapayutta); Pv 18:14 (saññatatta -ino;
Pv-a 98,6: kayatapanasailkhato tapo etesarp. atth! ti -ino );
Ja IV 184,8• Hniyo pabbajita mul,l<;la sailghatiparuta);
309,23* (ajjhayakarp. sabbasamattavedarp. -inmp. maññatu
sabbaloko ); V 272,32' (saññatanarp. -ínmp. asaditatta);
Ap 19,23 (tehi sissehi parivuto santehi ca -ihi, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se -ibhi); 67,15 (visuddhanarp. ayarp. vaso
nimmalanmp. -inmp.); 613,13 (tato cuta manussesu
upapanna -in!); Sp 136,3 (te tape assi nirassi pahasi
vidhmp.sesl ti -!); Sadd 331,21 (bhikkhu yati sam~o
muni pabbajito anagaro -1 tapodhano ice etani
pariyayavacanani).
tapusa, tapüsa, n. [cf S. lex. trapu~a. trapusa], tin; ?
Sadd 921,21 (mattabhedo tava ... -mp. tapüsatp.).
tapeti1, tapayati\ caus. pr. 3 sg. oftapati 1 qv.
tapete, tapayati2 , caus. pr. 3 sg. oftappati 2 qv.
tappaka, mfn. [cf S. tarpaka], satisfying; Pj II 112,6
(analailkaritva alan ti akatva etam -an ti va sarabhütan ti
va evmp. agahetva) = Ap-a 187,33 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
ekmp. kappakan ti); - atappaka, mf(-ika)n., not
satiating; of which one cannot have enough; Sv 464,9
(pal,lltO ti -o) i= Spk I 195,18 (Be, Ce so; Se atapako; Ee
anappako); Ps IV 63,25 (-'-at!hena p~ltarp.); V 107,15
(ya esa vipassanüpekha nama esa santa esa pal,llta
atappika ti attho); Spk III 80,16 (p~ltataran ti --tararp.,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anappakatararp.); Patis-a 94,17 (--tta
uttamatta ca p~ltagho); 282,5 (nibbanarp. hi -aqhena
amatasadisan ti pi amatarp.);- --dassana, mfn., with the
sight of whom one is never sated; ? Ps II 328,19
(--dassananarp. .. . arahatarp.); - se e al so atappiya
(sv tappati 2), atappaníya, atappaneyya.
tappakkhika, mfn., see sv ta(d).
tappate, se e sv tapa ti 1.
tappate, pr. 3 sg. [vhp 3; S. triJyati], is satiated, is
satisfied (with, instr. or gen.); Vv 17:4 (sabbe na -amase
dassanena tarp.); Ja I 185,4* (accasanassa puriso
payasassa pi -ati; 185,8·: -ati titto hoti dhato suhito na
293 tappati
puna bhuñjitukamatmp. apajjati); III 342,1sjoll. (sagaro
sabbasavant!hi na -ati aggi upadanena na -ati ... catasso
parisa tathagatadassanena na -anti); 450,8• (appa pi
kama na alarp. bahühi pi na -ati); V 447,1o· (yatha aggi
indhanena na -ati evmp. eta pi ki1esaratiya, so read with
Be, Ce); VI 206,11* (dahatp. na -e asamatthatejo; 209,14·:
dahanto ... tava aggi na -eyya, Be, Se so; Ce tava aggi
na tape; Ee tava aggi na -e); Ap 72,3o (ima ca janata
tugha karmp. kubbarp. na -are, Be, Se so; Ce
kubbantanappakarp.; Ee kubbanti -are); 547,2 (rammatp.
ve)uvanarp. disva na -anti suvirp.hita); Sadd 487,10 (tapa
pll,lane: -ati tappanarp.); - pp titta 2 , mfn. [S. [riJta],
satisfied, satiated; having enough; filled; Th 660
(paññaya ye -a); Ja IV 172,22* (te ve -a ye paññaya -a);
Pp 27,3 (paccekasambuddha ye ca tathagatassa savaka
arahanto -a, sammasambuddho -o ca tappeta ca;
Pp-a 206,13: -o ti suhito pariyosito); Mil249,14 (subhutta
-a suhita dhata pll,lita paripul,ll,la); Ud-a 424,7
(samatittika ti tatasamarp. udakassa -a bharita); -
neg. atitta, mfn., unsatiated; not satisfied; wanting more;
D II 145,8 (atitta va bhikkhave bhikkhuparisa hoti atha
Anando tul,lhí hoti); M II 68,29 (üno loko atitto tal,lhadaso
ti); 72,32* (atittarüpo) = Th 777; A I 78,1 (dvinnmp.
bhikkhave dhammanarp. atitto appativano matugamo
kalarp. karoti); Dhp 48 (atittmp. yeva kamesu antako
kurute vasarp.); Ja V 354,15 (deviya... dharnmarp.
sul,lantiya dhammasavanena atittaya eva ratti vibhayi);
Patis I 63,23 (puthujjano sailkharupekhmp. atittatta
vipassati ... vltarago sailkharupekkhmp. tittatta vipassati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atittatta ... atittatta ... ; Patis-a 271,34:
atittatta ti vipassanaya kar~lyassa apariyositatta
app~ltabhavena); Ap 605,4 (atitta yeva passami rüparp.
nayananandanarp.); Cp-a 24,22 (danapltiya -o viya hutva
tasmirp. divase puna aharapariyeghirp. akatva); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. tappete, -ayati, tapete, tapayati 2, l. satisfies;
refreshes, gladdens; Dhatum 668 (tapa santapapíl,lane);
SI 100,19* (vanibbake -ayati annapanena p~<;iito);
It67,1* (-eti annapanena ... vanibbake); Pv 16:8
(bhikkhü . . . -ehi annapanena); Thí 430 (annena ca
panena ca -aya sam~e dvijatl ca); Ja VI 463,2* (-en tu
annapanena rathike pattikarake); Ap 23,4 (Sariputto ...
-ayissati pill,lino); 324,19 (megho thanaymp. -eti medinirp.
imarp.); Mil 227,9 (-ayati); Sadd 553,21 (tapa pll,lane:
tapeti tapayati); - part.pr. (a) tappenta, mfn., Ap 432,34
(-ento dhammavu!!hiya); (b) tappayanta, mf( -ayantl)n.,
Ap 23,2 (ganga . . . mahasamuddmp. appeti -ayantl
mahodadhirp.); Mi1296,23 (mahatimahamegho
abhivasseyya -ayanto dharal,litalmp.); - aor. 3 sg.
(a) tappesi, Ap 340,15 (yo me phalena -esi); (b) tappayl,
atappayi, Ap 334,23 (-ayi); Bv 15:2 (amatena -ay!
lokarp.; Bv-a 216,18: -ayí ti atappayi, pll,lesl ti attho);
Mhv 14:55 (atappayi); - absol. (a) tappetva, Cp 1:4:8
(dhanena vejjarp. -etva); (b) tappayitva, Ja VI 207,2*;
(e) tappiya, Mhv 5:67 (khajjabhojjena -iya);
2. becomes satisfied or satiated; Vin III 103,32
(bhuñjantu bhonto arahanto ti ... -en tu bhonto arahanto
ti); Ja II 443,17* (-etu dhanika piya, Be so; Se
dhanakamiya; Ce tappatu dhanakamika; Ee tappatu
dhanakamiya; 444,w·: sa mama piya dhanatthika imina
dhanena -etu püretu santugha hotü ti, Be, Se so; Ce
tappana
tappatu pürarp tugha hotü ti; Ee tappatu püra tugha hotü
ti); Spk I 206,15 (bhuñjatu bhavarr mahabrahma ... -etu
bhavarr mahabrahma ti); - pp tappita, m.fr¡. [S. tarpita],
satisfied; refreshed; Th 103 (dhammarasena -ito); Ja VI
199,14* (sabbakamehi -ito); Ap 2,32; Mi1346,25
(dhammameghena -itarr); Mhv 1:61 (tehi dibbanna-
panehi nagarajehi -ito); - fpp (a) tappitabba, n.,
impers., Mi1381,12 (yogina ... -jinasasanavararr
su~antenapi na tappitabbarr); (b) neg. atappiya, m.fr¡.,
l. insatiable; Ja III 342,18 (so!asa hi atappiyavatthüni
nama); Ps JI 139,18* (aggikkhandho samuddo ca
mahiccho capi puggalo . . . tayo p' ete atappiya); -
2. not satiating; of which one cannot have enough;
Bv 7:26 (yatha pi sagaro nama dassanena atappiyo tath'
eva tassa pavacanarr savanena atappiyarr; Bv-a 171,10:
atappiyo ti atittikaro atittijanano va, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
omit va); - see also atappanlya, atappaneyya, atappaya,
duttappaya, sutappaya.
tappana 1, n. [from tappati 1; cf S. tapana], burning; pain,
distress; Dhp-a I 150,2lfoll. (so hi kammatappanena
tappanto paparr me katan ti tappati tarp appamattakarr
-arp vipakatappanena pana tappanto . . . atipharusena
-ena ativiya tappatl ti);- see also tapana.
2
tappana 2, n. [from tappati ; S. tarpa~a], satisfaction;
refreshing; gladdening; Abh 468 (sohiccarr titti -arr);
759 (-arr tu ca pl~anarp); Th!-a 86,33 (indriyanarp
tosanavasena sañrassa -ena suddhi siya ti); Bv-a 174,14
(dhammamatavassena tappayante, -arr karonte
bhagavatl ti attho); Dhatup 597 (pi -e); Sadd 487,1o
(tapa pl~ane: tappati -arr);- ifc see netta-.
tapparama, m.fr¡., tapparaya~a. m.fr¡., tappurisa, m., see sv
ta(d).
2
tappeta(r), m. [from tappati ], one who satisfies; one who
gladdens; A I 87,7 (titto ca -a ca, ime kho bhikkhave dve
puggala dullabha lokasmin ti; Mp II 156,29: pacceka-
buddho ca tathagatasavako ca khl~asavo titto nama
tathagato araharp sammasambuddho titto ca -a ca);
Pp 27,3 (sammasambuddho titto ca -a ca; Pp-a 206,n: -a
ti aññesarr pi tittikaro ).
1 Bv-a 220,23: -an ti tamasali.khatarp mohandhakaran ti
tappeti\ caus. pr. 3 sg. oftapati qv.
2 attho); Mil389,18 (suriyo -arr vidhamati);
tappete, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftappati qv.
tappm.J.a, m.fr¡., see sv ta(d).
taphati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup trPhati, Wg § 28:24],
satisfies; Sadd 405,8 (tapha tittiyarr: ... -ati).
tabbarrsa, m., tabbatthuka, m.fr¡., tabbahula, m.fr¡., see sv
ta(d).
tabbipakkha, m.fr¡., tabbipaccanlka, m.fr¡., tabbi-
pariyaya, m., tabbipañta, m.fr¡., see sv ta(d).
tabbirahita, m.fr¡., see sv ta(d).
tabbisaya, m.fr¡., tabbisesana, n., see sv ta(d).
Vtam 1, Dhatum 327 (tama sali.kavibhüsane).
vtam 2 , [S. Vtam ?], to be exhausted; ? Dhatum 330 (tama
santve 'vasadiye)- see also nitammati.
-tama, [ts], a suffix l. expressing the superlative sense,
added to adjectives and prepositions; - 2.forming
ordinal numbers from cardinal numbers.
tama(s), m.n. (and m.fr¡. ?) [S. tamas] (sg. nom. -o, -arr;
acc. -arp; instr. -asa, -ena; gen. -assa (and -aso,
Sadd 118,6); loe. -asi, -amhi; pl. nom. -a, -ani;
iic tama-, tamo-), l. (m.n.) (i) darkness; mental
294 tama(s)
darkness, ignorance, error, Abh 70 (andhakaro -o
'nitthl); 975 (mohe tu ti mire ... -am anitthiyarr); V in III
4,33 (vijja uppanna -o vihato aloko uppanno; Sp 162,1:
moho pa!icchadakaghena -o ti vuccati); D III 217,3
(tayo -a, atltarr va addhanarr arabbha kaii.khati ... , Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se tisso kaii.kha; Sv 992,24: tayo -a ti
tamandhakaro sammoho avijjogho mahabhayo ti
vacanato avijja -o nama, eds so) t Vibh 367,21
(katamani tl~i -ani ... ); S I 51,11 * (andhakare -asi
pabhankaro); IV 127,26* (nivutanarr -o hoti andhakaro
apassatarr); Ud 9,6* (na tattha candima bhati -o tattha na
vijjati); 79,25* (balo -asa parivarito ); Sn 248 (pecca -arp
vajanti ye); 278 (vinipatarr samapanno gabbha gabbharp
-a -arr; Pj II 31 0,2o{oll.: matukucchito matukucchirr
candasuriyehi pi aviddharrsanlya asurakayatama -arp ca
samapanno); Ja I 40,13* (nihanitva -arr sabbarp suriyo
v' abbhuggato yatha); V 326,27* (adhigatamha -e
ñ~arr); 339,24* (andhena -asa; 341,21·: -asa ti -asi);
VI 221,18* (vyapagatarr -arr); Ap 41,16 (tamaggal!ena
pl!ito ñ~alokarr gavesami -ato parimuttiya); 92,13
(yathodayanto adicco vinodeti -arp sada); Vism 634,19
(rattibhage caturali.gasamannagatarr -arp pavattati);
672,17 (saccapa!icchadake -amhi antaradhapite); PsI
23,9 (dlpalokeneva -assa .. . pahanarr); Mp I 93,12*
(suttantesu asantesu pamughe vinayamhi ca -o
bhavissati loke suriye atthali.gate yatha); Mhv 1:28
(bhayarr sltarp -arp tesarr hantva); - ifc see andha-,
ogha-; - (ii) darkness, ignorance, as one of the three
constituents of prak¡ti (according to Sankhya
philosophy); Abh 975 (samyagu~e -am); - 2. (m.fr¡.)
dark, obscured; ? being in darkness; ? D III 233,9 foll.
(cattaro puggala, -o tamaparayano -o jotiparayano joti
tamaparayano joti jotiparayano; Sv 1025,23: -o ti
andhakarabhüto) t SI 93,26/oll. (Spk I 162,2o: nlce kule
paccajato ti adikena -ena yutto ti -o); S I 96,9* (upeti
nirayarr ghorarr -o tamaparayano ); - o• -andha-
kara, m., deep darkness; the darkness of error; Vv 9:6
(-amhi timlsikayarr padlpakalamhi adarr padlparr);
Bv 16:1 (-arr vidhametva atirocati sadevake;
(tama)-gata, n., darkness; MI 317,11 (adicco ... sabbarr
akasagatam -arr abhivihacca bhasati); Th-a I 36,zs;
Nidd-a II 45.11 (tamam eva -arr. andhakararr, yatha
güthagatarr muttagatan ti); - (tamo)-gata, m.fr¡., in
darkness, dark; Ap 92,11 (yatha atthali.gate suriye honti
satta -a); - (tamo)-nasa, m., destruction of darkness;
Sadd 119,9*; (tama)-nasaka, mfn., destroying
darkness; Ap 157,25 (addasarr jinarp .. . sabbaññurr
-arp, Be, Ce so; Ee sabbaññütam anasavarr; Se
sabbaññuttamanasakarr); (tamo)-nuda, (tama)-
nuda, m.fr¡., dispelling darkness; A I 215,9* (cando ca
suriyo ca ... -a te pana antalikkhaga); Sn 1133 (-o
buddho samantacakkhu); 1136 (eko tamanud' aslno
jatima so pabhaii.karo; Pj JI 605,23: -o aslno); Vv 35:2
(bhati ca dasa disa nabhe va suriyo sarade -o
sahassararpsl, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tamanudo); Ja VI 319,9*
(ayam eso -o); Mil 1,5* (raja citrakathirr ukkadhararr
-arr apucchi nipu~e pañhe); Sadd 118,6 (-o); Mhv 1:58
(-o); - (tama)-parayana, m.fr¡., attaining to darkness;
tamal a
D III 233,9foll. (tamo -o ... joti -o; Sv 1025,24: tamam
eva para¡p ayana¡p gati assa ti -o) f. S 1 93,26 (Spk 1
J62,21: kayaduccaritadihi puna nirayatamupagamanato
-o); Ja Il 17,9 (tadisa¡p kamma¡p katva tamo -o
bhavissasi); Pp 51,21 (katha¡p ca puggalo tamo hoti -o);
Sp 740,4 (ma tamo -o ahosl ti); Sadd 119,1;- (tamo)-
hara, m(jn)., removing darkness; the moon; Sadd 118,6.
tamatagge, [?] in the highest degree; ? at the end of
ignorance; ? D II 1O1,3 (y e hi keci . . . attadlpa
viharissanti . . . tamatagge me te Ananda bhikkhu
bhavissanti ye keci sikkhakama ti; Sv 548,34: -e ti tama-
agge, majjhe takaro padasandhivasena vutto, ida¡p
vutta¡p hoti ime aggatama ti tamatagga ti eva¡p sabba¡p
tamayoga¡p chinditva ativiya agge uttamabhave te
Ananda mama¡p bhikkhu bhavissanti, tesa¡p ati-agge
bhavissanti ye keci sikkhakama sabbe pi te catu-
satipa!!hanagocara ca bhikkhu agge bhavissantl ti, Be so;
Ce, E e, Se ime aggatama aggatama ti ... ; Ee kesa¡p ati-
agge bhavissanti ... ; Ce, Ee sabbesa¡p pi te ... ; Sv-p! II
189,6 foll.: tamagge ti tamayogassa agge tassa
atikkantabhavato) =S V 154,17 (Spk III 204,25 = Sv, but
eds tamasota¡p chinditva; Be, Se ... sabbesa¡p tesa¡p ... ;
E e kesa¡p . . . sabbe te ... ; Ce ime aggatama sabba¡p
tamasota¡p chinditva ... sabbe te ... ; Spk-! [Be] II
4 ?2,22 foil.: tama-agge ti tamayogabhavena sadevakassa
lokassa agge, sabbesan ti sabbesa¡p sikkhakamana¡p).
tamala, m. [ts], a plant; SAF: Joseph 's coat, Amaranthus
dubius Mart.; Abh 573 (tapiñjo ca -o); Pv 35:5 (-a¡p
uppala¡p capi paccaggha¡p ca vi1epana¡p thupa¡p
harantiyo, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ta ma1a¡p); Ap 197,12
(
0
-puppha¡p paggayha); Sp 1218,22 ( 0 -patta¡p pana
aññehi missam eva vagati).
tamba (occasionally written tamba), mfn. and m.n.
[S. tamra], l. (mjn.) of a coppery red colour; Abh 95
(tambamañjettharohita); 963 (-o ratte tilingiko ); Ja IV
287,7• (-ani himavato pabbatassa kli!ani; 287,21·: -anl ti
manosilamayani); Vism 183,10 (sace vammiko hoti so
pi . . . -o va kajo va seto va); Thi-a 248,28 (lakharas-
arattehi viya -ehi Jomehi samannagato); Pa!is-a 153,2
(kesa pa!hamam eva -a honti tato kajaka tato seta); -
2. (n.) copper; Abh 486; 963 (lohabhede mata¡p -a¡p);
Ja I 88,32 ( -va~~a¡p udaka¡p hegha viravanta¡p gacchati,
0 0
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tamba-)= Sp J006,21 (Be, Ce so; Ee,
(ma~imaya
Se tamba-); Ap3ll,28 0
-maya
so~~arajatapaduka, Be, Se so; Ce kambalika; Ee
ma~<;Ialaka); - 3. (m.) one of the kinds of elephant;
Abh 361; Sv 573,17' ( ... pingaJo pabbateyyako hemavato
ca -o ca ... ); Ps II 26,5foll. (ya¡p dasanna¡p p~<;Iarana¡p
[bala¡p] ta¡p ekassa -assa ya¡p dasanna¡p -ana¡p ta¡p
ekassa pingalassa); - o• -akkhika, mfn. [from tamba +
akkhi 1], with red eyes; Saddh 286 (-e vankada!he ...
yamadute tada disva); - 0 -kipillika, m., -a,f, a red
ant; Ja IV 375,19 (handa ca ta¡p sama~a¡p -ehi
khadapessaml ti kodhavasena therassa sañre --pu!a¡p
bhindapesi); V 39,4 (tassa sarlre sukkhada~<;Iakamissani
pura~apa~~ani e' eva -ani ca pati¡psu); Spk II
394,18foll. (raja kuddho ... -ahi na¡p khadapessaml ti
gacchanto ekasmi¡p asokarukkhe -ana¡p pu!a¡p disva);
0
- -cüJa, m. a cock; Abh 640 (-o ca kukku!o); Ja III
265,18* (sucittapattacchadana -a vihañgama oroha duma-
295 taya
sakhaya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se lambacüla); - 0 -cüJaka, m.,
a cock; Ap 17,1 (kokila -a, Be, Ee so; Ce 0 -cujika; Se
lambacujaka) quoted Ap-a 216,23* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
tumbacujika);- 0 -dathika, mfn., with a red moustache
(and N.pr. ?); Ja V 42,14 (bahalamassu¡p -a¡p ...
nesada¡p disva); Dhp-a Il 203,8; Ud-a 289,24; -
o -nakha, mf( -a, -1 ?)n., with red nails; Vv 81:21 (tassa
-e pacte jivhaya parilehisa¡p); Ja V 215,14* (-a suloma
bahamudu candanasaralitta . . . nañ); VI 290,12*
(sunisam ... -im sunettam, Be, Se so; Ce, E e 0 -nakhi-
sun~tt~); Vv-; 315,31 (-~ta¡p);- ifc se e jala- (sv jala\
0
- -puppha, n., a red jlower; or a particular plant;
Ap 176,12* (pupphita¡p padapa¡p disva . . . -a¡p
gahetvana); - 0 -bhajana, n., a copper vessel; Dhp-a I
395,12 (--pürani pañca [saka!asatani]); - 0 -loha, m.n.,
copper; Vin I 190,27 (na --maya paduka dharetabba);
M III 186,15 (taro ena¡p bhikkhave nirayapala ... tatta¡p
-a¡p mukhe asiñcanti); Ja II 296,17' (ayan ti kajaloha¡p
lohan ti -a¡p); Mi1267,2s (kaja1oha¡p -a¡p vagaloha¡p
ka¡psaloha¡p); Sp 1208,24 (-en a va rajatena va kataya
pelaya); Mhv 27:42 (-'-ighakah' eso pasado chadito
ahu); 28:16 (Tambapighe -a¡p samu!!hahi).
tambaka 1, mfn.? [tamba+ ka2; cfS. tamraka], (made of)
copper; Vin I 198,24* (in uddana: tipuslsa¡p ca -a;
cf 190,27: na tambalohamaya paduka dharetabba).
tambaka 2 , m. [cfS. lex. tamrika], a plant; SAF: Joseph's
coat, Amaranthus dubius Mart.; Abh 598 (-o ca
kalambako); Sp 832,29 (mülakhadaniye. .. 0 -müla¡p
ta~<;Iuleyyakamüla¡p ... ); 835,11 (pattakhadaniye ... -o
ta~<;Iuleyyako ... ); 836,6 (pupphakhadanlye ...
0
-puppha¡p ... ).
tambüla, tambu1a, n. [S. tambüla], betel, esp. its leaves;
Ja I 266,7 (pañcasugandhikaparivara¡p -a¡p aharitva
ada¡psu, Ee, Se so; Be -suparibhavita¡p; Ce -parivasa¡p);
II 303,2 (aha¡p pubbe bahu¡p labhami idani pana
0
-matta¡p pi na labhami, E e so; Be, Ce, Se tambula- );
320,1 (bhojanapariyosane e' assa attano pivanapaniya¡p
e' eva -a¡p ca dapetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tambula¡p);
V 315,4 (-a¡p pahi~i -a¡p na icchi, Be, Ce so; Se
0
tambula¡p; E e wrr müle ... müla¡p); Sp 836,3 ( -pa~~a¡p,
Be, Ce, E e so; Se tambo la-); Mhv 35:62 ( -a¡p); -
-takkolaka, n., betel and kakkola berry (perfume); Ja I
291 ,1s (bahuni -' -adini e' eva nanapupphani ca adasi);
0
- -pasibbaka, m. a bag for betel leaves; Ja V 46,s
(-a¡p vi ya ukkhipitva, Be, Ce so; Se tambu1a-; Ee
pupa-); VI 367,12 (eka¡p sa!aka¡p -e !hapetva, Ce so; Ee
tambu1a-; Se cüjapasibbake; Be ekasa!akayuga¡p -e
!hapetva).
tambüli, tambüll, f [S. tambull], the betel plant, Piper
betle L.; Abh 589 (naga1ata tu -1, Be so; Ce tambull).
tammaya, see sv ta(d).
taya, n. [S. traya], a triad; three things; Vism 513,15* (-a¡p
idha nirodhasuñña¡p -ena tenapi nibbuti suñña);
Sv 231,7 (sara~a¡p sar~agamana¡p yo ca sar~a¡p
gacchati ida¡p -a¡p veditabba¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
naya¡p) = Mp II !08,28; Sv 456,22 (yaya jatiya sati ida¡p
-a¡p paññayati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dvaya¡p); Th-a 11
252,32 (acaragocarasampatti ajivaparisuddhi indriyesu
guttadvarata ti eta¡p -a¡p); - ifc see pi!aka-, bhava-,
yojana-, ratana-, vatthu-, sanglti-.
tayati
tayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tayate, Wg § 14:6], goes;
Sadd 417,3o (taya ... gatiyarp.: ... -ati).
taya, instr. oftva~ qv.
tayi, loe. oftva~ qv.
tayida~ [tad + idarp.], see sv ta(d).
tayi, f [cf S. trayi], the three vedas; Abh 108.
tayo, tayas, m. nom./acc. ofti2 qv;- also occasionally iic
for ti 2, eg tayojanavatthu, the story of the three people,
Dhp-a III 38,1; tayodhammajataka, 'the three qualities
jataka', Ja I 283,5;- see also tayodasa.
tayodasa, num. [S. trayodasa], 13; Mhv p. 318,18 ( -rajako
0
nama chatti~satimo paricchedo);- see also terasa.
-tara\ [ts], a suffix expressing a comparative (and
sometimes superlative) sense, added to adjectives,
nouns, adverbs and prepositions.
tara 2 , mfn. and m.n. [ts], l. (mfn.) crossing, passing over
or beyond; - ifc see ogha-, maccu-; - 2. (m.) a
crossing; a passing over; Ja III 230,27· (yo pan' esa taresi
nama -arp. esati paratirarp. gantukamo hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be
yo pan' esa paresi nama paratira~ esati; Se yo paratiresi
nama tirarp. esati); - ifc see duttara, sukha-; -
3.(m.n.)a raft; Abh665 (-o); Sadd426,1* (nava p1avo
-arp. poto).
taranga, m. [ts], a wave; a succession; Abh 662 (-o ca
tatha bhailgo); Nidd-a I 395,32 (mahasamudde kira
mahindavici nama saghi yojanani uggacchati 0 -vici
nama PaJ.lQ.asa yojanani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gailgavici);
Bv-a 152,17 (ümi ti viciyo -a); - ifc see thera-; -
0
-vatta, n. [or cfS. turailga ?], a particular way of
reciting; ? Sp 1202,16 (sarabhaññe kira --dohakavatta-
ga1itavattadini dvatti~savattani atthi; Sp-t [Be] III
381,10: -' -adina~ uccaraQ.avidhanani naghappayogani);
Sadd 633,4 (in cpd); - see also uttmigatarailgabhanga
(sv uttunga).
taraccha (and taracchi ?), m., l. [S. tarak~u. tarak~a] a
hyena; Abh 611 (-o tu migadano ); Vin I 220,11
(luddaka ... -arp. hantva ma~sarp. paribhuñjanti); A III
101,31 (dipina va acchena va -ena va); Mi1267,22 (accha
koka -a); As 331,22 (-ana~ pi abara~ upadaya
hatthinarp. aharo sukhumo); - 2. a member of a
particular clan or people; Sp 96,22 (raja mahabodhi-
rakkhaJ_latthaya... agha gopakaku1ani agha 0 -kulani
attha kalingakulani datva; Sp-t [Be] I 183,3foll.: gopaka
rajakammino tatha -a ti mahagaJ.lthipade vuttarp.,
gaJ.lthipade pana bodhisiñcanattha~ khiradhenu-
palanatthaya 0
-kulani kalingakulani vissasikani
padhanamanussakulani ti) f. Mhv 19:2 (gopakanarp.
-anarp. kulinganarp. kulani ca); Mhv 42:30 (-a eva nentü
ti); - see also acchakokataracchayo (sv accha2).
taral}a, n., mfn., and -a,f [cfS. taraJ_la], l. (n.f)
(i) crossing, passing over or beyond; floating; escaping
from; Dhatup 241 (tara -e); Dhatum 344 (tara -asmi~);
D III 55,1 (tiQ.Q.O so bhagava -aya dhammarp. deseti;
Sv 842,lz: mahajanassa oghanittharaJ_latthaya); Patis II
99,3o (katharp. o• -atthena samathavipassanarp.
yuganandharp. bhaveti; Patis-a 587,23: o• -aghena ti
anosiditva pilavanatthena atikkamanaghena va);
Ap 238,11 (mahapathamhi visame setu karapito maya
o• -atthaya lokassa); Ps III 200,11 (-arp. va hotu maraJ.larp.
va, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a~ va hotu ataraQ.a~ va) f. Spk II
296 tara ti
183,22 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se amaraJ_larp. va); It-a I 15,27
(paññaya saya~ -a~ karuQ.aya paresarp. taraJ_la~);
Sadd 425,28 (-a~); - ifc see ogha-, tiriyarp.-; -
(ii) carrying over; helping to cross; Ap 80,4 (catunavut'
ito kappe taresi~ yarp. narasabharp. duggati~
nabhijanami -aya ida~ phala~. Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
taraJ_laya) f. 204,26 (eds so) f. 234,7 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
taraJ_laya); 559,12 (itara~ -ay' aha~ nivatta, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se taraJ_layaharp.); Bv 10:31 (sa~sarasota~ -aya
sesake patipannake dhammasetu~ daJharp. katva, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se taraJ_laya; Bv-a 189,z6foll.: sa~sarasagarassa
o• -attha~ . . . sesapuggale sarp.sarato taretu~ dhamma-
setu~ thapetva); - 2. (mfn.) crossing; who crosses;
Nidd-a I 436,1 (evarp. maccutaro siya ti eva~ maraJ_lassa
-o bhaveyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee bhavissasi);- 3. (n.) a
boat; Sadd 425,29 (-arp. vuccati nava tarati udakapitthe
plavati taran ti uttaranti va nadi~ etena ti atthena); 467,32
(nava poto plavo jalayanarp. -an ti navabhidhanani); -
0
-pafitaral}a, n., crossing and returning; Spk III 135,13
(orimatirato paratira~ paratirato orimatiran ti -a~
katu~ sakkonti);- see also taraQ.I, taraJ_la.
taral}aka, mfn. [taraJ_la + ka2], who crosses; - ifc see
nadi-.
tarai}I, f [ts ], a boat; Abh 666 (-I tari nava); Nidd-a I
279,26 (0 -sailkhataya navaya).
tarati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. tarati], crosses; pass es o ver; eros ses
to; crosses by swimming; floats; gets beyond, surmounts,
overcomes; Dhatup 241 (tara taraQ.e); Dhatum 344;
Vin III 49,11 (nava nama yaya -ati); D II 89,9 (yena
titthena gailgarp. nadi~ -issati); S I 4,21 * (na
maccudheyyassa -eyya pararp.; Spk I 27,1: -eyya ti
pativijjheyya papUQ.eyya va); V 168,14* (-issanti) quoted
Nidd-a I 53,17* (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -issare); Ud 78,3* (so
kalen' eva-e visattikarp.; Ud-a 377,5: visattikasailkhata~
taQ.ha~ -eyya vitaritva tassa paratire tittheyya ti
adhippayo); Sn 273 (te duttara~ ogham ima~ -anti
atiQ.Q.apubbarp. apunabbhavaya); 1064 (eva~ tuvarp.
ogham ima~ -esi; Pj II 592,28: -esi ti -eyyasi; or
possibly part.fut.); 1070 (-assu ogharp.); Thi 10
(upasame -e ogharp. maccudheyyarp. suduttara~); Ja IV
164,2* (tam eva nava~ abhiruyha sabbe evarp. maya~
sotthi -emu para~; 164,1r: -emü ti -issama, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -eyyama); V 491 ,9* (-anti jatimaraQ.assa pararp.);
VI 14,11* (sabbe amitte -ati; 14,3o·: -ati ti atikkamati);
36,18* (sanna aññe taram' aharp.); Ap 20,27 (kailkhasotarp.
-anti te); Mil 35,4 (raja cakkavatti ... udaka~ -eyya);
332,3o (sa~sara~ -ati); Sp 861,6 (plavati ti -ati);
Patis-a 620,37 (sotapattimaggo hi apayaloka~ -ati);
As 214,1 (loka~ -ati ti 1okuttara~); Sadd 425,28 (tara
plavanataraQ.esu: -ati); part.pr. (a) tara(t), mfn.,
Patis II 99,31 (-ato); (b) taranta1, mft-anti)n., Vin I 191,1
(nadiya gavina~ -antinarp.); Ja VI 35,16 (ajja me sattamo
divaso samudda~ -antassa); Sp 861,6 (hatthehi
-antassa); (e) taramana 1, mfn., A II 75,33* (gunnarp. ca
-amanana~ jimha~ gacchati pungavo) f. Ja III 111,17*;
Ap-a 484,19 (bhagirasigailgaya -amane bhikkhü disva);
- part.fut. taresi(n), mfn., Ja III 230,21* (añño hi
tÍQ.Q.assa mano añño hoti -esino, Ce, Ee so; Be paresino;
Se tiresino; cf230,z7·: yo pan' esa -esl nama tararp. esati
paratirarp. gantukamo hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be yo pan' esa
tara ti
pares! nama paratirarp esati paratirarp gantukamo hoti;
Se yo paratiresi nama tirarp esati paratira111 gantukamo
hoti);- aor. 3 sg. (a) atari [ef S. atañt], A I 133,11 (atari
so jatijaran ti brümi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee atari) = Sn 1048;
Sn 355 (atari jati111 maraJ.larp asesarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
jatimaraJ.larp); 857 (atari so visattika111); (b) atan, SI
32,25* (patalarp atari isi); Ja III 189,23* (katha111
samuddarp atari); 453,16* (eso hi atañ al).l).aval11 yarp
-itva vicaranti vitasoka, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atari; atari
better metrically ?); Nidd I 422,33 (atari);
3 pi. (a) ataru(111), Sn 1045 (ataru jati111 ca jara111 ca
marisa, Ee, Se so; Be ataru111; Ce ataru); (b) ataru111, SI
35,s•; (e) tari111su, atari111su, S V 168,14* (etena maggena
-il11su pubbe, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atari111su) = 186,13* (Be
so: Se atari111su; Ce, Ee atarpsu) quoted Nidd I 456,5*
1Be, Ce so; Ee, Se atari111su), Nidd-a I 53,16* (eds so) and
Pa~is-a 645,33* (eds ata111su); Sn 1046 (natari111su
jatijaran ti brümi, eds so, unmetrieal; read natarisu111 ?);
Sadd 836,2 (atari111su); (d) ata111su, S V 186,13* (Ce, Ee
so: Be -i111su; Se atari111su) quoted Pa~is-a 645,33* (eds
so) and Sadd 835,3o; - part.perfaet. Ül).l).avi(n), mfn.,
"·ho has crossed or overcome; Nidd I 114,19 (cattavi ti
tadi til).l).avl ti tadi; Nidd-a I 245,6: samsararp
atikkamitava); - inf taritu111, taritu111, A Il 200,29
1bhabbo nu kho so puriso nadi111 -itun ti); Sn 1069 (eko
aha111 Sakka mahantam ogha111 ... anissito no visahami
taritu111, prob. me); JaiV 17,7; Mil351,12 (yadi
nadisara111 bahuna -itu111 samattho bhavati); Spk Ili 19,27
1kileSaJ.ll).aVai11 taritukamena, Be, Ce, E e so; Se turitu- );
- absol. (a) taritva, Thl 360 (raJ.larp -itva kamana111, Ce
so: Be, Ee, Se karitva; Thi-a 228,15: kamanarp raJ.larp
-itva tarp ca maya katabbarp ariyamaggasampahararp
katva, eds so); Ja Ili 453,17*; V 62,1 (ganga111 -itva
paratira111 gacchami); Sv 211,27 (til).l).avicikiccho ti
\ icikiccha111 -itva atikkamitva ~hito); Dhp-a II 161,9
1etarp suduttara111 duratikkama111 maccudheyya111 -itva
atikkamitva nibbanapara111 gamissanti ti);
neg. ataritva 1, Pj II 329,27; (b) taritvana, Ap 501,26
1bhaVaJ.ll).avarp -itvana); Mhv 18:8 (mahodadhi111
-itvana); - pp (a) til}l}a, mfn. [S. tifl)a], l. (aet.) who
has crossed; who has gane beyond; who has eseaped
l_from); Vin I 38,20* (-o -ehi saha puriil)aja~ilehi); SI
1.:2• (passami brahmal).al11 parinibbutarp . . . -arp loke
úsattikarp); IV 157,9 (-o paragato thale ti~~ati);
Cd 90,15* (kulla111 hi jano bandhati -a medhavino jana);
Ja VI 57,10* (massu -o amaññittho; 57,13': kilesasimarp
-o atikkanto 'smiti ma maññittho); Ap 543,5 (sa -a
sarpsarasagara, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se til).l).a-
samsarasagara); - ife see ogha-; - neg. atil).l).a, mfn.,
\'in III 69,6 (tva111 atil).l).e taresi ti); Ja III 230,20* (atil).l).atp
yeva yacassu apararp tata navika); Pa~is I 130,33 (aharp
. : · arnhi Ül).l).O lo k o ca ati!)!) O); - 2. (pass.) crossed;
gane beyond; D II 276,2o (-a m' ettha kankha vigata
kathamkatha); Ps III 93,1 (-a vicikiccha anena ti
tiJ;J.l)avicikiccho); - pp (b) tarita\ mjn., erossed; gane
beyond; Sv 657,22 (til)l)a -a vicikiccha assa ti
Ül).l).avicikiccho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tarita); Vv-a 284,19
'sarpsaramahoghassa --tta oghatil).l).al11);
1pp taritabba 1, mfn., V in IV 65,3 (antaramagge nadi
-itabba hoti); Vv-a 334,26 (kantaro, udaka111 gahetva
297 tara ti
taritabbaghana111); - caus. pr. 3 sg. tiireti\ -ayati 1,
earries or leads over or aeross; reseues, saves (from);
Vin III 69,7 (tva111 atil).l).e -esi ti; Sp 401,2: sa111sarato
atil).l).e ... -esi parimocesi ti); IV 228,11 (ta bhikkhuniyo
navike upasaiikamitva etad avocu111 sadhu no avuso
-etha ti); Sn 321 (so -aye tattha bahii pi aññe); Vv 81:17
(aha111 lokarp -ayissa111 patto sambodhim uttama111);
Th 1131 (-ehi ogha mahato suduttara); Ja I 62,23 foil.
(tata Kanthaka tvarp ajja ekaratti111 marp -aya aharp tarp
nissaya buddho hutva sadevakarp loka111 -essami ti);
Ap 47,22 (khantiya ... sadevaka111 so -eti, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se tara ti); 126,16 (-ayissati Ül).l).O 'yarp); Mil 376,26
(nava .. . bahu111 pi janarp -ayati); Vism 208,16foll.
(yatha satthavaho satthe kantararp -eti . . . evam eva
bhagava ... satte kantara111 -eti jatikantara111 -eti ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee bhagava .. . satthe kantara111 -eti ... )
Dhp-a III 249,26 (buddha uppajjamana mahajana111
ragakantaradihi -enti, Be, Ce, Se so: Ee raga-
kantaradini); Cp-a 14,22 (yanniinaharp pi ... sadevakarp
loka111 sa111saramahaJ.ll)avato -eyyan ti): 289,28 (paññaya
saya111 tarati karul).aya pare -eti): part.pr.
(a) tarenta, mfn., PsI 192,3 (-ento); (b) taraya(t), mfn.,
A II 24,25* (mutto mocayatarp aggo tÍl).l)O -ayata111 varo);
(e) tarayanta, mfn., MI 386,26* (Ül)l)assa -ayantassa
bhagavato); Ap 175,21 (nibbapayantarp janata111 tÍI)l)atp
-ayata111 muni111, Ee, Se so, sg. aee.; Be, Ce -ayatarp
vararp; Ap-a 446,26: sayarp sarpsarato til).l)al11 sabbasatte
sarpsarato -ayantarp atikkamenta111 catunnarp saccana111
munanato muni111, eds so); 388,5 (-ayanto mahajana111);
- aor. 3 sg. (a) taresi, ataresi, Sn 539 (dukkhassanta-
kara ataresi ma111, eds so, unmetrical; read atarayi? Pj II
435,2o: kaiikhato ma111 -esi); Th 839 (til).l).O -es' imarp
pajarp); Ja II 335,25 (arakkhikajeghako .. . satthavaha-
puttarp sotthina kantararp -esi); Ap 51,23 (-esi);
Ap-a 304,6 (ataresi); (b) taray!, atarayi, Sn 540
(vicikiccharp marp -ayi namo te, Ce so; Be -ayi; Se
atarayi; E e ataresi, unmetrieal); Bv-a 171,12 (-ayi); -
inf (a) tareturp, V in IV 228,12; (b) tarayiturp, tarayetum,
Sn 319 (so vuyhamano anusotagami kirp so pare
sakkhati -ayeturp, prob. me); Mil242,18* (-ayiturp); -
absol. (a) taretva, Ja III 230,4 (gangarp taritukamarp
janarp pa~hamarp -etva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se taritva);
(b) taretvana, Ja III 230,9* (pubbe janarp -etvana paccha
yacati vetanarp, Be, Ee so: Ce, Se tarayitva);
(e) tarayitva 1, Ap 400,3; Mil330,15*; - pp tarita, mfn.,
taken across; rescued; Ap 532,10 (nimuggaharp taya
putta -ita bhavasagara); - taritataritatarayitaro, m.pl.,
(those) who have been helped to cross, who have
eros sed and who help (others) to cross; Cp-a 321,3
(taritataritatarayitiinarp anubuddhapaccekabuddha-
sammasambuddhanam, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
taritatarita-); jpp tarayitabba 1, mfn., Mil 376,29
(sadevako loko -ayitabbo);- see also tireti.
tarati2, turati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. tvarate and vltur], is in a
hurry, makes Izaste; runs; Th 291 (yo dandhakale -ati) f.
Ja III 141,2*; Sadd 426,3 (tara sambhame: ... -ati); -
part.pr. (a) neg. atara(t), mfn., Vin II 231,15* (in uddana:
omunCl chattam khandhe ca ataram ca);
(b) taranti, mjn., .Th-a II 123,29 (dandhayitabb~ -anto);
- neg. ataranta, mfn., Sv 252,19 (ataramano ti ataranto,
tarala
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se aturito); (e) taramana2, mfn., M III
230,2o (ataramano va bhaseyya no -amano ti); Ja IV
433,8• (ughehi samma -amano); VI 423,6* (na siñ
-amanassa; 423,9·: ataramanassa sir! hoti -amanena
kata~T~ kamm~ na sobhati); Bv 1:49 (-amana
upagamu~T~; Bv-a47,31: -amana ti turita); Vism 105,13;
- taramanarüpa, mfn., in great haste, absolutely
hurrying; S I 50,n; Sn 417 (-amanarüpo niyyasi); Ja V
166,25* (gacch' eva kho tv~ -amanarüpo ); VI 302,4•
(hand' ehi dan! -amanarüpo digho hi addha ayaiTI
purattha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr hand' esa hidani); -
neg. ataramana, mfn., Vin 11 208,3 (ataramanena aramo
pavisitabbo ); D 11 178,13 (ataramano deva yahi yatha ta~T~
may~ cirataraiTI passeyyama ti); - ataramano in Ce,
Ee at Th-a III 200,29 is prob. wr for acirayamano (Be, Se
so);- aor. 2 sg. turittho, Ja VI 229,11* (saiTlsarasuddhi
sabbesaiTI ma turittho anagate, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se turito);
- absol. neg. ataritva2, aturitva, Ja I 136,22' (ataritva
avegayitva, Be, Ce so; Se aturitva; Ee aturitva avega
hitva); - pp turita, tarita2, mfn. and n. [S. tvarita],
l. (mfn.) in a hurry; hastening; Abh 379 (-o); Vin IV
161,13 (so brahmaJ:.lo saritva -o adhavitva); Sn 1014 (-a
pabbatam aruhu~T~); Vv 80:8 (so masakhett~ -o
avasari~T~; V v-a 311,8: -o ti -o sambhamanto) quoted
Sadd 426,4foll. (tarito avasarin ti paJI nidassan~. tattha
tarito ti -o sambhanto); Spk I 24,5 (rattindivan~
taritabhavo; cfSpk I 23,24foll.: rattiyo ... puggala~T~ ...
tarayanti slgha~T~ sighaiT~ gamayanti); Pv-a 181,7 (-o
hutva taramanarüpo hutva); Mhv 5:75; - turita~T~, adv.,
in haste; quickly; Abh 40 ( -a~T~); Thi 482 (aruhi -a~T~);
Sp 280,16 (aggina da<;l<;lho viya ca -~ vughasi); -
2. (n.) haste; Sp 170,24* (bhaye kodhe pasaiTlsay~
-e... kare ame1.1<;iit~ budho); turitabhi-
nipati(n), mfn., rushing in haste; Ja 11 7,26*; -
turitaturita, mfn., in very great haste; running quickly;
Ja V 178,2s; Mill47,17 (te gamika ii:J:.lapakassa vacanena
--turita sannipatitva); Vism 259,4 (--turita vilumpanti);
- --turita~T~. --turitena, adv., Ja I 89,29 (raja ...
--turita~T~ nikkhamitva vegena gantva); IV 490,28
(kalyii:J:.l~ hi --turiten' eva katabba~T~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
turiten' eva); Mp V 58,15 (bhagava ta~T~ --turita~T~
agacchanta~T~ disva); Dhp-a II1 4,11 (abhittharetha ti
--turita~T~ sighaslgh~ kareyya ti attho); - neg.
aturita, mfn., Vin V 163,31 (aturitena bhavitabb~);
Sv 252,19 ( ataramano ti aturito, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
ataranto) = MpV 29,10 (eds so); Ap-a476,8 (aturito
sa1.1ik~ assamaiTI gañchin ti); - atiturita, mfn.,
hurrying too much; atiturit~. adv., in too great haste;
Ja 11 7,23 (asamekkhitva atiturita~T~ karontiina~T~, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee asamekkhita-atiturit~); VI 342,17' (atiturita
nikkhamittha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atiturit~ nikkhamitva);
Mhv 5:62 (so rajatiturito tato); - see also tUJ:.lJ:.laiTI; -
fpp., (something) requiring haste; (where) there should
be haste; (a) taraJ:.liya, (mf)n., Th 291 (yo dandhaka1e
tarati taranlye ca dandhaye) f- Ja 111 141,2•;
(b) taritabba2, (mf)n., M 11 241,6 (na codanaya
taritabb~. puggalo upaparikkhitabbo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
coditabba~T~; Ps IV 30,16: na codanatthaya gantabb~.
Ce, Ee so; Be vegayitabb~; Se codayitabba~T~); Th-a 11
123,29 (dandhayitabbe taranta taritabbe va dandhayanto);
298 tarul}a
- caus. pr. 3. sg. tiirete, -ayate, tareti, tarayati,
hurries; urges forward; S I 3,4* (accenti kala tarayanti
rattiyo; Spk I 23,25: rattiyo atikkamamana puggala~T~
maraJ:.liipagamanaya tarayanti slgha~T~ slgh~ gamayanti)
= Ja IV 487,22* (cf 488,c tarayantl ti atuccha hutva
ayusailkharaiTI khepayamana gacchanti); Th 293 (yo
dandhaka1e dandheti taraJ:.llye ca -aye) f- Ja III 141,4*
(-ayi; 141,1o-: -ay! ti turitakatabbani kammani turito va
karoti); Ja VI 554,30* (brahmaJ:.lO ca tareti no, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be dhareti); 555,16' (tadayaiTI asito dhato na ba!h~
tarayeyya no, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dharayeyya); 555,17*
(balham -eti brahmano, Ce, Ee so; Se tarati; Be dhareti);
. absol. tarayitva2, Bv 5:31 (taraJ:.l!ye -ayitva
bodhanlye ca bodhayl; Bv-a 160,5: tiiraJ:.llye ti
tarayitabbe); fpp (a) taraJ:.liya, mfn., Bv 5:31;
(b) tarayitabba2, mfn., Bv-a 160,5.
tara1a 1, mfn. [ts], moving to andfro, trembling; Abh 713
(cal~ -a~T~); Vism-mht [Be]II 408,11 (capalo ti
anavaghitakiriyataya -o).
tarala 2 , n. [cf S. tarala ?], rice gruel; Abh 465 (-~ yagu).
tarahi, ind. [S. tarhi], then, at that time; Vin 11 189,4
(ayaiTI ca tarahi Devadattassa bhagavati pa!hamo aghato
ahosi, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce ayaiTI carahi; Se ay~
ca carahi); - see also carahi, etarahi.
tari, f [ts], a boat; Abh 666 (taraJ:.l! -i nava ca); Dath 4:53
(ta~T~ -i~T~ varayitva).
taro, m. [ts], a tree; Abh 540 (dumo -u); Th 1121 (ropetva
rukkhani yatha phalesl miile -u~T~ chettu tam eva
icchasi); Pv-a 251,8 (padapan ti .. . padapo ti
laddhanamaiTI -u~T~); Bv-a 80,1o• (samphullapuppha -avo
ahesu~T~); Mhv 14:17 (ambo nama ayaiTI -u); 14:18
(santi bhante bahii rukkha anamba pana te tarii);
Utt-vn 870 (-a~T~ timiil~ navapattam enaiTI ... janati
yo); Sadd 330,31* (salo ca vitapl -u);- 0 -gm_le in Ee at
Pv-a 154,17: read tarugaJ:.lopasobhitaiT~ with Be, Ce, Se;
-
0
-Sal}qa, m., a group oftrees; Abh 537.
tarul}a, mf(-a, -i)n., m., n., and -i,f [S. taruJ:.la], l. (mfn.)
young; tender; new; fresh; (m.) a young hoy or man; (f)
a young girl or woman; iic afien: newly-; Abh 231
(y uvan! -!); 253; 1073 (-o tu yuve nave); V in I 243,38
(-ena khlrena bhojessama ti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
dhiiruJ:.lhena); III 128,36 (yatha t~ yuva yuvatin ti
daharo dahari~T~ taruJ:.lO -i~T~); IV 216,5 (yava gabbho -o
ahosi); DI 114,15 (bhavaiTI hi SoJ:.ladaJ:.l<;iO jÍJ:.lJ:.lO vuddho
mahallako addhagato vayo anuppatto samaJ:.lO Gotamo
-o e' eva 0 -pabbajito ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -paribbajako
ca); MI 305,26 (sukho imissa paribbajikaya -aya
mudukaya lomasaya bahaya samphasso ti); 306,17 (sa
'ssa maluvalata -a muduka); S III 91,23 (bijan~ -an~
udak~ alabhantana~T~); Ja I 225,2 ( 0 -tta); III 38,13.
0
( -taya); V 205,24' (na tav' assa massu jayati -o yeva);
328,25' (assatthasseva -~ pavaJaiT~); VI 472,24'
(mahallika pi hutva -1 viya); Patis 11 218,1o (seyyathapi
-o rukkho ajataphalo); Ap 94,zo H ca piya kañña); 510,3
(yada ca -o bhaddo pathame yobbane thito); 609,8 (tiss'
itthiyo nidassesi iddhiya ... -i~T~ jarita~T~ mata~T~, Be, Ce
so; Se jarik~; Ee -I jarita mata); Mil 40,4 (daharo -o
mando uttanaseyyako); 48,5 (añña sa darika dahañ -1 ya
taya varita); Vism 125,25 (sace -o samadhi kenaci-d-eva
asappayakiiraJ:.lena nassati); Ps 11 377,7 (-a~T~ pi mutta~T~
 299
piHimuttam eva); Dhp-a III 110,21 (-o pi sigalo
jarasigalo ti ... vuccati); Pp-a 193,9 (dv1su -es u sippai)1
dassentesu); Sadd 364,2* (yuvatl -1 mfu.I.avika); -
2. (m.n.) the shoot of a plant, a sprout; - ifc see tala-
0
(sv tala\ bodhi-; - -tara, mjn., younger; Th-a II
203,15 (h1najacco vayasa -o ti va acintetva); -
0
-vuta, mfn., surrounded by young men; Th1 479
(upayasi pi -o, so read with Th App. II p. 247,6*; Ee
p!taml)avuto; Se pi tarul)avuto; Be, Ce upayasi
varal)avate;); - 0 -suriya, m., the newly-risen sun; Ja II
333,18'; Bv 1:45; - atitarul}a, mf( -1)n., very young;
Ja IV 35,s·(-ii)1 yeva samanai)l); VI 344,15 (-o ayai)1 tava
ajjapi 'ssa mukhe kh!ragandho vayati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
taml)o); Dhp-a I !68,18 (-a);- see also taluna, tamñña.
tarul}aka, mj(-ika)n. [taml)a + ka2], young; tender; Vin I
193,4 (vacchako hoti -o abhirüpo ... , Be, Ce, E e so; Se
taml)O ); M I 225,33 (vacchako -o tava-d-eva jatako matu
goravakena vuyhamano); Mil275,8 (attano orase piye
putte balake -e lataya bandhitva); Sp 615,3 (-a hi
puppharukkha pi); Th1-a 190,32 (bale ... dhuttakanan ti
taml)ike tvai)1 dhuttapurisanai)1 ... ).
tarul}i,f, se e sv taml)a.
taresi(n), mjn., part.fut. oftarati 1 qv.
tala\ n. [ts], (sg. instr. talena, talasa), a flat surface; a
level; the ground; palm (ofthe hand); sole (ofthefoot);
Abh 1090; D II 262,5* (pfu,lina -am ahacca sarai)1
katvana bheravai)1; Sv 693,28: hatthena pathavitalai)l
paharitva); 111 126, !9 (khurassa sadhunisitassa -ai)1 assa
passati dharai)1 ca kho tassa na passati); A IV 71,27
ipapatika ... uppatitva anupahacca -ai)1 nibbayeyya;
~p IV 39,!3foll.: akasatalai)1 anupahacca anatikkamitva
bhümii)1 appatva akase yeva nibbayeyya ti); Ja II 102,13
1Sakko tassa ekai)1 bherii)1 upanametva bhante imasmii)1
-e pahate tumhakai)1 paccamitta palayissanti ... ti);
223,13* (upahana ... -asa pap1jita; 223,20': padatalena ca
papljita); Sp 1044,15 (sace pabbatamatthake -ai)1 hoti
ekav1satiya bhikkhünai)1 okasarahai)1); Mp II 371,1
1chahi -ehi samannagato pasako); Dhp-a I 369,10
1 sattamai)l -ai)1 abhimhitva); Mhv 28:13 (sojasakarise
-e): Sadd 563,23 (talayati patinhati ettha vatthujatan ti
-ai)l); 921,13 (mattabhedo tava ... -o talo); - ifc see
akasa- (sv akasa2), uttana-, upari-, kara- (sv kara 1),
gagana-, nabha- (sv nabha[s]), pada-, hattha-; -
'-ghiita, m. [cfS. talaghata], a slap on the body (or with
the palm ofthe hand); Utt-vn 201;- 0 -ghiitaka, n. [tala
+ ghataki], a slap on the body (or with the palm of the
hand): Vin IV 260,24 (dve bhikkhuniyo anabhiratiya
pilita .. . -ai)1 karonti; 261,1: -ai)l nama samphassai)1
sadiyantl antamaso uppalapattena pi muttakaral)e
paharaiJ1 deti; Sp 921,10: -e ti muttakaral)atalaghatane);
\'in-vn 2145; 0
-ghiitana, n., id., Kkh 2 310,13;
\'in-vn 2140 (muttakaral)assa -e); talapakka-
,-al}l}aip in Ee at Vism 250,5 is wr for tala- (Be, Ce, Se
sol:- 0 -Sattikii,f [cfBHS talasaktika], the palm ofthe
hand as a weapon; Vin IV 147,1 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü
kupita anattamana sattarasavaggiyanai)l bhikkhünai)1
-:un uggiranti; 147,I9joll.: kayai)1 va kayapatibaddhai)1
-.a antamaso uppalapattai)1 pi uccareti apatti pacittiyassa;
Sp 878,3foll.: paharadanakarai)1 dassetva kayai)l pi
Uyapatibaddhai)l pi uccarenti); Spk II 192,17 (-ai)1
tasa
uggiritva); Utt-vn 141;- --uggiral)asikkhapada, n., the
rule about raising the hand as a weapon; Sp 1306,22;-
atalamphassa, mfn., bottomless; Abh 669 (agadhai)1 tv
atalamphassai)l); - nittala, mfn. [S. nistala], round,
spherical; Abh 707 (nittalai)1 vaqai)l); - see also
ekatalika (sv eka), hatthatalaka.
tala2 , see sv taja.
taliisaiighiitam in Ee at Vism 320,23 is wr for tula- (Be,
Ce, Se so).
tali, tali, f [cf S. ta<;[it ?], lightning; ? Sadd 921,24
(mattabhedo tava ... -i -1).
talini, f [cf S. tatin1 ?], a tank or pool; Sadd 922,3 (-1
talai)1 ... mattabhedo 'yai)l).
taluna, talul)a, mf( -I)n. [ = tarul)a qv; S. !ex. taluna],
young, tender; Sv 926,31 (mudü ca -a ca anguliyo assa,
Be, Se so; Ce, E e talul)a); Ps III 376,15 (mudü . . . ca
niccakalai)1 -a ca hatthapada assa ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
talul)a); Sadd 623,5 (-o taml)O va); 922,11 (taml)I -1
taml)O -o ... Val)J)abhedo 'yai)1).
taJa, tala2, m. or n., a pool;- ifc see amata-n- (sv marati).
taJaka, see sv tajaka.
taJiika, tajaka, m.n. [cf S. ta<;[aga, S. lex. ta<;[aga, ta<;[aka], a
pond, a pool; a tank, a reservoir; Abh 678 (-o ca saro
nitthl); V in II 256,29 (puriso mahato -assa patigacc' eva
alii)1 bandheyya); A III 395,6 (gamassa va nigamassa va
avidüre mahantai)1 -ai)1); Ja I 239,17 (sattakkhattul!l -al!l
chijji, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se bhijji); Ap !6,12 (aññe opuppha
paduma pupphita tajake tada, Se so; Be -e; Ce -e sada;
Ee -e pupphita tada); 16,14 (sobhayanti tajake tada, Se
so; Ee -al!l tada; Be sobhanti -e tada; Ce sobhanti -e
sada); l6,2o (oguha ajagara ca vasanti tajake tada, Ee, Se
so; Be -e; Ce -e sada); 17,19 (-a 'sul!l sunimmita, Be,
Ce so; Se -a 'si; Ee -a susunimmita); Bv 2:13 (yatha
güthagato puriso -al!l disvana pürital!l); Sp 345,9joll.
(yal!l pana sabbasadharal)al!l -al!l hoti -e udakassa
sabbe pi manussa issara); Mill32,I3 (idha maharaja -o
bhaveyya navasalilasampul)l)O, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ai)l);
246,22 (yatha maharaja -al!l bhaveyya sampUI)l)a-
sucivimalasHalasalilal!l, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -o); 296,4
(kassaka -ato udakal!l nlharitva dhaññai)l paripacenti);
Vism 170,!2 (pokkharal)iya va -e va); Mp I 178,10
(yantabaddhani sanhimattani -ani).
taJuna, mjn., see sv taluna.
tava, tavai)l, sg. gen. oftvai)l qv.
tave, [S. tavai], gr. t. t., the (ending of) the infinitive;
Sadd 850,29 (icchatthesu tave tul!l va samana-
kattukesu ... puññani katave icchati).
tasa, mjn. (and m. ?) [cfS. trasa, but connected by cts also
with tasati 1], l. (mfrz.) trembling, frightened; moving;
living; S IV 351,21 (na kiñci vyabadhemi -ai)l va
thavaral!l va); Khp 9:4 (ye keci pfu.I.abhüt' atthi -a va
thavara anavasesa; Pj I 245,Is: tasanti ti -a satal)hi'inal!l
sabhayanal!l e' etal!l adhivacanai)l); Dhp 405 (nidhaya
dal)<;iai)l bhütesu -esu thavaresu ca; Dhp-a IV 175,23:
tal)hatasena -esu); Sn 394 (ye thavara ye ca -a santi
1oke, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tasanti loke); Ja I 336,!7* (-a
vaka ejakanal!l bhaya hi; 342,Is-: ath' aññe -a vaka ejake
dürato va disva tasita tasappatta hutva ejakanaiJl bhaya
palayitva, Be, Ee so; Ce tasita bhayappatta; Se bh!tatasita
utrasasampatta; cf342,32': ejakanaiJl bhayena
tasa ti
tasavakanaq¡ palayanaka1o viya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
tasavakanaq¡); V 221,8* (thavaranarp -anam); Nidd I
488,12foll. (-a ti yesaq¡ tasil_la tal_lha appahlna, yesaq¡ ca
bhayabherava appahlna, kirpkaral_la vuccanti -a, te
tasanti uttasanti paritasanti bhayanti); - 2. (m.)
trembling; fear; - see nittasa below; - 0 -thiivara, n.,
-a, -ani, m.n.pl., moving and unmoving beings;
trembling and still beings; M II 105,4* (pappuyya
paramaq¡ santiq¡ rakkheyya -e; Ps lil 341,16: yo
nibbanaq¡ papul_lati so sabbaq¡ -aq¡ rakkhituq¡ samattho
hoti) = Th 876 (Th-a lil 61,3ofoll.: sabbe ca satte
paramaya rakkhaya rakkheyya); S l 141,27* (nikkhitta-
dal_l<;\o -esu; Spk I 207,25: -esü ti ettha pana puthujjana
tasa nama khll_lasava thavara nama); Sn 704 (aviruddho
asaratto pal_lesu -e ... na haneyya na ghataye); 967
(mettaya phasse -ani); - nittasa, mfn., fearless; ?
Ap 155,4 (addasaq¡ lokanayakaq¡ slhaq¡ yathavanacararp
vyaggharajarp va -aq¡).
tasati 1, tassati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. tr~yati], is thirsty; era ves for;
Dhatup 447 (tasa pipasayaq¡); Dhatum 688; S JI 13,32
(ko nu kho bhante -atl ti no kallo pañho ti bhagava
avoca . . . kirppaccaya nu kho bhante tal_lha ti esa kallo
pañho, Be, E e so; Ce, Se tal_lh!yatl ti); Paris-a 79,33 (-a ti
ti tal_lhii, pipasatl ti attho); Sadd 489,26 (tasa pipasayaq¡:
tassati paritassati); 503,28 (ken' aghena tal_lha tassati
paritassatl ti atthena); - tassati in Ee at Ja V 208,20* is
wr for nassati (Be, Ce, Se so); - pp tasita\ mfn.
[S. tr~ita], thirsty; MI 74,14 (puriso ... ghammapareto
kilanto -o pipasito); Sn 980 (ugghagapado -o
pati.kadanto rajassiro); Vv 7:5 (disvana bhikkhuq¡ -aq¡
kilantaq¡); Pv 22:3 (dehi tvaq¡ paniyaq¡ bhante -a
paniyaya me); Ja VI 251,21* (ghosayantu pure tava ko
chato ko -o); Sadd 489,26.
tasati2 , *tassati 2, pr. 3 sg. [S. trasati, trasyati], trembles,
shakes; is afraid ( + gen. or instr. ); Dhatup 322 (tasa
trasa ubbege); Dhatum 448; Dhp 130 (sabbe -anti
dal_l<;\assa); Sn 394 (ye thavara ye ca -anti 1oke, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se tasa san ti); Ja III 289,4* (-asi bhamasi lenam
icchasi); Nidd I 371,16 (na vedheyya ... na -eyya na
uttaseyya ... ); Ap 28,18 (gajjato te ... -anti marakayika);
Cp 2:9:8 (kadaci so -issati; Cp-a 171,27: so yakkho api
-eyya); Mil 148,1 (araha na -ati sabbabhayehi); 208,2o
(yena pana maharaja hetuna arahanto bhayeyyurp va
-eyyurp va so hetu arahantanaq¡ samucchinno ); Pj Il
228,13 (iddhimanto bhirpsanakarüpadassanena na -antl
ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee bhirpsanakariipena); -
part.pr. tasanta, mfn., Th!-a 246,1 (ubbigga ti -anta);-
pp tasita 2 , mfn., frightened, full of fear; Bv 2:170
(ubbigga -a bh!ta); Cp 2:6:6 (dhanikehi bh!to -o;
Cp-a 146,22: -o ti utrasto); 3:9:5 (aggivegabhaya bh!ta
-a mata pita mama); Mil155,2s (so puriso dal_l<;\abhaya
-o ubbiggo ); - neg. fpp atasitaya, atasitabba, mfn.,
where there is no cause for fear; S III 57,27 (assutava
puthujjano atasitaye rhane tasaq¡ apajjati; Spk II 276,3:
atasitaye ti atasitabbe abhayitabbe rhanamhi); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. (a) tiiseti\ -ayati 1, makes tremble; frightens,
scares; Vin III 147,s• (-esi maq¡ selaq¡ yacamano, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se selam ayacamano) = Ja II 284,24* (Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se -esimaq¡; 285,9·: imaq¡ mal_liq¡ yacanto
tvaq¡ ... maq¡ -esi; Ee omits marp); Ja II 398,25' (kiq¡
300 tassapapiyasika
maq¡ tumhe -etha ti); Ap 28,16 (jatima eso pasii -eti
sabbada); 355,12 (-ayanti mamaq¡ sada, Ce, E e, Se so;
Be tapayanti); Mil 209,6 (te sattihattha ekaq¡ arahantaq¡
upadhavitva -eyyuq¡); Sp 65,7* (sadevako pi ce loko
agantva -ayeyya maq¡); Sv 266,16 (janaq¡ -essaml ti);-
part.pr. tasenta, mfn., Ja II 427,w; V 335,16' (hatthi ...
manusse -ento gehani viddhaq¡sento); - aor. 3 sg.
tasesi, Ja IV 273,22·; Mhv 19:20 (supal_ll_larüpa hutvana te
-esi mahorage); absol. tasetva, Ja IV 181,19
(mahajanarp bhayetva -etva); VI 460,12 (rajanaq¡ hatthe
gahetva asiq¡ uggiritva -etva); Dhp-a I 222,1s (-etva
pucchiyamana na kathessati); pp tasita, mfn.,
Mhv 19:21; - (b) tasseti, tassayati, Sadd 566,24 (tassa
santajjane: tasseti tassayati puriso core ); - se e also
tassanaka, tassana.
tasadda, see sv ta(d).
tasayanto in Ee at Ap 145,10 is wrfor tosayanto (Be, Ce,
Se so).
tasara, m.n. [ts], a shuttle; Abh 773 (-o suttaverhanaq¡);
Ud 29,22 (Sakko . . . pesakaraval_ll_laql abhinimminitva
tantaq¡ vinati Suja asurakañña -aq¡ piireti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee vasaraq¡; Ud-a 197,3o: -aq¡ püretl ti 0 -vaWq¡
va<;l<;lhentl viya) t Dhp-a I 424,17 (Sakko tantaq¡ pasareti
Suja -aq¡ vageti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee va<;l<;lheti); Sn 215 (yo
ve rhitatto -aq¡ va ujjurp); Ps lil 248,14 (-aq¡ vagento va
nisldi); 249,1 (tam eva 0 -dal)<;\akaq¡ -ato luñcitva khipi);
Dhp-a lil 172,5 (khipparp me -aq¡ va<;l<;lhetva iihareyyasl
ti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se slgharp me -aq¡ vagetva).
tasil;tii, tasina, f [BHS tasil_la ; S. tr~J.la], thirst; craving;
S V 58,14 (tisso ima bhikkhave tasina, Be, Ee so; Se
tal_lha; Ce omits); Dhp 342 (-aya purakkhata paja;
Dhp-a IV 49,zo: tasakaral_lena -a ti sati.khaq¡ gataya
tal_lhaya); Nidd I 488,12 (tasa ti yesaq¡ -a tal_lha appah!na,
Ee, Se so; Be tasita; Ce tasina) t Ap-a 130,13 (eds -a);
Sadd 489,26 (tasa pipasayaq¡: . . . -a); 634,6
(appakkharanaq¡ bahuttaq¡ aññathattaq¡ ca: ... tal_lha -a);
- se e al so tal_lha.
tassaq¡, sg. loe. f ofta(d) qv.
tassati 1,pr. 3 sg., see svtasati 1.
*tassati2 , pr. 3 sg., see sv tasati2 .
1
tassana, n. [from tassati ], thirst; Abh 467 (pipasa tu ca
-am).
tassa~aka, mifn.) [from *tassati2], one who is frightened,
perturbed; Ps II 112,21 foil. (bahiddhaparikkharavinase
-assa ca notassanakassa ca ajjhattakkhandhavinase
-assa ca notassanakassa ca ti imesaq¡ vasena catukorika
suññata kathita).
2
tassanii, f [from *tassati ], trembling, perturbation; - ifc
see ñal_la-, tal_lha-, tasa-, dirrhi-.
tassapiipiyasikii (so usually Be, Se), tassapapiyyasika (so
usually Ce, Ee),f [scil. kiriya;from tassa + papiya(s)], a
proceeding of censure (against a bhikkhu accused of a
serious offence who prevaricares or denies the ojfence;
one of the methods of settling a case or dispute); V in Il
99,22 (anuvadadhikaral_laq¡ catiihi samathehi sammati
sammukhavinayena ca sativinayena ca amii)havinayena
ca -aya ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tassapapiyyasikaya);
!Ol,5foll.; D lil 254,13 (satta adhikaral_lasamatha ...
yebhuyyasika -a til_lavattharako); Mil 249,Jfoll.
(kathaq¡ e' Ánanda -a hoti ... ); Ps IV 45,11 (sati.gho
tassapapiyya
ñatticatutthena kammena -~ karoti); 49,22foll. (tassa
puggalassa papussannata papiyasika hoti, 1mma
kammassa vatthu dassital]l, evarüpassa hi puggalassa
tal]l kamm~ katabb~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit
papiyasika);- 0 -kamma, n., a formal act of the sailgha
authorising censure; V in II 85,25 (sailgho Uvajassa
bhikkhuno -~ karotu); 86,1 (pañc' imani bhikkhave
dhammikani -assa karai_!ani); Sp 1193,19 (yo
papussannataya papiyo puggalo tassa kattabbato -an ti
vuccati);- --kata, mfn., dealt with by a tassapapiyasika
formal act of the sailgha; V in II 86,23; A IV 347,7
(--katena bhikkhave bhikkhuna atthasu dhammesu
samma vattitabbal]l ... ).
tassapapiyya, m., tassapapiyasi,f [= tassapapiyasika qv],
a proceeding of censure; Ap-a 294,23* ( . . . yebhuyya
tassapapiyya til).avattharako tatha, eds so); Vin-vn 2764
(tassapaplyasl e' eva tatha yebhuyyasl pi ca).
tasseti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftasati2 qv.
tahiip, tahal]l, demonstr. adv. [BHS tahi, tahil]l], there;
(equivalent to loe. ofta(d]) in that; in regard to him or it
or that; Abh 1156 (tattha tatra -il]l tah~); Vin V
148,!6* (Sal]lvaso ca -il]l natthi ten' etal]l iti vuccati);
Khp 7:7 (ito dinnena yapenti peta kalagata -il]l; Pj I
212,24: -in ti tasmil]l pittivisaye); Pv 28:8 (katvana
kammal]l -il]l vedan!yal]l); Th 58 (na me attho kumarlhi,
yes~ attho -il]l gacchatha nariyo; Th-a I 142,2o: -in ti
tattha tes~ santikal]l); Th! 481 (saca tahil samapanna,
so read me with Th App Il, p. 247,9*; eds -il]l); Ja V
490,26* (sabbal]l -il]l labbhati samitaya); VI 26,Io* (kin
nu komarak~ -il]l; 26,27·: tasmil]l nagare tarul).abhavo
kil]l karissati); Ap 198,17 (thüpo asi mahavane kuñjarehi
tada bhinno parü)ho padapo -il]l); 509,18 (upapanno
yahil]l -il]l); 529,26 (-il]l setapure ramme); 562,7 (cor~
vadhatth~ niyyantal]l disva ratta -il]l ah~);
Mil 77,9 foil. (idha maharaja jato idh' eva marati idha
mato aññatra uppajjati -il]l jato -il]l yeva marati -il]l
mato aññatra uppajjati ev~ kho maharaja sal]lsiiro hot!
ti); Mhv 5:132 (alattha atthame vasse gaccha ti vacanal]l
-il]l); 29:2 (haretva hi -il]l yüp~); Sadd 682,1 (tato hil]l
h~: -il]l tah~ tasmil]l va); - repeated: here and
there; in this place and that; at this and that; Vin 11
122,26 (bhikkhü arame tahaiJ1 tah~ nahayanti aramo
cikkhallo hoti); III 232,3 (santhatani tahal]l tah~
ujjhitani, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -il]l -il]l); IV 186,27
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü tah~ tah~ olokenta
antaraghare gacchanti; Sp 891,4 foil.: yo tal]l tal]l
disabhag~ pasad~ kütagaraiJ1 vHhii]l olokento
gacchati apatti dukkatassa); Vv 84:29 (yahil]l yahil]l
gacchati puññakammo -il]l -il]l modati kamakaml);
Th! 254 (t~ jaraya vira)~ -il]l -il]l); Cp 2:5:2 (hot'
ettha thanam mahisanaiJ1 koci koci -il]l -il]l;
Cp-a 140,26: tattha tattha); Vism 191,3 (-im -im
khayitasadisam eva); Spk I 178,26 (kumarikayo ...
alailkata tah~ tah~ vicaranti); V v-a 36,23 (mahantiyo
ghaJ.lta tah~ tahal]l olambamana pacalanti); Mhv 12:2
(pesesi kattike mase te te there -il]l -il]l);- tahil]l in Ee
at Pv-a 25,11 is wr for tal]l hi (Be, Ce, Se, Pj I 208,1 so);
-se e also kahal]l, kuhil]l, yahil]l.
ta\pl. nom./acc.f ofta(d) qv.
-ta2 [ts], a suffix added to nouns or adjectives to make an
301 tata
abstract noun; - see also -tta, -ttana.
tiil}a, m.n. [S. tral).a, n.], protection, shelter; refuge; Abh 6
(nibban~ . . . -~ lel).am arüp~ ca); S I 2,23*
(jarüpanltassa na santi -a; Spk I 22,26: -al]l le!).~
sarai_l~ bhavitul]l samattho nama koci natthi); 107,6*
(upadh!su -al]l na karonti buddha); Dhp 288 (na santi
putta -aya . . . natthi ñatlsu --ta); Th 763 (me
bhayajatassa ... -o paññavudho sattha); Ja I 412,5* (yo
dukkhaphuttbaya bhaveyya -~); VI 206,5* (veda na
-aya bhavanti-r-assa); Nidd I 308,4 (etal]l avivada-
bhumm~ khemato -ato lel).ato saral).ato ... nibbanato
passanto); Patis 11 239,31 (pañcann~ khandhan~
nirodho -~ nibbanan ti passanto); Ap 319,17 (patittha
bhayabhltan~ -o sarai_lagamin~); Kv 226,5 (dve
-ani); Vism 647,14 (n' eva -al]l na lel).al]l na gati na
patisarai_!~ paññayati); Sv 265,12 (tayati rakkhat! ti
-~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tai_l~); PsI 133,7 (buddho
me sarai_!~ le!).~ -an ti eval]l pi attasanniyyatanal]l
veditabb~); Sadd 359,4 (te palane: ... tayati -al]l); -
attal}a, atiil).a, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) without shelter or
protection; M II 68,22 (-o loko anabhissaro ti, Ce, E e so;
Be, Se atiil).o); Vv 75,4 (daliddo atai).O kapai_lo
kammakaro ahosil]l); Th 449 (loko ... haññati niccam
-o); Ja I 213,28 (-o 'mhi asaral).o); Nidd I 410,21 (atiil).a
alel).a asarai_la); Mill48,I9 (-a asarai_la, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
atal).a); - 2. (n.) no protection, a lack of protection;
Th! 476 (devesu pi -al]l); Patis II 239,29 (pañcakkhandhe
-ato passanto);- ifc see katabhlru- (sv karoti).
tata 1, m. [ts], l. a father; Abh 243 (-o tu janako pita);
Vin III 12,34 (Sudinno ... matapitaro etad avoca amma
-a ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be ammatata; Sp 204,16: ettha pana
amma ti matar~ alapati -a ti pitaraiJ1); SI 124,18*
(Maradh!taro . . . MaraiJ1 papimantal]l gathaya ajjh-
abhasiiJ1su kenasi dummano -a); 176,14* (-a -a ti
bhasare rakkhasa puttarüpena); Th! 406 (tassa mal]l
sul).h~ adasi -o); Jai 284,23* (te [bhoge] -o vidhaml
dham~; 284,25·: mama pita punappuna dhamanto)
quoted Sadd 359,s; Ja IV 281,27 (amma -a utthetha ti,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ammatata); VI 550,Io* (yal]l ca -~ na
passami t~ me dukkhatar~ ito); 573,13* (acir~ vata
te -o pita t~ dattbum essati); Ap 546,1 (anujani na no
-o); Pj II 97,18/oll. (slt~ -a Ul).h~ -a ... pipasito 'mhi
-a ti); - 2. voc.sg. tata, pl. tata', a term of friendly
address to one or more persons; Vin I 249,20 (so
vut;ll;lhapabbajito te darake etad avoca bhagava kira -a
ÁtumaiJ1 agacchati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a); III 13,4 (tvaiJ1
kho si -a Sudinna amhakal]l ekaputtako pi yo ... ); 14,16
(Sudinnassa . . . sahayaka . . . Sudinnassa . . . matapitaro
etad avocul]l amma -a . . . anujanatha Sudinn~
agarasma anagariyal]l pabbajjaya ti anujanama -a
Sudinn~ ... , Ce, Se so; Be ammatata; Ee anujanama
-a ... ); DI 88,12 (brahmai_!o Pokkharasadi Ambatth~
miil).av~ amantesi ay~ -a Ambattha samai_lo
Gotamo ... ); SI 82,4 (raja ... miil).av~ amantesi ehi
tval]l -a ... ); 11227,6 (aññataro kummo aññatar~
kummal]l etad avoca ma kho tv~ -a kumma etal]l
padesal]l agamasl ti); V 344,21 (ev~ -a ti kho Jotiko
gahapati Dlghavussa upasakassa patissutva); Ja I 178,29
(raja amacce ... idani kil]l karoma -a ti pucchi); 263,2
(raja te [core] disva -a kasma gamaiJ1 hanatha ti pucchi);
tata
II 133,2 (so . . . te sukapotake amantetva -a ahalll
voharatthaya gacchami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a); Mi110,3
(tayo kho -a Nagasena veda sikkhani nama); 15,17 (sa
maha-upasika . . . ayasmantalll Assaguttalll etad avoca
atthi nu kho -a tumhakalll santike añño bhikkhü ti);
Spk I 344,12 (Sakko . . . kassa saddo -a ti Mata1illl
pucchi); Mhv 1:69 (talll bhavissati vo -a hitaya ca
sukhaya ca); 25:35 (rajj~ te -a KaiJ9u1a dammi ti);
Sadd 143,22foll. (tayati ti -o puttan~ pitusu pitaran~
puttesu aññesalll ca aññesu piyapuggalesu vattabba-
voharo eso); - se e also tata3.
2
tiita , mfn.,pp oftayati qv.
tiita(r), m. [S. tratr, + abl. or gen.] (sg. nom. tata2), a
protector; one who saves (from); Sp 171,32 (bhav~ me
Gotamo . . . aghassa -a hitassa ca vidhata ti; cf
Sp-t [Be] I 414,3foll.: nissakke e' etalll samivacanalll) =
PsI 131,1 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se hanta) = Mp II 107,7 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se data) t Sv 229,19 (Be, Ee so; Ce, Se ghata);
Sadd 143,21 (tayati ti -a); 479,27 (ta palane: tayati
aghassa -a);- see also tayita(r).
1
tiitii , pl. voc. oftata qv.
2
tiitii , sg. nom. oftata(r) qv.
tiitii3 , f [from tata qv ], a mother; Sadd 198,18'
(ammannamba ca -a ca); 652,25 (bhoti arnma ... bhoti
-a).
tiidi(n), (and tadina ?) mfn. and m. [cf S. tadp§] (sg.
nom. tadi, tadi; acc. m. tadilll, tadin~; f tadinilll;
abl. tadimha; gen. tadino; loe. tadini, tadine, tadimhi;
pl. nom.tadi, tadino; acc. tadino; gen. tadinalll, tadinalll;
loe. tadisu), l. such a person, a person like that
(referring to someone previously described); Vin IV
54,17* (soka na bhavanti -ino; Sp 801,28: tadisassa
khii_lasavarnunino); M II 144,22* (pahinajatimarai_lo
brahmacariyassa kevali paragü sabbadhammiinalll
buddho -i pavuccati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -i); Dhp 94
(yass' indriyani samath~ gatani . . . deva pi tassa
pihayanti -ino); It 39,6* (te ... khaye rata pah~su te
sabbabhavani -ino); Sn 86 (yo tii_1I_1akathalllkatho ... -illl
maggajin~ vadanti buddha); 488 (dadalll paresalll idha
annapan~ aradhaye dakkhii_leyyehi -i); Vv 21:2
(abhippasadehi manalll arahantamhi -ini, Be, Ee so; Ce
-in!; Se -ine; cf V v-a 105,29 foil.: -ini ti . . . ighadisu
tadibhavappattiya -imhi ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ine ti) t
Th 1173 (Be, E e, Se -in e; Ce -in o); Th 282 (yesalll rago
ca ... avijja ca virajita -i tattha na rajjanti); Ja V 113,9*
(gandhabba pitaro deva sañjiva honti -ino; 115,w·:
tathavidhassa kusalabhiratassa rañño); Ap 61,18
(aghanalll et~ y~ -i agare ratim ajjhaga); Sadd 866,4
(idi yadi -i); - 2. [cf BHS tadr(n), tayin, AMg tai; see
BSU § 108], (one) who is like that, just so; the same;
(one) who is unaffected, immoveable (so usually cts);
(possibly) like that buddha; Vin I 185,7* (igha dhamma
aniqha ca na pavedhenti -ino; Sp 1083,11: itthanighesu
anunayapatighehi akampitatta -ino); D II 266,13* (yalll
me atthi kat~ puññalll arahantesu -isu; Sv 703,9:
tadi1akkha!Japattesu arahantesu); A II 25,21 foll. (iti kho
bhikkhave tathagato dighasutamutaviññatabbesu
dharnmesu -I yeva -I, tamha ca pana -imha añño -i
uttaritaro va pa!Jitataro van' atthi ti vadami ti, Be so; Ce
tamha ca pana taditarnha; Ee -i se yeva -i tarnha ca pana
302 tiidisa
taditamha añño -i uttaritaro ... ; Se tadisova -i tamha ca
pana -imha añño -i ... ; Mp III 40,7 foil.: -i yeva -1 ti
0
-ta nama ekasadisata, tathagato ca yadiso 1abhadisu
tadiso va alabhadisu ... imaya 0 -taya -I yeva -i. Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se tadiso va -i ti -i nama ekasadisata ... imaya
o -taya -i); Sn 712 (alatth~ yad idalll sadhu nalatthalll
kusalalll iti ubhayen' eva so -I, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
kusalam iti); 803 (na brahmai_lo silavatena neyyo
parailgato na pacceti -I; Nidd I 114,1sfoll.: araha
pañcah' akarehi -i iqhaniqhe -i cattavi ti -i tiJ.IJ.lavi ti -i
muttavi ti -i talllniddesa -i); Pv 21:72 (silavantesu
gui_lavantesu -isu appak~ pi katalll karalll; Pv-a 139,3o:
-isü ti itthadisu tadi1akkha!Japattesu); Th 974 (bhikkhü
ca bhikkhuniyo ca dughacitta anadara -in~
mettacittanalll niggaiJhissanti 'nagate): Thi 249 (upehi
buddhalll saraiJ~ dhammalll sailghalll ca -inalll;
Thi-a 197,25 foil.: -inan ti dighadisu tadibhavappattalll
yatha va purimaka sarnmasambuddha passitabba tatha
passitabbato -i, talll buddh~ sarai_larp upehi ti yojana,
Be, Ee so; Se tatha passitabbato -illl; Ce passitabbato
-in~ buddh~ ... ); Ja IV 134,20' (sakkaccalll te
narnassami pade vandami -in~; 135,4·: -inan ti
tadi1akkha!Jayuttanarp); Ap 21 ,26foll. (parivuto
satasahassehi santacittehi -ihi khii_lasavehi suddhehi
chaJabhiññehi -ihi, E e so; Be -ibhi ... jhayibhi; Ce
-ihi . . . jhayihi; Se -ibhi . . . -ihi); 348,14 (sabbes~
pakkamantiinalll uggatejana -inalll, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
uggatejana); 557,24 (vinayadharin~ agg~ vai_II_lesi
nayako bhikkhunilll lajjinilll -illl kappakappa-
visaradarp); Mil 382,8 (ighaniqhe . . . sukhe dukkhe
sabbattha -ma yeva bhavitabballl); Mhv 15:62
(Kakusandho dasabalo . . . cattalisasahassehi -ihi
parivarito); - sometimes esp. as an epithet or
designation of althe Buddha; Vin V 214,14 (desita
anantajinena -ina; Sp 1389,27: bhagava ... iqhaniqhesu
nibbikarataya -i); M II 105,s• (adaiJ9ena asatthena ah~
danto 'mhi -ina) = Th 878; It 38,24' (duve ima
cakkhumata pakasita nibbanadhatü anissitena -ina; It-a I
167,16: ch¡¡Jailgupekkhavasena sabbattha ighaniqhadisu
ekasabhavatasailkhatena tadilakkhaiJena -ina); Sn 697
(tenanusinho hitarnanasena -ina); Vv 18:6 (tassa me
nikkamo asi sasane tassa -ino); Th 305 (iti modamano
sugatena -ina); 491 (yeh' ay~ desito dharnmo
dhammabhütehi -ihi); 1167 (jhayati putto appatimassa
-ino); Ap 23,15 (pavattitarp dhammacakkarp sakya-
puttena -ina); 57,9 (Padumuttarassa bhagavato 1oka-
jeghassa -ino; Ap-a 265,29: iqhanighesu akampiya-
sabhav~ pattatta -ino); 147,6 (buddhe citt~
pasadesilll dipadindarnhi -ine); Vism 505,20* (yalll
vutt~ idha -ina); Pj II 264,24 (buddha nama bhikkhave
aghasu lokadhammesu -ino honti ti).
tiidikkha, mfn. [S. tadrk~a], such a one; like that;
Sadd 866,3 (Idikkho yadikkho -o ... ).
tiidisa 1, mf(-a, -I)n. [S. tadrsa], such a, ofsuch a kind; like
thatlhimlthem, the same; V in I 268,26 (-illl kumarilll
janahi y~ tumhe gaiJikalll vughapeyyatha ti); V 16!,35
(-o codako jhapeti attan~); DI 88,24 (janahi ... yadi va
so bhavarp Gotamo -o yadi va na -o); MI !65,5foll. (iti
yadiso ahalll -o tuv~ yadiso tuvalll -o ah~);
331,1sfoll. (desento pi hi papima tathagato savakan~
tiidisa
dhammaiTI -o va adesento pi hi pap1ma tathagato
savakanaiTI dhamma~T~ -o va); S I 96,s• (-o puriso ...
upeti nirayaiTI ghora~T~); 227 ,27' (yadisaiTI vapate bij~
-a~T~ harate phai~); IV 193,18 (-o v' assa ki~T~suko
yatha pi tassa purisassa dassan~); 250,27• (sa -I silavati
upasika); Sn 112 (itthisol)~i~T~ vikiral)iiTI purisaiTI va pi
-a~T~ issariyasmi~T~ ~hapeti); Th 398 (pañcaiJ.gikena
turiyena na rati hoti -I yatha ekaggacittassa samma
dhammaiTI vipassato); Ja III 175,21* (sata~T~ sahassani pi
-InaiTI); V 31,3· (-ovo tumhak~ ubhinnaiTI pi sadiso va
mukhaval)l)O hoti ti); 35,14 (katha~T~ -a porisada mutto si
ti); 78,s• (ara ara s~yame -amha); 154,9* (santi añña pi
acchara -iyo pavara e' eva); Nidd I 28,5 (tathavidho -o
tassal)~hito tappakaro ... ); Ap 557,3o (ya taya Val)l)ita ...
-a 'ha~T~ bhavissami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tadisa);
Kv 252,5 (yadisaiTI m~sacakkhu~T~ -a~T~
dibbacakkhu~T~); Mil 382,6 (yatha mallaraja pa~havi
i~aninhani ... akirante pi -a yeva); PsI 95,5 (yadidan ti
nipato sabbalrngavibhattivacanesu -o va); II 35,13 (tesaiTI
pana -o hutva upanhati); Mp I 408,5 (yadisa riipena
piyakathaya pi -a va); III 90,2 (tath' eva hoti ti -o va
hoti pakati~T~ na jallati); Dhp-a I 386,2 (Bimbisarassa
vijite pañca amitabhoga mal!apuñña vasanti mayha~T~
vijite eko pi -o natthi); Pv-a 202,19 (yattha manussa
nal!ayanti udakakiccaiTI karonti -esu ~hanesu);
Vibh-a 440,25 (-asmi~T~ hi attabhave papakammani
vipaka~T~ datu~T~ na sakkonti ti); - yadisa tadisa, of
H·hatever kind; anyone whatsoever; Mil 278,3 (ye keci
yadisaiTI -~ dana~T~ denti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee yadisaiTI
kidisa~T~); Sp 238,18 (yadiso va -o va hotu digho va rasso
va ka! o va odato va ... ); Ud-a 428,34 (yadisa -a so ka).
tiidisa 2, mfn. [S. tvadpía], like you; D III 129,28 (ye mayaiTI
ayasmanta~T~ -a~T~ sabrallmacari~T~ passama; Sv 912,8:
-an ti tumhadisa~T~); Ja I 167,8 (al!~ brahmana pubbe
-o va mantajjhayakabrahmal)O hutva); V 107,9* (yaiTI
-~ jivam adeyyu dhanka); 361,18' (ma bhayi patat~
senha na hi bhayanti -a; 361,26': -a ti tumhadisa
ñ~aviriyasampanna).
tiidisaka, mf(-ika)n. [tadisa 1 + ki; BHS tadrsaka], of such
a kind; like thatlhim/them; Vin II 5,1o (sa apatti na
apajjitabba añña va tadisika tato va papighatara); 202,6*
1sa ve -o bhikkhu dilteyyaiTI gantum arahati); D II 109,13
'yadisako tes~ val)l)O hoti -o mayha~T~ val)!) O hoti);
Sn 278 (sa ve -o bhikkhu pecca dukkha~T~ nigacchati);
It 68,1 (yadis~ cilpasevati sa ve -o hoti); Ja IV 207,7•
1 mante mayaiTI -e na dema); Bv 14:24 (aggicanda-
suriyan~ natthi tadisika pabha yatha al!u pabha tassa
asamassa mallesino); Mi1122,21 (tadisikaya pi me
mal!araja saccakiriya atthi yayaha~T~ icchamana
sadevaka~T~ pi lok~ parivatteyyan ti).
tiidisika, mfn. [tadisa2 + ika; cf S tvadrsaka], like you; ?
S I 131 ,3o• (na e' atthi te dutiya Val)l)adhatu idhagata -a
bhaveyyuiTI bale na tvaiTI bhayasi dhuttakanaiTI, Ce, Ee,
Se so, but prob. wr; omit idhagata ... bhaveyyuiTI with
Be ? cfThi 230); 132,8• (sata~T~ sahassani pi dhuttakanaiTI
idhagata -a bhaveyyuiTI 1om~ na iñjami na santasami,
Ce. Ee, Se so; Be tadisaka; Spkl 192,11foll.: yatha tvaiTI
idhagata kiñci santhav~ va sineh~ va na labhasi evam
e\·~ te pi taya va sadisa bhaveyyu~T~) f: Thi 231 (eds
edisaka).
303 tapiñcha
tiineti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tanayati,
Wg § 34:33: tanu sraddhopakaral)ayo~. sraddhopa-
tapayo~. sabdopatapayo~]. sounds; pains; Sadd 550,7
(tanu saddopatapesu: -eti -ayati).
tapa, m. (and n. ?) [S. tapa, m.], heat; glow; heating; pain;
Vin III 79,s• (in uddana: -a~T~ vañjha vijayini; cf84,IO: sa
tapetva gabbha~T~ patesi); Ja II 178,22 (na maiTI ay~
aggi tapati na-~ janeti); Bv 2:185 (Rahumutto yatha
suriyo -ena atirocati; Bv-a 119,12: -ena ti patapena
alokena); Sadd 404,27 (tapa . . . san tape: . . . bhave
tapanaiTI -o paritapo ... ); 553,23 (tapa dahe: ... tapo -o
atapo);- ifc see aggi-, paccha-;- 0 -kara, mfn. [tapa+
kara 1], causing pain; Ja V 114,18' (yaiTI taya
ragadivasena paccha -~ kamm~ kata~T~ hoti); -
0
-kara1,1a, n., the act of heating; Sadd 346,8 (bhajjanaiTI
-~);- -va in Ee at Bv 13:2 (va -va) is prob. wr for
0 0
patapava (Be, Ce, Se so); - atitapa, m., great heat,
excessive heat; Mil 277,25 (-ena pa~avi upa~ayhati, Be,
Se so; Ce, E e omit pa~havi).
tiipana, mfn. and m.n. [ts], l. (mfn. and m.) (i) buming;
distressing; Thi 356 (amittajanana -a saiJ.kilesika ...
kama; Thi-a 227,18: -a ti santapanaka, tapaniya ti attho);
- (ii) causing tomJent or pain; the name of a
mal!aniraya; Abh 657 (saiJ.ghato -o, Be so; Ce tapano);
Ja V 266,14' (athaparo mallavici -o ca patapano, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee tapan o; 271 ,2s-: niccale satte tapati ti -o
ativiya tapeti ti patapano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tapano);
267,25* (tapayitva janapada~T~ -e pecca paccati, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee tapane); Kv 623,6 (kaJasuttaiT~ gacchati -a~T~
gacchati patapana~T~ gacchati); - 2. (n.) heating;
V v-a 20,16 (na aggimhi -a~T~ udake va temanaiTI chedana-
kiriyasamatthataya visesapaccayo); - 0
-geha, n., a
torture-chamber; Sv 136,s (so pitar~ -e pakkhipapesi,
-a~T~ nama kammakaral)atthaya kata~T~ dhilmaghara~T~);
- see also uggatapana (sv ugga\ tapana.
tiipasa, m. [ts], one who practises tapas, an ascetic; Ja I
298,3 (araññavasiko eko -o jhanalabhi); II 329,24 (eko -o
bhikkhacaratthaya akasena gacchanto); 399,10 (Jotiraso
nama -o aggi~T~ juhamano); Nidd II 108,13 (isayo
isinamaka ye keci isipabbajjaiTI pabbajita ajivaka
nigal)~ha ja~ila -a); Ap 89,2 (himavantass' avidilre -o as'
alla~T~ tada); Bv 2:60 (passatha imaiTI -~ ja~ila~T~
uggatapana~T~); Sv 270,2o (anhavidha hi -a); Ps III 324,17
(sa . . . itthikutta~T~ dassetva -~ silabheda~T~ apadesi);
Pj II 387,17 (brallmacariyan ti kalena kala~T~ methuna-
virati~T~ sandhay' aha y~ -a karonti); - 0
-taru, m., a
tree; SAF: Egyptian balsam, thom tree, Balanites
aegyptiaca (L.) Delile; Abh 565 (ingudi -u); -
0
-pabba.ija,f, (leaving home to live) the homeless lije of
an asee tic; Ja III 79,4; Sp 952,16 (anuppanne buddhe ...
-~ pabbajitva); Sv 269,1zjoll.; Pj II 296,1o (-asu
aggapabbajjaiTI pabbajissami ti).
tiipasi,f [ts ], a jemal e asee tic; Ja VI 73,25 (Parikaya -iya
utunikale nabhi~T~ hatthena paramaseyyatha ti, Be so; Se
tapasiniya; Ce, Ee Paritapasiya); Mi1125,31 (Dukülo ca
maharaja tapaso Parika ca -I ubho pi araññavasa al!esuiTI
pavivekadhimutta uttamatthagavesaka, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tapasini); Mhv 7:11 (yakkhil)I nisidi rukkhamülamhi
kantanti -I viya).
tiipiñcha, tapiñja, m.n. [S. tapiñcha, S. lex. tapiñja, m.], a
tape ti
plant; SAF: gamboge tree, Garcinia morella (Gaertn.)
Desr.; Abh 573 (tapiñjo ca tamlilo, Ce so; Be tapiñcho);
Sadd 922,1o (tapiñchaJ11).
1 (paripürarp gagana111 va -iihi); Ja I 108,6 (niyamako
tlipeti, tlipayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftapati qv.
tlimatamadasañghasuppahina, se e sv marati.
tlimba, see sv tamba.
tlimbüli, see sv tambüli.
tliya,f sg. instr., abl., loe. ofta(d) qv.
tliyaka, m. or mfn. rJrom tayati], (one) who protects;
Nidd-a I 153,28 (natthi tayita ti -o rakkhaQ.ako natthi, Ee
so; Ce tayano; Be, Se tayano rakkhako).
tiiyati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup tayate, Wg § 14:18: tayu
sarptlinapa1anayoJ:¡; S. trayate, Wg § 22:69: traili. plilane],
l. spreads; Dhatup 236 (taya santane); Dhatum 340
(tayu santane); Sadd 421,19 (tayu santanapalanesu); -
2. protects; guards; Dhatup 402 (ta pa1ane );
Dhatum 639; S IV 246,28 (issariyaba1ena abhibhütarp
bhikkhave matugiimaJ11 n' eva rüpaba1arp -ati na
bhogaba1aJ11 -ati; Spk Ili 87,19: n' eva rüpaba1arp -iturp
sakkoti); Sn 579 (na pita -ate puttaJ11); Ja II 252,17' (tarp
-issami); IV 387,12* (na jarajinarp -ati appapaññarp);
V 480,13* (na hi tarp nararp -ate duggatihi, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be -ati); VI 155,2 (saraQ.esinirp anatharp -atha maJ11);
437,19* (idani kho tarp -antu paQ.«;iita); Mi1189,14 (-anti);
Vism 11,23 (varitarp -anti rakkhanti tena ti varittarp);
Dhp-a I 217,12* (Samavati marp -assu tvarp ca me
saraQ.arp bhava); Th-a I 100,29 (puQ.ati kulava111sarp -ati
ti va putto); Sadd 359,4 (te pa1ane: ... -ati taQ.aJ11
gotta111); 421,19 (tayu santlinapa1anesu: -ati tayanaJ11,
divadigaQ.e pana ta pa1ane ti dhaturp passatha ...
ubhayesa111 kiriyapadaJ11 sama111 ... namikapadani pana
visadisani); 480,1 (sattlinaJ11 bhayarp upaddavarp
upasaggaJ11 ca -ati rakkhati ti parittaJ11; gaJ11 -atl ti
2
gottarp); 594,12 (ta pa1ane: 1okarp -ati);- pp tlita , mfn.
[S. trata], protected; Abh 754 (gopita111 gutta111-arp).
tliyana, n. (and mfn. ?) ffrom tayati], guarding, protecting;
Sp 436,6 (ya sattanarp uppajjati bhayasali.khata bhiruta
tato -a111 rakkhaQ.akammaJ11 kata111 taya ti katabhiru-
ttiil).o); Nidd-a I 153,28 (natthi tayita ti -o rakkhaQ.ako
natthi, Ce so; Ee tayako; Be, Se -o rakkhako); II 21,23
(atiil).an ti puttadihi pi -assa abhavato atayanarp);
Sadd 421,19 (tayu santlinapa1anesu: tayati -arp); -
atiiyana, mfn., lacking protection; Vism 612,13 (--taya
e' eva a1abbhaneyyakhemataya ca atiil).ato); Nidd-a II
21,23.
tliyita(r), tayeta(r), m., one who protects; Ja I 412,8* (yo
-a so sahasa karoti; 412,14·: yo mayharp -a rakkhita
avassayo bhaviturp arahati); Nidd I 43,21 (aññamaññassa
hi natthi -a; Nidd-a I 153,28: tayako rakkhaQ.ako natthi,
Ee so; Ce tayano; Be, Se tayano rakkhako); París I 129,12
(tassa n' atth' añño koci tayeta aññatra maya ti:
Pa!is-a 414,7: tayeta ti rakkhita, -a ti va pa!ho sundaro);
- see also tata(r).
tlira, mfn. and m. [ts], high, shrill; a high tone; a loud or
shrill note; Abh 137 (uccatare rave -o); 904 (-o
uccatarassare).
tliraka, m. [ts], one who causes (others) to cross; one who
rescues; Ap 324,5 (-o tva111 yatha nava); 422,12 (taresi
janata111 tuvarp n' atth' añño -o 1oke tav' uttaritaro
mune); Bv 11:7 (ovadako viññapako -o sabbapaQ.ÍnaJ11;
304 taruñña
Bv-a 193,23: -o ti caturoghatarako).
tiirakii, f [ts], l. a star; a planet; Abh 57; 1082 (bhe -a);
Vv 9:1 (obhasenti disa sabba osadhi viya -a); 53:7
purimasakare asandirp santharapetva akase -arp
o1okento ito pajetha ito pajetha ti vadamano nipajji, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -a); 258,18* (kirp karissanti -a); III 348,19*
(segha ... nakkhattaraja-r-iva -anarp); Bv 2:93 (vima1o
hoti suriyo sabba dissanti -a; Bv-a 101,s: -a. ti
nakkhattlini); 13:34 (yatha pi sagare ümi gagane -a
yatha); - 2. the pupil of the eye; Abh 1082 (-a
nettamajjhe); - ifc see akkhi- (sv akkhi\ -
oadhipa, m., the lord ofthe stars, the moon; Vv-a 314,24
(tiirakiidhipati ti taraklinaJ11 adhipati sasi ti sasa--
1añchanava, -a dissati ti keci pa!hanti);
0
(a)-riija(n), m., the king of the stars, the moon; Ja IV
498,14' (yatha -a ka!apakkhe khiQ.O puna juQ.hapakkhe
pürati); Sp 63,3*; -
0
(a)-rüpa, n., the appearance of a
star; a star; D II 328,7 (na passeyya -ani na passeyya
candimasuriye); III 86,5 (candimasuriyesu patubhütesu
nakkhattlini -ani paturahesum; Sv 868,14 foll.: kattikiidi-
nakkhattani e' eva sesatarakarüplini ca); It 19,27 (ya kaci
-anarp pabha; It-a I 90,3: -anan ti jotinaJ11); Kv 329,15
(iikase ... -ani gacchanti); As 11,31 (gaganata1e -ani
gaQ.hanto viya, Be, Ce so; Ee ganthanto; Se gaQ.ento).
tliral}a, n., -a, f [S. tiiraQ.a], causing to cross; rescuing;
Ap 80,4 (catunavut' ito kappe taresirp Yal11 narasabharp
duggatirp nabhijanami -aya idarp pha1arp, Ce so; Be, Ee,
Se taraQ.aya; f. 204,26: eds taraQ.aya) f. 234,7 (Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee taraQ.aya); 559,12 (itararp -ay' ahaJ11 nivatta, Ce,
Se so; Be, Ee taraQ.ayahaJ11); Bv 10:31 (SaJ11sarasotaJ11
-aya sesake pa!ipannake dhammaseturp da!haJ11 katva,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee taraQ.aya; Bv-a 189,26joll.: SaJ11Siira-
sagarassa taraQ.atthaJ11 ... sesapugga1e sarpsiirato tareturp
dhammaseturp !hapetva); It-a I 15,28 (paññaya saya111
taraQ.arp karuQ.aya paresa111 -arp);- see also taraQ.a.
1
tiirayita(r), m. rJrom caus. oftarati qv; cfS. tarayitr], one
who causes (others) to cross; one who rescues; - ifc
see taritatarita- (sv tarati\- see also taraka, tiireta(r).
tlirii, f [ts], a star, a planet; Abh 57 (nakkhattaJ11 joti
bhaJ11 -a); Ap 531,2 (pabhate viya -ayo na dissanti
jinorasa); 533,13 (bhikkhuniyo ... -a va candanugata);
541,8 (sa Gotami gata santirp -a va suriyodaye);
Bv-a 189,24 (u!ühi ti -ahi); Mhv 27:33 (sajjhumayo
candima ca -a ca muttakamaya); - ifc see netta-; -
0
'-acita, mfn., set with, studded with, stars; Ja VI 529,34*
(nabhaJ11 -am iva);- 0 -'sabha, m. [tara+ usabha], the
lord of the stars, the moon; Sn 687 (disva kumiiraJ11 ...
-arp va nabhasigamarp visuddharp; Pj II 487,4: -a111 va ti
tarlinarp usabhasadisaJ11, candan ti adhippayo); -
0
-gal}a, tiiragaQ.a, m., a multitude of stars; Vin V 226,16*
(cando taragaQ.e yatha ... sobhati); A I 215,17*
(candappabha tiiragaQ.a va sabbe); Ja V 63,s• (cando ...
sabbe -e 1oke abhaya atirocati); Bv 2:95 (-a virocanti
nakkhatta gaganamaQ.«;ia1e; Bv-a 101,14: -a ti gaha-
nakkhattadayo sabbe -a, nakkhatta ti nakkhattatara ca,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sabbe taragaQ.a ... nakkhattatiiraka ca);
-
0
-patha, m., the sky; Abh 46; Sadd 442,13*.
tliruñña, n. [S. tiiruQ.ya], youth; Ap 574,10 (vihaya geharp
-e, Ce, Ee so; Be karuññe; Se giirayhaJ11).
tareta(r)
1 (-ani); -
tareta(r), m. ffrom caus. oJ tarati qv; cJ S. tarayitr], one
who causes (others) to cross; one who rescues; Patis I
128,26 (mahakantarapatipanno lokasannivaso tassa
n' atth' añño koci kantararp. -a aññatra maya ti;
Patis-a 413,19: tarp. kantararp. -a, kan tara -a ti pi patho);
Ap 461,7 (-a atthakareta, Be, Ce, Se so; E e atha -a); Pj II
163,12 (sadevakassa lokassa neta gamayita -a pararp.
sampapeta ti attho); Bv-a 90,3o (buddho bodheta tilp;w -a
mutto moceta bhaveyyan ti);- see also tarayita(r).
1 phalapiJ.l~irp. otaretva); -
tareti\ -ayati\ caus. pr. 3 sg. oJtarati qv.
2 as a Jan; a Jan in general; Abh 316 ( -arp. tu vijani);
tarete, -ayate, caus. pr. 3 sg. oJtarati qv.
tala\ m. [cJ S., S. !ex. tala], l. the palmyra palm, the Jan-
palm, Borassus jlabellifer L.; (also used as a measure oJ
height); Abh 603 (-o vibhedika); 901 (-o ... dumantare,
Be so; Ce taJo); Vin III 92,25 (seyyatha pi nama -o
matthakacchinno abhabbo punavirüJhiya); Vv 44:13
(jambuyo panasa -a); Ja IV 250,23 (sappo -arp.
abhirühat! ti); 467,27* (ras! suvmp~assa ca 0 -matta);
Vism 245,21 (makkato patipatiya tasmirp. tasmirp. -e
patitva); Sadd 563,21;- ifc see catu- (sv catu[r]), cha-
4
(sv cha2), ti- (sv ti\ dvi-, pañca-, satta- (sv satta ); -
2. a measure, a short span; Abh 267 (padeso
talagokm~J.la vidatthi); - 3. the palm oJ the hand;
Sadd 921,13 (mattabhedo tava ... talo talo);- 4. a strip,
a stripe; Ja V 372,16* (yassa lohitaka -a . . . urarp.
sarp.hacca titthanti; 372,20': -a ti rajiyo);- o• -atthika, n.
[tala + atthika2], a kernel oJ the palm-Jruit; Dhp-a II
53,17 (-ena kese luñcapeturp.); - 0 fipanibha, mfn., like
a palm( jruit); Ja V 302,13* (-e; 303,9·: -e ti suv~J.la­
talaphalasadise, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se suvaJ:.IJ.laphala-
talasadise); - 0 -guJapatala, m., a layer, a sheet, oJ
palm-sugar; ? Vism 252,28 (pitthimarp.sarp. --SaJ:.Ithanarp.;
Vism-t [Be] 1 306,2: -arp. nama pakkatalaphalalasikarp.
talapattikad!su limpetva sukkhapetva uddharitva
gahitapatalarp.) = Pj 1 46,22 = Vibh-a 235,25; Cp-a 74,6
(avalekhanena -arp. uppatento viya sarlramarp.sarp.
uppatetva dassami); - 0 -cchaya, 0 -cchadi, 0 -cchati,f
"the shade or cover oJ a palm-tree" ?, a measure oJ
length; MI 82,36 (dhanuggaho . . . lahukena asanena
appakasiren' eva tiriyarp. -arp. atipateyya; Ps II
52,18Joll.: yatha so dhanuggaho tarp. vidatthi-
caturailgulacchayarp. slgham eva atikkameti) 1- S I 62,3
(Spk-t [Be] 1 159,11: -an ti 0 -cchadirp., sa pana
ratanamatta vidatthicaturailgula va)= A II 48,14 (Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee 0 -cchatirp.; Mp III 87,22: yavata so -arp.
atikkameyya, Se so; Be 0 -cchadirp.; Ce, Ee 0 -cchatim;
Mp-t [Be] II 303,3: 0 -cchadin ti -arp.) f- IV 429,zo (Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se 0 -cchatirp.);- 0 -tarm;ta, (m.)n., a young shoot
oJ the palm; Vin I 189,JoJoll. (chabbaggiya bhikkhü ...
-e chedapetva talapattapadukayo dharenti tani -ani
chinnani milayanti); - 0 -pakka, n., a ripe palm Jruit;
Vin III 61 ,15; A I 181,12 (-arp. sampati bandhana muttarp.
parisuddharp. hoti; Mp 11 292,4: -an ti suparipakka-
talaphalarp.); 1t 84,2o*; Vibh-a 449,15 (talarukkhe -arp.
disva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pakkarp.); - 0 -paJ,IJ,Ia, n., a
palm leaJ; Ja III 447,6 (k~J.le -arp. pilandhitva); VI 6,13
(geharp. karetva -ehi chadetva); Sp 290,2 (--cchattarp.);
Dhp-a I 391,4 (chattarp. va -arp. va upari karonti);
2 0
Vism 313,29;- 0 -patta, n. [tala+ patta ], a palm leaf,
Th 127 (ÜJ.!J.larp. me -anarp. gailgatlre kup kata); Ap 198,5
305 hila
0
-pattika,f, a palm-leaJ; S 11 217,18
(sattaratanarp. va avuso nagarp. a¡;h;lhattharatanarp. va -aya
chadetabbarp. manneyya; Spk II 176,16: -aya ti
taruJ.latalap~J.lena); - -patti,f, a palm-leaJ; Th-a II
0
8,3o (talapattanan ti ... -inan ti pi patho so ev' attho);-
-piJ.!~a, m., a bunch oJ palm Jruits;
0 0
-piJ,I«Ji,f,
Vibh-a 449,18 (talarp. aruyha -irp. chinditurp. arabhi, E e,
Se so; Be, Ce -arp.); Vin-vn 1484 (-irp. so otaretvana;
cJSp 850,2: talarp. va naJikerarp. va arujho yottena
0
-VaJ,Ita, n., a palm-leaJ used
Vin II 130,18 (anujanami bhikkhave vidhüpanarp. ca -arp.
ca ti); M 1 189,5 (-ena pi vidhüpanena pi vatarp.
0
pariyesanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -p~J.lena); Vv 33:239
(-arp. aharp. adasirp.; Vv-a 147,26: -an ti talapattehi kata-
m~~alavijanirp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -paJ.lJ.lan ti); Ja III
0
283,2 (sa kumarika . . . pitararp. . . . -en a vijayamana);
Ap 211,5 (-arp. maya dinnarp. Tissassadiccabandhuno);
309,21 (datva -e ca sobhane, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -p~J.!e); 0
Mil 97,15 (-en a va vidhüpanena va, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-p~J.lena); Vism 310,20 (vilivamaye pi vljanivisese
--voharo viya); Dhp-a I 303,1 (vijayamano therassa sise
-ena pahari); As 63,9 (yatha hi -p~J.!ehi akatva
0
kilañjadihi katarp. tarp.sarikkhatta rüJhisaddena -an tv
eva veditabbarp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -paJ.lJ.lan tv eva);-
--gahaka, m., one who holds the palm-leaJ Jan; Ps II
194,13;- 0 -VaJ,Itaka, mfn., arranged in aJan-shape; Vin
II 137,7 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü gihinivattharp. nivasenti
hatthisoJ.l~akarp. ... -arp. satavallikarp.; Sp 1212,10: -arp.
0
nama -v~takarena satakarp. olambetva nivasanarp.); -
0
-vatthu, talavatthu, n. (and mfn. ?), see sv; - 0 -hira,
0
-hira, m., a strip or stick oJ palm wood;? Sp 618,19
(antochidde sücitalahiradlhi vinivijjhitva, Be, Ce so; Se
talahiradihi; Ee sucitaJahiradihi); 618,21 (kadali-
kkhandhamhi kaJ.ltake va --adini va pavesetva, Be, Ce
so; Ee taJa-; Se talahiradini); Sp-t [Be] 11 373,16 (salaka-
hatthan ti -' -adinarp. kalapass' etarp. adhivacanarp.); -
0
-hiraka, m., a kind oJ worm; Vism 258,31
(g~~uppadaka -a . . . ice evamadidvattirp.sakula-
ppabheda kimayo) = Vibh-a 242,5 f- Pj 1 58,6;- see also
kakataliya (sv kaka), dvattirp.satalaka (sv dva- ).
tala 2, taJa\ n. [BHS ta~a; cJ S. tala], a key; Abh 222 (talo
'vapuraJ.larp., Ce so; Be taJo); 901 (talo tu kuñcikayarp.,
Be so; Ce taJo); Vin 11 148,2o (anujanami bhikkhave
talacchiddarp. tiJ.!i talani lohatalarp. katthatalarp.
vis1iJ.!atalan ti, Ce, E e, Se so; Be taJani; Sp 1216,11: t!J.li
taJani ti tisso kuñcikayo); Sp 1226,15 (idarp. talarp. e' eva
süci ca sampaticchatha tumhakarp. viharan ti, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee tajarp.); - 0 -Cchiggala, 0 -cchiggaJa, m., a key-
hole; Abh 222 (kuñcikavivararp. -o); S IV 290,26 (-ena
ca aggaJantarikaya ca acci nikkharnitva); V 453,11
(addasa . . . Licchavikumarake . . . sukhumena -ena
asanarp. atipatente); Sv 886,7 ( -ena hatthi viya ...
nikkhamamana f- Ps IV 183,26: talacchiddena
0
nikka~~hiyamana hatthi viya); - -cchidda, n., a key-
hole; Vinii 120,18; Kv33l,w; Vism174,22 (bhitti-
cchidde va -e va vatapanantarikaya va); Mp II 340,1
(-arp. gahetva anantakasena upamento viya);
-vara, m., tu m to have charge oJ the key; ? Dhp-a II
49,1 (tassa acirapabbjitaya eva uposathagare -o papuJ.!i);
tala
- ifc see kanha- (sv kanha2).
tala 3, m., see sv tala2.
tala4 , m. or n. ¡?], the head of an arrow;? Ja V 130,!
(-en a -aJTI dal)<;lakena dal)<;lak~ vajena vaj~
anatikkamanto khipitva saragabbhaJTI akasi).
talaka, m. [tala 1 + ka2 ?], a kind of tree or shrub;
Ap 346,25 (alaka -a e' eva vijjanti mama assame).
tlilavatthu, talavatthu, n. (and mfn. ?) [tala 1 + vatthu; cf S.
vastavya, vastva ?], (according to cts) (like) the site of a
(previous) palm-tree; or like a palm-tree with its top tuft
of leaves cut off; ie with no possibility of (re)growth;
(see K.R. Norman, 197Ja, pp. 169-70); Vin V 148,!*
(anh' eva parajika ye durasada 0 -samüpama); SI 69,31*
(anapacca adayada -u bhavanti te, Ee, Se so: Be
talavatthü; Ce talavatthu: Spk I 134,15: talavatthü
bhavanti te ti te bhikkhutejasa da<;l<;lha vatthu-
mattavasinha matthakacchinnatalo viya bhavanti, putta-
dh!tadivasena na va<;l<;lhantl ti attho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-u) t Ja V 267,21* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee talavatthu; 273,Is-:
-ü ti dighadhamme pi chinnamülatalo viya, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e talavatthü ti); Sp 132,29 (-u vi ya nes~ vatthu
katan ti talavatthukata; Sp-t [Be] I 340,2o foil.: talassa
vatthu -u, yatha aramassa vatthubhütapubbo padeso
aramassa abhave aramavatthü ti vuccati evaJTI talassa
patinhitokaso samülaJTI uddharite tale padesamatte thite
talassa vatthubhütapubbatta -ü ti vuccati);
0
-kata, mfn., destroyed utterly (with no possibility of
regrowth); V in III 2,!8 (y e te ... rüparasa .. . te
tathagatassa pahlna ucchinnamüla talavatthukata
anabhav~ gata ayatii:p anuppadadhamma; Sp 132,29:
talavatthu viya nes~ vatthu katan ti talavatthukata,
yatha hi talarukkhaJTI samülaJTI uddharitva tassa
vatthumatte tasmiJTI padese kate na puna tassa talassa
uppatti paññayati evaJTI . . . avirüthidhammatta va
matthakacchinnatalo viya kata ti talavatthukata;
cfSp-t [Be] I 340,!7foil.: talavatthuvatthukata ti vattabbe
onhamukho ti ad!su viya majjhepadalopaJTI katva
akar~ ca dlghaJTI katva talavatthukata ti vuttan ti) t
D III 270,29 (rago me ... talavatthukato ... ) t A III 85,6
(saJT!yojanani ... talavatthukatani); MI 250,19 (seyyatha
pi . . . talo matthakacchinno abhabbo puna virüthiya
evam eva kho . . . tathagatassa . . . asava . . . talavatthu-
kata ... ); Th! 478 (nibbii¡.l).a me kama vantasama -a. Be,
Se, Th App II p. 247,4* so; Ce, Ee talavatthukata;
Th!-a 260,24: -a ti talassa patinhanasadisa kata).
talisa, talissa, m., se e sv tallsa.
talisa(JTI),f, se e sv tallsa(JTI).
tali, f [ts], a tree; SAF: talipot palm, Corypha
umbraculifera L.; Abh 604 (tall ca ketakl).
tlilisa, talisa, talissa, m. [S., BHS tal!Sa], a fragrant shrub
( Flacourtia cataphracta ?); a perfume prepared from it;
V in I 203,16 (añjanupapisanehi attho hoti ... anujanami
bhikkhave candanaJTI ... -aJTI bhaddamuttakan ti); Ja IV
286,12* ( 0 -tagarabhojana aññe t~ miga ramissanti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee talissatagarabhojane aranne ... ;
286,13' foil.: tvaJTI o -pattatagarapattabhojana migl tasma
aññe taJTI miga ramissanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
talissapatta- ); 287 ,20' ( 0 -pattadigandhapal).l).asanthara, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se talisa-); V 420,7 (-talisatagara-, in long
cpd, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -talisa-; 422,28·: -a ti
306 taJan a
tallsapattarukkha, Be, Ce so; E e, Se talisa ti talisa- );
VI 537,20* (madhü ca madhulanhi ca -a ca piyaiJ.guka,
Ce so; Be, Ee talisa; Se taliya; 537,28·: -a ti-adika sabba
gandhajatiyo, Ce so; Be, Ee talisa; Se taliya ti); - see
also tallsaka.
tlilisa(JTI), talisa(JTI), ta)lsa(JTI),j num. [cf cattallsa(JTI)L 40;
Ap 103,!3* (in uddana: gatha sataJTI ca -aJTI, Ee so; Ce,
Se ta)ls~; Be satallsaJTI); 234,14* (in uddana: gathayo
e' ettha saiJ.khata -am ekam eva ca, Be so; Ce, Se
ta)lsam; Ee talisam); 285,27* (in uddana: gatha -am eva
ca, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se ta)lsam); Sadd 800,s (cattallsa-
saddassa ... adival).l).assa lopo hoti kvaci cuco-adesa ca
honti: -aJTI cattallsaJTI cuttallsaJTI cottallsaJTI); - !fe see
anha- (sv agha\ eka-, catu- (sv catu[r]), tetallsa, pañca-,
satta- (sv satta4).
tlilisaka, m. [S. lex. tallsaka], a fragrant shrub (Flacourtia
cataphracta ?); Mil338,14(-tagaratallsaka-, in long cpd);
- see also tallsa.
talu, n. [ts], the palate; MI 120,36 (tena bhikkhave
bhikkhuna dante 'bhidantaJTI adhaya jivhaya -UJTI ahacca
cetasa cittaJTI abhinigganhitabbaJTI); Sn 716 (jivhaya
-UJTI ahacca udare saññato siya); Vism 272,6
(bahiravato . . . abbhantaraJTI pavisanto -UJTI ahacca
nibbayati); - 0 -ja, mfn., (gr.t.t.) palatal; Sadd 608,29
(ival).l).acavaggayakara -a); 609,8 (jivhamajjhaJTI -an~
karru¡.~); - see also kal)thataluja (sv kal).tha).
taluka, n. [ts], the palate; Sp 278,24 (-~ chupati).
taleti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup talayati, Wg § 32:58],
establishes; Dhatup 617 (tala patinhay~); Dhatum 390;
Sadd 563,21 (tala patinhayaJTI: -eti -ayati talo tal~).
ta!a 1, n., see sv tala2•
tii!a2 , tala3, m. [S., BHS ta<;ta; cfS. tala], beating; striking
the hands together, clapping; a percussion instrument;
Abh901 (-o ... turiyari.ge, Ce so; Be talo); DII 147,to
(Kusavatl .. . dasahi saddehi avivitta .. . gltasaddena
sammasaddena talasaddena .... , Ce, E e, Se so; Be
pal).itatasaddena; Sv 587,14: pal).itatacaturassa-ammal).a-
tiitasaddo); Ja III 223,4* (na-y-idha nace~ gltaJTI va-~
va susamahitaJTI, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tal~ va; 223,9· foil.:
hatthe susamahite katva vadentassa susamahit~
hatthatalaJTI va natthi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se hatthatataJTI);
Ap 442,23 (tattha naccehi gltehi -ehi vaditehi ca, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee talehi); Sv 453,3 (karavlkasakul).e ...
pakkhena -aJTI datva viküjamane, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
talaJTI); Sadd 569,s (tata t3:tane: ... -an ti k~satatadi);
- ifc see k~sa-, kanha- (sv kanha2), samma-
(sv samma\ hattha-; - 0 avacara, m. [cf S. talavacara,
BHS ta<;tavacara], l. means of makíng music,
instruments; D II 159,16 (gandhamalaJTI ca sabbaJTI ca
-aJTI sannipatetha ti; Sv 596,15: sabb~ turiyabhal).<;l~);
Ja VI 277,4* (sabbaJTI ca -aJTI mal)imhi passa nimmit~);
Mhv 48:101 (--saddiinaJTI kahalanaJTI ravena ca);- 2. a
musician;? Ja I 60,17 (sabbatalavacaresu sakani sakani
patibhanani dassayantesu ).
ta!ana, n. [S. ta<;lana; cf BHS ta<;lana], striking, beating;
Dhatum 883 (tata -e); Ja IV 192,24'
(
0
-garahanapabbajanato); Spk III 65,3o (dary<;lena -aJTI
viya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee talento, prob. wr); V v-a 212,15
(vadhanan ti -anaJTI); Sadd 566,27 (jasa -e: -~
paharal).aJTI).
taJini
taJini, flcf S. lex. ta<;Ianl], a whip; Abh 370 (kas a tv
assaditiJ1ini, Ce so; Be assabhitajinl).
ta)isa(Ip), see sv talisa(Ip-).
taJeti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. ta<;Iayati, Wg .§ 32:43: ta<;Ia
aghate, and S. Dhatup tat:~<;late, Wg .§ 8:28: ta<;li ta<;lane],
beats, strikes; strikes a musical instrument; Dhatup 638
(taja aghate); Dhatum 883 (taja tajane); MI 87,1o (kasahi
pi -enti vettehi pi -enti); S IV 196,1o (tam enaip-
kiqharakkho ... dat:~<;lena sutajitaip- -eyya); Th 200 (ma
taip- upakat:Jt:Jakamhi -essaip-; Th-a II 6 7,15: taip-
niddayamanaip- upakat:~t:Jakamhi kaJ.)J)asamipe desana-
hatthena ahaip- ma ca -essaip-, Ce so; Be, Se ma
patajessaip-; Ee ma ca -essayaip- tvaip-, prob. wr); Sadd
569,5foll. (taja tajane: -eti -ayati ... tajaip- ... tala
aghate: pubbe viya rüpani);- part.pr. tiJ1enta, mfn., A I
-11.12; Ja II 123,6 (naip- rajapurisa catukke catukke kasahi
-enta); Ev-a 241,15 (vajjanto ti vadento -ento, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee vajjento ti); - aor. 3 sg. tajesi, Ja VI 413,2R;
~1hv 38:82;- absol. (a) tajetva, S IV 196,10; Ja I 50,22
1dakkhit:Japassaip- -etva, E e so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce
phaletva; Se padaletva); 451,24; Vism 302,25; (b) (t:Jamul)
tajiip-, - ifc see ura- (sv ura[s]); - pass. part.pr.
la) tajiyamana, mfn., Dhp-a II 39,3; Nidd-a I 42,26
1-iyamano, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee taliyamano);
lb) taddamana, mfn., Ja VI 60,25* (addakkhiip- phalaip-
ambaip- tirochadaip- taddamanaip- manussehi, Ee so, but
prob. wr; Be haññamanaip-; Ce tujjamanaip-; Se
rudamanaip-; 61,w; pothiyamanaip-); - pp ta!ita, mfn.
and n. [cfS. ta<;lita], l. (mfn.) struck; beaten; Ja V 455,6·
1padadihi ca -a va); Dhp-a III 461,3 (bheriyadinaip-
ruriyanaip- -anaip- nigghosam vit:Jadinaip- ca vaditanaip-
saddaJP- sutva); Th-a JI 191,11 (kasahi -o ajaniyo viya);
- sutajita, mfn., well beaten; S IV 196,10 (tam enaip-
kirtharakkho ... dat:~<;lena suta)itaip- tajeyya); - 2. (n.)
striking; beating; Ja VI 61 ,7· (turiyatajitasaiJ.ghughe ti
ruriyanaip- -ehi sailghughe uyyane); Mp III 369,6
1mahaturiyatajitavaditena ti ... pathamaip- sailghaganaip-
-aip- nama hoti tato paraip- vaditaip-); Saddh 80 (in cpd);
- caus. absol. tajapetva, Ja III 178,4 (dvihi kasahi
paharasahassehi tiJ1apetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
kasapaharasahassehi); Ap-a 155,12 (kumaro amaccaip-
dal.)<;lena tajapetva nikka<;I<;Ihapesi).
ta\·a and (jollowed by eva) tava-d, ind. [from tava(t) qv;
S. tavat], l. to su eh an extent; so far; so ... ( sometimes
H-ritten as cpd); V in I 108,7 (sailgho yava mahantaip-
uposathapamukhaip- akailkhati tava mahantaip-
uposathapamukhaip- sammannatu); 209,9 (tava bahuip-
<U\"aJ.)t:Jam); III l6,2o (tava mahanta puñja ahesuip- orato
thito puriso parata thitaip- purisaip- na passati); MI 185,3o
'bahiraya pathavidhatuya tava mahallikaya aniccata
paññayissati); S V 217,11 * (tava manoramaip- bimbaip-
jaraya abhimadditaip-); Ud 92,1 (alaip- me bhante tava
bahukehi puttehi ca nattarehi ca ti); Pv 19:6 (tava
mahaddhanassapi na me datuip- piyaip- ahu); Ja I 207,14
'tava mahato sakut:Jasailghassa majjhe ); V 74, 11·
'tava-d-eva udabindugat:Janaya); Ps II 80,21 (tava kilanto
nama attabhavo evaip- patipakatiko jato ti); Pj 1 233,21
'mayaip- pana tava ciraip- ... vasituip- na sakkhissama);
- - 2. so long; as long as; until; Ap 37,2o (buddho ti
\ acanaip- natthi tava nuppajjate jino); - esp. as
307 tava
correlative of yava(Ip-) (and yavata): (i) yava ... tava ... ;
a as long as ... so long ... ; V in IV 216,5 (yava gabbho
tarut:Jo ahosi tava cchadesi); DI 46,1o (yav' assa kayo
thassati tava naip- dakkhinti devamanussa); Ja III 100,24*
(yava-d-ev' ass' ahü kiñci tava-d-eva akhadisuip-);
Mil 199,23 (yava taip- mülaip- tassa hatthagataip- hoti tava
na añño koci pakatimanusso tam purisaip- passati); - ~
until ... so long ... ; Ja I 254,27 (yava dve jana avasittha
ahesuip- tava annamannaip- ghatayiip-su); II 273,9
(yavahaJP- agacchami tava idh' eva hotha ti); Ap 373,26
(yava udeti suriyo dipaJP- me tava ujjali); Sp 1120,6
(nagamesun ti yava te susanato agacchanti tava te na
acchiip-su pakkamiip-SU yeva, Be, Se so; Ce omits
susanato; Ee icchiip-su); - y as far as ... so far; MI
328,32* (yavata candimasuriya pariharanti . . . tava
sahassadha loko); Ap 272,13 (yavata buddhaparisa tava
cchadesi satakaip-); Sp 98,7 (yava Jambukolapaganaip-
tava maggaip- sodhapetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits tava);
Pj I 197,18 (yava akanighabrahmabhavanaip- tava m ah a
sakkaraviseso nibbatti); - (ii) yava na ... tava [na] ... ,
a as long as not, until ... so long ... ; D III 25,14* (yav'
attanaip- na passati kotthu tava vyaggho ti maññati);
Dhp 284 (yava hi vanatho na chijjati ... patibaddhamano
va tava so, Be so; Ce yavaip- vanatho; Ee, Se yavaip- hi);
Ja IV 493,27 (yava me vyadhijaramarat:~ani nagacchanti
tava-d-eva pabbajitva dhammaip- carissami);
Vibh-a 258,1 (yava na upaghati tava pal.)t:Jatti na
vissajjetabba); - ~ befare ... , so that not ... ; Ja III
295,15 (yava na marami tava ehi ti); V 153,24" (yava esa
amhe natikkamati . . . tava-d-eva tvaip- . . . maggam
avara); VI 197,21 (yava taip- nagacchati tava-d-eva
Y amunaip- gantva papavahatitthe papavahanaip-
karissami ti); Vism 664,3o (yava maip- ... rajapurisa na
anayavyasanaip- papenti tava-d-eva palayissami ti);
Ap-a 198,13 (raja yav' assa mata n' agacchati tava
gacchama ti vatva gacchanto cintesi); - (iii) na tava ...
yava na ... , na tava ... yava ... , not ... as long as (not),
not ... until ... ; V in III 9,28 (na tava Sariputta sattha
savakanaip- sikkhapadaJP- paññapeti . . . yava na idh'
ekacce asavaghaniya dhamma saiJ.ghe patubhavanti);
D II 99,25 (na tava bhagava parinibbayissati na yava
bhagava bhikkhusaiJ.ghaip- arabbha kiñci-d-eva udaharati
ti); MI 21,s (n' eva tava tighami na nisidami na
nipajjami yava cailkamanto va taip- bhayabheravaip-
pativinemi); A I 141,6 (na ca tava kalaip- karoti yava na
taip- papakarrunaip- vyantihoti); Pp 13,3o (n' eva tava
kappa u<;I<;Iayheyya yavayaip- puggalo na sotapattiphalaip-
sacchikaroti); Vism 348,16 (tava-d-eva gavi ti sañña na
antaradhayati yava naip- padaletva bilaso na vibhajati);
- (iv) tava ... yava [na] ... , so long ... as long as,
until ... ; S III 225,14 (abhabbo ca tava kalaip- katum yava
na sotapattiphalaip- sacchikaroti); Ud 73,9* (obhasati tava
so kimi yava na unnamati pabhaiJ.karo); Vism 232,5
(sampatti nama tava-d-eva sobhati yava naip- vipatti
nabhibhavati); Pv-a 4,32 (tava ayyo agametu yavayaip-
puriso ... paniyaip- pivissati ti); - (v) with yavakivaip-:
so long; S V 228,22 (yavakivaip- ca bhikkhave
ariyasavakassa ariyañat:JaJP- na uppannaip- hoti n' eva
tava catunnaip- indriyanaip- Sal.)thiti hoti); A I 259,2
(yavakivaip- cahaJP- ... n' eva tavahaip- ... ); Ud 72,26
tava
(yavaklva¡p ca bhante tathagata loke n' uppajjanti ...
tava aññatitthiya paribbajaka sakkata honti); - 3. at
once, now; first; just; still, yet; indeed, truly; V in I
I08,21 (navaka bhikkhü pathamatararp. sannipatitva na
tava thera agacchantl ti pakkamirp.su); DI 178,1o
(atippago kho tava Savatthiya¡p pil)<;laya cariturp.);
II 343,9 (eko tava satthavaho ... ); SI 146,3o (akalo kho
tava marisa bhagavantarp. payirupasiturp.); A IV 193,12
(tvarp. pi kho si itthannama¡p apattirp. apanno tvarp. tava
pathamarp. patikarohl ti); Th 193 (na tava supiturp. hoti
ratti); Ja I 2,4 (tattha actito tava tesarp. nidananarp.
paricchedo veditabbo); 265,25 (aparisuddho pan' amhi
nahayissami tava ti); 429,19 (oloketva düre tava ti);
VI 141,12* (brahmaJ!O tava yajatu paccha pi yajissate
raja; 141,w: pathamarp. tava Khal)<;lahalo yajatu); Nidd I
215,16 (akkodhano ti hi kho vuttarp. api ca kodho tava
vattabbo); Vism 6,21 (sllarp. tava arabbha idarp.
pañhakammarp. hoti); Sv 1005,32 (mahallakakale puñña¡p
karissama daharamha tava ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
daharamahata va); Pj II 401,16 (aggimhi tava pakkhitto
payaso mahabrahmuna bhutto ayarp. pana avaseso atthi);
Patis-a 532,18 (eva¡p tava akkharacintaka,
atthakathacariya pana bhaJ!anti ... ); Mhv 7:19 (yakkhiJ!I
tava janati mama jatirp.); - esp. with imperat.: Vin II
248,26 (iñgha tava ayasma kayikarp. sikkhassü ti); Ja IV
45,13 (acikkha tava ti); Ud-a 198,13 (gehadvare thito eko
thero viya upadharehi tava ti); 430,14 (pabbajitva pi
acara¡p tava sikkhatu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee acare sikkhatu);
Patis-a 683,27 (ito tava ehi tiqhatu pesana¡p);- na tava,
not yet; V in III 161,26 (nissa¡psayarp. kho na tava
bhattarp. siddharp. bhavissati); IV 284,17 (ayye
bhikkhuniyo pakkanta na tava clvara¡p bhajiyissatl ti
clvaravibhañga¡p patibahati); MI 91,3o (atha kho so
n' eva Uiva anavaql kamesu hoti); Vv 37:13 (ya¡p ca
sllavan asirp. na tarp. tava vipaccati); Sp 1201,13
(sañchavi nu kho me VaJ!O udahu na tava ti); Mhv 8:17
(na tava abhisecayi); 15:180 (jinasasana¡p patighita¡p nu
bhante ti na tava manujadhipa); - frequently
tiiva-d-eva, at that time; just then; at once; Vin I 95,36
(tava-d-eva chaya metabba; Sp 1033,27: tava-d-eva ti
upasampannasamanantaram eva); MI 225,34 (vacchako
tarul)ako tava-d-eva jatako); SI 210,33 (assosi kho
Anathapil)<;iiko gahapati buddho kira loke uppanno ti
tava-d-eva pana bhagavantarp. dassanaya upasañkamitu-
kamo ahosi); V 351,10 (gandhakaral)<;lakassa tava-d-eva
vivariyamanassa); Ud 7,13 (Bahiyo Daruclriyo taya
devataya sa¡pvejito tava-d-eva Supparakasma pakkami;
Ud-a 85,16: tasmirp. yeva khaJ!e); Sn 30 (mahamegho
pavassi tava-d-eva); Ja I 36,21 (bhikkhusañgho agacchatü
ti cintesi bhikkhü tava-d-eva agamirp.su); 61,14
(tava-d-eva na¡p . . . itthiyo . . . abhiramapentiyo
naccagitavaditani payojayirp.su); 151,13 (raja tava-d-eva
ratharp. aruyha); IV 2,25 (ta¡p samudde khipirp.su
tava-d-eva nava javena samuddarp. pakkhandi);
Vism 180,2 (uddhumatakasañram nikkhittan ti
kathentanarp. vacanarp. sutva pi na tava-d-eva atitthena
pakkhandantena viya gantabba¡p); Pv-a 44,25 (navanl ti
paccagghani tava-d-eva patubhütani); - tiivade (jrom
tavadeva, interpreted as tavade va ?), at that time; just
then; at once; just there; ?; Pv 20:9 (tato ca raja
308 tava(t)
nipatitva tavade dana¡p ... daditva; Pv-a 109,27: tavade ti
tada eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tavadeva ti); Th 650
(ariyena tul)hibhavena upeto hoti tavade); Ja I 27,1*
(buddhassa vacanarp. sutva mano nibbayi tavade);
III 244,2o* (yarp. ya¡p hi kayena phusanti tavade; 245,1·:
tavade ti tasmirp. samaye); IV 471,4• (yavata vijitarp.
mayharp. na te vatthabba tavade; 472,18': yattakarp.
mayharp. vijita¡p tattake taya na vatthabba¡p); Ap 32,10
(bhoga asañkhiya tassa uppajjissanti tavade); 74,21
(vassasatasahassani ayu vijjati tavade ); 341 ,5 (buddhe
nibbayamanamhi aloko asi tavade); Cp 2:8:8 (vivaram
adasi pathavl papayakkhassa tavade; Cp-a 166,26: ta¡p
khal)a¡p yeva); Mhv 22:62 (balisiko, rañño acikkhi
tavade); - 0
(tava)-düraphala, mfn., with fruit so
distant; ? Ja III 251 ,9* (ta¡p deva payirupasanti -a~p
satirp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -e sati) = Ap 42,1 (Ee so; Be
tavaduraphale sati; Ce tava dure phale sati; Se
tavaduraphalarp. sakirp.; Ap-a 280,36: tarp. asavatllatarp.
-a~p tattakarp. cirakala¡p atikkamitva phala¡p gal)hanta¡p
santa¡p sa¡pvijjamana¡p, eds so).
tava(t), mfn. [S. tavat], so great, so much; so many; Ja V
72,2* (yavanto udabindüni kayasmirp. nipatirp.su me
-anto ga~f<;iü jayetha; cf7 4,9· foil.: yavanto ti
yattakani . . . assa tava-d-eva udabindugal)anaya ...
gal)<;ia uqhahirp.su); VI 388,28* (yavanto purisass' attha¡p
guyharp. jananti . . . -anto tassa ubbega); Spk I 117,s
(yavata so ta!acchayarp. atikkameyya -ata kalena eka¡p
cakkavajam atikkamaml ti); - instr. tavata, adv., by
(only) so much; for so long; to such an extent; D I 104,6
(api nu so [suddo] rajabhaJ!ita¡p va bhal)ati ... -ata so
assa raja); Ja II 124,21* (nanu so -ata hato); Ap 74,22
(vassasatasahassani ayu VIJJatl tavade -ata
saral)agamanarp. paripul)J!arp. agopayirp.); Vism 303,1
(-ata pi santughirp. anapajjitva); It-a I 67,16
(Devadatto . . . silapavijjhanena lohituppadakamma¡p
katva pi na -ata pakato jato Najagirirp. vissajjetva pana
pakato jato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tava so); -as correlative
ofyavata (and yava): A IV 426,9 (yavata saññasamapatti
-ata aññapativedho); Dhp 259 (na -ata dhammadharo
yavata bahu bhasati); Ja III 481,2* (yavata caruro dlpa ...
-ata mayha nañguttha~p); Ap 336,27 (yavata nagararp. asi
-ata jotayissati); Sp 281,21 (yavata slsarp. na ppavisati
-ata aphassite pi vaqati); Dlp 4:17 (yava titthanti
saddhamma . . . -ata sasan' addhanarp. cira¡p titthati
satthuno);- 0 (tava)-kalika, mfn., ofjust so much time;
temporary; Vin III 55,21 (anapatti sakasaññissa
vissasagahe -e ... ; Sp 372,2o foil.: -e ti patidassami
patikarissaml ti evarp. gal)hantassa -e pi gaha~fe
anapatti); 65,23 foil. (kirp.citto tvarp. bhikkhü ti -o aharp.
bhagava ti anapatti bhikkhu -e ti; Sp 388,u: -o aharp.
bhagava ti --citto aharp. bhagava ti vattukamena vutta¡p,
--citto ti puna aharitva dassaml ti evarp.citto ahan ti
vuttarp. hoti); Ja I 393,3· (anicca khaJ!ika ... -a nissara
o• -aqhena mayamañcipheJ!asadisa); IV 122,6· (imesa¡p
ca sattanarp. jlvitarp. parittarp. -arp. aciratthitikarp.);
Vism 618,3o (sabbe sañkhara anicca ... uppadavaya-
ppavattito viparil)amato -ato niccapatikkhepato ca);
632,32 (sañkhatalakkha~fassa --tta¡p); Sp 371,5 (--ta);
1001,26 (ayarp. -o nama tarp. pabbajeturp. na vagan ti);
Sv 195,23 (ittarani -ani honti); Pv-a 87,34 (bhoga nama te
távakálika
na sassata anavaghita -a pahayagamanlya);
-rup, adv., temporarily; Vin II 270,32 (sadhu bhante ayya
amhakrup senasanrup dentu -an ti); III 65,2o (aññataro
bhikkhu saiighassa daru~ -a~ haritva attano viharassa
ku~~a~ upatthambhesi); 66,10 (anujanami bhikkhave
-a~ haritun ti); IV 286,3 (anapatti matapitunna~ deti
-am deti); Vism 95,4 (attano santakam -am datva); -
ne~. atavakalika, mfn., Kkh 2 326,21 (~tavakalikata); -
0(tava)-tva, n., abstr., the being just so much;
Vism 482,29 (-ato ti tavabhavato) = Vibh-a 46,26;-
0(tava)-ppamal}ika, mfn., for such a duration; Sp 644,3o
(kai,l~upa!icchadi yava abadho atthi -a adhighatabba) =
Kkh 2 95,21;- see also tava.
tavakalika, mfn., see sv tava(t).
tavataka, mf( -ika)n. (occasionally tavattaka), and
tavatika, mfn. [tava(t) + taka 1 ?; cf BHS tavattaka~.
tavattikrup], (just) so much; so many; of (just) such an
extent; S III 120,24 (natthi ca me kayasmi~ tavatika
balamatta yayahrup bhagavantrup dassanaya
upasaiikameyyan ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se yavataha~);
133,15 (atthi ca me ayasmante Ánande tavatika vissaghi);
Mil 143,18 (aya~ ... mahajanapado ... dukkaro tata -ena
balena dharetu~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tavattakena); Spk III
102,19 (tassa pañcasaka!asatani pañcamatugamasatani
parivaro bhariyaya pi 'ssa -o va ti); Dhp-a I 409,16 (-esu
puttanattasahassesu); II 153,1 (he!!ha catt~lsayojana­
sahassamatte !han e udaka~ . . . upari -e yeva !hane
udaka~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tavattake); Ap-a 162,3
(se!!hidh!ta -ena sallapamattena ussahajata, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se tavattakena); Bv-a 129,32 (tavata tighamano ti
-rup kala~ ti!!hamano);- with yavataka: Vin III 214,27
(yavatakrup icchasi -rup gai,lhah! ti); D II 245,2o (tato
bhoto yavatikahi [itthlhi] attho tavatika anlyatan ti);
III134,11 (so yavataka~ akaiikhati -rup anussarati); A I
112,4 (yavatika abhisaiikharassa gati tavatika~ gantva);
Ud 91,23 (iccheyyasi tva~ Visakhe yavatika Savatthiya
manussa tavatike putte ca nattaro ca ti, eds so); Nidd I
178,27 (yavataka~ neyya~ -rup ña1,1a~); - yavataka va
tavataka va, however many; ? S IV 320,23 (atthi kho pana
maya piil)o atimapito yavatako va -o va); -
acc. tavatakrup, adv., at once;? Mi1246,14 (na yutta~
gihi~ -a~ pabbajetu~ ... yada apunaravattl hoti tada so
pabbajetabbo, Be, Ce Ee so; Se tavattaka~); -
instr. tavatakena, with just so much; merely with that;
DI 207,4 (te -en' eva attamana assu); MI 238,29 (ki~
pana te Aggivessana -en' eva yapentl ti); Mil126,25 (na
-ena amhakrup tapo bhijjati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tavattakena kiriyena); Bv-a 278,37 (sakiya trup sutva
-en' eva araddhacitta tutthamanasa ahesum);- see also
tattaka 1, yavataka. .. . tadisa~ bhayrup asi ajja -o yatha mama); Vism 187,15
tavathpsa, mfn., n., and -a, m.pl. [cf S. trayastri~sa,
O. von Hinüber, 1986, § 214], l. (mfn.) numbering 33;
belonging to the group of 33 (gods); (m.pl.) the 33 gods;
those rebom in the world of the 33 gods; Vin III 18,37
(catummaharajika deva ... -a deva ... yama deva ... );
D II 20,16 (jato ... Vipassl kumaro animisanto pekkhati
seyyatha pi deva -a); 267,10* (Sakko ca me vara~ dajja
-ana~
-anam issaro); M II 78,33 (devanrup
sudhammaya~ sabhayrup sannisinnana~; Ps III 313,15:
0-bhavane nibbattadevanrup); SV 410,1
309 tási(n)
(catummaharajikehi kho avuso devehi -a deva
abhikkantatara ca pai,~ltatara ca); Ud 50,29 (sugati~
sagga~ 1oka~ upapanno devanrup -anrup sahavyata~);
Vv 34:1 (sabbe deve -e val)J:.lena atirocasi); Th!l97 (-a
ca y ama ca tusita capi devata; Th!-a 164,17 foil.:
sahapuññakarino tetti~sa jana yattha uppanna ta~
!hanrup -an ti, tattha nibbatta sabbe pi devaputta -a, keci
pana -a ti tesrup devanrup namam eva ti vadanti); Ja IV
357,26* (-esu devesu bhuñja kame amanuse); VI 127,4*
(deva -a sabbe Indapurohita); Ap 329,3o (-e pi
khobhetva, Be, Ce so; Ee -e 'to; Se -ehi); Vibh 422,28
(-anrup devanrup kittakrup ayuppamiil)a~); Mil 7,26 (te
bhikkhü ... devesu -esu antarahita himavante pabbate
Rakkhitatale paturahesu~); Sv 549,21 (Rahulo -esu
parinibbuto, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -e); Ps II 303,9 (nayrup
-a, Sakkena vañcita mayan ti); Dhp-a I 364,21 (amhakrup
pana vassasata~ -ana~ devanrup eko rattindivo );
As 31,15 (bhagava devana~ -ana~ abhidhammakatha~
kathesi); Sadd 924,3o (-a tidasa); - 2. (mfn.) of the
group of the 33 gods; Vv 22:3 (kena kaya~ upapanna
-a~ yasassinl); Ja VI 238,24* (bhavane tavati~s' aha~
acchara; 239,!4': 0-bhavane ahrup);- 3. (n.) the world of
the 33 gods; Vin 1 30,28 (-a~ gantva paricchattaka-
pupphrup gahetva); A I 227,34 (sahassa~ -ana~ ...
sahassa~ brahmalokana~); Pv 21:61 (-e yada buddho
sllaya~ Pai.l~ukambale paricchattakamülamhi vihasi;
Pv-a 138,2o: -e ti 0-bhavane); Ap 4,22 (jahitva manusa~
dehrup -a~ agañch' aha~); 286,2 (-a idhagantva);
Kv 609,19 (catummaharajike ti!!hati . . . -e tighati ...
yame tighati ... ); Mhv 27:18 (-rup ca gacchanta); 30:44
(itthiyo duve -arnhi nibbatta); - see also tidasa (sv te),
tetti~sa, tetti~sati.
tavatihaip, ind. [from tava(t) + aha(n), influenced by
katiha~ qv sv kati ?], for a period of so many days;
Vin III 186,14 (yavatiha~ [apatti~] jana~ pa!icchadeti
-rup tena bhikkhuna akama parivatthabba~, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be tavatlha~; Sp 629,25: yattakani ahani jananto
pa!icchadeti . . . -an ti tattakani ahani); - see also
yavatihrup.
tavade, tavadeva, see sv tava.
tasa, m. [S. trasa], fear, anxiety, alarm; S III 57,28 (-o
h' eso bhikkhu assutavato puthujjanassa); Ja II 398,24'
(haso va me ettha na -o, ki~ ma~ tumhe tasetha ti);
III 177,27 (Devadatto bodhisattassa o -matta~ pi katu~
nasakkh! ti); Ap 152,1 (-o mayhrup samuppanno
bhavane sampakampite); 271,16 (lomahrupso na vijjati
-rup mama na janami); Cp 3:6:5 (sahadighassa me
chattrup -o uppajji bheravo; Cp-a 218,27: suparividit-
ad!navatta bhayanako cittütraso udapadi); Mil24,24* (na
(ma bhayi bhikkhü ti -rup vinodetva hasa~ uppadetva);
- 0-tassana,f, trembling or quivering from alarm;
Sv 111,12 (jati~ pa!icca bhayrup ... utraso ti ayrup -a
nama).
tasaniya, tasan!ya, mfn. [S. trasanlya], frightening,
alam1ing; Mil 149,4 (marai,~an ti kho maharaja eta~
adighasaccana~ -a~ !hanrup etthayrup jano tasati ca
0
ubbijjati ca, Ee so; Ce -!!hiina~; Be, Se
tasanly aghana~).
tasi(n), mfn. [S. trasin], anxious, alarmed; Nidd I 217,5
tase ti
(idh' ekacco -1 hoti uttas! parittas!; Nidd-a I 323,3o: -1 ti
bhayanas!lo hoti).
tiiseti 1, -ayate, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftasati 2 qv.
tiiseti2 , -ayati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup trasayati,
Wg § 33:67], prevents; Sadd 567,8 (tasa vilral)e: ... -eti
-ayati).
tiihaip [taip + aha111], see sv ta(d).
ti 1, ind. [= iti 1 qv] (befare ti a .final short vowel is
lengthened, and .final anusvara is changed to -n [but not
in Mhv]; tifollowed by eva sometimes becomes tv- qv),
thus; used immediately following to mark l. a quotation
of words or thoughts or intentions, with or without a
verb of saying, thinking etc (serving the purpose of
inverted commas); Vin I 102,4 (anujanami bhikkhave
catuddase pannarase aghamiya ca pakkhassa
sannipatitun ti); 105,31 (eva111 bhante ti kho ayasma
Mahakappino bhagavato paccassosi); 107,2 (agantuka
bhikkhü na jananti kattha va ajj' uposatho kariyissat! ti);
DI 101,5 (araññayatana111 ajjhogahati pavattaphala-
bhojano bhavissam! ti); III 193,9 (andhakare va
telapajjota111 dhareyya cakkhumanto rüpani dakkhint! ti);
M I 1O1,4 (bhagava bhikkhü amantesi bhikkhavo ti
bhadante ti te bhikkhü bhagavato paccassosu111); 380,7
(dhammacakkhu111 udapadi ya111 kiñci samudaya-
dhammal11 sabba111 taip nirodhadhamman ti); S I 211 ,5
(rattiya suda111 tikkhattu111 vughasi pabhatan ti
maññamano); A I 107,7 (bhikkhu ida111 dukkhan ti
yathabhüta111 pajanati); Dhp 17 (papa111 me katan ti
tappati); Ud 57,12 (yannünahaip ... agarasma anagariya111
pabbajeyyan ti); 67,4 (sant' eke samal)abrahmal)a
eva111vadino eva111dighino sassato loko idam eva sacca111
mogha111 aññan ti); Sn p. 93,7 (samai)O kho daharo ti na
uññatabbo ); Ja IV 92,3o (so matara111 vina gocara111 na
gal)hissam! ti pil)~a111 na gal)hi); 94,11 (devo vassat! ti
saññaya); Mil 2,29 (ehi samal)era imaip kacavaraip
cha~~eh! ti aha); 2,32 (so bhikkhu dubbaco ayaip
sil.mal)ero ti kuddho); Vism 144,15 (amma tva111 katarena
maggena agata si ti pucchi111su); Sp 6,15 (ye sandhaya
ida111 vutta111 atha kho ayasma Mahakassapo eken'
ünapañca-arahantasatani uccin! ti); Sv 137,22 (so aho
buddho aho dhammo ti anussaranto yeva); Mhv 10:6
(yamake janay! putte bhariya me ti posi taip); 28:33
(rajata111 ti vijaniya); - 2. a single word or name or
expression, esp. the lemma in a ct or a definition; V in I
103,12foll. (patimokkhan ti adi111 eta111 mukha111 eta111
pamukhaip eta111 kusalana111 dhammilnaip tena vuccati
patimokkhan ti); Dhp 258 (khem! aver! abhayo pal)~ito
ti pavuccati); 388 (bahitapapo ti brahmal)o); Sn518
(nago ti katha111 pavuccati); p. 106,7 (ghoso pi kho eso
dullabho lokasmi111 yadidaip buddho ti); Ja IV 92,11'
(tattha virüJha ti va~~hita nama); 97 ,22· (iilgha ti
codanatthe nipato); Mi125,7 (Nagaseno ti kho aha111
maharaja ñayami); Vism 101,23foll. (idani attano
cariyanukulan ti ettha cariya ti cha cariya ragacariya
dosacariya mohacariya saddhacariya buddhicariya
vitakkacariya ti); Sp 26,25 (kasma pan' esa d!ghanikayo
ti vuccati); 136,10 (h!no va gabbho assa ti apagabbho);
Sv 26,13 (evan ti nipatapada111 me ti ad!ni namapadani);
Ud 53,28 (ya kaci mahanadiyo . . . ta mahasamudda111
patta jahanti purimani namagottani mahasamuddo tv eva
310 ti
sailkha111 gacchanti); Mhv 22:11 (KakaVal)I)atisso ti
vissuto); - 3. a list; Ja IV 96,5 (ime cattaro patikkhepe
catasso ca ayacana ti atthavare yací); 123,18 (Yuvañjayo
Yudhighilo ti te ubho pi kumara); Mil2,19 (chaddha
vibhajitva kathetabba111 seyyath!da111 pubbayogo
milindapañha111 lakkhal)apañhaip mel)~akapañhaip
anumanapañha111 opammakathapañhan ti); Vism 111,1
(metta karul)a mudita upekkha ti ime cattaro brahma-
vihara); Sp 16,14 (pañca nikaya nama d!ghanikayo
majjhimanikayo sa111yuttanikayo ailguttaranikayo
khuddakanikayo ti);- 0 -kara, m., the word ti; Sp 821,1o
(-a111 avatva va); PsI 54,9 (--hakara ni pata).
te, num. [S. tri: trayas, tisras, tr!I)i] (nom.!acc. m. tayo,
tayas; f tisso; n. tll)i; instr. t!hi, (Sadd t!bhi); gen.
m.n. tii)I)al11, tii)I)aTinaip; f tissanna111; loe. t!su; see
Sadd 287,16foll.; iic ti- and, befare vowels, sometimes
3
ti-y-. ti-v-; also te- (te ), tayo-, t!ni-), three; Vin I 124,31
(bhagavata anuññata111 catunna111 patimokkhaip
uddisitu111 tii)I)anna111 parisuddhi-uposatha111 mayaip
e' amha dve jana); 190,3o (anujanami bhikkhave tisso
padukayo); 195,6 (tii)I)am vassilnaip accayena); II 196,22
(tayo atthavase paticca); 278,11 (tassa tayo ca nissaye
agha ca akaral)!yani acikkheyyatha ti); III 94,25
(tissanna111 vijjana111 labh! 'mhi); 175,15 (tass' eva ...
bhikkhussa bhikkhü honti anuvattaka vaggavadaka eko
va dve va tayo va); V 123,33 (t!I)i duccaritani); DI 91,31
(tayo Val)I)a khattiya ca vessa ca sudda ca aññadatthu
brahmal)ass' eva paricaraka sampajjanti); 156,8 (tii)I)al11
Sai11yojananal11 parikkhaya); II 327,19 (dve va tll)i va
rattindivani); III 216,1 (tisso tal)ha); 216,16 (tayo addha
at!to addha anagato addha paccuppanno addha); M I
265,35 (tii)I)aip kho pana bhikkhave sannipata
gabbhassavakkanti hoti); 489,24foll. (ime tayo dhamma
akusala tayo dhamma kusala); III 163,7 (ti!)' imani
bhikkhave balassa balalakkhal)ani); SI 148,1* (tayo ca
supai)I)a caturo ca ha111sa); II 135,3 (tato puriso dve va
tll)i va udakaphusitani uddhareyya, Be. Ce, Se so; Ee ti,
prob. wr); IV 118,2* (tayo ca veda); V 54,18 (imasa111 .. .
tissanna111 esanana111 abhiññaya); 56,17 (imesa111 .. .
tii)I)anna111 asavana111 abhiññaya); A I 103,7 (t!hi
bhikkhave dhammehi samannagato balo veditabbo );
138,s (t!I)' imani bhikkhave devadütani); 145,17 (tassa
mayha111 bhikkhave tayo pasada ahesu111 eko hemantiko
eko gimhiko eko vassiko ); 172,7 (imesa111 tii)I)aip
patihariyana111 abhikkantatara111); Khp 4 (t!I)i nama ki111,
t!I)i tisso vedana); Dhp 224 (etehi t!hi thanehi gacche
devana santike); 281 (ete tayo kammapathe visodhaye);
Ud 88,21 (Pataliputtassa . . . tayo antaraya bhavissanti
aggito va udakato va mithubhedato va ti); 91,29 (pañca pi
bhante . . . cattaro pi . . . t!I)i pi . . . dve pi bhante
Savatthiya manussa devasika111 kala111 karonti, Be, Ce so;
Ee cattari pi ; Se cattaro pi ... tayo pi ... ; Ud-a 427,33:
tattha tll)! ti tayo, ayam eva va patho): It 49,7 (tayo 'me
bhikkhave asava); 101 ,1* (etahi t!hi vijjahi tevijjo hoti
brahmal)o); Sn 231 (tayas su dhamma jahita bhavanti);
311 (tayo roga pure asu111 iccha anasana111 jara); 842
(ti su vidhasu avikampamano ); 1O19 (tii)I)al11 vedana
paragü); Th 609 (patthayano tayo sukhe); Th! 276 (tll)i
papassa mülani); 518 (sakhiyo tisso janiyo viharadana111
adasimha, Be, Ce, Se, Th App II p. 250,19* so; Ee tll)i,
ti
prob. wr; but cf K.R. Nonnan, 197la, pp. 178foll.) =
Ap 512,7 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tl~i); Ja I 462,15 (eko dve
tayo ti g~etva); IV 441,11* (tih' iinakarr satta satani);
V 83,29* (tayo hi putta); VI 84,12* (adiisaka pitaputta tayo
ekiisuna hata); 574,21 (eva1p raja tlhi gathahi kumare
va~~etva); Pa~is I 2,10 (dv!hi balehi samannagatatta tayo
ca sankharanaip pa~ippassaddhiya; Pa~is-a 40,3o foll.:
tayo ca ti vibhattivipallaso, ti~~3JYI ca ti vutta1p hoti);
99,1 (katames31p ti~~anna1p sailkharanarr pa~i­
ppassaddhiya); Il 11 0,3o (ya imesu tlsu ~hanesu diqhi);
Ap 29,!9 (9ayhamano tih' agglhi bhavesu sa1psariip
aha1p); 143,7 (sahassarajanamena tayo te cakkavattino);
310,!7 (tinanisamse anubhomi, eds so); Bv6:3
(tassabhisamaya tl~i ahesu1p dhammadesane;
Bv-a 162,23: ti~! ti tayo, lingavipariyaso kato);
Vibh 116,2 (tini sacca sailkhata nirodhasacca1p
asankhata1p); 283,2 (tisso appamannayo sukhaya
vedanaya sampayutta); 368,21 (ragaggi dosaggi mohaggi
ime tayo aggl); Mil 153,31 (tihi maharaja kara~ehi
paritta1p na rakkkhati); Vism 64,5 (tayo paipsukülika
ukkaqho majjhimo mudii ti); 204,27 (tayo loka
sankharaloko sattaloko okasaloko ti); 641 ,26* (tayo
upaqhane kusalata nanadiqhlsu na kampati; 644,J4foll.:
khayato vayato bhayato suññato ti imasmi1p ca tividhe
upaqhane kusalataya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se omit bhayato);
Sadd 668,15 (ti~~anna1p satthiina1p); 0
-y-aggi,
0
-v-aggi, m.pl., the three fires; Ap 149,26 (tivaggl
nibbuta mayha1p, Ee so; Be, Ce tividhaggl; Se tidhaggl)
= 357,23 (Ee so; Ce tividhaggl; Be, Se tividhaggi) = 403,s
(Ee so; Be, Ce tiyaggl; Se tidhaggl) = 423,!! (Ce, Ee so;
Be tiyaggl; Se tidhagg!);- -V-aiigika, mfn., consisting
0
of three parts or factors; Dhs 41 O (-o maggo );
Vibh 263,36 (-aip jhana1p hoti plti sukharr cittassa
ekaggata, idarr vuccati dutiya1p jhanarr); Vism 88,9;
Spk III 29,Jo (-a pubbabhagavipassana va kathita); -
0
-y-a44ha, mfn. [ti + a99ha 1], two and a half;
Ap-a267,32 (--satayojanan ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
a99hatiya-); - 0 -y-addha, n. and mfn. [ti + addha3],
l. (n.) (i) the three periods of lijé; Spk II 249,16
(addhagato ti 0 -gato, vayo anuppatto ti tesu tlsu addhesu
pacchimavaya1p anuppatto ); - (ii) the three times (past,
present, future); Ud-a 362,9 (anagato amo paccuppanno
ti eva1p --sailgahite sabbasmi1p bhave vippamutto ); -
2. (mfn.) connected with the three times; Vism 200,28 (iti
bhagava etarr catusankheparr -a1p vlsatakaraJYI
tisandhi1p pa~iccasamuppadarr sabbakarato janati) f. PsI
53,6; - 0 -y-asititama, mfn., the 83rd; Mhv following
83:52 (Verirajavijayaniddeso nama -o paricchedo); -
tiha, m.n. [ti + aha(n)], a period of three days; S II
191,23 foll. (manussa Vankakarr pabbatarr -ena arohanti
-ena orohanti); Ja VI 288,11* (-arr ca ta1p vasayemu
agare; 288,17': maya1p tl~i divasani ta1p attano agare
vasema); Sv 771,16 (-aip matassa assa ti t!hamataip);
~hv 37:82 (-arr tatthapi vasesi); - ifc see dv!hatlha
(sv dvi); - --pa~icchanna, mfn., concea/ed for three
days; Vin II 51,19; - 0
-kafuka, n., three pungent
substances; Sp 724,2 (-' -adlsu bhesajjesu pi, Be, Ce so;
Se -' -adibhesajjesu pi; E e wr pi ka~ukasu bhesajjesu);
Vv-a 186,24 (in cpd); Sadd 754,9;- see also teka~ula;-
0
-kammaka, mfn., (gr.t.t.) (capable of) having three
311 ti
patients; Sadd 12,31* foil. (-arr ca janeyya karado karite
sati); - 0
-kotika, mfn., having three top edges;
threefold, with three fonns; Vism 251,13 ([danta]
timiilaka -a) f. Pj I 44,6; Ps II 112,27 (-a1p suññat31p
dassetu1p); - 0
-kol}a, mfn., with three comers;
triangular; Sp 886,10 (singha~akan ti catuko~31p va -a1p
va maggasamodhanaqhanaip); 1046,17 (caturassa1p va
-aip va sammannantena); - 0 -kkhattmp, ind., three
times; Vin I 104,28 (pakkhassa -Uip patimokkhaip
uddisanti); S I 78,9 (-u1p nama1p savesi): Th 345 (-u1p
divasass' ah31p otariip udak31p); Ja II 280,6*; Ap 28,14;
Mil 115,25 (sakiip va dvikkhattUip va -Uip va
mahapa~havl kampita ti); Vism 3,26; Mhv 32:35;
Sadd 868,10 (tayo vara -u1p); - ifc see iinaka-; -
0
-gavutika, mfn., extending for three gavutas; Sv 284,Jo
(sankho gavutiko elo aMhayojaniko uppa1o -o);
Dhp-a IV 208,11 (eka yojanika ahosi eka -a); -
0
-gul}a, mfn., threefold; three times; of three
thicknesses; Vin I 185,25 (anujanami bhikkhave
ekapa1asikaip upahan31p ... na -a upahana dharetabba;
Sp 1083,21: -a ti tipa~ala); Yism 262,24; As 291,4
(kusa1acittehi -ani vipakacittani veditabbani, so read
with Be, Ce, Se); - 0 -cattiirisa, 0 -cattal!saip,f num.,
43; Bv 10:20 (-a sahassani nariyo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ticattari); Sadd 782,s (0 -cattallsaip); - see also
tecattarlsa(Ip), tetallsa; - 0
-Cara, mfn., going about or
living in a group of three; Spk II 5,!1 (bhikkhii ...
dvicara -a catucara ... ) ; - -carika, mfn., going about
0
or living in a group of three; Spk III 5,29 (in cpd); -
0
-civara, teclvara, n., the set of three robes; Abh 439;
Vin I 289,37 (bhagavata -aip anuññataip digu~a sailgha~l
ekacciyo uttarasailgo ekacciyo antaravasako); M II
116,33 (al31p maharaja paripu~~a1p me-an ti); Ja I 65,15*
(-a1p ca patto ca); Ap 2,27 (acchademi -arr); Mil31 ,1s
(ayasmant31p Nagasen31p -ena acchadetva); Sp 200,19
(tasmi1p -e ekameko sa~ako sahassarr agghati); 1229,3o
(dasa va dvadasa va -ani); Dhp-a IV 206,22 (sabbes31p
-arr adasi); Ud-a 252,32 (tl~i clvarani -31p --dhara~arr
-arr va slla1p etassa ti teclvariko, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -assa
dhara~arr t31p s!la1p etassa ti); Ap-a 107,9 (teclvarani
karetva); Vin-vn 553; Utt-vn 32; Mhv 32:35;
0
-civarika, mfn., having (only) the three robes; Sp 669,5
(ticlvariken' eva bhikkhuna);- see also teclvarika;-
0
-ja, mfn. [ti + ja2], bom from three things; Vism 452,1
(ya1p utucittaharehi jata1p t31p -am nama); -
0
-tiila, mfn. [ti + tala 1], measuring the height of three
palm-trees; -arr. ind., to the height of three palm-trees;
M I 18 7,25 (-arr pi udak31p s~ ~hati) f. A IV 1O1,25;
Ja VI 220,w (ekatalaip dvitala1p -an ti ... vehas31p
abbhuggantva);- 0 -dal}4a, m.n., l. the three staves of a
paribbajaka (tied together to fonn a tripod); Ja II 317,4·
(teda~9iko ti ku~9ikaip ~hapanatthaya -aip gahetva
caranto); Ap 91,21 (ajinena nivattho 'haip 0 -paridharako,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -paricar~o; Ap-a 368,3Jfoll.:
o -paridharako ti ku~9ikaqhapanatthaya -a1p gahetva
dharento ti attho); Saddh 399 (deho ~hatu1p na sakkoti ...
-o ekad~9o va da~9advayavivajjito ); Sadd 754,9 (-arr);
- 2. part of a carriage; A IV 191,6 (ekacco
assakhaJunko ... kubbar31p han ti -aip bhañjati; Mp IV
104,12foll.: rathassa purato tayo d~9aka honti, te
ti
bhañjati); Ja VI 253,35'; - see also teda]f<;lika; -
0
-dai]IJaka, n,, l. the three staves of a paribbajaka (tied
together to fonn a tripod); Ap 271,6 (tijfakagh~ ca
valli¡p. ca , . , -e !hapetvana ak~ tiJ!akU\i¡p. ah~);
335,27; Vism 535,2o (aññamaññüpatthambhak~ -~
viya); - 2. part of a carriage; Ja VI 252,27* (kayo te
rathasaññato .. , vesarajjatidaJ!<;lako; 253,34': vesarajja-
tidaJ!<;lako ti parisamajjhe kathentassa pi visaradabhava-
saJ.i.khatena tidaJ!<;lena samannagato); - 0 -dasa, num.,
1 cande, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee --rattüpagamarnhi);
mfn., n., and-a, m.pl. [ti+ dasa ; S. tridasa], (3 x JO) 30;
l. (mfn. and m.pl.) numbering thirty(-three), (one of) the
thirty(-three) gods; Abh 11 (-a tv amara deva); SI 5,27*
(ye na passanti nandana¡p. avas~ naradevan~ -ana¡p.
yasassina¡p.; Spk I 30,26: -anan ti tikkhattu¡p. dasanna¡p.);
234,22* (cattaro ca maharaja -a ca yasassino); Vv 18:14
(nandana¡p. ramm~ -ana¡p. mahavana¡p.; Vv-a 97,4foll.:
tavati¡p.sadevan~ mahanta¡p. mahanlya¡p. ca uyyana¡p.);
Thl 121 (ind~ va deva -a sali.game aparajita¡p.
purakkhitva); Ja III 305,18* (sakko 'ham asml -an~
indo); Ap 34,2o (akiJ!J!a¡p. janakayehi -ana¡p. pura¡p.
viya); 344,1 (-ehi yatha indo manujehi purakkhato );
Sadd 477,25* (devo ... -o saggavasl ... ); 924,3o
(tavati¡p.sa -a); - 2. (mfn.) of the thirty(-three) gods;
Ap 146,26 (upaghahanti sakkacc~ inda¡p. va -a gaJ!a);
375,21 (maJ!imay~ ca me vyarnha¡p. nibbatta¡p. -e
gaJ!e); 555,24 (tato cutah~ -a¡p. nandan~ upapajj'
aha¡p.); Bv 28:10 (kasava¡p. ca brahma1oke ve!han~ -e
pure); - 3. (n.) the world of the thirty(-three) gods;
Ap 33,23 (pubbakamma¡p. saritvana -~ upapajj' ah~);
49,19 (-a so cavitvana manussatta¡p. gamissati;
Ap-a 298,18: tavati¡p.sabhavana); - see also tavati¡p.sa,
tetti¡p.sa, tetti¡p.sati; - 0
-diva, m.n. and -a, m.pl.,
l. (m.n.) the (third) deva-world; a deva-world; Abh 10
(-o tidasalayo ); S I 181 ,8* (akali.khamano -am
anuttara¡p.; Spk I 265,16: brahmalokam eva sandhay'
aha); A III 40,19* (te d!gharatt~ -e patighita devana¡p.
sahavyagata ramanti te); Vv 53:4 (ko nu tva¡p. -a mahi¡p.
upaga); Th 534 (kayassa bheda -amhi modati, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -asmi; Th-a II 225,31: -amhl ti tusitadevaloke);
Ja III 194,31* (khattiya brahmaJ!a vessa sudda
caJ!<;lalapukkusa idha dhamma¡p. caritvana bhavanti -e
sama; 195,17' foil.: devaloke nibbatta sama honti);
IV274,16* (modassu raghe -e va Vasavo); V !8,11• (-a
cuta; 19,24': - a ti tavati¡p.sadevaloka); VI 568,3* (saddo
te -a¡p. gato); Ap 49,14 (sabbe deve abhibhotva -a¡p.
avasissati); Mhv 37:178 (-~ gato); - 2. (m.pl.) the
inhabitants of that deva-world; gods; D II 167 ,26* (eka pi
da!ha -ehi püjita); Vv 53:18 (tena sucaritena
kammunah~ upapanno -esu kamakaml);
-iidhibhü, m., Indra; Abh 19 (Ce so; Be tidivadibhü);
Sadd 378,7•; - -abhibhü, m., id.; Cp 1:1:4 (tada m~
tapatejena santatto -abhibhü, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
-iidhibhü; Cp-a 24,14: devalokadhipati, Sakko ti attho)
quoted Sadd 77,17 (-'adhibhü); - -'okacara, mfn.,
having one's home in the deva-world; Ja VI 269,28*
(-'okacara va acchara; 270,27': tidasabhavanacara); -
0
-dha, tedha, ind. [S. tridha, tredha], in three ways;
threefold; D II 341,3 (araJ!isahit~ dvidha phalesi -a
phalesi); Ja IV 490,15; Vism 623,13 (eka¡p. vassa¡p. -a
chadha ca vibhajitva); Sv 715,14 (sal~ -a vibhaji¡p.su);
312 ti
Pa!is-a 581,12 ( --bhavo tidhatt~); Sadd 803,23 (tlhi
vibhagehi -a tedha va); - 0 -dhiituka, mfn., see sv
3
tedhatuka; - 0 -ppakiira, mfn. [ti + pakara ], of three
kinds; Ja III 478,8-; Vism 466,28; Nidd-a I 452,32 (-o pi
0
ayuttagocaro agocaro ti veditabbo); - -pakkha-
vasana, n., a gannent made of three parts; ? S I 90,4
(saJ:.la¡p. dhareti -~; Spk I !60,1 foil.: HJ!i khiiJ!<;lani
dvlsu ;hanesu samsibbitva katanivasan~);
0
-pañca, num., 15; Ja IV 162,3* (--rattüpagatarnhi
Vism 206,15* (--yojanakkhandhaparikkhepa); Vin-vn
602 (gamadisu padesesu -asu); - 0 -paññiisa, mfn., the
53rd; Ap 79,6 (-e ito kappe, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
ti¡p.satime); - see also tepaññasa(¡p.), tepaññasama; -
0
-pada, mfn., consisting of three padas; consisting of
three parts; Sn 457 (t~ ta¡p. savitti¡p. pucchami -a¡p.
catuvlsatakkhar~); Ps II 197,18 (dupad~ pi -a¡p. pi
catuppad~ pi pañh~ karonti); Sadd 759,29
([bahubblhi] navavidho dvipado bhinnadhikaraJ!o
-o ... ); 76!,11foll.; - 0 -padakkhii]a, n., a threefold
respectful circumambulation; Mhv 29:48 (katvana -am);
- o -piitihira, n., the three marvels; B v 1:11 (-e
bhagava vasi ahu; Bv-a 35,1: etesu tlsu pa!ihariyesü ti
attho); - 0
-pitaka, n. and mlfn)., l. (n.) the three
pi\akas; Sp 36,19 (daharabhikkhü --dhara patta-
2
pa!isambhida khiJ!asava); Kkh 145,2o (sali.gitittay~
aruth~ --dhamm~); Sv 505,21 (bahussuta --dhara
dvipi!akadhara ekapi\akadhara); As 15,32 (Á.nandatthero
hi bahussuto --dharo);- 2. (mfn.) (one) who knows the
three pi!akas; Ja II 438,18 (-o jhanalabhi, Ce, E e, Se so;
Be --dharo); Vism 241,29; Sp 1323,16 (alajji sace pi -o
hoti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tepi!ako);- see also tepi!aka;-
0
-pukkhala, m(jn). [cf S. tripu~kara ?], "with three
flowers, trefoil", the name of a guide-line or stategy for
interpretation; Pe! 3,18 (katame pañca naya nandiyavatto
-o sihavikitito disalocano ali.kuso ti); 251,29 (aya¡p.
vuccate kusalapakkhe -o nayo); 259,9* (-a¡p. t~ naya¡p.
ahu) = Nett 4,19*; Nett 127,19; Ud-a 9,16 (in cpd.:
nandiyava!!atipukkhala-); - 0 -purisa, mfn., involving
three men; Vin IV 105,17 (-o asso catupuriso ratho;
Sp 858,16: eko arohako dve padarakkhaka ti eva¡p. -o
hoti);- 0 -petaka, 0 -pe\aki(n), m(jn)., (one) who knows
the three pi\akas; Vin V 3,14* (tassa sisso mahapañño
Khemanamo -o, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -1) quoted Sp 63,2•
(eds -o); Mil90,4* (-o); - see also tipi\aka above,
tepi!aka; - 0
-porisa, mfn., or -~, ind., measuring the
height of three men; to the height of three men; D II
171,1 (esika ... -~ nikhata, Se so; Be, Ce --nikhata; Ee
omits); M I 187 ,3o (-a¡p. pi udaka¡p. saJ!!hati) t A IV
102,3; - 0
-phala, n., the three fruits; Sadd 754,9
(samaharadigu tava ... tidaJ!<;l~ -~ tika\uk~ ... );-
0
-bhava, m., -a, m.pl., the three spheres of existence;
Th 1133 (sabbe anicca -a upadduta; Th-a III 159,w:
sabbe kamabhavadayo tayo bhava); Sadd 753,34 (-o
khayate tada ti); 754,12 (ekapuggalo -a catuddisa ... ); -
-abhinissa\a, mfn., detached from the three spheres of
existence; Th 1089 (Th-a III 143,17: bhavattayato
vinissa!o visa¡p.yutto);- 0 -bhiiga, m. and mfn., l. (m.) a
third part; A V 195,1o (upa<;l<;lho va -o va); Sp 1246,26
(-a¡p. va upa<;l<;lhabhag~ va datva);- 2. (mfn.) in three
ti
parts; Mhv 22:79 (odanmp . . . -mp karayitvana); -
0
-bhuvana, n., the three worlds; - --kuharabhoga-
vittharika, mfn., spread through the fullness of the
expanse of the three worlds; Da!h 1:62 (sutva
saddhammmp aggaip --kuharabhogavittharikaip, Ee so;
vl -vittharitaip);- 0 -bhümika, 0 -bhümaka, mfn., having
three storeys; Sp 282,12 (-e pi pasade, Se so; Be, Ce, E e
0
-bhümake); Vibh-a 446,3 (--maha-u]umpmp
bandhapesi, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tibhümaka-); - see also
tebhümaka; - 0 -mal}¡;la1a, n., the three circles (the
nave[ and the knees); V in I 46,16 ( -aip pa!icchadentena);
Sp 999,7; - 0
-miisika, mfn., see sv temasika; -
0
-mülaka, 0 -mülika, mfn., with three bases; with three
roots; Vin III 97,5 (-aip); Pj I 44,7 (anha danta tiko!ika
0
-mü1ika) f. Vism 251,13 (dve dve [danta]-a tiko!ika, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se timü1a; = Vibh-a 234,9: eds timü1a);
Sp497,22 (-a atthavisa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -mü1ika);-
0
-y-aggi, see above;- 0 -yiima, mfn. and -a,f, l. (mjn.)
consisting of three watches; Spk I 144,13 (ekaratti nama
-a hoti); Ud-a 249,33 (saka1aip pacchabhattmp e' eva
-mp ca rattiip ekacaravase anisaipsaip kathetva); -
--rattiip, for the three watches of the night; Ja III 403,12
(so pi --rattiip cankami yeva); Vism 279,9; Ps lii 324,9
(--rattiip deve vas san te, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ni yama-);
Mp I 174,5 ( --rattiip jhanaki!mp ki!itva);- 2. (f.) night;
Abh 69 (-a smpvañ); Ap 439,10 (buddhassa val!l!aJP
kittenta -mp vitinamayuip); Mhv 37:196 (vicariipsu
-mp);- 0 -yojana, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) three yojanas
in extent; Sp 1138,4 (avippavasasima nama -a pi hoti);
Ps II 122,21 (cetiyaip karissama ... -aip ... hotü ti); -
2. n. a distance of three yojanas; Vin III 234,12 (-aip
atikkameti); Ja V 474,16 (-aip anubandhitva); VI 520,27
(samanta -e sabbe tiracchana pi aññamaññaip mettaip
pa!i1abhiipsu); Vism 634,13 (-aip [obhasento]);
Sp 1138,5 (-e !hita); - -' -ubbedha, mfn., three yojan as
high; Spk II 160,7 (so pabbato --ubbedho jato); -
0
-yojanasatika, mfn., measuring 300 yojanas; Vin II
238,1s (attabhava -a pi); MI 187,19 (-ani pi udakani);
Sv 487,4 (timinga1o -o); - 0
-yojanika, mfn., three
yojanas in extent; Ja IV 486,22 (-aip parisaip gahetva,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tiyojanaip); VI 29,7 (-mp
assamapadaip); Vism 392,16 (mahabrahma -aip
setacchattaip [aggahesi]);- 0 -ratta, n., three nights (or
days); Sp 746,15 (yo hi ekasmiip avase eken' eva
anusampannena saddhiip -aip sahaseyyaip kappeti);
Kkh 2 201,24 (-ato uttari);- 0 -1akkhal}a, n., (the) three
characteristics; Ja I 275,23' (so evmp sabbasankharesu
aniccaip dukkhaip anatta ti -aip aropetva); Vism 665,w
(khandhanaip -aip disva); Kkh2 16,2o (--sampanno
uposatho); It-a I 63,31 (-ani aropetva);- 0 -lañchakii in
Ee at Ja IV 364,2* is wr; Be, Ce ni1añchaka; Se
ni1añcaka; - 0 -1oka, n., the three worlds; Saddh 29
(upama -e pi na vijjati); 491;- 0 -Vagga, m. and mfn. [ti
+ vagga 1], l. the group of three human pursuits;
Abh 318 (-o dhammakamattha catubbaggo
samokkhaka); - 2. a group of three; consisting of a
group of three; Vin I 58,33 (bhikkhü duvaggena pi -ena
pi ga!fena upasampadenti); II 169,14 (-o pi mañee
nisiditva mañcaip bhindi); 3. three sections;
consisting of three sections; Sp 26,23* (catuttiipseva
313 ti
suttanta -o yassa sangaho); Sv 2,11 (dighagamo ... -o
hot! ti); - 0 -Vaggi, see 0 -v-aggi above; - 0 -vañgika,
see 0 -v-angika above; - 0 -Vatfa, mfn., l. having three
rounds or circles; Vism 579,4* (-aip anavanhitmp
bhamati; 581,12: imehi tihi vanehi -mp idaip
bhavacakkaip); Sv 102,4 (-aip tiyaddhaip tisandhiip ...
pa!iccasamuppadmp vibhajitva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit
-am); - 2. threefold; having three strands; ? (wound
three times; ?) Pp-a 188,4 (ghanase1aip -aya rajjuya
bandhitva o1ambeyya); - o -vassa 1, n., a period of three
years; three years; Ps III 283,18 (evaip -aip
parivutthassa sugandharattasa1ino, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
--parivutthassa); - 0
-Vassa 2 , m(jn.), of three years'
standing; one who has been ordained for three years;
Sp 1085,7; - 0
-Vassika, mfn., being three years old;
Ja VI 6,2 (--daraka nama ki]anabha!f<;iakaip piyayanti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee darakanaip nama klJabha!f<;iakaip
piyaip hot! ti); Nidd I 120,15; Dhp-a II 9,22 (-mp
gandhasalita!f<;iulabhattaip nanaggarasehi bhuñjanta
vicarissama ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee --gandhasalibhattaip;
se e Ps III 283,10 foll. ); Th-a III 53,25 (-anmp
pura!fagandhasalinaip odano ); - o -vijjii, f., the three
knowledges; Ev-a 270,5 (0 -mayaip vibhüsanaip datva,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tevijjamayaip); - see also tevijja,
tevijja; - 0
-Vitthata, mfn. [ti + vitthata 1], three
(ratanas ?) in width; Mil 312,2o (hatthinagaip ...
navayataip -aip dasapari!fahaip anharatanikaip); -
0
-Vidha, mfn., ofthree kinds; threefold; M II 163,16 (balo
-aip . . . dukkhmp domanassaip pa!ismpvedeti); A V
261,2o (pii!fatipatmp p' ahaip bhikkhave -aip vadami);
Sn 509 (yo yajati -mp yaññasampadaip; Pj II 418,21:
tikalappasadaip sandhay' aha); Ja I 132,Y (deva ti
sammutideva uppattideva visuddhideva ti -a); Nidd I
57,12 (-anmp kayaduccaritanmp pahanaip); Pa!is II 86,4
(-o ma!f<;io); Vism 14,2s (assa --ta veditabba); 86,10
(hinamajjhimapa!fltavasena -o); Sp 225,24 (-o
saddhammo); 396,13 (evaip --ttagatmp cittaip); - -aip,
-ena, adv., in three ways; in a threefold way; M 1 286,10
(-aip ... kayena adhammacariyavisamacariya hoti); S V
143,13 (cattaro satipanhane -ena bhaveyyasi); Nidd I
79,3o (-ena mano); Vibh 13,17 (-ena rüpakkhandho);
Mi1135,zz (pittaip ... -ena kuppati);- -'-aggi, m., the
three fires; Ja I 4,13* (evaip -'-aggi vijjante nibbanmp
icchitabbakaip) = Bv 2:11 (Bv-a 70,16: tividhe ragadike
aggimhi vijjamane ti attho); Ap 74,13 (tamandhakara-
pihita -' -aggihi <;Iayhare, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tamandhakara
pihita -'-aggi pi <;Iayhare; Ap-a 345,n: ragaggi-
dosaggimohaggisankhatehi tihi aggihi) f. 76,15 (Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee -'-aggi pi; Ap-a 346,6foll.: narakaggi-
petaggisaipsaraggisankhatehi tihi aggihi); 143,22
(-' -aggihi cittaip tava vimuccatu); Mi1324,4 (-' -aggi);
- '-üpaparikkhi(n), mfn., making a threefold
investigation; S III 61,31; - --1ingika, mfn., having
three genders; Sadd 87,21 (bhüdhatumayanaip
--lingikanaip namikarüpanaip vibhago );
0
-Visiikha, mfn., with three wrinkles; MI 109,1 (Sakko
sisaip okampetva jivhaip nilla]etva -aip nala!ikaip nala!e
vutthapetva; Ps II 74,25: -an ti tisakhaip) f. SI !!8,2
(Maro .. . -aip nala!ena nala!ikmp vunhapetva);
0
-vedaniyaip in Ee at Sp 502,19 is prob. wr; Se
ti
0
-vedanikam; Be, Ce 0 -vedanam; - 0 -sata, num. and
mfn. [ti + .sata1], (numbering) .three hundred; Sn 566
(brahm~a -a ime); Ja IV 353,27* (dhanuggahanaJTl -a);
V 170,27* (bhariya mam' eta -a); Ap 269,25 (-ani ca
varani devarajjam akarayiJTl); 317,29 (-a pi ca jegho ca
anuvattiJTlSU ekato); 322,20 (bodhesi -e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
mocesi); Sadd 801,6 (satassa tikaJTl -aJTl);
0
-sattati, num., 73; Th1-a 268,32 (eta Therikadayo
Sumedhapariyosana . . . --parimfu_la ti); - se e also
tesattati; - 0
-santatika, mfn., involved in a triple
continuity; Vism 369,33 (itaresaJTl -anaJTl
[mahabhutanaJTl]); - 0
-sandhi, m. and mfn., l. (m.)
three junctions; three breaks; Ja VI 397 ,5' (--parivarita;
398,28' foil.: hatthirathanaJTl antare eko sandhi ratha-
assanaJTl antare eko sandhi assapatt1naJTl antare eko
sandhi); - 2. (mfn.) with three junctions; with three
breaks; Ja VI 435,5 (senaya nagaraJTl
catusaiikhepaJTl parikkhipitva); Vism 200,28 (iti bhagava
etaJTl catusaiikhepaJTl tiyaddhaJTl v1satakaraJTl -iJTl
pa!iccasamuppadaJTl sabbakarato janati) t PsI 53,6;
Sv 58,6 (--pallaiikaJTl abhujitva);
0
-samutthana, mfn., having a threefold origin; Sp 463,23
(idaJTl sikkhapadaJTl -aJTl kayacittato vacacittato
kayavacacittato ca samughati); Mp V 93,5 (ettakaJTl
-aJTl); - 0
-samutthanika, mfn., having a threefold
orzgm; orzgmating in three; Vism 560,nfoll.
(kammajarüpaJTl ... --m pena anupatthaddhaJTl na sakkoti
s~!hatUJTl napi -aJTl tena anupatthaddhaJTl); As 84,17
(-o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tesamughaniko);- 0 -sahassa, n.
and mf( -i)n. ?, l. three thousand; numbering three
thousand; of three thousand; D II 256,19' (satagira -a
yakkha); M III 101,17 (-o brahma; 101,19foll.:
pañcasahasso . . . brahma pañcasahassilokadhatUJTl
pharitva adhimuccitva viharati); Pv 21:51 (-ani suda hi,
Ce, Ee so; Be -ani sudani hi; Se omits hi;
Pv-a 134,17foll.: -am suda h1 ti --matta suda
bhattakaraka ... -ani sudanan ti ca pa!hanti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -a suda ti --matta ... ); Ps II 408,34 (-anaJTl ...
brahmanaJTl); - 2. [cf BHS trisahasra, trisahasra,
trisahasra, trisahasñ], (1000 x 1000 x 1000) of a
thousand million (cakkava!as?); A I 228,7 (yavata ...
dvisahass1 majjhimika 1okadhatu tava sahassadha 1oko
ayaJTl vuccat' Ánanda -1 mahasahass1 lokadhatu); 228,8
(akaiikhamano Ánanda tathagato -iJTl mahasahassiJTl
lokadhatUJTl sarena viññapeyya, Se so; Be -i-maha-
sahassilokadhatuJTl; Ce, Ee -1-mahasahassilokadhatuJTl);
Nidd I 356,19 HJTl pi lokadhatUJTl passeyya
mahasahassiJTl pi lokadhatuJTl passeyya, Be, Se so; Ee
tlsahassiJTl; Ce -iJTl mahasahassiJTl pi lokadhatuJTl
passeyya; se e Nidd-a I 382,24 foil. below); Mp II
341 ,2o foil. ( -1 mahasahass1 ti sahassito paghaya tatiya ti
-1, sahassaJTl sahassadha katva gm¡.itaJTl majjhimikaJTl
sahassadha katva gm¡.itatta mahantehi sahassehi g~ita ti
mahasahass1, ettavata ko!isatasahassacakkava!aparimal).o
loko dassito hoti) t Nidd-a I 382,24 foil. HJTl pi
mahasahassiJTl pi lokadhatun ti . . . pa!hamasahassiJTl
sahassadha katva g~itaJTl ... , Be, Se so; Ce, E e
-1-mahasahassiJTl pi lokadhatun ti; Ce sahassito pa!!haya
dutiyasahass1; Ee tatiyasahass1 . . . gul).itaJTl ...
gul).itatta . . . gul).ita ti ... ; Ce, Ee ko!isatacakkava!a-
314 tiipsa
parimal).o); - 0
-süla, n., a trident; Ap 441,24 (-aJTl
sukataJTl gayha; cf Ap-a 563,28: tikhil).aJTl sulaJTl aggaJTl
avudhaJTl -aJTl); Spk III 99,16 (-' -ad1su aññataraJTl
lakkh~aJTl kataJTl hoti); -
0
-hattha, mfn., measuring
three hand-measures; Vism 65,23 (taJTl ca kho vittharato
vidatthi d1ghato -am eva vattati); Sp 568,12 (ya ...
tiriyaJTl -a [hoti]); - 0 -hetuka, mfn., with three root-
causes; with three moral conditions; Vism 475,33
(bhavanamaya pi duhetuka o!arika -a sukhuma);
Sv 509,32 (ye pan' ettha -a tesaJTl dhammabhisamayo pi
hoti); Pa!is-a 570,17 (suddakulajata pi -a honti);
As 70,3o; - see also a~~hatiya, a~~hateyya (sv a~~ha ),
1
timsa, tika.
-te," [ts], a secondary suffix;- see chak~a!i.
thpsa, tirpsaJ!l, num. and mfn. (nom./acc. --a, -arp, -a;
instr. -aya; dat./gen. -aya, -anaJTl), l. [S. triJTlsat] 30;
-iJTl Vin I 99,10' (in uddana: -a; cf23,5: 0 -matta
Bhaddavaggiya sahayaka); III 204,35 (dv1huppanne
mülac1vare . . . -e uppanne mülac1vare paccasaclvaraJTl
uppajjati, .for thirty days ?); 266,31 (uddigha kho
ayasmanto -a nissaggiya pacittiya dhamma); V 146,33
(sataJTl -a ca bhikkhun1naJTl bhikkhuhi asadhar~a); D I
13,17 (anussarati ... -aJTl pi jatiyo); 54,7 (-e nirayasate,
in words of Makkhali Gosalo; Sv 163,2o: -a
nirayasatani); II 327,to (-a rattiyo maso); S II 85,1 (-aya
va kaghavahanaJTl); A V 305,11 (-aya bhikkhave
dhammehi samannagato ); Sn p. 87 ,s (-aya pi dad ami);
Nidd I 120,26 (-aJTl va vassani j1vati); Pa!is II 153,37 (-a
niruttiyo); Ap 209,14 (-a kappani devesu avasiJTl); 516,11
(-anaJTl devarajunaJTl mahesittam akarayiJTl); Mil 291 ,3o
(v1satiJTl pi -aJTl pi); Mhv 1:15 (vinetva ca tato -a sahaye
Bhaddavaggiye); Sadd 297,2s (-a -aJTl -aya -ayaJTl); -
2. [S. tri111sa] the 30th; Ap 168,14 (ito -e kappasate, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be ÜJTlsakappasate); 247,28 (Citakapujaka-
vaggo -o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce tiJTlsatimo);- ifc see agha-
(sv attha\ una-, eka-, ekuna-, catu- (sv catu[r]), cha-
(sv cha\ tettiJTlsa, dva- (sv dva), pañca-, battiJTlsa, satta-
(sv satta\ - 0 -ekünaka, mfn., being twenty-nine in
number;? Kkh 2 372,21* (-a ime); 0
-kappa-
sahassa, n., l. 30,000 kappas; Ap 40,9 ( -ani devaloke
ramissati); 181 ,11; Sv 411,8 (ito -anaJTl upari Sumedho
Sujato ti dve buddha ekasmiJTl kappe uppanna); - 2. the
30,000th kappa; Ap 36,9 (Sumedho nama sambuddho -'
ito); Bv 12:13 (-amhi ayaJTl buddho bhavissati;
Bv-a200,3o: -esu atikkantesu ti attho) t 13:15
(Bv-a 206,5: ito paghaya -anaJTl matthake ti attho);
Vv-a319,19 (ito kira -e Sumedho nama samma-
sambuddho loke uppajjitva); - 0 -kkhattmp, ind., 30
times; Ap 34,13; 77,1; 0
-yojana, mfn. and n.,
(mfn.) extending a distance of 30 yojanas; being at a
distance o.f 30 yojanas; (n.) a distance o.f 30 yojanas;
-aJTl, adv., to the extent of 30 yojanas; .for a distance of
30 yojanas; Ja I 315,14 (-aJTl assamapadaJTl puri);
IV 265,28" (sakalaparisaJTl Savatthito -aJTl Sankassa-
nagaraJTl ekamuhutten' eva papesi); V 46,16 (-aJTl patva
pa!hamaJTl dabbagahanaJTl ... , Be, Se so; Ce gantva; Ee
tiJTlsayojanikaJTl maggaJTl dabbagahanaJTl ... ); VI 514,s
(taJTl maggaJTl Jetuttaranagarato -aJTl hoti); Bv 4:32
(jinathupo -am uggato (or --m-uggato); Vism 403,5
(-aJTl SaiikassanagaramaggaJTl saiikhipitva); Mp I 227,18
 tiipsaka
(ujukamaggo -o amanussapatho; Ap-a 525,21:
tif!1sayojaniko ); Dhp-a II 76,4 (-af!1 tava gantva); -
o -yojanika, mfn., extending a distance of 30 yojanas;
Ja IV 488,31 (parisa -a ahosi); V 19!,8 (-af!1 thanaf!1
paripüri, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --ghanaf!1 paripüri); Mp I
228,5 (-af!1 kantaraf!1 atikkamma); Dhp-a I 26,16 (-e
kanakavimane); II 192,11 (ayaf!1 ujumaggo -o amanussa-
pariggahito); - 0
-vassika, mfn., being 30 years old;
lasting for 30 years; V in II 172,14 (-af!1 pi navakammaf!1
denti); Nidd I 120,1s (-o pi ... cavati marati); -
0
-Vidha, mfn., of 30 kinds; Cp-a 321,33; Vibh-a 39,8foll.;
- -ena, adv., in a 30jold way; Vibh 27,12 (-ena
vedanakkhandho); - 0
-vyama, mfn., measuring 30
fathoms; Sv 876,7; - 0
-sataip, num. [tif!1sa + sata 1],
130; Sv 1052,14; - 0
-hattha, mfn. and n. l. (mfn.)
measuring 30 hattha mea sures; Ja V 37,7 (danta ...
dighato -a); Sp 844,23 (-o ve1,1u); - 2. (n.) 30 hattha
measures; Bv 24:25 (so buddho --samugga to); - see
also tÍf!1sati.
tiipsaka, n. [cf S. trif!1saka], a group of 30; Sp 734,2o
(nighita 0 -Va1,11,1ana ti, Ce, Ee so; Be nissaggiyava1,11,1ana
nighita; Se 0
-kal,lt;laf\1 nighitaf!1); 880,9 ( -kal,l<;ie
0
paril,liimasikkhapade, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -e); - see also
chatif!1saka (sv cha2).
tiipsati, f, num., l. [S. trif!1sati] 30; M II 90,22 (-iya
yojanesu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se Üf!1saya) = 162,3o (Se so; Be,
Ce, E e Üf!1saya); S V 320,25 (-i pi bhikkhü ekahena
satthaf\1 aharanti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee tÍf!1Saf!1 pi); Ja III
318,11* (-i ... gopanasiyo); VI279,17*; Sadd 795,28
(tyagamo visatif!1sehi: visati -i); 799,25 H tif!1saf!1); -
ifc see attha- (sv attha2), catu- (sv catu[r]), cha- (sv cha2 ),
tettif!1Sati, pañca-, satta- (sv satta4), - 2. the 30th;
Thi 443 (0 -vassamhi); Ap 133,12 (ito 0 -kappamhi).
tiipsatima , mfn. [cf S. trif!1sattama], the 30th; Kkh 2 265,19;
Ap-a 473,15 (-e vagge); Mhv p. 244,5* (dhatugabbha-
racano nama -o paricchedo); - see also ekatif!1satima
(sv eka), ekünatif!1satima, catuttif!1satima (sv catu[r]),
chattif!1satima (sv cha2), tettif!1satima, dvattif!1satima
(sv dva), pañcatif!1satima, battif!1satima.
tika, m.n. [S. trika], a set of three, a collection of three, a
triad; a section consisting of sets of three; V in V 124,9
(-af!1 nitthitaf!1, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a nitthita); M III 1,19
(mayaf\1 . . . antevasi labhitva pathamaf!1 evaf!1
ga1,1apema: ekaf\1 ekakaf\1 dve duka t11,1i -a cattari
catukka ... ); Dhs p. 130,17 (-af!1); Vism 530,3o (ayaf!1
-o); Sp 1343,2o (t11,1i -ani samathakkhandhake
niddighani); Spk II 143,7 (sabbe pi pañcasu suttantesu
Pal,ll.larasa -a honti); Pj I 246,14 (tlhi -ehi anavasesato
satte dassetva); As 84,3o (avyakataf\1 va ti -af!1 püretva
va thapetabbaf!1); Vibh-a 27,11 (iti sojasa -a
aghacattallsa honti); Sadd 801,5 (satassa -af!1 tisataf!1);
-
0
-jjhanika, mfn. [from tika + jhana2], producing
three stages of jhana meditation; Vism 111 ,16 (purima
tayo brahmavihara -a); - 0
-nipata, m., a section
consisting of sets of three; A I 304,12 (-o samatto, Ee so;
Be --paji nitthita; Ce tatiyo nipato; Se -o nitthito);
It 101,12 (-o nighito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -af!1 nitthitaf!1);
Th p. 32,24* (-amhi ... anhatalisa gathayo ).
tikaka, n. [= tika ?], a section consisting of sets of three;
Vin V 124,3o* (in uddana: uddanaf!1 tikake idaf!1;
315 tikicchan a
cf 124,9: tikaf!1 nitthitaf!1).
tikika, tikiga, mfn., ? Sadd 922,8 (tikiko tikigo ...
Val,li.mbhedo 'yaf!1).
tikicchaka , m. [cf S. cikitsaka], a physician, a doctor;
Abh 329; A V 218,2 (-a bhikkhave virecanaf!1 denti
pittasamutthananaf!1 pi abadh3naf!1 patighataya ... );
Pv 36:69 (-anaf!1 ca upaghapesi; Pv-a 242,23: -anaf\1 ca
ti -e ca); Ja II 215,s- (ekacce hi -a ghoravisena ...
osadhehi ca tikicchaf!1 karonti); Ap 301 ,5 (-o aham asif!1
seghiputtaf!1 virecayif!1); 381,12 (sallakatto tuvaf!1 vira
aturanaf!1 -o); Bv 2:17 (yatha pi vyiidhito puriso
vijjamane -e na tikicchapeti taf!1 vyiidhif!1; Bv-a 72,7: -e
ti vejje); Mil272,1o (ye te ahesuf!1 -anaf!1 pubbaka
acariya); - see also cikicchaka.
tikicchati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. cikitsati], treats medically, cures
(a person ora complaint); Vin I 270,38 (ko bha1,1e gilano
kaf!1 -ami ti); 272,36foll. (tadisaf!1 vejjaf!1 janahi yo maf!1
-eyya ti, ayaf!1 deva amhakaf!1 Jivako vejjo ... so devaf!1
-issatl ti); Ja II 213,23 (tena hi -assü ti); 214,11 * (-a maf!1
brahma1,1a kamanltaf!1); IV 171,23 foil. (iti me tata ta1,1haf!1
nissaya vyadhi uppanno sace -ituf!1 sakkosi -ahi ti);
VI 94,2* (deva pi naf!1 -anti); Mil335,9 (so bhagava
devamanusse -ati); Sadd 361,2 (kita mvase
rogapanayane ca: ketati .. . -ati cikicchati); 822,14
(rogapanayanatthe kitadhatuto ca chapaccayo hoti: -ati);
826,4 (adibhütassa val,l1,1assa ekasarassa kvaci dvittaf!1
hoti ... -ati); - part.pr. tikicchanta, mfn., Vin 1 72,19
(Jivako ca komarabhacco bahü gilane bhikkhü -anto);
S I 162,33* (ubhinnaf!1 -antaf!1 taf!1 attano ca parassa ca
jana maññanti balo ti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se -antanaf!1; Spk I
229,26foll.: -antaf\1 tan ti ubhinnaf!1-antanaf!1, ayam eva
va patho, Ce, Ee so; Be -antanan ti ubhinnaf!1 -antaf!1
ayam eva ... ; Se -antanan ti ubhinnaf\1 -ataf\1) = 222,11*
(Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -antanaf!1; Spk I 343,18foll.: -antanan
ti ekavacane bahuvacanaf\1, -antan ti attho) = Th 444
(Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -antanaf!1; Th-a II 186,35:
kodhavyadhitikicchaya -antaf!1 khamantaf!1 puggalaf!1);
Ap-a 464,3 (bahurogino -anto ); - aor. 3 sg. tikicchi,
Vin I 72,15; Ap-a 464,4 (Asokanamattherassa rogaf!1 -i);
- inf tikicchituf!1, Vin I 72,2; Sp 1276,23 (buddha-
sahassenapi -ituf!1 na sakka ti atekiccho); Spkl 355,11
(kif!1 pana Sakko tassa kodhaf!1 -ituf!1 sakku1,1eyya ti);-
absol. tikicchitva, Ja III 202,21; Ap-a 127,4;
pp tikicchita, mfn. [cf S. cikitsita], treated; cured;
Sp 192,29 (maharogo te maya -o); Dhp-a III 263,22joll.
(añño rogo sakif!1 -o vinassati . . . jighaccha pana
niccakalaf!1 tikicchitabba yeva ti);
fpp (a) tikicchitabba, mfn., Ja II 214,25 (tVaf!1
mülosadhiidihi atekiccho ñill,losadhen' eva tikicchitabbo
ti); (b) neg. atikicchaniya, mfn., It-a II 99,24 (atekiccho
atikicchaniyo ti);- caus. pr. 3 sg. tikicchape ti, Bv 2:17
(yatha pi vyadhito puriso vijjamane tikicchake na -eti
taf!1 vyadhif!1; Bv-a 72,8: na -etl ti na -eyya); Dhp-a I
25,13 (brahma1,1a puttassa te rogo uppanno -ehi nan ti);
343,19 (acariyassa ... kucchirogo uppajji, raja vejjehi
-eti); - part.pr. neg. atikicchapenta, mfn., Mi1247,17;
- absol. tikicchapetva, Mil 247,12 (sallakattaf!1 disva na
-apetva); Sp 995,26;- neg. atikicchapetva, Ud-a 167,3o;
-se e also atekiccha, cikicchati, satekiccha.
tikicchana , n. [cf S. -cikitsana], treating; curing; Ja II
tikiccha
213,16 (vejjabrahma~o tumhakarp 0 '-atthaya agato ti);
Ud-a 166,23 (tadisassa pi rogassa vejjadlhi o• -attharp);
Cp-a295,21 (vejjassa -arp); Vibh-a411,18 (ekacco pana
pa~gito amanussasirirpsapadihi upaddutanarp
manussanarp o• -atthaya dhammikani nagam~ga1a­
mantadlni vijjathanani uppadeti): Sadd 863,7 (-arp
tikiccha);- ifc see kaya-.
tikicchli, f (and -a, n.) [cf S. cikitsa], medica[ treatment;
healing; medica[ practice; Abh 330; Sn 927 (-arp
mamako na seveyya); Ja II 215,4* (okkantasukkassa hi
ka -a); Nidd I 382,26 (pañca -a sa1akiyarp sallakattiyarp
kayatikiccharp bhütiyarp komarabhaccarp, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se kayatikicchiyarp); Ap 381,13 (mamarp rogaparetassa
-arp dehi nayaka); Mi13,31 (satthani uggahitani honti
seyyathidarp su ti ... gandhabba -a catubbeda ... ); 272,14
(roguppattirp ca nidanarp ca . . . -arp ca kiriyarp ca ...
janitva); Dhp-a I 12,13 (patikkhitto -aya vejjenasi
vivajjito ); Sadd 863,8 (tikicchanarp -a);
duttikiccha, mfn., difficult to treat, difficult to cure;
Sp 996,17 (pubbaverikena amanussena gahito -o hoti);
It-a II 143,15 (-assa vagadukkharogassa tikicchanato
uttamo bhisakko); satikiccha, mfn., curable;
remediable; Bv-a 50,31 (satekicchaya ti... apatti-
anapattiya satikicchaya kovido ti pi patho, so yev' attho,
Ce, E e so; Be, Se satekicchaya ti ... satekicchaya ... ); -
see also atekiccha, kayatikiccha (sv kaya), cikiccha,
2
tekiccha 1, *tekiccha , satekiccha.
tikicchlipana, n. ffrom caus. of tikicchati], causing to
treat medically; - neg. atikicchapana, n., Ud-a 167,31
(tassa atikicchapane kara~arp pakasesi).
tikicchiya, n. [cf S. cikitsita], medica! treatment;- ifc see
kaya-.
tikkam ligami in Ee at Ja V 291,3 is wr; read yava
majjhantikatikkama bhami yeva, with Be, Ce, Se.
tikuQliti,pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tiknoti, Wg § 27:19], injures;
Sadd 495,4 (tika tiga ... hirpsayarp: -ati tigu~ati ... ).
tikkha, mfn. [S. tik~~a], sharp; cutting; pungent, acid;
keen, strong; acute, quick; A III 306,11 (appamatta
viharanti -arp mara~asatirp bhaventi asavanarp
khayaya); Ja III 151,5* (asi -o va); 484,28* (vatasikha
-a); V 269,11* (khuradharam anukkamma -arp
durabhisambhavarp); VI 250,16' (tehi pattehi sa nadi -a
hutva sandati); Vism 136,12 (-ena vegena pakkhanto);
492,1o ("-tta); 613,21 (indriyani -ani katva); 640,31 (tarp
ñai;tarr -arp hutva vahati); Sv 432,16 (atapassa -ta
0
mandata); 754,1o (-assa sukhumarp vedananupassana-
satipaqhanarp [visuddhimaggo]); Spk Ili 235,16
(dhammanusarino nama maggo -o hoti sürarp ña~arp
vahati); Pj U 47,26 (paññadhikanarp hi saddha manda
hoti pañña -a); 277,21 (gihino hi tarp ña~arp dandharp
hoti puttadaradijatajatitatta bhikkhuno pana -arp tassa
jataya vijatitatta); Th-a I 6,27 (ativiya da!hanarp -anarp
ca catunnarp dathanarp); Patis-a 697,25 (khanti, sa
muduka majjhima -a ti tividha); Sadd 385,19 (nisanarp
tejanarp 0 -ta); 385,2o (-ani pisui;tapharusavacadlni); -
1 (itthiyo na -arp nijjhayanti mandarp a1ocenti olokenti);
o• -agga, mfn. [tikkha + agga ], sharp-pointed, with
sharp tips; Ja VI 448,28* (vacchadantamukha seta -a
at!hivedhino, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tikhi~agga); 507,7*
(accha ... sanghaqayanta singani -ani paharino, Ce, Se
so; Be, Ee -a 'tippaharino); - 0 '-indriya, mfn., with
316 tikhiQa
keen faculties; V in I 6,26 (addasa kho bhagava buddha-
cakkhuna lokarp volokento satte ... -e mudindriye ... ;
Sp 963,7: yesarp saddhadini indriyani tikkhani te -a);
Vibh 341.26 (yesarp sattanarp imani pañcindriyani
asevitani bhavitani ... ime te satta -a); Vism 87,24 (-assa
pana khippa abhiñña); Cp-a 288,34 (mahapuriso -o
visadadhatuko); - 0
-tara, mfn., campar., sharper;
stronger; Vism 669,23 (-a sankharupekkha uppajjati);
Patis-a 25,29; - 0
-pañña, mfn., of quick understanding;
D III 158,9 (mahapañño hoti puthupañño .. . -o
nibbedhikapañño); S V 413,4 (--ttaya); A I 45,2o
(--taya); Ap 22,26 (Sariputto ti namena -o bhavissati);
Vism 351,7 (-assa bhikkhuno); Sv 805,31 (-arp pana
sandhaya pato va anusit!ho sayarp visesarp adhigamissati
sayarp anusinho pato visesarp adhigamissatl ti); Spk I
248,22 (api ca -o esa brahma~o); - atitikkha-
pañña, mfn., whose understanding is very quick or keen;
Vism 351,14; Patis-a 593,6; - sutikkhapañña, mfn., of
very quick understanding; Ap 7,13;- -pañña,f, quick
0
understanding; Patis 11 185,17 (nibbidanupassana
bhavita ... -arp paripiireti); Sv 932,33foll. (katama -a);
Patis-a 652,29 (-a lokuttara eva);- 0 -mliya, mfn., with
sharp tricks; quick to deceive; Ja V 445,26* (-a
nadi-r-iva sighasota, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -maya; 447,3·:
0
-a ti tikhi~amaya slghamaya, Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-Vipassaka, mfn., whose insight is sharp; Ps II 226,11;
As 227,12 (ayarp -assa mahapaññassa bhikkhuno
vipassana);- 0 -surli,f, pungent liquor; Ja V 11,7 (-arp
pariyadapetva); - atikkha, mfn., not sharp or quick;
not keen or acute; Ja IV 193,14' (amudu -o hutva, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e anatitikkho ); It-a II 172,11 (indriyanarp va
--bhavato); - atitikkha, mfn., very or too sharp or
quick; very keen, very acute; JaiV 192,16* (-o ca
verava); Vism 705,3o (esa natimandaya natitikkhaya
vipassanaya te sankhare vipassati); Ps II 226,18 (pathamo
-o tatiyo atimando);- see also tikhi~a, ti~ha.
tikkhiQa, se e sv tikhi~a.
tikhiQa, tikkhi~a, mfn. [S. tik~~a], sharp, cutting; pungent,
acid; quick; Abh 711 (ti~harp tu -arp tibbarp); Th 1094
(paññamayarp -am asirp gahetva); Ja I 380,16' (imasmirp
te akkhe galite etarp visarp -arp bhavissati ti); II 336,7*
(khagge gahite -e te1adhote, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tikkhi~e);
111 149,17 (pisu~a vaca nama -a satthappaharasadisa, Ce,
Se so; Be tikhi~asattipahara-; E e tikhi~asippahara- );
IV 330,21* (u~ho ca vato -a ca rasmiyo); Mill49,19
(sal1akatto ... satthakarp -arp kareyya, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
tikkharp sattharp); Vism 635,3o (-arp sürarp ativisadarp
ña~arp uppajjati); Sv 911,Jo (suqhu nisitassa -assa);
Ps III 124,2o (ka~tako nama jatakalato paghaya -o va
hoti); 249,3 (tasarad~gakassa ca koti nama -a hoti);
Spk II 206,9 (katuko ti -o); Dhp-a 11 9 ,2o ( -arp surarp
pivanta madhuramarpsarp khadanta vicarissama);
Ud-a 233,8 (-en a asina amittarp glvaya paharanto viya);
402,27 (vedana -a khara katuka); Bv-a 184,29
(vajirasadisarp -arp); - -arp, adv., sharply; Sv 702,28
1
-
0
'-agga, mfn. [tikhii;ta + agga ], with a sharp point;
Ja III 282,14* (sukhumarp -arp ca ko sücirp ketum
icchati; 282,1s·: aggassa tikhi~ataya -arp); IV 287,22'
(tu~gani ti uccani -ani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tikkhi~aggani);
tikhh;tikata
0
-tara, mfn., campar., sharper; Sp 458,15; -
0
-dhara, mfn. [from tikhi~:ta + dhara2], sharp-edged;
Ja III 338,17 (eko pana puriso tettÍl!lsailgulaiTl -31Tl
asiratanaiTl gilati); Dhp-a III 484,15 (-aiTl ti~:taiTl); -
0
-pañña, mfn., of quick understanding; Ap-a 368,11
(vinaye -anaiTl aggo); - 0 -mati, mfn., sharp-witted, of
quick intelligence; Ud-a 257,17 (eko -i, Ee so; Ce -I; Be,
Se tikhi~:tamanti); - 0 -manti(n), mfn. (and Npr. ?), of
quick intelligence; giving smart counsel; Ja VI 474,3*
(silraiTl -in3IT1 bhataraiTl; 474,6: -inan ti tikhiJ:tapaññ31Tl);
Ud-a 257,17 (eko -I, Be, Se so; Ce 0 -mati; Ee 0 -mati);-
atikhil]a, mfn., not sharp; S pk III 235 ,2o (-a asidhara);
Vibh-a 457,8 (kaJ:ttako tikhi~:to hoti -o);
atitikhil]a, mfn., very sharp; very quick; very hot; Ja VI
450,8· (sunisita -a); Mil 278,10 (vajiraiTl --taya vijjhati,
Be, Ce, E e so; Se atitikkhataya); Sv 89,9 (-31Tl asiiTl);
Spk III 92,18 (kuthit3IT1 hettha santattavalikaya upari
atapena ca -an ti attho);- see also tikkha, ti~:tha.
tikhii].ikata, mfn. [from tikhi~:ta + karoti], sharpened; made
sharp; París-a 327,2o (cara~:tatejena tejitatta ti si!atejena
0
-tta).
tigul}.iiti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tignoti, Wg § 27:19], injures;
Sadd 495,4 (tika tiga ... hiiTlsayaiTl: tiku~:tati -a ti ... ).
titibha, m. [cf S. titribha, !I!ibha], a kind of bird; Ap 347,14
(-a cakkavaka ca, E e so, but perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
dindibha); - see also dindibha.
tittha, mfn. [S. tmaJ, dry, hard, rough; Ja VI 215,33'
(tiqhasela ti pabbata hi acala -a na upacita ekaghana
silamaya ca, Be so; Ce, Ee -a upacita; Se dighasela ti ...
-a anupacita); - 0 -sela, mfn., hard and rocky; Ja VI
212,26* (na pabbata honti tathappakara aññadisa aca1a -a,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ditthasela).
titthagu, ind. [from p~rt.pr. oftitthati + gu3; S. ti~thadgu],
when or where the cows stand (to be milked); Sadd 750,7
(samaso avyayibhavasañño hoti: -u vahagu ... );
778,12joll. (tighagvadin31Tl aññapadatthe thane kale va:
tighanti gavo asmiiTl rhane kale va -u).
titthati, thati, thayati 1, thati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ti~thati],
Dhatup 359 (tha gatinivuttiyaiTl); Dhatum 587;
Sadd 353,29 (tha gatinivattiy3IT1: . . . thati thanti -ati);
362,28 (tha gatinivattiyaiTl: thati); 479,18 (tha
gatinivattiyam: thayati thayi); - l. stands, is standing;
stands still; stops; stays, waits; Vin I 180,26 (akase
antalikkhe cailkamati pi -ati pi nisidati pi seyyaiTl pi
kappeti); DI 104,2 (so tamha padesa apakkamma
ekamante -eyya); M III 173,26 (cakkaratan3IT1 ... rañño
cakkavattissa antepuradvare akkhahat3IT1 maññe -ati);
.-\ I 153,25 (paripanthe pi -ati); 1115,6* (yataiTl care
yataiTl -e yataiTl acche yat3IT1 saye); III 227,25 (yava
poriiJ:tanaiTl brahmaJ:tiinaiTl mariyada tattha -ati t3IT1 na
\ Itikkamati); It 57,16 (tiJ:tJ:tO parailgato thale -ati
brahmaJ:to); Vv 65:1 (id3IT1 vimanaiTl obhasayaiTl -ati
antalikkhe); Pv 5:1 (tirokuMesu -anti; Pv-a 24,12: -anti
ti nisajjadipatikkhepato thanakappanavacanarp et3IT1);
2-1-:9 (tassa tire tuvaiTl thasi); Th 234 (dvare -ati
Khujjasobhito); 888 (sukhaiTl sayami !hayami sukh3IT1
kappemi jivit3IT1; Sadd 479,22: tattha thayami ti -ami);
Ja III 303,26 (suriyaiTl namassanto ekapadena -ati); 319,3
gopanasihi asailgahita kaJ:t~:tika na -ati); 354,18* (uddissa
.rriya -anti esa ariyan3IT1 yacana); IV 259,14* (etth' eso
317 tifthati
-ate migo); VI 529,33* (mala va ganthita thanti);
Ap 189,11 (-are); Bv 2:153 (yatha pi pabbato selo ...
sakatthane va -ati); Mi1373,27 (makkato rukkhe yeva
carati -ati nisidati); Vism 92,29 (sada maggaiTl
olokayamana va -ati); 194,17 (sighasotaya nadiya
arittabalen' eva nava -ati); Sp 193,5 (sikkhapad3IT1
kuppeyya na yathatthane -eyya); Sv 165,9 (sutte khiJ:te
[suttagu!o] tatth' eva -ati na gacchati); PsI 251,29
(sakat31Tl gacchati saka~ -aH ti voharamatt3IT1 hoti);
11 5,35 (na aragge sasapo -ati); Nidd-a I 188,5 (kakaJ:ttako
thokaiTl gantva thokaiTl -ati); Mhv 17:40 (diva thati); -
2. has its position; keeps its place; Vism 362,7 (khe!o ...
jivhatale -ati); Sp 280,3 (yava sis3IT1 na papuJ:tanti tava
dukkate -anti); 646,2 (t3IT1 civar3IT1 atirekacivaratthane
-ati); Ps IV 172,5 (ussannakilesanaiTl ca dinno ovado
ovadaghane na -ati udake daJ:tgaraji viya khippaiTl
vigacchati); V v-a 42,22 (pitutthane -ati); - 3. stands, is
valid; Sp 224,z6foll. (dussllapuggale nissaya hi uposatho
na -ati pavara~:ta na -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits na);
1256,28 (thitika -ati); 1402,9 (chandaparisuddhiiTl datva
agacchantu va ma va kamm3IT1 pana -ati); It-a 1I 101,3o
(tasmiiTl tathagate parena aropiyamano doso na rilhati na
-ati); - 4. is engaged or intent upon; perseveres in;
A 111 370,27 (sace kho tv3IT1 devate rukkhadhamme
-eyyasi); Sn 929 (kayavikkaye na -eyya); Th 264
(ovade e' assa -eyya; Th-a II 109,z5: yathanusi!th31Tl
patipajjanavasena -eyya); Ja II 29,15* (api ce pi dubbalo
mitto mittadhammesu -ati); Sp 1014,19 (ayatiiTl saiTlvare
na -ati); Sv 116,15 (ekasmiiTl pi pakkhe na -ati); Spk I
67,1 (yadi assaddhiyaiTl na -ati); It-a I 178,32 (tassaiTl
desanayaiTl na -ati); - 5. exists; continues to exist,
remains; Vin I 99,1* (pamutthamhi ca suttante
abhidhamme ca tavade vinaye avinattharnhi puna -ati
sasan3IT1); 11256,12 (sace Ánanda nalabhissa
matugamo ... pabbajj3IT1 ... vassasahassaiTl saddhammo
-eyya); D I 46,10 (ucchinnabhavanettiko bhikkhave
tathagatassa kayo -ati); 111 103,7 (ekacco asampajano
e' eva matu kucchiiTl okkamati asampajano
matukucchismirp thati asampajano matukucchisma
nikkhamati); M 111 6,3foll. (-at' eva nibbanaiTl -ati
nibbanagamimaggo -am' ahaiTl samadapeta); S 11 87,3o
(so bhikkhave maharukkho ... cir3IT1 dighamaddhan3IT1
-eyya); V 64,14 (ay3IT1 kayo aharatthitiko aharaiTl paricca
-ati); A 111 43,24* (kulav3IT1so ciraiTl -e); V 270,6 (yo
manussan3IT1 aharo tena so tattha yapeti tena so tattha
-ati); Sn 434 (bhiyyo sati ca pañña ca samadhi mama
-ati); Patis 11 127,15 (aqhah' akarehi satisambojjhailgo
-ati atthah' akarehi satisambojjhailgo cavati); Ap 458,22
(-ate yavatayuk3IT1); 473,4 (tasma payogo kattabbo yava
thati mune mat3IT1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se yava -ati sasanaiTl);
Kv 61,25 foil. (puggalo kiiTl nissaya -ati ti bhavaiTl
nissaya -ati ti); Mil 72,21 (imina namarilpena kammaiTl
kataiTl kusa131Tl va akusa131Tl va kuhiiTl tani kammani
-anH ti); Vism 9,5 (hirottappe hi sati sil3IT1 uppajjati
e' eva -ati ca); Sv 1007,36 (ev3IT1 vedana uppajjanti
ev3IT1 -anti evaiTl nirujjhanti); Ps 11 59,25
(aqhikasailkhalika va -ati); 187,6 (imehi lakkhaJ:tehi
samannagato agare na -ati buddho va hoti ti); 252,24
(chiddaghate udakaiTl viya na -ati); Spkll 187,34
(arajakaiTl rajj3IT1 na -ati); - 6. afien as auxiliary with
titthati
part. or absol., with meaning of absol.!part.
predominant: V in I 83,4 (puttapemarp. ... aghirp. chetva
aghimiñjarp. ahacca -ati); M I 493,25 (gaitga nadl ...
samuddarp. ahacca -ati); SI 86,21 (eko dhammo yo ubho
atthe samadhiggayha -ati); lii 106,22 (thlnamiddharp. ca
me cittarp. pariyadaya -ati); A II 38,32 (pul).<;iañkarp. va
udake jatarp. . . . udaka accuggamma ~hati anupalittarp.
udakena); V 42,5 (tarp. ce avuso bhikkhurp. lobho
abhibhuyya -ati); Ud 3,5' (vidhiipayarp. -ati
Marasenarp.); Th 98 (sarattacitto vedeti tarp. ca ajjhosa
-ati); Ja VI 536,19" (udakarp. ... ullulitarp. hutva -ati);
Nidd I 180,2 (buddhañiil).arp. devamanussanarp. paññarp.
pharitva abhibhavitva -ati); Pa~is II 167,23 (lokarp.
samatikkamma abhibhuyya -antl ti lokuttara ti);
Vism 361,21 (assu yada saitjayati tada akkhikiipake
piiretva -ati); 530,1o (sa hi uppanna dukkhasaccarp.
pa~icchadetva -ati); Sp 279,1 (yo pi danto bahi
nikkhamitva -ati na sakka onhehi pidahiturp.); 331,24
(maccha . . . maritva uttana udake pa1avanta -anti);
Sv 692,35 (ekeko mahabrahma aññe brahme
abhibhavitva -ati, Be, Ce so; Se brahmano; Ee wr aññe
brahma); Spk I 257,32 (na ekadivasarp. vassitva -ati);
II 228,8 (matugamasaddo nama purise khobhetva -ati);
Mp IV 150,10 (visañña va hutva -anti); Vv-a 174,21
(gandho sada pi sabba disa pharitva -ati); Th-a lii 71,21
(pad!po . . . nibbuto ca katthaci gantva na -ati); -
imperat. 3 sg. (a) tighatu, V in I 343,22 (caturaitginl
sena . . . -atu); D II 103,11 foil. (-atu bhante bhagava
kapparp. -atu su gato kapparp.); Ja I 65,2 (bodhisatto ...
ciiJarp. gahetva sacaharp. buddho bhavissami akase -atu
no ce bhiimiyarp. patatii ti antalikkhe khipi); Sp 859,1
(-atu va nis!datu va); Dhp-a II 165,4 (idarp. bhesajjarp.
yava mamagamana baddhaniyamen' eva -atii ti);- esp.
let stand aside ... ; set aside ... ; let wait ... ; never
mind ... ; D I 122,13 foil. (-a tu Sol).adal).<;io brahmai).O
tumhe maya saddhirp. mantavho . . . -atha tumhe
Sol).adal).<;io brahmai).O maya saddhirp. mantetii ti); 179,28
(-at' esa bhante katha yaya mayarp. etarahi kathaya
sannisinna); Ja IV 40,8 ( -atu Bariil).asirajjarp.,
sakahljambudlpassa pi raja bhaviturp. yutto ti); 475,22
(-atu eko putto, cattaro putte dassaml ti); Mill4,6 (-atu
bhante eko Milindo raja); Mp I 306,9 (-atu tava mayharp.
gehe kammarp.); V v-a 285,28 (segho tava -atu samo eva
na VIJJatJ ti); (b)thatu, Mhv 17:25; Sadd354,1;
2 sg. (a) tigha, V in lii 131,21 (-a bhagini aharp. karissaml
ti); MI 380,21 (-a bhante ma pavisi); II 99,18 (~hito aharp.
Ailgulimala, tvarp. ca -a ti); Th 126 (-a makka~a ma
dhavi); Ja I 273,19 (kaharp. yasi -a bhakkho me ti);
II 223,1 (-a ti vutte nipajji); IV 149,26 (-a re -a re ti
vadanta anubandhirp.su yeva); Sp 191,20 (agamehi tvan ti
-a tava tvarp.); Sv 354,23 (-a bhante ti vutte pi na -atl ti
na tighabhadantiko ); 667,11 (tvarp. pitighane -a aharp.
puttaghane ~hassami); Mp I 398,15 (ma me gharadvare
-a ti); Dhp-a lii 194,6 (yava narp. anemi tava idh' eva-a
ti); Mhv 4:29 (dhamme -a ti); (b) titthahi, V in I 94,9
(gaccha amumhi okase -ah! ti); Th 461 (-ahi mama
sasane); Ja I 69,17 (ajja dani paghaya mama
jetthadh!tu~thane -ah! ti); V 475,1* (-ah! ti maya vutto so
tvarp. gacchasi pammukho ); 3 pl. tighantu, Ap 4,3 (-antu
SOJ?.J?.apallaitka); -esp. set aside; never mind; DI 163,6
318 titthati
(yesu no avuso thanesu na sameti -antu tani thanani,
yes u thanesu sameti ... ); MI 62,37 (-antu bhikkhave
satta vassani, yo hi koci bhikkhave ime cattaro
satipaghane evarp. bhaveyya eh a vassani ... );
2 pl. tighatha, Ja V 212,15 (-atha bhante ti vatva therarp.
vanditva vattharp. phaletva tass' ekako~~asarp. adasi);
VI 405,17 foil. (ma palayatha ... -atha -atha ti); Mil13,1
(-atha bhante na puna osaretha); Sv730,2 (-atha tumhe
aham eva dhovissaml ti); Ps II 392,17 (-atha tava tumhe
mayarp. satthararp. passissama ti); Mp I 168,21 (sa -atha
bhante ti . . . pattarp. dhovitva . . . catumadhurassa
püretva ... paccekabuddhassa hatthe thapetva); Dhp-a III
6,21 ( -atha bhante ti vatva !aje . . . therassa patte
akiritva): Th-a I 208,9 (-atha bhante muhuttarp. yavaharp.
agacchaml ti); - fut. 3 sg. (a) thassati, DI 46,1o (yav'
assa kayo ~hassati tava narp. dakkhinti devamanussa);
A III 43,18 (kulavarp.so cirarp. thassati); IV 278,23 (pañc'
eva dani Ananda vassasatani saddhammo ~assati);
Vv 55:6 (ettavata thassati puññakammo); Ja III 99,16*;
Mhv 25:86; (b) tighissati, Sadd 354,3; 3 pl. (a) ~assanti,
D II 75,2s; A V 107,18 (akusala dhamma cittarp.
pariyadaya thassanti); (b) ti~~issanti, Vin IV 150,12
(katharp. hi nama chabbaggiya bhikkhü bhikkhünarp. ...
vivadapannanarp. upassutirp. -issantl ti); - part.pr.
(a) tit~a(t), mfn., DI 52,26 (paripanthe -ato); MI 111,7;
Sn !51 (-arp. cararp. nisinno va); 1092 (majjhe sarasmirp.
-atam); - see also tighagu; (b) tighanta, mf(-antl)n.,
Vin V 119,36 (-ante bhagavati apajjati no parinibbute );
Sn 1114; Pv 10:1 (ka nu antov1manasmirp. -anu
n' upanikkhami); Mil309,JO; Dhp-a I 36,24 (yatha hi
chaya nama ... sañre gacchante gacchati -ante -ati); -
neg. atighanta, mfn., Spk I 19,25; Th!-a 230,3;
(e) titthamana, mfn., Vin III 222,1 (tul).h!bhüto uddissa
-amano); S III 53, JO; Pv 26:4 (navaya -amanaya); Ja I
52,n (salasakharp. gahetva -amanaya eva e' assa
gabbhavughanarp. ahosi); IV 97,10* (na brahmaJ?.e
addhike -amane gantabbarp.); Ap 572,22 (tavata -amano
so taresi janatarp. bahurp.); Vism 238,16 (rathacakkarp. ...
-amanarp. pi); Sp 103,23 (yavatayukarp. -amano); -
neg. atighamana, mfn., Sp 307,22; Mhv 34:71; - aor.
3 sg. (a) anha, anha, It 86,3* (jalarp. va yasasa agha);
Sn 429 (ima gatha bhal).arp. Maro attha buddhassa
santike ); Ja VI 236,33* (tarp. kammarp. nihitarp. attha
bhasmacchanno va pavako); Mhv 14:3; Sadd 354,2 (~ha
gatinivattiyarp.; ... agha at~u); (b) aghasi, V in I 3,24
(Mue alindo nagaraJa . . . bhagavato purato a~~asi
añjaliko); D II 143,21 (atha kho ayasma Anando vihararp.
pavisitva kapislsarp. alambitva rodamano a~~asi); M Ili
119,26 (sato sampajano ... bodhisatto tusite kaye anhasl
ti); A I 112,5 (tarp. cakkarp. . . . akkhahatarp. maññe
atthasi); Ja I 30,31 (tassa pana bhagavato sarlrappabha
niccakalarp. dasasahassilokadhaturp. pharitva aghasi);
Bv 4:29 (yava-d-aghasi sambuddho); Mil350,1s;
Vism 706,19 (aggi til).aVeJ?.ukatthani jhapetva therarp.
parikkhipitva aghasi); Mhv 14:7; Sadd 354,2;
3 pl. (a) attharp.su, D II 209,11*; SI 23,27 (vehasam
agharp.su); Ja IV 320,4•; Vism 706,21; Mhv 19:58;
Sadd 354,2; (b) tigharp.su, tit~irp.su, Vin V 25,4
(upassutirp. -arp.su, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce ti~~hahirp.su) =
Sadd 354,3 (tighirp.su); (e) atthu, Sadd 354,2;
titthati
at~ahi!J1SU in Ee at Ap 144,5 is wr for aghati!J1sa (Be,
Ce, Se so); 1 pl. (a) aqhamha, D III 91,13; (b) ti¡thamha,
Vin IV 150,1o (maya!J1 ayasmantana!J1 upassuti!J1 -amha
ti); - thasi!]1 in Ee at Ap 570,12 is prob. wr; Be, Se capi;
Ce casi!J1;- cond. Sadd 354,3foll. (aqhissa aqhissa!J1SU
atinhissa atiqhissa!J1su); - inf. (a) thatu!J1, Ja V 185,25*
(na ussahe taya vina aha!J1 thatu!]1); Vism 138,24; Ps 11
191,18 (buddhatejena abhibhilta attano katikaya ~atu!]1
nasakkhi!J1su); Sadd 354,4; (b) ti¡thitu!]1, Vin IV 151,4;
- absol. (a) thatva, A I 267,12 (puthujjano yavatayuka!J1
thatva); Sn 887 (vinicchaye thatva pahassamano, Ee so,
me; Be, Ce, Se thatva); JaVI 317,25* (thatva idha
yavatayum vimane); Cp 1:9:28 (thatva catum-
mahapathe); Mi1242,8; Vism 3,15 (s!le thatva); Mp I
411,5 (paticchannayanasmi!J1 nu kho nislditva pavisami
udahu rathe thatva ti); Dhp-a I 16,14 (tva!J1 sama1.1abhave
thatva pi sllamattal]1 pilretu!]1 nasakkhi); Mhv 30:48;
Sadd 354,5; - neg. athatva, a¡thatva, Ja I 502,w;
Vism 290,9; Sp 352,6 (vihare athatva anisiditva);
(b) thatvana, Pv 30:11 (thatvana so vassasata!J1 idh'
eva); Ja IV 98,17*; Bv 2:59 (ussisake mam thatvana);
Mhv 8:4; - pass. pr. 3 sg. thiyate, Sadd S34,2; -
pp fhita, mfr¡. and n. [S. sthita], l. (mfn.) (i) standing;
being, staying (in any state or condition, often with
absol.); remaining, existing, present; firm, steady; V in I
5,33* (sele yatha pabbatamuddhini -o yatha pi passe
janatal]1 samantato); 184,22 (cittal]1 hoti -al]1
aneñjappattal]1): 276,18 (putto me arogo -o ti); DI 50,22
(yena bhagava ten' upasaiJ.kami upasaiJ.kamitva
ekamantal]1 atthasi ekamanta!J1 -o ... ); 90,10 (-o va hi
bho Gotama -ena brahm~o brahm~ena saddhi!]1
sallapitu!]1 arahati); II 14,13 (-a va bodhisattam
bodhisattamata vijayati); 182,12 (sov~1.1amayassa
kiltagarassa dvare rilpimayo talo -o ahosi); III 160,1*
(purimatarabhave -o); MI 83,2o (ayasma Nagasamalo
bhagavato pi!!hito -o hoti bhagavantal]1 vljayamano);
111 245,16 (tassa sa vimutti sacce -a akuppa hoti); S I 7 ,2*
(-e majjhantike ka1e); 149,10 (vehasa!J1 -o); III 54,1
(viñña1.1a!J1 ... vimuttal]1 vimuttatta -al]1 --tta santusita!]1
santusitatta na paritassati); A III 47,9* (dhamme -al]1 na
vijahati kitti); Ud 61,21* (-ena kayena -ena cetasa);
Sn 920 (majjhe yatha samuddassa ilmi najayati -o hoti);
Th 663 (-a te indakh!lo va); Ja 11 117,1o (dukkhappatto
satto mayi -e ma nassi ti); III 53,12 (brahma1.1a
kimattha!J1 -o si ti); 95,17* (na h' eva -al]1 naslna!J1 na
sayiina!J1); IV 441,3* (ubhosu tlresu maya!J1 tada -a
sampassanta ubhayo aññamañña!J1); VI 549,17" (mukha!]1
pidahitva -ena uttaro¡thena samannagato); Nidd I 21,13
(n' eva pajahati na upadiyati pajahitva -o); Ap 124,21
(vithiya!J1 hi -o sattha); 497,17 (-o pathamayobbane);
Mi1254,11 (tassa tal]1 cittal]1 samadhitthambhe
upanibaddha!J1 na vedhati na calati -al]1 hoti
avikkhitta!]1); Vism 72,27 (sace pi asanne gamo hoti
vihare -ehi manussakiina!J1 saddo suyyati); Sp 9,24
(sam~assa Gotamassa savaka satthari -e yeva vihare
patijaggi!]1SU parinibbute chaggesun ti); Sv 111,22
(abhibhil ti abhibhavitva -o); 898,36 (pariyattiya -aya
sasana!J1 -al]1 hoti yada pana sa antaradhayati tada
pa~ama!J1 abhidhammapitakal]1 nassati); Ps IV 115,6
(dhatilsu hi -asu buddha pi -a va honti); Mp 11 291,1s
319 titthati
(asitihattha!J1 padesa!J1 ajjhottharitva -ahi chabb~1.1ahi
ghanabuddharasmlhi); Pj I 46,2 ([taco] okasato
saka1asarlra!J1 parinandhitva -o ti); 11535,11 (na sakka
agaramajjhe -enaya!J1 dhammo paripilretun ti); 580,13
(acariya tumhesu -esu mama pita -o vi ya hoti); Mhv 8:1
(Vijayo so maharaja vasse antimake -o); 17:65 (-e jine
katha ka); 25:110 (sar~esu -o eko);- (ii) (pass.) stood
in; Mhv 25:60 (-al]1 Gam~irajena ba1ako¡tha!]1
upagami); - 2. (n.) standing; DI 70,31 (gate -e nisinne
sutte jagarite bhasite tu1.1hibhave sampajanakañ hoti;
Sv 202,12: -e ti thane);- -'-okasa, m., the place where
(someone) stands or is standing or has stood or been
placed; Vin IV 105,32 (bhikkhussa -'-okasa!J1 va
nisinnokasa!J1 va ... agacchati); Vism 447,13; Sp 336,s;
Sv 185,23 (maya -'-okase); 574,33 (purimapadadina!J1
-' -okasa!J1 sallakkheti); Ps II 109,6; - --kappin, mfr¡.,
stopping, holding up the kappa; Pp 13,28 (katamo ca
puggalo --kappl, aya!J1 ca puggalo
sotapattiphalasacchikiriyaya patipanno assa kappassa ca
uggayhanavela assa n' eva tava kappo uggayheyya
yavaya!J1 puggalo na sotapattiphala!J1 sacchikaroti;
Pp-a 187,14: thitakappo assa atthi ti --kappi, kappa!J1
thapetu!]1 samattho ti attho); 14,1 (sabbe pi
maggasamailgino pugga1a --kappino ); Pet 31 ,29; -
--t~ana, n., the place where (someone) is standing or
has stood; Ja I 199,15 (sabbesa!J1 pi --qhana!J1
ramal.11Ya!J1 katva); III 325,10 (eko e1.1imigo rañño
--¡thana!J1 patipajji); Mp I 365,29; - neg. aqhita,
athita, mfr¡., not standing; not standing ( still), not
stopping; not firm, steadfast; V in I 57,27 (Rajagahe
p~ltana!J1 bhattana!J1 bhattapatipati aqhita hoti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee adhitthita; Sp 984,14: aqhita hotl ti
niccappavattinl hoti, eds so); M II 212,22 (a¡thita vata
bhoto Gotamassa padhana!J1 ahosi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
aqhitavatal]1; Ps III 453,20 foil.: at~itavata ti
aqhitapadassa padhanapadena saddhi!]1 sambandho ...
ida!J1 vutta!J1 hoti bhoto Gotamassa atthitapadhana!J1 vata
ahosi sappurisapadhana!J1 vata ahosi ti, Ce, Ee so; Be
atthitavatan ti at~itatapa!J1, assa padhanapadena
saddhi!J1 sambandho . . . bhoto Gotamassa
aqhitapadhanavatal]1 ahosi; Se at~itavata ti
aqhitatapa!J1); A III 370,24 (a¡thitay' eva kho me marisa
mkkhadhamme); Th 866 (kasma thito tva!J1 aham aqhito
'mhi); Ja V 475,9* (cora!J1 ca 1oke athital]1 vadanti;
475,17·: akusalakammapathesu thital]1 cora!J1 athital]1
nama vadanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 1oke cora!J1 ca
dasakusalakammapathesu athita!]1 nama vadanti);
Sp 12,13 (anisinno at~ito acaiJ.kamanto ); 1040,2 (aqhita!]1
pana oghanadi-udakavahakamatikadisu udaka!J1);
Dhp-a III 186,13 (na hi sakka rajabhave aqhitena
evarilpa!J1 diina!J1 datu!]1); - acc. -al]1, adv., without
stopping; Sn 1058 (ye tval]1 muni aqhital]1 ovadeyya);-
aqhitakarin, mfr¡., acting or doing without stopping;
Nidd I 59,17; Dhp-a III 452,25 (sataccakarino ti
satatakarino -ino); Pj 11 499,1 (nicca!J1 kusalana!J1
dhammana!J1 bhavanaya at~itakaritaya akusltacitto);-
atthitakiriyata,f, abstr. [cf BHS asthitikriya], the state of
acting or doing without stopping; Dhs 1367 (As 408,6:
kh~gal]1 akatva atthapetva karal.la!J1, so read with Be,
Ce, Se); - duqhita, mfr¡., standing badly; in a poor
titthati
position or condition; Vism 339,35 (yo esa
ma!).<;iapalaggo yo ca taqmissito ubho p' ete dughita;
Vism-mht [Be] I 411,24: dutthita ti na samma thita
dukkha111 va lltita);- sutthita, mjn., standing well; in a
good position or condition; Vism 340,3 (bahighitaJ11 ca
sutthitan ti mantva); - fpp thatabba, mfn. and n.,
impers., Vin II 267,16 (na saloke thatabba111 na nacca111
karapetabba111, Be, Se so; Ee tighatabba111; Ce omits);
III 221,37 (chakkhattuparama111 tu~hibhiitena uddissa
thatabba111); SI 59,27 (ettakaJ11 puññan ti ettako
puññavipako ti va ettaka111 sagge thatabban ti va, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se samagge); A IV 115,1 (eva111 thatabbaJ11 eva111
nislditabba111); Ja V 85,10* (niccayattena thatabba111):
Kv 622,14 (ekadhippayena.. . paripanthe thatabba111):
Vism 182,31 (!saka111 ukkamma nati-anuvate thatabbal11):
Sp 232,4 (suttasmi111 yeva thatabbaJ11); caus.
pr. 3 sg. (a) thapeti, -ayati, thapeti 1, thapayati 1,
l. causes to stand, places, sets up, fixes; establishes;
appoints to; sets out; lays down; Vin I 317,34 (ñattidutiye
ce bhikkhave kamme ekaya kammavacaya kamma111
karoti na ca ñattiJ11 -eti adhammakammaJ11); IV 159,38
(raja uccaghaniya111 nlcaghane -eti); D II 179,22
(yannünahaJ11 imasa111 pokkhara!).lna111 tire nahapake
purise -eyyaJ11 ye agatagataJ11 janaJ11 nahapessanti ti);
288,11 (pettike thane -ayissami); MI 117,28 (-eyya
okacarika111); 368,3 (anajanlye va samane anajanlya-
ghane -essama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -issama, prob. wr);
A I 19,21 (te e' ima111 saddhamma111 -entl ti); II 249,23
(dussila111 itthiJ11 va purisa111 va adhipacce -enti); Ja I
138,3 (ta111 phalita111 uddharitva p~imhi -eh! ti);
II 159,24 (kaha111 pana tumhe [hadaya111] -etha ti);
III 442,6* (sace pi kujjhami -emi attanaJ11); IV 406,24*
(cakkhiini ... hatthesu -ehi vanibbakassa, Be, E e, Se so,
unmetrical; read thapehi? Ce avesi; 406,28': imassa
yacakassa hatthesu -ehi); Ap 389,14 (iminodakam ahatva
padamiile -ehi me); Vibh 262,8 (tasmiJ11 akase citta111
-eti Sa!).thapeti); Mi1227,21 (cira111 rajakulavaJ11Sal11
-ayati dhammagu~abalena); Vism 4!9,1o (mariyada111
-enti); Sp 493,27 (cittaJ11 sama111 adahati aramma~e -en
ti samadhi); Sv 84,28 (ekaccesu kira janapadesu kalakate
ñatake na jhapenti nikha!).itva -enti); Spk II 245,10 (na
tehi vantavamana111 jivhagge -eyyan ti); Mhv 7:54
(gharadvaresu dhltaro -entu); Sadd 553,27 (opa thapa
thapane: . . . thapeti thapayati); part.pr.
(a) thapenta, mf( -ent!)n., Ja VI 543,13 (pasaritahatthe
sahassatthavikal11 -ento viya); Mi1241,21; Sp 912,9
(pathamaJ11 pada111 uddharitva tire -entiya
thullaccaya111); Sv 371,28 (tantidhammaJ11 -ento ); Mp I
194,26 (satthara111 eka111 manJussara111 bhikkhu111
etadagge -enta111 disva); - neg. a(Othapenta, mfn.,
Sp 781,22; It-a I 32,3o; (b) thapaya(t), mfn., Vism 286,14*
(nimitte -aya111 citta111); (e) thapayanta, mfn., Sv 526,8
(ima111 tanti111 -ayanto); (d) thapayamana, mfn., Ja I
383,32 (devi111 pijandhanani omuñcitva... samugga-
pitthesu -ayamana111 disva); Ps III 173,2; Spk III 155,12;
- aor. 3 sg. (a) thapesi, atthapesi, Vin II 191,18 (te nlce
thane -esi); III 67,12 (ayasma Pilindavaccho te darake
iddhiya anetva pasade -esi); IV 152,29 (sailgho ... ñatti111
-esi); Th 38 (yo iddhiya Sarabhu111 atthapesi); Ja I 223,21
(kakka¡aka111 sarapariyante pailkapitthe -esi); Ap 31,8
320 titthati
(aggatthane -esi ma111); Mhv 25:56 (-e si); (b) thapayi,
Ap 486,4 (patibhaneyyakanaggaJ11 tato ma111 -ay! jino);
3 pl. (a) thapeSUJ11, D II 337,27 (te ta111 sailkha111 ...
uddha111 -esuJ11); Ja IV 391,24 (tesa111 purato patiyo
-esuJ11); Sp !079,32; Sv 12,25 (ida111 pathama111 parajikan
ti -esuJ11); (b) thapayi111su, Ja III 287,18 (tassa hatthe
kahapa!).e -ayi111su); Spk I 86,20 (assa sabbakayika111
adasa111 purato -ayiJ11su); Mhv 19:22; 1 pl. thapimha,
MI 367,33 (anajanlye va samane ajanlyatthane -imha,
eds so); - 2. causes to stand still, to stop; places aside,
saves, puts by; sets aside; suspends; Vin I 170,21
(itthannamo puggalo sapattiko tassa pavara!).al11 -emi na
tasmiJ11 sammukhibhiite pavaretabban ti); II 241,2 (tassa
patimokkha111 -emi); 262,34 (anujanami bhikkhave
ovada111 -etun ti); DI 120,33 (imesa111 hi bho Gotama
pañcanna111 ailgana111 Va!).~aJ11 -ayama); A I 197,30
(thapanlyal11 pañha111 -eti); Mil377,23 (nava111 laggeti
-eti na deti disavidisa111 harituJ11, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
1aketi); Sv 951,36 (nidhapeyya ti catuttha111 kotthasal11
nidhapetva -eyya); Mp I 168,8 (kasma bhante
sa111haritva -etha ti anuvato na ppahotl ti); Dhp-a II
190,9 (-etha tava yanaka111 otaritva agamissaml ti); -
part.pr. ¡hapenta, mf( -enti)n., V in II 276,1o (-en ti ya
apatti dukkatassa); V 193,27; Sp !077 ,22; - aor.
3 sg. thapesi, J a I 127,27 (devl vara111 icchitakale
gahetabbaJ11 katva -esi); Vism 337,26 (sama!).ero kira
telena patta111 makkhetva -esi); 3 pl. (a) thapesUJ11, Ja V
442,2 (ciijiima!).iputal11 punadivasatthaya -esu111);
(b) thapayiJ11sU, J a I 285,13 (ekasmi111 brahma!).akule
puttassa jatadivase aggi111 gahetva anibbayanta111
-ayiJ11su); III 271,21 (miga vara111 -ayiJ11su);
(e) thapayuJ11, Mhv 32:66 (bhikkhavo sajjhaya111
-ayuJ11); 1 pl. thapayimha, Ja I 285,15; Sp 353,25; -
absol. l. making stand; placing; setting; (a) thapetva,
Vin I 276,1o (bhariya111 purato -etva); D III 194,7
(catuddisa111 rakkhaJ11 -etva); A I 277,14 (udaka111 -etva
padana111 dhovanaya); Dhp 40 (nagariipama111 cittam
ida111 -etva); Ja I 62,16 (Rahulamata... puttassa
matthake hatthaJ11 -etva niddayati); Nidd I 303,11 (attano
vadaJ11 uddhaJ11 -etva); Mil 3,11 (sammuñjanisalaya
sammuñjaniJ11 -etva); Vism 63,31 (Yal11 bhikkhuno hatthe
-etva dinnaJ11); Mhv 3:27 (-etvanandatherass a
anucchavikaJ11 asanaJ11); - neg. athapetva, atthapetva,
Ja VI 365,13 (tucchapatiJTl hatthe athapetva); Sp 1398,17
(ñattiJ11 aghapetva); (b)thapetvana, Ja VI 61,25* (putta111
rajje -etvana); Mhv 36:44; (e) thapayitva, Ja VI 61,24*
(-ayitva paticchadaJ11) quoted Sadd 553,27 (thapayitva);
Ap 157,9 (-ayitva ka111sapati111); (d) thapayitvana,
Ap 53,2 (ta111 kathaJ11 -ayitvana); Mhv 19:31; -
2. stopping; setting aside; leaving out; except; save for;
(a) thapetva, Vin I 109,33 (-etva gama111 ca
gamupacara111 ca); D I !05,27 (addasa .. . dvatti111sa
mahapurisalakkha~ani yebhuyyena -etva dve); Thl341
(jatariiparajata111 -etva, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce
cha<;ldetva); Ja I 294,14 (tumhe -etva aññassa purisassa
hatthasamphassa111 na janaml ti); IV 142,5 (-etva ma111
añño etesa111 sotthibhava111 katu111 samattho nama
n' atthi); Ap 24,1 (-etva jinasasana111); Kv 548,7 (-etva
ariyamagga111 avasesa sailkhara dukkha ti); Mil207,27
(eka111 -etva thera111 Ananda111): Vism 111,8 (-etva
titthana
kayagatasati111 ca anapanassati111 ca avasesa agha
anussatiyo); Vv-a 63,24 (Pu~;t~;to ther~ disva va kasi111
-etva pañcapatighitena ther~ vanditva); 100,3 (tattha
sabbe jana mata -etva eka111 itthi111); - neg. at~apetva,
Mhv25:115; (b)thapetvana, Ap26,9 (-etvana
mahamuni111); Vism 234,1*; (e) thapayitva, DI 120,28
(imesa111 pana brahmaJ:ta pañcann~ ailgiin~ sakka
ek~ ailga111 -ayitva catuhi ailgehi samannagata111
brahma~;t~ paññapetu111); Th 1087; Bv 2:103 (sabbe
deva padissanti -ayitva arüpino, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -etva
ca); Cp 1:1:2 (atltakappe carita111 -itva bhavabhave
imamhi kappe carita111 pavakkhiss~; Cp-a 20,14:
-ayitva ti muñcitva agahetva, avatva ti attho);
Vism 271,17 (kammaghanabhimukha111 sati111 -ayitva);
Mhv 34:72; (d) ~apayitvana, Ap 305,2 (na kiñci
-ayitvana); - pass. pr. 3 sg. thaplyati, thapiyyati,
Vin I1I 237,4 (tato ayasmato Upanandassa Sakyaputtassa
pativiso -iyyati, Be, Ee so; Ce -Iyati; Se thapito hoti);
Vism 485,9 (dhiyati -Iyatl ti); part.pr.
thaplyamana, mfn., Ap 23,9 (lakkhe -Iyamanamhi);
Vism 126,19 (daharo kumarako ukkhipitva -iyamiino
punappuna111 bhümiya111 patati); PsI 148,7 (attan~
garutthane -iyamana111 pattheti); pp ~apita,
thapita, mfn., l. made to stand, placed, fixed; set up;
deposited; appointed; ordained; Vin III 52,5
(suilkaghata111 nama rañña -ita111 hoti pabbatakha~;t<;ie);
D II 232,16 (pettike thane -ito); M III 95,13
(udakama~;tiko ... adhare -ito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee thito);
Vv 35:3 (akase -ita111); Ja I 257,13 (tehi ajja di vaso -ito);
II 13,15 (kena me ~se hattho -ito ti); IV 452,r (yoniso
-itena cittena); VI 527,5 (arakkhatthaya -ito Cetaputto);
Ap 465,10 (-ito etadagge); Mil293,18 (pubbakehi
maharaja khattiyehi -ito eso niyamo ); Spk I 92,6
(pariyosanagatha sailgitikarehi -ita ti); Mhv 17: 17;
Sadd 553,27 (thapito); - neg. aghapita, athapita, mfn.,
Vin I 110,36; Mil259,z6; Sp 213,12; - dughapita, mfn.,
badly placed or deposited; Sp 365,16;- sughapita, mfn.,
well fixed, well established; Sv 887,7; Ps III 224,19; -
2. set asid e; suspended; Vin 1 170,22 (-ita hoti pavaraJ:ta
ti); II 276,1o (-ito pi athapito); MI 426,11 (yiin' imani
dit~igatani bhagavata avyakatani -itani patikkhittani);
Sp 1287,21joll.; - ifc see ovada-; - neg. aghapita,
athapita, mfn., Vin 1 170,32 (eva111 bho bhikkhave -ita
hoti pavara~;ta ev~ at~apita); Sp 1287,22 (pure va
paccha va thapit~ pi arhapit~ pi hoti); -
fpp (a) ~apetabba, mfn., to be placed; to be fixed; to be
suspended; Vin I 9,3 (asana111 -etabb~); 170,18 (eva111
ca pana bhikkhave [pavara~;ta] -etabba); Jai 10,1·
(-etabbataya); Mil 378,2 (sañrayapanamattake yeva
citt~ -etabba111); Vism 278,23 (gaJ:tentena ca
pañcann~ hegha na -etabba111 dasann~ upari na
netabba111); (b) thapaniya, mfn., to be set aside; D III
229.22 (cattaro pañhavyakara~;ta eka111savyakaraJ:tiyo
pañho ... -aniyo pañho); A I 197,24 (-aniya111 pañh~
na ~apeti); Ap 304,23 (-aniyo mahavlro); Mi1145,19
'bhagava maharaja therassa Maluilkyaputtassa t~
-aniyam pañha111 na vyakasi); Sv 497,2 (-aniyatta
pañhassa tu~;thi bhavitabba111 hoti); 567,31 (esa pañho na
\-yakatabbo aya111 -anlyo pañho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
omits):- caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) thapeti, -ayati, A II 46,12*
321 tiJ}a
(tatiy~ patipuccheyya catutth~ pana thapaye); Sn 112
(itthiso~;t<;iil11
. . . issariyasmi111 -eti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
thapeti); Ja VI 297,17* (dase ... dakkhe ut~anasampanne
adhipaccasmi thapaye); aor. 1 sg. ~apayi111,
Ap 582,11 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se thapayi111);
(e) thapapeti, -ayati, Sp 1371,13 (tanti111 -essami ti, Se
so; Be, Ce, E e thapessami ti); Ps V 51,2 (citt~ -eyya);
Dhp-a I 43,2 (na111 ... udake -eh! ti); Cp-a 307,31 (bheri-
adini ~apeti -eti ca); - aor. 3 sg. (a) thapapesi, Ja I
54,1 (sahassatthavika111 -esi); Ps III 67 ,2o; Mhv 34:73;
(b) thapapayi, Mhv 19:69; 3 pl. thapapesu111, Ps III 19,5;
- absol. (a) thapapetva, Ja 1 383,3 (paticchannaghane
mahacatil11 -etva); Vism 674,29; Sv 972,10 (puJ:tJ:taghate
ca kadaliyo ca -etva); Dhp-a II 191,13 (tassa abharaJ:tiini
omuñcapetva ekamante -etva); Mhv 25:99;
(b) thapapetvana, Mhv 19:8; (e) ~apapiya, Mhv 27:21;
28:22; - pp thapapita, mfn., Mhv 27:5; - see also
sutit~are.
titthana, n., -a,f [from tighati], standing; taking a place;
remaining; Ja II 203,6· (id~ coran~ 0 -ghanam);
III 354,29" (esa kayailga111 vacailg~ akopetva bhikkhaya
-a ariyana111 yacana nama, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tighamana);
Sp 1313,26 (upassuti111 -a111 ca, Se so; Be, Ee upassuti-
tighanal11; Ce omits); Mp II 101,15 (digha111 addhana111
o• -atthaya); atitthana, n., not standing; not
remaining; Sv 390,23 (addhana111 -ato); Ps II 298,18.
titthanaka, mfn. [tighana + ka2], who stands; wholwhich
remains; Ps III 338,6 (yava kappa 0 -patihariyal11 kir'
eta111); Spk II 159,2o (paripanthaka ti paripanthe -a
panthaghatacora).
titthana, see sv tit~ana.
titthabhadantika, titthabhaddantika, m. [tigha (imperat.
of titthati) + bhadante + ika], one who stops and waits
(for a donar when begging); DI 166,3 (acelako hoti
muttacaro ... na ehibhadantiko na -o ... , Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be na-ehibhaddantiko natirthabhaddantiko; Sv 354,23:
bhikkhagaha~;tattha111 ehi bhante ti vutte na etl ti na
ehibhadantiko, tena hi tigha bhante ti vutte pi na tighati
ti na -o, Ce, Ee so; Be tit~a bhante ti vutto pi ...
natighabhaddantiko; Se tit~a bhaddante ti vutto pi ... na
tighabhaddantiko) f- MI 77,29 (na -o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
natit~abhaddantiko) f- A 1 295,10 (na -o, eds so);
Sadd 788,8 (tena hi tigha bhadanta ti vutte pi na tit~ati ti
na -o);- see also ehibhadantika.
titthayatanaip in Ee, Se at Sp 913,22 is wr for
titthayatana111 (Be, Ce so).
til).a, n. [S. tJ1.1a], grass; any gramineous plant; a blade of
grass; hay, straw (often as a symbol of worthlessness);
thatch; Vin III 212,14 (kath~ hi nama bhikkhii nagga
agacchissanti nanu nama -ena va PaJ:t~;tena va
paticchadetva agantabban ti); DI 148,4 (satta ca
urabbhasatani muncapemi . . . haritani e' eva -an1
khadantu sitani ca paniyani pivantu); M II 53,19 (n' atthi
kho bhante Ghatlkarassa kumbhakarassa nivesane -a111
atthi ca khvassa avesana111 °-cchadanan ti); A I 182,12
(-ani va pa~;t~;tiini va ... ekajjh~ s~aritva nisidami);
Th 232 (yo ca sit~ ca u~;th~ ca -a bhiyyo na maññati;
Th-a II 92,7: -ato upari na maññati -~ viya maññati);
1137 (vughamhi deve caturailgule -e); Jaii 251,24 (assa
gamanagamana111 karontass' eva cha divasa atikkanta,
til}a
-ani matani jari.ghamaggo nibbatti); III 117,1 (ca~iyo
-assa pürapetva); IV 284,13* ( -am iva vanam iva
milayami, so read with L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 271? Be
milayami; Ce, Ee miyyami; Se -am iva milayami);
VI 40,16 (tumhe -aya pi na gai.J.hati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
tumhakffi11 vacana111 -a111 viya na gai.J.etl ti); Ap 198,2
(ya111 dayavasiko isi -a111layati); Cp 1:10:8 (aha111 -ena
yapemi); Mi147,1s (pad!po jhayamano -a!1l jhapeyya
-a111 jhayamana111 gharaJ11 jhapeyya); Vism 216,31 (-ehi
va pai.J.I.J.ehi va pa~icchadetabbam eva); Sp 1243,4foll.
(-an ti muñja111 ca pabbaja111 ca ~hapetva avasesa111 ya111
kiñci -a111); Dhp-a III 338,16 (c!varakai.J.I.J.O -esu
pavagento ussavabindühi temi); Ud-a 24,31 (yasa111 -aya
pi amaññamano); Pj II 148,18 (sassadüsakana111 -ana111):
Sadd 507,6 foll. ( -an ti yavasa111 ta111 hi tii.J.!yate
tii.J.abhakkhehi goi.J.adlhi adlyate khad!yate ti -a111):- ifc
se e kui.J.~ha-, dabba- (sv dabba2), nlca-; - o' -al!c:Jüpaka,
o• -al!c:}.upaka, n., a roll or head-pad of grass; V in III
249,36 (hand' imaJ11 -a!1l tassa darikaya sise patimuñca
ti; Sp 709,25: -an ti o -cumbataka111); Sp 542,12
(matugamassa . . . -a111 . . . anamasam eva);
o• -avatthiiraka, m. [cf BHS tp:1aprastaraka], "a covering
of grass", one of the seven adhikarai.J.asamathas
(methods of settling a case or dispute); Vin II 87,5
(anujanami bhikkhave evarüpa111 adhikarai.J.al11 -ena
vüpasametum; Sp 1193,3o foll.: ta111 imina kammena
vüpasanta111 güthffi11 viya -ena pa~icchanna111
suvüpasantaJ11 hoti ti ida111 kammaJ11 --sadisatta -o ti
vuttffi11); IV 207,5 (uppannuppannanaJ11 adhikarai.J.iinffi11
samathaya vüpasamaya sammukhavinayo databbo ... -o
ti) f. D III 254,14; M II 250,1 (katha111 e' Ananda -o
hoti); - 0 -m-iisi(n), m(fn)., one who eats grass; Ja VI
354,9* (-i palasamasi mei.J.<;io);- 0 '-ukkii,f, a torch of
hay or straw; S IV 185,1s (puriso adittaya -aya
upasailkameyya); Th! 507 (ad!pita -a gai.J.hantal11 dahati
n' eva muñcantaJ11); Ja I 212,3o (udake -a viya
nibbayati); Vism 428,31 (-a111 cha<;l<;letva divasa111 pi
gamanaJ11); - 0
-katfhapal!l!asata, 0 -kaghapai.J.I.J.aka-
sata, m., rubbish of (dead) grass, twigs and leaves;
V in III 177 ,2o (mahavato vayanto -a111 ekato ussareyya,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -kaghapai.J.I.J.akasa~al11; Sp 6l2,11: -an
0
ti tattha tattha patita111 tii.J.akaghapai.J.I.J.al11, atha va tii.J.al11
ca nissaraka111 lahuka111 kagha111 ca tii.J.akaghal11 pai.J.I.J.a-
sa~an ti purai.J.apai.J.I.J.al11); Pv-a 256,17 ( -kaghapai.J.I.J.ak-
0
0
asatal11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -kaghapai.J.I.J.akasalal11);-
0
-karaJa, 0 -karala, n., a handful of grass; Dhp-a IIl
38,11 (eka111 -a111 ughahitva jalamanaJ11); As 272,32
(pajjalita111 -aJ11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pajjalitatii.J.akan4aJ11);
0
- -kiijaka,m., a load ofgrass; Dhp-aiV 121,8 (-a111
cha<;I<;!etva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se 0 -kajaJ11); - 0 -gahana,
0
-gahai.J.a, mfn. and n. [tii.J.a + gahana2], l. (mfn.)
overgrown with grass; Vin II 138,19 (vihara -a); -
2. (n.) a place dense with grass; a clump of grass or hay;
D lll 73,15 (-a vanagahana ... nikkhamitva); A I 153,33
(mahacoro -a111 va nissito); JaV 46,17; Mi1369,11;
Dhp-a I 225,4 (ta111 -a111 disva tii.J.arasl ti saññaya); Pj II
127,1 (-ani pavigha); - 0 -dala, n., a blade of grass;
Ap-a 324,35 (ta111 -am iva pariccajitva, Be, Se so; Ce
0
-lavam; Ee 0 -latamiva);- 0 -parighiisa, m., remains of
grass; (or grass and leavings; ?) Ja II 289,15* (bhutva
322
-a111; 289,17·: -an ti tvffi11 pub be... tesa111 tesa111
khaditavasesa111 --sari.khatffi11 vighasatii.J.aJ11 bhuñjitva
va<;l<;lhito, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be vighasatii.J.asari.khatal11
parighasa111 bhuñjitva); - 0 -pupphakaroga, m., hay-
fever; Mi1216,26 (-e uppanne) f. Th-a II 88,1 =
Ap-a 482,s; Ps IV 196,2 (-o uppajjati, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
o -pupphika-); - o -purisaka, o -purisa, m., a figure made
of straw; A IV 423,11 (issaso ... -e va mattikapuñje va
yoggaJ11 karitva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -purisarüpake;
Mp IV 197,4: -e va ti potthakarüpe va, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
o -purisarüpake va ti o -potthakarüpe va); Mil 352,27 (in
long cpd); Vism 462,9 (-es u migapotakana111 purisa ti
0
uppannasañña); - -bhakkha, mfn., (one) who eats
grass; DI l66,22; M III 167,21 (tiracchanagata piii.J.a -a);
Ja VI 354,5* (-o ma111sabhojano ca); - 0 -bhisi,f, a
cushion or bolster stuffed with grass; Vin IV 40,w;
Sp 1218,21 (ya111 kiñci tii.J.al11 pakkhipitva kata -i, Be, Ce
0
so; Ee, Se -!); - -bhusa, n., chaff; dry grass;
Vv-a 47,25; - 0 -m-iisi(n), see above; - 0 -miga, m., a
kind of deer; Pj II 82,25 (dve miga -o pasadamigo ca, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be ei.J.Imigo); - 0 -mutthi, m.f, a handful of
grass; Ja I 70,32 (Sotthiyo nama tii.J.aharako ...
mahapurisassa akara111 ñatva agha -iyo adasi); Ap 280,26
(-iy' idaJ11 phala111. Be, Se so; Ce -iss'; Ee -e)= 455,4
(Ce -imh': Be, Ee, Se -e, gen. ?); Sp 785,26 (kara!e ti
0
-iya111); - -riijarukkha, m., a kind of palm-tree;
Sadd 563,22 (talo ti -o); - 0
-liiyana, 0 -liivana, n.,
0
cutting grass; Ps III 429,1 ( -layana-asitaJ11); Th-a II
66,12 (0 -lavanattha111 araññffi11 gato);- 0 -vatti,f, a twist
or rol! of grass; Ja IIl 366,2o (loi.J.al11 . . . atireka111
Pai.J.I.J.apu~e bandhitva ... --antare ~hapesi, Ce, E e so; Be,
Se tii.J.avaWka- ); Sv 749,12 (paharai.J.amukhani -iya
pürapetva): - 0 -santhara, 0 -santhara, m., a !ayer of
grass as a bed or mat; V in IV 41,28 (seyyaJ11 nama bhisi
0
cimilika ... -santharo Pai.J.I.J.asantharo; Sp 777,11:
o -santharo ti yesam kesañci tii.J.iinffi11 santharo ); Ja VI
510,13* (sayanta -e, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee 0 -santhare); Pa~is I
176,18 (-o, Be so; Ce, Ee 0 -santharo; Se -Sai.J.~haro); 0
Ap 97,11 (-aJ11 paññapetva); Mil366,1 (yogina ... -e pi
pai.J.I.J.asanthare pi ... yattha katthaci sayitabba111, Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se 0 -santhare); Sp 1168,2 (pakatatte bhümiya111
msmne itarena antamaso -e pi uccatare . . . na
nislditabbffi11, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce 0 -santhare); Spk II 286,26
(agha tii.J.amughiyo gahetva ... -a!1l santharitva, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee 0 -santharaJ11) = Mp III 70,7 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-santhara111; f. Bv-a 177,33: Ce, Ee 0 -santharaka111
paññapetva; Be, Se 0 -santharakaJ11); - 0 -santharaka,
0
-santharaka, m., a !ayer of grass as a bed or mat; Vin I
24,33 (bhagava agyagi'irffi11 pavisitva -a111 paññapetva
nisldi, Ce, E e, Se so; Be o -santharakaJ11) f. IV 109,3 (eds
0
-SantharakaJ11); I 286,24 (chamaya . . . ciVarffi11
pffi11sukitaJ11 hoti ... anujanami bhikkhave -an ti, -o
upacikahi khajjati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se 0 -santharakan ti,
0
-santharako); M 1 502,5 (addasa. .. agyagare -a111
paññatta111, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be 0 -santharaka111); A IV 256,5
(arahanto ... nlcaseyyaJ11 kappenti mañcake va -e va, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee 0 -santharake); Ja I 360,14 (tassa
nagarajassa vasanaghane -a!1l paññapetva, Ee so; Be, Ce
o -santharaka111: Se o -sai.J.~haraka111); Ap 325,22 (imina
madhudanena 0 -santharakena ca); Vism 78,2o (sukhffi11
 tÍI}ava
seti -esu pi); Spk II 241,23 (so ca tatth' eva
0
-santharakaJTI pattharitva nipajji, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
0
-santharikaJTI); Mp IV 121,16 (-o ti tii¡.ehi va pm,u:¡.ehi va
bhiimiyal!l va phalakapasal)atalanal!l va aññatarasmiJTI
santhatasanthato, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be 0 -santharako ti);
Ud-a 230,7 (bhikkhuno senasanaJTI papul)ati ... antamaso
til)akutika pi 0 -santharakaJTI pi); Pj 1197,16 (kumaro vara-
sayanadlsu kataparicayo -e rajjumañcake va sayamano
rodati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -santharake va); 543,28
(avyakulo o -santharako, kamabhibhuna sattena
paribhutto ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -santharo n' eso kama-
bhogino paribhutto ti);- 0 -siha, m., a kind of animal;
Ja 11 8,22' (cattaro slha -o pal)<o~uslho ka]aslho suratta-
hatthapado kesaraslho ti); Spk 11 283,14 (-o kapota-
val)l)agavlsadiso til)abhakkho ca hoti);- 0 -süla, m.n., a
kind of jasmine; SAF: Arabian jasmine, Jasminum
sambac (L.) R.Bf; its flower; Abh 574 (-al!l tu mallika);
Ap 179,4 (-e gahetvana buddhassa abhiropayim); 346,1
(--vanani);- 0 -sülika, m., id.? Ap !6,1 (ketaka kandall
e' eva godhuka -a; Ap-a 214,18: --gaccha);
0
-harpsa, m. [til)a + haJTlsa 1], a kind of goose; Ja V
356,23 (-a ... pal)9uhaJTlsa ... ); - 0
-haral}a, n., the
remo val of thatch; Mil 224,6 ([GhatJkaro] tena -ena ...
pltÍJTI pati1abhi); - 0 -hara, m., fetching grass or hay;
Ap 379,22 (ahosiJTI 0 -harako -ena jlvami);
0
-haraka, m., one who fetches (cuts and sells) grass or
hay; MI 79,2; Jai 121,18 (-e aha ajja mayhaJTI ekekal!l
til)aka1ap~ detha maya ca til)e avikklte attano tii¡.aJTI ma
vikkil)atha ti); III 129,26 (eko -o asit~ e' eva kajaJTI ca
til)abandhanarajjuJTI ca ... cha9detva); Ap 379,21; -
0
-hari,f, (one) who fetches grass or hay; Vin III 41,12
(-iyo kanhahariyo til)akutik~ bhinditva til)aJTI ca
katthaJTI ca adaya agam~su); - nittil}a, mfn., bare of
grass; Ja 111 23,18 (pa1asarukkhassa mü1aJTI sama~!~ -al!l
katva); Ps 11 260,25 (mahata hi gogm¡.ena cil)l)aghanaJTI
bherital~ vi ya suddh~ hoti -~); Spk I 281,1
(hatthinaga ... nakhehi cailkamanam -aJTI katva, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee omits); - see also uttil)a, kul)thatil)aka
(sv kul)tha), dabbatil)aka (sv dabba2).
til}ava, m. [cf BHS tul)ava], a kind of drum; Abh 143 (-o
tu ca del)9imo); All 117,6 (in long cpd; Mpllll2l,ls:
-o ti del)9imo).
til}ira, m. [cf tul)hlra, tül)lra], a quiver; ? Sadd 922,11
(tul)iro -o ... val)l)abhedo 'yaJTI).
tll}oti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup trooti, tafl)oti, Wg § 30:6], eats;
Sadd 507,6 (til)U adane: -oti til)aJTI); -pass. pr. 3 sg.
ti!)!yate, Sadd 507,7 (-!yate til)abhakkhehi gol)adlhi
adlyate khadlyate ti til)aJTI).
tll}f;luka, see sv tinduka.
tÍJ}I}a, mfn., pp oftarati 1 qv.
tÍJ}I}arp, til)l)annaJTI, pl. gen. m.n. ofti 2 qv.
tÍJ}I}iivi(n), mfn., part.perfact. oftarati 1 qv.
tll}ha, mfn. [S. t!k~l)a], l. sharp; V in IIl 69,9 ( -al!l asiJTI
adaya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tikkhaJTI); DI 56.32 (yo pi -ena
satthena sls~ chindati); MI 233,16 (puriso saratthiko ...
-al!l kutharim adaya vanaJTI paviseyya); S IV 169,1
(-en a nakhacchedane na adittena); Sn 673 (asipatta-
vanaJTI pana -~ taJTI pavisanti); Ja I 432,2 (-al!l
kuthariJTI ukkhipitva); V 273,27' (-ehi ayasülehi, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee tikhil)ehi); Milll2,23 (-en a km¡.takena va
323 titikkhi(n)
satthamukhena va samantato chinditva, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
tikkhena); Ps 11 59,21 (-ahi vaslhi); Cp-a 136,28 (-aya pi
nisitaya sattiya); Saddh 381; Sadd 504,12joll. (-o parasu,
titikkhan ti -o); - 2. pungent; Mil 172,z (-ani
lekhanlyani bhesajjani); - 0 -dhara, mfn. rJrom til)ha +
dhara2], sharp-edged; Sn 667 (-~ ayasülam upeti); -
0
-pha1a, mfn. [til)ha + phala2], with a sharp blade; S 11
265,3 (satti -a);- see also tikkha, tikhil)a.
titikkhati, pr. 3 sg. [desid. of tejati qv; S. titik~ate],
l. bears, endures patiently; puts up with; SI 221,24*
(bhaya nu maghava Sakka dubba1ya no -asi sul)anto
pharusal!l vac~ sammukha Vepacittino); Dhp 399
(akkos~ vadhabandhaJTI ca aduttho yo -ati); Ja 11
386,s• (kaJTI attham abhisandhaya . . . im~ dukkh~
-asi; 386,1w: -as! ti adhivasesi); III 524,23* (sutitikkhaJTI
araññamhi pantamhi sayanasane ye ca game -anti te
u]aratara taya; 524,24·: -antl ti sltadlni adhivasenti);
V 81,19* (dasabhüto -ati); Sadd 346,13 (tija nisane
khamayal!l ca: .. . tejati -a ti); 822,1 O (tija khantiyal!l
kho: -ati); - fut. 1 sg. titikkhiss~ 1 , Dhp 320 (ati-
vaky~ -issaJTI; Dhp-a IV 3,1s: sahissaml ti attho); -
aor. 1 sg. (a) titikkhaJTI, titikkhiJTI, Ja V 173,3* (etadisal!l
dukkham ah~ -al!l uposath~ appatikopayanto, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -im) = Vism 304,31* (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
-iJTI); (b) titikkhi~aJTI, titikkhissaJTI2, Ja V 309,3* (tava
kama hi sussol)i bahu dukkhaJTI -isaJTI, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
-issaJTI; 309,s·: -isan ti adhivasemi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
-issan ti); - inf titikkhituJTI, Ja V 141,27* (sakka hi
dvinnal!l vacan~ -ituJTI); - 2. is sharp; ? Sadd 504,12
(tija ni sane: ... -atl ti til)hO ).
titikkha, f [S. titik~a], endurance, longsuffering,
forbearance; Abh 161 (-a khanti khamanaJTI); S I 221 ,32*
(etad eva -aya vajjaJTI passami Vasava); Dhp 184
(khantl paramal!l tapo -a); Ja V 83,7* (hiriya -aya
damena khantiya);- titikkhaya in Ee at Patis-a 505,2 is
wr for atitikkhaya (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0
-camma-
sannaha, mfn., armed with the shield of forbearance;
S V 6,14* (avyapado avihiJTlsa viveko yassa avudh~ -o
yogakkhemaya vattati, Be so; Ce titikkha camma-
sannaho; Ee, Se titikkha dhammasannah o; Spk III 122,19:
titikkha ti duruttanal!l duragatan~ vacanapathanaJTI
adhivasanakkhanti, cammasannaho ti sannaddhacammo,
yatha hi rathe thito rathiko patimukkacam mo agatagate
sare khamati . . . eval!l adhivasanakkh antisamannaga to
bhikkhu agatagate vacanapathe khamati ... tasma -o ti
vutto, Be, Ce, Se so; E e titikkha cammasannaho ti vutta);
-
0
-Va(t), mfn., patient: Abh 732 (0 -va ca khantima);-
duttitikkha, mfn., hard to endure; S I 7,13* (dukkaral!l
-~ ca avyattena ca samaññaJTI: Spk I 36,1o: -an ti
dukkham~ du-adhivasiy~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
du adhivasanaJTI); duttitikkha,f . a difficult
forbearance; forbearance is hard; Ud-a 262,3o (khanti-
ba1asamannagatassa dh!rassa -a nama n' atthl ti); -
sutitikkha, (mj)n., endurance, forbearance (is) easy;
Ja III 524,22* (-aJTI araññamhi pantamhi sayanasane;
524,z4·: -an ti sunhu adhivasanam, Be, Se so: Ce sunhu
adhivasaJTI; Ee su-adhivasaJTI).
titikkhi(n), mfn. rJrom titikkhati or titikkha; cfS. titik~u],
forbearing; Jaiii 148,11* (sussüsl ca -1 ca; 148,19·: -1 ti
yo ca taya kat~ aparadh~ khamati).
titta
titta 1, mfn. and m. [S. tikta], bitter; a bitter taste,
bittemess; Abh 148; Sv 432,20 (madhurato
0
madhurarasaq¡ yeva -ato -rasaq¡ yeva phalarp hoti);-
0
-alabu, m.f, the bitter bottle-gourd; Sv 801,15 =
Vibh-a 113,26; Vibh-a 113,23 (--vallirp disva, Be, Ee so;
Ce tittakalabuvallirp; Se tittaq¡ alabuvallirp disva); -
0
-kappa, m., like bitterness; pure bitterness; ? Nidd 11
129,16 (yatha atiloiJarp vuccati loiJakappo atitittakarp
vuccati -o ... ati-uiJhaq¡ vuccati aggikappo ... , Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se tittikappo) = Ap-a 133,35 (Be, Se so; Ee
atitittarp; Ce atittaq¡ vuccati tittakakappo );
atititta, mfn., very bitter, too bitter; Pj 11 59,4
(naccul)harp kiñci ajjhohariturp labhati natisltarp ...
natikatukaq¡ natitittarp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se natitittakaq¡).
titta 2 , mfn., pp oftappati 2 qv.
tittaka, tittika 1, mfn., n., and m. [S. tiktaka], l. (mfn.)
sharp, bitter; (n.) a bitter thing; bitterness; S III 87,19
(ambilarp pi vijanati -arp pi vijanati); A I 32,15
( -ttaya ... sarpvattati) t Pa!is I 141,1 ( -taya); Vv 47:4
0 0
(kosatakl nama lat' atthi bhante tittika anabhijjhita, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce kittlta); Ja II 105,20 (madhuraphalo ambo
-o jato nimbapal)IJasadisaraso ); III 111,13 (narp nlrasan ti
saha khejena chat;l<;letva -arp bhante ti aha, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se tittikarp); 319,11 (-arp haretva ambilaq¡
anlharitva); 320,1· (-assa anapanltatta); Niddl 240,4
(raso ti mülaraso . . . madhurarp -aq¡ katukarp ...
kasavo ... , Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tittikaq¡) t Dhs 629 (eds
-aq¡; As 320,19: -an ti nimbapal).l).adi); Sv 213,2o (-arp
-an ti uggirati yeva); Mil56,11 (janeyya ... -ttaq¡ va
0
katukattarp va ... ) t 63,24 (Be, Ce so; Ee tittattarp; Se
tittakarp); - 2. (m.) a plant; SAF: serpent cucumber,
wild snake gourd, Trichosanthes dioica Roxb.; Abh 595
(patolo -o); - 0
'-agga, mfn., with the bitter taste
predominant; S V 149,29 (süpehi ... -ehi pi); Th 733;
Sp 173,10 (-arp, Be, Ce so; E e tittaggarp; Se
tittikaggarp); - 0
alabu, -labu, m., the bitter bottle-
0
gourd; M I 80,22 (-u amakacchinno vatatapena
samphutito hoti sammilato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tittikalabu;
Ps II 376,26: -ü ti tittako alabu, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -rasa-
0
alabu); Ps III 207,4 (-u, Be so; Ce tittakalabu; E e
tittikalabu; Se tittika labu); Pv-a 47,2 (slsarp tassa
tittakalabusadisaq¡ ahosi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
tintakalabu-); - atittaka, atittika, mfn., (what is) not
bitter; Nidd I 240,1t (tittakarp labhitva -arp pariyesanti
-aq¡ labhitva tittakarp pariyesanti, Be, Ce so; Ee tittikaq¡
labhitva atittikaq¡ pariyesanti ... ; Se tittikaq¡ ...
atittikaq¡ .. . atittikarp .. . tittikaq¡ ... ); Patis-a 443,33
(pathavlraso aporaso ca -o samano pi); - atitittaka,
atitittika, mfn., very bitter; too bitter; Nidd 11 129,16
(-arp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se atitittikaq¡); Pj II 59,4
(naccul)haq¡ kiñci ajjhohariturp labhati natisltaq¡ ...
natikatukam natitittakam, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee natitittam).
titti\ f . [S. trrti], satisfa~tion; contentment; Abh 46S (-i
tappanaq¡); A I 261,9 (tÍIJIJaql bhikkbave patisevanaya
n' atthi -i); 279,26* (nahaq¡ bhagavato dassanassa -irp
ajjhaga kudacanarp); Dhp 186 (na kahapal)avassena -i
kamesu vijjati); Thl 487 (na e' atthi -i kamanaq¡ atitta
va maranti nara); Ja IV 172,23* (te ve titta ye paññaya
titta, paññaya -inaq¡ setthaq¡ na so kamehi tappati, Be,
Ee so; read -i naq¡? Ce, Se -lnaq¡; 174,5·: paññaya
324 tittha
-lnaq¡ ayarp paripUIJIJasettho, ayam eva va patho, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee paññaya ayarp tittinarp paripüritarp
settharp); Ap 533,2o (cittaq¡ mamaq¡ ... pappuyya tarp
dhammarasena -irp); Spk I 316,9 (imaq¡ hi dhammaq¡
pal).gita vassasatarp pi SUIJanta -irp na gacchanti); II 31,26
(imassa bahurp pucchantassa pi -i n' atthi); Dhp-a III
360,21 (idani pi 'ssa niddaya -in' atthi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
idani pi so niddayati); Bv-a 149,36 (bodhisattanarp
danarp nissaya -i nama n' atthi); Sadd 449,23 (tisa
-iyarp: -i tappanarp paripUIJI).ata suhitata); - atitti,f,
lack of satisfaction; not being content; Vv-a 242,19
(satthu payirupasane dhammassavane ca -im eva
d!pento); Cp-a 215,2o (matapitu upatthanena -i); -
--ma(t), mfn., not satisfied, not contented; Cp-a 79,26
(attano yathabhütaq¡ sabhavaq¡ --marp yathajjhasayarp
cintayantassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee akittimaq¡).
titti2 , ifc see sama- (sv sama\
tittika\ see sv tittaka.
tittika2 , ifc see sama- (sv sama\
tittira, m., -a, f, {S. tittira], a partridge; Abh 625; V in II
l6l,2o (-o ca makkato ca hatthinago ca) t Jal 218,19;
Ja 11 308,14 (yasmirp vammikapade nislditva so -o
manaparp vassati); III 65,2 (so siikul).iko bahuke -e
gahetva); VI 538,1o* (kapiñjara -ayo; 538,30': kapiñjara
ca -a ca); Mil201 ,18 (tada bodhisatto sakUIJO ahosi -o
mantajjhayl); Mp II 30,25 (ekarp -arp pacapetva);
Mhv 5:264 (thero bodhesi rajanarp vatva -jatakaq¡); -
0
0
-pattika, mfn. ffrom tittira + patta2], "like partridge
feathers" (of a kind of shoe); Vin I !86,11 (chabbaggiya
bhikkbü ... -a upahanayo dharenti; Sp 1084,11: tittira-
pattasadisa vicittabaddha, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se vicitta-
vaddha).
tittiriya, mfn. and m. [cf S. tittiri, taittiñya, taittirya],
belonging to a partridge; the name of a class of
brahmans; Vin II 162,9 (tittiro makkatarp ca hatthinagarp
ca pañcasu sllesu samadapesi . . . etarp kho bhikkhave
-arp nama brahmacariyarp ahosi); D 1 237,11 (addhariya
brahmaiJa -a brahmal)a chandoka brahmaiJa ... );
Ud-a 292,22 (sa eva -a ti vedasiikhajata, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se sa eva tittirl tani yeva osadhanl ti).
tittiri, m.f [S. tittiri], a partridge; Sadd 922,1 (tittiro -1 ...
mattabhedo 'yaq¡).
tittha, n. [S. tlrtha], l. a ghat; a place of access to a river;
a landing-place; a fording-place, a ford; Abh 884
(gurupayavataresu -aq¡); V in I 230,8 (yena -ena gali.gaq¡
nadirp uttarissati taq¡ Gotamatittharp nama bhavissatl ti);
M 1 43,36foll. (seyyatha pi ... visamaq¡ -aq¡ tassassa
aññarp samaq¡ -arp parikkamanaya; PsI 192,18: aññarp
avisamaq¡ anupubbagambhlraq¡ sopanaphalakasadisaq¡
-arp bhaveyya); A V 347,2o (gopalako ... na -arpjanati);
Pv 31:4 (anavatesu -esu v1cmtrp addhamasakarp;
Pv-a 202,18foll.: 0 -padesesu yattha manussa nahayanti
udakakiccaq¡ karonti tadisesu thanesu); 36:21
(sahayanaq¡ -asmirp nahayantanarp); Ja I l6,2o (yatha
nama puriso nadirp taranto ujukena -ena uttariturp
asakkonto he!thatitthena uttarati); II 111,6 (-e navaq¡
adisva); III 257,24 (tasmirp pana dahe bahüni -ani);
Mil 194,2o (siikatikassa pubbe va anagataq¡ -aq¡
oloketabbaq¡ hoti); V v-a 301,16 (-e sampadeti, eds so);
Mhv 5:51 (-aq¡ jalattharp gacchantl); 11:23 (aruyha ...
 titthaka
navarp ... sukhena -a111 1addhana); - ifc see anupa-,
uttaraQ.a-, kutittha, nipatana-, sama- (sv sama\ hegha-;
- 2. (metaph.) a ford, a way across; a dogma; a sect;
Abh 884 (-a111 pütambudinhisu); Th 766 (-am
addakkhim uttamarp; Th-a III 32,15 foil.: -arp nibbana-
sailkhatassa amatamahaparassa 0 -bhütarp ariyamagga-
dassanal11): Nidd I 300,7 (-arp vuccati di¡!higatarp
titthiya vuccanti ditthigatika, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se titthya);
Sp 1034,22 (ettha -arp vuccati 1addhi); Ps II 7,19 foll.
(-a111 nama dvasatthi dinJliyo ettha hi satta taran ti
up1avanti ummujjanimujjarp karonti tasma -an ti
vuccanti); Ud-a 338,19 foll. (taran ti e tena sa111saroghan ti
-arp, nibbanamaggo, idha pana viparltavipallasavasena
dinhigatikehi tathagahitadiqhidassanarp -arp ti
adhippetarp); - 3. a preceptor; Abh 884; - 4. the right
way; Abh 884; - 5. clear water; Abh 884; -
0
-i'íyatana, n., the sphere or community of a sect; V in I
60,3 (aññataro pi aññatitthiyapubbo . . . upajjhayassa
vada111 aropetva ta111 yeva -a111 sailkami); IV 217,15
(avasata nama -arp sailkanta vuccati); MI 483,21
(suññarp adu111 -arp antamaso saggupagena pi ti); A I
173,!3foll. (ti!).' imani bhikkhave -ani; Mp II 272,15:
-ani ti titthabhutani ayatanani titthiyana111 va ayatanani);
Dhs 381 (micchaditthi ... micchatta111 -a111 vipariyesa-
gaho);- 0 -kara, m. [tittha + kara 1; BHS tirthakara], "a
ford-maker", the promulgator of a dogma; the founder
of a sect; DI 47,18 (aya111 deva PuraQ.o Kassapo sailghi
e' eva gai).I ca gaQ.acariyo ca ñata yasassi -o
sadhusammato bahujanassa; Sv 143,7: -o ti 1addhikaro);
A III 371,17 (Sunetto nama sattha ahosi -o kamesu
vitarago); Mi14,2o; Ps II 7,22 (tittha111 nama dvasaghi
dinhiyo . . . tasa111 ditthinarp uppadeta -o nama);
III 236,23 (bhagava pana yasma . . . bahüni nibbanarp
otaraQ.atitthani akasi tasma -o ti vattu111 vagati); -
0
-nava,f, aferry; Ap-a302 ,12;- 0 -navika, m., aferry-
man; Ja III 228,5; Ap-a 302,11 (--ku1e); - 0 -vasa, m.
[tittha + vasa3], living with a preceptor; leaming from a
preceptor; JaiV 96,8· (--sampa da); Sv492,27 (-o ti
punappunarp gurünarp santike uggahaQ.asavana-
paripucchanadharaQ.ani vuccanti); Nidd-a I 7,14
(digharatta111 -en a); Mi1-t 7 ,13* (uggaho savana111 puccha
kathanarp dharaQ.al11 iti pañcadhammavasen' eva -o
pavuccati); - atittha, n., l. not a ghat; not a ford;
Vin II 280,34 (bhikkhuniyo -e nahayanti); M I 225,9
(gopa1ako duppaññajatiko ... -en' eva gavo pataresi);
Vism 180,2 (na tava-d-eva -ena pakkhandantena viya
gantabba111); Mp III 106,9 (jimharp gacchati ti kuti1al11
gacchati -a111 gal).hati); - 2. (metaph.) nota way across;
the wrong way; Ja IV 379,17 (tassa -ena
pakkhantabhavarp disva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -e); V 66,14*
1-e na ppatareyya; 67,7·: dvasaghi dighisañk hate -e na
ppatareyya); VI 241,21 (madisassa kalyill).amittassa
vacanarp gaQ.ha ma -ena pakkhandi ti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
ma -e pakkhanda ti); Sv 393,24 (nibbanassa -arp nama
karnmanhana111 n' atthi); Dhp-a III 242,23 (ki111 na
passasi AggidattabrahmaQ.al11 mahajana111 -e pakkhand-
apentarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ena);- sutittha, mfn. and
n.. l. (mfn.) with lovely ghats; Pv 47:1 (ayarp ca te
pokkharaQ.I suramma sama -a ca mahodaka ca, Be so;
Ce. Ee, Se suppatittha; Pv-a 275,22: ratanamaya-
325 titthiya
sopanataya sundaratittha); Ja IV 466,2* (najjo ca
khema ... -a); V 48,6* (addasa pokkharaQ.il11 ... rammarp
-a111); - 2. (n.) a good ghat; a place of good access to
the water; Pj I 240,11 (-a111 vi ya sukhavagaho assa) f.
Th-a III 76,27 (Be, Se -a111 viya sukhavaha ti; Ce, Ee
suhitarp viya sukhavaha ti);- see also patitittha.
titthaka, n. [cf S. tirthaka], a ghat; - ifc see pati-
titthakal11.
tittharal}apakkhe in Ee at Ja 1 340,26 is wr; Be, Se
nissaraQ.apakkhe; Ce nittharal).apakkhe.
titthika, m. [= titthiya qv; BHS tirthika], an adherent of
another sect; Vin V 137,19* (in uddana: dütailga -a;
cf 137,1 foil.: attha titthiyavattani); Ap 462,13 (janoghe
titthikakiQ.Q.O abhibhuyya kutitthiye ... jotesi111 nayakarp,
Ce, Ee so; Be jino te titthikakiQ.Q.e; Se jino yo
titthikatiQ.Q.O); 535,1 (yarp na digha111 puraQ.ehi
titthikacariyehi pi); Sv 1039,24 (-a hi dasavassaka1e
matarp nigaQ.tharp niddaso ti vadanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
titthiya).
titthiya, titthya, m. [cf BHS tirthika, tirthya], an adherent
of another sect; a non-Buddhist ascetic; Vin I 54,19
(vibbhamanti pi -esu pi sailkamanti); III 245,19 (katharp
hi nama samaQ.a Sakyaputtiya hatthesu piQ.<;laya
carissanti seyyatha pi -a ti; Sp 1025,zo: yatha
ajivikanamaka -a); N 225,28 (-e upasañkamitva
pabbajjarp yaci); Sn 381 (ye kec' ime -a vadasila ajivika
va yadi va nigaQ.tha); 891 (eval11 hi titthya puthuso
vadanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tithya; Nidd I 300,8: titthya
vuccanti dinhigatika, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce titthiya) quoted
Sadd 625,14 (titthya); Ja I 37,18 (Padumuttarassa pana
bhagavato ka1e -a nahesu111 sabbe devamanussa
buddham eva saraQ.al11 agama111su); III 74,19 (-a ...
kaQ.takapassaye seyya111 kappenti pañcataparp tapanti
nanappakara111 micchatapa111 caranti); 126,6 (-a hi
anuppanne buddhe labhino ahesu111 uppanne pana
hata1abhasakkara suriyuggamane kh~jopanaka viya
jata); Nidd I 473,11 (sarpsattho viharati rajuhi
rajamahamattehi -ehi o -savakehi ananu1omikena
gihisa111saggena; Nidd-a I 451,29: -a ti vipañtadassana
bahiraparibbajaka, o -savaka ti bhattivasena tesa111
paccayadayaka); Patis I 160,4 (-o ca 0 -savako ca yo ca
micchaditthiko ime tayo puggala vipannaditthi);
Ap 28,19 (tasanti -a sabbe nadato te mahamuni);
Mi199,21 (-a sake vade nattha honti); Vism507,9
(suvanavuttino pana -a); Ps II 7,23 (tittharp nama
dvasatthi ditthiyo ... tasa111 ditthinarp uppadeta titthakaro
nama tassa 1addhil11 gahetva pabbajita -a nama); Spk III
171,16 (-anarp hi samaye pañcanivaraQ.appahanarp va
mettadibrahmaviharabhavana va n' atthi); Mhv 5:74
(-anarp sahassani nikka<;l<;lhitvana sanhi so);
titthiyasmi111 yeva in Ee at Sv 1039,23 is prob. wr; Be,
Ce, Se titthiyasamaye; - ifc see añña (sv añña2),
kutitthiya; 0
-(d)dhaja, m.n., the emblem or
characteristic sign of one belonging to another sect,
Vin I 306,6 (na bhikkhave ajinakkhiparp -a111
dharetabba111); II 22,27 (na gihidhajo dharetabbo na -o
dharetabbo; Sp 1159,9/all.: kusaciradini na
dharetabbani); - 0
-pakkantaka, mfn. [perhaps for
titthiya + *apakkan taka? cf BHS tirthikavakrantaka],
who has gane over to another sect, an apostate; Vin I
titthira
86,33 (-o bhikkhave anupasampanno
upasampadetabbo upasampanno nasetabbo ti; Sp 1021,2:
titthiyesu pakkanto pavinho ti -o); 136,1 (na -assa ...
patimokkha111 uddisitabba111); Sp 515,11 (theyya-
sa111vasako -o bhikkhm;lldüsako ti imes~ tiip¡.a111 saggo
avarito maggo pana varita va); 990,24 (so --tta na
upasampadetabbo); 1021,1joll.; Kkh 2 30,11;
atitthiya, m., one who is not an adherent of another
sect; V in IV 92,21; - se e also nanatitthiyagatika
(sv nana).
titthira (tittira ?), f, a throw in dicing; ? Ja VI 281, fn 7
(bahu1o nemi sailghano santi bhadra ca -a, Ee so; not in
Be, Ce, Se).
tithi, mf [ts], a lunarday; Abh 72 H); Pj I 222,5 (n' atthi
assa -i yamhi va tamhi va divase agacchati ti atithi, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee n' atthi assa thiti); Pv-a 198,23 (asukamhi
nakkhatte -imhi muhutte ay~ jato ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
asukasmi111 -imhi); - -karal}.a, pi., lunar day and
division of the day; Dhp-a I 174,17 (ki111 acariya ajja te
--nakkhattayogo o1okito ti) f. Patis-a 680,8
(--nakkhattadayo o1okita).
'tidaharp.su in Ee at Ud 93,12* (vedana pi 'tidaha111su
sabba) is wr; Be, Ce, Ud-a 433,2o s!tibhavi111su.
tinisa, tin!sa, m. [S. tinisa], a shrub; SAF: Ougeiniea
oojeinensis (Roxb.) Hochr.; Abh 555 (-o tv atimuttako,
Be so; Ce tinlso).
tintakalabu in E e at Pv-a 4 7,2 is wr for tittaka- (Be, Ce, Se
so).
tintil}.a, tintina, n. and mfn. [cf AMg ti111tii¡.ia], l. (n.)
greed, desire; complaining; Mp V 54,12 ( -a111 vuccati
ta!).ha); Vibh 351,25 foil. (ya111 -a111 tintil)ayana
tintil)ayitatta111 1olupp~ 1o1uppayana lo1uppayitatt~
pucchañjikata sadhukamyata ida111 vuccati -a111, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce tintina111; Vibh-a 476,31: -an ti khiyyana111);-
2. (mfn.) greedy; complaining; A V 149,19 ([kako]
dha111s1 ca pagabbho ca -o ca; Mp V 54,12: -o ti -~
vuccati ta!).ha, taya samannagato asailkabahu1o va, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee tintino ti tintina111 ... ).
*tintil}.ati, tintil)ayati, tintinayati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from
tintil)a ?], desires; complains; part.pr.
(a) tintil)anta, mfn., Ja I 243,6 (kako .. . sve .. . maya
idam eva khaditabban ti ratti111 -anto nipajji, Ce, Ee so;
Be nitthunanto; Se nitthunanto); (b) tintil)ayanta, mfn.,
Ja III 225,6 (ida111 khadissami ti -ayanto n!Japacchiy~
yeva nipajjitva, Ee so; Be nitthunanto; Ce, Se
nitthunayanto); (e) tintinayamana, mfn., Ja VI 347,1s
(so . . . taya agantva sayana111 abhirüJhamattaya
tintinayamano sayana otaritva bhümiya111 nipajji, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se agiyamano); pp tintil)ayita,
tintinayita, mfn., desiring; complaining; Vibh 351,25
(tintil)ayana tintil)ayitattaq¡, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
tintinayana tintinayitattaq¡; Vibh-a 476,33: tmtiJ)ena
ayitassa tintil)asamailgino bhavo tintil)ayitattaq¡).
tintil}.ayana, tintinayana, f [cftintil)a, tintil)ayati], desire;
complaining; Vibh 351 ,25 (-a, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
tintinayana).
tintil}.ika, tintil)lka, tintinika, m. [cf S. tintü~ika, tinti9ika],
the tamarind tree; Sp 836,19 (-tintil)ikamatu1ungaka-
pittha-, in long cpd); 837,s ( 0 ' -aghi); 845,13
(
0
' -adipa!).l)esu) f. Vin-vn 1428 (Be so;
326 ti posa
na tintil)ikadipa!).l)esu); Vin-vn 1353 (matulungaka-
pitthan~ pha1~ -assa ca, Be so; Ee tintinikassa ca).
tintil}.i,f [cf S. tinti91], a tree; SAF: tamarind, Tamarindus
indica L.; Abh 562 (ciñca ca -i).
tindimani in Ee at la VI 580,30* is wr, prob. for dindimani
(Be, Ce, Se so).
tindu, m. [S. lex. id.], a tree, perhaps Diospyros
embryopteris Pers. or Diospyros malabarica (Desr.)
Kostel.; Ja III 24,26* (yo 0 -rukkhassa paro pi1akkhu, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be tindukarukkhassa).
tinduka, til)9uka, m.n. [S. tinduka], (m.n.) a tree; SAF:
false mongosteen, Diospyros malabarica (Desr.) Kostel.;
(n.) its fruit; Abh 560 (-o kaJakkhandho ca); Ja II 78,7*
(khajjataq¡ yeva -aq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee til)9uka!11);
IV 434,7* (-ani piyalani madhuke kasumariyo phalani
khuddakappani bhuñja raja var~ varaq¡, Ce so; Be, Ee,
Se til)9ukani) f. VI 569,17* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se til)9ukani);
V 70,5* (tattha -aq¡ addakkhiq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
til)9ukaq¡); VI 122,4* (-a ca pi y ala ca duma niccapha1a
bahü, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se til)9uka); Ap 17,11 (-ani
piya1ani ... dhuvaphalani dharenti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
til)9ukani; Ap-a217,21: ete 0 '-adayo rukkha dhuvaq¡ ...
madhuraphalani dharenti ti); 200,19 (pha1in~ -~
disva); 346,14 (-a ca piya1a ca); - ifc se e kaka-; -
0
álata, n., afire oftinduka wood; A I 127,6 (-a111, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se til)9ukalat~) = Pp 36,31 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
til)9uka1ataq¡); - 0 -khai}.U, m., a tinduka stump; MI
78,25 (-u, Be, Ce so; Ee tindukakhal)u; Se
til)9ukakhanu).
tindukacira, n., [?] a tinduka row or grove;? the name of
an arama; D I 178,5 (samayappavadake -e ekasa1ake
Mallikaya arame pativasati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
til)9ukacire; Sv 365,11foll.: 0 -sailkhataya timbarürukkha-
pantiya parikkhittatta -aq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee timbaru-
rukkhapantiya) = M 11 22,29 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tiD9ukaclre; Ps III 266,5 foil.: Be, Se o -sailkhataya
timbarüsakarukkhapantiya parikkhittatta -~; Ce, Ee
tindukakhirasankhataya timbarurukkhapantiya ... -~).
tipu, n. [cfS. trapu], tin; (lead; ?) Abh 1046 (sire slsaq¡
-umhi ca); V in II 112,35 (anujanami bhikkhave dve
pattamal)9alani o -mayaq¡ slsamayan ti); D II 351,9
(disva ... pahüta111 -u111 cha99ita!11); A III 16,8 (pañc'
ime bhikkhave jatarüpassa upakki1esa ... ayo 1oh~ -u
slsa111 sajjha111); Ja II 296,11 •; Dhp-a IV 104,9 (parikhaq¡
khal)itva -una pürayi111su); Vibh-a 63,34 (-u ti setatipu);
- ifc see ka!a-; - 0 -kara, m., a tinsmith; Ap 359,16;
Mi1331,7; - 0 -kottaka, m., one who beats out tin, a
tinsmith; Kkh 2 23S.,s (--upakara!).esu 0 -cchedanaka-
satthakaJTI); - 0 -Cchedanakasatthaka, n., a knife for
cutting tin; Kkh 2 235,s;- 0 -pattaka, m., a strip or band
of tin; Sp 708,w; Ps 111 73,4; - 0 -loha, n., the metal
tin;?- --kara, m., a worker in tin; Ap 317,8 (kammara
SOI)I)akara ca --kara tatha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tipu1opa
kata).
tiputa, f [S. lex. triputa], a plant; SAF: Indian jalap,
(white) turpeth tree, Operculina turpethum (L.) Silva
Manso; Abh 590 (tivuta -a catha);
tipusa, n. [cf S. trapusa], the fruit of a kind of gourd or
cucumber; Sp 836,20 (in long cpd); 1104,1 (-tipusa-
Ee eJa1uka ti nava mahapha1ani, in long cpd); Vin-vn 1355
tippa
(kumbhaJ.!qitipusana¡p ca phala111 eJalukassa ca); 2692
(tipusalabukumbhaJ.!qi); Vv-a 147,2o (kakkarikan ti
khuddakeJalukal!l -an ti ca vadanti).
tippa, mfn., n. (and -a, f ?) [cf S. tivra], l. (mfn. and n.)
severe, intense; sharp, acute; a severe or sharp thing;
MI 74,II (ekantadukkha -a katuka vedana, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be tibba; Ps II 37,19: -a ti bahala, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
tibba ti); A II 116,13 (sarlrikahi vedanahi dukkhahi -ahi
kharahi katukahi ... , Ee so; Be, Ce, Se tibbahi); Ud 21,6
(dukkha¡p -a111 khara¡p katukal!l vedanaq1 adhivasento,
Ee, Se so; Be, Ce tibba¡p; Ud-a l66,1: -an ti tikhii.).aq1,
abhibhavitva pavattiya balava¡p, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tibban
ti ... bahala¡p va); Ja IV 226,9* (akkheyya -ani parassa
dh!ro, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tibbani; 226,21·: -anl ti kharani,
Ee so; Ce, Se -anl ti dukkhani; Be tibbanl ti dukkhani);
VI 522,II * (taq1 ca dukkhaq1 ca -aq1 ca yaq1 passe
jii;n-¡.akaq1 patiq1, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tibbaq1); Mil 148,16
(niraye pana nerayika satta dukkha -a katuka vedana
vediyamana, Ce, Ee so; Be tibba; Se omits); - 2. (j.,
scil. satti2 ?) a sharp weapon; Ja VI 582,19*
(vikkosamana -ahi hanti nesa111 varaq1 vara¡p, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be tibbahi; 582,26·: vikkosamana -ahi migamaral,la-
sattlhi nesa111 migana¡p varaq1 vara¡p hanti, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be tibbahi); - see also tibba.
tibba, mfn. and n. [cfS., BHS tlvra], l. (mfn.) strong;
severe, intense; sharp, acute; (n.) severe distress;
Abh41; 711 (ti1,1hal!l tu tikhi1,1a¡p -a~p); Vini 78,24
(sarlrikana111 vedanana¡p dukkhana¡p -ana¡p kharana¡p
katukanaq1 ... , Be, Ee, Se so; Ce tippanaq1) f. MI 10,29
(Be so; Ce, Ee, Se tippana¡p) f. A I 153,10 (eds so); D III
72,13 (-o aghato paccupatrhito bhavissati -o
vyapado ... ); M 11 218,24foll. (yasmi111 vo samaye -o
upakkamo -aq1 padhana¡p -a tasmiq1 samaye
opakkamika dukkha -a katuka vedana vediyatha, Be so;
Ce, Se ... dukkha tippa katuka ... ; Ee
tippo ... tippaq1 ... tippa ... tippa); S 11 178,22 (dukkhaq1
paccanubhütaq1 -a¡p paccanubhutaq1 vyasanaq1
paccanubhiltam, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tippaq1; Spk 11 156,22:
tumhehi dukkha¡p anubhiltal!l. -an ti tass' eva
vevacana111); A I 229,7 (evaq1 sikkhitabbaq1 -o no
chando bhavissati adhis!lasikkhasamadane; Mp 11 346.10:
-o ti bahalo); Ja VI 115,29* (ye 'me jana adhimatta
dukkha -a khara katuka vedana vediyanti, Be, Ce, E e so;
Se tippa) quoted Sadd 915,3o (tippa); Ja VI 328,6* (-a¡p
ca rakkhaq1 vidahantu rattlJe; 328,27·: -an ti gaJha¡p);
423,26* (yo nu kho 'ya¡p -o saddo); Patis I 122,28
(imasmi111 ca loke imasmiq1 ca vajje -a bhayasañña
paccupatrhita hoti); Mil 397,17* (-a¡p chanda¡p ca
pema¡p ca tasmiq1 disva upattlJape); Vism 500,2o (-a¡p
dukkha¡p anubhoti); Sv 69,31 (kilesana111 upakkamana¡p
ca mudutaya appasavajjo 0 -taya mahasavajjo); Ps V
80,15 (-o alayo -aq1 nikantipariyutthiinaq1); It-a II 49,31
(cetana 0 -tara); - 2. (mfn.) dense, thick; S II1 l08,22
(dakkhissasi -aq1 vanasai_lqa¡p); Nidd I 355,15 (suriyo ca
atthaii.gamito hoti kaJapakkho ca uposatho hoti -o ca
vanasai_lqo hoti; Nidd-a I 377,3o: gahano ca rukkharasi);
Bv 1:7 (tamo ca -o vihato tada ahil; Bv-a 29,2s: -o ti
bahalo ghano); Mil 7,s (na me bhante manussaloken'
attho kammabahulena -o manussaloko, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se tippani manussalokani); - 0 -giirava, mfn., having
327 timirapiilgala
strong respect (jor); MI 32,2o (kulaputta ... sikkhaya
-a); S I 34,22* (buddhe pasanna dhamme ca saii.ghe ca
-a); Nett 112,2o; Mhv 36:5 (sanghamhi -o);
neg. atibbagarava, mfn., Sp 483,4;- see also tippa.
timi, m. [ts], afabulous fish of enormous size; Abh 673 (-i
timingalo timirapingalo); Vin 11 238,16 (mahasamuddo
mahataq1 bhütanaq1 avaso tatr' ime bhilta -i timingalo
timitimingalo asura naga gandhabba, Be, Ee so; Se adds
mahatimingalo; Ce -i timingalo timirapingalo) = A IV
200,4 (Be -i timingalo timirapingalo; Ce timl timingala
timirapingala; Ee, Se timitimingala timiramingala) =
Ud 54,Is (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -i timingalo timirapingalo);
Mil 262,1 H timingala timirapingala); Sv 487,3
(mahasamudde ca -i nama maccho dviyojanasatiko) =
Spk II 88,10;- ifc see maha-;- 0 '-inda, 0 -nanda, m., a
fabulous fish; Abh 673 (anando ca -o ca, Ce so; Be
anando timinando ca); Ja V 462,16 (cha mahamaccha
ahesuq1 tesu anando -o ajjharoho ti . . . pañcayojana-
satika, Ce so; Be timinando; Ee timando; Se upanando);
Sv 487,5 (anando -o ajjharoho mahatiml ti ime cattaro
yojanasahassika, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be timinando) = Spk 11
88,12 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se timinando); - 0
-iJ.-gala,
0
-n-gila, m. [S. timingila], "timi-swallower", a fabulous
fish of enormous size; Abh 673; Vin II 238,16 (-o) =
A IV 200,4 (Be so; Ce -a; Ee, Se timitimingala) =
Ud 54,15 (Ud-a 303,3: timi111 gilanasamattha -a); Ja V
452,15* (ta gilanti purisassa pabhata111 sagare va
makaraq1 -o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee timingilo); 462,17 foil.
(-o timirapingalo mahatimirapingalo ti ime tayo
mahamaccha sahassayojanika honti, Be so; Ce timi -o
timirapingalo ti; Ee Utimlti mingalo timirapingalo ti; Se
-o timiramingalo mahatimiramingalo ti;); Ap 430,17
(samuddamhi maccho asiq1 -o); Mil262,I; Sv 487,4 (-o
0
tiyojanasatiko) = Spk 11 88,11; - -timiilgala, m.
[S. timitimingila], a fabulous fish of enormous size;
Vin 11 238,16 (timi timingalo -o, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
timirapingalo; = A IV 200,4: Be timirapingalo; Ce
timirapingala; Ee, Se -a timiramingala) = Ud 54,15 (Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee timirapingalo; Ud-a 303,4: timiq1 ca
timingalaq1 ca gilanasamattha -a ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
timirapingala ti); Nidd I 179,24 (ye keci macchakacchapa
antamaso -aq1 upadaya; Nidd-a I 300,13: pañcayojana-
satikasarlra -a); Sv 487,4 (-o catuyojanasatiko, Se so;
Be, Ce, Ee timipingalo); - 0 -nanda, m., see above
(sv timinda).
timira\ n. [ts], l. darkness; Abh 70 (timisaq1 -am);
Ap 71,12 (thilpo dviyojanubbidho -aq1 vyapahanti so);
Mil 278,14 (suriyo atippabhataya -aq1 ghateti); - 2. a
disease ofthe eye; Spk I 180,15 (0 -kacadihi upaddutaq1).
2
timira , m. and mfn. [cf S. timira], a kind of plant or tree;
coming from the timira tree; Ja III 189,!4* (vati gandho
-anaq1; 189,!6·: timirarukkhapupphana111); Ap 126,2o
(gahetva -aq1 pupphaq1; Ap-a 400,32: saka1avananta¡p
n!lakaJaraq1slhi andhakaraq1 viya kurumanaq1 khayaU ti
-a¡p pupphaq1); 345,29 (-a pupphita tattha aso ka
khuddama1aka);- ifc see vana- (sv vana 1).
timirapiilgala (and timiramingala ?), n., a great ocean
fish; Abh 673 (timi timingalo -o); Vin 11 238,!6 (timi
timiii.galo -o, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se timitimingalo) = A IV
200,4 (Be so; Ce tim! timingala -a; Ee, Se timitimingala
timirayana
timiramiil.ga1a) = Ud 54,15 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
timitimiilga1o ); Mil262,1 (timi timiil.ga1a -a); Sv 487,5
(-o pañcayojanasatiko, Be, Ce, E e so; Se timiramiil.galo)
= Spk II 88,!!; Ps II 6,26 (-o maccharaja); As 13,24
0
( -mahiimaccho, Be, Ce, Se so; E e timiratimiil.ga1a-).
timirayana, n. rfrom *timirayati, S. timirayate], beeoming
or appearing dark; Spk II 315,12 (timirayitattan ti
0
-bhavarp.).
timirayita, mfn. [pp of *timirayati, S. timirayate], beeome
or appearing dark;- 0 -tta, n., abstr., the appearanee of
darkness, darkness; S I 122,1 (dhümayitattarp. -arp.
gacchateva purimarp. disarp.) = III 124,1 (Spk II 315,11:
-an ti timirayanabhavarp.); Sadd 790,14 (ayitattarp.
upamatthe, dhümo viya dissati adurp. ta-y-idarp.
dhümayitattarp. evarp. -arp.).
timisa, timisa, n., timisa, timissa, f [ef S. tamisra,
tamisra, BHS timisra], darkness; a dark hell; Abh 70
(timisarp. timirarp.); Sn 669 (andharp. va timisam ayanti,
so read me ? see K.R. Norman, 2001, p. 297; eds
timisam ayanti; Pj II 480,16foll.: andhakara1,1ena andham
eva baha1andhakaratta timisan ti saññitarp. dhüma-
roruvarp. nama narakarp. gacchanti); Ud-a 354,6
(mahandhakiiro hi timisa ti vuccati); - ife see
andhakiira-;- see also timisika.
timisika, timissika, f [ef BHS timisaka], darkness; a very
dark night; Abh 69 (tamussanna -a); Vv 9:6
(tamandhakiiramhi -ayarp.); Ja IV 98,15* (tatth'
andhakiiramhi -ayarp., Be, Ee so; Ce timissikayarp.; Se
timissakayarp.; 99,w: bahalatimiraya rattiyarp.); - see
also timisa.
timbaru, m. [efS. tumbaru, tumburu], a tree; SAF: false
mangosteen, Diospyros malabariea (Desr.) Kostel.; its
(golden) fruit; (also the name of a gandhabba); Abh 560
(tinduko kajakkhandho ca timbarüsakatimbarü); Ja V
406,19' (ke1,1ü ti araññamasa tinduka ti 0 -rukkha, Be so;
Ce, Se ve1,1ü ti; Ee ve1,1ü ti araññamasa 0 -rukkha);
Vin-vn 2694 (badararp. -U);- 0 -a!thi, n., a stone of the
timbaru fruit; Ja VI 336,28' (-in ti, Be, Ee so; Ce -Ini ti;
Se timbaru!!hin ti); - 0 -tthani, (m)f(n)., with breasts
like the timbaru fruit; Sn 110 (atitayobbano poso aneti
-irp. tassa issa na supati; Pj II 172,2!: -in ti o -pha1a-
sadisatthanirp. taru1,1adiirikarp.); Ja VI 457,1* (naganasüru
ka1yal,li parama -I, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se pathama -I; 457,17':
-I parama uttama SUVaJ.lJ.lapha1ake thapitasuvaJ.lJ.laVaJ.lJ.la-
timbaruphaladvayam iv' assa SUSaJ.lthiinasampannarp.
nirantararp. thanayuga1arp., Be so; Se pathama uttama ... ;
Ce, E e -Inarp. pathama uttama ... ); - 0 -nadasadiso in
Ee at Vv-a 137,30 (gandhabbasippe pariyodatasippataya
timbarunadasadiso) is prob. wr for timbaruniiradasadiso
(Be, Ce, Se so); - see also timbarukkha, timbarusa,
timbarüsaka.
timbaruka, m., the name of a paribbajaka; S II 22,9 foil.
(-o paribbajako, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se timbarukkho);
Vibh-a 503,3 (0 -ditthi, Be so; Ce, Ee timbarüsaka-; Se
timbarukkha-).
timbarukkha, m. [eftimbaru, timbarüsaka], a tree, prob.
Diospyros embryopteris Pers. or Diospyrus malabariea
(Desr.) Kostel.; Ja VI 529,22* (carü -a e' ettha, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be carutimbarukkha; 530,29': suvaJ.lJ.latimba-
rukkha).
328 tiracchana
timbarusa, n. [eftimbaru, timbarüsaka, tumba], a gourd; ?
Vv-a 147,18joll. (tipusasadisa eka vallijati -arp., tassa
pha1arp. timbarusakan ti vadanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tipusasadisa eka vallijati timbarüsakan ti ca vadanti).
timbarñsaka, timbarusaka, m.n. [eftimbaru,
timbarukkha], a tree; SAF: false mangosteen, Diospyros
malabariea (Desr.) Kostel.; its (golden)fruit; (a kind of
gourd; ?) Abh 560 (tinduko kiijakkhandho ca
timbarüsakatimbarü); Vin III 59,7 (sailghassa -e
bhajiyamiine); 60,38 (0 -coraka -e uccinitva bha1,1~ikarp.
iidaya agamarp.su); Vv 33:111 (Vv-a 147,18joll.: -an ti
tindukapha1arp., tipusasadisa eka vallijati -an ti ca
vadanti, Ce, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Se timbarusakan ti
ti1,1qukapha1arp., tipusasadisa eka vallijati timbarusarp.,
tassa pha1arp. timbarusakan ti vadanti); Sp 850,8 (ucchurp.
va -arp. va denti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se timbarusakarp.);
Dhp-a III 315,12 (ekarp. -arp. adasirp., Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
timbarusakarp.); - 0
-ditthi, see sv timbaruka; -
0
-Val}l}libha, mfn., the eolour of a timbarüsaka fruit;
Ap 68,21 (-o . . . buddho; Ap-a 343,24: -o ti
SUVaJ.lJ.latimbarüsakavaJ.lJ.labho, jambonadasUVaJ.lJ.laVaJ.lJ.lO
ti attho) = 318,23.
tiyantarp. in Ee at Ap 418,28 is prob. wr; Be, Ce vinatarp.;
Se sajjitarp..
tiraccha, m.f [ef AMg, BHS tiriccha; S. tiryañc], 'going
horizontal/y', an animal; Abh 648 (-o tu tiracchano
tiracchiinagate siya); It 92,19* (te vaMhayanti nirayarp.
-iinarp. ca yoniyo ); Thi 4 7 5 (devesu manussesu ca
tirachiinarp. yoniya asurakaye, so read me with
Th App. II p. 246? eds tiracchanayoniya); Nidd-a I 76,4*
(dukkharp. -e su kasapatodada1,1~abhighatadibhavarp.
anekarp.) quoted Sadd 863,19; Sadd 863,18 (tirato
cchacchiina... -o -a); - -a, instr. [ef S. tirasca],
aeross, horizontally; ? Sadd 431,32 (tira adhogatiyarp.:
tirati tiracchano -a va; or m.pl. ?); - 0 -pabbatarp. in Ee
at Ud-a 302,8 is wr for tiracchiina- (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-bhñta mfn., being aeross; being sideways to; Sv 89,16
(aniyyanikatta saggamokkhamaggiinarp. -a katha
tiracchiinakatha, Ee so, but perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
tiracchiinabhüta; = Ps III 221,21: eds tiracchiina- ); -
0
-yoni,f, birth or existenee as an animal; the animal
class; Th 258 (dukkhamamhi pi -iyarp., so read, me?
eds tiracchiina-); Ja V 186,22* (te vaq~hayanti nirayarp.
-irp. ca pettivisayarp. ca, so read with L. Alsdorf, 1967,
p. 276; eds tiracchana-); Ap 364,27 (-irp. nirayarp.
parimocesi cakkhuma, E e so; Be, Ce, Se tiracchiina-); -
tiracchayoniya in Ee at S V 342,18 is prob. wr for
tiracchiinayoniya (Be, Ce, Se so).
tiracchana, mfn. and m.f [BHS tiracchiina], (mfn.) going
erosswise or obliquely or horizontally; (m.f) an animal;
a (non-human) ereature; Abh 648 (tiraccho tu -o
tiracchanagate siya); Vin III 126,8* (in uddana: mata
dhita ... sutta mata -a; ef126,29); Jaii 280,21· (manusso
va hotu -o va); III 185,25 (manussabhüta pi attano
samikassa atthaya attano jivitarp. na denti atha -a pag
eva, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ayarp. 0 -gata jivitarp.
pariccajati); VI 520,27 (mahasattassa mettiinubhavena ...
sabbe -a pi aññamaññarp. mettarp. pati1abhirp.su);
Vism 557,4 (-esu); Sp 227,5 (migamorakukkuta-
makkatadayo -a); 258,21 (0 -gataya pi ti patisandhivasena
tira ti
-es u gataya); 1023,20 (-o manussa-arahant~ pi
ghatetva anantariyo na hoti); Sv 713,10 (aya~ hatthl
nama -o, so pi tumhaka~ gu~e janati); Ps 11 37,2
(tiriya~ añchita -a); Dhp-a I 173,2 (-a kira nam' ete
ujujatika honti akutila); Ud-a 149,22 (pettivisaye
khuppipasa vüpasami -ana~ bhaya~ nahosi); Nidd-a I
76,1 (-es u kasapatodatajanavijjhanadika~ anekavidh~
dukkh~ anveti); Vibh-a 454,14 (uddh~ anugantva
tiriy~ añcita ti -a) i= Sadd 335,17 (anuggantva);
Saddh 130; Sadd 863,18 (tirato cchacchana ... -o -a);~
0
-kathii,f [tiracchana + katha1], worldly, frivolous talk;
chatter, gossip; Vin IV 50,6 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü ...
divas~ -aya vltinametva); DI 178,18 (mahatiya
paribbajakaparisaya . . . unnadiniya uccasadda-
mahasaddaya anekavihita~ -~ kathentiya seyyath!da~
rajakatha~ corakath~ mahamattakath~ ...
lokakkhayik~ samuddakkhayik~ itibhavabhava-
kath~ iti va); Nidd I 367,28 (gamakatha vuccanti
batti~sa -a seyyath!da~ rajakatha ... ; Nidd-a I 393,9:
aniyyanikatta saggamokkhamaggana~ tiracchanabhüta
katha ti -a); ~ atiracchanakatha, mfn., not given to
worldly, frivolous tal k; Spk III 91,6 (pora~akatthera
atiracchanakatha honti); ~ 0 -kathika, mfn., (one) given
to worldly, frivolous talk; V in III 159,18 (ye te bhikkhü
-a kayadajhibahu1a viharanti); Vism 127,3o; Th-a I
190,32; ~ neg. atiracchanakathika,mfn., Vin V 163,7;
A IV 153,7; Vism 127,27; ~ -gata, m.f, (being) an
0
animal, a (non-human) creature; Abh 648 (tiraccho tu
tiracchano -e siya); Vin I 136,1 (na -assa ...
patimokkha~ uddisitabba~); 11 162,13 (-a p~a
aññamaññ~ sagarava sappatissa sabhagavuttika
viharissanti); IV 7,17 (hlno nama akkoso ottho si ...
gadrabho si -o si nerayiko si ... ); M IIl 167,21 (santi
bhikkhave -a p~a ti~abhakkha); S V 227,15 (ye keci -a
p~a siho migaraja tesa~ aggam akkhayati); Th 1128
(atho -a pi ekada [bhavamase]); Ja I 459,15' (-o pi eta~
attha~ janami ti); V 336,28' (sace -o na bhavissa
sotapattipha1a~ adhigamissa); Kv 598,24 (atthi devesu
-a ti); Mil 310,8 (-assa maharaja supatipannassapi
dhammabhisamayo na hoti); Vism 208,24; Sp 1022,27
(ettha nago va hotu supa~~am~avakadina~ va aññataro
antamaso Sakka~ devarajana~ upadaya yo koci
amanussajatiyo sabbo va imasmi~ atthe -o veditabbo);
Dhp-a I 164,18 (manussasaddo nama -an~ ubbejaniyo);
Th-a III 7,29 (aya~ mahajano im~ -a~ naga~
pasa~sati na buddhamahanaga~); Sadd 863,19; ~
0
-gami(n), mfn. [tiracchana + gami(n) 1], leading to
(birth as) an animal; Vibh 339,11 (aya~ maggo aya~
patipada nirayagamini ti pajanati aya~ maggo ay~
patipada -ini ti pajanati, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Ce
0
-yonigaminl ti; Be 0 -yonigami ti; Vibh-a 454,14foll.:
tiriy~ añcita ti tiracchana, tiracchana yeva
tiracchanayoni); ~ 0 -purisa, m., a male animal;
Vism 207,24; ~ 0 -bhüta, mfn., l. being an animal; asan
animal; Ja Ili 297,9· (-a kaka pi); IV 112,26' (ya esa
imasmi~ s~sare manussabhüta sugati ca -a duggati
ca); Vism 303,8 (-o pi pana Chaddanto nama var~o
hutva); Ps IV 110,5; ~ 2. being across; being sideways
to; Sp 882,3o (ariyamaggassa -a~ katha~); Sv 89,16
(aniyyanikatta saggamokkhamaggan~ -a katha
329 tiriyarp
tiracchanakatha, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tiracchabhüta) = Ps III
221,21 = Nidd-a I 393,8; ~ -yoni,f, birth or existence
0
asan animal; the animal class; ViniV 277,4 (-iya va
pettivisayena va ... abhisapati); D III 234,8 (pañca gatiyo
nirayo -i pettivisayo manussa deva); M 11 193,26 (niraya
bho Sariputta -i seyyo ti); S V 342,13 (aparimutto ca
-iya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -iso); 342,18 (parimutto ca -iya,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tiracchayoniya); 476,8foll. (appaka
te satta ye -iya cuta manussesu paccajayanti atha kho ete
va bahutara satta ye -iya cuta niraye paccajayanti); Ja V
33,14 (so 'ha~ -iya~ nibbatto); Patis I 140,21
(micchadiqhikassa purisapugga1assa dve va gatiyo
nirayo va -i va); Vism427,1s (-i hi apayo sugatito
apetatta, na duggati mahesakkhan~ nagarajadina~
sambhavato ); 476,6 (niraye dukkha ojarika -iya~
sukhuma); Cp-a 102,24 (bodhisatta ... -iy~
nibbattanti); Vibh-a 454,15 (tiracchana yeva -i);
Sadd 403,11; --gamanlya, mfn. [+ gamanlya2],
leading to an animal birth; A Ili 414,16 (atthi asava
--gamanlya, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se --gamaniya); ~ see
--gaminiya below; ~ --gami(n), mfn. [+ gami(n) 1],
going to an animal birth; MI 73,23foll. (--gami~ ca
magg~ --gamini~ ca patipad~ ... pajanami); Ps 11
29,12; neg. SI 154,31' (sabbe sotasamapanna
atiracchanagamino); ~ --gaminiya, mfn., leading to an
animal birth; Sv 989,13 (atthi asava --gaminiya) = PsI
62,1o (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --gamanlya) = Mp 11 184,1 =
It-a I 115,4 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se --gamanlya) = As 370,1
(Ee so; Be, Ce, Se --gamaniya) quoting A III 414,16 (eds
--gamaniya); ~ 0 -yonika, mfn. and m., (one) belonging
to the animal class; A V 269,24 (yo -ana~ sattana~
aharo) quoted Pv-a 28,1 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
--yoniyana~); Ja II 449,8· (tva~ pana --tta ara jhana-
bhümiya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -o); Nidd I 38,18 (nerayika
bhavissama -a bhavissama); 406,1 (yani ca -ani
dukkhani); Mp V 75,2 (-ana~ ... aharo); ~ 0 -vi.ija,f, a
worldly science (especial/y connected with
prognosticating); Vin IV 305,7 (chabbaggiya
bhikkhuniyo -a~ pariyapu~anti; 305,22: -a nama y~
kiñci bahiraka~ anatthasa~hita~); DI 9,2foll. (te
evarupaya -aya micchajivena jivika~ kappenti
seyyath!da~ añga~ nimitta~ uppat~ ... ); Nidd I
372,21 (na vatthuvijjaya na -aya na añgavijjaya; Nidd-a I
402,1: -a nama aniyyanikatta saggamokkhamaggana~
tiracchanabhüta añgasatthanimittadika avasesa vijja);
Kkh 2 339,4.
tirati, pr. 3 sg. [?], goes downwards; Sadd 431,32 (tira
adhogatiya~: -ati tiracchano tiraccha va).
tiriyaqt, ind. [S. tiryak], across, sideways, obliquely;
horizontal/y; Abh 1159 (tiro tu -a~ catha); Vin III
149,12 (dighaso dvadasa vidatthiyo ... -a~ sattantara;
Sp 567,28: -an ti vittharato); DI 251,2 (iti uddh~ adho
-a~ sabbadhi sabbattataya sabbavanta~ lok~
mettasahagatena cetasa ... pharitva viharati); MI 225,27
(te -a~ gañgaya sota~ chetva sotthina para~
agam~su); S l 122,17* (uddh~ adho ca -a~ disa-
anudisasv ah~ anves~ nadhigacchami); Sn 1055
(ya~ kiñci sampajanasi . . . uddh~ adho -~ capi
majjhe; Pj 11 591,10: uddhan ti anagataddha vuccati adho
ti atitaddha -a~ capi majjhe ti paccuppannaddha); Ja II
tiriyato
61 ,26* (yo ve mettena cittena sabba1okanukampati
uddhaq¡ adho ca -aq¡ ca; 62,4-: -an ti manussa1oke);
V 487,24' (mahamagge da¡;¡gakena -aq¡ 1ekhaq¡ katva);
Ap401,19 (-aq¡ yojanaq¡ asi); Mil326,2o (n' atthi
maharaja so padeso . . . uddhaq¡ va adho va -aq¡ va
yattha nibbanaq¡ sannihitan ti); Vism 184,2o (idaq¡
sañraq¡ adho padatalena upari kesamatthakena -aq¡
tacena paricchinnaq¡); Dhp-a I 40,10 (dvaramajjhe -aq¡
nipajji); As 265,2 (ca¡;¡gasote -aq¡ navaya gacchantiya);
0
(tiriyañ)-gama, mfn., going sideways; going
horizontally; S II 87,27 (mülani . . . -ani);
0
(tiriyaq¡)-tara¡;¡li, f, going across; crossing over;
Vin IV 65,2o (aññatra -aya; 65,32: ¡hapetva -aq¡, Be, Ce,
2
Se so; Ee -aya; Kkh 172,27: upayogatthe nissakka-
vacanaq¡, ya -a taq¡ ¡hapetva ti attho); - see also
tiriyato.
tiriyato, ind. [cf tiriyaq¡], across, sideways; obliquely;
2
horizontally; Kkh 67,19 (-o tihattha); PsI 251,22
(saka1asañrassa -o pasara¡;¡aq¡ sayanan ti vuccati);
Mp lii 236,5 (alambanaq¡ nissaya -o ¡hapitapatodo);
Saddh 130 (-o eva cinten ti gacchanti ca sayanti ca ...
tiracchana).
tiriyli, f, a kind of grass or creeper; A lii 240,3o (-a nama
ti¡;¡ajati; Mp III 319,15: dabbati¡;¡aq¡ vuccati); Sadd 406,s
(dubba ti dabbati¡;¡aq¡ yaq¡ -a nama ti¡;¡ajati ti agataq¡).
tirivaccha, m. [cf S. lex. tirigicchi ?], a kind of plant; -
2 Ud-a312,11 (civaraq¡ -Iyaq¡ katva); Th-al 61,19 (-iq¡
0
-gahana, n. [tirivaccha + gahana ], a tirivaccha thicket;
an impenetrable clump of tirivaccha plants; Ja V 46,18
(dabbagahanaq¡ kasagahanaq¡ ... -an ti cha gahanani, so
read with Be, Ce, Se).
tirita, n. [cf S. tiñ¡a, BHS tirltt, tiñti], l. a garment made
of bark (of a particular tree ? cftiñti); D I 166,28 (sa¡;¡ani
pi dhareti . . . paq¡sukiilani pi dhareti -ani pi dhareti
ajinaq¡ pi dhareti, Be, Ce, Ee [ajinani] so; Se tiri¡ani pi;
Sv 356,22: -anl ti mkkhatacavatthani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tirltakan! ti tiñtakamkkhatacavatthani) =F Nidd I 417,4 =F
MI 78,12 =FA I 240,32 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se tiñtakani; Mp II
354,32: -ani pi ti mkkhatacavatthani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tiritakani ti); Vin-vn 2962; - 2. a kind of head-dress or
diadem; - see tiñti(n).
tiritaka, n. [tirita +. ka2, but cf S. tiñtaka], l. a garment
made of bark (of a particular free? cftirlti); Abh 442
(vakka1o va -aq¡); Vin I 306,2ofoll. (chabbaggiya
bhikkhu sabbanilakani civarani dharenti . . . kañcukaq¡
dharenti -aq¡ dharenti ve¡hanaq¡ dharenti . . . na -am
dharetabbaq¡; or a head-dress ? Sp 1135,11: -aq¡ pana
mkkhachallimayaq¡ taq¡ padapuñchanaq¡ katuq¡ vagati)
=F II 267,24/oll. (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tiñtaq¡); A I 240,32
(-ani pi dharenti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tirltani); - 2. a kind
of tree; ? Sv 356,22 (-ani ti -mkkhatacavatthani, Ce, Ee
0
so; Be, Se tiñtanl ti mkkhatacavatthani; ad DI 166,2s:
eds tiñ¡ani).
tiriti, m. (?) [cftirlta], a kind of tree; Ja V 420,2 (in long
cpd; 422,21': -1 ti eka mkkhajati).
tiriti(n), mfn. [from tirita; cf S. tiñtin], l. wearing a bark-
garment; Ja III 108,6* (yassa te khaggabaddhassa
sannaddhassa -ino; 108,10': -ino ti tiñtavatthaq¡
nivatthassa, Be, Ce so; Ee tiritivatthaq¡; Se
tirltivatthassa);- 2. wearing a diadem; Ja V 9,25* (maii
-1 kayilri, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be kiriti; 9,31-: dibbave¡hana-
330 tiro
dharo) i= Pv 34:1 (eds kiñp).
tiro, ind. [S. tiras], across, beyond; apart, secretly;
obliquely; Abh ll59 (-o tu tiriyaq¡); Ap-a449,15
(pakarena -o hutva patitthahatl ti pabbato ); -
0
-'kkha, mfn. [tiro+ akkha4; cf S. parok~a], out of sight;
not present; secret; Vin III 185,s (ye sammukha te
passanti ye -a te su¡;¡anti); - --vaca, mfn., speaking in
someone's absence;? telling secrets;? with secret,
hidden words; ? Ja V 78,5* (--vaco asataq¡ pavit\ho;
79,3·: --vaco ti attano yaq¡ vacaq¡ bhasitukamo tassa
--katatta pa¡icchannavaco, Be so; Ce tirokatatta; Ee
tassa --katta; Se tassa tirokatatta appa¡icchannavaco ); -
tirokkha, adv., out of sight; in someone 's absence; Ja III
89,6* (sammukkha va -a va yo sante na paribhasati, Be,
0
Ce, Se so; Ee parokkha); - -kara¡;¡a, n., concealing;
Bv-a 102,7 (kava¡akuggapabbata avara¡;¡aq¡ -aq¡ katuq¡
asakkonta); 196,27 (avara¡;¡an ti pa¡icchadanaq¡ -aq¡);-
see a/so tirokaroti;- 0 -kara¡;~i,f (and 0 -kara¡;¡fya, n. ?),
a curtain, a screen; Abh 298 (-I); Vin I 276,9 (-iq¡
parikkhipitva thambhe ubbandhitva, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
-iyaq¡); II 152,15 (anujanami bhikkhave -in ti, -iq¡
ukkhipitva o1okenti); III 16,24 (-iyaq¡ parikkhipitva, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se -Iyaq¡; Sp 210,11joll.: -iyan ti kara¡;¡atthe
bhummaq¡, sa¡;tipakarena parikkhipitva ti attho, atha va
tirokaronti etena ti -iyaq¡, taq¡ parikkhipitva samantato
katva ti attho, E e so; Be, Ce, Se -Iyan ti ... -Iyaq¡ ... );
0
parikkhipitva adaq¡su); - -kucchigata, mfn., within
the womb; D II 13,16 (bodhisattaq¡ ca bodhisattamata
-aq¡ passati sabbangapaccañgiq¡ ahlnindriyaq¡; Sv 436,7:
-an ti antokucchigataq¡); Ap 507,11 (matu me doha!o asi
0
-assa me);- 0 -ku44a (Be always -kuga), m.n., l. (m.)
the other side of a wall; the area beyond a wall; Pj I
206,12 (-a ti kugganaq¡ parabhaga vuccanti); - 2. (n.)
the"Tirokugga sutta" (Khp 7 = Pv 5); Pj I 201,23* (yena
yattha yada yasma -aq¡ pakasitaq¡); 216,20 (-ena va
puññavirahitanaq¡ vipattiq¡ dassetva); - -aq¡ (and
-a), through a wall; to the other side of a wall; D I 78,3
(-aq¡ tiropakaraq¡ tiropabbataq¡ asajjamano gacchati
seyyatha pi akase; Vism 394,14: ettha -an ti parakuggaq¡
kuggassa parabhagan ti vuttaq¡ hoti); A IV 55,11
(matugamassa saddaq¡ su¡;¡ati -aq¡ va tiropakaraq¡ va
hasantiya va bha¡;¡antiya va) quoted Vism 52,24 (Ce, Ee,
Se -a; Be 0 -kuga); Ap 374,3 (-aq¡ tiroselaq¡ ... passami
cakkhuna ahaq¡) =F 571,13 (Ce, Se so; Be 0 -kugaq¡; Ee
0
-kugghaq¡); - -e, -amhi, over the wall; on the other
side of the wall; V in IV 265,11 (ka¡ahe vaccaq¡ katva -e
chaggenti; 266,7: kuggassa parato ); Ja IV 470,25* (-amhi
gayitva; 472,s·: -amhi ti sayanagabbhakuggassa bahi);
- -esu, on the other side of the walls; outside the walls;
Khp 7:1 (-esu tighanti) = Pv 5:1 (Pv-a 24,12: kugganaq¡
parabhagesu); 0
-kklira, m., disrespect, abuse;
0
Abh 172 (avamano -o); - -gaticcha, mfn., whose
desire has disappeared; Saddh 130 (-a dhammesu
2
tiracchana tato mata); - 0 -glima, m. [tiro + gama ],
another (distant) village; Vin III 135,27 (Sp 553,6: -o
bahigamo, añño gamo ti adhippayo); - 0 -glimaka, m.,
one who lives outside the village, in another (distant)
village; Vin III 135,23;- 0 -(c)chada, mfn., on the other
side of the fence; Ja VI 60,24* (addakkhiq¡ pha1iq¡
tirokaroti
amba111 -a111, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee phal~; 61,9-: -an ti
o -pakara111 uyyanassa anta !hita111 bahipakara111 nissaya
jat~ ambarukkh~ addasa111. Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
anto!hito va); - 0
-janapada, m., another (distant)
district or country; DI ll6,1 (samaJJ~ ... Gotama111
0
-rattha -a sampucchitu111 agacchanti; Sv 286,24: -a ti
parajanapadato); Ja VI 423,26* (tibbo saddo -e suto, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -a111; 423,29'/oll.: pararanhesu para-
janapadesu); Sp 873,24 ( -ranhesu -esu ca); PsI 100,21
0
(dürato pi ti -ratthato pi -ato pi);- -dussantena, ind.
0 0
[tiro + dussanta qv sv dussa 1], through a curtain; DI
103,24 (yada pi tena manteti -ena manteti, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce 0 -dussena; Sv 272,18: -ena ti 0 -dussena, ayam eva va
pa!ho, Be so; Ce 0 -dussena ti 0 -dussanena; Ee tiro
dussa111 tena ti -ena; Se -ena ti -dussa-antena); -
0
0
-dhana, n., a covering; Abh 51; - 0
-nagaip, ind,,
through a mountain; Ap 535,29 ( -ku99~ -a111. Ce, Ee
0
0
so; Be -kun~; Ee wr -nabh~);- 0 -pabbataip, ind.,
0
through a hill; to the other side of a hill; D 1 78,3 (-a111
asajjamano gacchati);- -pakara, m., the other side of
0
a fence or wall; -a111 (and -a), through a fence; to the
other side of a fence; -e, over the fence; on the other
side of the fence; Vin IV 265,33 (0 -ku99e va -e va
cha99eyya); DI 78,3 (-~ -pabbat~ asajjamano
0
gacchati); A IV SS,11 (matugamassa sadd~ sm.liiti
0
-ku99al11 va-~ va hasantiya va bha!).antiya va) quoted
Vism 52,25 (eds -a); Ja VI 61,9' ( 0 -cchadan ti -~); -
0
-bhava, m., concealment,' disappearance; DI 78,3
!avibhava111 -~; Vism 390,10: avibhava111 karoti -a111
karotl ti aya111 attho); Ap 535,29; Sadd 71,23 CO-bhavana111
-o pa!icchannabhavo); - -bhüta, mfn., concealed;
0
disappeared; Nidd-a I 420,10; - 0 -ratfha, n,, another
rdistant) kingdom; Vin IV 296,s (-e sasailkasammate
sappa¡ibhaye; 296,11: -e ti yassa vijite viharati t~
thapetva aññassa rat!he); DI ll6,1 (-a 0 -janapada;
Sv 286,24: pararat!hato); Jaii 277,22 (putte ...
sippuggaharyatthaya düre -a111 pesenti);- 0 -raja(n), m.,
a king of another (distant) country; D JI 342,9 (-ano pi;
Sv 8ll,28: 0 -ranhe aññasmi111 pijanapade rajano);- see
also accantatirokkhatta sv accanta.
tirokaroti, pr. 3 sg. [S. tiraskaroti], covers; conceals;
Sp 210,13 (-onti etena ti tirokara~Jiy~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tirokaraniy~);- see also tirokara~Ja (sv tiro).
tila. m.n. [S. tila, m.], the sesame plant; its seed; Vin I
210.29 (-a111 pi ta!J9ul~ pi mugga111 pi viññapetva); S I
152.3 (ekameka111 -~ uddhareyya); 170,21* (-a
khettasmi papaka ekapaJJJ:.la dupa!).I).a ca); Ja II 278,19
•eka mahallika -e sete katva pattharitva, Ce, Ee so; Be
-anisete; Se -e nitthuse); III 55,4* (na sasassa -a atthi na
mugga napi tary9ula); Ap 583,15 (-e jate disvan'
atapatapite, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se atapatapane); Kv 338,3
, yatha -amhi tel~ anugat~); Mi1267,28 (atthi sali ...
maso -~ ... ); Sadd 439,23 (tilati tela111 -o); 562,31foll.
•rela111 -o -a111, tattha -o ti tilagaccho -an ti tapphal~);
0
- -kakka, m., sesame paste; Vin 1 205,33; Sv 88,29;-
'-ka!aka, m., a mole or spot; Abh 328 (tilako -o); -
'-tela. n., sesame oil; Vin IV 88,3o; Vism 591,16;
Sadd563,13;- 0 -pal}l}i,f, red sandal; Abh301;-
'-bija, n., l. a sesame seed; Nidd-a I 378,7;- 2. a sort
ofmllisneria; a water-plant; Abh 690;- -bijaka, n., a 0
331 tiQi
water-plant; Vism 533,23 (-· -adisevala); Spk III 174,34
(-'-adibhedena sevalena);- 0 -SaóguJika,f, a sesame
cake; Vin II 17,9; Dhp-a II 75,14;- see also tela.
tilaka\ m. [ts], l. (i) a spot; a freckle; Abh 328 (-o
tilaka!ako); 944; Ap 458,7 (-a pi!aka tatha na honti
kaye); Mil298,3o (sarire -a pi]aka daddüni utthahanti);
Dhp-a IV 172,3 (altano slle -a111 va kaJakal11 va adisva);
- (ii) a sectarian or ornamental mark on the forehead;
Abh 300 (visesako tu -o); 944; Ja VI 74,7 (haritala-
manosiladihi -e katva, Ee so; Ce haritalamanosilahi; Be,
Se haritalamanosiladini silaya111 gh~sitva nala¡e -e
katva); Ps II 127,33 (yatha va eken' eva -ena nala!a111 na
sobhati); - ifc see citta- (sv citta2); - 2. a tree or plant;
SAF: Wendlandia exerta (Roxb.) DC; Abh 561 (-o
khurako); 944 (rukkhabhede ca -o); Vv 6:7 (amba ca
sala -a ca jambuyo; V v-a 43,15: -a ti bandhujivaka-
pupphasadisapuppha eka rukkhajati) t Ja V 199,25* (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se tiry9uka); Ap 15,17; - 3. a kind of
animal;? Ap 347,17 (-a upajivanti t~ sara111 siha
vyaggha ca dlpi ca);- 0 '-ahata, mfn. [tilaka + ahata 1],
afflicted, marked, with spots; S I 170,29* (piilgala -a;
Spk I 239,3ofoll.: kaJasetadivaryryehi tilakehi ahatagatta);
Ja JI 350,15* (nanu passas' im~ ka!i111 dubbaJJJ:.l~ -~;
350,25' foll.: dubbaJJI).asañravaJJI).ato pi kaJatarehi tilakehi
ahatam).
tilaka 2 , ~- [tila+ ka2], a sesame seed;- ifc see eka-,
tilañchaka in Ee at Ja IV 364,2* is wr; Be, Ce, Se
nilañchaka.
tilati\ teleti, telayati, pr. 3 sg, [S. Dhatup tilati, telayati,
Wg §§ 28:62, 32:67], is oily; Dhatum 564 (tila snehe);
Sadd 439,23 (tila sinehane: -ati tela111 tilo); 562,31 (tila
sinehane: teleti telayati tela111 tilo tila111).
tila te, pr. 3 sg, [cf S Dhatup tilla ti, telati, Wg § 15,·27],
goes; Sadd 436,21 (tila gatiyam: ... -ati).
tiliccha, m. [S. lex. tilitsa], a kind of large snake; Abh 651
(gonaso tu -o).
tivaka, m. [?], jire, Sadd 334,7* (pavako -o 'nalo;
cf Abh 33: pavako dahano 'nalo).
tivuta, f. [cf S. trivf!a], a plant; SAF: Indian jalap, (White)
turpeth tree, Operculina turpethum (L.) Silva Manso;
Abh 590 (-a tipu¡a).
tisati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. lriJyati and S. Dhatup tve~ati,
Wg § 23:32: tvi~a d!ptau], is satisfied; Sadd 449,23 (tisa
tittiy~: titti tappan~ paripuryryata suhitata, -ati titti),
tissaip, sg, loe. f. ofta(d) qv.
tissannaip, gen. f. ofti 2 qv.
tisso, nom.f. ofti 2 qv.
ti in Ee at Th! 473 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se tisattisatani.
til}i, nom. n. of t¡l qv; - also occasionally iic for ti2 : -
0
(tl!).i)-kkhattUip, ind., three times; Ap 79,29 (-u111
cakkavattl mahiya issaro ahu111,): 438,17 (satan~
t1ryikkhattu111 ca cakkavattl ahos' ah~);
0
-gavutaip, ind., to the extent ofthree gavutas; Bv 13:36
(cetiyo -am uggato; or -a-m-uggato);- 0 -pupphan' in
Ee at Ap 278,18 is prob. wr for ÜJ).I).~ pupphan' (Be, Ce,
Se so); - 0 -mattani in Ee at Ja VI 405,15 (tiryi mattani
yojanani) is prob. wr; Be tiyojanamatt~; Ce tl!).i
yojanani; Se tiyojanani); - 0 -yojanaip, ind., to the
extent of three yojanas; Bv 14:27 (jinathüpo -am
uggato; or -a-m-uggato; cfl0:33: catuyojanamuggato);
tira
-
0
-yojanasamantii in Ee, Se at Ap 73,32 is prob. wr;
Be, Ce tiyojanani samanta;- 0 -lakkhaJ.Iasampanno in
Ee, Se at Ap 357,18 is prob. wr; Be, Ce tilakkha!).ena
sampanno;- 0 -sataip, num., 300;? Pa~is I 135,11 (-a111
di!!hiibhinivesa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ti111sasat~); -
0
-satanaip in Ee at Ap 317,28 is prob. wr for til).l).ai11
satan~ (Be, Ce, Se so).
tira, n. [ts], a shore; a bank; Abh 664; Vin I 1,6 (buddho
bhagava Umvelay~ viharati najja nerañjaraya -e
bodhimkkhamüle pa~hamabhisambuddho); II 237,3o
(y~ hoti mahasamudde mata111 kul).ap~ ta111 khippa111
yeva -a111 vaheti thala111 ussareti); MI 404,3o
(dakkhil).al11 ce pi gangaya -alll gaccheyya hananto
ghatento ... ); S IV l74,5foll. (so passeyya mahantalll
udaka!).l).avalll orimalll -alll sasank~ sappa~ibhayalll
parima111 -alll khemalll appatibhayalll); Dhp 85 (appaka
te manussesu ye jana paragamino athaya111 itara paja
-am evanudhavati; Dhp-a II 160,21: avasesa paja
sakkayadighitiram eva anudhavati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
sakkayatlram); Sn 672 (gantulll na hi -am ap' atthi);
Ja II 111,5 (nav~ -e ~hapetva); VI 446, 10* (aruyha
navalll taramano ki111 nu -amhi tighasi); Bv 2:63
(nerañjaraya -amhi); Kv 344,26 (orima111 ca bhikkhave
-alll samuddassa parimalll ca -a111 idalll dutiya111
suvidüravidür~); Ps 11 265,24 (gangaya orime -e
Magadharatth~ panme Videharaghalll); Dhp-a Ili
234,16 (ubho -ani bhijjilllsu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -a); -
0
-dassi(n), mfn., who se es or finds the shore; DI 222,24
(samuddika val).ija -illl sakul).alll gahetva) = A III 368,24;
S III 165,17 (sutava ariyasavako ... -1 paradassl); -
neg. atlradassi(n), mfn., who does not see the shore; out
of sight of shore; D I 222,26 (te atlradassiniya navaya
Uradassi111 sakul).~ muñcanti, Ce, Se so; Be
atlradakkhiniya; Ee atiradakkhil).iya; = A III 368,25: Be,
Ce, Ee atlradakkhil).iya; Se atlradassaniya); S III 164,33
(assutava puthujjano . . . atlradassl aparadassl; Spk Il
333,26: tlralll vuccati vattalll, talll na passati); Ja V 75,11
(atlradassiniya navaya samuddapighe bhinnaya, Ce, Se
so; Be atlradassaniya; Ee atlradassaniyaya, prob. wr);
VI 440,15* (atlradassl puriso mahante udakal).l).ave;
440,w: samudde bhinnanavo tlra111 apassanto);
Mil 220,23 (ummattako . . . samudda111 pi atlradassl
pakkhandati);- see also atlraka, atlradakkhi(n).
tiraJ.Ia, n., -a, f [from tlreti], judging, deciding about;
Nidd 1 339,11 (tassa ñal).aya dassanaya tu1anaya -aya
vibhavanaya pañha111 pucchati); Pa~is 1 17,17 (pariññaya
0
'-attho abhiññeyyo; Pa~is-a 98,21joll.: 0 -pariññaya
aniccadito upaparikkhana~~ho); Nett 54,5 (ñanam
sammaditthi -a vipassana); Vism 693,12 (anicca111
dukkh~ anatta ti
0
-vasena); Dhp-a Ili 252,15foll.
(tividhena manena -ena dharaJ).ena piiraJ).ena va, -alll
nama idalll ettakan ti nayato -~);- 0 -pariñña,f, the
understanding that is judging; Ja VI 259,8· ([khandhesu]
agul).alll upadharetva tira!).~ -a); Nidd 1 53,6 (katama
-a ... phass~ tlreti aniccato dukkhato ... ); Vism 607,2;
Sv 67,27 (sakalalokalll -aya tathaya gato avagato ti
tathagato ); Dhp-a 11 172,3 (ah are pa~ikülasaññavasena
pana bhojanassa parijanan~ -a).
1 poriil).alll aggaññalll akkhar~ anusaranti na tv ev' assa
tireti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [from tira, or caus. oftarati ? cf S.
tarayati, S. Dhatup tlrayati, Wg § 35:58: tira
332 tu
karmasamaptau], l. carries through, accomplishes;
settles, brings to a conclusion; Dhatup 609 (tira
kammasamattiyalll); Dhatum 851; Ud 18,9 (t~ raja ...
na yathadhippayalll -eti; Ud-a 159,11: na nighapeti);
Sadd 560,1foll. (tira kammasam[p]attiya111: ... -eti
-ayati); - aor. 3 sg. tlresi, Ja Ili 292,2o (vinicchaye
nislditva age -esi); - absol. tiretva, Vin III 12,32 (t~
kara!).lya111 -etva); Mil 7,25; Vism 94,19 (talll kicc~
-etva va); Sp 36,17; - 2.judges, examines, decides
about; Nidd l 53,7 (eva111 ñat~ katva phassalll -eti
aniccato dukkhato ... ); Ps V 28,12 (upaparikkheyya ti
tuleyya -eyya); Th-a Ili 118,33 (talll namariip~ -eti
vipassati); - part.pr. (a) tlrenta, mfn., Ja V 48,w;
Spk III 254,28 (tulento -ento); - neg. atlrenta, mfn.,
Ja V 122,24·; (b) tlraya(t), mfn., Vism 640,3o (tulayato
-ayato); (e) tlrayanta, mfn., Nidd I 185,12 (tu1ayanto
-ayanto vibhavayanto); Vism 635,29 (tulayantassa
-ayantassa);- absol. (a) tlretva, Ja III 358,1o· (patighito
nu kho 'mhi s!le paññaya sute ti -etvii); IV 164,19'
(vicinitva -etva upaparikkhitva); Nidd 1 56,24; -
neg. atlretva, Ja V 118,n; (b) tlrayitva, Nidd I 50,29
(et~ adlnav~ disva passitva tulayitva -ayitva
vibhavayitva; Nidd-a 1 164,19: gul).agul).alll vittharetva);
Patis II 200,22 (Pa~is-a 652,26: udayabbayanupassana-
vasena -ayitva); - pp tirita, mfn., carried through;
settled; judged, decided upon; Ja III 334,18* (dhamma-
ttho 'halll pure asi111 bahu-attalll me-~, Ce, Se so; Ee
bahu atth~; Be bahü atta me -a; 334,26·: bahü atta -a
vinicchita, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee vinicchinitva); Nidd I 339,15
(lakkhal).~ ñatalll hoti dinhalll tu1ital11 -a111 vibhüt~
vibhavit~); Patis 1 23,16 (te dhamma pariññata e' eva
honti -a ca); Vism 693,zo; - neg. atlrita, mfn., Nidd I
339,w; PsI 52,26; Th-a I 218,14 (anuriipapa~iññadln~
atlritatta, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ataritatta);
fpp (a) tlretabba, mfn., Ps II 67,3 (anumetabbo tuletabbo
-etabbo); Th-a 11 210,3o (talll kicc~ -etabbam eva);
(b) neg. atlral).eyya, mfn., see sv.
tivati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tlvati, Wg § 15:57], is fat;
Sadd 440,12 (ti va ... thiiliye: ... -ati).
tisu, loe. ofti 2 qv
2
tiha, m.n. [ti+ aha(n)], see sv ti .
2
tihi, instr. ofti qv.
tu, ind. [ts] (followed by eva written tv), an enclitic
particle: however; but; rather; (sometimes merely
expletive); Vin I 245,5 (anujanami bhikkhave y~ tato
kappiyalll talll saditu111, na tv evahalll bhikkhave kenaci
pariyayena jatariiparajatalll saditabballl pariyesitabban ti
vadami); Ili 20,36 (tatonidana111 hi moghapurisa
maral).aiTJ va nigaccheyya . . . na tv eva tappaccaya
kayassa bheda . . . niraya111 upapajjeyya); V 89,3*
(viicacittena jayanti na tu kayena jayare); DI 77,14
(aya111 muñjo ayalll islka añño muñjo añña islka
muñjamha tv eva islka pavajha ti); 113,23 (na arahati
bhava111 Sol).adal).Q.o samaJ).al11 Gotama111 dassanaya
upasankamitu111 samaJ).o tv eva Gotamo arahati
bhavantalll Sol).ada!).Q.al11 dassanaya upasankamitu111);
249,1o (si ya ... tassa purisassa ... dandhayitatt~ ... no
tv eva tathagatassa ... dandhayitattalll): III 86,26 (tad eva
atthalll ajananti); MI 236,4 (siya ... hatthippabhinnalll
tmpseti
asajja purisassa sotthibhavo na tv eva bhavantarp
Gotamarp asajja siya purisassa sotthibhavo); Sn 938
(osane tv eva vyaruddhe disva); Th 1138 (tatha tu
kassami yatha pi issaro); Ja VI 438,1• (yarp tv evajañña
purisarp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be yad eva; 438,zo-: yarp tu eva
ayam eva va patho, Se so; Ce, Ee yarp e' eva; Be yarp
eva); Ap 20,31 (sakka samudde udakarp pametuq¡ ... na
tv eva tava sabbaññu ñfu_larp sakka pametave); 87,2
(Atthadassi tu bhagava); 574,12 (dehena na tu cittena);
Mil287,11 (aroheyya pi ce maharaja gaii.gaya udakarp
patisotarp na tv eva bodhisatto patinivatteyya apatva
sammasambodhirp); Vism 427,21 (pettivisayarp, so hi
apayo e' eva duggati ca ... na tu vinipato); Pj I 68,25 (na
e' assa pavisanamaggo paññayati nikkhamanamaggo eva
tu pakato hoti); Bv-a 282,37* (dibbarp tu cakkaratanarp
addha patubhavissati); Sadd 892,27 (tu iti ekarpse va
vacana1ail.kare va visesanivattane va); esp.
(a) kamarp ... tu ... : although ... still ... ; Ja IV 262,19*
(kamarp janapado masi ... na tv evaharp rururp dubbhe);
- (b) varaq¡/seyyo . . . na tu ... : better . . . than that ... ;
V in III 89,14 (vararp tumhehi ... kucchi parikanto na tv
eva udarassa karana gihinarp annamannassa
uttarimanussadhammassa v~1_1o bhasito); Ja I 247,27*
(seyyo amitto matiya upeto na tv eva mitto
mativippahino ); Pv-a 195,4 (vararp etarp sabbarp
saii.karaküte cha<;l<;litaq¡ na tv eva imesarp mu1_1<;lakanarp
dinnan ti); - kirp tu: but rather; however, nevertheless;
Pj I 66,15 (na e' eso [khe~o) ettha sada sannicito hutva
tighati kirp tu yada satta tatharuparp ahararp
passanti ... ); 114,1 (idha pana puriso yeva so devaputto
kirp tu sadhar~anamavasena devata ti vutto ); 219,26
(tassa sabbo pi sabbakalarp na upakappati . . . kirp tu
kocid eva kadacid eva upakappati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee kirp
pana); Nidd-a I 442,29 (na parehi buddhatta buddho kirp
tu sayam eva anuttararp sammasambodhirp
abhisambuddhatta buddho ti vuttaq¡ hoti); Bv-a 47,7 (na
pan' esa vicikicchasaii.khata kail.kha ti kirp tu paññatti-
ajananarp nama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kirp nu); 75,23
(Sumedhap~<;litena assamap~1_1asala . . . na sahattha
mapita kirp tu ... devaputtena nimmita, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
kirp nu).
tmpseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup trarpsati,
traq¡sayati, Wg § 33:88], speaks; shines; Sadd 567,12
(tusi ... bhasayarp: -eti -ayati).
tmphati, pr. 3 sg., see sv tuhati.
tmiga, mfn. (and m. ?) [ts], high, prominent, peaked; (a
peak; ?) Abh 708 (ucco tu Ul_ll_lato -o); Ja III 433,w• (-e
upari pabbate; 433,12': -e ti tikhi1_1e); IV 287,8* (-ani
himavato pabbatassa kütani; 287,21-: -ani ti uccani
tikkhi1_1aggani); Thi-a 201,9 (s~hatuilgasadisi ti sa1_1ha -a
sesamukhavayavanarp anurupa ca; cf K.R. Norman,
1971, p.113foll.); Dath4:30 (-arp kanakasikharirajarp
0
vethayitva); - -nasa, mfn., having a prominent (ie not
snub) nose; Ja V 216,18' (visalakkhi -a rattoghi ...
uttamitthi);- -nasa,f, a prominent (ie not snub) nose;
0
Sv 800,19 (-a ti laddhavohararp ghanarp vagitva thapita-
haritalavagarp viya maññanti);- 0 -nasika, mfn., with a
prominent nos e; S II 284,16 (passatha . . . etarp
bhikkhurp .. . tanukarp -an ti); - 0
-nasika,f, a
prominent (ie not snub) nose; Ap 575,13 (kuhirp te -a);
333 tucchaka
0
- -Val}taka, m., the name of a plant; Ja VI 537,22* (-a,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -valliyo); - 0 -hara, 0 -haraka, m., a
kind of tree; a dye from it; Sp !!26,wfoll. (mañjegharp
ca -arp ca thapetva sabbarp khandharajanarp vattati. -o
nama eko kaJ.ltakarukkho tassa haritalav~1_1arp khandha-
rajanarp hoti); Vin-vn 2744 (khandhesu mañjegharp
0
-harakarp ... thapetva).
tuccha, mfn. (and n. ?) [ts], empty; vain, fruitless; trifling;
lacking substance; (an empty place; ?) Abh 698 (-arp ca
rittakarp suññam); MI 440,3 (nanu tvarp Bhaddali
tasmirp samaye ritto -o aparaddho ti; Ps III !52,wfoll.:
anto ariyagu1_1anarp abhavena rittako tucchako); II 261,25
(anicca bhikkhave kama -a musa); III 95,13
(udakama1_1iko ritto -o); Th 172 (ajjhattarp ca bahiddha
ca -o kayo adissatha); Ja II 9.27 (ayarp mahallako
icchacare thito -o na kiñci janati ti); 399,1 (mayharp
agamanarp ma -arp karotha detha me ekarp ambaphalan
ti); IV !86,12 (devaloko -o viya jato); 442,n· (catukkan
ti -arp); 478,4· (-a nissara nipphala honti); Cp 1:10:9
(dajja 'harp sakam attanarp na so -o gamissati); Mil5,22
(-o vata bho Jambudipo); 10,24 (-a vata bho ime veda
palapa vata bho ime veda asara nissara); 13,18 (-o vata
me upajjhayo balo vata me upajjhayo); Vism 494,32
( -tta); 612,18 (appakarp pi hi loke -an ti vuccati);
0
Sv !88,1s (gamarp pi1_1<;laya pavisitva ... -o nikkhamati,
ayarp vuccati n' eva harati na paccliharati ti) = Spk III
!86,18 f. Pj II 53,3o (tucchako); Dhp-a 1 95,4 (tasmirp
kh~e aramo -o ahosi); 193,2 (majjhe -arp katva ubhosu
passesu ba1akayarp payojesi); II 184,14 (eko pana me
hattho na -o ti); IV 104,26 (cora pi kahapa1_1agabbharp
-arp katva); Ap-a 230,21 (kadalikkhandho sarena ritto
-o); 239,5 (Moggallana ma -o tava vayamo ); Saddh 431
(-assapi viharassa u~ara yadisi siñ); - tuccharp, tu echa,
tucchena, adv., in an empty way: falsely; with empty
hands; Vin 1 237,35 (tarp bhagavantarp asata -a musa va
abhütena abbhacikkhanta) f. D III 34,12 (Sv 830,1s: -a ti
-ena antosaravirahitena); Vin III 91,1 (-arp musa vilapin
ti; Sp 492,29: vacanatthavirahato -arp); Ja III 156,13*
(tvarp ca -arp vilapasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tarp); Ps II 24,26
(asata -ena abbhacikkhanto); Pj II 296,27 (na yuttaq¡
buddhassa santikarp -am eva ganturp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tucchakena);- 0 -pokkhara, n., a (drum or ví7Jii) skin;
Sp 545,12 (Sp-t [Be] II 321,24: -an ti avinaddhacammarp,
bheripokkhararp vi1_1apokkhararp ca); - atuccha, mfn.,
not empty; not fruitless; Ja III 307,13 (-o loko, atthi
dhammikasam~abrahm~a ti); Patis II 240,5 (pañca-
kkhandhe tucchato passanto ... pañcannarp khandhanarp
nirodho -arp nibbanan ti passanto); Mp II 349,25
(avañjhani ti -ani saphalani, sa-udrayani ti attho );
Nidd-a 1 361,17 (tacchan ti -arp); - atituccha, mfn.,
very empty; Saddh 430 (-e pi dissanti dese ...
cetiyadayo ).
tucchaka, mfn. [tuccha + ka2; S. lex. tucchaka], empty;
vain, fruitless; lacking substance; D 1 240,4 (bhasitarp ...
-arp yeva sampajjati); S III 142,33* (phe1_1apil_l<;lüpamarp
rüparp ... rittakarp -arp hoti); M 1 329,3o (ma h' eva te
rittakam eva ahosi -am eva ahosi; Ps II 413,4: tuyharp
vacanarp rittakarp ma hotu -arp ma hotü ti); A V 159,22
(alikarp marp samma avaca -arp marp samma avaca);
Mil246,19 (-arp vata bho etarp sam~assa Gotamassa
 tu echa
sasana¡p bhavissati); Pj 11 53,3o (gama¡p pir;t<,laya
pavisitva gihipapañcena papañcito -o nikkhamati) -1-
Spk III 186,18 (tuccho); Pj 11 423,26 (pabbajitana¡p 0 -tta¡p
disva); Bv-a 177,3 (rittaka -a yeva sabbe sailkhara); -
tucchaka¡p, tucchakena, adv., emptily; falsely; Vin III
92,2o (-a¡p maya bhar;tita¡p musa maya bhar;tita¡p); Ps 11
1 17,32 (tu echa ti -ena).
tucchii, f [?], pricking, piercing; Sadd 863,15 (tudana¡p
-a).
tucchivedikiibhümiyaqt in Ee at Ps III 245,25 is wr for
kucchivedika- (Be, Ce, Se so).
tuijati, pass. pr. 3 sg. oftudati qv.
tuijana, n. rJrom tujjati], piercing, pammg; Ud-a 347,4
(pañcupadanakkhandhe pi -ato duruddharato ca sallan
ti).
tuijeti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tuñjati, tuñjayati,
Wg §§ 7:71, 32:30], is strong; protects; Sadd 530,12
(tujja balapalanesu: -eti -ayati); - see also tuñjati,
tuñjeti 1.
tuñjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tuñjati, Wg § 7:71], is strong;
hurts; Sadd 345,26 (tuji ba1ane ca: . . . hi¡psapekkhako
cakaro, -ati);- see also tujjeti, tojati.
tuñjeti 1, -ayati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tuñjayati,
Wg § 32:30], hurts; is strong; gives; inhabits;
Sadd 530,14 (tuji piji hi¡psaba1adananiketanesu: ... -e ti
-ayati); - see also tujjeti, tojati.
tuñjete, -ayati 2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tuñjayati,
Wg § 33:82], speaks; Sadd 531,1 (tuji piji ... bhasaya¡p:
-eti -ayati ... kathetí ti attho ).
tutati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tu~ati, Wg § 28:83], quarrels;
Sadd 353,26 (tu~a ka1ahakammani: -ati).
tutati 2 , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tro~ayate, Wg § 33:25], cuts;
Sadd 353,23 (tu~a chedane: ... -ati).
tuttha, mfn. pp oftussati qv.
tutthi, f [S. tu~~i], satisfaction, contentment; pleasure;
Abh 87 (plti vitti -i); MI 271,28 (n' atthi no kiñci
uttari¡p karaniyan ti tavataken' eva -i¡p apajjeyyatha);
S 148,15 (dullabha bhagava yadida¡p -I ti; Spk I 106,5: -I
ti catupaccayasantoso ); Dhp 331 (-I sukha ya
itañtarena); Ja I 33,12 (bahirakadana¡p hi ...
bodhisattana¡p -i¡p katu¡p na sakkoti); Nidd l 3,3 (piti
ti ... pahaso vitti -i ... ); Pa~is-a 583,25 (Ánando ti tassa
therassa nama¡p, so hi jayamano yeva ca ku1e ananda¡p
bhusa¡p -i¡p akasi); Dhatup 448 (tusa -imhi);
Mhv 37:130 (raja nivedesi -i¡p eva pan' atttano); -
0
-diina, n. [tunhi + dana1], a gift, a present; Ja Ili 535,13'
(pur;tl).apatta¡p dadahi me ti . . . mayha¡p -a¡p dehi);
Thi-a 197,7 (ima¡p sa~aka¡p -a¡p acariyabhaga¡p tuyha¡p
dadami);- 0 -diiya, m. [tunhi + daya 1], a gift, a present;
Abh 355 (pur;tl).apatto -e); Ja lll 349,2 (sattakahapar;ta-
satani gahetva mahasattassa thuti¡p katva -a¡p
datukamo); VI 15,33'joll. (pur;tr;tapattan ti -a¡p dajjun
ti ... -a¡p dadeyyun ti, Be, Ce so; Se pur;tr;tapattan ti
0
-daya¡p 0 -dana¡p ... ; Ee 0 -dana¡p dadeyyun ti); Dhp-a Il
131,9 (aya¡p te bhati ti salina¡p catasso naFyo dapetva
aya¡p te -o ti apara pi catasso na)iyo dapesi); -
atutthi,f., discontent; Ps 11 118,25 (anabhiraddhi ti -i);
- atitutthi, f, too great pleasure; Ja I 207,14 Hya
hirottappa¡p bhinditva).
tul}ii, f [Lftiir;ta, tür;tiJ, a quiver; Sadd 922,22 (-a tul).! ...
334 ÍUI}hi
var;tl).abhedo 'ya¡p, Ee so; better read tiil).a tiir;ti ?).
tul}ira, m. [cf tur;thira, tiir;tira], a quiver; ? Sadd 922,10 (-o
tir;tiro ... var;tr;tabhedo ' ya¡p).
tul}i,f, se e sv tiir;ti.
tul}ira, m., see sv tiir;tira.
tul}!.J,a, n. [ts], l. the beak (of birds); the snout or mouth
(of animals); Abh 260 (mukha¡p -a¡p vatta¡p); S V
148,26 (makkaro ... -ena gar;thati); Ja I 500,14 (kaka ...
kar;tayaggasadisehi -ehi akkhini vijjhanti); 11 162,24
(khadirakkhandha¡p ca -ena paharitva); 405,s
([va<,l<,lhakisiikaro] -ena rukkha¡p parivatteti mukhena
(,lasitva); IV 392,15 ([miga] siilgena siilga¡p -ena -a¡p
alliyapetva); Ap 113,5 (-en a sala¡p paggayha); Sv 951,18
(bhamaro ... -ena pi pakkhehi pi raja¡p aharitva); Pj I
72,32 (ja1iika nailgunhena gahitapadese sapekkha va
hutva -ena aññapadesa¡p gal).hati); Mhv 37:133;
Sadd 356,14 (tu<,Ji to)ane: tur;t<,Jati -o); - 2. a point; the
point of an arrow; Sp 447,16 (talena va -ena va tharuna
va mareti); 767,16 (siicinakhacchedanadina¡p pi -ena va
dharaya va); - ifc see así- (sv asi 2), mukha-, 1oha-; -
see also ahitundika (sv ahí).
tul}!.J,aka, n. [tu~4a + ka2], a beak; a snout, a mouth; - ifc
see mukha-, 1oha-.
tul}!.J,ati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tul).(,late, tu (,lati, to<,Jati,
Wg §§ 8:23, 9:67, 28:92], splits; Dhatum 159 (tu<,Ji
to<,Jane); Sadd 356,14 (tu<,Ji to)ane: -ati tur;t<,lo); - see
also to)ati.
tul}!.J,i (or tur;t<,li[n] ?), m. [cf S. tur;t<,li], an arrow; Ja Il
403,3* (dhanu¡p -i¡p ca nikkhippa, Se so; Be kar;t<,la¡p ca;
Ce, Ee tiil).i¡p ca; 403,6·: dhanu¡p ca sarasailkhata¡p -i¡p
ca nikkhippa, Se so; Be sarasailkhata¡p kar;t<,Ja¡p ca; Ce,
Ee dhanu¡p ca tiil).ÍJP ca).
tul}!.J,ika, tul}!.J,iya, m. rJrom tur;t<,Ja ?], a tax-collector; Ja V
102,23* (rattimhi cora khadanti diva khadanti tul).(,liya;
103,2·: tur;t<,liya ti vadhabandhanadihi pi)etva adhamma-
balisadhaka); Ap 354,16 (ocara tur;t<,Jika e' eva ranha¡p
vidha¡psayu¡p tada).
tul}!.J,ikira, tur;t<,Jikira, m. ? [?], a pot on firestones; ? D IIl
200,1 * (sugandha¡p tar;t<,!ulapphala¡p -e pacitvana;
Sv 965,16foll.: ukkhaliya¡p akiritva niddhumailgarena
aggina pacitva, tattha kira jotipasar;ta nama honti, atha
kho te tayo pasal).e ~hapetva ta¡p ukkhali¡p aropenti,
pasar;tehi tejo samunhahitva ta¡p pacati); Sadd 353,18*
(gha~o kumbho ghari kumbhi tur;t<,Jikiro tu ukkha!I).
tul}t}iya, m., se e sv tur;t<,Jika.
tUI}l}aqt, ind. [S. tilfl).am], quickly; Abh 40; Sadd 902,31
( ... -a¡p acira¡p tuva~a¡p ice ete sighatthe); - see also
2
tarati .
tul}hika, mfn. [S. tii~r;tika], silent; V in l 136,11 * (in uddana:
sannipatanti -a; see l02,6foll.); Pe~ 142,22 (-o sajjhaya¡p
karoti).
tul}hikkhaka, mfn., see tur;thikata sv tul).h!.
tul}hi, tul).hlm, tur;thi¡p, ind. [S. tii~r;tim; BHS also tii~r;tiJ,
silently; (without verb) (there is) silence; esp. tur;thi
bhavati, is silent; Abh 1149 H tu mone); Vin I 103,3
(asantiya apattiya -I bhavitabba¡p); III 150,18
(yassayasmato khamati ... so -' assa yassa na kkhamati
so bhaseyya); 150,zJ (khamati sailghassa tasma -I); DI
49,12 (tva¡p pana samma Hvaka ki¡p -I ti); 94,18 (-I
maya¡p bhavissama); 11 212,21* (ekasmi¡p -im asine
tuQhira
sabbe -1 bhavanti te, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -!m aslne); M II
139,13 (so bhuttav1 muhutta111 -1 nis!dati); SI 223,6
1asura anumodiq¡su deva -1 ahesuq¡); Dhp 227 (nindanti
-iq¡ as!naq¡ nindanti bahubhai.linam); Sn 720 (-1 yati
mahodadhi); Ja II 67,19* H s1ha samacchare); III 217,2o
lsace raja janeyya na -1 bhaveyya); IV 254,22* (-1 ahii
kimpuriso sabhariyo); VI 45,18* (mugo va -!m as1no, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce -im); 179,24 (-1 hoh1 ti); 570,14* (pekkhat'
ev' assa -1 sa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tm).hiya; 570,2s-: atha
kho -1 hutva ... , Ce so; Be -1 sa; Ee, Se tu~hiya);
~i1 20,28 (ayasma Ayupa1o -1 ahosi na kiñci pa~ibhasi);
Vism 343,28 (keci pana apassamana viya -1 honti);
Sp 1399,32foll. (sambandhan ti yaq¡ parapadena
sambandhitva tu~hissa ti va tu~hassa ti va vuccati,
Yavatthitan ti yaq¡ parapadena asambandhaq¡ katva
Yicchinditva -1 assa ti va tu~ha assa ti va vuccati, Be, Ce
so: Ee vicchinditva -i assa ti va; Se vicchinditva -i assa
ti vuccati); Pv-a 117,2 (so brahm~o niruttaro -1 ahosi);
Sadd 899,3 (-1 ti abhasane); - 0 -kata, tu~hikata, mfn.,
silent; Ja IV 25,1o* (svajja -o dani sangha~iq¡ sibbam
acchasi, Se so; Be tu~hikato; Ce tu~h!kako; Ee
ru~hikkhako, wr ?; 25,12·: kiñci avadanto);
'-bhliva, m., silence; not speaking; Abh 429 (monam
abhasanaq¡ -o); V in I 103,3 (-en a kho panayasmante
parisuddha ti vedissami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tu~hi- ); III 6.15
1adhivasesi bhagava -ena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tu~hi-); DI
95,4 (vyakarohi idani Ambaqha na dani te -assa kiilo);
~ I 161,33 (sannipatitana111 vo bhikkhave dvayaJ11
kar~1YaJ11 dhamm! va katha ariyo va -o); S II
273,12foll. (katamo nu kho ariyo -o ti); A II 210,26
1bhasite -e sampajanakañ hoti); Ja VI 561,26" (tvaq¡ hi
ma111 ... -en a kilamesi);- 0 -bhñta, mfn., silent; V in III
162,3 (-a mali.kubhiita pattakkhandha adhomukha, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee tu~hi-); DI 49,9 (Jlvako komiirabhacco
rañño ... avidiire -o nisinno hoti); Vv 20:1 (pi~<;laya te
carantassa -assa tiqhato ); Ja VI 294,28* (-o
upekkheyya); Mil 5,30 (amacca -a rañño mukhaq¡
olokayamiina aqhaq¡su); Vism 187,32 (ahaq¡ kamma-
qhaniko ti -ena gantuq¡ na va~~ati); Dhp-a III 395,13
levariipo hi -o pi muni niima na hot! ti).
tm;lhira, m., se e sv tii~1ra.
tutta, n. [S. tottra], a goad (for guiding elephants);
.\bh 367; 448; D II 266,5* (accankuso va nago ca jitaJ11
me 0 -tomaraJ11; Sv 702,5: -a111 vuccati k~~amiile
Yijjhana-ayak~~ako); Ja IV 310,19* (-ehi so haññatu
pacanehi; 311 ,31·: -eh1 ti dvik~~akehi d!ghala~(h1hi, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be dvik~~akiihi);- 0 '-addita, mfn., pained
bY the goad; Ja V 268,4* (nago -o yatha, Ce, Ee so; Be
ruttagito; Se tu~<;laddito; 273,23·: tuttehi viddho nago
yatha nadati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tu~<;lehi) f. Ap 438,12 (Ee
so: Be, Ce, Se tuttaqito).
tudaka, mfn. ffrom tudati], pricking, piercing; - ifc see
anto-.
tudati, pr. 3 sg. [S. tudati], strikes; pricks, pierces, goads;
Dhatup 465 (tuda vyathane); Dhatum 513; Ud 45,28*
1 -anti vaca ya jana asaññata; Ud-a 263,4: -anti vijjhanti);
Ja I 500,18* (YaJ11 maq¡ -ati vayaso); III 189,15* (kiima
-anti maq¡; 189,2o·foll.: te ma111 hadaye vijjhant! ti);
VI 110,20* (usiihi satt!hi ca tomarehi dubhayiini passani
-anti kandataq¡); PsI 81,24 (taq¡ vinodeti -ati vijjhati
335 tumula
n!harati); Sadd 391,22 (tuda vyathane: -ati vitudati); -
part.pr. tudanta, mfn., Sv 933,29 (camma111 -anto viya);
- aor. 3 sg. tudittha, Mhv 37:133; - absol. tuditva,
PsI 114,29 (mammani bhinditva -itva); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. tujjati, l. is pierced; Sadd 391,22 (tuda
vyathane: ... kammani -ati);- part.pr. tujjamana, mfn.,
M II 73,9* (so <;layhati siilehi -amano) = Th 780;
Saddh 279; - 2. pierces; pains; Vism 503,10* (sattanaq¡
hadayaq¡ soko visasallaq¡ va -ati); - pp tunna, mfn.
and n., l. (mfn.) [ts] struck, pierced; - ifc see
vyadhimar~a-; - 2. (n.) sewing; mending; Vin I 290,16
(anujanami bhikkhave aggataq¡ -a111 ovaqikaq¡
k~<;lusakaq¡ da!hikamman ti; Sp 1128,25: suttakena
saq¡sibbanaq¡ -aq¡); Ja I 8,31 (ji~~assa [c1varassa] hi -aq¡
va aggatadanaq¡ va katabbaq¡ hoti); - 0 -klira, m., a
tailor; a mending tailor; Ja IV 38,24; Nidd-a I 38,27; -
0
-kliraka,m., id.; Vv-a251,17;- 0 -Vliya,m., a tailor;
Abh507 (-o ca sociko); Vinii 159,29; Pv21:14; JaVI
366,11; Ap 359,18 (rajaka -a ca); Pv-a 161,2o (aha111 -o
bhadde bhatiya 0
-kammaJ11 karonto vicarami);
Mil331,11; Mhv 32:3.
tudana, n. [from tudati], pricking, goading; hurting;
Sv 940,2o (tassa aññena -aq¡ pl\a va abadho va n' atthi);
Ps IV 143,14 (samappavattesu assesu sarathino ayaq¡
ollyatl ti -aq¡ ... n'atthi);- ifc see anto-, janapada-.
tudara, m. [?], a kind of animal; Ap-a 536,13* (d1p1 accha
taraccha ca -a varu~a sada).
tunna, mfn., pp of tudati qv.
tuppati, topati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tupati, topati,
Wg §§ 11:10, 28:26], hurts; Sadd 403,22 (tupa
hiq¡sayaJ11: topati tuppati).
tubbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tiirvati, Wg § 15:61], hurts;
Sadd 406,3 (ubb! tubb! thubb1 ... hiq¡sattha: ubbati -ati
thubbati ... ).
tubhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tubhnati, tubhyati, tobhate,
Wg §§ 31:49, 26:131, 18;14], hurts; Sadd 409,31 (nabha
tubha hiq¡saya111: nabhati -ati).
tmp.hati, see sv tuhati.
tum, [ts], gr.t.t., the (ending of) the infinitive; Sadd 850,29
(icchatthesu tave tuq¡ va samiinakattukesu ...
saddhamma111 sotum icchati); - tumatthe, in the sense
of the infinitive; Sadd 696,28 ([sampadanaJ11] -e:
lokanukampaya lokaq¡ anukampitun ti attho); -
tumanta, mfn., ending in "tum"; Sadd 309,17 (idiini
--padiini vuccante: bhavituq¡ ubbhavituq¡ ... ).
turna, m. [cfS. atman, ~V tman ?], (prob.) the self;
oneself; Vin II 186,31 (yaq¡ -o karissati -o va tena
paññayissat! ti; Sp 1275,16foll.: Yal11 so karissati);
Sn 890 (-o saha hoti nih!napañño; Nidd I 299,5 foil.: so
pi ten' eva saha hoti h!napañño); 908 (addakkhi ce kiq¡
hi -assa tena); Pv 27:4 (therassa dassay1 -a111;
Pv-a 181,13 foil.: therassa attanaq¡ uddisayi dassesi); -
see also atta(n), atuma(n).
tumu1a, mfn. [ts], tumultuous, noisy; confused; Ja II
217,14* (vattat' ajja -o ghoso yatha vijjuta jaladharassa
gajjato; 218,8·: -o mahanto asanisaddasadiso ghoso);
V 43,7* (tiqhanti te -aq¡ passasanta, Ce so; Be, Se
tumiilaq¡; Ee bhimiila; 43,17": bhiq¡sanakaJ11 maha-
saddiinubandhaq¡ assasapassasa111 muñcanta tiqhanti, Ce,
Se so; Be assasaq¡; Ee wr bhiq¡sanakamahasadda
tumba
nibaddhal11 assasal11); VI 24 7 ,5* (nirayo sada -o ghora-
rilpo; 247,10': so nirayo niccabahalandhakaro); 282,22*
(tattha ppanado -o babhiiva); 489,27* (ath' ettha vattati
saddo -o bheravo maha) i- Cp 1:9:25 (Cp-a 85,14: -o ti
ekakolahallbhiito); Bv-a 288,33* (nigha~asaddo -o ahosi).
tumba, m.n. [cf S. tumba], l. a gourd,perhaps Lagenaria
vulgaris Ser.; - 2. a kind of vessel; Abh 1124
(km:_¡<;likaya~hake -o); Vin I 205,16 (telabhajanal11 na
sa111vijjati, anujanami bhikkhave tiJ:_¡i -ani lohatumbal11
katthatumbaJ11 phalatumban ti); D II l66,18joll. (ima111
me bhonto -al11 dadantu ahal11 pi -assa thiipaJTI ca
mahaJTI ca karissami ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e kumbhal11 ...
kumbhassa); Ja IV 114,5 (-ato pivitva); VI 528,14*
(pmp:_¡apattal11 dadami te imal11 ca madhuno -aJ11);
Sp 200,29 (bhesajjatelana111 -ani piiretva); 11 04,2o
(bhagavata tayo -a anuññata); Sadd 405,2o (dve ca -ani);
- ifc see amalaka-, udaka-, kattha- (sv kattha2); - 3. a
measure of capacity, esp. for grain; a pipe or tube;
Abh 484 (a~hako nitthiya111 -o); 1124; Ja I 468,9
(catasso na~iyo -o nama); Mil 102,11 (vihisattammm:_¡ani
dve ca -a); Sv 1O11,24 (0 -matte pa1,1ake vidhunitva); -
ifc see niddhamana-; - 0 -kataha, n., a vessel made
from a gourd; Vin II 114,36 (na bhikkhave -e pi1,1<;laya
caritabbaJ11; Sp 1205,1: -an ti alabuka~ahal11 vuccati);-
-cüJika in Ee at Ap-a 216,23* is wr for tambacii~aka (Be,
0
Ce, Se so); - 0 -bija, n., a gourd seed; Pj I 44,14 (attha
danta ... --santhana);- see also tumbi.
tumbaka, m. [t~~ba + ka2], a kind ofvessel; Ap 303,9 (-e
ca kara1:_1<;le ca karayiJTI); 313,7.
tumbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tumbati, Wg § 11:38],
distresses; Sadd 405,19 (lubi tubi addane: lumbati -ati).
tumbala, m. [?], a kind of bee;? Sp 715,25 (cirika nama
sapakkha dighamakkhika, 0 -namika ca atthipakkha
ka~amahabhamara honti, Be, Se so; Ce aqhipakkhika; Ee
atthimakkhika, prob. wr).
tumbi, f, [ts], a gourd; SAF: bottle gourd, Lagenaria
siceraria (Malina) Stand/.; Abh 596 (tumbyalabu ca
labu);- see also tumba.
tumha, [cf S. yu~ma], the base of the pronoun
tvmyt!tumhe qv; - 0 -sadda, m., the pronoun "tval11";
Vv-a 9,11 (tesaddo ... namo te buddhavir' atthii ti adisu
-assa vasena sampadane, tuyhan ti attho) quoted
Sadd 292,8 (tuyha111saddassa); Sadd 26,20 (-ena vattabbe
atthe); 289,29 (tumhena yogo tayyogo -ena yogo ice ev'
attho).
tumhaJ11, tumhakatp, pl. gen./dat. ojtva111 qv.
tumhakakatp in Ee at Ja IV 45,15 is wr for tumhakal11 (Be,
Ce, Se so).
tumhiidisa, mf( -a, -i)n. and m.f [tumha + disa 1; cf S.
yu~madrsa], like you; someone like you, one such as you;
Vin 1 236,18 (anuviccakaro -anal11 ñatamanussanal11
sadhu hoti ti); M III 13,2o (yatha ta111 -ehi rakkhakehi
gopakehi ti) SI 168,19* (-anal11 hi adassanena); Ja II
156,16 (-esu silavantesu vijjamanesu); III 526,22 (tata
ahaJTI manussapatha111 gantva -e pa1:_1<;lite na labhissami);
VI 480,26 (bhante anagate -assa buddhassa mata
bhaveyyan ti); Vism 121,27 (maya bhante na eko na dve
-a khadita ti aha); Ps III 88,18 (-asmi111 hi ... mal11
sara1:_1a111 gacchante); 250,8 (ahal11 pi pubbe -o va sama1:_1o
ahosiJ11); IV 233,4 (-anal11 sañre nibbattama); Dhp-a I
336 turi
424,9 (-ayo therassa pi1,1<;lapataJ11 kiJTI dassanti ti, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se -iyo) =Ud-a 197,22 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -iyo).
tumhe, tumhehi, tumhesu, pl. nom./acc., instr., loe. of
tva111 qv.
tuyhatp, sg. gen./dat. oftval11 qv.
tura, mfn. [ts], swift, quick;- 0 -ga, m., a horse; Abh 368
(hayo turailgo -o); Vv 64:8 (amodamana -anam
uttama); Ja VI 145,7* (tapaniyakappanehi -ehi, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se turailgehi); V v-a 279,8 (khurassa nado ti
-ana111 khuranipatasaddo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
turali.ganal11); Sadd 864,25 (bhujago -o);- 0 -gamanena
in Ee at Pv-a 57,29 is wr; read suvaggitena ti sundara-
gamanena caturagamanena with Be, Se, or catura-
gamanena with Ce;- 0 -il-ga, m., a horse; Abh 368; Ja
III 251,24 (-a111 aruyha payasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits);
Mil 364,27 (-assa dve ailgani gahetabbani, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce turagassa); Bv-a 6,6 (KanthakaJ11 nama --varam
ahara ti); Sadd 426,4 (tara sambhame: ... -o); -
0
-il-gama, m., a horse; Da~h 5:56 (hesaravena visa~ena
-anaJ11); Sadd 922,21 (turailgo -o ... va1,11,1abhedo 'yaJ11).
turati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv tarati 2.
turi, f [ts: 'a weaver's brush'], a weaver's tool (a brush
or a beam? see CDIAL 5880); Sp 725,2 (sace tanta-
vayassa turivemadini n' atthi tani araññato aharissami ti;
cfSp-~ [Be] II 442,6: vitavita~hanal11 yattha Sal1lharitva
~hapenti tassa -i ti adhivacanal11); 1244,27 (turivema-
bhastadi).
turita, mfn., pp oftarati 2 qv.
turiya, tiiriya (so usually Be), n. [S. tiirya], a musical
instrument; music; Vin I 15,4 (so vassike pasade cattaro
mase nippurisehi -ehi paricariyamano na he~~a pasada
orohati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tiiriyehi); D II 138,13 (dibbani
pi -ani antalikkhe vajjanti tathagatassa piijaya, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be turiyani); SI 131,2 (pañcañgikena -ena eh'
ayye 'bhiramamase); Vv 5:4 (tesa111 suyyati nigghoso -e
pañcailgike yatha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be tiiriye); Th 267
(majjhe mahapathe nari -e naccati nagaki, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be tiiriye); 398 (pañcañgikena -ena na rati hoti tadisi
yatha ekaggacittassa samma dhamma111 vipassato;
Th-a II 169,23: atatal11 vitata111 atatavitatal11 gha1,1a111
susiran ti pañcañgikena ... -ena); Ja IV 464,31* (dibba -a
vajjiJTISU nagakañña ca naccayuJ11, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
tiiriya); V 170,5* (-ehi ma111 . . . upa~~ahuJ11; 170,22·:
anekasatehi -ehi gandhabbal11 kurumana upatthahiJ11su);
Ap 149,16 (-a111 sabbam adaya, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
tiiriyaJ11); 358,3 (-a ah ata mayha111 samatalasamahita, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be tiiriya); Dhp-a III 461,3 (bheriyadina111
-anal11 ta~itanal11 nigghosal11 viJ.ladinaJ11 ca vaditanal11
saddaJ11 sutva); V v-a 279,18 ( 0 -sannissito hi saddo -ani ti
vutto nissayavoharena, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tiiriya-
sannissito ... tiiriyani ti); 279,20 (gandhabbaturiyana ca
vicitrasaJ11vane ti ca pa~ho, -anal11 ca iti anunasika111
anetva yojetabbaJ11, Ce so; Be tliriyanal11; Ee wr
gandhabbaturiyana111 ca vicitrapavane ti; Se gandhabba-
tiiriyanaJ11 ca); Mhv 25:74 (na vadapenti tiiriyal11); -
0
-gal}.appabodhana, mfn., rousing with groups of
instruments; Vv 64:22 (Vv-a 282,17: dibbatiiriya-
samiihena katapitipabodhano ); - see also tiira.
tuñ, tiiri,f [?], a doe; ? or Npr. (see K.R.Norman, 1971 a,
p. 140);? Thi 381 (akkhini ca turiya-r-iva, Ce, Ee so; Be
turukkha
tunya-r-iva; Thi-a 237,24: tilri vuccati migi ... miga-
cchapaya viya te akkhini ti attho, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce tuñ);
Sadd 922,6 (tuñ tilrl ... mattabhedo ya~).
turukkha, m. [S. turu~ka], an incense, olibanum; Abh 147
(-o); 302 (-o tu ca piry<;lako ).
tula, mfn. (for tulya ? or extracted from atula (qv
sv tula)?], measurable; comparable; D II 107,3* (-am
atul~ ca sambhava~ bhavasaitkharam avass~jl muni;
Sv 557,12joll.: sabbesa~ soryasigaU'idina~ paccakkha-
bhavato tulit~ paricchinnan ti tuJa~, ki~ ta~,
kamavacarakamma~. na -~ na va -~ sadisa~ assa
aññ~ Jokiya~ kamma~ atthi ti atuJ~ ... atha va tulan
ti tulento tlrento ... ) = S V 263,1* = A IV 3J2,1* =
Ud 64,29*.
tulana, n., -a, f [ts], weighing; examining; M 11 174,17
(padhanassa . . . -a bahukara, no ce t~ tuleyya
na-y-id~ padaheyya); Ja V 115,16' ( 0 -vasena
tiraryavasena); Nidd I 339,11 (tassa ñaryaya ... -aya
tiraryaya ... ); Nett 8,5 (vim~sa ussahana -a
upaparikkha); Sp 184,28 (tula~ cha<;l<;letva hatthena
0
-sadis~ hoti ti); Spk 11 112,6 (aniccadito -a~); Mp II
157,23 (-e tula minane ca mana~ pamary~ hoti).
tulapicu in Ee at Ja V 480,26' is wr for tilla- (Be, Ce, Se
so).
tulasl', f [S. tulasi], basil; Ja VI 536,11* (sañchanna~
vanant~ -ihi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tuJasihi); Sp 1093,4
(tuJasiparyryani, Se so; Be, Ce sulasi-; E e gulasi-); -
0
(i)-gahana, n. [tulasi + gahana2], a thicket of basil; an
impenetrable clump of basil; Ja V 46,17.
tulii,f (and-a, mfn. ?) [ts], l. a weighing pole; a balance;
Abh 823 (manabhary<;le .. . -a); D II 334,19 (im~
purisa~ jivanta~ -aya tuletva); A IV 282,24
(tuladharo ... -~ paggahetva janati ettakena va anata~
ettakena va unnatan ti); Ja VI 292,27* (-a yatha
paggahita samadary<;la sudharita; 293,1·: yatha esa
vuttappakara -a na oryamati na uryryamati); 372,5 (-a~
cha<;l<;letva hatthena tuJento viya); Dhp 268 (yo ca -a~
va paggayha); Mil 356,8 (-a nikkhepanaya); Dhp-a III
252,17 (-aya dhararya~); Sadd 498,13 (khandhadiloke
-a~ aropetva minanto viya); - 2. a beam or pole; a
swing lever; a rafter; Abh 223; 823 (-a tatha gehana~
darubandhatth~ pi~ikay~ ca dissati); Vin II 122,15
(anujanami bhikkhave -~ karakataka~ cakkavagakan
ti; Sp 1208,6: -an ti paryryikana~ viya udaka-
ubbahanatul~); Ja V 49,4 (thambhe patit~apetva -a ca
kaje ca datva, Be so; Ee kace; Ce, Se tuladhare);
Sp 782,24 (vehasakuti . . . ya . . . sabbaheghimahi -ahi
sis~ na ghatteti); 1043,27 (bahüsu thambhesu -an~
upari katapasadassa); - 3. (and mfn. ?) a measure; to
the amount of a tul a; Abh 481 (-a palas ata~); 823;
Vin III 62,3 (aJhaka~ sappi~ -a~ gu!~ do1,1~
tary<;lula~ aharapetva); - 4. a measure of comparison, a
standard; equality, resemblance; Abh 823 (sadisatte -a);
S II 235,23 (esa bhikkhave -a eta~ pamaryatp mama
savakana~ upasakana~ yad id~ Citto gahapati);
Sv 67,12 (na [tathagatassa] -a va pamarya~ va atthi, atulo
appameyyo anuttaro ... );- ifc see udaka-ubbahana-;-
0
-dhiira, m(jn). (one) who carries sea/es; a merchant;
A IV 282,23; Mhv 18:24; - 0
-dal}l}.a, tuladary<;la, m., the
beam or le ver of a balance; J a 1 113,3 ( -~ muggara~
337 tul eti
katva); Ap 422,15 (tuladary<;le ~apetvana mahi~ sakka
dharetave, Be, Se so; Ce tulamary<;lale; Ee tulamary<;lale);
-
0
-puttaka in Ce, Ee at Ja V 424,25 is prob. wr for
suradhuttaka qv; - o -bhüta, mfn., balanced, neutral;
Ja III 321,4·; Bv 2:162 (Bv-a 113,!2: -o ti majjhattabhave
~ito yatha tuladary<;lo sama~ tulito sam~ titthati na
namati na unnamati); Cp 3:15:4 (sukhadukkhe -o yasesu
ayasesu ca);- 0 (a)-mal}l}.ala, n., the dish of a balance;
Ja VI 235,1* (tula yatha paggahita ohite -e unnameti
tulasisa~ bhare oropite sati); Ap 20,32 (dharetu~
pathavi~ sakka ~apetva -e; Ap-a 226,8: -e ti
tulapañjare); - 0 -sañghiita, m., a fitting together of
beams; rafters; Bv 1:14 (0 -saitghatanuvagga; Bv-a 36,3:
-a ti tulayugala, Be, Se so; Ce tulaya yugaJani; Ee wr
tüla saitghata ti tillaya yugalani); Vism 320,23 (thambhe
anussapetva -a~ anaropetva na sakka akase
kütagopanasiyo thapetu~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tala-);
Sp 884,2 (-e ~apetva ag~ katva); - atula, mfn.,
incomparable; not to be measured; MI 386,31*
(uttamapuggalassa -assa ... bhagavato); Pv 20:9 (dana~
sahattha -~ daditva saitghe; Pv-a 110,1: -an ti
appamary~ uJara~ paryit~); 28:2 (pallaitkaseghe -e
nisinna; Pv-a l88,21joll.: -e ti maharahe, -e ti va
devataya alapana~. asadisarüpe ti attho); Ja VI 213,10*
(kasma samuddo -o apeyyo); Ap 313,22 (ñary~ labhami
-~); Bv 6:1 (anüpamo asadiso -o uttamo jino);
Mil224,8 (somanassa~ ca-~ uppadesi);- 'tula in Ee
at Ap 298,15 is wr; read tülapicusama subha with Be, Ce;
- atitula, mfn., beyond measure; beyond compare;
Sn 561 (brahmabhüto -o; Pj II 455,7: -o ti tul~ amo
upam~ amo nirupamo ti attho) = Th 83J .
tulikii,f, se e sv tülika.
tulita, mfn., pp oftuleti qv.
tuliya\ m. [?], a flying fax; Abh 642 (-o pakkhabijalo );
Ja VI 537,32* (koghusurya sulopi ca -a; 538,17': -a ti
pakkhabijala, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se pakkhibijara).
tuliya 2 , ind., absol. oftuleti qv.
tuliya3 , mfn.,fpp oftuleti qv.
tuleti, -ayati, toleti, tolayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. tulayati,
tolayati], weighs; examines; compares; Dhatup 612 (tula
ummane); Dhatum 853; D II 334,19joll. (ima~ puris~
jivanta~ yeva tulaya -etva . . . maretva puna-d-eva
tulaya -etha ti); 335,3 (ayoguJa~ ... tulaya -eyya, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee toleyya); MI 480,8 (chandajato ussahati
ussahitva -eti -ayitva padahati; Ps III 193,13: -eti ti
anicca~ dukkh~ anatta ti -ayati) = II 173,23 (Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee tületi tülayitva); Th 1101 (ajjhattikan' eva ca
bahirani ca sam~ -eyya~); Ja III 357,18* (tasma
-eyya-m-attan~); Mil64,23 (na sakka maharaja lorya~
tulaya -ayitu~ garubhavo tulaya -iyati ti); 192,4 (na
sakka kenaci agghapetu~ -etu~ parimetu~); As 91,10
(t~ tava suttassa atth~ -ayissama ti vatva eva~
-ayi~su); Sadd 563,24 (tula ummane: toleti tolayati); -
part.pr. (a) tulenta, mfn., Mp II 157,22 (suvaryrya~ va
hirañña~ va -entassa tuJa icchitabba);
(b) tulaya(t), mfn., Vism 640,3o (rilparupadhamme
-ayato tirayato); (e) tulayanta, mf(-anti)n., Nidd 1
185,15; Vism 635,29 (rilparilpadhamme -ayantassa
tirayantassa); Spk I 206,22 (tul~ pahaya hatthena
-ayanti viya); (d) tulayamana, mfn., As 161,17; - aor.
tuvaip
3 pl. tulayiipsu, Nidd-a II 85,zo (paripañhiipsil ti
-ayiipsu); As 91,10; 2 pl. tulayittha, Spk I 351,31;
1 pl. tulayimha, Ja 11 370,7·; - absol. (a) tuletva, D 11
334,19; Vibh-a 430,6; - neg. atuletva, Ja V 245,27;
(b) tulayitva, V in I ll3,3o (anujanami bhikkhave ...
sammatena pi ... puggalaJ11 -ayitva vinayarp. pucchitun
ti; Sp 1059,15: upaparikkhitva); MI 480,s; Nidd I 50,29
(disva passitva -ayitva tlrayitva vibhavayitva) f- Patis 11
200,26 (Be, Ce, Se so; E e tillayitva); Sp 1123,26 (-ayitva
ti idarp. ettakaJ11 agghati idarp. ettakan ti evarp. aggha-
paricchedarp. katva); - neg. atulayitva, Pp-a 226,32;
(e) tu1ayitvana, Th 107 (pabbajirp. -ayitvana agarasma
anagariyaJ11); (d) tuliya2, D lli 163,11* (-iya pativicaya
cintayitva, Be, Ce so; Se pavicaya; Ee -aya paviceyya;
Sv 935,33: -iya ti -ayitva, Be, Se so; Ce -iyya ti; Ee
-eyya ti); (e) tuleyya, Ja lli 357,18* (358,7·: -eyya ti
-etva); pass. pr. 3 sg. tul!yati, Mi164,23;
pp tulita, mfn. [ts], l. weighed, estimated, compared;
Thi 153 (yattakarp. -a esa tuyhaJ11 dhita Anopama tato
aqhagul).arp. dassaJ11 hiraññaJ11 ratanani ca); Nidd I 339,15
(diqharp. -arp. tiritaJ11); Sp 1125,4 (tulaya -am iva);
Pv-a 52,2o (mitan ti -aJ11); - neg. atulita, mfn., Nidd I
339,10; As 55,21;- 2. balanced; Ap 587,10 (sukhappatta
na modami na ca dukkhesu dummana sabbattha -a
homi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tusita); Bv-a 113,13 (yatha
tu1adal).<;!o samarp. -o samarp. tiqhati); - fpp (a) tulya,
tulla, tuliya3, mfn. [S. tulya], equal to; of the same kind,
similar; comparable; Abh 530 (samano sadiso -o); S 11
279,29* (n' atthi kayasmirp. --ta); Sn 377 (na t' atthi -o;
Pj II 368,14: taya sadiso n' atthi); Vv 84:5 (para1okena
-arp.); Ja lli 14,23* (sukhe ca dukkhe ca bhavanti -a;
15,13': ekasadisa nibbikara va honti ti); V 343,12*
(arohaparil).ahena tu1y' asma vayasa ubho); Sadd 726,3
(pitussa -o pitara -o va);- -iidhikaral).a, mfn., with the
same reference; Ap-a 350,25; Sadd 21,13 (akhyatapadena
-iidhikaral).e sadhakavacake va kammavacake va); 751,12
(dve padani samasiyanti -adhikaral).ani so
kammadharayo); 769,6 (mahantamahitanarp. maha hoti
-adhikaral).e pade); - --sevi(n), mfn., associating with
people like oneself; A 1 126,2* = Ja lli 324,12* quoted
Sadd 441,3; - neg. atu1ya, atulla, atu1iya, mfn., Sn 683
(so bodhisatto ratanavaro atu1yo); Thi 201 (akampitarp.
atu1iyarp. aputhujjanasevitaJ11 buddho dhammliJ11 me
desesi); Ja IV 102,4* (mahabba1o amitayaso atu1yo, Be,
Se so; Ce, E e atullo ); VI 198,22* (maccesu mata pana te
atu1ya); Ap 315,27 (anupamam atuliyaJ11 pive muttirasaJ11
aharp.); Bv 3:37 (saca atuliya jinassa iddhi; Bv-a 141,w:
atu1iya ti atu1ya asadisa); Mil 192,2 (bhikkhubhavo kho
maharaja atuliyo appamano anagghaniyo); Sadd 922,18
(atulyo atuliyo . . . val).l).abhedo 'yaJ11);
fpp (b) tuletabba, tulayitabba, mfn., to be weighed,
examined; to be compared; Vin IV 142,19 (pari-
pañhitabban ti cintetabbliJ11 tu1ayitabbaJ11); Ja VI 283,28'
(na sattavidhena ratanadhanena saddhirp. tu1etabbo );
Ps 11 67,3 (attana va atta anumetabbo tu1etabbo
tlretabbo);- caus. absol. tu1apetva, Spk III 219,3o.
tuvaip., se e sv tvarp..
tuvaip.tuva(Ip.), n. [cf AMg appatumarp.tuma, Utt 29:39;
cf also S. dvandva ?] quarrel, strife; Sv 500,11 (-an ti
agaravavacanliJ11 tuvaJ11 tuvaJ11); Vibh-a 513,13 (-an ti
338 tussati
agaravavacanarp. tvarp. tvan ti attho ); - tuvaip.tuvaip.-
pesuññamusavada, m.pl., quarrelling, back-biting and
lying; A IV 40 l, 1 (dal)<;ladanasatthadanaka1aha-
viggahavivada -a, Ee, Se so; Be dal).<;ladanarp.
satthadanarp. ka1ahaviggahavivadatuvamtuvarp.pesuñña-
musavada; Ce dal).<;ladanasatthadanakalahaviggaha-
vivadatuvamtuvapesuññamusavada).
tuvataiJl, ind. [<:f S. *tvrta, pp of v'tvar, and S. tilrta,
tvarita], quickly; Abh 40; M III 299,18 (evarp. sigharp.
evarp. -arp. evaJ11 appakasirena uppannarp.); Ja I 91,14
(janapadakalyai).I kumararp. gacchantarp. disva -arp. kho
ayyaputta agaccheyyasi ti); Patis 11 l30,1o (-liJ11 cittaJ11
samadhiyati); Ap 477,21 (-arp. gantva); Sadd 902,31
( ... tUI).I).liJ11 acirarp. -arp. ice ete sighatthe).
tuvatta. m.(?) [from tuvaqati qv; cf AMg tuyaqa], lying
down;- 0 -vagga, m. [tuvaqa + vagga 1], the section on
lying down; Vin IV 297,33 (-o catuttho); Sp 932,7.
tuvattati, tuvatteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf AMg tuyaqai,
tuyaqei], lies down; Dhatum 788 (tuvaqa ekasayane);
Vin 111 180,15 (papabhikkhil ... ekamañce pi -enti;
Sp 620,25: -enti ti nipajjanti); 182,26 (katharp. hi nama ...
-issanti); IV 288,23foll. (bhikkhuniyo dve ekamañce
-en ti ... kathaJ11 hi nama ... ekamañce -essanti); 289,1
(ya pana bhikkhuniyo dve ekamañce -eyyurp. pacittiyan
ti); Ap 125,10 (-issanti tavade, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
tuvaqhissanti); 137,18 (sayane 'haJ11 -ami vicitte
pupphasanthate); Sadd 532,7 (tuvaqa nipajjayarp.: -eti
-ayati); - part.pr. tuvaqenta, mft -enti)n., V in V 76,7
(dve bhikkhuniyo ekamañce -entiyo); Ap 355,9 (sayane
'haJ11 -ento); - aor. 3. pl. (a) tuvaqesurp., V in V 63,8;
(b) tuvaqayurp., Vin 11 144,21* (in uddana);
fpp tuvaqitabba, n., impers., V in 11 124,11 (na
bhikkhave ... ekamañce -itabbarp.).
tuvattana, n. [from tuvaqati; cf AMg tuyaqal).a], lying
down; Kkh 2 328,19 (ekamañcata dvinnliJ11 -an ti iman'
ettha dve ailgani).
tuvara, m. [AMg id.; cfS. lex. tubara, tubari ?], a kind of
plant; ? a kind of pulse or grain; ? Ap 222,8 (migaluddo
pure asirp. . . . bharitva -am adaya sailghassa adadirp.
aharp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se rudhiram; Ap-a 468,2foll.:
tuvara-aqhirp. muggakalayasadisarp. tuvaraqhirp. bhajjitva
pupphetva bhajanena adaya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tuvaramuqhirp. muggaka1asasadisarp. tuvaraqhirp.
bharitva puretva).
tuviya, mfn. [from tvarp. ? cf S. tvadiya, svlya ?], your,
belonging to you; Ja V 26,20* (na kammuna va vacasa ca
tata aparadhito 'harp. -arp. sarami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tuyhliJ11; 26,23·: aparadhito ti aparadharp. ito -an ti tava
santakarp., Be, Ce so; Se santikarp.; Ee tuyhan ti) quoted
Sadd 805,2; Sadd 804,25 foll. (tavato tassedarp. ice atthe
iyo tassaro e' u: ... tava idarp. santakan ti -liJ11 ... tava
eso ti -o).
tusati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tosati, Wg § 17:60], sounds;
Sadd 443,14 (tusa ... sadde: -ati).
tusita, mfn., m.pl. and n., see sv tussati.
tusitabba, mfn.,fpp oftussati qv.
tussaka, mfn. [from tussati], satisfied; pleased; Pj I
240,22foll. (tussatl ti -o sakena -o santena -o samena -o
ti santussako ).
tussati, pr. 3 sg. [S. tu~yati], is satisfied, is content, is
tussana
pleased; Dhatup 308 (tusa . . . tutthiy~); 448;
Dhatum 440 (tusa santose); 684; Th 230 (itaritarena
-eyya); 1109 (atho pi tvaq1 citta na mayha -asi); Ja 1
494,26 (maq1saq1 n' atthi ettakena pi -ah! ti); 500,3 (ma
te etaq1 rucci yathaladdhen' eva -assü ti); II 119,s (so
taq1 disva -issati); 249,12 (kiq1 nu kho mayi Vllf~
vadente tumhe na -atha ti); III 291,23' (nandanti -anti);
523,13* (na -as! rukkhapha1ehi dhaiJ.ka); Nidd 1 368,17 (te
yaq1 yaq1 labhitva tena tena na -anti aparapar~
pariyesanti); Vism 336,29 (tesaq1 chekataya -ati);
Cp-a 208,31 (sumana bhavantu -antu); Sadd 490,2o (tusa
tuqhiyaq1: -ati); - part.pr. (a) tussanta, mfn., Mp 1
392,21 (danena -antaq1 danena saiJ.g~hami); Pj I 241,1;
- neg. atussanta, mfn., Ja II 259,4·; (b) tussamana, mfn.,
Mp III 92,14 (abhinandamana -amana); Nidd-a I 256,33;
- aor. 3 sg. tussi, Ja 1 383,12; Mhv 10:37; 3 pl.
tussiq1su, Ja V 482,1n;- absol. tussitva, Ja 1 486,19 (raja
-Itva bodhisattaq1 rajjena püjesi); Ap-a 269,10;
Mhv 18:22; - neg. atussitva, Ap-a 197,18 (so danah~
eta pi atussitva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atusitva); -
pp (a) tuttha, mfn. [S. tu~ta), pleased; content, satisfied;
Abh 752; Vin 1 3,27* (sukho viveko -assa); A II 27,10*
(anavajjena -assa appena sulabhena ca); Vv 61:6
(sakena darena ca -o ahosiq1); Th 1100 (atho pasaWw pi
tatomm1ttaq1 -o na hessaq1); Ja IV 445,22 (-o
pasannacitto); V343,11* (sace ekena -o si); VI261,30*
(pañhassa veyyakaraJ!ena -o); Ap 538,6; Mi124,16 (tato
raja -o ahosi anakkhato va maya Nagaseno aññato ti);
Vism 15,5* (-assa sllamattena); - neg. atuqha, f11:fn.,
Ja VI 517,11* (atuqha Sivayo assu); Sp 200,25 (brahm~o
ettakaq1 pi datva atuqho); - sututtha, mfn., very
pleased; Ja VI 322,25*; - (b) tusita, mfn., n., and
-a, m.pl., l. (mfn.) pleased; content, satisfied; D III
218,26 (te sant~ yeva -a sukhaq1 patisaq1vedenti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se santusita); MI 386,6* (bhagavato ...
akathaq1kathissa -assa ... ; Ps III 96,2o: -assa ti
tuqhacittassa); A II 15,29* (te -a jetva Maraq1; Mp III
18,25: te kh!J!asava tuqha nama); Ap 324,2 (-o vantadoso
si, Be so; Se tussito; Ce. Ee vusito); Th-a III 98,34
(santusito ti ... samma-d-eva -o tuqho); - 2. [or
perhaps not connected] (i) (m.pl.) the name of a group of
gods; the tusita gods; Ja VI 279,9* (passa ... tavatiq1se ca
yame ca -e capi nimmite); Nidd I 447,1 foil. (-a vuccanti
deva, te tuqha santuqha attamana ... atha va -a vuccanti
arahanto ... );Ud-a 385,24 (... kaci yamesu kaci -esu ...
uppanna); Thi-a 164,21 (dibbaya sampattiya tuqha
pahaqha ti -a); Mhv 32:72 (-anaq1 puraq1); Sadd 490,21
(tusa tuqhiyaq1: ... -a); - (ii) (mjn.) belonging to the
tusita group; of the tusita group; Vin 1 12,6 (-a deva);
D II 14,4 (dhammata esa bhikkhave sattahajate
bodhisatte bodhisattamata kal~ karoti -~ kayaq1
upapajjati); M II 194,13 (yamehi .. . devehi -a deva
seyyo ti); SI 133,12* (tavatiq1sa ca yama ca -a capi
devata); A III 348,2s (sakadagaml satto -~ kayaq1
upapanno ti); Vibh 423,8 (yani manusakani cattari
vassasatani -an~ devan~ eso eko rattindivo;
Vibh-a 519,2n: tuqhahaqha ti -a); Mi1193,26 (-e kaye
thito bodhisatto ); Mhv 33:13 (kayassa bheda devesu
-esupapajjatha);- (iii) (n.) the world of the tu sita gods;
A 1 228,1 (sahass~ jambud!panaq1... sahassaq1
339 tuhina
-an~ . . . sahassaq1 brahma1okanaq1); Ap 53,5 (ito
gantva ayaq1 poso -~ avasissati); 401,13 (-aq1
upapanno 'mhi vasami ratane ghare, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tussit~); 598,25 (dassenti iddhiya -aq1 nimmite deve,
Be, Ce so; Ee -a nimmita deva; Se tussita); Kv 609,zo
(-e tiqhati); - fpp (a) tuqhabba, toqhabba, mfn. and
n. impers., Vin IV 259,10* (yaq1 laddhaq1 tena
tuqhabbaq1) = Ja I 476,27* quoted Vism 78,15; Vism 78,6
(ten' eva tuqhabbaq1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se toqhabbaq1);
Pj II 33,10 (tuqhabben' eva tuqho homl ti, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee toqhabben' eva); Sadd 490,21 (tuqhabbaq1); -
neg. atuqhabba, atoqhabba, mfn., Pj II 32,12 (Dhaniyaq1
atuqhabbena tussamanaq1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
atoqhabbena); - (b) tussitabba, tusitabba, mfn., Ja 1
476,29' (tuqhabban ti tussitabbaq1, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
tusitabbaq1); Sadd 490,21 (tussitabb~); caus.
pr. 3 sg. toseti, tosayati, sati.~fies, contents; pleases,
entertains; soothes, pacifies; Ja I 322,8 (cakkavattirajjaq1
datva pi -etuq1 na sakka ti); IV 107,4· (tv~ ajja maq1
nandaya -ehi); 361,9 (dan~ rajanaq1 na -eti); Vl38,17
(rajadhitaraq1 -essaml ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -eml ti);
Ap 107,20 (phal~ -eti kassak~); 107,22 ( -ayissati);
Mi1210,13 (itthl samikassa santaken' eva dhanena
samikaq1 aradheti -eti pasadeti); Ps V 34,7 (aiJ.ke
nipannadarakaq1 viya jan~ -etl ti); Dhp-a II 83,8
(mayhaq1 citt~ -entu); Nidd-a I 470,34 (-eyya
abhiramapeyya); Sadd 490,21 (karite -eti ice adlni); -
part.pr. (a) tosenta, mf( -enti)n., Ja V 330,8* (thana-
kkhlrena gitena aii.gapavuraJ!ena ca rodantaq1 puttaq1
-eti -en ti tena vuccati; 331 ,23': -en ti ti saññapentl
hasentl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -etl ti saññapeti haseti);
VI 185,22 (ajja maya parisaq1 -entena kl)ituq1 vaqati, so
read with Be, Ce, Se); 557,14* (-ento darake chate);
(b) tosayanta, mf(-ayantl)n., Ap 145,10 (-ayanto mam~
tada, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tasayanto); Mhv 22:84
(-ayantl); - aor. 3 sg. (a) tosesi, S I 209,22; Sn 1127
(pañhanaq1 veyyakaraJ!ena -esi brahmaJ!e muni); Ja VI
322,6•; (b)tosayl', DIII171,12* (-ayi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
bhasayi); Ap 379,1 (-ay!); 3 pl. tosesuq1, Mi1210,10;-
absol. (a) tosetva, V in I 285,35 (vikalake -etva); Ja Ill
21 O,s· (ayaq1 nigrodho taruJ!akale -etva idani maq1
bhayapeti); Ap 538,26; Mhv 37:76; (b) tosetvana,
Ap 64,26; (e) tosayitva, Ap 332,17; (d) tosayitvana,
Ap 82,14; Mhv 25:35; - pp tosita, mfn., Sn 1128; Ja V
158,8*; Ap 100,26; Bv 8:4 (dassanena pi t~ buddhaq1
-ita honti paJ!ino); - fpp tosetabba, mjn., Spk 1 135,1;
- see also tosapana, duttosaya.
tussana, n. [from tussati], being pleased; being satisfied;
0
Ja III 448,9 (kiq1 te -kar~~ yena gayanto gacchasl ti);
Dhp-a III 267,5 (0 -bhavo santuqhi nama); Patis-a 31,27
(purisassa macchasaññaya kaJ!hasappaJ11 da)h~ gahetva
-~ viya); - see also tosana.
*tussanaka, mfn. [tussana + ka2], pleased; satisfied; -
atussanaka, mfn., not pleased; Sv 281,3 (attano vaJ!J!e
bhaññamane --satto nama n' atthi) t Mp II 267,30 (-o
nama n' atthl ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee padussanako).
tuhati or tmphati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tohati,
Wg § 17:86], distresses; Sadd 457,24 (tuhi duhi addane:
tu<q1>hati du<q1>hati, Ee so; Be tuhati duhati).
tuhina, n. [ts], dew; frost; Abh 56 (himaq1 -am ussavo);
 340
Mhbv 2,17 (danatuhinanipatenapi akataparikkhayal!l
ratanakarnalasmJ.<;ial!l disva).
tÜJ1a, m. [ts], a quiver; Abh 389 (-o till)lr'abfu,ladhi).
tÜJ1ii, f [cf tUI)a, tili)I], a quiver; Sadd 922,22 (-a tili)I ...
val)l)abhedo 'yaq¡, so read ? Ee tul)a tul)!).
tüJ1i, f [ts], a quiver; Abh 389 (till)ltthiyal!l kalapo ca);
Ja II 403,3* (dhanuq¡ -iq¡ ca nikkhippa, Ce, Ee so; Be
kaiJ9al!l ca; Se tul)<;liq¡); V 47,22* (adaya -iq¡ ca dhanuq¡
ca 1uddo; 48,14': saratill)iq¡ ca mahadhanuq¡ ca adaya, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee saratüi)Ifal!l); Sadd 535,25 (-1 ti saraka1apo,
sa hi tUI)enti purenti sare ettha ti); 922,22 (tül)a -1 ...
val)l)abhedo 'yaq¡, so read ? Ee tul)a tul)!).
tü11ira, tul)lra, tul)hlra, m. [S. tili)Ira], a quiver; Abh 389
(tili)O tUI)Irabfu,ladhi); Ja V 128,6 (mel)<;lakasiilgadhanuq¡
sandhiyuttal!l -aq¡ attano sannahakañcukal!l Ul)hlsal!l ca
datva, Be so; Ce, Ee tul)hlraq¡; Se tul)<;lisaral!l); 129,12
(mel)¡;lakasiilgadhanumhi pavataVaiJI)aql jiyaq¡ aropetva
-aq¡ pighe bandhitva, Be so; Ce, Ee tul)hlral!l; Se
tul)<;lisaraq¡); VI 130,15 (so jeghadhanuggaho vamato
khaggaq¡ 1aggetva pighiya tul)lral!l bandhitva
mel)<;lakasiilgamahadhanuq¡ gahetva, Be so; Ce, Ee
tul)hlral!l; Se tul)<;lisaraq¡); Vism 251,32 (ubhayabahuttaco
tili)Ironaddhacammasal)~hano, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se tül)ir-) =
Pj 1 45,15 = Vibh-a 234,29;- see also til)ira, tul)ira.
tü11eti, -ayati,pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup till)ayate, Wg § 33:16],
fills; Sadd 535,25 foil. (tül)a pilraiJe: -eti -ayati tUI)!, ettha
tili)I ti sarakalapo, sa hi -en ti purenti sare ettha ti tUI)!).
-tüna, see sv -tva.
türa, m.n. [S. lex. rura, m.], a musical instrument; Ap 31,21
(vajjamanesu -esu deva -ani vajjayuq¡, Be so; Ce, Ee
turiyesu . . . turiyani; Se turiyesu devaturiyani) quoted
Ap-a 239,36foil. (Be, Se so; Ce, E e turiyesu ...
turiyani ... ); Sadd 689,21foil. (turiyassa -o: turiya-
saddassa attano sarnana1esena turadeso hoti -aq¡ turiyal!l
va, devatürani vajjayuq¡);- see also turiya.
türi,f, se e sv turi.
türiya, n., see sv turiya.
tüla, m.n. [ts], a tuft of down; pappus, esp. of cotton;
cottontuft; Abh 494 (-o tatha picu); V in II 150,16 (tll)i
-ani rukkhatillal!l 1atatillaq¡ po~akitillan ti;
Sp 1217,9foil.); S 1 127,19* (ta tattha panudi sattha -al!l
bhaghaq¡ va ma1uto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr va maruto;
Spk 1 188,15foil.: yatha pha1ato bhaghal!l simba1itillaq¡
va po~akitillal!l va vato panudati nlharati) f. Ja IV
222,23*; Sn 591 (vato -al!l va dhaq¡saye) f. Ja IV 127,13*;
Th 104 (-arn iva erital!l mal utena pi1avati va me kayo;
Th-a 1 223,29: tillapicu viya akasaq¡ 1anghanto yeva me
kayo hoti ti); Sp 884,5 (-aq¡ onaddhal!l ettha ti
tillonaddhaq¡, -aq¡ pakkhipitva upari cimi1ikaya
onaddhan ti);- tilla in Ee at Bv-a 36,3 is wr; read tu1a-
sailgha~a ti with Be, Ce, Se; - ifc see po~aki-, simbali-;
- o• -iipanibha, mfn., like cotton; Ja V 204,19* (-a ...
hattha; 207,8': mudubhavassa uparna); - 0 -picu, m.,
cotton; a cotton tuft; D II 17 5,21 (itthiratanassa evarüpo
kayasamphasso hoti seyyatha pi nama -uno va
kappasapicuno va); S V 284,1 (-u va kappasapicu va
1ahuko); Ja V 480,26' (mahantaq¡ pabbataq¡ -u viya
akase avaheyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tula-); Vism 404,33
(-u viya vayuna gacchati);- 0 -pUJ1J1ika, mfn., stuffed
with cotton (of a kind of shoe); Vin I 186,11 (-a
tecattarisa(rp)
upahanayo dharenti; Sp 1084,w: tillapicuna puretva
kata); - 0
-sannibha, mfn., like cotton; D II 18,31
(imassa kumarassa Ul)l)a bhamukantare jata odata mudu
-a; Sv 451,21 foil.: simbalitillalatatu1asarnana, ayaq¡ assa
odatataya upama); Th 1137.
tülati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tillati, Wg § 15:20: tilla
ni~kar~e], is light; ? Sadd 435,26 (tilla nikkarise:
nikkarisa111 nama karisamattenapi arninetabbato 1ahu-
bhavo yeva, -ati tillal!l, Ee so; Be nikkañse nikkarlsal!l).
tülika, tulika, f [tilla + ika], l. a mattress; a quilt; V in 1
192,15 (na bhikkhave uccasayanarnahasayanani
dharetabbani seyyathldal!l asandi . . . pata1ika -a
vikatika ... ) f. Al 181,21; Vinii 170,2 (anujanami
bhikkhave . . . -a111 vijatetva bimbohanaq¡ katu111);
Ap 314,11 (-a vikatikayo); Sv 87,3 (-a ti til)l)al!l tü1anal!l
aññatarapUI)I)a -a); Thi-a 236,24 (hal!lsalomadipul)l)aya
-aya ca santhata111); Vin-vn 2659; 2663; - 2. a
paintbrush; Ps III 211,1 (chekena cittakarena -aya
paricchinditva paññatto viya, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tu1ikaya);
Spk II 5,23 (cheko cittakaro .. . railgajatani yojetva
vagikaq¡ va -al!l va adaya rupam eva samughapeti); -
ifc see sOVaiJI)a-;- 0 -pañcama, mfn., with a paintbrush
as the fifth thing; Ps II 101,8 (-a cattaro railgajata, Ce,
Ee so; Be. Se tu1ika-).
tülini, (m)j\n). rJrom tilla?], like cotton; M 1 128,22
(bitarabhasta maddita ... muduka -I chinnasassara ... ;
Ps II 101,31: -I ti simba1itilla1atatillasarnana).
tületi, se e sv tu1eti.
te\ pl. nom./acc. ofta(d) qv.
té, sg. instr., gen.ldat. oftval11 qv.
2
te\ iic for ti •
te-asiti, f, num. [cfS. tryasiti], 83; Ap 159,21 (kappanal!l
-iya).
tekati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tekate, Wg § 4:31], goes;
Sadd 326,4 (tika ~Ika seka gatyattha ... tekati ~ekati tlka);
-se e al so tekati.
tekatula, mfo. rJrom ti2 + ka~u], made of three pungent
substances; Vin I 210,28 (pubbe pi bhagavato udara-
vatabadho -aya yaguya phasu hou ti); III 66,13 (ayya
icchati 0 -yaguq¡ patun ti; Sp 391 ,12foil.: ti1ataiJ<;Iu1ehi
saddhiq¡ ya111 kiñci ekal!l aparaiJI)al!l pakkhipitva Uhi
kata); - see also tika~uka (sv ti 2).
tekalika, mfn. [S. traikalika], relating to the three times or
tenses; Nidd-a I 387,25 (ya111 -a111 va ka1avinimmuttal!l
va ñeyyal!l janitabbal!l kiñci dhammajataq¡ atthi tal!l
sabba111 tathagato abhiññasi); Sadd 848,28 (l)adayo
paccaya yupaccayanta -a ti veditabba).
1
tekiccha , m. rJrom tikiccha qv], a doctor; Th 756 (tal!l na
passami -aq¡ yo me taq¡ sal1arn uddhare; Th-a III 30,1:
-al!l sal1akattal11 bhisakkal!l tal!l na passami).
*tekiccha 2 , n. ? rJrom tikiccha or tikicchati], healing;
cure; remedy; - see atekiccha, satekiccha.
tegaJ1ika, mfn. rJrom ti 2 + ga!)a], (gr.t.t.), belonging to
three series (of roots); Sadd 596,28 (--tte).
tecattiiñsa(q¡), tecatta!Isa(q¡), tecattatisa(q¡), f num. and
mfn., l. (j.) [cf S. tricatvari111sat] 43; V in II 23,3
( -vattal!l
0
nighita111, E e so; Be tecattalisa-; Ce, Se
tecattatisa-); V 212,37' (-a sarnmavattana, Ce, E e so; Be
tecattallsa; Se tecattajisa); Vism 589,23 (tecattajisa
rüpani, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tecattallsa); Sp 1159,5 (ettha -a
tecattarisaka
vattani, Ce so; Be tecattallsa; Ee, Se tecattaJ!sa); 1413,14
(attharasasu va tecattalisaya va vattesu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tecattiqisaya); Dhatuk-a 134,25* (gocchake -am eva, Ce
so; Be tecattallsam; Se tecattiqisam; Ee gocchakesu
-am); - 2. (mfn.) (i) [cf S. tricatvarirpsa] the 43rd;
Ap 390,6 (sakirpsammajjakavaggo -o, Ee so; Be
tecattalisamo; Ce tecattaJ!samo; Se tecattaJ!so); -
(ii) characterised by 43, plus 43; Tikap-a 237,27
(tecattaJ!sani tini satani); - see also ticattarisa (sv ti\
tetallsa.
tecattiirisaka, n., a group of 43; Vin JI 24,22 (-arp
ninhitarp, Ee so; Be -tecattallsakarp; Ce -tecattañsakarp;
Se -tecattaJ!sakarp); Dhatuk-a 127,26* (tecattalisakarp
tike, Be so; Ce tecattiqisakarp; Ee tecattalisakattike; Se
tecattiqisakattike).
tecattiilisama, mfn., the 43rd; Ap-a487,1 ( -vagge, Be,
0
Ee, Se so; Ce tecattallsatima-).
tecivara, n., see ticiva~a (sv t¡2).
tecivari(n), m(jn). [from ticivara qv sv ti2], having (only)
the three robes; undertaking the dhutali.ga (qv) of having
(only) the three robes; Th 846 (pil)gapati . . . -i ...
sapadanacari).
tecivarika, m. [from ticivara qv sv ti 2] a bhikkhu who has
undertaken the dhutali.ga (qv) of having (only) the three
robes; Vin I 253,6 (bhikkhil sabbe araññaka . . . sabbe
-a); MI 214,s (attana ca -o hoti 0 -ttassa ca VaJ:?.J:?.avadi);
Mil 361 ,3; Vism 60,11 (saii.ghati-uttarasaii.ga-antara-
vasakasaii.khatarp ticivararp silam assa ti -o, -assa
ali.garp '-ali.garp); Th-a III 54,4 (atirekacivararp
patikkhipitva '-ali.gasamadanena -o); Sadd 788,4; -
0
atecivarika, m., one who has not undertaken the three
robe dhutali.ga; Spk II 173,6 (-o hi bahubhal)go bahu-
parikkharo hoti);- see also ticivarika (sv ti 2).
teja(s), m. n. [S. tejas] (sg. nom. tejo; acc. tejo, tejarp;
instr. tejasa, tejena; gen. tejaso, tejassa; loe. tejasmirp;
pl. nom. teja; iic tejo-, teja-), l. jire, flame; heat; the
element jire; Abh 34 (aggi gini bhanuma -o); 1094; DI
55,23 (catummahabhiltiko ayarp puriso yada kalarp
karoti . . . -o tejokayarp anupeti anupagacchati); MI
240,32 (aggirp abhinibbattessami -o patukarissami ti);
329,32 (-assa tejattena ananubhiltarp); S V 212,22
(dvinnarp kaghanarp sali.ghagana samodhana usmajayati
-o abhinibbattati; Spk III 241,2o: -o ti aggidhilmo); Ja V
266,21* (tesarp ayomaya bhilmi jalita -asa yuta);
VI 226,11 * (satt' ime sassata kaya ... -o pathavi apo ca
vayo ... );Kv 46,23 (-o upalabbhati ti -assa katta kareta
upalabbhati ti); Mil 384,7 foil. (-assa pañca ali.gani
gahetabbani ti); Vism 171,8 (-asmirp mmlttarp
gal)hitabbarp); 350,4 (-esu gatan ti tejogatarp); 366,5
(asitadiparipacako -o kammasamughano va); 414,15
(yada kappo -ena sarpvagati abhassarato hegha aggina
gayhati); Spk III 244,2 (kiñcapi suriyarasmiyo sarirarp na
phusanti sabbadisasu pana -o pharati); Patis-a 515,12
(mahabhilta . .. pathavi apo -o vayo ti cattaro);
Sadd 346,14 (-o ti suriyo atha va -o ti tejanarp usma
UJ:?.hattarp tapo); - ifc see jatharaggi- (sv ja!hara); -
2.jiery energy; fierceness; spiritual or moral power;
authority; V in I 25,2 (yannilnaharp imassa nagassa ...
-asa -arp pariyadiyeyyan ti); D II 167,3o* (tass' eva -ena
ayarp vasundhara ayagaset!hehi mahi alaii.kata); 349,3*
341 tejati
(littarp paramena -asa gilam akkharp puriso na bujjhati;
Sv 812,26: paramatejena visena littarp); Dhp 387 (atha
sabbam ahorattirp buddho tapati -asa); Vv 30:1 (siriya
ca val)J:?.ena yasena -asa; Vv-a 125,9: -asa ti attano
anubhavena); Ja V 172,22* (-o na sakka mama tehi
hanturp; 174,2z·: mama visatejo annassa -ena
abhihanturp pi na sakka); VI 23,1* (tarp ca disvana
ayantarp ja1antam iva -asa; 23,23·: rajatejena ja1antarp
viya); 31,26 (mahasatto nibbatto tassa -ena
Sakkabhavanarp kampi); 195,1* (pUJ:?.J:?.a uggassa -aso, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se -asa; 195,s-: uggena visena pUJ:?.J:?.a); Nidd I
448,22 (bhagava . . . -ena ca balena ca gul)ena ca .. .
dissati); Patis I 103,9 (pañca -a caral)atejo gul)atejo ... );
Cp 1:9:37 (Vessantarassa -ena sayam ev' onata duma;
Cp-a 87,11: Vessantarassa puññanubhavena); Mp I 326,3
(nago pajjali, thero uttaritararp pajjalitva tassa -arp
pariyadiyi); Patis-a 43,15 (pañcannarp -anarp
pariyadane); Mhv 10:55 (bhita -ena tassa sa);
Sadd 346,15 (-o ti va anubhavo pabhavo);
tejo-kasil;ta, n., meditation based on jire; the meditation
object jire; (the jhana) which is or is brought about by
meditation based on jire; D III 268,22; A I 41,16 (-arp
bhaveti); Dhs 203; Vism 171,8foll. (-arp
bhavetukamenapi); - teja-garahaka, mfn., who scoms
or disparages (the element of) Jire; MI 327,5; -
teja-jigucchaka, mfn., who spurns or despises (the
element of) Jire; MI 327,5;- tejo-dhiitu,f, the element
of jire; Vin III 160,3 (ayasma Dabbo Mallaputto -urp
samapajjitva ali.guliya jalamanaya purato purato
gacchati); DI 215,32 (ime cattaro mahabhilta ...
pa!havidhatu apodhatu -u vayodhatil ti); Ap 84,1 (-usu
kovido); 577,26 (-urp adhighaya khipparp santapayirp
jalarp); Dhs 964 (katamarp tarp rilparp -u); Nett 74,13;
Vism 363,8 (imasmirp sañre . . . sunno nissatto
paripacanakaro -il ti); - teja-va(t), mfn., splendid,
powerful, majestic; fiery, aflame; Ja IV 495,20* (na
agghaka balava 0 -va pi; 498,26': ime aggha ayarp
kayabalañiil)abaladihi ba1ava ayarp 0 -va ti); V 278,2o
(
0
-vanto pi poriil)akapal)gita nitteja hutva); 462,3·
(
0
-vantena senapatina); 476,16 (aggirp ca darilni ca
darucchedanavasipharasurp ca adasi tena 0 -Va ahosi);
487,2s· (mahajano 0 -Vato silavantassa iil)arp atikkamiturp
asakkonto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se silavato 0 -vantassa);
VI 56,3 (0 -vata rañña); Sp 715,6 ( 0 -vantani honti rogarp
niggaQ.hanti ti); PsI 91,29 (dhammagaruko 0 -va siho va
abhibhuyyacañ); Dhp-a I 426,17 (maya 0 -vantatara); -
neg. atejava(t), mfn., Ja V 172,w; - nitteja, mfn.,
lacking energy or power; low in spirit; dull; Ja II 94,1
(therarp 1ajjapesi -arp akasi); Vism 596,7 (namarp -arp
na sakena tejena pavattiturp sakkoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
pavattesu); PsI 91,28 (nibbutali.garo viya ca -o); Mp IV
42,6 (mali.kubhavo ti --ta domanassata); Ud-a 113,1
(suriyuggamane khajjopanaka viya nippabha -a); -
sateja, mfn., having energy or heat; Patis-a 487,28
(tapate iti satejaghena);- see also tejassi(n), teji(n).
tejati, -eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. tejate, tejayati], sharpens;
stirs up; (heats; ?) Dhatup 63 (tija nisane); 551;
Dhatum 80 (tija kkhamanisanesu); 774 (tija tejane);
Vism 364,2s (-ati ti tejo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -aya ti ti;
Vism-mh! [Be] I 444,23: -ati ti niseti, tikkhabhavena
 tejana
sesabhütattayaJll usmapayati ti attho) =París-a 80,5 (eds
-ayati ti); Ud-a 388,9 (ussahal]l janento -eti joteti);
Sadd 346,13 (tija nisane khamayal]l ca: .. . -ati
titikkhati); 530,21 (tija nisane: -eti -ayati); - part.pr.
tejenta, mfn., Th-a I 9,23 (ñai:Iapharasul]l -ento); - aor.
3 sg. tejesi, Ud-a 242,9 (samuttejes1 ti . . . samma-d-eva
-esi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee samma uttejesi); -
absol. tejitvana, tejetvana, Nidd-a I 253,5 (yatha
suriyo ... mahantal]l lokappadesaJll -itvana, Ce, Se so;
Ee -etvana; Be tapitvana);- pp tejita, mfn., sharpened;
stirred up; Abh 744 (nisital]l tu ca -aJll); Pa(is I 103,10
(carai:Iatejena --tta dussllyatejaJll pariyadiyati;
Pa!is-a 327,19 foll.: sllatejena tikhii:IIkatatta); Th-a III
29,23 ( -al]l ussahital]l); - see also titikkhati.
tejana, n.m. and mfn. [cf S. tejana, n.], l. (n.) (i) being
sharp; sharpening; Dhatum 774 (tija -e); Vism 350,4
0
( -vasena tejo; Vism-mh! [Be]! 430,10: nisitabhavena
tikkhabhavena); Sadd 398,5 (-al]l nisanal]l); - (ii) heat;
Sadd 346,14 (atha va tejo ti -alll usma UI:IhattaJll tapo);-
2. (n.m.) the shaft of an arrow; an arrow; Abh 389
(khurappo tejanasanal]l); M II 225,16 (usukaro -al]l dv!su
aHitesu atapeti paritapeti ujul]l karoti kammaniyal]l);
Dhp 33 (cittal]l .. . ujul]l karoti medhavi usukaro va
-aJll); Th 19 (usukara namayanti -al]l; Th-a 1 77,28: -an
ti kai:I~al]l); Sv 767 ,29* (jiyavegena -al]l yatha yati);
Sadd 346,13 (-o ti kary~o saro usu); - 3. (m.) a reed
(used for arrows); SAF: Saccharum munja Roxb.;
Abh 601 (-o tu saro); - 4. (mfn.), fiery; sharp;?
Sadd 846,12 (rucadihi ca dhatiihi yupaccayo hoti
tassllad!su atthesu ... rocano -o va~~hano ice evamadi).
tejassi(n), tejasi(n), mfn. [cfS. tejasvin],fnll offiery power
or energy; S I 69,19* (urago carati tejas!, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee tejasi); Ja III 484,18* (supattaJll pakkhasampannal]l
-il]l düragaminal]l, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tejasil]l); V 70,29*
(-1 balava kapi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tejas!); 172,14* (-inal]l
hanti atejavanto); 267,3* (aslvisal]l va kupital]l -il]l
duratikkamal]l, Be, Ce so; E e, Se tejasiq1); VI 171 ,1~*
(nago 'ham asmi iddhima -1 duratikkamo ~aseyyaJll
tejasa kuddho phltal]l janapadam api, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
tejas!; 171,22·: visatejena tejava); Ap 319,7 (-1 ca
durasado ... mahavlro, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tejas!); Bv 8:1
(Anomadass1 amitayaso -1 duratikkamo, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se tejas!; Bv-a 172,32: -1 ti sllasamadhipaññatejena
samannagato, eds so); Pañca-g 95; Sadd 793,3foll.
(tapass1 yasass1 tejas!, ettha ca purimesu dv!su
sukhucciiraQatthaJll sassa dvittaJll, pacchime pana
suddho sakaro; sakka!aññuno pana keci sasanika tato
nayal]l gahetva -1 ti sakiiraJll dvibhaval]l katva parhanti,
tatha pi na doso, p¡jJipotthakesu pana tejas! ti
nissaññogapadam eva agatal]l).
teji(n), mfn. [from teja(s)], fiery; brilliant; Sn 1097
(bhagava hi kame abhibhuyya iriyati adicco va pa~havil]l
-i tejasa, Ce, Ee so, me; Be, Se -1; Pj II 598,1o: tejena
samannagato tejasa abhibhuyya).
tejeti, pr. 3 sg., see sv tejati.
tetiilisa, tet¡jJisa, mfn. [te 3 + tal!sa], the 43rd; Ap 150,24 (-e
ito kappe, Be so; Ce, Se tetaJise; Ee tetalise);- see also
ticattarlsa (sv ti 2), tecattarlsa.
tettiip.sa, num. and mfn. [te 3 + til]lsa], l. (num.) [cf S.
trayastril]lsat] 33; V in V 151,34 (catunnal]l
342 tepitaka
adhikaraQiinal]l -a mülani -a samuHhana); D II 211,29
(-e attabhave abhinimminitva); Ja V l53,s- (-aya
devaputtiinal]l); Bv 6:18 (-a ca sahassani, Be, E e so; Ce
-a sahassani; Se 0 -satasahassani); Vism 619,7 (adito -a
vassani parhamavayo nama); Nidd-a I 155,6 (-a jana
tattha uppanna ti tavatil]lsa); Mhv 30:89 (-a devaputta);
- 2. (mfn.) (i) [cf S. trayastril]lsa] the 33rd; Ap 249,27
(-amhi ito kappe); 267,12 (ummapupphiyavaggo -o, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce tettiqisatimo ); - (ii) characterised by 33,
plus 33; Tikap-a 237,2o (-ani artha satani);
0
-kkhaUUIJl, ind., 33 times; Ap 357,13; - see also
tavatimsa, tidasa (sv ti 2), tettimsati.
tettiiJls;ti, f,. num. [te 3 + til]ls~ti; cf S. trayastril]lsati], 33;
Bv 14:17 (-a sahassani nariyo sama1ailkata, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be tettil]lsasahassani ca)= 15:16 (Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
tettimsam ca sahassani); - see also tavatimsa, tidasa
(sv th t~ttimsa.
.
tettiiJlsatima, mfn. [from tettiqisa], the 33rd;
Mhv p. 277,16 (dasarajako nama -o paricchedo);
Ap-a 477,7 (-e vagge ).
tedm,II,lika, m. [from tidai:I~a qv sv ti 2], a paribbajaka who
carries three staves; A III 276,33 ( ... paribbajako ...
magaQ~iko ... -o ... ); Jaii 316,25' (kena VaQI:Iena ... -o
bhuñjati aggapii:I~aJll; 317,3·: -o ti kui:I~ikal]l
!hapanatthaya tidai:I~al]l gahetva caranto); Ap 358,18 (-a
ekasikha agacchanti mamal]l gharaJll).
tedasa, see sv terasa.
tedha, ind., see tidha sv ti 2.
tedhatu. n. [from ti2 + dhatu; cf S. tridhatu ], the triple
world, the three domains of existence; Th-a 11 105,28
(
0
-issarassa maccurajassa vasal]l satte neti ti); Nidd-a II
91,11 (mahantan ti -Ul]l atikkamitva mahattappattal]l).
tedhatuka, tidhatuka, mfn. and n. [from ti 2 + dhatu],
connected with the three domains of existence; the three
domains of existence; Nidd 1 90,16 (puññal]l vuccati yal]l
kiñci -alll kusalabhisaii.kharaJll; Nidd-a I 219,19 foll.:
kamadhaturiipadhatu-arüpadhatusu pa!isandhidayakal]l
kosallasambhütal]l paccayabhisailkhiiraJll); 189,9 (-esu
kusalesu dhammesu); Kv 605,s (puthujjano -ehi
dhammehi avivitto ti); Nett 14,31 (-e imani dasa
SaJllyojanani); Vism 2,4 (imal]l eval]l -al]l ja!etva rhital]l
ja~aJll ko vija~eyya); Sv 175,12 (eval]l pañcahi pi padehi
tena ten' akarena -am eva pariyadinnan ti, so read with
Be, Se); Mp III 414,23 (sabbaloke ti sakale pi -e); IV
31,4 (tidhatuka1okasannivasasailkhatesu lokacittesu);
Ap-a 193,23 (chetva -aqi sinehadosaq1).
tepaññasa(IJl), tepai:II:Iasa, num. and mfn. [te3 +
paññasa(l]l)], l. (num.) [cfS. tripañcasat], 53; Vin V
87,1* (-a ca sekhiya); Vism 589,21 (teparyryasa rüpani);
Sp 898,32 (avasesani teparyi:lasa sikkhapadani); PsI 2,23
(-al]l ca akkharani); - 2. (mfn.) [cf S. tripañcasa], the
53rd; Ap 218,16 (-e ito kappe); 463,17 (tiryadayakavaggo
-o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce tepaññasamo); - see also
tipaññasa (sv ti 2).
tepaññasatima, mfn. [from tepaññasa], the 53rd; Mhv II
p. 149,22 (pañcarajako nama -o paricchedo).
tepaññasama, mfn. [from tepaññasa], the 53rd;
Ap-a 490,11 (0 -vagge); - see also tipaññasa (sv ti 2),
tepaññnasa( 1]1).
tepitaka, n. and mfn. [from ti 2 + piraka], l. (n.) the three
tebhatika
pi~akas; Mp I 40,29 ( -aip atthavasena ca paJivasena ca
agharasa mahaga!)e vaceti); 92,13 (mayaip idh' eva hutva
-aip rakkhissama ti); 92,2o (satthakathe -e); Bv-a 234,8
(til).i pi~akani uggahetva --dharo); 2. (mfn.)
(i) consisting of the three pi~akas; Ja IV 37,7 (-aip
buddhavacanaip uggal).hi); Sp 874,17 (-aip
buddhavacanaip pariyattisaddhammo nama); Sadd 560,20
(-o pana paJidhammo ); 732,7 (saghakathe -e buddha-
vacane); - (ii) (one) who knows the three pi~akas;
Mil21,15 (ayasma Nagaseno ... bahussuto -o vedagü,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tipi~ako); 22,10* (te ca -a bhikkhü
pañcanekayika pi ca); PsI 115,14 (-a bhikkhü); II 122,34
(Sorato nama eko upasako -o bhiil).ako anagami
ariyasavako); Spk III 36,1o (asuko thero suttantiko asuko
abhidhammiko asuko vinayadharo asuko -o); Mhv 5:84
(-anaip theranaip); -se e also tipi~aka, tipe~aka (sv ti 2).
tebhatika, m.pl. [te 3 + bhatika], the three brothers;
Dhp-a I 97,2 (Uruvelakassapadinaip -ana111 datuip
vagati).
tebhümaka, tebhümika, mfn. [from ti 2 + bhümi],
belonging to three spheres; belonging to three planes of
existence; Vism 410,16 (sabbaip pi [cittaip] -aip sa-
uttaraip lokuttaraip anuttaraip, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tebhümikaip); 499,2o (-a sailkhara, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
tebhümika); 527,5 (kammanibbatta -a rüparüpadhamma,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tebhümika); 593,7 (agharasa dhatuyo
dvadasayatanani pañcakkhandha ti sabbe pi -e
dhamme ... namaip ca rüpaJP ca ti dvedha vavatthapeti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tebhümike); 687,24 (bhümi ti hi
vipassanaya arammal).abhüta -a pañcakkhandha ti, Be,
Ee so; Se tebhümika; Ce omits); Spk II 270,25
(rüpakkhandho kamavacaro avasesa -a); III 82,23
(sukhindriyadukkhindriyadomanassindriyani kam-
avacaran' eva, somanassindriyaip -aip upekkhindriyaip
catubhümakaip, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce tebhümikaip); It-a 11
64,6 (viññal).an ti -aip kusaladicittaip, Be, Se so; Ee
tebhümikaip; Ce tebhummikaip); Nidd-a 11 36,28
(saipsarappavattaip -aip vagaip anagate pavattissati, Se
so; Be, Ce 0 -vagaip; Ee tebhumakavagaip); Nett-a 214,9
(
0
-dhammanaip) quoted Sadd 349,9; Sadd 556,26 (kileso
hi 0 -vagasailkhataip ca vatthu kamo ti vuccati); - see
also tibhümika (sv ti).
temati, temeti\ -ayati 1, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. timyati, S. Dhatup
timyati, stimyati, stlmyati, Wg § 26:16-17], is wet;
becomes wet; Dhatum 845 (timu temanasailkasu); Ja I
88,33 (temitukamo va -eti); Sp 388,2o (sailghiko
dabbasambharo agutto deve vassante -ati atapena
sukkhati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -eti); Ps III 159,2o (sacahaip
udakaip otarissami valaip -issati); 391,2 (yatha
pa~iggahako -ati na evaip chac;Ic;Ieti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-eti); Spk II 245,2o (imesaip assanaip khurapighani ma
-entü ti) f. Th-a I1 232,7 (khuramattaip pi ma -etü ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee temitü ti); Spk II 352,2 (meghasisaip va
gajjitaip va na paññayati, kathaip -issama ti, so read
11·ith Be, Ce, Se); Sadd 411,14 (timu addabhave: ... -ati
tinto Temiyo);- part.pr. (a) tementa 1, mfn., Jall 375,8
t mahajano ... sabbaip rattiip -ento a~~hasi); Spk III 41,23
1darukkhandho hegha gailgodakena upari vassena
-ento ); Sadd 411,11 (-ento addabhavaip papento ); -
neg. atementa 1, mfn., Sp 773,7; (b) temamana, mfn., Mp I
343 tema ti
407,14 (devaip vassantaip pi aga!)etva ... -amana va, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se temayamana va); - aor. 3 sg. (a) temi,
Spk II 245,21 (khurapighimattaip na -i); Dhp-a III 338,17
(civarakanno ... ussavabindühi -i); (b) temittha,
Bv-a 209,27 (bhagavato civare aipsumattaip . . . na
-ittha); (e) temayi 1, Ja I 390,25 (paggharantehi udaka-
bindühi -ayi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se temiyati): 3 pl. temiipsu,
Ja IV 407,15 (nivatthasataka lohitena -imsu); -
inf temituip, temetuip 1, Ja .I 88,33 (temituka~o va -eti
atemitukamassa sarire udabindumatto pi na patati) f.
Bv-a 295,24{oll. (Ce, E e temetukamo . . . atemetu-
kamassa ... ; Be, Se temetukamo ... atemitukamassa ... )
f. Ja VI 479,34 (Be, Ce, Ee temetukama te -enti
atemetukamassa ... ; Se temitukama . . . atemitu-
kamassa ... ) f. 586,32joll. (temitukama . . . atemitu-
kamanaip ... ) f. Vism 396,3foll. (temitukamo ... na
temitukamo); - absol. (a) temitva, temetva 1, Ja I 503,s
(mahamegho pavassi, atha naip kul).apaip -itva u~~haya
pakatisa!)~hanena aghasi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -etva); II
375,9 ( -etva ~hitaip mahajanaip disva, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
temiyamanaip); - pp tinta, mfn., wet; drenched;
Abh 753; Ja I 390,24 (so ... rattiip abbhokase himodakena
-o); Sv 1001,24 (dutiyajjhanasukhena -a); Ps II 287,28
(udake pakkhittabhavo viya kilesakamena --ta);
Ud-a 297,23 (chahi dvarehi ragadikilesavassanena --tta
avassutaip); Pa~is-a 443,19 (udakena -aya bhümiya);
Sadd 411,14; - --civaraka, mfn., with wet robe(s);
Dhp-a III 339,12 (--civarake bhikkhü disva);
neg. atinta, mfn., Sp 757,3 (uparibhago tinto yeva anto
atinto); Ps II 288,6 (atintata); Spk II 381,26 (anavassuta
atinta); - caus. pr. 3 sg. temeti 2 , -ayati2 [cf BHS
timayati], makes wet; moistens; Vin 11 120,27 (hatthe
mattikaip -enti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se hatthena); Vism 360,26
(na pi udakaip janati ahaip lec;Ic;lukhal).c;ladlni -eml ti);
Sv 217,2o (abhisandeti ti -eti sineheti); Th-a III 153,4
(kada nu ovassate ti -eti ti); part.pr.
(a) tementa2, mfn., Vism 344,8 (sedo paggharamano
sukkhathaddhabhattaip pi -ento muduip karoti);
Ap-a 383,19 (sadevakaip lokaip -ento ... dhammavassaip
vassati ti); - neg. atementa2, mfn., Ja VI 275,11;
Vism 262,4; (b) temayamana, mfn., Ja VI 3,18 (yasma
kumarassa jatadivase ... devo vassi yasma ca so rañño
e' eva amaccadlnaip ca hadayaip -ayamano jato tasma
Temiyakumaro tveva namaip akasi, Ce so; Se
temiyamano vi ya jato; Be rañño . . . hadayaip sitalaip
jataip yasma ca -ayamano jato; E e ... devo vassi y asma
ca so -iyamano jato ... ); Vism 360,24 (udake ...
-ayamane); Cp-a 216,2 (hadayaip uJarena pi pitisinehena
-ayamano);- aor. 3 sg. temayi2, atemayi, Ja IV 330,26*
(-ayi); Mhv 21:27 (atemayi);- inf temetuip 2, Ja I 73,8
(mahasattassa clvare ussavabindughanamattaip pi -etuip
nasakkhi); Vism 264,1 (-etum samattho hoti); -
absol. (a) temetva2, V in IV 86,~2 (udakena -etva); Ja II
ll,t2; Mil311,29 (api nu kho taip maharaja
mahapa~haviip sakka parittena udakabindukena -etva
udakacikkhallaip katun ti); Mp I 188,3 (telena vagiip
-etva); Pv-a 46,32 (sa tena kese samüle -etva, Ce so; E e
sutemitva; Be, Se kesamülesu -etva); - neg. atemetva,
Dhp-a I 389,12; (b) temayitva, Bv 21:26 (Bv-a 247,5:
-ayitva ti dhammakathasalilena -etva siñcitva ti attho);
temana
Mil 232,2; - pass. pr. 3 sg. temlyati, is made wet;
Vin IV 230,12 (uttarantiya bhikkhuniya antaravasako
-iyati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -lyati); Ja I 390,25
(paggharantehi udakabindiihi -iyati, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
temayi); Th-a III 99,35 (ia!).!).Ukadvayarp. vassodakena na
-lyati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -iyati); - part.pr.
temiyamana, mfn., Ja IV 327,11 (kañsamaggo -iyamano
mudu hutva); Vism 360,25 (mayarp. udakena -iyamana ti,
Be, Ce, E e so; Se -iyama ti) = Vibh-a 66,12 (-iyamana
!hita ti); - pp temita, mfn., Ja III 408,15 (pltiya
temitahadayo); Sv 200,31 (khe)odakena -itarp., Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee khe)a-udakatemitarp.); - neg. atemita, mfn.,
Spk III 71,6 (atemitassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na -itassa) =
As315,17; -jpptemetabba,mfn., Vini 47,12 (mattika
-etabba).
temana, n. [cfS. lex. temana], l. being wet; becoming wet;
Ja II 377,12 (rañño 0 -bhayena); Spk II 331,4 (himodakena
-arp.); III 31,9 (sakirp. va dvikkhatturp. va o -taya); Th-a II
138,33 (devata therassa 0 -bhayena vassarp. varesurp.); -
2. wetting; moistening; Pj I 66,24 (0 -samattho hoti);
Vv-a 20,17 (aggimhi tapanarp. udake va -arp.); -
atemana, n., not getting wet; Ja II 377,18 (rañño temane
va -e va mayharp. doso n' atthi); Ap-a 312,21
(sihasanassa -' -atthaya tass' upari ghararp. ca karesi).
temlisa, m.n. [from ti2 + masa2], a period of three months;
three months; Vin III 230,4 (iccham' aharp. bhikkhave
-arp. pa!isalliyiturp.); MI 438,6 (ayasma Bhaddali
sabbarp. tarp. -arp. na bhagavato sammukhibhavarp.
adasi); S V 326,1 (tassa -assa accayena); Ja IV 131,2
(-arp. kammanhanarp. bhavetva); Vism 92,13 (so -arp. pi
tattha pi!).<;iapatarp. paribhuñjitva); Sv 737,3 (imasmirp.
-e); Dhp-a I 290,14 (sace ayya imarp. -arp. idha
vasissanti); Ud-a 330,9 (ito -ato uddharp.).
temlisi(n), mfn. [from ti 2 + masi], lasting for three
months; Mp II 97,26.
temlisika, timasika, mfn. ffrom ti 2 + masa2; S. traimasika],
lasting for three months; being at the age of three
months; Pv 7:8 (-o gabbho); Nidd I 120,11 (-o ... cavati,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se timasiko); Sv 727,11 (-arp. chamasikarp.
navamasikarp. va pa!ipadarp. ga!).hati).
terasa, te)asa, tedasa, num., mf( -a, -l)n., and -1, f [cf S.
trayodasa], l. (num.) 13; Vin 111 186,11 (uddi!!ha kho
ayasmanto -a sailghadisesa dhamma); 204,24
(dvihuppanne miilaclvare ... -e uppanne miilaclvare,for
13 days ?); IV 148,10 (sailghadisesena ti -annarp.
aññatarena); Th p. 66,10* (in uddana: gathayo e' ettha -a
ti); Ja IV 312,1 (tehi -ahi janehi); Pa!is I 102,16 (-a
slsani); Ap 133,13 (-a cakkavattino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-a); Vibh429,34 (-a dhatuyo); Dhatuk 13,22 (-ahi
dhatiihi); Vism 59,16 (-a dhutailgani anuññatani); Ps III
398,25 (a<;l<;lhate)asehl ti a<;!<;ihena te)asehi, dvadasahi
satehi paññasaya ca bhikkhiihi saddhin ti vuttarp. hoti) =
Pj 11440,13 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se te)asahi); It-a I 95,19 (-asu
suttesu); Mhv 36:98 (-a sama Lailkarajjarp. akarayi);
Sadd 297,10 (dvadasa barasa -a tedasa te)asa);- ifc see
a<;!<;lha- (sv a<;l<;lha\ - 2. (mfn.) (i) the 13th; Ap 114,26
(kappamhi -e); Pj II 489,3 (-ayarp. [gathayarp.]);
(ii) containing (a poem of) 13 verses; Th p. 66, 10* (in
uddana: -amhi nipatamhi gathayo e' ettha -a ti); -
3. terasl,f [scil. ratti], the 13th (day or) night of the
344 tela
lunar haif-month; Ja II 193,25' (bhattakarako pakkhassa
-iyarp. yeva marp.sarp. gahetva !hapesi); Sp 794,16
(pakkhassa -iyarp. yeva gantva ayarp. uposatho
catuddasiko paJ).!).arasiko ti pucchitabban ti); Ps III 310,16
(-iyarp. ca pa!ipade ca ti); - 0
-yojanika, mfn., 13
yojanas in extent; Ja V 38,21 (mahanigrodharukkho ...
miilato paghaya ubbedhena -o);- see also tayodasa.
terasaka, n. [terasa + ki], a group of 13; Vin III 186,24
(-arp. nighitarp.); Sp 517 ,6*.
terasama, mf( -a, -I)n. [cf S. trayodasama], the 13th;
Vin V 106,6; M III 255,11 (ayarp. -1 pa!ipugga1ika
dakkhi!).a); Dhpp. 50 (1okavaggo -o); Jai 341,13 (-arp.
kathehl ti); Vism 435,11 (abhiññaniddeso nama -o
paricchedo ); Sp 272,24 (-e vatthumhi); Pj 11 183,10 (-aya
[gathaya], Be, Ce, Se so; Ee terasaya); Mhv p. 102,1o
(Mahindagamano namo -o paricchedo).
terovassika, therovassika, mfn. ffrom tiro + vassa; cf S.
tirovar~a], more than ayear old; (according to ct: rained
on for a long time;) D 11 297,16 (passeyya sarlrarp.
slvathikaya cha<;l<;litarp. ... aghikani piitlni CU!).!).akajatani
-ani; Sv 772,15: -anl ti atikkantasarp.vaccharani); S IV
161,33 (khlrarukkho assattho va ... udumbaro va sukkho
ko)apo -o); Ap-a 206,29 foll. (therasaddo panayarp.
ka1athirapaññattinamadheyyajenhadlsu anekesu atthesu
vattati, tatha hi therovassikani pii!lni CU!).!).akajatanl ti
adisu ka! e, therovassikani ciraka1arp. ovassikaru ti attho).
tela, n. [S. taila], sesamum oil; oil in general (see
Sadd 562,32foll.); V in I 199,23 (pañca bhesajjani
seyyathidarp. sappi navanltarp. -arp. madhu pha!).itarp.);
205,6 (na bhikkhave atipakkhittamajjarp. -arp. patabbarp.);
111 83,15 (aññataro bhikkhu gilano hoti tarp. bhikkhii -ena
abbhañjirp.su); 251,22 (-arp. nama tilatelarp. sasapatelarp.
madhukatelarp. eraJ).<;iatelarp. vasatelarp.); D II 164,8
(sappissa va -assa va jhayamanassa n' eva charika
paññayati na masi); S 11 86,9 (-arp. ca pa!icca vagirp. ca
pa!icca telappadlpo jhayeyya); Ja I 52,8 (Mahamaya pi
devl pattena -arp. viya dasamase kucchiya bodhisattarp.
pariharitva); Nidd I 154,16 (tattena pi -ena osiñcanti);
Ap 2,31 (-a ca madhupha!).ita); 230,23 (bodhiya
vedikayaharp. -arp. makkhesirp. tavade); Kv 338,3
(tilamhi -am anugatarp. anupavi!!harp.); Mil229,7
(bhisakko nama aturanarp. pa!hamarp. tava
catiihapañcaharp. -arp. payeti balakaraJ).aya sinehanaya);
Vism 591,11 foll.; Sp 200,30 (ekamekassa bhikkhuno
abbhañjanatthaya sahassaggha!).akarp. -arp. adasi); Ps III
12,7 (!hapetva hi sappirp. avaseso yo koci sneho -an ti
vuccati); V v-a 54,9 (itth! gabbhinl tile dhovitva atape
sukkhapeti -arp. katukama, Be, Ce so; Se patukama; Ee
kevalarp. tilatelarp. patukama); Sadd 562,32foll. (tilan ti
tapphalarp. tato pana nikkhanto sineho -arp. so hi tilanarp.
idan ti -an ti vuccati ... sasane tilatelarp. sasapatelan ti
adina visesavacanarp. pi dissatl ti . . . api ca telasaddo
yebhuyyena tilatele vattati); - ifc see ga!).giisa-, tila-; -
o• -abbhañjita, mfn., greased with oil; Vism 362,26 (-e
akkhe); - 0 -kalala, n. [tela + kalala 1], oil-paste; ? Ja 11
155,23 (tassa sañrarp. do!).iyarp. nipajjapetva -arp.
pakkhipapetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -e); - 0 -Camma, n.,
oiled skin; oil cloth; Mhv 25:37;- 0 -cliti,f, an oil vat;
Mp I 409,29; Dhp-a I 220,14 (dussani -!su temetva); -
0
-dhüpita, mfn. [tela + dhüpita2], flavoured with oil;
 telaka
Vv 43:5; - 0 -Dii\i, naF,f.. a tube for oil; Vism 92,16
H111 puretva); Dhp-a II 193,18;- 0 -nii!ika,f, a tube for
oil; Sp 1027,27 (jañgha ca -a viya hoti); Sv 207,4
(ekadasaparikkharikassa kattarayaghi va -a va vanati);
0
- -paJ.n,Iika, n., a kind of sandal-wood; Abh 301
(gosis~ -a111);- -paka, m., a decoction of oil; V in I
0
205,2 (anujanami bhikkhave -an ti; Sp 1091,14foll.: ya111
kiñci bhesajjapakkhitta111 sabba111 anuññatam eva hoti,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se bhesajja111 pakkhipitu111); -
"-pasiil}.a, m., ? Ja II 285,7· (-e dhota-asihattho si ti);-
0
-pilotika,f, a rag soaked in oil; Ps II 59,3
(sakalasañra111 -aya ve!hetva alimpanti); Dhp-a I 221,4
(d<4hikammatthaya ime thambhe -ahi ve!hapeti); -
0
-makkhana, n., anomtmg with oil; Mili! ,s
(--palibodho); Mp II 205,27; - 0
-makkhita, mfn.,
anointed with oil; Sp 1091,21 ( -ena gattena); -
"-yanta, n., an oil-mill; Bv 2:167 (-e yatha cakk~
ev~ kampati medinl; Bv-a 114,3o: -e ti telapl!anayante)
quoted Ja I 25,33*, Ap-a 28,26* (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -a111)
and Sadd 539,27 (-a111); - a tela, mfn., without oil; Ja III
406,23 (alor.ük~ -a111 kummasa111 datva); Cp 1:1 :5; -
satela, mfn., with oil; containing oil; Vv-a 147,24 (-a111
tilapiññakarp); see also cu~~atelavala!f<;lupaka
(sv cu~~a), nibaddhatelaka (sv nibandhati), sitthatelaka.
telaka, m. [cf S. mürdhatailika], a medicine snuffed
through the nose, or inserted in the nose; an errhine;
Vin I 204,13 (ayasmato Pilindavacchassa sisabhitapo
hoti ... anujanami bhikkhave muddhani -an ti).
telika 1 , m. [S. tailika], an oil miller, Ap 359,19 (-a
kaghallara ca); Sadd 786,25 (gandha111 assa bha!f<;lan ti
gandhiko eva111 -o).
telika2 , mfn. [from tila], prepared with sesame;
Sadd 786,17 (tilena sa111sagha111 bhojana111-a111).
teliya, mfn. [from tela], prepared with oil, oily; - ifc see
lo~iya-.
teleti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv tilati 1.
telasa, see sv terasa.
te~acika, mfn. [from ti 2 + vaca], using or involving three
utterances or proclamations; Vin I 17,1 (so va loke
pa!ham~ upasako ahosi -o); 170,33 (-aya ce bhikkhave
pavara~aya bhasitaya); Sp 875,11 ( ... -a dvevacika
samanavassika pavara~a ti nava pavara~ayo ); Kkh2 345,5
(-aya ñattiya vacana111 na hapetabba111); - -a111, adv.,
with three utterances or proclamations; Vin I l68,1s
(tadallu pavara~aya savarabhayak~ allosi, bhikkhü
nasakkhi111su -a111 pavaretu111).
teviija, mfn. [cf S. traividya], knowing the three vedas;
possessed of the three knowledges; Vin III 87,29 (asuko
bhikkhu aralia asuko bhikkhu -o asuko bhikkhu
ch<4abhiñño); MI 386,18* (isisattamassa akuhassa -assa
brahmapattassa ... bhagavato); SI 146,12* (-a
iddhippatta ca cetopariyayakovid a khi~asava arahanto;
Spk I 213,26: -a ti pubbenivasadibba cakkhu-
asavakkhayasañkhatahi tihi vijjahi samannagata); 167 ,3*
(etahi tihi vijjahi -o hoti brahma~o); A I !63,!6foll.
(aññatha kho brahma!fa brahma~a brahma~arp -~
paññapenti aññatha ca pana ariyassa vinaye -o hoti ti);
Sn 595 (-anarp yad akkhatarp tatra kevalino smase; Pj II
463,14: -anan ti ti vedan~); Thi 180 (-a atha vunhami
kata te anusasani); Ap 26,27 (-a cha!abhiñña ca iddhiya
345 te visa tima
parami111 gata); Pp 14,7 (katamo ca puggalo -o);
Mil 141,25 (-ana111 chajabhiññana111 ara1Iantana111);
Vism 5,10 (sllena 0 -taya upanissayo pakasito hoti); It-a II
134,17 (ya111 pana brahma!fa samavedadiveda-
ttayajjhenena -arp brahma!fal11 vadanti); Mhv 14:14 (-a
iddhippatta ca cetopariyakovid a);- neg. atevijja, mfn.,
It-a II 134,19 (paramatthato -~ brahma~a111 yeva e' ete
bhovadino avijjanivuta tevijjo brahma!fo ti vadanti); -
see also tivijja (sv ti\
teviijaka\ mfn. [tevijja + ka2], who knows the three vedas;
DI 107,2o (alto vata re amhiika111 pa~<;litaka alto vata re
amhak~ bahussutaka aho vata re amhiika111 -a; see PsI
144,27 foil.: alto vata ti alto vata re ... -a ti garallaya pi
dissati); Mp II 260,7 ( -bra:hma~a).
0
teviijaka2 , mfn. [cf S. traividyaka], connected with the
three vedas; belonging to those who know the three
vedas; DI 88,8 (anuññatapa!iññato sake acariyake -e
pavacane ); 119,22 (alto vata m~ sama~ o Gotamo sake
acariyake -e pañh~ puccheyya); M II 169,1 (addha kho
Kapa!hikassa ma~avassa -e pavacane kata111 bhavissati);
Sv 404,27 (ida111 brallmasallavyataya maggadipaka111 -a111
pavacana1p tevijjana1p brahma!fan~); Pj II 585,4
(sadhamme ti sake brahma!fadhamme, -e pavacane ti
vutta1p hoti).
teviija, f [cf S. trividya], the three vedas; the three
knowledges; Bv 25:48 ( 0 -bhüsanaip datva; Bv-a 270,5:
0
-may~ vibhüsanarp datva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tivijjamayaip); Ap-a 234,33 (-aya ca chajabhiññaya ca
iddhiya ca parami1p pariyosana1p gata); - o -iriJ}.a,
0
-iri~a, n., a desert that is the three vedas; DI 248,17
(tasma idaJY! tevijjan~ brahmaJfanaip -an ti pi vuccati,
Be. Se so; Ee tevijja-iri~anti pi ; Ce tevijjaip ira~an ti pi;
Sv 404,28: -an ti tevijja-araññaip, Be, Se so; Ee tevijja-
Iri~an ti tevijja-araññaip; Ce tevijja-iri~an ti tevijja1p
arañña1p); - see also tivijja (sv ti 2 ).
tevisa, num. and mfn. [te 3 + visa(Ip)], l. (num.)
[cfS. trayovi1psat], 23; Vin V 215,21 (-a sañghadisesa);
Vv-a 5,2 (0 -sataip vatthüni, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -sata);
Sadd 297,26 (dvavisa bavisa -a); 2. (mfn.)
[cf S. trayovi1psa], the 23rd; V in III 204,3o; Ap 242,2o
(-amhi ito kappe, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tevisamhi).
tevisati, f, num. and mfn., l. (num.) [cfS. trayovi1psati]
23; Vin II 292,34 (imamhi khandhake vatthu -i); V 148,4
(-i sailghadisesa, Be, Ce so; E e, Se tevisarp; Sp 1350,27:
Be, Ce, Ee -i; Se tevisaip); Ap 201,15 (tevisati-
kappasate); Bv8:19 (-i sallassani nariyo): Vism559,5
(ete -i dhamma vmna!fapaccaya namarüpan ti
veditabba); Sp 1135,15 (tesu -iya puggalesu); Sv 1010,18
(-i p~sukülani veditabbani); Dhp-a I 84,8 (imes~ pi
-iya buddhan~ santike); - 2. (mfn.) the 23rd;?
Ap 220,11 (ito tevisatikappe, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tevisati
kappe).
tevisatika, m. [cf S. trayovi1psatika], a group of 23;
Tikap-a 237,2 (dve -a).
tevisatima, mfn. ffrom tevisati], the 23rd; A III 261,11
(dighacarikavaggo -o, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se tatiyo);
Ap 217,27 (alambanadayakav aggo -o); Kv 627,19 (vaggo
-o); Vism 710,3o (-o paricchedo); Tikap-a 237,5*
(nayamhi -e tevisatikamülake, so read with Be, Se);
Mhv p. 190,4 (yodhalabho nama -o paricchedo).
 tesatthi
tesatthi, num. and mfn. [te3 + sa!thi], l. (num.) [cf S.
trayal_l~a~~i, tri~aHi] 63; Vin I 198,12 (imasmiq1
khandhake vatthüni -i, Be so; Ce vatthü; Ee vatthu; Se
vatthü -1); Ja IV 84,1 (-iya nagarasahassesu); Ap 523,1o
0
( -cakkavattlnaqi mahesittam akarayiq1); Vism 422,2 (-i
kappa ama honti); Pa~is-a 133,31 (-iya dinhlhi); -
2. (mfn.) the 63rd; Ap 123,5 (ito --kappamhi); 211,13
(-imhi ito kappe).
tesatthima, mfn., the 63rd; Ap 234,21 (ito -e kappe).
tesattati, num. and mfn. [te3 + sattati], l. (num.)
[S. trayal_lsaptati, trisaptati] 73; Pa~is I 3,9 (imani -i
ña1_1ani imesaqi -iya ñill_lanaqi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee imesaq1
-1naq1 ña1_1anaq1); II 189,34 (-lnaqi ñal_lanaJTI);
Vism 559,22 (ete -i dhamma); - 2. (mfn.) the 73rd;
Ap 55,21 (-imh' ito kappe, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -i); 223,8
(-imhi kappamhi); -se e also tisattati (sv ti 2).
tesamutthanika, see tisamughanika (sv ti\
to, m. [S. -tas], the suffix -to, (usually giving an ablative
sense) added esp. to pronouns; Sadd 680,1sfoll.
(amhatumhilnaJTI tomhi mama tava: sabbesaJTI
amhatumhasaddanaqi tomhi paccaye pare niccaJTI mama
tava ice adesa honti mamato apeti tavato apeti); 894,6 (to
1t1 pañcam1ya so iti ca: matito ca pltlto ca
saqisuddhagaha1_1iko); - to-adesa, m., substitution with
-to; Sp 211,1s (tatonidanan ti taJTlnidanaJTI taJTlhetukan ti
paccattavacanassa -o veditabbo, samase e' assa
tolopabhavo); - tokara, m., the suffix -to; PsI 86,3o
(yato kho [bhikkhave bhikkhuno] ti samivacane tokaro,
yassa kho ti vuttaJTI hoti, porill_la pana yamhi kale ti
Val_ll_lenti); - topaccaya, m., the suffix -to; Ap-a 223,13
(pato va sannipatetva ti sattamyatthe -o, patarasaka1e
yeva mama santike raslbhüta ti attho).
tojati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tojati, Wg § 7:70], hurts;
Sadd 345,24 (tuja hiJTlsayaJTI: -ati); - see also tuñjati,
tujjeti, tuñjeti 1.
totthabba, mfn.,fpp oftussati qv.
t01;Iana, tojana, n. [cftojati and S. togana], splitting;
Dhatum 159 (tugi -e); Sadd 356,14 (tugi tojane: tu1_1gati
tu1_1go); 460,16 (tuja tojane: tojati).
tol}ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tuqati, Wg § 28:42], curves;
Sadd 358,23 (tuqa ko~ille: -ati).
topa ti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv tuppati.
tophati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup tuphati, tophati, Wg §§ 11:14,
28:27], hurts; Sadd 405,4 (tupha hiJTlsayaJTI: -ati).
tomara, m.n. [ts], a lance, esp. for controlling elephants;
Abh 366 (-o nitthiyaqi pade siya vijjhanaka1_1~ako); Ja IV
433,21* (kodaqgakani ga1_1hatha sattiyo -am ca);
Cp 2:1:10 (yadi te maJTI tattha ko~~eyyuJTI pharasühi -ehi
ca); Sp 544,26 (vihare satti va -o va ~hapito hoti);
Sv 702,5 (-an ti padadisu vijjhanadal_lgatomaraJTI); -
0
-hattha, mfn., with lance in hand; M III 133,18 (-o ca
puriso upari glvaya nisinno hoti).
tomari(n), mfn. r.from tomara], armed with a lance;
Sadd 188, 16* (-1 musa]¡).
tomarika, m. [tomara + ika], one armed with a lance, a
lance-bearer; Sadd 787,2 (capo assa avudho capiko
evaqi -o muggariko).
toya, n. [ts], water; Abh 661; A II 39,7* (puqgañkaqi yatha
vaggu -e na upa1ippati, Ee so; Be, Se -ena nupalippati;
Ce -ena nüpa1ippati) = Sn 547 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -e na
346 ty-
upa1impati); Sn 71 (padumaJTI va -ena alippamano);
Th 1102 (kada nu maJTI pavusakalamegho navena
-ena ... ovassate); Ap 563,24 (parittaqi -am addasaqi);
Bv 21:8 (anupa1itto padumaqi va -amhi
sampavagghitaJTI); Ap-a 537,17* (tattha sltalaka -a);
Ev-a 80,4* (nadlsu -aqi pi ca na ppavatti); Mhv 37:132
(pivanto -aqi); Sadd 408,16* (udakaJTI -aJTI ja1aJTI).
toral}a, n. [ts], an arch; an arched gateway; a lintel;
Abh 205 (-aq1 tu bahidvaraq1); Vin II 154,15 (anujanami
bhikkhave ko~~hakaJTI apesiq1 yamakakava~aJTI -aq1
palighan ti); Ja 1 484,23 ( -assa heghabhagaJTI sampatte
brahma1_1e); II 95,4* (kiJTI nu -am asajja pa!ikkamasi
kuñjara; 95,9'foll.: nagaradvarasañgha~aq1 patva, Ce, Ee
so; Be nagaradvarasaiJkhataqi -aJTI; Se nagaradvara-
saiJghagatoraqaJTI); Ap 579,21 (catudvaresu sobhanti -a
ratanamaya); Spk 11 226,29 (nagaramajjhe -aJTI karetva);
III 60,22 foil. (-ani nama hi purisubbedhani nagarassa
a1aiJkaratthaJTI karíyanti coranivara1_1atthani pi honti
yeva, atha va -an ti pinhasaiJgha~ass' etaJTI namaqi, Be
so; Ce caranivara1_1aghani pi; Se coranivaraqaghani pi;
Ee coranivara1_1atthaya pi); V v-a 160,23 (-an ti va
dvarakoghakapasadassa namam): Da~h 5:48 (ussapitani
kanakadivicittitani vyagghadirilpakhacitani ca -ani); -
ifc see dhajagghika-.
toleti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv tu1eti.
toJati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup tügati, togati, Wg § 9:67],
splits; Sadd 460,16 (tuja tojane: -ati).
toJana, n., see sv togana.
tosa, m. [S. to~a], pleasure; contentment; Abh 1015
(manotose .. . nibbutl); Dhatup 146 (muda -e);
Dhatum 684 (tusa -e); - duttosa, mfn., hard to please
or satis.fy; Ja V 425,22* (rakkhasl viya -a); - see also
duttosaya.
tosaka, mfn. [S. to~aka], pleasing; contenting; It-a II
152,29 (sampahaq1saka ti ... cittassa samma pahaJTlsaka
1addhassadavasena sughu -a).
tosana, n. [cf S. to~aqa], contenting; pleasing;
contentment; satisfaction; Sn 971 (mattaJTI so jañña idha
o• -atthaJTI; Pj II 573,31: o• -atthan ti santosatthaJTI,
etadatthaJTI mattaq1 janeyya ti vuttaqi hoti); Th-a 11 260,3
(abhihasanan ti -aJTI); Thl-a 86,33 (indriyilnaJTI 0 -vasena
sarírassa tappanena suddhi siya ti); Pa~is-a 622,27
(dhammakathaya paresaJTI -aqi); Sadd 351,16 (-aJTI
tughi).
tosapana, n. r.from *tosapeti, caus. of tussati], pleasing,
contenting; soothing; Ja 11 249,17 (tava vlqasaddo
itthinaqi darake 0 -saddo viya hot! ti); Sadd 695,4
(paresaqi o• -atthaJTI saccakaral_laJTI).
toseti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftussati qv.
-tta, [S. -tva], a suffix added to nouns or adjectives to
make an abstract noun;- see also -ta2, -ttana.
-ttana, [J3.V -tvana], a suffix added to nouns or adjectives
to make an abstract noun; - (fe see jaya-, jara-,
damarika-, deva-, purisa- peta-;- see also -ta2, -tta.
ty-, sometimes represents ti, te (or taqi 2) befare an initial
vowel, which may be lengthened; - ti: Vin II 155,21
(buddho ti tvaqi gahapati vades! ti, buddho tyahaJTI
gahapati vadami, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tahaq1); Ja V 374,5*
(suta ca pa1_1gita tyamha; 374,11·: paqgita ti taya sutamha,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee taya sutamha); VI 267,27* (yaqi pa1_1gito
tya
tyeke vadanti loke; 268,2-: ya~p eke p~<;lito ti vadanti);
325,26* (ya~p ma1_1avo tyabhivadi janinda; 326,s-: ya~p
tva!Tl ml\l_lavo ti abhivadasi); - te 1 : D III 183,25 (ye
dhutta, .. tyassa mitta honti te sahaya; Sv 947,21: te assa
mitta honti); S 1 195,18 (tyassuda!Tl bhagava atirocati
v~1_1ena; Spk 1 284,26: te assuda~p); A II 87,24 (yehi kho
pana sabrahmacañhi saddhi!Tl viharati tyassa , ..
samudacaranti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tyassa; Mp III 114,13:
te assa); Ja III 430,17* (tyajja bhekena yapema; 430,2o-: te
maya~p ajja); V1559,9* (tyajja putte na passami; 560,lo-:
te ajja na passami);- te2 : V in III 254,26 (ya~p pi tyaha!Tl
avuso civara!Tl adasi!Tl; Sp 723,12: ya!Tl pi te aha~p); S I
98,31 (idha tyassa yuddha~p paccupaqhita~p, Spk 1 165,25:
idha te assa); Ja II 440,16* (namo tyatthu; 440,17-: namo
te atthu); IV 154,16* (kena tyassüni vattanti; l54,2o-: tava
assüni); V 220,26* (na capi tyassa nagaramhi pakkho, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se tyassa; 225,8-: tava koci pakkho pi na
bhaveyya); 352,11* (patta nissa!Tlsaya~p tyamha, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se tyamha; 352,19': maya~p nissa!Tlsayena taya
patta yeva); 360,13* (sakha tyasmi; 360,22-: aha~p te .. ,
piyasahayo); VI 322,25* (te tyamha paññaya maya!Tl
sutuqha; 322,28': te maya~p tava paññaya); Mil 14,1 (na
kho tyaha!Tl Nagasena ettavata khamami); - tmp2 :
Ja VI 78,16* (aturo tyanupucchami; 78,25·: gilano hutva
aha!Tl ta~p anupucchami).
tya, mfn. [ef S. tyad, and O. von Hinüber, 1986, § 380],
this, that; Ja V 85,9* (katha!Tl nu vissase -amhi yenasi
kalaho kato; 85,16': -amhi ti tasmi!Tl) quoted Sadd 671 ,8;
Ja V 368,6* (khi<;l<;la p~ihita -asu rati -asu patiqhita
bijani -asu rühanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tasu; 368,n-: tasu
itthisu) quoted Sadd 671,9; Ja VI 292,21* (atha vissasate
-amhi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tamhi; 292,25': atha raja tanthi
vissasate vissasa!Tl karoti) quoted Sadd 274,29 foil.
(-amhi ti padassa atthibhave ... atha vissasate -amhi ...
na rakkhati ti aya!Tl gatha nidassana~p); Sadd 275,25
(sana~p asa!Tl -asü ti imani vuttani akkharacintakana!Tl
ña1_1acakkhusammuyhanaqhanabhütani); 67l,6foil. (tasu-
tamhina!Tl tyatta!Tl: tasu tamhi ice etesa!Tl takaro tyatta!Tl
apajjati va: -amhi purisamhi -amhi cittamhi -asu
itthisu).
tyante, [?], near to; Ja V 26,9· (ñante ti tyante santike ti
attho, Se so; Ee ñatte ti; but perhaps wrr; Ce ñatte ti
nayante ... ; Be ñatte ti abhyase santike ti attho ); - see
also ñanta.
-/tras, se e sv tasati2.
tv- sometimes represents ti 1, tu (or ta~p 2 ?) befare eva;-
ti: A III 5,3o (sabbe kama tveva sailkha~p gacchanti;
Mp III 224,11: kama ice eva sankha!Tl gacchanti);
Ud 53,28 (ya kaci mahanadiyo . , . mahasamuddo tveva
sailkha!Tl gacchanti); Ja IV 50,23 (Dhammapalo tveva
paññato); VI 359,14' (ganga tveva sankhya!Tl gacchanti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee t' eva); Sv 697,11 (Vediyapabbato
tveva sailkha!Tl gato); Ud-a 51,10 (ten' assa
Ajapalanigrodho tveva nama!Tl udapadi); - tu: Vin I
1,17 (avijjaya tveva asesaviraganirodha; Sp 953,3o:
avijjaya tu eva); D I 113,23 (na arahati bhava!Tl
So1_1ada1_1<;1o samal_la!Tl Gotama~p dassanaya
upasailkamitu!Tl sama1_1o tveva Gotamo arahati
bhavanta!Tl So1_1ada1_1<;1a!Tl dassanaya upasailkamitu!Tl);
It 104,15* (na tvev' ida!Tl kusitena ... nibbana~p
347 tvaqt
adhigantabba~p; It-a II 151,6: na tu eva ida!Tl, tusaddo
nipatamatta!Tl); Ja I 247,27* (seyyo amitto matiya upeto
na tveva mitto mativippahino ); 405,15* (sadhu kho
p~<;lito nama na tveva atip~<;Jito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
n' atth' eva); Mil287,9 (mahapa~avi parivatteyya ... na
tveva bodhisatto pa!tmvatteyya apatva
sammasambodhi!Tl); - taip 2 : Ja II 168,17* (brahma1_1i
tveva pucchami; 168,21': tam pucchami).
tvaip, tumhe, pron. 2 pers. [ef S. tvam, yüyam], (sg.
nom, tvam, tuvam; aee. tam2 , tuvam, tvam, tavam (and
te 2 ?); i~str. tay~. te 2 ; ~bl. taya;. gen .. tava, tava~p;
gen./dat tuyha!Tl. tuyha, te2; loe. tayi, tvayi; pl.
nom. tumhe, vo 1 [see T. Oberlies, 1997, p. 11, fn 22; and
BHSG § 20:44; but ef also vo 2]; aee. tumhe, vo 1 [and
1
ve , va!Tl ?] ; instr. tumhehi, vo 1; gen./dat. tumhaka~p,
tumha!Tl, vo 1; loe. tumhesu; see also Sadd 288,32foil.; te
+ initial vowel sometimes > t- or ty- qv; iie tva!Tl-. ta!Tl-.
se e Sadd 289,21 foil.), yo u (pl. sometimes used for sg., as
mark of respeet); Vin I 22,34* (nihato tvam asi antaka);
IV 204,15* (ma tva!Tl adhammo acarito asma kumbham
ivabhida, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ta!Tl); D I 3,5 (tumha!Tl yev'
assa tena antarayo ); 8,12 (micchapa!ipanno tvam asi
aham asmi sammapa!ipanno ); 50,s (na ta~p deva
vañcemi); II 333,25 (api nu ta tuyha!Tl jiva~p passanti
pavisanta!Tl va nikkhamanta!Tl va ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
tumha~p, prob, wr); 347,24 (tumhe khvettha bha1_1e
ummatta tumhe viceta); III 17,18 (ehi tva!Tl bho purisa);
M I 207,9 (kacci pana vo Anuruddha appamatta ...
viharatha ti; Ps II 241,1 foil.: vo ti nipatamatta!Tl
paccattavacana~p va, kacci tumhe ti attho); 271,2o (eva~p
hi vo bhikkhave sikkhitabba~p); 329,8 (atha kho aham
eva taya bhiyyo); 487,7 (so taya dujjano); II 127,18 (raja
ta~p bhante Pasenadi Kosalo amanteti ti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee te); SI 111,18* (n' eta~p tava patirüpa!Tl); III 33,21
(ya~p bhikkhave na tumhaka~p ta!Tl pajahatha); A Ill93,9
(yada tumhe Bhaddiya attana va janeyyatha); Dhp 235
(patheyya!Tl pi ca te na vijjati); 276 (tumhehi kicca~p
atappa!Tl); 315 (kh~o vo ma upaccaga, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ve) = Sn 333 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ve); Dhp 337 (ma vo
n~a!Tl va soto va Maro bhañji); Ud 8,23 (sabrahmacañ vo
bhikkhave kalankato ti); 47,8 (tuyha~p pana maharaja
atth' añño koci attana piyataro ti); 51,9 foiL (bhayatha vo
tumhe kumaraka dukkhassa appiya~p vo dukkhan ti);
Sn 31 (saral_la!Tl tam upema cakkhuma); 172 (eta~p vo
aham akkharni); 331 (ko attho su pi tena vo ); 352
(sampannaveyyakar~a~p taveda~p, Be, Ce so; Ee
tava-y-ida~p; Se tvayida~p); 377 (tuva~p hi buddha~p
pavara~p vadanti); p. 79,4 (pa!ibhatu ta!Tl Vailgisa ti); 983
(tuyha~p muddha phalatu sattadha); Vv 9:1
(abhikkantena va1_11_1ena ya tva~p tiqhasi devate); 84:10
(ida!Tl ca disvana adiqhapubba~p vimanaseqha~p ca
tava!Tl ca yakkha; Vv-a 337,19: tava~p ca ti tuva~p ca);
Pv 2:3 (ta!Tl tyaha!Tl Narada brümi sama!Tl di!!ha!Tl ida!Tl
taya); 5:12 (tumhehi puñña!Tl pasuta!Tl anappaka!Tl); 15:6
(aha~p ca kho adhimatta!Tl samalailkatatara taya); 15:24
(handa ki!Tl tyaha!Tl dammi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee taha!Tl;
Pv-a 88,17: ki!Tl te aha!Tl dammi ti); 28:2 (eka tuva~p
n' atthi ca tuyha samiko); Th 839 (tuva~p buddho tuva~p
sattha tuva~p marabhibhü muni); Thi 5 (kh~o ta!Tl ma
upaccaga); Ja I 207,13 (tayi ruci!Tl uppadesi ti); 221,29
 tva 348 thaketi

(tumhakrup cintento msmno 'mh! ti); 225,zs (yada te

tumhakrup; Ee tumhaJTI, perhaps wr) = 60,3o (eds
Nando akkosati, acc. or gen. ?); 279,18 (ko si tvan ti);
tuyhaJTI); 78,27 (tumhakaJTI matu mattha1ui:tgaJTI khadatha
279,22 (ahrup attanrup tuyhaJTI pariccajissami); 292,23
ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tumhmp, perhaps wr); Mil 19,4
(tumhesu o1okentesu 1ajjami); II 40,17* (gamantakani
(gacchatha vo bhante asambhl ta Sagalana garan ti; or
sevassu etaJTI mata1ayaJTI tava, Be, Ce so; Ee tavaJTI; Se
vo 2 ?); Mhv 1:65 (mahat! anukamp a no kata natha taya
tuvaJTI); 102,1 (bhante kena te attho ti); 153,12 (samma
ayaJTI); 7:60 (gaccha dani tuvrup bhoti); 7:65 (tumhe
tava danta atthi tvrup imrup pasrup chinda); 202,4• (ma su
kassa suta iti); 10:50 (tasma tvrup maressa ma ti); -
tvrup akara paprup yrup tvrup paccha katrup tape; 202,9·:
tvaJT~-niitha, mfn., dependent on you; Ja IV
ma tvrup paprup akara yrup katrup paccha trup yeva 253,13*
(pajjunn anatha pasavo pasunath a ayaJTI paja -o smi
tapeyya ti, Ce, Ee so; Se tappeyy a ti; Be tVaJTI yeva
maharaja, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tvaJTI natho si maharaja;
tapeyya ti) = III 160,23* (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se ymp trup;
253,17·foll.: tvaJTI mama patittha asi);
161 ,2' foll.: yrup papaJTI taya katrup paccha trup tapeyya
taJT~-bhatta(r), m., your husband; Ja VI 495,4* (yo
ki1ameyya); III 80,27* (ma m' addasrupsu rodantrup ca -a
maññey ya sakkaccaJTI tam upaqhah e, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
Pañca1a susamag ata tuvaJTI va parirodantrup, Be, Ce, Se
taJTI bhatta) ;- trup-mi ita(r),f, your mother; Ja IV 48,7•
so; Ee tavaJTI); 133,25* (tuyhaJTI vasaJTI gacchami);
(ahaJTI ca -ara vuccama no etadisaJTI kamma karomi
IV 52,31* (kasma hi tumhaJTI dahara na m!yare, Be, Ce,
Iuddrup, Ee so; Be, Ce tmp matara; Se te matara; 48,9·:
Se so; Ee tuyhaJTI; 53,z·: tumhakaJTI ku1e daharanaJTI
ahrup ca te matara, ayam eva va parho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
amaral).aJTI); 138,27 (sami andha pi tumhe yeva amhakrup
ahrup pi te matara );- tvrup-m ülakaip, ind., because of
uttamo ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se uttama ti); 446,28* (tuqho
you; Th 1128 (-rup nerayika bhavamase);
'smi deva tava dassanena); V 222,1• (tay! huta deva
taJT~-SaraJ}a, n. [tvaJTI + saral).a1], your refuge; Ja II
mahappha1a hi me; 226,1·: tuyhrup dinna); 375,11* (na pi
252,14* (ahrup -rup samma, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se taJTI
1obha vam aggahiJTI; but perhaps rather 1obha
saral).aJTI); - see also tumha.
va-m-aggahiJTI; or dual; see O. von Hinüber, 1986,
tvii, tviina, tüna, (gr. t. t.), the (ending of) the absolutive;
§ 288; 375,16: 1obha va tumhe nahrup aggahiJTI, Be so;
It-a 1 73,13 (ñatvana ti pubbaka!akiriya ... hetu-attho va
Se 1obhaya tumhe ... ;Ce, Ee Iobha vaJTI tumhe na pi ... );
tvasaddo yatha s!haJTI disva bhayaJTI hot! ti, Be, Se so;
391,26' (addha maJTI vo hitakam a yrup mrup
Ce, Ee ñatvasaddo); Sadd 851,10 (pubbaka!e samana-
samanusasatha; 392,7': man ti mama, vo ti tumhe);
kattukanrup dhatünrup tüna tvana tva ice ete paccaya
VI 15,26* (rajaputta tay! gate); 507,14* (sa tvaJTI VaiJkaJTI
honti yebhuyyena); 903,3; - tviidiya nta, mfn., ending
anuppatt a kathaJTI Maddi karissasi); 563,4• (tumhrup
m tva etc; being the absolutive; Sadd 308,21*
kama hi puttaka, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tuyhaJTI; 563,2o·:
(atthuddharo tumantaJTI ca -aJTI tikrup idha); 310,12foll.
tumhakrup kamena tumhe patthayana); 576,29*
(idani tvadiyantapadani vuccante bhavitva
(nikkinissama dabbena na vo dasa bhavissatha; or
bhavitva na ... ).
vo 2 ?);. Ap 79,2o (abhirilha mahav!ra taressami ahrup
tviitaip in Ee at Ja VI 519,28: read pavisitv a trup with Be,
tuvaJTI, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tavrup); 598,9 (tvayi pasadaJTI
Ce, Se.
pa!iladdha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tumhrup); Pv-a 58,11
-tviina, see sv tva.
(mayrup tuyhaJTI matulamatulaniyo ti, Be, Se so; Ce
tveva, see sv tv-.

th

tha\ [ts], the sound 'th', the consonant 'th'; Sadd 553,29
(satikava!ena varal).rup -aJTI); Mhv 6:13 (mahagu haya
(thassa ~hattrup); 606,1 (ta tha da dha na);- 0 -kiira, m.,
-rup); - athakan a, n., lack of covering or closing;
l. the letter or sound 'th'; Sp 1400,2 (SUI).atu me ti
As 401,2o (-aJTI apidahanan ti).
vattabbe takarass a -rup katva SUI).athu me ti vacanaJTI
thakana ka, n. [thakana + ka 2], a covering; a closing;
sithi1assa dhanitakaral).aJTI nama); It-a 1 35,30 (atthuppatti
Sp 282,7 (sace nissel).imatthake -aJTI hoti thaketva
eva aqhuppa tti -assa ~hakaraJTI katva, Be Se so; Ce, Ee
nipajjitabbaJTI); - ifc see gama (sv gama2 ), dvara-.
omit -assa ~hakaraJTI katva); - 2. the sound tha; thaketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. sthagayati], covers, covers
Vv-a 79,5 (pañcara thasata ti gathasukhatthrup -assa
up; clases; Dhatup 533 (thaka pa~ighate); Dhatum 746;
d!ghrup 1ii:tgavipallasrup ca katva vuttaJT~).
Vin 11 233,35* (in uddana: na vivare na pi -e); III 144,35
-tha 2 , a suffix with loe. force forming an adverb of place
(dvarrup pi -enti); Ps II 85,s (pidaheyya ti sakhadihi
(and time?; see K.R. Norman, 1961, pp. 351-2) ;- see
-eyya); III 93,7 (avaraml ti -emi pidahami); Spk 1 151,24
ettha, kattha, kuttha, tattha, yattha.
(dhammasaddaJTI sutva kal).l).e -enti); Sadd 520,18 (thaka
thakana , n. [cf S. sthagana], covering; closing; a cover;
pa!ighate: -eti -ayati dviiraJTI puriso ); - part.pr.
Ps 1 75,22 (pidahanato -ato); Dhp-a IV 85,10 (tasmiJTI
thakenta, mfn., Vin III 119,28 (ekacce vatapane vivaranto
dvare srupvaro -aJTI pidahanrup gutti); Pa~is-a 652,1o
ekacce vatapane -ento); Da!h 4:33;- aor. 3 sg. thakesi.
 thakkita
Vin III 58,17 (so bhikkhu vihanup pavisitva dvararp
-esi); Mhv 6:12 (guharp -e si pita te pasil.l)ena ti);
Da!h 5:25; 3 pl. thakesurp, PsI 156,12; Mhv 25:26; -
absol. thaketva, Vin II 211,22 (dvaravatapanarp -etva);
Ja V 294,25; Sp 1271,19 (atirasakapüvena pattarp -etva);
Dhp-a III 420,6 (itarani pañca chiddani -etva); -
neg. athaketva, PsI 77,2; - pass. pr. 3 sg. thakiyati,
Vin II 148,16 (kava~a na -Iyanti); Th-a III 59,26 (pidhiyati
-Iyati); - pp thakita, mfn., closed; Vin 11 134,38
(kru:tJ.lagüthakehi kru:tJ.la -a honti); IV 54,31 (nagaradvare
-e, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se thakkite, prob. wr) f. 117,4 (Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se thakkite, prob. wr); Ja IV 4,15·; Sp 374,27; -
fpp thaketabba , mfn., Vin I 48,35 (vatapana -a);
Pv-a 216,28 (ajja anatthaii.gate eva suriye sabbadvarani
-ani ti); - caus. aor. 3 sg. thakapesi, Ja VI 145,18
(brahmal_lo . . . nagaradvarani thakapesi); - see also
thagati.
thakkita, prob. wr for thakita qv sv thaketi.
thagati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup sthagati, Wg § 19:28], covers;
Sadd 334,3 (thaga sarpvaral_le: -ati);- see also thaketi.
thañña, n. [S. stanya], mother's mílk; milk; Abh 500 (payo
-arp); Vin 11 255,2 (Mahapajapati Gotami ...
bhagavantarp janettiya ka!aii.kataya -arp payesi); MI
266,12 (1ohitarp h' etarp bhikkhave ariyassa vinaye
yadidarp matu -arp); Thi 496 (assu -arp rudhirarp
sarpsararp anamataggato saratha); Ja II 328,11 (tarp
jatamattarp nahapetva -arp payanatthaya dhatiya
adarpsu); III 165,3 (dasamase kucchina pariharitva -arp
payetva hatthapade sru:t~hapetva vaqqhitaputto me sami
ti); Vism 38,29 (tava daraka -arp ma 1abhirpsu yava thero
na agacchati ti).
thaQI:Jila, n. [S. sthru:tqi1a], bare ground; Pv 42:5 (-e
pattarp bhinditva; Pv-a 265,18joll.: kharaka~hine
bhümippadese khipanto); - 0 -sayi(n), mfn., sleeping on
the bare ground; Ja VI 589,22* (ekabhatta pure asirp
niccarp -in!); Pj 11 322,13 (--taya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-sayikaya); Thi-a 86,29 (-in! hutva anantarahitaya
bhümiya sayami); - 0 -sayika,J [BHS sthaJ.lqilasayika],
the act oj sleeping on the bare ground; S IV 118,1 *
(Spk 11 398,31: haritakusasanthate bhümibhage sayanarp,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee pavarasanthate bhümibhage sayana);
Dhp 141 (nanasaka -a va... sodhenti maccarp
avitil_ll_lakaiJ.kharp); - 0 -seyyaka, mfn., sleeping on the
bare ground; Ja V 243,29' (apare mayarp -a ti); -
0
-seyyaka,f, the act of sleeping on the bare ground;
Ja V 241,28* (chadanarp katva vañcayanti manusse
anasaka -a ca rajojallarp ukku~ikappadhanarp;
cf243,28foll .: ekacce hi mayarp anasaka na kiñci
aharema ti manusse vañcenti apare mayarp -a ti); -
0
-seyya,f [S. sthru:tqilasayya], a bed on bare ground;
sleeping on the bare ground; D I 167,9 (-arp pi kappeti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tru:tqila-; Sv 357,14: ucce bhümighane
seyyarp) f. Niddi 417,12; Mi1351,7 (yadi -aya
dhatusamata bhavati).
thaddha, mfn., pp ofthambhati qv.
thaddhana, n. [cf S. stambhana], making stiff: making
so lid; V in I 210,9 (0 ' -atthaya guje pinharp pi charikarp pi
pakkhipanti, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be thaddhatthaya; Ce,
Se bandhanatthaya).
thana, m. [S. stana], l. the breast, esp. the breast of a
349 thapati
woman; Abh 270 (-o kucapayodhara); Vin II 262,36
(bhikkhuniyo . . . -arp vivaritva bhikkhünarp dassenti);
Ja III 459,2o (raja ... yava -a pa~havirp pavisi); V 21,19
(darako matusaññaya tassa -arp mukhena gal_lhi); 155,27*
(payodhara ... addhalabusama -a); Ps III 393,15 (yo
ekarpsarp katva -arp vivaritva yati); Vism 256,31
(hadayan ti . . . dvinnarp -anarp majjhe pati~!hitarp);
Saddh 360; - 2. the (teat of the) udder oj a cow; MI
343,36 (ekissa gaviya... yarp ekasmirp -e khirarp);
Ps IV 195,2o (gavirp -e gahetva ekarp khirabindurp
dühanaka!amattarp pi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee gavitthane);
Spk I 258,3 (na hi te ekavaram eva -arp añchanti);
Dhp-a II 67,2o (dhenuya -ehi nikkhantarp
abbhul_lhakhirarp) = Sadd 853,7; - ifc see go-; -
thanena in Ee at Ap 324,20 is prob. wr for dhammena
(Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -añchana, n., pressing the udder;
Mp IV 187,3 (gaviya ekavararp --mattan ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se thana-añjana-); - 0 -pa, mf [thana + pa3], a
suckling, an ínfant; Abh 252; 0
-pafaka, m.,
0
-paga, m., a cloth jor binding the breasts; Sp 1293,9
(gihidarikayo viya -ena); Vin-vn 2954 ( 0 -pagena); -
0
-payi(n), mfn., suckling; Dhp-a I 205,2 (antamaso -ino
pi darake . . . mahase~~hi uposathike kareti);
0
-mukha, n., the nipple; Ja IV 37,25; - see also
timbarutthani (sv timbaru), pucimandathani
(sv pucimanda), bindutthani (sv bindu).
thanaka, m. [thana + ka2], the breast; Thi 265 (ubho
sobhate su -apure mama; Thi-a 202,5joll.: mama ubho
pi thana ... suvru:tJ.lakalasiyo vi ya sobhirpsu, puthutte hi
idarp ekavacanarp atitatthe ca vattamanavacanarp).
thanati, thaneti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. stanati, stanayati],
roars, thunders; Dhatup 596 (thana devasadde);
Dhatum 830; SI 154,25* (vijju sañcarati -eti devo); JaU
344,22 (Ájambaramegho viya -ati ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr -anti ti); Sadd 397,7 (thana ... sadde: -ati); 549,23
(thana devasadde: . . . -eti -ayati); part.pr.
(a) thananta, thanenta, mfn., It-a II 58,3 (megho ... -anto
gajjanto vijjotento); Th-a II 59,13 (maha-aka1amegho ...
-anta g~janto vijju1ata niccharento, Ee so; Be, Ce -ento
g~janto; Se -ento gajjento) f. 139,18 (Ce so; Ee -ento
gajjanto; Be -ayanto gajjanto; Se -ayanto gajjento);
(b) thanaya(t), mfn., A III 34,23 (megho -ayarp vijjumali;
Mp III 244,2o: -ayan ti gajjanto, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr
gacchanto); Pj II 232,21* (saccena devo -ayarp
pavassati); (e) thanayanta, mfn., D II 262,6* (pavussako
megho -ayanto savijjuko); Th-a I 134,22 (megho ...
-ayanto vijjuta niccharento, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -anto) f.
II 139,18 (Be, Se -ayanto; Ce -anto; Ee -ento); -
absol. thanayitva, It 66,12•; pp thanita, (mj)n.
[S. stanita], thundering, thunder; Abh 49 (meghanade tu
-arp);- ifc see megha-;- see also thunati 2.
thanika, m., or -a,f, a small teat of a cow's udder;- ifc
see go-.
thanita(r), m. [from thanati or thaneti], one who thunders;
Pp-a 224,14 (gajjita ti -a).
thapati, m. [S. sthapati], a master carpenter; a royal
officer, an equerry; Abh 506 (tacchako vaqqhaki ... -i);
M 1 396,26 (Pañcakaii.go -i; Ps III 114,7: -I ti
vaqqhakije~!hako); 397,27 (assosi kho ayasma Ánando
ayasmato Udayissa Pañcakaii.gena -ina saddhirp imarp
thapana
kathasallapaq¡); 397,35 (Pañcakailgassa -issa); JI 123,27
(IsidattaPuraJ:.la -ayo mamabhatta mamayana); III 145,6
(Pañcakañgo -i bahukicco bahukaral)lyo rajakaral)lyena
ti); S V 348,14 (IsidattaPuraJ:.la -ayo Sadhuke pa~ivasanti
kenacid eva karal)lyena); Ps III 115,1 (Pañcakailgassa
-ino vadaq¡ upatthambhetuq¡ imaif! desanaq¡ arabhi).
thapana, n., see sv ~apana.
thapeti\ -ayate, caus. pr. 3 sg. oftinhati qv.
thapeti2 , -ayat¡2, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup <;!epayate,
Wg § 32:132: <;lipa k~epe ?], destroys;? Sadd 553,10
(thapa khaye: -eti -ayati).
thabaka, m. [S. stabaka, stavaka], a cluster of blossoms;
Abh 545 (-o tu ca gocchako, Ce so; Be thavako ).
thamati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup stamati, Wg § 19:83:
~tama avaik1avye/vaiklavye], delays; ? is disturbed; ?
Sadd413,14 (sama thama velambe: samati -ati).
thamba, thambha 1, m. [S. stamba], a tuft or clump (of
grass); Abh 454 (-o gumbo til)adinaJfl, Be so; Ce
thambho); 550 (-o gumbo ca akkhandhe, Be so; Ce
thambho tu gumbo akkhandho); MI 324,29 (gav!
tarul)avaccha -aifl ca alumpati vacchakaq¡ ca apavll)ati;
Ps II 403,1: til)aq¡ ca alumpamana khadati);- thamba in
cpds in Ee at Pv-a 186,25 and 187,14* is wr for thambha
(Be, Ce, Se so); - thambassa in Ee atA I 100,16 and
Mp JI !66,22 is wr for thambhassa (Be, Ce, Se so);- ifc
see dabba- (sv dabba2), b!rana-; 0
-kari,
thambhakari, m. [S. lex. stambakari], rice; Abh 452 (vlhi
thambakarlrito, Be so; Ce vlhitthambhakañrito); -
thamb(h)erama, mlfn). [S. stamberama], "delighting in
clumps of grass ", an elephant; Sadd 346,1 * (hatth!
nago . . . -o dvipo e' eva, so read? Be, Ee thambho
rammo);- see also thambhaka 1.
thambha2 , m. [S. stambha], l. a pillar, a post; a column; a
baluster; Abh 220 (-o thü1.10 ); 364; 1048 (-o
thüJ:.lajajattesu); Vin 1 227,13 (bhagava ... avasathagaraq¡
pavisitva majjhimaJfl -aq¡ nissaya puratthimabhimukho
nisldi); II 11 7,32 (bhikkhü ku<;l<;le pi -e pi ka~hinaq¡
ussapetva pakkamanti); D II 181,3o (soval)J:.lamayassa
sopanassa soVaJ:.lJ:.lamaya -a ahesuq¡); S III 150,8 (sa ...
dajhe khlle va -e va upanibaddho ); Sn 214 (yo ogahane
-o-r-ivabhijayati; Pj II 265,3: yatha nama ogahane
manussiinaif! nahanatitthe añgaghaif!sanatthaya . . . -e
nikhate); Vv 78:2 (aghaq¡sa sukata -a); Th 1141
(arammaJ:.le taif! balasa nibandhisaq¡ nagaifl va -amhi
dajhaya rajjuya); Ja I 192,7 (cattaro pade -e viya niccale
katva aghasi); 441,25 (raja ekasmiq¡ ekatthambhake
pasade vasati tassa so -o cali); Ap 35,21 (-o asi
sunimmito, Ee so; Se vyamho; Be, Ce vyamhaif! asi
sunimittaif!); 171,5 (nissel)iq¡ mapayitvana thüpasenhaq¡
samaruhiq¡ jatipupphaq¡ gahetvana -am[b ]hi
abhiropayiq¡, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se thüpamhi);
321,25 (pañca -ani datvana); Vism 320,23 (-e
anussapetva tulasañgha~aq¡ anaropetva na sakka akase
kü~agopanasiyo ~apetuq¡); Sp !0?2,21 (catüsu -esu
chattaq¡ ~apetva avaraJ:.laifl katva); Ap-a 440,2
(dhatugabbhamajake -aq¡ nikhanitva dhajaif! aropesi);
Mhv 36:103 (patinhapesi -e ca catukal)l_le sacakkake );
- ifc see aggala-, esika-, kala- (sv kala\ -
2. hardness, rigidity; arrogance; M I 15,37 (-o ca
papako sarambho ca papako; Ps I 107,1: cittassa
350 thambhati
uddhumatabhavalakkhaJ:.lo -o); A I I00,16 ( ... mayaya
sa~heyassa -assa sarambhassa manassa ... , Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr thambassa; Mp II 166,22: kodhamanavasena
thaddhabhavassa); Sn 245 (kodho mado -o); Nidd I
13,1s ( ... maya sa~heyyaq¡ -o sarambho mano ... ) t
Mil289,11 i= Vism 53,19; Vibh 350,31 (yo -o thambhana
thambhitattaq¡ kakkhaliyaq¡ pharusiyaif! ujucittata
amuduta); Sadd 549,21 (-o cittassa thaddhata);- ifc see
üru-; - 0 -ghatikii,f [thambha + gha~ika 1 ], a (pot-
shaped) feature or form of decoration on a pillar;
Sv 648,2 (sUVaJ:.lJ:.lamaya thambha rajatamaya -a ca
sailgha~a ca); - see also ürutthambhaka (sv üru),
ekatthambhaka (sv eka), khambha.
thambhaka\ m. [thambha 1 + ka2; S. stambaka], a tuft or
clump (of grass);- ifc see b!ral)a-.
thambhaka 2 , m. [thambha2 + ki], a small pillar or
column; V v-a 276,3 (ye hi vedikaya nirantara ~hita ...
0
-samudaya); - ifc see aggala-; - 0 -Viitapiina, n., a
barred window; Sp 1216,15 (salakavatapanaJfl nama
-aq¡).
thambhakari, m., see thambakari (sv thamba).
thambhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. stambhate], props; becomes stijf
or rigid; Dhatup 209 (thambha . . . patibandhe);
Dhatum 303 (thabhi ... patibandhe); Sadd 408,22 (thabhi
khabhi pa~ibandhe: -ati); pp thaddha, mfn.
[S. stabdha], l. st(ff, rigid; hard; paralyzed, senseless;
stijf or puffed-up with pride or anger; D III 45,15
(tapass!. .. -o hoti at1man1; Sv 839,1foll.:
nissinehanikkarul)athaddhalakkhaJ:.lena thambhena ...
samannagato, so read with Be, Ce, Se); M III 205,16
(ekacco itth! va puriso va -o hoti atimanl
abhivadetabbaifl na abhivadeti ... ); A II 26,25* (kuha -a
lapa siilg!; Mp III 42,17: kodhena ca manena ca -a) i=
Th 959; Ja I 293,4 (hattho muduko paharo pana -o ti);
IV 203,17 (idani -o viya ~hito); VI 82,23 (sañraif! -aifl
jataq¡); Mil 386,14 (pabbato -o na kenaci saq¡sa~~o );
Vism 353,27 (suñño nissatto -o pa!havidhatü ti);
Sp 763,4 (udakapappa~ako nama upari -o pharusavai)J.lO
he~~ha mudu nllaVai)J:.lO hoti); Spk I 226,1o (buddho
dhammo sañgho ti vutte kal)l_le pidahati -o
khadirakhaJ:.lusadiso ); JI 190,3o (padiinaif! s!talataya
e' eva 0 -taya ca parinibbutabhavaq¡ ñatva); III 15,21
(nesaq¡ ayaq¡ niggul)O diirul)O -o ti bhayaif! uppajjeyya);
Nidd-a I 429,29 (vicikiccha hi uppajjitva cittaq¡ -aifl
karoti); Vibh-a 261,24 (kese 0 -ttalakkhal)aifl) i= Pj I 74,22
(kesassa -lakkhal)aq¡); Saddh 90; Sadd 604,28 (Yaifl
0
pana kharaif! hoti -aq¡); - ifc see khali-; - 2. sluggish;
PsI 78,36 (visavego -o ahosi); - -aifl, adv., Mill03,6
(yava tipabbaifl tava lahukaif! eti tato upari -aq¡); -
--tara, mfn., campar., more rigid; harder; Sp 457,11;
Spk I 326,7 (pakatiya pi thaddhayakkhassa cittaq¡
--taraif! hutva); - --macchari(n), mfn., inveterately
miserly; Abh 739 (kadariyo -1); Ja V 383,18 (danasalaq¡
viddhaif!setva aggina jhapetva --macchar! ahosi);
VI 101,12· (kadariya ti pare dente pa~isedhaka
--maccharino, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se --macchariya); It-a II
58,17 (--taya na kassaci kiñci deti ti); Pv-a 45,16 (-inl);
- --macchariya1, n., strong miserliness; Spk I 90,16;
Nidd-a I 113,16 (kadariyaifl, --macchariyass' etaq¡
namaq¡); - --macchariya2, mfn., inveterately miserly;
 thambhana
Ja V 412,s (etarp adanabhiratarp --macchariyarp
samanarp aharp damesim eva ti); Mp IV 40,21 (kadariyo
ti --macchariyo paresarp diyamanarp pi vareti); -
neg. atthaddha, athaddha, mfn., not stiff; not hard; not
arrogant; D III 47,31 (-o hoti anatimanl, Be, Ce, Se so;
E e wr athaddo ); 192,9* (nivatavutti atthaddho ); MI 43,s
(pare thaddha bhavissanti mayarp ettha atthaddha
bhavissama ti); S 1 178,29* (nihacca manam atthaddho);
Ja VI 253,21' (atthaddhataya anata-lso); Pj 11 318,1
(atthaddhata anatimanita ca); As 332,22 (mudukan ti
atthaddharp); - atthaddha in Ee, Se at Ja Il 59,17 is wr
for apatthaddha qv; - atithaddha, mfn., very stiff, very
hard; very arrogant; too hard; Ja I 328,26 (vatassa
atithaddhataya, Ce so; Se atithaddhattaya; Be
atibalavataya; Ee tassa atitaddhataya); V 301,s·
(atithaddha dappita); 327,2o (atithaddharp vacanarp
kathentassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits vacanarp);
Mi1180,29 (atithaddho anisedhanataya [apacitirp na
karoti]); Spk II 153,10 (atithaddharp pi marpsarp va
püvarp va khadama); Vibh-a 407,2 (atithaddho me
paharo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr atithaddo); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. *thambheti, *thambhayati [S. stambhayati],
establishes, supports; makes stiff or rigid;
part.pr. thambhenta, mfn., Vin III 118,11 (bhikkhuno
kayarp -entassa; Sp 531,9 foil.: a1asiyavimocanattharp
vijambhentassa); - absol. (a) thambhetva, Ps II 377,15;
As 324,15; (b) thambhayitva, Nidd I 169,22 (vadmp
akkhaya ... acikkhitva -ayitva brühayitva ... ; Nidd-a 1
287,26: -ayitva ti püretva); - pp thambhita, mfn. [S.
stambhita], stif.fened; hard; -'-atta, mfn.
[thambhitatta 1, thambhita + atta(n)], stif.f-natured;
Th-a III 141 ,19 (patthaddhamanasarp -' -attarp narmp
viññü plli_l9ita na pasmpsanti); - --tta, n., abstr.
[thambhitatta2], hardness, rigidity; Dhs 425 (kaii.kha
kaii.khayana . . . apariyogiihana --ttmp cittassa
manovilekho; As 260,6: nicchayavasena arammai_le
pavattiturp asamatthataya --ttmp cittassa thaddhabhavo
ti attho ); 965 (vayo vayogatarp --ttarp rüpassa ... idmp
tmp rüparp vayodhatu; As 338,3o: --ttan ti
uppalanaJatacad!narp viya vatapmp;anmp
thambhitabhavo rüpassa); Vibh 350,31 (thambho
thambhana --ttmp kakkhaliymp pharusiymp ujucittata
amuduta; Vibh-a 469,13: -assa bhavo --ttarp); - see
also khambhati, chambhati.
thambhana, f [cf S. stambhana]. stiffness; rigidity;
Dhs 636 (ya . . . abhikkamantassa va pa!ikkamantassa
va . . . kayassa -a santhambhana santhambhitattarp
viññatti . . . idarp tmp rüparp kayaviññatti; As 324,15:
kayarp thambhetva thaddharp karotl ti -a); Vibh 350,31
(yo thambho -a thambhitattarp kakkhaliyarp pharusiyarp
ujucittata amuduta).
thambhi(n), mfn. [S. stambhin], hard; arrogant; A IV
172,2* (makkhl -i palas! ca); Th 952 (kodhana upaniihl
ca makkhi -1 sa!ha bahü; Th-a III 84,28:
atimanalakkhal_lo thambho etesarp atthi ti -!).
tharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. st!"l_loti, starati], strews; spreads;
Dhatup 242 (thara santharai_!e); Dhatum 345; Pj 11 24,27
(tarppariyut!hanavasena vanarp -ati tanotl ti vanatho, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee omits -ati); Sadd 431,29 (thara santharai_~e:
-ati).
351 thalati
tharu, m. [S. tsaru; Pkt tharu, charu], l. the hilt of a
sword; a sword; Abh 391 (-u khaggadimutthiymp);
Vin III 180,31 (dhanusmirp pi sikkhanti -usmirp pi
sikkhanti); M 11 69,13 (dhanusmirp pi katavl -usmirp pi
katavl); Ja II 336,11' (0 -dai.J.9ehi sugahite khagge);
Mil 66,22 (dhanusmirp sikkheyyasi -usmirp sikkheyyasi
ti); Sp 447,16 (tul_l9ena va -una va mareti); Ap-a 167,22
(dhanühi pi -ühi pi ti); - 2. a handle; Ja V 303,1·
(dantamayatharumhi adase); - 0
-ggaha, m. [tharu +
gaha2], one who carries a sword, a swordsman; Ja VI
449,17* (-a sikkhitaro nagakkhandhatipatino, Ce, Ee so;
Be dhanuggaha; Se pharuggaha).
thala, n. (and m.) [S. sthala, n.], dry land; firm ground;
high ground; a plateau; Abh 183 (-mp thall); Vin 11
237,3o (mahasamuddo . . . matarp kul_laparp . . . -mp
ussareti); SI 100,17* (megho ... -arp ninnmp ca püreti);
Sn 946 (-e titthati briihmai_!o; Nidd 1 430,12: -arp vuccati
amatarp nibbanarp); Th 88 (asakkhirp vata attanarp
uddhaturp udaka -mp); Ja V 221,4* (apeti .. . apo
suvughl va yatha -amha); 446,24' (visame padese
rukkhacchaya ninnarp pi orohati -arp pi abhirühati);
VI 113,1 * (phandanti maccha va -amhi khitta); 165,26'
(rathikadlnarp passesu e' eva -esu ca); Ap 495,6 (vane
game jale -e); Cp 3:6:9 (sagare va -arp labhirp);
Mil 256,3 (yatha va pana maharaja -e aggi jalati api nu
kho maharaja so yeva aggi udake jalati ti); Sp 77,7
(bhante kena agatattha ti n' eva maharaja udakena na
-ena ti); PsI 115,28 (-mp va pabbatarp va disva
hatthisaññino); Mp IV 104,18 (ubba!umarp rathmp karotl
ti -arp va kai.J.!akadhanarp va rathmp aropeti); As 317,24
(-an ti unnatarp); Mhv 25:33 (gajuttamo udaka
u!!hahitvana -e aghasi); Sadd 438,3 foil. (-o ti
nirudakappadeso pabbajjanibbanesu pi tmpsadisatta
tabboharo yatha hi loke udakoghena anottharanaghanmp
-o ti vuccati evmp kilesoghena anottharai_!Iyatta pabbajja
nibbanmp ca -o ti vuccati); - thalarp in Ee at Ja III
221,1 is wr; Be dhararp; Ce, Se talarp; - 0 -cara, mfn.,
moving, living, on dry land; Ja IV 366,3o· (-e mige
dasseti); Pa!is-a 296,23 (thalajalacara ca pal_lino athale
ajale ca !hita pi -a jalacara tveva vuccanti) = As 62,22;
-
0
-ja, mfn. and m. [thala + ja2], born, growing, on dry
land; a land animal; Ja III 335,20* (katharp nu -o santo
udake macchmp paramasi); IV 335,3 (-es u miga hmpsa
mora tittira); Bv 2:86 (-a dakaja puppha); Vism 236,32;
-
0
-Uha, mfn., being or living on dry land; being on
high ground; Vin III 48,2o (-arp nama bhai_19mp thale
nikkhittmp hoti; Sp 322,16: bhümitale va
pasadapabbatataladisu va . . . !hapitmp -an ti
veditabbarp); A Il 241,10 (aññatarassa -assa purisassa;
Mp III 216,8: -assa ti ekamante !hitassa); Sp 762,31
(bljagamabhütagamo nam' esa atthi udakat!ho atthi -o);
-
0
-patha, m., a land-route; a journey by land;
Pv-a 169,12 (hatthi-assadiparivarabalmp -ena pesetva
saymp gaii.gaya nadiya anusotarp navaya agacchanto, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee pathena); - ifc see jala-; -
--kammika, m., an administrator concerned wíth
(trading) journeys by land; Ja I 121,16; - athala, n.,
(what is) not dry land; Pa!is-a 296,22 =As 62,21.
thalati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup sthalati, Wg § 20:6], stands,
stands firm; Sadd 438,3 (thala !hiine: -ati thalo ).
thali
thali,f [S. sthali],.finn ground; Abh 183 (thalarp. -i).
thava, m. [S. stava], praise; Nett 188,5 (ayaq¡ -o); 192,15
(-o pasarp.saya niddisitabbo ); - ifc se e guQ.a-.
thavati, thunati 1, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. stauti], praises;
Dhatup 125 (thu abhitthave); 498; Dhatum 719 (thu
thave); Sn 884 (nana te saccani sayaq¡ thunanti); Pj II
160,8 (thutivacanani, tehi tarp. muniq¡ thunati);
Sadd 363,1 (thu thutiyam: -ati); 496,24 (thu abhitthave:
thunati abhitthunati); - part.pr.(a) thuna(t) 1, mfn., Pj II
453,17 (thunata); (b) thunanta 1, mfn., Pj I 154,2o (etan'
eva attana vuttamailga1ani thunanto); II 453,12
(bhagavantarp. thunanto); Pa~is-a 479,28; aor.
3 sg. thavi, Ap-a 228,8 (ñi~Q.aq¡ ca me anu punappunarp.
-i thomesi); 1 sg. (a) thaviq¡, Ap 255,19 (yarp. -iq¡
vadatam varaq¡, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce santhaviq¡); 392,23;
(b) thavissarp., Ap 255,12 (-issarp. lokanayak.arp., Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se santhaviq¡); - inf thutuq¡ [cf S. stotum],
Sn 217 (nalaq¡ thutuq¡ no pi nipaccavadi; Pj II 272,15:
thometuq¡ pi narahati);- absol. (a) thavitva, Ap 114,5;
255,13 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -itvana); (b) thavitvana,
Ap 114,2; (e) thunitva, Pj II 457,5; Pa~is-a 488,5; -
pp (a) thuta, mfn. [S. stuta], praised; Abh 752 (pasattho
VaQ.Q.ito -o); Ja IV 101,13* (sadatthuto samaQ.a-
brahmaQ.anaq¡; 101,17·: sada -o niccappasattho);
Mil 278,2 (atidanaq¡ . . . VaQ.Q.itaq¡ -arp. pasattharp.);
Sadd 496,25; - --ppasattha, mfn., praised and extolled;
(or extolled by the praised;) Ja I 28,5* (tehi --ppasattho
so, Be, Ce, Se so; E e thuti-) = Bv 2:187 (Bv-a 119,2o:
--ppasattho ti thuto e' eva pasattho ca, thutehi va
dipankaradihi pasattho); (b) thavita, mfn., Ap 87,26
(yen' idarp. -aq¡ ñaQ.arp.) quoted Sadd 363,4.
thavana, n. -a, f [S. stavana], praise; Sadd 363,1 (-a
abhitthavana thuti abhitthuti); 521,28 (-arp. thuti); - ifc
see ñaQ.a-.
thavika, f [BHS sthavika, sthavika; cf S. lex. sthavi,
sthagika ?], a bag; a purse; Vin I 296,31 (bhikkhünaq¡
paripUQ.Q.arp. hoti ticivaraq¡ attho ca hoti parissavanehi pi
-ahi pi); II 152,33 (bhikkhü mañcapade pi pi!hapade pi
-ayo 1aggenti); 217,28 (gamato nikkhamitva pattarp. -aya
pak.khipitva); III 62,12 (-aya maQ.iq¡ pak.khipitva);
IV 161,1o (aññataro pi brahmaQ.o pañcasatanarp. -arp.
thale nikkhipitva); Ja VI 52,25 (mattikapattarp. pi -aya
osaretva); Vism 125,34 (-ato niha~adasamaQ.c,lalaq¡ vi ya);
Ps II 91,8 (-ato araQ.isahitadini niharitva); Pa!is-a 685,23
(-aya kahapaQ.asahassam eva hoti); - ifc see añjani-
(sv añjani 1).
thahati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup strhati, Wg § 28:58], hurts;
Sadd 459,7 (daha thaha hiq¡sattha: dahati -ati).
thati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv tinhati.
thama, m. [cfS., BHS sthaman], (instr. -asa, -ena, -una;
se e also Sadd 231 ,16* (-arp.); 231,27 foll. (-ena -una
-assa -uno ti ca -a -asma -arnha -una), strength,
power; ability; finnness; Abh 398 (balarp. -o saharp.
satti); Vin IV 134,31 (tarp. papak.arp. di!!higatarp. -asa
paramasa abhinivissa voharati); SI 78,31 (apadasu kho
maharaja -o veditabbo); V 227,16 (ye keci
tiracchanagata paQ.a siho migaraja tesarp. aggam
akkhayati yad idaq¡ -ena javena sürena); Sn 917 (yarp.
kiñci dhammam abhijañña . . . na tena -arp. kubbetha;
Nidd I 350,11: -aq¡ na kareyya thambhaq¡ na kareyya
352 thala
manaq¡ ... UQ.Q.atiq¡ ... UQ.Q.amaq¡ na kareyya); Th 1165
(na-y-idaq¡ appena -asa nibbanam adhigantabbaq¡;
Th-a III 169,6foll.: appak.ena viriyaba1ena); Ja II 343,2o·
(jatiya sanhivassak.alasmiq¡ hi kuñjara -ena parihayanti);
III 115.2· (yarp. kiñci kammarp. kurumano attano -aq¡ ca
balaq¡ ca ñatva); 334,2* (daJhaq¡ gaQ.hahi -asa); VI 22,16*
(thüla javena hayanti kisa hayanti -una, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se -asa); 395,2o (na esa Videharañño -o
MahosadhapaQ.c,iitassa sarp.vidhanaq¡ etarp.); Nidd I 32,1o
(sak.ena -ena sak.ena balen a sak.ena viriyena ... ; Nidd-a I
101,11: attano ñi~Q.athamena); Ap 319,29 (-o yassa
acintiyo); Dhs 13 (viriyindriyaq¡ ... vayamo ussaho
ussoJhi -o dhiti .. . sammavayamo; As 146,13: thira-
bhavatthena -o); Mi14,3 (sak.alajambudipe Milindena
rañña samo koci nahosi yad idarp. -ena javena sürena
paññaya); Vism 619,3o (tato parani dasa [vassani]
baladasak.aq¡ nama, tada hi 'ssa ba1arp. ca -o ca vepullaq¡
papuQ.ati); Sv 896,16 (viriyarp. -o ti adini sabban' eva
viriyavevacanani); 1012,9 (attano -aq¡ janitva yena
yapetuq¡ sak.koti tena yapanarp. yathaba1asantoso nama);
Ps II 123,6 (manussa attano attano -ena
hiraññasUVaQ.Q.adini adaq¡su); Dhp-a IV 18,10 (bhikkhü
tassa -aq¡ ñatva padabhi~Q.aq¡ bhaQ.a samaQ.era ti
ajjhesanti); Pj II 195,4 (attano -ena pana ekaq¡ va
nikayaq¡ pariyapuQ.itva dve va); Sadd 861,3 (ti!!hanti
etena ti -o); - -ena, adv., strongly, finnly; Ja II 60,11'
(balena -ena patamano); Pv-a 193,26 (-ena paribadheti);
-
0
-gata, mfn., grown strong; become fixed; MI 433,27
(sa sak.kayadi!!hi -a appa~ivinita); Pa~isii 217,36 (-o
anusayarp. pajahati; Pa~is-a 688,13: -o ti thirasabhavarp.
gato); Vism 409,25 (cetopariyañilQ.arp. -aq¡ katabbarp.);
428,14 (anukkamena aloko -o hoti); 684,14 (--tta);
Sp 1032,25 (na -assa samadhino va vipassanaya va
labhi); Nidd-a I 298,7 (anusaya, -anaq¡ kamaragadinarp.
etarp. adhivacanarp.); - --dighika, mfn., who has a
strong belief, Ja I 83,24 (evarp. --di!!hiko nama araha ti
maññamano Uruvelak.assapo) VI 220,22;
0
-jata, mfn., become strong; become fixed;
Vism 126,21joll. (appanaya pana angani -ani honti
tesaq¡ --tta ... ); Ps II 84,11 (vipassana pana -a
samapattiq¡ pi rak.khati); - 0 -va(t), mfn., strong; finn;
D III 113,17 (araddhaviriyena 0 -vata); A II 250,22 (0 -va
daJhaparakkamo anikkhittadhuro kusalesu dhammesu;
Mp II 189,10: ñi~Q.athamena samannagato); IV 189,7 (0 -va
hoti yava jivitamaraQ.apariyadana thamaq¡ upadarp.seta);
Vv 5:1 (kuñjaro ... 0 -va javasampanno; V v-a 35,13: 0 -va
ti thiro, balava ti attho ); Th 371 (yarp. apada .. . na
kkhambhayante ... so 0 -va nama); Ja II 327,12*
(balavanto dubbala honti 0 -vanto pi hayare); Ap 19,13
(gajaraja va 0 -va); - see also appathamak.a (sv appa),
dutthamak.a, dubbalathamak.a (sv bala), dvisahassathama
(sv dvi).
thayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv thiyati.
thala, n. (and -a, f) [S. sthala], a vessel; a bowl or dish;
Ja I 69,27 ([Sujata] sisato -aq¡ otaretva vivaritva);
III 224,9* (yo hare mattikarp. -arp. karp.satha1arp. pi so
hare, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mattikathalaq¡, prob. wr);
V 215,25* (suraya -arp.); VI 328,4* (puQ.Q.ahi -ahi; 328,25·:
pUQ.Q.ehi -ehi); Ap 308,20 (lohitailkamaye -e
paribhuñjami sabbada); Ps II 183,3 (sacahaq¡ ajja buddho
thalaka
bhavissami -a111 patisota111 gacchatü ti khipi); - ifc see
k~sa- (sv ka111sa 1).
thiilaka (and thalika ?), n. [thala + ka2 ], a bowl or dish;
Vin I 203,17 (bhikkhü pighani añjanani -esu pi
saravakesu pi nikkhipanti, Ce, Se so; Ee thalikesu; Be
carukesu); Pv 13:7 (-assa ca pan! y~; Pv-a 70,22:
ekathalakapüranamatta111 udak~); Ja II 300,2o foil.
(samiko -~ ukkhipi bhariya -a111 apanesi, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se thala111); Ap 311,11 (-e sugate datva); Nett 79,2o
(-a111 ca va¡ri ca tela111 ca d!passa paccayabhüta111);
Vism 404,13; Ps II 145,18 (ettha patta111 tbapetva yah! ti
-a111 adasi);- ifc see k~sa- (sv ka111sa 1), kati-.
thala,f, see sv thala.
thalika, se e sv thalaka.
thalika, f [thaH + ka2], a cooking pot; a dish; Mp IV
172,22 (medakathalika vuccati . . . tattha tattha
katacchidda -a); - ifc see athaka- (sv athaka 1),
dal).<;iaka-, pacana-, bilailga-, medaka-.
thali, f [S. sthall], a cooking-pot; a dish; Abh 456
(kha]opyukkhalithalyukha); Sadd 125,6 ( -iy~ odana111
pacatl ti); - 0
(i)-dhovana, n., the water used for
washing a pot; A 1 161,24 (-a111 va saravadhovan~ va
cha<;l<;leti);- 0 (i)-paka, m., a pot offood; a dish offood
used as an oblation; Vin III 15,21 (ayasmato Sudinnassa
satthimatte -e bhattabhihar~ abhihari111su; Sp 207,2o:
ekameko e' ettha -o dasanna111 bhikkhüna111 bhatt~
gal).hati); DI 97,29 (api nu na111 brahmal).a bhojeyyu111
saddhe va -e va yaññe va pahul).e va ti; Sv 267,8: -e ti
mailgaladibhatte) = M II 154,6 (Ps III 411,2: -e ti
pal).l).akarabhatte); M III 139,13 (Jayaseno rajakumaro
ayasmantaq1 Bhümija111 saken' eva -ena parivisi); Spk I
318,9 (imaq1 -a111 yakkhassa deh! ti).
thava in Ee at Ja I 347,13 is wr; Be tva111; Ce tava; Se
tuva111.
thavara, mj( -l)n. [S. sthavara], standing still, still,
unmoving; inanimate; stable, firm, long-lasting;
permanent, invariable; Abh 712; S IV 351,21 (na kiñci
vyabadhemi tasaq1 va -aq1 va); Dhp 405 (nidhaya
dal).qaq1 bhütesu tasesu -esu ca; Dhp-a IV 176,1: tanha-
abhavena thirataya -esu); Sn 146 (ye keci pill).abhüt'
atthi tasa va -a va anavasesa); Ja IV 193,9· (anuppanne
bhoge uppadetva uppanne -e katva); Nidd I 488,15foll.
(-a ti yesaq1 tasil).a tal).ha pah!na yes~ ca bhayabherava
pah!na, kiq1karal).a vuccanti -a, te na tasanti na
uttasanti ... ); Vism 127,9 (yattha nimittaq1 uppajjati
e' eva -~ ca hoti); Sp 439,1sfoll. (pal).atipatassa
chappayoga sahatthiko . . . -o . . . -o ti asañcarimena
upakaral).ena maretukamassa ... ); 1223,19 (t!su
senasanagahesu purimako ca pacchimako ca ti ime dve
-a); Mp II 31,9 (eva111 assa uppanno labho -o hoti); Pj I
217,15 (hiraññ~ Va SUVal).l).al11 va khetta111 va vatthu111 va
y~ va pan' añña111 pi evarüpa111 iriyapathavirahit~
ayaq1 -o nidhi); Pv-a 149,8 (therin ti -iq1, jil).l).al11
vu<;l<;lhan ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so, but perhaps wr (for
*thaviri111 ?); Ee thavarijil).l).al11); Nidd-a II 99,22 (-a ti
khil).asava); - ifc see tasa-; - 0
-bhava, m., stability;
Sv 250,3 Ganapadatthavariyappatto ti janapade
dhuvabhavaq1 -~ patto na sakka kenaci caletuq1); -
see also thira.
thavariya, n. (and m. ?) [from thavara; cf also thera and
353 thi
S. sthairya], l. (n.) stability; continuance; Sv 443,14
Ganapado asmi111 -~ thirabhava111 patto ti janapada-
tthavariyappatto [raja]); Mp III 30,17 (thavareyyamha ti
-ato thirabhavato); - ifc see janapada-; - 2. (m.) a
fixed or stable person; ? a landowner; ? As 111,17
(thavariyasabhavasal).thita va pan' esa cetana ti, -o ti
khettasam! vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr vacan ya- ...
vacariyo ti); - see also thavareyya.
thavareyya, n. [from thavara; cf also thera and
S. sthairya], stability; continuance; being firm, long-
lasting; A I 38,14 (addh~ ida111 bhikkhave labhanaq1
yadid~ araññakatt~ . . . vinayadharakattaql
bahusacc~ -aq1 ... ; Mp II 40,10: -an ti cirapabbajita-
taya thavarappattabhavo); II 23,14* (ara so -amha papa-
dittbi anadaro; Mp III 30,17: -amha ti thavarabhavato
thirabhavato);- see also thavariya.
thina, se e sv th!na.
v'thim, [cfVth!n ?], to gather together;? Dhatum 329
(dhuma thima ca sailghate).
thira, mfn. [S. sthira], firm, hard; strong; fixed; durable,
lasting; Vin III 232,23 ( 0 -bhavaya vatt~ va caturass~
va chinditva); MI 449,15 (balav~ bandhana111 dath~
bandhanaq1 -aq1 bandhanaq1); Ja I 475,15 (anuppanna111
labha111 uppadetu111 uppann~ va pana -a111 katu111
sakkoti ti); II 272,17 (lol).ambila111 upasevissami eva111 me
sañraq1 e' eva -a111 bhavissati jailghaviharo ca kato
bhavissati); III 8,s- (viriya111 ca purisaparakkamo ca -o
ahosi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhiro); IV 276,16 (u¡rhite sasse
vati111 -a111 karetva); 454,3o (rañño ca nagarajassa ca
vissaso -o ahosi); V 257,16 (tam eva ovad~ -~
katva); VI 524,25 (gehe dubbalatthan~ -a111 katva);
583,13' (-~ hadaya111 katva nisldi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-a111 da)ha111); Mil 324,18 (d~haq1 -~ acala111
abhaya¡rhana111 pavisitva); Vism 533,22 (dhamma
virü)hamüla vi ya padapa -a honti suppatittbita); PsI
71,1o (dhuvo ti -o sarabhüto); Spkii 203,29 (mahato
ta]akassa pa]iya -aya); V v-a 35,13 (thamava ti -o, balava
ti attho ); Th-a 11 3,6 (yo koci nicco dhuvo -o
appalokinadhammo atthi); Patis-a 107,28 (0 -tta);
Mhv 29:2; Saddh 321; Sadd 900,23 (dhuva111 iti ... ni eco
dhuvo sassato eval11 o• -atthe); - 0 athirabhava, m., the
strength or weakness; Mil 194,24 (uttarasetussa pubbe va
-a111 janitva);- 0 -tara, mfn., compar.,firmer, stronger;
Ja 11 139,16 (kilesabandhana111 etaq1 etehi bandhanehi
satagul).ena sahassagul).ena -~); III478,1*; Vism 127,29
(samahitaq1 va cittaq1 -a111 hoti); - o -vira, m., a
steadfast hero; Ap-a 1,13* (therehi --virehi agamaññühi
viññuhi, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se therehi dh!radh!rehi;
Ce dh!rativ!radh!rehi); - athira, mfn., not firm; not
constant; Ja IV 57,31·; Mp IV 50,19 ( -' -aghena na
dhuva); - see also thavara, theta.
thirati, pr. 3 sg. [from thira; cf S. sthirayati], remains firm;
Ap-a 130,14 ( -anti na tasan ti na uttasanti ... na santasa111
apajjati ta111karal).a vuccanti thavara).
thira, f [S. lex. sthira], a tree; SAF: tick trefoil,
Alysicarpus vaginalis (L.) DC, Desmodium gangeticum
(L.) DC; Abh 584 (salapal).l).! tu catthira).
thi, f [S. stñ], l. a female; a woman; Abh 230; Sn 769
(-iyo bandhü puthü kame yo naro anugijjhati; Nidd I
11,11: -iyo ti itthipariggaho vuccati); Ja I 295,8* (-1naq1
v'thin
bhavo durajano macchassevodake gata111); lii 459,13*
(-iyo va tassa jayanti na puma jayare kule; 459,1r: -iyo
ti nibbattanibbattatthane musavadissa dh!taro va jayanti
putta na jayantl ti attho ); V 81,16* (-iya guyha111 na
sa111seyya); Ap 531,27 (-In~ adasi pabbajja111
sambuddho yacito maya); 532,8 (puttakama -iyo, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se puttakamitthiyo); 609,7 (tisso thiyo
nidassesi iddhiya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tissitthiyo); Th-a II
135,13 (thiyati ettha sukkasol).it~ sattasantanabhavena
s~haññati ti -I, matugamo); Mhv 15:20 (na kappati
maharaja pabbajetu111 -iyo hi no); Sadd 236,10foll.; -
2. (gr. t. t.) the feminine gender, Abh 198 (-iya111 tu
rajadhani ca); Sadd 769,29; - 0 -ghataka, m. [thi +
ghataka 1], a killerofwomen; Ja V 397,26';- 0 -pura, n.,
the inner or women's apartments (of a royal palace);
Ja V 296,2* (aJariko tada homi rañño Maddassa -e, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se Maddassantepure; 296,9·: ah~
Maddarañño antepure bhattakaradaso viya homi ti) f.
303,30* (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be Maddassantepure);- see also
itthi.
v'thin, [cfS. Dhatup styayati, Wg § 22:14], to gather
together; to grow dense; Dhatum 538 (thina puna
saii.ghatavacino);- see also v'thim, thiyati.
thina, mfn. and n., pp ofthlyati qv.
thinana, thinana, n. [cjv'thin and S. styayana], growing
dense; becoming stiff, Vism 469,17 ( -ta thina1110
middhanata middharp, Ce, Ee so; Se thinata; Be
thinanata thin~) = As 255,16 (Be thinanata; Ce, Ee, Se
thinata) = Patis-a 117,26 (Ce, E e so; Be, Se thinanata
thina111).
thiyati, thayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. styayate, S. Dhatup
styayati, Wg 22:14], sounds; is collected; becomes
dense, thick, stiff, Th-a 11 135,12 (-ati ettha sukk:asol).ilal11
sattasantanabhavena sa111haññati ti thi); Patis-a 85,15
(-ati sañghata111 gacchati etissa gabbho ti itthi);
Sadd 363,9 (the saddasaii.ghatesu: -ati patitthiyati thi);
468,2 (the the saddasaii.ghatesu: thayati thayati bhave
thiyati -ati itthi thi); - pp (a) thina (so usual/y Ce, Ee,
Se), thina (so usual/y Be), mfn. and n. [cf S. lex., BHS
styana; BHS also stlna], l. (mfn.) (i) grown dense,
coagulated; congealed; Vism 262,20 (medo ti 0 -sineho,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thina-) = Vibh-a 245,3o (Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se thina-); Sp 1272,26 (sace -a111 sappi hoti, Ce, Se so;
Be, Ee thin~); Mp 11 195,6 (patitthiyati ti 0 -bhava111
thaddhabhav~ ap~jati, Ce, E e so; Be, Se thina- );
Dhp-a IV 104,11 (t~ diva atapena vilina111 pakkaghita111
viya tighati ratti111 -a111 kakk:ha!~ hutva titthati, Ee, Se
so; Be kathin~ kakkha!~ ... ; Ce tikhil).al11
kakk:haJam); - (ii) slothful; lethargic; S I 126,28* (na
kuppati na sarati na -o, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se thino; Spk I
187,24: do sena na kuppati ragena na sarati mohena na -o,
eds so); - 2. (n.) sloth; lethargy; S V II0,12 (yad api
bhikkhave -~ tad api nivaral).al11, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
thin~); A I 134,11* (-assa ca panüdana111 kukkuccan~
niviiral).al11, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thinassa); III 421,22 (-a111
middha111 uddhacc~ kukkucc~ assadhiya111 pamad~.
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thin~); Sn 942 (nidd~ tandirp sahe
-a111. eds so; Pj II 567,21 foll.: pacalayikarp ca
kayalasiy~ ca cittalasiy~ ca ti ime tayo dhamme
abhibhaveyya); Dhs 1156 (ya cittassa aka1yata
354 thunati
akammaññata oliyana salliyana !in~ liyitatt~ -a111
thiyana thiyitatt~ cittassa ida111 vuccati -a111, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be thina111 thiyana thiyitatta111; As 377 ,3o: -an ti
sappipil).<;io viya avippharikataya ghanabhavena thita111,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thinan ti); Nett 86,1s; Sv 211,19 (-a111
cittagelañña111, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thina111); Vism 469,19
(-a111 anussahalakkhal).al11 viriyavinodanarasa111
s~sidanapaccupaghan~. Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thina111);
- --middha, n. and mfn. [cf AMg thil).addhi, Jain S.
styanarddhi; BHS styanamiddha; <S. *styana-rddhi],
l. (n.) lethargy and drowsiness (the third of the
nivaral).as qv ); D I 71 ,24 (--middh~ pahaya vigata-
thinamiddho viharati alokasaññi sato sampajano ); S III
106,10 (--middh~ ca me citta111 pariyadaya titthati);
V 94,22 (--middharp bhikkhave avaral).al11 nivaral).~
cetaso upakkiles~ paññaya dubbalikaral).al11); Sn 437
(pañcami [sena] --middh~ te); Patis I 101,21
(alokasaññaya --middha111 samma samucchindati);
Vibh 256,4o (kamacchando vyapado --middha111
uddhaccakukkucca111 vicikiccha ime vuccanti akusala
dhamma): Mi1253,11; Vism 76,10* (--middha111
vinodetva); PsI 284,15 (nisinnassa hi samal).adhamma111
karoto --middham mahahatthi viya ottharanta111
agacchati); 11 272,27 (kasma . . . cari.kamantl ti,
pal).itabhojanapaccayassa --middhassa vinodanatth~);
Spk III 258,32foll. (so uppann~ me --middhan ti ñatva
udakena mukh~ puñchitva kal).l).e aka<;l<;lhitva ...
alokasañña111 manasikaritva --middha111 vinodetva);
Saddh 459; - 2. (mfn.) drowsy and lethargic; A V
163,22 (--middho kho panay~ ayasma, Ce, Ee so; Be
thinamiddho; Se thinamiddhi);- sathina, mfn., slothful;
lethargic; Kv 132,22 (araha tena thinena sathino ti); -
pp (b) thiyita, mfn., thick; stiff; Nidd I 423,15 (ya cittassa
akalyata akammaññata oliyana ... thin~ thiyana --tta111
cittassa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thiyita-) = Dhs 1156 (Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be thiyita-; As 377,31 foil.: --bhavo --tta111
avippharavasen' eva thaddhata ti attho, Se so; Be
thiyita-; Ce, Ee thiyanabhavo) = Vibh 253,39 (Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be thiyita- ); - see also thayati 3.
thiyana,f [from thiyati], stijfness, lethargy; Nidd I 423,15
(ya cittassa akalyata akammaññata oliyana ... thin~ -a
thiyitatt~ cittassa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thiyana) =
Dhs 1156 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thiyana) = Vibh 253,39 (Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be thiyana).
thuta, mfn., pp ofthavati qv.
thuti, f [S. stuti], praise; eulogy; elaboration; Abh 118;
Ja I 70,22 (anekehi padasatehi -iyo vadamano aghasi);
282,14 (bodhisattassa -i111 karonto ima111 gatham aha);
IV 411,3 (Sakko mahajanamajjhe yeva -i111 karonto);
Sv 961,12 (Val).l).asaddo ... -iy~ [dissati]); Ps III 51,23
(dhammakathaya -i111 karonto); Bv-a44,9 (thomanan ti
parammukhato -i); Sadd 363,1 (thu -iyam); - ifc see
pada-.
thutmp, inf ofthavati qv.
thunati\ pr. 3 sg., see sv thavati.
thunati 2, pr. 3 sg. [cfthanati; Pkt thul).ai', R. Pischel, 1957,
§ 494], moans, groans; Vv 52:3 (nessama ta111 yattha
-anti duggata); Sadd 496,26 (thu nitthunane: -ati); -
part.pr. (a) thuna(ti, mfn., S V 148,28 (so bhikkhave
makkato pañco<;l<;lito -a111 seti anay~ apanno; Spk III
thupiká
201,12: -anto sayati); (b) thunanta2, mfn., Spk III 201,12.
thupika,f, see sv thüpika.
thubbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup thilrvati, Wg § 15:62],
hurts; Sadd 406,4 (ubb! tubb! thubb! ... hi~sattha: ubbati
tubbati -ati).
thulapicuno in E e at S V 351,13 is wr for tülapicuno (Be,
Ce, Se so).
thulla, mfn., se e sv thilla.
thuJati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup thw;lati, sthuc,lati,
Wg § 28:93-94], covers; Sadd 461,5 (thu!a phu!a
sa~vara~e: -ati phu!ati).
v'thus, [cf thusa ?], to make small; Dhatum 575 (thusa
applkriyaya).
thusa, m.n. [cfS. tu~a. m.], the husk of grain or rice; chaff;
Abh 453 (-o); D III 90,13 (ka~o pi ta~c,lula~
pariyonandhi -o pi ta~c,lul~ pariyonandhi); M 1 259,3o
(-a~ ca paticca aggi jalati thusaggi t' eva sañkh~
gacchati); A 1 242,8 (s!ghaslgha~ koqapetva
slghaslgha~ -ani uddharapeyya); Ja 111 123,12* (vidit~
-a~ undurana~ vidita~ pana ta~c,lul~; 123,14'foll.:
andhakare un duran~ -o o -bhavena t~c,lulo ca
ta~c,lulabhavena vidito pakato yeva, idha pana
liilgavipallasavasena -~ t~c,lulan ti vutt~); Sp 823,24
(-e palapetva); Ps III 95,18 (-e kogetva
ta~c,lulapariyesan~ viya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr thille);-
0
Ódaka, n., sour gruel; Abh 460 (so vira~ ... -~); D 1
l66,1o (na -a~ pivati; Sv 355,24: -an ti
sabbasassasambharehi kata~ sovlrak~) = Nidd I
416,21; - 0 -homa, m., an offering of husks; DI 9,5
(micchajlvena jlvik~ kappenti seyyathid~ ailga~ ...
-a~ k~ahom~ t~c,lulahoma~ ... ); - athusa, mfn.,
without husks; D III 88,13 (akaqhapako salí paturahosi
ak~o -o sugandho t~c,lulapphalo); 199,33*;
Vism 418,23; - nitthusa, mfn., freed jrom husks;
Sp 176,14; Sv 869,6;- --ka~a. mfn., without husks and
bran; Sp 43,2 (milsika --ka~e karonti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nitthusaka~. prob. wr); Mhv 5:30 (te saiJ --ka~e
akh~c,letvana t~c,lule ak~su milsika);
sathusa, mfn., with husks; Sp 176,15.
thül}a, f, -a, m. (sometimes written thiln-) [S. sthil~a], a
post, a stake, a pillar; the trunk of a tree; Abh 220
(thambho -o pumitthiya~); 1048; MI 227,25 (-a~ ce
p' aha~ acetanmp vadena vada~ samarabheyy~ sa
pi . . . sailkampeyya); A II 198,35 (-a~ paticca eh aya
paññayati; Mp 111 179,3: rukkh~ paticca); Ud 69,4 (yehi
bhikkhave jaccandhehi hatthissa pado digho ahosi te
eva~ aha~su ediso deva hatthl seyyatha pi -o ti);
Sv 124,19 (patato gehassa upatthambhanatthaya -a nama
balavapaccayo hoti); 294,18 (thil~ilpanltanl ti ...
yilpasailkhata~ -~ upanltani); - ifc see jhama-
(sv jhayati 1); - see also ekathil~aka, ekathü~ika
(sv eka).
thül}ika (and thilnira), f [from thil~a ?], a roof-plate;
Th 184 (sabba te phasuka bhagga -a ca vidalita, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se thil~ira; Th-a II 56,8: -a ca vidalita ti idani
taya katabbassa attabhavagehasa avijjasailkhata ka~~ika
ca bhinna, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee thilnira).
thüpa 1, m. [S., BHS stilpa], l. a .heap; a mound; Vin IV
192,15 (na -ato omadditva pi~c,lapat~ bhuñjissaml ti ...
anapatti ... parittake sese ekato sailkac,lc,lhitva omadditva
355 thüpa
bhuñjati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be thilpakato; cfSp 893,10:
matthakato, vemajjhato ti attho, and G. Schopen, 1996,
pp. 569 foil.); Mp 1 334,18 (p~~asaladvare va1uk~ -a~
katva samantato rattav~~ani pupphani vikiritva manta~
jappento viya oghe ca1etva caletva muddha phalatu
sattadha ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee valikathilp~); - ifc see
eka-, valuka-; - 2. a mound (oj earth or sand) to
honour or commemorate someone; a stilpa, a domed
structure often containing relics; a relic-shrine; Abh 436
(-o ca cetiya~); Vin IV 308,13joll. (bhikkhunl kalailkata
hoti, chabbaggiya bhikkhuniyo t~ bhikkhuni~
nlharitva . . . jhapetva -~ katva gantva tasmi~ -e
rodanti . . . ayasma Kappitako . . . ta~ -a~ bhinditva
pakiresi; see G. Schopen, 1996); D II 142,5foli.
(catummahapathe rañño cakkavattissa -a~ karonti ...
catummahapathe tathagatassa -o katabbo); 142,20 (aya~
tassa bhagavato arahato sammasambuddhassa -o ti
Ananda bahujana citta~ pasadenti); 166,11* (vittharika
hontu disasu -a); A III 62,27 (Bhaddaya deviya sarlr~
jhapetha -a~ e' assa karotha); Ud 8,3o (dac,lc,lha~ bhante
Bahiyassa Daruclriyassa sañra~ -o e' assa kato);
Vv 33:47 (gandhapañcailgu1ik~ aha~ adasi~
Kassapassa bhagavato -asmi~; Vv-a 147,sfoll.:
Kassapasammasambuddhassa yojanike kanakathilpe );
47:4 (cattari pupphani -~ abhihari~ aha~); Ja 111
155,21 (a!ahanato aqhlni aharitva attano arame
mattikathilpa~ katva tani tattha nidahitva gatagatavelaya
-a~ pupphehi piljetva cetiya~ avijjhanto paridevati);
434,ts (paccekabuddhassa sarlra~ jhapetva
catummahapathe -a~ karesi); Ap 89,17 (nibbute
1okanathamhi ... avandi~ -am uttama~; Ap-a 366,3:
uttam~ -a~ segha~ cetiya~ avandi~); 111,29 (-~
katvana veJilna~ . . . sammukha vi ya sambuddha~
nimmita~ abhivandi 'ha~, Ee so; Se veJuna; Be, Ce
pu1in~; Ap-a 385,21: veJupesikahi cetiya~ katva ti
attho, eds so); 156,19 (pupphehi -~ katvana tattha
kalailkato aha~; cj Ap-a 426,6: pupphe aharapetva -a~
katva buddh~ viya piljetva); 170,2o (chattatichatt~
karetva -amhi abhiropayi~); 198,16 (Phussassa kho
bhagavato -o asi mahavane kuñjarehi tada bhinno
s~ril!ho padapo tahi~); 269,14 (addasa~ pavane -a~
1ugg~ ti~alataku1~); 426,12 (ak~ puJinacetiy~ ...
puJinena kato -o); Bv 28:5 (agha sarlrika -a navamo
kumbhacetiyo ailgarathilpo dasamo); Sp 83,17 (karoma
bhante -a~ ... api ca bhante dhatuyo kuto lacchama ti);
88,20 (kldiso bhante -o katabbo ti vlhirasisadiso
maharaja ti); 1231,7 (-o nama asenasana~);
Sv 583,36joll. (puthujjanabhikkhilna~ hi -e
anuññayamane Tambapa~~idlpe tava -ana~ okaso va na
bhaveyya); Dhp-a 111447,11 (ath' assa paccekabuddha ca
mahajano ca sañrakicca~ katva dhatuyo gahetva
nagaradvare -a~ patighapesu~); Ud-a 97,6 (-a~ e' assa
karotha ti assa Bahiyassa sar!radhatuyo gahetva cetiy~
ca karotha); Bv-a 247,18 (manussa tiyojanubbedh~
sattaratanamaya~ himagirisadisasobha~ -~ aka~su);
Mhv 1:39 (-a~ dvadasahatthucca~ karapetvana);
Thilp 147,26 (thilparahana~ buddhadlna~ dhatuyo
patitthapetva katacetiya~ abbhunnataghena -o ti
vuccati); Sadd 553,9 (thilpa samussaye: ... -o thilpika);
- ifc see kañcuka-; - 3. (a mound as) a foundation;
thüpa
Sv 906,12 (Na~aputto va nesa111 patighanhena -o, so pana
bhinno mato tena vuttarp bhinnathüpe ti; Sv-p~ [Be] III
85,24: samussita111 hutva patighahetubhavato -arp,
pati~~a ti liha . . . -o ti va dhammassa niyyanabhavo
veditabbo aññe dhamme abhibhuyya samussita~~ena;
cfG. Schopen, 1996, pp. 568-69); - ifc see bhinna-
(sv bhindati); - 4. a small turret or pinnacle; - ifc see
pañca-; - 0 -civara, n., cloth from a mound; Vin V
129,16 (aparani pi pañca Pa111sukülani ... -a111;
Sp 1334,2o: -an ti vammikarp parikkhipitva
ba1ikarnmakatal11); Vism 62,26; - see also thüpa2; -
0
-thüpa, mfn., in heaps or mounds; raised up, domed;
Vism 418,14 (kañgubhatte paccamane ekappahiiren' eva
bubbujakani u~~ahanti eke padesa -a honti eke
ninnaninna; Vism-mh~ [Be] II 52,22: -a ti unnatunnata).
thüpa 2 , mfn. [from thüpa 1],from a mound; Sv 1010,ufoll.
(parpsukülan ti sosanika111 . . . dhajaha~a111 -arp
samaJ?.acivararp ... -an ti vammike püjitacivararp); -
see also thüpacivara (sv thüpa\
thüpaka, m. [thüpa + ka2], a heap, a mound; a stüpa;
Vin IV 192,15 (na -ato omadditva pi~J9apatarp
bhuñjissami ti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se thüpato; cfSp 893,w:
-ato ti matthakato, vemajjhato ti attho, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
thüpato = Kkh 2 261,6 (Be, Ee so; Ce, Kkh 1 thüpato) and
G. Schopen, 1996, pp. 569 foil.).
thüpati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup stüpyati, stüpayati,
Wg §§ 26:127, 32:133],forms a heap; Ap-a439,22 (atha
va -ati thirabhavena vuddhirp viriljhirp vepullarp
apaJpmano patinhati ti thüpo); pass.
pr. 3 sg. thüpiyati, Ap-a 439,22 (-iyati rasikariyati ti
thüpo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee thüpayati);- caus. pr. 3 sg. (or
denom.) thüpeti, -ayati, heaps up, piles; Sadd 553,8
(thüpa samussaye: samussayo iiroho ubbedho, -eti
-ayati thüpo thüpika).
thüpika, f [BHS stüpika], a small turret, a pinnacle;
Sp 1245,17 (mattikabhan9e ... chadani~~haka -a ti
sabbarp garubhaJ?.9arp, Ce, Ee Se so; Be thupika; or a
small stüpa ?) = Kkh 2 238,4 (Ce, Kkh 1 so; Kkh 2 thupika);
Sv 648,5 (sudhammaya111 sabhayan ti ... rajatamaya -a);
Th-a III 173,18 (pasadamatthake -a111 padañgunhena
pahari); Sadd 553,9; - ifc see kañcana-, pañca-.
thüpikata, mfn. [pp of *thüpa + karoti], made into a heap,
heaped up; Vin IV 191,2 (samatittiko pi~J9apato
pa~iggahetabbo, yo . . . -arp pi1J9apatal11 pa~igal).hati
apatti dukka~assa; Sp 892,8foll.: ettha -o nama pattassa
antomukhavagi1ekharp atikkamitva kato patte pakkhitto
racito pürito ti attho .. . -a111 nama pañcahi bhojanehi
katan ti Abhayatthero aha); Sp 703,17 (tarp rajirp
atikkamma -a111 ti~~ati); 892,33 (püvavata111sakarp
~apetva pi~J9apatal11 denti -am eva hoti);
Vin-vn 1898foll.
thüla, thulla, mfn. [S. sthü1a], coarse, gross; fat; big;
strong; Abh 701 (-arp ca pivara111); 1066 (jaje -o
mahatyapi); Vin I 237,24 (ajja Sihena senapatina -a111
pasurp vadhitva sama~Jassa Gotamassa bhatta111 kata111,
Be so; Ce, E e, Se thullarp); M I 449,16 (-o kajingaro );
456,8 (passasi no tva111 Udayi ta111 sa111yojanarp aJ?.Urp va
-arp va yassaharp no pahana111 vadami ti); Ja I 226,2*
(yattha daso amajato ~hito thullani gajjati ti; 226,9·:
thullani pharusavacanani vadati) t IV 432,31* (matto
356 thüla
thullani gajjasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se thülani; 433,r:
mahagajjitani gajjasi); III 296,26* (sadurp ca -arp ca
mudurp ca marpsa111, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee thullarp);
IV 203,20* (ahasi me ambapha1ani pubbe a~Jüni -ani ca);
VI 339,37' (sappassa hi nañgu~~arp -arp hoti sappiniya
tanukarp); 530,14* (-a singharaka; 531 ,1r mahanta
singharaka); Dhs 617 (digharp rassa111 a~Jurp -a111);
Mil 86,12 (sukhuman ti va -an ti va); Vism 153,13
(paccavekkhaJ?.abahu1assa hi jhanangani -ani dubba1ani
hutva upar~ahanti); Sp 238,2o (kiso va -o va); Sv 199,3o
(co1akani pi kesañci SaJ?.hlini kesañci -ani papul).anti);
Dhp-a III 391,4 (yo pana a~Jüni va -ani va papani
sametva ~hito ayam eva samai).O ti); - thüla in Ee at
D III 174,16* is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se puthu1a; - ifc see
aJ?.Urp- (sv al). u), ai).Uka-; - thull' -accaya, m.n., a
particular classification of (vinaya) offence; Vin I 172,9
(-arp pacittiya111 paridesaniyarp . . . ayarp acaravipatti);
III 37,6 (anapatti bhikkhu parajikassa apatti -assa ti);
Vism 22,3o (apatti -assa); Kkh2 77,13 (dve -a); Sp 314,1
(thülatta accayatta ca -a111); 365,12 (navanavuti -ani);
Mp II 348,16 (sanghadisesarp khuddakarp -a111
anukhuddaka111 nama); As 394,22 (piirajikal11
sanghadisesarp -a111 pacittiyarp pa~idesaniyarp dukka~arp
dubbhasitan ti ima satta apattiyo); - -'-apatti,f, a
thullaccaya offence; V in V 91,24 (parajikapatti
sañghadisesapatti -' -apatti pacittiyapatti ... ); Sp 526,1s
(lahuka -'-apatti);- thulla-kacchu,f, an itching skin-
disease; Vin I 202,24 (yassa ka~J9u va pijaka va assavo va
-u va abadho, Be, Ce so; E e, Se thullakaccha, prob. wr);
Sp 884,29 (-u va abadho ti mahapijakabadho vuccati);-
o -kumari, thullakumari, thullakumarika,f, a grown-up
but unmarried girl (of loase morals or promiscuous);
Vin I 70,8 (vesiyagocaro va hoti vidhavagocaro va hoti
thullakumiirikagocaro hoti pa~J9akagocaro va hoti, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se thullakumarika-; Sp 991,28: thullakumarika ti
yobbanappatta va yobbanatita va kumariyo, ta
purisadhippaya va vicaranti yena kenaci saddhirp
mittabhava111 patthenti) 'fA III 128,6 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
thullakumiiri-) 'f Nidd I 473,9 (Ce, Be thullakumiiri-; E e,
Se thülakumari-; cfNidd-a I 451,12: thullakumariyo ti
mahallika anivighakumariyo) t Vibh 247,13 (Ce, Ee, Se
thullakumiiri-; Be thullakumari-); Vin I 150,15 (vesi
nimanteti . . . thullakumañ nimanteti . . . paJ?.9ako
nimanteti ... ); Ja I 416,13 (kattha te citta111 pa~ibaddhan ti
pucchi so ekissa thullakumarikaya ti aha); IV 219,29joll.
(thullakumarika ti na ca thullasarira ti daghabba thüla va
hotu kisa va pañcakamagul).ikaragena thülataya
thullakumiirika ti vuccati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se na ca
thülasañra ti; Se thülakumarika ti); - 0 -thüla, mfn.,
very fat; very big; Ja VI 81,20' (-e mige vadhitva, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee --mige); Vism 672,16; Spk II 105,27; -
0
-phusitaka, thullaphusitaka, mfn. [from thüla +
phusita 1; cf S. sthü1apr~ata], composed of, raining, large
drops; S III 141,5 (saradasamaye thullaphusitake deve
vassante; Spk II 54,19: mahaphusitake); A III 394,15
(catummahapathe thullaphusitako devo vassanto rajarp
antaradhapeyya); Dhp-a III 243,6 ( -a111 devarp
vunhapesi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee thulla-); - o -vaija,
thullavajja, n. and mfn. [thulla + vajja 1], a serious
offence; being a serious offence; Vin II 87,19 (~apetva
thüliya
-arp., Ee so; Be, Ce, Se thulla-; Sp 1194,2: thullavajjan ti
parajikarp. e' eva sañghadisesarp. ca) = M II 250,14;
Vin V 115,15 (thullavajja apatti janitabba; Sp 1320,12:
thullavajja ti thulladose paññatta garukapatti); -
athullavajja, mfn., not being a serious offence; Vin V
115,16 (Sp 1320,n: athullavajja ti lahukapatti); -
0
-vappe in Ee at Sp 550,11 is wr for thalavappe (Be, Ce,
Se so); - athüla, mfn., not fat; not big; Spk I 53,22
(kisan ti -arp.);- atithüla, mfn., very fat or big; too fat;
D II 175,24 (natikisa natithüla); Ja V 205,2o- (sutanü ti
sutthu tanuko natikiso natithülo); VI 3,5; Sp 1028,4;
It-a II 56,22 (natithülata).
thñliya, n. [cf S. sthaulya], thickness, stoutness;
Sadd 354,28 (va!ha -e); 440,11 (piva ... -e).
thñleti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup sthülayate,
Wg § 35:50], increases; grows big; Dhatum 404 (thüla
kassane); Sadd 565,11 (thula paribrühane: paribliihanarp.
va~~hanarp., -eti -ayati thülo puriso ).
theta, mfn. [< *sthavita, pp of .Vsthii ? cf S. sthe~!ha ?],
firm; trustworthy; sure, certain; DI 4,14 (musavada
pa!ivirato samai_Io Gotamo saccavadi saccasandho -o
paccayiko, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se !heto; Sv 73,17: -o ti thiro
thirakatho ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee !hitakatho ti); M I
8,17 (atthi me atta ti va 'ssa saccato -ato di!!hi uppajjati;
PsI 10,22: bhütato ca thirato ca); S IV 384,7 (diqhe va
dhamme saccato -ato tathagate anupalabbhiyamane);
Kv 68,8 (ekacco sattha di!!he va dhamme attanarp.
saccato -ato paññapeti); Ps II 207,1 (asina sise chijjante
pi dve katha na katheti ayarp. vuccati -o); - see also
thavara, thira.
thena, m. [S. stena], l. a thief; Abh 522 (coro
thenekagarika); V in III 45,18 (-o si ti); Sp 1046,28 (-ehi
va hata); Ps II 329,3ofoll. (-o ti coro -assa bhavo
theyyarp.); - ifc see uppalagandha- (sv uppala), gandha-
(sv gandha\ - 2. stealing, theft;? Sp 391,1 (tasmirp.
na!!he pi jii_l!J.e pi -aya avaha!e pi, Ee so, perhaps wr;
Ce, Se theyyaya; Be coravaha!e pi); - athena, m.,
atheni,f, not (being) a thief; DI 4,6 (adinnadana
pativirato samai_Io Gotamo ... -ena sucibhiitena attana
viharatl ti; Sv 72,3: na thenena ti -ena, --tta yeva
sucibhiitena); A III 38,8 (tattha ca bhavissama adhuttl -i
asoJJ.~i avinasikayo ti; Mp III 248,17: -i ti -iyo acoriyo);
IV 266,6 (tattha ca hoti adhutti -i ... ).
thenaka, m. [thena + ka2], a thief; Ja VI 115,19"
(uttamabhandathena ti manussehi piyayitassa
varabhai_I~assa -a); - ifc see kumbha-, dhamma-
(sv dhamma\ liiiga-, sarp.vasa-.
thenana, n. rJrom theneti], stealing, theft; Ja IV 307,26
(pabbajitanarp. bhisamattarp. -arp. nama appatirupan ti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee thenarp.); Sadd518,18 (-arp. theyyarp.,
corika ti vuttarp. hoti).
theneti, -ayati (and thenati ?), pr. 3 sg. [prob. denom.
from thena; cf S. Dhatup stenayati, Wg § 35:43], steals;
Dhatup 595 (thena coriye); Dhatum 832; Ja II 411,2 (na
sakka tava sirirp. -eturp.); Sp 485,13 (imina sadiso coro
nama n' atthi yo pañcindriyaggahai_Iatltarp.
atisaJJ.hasukhumarp. lokuttaradhammarp. -eti); 984,24 (so
kira dhammarp. -essami ti Udayittherassa santike
pabbajitva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -issami ti) f. Spk II 126,1
(eds -essami ti pabbajati); Sv 72,3 (-en ti theno );
357 theyya
Sadd 550,6 (thena coriye: ... -eti -ayati theno); -
part.pr. thenenta, mfn., Ps III 428,26; - absol. thenetva,
Ja III 18,24 (ñatakanarp. apassantanarp. -etva
vatthalañkare alJ.aratha); VI 368,19 (aham rañño
cutamai_Iirp. -etva alJ.arissami); Vism 381,1; Sp 298,21;
Spk II 221,5 (sa ca narp. samikassa santakarp. phassarp.
-etva paresarp. abhiratirp. uppadesi); Sadd 550,6; -
pp thenita, mfn., stolen; Sp 1016,30 (ayarp. liiigamattass'
eva --tta liiigatthenako nama); Spk II 221,16
(gandhapupphadinarp. --tta); - jpp thenitabba, mfn.,
Spk I 298,6.
theyya, n. (and -a,f ?) [S. steya], theft; stealing;
thievishness; Abh 522 (-arp. ca corika moso);
Dhatup 530 (cura -e); Vin III 90,22 (-aya vo bhikkhave
raqhapi!J.~O bhutto ti; Sp 485,27: -aya theyyacittena
bhutto hoti); 90,24* (bhuttarp. -ena tassa tarp.); IV 131,28
(rajanarp. va -arp. gacchanti suiikarp. va pariharanti;
Sp 868,23 foll.: rajanarp. va thenetva vañcetva rañño
santakarp. kiñci gahetva idani tassa na dassama ti
gacchanti); SI 204,30* (yarp. etarp. varijarp. puppharp.
adinnarp. upasiiighasi ekañgarp. etarp. -anarp.; Spk I
298,6 foll.: thenitabbanarp. liiparammaJJ.adinarp.
pañcakonhasanarp. idarp. ekañgarp.); Sn 119 (-a adinnarp.
adiyati); 967 (-arp. na kareyya; Nidd I 488,2: idha
bhikkhu adinnarp. pahaya adinnadana pa!ivirato assa);
Vv 15:8 (-a ca aticara ca majjapana ca araka;
Vv-a 72,24: -arp. vuccati thenabhavo, corika parassa
haraJJ.an ti attho); Ja VI 228,15* (na capi bhüte hirp.sami
-arp. capi vivajjayirp.); Mil 265,6 (sayarp. pabbajanto -arp.
apajjati); Sp 307,3 (n' etarp. tava santakarp., -aya te
gahitan ti); Ps II 329,31 (theno ti coro thenassa bhavo
-arp. avaharai_Iacittass' etarp. adhivacanarp.); Sadd 441,29
(musa -e: thenanarp. -arp., corika);- 0 -citta, n. and mfn.
[theyya + citta 1], l. (n.) the intention to steal; a thievish
thought; Vin III 56,17 (bhikkhu ... mahaggharp. dussarp.
passitva -arp. uppadesi); Ja II 378,12 (tumhakarp. -arp.
n' atthi yena vina adinnadanarp. nama paññapeturp. na
sakka); Sp 374,17; Pj II 159,22 (suvai_IJJ.abhajanarp. ...
-ena kuñcikatthavikaya pakkhipi); - 2. (mfn.) having
an intention to steal; having a thievish thought; V in III
49,27 (sise bhararp. -o amasati); 61,4 (bhikkhii pure
samika passanti ti -a paribhuñjirp.su); Sp 334,21; -
neg. atheyyacitta, mfn., Vin III 58,5 (kirp.citto tvarp.
bhikkhii ti atheyyacitto aharp. bhagava ti);
0
-Saipviisaka, m. [BHS steyasarp.vasika], one who lives
dishonestly in the sañgha (claiming status to which he
has no right); Vm I 86,31 (-o bhikkhave anupasampanno
na upasampadetabbo; Sp 1016,26: tayo -a liiigatthenako
sarp.vasatthenako ubhayatthenako ti . . . yo pana
bhikkhiihi pabbajito samai_Iero samano videsarp. gantva
aharp. dasavasso va visativasso va ti musa vatva ...
ayarp. . . . sarp.vasatthenako nama); 135,37; Mil 310,12;
Sp 515,13;- 0 -saókhiitaip, adv., with dishonest intent,
with intent to steal; Vin III 45,15 (yo pana bhikkhu
adinnarp. -arp. adiyeyya; 46,34: -an ti theyyacitto
avaharaJJ.acitto; Sp 302,3foll.); D III 65,18 (paresarp.
adinnarp. -arp. adiyi); A N 370,4 (abhabbo khiJJ.asavo
bhikkhu adinnarp. -arp. adaturp.); - o -sattha, m., a
dishonest caravan; Vin IV 131,21;- atheyyasattha, m.,
what is nota dishonest caravan; Vin IV 132,5.
thera
thera, mf(-a, -I)n. and m. and -I,f [AMg id.; S. sthavira;
but associated by cts with thira qv], l. (m.fn.) thick; salid;
firm; Vin IV 89,26 (-o 'ya¡p bhikkhu vatharo
manussarna¡psa¡p maññe khadati ti; Sp 842,23: -o ti thiro
ghanabaddho vatharo ti thülo, thülo ca ghanasañro
caya¡p bhikkhü ti vutta¡p hoti); MI 164,5 (ñiil)avada¡p ca
vadami 0 -vada¡p ca; Ps II 171,15: 0 -vadan ti
thirabhavavada¡p, -o aha¡p ettha ti eta¡p vacana¡p ?); -
2. (mfn.) (i) old, elderly; elder, senior; venerable;
Abh 254 (vuddho ca -o jii)I)O ca); D III 123,12 (sattha ca
hoti -o rattaññü cirapabbajito addhagato vayo
anuppatto; Sv 910,16: -o ti thiro therakarakehi
dhammehi sarnannagato); SI 176,17* (asso va jii)J)O
nibbhogo khadana apaniyati baiakana¡p pita -o
paragaresu bhikkhati); Sn p. 92,22 (sam~abrahmal)a
jil)l)a vuddha mahallaka addhagata vayo anuppatta -a
rattaññü cirapabbajita sali.ghino gal)ino ... ; Pj II 423,32:
-a ti attano sam~adhamme thirabhavappatta); Pv 23:6
(ta¡p . . . paccanayitvana -i¡p sudubbala¡p, eds so;
T. Oberlies, 2001, p. 61, would read paccanayitva
*thavari¡p; Pv-a 149,s: -in ti thavari¡p jii)J)aJP vuMhan ti
attho, Be, Ce, Se so; E e -in ti thavarijil)l)aip); Ja IV
403,12' (dure apassa¡p -o va cakkhu¡p yacitum agato;
403,14·: -o ti jarajil)l)athero); Ap-a 207,2 (therasaddo ...
-o caya¡p kumaro mama puttesü ti adisu jeghe, jegho
kumaro ti attho); - (ii) elder, senior in the sali.gha
(ordained for 1O years or more); Vin I 108,34 (yattha va
pana -o bhikkhu viharati tattha sannipatitva uposatho
katabbo); 116,1 (tattha -o bhikkhu balo hoti avyatto);
II 15,35 (sambahula -a bhikkhü ayasma ca Sariputto
ay asma ca Mahamoggallano . . . ay asma ca Anando
ayasma ca Rahulo); 212,19 (anujanami bhikkhave -ena
bhikkhuna bhattagge anumoditun ti); III 24,1 (yo pana
ti ... -o va navo va majjhimo va); IV 212,1 (yatha -a
bhikkhuniyo Janeyyu¡p navakana¡p bhikkhunina¡p
santike nisinna ti); D II 125,24 (arnukasmi¡p nama avase
eko -o bhikkhu viharati bahussuto agatagamo
dhammadharo vinayadharo matikadharo); MI 14,17 (-a
bhikkhü tihi thanehi garayha bhavanti; Ps I 102,6: -a ti
dasavasse upadaya vuccanti); 220,22 (bhikkhü -a
rattaññü cirapabbajita sali.ghapitaro sali.ghaparil)ayaka);
S II 220,21 (tibba¡p hirottappa¡p paccupaghita¡p
bhavissati -esu navesu majjhimesü ti); III 116,28 (so
caya¡p bhikkhu navo bhavissati acirapabbajito -o va
pana baio avyatto ti); A I 247,13 (-o ce pi bhikkhave
bhikkhu hoti dussilo papadharnmo); III 114,15foll.
(pañcahi bhikkhave dharnmehi samannagato -o bhikkhu
bahujana-ahitaya patipanno hoti); Thlp. 126,7 (aññatara
-I bhikkhuni apaññata); Thi-a 8,14 (-Ina¡p bhikkhunina¡p
vatta¡p dassetva); - 3. (m.) an elder in the sailgha; a
venerable bhikkhu (of whatever seniority); Vin I 92,37
(ayasma Anando eva¡p aha naha¡p ussahami -assa
nama¡p gahetu¡p garu me -o ti); V 169,34 (ekacco -o
hoti rattaññü cirapabbajito ); D III 218,3 (tayo -a jatithero
dhammathero sammutithero); A I 68,12 (daharo ce pi
brahm~a hoti yuva susu kajakeso . . . so ca na kame
paribhuñjati ... atha kho so p~9ito -o tveva sali.kha¡p
gacchati); II 23,19* foil. (tam aha¡p vadami -o ti yassa no
santi asava asavana¡p khaya bhikkhu -o iti pavuccati);
Dhp 260 (na tena -o hoti yen' assa palita¡p siro); 261 (sa
358 thera
ve van tamal o dhiro -o ti pavuccati); Pv 27:1
(Kul)9inagariyo -o Sanuvasinivasiko Poghapado ti
namena samai)O bhavitindriyo); Th 928 (nibbuta dani te
-a paritta dani tadisa); 975 (sikkhapenta pi -ehi bala
civaradharal)a¡p na sul)issanti dummedha; Th-a III 89,10:
-eh! ti attano acariyupajjhayehi); J a I 81 ,26
(pañcavaggiya -a tathagata¡p dürato va agacchanta¡p
disva, eds so; = Ap-a 86,18: eds omit -a; cfVin I 8,34:
addasa¡psu kho pañcavaggiya bhikkhü bhagavanta¡p
dürato va agacchanta¡p); II 333,s (-o satthara¡p vanditva
iddhibalena gantva); Mil22,2o (atthi maharaja Nagaseno
nama -o p~9ito vyatto medhavi ... ); 175,8 (bhasita¡p
p' eta¡p maharaja dharnmasali.g!tikarakehi -ehi);
Vism 90,15 (tattha cira¡p vasitva -o hutva); Sp 1324,7
(-o therakicca¡p na karoti); Sv 999,9 (ya¡p va pana
mahallakakaie pabbajita¡p sam~eradayo disva -o -o ti
vadanti); Ps IV 196,15 (na -o aha¡p araha ti); Spk III 36,s
(asuko -o suttantiko asuko abhidhammiko asuko
vinayadharo asuko tepitako); Dhp-a III 387,12foll.
(naharn bhikkhave mahallakabhavena therasane
nisinnamattakena -o ti vadami yo pana saccani
pativijjhitva mahajanassa ahi¡psakabhave thito aya¡p -o
nama ti); Pj II 346,21 (sasane thirabhava¡p patto ti -o);
Th-ai 1,15* (-ehi bhasita gatha theñhi ca); Nidd-aii
151 ,4* (-ena thiragul)avata suvibhatto mahaniddeso );
Ap-a 206,28 foil. (therasaddo panaya¡p kaiathirapaññatti-
namadheyyajetthadisu anekesu atthesu vattati ...
cirakala¡p thito ti -o, thirataras!lacararnaddavadi-
gul)abhiyutto va -o ti vuccati); Mhv 3:13
(Jarnbudipamhi te -a vicaritvana carika¡p); 3:15 (-a
thiragul)üpeta); ifc see khandhakabhiil)aka-
1
(sv khandhaka), jati- (sv jati ), dhamma- (sv dharnma\
sammuti-; - 4. theñ,f, see sv; - adhika, m.fn., with
0
an elder in charge; Vin I 115,32 (anujanami bhikkhave
-a¡p patimokkhan ti; Sp 1059,24: -an ti theradhina¡p
therayatta¡p bhavitun ti attho, theradheyyan ti pi patho,
tasma therena saya¡p va uddisitabba¡p añño va
ajjhesitabbo); 116,4 (bhagavata paññatta¡p -a¡p
patimokkhan ti aya¡p ca arnhaka¡p thero balo avyatto);
-
0
anuthera, m.pl., elders and those next in seniority;
Vin II 212,32 (anujanami bhikkhave bhattagge catühi
pañcahi -ehi bhikkhühi agarnetun ti); Ja III 206,1o (tada
Baral)asiraja Anando ahosi daraka -a p~9itadarako
aham eva ti); IV 136,19;- 0 '-asana, n. [thera + asana2 ],
l. the place where the (or a) senior bhikkhu sits; the
seat of the president of an assembly; Vism 69,5 (-e
anisiditva); Sp 13,25 (Mahakassapo -e nisiditva
ayasmanta¡p Upali¡p vinaya¡p pucchi); 826,4 (-e nisinno
thero ); Spk I 217,4 (ki¡p na passatha dve bhikkhü -e
nisidante); II 362,14 (kalena -e kalena majjhimasane
ka1ena sali.ghanavakasane titthanti); Mhv 3:21
(uttaramukha¡p uttama¡p -a¡p supaññatta¡p asi); -
2. the senior bhikkhu; Sp 54,s (amacco -ato paghaya
asina sisani patetu¡p araddho); 1262,1 (-ato patthaya
salaka databba); Ps II 397,5 (avasesa¡p -ato paghaya ...
databba¡p); - 0 -gatha\f, a verse of an elder; a verse
from the Theragatha; Sadd 185,23 (imissa -aya
sa¡pv~J)anaya¡p); - 0 -gatha 2 ,fpl., the verses of the
elders; one of the collections making up the Khuddaka-
nikaya ofthe Piifi Canon; Th p. 115,13 (-a nighita, Se so:
theraka
Be, Ce --piQi niWlita; Ee nighita -ayo); Sv 24,5
(dhammapada111 -a theñgatha suttanipate nosuttanamika
suddhikagatha ca gatha ti veditabba); Pj I 12,s
(khuddakapatJlo dhammapada111 . . . -a theñgatha
jatak3111 ... khuddakanikayo); Ud-a 3,7 (savakabhasitani
pi... -asu .. . agatani); Th-a 1 1,18* (-a ti namena
therígatha ti tadino ya khuddakanikayasmi111 sangayi!11SU
mahesayo); 2,11joll. (ka pan' eta -a therigatha ca);
Sadd 733,22 (-asu);- -'-a¡tJ!akatha,f, the commentary
on the Theragatha; Th-a 1 1,2 (-a, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
--va~~ana); --va~~ana, --sa111va~~ana,f, the
commentary on the Theragatha; Th-a I 57,22
(paramatthadipaniya --va~~anaya pa¡hamavagga-
va~~ana nighita, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se --s3111v~~anaya);
Thi-a 272,12 (--s3111v~~anaya111 vuttanayen' eva
gahetabbo ti); Ap-a 493,23 (tas3111 attho --va~~anaya111
vutto yeva); - 0 -tara, mfn., campar., more senior;
Vin V 169,33 (kath3111 -o 'mhi ti navakatara111 avajanati);
D II 154,11 (-ena Ananda bhikkhuna navakataro bhikkhu
namena va gottena va avusovadena va
samudacaritabbo); - 0 -tarail.ga, m., the succession of
theras; Sp 235,13 (mayha111 acariyo asukacariyassa
santike ugga~hi so asukassa ti ev3111 sabb3111
acariyaparampara111 -a111 aharitva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
o -vadailga111; Sp-\ [Be] II 49,11: therapa¡ipa\in ti attho );
o -paJi, -pali..f, the fine, the list, of elders (se e A I
0
-
23,16joll.); Mp I 337,2o (-iya v~~ana ni¡tJ!ita, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee --v~~ana); Dhp-a II 169,9 (sabba111 therassa
pubbacarita111 kathesi ta111 -iya111 vittharitam eva); -
0
-Vada, m. and mfn., l. (m.) (i) the statements of elders;
what the elders say; M I 164,s (ña~avad3111 ca vadami
-3111 ca; but cfPs II 171,15: -an ti thirabhavavad3111,
thero ah3111 ettha ti eta111 vacana111); Sp 231,14
(suttantabhidhammavinayaghakathasu agato sabbo pi -o
attanomati nama); Pp-a 190,13 (tatray3111 -o:
Tipi¡akaciiJanagatthero tava ca ah a ... ); Mhv 37:233
(siha1aghakatha!11 sutva -a111 ca sabbaso ); - (ii) the
doctrine, the redaction, of the elders; what the elders
profess; Sp 52,7 (tipitakasa111gahita111 sattJ!akath3111
sabba111 -a111 ... uggahetva; Sp-\ [Be] 1 135,19: dve
sangitiyo aruJha paJi yev' ettha -o ti veditabba); Th-a 1
15,13 (aññatitthiyavada therana111 vade na sahanti ...
aññadatthu -a te abhibhavanti); D!p 4:6 (pañcasatehi
therehi dhammavinayasangaho therehi katasangaho -o ti
vuccati); - 2. (i) (m.) the school or sect of the elders;
Kv-a 3,2 (-ato bhijjitva dve acariyavada uppanna
Mahi111sasaka ca Vajjiputtaka ca); 3,15 (etesu pana
sattarasa vada bhinnaka -o asambhinnako ti veditabbo );
D!p 5:49 (ime ekadasa vada pabhinna -ato); Mhv 5:2
(eko va -o so adivassasate ahu); 5:10 (-ena saha te honti
dvadas' ime pi ca); 33:97 (eva111 te 'bhayagirika niggata
-ato); - (ii) (mfn.) those holding the doctrine of the
elders, belonging to the sect of the elders; Kv-a3,11
(ekadasa acariyavada uppanna te -ehi saddhi111 dvadasa
honti); Díp 5:52 (nigrodho va maharukkho -an3111
uttamo aniinam anadhik3111 e' eva keva1a111
jinasasan3111); Mhv 5:6 (-ehi); - 0 -vadi(n), mfn., those
holding the doctrine of the elders, belonging to the sect
of the elders; Mhv 33:98 (-ihi pabhinna bhikkhavo
dvidha); 37:213 (bhikkhuna111 -ina111); - sathera,
359 theri
satthera, mfn., with an elder; D 11 124,21 (amukasmi111
nama avase sangho viharati -o sapamokkho) = A 11
168,27.
theraka, mfn. [thera + ka2], thick; D II 354,17 (-ani ca
vatthani guJavalakani, Ee so; Be, Ce dhorakani; Se
corakani; perhaps read *thorakani [cf S. sthiira,
Pktthora?]; Sv814,11: -ani ca vatthaní ti thiilani ca
vatthani, Ce, Ee so; Be dhorakani; Se corakani; Sv-p¡ 11
451,23: -ani ti thaviyani y asma thiilatarani pi thiilani ti
vattabbata111 arahanti tasma thiilani ca ti vutt3111, Ee so;
cfS. sthaviyas, 'more thick' ? Be dhorakani ti
dhoviyani).
therika, theriya\ mfn. [thera + ika, iya], of the elders;
belonging to the elders; Thi p. 174,17 (samatta theriya
gathayo, Ee so; Se theriya gathayo samatta; Be samatta
therigathayo; Ce therigatha samatta); Vism 711,23*
(vibhajjavadiseghan3111 theriyana111 yasassina111
mahaviharavasín3111); Sp 30,14* (aya111 pa¡hama-
mahasangíti nama ya 1oke ... thereh' eva katatta ca
therika ti pavuccati ti) = Sv 25,23*; Mhv 3:40 (thereh'
eva katatta ca theriyay3111 para111para); 5:1 (ya
Mahakassapadihi mahatherehi adito kata
saddhammasari.giti theriya ti pavuccati); 38:45 (agharasa
vihare ca theriyan3111 akarayi).
therika, f [theñ + ka2], a female elder; a venerable
bhikkhu; (also Npr. ?); Thi 1 (sukh3111 supahi -e, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee theñke; Thi-a 6,6: -e ti ida111 yadi pi tassa
namakittana111 . . . thire sasane thirabhavappatte thirehi
s!ladidhammehi samannagate ti attho; c;{Thi-a 5,11: ta111
thirasantasarirataya -a ti vohari111su; and 7,23 foll.:
namagottadivasena apaka¡a, eka therí 1akkh~asampanna
bhikkhuni ima111 gath3111 abhasí ti; or read
therllakkha~asampanna ?); Ap 512,3 (atha
therikapadanani su~atha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits);
D!p 18:11 (-a Sari.ghamitta ca Uttara ca vicakkh~a); -
0
-gatha,f, a verse of a female elder; a verse from the
Theñgatha; Sadd 517,9 (tatha hi -aya111 Gotamiya
parinibbanavacane, Be, E e so; Ce theñ- ).
theriya 1, mfn., see sv therika.
theriya2 , n. [S. sthairya], firmness; Sadd 375,16 (bada -e:
thirabhavo -a111); 393,6.
theri, f (f. of thera qv], a female elder in the sari.gha; a
venerable bhikkhuní (of whatever seniority ); Thi 223
(Kisagotami -i suvimuttacitta im3111 bh~i ti); Ja I 153,14
(na bhikkhave idan' evah3111 -iya ca Kumarakassapassa
ca avassayo ); II 433,12 (avuso dhammasenapati -i111
evariipena nama bhojanena santappesi ti); Sp 272,24 (sa
-i Savatthiya111 seghidhíta); Mp 1 313,17 (ta pañcasata pi
-iya santike pabbajja111 ca upasampad3111 ca labhi111su);
337,23 (Mahagotamí -í rattaññiin3111 agga); 377,24 (sa
pabbajjitaka1ato paghaya Bhaddakaccana -i tveva
paka¡a ahosi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee Bhaddakaccanatheñ);
Ud-a 3,12 (tesa111 theran3111 e' eva tasa111 -ína111 ca);
Th-a I 4,2 (ekanipate agharasa -iyo); Thí-a 58,19 (-iya
cailkamanako¡iya111 rukkhe adhivattha devata); 241,3
(tattha ti akkhimhi tassa111 va -iya111); As 399,5 (-i
bhattakicca111 katva patt3111 dhovitva therassa datva); -
0
-gatha 1,f, a verse of a female elder; a verse from the
Theñgatha; Pj II 242,10 (imahi -ahi anupubbena arahatte
patighapesi); - 0 -gatha 2 ,fp/., the verses of the female
theva
elders; one of the collections making up the Khuddaka-
nikaya of the PaJi Canon; Mp III 159,9 (asuttanamakarp
hi buddhavacanarp atthi seyyathldarp jatakarp
patisambhida ... theragatha -a apadanan ti); Pj I 12,8
(khuddakapatho dhamrnapadarp . . . theragatha -a
jatakarp ... khuddakanikayo); Ud-a 3,11 (savakabhasita:ni
pi ... -asu ca agatani); Thl-a 4,26 (ta hi udanadivasena
tattha tattha bhasita gatha paccha saiigitikarakehi
ekajjharp katva ... saiigltirp aropayirpsu ima -a nama ti);
- --anhakatha,f, the commentary on the Therigatha;
Thl-a 1,2 (--aghakatha, Be, Ce, E e so; Se --VaJ)J:_¡ana);-
o(l')-paJi, o-pali,f, the line, the list, of female elders;
Mp I 337,23 (-iya pa!hmne, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -iyarp);
381,23 (-iya va!).!).ana nighita, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
--Va!)!).ana).
therovassika, mfn. see sv terovassika.
theva, m. [Pkt id.; cfS. stepate], a drop; Abh 660 (-o tu
bindu phusitarp); Vin I 50,11 (clvararp rajan tena ... na ca
acchinne -e pakkmnitabbarp; Sp 981,22 foil.: yadi
appmnattakarp pi rajanarp ga1ati na tava
pakkamitabbarp); Sp 846,9 (u1unkato -a patte patanti);
Nidd-a I 258,10 (udakathevo ti udakassa -o).
thevaka, m. [theva + ka2], a small drop; V in I 286,12
(anujanami bhikkhave udake va nakhapitthikaya va -arp
datun ti; Sp 1126,22joll.: sace hi pakkarp hoti
udakapatiya dinno thevo na visarati); Th-a 11 264,11
(aharp pana... uddhanarp upat!hapita-ukkhaliko
dassanayuttarp -arp pi apassirp yeva ti dassento
appabhojano ti aha, so read with Be, Ce, Se);- ifc see
udaka-.
thevati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup stepate, Wg § 10:3;
Pkt thippai; or cf S. dlvyati ?], drips; drops; or shines, is
bright; ? Ja VI 529,23* (madhurp madhuka -anti, so read
with L.A1sdorf, 1957? Be, Ee, Se madhumadhuka; Ce
madhu madhuka; 530,30": -ann ti virocanti); Sadd 440,8
(thivu dittiyarp: -ati, madhumadhuka -anti, Be so; Ee
-madhüka).
theviki, f. [?], a waterbag, a waterskin; Thi 265
(thanaka ... -1 va lmnbanti 'nodaka, Be, Ce so; Ee te
rindl va; Se theñ ti va; Thl-a 202,8foll.: te ubho pi me
thana 'nodaka galitajala ve!).uda!)<;lake thapita-
udakabhasta viya lambanti).
thoka, mfn. and n. [S. stoka], (mfn.) little, small; being a
small amount; pl. few; (n.) a little; a small amount;
Abh 704 (khuddarp -am apparp); Vin 11 159,4 (-assa
okasassa); S 11 200,18 (bahukarp yeva me dentu ma
-arp); Ud 40,18 (api ca me sise -arp dukkhan ti); Ja I
347,25 (sa -arp yeva pi!!hirp kapa11apatiyarp pakkhipi);
462,2 (matthake cü!a viya -ani 1omani at!harpsu);
IV 325,3 (-arp sitarp akasi); 385,1 (-arp odanarp patte
thapesi); V 293,4 (tato -arp jivhagge thapesi); VI 366,9
(-a yagu dinna ti); Nidd I 496,6 (-e pi diymnane);
Patis 11 209,13 (bahukarp pi -arp adhit!hati -arp hotü ti
-arp hoti); Ap 343,1o (-arp hi sappirp datvana
appmneyyarp labham' aharp); Mi184,1 (puññarp kho
maharaja bahutararp apuññarp -an ti); Vism 403,25 (atha
ko bahukarp -arp akasl ti); PsI 97,10 (mnhakarp
bhadanto subharo -ena pi tussati, Be, Ee so; Ce
thokakena pi; Se thokathokena pi); Dhp-a 11 160,19
(appaka ti -a na bahü); III 18,9 (tlhi aiigulehi gahetva -e
360 thometi
ta!)<;lule adasi); 18,13 (bindubindurp paggharayanto -am
eva adasi, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce thokathokam eva);
Pv-a 12,26 (-arp ka1arp vltinametva); Nidd-a I 148,7
0
( -taya);- -arp, adv., a little; rather; for a short time;
for a short distance; Ja I 8,22 (-arp agametva); 243,18
(bhajanani -arp vivaritva); 356,18 (imasmirp pana jatake
bodhisatto -arp rasso O!).atakaro ahosi); 11424,2
(kanit!habhata pan' assa -arp corapakatiko); III 527,27
(-arp tava sarlrarp uturp gaJ)hapehi ti); 527,29 (-arp
dürarp gantva); IV 219,27 (-arp hadayaviddho viya
ahosi); V 12,15 (-arp niddayitva); Vism 39,5 (-arp
anugantva); Dhp-a 11 43,9 (so -arp yeva tathagatena
saddhirp caritva); Pv-a 13,13 (-arp sithilavissaso ahosi);
43,25 (bhikkhu pana vivekakamataya -arp apakkmnitva);
- repeated (and as cpd thokathoka), and thokarp
thokarp, thokathokarp, adv., just a little; a little each
time; little by little; gradually; Vin III 64,5 (bhikkhu
sappikumbhirp passitva -arp -arp paribhuñji); M 1 245,18
(yannüna:harp -arp -arp ahararp ahareyyarp); Dhp 121
(balo pürati papassa -arp -arp pi acinarp, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee thokathokarp pi); 239 (-arp -arp kha!)e kha!)e, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee thokathokarp); Ja 11 21,2o (mahantarp pi balarp
yujjhamanarp -arp -arp osakkati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
thokathokarp); VI 24,2o foll. (-arp pa!)!).arp tassa hatthe
!hapesi sesitthlnarp pi -arp -arp adasi); Mil 9,26 (-arp
-arp buddhavacanarp kathetva gacchati); Vism 262,2
(-arp -arp paggharantarp, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
thokathokarp); Sp 385,16 (-arp -arp pi paribhuñjato);
1273,2 (evarp -arp -arp papeturp pi vattati, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce thokathokarp); Mp I 327,3 (gehe gehe -arp -arp
adarpsu); Pj 11 18,3 (-arp -arp visosayitva, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee thokathokarp); Pv-a 168,24 (so tesarp -arp -arp
marpsarp deti); Bv-a 150,2 (khlre thokathoke ta!)<;lu1e
pakkhipitva); - 0 -tara, mfn., campar., smaller; less;
fewer; Vin I 129,31 (aññe avasika bhikkhü agacchanti
-a); III 233,1 (-arp adiyitva); JaiV 108,9* (-ena esi);
Sp 1076,26 (-ehi); 0
-thoka, see above;
0
-thokaka, n., justa little; a little each time; Mhv 22:75
(gahetva -arp); - atithoka, mfn. or n., (being) a very
small amount, too little; M 11 138,13 (so pattodakarp
patiga!)hati natithokarp natibahurp).
thokaka, mfi-ika)n. [thoka + ka2], small; few; Dhp 310
(bhltassa bhltaya rati ca thokika); Ap 439,1 (tath' eva me
katarp kmnmarp parittmn -arp ca yarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr thokakañcanarp); Ps III 164,6 (sabba ta saiikhatiyo
rattirp yeva honti diva pana appa paritta thokika hontl ti).
thocati,pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup stocate, Wg § 6:15], is bright;
Sadd 338,10 (thuca pasade: -ati).
thoma, m. [S. stoma], praise; Dhatum 167 (pa!)a
voharathomesu); - thomarp in Ee at Bv 6:11 is prob.
wr; Be, Ce, Se yathathamarp).
thomana, n., -a, f. [from thometi], praise; praising;
Abh 119 (thuti -arp); Ja 1 220,1o· (pasarpsarp VaJ)!).anarp
-arp labhanti); V 436,3o· (mahasaddavasena va
thomanavasena va uccarp [bhasati]); Nidd I 384,19
(pasarpsaya -ena kittiya); Ap 114,6 (-aya idarp pha1arp,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -assa) f. 159,6 (eds so); Mi1262,1~
(kittirp labheyya -arp pasarpsarp); Sadd 475,28 (thuti ti
-a).
thometi, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup stomayati,
thometi
Wg § 35:69], praises, extols; Dhatup 604 (thoma
silaghay~); Dhatum 844; Vin III 129,7 (-eti vaJ)J)eti
pas~sati); DI 240,8 (tevijja brahma1,1a . . . yato ca
candimasuriya uggacchanti yattha ca ogacchanti
ayacanti -ayanti pañjalika namassamana anuparivattantl
ti): S IV 312,18 (ayaceyya -eyya); Sv 228,16
labhikkantasaddena desan~ -eti); 833,32 (attano
sattharaq¡ yeva -eti ukk~sati); Spk II 65,21 (te puggale
-essami); Pj II 272,15 (attan~ va dayakaq¡ va -etuq¡ pi
narahati); Sadd 557,24 (thoma silaghayaq¡: ... -eti -ayati
thomito thomana); - part.pr. (a) thomenta, mfn., Ja V
214,17 (raja nam~ assa -ento); Vv-a 102,21;
lb) thomaya(t), mfn., Ps III 402,2o (taq¡ ... imina
pariyayena -ayata puna vuttaq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-ayato); (e) thomayanta, mfn., Sn 679; Bv 26:12;
id) thomayamana, mfn., Ja VI 503,36·; Spk I 114,16; -
aor. 3 sg. thomesi, Ps V 99,zo; Mhv 37:121;
-d-. a euphonic consonant, a 'sandhi consonant' (inserted
to avoid hiatus), esp. befare eva; sometimes l. 'restored'
1cf S.): se e eg koci-d-eva (sv ka\ tava-d-eva (svv tava,
tava[t]), yava-d-atthaq¡, yava-d-eva (svv yava, yava[t]);
- or 2. replacing (a different S. consonant): see eg
ahu-d-eva (sv bhavati), puna-d-eva (sv puna(r),
bahu-d-eva (sv bahu), sa-d-attha (sv sa\ samma-d-añña,
samma-d-eva (sv samma2); - or 3. inserted: see eg
ajja-d-agge, raja-d-isi (sv raja[n]); see also
Sadd 618,21 foil.
da 1• m. [ts], the sound 'd'; the consonant 'd'; Sadd 604,20
cta tha da dha na); 606,1; 622,24 (do jassa: pasenadi);-
=-kara, m., the letter or sound 'd'; Sp 129,26 (etad avoca
ti ... -o padasandhikaro); 1400,27 (-o takaraq¡ apajjati);
Sv 66,33 (tatho aviparito agado assa ti -assa takar~
katva tathagato ti); PsI 226,31 (keci dhakarassa -ena
atthaq¡ va1,11,1enti); It-a I 106,15 (kucchit~ va sidati ...
kusito -assa takaraq¡ katva); Th-a II 223,18 (bhaddaq¡
ante etassa ti bhadante ... ekassa -assa 1opaq¡ katva).
da 2 • n. [S. lex. id.], a wife; Sadd 767,10 (sundaraq¡ -aq¡
yassa so 'y~ sudo, ka1ya1,1abhariyo ti attho, kucchitaq¡
garahit~ -~ assa ti kudo ); - se e also dampati.
da 3 . mfn. ffrom dadati; ts], giving;- ifc see anna-, ambu-,
ambho- (sv ambha[s]), ayu-, aloka-, kama-, cakkhu-,
jala-, phala-, bala-, va1,11,1a-, vara- (sv vara\ sukha-.
daipSati, pr. 3 sg., see sv <;!aq¡sati.
daipSana 1, n.m., see sv <;!~sana.
daipSana 2 , m., see sv dasana.
daipSiyittha, pass. aor. 3 sg. of <;!~sati qv.
daipSeti\ -ayati\ caus. pr. 3 sg. of<;laq¡sati qv.
daipSeti2 , -ayati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup d~sayati,
d~sati, Wg § 33:91], speaks; shines; Sadd 567,13
1 tusi ... dasi bhasayaq¡: tuq¡seti ... -eti -ayati).
daipSet¡3, -ayate, pr. 3 sg. [caus. of .Jdis2 qv;
361 da ka
1 sg. thomiss~, Ap-a476,3ofoll. (-issaq¡ 1okanayakan
ti sakalalokattay~ nayant~ nibbanaq¡ papent~
-issaq¡ thutiq¡ akasin ti attho, Ce so; Be, Se santhaviq¡
lokanayakan ti... thomitaq¡ thutiq¡ akasin ti; Ee
thomit~ lokanayakan ti ... thomit~ thutiq¡ akasin ti;
ad Ap 255,12: Ce, Ee thavissaq¡; Be, Se santhavi); -
absol.(a) thometva, Jai 387,15 (raja bodhisattaq¡
V31,1I,letva -etva); Ap 324.7; Vv-a 158,8 (anekehi
thutisahassehi bhagavantaq¡ -etva); (b) thomayitva,
Bv6:11;- pass. part.pr.thomiyamana,mfn., Spkll
286,24 (dasasahassacakkava)adevatahi -iyamanassa) =
Mp III 70,s; pp thomita, mfn. (and n. ?)
[BHS stomita], praised; (praise; ?) S II 277,2 (-o va1,11,1ito
pasanJw); Ja I 9,22; Ap 87,26; Mi1212,zo; Sp 896,28;
Nidd-a 1 422,3 (--tta); Ap-a 476,31 (-~ thutiq¡ akasin ti,
Be, Ee, Se so; or read thomi t~ ? Ce thomiss~);
Sadd 557,25;- fpp thometabba, mfn., Mp IV 198,7.
S. darsayati], causes to see or be seen; shows;
Sadd 566,22foll. (daq¡sa d~sane ... dasi das sane ca:
cakaro daq¡san~ apekkhati, -eti -ayati, vid~seti
vid~sayati suriyo alokaq¡); - see also upad~seti,
pavid~seti, vid~seti.
daiphati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dflTlhati, S. Dhatup darhati,
Wg § 17:84], grows; Sadd 457,22 (dahi bahi vuddhiy~:
da<q¡>hati ba<q¡>hati, E e so; Be dahati bahati).
daka, n. [= udaka; cf S., BHS daka], water; Abh 661
(-aq¡); V in III 55,37* (in uddana: duve -a); 112,22 (dasa
sukkani nil~ .. . takkaV31,11,1aq¡ o -va1,11,1~
telaV31,11,1~ ... ); S III 85,4 (-~ dakasaya pavisanti) =
A II 33,9 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se udak~ udakasaya); Ja I
472,14' ( -assa majjhe jalate ghatasano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
udakassa; 472,18·: -assa ti udakassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
udakassa ti ja1assa); III 54,14* (ambapakkaq¡ -aq¡ sit~,
Be so; Ce, Ee ambapakkodakaq¡; Se ambapakkudak~)
quoted Sadd 237,15; Ja IV 478,23' (nav~ puriso -amhi
ereti); Ap 273,24; Sadd 648,17 (udake -an ti kan ti ca);-
o•-asaya, mfn. and m., l. (mfn. and m.f) (a creature)
living in water; S III 85,4 (dak~ -a pavisanti; Spk II
285,14: udakavasino macchakacchapadayo); Nidd I 14,14
(-a piil,la);- 2. (m.) a lake or pond; Cp 2:5:2 (pabbhare
giridugge ca rukkhamüle -e; Cp-a 140,23: -e ti
ja1asayasamipe); - 0
-ja, mfn. [daka + ja2], produced or
growing in water, aquatic; Bv 2:86 (thalaja -a puppha,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se jalaja) = Ja I 18,3* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
jalaja) quoted Sadd 237,15; - 0
-rakkha, n.m., "water-
guarding", a water-demon; Ja VI 469,24' (muñcesi -ato,
Ee, Se so; Be -aso; Ce -rakkhino);- -rakkhasa, m., a
0 0
water goblin; Ja I 170,12 (tassa pi pokkhara1,1iya eko -o
otii,li,lOtii,li,le khadati); Dhp-a III 74,18 (so pana saro ...
ekena -ena laddho hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee udaka-
rakkhasena); - 0
-rakkhi(n), m., "water-guarding", a
daketi
water-demon; Ja VI 470,24* (matara111 kena dosena
dajjasi -ino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dakarakkhato, prob. wr;
472,16': 0 -rakkhasassa dassasl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-rakkhassa); - 0 -sati,f, a bathing-cloth; Vin-vn 2223;
-
0
-Sitala, n., the water-lily; Nidd-a I 377,4 (umma-
pupphasamanan ti --pupphasadisaJ11); - 0 -Sitalika, n.,
the white water-lily; Abh 689 (sogandhika111 kallaharaJ11
-aJ11); Vis m 258,14 (antagul).an ti .. . val).l).ato setaJ11
--mülaval).l).aJ11) t Pj I 57,12.
daketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [ef S. Dhatup, Wg § 33:63: raka
laga/laka asvadane], tastes; Sadd 522,11 (daka laka
assadane: -eti -ayati, Be, Ee so; read raka ... raketi
rakayati ?).
dakkha\ mfn. [S. dak~a], able, adroit, dexterous; clever,
skilled; Abh 721; Vin III 135,9 (kumarika abhirupa ...
pal).<;lita vyatta medhavinl -a analasa; Sp 552,27: -a ti
cheka); DI 74,1 (-o nahapako va nahapakantevasl va);
MI 125,s (dasi ... -a ana1asa susa111vihitakammanta);
A II 27,27 (yo hi tattha -o analaso sampajano patissato
ayaJ11 vuccati bhikkhave bhikkhu poriil).e aggaññe
ariyava111se ~hito); Th 740 (so atthava so dhammanho so
-o so vicakkhal).o); Ja VI 246,1• (-aJ11 ca posa111 manuja
viditva; 246,11 ·: -an ti dhanuppadanakusalaJ11); Sp 900,14
(-a ti cheka avirajjhitva sighaJ11 kattabbakaril).l ti attho );
993,27 (kiccesu 0 -ta); Dhp-a I 419,2o (bahilsu pana
pupphesu santesu cheko malakaro -o kusalo bahil
malagul).e karoti); Ap-a 235,14 (opammakusalo upama-
upameyyesu -o); Sadd 331,31 (dakkhati kusalakamme
aññasmiJ11 ca kiccakicce adandhataya sighaJ11 gacchati ti
-o cheko yo kusalo pi vuccati);- ife see rüpa-.
dakkha , n. [S. dak~ya], dexterity, ability, skill; Ja III
2
466,13* (-aJ11 gahapata111 sadhu, Se so; Ce, Ee dukkhaJ11;
Be -a111 gahapati; 466,15' foil.: gharavasaJ11 vasantanaJ11
gahapatinaJ11 bhoguppadanatthaya ana1asyachekakusala-
bhavasaii.khataJ11 -aJ11 nama sadhu dakkhabhavo
bhaddako, Be so; Ce, Se dukkhaJ11 . . . dakkhabhavo
laddhako; Ee dukkhaJ11 nama sadhu dakkhabhavo
la!!hako);- see also dakkhiya, dakkheyya.
4
dakkha , m. rJrom dakkhati ; efS. darsa, drk~a],
3
appearanee; sight; - ife see duddakkha.
2 dakkhi, aor. 3 sg. of~dis 2 qv.
dakkhaka, m(jn). rJrom dakkhati ], (one) who hurts, who
goes;? Sadd 332,19 (dakkhahi111sagatisu: dakkhati -o).
dakkhati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dak~ate, Wg § 16:7],
l. inereases; 2. aets quiekly; Sadd 331,27 (dakkha
vuddhiyaJ11 sighatte ca: -ati dakkhil).a dakkho); 331,3o
( -ati .. . sigha111 gacchati ti dakkho ); 877,14 (-anti
va<;l<;lhanti satta etaya ti dakkhil).a).
dakkhati , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dak~ate, Wg § 19:8],
2
l. hurts; 2. goes; Sadd 332,19 (dakkha hi111sagatisu: -ati
dakkhako).
1 2
dakkhati , dakkhiti ,fut. 3 sg. of~dis qv.
3
4 2, pr. 3 sg. rJrom dakkhati3, interpreted
dakkhati , dakkhiti
as pr.], sees; Ja IV 462,s• ( -emu te naga nivesanani;
462,12': passeyyama te nivesanani); VI 312,13* (mayaJ11
pi nagadhipativimiinaJ11 -emu nagassa adi~~hapubbaJ11,
Ce so; Ee aha111 pi; Se ahaJ11 pi ... -emi; Be mayaJ11 ca
nagadhipati111 vJmanaJ11... -emu; 312,16': ahaJ11
pi ... passeyyaJ11, Be so; Ce, E e, Se omit ahaJ11 pi); Nidd I
105,4 (ime dve anisa111se passati -ati oloketi nijjhayati
upaparikkhati ti); 302,9 (kaJ11 passeyya kaJ11 -eyya);
362 dakkhil}a
Kv 565,25 (savaka buddhassa bhagavato adit!haJ11 -anti
anadhigata111 adhigacchanti asacchikataJ11 sacchikaronti
ti, Be, Se so; Ee -inti); Sp 164,6 (satte passami -ami
olokemi); Ap-a 112,15 (maJ11 passantu -antil ti attho, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee passanti -inti ti attho; ad Ap 5,23: eds
passantu ); Sadd 444,6 foil. (passati -ati .. . -a tu ... );
827,11 (pekkhane disassa passadakkha: ... n1paJ11 passati
-ati);- fut. 3 sg. dakkhissati, Vin I 179,16 (nisinnassa te
raja pade -issatt ti); D II 26,11 (na dani taJ11 -anti mata
va pita va ... so pi na -issati mataraJ11 va pitaraJ11 va ... '
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -inti ... -issati); 1 sg. (a) dakkhissaJ11
(dakkhisaJ11), Thi 84 (tato sakaya paññaya abhinibbijja
-isaJ11, me?, Th!-a 85,15: -isaJ11 passissan ti; or aor. of
~dis2 ; = Ap 576,s: Be, Ce, Ee -asi; Se vacchasi); Ja IV
395,21* (ajj' ev' ahaJ11 assama111 taJ11 gamissa111 yatth' eva
-issam isi111 nisinnaJ11); (b) dakkhissami, Dhp-a III 20,14;
3 pl. dakkhissanti, Vism 444,33; Sv 128,9 (na naJ11 -antl
ti taJ11 tathagata111 deva va manussa va na -issanti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee na taJ11 -inti ti); 1 pl. dakkhissama
(dakkhisama), Ja III 99,7* (kathaJ11 nu sakhamigaJ11
-isama, Be, Ce, Ee so, me?; Se -ama; 99,9·: -isama ti
-issama, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ama ti); Ap 156,9
(gamissama -issama tathagataJ11); part.pr.
(a) dakkhanta, mfn., Nidd I 308,6 (passanto -anto
olokento); Kv 216,31; (b) dakkhamana, mfn., Nidd II
211,26; Nidd-a I 79,2s;- inf (a) dakkhitaye, D II 254,7*
(agaf amha ima111 dhammasamayaJ11 -itaye
aparajitasaii.ghaJ11; Sv 680,23: dassanatthaya agatamha ti
attho) = SI 26,25*; Sadd 444,14 (tumatthe ca -itaye ti
n1paJ11); (b)dakkhituJ11, Vinl 179,13 (-itukamo);
Vism 326,21 (n' eva na111 -itukamo hoti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr dukkhitukamo); Sv 141,11 (-itu111 yutta ti
dassaniya, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se dassituJ11); As 338,7; -
absol. dakkhiya, Thi 381 (tava me nayanani -iya bhiyyo
kamarati pava<;l<;lhati; Thi-a 237,29: nayanani disva); -
fpp dakkhitabba, mfn., Nidd I 366,3 (adighaJ11 -itabbaJ11);
- caus. imperat. 3 sg. dakkhapetu, Pj II 576,29 (amhe pi
-apetu ca savetu ca ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -apetu111 ca);
- pp dakkhapita, mfn., Mil 119,3 (bodhisattana111 bhante
Nagasena parakkamo -apito ).
4
dakkhi(n), mfn. rJrom dakkhati ], seeing; - !fe see
atiradakkhi(n).
dakkhiQa, mfn. and m. [S. dak~il).a] (efSadd 271,4•: -o
e' uttaro paro sabbanamesu gayhanti asabbanamikesu
pi), l. (i) (mfn.) right (not left); (m.) the right hand;
Abh 986 (vamato 'ññamhi -o); M II 137,13 (gacchanto
kho pana so bhavaJ11 Gotamo -en' eva padena
pa~hama111 pakkamati); S III I08,21 (dakkhissasi
dvidhapathaJ11, tattha vamaJ11 muñcitva -a111 gal).hahi);
A III 240,23 (pacchime samudde -o hattho ohito ahosi);
Pvl8:l (cakkhuJ11 va -aJ11); Jai 64,3o (-ena hatthena
asi111 gal).hitva vamahatthena mo!iya saddhiJ11 cil!aJ11
gahetva chindi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -hatthena); IV 372,9*
(vamena bhikkham adaya -ena kamal).<;la1uJ11); Ap 320,9
(paggayha -aJ11 bahuJ11); Mi1127,14 (-ena
hatthaii.gunhena); Sp 565,13 (yaJ11 maggaJ11 pa~ipanna ta111
pahaya nivattitva vama111 va -a111 va gahetva gacchanti);
Mp II 121,20 (-e aJ11sakil~e matara111 vame pitara111
~hapetva); Dhp-a I 248,22 (sattha . . . gandhaku~iJ11
dakkhiQa
pavisitva -ena passena sihaseyya¡p upagato); Mhv 17:14
(dathadhatu ca -a); - (ii) (mfn.) south, southem; Vin I
48,38 (sace -a saraja vata vayanti -a vatapana
thaketabba); 184,31 (-aya ce pi disaya); 344,21 foil. (-ena
dvarena nikkhametva -ato nagarassa catudha
chinditva ... ); DI 52,3o (-a¡p ce pi gaiJ.gatlra¡p
agaccheyya); 96,5 (-a¡p janapada¡p gantva); III 191,29'
(acariya -a disa); M III 169,12 (-o vato uttarena [yuga¡p]
saq¡hareyya); A III 240,24 (-e samudde ubho pada ohita
ahesu¡p); Ja IV 163,8• (-aya¡p disaya¡p, Be, Ee so; Ce,
Se -assaq¡); 163,22' (sace aya¡p -o saccam aha mogha¡p
patikkosati uttarayam); Ap 240,14 (-amhi duvaramhi
pisaco as' aha¡p tada);- dakkhii_1ato, adv., to the south
(oj); to the right; from the south; D JI 160,4 (-ato
nagarassa bhagavato sarirarp jhapessama ti); S II 128,8
(-ato nagarassa sisa¡p chindatha ti); IV 189,12 (uttarato
pi kal).tako -ato pi kal).tako); Ja I 64,32 (kesa
dvaiJ.gu1amatta hutva -ato avattamana sisa¡p alllyi¡psu);
71,31 (sa Marasena Marassa ... -ato ca vamato ca
dvadasa yojanani); IV 428,4• (chaya -ato-r-iva; 428,1T:
dakkhil).adisabhimukhi chaya na va<;l<;lhati); PsI 240,s
(-ato agacchanta); Dhp-a I 72,1 (buddhana¡p hi
majjhimatthane asana¡p paññapetva tassa -ato
Sariputtattherassa vamato Mahamogga11anattherassa ca);
Mhv 15:27 (tassa -ato thito); 33:88 (karayi nagaramha
-ato vihara¡p dakkhil_lav haya¡p);- dakkhil).ena, adv., on
the south or right side; to the south; DI 142,18 (-ena
yaññavatassa); II 146,28 (rajadhani ... uttarena ca -ena ca
satta yojanani vittharena); III 9,23 (-ena Vesa1i¡p
Gotamakarp nama cetiya¡p); M III 169,12 (uttaro vato
-ena [yuga¡p] saqJ.hareyya); Vism 127,2o (gocaragamo
pana yo senasanato uttarena va -ena va ... so sappayo);
392,7 (pacchimena pi uttarena pi -ena pi sabba¡p
vivata¡p addasa); Ud-a 300,32 (candimasuriya -ena va
uttarena va gacchanta); - dakkhil).e, on the right or
south (of); Ap 421,25 (-e himavantassa sukato assamo
mama);- 2. (mfn.) able, skiiled; right, straightforward,
pleasing; Ja V 446,w• (na -a pamada sevitabba; 447,23':
naccagitakusala); VI 512,19' ( 0 ' -assa vahanti ma¡p;
512,20': susikkhitassa; Sadd 272,5: ettha viya
susikkhitatthacaturatthavacako 0 -saddo ); Spk III 41,8
(kiñci vamato aggahetva sabba¡p -ato va gal).han ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee padakkhil).ato); Vv-a 135,11 (padakkhil).a ti
pakarehi visesena va -a kusa1a); Ap-a 263,24 (tumhe va
-a nama tumhaka¡p 0 -maggo vattati maya¡p matugama
nama vamajatika amhaka¡p vamamaggo vattatl ti) =
Spk JI 196,8 (eds tumhe 0 -jatika nama); Vibh-a 10,5 (eko
e' ete ittha kanta manapa ti -ato gal).hati eko anittha
akanta amanapa ti vamato gal).hati); - 0 ' -aggi, m., the
southem jire of the altar; Abh 419 (gahapaccahavaniyo
-i); - o• -a yana, n., (the period of) the progress of the
sun to the south (ofthe equator); Abh 80;- 0 '-avafta,
o• -avatta, mfn. [dakkhil).a + avatta 1] tuming, winding to
the ríght; Ja I 68,23 (bubbu!a utthahitva -a hutva
sañcaranti); Sv 259,26 (til).agumba1ata -a pacinamukha);
Spk II 283,21; Mhv 11:22 (sailkha¡p ca -arp); -
o• -avattaka, o -avattaka, mfn., windíng to the ríght; D II
18,6 (lomani ... kul).<;ia1avattani --jatani, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se dakkhil).avatta-) f. III 144,4 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
padakkhil).avattaka-) f. M II 136,23 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
363 dakkhiQap atha
padakkhil_lavanaka-); - o -pacchimad isa,f, the south-
west quarter or directíon; Ud-a 238,9;
0
-puratthima, mfn., south-eastem; Pj I 132,28 (-aya
disaya); - see also dakkhil).apatha, dakkhil).apathaka,
dakkhil).amukha.
dakkhiqa, f [S. dak~il).a], a gift, a donatíon; a fee; the
benefít or merít of a gift; Abh 986 (-a danabhede); V in I
229,37' (silavantettha bhojetva saññate brahmacariye ya
tattha devata asu¡p tasa¡p -am adise); DI 51,17
(samal_labrahmal_lesu uddhaggika¡p -a¡p patitthapenti
sovaggika¡p sukhavipaka¡p saggasa¡pvattanika¡p);
III 231,26 (atth' avuso -a dayakato visujjhati no
patiggahakato); M III 255,15 (tiracchanagate danarp
datva satagul).a -a patikailkhitabba; cfPs V 71,25: aya¡p
-a ayusata¡p Val_ll).asata¡p sukhasata¡p balasata¡p
patibhanasatan ti pañca anisa¡psasatani deti); 255,28
(satta ... saiJ.ghagata -a); SI 18,28' (appasma -a dinna
sahassena sama¡p mita) = Ja IV 65,22' (65,25': -a ti
kamma¡p ca pha1a¡p ca saddahitva dinna¡p dana¡p); SI
19,25' (sa -a assumukha sadal).<;ia); A III 43,25' (petana¡p
-a¡p anuppadassati; Mp III 251,13 foil.: pattidiinaqJ. katva
tatiyadivasato patthaya dana¡p anuppadassati); 336,13
(katha¡p ca bhikkhave cha!ailgasamannagata -a hoti);
Sn 482 (yo -aqJ. bhuñjeyya madisassa); Pv 5:9 (petanarp
-a¡p dajja); 10:5 (eta¡p acchadayitvana mama -am adisa;
Pv-a 49,21: ta¡p -a¡p mayha¡p adisa pattidana¡p dehi);
36:51 (yakkhass' ima gacchantu -ayo); Ja I 228,12'
(n' atthi citte pasannamhi appika nama -a); II 425,26'
(macchana¡p bhojana¡p datva mama -am adisi; 426,r:
imasmi¡p thane pattidana¡p -a nama); IV 361,18' (-aq¡
samma dassama yattha dinna¡p mahapphala¡p);
Kv 549,zo (na vattabba¡p saiJ.gho -a¡p patigal_lhati ti);
Mil 257,2o (uttari¡p -a¡p visodheti); Vism 220,22 (-a ti
pana paraloka¡p saddahitva databbadana¡p vuccati);
Pv-a 46,5 (devaputto tassa bhikkhuno pal).ita¡p
annapana¡p datva ta¡p -a¡p tassa petiya adisi); 80,26
(yatha dinna¡p -a¡p mayha¡p upakappati tatha uddissa
pattidiinaqJ. dehi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mayha¡p uddissa
patidana¡p dehi); Th-a II 241,23 (Jivakena upanitaqJ.
khajjadibheda¡p -a¡p patiggahesi); Sadd 877,12foll.
(dadhatuto kkhil).apaccayo hoti: databba -a ...
dakkhadhatuto il).apaccayo hoti: dakkhanti va<;l<;lhanti
satta etaya ti -a); - ifc see garu- (sv gam2 ), gum-; -
0
0daka, n., water poured on the hands ofthe recípient of
a gift; Ja III 20,25 (raja . . . -aqJ. datva yagukhajjaka¡p
ahari); IV 370,22 (-a¡p datva patte bhatta¡p pakkhipi);
Sv 133,22 (-a¡p patetva vihara¡p niyyatesi, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -a¡p papetva); Vv-a 221,2 (buddhapamukhassa
bhikkhusailghassa mahadana¡p datva tathagatassa hatthe
-a¡p patetva niyyadesi); Mhv 15:25 (Mahindatherassa
kare -a¡p akiri); 26:18 (so -a¡p patetva bhikkhu-
sailghassa vihara¡p sumano ada); - sudakkhiqi i,f, a
good gift; Ap-a 204,16 (lokasudakkhil).eyya ti ekantena
1okassa -aya aggadanassa patiggahetu¡p araha yutta).
dakkhiqapatha, m. [S. dak~il).apatha], the southem
region, the Deccan; Sn 976 (Kosalana¡p pura ramma
agama -aqJ.); Ja V 133,24 (-e Avantiratthe
ghanaselapabbato nama atthi); Vism 482,9 (-o gunna¡p
ayatanan ti); Dhp-a IV 101,14 (appabhikkhukatta -e, Be,
Ce so; Se -assa; Ee dakkhil).apathassa); Pv-a 133,14
dakkhil}apathaka
(Ailkuro -al]1 gantva Dami)avisaye samuddassa
avidiiratthane mahatiyo danasalayo kiirapetva).
dakkhiJ1apathaka, mfn. [Jrom dakkhigapatha], belonging
to the southem region; from the Deccan; V in II 17,12 (-a
vagija puratthimaiJ1 janapadaiJ1 agamaiJ1SU viil).ijjaya).
dakkhiJ1iimukha, mfn. [S. dak~igiimukha], facing the
south; Ja VI 84,31 * (pakkiimi -o); Ap 36,22.
dakkhiJ1eyya, mfn. [cf S. dak~igiya, dak~igya], one worthy
of a dakkhigii, of a gift; Abh 726 (daniiraho -o); D 11
94,4 (esa bhagavato savakasailgho ahuneyyo pahuneyyo
-o añjalikarai).Iyo anuttarai]l puññakkhettai]l lokassa ti);
III 253,27 (satta puggala -a); SI 141,22* (naranal]1
deviinal]1 ca -o); 168,16* (kalena so juhati -e, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -o, prob. wr; Spk I 235,13: so -e juhati nama na
acetane aggimhi pakkhipanto); Pv 21:67 (ki1]1 mayha1]1
tena danena -ena suññatai]l; Pv-a 139,9: yal]1 -ena
suññatal]1 rittakai]l virahital]1 tada mama dana1]1); Th 296
(araha -o 'mhi tevijjo amataddaso); Jaiii 234,11'
(acariya pana --tta . . . dakkhiga disa ti) t Sv 952,21
(--taya); Jalll 472,19* (ye -a idhaj!valoke etesu dinnani
mahapphalani; 473,26·: -a ti dakkhigaya anucchavika
buddhiidayo); Cp 1:7:3 (na pi bhuñjiimi bhojanal]1 -e
adatvana); Mil 242,4 (n' atthi ... koci satto tathagatato -o
va uttaro va adhiko va visiqho va); Vism 220,24
(dakkhiga ti pana paralokai]l saddahitva databbadiinal]1
vuccati, tal]1 dakkhigal]1 arahati dakkhigaya va hito
y asma nal]1 mahapphalakaral).ataya visodheU ti -o);
Sv 996,3o (dakkhiga ti cattiiro paccaya bhikkkhusailgho
-o); Mp 11 358,12 (-o ti dasavidhadanavatthupariccaga-
vasena saddhadanasailkhataya dakkhigaya anucchaviko );
Bv-a 94,12 (daniinal]1 patiggahetu1]1 arahatta --tta
ahuUnai]l patiggaho); - 0
'-aggi, m. [cfdakkhigaggi
sv dakkhiga, S. dak~igagni ], the Jire that is one worthy of
gifts; D III 217,21 (apare pi tayo aggi ahuneyyaggi
gahapataggi -i); A IV 45,17 (ye te samagabrahmaga
madappamada pativirata ... ayai]l vuccati brahmaga -i);
Th 343 (juhami -il]1 namassiimi tathagatal]1; Th-a 11
144,24foll. : ahavan!yadike aggi chaggetva sadevakassa
lokassa aggadakkhigeyyataya sabbassa ca papassa
dahanato -i1]1 sammasambuddhaiJ1 juhami paricarami ...
atha va . . . dayakanal]1 dakkhigaya mahapphalabhava-
karagena papassa ca dahanena --bhiital]1 attiinal]1 juhami
paricariimi ... pub be aggideval]1 namassiimi idani pana
namassami tathagatan ti); - adakkhiJ1eyya, mfn., not
worthy of gifts; Ja IV 380,4* (ko re tuval]1 hosi -o);
Mil 240,21 (--taya).
2
dakkhiJ1eyyaka, mfn. [dakkhigeyya + ka ], worthy of
gifts; Cp-a 331,6 (bodhisatto . . . -o garu bhavan!yo
paramal]1 ca puññakkhettai]l hoti).
-dakkhita in Ee, Se at Ja V 138,24* (ciradakkhitiina1]1) is
wr for -dikkhita (Be, Ce so).
2 176,21* (-assa anubhavena khalitva patitiqhati); IV 62,3
dakkhiti\fi.tt. 3 sg. ofv'dis qv.
4
dakkhiti2 , see sv dakkhati .
dakkhiya, n. [S. diik~ya], ability, skill; Ja I 282,17* (-ai]l
siiriyai]l panna; 282,18": -an ti dakkhabhavo);
Sadd 785,14 (dakkhassa bhavo -am); see
also dakkha2, dakkheyya. . Thi-a 117,29: -an ti gogasunakhadiparihara~Jadaggaka1]1);
4
dakkhisaip, fi.tt. 1 sg. of dakkhati qv, or aor. 1 sg. of
2
v'dis qv.
dakkhuip, aor. 3 pl. ofv'dis 2 qv.
364
dakkheyya, n. [cf S. diik~ya], ability, skill; Ja 11 236,27*
(dakkheyyekapadai]l tata anekatthapadanissital]1; 23 7, 1·:
dakkheyyekapadan ti -al]1 ekapada1]1, -ai]l nama
labhuppadakassa chekassa kusalassa ñagasampayuttal]1
viriya1]1, so read with Be, Ce, Se); 111 468,s• (468,15': -an
ti nanappakarena bhoguppiidanakosalla1]1); - see also
dakkhi, dakkhiya.
dankhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup drank~ati, Wg § 17:19],
utters a discordant cry; desires; Sadd 330,13 (dakhi
dhakhi ghoravasite kailkhayal]1 ca: -ati dhailkhati).
daija, mfn.,fpp ofdeti qv.
daija\ dajja2, opt. 3 sg., 2 sg. of deti qv.
daija3 , absol. of deti qv.
daijati (and dajjeti ?), pr. 3 sg., see sv deti.
daijuip, opt. 3 pl. of deti qv.
dattha\ mfn. and n., pp ofga1]1sati qv.
1
dattha , m., or dattha ,f [cf S. daiJ1~tra, daiJ1~tra], a large
2
tooth, a fang; - 0
(a)-visa, mfn. and m. [or rather to
daqha 1 ?], (a snake) with venom in its fangs; Ap 47,18
(as!viso -o eval]1 jhapeti tai]l nara1]1, Ee so; Be, Ce
dighaviso; Se duqhaviso; cf Ap-a 292,34: as!viso
daqhamattena bhasmakaragato -o sappo attana dagha1]1
naral]1 jhapeti, E e so; Be, Ce, Se ditthamattena ...
dighaviso ... ); Mi1150,8 (puriso -ena as!visen a daqho
bhaveyya, Be, Ce. Ee so; Se dughavisena); Spk 111 7,1
(kaqhamukho hi -o ditthaviso phuqhaviso vataviso ti
catubbidho hoti); Mp III 103,9 (ahirajakulani ti idal]1
-an' eva sandhaya vutta1]1, ye hi keci -a ... );- see also
datha.
dattha(r), m. [S. dra~tf], one who sees; A 11 25,14
(tathagato daqha daqhabbal]1 ditthaiJ1 na maññati ...
daghiira1]1 na maññati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se diqhanal]1;
Mp 11140,1: passitiirai]l ... na maññaU ti).
2
datthabba, mfn.,fpp ofv'dis qv.
2
datthayya, mfn.,fpp ofv'dis qv.
dattha\ f., see sv dattha2 .
2
daiihii , ind., absol. ~Jv'dis qv.
2
2
datthu, ind., absol. ofv'dis qv.
2
datthuip, inf ofv'dis qv.
2
dattheyya, mfn.,fpp ofv'dis qv.
dathavudha in E e at Cp 2:10:1 is wr for dathavudha qv
sv datha.
da¡J¡Jha, mfn., pp of9ahati qv.
daJ1!Ja, m.n. [ts], l. a piece of wood; a club; a stick, a
staff, a rod; an asee tic' s staff; Abh 1044 (-o tu
muggare); V in 11 131,29 (aññataro bhikkhu gilano hoti na
sakkoti vina -ena ahiggitu1]1); M 1 86,24 (aññamañña1]1
piii).Ihi pi upakkamanti leggiihi pi upakkamanti -ehi pi
upakkamanti satthehi pi upakkamanti); 134,18 (ajapadena
-ena); 11 104,6 (-o khitto ayasmato Aii.gulimiilassa kaye
nipatati); 155,8 (jatariipamayai]l -ai]l gahetva); S 1
(manussa -ena paharal]1 dassanti); Dhp 135 (yatha -ena
gopiilo gavo paceti gocaraiJ1); Pv 36:48 (andhassa -ai]l
sayam iidiyasi); Th! 17 (-am olubbha dubbala); 123
(pattal]1 -al]1 ca gaghitva bhikkhamana kula kulaiJ1;
Ja II 415,6· (-o ti iirakkhayaqhi1]1 sandhaya vutta1]1):
V 232,9* (ki1]1 nu -al]1 kil]1 ajinai]l ki1]1 chattai]l ki1]1
upahanal]1 . . . taramanariipo gal).hasi); VI 569,14*
 365
(passama brahmal_la¡p. devavm.n.lina¡p. adaya beluva¡p.
-a¡p. dharenta¡p. ajinakkhipa¡p.); Spk III 65,21 (-ena ti
muggarasadisena thülada!)<;iakena); Pv-a 220,11
(nimbarukkhassa -ena katasüle); - ifc see alamba-,
alambana-, kañcanaka- (sv kañcanaka\ kattara-, ti-
(sv ti2), tuJa-, deva-;- 2. a stalk; a handle; Abh 686 (-o
tu nalam uccate); Ja I 313,7 (ta¡p. kuddalaka¡p. -e
gahetva); Ap 536,5 (Sineru¡p. -a¡p. katvana chatta¡p. katva
mahamahi¡p.); Sp 290,13 (suttakena va -o vethetabbo);
290,15 (vatappaharena acalanattha¡p. chattamai_l<;lalika¡p.
rajjukehi gahetva -e bandhanti); 311,8 (sace pana
kuddalassa -o n' atthi -a¡p. karissaml ti va si ¡p. va
pharasu¡p. va niseti); ifc see aravindaka-,
karavandaka-, khara- (sv khara\ - 3. the arm or neck
of a Vl!)a (see A.K. Coomaraswamy 1950b, pp. 247-48);
S IV 197,13 (do!)i¡p. ca paticca camma¡p. ca paticca -a¡p.
ca paticca ... evaya¡p. bhante vi!) a ... vadatl ti); Mil53,2o
(yatha maharaja Vl!)aya patta¡p. na siya camma¡p. na siya
do!)i na siya -o na si ya ... ); Sv 699,3o (tassa kira
soVai_l!)amaya¡p. pokkhara¡p. indanllamayo -o rajatamaya
tan ti yo ... ); - 4. power, violence; act of violence; M I
372,16 (tlni . . . Niga!)tho Nataputto -ani paññapeti
papassa kammassa kiriyaya . . . seyyathida¡p.
kayada!)<;ia¡p. vaclka!)<;la¡p. manodai_l<;lan ti); Dhp 129
(sabbe tasanti -assa); Sn 35 (sabbesu bhütesu nidhaya
-a¡p. avihethaya¡p. aññatara¡p. pi tesa¡p.; Pj II 63,25: -an ti
kayavaclmanodai_l<;la¡p., kayaduccaritadlna¡p. eta¡p.
adhivacana¡p.); 312 (eso adhammo -ana¡p.); Nidd I 402,6
(tayo -a kayada!)<;io vaclda!)<;io manodai_!<;Io; Nidd-a I
423,12: -a ti duccarita); - ifc see atta- (sv adiyati\
nihita- (sv nidahati 2); - 5. punishment (corporal or
fiscal); a fine; Abh 349 (-o tu sahasa¡p. damo); 1044
(-o . . . dame); Vin I 247,7 (yo bhagavato
paccuggamana¡p. na karissati pañca satani -o ti);
III 139,35 foll. (kehici -o thapito hoti yo itthannama¡p.
ittbi¡p. gacchati ettako -o ti); M II 88,10 (aya¡p. te deva
coro agucañ, imassa ya¡p. icchasi ta¡p. -a¡p. pal_lehl ti); A I
138,16 (aya¡p. deva puriso ... na kule jegbapacayl imassa
devo -a¡p. pal_letü ti); Dhp 31 O (raja ca -a¡p. garuka¡p.
pal_leti; Dhp-a III 482,25: raja ca hatthacchedanadivasena
garuka¡p. -a¡p. pa!)eti); Ja I 190,17 (yassa ghare ta¡p.
sunakha¡p. passanti tassa aya¡p. nama -o ti bheri¡p.
carapetha deva ti); II 121,4 (bodhisatto kodha¡p.
adhivasetu¡p. asakkonto eva¡p. tesa¡p. -a¡p. iil)apetva pi na
tatha karesi); IV 205,12' (imassa -a¡p. ca vadha¡p. ca
datva); VI 576,29* (nikki!)issami -ena, Ce, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Se dabbena; 577,s-: dhana¡p. katva
mocessami); Mil 171,19 (tassa maya¡p. kahapa!)a¡p. -a¡p.
dharema); 193,7 (koci puriso parassa pal_lina pahara¡p.
dadeyya tassa tumbe ki¡p. -a¡p. dharetha ti); 221,5 foil.
(ko bhante ummattakassa -o bhavissati ta¡p. maya¡p.
pothapetva nlharapema eso va tassa -o ti); Mp IV 12,1
(rajan o . . . pave!)ipotthaka¡p. vacapetva anucchavikam
eva -a¡p. pavattayanti); Dhp-a I 236,7 (raja chal_la¡p.
karontu akarontana¡p. ettako -o ti iil)apesi); II 71,22
(gavi¡p. marentassa sata¡p. -o purisa¡p. marentassa
sahassa¡p.); Vv-a 76,21 (Sirimaya dassanattha¡p.
anagacchantana¡p. atthakahapai_lo -o ti); Mhv 24:55 (raja
saiighassa dos' eso saiigho -a¡p. karissati); - ifc see
deva-, pa!)lta- (sv pa!)eti 2), brahma-, raja-;
dal)cJa
0
abhighiita, m., striking with sticks; Pv-a 58,9; -
'-adana, n. [da!)<;la + adana 1], taking up a stick,
0
vio lene e; D III 92,26 (-a¡p. paññayissati); Vibh 390,16
(-a¡p. satthadana¡p. kalaho viggaho ... , Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
as cpd; Ee wr daJ)<;Ihadana-);- 0 -kathina, n., an extra
frame (within the kathina framework); Vin II 116,18
(kathina¡p. na ppahoti, anujanami bhikkhave -a¡p.
vidalaka¡p. ... ; Sp 1206,13: -an ti tassa majjhe ... añña¡p.
nisse!)i¡p. bandhitu¡p. anujanami ti attho );
0
-kamma, n., a punishment; a penance; reparation;
Vin I 84,16 (ki¡p. nu kho -a¡p. katabban ti); II 262,6; Ja I
230,14 (tucchakotthake pürai_lena -a¡p. katva mahasetthi¡p.
khamapehl ti); III 276,19 (khamapetva ida¡p. me -an ti
sabbarütajananamanta¡p. datva); 490,7 (te tena -ena
pl!ita); Mil 8,9 foil.; Sp 952,22 (so attana va attana¡p.
codetva pattaputena valika¡p. aharitva imasmi¡p. thane
akiratu ida¡p. assa - an ti); P s IV 204,11 (yava satthara¡p.
na khamapetha tava vo idam eva -an ti); Dhp-a II 108,9
(vajja¡p. disva vajjanurüpa¡p. tajjento pa!)amento -a¡p.
karonto vihara nlharanto sikkhapeti); Mhv 5:101;
0
-kaJiravatpsarp in Ee at Th-a I 6,14 is prob. wr; Be
dantakaJlra¡p. va; Ce dantakaFrama¡p.sa¡p.; Se
kalirava¡p.sa¡p.; - 0 -gatika, mfn., depending on a stick,
walking with a stick; Sv 455,14; - 0 -dipika,f (and
0
-dlpaka, m. ?) [da!)<;ia + dipika1], a torch; Ja VI 398,31'
(-ahi); Vism 39,13 (devata -a¡p. gahetva aghasi);
Sv 552,7 (-ayo jaletva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -dipake) f.
Spk I 206,2 (Be -a; Ce, Ee -e; Se 0 -dipakani); II 394,23
(-ahi <;layhamana¡p. viya); Mpi 411,19 (sa dasihi -a
gahapetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se da!)<;laka-) f. Dhp-a I 399,21
(Be so; Ce 0 -padipake; Ee -e; Se 0 -dipake); Dhp-a I
220,16 (-ahi gehe aggi¡p. dadamano);- 0 -dhara, m(jn).,
(one) who administers justice; Ja III 441,24* (yo -o
bhavatldha issaro);- 0 -dharikaya in Ee at Sp 293,18 is
wr for da!)<;ladharake (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -niti,f, the
science of judicature; Abh 113 (da!)<;lanlty
atthasatthasmi¡p.); - 0
-ppatta, mjn. [da!)<;ia + patta4 or
patta6 ], liable to punishment; Mil46,21;
0
-parayana, mjn., dependent on a stick; D II 22,2
(addasa ... purisa¡p. ji!)!)a¡p. gopanasivaiika¡p. bhogga¡p.
-a¡p. pavedhamana¡p. gacchanta¡p.); Th 462 (yada ji!)!)a
bhavissama ubho -a); Mil282,7; Spk I 40,17
(jaraji!)!)ena ... -ena ... na sakka kame paribhuñjitu¡p.);
-
0
-parissavana, n., a kind of sieve or filter (made on a
wooden jramework); ? Vin II 119,14 (parissavana¡p. na
sammati ... anujanami bhikkhave -an ti; Sp 1207,w: -an
ti rajakana¡p. kharaparissavana¡p. viya catüsu padesu
baddhanisse!)ikaya sataka¡p. bandhitva majjhe da!)<;lake
udaka¡p. asiñcitabba¡p., ta¡p. ubho pi kotthase püretva
parissavati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se da!)<;lakaparissavanan ti);
-
0
-pliJ,Ii, mfn., with a staffin one's hand; Vin IV 200,25
(na -issa agilanassa dhamma¡p. desessami ti); MI 108,2o
(-i pi kho Sakko ... da!)<;iam olubbha ekamanta¡p. aghasi;
or Npr.; Ps II 73,7 foll.: na jaradubbalataya da!)<;lahattho,
aya¡p. hi taru!)o ... suVai_l!)ada!)<;ia¡p. gahetva vicarati); -
0
-bunda, 0 -bundha, m.n., the bottom of the handle;
Sp 290,13 (-e pana ahicchattakasai_lthana¡p. vagati, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -bundhe; Sp-t [Be] II 119,8: -e ti da!)<;ia-
müle); Vin-vn 3033 (-amhi); - 0
-maJ,Iika, (m)f(n).
[scil. asan!], a type of lightning; Sv 569,21foll.
dal}'.faka
(navavidha hi asaniyo asañña . . . kukkuraka -a
sukkhasani ti . . . -a nangalasadisa hutva patati);
0
-mal}avaka, 0 -manavaka, m.n. [cf S. daJ.l<;iamffi:tava ?], a
kind of bird; ? D III 202,4* (sukasalikasadd' ettha -ani
ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -manavakani; Sv 968,6/oll.:
manussamukhasakm_1a, te kira dvihi hatthehi
suva!_ll_lada!_l<;larp. gahetva ekarp. pokkharapattarp.
akkamitva anantare pokkharapatte suval_ll_lada!_l<;larp.
nikkhipanta vicaranti); - 0
-Vakara, 0 -Vakura, 0 -
vagura,f, a net on a stick; a kind of snare; MI 153,19
(mahatihi -ahi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -vagurahi; Ps II
161,19: --jalehi); Sp 397,12 (migaluddaka mahatihi -ahi
araññarp. parikkhipitva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se 0 -vagurahi) t
Spk III 266,32 (Be, Ce, Se daJ.l<;iavaguradihi; Ee
le<;I<;iuda!_l<;lavakuradihi); Th-a III 36,18 (miganarp.
0
mara!_latthaya -vagurarp. o<;I<;ietva); Thi-a 76,29
(-' -adimigapasarp. . . . o<;I<;Iiyitva, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
0
-vakuradi-); - 0
-vinipata, m., making a stick fall,
wielding a stick; Sadd 533,26 (dal_l<;!a -e: dal_l<;ieti); -
0
-sattha, n. [dal_l<;Ia + sattha 1], a stíck and/or sword; -
--abbhukkira!_la, n., raísíng, brandishíng a stick or
sword; Nidd I 216,12 (atthi kañci kalarp. kodho
--paramasanamatto hoti na ca tava --abbhukkira!_lo hoti,
eds so; better --abbhuggiral_lo? Nidd-a I 322,35: -arp.
ukkhipitva pahara!_lo na ca tava hoti);- -ábhinipata, m.,
wielding, stríkíng wíth, a stick or sword; Ps II 132,16;-
-ábhipatana, n., íd.; Nidd I 216,14 (atthi kañci kalarp.
kodho --abbhukkira!_lamatto hoti, na ca tava -ábhipatano
hoti);- 0 -satthaka, n. [dal_l<;!a + satthaka1], a knife with
a handle; Vin II 115,26;- 0 -hattha, mfn., with stick or
staff in hand; Ja I 59,5 (ekarp. devaputtarp. ... obhagga-
sarirarp. -arp. pavedhamanarp.); V 72,5* (-a nivarenti
itthiyo purisa ca marp.); - adal}.,a, mfn. and m.,
l. (mfn.) without a stick; not punishing, not violent; D II
276,6 (avera -a asapatta avyapajjha viharemu; Sv 718,26:
-a ti avudhada!_l<;ladhanada!_l<;lavinimmutta); Dhp 137 (yo
dal_l<;iena -esu); - 2. (m.) not a stick or staff; not
violence; Vin IV 200,28 (da!_l<;io nama majjhimassa
purisassa catuhattho daJ.l<;io, tato ukkagho -o omako -o);
- adal_l<;Iena, without punishment, without violence;
Vin II 196,4* (dal_l<;len' eke damayanti añkusehi kasahi ca
-ena asatthena nago danto mahesina); DI 89,6 (so imarp.
pathavirp. sagarapariyantarp. -ena asatthena dhammena
abhivijiya ajjhavasati); M II 122,15 (-ena vata kira bho
asatthena evarp. suvinita parisa bhavissati ti); Sn 1002
(-en a asatthena dhammena-m-anusasati);
ada!_l<;lavacara, mfn., being the sphere of the non-víolent
or non-violence; D II 285,17 (somanassapatilabho ...
-ávacaro asatthavacaro); SI 224,11 (gathayo ... -ávacara
asatthavacara; Spk I 344,3 foll.: daJ.l<;iavacaraJ_larahita,
daJ.l<;iarp. va sattharp. va gahetabban ti evarp. ettha n' atthi
ti attho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se daJ.l<;iavacaraka rahita); Ja IV
360,1 * (-ávacararp. maggarp. sammasambuddhadesitarp.;
360,6·: -ehi nikkhittadal_l<;!asatthehi avacaritabbarp.); -
sadal}.,a, mfn., with a stick; violent; D II 276,7 (savera
-a sasapatta); SI 19,25* (sa dakkhil_la assumukha -a;
Spk I 60,13: daJ.l<;iena tajjetva paharitva dinnadakkhil_la -a
ti vuccati); - sadal_l<;Iavacara, mfn., being the sphere of
the violent or violence; D II 285,12 (somanassapatilabho
-ávacaro sasatthavacaro; Sv 739,6/oll.: sada!_l<;lavacarako
366 dal}'.faniya
dal_l<;!aggahal_lena satthaggaha!_lena saddhirp. ahosi, na
nikkhittada!_l<;iasattho ti dasseti, Be so; Se sada!_l<;io
avacarako; Ce sadal_l<;lavacara!_lo; Ee da!_l<;lavacaral_lo); SI
224,s (gathayo ... -ávacara sasatthavacara); - se e also
chattada!_l<;lagahanaka (sv chatta\ teda!_l<;lika,
dandadandi.
dal}~~ka, ·~.n. [da!_l<;la + ki; cfS. daJ.l<;iaka], l. a small
stick, a twig; a staff, a rod; DI 7,21
(mal_l<;lanavibhüsanarrhananuyogarp. anuyutta viharanti
seyyathidarp. ucchadanarp. ... -arp. na!ikarp. asirp. ... , Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se daJ.l<;imp; Sv 89,5foll.: apare
catuhatthadaJ.l<;iakarp. aññarp. va pana a1aii.karadaJ.l<;iakarp.
gahetva vicaranti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
catuhatthadal_l<;larp. .. . alañkatadal_l<;!akarp.); J a II 103,12
(so ekarp. -arp. bhañjitva tassa sise patesi); 376,23 (bile
-arp. otaresi); III 325,16 (migarp. ... ekasmirp. -e 1aggetva
kajarp. vahanto viya agacchanto); Mp II 344,3 (ekarp.
cakkava!apabbatarp. bherirp. katva mahapathavirp.
bhericammarp. katva Sinerurp. -arp. katva, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se daJ.l<;iarp.); Dhp-a I 288,11 (usukaro araññato ekarp. -arp.
aharitva nittacarp. katva . . . ujurp. valavijjhanayoggarp.
karoti, Ce, Ee so; Be vaii.kada!_l<;lakarp.; Se daJ_l<;Iarp.);
III 171,5 (asivisarp. disva -ena gahetva cha<;I<;Ietva);
Vism 136,29 (makkarasuttarp. ... -e verhetva); Sp 768,27
(allarukkhato va -arp. chinditva); 1206,12 (civararp.
atthariyamanarp. na ppahoti anto yeva hoti -e na
papul_latl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr -ena papul_latl ti); Ps IV
22,13 (-e rajjurp. pavesetva); Spk I 186,21
(gopalakadarakarp. viya -ena bhümirp. 1ekhantarp. disva);
Dhp-a I 59,21 (-en' eva saddhirp. madhupatalarp. satthu
santikarp. haritva); 126,s (mukharp. vivaritva antare -arp.
datva); V v-a 256,12/oll. (sakhama!_l<;!apakarena -ani
bandhitva . . . attano kutiyarp. dve tayo -e sakhayo ca
niharitva); - ifc see kattara-, ti- (sv ti 2), digha-, ratha-;
- 2. a sta/k; a handle; Ja VI 401,15 (passatha deva
imassa pupphassa -arp.); Sp 618,7 (-ena -arp. VaJ.ltena va
VaJ.ltarp. ganthetva); - ifc see ubhato-, digha-; - 3. the
arm or neck of a vii_la; Sv 699,32 (upari -o gavutan ti);-
ifc see suddha- (sv sujjhati); - daJ.l<;iakena in Ee at
Ud-a 111,7 is prob. wr for da!_l<;lanena (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-thalika,f, a pot with a handle; Vin I 286,t5
(anujanami rajana-uluii.karp. -an ti; Sp 1126,24: rajana-
uluii.karp., -an ti tam eva sadal_l<;Iakarp.); - 0 -dipika,f
1
[daJ.l<;iaka + dipika ], a torch; Jai 31,23 (--vethana-
niyamena) = Ap-a 34,22; - 0
-parissavana, n., see
da!_l<;laparissavana sv da!_l<;la; - o -bandhanaip in Ee at
Sp 1241,3 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se da!_l<;labaddharp.; -
0
-Vasi,.f., a handled knife or axe; Spk III 5,15; Mp II
315,22;- adal}.,aka, mfn., without a handle; Sp 1241,24
2
= Kkh 234,26;- sadal}.,aka, mfn., with a handle; with
a stalk; Sp 618,5; 1126,25;- see also kuda!_l<;laka.
dal}.,ana, n. [ts], punishing; violence; Ud-a 111,7 (atha va
dal_l<;iena ti -ena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dal_l<;iakena, prob. wr);
Th-a II 209,37 (tvarp.... acore core karonto -ena ...
badhasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee daJ.l<;iena); Dhatup 570 (da!_l<;la
-e).
dal}.,aniya, mfn. [ts ], liable to, worthy of, punishment (a
fine?); Mi1186,s (coro ... paribhasaniyo paribhasitabbo
-o daJ.l<;ietabbo pabbajaniyo pabbajetabbo ... , Be, Ce so:
Ee da!_l<;laniyo; Se dal_l<;!Iyo daJ.l<;iitabbo).
dal}c;lapal}etabba
dal}c;lapal}etabba, mfn. ffpp of*daJ;~9a + paJ_leti], worthy of
punishment; fiable to be punished; Ja IV 193,2· (yo
adaJ.19iyaJ11 adaJ.19apaJ_letabbaJ11 ca daJ.19etva daJ.19iyaJ11 ca
-aJ11 adaJ;~9etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adaJ.19etabbaJ11 daJ;~9eti
daJ.19etabbaJ11 ca daJ.19iyaJ11 adaJ.19etva).
dal}c;liidal}c;li, ind. [S. daJ.19adaJ;~9i], stick upon stick
(fighting); Sadd 763,6 (daJ.19ehi daJ.19ehi paharitva idaJ11
yuddhaJ11 pavattatl ti -1).
dal}c;li(n), mfn. [S. daJ;~9in], carrying a stick or staff;
Vism 210,1 H chatti sikhl ... ); Sadd 187,nfoll.; 652,28
(-ino -issa); 667,25 (-ini); 671,23 (aggina apeti evaJ11
-ina); 674,19 (-inaJ11); 793,1o (daJ.19o assa atth! ti -1).
dal}c;lika, mfn. [ts], carrying a stick or staff; Sadd 793,10
(daJ.19o assa atthl ti daJ.191 eva111 -o); - daJ.19iko in E e at
V in IV 224,8 is wr for daJ;~9ito (Be, Ce, Se so).
dal}c;lita, mfn.,pp ofdaJ.19eti qv.
dal}c;liyati, see sv daJ;~9eti.
dal}c;Ieti, -ayati, daJ;~9iyati, pr. 3 sg. [S. daJ.19ayati],
punishes; Dhatup 570 (daJ.19a daJ;~9ane); Dhatum 799
(da9i iiJ;~ayaJ11); Ja IV 192,1o* (adaJ.19iyaJ11 -ayati
daJ;~9iyaJ11 ca adaJ.19iyaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -iyati;
193,2· foll.: yo adaJ;~9iyaJ11 adaJ;~9apaJ;~etabbaJ11 ca -etva
daJ.19iyaJ11 ca daJ;~9apaJ;~etabbaJ11 adaJ;~9etva attano rucim
eva karoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee yo adaJ.19etabbaJ11 daJ.19eti
daJ.19etabbaJ11 ca daJ.19iyaJ11 adaJ;~9etva); 495,14*
(aparadhake . . . rajan o -en ti); 495,15* (na maccuno
-ayitussahanti; 498,24·: te pi maccu111 -ayitu111 na
sakkonti); Mil 84,19 (taJ11 mayaJ11 diguJ;~aJ11 -ema ti); Pj II
63,27 (kayaduccaritaJ11 hi -ayatl ti daJ.19o. badheti
anayavyasana111 papen ti vutta111 hoti); Sadd 533,26
(daJ;~9a daJ.19avinipate: -eti -ayati daJ;~9o); - neg.
part.pr. adaJ;~9iya(t), mfn., Ja IV 192,10* (daJ;~9iyaJ11 ca
adaJ;~9iyaJ11);- absol. daJ;~9etva, Ja IV 193,2· (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -eti); - neg. adan9etva, Ja IV 193y; -pass.
part.pr. daJ;~91yanta, mfn., Saddh 187 (caJ;~9ehi Yama-
dütehi -lyanto punappunaJ11); - pp daQc;lita, mfn. [ts],
punished; fined; V in IV 224,8 (so puriso -o, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr daJ.19iko); Ja I 234,22 (sattavare rañña -o);-
fpp (a) daJ;~9iya, mfn., Ja IV 192,10*; Mhv 37:5
(Mahaviharavasissa ahara111 deti bhikkhuno yo so sataJ11
daJ.19iyo ti); - neg. adaJ.19iya, mfn., Ja IV 192,10•;
(b) daQ9etabba, mfn., Ja IV 193,3· (daJ;~9etabbaJ11, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se daJ.19apaJ_letabbaJ11); Mi1186,8 (daJ;~9etabbo,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se daJ.19itabbo ); - se e also daJ;~9aniya; -
caus. pr. 3 sg. dal}c;liipeti, Ja I 483,21 (ta111 ...
aghakahapaJ_le -essami ti); Mp II 144,9 ( -essama); -
aor. 3 pl. daJ.19apesuJ11, Vin IV 224,8 (mahamatta taJ11
purisa111 -apesmp).
datta 1 , mfn., pp ofdeti qv.
datta2 , mfn., pp ofdappati qv.
datti,f rJrom dadati ?], a gift (offood); (according to cts:
a small bowl;) DI l66,12joll. (ekissa pi -iya yapeti dvihi
pi -ihi yapeti ... sattahi pi -lhi yapeti; Sv 356,3: -i nama
eka khuddakapati hoti yattha aggabhikkhaJ11 pakkhipitva
~apenti; Sv-pt I 463,3: diyati etaya ti -i, dvatti-alopa-
mattagahi khuddakaJ11 bhikkhadanabhajanaJ11) = MI
78,2joll. = Nidd I 416,23/oll.; Sv-pt I 401,3 (diyati ti -i);
- see also dati4.
dattika, dattiya, mfn. and n. [datta 1 + ika, iya], (what is)
given; DI 103,22 (brahmaQO .. . Pokkharasadi rañño
367 daddara
Pasenadissa Kosalassa dattikaJ11 bhuñjati; Sv 271 ,3o:
dattikan ti dinnakaJ11; Sv-pt I 401,3: diyatl ti datti, datti
yeva dattikan ti); Ap-a 522,6 (catumaharajehi dattiyena
selamayapattena, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dinnena);
Sadd 369,24* (dattasaddassa thanamhi dattiyan ti ravo
gato devadattiyapatto ca assamo sakkaddattiyo ti);
781,21 foll. (Sakkasaddadito parassa dattasaddassa
nicca111 dattiyadeso hoti samase);- ifc see kula-, deva-,
maharaja-, sakka-.
dattima, mfn. [S. dattrima], received by gift; Sadd 866,19
(dati danaJ11 tena nibbattaJ11 -aJ11).
dattiya, mfn., see sv dattika.
dattu, mfn. pp ofdappati qv.
datva 1, datvana, absol. ofdeti qv.
datva2 , absol. ofdayati 3 qv.
-dada, mfn. [BHS id.], giving; Ja V 325,24' (mama
lokadado ti tassa mama tva111 saggalokaJ11 -o hohi, Ce,
Se so, perhaps wr; Be saggalokadado; Ee lokadado hohi,
and omits following sentence); - ifc see amataJ11-
(sv marati), ayu-, aloka-, kama-, cakkhu-, pañña-,
sabbakama-; - see also duddada, purindada.
dadati, pr. 3 sg., see sv deti.
daddabha, daddubha, duddubha, [onomat. ?], a heavy
noise, "thud"; Ja III 76,25 (addha tassa talapaJ;~J;~assa
upari beluvapakkaJ11 patitva daddabhaJ11 akasi, Ee so; Be
daddubhayanasaddaJ11 akasi; Ce daddabhayanasaddaJ11;
Se daddhabhayanasaddaJ11); 77,12' (daddabha ti saddaJ11
karoti, Ce, Ee so; Se daddhabha ti; Be daddubhasaddaJ11
karoti); 77,24* (belUVaJ11 patitaJ11 sutva daddabhan ti saso
javi, Ce so; Be daddubhan ti; Ee dabhakkan ti; Se
daddhabhan ti; 78,4': eva111 saddaJ11 kurum3naJ11) quoted
Ps II 93,18* (Be, Se duddubhan ti; Ce, Ee dabhakkan ti);
Sadd 587,14 (saddo daddubha iti acarati daddubhayati);
-se e also daddabhayati.
daddabhayati, daddubhiiyati, duddubhayati, pr. 3 sg.
[denom. from daddabha, daddubha], there is a heavy
noise; something goes "thud"; Ja III 77,10*
(daddabhayati bhaddan ti yasmiJ11 dese vasam' ahaJ11,
Ce, Ee so; Be daddubhayati; Se daddhabhayati; 77,12·:
daddabhayatl ti daddabha ti saddaJ11 karoti, Ce, Ee so; Be
daddubhayatl ti daddubhasaddaJ11 karoti; Se
daddhabhayatl ti daddhabha ti saddaJ11 karoti) quoted
Ps 11 93,7* (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se duddubhayati); Sadd 587,14
(saddo daddubha iti acarati daddubhayati);
pp daddabhayita, (mj)n., thudding; a thud; Mp II 277,14
(pathaviyaJ11 patitassa beluvapakkassa daddabhayita-
saddaJ11 sutva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se daddahayita-).
daddabhiiyana, daddubhayana, n. rJrom daddabhayati,
daddubhayati], making a heavy noise; thudding; Ja III
76,25 (addha tassa talapaJ;~J;~assa upari beluvapakkaJ11
patitva daddabhayanasaddaJ11 akasi, Ce so; Be
daddubhayana-; Se daddhabhayana-; Ee daddabhaJ11
akasi); 77,8 (idaJ11 sami daddabhayanaghanan ti, Ce, Ee
so; Be daddubhayana-; Se daddhabhayana-).
daddara 1, m. [S. lex. dardara; cf also S. lex. dardura], l. a
kind of drum; - ifc see ghata- (sv ghata\ - 2. a
hollow noise (as of a drum ?); A IV 171,10 (yani pana
tani rukkhani antopütlni ... tani kutharipasena akotitani
-a111 patinadanti; Mp IV 75,s: -an ti 0 -saddaJ11, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee babbarasaddaJ11); Ja III 461,s (dve pabbate
daddara
aññamaññaq1 paharitva -a ti saddarp karonte passissasi,
Ce, Ee so; Be 0 -saddarp; Se daddhan ti saddaq1); - see
also daddarika, daddarl.
daddara 2, m. [?],a partridge; Ja III 541,2* (yo te sakha -o
sadhurüpo; 541 ,6·: -o ti tittiro ).
daddara3, m. [S. lex. dardara], a mountain; Ja II 8,19* (slho
ca slhanadena -aq1 abhinadayi sutva slhassa nigghosaq1
sigalo -e vasarp bhlto santasaq1 apadi; 8,24'foll.: tarp
rajatapabbatarp abhinadayi ekanadarp akasi) quoted
Sadd 543,12.
daddarika, m. or n. [cf S. dardarika], a kind of drum;
Abh 140 (kumbhathül}adaddarikadikarp); - ifc see
mukha-;- see also daddara 1.
daddari, f [cfS. lex. dardara], a kind of drum; Abh 144
H pataho bherippabheda); Sadd 750,21 (0 -dindimarp
1 curds;- see sv dadhimatthu below;- 0 -mal}4a, m.n.,
evarp turiyari.gatthe ); - see also daddara .
daddallati (and dadda!hati), pr. 3 sg. [intens. ofjalati 2 qv;
cf S. jajvalati, jajvalyate], flames brightly; shines
brilliantly; Ap-a 234,12 (loke atirocati -ati, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee dadda!hati); Sadd 826,5 (-ati); part.pr.
daddallamana, mfn., D II 258,7* (-a agharpsu); SI
127,18' (-a agañchuq1 tal}ha ca aratl raga, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se daddalhamana; Spk I !88,12: -a ti ativiya ja1amana
sobhamana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadda!hamana ti); Sn 686
(-arp siriya); Vv 8:2 (kütagara ... -a abhanti samanta
caturo disa; V v-a 50,9: -a ti ativiya vijjotamana, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee dadda!hamana ti); Ja V 402,8* (-a yasasa
yasassin1; 402,12·: -a ti jalamana); VI 118,8* (-a abhenti
vimana, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dadda!hamana; ll8,26·: -a ti
jalamana, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dadda!hamana ti
jajja1amana); Ap-a 108,26 (suval}l}atarakahi -a
ce1avitana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee daddalamana); 232,13
(pasannehi sobhanehi -ehi mukhanettehi samannagato );
442,32 (-arp rajatavimanam iva karesi, Ce so; Be, Se
dadda1hamanarp; Ee dadda1amanarajatavimanam); -
se e also dalati 1.
daddu, fn. [cf S. dadrü], a kind of cutaneous eruption; a
skin-disease; A V 110,6 (imasmirp kaye vividha abadha
uppajjanti ... -u kal}qu kacchu ... ); Nidd I 47,6 ( ... -uya
kal}quya kacchuya... phandamanarp); Ap 270,6 (-u
kal}qu ca me n' atthi); 458,8 (pi!aka tatha na honti kaye
-u ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -uq1); Mil 298,3o (sañre ti1aka
pi!aka -üni utthahanti); Th-a II 74,6 ( 0 -kal}qupi!akahi
bhinnacchavibhavato ).
daddubha, see sv daddabha.
daddubhayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv daddabhayati;
daddura, m. [S. dardura], a frog; Abh 675 (mal}qüko -o
bheko).
daddula, m. [?], scrapings or a sediment from leather-
working; Sv 356,12 (-an ti cammakarehi cammarp
likhitva chaMitakasatarp) Ps II 45,9;
0
-bhakkha, mfn., eating daddula; DI l66,2o
( ... nlvarabhakkho va hoti -o va hoti ... ) -¡. III 41,16 (Be,
Ce, E e so; Se daddu1aka-)-¡. Nidd I 416,32; MI 156,23 (-a
pi ahesurp)-¡. A I 241,6;- ifc see naharu-.
2 suvana ... khadanti -ehi ayomayehi); Patis I 137,1;
dadhate, dadhati, pr. 3 sg ., se e sv dahati .
dadhi, n. [ts], sour milk, coagulated milk; Abh 501; V in I
244,34 (anujanami bhikkhave pañca gorase khrrarp -iq1
takkaq1 navanltarp sappiq1); IV 88,35/oll. (yesarp
maq1sarp kappati tesarp khlrarp, -i nama tesarp yeva -i);
368 danta
348,5 (agilana nama yassa vina -ina phasu hoti); DI
20l,25foll. (gava khirarp khiramha -i -imha navanltarp);
Ja I 449,4• (nayaq1 -iq1 vedi na nari.galisarp); II 102,17 (so
pi pal}qurogadhatuko va tasma -ina me attho ti aha);
104,12 (mahajano -imhi osiditva); IV 140,8* (yatha -i va
khlrarp ca samuddo patidissati, Be so; Ce, Ee -irp; Se -i
ca); Ap 315,24 (-irp datvana sampannaq1); Dhs 646
(kabaliri.karo aharo ... khirarp -i sappi ... ); Mi163,18
(-issa me rasaq1 ahara); Vism 594,14 (khiranvayassa
-ino); Sadd 394,1 (janassa tutthiql dadhate ti -i); -
0
-guJika,f, a lump or globule of coagulated milk;
Sp 711,21 (ettha pana -ayo pi takkabindüni pi honti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -'-adayo); 715,4 (navanite -a va
takkabindu va hoti); - 0 -nimmathana, n., chuming of
the milk; Mp I 248,13 = Ap-a 525,2; - 0 -pil}4a, n.,
whey; Abh 500 (-arp tu matthu ca);- 0 -mal}4aka, n.,
whey; S II 111,26 (Spk II 121,19/oll.: -ena ti 0 -mal}qena,
Ee so; Be 0 -mal}qanamattena; Ce 0 -matthuna; Se
0
-maghana); 0
-matthu, 0
-mutta, n., whey;
Vism 264,10 (puriso paduminipatte dadhiq1 bandhitva
hettha kal}takena vijjheyya athanena chiddena -u ga1itva
bahi pateyya, Ce so; Be 0 -muttarp; Ee wr adhimuttarp; Se
0
-mattharp; Vism-mht [Be] I 309,1: dadhino vissandana-
accharaso 0 -muttarp) = Vibh-a 247,19 (eds -u)-¡. Pj I 67,9
(Be, Ce, Ee 0 -pil}qarp; Se 0 -mattharp); Sp 922,17 (in cpd:
takkadadhimatthu-, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -dadhimadhu-;
Sp-t [Be] III 123,14: -ü ti 0 -mal}qarp dadhimhi
pasannodakaq1; Se 0 -matthan ti); - 0 -mutta, n., see sv
dadhimatthu above; - 0 -rasa, n., whey; Vism 430,2o
(Vism-mht [Be] II 64,24: -an ti 0 -mal}qo);
0
-varaka, m.n., a pot of sour milk; Jaiii 54,2*
(marpsasüla ca dve godha ekarp ca -arp; 54,6·: -an ti -o,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadhithalakan ti -o); Dhp-a II 198,15
(-o pi ahato atthi ); - o -sanna, o -sannisinna, n. ? the
sinking down, settling, of sour milk; ? the flowing of sour
milk; ? Ja VI 203,12* (yassanubhavena subhoga gari.ga
pavattatha o -sannisinnarp samuddarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-sannarp; or separate words? 203,z5'foll.: bahukassa
[khlrassa] chaqqitatthane gari.ga pavattatha, tarp pana
khlrarp yattha dadhi hutva sannisinnarp thitarp tarp yeva
samuddarp nama jatarp).
danta 1, m. and mfn. [S. dat, danta] (pl. acc. -e, -ani),
l. (m.) (i) a tooth (of men or animals); Abh 261 (-o);
D II 293,13 (atthi imasmirp kaye kesa loma nakha -a ... )
M I 120,36 (-e 'bhidantaq1 adhaya jivhaya taluq1
ahacca); A IV 191,26 (ekacco assakha1uri.ko ... -ehi
mukhadhanaq1 viddharpsitva); Ja I 160,28 (ekacce
ghurughurüpassasa kakacchamana -e khadanta
nipajjiq1su); 394,17 (dvattirpsa -a suphassita
sudhotavajirapanti viya khayanti); II 153,12 (satapatto
kacchapaq1 amantetva samma tava -a atthi tvarp imarp
pasarp chinda); 269,11 (makkato sltapi¡ito -e khadanto
kampento ); V 203,23 (-a ca tassa bhusadassaneyya
suddha sama sari.khavarüpapanna); VI 247,18* (duve
Mil 26,7 (-a . . . Nagaseno ti); Vism 354,8 (-a
hanukatthikesu jata); Sp 1029,17 (-e pidahiturp
asamatthehi otthehi samannagato); Sv 450,6foll.
(cattalisa -a sama avira!a patighahissantl ti ... aññesarp
danta
hi paripu~~adantana111 pi dvattiJ11sa -a honti, imassa
pana cattalisaJ11 bhavissanti ... , Be, Se so; Ce dvatti111sa
-a ti; Ee dvatti111sa -ayo); - ifc see agga- (sv agga\
kakaca-, kh~~a-, khlra-, da¡ha-, nikkhanta-
(sv nikkhamati), pmi.ka-; -esp. (ii) an elephant's tusk;
ivory; Vin IV 167,2s (-o nama hatthidanto vuccati); DI
78,16 (suparikammakatasmiJ11 -asmiJ11); M III 133,24
(rañño nago ... na -e copeti); SI 104,8 (seyyathapi nama
suddhaJ11 riipiyaJ11 eva111 assa -a honti); Ud 68,11
(ekaccana111 jaccandhanaJ11 hatthissa -a111 dassesi); Ja II
211,24* (na taJ11 pacta vadhissami na -ehi na so~~iya);
V 52,2* (khura111 gahetva -e ime chinda pura marami);
54,2o* (adaya -ani gajuttamassa vaggü subhe appa¡ime
pathavya); PsI 184,29 (dvlhi -ehi vijjhitukama111 viya
pa¡imukhaJ11 agacchantaJ11 mahahatthiJ11 mapesi);
II 198,35 (tasaJ11 kira eko -o unnato hoti eko onato );
Mhv 25:22 (ubho -e pljayitva);- ifc see lsa-, naga-;-
(iii) the tooth of a comb; ? - ifc se e p~a- (sv p~a2 ); -
2. (mfn.) ivory, made ofivory; Ja VI 223,12* (tassa yana111
ayojesu111 -a111 riipiyapakkharaJ11; 223,24': -an ti
dantamayaJ11); - 0 ajina, n., ivory and hides; M I1 71,3o
(addasaJ11 ... bah u tattha -aJ11);- o• -iivarai].a, n., the lip
(covering the teeth); Abh 262 (-am ottho); Ja V 156,28'
(pa~~aravar~a ti -a); Ps II 53,7 (bhagavato hi jivha
muduka -a111 suphassitaJ11); Dhp-a I 387,19 (-a111
bimbaphalasadisaJ11); 0
0dukkhalika, mfn. [cf S.
danto1ükhalika], using one's teeth as a mortar;? (or
using teeth ora mortar; ?) Ap 18,23 (aggipakl anaggl ca
-a pi ca; cf Ap-a 222,24/oll.: ekacce dantika dantehi
yeva taca111 uppa¡etva khadanti, ekacce udukkhalika
udukkhalehi kottetva khadanti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits
dantika);- see also -musalika and -vakkalika below;
0 0
- o• -ullehakaip, ind., tearing up with their teeth; M II1
167,22 (te allani pi ti~ani sukkhani pi ti~ani -aJ11
khadanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dantullahakaJ11; Ps IV
213,13: dantehi ullehitva luñcitva ti);- 0 '-otfhaja, mfn.
[danta+ ottha2], (gr.t.t.) produced by the teeth and lips,
dental-labial; Sadd 608,31 (vakaro -o); - 0 -katfha, n.
[danta + ka¡¡ha2], a tooth-stick (to chew to clean the
teeth); Abh 442 (dantapo~o -aJ11); Vin I 46,5
(saddhiviharikena . . . -aJ11 databbaJ11 mukhodakaJ11
databbaJ11); II 137,27 (bhikkhü -a111 na khadanti mukhaJ11
duggandhaJ11 hoti); A III 250,17 (pañc' ime bhikkhave
adlnava -assa akhadane); Ja III 236,s· (-assa akhadanena
malaggahitadanta); VI 520,3o (Maddl devl pi pato va
utthaya pamyaJ11 paribhojanlyaJ11 upatthapetva
mukhodakaJ11 aharitva -a111 datva); Mil15,9;
Sadd 499,13; - 0 -kappana, n., cutting the tusk; Ja I
321,9 (sace -'-atthaya kakacakh~~aJ11 atthl ti); -
0
-kaJira, m. (or -a,f) [cfS. lex. kañra, kaññ], the root
of an elephant's tusk; Th-a I 6,14 ([slho] ... -a111 va
khadati, Be so; Ce --mamsam; Ee dandakaliravamsam;
Se kaliravamsam); - o~kiir~. m. [d~~ta ~ karai], ~n
ivory-worker; Vin IV 167,9 (so -o bhikkhüna111 bahü
sücighare karonto); DI 78,15 (dakkho -o); Ja 1 320,31
(--vHhiJ11 patva -e 0
-vikatiyo kurumane disva);
Mil 331,9; Vism 336,24; - 0
-kiisiiva, n., an ivory-
coloured robe; Vin I 287,2 (bhikkhü acchinnakani
dharenti -ani, Ce, Ee so; Be acchinnakani clvarani ... ;
Se acchinnakani clvarani dharenti 0 -kasavani dharenti;
369 danta
Sp 1127,2: -anl ti ekaJ11 va dve va vare rajitva
dantav~~ani dharenti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -kasavanl ti);
- see also -va~~aka below and Mp I 90,7 foil.: clvara111
0
pi rajanasaruppaJ11 akatva ottha¡¡hiv~~aJ11 katva; -
0
-küfa, n. [danta+ kü¡a3 ?], teeth like a hammer;? D III
44,10 (kiJ11 panayaJ11 bahulajlvo sabbaJ11 sambhakkheti ...
asanivicakka111 -aJ11 sam~appavadena ti; Sv 837,28:
asanivicakka111 imassa -a111 mülabljadisu na kiñci na
sambhuñjati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee kinci na sambhajjati);-
0
-khacita, mfn., inlaid with ivory; Sp 11,8
(dhammasanaJ11 paññapetva -aJ11 vljaniJ11 thapetva);
Ps III 371,14 (almi.katadhammasane nislditva -a111
cittavljaniJ11 gahetva); 0
-güthaka, m., plaque;
Vism 344,15 (dantakatthena asampattanhane -o
0
makkheti); - -cchada, m., the lip; Abh 930; -
0
-ja, mfn., (gr.t.t.) produced by the teeth, dental;
Sadd 608,31 (tavaggalasakara -a); 609,9 (jivhaggaJ11
-ana111 [kara~aJ11]);- 0 -dhiivana, m., a hardwood tree;
SAF: catechu tree, Acacia catechu (L.f) Willd.; Abh 567
(khadiro -o);- 0 -piiJi,f, a row ofteeth; Vism 251,9;-
0
-poJ}.a, n. [danta + po~a 1 ], a tooth-cleaner, a tooth-
stick; Abh 442 (-o 0 -kanha!11); Vin III 51,21 (-aJ11 nama
chinnaJ11 va acchinnaJ11 va); Th 938 (Th-a III 79,s: dante
punanti visodhenti etena ti -a111 dantakatthaJ11; =
Sadd 499,12); Ja IV 363,8• (-ani); Ap 303,19 (karayi111 ...
-e); Mil 15,7 (mukhodakaJ11 -a111 upatthapesi); -
0
-musalika, mfn., using one's teeth as a pestle; Ja IV
8,12 (-o hutva anaggipakkam eva khadati); - se e also
dantodukkhalika above; - 0 -luyyaka, mlfn)., (acc. to
ct) tearing bark with one's teeth (a class of ascetics);
Pj II 295,9 (atthavidha tapasa saputtabhariya ... -a ... ; f.
Sv 210,22: dantavakkalika); 295,24 (-a ti
mutthipas~adlni pi agahetva caranta khudakale
sampattarukkhato dantehi uppa¡etva taca111 khaditva);-
see also dantika; - 0 -vakkalika, m(jn)., (according to
ct) tearing bark with one's teeth (a class of ascetics);
Sv 270,22 (atthavidha hi tapasa saputtabhariya ... -a ... ;
f. Pj 11 295,9: dantaluyyaka); 271,6 (ye pana pasa~ena
taca111 kottetva vicar~a111 nama dukkhan ti danteh' eva
uppa¡etva khadanti te -a nama); - see also
dantodukkhalika above and dantika;
o-Vai}.J}.aka, mfn., ivory-coloured; Th 960 ( --paruta;
Th-a III 86,3ofoll.: dantav~~arattena clvarena
parutasarlra); se e also o-kasava above;
0
-Vikhiidana, mfn., what is (to be) chewed by the teeth;
Dhs 646 (ya111 va pan' aññaJ11 .. . mukhasiyaJ11 -aJ11
galajjhohar~lyaJ11 ... ; As 330,13: dantehi vikhaditabban
ti -a111);- 0 -Vi,daipsaka, m.(?), and -aJ11, adv., showing
one's teeth; A I 261,5 (ativela111 -aJ11 hasitaJ11, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se --hasita111; Mp II 366,26/oll.: dante dassetva
p~iJ11 paharantiinaJ11 mahasaddena hasita111) quoted
Nidd I 379,1; Ja III 223,7· (ahuhasiyan ti -a111
mahahasitaJ11 vuccati); Sp 258,16 (mukhaJ11 apidhaya
-aJ11 hasamanena na nislditabbaJ11); Pj 11 542,2 (tutthi!11
va -aJ11 va apajjanto hasati); Ap-a519,34 (eka g~ika
thera111 disva -aJ11 hasi); - 0 -Vil}.li,f, "tooth-vl~a",
teeth-chattering; Thl-a 195,18 (brahm~a111 . . . alla-
vatthaJ11 allakesa111 pavedhanta111 -aJ11 vadayamanaJ11);
-
0
-satha, m., a tree with acid fruit; the citron tree;
SAF: the true lime, Citrus limon (L.) Burmj; Abh 553
danta
(-o ca jambhlro); - 0 -sippa, n., the craft of ivory-
carving; Mhv 37:100 (-amhi kovido); - 0
-Süla, n.,
toothache; Nidd-a I 60,31 (0 -rogo ti -arp);
niddanta, m.fn., without teeth, toothless; Sp 1029,27
(putidanto va -o va); - see also anhadantaka
(sv aqha\ atikhuddakadantaka (sv khuddaka\
abhidantarp, chaddanta, nagadantaka (sv naga),
nikkhantadantaka (sv nikkhamati), makaradantaka
(sv makara).
danta 2, m.fn., pp of dammati qv.
dantasüka, m.fn. and m. [cf S. dandasuka], given to biting;
a snake; - 0 -kattika, m.fn., having as agent a snake;?
Sadd 377,7 (khadda darpsane: darpsanarp iha -a kiriya
abhidhlyate).
danti(n), m.fn. and m. [S. dantin], tusked; an elephant;
Abh 360 (kuñjaro ... ibho -!); Vv 60:1 (nagarp ... -irp);
Ja II 217,13* (vinadita va -ibhi, Be so; Ce, Ee dantihi; Se
dant!bhi); VI 448,26* (pesetha kuñjare -1; 449,2o·: -1 ti
sampannadante); Ap 46,4 (mattarp va kuñjararp -irp;
Ap-a 289,2o: -irp dantavantarp); Mhv 48: 157;
Sadd 188,17; 345,32*.
dantika, m(.fn). [from danta 1], tearing bark with one's
teeth (a kind of ascetic); Ap-a 222,24 (ekacce -a dantehi
yeva tacarp uppa~etva khadanti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits
-a); see also dantaluyyaka, dantavakkalika
(sv danta 1).
danti, f [S. lex. danti], self-control; Abh 758 (damo ca
damatho -1).
dantilata, f [cf S. dantl, dantika], a kind of creeper;
Th-a II 98,8 (ka~apabbaiJ.gasankaso ti
o -pabbasadisaiJ.go ).
dandha, m.fn. [BHS dhandha; cfS. v'tandr, S. lex.
dhandha ?], slow; sluggish; dull, stupid; D III 106,12
(dukkhatta ca 0 -tta ca); SIV 190,Io (-o bhikkhave
satuppado); A II 154,8 (yarp payarp pa~ipada -a imina
payarp hlna akkhayati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dandhabhiñña);
Th 557 (-a mayharp gatl asi; Th-a II 239,18: -a ti manda,
catuppadikarp gatharp catumasehi gaheturp
asamatthabhavena dubba1a); Ja I 249,9· (jammin ti
lamikarp -arp); 447,24 (ayam eva -o sipparp sikkhiturp
na sakkoti); 468,s- (-assa apaññassa mittani); III 133,21
(surpsumaro 0 -taya tarp gahetva); Dhp-a I 94,18 (kirp nu
kho imasmirp loke -a bahu udahu pa1_1<;lita ti); III 156,4
(ayarp itthi -a sukhumarp dhammakatharp na janati);
Vism 87,2 (abhiñña pi ekaccassa -a hoti manda
aslghappavatti); Sv 867,13 (suriyassa ujukarp gamanarp
slgharp tiriyarp gamanarp -arp); - dandharp, adv.,
slowly; sluggishly; S II 200,19 (slgharp yeva me dentu
ma -arp); A III 306,1 (pamatta viharanti -arp
mara1_1asatirp bhaventi asavanarp khayaya); Dhp 116
(-arp hi karoto puññarp); Vibh 342,18 (atth' ekacco jhiiyl
-arp samapajjati khipparp vunbati); Mill02,16 (tarp
cittarp garukarp uppajjati -arp pavattati); Vism 105,18
(mohacarito . . . vuqhapiyamano ca hunkararp karonto
0
-arp vunhati); - abhiñña, m.fn., of slow under-
standing; characterised by slow intuition; D III 106,8
(catasso ima bhante pa~ipada dukkha pa~ipada -a ... );
Dhs 176 (pa~hamarp jhanarp ... dukkhapa~ipadarp -arp
pa~hav!kasi1_1arp; As 182,26/oll.: dandha abhiñña assa ti
-arp, iti dukkhapa~ipadan ti va -an ti va pathavlkasil_lan
370 dandhayana
ti va tlni pi jhanass' eva namani); Nett 7,16 (dukkhaya
patipadaya -aya niyyati); Vism 86,29 (atthi samadhi
dukkhapa~ipado -o); As 185,4 (--tta);- -gatika, m.fn.,
0
of slow understanding; Mil 251 ,2 (duppañña ja~a ... -a);
-
0
-di!thi in Ce, Ee at M II 241,13/oll. is prob. wr for
da~hadighl (Be, Se so); dhiituka, m.fn.,
constitutionally slow, dull; Ja VI 351,15 (ayarp raja -o);
Th-a II 238,29; - adandha, m.fn., not slow or sluggish;
not dull; Ja III 438,2o· (1ahurp ca vata ti -arp ca vata);
Mil 104,25 (lahukarp agamanarp -arp); Sv 890,23
(kilesacchedakaña1_1arp -arp tikhi1_1arp); - adandhaditthl
in Ce, Ee at M II 241,8/oll. and Ps IV 30,21 is prob. wr
for ada~hadi!thl (Be, Se so).
dandhati, -eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from dandha ?],
is slow, is sluggish; delays; Th 291 (yo dandhakale tarati
taranlye ca -aye; Th-a II 123,28: tarp kiccarp akaronto va
kalarp vltinameyya) = Jaiii 141,2* (-ati) quoted
Sadd 26,17 (-ati); Th 293 (yo dandhakale -eti tara1_1!ye ca
taraye) = Ja III 141,4• (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ati; 141,9'/oll.:
-etl ti -ayati dandhakatabbani kammani dandham eva
karoti, Be so; Ce, Se -etl ti dandhayati; Ee -atl ti
dandhayati); Sadd 394,23 (dadhi aslghacare: .. . -ati
dandho); part.pr. dandhayanta, m.fn., Sv 879,5
(-antena, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se dandhayantena); Th-a II
123,29 (-ayanto, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se dandhayanto);- aor.
2 sg. dandhayi, Cp 1:8:13 (ehi S!vaka u~thehi ma -ayi;
Cp-a 68,3o: ma -ay! ti ma cirayi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr
dantayl ti); - fpp dandhayitabba, (mj)n., where there
should be delay; Th-a II 123,29 (dandhayitabbe taranta,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se dandhayitabbe); - see also
dandhayati.
dandhayati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from dandha ?
BHS dhandhayati], is slow; delays; hesitates; Mil 105.11
(bhayeyya -eyya na visaheyya otariturp); Sv 405,19 (siya
ñiil_lassa pa~ighato tena so -eyya va vitthayeyya va);
Th-a II 123,27 (agamanamase pakkhe va karissaml ti
-eyya, tarp kiccarp akaronto va kalarp vltinameyya, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dandhayeyya); part.pr.
dandhayanta, m.fn., Sv 879,s (n' eva -antena na
gaggarayantena slhena viya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
dandhayantena; Sv-p~ III 75,7: na mandayantena) f.
Spk III 208,3o (Ee so; Ce n' eva davayantena na
tatrayantena; Be, Se vane unnadayantena slhena); Th-a II
123,29 (taritabbe va -anto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dandhayanto);- pp dandhayita, m.fn., slow; hesitating;
- --tta, n., abstr., slowness, hesitation; delaying; DI
249,3 (si ya nu kho ... --ttarp va vitthayitattarp va ti;
Sv 405,13: --ttan ti ... kankhavasena cirayitattarp); S II
54,14 (bhagava pathamarp pañharp apucchi tassa me
ahosi --ttarp; Spk II 66,17: dandhabhavo aslghata);
Pa~is I 100,3 (avajjanaya --ttarp n' atthl ti; Pa~is-a 317,17:
avasavattibhavo alasabhavo va); Mill05,3o ( --ttarp va
lagganarp va hott ti); Vism 313,33 (mettaviharino
khippam eva cittarp samadhiyati n' atthi tassa --ttarp);
- fpp dandhayitabba, (mj)n., where there should be
delay; Th-a II 123,29 (dandhayitabbe taranta, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee dandhayitabbe);- see also dandhati.
dandhayana, f [from dandhayati], slowness; hesitation;
Mil 59,14 (muddagal_lanasaiJ.khalekhasippatthanesu
adikammikassa -a bhavati); - neg. adandhayana,j,
 dappa
Mil59,15.
dappa, m. [S. darpa], arrogance, pride, conceit; Ja JI
432,23' (matto ca ditto ca ti suramadena matto -ena
ditto); Mil414,1J (na tena mano kara~Iyo na -o
dassetabbo); Sv 180,1 (manarp va -arp va akatva);
Sadd 406,26 (gabba -e: -o aharpkaro); - 0
-Va(t), mfn.,
proud; Mhv 25:33 (gajuttamo ... 0 -va); - see also
aratidappappamathi(n) (sv arati), vadidappapahari(n)
(sv vadi[n]).
dappati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dfPyati], is mad or foolish; is
arrogant; is delighted; Dhatum 672 (dapa hase);
Sadd 487,11 (dapa hase: -ati); Sv-pp 293,29 (-anti
muyhanti ti dattil); - pp datta 2 , dattu, ditta2 , mfn. [cf S.
dfPta; see L. Alsdorf, 1977, p. 35], mad; foolish; wild;
arrogant; Abh 721 (balo -u ja)o mü)ho); 1075 (gabbite
ditto ); D III 24,2 (jarasigalo ditto e' eva balava ca;
Sv 827,23: ditto ti dappito thülasariro); MI 383,22
(ummatto si tvarp gahapati -o si tvarp gahapati; Ps 111
94,3: kirpja)o si jato ti attho); Th 198 (so 'harp ditto tada
santo; Th-aii 65,31: paridappito samano); Jall 432,15'
(yada matto ca ditto ca pamada kumbham abbhida;
432,23': dappena ditto); V 232,21* (svayarp -o va nadati,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ditto; 232,24·: dappito viya); VI 192,11 •
(ko nu brahma~av~~ena -o parisam agato, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be ditto; 192,13·: -o ti dandho la)ako, Ce, Ee so; Be
ditto ti gabbito balo dandhaña~o; Se -o ti dappito du!J:ho
lamako andhabalako); Sv 166,14 (dattühi bala-
manussehi); - dattupaññatta, mfn., declared by fools;
DI 55,28 (dattupaññattarp yad idarp danarp tesarp
tuccharp musa vilapo ye keci atthikavadarp vadanti;
Sv !66,14: dattühi ba!amanussehi paññattarp; Sv-pt I
293,29: dappanti muyhanti ti dattil, mü)ha puggala) = MI
515,15; Ja IV 339,14* (dattupaññattarp ye ca vadanti
danarp; 339,18' foil.: ye ca danarp balakehi paññattan ti
vadanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee laiakehi); -dittarüpa, mfn.,
absolutely wild or arrogant; Ja III 263,5* (tarp
dittarüparp ... vivajjayami); Vl7,1• (yarp ve pltva
dittarüpo va poso akkosati pitararp matararp ca, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se du!j:harüpo; 19,10': dittarüpo ti dappitarilpo, Be
so; Ee gabbitarüpo; Ce, Se dugharüpo ti dappitarüpo);
VI 114,w• (ta dittarüpa pati vippahaya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhuttarüpa; 114,27': satharilpa dhuttajatika hutva, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se asadhurüpa dugharüpa dhuttajatika); - caus.
pp dappita, mfn. [S. darpita], made arrogant; haughty,
proud; Ja III 256,24' (ditto -o gijjho va, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
gabbito ); V 301,8 (upatthaddha ti atitthaddha -a);
Ap 68,25 (g~araja va -o) t 324,6 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
dammito); Sv 539.16 (ekacco pana dussilo pi -o viya
vicarati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adussilo viya carati) = Mp III
328,12 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se da)ito) t Ud-a417,21 (Ee
adussilo appito viya; Ce adussilo apicchako viya; Be, Se
susiio viya carati); - atidappita, mfn., very proud; too
arrogant; Ps 11382,14.
dappana, m., l. [S. darpa~a], a mirror; Abh 316
(adasadappana); - 2. arrogance, pride; Sadd 867,12
(ahopurisato -e ~iko).
daphati, damphati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. raphati, ramphati,
Wg § 11:19, 20], goes; Sadd 405,5 (dapha daphi vappha
gatiyarp: daphati damphati vapphati).
dabba\ see sv dabbha 1.
371 dabba
dabba 2 , dabbha2, m. (and n.) [cfS. darbha,
G.M. Meulenbeld, 1974, pp. 561-62], a kind of grass;
Th 27 (-arp kusarp potakilarp usirarp muñjapabbajarp
urasa panudahissami; Th-a I 90,15: -an ti -ti~arp aha
0
yarp saddulo ti pi vuccati) = Ap 505,23 (Ce so; Be kasarp;
Ee dabbharp; Se sabbarp); Nidd-a I 413,24 (athabb~ika
kira sattaharp alo~akarp bhuñjitva -e attharitva
pathaviyarp sayamana taparp caritva) = As 92,8 (Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee dabbhe); Ap-a 505,6 (-e patitatta Dabbo
Mallaputto ti pakato ahosi); Sadd 406,4foll. (dubba ti
o -ti~arp ... dubba ti itthiliii.garp -an ti napurpsakaliii.gan
ti daghabbarp); - 0 -gahana, n. [dabba + gahana2], a
thicket of darbha grass; an impenetrable clump of
darbha grass; Ja V 46,17 (-arp kasagahanarp
ti~agahanarp);- 0 -chadana, n., a roof of darbha grass;
Ap-a 465,14 (-arp katva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e tarp d~qarp
chadanarp katva; ad Ap 198,6: Be, Ce ti~ena chadanarp
katva; Ee tarp ti~arp; Se tid~qe); - 0 -til}a, n., darbha
grass; Ja I 177,23 (takkarp ca -ani ca aharapetha ti);
V 23,9 (-esu nisiditva); Mp 111 319,15 (tiriya nama
ti~ajati ti -arp vuccati); Sadd 406,5 (-arp yarp tiriya
nama ti~ajati ti agatarp); - 0 -til}aka, n., darbha grass;
Vism 353,29 (suññagamaghane jatesu -esu, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce -ti~esu; = Vibh-a 57,23: eds -ti~esu); -
0 0
1
o -tthambha, m. [dabba + thambha ], a clump of darbha
grass; Th-a I 43,14 (ekasmirp -e nipati) = Mp 1 274,11;-
se e also dabbha 1, dubba.
dabba 3, drabya, n., mfn. and m. [S. dravya], l. (n.) (i) a
substance, an object; Abh 913 (-arp ... gu~adhare);
Sadd 760,28 (sama~asaii.khatassa -assa);
(ii) possessions; wealth; Abh 485 (dhanarp tu so -arp
vittarp); 913 (-arp ... vitte ca); Ja VI 576,29'
(nikki~issami -ena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee d~qena, prob. wr;
577,5·: dhanarp datva mocessami); - 2. (mfn. and m.)
wise; fit, capable; a wise or skilled person; Abh 229;
913 (-arp bhabbe ... budhadarusu); Vin III 162,34 (na
kho Dabba -a evarp nibbethenti; Sp 581,13: na kho
Dabba -a p~qita yatha tvarp parappaccayena nibbethesi
evarp nibbethenti; Sp-t [Be] II 345,22: dabba -a ti dutiyo
0
-saddo pa~qitadhivacano ti); SI 187,5* (-o
cirarattasamahito akuhako nipako apihalu; Spk I 270,19:
-o ti -jatiko pa~qito) = Th 1218; Th 5 (yo duddamiyo
0
damena danta -o . . . apetabheravo hi Dabbo so
parinibbuto thitatto; Th-a 1 45,19: -o ti drabyo, bhabbo ti
attho ... puna dabbo ti namakittanarp, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
-o ti -o); Th-a I 46,9 ( -tta); II 260,1o (segharp
0
sabbakalarp uttamarp -arp ca); - 0 -jiitika, mfn., being
by nature wise or skilled; MI 114,12 (bhikkhu -o; Ps 11
78,Jo: -o ti pa~qitasabhavo); Vism 196,23; Psi 64,7 (-o
eva hi koci bhikkhu chattarp katurp janati koci
civaradinarp aññatararp); - 0
-Viicaka, mfn. and m.,
expressive of a thing or person; a substantive;
Sadd 300,24 (-anarp); 747,18 (--ttarp icchanti); -
neg. Sadd 300,23 (adabbavacakatte); - 0 -vinimaya, m.,
exchange of goods and money; Dhatup 507 (ki -e);
Sadd 495,1o (-o kayavikkayavasena bh~qassa
parivattanarp); - adabba, mfn., not fit or capable;
Pp-a 215,7 (bhagavata dabbajatika ariya va gahita
puthujjana pana --taya na gahita ti); - see also
sañradavya (sv sañra).
dabba
dabba 4 , mfn. and n. [S. dravya], what is from a tree, wood;
Ja II 405,4 (eko vagghaki o• -atthaya araññatp. gantva, Se
so; Ce, Ee dal).gatthaya; Be thambhatthaya); Ap 559,8
0
( '-atthaya tada gantva); - 0 -Sambhara, m., wood as
building material; building materials; J a IV 311 ,25'
(tattha kira -a sulabha); V 48,32 (thambhadinatp. atthaya
rukkhe chinditva -e sajjetva); VI 432,28 (nighita-
parikammanatp. -iinatp.); Sp 294,6; 388,19 (yo pana
sailghiko -o agutto deve vassante temeti atapena
sukkhati); Ps II 229,7 (kattJ!an ti -atp.); Dhp-a I 321 ,5;
II 114,8 (-e iiharitva ayyiinatp. vasanattJ!iinatp. karotü ti);
Pv-a 114,23 (tadisena -ena sace attho bhaveyya tassa
rukkhassa khandhatp. pi chindeyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
o -satp.harena); Cp-a 40,2o (-atp. chinditva nivasayoggatp.
pal).l).asalatp. katva); Mhv 37:25 ( --kiiraQ.a).
dabbi, f, l. [S. darvÍ], a (wooden) ladle; a spoon; Abh
458 (katacchu -I); 1112; Dhp 64 (na so dhammatp.
vijanati -I silparasatp. yatha); Ja III 218,6 (rajiinatp. -iya
paharitva miiressiimi ti, Be so; Ee davya; Ce, Se
dal).gena); 425,4 (tilapit!hatp. ca tal).gulatp. ca
pacanathiilikatp. ca -itp. cadaya); V 389,25 (so sabbesatp.
-iya payasatp. adasi); Mil 365,13 (-iya ekatp. ari.gatp.
gahetabbatp.); Sp 851,33 (sace pana -itp. va u!uri.katp. va
gahetva anukkhipanto iiloleti); Ap-a 412,21 (karatalena
gahetva gahetabba -I katacchu); - 2. [S. lex. darvÍ], the
hood of a snake; ? - iic see below; - 0 (i)-kai}J}a, n.,
the edge of the ladle; J a I 347,28 (-en a thokatp. pighitp.
gahetva);- 0 (i)-gaha, mfn. (dabbi + giiha2], (one) who
holds the ladle; M II 157,16 (yesatp. tvatp. sacariyako na
PUI).l).O -o ti; Ps III 412,9 foil.: tesatp. sattannatp. isinatp.
dabbitp. gahetva pal).l).atp. pacitva dayako Pul).l).O nama
eko ahosi, so dabbigaQ.hanasippatp. jiinati); Pv 21 :54
(Ari.kurassa mahadiine -a upattJ!ita); - 0 (i)-padara, m.,
an oar (a spoon-board, a spoon-shaped piece of
wood ?); Pj II 330,22 (phiyena ti -ena);
0
(I)-paharaJ}a, n., a ladle as weapon;? Ja III 218,7
(rajanatp. dabbiya paharitva maressami ti ekatp.
dighadal).gakatp. -atp. gahetva, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se daQ.gena
paharitva ... dal).gappaharal).atp.); - 0 (i)-phaJ}a, m., the
hood of a snake; ? the bowl of a spoon; ? Vism 255,3
(hadayatthi --SaQ.!hanatp.); - 0 (l)-mukha, mfn., having
a spoon-shaped beak; Abh 637 (ato --dvijo); Ja VI
540,7· (ata ti dabbisaQ.tJliinamukhasakul).a, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee --sakul).a); - 0 -homa, m., an offering made with a
ladle; DI 9,5 (micchajivena jivikatp. kappenti
seyyathidatp. ailgatp. . . . aggihomatp. -atp. thusa-
homatp. ... ; Sv 93,2foll.: -' -adini pi aggihoman' eva,
evarilpaya dabbiya ... hute idatp. niima hoti ti).
dabbha 1, dabba 1, m. [S. darbha], darbha grass, kusa grass;
SAF: Demostachys bipinnata Stapf; a bunch of kusa
grass (used in sacrifices); Abh 602 (kuso barihisatp. -o);
1079 (kuso -e); DI 141,29 (tasmitp. ... yaññe ... na -a
lilyitp.su barihisatthaya, Be, Ee so; Ce dabbii; Se na
dabba layitp.su parihitp.satthaya; Sv 300,23: yiini ca
0
-til).ani . . . yaññasalatp. parikkhipanti bhilmiyatp. va
santharanti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dabbatil).iini); MI 344,9
(ettaka -a lilyantu barihisatthaya ti, Be, Ee so; Ce dabba;
Se dabba luyantu parisanthaya ti) = A II 207,32 (Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se dabba);- see also dabbi.
dabbha2 , see sv dabba2.
372 damaka
dabbhapuppha, n. [dabbha2 + puppha? cf S.
darbhapu~pa, 'name of an insect'], Npr. of a jackal;
Ja III 334,13* (vivado no samuppanno -a SUI).Ohi me, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se dabba-; 334,15·: -a ti o -samiinaVal).l).atiiya
tatp. alapati, Be, Ce, E e so; Se dabba-).
dabhakkaip, see sv daddabha.
dabheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup darbhati, darbhayati,
Wg § 34:15], fears; Sadd 556,Io (dabhi bhaye: ... -eti
-ayati).
dama, m. (sg. instr. -ena, -asa), l. (m.) [ts] (i) self-
control, self-restraint; subduing; forbearance; Abh 758
(-o ca damatho dan ti); 847 (paññopavasakhantisu -o
indriyasatp.vare); DI 53,! (diinena -ena satp.yamena
saccavajjena n' atthi puññatp.; Sv 160,9: -ena ti
indriyadamanena uposathakammena va; Sadd 488,18:
ettha uposathakammatp. -o ti vuttatp.); S I 168,13*
(saccena danto -asa u peto; Sadd 488,15: ettha hi
indriyasatp.varo -o ti vutto) = Sn 463; Dhp 261 (yarnhi
saccatp. ca dhammo ca ahitp.sa sa¡p.yamo -o)= Ja II 56,3*
(56,10": -o ti indriyadamanatp.); Pv 47:4 (diinassa -assa
satp.yamassa vipakatp.); Th 5 (yo duddamayo -ena danto;
Th-a I 45,15foll.: -ena ti uttamena aggamaggadamena ...
atha va -ena ti damakena purisadammasiirathina damito,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee atha va -ena ti damanena); Ja IV
358,7* (diinena samacariyaya satp.yamena -ena ca);
Mi124,2I* (sudantatp. uttame -e... Nagasenatp.);
Ap 117,7 (-ena uttameniihatp. damito' mhi mahesina, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr dhammena yuttameniihatp.);
Sadd 488,19 (damilpasamena ti [M III 269,17) ettha
khanti -o ti vutta); - (ii) (according to cts) under-
standing, wisdom; Abh 847; SI 215,4• (yass' ete caturo
dhamma ... saccatp. -o dhiti cago, E e so; Be dammo; Ce,
Ee 2, Se dhammo; = Sn 188: eds dhammo); 215,7* (yadi
sacca -a caga khantya bhiyyo 'dha vijjati, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be damma; cfPs V 85,16joll. [= Sadd 488,16joll.): yadi
sacca -a ... ti ettha pañña -o ti vutta) = Sn 189 (eds -a);
Sn 655 (tapena brahmacariyena satp.yamena -ena ca;
Pj II 472,16: -ena ti paññaya); Spk I 333,17 (sussilsatp.
labhate paññan ti [S I 214,34*) ettha sussilsanapañña-
niimena vutto -o, Ee so; Be dammo; Ce, Se dhammo; =
Pj II 237,5: eds dhammo); 333,29 (ettha sussilsana-
paññapadesena vutta -a, Ee so; Be, Se damma; Ce
dharnma) = Pj II 237,17 (eds -a); - (iii) punishment;
Abh 349 (dal).go tu siihasatp. -o);- 2. (mfn.) (i) that is
self-restraint; D III 229,2 (apara pi catasso patipada
akkhama patipada khama . . . dama . . . sama pa!ipada;
Sv 1021,36: indriyadamanatp. -a, Be, Se so; Ee -o; Ce
omits) f. A II 152,12 (Mp III 141,23: -a ti indriyadamana-
patipada); Nett 77,19 (-a patipada);- (ii) ifc, subduing;
- see ari-n-; - duddama, mfn., hard to tame or
control; Dhp 159 (atta hi kira -o); Th-a II 11,33 (-iinatp.
purisadarnmiinatp.); Pv-a 280,2 (-assa cittassa); -
sududdama, mfn., very hard to tame or control;
Saddh 367.
damaka, m., l. [ts] one who tames, who trains; Ap 322,15
(ye keci -a loke hatthi asse damenti 'me); Th-a III 51,17
(tava sasane -ena danta amha, Be, Se so; Ee damikena;
Ce omits); - ifc see assa- (sv assa3), go-, purisa-,
hatthi-; - 2. one who subsists on leavings in retum for
service oras an ascetic practice; Abh 467 (vighasado ca
damati
-o); V in 1 211,35 (anto vasetva bahi pacen ti -a
parivarenti; Sp 1093,11: -a ti vighasada); Th!422
(bhikkhaya ca vicarantaJ!l -a111 danta111 me pita bhru:tati;
or meaning l. ? cfThi-a 247,11: karuññadhighanataya
paresaif! cittassa -aJ!l . . . paradattabhikkhaya
vicaral)akam).
damati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dramati, Wg § 13:23], goes;
Sadd 412,13 (ama dama ... gatimhi: amati -ati ... ).
damatha, m. [S. lex., BHS id.], taming, subduing; control,
self-control; Abh 758 (damo ca -o dantt); D II 174,16
(bhaddakaJ!l vata bho hatthiyana111 sace -aJ!l upeyya ti);
III 54,28 (danto so bhagava -aya dhamma111 deseti);
Dhp 35 (cittassa -o sadhu); Ap 24,21 (uttame -e danto);
Sv 622,3* (tassa rañño ari asesa -a111 upenti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee damataJ!l, prob. wr); Mp III 370,1o (attana eva
danta111 na aññehi -aJ!l upan1ta111); Pj II 161,3 (anuttarena
-ena purisadamme dametu111 samatthabhavato, Ce, Ee
so; Be damanena; Se damakena); Sadd 860,26 (damana111
-o).
damana, n. [ts], taming, subduing; control; Ja III 373,23'
(raja hi coradinaJ!l arina111 -ato arindamo ti vuccati);
Mil 204,5 (vina danena -ena SaJ!lyamena uposatha-
kammena); Th-a Il 152,1 (uttamlinaJ!l assadammlinaJ!l -e
kusalo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr assadamana111); Ap-a 343,17
(taJ!l ragacittaJ!l damemi -aJ!l karomi); Sadd 488,12
(damu -e: dammati danto damo -aJ!l); 860,26 ( -a111
damatho); - duddamana, mfn. (or n.), hard to tame,
hard to control; (or control is hard); Vism 490,2
(manoviññlil)adhatu ... -ato assakh~mi.ko viya); - see
also adantadamana (sv dammati).
dameta(r), m. [from dameti, caus. of dammati], one who
tames or subdues; a trainer; M II 102,20 (bhagava
adantanaJ!l -a); Thi 135; Ap 460,21 (danto -a santo ca
sameta nibbuto isi).
dameti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of dammati qv.
dampati, m.(?) [S. dampati, dual], husband and wife;
2 sudantaJ!1); Dhp 94 (assa yatha sarathina sudanta); Ja IV
Abh 242 (jayampati tu -i); - see also da , jampati,
jayampat\' (sv jaya).
damphati, pr. 3 sg., see sv daphati.
dambati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup rambate, Wg § 10:14],
sounds; Sadd 406,28 (abi dabi sadde: ambati . . . -ati;
read rabi ... rambati ?).
dambha, m. [ts ], deceit, fraud; Abh 177 (-o sathYaifl ca
ketavam).
dambhaÚ\pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup rambhate, Wg § 10:24],
sounds; Sadd 408.12 (dabhi sadde: ... -ati; read rabhi ...
rambhati ?).
dambhati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup drbhati, darbhati,
darbhayati, Wg §§ 28:34, 34:16], strings or ties
together; Dhatum310 (dambha ganthane); Sadd410,6
(dabhi ganthane: -ati dambhanaJ!l).
dambhana, n. [from dambhati; cf S. darbhru:ta], stringing
together; Sadd 410,6.
damma\ mfn.,fpp of(caus. of) dammati qv.
damma 2 , pr. 1 pl. of dadati qv sv de ti.
dammati, -ate, pr. 3 sg. [S. damyati], is tamed, is
subdued; Dhatum 319 (damo dame); Sadd 488,12 (damu
damane: -ati danto damo damanaJ!l); 824,11 (yapaccayo
2
pubbarüpaJ!l apajjate y¡¡ ... -ate); - pp danta , mfn.
[S. danta], tamed, subdued; controlled; restrained;
373 dammati
Abh 749; Vin II 196,4• (adru:t<;lena asatthena nago -o
mahesina); D III 54,28 (-o so bhagava damathaya
dhamma111 deseti); S 1 65,25* (appiccho sorato -o);
141,30* (nago va -o carati anejo); Dhp 35 (cittassa
damatho sadhu citta111 -aJ!l sukhavahaif!); Th 5 (yo
duddamiyo damena -o); 441 (akkodhassa kuto kodho
-assa samajivino); JaiV 49,20* (-a kal)erü va
vasüpanlta); VI 258,7• (-o tapassi rnitapanabhojano;
258,10': -o ti indriyadamanena samannagato); PsI 194,22
(--ttam); Nidd-a 1 348,9 (--taya); - --bhümi,f, the
condition of one who is tamed; MIl 129,9 (danta va
--bhümi111 sampapul)eyyun ti; Ps III 358,3: dantehi
gantabbabhümi111); S III 84,2* (Spk Il 282,27: --bhümin ti
arahatta111); Bv 23:7;- neg. adantabhümi,f, Pj II 103,5;
1
- --vata,f(?), [danta+ va(t) + ta ?], the being (like)
one who is tamed; ? S 1 28,26 (danto vata bho samal)o
Gotamo, --vata ca samuppanna sañrika vedana
1
dukkha ... sato sampajano adhivaseti, Be, Ce, Ee , Se so;
Ei [59,10]: danto va ta ca pan' uppanna ... ; cfSpk I
80,13: nagavata ti nagabhavena; Spk-t [Be] 1 115,26/oll.:
nago viya vati pavattati ti nagavo tassa bhavo nagavata,
vibhattilopena h' esa niddeso, mahanagahatthisadisataya
ti attho; see also issaravata); - neg. adanta, mfn.,
untamed, wild; uncontrolled; S IV 70,3 (cha-y-ime
bhikkhave phassayatana adanta agutta ... dukkhadhivaha
honti); A 1 6,27 (cittaJ!l bhikkhave adantaJ!l mahato
anatthaya SaJ!lvattati ti); Pv 38:23 (adanta111 ko
damessati); Nidd I 448,5 (samru:tabrahmru:ta adanta
dantaVru:tJ.lena dissanti); Ps Il 223,32 (yatha dantena
gol)ena saddhi111 yojito adanto katipahaif! eva
visükayati); - adantadamana, mfn., taming the
untamed; Ap 80,13 (Ap-a 350,21: adante satte dameti ti
adantadamano); Vism 306,33* (adantadamanaJ!l dana111);
- sudanta, mfn., well-tamed; properly controlled; S IV
70,13 (cha-y-ime bhikkhave phassayatana sudanta
sugutta .. . sukhadhivaha honti); Sn 23 (citta111 ...
464,4•; Mil24,21* (sudanta111 uttame dame ...
NagasenaJ!l); Dhp-a III 143,25 (atta sudanto katabbo);
Th-a III 160,31 (sudantatta); - caus. pr. 3 sg. dameti,
-ayati, tames, makes tame; subdues; Vin II 196,3•
(dru:t<;len' eke -ayanti); A 1 168,19 (ekaJ!l attana111 -eti
ekaif! attana111 sameti); Dhp 159 (sudanto vata -etha;
Dhp-a III 144,10: attana sudanto hutva -eyya); Ja V
335,22 (patibalo ahaJ!l N3!agiri111 -etun ti); VI 584,19*
(asamiddhi -eti no); Mill9,1 (sadhu Nagasena gaccha
tVaJ!l MilindaJ!l rajlinaJ!l -eh! ti); Sadd 488,13 (damu
damane: ... karite cittaJ!l -eti -ayati ti rüpani); 844,25
(ari111 dameti ti Arindamo);- imperat. 2 sg. (a) damehi,
Vism 399,34 (ahaJ!l bhante -emi nan ti aha, -ehi ti
Moggallana ti); (b) damayahi, M III 132,16 (araññaka111
nagaJ!l -ayahi); (e) damassu, Thi 509 (kama111 kamesu
-assu); - fut. 3 sg. (a) damessati, M I 45,9 (so ... attana
danto ... paraJ!l -essati); Ja V 497,6 (idani Sutasomo
porisadaJ!l -essati); (b) damayissati, Ap 126,16 (danto
'ya111 -ayissati); 1 sg. (a) damessami, Ja II 143,6;
(b) damayissa111, Th 358; - part.pr. (a) damenta, mfn.,
Dhp-a III 40,16 (eko kassako attano gol)a111 -ento -etu111
nasakkhi); (b) damaya(t), mfn., A II 24,24* (danto
-ayata111 settho); Dhp 305 (eko -am aUlinaif!);
dammi
(e) dama(t), mfn., ? Vism 269,15* (yatha thambhe
nibandheyya vacchaJTI -aJT~ naro idha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
dammarp.) = Sp 406,1* (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dammaJTI);-
aor. 3 sg. (a) damesi, Mp I 133,7 (thero ... nagarajanarp.
-esi ti); (b) dametha, Ja VI 584,n· (asamiddhi yeva no
-eti ti -etha no ti pi patho -ayittha no ti attho );
(e) damayf, Bv 12:5 (yakkhaJTI so -ayi jino);
(d) damayittha 1, Ja VI 584,2r; 2 sg. damayittha2, Spk I
337,2 (kathaJTI bhante evaJTI daru!)arp. yakkhaJTI -ayittha
ti pucchirp.su) = Pj 11 240,15; - absol. (a) dametva,
damitva, Ja I 275,8 (yakkharp. tajjetva dhammaJTI desetva
-etva nibbisevanaJTI katva); V 508,25 (Sutasomo kira
porisadarp. -etva adaya idhagacchati); Mp II 20,16 (taJTI
cittaJT~ evaJTI -etva); Bv-a 212,16 (-itva, eds so);
(b) damayitva, Ap 475,16; Mi1362,14 (kayavacicittarp.
-ayitva); Vism 401,4; - pp damita, mfn., subdued,
tamed; Abh 749; Thi 50 (disva adantarp. -itaJTI); Ja III
329,16 (-ito me yakkho); IV 33,15' (-itatta); V 36,1;
Ap117,7 (-ito 'mhi mahesina); Vism207,n; -
neg.adamita,mfn., Spkll 381,16; Th-all 151,31;-
fpp (a) damma\ mfn. and m. [S. damya], l. (mfn.) to be
tamed or restrained; untamed; trainable; Vism 269,15*
(yatha thambhe nibandheyya vacchaJTI -arp. naro idha,
Ce so; Be, Ee, Se damarp.) = Sp 406,1* (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
damarp.); V v-a 86,6 ( -anaJTI dametabbanaJTI veneyyanarp.
nibbanabhimukhaJTI saral)ato dammasarathi); - ifc see
assa- (sv assa\ go-, purisa-, hatthi-;- 2. (m.) a steer, a
young bullock; Abh 496 (-o vacchataro); Vism 210,1
(vaccho -o ba1ivaddo ti evamadi avatthikaJTI [namarp.)) =
Sp 122,22;- --go,f, a young, untamed cow; MI 225,28
(gopalako ... pataresi ba1avagavo --gavo, Be, Ce so; E e,
Se --gave; Ps II 266,32: --gavo ti dametabbago!)e e' eva
avijatagavo ca); (b) damiya (and damaya ?), mfn.,- ifc
see duddamiya; (e) dametabba, mfn., to be tamed;
Dhp-a III 144,12 (yatha so sudanto hoti tatha dametabbo
ti); Th-a I 45,16 (puna dametabbatabhavato).
dammi, pr. 1 sg. o.fdadati qv sv deti.
daya, see sv dvaya.
dayati\pr. 3 sg., see sv ~eti 1 .
dayati 2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. dayate; S. Dhatup dayate,
Wg §§ 14:9, 22:66], Dhatup 230 (daya danagatihirp.sa-
danesu); Dhatum 337 (daya danagatirakkhahirp.sadisu);
Sadd 420,7 (daya danagatihirp.sadanarakkhasu); l. sym-
pathises with; has pity on; cherishes; protects; Ja VI
495,3* (puttesu Maddi -esi sassuya sasurarnhi ca, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee dayyasi; 495,r: dayarp. mettaJTI kareyyasi)
quoted Sadd 421,2 (-esi); Sadd 420,7 (-ati daya); 420,29
(-anti anurakkhanti); - 2. goes; Sadd 420,17 (-ati
gacchati); 420,32.foll. (gijjho . . . maJT!sapesirp. adaya
-eyya . . . -eyya ti uppatitva gaccheyya; quoting MI
364,29: eds uMayeyya); - 3. harms; Sadd 420,19 (-ati
va hirp.sati karu!)ikarp.); - 4. takes; Sadd 420,23 (-anti
gal)hanti); - pp dayita, mfn. and-a, f [ts], l. (mfn.)
cherished; dear; Abh 697 (-arp. vallabharp. piyaJTI);
Thi 405 (eka dhita piya manapa -a ca; Thi-a 245,27:
anukampitabba); Ap 588,1 (ciranugataJTI -aJT~ atikkantarp.
manoharaJTI, Be, Se so; Ee dassitarp.; Ce ciranupari
asinarp.); Cp 3:2:1 (kamito -o putto; Cp-a 186,16:
piyayito); - atidayita, mfn., very dear, much-loved;
Ap 581,2 (tassatidayita asirp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se tassapi
374 dara
dutiyika); - 2. (j) a (beloved) woman; Abh 230 (kanta
rama!)i -a); Sadd 363,31* (ramal)! pamada -a); -
fpp dayitabba, mfn., J a III 95 ,20* (bhütarp. sesaJTI -arp.,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sesarp. sesaJTI; 96,23': jivamanarp. eva
-arp. mettayitabbarp., Ce, Se so; Ee -arp. dayayitabbarp.
mettayitabbaJTI; Be -arp. piyayitabbaJTI mettayitabbaJTI);
VI 445,24* (evaJTI Pañcalaca!)~O te -o rathesabha; 446,3':
-o ti piyayitabbo) quoted Sadd 421,2; - see also
dayayitabba.
dayati3 , se e sv de ti.
dayii, f [ts], sympathy, compassion, kindness (towards,
usually loe.); Abh 160 (dayanukampa karuññam); MI
78,34 (yava udabindumhi pi me -a paccupaghita hoti);
Sn 117 (yassa pa!)e -a n' atthi tarp. jañña vasa1o iti);
Bv 2:143 (sabbaJTI sahati nikkheparp. na karoti patighaJTI
-arp., Ce, Ee so; Be taya; Se patighaddayaJTI; Bv-a 109,3o:
taya ti taya vuttiya taya nikkhittataya va, patigharp. -an ti
pi patho, tassa tena nikkhepena patighanurodhaJTI na
karoti ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee taya nikhantiya);
Cp 3:15:3 (sabbesarp. samako homi -a kopo na vijjati);
Sadd 420,7 foil. (-a ti metta pi vuccati karu1,1a pi); -
0
'-iipanna, mfn., full of compassion and kindness; DI
4,2 (samal)o Gotamo nihitada!)~O nihitasattho 1ajji -o
sabbapa!)abhütahitanukampi viharati ti; Sv 70,27: -o ti
dayarp. mettacittalaJTI apanno, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
mettacittaJTI); Mil402,4 (yogina . . . 1ajjina -ena
sabbapiil)abhütahitanukampina bhavitabbaJTI); Sv 70,29
(--taya); V v-a 23.29 (hirottappasampanno -o sabba-
sattesu); - neg. adayapanna, mfn., M 1 286,15 (ekacco
pa!)atipati hoti ... adayapanno piil)abhütesu; Ps II 329,24:
nikkaru!)ataJTI apanno) t A V 264,13;- 0 '-iilaya, m., a
repository of compassion;? Ap 461,9 (samasamo
asahayo -o, Be, Se so; Ce dayasayo; Ee wr dayayaso);
- niddaya, mfn., pitiless, unkind, cruel; Abh 928
(kurüro tisu -e); Mil384,14 (tejo -o akaru!)iko);
Ap-a459,s (rakkhaso ... -o ghorarüpo); Saddh 143
(-ehi manussehi); -arp., adv., without pity;
Saddh 159.
dayayitabba, mfn. ffpp of *dayayati, denom. from daya],
to be treated with compassion and kindness; Ja III 96,23'
(jivamanam eva dayitabbaJTI -arp. mettayitabbarp., Ee so,
but perhaps wr; Ce, Se dayitabbarp. mettayitabbarp.; Be
dayitabbarp. piyayitabbarp. mettayitabbarp.); - see also
dayati 2.
dayii1u, mfn. [ts], compassionate, taking pity (on);
Abh 727 (karu!)iko -u pi); Ja TI 360,17' (tvarp. -u
anukampako maJTI imamha dukkha mocehi); IV 270,19
(-una sarabharajena); Sadd 790,19 (a1upaccayo hoti
tabbahulatthe ... -u).
dayiiluka, mfn. [ts ], compassionate, taking pity on:
Sp 220,11 (kataparadharp. viya puttaJTI anukampaka
matapitaro -ena cittena Sudinnarp. paribhasanto);
Sv 199,28 (-a purisa); Mhv 36:94.
dayyiisi, see sv dayati 2.
dayhati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of ~ahati qv.
dara 1, m. [cfS. jvara and J. Brough, 1962, pp. 185-86].
l. being hot; fever; distress; Abh 1111 (-o
darathabhitisu); Vin II 156,27* (vineyya hadaye -arp.) -;.
Thi 32 (Thi-a 36,31.foll.: cittagatarp. ki1esadarathaJTI
samucchedavasena vinetva ti); Vv 83:8 (varina viya
dara
osiñc~ sabbaiTI nibbapaye -aiT~; Vv-a 327,13: nibbapayi
darathaiTI sokaparijahaiT~) = Ja III 157,8*; Ja VI 295,19*
(kas~ sas~ -aiT~ balyaiTI khii).arnedho nigacchati;
295,25': -an ti kayadarath~); Mhv 38:100
(aññarnaññabhilapena nibbapesuiTI mahadaraiTI);
Sadd 426,18 (0 -saddo ca kayadarathe cittadarathe
ki1esadarathe ca vattati); 431 ,31 (dara dahe: .. , -o
daratho); - 2.fear; Abh 1111; - 0 -klama, m., fever
and fatigue; Ja V 397 ,7* (sa bhutta , , . han ti ... khudaiTI
pipasaiTI aratiiT~ -aiT~, Be, Ce so; Se darathaiTI kilaiTI; Ee
wr dura-; 397,w foil.: catutthaiTI kayadarathaiTI
pañcamaiTI klamaiTI kilantabhav~); - adara, mfn.,
free from distress; S li 103,11 (yattha n' atthi ayatiiTI
jatijaramaraJ).aiTI asok~ t~ bhikkhave -am
anupayasan ti vadami); - niddara, mfn., id.; Dhp 205
(-o hoti nippapo dhammapitirasaiTI piv~) = Sn 257
(Pj II 299,16: kilesaparijahabhavena -o)= Ja III 196,23*;
- sadara, saddara, mfn., associated with distress; M 1
464,12 (asava sankilesika ponobhavika -a dukkhavipaka)
t Nidd 1 70,2s (Nidd-a I 200,wfoll.: kilesadaratha ettha
santi ti -a, saddara ti pi patho, sahadaratha ti attho, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee kilesadaratha etesaiTI santi ti saddara, -a ti
pi patho ... ); S li lOl,18 (yattha atthi ayatiiTI
jatijaramaral).aiTI sasokaiTI taiTI bhikkhave -aiT~ sa-
2 1
upayasan ti vadami); -se e also jara , darati , vitaddara
2
(sv veti ).
dara 2, m.(?) [from darati 2; cfadara], respect; Sadd 426,16
(dara adaranadaresu: darati adarati ... ettha ca darati ti
-arn k aro ti ti ca anadaram k aro ti ti ca attho ).
*dar~3 , mfn. [ts], breaking~- see purindada.
darati\ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. jvarati], burns; is feverish;
Dhatum 361 (dara dahe vidarane ); Sadd 431 ,31 (dara
dahe: kayo -ati daro daratho);- .see also jarati2, dara 1.
darati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ,/df, driyate, Wg § 28:118],
respects, honours; shows disrespect; Sadd 426,15foll.
(dara adaranadaresu: -ati adarati anadarati ... ettha ca
-ati ti daram karoti ti ca anadaram karoti ti ca attho ).
i
darate, pr. sg., l. [S. Dhatup ilf, d!l).ati, Wg § 31:23],
splits; breaks open; Dhatup 247 (dara daral).e);
Dhatum361; Sadd431,3o (dara vidaral).e: bhumiiTI -ati
kuddalo); - pp darita, mfn., Vibh-a 367,3 (kandaran ti
kam vuccati udak~ tena daritaiTI udakena bhinnaiTI
pabbatappadesaiTI, eds so); - caus. pp darita, mfn.,
split; divided; Abh 748 (-e bhinnabhedit~); Sv 209,25
(kandaran ti k~ vuccati udakaiTI tena -~ udakena
bhinn~ pabbatapades~) t Spk II 54,21 t Th-a II
229,s; - 2. [S. Dhatup ,/df, darati, darayati, d!l).ati,
Wg § 19:47], fears; Sadd 426,13 (dara bhaye: -ati dañ);
- se e also dalati 2.
daratha, m. [see dara 1], being hot or inflamed; distress;
exhaustion; Abh 1111 (daro darathabhitisu); M III 104,23
(ye assu -a gamasaññaiT~ paricca te 'dha na santi);
287,3Ifoll. (tassa kayika pi -a pava99hanti cetasika pi -a
pava99hanti kayika pi santapa . . . kayika pi parijaha
pava99hanti ... ); Ja II 269,23* (vinetu sltaiT~ -~ ca
kevalaiT~); Nidd I 344,6 (sabbe -e sabbe parijahe sabbe
san tape ... sameti); Ap 309,24 ( -aiT~ nabhijanami citta-
santapanaiTI mama); Cp 1:10:18 (sabb~ sameti -~
yatha sitodak~ vi ya); Vism 636,1 (tassa ... nisinnassa
kayacittanaiTI n' eva -o na garav~ na kakkhajata ... );
375 dalidda
Sv 597,34 (thokaiTI vissarnitva -aiT~ parippassambhetva);
Dhp-a II 215,2 (ekaratten' eva visayojanasatikaiTI
maggaiTI agatatta -o pi 'ssa balava, so pi tava
patippassambhatu ti); Pj II 24,15 (kilesa parijahaghena -a
nama); Patis-a560,7 (ul).haghena -o ti); Sadd431,31
(dara dahe: ... daro -o); - niddaratha, mfn. and n.,
free from heat, from distress; freedom from distress;
Patis-a483,14 (asaraddho ti -o); Sadd 747,11foll.
(darathassa abhavo -aiT~ . . . ettha ca n' atthi daratho
etassa ti -o puriso);- sadaratha, mfn., associated with
distress; It-a I 152,23 (sah' eva darathehi parijahehi
vattanato -aiT~).
dañ, f [ts], a cleft; a hale; a cave, a cavern; Abh 609
(dar! 'tthi kandaro dvisu); Jaii 418,10* (-iya
sattavassani ... vasamase; 418,15': -iya ti mal).iguhaya);
III 172,17* (tasma sil~ -iya pakkhipami, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se selaiTI kandarayaiTI); VI 14,22* (-ito pabbatato va) t
Ap 344,25 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dalito); Pj II 500,1
(padaresü ti -!su); Sadd 426,14 (dara bhaye: ...
bhayitabbaghena -!); - ifc see giri-, pasill).a-; -
0
-mukha, n., the entrance of a cave; Vism 110,4
1
(gambhlre -e ... vasitabbaiT~);- 0 -saya , m(fn). [dar!+
2
saya ], (one) who lives in a cave or hale; Bv 2:96
(bilasaya -a; Bv-a 10l,1s: -a ti jharasaya, ayam eva va
2 3
patho);- 0 -saya , m. [dari + saya ], a home or lair in a
hale or cleft; Cp 3:7:1 (yada ah~ kapi asiiTI nad!küle
-e; Cp-a 227,28: ekissa nadiya tire ekasmiiTI dañbhage).
,/dal1, se e dalati 1.
,/dae, [cf S. ,/dra, intens. daridrati], to be poor;
Dhatum 380 (dala duggatiyaiTI); Sadd 391,19foll. (garü
pana Kaccayanamatavasena dala duggatimhi ti duggati-
vacakada1adhatuto iddappaccayaiTI katva daliddo ti
namapad~ dassesuiTI); - see also daliddati.
,/dae, see dalati 2.
dala, n. [ts], a small piece, a fragment; a blade, a leaf, a
peta/; Abh 543 (-aiT~ palasaiTI chadanaiTI); Sadd 537,13
(pattaiT~ palaso -aiT~); - ifc se e akkhi- (sv akkhi \
uppala-, kamala-, cakkhu-, til).a-.
dalati\pr. 3 sg. [,/dal 1; cfS. jvalati?], blazes; Dhatum 379
2
(dala dittividaral).e);- see also jalati , daddallati.
dalati2 , pr. 3 sg. [,/dal 3; S. dalati, Wg §§ 15:41, 19:57,
33:78], splits; opens (as a bud); Sadd 434,15 (dala phala
visaral).e: -ati phalati dalito rukkho ); - pp dalita, mfn.
[ts], split; unfolded; Sadd 434,15; - caus. pr. 3 sg.
daleti, -ayati, splits; tears apart; Dhatup 263 (dala
vidaral).e); Dhatum 379; Th 544 (avijjaiTI -ayissami);
1146 (-emu maccuno senaiTI); Mil398,1o (hatthi nama
caranto yeva pathaviiTI -eti); Nidd-a 1 61,16 (bhag~
-ayati ti bhagandala); Sadd 564,22 (dala vidaral).e: -eti
-ayati); - aor. 1 sg. dalayiiT~, Ap 424,6 (-ayiiTI
kamabandhan~); - absol. (a) dalayitva, Sn 29 (nago
putilataiT~ va -ayitva; Pj II 40,29: -ayitva ti chinditva);
Cp 3:2:15 (tamaiTI -ayitva); (b) daletva, Pj II 41,12; -
pp da1ita, mfn., split; torn apart; Mil 288,6 (chinnani
-itani padalitani); - da1ito in Ee at Ap 344,25 is prob.
wr; Be, Ce, Se, Ja VI 14,22* darito; see also Ap 402,15:
darito; - fpp da1etabba, mfn., Mil 398,11 (sabbe kilesa
-etabba);- see also darati 3.
dalidda 1, daJidda, mf(-a, -I)n. and m.f [S. daridra], poor,
needy; a poor man; a poor woman; Abh 739 (akiñcano
dalidda
-o ca); Vin I 342,6 (Dighiti nama Kosa1araja ahosi -o
appadhano appabhogo); MI 450,34 (puriso -o assako
ana!hiyo); SI 34,16* (-e jayare ku1e); V 100,19
(sattannaq¡ bho bhikkhu bojjhañganaq¡ abhavitatta
abahu1ikatatta -o ti vuccati); A III 353,22* (-o iQ.aqt
adaya bhuñjarnano vihaññati); Vv 20:1 (-a kapaQ.a nari;
V v-a 101,24foll.: -a ti duggata ... -a ti imina tassa
bhogaparijuññaq¡ dasseti kapaQ.a ti imina
ñatiparijuññaq¡); Th 620 (nice ku1arnhi jato 'haq¡ -o
appabhojano); Ja I 324,27 (na panahaq¡ -o asukaghane
me cattalisa hiraññakotiyo nidahita); III 70,6* (ya -1
-assa a~~ha aMhassa kittima; 70,9·: ya sa -assa
samikassa 0 -kale sayaq¡ pi -1 hutva); 411,15" CO-taya
parassa karnmaq¡ katva jivikaq¡ kappento); IV 127,2*
(a~~ha e' eva -a ca sabbe maccuparayana); 296,21*
(karaQ.1yani mittani -enapi); V 433,11 (aghahi ... thiinehi
itthi samikaq¡ avajanati 0 -ta aturata ... ; 435,3o·: 0 -ta ti
0
-taya); VI 228,24" (duritthiya -iya kapaQ.aya kumbha-
dasiya kucchimhi jato 'srni, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -aya);
Mil 360,9 (adhana kapaQ.a -a duggatajana); Sp 51,1 (yo
hi koci maharaja a~~ho va -o va attano orasaq¡ puttaq¡
pabbajeti ayaq¡ vuccati maharaja dayado sasanassa ti);
Dhp-a II 84,9 (so pana parikkhil).avibhavo -o);
Saddh 528 (nidhi1addhassa -assapi); Sadd 391,13foll.
(-o ti duggatamanusso -i ti duggataniiñ); - adalidda,
adaJidda, mfn., not poor; S V 100,24; A II 57,11 * (-o ti
ahu amoghaq¡ tassa jivitaq¡) Th 508;
sudalidda, mfn., very poor; Ja III 131 ,18'.
dalidda 2 , n.? [cfS. daridra], poverty;? Ap 361,25
(deva1oke manusse va -e duggatimhi va nibbattiq¡ me na
passami, eds so).
daliddaka, daJiddaka, mfn. [da1idda + ka2], poor;
Th 1106 (iQ.ago va -o nidhiq¡ aradhayitva dhanikehi
pi!ito); Ja VI 178,23 (eko 0 -brahmaQ.o, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
dalidda-).
daliddati, pr. 3 sg. [S. daridrati (intens. of .Jdra),
Wg § 24:65], is in need; is poor; Dhatup 158 (dalidda
duggatiyaq¡); Dhatum 230; Sadd 391,7 foll. (dalidda
duggatiyaq¡: . . . -ati daliddo . . . -aH ti sabbaq¡
icchiticchitaq¡ paraq¡ yacitva eva dukkhena adhigacchati
na ayacitva ti attho ... sabbarn eva -aH ti 1okikapayoga-
dassanato -atl ti kiriyapadaq¡ vibhavitaq¡, sasane pana
taq¡kiriyapadaq¡ na agataq¡);- see also vlctae.
daliddiya, daJiddiya, see sv daliddiya.
daJha, mfn. [S. dr~ha, dr!ha], l.firm, strong; salid;
Abh 41 (bhusarn atisayo -aq¡); Vin I 344,18 (-aya
rajjuya); D III 84,18 (tathagate saddha nivittha mülajata
patighita -a); M II 7,17 (civarani dharemi -ani); 232,25
(sa ... -e thambhe va khile va upanibaddho); SI 77,12*
(na taq¡ -aq¡ bandhanarn ahu dh1ra yad ayasaq¡); Dhp 61
(ekacariyaq¡ -aq¡ kayira); 349 (esa kho -aq¡ karoti
bandhanaq¡) quoted Pet 60,11* (Ce so; Be, Ee ga¡haq¡);
Sn 321 (navaq¡ -arn aruhitva); 701 (santhambhassu -o
bhava; Pj II 491,29: thiro hohi); Th 680 (oghapaso -o
khilo, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce da!hakhi1o); Ja III 294,7 (tesaq¡
aññarnaññaq¡ vissaso -o ahosi); 318,15* (mittehi -ehi);
IV 209,4* (kiq¡ daruq¡ nemiya -aq¡); 449,22* (-asmi müle
visate virü!he); V 172,28* (rajjuq¡ gahetvana -aq¡ ca
pasaq¡); VI 583,12* (-aq¡ katvana manasaq¡); Nidd I
405,24* (passa karnmanaq¡ 0 -ttaq¡); Ap 6,3 (katva -arn
376 daJha
adhighanaq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee saccarn); 39,7 (pakaraq¡
karayiq¡ -aq¡); Mil 324,18 (-aq¡ thiraq¡ aca1aq¡
abhayatthanaq¡); Th-a I 6,26 (ativiya -anaq¡ tikkhanaq¡
ca catunnaq¡ dathanaq¡); - -aq¡, adv., firmly; strongly;
D III 147,8* (-aq¡ sarnadaya); SI 49,10* (-arn enaq¡
parakkarne) = Dhp 313; Sn 332 (-aq¡ sikkhatha santiya);
892 (sakayane tattha -aq¡ vadana); Ja 11 186,6 (ubhohi pi
hatthehi kaQ.Q.e -aq¡ pidahiq¡su); Mi1254,8 (aniccan ti
-aq¡ gal).hati); Vism 269,17* (bandheyy' evaq¡ sakaq¡
cittaq¡ satiyararnmaQ.e -aq¡); 336,25 (ekaq¡ vatthaq¡ -aq¡
nivasetva); - 2. harsh; violent; Abh 714 (kurüraq¡
kathinaq¡ -aq¡); - 0
-m-attalakotthaka, mfn., with
strong gatehouses and watchtowers; Th 863 (ucce
maQ.~alipakare -e); Ja IV 106,16 (ukkiQ.Q.antaraparikhaq¡
-aq¡ .. . puraq¡); - o' -uddapa, mfn., having a strong
surrounding mound or rampart; D 11 83,9 (paccantimaq¡
nagaraq¡ -aq¡ da¡hapakaratoraQ.aqt, Ce, Ee so; Be
o• -uddhapaq¡; Se o -dvaraq¡; Sv 880,22: thirapakara-
padaq¡) = S IV 194,11 (Ce, Ee so; Be 0 '-uddhapaq¡; Se
nagaraq¡ da!haq¡ pakaratoraQ.aqt) = A V 194,24 (Ce, E e
so; Be 0 '-uddhapaq¡; Se da!haddalaq¡);- 0 -tara, mfn.,
campar., firmer, stronger; -aq¡, adv., more firmly, more
strongly; Ja IV 210,22* (evaq¡ -aq¡ siya); Sp 227,33 (-aq¡
sikkhapadaq¡ akasi); Sv 699,26 (-aq¡ upattharnbhento);
Th-a II 158,21 (yo pi -1\hi apadahi akkharnbhan1yo);-
0
-dhanu, n. and mfn., l. (n.) a strong bow; Mp IV 200,20
(-uq¡ gahetva thito); Vv-a 261,9 (-u nama
dvisahassathamaq¡ vuccati);- 2. (mfn.) having a strong
bow; Spk I 116,29 ( 0 -dharnmo ti -u, uttarnappamiil).ena
dhanuna sarnannagato ); 268,24 (-uno, uttarnaparnanaq¡
acariyadhanuq¡ dharayamana);- 0 -dhamma\ n. (m. ?)
[da!ha + dharnma 1], (what is) firm, enduring, by nature;
Sn 344 (--dassi; Pj II 347,26 foll.: --dass1 ti bhagavantaq¡
alapati, -an ti nibbanaq¡ abhijjanatthena, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se -o ti) = Th 1264;- 0 -dhamma 2 , 0 -dharnma(n), mfn.
and m. [da!ha + dharnma2; cfS. dr~hadhanvan], having a
strong bow; a good archer; M I 82,35 (-o dhanuggaho
sikkhito katahattho katüpasano; Ps 11 52,5: -o
dhanuggaho ti da¡haq¡ dhanuq¡ gahetva thito issaso);
Vv 63:1 (-a nisarassa dhanuq¡ olubbha titthasi;
Vv-a 261,9: -a ti 0 -dhanu); Ja VI 77,25* (issatthe e' asrni
kusa1o -o ti vissuto; ?8,1·: -o ti 0 -dhanuq¡ sahassa-
tthamaq¡ dhanuq¡ oropetuq¡ ca aropetuq¡ ca sarnattho );
580,4• (vipphalentu ca capan! -a paharino):
Sadd 163,18joll.; - 0 -dhammi(n), mfn. [cf S. dr~ha­
dhanvin], having a strong bow; SI 185,24* (uggaputta
mahissasa sikkhita -ino; Spk I 268,24: -ino ti 0 -dhanuno)
= Th 1210;- 0 -bhatti, mfn.,firmly devoted; Ja V 69,16
(-1hi amaccehi); 146,22* (kalyiil).amitto -i ca hoti, Be, E e
so; Ce, Se -!); Vv-a 215,2o (-1 ratanattaye niccala-
pasadasineha); - 0
-bhattika, mfn., id., Vv-a 316,24
(mahasattena -o hutva); Th-a III 79,6;- atidaJha, mfn.,
very strong, very firm; -aq¡, adv., very strongly, ver:r
firmly; Dhp-a 1I 190,14 (natida!haq¡ arakkhaq¡ kariq¡su):
Ud-a 236,13 (-aq¡ patighati); Bv-a 194,26 (uggada¡han ti
-aq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee uggaq¡ da!han ti; adBv 11:14:
Be akasiq¡ uggada¡haq¡ dhitiq¡; Ce uggaq¡ da!hadhitiq¡:
E e, Se uggaq¡ da!haq¡ dhitiq¡); Vibh-a 511,27 (atiba¡han
ti -aq¡); - se e also kayada!h1bahula (sv kaya).
da!hikamrna, da!hikaraQ.a.
daJhaka
daJhaka, mfn. [da~ha + ki],flnn, strong; Th-ai 67,4 (-a
nu kho imesarp theranarp metti no -a ti, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be datha; = Mp I 262,25: eds da!ha).
da!hiya, n. [cf S. darghya], strength; flnnness; Ja III 313,9•
(niccarp ubbiggahadayassa kuto kakassa -arp; 313,14':
evariipassa mayharp kakassa kuto da~híbhavo, Be so; Ce,
Se da!hi-; Ee daJha-).
daJhikamma, daJhikamma, n. [daJha + kamma; cf S.
drghikar~a], making flnn, strengthening; conflnnation;
Abh 790 (-e ... sadhu, Be so; Ce daJhi-); V in I 290,16
(anujanami bhikkhave aggatarp ... -an ti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee dathi-; Sp 1128,27: -an ti anuddharitva va upassayarp
katva all!yapanakarp vatthakhal).garp); Vibh 357,13 (-arp
kodhassa, ayarp vuccati upanaho); Vism 122,27
(jil).l).acivaresu -arp va tunnakammarp va katabbarp);
Sv 74,25 (-arp katta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dathi-); PsI 19,s
(sadhukasaddo yeva -e al).attiyan ti pi vuccati); Nidd-a I
21,2 (punappunarp bh~anam eva -arp nama); - see
also dathlkar~a.
daJhikara~Ja, n. [S. drghlkar~a], making flrm,
strengthening; confinnation; Sp 1127,19 (glvavethana-
nhane o• -attharp aññarp suttasarpsibbitarp agantuka-
patarp); Ps III 401,2 (tato narp puna pi 0 '-attharp pucchi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dathi-); Pj II 290,7 ( 0 '-atthaya ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se 0 -taya ti); Sadd 902,2o (hi tatha hi ice ete
0
'-atthe);- see also dathlkamma.
daJhayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. drghayati], makes firm,
strengthens; Sadd 587,21 (daJharp karoti viriyarp -ayati)
= 824,1.
;'dav 1, [cfS. Dhatup dunoti, Wg §§ 26:24, 27:10], to be
bumt, ajjlicted; Dhatum 418 (davo tu davane).
;dav2 , see davati.
;dav3 , [cfS. Dhatup drul).oti, Wg § 27:33 ?], to cut;
Dhatum 417 (sarane chedane davo).
dava 1, m. [S., S. lex.· id.], l. a wood on flre; flre; buming;
Sadd 866,15 (davanarp -o); - 2. a wood; Abh 1126
(kanane -o); - 0 -.,.aha, 0 -daha, m., a forest-flre; a
~mod on fire; Vin II 138,2o (-e gayhamane vihara
gayhanti); MI 306,14 (-o va gaheyya); Ja I 461,2s;
Cp 3:9:3 (sarpvacchare gimhasamaye -o padippati;
Cp-a 233,21: sukkharukkhasakhanarp aññamaññarp
ghaqanasamuppannena aggina tasmirp padese -o);
Yli1189,21 (mahiya -e samughite); Vism 36,14;
Sp 1214,13 (-arp va udakogharp agacchantarp va disva);
-
0
-.,.ahaka, m., one who bums woods; Vin II 138,17
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü dayarp a1impenti, manussa
ujjhayanti . . . seyyatha pi -a ti); Spk I 236,22 (y e
- · -adayo bahüni daruni jhapenti, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
3 tathagatabalani yehi balehi samannagato tathagato
chava-); -see also adavarp, daya .
2
dava , m. [cfS. drava ?], sport, play; joking; Abh 176
(parihaso -o khigga); 1126 (knayarp ... -o); Vin Il
13,25foll. (kayikena -ena samannagato hoti vacasikena
-ena samannagato hoti; Sp 1157,26: kayiko -o nama
kayikaklta vuccati); III 113,29 CO' -atthaya ti
khiggadhippayo ); 82,29 (na ca bhikkhave -aya si la
pavijjhitabba; Sp 468,2: -aya ti -ena hassena khiggaya ti
attho); IV 4,22 (anapatti -a bhal).ati rava bhanati, -a
bh~ati nama sahasa bh~ati); 197,3o (na bhikkhave
buddharp va dhammarp va saiJ.gharp va arabbha -o
katabbo; Sp 893,31: -o ti parihasavacanarp); MI 10,9
377 dasa
(patisaiJ.kha yoniso pil).gapatarp patisevati n' eva-aya na
madaya na mal).ganaya na vibhüsanaya); A III 226,18
(tassa sa hoti brahmani n' eva kamattha na o• -attha na
ratattha, pajattha va brahmal).assa brahm~í hoti); Ja II
363,14 (-arp karonto); III 315,14* (-a katarp); Dhs 1346;
Mil 366,3o (ajjhohararp ajjhoharitabbarp n' eva -aya na
madaya na mal).ganaya ... ); Sp 1327,22/oll. (kayiko -o
nama pasakadíhi jütakítanabhedo anacaro, vacasiko -o
nama mukhaJambarakar~adibhedo anacaro); Nidd-a I
343,32 (naccagltakabbasi1okasaiJ.khato -o);
0
-kamma, n., joking, making fun; Nidd I 379,18
( ... natakarp lasarp gítarp -arp, ayarp vacasika khigga;
Nidd-a I 412,1: -an ti hassaknakaraJ?.arp);
0
-ppaluddha, mfn., seduced by sport or play;? Ja III
260,14* (-o puriso sabbamittehi dharpsati, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee 0 -ppaladdho; 260,2s-foll.: riipadísu kamagul).esu
nirantaradavena paluddho abhibhüto vasarp gato, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee nirantararp davena paladdho abhibhüto vase
kato);- see also adavam.
davati, pr. 3 sg. [v'da~ 2 ; S. Dhatup davati, dravati,
Wg § 22:46, 47], goes; runs; Dhatup 132 (du gamane);
Dhatum 232 (du gatívuddhyarp); 417 (saral).e chedane
davo); Sadd 374,sfoll. (du gatiyarp: -ati dumo, ettha ca
-ati gacchati ... vepullarp papul).atí ti dumo ); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. davayati, makes run; puts to flight;? Sv 156,26
(pil).gadayika ti sahasikamahayodha, te kira parasenarp
pavisitva pil).gam iva chetva chetva -anti, Ce so; Ee
pil).gadavika ti; Be dayanti; Se nayanti; = Mp IV 54,15:
Be dayanti; Ce, Ee dassanti; Se nayanti).
davathu, m. [ts], heat, pain; Abh 328 (-u paritapo);
Sadd 866,1s (davanarp davo: tena nibbatto -u).
davana, n. [cfv'dav 1, dava 1], buming; Dhatum418 (davo
tu -e); Sadd 866,14 (-am davo).
davya, n. [cfdabba3 ?],fi~ness; ? - ifc see sañra-.
davya, see sv dabbl.
dasa 1, num. [S. dasan] (nom.!acc. dasa (and dasarp, dasa),
instr.!abl. dasahi, dasabhi; gen.!dat. dasannarp;
loe. dasasu), ten; Vin I 83,32 (anujanami bhikkhave
sam~eranarp -a sikkhapadani); III 3,31 (kukkutiya
al).giini aqha va -a va dvadasa va); DI 13,17
(anussarati ... ekarp pi jatirp ... pañca pi jatiyo -a pi
jatiyo ... ) t Vibh 343,28 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dasarp); D Il
14,7 (añña itthika nava va -a va mase gabbharp kucchina
pariharitva vijayanti); 139,15 (yebhuyyena Ánanda -asu
lokadhatiisu devata sannipatita tathagatarp dassanaya) t
SI 26,5 (-ahi ca lokadhatühi devatayo); D III 173,6•
(danta idha honti ... caturo -a; Sv 938,23: cattaro -a
cattarísarp); MI 69,31 (-a... imani ... tathagatassa
asabharp rhanarp parijanati); 446,27 (imehi .. . -ah'
aiJ.gehi samannagato bhadro assajanlyo rajaraho hoti);
S I 154,30* (bhíyo pañcasata sekha -a ca dasadha satarp,
eds so, me?; Spk I 221,11: ettha -a ti das' eva, dasadha
-a ti satarp); II 84,31 (-annarp va kaqhavahanarp vísaya
va kaghavahanarp); Snp. 87,7 (ekassa pi dadami ...
-annarp pi dadami ... ); Thl 102 (-a putte vijayitva); Ja I
25,2o foll. (-a paramiyo -a upaparamiyo -a
paramatthaparamiyo ti); 260,2 (-a rajadhamme
akopento); 401,11* (disa catasso vidisa catasso uddharp
adho -a disa imayo) = Sn 1122 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dasa
das a
disata); Ja IV 379,2 (pasado pana -ahi masehi nitthito);
V 20,7* (dadami ... ajaññayutte ca rathe -a ime); 378,12*
(tJlito -asu dhammesu paralokaJ11 na santase; 378,32':
-asu rajadhammesu); 448,16* (na vissase itthi -anna
mataraJ11); VI 508,18* (itthl pi vidhava nagga yassapi -a
bhataro); Ap 66,9 (dasa agha ca kkhattuJ11 so cakkavatti
bhavissati, Be so; Ce dasa111 e' a~~hakkhattUJ11 so; Ee
dasaJ11 ca atthaJ11 ca kkhattuJ11; Se -a ca a~tJlakkhattUJ11
so; eighteen times ?) ol 86,3 (Be so; Ce dasa
e' aqhakkhattum; Ee dasa e' a~~ha ca kkhattuJ11; Se
dasamaqhakkhattuJ11); Bv 2:2 (nagara111 ... -ahi saddehi
avivittaJ11); Dhs 1113 (-a SaJ11yojanani); Mil 94,26
(thero . . . -a upasakassa upasakagul).e parid!pesi);
Vism 110,22/oll. (catta!Jsa kammaqhanani, -a kasil).a -a
asubha -a anussatiyo ... ); 205,24* (-a e' eva sahassiini,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -aJ11); 613,2 (ekekasmiJ11 khandhe -a
-a katva paññasa anicciinupassanani); Ps II 201,28
(brahma .. . -ahi ailgullhi -asu cakkaviqasahassesu
alokaJ11 pharati); Ud-a 403,1o (-asu hatthikulesu);
Sadd 297,9; - ifc see aqha- (sv aqha\ catu-d-
2
(sv catu[r]), ti- (sv ti ), pañca-; - 0 '-añgul!, mfn., with
ten fingers (joined in respect); Ja IV 447,11* (-üp
añjaliJ11 paggahetva) =VI 319,19*; Ap !,10 (-! namassitva
sirasa abhivadayiJ11; Ap-a 104,2: dasahi ailgullhi ubhohi
hatthapu~ehi);- 0 '-addha, m. [dasa + addha1],five; S 1
193,23 (aggaJ11 so desayl -anaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr
dasaqhiinaJ11; Spk 1 279,23: -anan ti pañcannaJ11) =
Th 1244; - 0 aha, m.n. [dasa + aha(n)], a period of ten
days; Vin V 8,18 (-aJ11 atikkamentassa); Vism 101,10 (-e
va pakkhe va vltivatte); Sp 642,1 (atikkanto -o ti
evaJ11saññ!); 728,14 (dasa ahani -am tena -ena anagataJ11
dasiihiinagataJ11); - 0 áha, adv., within ten days; Vin 111
204,17 (-a karetabbaJ11); --pa~icchanna, mfn.,
concealed for ten days; V in 11 51 ,22;
0 0
-kkhattmp., ind., ten times; Vin 1 279,17; Th! 519; Ja 1
60,11; Dhp-a 1 388,3; Sadd 868,3o; - 0
-gUJ.Ia, mfn.,
tenfold; ten times; Mp II !88,26 (-a111 pi vlsatigUI).aJ11 pi
labhaJ11 labhati); 383,3; - 0
-guJ}.ita, mfn. and n.,
multiplied by ten; multiplication by ten; Ud-a 403,12
(-aya gal).anaya, Be, Ce, Se so; E e dasagul).aSaJ11hitaya);
Sadd 801,17 (dasassa gal).anassa -aJ11 katva sataJ11 hoti);
-
0
-tthanaqt in Ee, Se at S 1 193,23 is wr for
dasaddhiinaJ11 qv above; - 0 -dasa, num., ten of each;
ten every time; Sp 619,10; - 0
-disa\f.pl., the ten
directions; Nidd I 410,26 (ye -asu sailkhiira); Bv 26:25
(-a pabhasetva); - 0
-disa2 , adv., towards the ten
directions; in every direction, al! around; Sn 719
(bhiihisi -a); Vv 16:4 (vai).I).O ca te -a virocati); Th! 487;
Ja IV 411,13' (samanta -a yojanasata111 rüpadassana111
anubhontu);- 0 -dha, ind., in ten parts, in ten groups;
into ten pieces; tenfold; D II 259,18* (das' ete -a kaya);
S IV 197,18 (so taJ11 vll).aJ11 -a va satadha va phaleyya);
Ja V 374,2o* (abhayaJ11 ca taya ghuqhaJ11 imayo -a disa;
374,28': imasu -a ~hitasu disasu, Be, Ce so; Ee ima ta -a
~hita ti disasu; Se ima ta -a disa ta111 disasu); VI 481,28*
(varassu -a vare; 482,4·: -a ti dasavidhe koqhase);
Vism 193,28; Spk I 221,11 (-a das a ti sataJ11); -
0
-pada, n., a chequered board (for gambling or playing
a game); Vin III 180,22 (atthapade pi k!Janti -e pi k!Janti
iikase pi kljanti; Sp 620,31: a~~hapadaphalake jüta111
378 das a
k!Janti, tatha -e); D 1 6,24 (aqhapadaJ11 -a111 ... ; Sv 8S,1s:
ekekaya pantiya agha attha padani assa ti aqhapadaJ11,
-e pi es' eva nayo); Niddl 379,7 (-ehi pi k!)anti);-
0
-parikkharika, mfn., who has ten requisites; Sv 207,2
(-assa nisldanaJ11 va cammakhal).qaJ11 va vaqati, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nis!danacammakhal).qam) = Ps II 212,28 (Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee nis!danacammakhal).qaJ11);
0
-pariJ).iiha, mfn., ten (ratanas ?) in girth; Mil312,2o
(hatthinaga111 .. . tivitthata111 -a111 aqharatanikaJ11); -
0
-padaka, mfn., ten-footed; Vv 54:6; - 0 -parami,J,
the ten perfections; Ap-a 103,16 (0 -piiramita);
Bv-a 114,13 (tato -ito añño buddhakiirakadhammo
n' atthl ti); - 0
-bala\ mfn. and m., possessing ten
powers; the one who possesses ten powers, a buddha;
Abh 1 (buddho -o sattha); Vin I 38,22* (dasavaso -o
dasadhammavidü dasabhi e' upeto); Thi 457
(pabbajituJ11 -assa pavacane); Ap 557,26 (nimantetva
-a111 sasailghaJ11 lokanayakaJ11); Ja 1 406,2 (-ena
sailkhittena kathitaJ11 dhammasenapati Sariputto
vittharena vyakasl ti); Mil222,12 (KassapaJ11
bhagavantaJ11 arahantaJ11 sammasambhuddhaJ11 -aJ11
lokanayakaJ11 .. . disva); Vism 391 ,3o (thero -a111
vanditva); Sv 607,2 (-assa dhatuyo iiharapeml ti);
Dhp-a III 483,4 (-assa kañcanathüpe); Nidd-a I 293,1
(dasa balani etesan ti -a); Mhv 3:6 (lokanathe -e
sattiihaparinibbute); - 0 -baia 2 , n., 0 -balani, n.pl., ten
powers; S II 27,25 (--samannagato ... tathagato ); Nidd 1
448,20 (-ehi samannagato);- 0 -bhaga, m., a tenth part;
a tithe; Sp 1407,21 (sailghassa -a111 datva, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce dasama-; Sp-~ [Be] III 493,24: -an ti dasamabhagaJ11);
Spk 11 227,17 (te kira sassato -a111 gal).hiJ11su, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se satato -aJ11); - 0 -masa, n. [dasa + masi], a
period of ten months; ten months; Ja V 282,2 (sa -e
paripUI).I).e puttaJ11 vijayi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); -
-masika, mfn., being at the age of ten months; lasting
for ten months; Niddl 120,14; Bv-a296,35 (-a
padhiinacariya);- 0 -mülaka, (mj)n., (what is) based on
ten items; (a statement or exposition) concemed with ten
items; Vin III 97,7; - 0 -yojana, n., (a distance of) ten
yojanas; Bv 23:23 (kanakappabha niccharati samanta
0
-aJ11); As 83,9; - -yojanika, mfn., extending ten
yojanas; Bv-a 297.8 (sañrarasml ... -a);- 0 -vagga, m.
and mfn. [dasa + vagga 1], a group often; consisting of a
group often; VinV 139,23 (-o bhikkhusailgho); JaiV
345,23 (-a111 vlsativaggaJ11 tiJ11savaggaJ11 ca katva
balagumbaJ11 ~hapesi); Ud-a 310,25 (-en a va sailghena);
Vin-vn 2603; - 0 -Vaggika, mfn., forming a group of
ten; Vin I 334,20' (in uddiina: ye bhikkhü -a); -
0
-vatthuka, mfn., connected with ten bases or grounds;
of ten kinds; Ja V 403,11' (diinan ti -a111 puññacetanaJ11,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee savatthukaJ11); Vibh 349,23 (-a
micchadittJli); Sp 1289,7 (-e adhikaral).e);
--dlpi(n), mfn., proclaiming the ten points; Mhv 4:55
(niggahaJ11 papabhikkhüna111 --d!pina111 . . . mahathera
akaJ11SU te); - 0 -vassa, mfn., l. of ten years' standing;
one who has been ordained for ten years; V in I 59,33
(anujiinami bhikkhave -ena va atirekadasavassena va
upasampadetun ti); V 139,33 (-aya bhikkhuniya):
Sp 941,5 (-aya gihlgataya sikkhasammuti111 datva
paripUI).I).adviidasavassaJ11 upasampadetu111 vaqati); -
dasa
2. being ten years old; Ja VI 7,16 (--kiUe, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se 0 -vassikakale); - -' -uddesika, mfn. [dasavassa +
uddesika3], about ten years old; D II 330,27; - 3. living
for ten years; Bv-a 153,13 (navutivassasahassayukesu
manussesu anukkamena parihayitva -esu jatesu;
cji60,16: manussa anukkamena parihayitva
dasavassayuka hutva); - 0 -vassayuka, mfn., having a
lifespan of ten years; D III 71,15; Bv-a 160,16; -
0
-Vassika, mfn., l. being ten years old; one who is ten
years old; Ja VI 7,16 (--ka1e, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-vassaka1e); Niddi 120,17; Vism344,35 (-ena
ajjhohañyati); - 2.lasting for ten years;? Sp 1246,10
([navakammarp] -arp); - 0 -vasa, mfn. [dasa + vasa3],
following the ten ways of living; Vin I 38,22* (Sp 973,26:
-o ti dasasu ariyavasesu vutthavaso); - 0 -vidha, mfn.,
of ten kinds; ten-fold; Ja II 185,13' (-arp pi ratanarp);
Ap 5,19 (disa -a 1oke); Vism 160,9 (upekkha pana -a
hoti); Bv-a 27,21 (imissa -aya iddhiya balarp iddhibalarp
nama); - -ena, in ten ways; in a ten-fold way; Ja III
291,r (-ena paparp dasa akusalakammapatha); Nidd I
80,21 (-ena mano); Vibh 14,28 (-ena tiipakkhandho);
Mil 12,29 (-ena vibhattarp yamakarp);
0
-vyagghagghanaka, mfn., worth ten tigers; Ja IV 349,5
(eko tava vyaggho gahito añño pan' eko -o atthi ti, Be,
Ce so; Ee dasavyagghanayako; Se vyagghanayako); -
0
-vyama, mfn., measuring ten fathoms; Sv 876,6; -
0
-Sata, num. and mfn. [dasa + sata 1], (numbering) one
thousand; Vin V 213,30* (-arp rattisatarp apattiyo
chadayitvana); Sn 179 (ime -a yakkha); Ja V 408,33*
(assarajaharayo ayojayurp -ani); Sadd 801,9;
--kkhatturp, a thousand times; Thi 519;
--nayana, m(fn)., "thousand-eyed", the god
Indra/Sakka; Abh 19; Bv-a 21,8 (--nayano devaraja);
285,21 (na ca kamo napi --nayano na capi brahma); -
--locana, m(fn)., "thousand-eyed", the god Indra/Sakka;
Vism 193,16* (Vism-mht [Be] I 214,25: --locanena ti
sahassakkhena devanam indena) As 198,26*;
Sadd 378,5* (Sakko purindado indo ... --locano); -
0
-Sataipvyama, mfn., measuring a thousand fathoms;
Ja III 398,11* (aharp -arp uragam adaya agato, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se dasasatavyamarp; 398,16·: sahassavyama-
mattayamarp, Be so; Ee sahassavyamayamarp; Ce, Se
sahassavyamarp); - 0
-sahassa, n. and mfn., l. ten
thousand; numbering ten thousand; Ja II 253,12 (-a
alaitkatitthiyo amaccabrahma1,1araghikadayo ca);
VI 100,6• (tatrasurp -a pora1,1a isayo pure); Sp 952,15 (-a
kulaputta); Ap-a 81,11 (-esu cakkava~esu); Sadd 801,19
(sahassassa dasagu1,1itarp katva -arp hoti);
2. consisting of 10,000 (cakkav~as ?); Bv-a 283,3•
(sakalarp -arp pi 1okadhatum aharp pana unnadetva, eds
so); - 0 -sahassi, mftn). and m.n. [cfS. dasasahasra,
dasasahasrika], l. (mj[n].) conszstzng of 10,000
(cakkava~as); Vin I 12,13 (ayarp ca kho -1 lokadhatu
sarpkampi, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -i-lokadhatu; see
Sv 659,15: yarp ca -1 lokadhatu ti agataghane
dasacakkava~asahassani eka lokadhatu); DI 46,29 (-1
1okadhatu akampittha ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sahassl); Ja I
31,4 (te hi pi akankhamana -irp va lokadhaturp tato va
bhiyyo abhaya phareyyurp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -1);
Bv 2:174 (tenayarp kampita pathavl -!); 16:21 (atirocati
379 dasaka
tejena -irnhi dhatuya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -sahassamhi;
Bv-a 222,23: -iya 1okadhatuya); Mil 362,9 (thero
Sariputto -imhi lokadhatuya aggapuriso thapetva
dasabalarp 1okacariyarp); - 2. (m.j) a world-system
conszstzng of 10,000; Ap 158,15 (yasmirp ca
jayamanasmirp -1 pakampati); Bv 1:13 H atikkamma
cankamarp mapayi jino, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dasasahassarp); 2:71 (katañjall namassanti -1 sadevaka;
Bv-a 98,2o: -1 ti --lokadhatuyo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -1
1okadhatuya); 2:184 (viroca -iyarp); 18:4 (so buddho
-imhi viññapesi girarp sucirp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -amhi;
Bv-a 228,14: -imhi ti -iyarp, eds so); - 3. (m.f) (one)
who belongs to the world-system consisting of 10,000;
Bv l: 18 (passanti tarp devasaitgha -1 pamodita;
cfBv-a 37,3: bhummatthe paccattavacanarp -iyarp
devasaitgha passantl ti attho ); 1:66 (-1 samagamma
yacanti pañjall mamarp; Bv-a 53,19 foll.:
dasasahassacakkav~esu devata sannipatitva ti attho );
2:92 (niraye pi -1 aggi nibbanti tavade, Ee so; ? Ce
nirayesu; Be niraye pi dasasahasse; Se dasasahassa;
Bv-a 101,3: nirayesu dasasahassa ti anekadasasahassa,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niraye ti nirayesu) = Ja I 18,15* (Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se -sahasse); Bv 2:108 (buddhassa vacanarp
sutva -!na cubhayarp; Bv-a 103,13foll.: (Dlpaitkara-
sammasambuddhassa ca dasasahassacakkava~a-
devatanarp ca vacanarp sutva);
0
-sikkhapadika, mf(n)., (one) whofollows, observes, the
ten sikkhapadas; Vin IV 122,4 (sama1,1ero nama -o
sama1,1eñ nama -a); Sp 253,n; - 0 -sila, n., the ten
moral practices; Ja III 291,1o· (pañcasllarp -arp
catuparisuddhisllarp); Mp II 346,1 (-arp); Vibh-a451,32
(pañcasllarp -am rakkhati); 0
-hattha, mfn.,
measuring ten hattha measures; Sp 94,13 (tassa
ubbedhena -o khandho hoti); 1246,9 (-e ekadasahatthe
vihare); - see also agharasa (sv agha\ unadasavassa
(sv una), ekadasa, ekarasa, cuddasa, dvadasa (sv dva),
niddasa, Pal,ll,larasa, sattarasa (sv satta4), so~asa.
dasa 2, mfn. and m. [cf S. -darsa, -drs, -drsa], seeing;
looking; look, appearance; - ifc see aññadatthu-,
ariya-d-, alamattha- (sv alarp), apatha-, duddasa,
dhamma- (sv dhamma\ yugamatta- (sv yuga),
samma-d- (sv samma2);- see also duddasi(n).
dasa 3, n., see sv dasa 1.
dasaka, m. n. [cf S. dasaka], a set of ten; a collection of
ten, a decad; a section consisting of sets of ten; V in V
139,38 (-arp nitthitarp); 140,13* (-a suppakasita); M III
!,21 (antevas!... ga1,1apema ekarp ekakarp ... nava
navaka dasa -a ti); Thp. 61,30* (in uddana: satt' ime -e
thera gathayo e' ettha sattati); Dhs p. 133,6; Ja IV 397,15
(dasannarp -anarp vasena das' eva vassadasa);
Vism 552,6• (dve va tayo va -a); It-a I 52,14 (cattaro -a
catt~lsarp); Sadd 801,9 (satassa -arp dasasatarp
sahassarp hoti);- 0 -nipata, m., a section consisting of
sets of ten; A V 310,27 (-o nitthito, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
--pa~i nitthita); Thp. 61,31 (-o nitthito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dasanipato); JaiV 89,17 (-assa atthava1,11,1ana samatta, Se
so; Be, Ce --Val,ll,lana nighita; Ee dasanipataVa1,11,1ana
nitthita); VI 372,31 (-e, Be, Ce so; E e, Se dasanipate);
Th-a I 3,18 (-e satta thera sattati gatha, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
dasanipate);- ifc see khigga-, pañña-, pabbhara-, bala-,
dasana
manda-, momüha-, vaitka-, val)l)a-, sayana-, hani-.
dasana (and da~sana\ m.n., l. (m.) [S. dasana,
AMg d~s31)a], a tooth; Abh 261 (danto -o); Dath 5:3
0
(adaya te -dhatuvar~ jinassa); Sadd 566,19 foll.
(da~sano ti danto, d~senti khadanlya~ va bhojanlya~
va etena ti d~sano);- ifc see kunda-;- 2. (n.) [cfS.
d~sana], biting; a bite; Dhatum 465-6 (<;ia~sada~sa tu
-e); - 0 -cchada, m., the lip; Abh 262; - see also
<;!~sana.
dasantayuttaqt in Ee at Th-a II 264,11 is wr for
dassanayutta~ (Be, Ce, Se so).
dasama, mj(-a, -!)n. and -!,f [S. dasama], l. (mfn.) the
tenth; Vin III 196,4 (navama~ va ... divas~-~ va ti);
IV 160,8 (ay~ bhikkhave -o adlnavo rajantepura-
ppavesane); M lli 255,7 (ay~ -1 patipuggalika
dakkhil)a); Ja IV 6,9 (mahasatto -a~ gatham aha);
Ap 178,8 (ito ca -e kappe); Bv 2:161 (tadadakkhi~ -a~
upekkhaparami~); 28:5 (ailgarathüpo -o tada yeva
patighito); Vism 646,2 (sa nava darake mate -~ ca
miyyamana~ disva); Spkii 334,14 (-asmi~); Pj II 183,s
(-aya [gathaya]); - ifc se e t~- (sv ta[d]); -
2. dasaml,f [scil. ratti], the tenth day (or night);
Mhv 19:33 (mahabodhi~ -iya~ aropetva); - see also
pañcadasama (sv pañca).
dasa\f, dasa3, n. [S. dasa], the loase end of cloth; an edge
or border; Abh 294 (-a); 1127 (-avatthapatantesu);
Vin Il 136,13 (kayabandhanassa -a jlranti); IV 171,9
(anujanami bhikkhave nis!danassa -a vidatthi); Ja V
187,22 (rattapatana~ -ani chinditva tani kasayani
nivasetva); Sp 1135,9 (acchinnadasad!ghadasani dussani
-ani chinditva dharetabbani, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -a); Ps III
219,9 (ka! en a -aya kalena ante ka! ena majjhe
parimajjanto); Mp I 90,JJ (-a chetva paribbajaka viya
caranti); Dhp-a 11 90,6 (dve pi kambale -aya -a~
sambandhitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dasadasa~ bandhitva);
IV 106,8 (tehi nivatthavatthana~ -ani chindapetva); -
1
o• -anta, m. [dasa + anta ], the end of the cloth; the hem;
Ja I 5,13 (-ena va ve!hetva) = Ap-a 6,5 (Ce so; Be, Ce, Se
dussantena) = Bv-a 72,18 (-e); Jai 467,19 (palapa-
tumba~ -e bandhitva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dussante);
Sp 696,9 (-e baddhakahap31)adlhi yeva saddhi~ co)akani
denti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dussante); 1212,7 (ekato -a~
ekato pasanta~ olambetva nivattha~); Dhp-a I 391,5
(nivatthasatakassa -a~ ukkhipitva a~se khipanti eva);
11174,1 (tesa~ -a~ disva);- 0 -kaJ.u;mka, m., a comer
of the cloth; Ps III 451 ,21 (-e pakkhalitva, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Ce dussa-);- 0 -tantu, m., a threadfrom the cloth-edge;
a loase thread; Sv 603,26 (kappasa-a~su va -u va, Ee
so; Ce -u~; Be dasikatant~; Se dussatanta~); -
adasa, mfn., without a border or fringe; Sp 666,7 (tani
[vatthani] sadasani va hontu -ani va); - sadasa, mfn.
and n.,with a border or fringe; (a rug) with a border;
Vin III 232,17 (nisldan~ nama -a~ vuccati) =IV 171,15
(Sp 884,19: santhatasadisa~ santharitva ekasmi~ ante
sugatavidatthiya vidatthimatte padese dv!su thanesu
phaletva tisso dasa kayiranti, tahi dasahi -a~ nama
vuccati); Sp 666,7;- see also adasaka.
dasa 2 , f [S. dasa], a period of lije; a state, condition;
Abh 1127 (-avatthapatantesu); JaiV 397,17' (dasanna~
dasakana~ vasena das' eva vassadasa imes~
380 dassana
macean~ idha manussaloke jlvita~, tayida~ na
niyamena sabba eva eta -a papul)ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
sabba ekadasa);- ifc see vassa-.
dasika\ n., or dasika,f [cf BHS dasika], an end or edge of
cloth; a hem or border; - ifc see acchinna-
(sv chindati); - 0
-sutta, n., thread from the end of
cloth; ? a loase thread; ? V in III 241,32 (antamaso
CUI)l)apil)<;io pi dantakagh~ pi -a~ pi); Sp 892,15 (-~
pi thüplkat~ na vagan ti); Dhp-a IV 222,17.
-dasika 2 , mfn. [cf S. -drslka], having (such an)
appearance; - ifc see duddasika.
dassa, mfn. and m. [S. darsa], looking at, seeing;
appearance; Dhatum 22 (cakkha -e); - ifc see
akkhadassa, attha- (sv attha2), appa-, alamattha-
(sv ala~). ad!nava-, paritta- (sv paritta\ sudassa; - see
also anomadassika (sv oma), dassavi(n), duddassika
(sv duddasika).
dassaka, mfn. [S. darsaka], showing; who shows; - ifc
see nidhi-.
dassati\ pr. 3 sg., see sv deti.
dassati\fitt. 3 sg. of deti qv.
dassati ti in Ee at Ud 44,13 is wr for dissatl ti (Be, Ce, Se
so).
dassana, n., m., -a,f and mfn., [S. darsana; BHS also
darsana], l. (n.) seeing; looking; sight (oj); eyesight;
Abh 775 (ikkhal)a~ -a~); Vin III 40,15 (bhikkhu
pural)adutiyikaya -a~ agamasi); 180,38 (Savatthi~
gacchanto bhagavanta~ -aya); IV 18,7 (sa itthi
ayasmante Anuruddhe saha -ena patibaddhacitta ahosi);
D II 145,5foll. (sace bhikkhave bhikkhuparisa Ánanda~
-aya upasailkamati -ena sa attamana hoti); M II 131,24
(-aya pi bho raja Pasenadi Kosalo deve tavati~se
nappahoti); III 208,2o (-~ pi . . . Potaliputtassa
paribbajakassa nabhijanami kuto pan' evarüpa~
kathasallapa~); A I 35,28 (appaka te satta ye labhanti
tathagata~ -aya); 279,2o (bhagavato ah~ bhante -assa
atitto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -aya, prob. wr); III 67,23 (tesa~
abhil)ha~ -a samsaggo ahosi); Dhp 206 (sadhu -am
ariyana~); Sn 325 (kalaññu e' assa garun~ -aya);
Vv 17:4 (sabbe na tappamase -ena t~); 50:16
(dullabhay~ -aya pupph~ odumbar~ yatha;
Vv-a 213,28: -aya ti datthu~ pi); Ja IV 446,28* (tuttho
'smi deva tava -ena); V 137,29* (sa devaraja idam ajja
patto susaññatan' isin~ -aya; 138,r: -aya ti
dassanatthaya vandanatthaya); VI 263,13* (dullabhe hi
Vidhurassa -e; 263,15': Vidhurassa -am eva dullabh~);
533,3* (Sañjayassa saka~ putt~ . . . tam aha~ -am
agato; 533,4·: aha~ ta~ -aya agato); Nidd I 339,11
(pakatiya lakkhal)a~ aññat~ hoti adit!ha~ . . . tassa
ñiil)aya -aya ... pañha~ pucchati); Ap 26,2 (tava -am
agamma saitkappo pürito mama); 108,14 (samanta
yojanasata~ -a~ anubhom' ah~); Bv 2:77 (-a~ me
atikkante sasaitghe lokanayake); 8:4 (-ena pi ta~
buddh~ tosita honti piil)ino); Mill55,23 (akalo bho
aya~ ranno -aya); Vism 424,26 (ta~ -a~
dibbacakkhukiccam eva); Mhv 25:3 (bhikkhüna~ -a~);
Sadd 445,Jojoll. (-an ti 0 -kiriya api ca -an ti cakkhu-
viññal)a~); - ifc see anlka-, abhil)ha- (sv abhil)h~),
atappaka- (sv tappaka); - 2. (n.) insight; proper
perception; understanding; Abh 888 (dit!hyadimagge
dassanaka
ñ~akkhikkha1_1a1addhisu -arp.); Vin I 11,29 (ñ~arp. ca
pana me -aq¡ udapadi akuppa me cetovimutti ... );
III 91,35 foil. (yarp. ñal).arp. taq¡ -aq¡ yarp. -aq¡ tarp.
ñ~arp.); MI 7,11 (atthi bhikkhave asava -a pahatabba;
see PsI 74,18foll.: -aq¡ nama sotapattimaggo, tena
pahatabba ti attho, kasma sotapattimaggo -arp.,
pa~amarp. nibbanadassanato); SI 232,25* (saii.ghe pasado
yass' atthi ujubhütarp. ca -aq¡); III 49,2 (kiq¡ aññattha
yathabhütassa -a); Khp 9:10 (sllava -ena sampanno);
Dhp 274 (es' eva maggo n' atth' añño -assa
visuddhiya); Patis I 21,6 (0 ' -aghena paññindriyarp.
abhiññeyyaq¡); Dhs 584 (n' eva -ena na bhavanaya
pahatabbaq¡); 1002 (katame dhamma -ena pahatabba);
Nett 14,27 (-ena tll).i saq¡yoJanam pahiyyanti);
Mi1415,14* (-amhi parisodhito naro); Mp III 181,9
(ñ~adassanaya ti maggañ~asaii.khataya -aya, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee -saii.khatassa -assa); - ifc see ñal).a-; -
3. (n.) a view, a theory; Abh 161 (-aq¡ dighi 1addhi);
888; Sv 126,12 (ete dighigatika imarp. -aq¡ gahetva);
Ps Ili 116,7 foil. (gahapatayo vina -ena loko na niyyati,
ekaq¡ -arp. ruccitva khamapetva gahetuq¡ vagati sassato
loko ti -arp. ga.I_lhatha ti); 206,22 (buddhanarp. va
buddhasavakanarp. va sammukhibhave sigharp. -arp.
jahati); Spk II 258,2 (kiq¡vadi ti kiq¡ attano -arp. vadati,
kiq¡laddhiko ti attho ); Pj II 256,8 (-arp. nama khanti
ruci); Nidd-a I 88,25 (idam eva -arp. saccarp.); -
4. (n.m.) sight, appearance, aspect; Th-a Ili 47,15
(kaly~ehi pañcahi -ehi samannagato ca
kaly~adassano ); Ap-a 414,32 (arohaparil).aharüpa-
Sa.I_l!hanasobhanena sundaro -o ti Sudassano);
Vibh-a 521,11 (sundara -a abhirüpa pasadika ti Sudassa);
- ifc see anoma- (sv oma), kadaci- (sv kada), caru-,
jegucchabibhaccha-, bhayanaka-; - 5. (i) (n., -a,f)
showing, displaying; a show, exhibition; Vism 406,30
(manomayarüparp. iddhimata sadisam eva hot! ti
o• -attharp. eta upama vutta ti); Sv 127,7
(desanajalavimutto di!~igatiko nama n' atthi ti
o• -attharp.); Ps IV 162,2o (tesarp. o• -attharp. idaq¡ vuttarp.);
Patis-a581,21 (desana ti -a); 581,25 (vivara1_1a ti
viva!akaral).aq¡, vivaritva -a ti attho); Sadd 566,22 (dasi
-e ca ... daq¡seti darp.sayati); 648,27 (udakasadde kakara-
lopo pi katthaci hot! ti o• -atthaq¡); - ifc see sippa-; -
(ü) (mfn.) showing; Th-a II 179,8 (lokuttarañ~a1okassa
-o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dasseta); - 6. (n.) the eye;
Abh 888 (ñ~akkhikkha1_1aladdhisu -arp.); Sadd 332,3o*;
- o• -iinuttariya, ánuttariya, n., exceilence of seeing
0
or insight; D III 219,17 (Sv 1003,25foll.: anuttariyesu
vipassana -arp. ... phalaq¡ va -aq¡ ... nibbanarp. va -arp.)
de. 250,8 (Sv 1037,2: dassanesu anuttariyaq¡ -arp.); A III
284,13; Mp 1 117,26 (ayasma hi Ánandatthero sayaq¡
pataq¡ tathagatarp. cakkhuviññ~ena daghuq¡ labhati,
idarp. -aq¡); - 0 -kiima, mfn., wanting to see (acc. or
gen.); Vin 1 247,37 (-a hi mayarp. taq¡ bhagavantarp.);
A III 296,16 (ahaq¡ hi gahapati tav' accayena --tara
e' eva bhavissami bhagavato; Mp III 349,19: atirekena
-a); Ud 26,3 (sattha ayasmantanarp. -o ti); Ja IV 356,17*
(deva -a te); Ap 343,3 (tava -o 'harp. agato 'mhi);
Mil 23,7 (raja bhante Milindo ayasmantarp. -o ti);
Vism 107,5 (ariyanarp. --ta); neg. adassana-
kama, mfn., M 1 120,11;- atidassanakamata,f, abstr., a
381 dassaniya
great desire to see; Sv 599,7; - 0 -bhümi,f, the plane
or condition of insight; Nett 8,9; Vism 439,9 (pa!hama-
maggapañña -i); Th-a I 192,4;- 0 -liilasa, mfn., longing
for the sight; Ap 466,1 (mama -o; Ap-a 494,15: mayharp.
dassane vyava!o tapparo); - adassana, n. and mfn.,
l. (n.) (i) not seeing; not recognising; not being seen;
being invisible; Dhatup 456 (nasa -e); Vin I 97,19
(aññataro bhikkhu apattiya -e ukkhittako); II1 147,22*
(nago ma1_1iq¡ yacito brahma1_1ena -arp. yeva tada
jagama); IV 218,29 (ukkhitto nama apattiya -e va
appa!ikamme va appatinissagge va ukkhitto, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -ena); D II 141,13 (katharp. mayaq¡ bhante
matugame pa!ipajjama ti, -aq¡ Ánanda ti, dassane
bhagava sati katharp. pa!ipajjitabban ti analapo Ánanda
ti); Dhp 46 (-aq¡ maccurajassa gacche); 206 (-ena
balanarp. niccam eva sukhi siya); 210 (piyanaq¡ -aq¡
dukkharp. appiyanarp. ca dassanaq¡); Ja Ili 128,1 * (-ena
morassa ... kakarp. tattha apüjesuq¡); 315,23* (amanta kho
taq¡ gacchami piyaq¡ me tav' adassanarp.); IV 496,11*
(vijjadhara ... -arp. osadhehi vajanti); Mil153,15 (vijja-
dharo ... -arp. gato mantabalena ti); Vism 428,27 (aloke
antarahite rüpagatanarp. -aq¡); Sp 69,5 (thero pi te yava
-arp. tava palapetva); 1081 ,1s (antaradhayatl ti
adassanaq¡ hoti, eds so;? ad Vin 1 180,25foil.: ayasma
Sagato ... pajjalati pi antaradhayati pi); Mp III 405,21
(antarahita ti -arp. gata); Ap-a 265,31 (bhagavati
khandhaparinibbanena parinibbute -aq¡ gate ti);
Sadd 481,22 (antaradha -e); - (ii) lack of proper
perception; Vin I 231 ,6* (catunnarp. ariyasaccanarp.
yathabhütarp. -a); S V 126,27 (natthi hetu natthi paccayo
aññ~aya -aya); Sn 206 (etadisena kayena yo maññe
Ul).l).ametave ... kim aññatra -a); Ja VI 17,11* (paññaya
ca alabhena dhammassa ca -a); Dhs 390 (aññ~arp. -arp.
anabhisamayo ... ); - 2. (mfn.) invisible; Mhv 18:54
(mahabodhi ... at~asi ... adassana); - duddassana, n.
and mfn., l. (n.) an incorrect view; Sp 511,7 ( -assa
gahitatta duddasika); - 2. (mfn.) hard to see;
Mil212,24;- sudassana, mfn., 1. easy to see; Ud 80,19*
(na hi saccaq¡ -aq¡); - 2. beautiful, handsome; A 1
215,7* (cando ca suriyo ca ubho -a); Th 1176 (imaq¡ ca
passa ayantarp. Sariputtaq¡ -aq¡); Ja V 156,2* (danta tava
-a); Ap 199,6 (asokarp. pupphitaq¡ disva ... -aq¡).
dassanaka, mfn. [dassana + ka2], l. seeing; who sees;
Vv-a 233,8 (dhammadasa ti catusaccadhammassa
nibbanadhammassa ca paccakkhato -a); - 2. showing;
who shows; ? - ifc see akara- (sv akara2), nidhi-.
dassaniya, dassaneyya, mfn. [S. darsaniya], to be seen;
worth seeing; beautiful; Vin I 268,11 (Ambapalika
ga1_1ika abhirüpa hoti -a pasadika); III 42,3 (sa ahosi
ku!ika abhirüpa -a pasadika); DI 47,11 (-a vata bho
dosina ratti); II 140,17 foil. (cattar' imani . .. -am
sarp.vejaniyani ~anani ... idha tathagato jato ti Ánanda
saddhassa kulaputtassa -aq¡ sarp.vejaniyarp. thanarp.;
Sv 582,15: -an1 ti dassanarahani dassanatthaya
gantabbani); M III 176,10 (raja cakkavatti abhirüpo hoti
-o pasadiko); Pv 28:4 (harp.sa e' ime -a manorama);
36:15 (yanaq¡ idaq¡ abbhutaq¡ dassaneyyarp.); Ja III
394,5* (daharo tuvarp. -o si raja); IV 102,10• (ayo
suva.I_ll).arp. vi ya dassaneyyarp.); VI 202,32* (yo pabbaji
dassaneyyo ujaro, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -o); Nidd I 355,2
dassaneyya
(pasadikaJTI dassaneyyaJTI; Nidd-a I 377,3foll.:
dassaneyyan ti -a111); Ap 574,18 (itthi111 mapesi sobhini111
-a111); Bv 2:1 (Amara111 nama nagara111 dassaneyya111
manorama111); Mil 282,29 (pasadiko -o Uposatho
nagaraja); Sv 281,3t (-o ti divasa111 pi passantanaJTI
atittikaral).ato dassanayoggo ); Ud-a 342,1 (mahajaniya
kho ime andha ye evarüpa111 -a111 na 1abhanti daghu111);
Vv-a 14,11 (utaran ti imina --taJT~ pasadikataJTI ca
dasseti); Mhv 37:16 (viharo so 'bhayagiri dassaneyyo
ahü tada); - ifc see bhusa-; - 0 -tara, mfn., campar.,
more beaut(ful; D III 93,2 (yo nesa111 satto abhirüpataro
ca -o ca pasadikataro ca mahesakkhataro ca); Ud 22,29
(katama nu kho abhirüpatara va -a va pasadikatara va);
Saddh 325; - adassaniya, mfn., not to be seen; not
beautiful; Mi1169,15 (itthi müthagabbha bhisakkassa
-a111 guyha111 dasseti); Sv 41,10 (-a apasadika);
atidassaniya, mfn., very beaut(ful; Pj II 243,6;
sudassaneyya, mfn., very handsome; Ja V 202,13*.
dassaneyya, mfn., see sv dassaniya.
dassahaip in Ee at Th 1129 is prob. wr for dassaya111 (Be,
Ce, Th-a III 158,9 so; Se dussaha111).
dassii, cond. 3 sg. of deti qv.
dassiipana, n. [from dassapeti], pointing out, showing; -
ifc see nakkhatta-.
dassiipeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofvdis 2 qv.
dassiivi(n) (and ifc -dassavina), mfn. [BHS darsavin; cf S.
darsivas], who has seen; who goes to see, attends;
seeing; D 11 328,9 (jaccandho puriso ... eva111 vadeyya
natthi kal).hasukkani rüpani natthi kal).hasukkanaJTI
rüpanaJTI -i); M l 8,33 (sutava ... ariyasavako ariyanaJTI
-1); S IV 193,14 (puriso ki111sukassa -i); Ap 156,!5 (te me
pugha viyaka111su yatha -ino tatha); Ps I 21 ,34
(sol).asigilladayo pi ca cakkhuna ariye passanti na ca te
ar1yana111 -ino); Th-a 11 125,25 (amataddaso ti
nibbanassa -i); Sadd 869,23 (gamitu111 sila111 pakati yassa
so hoti gami evaJTI . . . -i); - ifc se e anavaral).a-
(sv avaral).a), an1cca- (sv nicca), abhikkanta-
(sv abhikkamati), adinava-, an¡sa111sa-, nibbana-,
paralokavajjabhaya- (sv para), bhaya-, sabba-;
adassiivi(n), mfn., who has not seen; who does not go to
see, to attend; MI 1,12 (idha bhikkhave assutava
puthujjano ar1yana111 -i ariyadhammassa akovido
ariyadhamme avinito; PsI 21,28/oll.: yo teSaJTI ariyanaJTI
adassanasilo na ca dassane sadhukari so ariyana111 -i ti
veditabbo, so ca cakkhuna -i ñi"ll).ena -i ti duvidho, tesu
ñi"ll).ena -1 idha adhippeto); Dhs 1003.
dassi(n), mfn. [S. darsin], seeing; understanding; - ifc
see accuta- (sv cavati), attha- (sv attha2), ananta-
(sv anta\ anavaral).a- (sv avaral).a), anoma- (sv oma),
adinava-, ekailga- (sv eka), evadassi(n), khema-,
jatikhayanta- (sv jati 1), ñi"ll).a-, tatha-, tatha-, tira-, digha-,
viveka-; adassi(n), mfn., not seeing; not
understanding; Th 662 (yathabhütaJTI adassino; Th-a II
278,22: yasma te dhammasabhava111 yathavato
nabbhaññaJT~SU); Ja VI 357,4* (idhalokadassi para1okam
adassi ubhayattha billo kalim aggahesi, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
paraloka111).
dassiipsu, caus. pass. aor. 3 pl. ~fvdis 2 qv.
dassita\ mfn. [S. daJT!sita], armed; in mail (so H. Kern,
1916, p. 114); Ja VI 579,3o* (khippam ayantu sannaddha
382 dahati
hatthikkhandhehi -ita; cf580,1w: -ita ti
dassitavibhüsana).
dassita 2 , mfn., pp of caus. ofvdis 2 qv.
dassita(r), m., se e sv dasseta(r).
dassituip, inf ofvdis 2 qv.
dassittha, caus. pass. aor. 3 sg. ofvdis 2 qv.
-dassima(t), mfn. [BHS -darsimant], who has seen; seeing;
- see attha- (sv attha2); - see also -dassiva(t).
-dassiva(t), mfn. [cfS. -darsivan], who has seen;- ifc see
bhaya-.
dassissanti, caus. pass. fut. 3 pl. ofvdis 2 qv.
dassu, m. [S. dasyu], a robber, a brigand;
0
-khila, m.n., (or better 0 -khi1a ?) robber-spikes;?
(robber's wasteland;? robber-weeds; ?) brigandage; DI
135,13/oll. (aha111 eta111 -aJT~ vadhena va bandhena va ...
samühanissami ti ... na kho pan' etassa -assa evaJTI
samma samugghato hoti; Sv 296,t5: -an ti corakhila111;
Sv-p~ I 422,24 foll.: dassavo eva khilasadisatta -aJT~,
yatha hi khette kasanadina111 sukhappavatti111
mü1asantanena sassaparivuddhi111 ca vibandhati eva111
dassavo rajje raji"ll).aya sukhappavatti111 mülaviru]hiya
janapadana111 parivuddhi111 ca vibandhanti); 136,12
(samühato kho me bho -o).
dasseta(r), dassita(r), m. [S. darsayitr], une who shows,
who makes appear; A I 62,9 (bahukara bhikkhave
matapitaro puttanal11 apadaka posaka imassa lokassa
-aro; Mp II 122,t5: imasmi111loke i~~anigharammal).aJTI
matapitaro nissaya passati ti tyassa imassa lokassa -aro
nama honti); Pa~is I 127,13 (n' atth' añño koci aloka111 -a
aññatra maya ti; cfPa!is-a 410,2: paññillokaJTI
das san asilo paññalokassa -a ti attho ); Spk III 224,5
(sandassako ti .. . tesa111 tesa111 dhammanaJTI -a); Pj II
215,31 (nipul).atthe -aran ti); Sadd 444,13 (passita -a);
445,10 (dasseti ti dassita).
dasseti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofvdis 2 qv.
dasso, se e sv dasi 1.
daba, m. [< *draha <S. hrada; AMg daha], a lake; a pool;
Abh 678 (-o 'mbujakaro ); V in III 108,!4 (so -o
acchodako sitodako ... ; Sp 512,15: so -o ti so rahado);
Ja V 415,25" (kal).l).amUI).qakal11 ... anotatta111
kul).aladahan ti satta -e dassesi); Ap 204,10 (odakaJTI -am
oggayha); Mil259,t3 (in long cpd); Spk I 281,26 (tasmi111
-e khaditabbayuttaka111 phala111 nama n' atthi ti na
vattabbaJTI); II 256,7 (saya111jato va so -o tasma pi
devadaho ti vutto ); - see also rahada.
daba ti\ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup trhati, Wg § 28:58], hurts;
Sadd 459,7 (daha thaha himsattha: -ati thahati).
daba te, pr. 3 sg., se e sv qah~ti.
daba te, dadhate, dadhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dadhati; cf BHS
dahitva], puts, places; fixes; takes, holds; takes as,
considers as; Dhatum 495 (daha bhasmikaral).e ca
patighaya111); DI 92,15 (Sakya ... rajana111 OkkakaJTI
pitamaha111 -anti); III 259,to (so ta111 citta111 -ati ta111
citta111 adhi~~ati; Sv 1045,4: -ati ti ~apeti); MI511,2o
(purisaJTI amittato pi -eyya); Ud 12,30*
(sukhadukkhaphugho n' ev' attato no parato -etha);
Sn 841 (tasma tUVaJTI momuhato -asi); 882 (tasma hi
balo ti para111 -anti); Ja V 220,8* (yo attadukkhena
parassa dukkha111 sukhena va attasukha111 -ati, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se -ati); 346,!5* (sudukkaraJTI anariyehi -ate
dahati
bhavam uttamatp); Vibh 354,6 (parehi seyymp attanatp
-ati); Sadd 392,1 (dha dharaQ.e: dadhati); 394,1 foil.
(dadha dharaQ.e: janassa tughitp dadhate ti dadhi,
dhakarassa hakaratte -atl ti rüpatp); 457,12 (daha
bhasmikaraQ.e dharaQ.e ca ... ayatp puriso imatp itthim
ayyikatp -ati); - fut. 3 sg. dhassati, Sadd 392,4
(dhassati paridhassati);- part.pr. dahanta, mfu., Th-a li
181,34 (attanam seyyato -antassa);
neg. adahanta, mfn., Sv 31,2; - aor. 1 sg. dahitp,
Ap 300,8 (magge saka1ikatp -itp, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
khipitp); - pass. pr. 3 sg. dhiyati\ is placed, is set; is
held; Vism 485,3 (vidh!yate etaya ettha va -atl ti dhatu);
485,6 (bharaharehi ca bharo viya sattehi -ante dhariyantl
ti attho ); 485,9 (tatp etasv eva -ati thaplyatl ti attho );
Pj Il 351,28 (maccu ettha -atl ti maccudheyyatp);
Vv-a 155,12 (udakatp ettha -atl ti udadhi ti); Bv-a 114,22
(vasü ti ratanmp vuccati tatp dhareti -ati va ettha ti
vasudha); Sadd 834,1 (-ati); - pp hita, mfn., m. and n.
[ts], l. (mfn. and m.) (what is) beneficia/, salutary;
suitable; (one who is) well-disposed, friendly, helpful;
D li 202,9 (raja Magadho Seniyo Bimbisaro dhammiko
dhammaraja -o brahmaQ.agahapatikanatp negamanam
e' eva janapadanatp ca); SI 57,19* (patikacceva tatp
kayira ymp jañña -am attano ); Dhp 163 (ymp ve -atp ca
sadhutp ca tatp ve paramadukkaratp); Vv 50:15 (-o
sabbassa 1okassa buddho ); Ja II 389,26* (-ehi vacanatp
vutto; 390,3·: tehi va<,)<,)hitp icchamanehi); V 97,25* foil.
(sudullabh' itthi purisassa ya -a bhatt' itthiya dullabho
yo -o ca); Patis I 49,32 (samo ca -o ca sukho ca ti
samadhi); Ap 482,2o (bhesajjani -ani ca); Mi137,34 (ime
dhamma -a ime dhamma ahita); 200,13 (mettabhavana
-anmp pi ahitanmp pi); Spk I 160,5 (saggassa -a
tatrupapattijananato pi sovaggika); - 2. (n.) benefit,
good; welfare; Vin I 4,7 (tatp vo bhavissati digharattatp
-aya sukhaya ti); MI 21,27 (satto 1oke uppanno ...
atthaya -aya sukhaya devamanussanan ti); A I 189,17
(lobho purisassa ajjhattatp uppajjamano uppajjati -aya
va ahitaya va ti): Ja IV 320,1o* (-ena tasatp nandami);
Ap 499,4 (-aya sabbasattanatp sukhaya); Sv 70,28 (sabbe
paQ.abhüte -ena anukampako); Mhv 33:103 (iti
parahitam attano -atp ca pati1abhiya);
-anukampi(n), mfn., concemed for the welfare (of);
(well-disposed and compassionate; ?) Vin V 164,1
(-anukampina karuQ.ikena bhavitabbatp); DI 227,26
(antarayakaro samano .. . -anukampl va tesatp hoti
ahitanukampl va ti; Sv 396,17: ettha hitan ti va<,)<,)hitp,
anukampl ti icchat! ti attho ); M I 124,4 (-anukampl ca
viharissami); S I 111 ,2o• (-anukampl sambuddho ); A IV
93,1• (ya sabbada hoti -anukampinl); Jai 241,7• (attha-
kamassa -anukampino); - neg. ahitanukampi(n), mfn.,
DI 227,29 (ahitanukampissa); A I 78,18 (thero ce pi matp
vadeyya ahitanukampl; Mp II 151,26: ahitatp
icchamano ); IV 92,12* (padughacitta ahitanukampinl;
Mp IV 46,22: na hitanukampinl); Ja IV 47,1s•; -
-anucintana, n., thinking about the benefit; Pv-a 164,10;
- -'-anvita, mfn., following, connected with, what is
beneficia/; Nidd-a I 8,9* foll.; - -' -ílpasmphara, m.,
bringing benefit; Vism 318,9 (metta -ílpasatphararasa);
Ud-a 82,24; - -' -esi(n), mfn., desiring the welfare (of),
11'ishing well; V in II 250,36 (karuññata -' -esita
383 dahara
anukampita); M I 46,7 (satthara ... savakanatp - '-esina
anukampakena); A III 6,11 (atthakamaya -'-esiniya);
Ja V 391,27* (sabbatp vuttatp -'-esihi); Ap 19,11 (-'-esi
sabbapiil).inatp); Pv-a 87,24 (-'-esitp pi ... matp); Th-a li
234,3 (-' -esino ti mitta, Be, Se so; Ce, E e omit);
Mi1207,17 (-'-es! upanissitanatp);
neg. ahitesi(n), mfn., Vism 307,15; - --ccagi(n), mfn.,
abandoning what is beneficia[; Ja VI 183,3•; -
--cittaka, mfn., with friendly thoughts; Ja V 114,zs·;
Sv 70,3o; - --dhammato in Ee at Ap 324,4 is prob. wr;
Be --vabbhuto; Ce --vappatho; Se --vappako; -
--pariccagi(n), mfn., abandoning what is beneficia!;
Ja VI 183,7·; - --parisakki(n), mfn., working for the
welfare (of); Vin V 164,2 (Sp 1364,29: --parisakkina ti
-' -esina --gavesina); - --pharaQ.aka, mfn., diffusing
benefit; Mp I 47,14 (sabbasattesu --pharaQ.aka metta);-
--va(t), mfn., favourable, useful; Sadd 145,s• (--va
bhagava e' eva);- --sukhanipphadaka, mfn., producing
benefit and happiness; Vism 679,6 (--sukha-
nipphadakaghena); - neg. ahita, mfn., m., and n.,
l. (mfn. and m.) not beneficia!; harmful; ill-disposed,
unfriendly, hostile; an enemy; Abh 344 (amitto ripu ...
patipakkhahito paro); Dhp 163 (sukarani asadhüni attano
ahitani ca); Ja I 24,12 (hitesu pi ahitesu pi ekacitto
bhaveyyasi); III 86,s· (etatp mayhatp ahitatp asappayan
ti); 357,13* (ahíto bhavati ñatlnatp); IV 270,9· (sattanmp
hi maraQ.aphasso ahíto); Vism 300,32* (kodhatp va
ahitatp maggatp arü)ha yadi verino); Bv-a 112,23
(hitahite ti hite ca ahite ca, mitte ca arnitte ca ti attho, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee ahitahite ti ahite ca hite ca mitte ca sapatte
ca ti attho); - 2. (n.) damage, disadvantage; D III
175,27* (ahitam api e' apanudi); 246,18 (ahitaya
dukkhaya devamanussanatp); MI 132,24 (tmp hi te
moghapurisa bhavissati digharattatp ahitaya dukkhaya
ti); Sn 692 (nahatp kumare ahitam anussarami); Ja VI
312,18* (yatp ve narassa ahitaya assa): Mi1164,1s
(tathagato sabbasattanmp ahitatp apanetva hitatp
upadahat! ti); - ahitanukampi(n), mfn., see above; -
ati-ahita, mfn., very unfriendly; very harmful; Ja V 147,9·
(naccahitan ti na ati-ahitatp hitatikkantmp 1uddmp);
VI 307,1·;- see also accahita;- fpp dheyya, mfn. and
m.n. [cf S. dheya], l. (mfn.) to be held, to be subjected
(to);- ifc see anañña- (sv añña2);- 2. (m.n.) (i) [BHS
-dheya] the sphere (of); the realm (of), the sway (of);
Ps II 266,25 foil. (marassa dheyymp maradheyymp,
dheyyan ti thanmp vatthu nivaso gocaro ); - ifc see
kamma-, maccu-, mara-; - (ii) giving, assigning; - ifc
see nama- (sv nama2); - see also taddhita (sv ta[d]),
suhita.
dahati4 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup darhati, Wg § 17:84], grows;
Sadd 457,22 (dahi bahi vuddhiymp: -ati bahati, Be so; Ee
da<m>hati).
daha~a 1 , se e sv dahana.
dahana2 , n. Úrom dahati 3], setting; taking as;
Vibh-a 486,32 (dahan ti thapeti ... tatp seyyato -atp
nissaya); - adahana, n., not setting; not taking as;
Ud-a 114,19 (tassa attato parato ca -assa karaQ.atp
dasseti).
dahara, mf(-a, -!)n. and m.f [BHS id.; cfS. dahara],
young; an infant; a young boy, a youth; a young girl;
daharaka
Abh 253 (-o ca yuva susu); V in I 85,28 (so -e -e
bhikkhü upasailkamitva); III 68,18 (itthi va puriso va -o
yuva mai_l<;lanakajatiko; Sp 398,28: -o ti taru!)o); 128,36
(yuva yuvatin ti -o -irp.); DI 115,15 (-o va samano susü
kajakeso bhadrena yobbanena samannagato pathamena
vayasa); II 340,5 (addasa . . . -arp. kumararp. mandarp.
uttanaseyyakarp. cha<;l<;litarp.); MI 384,11 (-a miil)avika
pajapatl); SI 68,24 (bhavarp. Gotamo -o e' eva jatiya
navo ca pabbajjaya ti); 131,1 * (-a tvarp. rüpavatl aharp. ca
-o susu); Vv 84:48 (manussa -a mahanta atha va pi
majjhima); Thí 239 (yo ca vu<;l<;lho va -o va); Ja III
342,16 (bhariya 0 -taya kamesu atitta); 395,1* (passami vo
'harp. -irp. kumarirp.); V 63,1* (ma narp. -o ti uññasi);
178,26' (sabba p' eta -a yo añño raja bhavissati tarp. eta
gamissantl ti); 180,2* (putta . . . -a appattayobbana);
VI 26,7• (-a pi hi míyanti); Mi140,6 (añño so -o taru!)o
mando uttanaseyyako ahosi añño aharp. etarahi mahanto
ti); 47,32 (puriso -irp. darikarp. varetva); Vism 126,ls
(yatha nama -o kumarako ukkhipitva !flapiyamano
punappunarp. bhümiyarp. patati); Pj II 384,14 (0 -tte); -
0
-t-agge,from childhood; from youth; A V 300,1 (Mp V
77,22: daharakalato pat!flaya); - 0 -tara, mfn., campar.,
younger; Ja VI 479,15' (Siddhatthakumaro amhehi -o);
Vism 100,3 (sace acariyo -o hoti); Sv 864,7; -
atidahara, mfn., very young; too young; Ja II 46,23
(purohitabrahmai_lassa putto pana -o n' eva tayo vede
janati na hatthisuttarp.); Ps II 402,9 (--taya uttanaseyyo );
Spk I 311,14 (--tta); Pj II 459,19 (jararp. patva nama
bhante mara!)arp. anurüparp. -o me putto mato ti); - see
also abhidahara.
daharaka, mfi-ika)n., [dahara + ka2; BHS id.], young;
Vin I 271,9 (kídiso bha!).e dovarika vejjo ti -o ayye ti);
Thí 464 (rajje ... bhoga sukha daharika si, Be, Ce so; E e,
Se pi; Thí-a258,24: taru!)í casi); Ja VI 139,21* (pubbe va
no -e na hanesi, so read with L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 283;
Be, Se daharakale; Ce -e samane; Ee -e ca samane);
Mil 32,6 (aharp. kho maharaja -o santo pabbajito ); 310,27
(amissito kilesehi so nama -o).
dahariyii, f [= daharika], young, a young girl; Ja VI
521 ,26* (ye tarp. ji!)I)assa padarp.su evarp. -arp. satirp.;
522,22·: -an ti daharirp. taru!)irp. sobhaggappattarp.
samanam).
v'dii 1 [S. )da 1], see deti.
v'dii 2 [S. v'da2], see diyati.
v'dii3 [cfS. Dhatup dunoti, davayati, Wg §§ 26:24; 27:10],
to burn; to a.fflict; Dhatup 133 (da dave); Dhatum 231.
v'dii4 [S. v'de], see dayati2.
v'da 5 [S. v'dai], see dayati 3.
v'da 6 [S. v'dra], see dati 3.
v'da 7 [S. v'drai], see dayati4.
-da 8 [ts], a suffix added to (usually) pronominal stems to
form adverbs oftime;- see eg ekada, kada, tada, yada.
dakhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup drakhati, Wg § 5:10],
becomes dry; is able; Sadd 329,18 (dakha dhakha
sosanalamatthesu: ... -ati dhakhati).
daghati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup draghate, Wg § 4:40], is
tired; is able; Sadd 335,3 (dagha ayase ca: ayaso
kilamanarp. cakaro samatthiyapekkhako: -ati nidagho).
datha, f (and datha, m.) [cf S. darp.*a, darp.~tra, and
S. lex. da<;lha, BHS -datha], l. a canine tooth; a fang;
384 data(r)
Abh 261; D II 167,26* (eka pi -a tidivehi püjita); Bv 28:6
(eka -a tidasapure); Ja I 273,17 (so yakkho .. .
kandamakulamatta dve -a ca mapetva); II 27,7 (sího .. .
ekarp. mahisarp. vadhitva -ahí ovijjhitva); IV 181,23
(catühi -ahi, Be, Ce so; Ee -ehi; Se da<;lhehi); V 231,25
(sunakho . . . mukharp. vivaritva catasso -a dassetva);
VI l66,15· (nagamiil)ava... -a vivaritva passasanta
attharp.su); Sv 450,16 (kaci -a kaja pi viVai).I)a pi honti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr datha); 604,10 (catasso -a dve
akkhaka UI)hísan ti ima satta dhatuyo na vippakirirp.su);
Dhp-a I 215,8 (agadena kira -a dhovitva ekarp. sapparp.
pesetü ti); - 2. a tus k; Ja II 408,5 (sükaro ...
vyaggharp. ... -aya paharitva); Mhv 25:29 (-ahi
bhinditvana sila ... hatthl); - o•avudha, mfn., whose
weapon is his teeth or fangs; Ja IV 348,16' (sayarp. -o
itaresu -esu pakkhandi); V 172,15*; Nidd I 8,4 (sappo .. .
datha tassa avudho ti -o, Be, Ce, E e so; Se da<;lha .. .
da<;lhavudho) = Sadd 466,25; Cp 2:10:1 (-o ghoraviso
dvijivho uragadhibhü, Be, Ce so; Ee wr dathavudho; Se
da<;lhavuso; Cp-a 175,12: catasso datha avudha etassa ti
-o);- 0 -danta, m. [datha + danta 1], a canine tooth; Pj I
44,11 (cattaro -a ekakotika ekamülika); - 0 (a)-bala,
0
(a)-bali(n), mfn., strong-toothed; whose strength is his
teeth; Sn 72 (sího ... -1; Pj 11 127,n: da!fla ba1arp. assa
atthí ti -I); Jall 409,15* (-esu); Psiii 130,16 (-o maha-
vyaggho viya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee da!flabali); - see also
uddhatada!fla (sv uddharati), dattha2, nikkhantadatha
(sv nikkhamati), makuladatha, susukkadatha (sv sukka2).
dathi(n), mfn. [BHS da!flin; cfS. darp.~trin], having large
teeth or fangs; having tusks; Jall 29,17* (-ini; 29,21·:
bhadde dathasampanne síhi); 245,23* (so hi tattha maha
hoti sigalo viya -inarp.; 246,3·: yatha sigalo -Inarp. maha
ahosi evarp. maha hoti); 409,14* (vyaggharp. miga yattha
jinirp.su -ino; 409,w: -ino sükara miga); IV 348,14* (-I
-Isu pakkhandi; 348,16·: sayarp. dathavudho itaresu
dathavudhesu pakkhandi); V 302,21* (so!)a vaka sigala ca
ye e' aññe santi -ino ); Th p 1,3* (síhanarp. va
nadantanarp. -Inarp. girigabbhare; Th-a I 6,25: -Inan ti
da!flavantanarp.); Th 524 (deve gajantamhi nadanti -ino;
Th-a 11 220,!8joll.: -ino ti síhavyagghadayo pa?pakkha-
satta, te hi da!flavudha -ino ti vuccanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
tehi da!flahi vuyhantl ti -ino ti).
dathika, f [cf datha and S. da<;lhika], whiskers; a
moustache; Vin Il 134,5foll. (chabbaggiya bhikkhü
massurp. kappapenti . . . -arp. thapenti . . . na -a
!flapetabba); Ja I 305,25 (-asu gahetva); IV 185,8· (-anarp.
va<;l<;lhitatta díghuttarot!fla); Sp 1211,13 (bhamukayarp. va
lajate va -aya va); Ps III 61,7 (-ahi parüjhahi mukharp.
pihitarp.); - ifc see tambada!flika (sv tamba), parüjha-
massuda!flika (sv parüjha), mahadathika (sv maha[t]).
da¡Jima, dalima, da!ima, m. [S. da<;lima, da1ima], the
pomegranate tree; SAF: Punica granatum L.; (see also
G.M. Meulenbeld, 1974, p. 562); Abh 570 (karako tu ca
dalimo); Thí 297 (phullarp. dalimalat!flirp., Be, Se so; Ce
dalimayatthirp.; Ee da1ikalatthirp. va, prob. wr;
Thí-a 214,8: pupphitarp. bíjapüralatarp. viya); Th-a Il
166,3 (da<;limaphalarp. adasi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dajima-).
data, mfn., pp ofdiyati qv.
data(r), m.f [S. dat]'], one who gives, a giver ( + gen. or
acc.); D I 89,lo (aharp. ... mantanarp. -a tvarp. mantanarp.
databba
pa!iggaheta ti); MI 111,14 (atthassa ninneta amatassa -a
dhammassami tathagato ); S III 251,11 (-a hoti
mülagandhana~); A 11 203,18 (sa na -a hoti samar_1assa
va brahmar_1assa va anna~ pana~ ... ); Sn 713 (app~
dan~ na hiJeyya -ara~ navajaniya); Ja IV 42,9* (tv~
no s' issariy~ -a); VI 298,7* (sabbakaman~ -ar~);
Th-a I 145,22 (atthi pana koci nagaran~ dane
ekadivasa~ sahass~ -a ti); Pañca-g 50 (-aro); -
adata(r), m., one who does not give; Pv 20:2 (-a); Ja V
382,22 (aya~ bhikkhave bhikkhu pub be . . . macchañ
t~aggena telabindu~ pi -a ahosi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
telabindussapi).
dátabba, mfn.,fpp ofdeti qv.
dátabbaka, mfn. [databba + ka2], to be given; Ap 5,29
idatva -~ dana~; Ap-a 112,2s: -~ databbayuttak~)
= Cp p. 36,19*.
xdáti\ pr. 3 sg., se e sv deti.
dati2 , pr. 3 sg., see sv diyati.
date, pr. 3 sg. [v'da6 ; cf S. Dhatup drati, Wg § 24:46: dra
kutsay~ gatau (svapne palayane)], is contemptible;
goes in a wretched or contemptible way; ? Sadd 368,6
ikucchitagamana~ vadanto -ati suddati); 374,3foll. (da
kucchite gamane: -ati suddati suddo . . . kucchita~
gacchati ti attho ... da iti garahattho dhatu ).
dáti4 , f [cf S. dati, datr], a gift; a giver; Sadd 866,18
!bhukodato ttimo . . . -i dan~ tena nibbatta~
dattimam);- see also datti.
dátmp\ i~f ofdeti qv.
dátmp2 , inf of dayati3 qv.
dátta, datra, n. [S. datra], a sickle, a scythe; Abh 448 (-a~
lavittam asina~); Mil 33,2foll. (vamena bhante hatthena
yavakalap~ gahetva dakkhii.1ena hatthena -a~ gahetva
-ena chindanti ti); Sadd 870,22foll. (gotta~ -a~ ...
[garun~] mate ... gotr~ datra~).
dátyüha, m. [ts], a gallinule; Abh 644 (-o kii\akar_l!hako);
- se e also najjuha.
dátha in Ee at Sv 450,16 is wr for da!ha qv.
dána 1, n. [cfS. dana 1, dana2], a gift; giving; liberality;
alms; applying; Abh 420 (cago vissajjan~ -a~); 1014;
Vin I 69,36 (aññatitthiyapubbassa cattaro mase
parivasassa -~); 237,4 (atha ca pana m~ bhagava
nigal_l!hesu pi -e samadapeti); III 15,13 (ñati m~
nissaya -ani dassanti puññani karissanti); D 11 179,28
iyannünah~ imasa~ pokkharar_1ina~ tire evarilpa~
-~ patthapeyya~ ann~ annatthikassa pan~
panatthikassa ... ); 354,14 (Payasi rajañño -~ patthapesi
samar_1abrahmar_1akapal_liddhikav a1_1ibbakay acakan~ );
III 147,7* (-e ahi~saya asahase rato); 232,3 (cattari
sailgahavatthuni -a~ peyyavajja~ atthacariya
samanattata); 258,IOfoll. (attha 0 -vatthuni asajja -~
deti bhaya -a~ deti ... ); M II 62,2 (ayasma Ra!thapalo
sakapitu nivesane n' eva-a~ alattha na paccakkhana~);
SI 58,9 (tassa mayh~ bhante catusu dvaresu -~
diyittha); A I 162,25* (bahiddha dadanti -ani, Ce, Se so;
Be denti; Ee -a); III41,2 (pañc' ime bhikkhave -e
anisa~sa); V 269,8 (id~ -~ petana~ ñatisalohitana~
upakappatu); Khp 8:6 (yassa -ena silena sa~yamena
damena ca nidhi sunihito hoti); Dhp 223 Gine kadariy~
-ena); It 98,1 (dve 'maní bhikkhave -ani amisadan~ ca
dhammadan~ ca); Pv 4:1 (dajja -~ amacchañ ); Ja I
385 dana
2,27 (rañño arocetva nagare bheri~ carapetva
mahajanassa -a~ datva tapasapabbajj~ pabbaji); 74,18
(atha Maro mahapurisa~ aha Siddhattha tuyh~ -assa
dinnabhave ko sakkhi ti); III 12,1* (adeyyesu dad~
-~); 473,13 (khayabhirukassa hi -a~ natthi); IV 64,8*
(macchera ca pamada ca ev~ -~ na diyyati); 402,25*
(y~ kiñci manusa~ -a~ adinna~ me na vijjati);
461,18* (vina pi -a); VI 97,18* (-~va brahmacariy~
va katam~ su mahapphala~); 494,26* (na hi -a par~
atthi pati!tha sabbapiil_lina~); 547,15* (tato kumare
adaya ... brahma1_1assa ada -a~); Ap 4,19 (manasa -~
maya dinn~); 267,2 (ekachattassa -ena duggati~
nupapajj' ah~); Vibh 422,5 (-a~ datva sila~
samadiyitva uposathakamm~ katva kattha upapajjanti);
Kv 543,15 (araha -a~ dadeyya ti); Mil276,14foll. (yo
para~ dukkhapetva -~ deti api nu t~ -a~
sukhavipaka~ hoti saggasa~vattanikan ti); Vism 223,5
(antamaso ekalopamatt~ pi -a~ adatva na bhuñjissami
ti); It-all 131,21 (databba~ savatthuka va cetana -~.
sampattipariccagass' eta~ adhivacana~); Pj 11 405,32
(yañño yago -an ti atthato eka~); Saddh 213;
Sadd 368,14 ( -an ti databb~ dadanti etena ti atthena
deyyadhammo danacetana ca vuccati); - ifc see agga-
(sv agga\ aggaJa-, aggi-, i1_1a-, kañña-, tutthi-, patti-
(sv patti2), maha- (sv maha[t]); - o• -agga, n. [dana +
agga2], a hall where alms are distributed; Ja II 368,24
(kada raja -a~ agacchissati ti); III 470,11 (so ekadivasa~
-a~ olokento mayh~ dan~ dussila lolasatta
bhuñjanti); VI 487,21 (-e dana~ bhuñjitva); 503,34'
(Vessantarassa -e sur~ na labhimha ti vattu~ ma
labhantil ti); Mp I 431,27 (-asmi~ uccasadda~
mahasadd~ sutva); Pv-a 124,10 (-e pariccaganhane);
Ap-a 521,5 (ki~ nu kho amhaka~ -e n' atthi ti); -
--parivahanaka, --parivahaka, mfn., who supervises,
manages, the alms hall;? Mp 1 257,8 (satthu
--parivahanake tayo purise !hapayi~su, Be, Ce so; Ee
--parivahake; Se --pariggahar_1ake); - 0 adhikára, m.,
the supervision of alms distribution; Mp 1 360,24;
Pv-a 124,21 (tadaha~ samina -e niyutto samano); -
0
adhigaccha, ind., relating to giving; ? Vibh 325,14foll.
(dana~ arabbha danadhigaccha ya uppajjati pañña
pajanana, eds so; perhaps for adhikicca, [< *adhigacca
< adhikicca ? cf pa!igacca, and see BSU § 87 and
Asokan adhigicya]; Vibh-a 412,3o: adhigaccha ti dan~
adhigacchantassa papu1_1antassa ti attho;
cfVibh-a 143,9foll.: dana~ arabbha dan~ adhikicca ya
uppaJJat1 cetana . . . aya~ vuccati danamayo
puññabhisailkharo ti;= Sv 997,36foll.: Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
danadhikicca); - 0 -nibaddha, n., a constant habit of
giving; Sp 623,25 C-pathani ti -ani 0 -vanani ti;
Sp-! [Be] 11 374,25: -an1 ti nibaddhadanani); -
0
-pati, m. [dana + pati 2], a lord of liberality, a very
generous giver; D 1 137,24 (saddho dayako -i
anava!advaro, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -patiko; Sv 298,6foll.);
S 1 174,8* (punappun~ -i dadanti); A III 39,12
(dayakassa -ino); Sn 487 (yo yacayogo -i gahattho);
Pv 11:4; Jal 349,25 (matapitaro pan' assa ... dayaka
-in o); VI 316,21 * (ah~ ca bhariya ca manussaloke
saddha ubho -i ahumha); Mil 279,3o (nah~ bhante
Nagasena Vessantarassa -ino dan~ garahami);
diina
Saddh 275;- 0 -patika, m., id., Ja IV 69,23 (tada setthi
aya!Tl -o bhikkhu ahosi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee --bhikkhu);
-
0
-parami, 0 -paramita,f, the perfection of giving (the
first of ten perfections); Ja I 25,19 (bahirakabhaJ.lt;ia-
pariccago -i nama ailgapariccago dana-upaparami nama
jivitapariccago danaparamatthaparami nama ti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee añgapariccago paramiyo nama bahirabhaJ.lt;la-
pariccago upaparamiyo nama jivitapariccago
paramatthaparamiyo nama ti); V 174,29" (sañrassa
pariccattabhavo -i nama hoti); Bv 2:116 (tadadakkhiq¡
pathamaq¡ -iq¡); 117 (0 -paramitaq¡ gaccha); Sv 651 ,9;
Ap-a 22,18 (tvaiTt ito paghaya pathamaq¡ -iq¡ püreyyasi);
-
0
-vato in Ee at Ja IV 62,16 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
danavitto); - 0 -vitta, mfn., devoted to giving; famous
for giving; ? Ja IV 62,16 (sasane pabbajitakalato pat!haya
-o ahosi danajjhasayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee danavato); -
0
-vittaka, mfn. [dana + vittaka2], devoted to giving;
famous for giving;? Ja VI 511,16 (putto me -o dana!Tl
detü ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -cittako) = Cp-a 84,33 (Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee 0 -vitakko); - 0 -Veyyavatika, m(jn)., one in
charge of distributing alms; Ja VI 503,29·; Dhp-a 11
134,6; II1 262,19 (sattha ... -aq¡ aha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
veyyavatikaq¡); - 0 -vyavata, m(jn)., one in charge of
distributing alms; Ja III 129,15; Dhp-a I 187,6 (-o ahosi,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e 0 -veyyavatiko); Pv-a 124,14; Cp-a 47,25
(mahasatto . . . danavassaq¡ vassanto -o hutva); -
0
-sarpvidhayaka, mfn., who directs the alms-giving;
Spk 11 362,21 (-e manusse pakkosapetva, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee danaq¡ saq¡vidhaya sake manusse, prob. wr); Mp I
257,10;- 0 -Süra, m. [dana + süra1], a hero of giving, a
very liberal giver; Sv 298,4; Mp lii 249,4;
0
-SOI,u;l.a, mfn., intoxicated with giving, munificent;
Abh 723; - adana, n., l. not giving; failure to give;
Pv 21:45 (-aq¡ atidanaq¡ ca nappasa!Tlsanti pa1,1t;lita);
Ja V 387,20* (-aq¡ na upapajjati); Sv 384,17 (-am eva
sikkhapetva); - 2. not a proper or suitable gift;
Mil 278,27 (dasa ... danani loke --sammatani); Mp IV
185,4 (yani pan' etani ... -an ti sammatani, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee --sammatani);- atidana, n., a very great gift;
too great a gift; excessive giving; Pv 21 :45; Ja VI 132,25*
( -aq¡ daditvana avajjhe deva ghatetva); 525,15* (-ena
khattiyo pabbajito saka ragha); Mil277,18 (-aiTt bhante
Nagasena Vessantarena rañña dinnaiTt); 277,25 (-ena
bhogakkhayaq¡ upeti); 278,2 (-aiTt maharaja loke vidühi
VaJ.!I,litaq¡ thutaq¡ pasatthaq¡); Pv-a 130,25 (-aq¡ na
databban ti); - see also natthudana (sv natthu).
dana 2, n. [ts], cutting; reaping; Abh 1014 (-aq¡
cage ... khai_lt;lane lavan e khaye); Vism 60,19 (-am
vuccati avakhai_lt;lanaq¡); Sadd 367,3o.
2
dana 3 , n. [see dayati ], protecting; Sadd 375,Jfoll. (de
palane: dayati -aq¡ uddanaq¡ dayituq¡ dayitva ...
uddham -am rakkhanam uddanam).
dana 4, ~- [S .. lex. id.]: ~leansing;. Abh 1014 ( -aq¡ cage
made suddhe); Sadd 480,5 (da sodhane: dayati -aq¡).
dana 5 , n. [ts], (an elephant's) rut-fluid; Abh 1014 (-aiTt
cage made).
danati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup danati, danayati, Wg § 23:25],
cuts; Sadd 398,4 (dana avakha1,1t;Iane: -ati apadanaiTt).
danava, m. [ts], one of a class of supematural beings; a
demon; Abh 14 (asura -a); Ja III 529,28* (so -o tattha
386 diimarika
samuggam uggi1i); V 393,8*; Ap 19,16 (kumbha1,1t;Ia -a
garuJa upajivanti taq¡ saraiTt); Mi1267,19 (atthi loke
yakkha rakkhasa ... asura -a gandhabba ... ).
dani, ind. [= idani qv; BHS dani(q¡)], now, at this moment;
just now; V in I 11,31 (akuppa me cetovimutti aya!Tl
antima jati natthi -i punabbhavo ti); III 19,23 (pub be kho
tvaiTt avuso Sudinna VaJ.ll,lava ahosi ... so -i tvaq¡ etarahi
kiso 1ükho ... ; cfSp 216,3o: ettha -i ti nipato, so pana
tvan ti vuttaq¡ hoti); DI 49,28 (kappitani kho te deva
hatthiyanani yassa -i ka1aq¡ maññasi ti); S IV 202,s (idh'
eva danahaq¡ devapura!Tl gacchami ti); A IV 21,1 (handa
ca -i mayaq¡ . . . gacchama bahukicca mayaq¡
bahukara1,1iya ti); Dhp 235 (pa1,1t;lupalaso va -i si);
Pv 10:11 (taq¡ ca -i parittakaq¡); Th 921 (iriyaq¡ asi
bhikkhünaq¡ aññatha -i dissate); Thi 141 (yaq¡ tvaiTt
kamaratiq¡ brüsi arati -i sa mamaq¡); Ja 11 189,4 (kiq¡ -i
karoma ti); 268,z• (ehi -i gharaq¡ vajemase); Ili 450,1
(na -i naq¡ ito paghaya sañkappessami ti); V 72,7*
(etadisaiTt idaiTt dukkhaq¡ sattavassani -i me anubhomi);
Ap 101,17 (ajj' eva -i pabbajja ajj' eva upasampada);
Mi111,3o (dehi me -i marisa mantan ti); Vism313,JJ (te
-i tumhesu gatesu kalahaq¡ karissanti); Sp 54,6 (karotha
-i bhante uposathan ti); 338,23 (a1aq¡ -i mayhaq¡ imina
aramena ti); Ps 11 278,25 (na -i me idha aññaq¡
pa!isarai_la!Tl atthi aññatra samai_lena Gotamena ti);
III 83,16 (abrahma1,1a danimha jata); Ud-a 326,6
(parinibbatu -i bhante bhagava ti yaci); Th-a Ili 71,27 ( -i
ti etarahi); Ap-a 91,2o (atikkanto -i hemanto
vasantasamayo anuppatto ).
1 3
dapana, n. [from dapeti andlor caus. of dayati ], causing
to give; making answer, satisfy; Spk 11 310,26 (idaiTt
k asma araddhaq¡, anuyogavattaq¡ o' -atthaq¡) f.
Sadd 480,5 (da sodhane ... anuyoga!Tl o• -atthaq¡); - ifc
see pativacana-.
dapeti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofdeti qv.
dabbi, f [S. darvi], a plant, perhaps a species of curcuma
(see G.M. Meulenbeld, 1974, p. 562); SAF: barberry,
Coscinium fenestratum (Gaertn.) Colebr.; Abh 586 (-i
daruha1idda).
dama\~- (and dama,f) [S. daman, n.], a string, a rape; a
garland; Abh 499 (sandilnaiTt -am uccate); S IV 163,13
(kalo ca balivaddo odato ca balivaddo ekena -ena va
yottena va saq¡yutta assu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr damena);
A III 393,25 (go1,1o kighado -aq¡ va chetva vaja!Tl va
bhinditva); Sn 28 (dama muñjamaya nava; Pj 11 40,8: -a
ti vacchakanaq¡ bandhanatthaya kata ... rajjubandhana-
visesa); Sv 718,9 (tassa hatthe pita pupphadiimaiTt
adasi ... ayaq¡ mama samiko ti tassa upari -aq¡ khipi);
Bv-a 149,11 (saha cintaya -am o1ambiq¡su);
Sadd 254,8foll. (damadamaq¡saddo .. . itthinapuq¡saka-
1inga, tatha hi ma1aUdama . . . malatidamaq¡ singhitaq¡
-aiTt bhamarehi);- ifc see olambaka-, puppha-, ma1aU-,
ratana- (sv ratana\ - see also ghatikadama-olambaka
(sv ghatika 1).
1
dama 2 , m. [cf~V daman ? or = dama ?], cutting; ?
Sadd 86!,2 (dati avakhai_lt;laq¡ karoti ti -o).
damarika, damari. mfn. and m. [cfS. t;Iamara, S., BHS
t;Iamara, t;lamarika; AMg t;Iamaria], violent; pugnacious;
a violent man; a bandit; Sp 72,16 (Paku1,1t;lakabhayo
nama -o rajjaiTt aggahesi; Sp-! [Be] I 157,21/oll.: -o ti
damaritva
yuddhakarako coro, Pai_lqukabhayo pana Abhayassa
bhagineyyo raja yeva na coro, balakkarena pana rajjassa
gahitatta -o ti vuttaq1); 375,25 (panthaghata-
gamaghatadlni karonto 0 -cora viya ... ); PsI 34,3 (Maro
ekasmiq1 padese attano parisaya issariyaq1 pavattento
rajjapaccante 0 -rajaputto viya vasatl ti); IV 103,24
(antante game paharanto 0
-bhavaql janapetva
anupubbena nigame pi janapade pi paharati); Pj JI 44,15
(Maro ti vasavattibhumiyaq1 aññataro 0 -devaputto);
Khuddas 36:5 (damaricorassa datuq1 issariyassa ca); -
0
-ttana, n., violence; banditry; Mhv 61:71 (rajai_laql
agai_lenta te gata -aq1).
damaritva in Ee at Mp V 28,5 is wr; read Ajatasattuna
matapitaro manta with Be, Ce, Se (and Spk I 154,11).
daya 1, m. [ts], a gift; a remuneration; Abh 898 (-o dane);
Ja IV 138,18 (ayaq1 raja ... aqh' eva kahapai_le dapesi,
imassa -o nahapitadayo); V 343,23 (mahasattaq1 tassa
-aq1 katva dadanto aha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dasaq1) f.
363,23 (ahaq1 etaq1 Sumukhassa -aq1 katva vissajjessamí
ti); Mp I 156,11 ( -aq1 datuq1 yuttaghane -aq1 den ti); -
ifc see tuqhi-, raja-.
daya 2 , m. [ts], share; inheritance; Abh 898 (-o ...
vibhattabbadhane ca pitunaq1); - ifc see dhamma-
(sv dhamma 1);- 0 '-ada, mftn)., (one) who inherits; an
heir; Abh 1046 (-o bandhave putte); S IV 72,17 (app eva
nam' ahaq1 bhagavato bhasitassa -o assan ti); A III 72,4
(yaql kammaql karissami kalyiii_laql va papakaql va tassa
-o bhavissamí ti; Mp Ili 260,7 foil.: tena dinnaphala-
patiggahako bhavissamí ti attho); 259,19 (corasadharai_la
bhoga appiyehi -ehi sadharai_la bhoga); Th! 63 (putto
buddhassa -o Kassapo; Thí-a 73,29: tassa dayabhiitassa
navalokuttaradhammassa adanena -o); Ja V 468,1*
(addha aññe pi -e putte lacchama); VI 151,24*
lbhiimipati janapadassa -o); Ap 22,31 (tassa dhammesu
-o oraso dhammanimmito Sariputto ti namena;
Ap-a 278,2: dhammakoqhasabhagí); Vism 44,14 (te hi
bhagavato putta tasma pitusantakanaq1 paccayanaq1 -a
hutva te paccaye paribhuñjanti); Sp 51 ,2 (yo hi koci ...
attano orasaq1 puttaq1 pabbajeti ayaq1 vuccati maharaja
-o sasanassa ti); Mp I 308,15 (darako ubhinnaq1 pi
kulanaq1 -o hoti ti); Mhv 5:197; - adayada, mfn.,
without heirs; not belonging to an heir, S I 69,31
(anapacca adayada); Ja III 24,29* (nidhr . . . adayado;
25,w: dayadanaJ?l abhavato adayado);- 0 '-adaka, m.,
0
'-adika, f, an heir; an heiress; M JI 73,13* (-a tassa
dhanaq1 haranti) = Th 781; Th 1142 (-o hehisi
aggavadino); Thl 327 (tuvaJ?l dayadika kule);- see also
dayajja.
daya 3 , dava 1, m. [cf S. dava], a forest; a park; Abh 536
(araññaq1 kananaq1 -o); 898 (-o ... vane); Vin JI
138,15foll. (chabbaggiya bhikkhii -aql alimpenti,
manussa ujjhayanti . . . seyyatha pi davaqahaka ti ... na
bhikkhave -o alimpetabbo); MI 205,23 (ma samai_la
etaq1 -aq1 pavisi; Ps JI 235,21: -o ti avise sena araññass'
etaq1 namaq1); A IV 74,2 (gacchaq1 pi daheyya -aq1 pi
daheyya; Mp IV 39,25: -an ti sarakkhaq1 abhayatthaya
dinnaq1 araññaq1); Sn 703 (uccavaca niccharanti -e
aggisikhupama); Ja III 274,11 • (taq1 maq1 vadhituq1
agañchi -asmiq1 Añjanavane; 274,17·: -asmin ti
miganaq1 vasanatthaya dinne uyyane);- davaggi, m., a
387 dayati
forest fire; Ja III 140,15 (imasmiq1 araññe -imhi uqhite
kiq1 karotha ti); Vism 470,19 (doso ... attano nissaya-
dahanaraso va -i viya); Dhp-a I 281,18 (antaramagge
mahantaq1 -iq1 uqhitaq1 disva); - 0
'alimpana, n.,
setting fire to a park; Sp 477,15 (--vatthiisu); -
0
-pala, m., the keeper or guardian of a park; Vin I
350,32; M III 155,15 (-o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -palako);
Ps JI 236,15 foil.; - 0 -vasika, mfn. [daya + vasika2],
living in aforest (or N.pr.); Ap 198,2 (-o isi, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se vanavasiko; Ap-a 465,10: vane vasanabhavena -o
isí ti saii.khaq1 gato).
dayaka, mft-ika)n. and m..f [ts], who gives, bestows; a
donar, a benefactor; V in I 139,17 (ahaq1 hi -o karako
sanghupaqhako ti); JI 255,1 (Mahapajapat! Gotamí
bhagavato matuccha apadika posika khírassa dayika);
DI 137,24 (saddho -o danapati anavatadvaro ... ;
Sv 298,3: -o ti danasiiro); M III 256,14foll. (atth'
Ananda dakkhii_la -ato visujjhati no patiggahakato ... );
S V 400,25* (seyyanisajjattharai_lassa -aq1); A I 25,32foll.
(etadaggaq1 bhikkhave mama savakanaq1
upasakanaq1 . . . -anaq1 yadidaq1 Sudatto gahapati
AnathapiJ.l<Jiko ... savikanaq1 upasikanaq1 ... dayikanaq1
yadidaq1 Visakha Migaramata); It 19,16* (saggaq1
gacchanti -a); Ja III 92,25 (sotapattimaggassa -o); 342,26
(-o pariccagena na tappati); Pv 1:1 (khettiipama
arahanto -a kassakiipama); Ap 379,27 (idaq1 me satakaql
ekaq1 natthi me koci -o); Mil 294,9 (ime -a danaq1 datva
pubbapetanaq1 adisanti); Vism 63,28 (yaq1 -ehi
bhikkhussa padamiile nikkhittaq1); Th-a I 166,28 ( -tta);
0
Saddh 276; Mhv 5:197; Sadd 845,6 (dadat! ti -o);- ifc
see kathina- (sv kathina2), jala-, pii_lqa-;
adayaka, mf(adayika)n., who does not give; mean; nota
donar; A III 32,25 (dve savaka samasaddha samasíla
samapañña eko dayako eko -o); Pv 9:3 (adayika
macchariní kadariya; Pv-a 45,13: kassaci kiñci pi na
adasi adanasíla); Ja VI 287,16 (saggamagganaq1 -aq1 ...
lokayatikavadaq1 na seveyya); Vism 29,14; Patis-a 158,8
(sa [tai_lha] pan' esa punabbhavassa dayika pi atthi -a
pi).
dayajja, n. and m., l. (n.) [S. dayadya], inheritance; Vin I
82,9 (eso te Rahula pita gacchassu -aq1 yacahí ti); D III
60,26 (na hi te tata dibbaq1 cakkaratanaq1 pettikaq1 -aq1);
A III 43,24* (-aq1 patipajjati); Sv 791,30 (mahantaq1 kho
pan' etaq1 satthu -aq1 yadidaq1 satta ariyadhanani nama);
Mp III 260,3 (kammassa dayado kammadayado,
kammaq1 mayhaq1 -aq1 santakan ti attho); It-a JI 143,24
(pitu santakassa -assa bhagino); - 2. (m.) an heir;
Vin III 66,34 foil. (ko nu kho bhante Ananda pituno -o
putto va bhagineyyo va ti, putto kho avuso pituno -o ti).
dayati 1, pr. 3 sg., se e sv deti.
dayate, pr. 3 sg. [vda4; S. Dhatup dayate, Wg § 22:66],
protects; Sadd 375,1foll. (de palane: -ati danaq1
uddanaq1 dayituq1 dayitva ... duggatito -ati rakkhat! ti
danaq1); 468,3 (de ... palane: -ati).
dayati 3, pr. 3 sg. [vda5; S. Dhatup dayati, Wg § 22:26],
purifies, cleanses; Dhatum 234 (da sodhane);
Sadd 374,11 (de sodhane: ... -ati dayanaq1); 480,5 (da
sodhane: -ati danaq1); 480,17 (da suddhiyaq1: -ati
vodayati); - inf (a) dayituq1, Sadd 374,12; (b) datuq1 2,
Sadd 374,1sfoll. (balo ... na patibalo anuyuñjiyamano
dayati
anuyogaJ11 datun ti ettha datun ti padassa sodhetun ti
attho); - absol. (a) dayitva, Sadd 374,12; (b) datva2,
Sadd 374,2o (anuyogaJ11 datva ti anuyogaJ11 sodhetva ti
attho yeva gahetabbo);- see also dapana.
dayati4, pr. 3 sg. [Yda7; S. Dhatup drayati, drati,
Wg § 22:10], sleeps; Dhatum 649 (da tu supane);
Sadd 367,29 (supanakiriyaJ11 vadanto -ati niddayati
nidda); 480,7 (da supane: -ati niddayati).
dayana, n. [cf Yda2, diyati], cutting, mowing; Ps II 188,3
(-e o' -aggaJ11 ... aggadanaJ11 adasi, Ce, E e so; Be 1ayane
1ayanaggaJ11; Se 1ayanaka1e 1ayanaggaJ11) t Mp I 143,1o
(Ce, Ee -e dayaggaJ11; Be, Se 1ayane 1ayanaggaJ11) t
Dhp-a I 98,14 (Ce, E e so; Be, Se 1ayane 1ayanaggaJ11);
Mp IV 162,20 (0 -kalo viya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se 1ayana-; =
Ud-a 235,25: eds layana-); Dhp-a III 285,2 ( 0 ' -atthaJ11,
Ce, E e so; Be, Se IayanatthaJ11); - o• -agga, n. [dayana +
agga 1], the first-fruits of the cutting; Ps II 188,3 (-aJ11,
Ce, E e so; Be, Se layanaggaJ11) t Dhp-a I 98,15 (Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se 1ayanaggaJ11).
dayapeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of diyati qv.
dayi(n), mfn. [S. dayin], giving; having to pay, owing;
Sadd 862,21 foll. (-i si me sataJ11 il)aJ11 ... ettha ca -i si ti
datuJ11 yutto si); - ifc see ayu-, icchiticchita-
(sv icchati\ nanavidhapha1a- (sv nana), manapa-, vara-
(sv vari), settha-.
dayika, mfn. [dayi(n) + ka2; BHS id.], giving; producing;
- ifc see nanavidhasurabhikusúma- (sv nana), pil)<;la-.
dara, m., m.pl. and n.pl. [ts; see Sadd 98,17 foll.], a wife;
wives; Abh 237 (-o jaya); 1000 (pajapati -e); D III
165,13' (puttehi -ehi catuppadehi ca); 189,13
([matapitaro] pa!irüpena -ena SaJ11yojenti); M II 73,15'
(na miyamanaJ11 dhanam anveti kiñci putta ca dara ca);
III 170,8 (akkhadhutto parhamen' eva ka1iggahena
puttaJ11 pi jiyetha -a'll pi jiyetha); A III 213,23* (sehi -ehi
santunho paradiiraJ11 ca arame); Dhp 345 (puttesu -esu
ca ya apekha); Sn 396 (parassa -aJ11 natikkameyya);
Vv 61:6 (sakena -en a ca tugho ahosiJ11); Ja V 104,6•
(dubbhare -e); VI 115,6• (parassa -ani atikkamanti);
322,26' (labhat' ajja -aJ11); 502,8* (senti putta ca -a ca
Vessantaranivesane); Ap 80,24 (ten' eva -a'll posemi);
Mil279,18 (kiJ11kiiral)a VessantaraJ11 danapatiJ11
atiba!haJ11 paripatesi sudinne putte ca -e ca); Pj I 138,8
(-a ti visatiya bhariyanaJ11 ya kaci bhariya); Sadd 259,28;
- ifc see kudara, para-, putta-, - 0
-bharal).a,
darabharal)a, n., supporting a wife; DI 72,3 (uttari'll
avasighaJ11 -aya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dara-) = M I 275,11
(Be so; Ce, E e, Se dara-); D III 183,2o (akkhadhutto
ayaJ11 purisapuggalo nalaJ11 -aya ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dara-); Ja II 248,23* (so -a'll akatva andhe matapitaro
poseti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee dara- ); - adarabharal)a, mfn.,
not supporting a wife; Ja V 288,22 (kani!!ho
adarabharal)O bhatu santike yeva vasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr adaraharal)e).
daraka, m., darika,f [ts], a child; a boy, a son; a young
animal; a girl, a daughter, Abh 253 (miil)avo -o); Vin I
79,5 (na bhikkhave ünapannarasavasso -o
pabbajetabbo); 269,14 (handa je imaJ11 -aJ11 kattarasuppe
pakkhipitva niharitva saii.karakü!e cha<;I<;Iehi ti); III 83,27
(tassa gabbhapatanaJ11 adasi -o kalam akasi); 121,6
(matugamo nama manussitthi ... antamaso tadahujata pi
388 daru
darika); D II 340,12 (yada so -o dasavassuddesiko va
hoti dvadasavassuddesiko va); Vv 83:7 (candaJ11 viya -o
rudaJ11); Ja I 115,7 (amma aññe -a cullapita ti ayyako ti
ayyaka ti vadanti); 121,3 (-anaJ11 keJimal)<;la1aJ11 gantva);
199,7 (ath' assa matapitaro samanajatiyaJ11 ku1ato
darikaJ11 anayiJ11su); II 127,26 (-e aii.kenadaya viil)ije
upasaii.kamanti); III 1,13 (catasso darika eko ca -o jayi,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se darikayo); 183,13 (sa darika attano
samikaJ11 aba ayyaputta kiJ11 me gharavasena iccham'
ahaJ11 pabbajitun ti); IV 38,19 (-assa niimaJ11 karonta);
VI 4,27 (te -a thaññatthaya rodati); 513,8* (raja kumaram
adaya rajaputti ca darikaJ11); 566,26 (sami Vessantara -a
te kuhiJ11 gata ti); Ap 379,22 (til)ahiirena jivami tena
posemi -e); Cp 1:9:12 (yadahaJ11 -o homi jatiya
anhavassiko); Mil9,3o (Nagasenassa -assa pita); 47,32
(kocid eva puriso dahariJ11 darikaJ11 varetva ...
pakkameyya sa aparena samayena mahati assa
vayappatta); Vism 379,26; Sp 541,14 (0 -vesena !hitaJ11
darikaJ11 itthi ti ajananto ... phusati, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
0
-vasena); Spk 1 190,21 (amhakaJ11 gehe vayappatto -o
atthi, tass' etaJ11 darikaJ11 detha ti); III 135,5 (naginiyo ...
cintenti ... no -a ... ); Mhv 6:22 (-e te gavesanto);
35:103 (bhattaJ11 ahari darika); Sadd 364,3foll.
(a!!havassika goñ ti pi darika ti pi vuccati); -
0
-jaggana, n., looking after children; Ja I 148,23; -
0
-pariharal).a, n., the care and nourishing of children;
Ap-a 507,23; - 0
-parihara, m., (necessaries for) the
care of children; Ja II 20,20.
daral).a, n. [ts], splitting; Dhatup 247 (dara -e);
Dhatum 12 (!aii.ka -e);- ifc see pasiil)a-.
darayimha in Ee at AIV 391,16 is wr (misprint) for
dharayimha (Be, Ce, Se so).
darika,J., see sv daraka.
darita, mfn., caus. pp of darati 3 qv.
daru, n. [ts], wood; a piece of wood, a plank; sticks,
firewood; Abh 548 (kanhaJ11 tu -u); Vin 111 42,31
(yannünahaJ11 ... -üni yacitva daruku!ikaJ11 kareyyan ti);
SI 169,16 (-u samadahano; Spk I 236,2o: -UJ11
jhapayamano); Dhp 80 (-u'll namayanti tacchaka);
Th 147 (parittaJ11 -um aruyha yatha slde mahal)l)ave);
Ja II 20,10 (sace -ilhi attho ); III 375,1 (amacca -ünaJ11
sakarasatamattena citakaJ11 kari'llsu); IV 208,23* (kiJ11
-u'll chetum icchasi); V 32,18' (-ü samahatva); 249,2o
(uyyanupavane -üni uddharanto ); VI 206,10• (adlpitaJ11
-u til)ena missaJ11); Ap 363,21 (na te -um aharanti
udakaJ11 va padadhovanaJ11); Mil 36,23 (puriso gehe
patante aññena -una upatthambheyya); Vism 380,1 (so
-ünaJ11 atthaya sakarena aravi'll gantva); Dhp-a II 142,6
(-üni gahetva yanakadinaJ11 cakkadini karonti); Nidd-a I
173,15 (va<;l<;Ihakissa -umhi abhiññiil)a'll katva);
Sadd 234,32; - 0
-kafallaka, m., a wooden doll or
puppet; Ja V 16,9• (so naccati -o va; 18,27·: daru-
mayayantarüpakaJ11 viya); - 0 -kuc;l.c;lika, (m)fln)., (a
hut) with a wooden wall; Sp 571,4 (-aJ11, Ce, Ee, Se so;
0
Be -kunikaJ11; Sp-! [Be] II 335,7: daruna kataJ11 ku!!aJ11
ettha ti darukuHika); - 0
-kottana, n., chopping wood;
Jaii 18,17 (--saddaJ11 sutva);- 0 -gaha,m. [daru +
gaha 1], a wood-store; a timber-store; Vin III 42,3o (atthi
ca me -e gal)akO sandinho); - 0 -guJa, m. [daru +
guJa 1], a wooden die; a wooden ball; Sp 1052,31
daruka
(akkhadhutta -arp. khipanti); Spk III 200,25 (-o viya
vinivattitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -Cii~aya nivattitva, prob.
0
wr); - 0 -cira, n., a robe made of sticks or wood;
Sv 808,2 (-ani nivasetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -an) = Ps II
121,22; Mp I 279,8 (aparabhage -ani dharesi, tasma
Daruciriyo nama jato); Dhp-a II 210,9;- -cüfa,f, see
0
sv -gu~a above; -
0 0
-dhitalika,f, a wooden doll;
Vin III 36,12 (Sp 278,5: -a nama kanhariiparp.); 126,31;
3 (-arp. vepullarp. agamasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee daliddiyarp.);
-
0
-pattika, m(jn). [from daru + patta ], (one) who uses
a wooden bowl; (or N.pr.); DI 159,4 (-'-antevas!;
Sv 319,18: yasma pan' assa upajjhayo darumayena
pattena pil;u;Iaya carati tasma -'-antevas! ti vuccati) t
III 22,3 (Sv 827,2: -assa antevas!); - -makkap.ka, m.,
0
"a wooden spider", a wooden framework;?
Sp 766,13foll. (talarukkhadisu pana coranarp.
anaruhanatthaya -arp. ako~enti kllJ.l~ake bandhanti ... sace
-o rukkhe alllnamatto va hoti ... ); - 0 -mal}<}.alika,
0
-mllJ.l<;la1a, n., a globe or circular framework of wood;
JaiV 188,11foll. (udare -arp. bandhitva, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -ffia!)<;la1arp.) = Dhp-a III 179,23; Ja IV 189,1 foil.
0
(devaputta... -assa bandhanarajjuke . . . chindirp.su .. .
-arp. patamanarp. ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -assa .. .
0
-mllJ.l<;lalarp.) = Dhp-a III 180,11foll. (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-assa ... 0 -mllJ.l<;lalarp.);- 0 -maya, mfn., made ofwood,
wooden; Sp 1244,7; Dhp-a I 192,16 (-arp. yantahatthirp.
karetva); - --cira, n. and mfn., a robe made of wood;
wearing a robe made ofwood; Ud-a 77,17 (Daruciriyo ti
--ci:ro); 79,1 (--ciradharitaya); - 0
-masaka,m., a
wooden coin; V in III 238,3 (Sp 689,29: -o ti saradaruna
va ve~upesikaya va antamaso talapllJ.l!)ena pi riiparp.
chinditva katamasako);- 0 -yanta, n., a wooden puppet;
Vism 594,33 (-arp. suññarp. nijjivarp. niñhikarp.); Sv 197,29
(suttaka<;19hanavasena -assa hatthapadal~anarp. viya);-
0
-halidda,f., a plant, perhaps a species of curcuma ( see
G.M. Meulenbeld, 1974, p. 562); SAF: barberry,
Coscinium fenestratum (Gaertn.) Colebr.; Abh 586
(dabbi -a); - adaru, n., (what is) not wood; Spk 1
290,15 (-urp. tacchento viya); - se e also bahidaruka
(sv bahi).
2 samarp. va dasavisayarp. upeti akamako va dasavisayarp.
daruka, n. [daru + ka ], a piece of wood; a log; SI 202,5*
(apaviddharp. va vanasmi -arp.) = Th 62; Sp 335,11; -
0
-pillaka, n., a wooden doll or puppet; Thi 390 (sombha
-ani va, Be, Ce so; Se wr 0 -cillakani; Ee wr -cillaka
0
nava; Thi-a 239.12: darudllJ.l<;ladihi uparacitariipakani).
darul}a, mfi-a, -i)n. [ts], hard, severe; cruel, pitiless;
dreadful, frightful, terrible; Abh 167 (bhimarp. -arp.);
S II 226,1o (-o bhikkhave labhasakkarasiloko ka~ko
pharuso; Spk II 206,6: -o ti thaddho); Dhp 139
(abbhakkhanarp. va -arp.); Vv 18:11 (Pu!)<;lañka ti -i, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee Pu!)<;!añkatidaru!)i); Pv 32:2 (migaluddo
pure asirp. lohitapiil)i -o; Pv-a 206,12: -o ti ghoro,
sattanarp. hirp.sanako ti attho); 38:6 (ghoso siiyati -o);
Ja IV 432,16' (-ani vacanani kathesi); V 236,5
(pitughatakammarp. nama -arp.); VI 375,7• (VllJ.l!)ena
muduna -ena va); Ap 300,14 (gajo ... -o); 613,12 (-arp.
nirayarp. gantva); Mil 117,20 (rajosañcita vata -a honti);
Sp 445,5 (idha pana cetana -a hoti ti); 944,18 (ajja
nakkhattarp. -arp.); Dhp-a I 324,15 ( 0 -taya); Cp-a 197,26
(gabbhavasato 0 -tare ... dukkhe); Saddh 5 (micchadi~~hi
ca -a); Mhv 37:10;- -ena, adv., harshly; with severity;
389 das a
Ap 322,16 (-ena damenti te, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -e na);-
atidarul}a, mfn., very cruel; very terrible; Pv 32:3; Ja IV
6,w; Ap 559,6; - sudarul}a, mfn., very terrible; very
pitiless; Ja IV 471,9•; V 460,18*; Ap 516,1 (ghorariiparp.
-arp. nirayarp. niina gacchami).
dalikalatthi, se e sv da<;lima.
daliddiya, dafiddiya (and daliddiya, daliddiya ?), n. [from
dalidda qv; cf S. daridrya], poverty; need; D III 65,16
A III 353,21 * (-arp. dukkharp. loke, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
d~iddiyarp.); Sv 303,3 (tarp. kularp. anukkamena -ena
abhibhiitarp.); Ps III 167,19 (daliddo ti -ena samannagato,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee daFddiyena); Pj II 231,15
(hiraññasUVllJ.l!)adivittarp. ... -arp. viipasameti); Saddh 78
(Ee d~iddiyarp.); Sadd 391,15 (daliddassa bhavo -arp.).
dalima, dafima, m., see sv da<;lima.
2
daleti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of dalati qv.
dafati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dra<;Iate, Wg § 8:35], falls to
pieces; Sadd 460,22 (da~a dha~a visarllJ.le: -ati dha~ati).
3
dava\ m., see sv daya .
2 3
dava , m. [ts; cfvda ],fire; distress; Dhatup 133 (da -e);
Dhatum 231.
davaggi, m., see sv daya3.
dasa 1, m. [ts], a slave; Abh 514; Vin 1 72,3 (sabbarp.
sapateyyarp. ca te acariya hotu mayarp. ca te -a sadhu no
acariya tikicchahi ti); 76,26 (na bhikkhave -o
pabbajetabbo ); IV 224,33 (-o nama antojato dhanakkito
karamaranito ); D 1 60,7 (idha te assa puriso -o
kammakaro pubbuHhayi pacchanipati kirp.karapa~issavi);
M II 149,6 (YonaKambojesu aññesu ca paccantimesu
janapadesu dve va VllJ.l!)a ayyo e' eva-o ca); S 1 76,3 (ye
pi 'ssa te honti -a ti va pessa ti va kammakara ti va te pi
dllJ.l<;latajjita bhayatajjita ... parikammani karonti); Ja 1
447,14 (bodhisattassa pana upakaro hoti -o viya
sabbakiccani karoti); V 257,18* (taduttarirp. na bhaseyya
-o ayirassa santike); VI 138,11* (mano deva avadhi -e
no dehi KhllJ.l<;lahalassa); 235,18' ( 0 -ttarp. upagato ); 533,8•
(maññe Ka!)hajinarp. dasirp. Jalirp. -arp. ca icchasi); Nidd 1
11,8foll. (cattaro -a antojatako -o dhanakkitako -o
upeti); Sp 1000,19foll. (cattaro -a); It-a 11 116,19
(tllJ.lhaya -o viya hutva); Vibh-a 487,23 (aññe jiviturp.
asakkonta kucchihetu -a nama jata); - ifc se e amaya-,
ghara-; - 0 -kammakara, m.pl., slaves and servants;
D III 189,3; Thi 340 (hitvan' aharp. ñatigllJ.larp. -ani ca;
Thi-a 224,31 foil.: das e ca karnmakare ca,
lüi.gavipallasena h' etarp. vuttarp., Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
kammakare); Ja IV 50,24 (tassa kule antamaso -a pi
danarp. denti); Ap 317,9 (-a bahii, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
-kara); Mil292,3o; - 0 -patidasa, m., the slave of a
slave; ? Ja VI 552,16' (ayarp. Vessantarassa -o ti ñatva);
-
0
-putta, m., a slave; a retainer, a vassal; Mil331,5
( ... siira vammino yodhino -a bha~~iputta ... , Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be dasikaputta bha~iputta); Ps V 95,3 (sabbesarp.
-anarp. saññarp. adasi); - see also dasakaputta
(sv dasaka); - 0 -porisa, n., slaves and serving-men;
Sn 769 (gavassarp. -arp. ... yo naro anugijjhati; Nidd 1
11 ,8 foil.: das a ti cattaro dasa ... porisan ti tayo purisa
bha~aka kammakara upajivino ti); Ja IV 172,14*; -
0
-visaya, n., slavery, servitude; Nidd I 11,8foll. (cattaro
das a
das a ... samarp va -arp upeti akamako va -arp upeti, Ee
so; Ce dasavyarp; Se dasaviyarp; Be samarp va
dasavyarp upeti akamako va -arp upeti); - adlisa, m.,
not a slave; a freed slave; Abh 516 (-o tu bhujisso );
Sp 1001,20 (mata eva va das! pita -o); Sv266,24 (sisarp
dhovitva -arp bhujissarp katva); - see also das1 1,
sadasaka.
2
dlisa , dasya, n. [cfS. dasya], slavery; Nidd I 11,13*
(samarp ca eke upayanti -arp, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce dasyarp;
t Ja VI 285,6*: sayaJ11 pi h' eke upayanti dasa); - see
also dasavya.
dlisaka, m. [dasa 1 + ka2], a slave; - 0 -putta, m., a
retainer, a vassal; DI 51,Io (hattharoha assaroha ... süra
cammayodhino -a ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dasika-;
Sv 157,n: -a ti ba1avasineha gharadasayodha, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se dasika-; Se gharadasikaputta) t A IV 107,15; -
se e also dasaputta (sv dasa 1).
dlisati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dasati, dasate, Wg § 21:18],
gives; Sadd 449,16 (dasu dane: -ati).
dlisavya, dasaviya, n. [from dasa 1; cf S. dasya], slavery,
servitude; the condition of being a slave; D I 72,28 (aharp
kho pubbe daso ahosirp anattadhino paradhino na
yenakamailgamo so 'mhi etarahi tamba -a mutto
attadh!no aparadhino bhujisso yenakamailgamo ti); Ja I
226,8' (-a111 upagataya); Nidd I 11,9 foil. (samarp va -arp
upeti akamako va -arp upeti, Ce so; Ee dasavisayarp; Se
dasaviyarp; Be -arp upeti . . . dasavisayaJ11 upeti);
Vism 305,7 (d!gharattarp kilesanarp -arp upagatassa);
Sp 694,2o (ta~haya -arp atHatta); Sv 214,19 (evarp -arp
viya uddhaccakukkuccarp daqhabbarp); Sadd 791,5foll.
(dasassa bhavo -arp, dasasaddato va pana bhave
~iyapaccaya111 katva majjhe vakaragarnarp ca katva
dasaviyan ti sijjhati); - 0
0pagata, m(jn)., a slave;
Abh 515 (antojato dhanakklto -o sayarp daso ); - see
also dasa2 •
dlisikli, dasiya, f [S. lex. dasika], a female slave; Ja VI
554,13* (1aWliya patikoteti ghare jatarn va dasiyaJ11;
554,17:foll.: dasiyan ti -arp); - ifc see eka-, kumbha-
(svkumbha\
dlisima, m. [?],a species of tree; Ja VI 536,4* (0 -kañjako
e' ettha, Be so; Ee, Se 0 -kañcako; Ce daslmakacako;
536,21,: ima pi dve rukkhajatiyo ettha); 536,24
0
( -kañjakadlnarp pupphana111 sattaharp gandho na
chijjati, Be so; Ee, Se dasimakadlnaJ11, prob. wr; Ce
daslmakacakadlnarp ).
dlisiyavattiman ti in Ee at Mp IV 47,24 is prob. wr; Be,
Ce, Se daslsaman ti; ad A IV 94,1: daslsamarp.
dlisiyli,f, see sv dasika.
dlisi\ f [ts] (pl.nom. dasi, dasiyo, dasso; see also
Sadd 202,26foll.), afemale slave; a concubine; Abh 236;
V in I 291,3 (Visakha ... -i111 ~apesi gaccha je aramarp
gantva ka1arp arocehi ... ); III 139,25 (dasa bhariyayo
dhanakkita ... -I ca bhariya ca ... ); IV 162,3 (bhal).<;iikarp
bandhitva -iya adasi); 271,34 (tassa ku1assa -I ghararp
sammajjantl); Thl 442 (vithiya -iya ghare jato); Ja I
318,16 (pato va yagupacanatthaya -irp uqhapetva);
III 413,20* (dasyaharp parapesiya ahuJ11, Be, Ce, Se so;
E e dassaharp; 414,I'joll.: -1 aharp, dasahan ti pi patho );
437,10 (bahuJ11 ca te dhana111 dassami -1 ca bhavissaml
ti); IV 53,29* (dasa ca dasso anujivino ca, Ce, Ee so; Be
390 digghika
dasyo; Se -I); V 413,II (-Isu udakatthaya nadiJ11 gantva
cumbatani bhümiyarp nikkhipitva sukhakathaya
nisinnasu); VI 506,12* (naha111 akama -i111 pi araññarp
netum ussahe); Sp 580,24 Ge ti -i111 a1apati); Dhp-a III
25,4 ( -ihi saddhirp udakatittharp gacchanti viya);
Ap 587,3 (-iyo paricarika); Mil158,4 (bandheyyapi
dasittarp va upaneyya ti); Mhv 27: 12;- ifc se e amaya-,
kumbha- (sv kumbha\ geha- (sv geha\ ghara-; -
0
(i)-dlisa, dasidasa, n., and -a, m.pl., male and female
slaves; M I 162,5 (-a111 jatidhammarp); Th 957 ( -arp ca
dummedha sadiyissanti 'nagate, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se das!-;
Th-a III 85,38: dasiyo ca dase ca); Ja III 343,4 (-arp aneh!
ti, Be so; Se das!-; Ce, Ee dasirp); Nidd I 1,14 (-a ajeJaka,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se das1-); Ap 315,Io (-a ca bhariya ye
e' aññe anujivino, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dasi dasa); 458,2o
(-a anucara honti, Be, Ce so; E e, Se das! dasa);
Cp 1:9:26 (hatth1 asse rathe datva -arp gavarp dhanarp,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dasirp dasarp); Mi1147,24 (itthipurisa
-a); 279,14 (keci -arp ... den ti); Dhp-a I 404,26 (-e ...
~apesi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dasi-); Sadd 751,1 (-arp);-
0
(i)-putta, m., the son of a slave-woman; DI 92,13
(ayyaputta Sakya bhavanti -o tvarp asi Sakyi.inaJ11);
Ja IV 41,5 (ummattako -o); Dhp-a I 359,!! (khattiya
pana jivitarp cajanta pi -ehi saddhirp na bhuñjanti); -
se e al so das a, dasika.
dlisi2 , f. [S. lex. id.], a plant; SAF: yellow nail-dye plant,
Barleria prionitis L.; Abh 579 (sereyyako -1);'
dlisuJ1liti, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dasnoti, Wg § 27:32],
injures; Sadd 495,5 (tika . . . dasa du hirpsayarp:
tikunati ... -ati ... ).
dlisya: n., se e sv dasa2 .
dliha, m., see sv <;laha.
dlihaka, mfn., see sv <;lahaka.
dlihati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup drahate, Wg § 16:45], wakes;
Sadd 458,15 (dahu niddakkhaye: -ati).
di-, iic for dvi qv.
dikamma, mfn., see dvikamma sv dvi.
dikkha, m. [cfS. drk~a. mfn.], look, appearance;- ifc see
duddikkha.
dikkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. d!k~ate; Wg § 16:8], shaves the
head; initiates, consecrates; imposes restraint or a vow;
Dhatup 14; Dhatum 24; Sadd 332,1 (dikkha
mu~<;liyopanayananiyamabbatadesesu:...
-ati);
pp dikkhita, mfn. [S. dik~ita], initiated, consecrated; -
ifc see cira-.
dikkhli, f [S. dik~a], sacrifice; worship, devotion;
Abh 1104 (-a tu yajane 'ccane).
dikkhuJ1liti, pr. 3 sg. [?], injures; Sadd 495,5 (tika tiga
sagha dikkha ... hi111sayarp: tiku~ati tigu~ati saghu~ati
-ati ... ).
digaJ1ika, mfn., see sv dvi.
digambara, mfn. and m. [ts], naked; a naked ascetic;
Abh 440 (-o ace1ako nig~tho ); 734 (naggo -o 'vattho ).
digu, m.n., see sv dvi.
-digucchliya in Ee atAs 210,36foll. (asucidigucchaya ...
rüpanimittadigucchaya ... ) is prob. wr for -jigucchaya
(Be, Ce, Se, Vism 340,5foll. so).
diguJ1a, mfn., see dvigu~a sv dvi.
digghikli, f [S. d!rghika], a pond; a moat or ditch:
Abh 205 (parikha tu ca -a).
dighaccha
dighacchii in Ee atA II 117,33 and Ja IV 64,23* is pass. wr
for jighaccha qv.
dighañña in Ee at Ja V 24,4*, 402,9* foil., and 403,30* is
prob. wrfor jighañña qv.
dicati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup rcati, Wg § 28:19], praises;
Sadd 335,29 (dica thutiyaip: -ati; read rica ... rica ti ?).
dicchati, pr. 3 sg. [desid. of deti; S. ditsati], wishes to
give; gives; S I 18,27* (appasmeke pavecchanti bahuneke
na -are; Spk I 59,3foil.: bahuna pi bhogena samannagata
ekacce na dadanti) = Ja IV 65,21 •; Ja IV 64,6* (apacanta
pi -anti santo laddhana bhojanarp; 64,10' foil.: sappurisa
bhikkhacariyaya laddharp pi bhojanaip daturp icchanti
na ekaka paribhuñjanti).
dija, mfn. and m., see dvija sv dvi.
1 -iyo na ga1,1hami); Patis I 135,2fol/. (ka -i kati
dittha\ mfn., pp of dissati qv.
2 2
dittha , mfn., pp ofv'dis qv.
dittha , mfn., pp of dissati3 qv.
3
2 2
ditthaka, mfn., [diqha + ka ], (what is) seen, visible;
witnessed; Ja V 444,24 (taq¡ attana -aq¡ aharitva dassento
pi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dighaip); Dhp-a II 90,2 (-arp pana
adentassa lajja uppajjati); - aditthaka, mfn., not
(a/ready) seen; Ja VI 9,27 (acariyehi -aip nama n' atthi);
As 241,16 (uparimaggattayarp dighakam eva passati -aq¡
passan ti).
ditthagatena in Ee at S II 230,3 is prob. wr; see
diddhagata (sv diddha).
2 (sv dva), natthika-, niyatamiccha- (sv niyacchati),
ditthanta\ m., see sv v'dis .
2
ditthanta , m., see sv ditthi.
dinhava(t), mfn., part.p~rf.act. ofv'dis qv.
2 2. right view; insight; Vin IV 51,28 (dhamma bahussuta
dittha\ ind. [S. di~tya], thank heavens! what luck!
Abh 1151 (anande saq¡ ca -a); D II 99,21 (-a me bhante
bhagavato phasu -a me bhante bhagavato khamaniyaq¡,
so read? E e, Se -a . . . diqhaq¡; Be, Ce digho .. .
ditthaq¡) f. S V 153,9 foil. (Be dittho ... phasu dighaip .. .
khamaniyaq¡; Ce, E e, Se omit digho ... phasu; Ee -a .. .
khamaniyaq¡; Ce, Se dighaip ... ); D III 73,ls (-a bho
satta jivasi -a bho satta jivasi ti); Ja I 362,19* (-a
nahumha vanara; 362,24·: etad eva sadhu yaq¡ vanara
nahumha ti).
2 2
ditlhii , ind., absol. ofv'dis qv.
ditthi, f [S. dr~ti], l. view, belief, opmwn; theory,
doctrine; esp. fa/se theory; Abh 161 (dassanaq¡ -i
laddhi); Vin I 98,11 (bhikkhu papikaya -tya
appatinissagge ukkhittako); 115,6 (anujanami bhikkhave
-iq¡ pi avikatun ti; Sp 1059,21: adhammakammaJ!I idarp
na me khamati ti evaq¡ aññassa santike attano -iq¡
pakasetuq¡); D II 80,29 (ya 'yaq¡ -i ariya niyyanika
niyyati takkarassa sammadukkhakkhayaya; Sv 537,15:
maggasampayutta sammadighi); MI 8,15foil. (tassa
evaq¡ ayoniso manasikaroto channaq¡ -Inaq¡ aññatara -i
uppajjati atthi me atta ti va ... ); 40,21 (anekavihita -iyo
loke uppajjanti attavadapatisarpyutta va 1okavada-
patisaq¡yutta va; Ps I 181,34: -iyo ti micchadighiyo );
136,31 (ekaccassa evaq¡ -i hoti so loko so atta so pecca
bhavissami nicco ... ); SI 133,33* (ito bahiddha pasa!J9a
-Isu pasidanti ye); III 93,29 (dve 'ma bhikkhave -iyo
bhavadighi ca vibhavaditthi ca); V 143,10 (ko e' adi
kusa1anaq¡ dhammanaq¡, silaip ca suvisuddhaq¡ -i ca
ujuka); A V 186,4 (vadehi gahapati kiq¡dighiko sama1,1o
Gotamo ti, na kho ahaq¡ bhante bhagavato sabbaq¡ -iq¡
391 ditthi
janami ti); It 27,6* (bhaddikaya ca -iya); Sn 786
(dhonassa hi n' atthi kuhiñci loke pakappita -i
bhavabhavesu); 789 (-I hi naq¡ pava tatha vadanaq¡;
Nidd I 86,4: sa va -i taq¡ puggalaip pavadati iti vayaq¡
pugga1o micchadighiko viparitadassano ti); 882 (sakaq¡
sakaq¡ -im akarpsu saccaip tasma hi balo ti paraq¡
dahanti); Pv 38:54 (vamami papakaJ!! -irp buddhanaq¡
sasane rato); Thi 185 (so me dhammam adesesi -Inaq¡
samatikkamaip); Ja I 373,29 (brahma!JO dhammarp sutva
-irp bhinditva bodhisattaq¡ sara!JaJ!I gato); VI 115,35*
(paraq¡ ca -Isu samadapenti); 222,3* (esa mayhaq¡ saka
-i ajitaq¡ ojinamase); Nidd I 49,28 (v!sativatthuka
sakkayadiqhi dasavatthuka micchadighi dasavatthuka
antaggahika -i); 183,1sfoil. (-Isu ad!navarp passanto
dighiqhanani ... kati -iyo ti solasa -iyo); Ap 480,21
(kesesu chijjamanesu -i chinna samülika); Vibh 245,27
(idha ti imissa -iya imissa khantiya ... imasmiq¡ satthu
sasane; Vibh-a 325,12: [sasanaq¡] hi buddhena bhagavata
dighatta -I ti vuccati); 341,11 (dasa kilesavatthüni lobho
doso moho mano -i vicikiccha ... ); 392,11 (katama
dasavatthuka antaggahika -i); Kv ll6,2o (sabbaq¡ atthi ti
ya -i sa -i micchaditthi ti); Vism 19,2o (kalylil,lamitto
Ya~!~ nissaya ... -iq¡ ujuq¡ karoti); Patis-a 444,17 (-iya
eva Saipsare bandhanaq¡ dasseti); Saddh 13; - ifc se e
akiriya- (sv kiriya), uccheda-, kudighi, dvasag~i­
miccha-, sakkaya-, samma- (sv samma\ sassata-; -
honti ... -iya suppatividdha) = D III 267,9; A III 349,13
(tassa savanena pi akataip hoti bahusaccena pi akataq¡
hoti -iya pi appatividdhaJ!! hoti); IV 98,4* (taq¡ damena
samucchinde paññaviriyena -iya; Mp IV 49,19: magga-
sammadighiya); Sn 471 (samahito yo udatari oghaip
dhammaq¡ ca ñasi paramaya -iya; Pj II 409,26:
sabbaññutaña1,1ena); Vibh 328,26 (ya evarüpa anulomika
khanti -i ruci muti pekkha dhammanijjhanakhanti idaq¡
vuccati saccanulomikaq¡ ña1,1aq¡); - 3. sight; the eye;
Sadd 332,30* ( ... nettaq¡ locanaq¡ -i ... ); 548,18 (cakkhu
hi passanti etaya ti -I ti vuccati); - 0 'anusaya, m., an
inherent tendency to (false) views; persistent (wrong)
views; D III 254,4; MI 110,1; Patis I 195,34; Patis-a 440,6
(dighi yeva thamagatatthena anusayo ti -o); -
o• -anta, m. [dighanta2; prob. dighi + anta 1, but
cfSadd 853,26: digha antaq¡ patto ti dighippatto],
insight; the aim of insight; Vism 660,5 (-aq¡ patto ti
diqhipatto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee diqhappatto) = Sv 890,s f.
Mp II 148,1 (diqhippatto ti -aq¡ patto) quoting Patis II
52,8: (eds dighatta patto ti dighippatto);
0
'-iivikamma, n., revealing one's opinion; voicing one's
dissent; Vin V 183,24; 187,7 foil. (Sp 1374,26: -a ti
diqhlnarp avikammanarp laddhipakasanani,
apattidesanasailkhatanaq¡ vinayakammanarp etaip
adhivacanaq¡); Sv 1043,12 (na m' etaip khamatl ti evaq¡
-aip akatva, so read with Be, Ce, Se);
2
0
-ugghatana, n. [diqhi + ugghatana ], the removal of
(wrong) views; Vism 627,21foll.; 0
'-upiidiina,
o• -úpiidiina, n., the grasping of views; the fue/ that is
(jalse) views; DII 58,1; Vibh375,7; Vism569,7fol/.;-
0
-gata, n., a (fa/se) view, a theory; Vin IV 134,1
ditthi(n)
(Arinhassa nama bhikkhuno ... evarüp~ papakaq¡ -~
uppann~ hoti); MI 485,28 (sassato loko ti kho Vaccha
-~ etaq¡ dighigahanaq¡ ... ); SI 135,18*; A V 72,24
(patibalo hoti uppann~ -~ dhammato vivecetuq¡);
Sn 834 (manasa -ani cintayanto); 836 (digh1gataq¡ ...
vadesi k1disaq¡, Se so, me; Be, Ee -aq¡; Ce
diqhiggataq¡); Patis I 138,28; Sp 53,3 (sakani sakani -ani
ay~ dhammo ay~ vinayo ti d1penti); As 214,16/oll.
(dighiyo eva -ani . . . dvasaghiya va digh1n~
antogadhatta ditth1su gatan1 ti pi -ani ditthiya va gataq¡
etesan ti pi -ani); - 0 -gatika, m(jn). [from dighigata],
one holding a (false) view or theory; Ja II 54,11' (--tta);
V 241,15' (ete pañca -a); Nidd I 102,7 (sant' eke
samal)abrahmaJ.la -a, te dvasatthiya 0
-gatan~
aññataraq¡ 0 -gataq¡ ... gahetva ... sakaya sakaya dighiya
vasanti); Ud-a 358,23 (yada pana sammasambuddha 1oke
uppajjanti tada -a na sujjhanti na sobhanti); Pj II 553,34
(ete ca -e sassatucchedaditthiyo nissita ti ñatva);- ifc
see nana-;- 0 -Carita, m(jn)., (one) with a disposition to
theories; Nett 109,26; Vism 578,25 (-anaq¡ hi avijja ...
s~saranayika); Sv 754,10; - 0
-tassana,f, trembling,
agitation, because of one's theories; Sv 111,14; -
0
-dhammika in Ee at Nidd I 73,20 and 73,22 is wr for
dighadhammika qv sv v'dis2; - 0 -nijjhanakkhanti,f,
readiness to accept a view after reflection; a view
preferred after reflection;? M II 171,19/oll. (-ice pi ...
purisassa hoti evaq¡ me -1 ti iti vad~ sacc~
anurakkhati); S II 115,25 (aññatra -iya; Spk II 122,zs:
aparassa cintayato eka dighi uppajjati ya yassa hi
kiirai).~ nijjhayantassa khamati so atth' etan ti -iya
gal)hati); Nidd I 360,23 (sakkhidhamman ti na itih1tih~
. . . na -iya, samaq¡ sayaq¡ abhiññatarr; Nidd-a I 388,9:
-iya ti amhak~ nijjhayitva khamitva gahitaditthiya
saddhiq¡ sametl ti);- 0 -nipata, m., a look, a glance;-
ifc see mudusiniddha-;- -patta, m(jn)., (one) who has
0
achieved insight; who has achieved (nibbana) through
insight; D III 105,28 (satt' ime bhante puggala ...
kayasakkhi -o saddhavimutto ... ); Patis II 52,6
(paññindriyassa adhimattatta -o hoti; Patis-a 563,1sfoll.:
-o ti ditthatta patto ti . . . paññindriyena pathamaq¡
nibbanassa dighatta paccha . . . nibban~ patto ti -o,
paññindriyasaJi.khataya ditthiya nibban~ patto ti vuttarr
hoti); Nett 190,3 (-ena, Be, Ce so; Ee dittha-); Mi1102,27
(sotapanna pihitapaya -a viññatasatthusasana);
Vism 663,8 (-a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dittha-); Sadd 853,26
(digha antarr patto ti -o, paññacakkhuna disva
s~sarassa antarr nibbanaq¡ patto adhigato ti attho);
854,4 (ditthirr patto dighiya va patto -o); -
neg. aditthipatta, mfn., Spk I 215,23; - 0 -IDal}fJala, n.,
the pupil of the eye; Patis-a ?8,11 = As 307,15 quoted
Sadd 548,z1; - 0 -yayaka, 0 -ya, mfn., following views;
Sn 846 (na vedagü 0 -yayako, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se 0 -ya;
Nidd I 205,23: so dighiya na yayati; Pj II 547,2ofoll.:
catumaggavedagü madiso 0 -yayako na hoti, ditthiya
gacchanto va taq¡ sarato paccento va na hoti ... yayatl ti
yayako, karal)avacanena dighiya yatl ti 0 -yayako
upayogatthe samivacanena dighiya yatl ti pi -yayako,
0
Be, Se so; Ce, E e yatl ti ya tato ... ditthiya yau ti pi
0
-ya ... dighiq¡ yatl ti pi 0 -ya); - adifthi,f, (what is)
not a view; lack of view or belief, Sn 839 (-iya; Pj II
392 dina
545,26: dasavatthuk~ sammadinhirr vina);
Patis-a 444,18 (dighibhütani pi s~yojanani atthi
--bhütani pi); - duddifthi,f and mfn., L (j.) a bad or
false view; Sp 511,5 (mahajanarr -irr micchaditthiq¡
gal)hapesi); Ps III 441,6 (sa va nesaq¡ ditthi -1 ti); -
2. (or duddighi[n]), mfn., whose views are bad or false;
Ud 73,13* (-1 na dukkha pamuccare; Ud-a359,1: takkika
hi ayathava1addhikataya -1 micchabhinivighadighika
vipañtadassana, Ce, Se so; Ee -i; Be -ino); Dhp 339
(vaha vahanti -iq¡ saJi.kappa raganissita, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee duddigham; i= Th 760: kuddighirr);
nidditfhi, mfn., without views or theories; Patis I 80,4
(-i caratl ti viññal)acariya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niditthi); -
sadifthi, mfn., with views or theories; Nidd I 86,2; Patis I
81,31 (-i caratl ti aññal)acariya); - see also
akiriyaditthika (sv kiriya), aññadighika (sv añña2),
atidighiya, agamanadighika, ucchedadighika,
ev~ditthika, kiq¡diqhika (sv ka3), taq¡ditthika (sv ta[d]),
thamagatadighika (sv thama), natthikadighika, nana-
ditthika (sv nana), niyatamicchadiqhika (sv niyacchati),
micchaditthika, vimissaditthika, saditthika, samma-
ditthika (~~ samma2), sassat~dighika. ..
ditfhi(n), mfn. [cf S. dr~tin], seeing; having a view; - ifc
see evam-, missaka-, suddhaka-;- see also kuditthi.
diftheyya: mfn.,fpp ofv'dis 2 qv. ..
ditta 1, mfn., pp of dippati 1 qv.
ditta 2 , mfn., pp of dappati qv.
ditti, diti,f [S. d1pti; cf S. d1ti ?], splendour, light; Abh 64
(pabha -i ruci); Dhatup 173 (indha -iyaq¡); Dhatum 69
(raja -iyam); 476 (kasa -imhi); 630 (kaca dityarr);
Sadd 326,1 (-i sobha); 404,22 (-i virocan~); 447,31 (-!
ti pakatata virajanata va) .
diddha, mfn. and m. [S. digdha], l. (mfn.) smeared;
poisoned; Abh 746 (litto tu -o); It 68,5* (saro -o
kalapaq¡ va alittam upa1impati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dunho;
It-a II 62,29: yatha nama saro visena -o 1itto, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee duttho) = Ja IV 435,26* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se duttho);
Ja V 425,13 (madira va -a, Be so; Ce viya; Ee madir' iva;
Se vi ya visadugha; 431 ,28·: visamissasura vi ya, Ce, E e
so; Be, Se visamissaka sura); - ifc see gada-, visa-; -
2. (m.) a poisoned arrow; Abh 390; - 0 -gata (and
0
-gada ?), mfn., poisoned;? (smeared with poison; ?)
S II 230,3 (karr bhikkhave -ena visallena sallena
vijjhatu, Be, Ce so; Ee ditthagatena . . . vijjhanti; Se
ditthigatena; Spk II 208,7: -ena ti gatadiddhena visallena
ti visamakkhitena, Be, Ce so; Ee diddhagadena ti
gadadiddhena; Se diddhagatena ti gatadighena).
dina, n. [ts], a day; Abh 67 (divaso tu aharr -aq¡);
Ap 503,6 (desayissarr -e -e); 509,14 (mase aghadinesv
ah~); Saddh 239 (yani paññasavassani manussan~
-~ tahirr); Mhv 5:24 (-e -e); - ifc se e uposatha-,
satta- (sv satta4); - 0 -kara, m. [dina + kara 1], the sun;
Abh62; Bv-a287,11 (--ja1~);- 0 -pati,m. [dina +
pati 2], the sun; Abh 63; - duddina, n. and mfl-1)n., a
cloudy day; cloudy, rain y, dark; Abh 50 (-~
meghacchannahe); Ud-a 100,13 (sltavataduddin1 ti saca
sattahavaddalika udakaphusitasammissena s1tavatena
samantato paribbhamantena düsitadivasatta duddin1
nama ahosi); Bv-a 84,29 (dhüpehi -aq¡ katva, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee dhüpaduddin~); - ifc see sltavata-; -
dindibha
sudina, n., a good day, a clear day; Da~h 5:50 (dhüpehi
duddinam atho -al!l ahosi).
dindibha, m. [cf S. ~igibha, ~~~ibha, diddibha ?], a kind of
bird; the blue jay; Abh 643 (-o tu kikl); Ja VI 538,8* (-a
koñcavadika); Ap 16,24 (-a suvapota ca upajlvanti tal!l
saral!l); 347,14 (-a cakkavaka ca, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
ti~ibha).
dindima, m.n., see sv 9ü¡.9ima.
dinna, mfn., pp ofdeti qv.
2 (natidlgha ti adihi chadosavirahit~ sarirasampattil!l
dinnaka, mfn. [dinna + ka ], given; Ja 1 388,1 (ñat!hi pi
aññatlhi pi -e cattaro paccaye paccavekkhitva va);
Vism 63,23 (devadattiyan ti ... devatahi -al!l); Ps V 66,24
(maya -am eva nahosi); - esp. a class of son; Ja 1
135,17' (posavanatthaya dinno -o nama); V 84,1* (tayo hi
putta ... antevas! -o atrajo ca; 84,5·: -o ti ayal!l te putto
hotü ti parehi dinno); Nidd 1 247,31 (cattaro putta attajo
putto khettajo putto -o putto antevasiko putto) -t
Ap-a 130,27; - adinnaka, mfn., not given; Ja 1 386,1;
Sv 272,22 (ayal!l pana -al!l mayaya gai).hati); Dhp-a 11
89,19 (kil!l pana so dinnake gai).hati -e ti); 150,6;- see
also gharadinnakabadha (sv ghara).
dipada, mf(n)., see dvipada sv dvi.
dipadaka, mf(n)., see dvipadaka sv dvi.
dippat¡I (and dipati ?), pr. 3 sg. [S. d!pyate], blazes,
shines; is manifest; appears clearly; Dhatup 432 (dipa
dittiyal!l); Dhatum 671; V in 11 285,5 (handa mayal!l
avuso dhammal!l ca vinayal!l ca sañgayama pure
2
adhammo -ati dhammo pa~ibahiyati; or dippati
qv below); D III 71,26 (dasa akusa1akammapatha ativiya
-issanti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atibyadippissanti; Sv 853,22:
atibyadippissantl ti ativiya -issanti, ayam eva va pa~ho,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e ativiyadippissantl ti; Sv-ppll 39,1:
2
pa~ipakkhabhavena samujja1issanti; or to dippati
q¡· below); A 1 74,28 (yass~ parisayal!l ... adhamma-
2 148,11' (-itatta); Vism 687,7 (etena kil!l -ital!l hoti);
kammani -anti dhammakammani na -anti; orto dippati
q¡· below); V 144,s (na tathagatappavedito dhamma-
\Íilayo 1oke -eyya, Ce, Ee so; Be dibbeyya; Se d!peyya);
Ap 74,15 (buddho 1oke samuppanno -ati jinasasanal!l,
Ce, Ee so; Be -ati dani sasanal!l; Se -eti dani sasanal!l);
~i1 40,21 (koci-d-eva puriso padlpal!l padlpeyya kil!l so
sabbarattil!l -eyya ti, Ce so; Ee, Se dlpeyya ti; Be
padlpeyya ti); Mp 1 93,9* (yava tighanti suttanta vinayo
yava -ati); Ud-a 358,7 (obhasati joteti -ati, Ce, Ee, Se
so: Be dibbati); Th-a 111 200,20 (te pi na ppabhaseyyul!l
na dlpeyyun ti); Ap-a 386,4 (a samantato kasati -atl ti
akaso, Be, Se so; Ce d!ppatl ti; Ee dibbatl ti); Sadd 487,12
1dlpa dittiy~: -ati dipo ); 504,5 (candatarakappabhasena
pi -ati virocati sappabha hotl ti jul).ha);
part.pr. (a) dippanta, mfn., Ap 77,7 (-ante jinasasane);
lb) dippamana, mfn., Ap 62,16 (sasane -amanamhi); It-
a 1 133,31 (suriye -amane); Vv-a 182,1s (-amanehi
manisuvannehi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dibbamanehi); -
pp ditta\ -~fn. [S. dlpta], blazing, shining; Abh 1075
1aditte ... -o); Ap508,16 (-o va kanakaca1o);- caus.
pr. 3 sg. dlpeti, -ayati, reveals, makes manifest;
declares, proclaims; explains, makes clear; illustrates;
Vm1 354,22foll. (bhikkhu adhammal!l dhammo ti -eti
dhammal!l adhammo ti -eti); 11294,5 (Vesa1ika
Vajjiputtaka bhikkhü Vesa1iyal!l dasa vatthüni -enti);
A 1 188,32 (te sakal!l yeva vad~ -enti jotenti); Dhp 363
393 dibba
(atthal!l ca dhammal!l ca -eti); Ja 1 391,3· (eko
bhil!lsanake vane ti ... eko adutiyo va ahosin ti -eti);
III 125,15' (sa sa gatha tal!l tal!l atthal!l -eti); Nidd 1 65,22
(vadeyya katheyya bhal).eyya -eyya); 82,22 ( -ayeyya);
Mil 323,!3foll. (ma bhante Nagasena imal!l pañhal!l
pa~icchann~ katva -ehi vivat~ pakatal!l katva -ehi);
Vism 214,15 (pakaseti nananayehi -eti); 429,29* (-aye);
495,3 (ayasaddo karai).al!l -eti); Sv 99,24 (pavedeti -eti
katheti pakasetl ti attho); Ps 11 3,29* (-ayanti); 60,19
-eti); 74,24 (iti bhagava attano khll).asavabhaval!l -eti);
141,12 (-ayissama); 256,19foll. (sakavad~ -essaml ti
paravadal!l -eti); Ap-a 1,17* (-iss~ pi~akattaye );
As 272,2 (ayal!l upama kil!l -eti); Saddh 49 (-eti); -
part.pr. (a) dlpenta, mf(-ent!)n., Vin V 168,37; Jaiii 69,t
(-entl); Ap 168,8 (dhammakayal!l ca -ental!l, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se wr -enti); Cp 2:8:3 (-ento dasa papake);
(b) d!payanta, mfn., Nidd 1 219,33; As 2,4*;
(e) d!payamana, mfn., Ja Il 425,25; Mil197,24; - aor.
3 sg. d!pesi, Spk 1 88,13 (bhagava desanal!l ninhapetva
avasane cattari saccani -esi); 3 pl. (a) d!pesul!l, Sp 33,19;
Bv-a 298,7; Mhv 4:11 (dasavatthüni -esul!l);
(b) d!payil!lsu, Sv 392,11; (e) dipayul!l, Mhv 5:230; -
inf (a) dlpetul!l, Ja IV 406,16; Sv 170,30 (evarüpahi
upamahi samaññaphalal!l -etul!l); Mhv 38:59;
(b) d!payitul!l, Nidd 1 127,21;- absol. (a) dipetva, Ja VI
99,7 (brahmacariyavasass' eva mahapphalabhaval!l
-etva); Ps 11 284,16 (attano laddhil!l -etva); Ap-a 116,7
(dvasaghidi~~iyo -etva); Mhv 20:31; (b) dipayitva,
Nidd 1 169,22; - pass. pr. 3 sg. (a) dlpÍyati, Nidd 1
127,15 (kathlyati bhai).Iyati -lyati, Be, Ce so; Se -iyati;
Ee wr -ayati);- part.pr. d!piyamana, mfn., Vibh-a 39,9
(-iyamanani, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr d!payamanani); -
pp d!pita, mfn. [cf S. dipita], declared; made clear; Ja 11
Sp 551,16 (padabhajane pi ayam ev' attho -ito);
Sv 400,15 (akkhato ti kathito -ito ); Spk Il 330,23 (imaya
upamaya vipassanay' anisal!lso -ito); Ud-a 15,13
(paccayakaravasena nanappakara duppa~ividdha ca
suttanta ti -itan ti, Be so; Ce, Ee dlpiyanti; Se sutan ti
niddisiyanti; -t It-a 1 26,5: Be, Se suttattha niddislyanti;
Ee sutan ti niddisiyanti; Ce omits); Mhv38:114;-
sud!pita, mfn., well or properly explained; Mil 284,2o
(sakasamayo sudlpito);- fpp dipetabba, mfn., Ja 1 97,22
(evamadlhi suttehi -etabbal!l); V 446,16' (akataññuta
pana etas~ ekanipate Takkariyajatakena -etabba);
VI 14,29' (idal!l Jotipalavatthuna -etabbal!l); Vism 393,23
(tal!l yamakapa~ihariyena -etabbal!l); pass.
pr. 3 sg. (b) dippatf,? Vin 11 285,5 (handa mayal!l
avuso dhammal!l ca vinay~ ca sañgayama pure
1
adhammo -ati dhammo pa~ibahiyati; or dippati
qv above); D III 71,26 (dasa akusalakammapatha ativiya
-issanti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atibyadippissanti; or to
1
dippati qv above); A 1 74,2s (yassal!l parisay~ ...
adhammakammani -anti dhammakammani na -anti; or
1
to dippati qv above).
1
dippate, caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. of dippati qv.
dibba, dibya, divya, mfn. and m. [S. divya], l. (mfn.)
divine; heavenly; belonging to gods; supematural;
magical, marvellous; Vin 1 294,17* (-al!l sa labhate
dibbati
aymp); III 72,w (saggaJTI1oka'11 upapajjissasi tattha -ehi
pañcahi kamaguJ]ehi samappito samailgibhiito
paricaressasl ti); DI 34,15 (atthi kho bho añño atta -o
riipl kamavacaro; Sv 120,19: -o ti deva1oke sambhiito);
II 137,23 (-ani pi mandaravapupphani anta1ikkha
papatanti); 172,1o (-aJTI cakkaratanaJTI paturahosi);
III 220,18 (-o viharo brahmaviharo ariyo viharo, Be, Ce,
Ee; Se dibyo; Sv 1006,19: agha samapattiyo -o viharo);
MI 245,14 (ima ca me devata -aJTI oja111 1omakiipehi
ajjhohareyyu111); A I 143,16 (-a vata bho kaya
parihayissanti paripiirissanti asurakaya ti); 182,27 (so ce
ahaJTI brahmaJ]a eva111bhiito cailkamami -o me eso
tasmi111 samay e cailkamo hoti); 213,6 (kapaiJa'11 ...
manusaka111 rajja111 -a111 sukhaJTI upanidhaya); Dhp 187
(api -e su kamesu rati111 so nadhigacchati); It 94,20*
(sabbe pariccaje kame ye -a ye ca manusa); Sn 153 (-a
ratti upaHhita, Be so; Ce, Ee divya; Se dibya); 176 (taJTI
passatha ... -e pathe kamamana111 mahesi111, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se di by e); Vv 62:1 (-ena yanena sabbasetena
hatthina); 72:1 (-e vimanamhi yatha si candima); Jaii
14,15* (-a ca te patubhavantu bhakkha, E e so; Be, Se
dibya; Ce divya; 14,w: devatana111 paribhogaraha
bhakkha); III 261 ,27* (-ena VaiJJ]ena; 262, 1·: -en a ti
visighena uttamena); 472,13' (atikkamma so vetaraJ]i'11
Yamassa -ani ~hanani upeti maceo; 473,12·: deva1oke
uppajjati); IV 109,22' (deva na jlranti ... suve suve
bhiyyataro va tesffiTI -o ca vaiJI]O vipu1a ca bhoga);
466,9• (-a ca gandha satata111 sampatanti, Be so; Ce
divya; Ee diviya; Se dibya); V 254,31* (piya me manusa
kama atho dibya pi me piya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee divya);
VI 239,5* (muhutto viya so -o imani vassani solasa, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se dibyo); 571,8* (sabbe jita te pacciiha ye -a
ye ca manusa; 571 ,2r: -a ti dibbasampattipa~ibahaka,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -assa pa~ibahaka, prob. wr); Ap 15,18
(-a gandha sampavanti); Mil 300,11 (jagarantassa -o
attho apathaJTI na upeti tasma jagaranto supina111 na
passati); Vism 181,27 (tassadhigataJTI hoti riipavacara111
pa!hamaJTI jhana111 -o ca viharo); Spkiii 220,15 (ath'
assa -a111 sabbakayikadasa111 purato ~hapayi111su);
Pv-a 153,17 (maya evariipa111 amba111 na khaditapubba111
-a111 idaJTI maññe ambaphalan ti); - dibbena, in a
wonderful way, marvellously;? Ja V 167,4* (so ta111
pavissa na cirassa nago -ena me paturahü janinda;
168,11": -ena parivarena mama purato paturahosi); -
esp. (i) dibbffiTI cakkhu, godlike or supematural sight
(one of the abhiññas qv); Vin III 5,1 (so -ena cakkhuna
visuddhena atikkantamanusakena satte passam1
cavamane uppajjamane ... ); D II 20,13 (jatassa kho pana
bhikkhave Vipassissa kumarassa kammavipakajaJTI -a111
cakkhu paturahosi yena sudaJTI samanta yojana111 passati
diva e' eva ratti111 ca); MI 170,28 (addasaJTI kho aha111
bhikkhave -en a cakkhuna . . . pañcavaggiye bhikkhü
BaraiJasiyaJTI viharante Isipatane migadaye); Ja II 156,6
(bodhisatto ... -ena cakkhuna Jambudlpa111 o1okento);
Nidd I 355,24/oll. (kathaJTI bhagava -ena cakkhuna pi
viva~acakkhu); Vism 423,16 foll.; - se e al so dibba-
cakkhu below; - (ii) dibba sotadhatu, godlike or
supematural hearing (one of the abhiññas qv); Vin II
299,22 (assosi kho ayasma Revato -aya sotadhatuya
visuddhaya atikkantamanusikaya theriinaJTI bhikkhünaJTI
394 dibbati
mantayamanana111); DI 79,2ofoll. (so -aya
sotadhatuya . . . ubho sadde suJ]ati -e ca manuse ca ye
düre santike ca); II 1,11 (assosi kho bhagava -aya
sotadhatuya . . . tesa111 bhikkhiina111 ima111
kathasallapa111); Ja V 382,19 (sattha ta111 katha111 -aya
sotadhatuya sutva); Mil6,7 (ayasma Assagutto -aya
sotadhatuya Mi1indassa ranno vacana111 sutva);
Vism 407 ,s foll.; - se e also dibbasota, dibbasotadhatu
below; - 2. (m.) adivine being, a god; (pl.) a heavenly
world;? Abh 12; Khp 8:12 (devarajja111 pi -esu; Pj I
227,29: ye te divibhavatta -a ti vuccanti tesu -esu kayesu
uppannana111 pi devarajja111 dasseti); Pv 27:22 (api -esu
yadisa tadisa no ghara idha; Pv-a 185,2o: -esii ti etesu
deva1okesü ti attho); Ja VI 150,1* (-aJTI deva upayacanti
puttatthika dalidda pi, Be so; Ce, Ee divya111; Se
dibyaJTI);- dibba111 in Be, Ee, Se at D III 160,3• is prob.
wr for diva111; - 0
-cakkhu, n. and mfn., l. (n.)
supematural sight; D lii 219,11 (ma111sacakkhu -u
paññacakkhu); S I 196,20' (pubbenivasaJTI janami -u111
visodhita111 teVIJJO iddhippatto 'mhi cetopariyaya
kovido); Ja 1 32,14 (Sakko ... -una o1okento); 75,25
(majjhimayame -u111 visodhetva); Nidd 1 356,21 (yavata
va pana akailkheyya tavataka111 passeyya eva'11-
parisuddha'11 bhagavato -u); Pep8,12; Mil 119,12
(Sivirajena yacakassa cakkhiini dinnani andhassa sato
puna -iini uppannanl ti); 343,27 (-umhi parami111 gata);
Vism 423,!3/oll.; 429,23 (cutiipapatañaJ]asailkhata'11 -u);
Sv 307,2o (-u icchiticchitariipadassanasamatthataya);
Saddh 482; - 2. (mfn.) who possesses supematural
sight; Ja 11 412,25 (kuliipako -u tapaso); Ap 336,22
(imina dlpadanena -u bhavissati); Bv 1:60 (-una111 yo
aggo Anuruddho); - 0 -cakkhuka, mf--a, -l)n., who
possesses supernatural sight, A 1 23,21 (etadagga111
bhikkhave mama savakana111 bhikkhiinaJTI . . . -ana111
yadidaJTI Anuruddho); 148,22 (samaiJabrahmana
iddhimanto -a paracittaviduno); Ja IV 87,17; Ap 570,17
(so lokagaru bhikkhuni111 -a111 kittaya111, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -i111); 572,4 (-anaJTI agga, Be, Se so; Ce -1na111; E e
-inam); Ps II 254,29; - 0 -sota, n., --dhatu,f [dibba +
i,
sota 1 supematural hearing; Th 379 (-a111 ca papu1]i'11);
Ja V 456,28 (sattha gandhaku~iya111 nisinno va -ena
kathaJTI sutva); Kv 254,19 (ma111sasotaJTI -a111); Mil359,16
(--dhatu111 ... papuJ]ati); Vism407,4foll. (--dhatuya
niddesakkamo); Sv 307,16 (-aJTI devamanussana111
saddasavanasamatthataya); o -sotaka, mfn., who
possesses supematural hearing; It-a II 100,36 (buddho pi
-o aha111 pi -o);- see also diviya.
dibbati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dlvyati; Wg § 26: 1], sports, amuses
oneself; plays (with dice), gambles; is bright, shines;
(goes; praises; is able); Dhatup 389 (diva
kltavijigi'11savoharajjutitthutigatisu); Dhatum 622; D 11
348,27 (ehi kho samma akkhehi -issama ti); M II 106,26
(sambahula akkadhutta bhagavato avidiire akkhehi
-anti); Ps 1 33,21 (-anti pañcahi kamaguJ]ehi altano va
iddhiya ti deva, kljanti jotenti va ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be
ca ti; Se jotan ti ca ti); Pj 1 123,9 (-antl ti deva pañcahi
kamaguJ]ehi kl!anti attano va siriya jotantl ti attho );
Ud-a 140,19 (-anti attano iddhanubhavena kltanti jotanti
ca ti deva); V v-a 18,17 (-ati ... jotati obhasati akase
vimanena ca gacchatl ti devl); 179,18 (nibhati -atl ti
dibya
nibha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dippaU ti); Ap-a 382,6 (pakarena
-ati jotaU ti padlpo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dippati); 455,13
(-a ti pakaseti tarp tarp vatthurp pakatarp karotl ti diva);
Sadd 475,24/oll. (divu kl!avijigirpsavyavaharajutithuti-
kantigatisattisu ... -ati devo); 824,25 (divadito yo: -ati
sibbati tayati ice adi); - part.pr. dibbamana, mfn.,
Vv-a 182,18 (-amanehi mm¡.isuv~1,1ehi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
dippamanehi); Pj II 26,20 (Kassapassa bhagavato
pavacane -amane, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dippamane);- aor.
3 pl. dibbirpsu, D II 348,19 (dve akkhadhutta akkhehi
-irpsu).
dibya, mfn., see sv dibba.
diyal}l}ha, mfn., see sv dvi.
diyati, dati 2, pr. 3 sg. [Yda2; S. dati, dyati, Wg .§ 26:39;
cfWg .§ 24:51], cuts; mows; reaps; Dhatup 403 (da
avakh~9ane); Dhatum 651; Kv-a 96,7 (dussllyacetanarp
dati kha1,19eti lunati ca ti danarp); Sadd 367,31 (danarp
avakha1,19anarp ca vadanto -ati); 480,13 (da
avakha1,19ane: -ati -anti parittarp); 861,2 (dati
avakha1,19arp karoU ti); - pp data, mfn., cut; mown;
Abh 752 (sañchinno 1ünadata); - caus. pr. 3 sg.
dayapeti, Dhp-a III 285,1 (sampannarp me sassarp sve
dani dayapessaml ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 1ayapessaml ti).
diyamane in Ee, Se at Nidd l 496,6foll. is wr for
diyyamane (Be, Ce so).
diyyati,pass. pr. 3 sg. ofdeti qv.
diratta, n., diratti,f, see dviratta sv dvi.
dirada, m(jn)., see dvirada sv dvi.
dirasaññu, m(jn)., see dvirasaññu sv dvi.
diva, m. [cf S. div, mf, diva, n.], l. heaven; the sky;
Abh 10 (devaloko -o nako); 1119 (sagge tu gaga1,1e -o);
D Ill 160,3* (ito cuto -arp upapajja, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
dibbarp; see K. R. Norman, 1984, p. 177) f- 176,1 * (Be,
Ce, Se divam; Ee dibbarp); Th 1133 (disa catasso vidisa
adho -a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se adhodisa, prob. wr; Th-a III
159,8: -a ti devaloka); Ja V 123,27* (suci1,11,1ena -arp
patta); Mhv 34:10 (-arp aga); - 2. a day; daytime;
Vv 53:5 (rattirp pi ca yatha -arp karoti); Cp 1:1:8
(pltisukhena ratiya vltinamemi tarp -arp); - 0 -oka, m.
[diva + oka 1], a deity; Abh 11; Sadd 477,26*; -
0
-Ii-kara, m. [diva + kara 1] the sun; Vv 79:6 (patapante
-e, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce divakare; Vv-a 307,11: -e ti
divakare ayam eva va patho ); 81:20 (-e, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee divakare); - see also divasakara, divakara; -
0
-Ii-gama, mfn., going to heaven; Mp IV 123,18; -
0
-Ii-gata, mfn., gone to heaven; Ja IV 134,3* (-e, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee divarp gate); VI37,22 (maharaja tumhesu -esu
rajjarp kassa dassama ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee devattarp
gatesu); Pv-a 74,24 (tumhakarp raja kahan ti -o saml ti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee divarp gato); - 0 -rajünaip in Ee at
Ap 516,11 is prob. wr for deva- (Be, Ce, Se so);- see
also divadivassa (sv diva).
dival}l}ha, mfn., see sv dvi.
divasa, m.n. [ts], a day; da y; Abh 67 (-o tu aharp dinarp);
Vin I 273,23 (pañcamarp -arp seghi gahapati kalarp
karissati ti): IV 50,6 (-arp tiracchanakathaya
vltinametva); DI 152,19 (purimani . .. -an1
purimatarani); III 196,24* (yassa e' uggate suriye -o ti
pavuccati); M III 161,6 (na ca obhasarp sañjanami
kevalarp pi rattirp keva1arp pi -arp kevalarp pi
395 diva
rattindivarp); S II 206,9 (ya ratti va -o va agacchati); A I
lll,21 (rathakaro chahi -ehi dutiyarp cakkarp
nitthapetva); Sn 983 (sattame -e tuyharp muddha
phalatu sattadha); Th 345 (pato majjhantikarp sayarp
tikkhatturp -ass' aharp); Ja I 139,17 (tarp -am eva rajjarp
pahaya); 279,16 (addha aññesu -esu ayarp pasa1,1o
vanarindassa pativacanarp adasi); ll33,25* (tay' ajja
gutta viharemu -arp); 181,10 (nakkhattarp na manaparp
-o na manapo); III 238,25 (tada Barill,lasirañño matassa
sattamo -o hoti); 271,24 (bahunnarp -anarp accayena);
475,12 (so -assa tayo vare rajupatthanarp gacchati);
IV 31 0,15' (alokasandhirp -a karotu, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
-arp; 311 ,26': ekadivasen' ekam eva vatapanarp karotu);
V 127,4 (satta -ani sadhukl\arp kl¡irpsu); VI 34,17 (nava
sattahi -ehi sattayojanasatani gata); Ap 430,26 (upemi
buddharp tikkhatturp rattiya -assa ca); Cp 1:10:4 (-o ajj'
uposatho ); Kv 204,22 (ekarp cittarp dve -e tighatl ti);
Mil 264,29 foll. (yo gihl arahattarp patto ... tasmirp yeva
-e pabbajati va parinibbayati va na so -o sakka
atikkametun ti); Spk JI 176,3o (-ena sattaghayojanarp
gacchati); 188,16/oll. (kati -a atikkanta ti ajja sattamo -o
ti); Ud-a 249,28 (na imesu -esu bhagava anugantabbo ti);
Mhv 34:61 (-assa ca tikkhatturp); - acc. divasarp,
during the day; V in 111 148,7 (-arp gocararp caritva
sayarp tarp vanas~9arp vasaya upagacchati); S V 283,13
(ayogu!o -arp santatto ); Pv 32:1 (-arp anubhosi
kar~arp); Ja I 279,5 (bodhisatto -arp caritva
sayai).hasamaye dlpake thito); Vism 428,23; - divase
divase, every day; S V 440,26 (-e -e Uhi Uhi sattisatehi
haññamano ); Ja I 87,15 (-e -e yojanarp gacchati); 506,23
(raja pi 'ssa -e -e dvittikkhatturp upaghanarp gacchati);
Vism 96,33 (gamavasino -e -e dhammasavanatthaya
agacchanti); - imina divasenapi in Ee at Sv 466,n is
wr; Be, Ce, Se iti madisenapi; - ifc see ajja- (sv ajja\
0
aparajju-, jata- (sv Yjan), nakkhatta-; - -kara, m.
[divasa + kara 1], the sun; Bv-a 7,13; 153,2 (sahassakir~o
0
-o); - see also divaiikara, divakara; - -Va}añja, m.,
daily expenditure; Abh 337-38; Vibh-a 519,9 (yassa pana
gehe pacchimantena asltikotidhanarp nidhanagatarp hoti
kahapa1,1anarp ca dasa amma1,1ani -o nikkhamati;
cfSv 586,3ofoll.: brahm~amahasa1a nama yesarp
asltikotidhanarp nihitarp hoti 0
-paribbayo eko
kahap~atumbo niggacchati);- adivasa, m., a non-day,
not counting as a day; Sp 1182,32 (te parivutthadivase ca
manattaci1,11,1adivase ca sabbe odhunitva -e katva); -
sudivasa, m.n., a good day; afortunate day; Ja IV 209,11
(-ena vat' amhi ajja araññarp pavigho); Pj I 119,5 (ajja
sunakkhattarp sumuhuttarp -arp sumaiiga1an ti); - see
also tarpdivase (sv ta[d]), punadivase (sv puna[r]).
diva, adv. and f [ts], l. (adv.) (i) by day; in the day;
Abh 1147; Vin III 53,7 (rattirp va -a va); D II 20,14
(samanta yojanarp passati -a e' eva rattirp ca); 175,1s (te
ten' obhasena kammante payojesurp -a ti maññamana;
or f ?); MI 21,21 (rattirp yeva samanarp -a ti sañjananti
-a yeva samanarp rattl ti sañjananti; PsI 121,15: divaso
ayan ti sañjananti, -a yeva samanan ti divasarp yeva
santarp; se e Sadd 893,16/oll.: -a bhiyyo namo ice ete
pathamaya ca dutiyaya ca); 142,21 (ayarp vammiko
rattirp dhümayati -a pajjalati); SI 15,10* (-a tapati
adicco rattim abhati candima); 183,22 (yarp -a
di vi
papakammarp katarp hoti tarp sayarp nahanena
pavahemi); Dhp 296 (yesarp -a ca ratto ca niccarp
buddhagata sati); Ja II 278,14 (dhammantevasika -a
acariyassa kammam katva rattirp sipparp uggai,lhanti);
V 81 ,22* (vi vice a bhaseyya -a rahassarp); 99,3 (-a
rajapurisa vi1umpanti rattirp cora); Mil395,n (migo -a
araññe carati rattirp abbhokase); Vism 96,31; Mhv 26:10;
- (ii) in the middle of the day; rather late (after the
midday mea!); Vin Ili 39,8 (anujanami bhikkhave -a
patisalliyantena dvararp sarpvaritva patisalliyitun ti);
IV 98,16 (ay asma Upanando Sakyaputto purebhattarp
kuHini payirupasitva -a agacchati); MI 125,17 (K~I das!
-a ughasi; Ps II 99,6foll.: pato kattabbani
dhenudohanadikammani akatva ussiire ughita); 448,6
(mayaq¡ hi bhante pubbe sayarp e' eva bhuñjama pato ca
-a ca vikale); SI 201,4* (-a ca agantva); Sp 1281,6
(ka1ass' eva pi~<.Hiya caritabbaq¡ udahu -a ti); - 2. (f.)
day; Ja VI 247,6* (sa n' eva rattl na diva paññayati;
24 7,1 ¡·: ya idha ratti va diva so va sa n' eva tattha
paññayati);- 0 -kara, m. [diva+ kara 1], the sun; Abh 62
(satararpsi -o); Vv 79:6 (patapante -e, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
divankare; Vv-a 307,11: divankare ti -e ayam eva va
patho); Ja VI 452,20* (vltivattasu rattlsu uggatasmirp -e);
Ap 508,17 (satararpsl -o, Be, Se so; Ce sarasml va; Ee
sarasmirp va); Pv-a 155,1; - se e also divankara
(sv diva), divasakara; - o -kathika, m., one who speaks
or expounds by da y; Spk III 36,!7; 36,23 (-o katararp
jatakaq¡ nama kathesi); - 0
-taraq¡, campar., adv.,
rather late; later on in the day; MI 125,26 (KaF das!
-arp urthasi); Ja III 2,7 (-arp Savatthirp pin<;laya
pavisanto); - 0 -divassa, ind., l. in the middle of the
day; rather late in the day; Vin I 234,9 (Siho senapati ...
0
-divassa Vesaliya niyyasi); SI 89,27 (Spk I 159,24:
divasassa diva majjhantikasamaye ti attho); A I 205,22
(handa kuto nu tvarp Visakhe agacchasi 0 -divassa ti;
Mp II 320,16: divasassa diva nama majjha~ho imasmirp
thite majjhantike kale); Ja VI 31 ,2o; - 2. early in the
day;? Vv 53:23 (agama 0 -divassa; Vv-a 242,12:
divasassa diva, ka1ass' eva ti attho );
0
-padhanika, mfn., who exert themselves by day (after
the midday mea/); Sv 251,31 (Sv-pt I 386,2: -a ti diva-
padhananuyuñjanaka) = Ps II 272,2s; - 0
-rattiip, ind.,
by night and day; SI 47,21* (atha aggi -iq¡ tattha tattha
pakasati); Ja VI 475,8* (ussukko te -iq¡ sabbakiccesu
vyavato); Ap 355,10 (na supami -irp);- 0 -vaya in Ee at
S III 143,9*: read diva va yadi va rattirp with Be, Ce, Se;
0
- -Vihara, m. [BHS id.], seclusion for rest and
meditation by day (after the midday mea!); Vin III 208,3
(yena Andhavanarp ten' upasankami -aya); M II 186,11
(amukasmirp me rukkhamille -o bhavissati); SI 132,20
(aññatarasmiq¡ rukkhamille -arp nisldi); A IV 262,25
(ayasma Anuruddho -aq¡ gato hoti patisalllno); Th 1241
(-a nikkhamma); Sn 679 (Pj II 483,26: -e ti --rthane);
Ja I 70,25 (bodhisatto pi nadmramhi supupphitasa1avane
-arp katva); IV 375,6 (rañño uyyanarp -aya gacchati);
V 392,25 (brahma~atapaso tavatiq¡sabhavanarp
-' -atthaya gantva nandavanacittaküta1atavanesu -arp
katva); Vism 120,4 (kammaghanarp gahetva -arp
nisinnassa); Ps II 73,s (-aya ti divapatisallanatthaya);
Th-a I 77,8 (katabhattakicco pattaclvararp patisametva -e
396 Vdis
nisinno); Mhv 19:79 (-aq¡ kappesi);- 0 -seyya,f, rest,
sleep, in the daytime; a siesta; DI 112,5 (So~ada~<;io
brahmai,lo uparipasade -arp upagato hoti); II 333,15
(abhijanasi no tvarp rajañña -arp upagato supinakarp
passitva); Sp 575,2s (raja tattha uyyanakl)anattharp agato
suramadena matto -arp su pi); Pj II 337,2 (-arp supitva
sayarp vughaya); - 0
-soppa, n., sleeping in the
daytime; D III 184,27* (-arp, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
0
-sapparp); 185,7* (na --sllena, Be, Ce so; Ee 0 -suppana-;
Se 0 -suppa-) quoted Pj I 139,16* (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
0
-supana-); Spk I 289,4; - atidiva, ind., too late in the
day; S I 200,29 (ayasma Nagadatto atikalena gamarp
pavisati atidiva patikkamati; Spk I 294,13fol/.:
majjhantike vltivatte patikkamati); A III 117,4; Ja I
318,2o; Vism 119,Io.
divi, ind. [ts, loe. of div], in heaven; - 0
-bhava, mfn.
(prob. so, but often written as separate words), having
its origin or being in heaven; Pj I 227,28 (ye te --tta
dibba ti vuccanti); Ud-a 108,4 (yaq¡ e' idarp diviyaq¡
sukhan ti yarp ca idarp -arp dibbaviharavasena ca
laddhabbarp ... rüpasamapattisukhaq¡); Pj II 199,29 (-ani
divyani); Pv-a 14,24 (dibban ti -arp devattabhava-
pariyapannaq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -bhavarp, wr);
0
Ap-a 107,6 (-a dibba devaloke jata).
diviya, mfn. [= dibba qv ], divine; heavenly; belonging to
gods; supernatural; magical, marvellous; D II 286,3*
(cutaharp -a kaya; Sv 739,16: -a kaya ti dibba
attabhava); A IV 236,13* (etarp hi maggaq¡ -arp vadanti;
Mp IV 123,18: -an ti divangamarp); Ud 11,22* (yarp ca
kamasukhaq¡ 1oke yarp e' idarp diviyarp sukhaq¡); Ja IV
466,4* (koñca mayüra diviya ca harpsa).
divilla, m.(?) [cf Pkt <;limi1a ?], a musical instrument, prob.
a drum; Dlp 16:14 (mahamukhapataharo 0
'-atata-
dindima).
divya, mfn., se e sv dibba.
v'dis\ see sv disati 1.
v'dis2 , [S. v'dp§] (pr. supplied by passati and
dakkhati4 qqv], to see; Dhatup 302 (disa pekkhai,le);
Dhatum 455; Sadd 444,sfoll.; - fut. 3 sg. dakkhate,
dakkhit¡l [S. drak~yati], Vin I 5,11* (ragaratta na -anti
tamokkhandhena avuta. Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -inti;
cfSp 962,6: na -antl ti na passanti); III 105,26 (savako
evarüparp ñassati va -ati va sakkhiq¡ va karissati); D I
46,10 (yav' assa kayo thassati tava narp -anti
devamanussa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -inti); 85,11
(cakkhumanto rüpani -antl ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -intl ti);
II 131,2 (yatra hi nama ... pañcamattani sakatasatani ...
n' eva-atina pana saddaq¡ sossatl ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-iti; Sv 569,16: n' eva -atl ti na addasa, yatrasadda-
yuttatta pan' etarp anagatavasena vuttarp, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee n' eva dakkhissatl ti); M II 44,7 (na cirass' eva
samarp yeva ñassati samarp -iti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
dakkhlti); SI 116,11" (na me maggarp pi -asi; cfSpki
180,26: na passasl ti); 132,12* (marp na -asi) = Thl 232
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -isi); SI 199,2* (n' eva -ati rüpani
cakkhu hi 'ssa na vijjati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -iti); Sn 909
(passarp naro -ati namarüparp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -iti);
Th 1099 (kada nu rüpe ... adittato ... paññaya -arp, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be daccharp; Th-a III 152,2s: -an ti ...
maggapaññaya dakkhissarp, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se dacchan
.Jdis
ti ... ); Ja V 309,17* (atha -atha me vegrup; 309,wfoll.:
atha me parakkamarp passissatha); VI 561,22* (marp pato
-asi no matarp, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -isi); Ap 533,22 (ye te
-anti vadanrup, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -inti); 576,8 (tato
sakaya paññaya abhinibbijja -asi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
vacchasi; = Th! 84: eds dakkhisarp); Sadd 444,1o
(dassissati passissati -iti); Mhv 14:61 (tattha -inti there
'me nagara);- aor. 3 sg. [ef S. adarsat, adrak~H. adrak]
(a) addasa and (espeeially at beginning of sentenee)
addasa, Vin 111 l6,1; SI 138,4 (addasa kho bhagava
buddhacakkhuna lokarp volokento satte apparajakkhe
maharajakkhe); Sn 358 (addasa bhagava adirp
upadanassa); 409 (tam addasa Bimbisaro); Ja V 51,17*;
Cp 2: 1:5; Vism 330,13; Ps 11 46,33 (ma mrup koci addasa
ti); Mhv 5:51; (b) addassa, Nidd I 327,6 (addassa
addakkhi apassi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se addasa); (e) adassl,
Sn 934 (sakkhidhammarp an!tiham adassl); (d) addasi,
Nidd I 400,15 (adassl ti ... dhammrup addasi addakkhi
apassi); (e) addasasi, Th! 309 (so addasasi
sambuddharp); Ja V 158,16*; (f) adda, adda, S IV 207,16*
(yo sukhrup dukkhato adda) = It 47,13* (Be so; Ce
'ddakkhi; Ee dakkhi; Se addakkhi; It-a 11 15,36: adda ti
addasa, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce addakkhl ti) = Th 986 (Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se addakkhi); Th 1244 (sabbaWlit!nam
atikkamam adda, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se addasa; =SI 193,21*:
eds addasa); Ja 111 139,2* (patirp ma adda, Be so; Ce, Se
maddasa; Ee ma addasa); VI 125,5* (adda sldantare
nage); (g) addakkhi, adakkhi, dakkhi, V in 11 195,35
(hatthl ... pa~sakki yava bhagavantarp addakkhi); S IV
207,16* (yo ... dukkham addakkhi sallato, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se adakkhi) = It47,14* = Th986; Sn 1131 (addakkhi);
Ja V 251,14* (aslnrup Sonakrup dakkhi; 251,26·:
addakkhi); Nidd I 327,7 (addakkhi apassi); Mi190,6*
(addakkhi mel).9ake pañhe, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addasa);
Mhv 5:154 (addakkhi); - 2 sg. (a) addasa, DI 106,33
(kacci tata Ambattha addasa tarp bhavantrup Gotaman
ti); M III 179,19; Ja 11 305,13; Mp I 295,3 (karp pan' ettha
Ananda ad!navarp addasa ti); (b) addasasi, Mil29l,25;
(e) addakkhi, Sn 841; Ja 111 189,23*; Ap 342,14 (yarp
mam addakkhi brahmal).a); - 1 sg. (a) addasa(rp), Vin I
313,35; A I 280,14 (addasrup, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addasirp);
Vv 33:291 (yarp addasrup devatayo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
addasami; = Ja 11 256,22*: Be addasami; Ce, Ee
addasasirp; Se addasirp); Th! 218 (addasahrup patirp
matrup); Ja III 450,3* (addasrup kama te mülarp);
Ap 20,12; Vism 28,25; (b) adassrup, Sn 837
(ajjhattasantirp pacinrup adassarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
addasrup); (e) addasirp, Ja V 175,12' (trup addasin ti
attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addasan ti); Ap-a 336,25
(sambuddhrup addasin ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce addasan ti);
(d) addasami, SI 168,18* (yarp tadisarp vedagum
addasami, eds so); Th! 135 (ath' addasami sugatrup, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce addasasirp); Cp 1:2:2 (tatth' addasami
patipathe sayambhurp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be addasrup);
(e) addasasirp, Sn 1145 (ath' addasasirp sambuddharp);
Th 287; Vv 33:55 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se addasami); Ja V
165,23* (pathe addasasimhi bhojaputte, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
milacaputte; metre? 167,19·: addasasimh! ti ...
janapadamanusse addasarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addasasin
ti); Ap 20,9 (tatth' addasasirp sambuddhrup, Ce so; Ee
397 .Jdis
addassasirp; Be, Se tam addasahrup); 24,16 (tam
addasasirp sappaññrup munirp); (f) addarp, Ja III 380,6*
(ambaham addarp vanamantarasmirp); (g) addakkhi(rp),
adakkhirp, dakkhirp, D 11 287,17* (addakkhirp); Vv 63:3;
Th! 147 (viharrup dakkhirp pavisirp, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
daghurp); Ja VI 187,3o* (addakkhirp); 544,5* (saddhaya
danarp dadato masarp addakkhi matararp, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se adakkhi; or 2 sg. ?); Nidd I 185,17 (adakkhirp);
Ap 330,17 (yo 'hrup addakkhi nayakrup); 335,17
(addakkhirp); Bv 2:131 (dakkhirp); (h) dakkhisarp,
Th! 84 (tato sakaya paññaya abhinibbijja dakkhisrup; or
me for dakkhissrup, se e Th!-a 85,15: dakkhisrup passissan
ti; = Ap 576,8: Be, Ce, Ee dakkhasi; Se vacchasi); -
3 pl. (a) addasrupsu, V in IV 108,22 (addasrupsu kho
gopalaka . . . bhagavantrup); MI 79,5 (ma marp te
addasarpsu) f. Mil 396,13; Ud 39,25; Ja V 173,5* (tarp
pathe addasarpsu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee addasasirp;
175,8· foll.: te bhojaputta . . . tarp . . . passirpsu ...
addasasin ti pi patho ahrup ... tarp addasin ti attho, Be,
Ce, Se so); (b) addasirpsu, D 11 274,3* (ad!navam
addasirpsu, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce addasarpsu); Sp l88,21 (Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee addasarpsu); (e) addasasurp, Vin 11 183,2;
D 11 16,6 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se addasarpsu); MI 153,23 (Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be addasarpsu); (d) addasurp, A 11 52,30*;
Ud 70,26* (na narp sallan ti addasurp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr addrupsu); Ja VI 544,7* (ma te mataram addasurp);
Ap 494,2 (Be, Se so; Ce addasa; Ee addasrup);
Mhv 4:30; (e) dakkhurp, addakkhu(rp), D 11 256,6*
(addakkhurp); A 11 52,28* (aniccarp aniccato dakkhurp
dukkham addakkhu dukkhato ); Ja IV 351 ,23*
(mahanigrodham addakkhurp); V 412,1• (ye
keci-m-addakkhu sudhaya bhojanarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
keci addakkhurp); Mhv 5:97 (addakkhurp);
2 pl. addasatha, M 11 108,32 (api me matarrup addasatha,
Ce, Ee so; Be addassatha; Se adassatha); Ja III 304,2;
V 55,n• (yam addasatha daharirp kumarirp, me?; 56,18·:
addasatha passatha); - 1 pl. (a) addasama, DI 106,35;
S I 196,13* (ath' addasama sambuddharp); Sn 31;
Vv 83:13 (apprup va bahurp va naddasama danarp);
Th 1253 (ath' addasama sambuddharp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
addasami); Ja 11 355,17* (ma vo dhammarp adhammrup
va addasama kudacanrup); III 306,14* (lakkhl vata me
udapadi ajja yrup vasavrup bhütapati 'ddasama, Be so;
Ce, Ee bhütapat' addasama; Se bhütapatim addasarp;
306,19': bhütapatirp addasama, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
addasaml ti); Vism 180,23; (b) addasamha, Ap 472,27;
Vibh-a 474,24; (e) addasimha, Th-a III 198,4 (addasama
ti addasimha); - part.perfaet. dighava(t), mfn., having
seen; who has seen; It-a 11 119,22 (ariyarp catusaccam
eva va dighavanto ti ariyaddasa); V v-a 85,23
(dhammaddasa ti catusaccadhammrup dighavat!);
Cp-a 218,25 (ditthavato me); inf (a) daghurp
[S. dra~turp], MI 253,12 (iccheyyasi no tvrup ...
pasadassa ramal).eyyakarp daghun ti); SI 61,24 (sakka nu
kho so bhante gamanena lokassa anto ñaturp va daghurp
va papul).iturp va ti) = A 11 48,2; Vv 63:21 (aharp pi
datthurp gacchissarp jinarp); Ja 11 156,24 (raja Ubbarirp
kira datthurp labhissaml ti tutthamanaso); III274,14*
(matarrup datthum agato); Ap 520,3 (yavata
abhikaii.khami datthurp sugataduggate, Be, Ce so; Se
.Vdis
sukatadukkata111; Ee wr dasuq1 sukatadukkate);
Vism 424,s (cutikkha1_1e upapattikkha1_1e va
dibbacakkhuna datthu111 na sakka); Mhv 5:259;
Sadd 853,21; (b) dassituq1, (?) Sv 141,11 (dassituq1 yutta
ti dassaniya, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dakkhituq1); - absol.
[cfS. df~tva, -drsya; AMg dissa] (a) disva, Vin II 126,17
(accayaq1 accayato disva); III 189,13 (disva ti passitva);
M II 67,9 (kiq1 bhavaq1 Raghapa1o ñatva va disva va
sutva va agarasma anagariyaq1 pabbajito); Sn 50
(adinavaq1 kamagu1_1esu disva); Th 73 (ji1_11_1aq1 ca disva
dukkhitaq1 ca vyadhitaq1 mataq1 ca disva); Jall 131,22*
(na naq1 umhayate disva); Ap 68,19; Vibh 248,12 (ekacco
cakkhuna rupaq1 disva); Mi111,7 (sojas' ime daraka
pa1ibodhe disva); Vism 20,34 (theraq1 . . . antaramagge
disva); Sadd 857, w; - disva in E e at Dhp-a IV 151,1 is
wr for disa (Be, Ce, Se so); - neg. adisva, D 1 118,15;
Ja I 53,15 (attano sadisaq1 adisva); 384,s (aññaq1 upayaq1
adisva); ll346,17* (katharp hi mülaq1 adisva rukkhaq1
Janna patighitaq1); V 53,22* (adisva posaq1
gajapaccamittaq1, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adisvana); Mil10,24;
Vism 663,33 (tattha kiñci gayhüpagaq1 adisva); Mp 1
387,2s (aharp dasaba1arp adisva va ciraq1 vitinamesiq1);
(b) disvana (and disvanaq1), Vin I 8,12; MI 333,24;
Dhp 149 (kapotakani aghini tani disvana ka rati);
Sn 415; Vv 84:10 (idaq1 ca disvana adighapubbaq1);
Ja III 266,22*; VI 143,9• (kapa1_1arp vi1apati Sela
disvanaq1 bhataro upanitatte, so read me with L. Alsdorf,
1967, p. 43 ? eds disvana); Ap 256,17; Mi123,15;
Sadd 857,10; (e) digha2, dagha2, MI 253,3o (manussa pi
kiñcideva rama1_1eyyakaq1 digha evaq1 ahaq1su, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se disva); A Il 25,13 (tathagato dagha
daghabbaq1 dighaq1 na maññati . . . daghararp na
maññati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se digha; Mp III 39,16: disva
daghabbaq1); Ja V 215,28* (Ummadantim ahaq1 digha
amuttama1_1iku1_1<;1a1aq1 na supami, Ce so; Be dagha; Ee,
Se Ummadantl [Ee Ummadantl] maya dittha
amuttamaniku1_1<;1a1a; 216,31·: digha ti disva, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be dagha ti); Sadd914,18;- neg.adittha, adagha,
Ja IV 192,6* (nadittha parata dosarp, Ce, Se so; Be, E e
nadagha; 192,2tl': na adisva); V 218,18' (datva piyaq1
Ummadantiq1 adittha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be adagha; 218,22·:
taq1 ca mama datva paccha piyabhariyaq1 adigha ... ,Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be adagha); (d) daghu, A I 147,15*
(nekkhamme daghu khemataq1, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nekkhammaq1 daghu khemato; Mp II 242,26 foll.:
nibbane khemabhavarp disva, nekkhammaq1 daghu
khemato pi patho, nibbanaq1 khemato disva ti attho) f-
Sn 424 (eds nekkhammarp daghu khemato; Pj II 385,2o:
datthü ti disva); Sn 681 (kim abbhutarp daghu marii
pamodita); Ja V 249,7• (kassa sutva sataq1 dammi
sahassam datthu Sonakam, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dittha);-
pass. p~. 3 ;~. dissat¡2, ~ate [S. drsyate], is s~en; is
visible; appears; seems; Vin I 16,12 (putto te gahapati
Y aso na -a ti ti); 59,35 (-anti upajjhaya bala
saddhiviharika pa1_1<;lita); M II 75,10 (-anti sirasmiq1
pa1itani jatani ti); Ud 44,13 (ya sa ... Sundañ ... sa no na
-atl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dassatl ti); A IV 355,22
(yava añño pi koci bhikkhu -atü ti, Ee, Se so, wr? Be,
Ce agacchati ti) Ud 35,3 (eds agacchatl ti;
Ud-a 218,17 foll.: koci bhikkhu -atl ti pi patho,
398
agacchatü ti pi pathanti tatha -atü ti) i- Dhp-a I 287,12
(Ce, Ee, Se -an ti; Be agacchatl ti); Sn 194 (chaviya
kayo paticchanno yathabhütaq1 na -ati); 688 (na -are
camarachattagahaka); Vv 83:4 (candasuriya ubhay'
ettha -are); 83:6 (gamanagamanaq1 pi -ati); Pv 26:4
(petassa -atha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee udissatha, prob. wr;
Pv-a 170,26: petassa sañre paññayittha); Thi 475
(aparimita -are ghata, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se diyante); Ja III
389,9 (ajja na -ati kahaq1 nu kho gato ti); VI 35,26'
(gambhire appameyyasmiq1 t1raq1 yassa na -ati); 195,4•
(sa -atu Accimukhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se <;Iaq1satu); 574,18'
(jatarupamaya yeva ime -anti daraka); Ap 20,18
(sahassarani cakkani -anti cara1_1uttame); 535,4 (gato
yattha na -ate); Mil28,17 (pathaviyaql chaya -ati);
Vism 496,32 (idhayaq1 saccasaddo anekesu atthesu -ati);
It-a 1 179,13 (vinassatl ti na -ati); Pv-a 61,25 (kiq1
upasaka sokapareto viya -as! ti); - part.pr.
(a) dissanta, mfn., Ap 320,12 (sagararp viya -antaq1
passas' etarp mahavanarp); - neg. adissanta, mfn.,
Pv 41:3 (te 'dha ghosenty adissanta pubbe dukkatam
attano, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se na -anta; Pv-a 262,14foll.:
adissamanarüpa ghosenti kandanti); Ja VI 188,23 (ayye
puttassa te adissantassa ajja maso atikkanto ti, Se so; Ce,
E e omit atikkanto; Be adissamanassa . . . atlto ti); -
dissantl in Ee at Th 44 is prob. wr; Be, Ce passanti; Se
-anti; K.R. Norman, 1969, p. 132 would read -antaq1);
- (b) dissamana, mfn., S 1 156,14 (-amanena pi
kayena); Ja VI 149,2o· (sabba1okena o1okite -amane);
Vism 429,1; Pv-a 103,9 (-amanatta); Ap-a 428,10
(sabbabuddhanaq1 1akkha1_1ani vedattaye -amanani; or
dissati 1 ?); Mhv27:17; - neg. adissamana,mfn., S 1
156,16; Ja V 396,14*; Sp 997,24 (ye... adissamana
theyyaq1 karonti); Sv 442,12 (-amano gato udahu
adissamano); Ap-a 235,2o (sevala udakaq1 adissamanaq1
katva); Mhv 7:35; - aor. 3 sg. (a) adissittha, adissatha,
Th 170 (tuccho kayo adissittha) f- 172 (adissatha); Ja VI
568,31* (Sakko .. . tesaq1 adissatha); Mhv 32:75
(adissatha); (b) adassi [S. adarsi], Mhv 23:73 (ma1_1<;1a1e
sakale asso ekabaddho adassi so); 3 pl. dissirpsu,
Sp 100,1 (mahabodhissa ... pañca pha1ani -irpsu, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se dassiq1su; Sp-t [Be] 1 186,22: dassiq1sü ti
pp dittha , mfn. and n. [S. dr~ta],
2
paññayiq1su); -
l. (pass.) seen; recognized; being seen; visible; what is
seen; Abh 1078; V in 1 172,17 foll. (kirp te -aq1 kinti te
-aq1 kada te -aq1 kattha te -aq1); III 164,17 (-o maya
parajikaq1 dhammaq1 ajjhapanno si); D 11 268,2o (na kho
me marisa so bhagava sammukha -o); III 218,8 (t11_1i
codanavatthüni, -ena sutena parisailkaya; Sv 1000,17:
-ena ti maq1sacakkhuna va dibbacakkhuna va
vitikkamaq1 disva codeti); M 11 46,12 (ay ama .. .
sammasambuddhaq1 dassanaya upasailkamissama .. .
kiq1 pana tena mu1_1<;Iakena sama1_1akena -ena ti); SI
154,28* (idaq1 hi jatu me -aq1 na-y-idam itih1tihaq1);
III 120,27 (bhagavantaq1 dassanaya upasailkameyyan ti
a1aql Vakkali kiq1 te imina pütikayena -ena); IV 73,s
(--sutamutaviññatabbesu dhammesu -e --mattam
bhavissati; Spk II 383,14joll.: rupayatane cakkhu-
viññal_lena -e --mattaq1 bhavissati, cakkhuviññiil_laq1 hi
rupe rupamattam eva passati na niccadisabhavaq1, iti ...
me ettha --mattam eva cittaq1 bhavissatl ti attho, atha va
 399
-e -arp. nama cakkhuviñña1_1arp. rüpe rüpavijananan ti
attho matta ti pama~arp. . . . atha va -arp. nama
cakkkhuviññ~ena --rüparp. -e --mattarp. nama tatth'
eva uppannarp. ... cittatayarp.) f. Ud 8,5 (Ud-a 90,26foll.);
Dhp 154 (gahakaraka -o si puna geharp. na kahasi);
Ud 44,s (te -a kho Sundar1 paribbajika bahujanena
abhikkha~arp. Jetavanarp. gacchatl ti, Ee, Se so, perhaps
wr; Be, Ce vodigha); 59,3o (cirarp. -o me bhante kamesu
ad!navo); Sn 788 (-ena sarp.suddhi narassa hoti; orto 3.
below; Nidd I 84,13 foil.: cakkhuviñña~ena
rüpadassanena narassa suddhi); Th1 85 (yathabhütarp.
ayarp. kayo -o santarabahiro); Ja I 342,34 (ayarp. pi hi
supino anagatarp. yeva arabbha -o); II 71,15* (ko te suto
va -o va sllava nama makka!o); III 6,10 (pa!hav1
sarp.vanan ti kena sarp.vagamana -a ti); 218,5 (kumaro
-o 'mhi pitara ti utrasto palayi); V 315,2 (eko kira vo
tapaso datthukamo ti rañño arocapesi, raja kirp.
pabbajitassa maya -ena); VI 57,19* (so n' eva -e
nadighe kamanam abhipatthaye; 57,2o·: n' eva -e
manussaloke na adighe devaloke); Pa!is II 52,8 (--tta
patto ti diqhippatto; quoted Vism 660,5 etc: eds
diqhantarp. patto ti); 156,28 (ñato -o vidito sacchikato);
Dhs 587 (-arp. sutarp. mutarp. viññatarp. rüparp.);
Kv 218,13 (pañcakkhandha aniccato -a hontl ti);
Mil 70,5 (bhante Nagasena buddho taya -o ti); Ud-a 88,6
(cirassarp. vata me sammasambuddho -o ti); V v-a 61,32
(--taya); - ijc se e cira-; - ditthe (va) dhamme, in this
lije; in this world; D I 51,13 (te -e va dhamme
sandiqhikarp. sippaphalarp. upajivanti); 156,25
(cetovimuttirp. paññavimuttirp. -e va dhamme sayarp.
abhiñña sacchikatva upasampajja viharati); SI 34,19* (-e
dhamme sa vipako samparaye ca duggati); Sn 1053
(kittayissami te dhammarp. . . . -e dhamme an!tiharp.;
Nidd-a II 22,27 foil.: -e va dukkhadidhamme imasmirp.
yeva va attabhave); Ja I 219,29* (-e va dhamme pasarp.sa
samparaye ca suggati); Ap 260,13 (-e dhamme parattha
ca dhamma ete pasarp.siya); Vism 239,18 (sace -e va
dhamme amatarp. naradheti kayassa bheda
sugatiparayano hoti); Sp 107,14* (-e dhamme va yo attho
yo e' attho samparayiko);- 2. (act.) having seen; who
has seen; Ap 41,27 (-o aharp. dhammavararp.;
Ap-a 280,2s: -o passanto, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce passirp.);
Cp-a 218,26 (tarp. setacchattarp. -assa diqhavato me saha
tena dassanena; ad Cp 3:6:5: sahadiqhassa me chattarp.,
Ce, Ee so; Be saha -assa; Se sahadiqhissa) - 3. (n.)
seeing; sight; perception; Vin IV 104,16 (kirp. bhante
marp. -ena yuddhabhinandinarp., Be, Se so; Ce
yuddhabhinandirp.; Ee yuddhabhinandina); Sn 788 (-ena
sarp.suddhi narassa hoti; orto l. above; Nidd I 84,I3foll.:
cakkhuviñña~ena rüpadassanena narassa suddhi); Ja I
335,1 (imesarp. supinanarp. --tta); Vism 114,3 (imani
ekünav!sati -ena gahetabbani); 216,Io (atha va -an ti
dassanarp.);- -anugati,f, an imitation ofwhat is seen;
foilowing the example; Vin II 108,19 (pacchima janata
-iinugatirp. apajjati); D III 8S,22 (satta tassa sattassa
-iinugatirp. apajjamana rasapa!havirp. añguliya sayirp.su );
MI 16,25 (bhoto ca pana Gotamassa sa janata -anugatirp.
apajjat1 ti; Ps I 111,26: dassananugatirp. pa!ipajjati); A I
71,6 (Mp II 145,3: -iinugatirp. apajjat1 ti
acariyupajjhayehi katarp. anukaronto diqhassa tesarp.
~dis
acarassa anugatirp. apajjati nama); Ja V 67,s·; Vism 54,s;
PsI 61,3 (ayasma Ánando aññe pi puññakame tesarp.
-iinugatirp. apajjane niyojeti); Pa!is-a 462,16
(titthiyasavako ti tesarp. -anugatirp. apanno gahagho ); -
1
-'-anta, m. [di!!hanta 1, dittha + anta ], an example; an
instance; Abh 115 (-' -anto tathodahara1_1arp.);
Sadd 919,28 (-' -anto yattha dhümo tatra aggi yatha
mahanase);- -iiri!!ha, mfn., with signs of approaching
death visible; Saddh 279; - --dhamma, mfn. and m.
1
[dinha + dhamma ], l. (mfn.) who has seen the doctrine;
Vin I 12,19 (--dhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo);
DI 110,!4 (Sv 278,6: -o ariyasaccadhammo etena ti
--dhammo); Dhp-a I 381,7 (pa~<;!ito --dhammo
tipi!akadharo); - neg. adighadhamma, mfn., Nidd-a I
468,7; - 2. (m.) this lije; this world; Ja V 68,20
(--dhamme yeva manussapeto ahosi); 498,26'
(--dhamme e' eva parattha ca); Ap 539,24 (-e, Ee so, but
perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se diqhe dhamme); Mil221,2
(--dhamme pi .. . samparaye ... ); Sv 121,1 foll. (-o ti
paccakkhadhammo vuccati, tattha tattha
pa!iladhattabhavass' etarp. adhivacanarp., -e nibbanarp.
--dhammanibbanarp.); Ud-a 391,19 (yvayarp. ithattarp. -o
idhaloko ti ca laddhavoharo khandhaloko); Pv-a 177,9
(idha ti va --dhamme); - --dhammanibbana, n.,
nibbana in this lije; D I 36,21 (--dhammanibbanarp.
paññapenti); A IV 454,s; --dhammasukha, n.,
happiness in this lije; A IV 281,16; It-a 1 74,22; -
--dhammabhinibbuta, mfn., calmed in this lije; (or: who
has seen the doctrine and is calmed; ?) M III 187,9*
(Ps IV 239,1: --dhamme imasmirp. yeva atthabhave
sabbakilesanibbanena nibbuta); Sn 1087 (Nidd-a II
34,2o foil.: viditadhammatta --dhamma ragadinibbanena
ca abhinibbuta f. Pj li 596,22foll.: eds --dhammatta);-
3. (m.) the state experienced;? the doctrine seen;?
Dhp-a I 198,1 (tumhehi --dhammassa bhag1 hom1 ti);
II 85,7 (bhante aharp. pi tumhehi --dhammam eva
papu~eyyan ti); 189,16 (tava ayyakaya -arp. passa,
ayyaka viya cirarp. jiva amma ti); - --dhammika, mfn.,
belonging to this lije, to this world; Abh 85; Vin III
21,19 (--dhammikanarp. asavanarp. sarp.varaya
samparayikanarp. asavanarp. pa!ighataya); D Il 240,25
(puccheyyarp. --dhammikarp. va attharp. samparayikarp.
va ti); M II 261,26 (--dhammika kama); S II 68,25;
It 38,25* (eka hi dhatu idha --dhammika); Ja V 241,7
(puriso --dhammikarp. pi samparayikarp. pi
mahadukkharp. papu~eyya ti); Nidd I 73,2o
(--dhammikarp. ca anisarp.sarp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
di!!hi-); Ap 343,17; Mil 290,28 (--dhammikarp. bhogarp.
va yasarp. va); It-a I 79,22foil.; - --ppatta in Ee at
Nett 190,3, Vism 660,5 foil. and Mp Il 190,13 is wr for
dighippatta (Be, Ce, Se so); - --pubba, mfn. [digha +
pubba2], l. seen befare; previously seen; M III 238,33
(--pubbo pana te bhikkhu so bhagava); Ja I 509,29
(evarüpa nama me parisa na --pubba ti); VI 496,9 (sa
--pubbarp. viya himavantappadesarp. va~~ent1);
Ap 548,12; Mi1307,26 (sutapubbarp. e' eva tarp. bhante
amhehi --pubbarp. ca ti); - 2. who has seen befare;
Mhv 4:59 (te --pubba tathagatarp.); Sadd 757,1zfoil.;-
--mailgalika, mfn., taking what is se en as portentous,
trusting a sight as an amen; Ja IV 73,9 (--mailgalika
v'dis
sutamailgalika mutamailgalika ti tisso parisa); Sp 958,4
(--mailgalikataya); Pj I 118,9foll.; - --visa, m(jn).
[cf S. dr~tivi~a], (a snake) who poisons by a loo k;
Ap 47,18 (as1viso --viso evarp jhapeti tarp nararp, Be, Ce
so; Ee daghaviso; Se dughaviso; Ap-a 292,34: as1viso
di!thamattena bhasmakara1,1ato --viso sappo attano
dat!harr nararp jhapeti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
datthamattena ... dat!haviso ... ); PsI 87,7 (tena digho
pana so tava-d-eva pabiyati --visena dit!hasattanarp
j1vitarp viya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dathavisena
dat!hasattanarp) =It-a II 15,29; Spk III 7,1 (kaghamukho
hi daghaviso --viso phughaviso vataviso ti catubbidho
hoti); - adigha, addigha, mfn. and n., not seen;
invisible; unattested; what is not seen; the not-seeing;
Vin I 40,34* (addit!ham abbhatitarp, so read with
L. Alsdoif, 1967, p. 67; eds adigharp); D III 232,1o
(adit!he dighavadita); S V 439,27 (adighatta ...
catunnarp ariyasaccanarp); A IV 439,29 (kamesu kho me
adinavo adigho); Khp 9:5 (dit!ha va ye va addit!ha, Ce
so; Be va adigha; Ee va addigha; Se ca adit!ha) = Sn 147
(Ce so; Be va adigha; Ee va addigha; Se ca adigha; see
L. Alsdoif, 1967, p. 15); Ja VI 212,6* (dit!harr adighena
dhanarp haranti); Nidd I 360,15* (na tassa addigham idh'
atthi kiñci, Ce so; Be, Se adittham; Ee adi!tharp) =
Patis I 133,14* (Be, Ce so; Ee adigharp; Se adigham);
Patis II 194,26 (n' atthi tassa bhagavato aññatarp
adigharp aviditarp ... ); Sadd 829,11 (dit!hena nayena
adighassa pi tadisassa nayassa gahetabbatta); -
adighapubba, mfn., l. not seen befare; Vin I 232,13 (yehi
bhikkhave bhikkhühi deva tavatirpsa adi!thapubba) i-
D II 96,28 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adittha); S IV 72,19 (rüpa
adigha adit!hapubba); 193,13 (purisassa kirpsuko
adit!hapubbo assa); Ja I 66,17 (aditthapubbataya);
V 197,15 (tapaso matugamasar1rassa adighapubbatta);
396,26*; Mi1297,29;- 2. who has not seen befare; Mp I
240,7 (tathagatarp adi!thapubba hutva);
aditthapubbaka, mfn., not seen befare; Ja I 309,25*; -
duddigha, mfn. and n., not seen properly, ill-examined;
a bad sight; MI 502,14 (duddit!harp vata bho ...
addasama); Ps II 386,7 (tumhehi pana duddi!tharp etan
ti); - duddit!harr in Ee at Dhp 339 is prob. wr for
duddit!hirp (Be, Ce, Se so); - duddittharüpa, n., an
extremely bad sight; D II 273,13* (Sv 707,15:
duddighasabhavarp datthurp ayuttarp); - sudigha,
suddigha, mfn., n., and sudittharp, adv., (it is) well seen;
se en properly; seeing well or properly; MI 91,28
(yathabhütarp sammappaññaya sudigharp); S V 444,31
(sudit!hatta bhikkhave catunnarp ariyasaccanarp);
Sn 178 (sudigharp vata no ajja .. . yarp addasama
sambuddharp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee suddittharp; Pj II
216,!2foll.: ajja amhehi sundararp di!tharp ajja va
amhakarp sundararp dit!harp, dassanan ti attho); Ja IV
192,13* (yo ca etani thanani anurpthülani sabbaso
sudigharp anusaseyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee suddigharp;
193,T: sabbani sudi!!harr disva anusaseyya); Ap 125,17
(sudigho vata me buddho); 532,2o (katva deharp
sudigharp te); - sudit!harr karoti, looks at well or
eamestly; Dhp-a II 221,7 (ajja me sudit!harr katva);-
fpp (a) datfhabba, mfn. [S. dra~tavya], to be seen; to be
considered as; Vin I 14,20 (etarp yathabhütarp
400 v'dis
sammappannaya -arp); 322,34 (idha pana bhikkhave
bhikkhussa na hoti apatti -a); M III 58,22 (imassa kho
Sariputta maya sailkhittena bhasitassa evarp vittharena
attho -o); S III 54,26 (seyyatha pi bhikkhave
pathavidhatu evarp catas so viññiil,laghitiyo -a); It 4 7,4
(sukha bhikkhave vedana dukkhato -a); Ja III 280,13'
(ettha hi vakaro pikaratthe nipato ti -o); V 101,2T
(tasmirp raghe caranto -arp disva sotabbarp sutva);
Patis II 13,3o (kattha ca bhikkhave saddhindriyarp -arp);
Mil 35,15 (yatha mabaraja udakarp evarp cittarp -arp);
323,24 (katharp pana nibbanarp -an ti); Vism 139,27 (na
kho pan' etarp evarp -arp); 215,24 (ariyamaggo ...
samarp -o ti sandighiko); Pv-a 217,16 (katharp pana so
maya -o ti); Th-a I 41,10 (kicchena --tta duddasarp);
Patis-a 401,17 (-a ti passitabba avagantabba); 700,23
(yan1 ti e' ettha liii.gavipallaso ti -o); As 114,24 (yatha
akotana vitakko -o); Sadd 853,19 (dassan1yarp -arp);
(b) datfheyya, dat!hayya, dit!heyya, mfn., M 1II 131,18
(imina mabata pabbatena avato -arp naddasan ti, Be, Ce
Ee so; Se di!theyyarp; Ps IV 198,13: passitabba-
yuttakarp); S I 61,27 (naharp tarp gamanena lokassa
antarp ñateyyarp -arp patteyyan ti vadam1 ti; Spk I
116,24: ñatabbarp daqhabbarp pattabban ti attho) =
IV 93,7 (Be, Ce, Se so; E e dat!hayyarp) = A II 48,6 (Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se dat!hayyarp) quoted Vism 204,15 (Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se digheyyarp); A V 37,1 (tarp ñateyyarp va
dat!heyyarp va, Be so; Ee diqheyyarp; Ce, Se
dat!hayyarp); - caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. dasseti, -ayati,
shows; reveals, exhibits, demonstrates; makes appear,
makes visible; Vin II 112,6 (katharp hi nama tvarp
Bharadvaja . . . uttarimanussadhammarp iddhi-
patihariyarp -essasi); III 73,29 (jivite adinavarp -eti);
S II 100,11 (corarp agucarirp gabetva rañño -eyyurp);
V 169,1 (sippani e' eva -essama, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-issama); Dhp 83 (na uccavacarp pa1,1<;lita -ayanti);
Ud 68,12 (jaccandhanarp hatthirp -eh! ti); Sn 810 (yo
attanarp bhavane na -aye); Ja I 419,4 (so sakkhara
khipitva khipitva nigrodhapa1,11,1esu nanarupani -eti);
III 455,4 (tasmirp garavena apacitakararp -eti); IV 18,1•
(ath' akkha1,1e -ayase vilaparp); 298,11 (sace putto atha
narp vayappattarp mayharp -eyyas1 ti); Nidd I 228,5
(ekacco sailghagato pi kayikarp pagabbhiyarp -eti);
Patis II 210,22 (so pakativa1,11,1atp vijabitva
kumarakava1,11,1arp ... -eti); Ap 519,16 (-etu patih1rarp
me); Cp 3:2:13 (rañño -etha marp khipparp); Mi1293,11
(yo ga1,1ako sighaslgharp ga1,1etva khipparp -ayati so
ga1,1ako cheko nama); 384,26 (tejo andhakararp vidhamati
a!okarp -ayati); Vism 4,19 (bhagava
si!asamadhipaññamukhena visuddhimaggarp -eti); PsI
169,36 (anandamaccho nama macchanarp nailgut!harr
-eti sappanarp s1sarp); Mp I 243,3 (1abh1narp
bhikkhünarp Sivalitthero aggo ti -eti);
fut. 1 sg. (a) dassessarp, Ja III 131 ,2· (-es san ti, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be -essam1 ti); (b) dassessami, Ja V 128,23;
(e) dassayissami, B v 1:5 (handaharp -ayissami
buddhabalarp); Spk I 2,8*; part.pr.
(a) dassenta, mf( -enti)n., Vin II 113,5; Ja I 433,15'
(itthillthe -enti); Sp 1293,24 (upa<;l<;lhakayarp -entiyo
tighanti); Vism 278,28; Mhv 32:76;
neg. adassenta, mfn., Ja II 249,6 (tesu tughakararp
Vdis
adassentesu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr adassantesu); Th-a III
141,13 (garunhaniyanaJ11 pi apacttiJ11 adassento );
(b) dassaya(t), mfn., Th 86; (e) dassayanta, mf( -antl)n.,
Ja V 435,14' (thanani kacchani ca -ayantl); Ap 38,16;
(d) dassayamana, mfn., D III 44,25 (tapassi attanaq1
adassayamano kulesu cara ti idaq1 pi me tapasmiq1 ... ti,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce adassayamano; Sv 838,13: attanan ti
attano gUI,laJ11 adassayamano ti ettha akaro
nipatamattaq1, dassayamano ti attho, eds so; cf Sv-pr III
24,7: adassayamano ti va parho); Ja VI 117,23"
(nanappakaraq1 deviddhiq1-ayamana); Spkll 183,15;-
aor. 3 sg. (a) dassesi, V in IV 247,3 (sa bhikkhuni taq1
civara111 niharitva Thullanandaya bhikkhuniya -esi);
Ud 68,13; Ja 1 106,7 (sattha imaq1 dhammadesanaq1
aharitva -etva ... jatakaq1 samodhanetva -esi); VI 72,27
(Sakkabhavanaq1 UI,lhakaraq1 -esi); Ap 29,15 (kataq1
kammaq1 phalaq1 -esi me idha); Vism 313,4 (esa maggo
ti vatva -esi); Mhv 5:138; (b) dassayl, adassayi, Pv 27:4
(therassa -ayi tumaq1); Ja V 346,5* (rañño haq1se
adassayi); Ap 321 ,6; 3 pi. (a) dassesuq1, dassesu, D III
66,11 (tam enaq1 .. . rañño .. . -esuq1); Sn 686 (-esu
puttaq1 Asitavhayassa Sakya); Ja Il 51,17 (-esuq1);
Ap 538,23 (-esuq1); 593,3 (iddhiq1 -e su, Ce, E e so; Be
dassaq1su; Se desesu); Mhv 6:27; (b) dassayiq1su, Ja I
383,21; VI 432,25 (cittakara nanappakaracittakammaq1
kariq1su ... nanappakare apaf,le pi -ayiq1su); Ap 598,29;
(e) dassayuq1, adassayuq1, Ja IV 447,14* (adassayuq1);
Ap 593,12 (-ayuq1); Mhv 10:4 (-ayuq1);
inf (a) dassetuq1, V in Il 269,12; D Ili 12,20; Ja 111 354,12
(pabbajitaparipadaJ11 -etuq1); Vism 6,21; (b) dassayituq1,
Mil 312,16; - absoi. (a) dassetva, Vin I l80,29; IV 64,1
(sapparibhayaq1 gantva apparibhayaJ11 dassetva, Be so;
Ce, Se passitva; Ee dassitva, prob. wr); Ja Il 145,26;
Ap 536,21 (-etva vividha iddhl); Mil 269,t9; Vism 635,s;
Cp-a 171,19 (tassa piHhiJ11 -etva va nisidi); -
neg. adassetva, Ja I 383,s; Dhp-a III 114,13 (attanaq1
adassetva va); (b) dassayitva, Ap 392,25 (Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be dassetvana); Bv 5:32; Nidd-a II 45,15; Mhv 36:44;-
neg. adassayitva, Mhv 30:48; (e) dassayitvana,
Bv 16:24; Sp 104,5*; (d) dassiya, Ap 598,28
(nanavikubbanaq1 katva iddhiq1 dassiya satthuno, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr dassetva); - pass. pr. 3 sg. dassiyati,
Paris-a 327,9 (ekatte dassite sallekhañiif,laJ11 sukhena
-Iyatl ti); - fut. 3 pi.(?) dassissanti, Th-a I 30,23 (ye
ubhayatha pakara te ubhayena pi dassissanti); -
dassissanti in Ee at Ap 73,32 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
ussisanti; Se ussissanti; - part.pr. dassiyamana, mfn.,
Ja 11 291,5; Vism 561,33 (paccayanaye -iyamane);
Dhp-a I 64,17 (te ... agatagatehi aliguliya -iyamana);
Ud-a 15,14 (-iyamanatta); - aor. 3 sg. dassittha,
Mhv 18:57 (dassittha sa ... mahajanassa sabbassa
mahabodhi); 19:52 (mahabodhi ca dassittha
chabbal,II,laraJ11sÍyo pi ca); 3 pl. dassiq1su, Sp 100,1
(mahabodhissa ... pañca pha1ani dassiq1su, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee dissiq1su; Sp-r [Be] I 186,22: dassiq1sii ti
2 Mp III 287,23 (sabbasañkharasamathadivasena -ati
paññayiq1su); - pp dassita , mfn. [S. darsita], shown;
exhibited; Vin III 250,31; Ja I 119,s· (bhikkhiihi vatte
-ite); II 281,26 (coro ti ... rañño -ito); Mi1168,9;
Vism 565,8 (na ettha vittharo -ito ti); Sp 825,2o (api ca
Kurundiyaq1 esa nayo -ito yeva); - neg. adassita, mfn.,
401 disati
Spk 11 29,1 (adassitatta); Th-a I 30,2o; - sudassita, mfn.,
well or properly shown; Ap 586,11 (sudassitaq1, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be nidassitaq1); Mil 308,26 (sudassitaq1 karaf,laJ11
sudassitaq1 opammaq1, Be, Ce, Se so; E e sudassitaq1 ...
suddassitaq1 ... ); - fpp (a) dassetabba, mfn., Vin II
112,13 (na bhikkhave gihinaq1 uttarimanussadhammaq1
iddhipa~hariyaq1 -etabbaq1); V 163,27 (na hatthamudda
-etabba); Ja III 500,26" (tesaq1 bahudukkhata -etabba);
Vism 129,24 (tatrapi Soi,lattheravatthu -etabbaq1); Spk II
313,29 (vunhanakarena apacttt -etabba);
(b) dassayitabba, mfn., Mil 384,28 (ñai,la1okaJ11
-ayitabbaq1); (e) dassaniya, dassaneyya, mfn., qqv
sv dassaniya; - caus. (b) pr. 3 sg. dassapeti, shows;
allows to see; Ps 111 295,9 (ime samai,~aka amhakaq1
piyaputtakaq1 pabbajetva ... ekadivasa111 pi na -enti); -
absol. dassapetva, Vin IV 202,24 (verhitasiso nama
3
kesantam na -etva vethito hoti); - see also damseti ,
dakkhati 4. . .
3
v' dis3 , se e dissati .
disa 1, m. [S. drsa], iook, appearance;- ifc see amhadisa,
Idisa, edisa, kidisa, tadisa 1, tadisi, tumhadisa, madisa,
sadisa, sadisa.
disa , m. [cf S. dvi~, dvi~a, dvi~at], an enemy; Abh 345
2
(viddesi ca -o diHho ); Dhp 42 (-o -aq1 yaq1 taq1 kayira
veñ va pana verinaq1; Dhp-a I 324,s: coro coraq1); 162
(karoti so tath' attanaq1 yatha naq1 icchati -o); Th 874
(-a hi me dhammakathaq1 suf,lantu; Th-a III 6l,10:
mayhaq1 amitta paccatthika pi); Ja IV 217 ,9* (yo pub be
sumano hutva paccha sampajjate -o); V 85,10* (so
-abbhi na rajjati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -amhi; 85,18'foll.:
so attano sattiihi saddhiq1 vissasavasena na rajjati);
Sadd 452,7 foil. (-o ti ca dinho ti ca
paccamittassadhivacanaq1 etaq1 ... atha va -o ti coro va
paccamitto va dinho ti paccamitto yeva); -
0
-ta,f
2
[disata ], enmity; a group of enemies; Ja IV 295.13*
(ayama te taq1 -aq1 vadhaya; 295,16·: taq1 disasamiihaq1).
disañgata, disañgamika, see sv disa.
disata 1, f [BHS disata], a direction, quarter, region;
Vv 20:2 (sa hitva manusaq1 dehaq1 kaq1 nu sa -aq1 gata;
Vv-a 102,2: kaJ11 nama disaq1 gata) f. Pv 21:22 (kiq1 nu
so -aq1 gato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr disetaq1; Pv-a 122,5:
kin ti kataraq1); Ja 111 234,1 *foil. (mata pita -a Setaketu
acariyam ahu -aq1 pasattha, Be, Ce so; Ee disa ta; Se
disa tata; 234,1o-: -a ti disa, Be, Ce so; Ee disa ta ti; Se
disa111 ta disa); Sadd 324,29 (disa eva-a ti).
2
disata2 ,f, see sv disa .
disati , pr. 3 sg. [v'dis 1; S. disati], grants; points out,
1
shows; Dhatup 303 (disa atisajjane); 493; Dhatum 475
(disatisajjanadisu); 572 ; SI 217,6* (taq1 me Sakka
vara111 -a ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr disan ti; Spk I 340,31:
taq1 me varaq1 uttamaq1 !hanaq1 okasaq1 -a, acikkha
kathehi ti vadati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee disaq1 acikkha);
Sadd 453,2 (disa atisajjane: -ati upadisati ... ); -pass.
1
pr. 3 sg. dissati [S. disyate], is pointed out; is specified;
Sp 599,26 (-ati apadissati assa ayan ti vohañyatl ti deso );
avadissatl ti nibbana111 disa ti veditabbaq1); Nidd-a I
446,2 (tai,1hakkhaya111 viragan ti adihi -ati apadissati
tasma [nibbanaq1] disa ti vuccati); París-a 608,22
(sabbabuddhehi va paramaq1 sukhan ti -ati apadissati
disati
kathiyati ti disa);- pp dinha 1, mfn. [S. di~raJ, specified;
- adiqhantaraya, m., an obstacle to [a gift to] a person
not specified; Mil 156,17 foll. (cattaro . . . antaraya
adiqhantarayo uddissakatantarayo . . . adirrhantarayo
nfuna anodissa adassanena abhisailkhara~p koci
antaraya¡p karoti); - caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. deseti, -ayati,
l. teaches, expounds; points out; assigns; Dhatup 627
(disa uccarai_le); Dhatum 869; Vin I 6,4* (-assu bhagava
dhamma~p aññataro bhavissanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -etu)
= MI 169,3* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -etu); Vin lii 1,18 (so
dhamma~p -eti adikalyai_la¡p majjhe kalyana~p
pariyosanakalyill)a~p); 151,1 (sailgho itthannamassa
bhikkhuno kurivatthurp -eti); IV 21,18 (yo pana bhikkhu
matugamassa dhamma¡p -eyya pacittiyanti); DI 249,19
(sadhu no bhava~p Gotamo brahmana~p sahavyataya
magga~p -etu); MI 235,31 (buddho so bhagava bodhaya
dhamma~p -eti); 324,11 (-eti vivarati uttanikaroti);
Ud 63,22 (saka~p acariyaka~p uggahetva acikkhissanti
-essanti paññapessanti ... , Be, Ce so; E e, Se -issanti;
Ud-a 326,25: -essanti ti vacessanti pa[i¡p samma
vacessann ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee palidhamma~p
pabodhessanfi ti); Ja V 222,10* (dhammarp ca me -aya);
Ap 209,1o (-eti ariyasaccani); 509,6 (dhamma¡p -ayate
jino); Vism 163,23 (acikkhanti -enti paññapenti ... );
Sv 895,7 (tumhe ... -ayittha); Dhp-a III 216,17 ([buddha]
tavati¡psabhavane vassa¡p upagantva matu
abhidhammapiraka~p -enfi ti); Sadd 568,13 (disi
uccarai_le: -eti -ayati desako deseta desito desana); -
2. tells; confesses, acknowledges; Sp 1357,!0 (gaccha
apatti¡p -eh! ti); - fut. 1 sg. (a) desessarp, M II 252,26
(dhamma¡p nesa¡p -essan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -eyyan
ti); (b) desessami, desissami, V in I 15,31 (ehi Y asa nisida
dhamma¡p te -essami ti); D II 255,17 (-essami
bhikkhave devakayana~p namani, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
-issami); S II 1,12 (pariccasamuppada¡p vo bhikkhave
-essami ti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -issami ti); Ja III 344,16
(-essami ti); Sv 172,7 ( -essfuni ti hi sailkhittadipana¡p
hoti bhasissfuni ti vittharadipana¡p, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-issami ti); (e) desayissa¡p, Ap 503,6; (d) desayissami,
Th 255; Ja V 222,12*; part.pr.
(a) desenta, mfi-enti)n., Vin II 188,25 (dhamma¡p -ento
nisinno hoti); SI 239,27 (accayarp -entassa); Thi 54
(Sukka¡p . . . -enti¡p buddhasasana¡p); 453 (-ente
ajananta na bujjhare ariyasaccani; cfThi-a 257 ,2o: -ente
ti catusaccadhamme desiyamane); Ja II 15,5 (sattha ...
dhamma¡p -ento khipi); IV 406,15' (sammasambuddho
pi dhammasenapatisariputtatherassa cariyapirakarp
-ento); Ap 265,19 (tam addasasi¡p sambuddha~p -enta¡p
amata¡p pada¡p); Vism 507,7 (bhagava dukkhanirodharp
-ento samudayanirodhen' eva -esi); neg.
adesenta, mfn., Dhp-a I 383,1; (b) desaya(t), mfn., A 1
276,19; Ap 249,21 (sailkhittena ca -ento vittharena
-aya¡p, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ayi); 604,23 (tassa -ayato
dhamma¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -ayito);
(e) desayanta, mf( -ayanti)n., SI 24,22* (accaya¡p
-ayantina~p); l90,1s*; (d) desayamana, mfn., Ja I 322,9
(rukkhadevata . . . dhamma¡p -ayamana); Mil404,s;
Vism 208,30 (bhagavati ... dhamma¡p -ayamane, Ce, Se
so; Be, Ee -iyamane); Sv 240,31 (maggarp -ayamano);
- aor. 3 sg. (a) adesesi, SI 196,14* (so me dhammam
402 disati
adesesi) = Th 1254; (b) desesi, S I 239,16 (so bhikkhu
tassa bhikkhuno santike accaya~p accayato -esi);
Th638; JaV 231,12; Mil2ll,2 (tathagato ...
sabbadukkhaparimuttiya dhamma~p -es! ti); (e) adesayl,
A II 26,11* (adesayi so bhagava); Th 902; Ja lii 128,7•;
Ap 492,1; Dhatuk 114,5*; (d) desayl, Th 902; Ap 328,9
(magga¡p me -ay! jino); (e) desayittha, Sv 606,29;
3 pl. (a) desesu¡p, Vin IV 21,27; MI 330,3o; Sv 895,6 (Be,
Ce, Se so; E e dassesu¡p); (b) desayi¡psu, Ps II 178,4;
Dhp-a lii 416,9 (aññamañña¡p accaya¡p -ayimsu);
(e) adesayu¡p, Sp 69,15* (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se adesisu¡p);-
inf deseturp (and desitu¡p), V in IV 21 ,24; D I 240,2s; Ja I
382,1; Vism 522,29* (duddasa caturo dhamma -etu¡p ca
sudukkara); Sp 790,31; 961,33 (pakasitun ti -etu¡p, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se desitu¡p); As 15,14; Mhv 37:80;
absol. (a) desetva, Vin IV 21,2; MI 324,12; Ja II 276,18;
Ap 492,4; - neg. adesetva, Ps 1 24,1s; Dhp-a III 231,3;
Pj II 335,23 (eko pi hi buddho
samathavipassanadhamma¡p adesetva parinibbuto nfuna
natthi); (b) desayitva, Dhatuk 114,4•; - part.perf
act. desitava(t), mfn., Vism 212,5 (magga¡p vibhattava,
vibhajitva vivaritva desitava ti vutta¡p hoti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se desitva ti); -pass. pr. 3 sg. deslyati, D Ili 264,2
(dhammo ca -iyati); Sv 493,12 (pariccasamuppado
anulomato -iyati); Ap-a 282,6 (buddhena na -iyati); -
part.pr. desiyamana, mfn., Vin 1 17,2 (dhamme
-iyamane); Th 995 (-iyamanamhi); Sp 1355,31 (apatti ...
-iyamana); - neg. adesiyamana, mfn., Bv-a l0,29; -
pp desita, mfn. [S. desita], taught, expounded; pointed
out; specified, assigned; told, confessed; Vin II 87,37
(-ita amhaka¡p ima apattiyo); III 19,35 (bhagavata
anekapariyayena viragaya dhammo -ito no saragaya);
D II l 00,2 (-ito Ánanda maya dhammo anantara~p
abahira¡p karitva); 154,7 (yo vo Ánanda maya dhammo
ca vinayo ca -ito paññatto so vo mam' accayena sattha);
Sn 391 (sutvana dhamma~p sugatena -ita¡p); Ja V 477,s
(ima Kassapadasabalena -ita catasso sataraha gatha);
Mi171,11 (yo dhammarp passati so bhagavanta~p passati
dhammo hi maharaja bhagavata -ito ti); 328,12 (sadhu
bhante Nagasena -ita¡p taya nibbana¡p -ita
nibbanasacchikiriya); Vism 6,19 ( -ito pi pan' esa
visuddhimaggo); Sv 465,27 (ko attho -itena ti); -
desita¡p in Ee at Pv-a 54,22: read desi ta¡p; -
desitavatthuka, mfn., on a site pointed out or specified;
Vin III 153,1 (kuri¡p karoti desitavatthuka~p); -
neg. adesita, mfn., Vin Il 3,37 (adesitaya apattiya); Spk I
277,29; II 22,13 (adesitatta); - adesitavatthuka, mfn., on
a site not pointed out or specified; V in III 152,1; -
sudesita, mfn., well-taught; properly expounded; SI
220,26*; Dhp 44; Th 94 (aggappattena aggadhammo
sudesito); Vv-a 180,19 (sudesitatta);
fpp (a) desetabba, mfn., Vin III 149,14 (tehi bhikkhühi
vatthu¡p -etabba¡p anarambha¡p saparikkamana¡p); 197,2
(nissajjitva apatti -etabba); IV 200,17 (na chattapi!I_lissa
agilanassa dhammo -etabbo); MI 416,35 (evarüparp ...
kayakamma¡p satthari . . . -etabba¡p vivaritabba¡p
uttanikatabba¡p); A III 184,16 (pañca dhamme ajjhatta¡p
upanhapetva paresa~p dhammo -etabbo);
(b) desiya 1, mfn., - (fe see sudesiya; - caus.
(b) pr. 3 sg. desapeti, makes teach or expound; makes
disati
assign; makes tell or confess; Vin li 201,5
(bhedakanuvattake bhikkhu thullaccayarp -apehi);
III 231,24 (-apessama ti); - aor. 3 sg. desapesi, Ja IV
262,4; Spk l 198,3o (sattha kira dhammarp na desetukamo
ahosi, atha narp mahabrahma yacitva -apesi); -
absol. desapetva, V in III 151,33 (kutivatthurp na
-apetva); Pj II 196,1z;- neg. adesapetva, Sp 574,21;-
.fpp desapetabba, mfn., Vin 11 20,22 (anudütena
bhikkhuna Sudhammo bhikkhu . . . tarp apattirp
-apetabbo ti, Be so; Ee sa apatti -apetabba; Ce, Se
Sudhammarp bhikkhurp ... sa apatti -apetabba ti); 67,11
2 thupa); Ja V 50,9· (-a pakkantesu nagesu, Be, E e so; Ce,
(yo chadeti so dukkatarp -apetabbo); Kkh 223,1.
disati , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ar~ati, Wg § 21:26: r~a
2
adanasarpvara1_1ayol).], takes; covers; Sadd 449,15 (disa
adanasarpvara1_1esu: -ati puriso; read risa ... risati 'l).
disat¡3, pr. 3 sg., se e sv dissati 3.
disati4 , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup risati, re~ati, ri~yati,
Wg §§ 28:26, 17:43 ?], injures; Sadd 442,17 (kasa .. .
disa . . . himsattha: kasati . . . -ati ... ; read risa .. .
risati ?).
disa, f [S. dis, disa], l. a direction, a cardinal point; a
quarter of the sky; a region, area; D l 222,nfoll.: (so
gacchat' eva puratthimarp -arp gacchati dakkhi1_1arp -arp
gacchati pacchimarp -arp ... ); II 15,1o (sabba ca -a
viloketi); 257 ,7* (purimarp ca -arp raja Dhataragho
pasasati); III 188,24joll. (cha-y-ime. .. -a veditabba
puratthima -a matapitaro veditabba ... ); MI 38,2o (so
mettasahagatena cetasa ekarp -arp pharitva viharati); S I
33,9* (ujuko nama so maggo abhaya nama sa -a; Spk I
87,19: -a ti nibbanarp sandhay' aha); Dhp 323 (na hi
etehi yanehi gaccheyya agatarp -arp); Ud 39,24 (dve
yakkha sahayaka uttaraya -aya dakkhi1_1arp -am
gacchanti); Sn 1122 (-a catasso vidisa catas so uddharp
adho dasa -a imayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dasa disata) = Ja I
401,lO*joll.; Vv41:6 (-asu vissuta); 63:27
(sahassararpsiva... -arp yatha bhati); 84:9 (-arp na
J3nama pamulhacitta; Vv-a 337,16: -an ti
gantabbadisaf11); Pv 13:10 (obhasentl -a sabba osadhi
viya taraka); Ja I 323,11 (mahamegho urthahi -a
andhakara jata); IV 17,4 (imaya -aya amhakarp nagaran
ti -arp vavatthapetva); V 205,12* (yassarp -ayam vasate
brahmacari, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a111; 207,25foll.: yassarp
-an ti yassarp -ayarp, Be so; Ce, Se yassarp -an ti yassa
-aya; Ee yassarp -ayan ti yassan -ayarp); 340,22* (na
kurute -arp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr desarp; 342,22·:
palayanatthaya ekarp -arp na bhajati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
vajati); Vl562,15* (sabba -a namassisarp api sotthi ito
siya); Patis Il 140,14 (etena maggena buddha ca savaka
ca agatarp -arp nibbanarp gacchanti ti attha.Iigiko
maggo ); Ap 31,6 (yassa111 -ayarp vasati ussisamhi
karom' aharp); 156,5 (-arp pucchati brahm31_1o);
Kv 608,22 (sabba -a buddha titthanti ti); Nett 121,32{oll.
(ima catasso -a ... ); Mil 336,24 (-arp pi anudisarp pi ...
atirocati); Vism 184,lljoll. (-ato pana imasmirp sañre
dve -a nabhiya adho heghima -a uddharp uparima -a ti
vavatthapetabbarp); Sv 406,3 (dubbalo hi sa.Iikhadhamo
sa.Iikharp dhamanto pi na sakkoti catasso -a sarena
viññapeturp); Mp I 294,6joll. (a1arp Sariputta yassarp
-ayarp tvarp viharasi asuñña me sa -a); - disa, adv. in
the (four) directions; D III 176,12* (idha -a ca patidisa ca
403 disa
vidisa ca, eds so, but prob. wr; see K.R. Norman, 1984,
p. 181 ); A 11 27 ,12* (na ... vighato hoti cittassa disa na
patihaññati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr patihaññanti) =
It 103,12* (It-a 11 148,1sfoll.: santutthiya catuddisa-
bhavena disa na ppatihanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
catuddisabhavena); - ifc see catu- (sv catu[r]), cha-
1
(sv cha\ dasa- (sv dasa ); - 2. (pi. ?) another region,
another country; abroad; elsewhere; Vin I 50,23 (na
upajjhayarp anapuccha gamo pavisitabbo na susanarp
gantabbarp na -a pakkamitabba); III 88.26 (-asu vassarp
vuttha bhikkhu); D 11 166,11* (vittharika hontu -asu
Se -asu); Vism 596,17 (jaccandho ca pithasappi ca -a
pakkamitukama assu); Sp 402,2 (kirp -asu pakkanta
bhikkhu ti); Dhp-a I 66,17 (-asu vicaritva);
0
'-antaraJa, n., an intermediare direction; Sadd 760,1
(bahubbihi ... -'-attho); 762,32; - 0
'-alocana, n.,
o' -alokana, f, looking at directions ( the na me of a guide-
line or stategy for interpretation); Pet 3,22* (-arp); 246,26
(pathamaya disaya a1okanarp ayarp vuccati disalokana);
Nett4,23* (-arp); 124,22; Ud-a9,17 (in cpd); -
0
-kaka, m., a crow who shows the direction of land;
Ja III 126,17 (ekacce va1_1ija -arp gahetva navaya
Baverurattharp agamarpsu); Vism 657,3; Mp III 385,19
0
(tiradassirp saku1_1an ti -arp); -kalusiya,
0
-ka1ussiya, n., obscuration of the sky; Sv 95,10; (-arp,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -kalussiyarp); - 0 -gaja, m., one of
the (mythical) elephants who stand at the quarters;
Abh 30; Ud-a 66,2s; - disail-gata, mfn., who has gane
elsewhere, to another place; Vin I 263,13; Sp 985,27
(tasma avasa vippavasitukamo pakkanto -o); -
2
0
-gamaniya, mfn. [disa + gamaniya ], habitual/y going
to other places; Sv 1053,1o (anibaddhavasa -a bhikkhü,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anibaddhavasadirp gamaniya); -
disail-gamika, disailgamiya, mfn., intending to go
elsewhere, to go to another place; V in I 119,10; 263,12
(bhikkhu atthatakathino -o pakkamati); Sp 1113,32
(disailgamiyavasena); - 0 -cakkhuka, mfn., able to see
in all directions ora long way; ? Ja III 344,s (pan9ita ca
nama -a honti); V 476,24 (raja -o hutva); - 0 -c}.aha,
0
-daha, m., a glow or buming in the sky; DI 10,1s
(ukkapato bhavissati -o bhavissati; Sv 95,1o; -o ti
0
-kalusiyarp aggisikhadhumasikhadihi aku1abhavo viya);
Ja I 374,11'; Mi1178,2o; - 0
-disam, ind., see sv
2
disodisarp; - disam-pati, m. [+ pa;i ; cf S. dikpati,
disam pati], a king; Abh 334 (-i janadhipo); SI 86,15*
(süro hoti -i; Spk I 155,n: -i ti 0 -jeghaka, Be, Se so; Ce
0
-jetthaka; Ee 0 -jetthako); Ja IV 154,25* (155,4: -I ti
disanarp pati maharaja); Mhv 23:97;
0
-pamokkha, mfn., pre-eminent in the world; famed far
and wide; V in I 269,37 (-o vejjo; Sp 1114,2o: -o ti
sabbadisasu vidito pakato padhano va ti attho); Ja I 273,5
(Gandhararatthe Takkasilanagare -assa acariyassa
santike [sipparp] ugga1_1ha); - 0
-vatika, 0 (disa)-
vattika, mfn., undertaking devotion to the directions;
Nidd I 89,26 (eke sama1_1abrahma1_1a vatasuddhika ... -a
va honti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se vattasuddhika ... disavattika;
Nidd-a I 218,7: puratthimadidisanarp namassanavasena
samadinnadisavatika); 0
-vasi(n), mfn. [disa +
vasi(n) 2], (a bhikkhu) living elsewhere or away; Ps III
disodisaip
150,21; Dhp-ai 19,!5 (-ino bhikkhil);- 0 -vasika, mfn.
[disa + vasika2], (a bhikkhu) living elsewhere or away;
Mp I 261,8 (-a dve sahayaka bhikkhu); Dhp-a IV 140,1;
-
0
-suta, mfn. [disa + suta 1], known far and wide; Ja II
442,7* (atitto ti -o; 442,w: ahaJTI -o vissuto pakaro, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be disasu suto ); - se e also catuddisa,
catuddisal!l (sv catu[r]), catuddisa, catuddisika,
disodisaJTI.
disodisaip (and disadisaJTI ?), ind. [cf S. diso disas], hither
and thither; in various directions; D III 200,6• (anuyanti
-aJT~); Pv 26:6 (pakkamanti -aJT~); Th 615 (silaJTI
vilepanaJTI setrhaJTI yena vati -al!l; Th-a II 260,16 foil.:
sabba disa vayati pi, disodisa ti pi p~i, dasa disa ti attho,
Be, Se so; Ce dasa pi disa ti pi attho; Ee dasa pi disa pi ti
attho); Ja II 407,12* (yanti -aJT~ pure; 407,18·: tal!l taJT~
disal!l abhimukha palayanti); III491,25'; Ap 147,22
(aghasi bhagava tattho vilokento -aJT~); Spk III 69,14
(makkato ucce rukkhe abhiruhitva disadisal!l
pakkhandissaml ti).
disva, disvana, ind., absol. ofv'dis 2 qv.
dissati\ pass. pr. 3 sg. of disati 1 qv.
dissate, pass. pr. 3 sg. ofv'dis 2 qv.
dissate, dessati, disati 3, pr. 3 sg. [v'dis 3; S. dve~ri, dvi~ati],
is hostile, is unfriendly; Dhatup 451 (disa ... appltiyal!l);
Dhatum 690; Ja III 353,24* (na ve -anti sappañña disva
yacaka-m-agate, Ce, Ee so; Be dessanti; Se dussanti;
354,4·: na -anti na kujjhanti aññadatthu pana mudita va
hontl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be dessanti; Se dussanti); Ap 565,31
(patil!l rhapetva sesa me -anti adhana iti, Se so; Be
dessanti; Ce, Ee disanti); Pj II !68,12 (dhammadessl
parabhavo tam eva dhammaJTI dessati na piheti na
pattheti na su~Jati na paripajjati); Paris-a 608,23
(sabbadukkhaJTI va -anti vissajjenti ujjhanti etaya ti
disa); Sadd 452,8 (so hi pare dessati na ppiyayati parehi
va desslyati pi yo na kañyatl ti diso ); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. desslyati, Sadd 452,9; pp dittha3 , mfn.
[S. dvi~raJ, hated, disliked; an enemy; Abh 345 (diso
-o); 1078; Ja I 280,4* (-am so ativattatl ti; 280,w: -an ti
paccamittal!l); - fpp d~ssa, dessiya, desiya2, mfn.,
[S. dve~ya], to be hated, hateful; Thi416 (-a va me;
Thl-a 246,23: -a ti appiya); Ja II 285,21 • (-o hoti
atiyacanaya); IV 406,17' (na me -a ubho cakkhil attanaJTI
me na dessiyal!l) f. Cp 1:8:16 (atta na me na -o); Ja VI
570,20* (na me -a ubho putta Madd! devl na dessiya);
Cp 1:9:3 (kil!l nu -a ahal!l tava; Cp-a 75,28: kil!lkar~al!l
ahaJTI tava -a kujjhitabba appiya jata); 2:9:9 (tassa -aJT~
na vyaharil!l; Cp-a 171,32: tassa porisadassa -aJT~
anighaJTI pi na vyaharil!l); Mil281,9 (na kho maharaja
Ves san taro danapati o -taya brahm~assa puttadaraJTI
adasi); Sp 566,29 (-o appiyo); Sadd452,7 (disl
appltiyaJTI: ... -o desiyo);- se e also dussati2.
dissamanaka, mfn. [dissamana (pass. part.pr. of v'dis 2) +
ka2], being seen; visible; Ja II 124,9 (Sakko devaraja
0
-sarlren' eva bodhisattassa santikal!l gantva); Sp 750,19
(yakkhlpetlhi 0 -rilpahi); - adissamanaka, mfn., not
being seen; being invisible; Ps II 414,13; V 91,11
(kiltagarani -ani katva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be adissamanani)
= Spk II 379,8 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adissamanani).
digha, mfn. and m.n. [S. d!rgha], l. (mfn.) long (in space
or time); tall; Abh 707; Vin II 107,2 (na bhikkhave -a
404 dígha
kesa dharetabba); DI 17,19 (-assa addhuno accayena);
MI 429,12 (-o va rasso va majjhimo va ti); S I 115,6
(-al!l pacanayaqhil!l gahetva); II l8l,2o (-o kho bhikkhu
kappa so na sukaro sailkhatul!l); A III 77,2 (ciral!l jlva
-aJT~ ayul!l palehl ti); Dhp 60 (-a jagarato rattl -al!l
santassa yojanal!l -o balanaJTI SaJT!Saro ); Ja VI 523,27*
Gi!JJJO 'ham asmi abaJo -o e' addha suduggamo);
Dhs 617 (rilpal!l . . . -aJT~ rassal!l a~JUI!l thillaJTI vanaJT~
parima~J~alal!l ... ); Mil 85,11 (aghikani -ani
yojanasatikani); Vism 273,21 * (-o ras so ca assaso
passaso pi ca tadiso); Sv 602,35 (kldiso bho so bhikkhu
ka~o odato -o rasso ); Dhp-a I 436,9 (ubhato -al!l avaraJT~
kha~Japetva); Sadd 247,16/oll.; ifc see klva-
(sv klva[t]); - acc. d!ghal!l, adv., V in III 70,34/oll.
(-al!l va assasanto -al!l assasaml ti pajanati); Ja V 435,2*
(-al!l ca assasati dukkhavedinl); - dighato, d!ghaso, in
length; lengthways; Vin III 149,28 (tatr' idal!l pam~aJTI
-aso dvadasa vidatthiyo ); M 1 176,1 (hatthipadal!l -ato
ca ayatal!l tiriyaJTI ca vitthatal!l); Ja I 315,2 (-ato til!lsa-
yojanal!l vittharato pannarasayojanal!l assamapadal!l, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce -aso); VI 185,8 (naJTI ... bhümiyaJTI -ato
nipajjapetva) = Cp-a 120,23 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -aso);
Ja VI 586,19 (visaññl hutva -ato parhaviyaJTI pati);
Vism 65,23 (-ato tihattham eva vagati); Sp 889,13 (-ato
mughipañcakal!l tiriyal!l a~~hateyyahatthal!l, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -aso);- 2. (mfn. and m.n.) long (of a vowel or
syllable); a long vowel; Vism 212,14 (vantasaddato
vakaral!l ca -aJT~ katva adaya bhagava ti vuccati);
Sp 1399,24 (-an ti -ena ka1ena vattabbaJTI akaradi); PsI
152,3o (sabrahmacarl ti rassal!l pi vagati -al!l pi); Pj II
205,25 (sal!lsuddhacara~Jo ti .. . chandavasena e' ettha
-aJT~ katva cakaral!l aha, sal!lsuddhacara~Jo ti attho );
Vv-a 79,5 (pañca rathasata ti gathasukhatthal!l thakarassa
-aJT~ liilgavipallasal!l ca katva vuttaJTI); Th-a I 82,1
(nilasuglva ti nUasuglva, gathasukhatthal!l e' ettha -o
kato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -aJT~ katal!l); Sadd 605,23
(dvimatta sara -a nama bhavanti); 607,19 (-o garu: a 1 il
bhil dhl ma); 620,4 (sara kho vyañjane pare kvaci -aJT~
papponti); - ifc see uttara- (sv uttara\ - 3. (m.) a
snake; Abh 654; Ja IV 330,6* (darhavudho ghoraviso si
sappa ... kasma bhavaJTI posathiko nu -o, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se -a); - 4. (m.) the Dlghanikaya; Mp III 382,7
(
0
'-adlsu yo koci agamo); - iic see below; -
o• -ailguli, mfn., having long fingers (one of the 32
characteristics of a mahapurisa); D II 17,20 (ayal!l hi
deva -1; Sv 446,12/oll.: yatha aññesal!l kaci ailguliyo
d!gha honti kaci rassa na eval!l mahapurisassa ... );
III 143,17; M II 136,11; - o• -antara, n., a long inner
room; a gallery; Ja VI 349,19 (raja ... pasadassa -e
cailkamanto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit pasadassa); 352,19;
-
0
-m-antara, n., a long interval of time; Pv 21:56
(mahadanal!l pavattesi Ailkuro -aJT~; Pv-a 52,3: makaro
padasandhikaro digha-antaraJTI dighakalan ti attho, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee dighal!l antaraJTI d!ghaJTI kalan ti); Th 646
(imasmil!l -e); - o• -agama, m. [BHS d!rghagama], the
Dlghanikaya; Sv 2,10; - o• -ayuka, mf( -l)n., long-lived;
Vin II 190,17 (pubbe kho kumara manussa -a etarahi
appayuka); D I !8,21 (so --taro ca hoti vaJJJJavantataro
ca); III 264,11 (-al!l devanikayaJTI upapanno hoti); M III
206,8 (--ttaJT~); Vv 32:3 (-!); Ja III 364,14 (tada manussa
dighika
-a honti tirp.savassasahassani jlvanti); VI 198,27' (--taya
amarasañkhatanarp. naganarp.); Mil 117,1 (aroga sadhana
-a); Sv 190,12 (-a hotha ti); - atid!ghayuka, mfn,, very
long-lived; Pj U 458,3o; Bv-a 146,26; - o• -avu, mfn. [=
d!ghayu; cf avuso ], long-lived (an honorific title and
N.pr.); Ja V 120,27*; Sadd 623,9 (ayussa yassa vo
PaJ.ll,lattiyarp.: D!ghavukumaro, PaJ.ll,lattiyan ti kirp.
d!ghayuko hotu ayarp. kumaro); - 0
-kalika, mfn.,
lasting a long time; Sp 191,17; - 0
-jati,f, the snake
species; a snake; Sp 259,1 (ahigaha1,1ena sabba pi
ajagaragonasadibheda -i sañgahita); 540,3o (-irp. ka:ye
aru~harp. disva, Be, Ce, E e so; Se o -jatikarp.); Dhp-a III
322,s (-ito va upaddavo bhavissatl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-jatikena);- 0 -jatika, m(jn)_, a snake; JaU 145,27 (-a
vo na qarp.sissanti na vihe!hessantl ti); Vism 31,15
(sirirp.sapa ti ye keci saranta gacchanti -a sappadayo );
Sp 1094,22 (yassa kassaci apadakassa -assa marp.sarp. na
va!!ati); Mp U 248,28 (-en a dagho ); - o -jivi(n), mfn.,
long-lived; Sadd 846,27; - 0
-tara, mfn., campar.,
longer; Sp 456,14; - 0 -tarayukatli,f, abstr., the being
longer-lived; Vv-a 131,4; - 0
-tli,f, abstr., length;
Abh 295 (ayamo -a); - 0
-tta, n,, abstr., length; the
being long; Abh 875; A I 54,1; Sv 450,25;
0
-dal}.c.laka, m. and mfn., l. (m.) a long stick; Sp 621,8
(-ena rassadaJ.lqakarp. paharanta vicaranti); - 2. (mfn.)
with a long handle; J a III 218,7 (-arp. dabb!pahara1,1arp.
gahetva); Sp 845,16; - 0
-dassi(n), mfn., far-sighted;
prescient; Ap 50,2o (-1 mahamuni; Ap-a 301,26: -1 ti
anagatakaladassl); Ps III 249,9 (idarp. therena digharp.
bhavissati, aho -1 ayyo ti); Dhp-a I 350,6 (digharp.
bhavissati -ma kara1,1an ti); Mhv 29:52;
0
-nasika, mfn., (one) who has a long nose; Vism 283,36;
Sp 1029,11; - 0 -nikaya, m., the group of long suttas
(one of the divisions of the Suttapi!aka of the Paji
Canon); D III 292,25 (catuttirp.sasuttapatimaJ,l<;lito -o
nighito); Mil405,1 (--vare 1akkhaJ.1asuttante); Sp 18,7
(brahmajaladicatuttirp.sasuttasañgaho -o); 751,19 (-arp.
katheti); Sv 23,1/oll. (kasma pan' esa -o ti vuccati);
Mp I 89,2 (-e parih!ne suttantapi!akarp. parihlnarp. nama
hoti); Vibh-a 266,34 (-amhi mahanidane);
-'-aghakatha,f, the commentary on the D!ghanikaya;
Sp 172,3o; Sv 131,25 (iti sumañgalavi1asiniya
-' -aghakathaya brahmajalasuttaVaJ.ll,lana nighita); Ps V
24,2; - 0
-pakhuma, mfn., with long eyelashes;
Th!-a 237,35;- 0 -pada, mfn., long-legged; Vibh-a 26,17;
-
0
-padaka, mfn., with long legs or feet; Th-a I 137,2
(-arp. caturassarp. pl!harp.);- 0 -pasal}.hika, mfn., having
long heels; Sv 926,26 (-o ti o -paJ,lhiko, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-pasaniko ti); - 0
-pi!fhika, mfn, and m., (mfn.) long-
backed; (m.) a snake; Abh 654 (urago "' d!gho ca -o);
Sn 604 (padüdare pi janatha urage -e; Pj U 465,6:
sappanarp. hi slsato yava nañgugha pighi hoti tena te -a
ti vuccanti); Sv 510,27 (--peta nama saghiyojanika pi
honti);- 0 -bhlii].aka, m., one who leams and recites the
D!ghanikaya; Ja I 59,31 (-a pan' alm cattari nimittani
ekadivasen' eva disva agamas1 ti); Mil341,28
( ... jatakabha1,1aka -a majjhimabhiii,laka ... ); Vism 286,s;
Sp 1364,11 (-o tvarp. majjhimabhiii,lako ti evarp. agamo na
pucchitabbo); Sv 15,27; - 0
-majjhima, m.pl., the
D!ghanikaya and the Majjhimanikaya; Vism 96,28 (-esu
405 dina
marp. kalena kalarp. pucchanti); Spk U 119,w; -
0
-ratta, n. [d!gha + ratta2], a long time; Sadd 774,27
(d!gha ratti -arp.); - -arp., -assa, -aya, adv. [cf BHS
d!rgharatram],for a long time; V in III 105,29 (tesarp. tarp.
assa -arp. ahitaya dukkhaya); DI 206,1 (bhavarp. hi
Anando tassa bhoto Gotamassa -arp. upaghako); M III
115,19 (-assa hi vo Ananda dhamma suta dhata _..);SI
59,24 (-arp. katanarp. punnanarp.; Spk I 114,25:
asltivassasahassani); A I 142,15* (te -arp. socanti); It 8,2
(paja -arp. sandhavanti sarp.saranti); Pv 25:11 (atume
itthibhütaya -aya marisa; Pv-a 165,23: -aya ti -arp.);
Ja VI 202,11* (yo bral!ma1,1e bhojayi -arp.); Vism 268,32;
- -anusayi(n), mfn., persistent for a long time; D II
283,25 (te [pañha] me bhagavata vyakata -anusayino
yarp. ca pana me vicikicchakathañkathasallarp. tarp. ca
bhagavata abbü~han ti, Ee so; Se d!ghanupassata; Be
-anusayi 'harp. ca pana me ... ; Ce -anusayinarp. ca pana
me._.); - -anusayita, mfn., persistent for a long time;
Sn 355; Th 768; Vism 487,25 (-anusayitarp. jlvasaññarp.
samühanitukamena bhagavata);- 0 -lomaka, mf(-ika)n.,
long-haired; S U 228,7 ( 0 -lomika e~aka); Ja I 484,28 (eko
-o e~ako ); Sp 1086,5 (-o mahakojavo );
0
-vattalika, mfn., long and round; ? Vism 249,12
(kesa ". -a tulada!,l<;lasaJ.l!hana, Be, E e so; Ce
0
-vagatula-; Se d!gha vagalika) = Pj I 42,8 (Be so; Ce, Ee
0
-vagulaka; Se d!ghavagaka) = Vibh-a 232,3; -
0
-VaJ}.fa, mfn. and m., l. (mfn.) long-stalked; Sp 618,6
(aññesu va -esu pupphesu); - 2. (m.) a tree; SAF:
Indian trumpetflower, Oroxylum indicum (L.) Benth. ex
Kurz; Abh 572;- 0 -sangiti,f, the D!ghanikaya; Sv 14,9
(suttantapi!ake catasso sañg!tiyo tasu pa!hamarp. katararp.
sañgltin ti -irp. bhante ti); - 0 -sutta, mfn. and n. [d!gha
+ sutta2], l. (i) (mfn.) dilatory, procrastinating; Abh 727
(-o cirakriyo); - (ii) (n.) procrastination; Sp 590,6
(adhikaraJ.larp. . . . -arp. katva vissajjitabbarp.); Ps III
153,26 (khipparp. na vüpasammati -arp. hoti); 154,9
(kasma turito si ti adlni vatva -am eva karonti); -
atid!ghasutta, mfn., too cautious, too careful; Ja IV 165,1
(atid!ghasutto si, Ce, Ee so; Be atlva d!gharp. passasi; Se
ativiya -o si); - 2. (mfn.) with a long thread; Ja V
389,13* (balisarp. hi so niggilati -arp. sabandhanarp.); -
3. (n.) a long sutta; ? (or adv.: at great length; ?)
As 28,16 (tvarp. sinerurp. parikkhipanto viya -arp. al!arasi,
kirp. suttarp. nam' etan ti);? - 0 -hanuka, mfn., with a
long jaw; Sp 1029,29; - adigha, mfn., not long;
Sp 330,9 (--tta); Kkh 2 262,1o (parimaJ.lqalan ti -arp.); -
atidigha, mfn., very long; too long; too tall; Vin IV 7,9;
D U 175,24; Pv 22:2; Ja VI 3,2/oll. (-aya hi itthiya passe
nis!ditva thaññarp. pivato darakassa glva d!gha hoti);
Sp 210,10 (puriso ti na -o na atirasso majjhimappama1,1o
veditabbo); It-a II 56,23 (natidlghata); - see also
sojasahatthad!ghaka.
dighika, mfn. (or d!ghika, f ?) [cf S. d!rghika 'oblong
pond'], long-sided; (or an oblong trench); Ud-a 260,1
(parikhaküpe ti d!ghikava!e);
didhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup d!dh!te, Wg § 24:68], shines,
is bright; Sadd 395,22 (d!dhi dittidevanesu: -ati d!dhiti).
didhiti, m. [ts], a ray of light; Abh 64; Sadd 395,22 H ti
rasmi).
dina, rrifn., pp of diyate qv.
diniya
diniya, n. [cf S. dainya], wretchedness, meanness;
Sadd 480,28 (dinabhavo -mp.); - see also dina
(sv diyate).
dipa\ m. [S. dipa] (pl. nom. -a, -ani), a light, a lamp;
Abh 316 (-o padipo pajjoto); 999; DI 50,11 (ete
m~~a1ama)e -a jhayanti ti); Thi 115 (tato -a~p.
gahetvana viharam pavisi~p. ahmp.); Ja II 104,27
(gandhate1ena -a~p. ja1enti); Ap 101,8 (nibbayi
anupadano -o va te1asankhaya); 373,26 (yava udeti
suriyo -a~p. me tava ujja1i); 519,27 (asankhiyani -ani);
Bv 1:23 (parayano patiqha ca -o ca dvipaduttaJDo;
Bv-a 38,31.: -o ti padipo yatha. .. padipo rüpa-
sandassano hoti eva~p. . . . paraJDatthasandassano padipo
tuvan ti attho); Vism 174,31 (ghate -mp. jaletva); 430,17
(Mahakassapatthero . . . ime gandha ma SUSSiip.SU
pupphani ma mi1ayi~p.su -a ma nibbayi~p.sil ti
adhiqhahi); Dhp-a II 94,24 (tena hi sam~era -a~p. jaletva
dhaJDmassavanassa ka1a~p. ghosehi ti); Mhv 3:2
(vesakhapm_u_1amaymp. so -o 1okassa nibbuto); -
o• -acchinaip in E e at Vism 464,16 is wrfor dipaccina~p.
(Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 '-a1aya, m.n., a niche for a lamp;
Ja VI 432,11 (dvisu passesu anekasatani -ani ahesu~p., Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee anekasatadipa1aya); 444,5· (anekasatana~p.
-ana~p. dvara~p. vivaratha ti); - -uija1a, ujjala, n., the
0
buming or lighting of a lamp; Spk II 78,16 (-ena
andhakaro pahiyati, Ee so; Be padipujja1ena; Ce
o• -ujjalena; Se padipujja1anena): 0
-uijalana,
ujjalana, n., lighting a lamp; Ps II 99,1 (in cpd); 348,2
(-en a andhakaravigamo viya, Ce, Se so; Be
padipujja1anena; E e o• -ujjalanena); Dhp-a III 420,1o
(-a~p. viya, Ce, E e so; Be, Se padipujjalana~p.); -
0
-kapallika,f, 0 -kapallaka, n., 0 -kapalla, n., the bowl of
an oil-lamp; Vism 129,3 (aparisuddhani 0 -kapa11ika-
vaqitelani, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce 0 -kapallaka-) = Sv 787,18
(Se so; Ce 0 -kapallaka-; Be, Ee 0 -kapalla-) =PsI 291,6
(eds 0 -kapallaka-) = Spk III 156,24 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
0
-kapallaka-); Sp 1245,16 (-a); Spk I 290,23 (ettha n' eva
tela~p. na vaqi na -a); Th-a III 64,2o (-ahi); Mp II 343,18
(cakkava)apathavi~p. o -kapallakaip. katva);
0
-il-kara, mfn. [dipa + kara 1], making light, illuminating;
Nidd(Be)Il 212,28 (Eep.195,22) (pabhankaro ti ... -o
padipakaro ... ); Mhv 1:5;- 0 -gabbha, gabbhaka, m., a
niche for a lamp; Ja VI 459,14 (anekasate -e ca passa, Se
so; Ce 0 -gabbhake; Be anekasatadipagabbhe; Ee
0
anekasatadipagabbhake); -jalana, 0 -jalana, n.,
lighting a lamp; Sp 865,23 (0 -jalane, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dipujjalane); Pj I 64,25 (na -jalanattha~p., Ee, Se so; Be,
0
0
Ce -jalanattha~p.);- 0 -nibbana, n., the going out of a
lamp; Mp IV 1,14;- 0 -raja\ m., the king of lights, the
moon; Ap 178,16 (kadamba~p. pupphita~p. disva -mp. va
uggatmp.; Ap-a 449,1sfoll.: sabbesa~p. dipana~p.
jalamanana~p. tarakana~p. raja cando ti attho, atha va ...
catilsu dipesu . . . raja alokaphar~ato cando -a ti
vuccati); - 0 -rukkha, 0 -rukkhaka, m., a lamp on a
stand; a lampstand; Ap 4,3 (-a jalan tu te; Ap-a 109,27:
padipadhara1_1atelarukkha); Bv 1:45 (jalantmp. -a~p. va;
Bv-a 45,26: aropitadipa~p. -am iva); Sp 1245,16 (mattika-
bhal_l~e ... -o 0 -kapallika); Kkh 2 238,3 CO-mkkhako);-
0
-sahassuijala, n., the burning of a thousand lamps;
Spk I 313,12 (-mp. viya, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se -ujjalanmp.).
406 dipa
dipa 2 , m.n. [S. dvipa], l. an island; a shelter, a place of
refuge; Abh 6 ( ... nirodho nibbana~p. -o ... ); 664
(antaripa~p. ca -o); 999 (-o 'ntañpapajjotappatiqha-
nibbutisu ca); S V 219,28 (nadi ... tassa majjhe -o);
Dhp 25 (-a~p. kayiratha medhavi ya~p. ogho nabhikirati);
Sn 1145 (-a -mp. upaplavi~p.); Pv 26:9 (santesu
deyyadhammesu -mp. nakamha attano; Pv-a 174,18: -an
ti patiqha~p., puññan ti attho); Ja IV 162,5* (uplapaya~p.
-am immp. u)ara~p.); V 478,23* (-a~p. hi eta~p. paraiDaip.
naranmp.); Bv 1:23 (parayano patiqha ca -o ca
dvipaduttamo; Bv-a 38,31/oll.: -o ti padipo ... atha
va . . . samuddadipo yatha patiqha hoti evmp. tuvmp. pi
sa~p.sarasagare ... -o vi ya ti -o); Mil 82,23 (atthi bhante
Alasando nama -o tatthaha~p. jato ti); Mhv 7:7 (aya~p.
bho ko nu -o ti Lailkadipo ti so bravi); - ifc see atta-
(sv atta[n]), antara-, dhamma- (sv dhaJDma 1); - 2. a
division of the terrestial world, one of the four
continents; Vin I 290,35 (yatha bhikkhave Jetavane
vassati evmp. catilsu -esu vassati); S V 342,6 (raja
cakkavatti catunna~p. -ana~p. issariyadhipacca~p. rajja~p.
karetva); Ja I 49,4 (ti su -esu buddha na nibbattanti
Jambudipe yeva nibbattanti ti); Ap 452,22 (caturo -a
sasamudda sapabbata); Spk II 188,IOfoll. (tiqhatu aya~p.
-o dvisahassadipaparivaresu catilsu -esu esa rajjmp.
katu~p. yutto ti); Mp II 34,21 (jambuya paññato pakato -o
ti Jambudipo); - (fe see jambu-; - 3. the island of
Lmika, Srl Lwika; Vin V 3,30* (vinaya~p. -e pakasesu~p.
pitaka~p. Tambapa1_11_1iya); Sp 72,7 (Vijayakumaro ima~p.
-a~p. agantva manussavasa~p. akasi); 89,1o
(sammasaJDbuddho kira ima~p. -a~p. dharamanakale pi
tikkhattu~p. agaJDasi); As 1,30*; Mhv 25:82
(Ummadaphussadevo so -e aggadhanuggaho ); 34:70 (-e
sabbaviharesu dhaJDmasana~p. akarayi);
0
-jotaka, mfn., illuminating, enlightening the island (of
Lmikti); Dip 14:50 (Mahindo -o); - 0 -dipa, m., the
light of the island; Mhv 15:208; 36:90; - 0 -bhasa,f,
the language of the island (of Lwikti), the Sinhalese
language; Dhp-a I 1,14* (atthava1_11_1ana ya
Tambap~1_1idipamhi -aya sa1_1thita); Pp-a 254,7* (-aya
sankhatmp.); Mhv 14:65 (-aya eva~p. saddhammotara~p.
karayi dipadipo); - 0 -raja 2 , m., the king of continents,
the moon; Ap 178,16 (kadamba~p. pupphita~p. disva -a~p.
va uggatmp.; Ap-a 449,18 foil.: sabbesa~p. dipana~p.
jalaJDananmp. tarakana~p. raja cando ti attho, atha va ...
catilsu dipesu . . . raja alokaphara1_1ato cando -a ti
vuccati);- 0 -Vaipsa, n., the chronicle of the island (of
Lwika); Sp 75,14 (vuttmp. pi e' eta~p. -e); Kv-a 3,18;
Mhv 38:59; - 0 -vasi(n), mf(n). [dipa + vasi(n) 2], an
inhabitant of the island (of Lalika); Sp 100,3 (sabbe
-ino; Sp-t [Be] I 186,23: sabbe TaiDbap~1_1idipavasino);
835,21; Sv 1, IR* (atthakatha . . . thapita siha)abhasaya
-inam atthaya); Mhv 15:49 (-ihi);- sudipa, m., a good
island, a good refuge; Th 412 (so karohi -aJO attano
tva~p.; Th-a II 175,2s: catilhi oghehi anajjhottharaniya~p.
arahattaphalasailkhata~p. -a~p.); - see also catuddipa,
catuddipika, jambudipaka (sv jaJDbu).
dipa 3, m. [cfS. lex. dvipa], (a car) covered with a
leopard's skin; Abh 372; Ja V 259,8* (satthi ratha-
sahassani ... -a atho pi veyyaggha sabbalankarabhusita;
260,24·: dipicammavyagghacammaparivara) t VI 48,2*
dipaka
(rathaseniyo . . . -e) -t Ap 353,16; Sadd 625,5 (pyo
payugaf!1 po ca: app ekacce ... -a dipicammaparivarita ti
2 dipini, f [cfS. dvipin], a female panther or leopard;
attho);- see also dipika .
dipaka 1, mft-ika)n. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) illuminating;
making clear, explaining; what explains; Sadd 6,5*
2
(-af!l ... padaf!1); - ifc se e attha- (sv attha ); - 2. (m.)
a light, a lamp; Ja V 161,9· (okkam iva ti -af!l viya, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dipaf!1); - ifc see dat:~<,la-; - see also
1 diyate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dlyate, Wg § 26:25], decays,
dipika .
2
dipaka , m. (or mfn.) [?], a decoy (a tamed animal or bird
used to lure others); Ja II 161,12 (eko sakut:~a1uddako
ekaf!1 °-kakkaraf!l adaya); III 64,18 (eko sakut:~iko ekaf!l
0
-tittiraf!l gahetva sughu sikkhapetva panpre
pakkhipitva pa!ijaggati, so taf!1 araññaf!1 netva tassa
saddenagatagate tittire gahetva ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dipa-); V 376,s· (migena ti sughusikkhapitena
0
-migena ... pakkhina ti 0 -pakkhina); Ps II 85,11
(
0
-migaf!1); Th-a II 17,27 (vltaf!1SO ti -sakut:~o).
0
2 2
dipaka3 , m. [dipa + ka ], a little island; an island; Ja II
102,26 (samuddamajjhe ekaf!l -af!l gantva); IV 165,14
(sattatalappamat:~a sagara-ümi -af!l pi vahamana
agañchi); 291,7· (dipe ti -amhi); Sp 1048,2 (sace anto
nadiyaf!l -o hoti); Mhv 6:44; - ifc see antara-.
dipana, mf(-a, -I) and n., dipana, dipani..f [from dipeti;
cf S. dipana], illustrating, explaining; making manifest;
Mil145,21 (na tassa -aya hetu va karat:~af!l va atthi tasma
so pañho !hapaniyo); Vism 429,3o (tatrayaf!l -a); Spk III
302,26 (dhammavinayassa -af!1); Pj I 17,7 (bhedadinaf!1
ayaf!l -a); II 398,21 (pubbe kenaci karat:~ena parihapitassa
atthassa -ena); Nidd-a I 4,2 (kasana -a sailkasana);
Pa!is-a45,16 (pakasanata 0 -ta desanata); 390,13 (jotane ti
atthadinaf!1 -e); - ifc see apara- (sv apara\ taf!1dipani
(sv ta[d]), pañcagatidipani (sv pañca), paramatthadipani
(sv parama); - duddipana, mfn., hard to explain,
dijficult to make clear; Sv 723,29; Ps II 364,25;
Vibh-a 49,33 (anattalakkhal)af!l apaka!af!l andhakaraf!l ...
duppa!ivijjhaf!l -af!l duppaññapanaf!1).
dipi(n) 1, mfn. [cf S. dipin], making clear; proclaiming;-
1 diyana, diyyana, n. [from diyati], the being given; ?
ifc see dasavatthuka- (sv dasa ).
dipi(n) 2 , dipi, m. [S. dvipin], a panther, a leopard;
Abh 372; V in I 220,10 (luddaka . . . -if!l hantva);
III 151,10 (-Inaf!1 va asayo hoti); A Ili 101,31 (vajehi
samagaccheyyaf!1 sihena va vyagghena va -ina va ... );
Th 1113 (-lhi vyagghehi purakkhato); Ja I 342,14 (pubbe
-ino eJake khadanti); li 110,11* (n' etaf!1 slhassa naditaf!l
na vyagghassa na -ino); IV 495,22* (siha ca vyaggha ca
atho pi -iyo ); VI 61 ,3* (ajinamhi haññate -I); Ap 17,7
(siha vyaggha ca -I ca acchakokataracchayo);
Sadd 184,7* (bodhi -i pati hari).
2
dipika, m. [dlpi(n) + ka ], a panther, a leopard; Ja III
479,27 (ekaf!l ejikaf!l ... disva eko -o khadissami nan ti
dvare aghasi); Mil 369,9 ( -assa dve ailgani gahetabbani
ti); Vism 270,16* (yatha pi -o nama nillyitva gal)hati
mige).
dipika\ f [ts], a light, a lamp; Abh 795; Sv 623,36
!rajantepure ukkahi va -ahi va kiñci kara!)lyam na hoti);
PsI 175,7 (-a ukka ti vuccati) = Bv-a 144,29; - ifc see
1
dal)<,la-, dat:~<,laka-;- see also dlpaka .
2
dipika ,f [from dlpi(n)], ( covered with) a panther-skin; ?
V in I 198, 19* (in uddana: slhavyaggha ca -a; cf 186,2o:
407 du
dlpicammaparikkha!a upahanayo dharenti); - see also
dipa3.
Mil 67,28 (sihiniyo pi vyagghiniyo pi -iyo pi); 368,23
( -iya ekaf!l ailgaf!l gahetabban ti); Dhp-a I 48,9 ( -i hutva
nibbatti).
1
dipeti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofdippati qv.
diyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of deti qv.
perishes; Dhatup 404 (di khaye); Dhatum 648;
Sadd 480,2o (di khaye; -ate dino adinavo);
pp dina, mfn., poor, miserable; base, mean; timid;
Abh 739 (daliddo ca -o); Pv 20:2 (gahapati a<,l<,lhako -o;
Pv-a 107,6: -o ti nihinacitto adanajjhasayo); Ja VI 375,s•
(uddhare -am attanaf!1; 375,9·: -an ti duggataf!l attanaf!1);
Ap 485,24 (tena sokena -o 'smi); Pv-a 260,1 (kapa!)O ti
-o); Sv 929,6 (na appamadena na-enana gabbhitena ti
attho, Be so; Ce na gabbitena ti; Ee na apamadena na
ditena na gabbitena ti; Se na dinnena na vambhitena ti);
Saddh 78 (daJiddiyaf!1 ca 0 -ttaf!1); 324 (-af!l yacakaf!1);
Sadd 480,2o (-o ti parikkhit:~añatidhanadibhavena
dukkhito); - --tara, mfn., quite wretched; Mi1406,zo;
- --mana, mfn., distressed in mind, dejected; D 11
202,26 (--mana, Be, Ce so; Ee dinamana; Se ninnamana);
- see also adlnamanasa below; - --manasa, mfn.,
distressed in mind; Ap 559,19 (anatha --manasa); -
neg. adinamanasa, mfn., S V 74,9 (Be, Ce so; Ee adina-;
Se adinna-; Spk III 146,1: domanassavasena adinacitto,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adina- ); - --vadana, mfn., sad-faced;
Ap 566,3 (sokaga -a assunetta rudammukha); -
adina, mfn., not mean; not timid; Th 173 (adlno vahate
dhuraf!l); - adinakhattiyakula, n., a noble khattiya
family; DI 115,32 (ucca kula pabbajito adinakhattiya-
kula, possibly so read ? Ee adlna-; Be, Ce asambhinna-;
Se abhinna-) = Mil 167,1o (Ee adlna-; Be, Ce, Se
asambhinna khattiyakula); - adinamanasa, mfn., not
distressed; cheeiful; Th 243; - see also adinava, adina,
diniya.
Sv 920,zs CO-vasena danaf!1, Ee so; Be, Se diyyana-; Ce
diyyana- ).
diyanaka, diyyanaka, mfn. [from diyati], being given;
0
what is given;? Sp 1268,1o (pa!ipade -danaf!l, Ce so; Be
diyyanakadanaf!1; E e diyamanaka-, Se diyamanaka- );
Mp II 159,24 (diyyanakavasena danani, deyyadhammass'
etam namam).
diya~anaka: mfn. [diyamana + ki], being given;?
Sp 1268,10 (pa!ipade 0 -danaf!l, Se so; Ee diyamanaka-;
Be diyyanakadanaf!1; Ce diyanakadanaf!1).
du\ see sv du(s).
du 2, [iic for dvi qv; BHS id.], two;- 0 -v-addhato, ind. on
both sides; ? on the two roads; ? Vv 64: 19
(uyyanabhümya ca -ato !hita, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
duvaghito; V v-a 281,11: -ato ti dvlhi addhapassehi,
dubhato ca !hita ti pi pa!hanti so yev' attho, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee hatthapassehi); - 0 -gui_la, 0 -ggu!)a, mfn., see
dvigu!)a (sv dvi); - 0 -jivha, dujjivha, mfn. and m., see
-nidhura, 0 -nlvara, m.pl., two
0
dvijivha (sv dvi); -
bracelets; Ja VI 64,23* (imasmif!1 samat:~a hatthe
pa!imukka -a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dunivara; 65,1·: dve
du
valayani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee valaya); -
0
-patta, mfn.
and n. [du + paqa], of a double thickness; a double
thickness of material; a robe of double material; V in I
290,3 (samantato -a!11 bhavissati majjhe ekacciyan ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dupattaf!1); Vism 109,5 (nivasana-
parupanaf!1 ... ekaparta!11 va -af!1 va); Sp 647,23 (-assa
ekasmif!1 pataJe chidde va jate, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dupatassa); 1108,27 (-al!'l datuf!1 vaqati); Sv 198,8
(sitalukassa [c1varaJ11] ghanaJ11 -a!11 [sappayaf!1], Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dupataJ11); 1012,2 (ettakaf!1 -assa bhavissati
ettakaf!1 ekapagassa ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dupatassa);
Ps II 167,3 (thero -ena saddhif!1 mahaclvaraJ11 attano
hatthagataJ11 akasi); - 0 -pal}.J}.a, mfn., with two leaves;
S I 170,21 * (tila khettasmi papaka ekap;u:¡lfa -a ca, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e papika ... dvipanna); - 0 -pada, mfn.,
consisting of two padas; Ps II 197,18 (-a!11 pi tipadaf!1 pi
catuppadaf!1 pi pañhaf!1 karonti); - see also dvipada
2
(sv dvi); - 0 -putta , mfn., with two sons; SI 170,28*
1
(vidhava sattadhitaro ekaputta -a, Be, Ce, Ei, Se so; Ee
dviputta);- 0 -matta, mfn., amounting to two; Mi182,24
(-ani bhante yojanasatiinl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
2 vasena ca); - 0 -vedana, dvivedana, mfn., connected
dvimattani); - 0 -masika, mfn. [from du + masa ], of
two months growth; or dumasikaf!1, ind., within two
months; ? V in II 107,3 (na bhikkhave digha kesa
dharetabba . . . anuJanaml bhikkhave -a!11 va
duvail.gulaf!1 va ti; Sp 1200,22foll.: sace kesa
antodvemase dvaiJ.gulaJ11 papulfanti antodvemase yeva
chinditabba, dvaiJ.gulaJ11 atikkametuf!1 na vagati, sace pi
na digha dvimasato ekadivasaf!1 pi atikkametuf!1 na
labhati yeva, E e, Se so; Be ... dvail.gulehi atikkametuf!1
na vaqati ... dvemasato ... atikkametuf!1 na vaqati yeva;
Ce ... dvail.gulehi atikkametuf!1 ... dvemasato ... ); -
2 kicche
see also dvemasika (sv dve ); - 0 -mülaka, mfn., see
dvimiilaka (sv dvi); - 0
-ratta3 , n., see dviratta (sv dvi);
1
-
0
-vagga, m. and mfn. [du + vagga ], a group of two;
consisting of a group of two; Vin 1 58,33 (bhikkhü -ena
pi ti vaggena pi g;u:¡ena upasampadenti); Il 169,1 5
(anujanami bhikkhave -assa mañcaf!1);
0
-Val}.l}.hageha, n., a twice enlarged dwelling;? Sv 860,4
(sa suddhapasado na sobhatl ti taf!1 parivaretva pañca
--satani pañca cü)apasadasatani . . . karapesi; Sv-pt Ili
45,19 foll.: niyühani bahüni nlharitva katabbasenasanani
-anl ti vadanti, majjhe gabbho samantato anupariyaya-
patho ti evaf!1 dvikkhattuf!1 va9<;1hetva katasenasanani
-ani, Ee so; Be anupariyayato ti) =F Ps II 296,33
(dvikütageha-);- 0 -Vassa, mfn., oftwo years' standing;
one who has been ordainedfor two years; Vin I 59,4 (-o
ekavassaf!1 saddhiviharikaf!1 adaya); 59,21 (kativasso si
tvaf!1 bhikkhü ti -o 'haf!1 bhagava ti); Sp 1085,7; - see
also dvivassa (sv dvi); - 0 -vassaka, mfn., two-year-
old;? Sadd 287,14*;- 0 -Vassika, mfn., l. of two years'
standing; one who has been ordainedfor two years; Ja II
449,16 (ayasma Upaseno -o ekavassikena
saddhiviharikena saddhif!1);- 2. being at the age oftwo
years; Nidd-a I 249,11 (-'-adisu, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
dvevassikad!su); - see also dvivassika (sv dvi),
2 -ehi); 984,13 (evaJ11 ayaJ11 -o vibhatto); Spk I 19,27 (satta
dvevassika (sv dve ); - 0 -Vijatii, (m)fln)., (a woman)
who has given birth twice; S 1 125,2o (maradh!taro
ekasataf!1 ekasataJ11 --Va1f1fasataf!1 abhinimminitva); Ja I
79,13 (kumariyo avijata sakif!1vijata -a majjhimitthiyo
408 duka
mahitthiyo ca);- 0 -Vidha, dvividha, mfn., oftwo kinds;
twofold; Ja Ili 195,5· (SllaJ11 ... -aJ11 Carittaviirittavasena);
V 155,26* (-a jata uraja); Mil 2,21 (Milindapañho
lakkh;u:¡apañho vimaticchedanapañho ti -o); Vism 144,29
(-al!'l pi sukhaJ11 paripüreti kayikaf!1 ca cetasikaf!1 ca);
Sp 228,1 (-al!'l hi sikkhapadaJ11 lokavajjaJ11 pa1fl,latti-
vajjaf!1 ca); Sv 15,31 (sabbaJ11 pi buddhavacanaf!1 ...
dhammavinayavasena -af!1); Spk Ili 118,29 (ratho ca
nam' esa -o hoti yodharatho alail.kararatho ti); Nidd-a I
37,2o (-alli jivhalli rasaJ11 janati);- -ena, adv., in two
ways; as of two kinds; in a twofold way; D Il 278,1
(somanassaf!1 p' ahaf!1 ... -en a vadami sevitabbaf!1 pi
asevitabbaf!1 pi; Sv 724,23: -ena ti dvividhena dv!hi
koqhaseh! ti attho); A IV 365,25 (puggalo pi avuso -ena
veditabbo sevitabbo pi asevitabbo pi); Nidd I 79,28 (-en a
mano attukkaJ11sanamano paravambhanamano );
Vibh 137,1 (-ena bhavo atthi kammabhavo atthi
uppattibhavo; cfVibh-a 183,J4foll.: -ena ti dv!hi akarehi
pavattito ti attho, atha va -ena ti paccatte kar;u:¡a-
vacanaf!1, -o ti vuttaf!1 hoti); Pv-a 2,6 (idaJ11 hi Petavatthu
-ena pavattaf!1 atthuppattivasena ca pucchavissajjana-
with two feelings; Sp 530,12 (idaf!1 sikkhapadaf!1 ... -a!11
sukhamajjhattadvayena ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dvivedanaf!1); - 0 -hetuka, mfn., see dvihetuka (sv dvi);
- se e also dubhato.
2
-du3, mfn. [cf du1foti and S. druh], injuring; hurtful to;-
ifc see mitta-.
1
du(s), du , [S. dus], (befare vowels usually dur-); a prefix
to nouns, adjectives (adverbs, verbs) implying bad, evil,
difficult, hard; badly, hardly; inferior, Abh 1169;
Sadd 885,28* (asobh;u:¡e abhave ca kucchite
virüpatadimhi dusaddo
asamiddhiyaJ11
sampavattati); Vism 494,27 (du iti ayaf!1 saddo kucchite
dissati); Dhp-a II 6,9 (du iti sa iti na iti so iti ime sadde
assosif!1); Patis-a 469,15 (u dü ti dve dve upasagga honti);
- dukara, m., the syllable du; Ja Ili 43,18 (eko -am eva
bh;u:¡i eko sakaraf!1 eko nakaraJ11 eko sokaraf!1); 47,1
( -al!'l vatva nimuggasatto eval!'l vattukiimo ahosi
dujjlvitarp. ... ); Spk I 142,18; - dunnama, n., the
expression du(s); ? a description as bad; ? Ps II 334,16
(duppañño ti ettha paññaya dunnama n' atthi, appañño
nippañño ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se duttha!11 nama);
As 394,2 (dusslla ti s!lassa dunnamarp. n' atthi, nisslla ti
attho, Be so; Ce, Ee dunniimaf!1 nama n' atthi; Se dughu
nama).
1
du-adhivasiya, mfn. [du + fpp of adhivaseti], hard to
bear patiently; Spk I 36,10 (duttitikkhan ti dukkhamaJ11
-af!1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se du-adhivasanaJ11).
du-aropita, mfn., se e sv arohati.
2
duka, m.n. [cf du ], a set of two, a collection of two, a
dyad; a section consisting of sets of two; Vin V 119,15
(-a niqhita, Be, E e so; Ce, Se -a!11 nighitaJ11); M III 1,19
(mayaJ11 ... antevas!labhitva pathamaJ11 evarp. gaJ!apema
ekaJ11 ekakaJ11 dve -a tllfi tika ... ); Dukap 283,3o
(imanlhi -e); Vism 410,4 (imasmil!'l -e); Sv 983,8 (chahi
-a dassita); Pj I 245,6 (cattari -ani); Vibh-a 465,6 (kodho
ca upanallo ca ti adayo agharasa -a); ifc see
enllantara- (sv cuila\ -
0
-nipata, m., a section
dukara
consisting of sets of two; A I 100,25 (-o samatto, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be --paji nitthita); It 44,19 (-o nitthito, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e -a111 ninhita111); Th p. 28,13* (gatha -amhi navuti
e' eva anha ca); Ja 11 359,4 (paccuppannavatthul!l -e
kathitam eva);- see also dvika.
dukiira, m., see sv du(s).
dukula in Ee at S III 145,24, and in Ee, Se at Ap 2,to,
Sp 319,5 and 1104,12,15, is wr fordukiila- (Be, Ce so).
duküla, n. and mfn. [ts], (n.) very fine cloth (made from
the bark of the dukii1a plant); (mfn.) made of dukii1a
cloth; Abh 291 (khoma111 -a111 koseyya111); Ap 2,1o
(kamba1a -a clna, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr duku1a;
Ap-a 106,5: 0 -panehi kata, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -parehi);
Ja VI 72,1 (jatakkhal)e e' assa -ena pariggahitatta);
Sp 1104,15 (-a111 saJ?,assa [anu1om~], Be, Ce so; E e, Se
wr duku1al!l); Ps III 214,18 (gimhike ...
bhummattharaJ?,ad!ni -mayani vattanti); Spk I 353,3
0
(ek~sa111 uttarly~ -a111 katva); Da!h 5:27; -
-Cumbataka, -cumba!a, n., a roll of dukiila cloth;
0 0
Ja 11 21,26 (putta111 ... -e nipajjapetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-cumba!e); Sv 437,27 (manussa -ena pa!iggahesmp);
Ps III 24,23 (gandhodakena nahapetva -ena vodak~
katva); Spki 319,7 (mata puttal!l··· -e katva añke
sayapetva nisinna hoti); Th-a 11 221,11 (0 -cumba!e
nipajjapetva); - 0 -pafa, m.n., a garment of dukiila
cloth; Sv 437,22 (-a111 yava padanta parupitva, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee 0 -panal!l) = Ps IV 183,9 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
0
-panal!l);- patfa, m., a strip ofdukii1a cloth; a turban
of dukiila cloth; Ap-a 106,5 (-ehi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-pa!ehi); Mhv 23:38 (s!Sal!l -ena verhayitva); -
o -vattika, mfn., with a wick of dukiila fibre; Mhv 30:94;
- o -sandiina, mfn., with halters of dukii1a cloth; ? with
coverings of dukiila cloth; ? D 11 188,5 (caturaslti dhenu-
sahassani ... -ani, so read? E e -sandanani; Be, Se
0
duhasandanani; Ce dhuvasandanani) = S Ili 145,24 (Be
so; Ce, Se -sandanani; Ee dukulasandanani; cfSpk 11
0
325,19: 0 -santharani) =A IV 393,25 (Be 0 -sandhanani; Ce
0
-sandassanani; Ee 0 -santhanani; Se 0 -SaJ?.!hanani;
cfMp IV 184,17 foll.: tasa111 pana dheniina111 ...
pitthiya111 varadukiilaparuta111 ... bandhi111su).
dukkaip in Ee at Ap 387,12 is wr for dukkha111 (Be, Ce, Se
so).
dukkata, mfn. and n., se e sv ka!a3.
dukkara, mfn. and n. [S., BHS du~kara], (what is) hard to
do; difficult to peiform or practise; (it is) hard, a
difficult thing; Vin I 247,3o (na kho t~ Ananda -~
tathagatena yatha Rojo Mallo imasmi111 dhammavinaye
pas!deyya ti); MI 16,31 (-a111 paviveka111); SI 7,13* (-~
duttitikkh~ ca avyattena ca samaññam); IV 260,17 foll.
(kil!l . . . imasmi111 dhammavinaye -an ti); A I 286,4
(bhikkhu duddada111 dadati -~ karoti dukkham~
khamati); Ud 61,1• (sukara111 sadhuna sadhu sadhu
papena -~); Sn 429 (duggo maggo padhanaya -o
durabhisambhavo; Pj 11 387,22: dukkhitakayacittena
kattabbatta -o); Th! 463 (pabbajja -a); Ja V 459,12 (ma
bhayi na -an ti); VI 508,22* (ta111 ve deva pasa111santi
-~ hi karoti sa); Ap 301,9 (acari111 -a111 bahu111);
Mil 143,17 (aya111 . . . mahajanapado . .. -o tata
tavatakena balena dharetu111); 347,17 (-am ...
buddhabal~ upadassayitu111); Vism 300,13 (tadise hi
409 dukkha
puggale na -a hoti mettabhavana ti); Sp 248,18 ( 0 -tal!l
dasseti); Sv 396,2 (maya . . . vividhani -ani karontena
paramiyo piirita); Ud-a 1,21 * (kiñcapi -a katu111
anhasal!lVal)J?.ana maya); Th!-a 257,34 (puññakammassa
0
-tta); Mhv 37:101 (katva kammani citrani -ani); -
0
-kiirika, mfn., who does what is hard to do; Ps III
294,14 (-a kho pana matapitaro) f:. Spk I 350,1; -
0
-kiirikii..f. [dukkara + karika2], doing what is hard to
do; practice of extreme austerities; M I 81,31 (taya -aya
najjhagam~ uttarirp manussadhamma alamariyañiiJ?,a-
dassanavisesam); 93,3 (pap~ kammarp . . . imaya
karukaya -aya nijjaretha); SI 103,8 (mutto vat' amhi
taya -aya); Ja I 67,9; Ap 429,25 (katva -~); Kv 287,23
(bodhisatto -~ akasl ti); Mil284,23foll. (sabbe va
bodhisatta -arp karonti udahu Gotamen' eva
bodhisattena -a kata ti); Ap-a 72,3o (ay~ -a nama
bodhaya maggo na hot! ti); - 0
-tara, mfn., campar.,
harder to do; more di.fficult; D 11 131,6 (katamarp nu kho
-arp); MI 438,19 (et~ desak~ sadhuk~
manasikarohi ma te paccha -arp ahosl ti); Ja 111 339,3•;
Mil 87,15; - atidukkara, mfn. and n., (what is) very
hard to do; a very difficult thing; Ja IV 236,24 (maha te
pariccago -arp taya kata111): Ap 551 ,1s (bahu111 ca
dukkara111 kamm~ katarp me -arp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
dukkhara111 .. . atidukkhar~); Vism 126,28 (tassa
uppadan~ nama -~); Sp 1,5* (appameyyarp kalarp
karonto -ani); Ps III 293,11 (brahmacariyarp -a111); Pj I
11,11• (kiñcapi -a vaJ?,J?,ana);- sudukkara, mfn. and n.,
id.; A IV 135,7 (dukkararp bhagava -arp bhagava ti);
Ja III 12,9* (aka loke -arp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee lokesu
dukkararp); Ap 85,26 (-~ tena kata111 yo me puppharp
adasi so); Vism 522,29* (duddasa caturo dhamma
deseturp ca -a); Cp-a 289,23 (-ehi pi mahabodhisatta-
caritehi).
dukkha, dukha, mfn. and n. [S. dul).kha; BHS also dukha],
l. (mfn.) (i) painful; unpleasant; bringing pain or
distress; uneasy, uncomfortable; not what one wants;
wrong; Vin I 10,14 (attakilamathanuyogo -o anariyo
anatthasarphito); 188,7 (yassa pacta va -a pada va
phalita); IV 129,1 (sace kho Upali lekh~ sikkhissati
añguliyo -a bhavissanti); D I 36,32 (kama hi bho anicca
-a vipariJ?,amadhamma); 196,6 (-o ca kho viharo ti); MI
302,34/oll. (yarp ... kayik~ va cetasikarp va -a111
asat~ vedayitarp ay~ -a vedana); SI 27,17 (bhusa
sud~ bhagavato vedana vattanti sañrika vedana -a
tibba khara ka!uka asata amanapa); IV 51,25 (vedayita111
sukh~ va-~ va adukkhamasukha111 va); A I 157,5 (na
cetasik~ -a111 domanass~ parisa111vedeti); 11 149,w
(-a pa!ipada dandhabhiñña); III 353,21' (da!iddiyarp -~
loke iJ?,adanam ca vuccati); Dhp 186 (appassada dukha
kama); 207 (-o ba!ehi sarpvaso ); Ud 21,6
(puranakammavipakaj~ -arp tipp~ khararp ka!uka111
vedanarp adhivasento; Ud-a 165,26: -an ti pacurajanehi
khamiturp asakkuJ?,eyy~, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
puthujjanehi); Th! 216 (-o itthibhavo akkhato
purisadammasarathina); Ja IV 118,27foll. (etani visadlni
dukkhavahanato -ani evarp pi kama -a t~ pana
kamadukkhal!l itarehi -ehi 0 -taran ti); 221,26* (-o vaso
araññasmirp); VI 552,29* (puttanarp hi vadho dukho)
quoted Sadd 628,12; Ap 271,2 (-o nirayasamphasso);
dukkha
Mil 69,2s (yesarp. na cchinna hatthapada janeyyurp. te
maharaja -arp. hatthapadacchedanan ti); Sv 897,3 (-an ti
dukkhayuttarp. dukkhamarp. va); Spk III 297,16 (-o ti
kal)takapassayaseyyadihi attamaral)ehi dukkhavaho );
Ud-a 211,5 (dukkharp. hoti dukkharp. avahatl ti attho);-
acc. adv. dukkharp., in discomfort; uneasily; in pain; M I
192,15 (pamatto samano -arp. viharati); SI 83,31 * (-arp.
seti parajito); A I 137,19 (pari~ahehi pari<;layhamano -arp.
sayeyya ti); II 76,1 * (sabbarp. ragharp. -arp. seti raja ce
hoti adhammiko, Be, Se so; Ce, E e dukharp.); III 251,14
(-arp. supati -arp. patibujjhati); Ud 41 ,s (titthiyehi
titthiyasavakehi akii)I)O -arp. na phasu viharati); It 22,20
(dvihi bhikkhave dhammehi samannagato bhikkhu dighe
va dhamme -arp. viharati); Ja I 215,19 (pal)l)asala me
da<;l<;lha -arp. vasami ti); 413,13* (-arp. vasati verisu);
Vism 279,1o (tiyamarattirp. sambadhe okase -arp.
vutthagogai)O, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dukkhappattagogal)o);
311,32 (yatha ses a jana samparivattamana kakacchamana
-arp. supanti); (ii) (used to characterise all
experience) unsatisfactory; bringing distress or trouble;
Vin I 10,26foll. (idarp. kho pana bhikkhave -arp.
ariyasaccarp. jati pi -a jara pi -a vyadhi pi -a maral)arp.
pi -arp. appiyehi sampayogo -o piyehi vippayogo -o
yarp. p' iccharp. na labhati tarp. pi -arp. sailkhittena
pañcupadanakkhandha pi -a; see Nidd-a 1 70,1sfoll.:
kasma pan' esa jati -a ti ce, anekesarp. -anarp.
vatthubhavato, anekani hi -ani seyyathidarp. 0 -dukkharp.
viparil)amadukkharp. ... ); MI l38,12joll. (yarp.
pananiccarp. -arp. va tarp. sukharp. va ti -arp. bhante);
Dhp 117 (-o papassa uccayo; Dhp-a III 6,3: idhaloke pi
paraloke pi -am eva avahatl ti); Vibh 70,7 (cakkhurp.
aniccarp. -arp. anatta viparil)amadhammarp.);
Vism 499,13foll.; Dhp-a IIl 400,9 (yatha hi appamattako
gütho duggandho eva appamattako pi bhavo -o ti); -
2. (n.) (i) pain; distress; trouble; Abh 89 ( -arp. ca
kasirarp. kiccharp.); Vin I 82,38 (bhagavati me bhante
pabbajite anappakarp. -arp. ahosi); III13,6 (na tvarp. tata
Sudinna kiñci -assa janasi); 20,36 (maral)arp. va
nigaccheyya maral)amattarp. va -arp.); 105,29 (tesarp. tarp.
assa digharattarp. ahitaya -aya); SI 30,1o* (upenti
Roruvarp. ghorarp. cirarattarp. -am anubhavanti); 132,29*
(jatassa maral)arp. hoti jato -ani passati); III86,31
(sukharp. pi vediyati -arp. pi vediyati adukkhamasukharp.
pi vediyati); IV 239,1o (pañc' imani bhikkhave
matugamassa avel)ikani -ani yani matugamo
paccanubhoti aññatr' eva purisehi); SI 23,4* (tarp.
namarüpasmirp. asajjamanarp. akiñcanarp. nanupatanti -a)
= Dhp 221; S IV 207,16* (yo sukharp. -ato adda); 210,5
(visarp.yutto -asma ti); A IIl 269,27 (aho vata no -arp. ye
mayarp. evarüpehi puggalehi saddhirp. sarp.vasama ti);
Dhp 1 (tato narp. -am anveti); 69 (yada ca paccatí paparp.
atha balo -arp. nigacchati); 83 (sukhena phuttha athava
dukhena); 371 (ma kandi -am idan ti <;layhamano);
Ud 40,25 (api ca me sise thokarp. -an ti); 51,14* (sace
bhayatha -assa sace vo -am appiyarp., so read with Be,
Ce, Se); 92,3 (yesarp. ... satarp. piyani satarp. tesarp. -ani);
It 89,16 (otil)l)' amha jatiya jaraya maral)ena sokehi
paridevehi -ehi domanassehi upayasehi); Sn 574
(maccanarp. idha jivitarp. kasirarp. ca parittarp. ca tarp. ca
-ena sarp.yutarp.); 728 (upadhinidana pabhavanti -a);
410 dukkha
Vv80:9 (svaharp. ano 'mhi -ena pJ!ito); Th551
(paññasahito naro idha api -esu sukhani vindati); Ja I
254,1 (kirp. me -ena anubhütena); III 14,23* (sukhe ca -e
ca bhavanti tulya); 296,22* (tasmim mate -am
anappakarp. me; 297,4·: mama kayikacetasikarp.
mahantarp. -arp. bhavissatl ti); IV 46,15* (anekavyadhihi
-ena phugho); 331,16' (-ena abhitunno aturo hutva);
V 113,14* (alarp. mitte sukhapeturp. amittanarp. dukhaya
ca, Be, Ce, so; Ee, Se dukkhaya); 173,3* (etadisarp. -am
aharp. titikkharp.); Ap 387,12 (atho cetasikarp. -arp. hadaye
me na vijjati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dukkarp.); 467,14
(kayo ... puñjo -assa kevalo); 594,19 (na ca -esu
dummana); Bv 2:10 (yatha pi -e vijjante sukharp. nama
pi vijjati); Cp 3:15:3 (ye me -arp. upaharanti ye ca denti
sukharp. mama); Nett 12,!3foll.; Mill11,7
(pariyantakatarp. ca maharaja Devadattassa -arp.); 172,2o
(pharusa pi tathagatassa vaca na kassaci -arp. uppadetí
ti); 314,4 (na hi maharaja nibbanarp. -ena missarp.
ekantasukharp. nibbanarp.); Vism 165,sfoll. (sukhassa ca
pahana -assa ca pahana . . . catuttharp. jhanarp.
upasampajja viharati . . . kayikasukhassa ca kayika-
dukkhassa ca pahana); 461,18 (aninha-
phoghabbanubhavanalakkhanarp. -arp. sampayuttanarp.
milapanarasarp. kayikabadhapaccupaghanarp. kayindriya-
padaghanarp.); 503,24 foil. ( -arp. nama kayikarp. -arp., tarp.
kayapi~analakkhal)arp. .. . -arp. pana o -dukkhato
manasadukkhavahanato ca . . . domanassarp. nama
manasarp. -arp.); Mp II 68,12 (paccuppanne
aharapariyetthimü1akarp. -an ti); Sadd 327,27 ( -arp.
vighatarp. agharp. kileso); 397,27 (dughu khanati
kayikacetasikasukhan ti -arp.); - ifc see anutthunana-,
anubandhana-, uppajjana-, uppajjanaka-;
instr. dukkhena, adv., with d(fficulty; painfully; hardly,
barely; Ja I 147,27 (sammasambuddhassa santike
mayharp. pabbajja ya ca pana me -ena laddha); 194,15
(mayharp. mata duggata marp. puttatthane thapetva -ena
posesi); IIl 246,2o (so tesarp. gul)agul)arp. ajanantanarp.
manussanarp. santike -ena vasitva); 424,21 (bhatirp. katva
-ena jivikarp. kappesi); V 435,8* (vittarp. vinaseti -ena
sambhatarp.); Mi128l,26 (evarp. kho maharaja -ena
Vessantaro raJa brahmal)assa puttadanarp. adasi);
Cp3:3:2 (-ena jivito 1addho);- (ii)(as a term
characterising all experience; its ending is nibbana),
distress, trouble; Vin I 12,25 (cara brahmacariyarp.
samma -assa antakiriyaya); 231 ,9* (ucchinnarp. mülarp.
-assa n' atthi dani punabbhavo); D 1 54,13 (bale ca
pal)<;iite ca sandhavitva sarp.saritva -ass' antarp.
karissanti); 110,7 (ya buddhanarp. samukkarp.sika
dhammadesana tarp. pakasesi -arp. samudayarp. nirodharp.
maggarp.); 156,15 (sakidagami hoti saki-d-eva imarp.
lokarp. agantva -ass' antarp. karoti); II 123,11 * (-ass'
antakaro sattha cakkhuma parinibbuto); MI 47,2s
(avijjarp. pahaya vijjarp. uppadetva ditthe va dhamme
-ass' antakaro hoti); S 1 195,s (munirp. -assa paragurp.);
214,26* (katharp. su -am acceti); Dhp 338 (tal)hanusaye
anühate nibbattati -am idarp. punappunarp.); Sn 32
(jatimaral)assa paraga -ass' antakara bhavamase);
Th 227 (susukharp. vata nibbanarp. . . . asokarp. virajarp.
khemarp. yattha -arp. nirujjhati); 732 (na so muccati
-amha gandhesu adhimucchito ); Patis I 41,3 (katama
dukkha
sammadi~~hi, -e ñfu).arp ... ) ; Mil 31,29 foll. (kinti
maharaja idarp -arp nirujjheyya aññarp ca -arp na
uppajjeyya ti etadattha maharaja amhakarp pabbajja);
Vism 513,1* (-am eva hi na koci dukkhito); 692,16 (-al)1
hi visal)1 amatarp nibbanan ti); Patis-a 54,31 (du iti ayarp
saddo kucchite dissati . . . kharpsaddo pana tucche ...
tasma kucchitatta tucchatta ca -an ti vuccati); Mhv 1:5
(no jino pura lokarp -a pamoceturp bodhaya pa!).idhirp
aka); - ifc see vaga-, viparil)iima-, sai!khara-; -
dukkho in Ee at Sv 1055,17 is wr for dakkho (Be, Ce, Se
so); - 0 iidhivaha, mfn., bringing, producing dukkha;
A I 6,13 (-arp ... cittal)1, Be so; Ee, Se 0 adhivaharp; Ce
o• -avaharp; Mp l 53,12/oll.: dukkharp adhivahati iiharatl
ti -arp, 0 adhiviihan ti pi patho . . . jati-adlnarp
adhivahanato -al)1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dukkharp avahati
iiharat! ti dukkhavaharp . . . jati-adlnarp avahanato
dukkhavaharp [Ee dukkhavaharp]); - 0 iidhiviiha, mfn.,
l. bringing, producing, dukkha; S IV 70,4 (phassayatana
adanta ... asal)1vuta -a honti; Spk II 38l,ls: nerayikadi-
bhedal)1 adhikadukkharp avahanaka honti);- 2. difficult
to bring or lead towards; ? A I 6,13 ( -arp ... cittarp, E e,
Se so; Be 0 adhivahal)1; Ce 0 '-avahal)1; Mp I 53,13foll.:
-an ti pi patho, tass' attho, lokuttarapadakajjhanadi-
ariyadhammabhimukharp dukkhena adhiviih!yati
pes!yat! ti -arp ... ariyadhammadhigamaya duppesanato
-al)1); - 0 iinubhavana, n., the suffering of pain or
distress; Ja IV 3,2 (-'-atthaya); V IO,IO (diva -al)1 pana
maya katapapass' eva nissando ); Mil 181 ,2o;
0
iipagamatte in Ee, Se at It-a II 8,26 and in Ee at It-a II
8,29 is prob. wr for dukkhapagamamatte (Be, Ce so);-
0
iibhikÍJ}J;13, mfn., overwhelmed by distress, by dukkha;
It89,17 (-a 0 -pareta, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 '-otil)l)a; It-all
113,30: etehi jati-ad!hi Otil)l)a 0 ' -Otil)l)a, eds so); -
0
iivakkkanta, mfn., entered, overcome, by dukkha; S II
173,26; III69,15;- 0 '-iivaha, mfn., bringing dukkha; A I
6,13 (-arp ... cittarp, Ce so; Be 0 adhivahal)1; E e, Se
0
adhiviiharp; Mp I 53,12/oll.: dukkharp avahati aharat! ti
-al)1 ... jati-ad!narp avahanato -al)1, Ce so; E e -al)1 .. .
o• -aviiharp; Be, Se adhivahati iiharat! ti
0
adhivahal)1 .. .
jati-ad!narp adhivahanato adhivahal)1); Th 1094 (-arp
0
tal)halatarp .. . chetva); Dhp-a 1 240,12; Th-a I 140,1o
(--tta); - o• -indriya, n., the faculty of pain, of distress;
D III 239,13 (sukhindriyarp -al)1 ... ); Patis I 7,28;
Vibh 123,18 (katamal)1 -al)1); Vism 166,5;- 0 '-udraya,
o' -uddaya, o' -udaya, mfn., resulting in pain or distress,
in dukkha; M 1 415,3o (akusalarp idarp kayakammal)1
-arp 0 -vipakan ti); A 1 97,31 (dhamma -a; Mp II 163,13:
-a ti -va~~hika, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dukhuddaya ti):
0
II 72,4* (kammarp savighatarp dukhudrayarp, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -arp; Mp III 103,2: dukhudrayan ti, Be, Ce so; Ee
dukhuddayan ti; Se -an ti); Pv 11:10 (kammani katvana
dukhudrayani, Ce, Ee so; Be dukhudrani; Se -ani;
Pv-a 60,11: dukhudrayan! ti 0 -vipakani, Ce so; Be, Se
dukhudran! ti; Ee o• -andriyan! ti); Ja V 117 ,8* (ma te asi
dukhudrayo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -o); Nidd 1 489,12
(akusalapakkho -o 0 -Vipako, Ce so; Be o• -uddayo; Ee,
Se 0 '-udayo); Patis li 79,12 (-arp kammarp); -
ofipasamana, mfn., extinguishing dukkha; Th 421; -
0
-m-esi(n), mfn., seeking, wishing for, distress; Ja IV
26,8* (amitta -ino; 26,21·: dukkharp icchanta); -
411 dukkha
o• -Otii}J}a,mfn., ente red, ove reo me, by dukkha; MI
192,7 (-o 0 -pareto) =Al 147,28 f. S III 93,1o (-a 0 -pareta,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -o) = It 89,17 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
abhikil)l)a); Th!-a 41,26 ( --taya); - o -kotthasika, mfn.,
associated with pain or distress; Ps II 81 ,9
(vighatapakkhiko ti -o); - 0
-kkhandha, m., the
agglomeration of dukkha; a mass of discomfort or
distress; Vin I 1,16 (evarp etassa kevalassa -assa
samudayo hoti): M 1 85,37; S III 93,11 (appeva nama
imassa kevalassa -assa antakiriya paññayetha ti); Th 78
(tassa me o -jatassa -o aparaddho ); Spk III 18,24 (tatr'
assa puttadararp posentassa sandiqhiko -o veditabbo
kalarp katva apaye nibbattassa samparayiko); -
0
-janana,mf(-l)n., producing distress; JaiV 175,16'
(tal)harp -irp; 175,17·: sakalavaqadukkhajananirp);
Nidd-a I 32,19; - 0 -tara, mfn., campar., more painful,
more distressing; bringing more trouble; Pv 36:50; Ja lll
161,15'; IV 118,19* (kama -a tato); VI 561,17*; -
o -tta, n., abstr., the being painful or difficult; D III
106,12; Vism 499,18; - 0 -tii,f [BHS duJ:¡khata], abstr.,
pain, distress, trouble; D III 216,22 (tisso -a
dukkhadukkhata sañkharadukkhata viparil)ama-
dukkhata); Vism 479,19; Dhp-a III 462,1 (gharavasassa
-al)1 pakasetukamo); - o -dukkha, n. a -dukkhata,f,
abstr., the trouble that is physical or mental pain or
distress; D III 216,22 (Sv 992,5: --ta ti o -bhüta dukkhata,
0
-vedanay' etarp namarp); Nidd I 17,15 (Nidd-a 1 70,24:
kayikacetasika dukkha vedana sabhavato ca namato ca
0
-tta -an ti vuccati; 71,9: -al)1 pana nippariyayadukkhan
ti vuccati); Vism 503,8 (soko . . . dukkho pana -ato
0
-vatthuto ca); Nidd-a I 74,7 (--tta);- 0 -niisanii,f (?),
the destruction of dukkha; Nidd-a 1 352,25 (sara!).a hontl
ti -a honti); 0
-nibbattaka, mfn. [dukkha +
nibbattaka 1], engendering pain or distress; Sv 909,27
(attano -al)1 viriyal)1 karoti); Nidd-a I 43,5;
0
-nirodha, m., the stopping, ceasing, ending, ofdukkha;
Vin 1 10,34 (idarp kho pana bhikkhave -al)1 ariyasaccal)1
yo tassa yeva ta!).haya asesaviraganirodho cago
patinissaggo mutti ana!ayo); III 5,25 (ayarp -o ti
yathabhütal)1 abbhaññasirp); D I 192,3 (ayal)1 -o ti ...
maya ekal)1siko dhammo desito paññatto); MI 191,6 (yo
imesu pañcas' upadanakkhandhesu chandaragavinayo
chandaragapahanal)1 so -o); Nidd I 292,1o (ekal)1 saccarp
vuccati -o nibbiinal)1); Vibh 103,8 (katamarp -o
ariyasaccal)1); Mil 334,2s; Vism 506,28 (samudaya-
nirodhena -o samudayanirodhena hi dukkharp nirujjhati
na aññatha); Spk II 367.12 (-o ti ta!).hiinandiya nirodhena
vaqadukkhassa nirodho); - 0
-nirodhagiimi(n), mfn.
1
[+ gami(n) ], leading to the ending of dukkha; Vin 1
10,36 (idal)1 kho pana bhikkhave -in! patipada
ariyasaccal)1 ayam eva ariyo a~thañgiko maggo); III 5,25
(ayal)1 -in! patipada ti yathabhütal)1 abbhaññasirp); DI
192,4 (ayal)1 -in! patipada ti ... maya ekarpsiko dhammo
desito paññatto); Vibh 104,34 (katamarp -in! patipada
ariyasaccal)1); It 104,4 (ayarp -in! patipada ti bhikkhave
janato passato asaviinal)1 khayo hoti); Mil 334,29; -
0
-nisajjii,f, sitting in discomfort; Vibh-a 106,13; -
0
-nuda, mfn., driving away distress; Ja VI 454,2o
(sukhavaho -o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -nüdo; 455,z·:
kayikacetasikasukhaiJ1 avahami dukkhaiJ1 nudemi);
dukkhati
Mil355,16 (dhutaguryaJTI ... -aJTI); - 0 -pakkhika, mfn.
[dukkha + pakkhika2], associated with pain or distress;
Spk III 152,4 (vighatapakkhiya ti -a); - 0 -(p)pafiküla,
o -patikküla, mfn., averse to pain or distress; finding pain
repugnant; D II 330,9 (passami samaryabrahmarye ... -e,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -patikküle); MI 315,36 (puriso
agaccheyya jivitukamo amaritukamo sukhakamo -o, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se 0 -patikkülo) f. Nidd I 8,7 (Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee 0 -patikkillo; Nidd-a I 37,24: dukkhaJT~ anicchamano);
Vism 297,11 (ahaJTI sukhakamo -o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
0
-patikkülo); Pj II 493,12 (--taya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-patikkillataya); Patis-a 612,15 (--tta, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-patikkillatta); - 0 -panüdaka, 0 -panudana, mfn., who
drives away distress; Pv-a 114,16 (ayaJTI ca devaputto ...
amhakaJTI -o bahilpakaro, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-panudano); - 0 -Va<J.<J.hika, mfn., increasing pain or
distress; Mp II 163,13 ( 0 '-udraya ti -a);- 0 -vinaya, m.,
the remo val of dukkha; S I 22,22* (aghavinaya -o; Spk I
63,1 foil.: pañcakhandhavinayena vattadukkhaJTI vinltam
eva hoti); - 0
-vedan'iya, mfn., entailing painful or
unpleasant feelings or experiences; M lii 214,9
(papakammaJTI -aJTI); S II 96,31 (-aJT~ bhikkhave
phassaJTI paticca uppajjati dukkha vedana); A II 196,29
(-a asava); IV 382,17 (Mp IV 175,13: -an ti
dukkhavedanajanakakammaJTI); 0
-Vedi(n), ~n:fn.,
feeling pain or discomfort; Ja V 435,2* (dighaJTI ca
assasati -ini, Be, Ce so; Ee dukkha vediti; Se
dukkhavedanaJTI ca vediyati); - 0
-Vepakka, mfn.,
having painful or unpleasant consequences; Sn 537; -
0
-samudaya, m., the cause, the origin, of dukkha; V in I
10,31 (idaJTI kho pana bhikkhave -aJTI ariyasaccaJTI yayaJTI
taryha . . . seyyathidaJTI kamataryha bhavataryha
vibhavatanha); III 5,24 (ayaJTI -o ti yathabhiltaJTI
abbhaññasiJTI); DI 192,1 (ayaJTI -o ti ... maya ekaJTlsiko
dhammo desito paññatto); MI 19!,4 (yo imesu pañcas'
upadanakkhandhesu chando a!ayo ... so -o);
Vibh lO! ,22 (katamaJTI -o ariyasaccaJTI); Mil 334,27;
Sv 916,5 (tass' eva dukkhassa pabhavikajanika taryha -o
ti); Nidd-a I 43,7 (--taya, Ce, E e so; Be, Se --tta); -
0
-saha, mfn. [dukkha + saha2], enduring pain or distress;
Cp-a 312,18;- adukkha, mfn. and n.,free from pain or
distress; what is not dukkha; M III 231 ,2 (-o eso
dhammo anupaghato ... ); 231,34 (sabbe te -a
anupaghata ... ); A II 52,5 (-e bhikkhave dukkhan ti
saññavipallaso); Ja I 3,23 (evambhiltena maya ajatiJTI
ajaraJTI avyadhiJTI -aJTI asukhaJTI sitalaJT~
amatamahanibbanaJTI pariyesituJTI vattati); Ps IV 101,16
(-am eva attabhavaJTI nibbatteti); - adukkhena, without
trouble, easily; Sv 406,2; - adukkha-m-asukha, n. and
mfn., (a state of) neither pleasure nor pain; (what is)
neither pleasant nor unpleasant; free from pleasure or
pain; Vin I 34,2o (vedayitaJT~ sukhaJTI va dukkhaJTI va
--m-asukhaJTI va taJTI pi a.dittaJT~); III 4,16 (--m-asukhaJTI
upekkhasatiparisuddhiJTI catutthaJTI jhanaJTI; Sp 155,10:
--m-asukhan ti dukkhabhavena adukkhaJTI
sukhabhavena asukhaJTI eten' ettha dukkhasukha-
patipakkhabhiltaJTI tatiyavedanaJTI dipeti na
dukkhasukhabhavamattaJT~, tatiyavedana nama adukkha
asukha upekkha ti pi vuccati, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce vedana
nama --m-asukha); D II 66,16 (tisso ... vedan a sukha
412 dukkhati
vedana dukkha vedana --m-asukha vedana); MI 293,12
(sukhaJTI pi vedeti dukkhaJTI pi vedeti --m-asukhaJTI pi
vedeti); A IV 442,21 (tassa mayhaJTI . . . --m-asukhe
cittaJTI na pakkhandati); Patis-a 140,18 (sa hi vedana na
dukkha na sukha ti --m-asukha ti vuccati, makaro pan'
ettha padasandhivasena vutto ); adukkha-m-
asukhi(n), mfn., experiencing neither pain nor pleasure;
D I 31,14 (--m-asukhi atta hoti arogo paraJTI mararya
saññi ti); M ll 234,3 (--m-asukhi atta ca loko ca); -
atidukkha, n. and mfn., l. (n.) a great pain; excessive
distress; Ja V 297,3 (-aJTI anubhoti); Vism 41 ,22; Dhp-a I
256,21 (-ena no sattadivasa atikkanta); - 2. (mfn.) very
painful or unpleasant; too distressing; Sp 1021,14
(imesaJTI pabbajja -a ti); PsI 144,22 (tadisena vuttaJTI
natidukkhaJTI hoti ti); - atidukkham eva in Ee at
Pv-a 65,4 is prob. wr for arati dukkham eva (Be, Ce, Se
so); - niddukkha, mfn. ,free from pain or distress; free
from trouble; Ja 11 146,24' (sabbe avera avyapajja sukhi
-a hontil ti); VI 224,32' (akasira ti -a); 286,24' (--ta);
Vism 297,24; Spk III 112,17 (--tta anitikaJTI);
sadukkha, mfn., causing or .feeling pain or distress;
M III 230,28 (yo . . . somanassanuyogo . . . -o eso
dhammo sa-upaghato ... ; Ps V 31,4: vipakadukkhena pi
kilesadukkhena pi -o); 231,30 (y e ... somanassanuyogaJTI
anuyutta ... sabbe te -a sa-upaghata ... ); Ap 190,15
(aturanaJTI -anaJTI, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se sudukkhinaJTI);
Ps IV 101,9 (-am eva attabhavaJTI nibbatteti);- see also
taJTldukkha (sv ta[d]), yaJTldukkha (sv ya[d]).
dukkhati, dukkhayati 1 , pr. 3 sg. [BHS duqkhati;
c.fS. Dhatup duqkhati, duqkhayati, Wg § 35:76], is
painful, hurts; .feels pain; Dhatum 753 (sukha dukkha ca
takriye); Ja III 26,4 (kiJTI te samma -ati ti pucchi, Ee so;
Ce -ayat! ti; Be dukkhan ti; Se kiJTI tvaJTI samma -asi ti);
Vism 264,27 (gattani -anti) = Vibh-a 248,1 f. Pj I 68,5;
Vism 527,26 (-ayati ti dukkhaJTI; or caus.) = Ud-a 42,9
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ayati ti); Sadd 327,25 (sukha dukkha
takkiriyayaJTI, takkiriya ti sukhadukkhanaJTI vedananaJTI
kiriya sukhanaJTI dukkhanan ti vutlaJTI hoti, akammaka
ime dhatavo: sukhati -ati); 328,11 (-ati ti dukkhito ti);-
caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. dukkheti, -ayate, pains; Vism 527,26
(-ayat! ti dukkhaJTI; or dukkhayati 1); Sadd 328,1foll.
(-e ti -ayati . . . ti imani tesaJTI karitapadarilpani ...
Saddasatthe pana Dhatupathasailkhepe ca ime dhatavo
curadigarye yeva vutta sukhayati -ayati ti ca akaritani
suddhakattupadani icchitani); - dukkheti ti in Ee at
It-a Il 128,1 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se dukkhe ti;
pp dukkhita, dukhita, mfn. [S. duqkhita], in pain; ill;
distressed; Vin III 136,15 (ahaJTI hi duggata -a na
sukhaJTI labhami); IV 291,26 (-a nama gilana vuccati);
D II 24,2 (addasa ... Vipassi kumaro uyyanabhumiJTI
niyyanto purÍSaJTI abadhikaJTI -aJT~ bajhagilil.naJTI);
Sn 984 (tassa taJTI vacanam sutva Bavari -o ahu; Pj II
582,2o: -o ti domanassajato ); Th 73 (jiryryaJTI ca disva
dukhitaJT~ ca vyadhitaJT~, Be, Ce so, me; Ee, Se -aJTI);
Thi 29 (kiñcapi kho 'mhi -a dubba!a gatayobbana); Ja II
437,14* (rogena baJhaJTI dukhitassa ruppato, Be, Ce so,
me; Ee, Se -assa) quoted Vism49,14*; JaiV 17,23
(sattahaJTI niraharataya -o); VI 508,28* (ya samike -amhi
sukhaJTI icchanti attano ); Ap 589,8 ( cittaJTI ca -aJTI
n' atthi); Bv 2:18 (kilesavyadhihi -o paripiJito);
dukkhana
Mil 61,23 (puriso visarp ... attana ca piveyya ... so attana
pi -o bhaveyya); 281,22 (tassa atipemena -assa
balavasoko uppajji); Vism 513,1* (dukkham eva hi na
koci -o); Mhv 37:26 (Mahaviharanasamhi -a);
Sadd 328,29; - atidukkhita, mfn., very distressed; Pj II
99,12; - sudukkhita, mfn., very distressed; Thi 79;
Ap 305,w; - caus. (b) pr. 3 sg. dukkhiipeti, -aya ti
[BHS dui_J.khapayati], hurts, inflicts pain on; Ja II 237,8·
(mitte sukhapeturp amitte va -eturp na sakkoti ti);
IV 452,29* (dukkhitarp marp -apayase Sudhamme;
453,4·: pakatiya pi marp dukkhitarp bhiyyo -apayasi);
Ps II 20,23 (ime daraka aññe darake vinasenti -enti);
III 9,27 (attanarp tapati -eti ti attantapo); Mhv 38:88
(-eturp); Sadd 328,1 (-eti -ayatl ti); - neg. part.pr.
adukkhapenta, mfn., Ja V 167,32·; Ap-a 130,5;
absol. dukkhapetva, Ja III 468,9* (sukhakame -etva);
Mil 276,14 (yo pararp -etva danarp deti); - pass.
part.pr. dukkhapiyamana, mfn., Ud-a 174,4 (piliyamano
-iyamano) f. It-a I 179,2 (Be, Ce, Se -iyamana; Ee
-iyamana); - pp dukkhapita, mfn., Ja V 284,15 (mama
hattho -ito ti); Mil 79,10; Ap-a 278,3o (aqito abhibhiito
-ito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dukkhapitito);
fpp dukkhapetabba, mfn., Sv 986,1o (sailkharo hi -etabbo
nama n' atthi);- see also dukkhlyati.
dukkhana, n. [from dukkhati; BHS dui_J.khana], feeling or
causing pain; Sadd 327,24 (sukhadukkhanarp vedananarp
kiriya sukhanarp -an ti vuttarp hoti);- adukkhana, n.,
not causing pain; It-a I 147,13 (kassaci -arp avyapajjho).
dukkhama, mfn., see sv khama.
dukkharaiJl in Ee at Ap 551,18 is wr for dukkararp (Be,
Ce, Se so).
dukkhiipana, n. [from dukkhapeti, caus. of dukkhati],
causing pain, hurting; Nidd-a II 26,1 (0 -Vasena dukkha
vedana adho [ti vuccati]); - ifc see patidukkhapana,
para-.
dukkhi(n), mfn. [S. dui_J.khin] (sg. nom. m. -i, f -!, -ini;
acc. m.f -irp; instr. m. -ina; gen. m. -ino; pl. nom. -!,
-ino), pained, distressed; Vin III 19,19 (-i dummano
vippatisañ pajjhayi; Sp 216,23: cetodukkhena -i); D II
22,20 (Vipassi kumaro antepuragato -i dummano
pajjhayati); SI 103,24 (Maro papima ... janati marp
sugato ti -i dummano tatth' ev' antaradhayi ti); IV 78,1o
(-in o cittarp na samadhiyati); A III 57,12 (bhagava
rajanarp ... -irp dummanarp ... viditva); IV 274,22joll.
(Mahapajapati Gotami . . . -i dummana assumukhi
rudamana . . . addasa kho ayasma Ánando Maha-
pajapatirp Gotamirp . . . -irp dummanarp ... ); Ja III
234,6* (esa disa parama... yarp. patva -i sukhino
bhavanti); V 268,21* (dukhino pan' !tare
etadisasmirp.niraye vasanti, Be, Ce so, me; Ee, Se -ino);
499,12* (ten' eva so hoti -i parattha); Patis II 131,36
(sukhino hontu ma -ino ); Vism 568,22* (-i sukharp
patthayati sukhi bhiyyo pi icchati); Sv 584,3o (na -ina
dummanena hutva); Dhp-a III 278,21 (sa . . . sokarp.
sandhareturp asakkonti -ini dummana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-i); Pj II 187,15 (ma tvarp Ditthamailgalike -ini ahosi);
- sudukkhi(n), mfn., in great pain or distress;
Ap 190,15 (aturanarp -inarp., Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
sadukkhanarp).
dukkhiyati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. dui_J.khiyati; or pass. of
413 duggata
dukkhati/dukkheti], feels pain, is distressed; Dhp-a II
28,3 (balo puttatal,lhaya e' eva dhanatal,lhaya ca haññati
vihaññati dukkhiyati, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce dukkhayati); -
neg. part.pr. adukkhlyamana, mfn., Sv 546,36 (avi-
haññamano ti . . . aparapararp parivattanarp akaronto
apitiyamano adukkhiyamano va adhivasesi) = Spk Ili
202,17 =Ud-a 401,12 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adukkhiyamano);
-se e also dukkhati.
dukha, mejor dukkha qv.
dugga, mfn. and n. [S. durga], l. (mfn.) hard to travel;
difficult of access; impassable; S V 148,9 (atthi
bhikkhave himavato pabbatarajassa -a visama desa);
Dhp 414 (yo imarp palipatharp -arp sarpsararp. moham
accaga); Sn 429 (-o maggo padhanaya dukkaro
durabhisambhavo; Pj II 387,21: dukkhena gantabbo ti
-o); Jaiii 14,5* (-e narakamhi khitto); VI250,13* (khara
kharodika tatta -a Vetaral,li nadi); - 2. n. (i) a place
difficult of access or passage; difficult, rough country;
Abh 1107 (kantaro vanaduggesu); SI 100,13* (kayira -e
sailkamanani ca); Dhp 327 (-a uddharath' attanarp);
Vv 84:11 (nadiyo pana pabbatanarp. ca -a puthuddisa
gacchatha bhogahetu; V v-a 338,11: pabbatanarp. ca
visamappadesa); Ja II 40,16* (-arp bhajasi); - ifc see
giri-; - (ii) a stronghold; Abh 350 (samyamacco sabha
koso -arp ... rajjailgani); Ja V 373,25* (na ... passe ...
nagararp va sumapitarp otil,ll,laparikharp -arp ... yattha
pavittho Sumukha bhayitabbarp na bhayasi; or mfn. ?);
Ud-a 104,21 (samisampatti amaccasampatti ... 0 -sampatti
ti satta pakatisampada rajiinarp icchitabba).
duggacca, n., abstr. [prob. from duggata qv], wretched
existence; poverty; Ap 523,1 (yoniso paccavekkhitva
-arp ca daFddatarp., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se duggatirp ca); -
duggacca in Sn 141 is abl. of duggati qv.
duggal}ha, mfn. [cf S. durgraha], hard to seize or catch;
Ja II 214,14' ( 0 -taya); VI 452,4* (-o hi taya raja; 452,1o·:
amhakarp raja assakha1uilkena sindhavo viya -o);- see
also sugal,lha.
duggata, mfn. [S. durgata], having a wretched (re)-birth;
poor, unfortunate, ill-fated; Abh 739 (dino
nidhanaduggata); Vin I 208,15 (kuto amhakarp -anarp
mala); III 5,3 (so dibbena cakkhuna . . . satte pass ami
cavamane uppajjamane ... sugate -e yathakammiipage
satte paJanami; Sp 164,17: -e ti duggatigate
1obhanissandayuttatta va datidde appannapane); 136,1s
(aharp hi -a dukkhita na sukharp 1abhami); SI 200,16*
(-a devakaññayo; Spk I 293,5 foil.: na gatiduggatiya
-a ... patipattiduggatiya pana -a, tato cuta hi ta niraye pi
upapajjanti ti -a, so read with Be, Se); Pv 6:2 (aharp.
bhadante peti 'mhi -a yama1okika; Pv-a 33,5: duggatirp.
gata); Thi 122 (-a 'harp. pure asirp. vidhava ca aputtika;
Thi-a 117,19: -a ti da1idda); Jai 228,26 ( -tta); 321,6 (-o
0
kapal,lo jiviturp. asakkonto); 338,19 (mahaku1ani -ani
bhavissanti); VI 335,25' (kuto me sami -assa yagu-
adini); Vibh 273,35 (ekarp. puggalarp -arp. durupetarp
disva karul,layeyya); Ap 565,3o (seghiku1e . . . -e
adhane); Vism 189,2 (-o puriso); PsV 94,17 (kirp pana
sa kuti issareh' eva katabba -ehi pi sakka katun ti);
Dhp-a II 133,4 (buddha kira -esu anukamparp karonti);
Mhv 32:47;- duggatarp in Ee at S IV 309,5 is prob. wr
for dukkatarp (Be, Ce, Se, Spk III 103,24 so); -
duggataka
0
-tara, mfn., campar., more unfortunate; poorer; Ja V
441,19' (amma mama samikena amhehi pi -ena
bhavitabbarp); Dhp-a 1 427,3 (ko maya -o bhante ti);-
atiduggata, mfn., very poor; very unfortunate; Ja VI
228,36·; Spk I 151,12; - suduggata, mfn., very poor;
very unfortunate; Ja 111 131,10* (-enapi akiccarp; 131,1s·:
sudaliddenapi); VI 228,11 •; Ap 580,12.
duggataka, mfn. [duggata + ka2], poor; unfortunate; Mp I
415,1 (-esu ñatimittesu sampattesu, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
duggatesu).
duggati,.f [BHS durgati], a wretched (re)-birth or state of
existence; an ill destiny; misfortune, poverty; Abh 656;
Vin III 20,37 (kayassa bheda pararp maraiJa apayarp -irp
v1mpatarp nirayarp upapajjeyya; Sp 167,1 foil.:
dukkhassa gati pa!isara~an ti -i dosabahu1ataya va
dughena kammuna nibbatta gatl ti -i); MI 36,21 (citte
sailkilighe -i pa!ikailkha); A I 136,18* (vijjarp
uppadayarp bhikkhu sabba -iyo jahe); Dhp 17 (bhiyyo
tappati -irp gato); 240 (sakakammani nayanti -irp);
It 34,12* (ya kacima -iyo asmirp 1oke paramhi ca);
Sn 141 (ditthe va dhamme garayha samparaye ca -i na
ne jati nivareti duggacca garahaya va, Ee, Se so; Be
duggatya; Ce -irp; Pj II 192,19: nesarp -i nirayadibheda,
-i etesarp para1oke hot! ti attho); Vv 84:30 (papakammo
na muccati -iya kadaci); Ja IV 54,33* (na -irp gacchati
dhammacañ); 112,6* (sarpsare sugatl ca -1 ca ittaravaso
ti janiya, Ce, E e, Se so; Be sugatirp ca -irp ca; 112,26·: ya
esa ... manussabhüta sugati ca tiracchanabhüta -i ca);
V 480,13* (na hi tarp nararp tayate -lhi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
-1bhi); Ap 361,25 (devaloke manusse va dalidde -imhi
va nibbattirp me na passami); Bv 2:193 (bahü jane
tarayati parimoceti -irp; Bv-a 124,10: -in ti -ito,
nissakkatthe upayogavacanarp); Vism 549,28 (-iyarp
!hitassa); Pv-a 227,27 (sugatiyarp va aggha -iyarp
d~idda va ti); Dhatup 158 (dalidda -iya111); Sadd 391,11
(dukkhena kicchena gati gamanarp annapanadilabho -1
ti); - 0
-gamana, mfn. and n., going to a wretched
existence; (mfn.) Thi355 (-arp magga111; Thl-a227,13:
nirayadi-apayagamina111 maggarp); (n.) Pj II 192,28;
Th-a II 128,27 (adhammen' eva ca -am);
-gami(n), mfn. [duggati + gami(n) ], leadin~ to a
0 1
wretched existence; Th 882 (kammarp ... -ina111); Ja V
260,14* (aharp ca pa!ipanno 'smi magga111 -inarp);
Vism 525,2o (-in o hi kammassa visesahetu avijja); -
see al so sugati.
duggandhiya, mfn. [cf S. durgandhi], evil-smelling,
stinking; Ja III 244,9• (dhi-r-atthu 'ma111 aturarp
pütikayarp -arp, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee jegucchiya111 =
II 437,2o*: Be, Ce, Ee jegucchiyarp; Se jigucchiya111)
quoted Vism 49,20* (eds so).
duggaramaf!ho in Ee at Ps III 117,16 is wr for
dupparamagho (Be, Ce, Se so).
duccaja, duccajja, mfn. [du(s) + caja; cf S. dustyajya,
sudustyaja], hard to give up; hard to give away; A III
50,23* (so -arp sappuriso cajitva); Ja V 8,12* (yo -e
kamagu~e pahaya); VI 137,9* (puttehi -ehi111 sugati111
saggalp gamissami, so read wth L. Alsdorf 1967, p. 40?
Ee puttehi yajitva -ehi; Se duccajjehi; Ce yajitvana -ehi;
Be puttehi yañña111 yajitvana -ehi); 476,31 * (p~a111 cajasi
-arp); Nidd I 29,3 (kama hi loke duppahaya -a
414
duppariccaja, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee duccajja); Ap 304,10
(eta111 te -a111 dhana111, Se so; Ee duccajjarp (against
mss); Be, Ce eka111 te -a111 vararp); Mil118,11
(Vessantaro raja ya111loke -arp tarp caji, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se duccajja111); - atiduccaja, mfn., very hard to give
away; Bv-a 264,12;- suduccaja, mfn., very hard to give
up; (what is) very hard to give away; Ja IV 403,22* (-a111
yacasi uttamailga111); VI 473,17*.
duccite in Ee at Ja V 114,25' is wr for duccitte (Ce, Se so)
or ducitte (Be so).
ducchindiya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp ofchindati qv], hard to cut;
Ja II 140,13 (evarüpa111 pi nama me -arp puttadara-
bandhanarp kilesabandhana111 chindin ti) = Dhp-a IV
55,14.
dujivha, dujjivha, mfn. and m., see dvijivha (sv dvi).
dujjacca, dujacca, mfn. [cjjacca], of low birth; ill-starred;
Ja III 19,22* (-o ca sujacco ca; [or N.pr.]; 19,26·: -o ti
adayo cha jeghama~avaka tesarp nama111 ga~hi);
VI 113,31' (nariyo ... dujacca, me; 114,15·: dujacca ti
dujjatika virüpa jeguccha).
dujjaha, mfn. [du(s) + jaha], hard to give up; SI 44,13*
(iccha lokasmirp -a); Th 124 (sakkaro [ka]purisena -o).
dujjatika, mfn. [cf S. du¡jata, durjati], of low birth; ill-
starred; Ja Il 223,22' (dukkul!no ti -o akulaputto);
VI 114,15' (dujacca ti -a virüpa jeguccha); Sv 951,4
(asuko virüpo na pasadiko -o duss!lo ti).
dujjana, nlfn· [du(s) + jana2; cf S. du¡jñana], difficult to
know; hard to understand; Vin III 260,29 (-a111 j1vita111
-a111 mara~an ti); D I 170,2 (-o bho Gotama samaiJo -o
brahmaiJo ti); M II 43,11 (-arp kho etarp Kaccana taya
aññadighikena aññakhantikena ... ); Ja VI 40,29 (idarp
-arp, upayena pana sakka janitun ti); Sv 669,15 (jlvitassa
o -ta); Ps Ili 199,8 (yatha mahasamuddo gambh1ro
appameyyo -o evam eva kh11,1asavo pi); Spk Il 91,9
(buddhanarp nama citta111 -a111); Pj II 36,17 (-arp
paracitta111 visesato matugamassa); Sadd 732,25
(paJinayanarp -tta);- sudujjana, mfn., very difficult to
0
know; D I 170,8.
dujjivika, mfn. rJrom du(s) + j1vika], where lije is
difficult; where it is hard to make a living or keep alive;
Sp 174,2s (atha va dvlliitika ti -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dujj1vitika, prob. wr).
dujjhacaro in Ee at Sp 754,17 is wr for ajjhacaro (Be, Ce,
Se so).
dujjhamitarp in Ee at Sp 854,22 is wr for dujjhapita111 (Be,
Ce, Se so).
1
duññapaya, mfn. [du(s) + *ñapaya; cfñapeti qv
sv janati], hard to teach, hard to inform; Nidd I 326,10
(dubbinayo -o dunnijjhapayo, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be,
Ce duppaññapayo; Nidd-a 1 370,6: duppaññapayo ti
ñapetu111 cittena labbhapetu111 dukkho, eds so).
duttha 1, du!!hu 1, mfn. [S. dul_¡stha], uneasy; unhappy;
Pa~is-a 85,3o ( -arp mano assa ti ... dummano, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se dughu); Mp III 255,12 (dummano ti 0 -mano, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se dutthu- ).
dutfha 2 , mfn., pp ~fdussati 1 qv.
dutfha 3 , mfn., pp ofdussati 2 qv.
dutfharp in Ee, Se at Sp 1014,20 (atha sahasa virajjhitva
-arp maya katan ti) is prob. wr for duqhu (Be, Ce so);-
dugham in Ee at Ap 477,12 is wrfor daghum (Be, Ce, Se
dutthamaka
so).
dufthiimaka in E e at Pj ll606,5 is wr for dutthamaka qv.
dufthu 1 , see sv duttha 1.
dufthu 2 , dutthu~, ind. [S. du~~~u], (usually as gloss for
du[s]), badly; wrongly; with difficulty; iic: bad;
Abh 1154 (-u ninday~); Vism 425,s (-u carita~
duttha~ va carita~ ... duccarita~, Be, Se so; Ce, E e
-u~ ... -u va ... ); It-a II 130,29 (dukka~an ti -u kata~);
Ap-a 221,9 (durasada ti -u asada asadetu~ gha~~etu~
asakkui_leyya ayogga ti); 390,s (-u dukkhena gamaniy~
dugga~); As 384,16 (-u maya ida~ katan ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -u~); Sadd 899,6 (-u ku ice ete kucchitatthe);-
0
-khetta, n., abad or poor field; Sv 813,16 (dukkhette ti
-e nissarakhette );
dutthulla\ mfn. and n. [BHS du~~hula], serious;
grievously wrong; a serious offence; Vin III 21,4 (y~
tva~ asaddhamma~ gamadhamm~ vasaladhamma~
-a~ odakantika~ rahassa~ ... samapajjissasi; Sp 221,9:
-an ti duttha~ ca kilesasandiisita~ thiil~ ca
asukhum~ anipui_lan ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dutthu ca);
IV 127,29 (yo pana bhikkhu jana~ -a~ apatti~
pa~icchadeyya pacittiyan ti; 128,1: -a nama apatti cattari
ca parajikani terasa ca saitghadisesa); V 146,2* (ye
garuka te -a ye -a sa silavipatti); Nidd I 139,s
(methunadhammo nama yo so asaddhammo
gamadhammo vasaladhammo -o ... ); Sp 227,29
(manussitthiya pi hi dassan~ pi gahal)~ pi amasana~
pi phusana~ pi ghattana~ pi -am eva); Th-a I 239,1o
(-a~ asubhayogyata); - esp. of speech: unseemly,
suggestive, lewd; lewd talk; Vin III 128,22 (yo pana
bhikkhu ... matugama~ -ahi vacahi obhaseyya; 128,33:
-a nama vaca vaccamaggapassavamaggamethuna-
dhammapa~is~yutta vaca); Vism 313,12 (-a~ pi
kathayissanti ti); Sp 258,3 (ay~ ca methunakatha nama
yasma -a katha asabbhikatha tasma ... , Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-katha); Spk II 395,24 (nanappakara~ -a~ kathento
vac~ na rakkhati nama); Ud-a 113,12 (asabbhahl ti ...
-ahl ti attho); - 0 -gahi(n), mfn., holding to what is
wrong; Th 1217 (no pana -I sa bhikkhu, Be, Ce so; Se
o -bhal)l; E e wr padullagahi; Th-a III 191,4: -1 . . . yo
kilesehi diisitatta ativiya dutthullatta ca dutthullana~
micchavadana~ gai_lhanasilo ca, Ce, Ee so; Be
du~~hullata; Se o -bhal)l ... dutthullata ... bhai_lanasllo) f.
SI 187,4* (eds 0 -bhiil)l); - 0
-bhii!J.i(n), mfn., of
unseemly speech; speaking lewdly; SI 187,4* (no pana -1
sa bhikkhu; Spk I 270,17: 0 -vacanabhiil)I pi na siya) f.
Th 1217 (Se so; Be, Ce 0 -gahi; Ee wr padullagahi);
Sp 1393,34; - adutthulla, mfn. and n., not grievously
wrong; not a serious offence; V in I 354,33 (-a apattl ti);
Sp 754,16 (pañcasikkhapadani dutthullo nama ajjhacaro
sesani -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ani); 1348,22.
dutthulla2 , n. [cf duttha 1, dutthu 1, S. du~stha ?],
discomfort, disquiet; ? M III 159,15 (-~ kho me
0
udapadi adhikarai_la~ ca pana me samadhi cavi; Ps IV
208,12: kayadutthulla~ kayadaratho kayalasiya~
udapadi); Sp 163,23 (-a~ cittassa . . . upakkileso ti);
Pa~is-a 582,27 (-an ti upasamapa~ipakkho kilesavasena
o)arikabhavo asantabhavo); Sadd 790,16 (dutthughana~
-a~); - ifc see kaya-.
duttho in E e, Se at It 68,5* (saro -o) is prob. wr for diddho
415 dutiya
(Be, Ce so).
duQati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup drui_lati, Wg § 28:47], goes;
injures; Sadd 358,2o (dui_la gatiya~ ca, hi~sapekkhako
cakaro: -ati);- see also dunoti2, dunati.
*du!}.oti\ *dui_lati 1, pr. 3. sg. [S. Dhatup dunoti,
Wg §§ 27:10, 26:24], burns; afflicts; Dhatup 521 (du
paritape); Dhatum 734; Sadd 493,26 (du upatape: -oti
-ati, so read ? eds ru upatape: rui_loti rui_lati).
du~J.ote, dui_lati 2, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup drui_loti,
Wg § 27:33], injures; Sadd 495,5foll. (du hi~saya~: ...
-oti -ati);- see also dui_lati, dunati.
dutiya, dutlya (and dutiyya), mfn., m., n. and -a,f
[S. dvitiya], l. (mfn.) (i) the second; a second; the next;
a second kind of; Abh 987; Vin I 112,14 (ay~ pa~hamo
patimokkhuddeso ... ay~ -o patimokkhuddeso);
II 286,33 (-assa parajikassa vatthu~ pi pucchi); III 4,11
(-a~ jhan~ upasampajja vihasi~); DI 62,14 (ida~ ...
-~ di~the va dhamme sanditthika~ samaññaphala~
paññattan ti); 251,1 (so mettasahagatena cetasa ek~
disa~ pharitva viharati tatha -~ tatha tatiya~ tatha
catuttha~); JI 85,19 (aya~ -o adlnavo dussilassa
sllavipattiya); MI 23,s (aya~ kho me brahmai_la rattiya
majjhime yame -a VIJP adhigata); 156,9 (-a
samai_labrahmai_la ev~ samacintesu~); 344,1 (ya~
-asmi~ thane khira~ hoti); III 180,9 (na tva~ addasa
manussesu -a~ devadüt~ patubhutan ti); A IV 100,23
(hoti kho so bhikkhave samayo ya~ kadaci karahaci ...
-o suriyo patubhavati); Ud 53,17 (aya~ pi bhikkhave
mahasamudde -o acchariyo abbhuto dhammo); It 32,14*
(khemo vitakko pa~hamo udirito tato viveko -o
pakasito); Sn 436 (kama te pa~hama sena -a arati
vuccati); Ja 1 20,29* (dakkhi~ -a~ silaparami~);
IV 124,9 (je~~haputto Ramapal)gito nama ahosi -o
Lakkhai_lakumaro nama); VI 285,23* (aya~ dutlyo vijayo
mam' ajja); 558,17. (eko va -o n' atthi); 561,19* (ida~ pi
-a~ sall~ kampeti hadaya~ mama); Nidd I 374,18
(tattha ekassa va -o hoti dvinna~ va tatiyo hoti til)I_la~
va catuttho hoti); Mil236,9 (aya~ -o acariyo); 237,9
(yadi -o buddho bhaveyya); Vism 233,2o* (yo nam'
iddhimata~ segho -o aggasavako ); Ps IV 4,20 (-e va
tatiye va attabhave vipakadayak~); Pj 1 172,14 (-o
maññe cando suriyo va utthito ti); Mhv 5:134 (-e
divase); 32:21 (-e attabhave); Sadd 796,17 (dvinn~
pürai_lo -o); - (ii) the other; another; a further; Vin I
274,12 (sakkhissasi pana tv~ gahapati ekena passena
satta mase nipajjitun ti . . . -ena passena satta mase
nipajjitun ti); III 79,26 (aññataro bhikkhu . . . eka~
musal~ aggahesi -o musalo paripatitiva ... ); M IIl
166,21 (tatt~ ayokhil~ hatthe gamenti ... -e hatthe
gamenti); Sn 884 (eka~ hi sacca~ na dutlyam atthi);
Ja 1 65,28 (-ena sokena pi)ito); IV 410,23" (etena me
saccavacanena -a~ pi cakkhu~ uppajjatii ti); V 70,9*
(ek~ me bhakkhit~ asi -a~ abhipatthita~); Nidd I
52,3 (amo eko anto anagato -o anto);- dutiy~, adv., a
second time; again; Vin 1 6,12 (-a~ pi kho brahma
sahampati bhagavanta~ etad avoca ... ); S II 19,14; Khp 1
(-a~ pi buddha~ sarai_la~ gacchami); Jai 313,1 (eva~
-~ pi tatiy~ pi ti cha vare . . . pabbajito e' ev'
uppabbajito ca); III 9,26 (ev~ -a~ pi tatiya~ pi bali~
vagghapesi); Mil 2,30 (so -~ pi tatiya~ pi
dutiyaka
amantiyamano asuganto vi ya gacchat' eva); Ps II
277,24foll. (-aq¡ pi bhagava pucchi -aq¡ pi tugh! ahosi);
- 2. (i) (mj.) a companion; a fellow; V in II 279,1
(anujanami bhikkhave ekaq¡ bhikkhuniq¡ sammannitva
tassa bhikkhuniya -aq¡ datuq¡); III 48,21 (bhaggaq¡
avaharissaml ti theyyacitto -aq¡ va pariyesati gacchati
va); 207,27 (aññatika -a hoti); IV 95,25 (anapatti ...
bhikkhu -o hoti); 97,3 (anapatti yo koci viññü puriso -o
hoti); SI 25,16* (saddha -a purisassa hoti; Spk I 66,33:
sahayakiccaq¡ sadheti); Sn 49 (evaq¡ -ena saha mam'
assa vacabhilapo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dutlyena); Th!230
(eka tuvaq¡ tighasi rukkhamüle na capi te -o atthi koci);
Ja III 529,2* (aham eva eko idha-m-ajja patto na capi me
-o koci vijjati); V 400,17* (ko te dutlyo idha
mandalocane); It-a I 60,1 (taghadutiyo ti taghasahayo ...
tagha purisassa -a ti vutta); - ifc see atta- (sv atta[n]),
ka!adutlya (sv ka!a\ tagha-; - (ii) (-a, f) a wife;
Abh 237 (pajapatl ca -a); 987; Ja VI 420,5* (tassa m' eka
-asi; 420,7·: -as! ti puragadutiyika ahosi); - 3. (n.)
(gr. t. t.) the second letter( s) in the first five classes of
consonants (ie kh, eh, !h, th and ph); Sp 1399,24
(dhanitaq¡ nama tesv eva [vaggesu] dutiyacatutthaq¡);
Sadd 607,27 (vaggesu ... dutiyacatutthaq¡ dhanitaq¡);
608,4 (pa!hamadutiyani so ca aghosa);
4. dutiya, (m)f(n). and f [scil. vibhatti], (gr.t.t.) (the
termination of) the second case, the accusative;
Sadd 60,7* (kammatthe -a); 60,27 (upayogavacane -a
vibhatti bhavati); 642,7 (aq¡ yo iti -a); 893,16 (diva
bhiyyo namo ice ete pa!hamaya ca -aya ca); -
dutiyekavacana, n., the accusative singular; Sadd 717,15
(bhavanapuq¡sake dutiyekavacanaq¡);
dutiyatappurisa, m., a tappurisa cpd in which the first
member, if uncompounded, would be in the accusative
case; Sadd 755,15 (dhammacarl ice adi dutiyatappuriso
'yaq¡); - 5. dutiya,f [scil. ratti], the second (day or)
night of the lunar half month; Ps II 192,24
(Bhaddiyatthero -aya [sotapanno ahosi]); Thl-a 86,18
(mase mase sukkapakkhassa -aya); - 0 -kulika, m(jn).
ffrom dutiya + ku1a], (one) belonging to a second,
another, family; Th! 420 (maq¡ adasi tato agghassa
gharamhi -assa; Th!-a 24 7,3 foll.: pa!hamasamikaq¡
upadaya dutiyassa agghassa kulaputtassa gharamhi); -
0
-ijhanika, mfn. ffrom dutiya + jhana2], connected with
the second jhana; belonging to the second jhana;
Pa!is-a477,2o; Vibh-a 120,26;- 0 -tii, dutlyata,f, abstr.,
companionship, fellowship; Ja III 169,11' (n' atthi soke
dutlyata, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dutiyyata); - 0 -sailgiti,f,
the second rehearsal and recension, the 'Second
Council'; Sp 35,8 (imaq¡ -iq¡ sailgayitva); Vv-a 352,12
(taq¡ Yasattherapamukha mahathera -iyaq¡ sailgahaq¡
aropesuq¡); Pv-a 144,2o (idaq¡ pana Petavatthu -iyaq¡
sangahaq¡ arüjhan ti); - adutiya (and addutiya,
adutlya), mfn., alone; without a companion; single;
unique, matchless; Vin I 352,32 (so 'mhi etarahi eko -o
sukhaq¡ phasu viharami); S III 95,2 (bhagava ...
anamantetva upa!!hake anapaloketva bhikkhusailghaq¡
eko -o carikaq¡ pakkami); A I 22,24 (ekapuggalo ... -o
asahayo appa!imo appa!isamo ... ; Mp I 115,16:
dutiyakassa buddhassa abhava -o); Th 1091 (kada ...
ekakiyo addutiyo vihassaq¡; cfTh-a III 151,1: addutiyo ti
416 duttitikkha
nittagho); Ja VI 64,26* (so -o na janati); 99,19* (ye -a na
ramanti ekika, Be, Se so; Ee adut!ya; Ce ye ve -a);
404,10 (esa kira ... paññaya sakalajambud!pe -o ti);
Ap 305,3t Gino appa!ipuggalo ... -o narasabho);
Vism 181,31 (ekakena -ena); Th-a II 137,28 (--taya);
Pa!is-a 559,4 (nibbanaq¡ --tta ekattavimokkho);
Ap-a 133,33 (khaggassa nama visiil,laq¡ ekam eva hoti
-aq¡); - sadutiyavasa, m. [vasa3], living with a
companion; Th-a II 99,2 (sadutiyavasena bhikkhu
devasamo ti vutto, Be, Se so; Ce dutiyavasena; Ee
dutiyavasena); - sadutiyavihari(n), mfn., living with a
companion; S IV 36,2foll.
dutiyaka, rrifl: -ika)n. and m.f [cf S. dvitlyaka], l. (mfrz.) a
second; a further; Vin V 87 ,8* (aniyata dutiyika, scil.
apatti? Sp 1307,6: dutiyaq¡ aniyatasikkhapadaq¡);
Ap 45,11 (ito -e kappe); Spk II 34,7 (lamakanto -o);
Mhv 34:28 (putto -o); - dutiyakaq¡, adv., a second
time, further; MI 83,5 (na ca maq¡ -a!ll uttariq¡
paripuccheyyuq¡); - 2. (i) (m.f) (being) a companion;
Vin IV 270,24 (dutiyikaq¡ pi bhikkhuniq¡ uyyojeti);
297,3o (pariyesitva dutiyikaq¡ bhikkhuniq¡ na 1abhati);
Vism 83,zfoll. (bhikkhuniya hi dutiyikaq¡ vina vasituq¡
na vanati, evarüpe ca !hiine samanacchanda dutiyika
dullabha); Sp 913,8 (yattha !hitaq¡ dutiyika passati);
Kkh 2 197,26 (bhikkhusmiq¡ -e sati); Spk I 35,4 (attano
nisajjaphasukaq¡ kathaphasukaq¡ -aq¡ alabhant!); It-a II
156,31 (taghaq¡ pana dutiyikaq¡ sahayikaq¡ labhitva va
saq¡sarati); Th-a I 230,19 (attano -aq¡ bhikkhuq¡
micchavitakkabahulaq¡ viharantaq¡ ñatva);
(ii) dutiyika,f, a wife; Cp 2:4:2 (ya me dutiyika asi);
Mil401 ,19 (cakkavako yava jlvitapariyadana dutiyikaq¡
na vijahati); Ud-a 72,17 (puriil,ladutiyika ti pub be ...
dutiyika, bhariya ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dutiya); -
sadutiyaka, m., sadutiyika,f, accompanied; with
another person; Vin IV 318,11 (-a ayya ti, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se sadutiya);- sadutiyakavasa, m. [vasa3], living with a
companion; Ja I 10,6 (gehassa atthibhavo nama
sadutiyakavaso) = Ap-a 11,34 =Bv-a 77,23.
duttara, mfn. [du(s) + tara2, cf S. du~!ara; (or du(s) +
uttara2 qv)], hard to cross over, to pass beyond; SI
53,19' (oghaq¡ tarati -aq¡) quoted Vism 3,8'; It 57,21
(samuddam . . . -am accatari; It-a II 38,14: -an ti
duratikkamaq¡); Ja IV 480,6• (kama manohara -a
maccudheyya); Nidd I 29,4 (kama hi loke duppahaya ...
-a duppatara; Nidd-a I 104,28: -a ti uttaritva atikkantuq¡
na sakka); - suduttara, mfn., very hard to cross over,
to pass beyond; S I 35,8• (ke ca te ataruq¡ pailkaq¡
maccudheyyaq¡ -aq¡); Dhp 86 (te jana param essanti
maccudheyyaq¡ -aq¡); Ja IV 441,2* (sayaq¡ nad! asi
maya -a).
duttappaya, mfn. [du(s) + *tappaya; cftappeti qv
sv tappate], hard to satisfy; A I 87,13 (yo ca 1addhaq¡
laddhaq¡ nikkhipati yo ca laddhaq¡ laddhaq¡ vissajjeti
ime kho bhikkhave puggala -a; Mp II 156,3o: -a ti
dayakena atappaya tappetuq¡ na sukara, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se dayakena -a) f. Pp 26,16 (Pp-a 205,8: -a ti atappaya
na sakka kenaci tappetuq¡); - see also atappaya,
atappiya (sv tappati\ sutappaya.
duttikiccha, mfn., see sv tikiccha.
duttitikkha, mfn., see sv titikkha.
duttosaya
duttosaya, mfn. [du(s) + *tosaya; cftoseti qv sv tussati)],
hard to please or satisfy; Th1-a 179,1 (manussanatrJ
nama cittam -am);- see also duttosa (sv tosa).
2 pacchime mase ... adicco nabhatrJ abbhussukkamano -o
dutthamaka: mfo. [du(s) + thama + ka ], weak; of poor
strength; Pj II 606,5 (dubba1athamakassa ti appa-
tthamakassa atha va dubba1assa -assa ca, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr dutthamakassa) = Nidd-a 11 93,14.
duddakkh~, [du(s) + dakkha3; cf S. durdarsa], difficult to
be seen; Nidd I 412,27 (duddasatrJ -atrJ duppassatrJ).
duddada, mfn. [cfdada], hard to give; SI 19.3• (-atrJ
dadamananatrJ ... asanto nanukubbanti) = Ja 11 86,1•;
A IV 31,14 (-atrJ dada ti; Mp IV 24,14: -an ti
duppariccajatrJ maharahabhai_H;lakatrJ).
duddamiya (and duddamaya), mfn. [cf S. durdamya],
hard to tame or control; Th 5 (yo -o damena danto, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se duddamayo; Th-a l 45,12: -o ti duddamo,
dametutrJ asakkm_leyyo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se duddamayo
ti).
2 2
duddasa, mfn. [du(s) + dasa ; cf S. durdarsa, durdrsa],
l. difficult to see; hard to understand; Vin I 4,34
(adhigato kho myayatrJ dhamrno gambh1ro -o
duranubodho santo panlto ... ); D II 36,6 (-atrJ idatrJ
¡hanatrJ yadidatrJ idapaccayata pa¡iccasamuppado); SI
230,16 (-o hi bhante Sakko devanatrJ indo ti); Dhp 252
(sudassatrJ vajjam aññesatrJ attano pana -atrJ); Th1 52
(abbuhi vata me sallatrJ -atrJ hadayanissitatrJ);
Vism 522,29* (-a caturo dhamma desetutrJ ca
sudukkara); Sv 802,16/oll. (dve saccani 0 -tta gambh1rani
dve gambh1ratta -ani); Spk III 112,8 (0 -taya); Sadd 58,4
(ayatrJ hi nayo atlva sukhumo -o ca paramill)u-r-iva);-
2. of unpleasing appearance, ugly; Abh 998
(sudassanatrJ ... tlsu tatrJ duddasetare); Ps IV 213,18
(duddasiko ti darakanatrJ bhayapanatthatrJ katayakkho
viya -o); - atiduddasa, mfn., very hard to see;
Ud-a 391,32 (-atrJ ... nibbanatrJ); Vibh-a 141,32
(nirodhasaccatrJ pana atigambh1ratrJ ca -atrJ ca ti); -
sududdasa, mfn., very hard to see; Vin I 5,2 (idatrJ pi
kho ¡hanatrJ -atrJ yadidatrJ sabbasaii.kharasamatho ...
nibbanatrJ); Dhp 36 (-atrJ sunipu1_1a111 yatthakama-
nipatinatrJ cittatrJ); Th 1098 (cattari saccani -ani); Ja VI
414,24* (addha idatrJ mantapadatrJ -atrJ).
2 or extract; Th 72 (kajlro susu va<;l<;lhitaggo -o hoti
duddasi(n), mfn. [from du(s) + dasa ], of unpleasing
appearance, ugly; Ja V 69,11 * (-1 appakaro si dubbai.J.J:.lO
bh1madassano; 69,26·: -1 ti dukkhenapassitabbo).
2
duddasika, duddassika, mfn. [du(s) + dasika ;
cf S. durdarsa, durdrs1ka], disagreeable to the sight; of
unpleasing appearance, ugly; V in II 90,23 (ekacco
dubbai.J.J:.lO hoti -o oko¡imako, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
duddassiko) f. M III 169,31 =SI 94,2 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
duddassiko; Spk I 162,3o: vijatamatuya pi amanapa-
dassano); S 11 279,18 (passatha . . . etatrJ bhikkhutrJ
agacchantatrJ dubbai.J.J:.latrJ -atrJ oko¡imakatrJ, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee duddassikatrJ) f. Ud 76,15 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
duddassikatrJ); Ja IV 489,19 (bheravasadde migapakkh1
-e amanusse ca pa¡ikkamapetva); Vism 108,14
1dubba1_11_1a -a kilighavasana duggandha, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se duddassika).
duddasiya, mfn. [prob. = duddasika, but cf S. drsya,
darsya], of unpleasing appearance, ugly; Sv 934,2
ikodhanassa hi chaviVai.J.J:.lO avi1o hoti mukhatrJ -atrJ).
417 dunnibbetha
duddassika, mfn., see sv duddasika.
duddikkha, dudikkha, mfn. [du(s) + dikkha], hard to look
at; D II 183,nfoll. (seyyatha pi Ananda vassanatrJ
hoti musati cakkhüni evam eva kho Ananda Dhammo
pasado -o ahosi musati cakkhüni, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dudikkho; Sv 630,16: pabhasampattiya duddaso ti attho ).
duddubha, see sv daddabha.
duddubhayati, see sv daddabhayati.
1
duddha, mfn. and n., pp of duhati qv.
duddhara\ mfn., see sv duruddhara.
duddhara 2 , mfn. [S. durdhara], hard to be carried;
Ap 342,25 (-o pa¡hav1 yatha).
dunati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup dru1_1oti, Wg § 27:33,
drü1_1ati, Wg § 31:11], injures; Sadd 497,tfoll. (dü
hitrJsayatrJ: -a ti mittaddu dumo ... mittatrJ -ati hitrJsati
dubbhatl ti mittaddu); - pass. pr. 3 sg. dun1yati,
Sadd 497,4 (dumo ti -1yati gehasambharadi-atthaya
hitrJs1yati chind1yati);- see also du1_1ati, du1_1oti .
dundubhi, m.f, l. [ts] a kettle-drum; Abh 143 (bheri -i);
Pv 28:4 (-1natrJ va ghoso); Ja VI 465,13* (dhamantu
magadha saii.kha vaggü nadantu -1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
vadatu); Ap 388,17 (vajjanti -1, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -i);
472,19 (-iyo nadayitrJsu aman usa, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
samanusa; Ap-a S06,21: -iyo ti dundutrJ iti saddayanato
0
-saii.khata bheriyo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dundu iti); Bv 17:4
(yada ahani -itrJ); - ifc see amata- (sv marati); -
2. thunder; Ap 540,15 (nabhasa vijjuta pati panadita
-iyo);- ifc see deva-, megha-.
dunnaógalani in Ee at Pv-a 133,7 is wr for unnailga1ani
(Be, Ce, Se so).
dunnama, n., see sv du(s).
dunnamaka, n. [S. lex. dumaman, dumamaka],
hemorrhoids; Abh 327 (-atrJ ca arisatrJ).
dunnikka<J<Jhiya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of nikka¡;ll;lhati qv],
hard to draw out; Ja IV 449.26" (dunnikkhayo ti -o).
dunnikkhaya, mfn. [du(s) + *nikkhaya], hard to
destroy; ? Ja IV 449,23* (dajhasmi mü1e .. . -o veju
pasakhajato, Ce, E e, Se so; Be dunnikkayo; perhaps read
dunnikkhaso? 449,26": dunnikka<;l<;lhiyo).
dunnikkhasa, mfn. [du(s) + *nikkhasa], hard to draw out
pasakhajato, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee dunnikkhamo); Ja IV
449,23* (dajhasmi müle ... -o veju pasakhajato, so read?
Be dunnikkayo; Ce, Ee, Se dunnikhayo; 449,26":
dunnikka<;l<;lhiyo ).
dunni.iihiipaya, mfn. [du(s) + *nijjhapaya; cfnijjhapeti qv
sv nijjhayati2], hard to make see or understand, hard to
convince; Nidd I 326,1o (na hi sub binayo ti ...
duppaññapayo -o duppekkhapayo duppasadayo ti;
Nidd-a I 370,7: -o ti cittena v1matrJsitva gahai_latthatrJ
punappunatrJ nijjhapayitutrJ dukkho ); Mi1141 ,6 (pañho
gambh1ro sunipu1_1o -o).
dunnitthariya, mfn. [du(s) + *nitthariya, fpp of
nittharati qv ?], hard to be passed over; Nidd-a I 439,16
(--taya ca jati yeva kan taro jatikantaro ).
dunnibbapaya, mfn. [du(s) + *nibbapaya; cfnibbapeti qv
sv nibbayati], hard to extinguish or cool; It-a II 117,22
(mahaparijaha ca honti -a).
dunnibbetha, mfn. [du(s) + *nibbe¡ha; cfnibbe¡heti],
dunnibbethiya
hard to disentangle, to explicate; Mil 155,2 (pañho
sumahanto -o, Be, Ce so; Ee dunnibbedho; Se
dunnibodho); 233,13 (pañho gambh!ro -o, Be, Ce so; Ee
dunnibbedho; Se dunnivedho); - see also dunnive!ha,
dunnive!haya.
dunnibbethiya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of nibbe!heti, or +
nibbe!hiya ?], hard to disentangle, to explicate;
Mil 113,28 (pañho sukhumo -o, Ce so; Be, Ee
dunnive!hiyo; Se dunniveghiyo); 161,3 (pañho ...
gambhiro -o, Ce so; Be, Ee dunnive!hiyo; Se omits); -
see also dunnive!hiya.
dunnimmadaya, mfn. [du(s) + *nimmadaya;
cfnimmadeti], hard to quiet, subdue; ? Nidd I 29,3
(kama hi loke duppahaya ... -a; cfNidd-a I 104,26: -a ti
amadam nimmadam katum na sakka).
dunniva~a, mfn. [du.(s) + ;nivara1; S. dumivara], hard to
hold back; hard to stop; Cp-a 297,26 (mattamahagajanarp
viya --bhavato ).
dunnivaraya, mfn. [du(s) + *nivaraya; cfnivareti and
S. dumivarya], difficult to restrain, hard to hold back;
Dhp 33 (cittarp ... -arp); 324 (kuñjaro ... -o); Mil21,2o
(Nagaseno .. . -o); - sudunnivaraya, mfn., very
difficult to restrain; Th 1111 (cittarp ... -arp, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se sudunnivariyarp).
dunnivetha, mfn. [du(s) + *nive!ha; cfnive!heti qv
sv nibbe!heti], hard to disentangle, to explicate;
Mil 90,6* (pañhe -e saniggahe, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dunnive!!he duniggahe);- see also dunnibbe!ha.
dunnivethaya, mfn. [du(s) + *nive!haya; cfnive!heti qv
sv nibbe!heti], hard to grasp; ? hard to unwind,
disentangle; ? Nidd I 29,4 (kama hi loke duppahaya ...
dunnimmadaya -a ... , Be, Ce so; Ee dunnivedhaya,
perhaps wr; Se, Nidd-a I 104 omit).
dunnivethiya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of nive!heti, or +
nive!hiya ?], hard to disentangle, to explicate;
Milll3,2s (pañho sukhumo -o, Be, Ee so; Ce
dunnibbe!hiyo; Se dunniveghiyo ); 161,3 (pañho ...
gambh!ro -o, Be, Ee so; Ce dunnibbe!hiyo; Se omits);
- see also dunnibbe!hiya.
dunnivedhaya, mfn. [du(s) + *nivedhaya; cf S.
nmlvyadh], hard to beat; ? Nidd I 29,4 (kama hi loke
duppahaya ... dunnimmadaya -a ... , Ee so, perhaps wr;
Be, Ce dunnive!haya; Se, Nidd-a I 104 omit).
dunnihara, mfn. [du(s) + *nihara; cfniharati 1], difficult to
remo ve or extract or expel; Mp II 156,13 (asa ...
duppajaha ti duccaja -a, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dunn!hara);
Nidd-a I 115,4 ([visame] nivi!!ha ti pavit!ha -a, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce dunnlhara); 187,28 (antotudanataya --taya ca
sallarp, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se dunniharavataya; f.
Pa!is-a 409,16: eds dunniharaviyataya); - see also
dunn!hara (sv nlhara 1).
dupatta in Ee at V in I 290,3 is wr for dupatta qv sv du 2.
dupatthaka, mfn., see sv upatthaka.
dupahana,f, see sv upahana.
duputta\ m., see sv putta.
duputta 2 , mfn., see sv du 2 •
duppajaha, mfn. [du(s) + *pajaha; cfpajahati], hard to
give up; A I 86,2s (asa -a); Ja I 315,2o (lobhadhamma
-a); Sv 666,7 (te na sunimmadaya ti .. . -a dujjaya ti
attho); Ps III !66,22: Mp II 156,18 (jivitasaya -tta, Be,
0
418 duppativinodaya
Ce, Se so; Ee wr duppajahanta); - see also
duppajaheyya, duppahaya, duppaheyya, suppajaha.
duppajaheyya, mfn. [du(s) + *pajaheyya, fpp of
pajahati qv], hard to give up, get rid of; Th-a II 208,25
(dujjaho -o); - see also duppajaha, duppahaya,
duppaheyya.
duppaññaya, n. [from duppañña qv sv pañña], want of
understanding or intelligence; Pet 175,6 (asaddhiyarp
dussi!yarp maccherarp -arp ca patipakkhena pah!na
bhavanti, Ee so, wr ?; Ce dupaññarp; Be yarp maccherarp
duppaññarp ca yarp ca patipakkhena).
duppaññapaya, mfn. [du(s) + *paññapaya;
cfpaññapeti qv sv pajanati)], hard to teach, hard to
inform; Nidd I 326,1o (nivissavadi .. . dubbinayo -o
dunnijjhapayo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se duññapayo, perhaps
wr; Nidd-a I 370,6: -o ti ñapeturp cittena labbhapeturp
dukkho).
duppati-anaya, mfn. [du(s) + pati + anaya 1], hard to bring
back; Ja IV 43,1 * (pa~a -a; 43,4·: matassa nama p~arp
pati-aneturp na sakka);- see also pati-aneturp.
duppaticivara¡p in Ee at Sp 1206,9 and duppaticivarassa
in Ee at Sp 1206,17 are wrr; Be, Ce dupat!a-; Se
duppa!a-.
duppatijaggiya, mfn. [du(s) + *pa!ijaggiya, fpp of
patijaggati qv; (or + *patijaggiya, cf S. jagarya)], hard to
take care of, Spk III 9,17 (ime ca cattaro asivisa
durupaghaha -a); see also appatijaggiya,
sukhapatijaggiya (sv sukha).
duppatinissaggi(n), mfn. [from du(s) + pa!inissagga],
unwilling to let go, renounce; hard to persuade to give
up; Vin II 89,27 (sandighiparamasi hoti adhanagahi -I) f.
D III 45,1s (Sv 839,15: Arittho viya na sakka hoti
pa!inissajjapetun ti -!); M II 241,22; Vism 107,3
(adhanagahita duppatinissaggita); PsI 190,32 (dukkhena
kicchena kasirena bahurp pi karavarp dassetva na sakka
patinissaggarp katun ti -I, ye attano uppannarp ditthirp
idam eva saccan ti da)harp ga~hitva api buddhadihi
kara~arp dassetva vuccamana na patinissajjanti, tesarp
etarp adhivacanarp, Be, Se so; Ce patinissaggi katun ti;
Ee saggarp katun ti -!); - see also patinissaggi(n),
suppatinissaggi(n).
duppatipajja, mfn. [du(s) + *patipajja; cf pa!ipajjati],
hard to follow, to travel along: Dhp-a III 455,2
(sappatibhayo -o maggo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
duppatipanno ).
duppatimantiya, duppatimantiya, mfn. [du(s) +
*pa!imantiya, fpp of patimanteti], hard to answer or
refute; hard to argue with; M II 147,27 (dhammavadino
ca pana -a bhavanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee duppati-; Ps III
408,14: -a ti amhadisehi adhammavadihi dukkhena
pa!imantetabba honti).
duppativijjha, mfn. [du(s) + *pativijjha; cfpativijjhati],
hard to penetrate, to understand; D III 272,14 (eko
dhammo -o); S V 454,9 (--tararp pativijjhanti); Nidd I
412,zs; Spk III 302,3 (-ani cattari saccani); Th-a I 234,22
(--tta); As 61,5 (vijjutobhasena muttavu~anarp vi ya -am
idarp cittarp, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se duppa!ividdham);
Vibh-a 49,33 (anattalakkhavarp .. . avibhütarp -arp
duddipanarp duppaññapanarp).
duppativinodaya, mfn. [du(s) + *pativinodaya;
duppativinodiya
cfpativinodeti], hard to get rid of; Vin V 129,34 (pañca
uppanna -a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se duppativinodiya) f- A III
184,29 (-a); Vin V 129,37 (uppannaq¡ gamiyacittaq¡ -aq¡,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se duppativinodiyaq¡) f- Vism 94,18 (-aq¡,
Ce so; Be, Ee, Se duppativinodaniyaq¡); - see also
duppativinodiya, suppativinodaya.
duppativinodiya, duppativinodaniya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of
pativinodeti qv], hard to dispel, get rid of; Vin V 129,34
(pañca uppanna -a, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce duppativinodaya;
f-A III 184,29: eds duppativinodaya); 129,37 (uppannaq¡
gamiyacittaq¡ -aq¡, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce duppativinodayaq¡)
= As 67,2o (Se so; Be, Ce duppativinodaniyaq¡; Ee
duppativinodaniyaq¡) f- Vism 94,18 (gamikacittaq¡ nama
duppativinodaniyaq¡, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
duppativinodayaq¡);- see also duppativinodaya.
duppatara, mfn. [du(s) + *patara1, see patarati;
S. du~prataraj, difficult to be crossed or overcome;
Nidd I 29,4 (k ama hi loke duppahaya... duttara -a
dussamatikkama) f- 31,12 (dummuñca ... duttara -a) f-
76,1 (durativatta ... duttara -a ... diqhinivesa) f- 429,31
(kamapañko ... duttaro -o).
duppadalaya, duppada!iya, mfn. [du(s) + *padalaya,
cfpadaleti; or + *padaliya2, fpp ofpadaleti qv], hard to
pierce, totear apart; Th 680 (pabbato -o, Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se duppada!iyo; Th-a III 5,3o: pacurajanehi padaletuq¡
asakkuiJeyyataya -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee duppadaliyo).
duppadharpsa, mfn. [du(s) + *padhaq¡sa: Lj'padhaq¡sati
and S. du~pradhar~a], hard to assail or destroy; Ja IV
344,29* (ko ñati susamagate -e padhaq¡seti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee appadhaq¡se);- see also appadhaq¡sa.
1
duppadharpsita, f, abstr. [cfpadhaq¡seti ], the state of
being hard to assail; Pj 1 33,26 (acchambhita -a
parüpakkamena amaraiJata, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
appadhaq¡sita; = It-a II 56,5: eds duppadhaq¡siyata).
duppadharpsiya, mfn. [du(s) + *padhaq¡siya, fpp of
1
padhaq¡seti qv; S. lex. du~pradhr~ya], hard to attack;
unassailable: Vin V 3,12* (gajo va -o); S JI 264,8 (kulani
appitthikani bahupurisani . . . -ani honti corehi); A JI
46,15* (durasado duppasaho gambhiro -o); Ap 32,27
(dhara~Jiq¡ pi sugambhiraq¡ bahalaq¡ -aq¡); Sp 578,25
(verlhi pi --taro) It-a JI 56,5 (acchambhita --ta);
Vin-vn 1962; - see also appadhaq¡siya, duppadhaq¡sa,
duppadhaq¡sita, suppadhaq¡siya.
duppamuñca, mfn. [du(s) + *pamuñca; cfpamuñcati],
hard to loase; difficult to untie; hard to release; SI
77,17* (bandhanaq¡ . . . -aq¡) = Dhp 346; Sn 773
(icchanidana bhavasatabaddha te -a; Nidd I 31,2: te va
bhavasatavatthu -a satta va etto dummocaya).
duppamuñcana, mfn. [du(s) + *pamuñcana;
cfpamuñcati], hard to loase; Nidd-a I 457,26 (-' -aqhena
Marassa bandhanaq¡).
duppamocaya, ff!fn. [du(s) + *pamocaya; cfpamoceti qv
sv pamuñcati], hard to be released; Nidd I 31,2 (satta va
etto -a).
duppariccaja, duppariccajja, mfn. [du(s) + *pariccaja;
cfpariccajati], hard to give up; hard to give away;
Nidd I 29,3 (kama hi loke duppahaya duccaja -a, Ce, Se
so; Be, Ee duppariccajja); Sv 304,21 (attano santaka
kaka!Jika pi parassa -a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se duppariccajja);
Mp IV 24,14 (duddadan ti -aq¡ maharahabhaiJ<;!akaq¡).
419 dubbala
duppariyogaha, mfn. [du(s) + *pariyogaha;
cfpariyogabati], hard to go deeply into; hard to reach
the bottom of, hard to fathom; MI 487,35 (tathagato
gambhlro appameyyo -o seyyatha pi mahasamuddo, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se duppariyogiqho; Ps III 199,6: -o ti
dubbagabo dujjano, Ce, Ee so; Se duppariyoga)ho ti du-
oga)ho; Be du-ogabo) f- S IV 376,24 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
appariyogaho; Spk III 113,16: -o ti a)hakaga~Janaya
pamaiJagahanatthaq¡ durogabo); Mil70,22 (maha-
samuddo ... -o, Be, Ce, E e so; Se duppariyoga)ho);
Vism 584,2o (so --tta gambhlro); Ud-a 10,31
(alabbhaneyyapatigha -a).
dupparivajjaya, mfn. [du(s) + *parivajjaya; cfparivajjeti],
hard to avoid; Ja IV 254,11' (ninda nama -a, Ee so; Be,
Ce dupparivajjiya; Se duparivajjanlya).
duppasaha, mfn. [du(s) + *pasaha; cfpasahati and
S. du~prasaha], hard to overcome; irresistible; D III
78,29 (nabaq¡ bhikkhave aññaq¡ ekabalaq¡ pi
samanupassami evaq¡ -aq¡ yathayidaq¡ bhikkhave
Marabalaq¡; Sv 858,5: -aq¡ durabhisambhavaq¡); A JI
46,15* (durasado -o); Ja II 219,21* foil. (giri-m-iva
anilena -o -o aham ajja tadisena); Ap 19,s (isi ...
uggateja -a); 319,13 (durasado -o... mahavlro);
Mil 21 ,2o (Nagaseno ... -o).
duppasadaya, mfn. [du(s) + *pasadaya; cfpasadeti qv
sv pas!dati], hard to convince; Nidd I 326,11
(dubbinayo ... dunnijjhapayo duppekkhapayo -o ti, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce duppasadiyo; Nidd-a I 370,9foll.: citte
pasadaq¡ uppadetuq¡ dukkho).
duppassa, mfn. [du(s) + *passa2], hard to see; Nidd 1
412,28 (duddasam duddakkham -am).
duppahaya, mfn .. [du(s) + *pahaya2, fpp of pajahati qv],
hard to give up, get rid of, Nidd 1 29,3 (na hi suppahaya
ti k ama hi 1oke -a duccajja ... ; Nidd-a 1 104,24: -a ti
sukhena pahatabba na honti); - see also duppajaha,
duppajaheyya, duppaheyya, suppahaya.
duppaheyya, mfn. [du(s) + *paheyya, fpp of pajahati qv],
hard to give up, get rid of; Th-a l 113,24 (yasma va
samucchinnorambhagiyasaq¡yojananaq¡ pi kesañci
ariyanaq¡ uddhambhagiyasaq¡yojanani -ani honti, tasma
suppaheyyato -am eva dassento, Be, Se so; Ce
duppajaheyyani; Ee duppajaheyyani ... duppajaheyyam
eva); - see also appaheyya, duppajaha, duppajaheyya,
duppahaya, suppaheyya.
duppekkhapaya, mfn. [du(s) + *pekkhapaya;
cfpekkhapeti qv sv pekkhati], hard to make see; Nidd I
326,11 (dubbinayo ... dunnijjhapayo -o duppasadayo ti,
Be, Se so; Ce duppekkhapiyo; Ee duppekkhapayo;
Nidd-a 1 370,s: -o ti ikkhapayituq¡ dukkho, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee duppekkhiyo ti).
dubbagaha, mfn. [du(s) + *vagaba; cf avagahati and
S. vagaba ?], hard to plunge into; hard to fathom; Ps III
199,6 (duppariyogaho ti -o dujjano, Ce, Ee so; Se
duppariyoga)ho ti du-oga)ho; Be duppariyoga)ho ti du-
ogabo).
dubbaca, mfn., see sv vaca.
dubbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup durvati, Wg § 15:63], hurts;
Sadd 406,4 (dubb! dhubb! hiq¡sattha: . . . -ati dubba
dhubbati).
dubbala, mfn., see sv bala.
dubbalaka
dubbalaka, mfn. [dubbala + ki; BHS durbalaka], (one)
who is weak, of little strength; V in II 268,15 (-aiTl
bhikkhuiTl passitva); MI 435,11 (-o puriso); Jall 80,16*
(t~ m~ paiJ.ko ajjhabhavi yatha -aiTl tatha).
dubbalikii in Ee at Th! 263 is prob. wr; Be patalibbalita,
Ce, Se patalippalita qqv sv pata!!.
dubbalikata, mfn. [pp of *dubbala + karoti], weakened;
Mil 289,6 (cittadubbal!karai).a dhamma yehi -aiTl citt~
na samma samadhiyati asavanaiTl khayaya); - see also
dubbailkarai).a.
dubbalikaraqa, mf(-a, -!)n., n. (and -!,f ?) [from
*dubbala + karoti], l. (mfn.) weakening; MI 276,18 (ime
pañca nivarai).e pahaya cetaso upakkilese paññaya -e);
A 111 63,14foll. (kamacchando bhikkhave avarai).o
nlvaral)o cetaso ajjharuho paññaya -o . . . vicikiccha
bhikkhave avarai).a nivaral)a cetaso ajjharüha paññaya
-a);- 2. (nj ) the weakening (of); D 111 183,1 (cha ...
adinava suramerayamajjapamadatthananuyoge san-
dighika dhanañjani ... roganaiTl ay atan~ ... paññaya -i
tv eva chagh~ pad~ bhavati; cfSv 945,26joll.: [sa
sura] kammassakatapaññ~ dubbal~ karoti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr kammassakatapuññaiTl); As 246,16 (dvinnaiTl
corajetthakan~ -aiTl); - see also dubbalakaral)a
(sv bala), dubbalikata.
dubbalya, dubballa, n. [from dubbala; cf S. daurbalya],
weakness; unfitness; V in III 23,34 (yo pana bhikkhu ...
sikkhaiTl apaccakkhaya -aiTl anavikatva methunaiTl
dhammaiTl patiseveyya . . . parajiko hoti asaiTlvaso;
Sp 246,3foll.: yasma -e avikate pi sikkha apaccakkhata
va hoti sikkhaya pana paccakkhataya -~ avikatam eva
hoti tasma -aiTl anavikatva ti imina padena na koci
visesattho labbhati); IV 241,3 (sailgho . . . akkhantiya
vebhassiya -a evam aba; 241,37: -a ti apakkhata); SI
221,26* (nahaiTl bhaya na -a khamami Vepacittino); PsI
94,15 (jighacchaya -ena ca pareta); Vibh-a 102,25
(jaradukkhaiTl tattha annapanarahitassa -~ viya
daghabbaiTl, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee dubbalam); Sadd 553,19
(kipa dubballe); 559,19 (sara-e);- ifc see jighaccha-.
dubba, f [S. durva], a kind of grass; SAF: conch grass,
durba grass, Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers.; Abh 599
(saddalo e' eva -a); Vism 543,23 (go1omaviloma-
vis~adadhitilapitthadini ca 0
-sarabhütil)akad!n~
[paccayo], Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dabbha-; Vism-mht [Be] 11
292,26: golomavi1omani -aya); Sadd 406,4 (-a ti
2 Ce so; E e, Se dubbutthapana dussamutthapana).
dabbatil)aiTl);- see also dabba .
dubbijiina, mfn., see sv duvijana.
dubbiññiipaya, mfn., see sv duviññapaya.
1 DI 11,7 (suvughika bhavissati -a bhavissati); Ja 11 80,2
dubbinivatta, mfn. [du(s) + *vinivatta ; cfvinivattati],
hard to tum away from; hard to give up; hard to tum
back; Nidd I 29,5 (kama hi loke duppahaya ... duttara
duppatara dussamatikkama -a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
dubbitivatta ti; Nidd-a I 104,3o: -a ti nivattetuiTl dukkha,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dubbitivatta ti) t 31,13 (dummuñca ...
duttara duppatara dussamatikkama -a, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dubbltivatta) t 76,2 (durativatta ... -a ti ditthlnivesa, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se dubb!tivatta ti); Nidd-a I 105,4
(samuddav!ci viya -a ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dubbHivatta).
dubbinivijjha, mfn. [du(s) + *vinivijjha; cfvinivijjhati],
hard to pierce through, hard to penetrate; Ja V 46,2o
(uragena pi -aiTl ghanavanagahanaiTl); Ps 11 266,13
420 dubbha
(kal)takagumbagahan~ ca disva -~ etan ti ñatva, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee dubbinivighaiTl).
dubbinivittha, mfn., see sv vinivigha.
dubbinivethaya, mfn. [du(s) + *vinivethaya;
cfvinivetheti], hard to unwind, disentangle; ? Nidd I
29,4 (kama hi 1oke duppahaya... dunnimmadaya
dunnivethaya -a duttara ... , Be, Ce so; Ee dunnivedhaya
dubbinivedhaya; Se dubbinivedhaya; Nidd-a I 104,27: -a
ti vinivethan~ mocanaiTl katuiTl na sakka, eds so);
Nidd-a I 105,2 (nagapasaiTl vi ya -a).
dubbinivedhaya, mfn. [du(s) + *vinivedhaya], hard to
thrust away; ? hard to pierce; ? Nidd I 29,4 (kama hi
1oke duppahaya . . . dunnimmadaya dunnivedhaya -a
duttara ... , E e so, but prob. wr; Se omits dunnivedhaya;
Be, Ce dunnivethaya dubbinivethaya; Nidd-a I 104,27:
dubbinivethaya ti).
dubbinl kena in Ee at Vv-a 68,11 is wr for dubbinite na
(Be, Ce, Se so).
dubbinodaya, duvinodaya, mfn. [du(s) + *vinodaya;
cfvinodeti], hard to drive away or dispel; Vin V 133,21*
(in uddana: apuñña duvinodaya, Ce, Ee so; Be
apuññaduvinodaya; Se duvinodiya); Ap 304,9 (dukkh~
me-~).
dubbisodha, mfn. [du(s) + *visodha; cfvisodheti qv
sv visujjhati], hard to clean; Sn 279 (guthakupo yatha ...
yo evariipo assa, -o hi saiJ.gai).o); Vism54,11 (-o, Se so;
Be, Ce, Ee dubbisodhano).
dubbitivatta, mfn. [du(s) + *vitivatta1; cfv!tivattati], hard
to pass beyond; hard to quit; Nidd I 29,5 (kama hi loke
duppahaya ... duttara duppatara dussamatikkama -a, E e,
Se so; Be, Ce dubbinivatta ti; Nidd-a I 104,3o: -a ti
nivattetuiTl dukkha, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
dubbinivatta ti) t 31,13 (dummuñca ... duttara duppatara
dussamatikkama -a, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dubbinivatta) t
76,2 (durativatta ... -a ti ditthinivesa, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
dubbinivatta ti) t 429,3t (kamapaiJ.ko ... durativatto ...
-o ti).
dubbujjha, mfn. [du(s) + *bujjha; cfbujjhati], hard to
understand; Nidd I 412,28 (duddasan ti duddas~
duddakkh~ duppassaiTl -aiTl duranubujjhaiTl
duppativijjhaiTl).
dubbutthapaya, mfn. [du(s) + vughapaya; cfvughapeti qv
sv vughati], hard to raise; hard to remove; Nidd I 31,24
(duruddhara dussamuddhara -a dussamutthapaya, Be,
dubbutthi,f, see sv vughi.
dubbulthika, f [dubbughi + ka2], lack of rain; drought;
(imasmiiTl s~vacchare suvutthika bhavissati imasmiiTl
-a ti jananti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se duvughika); VI 487,6
(tada Kaliilgaraghe -a ahosi); Sp 87,2 (Varadipe -a
ahosi dubbhikkhaiTl dussass~).
dubbuddhi(n), mfn. [from du(s) + buddhi; cf S.
durbuddhi], foolish, ignorant; Vin III 172,15 (manussa
assaddha appasanna -ino); Ja I 445,23 (ayaiTl hatthl
puññiddhiya samannagato na tadisassa mandapuññassa
-ino anucchaviko); 1175,7 (-ino bala); V 427,31' (-i
tul)hi hohi); Ps IV 160,2 (koci -1 navapabbajito).
dubbha, dubha (and dobbha, dobha ?), m. and mfn. [cf S.
dambha], injuring, hurting; deceiving; D 11 243,1*
dubbhaka
(kodho mosavajjaJ11 nikati ca -o, Be so; Ce, Se dobbho;
Ee dobho; Sv 665,26: mittadubbhana1akkhai_!o -o, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se dobbho); - ifc see mitta-, sami-; - dubbho
in Ee at Vin II 203,12* is wr for dubbhe (Be, Ce, Se,
It 86,9* so); - adubbha, adübha, m. and mfn., l. (m.)
lack of deceit or injuring; friendliness; V in I 347,37
(Brahmadatto ca Kasiraja Dlghavu ca kumaro
aññamaññassa jlvita111 adaJ11SU pai.J.iJ11 ca aggahesu111
sapatha111 ca akaJ11SU addübhaya, Be so; Ce adubhaya; Ee
adrübhaya, prob. wr; Se adühaya); S I 225,19 (sapassu ca
me Vepacitti -aya ti; Spki 345,2foll.: mayi --ttaya
sapathaJ11 karohl ti, Ee so; Be, Se -' -atthaya; Ce
adubbhanataya); Ja I 180,22 (satta rajano pana attano
-aya sapathaJ11 karetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adübhaya);
V 222,14* (sadhu mittana111 addubbho, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
-o; 226,23·: mittassa adubbhanabhavo, Ee so; Be
adussanabhavo; Ce, Se adüsanabhavo) quoted Sv 171,16*
and Pj II 176,18* (Be, Se so; Ce addubho; Ee addübho);
Ja VI 460,21 (ubho pi aññamaññ3111 -aya sapath3111
kari111su, Be so; Ce, Ee adübhaya; Se --taya); -
2. (mfn.) (one) who does not injure or deceive; Ja VI
199,15* (adübhassa tuv3111 dübhi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
adunhassa tuva111 dubbhi); - --piii.J.i, m., (one with) an
innocent hand; Pv 21:8 (--piii.J.I dahate mittadubbhiJ11;
Pv-a 116,7 foil.: ahiJ11sakahattho hatthas3111yato ...
appadunho pugga1o atthato t3111 dahati nama); Ja VI
310,18* (--piii.J.iJ11 dahate mittadubbho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
a113111 ca pai.J.iJ11; 311.6·: --piii.J.in ti adubbhakaJ11 attano
bhuñjanahattham eva dahanto hi mittadubbh! nama hoti,
1t1 allahatthassa ajjhapana111 nama aya111 dutiyo
sadhunaradhammo, Be, Ce so; E e, Se adrübhakam).
dubbhaka, dübhaka 1, mfl-ika)n. [dubbha + k~2 ; cf S.
dambhaka], (one) who injures, deceives; Pv 26:13
(rathakiirl ca dubbhika; Pv-a 175,29: dubbhika ti
mittadubbhika mittanaJ11 badhika); Mp I 353,2
(Padumavatiya dubbhika pañcasata itthiyo, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee dübhika) = Thl-a 181 ,3o; - ifc se e citta-
(sv citta\ mitta-; - adubbhaka, mfn., not injuring or
deceiving; J a VI 311 ,6· ( -3111, Be, Ce so; E e, Se
adrübhakaJ11, prob. wr).
dubbhattha, mfn., see sv bhasati.
dubbhati, dübhati (and dühati \ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dabhnoti;
cf also S. druhyati (and dhürvati ?)], injures, hurts ( +
acc., gen. or loe.); deceives, betrays; Dhatup 213 (dubha
jigiJ11say3111); Dhatum 309 (dubha jigiJ11sane); Vin II
203,12* (adunhassa hi yo -e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -o)=
It 86,9*; SI 84,15 (kiñcapi kho myay3111 raja magadho
Ajatasattu vedehiputto adubbhantassa -ati atha ca pana
me bhagineyyo hoti); 225,10 (yo me assa paccatthiko
tassa piiha111 na -eyyan ti); Th 1129 (na nüna ma111
-issasi punappunaJ11, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce nanu m3111 ... );
Ja II 54,2 (yatha sappo tayi na -ati eviiha111 akasiJ11);
IIl 192,24* (ev3111 ce ma111 viharant3111 Su bah u samma
-asi; 193,4·: -asi hanitu111 icchasi); 212,27 (ahaJ11
maharaja tayi na -ami tva111 pana m3111 marehl ti tassa
hatthe asi111 thapesi); N 262,19* (na tv eviih3111 ruru111 -e;
262,23·: na tv eva ah3111 .. . -issami); V 72,11 * (kut!hl
ki1asl bhavati yo mittana111 idha -ati, Ee so; Be
mittanidha -ati; Ce, Se mittiin3111 idha dubbhl; 74,zy: yo
idha imasmiJ111oke mittana111 -ati hiJ11sati, Ee so; Ce, Se
421 dubbhida
idha 1oke; Be idha 1oke mittani); 487 ,8* (ta111 tadisa111
pubbakicca111 saranto -e ah3111 tassa kath3111 janinda);
503,30* (na jatu -ema imassa rañño); VI 14,7- (bahü na111
upajlvanti yo mittiin3111 na -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
dübhati; cf Sadd 695,zo: keci pana na dühatl ti pa!hanti);
491 ,8* (na ciih3111 tassa -eyy3111, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
tasmiJ11); Ps III 329,15 (AhiJ11sakamiii.J.avo tumhiik3111
antare -an ti); - part.pr. (a) dubbha(t), dübha(t) mfn.,
JaN 261 ,14* (yo -ato manusassa na dubbhi, Be, Ce so;
Ee dübhato; Se dubbhino); (b) neg. adubbhanta, mfn., SI
84,16; (e) neg. adubbhamana, mfn., Ja IV 274,22·;- aor.
3 sg. dubbhi, Ja III 13,15 (amacco rajantepure -i);
2 sg. dubbhi, Ja VI 310,1 * (ma e' as su mittesu kadaci -i,
Se so; Be dubbh!; Ce, E e dübhl); Th-a III 158,7;
2 pl. dubbhittha, dubbhittho, Ja V 72,10* (massu
mittana111 -ittho); 245,29 (tumhe pi kumara ma rañño
-ittha ti); - inf dubbhituJ11, Ja II 125,19 (attano
upakaresu sevakesu piyasu ca itthlsu -itu111 na sakka ti);
VI 140,5* (tesa111 pi tadisan3111 icchanti -itu111 maharaja);
- absol. dubbhitva, Ja IV 79,26 (antepure -itva); -
fpp (a) dubbheyya, mfn., Ja V 71,17* (-eyyaJ11 m3111
amaññatha; 73,24·: -eyyan ti -itabbaJ11 vadhitabbaJ11, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dübheyyan ti dübbhitabbaJ11 ... );
(b) dubbhitabba, mfn. and n., impers., Ja V 73,24·; 87,21*
(tasma hi mittana111 na -itabbaJ11).
dubbhana, dübhana, n. and mfn. [from dubbhati; cf S.
dambhana], l. (n.) m;urmg, deceit; Pv-a 114,11
(mittadubbho ti mittesu -3111 tes3111 anatthuppadanaJ11);
Cp-a 150,16 (attano mittesu upakarisu 0 -sllaJ11, Be, Se so;
Ce dubhana-; Ee dübhana- ); - ifc se e pantha-; -
2. (mfn.) injuring, mistreating; Ja IV 353,15' (mitta-
dubbho hl ti mittana111 o -puriso hi papako 1amako nama,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e mittadübho ... dübhanapuriso ... ); -
ifc see mitta-; - adubbhana, n., not injuring; Ja V
226,23' (--bhavo, Ee so; Be adussana-; Ce, Se adüsana- );
VI311,11' (mittesu -3111 nama); see also
adubbhanaka.
dubbhi, dübhi,f [cfS. dabdhi], injury; Jai 412,6* (yo me
pita -i van e karoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dübhi; 412,w foil.:
evarüp3111 mittadubbhikamma111 karoti, Be, Se so; Ce
mittadubhi-; Ee mittadübhi-); IV 57,8* H111 karoti
dummedho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dübhiJ11; 58,8·:
dubbhicitta111 uppadeti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dübhi-);
VI 59,4* (kacci nu te janapada ... -i111 ak3111su, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se dübhiJ11); 182,19* (ev3111 ka1yii!.J.akiirissa kiJ11
moha -im icchasi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dübhim; 182,23·:
mittassa dubbhikamma111 katu111 icchasi, Be so; Ce
mittadubhlkamm3111; Ee mittadübhikamma111; Se
padubbhikammaJ11).
dubbhi(n), dübhi(n), mfn. [cfS. dambhin], injuring,
hurting; deceitful; Ja III 73,28* (1ahucittassa -ino, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee dübhino); V 87,12* (adunhassa tuva111 -i -1 ca
pisui.J.o e' asi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dübhi dübh!; 87,14·:
ambho -i tva111 adutthassa mittassa -1 ... , Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee dübhi ... dübh! ... ); 445,3* (akataññüna -ina111 ...
thlnaJ11, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dübhin3111); - ifc see
panthadübhi(n), mitta-.
dubbhika,f, see sv dubbhaka.
dubbhida, mfn. [du(s) + *bhida; S. durbhida], difficult to
be broken or torn asunder; Th 680 (se1aJ11 bhetvana
dubhato
-atp, Be, Ce so; E e, Se chetvana; Th-a III 5,35: -an ti
yena kenaci aññlil).ena bhinditu!]1 asakku~eyyal]1
aññlil).asela!]1 vajirupamañlil).ena bhinditva, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se yen a kenaci ña~ena chinditu!]1 ... chinditva).
dubhato, ind. [du 2 + ubhato qv, and/or d- as sandhi
consonant; cfSadd 6l8,21 foil., 808,31 foil.], on both
sides; in both ways, in both respects; Ja VI 497,4* (-ato
vanavikase, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ubhato; 498,2·: -ato ti
ubhato, Ce, Ee so; Be -ato ti ubhayapassesu; Se ubhato
ti ubhato maggassa) quoted Sadd 618,25; Patis I 70,28*
(-ato vutthita pañña); Bv 1:14 (vedika sabbasov~~a -o
passesu nimmita; Bv-a 36,11 foil.: ubhosu passesu
nimm1ta, dakaro padasandhikaro); Vv 64:21
(obhasayantl -ato varitthiyo, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se ubhato);
V v-a 281,12 (duvaddhato ti dvlhi addhapassehi, -ato ca
thita ti pi pathanti so yev' attho); Patis-a 27,4 (-ato ti
ubhato dvayato ti va vuttal]1 hoti); - 0 -mukha, mfn.,
with an opening on both sides; Th 1134 (najatu bhastal]1
-al]1 chupe, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se, Th-a Ill159,18: ubhato-).
dubhaya, mfn. [du 2 + ubhaya qv, and/or d- as sandhi
consonant] (pl. nom. m. -o, n. -ani), pl.: both; sg.: of
both kinds; Sn 526 (-ani viceyya p~<;larani ajjhattatp
bahiddha ca, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce tadubhayani); 1007
(TodeyyaKappa -o; Pj Il 583,14: -o ti ubho); Ja III
442,4* (vajanti lokal]1 -mr tathavidha; 443,4· foil.:
ubhayalokam eva vajanti); VI 11 0,2o* (-ani passani
tudanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ubhayani; 110,33·: -anl ti
ubhayani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ubhayani ti ubhayani
passani); - acc. dubhaya!]1, also, as weil; ? Sn 517
(kappani viceyya kevalani satpsiiral]1 -al]1 cutüpapata!]1,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ubhayal]1; cfPj 11 426,31foil.: sattanal]1
cuti!]1 upapatan ti imal]1 ca ubhayal]1 viceyya).
dubheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup darbhayati,
Wg § 34:16: drbha sandarbhe], strings together;?
Sadd 556,11 (dubha santhambhe: -eti -ayati).
duma, m. [S. druma], a tree; Abh 540; Vv 84:14 (-a
e' ime niccaphalüpapanna); Th 527 (angarino dani -a
bhadante phalesino ); 528 (-ani phullani manoramani;
Th-a 11 224,3: -anl ti lingavipallasena vutta!]1, -a rukkha
ti attho); Ja I 272,2* (nayal]1 sadhuphalo -o); II 205,15*
(dijo -al]1 khí~aphalan ti ñatva aññal]1 samekkheyya);
268,1 * (oro ha -asma); V 204,25* (na nüna so han ti dume
kuthariya); VI 526,31 * ( -al]1 iva pathe jatal]1 sltacchayal]1
manoramal]1 ... ko me Vessantaral]1 vidü); Ap 15,15
(pupphino phalino -a); Cp 3:2:4 (-al]1 va anto susiratp,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -al]1 anto va); Mil 347,2* (anumanena
jananti ghayitva gandham uttamatp ... hessanti pupphita
-a); Ap-a 395,9 (dhunati kampatl ti -o dühati püreti
akasatalan ti va -o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se duhati); Sadd 374,8
(du gatiyal]1: davati -o);- 0 '-agga, m(jn). and n. [duma
+ agga 1], l. (m[fn].) the best of trees; Vv 35:4
(vividhadumaggasugandhasevital]1; V v-a 161,31 foil.:
nanavidhiinal]1 uttamarukkhanal]1 sobhanehi gandhehi
sevital]1); - 2. (n.) the top of a tree; Ja 11 155,2*
(-amha); Vl249,27* (-e); 507,11* (-esu plavangame, Be,
Ce so; Se dummaggesu; Ee wr -e suplavangame);
Ap 278,14 (pa!]1sukülatp -amhi vilaggitatp);
--parimajjita, mfn., cleaned with a stick; Ja V 156,1*
(--parimajjita ... danta tava sudassana; 157,1·: danta-
kaqhaparimajjita parisuddha);- 0 '-avhaya, mfn., (who
422 dummocaya
is) named after a tree; Th 64 (-aya uppanno; Th-a I
156,23: dumena ambena avhatabbataya Ambapaliya ti
attho);- 0 '-ayuta,mfn.,filled with trees; JaVI 121,6*
(nanapupphadumayuta; 121,23·: sa nadi nanapupphehi
dumehi ayuta); - o• -inda, m., the chief of trees, the
bodhi tree; Dip 1:7 (--mille); Mhv 19:33;
o• -uppala, m., a tree; SAF: yellow silk cotton,
Pterospermum acerifolium (L.) Willd.; Abh 570
(ka~ikaro -o);- -sakhaniketi(n), mfn., having a home
0
in the branches of a tree; Ja III 432,2 (sa ... -in!).
dumbeti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup tumbayati,
Wg § 32:114], distresses; Sadd 554,19 (dubi addane: ...
-eti -ayati).
dummaddaya, mfn. [du(s) + *maddaya; cfmaddeti], hard
to crush, hard to destroy; Ja 11 407,20' (duppasaha -a ajja
ime maya ti).
dummana, mfn. [cf S. durmanas], sad; low-spirited;
Abh723 (-o vimano); Vinii 253,18 (Mahapajapatl
Gotami na bhagava anujanati matugamassa ... pabbajjan
ti dukkhi -a assumukhl rudamana ... pakkami); D Il
22,20 (Vipassl kumaro antepuragato dukkhi -o
pajjhayati); A II 198,26 (so cakkhuna rupatp disva n' eva
su mano hoti na -o upekkhako viharati); Sn 449 (tato so
-o yakkho tatth' ev' antaradhayatha); Th 617 (sabbattha
-o balo si!esu asamahito); Ja II 155,22 (tassa kalakiriyaya
raJa sokabhibhüto ahosi dukkhi -o); VI473,17*
(suduccaja!]1 cajitvana paccha socami -o); Ap 587,9 (na
ca dukkhesu -a); Mil23,3o (vimano -o bhantacitto);
Sp 216,24 (-o ti dosena duqhamano virüpamano va
domanassabhibhütataya); Ap-a 290,29 (kopo citta-
ppakopo 0 -ta);- 0 -rüpa, mfn., very sad; Ja VI 264,1*.
dummijjha, n., see sv dummejjha.
dummukharüpa, dummukkharüpa, mfn., see
dummakkharüpa (sv makkha).
dummuñca, ~n:fn. [du(s) + *muñca; cfmuñcati], hard to
let go; Nidd I 31,3 foil. (sukha vedan a -a igha!]1 vatthu
-al]1 yobbañña!]1 -al]1 ... ).
dummejjha, dummijjha, n. [from dummedha qv
sv medha], unintelligence; ignorance; Nidd I 413,25
(añña~mr ... -mr balyal]1 moho ... ; cfNidd-a I 428,32:
yal]1 ... cittasantiinal]1 mejjharp bhaveyya suci vodanatp
tal]1 dutthal]1 mejjha!]1 imina ti -a!]1) t Dhs 390 t
Vibh 85,38 (Vibh-a 140,n: dummedhabhavataya -a!]1,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dummijjharp); Sadd 636,s (ekaro
ikaratp: dummijjha!]1 -al]1 va).
dummedhi(n), mfn. [from du(s) + medha], unintelligent;
ignorant; S I 25,24* (pamadarp anuyuñjanti bala -ino
jana) = Dhp 26 (Dhp-a I 257,17: -ino ti nippañña) =
Th 883.
dummocaniya, mfn. [du(s) + *mocaniya, prob. fpp of
moceti qv sv muñcati], difficult to be unloosed;
Ud-a 364,27 (--bhavena tattha patibaddha); Patis-a 412,31
(-' -aqhena pasabhütena mara~ en a baddho ).
dummocaya, mfn. [du(s) + *mocaya; cfmoceti q\·
sv muñcati, and S. durmoca], hard to unloose; hard to
make let go; Ja I 315,2o (cittarp nam' etal]1 kilesavasena
alllnal]1 -al]1 hoti); li 141 ,13· (kilesabandhanal]1
daqhatthanato kacchapo viya -mr hoti) = Dhp-a IV 56,1s
(Ee so; Be, Ce, Se dummociyal]1); Ja VI 213,24'
(manta ... -a; 216,2Y: macchena gilitabaliso viya -a):
dummocapaya
234,8* (anattha -a balisa ambujo va, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
attha); Nidd 1 31,16 (sukhaya vedanaya satta -a).
dummocapaya, mfn. [du(s) + *mocapaya; cfmocapeti qv
sv muñcati], hard to make let go; Mp III 86,13
(duppadhaJ11siyo ti -o, gahitagahal).aJTl vissajjapetu111 na
sakka ti attho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dummocayo);
duyittha, duyyiqha, mfn., see sv yajati.
duyyuja, duyyuñja, mfn. [du(s) + *yuja, *yuñja;
cfyuñjati], hard to engage with; Ja V 368,12* (paJ;~r!ita ...
atthe yuñjanti -e; 369,5· foil.: -e atthe yuñjanti gha!anti
vayamanti, Be, Ce so; E e duyyuñje; Se duyyujje).
1 duravagaha, mfn. [du(s) + avagaha; cfBHS duravagaha],
duyhati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of duhati qv.
dura is an occasional wr in E e for dura qv.
duraklamaip in Ee at Ja V 397,7* is wr for darak1amaJ11
(Be, Ce so; Se darathaJTl kila111).
durativatta, mfn. [du(s) + ativatta], hard to get beyond;
hard to escape from; Ud 15,4' (maccuno amisa111 -aJTl);
Nidd 1 76,1 (-a duttara... diqhinivesa); 429,3o
(kamapailko ... duraccayo -o duttaro ... ); - se e also
svativatta.
duratta\ mfn. [du(s) + atta(n)], wretched; unlovely; Ja V
90,23* (sokaqaya -aya ki111 rüpaJTl vijjate mama; 91,15:
duggatakapal).abhavappattaya attabhavaya); 270,8• (tato
vanta111 -anaJTl paresa111 bhuñjate sada).
duratta2 , mfn., see sv rañjati.
duratta3 , n., see dviratta sv dvi.
durattuip in Ee at Pv 15:4 is wr for durutta111 (Be, Ce, Se,
Pv 16:4 so).
duradhigamaniya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of adhigacchati qv],
hard to attain or understand; Ud-a 160,15
(ariyamaggana111 °-tta ime yoga duratikkama); - see
also duradhigama (sv adhigama).
duranubujjha, mfn. [du(s) + *anubujjha; cfanubujjhati],
hard to understand; Nidd 1 412,28 (duddasan ti ...
dubbujjha111 -a111 duppa!ivijjhaJ11).
duranurakkhiya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of anurakkhati qv],
hard to protect or guard; Vin III 149,2 (gihina111
bhikkhave dussa111harani bhogani sambhatani pi -ani).
1 2
duranusara, mfn. [du(s) + anusara ], hard to follow;
Bv-a 285,37 (raja balajanehi -o).
durannaya, mfn. [du(s) + annaya = anvaya; cf S.
duran vaya], l. hard to accomplish; difficult to find out,
to fathom; hard to follow; S 1 19,4• (sata111 dhammo -o,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se duranvayo; Spk 1 59,6: duranugamano
duppüro ti attho) = Ja 11 86,2* (86,9· foil.: -o ti
phalasambandhavasena dujjano . . . api ca -o ti
duradhigamo, Be, Ce so; Se duradhigamo; Ee
durabhigamo, prob. wr); Dhp 93 (akase va sakuntana111
padaJ11 tassa -a111; Dhp-a 11 175,21: na sakka ñatu111) =
Th 92 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se duranvaya111);
2. intractable; ? Sn 243 (natthikadi!!hl visama -a; Pj 11
287,1: -a ti duviññapaya); 251 (niramagandho asito -o;
Pj 11 293,8: kenaci netu111 asakku~eyyatta -o dunneyyo,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se omit dunneyyo).
durabhigamo in Ee at Ja 11 86,11· is prob. wr for
duradhigamo (Be, Ce so; Se duradhigamo).
durabhibhavanlya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of abhibhavati],
hard to be overpowered; Ud-a 59,14 (0 -tta); Bv-a 135,15
(durasado ti ... -o ti attho).
durabhiyana, mfn. [du(s) + abhiyana], hard to approach
423 duruddhara
or attack; Vism 585,3o (nananayagaha~ato -a111, Ee, Se
so; Be, Ce duratiyana111) = Vibh-a 199,10 (Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se duratiyana111).
durabhirama, n. [du(s) + abhirama; cfabhiramati],
difficulty of delight in; Dhp 302 (duppabbajja111 -a111;
Dhp-a III 462,12foll.: pabbajitenapi ... abhiramitu111
dukkha111); M 1 16,31 (dukkaraJ11 pavivekaJTl -a111 ekatte)
=A V 202,5.
durabhisambhavana, mfn. [du(s) + abhisambhavana],
hard to master; Mp 11 98,3 (akampanlyaghena balani
nama tatha 0 aqhena anajjhomaddana!!hena ca).
hard to go deep into; hard tofathom; Vism516,13foll.
(purimani ca dve [saccani] sabhagani o• -atthena
gambhiratta lokiyatta sasavatta ca ... pacchimani pi dve
sabhagani gambhlrattena o -tta lokuttaratta anasavatta ca,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -ttena gambhiratta)
Pa!is-a 199,24 foil.; Th-a 11 178.31 (anupacita-sambharehi
o -taya alabbhaneyyapatiqhataya ca su!!hu gambhlro ).
duravabodhaniya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp of (caus. of?)
avabujjhati], hard to perceive, to know; (hard to
teach; ?) Vism 583,32 (eva111
jatipaccayasamudagatatthassa -ato)= Vibh-a 197,5.
durajana, mfn. [du(s) + *ajana; cfajanati], hard to
understand; hard to know; S IV 127 ,24' (passa
dhamma111 -a111, Be, Ce so; Ee phassa; Se duvijana111) =
Sn 762 (eds so); Ja 1 295,8* (thinaJTl bhavo -o
macchassevodake gata111); 490,6* (etaJTl hi te -a111);
IV217,24' (evaJ11 -ani manussahadayani, Ce, Ee so; Be
dubbijana111 nama manussahadayan ti; Se eva111 dujjana
manussahadaya);- see also dujjana.
durabhata in Ee at D II 350,!s.foll. is wr for dürabhata
(Be, Ce so).
duraruha, mfn. [du(s) + *aruha; ts], hard to climb; Ja 1
272,1• (nayaJ11 rukkho -o).
2
durasajjana, mfn. [du(s) + asajjana ], difficult or
dangerous to approach; Sp 1350,15 (ka~hasappadayo
vi ya hi ete durasada durüpagamana -a).
durasana, n. [du(s) + asana ?], difficulty of eating;
Sadd 863,12 (-am dubbhakkhanam dobhaccha).
durita, n., se e sv ~ti 1. • .
duñbhütan ti in Ee at Sp 959,2 is wr for dürlbhütan ti
(Be, Ce, Se so).
duruggilana, mfn. [du(s) + *uggi1ana], hard to spit out, to
get rid of, Nidd-a 1 42,8 (-' -aghena batisa111 vi ya, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce duruggila!!hena) =As 366,32 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
duraggi1anaghena).
durugghata, durugghatana, mfn. [du(s) + uggha!a,
uggha!ana3], hard to mise; Nidd-a 1 429,6joll.
(duruggha!anatthena va 1ailgi ... mahapalighasailkhata
larigl duruggha!a hoti) = As 254,25 foil.
1
duruttamo in Ee at S 1 197,17* is wr; Be, Ce, Ei, Se
duttaro.
1 1
duruddhara, duddhara , mfn., [du(s) + uddhara ], hard to
extract; Nidd 1 31,23 (dummocaya duppamocaya -a
dussamuddhara, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee duddhara; Nidd-a 1
l06,2o: uddharitu111 dukkha); Spk 1 48,w (so hi
sabbadaru~o --sallo duttikiccho; = Th-a 1 112,3: Be, Ee,
Se duruddhara~asallo; Ce duruddharal).o sallo); Th-a II
189,14 (ta~ha hi pitajananato antotudanato -ato ca sallan
durupadira
ti vuccati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se duruddharato);- see also
dumddharaJ].a (sv uddharaJ].a), duruddhara (sv uddhara).
durupacara, m. [du(s) + upacara], wrong treatment or
use; Mill53,29 (bhojanarp -enajlvitarp. haratl ti).
durupafthaha, dumpanhaha, mfn. [du(s) + *upaHhaha,
*upaHhaha; cfupanhahati (sv upatinhati)], hard or
dangerous to be near, to tend; Spk III 9,17 (ime ca
cattaro aslvisa -a duppatijaggiya, Ee so: Ce düpanhaha;
Be, Se dumpanhaha).
durupasañkama, mfn. [du(s) + upasailkama], hard to
approach; D II 265,1 (-a... tathagata madisena;
Sv 700,25: -a ti duppayimpasiya); Ap 320,26
(durüpasankama buddha).
durupasañkamaniya, mfn. [du(s) + fpp ofupasailkamati],
difficult or dangerous to approach; Bv-a 135,14
(durasado ti -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee durüpasailkamanlyo).
durubbaha, mfn. [du(s) + *ubbaha; cfubbahati 2], hard to
extract; Th 124 (sukhumarp. sallarp -arp.).
durubbaheyya, mfn. [du(s) + *ubbaheyya, fpp of
ubbahati 2 ? cf*ubbaha], hard to pluck out; Th-a II 6,13
(dujjaho -o).
durüpaka, dürüpaka, mfn. [durüpa (qv sv rüpa) + ka2], of
poor appearance; ugly; Ja II 167,22 (bodhisatto ...
duggato -o hutva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dürüpako).
durüpasañkama, mfn., se e sv dumpasailkama.
durüpasalikamaniya, mfn., see sv dumpasailkamanlya.
duropaya, mfn. [du(s) + *ropaya; cfropeti qv sv mhati],
difficult to heal; Vin I 216,12 (sambadhe bhikkhave
sukhuma chavi -o VaJ].o; Sp 1093,17: dukkhena rühati
dukkhena pakatiko hotl ti attho ).
dullabha, mfn. [du(s) + *labha; S. durlabha; BHS also
dullabha; cflabhati], difficult to find or obtain; scarce,
rare; Vin IV 109,19 (kirp. bhante ayyanarp -arp ca
manaparp ca kirp. patiyadema ti); S I 48,15 (-a bhagava
yadidarp tutthl ti); IV 249,2 (pañc' imami bhikkhave
thanani -ani akatapuññena matugamena); A I 22,8
(ekapuggalassa bhikkhave patubhavo -o lokasmirp.);
Sn 7 5 (nikkaraJ].a -a ajja mitta); Th 829 (-arp dassanarp
hoti sambuddhanarp. abhi!)haso); Ja I 307.zo
(matapitunnarp. pana me matatta bhata va -o); II 345,27
(udakarp nama sabbakalarp -arp); IV 361 ,zo• (-a
brahmaJ].a deva sllavanto bahussuta); V 40,27 (-o mama
doh~o); Ap 419,27 (vayasanarp. yatha khlrarp -arp);
Mil 321 ,zofoll. (yatha maharaja lohitacandanarp. -arp
evam eva kho maharaja nibbanarp. -arp.); Vism 83,3
(evarüpe ca thane samanacchanda dutiyika -a);
Sp 790,27 (sabbasarp. piyo nama -o); Sv 46,25 foil. (-o
buddhuppado lokasmirp. -o manussa-patilabho -a
khaJ].asampatti -a pabbajja -arp. saddhamma-savanan ti);
Ps II 240,32 (samaggavasassa o -tta); Pj I 233,2 (paccante
pabbajitadassanassa 0
-taya); As 2,12• (avikkhitta
nisametha -a hi ayarp. katha); - o• -uppattika, mfn.,
rarely occurring; Ap-a 488,14;- 0 -tara, mfn., campar.,
more difficult to obtain; rarer, M III 169,21; Ja VI
232,24·; Vism 189,!3; - adullabha, mfn., not hard to
find; Vism 76,7•;- atidullabha, mjn., very hard to find
or obtain; very rare; Sv 413,12 (evarp. d!ghayuko pana
-o); Bv-a 2,zo• (katha panayarp -a); Cp-a 68,31 (ayarp hi
-o cirakalarp. patthito); - sudullabha, mjn., very hard
to find or obtain; very rare; Th 137 (yasu saccarp -arp.);
424 dussa
Ja V 97 ,25' (-' itthl purisassa ya hita); VI 238,21 •
(manussatte -e); Ap419,29; 473,1 (buddhuppado -o);
Vism 2,17' ( -arp labhitvana pabbajjarp. jinasasane);
Cp-a 72,8 (sabbaññutañi\I)assa --taya); - see also
sulabha.
duva(,l(,lhageha, n., see sv du 2.
duvai}Qikalp in Ee at Ap 443,21 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
veva!)I)iyarp..
duvara, n., see sv dvara.
duvi, [iic for dvi qv], two; twice;- -ja, mfn., bom twice;
0
Ja V 156,z• (-a nelasambhüta danta; 157,1·: -a ti dvija);
- see also dvija (sv dvi); - 0 -dha, ind., see dvidha
(sv dvi).
duvikkhambhaya, mfn. [du(s) + *vikkhambhaya;
cfvikkhambheti qv sv vikkhambhati], hard to dislodge;
Mp III 294,2 (dunnlhara -a honti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
düvikkhambhaya).
duvijana, dubbijana, mfn. [du(s) + *vijana; cfvijanati],
hard to understand; Kkh 2 38,27 (tarp. pana ayojitarp.
dubbijanarp hoti);- -tara, mfn., harder to understand;
0
Ja IV 217,7• (suvijanarp sigalanarp. sakuntanarp. ca
vassitarp. manussavassitarp. raja -arp tato); - see also
suvijana.
duviññapaya, dubbiññapaya, mfn. [du(s) + *viññapaya;
cfviññapeti qv sv vijanati], difficult to teach; Vin I 6,27
(addasa kho bhagava ... satte ... suviññapaye -e ... );
Patis I 121 ,3o (saddho puggalo suviññapayo asaddho
puggalo -o); Vibh 341,34 (katame te satta -a, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se düviññapaya); Sv 392,31 (pucchiturp. ajanitva
paripucchanto -o hoti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dubbiññapayo
hoti); - see also suviññapaya.
duvinodaya, mfn., see sv dubbinodaya.
duvindalp in Ee at Ja V 387,15' is prob. wr for duvinnarp
(Be, Ce, Se so).
duvüpasamaya, mfn. [du(s) + vüpasamaya;
cfvüpasameti qv sv vüpasammati], hard to calm; hard to
settle; S V 114,2 (uddhatarp bhikkhave cittarp. tarp. etehi
dhammehi -arp. hoti) quoted Vism 133,2o.
duve, see sv dvi.
dusanapaccupafthiino in Ee at Vism 470,19 is wr for
düsana- (Be, Ce so), or dussana- (Se so).
dusaniya, mfn., se e sv dosanlya.
dusante in Ee at Vism 312,17 is wr for dussante (Be, Se
so), or dasante (Ce so).
dusitacittena in Ee at It-a II 116,5 is wr for düsita- (Be, Ce
so; Se dussita-).
dusesi in E e at Ap 67,16 is wr for düsesi (Be, Ce, Se so).
dussa 1, n. (and m. ?) [cf S. dürsa, dü~ya; BHS du~ya],
cloth; clothes; Abh 290 (-arp cojo ca satako); Vin II
128,23 (akkamatu bhante bhagava -ani akkamatu sugato
-ani yarp mama assa digharattarp. hitaya sukhaya ti);
III 56,17 (mahaggharp. -arp passitva); V 172,14 (imina
-ena kathinarp attharissaml ti); D II 164,13 (tesarp. ca
pañcannarp. o -yugasatanarp dve va -ani na <;Jayhirp.su
yarp. ca sabba-abbhantarimarp yarp ca bahirarp, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se omit na); M II 92,8 (Kokanadarp. ca pasadarp
odatehi -ehi santharapetva); 155,7 (isi kesamassurp.
kappetva mañjeghaVaJ?.I)ilni -ani nivasetva); Pv 10:3
(hand' uttañyarp. dadami te imarp -arp nivasaya); Ja I
60,12 (slsarp khuddakarp -ani bahüni); V 434,7 (-arp
dussa
muñcati -a111 bandhati); VI 185,10 (bodhisatt~ ...
naiJ.gughe gahetva -~ pothento viya pothesi); Ap 2,27
(kapparukkha bah u atthi . . . sabb~ -~ samahantva
acchademi tic!vara111); 185,6 (buddhassa gaccharnanassa
-a dhavanti pacchato ); 380,17 foll. (paduddhare
paduddhare -a111 nibbattate mama hegha -arnhi
tiqhami); Mil309,z¡ (gandha111 va mal~ va -~ va
aññatara111 va kiñci adhinhahitva cetiye ukkhipati);
.-\p-a 367,26 (c!napagasomarapagadike -e 1aggetva); -
ifc see kathina- (sv kathina2), c!vara-, chava-; -
'"-anta, m. [dussa + anta 1], the end ofthe cloth; a cloth,
a screen; Ja I 467,19 (palapatumba111 -e bandhitva, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee dasante); Vism 312,17 (-e baddhena
ekakahapa!Jen' eva, Be so; Se bandhena; Ce dasante; Ee
dusante bandhena); Sp 696,9 (-e baddhakahapa¡;¡ad!hi
yeva saddhi111 co~akani denti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dasante);
Dhp-a I 180,8 (pa¡;¡¡;¡a111 tassa -e bandhi, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee dasante); - ifc see tiro-; - 0
-kutiJ, a tent;?
Sp 745,z¡; Vin-vn 916; - 0 -Ciilani,f, a cloth sieve;
Vin I 202,31; - 0 -pata, m., a cloth screen; S II 102,1
1cittakaro . . . bhittiya va -e va itthirüpa111 ...
abhinimmineyya, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -page); - 0
'-patta, m., a strip of cloth; Vin II 266,10
1bhikkhuniyo ... -ena pasuke namenti dussave¡;¡iya ...
dussavagiya ... ; Sp 1293,12: -ena ti setavatthapagena);
PsI 56,13 (ghanaputhulena -ena mukhabandhana111
katva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -patena); Pj II 111,22 (-ena
s!sal11 verhetva); Vin-vn 2955; - 0
-pallaUhikii,f, a
posture held with the help of a cloth (se e H. Lüders,
1966, p. 5; A. K. Coomaraswamy, 1956, fig. 202); V in IV
189,3o (hatthapallatthikaya va -aya va antaraghare
nisldati; Sp 891,31: ettha ayogapallatthika pi -a yeva);
Vism 79,2 (ukkaghassa n' eva apassena111 na -a na
ayogapago vagati); Sv 1034,3o (-a111 va
hatthapallatthika111 va karoti); Vin-vn 1892;
'-pothima, pothima, n.(?), (like a) beating of cloth;
Ja IV 457,25 (tantamajjita111 nama majji naiJ.gutthe
gahetva -~ nama pothesi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
'-porbima111 pothesi; = Cp-a 128,1s: Be, Se -pothan~;
0
Ce, Ee -pothan~);- 0 -VaUi,f, a roll of cloth; Vin 11
0
266,!! (bhikkhuniyo .. . -1ya pasuke namenti);
Vin-vn 2955; - 0
-Vel}i,f, a twist or plait of cloth;
Vin 11 266,11; Sp 1293,13 (-iya ti dussena katave¡;¡iya);
Vin-vn 2955.
2
dussa 2, [according to ct = amussa, sg. m. gen. ofasu qv];
of that; Ja III 54,1* (dussa me khettapa1assa rattibhatta111
apabhata111; 54,4·: yo esa mamavidure khettapa!o vasati
dussa arnusssa ti atthi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr asammussa
til quoted Cp-a 105,29* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee assa; 105,34:
-a ti arnussa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee assa ti) and Sadd 278,s;
cfSadd 277,3o (amusaddassa namikapadama1a vuccate
as u arnu . . . amussa dussa); 632,24 (gathasu
chandarnabhedatth~ akkharalopo: adussa mama
khettapa!assa dussa me khettapalassa).
dussarphara, mfn. [du(s) + *sa111hara; cjsa111harati], hard
ro collect, hard to gather together; Vin III 148,36
•gih!n~ bhikkhave -ani bhogani sambhatani pi
duranurakkhiyani);- see also dussailghara.
dussaka\ mfn., see sv dusaka 1.
dussaka 2 , mfn., see sv düsaka2.
425 dussañghara
dussailghara, mfn. [du(s) + *sailghara; cf sailgharati],
hard to accumulate, hard to gather together; Ja IV 36,15
(-a111 dhana~ saiJ.gharitva);- se e also dussa111hara.
dussati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. du~yati], l. be comes dirtied or spoilt
or damaged; Vin 11 113,10 (bhikkhü sa-udaka111 patt~
pa¡isamenti patto -ati); 116,24 (bhikkhu adhotehi padehi
karbina111 akkarnanti kathina111 -ati); IV 117,29
(bhikkhu . . . sedagatena gattena sayanti c!vara111 pi
senasana111 pi -ati); Ja II 126,24· (nad! yena kenaci pita
na -ati); Patis 1 130,12 (aghahi purisadosehi -ati
lokasannivaso); Sp 682,24 (cetiyaiJ.gal).abodhi-aiJ.ga¡;¡ad!ni
-anti); Sadd 489,27 (dusa dosane: -ati doso dosanam
dosito); - part.pr. dussanta 1, mfn., Mp III 271,;1
(dhammasmi111 -ante vinayo -ati nama);- 2. commits a
fault, does wrong; Sn 108 (sehi darehi asantugho
vesiyasu padussati -ati paradaresu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
padissati dissati); - pp duftha 2 , mfn. [cf S. du~ta],
corrupt, spoiled, sullied; Vin III 181,20 (-o bhante
Kitagirismi111 avaso, Assajipunabbasuka nama
Kitagirismi111 avasika alajjino papabhikkhu); Sadd 38,15
(attho -o hoti); - -áruka, m., -aruka,f, an angry or
corrupt so re; A I 124,7 (-aruko, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
-áruka; cfMp 11 195,10: pura¡;¡aval).o); - --kh!ra, n.,
tumed milk, sour milk; Vism 260,13 (dadhibhav~
asarnpattadughakh!raval).¡;¡an ti) = Vibh-a 243,19; -
--gahal).ika, mfn. [or to dugha 1 ?], whose digestion is
upset; Vin I 206,21; - --1ohita, n., sullied blood; Ja V
333,14; Ps III 302,22; - --visa, n., strong poison; Ja VI
237,8* (bhutva --visa111 yatha; 237,29'foll.: yatha savis~
bhojan~ bhutva thitassa t~ dutthal11 kakkha~a111
ha1aha1avisal11 kuppati); Ap 613,15;- caus. (a) pr. 3 sg.
düseti, -ayati, dirties, defiles; violates; spoils, damages;
Vin II 139,7 (te sakaya niruttiya buddhavacana111 -enti);
III 185,1 (ku1ani -eti pupphena va phalena va ... ;
Sp 626,5foll.: na asucikaddamad!hi -eti atha kho attano
duppatipattiya tesa111 pasada111 vinaseti); IV 47,11
(katha111 hi narna bhaddanta amhak~ yavakkhett~
-essant! ti); A IV 339,16 (kumari111 -eti); Th! 459 (sllani
brahmacariya111 yavajlv~ na -eyy~); Ja 11 270,4*
(ima111 pi -aye ghara111; 270,s·: uccarapassavakara!Jena
ca aggidanena ca -eyya ti); 391,25* (kat~ kat~ kho
-ema); III 303,19 (deva eko puriso a<;J<;Jharattasarnaye
sirigabbh~ pavisitva m~ -en ti); Ap 67,16 (ma kho
visuddh~ -esi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dusesi); Mil157,24
(adassanena nillyitva cora pantha111 -enti, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se dussanti); Sp 1400,16 (imani cattari vyañjanani anto
karnmavacaya kamma111 -enti); PsI 169,Jo (so pan' esa
abhijjhavisarnalobho uppajjitva citt~ -eti obhasitu111 na
deti); Sadd 637,22 (yattha sandhito saro attha111 -eti na
tattha sandhi); - part.pr. düsenta, mfn., Sp 626,5; -
aor. 3 sg. (a) dusesi, Vin III 35,7 (so m1i¡;¡avako
UppalaVa!JI;J~ bhikkhunil11 uggahetva -esi); A IV
169,11 (ma aññe bhaddake bhikkhu -es! ti); (b) düsayi,
Ja II 11 0,19*; 3 pl. (a) dusesu111, Vin IV 229,25 (manussa
ta111 bhikkhuni111 passitva -esu111); (b) dusayi111su,
Sp 805,31 (ta bhikkhuniyo cora -ayi111su sJ!avinasa111
papayi111su ti attho); 1 pl. (a) adusema, Ja VI 143,2* (ki111
te bhante may~ adüsema, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se düsayimha;
143,4·: may~ tuyh~ ki111 dusayimha, Be, Se so; Ce
dussimha; Ee dussit' arnha); (b) düsayirnha, Ja VI 143,4·
dussati
(Be, Se so; Ce dussimha; Ee dussit'amha); -
absol. düsetva, Ja II 354,21 (eko va sigalo idam eva
udapanaq¡ -etva pakkamati); neg. adüsetva,
Cp-a 161,3;- pp düsita 1 (and dussita 1 ?), mfn., violated;
defiled, spoiled, hanned; Abh 1077 (duttho kuddhe ca
-ite); Vin III 162,22 (ayyena 'mhi Dabbena Mallaputtena
-ita ti); Ja II 98,20* (-ito Giridantena hayo); Sp 958,21
(udakaphusitasammissena sltavatena samanta
paribbhamantena düsitadivassatta sítavataduddinl nama
ahosi); It-a II 116,5 (so ca abhijjhadihi düsitacittena na
sakka passituq¡, Be, Ce so; Ee dusita-; Se dussita-);
V v-a 47,2o (udapano Thül)eyyakehi -ito, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee dussito ); Th-a III 102,15 (avase -ite); 191,5 (ki1esehi
-itatta); - fpp düsetabba, mfn., Ja 11 298,13·; -
caus. (b) pp dosita, mfn., spoiled; Sadd 489,27 (dusa
dosane: ... dosito);- see also dosa 1.
dussati2 , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dve~ti], is unfriendly or hostile
towards (acc., gen. or loe); is angered; Dhatup 452 (disa
dusa appltiyaq¡); Dhatum 439 (dusa appíte ); 691; S 1
13,13* (yo appadughassa narassa -ati; cfDhp-a III 34,2:
-atl ti aparajjhati); A 11 120,18 (dosanlyesu dhammesu
cittaq¡ na -ati vítadosatta; cfNidd-a 1 347,8foll.:
dosuppade vatthusmiq¡ na dosaq¡ uppadeti); Th 1014 (na
rajjati na -ati); Th! 413 (evaq¡ maq¡ ... s!lavatiq¡ -ate
bhatta; Th!-a 246,n: -ate ti -ati kujjhitva bhal)ati); Ja VI
468,!0 (na sakka pal)<;litena mayi -ituq¡); Ap 18,13*
(rajanlye na rajjanti dosanlye na -are); Mill01,5 (yena
hetuna thero Sariputto kujjheyya va -eyya va so hetu
therassa Sariputtassa samühato samucchinno ); 311,3
(dussanlye -eyya); Sv 256,7 (appaken' eva tussanti va
-anti va, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee russanti); 985,1& (-atl ti
doso); Ps V 107,18 (tassa rajjituq¡ va -ituq¡ va muyhituq¡
va adatva); Dhp-a 1 81,19 (sacahaq¡ imasmiq¡ -issaml ti);
II 148,7 (thero tesu n' eva kujjhati na -ati); Sadd 489,28
(dusa appltiyaq¡: -ati padussati .. . dugho padugho
düsako düsito düsana); - part.pr. (a) dussanta2, mfn.,
Ja V 114,26' (kalyiil)akammadüsake yo kalyiil)akammaq¡
-anto appiyayanto attlyanto na karoti, Be Ce, Se so; Ee
-ento); Vibh-a 43,2o (rajjantassa -antassa muyhantassa);
- neg. adussanta, mfn., Ja VI 9,5; Sv 731 ,24; Dhp-a IV
163,15 (dutthesu adussanto); (b) dussamana, mfn.,
Kv 243,13 (atthi cittaq¡ rajjamanaq¡ -amanaq¡
muyhamanaq¡ ki1issamanan ti);
neg. adussamana, mfn., Nidd 11 91,31; Mp 1 61,4; -
aor. 3 sg. dussi, A 11 120,11 (ma me dosanlyesu
dhammesu cittaq¡ -1 ti); Kv 524,4 (ma rajji ma -i ma
muyhi); - pp (a) duttha 3 , mfn. and m. [cfduttha2 and
S. du~ta], l. bearing ill-will; inimical; angered;
malignant; (of animals) enraged; vicious; a rogue, a
villain; (very often iic as tenn of abuse, eg
dughabrahmal)a, dughagahapati, dutthajatila etc); Vin 1
277,28 (-ena bhal)e Jivakena sappiq¡ payito 'mhi);
11 16,26 (-o dan' ayaq¡ Citto gahapati anapekkho
virattarüpo mayl ti); 111 163,21 (-o doso appatlto; 163,3o:
-o doso ti kupito anattamano anabhiraddho ahatacitto
khi1ajato ); V 165,4* (ratto -o ca mü~ho ); M 11 172,32 (na
so dhammo sudesiyo -ena ti); S 1 227 ,23* (islnaq¡
abhayaq¡ n' atthi -anaq¡ Sakkasevinaq¡; Spk 1 347,5:
-anan ti viruddhanaq¡); A 1 27,28 (tathagatassa -ena
cittena lohitaq¡ uppadeyya); 201,32 (-o dosena
426 dussana
abhibhüto ); It 2,3* (yena dosena -ase satta gacchanti
duggatiq¡; It-a I 48,11: aghatena düsitacittataya
padugha); Ja 1 187,19 (janahi kena karanena so -o jato
ti); III 481 ,9* (dighaq¡ -assa naitgughaq¡); Ap 494,14
(sattukassa tada -o, Be, Se so; Ce rugho; Ee wr buddho );
581,17 (-a buddhass' ahaq¡ tada, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
rugha); Mil 92,3o (-o dosavasena mantitaq¡ guyhaq¡
vivarati); Vism 105,4* (-assa hoti anuka<;l<;lhitaq¡ padaq¡);
Sp 1367,22 (--tta); As 127,36 (-o hi gul)aq¡ makkheti);
Saddh 434;- --manasa, mfn., evil-minded, malevolent;
Ap 32,2o; 490,6 (maq¡ ... sakul)agghi upagantva ghatayi
--manaso, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr --manasa); Cp 2:7:5;-
neg. adugha, mfn., not bearing ill-will; not angered;
friendly; Vin 11 203,12* (adughassa hi yo dubbhe) =
It 86,9* (It-a 11 10l.zo: adutthacittassa); S 1 63,21 (abalassa
adutthassa amü~hassa); Al 203,22 (aduttho dosena
anabhibhüto); Dhp 399 (akkosaq¡ vadhabandhaq¡ ca
aduttho yo titikkhati); Ja V 87,12* (adutthassa tuvaq¡
dubbhi dubbhi ca pisul)O e' asi; 87,14·: ambho dubbhi
tvaq¡ adughassa mittassa dubbhi); - (b) dussita 2 ,
2
düsita , mfn., hostile; feeling hatred; angered; Nidd 1
215,27 (doso dussana --ttaq¡; Nidd-a 1 322,5: --ttan ti
--bhavo) f. Dhs 418 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se düsana
düsitattaq¡) f. Vibh 86,21 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se düsana
düsitattaq¡); Nidd 1 397,2 (rusito ti düsito khuq¡sito
ghagito . . . upavadito, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee düsito ti
düsito ... ; ad Sn 932: eds sutva rusito bahuq¡ vacaq¡);
Sp 584,16 (duttho doso ti düsito e' eva düsako ca);
Sadd 489,29 (dusa appltiyaq¡: ... düsako -ito); -
neg. adussita, mfn., Dhs 33 (adoso adussana
adussitattaq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adüsana adüsitattaq¡;
As 150,11: adussitassa bhavo adussitattaq¡) f. Vibh 169,29
(Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adüsana adüsitattaq¡);
fpp dussitabba, mfn. and n. impers., Mil386,7
(dussanlyesu na dussitabbaq¡); Ap-a 221,19 (dosanlye
dussitabbe dosaq¡ uppadetuq¡ yutte vatthumhi, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Ce dussanlye); 343,19 (dosanlye ca dussasl ti
dussitabbe dosakaral)avatthusmiq¡ düsako asi, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se dussanlye ca dussase ti düsitabbe ... );- see also
dissati 3, dosa2, dosanlya.
dussaddaka, mfn. [du(s) + sadda + ka2], ill-sounding;
making unpleasant sounds; Dhp-a 111 97,1 (viharassa
upavane -e sakul)e palapetha ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dussadde);- see also dussadda (sv sadda).
dussaddhiipaya, mfn. [du(s) + *saddhapaya;
cfsaddhapetuq¡], hard to convince; hard to make
believe; Vin III 188,2 (api ca -a appasanna manussa ti);
Sp 507,8 (yehi ayaq¡ uppatti samaq¡ adittha te -a honti).
dussana 1, n. ffrom dussati 1 qv], the being dirty or corrupt;
Spk II 380,1o (tal)ha ... anto o•-aghena gal)<;lo);
Patis-a 612,23 (ragadayo ... o' -aghena malaq¡ nama, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be düsanaghena; = Nidd-a 11 83,27: eds
düsanattbena);- see also düsana.
dussana 2, n., dussana, düsana,f ffrom dussati2 qv;
cf S. dve~al)a], hostility; ill-will; anger; Nidd 1 215,27
(doso -a dussitattaq¡) f. Dhs 418 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
düsana düsitattaq¡) f. Vibh 86,21 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
düsana düsitattaq¡); Ja IV 12,4' ( 0 -lakkhal)ena dosena
dutthassa); Vism 470,19 (doso ... 0 -paccupatthano
laddhokaso viya sapatto, Se so; Be, Ce düsana-; Ee wr
dussaniya
dusana-); Spk III 245,26 (ettha rajjanaqi va -aqi va
muyhanaqi va n' atthi); Nidd-a I 63,11 (kodho .. .
düsanapaccupaghano); Sadd 489,29 (dusa appitiyaqi: .. .
düsako düsito -a); - adussana,f, lack of hostility;
friendliness; Dhs 33 (adoso -a adussitattaqi, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se adüsana adüsitattaqi) f. Vibh 169,29 (Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se adüsana adüsitattaqi);- see also adussanaka.
dussaniya, mfn., see sv dosaniya.
dussantappiya, dussantappaya, mfn. [du(s) + *santappiya,
fpp ofsantappeti, or + *santappaya, cfsantappeti], hard
to satisfy; Ps II 139,15 (taya [mahicchataya] samannagato
puggalo -o hoti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dussantappayo) =
Mp I 75,2o (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce dussantappayo) = Nidd-a I
328,19 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dussantappayo).
dussandhiiriya, mfn. [du(s) + *sandhariya, fpp of
sandhareti qv], hard to hold back, hard to withstand;
Ja III 340,21' (danaqi hi datva aparacetana va -a, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dusaddhaniya).
dussamadaha, mfn. [du(s) + *samadaha, cfsamadahati],
hard to settle, hard to make concentrate; SI 48,19 (-aqi
bhagava yad idaqi cittan ti).
dussamutthiipaya, mfn. [du(s) + *samunhapaya;
cfsamughapeti qv SV samunhahati], hard to raise; S V
112,27 (linaqi bhikkhave cittaqi taqi etehi dhammehi
-aqi hoti); Nidd I 31,24 (satta etto dummocaya ...
dussamuddhara dubbutrhapaya -a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
dubbutthapana dussamunhapana).
dussamuddhara, mfn. [du(s) + *samuddhara;
cfsamuddharati], hard to extract; hard to pul! out;
Nidd I 31,23 (satto etto dummocaya ... duruddhara
-a ... ).
dussamodhaniya, mfn. [du(s) + *samodhaniya, fpp of
samodhaneti qv], hard to collect; Ps III 168,23
(tinavallidabbasambhara nama -a).
duss~ha, mfn. [du(s) + saha2; S. duJ:¡saha], hard to bear or
endure; Ja V 8,24' (rajano nama -aqi sahanti ti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dussahaqi); VI 248,24* (m¡.ho ca vato nirayamhi
-o); 506,29* (vane ye honti -a); Th-a III 23,s (--taya);
Mhv 6:39 (sahasani anekani -ani karimsu te).
dussika, m. [from dussa 1], a cloth merchant; Ja VI 276,25*
(ganthike atha -e ... passa); Ap 359,15 (sm:n.1akara ca
-a); Mil 262,14.
1
dussita 1, mfn., pp of caus. of dussati qv.
2
dussita , mfn.,pp ofdussati qv.2
dussilya, n. [cf S. dauJ:¡SHya], bad conduct; evil-doing; MI
402,34 (assa susilyaqi pahinaqi hoti -aqi
paccupaHhitaqi); S V 363,z4foll. (yatharüpena kho avuso
-ena samannagato assutava puthujjano kayassa bheda
paraqi maraJ).a apayaqi duggatiqi vinipataqi nirayaqi
upapajjati tatharüpassa -aqi na hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
tatharupassa dussilena hoti); Pv 20:2 (-ena
yamavisayanlhi patto); Dhs 1361 (sabbaqi pi -aqi
silavipatti); Spk II 151,16;- ifc see accanta-.
duba\ mfn. [ts], yielding;- ifc see kama-.
duha 2 , mfn. [cf S. druh, droha], hurting, seeking to injure;
- ifc see pantha-.
duhati\ dohati, dühati2, pr. 3 sg. [S. v'duh, dogdhi], milks
(a cow); extracts (milk); draws out, yields; fills;
Dhatup338 (duha papurm¡.e); Dhatum499; SI 174,11*
(punappunaqi khiraQ.ika -anti); Ja V 105,25* foll. (clll).c,la
427 duhitika
a~anaka gavi yaqi pure na -amase taqi dani ajja dohama
khirakameh' upadduta); 307 ,6* (yassa dhenusahassani
sada -anti visatiqi, Be so; Ce duyhanti; Ee duyhanti
visati; Se dühanti visati); VI 211 ,20* (kuto -e tidive
sabbakame; 215,6·: kuto tidive sabbakame -issati); Ps II
260,36 (ayaqi vacchakassa kiñci asesetva -ati);
Ap-a 395,10 (-ati püreti akasata1an ti va dumo, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee dühati); Sadd 458,30 (duha papürlll).e: -ati
(dohati) dohani); - part.pr. (a) doha(t), mfn., Ja VI
371,16* (visiil).ato gavaqi dohaqi yattha khiraqi na vindati;
371,2s·: yasmiqi visaQ.e khiram eva n' atthi tato gaviqi
-anto viya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dühanto);
(b) duhanta, mfn., Ja VI 371,2s·; - aor. 3 sg. duhi,
Mp V 88,6 (amhakaqi dhenü -I ti); - absol. duhitva,
Pj II 27,3o; - caus. pr. 3 sg. duhapeti, dohapeti, M II
186,2 (brahmaQ.o ... gavo gotthe -apeti, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee dohapeti); - aor. 3 sg. duhapesi, Ja 1 68,1s; -
absol. duhapetva, Mp III 246,26; Pj II 27,2z; - pass.
pr. 3 sg. duyhati, (of cows) is milked; (of milk) is
extracted; Ja V 307 ,6* (yassa dhenusahassani sada -anti
visatiqi, Ce so; Ee visati; Be duhanti; Se dühanti visati);
Pj II 26,27 (sattavisatisahassa gavo khiraqi -anti); -
part.pr. duyhamana, mfn., Mi141,1 (khiraqi -amanaqi
kalantarena dadhi parivatteyya); Dhp-a II 67,12 (yatha
khiraqi -amanam eva na pariQ.amati); Ud-a 22,22*
(gavisu -amanasu gato duddhasu agato ti) f. Sadd 213,26
(gosu -amanasu); Mp I 248,13 (n' eva dhenuyo -amana
paññayanti na dadhinimmathanaqi, Be, Ce so; Ee
-amanaqi; Se duhamana) = Th-a I 148,34; Sadd 458,3o
(-amana gavi); - absol. duyhitva, Dhp-a II 67,23
(yasmiqi pana bhajane -itva gahitaqi, Ce, Ee so; Be
duhitva; Se dühitva); - pp duddha, mfn. and n.
[S. dugdha], l. (mfn.) (of cows) milked; (of milk)
extracted; Ud-a 22,22* (gavisu duyhamanasu gato -asu
agato) quoted Sadd ?28,12; - 2. (n.) milk; Abh 500
(khiraqi -aqi payo); - --khira, mfn., with the milking
done, who has milk (from the cow ); Sn 18 (pakkodano
--khiro 'ham asmi; Pj II 27,3o: gavo duhitva
gahitakhiro); - --dhava1a, mfn., milk-white; Da~h 5:26
(ramsihi --dhava1ehi);
duhat¡2 or dmphati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup dohati,
Wg § 17:87], distresses; Sadd 457,24 (tuhi duhi addane:
tuhati duhati, Be so; Ee tu<m>hati du<m>hati).
duhana\ dühana1, dohana: n. [S. d¿hana], milking;
Ud-a 22,23 (gavinaqi dohanakiriyaya gamanakiriya
1akkhiyati); Ps IV 195,21 (ekaqi khirabinduqi
dühanaka1amattaqi pi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ekakhirabindu-);
- ifc se e kumbha- (sv kumbha), go-; - see also
gaddühana.
duhana2 , dühana2, m.n. [cfS. druhyati; or = dübhana],
injury, wrong, offence;- ifc see pantha-.
duhayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. druhyati ?], injures; is hostile
towards;? Sadd 695,19 (-ayati disanaqi megho).
duhara, mfn., see sv dühara.
duhita(r), f [S. duhit:¡'], a daughter; Abh 241 (-a dhita);
Mhv 38:81 (tassa putta duve asuqi... eka -a ca);
Sadd 670,7 (dhitito duhitito); duhitu-pati, m.
[S. duhituJ:¡pati], a daughter's husband, a son-in-law;
Thi-a 247,13 (jamata ti -i);- see also dhita(r).
duhitika, dvihitika, mfn. [cf S. durhita? see suhita and
düta
O. van Hinüber, 1981, pp. 74-9], in a poor condition;
stricken by hunger; where food is scan·e; where survival
is difficult; Vin III 6,18 (Verañja dubbhikkha hoti
dvihitika setaghika salakavutta; c.fSp !74,24foll.:
dvihitika ti dvidhapavatta-Ihitika ... dvidha pavatta citta-
iriya citta-Iha . . . atha va dvihitika ti dujjivika .. .
dukkhena IhitaJT! ettha pavattatl ti) f. IV 23,18 (Vajji .. .
-a) f. S IV 323,4 (Nalanda ... -a; Spk III 106,13:
dvihitika ti jivissama nu kho na nu kho ti evaJT!pavatta-
Ihitika, duhitika ti pi patho, ayam ev' attho, dukkha Ihiti
ettha na sakka koci payogo sukhena katun ti duhitika,
Be, Se so; Ce dukkh~ Ihati ti ettha ... ; Ee dukkhaJT!
Ihati ettha na sakka koci payogena thatun ti dvihitika);
S IV 195,19 (sabhayo e' eso maggo ... ummaggo ca
kummaggo ca duhitiko ca; Spk III 64,22.foll.: dukkha
Ihiti ettha ti duhitiko, yasmiJT! hi magge mülaphaladi
khadaniyaJT! va asaniyaJT! va n' atthi tasmiJT! iriyana
dukkha hoti ... dvihitiko ti pi patho es' ev' attho).
düta 1, m., -I, f (and -a, .f. ?) [S. düta, düti], l. a
messenger, an en voy; a proxy; Abh 347 (-o tu
sandesaharo); Vin 11 277,1s.foll. (anujanami bhikkhave
vyattaya bhikkhuniya patibalaya -ena upasampadetun ti,
taya -aya bhikkhuniya . . . evam assa vacaniyo, by
attraction ?); III 136,14 (sa kumarika matuya santike
-aJT~ pahesi ahaJT! hi duggata dukkhita na sukhaJT!
labhami); 138,7 (dhutta ... aññatarissa vesiya santike
-~ paheSUJT! agacchatu uyyane paricaressama ti);
Sn 415 (tayo -a upavisuJT!); Vv 52:4 (yamassa -a); Ja 1
139,3· (palitani maccudevassa -a ti vuccanti); 139,14'
(a-tta); 11 319,19 (tasmiJT! janapade -o smi ti vadantaJT! na
varenti tasma mahajano dvidha bhijjitva okasaJT! adasi);
III 146,24* (-o ahaJT! raj' idha rakkhasanaJT! vadhaya
tuyh~ pahito 'ham asmi, so read with Be, Ce);
IV 399,26* (-a vidhavantu disa catasso); VI472,22*
(patirajan~ say~ -ani sasati; 472,31·: mama vacanena
sayaJT! paggaJT! likhitva -e pesesi): 528,2* (avajjho
brahmago -o); Mill8,z5 (arahanto . . . ayas mato
Nagasenassa santike -aJT~ pahesuJT!); Vism 603,30 (na
-ena mantodakaJT! pltaJT! rogino udaraJT! pavisati); -
dütehi in Ee at Pv-a !12,3o: read assadütehi with Be, Se;
- ifc se e anudüta, assa- (sv assa3), deva-; - 2. (-I,f) a
female messenger, esp. a go-between, a procuress;
Abh 236 H sañcarika); a•opasampada,
a•upasampada, dütenfipasampada,f, ordination by
means of a messenger or proxy (see Vin 11 277,3 foll. );
Ap 610,24 (magge dhutte !hite disva labhiJT! -aJT!);
Sp 241,12 (upasampada nama aghavidha ehibhikkhu-
upasampada . . . dütenfipasampada, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dütena-upasampada) f. Kkh 2 28,21 (Be. Ee 2 so; Ce, Ee 1
dütena-upasampada); Vin-vn 3017 (dütüpasampada);-
a-vippahita, n., being sent as a messenger; carrying
messages; Jaiii 386,11* (na ha nüna raja janati ...
sali.game sukatantani -ani ca; 386,22·: -ani ca ti gaJe
pal).naJT! bandhitva asukarañño nama dehi ti pahitaya
maya ... katani dütapesanani ca).
2
düta , n. [S. dyüta; wr; see O. van Hinuber, 1986, § 248],
gaming, playing at dice; Ja IV 248,24 (a-parajito, Ce, Ee
so; Be jüta-; Se jüte parajito); 249,5 (-e parajito, Ce so;
Ee, Se jüte; Be jütaparajito);- see also jüta.
düta 3 , mfn., see sv düyate.
428 düra
dütaka, m. [düta 1 + ka2], a messenger; Vin III 223,36* (in
uddana: -ena, see 219,27foll.) = V 87,27* (Sp 1309,5:
dütena civaracetapanapahitasikkhapadaJT!, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee civaracetapanna-).
düti, f, se e sv düta 1.
düteyya, n. [cf S. dütya, dautya], an errand, commission;
a message, messages; Vin II 201,29 (at!hahi bhikkhave
ailgehi samannagato bhikkhu -~ gantUJT! arahati);
III 87,18 (handa mayaJT! avuso gihin~ -aJT! harama);
S IV 341,17 (yani ca KojiyanaJT! -ani tani vahatuJT!, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee duteyyani; Spk III 109,15: -ani ti
dütakammani, paggani e' eva mukhasasanani ca); Ja VI
419,1· (-ena agatakaral).~);- a-harika, (m)f(n)., (one)
who carries a message, a messenger; Ja 111 134,15.
düna, mfn., pp of düyate qv.
düpatthaka, mfn., see sv upaghaka.
dübha, m. and mfn., see sv dubbha.
dübhaka 1 , m.f(-ika)n., see sv dubbhaka.
dübhaka2 , m. [cf S. dambha, dambholi, 'Indra's
thunderbolt'], a particular precious stone (a
diamond ?); Ja III 207 ,2* (atikamma ramagakaJT!
sadamattaJT! ca -aJT~ brahmattaraJT! ca pasadaJT!, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dubbakam; 207,5·: -an ti maJ).ipasadaJT!) f.
1 363,11* (363,15·: -an ti magino namaJT!).
dübhati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv dubbhati.
dübhana, n., see sv dubbhana.
dübhi,f, see sv dubbhi.
dübhi(n), mfn., see sv dubbhi(n).
düyate, pr. 3 sg. [S. düyate, Wg § 26:24], is burnt; is
ajjlicted; Sadd 480,23 (dü paritape: -ate düno düto); -
pp düna (and düta3 ?), mfn. [cf S. düna, dütaka], burnt,
ajjlicted; Sadd 480,23.
düra, mfn. [ts], far away; distant; going a long way;
Abh 706; Mi116,26 (-o kho bhante maggo antaramagge
bhikkha dullabha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -o bhante
Pata1iputto); 82,13 (-o kho maharaja ito brahma1oko);
Vibh 251,23 (vanapatthan ti -an~ etaJT! senasananaJT!
adhivacanaJT!, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr duranaJT!);
Vism 403,22foll. (santik~ pana gahetva ko -aJT~ akasi
ti, bhagava, bhagava hi attano ca Ailgu1imalassa ca
antar~ santikaJT! pi -aJT~ akasi ti); Sp 1188,7 (sace
viharo -o hoti sasailko ca); Sv810,14 (pantani ti -ani);
Mhv 15:7 (-o ca pabbato ); - acc. düraJT!, adv., a long
way; far; V in 1 346,3o (-~ gantva); S IV 399,26 (acci
vatena khitta -aJT! pi gacchati); Th 359 (na-y-ito -aJT!
gamissase citta); Ja 11 320,6* (yass' attha -am ayanti);
Kv 103,20 (migo sal1ena viddho -aJT~ pi gantva ka1aJT!
karoti): Patis-a 640,6 (a-tta); Vibh-a 18,12 CO-ta); -
abl. düra, dürato, adv., from far off; at a distance;
Abh 1157 (ara -a); D II 139,2o (-a vat' amha agata
tathagataJT! dassanaya); M 1 14,5 (-ato pi kho mayaJT!
avuso agaccheyyama . . . etassa bhasitassa atthaJT!
aññatuJT!); 171,21 (addasasuJT! kho maJT! bhikkhave
pañcavaggiya bhikkhü -ato va agacchant~); S V 453,1o
(-ato va sukhumena tajacchiggajena asan~ atipatente,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee durato); Dhp 219 (cirappavasiJT!
purisaJT! -ato sotthim agataJT!); Pv 36:46 (-ato); Ja III
264,12' (sucijatiko manusso güthaküp~ viya -ato
vivajjayami ti); IV 425,24' (-ato va imaJT! pasaJT! na
bujjhi); Ap 566,12 (-ato va mamaJT! disva); Mhv 37:154
dürakkha
(disva -ato va);- loe. düre, adv., far off; ata distance;
Vin III 159,28 (te sañcicca -e apadissanti amhakaq¡
avuso Dabba Gijjhakü~e senasanaf!l paññapehi); DI
79,22 (ubho sadde su1,1ati dibbe ca manuse ca ye -e
santike ca); M II 206,2o (asanne ito Na!akaragamo
na-y-ito -e Na!akaragamo ti); SI 141,13* (-e ito
brahma1,1i brahmaloko); Khp 9:5 (ye ca -e vasanti
avidüre); Sn 772 (-e viveka hi tathavidho so); JaiV
403,12* (-e apassaf!l thero va); VI 513,12 (kuhif!l
Vaitkapabbato ti pucchanti manussa -e ti vadanti);
Pa~is II 194,3 (-e vidüre suvidüre na santike); Mil339,16
(sace amitta -e bhavissanti); Vism 403,15
(mahallakatthera nama -e pi gahetva santike karontl ti);
Vibh-a 12,26 (-e ti -amhi); - dürenidana, n., (an
account of) antecedents, detennining factors, in the
distant past; introductory matter about the distant past,
Ja I 2,1 foil. (sa panayaf!l jatakassa aghava1,11,1ana
dürenidanaq¡ avidürenidanaf!! santikenidanan ti imani
tini nidanani dassetva . . . Dlpaitkarapadamülasmif!l hi
katabhiniharassa Mahasattassa yava Vessantarattabhava
cavitva Tusitapure nibbatti tava pavatto kathamaggo
dürenidiinaf!l nama); Pj II 2,25 (dürenidiinaf!l nama
Dlpaitkarabhagavato yava paccuppannavatthukatha);
Sadd 741,4; dürepati(n), mfn. [cfS. dürapatin],
shooting a long distance; hitting from far off, A I 284,15
(yodhajivo dürepatl ca hoti akkha1,1avedhi ca); Ja IV
494,21* (issasino. .. dürepatl akkha1,1avedhino pi;
497 ,29'joll.: saraf!! düre patetuf!l samattha);
neg. adüre, adv., not far away; near; Ja V 45,3• (tatth'
eva sa pokkhara1,1i adüre); It-aii 117,14
(dhammasabhavato adüre santike); - 0
-kantana, n.
1 dñrikara1,1a, n. [ts], making distant, removing; Nidd-a I
[düra + kantana ?], cutting far off; banishment; ?
Th 1123 (na cittahetü na ca -a; Th-a III 157,2: -a ti
rajiidihi mettaf!l katva tesu dubbhitva dubbhibhavena);
- (dürait)-gama, mfn., going a long way; far-reaching;
S III 137,17 (nadi ... -a sighasota, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
duran-); Dhp37 (-aq¡ ekacaraf!! ... cittaq¡); Pv21:10
(yakkho 'ham asmi ... -o; Pv-a 117,25: -o ti kha1,1en' eva
düraq¡ pi ~anaf!l gantuf!! samattho);- 0 -gami(n), mfn.
[düra + gami(n) 1], going far; travelling far, Ja III 484,18*
(pakkhasampannaq¡ tejasif!l -inaf!!; 485,14·: ten' eva
tejena -if!!); V 302,23* (khattiya -ino );
0
-ghuttha, mfn., proclaimed ajar; farjamed; Pv 20:2
(BariiJ.lasinagaraq¡ -af!l; Pv-a 107,4: -an ti dürato eva
gu1,1akittanavasena ghositaq¡ sabbattha vissutaf!l paka~an
ti attho); - 0 -tara, mfn., campar., forther away; more
distant; A II 51 ,5* (tato have -aq¡ vadanti sataq¡ ca
dhammaq¡ asataq¡ ca dhammaq¡); Sv 833,17 (-ani);
Sadd 115,9 (itthiliii.gabhavo -o); - -aq¡, forther; Ja III
63,11* (ito ahaq¡ -aq¡ gamissaq¡); Dhp-a II 269,9; -
-e,forther off; at a greater distance; Vism 124,22; -
neg. adüratara, mfn., Pj I 75,13; - 0 -magga, m., a long
road; Ja VI 435,2 (keci -a agatatta kilanta sayanti, Be,
Ee so; Ce, Se -aq¡); 446,20 (-af!l agatatta, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee sudüramaggaq¡); Ap-a 362,29 (-aq¡ pa~ipannassa); -
atidüramagga, m., a very long road; Spk III 140,6; -
atidñra, mfn., too far away; very distant; A V 15,25
(senasanaf!l natidüraf!! hoti naccasannaq¡); PsI 112,3o
(pantani ti pariyantani -ani); - -aq¡, adv., too far; a
very long way; Ja III 255,13 (putto vo -aq¡ uppatatl ti);
429 dürepiiti(n)
Sv 626,27 (VaJ.lJ.labha . . . devanaf!! pana -af!l pi
niccharati); As 156,15 (mayhaf!l gantva paccagacchato
-aq¡ bhavissati); - -e, adv., too far away; at a great
distance; Vin I 39,9 (uyyanaq¡ gamato n' eva -e na
accasanne, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee avidüre); 46,19 (natidüre
gantabbaf!!); M II 137,14 (so natidüre padaq¡ uddharati);
A III 137,15 (natidüre gacchati naccasanne); Pv 21:66
(-e nisinno si agaccha mama santike); Ja II 369,11
(dvarato natidüre); 444,22 (gocaragamo natidüre
naccasanne, Be so; Ce, Ee na düre; Se na düro);
Vism 182,32 (-e !hitassa hi arammaJ.larp avibhütaf!l hoti);
Spk III 131,2 (vipakavedanaq¡ -e maññamana);
Ud-a 323,15 (natidürataya); - sudñratp, adv., a very
long way; Sp 7 48,3o (-af!l pi gantva);
sudüragha, mfn., standing, being, at a great distance;
Ap 541,13; - sudüre, adv. at a great distance;
Bv-a 231,15; - see also düñ-akasi, düñkata, düñkara1,1a,
düñbhavati, düñbhava.
dñrakkha, mfn., see sv rakkha.
dñratta, mfn., see sv rañjati.
dñrama, m. or n. [du(s) + rama], difficulty of enjoyment
in; it is difficult to enjoy; S V 24,23 (oka anokam
agamma viveke yattha -af!l) = Dhp 87.
dññ-akasi, aor. 3 sg. [of düra + karoti], made distant;
removed; Ap-a 280,4 (so Sakyamuni me mayhaq¡
tamaq¡ ... vinodesi düñ-akasi ti); 291,23; - see also
düñkata, düñkara1,1a.
durikata, mfn. ipp of düra + karoti; cf S. düñlqta], made
distant, removed; Nidd-a I 313,27 (gantha -a bhavanti);
Pa!is-a 636,29 (pahinaq¡ -am eva hot! ti); - see also
düñ-akasi, düñkara1,1a.
30,21 (kilesanaq¡ -ato); Pa!is-a 690,25
(vikkhambhanavasena 0 -vasena viveko); Cp-a 153,9
(manusse disva dürato va tesaf!! o• -atthaq¡ tena
veJ.ludaJ.l¡;iena saññaq¡ karonto); - see also düñ-akasi,
düñkata.
dññbhavati (often in Ee düri-), pr. 3 sg. [S. düñv'bhü],
withdraws; is distant; Cp-a 297,32 (micchavitakka
viriyanubhavena -anti ti); - pp düñbhüta, mfn. [ts],
distant; far off, Sp 959,2 (viddhan ti ubbiddhaf!l
meghavigamena -an ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr duñbhütan
ti)= Ud-a IOI,2o (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee düri-); Spk III 32,18
(ayaq¡ hi sasanassa --tta ... nibbanasagaraf!! papuJ.litUf!l
na sakkoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee düri-); 279,24 (tumhakaf!l
mayi -e anappakaf!l domanassaf!l, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
düri-); Mp IV 66,23 (kilesehi vüpakagho vavakagho -o);
- se e also düñbhava.
dññbhava, m. [from düribhavati qv], withdrawal; being
distant, remate; Vism 71,16 (anatirittabhojanapattiya -o);
Spk III 62,12foll. (dhuttanaq¡ disasu palayitva -o viya ...
nivaraJ.llinaf!l -o); Ud-a 16,27 (tadasuddhihetünaq¡
kilesanaf!l -ato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee tadasuddhihetu na hi
kilesanaf!! 0 -tta [Ee düri-]); Pj II 203,11 (pañcasu
kamagu1,1esu cittavossaggato -ena).
dñruttatp in Ee at It-a I 18,32 is wr for duruttaq¡ (Be, Ce,
Se so).
dñrñpaka, mfn., see sv durüpaka.
dñrenidana, n., see sv düra.
dñrepati(n), mfn., see sv düra.
 düsaka
düsaka 1, dussaka 1, mfi-ika)n. [cfS. dü~aka], (one) who
dirties or defiles; who spoils or harms; a violator; an
offender, a malefactor; Vin III 33,26 (-o nasetabbo);
Ja II 270,3* (so -o rosako capi jammo; 270,6·:
gatagataghanassa dusanato -o); III 179,18' foil. (düsiya ti
düsika . . . dosakarika ti attho, düsika ti pi patho );
IV 495,13* (aparadhake -e hethake ca rajano da~<;!enti);
VI 494,1 * (so 'haJTI tena garnissarni yena gacchanti -a);
Pj II 162,14 (maggadüsi ti yo ca dussilo micchadighi
maggapati1omaya patipattiya maggassa -o ti attho); -
ifc see qdapana- (sv uda\ uyyana-, karnma-, ku1a-,
pantha-, mitta-, vetu-, sassa-; - adüsaka, mfi -ika)n.,
who has done no wrong; innocent; Sn 312 (adüsikayo
haññanti dharnma dhaJT~santi yajaka; Pj II 324,11: kenaci
padadina ahiJTlsanato adüsikayo gavo ); Ja VI 84,12* (-a
pitaputta tayo eküsuna hata; 84,17·: -a ti niddosa);
498,21 * (kasma VessantaraJT~ putta111 pabbajenti -aJTI);
Ap 299,10 (paccekabuddhaJTI SurabhiJTI abbhacikkhim
-aJT~); - see also düsiya.
düsaka 2 , dussaka2, mfn. [cf dussati 2], one fnll of ill-will,
hostile, angered; Ud-a 243,25 (diso disan ti -o
düsaniyaJTI); Ap-a 343,20 (dussitabbe
dosakar~avatthusmiJTI -o así); Sadd 489,29 (dusa
appitiya111: ... -o düsito düsana);- ifc se e karnma-.
düsana, n. [S. dü~ana], l. spoiling, defiling; corrupting;
Ja II 270,6· (so esa gatagataghanassa -ato düsako); Pj II
165,26 (paresa111 sugatimaggassa ca -ato maggadilsi ti);
Nidd-a II 83,27 (ragadayo ... o• -aghena ma1aJTI narna) =
Patis-a 612,23 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dussanatthena); -
2.fault, offence; Abh 1013; - ifc see pantha-; -
3. (specious) refutation; ? Sadd 919,23 ( 0 -bhasa jatiyo
uttarapatirüpaka ti attho);- see also dussana 1.
düsana,f, see sv dussana2.
düsaniya, mfn., see sv dosaniya.
düsi(n), mfn. and m. [S. dü~in], l. (mfn.) defiling;
spoiling; violating;- ifc see bhikkhunl-, magga-, yava-,
sam~a-; - 2. (m.) the name of a Mara; MI 333,7 (-i
nama maro ahosiJTI); 334,3 (-issa marassa); 334,14 (-ina
marena).
düsita\ mfn., pp of caus. of dussati 1 qv.
düsita2 , mfn., pp ofdussati2 qv.
düsiya, (m)f(n). [= düsika qv sv düsaka 1], an offender;
who is guilty; Ja III 179,16* (aham eva -a; 179,18': -a ti
düsika, tumhe disva anutthahamana dosakarika ti attho,
düsika ti pi patho, ayam eva attho);- adüsiya,f, who
has done no wrong, innocent; Ja V 220,23* (-a111 ce ...
cajasi; 225,6·: anaparadhaJTI);
düseti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofdussati 1 qv.
dühati\ pr. 3 sg., see sv dubbhati.
dühatf, pr. 3 sg., se e sv duhati 1.
dühana\ n., see sv duhana 1.
dühana2 , n. see sv duhana2.
dühara, duhara, mfn. [du(s) + hara], hard to be taken
away; S I 36,21 *foil. (kiJTI su corehi -aJT~ ... puññaJT~
corehi -aJT~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee duharaJTI).
dekati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup drekate, Wg § 4:4], sounds;
exerts oneself; Sadd 325,24 (deka dheka
saddussahesu: ... -ati dhekati).
detati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup retati, Wg § 21:4], speaks;
abuses; Sadd 353,2o (cata bhata paribhasane detu ca: ...
430 de ti
-ati; read retu ... repti ?).
de!J!Jubha, m. [cf S. du~<;iubha], l. a kind of lizard; a
water-snake; Abh651 (-o raju1o); ViniV 110,5 (api nu
kho bhikkhave Sagato etarahi pahoti -enapi saddhiJTI
sailgametun ti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee nagena; cfJa I 361,6:
kiJTI pan' etarahi Sagato udakade<;i<;iubhakaJTI pi dametuJTI
sakku~eyya ti); Thi 23 (ukkhalika me -a111 vati, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se wr datiddabhava ti; Thi-a 28,18foll.: me mama
bhattapacanabhajanaJTI . . . udakasappagandhaJTI vayati);
Ja VI 194,16* (siya visaJT~ si1uttassa -assa si1abhuno, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se du<;l<;iubhassa; 194,18': udakasappassa);
Saddh 292; - 2. [see de<;i<;iubhaka] a kind of belt;
Vin-vn 3056 (-am ca ka1abukam).
de!J!Jubhaka, m. [de<;i<;iubha + k~ 2 ], l. a kind of lizard; a
water-snake; - ifc see udaka-; - 2. a kind of girdle or
belt; Vin II 136,7 (chabbaggiya bhikkhü uccavacani
kayabandhanani dharenti ka1abukaJTI -a111 ... ;
Sp 1211,21: -aJT~ narna udakasappasisasadisaJTI).
dei}!Jima, m.n., see sv <;li~<;lima.
deta(r), m. rJrom deti], one who gives; M III 126,27
(nabhijanami nissayaJTI -a; perhaps better absol.).
deti, dada ti, dayati 3, *dati 1, dayati 1, dajjati, dassati 1, pr. 3
sg. [vda 1; S. dadati], gives; makes a gift; yields; applies;
allows (+ inf); Dhatup 131 (da dane); Dhatum 233;
Sadd 367,22 (da dane apubbo gahane: saddho danaJTI
dadati deti); 369,29foll.; 373,1sfoll.;- deti [cfS. dehi]:
Vin I 299,7 (manussa sañghassa dema ti civarani denti);
III 39,1s (ya methunaJTI dhammaJTI deti sa aggadanaJTI
deti ti); DI 50,5 (kacci maJTI sarnma Jivaka na
paccatthikiinaJTI desi); II 333,5 (aggiJTI denti);
III 258,wfoll. (agha danavatthüni, asajja diinaJTI deti
bhaya dana111 deti ... ); M III 205,1sfoll. (asanarahassa
asana111 na deti maggarahassa na maggaJTI deti); 268,18
(na-y-ime pa~ina pahiiraJTI denti ti); A II 73,18 (kadali
attavadhaya pha1aJT~ deti); III 164,21 (ahaJTI demi ayaJTI
patigg~hati ti); V 269,7 (brahm~a nama danani dema
saddhani karoma); Sn 244 (adanasila na ca denti
kassaci); Ja l 279,15 (vanaro kiJTI bho pasa~a ajja
mayhaJTI pativacanaJTI na desi ti aba); 349,23 (macchañ
n' eva aññesaJTI deti na sayaJTI paribhuñjati); II 154,5 (na
me esa nikkhamituJTI deti ti); 262,27* (hantva jhatva
vadhitva ca deti dana111 asaññato ); lii 156,4 (kiJTI
ummattako si matago~assa ti~odakaJTI desi ti); 234,R
(kodho narna uppajjarnano subhasitadubbhasitaJTI
atthanatthaJT~ hitahitaJT~ janituJTI na deti ti); IV 207 ,7*
(mante mayaJTI tadisake na dema); V 115,12' (tadisa hi
rajano danadini puññani karonta devatanaJTI pattiJTI
denti); 118,11· (asukassa i~aJTI dema ti); VI 183,7'
(mittadübhino jivantass' eva pathavi bhijjitva vivaraJTI
deti); Ap 588,6 (deyyaJTI aññaJTI na passami demi
pupphani te isi); Mi1274,22 (sabbe va bodhisatta
puttadaraJTI den ti udahu Vessantaren' eva ranna
puttadaraJTI dinnan ti); 361,6 (taJTI pabbajemi nissayaJTI
demi); 379,9 (niyarnako yante muddikaJTI deti ma koci
yantaJT~ arnasittha ti); 409,27 (rukkho ... chaya111 deti);
Vism 21,11 (upasaka pubbe idise ka1e navadiinaJTI detha
idani kiJTI na detha ti); 674,32 (d~<;lakena saññaJTI deti);
Mp I 208,11 (sukhette patighitapi~<;lapato ditthe va
dharnme vipakaJTI deti ti); Dhp-a I 42,13 (aru~assa
uggantUJTI na deml ti);- deti in Ee at Spk III 201,3 is
deti
prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se patalesi; - imperat. 3 sg. detu,
Vin II 38,12 (sailgho ... charatta~ manatta~ detu); Ja I
263,25 (rajj~ va detu yuddh~ va ti); Dhp-a IV 60,13
(ime kahapa~e gahetva attano dh!tar~ mayha~
puttassa detü ti); 2 sg. dehi, V in III 129,11 (yacati nama
dehi me arahasi me datun ti); D II 96,19 (dehi je
Ambapali eta~ bhatta~ satasahassena ti); Vv 34:14
(sailghe dehl ti); Th! 49 (puriso ailkusam adaya dehi
padan ti yacati); Ja I 91,2s (kumaro pi dayajja~ me
sama~a dehi dayajja~ me sam~a dehl ti bhagavanta~
anubandhi); II 26,20 (aha~ kalale laggo jlvita~ me deh!
ti); III 259,13* (okasa~ yacito dehi vasemu tava santike);
V 407,18* (dehi me jaya~); Milll,29 (dehi me dani
marisa mantan ti); 1 sg. demi, Ja IV 319,1o (kassa
puttavar~ demi); 3 pl. dentu, S 11 200,17 (dentu yeva
me ma nada~su, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ma ad~su);
Ja IV 253,7• (ima~ ca kho dentu mahanasaya); VI 493,3o
(nagara me ekadivasa~ dana~ datu~ okas~ dentu);
2 pl. detha, Vin IV 286,17 (dethavuso bhikkhunl-
sailghassa el varan ti); D 11 357,15 foil. (sakkacca~
dan~ detha sahattha dan~ detha); Ja II 256,2 (cetiye
gandhapañcailgulika~ detha ti); V 290,18 (ajja me idha
vasitu~ detha); VI 551,31* (amma chat' amha detha no);
Vism 307,9 (eka~ bhikkhu~ amhaka~ detha ti);
1 pl. dema, Vin 11 170,1o (handa may~ avuso sabb~
sailghika~ senasana~ ekassa dema); Ja II 69,5•; -
part.pr. denta, mf(dentl)n., Vin IV 53,34 (uddesa~
dento); A 11 63,13 (denn ariyasavika); Ja I 265,2 (<;lasitu~
okasa~ dento viya); 338,10' (sabhaya~ nislditva
vinicchaya~ denta); Cp 1:8:15 (dadamanassa dentassa
dinnadanassa me sato); Kv 347,25 (peta attano atthaya
dana~ denta~ anumodenti); Vism 314,31 (paharasatani
denta); - neg. adenta, mfn., Kkh 2 44,6; - pr. 3. sg.
dadati (1 sg. dadami, dammi; 1 pi. dadama, dadamase,
damma2): Dhatum 215 (dada dane); Vin I 207,27 (tena hi
bhante ayyassa aramik~ damml ti); 221 ,27* (yo ...
kalena sakkacca -ati yagu~); M 11 72,27* (laddhana
vitta~ na -anti moha); S I 20,25* (app~ pi ce
saddahano -ati); 227,25* (abhaya~ yacamanana~
bhayam eva -asi no); A I 286,4 (bhikkhu duddada~ -ati
dukkar~ karoti); 111 40,17* (tasma hi danani -anti
p~<;lita vineyya maccheramala~ sukhesino); Khp 7:3
1eva~ -anti ñatln~ ye honti anukampaka suci~
p~lta~ kalena kappiya~ panabhojana~); Sn 421 (-ami
bhoge bhuñjassu); Vv 9:7 (padlpakalamhi -ati dlp~);
Th 475 (im~ -ama te natha jinassa paricarak~); Ja 11
11,22* (sace yujjhitukamo si jaya~ samma -ami te);
131,23* (cakkhüni e' assa na -ati; 132,3·: pamukho hutva
na o1oketi); III 69,16" (yo hi dassaml ti vatva paccha na
-ati); 109,13" foil. (sabba~ ca te issariy~ -ami yass'
icchasl tassa tuva~ -ami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tuv~ -ahi;
109,16·foll.: yassa icchasi tassa id~ rajja~ adi~ katva
y~ tva~ icchasi ta~ -ami ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ... y~
icchasi ta~ -ah! ti); IV 67 ,5* (-anti h' eke visame
nivigha); 102,13* (magga~ ca te dammi); 262,9 (raja
sabbasattana~ abhaya~ damml ti nagare bheri~
carapesi); 280,2• (i~a~ muñcam' i~a~ dammi); 380,27*
(na madisa tuyha~ -anti jamma); 387,7*
1mahakkasavesu -asi dana~); V 125,3 (tena hi 'ssa
senapatiqhana~ damml ti); 317,22* (nivesanani rammani
431 de ti
maya~ bhoto -amase, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dadamhase);
317 ,24* (Assakavanti~ sumana damma te may~);
VI 136,3* (yajissami -ami danani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
y~issama -ama); 245,29* (na p~<;lita tasmim i~a~
-anti); 488,1o* (-ami na vikampami); 548,12
(paharanaka1e aññamaññ~ pighi~ -anti); 572,17* (vare
agha -ami te); Bv 10:12 (yada Verocano nago dana~
-ati satthuno); Sp 649,29 (ida~ tuyh~ demi -ami
dajjami ... ); Spk I 144,s (muñcami te nesa~ jlvita~
-ami); Dhp-a 111 385,7 (devata mahantena saddena
sadhukara~ -antl ti); Vv-a 188,21 (t~ anumodatha
pattidana~ vo damml ti); - imperat. 3 sg. dadatu,
dadatu, Pv 31:9 (tato me dana~ -atu, Se so; Be, Ce, E e
dadatu); 2 sg. (a) dada, Ja III 412,6* (dada bhuñja ca, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se dada~; 412,w: aññes~ datva va attana
bhuñja); (b) dadahi, Pv 36:78 (-ahi ujubhütesu
vippasannena cetasa); Ja IV 281,13* (nikkhittada~<;lesu
-ahi dan~); (e) dadehi ?, Vin IV 94,21 (dadeheyyassa
bhikkhan ti, Ee so; Be dadehayyassa; Ce, Se deh'
ayyassa); 1 sg. (a) dammi, Vin I 214,33 (kena bhante
ayyassa attho ki~ damml ti); SI 168,31 (atha kassa
caha~ bho Gotama im~ havyases~ damml ti);
Pv 15:24 (handa ki~ tah~ dammi ki~ va ca te karom'
aha~); (b) dadami, Pv 20:7 (aham api ki~ -ami;
Pv-a 109,19: kldisa~ te dan~ dassaml ti); 3 pl. dadantu,
Vin III 148,16 (ekeka~ me bhonto patta~ -antü ti);
2 pl. dadatha, Vv 44:19 (sailghassa danani -atha vitta);
Pv 27:10 (thero sabbe va te ah a yatha1addha~ -atha me;
Pv-a 184,w: -atha ti detha); Mhv 27:10; 1 pl. dadama,
dadamase, Ja 11 138.9· (kassa ta kumarika -ama ti);
III 131 ,15* (yadi hessati dassama asan te ki~ -amase, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se dadamhase); - part.pr. (a) dada(t), mfn.,
Vin I 294,14* (ya annapan~ -atl pamodita, Ce, Se so;
Be -ati ppamodita; Ee atipamodita); S 1 215,1* (-a~
mittani ganthati); A 11 35,7* (aggasmi~ dana~ -at~
agg~ puññ~ pava<;l<;lhati); III 392,16 (sailghe te dan~
-ato citta~ pasldissati); Dhp 242 (macchera~ -ato
mal~); Sn 487 (-a~ paresa~ idha annapan~); Ja 111
12,3•; - neg. adada(t), mfn., Vin III 148,32' (adadam
appiyo) =Ja III 353,6•; SI 18,18* (tad evadadato bhaya~.
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr evadadato); (b) dadanta, mfn., DI
52,33 (uttara~ ce pi gailgatlra~ gaccheyya -anto
dapento); Snp. 87,12 (taggha tva~ m~ava eva~ -anto
eva~ yajanto bahu~ puñña~ pasavasi); Pv 9:3 (sa m~
-ant~ sam~abrahm~ana~ akkosati); Cp 1:9:21
(-antassa sabbaseta~ gajuttam~); Kvu441,24; -
neg. adadanta, mfn., Ja III 253,27"; Sp 566,26;
(e) dadamana, mfn., V in V 210,19* (-amanassa kati
apattiyo); SI 96,7• (-amana~ nivareti); A III 41,8•
(-amano piyo hoti); Pv 38:22 (aññesa~ -amana~
antarayakaro aha~); Ja I 223,24 (devata sadhukara~
-amana); 318,19 (punappuna mukhavata~ -amana pi
aggi~ ujjaletu~ asakkontl); 11237,18 (Bimbisararañño
dh!tara~ -amano); V 426,33" (slsena sañña~ -amana);
Ap 304,22 Glvit~ -amanena);- neg. adadamana, mfn.,
Ja 1 402,3o; Vism 343,27; pr. 3 sg. dayati3 :
Sadd 420,16 (daya danagatihi~sadanarakkhasu ... dayati
dadati sattana~ abhaya~ etaya ti daya);
1
pr. 3 sg. dati : Jaiii 121,4· (nipadamase ti nikarapakara
upasagga damase ti attho, dadama ti vutta~ hoti, Be, Ce,
de ti
Se so; Ee wr pamada ti vuttaJTI hoti); Cp 1:2:7 (yadi
tattha danaJTI na dami, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee dadami); -
dami in Ee at Pv-a 48,25* is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se,
Pv 1:10: dadami; - pr. 3 sg. dayati1 : Sadd480,9 (da
dane: puriso danaJTI dayati); - pr. 3 sg. dajjati (and
dajjeti ?), [stem from dajja 1; see Sadd 370,9* foll.],
Sp 649,29 (id~ tuyh~ demi dadami -ami ... );
Bv-a 256,5 (patiyademi ti -ami, adasin ti attho);
Sadd 833,7 (dassa va dajjo: -ati -anti ice adi); -
imperat. 2 sg. dajjehi [influenced by dehi ?], Vin 1 217,16
(imam mamsam ... tassa -ehi); III 217,4 (acchadehi ti
-ehi)~ - ;r. 3. sg. dassate: V in III 224,5 (bah u avuso
kosakarake pacatha amhakaJTI pi dassatha; or possibly
fut. ?) = V 10,10; Sp 1005,12 (raja ... patt~ ... püretva
bhagavato dassatha ti therassa hatthe thapesi, Ee, Se so;
or fut. ? Be dehi ti; Ce dassati ti); - opt. 3 sg. (see
Sadd 369,31/oll.) (a) dajja 1 [S. dadyat], D 11 267,1o*
(Sakko ca me varaJTI dajja); S 1 175,2o (kattha dajja
deyyadhammaJTI kattha dinn~ mahapphal~); Ja 111
81,11* (ariyo hi ariyassa kathaJTI na dajja, Be, Ee so; Ce,
Se dajje; 8l,14·: kena karal).ena na dadeyya) = 355,7* (eds
so); VI 544,28* (raja dal).<;iaya maJTI dajja); Sadd 371,11
(dajja dadeyya ti); (b) dajjetha, Pv 26:5 (tasma dajjetha
petiinaJTI; Pv-a 171,6: pete uddissa punappunaJTI
dakkhil).aJTI dadeyya ti); (e) dad e, A Ili 41 ,24* (tasma -e
appativanacitto yattha dinnaJTI mahapphalaJTI); Vv 62:5
(vatthagaraJTI ca yo -e); (d) dadeyya, Vin IV 59,3o (yo
pana bhikkhu aññatikaya bhikkhuniya civaraJTI -eyya
pacittiyan ti); M 1 123,32 (pal).ina pahar~ -eyya le<;i<;Iuna
paharaJTI -eyya); Ja V 493,3 (pa!havi va pana me
vivaraJTI -eyya ti); Ap 376,9 (yo koci ... sailghe yaguJTI
-eyya); Mil 77,17 (tato pi mahanto ambarukkho
nibbattitva phalani -eyya); Vism 514,35 (dutiyo
onamitva pi!!hiJTI -eyya); Th-a III 102,19 (ovadaJTI
anusighiJTI -eyya); (e) dadetha, S 1 32,4* (etad aññaya
medhavi bhuñjetha ca -etha ca);- 2 sg. (a) dajja2, Ja V
58,26* (58,3o·: dadeyyasi ti); (b) dajjasi, Ja VI 20,7*
(dajjasi abhay~ mama; 20,9·: sace dadeyyasi); 494,25*
(silavantesu dajjasi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dajjesi) quoted
Sadd 370,3 (dajjesi); (e) dajjeyyasi, Vin 1 271,18 (yada
aroga ahosi tada yaJTI iccheyyasi taJTI dajjeyyasi ti);
(d) dade, Ja V 343,2* (api no jivit~ -e); (e) dadeyyasi,
Vin III 208,27 (sace me tv~ antaravasak~ -eyyasi);
Ja III 67,25 (sace deva ay~ pabbato SUVal).l).amayo assa
-eyyasi me kiñci ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee deyyasi); 276,21;
Mi1316,24; (f) deyyasi, Ap 305,16; 482,13;
1 sg. (a) dajja(JTI), Vin 1 232,7 (sace pi ayyaputta
VesaliJTI saharaJTI dajjeyyatha n' eva dajjahaJTI t~
bhattan ti); Ja VI 181,6* (tassa dajj~ im~ sel~);
515,19* (ah~ hi kuñjar~ dajj~. in past sense; or aor.;
cf490,9*: kath~ no kuñjaraJTI dajja); Cp 1:3:8 (sañraJTI
dajjam attano); Mhv 10:60 (rajjaJTI gahetva te dajj~
sami); (b) dajjami, V in 111 134,25 (kyah~ bhante
ayyassa dajjami ti; or pr. ? cf 134,11 •: kiJTI dajjaJTI, and
Sadd 370,4: dadeyyami dajjami); Ja VI 473,18* (ubbariJTI
tena dosena dajjami dakarakkhato); (e) dade, Ja IV
280,15*; Cp 1:3:8 (rajjaJTI pi me dade sabbaJTI);
(d) dadeyy~. Vin III 42,38; S 1 97,7; Ja IV 402,26* (yo pi
yaceyya m~ cakkhuJTI -eyy~ avikampito);
(e) dadeyyami, Sadd 370,4;- 3 pl. (a) dajjuJTI, It 19,11*;
432 deti
Ja VI 15,26*; (b) dajjeyyum, Kkh 2 343,10; (e) dadeyyuJTI,
Vin IV 91,28 (sadhu bhante ayya titthiyanaJTI sahattha na
-eyyun ti); Mil293,31 (yadi ... dhanaJTI va yasaJTI va
-eyyuJTI); Dhp-a 11 77,19 (aho vat' ime mayham eva
-eyyuJTI na aññesan ti); - 2 pl. (a) dajjatha, Sadd 370,4;
(b) dajjeyyatha, Vin 1 232,7; (e) dadeyyatha, Ja III
171,16; IV 230,18; (d) deyyatha, Ap 305,14;
1 pl. (a) dajjama, Sadd 370,5; (b) dajjemu, Ja VI 307,28*
(-emu kho te sutanUJTI sunett~; 308,w: -emü ti
dadeyyama); (e) dajjeyyama, Vin III 135,18; (d) dademu,
Ja VI 317,15* (na idha santi samal).abrahmal).a va yes'
annapanani -emu katte); (e) dadeyyama, S 1 58,13; Ja VI
246,7·; Sp 176,32;- fut. 3 sg. (a) dassat¡2 [cf S. dasyate],
Vin III 265,12/oll. (tumhe ce amhak~ na -atha atha ko
carahi amhak~ -ati, dethavuso amhak~ imani
civarani ti); IV 263,21 (kathaJTI hi nama bhikkhuni
bhikkhussa pahar~ -ati ti); D III 258,11 (-ati me ti
danaJTI deti); Ja 1 133,6 (id~ te papakamm~ nirayadihi
muccitUJTI na -ati); 279,14 (pasiil).o kiJTI pativacan~ -ati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na -ati); V 308,2* (khamapito Kusaraja
so te -a ti jivit~); Sadd 373,26; (b) dadissati,
Sadd 373,13; 1 sg. (a) dassaJTI, Vin III 147,3* (taJTI te na
-aJTI atiyacako si); Ja IV 405,9* (yo ve -an ti vatvana
adane kurute mano); (b) dassami, A III 392,19 (esahaJTI
bhante ajja-t-agge sailghe danaJTI -ami ti); Pv 36:56
(-ami danaJTI samal).abrahmal).anam); Ja VI 280,2 (ahaJTI
tava jüte jito imaJTI mal).iratanaJTI -ami tvaJTI pana kiJTI
-as! ti); Mil 361,4 (t~ pabbajessami nissayaJTI-ami ti);
Mhv 7:22 (jlvitaJTI dehi me sami rajj~ -ami te ahaJTI);
2 pl. dassatha, Vism 19,5 (kiJTI bhuñjissama kiJTI va me
-atha ti vippalapati); 1 pl. dassama, D 11 l66,2 (bhagava
amhak~ gamakkhette parinibbuto, na may~ -ama
bhagavato sariranaJTI bhagan ti); - cond. 3 sg.
(a) adassa, dassa, Ja V 264,1 (sace so idha abhavissa na
me pitughatakammaJTI katuJTI adassa); Mp 11 215,27 (sace
me ayyo pañca sHani adassa uparidevaloke nibbatto
assaJTI); Sadd 373,27 (adassa dassa adass~su dassaJT!su);
(b) adadissa, dadissa, Sadd 373,15; 1 sg. adassaJTI, Ja 111
30,6 (sace tvaJTI jatisampanno abhavissa rajjaJTI te
adassaJTI); - aor. (cfSadd 372,26/oll.) 3 sg. (a) ada,
Sn 303 (ete yage yajitvana brahmal).linaJTI ada dhan~);
Pv 14:8; Ja III 231,20*; Ap 102,5; Mhv 5:42; (b) adada,
adada, Ja III 69,3* (vacaya adada pabbat~, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se adad~; 69,9·: vacanamattena adassa ti attho, Be,
Ce so; Ee adad~ hoti ti attho; Se adassattha ti); Ja V
161,8* (devindo adada var~); (e) adasi (and
dasi ?),V in III 22,7; MI 126,4 (sise pahar~ adasi);
Thi 396; Ja III 130,18* (adasi danani); VI 512,26* (tassa
t~ yacito dasi); 575,9* (raja putte dasi); Mil 3,1
(paharaJTI adasi); Vism 48,3; Mhv 16: 14;
2 sg. (a) ada, Pv 21:22; Ja IV 371,13*; 404,24* (ma no
deva ada cakkhuJTI); (b) ado, Ja IV 10,21* (varaJTI ce me
ado Sakka; 10,24·: sace tvaJTI mayhaJTI varaJTI adasi);
(e) adada, Ja VI 548,24* (ma no tvaJTI tata adada);
(d) adasi, Pv 36:48; Ja I 386,2; - 1 sg. (a) ad~.
Vv 9:6; Pv 29:3 (ma ca kiñci ito ad~); Ja 111 411,10*
(Be, Ee so; Ce, Se adasiJTI); Ap 89,5; (b) adadaJTI,
Vv 34:8; Ap 283,22; Ja IV 178,6* (na pubbe adad~
dan~. Be, Ee so; Ce, Se adadiJTI); (e) adadiJTI, dadiJTI,
Ap 60,5 (y~ danam adadiJTI tada); 174,8 (phalak~ y~
de ti
aha¡p dadiip); Bv-a 139,32 (maharajjaq¡ jine dadin ti);
(d) adasi(q¡), Vin Ili 254,27; SI 58,18; Vv 1:5; Ja IV
371,5•; Cp 1:10:19; (e) dajja¡p, Ja VI 515,19* (aha¡p hi
kuñjaraq¡ dajja¡p; or opt. in past sense);
3 pl. (a) aduq¡2, Ap 196,2o (te me pupphaq¡ aduq¡ tada);
Mhv 1:60; (b) daduq¡, dadu, Ap 494,1 (daduq¡, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee dadaq¡); Sadd 372,27 (dadu); (e) adaq¡su,
Vin III 83,2; D II 166,2o (adaq¡su kho te Doi:~assa
brahm~assa kumbhaq¡); Ja VI 120,29·; Mi113,w (devata
sadhukara¡p adaq¡su); Vism 380,28 (aggiq¡ adaq¡su);
Mhv 30:20;- adaq¡su in Ee, Se at Ud 78,11 is wr for
apaq¡su (Be, Ce so); (e) dadiq¡su, Ja III 128,24; IV 475,4
(Ce, Ee so; Be ada¡psu; Se dadaq¡su);- 2 pl. (a) adattha
(and dattha), V in II 291,11 (api pana tumhe sam~assa
Anandassa kiñci adattha ti); 294,18 (mavuso adattha
saii.ghassa kahap~a¡p pi); Ja II 181,29 (imassa katthaci
gantuq¡ ma dattha ti, Ee so; Be ma adattha ti; Ce, Se
madattha ti); VI 429,15 (kassaci pavisituq¡ ma adattha ti);
(b) dadattha, Cp-a 37,34 (kasma maharaja
mangalahatthiq¡ dadattha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadatha);
(e) dadittha, Ja III 171,3 (silaq¡ ma dadittha ti, Ee so; Be,
Ce, Se adattha ti); Dhp-a II 267,6 (imissa ummattikaya
ito agantuq¡ ma dadittha ti); Sadd 372,29;
1 pl. (a) adamh~, Vin IV 151,29 (chandaq¡ adamha);
Vv 65:4 (sakkacca danaq¡ vipu1aq¡ adamha); Ja VI
316,27* (adamha); Mil 9,6; (b) adamhase, Pv 26: 10;
Ap 185,21; (e) dadamhase, Pv 50:3 (dujjlvitam ajlvamha
ye sante na dadamhase; Pv-a 282,1: na adamha) = Ja III
47,3* (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dadamhase; 47,18·foll.: ye
mayaq¡ deyyadhamme ca pa!iggahake ca vijjamane yeva
na danaq¡ dadimha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na dadama);
(d) dadimha, Ja III 47,18' (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadama);
Sadd 372,29; (e) adasimh~. Thl 518 (viharadanam
adasimha, Be so; Ce adasimhase; Ee, Se adasimha) =
Ap 512,7 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se adamhase); Ap 545,19;
(f) dadasimha, Ja III 120,13' (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
dapayimha); (g) adayimha, Ja Ili 120,11 * (na te pl!ham
adayimha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adasimha; 120,13·: pl!haJP pi
te na dapayimha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadasimha); - part.
perf act. dinnava(t), mfn., who has given, having given;
Cp-a 72,5 (dinnadanassa ti cakkhuq¡ dinnavato); -
inf (a) datuq¡ 1, Vin lli 132,8 (pa!iba1a mayaq¡ ayyassa
datuq¡); A III 34,9 (a1am eva danani datuq¡ a1aq¡ puññani
katuq¡); Pv 19:6 (na me datuq¡ piyaq¡ ahu); Jaiii 271,6
(matapitunnaq¡ jlvitaq¡ datuq¡ vanan ti); IV 371 ,1o•
(datum arahami bhojanaq¡); Ap 217,3; Kv 340,1 (labbha
cetasiko dhammo paresaq¡ datun ti); Vism 95,7
(aññatakassa bhaginiya samikassa bhesajjaq¡ n' eva
katuq¡ na datuq¡ vanati); - neg. adatuq¡, A IV 61,15;
Ja V 3,21 (imassa ambapakkaq¡ adatuq¡ na yutta¡p);
Sp 641,2s; Sv 533,27 (dussilassa adatuq¡ pi vaqati);
(b) datave (and datuye), Sn 286 (datave tad amaññisuq¡;
cfPjii 315,15: datave ti databbaq¡); Pv21:14 (na me
vijjati datave); Ja IV 434,12* (hattha me n' atthi datave;
434,17': datave ti datuq¡); VI 194,24* (jlvanto dehi danani
yadi te atthi datave; 194,2r: yadi te kiñci databba¡p atthi
ta¡p dehi); Ap 398,5 (bhikkham icchami datave, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee datuye); Cp 1:1 0:5; Sadd 368,12; -
absol. (cfSadd 368,12/oll.) (a) datva 1, Vin III 254,31
(bhikkhussa samaq¡ clvara¡p datva); D II 354,19 (so
433 deti
dana¡p datva evaq¡ anuddisati); MI 333,29 (aggiq¡
datva); SI 92,15 (seqhi gahapati datva paccha vippa!isañ
ahosi); A II 63,9 (ayuq¡ kho pana datva ayussa bhaginl
hoti); Pv 13:7 (bhikkhünaq¡ alopaq¡ datva); Ja II 11,14
(tuyha¡p jayaq¡ datva); 271,6 (ratanasasane uraq¡ datva);
325,1o (lañcaq¡ datva); III 271,1o (jlvitadanaq¡ datva);
344,7 (mahajano sañjatasomanasso sadhukara¡p datva
dhamma¡p assosi); V 294,26 (dvaraq¡ thaketva süciq¡
datva); VI 552,31' (ko datva anutappati); Ap 308,9
(dussani sugate datva); Mill0,6 (acariyabhaga¡p
sahassaq¡ datva); Vism 97,7 (kammaqhana¡p datva);
155,s (supai:!I:laraja pabbate paharaq¡ datva pa1ayi); Ps V
77,2 (silava dussilassa datva pi pha1aq¡ mahanta¡p
adhigacchatl ti); Mp I 415,21 (pabbajitana¡p datva va
khadituq¡ vanan ti); Sadd 368,12; - neg. adatva, Vin IV
152,31 (chanda¡p adatva); It 18,23 (na adatva
bhuñjeyyuq¡); Ja I 290,14 (ta¡p kumarika¡p aññesa¡p
purisana¡p daqhuq¡ adatva); V 397,21* (na kappatl Mata1i
mayha bhuñjituq¡ pubbe adatva); VI 228,28' (taq¡
kammaq¡ tada vipaka¡p adatva); (b) datvana, Pv 22:73
(viceyya danaq¡ datvana saggaq¡ gacchanti dayaka);
Ja IV 412,5• (datvana manusa¡p cakkhuq¡ laddhaq¡
cakkhuq¡ amanusa¡p); VI511,1* (tato Vessantaro raja
danaq¡ datvana khattiyo); Ap 136,23 (madhuq¡ datvana
satthuno); neg. adatvana, Ap 386,4; Cp 1:7:3;
(e) daditva, D III 76,24 (Ee so; Be, Ce ta¡p datva; Se
omits); SI 174,9* (punappuna¡p danapatl daditva);
Pv 20:9; Ap 180,22 (taq¡ ca danaq¡ daditva 'ha¡p, Ce, Se
so; Be daditvana; Ee wr adaditva' ha¡p); 327,32;
(d) daditvana, Ap 444,24; Cp 1:9:26 (mahadanaq¡
daditvana); (e) dajja3, Pv 21 :68 (ayaq¡ so Indako yakkho
dajja danaq¡ parittakaq¡ atirocati amhe; Pv-a 139,12: dajja
ti datva) quoted Sadd 370,26; Sadd 371,11 (dajja dadiya
datva ti); (f) dadiya, Sadd 371,u; - pass. pr. 3 sg.
dlyati, diyyati, Vin IV 59,9 (asukasmiq¡ okase bhikkha
-an ti, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee diyyatl ti); D II 354,16
(evarüpaq¡ bhojanaq¡ -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee diyyati); SI
18,13' (macchera ca pamada ca evaq¡ danaq¡ na -ati);
AIII 391,8 (api nu te gahapati kule danaq¡ -atl ti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se diyyatl ti); Pv 21 :50 (bhojana¡p -ate
nicca¡p); Thl 467 (kaJevaraq¡ kissa -atl ti, Ce so; Be
diyyati; Ee, Se diyyatl ti); 475 (aparimita -ante ghata,
Ee, Se so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Th App II: dissare); Ja I
486,24 (kakanaq¡ dana¡p -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee diyyati);
III 288,13* (navachandake dani diyyati); Cp 1:4:2 (kassa
kiq¡ -atü dhanaq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se diyyatu); Vism 63,27
(-a ti, Be so; Se diyyati; Ce, Ee dlyyati); Sp 1171,3
(manattarahassa manattaq¡ -ati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
diyyati); Nidd-a I 392,19 (uyyodhikan ti yattha
sampaharo -ati, Ee so; Be, Se diyyati; Ce dlyyati);
Sadd 834,1 (da- ... -mathadlnaq¡ yamhi ¡ ... -ati); -
part.pr. dlyamana, diyyamana, mfn., l. being given;
Vin II 132,35 (odane -amane, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
diyyamane); IV 89,22 (so manussehi -amanaq¡ na icchati
pa!iggahetuq¡, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee diyyamanaq¡); Ja I
422,18 (aññehi -amana¡p khajjaka¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
diyyamanaq¡); Cp 1:9:51 (Maddiya -amanaya);
Vism 68,9 (-amanaq¡, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se diyyamanaq¡);
Mhv 26:2; neg. adlyamana, adiyyamana, mfn.,
Sp 1408,13 (adlyamane hi domanassika honti, Be, Se so;
de ti
Ce, Ee adiyyamane); Sv 944,22 (aya¡p imasmi¡p
adlyamane mayha¡p anattha¡p pi kareyya ti, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se adiyyamane) = Vibh-a 501,26; - see also
diyamanaka; - 2. being given to; ? Ap-a 170,22 (ime
yathavu~~ha¡p -amana pi ujjhayanti; = Pj II 90,s: Ce, Ee
-amane pi; Be, Se diyyamane pi);- aor. 3 sg. dlyittha,
S I 58,9; Ja I 486,25; 3 pi. dlyi¡psu, Sv 303,2
(Anathapil).~ikassa kira ghare pañca niccabhattasatani
-i¡psu);- pp (a) dinna, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) (i) given;
applied; what is given; V in l 271,34 (ta¡p sappi natthuto
-a¡p mukhato uggacchi); IV 41,26 (sailghiko nama
viharo sailghassa -o hoti pariccatto); SI 32,1* (-a¡p
sukhapha1a¡p hoti); Khp 7:7 (ito -ena yapenti peta); Ja I
229,12' (ayutta¡p te kathita¡p buddhasasane paharo -o);
III 349,14' (taya hi --tta ajja maya jlvita¡p 1addha¡p);
IV 103,3 (pa!haviya vivare -e); VI 216,18' (yadi
mahabrahmuna brahmal).ana¡p yeva tayo veda -a na
aññesa¡p); 288,10* (-o 'ham asmi tava issarena); 460,2o
(pal).~ita maya tuyha¡p abhaya¡p -am eva); Ap 36,1o
(dipo maya -o); Mill56,zo (ki¡p parassa -ena ti); 277,18
(atidana¡p bhante Nagasena Vessantarena rañña -a¡p);
Sp 281,17 (sücigha!ikadisu -asu); 1123,4 ( --taya);
Sv 572,13 (avasanapil).~apato kira maya -o); Ps V
67,zsfol/. (ki¡p tva¡p satthu -ato sailghe -a¡p
mahappha1atara¡p vadasl ti); Mhv 1:49 (kanighika ...
nagarajassa dinnasi);- -' -adayi(n), mfn., taking (only)
what is given; D I 4,6 (adinnadana pa!ivirato samai).O
Gotamo -'-adayi); III 191,7 (dasakammakara ...
-' -adayino; Sv 956,34: corikaya kiñci agahetva samikehi
dinnass' eva adayino);- --pa!ikailkhi(n), mfn., wishing
for only what is given; D I 4,6 (samai).O Gotamo
dinnadayl --pa!ikailkhi; Sv 72,2: cittena pi dinnam eva
pa!ikailkhati ti) f- M I 179,26 f- Nidd 1 488,3; - (ii) who
has given; Sadd 757,16fo/l. (dighasaddo ... --saddo viya
yebhuyyena kammani vattati appekada pana dana¡p -o
Devadatto ti ettha --saddo viya kattari pi vattati); -
2. (n.) giving; the being given; DI 55,15 (n' atthi
maharaja -a¡p n' atthi yigha¡p n' atthi huta¡p; Sv 165,11:
-assa pha1abhava¡p sandhaya vadati) t- Dhs 1215
(As 385,24: kassaci kiñci datu¡p sakka ti janati, -assa
pana pha1avipako n' atthi ti gal).hati, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
dil).l).assa; Se danassa); Ja VI 493,28 (maya hatthidanassa
--tta pabbajenti); - neg. adinna, mfn. and n. (what is)
not given; the not being given; Vin III 43,7 (na arahati
adinna¡p dinnan ti vattun ti); S I 204,29* (ya¡p eta¡p
varija¡p puppha¡p adinnam upasiñghasi); A I 206,28 (te
bhoge adinna¡p yeva paribhuñjati); Ja IV 116,17*
(piiniya¡p adinna¡p paribhuñjisa¡p); 266,31' (maya naye
adinne kathetu¡p na sakkhissati); Cp 1:8:2 (ya¡p kiñci
manusa¡p diina¡p adinna¡p me na vijjati); Sp 201,1 (na
koci parikkharo samal).aparibhogo adinno niima ahosi);
704,24 (ekadesassa vii adinnatta); 969,15 (adinnani honti
saral).ani); Ps V 61,s (pubbe aghanna¡p parikkhariina¡p
adinnattii); Dhp-a IV 133,10 (siimal).ero maya adinnam
eva panlya¡p gahetva iigato); - esp. adinna¡p iidiyati,
takes what is not given; steals; Vin III 45,15 (yo pana
bhikkhu adinna¡p theyyasailkhiita¡p adiyeyya ... aya¡p pi
pariijiko hoti asa¡pviiso ti); V 3,34 (Dhaniyo
kumbhakaraputto rañño diirüni adinna¡p iidiyi, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se adinnani); D III 92,6 (satto 1o1ajiitiko saka¡p
434 de ti
bhaga¡p parirakkhanto aññatara¡p bhiiga¡p adinna¡p
iidiyitva paribhuñji); A I 189 ,2o (pal).a¡p pi han a ti
adinna¡p pi adiyati paradara¡p pi gacchati ... ); Sn 119
(ya¡p paresa¡p mamayita¡p theyyii adinna¡p iidiyati, Ce,
Ee so; Be adeti; Se aneti); Ja VI 110,28' (adinnam adaya
karonti jlvika¡p); Mi125,23 (ko pal).a¡p hanati ko adinna¡p
adiyati ko kiimesu miccha carati ... ); - adinniidana, n.
[adinna + iidana 1], taking what is not given; theft; Vin V
194,27 (adinnadana veramal).l); DI 4,5 (adinnadana¡p
pahaya adinnadana pa!ivirato; Sv 71,16: adinnassa
adana¡p adinniidiina¡p, parassa haral).a¡p theyya¡p corikii
ti vutta¡p hoti); S IV 320,29 (bhagava ... adinnadana¡p
garahati); Khp 2:2 (adinnadana veramal).lsikkhiipada¡p
samiidiyiimi); Ja 11 378.13 (tumhaka¡p theyyacitta¡p
n' atthi tena vina adinnadana¡p niima paññiipetu¡p na
sakka); Vism 684,19; - adinnadiiyi(n), mfn., who takes
what is not given; who steals; DI 138,32 (iigamissanti ...
yañña¡p adinnadayino); MI 42,7 (pare adinnadiiyi
bhavissanti); 44,3 (adinnadayissa purisapugga1assa);
III 210,14 (amu¡p pugga1a¡p passati ... adinnadayi¡p);
A 11 58,5 (piil).atipatini adinnadayini); Kv 94,12 (sabbe
deva pal).iitipatino adinnadayino); Mi1290,w (dissanti
bhante Nagasena idha panatipatino adinniidiiyino ); -
duddinna, mfn., not well given; not properly given;
Mil 276,6 (ta¡p maya¡p dana¡p vikittentii vikopenta
nisinnii sudinna¡p udahu duddinnan ti); Sp 650,5
(duddinna¡p duggahita¡p ca); - sudinna, mfn., (it is)
well given; properly given; Vin 11 60,26 (yo pariviiso
dinno sudinno); Vv 34:26; Ja IV 20,19 (aho sudinna¡p me
paccekabuddhassa danan ti); Ap 517,11 (sudinna¡p me
diinavara¡p); Sp 380,19 (siimikena pana imassa dehl ti
diipita¡p vii saya¡p dinna¡p va sudinnan ti); -
pp (b) datta 1, mfn. [ts], given; Mp III 261,13 (pitara -a¡p
siipateyya¡p bhuñjati ti pettaniko); Pj 11 272,13 (paren'
eva -a¡p upajlvati tasmii paradattüpajlvl ti vuccati);
Sadd 368,19* (gul).abhüto dattasaddo na di!!ho
jinabhiisite ... Devadatto Y aññadatto Oatto iti ca iidiko
pal).l).attivacane digho samiisavyasato pana); 781 ,12joll.
(dinnasaddassa dattiideso hoti kvaci samiise: buddhena
dinno Buddhadatto paradattüpajivi); - ifc see para-; -
fpp (a) diitabba, mfn. and n., impers., to be given; to be
imposed; one must give; there must be giving; V in III
17,28 (sace gahapati bhojana¡p -a¡p detha mii no
vihe!hayitthii ti); D 11 154,19 (Channassa ... bhikkhuno
mam' accayena brahmadai).~O -o ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
katabbo); MI 379,23 (mayham eva dana¡p -a¡p na
aññesa¡p diina¡p -a¡p); Vv 5:12 (iisana¡p -a¡p hoti
sañrantimadhiirina¡p); Pv 21 :73 (viceyya dana¡p -a¡p
yattha dinna¡p mahapphala¡p); Ja 11 378,7 (imamha
kedarii maya rañño bhiigo -o); Ap 303,27 (-a¡p nama
ya¡p atthi); Mi1230,29 (eva¡p ca eva¡p ca bhikkhüna¡p
-an ti); 280,1 (api ca puttadiira¡p yiicanena niminitva
attiina¡p -an ti); Th-ai 142,3 (--tta); - databba-
yuttaka, mfn., l.fit to be given; suitable to be given:
Ja V 195,11 (sabba¡p --yuttaka¡p datvii); Pv-a 120,15
(samal).abrahmal).iina¡p diitu¡p kiñci --yuttaka¡p mayha¡p
n' atthi); - 2.fit to be given to, worthy of a gift; Ja 11
137,24 (--yuttakassa dassiimi ti); III11,23 (yo hi
adiitabbayuttakassa deti --yuttakassa na deti); 376,17
(--yuttakana¡p datva amba¡p paribhuñji);
depiccha
fpp (b) deyya, mfn. and n., impers. [S. deya], l. to be
given; there must be giving; a gift; S 1 18,14* (puññam
akañkhamanena -am hoti vijanata); Vv 47:9 (appaka~
pi kata~ -a~ puñña~ hoti mahappha1a~; Vv-a 203,1:
-an ti databbavatthu~); Ap 305,11 (assa deyyo
tathagato ); 588,5 (-a~ añña~ na passami); Mhv 7:31
(rajj~ ca samino -a~); Sadd 848,2 (databba~ -a~);­
neg. adeyya, mfn., Vin 1 217,27 (ki~ pana imaya añña~
kiñci adeyya~ bhavissatl ti); II 158,35 (adeyyo gahapati
aramo api kotisantharena ti); Pv 36:56; Ja V 392,1 *;
Ap 304,2o (adeyyo kassaci buddho); Cp-a 64,33
(adeyy~ datu~ asakkm,1eyya~ na passati); - ifc see
brahma-, raja-, saddha-; - see also deyyadhamma; -
2. to be given to; who is worthy of a gift; la Ili 12,1*
(adeyyesu dada~ dana~ -esu na ppavecchati; 12,w:
-esil ti katilpakaresu);- neg. adeyya, mfn., Jaiii 12,1•;
- (e) dajja, mfn., Pj 1 213,22 (aparo patho petana~
dakkhii.Ja dajja ti tass' attho daditabba ti dajja, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be databba ti dajja) f. Pv-a 30,3foll.; Sadd 371,12
(dajja databba ti); (d) daditabba, mfn., Pj 1 213,22
(daditabba, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be databba); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. dapeti, -ayati, V in lil 43,2 (sace tani raja -eti);
135,34 (ayyo Udayi -essatl ti); Ja III 300,3 (patta~
pilretva -ehi ti); VI 297,15* (pii.J9a~ ca asinan~ va
-ay e, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se padapaye); Mil240,13 (-eyya);
Sp 758,11 (aggi~ deti va -eti va); PsI 14,32 (bhikkhavo
ti pativacan~ -eti bhadante ti pativacan~ denti);
IV 81,7 (asahattha ti na attano hatthena deti
dasakammakaradihi -eti); Mp I 187,13 (dana~ dento
devat~ sadhukar~ -etu~ nasakkhi~); Dhp-a IV 76,13
(kimatth~ amhak~ patti~ na -etha); Sadd 367,24
(saddho asaddh~ dana~ -eti); - dapeti ti in Ee at
Ja II 404,s is prob. wr; Be, Ce vadapeti ti; Se narindo ti;
- dapenti in Ee at Ja I 343,3o: read pakkhandapenti with
Be, Ce, Se; - part.pr. dapenta, mfn., D 1 52,33 (dadanto
-ento yajanto yajapento, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dadapento) =
MI 404,33 = S IV 349,19; Ja VI 577,13 (raja kumarana~
nikkaya~ -ento ); Spk I 161 ,s; - aor. 3 sg. (a) dapesi,
Vin IV 79,9; Ja I 124,13 (bhai.J9asamikana~
bhai.J9anurilpam eva milla~ -esi); Ili 194,8 (tassa sattha
pabbajja~ ca upasampada~ ca -esi); Ap 485,28;
Mil 240,15 (tathagato matucchaya ta~ vassikasatika~
sailghassa -esi ti); Mhv 10:87; (b) adapayi, dapayi,
Pv 26:4 (adapayi); Mhv 5:85 (adapayi); 34:79 (dapayi);
2 sg. adapayi, JaiV 371,7* (t~ tv~ bhatt~ ...
brahmai.Jassa adapayi); 3 pl. (a) dapesu~. Ja IV 243,25
(thera ... kiñci n' eva attana gai.Jhi~su na Kokalikassa
-esu~); Pv-a 46,3o; (b) dapayi~su, Ja V 466,24 (tassa pi
-ayi~su, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); 1 pl. dapayimha,
Ja III 120,13' (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dadasimha); -
absol. (a) dapetva, Vin IV 93,15; Ja I 377,22 (avasa~ ca
paribbaya~ ca -etva); III 519,22 (mahajanassa
abhayadana~ -etva); - neg. adapetva, Vin IV 92,32;
Spki 217,u; (b)dapiya, Mhv35:72; (c)dapayitvana,
Mhv 22:74; - pass. pr. 3 sg. dapiyati, dapiyyati, Ja I
484,2· (dai.J9a~ -iyati, Be, Se so; Ce -iyyati; Ee
dariyyati, prob. wr); - part.pr. dapiyamana, mfn.,
Sv 879,12; - pp dapita, mfn., Ja 1 469,1; II 24,s; Pj II
170,4 (araññe aggimhi -ite); Mhv 7:26;
fpp dapetabba, mfn., Sp 6?2,11; Pv-a 124,17 (sahatthena
435 de va
dan~ databb~ parehi va patirilpehi -etabba~);- see
a[so dajjati, dicchati.
depiccha, dvepiccha, dvepiñcha, ifc see kañcana.
dephati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup riphati, Wg § 28:23],
speaks; fights; blames; injures; takes; Sadd 405,7 (dipha
kathanayuddhanindahi~sadanesu: -ati depho; read
ripha ... rephati repho ?).
debhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup rebhate, Wg § 10:22],
sounds; Sadd 408,12 (debha abhi dabhi sadde: -ati; read
rebha ... rebhati ?) .
deyya, mfn.,fpp ofdeti qv.
deyyadhamma, m. (and n.) [cfBHS deyadharma], afee; a
gift; something (suitable) to give; Vin I 274,s (sacah~
t~ gahapati arogapeyy~ kim me assa -o ti); IV 283,18
(katha~ hi nama ayya Thullananda amhaka~ -~
antaraya~ karissati); SI 175,20* (kattha dajja -a~); A I
166,13 (yañño va saddha~ va thalipako va-~ va; Mp II
265,32foll.: yañño ti adisu yajitabbo ti yañño, -ass' et~
nama~ ... -an ti vuttavasesa~ y~ kiñci -a~ nama);
Sn 982 (ya~ kho mama~ -a~ sabba~ vissajjita~
maya); Pv 1:1 (khettilpama arahanto dayaka
kassakilpama bijilpama~ -~; Pv-a 7 ,3o:
liilgavipallasena vutta~. bijasadiso -o ti attho ); 15:18
(santesu -esu dip~ nakasi~ attano); Ja II 250,23foll.
(amhaka~ antevasiko deva~ upaghatu~ icchati -am
assa janatha ti rañño arocetva rañña tumhaka~ -ato
upa99h~ 1abhissati ti vutte); IV 461,16' (raja uraga~
mocetu~ ahigui.J9ika~ amantetva tassa databb~ -~
dassento); V 284,26 (tumhaka~ kira dhitara~
Pabhavati~ tassa detha ima~ ca suvai.JI.Jarilpaka~ -a~
gai.Jhatha ti); Ap 76,17 (-o ca me n' atthi; Ap-a 346,9:
annapanadidatabbayuttaka~ vatthu mayha~ n' atthi);
Kv 343,2 (tena hi na vattabba~ -o danan ti); Vism 27,2o
(sace ettha -o uppajjati mayham eva detl ti); Ps III 452,2
(brahmai.Ja ... nassa -a~ gai.Jhissama ti k upita bhojanani
cha99etva nikkhami~su); Dhp-a I 395,1o (tassa -a~
dadamano kahapai.Japilrani pañca sakatasatani adasi);
V v-a 64,3foll. (appekada 'ham -e sati ayya~ na passami
appekada me ayya~ passantiya -o na hoti ajja pana me
ayyo ca digho -o ca atthi); Pv-a 20,32 (te danassa
antaraya~ katva -a~ attana khadi~su); Nidd-a I 335,27
(-a sulabha dakkhii.Jeyya ca saddha pana dullabha);
Cp-a 53,32 (dvarato paghaya yava koi.Ja -o rasikato
titthati).
deva, m. and mfn. [ts], l. (m.) Sadd 35,2o (-o ti vutte
megho ti va akaso ti va raja ti va devata ti va
visuddhidevo ti va attho patibhati); (i) a deity, a god;
Abh 11 (tidasa tv amara -a); 842 (-o visuddhidevado );
Vin III 73,37 (-ana~ jivita~ upadaya manussan~
jivita~ papaka~); D II 109,17 (ko nu kho ay~ bhasati
-o va manusso va ti); 208,6foll. (ye te bhante -a
bhagavati brahmacariya~ caritva adhunuppanna
tavati~sakaya~ te aññe -e atirocanti Vai.JI.Jena e' eva
yasasa ca); 259,15' foil. (apo ca -a pathavi tejo vayo
tadagamu~ varui.Ja varui.Ja -a somo ca yasasa saha ... );
286,19* (cutaha~ manusa kaya ... puna -o bhavissami
devalokasmi~ uttamo); MI 73,19 (pañca ... gatiyo ...
nirayo tiracchanayoni pittivisayo manussa -a); 140,4
(eva~vimuttacitt~ kho bhikkhave bhikkhu~ sa-inda
-a sabrahmaka sapajapatika anvesa~ nadhigacchanti);
deva
S 1 216,1o (bhütapubbarr bhikkhave asura -e
abhiyarrsu); III 85,2o (-a dighayuka Val)~avanto
sukhabahula uccesu vimanesu ciraghitika); Dhp 105
(n' eva -o na gandhabbo na Maro saha brahmuna);
It 77,14* (yada -o devakaya cavati ayusailkhaya); Sn 310
(-a pitaro Indo asurarakkhasa); 1024 (ko nu -o va
Brahma va Indo va pi Sujampati); Vv 62:3 (n' amhi -o
na gandhabbo napi Sakko purindado Sudhamma nama
ye -a tesarr aññataro aharr); Pv 21:63 (na koci -o
Val)~ena sambuddharr atirocati); Thi 455 ( -esu pi
upapatti asassata); Ja IV 109,12* (-a na jiranti yatha
manussa); V 4,18* (ya santi nariyo -esu -anarr
paricarika); VI 36,1 • (anal)o ñatinarr hoti -anarr pitunarr
pi ca); 202,2o• (mahasanarr -am anomaval)!Jarr ...
aggirr); 207,9• foll. (sikhirr hi -esu vadanti h' eke aparr
milakkha pana -am ahu); Ap 100,5 (nibbayante ca
sambuddhe ... -a sannipaturr tada); 610,18 (acchara viya
-e su ahosirr rüpasampada); B v 1:51 (S ariputto ... -o va
gagane iddhiya upasailkami); Vibh 422,1 (tayo -a
sammutideva upapattideva visuddhideva); Mi13,19 (te
ubho pi-~esu ca manussesu ca sarrsaranta); Vism 113,3o
(dasa asubha kayagatasati ahare patikülasañña ti imani
dvadasa -esu nappavattanti); 603,15* (na h' ettha -o
Brahma va sarrsarass' atthi karako); Pj 1 123,9 (dibbanti
ti -a pañcahi kamagu~ehi ki)anti attano va siriya jo tan ti
ti attho); Mhv 1:52 (Samiddhisumano nama -o); 7:5
(devindo . . . -ass' uppalava~~assa Lailkarakkharr
samappayi); Sadd 475,3ojoll.; - esp. a god of death,
Mara or Yama; Abh 842 (-o ... meghamaccunabhesu
ca); Mp 11 227,2 (-o ti maccu tassa düta ti devadüta); -
there are various groups of gods: D 1 I9,11foll. (santi
bhikkhave khi99apadosika nama -a); M 1 289,13foll.
(aho vataharr kayassa bheda pararr maraJ)a
catummaharajikanarr -anarr sahavyatarr upapajjeyyan
ti . . . tavatirrsanarr -anarr . . . akasanañcayatan-
üpaganarr -anarr . . . nevasaññasaññayatanüpaganarr
-anarr ... );S 1 133.13* (tavatirrsa ca y ama ca tusita capi
devata nimmanaratino -a ye -a vasavattino);
III 250,4foll. (santi bhikkhave mülagandhe adhivattha
-a ... ); 254,6foll. (santi bhikkhave sitavalahaka -a santi
u~havalahaka -a ... san ti vassavalahaka -a ime vuccanti
bhikkhave valahakakayika -a); A 1 210,11joll. (santi -a
catummaharajika santi -a tavatirrsa santi -a yama santi
-a tusita santi -a nimmanaratino santi -a
paranimmitavasavattino santi -a brahmakayika santi -a
tatuttarirr); - ifc see upapatti-, bhumma-; - (ii) the
sphere of the gods; a godlike state; A 1 37,14foll.
(appaka te satta y e -a cuta -esu paccajayanti . . . ye
niraya cuta ... ); 233,14 (-e ca manusse sandhavitva
sarrsaritva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee manuse); Ja VI 243,2o*
(aharr hi -ato idani emi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se devato;
243,23': -ato ti devalokato); Bv 16:7 (punapararr yada
buddho -ato eti manuse); - (iii) godlike; a godlike
person; A 11 57,28 (-o chavaya saddhirr sarrvasati); 59,9*
(sa pi chava sarrvasati -ena patina saha); - ifc see
visuddhi-; - (iv) (the god of) the sky and atmosphere; a
rain-cloud ( cf S III 254,6 foll.: santi bhikkhave
sitavalahaka -a san ti u~havalahaka -a ... ); Abh 46
(nabharr -o vehasayo); 47 (megho valahako -o); 842
(-o ... meghamaccunabhesu ca); Vinll 121,36 (-e
436 de va
vas san te civararr ovassati); IV 118,33 (-o ca thokarr
thokarr phusayati); D 1 96,21 (satta vassani -o na
vassissati ti); S 1 65,13 (saradasamaye viddhe
vigatavalahake -e; Spkl 125,24: -e ti akase); 154,25*
(vijju sañcarati thaneti -o); Sn 18 (atha ce patthayasi
pavassa -a); Th 189 (-o ca vasssati -o ca ga)aga)ayati);
Ja IV 94,13* (ko 'yarr anariyo -o akalena pi vassati);
V 194,2 (sakalarattharr u99ayhati manussa dukkhita -arr
vassapehi -a ti); 194,7 (vassati te maharaja rajje -o ti);
201,13 (Sakko pi tarr divasam eva tussitva sakalaraghe
-arr vassapesi); 317,15* (-amhi vassamanamhi);
Mil 375,21 (-e samma dhararr pavecchante); Vism 259,7
(thullaphusitake -e vassante); Sv 218,15 (-o ti megho);
Mhv 21:27 (-o akale vassitva); Sadd442,12* (vehaso
gaganarr -o); - (v) a king; very often voc.: 'your
majesty'; Vin 1 348,31 (-ena me matapitaro hata ti);
IV l58,2o (ayya va -assa itthagararr dhammarr
vacessanti ti); D 1 47,16 (ayarr -a Püra~o Kassapo);
11 I6,2joll. (putto te -a jato tarr -o passatü ti); M 11
113,1 (evarr -a ti kho so puriso rañño Pasenadissa
Kosalassa patissutva); A 1 138,16 (imassa -o dal)9arr
pa~etü ti); Pv 38:15 (pivatu -o paniyarr); Jal 179,7 (so
sadhu -a ti rajanarr vanditva); IV 120,21• (pabbajissarr
maharaja tarr -o anumaññatu); VI 285,11 • (dasaharr
-assa pararr pi gantva);- ifc see sammuti-;- 2. (mjn.)
heavenly, divine; belong to the devas; - iic see below;
- devarr purarr in Ee at Ja V 191,21* is wr for
devapurarr (Be, Ce, Se so);- '-aññatara, m. [cfBHS
0
devanyatama], one of the gods; sorne god or other; a
lesser god; D III 239,6 (imina 'harr silena va vatena va
tapena va brahmacariyena va devo bhavissami -o va ti;
Sv l 031 ,26: mahesakkhadevo va bhavissami -o va ti
appesakkhadevesu va aññataro) = M 1 388,s (Ps III
102,1: devo ti sakkasuyamadinarr aññataro -o ti tesarr
dutiyakatatiyakaghanadisu aññataro devo) =A IV 55,24
(Mp IV 32,12: devo ti eko devaraja -o ti aññataro
devaputto); Ja VI 202,14* (-o ahosi; 202,17·: so aññataro
mahesakkhadevaraja ahosi); 207,12* (aggi na -o na
e' apo); - 0 íitideva, m., a god surpassing the gods;
Vv 64:27 (buddharr ... -arr); Ja IV 158,n•; Ap 253,12
(-assa Vessabhussa mahesino); Mil217,2 (bhasitarr
p' etarr maharaja bhagavata -ena); Th-aiii 171,5
(sammasambuddho . . . uttamo devo -o ahosi);
Mhv 1:57; - 0 '-alaya, m., a god's home; a temple;
Abh 955 (-e ... cetiyarr); Mp II 373,15 (tathagato ...
kadaci cap ale cetiye . . . kadaci sattambe ti evarr
yebhuyyena -esu yeva vihasi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
0
-ku1esu); Mhv 37:40 (tayo vihare karesi -arr vinasiya);
-
0
'-u.ühanakamma, n., an act of complaint to the
gods; JaiV 288,1;- 0 '-orohal}a, 0 '-orohana,n., a
descent from the gods, from the heavens; Mil350,4 (-e
Sailkassanagaradvare 1okavivaral)apatihariye pa-
sannanarr naramarünarr); Sv 577,4; Spk 1 120,3 (-arr
katva Sailkassanagaradvare thitena satthara);
0
'-orohal}aka, n., id., Jina1226; - 0
-kañña,f, a
heavenly girl, afemale divinity (cfacchara2); S 1 200,16*
(duggata -ayo sakkayasmirr patitthita); Ja 1 61,15 (-a
viya rüpasobhaggappatta itthiyo); IV 272,9 (Sakko
devaraja bahü nave deve ca -ayo ca disva); Ap 280,22
(akil:_~.~o -ahi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -abhi); 595,9 (-a
de va
manussa ca); Mi1169,23 (tathagato ... [Nandal!l]
devabhavanal!l netva -ayo dassesi); Pj II 254,5 (Sirima
-a anagamipha1e ... patinhahi ti);- -kaya, m., a deva
0
world or sphere; a collective body of devas; D II 255,5*
(-al!l paripüressanti); SI 200,23* (n' atthi dani punavaso
-asmi); Ud 15,1* (piyarüpasatagadhita ve -a puthü
manussa ca, so read with L. Alsdorf, 1967, p. 260);
It 77,14* (yada devo -a cavati ayusañkhaya; It-a II 75,34:
-a ti 0 -samühato 0 -ghanato va, 0 -1okato ti attho); Thi 32
(-al!l na patthe 'h~); Ap 22,9 (dasasu 1okadhatüsu -a
mahiddhika); - 0 -kuñjara, m. the best of the gods;
Vv 47:7 (devinda maghava -a; V v-a 202,7: -a ti
sabbaba1aparakkamadivisesehi devesu kuñjarasadisa);
Ja V 158,10* (maghava -o); Sadd 378,6*; - 0
-kula, n.,
l. a temple; Ja II 411,19; Dhp-a II 210,5; Mhv 10:99;-
2.a royal family; Mhv 19:1;- 0 -kusuma, n., claves;
Abh 303; - 0 -khataka, n., a natural pond; Abh 680;
0
-gandhika, mfn., with a heavenly perfume;
Ap 289,12; 348,29 (panasal!l -al!l. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
vanasar_¡ge va gandhikal!l, prob. wr); 517 ,23; -
0
-garahaka, mfn., who disparages the gods; MI 327,6;
-
0
-ghata,f [deva + gha~a 1 ], a group of gods;
Sv 680,17; Mp II 134,5; - 0 -jigucchaka, mfn., who
dislikes or disapproves of the gods; MI 327,6; -
0
-Uhana, n., a place ofthe gods; l. a temple, a shrine; a
place of worship; Ja I 69,4 (Sujata . . . PUI:II:Iadasil!l
amantesi . . . ajja amhak~ devata ativiya pasanna ...
vegena gantva -~ pa~ijaggahi ti); Dhp-a III 251,2
(brahmar_¡o ... tam eva -al!l vanditva aghasi); Mil 91,28;
Sp 575,2 (cetiyal!l. püjarahan~ -an~ etal!l
adhivacanal!l); Sv 443,28 (cakkaratanassa ca
nibbattakalato pa~~haya aññal!l -al!l nama na hoti); -
2. a heavenly home; Ja II 125,4 (Sakko mahajanassa
ovada~!~ datva attano -am eva agamasi); Ps II 421,16
(tamha ca -a cuto); Spk III 220,34; It-a II 75,34
("-samühato -ato va 0 -lokato ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr 0 -paghanato); - 0 -t:iil}.a, m. [S. lex. id.], a plant;
SAF: bristly luffa, Luffa echinata Roxb.; Abh 578 (-o tu
jimüto, so read with Ce index? Be, Ce 0 -taso); -
0
-tta, n., abstr., the state of being a god; divinity; D II
57,7 (devana~!~ va -aya); Ja III 472,27* (hinena
brahmacariyena khattiye upapajjati majjhimena ca -al!l
uttamena visujjhati); Ap 4,23 (duve bhave pajanami -e
atha manuse, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -~ atha manusal!l);
35,21 (upapannassa -al!l); Spk 11 340,28 (ime satta -~pi
marattal!l pi brahmatt~ pi . . . papui:Ianti);
0
-ttana, n., abstr., the state of being a god; Th 1127;
Ap 34,25 (puna-~ gato, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se devattat~.
prob. wr);- 0 -dm;tl}.a, m., the god's rod or punishment;
a thunderbolt; Dhp-a III 19,15 (sacah~ evarüpal!l na
khamapessami -o mama matthake patissatl ti);
Ap-a 399,10 (asanipato, -o ti attho); 506,23 (asaniyo -a
bhayavaha);- 0 -dattiya, 0 -dattika, mfn., given by gods;
a divine gift; Jaiii 37,4 (-~ vakkalal!l gahetva);
Vism 62,27 (sosanikal!l papai:Iik~ . . . -al!l samuddikan
ti [clvar~]; 63,22: -an ti y~ Anuruddhattherassa viya
devatahi dinnakal!l); Pj 11 382,31 (-al!l
p~sukülaclvar~); Pv-a 145,2o (id~ -~ dhanal!l na
kenaci gahetabban ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
-dattikadhanal!l); Sadd 369,19; - 0 -daru, 0 -daruka, m.,
437 de va
a tree; SAF: cedar, deodar, Cedrus deodara (Roxb.)
D.Don; Abh 568 (-u bhaddadaru); Ja V 420,3 (in cpd:
-piyañgudevadarukacocagahane; 422,23": -u-rukkhehi
e' eva kadallhi ca gahane); - 0 -dundubhi, m.f, thunder;
DI 10,29 (ev~vipako -i bhavissati; Sv 95,12: -i ti
sukkhava1ahakagajjan~); S V 262,24 (ossanhe pana
bhagavata ayusañkhare mahabhürnicalo ahosi ... -iyo ca
phalil!lsu); Ap 530,5 (nadita -i, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -i);-
0
-düta, m. [deva + düta 1], god's messenger, a warning
ofmortality; M II 75,18 (patubhüta kho me ... -a dissanti
sirasmil!l palitani jatani); III 179,17 foll. (tam enal!l
bhikkhave Yamo raJa pa~amal!l -~
samanuyuñjati ... ); A I 138,8/oll. (t!I:I' imani bhikkhave
-ani; Mp 11 227,2/oll.: devo ti macen tassa düta ti -a ...
deva viya düta ti pi -a ... visuddhideviinal!l va düta ti pi
-a ... idha pana liñgavipallasena -ani ti vuttal!l); Ja I
138,24* (patubhüta -a pabbajjasamayo mama); Dhp-a I
85,1 (jii:II:Iavyadhimatasaiikhate tayo -e disva); -
0
-deva, m., god of gods; Abh 3 (buddho ... o); Th 1279
(tal!l -al!l vandami); Nidd I 343,27 (kah~ buddho
kahal!l bhagava kahal!l -o; Nidd-a I 373,31: -o ti
devan~ atidevo); Ap 589,14 (pañcako~isata buddha ...
etesal!l -an~); Vism 2,7; - 0 -dhamma, m. and mfn.
[deva + dhamma 1], (m.) a quality of the gods; a divine
or excellent quality; (mfn.) having the qualities of the
gods; of godlike nature; J a I 128,20 (-e janasi ti pucchi
so -a nama candimasüriyo ti aha, Be so; Ce, Ee -~
janasi ti; Se -o nama); 128,24/oll. (-e janasi ti ... -a
nama catasso disa ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -o nama); 129,22*
(santo sappurisa 1oke -a ti vuccare; 132,4'joll.: deva
ti . . . tividha . . . tividhiinal!l tesal!l deviinal!l dhamma ti
-a ti tehi -ehi samannagata pugga1a pi -a); -
0
-dhammika, m(jn.), a member of a particular sect (of
ascetics ?); A III 277,1 (nigar_¡~o ... mui:Igasavako ...
gotamako ... -o); Ap 358,19; - 0
-dhita(r),f, a female
divinity; Ja II 57,12 (pubbe pi -aro pabbajite pa1obhesul!l
yeva ti); VI 117,1 (-aya akasaghakavimiinal!l disva);
Sv 695,6 (nagarukkhe eka -a vasati); Ps II 24,9
(dibbasampattil!l anubhavamane devaputte ca -aro ca
disva); Spk I 30,7 (acchara ti -iinal!l nam~); -
0
-nikaya, m., a group or assemblage of gods; D Il 50,14
(tasmil!l bhikkhave -e anekani devatasahassani); 26l,s*
(sagh' ete -a sabbe nanattavai:II:Iino); MI 102,9
(aññataral!l -~ pai:Iidhaya); A I 63,3o (aññatar~ -~
upapajjati); Ja VI 568,13·; Thi-a 164,25 (tavatil!lsadike
-e); Sadd 17,zz;- 0 -paUhanato in Ee at It-all 75,34 is
0
wr for -~~anato (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 -putta, m.
[BHS devaputra], a male divinity; Vin 11 185,2s; D 11
14,20 (cattaro [bodhisatt~] -a pa~iggahetva matu purato
~hapenti; Sv 437,3o: cattaro maharajano); MI 505,18 (so
-o nandane vane accharasañghaparivuto dibbehi pañcahi
kamagui:Iehi samappito); SI 46,6 (Kassapo -o
abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavai:II:IO keva1akapp~
Jetavan~ obhasetva); Vv 60:4; Ja I 71,27 (Maro -o
Siddhatthakumaro mayhal!l vas~ atikkamitukamo ...
ti); IV 188,3o (-a milsikapotaka hutva); 356,14* (-o
mahiddhiko Matali devasarathi); V 278,8 (deva1oke
cavanadhamman~ -anal!l pañca pubbanimittani
paññayanti); VI 122,24 (sampattil!l anubhavantassa -assa
katakamm~ puttho); Pa~is I 175,1o (yatha candima -o
devaka
ev~ bhikkhu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr devamutto); Mil 7,2
(t~ -a111 yacissama manussaloküpapattiya ti);
Vism 209,15 (-o pi sotapattiphale patitthaya);
Sv 710,35foll. (cando nama -o suriyo nama -o ti
vadanti); Spk 1 103,5 (devana111 hi añke nibbatta purisa
-a nama itthiyo devadhltaro nama honti); Mhv 30:89; -
0
-mutto in Ee at Patis I 175,10 is wr for 0 -putto (Be, Ce,
Se so); - 0 -yakkhanisevita, mfn., frequented by gods
and yak~as; Vism 206,II* (maharajana111 avasa -a); -
0
-yaniya, mfn., leading to the gods; DI 215,27 (-o
maggo; Sv 391,9foll.: patiyekko devalokagamano
maggo nama n' atthi, iddhividhaña1,1ass' eva pan' et~
adhivacana111); - 0 -raja, 0 -raja(n), m., a king of the
gods (usually Sakka/lnda); S 1 174,4* (punappuna111
vassati -a); Vv 74:1 (-assa sabha sudhamma); Ja I
353,24 (Sakka111 -ana111 vanditva); V 154, IR* (-ena
pesita); VI 102,17' (maghava -a sujampati); 202,1·
(Dhata ti adayo -ano); 588,13 (tam ena111
sabbabhara1,1abhüsital!l -am iva virajamana111 rajje
abhisiñci111su); Nidd I 177,22 (Indena 0 -rañña saddhil!l);
Ap 148,13 (ubhinna111 °-rajün~); 149,13 (Varu1,1o nama
namena 0 -raja ah~ tada); 523,9 (catusaghi 0 -rajanal!l
mahesittam akarayi111); Vism 391,36 (Sakkassa -rañño);
0
Bv-a 209,7 (tasmi111 °-raje); -
0
-loka, m., the world of
the gods; a sphere of the gods; Abh 10; D 11 286,19*
(puna devo bhavissami -asmim uttamo); Khp 8:13 (-e
ca ya rati); Vv 40:3 (kissa kammassa vipaka111 anubhosi
-asmi111); Th 915 (-e thito); Ja I 202,16 (naya111
amhak~ -o -asmi111 hi paricchattako pupphati ti);
IV 339,15' (sace candasuriya -e thita na manussa1oke);
V 126,29 (cha -a); 390,29 (maccharino -~na gacchanti
niraye nibbattanti ti); VI 14l,II* (yadi kira yajitva puttehi
-a111 ito cuta yanti); 317,26* (uddha111 ito gacchasi -~);
Nidd I 109,25 (idha ti manussa1oko hura ti -o, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -e); Ap 49,15 (-a cavitvana manussatta111
gamissati); Mil 8,19 (devaputto -a cavitva); Mhv 30:49
(ki111 nu kamm~ karitvana -a111 ito gata); -
-ánupariyante, adv., all round the world of the gods; '7
Ap 307,12 (-e vasantassa... -ánupariyante
ratanachatt~ dharissati, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be
--pariyanta111; Ce --pariyanta111 .. . dhañyati);
2 devaka, m. [?], a kind of animal or bird;? Th-a I 130,2
--gamanlya, --gaminiya, mfn. [+ gamaniya , gaminiya],
leading to the world of the gods; A lii 414,18 (asava
--gamaniya, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se --gamaniya) quoted
Sv 989,15 (eds --gaminiya), PsI 62,12 (Be, Ce, Se
--gammtya; Ee --gamaniya), Mp 11 184,3 (eds
--gaminiya), It-a 1 115,6 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee --gaminiya)
and As 370,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --gaminiya); -
--patthanaka, mfn. [cfpatthana], wishing for the world of
the gods; Spk I 128,6 (--patthanaka, Ce, E e, Se so; Be --
patthanakama);- 0 -vatika, 0 -vattika, mfn., undertaking
devotion to the gods; ? Nidd I 89,26 (eke
samaJ.labrahmaJ.la vatasuddhika ... -a va honti, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se vattasuddhika ... 0 -vattika); -
0
-Vimana, n.
1], a chariot/palace of the gods; a
[deva + vimana
heavenly palace; Vv 31:9; Sv 619,25 (n' evay~
pUJ.lJ.lacando na suriyo na -a111); Ps 11 290,16
(sakalanagar~ -a111 viya alailkaronti); Spki 211,19
(manussa . . . naccanta gayanta -ena gacchanta viya);
Pj II 347,3 (tavati111sabhavane suññ~ -a111);
438 devata
--kappa, mfn., resembling a heavenly palace; Spk I 64,24
(--kappaya gandhakutiya); Cp-a 226,3o; -
0
-sadda, m.,
l. a shout of the gods; a sound of the god(s), thunder;
It 75,4 (-a; It-a 11 72,17: devana111 pltisamudaharasadda);
Sadd 549,23 (thana -e: -o meghasaddo); - 2. the word
deva; V v-a 18,7 fe Th-a I 27,zs; - 0 -Saddana, n., a
sound of the god(s), thunder; Dhatum 830;
3 1
adevasatta, mfn. [a + deva + satta ], not possessed by a
spirit; Ja V 445,4* (nadevasatto puriso thina111 saddhatu111
arahati; 446,16·: na adevasatto . . . ayakkhagahitako
abhütavagito); - atideva, m., l. a superior god; one
who surpasses the gods; Th 489; Mil 277 ,II (rajün~
atiraja bhaveyya devana111 -o bhaveyya brahman~
atibrahma bhaveyya); Th-a III 9,4 (gu1,1avasena pana
devanal!l -o); As 2,26 (yo ayUVaJ.ll,la-issariyayasa-
sampatti-adihi atirekataro e' eva visesavantataro ca devo
so -o ti vuccati); Ap-a 378,21; - --deva, m., a god
surpassing other gods; Mil 203,2o (tassa --devassa
sasane, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be devatidevassa; Ce
devadevassa; Se atidevassa); - 2. the state of a superior
god; ? S I 141, 18* (--patto akiñcano bhikkhu; Spk I
207,II: devan~ --bhava111 ... patto); - sadeva, mfn.,
with the gods; with a king; Bv-a 25,12foll. (saha devehi
ti -a ... saha devena rañña Suddhodanena ti -a); -
sadevamanussa, sadevamanusa, mfn. and -a, m.pl.,
l. (mfn.) including gods and men; Vin III 1,17 (so ima111
loka111 sadevaka111 samarak~ sabrahmaka111
sassamaJ.labrahmaJ.lil!l paj~ -a111 saya111 abhiñña);
Nidd I 179,22 (sassamaJ.labrahmaJ.li paja -a anto
buddhañil.J.le parivattati):- 2. (m.pl.) men with the gods,
men and gods; Ap 46,19 (sadevamanusa sabbe sadanava
sarakkhasa, Be, Ce, Se so; or mfn.; Ee sadeva manussa;
Ap-a 290,21: sabbe manusa sadeva sadanava); 70,28 (-a
sabbe buddhathüpa111 aka111su te); Bv 1:3 (na h' ete
jananti sadevamanusa; Bv-a 25,I2foll.: saha devehi ti
sadeva, ke te, manusa, sadevaka manusa sadevamanusa,
atha va ... sadeva sasuddhodana manusa sadevamanusa
sarajano ... atha va deva ca manusa ca devamanusa saha
devamanusehi sadevamanusa, ke te, 1oka ti vacanaseso
darthabbo); Mil95,25* (püjiyanta asamasama
sadevamanusehi te);- see also sadevaka.
(sippika vuccanti devaka paranamaka gelaññena
chatakisadarakakara sakhamiga, Be, Se so; Ce devaka-
paranamaka; Ee devakaparanamaka . . . chatajjhatta-
kisadarakakara).
devata, n. [BHS id.; cfS. daivata], a deity, a divinity;
Abh 12 (apume -ani).
devata, f [ts], a deity; a god (male or female; often
identified with the (various groups of) devas, but more
often a god or spirit living on earth clase to men, in
trees, rivers, buildings etc); V in III 69,3 (aññatara
marakayika -a); IV 34,6foll. (tasmi111 rukkhe adhivattha
-a ... so bhikkhu anadiyanto [rukkhal!l] chindi yeva
tassa ca -aya darakassa bahu111 akotesi); DI 192,28 (ta
-a ekantasukh~ loka111 upapanna); 11 139,19 (n' atthi so
padeso ... mahesakkhahi -ahi apphuto); MI 143,19
(id~ avoca sa -a ida111 vatva tatth' eva antaradhayi);
245,14 (ima ca me -a dibba111 oja111 1omaküpehi
ajjhohareyyu111); SI 1,9 (aññatara -a abhikkantaya
devati
rattiya abhikkantava~~a kevalakappaJ!l JetavanaJ!l
obhasetva); 5,22 (aññatara tavatiipsakayika -a); 26,5
(dasahi ca lokadhatühi -ayo yebhuyyena sannipatita
honti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -a); 197,23 (so bhikkhu taya
-aya saqwejito sarpvegarp apad! ti); II 266,18 (ya -a
candimasuriyanarp purato dhavanti); A I 210,11
(ariyasavako -a anussarati santi deva
catummaharajika ... ); li 44,8* (yañño ca vi pulo hoti
pasldanti ca -a); III 77,24 (balipatiggahika -a; Mp III
262,1: kulappave~iya agata arakkhadevata); Ud 7,1
(Bahiyassa Daruclriyassa pur~asalohita -a anukampika
atthakama); 89,22* (ya tattha -a asurp tasarp dakkhi~am
adise); Vv 33:291 (YaJ!l addasaJ!l -ayo acchara
kamava~~iyo ); 62:2 (-a nu si gandhabbo adu Sakko
purindado); Th! 87 (aggirp candaJ!l ca silriyaJ!l ca -a ca
namassi 'harp); Ja I 13,19* (deva manusse passanti
manussa pi ca -a); 66,9 (sace -a bhavissati akasena
gacchissati); 169,4 (tada kira manussa va~ijjaya
gacchanta p~e vadhitva -anarp balikammarp katva
mayarp anantarayena atthasiddhirp patva agantva puna
tumhakarp balikammarp karissama ti ayacitva
gacchanti); 228,29 (aham mahaseghi
catutthadvarakoghake adhivattha -a ti); 328,3o
(bhaggavimana -a nippatisara~a darake hatthesu
gahetva himavantarp gantva); III 457,5 (alikam
bhasamanassa apakkamanti -a); IV !6,2s (mahajano
mar~abhayabh!to attano attano -a namassitva
mahaviravarp viravi); 322,3* (-a nu si saggamha isi va si
mahiddhiko ); V 481,11 (mam' eva bahulohitarp gahetva
-aya balikammarp karissami); VI 4,13 (matubhiltapubba
chatte adhivattha -a, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be devadh!ta);
Ap 28,8 (selo himava ... naganarp asuranarp ca -anarp
ca alayo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se devanarp alayo pi ca); ?2,10
(manuja -a naga kumbha~<;!a); Mil419,23 (-a
dibbapupphavassarp pavassirpsu mahabrahma
sadhukiiraJ!l adasi); Vism 700,10 (raja rajjasukharp -a
dibbasukharp anubhavanti); Sv 413,29 foil.; PsI 296,3o
(yehi gu~ehi samannagata -a devattarp patta, Be, Se so;
Ce, E e omit -a); Spk I 14,34 (-a hi manussalokaJ!l
agacchamana pakativa~~arp ca pakati-iddhirp ca jahitva
o[arikarp attabhavarp katva . . . manussa vi ya
abhisailkhatena kayena agacchanti); Pj I 113,29 (devo
eva -a itthipurisasadhara~aJ!l etarp); V v-a 21,8 (-a ti
devaputto pi Brahma pi devadh!ta pi vuccati); Nidd-a I
269,1o (-a Sakkadayo brahmano ca); Mhv 28:6
(chattamhi -a); Sadd 789,24 (devasaddadito tapaccayo
hoti atthantararp anapekkhitva sakatthe: devo yeva -a);
799,2 (0 'adisaddanaJ!1 itthiliilgabhavena
pumitthivacakatta);- ifc see anto-, arakkha-, bhumma-,
rukkha-, vatthu-, samudda-; - 0
adhiggahita, mfn.,
possessed by a god; Ja VI 493,25 (idarp kira so -o hutva
kathesi, Be, Ce so; Ee devataya niggah!to; Se
devataviggahito);- 0 anussati,f, recalling the gods to
mind; D III 250,12 (cha anussatighanani
buddhanussati ... -i); Nidd I 7,7 (-irp bhavento);
Vism 197,18 (devala arabbha uppanna anussati -i);
225,2foll.; - 0
ari, m., an enemy of the gods;
Sadd 429,29* (asuro pubbadevo ca danavo devatari tu);
-
0
'-ujjhapana, n., a complaint against the gods; Ja V
91 ,28' (na santi deva ti idaJ!l ... -al!l karonti aha); 94,14
439 devi(n)
(--kammarp akasirp); o' -íipasaiphlira,
0
0pasaiphara, m., bringing by the gods; Mil 298,7 (-ato
supinarp passati); Sp 520,21 (-ato passantassa devala
atthakamataya va anatthakamataya va . . . nanavidhani
aramm~anl upasaJ!lharanti); o• -uposatha,
0
'íiposatha, m., act of purification in the presence of the
gods; A I 211,12 (ayaJ!l vuccati ariyasavako -al!l
upavasati devatahi saddhirp SaJ!IVasati . . . y e cittassa
upakkilesa te pahlyanti; Mp Il 324,27: devala
sakkhitthane thapetva altano gu~e anussarantena
upavuttha-uposatho -o nama); - 0 -mailgalika, mfn.,
trusting in, propitiating the gods, believing in the power
ofthe gods; Ja I 259,29 (-o viya piljaJ!l karoti); III 145,27
(tada manussa -a hutva bahu-aje[akadayo maretva
devatanarp balikammarp karonti); - adevata,f, nota
deity; Ja I 405,10 (idani devatabhaVaJ!l va --bhavarp va
janissaml ti); - sadevata, mfn., with the gods,
including the gods; Bv-a 29,19 (sadevaka ti ... -a ti pi
patho);- see also patidevata (sv pati 2), brahmadevata.
devati 1, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup devate, Wg § 14:29],
laments; Sv 799,16 (mayharp dh!ta mayharp putto ti evarp
adissa adissa -anti paridevanti etena adevo) f. Nidd-a I
254,32; Sadd 440,2o (devu devane: -ati adevati
paridevati); - fpp devaniyya, mfn., Nidd-a I 460,3foll.
(adevaneyye ti visesena devaniyye, paridevaneyye ti
samantato devaniyye).
devati2 , pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup revate, Wg § 14:39], moves
by leaps; ? Sadd 440,25 (devu plutagatiyarp, plutagati
pariplutagamanarp: -ati; read revu ... revati ?).
devate, pr. 3 sg. [?], goes; Dhatup 284 (deva gamane);-
see also dibbati.
devana 1, n. [S. lex. id.], lamentation; Sadd 440,2o (devu
-e: devati adevati paridevati).
devana 2 , n. [ts], sporting; desire to win; business; shining;
Abh 880 (vohare jetum icchayaJ!l kl[ado capi -arp);
Bv-a 25,1Sjoll. (sabbe pi deva o• -atthena deva ti
vuccanti, -arp nama dhatu-attho kl[adi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr devanaJ!l); Sadd 395,22 (d!dhi dittidevanesu).
devara, m. [S. devara, devr], a husband's brother, a
brother-in-law; Abh 247; Ja VI 152,17* (bahuka tava -a;
152,2o·: -a ti patibhatuka); Vv-a 135,17 (devo viya rameti
dutiyo varo ti va -o, bhattu kanitthabhata); -
sadevara, mfn., with the brother-in-law; Vv 32:6 (patirp
abhiradhayirp -arp).
devasika, mfn. [from divasa; BHS devasika, daivasika],
daily; happening every day; Sp 746,16 (tassa
catutthadivasato paghaya -a apatti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-arp);- devasikaJ!l, adv., daily; every day; Vin I 104,22
(bhikkhil ... -arp patimokkhaJ!l uddisanti; Sp 1035,13:
-an ti divase divase); M II 163,s (Ailgaraja -arp
niccabhikkharp dadati); Ud 91,26 (k!vabahuka ...
Savatthiya manussa -arp kalarp karonti ti); Ja I 186,7
(avuso kirp tvarp -arp sedehi muccamanehi pi~<;!aya
carasi); II 197,23 (-arp hatthisu parihayantesu); VI 484,27
(cha danasalayo karapetva -al!l cha satasahassani
vissajjetva); Vism 266,6; Mp III 247,10 (matapitunnarp
-al!~ sakkaro katabbo ); Dhp-a I 28,4 (-arp a[ahanarp
gantva rodati).
devi(n), mfn. [S. devin], playing, gambling; - ifc see
akkha- (sv akkha2).
de vi
devi, f [ts], l. a female divinity, a goddess; a queen
among the gods; Vv 1:3 (pucchami tarp. -i mahanubhave
manussabhiita kim akasi puññarp.; Vv-a 18,2o: akasena
vimanena ca gacchatl ti -1); Jaiii 413,14' (Sakkassa
devarañño aññatara -i viya, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce,
Se devadhita); IV 459,17* (n' amhi -i na gandhabbi na
maharaja manusi); V 399,1* (Siraharp. -l manujesu
piijita); Pj 11 244,zo (Sirima ka1arp. katva Yamabhavane
Suyamassa -i ahosi); Ap-a 55,2 (cattaro , __
maharajano --· nesarp. -iyo); Bv-a 275,8 (nandanavana-
jata -i viya ca [Mahamaya] -i virocittha); - 2. a
godlike woman; A 11 57,29 (devo -iya saddhirp.
sarp.vasati); 59,6* (bhariya silavatl hoti . . . sa pi -i
sarp.vasati chavena patina saha); - 3. a queen; V in 1
82,8 (Rahulamata -l); IV 112,2 (raja Pasenadi Kosalo
Mallikaya -iya saddhirp. uparipasadavaragato hoti); D 11
26,14 (marp. pi na dakkhinti devo va -l va aññe va
ñatisalohita); JaiV 413,23 (ekadivasarp. Khema nama -l
pacciisakale supinarp. addasa); Vibh 422,2 (sammutideva
nama rajano -iyo kumara); Vism 39,6 (raja va vandatu -l
va); Mhv 5:59 (apal)adesika sa tu 0 -ttarp. tassa patthayi);
15:18.
deveti\ -ayati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup devayati,
Wg § 33:51], distresses, torments;? Sadd 565,22 (divu
addane, addanarp. gandhapirp.sanan ti vadanti: -eti
-ayati),
deveti2 , -ayati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup devayate,
Wg § 33,·32], utters a sound, groans; ? Sadd 565,20 (divu
parikiijane, parikiijanarp. gajjanarp.: -eti -ayati devo
paridevitva, devo ti megho).
desa, m. [S. desa], l. a place, an area,- a region, a district;
Abh 186 (-o tu visayo ); V in 1 4,2 (viil)ija Ukkala tarp.
-arp. addhanamaggapatipanna honti); 46,11 (asanarp.
uddharitabbarp., sace so -o uklapo hoti so -o
sammajjitabbo ); 11 211 ,32 (yo -o anovassako hoti); S V
148,1o (atthi bhikkhave himavato pabbatarajassa dugga
visama -a); A 11 32,12* (patiriipe vase -e); Ja 11 157,21*
(ayarp. Assakarajena -o vicarito maya; 157,25': ayarp.
ramal)iyo uyyanapadeso); VI 79,31' (kuto -a imarp.
vanarp. agamma); 528,15* (tarp. ca te -am akkhissarp.
yattha sammati kamado); Ap 183,4foll. (yamhi -e thito
sattha ... taharp. -arp. apiijesirp.); Vism 339,3o (asucimhi
kira -e eko mal)<;iapo); Sv 429,2o (katarasmirp. nu kho
padese buddha nibbattanti ti -arp. vilokento
majjhimadesarp. passi); 521,21 (so -o pabbajitanarp.
anavaso hoti); Ps 1 13,17 (na hi bhagava ayutte -e kale va
dhammarp. bhasati); Pj 1 132,7 (-o ti gamo pi nigamo pi
nagararp. pi janapado pi yo koci sattanarp. nivasokaso );
Mhv 28:13 (pura pubbuttare -e); Sadd 453,3 (disa
atisajjane: disati ... -o); - ifc see patiriipa-; - 2. a
point; a matter,- a part; Vin III 167,26 (kiñci -arp.
lesamattarp. upadaya parajikena dhammena
anuddharp.setha ti); 168,5 (koci -o lesamatto upadinno);
M 1 229,36 (puccheyyaharp. bhavantarp. Gotamarp.
kañci-d-eva -arp. sace me bhavarp. Gotamo okasarp.
karoti pañhassa veyyakaral)aya ti; Ps 11 274,5: kañci
okasarp. kiñci karal)arp.); A 1 54,11 (aharp. kho akusalarp.
apanno kañci-d-eva -arp. kayena; cfMp 11 102,6: na
sabbam eva apattirp., apattiya pana kañci-d-eva -arp.
aññatararp. apattin ti attho); - desarp. in Ee at Ja V
440 desana
340,22* is wr for disarp. (Be, Ce, Se, 342,22' so); - ifc see
eka-; - o• -agata, mfn., reached the proper place; ?
Mil262,9 (-o pañho anucchavikaya vibhattiya vibhatto,
Ce, Ee so; Be dosagato; Se desanagato);- 0 -caritta, n.,
the customs and traditions of the district, of various
regions; Ja III 238,13 (sabbasamayasipparp. ca
sikkhissama -arp. ca janissama ti) f. V 247,13 (Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se 0 -carikarp.); IV 222,5 (-arp. te kathessami ti);-
0
-bhasa,f, (knowledge of) the language or dialect of a
country; Vism 442,24* (442,2s: -a nama ekasata-
voharakusalata, visesena pana magadhike kosallarp.);
Mp 1 95,16 (-aya kosallam iva); - adesa, m., an
unsuitable place; Vin 111 247,18 (so patto na -e
nikkhipitabbo); Ja VI 442,15* (-e vata no vuttharp.
kuñjaranarp. v' anodake); lt-al 17,14 (-e akale va
vuttam);- see also ekadesaka.
desakai, m., desika, f [S., BHS desaka, ifc], one who
teaches, expounds, shows; one who tells, confesses;
Sp 1064,16 (aññarp. pana desanapaccaya -o __ . dukkatarp.
[apajjati]); Sv 34,19 (evarp.vidhassa nama
ariyadhammassa -o dasabaladharo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
deseta) = Ps 1 10,23 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee deseta) = Spk 1
12,25 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se deseta) = Mp 1 14,22 (Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce deseta) = Pj 1 110,s (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be deseta);
Th-a III 32,2o (attano anuttararp. maggadhigamarp.
pakasetva idani tassa -arp. sammasambuddharp.
thomento); Mhv 32:44 (dhammakatharp. kathapesirp.
sakkaritvana -e); Saddh 519 (-assa abhavena);- ifc see
apal)a-, magga-; - sudesaka, m., a good or clever
guide; Mil195,33 ( 0 -samo sattanarp. khemapatharp.
acikkhane, Be, Ce so; Ee sudesika-; Se desika-); Pj 1
21,22 (-o vi ya buddho sumaggo vi ya khemantabhiimi
vi ya ca dhammo, Be so; Ce, E e khemantabhumiya ca; Ee
sudesiko; Se samaggo viya); - ifc see araññagata-
(sv arañña);- see also desika.
desaka2 , m. [desa + ka2], l. a district; Mhv 10:29
(Girikal)<;iasivo . . . tarp. Pal)<;iuvasudevena dinnarp.
bhuñjati -arp.);- 2. a point, a matter; M 1 438,18 (iii.gh'
avuso Bhaddali etarp. -arp. sadhukarp. manasikarohi, Ce,
Ee so; Be dosakarp.; Se desarp.; Ps III 149,26: etarp.
okasarp. etarp. aparadharp.),
desati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup re~ate: Wg § 16:19], utters
an inarticulate noise; Sadd 447,28 (desu hesu avyatte
sadde: -ati hesati; read resu ... resati ?).
desana,f (and-a, n.) [S., BHS desana], l. (i) instruction;
exposztzon; discourse; M 111 248,10 (catunnarp.
ariyasaccanarp. acikkhana -a paññapana); A IV 227 ,24*
(manussapatilabho ca saddhammassa ca -a); Ja IV
325,19 (ajja upasakanarp. katharp. paticca -a
samutthahissatl ti); Nidd 1 140,15 (-arp. anusasanarp.
anusitthirp. sutva); Ap 181,14 (buddhassa giram aññaya
amatassa ca -arp.); Mil237,6 (sabbesarp. pi tathagatanarp.
eka -a eka katha eka sikkha ekanusatthi); Vism 324,3
(arahattanikiitena -arp. samapesi); Sp 23,7 (-a ti paññatti,
yathadhammarp. dhammabhiHipo ti adhippayo ); 961,28
(ya ajanantanarp. -a nama so mama kilamatho assa);
Sv 102,21 (-a gambhira hoti tilakkhal)ahata
suññatapatisarp.yutta ti); Pj 1 140,25 (dhammassa paresarp.
hitakamataya -a dhammadanarp.); Patis-a 45,16
(pakasanata dipanata desanata, desanata ti ca pakasanata
desanika
eva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se pakasanata ti ca); As 15,24
(buddhan~ . . . anumodantanarp -a dighamajjhima-
ppamal_la hoti); Mhv 29:66 (therassa -a tassa janassahosi
satthika); Saddh 213; ifc see ukkagha-
(sv ukk~sati), dhamma- (sv dhamma\ - (ii) teaching
(the first of the 16 haras of Pet and Nett); Pet 3,7;
8!,5foll.; Nett3,9; 5,!4foll.; - 2.assigning; Viniii
151,3 (itthannamassa bhikkhuno kutivatthussa -a);
V 222,31 (Sp 1411,32: kutivatthuviharavatthudesana-
vasena -a veditabba); - 3. acknowledging; confessing;
Ja III 38,9* (yo cadhipannarp janati yo ca janati -~;
38,22·: -an ti yo ca tena attano dos~ janantena desitarp
accayadesan~ patigai_!hiturp janati); Sp 1338,2 (ayarp
apatti -aya nimjjhati vüpasammati ay~ vuqhanena ti);
Ps II 402,2 (sailghakammavasena va -aya va vughanarp
disssati); Mi1344,7 (in long cpd); - ifc see accaya-,
apatti-; - desanarp in Ee at Ja V 379,22 is wr; read
accayadesanarp with Be, Ce, Se; - 0 -gami(n), mfn.
1
[desana + gami(n) ], requiring, expiated by, confession
or acknowledgement; V in II 3,37 (-iniya apattiya);
V 129,22 (pañcapattiyo -iniyo; Sp 1334,3o: -iniyo ti
thapetva parajik~ ca sailghadisesarp ca avasesa);
Sp 584,6 (tatra sanghadiseso vughanagami dukkatarp -1);
877,6 (-inirp ce apanno hoti desapetabbo);
neg. adesanagami(n), mfn., Vin II 3,s (Sp 1155,16:
parajikapattiya va sailghadisesapattiya va); V 115,7; -
0
-jalada, mfn., giving the water of the teaching; ?
Ap 470,10 (buddh~ ... vasavarp viya vassant~ -~
tada, Ce so; Be 0 -jaladantararp (within the cloud of the
teaching; ?); Ee 0
-jalanandan~; Se devena
jananandanarp); 0
-niyyatana, n., returning to,
restating, the teaching; Ps 1 214,33; - 0 -matta, n., a
briefindication (giving (merely) an example); all that is
specified, the extent of the discourse; Ja 1 451 ,3· (amba ti
0
-matt~, tehi pana nanappakarani phalaphalani
abhatani); V 191 ,26' (mettan ti id~ o -mattam eva, so
pana cattaro pi brahmavihare acikkhi); Dhp-a 111 321,2
(kayena ti 0 -mattarp etarp, tihi dvarehi sarpvuta ti attho);
- see also 0 -sisa below; - 0
-Viliisa, m., charm,
elegance of discourse; Vism 409,10 (id~ pi imina
ekattham eva veneyyavasena pana -ena ca
vyañjanananattarp katarp); Mp 1 72,21; V 25,26; -
0
-sisa, n. [desana + sísa 1], the indication of a category; a
headword of a discourse; Ja 11 185,12' (hiraññ~ me
suval_ll_l~ me ti --mattam etarp, imina padadvayena
dasavidh~ pi ratanarp . . . catuppadarp ca sabbarp
dassento); III 268,¡¡· (sukharp setí ti -~ et~
dhammacañ pana sukharp tighati gacchati nisídati
sayati ... ); Sv 544,29 (sotapanno 'ham asmí ti idarp -am
eva); Ps III 340,5; Ud-a 201,24 CO-mattarp etarp, imina
-ena sabbe pi 'ssa dhutailga vutta ti); Th!-a 8,3o
(pii_!<;Iakan ti -am eva, cattaro pi paccaye ti attho);- see
also 0 -matta above; - 0 -sota, n. [desana + sota2], the
stream, the pattern of the discourse; Sadd !8,23
(appaccayadidhamme desento sattha punappunarp
bahuvacanavasena -e patitva dhammarp deset! ti); -
--pata, m., conforming to the pattern of the discourse;
Sadd 18,19 (keci pana --patavasena bahuvacanappayoga
ti pi vadanti).
desanika, mfn. or m., to be confessed; a particular vinaya
441 dokara
offence; Kkh 2 372,27* (in uddana: dve -a; for
patidesaníya, cf247,sfoll.).
desika, m(fn). [S. desika], one familiar with a place; a
guide; - ifc see magga-, sudesika;- see also desaka1.
1
desiya\ mfn.,fpp of deseti qv sv disati .
desiya2 , mfn.,fpp of dissati 3 qv.
deseta(r), m. [from deseti qv sv disati 1], one who teaches
or expounds; D II 222,24 (dhammassa -ararp ... n' eva
atltarpse samanupassama na pan' etarahi aññatra tena
bhagavata); M 1 249,24 (abhijanami kho panaharp ...
anekasataya parisaya dhammarp -a, eds so; perhaps
better absol. ); A 1 266,12 (tathagatappaveditassa
dhammavinayassa -a puggalo dullabho lokasmirp);
Sv 34,19 (evarpvidhassa nama ariyadhammassa -a
dasabaladharo, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee desako) = Ps 1 10,23
(Ce, Ee so; Be, Se desako) = Spk 1 12,25 (Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be desako) = Mp 1 14,22 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se desako) =
Pjl llO,s (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se desako); Thí-al61,4
(imasmirp loke bahü samaya tes~ ca -aro bahü eva
titthakara); Sadd 568,13 (disl uccaral_le: ... desako -a).
1
deseti, -aya ti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of disati qv.
dessa, mfn.,fpp ofdissati 3 qv.
dessati, pr. 3 sg., see sv dissati 3 .
dessana, n. [S. dve~al_la], dislike; hatred; Sadd 452,16
0
( -silo appiyayanasllo ti des si).
dessamano in Ee at Mp 1 134,24 is wr for desayamano
(Be, Ce, Se so).
dessi(n), mfn. [S. dve~in], hating; disliking; Sadd 452,6
(disi appltiy~: ... diso dittho dess!); 452,17 (dessanasllo
1
appiyayanasílo ti -I);- ifc see dhamma- (sv dhamma ).
3
dessiya, mfn., fpp of dissati qv.
deha, m.n. [ts], a body; Abh 151 (viggaho -~); D II
255,5* (pahaya manusarp -arp devakayarp
paripüressanti); S II 278,21* (dhareti antim~ -~);
Th! 35 (nikkhipissam' imarp -arp sampajana sattmati);
Nidd 1 23,9 (kayo ti va guha ti va -o ti va ... ); Ap 374,1
(udayanto va suriyo -o me rajate sada); 574,12 (-enana
tu cittena); Vism 236,29 (idh' eva miyyamanan~ -ena
patitabbarp); Sadd 459,1 (-o ti sañrarp); - ifc see
antima- (sv antima 1); - 0
-bandha, m., the body;
Vism 232,10* (ten' eva -ena puññamhi khayam agate;
Vism-mht [Be] 1 290,11: -ena ti sañrena); - see also
uddhadehika (sv uddh~). tanudehaka.
2
dehaka, n. [deha + ka ], a little body;? (according to ct) a
part ofthe body, a limb; cfK.R. Norman, 197la, p.l45;
Thí 392 (tathüpama -ani marp tehi dhammehi vina na
vattanti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se tathüpamarp; Th!-a 239,27:
-aní ti hatthapadamukhadidehavayava).
dehati, pr. 3 sg. [S. degdhi, S. Dhatup Wg § 24:5],
increases; Dhatup 336 (diha upacaye); Dhatum 500;
Sadd 459,1 (diha upacaye: -ati deho); see
uddehak~.
dehani,f [cfS. dehal!], a threshold; Abh 219 (ummaro -I,
Be so; Ce dehinl).
dehi(n), m(fn). [S. dehin], a living creature; Abh 93 (satto
-1 ca puggalo); Ud-a 436,17* (sabbe pi -ino hontu
vimuttirasabhagino ); Pañca-g 12 (kayamanasasantap~
ye karontíha -in~); 16.
dokiira, m [do + kara 1], the word do; Ps III 281,25
(yavetadohipi ti ettha 0 -hikarapikara nipata).
 442
dol)a, m.n. (and mfn. ?) [S. drol).a], l. a bucket; a measure
of capacity; to the amount of a dol).a; Abh 482 (-arr va
caturathakarr); V in III 62,3 (athakarr sappirr tularr
gutarr -arr tal}<;iularr aharapetva; Sp-t [Be] II 164,29: -an
ti sotasanatimattarr); IV 102,2o (-ena avuso sappina
attho ti); D II 167,24* (ekarr ca -arr purisavaruttamassa
Ramagame nagaraJa mahenti); Pv 38:33 (mitani
sukhadukkhani -ehi pitakehi ca; Pv-a 254,26: -ehi
pitakehi manabhajanehi mitani vi ya); Spk 1 218,2s
(cattari athakani -arr catudol).arr maJ_üka); - ifc see
anha- (sv anha2), tal).<;iUia-; - 2. [for dOI).amapaka qv
below], the dol).a supervisor; Jaii 367,9* (-o dovariko
tatha);- 0 -paka, m., a dol).a measure of food; S 1 8!,23
(raja Pasenadi Kosalo -arr sudarr bhuñjati, Ce, Ee so;
Be --kurarr bhuñjati; Se --sudharr; Spk 1 152,22foll.:
dol).assa tal}<;iulanarr pakkabhattarr tadüpiyarr ca
süpavyañjanarr bhuñjatl ti); 93,15* (in uddana: --kurena
ca, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce --sangama dve ti ca); Mp V 30,4
(ayarr hi raja pubbe thülasañro ahosi -arr bhuñjati);
Dhp-a 11 8,8; - 0
-mata(r), m. [dol).a + mata(dJ, the
measurer of the dol).as; Ja 11 381,22* (-a ca Kolito, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be Moggallano 0 -mapako) = Dhp-a IV 89,18*
(Ee, Se so; Be 0 -mapako; Ce 0 -matto; = Cp-a 39,24*: Be
0
-mapako ca Kolito; Ce, Ee, Se Moggallano 0 -mapako);
0
-mapaka, m(jn)., (one) who supervises the
measuring of dol).as; Ja II 367,s f. Dhp-a IV 88,13; Ja II
378,17 (-o pana mahamatto sughu [KurudhammarrJ
rakkhati; see 378,19joll.: rajabhage víhirr minapento);
- see also catudol).ika (sv catu[r]).
dol}ika, f [S. lex. drol).ika], a trough; Mil397,29
(varaho . . . nasikaya pathavirr khal).itva dol).irr katva
-aya sayati); - ifc see udaka-, passava-, rajana-, vacca-.
dol)i, f [S. drol).í], l. a wooden trough or tub; a trough;
Abh 668; Vin III 107,5 (-iya güthassa pürapetva); D 11
142,3 (ayasaya -iya); A I 253,2o (QatarüparrJ -iyarr
akiritva dhovati); V 323,s (assakhatunko ... -iya baddho
yavasarr yavasan ti jhayati); Ja 1 450,11 (ekarr rukkharr
chinditva -irr katva panlyarr ussiñcitva -irr püretva);
11 74,24 (assanarr kalaye sedetva aharitva -iyarr
pakkhipirrsu); 156,14 (bhariya pan' assa kalakata so
tassa sañrarr -iyarr pakkhipapetva); III 288,14* (pUI).I).a
'yarr -I; 288,19·: -I ti ayarr amhakarr bhattadoi).I
suddhabhattassa pul}l}a); Vism 591,12 (telatthiko
tilapittharr -iyarr akiritva udakena paripphosetva);
Sp 291,3 (cívararr ... -iyarr pi na gharrsitabbarr); Mp II
238,26 (kalalapüra -iyo thapetva pañcaval}l}ani padumani
ropayirrsu); Mhv 20:35 (asittagandhatelaya lahurr
soval}l).adol).iya theradeharr khipapetva tarr -irr ...
soval).l}akütagaramhi thapapetva); - 2. a trough-shaped
boat; Ja IV 163,21* (karoma navarr -irr datharr; 164,8':
-in ti gambhírarr mahanavarr); Pv-a 189,13 (navaya ti
-iyarr); - 3. the body or belly of a Víl).a; Abh 138
(pokkharo -i víl).aya); S IV 197,13 Hrr ca paticca
cammarr ca paticca dal).<;iarr ca pa¡icca . . . vll).a .. .
vadati); Mil 53,2o (víl).aya pattarr na si ya cammarr .. .
-i ... da!). <;lo na si ya ... );- se e also sadol}ika.
dol}inimmaijani, f., dol}inimmajjana, n. [?], an oil-
cake;? Vv 33:199 (-irr aham adasirr, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dol).inimmujjanarr; Vv-a 147,24: -in ti satelarr
tilapiññakarr) quoted Ps II 17,3o (eds so); Pv 10:10
domanassika
(bhikkhuno caramanassa -im aharr adasirr, Be so; Ce,
E e -am; Se -I; Pv-a 51,26: -in ti vissandamanatelarr
piññakarr, Be, Se so; Ce -an ti; Ee dol}inimmiñjanan ti
vissandamanatelamiñjakarr); Pv-a 47,12 (telasarrsanharr
-irr piññakarr adasi, Be, Se so; Ce -arr; Ee
dol).inimmijjanarr miñjakarr).
dophati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup d!])hati, drmphati,
Wg § 28:28,29], stains; aftlicts; Sadd 405,9 (dupha
upakkilese: upakkilissanarr upakkileso: -ati).
dobbha, m., see sv dubbha.
dobbhagga, dobhagga, dobhaggiya, n. [from dubbhaga;
S. daurbhagya], ill luck, misfortune; Sadd 625,3 (gyo
gayugam: dobhaggarr);- ifc see manussa-.
dobha, m., see sv dubbha.
dobhaccha, f [cf S. durbhak~a], eating with difficulty; ?
Sadd 863.13 (durasanarr dubbhakkhal}arr -a).
domanassa, n. and mfn. l. (n.) [S. daurmanasya], (mental)
distress, dejection, unhappiness; ill-humour; Vin 1 34,23
(jatiya jaraya maral}ena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi -ehi
upayasehi adittan ti vadami); III 161,37 (te ten' eva -ena
na cittarüparr bhuñjirrsu); D 11 306,16 (yarr kho
bhikkhave cetasikarr dukkharr cetasikarr asatarr
manosamphassajarr dukkharr asatarr vedayitarr idarr
vuccati bhikkhave -arr); MI 86,8 (so tesarr bhoganarr
arakkhadhikaral).arr dukkharr -arr pa¡isarrvedeti);
448,1o (tassa mayharr bhante ahu-d-eva aññathattarr ahu
-arr); S V 349,7 (hoti no tasmirr samaye anattamanata
hoti -arr düre no bhagava bhavissatl ti); 441,6 (na kho
panaharr bhikkhave saha dukkhena saha -ena catunnarr
ariyasaccanarr abhisamayarr vadami); A III 4,21
(bhikkhu va bhikkhunl va sahapi dukkhena sahapi -ena
assumukho pi rudamano paripu¡;¡¡;¡arr parisuddharr
brahmacariyarr carati); Sn 1106 (pahanarr kama-
cchandanarr ... -ana cübhayarr); Ja 1 31,16 (kesagga-
mattarr pi -arr na uppajji); 233,2s (Maro pi parajito -arr
patva attano vasananhanam eva gato); Nidd 1 128,12
(soko socana ... antopari<;laho cetaso parijjhayana -arr
sokasa!Iarr); Ap 262,25 (etthantare na passami -arr aharr
tada); Vibh 349,6 (cha gehasitani -ani); Nett 12,14 (yarr
kayikarr idarr dukkharr yarr cetasikarr idarr -arr);
Vism 115,24 (purisassa uttamarr kasikavattharr
bhaveyya tassa tasmirr müsikaya ... khadite uppajjeyya
-arr); 504,1 foil. (-arr nama manasarr dukkharr); Ps 11
304,17 (lomaharrso ca nam' esa somanassena pi hoti
-ena pi); Spk I 151,23 (micchadighika yarr buddharr va
sangharr va ... disva akkhlni pidahanti -arr apajjanti);
II 73,34 (dukkharr -an ti atthato ekam eva); - 2. (mfn.)
dejected, unhappy; Ap-a 290,3 (isayo kuppanti -a
bhavanti); - o• -indriya, n., the sensation faculty of
dejection; unhappiness; D III 239,13; S V 209,2o;
Dhs417; Vibh 124,36; Vism491,9;- 0 -jata,mfr¡., full
of dejection; very unhappy; Ja IV 170,25; Vism 263,4
(satta ... -a rodanti paridevanti); - 0 -tthaniya, mfn.,
being a cause of dejection; D III 245,2; M III 216,31;-
0
-tii,f, abstr. [BHS daurmanasyata], dejection; Mp IV
42,6 (mankubhavo ti nittejata -a); - 0 -vedaniya, mfn.,
entailing feelings of dejection; S V 212,9 (-arr
bhikkhave phassarr pa¡icca uppajjati '-indriyarr).
0
domanassika, mfrz. [prob. domanassa + ika, but
cfdomanassita], dejected; unhappy; Sp 1408,13 (te -a
domanassita
honti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se domanassita); Ps V 108,2
<inhaniqhesu apathagatesu n' eva somanassiko na -o
hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee doman as sito); Th-a III 180,2
(Maro -o hutva); Thi-a 246,33 (vimana ti -a).
domanassita, mfn. [prob. pp of denom. from domanassa,
cf dukkhita and BHS daurmanasyita; but Lj also
domanassika], (made) dejected, unhappy; Nidd I 5,18
(ayomayena va sallena viddho ... ghaqiyati pi!iyati
vyadhito -o hoti); Th-a 11 278,s (labhadina somanassita
alabhadina -a ti attho); As 102,21 (-assa, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr domanassltassa).
doruccha, f [cf S. rük~a. rauk~ya], dif.ficulty of
angering; ?, Sadd 863,13 (duqhu rosana¡p -a).
dolii, doJa, .f [S. dola], a swing; Ja VI 341,12' (raja -aya
kl)itukamo); Vism 280,2sfoll. (seyyatha pi pailgulo -aya
kl!ata¡p mataputtana¡p -a¡p khipitva tatth' eva
0
-thambhamiile nisinno kamena agacchantassa ca
gacchantassa ca 0 -phalakassa ubho koriyo majjha¡p ca
passati) = Sp 422,5foll.; Sadd 563,26; - 0 -lola, mfn.,
nvinging like a swing; Ap 575,16 (-a va te kmp)a, Be so;
Ce o¡¡¡¡¡¡ ca; Ee wr 0 -loca; Se damamala¡p ca te km,1ry.a¡p).
dolayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dolayate], swings;
part.pr. dolayanta, mfn., Ja 11 385,25 (eko lolamakkato ...
olambanto nailgutrhe gahetva -anto kl!i) = Cp-a 14l,w;
- se e also doleti.
doleti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dolayati, Wg § 32:60], throws
up; Dhatup 616 (dula ukkhepane); Dhatum 861 (dula
ukkhepe); Sadd 563,25 (dula ukkhepe: .. . -eti -ayati
dola);- pass. pr. 3 sg. doliyyati, Sadd 563,26.
doJasa, num. [= dvadasa], twelve; Vin I 265,27 (imamhi
khandhake vatthil do)asa peyyalamukhani ekasata¡p
attharasa, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dvadasa).
do!~saka, n. [= dvadasaka 1], a set of twelve; Vin I 260,21
1anasado)asaka¡p ninhita¡p, Be, E e, Se so; Ce
-dvadasaka¡p).
doYacassa, n. [from dubbaca qv sv vaca(s);
BHS daurvacasya], the state of not being amenable to
criticism or advice, of being refractory, intractable;
Vin 111 178,19 (bhikkhu pan' eva dubbacajatiko hotl ti
dubbaco hoti 0
-karaJ_lehi dhammehi samannagato
akkhamo appadakkhiry.aggahl anusasani¡p); MI
95.1sfoll. (katame e' avuso -karary.a dhamma); It-a 11
0
164,18 (-ena): Nett 40,3 (nissitacitta kosajjena ca -ena ca
niddisitabba); - 0 -ta,.f, abstr., id.; D 111 212,14 (-a ca
papamittata ca; Sv 978,32: dukkha¡p vaco etasmi¡p ...
anadare puggale ti dubbaco tassa kamma¡p dovacassa¡p
tassa bhavo -a); A III 449,1 (-aya pahanaya sovacassata
bhavetabba); Dhs 1325 (sahadhammike vuccamane
dovacassaya¡p dovacassiya¡p -a vippatikiilagahita ... ) =
Vibh 359,21.
doYacassaya, n. [from dubbaca qv sv vaca(s)],
refractoriness, intractability; Dhs 1325 (-am
dovacassiya¡p dovacassata vipparikillagahita ... , Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr dovacassataya¡p; As 393,13: dubbacassa
kamma¡p -mp, tad eva dovacassan ti pi vuccati) =
Vibh 359,20.
doYacassiya, n. [from dubbaca qv sv vaca(s)],
refractoriness, intractability; Dhs 1325 (dovacassaya¡p
-a¡p dovacassata vipparikillagahita ... ; As 393,14:
dubbacassa kamma¡p dovacassaya¡p tad eva dovassan ti
443 dosa
pi vuccati tassa bhavo -a¡p) =Vibh 359,2o.
dovarika (and dovariya), m. [cf S. dvarika], a doorkeeper,
janitor; a gatekeeper, Abh 341 (-o pariharo); Vin I
269,sfoll. (Salavatl ga1,1ika -a¡p ary.apesi ma bha1,1e -a
koci puriso pavisi); D 111 64,32 (amacca parisajja
gary.akamahamatta anlkattha -a mantassajivino; Sv 852,7:
-a ti dvararakkhino); MI 380,17 (ajjatagge samma -a
avarami dvara¡p nigal_lthana¡p nigal,lrhlna¡p); A IV 107,19
(rañño paccantime nagare -o hoti paJ,l<;lito ... aññatana¡p
nivareta ñatana¡p paveseta); Ja I 422,21
(rajarajamahamattadayo antamaso -e upadaya sabbe va);
11 379,10 foil. (-o .. . nagaradvara¡p pidhanavelaya
tikkhattu¡p sadda¡p anussavesi); IV 41,2 (sahayo kira te
Pottiyo nama agato ti senapatissa arocetha ti -a¡p aha);
447,4* (ayantu -a khaggabaddha); Ap 302,2 (nagare
Ha¡psavatiya asi¡p -o aha¡p); Mil 364,24 (-assa dve
ailgani gahetabbani); Vism 281,9 (-o nagarassa anto ca
bahi ca purise ko tva¡p kuto va agato kuhi¡p va gacchasi
ki¡p va te hatthe ti na vlma¡psati . . . dvarappatta¡p
dvarappatta¡p yeva pana vlma¡psati); Sv 455,6 (-a pi
itthiyo va); As 279,3 (-o ca gamillo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dovariyo ); Mhv 19:32 (saya¡p o -tthane thatva ...
manujadhipo ); 35:51; Sadd 786,22 (dvare niyutto -o).
dovila, mfn. [?], with the fruit beginning to form, with
nascent fruit; Ja VI 529,26* (aññ' ettha pupphita amba
aññe tinhanti -a; 530,32·: -a ti sañjayamanaphala, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se add: patitapupphapatta); Mil334,1o (eso kho
dhuvaphalo ambo tato ya¡p icchasi ettaka¡p phala¡p
gary.hahi salaruka¡p va -a¡p va kesika¡p va ama¡p va
pakka¡p va ti).
dosa 1, m. [S. do~a], l. afault, a defect, a deficiency; harm,
a detrimental effect; Abh 766 (-o adlnavo); 1125; Vin V
116,3o (dve kammadosa apalokanakammassa -o
ñattikammassa -o); M I 31 ,36 (imissa nemiya ima¡p ca
vailka¡p ima¡p ca jimha¡p ima¡p ca -a¡p taccheyya; PsI
151,29: -an ti phegguvisamaga1,1thikadi¡p); 305,21 (san ti
bhikkhave eke samaJ_labrahmaJ_la eva¡pvadino
eva¡pdiqhino n' atthi kamesu -o ti); A 11 172,26 (yo koci
diqha¡p bhasati eva¡p me ditthan ti n' atthi tato -o);
Ud 71,31 (n'atthi kamesu -o ti aya¡p dutiyo anto); Jai
8,28' (pabbajitana¡p hi sarakasmi¡p nava -a upaqhahanti);
9,35 (pary.ry.asalaya -e vicinanto agha -e passi); 11 194,15'
(surapane -a¡p disva); 417,11 foil. (aya¡p Sundañ ...
amhehi marapita n' eva Gotamassa ... -o atthi amhaka¡p
-o ti); IV 428,3* (kacci bhoto amaccesu -o koci na
vijjati; 428,17·: -o ti aparadho); 495,14* (aparadhake
dusake hethake ca rajano da1,1<;lenti viditva -a¡p);
VI 235,29 (papilpasevanaya -a¡p kalyary.a-
mittilpasevanaya ca gury.a¡p dassentl); 470,24* (matara¡p
kena -ena dajjasi dakarakkhino); Ap 487,23 (kayassa
-a¡p disvana pabbaji¡p anagariya¡p); 533,2 (yadi koc'
atthi -o me khamassu karury.akara); Bv 2:13 (yatha
gilthagato puriso ta)aka¡p disvana pilrita¡p na gavesati
ta¡p ta)aka¡p na -o ta!akassa so); Mil 92,14 (tesa¡p ko -o
ti); Vism 118,22foll. (ananurüpo [viharo] nama
agharasanna¡p -ana¡p aññatarena samannagato); 222,14
(aya¡p te sllesu -o ti); Spk 11 310,23 (naya¡p attano
laddhiya¡p -a¡p passati); Pj I 150,23 (cakkhumhi rogo va
-o va ussada va pl!aka va na honti); Dhp-a I 251 ,1s (atthi
nu kho me kayakammad!su koci -o ti); Mhv 1:3
dosa
(vajjita111 tehi -ehi); - 2. a bodily impurity; an excess
or malignancy of one of the three humours of the body
(pitta, vata and sc,mha); one of the three humours;
Mil 43,28 (pañcamülabhesajjehi gilanassa -a niddhanta
-e niddhante gilano arogo hoti); Vism 103,7 (-esu ca
semhadhiko ragacarito hoti vatadhiko mohacarito );
Sp 213,6foll. (dinna pi parisandhi na tirrhati -en' eva
saddhi111 paggharati -e pana paggharite suddhe
vatthumhi dinna parisandhi khippa111 patinhati); Sv 98,9
(uddhavirecanan ti uddha111 -ana111 niharar_1a111);
Ud-a 172,17 (kusalo vejjo ussannados~ puggala111
tikicchanto sinehapanadina parhama111 -e ukkiledetva);
Pj II 274,2o (aturassa -e ukkiledetva niharitukamo vejjo);
Th-a II 33,19 (vamanavirecanehi -am nlharanto bhisakko
viya); - ifc see visa-; - 0 -ggha .. mfr¡. [dosa + gha4],
destroying faults; Ap 534,1 (madhurani pahanhani -ani
hitani ca ... vakyani, Be, Ce so; Ee 0 -ghatln'; Se 0 -jhani)
quoted Thi-a 143,7* and Sadd 400,21; - 0 -ññu, m(jn).,
knowing what is wrong; a prudent, wise man; Abh 229
(dhiro vipassi -ü); - adosa 1, m. and mfr¡., l. (m.) what
is not a fault, not a deficiency; Ap-a 284,29 (dosa111 ca
-a111 ca janitu111);- 2. (mfr¡.) without fault; not deficient
or defective; A I 112,21 (nemi pi availka -a akasava);
Mil 331 ,2o (suvibhatt~ -a111 anavajj~ ... ta111 nagara111
passitva); Mp III 118,6 (-aya ... vacaya); - adosaka111
in Ee at Ja VI 579,4* is wr for adüsak~ (Be, Ce, Se,
587,23* so); - niddosa\ nidosa 1, mfr¡., without a fault;
faultless, perfect; unblemished; free from impurity;
Sn 476 (suddho nidoso vimalo akaco, Be so; Ce, E e, Se
-o); Ja IV 376,15 (parijano ma111 -a111 akarar_1ena
porhesi); V 504,27 (pubbalohita111 dhovitva val)e -e
katva); VI 147,29' (--taya); Sp 582,33 (thero akarako hoti
-o); Sv 359,18 (--tta); PsiV 130,23 (ariyan ti -~
lokuttara111 -a111 hi ariyan ti vuccati); As 2,2* (apanetva
tato bhas~ Tambapat_11)inivasina111 aropayitva -a111
bhasa111 tantinayanuga111); - sadosa\ mfr¡., with a fault;
defective; at fault; blemished; A I 112,14 (nemi savailka
-a sakasava); Ja IV 5,33' (par_1~1ito puriso attano
kattabbakamma111 -a111 nu kho niddosan ti
samekkheyya); Mil119,14 (eta111 pi vacana111 sakasa!al11
saniggah~ -a111); Sp 582,32 (thero karako hoti -o); -
se e al so dussati 1.
dosa 2, m. and mfn. [cfdussati 2 and S. dve~a], l. (m.) ill-
will, evil intention, hostility, anger, Abh 164 (-o ca
parigha111); 1125; V in III 3,1 o (aha111 hi brahmal)a
vinayaya dhamma111 desemi ragassa -assa mohassa);
93,12 (kilesapahanan ti ragassa pahanal11 -assa pahan~
mohassa pahan~); D I 25,5 (tattha me assa chando va
rago va -o va parigho va); III 182,13* (chanda -a bhaya
moha yo dhamma111 ativattati); M I 96,4 (kopa111 ca -~
ca appaccaya111 ca patukaroti); S I 13,22* (yesa111 rago ca
-o ca avijja ca virajita khil)asava arahanto); A III 169,28
(mame dosaniyesu dhammesu -o udapadi ti); Dhp 369
(chetva ragal!l ca -a111 ca tato nibbanam ehisi); It 2,3*
(yen a -e na dur~ase satta gacchanti duggatil!l); 84,9* foil.
(anatthajanano -o -o cittappakopano ): Th 719 (na me
tappaccaya tattha -o pema111 ca hehiti): Ja IV 11 ,17* (-o
kodhasamunhano); 12,13· (pubbakale kodho paril)amitva
aparabhage -o hoti); Nidd I 215,25foll. (kopo pakopo
sampakopo -o padoso sampadoso cittassa ... -o dussana
444 dos a
dussitattal!l); Pa!is II 217,32 (du(!ho -a111 pajahati);
Dhs 418 (-o dussana dussitatta111 vyapatti vyapajjana
virodho parivirodho car_1(,1itt~ asuropo anattamanata
cittassa); 1060; Vibh 208,18 (tlni akusa1amü1ani 1obho -o
moho); Nett 13,5 (yo vyapado aya111 -o akusa1amül~);
Mil 310,25 (daharakassa na rago hoti na -o hoti na moho
hoti); Vism 295,9 (-e adinavo khantiyal!l ca anisa111so
paccavekkhitabbo); 470,16foll. (dussanti tena saya111 va
dussati dussanamattam eva va tan ti -o, so cat_l(,likka-
lakkhat_lo pahatasiviso vi ya ... ); Sv 116,27 (-o dubbala-
kodho parigho balavakodho); Spk I 119,II (dunho
0
-taya); Pj I1 304,22 (-o pi aghatavatthadivasena);- ifc
see uppajjanamanaka-; - 2. (mfr¡.) exhibiting ill-will;
hostile, angry; Vin III 163,21 (yo pana bhikkhu
bhikkhul!l dunho -o appatlto amülakena parajikena
dhammena anuddh~seyya; 163,3o: dugho -o ti kupito
anattamano anabhiraddho ahatacitto khilajato;
Sp 584,16foll.: düsito e' eva düsako ca uppanne hi -e
puggalo tena -en a düsito hoti ... tasma dunho ti vuccati
paral!l ca düseti vinaseti tasma -o ti vuccati); -
oagati,f, a wrong course of behaviour because of ill-
will or hostility; Vin III 238,25 (na -il!l gaccheyya); D III
133,21 (abhabbo khil)asavo bhikkhu -i111 gantul!l);
Vibh 376,1; - 0 '-aggi, m., the fire of ill-will; D III
217,19 (ragaggi -i mohaggi); Jai 61,5 (-imhi ...
nibbute); Paris I 129,4 (aditto lokasannivaso ... -ina);
Ap 211 ,7;- o• -antara, mfr¡., inwardly hostil e; activated
by ill-will; Vin li 249,35 (mettacitto vakkhami no -o ti);
MI 123,29; A I 59,25 (duqho va -o saddho va
duggahltena; Mp II 117,25: -o ti abbhantare
patighitadoso); Ud 28,31; Ja VI 206,8* (na tayate
paricii)I)O ca aggi -~ maccam anariyakamm~); Th-a I
185,3o (-o hutva kur~arogi bhaveyyasi ti akkosi);
II 36,17 (--taya); - neg. adosantara, mfn., Ud-a 194,2
(adosantaratte);- 0 -garu, mfr¡. [dosa + garu 2], obedient
to ill-will; SI 24,23* (kopantaro -u);- 0 -gami(n), mfr¡.
[dosa + gami(n) 2], influenced by ill-will or hostility;
Vin III 183,34 (chandagamita 0 -gamita mohagamita
bhayagamita papenti; Sp 625,26foll.: ete
chandagamino . . . bhayagamino ca ti eva111
chandagamitaya .. . papen ti, yojentl ti attho ); 184,18
(-ino ca bhikkhü); IV 238,! (-iniyo ca bhikkhuniyo);-
o-carita, m(jn )., (one) with a disposition to ill-will;
Nidd I 359,21; Mi192,11; Vism 102,34 (pubbe cheda-
vadhabandhanaverakammabahulo -o hoti); Nett 24,26
(-assa bhagava pugga1assa mett~ desayati); Sv 1053,20
(-assa mettakammar~anal!l [deti]); - 0 -tthaniya, mfr¡.,
being a cause of ill-will; Kv 222,3o; - 0 -dosa, mfr¡.,
spoiled by ill-will; Dhp 357 (til)adosani khettani -a aya111
paja); - 0 -pakata, mfr¡. [dosa + pakata 1], produced,
influenced, by ill-will; A I 134,24 (-~ kamm~
dosaj~ ... ); - 0
-hetuka, mfr¡., caused by ill-will; A V
261,21;- adosa2 , m. and mfr¡., l. (m.) absence of ill-will
or hostility; D III 214,22 (-o kusa1amü1~); A III 339,15
(na bhikkhave -a doso samudeti); Vibh 210,2;
Vism 465,10 (-o acat_1<,likka1akkhai)O avirodha1akkhat_1o
va); 467,s (atthato hi -o yeva metta); It-a I 111,9
(adhivasanavasena -o, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit -o); -
2. (mfn.) without ill-will or hostility; MI 25,33 (so arago
-o amoho); - atidosa, m., great or excessive ill-will;
dosaip
Mil277,26 (-ena vajjho hoti atimohena anayarp
2 2
apajjati ... );- niddosa , nidosa , mfn.,freefrom ill-will
or hostility; Patis I 80,2 (niraga . . . -a caratl ti
viññal)acariya nimoha ... ); Kv 606,13 (araha nirago -o
nimmoho); - suniddosa, mfn., complete/y without ill-
will; Ja IV 10,22* (sunikkodham suniddosam nillobham);
- sadosa2 , mfn. (and m. ?): l. (mfn.) (~ne who .is)
affected by ill-will; hostile; DI 80,1 (-arp va cittarp); MI
64,32 (ni!!ha -assa udahu vitadosassa ti); Patis I 81,29 (-a
caratl ti aññal)acariya); Pp 61,18 (yassa puggalassa doso
appah1no ayarp vuccati pugga1o -o); Mill02,14;
Sv 791,1 (taya saragena -ena samohena); Ps III 269,13
(-an ti patighasampayuttacittadvayarp); - 2. (m.) the
being affected by ill-will, hostility; S IV 307,11 (ye
dhamma dosaniya te upasarpharati bhiyyoso mattaya
-aya, E e so; Be omits -aya; Ce, Se bhiyyo -aya; perhaps
wrr, or sa5 + dosa ?).
dosarp, adv. [S. do~am], at night; Ja VI 386,15* (yadi te
mantayitarp janinda -arp; 386,18': -an ti abhidosarp,
rattibhage ti attho ); - se e also abhidosarp, doso.
dosana, n. [cf S. do~al)a], spoiling; ? Sadd 489,27 (dusa -e:
dussati doso -arp dosito ).
dosaniya, dosaneyya, düsan1ya, dussan1ya, mfn. [cf
dussati2 and S. dve~al)1ya], producing ill-will or
hostility; causing anger; M II 172,19 (atthi nu kho imass'
ayasmato tatharüpa -a dhamma); S IV 307,11 (ye
dhamma -a, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dosaniya; Spk III 103,6:
dosapaccaya); A III 110,17 (rajan1ye rajjati dussan1ye
dussati mohan1ye muyhati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dusan1ye);
169,28 (mame -esu dhammesu doso udapad1 ti); It 84,18'
(yo ca dosarp pahantvana dosaneyye na dussati); Nidd I
242,19 (-e na dussati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dussan1ye;
Nidd-a I 347,8 foil.: dosuppade vatthusmirp na dosarp
uppadeti); Ap 18,13 (-e na dussare, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
dussan1ye; Ap-a 221,19: -e dussitabbe dosarp uppadeturp
yutte vatthumhi, Ce, E e so; Be, Se dussan1ye); Mil 311,3
(rajan1ye rajjeyya dussan1ye dusseyya mohan1ye
muyheyya); Ud-a 243,25 (diso disan ti düsako düsan1yarp
coro corarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dusan1yarp).
dosaneyya, mfn., see sv dosan1ya.
dosarita, mfn., see sv osarati 1.
dosi(n), m(jn). [cf S. dve~in], hostile; an enemy; Ja V
454,15' (-ina hutva !hitena pisacenapi saddhirp sallape);
- ifc see pisaca-.
dosina, f [cf S. jyotsna], moonlight; a moonlight night;
DI 47,lo (ramal)1ya vata bho -a ratti; cfSv 141,6: -a ti
dosapagata . . . upakki1esehi virahita ti vuttarp hoti) t
Mi15,26; MI 212,33 (ramal)1yarp ... Gosiilgasalavanarp
-a ratti); - 0 -pm}qamasi, 0 (a)-pul)l)amas1,f, a clear,
full-moon night; Th 306 (cando yatha -iya) t 1119
(dosinapUI)l)amasiya); - 0
-mukha, n. (or mfn.), the
face, the centre, ofthe moonlight night;? (having afront
part) like the moon;? Ja VI 223,13* (yanarp ayojesurp
dantarp . . . pal)<;lararp -arp; 223,26'joll.: vigatadosaya
rattiya mukharp viya, candasadisan ti attho);- see also
jul)ha.
doso, adv. [cfS. do~a], at night; Abh 147 (rattarp -o);-
se e also dosam.
doha\ m. [ts], .milking; milk; Ja V 63,23* (-ena dhenurp
jananti; 64,18': -ena ti 0 -sampattiya dhenurp sukh1ra ti
445 dvatthi
jananti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sakh1ra ti); 433,5* (-ena
hananti vacchakam).
doha 2 , m. [S. droh~]. injury; wrong, offence; - ifc see
pantha-.
dohaka, m(jn). [ts], (one) who milks;- ifc see go-.
dohakavatta, n. [cf S. dodhaka(vp:ta)], a particular way of
reciting; ? Sp 1202,16 (sarabhaññe kira tarailgavatta-
dohakavattagalitavattad1ni dvattirpsavattani atthi, Ee, Se
so; Be -dhotakavatta-; Ce tarailgavattatarailgabheda-
vattagalitavattad1ni; Sp-! [Be] III 381,10: tarailga-
vattad1narp uccaral)avidhanani natthappayogani).
dohati, pr. 3 sg., see sv duhati 1.
dohana, n., se e sv duhana 1.
dohani,f [ts], a milk-pail; Sadd 458,30 (duha papüral)e: ...
-!).
do hala, do baJa, m. (and n.) [S. dohada, dohala; cf also
S. daurhyda], a craving in pregnancy; what is craved;
Abh 163 (abhilaso kamadoha!a); V in I 342,28 (mahes1 na
cirass' eva gabbhin1 ahosi, tassa evarüpo -o hoti,
icchati ... senarp sannaddharp ... passiturp); Ja IIl 133,8
(eka... surpsumar1 bodhisattassa hadayamarpse -arp
uppadetva); 333,15 (-o me samt uppanno
allarohitamaccharp khaditurp iccham1 ti); IV 424,2
(suval)l)aVal)l)aharpsassa dhammadesanasavane -arp
arocesi); V 40,25* (aharp te dammi -arp); 40,27 (dullabho
mama -o); 354,25 (-o ti vutte pana yena kenaci upayena
pariyesissati); VI 150,11' foil. (patibhanani pi hitva ti
-ani cha<;l<;letva pi . . . nar1narp hi uppannarp -arp
alabhitva gabbho sussitva nassati); Ap 507,11 (matu me
-o asi); Dhp-a II 86,1 (dhammiko no dhitaya -o ti);
Mhv 22:42; - duddohaJa, m., a di.fficult pregnancy
longing; Ja III 294,13 (-o te uppanno ko etani [akkh1ni]
ahariturp sakkhissatl ti).
dohalayati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from dohala], craves; Ja VI
263,11* (candarp kho [tvarp] -asi).
dohaJini, f [cfS. dohadin, doha1in], (one) experiencing
pregnancy cravings (for); pregnant; Ja II 395,2• (bhutva
-1 nar1 cakkavattirp vijayati; 395,9·: -1 ti sañjatadoha!a);
435,16* (tassa -1 bhariya Suphassa bhakkhitum icchati ...
rajabhojanarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee maccham icchati);
IV 334,21 (-1 viya hutva nipajji); V 330,4• (hoti
gabbhass' avakkamo tena -1 hoti); VI 326,13 (mata te
Vidhurassa hadayamarpse -!); 484,26 (mahasatte
kucchigate Phusatl -1 hutva ... danarp datukama ahosi);
Dhp-a III 95,6 (-1 hutva tath' eva katva doha!arp
pativinesi); Sadd 796,2 (dvissa dudido: durattarp ... -1;
cf S. dvihydaya).
dohi(n), mfn. [S. dohin], milking; - ifc see anavasesa-
(sv avasesa).
drabya, m., se e sv dabba3.
drava, mfn. and m. [ts],fluid; fluidity; exudation; Abh 804
(dravacaresu ... raso); 960 (-e ... kasayo); Vism 352,1
(yo abandhanabhavo va 0 -bhavo va ayarp apodhatu).
dravikaraqa, n., dravikara, m. [cf S. /ex. dravlkaral)a,
drav1vky], liquefying; Dhatup 441 (li silesanadrav1-
karal)esu); Dhatum 681 (11 silese drav1kare).
dvakkula, m(jn). see sv dva.
dvailgika, mfn., see sv dvi.
dvailgula, n. and mfn., see sv dvi.
dvatthi, num. [dialect form of dvasatthi qv sv dva?],
dvatthpsa
(according to cts) 62; DI 54,4 (Makkhaligosalo etad
avoca ... -i pa!ipada dvagh' antarakappa; Sv162,9: -i
pa!ipada ti dvasaghi pa!ipada ti vadati; Sv-p! I 290,4:
dvasat!hi pa!ipada ti vattabbe sabhavaniruttiJTl ajananto
-i pa\ipada ti vadati) :f. MI 517,34foll. (ekacco sattha
ev3111vad! hoti ... ) :f. S Ili 211,23 (eva111 di!!hi
uppajjati ... ); Sadd 633,9 (sutte sukhuccaraJ).atth3111
akkharalopo vipañtata ca: dvasaghi pa!ipada -i
pa!ipada); 800,15.
dvattiipsa, -aJTl, -a, num., see sv dva.
dvattiipsatima, mfn., see sv dva.
dvattikkhattuip, ind., see sv dva.
dvanda, n. and m. [S. dvaJ11dva], l. (n.) a couple, a pair;
Abh 628 (yug3111 tu yuga13111 -aJ1l); - 2. (m.) gr. t. t., a
dvandva (copulative) compound; Sadd 767,26foll.
(nananamana111 ekavibhattikana111 samuccayo -o); -
0
-kammadharayagabbha, mfn., contammg dvandva
and kammadharaya compounds; Sadd 763,17 (-o
tulyadhikaral).abahubb!hi); - 0 -samasa, m., a dvandva
compound; Nidd-a II 56,1 (asayanusayo ... --vasena ca
ekavacan3111 veditabbaJTl); Pa!is-a 616,31 (etena dhammo
ca cakka111 ca dhammacakkan ti --ta vutta hoti).
dvaya, daya, mfn. and n. [S. dvaya], l. (mfrz.) twofold,
double, of two kinds; D III 285,13 (-ena vüpakasena
sampadeti kayavüpakasena ca cittavüpakasena ca); M III
72,5 (sammadi\thiJ1l p' aha111 bhikkhave -a111 vadami);
Dhp 384 (yada -esu dhammesu paragü hoti brahmai).O );
Pv 36:29 (dvay' ajja kammana111 vipakam ahu);
Sadd 922,13 (daya111 -3111 .. . vai).I).abhedo 'y3111); -
-ena, adv ., in two ways; as of two kinds; D II 61,33 (ime
dve dhamma -ena vedanaya ekasamosaraJ).a bhavanti;
Sv 500,21: vagamülasamudacaravasena dv!hi
koghasehi); A IV 115,14 (bhikkhuno -ena puggala vidita
honti); - 2. (n.) (i) a pair; two things; MI 161,32
(sannipatitana111 vo bhikkhave -3111 karai).IY3111 dhamml
va katha ariyo va tul).h!bhavo); S IV 67,11 (-a111 vo
bhikkhave desissami; Spk II 380,15: -an ti dve koghase);
Sn 868 (ete pi dhamma dvaya-m-eva sante; Pj II 552,16:
satasatadvaye sante pahonti uppajjanti); Vv 80:7 (dvay'
ajja kiccaJ1l); Th 662 (-ena bala haññanti); Jall 167,6*
(-a111 yacanako . . . nigacchati); Vism 485,34
(cakkhudhatu rüpadhatü ti idaJ1l hi -a111 hetu);
Mil 217,27; Spk II 38,31 (cakkhurüpadlni -ani); -
dvay3111 in Ee at Sv 456,22 is prob. wr for tay3111 (Be, Ce,
Se so); - (ii) double meaning, falsehood, duplicity; -
0
-kari(n), mfn., doing both (good and bad actions); D III
96,3o (khattiyo ... kayena -!); S III 241,18 (Spk II 349,7:
-in o ti duvidhakarino, kusalakusalakarino ti attho ); -
0
-gami(n), mfn. [dvaya + gami(n) 1], involving a double
meaning or falsehood; D III 14,14 (vaca -in! ti;
Sv 825,14: sarüpena atthibhav3111 atthena natthibhavan ti
eva111 -mi, alikatucchanipphalavacaya eta111
adhivacanaJ1l); - o -ta, f, the being of two parts; a pair;
Sn p. 140,7 (yava-d-eva -ana111 dhammanaJTl
yathabhüta111 ñiil).aya ti, ki111 ca -a111 vadetha ... ; Pj II
503,13: dve avayava etesan ti dvaya, dvaya eva-a tesa111
-anaJ1l, dvayanan ti pi pa!ho); Pv 36:29 (bala -a111
apassino, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dvyata111 (misprint ?);
Pv-a 228,13: dvay3111 apassanta);- (dvay3111)-dvaya, n.,
a couple;- -'-arama, mfn. [cfS. dvaJTldvarama], liking
446 dva
to live in couples; liking to be with others; PsI 112,34
(-' -aramo hi aya111 loko ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
-'-aramo) = Mp V 67,11;- --samapatti,f [S. lex., BHS
dvayadvayasamapatti], sexual intercourse; V in Ili 21,3
(yaJTl tva111 asaddhamm3111 gamadhamm3111 ... rahass3111
--samapatti111 samapajjissasi; Sp 221,15foll.: dv!hi dv!hi
samapajjitabbaJTl, dvaya111 dvay3111 samapattin ti pi
pa!ho, daya111dayasamapattin ti pa!hanti, ta111 na
sundar3111, Ce, Ee so; Be daya111 dayaJTl samapattin ti
pa!hanti; Se dayadayasamapattin ti); A IV 54,15 (na
h' eva kho matugamena saddhiJTl --samapattiJTl
samapajjati); Nidd I 139,9 (methunadhammo nama ...
--samapatti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dvayadvayasamapatti);
Nidd-a I 110,2 ( --samapattimhi laggita, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
--samapattiya); - advaya, mfn., not two; single;
unchanging; D II 144,17 (mettena kayakammena hitena
sukhena -ena appamal).ena); III 268,21 (pa!havikasil).aJTl
eko sañjanati uddh3111 adho tiriy3111 -a111 appamiil).aJTl) =
A V 46,s; Pa!is I 143,29 (pa!havikasil).aJTl ca att3111 ca
-3111 samanupassati; Pa!is-a 450,14: -an ti ekam eva, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee omits);- --bhal).i(n),mfrz., Niddll 51,17
(buddham .. . -iJTl tadiJTl ... ; Nidd-a II 91,14:
paricchinnavacanatta dvivacanavirahitaJTl).
dvarati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dvarati, Wg § 22:36], covers;
wards off; Sadd 425,17 foil. (dvara saJ11varal).e,
saJ11varaJ).aJTl rakkhal).a: -ati dvara111 ... -anti sa111varanti
rakkhanti etena ti dvaraJTl).
dvaJhakaJTl in Ee at It-a I 32,22 is wr for dve)haka111 (Be,
Ce, Se so).
dva- [ts] (iic for dvi qv, especially befare other numerals;
befare double consonants dva- ), two;
(dva)-kkula, mlfn). (one) who belongs to two families;
Ps IV 190,13 (-o ti dvikkulo ti va vattabbe Bakku1o ti
vutt3111, Ce, Ee so; Se dvikulo ti -o ti va; Be omits
dvakkulo ti); - see also dvi(k)kula sv dvi; -
o -catta!isa, o -cattalisa, o -cattarlsa,j num. and mfn.,
l. (num.) 42; Nidd II 78,2o (imehi -aya akarehi, Ee, Se
so; Be cattallsaya; Ce catucattallsaya); Mil419,18
(anagata [pañha] ca pana -a honti, Ce so; Be, Ee -a; Se
--catta)isa); Vism 351,4 (-aya akarehi catassa dhatuyo
vittharita hontl ti); Spk I 45,5 (pañca kkhandhe tlreti
aniccato dukkhato rogato ti -aya akarehi); Mhv 37:208
(-a vassani); - see also dvecatta)isa (sv dve2),
bacatta)isa; 2. (mfrz.) the 42nd; Ap 378,19
(Bhadda1ivaggo 0 -cattariso, Ee so; Be bacattal!samo; Ce
o -catta)isatimo; Se o -catta)isamo ); Spk I 301,28 (-e
sattahe etani jayanti); -se e al so dvicattalisama (sv dvi),
dvecattal!satima (sv dvé), bacatta)lsama;
(dva)-ttiipsa, -aJTl, -a, (dva)-ttiJ11sati, num., 32; of 32
kinds; Vin V 145,24 (-a khuddaka, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
dvattiJ11sati ca); D I 88,3o (agatani ... amhakaJTl mantesu
-a mahapurisalakkhaJ).ani); Sn 1000 (mahapurisa-
lakkhal).a -a); Ja I 394,17' (-a danta); II 437,29' (kesadihi
-aya kul).apehi paripUI).I).3111); Nidd I 220,25 (-aya
tiracchanakathaya arato, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be battiJ11saya);
Vibh 425,2 (-a kappa, Ce, E e, Se so; Be batti111sa);
Vism 245,29 (imasmiJTl kaye -a koghasa); PsI 224,24
(-aya pi !hanesu); As 251,3 (-am eva); Mhv 2:8; 30:89
(-a ca kumariyo); - --ko!!hasaka, mfn., consisting of
32 groups; Vism 245,31 (--koghasake kaye); -
dvii
--kkhattu~, ind., 32 times; Ap 352,31; PsI 224,27; -
--tiilaka, mfn., consisting of 32 palm-trees; Vism 245,18
(--ta1ake ta1avaue) f. Vibh-a 259,23 (--tal.akasmi~); -
--pada, mfn., with 32 rungs or steps; Vism 244,2
(--pad~ nissei_Ü~); - --vidha, mfn., of 32 kinds;
1 antara~
Ud-a 41,3o; - --sata, n. num. [sata ), 132; Sv 1052,14
(chakkavasena --sata~, Se so; Ee wr cakka-; Be
batti~sa-; Ce batti~sa-); Kv-a 19,28; - --hattha, mfn.,
measuring 32 hattha measures; Vism 258,4 (autan ti
purisassa --hattha~); Bv-a 297,36 (Sujatassa --hattho
[pal1aiJ.ko)); - see also batti~sa, batti~sa;
(dva)-ttiipsatima, mfn., the 32nd; Mhv p. 265,12 (-o
paricchedo); see also batti~satima;
(dva)-ttikkhattmp, ind., two or three times; M II 138,22
(-u~ ... mukhe a1opa~ samparivattetva); Vism 346,29;
Sp 1192,25; Mhv 37:238; - ifc see ilnaka; - see also
dvittikkhattu~ (sv dvi); -
0
-dasa, num and mf( -l)n.
[dva + dasa 1], l. (num.) twelve; Vin III 3,32 (a~_~~ani anha
va dasa va -a va); 204,24 (-e uppaune mil1ac!vare, for
twelve days ?); V 221,29 (imehi -ahi akarehi parisato
kammani vipajjanti); D II 139,18 (-a yojauani); Pv 27:9
(bhikkhil aune ca -a); Ja I 142,2o (--nipate
samuddavfu:¡ijajatake, Be so; Se barasa-; Ce, Ee sojasa-;
see Ja IV 158/oll.); IV 287,24 (sa -ahi gathahi
paridevitva); V 397,6* (bhutta ca sa -a hauti papake);
Ap 34,17 (ayamato catubbisa~ vittharena ca -a, Be so;
Ce -~; E e, Se -a); 152,27 (-a cakkavattino ); Vibh 73,6
(-aun~ ayatanana~); 96,13 (-a dhatuyo ajjhattika);
Mi1180,26 (-' ime maharaja apaciti~ na karonti);
Vism 352,34 (-asu konhasesu); Nidd-a I 257,26 (-asu
ayatanesu); Mhv 2:9 (-a~); 34:6 (-aun~ sahassan~
bhikkhunin~); Sadd 297,10 (-a barasa); - 2. (mfn.)
(i) the twelfth; Th p. 64,25* (-amhi nipatamhi); Thi 440
(-e mase); Ap 190,s (ito ca -e kappe);- (ii) (-1, scil.
ratti), the twelfth night of the lunar half-month; Sv 450,3
(-iya pakkhassa caudasadisani honti) = Ps III 381,13
(-iya~); Sadd 795,14;- --kkhattu~, adv., twelve times;
Ja I 75,29; Sp 674,9; --nahuta, mfn. and n.,
(numbering) 120,000; Vin I 35,34 (--nahutehi
Magadhikehi brahma~_~agahapatikehi parivuto) f. Ja I
83,2; Ja VI 220,3 (--nahutaya parisaya saddhi~ agantva);
Ps II 356,4 (--nahutesu ek~ nahuta~ upasakatt~
pa!ivedesi); Cp-a 4,4 (--nahute brahma~_~agahapatike
sasane otaretva); - --padika, mfn., consisting of twelve
terms; Spk II 78,10 (--padiko paccayakaro); Ud-a 129,24
(--padikassa paccayakarassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee wr
-assa); Cp-a 316,12; - --purisa, mfn., involving twelve
men; Vin IV 105,16 (--puriso hatthl; Sp 858,15: cattaro
arohaka ekekapadarakkha~_~aka dve dve ti eva~ --puriso
hoti); - --porisa, mfn., measuring the height of twelve
men; D II 171,2 (esika ... --porisa ubbedhena, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e catu-); - --masika, --masiya, mfn., consisting of
twelve months; D II 327,11 (tena masena --masiyo
sa~vaccharo) f. Vibh 422,23 f. Dhp-a I 364,22
(--masiko);- --yojana, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) extending
for twelve yojauas; Vin V 217 ,22* (bhikkhu si ya -e ~hito;
Sp 1392,26/oll.: aya~ pañha --yojauappamal_lesu
Barfu)asi-adisu nagaresu gamasima~ sandhaya vutta);
Ja 1 71,31 (sa Marasena Marassa purato --yojana hoti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dvadasa yojauani); III 266,13'
447 dva
(--yojanaya Baral_lasiya bheri~ carapetva); Spk II 226,10
(--yojau~ nagara~); - 2. (n.) a distance of twelve
yojanas; Dhp-a I 106,1 (sarirappabha --yojaua~ phari);
- --yojauasatika, n or mfn .. , (being) a distance of
twelve hundred yojanas; Sv 487,34 (dvinna~ bahan~
--yojauasatika~) Spk II 89,10;
--yojanika, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) extending for twelve
yojanas; Ja II 252,25 (saka1~ --yojanika~
Baral_lasinagara~ chadetva); IV 488,26 (--yojauik~
parisa~ gahetva); Sp 624,24; Ps III 76,23 (--yojanika~
attabhava~ jahitva); - 2. (n.) a distance of twelve
yojanas; Mp I 139,11 (sarirappabha --yojanika~ phari);
--vassa, mfn., twelve-years-old; Vin IV 322,3
(--vassa . . . gihigata khama hoti sltassa);
--vassika, mfn., l. being twelve years old; one who is
twelve years old; Vv-a 157,10; - 2. lasting for,
requiring, twelve years;? Sp 1246,12 ([navakamm~)
--vassik~); Pj 1 198,27 (--vassika~ sippa~
katipayamasen' eva pariyosapesi); - --vidha, mfn., of
twelve kinds; twelve-fold; Vism 410,11; Pj 1 145,4
(itarltarapaccayasautoso so --vidho hoti); Vibh-a 252,21
(--vidha apodhatu); - -ena, in twelve ways; in a
twelve-fold way; Pa!is-a 575,29 (--vidhena kamm~
dassita~ hoti); - --samasiyo in Ee at Vibh 423,10.18 is
wr for dvadasamasiyo (Be, Ce, Se so);- --hattha, mfn.,
measuring or extending twelve hattha measures;
Sp 102,5; Sv 488,26; Spk 111 51,7 ( --hattho ovarako vi ya
matukucchi asambadho va hoti ti); - see also do1asa,
barasa; - 0
-dasaka\ n., a set of twelve; Vin II. 3,32
(adhammakamme -a~ nighita~, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
adhammakammadvadasak~); Ja 1 365,12* (sahayo paua
-ena hoti; 365,21': dvadasaham ekato nivasena hoti ti);
- see also dojasaka; - . 0 -dasaka2 , mf(-i)n., (or
0
-dasaki(n), mfn. ?), consisting of twelve; S V 40,17* (in
uddana: vivekanissita~ -i pa!hamaki); 41,6* (in uddana:
amatogadha~ -i tatiyaki); - o -dasama, mf( -I)n., the
twelfth; Vin II 307,38; M III 255,10 (aya~ -i
pa!ipuggalika dakkhi1,1a); Sn 113 (-~ bhagava bruhi);
Ja V 60,29 (-a~ gath~ aha); Sv 533,34 (-e vasse); Pj II
183,9 (-aya [gathaya], Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dvadasaya);
Mhv 38:57; ifc see atta- (sv atta[n));
0
-navuta, mfn., l. the 92nd; Th-a 1 84,12 (ito -e kappe
Tissassa nama sammasambuddhassa ka1e);
2. characterised by 92, plus 92; Tikap-a 237,26 (-ani tini
satani); - see also dvenavuta (sv dvé); - 0 -navuti,f
num., 92; Spk II 362,29 (-i kappe mauussa1okato
deva1oka~ deva1okato ca manussaloka~ sa~sarauta);
Pj 1 203,22 H kappa vitivatta); - --kappa, m.n., the
92nd aeon; Ja 1 40,14 (--kappamatthake); Spk II 359,28
(ito kira --kappe, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dvanavute kappe);
Pj 1 202,4 (ito --kappe Kasi nama nagara~ ahosi);- see
also dvenavuti (sv dve 2); o -paññiisa,
0
-Pai_ll_lasa, num., 52; Mhv 2:29 (-a); Tikap-a 239,5* (-a,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dvapal_ll_lasa); - see also dvepaññasa
(sv dve 2); 0
-paññiisatima, 111;{n., the 52nd;
Mhv (11) p. 144,12* (-o paricchedo);- -vlsa, num., 22;
0
Vin III 204,3o (-e uppanne [millacivare], for 22 days ?);
Mhv21:11 (-a vassani);- 0 -VIsati,f num., 22; JaVI
488,29 (-i satasahassani, Be, Ce, E e so; Se bavisati);
Vism 113,22 (dasa kasi1,1a dasa asubha anapanasati
 dviikiira
kayagatasatl ti imani -i nimittaramm~ani); Sv 1038,22
(-iya chakkan~ vasena dvattüy¡sasatapañhe, Se so; Be
battirpsa-; Ce, Ee battirpsa-); Bv-a 296,32
(Dlpankaradigotamabuddhapariyanta -i buddha
khattiyakule yeva nibbattirpsu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee sesa
bavisati sammasambuddha ... ); As 9,37 (-iya tikesu);
Mhv 2:8; - --vidha, mfn., of 22 kinds; Ps V 100,4 (Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se bavisati-); - see also dvevisati(m)
(sv dve2), bavisati; - 0
-Visatima, mfn., the 22nd;
Dhp p. 89,12 (nirayavaggo -o; Ee dvavisatimo);
Bv p. 87,27;- see also bavisatima;- -Safthi,f num.,
0
62; Abh 441 (-i di~thiyo); DI 39,13 (-iya vatthühi); S IV
286,12 (-i di~thigatani brahmajale bhal).itani); Nidd I
110,11 (-iya di~thigatesu); Pa~is I 130,3o (-iya
dighigatehi pariyu~thito lokasannivaso ti); Ap 488,26* (in
uddana: -i e' eva, Ce, Se so; Be basaghi; Ee basa~thiñ
e' eva); Spk I 2,26* (-i e' eva suttani eso
s~yuttasangaho);- --di~thi,f, the (false) theory of62
kinds; Vism 603,2* (--dighirp gal).hanti); Nidd-a I 243,!!
( --di~~hiya antogatatta ti dighigatarp); - --vidha, mfn.,
of 62 kinds; Nidd-a I 238,3 (--vidha dighi);
Vibh-a 460,28; --sata, n. num. [sata 1], 162;
Tikap-a 239,28; - see also dva~thi, dvesaghikappa
(sv dve2);- 0 -sattati,f num., 72; V in I 100,11 (imamhi
khandhake vatthu ekasatarp -i, Ce, Se so; Be vatthüni
ekasatarp ca -i; E e basattati); SI 143,8* (-i Gotama
puññakamma); Ap 248,6 (in uddana: -i, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr dvasattari); Pa~is-a 526,10 (-i anupassana);
As 292,15 (pa!ito pana nava nava katva -i honti); -
--vidha, mfn., of 72 kinds; Tikap-a 38,28; - see also
dvesattati (sv dvé).
dvakara, mfn., see sv akari.
dvakkhata, mfn. [du(s) + akkhata qv sv akkhati], badly
preached, incorrect; S V 379,28 (idha dhammo -o hoti
duppavedito, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce durakkhato; Se
durakkhato).
dvagarika, mfn. [from dvi + agara], taking alms from
(only) two houses; DI l66,11 (so ekagariko hoti
ekalopiko -o va hoti dvalopiko ); M I 238,23 (-a).
dvadasatfhi in Ee at Vism 604,14 is wr for dvasaghi (Be,
Ce, Se so).
dvadhippayika, mfn., see sv dvi.
dvara, duvara, n.m., and-a, f [S. dvara, n.], l. a door; a
doorway, an entran ce; a passage; Abh 219 (-arp ca
pa~iharo); 1110 (pa~ihare mukhe -~); Vin II 220,5foll.
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü jantaghare ... aggirp datva -~
thaketva -e nisidanti); III 38,36 (kü~agarasalay~
divaviharagato -~ vivaritva nipanno hoti); Pv 19:6
(pidahitva -~ bhuñjami ma marp yacanakaddasurp, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be bhuñjirp); Ja I 150,12 (migagal).~
uyyan~ pavesetva -arp pidhaya); 346,3o- foil. ( -ani
pidahanto sabbadvaresu sücigha~ikadayo datva sattamarp
tal~ abhiruhitva tattha pi -arp pidahitva nisidi);
VI 441,5* (aggirp -ato dema; 441,8·: -~ pidahitva tattha
aggirp dema); 524,25 (so gehe dubbalanhan~ thir~
katva -arp pa~isai1kharitva); Ap 90,28 (sobhayanto mama
-arp kapparukkho patighati); Vism 41,12 (bhagavata
-arp dinnarp tasma vagatl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se duvaram);
Sp 299,28 (y~ pana -e ~hito matugamo
bhajanadhovana-udak~ chaqqeti); 1122,3 (sitasamaye
448 dviira
-~ ca vatapan~ ca supidahitarp katabb~); Ps III
220,23 (tassa guhaya -e pilakkharukkho ahosi);
Sadd 425,19 foil. (dvaranti sarpvaranti rakkhanti e tena ti
-~. atha va dve kava~a aran ti gacchanti pavattanti ettha
ti -an ti ... pa!iyan tu -a -an ti ca itthinapurpsakavasena
0
-saddo vutto tatha hi -~ pi surakkhitarp hot! ti ca -a
p' esa ti ca tassa dvilingata vutta); - ifc see agga-
(sv agga\ aparuta- (sv apapurati), al).i-, giri-, culla-
(sv cuila\ pure-, maha- (sv maha[t]); - 2. a gate of a
town, a gateway; Vin I 230,7 (yen' ajja sam~o Gotamo
-ena nikkhamissati tarp Gotamadvar~ nama
bhavissati); D II 83,16 (ye kho keci o!arika pal).a imarp
nagararp pavisanti va nikkhamanti va sabbe te imina va
-ena pavisanti va nikkhamanti va ti); SI 58,9 (catusu
-esu danarp diyittha); A II 241,16 (dakkhil).ena -ena
nikkhametva dakkhil).ato nagarassa sisarp chindissanti);
Ja IV 4,Jo* (sabbe apihita -a); VI 276,4* (agalake ca -e
ca mal).imhi passa nimmit~); Ap 240,14 (dakkhil).amhi
duvaramhi); 599,13 (-ena H~savatiya Ganga sandati
sabbada); Mil58,5 (0 -tta); Mhv 5:47 (dakkhil).ena
duvarena pavisitva); - 3. a door as a means of access;
a way, a means; Vin I 7,4* (aparuta tesam amatassa -a;
Sp 963,17: amatassa -a ti ariyamaggo, so hi
amatasankhatassa nibbanassa -arp); Ja I 366,27* (atthassa
-a pamukha eh a! ete; 367,15·: vaqqhisankhatassa ...
atthassa ete pamukha uttama cha -a upaya
adhigamamukhani ti); VI 229,9* (n' atthi -arp sugatiya);
373,14* (atthassa -ani avapuranto); - esp. the sense-
organs and the mind, as means of access for experience;
It 24,10* (cakkhu sot~ ca ghanarp ca jivha kayo tatha
mano etani yassa -ani suguttani 'dha bhikkhuno);
Th 125 (makka~o pañcadvaray~ ku~ikay~ ... -ena
anupariyeti); Dhs 597 (cakkhurp p' et~ ... loko p' eso
-a p' esa samuddo p' eso ... ); Ap 18,9 (s~vuta chasu
-esu; Ap-a 221,6: cakkhadisu chasu -esu rüpadisu chasu
aramm~esu s~vuta); Mil 54,28 (ay~ abbhantare jivo
yena yena -ena icchati passiturp tena tena -ena passatl
ti); 418,16 (yogina yogavacarena ... cha -a pidahitabba);
Vism 37,10* (rüpesu saddesu atho rasesu gandhesu
phassesu ca rakkha indriy~ ete hi -a viva~a arakkhita
hananti); 599,32 (cakkhadini cha -ani); Spk III 62,23
(kayo nagaran ti vutto tass' eva 0 -bhütatta cha ayatanani
-ani ti); 245,27 (ekasmirp pana -e javanarp rajjati va
dussati va muyhati va); Th-a I 242,2o (manaccha~thanarp
chann~ -anarp ... rakkhitatta guttadvaro); III 22,1 (tena
-ena abhijjhadayo papadhamma anvassaveyyurp);
Saddh 356 (chasu -esu);- ifc see kaya-, gutta-, ghana-,
cakkhu-, jivha-, pañca-, mano- (sv mana[s]), sota-
(sv sota1);- and the passage or means (of good or bad
action); Ja I 276,28 (kayadvar~ vacidvar~
manodvaran ti tlni -ani rakkha); III 35,2o· (t!hi -ehi
duccaritarp na carati); IV 179,2o· (kayadihi -ehi upasanto
silava); Ap-a 110,18 (maya kayena vacaya manasa ca ti
t!hi -ehi katan ti); As 84,37* (-e caranti kammani); 85,Jo
(kayadvarena kat~ kammarp kayakamman ti -ena
namarp labhati); 90,25 (miccha carantassa kammarp
kayakammam eva hoti -~ pi kayadvaram eva); - ifc
see kaya-, mano- (sv mana[s)), vaci-; - 4. entrance,
opening (of the body); Vism 345,3ofoll. ([aharo)
ajjhohariyamano e' esa ekena -ena pavisitva
dvalopika
nissandamano ... anekehi -ehi nissandati); 346,26 (imani
-ani divase divase dhoviyamanani pi n' eva sucini na
manoramani honti); Th-a II 135,23 (tasmitp k~evare
navahi -ehi asucitp savati sandante); - 0 -koHhaka, m.
1
[dvara + kotthaka ; BHS dvarako~thaka] a gatehouse; a
room o ver the gate; Abh 204; J a I 348,35 (-e sopanatp
aruyha); II 218,12 (nagaradvarasamipatp gantva -atp
disva); Ap 43,17; Mi1l0,3I; Vism 388,II (Ciijapanthako
-e thatva rodati);- ifc see bahi-;- o -kosa, m., a door-
frame; the area surrounding a door; Vin IV 47,23 (yava
-a; Sp 783,18: -o nama pighasailghatakassa samanta
kavatavittharappamfu_lo okaso); - 0 -gahe ca in Ee at
Ap 125,7 is wr for 0 -bahaya (Be, Ce so), or 0 -bahe ca (Se
so); - 0
-jaggana, n., attending to the door or gate;
Sp 282,21 (nipajjanakale pi -atp nama mahadvare
0
-palassa bharo); - 0
-Hha, m., a doorkeeper; a gate-
keeper; Abh 341 (-o 0 -pa1ako); - 0 -(t)thakanaka, n.,
closing of or with a gate; ? Sp 1220,9 (apesi ti ... katatp
-atp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se katadvaratthakanakatp); -
0
-panantarena in Ee at Ja VI 349,2o is wr; Be, Se
vatapanantarena; Ce 0 -vatapanantarena;- 0 -pala, m., a
doorkeeper, a gatekeeper; a guard at the gate; Ja I
352,I5; Ap 44,8 (-o va satpvaro); 393,9 (nagare
Bandhumatiya -o ahos' ahatp); Mi1155,n; Spk I 214,3
(ekeko ekekatp -bahatp nissaya -a viya atthatpsu);
0
Dhp-a II 4,21 (-atp pakkositva dvaratp vi vara ti ah a); -
0
-palaka,m., id.; Abh341 (0 -ttho -o); Ap-a481,Io
(rañño gehadvare -o asitp); - 0 -bandha, m., a door-
frame; a doorway;? Sp 571,19; 783,27; - sadvara-
bandha, mfn., Sp 282,28; 286,12; - 0 -bandhana, n., a
terrace befare a house; Abh 218 (pamukhatp
dvarabandhanatp); - 0
-baha,f, a door-post; Abh 219
(pitthasailghatakadvarabaha); D II 190,5 (-atp alambitva
atthasi); Khp 7:1 (-asu tighanti); Dhp-a III 273,14 (ekatp
-atp nissaya ekatp padehi uppijetva chamaya nisinna
suttatp kantati); - sadvarabaha, sadvarabahaka, mfn.,
together with the door-post(s); Ps II 116,35
(sadvarabahatp nagarakavatatp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
-bahakatp) = Mp 111 265,4 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -bahakatp)
= Nidd-a I 86,31 (-bahakatp); - 0 -bhatta, n., food
placed befare the door; Sn 286 (Pj II 315,IIfoll.:
brahma~anatp dassama ti sajjetva tehi tehi dayakehi
attano gharadvare thapitatp bhattatp);
0
-rakkhaka, mfi-ika)n., (one) who guards the door or
the means of access; Dhp-a III 488,19 (cha dvarani
pidahitva o-rakkhikatp satitp avissajjetva); Ap-a 286,3
( -palo -o ti attho);-
0 0
-rakkhanaka, mfn., who guards
the means of access; Mp III 281 ,Io (-en' eva ña~ena, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be 0 -rakkhaken' eva); - 0 -rakkhi(n), m., a
doorkeeper, a gatekeeper; Sv 852,7 (dovarika ti -ino);
-
0
-vivaraka, m., one who opens the gate;? opening of
or in the gate; ? Th-a 11 151,26 (gajanirodhato va
niggamanaya -atp a1abhamano hatthi viya, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -vivara~atp); - 0 -sala,f a gatehouse; a room
0
over the gate; M I 382,31 (majjhimaya -aya asanani
paññapehi ti; Ps 111 93,18 foil.: yassa gharassa satta
0
-kotthaka tassa sabba-abbhantarimato va sabbabahirato
va patthaya catutthadvarakotthako); 11 61,3I;
advara, n., nota door; Sp 748,!4;- sadvara, mfn., with
a door; MI 279,12 (dve agara -a); - see also advaraka,
449 dvi
advarika, antaradvare, kayadvarika, cakkhudvarika,
chadvarika (sv cha2), pañcadvarika, manodvarika
1
(sv mana[s]), sotadvarika (sv sota ).
dvalopika, mfn. [from dvi + a1opa], living on only two
portions of alms; D I 166,II (so ekagariko hoti eka1opiko
dvagariko va hoti -o); MI 238,23 (-a).
dvasita, mfn. [from dvi + asiti], characterised by 82, plus
82; Tikap-a 237,19 (-ani attha satani).
dvasiti, num. [dvi + asiti; cfS. dvyasiti], 82; Th 1024 (-i
buddhato ga~hitp dve sahassani bhikkhuto, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -itp; Th-a 111 117,6: -i sahassani ti yojana);
Ud-a 5,2 (-i ca akkharani); Bv-a 3,16 (-iya
ñatisahassanatp); Vibh-a 297 ,s (-i khuddakavattani); -
o•-uttara, mfn.,plus 82; Cp-a 15,35 (satthi sahassani -ani
2
agha ca satani);- see also dve-asiti (sv dve ).
1
dvi, num. [S. dvi], (m.fn. nom./acc. dve (befare initial
vowels afien dv'), duve; instr.labl. dvihi; gen./dat.
dvinnatp, duvinnatp; loe. dvisu, duvesu;
2
cfSadd 287,6foll.; iic also di-, du- (du ), duv-, duvi-,
2
dva-, dve- (dve ), qqv); two; two people; two things; iic
also: twice ( cf dvi[r]); Vin I 10,Io (dve 'me bhikkhave
anta pabbajitena na sevitabba); 24,16 (Gayakassapo jati1o
dvinnatp jati1asatanatp nayako hoti); 163,s (anujanami
bhikkhave dvinnatp aññamaññatp pavaretutp); 220,34
(dve naddasa yagutp ca madhugojakatp ca); 301,19 (eko
dvisu avasesu vassatp vasi); DI 88,32 (mahapurisassa
dve gatiyo bhavanti anañña); 106,1 (dvisu
mahapurisa1akkh~esu kailkhati); II 179,7 (pokkhara~Iyo
dvihi vedikahi parikkhitta ahesutp); 259,22* (Asama ca
duve Y ama); 111 149,4* (cakkani padesu duvesu vindati);
MI 63,2 ( cattari vassani ti~i vassani dve vassani);
II 143,s• (ye 'me dvattitpsati suta mahapurisa1akkh~a
duve tesatp na passami bhoto kayasmitp Gotama);
III 1,19 (ekatp ekakatp dve duka tl~i tika ... ); 242,31
(dvinnatp katthanatp samphassasamodhana usma jayati);
SI 105,28 (ma ekena dve agamittha); III 122,1 (dvinnatp
ca devatanatp); IV 333,2o (dvihi thanehi garayho);
V 129,18 (dvinnatp phalanatp aññataratp pha1atp
patikailkhatp); A I 27,39 (yatp ekissa 1okadhatuya dve
arahanto sammasambuddha apubbatp acarimatp
uppajjeyyutp n' etatp thana~p vijjati); 53,3o (dve 'ma
bhikkhave tathagatassa dhammadesana); Dhp 294
(hantva rajano dve ca khattiye); Ud 85,5 (dve 'me
pi~"apata . . . ativiya aññehi pi~"apatehi
mahapphalatara); It 38,23* (duve 1ma cakkhumata
pakasita nibbanadhatii); Sn 48 (disva ... pabhassarani ...
sailghattamanani duve bhujasmitp); p. 87,4 (ekassa pi
dadami dvinnatp pi dadami ti~~atp pi dadami ... ); 896
(duve vivadassa pha1ani brümi); Vv 41:2 (nagassa
dantesu duvesu nimmita); Pv 7:6 (ahii mayhatp duve
putta); Ja I 49,23 (buddha... dvisu yeva ku1esu
nibbattanti); 160,Y (ekekasmitp pade dvinnatp dvinnatp
vasena aghakhuratp); 204,1* (antara dvinnam
ayujjhapuranatp); 300,4 (dve tisso velayo acariyassa
upatthana~p na gacchati); 462,15 (eko dve tayo ti
ga~etva); 504,15 (kodhena tassa purato dve t1~i vacanani
kathetutp samattho nama n' atthi); 11 73,13* (dve ca
bhinna kama~"a1ii, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tena bhinna);
III 520,28* (duve duve nandimane carante; 52l,I·foll.:
duve duve ti dve dve hutva); IV 163,4 (imahi dvihi
dvi
gathahi); 252,5 (jayampatike dve kinnare gahetva);
406,15" (mayharp dvihi akkhihi pi sabbaññutaña1_1am eva
piyataran ti); V 116,19* (dve va tata padakani yesu
sabbarp patitthitarp); 387,15* (patthodano nalam ayarp
duvinnarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee duvindarp) quoted
Sp 176,13; Patis I 26,18 (dve dhamma pahatabba avijja ca
bhavata1_1ha ca); Ap 4,23 (duve bhave pajanami); 64,21
(dve sampatti anubhotva); 312,24 (dvanisarpse
anubhomi); Dhs 58 (dvayatanani honti); Vibh 127,18
(dvindriya paccuppannaramma1_1a; Vibh-a 128,3o:
dvindriya ti dve indriya); 334,4 (dvisu jhanesu pañña
pitiphara1_1ata); Mil 318,18 (udakassa dve gu1_1a nibbanam
anupaviqha ti); Vism 103,4 (dvinnarp pana dhatünarp
ussannatta puggalo mohacarito hoti); 257,16 (dvisu
disasu jatarp); Sp 614,5 (dvinnarp aggasavakanarp
santike pabbajirpsu); 1119,2 (bhagavato ca dvisu yeva
pi1_1¡lapatesu bhajanagatesu devata ojarp pakkhipirpsu);
Sv 1041,8 (vivadadhikara1_1arp dvihi samathehi sammati);
Spk 11 23,16 (attho pana dvinnarp pi padanarp eko yeva);
Pj li 602,16 (dvih' akarehi suññato 1okarp passa);
Nidd-a 11 26,7 (majjhe ti dvinnarp antararp, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee antara); Mhv 10:91 (duve satani); 21:10
(Assanavikaputta dve); - dve katha, l. duplicitous
words; duplicity; not honouring a promise; Ps 11 206,32
(asina sise chijjante pi dve katha na katheti); Mp I 165,4
(buddhanarp dve katha nama n' atthi ti); 288,23; -
2. words of argument or dissent; Ja VI 546,1o (pitara
saddhirp dve katha na kathessaml ti); PsI 254,18
(maya . . . bhikkhuna saddhirp dve katha na
kathitapubba); - o' -ailgika, duvailgika, mfn. [from dvi
+ ailga2], consisting of two parts or factors; Dhs 425
(duvailgiko maggo hoti); Vibh 264,35 (tasmirp samaye
duvailgikarp jhanarp hoti) quoted Vism 164,16 (Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se -arp); Vism 88,10 (jhanarp .. . tivailgikarp
dutiyarp tato virattappitikarp duvailgikarp tatiyarp);
Sp 1303,17 (-ena ekena samunhanena); - O'-ailgula,
duvailgula, n. and mfn. [S. dvyailgula], (n.) the breadth
of two-fingers; (mfn.) measuring two finger-breadths;
V in 11 107,3 (na bhikkhave d!gha kesa dharetabba ...
anujanami bhikkhave dumasikarp va duvailgularp va ti;
Sp 1200,22/oll.: sace kesa antodvemase -arp papu1_1anti
antodvemase yeva chinditabba, -arp atikkameturp na
vagati, E e, Se so; Be ... -ehi atikkameturp.; Ce ... -ehi
atikkameturp); 111 246,19 (-a raji); - --kappa, m., two
finger-breadth practice; Vin li 300,31 (ko so avuso
--kappo, kappati bhante -aya chayaya vltivattaya vikale
bhojanarp bhuñjitun ti navuso kappati ti);- --kale, ind.,
when the shadow (of the kalatthambha) measures two
finger-breadths; PsI 122,20; --panna,
dvailgu1ipañña, mfn. [BHS dvyailgulaprajña], with 'two-
finger' understanding (with little understanding; or
whose understanding is in her two fingers); S I 129,16*
(yarp tarp isihi pattabbarp . . . na tarp -aya sakka
pappotum itthiya; Spk I 189,23 foll.: parittapaññaya,
yasma va dvihi ailgulehi kappasava~~irp gahetva suttarp
kantanti tasma itth! -a ti vuccati) = Th! 60 (Be, Ce so;
E e, Se dvailguli-; Thi-a 65,4 foll.: -aya nihinapaññaya
itthiya . . . itthiyo hi sattanhavassakalato paghaya
sabbakalarp odanarp pacantiyo ... pakkuthiyamane pana
ta1_1¡lu1e dabbiya uddharitva dvihi ailgu1ehi p!Jetva
450 dvi
[odanarp pakkan ti] jananti tasma -aya ti vutta, Se so;
Be, Ce, E e dvihi ailgulihi p!Jetva ... dvailgulipaññaya ti
vutta); - di-y-a44ha, di-v-a¡l¡lha, mfn. [dvi + a¡l¡lha1],
one anda ha(f, Abh 478 (-o tu diva¡l¡lho ); V in IV 119,5
(-o maso); Ja IV 469,27 (-a abhisambuddhagatha, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee --abhisambuddhagatha) ; Ap 33,17; Mil 243,1o
(-esu sikkhapadasatesu); Sp 780,25 (samanta -o hattho
upacaro); Mhv 12:53 (-arp tu sahassarp);
--kukku, mfn. [diya<l<!ha + kukku 1], measuring one and
a ha(f kukkus; Ja Ili 318,1 * ( --kukkii udayena ka1_11_1ika,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se --kukku; 318,s-: --kukkü ti --ratana);
- --yojana, n., a distance of one and a half yojanas;
Ap 420,7 (--yojane sese); - --yojanasatika, mfn.,
measuring 150 yojanas; Ja I 72,2 (Maro devaputto
--yojanasatikarp Girimekhalarp nama hatthirp
abhirühitva); Sv 481,29 (--yojanasatiko vejayantaratho );
Sadd 796,23 (a¡l¡lhena dutiyo diva¡l¡lho -o);
0
-ai.mka, n., a combination of two atoms; Vism 513,14
(na hetusamavetarp hetupha1arp samavayavad!narp
-' -adi viya; Vism-mht [Be] 11 222,16: kara1_1esu dv!su
a1_1üsu -arp phalarp) t Vibh-a 90,6;
'ádhippayika, mfn. [from dvi + adhippaya1], with two
0
possible meanings or interpretations; Sadd 725,21 (-o pi
payogo dissati yatha aggassa data medhav! ti); 753,10
(idani -arp pi samasarp vadama); 918,1/oll. (atthi padarp
-arp ... -arp hinasammatarp ice adi);- dviha, m.n. [dvi
+ aha(n)], a period of two days; D 111 89,26 (salirp ahasi
saki-d-eva -aya); S 11 192,s (pabbatarp -ena arohanti
-ena orohanti); Ja IV 481 ,2o (ekaharp -arp agamehi, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee --tiharp); Sp 1294,21 (c!vararp ekaharp va
-arp va paribhuñjitva); Sv 771,16 (-arp matassa assa ti
dv!hamatarp); Sadd 762,2s (-arp va tiharp va --t!harp);
- --tiha, m.n., a period of two or three days; Vin I
154,3o (--tiharp vasitva); DI 190,15 (--tihassa accayena);
S V 348,23 (--tiharp ~hito); Ja I 245,2s (aslviso --t!harp
niraharataya kujjhitva); Vism 244,19 (--tihena
pariyosapetabbo hoti); --paticchanna, mfn.,
concealed for two days; Vin II 51,19; - see also
ekadv!hika (sv eka); - 0 -r-avatta. o• -avana, mfn., with
two tums; with two whirlpools; ? SI 32,24* (ekamülarp
-arp ... samuddarp dvadasavanarr patalam atar! isi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se dvi-avanarp; Spk I 84,23: [ta1_1ha] dvihi
sassatucchedadighihi avagat! ti -a, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dvavatta); - o• -indriya, duvindriya, mfn.' with two
sense~faculties; Sv 161,18 (ekindriyo pa1_1o -o piil)o ti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee dvi-indriyo) = Ps Ili 120,7 (eds so) =
Spk II 341,4 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dvi-indriyo); Ps III 59,5
(ekindriyarp piil)arp -arp pa1_1an ti, Se so; Be
duvindriyarp; Ce, Ee duvindriyapa1_1an ti);- 0 -kamma,
dikamma, mfn., (gr. t. t.) having two patients, two objects;
Sadd 589,26* (ekakamma -a va); - 0
-kammaka,
dikammaka, mfn., (gr.t.t.) id.; Pj I 17,34 (ajarp gamarp
neti ti adisu viya --ttarp akkharacintaka icchanti, Be, Ce,
Se so; E e dikammakattarp); Sadd 5,22 (--vasen' esarp
attho gahetabbo ); 692,29 (-aya nayanakiriyaya); -
0
-karita, mfn., with two causative suffixes; being a
double causative; Sadd 597,23 (pariyosavapeti idarp -arp
hetukattupadarp); - 0 -kutika, mfn., consisting of two
houses; V in III 46,23 (-o pi gamo); - o -ku!ika,f, a
kind of hut; a hut for two; ? Ap-a 97,12
 451
1ekaku¡ikadviku¡ika- ... -mal)~apadivasena senasanani);
-
0
-kuc.J.c.J.aka, mfn., (a hut) with two enclosing walls;
Ja I 92,24 (in cpd, Ce, Ee so; Be -dviku¡agara-; Se
-dviku¡ika-; Ap-a 97.12: eds -dviku¡ika-);
=-(k)kula, m(jn)., belonging to two families; Ps IV 190,13
idvakku1o ti -o ti va vattabbe Bakku1o ti vuttrup, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be omits dvakku1o ti); - see also dvakku1a
S\' dva; -
0
-kñtageha, n., a building with two peaks; ?
Ps II 296,33 (sa suddhapasado va na sobhat! ti tarp
parivaretva pañca --satani pañca cil!apasadasatani ...
karapesi; t Sv 860,4: duva~~hageha- ); - o -kotika, mfn.,
having two top edges; twofold, having two forms;
Vism 653,33 (-arp suññatarp pariggal)hati); Ps IV 64,5
1-a suññata dassita); Pj I 44,9 (cattaro danta -a
dvimillika); - 0 -kkhatturp, ind., twice; Vin III 223,4;
Dukap 304,5; Mil116,3; Vism 419,11; Mhv 34:61;
Sadd 868,1o (dve vara -urp); - (di)-gal}ika, mfn.,
lgr.t.t.) belonging to two series (of roots); Sadd 595,1
(--tte); - (di)-gu, m.n. [di + gu 3; cf S. dvigu], (n.) two
cows; (m., scil. samasa) (gr.t.t.) a (tatpuru~a) compound
of which the first member is a numeral; Sadd 750,13
(-ussa samasassa ekattarp hoti napurpsaka1iilgattarp ca);
753,28foll. (sailkhyapubbo kammadharayasamaso
0
-sañño hoti, dve gavo -u 0 -sadisatta ayarp samaso -u ti
vuccati . . . atha va . . . -uno hi dve lakkhal)ani,
sañkhyapubbata ekarp 1akkhal)arp napurpsakekavacanata
ekan ti iminayarp lakkhal)advayena gato ti -il ti vuccati,
dvlhi va 1akkhal)ehi gacchati pavattatl ti -u); 759,5foll.;
- -gul).a, digul)a, du(g)gul)a, mfn. [BHS dugul)a),
0
double, doubled; of double thickness; twice as much as,
twice as many as; -arp, -ena, adv., twice; twice as much;
Vin I 185,25 (na bhikkhave digul)a upahana dharetabba;
Sp 1083,21: digul)a ti dvipatala); 289,2 (anujanami
bhikkhave... -arp sailgha¡irp, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
digul)arp); Sn 714 (na parrup digul)arp yanti; Pj II 497,31:
dugul)an ti va pa¡ho, ekamaggena dvikkhatturp
nibbanarp na yant! ti attho); Ja III 475,26 (sve digul)arp
aharissaml ti); IV 227,19 (raja ... aharp te acariyadhanrup
dassaml ti -rur dhanrup adasi, Se so; Ce digul)arp; Be
digul)adhanarp; Ee digul)arp adasi); V 309,31'
(pho¡entarp digul)arp bhujarp); 499,29' (na pal)~ita
digul)am ahu vakyarp; 500,3-joll.: ekrup vatva puna trup
visarpvadento dutiyarp vacanarp na vadanti); Mi184,19
(trup mayarp digul)arp dal)~ema ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
tassa mayarp -arp dal)~rup dadema ti); 358,17 (so
digul)arp piljrup arahati); Sp 358,12 (-rur yagubhattarp,
Ce, Ee so; Be digul)arp; Se dvegul)arp); 1206,16
(dugu1_1akaral)rup, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se duggul)a-); Dhp-a III
2,19 (raja dve cattari a¡tha so!asa ti -arp katva dapesi);
Nidd-a I 418,27 (tesu sukhitesu -arp sukhito hoti, Ce, Se
so; Be, Ee digul)arp); Sadd 796,2 (dvissa dudido: ...
digul)arp); Mhv 5:73 (raja . . . digul)ena dine dine
bhikkhil . . . anupubbena va~~hayi); 12:49 (digu1_1e
rakkhase thero mapayitva); - ifc see tad- (sv ta[d)); -
0
-gul}ita, mfn., multiplied by two; Spk III 8,2; -
0
-catu(r), dvecatu(r), num., see sv dvi(r);
0
-cattalisama, mfn., the 42nd; Ap-a486,16 (--vagge, Ee
so; Be bacattal!sama-; Ce dvacattii\lsatima-; Se dva-
cattal!sama-); - see also dvacattallsa (sv dva), dve-
cattal!satima (sv dve ), bacatta\lsam~; -
2 0
-Cara, mfn.,
dvi
going about or living in a group of two; Spk II 5,11; -
0
-carika, mfn., going about or living in a group of two;
Spk I 309,32 (ekacarikadvicarikadayo); III 5,29 (in cpd);
-
0
-ccha, num, see sv dvi(r); - 0 -ja, dija, mfn. and m.
[dvi + ja2], l. (mfn and m.) (one) who is born or
produced twice; Sn 117 (ekajrup va -arp va pi yo' dha
pal)arp vihirpsati, Be, Se so; Ce plil)ani hirpsati; Ee
dijarp ... pal)ani hirpsati; Pj II 178,17: -o ti al)~ajo so hi
matukucchito al)~akosato ca ti dvikkhatturp jayati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dijo ti); Sv 940,17 (dve vare jatatta
dijanamaka sukka sucisobhana ca danta assa ti
dijasamasukkasucisobhanadanto, Be, Ce, Se so; E e omits
danta; ad D III 178,14*); - --raja(n), m., the moon;
Sadd 380,28*; - esp. (i) a bird; Abh 624; 1047; D II
258,22* (dibba dija pakkhi visuddhacakkhil); SI 224,28*
(ma-y-ime dija viku1avaka ahesurp); Sn 1134 (-o yatha
kubbanakrup pahaya, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se dijo); Ja II
205,15* (-o dumarp kh!naphalan ti ñatva, Ce so; Be, Ee,
Se dijo); III 331,3* (na me suto va dit\ho va bhasanto
manusirp dijo); IV 347,11* (eko va seno hanti dije
pasayha); Vl518,24* (nanaval)l)a bahil dija); Mil295,19
(kissa ime manussa ca dija ca dipada miga catuppada ti);
Vv-a 163,28 (kokehi aññehi ca dijehi abhinaditarp); -
dijabhighut¡ha, mfn., filled with the song of birds; Ja V
205,16'; VI 272,2*; - dijam-pati, m. [dija + pati2;
influenced by disampati qv sv disa, and me], chief of
birds; Ja V 450,11* (451,r: dijampat! ti dijajeghakrup
Ku1_1a!arp alapati, Be so; Ce, Ee dijaset¡hakrup; Se
dijajeghakakul)alarp); - dijapota, m., a young bird;
Mhv 21: 19; - (ii) a brahman; Abh 408 (brahmabandhu
-o vippo); 1047; Ap 507,10 (Vacchagotto -o tassajayaya
aham okkamim, Ce so; Be, Se dijo; Ee Vacchagotto ti
Jotissa); 583,10 (Kapilassa dijass' asirp dhita); 611,25
(sotthiyarp dijam addasrup); Mhv 5:135 (dijo);- (iii) a
tooth; Abh 261 (-o lapanajo danto); 1047; Ap-a 488,27
(kumaravaye ughitadantanarp patitatta puna ughitadanta
dija); - ifc see cattañsa-; - see also duvija (sv duvi);
- 2. (mfn.) born from two things; Vism 451,37 (yarp
pana cittato ca ututo ca jatarp tarp -arp nama); -
0
-jati, m(jn). [dvi + jati 1], having two births; a brahman;
Thi 430 (annena ca panena ca tappaya samal)e -1 ca;
Thi-a 24 7,33: -1 ti brahmal)ajat!); see also
purohitadijati(n) (sv purohita); - 0
-jivha, dujivha,
dujjivha, mfn. and m. [S. dvijihva), l. (mfn.) double-
tongued; false-tongued; Abh 1068 (-o silcakahisu); A III
260,32 (pañc' ime bhikkhave ad!nava kal)hasappe ...
ghoraviso dujivho ... , Ce, Se so; Be, Ee dujjivho); 261,7
(tatr' idrup bhikkhave matugamassa dujivhata
yebhuyyena bhikkhave matugamo piSUI)avaco, Ce, Se
so; Be, Ee dujjivhata); Ja III 347,16* (pass' e!amilgarp
uragarp -arp, Ce so; Ee dijivharp; Be, Se dujivharp)
quoted Psi 118,11 (Ee, Se so; Be dujjivharp; Ce
dujivharp); Ja V 425,14 (nariyo ... dujivhayo, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se dujjivhayo); 425,20* (dujivha urago yatha, Be, Ce
so; Ee dujjivha; Se dujjivha); 447,13' (pisul)ataya
dujivhata, Be, Ce so; Se dujjivhata; Ee dujivhata);
Cp 2:10:1 (da¡havudho ghoraviso -o uragadhibhil;
Cp-a 175,13: nagayonisiddhahi dv1hi jivhahi
samannagato ti -o); Sv 938,29 (ye pharusavaca honti
te . . . baddhajivha va honti gu!hajivha va -a va); -
dvi
2. (m.) a snake; Abh 654 (-o urago);1068; Ja V 82,4*
(dujivha, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dujivha; 82,14": dujivha ti
Pal)<;larakanagmp alapati); 84,12*; Nidd I 8,5 (jivha tassa
duvidha ti -o, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dujivho); - see also
dvirasaññu below;- 0 -tthanika, mfn., belonging to two
stages or positions; Tikap-a 275.26;- 0 -tala, mfn. [dvi +
tala 1], measuring the height of two palm-trees;
-a~. ind., to the height of two palm-trees; MI 187,26
(-a~ pi udaka~ sal)rhati) f. A IV 10!,25; Ja VI 220,!9"
(ekatalmp -a~... vehasa~ abbhuggantva);
0
-tiyojanika, mfn., two or three yojanas in extent; Ja IV
485,7 (-a~ parisa~ gahetva, E e so; Be, Ce, Se
dviyojanika~); - -tta, n., doubling; reduplication;
0
Sadd 620,2o (parassa -mp rhane); 636,!9 (puggalavacino
asavassa sassa -a~); 826,4 (adibhütassa vai_li_lassa
ekasarassa kvaci -mp hoti: titikkhati jigucchati ... );
854,22 (tapaccayassa ca -mp hoti);- 0 -tta, ind., see sv;
0
- -ttikkhattmp, ind., two or three times; Vin III
221,33; Ja VI 567,26·; - ifc see ünaka-; - see also
dvattikkhattu~ (sv dva); - 0
-tticatukkhaJ}.{laka, mfn.,
consisting of two, three or four pieces; Sp 1111,27 (-en a,
Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -khal).<;!ena); - 0
-dugama,
0
-duggama, mfn., a quadruped;? Sv 940,! (dv!hi dv!hi
gacchat! ti -o, dv!hi dv!hi catühi);
--varatarahanutta, n., the having the jaw of the best of
quadrupeds; D III 176,4* (--varatarahanuttam alattha,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dviduggama-; read duvidugama- with
K.R. Norman, 1984, p. 178 ?; Sv 940,Ifoll.:
catuppadana~ varatarassa s!hasseva hanubhavmp alattha
ti attho) quoted Sadd 75,!6 (dviduggama-); - 0 -dha,
duvidha, dvedha, ind. [S. dvidha], in two parts; in two
ways; on two sides; Vin I 149,2o (gamo dvedha
bhijjittha); III 74,18 (puthusila -a bhinna apparisandhika
hoti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dvedha); D II 341,3 (aral)isahitmp
-a phalesi); 343,6 (maya~ immp sattha~ -a
vibhajeyyama); MI 114,26/oll. (yannünaha~ -a katva
-a katva vitakke vihareyyan ti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
dvedha); Ja II 176,!9 (kacchapo akasailgai_le patitva
dvedha bhinno ti); III 458,21 * (jivha tassa -a hoti
uragasseva); IV 77,3o· (na esa maya saddhi~ bhijjitva -a
bhavissatl ti); 101,8 (nesa~ parisa ... -a jata); V 145,5·
(mahasatto parhavi~ -a bhinditva ta~ niraymp
dassetva); 197,14 (suvai_li_lac!rake -a gate ); 203,9•
(dvedha siro sadhuvibhattarüpo; 206,II·: tassa sisa~
dvedha katva baddhanmp jarana~ vasena sunhu
vibhattarüpa~); VI 469,28" (dakarakkhaso udakmp -a
katva nikkhamitva); Nidd I 232,29 (kathmp ime nana
as su ... dvedha assu dvejjha assu dve pakkha as su ... ) =
385,14 (eds dvidha); Mil 339,!9 (upagatmp . . . -a
chindissami); Vism 479,9 (sailkhepato vittharato ca ti
eva~ -a darthabbato); 680,28 (saddha indriyabalavasena
dvedha rhita); Sp 1368,2! (tasmi~ vihare sailgho -a
bhijjati); Bv-a 103,18 (advejjhavacana ti dvedha
appavattavacana, ekmpsavacana ti attho); Mhv 37:170
(hadaya~ phalita~ -a); Sadd 803,23 (dvlhi vibhagehi -a
eva~ dvedha duvidha); - --karal)a, dvedha-karal)a, n.,
dividing in two; Dhatup 382 (chida dvedhakaral)e) f.
Sadd 472,13; c/543,27: anekasatadha chedana~ pi
--karal).mp yeva); - --patha, m., l. a place where two
roads meet, a fork in the road; a divided path; M I
452 dvi
142,28/oll. (abhikkhal).anto sumedho ... addasa
--patha~, --patho bhadante ti . . . ukkhipa --patha~
abhikkhal).a sumedha); 144,Is (-o ti ... vicikicchay' etmp
adhivacanmp); S III I08,2o (dakkhissasi --patha~ tattha
vammp muñcitva dakkhil).a~ gal).hahi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
dvedha-); Dhp 282 (eta~ dvedhapatha~ ñatva bhavaya
vibhavaya); Ud 90,19 (addasa ... antaramagge --patha~,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dvedha-; Ud-a 425,II; --pathan ti
--bhütmp magga~, dvedhapathan ti pi parhanti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee dvedhapathan ti --bhüta~ ... --pathan ti pi
parhanti); Ja IV 316,5 (--pathe thita, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
dvedha-); VI 67,w• (aymp dvedhapatho); Vism 313,1
(dvedhapatha~ patva); - 2. doubt, uncertainty; Nidd I
414,23 (vimati vicikiccha dve~haka~ dvedhapatho;
Nidd-a I 429,2o: paripattinivi'iral)ena --patho viya ti
dvedhapatho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dvedhapatho viya ti) f.
Dhs 425 f. Vibh 168,3 (Ce, E e, Se so; Be dvidha- );
Nidd-a I 18,2! (niyogavacana~ --pathapa!ikkhepo); -
--pavatta-lhitika, mfn. where activity functions in two
ways; Sp 174,24/oll. (dv!hitika ti --pavatta-lhitika ...
dvidha pavatta citta-iriya citta-lha); - 0
-nava, num. see
sv dvi(r); - 0
-pa, m. [dvi + pa3], an elephant; Abh 360
(nago -o); Sadd 346,¡•;- 0 -pañca, num., see sv dvi(r);
-
0
-pad, mf(n.), having two feet, a biped; SI 6,22*
(khattiyo -a~ segho, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dipadmp); -
0
-pada, dipada, mf(n)., l. having two feet, a biped;
Abh 1 (buddho ... dipaduttamo ); S V 41,23 (satta apada
va -a va catuppada va, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dipada) quoted
Mil217,3 (Be so; Ce, Ee dipada; Se dvippada); A I 22,25
(ekapuggalo ... -anmp aggo, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dipadana~); Sn 690 (-anam uttamo, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dipadanam); Vv 64:30 (santappayitva -anam uttammp,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dipadanam); Ja II 216,!3 (sabbaññü
-ana~ aggo Mahagotamo, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dipadana~); III 265,25* (catuppad! tvmp kalyal).i
dvipadahmp manorame, Be, Ce, Se so; E e catuppada ...
dipadaha~); Mi1295,19 (manussa ca dija ca -a, Be so;
Ce, Ee dipada; Se dvippada); Spk I 33,33 (esa
sabbasattasertho -esu yeva uppajjati); - 2. consisting of
two parts; of two padas, of two verse-sections; A Ill
416,23 (ko ekapadmp -a~ janati imassa dukkhassa
nirodhaya ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dipada~; Mp III 408,!9:
ekapadamanta~ va --manta~ va, Be, Se so; Ce dipada-;
Ee dipadamattmp, prob. wr); Nidd-a I 30l,Io (-a~ pi
tipadmp pi catuppada~ pi puccha~ racayitva, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce dipadmp pi); Sadd 760,2 (-o bahubb!hi); - see
also dupada (sv du 2); - o -panna in Ee at S I 170,2! • is
wr, prob. for dupal).I_la (Be, Ce, Se so); -
0
-padaka, dipadaka, mf(n)., having two feet; a biped;
Vin II 110,Io* (apadakehi me metta~ mettmp -ehi me,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dipadakehi) = A II 72,32* (Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se dipadakehi) = Ja II 146,!* (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dipadakehi); Vin III 52,21 (-a~ nama manussa
pakkhajata); Sn 205 (-o 'ymp asuci duggandho
parih!rati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dipadako) = Th 453 (Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se dipadako);- 0 -pitaka, n. and m(jn)., l. (n.)
two pi!akas; Sp 875,17 (--dharo pi); Sv 505,2! (ye ca
bahussuta tipirakadhara --dhara ekapirakadhara); -
2. (mfn.) (one) who knows two pirakas; Vism 62,7
(tipitakassa ... -assa ... ); - 0 -porisa, mfn., -a~, ind.,
 453
measuring the height of two men; to the height of two
men; MI 187,31 (-a111 pi udak~ sa¡;¡thati) i= A IV 102,3;
Sp 1033,28 (ekaporisa va -a va ti chaya metabba); -
0
-bhliva, m., doubling; Sadd 494,4 (tappaccayassa -o
bhavati);- see also dvebhava (sv dve 2);- 0 -bhümika,
dvi-bhümaka, mfn., of two storeys; Sp 782,26 (-a kuti,
Be, Se so; Ce -a kutika; Ee --kutika); Dhp-a I 182,6
1-a111 geha111 karapetva, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce o -bhümak~);
-
0
-matta, mfn., (gr.t.t.) having a duration of two
matra; Sadd 605,22 (aññe -a digha); - 0 -mlisa, n., see
dvemasa (sv dve 2); - 0
-mlisika, mfn., see dvemasika
lsv dvé); - 0
-mülaka, dumülaka, dvimülika, mfn.,
having two roots; having two bases; Vin III 97,5
ldumülaka111 pi timülak~ pi catumülaka111 pi ... );
Vism 251,12 (ekeko [danto] -o dvikotiko); Sv 1050,13
lpa¡;tatipato dosamohavasena -o hoti); Pj I 44,9 (cattaro
danta dvikotika dvimülika); - o -yojana, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) two yojanas in extent; Ps II 122,22 (cetiy~
karissama ... -~ ... hotü ti); - 2. (n.) a distance of
two yojanas; Ja II 333,11; Vism 634,12;
0
-yojanasatika, mfn., measuring 200 yojanas; Vin II
238,17 (attabhava -a pi); MI 187,18 (-ani pi udakani);
Sv 487,3 (maccho -o);- 0 -yojanika, mfn., two yojanas
in extent; Ja IV 485,7 (-~parís~ gahetva, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee dvitiyojanik~); - 0 -ratta, diratta, duratta3, n.,
diratti,f [dvi + ratta2, ratti; cf S. dviratra], a period of
two nights (or days); Jai 413,13* (ekaratt~ -al11 va
dukkh~ vasati verisu, Ce so; Be, Ee diratta111; Se
dviratti111); V 216,2* (ekaratta111 -~ va bhaveyya111
Ahiparako, Ce, Se so; Be diratt~; Ee diratti111);
Sadd 287,14* (-a111); 796,2 (dvissa dudido: duratt~
diratta111); - 0 -rada, dirada, m(fn)., two-tusked; an
elephant; Abh 360 (-o gajo); Ap 536,16 (garu!a111 -~
siha111 vinadant~ ca dassayi); Bv-a210,33 (--varo);
211,14 (diradavara111); Sadd 345,33*; - 0
-rasaññu,
dirasaññu, m(fn)., double-tongued, a snake; Ja VI 206,12*
(ko ta111 subhikkh~ -u kuriya, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dirasaññu; 209,14' foil.: dvihi jivhahi rasaJanana-
samattha); Nidd I 8,6 (dvihi jivhahi ras~ sayati ti -ü,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dirasaññü); Sadd 466,27; -
0
-liñga, mfn., (gr.t.t.) of two genders; Sadd 114,16
(apasaddassa ... --tan' atthi); 255,7 (atthasaddo -o);-
0
-vacana, n. and mfn., l. (n.) (i) (gr.t.t.) the dual case
(and its endings); Sadd 92,16foll. (kasma pana imasmi111
pakara¡;¡e -a111 na vutta111); 298,9 (ettha -a111
chaMetabba111 buddhavacane tadabhavato );
(Ü) repetition; Sp 400,27;- 2. (mfn.) (gr.t.t.) having two
numbers; Sadd 10,35* (attilii:tga111 -a111 tad akhyatan ti
vuccati); - 0
-Vassa, mfn., of two years standing;
Ud-a 266,14; see also duvassa (sv du 2);
0
-Vassika, mfn., two-year-old; being at the age of two
years; Ja VI 5,28 (--daraka nama phalaphala111 piyayanti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee darakan~ ... pi y~ hoti ti); Nidd I
120,15 (-o pi . . . cavati marati, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
dvevassiko); - see also duvassika (sv du 2), dvevassika
(sv dvé); - 0 -Vlica, dvevaca, n., two sayings, two
sentences; Ja V 257,17* (ekavac~ pi-~ bha¡;¡eyya, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee dvevacam); - see also dvevacika
(sv dvé); - o -vliratp, ini, se e dvevara111 (sv dve 2); -
0
-Vidha, ind., see duvidha (sv du 2); - 0 -vedana, mfn.,
dvi(r)
see duvedana (sv du 2); - 0 -sakliraka, mfn., having a
double letter "s"; Th-a II 277,27 (dhurassaho ti ...
gathasukhatth~ e' ettha -o niddeso kato, Ee so; Be Se
0
-sak:arato; Ce dhurasaho ti... digharakarako); -
0
-sata, n. num. [dvi + sata 1], 200; Mil114,26; Spk III
34,13; Th-a III 203,3 (-a111 catusarrhi ca mahathera);
Sadd 801,5; - -' -uttara, mfn., plus 200; Th-a III 209,3o
(-' -uttara111 sahassa111);- see also dvesata (sv dve2); -
0
-sandhi, mfn., with two junctions; with two breaks;
Vism 584,15;- -samutthlinika, mfn., having a twofold
0
origin; originating from two; Vin V 88,22•; Nidd-a I
13,29;- 0 -sahassa, n. and mf(-I)n.(?), l. two thousand;
oftwo thousand; M III 101,16 (-o brahma; cf101,19foll.:
pañcasahasso . . . brahma pañcasahassilokadhatu111
pharitva adhimuccitva viharati) quoted Sadd 459,12; Ps II
408,34 (-an~ ... brahman~); Pj I 133,s (catunn~
mahadipana111 -ana111 parittadipana111 ca);
2. [cf BHS dvisahasra] (according to cts) of a million
(cakkavajas); A I 228,5 (yavat' Ananda sahassi cüjanika
lokadhatu tava sahassadha loko aya111 vuccat' Ananda -I
majjhimika lokadhatu; Mp II 341 ,Io: aya111
sahassacakkavajani sahassabhagena ga¡;¡etva dasa-
satasahassacakkavajaparima¡;ta -I); Nidd I 356,18 H111 pi
majjhimik~ lokadhatu111 passeyya);
--kkhattu111, ind., 2000 times; S I 147,23;
--(t)thama, mfn., having the strength for, able to bear, a
weight of 2000 (palas); Ps II 52,6foll. (daJhadhanu nama
--ttham~ vuccati, --tthama111 nama yassa aropitassa
jiyabaddho lohasisadin~ bharo da¡;¡9e gahetva yava
ka¡;¡thappama¡;ta ukkhittassa pathavito muccati, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be ka¡;¡9appama¡;ta; Ps-pr [Be] II 38,27: --pala111
lohadibhar~ vahitu111 samatth~ --thama111) = Spk II
225,7 foil. = Mp IV 200,21 foil.; - 0 -hatthagayha, mfn.,
to be grasped by two hands; Pv-a 46,24 (kesa ... -a, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dvehattha gayha, prob. wr); - 0 -hetuka,
duhetuka, mfn., with two root-causes; with two moral
conditions; Vism 475,33 (bhavanamaya pi duhetuka
ojarika); Sv 509,17 (patisandhisañña pana nes~ tihetuka
pi -a pi ahetuka pi hoti) = Mp IV 25,24 (Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se duhetuka); Bv-a 191,27 (duhetuka sugatigamino
honti); As 213,5 (kamavacarakusa1a111 duhetuka111 pi
tihetuk~ pi hoti);- see also ekadve, dvasiti.
dvi(r), ind. [S. dvis], twice; S I 117,2* (pabbatassa
suva¡;¡¡;¡assa ... kevalo dvi-ttava nala111 ekassa, so Sadd
index; Be, Ce, Ee dvitta va; Se dvita va; Spk I 181,13:
pabbatassa ti pabbato bhaveyya, dvitta va ti tirrhatu eko
pabbato dvikkhattu111 pi tava mahanto suva¡;¡¡;¡apabbato
ekassa nal~ na pariyatto ti attho) quoted Dhp-a IV
32,19*; dvir-utta, mfn. [S. dvirukta], repeated;
Sadd 41,1 (--vasena); 265,s (--bhavapajjanato); -
dvir-utti,f [S. dvirukti], repetition; Sadd 285,16 (-i); -
(dvi)-catu(r), dvecatu(r), num., two times four, eight; -
dvicaturai:tgagami(n), mfn. [gami(n) 1], which moves with
eight constituent parts; ? which leads those with eight
characteristics; ? Th 520 (siva111 dvecaturai:tgagamin~
magguttama111 ... passitva, me; Th-a II 219,17:
sammadirrhi-adina111 vasena dvicaturai:tge hutva ariye
nibbana111 gameti ti ... gathasukhatth~ e' ettha vibhatti-
alopo kato darrhabba111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -ai:tgo; orto
dvi ?); - (dvi)-ccha, num. [dvi(r) + cha2; or to dvi],
dvika
twice six, twelve; Abh 195;- (dvi)-nava, num. [dvi(r) +
nava2; or to dvi], twice nine, 18; Ap 148,5; -
(dvi)-pañca, num. [orto dvi], twice five, ten; Mhv 38:77
(ammanehi -ahi).
dvika, n.· [cfS. dvika], a set of two, a dyad; Kkh 2 303,14
0
(anaññe -dukka~aiTI; ~fVin IV 249,!7foll.); Sadd 801,5
(satassa -a~T~ dvisat3IT1); - see also duka.
dvitta, dvita, ind. [S. dvita ? or to dvi(r) qv ?], doubly so;
twofold; indeed, certainly; S I 117,2* (pabbatassa
suval).I).assa ... keva1o -a va nill3IT1 ekassa, Be, Ce, E e
so; Se dvita; Spk I 181,13: pabbatassa ti pabbato
bhaveyya, -a va ti tighatu eko pabbato dvikkhattu~T~ pi
tava mahanto suval).I).apabbato ekassa nill3IT1 na pariyatto
ti attho) quoted Dhp-a IV 32,19*.
dvindriya, mfn., see sv dvi.
dviha, m.n., see sv dvi.
dvihika, mfn. [from dv!ha qv sv dvi; cf BHS dvlhika,
dvehika], coming every third day; missing two days; D I
166,14 (ekahika~T~ pi ahar3IT1 ahareti -a~T~ pi ahar3IT1
ahareti; Sv-p~ I 463,4foll.: abhuñjanavasena eko aho
etassa atthl ti ekahiko ah aro ... -an ti ad!su pi eso nayo)
f. MI 78,3 f. Nidd I 416,25.
dvihitika, mfn., se e sv duhitika.
dve\ nom./acc. of dvi qv.
dve 2-, [iic for dvi qv; cfdva], two;- 0 -akkhikal}a, mfn.,
blind in both eyes; Sp 1030,23 (-o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
dvi-);- 0 -asiti,f num., 82; Ap 159,23 (kappana~T~-iya);
Sp 225,28 H mahavattani); Sv 24,7 H suttanta udanan ti
veditabba~T~); - see also dvaslti; - 0 -catu(r), see
dvicatu(r) (sv dvi[r]); °Catta!Jsa, 0 -Cattalisa,
0
-cattañsa,f num., 42; Vin V 215.25 (-a nissaggiya, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -cattañsa); DII 188,17 (-3ITI
nagasahassani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -cattarlsarp);
Ap 238,22 (in uddana: -a gathayo ); Vism 82,3o (-a honti,
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee dva-); Vibh-a24,24 (-a cittani
uppajjanti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se dva- ); - se e also
dvacatta)!sa (sv dva), bacatta)!sa;
0
-cattalisatima, mfn., the 42nd; Mhv (11) p. 54,6*
(Dvirajako nama -o paricchedo); see also
dvicattilllsama (sv dvi), bacattajlsama; - 0 -dha, ind.,
see dvidha (sv dvi); - 0
-navuta, mfn., the 92nd;
Ap 111,7 (-e ito kappe bodhi~T~ ropes' aharp tada);
Bv 18:13 (-e ito kappe ayaiTI buddho bhavissati, Be, Ee
so; Ce ito -e; Se dva- ); - see also dvanavuta (sv dva);
0
- -navuti, num., 92; Vin 11 288,1o (-i pacittiye
~hapetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -i~T~): IV 1,4 (-i pacittiya
dhamma); Ap 111,23 (in uddana: gatha -1 tatha); Sp 14,14
(-i sikkhiipadani pacittiyan1 ti ~hapesurp);
--kappa, m.n., the 92nd aeon; Ja I 40,21 (ito --kappe
buddho bhavissasl ti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se dvanavuti- );
Dhp-a I 100,17; - see also dvanavuti (sv dva); -
0
-paññasa 1, dvepal).I).asa, num., 52; Vin I 156,17 (imamhi
khandhake vatthüni dvep3I).I).asa); PsI 50,3 (-aya nayehi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --nayehi); Th-a I 3,14 (-a gatha, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dvepal).I).asa); - see also dvapaññasa
(sv dva); - 0
-paññasa 2 , mfn., the 52nd; Ap 454,13
(phaladayakavaggo -o, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
dvepaññasamo); - 0
-paññasama, mfn., the 52nd;
Ap-a 490, 10; - o -patha, m., a place where two roads
meet; a double path; Vv 53:17 ( -arp agamasi~T~
454 dve
coramajjhe; ~fVv-a 241,7: -an ti dvinnarp
gamas1manarp vemajjhabhütarp patharp);
0
-pitika, mfn., having two fathers; Ja V 424,17 (Kal).ha
-a; 427,1r: -a ti Kosa1arañño Kasirañño cavasen' etarp
vutta~T~); -
0
-pñte in Ee, Se at Sp 1026,21 is prob. wr;
perhaps read dvepu~e, but Be, Ce omit;- 0 -bhava, m.,
l. doubling; Sadd 509,13 (yakarassa -o); 620,2o (saramha
parassa vyañjanassa -o hoti ~hane: idha ppamiido );
690,10; - 2. [cf S. dvaibhiivya], duality; separation into
two; Sadd 804,13 (bhiivatthe dvisaddato ~hakapaccayo
hoti -o dve~hak3IT1); - see also dvibhava (sv dvi); -
o -matubhatika, m., a half-brother; Ap-a 122,24* (-arp
pubbe dhanahetu hanirp aha~T~, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr;
Be, Se vematubhatar3ITI) quoting Ap 300,3 (Be, Ce, Se
vematubhataram; Ee wr dvematabhataro); - 0 -masa,
dvimasa, n. [dv~ + masa2], a period oftwo months; D III
89,11 (te masaiTI pi -arp pi na labhanti giimaiTI ...
pavisiturp); Cp 1:1 :9 (-a~T~, Be, Ce, E e so; Se dvi- );
Vism 616,18 (dibba pana oja ekamasarp -a~T~ pi
upatthambheti); Sp 1200,24 (-ato, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
dvi-);- 0 -masika. dvimasika, mfn., being at the age of
two months; two-months-old; Pv 6:7 (-o gabbho);
Nidd I 120,11 (-o pi temasiko pi ... cavati marati, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se dvi- ); Cp-a 224,3 (--ka1ato paghaya, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se dvi-); - see also dumasika (sv du 2); -
0
-yama, n., the length of two watches of the night;
Spk III 52,18 (-3ITI dhammasane nisldi);
0
-Vassasatayuka, mfn., having a life-span of 200 years;
D 111 70,22;- 0 -vassasahassayuka, mfn., having alife-
span of 2000 years; D III 70,2; - o -vassika, mfn., l. of
two years' standing; (one) who has been ordained for
two years; Spk 11 177,22 (ekavassikadvevassika
bhikkhü); - 2. being at the age of two years; Nidd I
120,15 (-o pi ... cavati marati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dvi- );
Nidd-a I 249,11 (-'-iid!su, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
duvassikiidisu); see also duvassika (sv du 2),
dvivassika (sv dvi); - 0 -Vaca, n., see dvivaca (sv dvi);
-
0
-vacika, mfn., using or involving two utterances or
proclamations; Vin I 4,26 (te va loke pa~hamarp upasaka
aheSUITi -a; Sp 960,35: dve vaca etesaiTI ahesun ti -a,
atha va dvlhi vacahi upasakabhav3IT1 patta ti attho );
170,35 (-aya [pavaral).aya]); Sp 875,11 ( ... tevacika -a
samanavassika pavaral).a ti nava paviir3I).ayo); Sv 474,18
(bhagavanta~T~ saral).aiTI gacchama dhammaiTI ca ti
sailghassa aparipUI).I).atta -arp eva sar31).3ITI agamarpsu );
- -3ITI, adv., using two utterances or proclamations; ?
Vin I 168,21 (bhikkhü nasakkhi~T~su -a~T~ pavaretu~T~):-
0
-varaip, dvivaraiTI, ind., twice; Vism 387,s (ekaviir3IT1
-3ITI samapajjitu~T~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dvi-): 591,13
(ekavararp -a~T~ plJanamattena); Sp 592,12;
0
-visati(Ip), num., 22; Vin V 147,18 H khuddaka);
Sp 73,3 foll. (Asokassa putta .. . -i vassani rajjarp
karesurp, tesaiTI pacchato nava Nanda -im eva); - see
also dvavlsati (sv dva), bavlsati; - 0 -satthikappa, m.,
the 62nd aeon; Ap 213,18 (ito -amhi); - see also
dvatthi, dvasatthi (sv dva); - 0
-sata, n. num. [dve
+ s~ta 1 ], 200; MÚ 419,17 (dvasaghi-adhika -a);- ifc see
aslti-; - see also dvisata (sv dvi); - 0 -sattaratta, n.
[satta4], 14 nights; Ja VI 230,24* (tato -assa; 230,32·:
-assa ti cuddasame divase; or to dve 3 qv); -
dve
0
-sattati, num. and mfn., l. 72; Vin V 145,9 (-i ca
sekhiya); A IV 139,1o H yeva bhattasahassani bhuñjati,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -il!l yeva); Patis I 162,6 (-i ... ña!fani);
Ap 412,14* (in uddana: -i ca gathayo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dvesatal!l e' eva);- 2. (mfn.) the 72nd; Ap 55,22 (-imh'
ito kappe, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -i ito) -t 186,8 (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -i ito kappe); - see also dvasattati (sv dva); -
0
-hattha in Ee at Pv-a 46,24 (dvehattha gayha) is prob.
wr for dvihatthagayha (Be, Ce, Se so).
dve 3 , ind. [cf S. dvis], twice; Sn 1116 (dvahal!l Sakkal!l
apucchissal!l; or dvi(r) + ah~; Pj II 601,3o: dvahan ti
dve vare ah~, SO hi pub be . . . dvikkhattUI!l
bhagavantal!l pucchi); Th 753 (dve ca pannarasayutal!l;
Th-a IIl 29,15: dvikkhattul!l pannarasabhedavantan ti
attho);- 0 -sattaratta, n., 14 nights; Ja VI 230,24* (tato
2 vicikiccha ca); Nidd I 414,22 (vimati vicikiccha -~
-assa; 230,32': -assa ti cuddasame divase; orto dve ); -
see also dvi(r).
dveijha, dvijjha, n. and mfn. [cf S. dvaidha, dvaidhya],
l. (n.) the possibility of two sides or interpretations;
ambiguity; doubt, uncertainty; A IIl 403,10 (kathal!l hi
nama yal!l maya ekal!lsena vyakat~ 'tattha -al!l
apajjissati; Mp III 405,13: -an ti dvidhabhaval!l);
Sadd 803,26 (dvidha karoti dvijjhal!l); - 2. (mfn.)
separated into two sides; Nidd I 232,29 (kathal!l ime
nana assu ... dvedha as su -a assu dve pakkha as su ... );
- o -vacana, n., speaking with ambiguity or uncertainty;
Ps V 44,2 (saddaham' ahal!l mayh~ sahayakassa tassa
maya saddhil!l -al!l nama n' atthi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
yujjhal!l nama); - adveijha, mfn., unambiguous;
certain; not disunited; Ja IV 76,22* (--ta suhaday~
maman ti; 77 ,29' foil.: --ta ti --taya, na esa maya
saddhil!l bhijjitva dvidha bhavissaU ti ev~ --bhavena
yal!l janati); Patis-a 544,18 (n' atth' ettha dvejjhan ti -o);
Sadd 782,5 (manaso -o; quoting Ja III 7,21*: Ce, Ee
adejjho; Be, Se abhejjo); - --gami(n), mfn., related to
what is unambiguous, to certainty; Ps Ili 116,21
(aviruddho --gaml ekal!lsagahiko); - --manasa, rr~:fn.,
with unwavering, undoubting mind; Ja I 22,35*
(--manaso sambodhüp papu!fissasi) = Bv 2:142; -
--vacana, mfn. and n., l. (ffl:fn.) speaking without
uncertainty; of unambiguous speech; Ja I 19,20*
( --vacana buddha) = Bv 2:109 (Ev-a 103,18: dvedha
appavattavacana, ekal!lsavacana ti attho); Nidd-a I 18,18
dh
dha\ m. [ts], the sound 'dh'; the consonant 'dh';
Sadd 604,2o (ta tha da dha na); 606,1; 623,7 (dho dassa:
kammasadhammal!l); -
0
-kara, m., the letter or sound
'dh'; Sv 483,3foll. (Kammasadhamm an ti ettha keci
-assa dakarena atthal!l va!f!fayanti ... keci pana -en' eva
atthal!l Va!f!fayanti) =PsI 226,31 foil.
dha 2, ind. [= idha qv following a final vowel; but see
K.R. Norman, 1969, pp. 169 foil. for the possibility of a
455 dha
( --vacana buddha ti adisu viya vimatipatikkhepo );
Sadd 803,27 (na dvidha vacanal!l etesan ti advijjhavacana
buddha); - 2. (n.) an expression of certainty; Nidd I
2,26 (addha ti ekal!lsavacan~ . . . --vacanal!l
adveJhakavacanmp) -t Patis Il 21,10; - --vaca, mfn.,
speaking without ambiguity or duplicity; D III 171,10*
1
(--vaco alikal!l vivajjayi);- se e also adejjha .
dvedhikajata, mfn. [cf S. dvaidha, dvaidh!Ybhii], holding
two opinions; separated into two sides; D III 117,6
(niga!ftha -a bha!f<;fanajata ka1ahajata vivadapanna, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se dveJhakajata; Sv 905,1o: dvejjhajata dve
bhaga jata, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dvedha jata) = M II 243,2o
(Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dveJhaka-);- see also dveJhakajata.
dve!haka, n. [cf S. dvaidha], the possibility of two sides or
opinions; ambiguity, doubt, uncertainty; Abh 170 (-~
dvedhapatho; Nidd-a I 429,2o: patipattinivara!fena
--patho viya ti dvedhapatho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
dvedhapatho viya ti; = As 259,29foll.: Be, Se so; Ce
--patho viya ti --patho; Ee dvedhapatho viya ti) -t
Dhs 425 -t Vibh 168,3; Ap 332,3 (vimatil!l -al!l vapi
sañchindasi mahamune); Patis-a 544,19 (dvidha ca1ayati
kampeU ti -al!l. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dvidha e1ayati);
Sadd 804,13 (bhavatthe dvisaddato Jhakapaccayo hoti
dvebhavo -al!l);
0
-jata, mfn., l. holding two
opinions; separated into two sides; Nidd I !08,10
(bhinnesu dvejjhapannesu --jatesu nanaditthikesu ... );
It-a 70,32 (ubhatopakkhiyan~ --jatanal!l bhikkhunal!l);
Ap-a 235,12 (vivadamana --jata vivadanti); Ev-a 157,4
(vinicchay~ katul!l asakkonta ... deva ... brahmano ca
--jata dvidha ahesul!l); - see also dvedhikajata; -
2. ajj'ected by doubt; Nidd I 38,28 (vimatipakkhanna -a);
Sp 56,26 (raja -o); Sv 68,29;- adve!haka, n. and mfn.,
(n.) lack of ambiguity or doubt; certainty; (mfn.) certain;
without doubt; Patis-a 544,19 (n'atth' ettha dveJhakan ti
-o; ad Patis Il 21,11: --vacanal!l); - --vacana, n., an
expression of certainty; Nidd I 2,27 (addha ti
ekal!lsavacan~ . . . advejjhavacanal!l --vacanal!l;
Nidd-a I 18,19: dvihadayabhavena -~. iti hasa ti
dveJhakapatikkhepavacan~) -t Patis II 21,11;
nidveJhaka, mfn., free from doubt; Nidd II 118,10; -
sadveJhaka, mfn., doubting; Nidd II 118,10.
particle dha], here, in this place; in this world; in this
existence; in this teaching; S I 182,20* (yo dha puññal!l
ca papal!~ ca bahetva) = Dhp 267 (Dhp-a III 393,5: yo
idha sasane); Dhp 409 (yo dha dighal!l va rass~ va
a!fUI!lthiil~ subhasubhal!l) = Sn 633 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
yo ca); Dhp 415 (yo dha kame pahatvana anagaro
paribbaje) = Sn 639 (Pj II469,22: yo pugga1o idha 1oke);
Th 237 (yo dha koci manussesu parapii!fani hil!lsati); Ja I
dhaq¡
474,9• (yo dha paññaya gadhati; 474,12': yo puggalo idha
sattaloke); Vism 14,31' (yo dha sevati dusslle).
dhaip, ind. [onomat.], a dull sound; Ja I 287,25 (pharasu!Tl
adaya ... [katthariipakassa] glvayam eva paharitva -an ti
sadde uppanne rukkhabhav~ aññasi, Be so; Ce, Ee tan
ti; Se thaddhasadde); Sadd 851,29 (-an ti katva daQ.go
patito)= Vism-mht [Be] II 232,w;- see also t~. tha!Tl.
dha~psa, m. [S. dhv~sa], destruction, removal; - ifc see
guQ.avinasana-.
dha~psaka, mfn. [S. dhv~saka], destroying, removing; -
ifc see guQ.a-.
*dhaipsati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. dhar~ati, dhr~Q.oti], is bold; da res
to attack; - caus. pr. 3 sg. dha~pseti 1 [cfS. dhar~ayati;
orto dh~seti 2 qv], dares to attack; offends; DI 211,20
(nah~ bhante bhagavant~ -emi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
thapesiip; cfSv 388,24: na gul).avinasanena -emi, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee gul).avinasanadha!Tlsena); Ap 321,28 (adeyya-
vacano homi na -emi).
dha1psati2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. dhv~sate,], l.falls (from); is
gane (from); is deprived of, Dhatup 320 (dh~sa
dharpsane); Dhatum 462; Vin II 205,8• (samaggarato
dhammattho yogakkhema na -ati) = J a IV 211,9*
(211,w: nibbana na -ati na parihayati); D III 184,25*
(asma 1oka paramha ca ubhaya -ate naro); A II 67,3
(akicc~ karonto kicc~ aparadhento yasa ca sukha ca
-ati); Sn 312 (dhamma -anti yajaka, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr -enti; Pj II 324,ll: -anti cavanti parihayanti); Th 610
(dussllo pana mittehi -ate; Th-a II 259,22: -ate ti apeti);
Ja III 318,4* (kuhi!Tl thita uparito na -ati; 318,s-: na -ati
na patati); 457,6* (sakatthana ca -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
saggatthana; 457,w: akasato bhassitva pathavüp
pavisissatl ti); V 218,15' (puñña ca -e; 218,2o·: puññato
ca -eyy~);- 2. [cfS. Dhatup dhv~sati, Wg § 18:16]
goes; Sadd 449,7 (dh~su gatiy~: -ati rajo
n' uddhatpsati uddha!Tl); - absol. dh~sitva, Ja V
376,16 (dvlhi sugati1okehi -itva); 496,7 (issariya -itva,
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -etva); Sp 510,23; - caus.
pr. 3 sg. dha~pseti 2 , -aya ti [S. dhva!Tlsayati], makes fall;
deprives of; destroys; scatters, disperses; D III 184,21 *
(ete cha thana purisa!Tl -ayanti); Sn 591 (khippa!Tl
uppatit~ so k~ vato tiil~ va -aye); Ja III 353,21 *
(par~ ca puñña -eti; 353,29': so par~ ca dayak~
puñña -eti parihapeti); Mi1227,14 (raja nama aQ.a!Tl
vltikkamant~ vigarahati japeti -eti); Sp 518,2
(kamarago citt~ -eti padh~seti vikkhipati e' eva
mi1apeti ca); Kkh 2 70,23 (anuddh~seyya ti -eyya
viddh~seyya padh~seyya); Saddh 357 (te
ki1esamahacora . . . na -en ti manogeh~); - part.pr.
dh~senta, mfn., Ja IV 497,2Y (mahajana!Tl -enta
padh~senta jlvitakkhay~ papenti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr -ento); - pp dh~sita, mfn. [cf S. dhvasta,
dhv~sita], fallen; scattered; destroyed; Abh 751
(pann~ cut~ ca -ita!Tl); Ap 86,19 (mano makkho ca
-ito ); Mp II 318,29 (uddhasto ti upari -ito ).
dha1psana, n. and mfn. [S. dhv~sana], (n.) destruction,
removal; (mfn.) destroying, damaging; It-a I 50,2
(karilna!Tl khepanato -ato makkho ti vuccati);
Dhatup 320 (dh~sa -e);- ifc see ku1a-, guQ.a-.
dhaipsi(n)\ mfn. [prob. < S. dhar~in, but cts understand
dha!Tlsi(n) 2], bold, insolent; offensive; M I 236,1 (mayam
456 dhaja
eva bho Gotama -1 maya!Tl pagabbha; cfPs II 282,11: -1
ti guQ.adh~saka); A II 182,26 (yava -1 vatay~
1oQ.akilrakadarako yava mukharo yava pagabbho;
cfMp III 167,9: yava -1 vatayan ti yava guQ.adh~sl vata
ay~); V 149,19 (kako ... -1 ca pagabbho ca ... ; cfMp V
54,9: -1 ti gul).a!Tl anadiyitva hatthenapi gahito tassa sise
pi vacca!Tl karoti, Ce, Ee so; Be -! guQ.adha!Tlsako; Se -1
ti gul).adh~sanako); Dhp 244 (sujlva!Tl ahiñkena
kakasürena -ina ... sañkilitthena jlvita!Tl; PDhp 164:
dhansina; cfUv 27:3: dhvank~iQ.a; GDbp 221: dhak~iQ.a;
cf J. Brough, 1962, p. 244; Dhp-a III 353,13: pares~
gul).adh~sanataya -ina).
dha1psi(n) 2 , mfn. [S. dhv~sin], destroying, removing; -
ifc see guQ.a-.
dha~pseti\ pr. 3 sg., se e sv *dh~sati 1 .
dha~pseti 2 , -ayati,pr. 3 sg., see sv dh~sati2 .
dhakati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup stakati, Wg § 19:20:
~taka/staka pratlghate], strikes against; goes;
Sadd 322,21 (dhaka patighate gatiy~ ca, patighato
patihanana!Tl: -ati, Be, E e so).
dhakiira, m., see sv dha 1.
dhakketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhakkayati,
Wg § 32:55], destroys; Sadd 521,9foll. (dhakka
nasane: . . . -eti -ayati, Ee so; Be vakka . . . vakketi
vakkayati; cf521fn.b).
dhañka, m. [S. dhvailk~a], a crow; Abh 638 (kako tv
arittho -o); 1042 (-o tu vayase bake); SI 207,29'
(kumaraka -am iv' ossajanti) = Sn 270 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee vañka!Tl); S 11 256,8 (gijjha pi -a pi ku1a1a pi, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se kaka pi); Pv 30:3 (-a siga1a parivattayanti);
Ja II 219,20* (duppasaha!Tl -ehi sagaram iva); III 313,1o*
(nicca!Tl ubbegino kaka -a papena kammuna, Be, Ce so;
Ee vañka; Se -o; 313,1s-: -a ti kakanam eva nam~, Be,
Ce so; Ee vañka ti; Se -o ti); V 107,21* (na madis~
jlvam adeyyu -a); VI 452,6* (h~saraja!Tl yatha -o
anujav~ patissasi); V v-a 334,29 (dhañk~bhaya ti -ehi
bh!ta, -ehi kakehi bhaya!Tl etesan ti 0 -bhaya ti vattabbe
gathasukhatth~ sanunasik~ katva dhañk~bhaya ti
vutt~, Ee, Be vl so, prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se: vañka!Tlbhaya
ti vailkehi bhaya!Tl etesan ti; ad Vv 84:3: eds vañka!Tl-
bhaya); Nidd I 177,17; Sadd 325,3o;- 0 -rüpa, mfn., with
the appearance of a crow; Th 151 (kii)! itthi brahati -a).
dhañkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhrillpk~ati, dhvatpk~ati,
Wg § 17:20, 21], utters a discordant cry; desires;
Sadd 330,13 (dakhi dhakhi ghoravasite kañkhaya!Tl ca:
dañkhati -ati).
dhaja, m.n. [S. dhvaja, m.], l. a standard, a flag, a
banner; a badge, a mark, emblem or characteristic sign;
Abh 397 (ketu -o pataka); 1064 (ketumhi cihane -o); SI
42,1* (-o rathassa paññill).~); 11 280,30* foll. (paggai,lhe
isin~ -~ . . . dhammo hi isin~ -o); Th 965
(garahanta sak~ -~ titthiyilna!Tl -a!Tl keci dharessanty
avadataka!Tl; Th-a III 87,22: sasane pabbajitilna!Tl hi
kasavo -o nama); Ja V 49,20* (kasavam addakkhi -~
isln~); VI 275,25* (asse pattl -ani ca, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
ca vammine); 499,16* (Siv!n~ vinay~ -a!Tl; 499,1s·:
Sivln~ -a!Tl Vessantarakumar~ vinayanto); 580,3*
(aropentu -e tattha); Ap 20,2s (tuv~ sattha ca ketu ca
-o yüpo ca pill).in~; Ap-a 225,34: saka1aloke
pakasanatthena tvam eva -o); Vism 63,12 (nav~
dhajati
arühanta -a¡p bandhitva aruhanti ta¡p tesa¡p
dassanatikkame gahetu¡p vagati); Sv 716,3 (Sakkassa
Vejayanto nama pasado satta yojanasatani uggañchi -o
t11_1i yojanasatani uggañchi); Pj II 392,3o (Maro ... -a¡p
pa1_1ametva palayi saha parisaya); 538,6 (paribbajako ...
jambusakha¡p -a¡p katva); Th-a II 56,21 (sudhota¡p
attano uttarasailga¡p vejagge abandhitva -a¡p katva
püja¡p akasi); Ap-a 382,26 (dhunati kampati ca1at! ti
-a¡p); 383,7 (-am iva chakamavacare pakato püjito ca);
As 83,38 (surapanadvare -a¡p ussapenti); - ifc see
arahad- (sv araha[t]), isi-, gihi- (sv gihi[n]), titthiya-; -
2. the king 's standards; the troops under the banner,
Ja II 219,19* (-am aparimita¡p anantapara¡p duppasaha¡p;
219,24': ida¡p tava me rathesu morapade thapetva
ussap1ta¡p -am eva aparimita¡p bahum
anekasatasakha¡p); Sp 556,3 (-en a ah ata ti dhajahata,
ussitadhajaya senaya ... anita ti vutta¡p hoti; Sp-t [Be]ll
328,16/oll.: 0 -yogato sena va 0 -saddena vutta);-
3. pride; Nidd I 80,26 (mano . . . Ul_ll_lati Ul_ll_lamo -o;
Nidd-ai 211,33: samussitatthena -o)= Dhs 1116;- ifc
see panna- (sv pajjati\ - 0
'-agghikatoraJ].a, n.pl.,
banners, decorative columns and arches; Mhv 34:76
1
(-ehi ma1_1gayitva); - 0
'-iilu, mfn. [dhaja + a1u ],
adorned with flags; Abh 733; Th 164 (yüpo ... -u) =
Ja II 334,5* (334,14': -ü ti 0 -sampanno) f. Ap 252,15; -
0
'-iihata, mfn., l. (a wife) taken as a captive (in war);
Vin 111 139,26 (dasa bhariyayo dhanakkita ... -a
qmuhuttika; 140,7: -a nama karamaranita vuccati;
Sp 556,3: dhajena ahata ti -a, ussitadhajaya senaya ...
anita ti vutta¡p hoti ta¡p koci bhariya¡p karoti); - 2. a
flag that is taken (as robe-material); Vism 62,26 (-a¡p
thüpacivara¡p ... samuddikan ti etesu aññatara¡p civara¡p
gahetva; 63,11: -an ti nava¡p aruhanta dhaja¡p bandhitva
arühanti, ta¡p tesa¡p dassanatikkame gahetu¡p vagati,
ya¡p pi yuddhabhümiya¡p dhaja¡p bandhitva thapita¡p
ta¡p dvinna¡p pi senana¡p gataka1e gahetu¡p vagati);
Sv 1010,21 (-an ti dhaja¡p ussapetva tato anita¡p); -
0
-bandha, 0 -baddha, mfn. [cf BHS dhvajabaddhaka],
marked; notorious; ? Vin I 74,34 (na bhikkhave -o coro
pabbajetabbo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -baddho; Sp 997,14:
dhaja¡p bandhitva viya carati ti -o, müladevadayo viya
loke pakato ti vutta¡p hoti); - 0 -va(t), mfn., having a
banner or badge; furnished with flags; Abh 733 (0 -va tu
dhaja1u ca); Bv-a 38,23 (yassa kassaci dhaja¡p disva va
aya¡p dhajo itthannamassa ti 0 -va dhaji ti paññayati, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee dhaja¡p va dhaj1 paññayati); -
atidhaja, m., a superior flag; the best flag; As 2,2o (yo
atirekappamiil_lo nanaviragava1_11_1avisesasampanno ca
dhajo so -o ti vuccati); Vibh-a414,n;- sadhaja, mfn.,
with a flag; Ap 109,22 (-a¡p paduma¡p gayha); - see
also kadalidhajapaññiil_la.
dhajati, dhañjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhvajati, dhvañjati,
Wg § 7:44, 45], goes; Sadd 344,29 (vaju gatiya¡p dhaja
dhaji ca ... dhajati dhajo dhañjati dhañjana¡p).
dhajani,f, see sv dhaji(n).
dhaji(n), mfn. and -in1,f [S. dhvajin], l. (mfn.) having or
carrying a banner or badge; Bv-a 38,23 (yassa kassaci
dhaja¡p disva va aya¡p dhajo itthannamassa ti dhajava -1
ti paññayati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhaja¡p va -1 paññayati);
Sadd 188,14* (-1); - 2. (/.) (and dhajan1 ?) bearing
457 dhañña
standards, an army; Abh 381 (vahin1 -in1 sena); Sn 442
(samanta -ini¡p disva yutta¡p Mara¡p savahana¡p; Pj II
392,2: -inin ti sena¡p); Ja VI 396,29* (sena ... -in1, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se dhajan1; 397,2wfoll.: suva1_11_1adi-
patima1_1gitehi nanavatthasamujja1ehi rathad1su
samussiteh' eva dhajehi samannagata); - dhajini-
pati, m., the commander of an army, a general;
Mhv6:17.
dhañjati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv dhajati.
dhañjana, n. [from dhañjati], going; Sadd 344,3o (-an ti
gamana¡p).
dhañña\ mfn. [S. dhanya], fortunate, lucky; auspicious;
Abh 722 (puññava sukat! -o); 1007 (-o puññavati);
Ap 533,22 (ye te dakkhinti vadana¡p -a te narapuiigava)
quoted Sadd 400,18 (400,25: dhañña¡p siripuññapañña-
sampada etesa¡p atth1 ti -a ti); Cp 1:3:2 (ayacu¡p ma¡p
hatthinaga¡p -a¡p mailgalasammata¡p; Cp-a 35,16: -an ti
dhanayitabbasirisobhaggappatta¡p 1akkha1_1asampanna¡p)
quoted Sadd 400,25 (401,1: uttamaratana¡p idan ti
dhanayitabba¡p saddayitabban ti -a¡p, sirisampanna¡p
puññasampanna¡p paññasampannan ti pi attho yujjati);
Vism 144,8 (-a vat' ime y e vihara¡p gantva ... evarupa¡p
ca madhura¡p dhammakatha¡p sotu¡p 1abhanti ti) =
As 116,22 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dhañña); Ap-a 429,13
(-ana¡p puññavantana¡p khattiyabrahma1_1agahapati-
mahasa1ana¡p); Bv-a 183,1 (ativiya -a¡p khattiyakañña¡p
aggamahesi¡p aka¡psu); Mhv 22:59 (sa dev1 samaye -a¡p
janayi puttam uttama¡p); 33:2 (at!va -o so asi
puññakammarato sada); - adhañña, mfn., unlucky,
unfortunate; Pj II 152,31 (-o vat' asmi dana¡p datu¡p na
1abham1 ti); Te124;- see also dhañña3.
2
dhañña , n. [S. dhanya], grain; corn; Abh 450 (satta
-ani); 1007 (-a¡p sa1yadike vutta¡p); V in I 240,s
(antalikkha -assa dhara opatitva dhaññagara¡p püreti);
D Il 330,31 (ya¡p ida¡p bhoti dhana¡p va -a¡p va rajata¡p
va jatarupa¡p va sabba¡p ta¡p mayha¡p); III 165,23* (gihi
pi -ena dhanena vagghati puttehi darehi catuppadehi ca);
MI 57,21 (nanavihitassa -assa seyyathída¡p salina¡p
vih1na¡p muggana¡p masana¡p ti1ana¡p ta1_1gulana¡p); S I
174,6 (punappuna¡p khetta¡p kasanti kassaka
punappuna¡p -am upeti raqha¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
aññam) = Th 531; A IV 163,26 (mahajanakayo -a¡p
ahareyya kajehi pi pitakehi pi ucchailgehi pi añjalihi pi);
170,14 (-ani dajhani saravantani); Thi 117 (musa1ani
gahetvana -a¡p kogenti manava); Ja IV 262,15* (miga
-ani khadanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be sassani); VI 297,12*
(mita¡p -a¡p nidhapeyya mita¡p ca pacaye ghare);
Ap 386,9 (khettato -am aharitva); Bv 2:32 (vapita¡p
ropita¡p -a¡p pajahi¡p); Mi1166,6 (kassako -a¡p
ropetukamo khetta¡p kasati); 277,25 (ativassena -a¡p
vinassati); Vism 120,31 (khala¡p katva -a¡p maddanti);
Sp 822,1o (odano nama sali víhi yavo godhümo kailgu
varako kudrusako ti sattanna¡p -ana¡p tal_lgu1ehi
nibbatto); Spki 33,1o (-ena ca sama¡p dhana¡p nama
n' atthi); Pj 11 112,25 (-ani ti sa1ivihiyavagodhüma-
kaiiguvarakakudrusakappabhedani satta sesapara1_11_1ani
ca); - ifc see dhana-; - cagara, n., a granary; Vin 1
240,7 (-a¡p sammajjapetva); Mi141,1s; - o• -ambila, n.,
sour rice-gruel; Abh 460; - 0
-karaJ].a, n., a threshing-
floor; Abh 454 (khalo ca -a¡p); 927 (kha1a¡p ca -e);
dhañña
Vin III 200,10; - 0 -gatika, mfn., included in, in the
sphere of, similar to, grain; ? Sp 1104,2 (nava
mahaphaHini sabbarp. ca aparai¡J;¡arp. -am eva); -
0
-miipaka, m., one who measures (out) grain; Ja III
542,11 · (mitam a)hakena ti --kammarp. pi tena katarp., Be,
Ee so; Ce, Se -arp.); Vism 278,31 (-o hi na)irp. puretva
ekan ti vatva okirati); Sp 175,16 (dhaññakaral)atthane
-arp. nisidapetva); - 0 -miisa, m., a particular measure;
Abh 195; Vibh-a 343,27 (satta iika eko -o sattadhañña-
masappamfu.larp. ekarp. ailgularp.);- 0 -vapa, m., a sower
of grain; Sadd 870,1 (dhaññarp. vapissatl ti -o vajati);-
0
-samavapaka, n., (according to ct) grain and seeds;
(or seed-com; ?) M I 451,1 (puriso d~iddo assako ...
tass' assa . .. ekissa kumbhiya -arp. na paramariiparp.;
Ps III 168,7: 0
-samavapakan ti dhaññarp. ca
samavapakarp. ca, tattha dhaññarp. kudrüsako
samavapakan ti labubijakumbha¡¡.¡Jabijakadibijajatarp.);
- sadhañña, mfn., with stores of grain; DI 87,8
(Ukkattharp. ajjhavasati . . . sati¡¡.akatthodakarp. -arp.
rajabhoggarp.; Sv 245,29: saha dhaññena ti -arp.,
pubbal)¡¡.apara¡¡.¡¡.abhedarp. bahudhaññasannicayan ti
attho) t M II 164,8; - se e also dhaniya.
dhañña3 , n. [S. lex. dhanya], the being rich; wealth, good
fortune; Sadd 400,7 foll. (dhana -e: dhananarp. -arp.
siripuññapaññanarp. sampada ti attho . . . dhanino va
bhavo -arp.); 438,1 Gala -e); - 0
-puññalakkhal}a, n.
and mfn., (n.) a sign presaging good fortune and merit;
(mfn.) marked by signs presaging good fortune and
merit; Ja IV 231,23 (-arp. puttarp. vijayi, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
--sampannarp.); VI 3,14 (-o kumaro, Ce, E e so; Be
--sampanno ayarp. kumaro; Se --sampanno te putto );
Pj II 524,22 (-o ayarp. kumaro ); Pv-a 161,25
(--sampannarp. tassa dhitararp. disva); Th-a I 61,20 (-arp.
puttarp. vijayi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --puttarp.); - see also
dhañña 1.
dhata, mfn., pp ofdharati qv.
dhana, n. (and m. ?) [S. dhana, n.], wealth, riches, money,
treasure; Abh 485; D II 245,3 (ime kho brahmal)a nama
0
-luddha yannüna mayarp. Mahagovindarp. brahmal)arp.
-ena sikkheyyama ti); 330,3o (yarp. idarp. bhoti -arp. va
dhaññarp. va rajatarp. va jatariiparp. va sabbarp. tarp.
mayharp.); III 163,5 (tass' imani -ani honti seyyathidarp.
saddhadhanarp. siladhanarp. hiridhanarp. ottappadhanarp.
sutadhanarp. cagadhanarp. paññadhanarp.); M II 73.13* foll.
(dayadaka tassa -arp. haranti satto pana gacchati yena
kammarp., na miyamanarp. -am anveti kiñci) = Th 781
(Th-a III 39,31joll.: -an ti dhanayitabbarp. yarp. kiñci
vatthu puna -an ti hiraññasuva¡¡.¡¡.arp. sandhaya vadati);
M II 180,8 (brahma¡¡.a ... cattari -ani paññapenti); SI
102,9 (mayarp. pahoma agate paccatthike -ena
upalapeturp.); 214,35* (ughata vindate -arp.); A IV 5,4*
(yassa ete -a atthi ... adaliddo ti tam ah u); Dhp 155
(aladdha yobbane -arp.); 204 (santutthiparamarp. -arp.);
Sn 302 (yajassu bah u te -arp.); Pv 19:12 (nadasirp.
bahuke -e; Pv-a 103,15: mahante -e vijjamane); 21:44
(tasma hi dana -am eva seyyo atippadanena kula na
honti); Thi 464 (rajje a¡¡.a -am issariyarp.); Ja I 225,15
(kudda:Iapitakarp. adaya nidhighanarp. gantva kaharp.
matula -an ti aba); 254,19 (yadi VO -ena attho
adhivasetha tada -vassarp. vassapessami ti); 262,18
0
458 dhana
(attano -arp. ca puttadararp. ca gahetva aññattha yahi ti
ragha pabbajesi); II 326,15* (yarp. eta upasevanti
chandasa va -ena va); III 88,14* (dhammena vittam
eseyya na nikatya -arp. hare); IV 7,24 (asarassa -assa
danarp. saro); 15,25joll. (aharp. gehe -e khi¡¡.e danarp.
daturp. na sakkhissami aparikkhi¡¡.e yeva -e navaya
Suva¡¡.¡¡.abhümirp. gantva -arp. aharissami ti); 76,9* (yo
navajanati sahayamatte sippena kulyahi -ena jacca);
224,18 (so hi janapadarp. pi)etva -am eva sai!ka¡J¡Jhi);
404,25* (-arp. dehi maharaja mutta ve)uriya bahii); 457,3
(imarp. sapparp. gahetva gamanigamarajadhanisu
ki)apento -arp. uppadessami ti); V 175,32 (naharp. -en'
atthiko pabbajiturp. pana icchami ti); 330,2o* (-a pi
dhanakamanarp. nassati; 331 ,32·: -a pi ti -arp. pi. ayam
eva va patho); 449,2* (0 -tta pativellanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
o• -atthaya); VI 283,23* (asantuleyyo mama so -ena);
285,5* (-ena kita pi bhavanti dasa); 493,9* (hadayarp.
cakkhurp. p' aharp. dajjarp. kirp. me bahirakarp. -arp.);
Ap 68,12 (mattikarp. pettikarp. capi n' atthi te nihitarp.
-arp.); Cp 1:4:8 (-ena vejjarp. tappetva ro gato
parimuccati); Mil287,31 (-arp. maharaja loke
bandhanarp.); 353,t 1 (acariyarp. -ena va vattapatipattiya
va aradhetva); Sp 659,1 foll. (attano va -en a ti attano
kappasasuttadina -ena); Sv 318,1 (tarp. aputtako seghi
tassa matapitunnarp. -arp. datva puttarp. katva gahesi);
Pj I 21,29 (dhanado viya buddho -arp. viya dhammo);
Dhp-a I 6,20 (yarp. imasmirp. kule
saviññfu.lakaviñña¡¡.akarp. -arp. kiñci atthi); Pj II 294,18
(idarp. -arp. yeva dissati yehi pana idarp. sañcitarp. te na
dissanti sabbe va maccuvasarp. gata); - ifc see acariya-,
tapo- (sv tapa[s]), mahad- (sv maha[t]), sattavidha-ariya-
(sv satta4); - 0
'iihara, mfn., bringing wealth; Ja V
174,8* (mal)i ... -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhanaharo);
VI 272,18* (disva manirp. ... -arp.); - 0
-kamiya,
0
-kamika, (m)j(n). [cf S. dhanakamya], one who wants
wealth, who is covetous; Ja II 443,17* (esa
uppalasannaho ... tappatu -a, Ee so; Ce 0 -kamika; Se
tappetu; Be tappetu dhanika pi ya; 444,9· foll.: etarp.
sabbarp. gahetva sa mama piya dhanatthika imina
dhanena tappatu piirarp. tugha hotii ti, Ce so; Ee pura;
Be, Se tappetu piiretu santugha hotii ti);
0
'-kkita, mfn., purchased; Abh 515 (-o); Vin III 139,24
(dasa bhariyayo -a chandavasini ... ; 140,1: dhanena
ki¡¡.itva vaseti); IV 224,33 (daso nama antojato -o
karamaranito); Ja V 269,25* (bhariya -a); Sp 1000,21 (-o
nama matapitünarp. santika putto va samikanarp. santika
daso va dhanarp. datva dasacarittarp. aropetva kito ); -
0
-kkitaka,mfn., purchased; Niddi 11,9 (-o daso, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr 0 -kkitako);- 0 -jiini,f [dhana + jani2],
loss of wealth; a fine; D III 182,29 (sandighika -i, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr dhanañjani); A IV 96,17*
(kodhabhibhiito puriso -irp. nigacchati); Ja V l8,28·;
Spk I 56,27*; Th-a II 209,38 (samike assamike karonto
-iya badhasi); - 0 -dhañña, 0 -dhaniya, n. [dhana +
dhañña2], money and grain; DIII 164,11 (-ena
va¡J¡Jheyyurp.); Sn 307 (hiraññarp. 0 -dhaniymp); Pv 35:4
(issaro -assa supahiitassa); Thi 98 (-arp. ca cha¡J¡Jiya);
Ja III 408,22* (-arp.; 409,1r: -an ti muttadidhanarp. ca
sattadhaññani ca); VI 533,10* (na tassa bhoga vijjanti
-arp. ca); Mil280,28; - 0
-pil,lc;liipana, n., collecting
dhanati
money; Sv 96,15; - 0 -lobhapakatika, mfn., by nature
greedy for money; Ja 11 30,27; - va(t), mfn., wealthy,
rich; A V 45,8 (puriso . . . 0 -va samano 0 -vadarp
vadeyya); Ja II 302,1s (aha~ pakatiya abhirüpo -va 0
yasasampanno arogo idani pan' amhi duggato e' eva
PaJ.l9urogí ca); Nidd I 178,2 (bhagava . . . aMho
mahaddhano 0 -va ... ; Nidd-a I 293,21: atisayabhavena
paññadhanavatta 0 -va) f- Pa!is 11 194,17; Mil216,19
(manussesu eko jatima hoti eko 0 -Va eko vijjava ... ); -
0
-Vinasaka, mfn., who destroys wealth; Ja VI 380,24'
(kulapacchimako -o avajato nama); - 0
-smpharal}a,
0
-saii.gharaJ.!a, n., collecting money; Ja II 414,1· (ye purisa
-e ussuka, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -saii.gharaJ.!e); III 319,13
(-' -üpaya~ dassento, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
0
-saii.gharaJ.!üpaya~); -
0
-hiira, mfn., taking money;
going to make money; Ja IV 351,21 * (val)ija .. . -a
pakkami~su, Ce, Se so; Be dhanahara; Ee -haraya); -
0
0
-haraka, mfn., taking money; going to make money;
Pv 21:1 (yassa atthaya gacchama Kamboja~ -a;
Pv-a 113,23: -a ti bhaJ:.l9avikkayena laddhadhanaharino);
Th 530 (asaya viil)ija yanti samuddarp -a); -
0
-hetuka, mfn., motivated by money; Cp 2:6:9 (acikkhi
pucchito -o); - adhana, mfn., without money; poor;
Vin III 73,36 (sadhananarp jívita~ upadaya -ana~
jívitarp papakarp); D III 61,10 (y e ca te tata vijite -a assu
tesarp ca dhana~ anuppadajjeyyasi); Ja V 253,9· ( -assa
akiñcanassa bhikkhuno); Ap 565,3o (jata setthikule ...
duggate -e ... gata ca sadhana~ kula~); Cp 1:9:9 (-e
ature jil)J:.le yacake); Mi1360,s (-a kapaJ.la datidda
duggatajana); Vism 180,3o (-o va pana nidhi!!hana~
pítisomanassajato gacchati); Sv 281,26 (samaJ.lO pana
Gotamo -o bhikkhaya udara~ püretva yapetí ti); -
niddhana, mfn., id.; Abh 739; Ja V 19,1o· ([kulani] -ani
katani); 447,15' (eta pi -a~ cha99etva aññarp sadhanam
eva gacchantl ti); Sp 209,16 (na mayarp -a ti); Sadd 401,6
(adhano -o);- sadhana, mfn., possessing wealth; rich;
Vin III 73,36; M 11 72,26* (passami loke -e manusse);
Ja III 377,2 (-ass' eva bhaya~ atthi niddhanassa bhaya~
n' atthi); V 289,19* (idarp te ragharp -a~ sayoggarp);
449,5* (-arp anupatanti nariyo); Ap 570,12 (surupa -a);
Mi1116,32 (kinti ime satta samagga assu aroga -a
dighayuka ti); Dhp-a III 302,16 (nakkhattarp nama
-anam hoti).
dhanati 1, dhanti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup dadhanti,
Wg § 25:23], is rich; Sadd 400,14 (dhana dhaññe: ...
1
dhanti -ati dhanitarp dhañña~); - pp dhanita , mfn.,
rich; ? Sadd 400,14.
dhanat¡2, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhvanati, S. lex. dhanati], sounds;
makes a noise; Dhatup 594 (dhana sadde); Dhatum 833;
Sadd 397,7 (dhana sadde: ... -ati); caus.
pr. 3 sg. dhaneti, -ayati, -iyyati 1 [S. dhvanayati;
Wg § 19:55], makes sound; Sadd 549,28 (dhana sadde:
2
-eti -ayati -iyyati dhani dhana~); - pp dhanita , mfn.
[cfS. dhvanita], sounded; (gr.t.t.) aspirate; Abh 747
(sanita~ -arp); Sp 1399,23 (-arp nama [pañcasu
vaggesu] dutiyacatuttharp); 1400,6 (bhante sali.gho ti
vattabbe bhakaraghakaranarp bakaragakare katva bante
sango ti vacana~ -assa sithilakaraJ.larp nama); Ps IV
29,26 (samuddho samuddho ti .. . -a~ katva aha);
Mil 344,2 (in long cpd: sithiladhanita-); Sadd 607,27
459 dhanu
(dutiyacatuttharp -a~: khacha!hathapha e' eva
1
ghajha9hadhabha ca); - fpp dhanayitabba , mfn. ?
Sadd 401,1 (uttamaratanarp idan ti -a~ saddayitabban ti
dhaññarp); 550,1 (mama idan ti dhanayitabbarp
saddayitabban ti dhanan ti).
dhanana, n. ffrom dhanati 1], the being rich; ? Sadd 400,7
(-a~ dhañña~, siripuññapaññana~ sampada ti attho ).
dhanayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhanayati], desires; wishes for;
M I 260,34 (imarp ce . . . di!thi~ . . . alliyetha kelayetha
-etha mamayetha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhaneyyatha; Ps II
308,1: -etha ti dhana~ viya icchanti gedha~
apajjeyyatha); S III 190,12 (tani pa~svagarakani alliyanti
ketayanti -anti mamayanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee manayanti;
Spk II 336,10: -ayanti ti dhana~ viya maññanti); -
part.pr. dhanayanta, mfn., Spk III 165,7 (mayarp pi ima~
-anta na paribhuñjama, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee mamayanta);
- fpp dhanayitabba2, mfn., Th-a III 39,31 (dhanan ti
-itabba~ yarp kiñci vatthu); Sadd 401,4 (n' atthi dhañña-
sama~ dhanan ti vacanato dhanayitabban ti dhaññarp,
kin ta~ pubbal)J:.la~); 752,7 (dhanayitabbatthena dhana~
2
viya ti dhanarp);- see also dhaniyyati .
2
dhanayitabba\ mfn., see sv dhanati .
dhanayitabba2 , mfn.,fpp ofdhanayati qv.
dhani, m. [S. dhvani], sound, noise; Abh 128
(nigghosanadaddhanayo ca ravo ); 899 (-imhi selana~);
Sadd 549,29 (-I ti saddo);- ifc see haya-.
dhani(n), mfn. [S. dhanin], wealthy; Abh 725 (ibbho tv
a99ho tatha -I); Ja VI 61,4* (nago dantehi haññati
dhanamhi -ino hanti).
dhanika, dhaniya, m. [S. dhanika], a creditor; Abh 470
(uttamaJ.!J:.lO ca -o); Vin I 76,9 (puriso il)ayiko palayitva
bhikkhüsu pabbajito hoti dhaniya passitva eva~
aha~su); Th 1106 (iJ:.latto va datiddako ... -ehi pitito);
Cp 2:6:3 (-ehi paripitito); It-a I 40,10; Pv-a 276,14 (sa
kahapaJ:.lasata~ -anarp datva).
dhanitfha, f [S. dhani~!ha], the name of a nakkhatta, the
24th lunar mansion; Abh 60; Sadd 359,2o ( ... savaJ.!arp
-a satabhisattam ... ).
dhanita , mfn., p~ ofdhanati qv.
1 1
2 2
dhanita , mfn., caus. pp ofdhanati qv.
dhanima(t), mfn. [dhana + ima(t)], rich, wealthy; Ja IV
309,11* (pahütadhañño ... gihi -a; 310,27·: sattavidhena
ratanadhanena -a hotu); VI 221,12* (ahu raja ... khattiyo
pahütayoggo -a anantabalaporiso ).
2
dhaniyyati\ pr. 3 sg., se e sv dhanati •
dhaniyyat¡2, dhaniyati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dhaniyati; cf also
Wg § 30:8: vanu yacane], wishes for; Ja VI 264,8* (mata
hi tava ... Vidhurassa hadayarp -ati, Se so; Be dhaniyati;
Ce dhaniyati; Ee vaniyati; 264,11': pattheti) f. 270,2• (Ce,
Se dhaniyati; Be dhaniyati; Ee vaniyati) quoted
Sadd 484,3 (dhanu yacane: .. . -ati) and 549,28foll.
(dhana sadde: dhaneti dhanayati dhaniyyati .. . aya~
pana dhatu icchayarp pi vattati ... Vidhurassa hadayarp
-ati ti paJI nidassana~ tattha -atl ti pattheti icchati); -
se e also dhanayati.
dhanu, n. [S. dhanus], l. a bow; Abh 388 (issaso -u
kodaJ:.l9arp); 811; Viniii 180,30 (-usmi~ pi sikkhanti);
MI 429,19 (yava na tarp -u~ janarni yen' amhi viddho
yadi va capo yadi va kodaJ.19o ti); A III 75,22
(Licchavikumaraka sajjani -üni adaya kukkurasali.gha-
dhanuka
parivuta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhanukaui); Vv 63:1 (-urp
olubbha tighasi); Ja l 150,19 (miga -urp disva va
maral)abhayena tajjita palayanti); 246,24 (-uni e' eva
avudhani ca adaya); IV 272,18 (raja pi lakkharp
vijjhissaml ti -urp aropetva sararp sandahi); 327,24 (narp
-uhi e' eva dal).<;lehi ca po!hesurp); V 47,22* (adaya tül).irp
ca -urp ca luddo); VI 520,13 (pal).I).asaladvararp vivaritva
pavisitva khaggarp ca -urp ca apanetva); Ap 418,28
(vinatarp -um adaya); Vism 20,20 (-una); Sv 905,5
(-umhi katasikkha); Mhv 7:19;- ifc see inda-, da!ha-,
nijjiyadhanu, sajiyadhanu; - 2. a measure of length, a
bow-length; - 3. (or dhanutakkari qv below), a kind of
tree or bush; ? Ja VI 535,28' (dhanutakkañpupphehl ti
-ünarp ca takkañnarp ca pupphehi sobhita, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee dhanutakkarlpupphehi sobhita); - 0 -kalapa, n.,
quiver and bow; Vin II 192,4 (eko puriso asicamma111
gahetva -~ sannayhitva); M II 180,17 (tatr' idarp ...
brallmal).a khattiyassa sarp dhanarp paññapenti -~);
Ja II 77,17; Sadd 750,23; - 0 -karika, 0 -kari(n), m.(?).
[cf BHS dhanu~karika, -karika, -karin], a kind of
flowering tree; Ja V 420,7 (in long cpd:
-madhugandhikadhanukaritallsa-, Ce so; Ee
-dhanukarika-; Be, Se -dhanutakkari-; 422,2s-: 0 -karl ti
dhanupa!ali, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -takkarl ti); -
0
-ketakl,f [BHS dhanu~ketakl], a kind of ketakl;
Ap-a 535,17* (supatta gandhasampanna ketak! -!); -
0
-ggaha, m.fn. and m. [dhanu + gaha2], who bears a bow;
an archer; DI 51,8 (assaroha rathika -a; Sv 156,2o: -a ti
dhanu-acariya issasa); MI 82,35 (da!hadhammo -o
sikkhito katahattho ); Ja I 173,6 (Devadatto tathagatassa
ghatanatthaya -e payojesi); 356,31 (tvarp rajauarp disva
ah~ -o ti vakkhasi raja te paribbayarp datva vuttirp
nibaddh~ dassati); II 87,22 (eko -o agantva rajadvare
!hito); III 322,22 (ek~ akkhal).avedhirp -arp
pakkosapetva); V 486.2o* (assaroha yeva -ase); VI 50,23*
(-a sabbalali.karabhüsita nllavammadhara süra
capahattha kalapino ); Ap 354,2o (-a); Mil 331 ,3;
Vism 150,10 (sukusalo -o valavedhaya kammarp
kurumano);- 0 -takkari,f, a kind of acacia; Ja V 420,7
(in long cpd.: -madhugandhikadhanutakkaritallsa-, Be,
Se so; Ce -dhanukari-; Ee -dhanukarika-; 422,zs·: -1 ti
dhanuparali, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -kañ ti); VI 535,28'
(--pupphehi sobhita, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dhanünarp ca
takkañnarp ca pupphehi sobhita); - 0 -patali, n. a kind
of tree; Ja V 422,2s·; - 0
-bbeda, 0 -bbedha, m.
[S. dhanurveda; -bbedha by influence of vedha ?], the
science of archery; a treatise on archery; Mil 3,31
(... tikiccha 0 -bbedha pural).a itihasa ... , Se so; Be, Ce
catubbeda; Ee catubbeda); Ud-a 205,7 (dhanusippan ti
issasasipp~ so
0
-bbedho ti vuccati); Sadd 504,18
(... kiriyavidhi -o hatthisikkha kamatant~ ... ); -
0
-sata, n. [dhanu + sata 1], a 100 bow-lengths; D II 178,25
(mapesi ... raja Mahasudassano tasu talantarikasu -e -e
pokkharal)iyo ); Ja III 372,6 (--mattarp rhau~
laii.ghitva); As 233,21 (eko kira issaso --matthake
phalakasatarp rhapapetva); - 0 -Sekha, m., a student of
archery; ? Ja VI 475,w· (Dhanusekhava ti --taya
Dhanusekhakumaro ca ti attho, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
Dhanusekha ca ti Dhanusekho ca, Dhanusekhakumaro
ca ti attho; ad 475,5•: Ce, Ee, Se tuvarp ca
460 dhamati
Dhanusekhava; Be tvarp e' eva Dhanusekha ca; quoted
Sadd 270,27: Dhanusekhava; and 634,13: Dhanusekha
ca); - see also pañcadhanusatika (sv pañca).
dhanuka, n. [cfS. dhanu~ka], a small bow; Vin III 180,27
(rathakena pi kl\anti -en a pi kl\anti; Sp 621,22:
khuddakadhanuna); DI 7,1 ( ... rathakarp -~ ... ); MI
266,16 (kumarakan~ kl!apanakaui .. . seyyath!darp
vankak~ . . . rathak~ -arp); A III 75,22
(Licchavikumaraka sajjaui -ani adaya kukkurasangha-
parivuta, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se dhanüni); Mil 229,2;
Pv-a 285,26 (salittakarp vuccati -en a . . . sakkhara-
khipanapayogo); Sadd 803,2o (khuddakatthe gamako
rathako -~);- ifc see aral)i-, kappasapo!hana-.
dhanta, m.fn., pp ofdhamati qv.
dhanti, se e sv dhanati 1.
dhama, m(fn). [ts], (one) who blows; - ifc see na!in-
(sv na!I), sali.kha-.
dhamaka, m. [ts], one who blows; one who makes sound;
- ifc see bheri-, v~sa-, sankha-, singa- (sv singa 1].
dhamakaraQa, n., see dhammakaraka sv dhamma 1.
dhamati, -eti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhamati], Dhatup 227
(dhama sadde); Dhatum 325 (dhamo pumo ca dhamane);
Sadd 412,21 foil. (dhama saddaggisarpyogesu); l. blows;
makes sound (esp. a conch or other wind instrument by
blowing); Ja I 284,¡· (-eyya); 284,22* (-e -e natidhame);
364,22 (tv~ sali.kh~ -a); VI 580,28* (kharamukhani
-antu, Ee, Se so; Ce dhammantu; Be -entu); Mi13l,J (ye
pan' ime sali.khadhamaka sali.kh~ -enti tes~ vato
puna pavisati ti); 262,3 (mahatimahanta pi maccha ...
acaman ti -anti ca); Ap-a 411,26 (sankharp -ati ghosarp
karoti ti sankhadhamako, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ayati);
Sadd 412,23 (sankharp -ati sali.khadhamako bherirp -ati
bheridhamako); - 2. stirs up (fire) by blowing; Ja VI
372,4 (na ... aggimhi vijjamane yeva khajjopanak~
-anti, Be, Se so; Ce, E e -en ti); 441 ,2s (aggimhi san te
khajjopanak~ -ati); Sadd 412,24 (aggirp -ati); -
3. melts or manufactures by blowing, smelts; blows
away; A I 253,32 (sUVal)I).akiiro . . . tarp jatarüp~
müsay~ pakkhipitva -ati sandhamati niddhamati);
IV 169,1 (-ath' et~ bhikkhave puggalarp niddhamath'
etarp bhikkhave puggal~, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce,
Se niddhamath' etarp ... niddhamath' et~ ... ); Nidd I
478,25 (sUVal)I).akiiro jatarüpassa o!arik~ pi mal~ -ati
sandhamati niddhamati; Nidd-a I 453,3o: thülarp malarp
aggisarpyogena nlharati); - part.pr. (a) dhama(t), m.fn.,
Ja I 284,23* (te tato vidhaml -~; 284,25': mama pita
punappuna -anto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ento);
(b) dhamanta, dhamenta, m.fn., Ja I 122,28' (pal).<;lito
puriso parittarp aggirp . . . mukhavatena -anto
samughapeti va<;l<;lheti); II 110,7 (saii.khe -enta bheriyo
vadenta); Ap 391,12 (sankharp ... -anto sabbadivasarp,
Be, Se so; Ce, E e -ento ); Sp 621,13 (pal)Q.ana!ika, tarp
-anta kl!anti); Sv 391,28 (aggirp pahaya khajjopanakarp
-ento viya); 602,22 (bhastalli -anta); Ps V 54,12 (ali.gare
pakkhipitva aggirp datva na!ikaya -ento aggirp jaleyya);
Spk III 107,8 (vidhamati ti -anto viya naseti, Ce so; Be
Ee, Se -ento); (e) dhamamana1, m.fn., MI 243,9
(kammaragaggariya -amanaya adhimatto saddo hoti) =
SI 106,23 (or pass., cfSpk I 173,14: tassa vatena
puriyamauaya); Ja I 72,8 (Sakko devaraja
dhamadhama
vijayuttarasaiJ.khaq¡ -amano aHJliisi); VI 165,27'
(kammaragaggañ viya -amana susü ti saddaq¡ karonta;
or pass.); Spk I 206,24 (aggiq¡ pahaya khajjopanakaq¡
-amana viya, Be, Se so; Ce dhamamana; Ee dhamana);
- aor. 3 sg dhami, Ja I 171,28 (ekaq¡ na~adai_!<;Iakaq¡ ...
mukhena -i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee pumi); 284,19; Mhv 25:65
(saiJ.khaq¡ -i Phussadevo);- inf dhamituq¡, Ja VI 371,8
(aggina atthe sati khajjopanakaq¡ -ituq¡ ... na vanan ti);
- absol. dhamitva, dhametva, Ja I 172,2 (-itva, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee pumitva); 284,24' (saiJ.khaq¡ -itva);
Vism 144,23 (saka1asarlraq¡ -itva püritavatthi vi ya ...
anuparipphu!aq¡ hoti) = As 117,1 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
pharitva) :t Pa!is-a 182,34; Sv 811,22 (-itva); Ap-a 411,16
(sailkhaq¡ -etva, Be, Se so; Ce -ayati; Ee omits); -
pass. part.pr. (a) dhamayanta, mfn., (?) Ap 360,8
(vajjamanasu bherisu saiJ.khesu -ayantesu, eds so);
(b) dhamamana , mfn.
2 [cf S. dhamyamana,
dhmayamana], being blown; being smelted; Mi167,6
(khuddako pi pas~o pakatike aggimhi pakkhitto
divasaq¡ pi -amano na vi1ayaq¡ gacchati, Ee so; Ce
<;!ayhamano; Be, Se paccamano); Sv 706,3 (kai_!l)amüle
-amanassa saiJ.khayuga1assa pi); 879,13 ( -amanaq¡
niddosajatarüpaq¡ viya adhikataraq¡ sobhati) = Spk III
209,7 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dhammamanaq¡); Ap-a 77,10 (so
kira saiJ.kho . . . sakiq¡ vataq¡ gahapetva -aman o cattaro
mase saddaq¡ karitva nissaddo hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
dhamiyamano); - pp dhanta, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.)
smelted; A I 253,33 (taq¡ hoti jatarüpaq¡ -aq¡ sandhantaq¡
niddhantaq¡, Be, Ce so; E e ... aniddhantaq¡; Se adhantaq¡
asandhantaq¡ aniddhantaq¡); - 2. (n.) blowing; Ja I
284,23* (-enadhigata bhoga); - sudhanta, mfn., well-
smelted; M III 243,18 (jatarüpaq¡ dhantaq¡ sudhantaq¡
niddhantaq¡, Be, Ce so; Ee suddhantaq¡; Se omits);
Vism 377,7 (mudu hi cittaq¡ kammaníyaq¡ hoti
sudhantam iva suvai_ll)aq¡) = Sp 157,21 (Be, Ce so; Ee
suddhantam; Se sunidhantam); - caus. pr. 3 sg.
dhamapeti, Ja VI 7,19 (saiJ.khadhamake .. . saiJ.khe
-apenti); - absol. dhamapetva, Dhp-a 1 442,7 (aggiq¡
katva bhasta yojapetva sabbarattiq¡ -etva); - see also
atidhamati.
dhamadhama, ind. [ts; onomat.], a sound like the blowing
of bellows; Cp 3:9:4 (-a 1t1 evaq¡ saddayanto
mahasikhí . . . aggi, Be so; Se -aq¡; Ce, Ee dhüma-
dhümaq¡ janitv' evaq¡; Cp-a 233,28: dhamadhama iti
evaq¡ saddaq¡ karonto); Cp-a 106,31 (-a ti evaq¡ karoti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhamadhamayati evaq¡ karoti).
dhamadhamayati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from dhamadhama],
makes a noise like the blowing ofbellows;? Cp 1:10:16
(mahaka!!hapuñjo aditto -ati; Cp-a 106,31foll.: vayu-
vegasamuddha!ilnaJTl jalasikhanaq¡ vasena dhamadhama
ti evaq¡ karoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ati evaq¡ karoti);
Mil 117,21 (vata vayanti sahasa -anti).
dhamana 1, n. ffrom dhamati; cfS. dhamana], blowing;
Dhatum 325-326 (dhama pumo ca -e);- 0 -nii!ika,f or
-a, n., a tubefor blowing; Mp II 324,17 ([pa!icca] na!ika-
sai_!<;iasan ti -aq¡ e' eva parivattanasal)<;iasaq¡ ca, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee na~isai_!<;Iasan ti); - 0
-Vatp.sa, m., a reed for
blowing; Sv 618,17 = Ps IV 216,7; - 0 -sañkha, m., a
conch for blowing; Sp 543,23 (-o ... paníyasaiJ.kho ... );
Bv-a40,12.
461 dhamma
dhamana 2 , m. [ts], a reed; SAF: great reed, Arundo donax
L.; Abh 601 (na~o ca -o).
dhamani,f (ts], a bodily vessel; a vein; a nerve; Abh 279
(naharu ca sira -i); Th 408 (pariníto khuro asi -iq¡
chettum attano; Th-a II 173,34: kai_!!he -iq¡);
Vism 261,3s; Mp III 326,12 (vatthiq¡ sodhetí ti -iyo
suddha karoti); - 0 -santhata, 0 -Sai_!!hita, mfn. [cf S.
dhamanisantata], covered, spread with veins; with
prominent veins, ie emaciated; Dhp 395 (paq¡sukiila-
dharaq¡ jantuq¡ kisaq¡ -aq¡); Pv 13:1 (kisa -a, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se 0 -Sal)!hita; Pv-a 68,13foll.: nimmaq¡salohitataya
siraja1ehi vitthatagatta); Th 243 (kiso -o, Be, Ce so; Ee
-santato; Se 0 -Sai_!!hito; Th-a II 98,10: dhamaníhi
0
santhatagatto); Ja V 69,2* (brahmai_!aq¡ addakkhi ...
kisaq¡ -aq¡); - --gatta, mfn., with limbs covered with
prominent veins; Vin III 19,18 (tena vippa!isarena kiso
ahosi lükho dubbai,ll)O uppal)<;iuppai_!<;Iukajato --gatto );
M II 121,9; Ja V 95,19 (Sambu1a sapattirosena kisa
ahosi ... --gatta).
dhamaní, see sv dhammanL
dhamma 1, m. (and n.) [S., BHS dharma], dhamma denotes
(an interpretation of) the essential nature and reality of
existence and experience, the way things are: it is
descriptive and prescriptive; it denotes also an essential
attribute of men or animals; a quality or characteristic;
Abh 784 (-o sabhave pariyattipaññañayesu
saccappakatisu puññe ñeyye gul)acarasamadhisü pi
nissattatapattisu karai_!ado); see also Sv 99,3foll., PsI
I7,16foll., It-a I 37,2ofoll., Pa!is-a 18,1foll.,
Bv-a I3,4foll., As 38,23foll. and Sadd 560,zsfoll.;- for
Buddhists dhamma is used to denote an interlocking and
interdependent assembly of concepts: the true nature of
the world of experience, how that world works, and the
way to transcend it, as understood by the Buddha; the
progressive stages of understanding and nibbana; the
behaviour, the practice, required to achieve
understanding of the way the world of experíence works,
ie the way to reach arhatship, nibbana; the
understanding and practice taught by the Buddha, the
substance of his teaching, the texts of the Canon,
especially the Suttapitaka; all constituents of the world
of experíence, physical and mental, externa[ and
interna!, progressively more and more minutely
analysed; all constítuents of prescribed practice,
appropriate and beneficia! actions; prescriptions for the
members of the saiJ.gha; - for people generally dhamma
is an interpretation of the essential nature of existence
and experience; the way one should act, depending on
who one is, to maintain the way things are and should
be; duty; right; justíce; normative and beneficia[
actions; - l. (i) how the world of experience works, the
processes by which it works and is explained ( especially
as formulated in cattari ariyasaccam and
pa!iccasamuppada), and the possibility and way of
transcending ít, as understood by the Buddha and taught
by him (so that knowledge and understanding of it might
bríng enlightenment, arhatship, to others); Vin 1 2,3*
(yada have patubhavanti -a atapino jhayato brahmai_!assa
ath' assa kaiJ.kha vapayanti sabba yato pajanati
sahetudhammaq¡; Sp 954,19foll.: patubhavanti ti
dhamma
uppajjanti -a ti anulomapaccayakarapativedhasadhaka
bodhipakkhiyadhamma, atha va patubhavanti ti
pakasenti abhisamayavasena vyatta pakata honti, -a ti
caturariyasaccadhamma); ll ,2 (ida¡p dukkha~T~
ariyasaccan ti me bhikkhave pubbe ananussutesu -esu
cakkhu~T~ udapadi); 12,24 (ehi bhikkhii ti bhagava avoca
svakkhato -o cara brahmacariyaiTI samma dukkhassa
antakiriyaya ti); 15,31 (ida~T~ kho Yasa anupadduta¡p
ida~T~ anupassattha¡p ehi Y asa nislda -a¡p te desessaml
ti); 40,19 foil. (aha~T~ kho avuso navo acirappabbajito
adhunagato imaiTI dhammavinayaiTI na t' aha~T~ sakkomi
vittharena -a~T~ desitu~T~ api ca te sailkhittena attha~T~
vakkhaml ti . . . ye -a hetuppabhava tesaiTI hetu~T~
tathagato aha tesaiTI ca yo nirodho eva~T~vadl
mahasamru:to; Sp 975,19: ye -a hetuppabhava ti
hetuppabhava nama pañcakkhandha); III 1,18 (iti pi so
bhagava araha~T~ sammasarnbuddho . . . so ima¡p
loka¡p . . . saya¡p abhiñña sacchikatva pavedeti so -a¡p
deseti adikalyfu:!a¡p majjhe kalyfu)a¡p pariyosana-
kalyfu:la¡p sattha¡p savyañjana¡p ... ); DI 62,24foll.
(tathagato loke uppajjati ... so -a~T~ deseti ... ta~T~ -a¡p
sul,lati gahapati . . . ta¡p -a~T~ sutva tathagate saddha~T~
patilabhati . . . so aparena sarnayena . . . agarasma
anagariyaiTI pabbajati); li 55,14 (etassa Ananda -assa
ananubodha appativedha evaiTI aya¡p paja
tantakulakajata . . . apayaiTI duggati~T~ vm1pata~T~
Sa~T~Silra~T~ nativattati); MI 37,20 (svakkhato bhagavata
-o sandit\hiko akaliko ehipassiko opanayiko paccatta~T~
veditabbo viññiihl ti; cfVism 213,16foll.: svakkhato ti
imasmi~T~ hi pade pariyattidhammo pi sailgaha~T~ gacchati
itaresu lokuttaradhammo va); 167,31 (ñal,la¡p ca pana me
dassanaiTI udapadi akuppa me vimutti ayaiTI antima jati
n' atthi dani punabbhavo ti, tassa mayha~T~ bhikkhave
etad ahosi adhigato kho me ayaiTI -o garnbhiro duddaso
duranubodho santo Pru:tito atakkavacaro nipul,lo
Pru:t9itavedanlyo); 191 ,1 (yo paticcasamuppadaiTI passati
so -a~T~ passati yo -a¡p passati so paticcasamuppada¡p
passati ti); 435,15 (sakkayanirodhaya -e desiyamane);
II1 280, 1s (-a¡p vo bhikkhave desissami adikalyal,la¡p ...
cha ajjhattikani ayatanani veditabbani ... ; quoted
Sv 99,7 foil.: desanaya¡p [dharnmasaddo]); SI 23,19
(aññaya -a~T~; Spk I 64,11 foil.: catusaccadhamma¡p
janitva); II 17,24 (e te te .. . ubho ante anupagamma
majjhena tathagato -a~T~ deseti aVIJJapaccaya
sailkhara ... ); III 85,16 (bhagava, so -a~T~ deseti iti riipa~T~
1t1 riipassa samudayo 1t1 riipassa atthagamo 1t1
vedana ... );IV 48,9 (anupadaparinibbanattho hi bhikkhu
maya -o desito); A II 20,3o (yanniinaha¡p yo payaiTI -o
maya abhisambuddho tam eva -a¡p sakkatva garukatva
upanissaya vihareyyan ti); Khp 6:4 (khayaiTI viraga~T~
amata¡p Pru:tita~T~ yad ajjhaga Sakyarnuni samahito na
tena -en a sarn' atthi kiñci ida~T~ pi -e ratana¡p pal,llta!p)
= Sn 225; Sn 368 (viditva -a¡p; Pj II 364,27: -an ti
khandhayatanadibheda~T~ yathabhiitañfu)ena catusacca-
dhamma¡p va maggena viditva); Ja II 266,13* (yesaiTI -a
ajanita; 266,17': chaphassayatanakkhandhabhiita-
dhatubheda -a ajanita); III 396,29 (mahasatto kamesu
assada¡p ca adinava¡p ca pakasetva buddhali~aya -a¡p
desetva); Ap 467,23 (puno pi -a~T~ desesi khandhana~T~
udayavyaya~T~); 566,15 (na gamadhammo no nigamassa
462 dhamma
-o ... sabbassa lokassa sadevakassa eso va -o yadida¡p
aniccata); Mil 165,26 (evaiTI -e desiyarnane ye tattha
samma patipanna te bujjhanti ye pana miccha patipanna
te patanti); 404,8 (yogina yogavacarena paresaiTI -a¡p
desayamanena vinipata¡p bhayato dassayitabba~T~
nibbanaiTI khemato dassayitabba¡p); Vism 443,12 (imaya
pannaya khandhayatanadhatu-indriyasaccapaticca-
samuppadadibheda -a bhiimi); PsI 173,23 (dharru:tato -o,
vinipatitu~T~ appadanato ti vutta¡p hoti); III 195,16 (idha
sabbaññutañfu:!aiTI -o nama mahajanassa vyakarru:taJP
anudharnmo nama); Spk II 48,13 (-o ti pañcakkhandha-
paccayakaradhammo ); Pj I 21 ,2 (pUI,ll,lacando vi ya
buddho candakiral,lanikaro viya tena desito -o ... );
Th-a II 231 ,26 (kidiso -o tumhaka~T~ dese idani pavattati
ti . . . deva arnhaka~T~ dese buddharatanaiTI nama
uppannan ti); Mhv 5:67 (sambuddhabhasita~T~ -a~T~
samru:teraiTI apucchi ta¡p); cfPs I 17,19foll. (dittha-
dharnmo viditadhammo ti adisu [dharnmasaddo] saccesu
[vattati], quoting egVini !2,19foll.) t It-ai 37,23 t
Bv-a !3,1sfoll. (catusaccadharnme) t Sadd 56!,19foll.
(sacce);- !fe see agga- (sv agga\ dittha- (sv vldis 2);-
(ii) the ( stages to) freedom from the world of experience,
culminating in nibbana; DI 156,10 (bhikkhu ...
sotapanno hoti . . . sarnbodhiparayru:to. ayaiTI pi kho
Mahali -o uttaritaro ca Pru:t!tataro ca yassa
sacchikiriyahetu bhikkhii mayi brahmacariya¡p caranti);
M 1 203,28 (bhikkhu ... pathama¡p jhanaiTI upasarnpajja
viharati, aya¡p pi kho brahmal,la -o ñfu)adassanena
uttaritaro ca pal,lltataro ca); SI 71,21* (sata¡p ca -o na
jararn upeti; Spk I l38,2s: sata¡p -o nama nibbana¡p ta¡p
na jlrati ajaraiTI amatan ti) quoted Sadd 56!,31foll.
(dhammasaddo ... nibbane vattati); S II 280,31* (-o hi
isina¡p dhajo; Spk II 239,6 foil.: navavidhalokuttara-
dharnmo islnaiTI dhajo nama ti); A IIl 433,16foll. (chahi
bhikkhave -ehi sarnannagato bhikkhu abhabbo agga¡p
-a¡p arahatta~T~ sacchikatu~T~); Sn 1053 (kittayissami te
-a~T~; Pj II 591,1 foil.: nibbanadharnma¡p nibbanagamini-
patipadadharnmaiTI ca te desayissami); Thi 97 (addasa¡p
virajaiTI -a~T~ nibbana¡p padarn accuta~T~); Ja II 147,3
(apparnfu:!o buddho appamal,lO -o apparnal,lo sailgho ti;
147 ,s-: -o ti navavidho lokuttaro -o); Ps II 68,24 (-e ti
pariyattidharnme ca pativedhadhamme ca ...
pativedhadhamme kailkhamano vipassananissando
maggo nama magganissando phala¡p nama
sabbasailkharapatinissaggo nibbana¡p nama ti vadanti
tam atthi nu kho n' atthl ti kailkhati);- ifc see
uttarimanussa- (sv uttari); - (iii) (sg.) the behaviour,
conduct, practice required to realise and understand the
way the world of experience works; the way to
arahatship; Vin III 12,9 (yatha yatha kho aha¡p
bhagavata -a~T~ desita~T~ ajanami na-y-idaiTI sukaraiTI
agara¡p ajjhavasata ekantaparipUI,ll,laiTI . . . brahma-
cariyaiTI caritu~T~); 19,35 (nanu avuso bhagavata
anekapariyayena viragaya -o desito no saragaya); D III
39,13 (ko nama so bhante bhagavato -o yena bhagava
savake vineti); 119,18 (et' ayasma tatha patipajjatu yatha
te satthara -o desito paññatto ti); !95,6foll. (bhagava hi
bhante pal,latipata verarnaniya -a¡p deseti adinnadana
verarnal,liya -a¡p deseti kamesu micchacara verarnal,liya
-a~T~ deseti musavada verarnru:tiya -a~T~ deseti
dhamma
suramerayamajjapamadaghana veramm:¡.iya -aq¡ deseti);
245,12 (idh' avuso bhikkhuno mettaq¡ kayakammaq¡
paccupaghitaq¡ hoti sabrahmacañsu . . . ayaq¡ pi -o
sar~Iyo piyakaraJ)o ... ); MI 135,23 (evam eva kho
bhikkhave kullupamo maya -o desito nitthara!)atthaya
no gahal).atthaya); SI 214,33* (saddahano arahataq¡ -aq¡
nibbanapattiya; Spk I 331,26: yena pubbabhage kaya-
sucaritadibhedena aparabhage ca sattatiq¡sabodhi-
pakkhiyabhedena -ena arahanto buddha-
paccekabuddhasavaka nibbanaq¡ patta); It 98,19
(-enahaq¡ bhikkhave tevijjaq¡ brahmal).aq¡ paññapemi;
It-a 11 134,5foll. : -ena ti ñayena sammapatipatti-
sailkhatena hetuna karaJ)ena, yaya hi patipadaya tevijjo
hoti sa patipada idha -o ti veditabba, ka pana sa patipada
ti caral).asampada ca vijjasampada ca); Ja I 425,1 foil.
(Devadattena ... yaq¡ sama!) O Gotamo karoti na so -o
yaq¡ ahaq¡ karomi ayam eva-o ti); III 290,12* (-o rahado
akaddamo papaq¡ sedamalan ti vuccati; 290,22·:
pañcaslladasasllani tll).i sucaritani sattatiq¡sa-
bodhipakkhiyadhamma amatamahanibbanan ti sabbo
p' esa -o nama); Nidd I 234,3o (idh' ekacassa adhigata
honti cattaro satipaghana cattaro sammappadhana ... cha
abhiñña, tassa attho ñato -o ñato nirutti ñata); Ap 547,24
(nanu nama gahaghena kamaq¡ bhutva yathasukhaq¡
paccha jii).I).ena -o 'yaq¡ caritabbo subhaddako); 590,19
(-aq¡ care sucaritaq¡ na naq¡ duccaritaq¡ care); Mil228,6
(bhagava pansaya -am desento kathento
anupubbikathaq¡ pathamaq¡ tava danakathaq¡ katheti
paccha sllakathaq¡); Vism 12,6 (bhikkhu ...
abhisamacarikaq¡ -aq¡ aparipuretva
adibrahmacariyakaq¡ -aq¡ paripuressatl ti n' etaq¡
thanaq¡ vijjati; cf A III 14,23foll.); Mp I 85,9foll.
(suttantapariyayena tava dasa kusalakammapatha -o ...
tatha cattaro satipaghana cattaro sammappadhana cattaro
iddhipada pañcindriyani pañca ba1ani satta bojjhailga
ariyo aghailgiko maggo ti sattatiq¡sabodhipakkhiya-
dhamma -o nama); - (iv) (pl.) a quality or element of
behaviour or practice according to the Buddha 's
dhamma; a constituent of prescribed practice; an
element of the teaching; a doctrine; appropriate and
beneficia[ practice; Abh 85 (kusalaq¡ sukataq¡ sukkaq¡
puññaq¡ -am anitthiyaq¡ sucaritaq¡); D 11 119,3o (katame
ca te bhikkhave -a maya abhiññaya desita ...
seyyathidaq¡ cattaro satipatthana cattaro
sammappadhana cattaro iddhipada pañcindriyani pañca
balani satta bojjhailga ariyo aghailgiko maggo);
123,7* foil. (sllaq¡ samadhi pañña ca vimutti ca anuttara
anubuddha ime -a Gotamena yasassina, iti buddho
abhiññaya -am akkhasi bhikkhunaq¡); MI 60,7 (kathaq¡
ca bhikkhave bhikkhu -esu dhammanupassi viharati .. .
pañcasu nivaraJ)esu . . . pañcas' upadanakkhandhesu .. .
chasu ajjhattikabahiresu ayatanesu . . . sattasu
bojjhailgesu .. . catüsu ariyasaccesu; cfPatis-a 18,20:
dhammasaddo ... -esu dhammanupassi viharati ti adisu
nissattatayaq¡ [dissati]; = Sadd 561 ,lO foll. f. As 38,3o:
nissattanijjivatayaq¡; = Sadd 560,31foll.); 301,7 (ya
e' avuso ... sammavaca yo ca sammakammanto yo ca
samma-ajivo ime -a sllakkhandhe sailgahita); 494,zo
(dve -e uttariq¡ bhavehi samathaq¡ ca vipassanaq¡ ca);
11 174,7 (saccanupattiya pana ... katamo -o bahukaro);
463 dhamma
S I 86,29 (appamado . . . eko -o ubho atthe
samadhiggayha tighati ditthadhammikaq¡ e' eva atthaq¡
samparayikaq¡ ca ti); V 11,25 (agh' ime ... -a bhavita
bahullkata nibbanagama honti nibbanaparayana
nibbanapariyosana . . . sammadighi . . . sammasamadhi);
227,19foll. (katame ca bhikkhave bodhipakkhiya -a,
saddhindriyaq¡ bhikkhave bodhipakkhiyo -o taq¡
bodhaya saq¡vattati); A 11 34,19 foll. (yavata bhikkhave
-a sailkhata ariyo aghati.giko maggo tesaq¡ aggam
akkhayati ... yavata bhikkhave -a sailkhata va asailkhata
va virago tesaq¡ aggam akkhayati); Dhp 273 (virago
segho -anaq¡); Ud 36,6 (bhikkhu kalyal).amitto hoti
kaly~asaq¡pavailko, aparipakaya ... cetovimuttiya ayaq¡
pathamo -o paripakaya saq¡vattati); Pv 36:62 (sakkacca
-ani samacaranto mucceyya so niraya ca tamha;
Pv-a 242,26: -an1 ti pubbe kataq¡ papakammaq¡
abhibhavituq¡ samatthe aññadhamme); Th 179 (upasita
sappurisa suta -a abhil).haso); 929 (kusalanaq¡ ca -anaq¡
paññaya ca parikkhaya; Th-a III 77,1I[oll.: vivagassa
upanissayabhutanaq¡ vimokkhasambharanaq¡ anavajja-
dhammanaq¡); 1024 (dvasitiq¡ buddhato gal).hiq¡ dve
sahassani bhikkhuto caturasiti sahassani ye 'me -a
pavattino; Th-a III 117,13: dhammakkhandha); Ja 11
22,25* (bhavayaq¡ kusa1aq¡ -aq¡ yogakkhemassa pattiya;
23,10': sattatiq¡sabodhipakkhiyasailkhataq¡ -aq¡);
VI 58,14* (kammaq¡ vijjaq¡ ca -aq¡ ca sakkatvana
paribbaja; 58,25': kasil).aparikammasati.khataq¡ samal).a-
dhammaq¡); Nidd I 492,14 (pantesu va senasanesu
aññataraññataresu va adhikusalesu -esu aratiq¡ saheyya
abhibhaveyya); Patis I 88,6foll. (saddhindriyaq¡ -o
viriyindriyaq¡ -o ... ); II 166,1 (cattaro satipaghana
cattaro sammappadhana . . . cattari ca samaññaphalani
nibbanaq¡ ca ime -a lokuttara); Vibh 250,1 (satta
bojjhailga . . . ime vuccanti bodhipakkhika -a);
Vism 45,7* (tasma hi pil).9e sayanasane ca ape ca
sailghatirajupavahane etesu -esu anupalitto); - (v) the
substance of the teaching of the Buddha; the teaching as
collected in the Canon; the texts; Vin I 139,s
(agacchantu bhaddanta icchami danaq¡ ca datuq¡ -aq¡ ca
sotuq¡ bhikkhu ca passitun ti); 196,34 (patibhatu taq¡
bhikkhu -o bhasitun ti, evaq¡ bhante ti kho ay asma Sol).o
bhagavato patisul).itva sabban' eva aghakavaggikani
sarena abhasi); 11 I08,22 (na bhikkhave ayatakena
gitassarena -o gayitabbo); 285,4foll. (handa mayaq¡
avuso -aq¡ ca vinayaq¡ ca sailgayama pure adhammo
dippati -o patibahiyati ... ); 289,37 (therehi bhikkhi.ihi -e
ca vinaye ca sailgite); IV 14,3o (yo pana bhikkhu
anupasampannaq¡ padaso -aq¡ vaceyya pacittiyan ti;
15,9: -o nama buddhabhasito savakabhasito isibhasito
devatabhasito atthupasaq¡hito dhammupasaq¡hito ); 15,27
(upasaka aramaq¡ agacchanti dhammasavanaya, -e
bhasite thera bhikkhu yathaviharaq¡ gacchanti); 21,1s (yo
pana bhikkhu matugamassa -aq¡ deseyya pacittiyan ti);
V 163,7 (samaq¡ va -o bhasitabbo paro va ajjhesitabbo
ariyo va tul).hibhavo natimaññitabbo); D III 272,9*
(dasuttararp pavakkhami -aq¡ nibbanapattiya;
Sv 1054,33: -an ti suttaq¡); SI 156,3 (katharp hi nama
satthari sammukhibhute savako -aq¡ desessat1 ti); 198,33
(-asmirp bhaññamanasmirp); 11269,23 (thera bhikkhu ...
gamaq¡ va nigamaq¡ va pil).9aya pavisanti te tattha -aq¡
dhamma
bhasanti); III 96,7 (vicayaso desito bhikkhave maya -o;
Spk II 306,4: -o ti sasanadhammo); V 67,24foll.
(tatharüpanarp ... bhikkhünarp -arp sutva ... tarp -arp
anussarati anuvitakketi; Spk III 143,11: tarp -an ti tarp
tesarp ovadanusasanidhammarp); A I 185,1o (aññato
maya samai).anarp Sakyaputtiyanarp -o); 249,2
(appasadda ayasmanto hotha thero bhikkhu -arp ca
vinayarp ca bhai).atí ti); 11 185,8 (idha bhikkhave bhikkhu
-arp pariyapul).ati suttarp geyyarp veyyakarai).arp gatharp
udanarp itivuttakarp jatakarp abbhutadhammarp
vedallarp; quoted Sv 99,8foll.: pariyattiyarp
[dhammasaddo vattati], PsI 17,18foll., It-a I 37,22,
Pa~is-a !8,18foll., Bv-a !3,6foll., As 38,24 foll., and
Sadd 560,26foll., 561,8foll., 561,18foll.); Dhp 82 (evarp
-ani sutvana vippasldanti pal).<;lita; Dhp-a 11 153,4: -ani ti
desanadhammani); Sn 326 (attharp -arp sarpyamarp
brahmacariyarp anussare e' eva samacare ca; Pj 11
333,2o: atthan ti bhasitattharp -an ti paJidhammarp);
Pa~is 11 193,29 (tassa atthe ca -e ca niruttiya ca pa~ibhane
ca na añño koci sakkoti abhisambhaviturp); Vibh 294,22
(idha bhikkhu -arp janati suttarp geyyarp ... vedallarp
ayarp vuccati dhammapa~isambhida); Sp 22,25 foil. (-o ti
p~i attho ti tassa yeva attho ... aparo na yo -o ti hetu) t
Sv 20,9 (-o ti tan ti); Ps 11 68,24 (-e ti pariyattidhamme ca
pa~ivedhadhamme ca, pariyattidhamme kailkhamano
tepi~akabuddhavacanarp caturasiti dhammakkhandha-
sahassani ti vadanti atthi nu kho etarp n' atthi ti
kailkhati); Mhv 5:67 (sambuddhabhasitarp -arp
samai).erarp apucchi tarp); - esp. the texts of the
Suttapi~aka; Sp !5,13foll. (-arp sailgayantehi karp
pugga1arp dhurarp katva -o sailgayitabbo ti, bhikkhü
Anandattherarp dhurarp katva ti aharpsu ); 17,3 (tattha
vinayapi~akarp vinayo avasesarp buddhavacanarp -o);
Sv 1047,nfoll. (tattha -o ti suttapi~akarp abhidhammo ti
satta pakarai).ani vinayo ti ubhato vibhailgo abhivinayo ti
khandhakaparivara, atha va suttapi~akarp pi
abhidhammapi~akarp pi -o eva maggaphalani
abhidhammo sakalarp vinayapi~akarp vinayo kilesa-
vüpasamakaral).arp abhivinayo); - (vi) a constituent of
experience; an aspect or quality of existence; physical
sensation; a mental state or quality (good or bad);
(sometimes merely) thing, phenomenon, matter; the non-
independent, conditioned constituents of processes and
events, progressively more and more minutely analysed
into fundamental types of event or fundamental
regularities; Vin I 8,29* (jita me papaka -a tasma 'harp
Upaka jino); III 4,7 (so kho aharp brahmai).a vivicc' eva
kamehi vivicca akusalehi -ehi savitakkarp savicararp
vivekajarp pltisukharp pa~amarp jhanarp upasampajja
vihasirp; Sp 143,4foll.: ki1esakamehi sabbakusalehi va
vivicca ti attho yujjati, tena cittaviveko vutto hoti);
V 149,23* (gati miganarp pavanarp akaso pakkhinarp gati
vibhavo gati -anarp nibbanarp arahato gati; Sp 1353,26:
sabbesarp pi sailkhatadhammanarp vinaso va tesarp gati);
DI 70,11 (abhijjhadomanassa papaka akusala -a
anvassaveyyurp); MI 91,15 (ko su nama me -o ajjhattarp
appahino yena me ekada 1obhadhamma pi cittarp
pariyadaya tighanti); 228,14 (sabbe sailkhara anicca
sabbe -a anatta ti); 267,4 (tarp ca cetovimuttirp
paññavimuttirp yathabhütarp na ppajanati yatth' assa te
464 dhamma
papaka akusala -a aparisesa nirujjhanti); 274,5
(avarai).iyehi -ehi cittarp parisodhessama ti); 292,3o (ya
e' avuso pañña yarp ca viññal).arp ime -a sarpsagha
udahu visarpsagha); 296,9 (yada kho avuso imarp kayarp
tayo -a jahanti ayu usma ca viññiil).arp athayarp kayo
ujjhito avakkhitto seti); III 230,29 (yo kamapa~isandhi-
sukhino somanassanuyogo hino ... sadukkho eso -o sa-
upaghato ... ); SI 70,25 (lobho ... purisassa -o ajjhattarp
uppajjamano uppaJJati ahitaya dukkhaya
aphasuviharaya); IV 76,25 (bhikkhuno cakkhuna rüparp
disva uppajjanti papaka akusala -a sarasasailkappa
sarpyojaniya); A I 27,9 (yarp dighisampanno puggalo
kañci -arp attato upagaccheyya n' etarp ~anarp vijjati);
III 421,2o (cha bhikkhave -e appahaya abhabbo
arahattarp sacchikaturp ... thinarp middharp uddhaccarp
kukkuccarp assaddhiyarp pamadarp); V 144,6 (tayo
bhikkhave -a 1oke na sarpvijjeyyurp na tathagato 1oke
uppajjeyya araharp sammasambuddho ... katame tayo,
jati ca jara ca marai).arp ca); Khp 6:1 O (tayas su -a jahita
bhavanti sakkayadighi vicikicchitarp ca sllabbatarp va pi
yad atthi kiñci); Dhp 1 (manopubbailgama -a
manose~~a manomaya; Dhp-a I 22,14foll.: imasmirp
~hane nissattanijjivadhammo adhippeto so atthato tayo
arüpino khandha vedanakkhandho saññakkhandho
sailkharakkhandho ti); 109 (cattaro -a va<;l<;lhanti ayu
Vai).I).O sukharp ba1arp); It 120,15* (samavekkhita va
-anarp khandhanarp udayabbayarp; It-a 11 184,24: -anan
ti sattasuññanarp); Ja III 98,24* (labho alabho ayaso y aso
ca ninda pasarpsa ca sukharp ca dukkharp ete anicca
manujesu -a); Pa~is 11 150,11foll. (cakkhurp -o ñal).arp
-o pañña -o vijja -o aioko -o ime pañca -a
dhammapa~isambhidaya arammal).a e' eva honti gocara
ca); 234,25 (idh' ekacco ~hapetva kayarp ~apetva
vedanarp ~hapetva cittarp tadavasese -e aniccato
anupassati no niccato ); Dhs p. 1,4 (kusa1a -a akusala -a
avyakata -a; quoted PsI 17,27: [dhammasaddo] sabhave
[vattati], It-a I 38,6, Pa~is-a 18,4, Bv-a 13,13foll. and
Sadd 561,1foll.; As 38,23foll.: dhammasaddo ... idhapi
nissattanijjivatayam eva vattati); Dhs 121 (tasmirp kho
pana samaye -a honti khandha honti ayatanani honti ...
maggo hoti ... cittarp hoti ... ; quoted Sv 99,10: nissatte
[dhammasaddo vattati], Pa~is-a 18,19foll.: nissattatayarp,
and PsI 17,28, It-a I 38,3, Bv-a 13,15: suññatayarp);
Vibh 293,24 foll. (y e -a jata bhüta ... imesu -esu ñal).arp
atthapa~isambhida, yehi -ehi te -a jata bhüta . . . tesu
-esu ñal).arp dhammapa~isambhida); Kv 339,27 (cetasiko
-o danan ti); Mil49,16 (yarp tattha maharaja oJarikarp
etarp rüparp ye tattha sukhuma cittacetasika -a etarp
naman ti); 253,9 (das' ime maharaja kayanugata -a
bhave bhave kayarp anudhavanti anuparivattanti ...
sHarp Ul).harp jighaccha ptpasa uccaro passavo
thinamiddharp jara vyadhi marai).arp); 289,5foll.
(pañcavlsati kho pan' ime maharaja cittadubballkaral).a
-a yehi dubballkatarp cittarpna samma samadhiyyati
asavanarp khayaya .. . kodho maharaja cittassa
dubballkarai).O -o ... ); Vism 441,1 (yarp kiñci
paccayasambhütarp nibbanarp bhasitattho vipako kiriya
ti ime pañca -a attho ti veditabba); 441,4 (-o ti pi
sailkhepato paccayass' etarp adhivacanarp); 532,3o foil.
(yo hi -o yassa -assa ~itiya va uppattiya va upakarako
dhamma
hoti so tassa paccayo ti vuccati); 604,1 (na amabhavato
im~ bhaval!l ito va punabbhav~ koci -o sankamati);
Sv 976,26 (vina paccayena -o nama n' atthi); 985,33
(abhijjha vyapado micchactinhi ti tayo cetanasampayutta
-a manoduccarital!l); 991,29 (atitadibhedo ca nama ay~
-an~ hoti na kalassa); cfPatis-a 18,23foll. (hetumhi
ñfu:ial!l dhammapatisambhida ti adisu [dhammasaddo]
paccaye [dissati], quoting Vibh 293,18) f. As 38,26
(hetumhi [dissati]) = Sadd 560,27 foll.; Patis-a 18,24 foll.
(thita va sa dhatu dhammanhitata dhammaniyamata ti
adisu [dhammasaddo] paccayuppanne [dissati], quoting
eg S II 25,19foll.) = Sadd 561,14foll.; As 39,1!foll.
(attano pana sabhaval!l dharentl ti -a, dhariyanti va
paccayehi dhariyanti va yathasabhavato ti -a); -
(vii) mental constructs, concepts, ideas, what is to be
cognised by the mind, that which is the object of mental
activity; Abh 94 (riip~ saddo gandharasa phasso -o);
Vin I 34,26 (cakkhul!l bhikkhave adittal!l riipa aditta ...
mano aditto -a aditta); D II 281,19 (manoviññeyy~
-al!l p' ahal!l ... duvidhena vadami sevitabb~ pi
asevitabbal!l pi ti); MI 112,9 (man~ e' avuso paticca
-e ca uppajjati manoviññfu:ial!l; quoted Sadd 561,3ofoll.:
dhammasaddo ... visaye [vattati]); 112,13 (atltanagata-
paccuppannesu manoviññeyyesu -esu); SI 116,4 (tav'
eva papima mano tava -a tava manosamphassa-
viññfu)ayatanal!l); III 26,22joll. (riipal!l ... pariññeyyo -o
vedana pariññeyyo -o ... ); IV 129,21 (riipa ... sadda ...
gandha . . . rasa . . . phoghabba . . . -a na tumhakal!l te
pajahatha); 195,3o (tato cittal!l nivaraye manoviññeyyehi
-ehi); A V 30,2o (kayena phonhabbal!l phusitva manasa
-~ viññaya); Nidd I 451,12 (atitanagatapacccuppannal!l
upadaya sabbe -a sabbakarena buddhassa bhagavato
ñfu)amukhe apathal!l agacchanti; quoted PsI 17,31:
[dhammasaddo] ñeyye [vattati], It-a I 38,4 and
Bv-a 13,17); Mil54,21 (yo bhante abbhantare jivo
cakkhuna riip~ passati . . . manasa -~ vijanati);
Sadd 561,25 (kusa1a -a ti adisu ñeyye ); - (viii) for the
sangha: a rule; the offence against that rule; the
punishment or reparation for that offence; a procedure;
Vin I 317,2 (aññatrapi -a kamm~ karonti aññatrapi
vinaya .. . aññatrapi satthu sasana ... ); III 109,21
(uddittha kho ayasmanto cattaro parajika -a yes~
bhikkhu aññataral!l va aññatar~ va apajjitva na 1abhati
bhikkhühi saddhil!l sal!lvasal!l; quoted Sadd 561,24:
dhammasaddo ... apattiyal!l [vattati]); 187,1 (ime kho
panayasmanto dve aniyata -a uddesal!l agacchanti;
quoted PsI 17,3o: [dhammasaddo] apattiy~ [vattati]; f.
Bv-a 13,16); IV 122,3 (sikkhamana nama dve vassani
chasu -esu sikkhitasikkha); 144,12 (ay~ pi kira -o
suttagato suttapariyapanno anvaddhamas~ uddesal!l
agacchati ti); 207,6 (uddiqha kho ayasmanto satta
adhikarai_J.asamatha -a); V 172,27 (saha kathinassa
atthara pannarasa -a jayanti attha matika dve palibodha
pañcanis~sa); 174,27 (pubbakarai.J.~ sattahi -ehi
sangahit~ dhovanena vicarai_J.ena chedanena
bandhanena sibbanena rajanena kappakarai_J.ena); A II
241 ,zzfoll. (anapanno va parajikal!l -al!l na apajissati
apanno va parajikal!l -~ yathadhammal!l patikarissati);
Sp 590,15 (tattha -o ti bhüt~ vatthu vinayo ti codana
sarai_J.a ca satthu sasanan ti ñattisampada ca
465 dhamma
anussavanasampada ca); 865,3o (yathadhamman ti yo
yassa adhikarai_J.assa vüpasamanaya -o vutto ten' eva
-ena ti attho); Mp I 85,27 (vinayapariyayena pana
bhütena vatthuna codetva saretva yathapatiññaya
kattabb~ kammal!l -o nama); II 170,4 (aparaddhal!l
maya ti ñatva pi yo -o t~ na karoti dal).<;lakamm~
aharitva accayal!l na deseti na khamapeti); 297,11
(upajjhayal!l vanditva bhante konamo ay~ -o ti pucchi,
patimokkho nama avuso ti); - esp. the special
requirements (garudhamma) imposed on bhikkhunis;
Vin IV 52,15foll. (vassasatupasampannaya bhikkhuniya
tadahupasampannassa bhikkhuno abhivadanal!l
paccughanal!l añjalikammal!l samicikamm~ katabbal!l
ayal!l pi -o sakkatva garukatva manetva püjetva
yavajival!l anatikkamaniyo); Sp 791,17 (garudhammehi ti
garukehi -ehi, te hi garaval!l katva bhikkhunihi
sampaticchitabbatta garudhamma ti vuccanti); - ifc see
garu- (sv garu 2); - 2. an interpretation of reality of
other religious teachers or philosophers; their teaching;
a non-Buddhist doctrine; a theory; Vin I 101,6
(aññatitthiya paribbajaka catuddase pannarase anhamiya
ca pakkhassa sannipatitva -~ bhasanti te manussa
upasankamanti dhammasavanaya; Sp 1034,25: yal!l
tesarp. kattabbakattabb~ tal!l kathenti); D 1 189,26 (na
kho pana mayal!l kiñci samai_J.assa Gotamassa
ekal!lsik~ -~ desit~ ajanama sassato loko ti va
asas sato loko ti va ... ); III 119,4 (idha ... sattha ca hoti
asammasambuddho -o ca durakkhato duppavedito
aniyyaniko anupasamas~vattaniko asamma-
sambuddhappavedito); M 1 64,1sfoll. (aññatitthiya
paribbajaka eval!l vadeyyul!l amhakal!l pi kho avuso
atthi satthari pasado so amhak~ sattha amhakal!l pi
atthi -e pasado so amhak~ -o ... ); 164,3 (na cirass' eva
khippam eva tal!l -~ pariyapul).irp.; Ps 11 171,10: tal!l
-an ti tal!l tes~ samayatantirp.); 168,26* (paturahosi
Magadhesu pubbe -o asuddho samalehi cintita); SI
133,34* (ito bahiddha pasal).<;la dighisu pasidanti ye na
tesal!l -al!l rocemi na te -assa kovida); Ud 67,24 (te
bhal).<;lanajata ... vitudanta viharanti ediso -o n' ediso -o
n' ediso -o ediso -o ti); Sn 94 (asatal!l -al!l roceti t~
parabhavato mukh~; Pj II 169,17: asat~ -o nama
dvasatthi ditthigatani dasakusalakammapatha va); 880
(parassa ce -am ananujan~; Nidd I 287,19: parassa -al!l
dighil!l patipadal!l maggal!l ananujananto ); Nidd 1
69,6foll. (anariyan~ eso -o n' eso -o ariyan~
balanal!l eso -o n' eso -o pai,J.<;litan~ ... ); Mp III
89,1sfoll. (satal!l ca bhikkhave -o ti catusatipanhanadi-
bhedo sattatil!lsabodhipakkhiyadhammo asat~ca -o ti
dvasanhiditthigatabhedo asaddhammo);- 3. (i) the way
things are; a natural law, custom, tradition; the
essential nature, the way, of men or animals; S I 18,26*
(te mate su na miyanti ... appasmil!l ye pavecchanti esa
-o sanantano; Spk 1 58,31foll.: eso porfu)ako -o
sanantanan~ va pal).<;litanal!l -o ti); Dhp 5 (verani ...
averena ca sammanti esa -o sanantano ); Th 552 (nay~
ajjatano -o n' acchero na pi abbhuto); Jaii 28,13* (-o
balavat~; 28,17': esa -o balavat~ ayal!l issaran~
sabhavo pavel).idhammo va); 355,7* (esa -o sigalanal!l
yal!l pitva ohadamase; 355,9·: esa sabhavo); III 120,23*
(es' asmakal!l ku1e -o pitupitamaho sada); IV 222,s•
 466
dhamma
(rat1:he roe ay ase vasal)1 tal)1 -al)1 nisamehi me; 222,11-:
-an ti . , . tval)1 janapadacarittadhammal)1 nisamehi);
VI 528,3* (tasma diital)1 na hananti esa -o sanantano );
Sp 196,14 (nassa vinipato -o ti avinipatadhammo);
221 ,s foil. (gamadha mman ti gamanal)1 -al)1
gamavasi kamanuss anal)1 -an ti vuttal)1 hoti); PsI
17,26 foil. (iatidhamma .. . jaradham ma ti adisu
[dhammasaddo] pakatiyal)1 [vattati], quoting eg SI
88,21foll.) t Bv-a 13,12foll. t Patis-a 18,21foll. (vikare)
= Sadd 561,12foll.; Mp 1 380,1 (puttaka ahal)1 imal)1
mara~al)1 tav' eva uppannan ti cintesil)1 na pan' etal)1
tav' eva, mahajanasadhara~o esa -o ti); - ifc see
2 1
kumarika-, gama- (svv gama , gama\ dathadha mma ,
mitta-; - frequentl y ifc: having the property of; subject1
to; liable to; see anavatti-, khiyanad hamma
1 2 2 samadiyatha -ena kammant e ca vohare ca payojetha
(sv khiyana ), khiyanad hamma (sv khiyana ), cavana-,
1
jara-, jati- (sv jati ), nassana-, nirodha-, bhijjana-,
bhedana-, mara~a-, samudaya-; see also
udayabbayadhammakatta (sv udaya); - diqhe (va)
dhamme: in this existence; in this world of experience;
DI 51,19 (sakka nu kho bhante evam eva dighe va -e
sandinhikal)1 samaññaphalal)1 paññapetun ti); Ili 97,21
(dhammo hi Vaset1:ha settho janetasmil)1 dit1:he e' eva -e
abhisamparayal)1 ca); MI 4 7,24 (avijja¡p. pahaya vijjal)1
uppadetva dighe va -e dukkhass ' antakaro hoti); 62,36
(tassa dvinna¡p. phalanam aññatara¡p. phala¡p.
patikaii.kha¡p. dighe va -e añña sati va upadisese
anagamita); Sn 141 (dighe va -e garayha samparay e ca
duggati); Th 1263 (dinhe va -e yo vicikicchana¡p.
chetta); Ja III 469,1o (ditthe va -e manussapeto jato
'smi); IV 338,8* (dit1:he va -e labhate pasal)1sa¡p. sagga¡p.
ca so ya ti sarirabheda); Patis I 161,20 (yo ca ditthe va -e
araha); Mil 290,24 (sabbe pi te ditthe va -e vipakal)1
anubhavanti); Vism 239,18 (sace dighe va -e amata¡p.
naradheti kayassa bheda sugatiparayano hoti); - see
2
also ditthadhamma (sv .Jctis ); - (ii) the way things
ought to be; the way one should act (depending on who
one is); right, appropriate conduct; duty; what is right;
law, justice; DIII 83,18 (-o hi Vasegha segho
janetasmi¡p. dighe e' eva dhamme abhisamparayal)1 ca);
95,23 (khattiyo pi saka¡p. -a¡p. garahamano agarasma
anagariyal)1 pabbajati sama~o bhavissami ti); M II
74,2sfoll. (dhammiko dhammaraja -e thito maharaja
-a¡p. carati brahma~agahapatikesu negamesu e' eva
janapadesu ca); SI 34,1* (kammal)1 vijja ca -o ca sila¡p.
jivitam uttama¡p. etena macea sujjhanti na gottena
dhanena va; cfSpk I 89,16foll.: -o ti samadhipakkhika
-a ... atha va ... -o ti vayamasatisamadhayo ); 42,9* (-o
suci~~o sukham avahati; Spk I 97,26: -o ti dasakusala-
kammapatho) quoted PsI 17,29 ([dhammasaddo] puññe
[vattati]) t Bv-a 13,1s; SI 167,7* (sampassatal)1
brahma~a n' esa -o); A I 109,23 (ko pana bhante rañño
cakkavattissa dhammik assa dhammar añño raja ti, -o
bhikkhii ti); 153,2* (idha -a¡p. caritvana magga¡p.
sugatigaminal)1); II 18,19* (chanda dosa bhaya moha yo
-aq¡ ativattati); Dhp 64 (yavajival)1 pi ce balo pa~¡)itaq¡
payirupasati na so -aq¡ vijanati); Sn 312 (adüsikayo
haññanti -a dhal)1santi yajaka); Vv 32:9 (patisu -al)1
pacarama sabba patibbata yattha bhavanti itthiyo );
Th 304 (adhammo niraya¡p. neti -o papeti suggati¡p.;
dhamma
quoted Sv 99,6•: gu~e dhammasaddo, As 38,28* and
Sadd 560,29 t Patis-a 18,14*, Sadd 561,5 foil.: puññe); Ja 1
176,29 (maharaja yal)1 tumhe karotha nayal)1 -o ti);
280,4* (sacca¡p. -o dhit! cago; 280,s-: -o ti vicar~apañña
evaq¡ kate idaq¡ nama bhavissasi ti esa te vicar~apañña)
quoted Ps I 17 ,24* ([ dhammasaddo] paññaya [vattati]) t
Bv-a 13,11' t Sadd 561,3; Ja II 309,15 (sace attano -e
thassati pub be sadisa va bhavissati); Illl 05,22*
(ubhinnal)1 vacanal)1 sutva yatha -o tatha kare; 106,s-:
yatha -o ti yatha vinicchayasabhavo 1:hito tatha kareyya);
425,27* (-o mato; 426,1-: -o ti jetthapacayanadhammo
e' eva tividhasucaritadhammo ca); IV 94,4' (nago .. ,
rañño dasarajadhammagathaya -aq¡ desetva); 113,13
(isipabbajjaq¡ pabbajitva -al)1 caritva); !77,2foll.
(raghavasino sannipatetva danal)1 detha silaq¡
daharakale yeva sippani uggal_J.hatha dhanal)1 uppadeth a
gamakütakammaq¡ pisul_J.akammaq¡ ma karittha c~¡)a
pharusa ma ahuvattha matupaghanal)1 pitupaghana¡p.
piiretha kule jeghapac ayino bhavatha ti -a¡p. desetva);
V 100,3* (n' esa -o maharaja ativelaq¡ pamajjasi; 101,12':
maharaja esa poriil).akarajiina¡p. -o na hoti); 145,35'
(p~¡)ito kulaputto . . . catupaccayadanadhammika-
rakkhavaral_J.asaq¡vidhanasaii.khataq¡ sam~abrahmal_J.esu
-al)1 careyya); 220,10* (yath' ev' idaq¡ mayha tatha
paresaq¡ so evaq¡ janati sa vedi -aq¡); 227,14 (evaq¡
Ahiparakasenapatina rañño -e desite raja Ummadantiya
patibaddhacittal)1 vinodesi); 276,19* (raja carahi -aq¡;
276,2s-: -an ti ito patthaya pa~atipatadini pañca verani
pahaya danadini puññani karohi); 509,24* (na te santo ye
na bhal_J.anti -a¡p.; 510,7'foll.: ye pucchita sabhaval)1 na
vadanti na te pal).¡}ita nama, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
saccasabhaval)1); VI 88,7* (n' eso -o maharaja n' eta¡p.
amhesu kappati; 88,9-: -o ti sabhavo kar~aq¡ va); 244,2*
(sacca¡p. ca -o ca damo ca cago gul_J.a mam' ete pakata
puriil).a; cf244,6-: -o ti tividhasucaritadhammo e' eva
kasil_J.aparikammajjhanadhammo ca); 495,24* (n' esa -o
maharaja ya¡p. tvaq¡ gaccheyy a ekako; quoted
Sadd 561,2s: [dhammasaddo] yuttiya¡p. vattati); Pj II
414,11 (yacana hi brahm~anaq¡ bhogapariyesane -o, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee bhogapariyesano); - ifc see khatta-
2 (iii) good
(sv khatta\ ñati- (sv ñati ), mitta-; -
practice; a good quality or characteristic or attainment;
Abh 85 (kusala¡p. sukatal)1 sukkal)1 puññaq¡ -am
anitthiyal)1 sucarita¡p.); V in II 248,18 (codakena ...
bhikkhun a para¡p. codetukamena pañca -e ajjhatta¡p.
paccavekkhitva paro codetabbo . . . parisuddhakaya-
samacaro nu kho 'mhi ... ); 251,3 (cuditen' Upali
bhikkhun a dvisu -esu patitthatabbal)1 sacce ca akuppe ca
ti); MIl 5,26 (kati pana tva¡p. Udayi mayi -e
samanupassasi yehi mama savaka sakkaronti
garukaronti ... );S IV 337,18 (ekacco tapassi ... pabbajito
hoti app eva nama kusalaq¡ -a¡p. adhigacch eyyal)1 app
eva nama uttariman ussadham ma alamariyañal_J.adassana-
visesaq¡ sacchikareyyan ti); A IV 140,6 (sattahi
bhikkhav e -ehi samannagato bhikkhu vinayadharo hoti);
Dhp 384 (yada dvayesu -esu paragii hoti brahmal_J.o ath'
assa sabbe sa¡p.yoga atthaq¡ gacchanti janato;
cfDhp-a IV 140,11 foil.: dvidha thitesu samatha-
vipassanadhammesu) t Ud 5,8* (sakesu -esu;
dhamma
cfUd-a 68,23joll.); Ja I 280,3* (yass' ete caturo -a
vanarinda yatha tava sacca!]l -o dhiti cago; 280.6·: caturo
-a ti cattaro guJ]a); V 221 ,27* (sata!]l ca -ani sukittitani;
225,28·: satana!]l buddhadinaq¡ khantimettabhavana-
silacarasaii.khatani -ani); Nidd I 78,24 (araha imehi
dhoneyyehi -ehi upeto); Ps 11 380,22joll. (satthu kayiko
samacaro vima!]lsakassa cakkhuviññeyyo -o nama
vacasiko samacaro sotaviññeyyo -o nama); - ifc see
dhuta- (sv dhunati); - (iv) a quality or characteristic;
any element of behaviour or practice or attainment,
Vin I 93,27 (anujanami bhikkhave upasampadentena
tassa antarayike -e pucchituq¡ . . . san ti te evarilpa
abadha . . . manusso si puriso si . . . paripUJ]J.lam te
pattacivaraq¡ kiq¡namo si konamo te upajjhayo ti); 103,9
(sampajanamusavado kho panayasmanto antarayiko -o
vutto bhagavata); 11 237,16joll. (aHh' ime bhikkhave
mahasamudde acchariya abbhuta -a ye disva disva asura
mahasamudde abhiramanti); III 3,15 (tapaniyahaq¡
brahmaJ]a papake akusa1e -e vadami kayaduccarita!]l
vaciduccaritaq¡ manoduccarita!]l); 9,31 (yato ca kho
Sariputta idh' ekacce asavanhaniya -a sali.ghe
patubhavanti atha sattha savakanaq¡ sikkhapadaq¡
paññapeti uddisati patimokkhaq¡); DI 244,23 (tevijja
brahmaJ]a ye -a brahmaJ]akaraJ]a te -e pahaya
vattamana); 1175,27 (tatrahaq¡ Vajjinaq¡ ime satta
aparihaniye -e desesiq¡); liT 90,17 (papaka vata bho -a
sattesu patubhüta); 266,27 (dasa nathakaraJ]a -a); MI
95,19 (katame e' avuso dovacassakaraJ]a -a); II 199,4
(brahmana . . . pañca -e paññapenti puññassa kiriyaya
kusa1assa aradhanaya . . . saccaq¡ . . . tapaq¡ ...
brahmacariyaq¡ . . . ajjhenaq¡ . . . caga!]l); 242,23 (etaq¡
pan' avuso -aq¡ appahaya nibbanaq¡ sacchikareyya ti;
Ps IV 32,1: -an ti eta!]l ka1ahabhaJ]~anadhammaq¡); A I
51,14 (ahirikaq¡ ca anottappaq¡ ca, ime kho bhikkhave
dve -a kaJ]ha ti); 78,5 (methunadhammasamapattiya ca
vijayanassa ca, imesa!]l kho bhikkhave dvinnaq¡ -anaq¡
atitto apparivano matugamo kalaq¡ karotl ti); 1166,3
(bhoga me uppajjantu saha dhammena ti ayaq¡ parhamo
-o igho kanto manapo dullabho 1okasmiq¡); Dhp 87
(kaJ]haq¡ -aq¡ vippahaya sukkaq¡ bhavetha paJ]~ito;
Dhp-a 11 162,6: kaJ]haq¡-an ti kayaduccaritadibheda!]l
akusa1adhammaJ]1jahitva); 167 (hinaJ]l -aq¡ na seveyya;
Dhp-a III 163,5: hinaq¡ -an ti pañcakamaguJ]a-
dhammaJ]l); It 26,21 * (papakena ca siiena papikaya ca
dighiya etehi dvihi -ehi yo samannagato naro); Sn 917
(yaq¡ kiñci -am abhijañña ajjhattaq¡ atha va pi bahiddha
na tena thamaJ]l kubbetha; Nidd I 349,19joll.: yaq¡ kiñci
attano guJ]aq¡ janeyya kusa1e va -e avyakate va -e);
Th 898 (mahiccho ca asantunho saq¡sanho yo ca
uddhato tassa -a ime honti papaka sali.ki1esika); Nidd I
201 ,24 (agu vuccanti papaka akusa1a -a sali.ki1esika
ponobbhavika sadara dukkhavipaka ayatiq¡
jatijaramaraJ]Iya); Mi1162,24 (visati kho pan' ime
maharaja samaJ]assa samaJ]akaraJ]a -a); - ifc see aJ]u-,
abbhuta- (sv abbhuta\ deva-, hasa-; - esp. methuno
dhammo, sexual intercourse; V in I 96,17 foll. (dullabho
kho pabbajitanaq¡ methuno -o ehi methunaJ]l -aq¡
pariseva ti); III 19,29 (atthi me papa!]l kammaq¡ kata!]l
purlil]adutiyikaya methuno -o parisevito); 21,24 (yo pana
bhikkhu methunaJ]l -a!]l pariseveyya parajiko hoti
467 dhamma
asaJ]lvaso ti); 133,15 (ya madisaq¡ ... brahmacariq¡ etena
-ena paricareyya ti; 133,33: etena -ena ti
methunadhammena); M III 125,8 (imehi pana te avuso
Bakkula asitiya vassehi katikkhattuq¡ methuno -o
parisevito ti); SI 36,1* (virato methuna -a); Sn 291
(aññatra tamha samaya utuveramaJ]iq¡ pati antara
methunaq¡ -aq¡ nas su gacchanti brahmaJ]a; Pj 11 317,24:
methunaq¡ -an ti methunaya -aya sampadana-
vacanappattiya kir' etaq¡ upayogavacanaq¡); Ja IV
362,23* (brahmaJ]e ... pariyesa sil avante bahussute virate
methuna -a); Vism 418,3s; - instr. dhammena, adv.,
l. in accordance with the teaching, the rule; properly;
V in l 111,29 foll. (adhammena vagga!]l uposatha-
kammaq¡ adhammena samaggaq¡ uposathakammaq¡
-ena vaggaq¡ uposathakammaJ]l -ena samagga!]l
uposathakamman ti); Ja 11 387,13 (te -ena nihitaq¡
adhikaraJ]aq¡ ukkorenti); Sp 1146,8 (bhütena vatthuna
kataq¡ -ena kata!]l nama hoti);- 2. according to what is
right; justly, with justice; DI 89,7 (so imaq¡ parhaviq¡ ...
adan~ena asatthena -ena abhivijiya ajjhavasati); SI
116,zo (sakka nu kho rajjam karetuq¡ ahanaq¡
aghatayaq¡ ... asocapayaq¡ -en a ti); 181 ,2s (ahaq¡ hi bho
Gotama -ena bhikkhaq¡ pariyesami); A III 224,23joll.
(acariyassa acariyadhanaq¡ pariyesati -en' eva no
adhammena, tattha ... ko -o, n' eva kasiya na vaJ]ijjaya
na gorakkhena ... keva1aq¡ bhikkhacariyaya); Dhp 257
(asahasena -ena samena nayati pare -assa gutto
medhavi dhammanho ti pavuccati); It 66,18* (-ena
saq¡haritvana unhanadhigataq¡ dhanaq¡); Sn 404 (-ena
matapitaro bhareyya); Th 670 (jivitaq¡ ca adhammena
-ena maraJ]aq¡ ca yaq¡); Ja I 260,3 (dasa rajadhamme
akopento -ena rajjaq¡ karento); 11 2,10 (voharesu -ena
vinicchiyamanesu kuranakaraka nama nahesuq¡);
III88,14* (-ena vittam eseyya; 88,16·: -ena
parisuddhenajivena su v aJ]J]araj atadivitta!]l pariyeseyya);
525,23* (yo ca -ena carati; 526,w·: yo tividhasucarita-
dhammen' eva iriyati); IV 206,25* joll. (-en a mante tava
sampadasiq¡ tuvaq¡ pi -ena pariggahesi; 207,1w: -ena ti
ahaq¡ pi tava acariyabhagaq¡ hiraññaq¡ va sUVaJ]J.larp va
agahetva -en' eva mante sampadasiq¡); VI 265,2o (ahaq¡
mama paññaya -ena samena Vidhurassa hadayaq¡
anetuq¡ samattho); Mi1226,22 (bhagava nama maharaja
dasasahassimhi lokadhatuya -ena rajjaJ]l kareti);
Vism 43,9 (pahaya paccayagedhaq¡ -ena samena
uppanne paccaye . . . paccavekkhitva paribhuñjantena);
Sv 235,6 (pañca micchavaJ]ijja pahaya -ena samena
jivikakappanaq¡); Mhv 34:1 (akarayi rajjaJ]l ... -ena ca
samena ca); - 3. rightly, with justification; Vin I 3,7*
(yo brahmaJ]o bahitapapadhammo ... -ena so brahmaJ]o
brahmavadaq¡ vadeyya); Pv 21:31 (-ena te kapuriso
mukha!]l ca kuJ]~alikata!]l; Pv-a 125,12: -ena ti yutten'
eva karaJ]ena); Th 536 (-en a me Gotama ayyako si);
Ja V 104,24* (-ena Brahmadattassa ahaq¡ kujjhami
brahmaJ]a; 105,3·: -ena ti karaJ]en' eva na akaraJ]ena);
Mhv 37:39; - dhammena in Ee at Ap 117,7 is wr for
damena (Be, Ce, Se so); - see also tathadhamma
(sv tatha);- 0 ágada, m.n., the antidote that is dhamma;
Ap 41,7 (-aq¡ gavesanto, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr
dhammagadhaq¡; Ap-a 279,15joll.: saq¡saradukkha-
visassa vinasaya dhammosadhaq¡ gavesanto); Mi1335,s*
dhamma
(--samaq1 n' atthi);- 0 '-a.ühesaka, m., one (appointed)
who requests the expounding or reciting of dhamma;
Sp 1058,7; 1163,16;- o• -attharp in Ee at Spk I 343,15 is
wr for dhammaghaq1 (Be, Ce, Se so);- 0 adhi!!hiina, n.
and mfn., l. (n.) a basis of dhamma(s); It-a I 102,14;-
2. (mfn.) based on dhamma(s); PsI 24,21 (-a 0 -desana -a
puggaladesana); Pj II 288,6 (-ay' eva de san aya ekaq1
gathaqi abhasi); - 0 adhipa, mfn., with dhamma as
master; controlled by dhamma; A I 150,4• (-o ca
anudhammacan); - 0
anupassi(n), mfn., observing,
considering, dhammas; D II 95,2 (dhammesu -1 viharati
atapi samp<Uano satima); MI 60,7 (kathaq1 ca bhikkhave
bhikkhu dhammesu -i viharati); 340,2o (dhammesu -ino
viharama atapino ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -i); S V 144,27
(dhammesu -ino viharatha); 152,4 (tassa dhammesu -ino
viharato cittaq1 samadhiyati); Nett !23,1o ( ánupassita);
0
0
- anuvatti, 0 anuvatti,f, acting in conformity with
dhamma; Ja I 366,26* (-i ca al!nata ca; 367,1w: -1 ca ti
tividhassa sucaritadhammassa anuvattanaqi);
0
anuvatti(n), mfn., acting in conformity with dhamma;
S V 24,19' (ye ca kho sammadakkhate dhamme -ino) =
Dhp 86 (Dhp-a II 161,2: dhamme ti desanadhamme -ino
ti taqi dhammaq1 sutva tadanucchavikaq1 pa!ipadaqi
püretva); Ja III 319,21 • (320,8': dasannaqi
rajadhammanaq1 anuvattanena -i hutva);
0
anusiiri(n), mfn., who follows dhamma; who develops
understanding; D IIl 105,28 (satt' ime bhante puggala
ubhatobhagavimutto . . . -i saddhanusañ); M I 226,35
(seyyatha pi so bhikkhave vacchako tarm¡.ako ... evam
eva kho ... ye te bhikkhü -ino saddhanusarino); 479,4
(kathaq1 ca bhikkhave puggalo -i); S III 225,17 (yassa ...
ime dhamma evaq1 paññaya mattaso nijjhanaq1 khamanti
ayaq1 vuccati -i); Pa!is II 54,34 (paññindriyaqi
adhimattaq1 hoti . . . tena vuccati -1); Vism 660,12
(paññasañkhataq1 dhammaq1 anusarati dhammena va
anusaratl ti -i); Ps II 120,5 (-ino saddhasarino ti ime dve
sotapattimaggagha honti); Spk III 235,15 (-ino nama
maggo tikkho hoti); 240,5 (paññadhuraq1 katva
sotapattimaggaqi nibbatteti so maggakkha¡¡.e -i nama
hoti); Patis-a 563,23 (--ttaq1); - 0 anussati,f, calling
dhamma to mind; D III 250,11 (cha anussatiqhanani
buddhanussati -i ... ); A III 452,8; Nidd I 7,5 (-iq1
bhavento ... kame parivajjeti); Vism 197,10 (dhammaqi
arabbha uppanna anussati -i, svakkhatadi-
dhammagu¡¡.aramma¡¡.aya satiya etaqi adhivacanaq1);
213,11 (-iq1 bhavetukamena); Dhp-a II 120,16 (nadiq1
disva svakkhato bhagavata dhammo ti -iq1 anussaranto
pakkhandi); - o• -anteviisika, m., l. a pupil who serves
or works in retum for instruction; Ja II 278,14 (-a diva
acariyassa kammaq1 katva rattiq1 sippaq1 ugga¡¡.hanti);
Dhp-a I 250,19 (disapamokkhassa acariyassa -o hutva);
Sp 1115,27 (so pana kiñci dhanaq1 adatva -o va hutva);
Spk I 265,3 (veyyavaccaq1 katva sippugga¡¡.hanaka -a);
- 2. a pupil in the teaching;? Vism 97,11 (so attano
-assa santike tagikaya nisiditva); - 0 abhisamaya, m.,
right understanding of dhamma; S II 134,4; Ja IV 180,25;
Patis II 218,9 (atthi kilesappahanaqi atthi -o); Ap 38,6;
Bv 2:201 (dasavisasahassanaqi -o ahu; Bv-a 127,4:
catusaccadhammapativedho); Pp 41,24 (yassa puggalassa
saha udahatave1aya -o hoti); Mi1255,5 (api nu tassa -o
468 dhamma
bhaveyya ti); Vism 391 ,13; Mhv 1:32; - o• -iidiisa, m.,
the mirror that is dhamma; D II 93,14 (-aq1 nama
dhammapariyayaq1 desessami) -¡. S V 357,11; Th 171
(-aq1 gahetvana ñlil).adassanaq1 attano paccavekkhiq1
imaq1 kayaq1; Th-a II 47,12: -an ti -bhütaqi adasaq1);
0
Thi 222;- o• -iidhipateyya, n. and mfn., l. (n.) control
by dhamma; D IIl 220,8; A I 147,21 (ti¡¡.' imani
bhikkhave adhipateyyani . . . attadhipateyyaql
lokadhipateyyaq1 -aq1); 149,7 (katamaq1 . . . -aq1);
Vism 14,4; - 2. (mfn.) with dhamma as controlling
influence; D III 61,5 (dhammaddhajo dhammaketu -o
dhammikaq1 rakkhavara¡¡.aguttiql saq1vidahassu); Pa¡is II
l60,11; Mil 94,29 (upasako ... -o hoti);- o• -iiyatana, n.,
the object that is a mental construct; D III 243,19 (cha
bahirani ayatanani rüpayatanaq1 . . . -aq1); Dhs 66
(vedanakkhandho saññakkhandho sañkharakkhandho
idaqi tasmiq1 samaye -aqi hoti); Vibh 72,9; Vism 482,24
(dhamma ca te ayatanaq1 ca ti -an ti)= Sadd 577,18;-
o• -iiriima, mfn., delighting in mental constructs;
delighting in dhamma; MI 503,29 (mano ... -o 0 -rato);
S IV 126,32 (rüparama ... -a bhikkhave devamanussa
o -rata); A III 431,5 (bhikkhu -o hoti bhavanaramo
hoti ... ; Mp III 412,17: dhamme ratiq1 vindati); Dhp 364
(-o 0 -rato dhammaqi anuvicintayaqi);- 0 -iisana,n.
[dhamma + asana2; BHS dharmasana], the seat of one
expounding dhamma; the preacher's seat; Ja I 53,1 (-ato
otaranto 0 -kathiko viya); VI 205,25 (Mahasatto ... -e
nisiditva sabbaq1 nagaparisaq1 sannipatetva); Sp 13,23
(ay asma Upali . . . there bhikkhü vanditva -e nisidi
dantakhacitaq1 vijaniq1 gahetva); Spk II 183,27 (raja
-assa pacchato anto sa¡¡.iyaq1 nisinno dhammaq1 su¡¡.ati);
Dhp-a II 31,2 ([sattha] 0 -sabhaql gantva -e nisidati);
95,10 (cittavijaniql gahetva -aqi aruyha ...
arahattakütena 0 -kathaql kathetva); Mhv 3:32;
o• -upalakkhar.ta, n., attention to dhamma; Patis I 120,7;
-
0
'-upasarphita, mfn., connected with dhamma;
Vin IV 15,10 (devatabhasito atthüpasaq1hito -o;
Sp 742,19: atthüpasaqlhito ti aghakathanissito -o ti
p3!inissito); D II 265,14 (gatha ... buddhüpasaq1hita -a
arahantüpasaq1hita kamüpasaqlhita); III 154,11
(atthüpasaq1hitaqi -aq1 vacaq1 bhasita ahosi; Sv 929,21:
dasakusa1akammapathanissitaql); A III 285,28 (labhati
-aqi pamujjaqi; Mp III 337,13: pii!i111 ca aghakathaq1 ca
mssaya uppannaq1); Ja V 361 ,19* (ahaq1 yogaq1
payuñjissaqi yuttaq1 -aq1); Pj l 36,31 (-aq1 pi e' ettha
gitaqi na vagati gitüpasaqihito pana dhammo vagati ti
veditabbo); - 2. connected with mental constructs;
M III 136,26 (dhammesu dhammanupassi viharahi maca
-aq1 vitakkaq1 vitakkesi ti); - o• -üpahiira, m., the
presenting of ideas, images, or of the teaching; V in III
74,32 (rüpilpaharo ... -o); 78,9 (-o nama nerayikassa
nirayakathaqi katheti imaq1 sutva uttasitva marissatl ti ...
ka1ylil).akammassa saggakathaqi katheti ... ; Sp 462,12: -e
dhammo ti desanadhammo veditabbo desanavasena va
niraye ca sagge ca vipattisampattibhedaqi
dhammarammanam eva); - 0 -kathii,f [dhamma +
katha1], a disc;urse on dhamma; talk about dhamma;
Vin I 49,13 (-a vassa katabba); II 140,4 (tena saddena -a
antara-ahosi); D III 154,6* (kathayati -aq1 jino janassa);
Ja IV 178,23' (tani dasa tapaniyakara¡¡.ani pakasetuq1
dhamma
bodhisattassa -a hoti); V 350,27 (ha~sarañña tava me -a
suta); Ap 334,7; Sv 187,6 (-a hi kammaghanavinimutta
nama n' atthi); 650,7 (aññataro va 0 -kathiko devaputto
-a~ kathesi); Ps Il 140,33 (uposathadivase -aya janata~
khobhetva); V 78,18 (ay~ mahaseghissa vedana
maraJ_lantika . . . avasesa katha niratthaka -a~ assa
kathessami ti); Dhp-a II 95,4 (sukhita hotha dukkha
muccatha ti imani dve padani (hapetva añña~ -~ na
janati, amhak~ aññ~ -kathika~ detha ti); III 157,5
0
(ratti~ vihare -a~ sutva); Pv-a 99,6 (attano
jenhabhatar~ ... -aya ca tato puttasokato vinivattayi);
Mhv 32:44;- see also dhammi;- 0 -kathika, mfn. and
m. [BHS dharmakathika], (one) who discourses on
dhamma; a preacher; Vin I 169,7 (bhikkhühi dhamma~
bhaJ_lantehi suttantikehi suttanta~ sali.gayantehi
vinayadharehi vinaya~ vinicchinantehi -ehi dhamma~
sakacchantehi); III 159,14; MI 218,18 (Moggallano hi
Sariputta -o ti; cf As 29,12joll.: abhidhammikabhikkhü
yeva kira -a nama avasesa dhamma~ kathenta pi na -a);
III 40,14 (na kho --ttena lobhadhamma va parikkhaya~
gacchanti); S II l8,10 (jaramaraJ_lassa ce bhikkhu ...
nirodhaya dhamma~ deseti -o bhikkhü ti al~
vacanaya); A II 138,14 (cattaro 'me bhikkhave -a);
Ap 460,14 (ahosi~ -o vicittapaJ:ibhanava); 567,27 (so
-~ bhikkhuni~ parikittay~); Jai 53,1 (dhammasanato
otaranto -o viya); III 342,24 (-o sakacchaya na tappati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kathiko); Spkii 140,25 (-ena nama
adito paris~ val).l).etu~ vanati majjhe suññat~
pakasetu~ ante catusaccavasena kü!~ gal).hitun ti);
Mp I 59,19 (Milindaraja -a~ Nagasenatther~ pucchi);
92,28 (pa~sukülikatthera pa!ipatti mülan ti ah~su -a
pariyatti ti); Th-a II 75,21 (katihi ... añgehi samannagato
-o hoti ti); Nidd-a I 199,2 (-o ti abhidhammiko);
Ap-a 519,31 (bahussuto -o hutva madhurena sarena
pares~ dhamma~ kathesi); Mhv 32:45;- -kathito in
0
Ee at Ps IV 125,2 is wr for -kathiko (Be, Ce, Se so);-
0
0
-kamma, n., an official act of the sali.gha correctly
carried out; a valid act; Vin I 325,1 (t~ sañgho
adassane ukkhipati -~); II 3,34 (tihi bhikkhave ali.gehi
samannagata~ tajjaniyakamm~ -a~ ca hoti
vinayakamma~ ca); A I 75,6 (yassa~ parisaya~ -ani
pavattanti); Sp 1147,33 (bhütavatthuvasena -a~ ca
dassetu~); Kkh 2 217,27 (--ta); - adhammakamma, n.,
an official act of the sali.gha incorrectly carried out;
Vin I 317,28; 328,6; V 220,s; A I 74,25; Sp 1146,19 (y~
yathavuttaya pajiya na kariyati t~ adhammakamman
ti); - 0 -kammika, m., one who enacts official acts of
the sali.gha; PsI 145,16 (kada nu kho ima~ -a
abhabba!\hiin~ papetva niharissanti); -
0
-karaka, m.
(Be usually 0 -karal).a or dhamakaraJ_la), a water-vessel
(with a strainer); Vin II 119,7 (sace na hoti parissavana~
va -o va, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be 0 -karaJ_lo); Ja I 395,18 (-a~
adaya paniy~ parissavetva pacte dhovitva, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be dhamakaraJ_la~); VI 331,13 (-ato udakam iva
sukhena nikkhami, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dhamakaraJ_lato);
Nidd I 226,14 (-a~ dhareti, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
0
-karaJ_la~); Mil68,27 (-ena udak~ gahetva, eds so; vl
in Be: 0 -karaJ_lena); Vism 417,18 (pihitadvare -e !hita-
udaka~, Ce, Ee so; Be dhamakaraJ_le; Se dhamakarake) =
Pa!is-a 370,22 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dhamakaral).e);
469 dhamma
V v-a 220,14 (-ena pamya~ parissavetva, Ce so; Be
dhamakaraJ_lena; Ee 0 -karal).ena; Se dhamakarakena); -
0
-kaya, mfn. and m. [cfBHS dharmakaya, and
P. Harrison, 1992], l. (mfn.) (one) who has a body
which is dhamma; D III 84,24 (tathagatassa h' et~ ...
adhivacan~ -o iti pi brahmakayo iti pi 0 -bhüto iti pi
brahmabhüto iti pi ti; Sv 865,1sfoll.: tathagato hi
tepi!aka~ buddhavacan~ hadayena cintetva vacaya
abhinihari, ten' assa kayo dhammamayatta dhammo va,
iti dhammo kayo assa ti -o); Spkii 314,14 (--t~
dasseti); It-a II 116,6 (dhammassa adassanato -~ na
passati ti, ad It 91,7: dhamma~ apassanto na m~
passati); Sadd 74,21*; - 2. (m.) (i) a body which is
dhamma; Ud-a 311,15 (ariyasaccadassanena hi bhagavato
-o digho nama hoti ti); Pj II 41,26 (paññacakkhuna
bhagavato -~ disva); - (ii) a body in dhamma, a
spiritual body; ? Ap 532,4 (sa~vaddhito 'y~ sugata
rüpakayo maya tava anindito -o mama s~vaddhito
taya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -tanu);- 3. (m.) the body, mass
of dhamma; Ap 168,8 (-a~ ca dipent~ keval~
ratanakar~); Mil 73,2o (-ena pana kho maharaja sakka
bhagava nidassetu~ dhammo hi maharaja bhagavata
desito ti; orto 2. (i) ?); - 0 -ketu, mfn., with dhamma as
one's banner; D III 6l,s (tv~ ... dhammaddhajo -u ... ;
Sv 850,3foll.: t~ dhamm~ dhajam iva purakkhatva
ketum iva ukkhipitva pavattiya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
kuntam iva) t A I ll0,12 (tathagato . .. -u); Pa!is II
160,10 (-u pavatteti ti dhammacakk~. Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
-u~. prob. wr); -
0
-kkhandha, m., l. a group of
dhammas (as good practices and attainments); D III
229,14 (cattaro -a silakkhandho samadhikkhandho
paññakkhandho vimuttikkhandho; cfSv 1022,21: ettha
gul).agho khandhagho); Pa!is I 34,35 (pañca dhamma
sacchikatabba pañca -a; Pa!is-a 135,28 foll.: -a ti
silakkhandho . . . vimuttikkhandho vimuttiñal).a-
dassanakkhandho, -a ti 0
-vibhaga 0 -koghasa);
Vism 478,26; - 2. [BHS dharmaskandha] a category or
element ofdhamma (as teaching and text); Sv 24,1sfoll.
(katham --vasena caturasitisahassavidh~ ...
ekanusandhik~ sutta~ eko -o . . . abhidhamme
ekamek~ tikadukabhajana~ ekamek~ ca
cittavarabhajan~ eko -o vinaye . . . ekameko ko!!haso
ekameko -o ti veditabbo); Pj I 12,13 (kasma pan' esa
Khuddakanikayo ti vuccati, bahunn~ khuddakan~
-an~ samühato nivasato ca); As 18,16 (-ato
caturasitidhammakkhandhasahassani); Mhv 5:78;
3. the mass, the body, of dhamma; Mil 346,32* (-o
mahagato); - 0
-gal}.a, m., a group concerned with
dhamma; a religious society; Sp 910,15 (pügan ti -~;
Sp-! [Be] III 117,5: -o ti sasanabhattigaJ?,o anekappakara-
puññakammakarakagaJ?,o vuccati); Pv-a 194,25 (bahü
upasaka -a hutva); Bv-a 169,7 (-o ... mahavihara~
karetva buddhapamukhassa bhikkhu-sali.ghassa datva,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit);- 0 -gal}.fJika, 0 -gaJ?.!hika,f, an
executioner's block; Ja I 150,29 (migo gantva -aya
giva~ !hapetva nipaJJati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
0
-gaJ.l!hikaya); II 124,5 (paparajan~ ... -aya uttan~
nipajjapetva); Sp 570,4 (aghatanan ti -a vuccati, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be 0 -gandhika; Sp-! [Be] II 334,29: hatthapadadi-
chindanagandhika); Nidd-a I 70,1 (0 -gaJ.l!hika samipa~
dhamma
viya, Ce so; Ee -ga~~hikaya; Be, Se 0 -ganthikaya
0
paricchedo viya); - 0 -garahi(n), mfn., blaming, finding
fault with, dhamma; V in III 23,9 (na maymp ... -ino ...
attagarahino mayaJTI); - 0
-garu, mfn. [dhamma +
garu 2], respectful, obedient to, dhamma; S IV 123,9
(-uno hi te bhavanto 0 -garava ti); A III 122,18 (-u
bhikkhave tathagato o -garavo ti); 331 ,5* (satthugaru -u
saitghe ca tibbagaravo; cfMp III 362,13: dhammo garu
assa ti -u); Th 1096 ( -uhi tadihi); Ap 324,4; Vism 14,3
(
0
-mahattaJTI piljetukamena -una); Nidd-a I 8,11 ( --tta);
-
0
-garuka, mfn., prizing, respectful of, dhamma; Ja V
482,23 (--taya); Sp 1365,18 (yo -o hoti na pugga1a-
garuko); Psi 91,22; Dhp-ai 17,17*;- 0 -garava,n. and
mfn., l. (n.) respect for dhamma; V in II 168,35 (thera pi
bhikkhil ~hitaka uddisapenti -ena); Sp 657,14 (sace -ena
yava pariyosanaJTI sutva va gamissama ti nisldanti);
975,18 (imassa -aJTI uppadessaml ti); - 2. (mfn.)
respectful, obedient to, dhamma; S IV 123,10; A III
122,19 (0 -garu bhikkhave tathagato -o ti); 330,19 (--ta);
Pv 36:60; - neg. adhammagarava, mfn., A II 19,23*; -
0
-giriya, m.pl. [cf girati 1 or S. dharmika, 'juggler' 'lJ,
members of a class of perfomzers; ? singers, praisers; ?
Mi1191,4 (mahiya ga~a vattanti seyyathldaJTI malla
ato~a pabbata -a brahmagiriya na~aka naccaka ... ); -
0
-gu, mfn. [dhamma + gu 2 (or gu\ cfS. dharmagup],
protecting dhamma; (or following dhamma); Ja V 222,s•
(tvaJTI -u 0 -vidil sumedho, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se 0 -gutto) f.
VI 261,11* (261,1r: -il ti dhammassa gopako e' eva
0
-ññil ca); - 0 -gutta, mfn., protected by dhamma; who
protects dhamma; S I 222,6* (ba1assa -assa pa~ivatta na
vijjati; Spk I 343,12: -assa ti dhammena rakkhitassa
dhammmp va rakkhantassa); A III 47,8* (taJTI devata
rakkhati -mp); Ja V 222,8•foll. (tvmp -o 0 -vidü
sumedho so -o ciram eva jlva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -gil
vinicchayadhammapave~idhamma­
0
-vidü; 226,15·:
sucaritadhammanaJTI gopayanena -o . . . tvaJTI ymp
dhammmp gopesi ten' eva gutto ciraJTI jlva, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee gopaya tena 0 -gil); Dhp-a III 382,10 (dhammassa
gutto ti so -o 0 -rakkhito); - 0 -guttii, 0 -guttika, m.pl.,
the Dharmaguptikas; Dlp 5:47 (Sabbatthavada 0 -gutta
duvidha bhijjittha bhikkhavo); Kv-a 3,7
(MahiJT!sasakavadato bhijjitva Sabbatthivada 0 -guttika ti
dve acariyavada uppanna); - 0 -ghosaka, m(fn)., (one)
who speaks about, promulgates, dhamma; who makes
announcements (about the buddha or the saitgha ?); Ja II
286,13 (vihare ekmp -aJTI bhikkhuJTI ~hapeSUJTI so ye ye
agantva yattake bhikkhil icchanti teSaJTI teSaJTI bhikkhil
vicaretva deti); IV 264,18 (raja -aJTI a1aitkatahatthipighiJTI
aropetva sattha kira ... pa~ihariyaJTI karissati ito sattame
divase ti devasikmp ghosanaJTI kareti); Dhp-a IV 202,5
(buddharatanaJT11oke uppannmp ... dhammmp su~atha ti
-assa .. . ghosanaJTI sutva); Pj II 216,29 (saúgha-
suppa~ipattiJTI ca abhitthavitva abhitthavitva
namassamana -a hutva vicarissama ti); - 0 -cakka, n.
[BHS dharmacakra], l. (i) the wheel or discus of
dhamma 's authority (esp. as initiated by the Buddha 's
first teaching); the sway of dhamma; V in I 8,25* (-aJTI
pavattetUJTI gacchami KasinaJTI puraJTI); D II 140,25 (idha
tathagatena anuttarmp -aJTI pavattitan ti Ánanda
saddhassa ku1aputtassa dassaniyaJTI saJT!vejanlyaJTI
470 dhamma
~hiinaJTI); Sn 557 (maya pavattitaJTI cakkaJTI -mp
anuttaraJTI Sariputto anuvatteti); Ja IV 100,2o
([Devadatto] -e paharmp datva); Pa~is II 159,24 (ken'
anhena -mp dhammmp ca pavatteti cakkaJTI ca ti
-mp ... ; Pa~is-a 616,22 foil.: bhagava bodhipallaitke
nisinno . . . dhammaJTI ca pavatteti so yeva ca dhammo
ki1esasattughataya pavattanato pahara~acakka111 viya ti
cakka111 . . . etena dhammo yeva cakkan ti
kammadharayasamasata vutta hoti, Isipatane nisinno
bhagava . . . desanacakkmp ca pavatteti . . . -mp ca
pavatteti etena dhammo ca cakkmp ca -an ti
dvandasamasata vutta hoti ... ); Ap 30,17 (Ap-a 237,17:
Gotamasambuddhena pavattitaJTI desitmp pi~akattaya­
saitkhatmp -aJTI); Mi120,1 (bhagavati .. . Isipatane
migadaye -mp pavattente); Sp 10,14 (mayha111
a~acakka111 tumhakmp -mp hotu); Spk III 298,4foll.
(bodhipallaitke nisinnassa hi catusu saccesu uppannaJTI
dvadasakara111 pa~ivedhaña~a111 pi Isipatane nisinnassa
dvadasakaraya saccadesanaya pavattitmp desanañ~mp
pi -aJTI nama ... imaya desanaya pakasentena bhagavata
-a111 pavattita111 nama); Mhv 1:14 (-a111 pavattayi); -
(ii) a representation of this; Ap 90,Jo (Siddhatthassa
bhagavato slhasanassa sammukha -aJTI maya ~hapita111
sukatmp viññuv~~itaJTI; Ap-a 366,3ofoll.: maya
-'akarena ubhato slharüpa111 dassetva majjhe
adasasadismp karetva kata111 -a111); - 2. a wheel that is
dhamma; SI 33,10* (ratho akujano nama -ehi smpyuto;
Spk I 87,28: kayikacetasikaviriyasaitkhatehi -ehi
sa111yutto);- 3. the four good practices or attainments
or means; Ja III 412,13" (pa~irilpadesavasadika111
catubbidha111 -a111 pavattehi, pakatiratho hi dvlhi cakkehi
gacchati aya111 pana kayo imehi catilhi cakkehi
deva1oka'11 gacchati tena te -an ti sailkhymp gata, Be, Se
so; Ce --saitkhmp gata; Ee wr tena --vattisailkhaJTI
gatiinaJTI); - see also anudhammacakkappavattaka; -
0
-cakkhu, n. [BHS dharmacak~us], insight into,
understanding of, dhamma; V in 1 1 1,34 (ayasmato
Ko~~aññassa virajmp v!tamala111 -u111 udapadi ya111 kiñci
samudayadhamma111 sabba111 ta111 nirodhadhamma111);
D 1 86,5 (sacaymp bhikkhave raja pitara111 ... jlvita na
voropessatha imasmiJTI yeva asane virajmp vltama1a'11
-u111 uppajjissatha ti; Sv 237,23: -un ti dhammesu va
cakkhu111 dhammamaymp va cakkhu111, aññesu ~anesu
ti~~a111 maggana111 etaJTI adhivacanmp idha pana
sotapattimaggass' eva); Vv 81:27 (sutva gira111
cakkhumato -um visodhayi; Vv-a 317,26: -un ti
sotapattimagga111); Ap 549,16; Mi116,7; Spk II 392,27
(cattaro magga cattari ca pha1ani -un ti veditabbani);
Thl-a 92,28 (asailkhatadhamma111 sahassanaya-
pa~ima~~itena dassanasaitkhatena -una addasmp);
Nidd-a 11 83,27 (-un ti katthaci pa~hamamagge ña~a111
katthaci adlni tl~i maggan~an1 katthaci
catutthamaggañ~a111 pi); Mhv 12:30; -
0
-cariya,f
[cf BHS dharmacarya], right action, virtuous behaviour,
D II 28,31 (sadhu -a sadhu samacariya sadhu
kusalakiriya sadhu puññakiriya ... ); A 11 5,7* (taya nmp
-aya matapitilsu); Khp 5:6 (dana111 ca -a ca; Pj I 140,10:
dhammassa cariya dhamma va anapeta cariya -a):
Sn 274 (-a111 brahmacariymp etad ahu vasuttammp; Pj II
309,12: kayasucaritadidhammacariymp);
dhamma
0
-cari(n), mfn., acting, behaving, rightly; Vin lii 43,5
(ime kho samm,1a Sakyaputtiya -ino samacanno
brahmacarino saccavadino ... ); M JI 188,23 (yo va
matapitunnarp hetu -i samacañ assa; Ps III 430,18:
dhammikakasivai.Jijjadikammakari); SI 102,28* (yo -i
kayena vacaya uda cetasa, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dhammarp
cari); Dhp 168 (-i sukharp seti asmirp1oke paramhi ca);
Vv 32:11 (saggamhi sa modati -in!); Th 303 (dhammo
have rakkhati -irp); Ja IV 320,5* (saharp ahirpsaratini
kamasa -ini; 321,3·: dasakusa1akammapathe püremi);
Cp 2:3:2 (marp -irp upavuttharp uposatharp); Mi119,32
(atthi gihi pi -i samacañ);- 0 -cintana..f, reflection on,
examination of, dhamma; A III 346,24 (sati g!va siro
pañña vimarpsa -a; Mp lii 372,18: buddhanagassa
dhammakotthasaparicchedakañil.I.Jasai!khata o -cintan a
vimarpsa) Th 695 (Th-a Ili 10,2ojoll.: yatha
khaditabbakhaditabbassa so1,1<;Iaya paramasamarp
ghayanarp ca hatthinagassa vimarpsa nama hoti evarp
buddhanagassa kusaladidhammacintana vimarpsa); -
0
-cintii..f, reflection on dhamma; Sp 26,6 (abhidhamme
duppa~ipanno -arp atidhavanto acinteyyani pi cinteti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -cittarp) = Sv 22,16 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
0
-Cittarp) =As 24,26 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -cittarp); Th-a III
20,9 (-a 0 -vicarai.Ja); - 0
-cudita, 0 -cuditaka, mfn.
and m., (a bhikkhu) accused of an offence properly, by
the rules; V in II 250,27 ( -assa .. . bhikkhuno pañcah'
akarehi vippa~isaro upadahatabbo kalenayasma cudito no
akalena ... , Be, Se so; Ce, Ee o -cuditakassa) = A III
197,26; Vin V 115,21 (0 -cuditako); neg.
adhammacudita, adhammacuditaka, mfn. and m., Vin II
250,10 (adhammacuditassa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee adhamma-
cuditakassa) = A III 197,7; Vin V 115,20 (adhamma-
cuditako);- 0 -ceti, n., dhamma as a place or object of
veneration; Bv 24:27 (-irp samussetva 0 -dussa-
vibhüsitarp, Be, Bv-a 262,5* so; Ce, Ee samussitva; Se
0
-cetiyarp samussitva; Bv-a 262,12: sattatirpsa-
bodhipakkhiyadhammamayarp cetiyarp patinhapetva);
0
-cetiya, n., l. veneration of dhamma; M II
124,28foll. (raja Pasenadi Kosalo -ani bhasitva unhay'
asana pakkanto ugga1,1hatha bhikkhave -am ...
atthasarphitani bhikkhave -ani adibrahmacariyakani ti;
Ps III 355,16: -an! ti dhammassa cittikaravacanani); -
2. a stüpa containing texts; Sp-~ [Be] I 172,5
(pa~iccasamuppadadilikhitapotthakarp nidahitva katarp
pana -arp nama);- 0 -Codaka, mfn. and m., (a bhikkhu)
who accuses (someone) of an offene e properly, by the
rules; V in II 250,19 (-assa ... bhikkhuno pañcah' akarehi
avippa~isaro upadahatabbo kalenayasma codesi no
akalena ... ) = AIII 198,3; VinV 115,21;- neg.
adhammacodaka, mfn. and m., V in II 249,38 = A III
197 ,9; V in V 115,2o (Sp 1320,23: pañcadasasu dhammesu
appati~~hahitva abhütena vatthuna codento
adhammacodako nama); - 0 -jivi(n), mfn., living doing
what is right; honest and dutiful; A II 59,10* (ubho
saddha vadaññü ca saññata -ino); Dhp 24 (saññatassa ca
-ino; Dhp-ai 239,3foll.); 164 (arahatarp ariyanarp
-inarp); Ja III 413,21* (saññata -ini; 414,4·: -ini ti para-
vañcanadini akatva dhammena samena pavattitajivika);
It-a II 155,27 foll.; - 0 -ññu, mfn., knowing dhamma;
knowing what is right; D III 252,14 (bhikkhu -ü ca hoti
471 dhamma
atthaññü ca ... ; Sv 1039,10: suttageyyadikarp dhammarp
janati ti -u); A III 148,3 (raja cakkavatti atthaññü ca hoti
-ii ca ... ; Mp III 283,10: pave1,1idhammarp janati); Ja VI
261,17' (dhammagii ti dhammassa gopako e' eva-u ca);
-
0
-ttha, mfn. and m., l. (one) who abides by what is
right or is the rule; just; rightly based; firm in dhamma;
V in II 205,8* (samaggarato -o yogakkhema na dharpsati)
t Ja IV 211,9* (211,18·: sucaritadhamme ~hito); SI 33,21*
(-a silapampanna te jan a saggagamino ); IV 206,4*
(kayassa bheda -o sai!kharp nopeti vedagü); A I 162,19*
(-o silasampanno saccavadi hirimano ); Thi 362 (imarp
passatha -arp Subharp kammaradhitararp); Ja IV 302,2*
(-o kin ti vuccati); Spk I 343,15 (-arp pana ca1eturp
samattho nama natthi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dhamm'
attharp); Dhp-a lii 288,3 (-an ti
navavidhalokuttaradhamme ~hitarp sacchikatalokuttara-
dhamman ti attho); - 2. [S. dharmastha] (one) who
abides in justice; a judge; an adjudicator, Dhp 256 (na
tena hoti -o yen' attharp sahasa naye; Dhp-a III
3 81,10 foll.: -o rajühi attana katabbe vinicchayadhamme
~hito pi -o nama na hoti); Ja III 334,18* (-o 'harp pure
asirp; 334,24{oll.: aharp pub be rajünarp vinicchayamacco
asirp);- see also adhammanha below;- 0 -taJ, abstr.
[BHS dharmata], l. normal custom, habit; what is to be
expected; the usual way; D II 13,13 (-a esa bhikkhave
yada bodhisatto matu kucchirp okkanto hoti na
bodhisattamatu koci-d-eva abadho uppajjati); SI 140,14
(esa buddhanarp -a); A V 2,22 (-a esa bhikkhave yarp
silavato silasampannassa avippa~isaro uppajjati); Th 190;
Ja II 71 ,2o· (amhakarp hi makka~anarp nama esa -a ayarp
jatisabhavo); 158,4· (esa 1okassa -a ti dipeti); 309,12
(attano -arp vissajjetva); VI 9,6 (samaye puppha-
vikasanarp viya -a esa); Ap 426,27 (anattukkarpsaka
buddha buddhanarp esa -a); Mil 234,12 (sabbesarp
tathagatanarp -a esa yarp brahmuna ayacita dhammarp
desenti); Ud-a 275,26 (ayarp hi kammanarp -a ti); 302,16
(mahasamuddassa hi ayarp -a); Bv-a 298,17
(sabbabuddhanarp samatirpsavidha -a, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
sambuddhanarp); Sadd 617,4 (esa hi Magadhabhasa-
sailkhatassa pavacanassa -a); - 2. inherent nature,
one's own power or ability; one's own initiative,
prompting; one 's own accord; Ja I 68,20 (attano -aya
khiradhara pavattirpsu); III 383,7 (attano -aya jiviturp
sakkhissanti); Mil179,23 (na ca pana sa saka1ika attano
-aya patita Devadattassa upakkamena patita);
Vism 514,28 (samadhi attano -aya arammai.J.e
ekaggabhavena appeturp na sakkoti); Sp 347,21 (attano
-aya makka~a ... arohanti); 462,19 (sace pana sutva pi
attano -aya marati); 1295,2o (yava khaditurp bhuñjiturp
nahayiturp ca attano -aya sakkoti ti); Nidd-a I 345,16
(bahurp bhuñjitva attano -aya unhaturp asakkonto);
Sv 503,6 (sace hi . . . tvarp attano -aya uparaja ...
bhaveyyasi); Spk I 316,13 (ayarp hi attano -aya madhuro
e' eva ojava ca); Dhp-a III 25,1o (na marp tvarp
pakkosasi aharp attano -aya agacchami); Vibh-a 410,25
(eko pa1,1<;lito manussanarp phasuviharatthaya attano va
-aya gehapasadayananavadini uppadeti); - 3. the real
nature of things; how things are; Th 712 (uttamarp -arp
patto sabba1oke anatthiko; Th-a III 15,19: -an ti
dhammasabhavarp); Ap 534,12 (-am anucintayurp);
dhamma
Th-a I 93,18 (-aya codiyamano); - --rüpa, n., natural
materiality; evolved inanimate material form;
Vism 618,25 (--rüpato ); 625,14 (--rüpan ti nama
bahiddha anindriyabaddh~ ayalohatipu- ... -pabbata-
til).arukkhalatadibhedarp. vivattakappato patthaya
uppajjanakarüp~); - 0 -tta, n., abstr. [or dhamma3 ],
the being legal or valid, the being according to the rule;
Vin I 316,27 (idarp. bhikkhave kammarp. -a samaggatta
akupp~ thiinarah~); II 55,3o (dhammikarp. tassa
apattiya parivasadanarp. -a rühati);- 0 -tthenaka, m., a
thief of dhamma (who enters the saiJ.gha dishonestly);
S II 127,28 (svah~ evarp. svakhyate dhammavinaye -o
pabbajito); - 0 -(t)thera, m., an elder in dhamma, one
venerable because of his qualities; D III 218,3 (tayo
thera jatitthero -o sammutitthero; Sv 999,7: ime kho
bhikkhave cattaro therakaral).iya dhamma ti ev~vuttesu
dhammesu ekena va anekehi va samannagato -o nama);
0
-(d)dasa, mfn. [dhamma + dasa2], seeing,
understanding, dhamma; S I 187 ,32* (-o ti tam ah u, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -rato ti)= Th1221; Vv16:11 (-a
pathamaphale patitthita); 53:3 (at!ba ca puggala -a te;
Vv-a 233,7: -a ti catusaccadhammassa nibbana-
dhammassa ca paccakkhato dassanaka); - 0 -daya, m.
[dhamma + daya2], an inheritance of dhamma; Ps IV
91,21 (-assa adiyanato 0 -dayado); - 0
-dipa, mfn.
[dhamma + dipi], with dhamma asan island, a refuge;
relying on dhamma; D II 100,21 (attadipa viharatha ... -a
0
-Saral).a anaññasaral).a); S III 42,10; Sv 31,14
(bhagavato ... -assa 0 -saral).assa);- 0 -desana,f, -a, n.
[BHS dharmadesana], teaching, exposition of, dhamma;
V in I 5,13 (bhagavato patisañcikkhato appossukkataya
cittarp. namati no -aya); MI 84,15/oll. (kirp.
nanakaral).~ samal).assa va Gotamassa amhak~ va
yadid~ -aya va -arp. anusasaniya va anusasanin ti);
S V 162,28 (api ca me bhante ayasma Sariputto ovadako
ahosi ... akilasu -aya); A I 53,3o (dve 'ma bhikkhave
tathagatassa -a . . . saiJ.khittena ca vittharena ca); Ja I
48,27 (buddhan~ ca -a tilakkhal).amutta nama n' atthi);
106,6 (sattha imarp. -arp. aharitva . . . anusandhirp.
ghatetva jatak~ samodhanetva); 132,16 (yakkho im~
-~ sutva pasanno ); 275,27 (sattha arahattena -aya
küt~ gahetva matthake cattari saccani pakasesi);
Bv 2:35 (-e; Bv-a 83,35: -e ti dhammacakkappavattane);
Mil 350,1 (Isipatane migadaye pathame -e);
0
-dessi(n), mfn., who hates, is hostile to, dhamma; Sn 92
bhav~ hoti -1 parabhavo); Pj II 168,16
0
( -kamo
( -dessit~
0
parabhavato mukh~ dassesi ti); -
0
-dhara, mfn. and m. [BHS dharmadhara], (one) versed
in dhamma; (one) who holds firm to dhamma; Vin I
119,23 (bhikkhu agacchati bahussuto agatagamo -o
vinayadharo matikadharo ... );A II 178,16 (catuppadaya
ce pi bhikkhu gathaya attharp. aññaya dhamm~ aññaya
dhammanudhammapatipanno hoti bahussuto -o ti al~
vacanaya ti); Dhp 259 (na tavata -o yavata bahu bhasati;
see Dhp-a III 386,1/oll.: sattha nah~ bhikkhave yo
bahul~ uggal).hati va bhasati va tarp. -o ti vadami yo
pana ek~ pi gatharp. uggal).hitva saccani pativijjhati
ay~ -o nama ti); Sn 58 (bahussut~ -~ bhajetha
mitt~); Th 187 (dittha maya -a upasaka kama anicca ti
bhasamana; Th-a II S8,12: ekacce pariyattidhammadhara
472 dhamma
upasaka); Ap 44,21 (bahussuto -o . . . Ánando;
Ap-a 287,9: anekes~ chasatasahassasaiJ.khyanarp.
agamadhammanarp. satipat!banad!narp. ca paramattha-
dhamman~ dhiiral).ato -o Ánando); Mi1373,2l;
Mhv 5:83;- 0 -dhatu,j, l. [cfBHS dharmadhatu] the
element, the sphere, the range, of dhamma and!or
dhammas, ie the whole world of experience; D II
10,16/oll. (tathagatass' ev' esa bhikkhave -u
suppatividdha yassa -uya suppatividdhatta tathagato
ame buddhe parinibbute ... jatito pi anussarati); M I
396,9 foil. (sa hi ... tathagatassa -u suppatividdha yassa
-uya suppatividdhatta thanaso v' etarp. tathagat~
patibhati ti; Ps III 113,19: -ü ti 0 -sabhavo,
sabbaññutañiil).ass' etarp. adhivacan~ t~ hi bhagavata
suppatividdharp. hatthagatarp. bhagavato ); S II 56,4 (sa
hi ... Sariputtassa -u suppatividdha; Spk II 66,31: ettha
-ü ti paccayakarassa vivattabhavadassanasamatth~
savakaparamiñiil).~); Ja I 20,11 • (banda buddhakare
dhamme vicinami ito e' ito uddh~ adho dasadisa
yavata -u ya) = Bv 2:115 (Bv-a 104,26: -u ya ti sabhava-
dhammassa, pavattanl ti vacanaseso datthabbo ...
yavatika sabhavadhammanarp. kamarüparüpa-
dhamman~ pavatti tavatik~ vicinissaml ti attho );
Mp I 72,19 (sammasambuddha pana yaya -uya
suppatividdhatta desanavilasappatta nama honti);
Ud-a 144,25 (y~ pana yavata -uya yattak~ ñatabb~
saiJ.khatasaiJ.khatadikassa sabbassa ... bhagavato ñiil).~)
f. It-a 1 130,10; Pj II 417,2 (te vidito esa dhammo ti tatha
hite esa -u suppatividdha);- 2. the constituent element
that is mental concepts or mental states; S II 140,15
(manodhatu -u manoviññiil).adhatu; Spkii 131,19:
vedanadayo tayo khandha sukhumarüpani nibbanarp. ca
-u); 143,2o (rüpadhatu saddadhatu gandhadhatu
rasadhatu phot!habbadhatu -u); Patis 1 7,22; Dhs 69
(vedanakkhandho saññakkhandho saiJ.kharakkhandho
ayarp. tasmirp. samaye -u hoti); Vibh 89,3 (katama -u,
vedanakkhandho saññakkhandho saiJ.kharakkhandho
y~ ca rüparp. anidassan~ appa!igh~ dhammayatana-
pariyapann~ asaiJ.khata ca dhatu); Vism487,1/oll.
(nekkhammadhatu -u eva ... vyapadavihirp.sa-avyapada-
avihirp.sasukhadukkhasomanassadomanassupekkhaavijja
-arambhanikkamaparakkamadhatuyo -u yeva); 488,8 (-u
ti!).!).~ arüpakkhandhan~ sojasann~ sukhuma-
rüpanarp. asaiJ.khataya ca dhatuya vasena vlsati dhamma
ti saiJ.kh~ gacchati); Sv 196,10 (dassanarp. cakkhu-
viññiil).adhatu t~sampayutta vedanayo dhamma -u); -
0
-nataka, n. or -a,f, l. a group of 'virtuous' or
'legitimate' prostitutes or a 'virtuous' prostitute
(releasedfrom the king's palace to try to conceive); Ja V
279,10 (ekarp. sattaharp. cullanatak~ -~ katva
vissajjetha, sace t~ puttarp. labhissati sadhu); 279,25
(raja S!lavatirp. devirp. -~ katva vissajjessati); -
2. 'virtuous' or 'legitimate' prostitution;? Pj II 79,6 (raja
thapetva mahesirp. avasesa natakitthiyo sattah~ -arp.
karotha ti yathakamarp. bahi carapesi tatha pi putt~
nalattha) Ap-a 163,21; 0
-nijjhanakhanti,f,
readiness to accept teachings after rejlection; teachings
preferred after reflection; ? M 1 480,7 (atth~
upaparikkhato dhamma nijjhan~ khamanti, -iya sati
chando jayati); II 175,3 foll.; Vibh 328,27 ( ... viññiil).~
dhamma
aniccan ti va ya evarüpa anulomika khanti dighi ruci
muti pekkha -i); Vibh-a 412,13 (pañcakkhandhasailkhata
dhamma punappunarp aniccadukkha-anattavasena
nijjhayamana talll nijjhanarp khamantl ti -i); -
0
-nisanti,f and mfn., attending carefully to dhamma;
D III 252,18 (-iya tibbacchando hoti; Sv 1040,11: -iya ti
0
-nisamanaya, vipassanay' etarp adhivacanarp); A V
0
166,2; Ap 315,14 (--ta); - -nisiimaniiJ, attending
carefully to dhamma; Sv 1040,11; Mp IV 8,23; -
0
-netti,f [cf BHS dharmanetri], the leading rope, the
guiding rope, that is dhamma;? M II 247,14 (bhikkhuhi
sabbeh' eva samaggehi sannipatitabballl sannipatitva -i
samanumajjitabba; Ps IV 48,4: 0 -rajju anumajjitabba
naJ).ena ghalllsitabba upaparikkhitabba); Mil 328,14
(ussapito dhammaddhajo sai).rhapita -i); Sv 31,8
(jinavacanalll appeti -illl patighapeti; Sv-pr I 56,3:
yatharahalll satte neti ti netti, dhammo yeva netti -i); -
0
-pafirüpaka, n., a false representation of the teaching
or the rule; Vin I 315,24 (-ena vaggakammalll karonti);
Pj II 390,1o (labhadimucchita -ani pakasenta) = Nidd-a I
233,2o; 0
-pafisaipyutta, mfn., connected with
dhamma; Vin IV 6,1s (ukka!~alll nama namalll
buddhapa!isarpyuttarp -arp sailghapa!isarpyuttalll); -
0
-pafisanthiira, m., the gift, the favour, of the teaching;
Dhs 1344 (amisapa!isantharo ca -o ca); Ja I 144,25'
(papanivaraJ).a-ovadanusasanivasena -o); Sv 982,3
(sakkaccalll uddesadanalll pajivar:tr:tana dhammakatha-
kathanan ti evarp dhammena sailgaho -o nama);
0
As 397,23foll.; - -pafisambhidii,f, -a, n., analytic
knowledge of dhamma or dhammas; understanding of
causes; Vin V 197 ,s (na --ppatto hoti); A II 160,28;
Pa!is I 88,3 (dhammananatte pañña -e ñar:talll); 119,26
(dhammesu ñar:talll -a); II 150,12 (cakkhulll dhammo
ñar:talll dhammo . . . aloko dhammo ime pañca dhamma
-aya arammar:ta e' eva honti gocara ca); Vibh 293,5foll.
(dhamme ñar:talll -a ... hetumhi ñai).arp -a hetuphale
ñillfarpatthapa!isambhida . . . ye dhamma jata . . . imesu
dhammesu ñillfarpatthapa!isambhida yehi dhammehi te
dhamma jata . . . tesu dhammesu ñi'ilfarp -a); 294,24
(bhikkhu dhammarp janati suttalll geyyarp ... vedallalll
0
ayarp vuccati -a); Pe! 33,21; -paJ.uJara-
chattaka, mfn., bearing the white parasol that is
dhamma; Ja VI 252,25* ((kayo te rathasaññato ... -o;
25 3,24 'foil.: dasakusalakammapathasailkhatena pa!f¡;lara-
chattena samannagato); 0
-pada, n. [BHS
dharmapada], l. a portian of dhamma; an element of
practice; a portian of the teaching; D III 229,3 (cattari
-ani, anabhijjha -alll avyapado -arp sammasati -arp
sammasamadhi -arp; Sv 1022,1: -ani ti -kor~asa); SI
0
202,28* (kasma tuvarp -ani bhikkhu nadhiyasi; Spk I
296,31: -ani ti idha sabballl pi buddhavacanalll
adhippetalll); 209,24* (bhikkhu -ani bhasati; cfSpk I
308,29: -ani ti idha pariyekkalll sailgahalll arujha
chabbisativagga tan ti adhippeta); Dhp 44 (ko -arp
sudesitarp .. . pacessati; Dhp-a I 334, u: sattatilllsa-
bodhipakkhiyadhammasailkhatarp -alll); 102 (yo ca
gathasatarp bhase anatthapadasalllhita ekalll -alll seyyo
yalll sutva upasammati; Dhp-a II 226,7: -an ti
atthasadhakarp khandhadiparisarpyuttarp); Sn 88 (yo -e
sudesite magge jivati; Pj II 164,12: nibbanadhammassa
473 dhamma
padatta -e); Ja III 472,29* (dana ca kho -alll va seyyo;
4 74,s·: samathavipassanasailkhatalll nibbanasailkhatalll
ca dhammakoghasabhütarp -am eva); Dhp-a III 190,11
(satthu purato !hatva ekarp -alll uggar:thitva
agaccheyyasi ti); As 133,35 (pañcasaghi -ani bhavanti);
- 2. one of the collections making up the Khuddaka-
nikaya of the Piifi Canon; Dhp p. 120,5 (-alll ni!~itarp);
Ja 1 79,31 (ima -e buddhavagge dve gatha vadanto);
Mil 378,29 (bhasitalll p' etalll maharaja bhagavata
devatidevena -e); Sp 742,1o (buddhabhasito ti sakalarp
vinayapitakam abhidhammapi!akalll -arp
cariyapirakarp . . . brahmajaladini ca suttani); 760,23
(pa!hamagatha -e sailgaharp arujha dutiya suttanipate
vatthulll pana vinaye); 789,22 (-arp pi saha vatthuna
uggahetulll vanan ti); Sv 15,23 (jatakarp mahaniddeso ...
-alll . . . theratheñgatha ti imalll tantilll sailgayitva
khuddakagantho nama ayan ti); 24,4 (-alll theragatha
therigatha suttanipate nosuttanamika suddhikagatha ca
gatha ti veditabba); Pj I 12,7 (khuddakapa!ho -arp
udanalll .. . khuddakanikayo ); - -' -anhakathaJ, the
commentary on the Dhammapada; Ap-a 118,5;
Sadd 141,4; 141,14 (--aghakathapotthake);
--bhar:taka, m., one who leams and recites the
Dhammapada; As 18,1; --var:tr:tanaJ, the
commentary on the Dhammapada; Th-a II 211,6;
Ap-a 493,4 (ailguttaraghakathayalll --var:tr:tanayalll ca
agatarp);- 0 -(p)pamiiJ.Iika, mfn., who takes dhamma as
authority; Dhp-a III 114,5; Pj 11 242,25;- 0 -pariyatti,f,
learning dhamma, mastering the teaching; A III 86,28
(so taya -iya divasarp atinameti); - 0 -pariyiiya, m.
[cfBHS dharmaparyaya], a method ofteaching dhamma;
an exposition of dhamma; Vin I 40,27 (Assaji
Sariputtassa paribbajakassa imarp -arp abhasi: ye
dhamma hetuppabhava ... ); DI 46,21 (konamo ayarp
bhante -o ti); M III 77,25 (mahacattañsako -o pavattito);
S II 75,21 (atthasalllhitayalllbhikkhu -o adi-
brahmacariyako ti); IV 85,4 (yogakkhemipariyayalll vo
bhikkhave -alll desissami; Spk II 387,16:
yogakkhemipariyayan ti catuhi yogehi khemino
karar:tabhutarp -an ti 0 -karar:talll); Ap p. 6,1s (bhagava ...
buddhapadaniyarp nama -alll abhasittha ti, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee buddhanarp 'padaniyalll; Ap-a 127,29: -alll
0
-desanalll); Mi1164,19 (aggikkhandhupame -e
bhaññamane); - 0
-paviiha, m., the river of dhamma;
Ap-a 375,3 ( 0 -sotarp -alll);- 0 -piiyaka, mf(n)., drinking
dhamma; Dhp-a II 126,15; - 0 -piti\ mfn. [dhamma +
piti 1], (according to ct) drinking dhamma; Dhp 79 H
sukhalll seti; Dhp-a II 126,15: -I ti 0 -payako dhammalll
pivanto ti attho) quoted Sadd 855,26 (thapanam anto
ivar:tr:tO ca: ... );- 0 -piti2 J and mfn. [dhamma + piti 2],
l. (j.) joy in dhamma; Dhp 205 (--rasalll pivalll) = Ja III
196,23* (197,u·: --sailkhatalll rasalll); Dhp-all 126,1o
(puttassa pana me -i nama -rati nama uppajjati);
0
IV 110,17 Hlll dhammapamojjalll ca 1abhati); Th-a III
69,28 (-iya); - 2. (mfn.) having joy in dhamma;?
Dhp 79 (-i sukhalll seti; see -piti 1 above); -
0
0
-bhiiJ.Iaka, m. [BHS dharmabhillfaka], one who leams
and recites dhamma; Sp 925,14 (--gitarp); Spk 1 297,2;
-
0
-yiigi(n), mf(n)., (one) who offers dhamma; D III
154,13 (pillfinarp hitasukhavaho ahu -I);
dhamma 474 dhamma

0
-yoga, mj(n)., applying oneself to dhamma, to the
teachings; A III 355,7 (-a bhikkhü jhay1 bhikkhü
apasadenti; Mp III 379,s: dhamme yogo anuyogo etesan
ti -a, dhammakathikanarp eta111 nama111); - 0 -raja(n),
0
-raja, m. [BHS dhannaraja(n)], l. a just king; a rightful
king; DI 88,33 (raja hoti cakkavatti dharnmiko -raja 0
caturanto vijitavi; Sv 249,29/oll.: dhammena carati ti
dharnmiko . . . dhammena rajja111 labhitva raja jato ti
parahitadharnmakar~ena
0
-raja, va dhammiko
attahitadharnmakar~ena -a); M II 74,25 (raja ahosi
Makhadevo nama dhammiko 0 -raja dharnme thito
maharaja); Ja V 187,15*; Ap 44,4 (tva111 mahavlra
hatamitto va khattiyo sadevakassa lokassa -raja ti 0
vuccati); Sp 75,6 (añña111 ca bahu111 ratana111 Asokassa
0
-rañño pal).I:J.akaratthaya pesesi); Sadd 154,14/oll.
(Sivirajo 0 -rajo ... Siviraja 0 -raja); - 2. the king of
dharnma; Abh 3 (buddho ... 0 -raja); Sn 554 (rajaha111
As 149,3 (mohassa pana patipakkho --sailkhato amoho);
-
0
-Vidu, mfn., who knows dhamma; who knows what is
right; Ja V 222,s• (-ü sumedho) f. VI 261,11* (261,17': -ü
ti pakatadhammo); - 0 -Vinicchanaka, m., one who
makes legal decisions; a magistrate; Sp 309,9
(akkhadassa ti -a); - 0
-Veda, m., knowledge or joy in
the teaching; M JI 206,3 (labhati atthaveda111 labhati
-arr) f. A III 285,12 (Mp III 337,12: -an ti paJitp nissaya
uppannapltipamojjatp); Vism 226,15; - 0
-saitgm;,tl,f,
0 1
-sailgaha , m., 0
-sailg~ippakarai:J.a, n., 0 -sailgal).l-
pakar~a, n., the name of the first of the books making
up the Abhidhammapitaka; (the book) of enumeration of
dhammas; the compendium of dhamma~; Dhsp. 264,12
0
( -sailgal).ippakarai:J.arr ninhita111, Ce, Se so; Be
o -sangal).1pakarai:J.al11; E e o -sailg~ippakar~l sarnatta);
Mil12,21 (tikadukapatim~t;iita111 -itp ... pagul).al11 katva,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -sailg~1pakarai:J.al11); Sp 18,17 (-i
0

asmi ... 0 -raja anuttaro dharnmena cakka111 vattemi); vibhailgo . . . paghanan ti idarp abhidhammapitaka111
Vv 16:12 (sagarava sirimato 0 -rajino); Th 389 ( 0 -rajassa nama, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -sailgaho) = Sv 17,14 (Se so;
0

sasane); Ja III 128,5* (buddho 0 -raja pabhankaro; 128,13·: Be, Ce, Ee -sailgaho); Mp I 88,18 (yarnaka111 ...
0

navahi lokuttaradhammehi parisa111 rañjeti ti 0 -raja); vibhailgo -1 ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -sailgaho ti); Nidd-a 1
0

Ap 101,3 (0 -rajarp upagamma apucchi111 pañham 237,4 (-iyatp mohassa padabhajane); As 7,5 (sakala111 pi
uttarna111; Ap-a 374,32/oll.: dhammena sabbasattana111 0
-sailgal).ippakarai:J.al11, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
raJanarr issarabhüta111 bhagavanta111 upagantva); o -sailgal).1pakarai:J.a111); 13,15 (-i111 sarnmasantassapi
Bv 27:20 (etesa111 °-rajünal11); Mil90,s•; Dhp-a II l66,15 sañrato rasmiyo na nikkhanta); 18,33 ( -sailg~i-adini
0

0
( -rajataya); Mhv 1:76; 0
-lalasa, mfn., eagerly satta pakar~ani abhidhammapitakarr nama, Ce, Ee so;
longing for dhamma; Ap 478,3 (tada punappunarr Be, Se o -sailg~J-ad1ni); Vibh-a 123,s (-iya111 vibhattassa
buddharp ayac1111 -o); 0
-lokavidassi(n), mfn., desananayassa); 290,9 ( -sailgahe agatasadisatp); -
0

showing the world ofdharnma; It-aii 193,15* (-ina, Ee, 0

-sailgahatthakatha,f, the commentary on the Dhamma-
Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce dharnmalokavidhayino); - sailg~i/Dhammasailgaha; Sp 151,1 (atthasaliniya
0
-vararpsu, m., the excellent sunbeam of the dhamma; 0
-sailgahaghakathaya) f. Pj II 120,9 f. Ap-a 194,17;
Jinak 1.3* (mohandhakara111 'tighana111 pahantva As 430,21 (Buddhaghoso ti garühi gahitanamadheyyena
ñill).arpsuna -una); - 0 -vadi(n), mfn., speaking what is therena kata aya111 atthasalin1 nama -sailgahaghakatha);
0

dharnma, what is in accordance with the teaching or the -

rule; declaring dharnma; Vin I 332,15 (ime tattha
bhikkhü -ino ); 354,36 (attharasahi ca kho Sariputta
vatthühi -1 janitabbo); II 73,24 foil. H puggalo -1
sarnbahula -1 sailgho); 285,7 (dhamma111 ca vinayarp ca
sailgayama . . . pure adhammavadino balavanto honti
-ino dubbala honti); DI 4,3o (samai:J.o Gotarno kalavad1
bhütavad1 atthavad1 -1 vinayavadl; Sv 76,19: nava-
lokuttaradhammasannissital11 katva vadati ti -!); M II
147,26 (-ino ca pana duppatimantiya bhavanti); S III
138,28 (na bhikkhave -1 kenaci lokasmi111 vivadati);
IV 253,2 (y e ... ragappahanaya dhammarr desenti ... te
loke -ino); Al 75,26 (-ini ca parisa); Sp 1191,28 (-i
dharnmam eva aya111 dhammo ti adina nayena arnohetva
dasseti); Sv 1035,24 (-1hi pana adhammavadino va
bahutara honti, so read with Be, Ce, Se); Mhv 4:28
(Paveyyaka -!); Sadd 846,27 (dharnma111 vadati ti -1);-
see also adharnmavadi(n) below; - 0
-Vicaya, m.,
discrimination of dharnmas; discemment of dharnma
(one of the seven bojjhailgas); M III 85,2o (yasmi111
sarnaye . . . bhikkhu . . . ta111 dhamma111 paññaya
pav1cmati . . . --sarnbojjhango tasmi111 samaye
bhikkhuno araddho hoti); Nidd I 45,1 (ya pañña pajanana
vicayo pavicayo -o ... arnoho -o sammadinhi) f. Patis 1
119,16 f. Dhs 16 (As 147,26: catusaccadhamme vicinatl ti
-o); Vism 132,11 (satta dhamma --sambojjhangassa
uppadaya sarpvattanti); Mil 83,24 ( --sarnbojjhangena ti);
0
-sailgahaval).I:J.ana,f, the commentary on the
Dhammasailgal).i!Dhammasailgaha; Cp-a 16, 13;
0
0
-saitgaha\ m., see sv -sailg~l above;
0
-saitgaha 2 , m., a collection of dhamma, a compendium
of teachings; Dlp 5:31 (akarpsu -a111) quoted Kv-a 3,21*;
-
0
-saitgaha3 , m., favouring, kind treatment, with
dhamma; A I 92,23 (amisasailgaho ca -o ca; Mp II
160,12: catuhi paccayehi sailgaho amisasailgaho
dharnmena sailgaho -o); Spk I 292,24 (-atp na karoti);-
0
-saitgahaka, mfn. and m. [dharnma + sailgahaka2],
(one) who compiles the teaching, who puts together the
canon; Ja I 1,13* (jataka111 nama sailgltatp -ehi yarp);
Mil 369,21 (bhasitarr p' etatp maharaja therehi -ehi);
Sp 230,26* (catubbidharp hi vinayatp mahathera
mahiddhika nlharitva pakasesu111 -a pura); Sv 8,3 (aññe
pi -a bhikkhü); Ud-a 3,27 (eta ... -ehi udanapa!iya111
sailgaharp anaropetva dhammapade sailglta); 404,12 (ima
gatha aparabhage -ehi thapita); Vv-a 3,6 ([gatha] tattha
tattha bhasita paccha dhammavinayarp sailgayantehi
-ehi ekato katva vimanavatthu ice eva sailgahatp
aropita); 172,25 (ayasma pi Vanglso sangltikale -anarr
mahatherana111 arocesi te ca thera narr tath' eva sanglti111
aropayi111sü ti); Sadd 219,2 (tvatp --ttherehi vuttapa!i111
pi ullailghasi);- 0 -sandosa, m., defilement of, damage
to, dharnma; A III 106,13 foll. (-a vinayasandoso
vinayasandosa -o); Sn 327 (--vada111; Pj II 334,6: yayarr
rajakathaditiracchanakatha . . . sarnathavipassana-
dhamma
dhammaJTI sandüseti tasma -o ti vuccati);- 0 -sannaho
in Ee, Se at S V 6,14* is prob. wr; Be camma-; Ce
vamma-; - 0
-sabha,f, l. a meeting hall of the sailgha
(esp. for discussion or teaching of dhamma); Ja I 137,17
(sattha -al!l agantva buddhasane nisinno bhikkhü
amantesi); II 323,15 (tal!l hi sattha -al!l anitaJTI saccal!l
kira tVaJTt ukkai_!!hito ti pucchitva); III257 ,6 (ath'
ekadivaSaJTI -ayam kathaJTt samunhapeSUI!l); IV 325,17
(sattha -ayal!l catuparisamajjhe alaiJ.katabuddasane
nislditva); Ap 44,12 (navaii.gabuddhavacanaJTI ettha -a
tava; Ap-a 286,14: -a dhammadhikara~asala ti attho);-
2. a public meeting hall; a court of justice; Ja III 342,6
(raja ca uparajadayo ca sabbe sannipatitva va -aJTt
sajjenti); VI 324,29 (raja . . . Pai.l9itassa agamanaJTI
o1okento -ayal!l nisldi); 333,12 (tatth' eva kitamai.l9alaJTt
tatth' eva vinicchayal!l tatth' eva -al!l karesi); Sp 309,9
(dhammavinicchanaka, te -ayal!l nislditva
aparadhanurüpal!l coranaJTI hatthapadacchejjadil!l
anusasanti); Ap-a 119,5 ( -ayal!l sannipatita puthujjana
sabbe are dunhacori ... ); - 0 -samuppada, m., an
arising of dhammas; an event, a matter; M III 227,34
(paritassana -a cittal!l pariyadaya tiHhanti; Ps V
29,23 foil.: tai_!haparitassana ca akusa1adhamma-
samuppada ca); S V 374,1 (koci-d-eva -o uppajjeyya
ekato assa bhagava ekato bhikkhusailgho; Spk III
287,Isfoll.: kiñci-d-eva kara~aJTI uppajjeyya); Th 716
(suddhaJTI -al!l suddhal!l saiJ.kharasantatil!l passantassa;
Th-a III 16,Is: paccayapaccayuppannadhamma-
samuppattil!l);- 0 -(s)savanagga, n. [dhamma+ savana1
+ agga2], a hall for listening to dhamma; Sp 1315,13
(-al!l bhinditva gacchati); Ps II 263,29 ( -aJTt gantva
sakkaccaJTI na su~ati); Spk I 305,26 (-al!l sammajjitva);
II 204,32 (-e nisinno niddayati); - 0
-samaggi,f, unity,
assemblage of dhamma(s); Nidd I 131,27 (tisso
samaggiyo gai_lasamaggl -1 anabhinibbattisamaggl;
Nidd-a I 256,28: sattatil!lsabodhipakkhiyadhammanal!l
samühabhavo); 132,9 (cattaro satipatthana ... ariyo
anhailgiko maggo . . . na tesal!l dhammanal!l vi vado
vippavado atthi, ayal!l -!); PsI 83,7 foll. (ya hi ayal!l -1
yaya . . . -iya ariyasavako bujjhat! ti katva bodhl ti
vuccati); - o -sarl,f, clothes of dhamma; ? - se e next;
-
0
-sari(n), mfn., following dhamma;? impelling
dhamma; ? (wearing clothes of dhamma; ?) S I 170,2*
(tam ahal!l naraJTI -1 ti brümi; cfSpk I 238,10: ahaJTI
puggalaJTI -1 eso -1ya paticchanno ti ca,
kusa1adhammehi akusaladhamme saretva thito ti va ti
vadami; Spk-t [Be] I 263,27: dhammo sar1yo
paridhanabhüta alañkara etassa ti -1, atha va dhammehi
saritava ti -1, tehi saretva thitava ti attho?);- 0 -Sisa, n.
[dhamma + slsa 1], l. the chiefpart ofdhamma; Sv 572,14
(-al!l kira me gahital!l) = Ud-a 406,9; - 2. dhamma as
head; Mi1394,6* (-al!l karitvana viharanto vipassako,
Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be dhammaslsal!l; Se
dhammasil!lsakal!l katvana; cf393,3o: aharüpasil!lsako );
- adhamma, m., l. what is not dhamma; not the
correct behaviour; not the teaching; Vin 1 316,18 (idal!l
bhikkhave kamrnal!l --tta vaggatta kuppal!l
anhanarahaJTI); 354,Isjoll. (kathahaJTI bhante janeyyal!l
dhamrnal!l va -aJTt va ti . . . idha . . . bhikkhu -al!l
dhammo ti d!peti dhammaJTI -o ti d!peti avinayal!l
475 dhamma
vinayo ti dlpeti ... ); Il 285,5 (dhammal!l ca vinayal!l ca
sailgayama pure -o dippati dhammo patibah!yati); M 1
135,26 (kullüpamal!l vo bhikkhave dhammal!l desital!l
ajanantehi dhamma pi vo pahatabba pag eva -a); A V
222,18 (katamo ca bhikkhave -o ca anattho ca,
micchaditthi micchasailkappo ... ); 257,27 (pa~atipato
avuso -o); Sp 1278,3/oll. (suttantapariyayena .. .
akusa1akammapatha -o tatha . . . tayo satipaghana .. .
navailgiko maggo ti ayal!l -o nama ... vinayapariyayena
pana . . . abhütena vatthuna acodetva asaretva
appatiññaya katabbakammal!l -o nama); Sv 864,12 (so hi
nivitthasaddho asina sise chijjamane buddho abuddho ti
va dhamrno -o ti va sailgho asailgho ti va na vadati); -
2. what is not right or just; wrong-doing; the wrong
way; Vin IV 204,15* (ma tvaJTt -o acarito asma kumbham
ivabhida); SI 57,23* (evaJTI dhamma apakkamma -am
anuvattiya); Dhp 248 (ma tal!l lobho -o ca ciral!l
dukkhaya randhayul!l; Dhp-a III 356,22: lobho e' eva
doso ca); Sn 31 O (Indo asurarakkhasa -o iti pakkandul!l
yal!l satthal!l nipatl gave); Pv 34:6 (atthaJTt dhammaJTI
nirailkatva -al!l anuvattisaJTt); Ja I 259,19 (mahajano
yebhuyyena -asmil!l yeva niviqho); II 355,16' (yesal!l vo
ediso dhammo -o pana k!diso); V 8,15* (-al!l e' eva
carati); 266,s• (dhammo patho maharaja -o pana
uppatho); VI 12,31* (-al!l sarathi kayira maJTI ce !VaJTI
nikhai,laJTI vane); 299,28* (ma h' ev' -esu manal!l
pai_!!dahi); Mp III 386,18 (amhakal!l vijite -o nama na
vattati);- instr. adhammena, adv., l. not in accordance
with the teaching, the rule; improperly; V in II 3,15
(asammukha katal!l hoti -ena kataJTI hoti vaggena kataJTt
hoti); IV 37,26 (-ena va vaggena va na kammarahassa va
kammal!l karissatl ti na katheti);- 2. not in accordance
with what is right; wrongly; unjustly; by wrong means;
S IV 331,14 (ekacco kamabhogl -ena bhoge pariyesati
sahasena); Dhp 84 (na iccheyya -ena samiddhim attano;
Dhp-a II 159,13/oll.: samiddhikara~a pi papal!l na karotl
ti attho); Ja II 84,18* (yo -ena jlvati; 84,21': ekavlsatiya
anesanasailkhatena micchajlvena); 240,Io (raja -ena
visamena rajjal!l karesi); 309,21 (-ena attaJTt
vinicchinati); V 104,20* (-ena tuval!l jamma
Brahmadattassa kujjhasi; 104,22': -ena ti akarai_lena
asabhavena); 223,1* (na capahaJTI -ena amarattam
abhipatthaye); Sv 892,12 (Hatthako Sakyaputto titthiya
nama dhammena pi -ena pi jetabba ti saccalikal!l YaJTI
kiñci bhasati); - --cariya,f, wrong action; evil
behaviour; A II 5,2* (taya --cariyaya matapitüsu);
III 448,8 (--cariyaya pahanaya dhammacariya
bhavetabba); Ja II 423,4· (na ca sappuriso kaya-
duccaritadivasena --cariyaJTt careyya); VI 15,22* (yal!l
me --cariyaya rajjal!llabbhetha); Mp III 415,21 (--cariya
ti dasa akusalakamrnapatha); - --cari(n), mfn., acting,
behaving wrongly; M I 291,25 (--cañ visamacañ); Ja V
266,11* (--carino raja nara visamajlvino); Ps III 430,14
(--carl ti pañcadussllyakammani va dasadussHya-
kammani va idha adhammo nama);- --gha, mfn.,firm
in what is not dhamma, in what is wrong; holding to
what is not in accordance with the rule; unjust; Vin II
205,2* (saiJ.ghabhedako vaggarato --t!ho yogakkhema
padhaJT!sati) = A V 76,2* f. It 11 ,12* (It-a I 70,6:
bhedakaravatthühi saiJ.ghabhedasaiJ.khate eva ca -e thito
dhamma
ti --qho); Ja V 243,15* (yo ca raja --qho bhariyarp hanti
adusikarp); VI 100,11* (sabbe va~~a --qha patanti
nirayarp adho);- --bali, m., an unjust tax; Ja V 102,22*
(arakkhita janapada --ba1ina hata); - --vadi(n), mfn.,
speaking what is not dhamma, what is not in accordance
with the teaching or the rule; V in I 354,2o (aqharasahi ...
vatthuhi --vad! janitabbo); II 285,6 (pure --vadino
ba1avanto honti dhammavadino dubba1a honti); III 174,29
(--vadl Devadatto avinayavad! Devadatto ); MI 287,2
(aka1avadl abhütavadl anatthavad! --vad! avinayavadl;
Ps II 331,22: asabhavarp vatta); A I 75,26 (--vadini ca
parisa); Ps II 74,12 (na bhikkhave dhammavad! kenaci
vivadati, --vad! ca kho bhikkhave vivadati ti); -
niddhamma, mfn., not in accordance with dhamma,
with the rule; Mp II 149,1s (adhammika ti -a); -
sudhamma, m., the good dhamma, the good teaching; a
good quality; Mp 1 85,2 (saddhammassa ti -assa,
sasanassa ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee saddhammassa);
IV 56,6 (saddhammehl ti -ehi); - --ta,J., the being an
exceilent dhamma, exceilent teaching; the being of an
exceilent nature, of good qualities; inherent good or
justice; D II 221 ,17* (tathagatarp namassanta dhammassa
ca --tarp; Sv 651,2: svakkhatatadibhedarp dhammassa
--tarp) f. Sn 180 = Ap 48,14 (Ap-a 294,31: navalokuttara-
dhammassa --tarp sundarabhavarp janitva); D Il 272,20*
(tass' eva buddhassa --taya; Sv 708,13: dhammassa
sundarabhavena); Ja II 159,19 (na tarp --taya gahetva
gacchami, Se so; Be, Ce dhammasudhammataya; Ee wr
dhammesu dhammataya); V 357,2s (na so saro tehi
--taya kato amhakarp gah~attharp kato); Th-a II 84,27
(passa dhammasudhammatan ti satthu sasanadhammassa
--tarp aviparltaniyanikadhammasabhavarp passa);- see
also ditthadhammika (sv .Jdis2), natthidhamma,
saddham~~ (sv sa[t]), sadhamma (sv sa5), sahadhamma.
dhamma 2, n., see sv dhamma(n) 2.
dhamma 3 , mfn. [cf S. dharma, dharmya],joilowing what is
right; just; Mil 205,2 (bodhisatto pi maharaja yakkho
samano attana -o pare dhamme niyojetva, Be, Ce, E e so;
or probably Npr., cfJa IV 100,2foll.; Se dhammiko);-
neg. adhamma, mfn., Mil 204,29 (Devadatto maharaja
yakkho samano attana adhammo pare adhamme
niyojetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; or probably Npr.; Se
adhammiko ); - se e also dhammL
dhamma(n)\ n. [(:f S. dhanvan], dry soil; a shore; S I
103,20* (anatthasarphitarp ñatva yarp kiñci amararp
taparp sabbarp natthavaharp hoti piyarittarp va -ani, Ce,
Se so; Be phiyarittarp; Ee dhammanirp; Spk I 169,22:
-anl ti araññe thale phiyarittarp viya, Be, Se so; Ce
vammanl ti; Ee ghammani ti, conjecture).
dhamma(n) 2 , dhamma 2 , n. [S. dhanvan, -dhanva], a bow;
- ifc see da!ha-; - see also da!hadhammi(n) (sv da!ha).
dhammanl, dhamanl, m. [1:{S. lex. dharm~a], a kind of
(non-poisonous) snake, a rat-snake; Abh 652 (-! silutto
gharasappo); Spk I 133,24 (yadi sappav~~ena yadi
de¡;i¡;iubhava~~ena yadi dhammaniv~~ena, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr ma~iva~~ena); III 7,25 (yassa visarp mandarp
hoti ... nllasappadhammanisappad!narp visarp viya); -
0
(i)-kaJevara, n., the dead body of a rat-snake;
Vism 358,1o (na lohitado~i janati mayi -arp thitan ti na
pi -arp janati aharp lohitadoniya thitan ti, Be so; Ce
476 dhammika
o -ka!ebararp; Se dhamanikalevararp; Ee dhamanika!e
vararp ... dhamanika!ebararp ... ) = Vibh-a 62,10 (Be, E e,
Se dhamani-; Ce dhamanikalebararp) f. Pj I 57,1 foil. (Be,
Se so; Ce 0 -kalebararp; Ee 0 -ka!ebararp).
dhammi(n), mfn. [S. dharmin], l.following the rule;
righteous, just; Ja VI 505,12* (rajanarp Sañjayarp -inarp
vararp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhammikarp; 505,21' :
dhammikarajunarp antare vararp uttamarp); Sadd 188,18*
(-1 sailghl ñ~i atthl); - 2. ifc: having the nature or
property of; subject to; - see papa-, mar~a-.
dhammika (and dhammiya), mfn. (and m. ?) [cf S.
dharmya, dharmika], Sadd 787,4foll. (buddhe pasanno
buddhiko evarp -o . . . buddhassa santakarp buddhikarp
evarp -arp ... dhammarp anuvattati ti -o); l. (mfn.) in
conformity with the rule or regulation; V in I 340,24 (tani
kammani -am bhavissanti akuppani thanarahani);
II 55,29 (-arp tassa apattiya parivasadanarp); IV 152,9
( -arp nama kammarp apalokanakammarp
ñattikammarp . . . dhammena vinayena satthu sasanena
katarp); 284,31 (-o nama civaravibhailgo samaggo
bhikkhunlsangho sannipat1tva bhajeti); Sp 609,33
(kammassa --tta); 695,8 (pi~¡;iapato dhammiyo ); -
2. (mfn.) righteous, just; acting rightly; DI 88,33 (raja
hoti cakkavatti -o dhammaraja); M II 158,8 (n' atthi -o
paribbajo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se paribbajo; Ps III 412,22: -a
pabbajja); S I 227,10 (-a deva adhammika asura); A II
76,6* (sabbarp raqharp sukharp seti raja ce hoti -o);
Dhp 84 (sa sllava paññava -o siya); Ja Il 156,12 (kirp
m~ava raja -o ti); III12l,6· (-arp sam~arp va
brahm~arp va disva); VI 310,28* (so -o hohi jahassu
adhammarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhammiyo); 554,14* (na
cayarp brahm~o tata -a honti brahm~a); Cp 2:3:1
(tada pi -o asirp sllabbatasamappito); Sv 249,27 foil.
(dhammena carati ti -o ... parahitadhammakara~ena va
-o); 443,s (-o ti dasakusaladhammasamannagato
agatigamanavirahito ); Mhv 4:40 (-e 'yye khamapaya);
- 3. (mjn.) lawful, legitimate; in conformity with what
is right; D I 230,s (sa codana bhuta taccha -a anavajja);
M 1 322,16 (labha -a dhammaladdha); II 188,29 (-a
kammanta); A I 109,27 (-arp rakkhavara~aguttirp
sarpvidahati antojanasmirp); Sn 404 (payojaye -arp so
va~ijjarp); Th 666 (alabho -o seyyo yarp ce labho
adhammiko); Mil277,5 (raja janapadato -arp balirp
uddharapetva); Vis m 187,34 (-o patisantharo katabbo );
Sp 294,1 (sakka ca hoti 1addhurp -o vinicchayo);
Dhp-a II 86,1 (-o no dhitaya doha!o ti); Vv-a 134,10
(dhammagu~ehi ti dhammiyehi dhammato anapetehi
gu~ehi); Pv-a 242,4 (dhammiyarp patipadarp pahaya
adhammiyarp patipadarp patipanno ); As 161,35 foil.
(paccayanarp --ta . . . dhammena samena uppanna
paccaya -a nama); - 4. (m. ?) right, justice; D III
177,28* (vuttirp sucina so janayittha -ena);- dhammiya
in Ee at Ud 31,16 is prob. wr for dhammi (Be, Ce, Se so);
- adhammika, adhammiya, mfn., l. not in conformity
with the rule; Vini 111,11 (tarp kammarp -arp kupparp
aqhanaraharp); Sp 505,31 (etarp pana -arp katikavattarp
tasma na katabbarp); 695,7 (pi~¡;iapato adhammiyo);
It-a I 70,5 (adhammiyataya adhammo); - 2. not acting
rightly, doing wrong; unjust; Vin IV 204,2 (yava -o
ayarp raja yatra hi nama ucce asane nislditva mantarp
dhammiyamiina
pariyapw;tissati); A II 19,23* (kamesu asaññata jana -a
honti adhammagarava); 74,31 (rajaputtesu -esu
brahmai_!agahapatika pi tasmiJ11 samaye -a honti); Ja I
338,9' (--ba1arajano -e 1o1amanusse vinicchaye
thapessanti); II 124,16 (sace hi raja -o hoti devo aka1e
vassati ka1e na vassati); V 102,24* (ratthasmiJ11
kiltarajassa bahu -o jano); 242,24* (sabbaJ11 raghaJ11
dukkhaJ11 seti raja ce hoti -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
adhammako ); VI 208,25* (-o bhiltapati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
adhammiyo); Ap 355,7 (aho raja -o); Sv 414,4 (tasaJ11
--taya); Pj I 161,18 (--ttena); Dhp-a III 380,1o (aho ime
-a mayaJ11 pana ime dhammena vinicchaya111 karonti ti
saññino ahumha ti); - 3. unlawful,- not in conformity
with what is right; DI 233,8 (sa codana abhilta ataccha
-a savajja); Th 666 (1abho -o); 670 (marai_!aJ11
dhammikaJ11 seyyo ya111 ce jive -aJ11; Th-a II 280,12/olL
puriso ya111 dhammato apetaJ11 jivikaJ11 jiveyya taJ11 na
seveyya); Bv-a 219,22 (adhikaral_lavoharasatthapotthake
adhammiya vohara sayam eva antaradhayiJ11su); -
sudhammika, mfrL, properly in accordance with the rule;
Vin I 335,25* (in uddana: sojas' ete sudhammika),
dhammiyamiina, mfn. [part.pr, of *dhammiyati, denom.
1 dhamma- (sv dhamma\ dharanl- (sv dharana), dhara-
from dhamma ], acting in accordance with dhamma,
with the rule; Vin I 341,17 (bhinne bhikkhave sanghe
-e); - neg. adhammiyamana, mfn., Vin I 341,14
(Sp 1150,7: adhammiyamane ti adhammiyani kiccani
kurumane).
dhammilla, m. [ts], (a woman's) braided and omamented
hair; Abh 257 (-o saJ11yata kesa); Dath 4:9
(haridhammil1abhara).
dhammi, (m)f(n). [cfS. dharma] (the cpd dhammlkatha is
found mainly only in Ee), connected with dhamma; V in I
21 ,36 (bhagava .. , etasmiJ11 nidane etasmiJ11
pakaral_le ... -i111 kathaJ11 katva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
dhammikathaJ11) f. 111 23,26; II 200,12 (patibhatu taJ11
avuso Sariputta bhikkhilnaJ11 -I katha) f. D 111 209,17 (Be,
Ce so; Ee dhammikatha; Se -iya kathaya) f. S IV 184,7
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhammikatha); Vin III 11,s (bhagava
Verañja111 brahmal_laJTl -iya kathaya sandassetva); D 11
1,9 (bhikkhilnaJ11 , , . sannipatitana111 pubbenivasa-
patisaJ11yutta -I katha udapadi; Sv 407,26: -I ti
dhammasaJ11yutta); 81,6 (etad eva bahu1aJ11 bhikkhilnaJ11
-i111 kathaJ11 karoti iti sílaJ11 iti samadhi iti pañña , . _);
158,28 (ayasma ca Anuruddho ayasma ca Ánando taJ11
rattavasesa111-iya kathaya vitinamesuJ11); MI 160,22joll.
(cirassuta no avuso Ánanda bhagavato sammukha -I
katha, sadhu mayaJ11 . . . 1abheyyama bhagavato
sammukha -i111 kathaJ11 savanaya ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhammikaJ11); 161,32 (sannipatitilnaJ11 vo bhikkhave
dvayaJ11 karai_!IyaJ11 -1 va katha ariyo va tul_lh!bhavo) =
Ud 11,19 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhammikatha;
Ud-a 106,22/oll.: catusaccadhammato anapeta katha);
M III 261,22/oll. (na kho ___ gihinaJ11 odatavasananaJ11
evarilpl -1 katha patibhati, pabbajitilnaJ11 kho ... evarilpl
-1 katha patibhati ti); SI 155,3o (patibhatu brahmal_la ta111
brahmuno ca brahmaparisaya ca ... -1 katha ti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee dhammikatha ti); II 275,27 (bhagavata kho me
avuso saddhiJ11 ahosi -1 katha ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhammikatha ti); III 2,11 (-iya kathaya amatena abhisitto
ti); Sn 325 (-iJTl kathaJ11 erayita111 khal_laññil sul_leyya;
477 dharati
Pj II 333,1: samathavipassanayuttaJ11); Pv 36:38 ( -i111
kathaJ11 bhasati saccanamo, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhammikathaJ11); - dhammikathii,f, talk connected
with dhamma; M III 270,18 (karotu bhante bhagava
bhikkhuninaJ11 dhammikathan ti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
dhammiJ11 kathan ti) f. S II 203,33foll. (karohi Kassapa
bhikkhilna111 dhammikathaJ11, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
dhammiJ11 kathaJ11); Sv 537,23 (punappunaJ11 etaJ11 yeva
dhammikathaJ11 karoti, Ee so; Ce, Se dhammlkathaJ11; Be
dhammiJ11 kathaJ11); 539,26 (aññaya pi pi\!imuttaya
dhammikathaya, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dhammlkathaya); -
see also dhamma3.
dhayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhayati], drinks; Dhatup 164 (dhe
pane); Dhatum 251; Sadd 393,22/oll. (dhe pan e: -ati
dhlyati dhenu ... -ati pivati ito kh!ra111 potako ti dhenu);
-pass. pr. 3 sg. dh!yat¡2, Sadd 393,22.
dhara, mfn., m., and -a,f [ts], l. (i) (mfn.) bearing,
carrying; holding; wearing; keeping (in memory );
observing; Ap 363,17 (ajinani -a ete); Mi1420,2o*
(piljavisesassa -o); - ifc see antimadeha- (sv antima),
ambu-, ambho- (sv ambha[s]), okka-, okkavara-
(sv okka), gul_la-n-, camma-, clvara-, jata-, jala-, juti-n-,
(sv dhara 1), dhuta- (sv dhunati), dhura-n-: matika-,
2
vinaya-;- see also cittakadharakumma (sv cittaka ) ; -
(ii) (m,) carrying, bearing; - ifc see duddhara2; -
2. (/.) the earth; Abh 181 (dharai_!I -a); Bv-a 120,29'
(sílaJ11 gul_lilnaJTl parama patigha yatha -a thavara-
jangamilnaJ11); - dharadhara, m. [cf S. dharadhara,
S. lex. dharadhara], a mountain; ? (the earth; ?) Th-a I
131,31 (dharal_l.I ti pathavl, sa hi saka1aJ11 -aJ11 dhareti ti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dharadharaJ11); Bv-a 210,28 (jañgama111
iva -aJ11 sattappatitthaJ11, of an elephant).
dharal}.a, mf(-I)n., n, and -I,f [cfS. dharal_la], l. (mfn.)
holding, bearing;- ifc see godharai_!I (sv go);- 2. (n.)
(i) surviving, existing; Sadd 428,13 (-a111 vijjamanata);-
(ii) a particular weight; Abh 479; - ifc see pañcadasa
(sv pañca-), sata- (sv sata 1); - 3. (-1, f) [ts], the earth;
soil, ground; Abh 181 H dhara); V in V 171,9 (bhilmiya
va pathaviya va -iya va jagatiya va); Th 50 ( -1 ca
siccati); Ja V 311,27* (phitaJ11 -im avasuJ11); VI 526,12*
(yo yacataJ11 patiqha si bhiltilnaJ11 -1-r-iva); Ap 213,14
H111 patipajjami); 460,1( -1-r-iva silena himava va
samadhina); Mi1126,J5 (bhijjantiya pi -iya patante pi
selasikhare pha1ante pi akase); Bv-a 55,13 (dhareti sabbe
thavarajañgame ti -1 pathavl);- 0 'üpama, mfn., like the
earth; Ja VI 526,13* (-aJ11 maharajaJ11); Bv 3:2 (-o
khamanena); - (dharai_!I)-dhara, m., a mountain; Ja V
418,7- (sabbosadhayutto va -o); Ap 239,12 (Sineru-
samasantoso --sadiso, Ce, Se so; Be dharai_!Isama-; Ee
dharai_!Idharisadiso); - ifc see sabbosadha- (sv sabba);
- (dharal_l.I)-ruha, mfn. and m., growing in the earth; a
tree; Ja VI 482,11 * (ramma cavesi ma111 thana vato va
-aJ11); Ap 26,33 (ruhanti -a); Mil 376,17* (padapo -o).
dharal}.i,f, see sv dharal_la.
dharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dharati], l. continues living;
survives; holds out; (still) exists,- stands, remains; Ja VI
136,14 (rañño pana matapitaro -anti yeva); Vism 98,26
(asltiya mahasavakesu yo -ati tassa santike gahetu111
vattati); Sp 237,6 (sac' assa acariyo -ati); Sv 10,32 (sace
dharati
sattha -eyya addha ajja Anandassa sadhukaraq1 dadeyya,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhareyya); 386,3o (te [dhamma] ...
nagha nu kho -anti nu kho); Spk I 284,17 (ajjapi kira taqi
cetiyaqi -ati yeva ti); 355,12 (tada kira so isigaQ.o -ati
yeva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vasati); II 191,24 (ahaq1 yava
tumhe -atha tava patijaggissami); Mp I 93,23 (yava
akkhara -anti tava nidhikumbhi nattha nama na hoti);
143,15 (yava buddho -ati yava ca sari.gho -ati, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee yava buddha -anti yava ca sayaq1 -ati); Ud-a 2,1*
(sahasaqiVaQ.Q.anaqi yasma -ate satthu sasanaq1); 269,8
(yavayaq1 kayo -ati); Th-a I 54, lo (yattha maha-
gandharavijja -ati tattha cujagandharavijja na sampajjat!
ti); Sadd 428,13 (dhara dharaQ.e, dharaQ.aqi vijjamanata:
-ati -ate satthu sasanaq1); 428,15 (dhara aviddhaq1sane:
nibbanaq1 niccaq1 -a ti); 431,27 (dhara avatthane: -ati);
- part.pr. (a) dharanta, mfn., Ja IV 228,2o (-antesu pi
parinibbutesu pi); 256,17 (ma mayi -ante maratu);
Vism 614,1 (m pe -ante yeva); Ps IV 71,26 (buddhe ca
-ante bhikkhunaq1 vivado nahosi); Mhv 35:101;
(b) dharamana, mfn., Ja V 282,16 (-amane matapitaro
upaghahitva tesaq1 accayena nikkhamitva pabbajissami
ti); Vism 62,4; Sv 601,26 (samaQ.assa Gotamassa sañre
-amane yeva savaka vivadant! ti); Ps II 192,13 (suriye
-amane yeva desana nighasi); Mp I 93,25 (pariyattiya
-amanaya sasanarp antarahitarp nama na hoti ti);
Ud-a 38,32 (na -amanatarp yeva sandhaya); Ap-a 385,1
(-amanarp bhagavantarp apapuQ.itva parinibbutakale
isipabbajjaq1 pabbajitva); Bv-a 8,15 (suriye -amane yeva,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -ante); Mhv 2:30 (-amane tathagate);
- see also dharamanaka; - 2. holds; holds in mind,
remembers; Sn 385 (suQ.atha me bhikkhavo savayami vo
dhammaq1 dhutaq1 tarp ca -atha sabbe, Ce, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Se caratha; Pj II 373,2o: sabbe dharatha
patipajjatha ma pamadittha ti vuttaq1 hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se caratha); - 3. holds back, suppresses; - part.pr.
dharanta, mfn., Ap 534,18 (Anando ... tatth' assuni
-anto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se karonto); - 4. holds oneself;
stands over; remains; Ap 307,12 (devaloke vasantassa ...
ratanacchattaqi dharissati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dhañyati);
432,22 (idhapi salacchadanaq1 sabbakalaq1 dharissati, Be,
Se so; Ce dhariyati; Ee dhariyyati); - see also dhareti
below; - pass. pr. 3 sg. dhariyati, dhariyyati, is held
over; stands over; remains; Ap 266,11 (vimana
nikkhamantassa setacchattaqi -Iyati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhariyati); 327,34 (kutagararp -Iyati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-iyyati); 350,17 (samanta yojanasatarp maQ.<;}apo me
-Iyati, Be, Se so; Ce -Iyati; Ee -iyyati); - part.pr.
dhariyanta, mfn., Sn 689 (disva... setaqi ca chattaq1
-iyanta muddhani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dharayanta); -
pp dhata (and dhata 1 ?), mfn. [S. dhf!a], held; held in
mind; remembered, memorised; Vin II 95,35 (assa
dhamma bahussuta honti -a vacasa paricita
manasanupekkhita, Ce, E e, Se so; Be dhata) = IV 51,27
(Ce, Se so; Be, Ee dhata) f. D III 267,9 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
dhata) f. MI 213,5 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dhata; Ps II 252,32:
-a ti thita paguQ.a); M I 480,5 (sutva dhammaq1 dhareti
-anaq1 dhammiinaqi atthaq1 upaparikkhati) f. II 173,20
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dharitanaq1); A I 36,6 (appaka te satta
ye -anaq1 dhammanaq1 atthaqi upaparikkhanti, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be dhatanarp; Mp II 38,10/oll.: paguQ.aya pa)iya
478 dharati
atthanatthaq1 upaparikkhanti); Ap 311,2 (ye keci me suta
dhamma ... -a me na vinassanti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e vata);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. dhiireti, -ayati, dhareti, dharayati,
Dhatup 246 (dhara dhiiraQ.e); 608; Dhatum 355 (dhara
dhiiraQ.amhi); 850; l. bears; holds, carries; preserves,
keeps; upholds, maintains; uses, wears; Vin II 133,19
(kiq1 pana tvaqi avuso dighe nakhe -es! ti); III 6,8
(andhakare va telapajjotaq1 -eyya cakkhumanto rupani
dakkhint! ti); 182,27 (ma1agandhavilepanarp pi -essanti,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -issanti); IV 261,12 (katharp tumhe
-etha ti; Sp 921,2o: -etha ti sakkotha); 338,5 (ya pana
bhikkhuni agi1ana chattupahanaq1 -eyya pacittiyan ti);
340,18 (katharp hi nama bhikkhuniyo ittha1ari.kiiraqi
-essanti); DI 166,27 foll. (sanani pi -eti masaQ.ani pi -eti
chavadussani pi -eti paq1sukalani pi -eti ... ); M II 98,2
(so manusse vadhitva vadhitva ari.gu!Inarp ma1aqi -eti);
S I 199,1 * (sace pi dasa pajjote -ayissasi Kassapa);
II 281,13 (na ... patimpaqi ... yaq1 ... accharp ca pattarp
-eyyasi); A I 215,3* (ma1aqi na -e na ca gandham acare,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -aye) =IV 254,21* (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
-aye); Sn 478 (sañrarp ca antimaq1 -eti); Vv 78:4
(gopaQ.asigaQ.a pita kutaqi -enti); Pv 47:2 (idaq1 ca te
ambavanaq1 . . . sabbotukarp -ayate phalani); Th 578
(!Ukharp -eyya civararp); 965 (titthiyiinaqi dhajarp keci
-essaty avadatakaq1); Thi 377 (kasikasukhumani -aya,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -assu); Ja II 21l,s (pathavi maq1 -etuq1
na sakkoti ti); III 181,19' (mayhaqi pi imaq1 sokarp
-etuq1 asakkontiya); IV 309,2* (ma!aq1 ca so
kasikacandanaq1 ca -etu); V 46.8 (so pana mahathamo
pañcannarp hatthinarp balaq1 -eti); 168,27* (niccotuka
-ayant! pha1ani); 304,17* (sace ca ajja -esi kumaraq1
carudassanaq1, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee varesi; 305,3·: sace
tvaqi ... sadisarp carudassanaq1 kumararp -ayissasi, Be,
Ce so; Ee aradhayissa; Se adharayissasi); Ap 17,14
(dhuvaq1 pha1ani -enti); 22,24 (brahmaQ.I Sariya nama
-ayissati kucchina); Cp 3:4:3 (kulavaqiSaqi dharehi ti,
Be, Ee so, me; Ce dharehi ti; Se -eh! ti); Kv 609,3
(kidisaqi civaraqi -eti kidisaq1 pattaq1 -eti); Mi148,s
(kassa tvarp maharaja attharp -eyyasi ti, Ce, Ee so; Be
attaqi; Se dhareyyasi ti); 92,26 (nav' ime puggala
mantitaq1 guyhaq1 vivaranti na -enti); 265,26 (gihi tena
1ingena arahattaq1 -etuq1 asakkonto ); 378,1o (kupo
rajjuq1 ca varattaq1 ca lakararp ca -eti); Vism 64,23*
(dharitarp yarp lokagaruna k o tarp parpsukalarp na
-aye); Sadd 2,5 (sakatthaqi pi -en ti dhatu); 560,13
(dhara dharaQ.e: -eti -ayati); 693,17 (yassa va -ayate taqi
karakaq1 sampadanasaññarp hoti); - gabbharp -eti, is
pregnant; Ud 15,s (satta vassani gabbhaq1 -eti sattiihaqi
mujhagabbha; Ud-a 123,13: gabbharp vahati gabbhini
hot! ti attho); Ap 42,13 (ciraq1 pi gabbhaq1 -enti); 42,17
(puññagabbhaqi dharem' ahaq1); - 2. holds back,
restrains; Dhp 222 (yo ve uppatitaq1 kodharp rathaq1
bhantaqi va -aye, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be varaye; Dhp-a III
301,11: niggaQ.hiturp sakkoti);- 3. holds as, considers;
accepts as; Vin I 124,2o (parisuddho aharp avuso
parisuddho ti maq1 -etha); lii 6,12 (upasakaq1 maq1
bhavaq1 Gotamo -etu ajjatagge piil).upetaqi saraQ.aqi
gataq1); A II 39,3 (buddho ti maq1 brahmaQ.a -eh! ti);
III 216,5 (ajjatagge marp ayasmanto brahmacariq1 -etha
aracariq1); IV 212,17 (aghahi acchariyehi abbhutehi
dharati
dhammehi samannagatarp Uggarp gahapatirp Vesalikarp
-etha ti); Th 174 (ajaniyarp marp -etha puttarp
buddhassa orasarp); Ja IV 244,23' (pesala bhikkhü ti
-ehi, Ee, Se so; Be vareti; Ce varesi); - 4, bears in
mind; remembers; memorises; Vin III 109,27 (parisuddh'
etthayasamanto tasma tul).hí evam etarp -ayamí ti); D 1
46,23 (imarp dhammapariyayarp atthajalan ti pi narp
-ehi); II 2,Io (bhagava, .. dhammirp katharp kareyya
bhagavato sutva bhikkhü -essantl ti); III 65,6 (mayarp
ariyarp cakkavattivattarp -ema); 206,15 (-etha bhikkhave
atanatiyarp rakkharp); MI 480,5 (sutva dhammarp -eti
dhatanarp dhammanarp attharp upaparikkhati; Ps III
193,9: pagul).arp katva -eti); S V 426,3o (-etha no tumbe
bhikkhave maya cattari ariyasaccani desitanl ti); A I
119,2s (yatha no bhagava vyakarissati tatha narp
-essama ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -issama ti); IV 166,II (-etu
bhante ayasma Uttaro imarp dhammapariyayarp); Ja V
56,3!' (tumhe etarp jatakarp evarp -etha pariyapul).atha);
Ap 20,4 (mantapadarp -ayami aharp tada, Be, Ce, Se so;
E e dharayami); 93,Io (-emi vinayarp sabbarp); Dhp-a III
418,7 (aharp satthakathani t!JJi pitakani -emi); Nidd-a I
2,16* (sakkacca saddhammapajotikarp katharp SUI).atha
-etha ca sadhu santo);- 5. holds in a balance, weighs,
measures; Ap 20,32 (-eturp pathavirp sakka thapetva
tulama~J9ale); 422,15 (tulada~J9e thapetvana mahirp sakka
dharetave, Be, Ce so; Ee mahí; Se mahi); - 6. owes;
A II 69,27 (kulaputto na kassa kiñci -eti apparp va
bahurp va); Sp 999,!2 (so tarp il).arp paresarp -etí ti
il).ayiko); It-a II 162,25 (na il).arp -enti); Th-a II 16,s (na
tuyharp il).arp -ema); Cp-a 97,Is (ettakarp nama dhanarp
-emi); Sadd 695,12 (-ayate ti il).avasena gal).hati il).arp
katva gal).hatl ti attho); -7. imposes, injlicts; Mil 171,19
(tassa mayarp kahapal).arp dan9arp -ema); 193,7 (tassa
tumhe kirp daJJ9arp -etha ti); - 8. holds oneself over;
stands over; Ap 58,!9 (abbhokase patighantam padumarp
-ayissati; Ap-a 320,33: upari chadayissatí ti attho); 125,2o
(me dhammappattassa . . . supupphitarp lohitakarp
-ayissati matthake, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -ayissanti);
275,!! (sayarp gantva satapatta matthake -ayantu te);
327,21 (kütagararp braharp tassa ... akase -ayissati, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e wr -ayissanti); 369,34 (-essati sada
chattarp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -issati); - part.pr.
(a) dharenta. mf( -entl)n., Vin V 69,17 (chattupahanarp
-entiya pacittiyarp); MI 515,29 (malagandhavilepanarp
-ento); Ja VI 485,4 (deví ... gabbharp -entí); 510,7*
(kusacírani -enta katharp kahanti daraka); Ap 584,4
(-entí antimarp deharp); Cp 1:1:4 (-ento
brahmaJJaVa~JJJarp); (b) dharaya(t), mfn., Ja III 398,12'
(tarp ca marp ca mahakayarp -ayarp); Pp 41,36 (bahurp pi
bhal).ato bahurp pi -ayato); Vism 73,29* (parpsukülarp ca
eso va kavacarp viya -ayarp); (e) dharayanta,
mfi: -ayantí)n., SI 78,22; Ja VI 482,29' (gabbharp me
-ayantiya); Mil348,I4; Mhv 17:7 (setacchattarp
-ayanto); (d) dharayamana, mfn., Ja III 181,12 (devl
ubhohi hatthehi hadayamarpsarp -ayamana); As 123,19
(mahatulaya va -ayamano); (e) dhara(t) mfn., Ap 395,26
(piJJ9aya vicarantassa -ato uttamarp yasarp, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce -eto ); - cond. 3 sg. adharayissa, Ps II 2,21 (sace
bhagava agararp ajjhavasissa kasikavattham eva
adharayissa); - aor. 3 sg. (a) dharesi, adharesi, Vin V
479 dharati
27,4 (-esi); Ud !6,19 (-esi); Ja 1 68,26 (mahabrahma
chattarp -esi); Ap 369,31 (yo me chattam adharesi);
(b) dharayi, adharayi, Th 897 (dhovi rajayl -ay! muni
parpsukülani); Ja III 380,II, (-ayi); VI 578,25* (kacche
ja11am adharayi); Ap 265,3 (pupphacchattarp adharayi,
Ce, Se so; Be adharayirp; Ee akarayi); 366,9 (ma~J9aparp
-ayi); (e) dharayittha, D II 19,27 Gatassa ... Vipassissa
kumarassa setacchattarp -ayittha diva e' eva rattirp ca,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dhañyittha); 2 sg. adharayi, Ja VI
506,20* (ma ... kusacírarp adharayi); 1 sg. (a) dharesirp,
adharesirp, Ap 244,12 ( -esirp); 260,3 (ku1avarpsarp
adharesirp); (b) dharayirp, adharayirp, Th 283
(rajojallam adharayirp); Ap 52,26 (-ayirp); 404,3 (tayo
ukke adharayirp); 3 pl. (a) dharesurp, Vin V 8,22;
(b) dharayurp, adharayurp, Sn 688 (chattarp marü -ayum
antalikkhe, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -eyyurp); Ap 198,7
(-ayurp); 266,17 (adharayurp); (e) dharayirpsu, Ja 1 64,2
(tada kir' assa devata purato satthirp ukkasahassani
-ayirpsu); Ap 275,13 (buddhassa anubhavena matthake
-ayirpsu te); (d) dharirpsu, Ja VI 564,12' (yan' assu
pubbe -irpsu); Ap 124,15 ([lohitaka] dharirpsu matthake
tattha uddhava~Jta adhomukha); 1 pl. dharayimha, A IV
391,16;- absol. (a) dharetva, M 11 239,Is; Ja IV 407,19
(vamahatthena akkhirp -etva); V 383,2s (pa~Jl).a­
cchattakarp matthake -etva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee karetva);
Sp 173,32 (abbhantare yeva khantirp -etva tul).híbhavena
adhivasesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee caretva); Mp IV 105,!3
(tarp düteyyasaiJ.khatarp sasanarp -etva); Pj II 76,25
(kicchena kasirena tarp gabbharp -etva); (b) dharayitva,
Vin IIl 226,33 (-ayitva dve tula adatabba); 257,Is (suttarp
-ayitva amukassa tantavayassa dehi): Mil332,2
(dhammukkarp -ayitva); Vism 437,2o (hatthena -ayitva
pi); Mhv 10:77; (e) dharayitvana, Ja VI 485,10*
(dasamase -ayitvana); Ap 279,2s; Bv 4:30
(dhammokkarp -ayitvana); - pass. pr. 3 sg. dharlyati,
is carried; is held; A I 145,!6 (setacchattarp -iyati);
Niddi 420,17 (-iyanti); Vism485,6 (dhatuyo ...
bharaharehi ca bharo viya sattehi dh!yante -iyantí ti
attho); Sadd 2,1o (anekappakarena Pa~J9itehi -lyati esa ti
pi dhatu); - part.pr. (a) dhariyanta, mfn., Pj II 487,26;
(b) dhariyamana, mfn., l. being held; being held over,
standing over, sheltering; D 1 49,31 (ukkasu
-iyamanasu); SI 226,17 (chattena -iyamanena); Ja VI
536,6' (sattaharp -iyamananarp gandho tesarp na chijjati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dharayamananarp); Sp 204,23 (dhatíhi
aiJ.kato aiJ.karp haritva -iyamano); - 2. with something
held over one; sheltered;? Th-a III 177,17 (so
dibbaratanapallaiJ.ke dibbena setacchattena -iyamano ...
nisinno hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -iyamanena) =
Ap-a 249,1 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits; = Vism 399,7: Be,
Ce -iyamanena; Ee -ayamanena; Se -iyamane); Sv 58,II
(upari ma~Jicchattena viya bodhisakhaya -iyamano, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee -iyamanaya; = Bv-a 287: Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
omit); - pp dharita, mfn. [ts], carried, worn, used;
memorised; Vin V 75,3!; M 11 173,2o (-itanarp
dhammanarp attharp upaparikkhati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
dhatanarp); Ja IV 3,21 (cirarp taya padumarp -itarp);
VI 472,Is- (yaya tvarp kucchina -ito); Vism 64,22* (-itarp
yarp lokagaruna ko tarp parpsukülarp na dharaye); Ps IV
192,s (-itatta); Th-a III 117,5 (kittaka dhamma te
dharamanaka
satthara bhasita taya -ita ti); - neg. adharita, mfn.,
Vin IV 143,28; Ap 370,10 (na janami setacchattaq¡
adharitaq¡); - sudharita, mfn., used well; used or held
properly; Ja VI 180,10•; 292,27* (tu1a yatha paggahita
samadaJ_lqa sudharita); Mp IV 105,19;
fpp (a) dharetabba, dharitabba, mfn., Vin I 187,31 (na ca
bhikkhave ajjharame upahana -etabba); II 131,6 (na
bhikkhave chattaq¡ -etabbaq¡); MIl 239,18 (iti
duggahitaq¡ duggahltato -etabbaq¡); Ja I 482,z· (eta
pabbajitena -etabba jata); Spk III 178,14 (imaq¡
dhammadesanaq¡ uggahetabbaq¡ pariyapm.litabbaq¡
-etabbaq¡ vacetabbaq¡ ... maññissantl ti); Ap-a 274,13
(ña~ena -etabbatta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -etabbanta);
Sadd 862,23 (-itabbaq¡ me bhavata sahassaq¡ i~aq¡);
(b) dharaJ_llya, mfn., D II 133,6 (ingha me tvaq¡ bhaJ.le
singivaJ_l~aq¡ yugamatthaq¡ -a~Iyaq¡ ahara ti; Sv 570,2:
-aJ_liyan ti antarantara maya -etabbaq¡ paridahitabban ti
attho, taq¡ kira so tathartipe chaJ_ladivase va dharetva
sesakale nikkhipati).
dharamanaka, mfn. [part.pr. of dharati + ka2], ( still)
alive; living; existing; Sp 264,3 (yo -aq¡ yeva acariyaq¡
muñcitva aññattha vasitabbaq¡ maññati); Ps II 117,19;
Mp I 429,2 (ath' assa -ass' eva kalakatabhavaq¡ sutva);
Cp-a 40,16 (-assa buddhassa sasane, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
dharamanabuddhassa).
dhara,.f, se e sv dhara.
dhava 1, m. [ts], a type of free (Grislea tomentosa or
Anogeissus latifolia); Abh 1041 (rukkhe ... -o); A I
202,12 (salo va -o va phandano va); Ja IV 209,9* (n' eva
salo na khadiro n' assakaJ.l~O kuto -o); Sadd 94,25*.
dhava2, m. [ts], a husband; Abh 240 (-o tu samiko
bhatta); 1041; Thl-a 117,22 (-o vuccati samiko
tadabhava vidhava).
dhavati (and *dhuvati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhravati,
dhruvati, Wg §§ 28:107, 22:45], goes; is firm;
Dhatum 429 (dhuva yatrathiresu ca); Sadd 393,7 (dhu
gatitheriyesu: . . . -ati dhuvaq¡); fpp
dhavitabba, (mj)n., Sadd 393,12.
dhava1a, mfn. [ts], white; dazzling white; Abh 95;
V v-a 197,17 (bhisamülanaq¡ o -taya); Th-a III 46,28
(bhagavato hi dathahi candakira~a viya -rasmiyo 0
niccharanti); Ap-a 223,6 (itthakacu~~akhirapas~a­
cu~~adihi dhava1a-m-akatatta ma1aggahitadanta ti);
Sadd 362,13* (paJ_lqaraq¡ -aq¡ pi ca); - ifc see duddha-
(sv duhati\ 0
-tara, mfn., whiter; Vv-a 252,29
(--taya).
dhaseti, -aya ti, pr. 3 sg. [e;{ S. dhar~ayati, Wg § 34:43:
dhr~a prasahane], gladdens; ? Sadd 568,s (dhasa
pahasane: -eti -ayati, Ee so; Be masa pahasane: maseti
masayati).
dhassati,fot. 3 sg. ofdahati 3 qv.
-dhli, ind. [ts], ifc: times, ways, jold; Sadd 902,4 (-dha iti
vibhagatthe: ekadha dvidha tidha); - see agha-
(sv agha\ ekadha, catu-, catupañca- (sv catu[r]), cha-
(sv cha2), ti- (sv ti\ dasa- (sv dasa\ dvi-, nava-
(sv navl), neka-, pañca-, bah u-, satta- (sv satta4).
dhlikhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhrakhati, Wg § 5:11],
becomes dry; is able; Sadd 329,18 (dakha dhakha
sosanalamatthesu: ... dakhati -ati).
dhañña in Ee atAs 116,22 is wr for dhañña (Be, Ce, Se
480 dhatu
so).
dhlita\ mfn., pp of dharati qv.
dhlita 2 , mfn. [cf S. dhita], satisfied; replete; V in I 222,7
(bhikkhii . .. bhojjayaguya -a... bhattagge na
cittariipaq¡ bhuñjanti); Pv 11:8 (bahuq¡ pitva na -a
homa); Ja I 185,8· (madhurapayasena tappati titto
hoti -o suhito); VI 555,16* (asito -o); Mil238,2
(puriso yavadatthaq¡ bhojanaq¡ bhuñjeyya ... so -o
pl~ito paripu~~o ... ); Vism 623,29 (riipaq¡., suhita-
kale samughitaq¡ -aq¡ pl~itaq¡ mudu siniddhaq¡
phassavantaq¡ hoti); PsI 95,32 (bhagava ca -o
suhito ); - atidhata, mfn., too full; D III 184,7 (-o smi
ti kammaq¡ na karoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se atipipasito);
Spk III 140,6 (aticchato 'smi -o smi).
dhata(r), m. [S. dhatr], a bearer, supporter; Ja V 221 ,30*
(-a vidhata e' a si kamapa1o; 225,32·; tvaq¡ de va mama
dhara~ato -a); - cfSadd 139,7 (vatta -a ice adinaq¡
padanaq¡ vattu dhatu ice adini pakatiriipani); 921,22
(mattabhedo tava ... dhatu -a).
dhataki, f [ts], a plant; SAF: folsee flower tree,
Woodfordia fruticosa (L.) Kurz; or Grislea tomentosa;
cfG. M. Meulenbeld, 1974, p. 564; Abh 589 (aggija1a
tu -l); Mp-t [Be] II 305,9 (dhataki-asavadinana-
sambharehi).
dhliti, dhati,f [S. dhatri], a nurse; a wet nurse; Abh 244
(upamata tu -l); V in I 269,22 (taq¡ darakaq¡,. -inaq¡
detha posetun ti); IV 318,17 (payantl nama mata va
hoti -I va); D II 19,24 (Bandhuma raja Vipassissa
kumarassa -iyo upaghapesi); MI 395,2 (kumaro ...
-1ya va pamadaq¡ anvaya kaghaq¡ ... mukhe
ahareyya); Ja II 328,11 (taq¡ jatamattaq¡ nahapetva
thaññaq¡ payanatthaya -iya adaq¡su); IV 37,2o
(attano atthacarikaq¡ -iq¡ . , gabbhinlpariharaq¡
pucchitva); V 184,3* (ughehi tvaq¡ -i imaq¡ kumaraq¡
ramehi aññattha); VI 3,1 (mahasattassa pana
atidighadidosavajjita a1ambatthaniyo madhuraka-
thañña catusaghi -iyo adasi); Ap 154,12 (-iyo maq¡
upaghanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dhatuyo); Vism 28,1
(yo hi kuladarake -I viya ankena va khandhena va
paribhatati, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -i); Ps V 69,23
(Mahapajapatl attano puttaq¡ -lnaq¡ datva sayaq¡
bodhisattassa dhatikiccaq¡ sadhayamana attano
thaññaq¡ payesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhaninaq¡); Pj li
227,18 (-l thaññaq¡ apivantaq¡ darakaq¡ yaq¡ kiñci
datva upa1a)etva payeti); Mp II 216,16 (mata janeti
yeva -i pana jaggati yeva); Mhv 35:20 (kumarakaq¡
-inaq¡ hatthe datvana); - 0
(i)-cela, n., a nurse's
garment; SI 205,1* (aki~~a1uddo puriso -aq¡ va
makkhito, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ativelaq¡; Spk I
298,17 foil.: yatha dhatiya nivatthakilighavatthaq¡
uccarapassavapaq¡sumasikaddamadihi makkhitaq¡) =
Ja III 309,s• (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhatico1aq¡ va;
309,12' foil.: khe1asinghanikamuttagiithamakkhitaq¡
dhatidasiya nivatthace1aq¡ viya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhatiya nivatthaco1aq¡).
dhlitu, f (and m.) [BHS id.; S. dhatu, m.; cfSadd 2,13*:
0
-saddo jinamate itthilingattane mato satthe
pullingabhavasmiq¡, and 215,28foll.], Abh 817
(semhado rasarattado mahabhiite pabhadike dhatu
dvisv aghi cakkhadibhvadisu gerikadisu, Ce so; Be
dhatu
gerukadisu); Vis m 486,1 foil.; - l. a basic material
element (cf mahabhüta); a primary element; Abh 817
(mahabhüte ... dhatu); D III 228,1 (catasso -uyo,
pathavldhatu apodhatu tejodhatu vayodhatu); 247,19
(cha -u yo, pathav!dhatu . . . akasadhatu viñña~a­
dhatu); M 1 57,36 (bhikkhu imam eva kaya¡p ... -uso
paccavekkhati, atthi imasmi¡p kaye pathavldhatu ... );
Vibh 82,3 foll. (cha -u yo pathavldhatu ... viñña~a­
dhatu); Nett 73,25; Vism 364,27 (sa1akkha~adhara~ato
dukkhadanato dukkhadhanato ca -u ti); Ps 1 31 ,3o
(cattaro kho bhikkhu mahabhüta hetü ti ettha
[bhütasaddo] catusu -üsu [dissati]); - ifc see tejo-
(sv teja[s]), pathavl-, vayo- (sv vaya[s]); - see also
2 domanassadhatu upekhadhatu avijjadhatu); - ifc
chadhatuka, chadhatura (sv cha ); - 2. a principie; ?
S 11 25,19 (thita va sa -u dhammaghitata
dhammaniyamata idappaccayata; Spk 11 40,19: thito
va so paccayasabhavo) =A 1 286,15;- 3. (i) one ofthe
18 constituent elements of (sensory) experience;
Abh 817; M III 62,lo (agharasa ... -u yo, cakkhudhatu
rüpadhatu cakkhuviñña~adhatu ... manodhatu
dhammadhatu manoviñña~adhatü ti); S 1 196,14 (so
me dhammam adesesi khandhe ayatanani -uyo);
Ili 65,14 (bhikkhu -uso . . . ayatanaso ...
paticcasamuppadaso upaparikkhati); Th 1255
(khandhe ayatanani ca -uyo ca viditvana pabbaji¡p
anagariya¡p); Thl 14 (-u yo dukkhato disva);
Vibh 87,9 (agharasa -uyo); Dhatuk 1,24
(rüpakkhandho katlhi khandhehi kat!h' ayatanehi
kat!hi -ühi sangahlto); Nett 57,7; PsI 137,27
(anicca¡p dukkha¡p anatta khandha -ü ayatanani
satipaghana ti evarüpa paramatthadesana); Mp 111
243,1 (ida¡p -ü ti vacana¡p bahiddha n' atthi, mama
bhatika sama~adevaputta bhavissantl ti);- see also
Vism 486,12joll.; ifc see kaya-, gandha-
(sv gandha\ ghana-, cakkhu-, jivha-, dhamma-
(sv dhamma 1), phoghabba (sv phusati), mano-
(sv mana[s]), rasa-, rüpa-, sadda-, sota- (sv sota 1); -
(ii) an element, a conditioned constituent, of experience
(cf dhamma); D III 274,14 (sankhata ca -u asankhata
ca -u; Sv 1057,35foll.: sankhata -ü tipaccayehi kata
pañcakkhandha asankhata -ü ti paccayehi akata¡p
nibbana¡p); Vism 485,21 (-ü ti nijjlvamattass' ev'
eta¡p adhivacana¡p); Spk 11 131,6 (nissattagha-
suññataghasankhatena sabhavaghena -ü ti 1addha-
namana¡p dhammana¡p nanasabhavo dhatunanatta¡p);
Patis-a 68,32foll. (hlna -u dvadasakusa1acittuppado
majjhima -u avasesa tebhümakadhamma pa~lta -u
nava 1okuttaradhamma); - 4. a domain of experience
or existence; D III 215,19 (tisso -u yo, kamadhatu
rüpadhatu arüpadhatu); 215,21 (tisso -uyo, rüpadhatu
arüpadhatu nirodhadhatu); S 11 150,1 (satt' ima
bhikkhave -u yo . . . abhadhatu subhadhatu
akasanañcayatanadhatu . . . saññavedayitanirodha-
dhatu); A III 356,15 (ye amata¡p -u¡p kayena phusitva
viharanti); It 38,25* (duve ima ... nibbanadhatü ... eka
hi -u idha dighadhammika saupadisesa ...
anupadisesa pana samparayika; It-a I 164,35:
nissattanijjlvaghena sabhavadhara~aghena ca -ü ti
nibbanadhatu); Bv 16:21 (atirocati tejena
dasasahassimhi -u ya; Bv-a 222,23: dasasahassiya
481 dhatu
1okadhatuya); Vibh 73,2 (ragakkhayo dosakkhayo
mohakkhayo aya¡p vuccati asankhata -u);
Vism 487,17 (asankhata pana -u dhammadhatu-
ekadeso va); Mp 11 334,26foll. (hlnaya -uya ti
kamadhatuya... majjhimaya -u ya ti rüpadhatuya,
pa~Haya -uya ti arüpadhatuya); - zfc see kama-,
dhamma- (sv dhamma 1), nibbana-, nekkhamma-,
rüpa-; - sometimes a very general abstraction: -hood,
-ness; S II 15 3,3o (mahatl kho esa . . . -u yad ida¡p
avijjadhatu); It 80,1s (yo subhaya -u ya raganusayo
so pahlyati; It-a II 88,25: sub haya -u ya ti subhabhave
subhanimitte ti attho); Vibh 85,11 (cha -uyo,
sukhadhatu dukkhadhatu somanassadhatu
see nikkama-, va~~a-; - see also kilighadhatuka
(sv kilisati); 5. a psychological element; a
disposition; constitution; D II 282,27 (tasmi¡p
anekadhatunanadhatusmi¡p loke ya¡p yad eva satta
-u¡p abhinivisanti ta¡p tad e va... abhinivissa
voharanti idam eva sacca¡p mogha¡p aññan ti;
Sv 737,22: ya¡p ya¡p ajjhasaya¡p satta abhinivisanti
ga~hanti); S II 154,2o (-uso ... satta sa¡psandanti ...
hlnadhimuttika satta hlnadhimuttikehi saddhi¡p
sa¡psandanti) = It 70,1 (It-a II 65,12: -u ti ca ajjhasaya-
dhatu ajjhasayasabhavo adhippeto, yo adhimuttl ti
pi vuccati); Vibh 86,4 (cha -uyo, kamadhatu
vyapadadhatu vihi¡psadhatu nekkhammadhatu
avyapadadhatu avihi¡psadhatu); Spk II 138,16 (ito
paghaya ajjhasaya¡p -ü ti dlpeti); - ifc see kama-;
- see also khujjadhatuka, goslladhatuka (sv go),
dandhadhatuka, dhuttikadhatuka (sv dhuttaka),
pa~<;!urogadhatuka (sv pa~<;lu), badhiradhatuka,
muddhadhatuka (sv muyhati), vamanakadhatuka,
samadhatuka (sv sama3); - 6. a constituent part;
Vv 36:5 (ratho ... nanava~~ahi -ühi suvibhatto va
sobhati; Vv-a 168,s: anekarüpahi akkhacakka-lsadi-
avayavadhatühi); - 7. an element of the body; one of
the humours of the body (pitta, vata and semha); a
bodily fluid or secretion; Abh 817 (semhado
rasarattado mahabhüte pabhadike dhatu); Mil 125,4
(ruhire pacchinnavege thapitaya -uya, Ce, Ee so; Be
thitaya; Se u tuya); Vism 485,18 (sarlrasankhatassa
samudayassa avayavabhütesu rasaso~itadisu ...
0
-samañña); Sadd 206,5foll. ( 0 -saddo rasa-rudhira-
ma¡psa-meda-nharu-aghi-aghi-miñja-sukkasankhata-
dhatuvacako pullingo); - 8. the remains of a body
after cremation; a relic; Abh 278 (aghi dhatv itthl);
Vv47:11 (mahemase tathagatassa -uyo); Jaiii 375,8
(ta¡p -u¡p gahetva cetiya¡p karetva); Ap 70,27
(sarlrakicca¡p katvana -u¡p tattha samanayu¡p, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee -ü); 71,9 (-u ave~ika n' atthi sarlra¡p
ekapi~<;lita¡p); 153,16 (-u¡p sasapamatta¡p pi
nibbutassapi püjaye); Sp 83,18 foll. (api ca bhante
-uyo kuto lacchama ti); 84,1o (tumhaka¡p kira
maharaja hatthe dve -uyo atthi dakkhi~adatha ca
dakkhi~akkhaka¡p ca); 84,19 (raja ... patta¡p gahetva
gandhehi ubbagetva varamuttasadisana¡p -üna¡p
püretva adasi); Sv 604,4 foll. (bhagava . . . -üna¡p
vikiri~a¡p adhighasi, kati pan' assa -uyo vippaki~~a
kati na vippaki~~a ti, catasso datha dve akkhaka
dhatuka
u1,1hisan ti ima satta -uyo na vippakiriiJ1SU sesa
vippakirif!1sll ti); Ps IV 111,7 (ye ca parinibbute
tathagate cetiyaf!l bhindanti bodhif!1 chindanti
-umhi upakkamanti tesaf!1 kif!1 hoti ti); Spk III 221,6
(-uyo parissava1,1e pakkhipitva); 222,18 (ima
sankhava1,11,1asannibha -uyo paññayanti); Mhv 17:3
(-usu dighesu digho hoti jino iti); Sadd 2,15 (tato
Gotamidhatuni ti ettha 0 -saddo lingavipallase
vattati, quoting Ap 542,23);- see also sadhatuka;-
9. ore; a mineral; Abh 817 (-u ... gerikadisu, Ce so;
Be gerukadisu); Vism 173,8 (kaf!1sanilapa1asanila-
añjananilanaiJ1 va aññatarena va -una); 485,14 (loke
vicitta haritalamanosiladayo selavayava -uyo ti
vuccanti) = Vibh-a 77,w; Vism 174,6 (rattavatthena
va -una va);- ifc see va1,11,1a-;- 10. (gr.t.t.) a verbal
root; Abh 817 (dhatu dvisv aghi cakkhadibhvadisu);
Sp 172,1 (yesaf!1 hi -ilnaf!1 gati attho buddhi pi tesaf!l
attho) = Sadd 315,7; Nidd-al 442,7 (bujjhanattha pi
-u yo gamanattha honti) = Patis-a 485,26; Bv-a 25,19
(devanaiJ1 nama 0 -attho ki)adi); Sadd 2,5 foll. (-u ti
ken' aghena -u); 2,2o (bhuvadayo sadda -avo); 254,2
(
0
-saddo .. . karapacadivacako pumitthilingo ...
karotissa -ussa); 328,32 (akammako 'yaf!1 -u); 392,11
(dha dhara1,1e ... -u); 835,21 (bru ice etaya -uya
Ikaragamo hoti); - see also ekadhatuka (sv eka); -
0
-oropana, n., the taking down of the relic;
Mhv 17:34;- 0 -katha,f, --(p)pakara1,1a, n., the name
of the third of the books making up the Abhidhamma-
pitaka; (the book of) the account of elements;
Dhatuk 113,11 (--ppakara1,1af!1 samattaf!1, Ce, E e so; Se
--pakara1,1af!1; Be -pakara1,1af!1 nighitaiJ1); Mil 12,24
(ay asma ca Nagaseno ... sangaho asangaho ti adina
cuddasavidhena vibhattaf!1 --pakara1,1af!1 ... pagul,laf!l
katva); Vism 96,5 (bhikkhunaiJ1 -af!l uddisi); Sp
18,17 (dhammasangal,li vibhango -a ... paghanan ti
idaf!l abhidhammapitakaf!l nama); Ps II 184,27
(abhidhamme nayamaggaf!1 sammasi . . . vibhanga-
ppakaral,laf!l --pakarai,laiJ1 ... ); As 8,11 (tadanantaraiJ1
--pakaral,laf!l nama); 13,17 (-af!l ... sammasantassa);
Dhatuk-a 114,s• (mahaviro .. . adesayi -af!l dhatu-
bhedappakasano); - --pakaral,laghakatha,f, the
commentary on the Dhatukatha; Dhatuk-a 138,16
(--pakarai:Jarthakatha nighita); - 0 -kucchi in Ee at
Mi1176,s is prob wr; Be abhisannadhatu kucchi; Ce
abhissandamanadhatuko kucchi; Se abhisandamano
vatakucchi; 0
-(k)khobha, m., 0
-kopa, m.,
l. disturbance of the bodily humours; Vism 35,12
(vyabadho ti -o taf!1samughana ca kughagai:J9a-
pljakadayo); Sp 520,17 (pittadinaf!1 khobhakaral,la-
paccayayogena khubhitadhatuko -ato supinaf!l
passati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee khubhitadhatukhobhato) =
Nidd-a I 414,13 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee sankhubhita-
dhatuko ); - 2. disturbance of the great elements;
Sv 130,18 (aghahi karal,lehi pathavikampo veditabbo
-ena ... ); 559,30 (imesu aghasu pathavikampesu
pathamo -ena, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -kopena) = Mp IV
155,21 (eds 0 -kopena);- 0 -gal}a,m., (gr.t.t.) a series
or class of roots; Sadd 3,24 (aghavidha -a suttantesu
bahupakara); - 0 -gatika, mfn., in the sphere of the
relics, similar to a relic; Sv 609,27 (ayaf!l pi SUYai,li,la-
482 dharaka
kumbho -o va);- 0 -gabbha, m., an inner chamber or
building containing a relic; Sv 613,6; Ap-a439,!2;
Mhv 34:49; - 0 -cañgotaka, 0 -cankotaka, m.n., a box
containing a relic; Sp 85,9 ( -af!1 mayhaf!1 matthake
patighatu ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -cankotakaf!1);
Mhv 17:25 (-o ayaf!l sirasmiiJ1 me patighatu);-
0
-cetiya, n., a thupa for relics; Dhp-a III 29,1;
Ud-a 322,13; Ap-a 358,4 (na hi aparinibbutassa
bhagavato sariradhatllnaiJ1 abhava -af!l karissati); -
see also dhatuka; - 0 -nidhanaka, 0 -nidhanika, n., a
depositing, enshrining of relics; Sv 613,4 (Ajatasattuna
0
-nidhanikaf!l kataf!l, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se
0
-nidhanaiJ1); Mhv 32:33 (-e); - 0 -nidhayaka-
cetiya, n., a stupa for the deposit of relics; Ap-a 358,2
(idaf!l bhagavato vasanaghanaiJ1 cetiyan ti vuccati na
-an ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhatunidhanaka-); -
0
-Vittharika, n., a diffusion or dispersa! of relics;?
Bv 6:29 (-af!l asi tesu tesu padesato); 28:13 (-af!l asi
Gotamassa mahesino); 0
-ViVal}l}aka, mfn.,
disparaging relics; Pv-a 212,24 (taf!l -af!l petaf!1); -
0
-samata,f, equilibrium of the bodily humours, good
health; Mil351,8 (yadi thai:J9i1aseyyaya -a bhavati);
Sv 253,27 (kacci te bho Gotama -a); - 0 -ssara, m.
[dhatu + sara5 ], the vowel of a root; Sadd 836,22 (-o
rasso hoti saññogakkhare pare); 873,24 (-ass' attaf!1:
kirati ti karuna).
dhatuka, m.n. ~r mfn. [dhatu + ka2 ], a relic; connected
with relics; - 0
-cetiya, n., a place or object of
veneration that is or contains relics; Pj 1 222,1
(paribhogacetiyan uddissakacetiyaiJ1 -an ti . . . dhatu-
gabbhathupa sadhatuka -af!l, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
sadhatukacetiyan ti . . . dhatugabbha thupa sadhatuka-
cetiyaf!1).
dhana, n. [S., BHS id.], a receptacle; a place
containing ... ; ifc se e kal,ltaka- (sv kai:Jtaka 1),
sankara-.
dhanaka, n. [dhana + ka2], a receptacle; - ifc see
dhuma- (sv dhuma 1).
dhana,f [ts],fried barley; Abh463 (-a bhaghayave);
Ud-a 122,11 (ku1,19adhanamissena ca balikammena
tussati ti).
dhaniya, n. [S. dhanya], grain; com; Sn 285 (na pasu
brahmai:Jan' asuf!1 na hiraññaf!l na -af!1
sajjhayadhanadhaññasuf!1; Pj II 315,3: vihisaliyava-
godhumadisu pubbai:JI:Japarai:JI,labhedaiJ1 -af!1 pi
tesaf!l nahosi); Ja V 100,5* (na te putta bhavissanti na
hiraññaf!1 na -af!1); Pj II 323,9 (yavagodhümadi-
bhedaf!l -af!l ca); - ifc see dhana-; - see also
dhañña2
dhani, f [ts], the site of a habitation, a seat; - ifc see
raja-.
dhaninaip in Ee at Ps V 69,23 is wr for dhatinaiJ1 (Be,
Ce, Se so).
-dhara, mfn. [ts], holding; - ifc see ukka-, kal,ll,la-,
dai:J9a-, padipa-.
dharaka, mf( -ika)n. and m. [BHS dharaka; cf S.
dharaka], (one) who knows or remembers; (one) who
holds or carries, is responsible; Vism 556,9 (na ca
tadatthaniyyatanadito paraiJ1 pi -o va hoti); Spk I
81,1 (itihasapañcamanaiJ1 vedanaf!1 -a); Ap-a 286,36
dharm;ta
(poral)assa vaf)1sassa -o); 34 7 ,s; - ifc se e kuta-
dharika (sv kuta), tanti-, rajatacchatta-, sampatti-; -
0
-jatika, mfn., naturally remembering; good at
remembering; A 11 97,15 (sutanaf!1 ca dhammanaf!1 -o
hoti).
dhiirai_la, n. -a, f, and mf( -I)n., [ts], l. (i) (n.f) holding;
wearing; supporting; keeping; Abh 1059 (dhiratte -e
dhiti); Ja V 225,32' (tvaf!1 deva mama -ato dhata):
VI l80,11' (nikkhepe -aya va); 372,r (ratananaf!1 -ato
vasundharan ti); Ap 244,14 (-aya idaf!1 phalaf)1);
Vism 60,6 (paf!1sukülassa -af)1); Sp 1388,27 (dasa
divasani atirekacivarassa -a anuññata ti); Sv 198,2
(pattassa bhikkhapatiggahaJ?adivasena paribhogo
-af)1 nama); PsI 173,23 (-ato dhammo, vinipatituf!1
appadanato ti vuttaf!1 hoti); Ud-a 268,7 (saf!1sara-
dukkhapatato -ena); - ifc see clvara-, chatta-
(sv chatta\ jata-, mala-; - (ii) (mfn.) holding;
supporting; containing; - (fe see ayu-, sakalasasana-
(sv sakala); - 2. (n.) holding in a sea le, weighing;
Dhp-a III 252,15/oll. (tividhena manena tlraJ?ena -ena
püranena va ... -an ti tu laya -am); - 3. (n.f)keeping
in mind, remembering, memorising; Mil 79,32/oll.
(-aya sikkhitatta dharal)aka bahuf!1 pi dharenti, evaf!1
-ato sati uppajjati); Dhp-a 1 7,22 (buddhavacanaf)1
uggal)hitva tassa -af)1 kathanaf!1 vacanan ti idaf!1
ganthadhuraf!1 nama); Ud-a 15,21 (yathasutaf)1 -am
eva tattha karal)lyan ti); Ap-a 287,9 (paramattha-
dhammanaf!1 -ato dhammadharo Anando); - ifc see
pitakattaya- (sv pitaka); - (dharaJ?a)-ta,f, abstr.,
keeping in mind; remembering; Nidd 1 l0,1o (ya sati
anussati . . . saral)ata dharal)ata; Nidd-a 1 52,16:
sutapariyattassa dharaJ?abhavato -a) t Dhs 14 t
Vibh 124,4.
1
dharai_laka , m. [ts], a debtor; Jall 203,2 (-o datuf!1 na
sakkoml ti na kiñci adasi); IV 45,15 (asukagame
tumhakaf!1 -o atthi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se uddharal)ako);
Ud-a 115,12 (dharanakehi, Ee so; Ce kata-il)ehi; Be,
Se omit); It-a I 40,10foll. ( -af)1 paticca dhanikassa
dhanikaf]1 paticca -assa patinidhibhüto);- see also
uddharanaka.
dharai_lak~ 2 • mfn. and m. [dharal)a + ka2], (one) who
holds, keeps in mind, memorises; Mil 79,32 (dharal)aya
sikkhitatta -a bahuf!1 pi dharenti, evaf!1 dharal)ato
sati uppajjati); Mp I 286,25 (imass' eva ca therassa
buddhavacanaf!1 gahetva 0 -sati aññehi therehi
balavatara ahosi).
dharai_la,f, see sv dharaJ?a.
dharaya, mfn. [ts], holding, bearing; - ifc see kamma-.
dhara\ f [ts], a stream of water; a drop of liquid; a
stream, a shower; Abh 1095; Vini 240,s (antalikkha
dhaññassa -a opatitva dhaññagaraf!1 püreti); D 1 74,25
(devo ca na kalena kalaf!1 samma -af!1
anupaveccheyya; Sv 218,16: -an ti vughif!1); 11 15,4
(dve udakassa -a antalikkha patubhavanti); S V
400,26* (puññassa -a upayanti pal)<;iitaf)1); Pv 21 :7 1
(samma -af)1 pavecchante; Pv-a 139,27: vughidharaf!1
samma-d-eva pavattente); Ap 429,R (samma -e
pavassante); Mil 375,21 (deve samma -af)1
pavecchante); Vism 417,7 (-ahi vassanto); Sp 786,4
(-af)1 avicchinditva siñcantassa); - ifc see assu-
483 dhavati
4
(sv assu ), acchinna- (sv chindati); - 0
-dhara, m. a
cloud; Abh 4 7; Sadd 407,24*; se e al so
acchinnadhara (sv chindati).
dhara 2 , f [ts], the sharp edge of a knife or sword etc.; a
blade; Abh 1095; D III 126,2o (khurassa
sadhunisitassa talaf!1 assa passati -af)1 ca kho tassa na
passati); Sp 447,15 (etass' eva va asissa imaya -aya
marehl ti); 910,5 (sace -a bhijjati); Dhp-a II 249,4 (asi
namitva -aya -af)1 pahari); - ifc see khura-
(sv khura\ - see also ubhatodhara, ekatodhara,
kuJ?thadhara, khuradhara (sv khura\ tikhil)adhara,
til)hadhara, samadhara (sv sama\ sukhumadhara.
dhiiri(n), mfn. [S. dharin], l. holding, wearing, keeping;
Ap-a 157,5 (evarüpaf!1 vatthaf!1 -iniya nama saddhif!1
saf!1vasaf!1 na1abhin ti); - ifc see antimadeha-
(sv antima), illiyacapa- (sv illiya), gabbha-, cakka-,
jata-, pitakattaya- (sv pitaka), mala-, rajalailkara-
(sv raja[n]), virüpavesa- (sv virüpa), vesa-;
2. owing; Sadd 862,21 (-1 si me sahassaf!1 il)af!1).
dhiirika,f, see sv dharaka.
dhareta(r), m. [S. dharayitr]. one who memorises, keeps
in mind; V in II 201,32 (bhikkhu sota ca hoti saveta ca
uggaheta ca -eta ca viññata ca ... ) t A IV 196,5;
Ap-a 274,10 (mantanaf)1-eta ti).
dhareti, -aya ti, caus. pr. 3 sg of dharati qv;
dharopa, n. [?], (a dialect word for) a bowl, a dish; M III
235,11 (tad ev' ekaccesu janapadesu patl ti
sañjananti . . . saravan ti sañjananti -an ti
sañjananti ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se harosan ti).
dhii!ati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhra<;Iate, Wg § 8:36],falls
to pieces; Sadd 460,22 (daJa dhaJa visarat:Je: da!ati
-a ti).
dhava, m. [see dhavati 1], running, racing; M 1 446,1s
(enaf!1 assadamako uttarif)1 karal)af!1 kareti anukkame
mal)<;!ale khurakase -e ... ; Ps III 159,5: jave ti slgha-
vahane, -e ti pi patho, Be so; Se dhare ti slgha-
vahane ... ; Ce -e ti slghajavane dhavane ti pi patho;
E e -e ti slghavahane, dhaveti pi patho ).
1 2
dhavaka, mfn. and m. ffrom dhavati or dhavati ; cfS.
1 2
dhavaka , dhavaka ], running; or washing, a
washerman; Sadd 440,27 (dhavu gatisuddhiyaf)1: ...
-o).
dhavati 1, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhavati], runs; streams; rushes;
runs around; Dhatup 287 (dhava gatisuddhiyam);
Dhatum 421 (dhavu gamanavuddhimhi; cf fn. to
Dhatup 287); Vin lii 180,31 (hatthissa pi purato
-anti); M III 184,10 (sighena javena -ati); Dhp 344
(mutto bandhanam eva -ati); Ud 37,24* (hurahuraf!1
-ati bhantacitto); Pv 51:1 (kin nu ummattarüpo va
migo bhanto va -asi); Th 446 (sace -ati te cittaf!1
kamesu ca bhavesu ca; Th-a 11 187,21: -a ti sarati
javati); Ja V 318,s· (ahaf!1 phalakavudhahattho
tumhakaf!1 rathassa purato -issaml ti); Ap 185,6
(buddhassa gacchamanassa dussa -anti pacchato);
Vism 268,35 (kütagol)ayuttaratho viya uppatham eva
-ati); Sp 330,15 (maccho gayhamano ito e' ito ca
-ati); Dhp-a I 389,21 (kif!1 ayaf)1 maharaja gahapatiko
viya -atl ti); Ud-a 167,12 (sekhaputhujjana hi ...
cutipatisandhivasena saf!1sare -anti nama); As !6!,2
(tena javena -eyyuf!1); Saddh 378 (cittaf)1 -ati);
 *dhavati
Sadd 440,26 (dhavu gatisuddhiya111: -a ti vidhavati);
- part.pr. (a) dhava(t), mfn., M III 184,11; Ja II 290,24
(udakapitthe -ato); Vibh-a 474,3 (tena -ata ti1.1ani
chinnani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -ato);
(b) dhavanta, mf( -ant!)n., V in III 118,3o; M II 99,12
(aha111 hi pubbe hatthi111 pi -anta111 anupatitva
gaghami); Ja 1 308,5* (pathe -antiya); Mp 1 322,16
(buddharasmiyo ito e' ito ca -antiyo); Mhv 10:56;-
aor. 3 sg. dhavi, Ja III 325,14 (raja migo me viddho ti
gaha1.1atthaya -i); Mhv 10:56; 2 sg. dhavi, Th 126
(tigha makka~a ma -i); 3 pl. dhavi111su, Ja V 49,18*;-
inf dhavitu111, Th-a 11 187,22; - absol. dhavitva,
Ja VI 334,27' (vatavegena -itva); Vism 274,32;
Ap-a 17 6,3 (k u maro tata tata ti -itva rajana111
sampapul)i);- adhavitva in Ee at Sp 730,7 is wr for
adhavitva (Be, Ce, Se so); - pp dhavita, mfn. [ts],
running; Dhp-a I 390,11 (na dhavitamhi tata ti);
Th-a 111 78,2 (vidhavita ti virupa111 -a); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. dhaveti 1, - aor. 3 sg. dhavesi, Mhv 23:73
(so assa111 aruhitva ta111 sigha111 dhavesi mal)qa1e).
*dhavate, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhavati; Wg § 15:92: dhavu
gatisuddhyoJ:¡], cleans; Dhatup 287 (dhava
gatisuddhiya111; cffn. and Dhatum 421: dhavu
gamanavuddhimhi); Sadd 440,26 (dhavu gati-
suddhiyal11: -ati vidhavati);- see also dhovati.
dhavana\ n., -a,f lfrom dhavati 1; S. dhavana], running;
rushing around; Abh 1087 (-a111 gate); Vism 107,13
(vitakkacaritassa . . . divapajjalana hurahura111 -a ti
evamadayo dhamma); Spk 111 134,25 (in cpd: dhavana-
langhana-, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee badhanalanghapana-) f-
Pa~is-a 689,16 (eds so); Mp 1 225,19 (so darakehi
saddhi111 ki~anto viya attano 0 -vare sampatte);
IV 201,17 (padasa -ena).
dhavana2, n. lfrom dhavati 2; ts], washing; Abh 1087
(sucitte -am).
dhavanaka, ~fn. [dhavana 1 + ka2], running; rushing;
Pa~is-a 388,18 (uppathe -~ kü~acitta111) = As 148,12
(Be, Ce so; Se 0 -kütacittam; Ee dhavanakütacittam).
dhaveti\ caus. pr. 3 ~g. of dhavati 1 qv. . .
dhaveti2 , -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of dhunati qv.
dhiiseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup dhrasnati,
dhrasayati, Wg §§ 31:52, 33:68], gleans; Sadd 567,9
(dhasa uñche: -eti -ayati).
dhi\ dhi 1, ind. [BHS dhi; S. dhik, aho dhik, ha dhik], (an
exclamation expressing reproach or displeasure or
disgust) shame! out upon ... ! (usually + acc., also +
gen., voc. or nom.); Abh 1160 (nindaya111 tu dhi); 1201;
Dhp 389 (dhi brahmagassa hantara111, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhi); Ja V 442,18' (dhi dhi pisaci ti jigucchitva, Be so; Se
dhi dhi; Ce aha dhi dhi ay~ pisaci ti; Ee aya111 pisaci ti
[omitting dhi dhi]); Vism 57,14* (dhi jivita111 asaññatassa,
Be, Ee so; Ce dhi jjivita111 adhaññassa; Se dhi jivit~
apaññassa); Sv 975,23/oll. (dhi citt~ dhi vat' et~
citt~ cittassa nama abhavo yeva sadhu, Ce, Se so; Be
dhi citt~ dibbateta111 citta111; Ee wr adhicitta111) = Mp V
24,10foll. (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhi vat' eta111 citt~ dhi
citt~); Ps III 68,zo (dhi dhi ti vadanto); Mp I 412,2 (dhi
dhi ti garahitva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e dhi dhi ti); V 59,16 (dhi
Kokalika ayuttam akasi); Pj II 323,29 foil. (dhi manussa
dhi manussa ti); As 227,16 (dhi dhi apanetha ti); Dhp-a I
484 dhiti
179,2 (seghi aha111 dhi ti mahavirav~ viravitva, Be so;
Ce ahan dhi ti; Ee h~ dhi ti; Se ma avadhi ti) =
Pa~is-a 682,31 (Be, Se dhi dhi ti; Ce, Ee han dhi ti);
Dhp-a I 216,1 (dhi dhi deva sappo ti mahasadd~ katva,
Be so; Ce ahadhi deva; Ee h~di deva; Se deva sappo
ti); - esp. dhi tarp/tava atthu, shame upon you! S V
217,9* (dhi ta111 jarnmi jare atthu, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se dhi;
Spk III 245,4: dhi ta111 tuyh~ hotu dhikkaro ta111
phusatu); Thi 106 (dhi tav' atthu jare jamme, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee ~hitivatthuj' aneja mhi, prob. wr; Thi-a 97,15: jare
jamme lamake hine tava tuyh~ dhi atthu);- very often
dhl'-r-atthu: Vin IV 204,12* (dhi-r-atthu ta111
dhanalabha111); D II 22,2o (dhi-r-atthu kira bho jati nama
yatra hi nama jatassa jara paññayissati ti); Sn 440
(dhi-r-atthu idha jivit~); Th 279 (dhi-r-atthu püre
duggandhe ... ; Th-a II 117 ,s: dhi ti jigucchanatthe
nipato); Thi 225 (dhi-r-atthu kama asuci); Ja I 155,11*
(dhi-r-atthu ta111 janapada111 yatth' itthi parinayika;
155,13·: dhi-r-atthü ti garahanatthe nipato); V 160,3*
(dhi-r-atthu jivitena me; 160,11': dhi-r-atthu garahit~
mama jivit~, jivitena me ko attho); Ap 548,2o
(dhi-r-atthu rupa111 asuci111 ramante yattha balisa);
Vism 49,19* (dhi-r-atthu 'ma111 atura111 pütikaya111, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee dhi-r-atthu); Sp 170,s (dhi-r-atthu vata re
añña1.1an ti); Sadd 898,27 (dhi-r-atthu iti garahatthe); -
dhi dhi para111 in Ee, Se at Th 1134 is wr for dhitippara111
(Be, Ce so); - 0
-kkara, 0 -kara, dhikara, m. [dhi +
kara 1], (an expression of) reproach; disgust; Spk I 218,17
(arakkhakadevata -~ ak~su); III 245,5 (dhi ta111
tuyha111 hotu -o ta111 phusatu); Ud-a 262,8 (mahajano ...
titthiyan~ -~ akasi); Th-a 11 117,9 (dhi-r-atthu ta111
jigucchami tava -o hotü ti); III 167,18 (dhi-r-atthu tava
dhikaro hotu, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhi-r-atthu tava garaha
hotu); Thi-a 97,16 (tuyha111 dhi atthu dhikaro hotu).
dhi 2 , see sv dhi 2.
dh¡3, m. [ts], a receptacle; - ifc see ambu-, ambho-, uda-
(sv uda\ jala-, nira-.
dhikkata, dhikkita, mfn. [pp of dhi 1 + karoti; S. dhiklqta],
reproached, reprimanded; Ja I 155,12* (te capi dhikkita
satta ye itthina111 vasa111 gata; 155,21·: dhikkita ti
garahita); II 140,23' ( -papa ti dhira, Be so; Ce, Ee
0
dhikkita-; Se vigata-) f- III 38,14' (Be, Ce so; Ee
dhikkita-; Se vi gata-) f- Nidd I 44,23 (Ee, Se so; Be
dhikata-; Ce dhikkita- ); Sv 456,1 (sa jati dhi-r-atthu -a
atthu jiguccham' eta111 jatin ti);- se e also dhikkatabba.
dhikkatabba, mfn. lfpp of dhi 1 + karoti], deserving
reproach; Th-a II 117,w (tassa 0 -bhavadipanani
amantanavacanani);- see also dhikkata.
dhikkita, mfn., see sv dhikkata.
dhikkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhik~ate, Wg § 16:2],
kindles; is ajjlicted; lives; Sadd 330,24 (dhikkha
sandipanakilesanajivane su: . . . -ati, saddasatthavidü
pana ... -ate ti attanobhas~ vadanti).
dhitava(n), mfn. lfor dhitiva(t) ? or cf S. dhithan ?],
steadfast; ? liberal; ? Sadd 145,5* (-a thamava tatha).
dhiti, dhiti, f [S. dhp:i], holding; firmness; constant,
steadfast energy; resolution; Abh 1059 (dhiratte dhara1.1e
-i); M I 82,33 (paramaya satiya ca gatiya ca -iya ca
samannagata); SI 215,4* (sacca111 dhammo -i cago, Ce,
Se so; Ei -i; Be dammo -i; Ee 1 damo -i) = Sn 188 (Be,
dhimhati
Ee, Se -i; Ce -1) = Ja I 280,4• (Be, Se -i; Ce, Ee -I;
280,9-: -I ti abbocchinnaviriyaJ!l vuccati); Ja I 470,19'
(-iya dajhaya); V 113,8• (sa ka1yal_le -i~ katva); VI 38,13
(atthi nu khvassa chattasiri~ dharetu~ -I ti); Nidd I
378,9 e.. ussaho ussojhi thamo -1 asithi1a-
parakkamata ... viriyaJ!l ... ) t Dhs 13 t Vibh 123,39;
Bv 11:14 (akasim ugga~ dajha~ -i~ dasaparamipiiriya;
Bv-a 194,27: viriya~ akasin ti attho); Mi123,31 (bhito
ubbiggo . . . ma ma~ aya~ jan o paribhavi ti -i~
upatrhapetva); - 0 -ma(t), 0 -manta, mfn. (sg./pl. nom.
0
-ma, 0 -manto), steadfast, finn, resolute; Abh 1072;
D III 107,4 (gatima 0 -ma mutima; Sv 893,22:
dhara1_1asamatthaya paññaya samannagato ); S I 168,11'
(nicakulino pi muni 0 -ma, Be, Ee 1, Se so; Ce, Ee 2 muni
dhit!ma; Spk I 234,29 foil.: so hi dhitiya gu1_1e dhareti ...
0
-ma ti viriyava) = Sn 462 (eds muni dhit!ma); A I 25,2
(etadaggaJ!l bhikkhave mama savakana~
bhikkhiinaJ!l ... 0 -mantana~ yadida~ Ánando); 236,9*
(thamava 0 -ma jhayi); Sn 542 CO-ma saccanikkamo);
Th 6 (rakkhaJ!l kayagatasati~ dhit!ma; Th-a I 49,7: 0 -ma
ti dhiro); 1049 (gatimanto satimanto 0 -manto ca yo isi ...
thero Ánando); Ja II 140,23' (dhira ti 0 -ma, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be 0 -manta); III 19,25* (0 -ma saccanikkamo; 20,8-:
s!larakkhanadhitiya samannagato); V 28,7* CO-ma
rajaputto); Nidd I 44,22 (0 -ma ti dhira); Ap 263,13
([Ánando] gatima 0 -ma e' eva satima ca bahussuto);
Mi1352,15 (saddho hoti hirima 0 -ma akuho); Pj I 230,12
(dhira ti -manto).
0
dhimhati, pr. 3 sg. [?], spits out; Sadd 460,7 (dhimha
nitrhubhane: -ati); Ja VI 78,15* (-ami 1ohita~, Be so; Ce,
Ee vihami; Se thimhami; 78,23': nighubhami) quoted
Sadd 460,8.
dhiyati in Ee at It-a I 90,13 is wr for dhiyati (Be, Ce, Se
so).
dhisati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup ;idhi~, didhe~ti,
Wg § 25:22], sounds; Sadd 453,1 (dhisa sadde: -ati);
dhi1 , see sv dhi 1.
dhi2 , dhi 2,f [S. dhi], understanding, intelligence, wisdom;
Abh 152 (dhi tu pañña); Ja II 140,23' (dhi vuccati
pañña ... taya paññaya samannagata ti dhira) t Nidd I
44,24 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhi); Ja V 80,8* (saccena
dhammena dhiya damena, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dhitiya;
80,29': paññasaiJ.khataya dhiya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
dhitiya); Sadd 240,19joll.; - 0 -ma(t), mfn., intelligent,
wise; Abh 228 (kovida 0 -ma sudhi kavi); Ap 102,20
(VaiJ.gantassa suto 0 -ma); 460,25 (aca1o 0 -ma amoho
asamo muni, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhiro); Pañca-g 76;
Sadd 240,18 ( 0 -ma -mati~); 793,16; Mhv 37:248.
0
dhita(r), dhitii, f [BHS dhita-, dhitara-, dhita, dhitra-],
(sg. nom. -a; acc. -a~, -araJ!l; instr. -ara, -aya, -uya;
gen./dat. -u, -aya, -uya; loe. -ari; voc. -e, -a; pl.
nom. -aro, -ii -ara (ifc -a, -ayo); acc. -aro; instr. -ahi,
-iihi; gen./dat. -anaJ!l, -iinaJ!l; loe -asu; iic dhitu-; see
also Sadd 199,14/oll.), a daughter; Abh 44 (ta1_1ha rati
raga -ii); 241 (duhita -a); Vin III 26,8 (-a me atthi sa
maya posetabba ti); 126,12 (aññataro bhikkhu -uya
dhitupemena amasi); DI 96,7 (rajanaJ!l OkkakaJ!l
upasaiJ.kamitva Khuddariipi~ -ara~ yaci); II 268,3
(Bhadda nama . . . gandhabbarañño -a taJ!1
abhikaiJ.khami); S I 86,8 (Mallika deva devi -ara~ vijata
485 dhitalika
ti, eva~ vutte raja Pasenadikosalo anattamano ahosi);
Pv 31:7 (-a ca te maya ditrha duggata yamalokika); 4 7:3
(-aya dinnadanena); Thi 46 (orasa -a buddhassa
nibbanabhirata sada); 52 (yaJ!l me sokaparetaya -u
soka~ vyapanudi); 224 (ubho mata ca -a ca mayaJ!l
asu~ sapattiyo); Ja I 207,3 (suva1_11_1arajaha~sassa -a
haJ!lsapotika abhiriipa ah os! ti); 207 ,23* (naccena te
-araJ!l no dadami); II 63,13 (sa -ara saddhi~
bhuttabhojana); 237,18 (Mahakosalo Bimbisararañño
-ara~ dadamano -u nahanamiila~ KasigamakaJ!l nama
adasi); III 21,28 (pa1_11_1ikagahapatikassa -e attano
kulasantakani badarani pi na janasi ti); 259,4* (ka va
tva~ kassa va -a); V 111,11 (passatha rañño kiriyaJ!l
tiracchanagate putto -a me ti vadanto vicarati ti); 285,28
(rajano ... Kusarañño -aro pahi1_1i~su); 291,13 (mama
-ana~ bhajanani karotu); VI 164,17* (ahi mahanubhavo
pi na me -aram araho); 366,10 (-u me atthaya agatena
bhavitabban ti); Nidd I 134,1 ( ... bhata va bhagini va
putto va -a va ... , Ce, Ee, Se so; Be putta va -ara va);
Ap 512,22 (tassasu~ satta -aro rajakañña); 587,2
(khettaJ!l putta ca -a ca pariccatta mahamuni, Be so; Ce
khetta; Se paricatta~; Ee puttaJ!l ca -araJ!l ca) = 594,12
(Be so; Ce khetta; Ee -a~ ca putta~ ca pariccatta~; Se
puttaJ!l ca -aJ!l ca paricatta~); Cp 1:9:52 (Ja1i~
Ka1_1hajinaJ!1 -aJ!l Maddidevi~ patibbata~ cajamano);
Vism 381,19 (Maga1_1qiyabrahma1_1o attano -aya
aggamahesighana~ patthayamano ); Sp 541 ,27 (mata va
hotu -a va itthi nama sabba pi brahmacariyassa
paripanthika va); Sv 260,22 (tesa~ puttehi ca -ahi ca);
615,10 (yo pana attano putta~ ca -araJ!l ca pabbajeti
aya~ sasane dayado nama ti); 633,9 (raja .. , orodhehi
bahiihi -iihi puttehi parivarito va ka1aJ!1 karotii ti, Be, Ee
so; Ce -ahi; Se -arahi); 705,11 (devana~ -a ca putta ca
aiJ.ke nibbattanti); Spk I 140,25 (maya imissa
duggataku1assa -uya mahanta~ issariyaq¡ dinnaJ!l);
Dhp-a I 152,8foll. (setthi -ari uppannasokaq¡
adhivasetu~ asakkonto -u sañrakiccaJ!l karetva); 174,8
(nagarasobhiniyo hi -a~ patijagganti na puttam, -ara hi
tasaJ!l pave1_1i ghatiyati); Ud-a 326,1 (attano -asu ...
gatasu); Pv-a 109,6 (tava -u ya upakkhataJ!l danaq¡);
Thi-a 208,3o (-uya santike); Nidd-a I 258,3 (ku1avaq¡saJ!1
dhareti ti -a); Mhv 5:169 (ahosi ranno -aya
Sanghamittaya samiko); 8:7 (tassa putta tayo asuq¡
Maddarajassa -uya); Sadd 652,23 (samasavisaye matu-
adito gassa ekaro hoti va . . . bhoti rajadhite, samase ti
kiq¡ ... bhoti -a); 670,7 (dhitito duhitito); 852,13
(matapitiihi dhariyate ti -a); - ifc see ku1a-, deva-,
nattu- (sv natta[r]), sakya-; - (dhitu)-kkamo in Ee at
Ja VI 307,25* is wr for dhitukamo (Be, Ce, Se so); -
(dh!tu)-dhitii,f, a granddaughter; Pv-a 16,22 (gaha-
patino dh!tudhitaya darikaya; or dh!tu dh!taya); -
(dhitu)-maraJ].a, n., the death of a daughter or of
daughters; S II 180,15 (-aJ!l paccanubhiitaJ!1); Nidd-a I
78,4 (dh!tumara1_1an ti -iinaJ!l maral_laJ!l);
(dhitu)-maraka, m., a killer of a daughter or daughters;
Pj II 269,21; - see also ekadh!tara, ekadhitika (sv eka),
duhita(r).
dhitalika, f [from dh!ta[r]), a doll; Thi-a 235,29
(rattasuva1_11_1ena vi carita -a viya); As 321,12 (itthiyo hi
daharaka1e ... -aya kijanti); Sadd 867,17 (parikappita-
dhita
kl!abhaJ;~<;ie puttadito liko: ... puttalika -a); - ifc see
daru-, pinha- (sv pi111sati 2).
dhitii,f, see sv dhita(r).
dhiti, f [ts], thought; intention; Ap 319,29 (yassa -i
asadisa thamo yassa acintiyo, Be, Se so, perhaps for
dhiti; Ce dhiti; Ee pHi); - dhltima in Ee, Se at Dhp-a I
237,22 is prob. wr fordhitima (Be, Ce so).
dhitikii, f [dimin. of dhita], l. a doll; Thi 374
(tapanlyakata va -a vicarasi; Thi-a 235,29: ratta-
suvaJ;~J;~ena vicarita dhitalika viya); - 2. a daughter; -
ifc see lekhaka-.
dhitiyii,f [= dh!tika ?], a daughter;- ifc see kula-.
dhina, see sv dhlyate.
dhiyati\ pass. pr. 3 sg. of dahati 3 qv.
dhiyate, pass. pr. 3 sg. of dhayati qv.
dhiyate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhiyate, Wg § 26:27], slights,
disregards; Sadd 484,5 (dhi anadare: -ate);
pp dhina, mfn., Sadd 484,5.
dhira, mfn. and n. l. (mfn.) [cf S. dhlra 1, dhira2],
intelligent, wise; steadfast, firm, resolute; Abh 229
(medhavl ... -a vipassl); 1059 (0 -tte ... dhiti); 1072 (-o
budhe dhitimante); Vin I 38,29* (yo -o sabbadh! danta
buddho appatipuggalo); D II 128,8* (Cundassa bhatta111
bhuñjitva ... abadha111 samphusl -o); M II 73,23* (balo hi
balya vadhito va seti -o ca na vedhati phassaphuttho);
S I 91, 18* (-o ca viññü adhigamma bhoge ); A 11 26,27*
(nikkuha nillapa -a atthaddha susamahita); 28,32* (narati
sahati -a111; Mp IIl 60,11: -an ti viriyavantaJ1l); Dhp 28
(pabbagho va bhummaghe -o bale avekkhati); It 68,7*
(upalepabhaya -o n' eva papasakha siya; It-a ll 62,32:
dhitisampannatta -o paJ;~<;iitapuriso); Sn 235 (nibbanti -a
yathaya111 padlpo ); 531 (so viriyava padhanava -o tadi
pavuccate tathatta, eds so, but prob. read viro with
K.R. Norman, 2001, p. 274); 1052 (kathaJ1l nu -a
vitaranti oghaJ1l); Th 500 (na ca dinha111 suta111 -o
sabbam ujjhitum arahati; Th-all 210,19: -o sapañño);
Thl 7 (-a -ehi dhammehi bhikkhunl, Ee, Se so, prob. wr;
Be, Ce vira v!rehi); Ja II 140,15* (na ta111 da!haJ1l
bandhanaJ1l ahu -a yad ayasaJ1l; 140,23'foll.: -a ti
dhitima ti -a dhikkatapapa ti -a atha va dhi vuccati
pañña taya paññaya samannagata ti -a); III 35,15*
(anagatabhaya -o ubho loke avekkhati; 35,19·: -o
paJ;~<;iito puriso ); 357 ,14* (-o ca balava sadhu yuthassa
pariharako); IV 226,9* (akkheyya tippani parassa -o);
241,8* (-a111 passe SUJ;~e -a111-ena saha sa111vase); 494,20*
(issasino katahattha pi -a); V 116,21* (amacce tatajanahi
-e atthassa kovide); 369,6· (ma bhayi -o hohl ti);
VI 234,10· (0 -taya); 356,16* (-a ca bala ca have janinda
sippupapanna ca asippino ca); Ap 35,15 (adhivasesi so -o
sayambhu vadata111 varo); 311,21 (ayuva balava -o
vaggava y asava sukhl, Be, Se so; Ce, E e viro); 324,1 (-o
vigatasammoho); Nidd I 44,23 (dhitima ti -a
dhitisampanna ti -a dhikkatapapa ti -a; Nidd-a I 156,3:
-a ti -a iti, puna -a ti paJ;~<;iita); 55,2o (-o paJ;~<;iito
paññava buddhima ñaJ?I vibhavl medhavj); Vibh426,11*
(tasma hi -a nipaka nipuJ?a atthacintaka); Mil342,23*
(jhayl jhanarata -a santacitta samahita); Vism 286,15*
(-o assasapassase saka111 citta111 nibandhati); - 2. (n.)
[c:f S. dh!rya], intelligence, wisdom; Ps III 96,3 (dh!rassa
ti -a111 vuccati pa!)<;iicca111 ... tena samannagatassa); -
486 dhuna
0
fipasevanii,f, association with the wise; It 68,16* =
Ja IV 436,2*.
dhivara, m. [ts], a fisherman; Abh 670 (-o macchiko);
Sadd 872,25 (ci-adito !varo clvara111 plvaro -o, Ce so; Ee
-aJ1l).
dhukkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhuk~ate, Wg § 16:1],
kindles; is a.fflicted; lives; Sadd 330,23 (dhukkha dhikkha
sand!panakilesanajlvanesu: -ati ... saddasatthavidü pana
-ate ... ti attanobhasa111 vadanti).
dhuta, mfn., pp of dhunati qv.
dhutta, m., dhutti,.f, and mf(-a, -I)n. [S. dhurta], (m.) a
gambler; a bad character; a cheat, a scoundrel, a rake;
(f.) a deceitful or wanton woman; (mfn.) cheating;
dissolute; immoral; Abh 531 (-o 'kkhadhutto kitavo );
737 (-o tu vañcako); Vin 11 277,s (assosu111 kho -a
A<;l<;lhakasl kira ga!)ika SavatthiJ1l gantukama ti te magge
pariyut(hiJ1lsu); III 213,5 (civaraJ1l acchinna111 hoti rajuhi
va corehi va -ehi va); IV 295,15 (bhikkhuniyo ...
asatthika carikaJ1l caranti, -a dusenti); D II 172,4 (-a
ahesu111 soJ?<;ia pipasa; Sv 617,10: -a ti akkhadhutta
suradhutta); Ja I 290,22 (eka111 -aJ1l pakkosapetva
sakkhissasi purohitassa itthiya snal11 bhinditun ti aha);
III 198,22* (-o 'mhi samma sumukha jute akkhaparajito,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr vutto); 287,8 (-a sura111 pivanta);
V 418,2 (vinassatha tumhe vasaliyo coriyo -iyo
asatiyo ... ; 419,7·: bahumayataya -iyo); 423,28 (na me
etahi -lhi attho ti); VI 336,17* (alika111 bhasati 'ya111 -!);
Ap 610,24 (magge -e thite disva); Mil122,19 (kiJ1l te
saccabala111 atthi coriya -iya asatiya ... ); Sp 268,6 (-a ti
methunupasaJ1lhitakhi<;l<;lapasuta nagariyakeratiyapurisa
itthidhuttasuradhuttadayo va); Sv 546,9 (sa hi -a itthi);
Pj II 181 ,2 (parabhariya111 va paradasi111 va vañcento -o
viya); - ifc see akkha- (sv akkha\ itthi-, purisa-, sura-;
-
0
-rüpa, mfn., absolutely immoral, wanton; Ja VI
114,10* (ta -a pati vippahaya, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee dittarupa;
114,27·: satharüpa 0 -jatika hutva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
asadhurupa dugharupa 0 -jatika); - adhutti,f, not
immoral; not a cheat; an honest woman; A III 38,7
(tattha ca bhavissama -1 athenl aso!)<;!! avinasikayo ti;
Mp III 248,16: purisadhuttasuradhuttatavasena -iyo) f.
IV 266,6 (tattha ca hoti adhuttl athenl ... ).
dhuttaka, m., dhuttika, f, and mfn. [S. dhürtaka], (m.) a
gambler; a bad character; a cheat, a scoundrel, a rake;
(f.) a decei(ful or wanton woman; (mfn.) cheating;
dissolute; immoral; Vin III 128,1 (itthiyo chinnika
dhuttika ahirikayo; Sp 546,24: satha); IV 61,19 (ye pi te
chinnaka -a ahirika); SI 131,31* (bale na tva111 bhayasi
-iinaJ1l) f. Thi 230; Th! 366 (bhikkhuni111 SubhaJ1l -o
saJ1lnivaresi; Th!-a 234,1o: itthidhutto); Ja III 480,9 (aya111
dhuttika ma111 matu1avadena vañcetukama); VI 228,18*
(kalim eva nuna gaJ;~hami asippo -o yatha); Dlp 9:19
(khippaJ1l ghatema -e); - ifc see sura-; - dhuttika-
dhiitukii, (m)f(n)., constitutionally deceit.ful or immoral;
Ja II 114,3 (sa pana brahmaJ?I thokaJ1l chinnika -a, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se dhuttikajatika).
dhuttika,f, see sv dhuttaka.
dhutti,f, se e sv dhutta.
dhuna, (?), part of the cutting instrument; ? part of the
nose; ? Spk III 5,1o (nikhadana111 pavesetva ukkhipitva
saha dhunantena chinditva patanavasena
dhunana
sampalimagharp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nakhacchedanarp
pavesetva ... dhunaghena ... ; ad S IV 169,1 foll.: vararp
bhikkhave tii¡.hena nakhacchedanena adittena ...
ghanindriyarp sampalimagharp; cfSpk-t [Be] 11 323,2o:
subhinnarp nasacchiddanarp majjhe tbita-aghitudanarp
saha khuraghena chindanarp).
dhunana (and dhonana), n. and mfn. [BHS, S. dhunana,
S. dhilnana, n.], shaking; shaking off, removing;
Vism 61,22 (kilese -ato, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se kilesa-
dhunanato); 61,24 (dhutani ca tani pa¡ipakkhanarp -ato,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee pa¡ipakkhaniddhunanato) = Nidd-a I
196,14 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce pa¡ipakkhaniddhunanato); Pj 11
522,22 (yo panayarp sabbadighigatadidosadhunanaya
paññaya samannagatatta dhono) = Nidd-a I 205,26 (Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee -dhonanaya); Bv-a 49,35 (kilese -ato
ñiil).arp dhutarp nama); - ifc see kilesa-.
dhunanaka, mfn. [dhunana + ka2], shaking ofj; doing
away with;- ifc see kilesa-.
dhuniiti, dhuvati 2, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhunoti, dhuvati], shakes,
tosses; shakes off removes, liberates oneself from;
destroys; Dhatup 499 (dhu kampane); Dhatum 720; SI
156,35* (-atha maccuno senarp najagararp va kuñjaro) t
Th 1147 (-ama, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -amu; Th-a Ill 167,8:
-ama ti niddhunama viddharpsema); Sn 682 (-atha me
sarpsayarp); Vv 64:9 ( -anti vagganti patanti e' ambare;
V v-a 278,23: -anU ti camarabhararp kesarabhararp
valadhirp ca vidhunanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr dhumantl
ti); Th 2 (-ati papake dhamme dumapattarp va maluto);
Thi 276 (HI).i papassa mülani -anti sucikarino);
Vism 81,17 (moharp -ati); Ps TI 272,2 (-eyya);
Ap-a 395,9 (-ati kampatl ti dumo ); Sadd 393,2o (dhil
vidhilnane: ... dhuvati dhuvita dhuvitabbarp); 497,7 (dhil
kampane: -ati dhilmo dhona dhono dhuto); - part.pr.
(a) dhuna(t), mfn., JaiV 371,24* (-arp samakanlvararp
sm:ighariyarp pasariyarp); (b) dhunanta, mfn., Ap 273,zo
( -anto vakaclrani gacchami ambare tada); Sv 268,14
(mahavate thusarp -anto viya, Be, Se so; Ce bhusarp
opul).anto; Ee bhusarp punanto); Ud-a 167,1; Nidd-a I
258,22 (vipannadhammarp desanadhammesu -antesu, Be
so; Ce, Ee avipannadhammadesano dhammesu -antesu;
Se vipannadhamme desanadhammesu -anto );
(e) dhunamana, mfn., Ud 21,12* (sabbakammajahassa
bhikkhuno -amanassa purekatarp rajarp, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se bhilnamanassa); Bv 18:11 (puppharp ... paggayha
-aman o upagamirp; Bv-a 230,21: vakaclrani -amano va);
- aor. 3 sg. (a) adhosi, Sn 787 (adhosi so dighi-m-idh'
eva sabbarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sabba; Pj 11 523,13:
sabbarp diqhigatarp adhosi pajahi vinodesi); Spk 11
313,27 (samantato adhosi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee acopi);
(b) dhuni, Vism 80,2s (yo dhutm:igena attano ki1ese -i);
Nidd I 83,4 (adhosi -i niddhuni pajahi vinodesi ... );
3 pl. dhunirpsu, Ja III 44,1 (briihmal).a hatthe -irpsu, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se vidhunirpsu);- inf dhuniturp, Ud-a 204,6;
- absol. dhunitva, Ja IV 373,6; Pj 11 283,24 (samaka ti
-itva va slsani uccinitva va gayhilpaga tü¡.adhaññajati);
- pass. part.pr. dhilyamana, mfn., Vv-a 174,29 (vata-
dhuta ti mandena marutena dhilyamana, Ce so; Be, Ee,
Se dhilpayamana); - pp dhuta, dhilta, mfn. and n. [ts;
cf AMg dhua, dhuta], l. (mfn.) shaken, agitated;
Abh 744 (dhilto adhiltacalita, Be so; Ce -o); Sadd 497,7
487 dhunati
(dhil kampane ... -o); - (fe see vata-; - 2. (mfn.)
shaken off, removed; abandoned; Nidd I 78,1 (taya
paññaya kayaduccaritarp -arp ca dhotarp ca ... ; Nidd-a I
206,12: kampitarp ca dhovitarp ca) = 136,26 (Nidd-a I
258,27: -an ti kattusadhanarp -arp pa¡hamamaggena
dhotarp dutiyamaggena); 3. (mfn.) [cf dhota?
Sadd 498,2foll.: dhatilnarp anekatthataya dhudhatu
kampanatthe pi dhovanatthe pi vattati], (i) who has
shaken off or abandoned (defilements); pure, purified;
V in I 305,2o (idarp bhante naggiyarp . . . --taya
pasadikataya ... sarpvattati, Be so; Ce, Ee --ttaya; Se
dhiltattaya) t IV 113,29 (Be --ttaya; Ee, Se dhiltattaya;
Ce dhutaya); III 21,13 (appicchassa santughassa
sallekhassa -assa pasadikassa ... Val).l).arp bhasitva, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se dhiitassa; cfSp 222,17: sarpvaro sallekho ca
-o ca ti vuccati) =IV 213,23 (Be, Ce so; Se dhiltassa; Ee
appicchataya santu¡¡hiya sallekhassa dhiltassa
pasadikassa ... ) t III 171,14 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhiltassa);
III 171,17 (imani bhante pañca vatthilni . . . santutthiya
sallekhaya --taya pasadikataya . . . sarpvattanti, Be, Ee
so; Ce -aya pasadikaya; Se dhutaya pasadikaya ... );
172,16 (ime kho samaJ).a sakyaputtiya -a sallekhavuttino,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhilta; Sp 607,s: ya pa¡ipada kilese
dhunati taya samannagatatta -a); Vism 61,22
(dhutakilesatta -assa bhikkhuno);- see a/so dhona;-
(ii) which shakes off or removes (defilements); which
purifies; Sn 385 (savayami vo dhammarp -arp; Pj 11
373,19: kilese dhunatl ti -o, evarilparp kilesadhunanakarp
pa¡ipadadhammarp); Bv 16:8 (buddho pakasesi -e
gul).e); Mil348,1* (ajjhogajhe -e gul).e); Vism 80,23 (-o ti
--kileso va puggalo kilesadhunano va dhammo);
Bv-a 49.35 (ki1ese dhunanato ñiil).arp -arp nama); -
4. (n.) [or = dhutailga?] shaking off (defilements); an
ascetic practice; Th 1120 (nesajjiko hoti sada -e rato;
Th-a III 156,12: sabbakalarp ca dhutagul).e abhirato); -
se e al so avasesadhutayudha (sv avasesa); - -' -m:iga, n.
(and m.) [dhuta + ailga2], one of 13 special ascetic
practices (undertaken voluntarily, not enjoined upon the
sailgha); Vin V 193,16 (-'-ailgavaggo, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
dhiltm:iga-); Ja I 156,16 (terasa --ailgani samadaya);
Nidd I 66,21 (katamarp vattarp na sllarp, agha -'-m:igani);
Mil 20,12 (samaJ).a sakyaputtiya pabbajanti -' -ailgani ca
pariharanti); 348,4* (bujjheyya ce gihi dhamme
-' -ailgarp nipphalarp si ya); Vism 59,16 (bhagavata ...
terasa --angan1 anuññatani seyyath!darp parpsu-
külikm:igarp teclvarikailgarp pil).<;lapatikailgarp sapadana-
carikm:igarp ekasanikm:igarp pattapil).<;likailgarp khalu-
pacchabhattikm:igarp araññikm:igarp rukkhamülikailgarp
abbhokasikm:igarp sosanikm:igarp yathasanthatikailgarp
nesajjikm:igan ti); 61,21 foil. (sabban' eva pan' etani tena
tena samadanena --kilesatta -assa bhikkhuno m:igani
kilesadhunanato va -an ti laddhavohararp ñal).arp m:igarp
etesan ti --angan1, atha va -am ca tani
pa¡ipakkhaniddhunanato ailgani ca pa¡ipattiya ti pi
--m:igani); Ps l 117,6 (aharp pi -' -ailgarp samadiyitva
labharp uppademi ti); Dhp-a I 379,18 (napi 'ssa kiñci
-' -m:igarp atthi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dhiltailgarp);
Ud-a 201,24 (sabbe pi 'ssa - '-m:iga vutta ti); Pj 11 496,29
(-'-ailgarp na kuppati); - -'-m:igasuddhika, mfn.,
believing in or seeking purification, release, through the
 dhupetva
dhutañgas; valuing observance of a dhutañga above all
else; Vism 73,4 (na -'-añgasuddhikena bhavitabban ti);
Sv 836,36 (-' -añgasuddhiko hoti na kammanhana-
suddhiko, -' -añgam eva arahattrup vi ya sarato pacceti,
so read with Be, Ce, Se);- -'-añgika, m(jn)., one who
observes dhutañgas; Nidd-a I 199,s; - --ki1esa, mfn.,
who has shaken off, destroyed, defilements; Thi 401
(bhikkhuniyo ... --ki1esayo); Nidd I 78,n; Vism 61,21
(--kilesatta); Pj 11 542,23 (--ki1esena buddhena
saddhiq1); - --gul).a, m. [BHS id.], an ascetic practice;
Vin III 15,3 (ayasma Sudinno evarüpe --guQ.e samadaya
vattati, araññiko hoti piQ.c.Japatiko prupsukilliko
sapadanacariko, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dhüta-; Sp 206,28:
kilesaniddhunanake guQ.e); Th 1087 (-gul).e visittho
'hrup); Ja III 342,23 (appiccho dhütagul).ena na tappati,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -'-añgagul).ena); Bv 1:59
(Mahakassapo ... --gul).e agganikkhitto, Be, Ce, E e so;
Se dhüta-); Spk I 45,29; It-a I 7,22 (terasa --gul).a, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee -'-añgaguQ.a); - --dhamma,m. [cfBHS
dhutadharma], an ascetic practice; an ascetic quality;
Vism 81,9 (--dhamma veditabba ti ... ); Sv 1,25*;
Bv-a49,31 (--guQ.o nama --dhammo); Cp-a 315,2o
(terasahi --dhammehi); - --dhara, mfn. [BHS id.],
observing ascetic practices; Ap 375,13 (araññaka --dhara
jhayino lükhaclvara, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhütavada) =
Mil342,15*;- --rata, mfn., devoted to ascetic practices;
Ap 26,17 (araññaka --rata jhayino lükhaclvara, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce --dhara); - --va(t), mfn., observing
dhutañgas; Pj 11 494,24 (--va ti mrup pare janantü ti);
Sadd 393,21; - --vada, mfn., speaking of, preaching
dhutañgas; instructing in ascetic practices; S 11 156,2
(bhikkhu --vada); A I 23,2o (--vadana111 Be, Ce, E e so;
Se dhüta-); Ud 42,32 (araddhaviriyo --vado); Mi1380,2o;
Vism 80,29 (yo -' -añgena attano kilese dhuni parrup
pana -' -añgena na ovadati nanusasati ... ayrup -o na
--vado); Nidd-a I 335,22 (--vado ti --guQ.avadi); -
--vadaka, mfn., id.; Ap 507,19 (Kassapaq1 --vadakaq1);
- --vadi(n), mfn., id.; Ja I 130,22 (tadisassa .. .
--vadissa, Ce, Ee so; Se --vadassa; Be madisassa .. .
-'-añgadharassa) =It-a I 158,6 (Ce so; Ee --vadassa; Be,
Se madisassa ... --vadissa); - caus. pr. 3 sg. dhaveti 2,
dhavayati, Sadd 547,24 (dhü kampane: dhaveti
dhavayati).
dhupetva in Ee at Sp 1264,11 is wr, prob. for dhüpetva
(Ce, Se so; Be dhümapetva).
dhubbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhürvati, Wg § 15:64],
injures; Sadd 406,4 (dubbi dubbhl hiq1sattha: ... -ati).
Vdhum, [?] Dhatum 328 (dhuma thima ca sañghate).
dhuma, m., see sv dhüma 1.
dhumata, mfn. [S. dhmata], inflated; swollen; As 197,w
(uddhaq1... 0 -tta uddhumataq1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
uddhumatatta; = Vism 178,9: eds uddhumatatta).
dhura (occasionally dhüra), m.n., -a,f, and mfn. [cfS.
dhur, dhura, dhura, dhurya, BHS dhura], l. (m.nj) the
pole, the shaft of a waggon or carriage; a yoke; Abh 375
(-o mukhe rathassa); 1004 (yuge ... -o); S V 6,9* (yassa
saddha ca pañña ca dhamma yutta sada -aq1); Th 659
(bhaddo ajañño -e yutto dhurassaho; Th-a 11 277,26:
sakatadhure yojito); Jai 192,5 (Nandivisa:Irup
purimasakatadhure ekekam eva yojetva sayrup -e
488 dhura
nislditva); 192,22 (yugrup -e niccalrup bandhitva);
Cp 2:8:4 (-e -aq1 ghattayanta; Cp-a 163,23: ekassa
rathlsaya itarassa rathisrup ghanayanta); Mil 396,29
(gorüpo adinnadhuro sukhadukkhena -aq1 vahati);
As 83,13 (cheko sarathi -e nislditva); 83,15 (-rup ca
sandharenti cakkani ca pavattenti); - 2. (m.nj) a
burden, a charge, a responsibility; a duty, obligation;
Abh 1004 (yuge 'dhikare viriye ... -o); Vin 111 50,7
(-aq1 nikkhipati); Sn 256 (vahanto porisaq1 -rup; Pj 11
299,4: purisanucchavikrup bharrup adaya); Ja 11 65,4*
(hiriya pi santo -am adiyanti; 65,13·: etaq1
pabbajjadhura111 gaQ.hanti); Sp 561,15 foll. (te kira sasane
vipassanadhurrup ca ganthadhuraq1 ca ti dve pi -ani
chac.Jc.Jetva navakammam eva -rup katva paggal).hiq1su);
Sv 896,23 (purisadhorayhena ti ya asamadhurehi
buddhehi vahitabba -a trup -aq1 vahanasamatthena
mahapurisena); Spk I 85,25 (so -asmiq1 yeva kalam
akasi); Dhp-a I 7,16 foll. (bhante imasmiq1 sasane kati
-ani ti ganthadhurrup vipassanadhuran ti dve yeva -ani
bhikkhü ti); Nidd-a I 409,14 (etaq1 vmyrup
kusalakammakaral).aghane chandrup na nikkhipati -rup
na nikkhipati); - 3. (m.) a beast of burden, a draught
animal; Pj 11 149,26/oll. (purimadhuraq1 vahanta -a
müladhuraq1 vahanta dhorayha -a ca dhorayha ca
0
-dhorayhaq1); - 4. (i) (m.n.) the forepart or front of
anything; the chief person, leader; the main subject or
reference; the main concem; Abh 1004 (padhane cantike
-o); Ja IV 142,11 (navaya -e thito); VI 20,3o· (sace tvan ti
rajanrup -aq1 katva ubho pi te evam aba); Sp 15,14 (krup
pugga1rup -aq1 katva dhammo sañgayitabbo ti); Ps III
54,8 (imasmiq1 sutte kammaq1 -aq1 anantarasutte cetana
ti); 147,11 (vipassanavasena gacchato pañña -aq1 hoti);
Spk I 255,12 (purimadhurrup vahanta -a müladhurrup
vahanta dhorayha) = Pj 11 149,26; Patis-a 674,37 (raja ...
Samavatiq1 -e katva sabba ta itthiyo patipatiya
thapapetva); As 68,9 (cittam eva -rup katva deseti);
Saddh 392 (viriyaq1 -aq1 katva); - (ii) (mfn.) foremost;
of chief concern; Vism 534,6 (yada hi chandaq1 -rup
chandrup jetthakrup katva cittrup pavattati tada chando
va adhipati); As 67,37 foll. (1okiyadhammrup hi patva
cittrup jetthakaq1 cittrup -rup cittrup pubbañgamaq1 hoti,
lokuttarrup dhammrup patva pañña jetthika pañña -a
pañña pubbañgama); - ifc see gantha-, pariyatti-,
magga-, vasa- (sv vasa3), vipassana-, saddha-, sama-
(sv sama3); - o• -asana, n. [dhura + asana2; cf S.
dhuryasana], the first or foremost seat; Spk I 280,25 (-e
nisidanta ottappanti); Mp I 144,4 (-e nisinnabrahmaQ.o);
Thl-a 183,11; - o -gata, mfn. [cf S. dhürgata], being at
the head; driving; Ja VI 145,12' (hatthivaradhuragate ti
hatthivaranrup -e, a1añkatahatthikkhandhavaragate ti
attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits);- 0 -gama, m. [dhura +
gami], the first, nearest, vi !lag e; Ja I 237 ,s (-e, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se dhüra- ); IV 243,12 (-aq1 piQ.c.Jaya cari);
Sp815,33; Dhp-aiii 412,s; Ud-a71,2s (-e piQ.c.Jaya
caritva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee düragame); - 0 -ggaha, mfn.
[dhura + gaha2], who holds as leader, as chief, ? Sp 32,24
(arahantasahassassa -o ahosi; Sp-t [Be] I 111,11:
padhanaggahi ahosi, sabbesrup pamokkho hutva gaQ.hl
ti); 103,6; 104,1* (mahathera -a);- 0 -geha, n. [dhura +
geha 1], the first, nearest, house; Sp 1271,1 (-ato
dhurati
paghaya, Be, Ce so; E e, Se dhüra-) f- Spk I 191,5 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se dhüra-); V v-a 44,s (gamarp pavisitva -ass'
eva dvare aghasi); Mp III 342,15;- 0 -goJ}a, m. [dhura +
go1_1a 1], a yoked ox or bullock; ? Ja 11 82,9; -
0
-Cchatta, n. [dhura + chatta 1], the top parasol (on a
thüpa); Mhv 34:41; 34:44 (sopanato yava -a); -
0
-n-dhara, mfn., bearing a burden; having
responsibility; helping; Ja III 38,10* (eso hi uttaritaro
bharavaho -o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be bharavaho dhuraddharo;
38,2s·: mittabharassa mittadhurassa ca vahanato; Be so;
Ce, Se mittadhuraya; Ee mettabharassa mittadhuraya ca
vahanato); Mhv 3:30 (Upa1itherarp vinaye sesa-
dhamme ... Anandatherarp akarurp sabbe thera -e); -
0
-dhorayha (and 0 -dhoreyya), m.n.(?), (one) who is to
be hamessed to the waggon-pole or yoke; a draught
animal; or (according to cts) the two pairs of draught
animals; S I 173,1 * (saccarp karomi niddanarp .. .
viriyarp me -arr) = Sn 79 (Pj 11 149,1sjoll.: -an ti .. .
dhurayarp dhorayharp, dhurarp vahat! ti attho, yatha hi
brahma1_1assa dhurayarp dhorayhaka¡;l¡;lhitarp naii.galarp
bhümighanarp bhindati . . . atha va purimadhurarp
vahanta dhura müladhurarp vahanta dhorayha dhura ca
dhorayha ca -arr . . . yatha brahma1_1assa ekekasmirp
naii.gale catubalivaddappabedharp -arr vahantarp ... , Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be dhura ca dhorayha ca -a) = Ap 64,1
(Ap-a 304,27: -arr dhuraviiharr dhuradhararp); Spk I
256,6 (tava -arr na tarp ~hanarp gacchati) = Pj 11 150,21
0
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -dhoreyyarr);
0
-patipadlivibhliga, m., division, distinction, of main
concems and paths; Th-a III 209,19 (yo hi dukkha-
patipadaya dandhabhiññaya niyyati so saddhadhura-
paññadhuravasena duvidho, tatha sesapatipadasu pi ti,
evarp -ena aghavidha) i- Th!-a 272,4; - 0 -patta, n.
[dhura + patta2], a main, outer petal or leaf; ? Sv 488,25
(-ani navutihatthani kesararr tirpsahattharr; Sv-pt 11
109,2: -anl ti bahirapattani, yani d!ghatamani) f- Mp I
136,8 (Mp-~ 11 164,11: -anl ti pattanarr pamukhabhütani
bahirapattani);- 0 -bhatta, n., regular food mainly for a
particular person; ? food presented in the foremost
house;? Vism 66,13 (cf Vism-mh~ [Be] I 93,28: 0 -gehe
eva thapetva databbabhattarp -arp); Sp 1270,12joll.
(-arr ku~ibhattarp varakabhattarp ... -an ti niccabhattarp
vuccati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se dhüra-); Sv 1014,23 ( ... -arr
ku~ibhattarr varabhattarp ... ); Spk I 262,32 (bho Gotama
mayharp puttehi cattari -ani dinnani, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhuva-; = Dhp-aiV 11,17: eds dhuva-); Mpll 30,22
(ekadivasen' eva saghi -ani thapesurp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhuva-); As 407,21 (-arr saii.ghabhattarr vassavasikarp
deti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhuva-);- see Sp-~ [Be]l 131,17
(dhuvabhattanl ti niccabhattani; Se pa1_1!tataya visiqhani
bhattanl ti -ani, tarr padhanarr katva databbabhattanl ti
va -ani, tumhe dhurarr katva agha bhattani damml ti
vuttarr hoti; ad Sp 47,24: agha te tata -anl damml ti, Ce
so; Be, E e, Se dhuva- ); - se e also dhuvabhatta
(sv dhuva); - 0 -yotta, n., the cord of the yoke (for
fastening the draught animal); Ja I 192,24; VI 253,36·;-
0
-Va(t), mfn., carrying one 's burden, undertaking
responsibility; SI 214,35* (pa~irüpakañ 0 -va ughata
vindate dhanarp; Spk I 332,2o: cetasikaviriyavasena
anikkhittadhuro) = Sn 187; - 0
-vaha, mfn., taking
489 dhuva
responsibility, concemed with; Ps III 174,21 (te pana
rajano sasane -a Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -vaha); -
0
-Vahanaka, mfn., who bears the pole or yoke; Ja 11
97,w (dhorayhas!lo --acarena sampanno jatisindhavo);
-
0
-Vlita, m., a head-wind; Ja I 100,9 (satthavaha ca
nama yada -o vayati ... purato gacchanti, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se purimavato);- 0 -Vliha, mfn., who bears the pole or
yoke; Jal 337,21 (-e... mahago1_1e); Ap-a 304,27
(
0
-dhorayharp -arp); - 0
-Vlihi(n), m(fn)., (one) who
bears the pole or yoke; a draught animal; Abh 496 (-1 tu
dhorayho); - 0
-vihlira, m., a near vihara, the
neighbouring vihara; Ja I 237,3 (amhakarp -am eva
gacchatha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhüra-); IV 243,15; Sv 517,6
(sattha ca avidüre -e vasati); Ps III 305,16; Spk I 167,18;
0
- -samlidhi, m., proper alignment, evenness, of the
yoke; S V 6,12' (ratho s!laparikkharo . . . upekkha -i;
Spk III 122,2joll.: unnatonatakarassa abhavena dvinnarp
pi yugappadesanarr samata ti attho); - 0 -ssaha, mfn.
[dhura + saha2], bearing the pole or yoke; Th 659
(ajañño dhure yutto -o; Th-a I1 277,27: 0 -vaho); -
0
-soplina, n., the [nearest] end of the steps or staircase;
Ja I 330,14 (sattha Jetavanapokkhara1_1iyarp nahayissaml
ti -e thito); 330,22 (-arp ahacca udakam aghasi);
III 216,19 (yava -a); IV 265,32 (Sinerumatthake sopana-
slsarp Saii.kassanagaradvare -arr katva); - adhurli,f,
not the duty or main concem; the wrong duty or
concem; Ja IV 241,3* (anayarp nayati dummedho -ayarp
niyuñjati; 242,6·: -ayan ti saddhadhuras!ladhura-
paññadhuresu ayojetva ayoge niyuñjati).
dhurati, pr. 3 sg. [S. dhvarati, Wg § 22:41], bends, is
crooked; Sadd 425,27 (dhura hucchane, hucchanarp
ko~illarp: -ati).
dhuva, mfn. and n. [S. dhruva], l. (mfn.) fixed, firm;
constant, lasting; permanent; certain, su re; Abh 709 (-o
ca sassato nicco); 893; DI 18,35 (yena mayarp bhota
brahmuna nimmita so nicco -o sassato aviparil_lama-
dhammo; Sv 112,32: mara1_1arp apassanto -o ti); It 37,2o*
(tassa nissara1_1arp santarp atakkavacararr -arp; It-a I
164,19: niccaghena -arp); Th 553 (anantararp hi jatassa
jlvita mara1_1arp -arp); Pa~is 11 239,28 (pañcakkhandhe
adhuvato passanto ... pañcannarp khandhanarp nirodho
-arr nibbanan ti passanto ); Ps l 71,10 (-o ti thiro
sarabhüto); Bv-a 102,22 (buddhanarr vacanarr nama -arp
amogharp); - acc. -arr. adv., firmly; constantly;
Abh 41; Pv 32:10 (-arr payutta sugatassa sasane); Ja III
24,3* (araddhaviriyo -am appamatto); 230,17 (-arp esa
mayharp kiñci dassatl ti); Ap 17,14 (-arr phalani
dharenti); Bv 2:81 (-arr buddho bhavissasi); Sadd 900,22
( -arr iti ... ekarpsatthe ); - dhuvan ti siddhirp in E e at
Ap 381,15 is wr; Be, Ce, Se dhuvatthasiddhirp;- 2. (n.)
what is firm or constant and lasting; firmness,
constancy, certainty; Abh 893 (-arp takke ca nicchite);
Dhp 147 (yassa n' atthi -arp ~hiti; Dhp-a III 109,14: yassa
0
-bhavo va ~hitibhavo va n' atthi; or split cpd, see
K.R. Norman, 1997, p. 98); Patis I 109,12 (cakkhurp
suññarp attena va attaniyena va niccena va -ena va
sassatena va ... ; Patis-a 339,3o: pavattikkha1_1e pi thirassa
kassaci abhavato -ena ca suññarp); - esp. for nibbana;
Abh 7; S IV 370,3 (-arr ca bhikkhave desissami
0
-gamirp ca maggarp); Sadd 393,9 (-an ti ... nibbanass'
*dhuvati
eva adhivacanaJ!l bhavituq¡ arahati); 0
-Cola,
0
-coJa, (m)f(n)., constantly wearing a menstruation
cloth; Vin II 271,18 (upasampannayo ... alohita pi
0
-lohita pi -a pi) f. III 129,25 (-a si; Sp 548,18: -a ti
niccaq¡ pakkhittal).icola sada lll).icolakaq¡ sevasl ti); -
0
-fthaniya, mfn., belonging toa fixed place; V in I 190,31
(anujanami bhikkhave tisso padukayo -a
asailkamanlyayo vaccapadukaq¡ passavapadukaJ!l
acamanapadukan ti); V 124,6; - 0 -bhatta, n., regular
food; a guaranteed meal (for a particular person ?);
Vin I 25,37 (idh' eva mahasamal).a vihara, ahaq¡ te -ena
ti, eds so); 243,25 (yava bhante bhagava Bhaddiye
viharati tava ahaq¡ buddhapamukhassa bhikkhu-
sailghassa -ena ti, eds so); Ja I 449,26 (manussa ...
pañcasatamattani -ani adaJ!lsu, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
dhura-); Sp 47,24 (aqha te tata -anl damml ti, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce dhura-; Sp-! [Be] I 131,17: -anl ti niccabhattani);
816,25 (niccabhattan ti -aq¡ vuccati); Spk I 262,32 (bho
Gotama mayhaJ!l puttehi cattari -ani dinnani, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee dhura-) = Dhp-aiV 11,17 (eds so); Spkiii 27,4
(a!!ha te -ani deml ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e dhura- ); - see
also dhurabhatta (sv dhura);- 0 -bhattika, mfn., having
a regular supply of meals; Vin II 15,31 (ayasma
Sudhammo . . . Cittassa gahapatino avasiko hoti
navakammiko -o);- 0 -yagu,f, a regular gift of gruel;
Vin I 292,12 (sailghassa ... -uq¡ datuq¡) = Ja IV 315,16;
Kv 69,13 (niccabhattaq¡ -ü ti; Kv-a 35,11: divase divase
dassama ti paññattavasena niccabhattaJ!l -ü ti vuccatl ti);
Dhp-a III 161,8 (Visakhaya ca gehe pañcasatanaq¡
bhikkhünaq¡ -u niccaq¡ paññatta hoti);- 0 -ssava, mfn.,
constantly dripping; Ja 1 6,1* (imaq¡ kayaq¡
navacchiddaq¡ -aJ!l) = Bv 2:24 (Bv-a 73,33: 0 -nissandaJ!l,
niccapaggharal).asucin ti attho ); addhuva,
adhuva, mfn., not lasting; not permanent; not certain;
DI 19,1 (te mayaq¡ anicca -a appayuka cavanadhamma);
S I 198,11 • (anicca -a kama); III 85,24 (-a va kira bho
mayaJ!l samana dhuv' amha ti amaññimha); V 410,17
(brahmaloko pi... anicco -o); It 37,14' GataJ!l ...
sailkhatam -aq¡); Th 1131 (lokam imaJ!l adhighahi
aniccato -ato asarato); Ja IV 111,24* (parijlyati -aq¡
sañraJ!l); Pa!is II 239,26 (pañcakkhandhe -ato passanto);
Vism 653,21 (sailkharanimittaq¡ -al!l tavakalikan ti
aniccalakkhal).avasena janitva); Dhp-a III 170,22 (-al!l
jlvÍtaJ!l dhuvaq¡ maral).aJ!l).
*dhuvati\ pr. 3 sg., see sv dhavati.
dhuvate, pr. 3 sg., se e sv dhunati.
dhuvarani in Ee, Se at Nidd II 61,31 is wr for nüpurani
(Be, Ce so).
dhuvita(r), m. ffrom dhuvati 2], one who shakes;
Sadd 393,2o (dhü vidhünane: ... dhuvati dhuvita).
dhusm}.ati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. dhf~l).Oti, Wg § 27:21], is bold;
Sadd 494,28 (dhusa pagabbhiye: ... -ati, so read? Be, Ee
vusa ... vusul).ati).
dhüta, mfn., pp of dhunati qv.
dhüpa, m.(sg. and pl.)n. [S. dhüpa, m.; AMg dhüva],
incense, perfume; aromatic smoke; Ja I 64,5 (dibbehi
gandhehi ma1ahi CUl).l).ehi -ehi püjayamana); 399,16
(manussa sakalanivesanaq¡ sodhetva . . . -al!l datva);
IV 378,1 (pupphani vikiritva -aq¡ datva, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee dhümaJ!l); Ap 78,22 (ku!idhüpaq¡ maya dinnaq¡ ...
490 dhüpita
-am adadiq¡ tada); 316,8 (-aq¡ datvana sugate, Be, Ce,
Se so; E e dhümaJ!l); 509,2s (-ani ca mahagghani
upavayiq¡su tavade); 600,2 (-aq¡ CUl).l).aq¡ ca malaq¡ ca
karaq¡ katvana satthuno, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhümacUl).l).aq¡ ca); Ap-a 259,17 (pupphani vikiritva -aq¡
vasetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhümaq¡); 347,17 (anekehi
-ehi 0 -püjam akasi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhümehi
dhümapüjam); 468,19 (dhüpesiq¡ -ena sugandhaq¡ akasin
ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhümena); Bv-a 84,29 (-ehi
duddinaq¡ katva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhüpaduddinaq¡); -
0
'-andhakara, mfn., darkened with incense, with
aromatic smoke; Bv-a 95,4 (-al!l ... RammanagaraJ!l).
dhüpati, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. Dhatup dhüpayati, Wg § 11:2],
becomes hot; suffers; Dhatup 183 (dhüpa santape);
Dhatum 277; Mhv 12:14 (sayaJ!l -ati ja1ati); Sadd 404,26
(tapa dhüpa santape: ... -ati sandhüpano); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. dhüplyati, Sadd 404,26; - pp (or of caus.)
dhüpita 1, mfn., heated; bumt; Abh 751 (santatto -o);
Pj II 21,7 (vidhüpita bhusaJ!l -a santapita da<;l<;lha ti
attho);- see also dhüpayati (sv dhümayati).
dhüpana 1, n. [Lf dhüpati], suffering; ? Sadd 404,27 (dhüpa
san tape: ... bhave ... -aq¡).
dhüpana2 , n. [ts; AMg dhüval).a], incensing, fumigation;
spicing, seasoning; Pv-a 198,19 (YaJ!l jatassa darakassa
rakkhanatthaya sasapena -al!l karonti);- ifc see ghara-,
lol).a-; - 0 -vasa, m. [dhüpana + vasa 1], the fragrance of
the seasoning; Ja I 242,12 ( -aq¡ ghayitva);
adhüpana, mfn., without seasoning; Ja III 144,1
(alol).ena -ena udakamattasittapal).l).ena, so read with Be,
Ce, Se); VI 24,28'; Sv 664,15 (a10l).aJ!l -aJ!l) f. Cp-a 49,s
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee adhupanaJ!l); - niddhüpana, mfn.,
id.; Ja VI 21,16 (a1ol).ake atakkake -e udake, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -ena Ul).hodakena); 24,28 (evarüpaq¡ alol).akaq¡
atakkaq¡ -aq¡ randhaq¡ pattaq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
alol).ambilaq¡ adhüpanaq¡).
dhüpayati 1, dhüpeti\ pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dhüpayati,
dhüpayati], fumigates; perfumes; flavours, seasons;
Mil 333,10 (lokaJ!l s!lagandhena -enti); - part.pr.
dhüpayamana, mftz., Vv-a 174,29 ([vataJ!lsaka] vatadhuta
ti mandena ma1utena [Ee adds vayuna] -ayamana, ? Be,
Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Ce dhüyamana); Dhp-a III 38,9
(bhattaJ!l pacitva süpavyañjanaJ!l -ayamanaya ekissa
itthiya): - aor. 1 sg. dhüpesiq¡, Ap 223,23 (ahosiq¡
ku!igopako kalena kalaq¡ -esiq¡; Ap-a 468,19: -esiq¡
dhüpena sugandhaJ!l akasin ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
dhümena); - absol. dhüpetva, Sp 1264,11 (-etva va
pacapetva va, Ce, Se so; Ee dhupetva; Be pacapetva va
dhümapetva va); - pp dhüpita 2 , mfn. [cfS. dhüpita,
AMg dhüviya] peifumed; spiced, flavoured; Bv 7:25
(pavanaJ!l nanagandhehi -aq¡; Bv-a 171,9: -an ti vasitaJ!l
gandhitaJ!1); Sp 478,24 (takkaJ!l ... -aq¡ adhüpitan ti);-
ifc see tela-; - --vasita, mfn., perfumed and scented;
Ja III 299,6; Spk III 120,3;- adhüpita, mfn., not spiced,
not seasoned; Sp 478,25; Ps 1 212,28 (alol).ataya
adhüpitataya ti); Spk 11 l06,10; - sudhüpita, mfn., well-
flavoured; Vv-a !86,25;
dhüpayati 2, dhüpayati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv dhümayati.
dhüpayati 3 , pr. 3 sg., see sv dhüpeti 3.
dhüpayana,f, see sv dhümayana.
dhüpita 1, mfn., pp ofdhüpati qv.
dhüpita
1
dhüpita 2 , mfn., pp ofdhüpayati qv.
1 parinibbanacitakadhümo paññayati tava kalo ti); -
dhüpeti\ pr. 3 sg., see sv dhüpayati .
2
dhüpeti , pr. 3 sg., see sv dhümayati.
dhüpet¡3, -ayate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhüpayati,
Wg § 33:99], speaks; shines; Sadd 553,18 (dhüpa
bhasayaJ!l: ... -eti -ayati).
dhüma\ dhuma, m. (and n. ?), l. [ts] smoke; Vin I 204,23
(anujanami bhikkhave -al!l patun ti, tarp yeva vagirp
alimpetva pivanti); 206,1 (val)O kilijjittha, anujanami
bhikkhave -al!l katun ti); MI 220,10 (gopalako ... na
-arp katta hoti); SI 42,1* (-o paññal)am aggino; Spk I
97,15: aggi pi dürato va -ena paññayati) = Ja VI 508,19*;
A IV 72,18 (aggirp pijaneyya -arp pi janeyya); Ja I 216,5
(siikhasu aññamaññarp gharpsantlsu . . . -o unhati);
216,27 (-e cajalasu ca ughitasu dhümandha sakul)a, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se -esu); III 163,2 (-o tassa akkhlni pahari);
241,6* (kama ... rajo ca -o ca maya pakasita); 401,15
(aggirp ca -al!l ca katva ajayütharp pa!ijagganto;
cf 402,w: makkhikaparipanthaharal)atthaya aggirp ca
-al!l ca akasi); IV 472,23' (-aJ!l disva imasmirp !hane
manussa vasanti maññe ti); Dhs 617 ( ... abbha mahika
-o rajo ... ); Vism 172,2 (charika va -o va upanhati);
Ps II 130,12foll. ( 0 -saddo kodhe tal)haya vitakke pañcasu
kamagul)esu dhammadesanaya pakatidhüme ti imesu
atthesu vattati) = Sadd 497,9foll.; Dhp-a II 265,15 (te
ekacitakaya jhayanti esa -o paññayati amma ti);
Nidd-a I 68,10 (amitta suriyassa -al!l viya); Sadd 497,9
(dhunati kampatl ti -o); - ifc se e go-; - 2. fragrant
smoke, incense (or wr for dhüpa qv); Ja IV 378,1
(pupphani vikiritva -al!l datva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
dhüpaJ!l) f. Mp I 174,1o f. Ap-a 259,17 (-arp vasetva, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se dhüpaJ!l); Ap-a 468,19 (dhüpesirp -ena
sugandhaJ!l akasin ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dhüpena);
- o• -aggi, m. [cf S. dhümra], a smoky Jire; ? flames
enveloped in smoke; ? A IV 97,3* (dummailkuyarp
padasseti -im iva pavako, Ee, Se so; Be dhümaJ!l dhüml
va pavako; Ce -! viya pavako); Pj II 29,13 (gomayadlhi
-irp sandhaya <:laJ!lsamakasadihi gunnarp anabadhaJ!1);
-
0
-katacchu, m.f, 0 -katacchuka, m. [cf S. dhüpa-
ka!acchuka, AMg dhüvaka!Ucchuya], a spoon or ladle
for (incense)-smoke; a censer(?); Sp 1240,18
0
( -ka!acchu-, in long cpd); Spk I 206,3 (bhüta-
balikammarp hoti . . . samantato sañchadiyamana
0
-ka!acchu ahosi, Be, Se so; Ce sañchadiyamana-
dhümaka!acchu; Ee wr sañchadiyamanadhümakapacchi;
Spk-! [Be] 1 240,17: 0 -ka!acchü ti 0 -panarp); Dhp-a II 59,5
(sace tvarp pabbajito kahaJ!l te labukarp kaharp
0
-ka!acchuko kahaJ!l yaññasuttakan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
1
dhuma-); - 0 -kala, m. [dhüma + kala ], the time of
(death and) cremation; Ja III 216,26 (mayhaJ!l pita tarul)O
aharp etassa -arp olokento mahallako bhavissami);
422,14 (tumhiikarp -e pabbajissaml ti); Sp 1245,27; -
0
-kalikmp, adv. [cf BHS dhümaka1ika], until death or
cremation; (or mfn., lasting until cremation; ?) Vin 11
172,15 (-al!l pi pariyositarp vihararp navakamrnaJ!l den ti;
Sp 1245,25: -an ti idaJ!l yav' assa citakadhümo na
paññayati tava ayarp viharo etass' eva ti evarp o -ka1e
apaloketva katapariyositaJ!l vihararp denti); 288,2o (-aJ!l
samal)ena Gotamena savakanaJ!l sikkhapadaJ!l
491 dhümayati
paññattaJ!l; Sp 1296,24: -an ti yava samal)assa
0
-ketu, m., 'whose sign or banner is smoke', fire; a
comet; Abh 34 (0 -ketv aggi); 987 (uppade siya -u
vessanare pi ca); Ja IV 26,22* (anedho -u va; 27,10':
anindhano aggi vi ya); V 63,19* (pavako ... ghatasano
-u); Ap 472,21 (ukka patirpsu nabhasa -u ca dissati;
Ap-a 506,26: 0 -rajisahito aggikkhandho); Bv 4:30 (jalitva
-u va nibbuto so mahayaso; Bv-a 152,28: -u ti aggi
vuccati, idha pana d!po danhabbo); Sadd 334,8* (aggi ...
-u); - 0
-danaka, 0 -dhanaka, n., a receptacle for
(making) smoke, a e enser; ? Sp 1245,16 ( ... ailgara-
ka!aharp -arp ... , Be so; Ee, Se 0 -dhanakarp; Ce
dhüpadanakarp) = Kkh 2 238,2; - 0 -netta, n. (and m.),
l. a pipe for (inhaling or ingesting) smoke; V in 1 204,25
(anujanami bhikkhave -an ti); 204,26 (uccavacani -ani
dharenti); Ja IV 363,9•; Ap 312,31 (-e jine datva); - 2. a
smoke-hole, a chimney; Vin II 120,21 (jantagharassa -al!l
na hoti; Sp 1207,26: -an ti dhümanikkhamanacchiddaJ!1);
Sp 572,1 (vatapane ca -ani ca karoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhuma-); - 0
-sikha, m(jn)., 'smoke-crested', Jire;
Abh 34 (tejo -o); Vv 35:2 (jalam iva -o; Vv-a 161,7:
aggi hi tassa aggato dhümo paññayati ti -o o -ketü ti ca
vuccati); Sadd 334,6* (aggi -o);- 0 -sikha,f, a crest of
smoke; a column, a trail, of smoke or vapour;
Vism 171,21; 285,13; 416,11 (iikase valahaka pi -a pi
caranti); - 0 -sikhi(n), m(jn)., with a crest of smoke,
fire; Ja VI 206,26* (bhojarp naro -irp patapavaJ!l;
209,24' foll.: o -sikhaya yuttaJ!l patapavantarp);
niddhüma, niddhuma, mfn., free from smoke; no longer
smoking; Ja V 32,14' (aggirp ja1etva -e ailgare kara) f.
Cp-a 172,21; Sp 980,1o (ekasmirp -e !hiine, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se niddhume); Spk 1 259,1 (-al!l araññam eva hoti,
bhikkhusailghassa udakatapanarp pi na bhagavata
anuññatarp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nibaddharp); -
sadhüma, mfn., with smoke; smoking; Ap 472,22 (-a
jalavana ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee sabbathalajasatta ca); Pj 11
492,2o; - see also niddhümaka, sadhümika.
dhüma 2 , mfn. [cfS. dhümra], dark-coloured, grey; -
0
-dhüma, m., dark smoke; Cp 3:9:4 ( -arp janitv' evarp
saddayanto mahasikhi, Ce, Ee so, but perhaps wr; Be
dhamadhama iti eval!l ... ; Se dhamadhamaJ!l iti
Cp-a 233,28: dhamadhama iti evarp saddaJ!l karonto).
dhümayati, pr. 3 sg ., see sv dhümayati.
dhümayati, dhümeti, dhüpayati, dhüpeti2 (and, in Ee,
dhümayati, dhüpayati2), pr. 3 sg. [cf S. dhümayati],
l. smoulders, smokes; emits smoke; V in 1 180,27 (-ati pi
pajjalati pi, Be so; Ce, Ee dhüpayati; Se padhüpayati) f.
IV 54,24 (eds so); M 1 142,21 (ayaJ!l vammiko rattirp -ati
diva pajjalati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dhupayati); A IV
102,15foll. (chanhassa ... suriyassa patubhava ayaJ!l ca
mahapa!havl Sineru ca pabbataraja -anti
sandhüpayanti . . . seyyatha pi . . . kumbhakarapiiko
alimpito pa!hamaJ!l -eti sandhüpeti ... , Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
dhüpayanti ... dhüpeti ... ); Pa!is 11 210,1 (so iddhima
-ati .. . so iddhima pajjalati ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhüpayati) quoted Vism 402,21 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhüpayati); Ap 179,16 (vehasamhi cailkamati dhüpayati
jalate tatha, Be so; Ce dhüpeti; Ee dhüpo 'tijalate; Se
dhümayana
dipo pajja1ite); Vism 400,7 (ayaf]l ... -ati e' eva pajja1ati
ca ti); Sp 65,1 (sayaf]l pi -ati p~jalati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhiimayati); - pc~rt.pr. dhiimayanta, mfn., Ja I 73,1o
(pabbatakurani -antani pajjalantani, Be, Se so; Ce
dhiipayantani; Ee dhiipayantani) = Spk I 323,14 (eds so);
Ja VI 112,4· (pakkuthitaf]l -antaf]l pajja1antaf]l, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee dhiimayantaf]l); Mhv 25:31 (si1esamhi -ante);
- 2. bums; ponders; is vexed; A II 214,33 (bhikkhu ...
na dhiipayati na pajja1ati na pajjhayati; Mp III 209,6:
ajjhattikassa upadaya ta1,1havicaritavasena na dhiipayati);
215,25 (kathaf]l ca bhikkhave bhikkhu na dhiipayati);
Pv 6:4 (pari<,layhati -ati khudaya hadayaf]l mama;
Pv-a 33,19: -ati santappati); part.pr.
dhiimayanta, mfn., Ps II 130,17 (dhiimasaddo ... bhikkhu
bhagavato avidiire -anto nisinno hoti ti ettha vitakke,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce dhiipayanto) = Sadd 497,14; - 3. is
obscured; is clouded; Dhp-a I 425,12 (akkhini me -anti
ti) =Ud-a 198,17 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhiimayantl ti);-
aor. 3 sg. dhiimayi, dhiipayi, Ja I 34 7 ,2o (-anto pi na
labhissasi yeva ti aha, thero -i sakalapasado ekadhiimo
ahosi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhiipayanto ... dhiipayi) =
Dhp-a I 370,17 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhiipayanto ...
dhiipayi); Ja I 360,15 (nago makkhaf11 asahamano -i
thero pi -i nago pajjali thero pi pajjali) f. Mp I 326,2 (Se
dhiimayati ... dhiimayi ... ; Be, Ce, Ee dhiipayi ...
dhiipayi ... ); PsI 160,Jo (sa devata -i pajjali n' eva
sakkhi theraf]l caletuf]1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee dhiipayi);
Dhp-a III 244,3foll. (nagaraja ... -itva naf]l maressami ti
-i, thero . . . sayaf]l pi -i, dvinnaf]l pi sañrato uggata
dhiima yava brahmaloka ughahiT]lsu, ubho pi dhiima
theraf]l abadhetva nagarajanam eva badhenti, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e dhiipayitva . . . vadhiipayi . . . dhiipayi ...
uggatadhiipa ... dhiima ... ); Ap-a 249,28foll. (nagaraja
-i, thero pi na tuyhaf]l yeva sarire dhiimo atthi mayhaf]l
pi atthi ti -i);- inf dhiimayituf]1, Dhp-a III 244,6 (aham
eva -ituf]l sakkomi aññe na sakkontl ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dhiipayituf]l); - absol. dhiimayitva, D III 27,14 (accif11
abhinimminitva pajjalitva -itva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee jaletva
dhupayitva); Ja VI 196,9 (-itva jala ughahi); Dhp-a III
244,4 (-itva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhiipayitva); -
pp dhümayita, dhiipayita, mfn. [cf S. dhiimayita, S. lex.
dhiipayita], obscured, darkened (as if by smoke); hot,
suffering; S I 40,5* (Jo k o . . . kissa -o sada ...
icchadhiimayito sada, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se dhiipayito; Spk 1
95,25: icchadhiimayito ti icchaya aditto, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
icchadhiipayito; se e Th-a II 189,16/oll.: icchadhiipayito
ti ... icchaya santatto parijahappatto hoti); - ifc see
iccha-; - --tta, n., abstr., smoky darkness; SI 122,1
(--ttaf]l timirayitattaf]l gacchat' eva purimaf]l disaf]l;
Spk II 315,11: --ttan ti dhiimayanabhavaf]l . .. dhiima-
valahakal11 vi ya) = III 124,1; Sadd 790,14 (ayitatta111
upamatthe: dhiimo viya dissati aduf]l ta-y-idaf]l --ttaf]l).
dhümayana, dhiipayana, f [cf S. dhiimayana], smoking,
smouldering; pondering; MI 143,34 (ka rattif]l -a, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce dhupayana); 144,5 (yaf]l kho bhikkhu ...
rattif]l anuvitakketi anuvicarati aya111 ratti111 -a, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce dhupayana; Ps II 130,26 : idha panayaf]l
vitakke adhippeto, ten' aha ayaf]l ratti111 -a ti, Be, E e, Se
so; Ce dhiipayana ti); Nett 24,3 (ta1,1ha iti pi ... sallo iti pi
dhiipayana iti pi); Vism 175,31 (tejokasi1,1avasena -a
492 dheyya
pajjalana añgaravuqhisamuppadana111); Spk II 315,11
(dhiimayitattan ti dhiimayanabhavaf]l).
dhümika, mfn. [from dhiima], smoky, dark; Ap 536,7
(lokaf]l cakasi -af]l, Be, Ce so; Ee dhiimitaf]l, prob. wr;
Se rucita111) quoted Thi-a 146,3* (eds so).
dhümyata, m. [S. lex. id.], the fork-tailed shrike; Abh 644
(-o tu kaliilgo).
dhüra is an occasional vl or wr in E e, Se for dhura qv.
dhüll, f [ts], dust; powder; Abh 395 (rajo e' eva -I);
Ap-a 109,s (padumare1,1iihi ca -Ihi ca aki1,11,1a
pokkhara1,1iyo sobhantii ti); 223,7 (rajassira ti . . . -Ihi
makkhitasisa); 437,18 (n' atthi rajo -i malaT]l etassa ti
Narado).
dhüsara, mfn. [ts], dust-coloured, grey; Abh 96
(Isaf]1pa1,1<,iu tu -o);- ifc see 1iikha-.
dhüseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhiisayati (and
dhiisayati, dhii~ayati), Wg § 32:97], makes lovely;
Sadd 566,14 (dhiisa kantikara1,1e: -eti -ayati).
dhekati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup dhrekate, Wg § 4:5],
sounds; exerts onese/f, Sadd 325,24 (deka dheka
saddussahesu: ... dekati -ati).
dhenu, f [ts], a milch cow; a cow; a female animal;
Abh 498 (navappasiitika -u); V in I 244,17
(gopalakasatani a1,1apesi, tena hi bha1,1e ekamekaf]l -UT]l
gahetva ... ); Vv 80:6 (rakkhissa111 paresaf]l -u yo); Ja I
68,14 (sojasannaf]l -iinaf]l kh!ra111); III 540,1 (-u ya ca
vacchakassa ca aghini paññayanti); V 63,23* (dohena
-UT]l jananti); 106,4 (vacchakamata -u puttasokena til,laf]l
na khadati); Vism 313,26 (eka kira -u vacchakassa
khiradharaT]l muñcamana aghasi); Mp I 410,23
(khirapanatthaT]l -iihi ... attho hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-uhi); 423,6 (ath' eka -u ajika); V 88,6 (ayaf]l ettakaf]l
kalaf11 amhakaf]l -ii duhi ti); Mhv 21:18;
Sadd 393,23foll. (dhayati pivati ito khiraT]l potako ti
-u . .. 0 -saddo samaññavasena sapotikasu tiracchana-
gatitthisu vattati evaf]l sante pi yebhuyyena gaviyaf]l
vattati); - ifc see assa- (sv assa\ kura- (sv kura2),
miga-; - o' -u paga, o• -u paga, mfn. [perhaps wr for
dhenupaka qv ], following the cow, belonging to the cow;
Vism 163,4 (yatha -o vaccho dhenuto apanito
arakkhiyamano puna-d-eva dhenuf]l upagacchati, Be, Ee
so; Ce 0 -pako; Se dheniipako) = Sp 151,26 (Be so; Ce
dheniipako; Ee 0 -iipago; Se 0 -pako) = Nidd-a I 140,14
(Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -pako) = París-a 189,22 (Be, Ce, Se
so; E e o• -iipago;) =As 174,26 (Be, Ce so; E e, Se 0 -pako);
-
0
-pa, mj [dhenu + pa3], a suckling ca/f, (ora milch-
cow;) Sn 26 (atthi vasa atthi -a; Pj II 39,s: -a ti dhenuf11
pivanta tarul,lavacchaka khiradayika va gavo ); -
0
-paka, mj [dhenu + paka 1], a suckling ca/f, MI 79,16
(vacchakanaf]l taru1,1akilnaf11 -anaf]l gomayani); Nidd I
177,15 (Nidd-al 292,3: -o ti khirapako); Vism 163,4
(yatha -o vaccho dhenuto apanito arakkhiyamano
puna-d-eva dhenu111 upagacchati, Ce so; Be, Ee
dhenupago; Se dheniipako) = Sp 151,26 (Se so; Be
dhenupago; Ce dheniipako; Ee dheniipago) = Nidd-a I
140,14 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se dhenupago) =As 174,26 (Ee, Se
so; Be, Ce dhenupago); Ps II 266,34 (vacchake ti -e,
taru1,1avacchake, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhenupage); - see
also sahadhenuka.
dheyya, mfn. and m.n.,fpp ofdahati 3 qv.
dhevata
dhevata, m. [S. dhaivata], the sixth of the seven saras or
primary notes ofmusic; Abh 132 (usabho -o e' eva).
dhota, mfn., pp of dhovati qv.
dhotaka, mfn. [dhota + ka2], washed; cleaned; polished; ?
Sp 837,18 (-¡¡¡p. ta1apirtharp ca kh1ravalllpigha¡p. ca ti,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -ta1apigharp); neg.
adhotaka, mfn., Sp 837,21 (-¡¡¡p. talapigharp, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se --ta1apigharp).
dhona 1, mfn. !prob. pp of dhovati, or possibly of dhunati;
cf S. dhiina; Sadd 497,1: dhii kampane: dhunati dhiimo
dhona dhono dhuto], purified, pure; MI 386,16'
(-assa ... bhagavato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se monassa; Ps 111
97,23: -assa ti dhona¡p. vuccati naJ?.a¡p. tena
samannagatassa dhutaki1esassa va, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
monassa ti monarp ... ); Sn 351 (pah1najatimaraJ?.a¡p.
asesa¡p. niggayha -¡¡¡p. vadessami dhamma¡p.; Pj 11
349,25: -an ti dhutasabbapapa¡p.) = Th 1271; Sn 786
(-assa h1 n' atthi kuhiñci 1oke pakappita dirthi
bhavabhavesu; Nidd I 78,n: so dhutarago dhutapapo
dhutaki1eso dhutapari!aho ti -o; Pj 11 522,23: yo panayarp
sabbaditthigatadidosadhunanaya paññaya samannagata-
tta -o tassa -assa ... ); 834 (-en a yugarp samagama; Pj 11
542,23: dhutakilesena buddhena saddhirp); - see also
atidhonacari(n), dhuta (sv dhunati), dhota (sv dhovati).
dhona 2 , n., see sv dhona.
dhonasakho in Ee at Ja 111 160,24* is wr for venasakho
(Be, Ce, Se so).
dhona, f, dhona2, n. [from dhona 1 ? or cfS. dhavana]
(according to cts) wisdom; knowledge; (or cleansing; ?)
Nidd I 77,22 foil. (-a vuccati pañña . . . kirpkaraJ?.a -a
vuccati pañña, taya paññaya kayaduccarita¡p. dhutarp ca
dhota¡p. ca ... ) quoted Sadd 497,22 foil.; Ps III 97,23 (-¡¡¡p.
vuccati ñffi:!a¡p., Ce, Ee so; Be, Se monarp); Dhp-a III
344,2 (atidhonacarinan ti -a vuccati cattaro paccaye ...
paccavekkhitva paribhuñjanapañña); Sadd 498,1 (-a assa
atth1 ti dhono . . . dhatiina¡p. anekatthataya dhiidhatu
kampanatthe pi dhovanatthe pi vattati).
dhoneyya, dhoniya, mfn. [from dhona 1], cleansing,
purifying; Nidd I 78,24 (araha imehi -ehi dhammehi
upeto . . . samannagato, tasma araha dhono, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce dhoniyehi; Nidd-a I 206,27 foil.: araha imehi
vuttappakarehi ki1esadhovanehi dhammehi upeto hoti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ki1esadhonehi).
dhopati, pr. 3 sg., wr or vlfor dhovati qv.
dhopana, n., see sv dhovana.
dhorati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup dhorati, Wg § 15:45], runs
well; trots; Sadd423,8 (dhora gaticaturiye, gaticaturiya¡p.
gatichekabhavo: -ati).
dhorayha (and dhoreyya), m(fn). [cf S. dhurya, dhaureya;
AMg dhoreya; see J. Brough, 1962, pp. 236-37;
O. van Hinüber, 1986, § 149], (one) who is fit to be
hamessed to the po/e; who is fit to bear a burden; a
draught animal; Abh 496 (dhuravah1 tu -o); SI 28,21
(-o vata bho samaJ?.O Gotamo ); A I 162, 14* (-o
balasampanno kalyffi:!ajavanikkamo; Mp 11 258,22: -o ti
dhuravaho); Ap460,26 (-o usabho nago); Spki 255,6
(dhuraya¡p. -o, dhura¡p. vahatl ti attho); Th-a 11 277,33 (so
-o ... attano bhara¡p. nativattati na pariccajati); - ifc see
kamma-, dhura-; - 0 -vata,f(?), [dhorayha + va(t) 1 +
ta ?], the being (like) one who is fit to bear a burden;?
493 dhovati
SI 28,21 (dhorayho vata bho samat:~o Gotamo, -a ca
samuppanna sañrika vedana dukkha ... sato sampajano
adhivaseti, Be, Ce, Ee 1, Se so; Ei [59,6]: dhorayho va ta
ca pan' uppanna ... ; cfSpki 80,13: -a ti nagabhavena;
Spk-t [Be] I 115,27: nago viya vati pavattatl ti nagavo
tassa bhavo -a, vibhattilopena h' esa niddeso; see also
issaravata);- 0 -si1a, mfn., accustomed to bear burdens,
to take on duties; Dhp 208 (-¡¡¡p. vatavantam ariyarp, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee dhoreyya-; PDhp 71 dhoreyasllavrata-
mantam; Uv 25:25: dhaureya¡p. javasampannarp;
GDhp 177: dhoreka sila vadamada; cfMañga1attha-
d1pant: dhorayhasllabbatavantan ti; Dhp-a 111 272,10:
dhuravahanasllataya -arp); - 0 -Sili(n), mfn., id.; Ja 11
97,16* (-1 ca ku1amhi jato na majjatl; 97,19·: -1 ti 0 -sllo
dhuravahanaka-acarena sampanno jatisindhavo ).
dhova, n. [cfBHS dhova, S. dhava], (water for) washing;
- ifc see ki1esama1a-.
dhovaka, m. [cf BHS dhovaka, S. dhavaka], one who
washes, washes off, cleans away; - ifc see parpsu-,
vattha- (sv vattha 1).
dhovati (and *dhoveti, dhopati), pr. 3 sg. [BHS dhovati,
AMg dhovai; S. dhavati, dhavayati], rinses; washes;
polishes; purifies; washes off; Dhatup 288 (dhova
dhovane); Dhatum 422; V in I 28,3o (idha bhante bhagava
parpsukii1arp -atii ti); 11 207,8 (pffi:!iyena pi pade -anti);
111 205,35 (udaka¡p. ahara antaravasaka¡p. -issam1 ti);
206,29 (-a ti ffi:lapeti); IV 301,5 (sataka¡p. va vethanarp va
-ati); DI 93,6 (-atha ma¡p. amma nahapetha ma¡p. amma,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhopetha ... nahapetha ... ); 124,5
(seyyatha pi ... hatthena va hattha¡p. -eyya, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee dhopeyya); M 11 138,14 (so na khu1ukhu1ukaraka¡p.
pattarp -ati); 257,6 (kalena ka1arp ca VaJ?.aJP. -eyyasi);
A I 253,2o (tam enarp pa¡p.sudhovako . . . dot:~iyarp
akiritva -ati sandhovati niddhovati; Mp 11 362,3: -atl ti
vikkha1eti); 11 200,28 (sa1a1aghirp ... miile chindeyya ...
pasffi:!agu!ena -eyya pasffi:!agu1ena -etva nadirp
patareyya, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se dhopeyya ... dhopetva ... ;
Mp 111 181,18: -eyya ti gha¡p.seyya, eds so);
IV 375,6foll. (apasmirp sucirp pi -anti asucirp pi
-anti ... ); Sn p. 104,24 (app ekacce bhajanani -anti);
Ja 111 425,19* (-asi tlll).¡;iu1ani); IV 391,21 (yava mat:~ava
nahayanti e' eva mukhani ca -anti tava manussa
payasa¡p. va¡;i¡;Ihetva nibbatii ti thapesurp); VI 298,1 • (-e
pade adhosira¡p.); Sv 291,2 (katharp pana sllena paññarp
-atl ti); V v-a 220,15 (pattani -ahi); Vibh-a 473,33
(cetiyaiigaJ?.a¡p. gacchati tatthapi . . . asanani -ati
bodhimhi udaka¡p. siñcati); Sadd 440,19 (dhovu dhovane:
-ati); - part.pr. (a) dhova(t), mfn., M 11 257,17;
(b) dhovanta, mfn., Vin III 68,28 (lohitakarp ta¡p. asirp
-antassa); 235,2 (bhikkhuniyo e!akalomani -antiyo );
Th1 410 (ummare -antl hatthapade, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
ummaradhotahatthapada); Ja VI 298,4·; aor.
3 sg. dhovi, Th 897; J a VI 366,26; Dhp-a III 207,11;
Mhv 15:42; 1 sg. dhovirp, Th1 412 (Ee, Se, Th App 11
p. 241,3* so; Be, Ce dhovantl); - inf dhoviturp, Vin 11
120,36; Ja III 425,7; Pj 11 87,27 (na ca sakka asuddhena
asuddha¡p. -iturp); - absol. (a) dhovitva, Vin 11 208,1s;
Th1 13; Ja V 504,27 (pubbalohita¡p. -itva VaJ?.e niddose
katva); Ap 553,13; Vism 65,12; Thi-a 246,7 ( -itva, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee dhovetva); Mhv 34:35; - neg. adhovitva,
dhovana
Ja VI 365,ro; Sp 956,27; - (b) dhovitvana, Ap 389,12
(buddhapade -itvana, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee buddhassa pade
-itva); (e) dhovetva, Mp II 371 ,2o (ninhatapapakan ti
sabbe pape nahapetva -etva thitaJTl, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
ninhapetva -itva); -pass. pr. 3 sg. dhovlyati, Vin I 50,1
(kin ti nu kho upajjhayassa civaraJ11 -iyetha ti); 343,22
(khagga ca -iyantü ti); Sp 645,2 (-lyati);
part.pr. dhoviyamana, mfn., Ja I 220,29; Vism 346,n;
Mp II 317,25 (acchacamrnaJ11 satakkhattUJ11 pi
-iyamiinaJ11 na pa1,1<;IaraJ11 hoti); - pp (a) dhota, mfn.
(and n. ?) [S. dhauta; AMg dhota, dhoya], l. (mfn.)
washed, cleaned; clean; polished; washed off, V in III
235,35 (dhova ti al,lapeti apatti dukkatassa -ani
nissaggiyani honti) t IV 317,1 (-e apatti pacittiyassa, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce dhovite); M II 138,16 (hatthesu -esu patto
-o hoti); Ja V 89,1 (mukhe -e); Nidd I 78,1 (taya
pannaya kayaduccaritaJ11 dhutaJ11 ca -al!l ca);
Vism 346,18 (yani -ani pi gandhahara1,1atthaJ11
punappunaJ11 dhovitabbani honti); Sp 834,6 (khira-
vallikando adhoto yavajiviko -o yavakaliko); Sv 291,2
(catuparisuddhisilena -a); Spk III 249,II (deve vutthe
paJ11SU -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr paJ11sudhoto);
Mhv 34:78 (gantUJ11 -ehi padehi karayi
'tthar~atthataJ11); - ifc see khara- (sv khara\ nava-
(sv nava\ yatha-; - 2. (n.) washing;? Vin I 133,3o
(passanti ... padanaJ11 -al!l udakanissekaJTl, eds so; read
dhota-m-udakanissekaJ11? Sp 1065,3Ifoll.: padiinaJ11
-iinaJ11 udakanissekaJTl, bahuvacanassa ekavacanaJ11
veditabbaJ11, padanaJ11 dhota-udakanissekan ti va patho,
padiinaJ11 dhovana-udakanissekan ti attho );
--paccatthara, n., a rug (for when one has) washed
feet; ? Vin II 179,25' (in uddana: --paccattharena;
cfVinii 175,2ofoll.); - --padaka,n. and mfn.,
l. (n.) something to step on after washing one's feet;
Vin II 129,I7foll. (bhikkhu --padakaJTl akkamitul!l
kukkuccayanti; Sp 1209,24: --padakaJ11 nama
padadhovanatthane -ehi padehi akkamanatthaya
paccatthara1,1al!l atthataJ11 hoti); Sp 1249,16 (--padake
ti ... -ehi padehi akkamitabbatthanass' etaJ11
adhivacanaJ11); Sv 82,21 (eko araññatthaya eko
--padakatthaya ti ukkaJ11sato dve upahanasaiJ.ghata ca
vattanti, Be, Se so; Ce --padarakka1,1atthaya ti; Ee
-padakarakkhanatthaya ti)= Nidd-a I 403,34 (eds so);-
2. (mfn.) with washed feet; requiring clean feet; Vin II
175,21 (-a nipajjitUJ11 kukkuccayanti .. . anuJanami
bhikkhave paccattharitva nipajjitun ti;? Sp 1249,I5foll.:
-a hutva -ehi padehi akkamitabbaghane nipajjituJ11
kukkuccayanti, -e ti pi patho); Spk I 174,16 (api ca
--padake gehe pade dhovitva pavisanaJ11 pabbajitanaJ11
vattaJTl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit --padake gehe;
Spk-t [Be] I 206,25/oll.: --padehi akkamitabbake); -
--padatthapanaka, n., somewhere to place washed or
clean feet; Sp 913,27 (padaplthaJ11 nama
--padatthapanakaJTl) = 1160,15;- --papaka, mfn. [dhota
+ papaka 1], cleansed from wrong-doing; Ap 344,7; -
adhota, mfn., unwashed; dirty; unpolished; Vin I 188,10
(adhotehi padehi); Ap 309,5 (adhote satthake, Ee, Se so,
perhaps wr; Be, Ce sudhote); Sp 543,15 (mutta dhota pi
adhota pi anamasa); - duddhota, mfn., badly washed;
not properly cleaned; Sp 453,25; 661,1; 838,2s; -
494 dhovana
sudhota, mfn., well-washed; very clean; properly washed
off; Ja I 499,22 (so taJ11 sudhotaJTl dhovapetva); Ap 73,1
(sudhotal!l rajakena); Mil 105,32 (sudhotatta naracassa);
Thi-a 236,22 (sudhotataya); sudhotaraja-
pacchada, mfn., with a coverlet from which dirt has been
properly washed ojj; Thi 378; - pp (b) dhovita (and
dhopita ?), mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) washed; cleaned;
Vism 346,3o (gandhaCUI,ll,lena pi -o); Nidd-a I 206,12
(dhutaJ11 ca dhotaJ11 ca ti kampitaJ11 ca -al!l ca);
Ap-a 344,24 (sudhotaJ11 . . . sutthu dhovitaJ11);
--kaya, m., a purified body; Ud-a 320,21 (thitena kayena
ti . . . samma thapitena dhopitakayena, Ce, E e so,
perhaps wr; Be, Se copanakayena); neg.
adhovita, mfn., Thi-a 115,17 (adhovitapadassa);- 2. (n.)
cleaning; Ja I 266,6 (mukhaJ11 vikkhaletva hatthe --kale,
Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se hatthe dhovitva thitakale);
- see also dhona; - fpp dhovitabba, mfn., Vin II
208,12 (pada -a); Ja I 8,30 (kilittho ca -o ca rajitabbo
ca); Vism 100,12; Sp 967,32 (kesa pan' assa sayam eva
mattikaJ11 gahetva -a); - caus. pr. 3 sg. dhovapeti,
Vin III 206,7 (bhikkhuniya puriil,lacivaraJ11 -essati ti);
206,21 (-eyya); 235,1 (bhikkhii bhikkhunihi ejaka1omani
-enti); Mil 246,2; - part.pr. dhovapenta, mfn., Vin V
11 ,4; Sp 662,6; - aor. 3 sg. dhovapesi, V in V 9,3;
Dhp-a I 359,6; 3 pl. dhovapesuJ11, V in V 11 ,7; -
absol. dhovapetva, Ja V 290,13 (pade -etva); Sp 647,29
(rajakehi -etva); Patis-a 674,28 (datha agadena -etva);
Mhv 10:77; - pp dhovapita, mfn., Vin III 206,35; 236,3;
Kkh 2 108,6;- see also adhovima.
dhovana (and dhopana ?), n. [cf BHS dhovana,
S. dhavana], l. rinsing, washing; washing off; Vin V
174,27 (-ena vicara1,1ena chedanena ... ); Al 277,15
(udakaJTl thapetva padiinaJTl -aya); It 111,4*
(ucchadanena nhapanena padanaJ11 -ena ca); Sp 1308,33
(-al!l ca patiggaho ti aññatikaya bhikkhuniya
puriil,lacivaradhovapanal!l ca civarapatiggah~al!l ca);
Mp III 49,25 (yena kenaci dhovaniipakena udakena -al!l
udakasantoso nama); Pj II 375,19 (sali.ghatirajassa -aJTl);
- ifc see kasava-, clvara-, patta- (sv patta3); - 2. water
for washing; V in I 342,3o (icchati ... khaggiinal!l ca -al!l
patuJ11); M III 155,3 (asanaJ11 paññapesi udakaJTl ca
padanaJTl -aJTl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit -aJTl); - ifc see
ukkhali-, thali- (sv thali), patta- (sv patta3), mukha-,
sarava-, hattha-; - 3. (i) (according to cts) a certain
ritual (andfestival), involving washing ofbones; DI 6,13
(te evarüpaJ11 visiikadassanaJ11 anuyutta viharanti
seyyathidaJ11 naccaJTl gltaJ11 ... c~<;IalaJ11 VaJ11SaJ11 -al!l
hatthiyuddhaJTl ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhopanaJ11; or read
cal,l<;la1avaJ11sadhovanaJ11; Sv 84,27: -an ti atthidhovanaJTl,
ekaccesu kira janapadesu ka!akate ñatake na jhapenti
nikh~itva thapenti, atha nesaJ11 piitibhiitaJ11 kayaJTl ñatva
niharitva aghini dhovitva gandhehi makkhetva thapenti,
Be, Se so; Ce dhopanan ti; Ee dhopanan ti
atthidhopanaJTl; Ce, Ee kalaJ11 ñatva) = Nidd I 366,24;
A V 216,12joll. (atthi bhikkhave dakkhi1,1esu janapadesu
-aJTl nama, tattha hoti annaJTl pi piinaJ11 pi ... naccaJTl pi
gitaJTl pi vaditaJ11 pi ... ahaJ11 ca kho bhikkhave ariyaJ11
-al!l desissami . . . sammadighikassa bhikkhave
micchaditthi niddhota hoti; Mp V 71,1: -an ti aghi-
dhovanaJTl . . . atthlni nlharitva dhovitva ... tani gahetva
dhovana
rodanta paridevanta tato nakkhattal!l kitanti); - (ii) a
magic show; Sv 85,5 (ekacce pana indaja1ena a~(hi­
dhovanaJ11 -an ti vadanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhopanan ti);
- see also cal_l<;la1avaJ11sadhovana (sv cal_l<;la1a).
dhovanii, f [from dhovati], (an instrument for) washing;
Vin IV 262,27 (udakasuddhikal!l nama muttakara1_1assa
na\ m. [ts], the sound 'n'; the consonant 'n'; Sadd 604,20
(ta tha da dha na); 661,13 (sabbanamassa takarassa
nattal!l hoti va sabbaliilgesu); 774,1 (nassa saddassa
tappurisabahubb!hisu uttarapade attaf!l hoti);
0
-kiira\ m., l. the letter or sound 'n'; Ja III 15,s-
(yasassi naf!1 paññavantal!l visayha ti ... tlni p' etani
a1apanan' eva, nan ti pan' ettha nipato, vyañjana-
silighatavasena -assa anunasikata kata ti paccetabba, Ce
so; Ee anunasika kata ti; Be ntakarassa sanunasikata; Se
takarassa anunasika paccetabba); V 80,23' (paññavidha
natthl ti -o padasandhikaro paññavidha atthl ti attho);
Spk III 291,21 (na kho n' etan ti na kho etal!l, -o pan'
ettha vyañjanasandhimattam eva ti veditabbo); Th-a III
151,15 (gathasukhatthaJ11 -'-agamal!l katva); Bv-a 258,4
(-assa 1_1adesa111 katva, Be, Se so; Ce, E e omit); - 2. the
syllable 'na'; Ja III 43,19 (eko dukaram eva bha1_1i eko
sakaral!l eko -a111 eko sokaraJ11) f. Spk I 142,17; Ja III
47,1o (-al!~ vatva vattukamassa ayaf!l gatha natthi
anto ... ).
na 2 , [ts] (befare a following initial vowel there can be
hiatus after na, but more usually (a) na + a- befare a
single consonant > na-; (b) na + a- befare a double
consonant > na- or na-; (e) na + i- befare a single
consonant > na-y-i-; (d) na + u- > nu-, nü-, no-
(influenced by metre or rhythm); (e) na+ e- > ne-;- in
such cases n'- (as with elision) is often written in Ee;
(f) after na a following initial single consonant (from an
'original' double consonant) of a verb is often doubled);
not; no; nor, neither; Abh 1147 (na a no ma1al!l nahi);
Sadd 889,4 (na no ma a a1aJ11 halam ice ete
pa~isedhanatthe); 904,10foll. (na no ice ete padadimhi
e' eva padavasane ca nipatanti na padamajjhe ...
pamatto puriso puññakammal!l karoti na); V in I 8,22*
(sadevakasmÍJ11 lokasmiJ11 natthi me pa~ipugga1o);
III 150,18 (yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya); 195,26
(bhagavata sikkhapadal!l paññattal!l na atirekacivaral!l
dharetabban ti); 212,8 (na maya111 avuso ajlvaka bhikkhü
mayan ti); 215,28 (mahiccha ime sama1_1a Sakyaputtiya
asantugha na-y-ime sukara clvarena acchadetuJ11); 220,18
(na kiñci avacasi); 234.9 (nañño koci harako hoti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se na añño); D 11 104,1sfoll. (na tavahaJ11 ...
parinibbayissami yava me bhikkhü na savaka
bhavissanti viyatta ... ); 106,18 (na ciraJ11 tathagatassa
parinibbanal!l bhavissati); 162,32 (Yal!l na icchissama
taJ1) na karissama ti); 11147,11 (so issamacchariyaf!l
495 na
-a vuccati).
dhoviipana, n. [from dhovapeti, caus. of dhovati qv],
causing to wash; Sp 1392,31 (aññatikaya bhikkhuniya
-al!~).
dhovi(n), mfn. [from dhovati], washing; Thi-a 246,6
(dhovantl hatthapade ti hatthapade -in! asiJ11).
kulesu nuppadeta hoti, Be, Se so; Ce kulesu anuppadeta;
Ee na uppadeta); MI 179,13 (na-y-idaJ11 sukaral!l agara111
ajjhavasata ... brahmacariya111 carituJ1)); 246,22 (na-y-ito
bhiyyo); 426,15 (hoti ca na ca hoti tathagato paraJ11
mara1_1a); 486,23foll. (na upapajjatl ti kho Vaccha na
upeti); SI 6,17* (natthi puttasama111 pemaJ11); 109,1*
(naccayanti ahoratta jlvitaJ11 nuparujjhati, Ee so; Be, Se
nüpa-; Ce nopa-); 135,19* (suddhasailkharapuñjo 'yaJ11
na-y-idha sattupalabbhati); IV 206,4* (sailkhal!l nopeti
vedagü, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nüpeti); V 442,23
(candimasuriya loke nuppajjanti); A 11 39,7* (toyena
nupalippati, Be, Se so; Ce nüpa-; Ee toye na upalippati);
189,24 (paritto ayaf!l maccho nayaf!l maccho mahanto ti);
Dhp 4 (ye taJ1) na upanayhanti, Ce, Ee so; Be ca taJ1)
nupanayhanti; Se ca taJ1) nüpanayhanti); 21 (appamatta
na mlyanti); 69 (yava papaJ11 na paccati); Ud 80,25 (no ce
ta111 bhikkhave abhavissa ajataJ1) ... akataJ1) asailkhatal!l
na-y-idha jatassa . . . akatassa sailkhatassa nissara1_1a111
paññayetha); It 68,19 (asante nupaseveyya, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce nopa- ); Sn 25 (nahaJ11 bhatako 'smi kassaci); 779
(pariggahesu muni nopalitto); 849 (vemajjhe
nupasailkheyyo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nüpa- ); Th 278
(garavo nüpa1abbhati); 359 (na-y-ito düraf!1 gamissase
citta); 371 (Y al!~ apada... na kkhambhayante); 807
(kh!yati nopaciyati); 993 (seyyo hoti na papiyo ); Ja I
158,20* (na kir' atthi rasehi papiyo ); 11 198,9* (apeto
damasaccena na so kasavam arahati); Ill 466,28*
(na-y-ito kiñci papiyo); Pa~is I 54,1 (asati jatiya natthi
jaramara1_1an ti); Ap 469,2 (nupapajjati duggatiJ1), Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce nüpa-); Dhs 654 (Yal!l va pan' aññaJ11 pi atthi
rüpaJ11 na kammassa katatta); Mi14,3 (sakalajambudlpe
Mi1indena rañña samo koci nahosi); Vism 31,3 (na ito
bhiyyo ); 38,22 (therena . . . 1el_lal!l na ullokitapubbaJ11);
38,29 (tava daraka thaññaJ11 ma 1abhiJ11su yava thero na
agacchat! ti); 177,14 (bhavana na ijjhati); Mhv 5:101
(nopagacchittha); 6:21 (na ca khadi na capivi); 32:13
(idani so ma111 nopeti thero);- na doubled with a single
verb is a strong affirmation: V in III 197,33 (na
bhikkhave nissaghaclvaraf!1 na databbaJ11, yo na dadeyya
apatti dukka~assa ti); Ja V 448,3o* (nata kiñci na jananti
Yal!l manussesu vañcanaJ11); - in successive clauses or
phrases na is often simply repeated, but is also often
strengthened by another particle; na ... na pi/napi ... ,
n' eva . . . na ... , n' eva . . . na pana ... , na e' eva .. .
na ... , not ... not ... ; neither ... nor ... ; Vinll 185,27
na
(n' eva attanarp na pararp vyabadheti); IV 19,34
(matugamo nama manussitthi na yakkhl na petl na
tiracchanagata); DI 33,8 (n' eva saññirp nasaññirp
attanarp paññapenti); II 68,16 (n' eva hoti na na hoti);
68,23 (na janati na passati); 82,9 (na cahu na ca bhavissati
na e' etarahi vijjati añño samaJ.lo); 124,6 (bhasitarp
n' eva abhinanditabbarp na patikkositabbarp); 124,wfoll.
(na e' eva sutte o taran ti na ca vinaye sandissanti); 131,2
(n' eva dakkhiti na pana saddarp sossatl ti); 164,6 (tassa
n' eva charika paññayittha na masi); 251,12foll. (na
nibbidaya na viragaya na nirodhaya na upasamaya ... na
nibbanaya sarpvattati); M 1 246,16 (na k~o samaJ.lo
Gotamo na pi samo ); Dhp 84 (na attahetu na parassahetu
na puttam icche na dhanarp na rattharp); 105 (n' eva
deva no gandhabbo na maro saha brahmuna); 393 (na
jatahi na gottena na jacca hoti brahmaJ.lo); Ud 5,30 (tarp
darakarp n' eva olokesi napi alapi); 8,11 (n' ev' idha na
hurarp na ubhayamantarena); 14,9 (n' eva sakkoti
uddharp katurp na pana adho ); Pv 11:9 (na bhuñjare napi
karonti puññarp); Ja 1 207,17 (imassa n' eva
ajjhattasamutthana hiri atthi na bahiddhasamutthanarp
ottapparp); 279,9 (udakarp n' eva hayati na va<Nhati);
111 55,4* (na sasassa tila atthi na mugga napi ta!,l~ula);
V 452,12* (natthi tasarp vinayo na sarpvaro); 468,17* (na
so bhuñji na so pivi); 509,19* foll. (na so raja yo ajeyyarp
jinati na so sakha yo sakhararp jinati na sa bhariya ya
patino vibheti na te putta ye na bharanti jii)I)arp);
Dhs 566 (manodhatu uppanna hoti kiriya n' eva kusala
nalmsala na ca kammavipaka); Mil 40,2 (na ca so na ca
añño ti); Vism 19,25/oll. (na hatthirp olokento na assarp
na ratharp na pattirp na itthirp na purisarp olokento);
107,16 (idarp ... n' eva patiyarp na atthakathayarp
agatarp); Dhp-a 1 328,14 (n' eva tassa gatirp nagatirp
janama); - na is often followed by one or more other
particles: not at all; certainly not; indeed not; -na kho,
na kho pana: D II 99,7 (na kho me tarp patirüparp); 154,s
(na kho pan' etarp Ananda evarp datthabbarp); Ud 11,15
(na khv etarp bhikkhave tumhakarp patirüparp); 48,29 (na
kho ettha kiñci khadaniyarp va bhojaniyarp va bhajiyati);
Ja II 319,1 (na kho bhikkhu idan' eva pubbe pi tvarp
lolo); Mill4,1 (na kho tyaharp Nagasena ettavata
khamami); - na jatu: Ja V 503,15* (na jatu dubbhetha
imassa rañño);- na nu, see sv nanu;- na no: Khp 6:3
(na no samarp atthi tathagatena; Pj 1 170,18 (na iti
patisedhe no iti avadharal)e) = Sn 224; - na vata:
Vin IV 24,15 (na vata no ito pubbe evarüpa bhikkhil
vassarp upagata); 54,27; - na ve: Dhp 177 (na ve
kadariya devalokarp vajanti); Ja 1 251,1 * (na ve
anatthakusalena atthacariya);- na hi: Vin 11 199,19 (na
hi nama tumhakarp . . . tesu navakesu bhikkhilsu
karuññarp pi bhavissati); D II 14,12 (na h' evarp
bodhisattarp bodhisattamata vijayati); 30,2 (na hi nuna so
orako dhammavinayo nasa oraka pabbajja); 49,24* (na hi
pabbajito parüpaghati); 66,7 (na h' eva kho me vedana
atta); 205,29 (na hi nilna so orako yakkho bhavissati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee na ha nilna); Khp 9:10 (na hi jatu
gabbhaseyyarp puna-r-eti) = Sn 152; Dhp 5 (na hi verena
verani sammant' idha kudacana); Ud 75,21* (na hi jatu
sarpyojanasari.gasatta ogharp tareyyurp); Sn 666 (na hi
nassati kassaci kammarp); Ja 1 169,17* (na h' evarp dhira
496 na
muccanti); 11 123,16* (na hi nilna santi idha lokapala);
V 500,2* (ice abravl tvarp na hi te sameti); Mil 25,12 (na
h' ettha puggalo upalabbhati ti); 26,6 (kirp nu kho bhante
kesa Nagaseno ti na hi maharaja ti); -na tu, na ca, but
not; and not; rather than; Vin I 25,17 (mahiddhiko kho
mahasamaJ.lo ... na tveva ca kho araha yatha ahan ti);
DI 115,3 (mayam eva arahama tarp bhavantarp
Gotamarp dassanaya upasari.kamiturp na tveva arahati so
bhavarp Gotamo amhakarp dassanaya upasari.kamiturp);
S II 94,22 (vararp bhikkhave assutava puthujjano
imarp ... kayarp attato upagaccheyya na tveva cittarp);
Ja 1 153,1 (aharp rajjarp jaheyyarp na ca tarp patiññarp);
247,27* (seyyo amitto matiya upeto na tveva mitto
mativippahino); 405,15* (sadhu kho paJ.l~ito nama na
tv-eva atipaJ,lqito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee n' atth' eva);
II l60,11* (mahatl vata te bondi na ca pañña tadupika);
Ap 20,31 (sakka samudde udakarp pameturp ... na tveva
tava sabbaññu ñill)arp sakka pametave); Mil287,9
(mahapathavl parivatteyya . . . na tv eva bodhisatto
patinivatteyya apatva sammasambodhirp); - na is
sometimes used (or written) iic: not-a-, a not-; without;
Dhp 309 (naro pamatto apajjati . . . apuññalabharp
nanikamaseyyarp; cfPDhp 210 anikamaseyarp;
Udana-v 4:14: anikamasayyarp; GDhp 270: ani'ama-
saya); Sn 779 (pariggahesu muni nopalitto; Nidd I
58,29 foll.: pariggahesu na limpati na samlimpati na
upalimpati ... alitto asarplitto anupalitto ... ; Pj II 518,5:
tal)haditthilepappahanena anupalitto); Ja VI 82,29* (natthi
maccussa nagamo); Pa!is I 80,6 (nanusaya caratl ti
viññill)acariya; Patis-a 293,15: niranusaya ti vattabbe
nanusaya ti vuttarp); 185,3 foil. (ya kayassa na-anamana
navinamana nasannamana napal)amana aniñjana
aphandana ... , E e, Se so; Be, Ce na anamana na
vinamana ... ); Kv 365,19 (na-anantarikassa puggalassa,
Ee so; Be na anantariyassa; Ce na antarikassa; Se
na-anantariyassa); - so very frequently in Tikap and
Dukap in the paccanlyapatthana in the enumeration of
paccaya by the negative method, eg Tikap 343,23
(nakusalarp dhammarp paticca nakusalo dhammo
uppajjati hetupaccaya); Dukap 1,15 (heturp dhammarp
paticca nahetu dhammo uppajjati hetupaccaya); - see
also nicchamanaka;- see also na, no4.
na 3 , ind. [ts], like, as, as it were; Ja V 339,24* (yarp na ...
andhena tamasa gatarp; 34l,w: yarp na ti ettha nakaro
upamane . . . gatan ti katarp, ayam eva va patho,
purimassa nakarassa imina sambandho na katan ti katarp
viya ti attho); Sadd 889,wfoll. (na iti upamane pi vattati
yarp na . . . andhe na tamasa katarp ettha nasaddarp
gahetva katarpsaddena yojetva na katan ti padassa katarp
viya ti attho bhavati).
na 4 , ind. [= nu 1], interrogative particle; S 1 190,30 (handa
dani bhikkhave pavarayami vo na ca me kiñci garahatha
kayikarp va vacasikarp va; Spk 1 276,33: ettha na ca kiñcl
ti pucchanatthe nakaro, kirp me kiñci garatha); Ja VI
63,17* (kulaputtarüpo sappuriso na seve, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se nu; 63,21·: nakaro paripucchanatthe nipato, Be so; Ce,
Ee nakaro patipucchanattho; Se nukaro patipucchanatthe
nipato); 213,9* (na tena vyapannarasildaka na, Be so; Ce,
Ee narp; Se vyapannarasildakani; 216,3·: ettha eko
nakaro pucchanattho hoti, nanu tena vyapannarasildaka
na
nadiyo ti hi taq1 pucchanto evam aba).
2 kayena kayaq1 amasati); 241,14 (gihl na111 pi gihissa
na 5 , ind., see sv nam .
6
na , mfn., demonsr"r. pronoun [cf ena, ta(d), PktJ:.w], he,
she, it; (in acc. often following a particle, esp. atha, or at
the end of a sentence, after imperat. or fut., and so
2 yena ti nipatamatta111 nan ti ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nan ti
possibly to be interpreted as particle; cf na111 ; or
functions asan encliticform ofta(d); naq1, ne are prob.
sometimes in Ee wrr for taq1, te), Sadd 274,21foll.
(tasaddassa namikapadamala vuccate: so te na111 ta111 ne
te ... ); 661,13foll. (sabbanamassa takarassa natta111 hoti
va sabbalingesu: naq1 ta111 ne te ... ); - sg. acc.
1 149,25: nan ti nipatamatta111 naq1 tathagatan ti va attho);
naq1 :Vin I 75,7 (aya111 so karabhedako coro handa na111
nema ti); 207,38 (aramikagamo ti pi na111 abaq1su); S I
102,29* (idh' eva na111 pasaq1santi); A I 248,5
(gandhakara~J<;lake va naq1 nikkhipanti); IV 172,6*
(abhinibbajjayatha na111); Dhp 1 (tato na111 dukkham
anveti); Sn 139 (na naq1 jati mvares1
brahmaloküpapatt iya); 1076 (yena na111 vajju ta111 tassa
natthi); 1094 (nihhanam iti na111 brümi); Ja I 54,24 (putto
kira te maharaja jato passissami nan ti aba); 152,14 (atha
naq1 mata tassa santika111 gacchanta111 disva); 222,3o
(atha naq1 evam aha); 287,2o (sace sakkosi marehi nan ti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tan ti); IV 278,19* Givaqi ca na111
gahetvana); Vism 314,3o (saha bhal).<;lena gahitacora111
vadhetha nan ti); PsI 229,7 (Buddharakkhito saku~Jena
gahito mocema nan ti); -pi. acc. ne: Vin I 42,35* (atha
ne sattha viyakasi); IV 44,9 (handa ne vuqhapessama ti);
SI 224,22 (deva apaya111sveva... abhiya111sveva ne
asura); A I 132,14* (tasma hi ne namasseyya, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee te) = It 110,17*; Sn 223 (tasma hi ne rakkhatha
appamatta); 288 (na ne koci nivaresi kuladvaresu);
Thi 465 (atha ne bha~Jati Sumedha; Thi-a 258,26: ne ti
matapitaro); Ja III 204,18 (pucchissami ne ti); 537,23
(atha ne tittiro kasma rodatha ti aha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
te); IV 367,23* (khippa111 ca ne nimantaya, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee te); V 114,2· (atha ne tayo pi eka-a)ahanen' eva
jhapesu111, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be te); 314,13 (matapitaro
mamam eva bhara aham eva ne patijaggissami);
VI 55!,29* (ko ne dassati bhojanaq1; or read no with
L. Alsdoif, 1957? Lf552,II·: ko nesaq1 bhojana111
dassati); Th-a II 19,14 (atha ne upanisiditva); Dhp-a I
6!,15 (pakkosabi ne ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se te ti);
V v-a 299,19 (sayam eva ne upaghahati); - ne in Ee at
JaiV 211,5* is prob. wr for te (Be, Ce, Se so);-
gen./dat. nesaq1, V in III 3,37 (so hi nesaq1 jeqho hoti ti);
M II 123,28 (ahaql nesaq1 jivitaq1 data); Th 130 (so
nesaq1 hoti sakkato); 1250 (cittaq1 nesaq1 samanvesaq1);
Ja III 336,9• (so hi nesaq1 vinayako); IV 445,2o (ajananta
gabbha111 naseyyu111 acikkhissami nesan ti); Ap 469,26
(sutva nesaq1 suvacanaq1); Mil49,22 (ekato va nesa111
uppatti hoti); Vism 15,13 (yani ca nesaq1 bhikkhunlnaq1
paññattito rakkhitabbani); Dhp-a IV 41,5 (atha nesa111
antojala111 so maccho pavisi); - naya in Ee at A I
132,17* is prob. wr for taya (Be, Ce, Se so);- nassa in
Ee at Ja V 203,21* and VI 189,3 is prob. wr for tassa (Be,
Ce, Se so).
6 nakkha, nakkhana, n. [from nakkhati], going; ?
naip\ sg. acc. ofna qv.
6
naip (and na\ ind. [from na ? BHS nam; AMg ~Jaql; cf S.
2 Sadd 329,27
cana], emphatic particle: indeed; certainly; Vin II 186,29
(yaq1 kho pan' assa amanapa111 katha111 naq1 mayaq1 tena
497 nakkha
samudacareyyama ); III 121,27 (bhikkhu ca na111 itthiya
vippatisarissa denti; Sp 699,26: nan ti namatthe nipato
gihl nama gihissa ti vutta111 hoti); S I 221,5 (yena na111
Sakka111 devanaq1 inda111 ... bandhitva; Spk I 342,10:
ta111); A I 126,23 (ahi güthagato kiñcapi na <;!a111sati atha
kho na111 makkheti); Ud 69,15* (viggayha naq1 vivadanti;
Ud-a 343,25 foil.: nan ti nipatamatta111 atha va . . . naq1
diqhinissayaq1 .. . gahetva vivadanti); It 32,12*
(tathagataq1 ... duve vitakka samudacaranti naq1; It-a I
111 ,5* (taya naqi paricariyaya matapitüsu pa~J<;lito );
Th 879 (ajjabaq1 saccanamo 'mhi na naq1 hi111sami kañci
na111, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce kiñcana111); Ja II 78,6* (app eva
bahukiccana111 attho jayetha koci na111; 78,w: nan ti
nipatamattaq1; cf S. kascana); IV 172,w• (tato na111
aparaq1 kame ghamme ta~Jha!11 va vindati; 173,7·: ettha
nan ti nipatamattaq1); 384,14* (app eva naq1 putta111
1abhemu jlvitaq1; 384,IT: app eva nama puttassa jivita111
labheyyama); VI 544,3* (na h'eta yacayogl na111); 559,1 *
(imamhi na111 padesamhi); Patis I 185,13 (na ca na111 ta111
samapatti111 pa~J<;lita samapajjanti pi vuqhahanti pi, Be,
Ce so; Ee na ta111 ca na111; Se na ca ta111); Bv 2:52 (ma
na111 kalale akkamittha; Bv-a 89,37: nan ti padapüra~Jatthe
nipato); Cp 1:8:16 (atta na me na dessiyo; Cp-a 12,11:
pathamo nakaro nipatamatto, atta na me kujjhitabbo na
appiyo ti attho) f. Ja IV 406,17* (attanaq1 me na
dessiya111); Sv 637,18 (tena ti tena anagami-
adibhavena ... atthakathayaqi pana te na ti te nadikiya ti
vutta111, etasmi111 atthe nakaro nipatamattaq1 hoti, so read
with Be, Ce, Se; ad D II 201,15); Sadd 890,3o (pada-
püranaqi bahuvidhaq1: atha khalu ... naq1 ca va ... ).
1
naklira\ m., see sv na .
2
naklira , m., the word 'na'; Ja V 341,19' (yaql na ti ettha
-o upamane); VI 216,3· (ettha eko -o pucchanattho
hoti); Sp 978,3o (yattha yattha -ena patisedho kayirati);
Spk I 276,33 (ettha na ca kiñcl ti pucchanatthe -o); Pj II
402,II (na brahmano no 'mhi ti ettha -o patisedhe
nokaro avadhara~Je); 545,22 (ahasadda111 sabbattha -ena
saddhi111 yojetva); Patis-a 217,16 ( -am eva abaritva);
Bv-a 25,7 (-o patisedhattho ).
nakula, m. [ts], an ichneumon, a mongoose; Abh 622 (-o
munguso); A V 289,Io (sa111sappajatika tiracchanayoni:
ahí vicchika satapadi -a bi)ara ... ); Ja II 53,4 (ekasmi111
vammike -o vasati); VI 538,2* (khagga varaha -a);
Mil 394,20 (-o . .. bhesajjena kaya111 paribhavetva
uraga111 upagacchati); Bv-a 80,3o* (sappa kiJi111su kamaq1
-ehi saddhi111).
nakka, m. [S. nakra], a crocodile; Abh 674 (su111sumaro tu
kumbhilo -o); Thi 241 (-a ca su111sumara ca, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se naga, prob. wr; Thi-a 196,s: -a ti jhasa, Ce so; Be,
Ee naga ti vijjhasa; Se naga ti bhujaga).
nakketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nakkayati,
Wg § 32:54], destroys; Sadd 521,9 (nakka dhakka
nasane: -eti -ayati).
(nakkha gatiyaq1: nakkhati -aq1
nakkhatta111 . . . nakkhana111 gamanaq1 tayati rakkhati ti
nakkhatta111, Ee so; Be omits -a111).
nakkhati
nakkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nak~ati, Wg § 17:10], goes;
Sadd 329,27 (nakkha gatiya~: -ati ... nakkhatta~).
nakkhatta, n. [S. nak~atra], a star; a heavenly body; an
asterism or constellation through which the moon
passes, one of 27 (or 28) lunar mansions; a disposition
of the stars or constellations; a favourable disposition of
asterisms; a celebration of a new lunar mansion, a
festival, a holiday; Abh 58-60 (assayujo bharm.J.! ...
pubbuttarabhaddapada revatyapi ti . . . -a) f.
Sadd 359,15foll.;Vin I 246,35* (-ana~ mukh~ cando
adicco tapat~ mukh~) = Sn 569; DI 10,16 (-ana~
pathagamana~ bhavissati -ana~ uppathagamana~
bhavissati); III 85,6 (na candimasuriya paññayanti na
-am tarakarupani paññayanti; Sv 868,14:
kattikadinakkhattani e' eva sesatarakarupani ca); Sn 927
(athabbal).a~ supin~ lakkhal).a~ no vidahe atho pi
-a~; Nidd I 382,4 foll.: o -pathaka -a~ adisanti
atthavisati -ani imina -ena gharapaveso kattabbo ...
adisanti; Nidd-a I 416,1: kattikadini atthavisati -ani);
Thi 143 (-ani namassanta aggi~ paricara~ vane); Ja I
50,4 (tada kira Kapilavatthunagare asajhinakkhatt~
ghutth~ ahosi, mahajano -a~ ki)ati); 108,10 (niyamako
arul).uggamanavelaya pabuddho -a~ oloketva sakatani
nivattetha nivattetha ti aha); 133,s (-~ oloketva pitu
klliakatabhava~ ñatva); 257,31 (bhante ajja amhaka~ eka
mañgalakiriya sobhana~ nu kho -an ti); 258,15foll.
(-en a ko attho nanu darikaya laddhabhavo va -an ti ...
attho atthassa -a~ ki~ karissanti taraka); II 181,10 (-a~
na manap~ divaso na manapo); V 330,2* (-ani ca
pucchati utus~vaccharani ca; 331 ,13·: katarena -ena
jato putto dighayuko hoti katarena appayuko ti);
VI 434,11 (deva mañgalakiriyaya anucchavik~ -~
kira janahi); Bv 2:95 (taragal).a virocanti -a
gaganamal).c:iale); Sv 140,26 (rajakulassa nama sada pi
-am eva); Mp I 422,6 (ajja ki~ -an ti pucchi); V v-a 63,4
(ekadivas~ Rajagahe mahajana sattaha~ -~
ki)itabban ti ghosana~ kari~su); Sadd 329,27foll.;
428,17 (na kkharanti na nassanti ti -ani ti poral).a);- ifc
see kattika- (svv kattika, kattika 1); - 0 -ki!a,J:, merry-
making at a festival, holiday sport; Ja I 50,6
(malagandhavibhutisampann~ -a~ anubhavamana);
Thi-a 132,26 (uyyan~ gantva -a~ ki)itva); Spk I 124,3o;
0
-ggaha, m. [nakkhatta + gaha2 ], obscuring,
occultation, of a star or asterism; ? D I 10,13 (-o
bhavissati; Sv 95,s: nakkhattassa añgarakadigaha-
samayogo pi -o yeva); 10,22 (eva~vipako -o
bhavisssati); Sadd 458,21 (gahü vilojane: ... -o); -
0
-dassapana, n., pointing out the nakkhatta; Pj I 138,25
0
( -divasesu -a~);-
0
-divasa, m., the day of a festival,
a holiday; Vism 403,25; Sv 213,27; Mp I 447,11; -
0
-dhamme in Ee at Ja V 490,s•: read na khattadhamme
with Be, Ce;- 0 -nissitaka, mfn., resorting to, occupied
with, the festival; Ja I 250,7 (sakalanagaravasino -a
hutva vicaranti); - 0 -pada, n., a constellation; a lunar
mansion; Vin II 217,2 (na -ani jananti; Sp 1285,21:
nakkhattan' eva -ani); 217,32 (-ani uggahetabbani
sakalani va ekadesani va); Ja VI 476,s· ( --kovido ti
atthavisatiya 0 -kotthasesu cheko); - 0 -paribbaya, m.,
money for the festival; Mp I 446,14 (ki~ -a~ gahetva
nakkhatt~ ki)issasi, Be, Ce so; Se -pariccaya~; Ee wr
0
498 nakha
nakkhatt~ paribbaya~); - 0
-patha, m., reading,
interpretation, ofthe stars; astrology; Ap-a 224,27 (-e ca
chekatta); - 0
-pathaka, m., one who reads, who
prognosticates from, the stars, an astrologer; Nidd I
382,9 (imina nakkhattena gharapaveso kattabbo ... eva~
-a nakkhatta~ adisanti); Sp 944,17 (eko -o bhikkhu
eva~ vadati ajja nakkhatta~ daml).a~ ma im~
kamma~ karotha ti); Ap-a 424,32 (nemittana~ -ana~);
-
0
-piJana, n., occultation of a star or asterism;
Dhp-a I !66,22 (tapaso -yog~ olokento Parantapassa
0
-~ disva);- 0 -mali(n), mfn., with a garland of stars;
Th 193 (ratti -in!);- 0 -yoga,m., a conjunction of(the
moon with) a constellation; Pv 30:4; Ja I 254,s
(brahmal).O -~ ñatva); IV 203,27* (-a~ patimanayami);
Vism 674,1 (puriso -a~ janissami ti rattibhage
nikkhamitva canda~ passitu~ uddh~ ullokesi;
Vism-mht [Be] II 485,s: nakkhattena candassa yog~,
--vibhavaniya~ va kala~, divasan ti attho); -
0
-raja(n), m., the moon; Abh 51 (cando ca -a); Vv 17:3;
Ja V 148,9* (-a-r-iva tarakana~); Sadd 380,25*; -
0
-Vijja,J:, knowledge of and prognostication from (the
dispositions o!J the stars; Nidd I 372,21 (Nidd-a I 402,5:
-a ti nakkhattana~ yogajananasattha~); Mil 370,5
( ... vatthuvijjaya va -aya va añgavijjaya va
aññataraññatarena va buddhapatikughena miccha-
jivena); Pj I 237,1 ( ... vatthuvijja~ -~ angavijjan ti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee khettavijj~).
nakkhatthadhammasa likhate in Ee at Ja V 490,9· is wr;
Ce tv~ khattadhammasali.khate; Be, Se tva~ khattiya-
dhammasankhate.
nakkhana, n., see sv nakkha.
nakkheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [?], binds, unites; ? Sadd 522,27
(nakkha sambandhe: -eti -ayati).
nakha, m.n. [ts ], a fingemail, a toenail; a claw; Abh 268
(karajo tu -o nitthi); V in I 273,5 (-ena bhesajja~ adaya);
II 133,23 (na bhikkhave digha -a dharetabba); SI 127,15*
(giri~ -ena khal).atha); 206,13* (kesa loma -a pi ca, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -ani ca, prob. wr); Khp p. 2,s (atthi
imasmi~ kaye kesa loma -a danta ... ); Sn 610 (na
ali.gulihi -ehi va); Ja I 237,26 ( 0 -pitthena gal).c:ii~
paharitva -ena dvara~ akotetva); V 433,29 (-ena -~
ghageti; 436,24·foll.: padanakhena padanakh~ hattha-
nakhena hatthanakha~ ghatteti); VI 211,27* (oropayitva
kesamassu~ -~ ca); Mil 26,7 (-a Nagaseno ti);
Vism 250,33 (-a ti visatiya -pattana~ nama~); Spk I
0
281,1 (hatthinaga ... -ehi cañkamana~ nittina~ katva);
Mp I 267,9 (chavasisa~ -ena akotetva aya~ satto
asukayoniya~ nama nibbatto ti janati); - ifc see agga-
(sv agga 1), aqha- (sv agha2), andha-, jalatamba-, tamba-;
- o -cchedana, n., an instrument for cutting nails; V in II
133,27 (anujanami bhikkhave -an ti); S IV 169,1 (til).hena
-ena); Ap 309,17 (-e sugate datva); Sp 292,26; -
0
-patta, n. [nakha + patta2], the (plate of the) nail;
Vism 250,33; Spk III 227,32 (visati -ani ma~sato amutta-
tthane lakharasapuritani viya);- 0 -pitthika,f, the back
of the nail; V in I 286,11 (anujanami bhikkhave udake va
-aya va thevaka~ datun ti); - 0 -Sikha,f, the tip of the
nail; S Il 133,12 (bhagava paritta~ -ayam pa~su~
aropetva; Spk II 129,4: -ayan ti ma~saghanena vimutte
nakhagge); - see also parü)hakacchanakhaloma,
nakhati
hatthinakhaka.
nakhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nakhati, Wg § 5:20-21],
goes; Sadd 329,21 (ukha nakha... gatyattha: ukhati
-ati ... ).
nakhasii, .f [?], a kind of (skin- )disease; ? A V 110,6
(kandu kacchu -a vitacchika ... , Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
rakhasa; Mp V 43,3: -a ti nakhehi vilikhitaghane rogo,
Be so; Ce, Ee rakhasa ti; Se rajasa ti) = Nidd I 13,n (eds
rakhasa; Nidd-al 61,9: rakhasa ti ... -a ti pi paji, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce rakkhasa ti pi).
nakhi(n), mfn. [S. nakhin], having nails or claws;
Sadd 188,17' (bhagl bhogl -1 sikhl).
naga, m.n. [S. naga, m.], l. (m.) a mountain; Abh 605
(pabbato ... nagacalasiluccaya); 1117; S 1 195,8• (-assa
passe aslnarp munirp) = Th 1249 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
nagassa); Sn 180 (te mayarp vicarissama gama gamarp
-a -arp; Pj 11 216,23: devapabbata devapabbatarp);
Th 1065 (abhivugha rammata1a -a isibhi sevita; Th-a III
140,10: desantararp agamanato -a ti); 1133 (-a samudda
sarita vasundhara; Th-a III 159,3: Sineruhimavantadayo
sabbe pabbata); Ja III 247,25' (na tattha santo nivasanti
avisesakare -e); VI 125,5• (adda sldantare -e; 125,w: -e
ti pabbate ); Ap 164,2 (Meru -anarp pavaro si1uccayo );
Mhv 15:96; Sadd 429,15' (pabbato aca1o se1o -o);
922,31foll. (-arp-a vannabhedo 'yarp);- 2. (m.) a tree;
Abh 1117 (se1arukkhesv ago -o); Th 11 O (-a nagaggesu
susarpvirü)ha udaggameghena navena sitta; Th-a I
232,11: -a ti rukkha, naga ti keci pathanti nagarukkha ti
attho); Sadd 330,31' (rukkho ... ago -o); - 3. (n.) a
royal seat; ? Ap-a 429,19{oll. (na gacchatl ti -am
rajayuvarajamahamattad!naJTl vasanaghanam -am rati
adadati gal}hati ti nagararp); - o• -antare, ind., among
mountains; Vv 16:6 (-e nagaravare sumapite;
Vv-a 82,22foli.: pañcannaJTl pabbatanam antare
vemajjhe ); Th 525 (-e nagavivararp samassito ); - see
also tironagaJTl (sv tiro).
nagara, n. [ts] (sometimes in Ee wrongly written nailgara),
a town; a city; esp. the seat of a raja; Abh 198 (puraJTl
-am); Vin IV 109,29 (ayasma Sagato ghare ghare
kapotikaJTl pasannarp pivitva -amha nikkhamanto
o -dvare paripati); D ll 83,9 (rañño paccantimaJTl -arp
da)huddapaJTl da)hapakaratoral}arp ekadvararp); 86,32
(Magadhamahamatta Pataligame -arp mapenti Vajjlnarp
patibahaya; Sv 540,7: Pataligamarp -arp katva mapenti);
III 200,22* (tassa ca -a ahu antalikkhe sumapita;
Sv 966,19: -ani bhaviJTlsii ti attho); S li 128,8 (imaJTl
purisaJTl ... dakkhil}ena dvarena nikkhametva dakkhil}ato
-assa slsaJTl chindatha ti); A III 215,4 (imasmirp padese
-arp ahosi iddharp e' eva phltaJTl ca bahujanaJTl
akil}l}amanussarp); Dhp 150 (aghlnaJTl -aJTl kataJTl
marpsalohita1epanarp); 315 (-arp yatha paccantarp
guttarp santarabahiraJTl) = Th 653; Pv 41:1 (Savatthi
nama -arp himavantassa passato ); Th 1054
(senasanamha oruyha -arp pil}gaya pavisirp); Th! 305
(gamena gamarp vicarimha -e rajadhaniyo ); 400 (-amhi
kusumaname Pata1iputtamhi); Ja 11 21,10 (Kosalaraja
mahatiya senaya agantva -aJTl parivari); IV 17,4 (imaya
disaya amhakaJTl -an ti disaJTl vavatthapetva); 154,25'
(karayanta -ani agare ca ... vividhe capi pasade; 155,3·:
-anl ti nagarapatisankharakammani); 460,1 • (-arp pi
499 nagara
nago bhasmarp kareyya); 492,14 (raja devirp adaya -arp
padakkhil}arp katva alailkatapasadata1am eva abhirühi);
494,18' (matta gaja ... -ani maddanti janaJTl hananti);
V 135,7 (raja yujjhitva core gahetva -am eva
paccagami); 318,11* (na me attho hi rajjena -ena
dhanena va); VI 59,1 * (-e janapadani ca hitva, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nagare); 448,27* (maddantu kuñjara -arp
Vedehena sumapitaJTl); 489,13' (hatthinage padinnamhi
khubbhittha -arp tada); 511 ,25* (nikkhamitvana -a
nivattitva vilokite); Nidd I 366,5 (gamena gamarp
nigamena nigamaJTl -ena -aJTl raghena raghaJTl
janapadena janapadaJTl); Ap 43,18 (agalake ca vividhe
karaye -e bahii, Be, Ce, Se so; E e nangare ); 61,5 (-arp
Rel}uvatl nama itthakahi sumapitaJTl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nangararp); !66,10 (yavata -aJTl as1 pupphanaJTl
chadanarp tada . . . na vigacchatha); Mil 34,2
(nagaravagghaki -aJTl mapetukamo ... ); Vism 270,2
(vijjacariyo ... ettha -aJTl mapetha ti upadisati); 281,9
(dovariko -assa anto ca bahi ca purise ... dvarappattarp
dvarappattarp yeva pana vlmaJTlsati); Sv 259,18 (maha
jambudipo araññe -arp mapessama ti); Ps III 356,5
(Ujuñña ti tassa raghassa pi -assa pi etad eva namaJTl);
Spk III 264,29 foil. (-e laddhe yarp catiisu disasu
ughanakabhal}garp taJTl catiihi dvarehi -am eva pavisatl
ti janapado laddho ca hoti -ass' eva h' eso anisaJTlso);
Dhp-a I 39,1o (tapaso agha mase himavante vasitva
lol}ambilasevanatthaya cattaro mase -aJTl upanissaya
vasitukamo); 325,17 (nahanatthaya -a nikkhami);
Ap-a 150,12 (-aJTl va me dehi yuddhaJTl va ti); 429,22
(rajadlnarp vasanaghanasamiihabhiitaJTl pakara-
parikhadihi parikkhittarp paricchinnaghanarp -aJTl nama
ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits); Bv-a 274,24 (dvinnarp -anaJTl
antare ubhayanagaravaslnaJTl paribhogarahaJTl Lumbinl-
vanarp nama mangalasalavanaJTl atthi); Dlp 14:51 (pavisi
-aJTl purarp); Mhv 14:42 (arohatha rathaJTl yama -aJTl);
- ifc see agga- (sv agga 1), jata- (sv ,/jan);- nagararp in
Ee at la VI 115,17' is wr for narakarp (Be, Ce, Se so);-
0
'-üpakarika,.f, (according to ct) a town protected with
bastions; DI 105,14 (te ukkil}l}aparikhasu okkhitta-
palighasu -asu dighasibaddhehi purisehi rakkhapenti;
Sv 274,24: idha pana tahi upakarikahi yuttani nagaran'
eva -ayo ti adhippeta); o• -üparundhana, n.,
besieging a town; Ud-a 124,18 (sattaharp -ena, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr 0 '-iiparudhanena); - 0 -üparodha, m.,
besieging a town; Spk III 8,19 (--kale);- 0 -guttika, m.,
a member of the watch; a constable; Ja III 30,9 (ayarp
-anarp kUlfthe rattapupphadamapilandhanassa vaJT!SO );
59,11 (raja sisarp assa chindatha ti -arp yeva al}apesi);
Mil 345,8 (bhikkhii bhagavato dhammanagare -a ti
vuccanti); As 112,22 (-o nagaramajjhe singhatake
nisinno . . . agatagataJTl janaJTl upadhareti vavatthapeti);
Mhv 10:81; - o -ghiita, m., plundering of a town; DI
135,9; III 68,s; - 0 -jotaka, m., an illuminator of the
0
town; Mil 343,2s; -patisaiikharaJ}.iya, mfn.,
connected with repairs to the city; Pv-a 141,7 (-anaJTl
darünaJTl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -patisankhariyanaJTl); -
0
-patisañkhiiriipana, n., organising repairs to the city;
Ps IV 71,10 (-'-atthaya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
o -parisankharapan '); o -patisañkhiirika (and
0
-patisailkhariya ?), mfn., for repairs to the city; V in III
nagari
43,1 (devagahadaruni -ani apadatthaya nikkhittani);
Pv-a 141,7 ( -patisaii.khariyanal!l darunal!l, Ee so; Be,
0
Ce, Se 0 -patisaii.kharaJ?.iyanal!l); - 0
-bandhana, n.,
restraint in a town; restriction to a town; Vin III 47,9;
Nidd I 403,3;- 0 -mapaka, m., one who plans or builds
a town; Ja VI 51,21' (chekehi -ehi); - 0 -mapana, n.,
building a town; Ja VI 431,12 (--ghanal!l, Ce, Se so; Be,
0
Ee -mapitatthanal!l); Pj II 353,16 (-'-okas~
pariyesamana); - 0
-rakkhaka, mj(-a, -ika)., who
guards the city; Ps III 80,26 (0 -rakkhikadevatanal!l, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee --devatanal!l); - 0
-rundhana, n.,
besieging the city; Ud-a 124,16 (--kammanissandena); -
0
-Vasi(n), mf(n). [nagara + vasi(n) 2], (who is) a city-
dweller; Jai 257,28 (-ino janapadavasin~ dhitaral!l
varetva); II 181,21 (gamavasi ca -i ca ti dve viiJ?.ija mitta
ahesul!l); 181,22 Hssa); Vism 119,3o Hnal!l
rajaku1üpakattheranal!l); Dhp-a III 89,s (gamavasi ...
-il!l ah a); Ap-a 300,15 (-Ihi saddhil!l): Sadd 791 ,25 (poñ
-inal!l katha);- -vasika, mf(n). [nagara + vasika2], id.,
0
Ja 1221,3 (ah~ t~ -~ vañcemi ti); VI 166,3o (-an~
ca attano ca bhariyan~ paridevanal!l sutva); Sp 1131 ,32;
- o -sobhal}ii, o -sobhanl are wrr in E e for o -sobhini qv;
0
- -sobhini,f, a prostitute; Abh 233 (gaJ?.ika vesiya 000
-i); Ja III 435,3o (Sulasa nama -i pañcasata-
VaJ?.J?.adasiparivara ahosi sahassena rattil!l gacchati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr 0 -sobhanl); Dhp-a I 174,7 (-iyo hi
dhitar~ patijagganti na putt~); II 35,14 (cattaro
setthiputta hutva ekal!l -il!l gaJ?.ikal!l uyyan~ netva);-
anagara, n., not a town; no longer a town; an
uninhabited town; A 1 160,1 (ko paccayo yen' etarahi
manussanal!l khayo hoti . . . nigama pi anigama honti
nagara pi -a honti oo.); Ps II 116,22 (coranagar~ -~
karissaml ti); see also ujjaii.galanagaraka
(sv ujjaii.ga1a), kw;l<;lanagaraka, nagañ.
nagari,f [ts], a town, a city; Abh 198 (nagaram itthl va);
PsI 59,27 (Savatthl ti Savatthassa isino nivasaghana-
bhüta -!) = Patis-a 532,18; Patis-a 609,27 (baraJ?.asa nama
nad!, barliJ?.asaya avidüre bhava -1 BariiJ?.asi).
nagga, mfn. and m. [S. nagna], l. (mfn.) naked; Abh 734
(-o digambaro ); Vin I 293,2o (bhikkhuniyo 00. vesiyahi
saddhil!l -a ekatitthe nahayanti); III 212,13 (kathal!l hi
nama bhikkhü -a agacchissanti nanu nama tiJ?.ena va
paJ?.J?.ena va paticchadetva agantabban ti); 253,32 (satiya
vassikasatikaya -o kayal!l ovassapeti apatti dukkatassa);
IV 92,8 (ace1ako nama yo koci paribbajakasamapanno
-o); M 1 79,30* (-o na e' aggim aslno); SI 66,30* (-o
musavadi gaJ?.assa sattha); Pv 19:1 (-o dubbaJ?.J?.arüpo si
kiso dhamanisanthato); Th! 133 (puttasoken' ahal!l aga
khittacitta visaññini -a pakiJ?.J?.akesi ca); Ja 1 206,22
(so . . . satthu purato -o aghasi, manussa dhi dhi ti
ah~su); V 16,3* (yal!l ve pivitva acelo va -o careyya
game); 82,21 * (hitva gharal!l pabbajito acelo -o muJ?.<;Io
cara ti ghasahetu); VI 508,17* (-a nad! anodaka -al!l
raghal!l arajik~); Mil 220,25 (ummattako khittacitto ...
-o pi ratiya carati); Sp 1021,10 (-o va ajivakan~
upassayal!l gacchati); Dhp-a II 60,25 (tv~ pañcapaJ?.J?.asa
vassani gütham eva khadi bhümiyal!l yeva nipaJJI -o
hutva vicari talaghikhaJ?.<;Iena kese luñci); Pv-a 106,6
0
( -tta); Mhv 38:11 O (-al!l katvana raJan~
sasaii.kha1ikabandhan~); - 2. (m.) a naked ascetic;
500 naiigala
Abh 1110 (-o tv ace1ake pi ca); Ja VI 241,18 (deva ma
-assa micchadiqhikassa vacanal!l gaJ?.hi);- -cariya,f,
0
going about naked, the practice of nakedness; Dhp 141;
-
0
-bhogga, mfn. [nagga + bhogga 1; see A.L. Basham,
1951, p. 105], naked and crooked or crippled; Ja V 75,14
(so samuddato uttaritva -o tasmil!l pagane bhikkhaya
cari, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be 0 -bhogo); VI 225,14 (-~
nissirlk~ andhabal~ ajivikal!l pucchi, Be. Ce, Ee so;
Se o -bhogal!l); 231,14 (nillajjal!l -~ ajivikal!l
upasailkamitva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -bhogal!l): Spk III
100,7 (kasma -~ nissiñkal!l nigaJ?.thal!l upasaii.kami ti;
cfSpk-t [Be] II 377,2o: kuti1ajjhasayataya bhoggal!l); -
naggabhogga in Ee at Ja IV 160,2o is wr for nagga na
(Be, Ce, Se so).
nagganiya, n. rJrom nagga; S. *nagna + ya], nakedness;
Pv 36:50 (daharo yuva -assa bhagi; Pv-a 241,16: -assa ti
naggabhavassa);- see also naggiya.
naggayini, (m)f(n). [cfnagga], naked; Ja V 16,20*
(dubbaJ?.J?.ini -1 pa1ayini).
naggi(n), mfn. [cfnagga, AMg nagiJ?.a], naked; Pv 27:3 (te
duggata sücikaga kilanta -ino kisa; Pv-a 180,23: -ino ti
naggarüpa nicco!a).
naggika, mfn. [cfnagga, naggi(n), S. nagnaka], naked;
Pv-a 184,27 (passa naggamhase ti olokehi -a pana
amha); - see also naggiya.
naggiya, naggeyya, n. [nagga + ya], nakedness; Vin I
292,21 (asuci bhante -~ patikü1~); 305,19joll. (id~
bhante -~ . . . apacayaya viriyarambhaya s~vattati,
sadhu bhante bhagava bhikkhün~ -al!l anujanatü ti ...
na bhikkhave -~ titthiyasamadanal!l samadiyitabbal!l);
S IV 300,26 (aññatra naggeyya ca muJ?.<;Ieyya ca); Sn 249
(-al!l muJ?.<;Iiyal!l jara ... ); -se e also nagganiya.
naggiya, (m)f(n). [or = naggika, f of naggika qv;
cfS. nagnika], naked; Pv 15:12 (kenasi -a tuval!l).
naggeyya, n., see sv naggiya.
nailgara is occasional wr (in Ee) for nagara qv.
nailgala\ n. (and m. ?) [AMg id.; S. 1angala, n.; see
W. Geiger, 1954, § 45], a plough; Abh 449 (-~ ca
ha!al!l siro); Vin I 240,19 (ekena -ena kasantassa satta
sitayo gacchanti); D III 199 ,30* (na pi nlyanti -a;
Sv 965,11: -ani pi 000 na khettal!l niyanti); SI 172,23 (na
kho mayal!l passama bhoto Gotamassa yug~ va -al!l
va phalal!l va ... ); Th 43 (sumuttiko 'mhi tihi khujjakehi
asita su maya -a su maya khuddakkuddala su maya, so
read with K.R. Norman, 2007, p. 147? eds -asu; Th-a I
119,31foll.: -asü ti liilgavipallasal!l katva vuttal!l, -ehi
kasirehi ti attho); Th! 441 (vo<;lhüna -al!l ah~ sakatal!l
ca dharayami, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr te puna -~); Ja I
277,19 (tasmil!l bodhisattassa -al!l laggitva aghasi);
IV 184,7* (-ehi kasissanti); Vism 152,24 (kassako
kasitabbaghanal!l -ena paricchinditva paricched-
abbhantare kasati); Ps IV 5,12 (dve ca goJ?.e -~ ca
labhissasi); Spk I 242,31 (dasa dasa -a ekekagumba
hutva gacchanti); 255,7 (-~ bhümighanal!l bhindati
mü1asantanakani ca pada1eti); Pj II 400,25 (-ani
cha<;ldetva mahajanakayo sannipati); - o• -avatta(n), n.
[cf S. vartman], the tuming trae k of the plough; ? Th 16
(bhaddo ajañño -anl sikhi; Th-a 1 72,1: nailgalal!l va
avattayati ettha ti 0 '-avattal!l khette 0 -patho tasmil!l-ani,
gathasukhatth~ h' ettha vattani ti digh~ katva
nañ.gala
vuttaq¡); - 0 '-iivattani(n), mfn., tuming the plough;
Th 16 (bhaddo ajañño -i sikhi; Th-a I 71,31foll.:
nañgalassa pha1assa avattanako, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
avattanato);- see also nañgala2; - 0 '-isii,f, the pole
of a plough; S I 104,9 (seyyatha pi nama mahati -a evaq¡
assa SOI,l<;IO hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nañgalasisa); Ud 69,2;
Ja I 448,9 (sappo nama tata kidiso hoti ti seyyatha pi -a
ti);- 0 -katthakaraJ1a, n. or mfn., (a place) where there
has been ploughing;? S V 146,27 (ko pana te lapa
gocaro . . . ti yadidaq¡ -aq¡ 1e<;I<;Iughanan ti; Spk III
200,14: -an ti nañgalena kasikara1,1aq¡, adhuna kaghaq¡
khetta~~anan ti; Spk-~ [Be] II 470,1: nañgalena ka~~aq¡
kasitaq¡ nañga1akanhaq¡ taq¡ kariyati ettha ti -an ti) =
Ja II 59,16; - 0 -mukha, n., the opening of a conduit;
A III 64,5 (nadi pabbateyya ... tassa puriso ubhato -ani
vivareyya; Mp III 256,16: matikamukhani, tani hi
nañgalasarikkhakatta nañgalehi ca khatatta - ani ti
vuccanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee katatta); - see also
unnañgala, mukhanañgali(n).
naiigala 2 , n. [= nañgula qv], a tail;
0
'-iivattani(n), mfn., swishing its tail; Th 16 (bhaddo
ajañño -i sikhi; so K.R. Norman, 2007, p. 137); - see
also nañga1a 1.
naiigalaka, n. [nañga1a + ka2; cf S. langalaka], a small
plough; Sadd 803,2o (ko ... khuddakatthe ... dhanukaq¡
-aq¡).
naiigalaki, naiigaliki, f [cf S. lex. 1angalaki, langa1iki], a
plant, (Methonia superba ?); Ap 127,11 (satta
nañgalakipupphe akase ukkhipiq¡ ahaq¡, Be so; Ce
nañgaliki-; Ee nañgaliki-; Se nañgalaki-).
naiiguf!ha, n. [= nañgula qv; cfañgula/angunha], a tail;
Abh371; Mili 133,24 ([nago] na dante copeti na -aq¡
copeti na so1,1<;Iaq¡ copeti); A U 245,2 (siho ... antara
satthinaq¡ -aq¡ anupakkhipitva); Ud 69,6; Ja I 205,12
(maccho -aq¡ calesi); VI 339,37' (sappassa hi -aq¡
thiilaq¡ hoti sappiniya tanukaq¡); Cp 2:10:5 (nasaya
vinivijjhitva -e pinhika1,1~ake); Ps III 434,17 (sappanaq¡
hi sisato yava -a pinhi yeva hoti); Dhp-a III 42,7
(sunakho ... -aq¡ cruento); - ifc see go-; -
anaiiguf!ha, mfn., without a tail; Ja III 335,12*.
naiigula, n. [S. !angula, langiila], a tail; Mil 394,10
(vicchiko nañgulavudho -aq¡ ussapetva carati, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se nañgughavudho nañgunhaq¡); Th-a I 237,32
(gunnaq¡ viya -aq¡ nañgunhaq¡ etesan ti gonañgula);-
ifc see go-;- see also nañgunha.
nacca, n. (and -ii, f ?) [S. nrtya], dancing; acting;
Abh 100 (-aq¡ nagaq¡ ca na~anaq¡); Vin I 269,2 (Salavati
ga1,1ika na cirass' eva padakkhii.1a ahosi -e ca gite ca
vadite ca); IV 267,29 (ya pana bhikkhu1,1i -aq¡ va gitaq¡
va vaditaq¡ va dassanaya gaccheyya pacittiyan ti); D II
159,21 (bhagavato sañraq¡ -ehi gitehi vaditehi malehi
gandhehi sakkaronta); A I 261,4 (ummattakaq¡ idaq¡
bhikkhave ariyassa vinaye yadidaq¡ -aq¡); Vv 64:21
(yada ca gitani ca vaditani ca -ani cemani samenti
ekato); Ja III 223,4* (na-y-idha -aq¡ va gitaq¡ va talaq¡ va
susamallitaq¡); Ap 147,26 (-e gite ca yutto 'haq¡, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be naccagite payutto); 432,17 (tattha dibbehi -ehi
gitehi vaditehi ca ramissati); Sp 95,8 (pabbatanaq¡ -ehi
devatanaq¡ sadhukarehi); 925,12 (na~adayo va naccantu
so1,1<;Ia va antamaso morasuvamakka~adayo pi sabbaq¡
501 na cea ti
p'etaq¡ -am eva); Sv 77,22 (attana naccananaccapanadi-
vasena -a ca gita ca vadita ca); 213,3o (aho hiyyo
nakkhattaq¡ manapaq¡ ahosi aho -aq¡ aho gitan ti); Pj II
113,17 (tasaq¡ mahallakabhavena a~~ikiJanasadisaq¡ -aq¡
disva); Sadd 850,5 (naccanaq¡ anaccittha ti va -aq¡); -
o• -issarii,f, a mistress of dance, an accomplished
dancer; Sadd 730,3 (adhi nacce Gotami -a Gotami ti
attho); - 0
-gita, n. sg. and pl. (and f ?), singing and
dancing; D III 184,26* (-aq¡ divasoppaq¡); Vv 63:34
(ramami -ehi accharahi purakkhato ); 81:10 (ramasi
ratisampanno -e suvadite) f. Ja VI 222,9* (Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se -esu vadite, prob. wr); Th 893 (sameto -ehi
sammatajappabodhano); Ja V 261,23 (sabbe turiyani
pagga1,1hiq¡su nanappakarani -ani pavattayiq¡su);
VI 119,11* (upetaq¡ annapanehi -ehi ci.ibhayaq¡); 120,3*
(-a suvadita; 120,24'foll.: nanappakarani naccani e' eva
gitani ca aparesaq¡ pi turiyanaq¡ suvaditani e' ettha
pavattanti); Ap 125,4 (kusala -assa); Dhp-a III 79,16
(sapi itthi rañgamajjhaq¡ otaritva -aq¡ dassetuq¡ arabhi);
Mhv 64:4 (-asu).
naccaka, m., -i,f [nacca + ka2; cf S. nartaka], a dancer;
an actor; Vin III 180,35 (-iq¡ evaq¡ vadanti idha bhagini
naccassi.i ti, Be, E e so; Ce, Se naccantiq¡); Ap 358,7 (nata
ca -a bah u); Mil191 ,5 (na~aka -a lañghaka); Th-a II
110,6 (aññataraq¡ -iq¡ mahapathe turiyesu vajjantesu
naccantiq¡ disva); Mhv 30:91 (-a devata e' eva
turiyavadakadevata).
naccati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nrtyati], dances; acts on the stage;
Dhatum 52 (nacca naccane); Vin III 180,35 (rañgamajjhe
pi sañgha~iq¡ pattharitva naccakiq¡ evaq¡ vadanti idha
bhagini -as su ti); M I 337 ,27* (acchara tattha -anti); S I
170,24* (tucchakoghasmi mi.isika ussojhikaya -anti);
V 170,5 (janapadakalyill,li -ati gayati ti); Vv 18:13
(handa -ama gayama handa taq¡ ramayamase); 50:1
(hatthe pacte ca viggayha -asi); Th 267 (alañkata
suvasana malini candanusssada majjhe mahapathe nañ
turiye -ati nagaki); Ja III 127,9 (ekaq¡ mayi.irarajanaq¡
gahetva yatha . . . pill,lippaharasaddena -ati evaq¡
sikkhapetva); IV 252,9 (raja ... kinnare gayatha -atha ti
aha); 252,2o· (-eyyuq¡ e' eva gayeyyuq¡ ca); 458,22 (sve
nagaraja rajañga1,1e -issati); VI 191,24 (naga ... supa1,11,1e
disva bhita na -anti ñatake disva 1ajjamana); Ap 3,27
(sikhino tattha -antu); Sadd 480,3 (nata gattaviname: ...
-ati); - part.pr. (a) naccanta, mfi -anti)n., Ja I 207,16
(moro . . . pakkhe pasaretva -ituq¡ arabhi -anto
appa~icchanno ahosi); IV 324,8 (na~asahassani . . . -anta
rajanaq¡ hasapetuq¡ nasakkhiq¡su); V 12,19 (ekena
hatthena -anto ekena maq¡saq¡ khadanto); Dhp-a II
131,2 (sa -anti vi ya tunhapahanha vihi kogeti); Th-a II
77,3 (mayi.irasañgha ca meghagajjitaq¡ sutva hanhatunha
kekasaddaq¡ muncanta tattha tattha padese -anta
vicaranti); Bv-a 56,36 (ayaq¡ mahapa~havi pitiya -anti
viya akampittha ti); - (b) naccamana, mfn., Vv 38:2;
Ja I 394,24' (janapadakalya1,1iya -amanaya); Dhp-a III
234,8; - aor. 3 sg. nacci, A IV 263,2o (eka va gayi eka
va -i); Ja IV 284,3; 3 pl. (a) nacciq¡su, Ja II 254,4;
IV 252,13; Bv-a 80,19*; (b) anaccuq¡, Th 164 (anaccuq¡
tattha gandhabba) = JaU 334,6*; 1 pl. anaccimha,
naccimha, Ja I 362,18* (apayirnha anaccirnha agayimha;
362,2r: hatthapade lajenta -irnha); - inf naccituq¡, Ja I
 naccana
292,22 (ah~ ayya tumhesu vi~a¡p vadentesu -itu¡p
icchaml ti); - absol. naccitva, Vv 32:2; Ja I 362,6; -
pass. aor. 3. sg. (or act. ?), anaccittha, Sadd 850,5
(naccan~ anaccittha ti va nacca¡p);
pp naccita, (mj)n. [or of caus., cf S. nartita], dancing; Ja I
207,28" (hirottappa¡p bhinditva -itabhaven' eva); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) nacceti, -ayati, Sn 682 (bhujani
porhenti ca -ayanti ca) = Bv 1:36 (Ev-a 41,4: aññe
-ayanti saya¡p ca naccanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se aññe ca
naccapenti); - part.pr. naccenta, mfn., DI 135,27
(manussa ca muda modamana ure putte -enta
aparutaghara maññe viharissanti ti) f. Ja III 374,20" (Be,
Se so; Ce naccapenta; Ee wr putta naccanta); -
naccentehi in Ee at Sv 707,22 is wr for naccantehi (Be,
Ce, Se so); - aor. 3 pl. naccayu¡p, Ja IV 464,31*
(nagakañña ca -ayu¡p); - absol. naccetva, Dhp-a III
231,14 (-etva gayapeti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se naccapetva);-
(b)nacdipeti, Bv-a41,4 (aññe ca -enti, Be, Se so; Ce,
E e naccayanti); - part.pr. naccapenta, mf( -enti)n.,
Vism 305,15 (ure -entl, Be, Ce so; Ee wr nacchapenti; Se
nipajjapento); Sp 1201,23; - aor. 3 sg. naccapesi, Ja IV
458,26; ah sol. naccapetva, Dhp-a III 231,14
(mahantam ph~a¡p ukkhipitva dhitar~ tasmi¡p
thapetva -etva gayapesi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee naccetva).
naccana, n., -a, f [from naccati], dancing; acting;
Vv-a 135,12 ( 0 -gltavadite ti ettha -a ti vibhattilopo kato,
nacce ca gite ca vadite ca ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nacca ti; ad Vv 32:4: Be, Ce naccana-; Ee, Se nacca- );
282,1 (-ena yathadhigate hassadirase, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
-e); 315,14 (-e ca gayane ca); Pv-a231,18 (kaplna¡p
vanarana¡p -en a Kapinaccana ti laddhavohare padese );
- ifc see nata-; - 0
-nacdipana, n., dancing and
making dance; Sv 77,22 (attana --vasena nacca) f.
Spk III 304,9; - 0 -mayüra, m., a peacock dancing;
Dhp-a I 394,14 (pabbataküte thatva -o vi ya khayati).
naccapana, n. [from naccapeti, caus. of naccati], causing
to dance, inviting to dance; Dhp-a III 232,1o (ajja
Erakapattassa dhltara¡p ph~e katva --divaso);- ifc see
naccana-.
nacchapenti in Ee at Vism 305,15 is wr for naccapentl
(Be, Ce so).
najja, sg. gen.ldat. and loe. ofnad1 qv.
najjayo, pi. nom. ofnad1 qv.
najjuha, najjüha, m. [cf S. datyüha, natyüha], a kind of
bird, a gallinule; a moorhen; Ja VI 528,31* (-a
kokilasangha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce najjüha); 538,8* (baka
ba1aka -a, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se najjüha); 539,14* (-a
j1vaj1vaka, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce najjüha); - see also
datyüha.
najjo, pi. nom. acc. ofnad1 qv.
nafa, m. [ts], a dancer; an acrobat; an entertainer;
Abh 101 (na¡¡ako natako -o); Vin IV 285,16 (-a pi
nataka pi langhika pi sokajjhayika pi kumbhathünika pi;
Sp 931,1: -a nama ye natak~ na¡enti); S IV 306,19 (yo
so -o rangamajjhe samajjamajjhe sacca1ikena jana¡p
haseti rameti); Jalii 61,24 (-e sikkhapenti pa¡hama¡p
gath~ vatva); IV 313,19* (na te -a no pana k1janeyya);
VI 410,27 (g1tani . . . kav1na¡p santika -a sikkhitva
samajjama~qa1e gay1¡psu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
natakitthiyo ); Nidd 1 88,5 (-a¡p passanti; Nidd-a I 217,2:
502 na ti
-an ti natakadi¡p, Be so; Ce, Ee na¡anatikadi¡p; Se
natanatakadi¡p); Ap 358,7 (-a ca naccaka bahü); 474,23
(paribbhama¡p bhavabhave railgamajjhe yatha -o);
Sv 704,33 (-a nama nillajja honti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
nataka); 707,22 (-ehi nama naccantehi gayantehi
vadentehi); 0
-naccana, n., the dancing of
entertainers; Pj I 167,17 (na -'-adidassanatth~, Be, Ce
so; Ee natana¡rakadi-; Se na¡¡ana¡akadi-);- 0 -nattaka-
gayana. m.pl., dancers, acrobats and singers; Ja VI
276,27* (-e pa~issare kumbhathünike ma~imhi passa
nimitt~, Ce, Ee so; Be 0 -natakagayino; Se na¡¡ana¡¡aka-
gayake) f. 580,25* (-a, E e so; Be -gayino; Ce -gayaka; Se
na¡¡anatakagayika); - anata, m., not (being) an
entertainer; Ja II 421,21* (nana¡o nakutühalo müjhesu
labhate labha¡p; 422,9· foil.: labha¡p uppadentena na¡ena
viya bhavitabba¡p yatha nato hirottappa¡p pahaya
naccagitavaditehi klja¡p katva dhana¡p s~harati evam
eva ... yo eva¡p -o so müjhesu 1abha¡p na labhati).
nafaka, m. [nata+ ka2; S. lex. id.], a dancer; an acrobat;
an entertainer; Abh 101 (na¡¡ako -o nato); Vin IV 285,16
(nata pi -a pi lailghika pi sokajjhayika pi kumbhathünika
pi; Sp 931,1: -a nama ye naccanti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
na¡aka); Ap 358,8 (-a nataka e' eva); Mil 331,14 (-a
naccaka lailghaka); Sv 742,2o (eko kira -o suvapotak~
gahetva sikkhapento vicarati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
natag~o) = PsI 228,23 (Be so; Ce, Ee nataga~o; Se
nato);- 0 -gayaka, m.pl., dancers and singers; Pv-a 3,24
(-· -ad1na¡p);- see also nataka.
nata ti, na¡eti, natayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup natati, natayati,
Wg §§ 9:23, 19:19, 32:12 ], dances; Dhatup 87 (nata
natye); 558; Dhatum 104 (na¡a nacce); 784; V v-a 210,1
(naccasl ti -asi); Sadd 352,21 (na¡a natiya¡p: -ati na¡o
na¡ak~); 531,26 (nata avassandane: ... -eti -ayati); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. nateti, acts, performs; Sp 620,26 (lasenti
ti ... Jasiyanatak~ -en ti; Sp-¡ [Be] II 373,2: abhinay~
dassenti ti attho ); 931,1 (nata nama ye na¡aka¡p -enti).
natana, n. [ts], dancing; Abh 100 (nacca¡p na¡¡~ ca
-a¡p).
nafta, n. [S. nrtta], dancing; Abh 100 (nacca¡p -a¡p ca
natan~); Sadd 850,5 (naccana¡p anaccittha ti va nacca¡p
eva¡p -~); 853,2 (nace~ -a¡p).
nattaka, m.n., na¡¡aki,f [cf S. nartaka, nartakl], l. (m.f) a
dancer, an acrobat; Abh 1O1 (-o natako nato); Th 267
(alankata suvasana malin1 candanussada majjhe
mahapathe nañ turiye naccati -1, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
natak1; Th-a II 110,27: -1 ti ... eka nañ natakitthl, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee naccakl ti); - 2. (n.) a dancing or acrobatic
performance; a play; Nidd-a I 411,3o (natakan ti
abhinaya¡p dassetva ugg~hapana¡p, -an ti pi parho);-
see also natana¡¡akagayana (sv na¡a), nataka.
nattha, mfn.,pp ofnassati qv.
nata, mfn. and n.,pp ofnamati 1 qv.
nati 1, f [ts], bending, bent, inclination; MI 115,22 (y~
yad eva bhikkhave bhikkhu bahul~ anuvitakketi
anuvicareti tatha tatha -i hoti cetaso); III 266,7
(passaddhiya sati -i na hoti -iya asati agatigati na hoti;
Ps V 83,4: -1 ti ta~ha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ta~hanati) =
Ud 81,7 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se rati ... ratiya ... ; Ud-a 398,18:
kamabhavad1su namanato -1 ti laddhanama ta~ha, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nata ti, perhaps wr); S II 67,4 (tasmi¡p
na ti
patighite viñña~e viril!he -i hoti -iya sati agatigati hoti,
Be, Ce, Se so; E e natya; Spk II 72,11 foil.: -I ti t~ha, sa
pi piyarilpesu rüpadlsu namanaghena -i ti vuccati).
nate, f [S. nrti? or = nati 1 ?], dancing; Sadd 352,21 (na!a
-iyarp: na!ati).
natta, n. [S. nakta], night; Nidd II 235,28 (-al!~, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se rattarp); - nattamahal!l, by day and night;
Sn 1070 (t~hakkhayarp nattamahabhipassa, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se rattamahabhipassa; Nidd II 235,28: nattal!l vuccati
ratti aho ti divaso, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se rattarp.; Pj II 593,27:
rattindivarp nibbanarp vibhütal!l katva passa); -
o• -andha, nattamandha, mfn. [S. naktandha], night-blind;
Ja IV 429,2* (nattamandho va rilpani thullani-m-
anupassati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se rattimandho; 429,14'/oll.:
nattamandho ti -o . . . yatha -o rattika~o rattirp.
candobhasadihi thülarüpan' eva passati sukhumani
passitul!l na sakkoti, Ce, Ee so; Be rattimandho ti
rattandho ... yatha rattandho rattik~o; Se rattimandho ti
ratti-andho ... rattandho rattandhak~o ... ).
natta(r), mj (and natta,f) [S. naptrl (iic often nattu- ), a
grandchild; Abh 247 (-a vutto paputto ); V in I 153,7 foll.
(Visakhaya Migaramatuya -a bhikkhü upasaiikamitva
pabbajarp yaci ... bhikkhü ... Visakhaya Migaramatuya
-ara~!~ etad avocurp.); Ud 91,14/oll. (Visakhaya Migara-
matuya -a kalankata hoti ... iccheyyasi tvarp Visakhe
yavatika Savatthiya manussa tavatike putte ca -aro ca
ti ... alarp me bhante tava bahukehi puttehi ca -arehi ca
ti); Ja I 60,24 (ito paghaya me -a Rahu1akumaro yeva
nama hotü ti, Be, Ce so; Se Rahulakumaro tveva; Ee me
-u .. . namarp hotü ti); lli 427,1 (mama -u
amara~akararp karissami ti); VI 587 ,8' (-aro su~isa putto
raja devi ca ekato ); Sp 91,25 (putto pi me Mahindatthero
-a ca Sumanasama~ero); Dhp-a III 279,5 (sace panayarp.
ettako jano tava -aya sadiso bhaveyya, Be, Se so; Ce
dantaya; Ee dattaya; c.f278,!7: puttassa dhltararp.
Sudattarp. nama kumarikal!l, Be so; Ce Danta nama; Ee
Datta nama; Se Sudattil!l nama); 363,18 (Sumanadeviya
-aya .. . sotapattiphalüpanissayarp. disva); Mhv 15:169
(-a te karessati imal!l); Sadd 200,6.foll. (nattadini na
kevalarp. pullingani yeva honti atha kho itthilingani pi,
tatha hi Visakhaya ... -a kalankata hoti); - (nattu)-
tta, n., abstr., the being a grandson; Mhv 6:32; -
(nattu)-dhita(r),f, the daughter of a grandchild;
Pv-a 17,6; (nattu)-panattaka, -panattuka,
(natta)-panattaka, m.pl., grandchildren and greaf-grand-
children; Sv 956,12 (sahayassa puttadh!taro paja nama,
tesarp pana puttadh!taro ca -a ca aparapaja nama, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se puttadhitaro ca natta ca nattaka ca); Ps IV
193,24 (tassa puttadhitaro nattupanattuka, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se nattapanattaka); - (nattu)-matta, (natta)-matta, m.,
one who is like a grandson, who is the age or status of
one's grandson; MI 460,15 (ime pan' amhakarp.
puttamatta maññe nattamatta maññe amhe ovaditabbarp
anusasitabbarp. maññantl ti) = A II 124,5; Ja VI 404,27
(aharp daharo tumhakarp -o ma marp vandatha ti);
Sv 292,3o (so nama attano --bhaval!l pi appattassa, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nattubhavarp); Dhp-a IV 176,18 (attano -e
pi appahonte cattaro kumarake gahetva); 178,9 (attano
-e vandanto vicarati).
nattaka, nattuka, m. [natta(r) + ka2], a grandson; Pj II
503 natthisambhava
102,8 (idani mayharp. -o Bara~asiyarp rajjarp. kareti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee nattuko) = Ap-a 180,2 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nattuko).
nattana, n. [S. nartana], dancing; Abh 100 (naccarp.
na!!arp. ca na!anarp. -al!~).
nattamala, m. [S. naktamala], a free; SAF: Indian beech,
the free Pongamia pinnata (L.); Abh 567 (-o karañjo);
Vin I 201,14 (0 -kasavarp.); Sp 1090,4 (-an ti karañjarp.).
nattli,f, see sv natta(r).
nattuka, m., see sv nattaka.
natthi, ind. [na+ atthi 1; S. nasti], it is not; there is not;-
see natthika, natthita, natthidhamma, natthibhava,
natthisambhava.
natthika, m(jn). [S. nastika], an unbeliever (in the
existence or efficacy o.f good conduct, in the existence o.f
another world, etc); a scepfic; S I 96,6* (-o hoti rosako );
-
0
-ditlhi,f and mfn., l.lf.) the view o.f an unbeliever,
scepticism; Pe! 40,14; Mp II 23,20 (ahetukadiHhi akiriya-
dighi -I ti); Pv-a 244,31; - 2. (mfn.) holding the view of
an unbeliever; Sn 243 (-1 vi sama durannaya); Vv 84:25;
0
- -ditlhika, mfn .. holding the view o.f an unbeliever,
sceptical; Pv-a 99,24 (-o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -diHhi);-
0
-vada, mfn., pro.fessing the doctrine of an unbeliever;
MI 403,9 (dussilo purisapuggalo micchadirthi --vado
ti); III 78,14 (ahetuvada akiriyavada --vada ti; Ps IV
136,w: natthi dinnan ti adivadino ); S III 73,4;
Pv-a 215,1z; - 0
-vadi(n), mfn., id.; Sv 1036,3 (miccha-
dirthi ti -i ahetukavadi akiriyavadi);- see also atthika2.
natthita, f [S. nastita], non-existence; absence; S II
!7,s.foll. (dvayanissito ... loko yebhuyyena atthitarp
e' eva -arp. ca . . . lokasamudayarp. . . . yathabhütarp
sammappaññaya passato ya 1oke -a sa na hoti; Spk II
32,22.foll.: atthitan ti sassatarp -an ti ucchedarp. ... ya
natthi ti ucchedadiHhi uppajjeyya sana hoti ti attho ); Ja I
147,19 (Devadatto attano abuddhabhavena
khantimettanuddayanarp. ca -aya); V JI 0,5 (etasmil!l
kulavake kassaci atthitarp. va -arp. va janahi ti);
Vism 707,3o (anta nirodhe mara~assa -aya); Sv 379,21
(paññacakkhuno -aya andha); Ps II 380,34 (-ay' eva hite
na upa1abbhanti na pa!icchannataya); Sadd 67,31 (abhavo
ti ... suññata -a); -se e also atthita.
natthidhamma, m. [natthi + dhamma 1], a non-existent
thing; Mil 270,17 (tena hi bhante Nagasena tumhe -al!~
nibbanarp apadisatha, natthi nibbanan ti); Nidd-a I
151,23 foil. (aja~akaso ti paññattiya -arp. pa!icca
kathanarp viya mato ti paññatti jivitindriyasankhatarp.
-arp. pa!icca kathlyati).
natthibhava, m. [natthi + bhava], non-existence; absence;
Kv 159,15; Ja II 136,16' (antoko!!he vlhlnarp -am
janamana); Sp 744,7 (tarp maha-aghakathayarp. natthi, -o
yeva e' assa yutto); Ps ll 368,7 (sukhaya vedanaya
atthibhavo sukharp. -o dukkharp.); Dhp-a III 202,6 (ajja
no loke arahantanarp. -o ñata ti); 324,16 (sabbe pi asava
attharp. vinasarp. -arp. gacchantl ti); Sadd 71,27 (-o ti
natthita avijjamanata vivittata rittata tucchata suññata);
- se e also atthibhava.
natthisambhava, mfn. [natthi + sambhava], whose origin
or coming into being is non-existent; Khp 6:14 (khl~arp
puranam navarp. -arp.; or read natthi sambhavarp.; Pj I
194,16: navan ti sampativattamanarp. -an ti
natthu
avijjamanapatubhavaq¡) = Sn 235.
natthu, n. (?) [cf S. nas, S. !ex. nasta], l. the nose;
Abh 150 (-u tu nasa ca nasika);- natthuto [cf S. nastas,
nastatas], into the nose; Vin I 271,33 (sappi -uto dinnaq¡
mukhato uggacchi); Ja V 166,18* (te bandhana
mocayiq¡su yaq¡ -uto pa!imokkh' assa pase); - 2. a
stemutatory; ? V in I 204,14 (-u ga1ati); 204,21 (-uq¡
visamaq¡ asiñcanti anuJanami bhikkhave
yamakanatthukanu.lin ti); IIl 83,2 (aññatarassa bhikkhuno
sisabhitapo hoti tassa bhikkhü -uq¡ adaq¡su); -
a -kamma, n. [cf S. nastal).karman, nasyakarman,
BHS nastakar~a, nastakarman], treatment through the
nose; applying a stemutatory; V in I 204,14 (anujanami
bhikkhave -an ti); 272,11 (Jivako ... sattavassikaq¡
sisabadhaq¡ eken' eva -ena apaka<;l<;lhi); DI 12,8
(k~l_late1aq¡ nettatappanaq¡ -aq¡ añjanaq¡; Sv 98,15:
te1aq¡ yojetva -kar~aq¡); MI 511,17 (tassa so bhisakko
0
sallakatto bhesajjaq¡ kareyya uddhavirecanaq¡ ... -aq¡);
Dhp-a I 12,3 (kiq¡ bhante -aq¡ katan ti pucchi); -
0
-karaJ}.I,f, a nose-dropper; Vin I 204,15/oll.
(anujanami bhikkhave -in ti ... na bhikkhave uccavaca
-1 dharetabba); Sp 843,17 (-iya diyyamanaq¡, Be, Ce so;
Ee -Iya; Se -Iyaq¡); 1091,14 (yamakanatthukar~in ti
samasotahi dvihi pi naFkahi ekaq¡ -iq¡);- 0 -diina, n., a
nose-dropper; ? Sp 1240,28.
natthuka, m. [natthu + ka2], a handkerchief; Ap 303,24
(uttarasali.gasai!gha!if!l -aq¡ mukhasodhanaq¡); 313,23
(-e sugate datva).
nada ti, nadeti 1, nadayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nadati], makes a
(loud) sound; cries; roars; Dhatup 153 (nada
avyattasadde); Dhatum 223; DI 175,3 (sihanadaq¡ kho
sam~o Gotamo -ati taq¡ ca kho suññagare -ati no
parisasü ti); MI 71,17 (tathagato ... parisasu sihanadaq¡
-ati brahmacakkaq¡ pavatteti); A I 187,36/oll. Uarasigalo
sihanadaq¡ -issami ti sega1akaq¡ yeva -ati bhera1_1<;lakaq¡
yeva -ati); Sn 562 (yatha bhasati cakkhuma ... siho va
-an vane); Th 211 (-anti mora susikha supekhu1_1a); Ja II
110,12* (paruto sihacammena jammo -ati gadrabho);
245,3 (so yasmiq¡ sihe nisinno tassa -ahi ti padena
saññaq¡ adasi); VI 21,22* (-antu bheñ sannaddha);
Ap 367,32 (siha vyaggha varaba ca . . . giriduggamhi
nadenti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee giriduggaq¡ pi); 426,21 (na
tesaq¡ janu -ati); Mil 76,2 (hatthi kadaci karahaci
koñcanadaq¡ -an ti); Sadd 375,26 (nada avyattasadde:
siho -ati); 543,11 (nada bhasayaq¡: nadeti nadayati,
hetukatturüpani ti na vattabbani); part.pr.
(a) nada(t), mfn., S III 85,2 (sihassa migarañño -ato);
Sn 684; Ja V 310,12*; Ap 28,19 (tasanti titthiya sabbe
-ato te mahamuni); (b) nadanta, mfl-anti)n., Thp. 1,3*
(sihanaq¡ va -antanaq¡ da!hinaq¡ girigabbhare); Ja V
270,24' (nirayapa1a pana -anta vagganta); VI 570,29
(sa ... sihanadaq¡ -anti); Nidd I 467,6 (kujjanto -anto
saddaq¡ karonto); (e) nadamana, mfn., Sv 366,n; - aor.
3 sg. nadi, anadi, D III 23,31 (siho ... sihanadaq¡ -i);
24,1s (anadi); 2 sg. nadi, Ja II 109,8* (ma tvaq¡ -i);
3 pl. (a) nadiq¡su, Ja VI 586,27 (pabbata -iq¡su);
Ud-a 328,13 (devabheriyo -iq¡su); (b) anadisuq¡, Ja IV
349,28* (sükara ... mahanadam anadisuq¡, Ce, E e so; Be
panadisuq¡; Se anadiq¡su); (e) nadayiq¡su, Ap 472,19
(dundubbhiyo nadayiq¡su amanusa; Ap-a 506,22: saddaq¡
504 na di
kariq¡su);- inf nadituq¡, Ja II 109,11 (so -ituq¡ nama na
ussahi); Mp II 304,7; - absol. (a) naditva, S IIl 84,26;
Ja I 336,21' (kaja-usabha . . . yujjhanakaraq¡ dassetva
-itva gajjitva); Bv23:25; (b)naditvana, Thp.ll5,11*
(sihanadaq¡ -1tvana buddhaputta anasava);
nadayitvana in Ee, Se at Ap 483,5 is wr for nadiyitvana
(Be, Ce so); - pp nadita, nadita 1, mfn. and n.,
l. (mfn.) (i) sounded; roared; S II 55,27 (ayasmata
bhante Sariputtena sihanado -o); Ja V 360,2s; Ap 50,21
([yena] sihanado ca nadito); - (ii) who has roared,
having roared; Ap 371,1 (-e migaraje ca [E e va) haso
me udapajjatha, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se upapajjatha); 530,11
(nadita devadundubhi); - 2. (n.) a sound; a roar; Ja II
11 O, 11 * (n' etaq¡ sihassa -aq¡); - fpp naditabba, mfn.,
A I 188,7 (usabho suññaya gosa1aya gambhiraq¡
naditabbaq¡ maññati; Mp II 304,23: jeghakavasabhassa
nadasadisaq¡ gambhiranadaq¡ naditabbaq¡ maññati); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) nadeti2 , makes resound, fills with
sound; part.pr. nadenta, mfn., Ap 5,17 (-ento
pabbataq¡ se1aq¡); - pp nadita2, mfn. [ts], resoundíng;
Ap-a 547,26 (cakkavakakukku!ahaq¡sadihi küjita ghosita
-ita sa pokkhar~l); - (b) nadapeti, makes sound;
makes roar; Ja II 245,z (yassahaq¡ pinhe nisinno taq¡
yeva -essami ti aha, tena hi -ehi yadi sakkosi ti);
Sp 182,28 (theraq¡ sihanadaq¡ -etuq¡ pucchi); -
part.pr. nadapenta, mfn., Ap-a 118,5; absol.
nadapetva, Ja IV 105,24 (sihanadaq¡ -etva).
nadana, n. [from nadati), roaring; Ja I 19,28* (yatha
nikkhantasayanassa sihassa -aq¡ dhuvaq¡) = Bv 2:113.
nadika (and nadiya), f [nadi + ka2; cf S. nadika ifc ], a
river; a small ríver; D II 129,2o (sa -a cakkacchinna
paritta luFta avi1a); 135,3* (gantvana buddho -arr
kakudhaq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nadiyaq¡ kakutthaq¡, pass.
acc. ofnadi, cjajiyaq¡ sv aji) =Ud 84,14* (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee nadiyaq¡); Ja IV 437,23 (tattha rama1_1iya -a
paripu1_11_1aka1e thanappamanodaka hutva sandati, Be, Ce
so; Se -a, sa ... ; Ee wr ram~iyaya -aya); Ap 15,7
(uttanakü1a -a; Ap-a 212,29: -a kunnadi); 173,16
(uttaritvana -aq¡ vanaq¡ gacchati cakkhuma;
Ap-a 443,34: nadi yeva -a).
nadi, f [ts] (sg. ínstr. nadiya; gen./dat. nadiya, najja;
loe. nadiyaq¡, nadiya, najja; pl. nom. nadiyo, najjo,
najjayo (and nadi ?); acc. nadiyo, najjo; see also
Sadd 203,23/oll., 649,11/oll.), a ríver; Abh 681 (sarita
apaga -i); Vin I 1,6 (tena samayena buddho bhagava
Uruvelayaq¡ viharati najja Nerañjaraya tire bodhirukkha-
mü1e pa!hamabhisambuddho ); 31,35 (te ja!ila ...
himapatasamaye najja Nerañjarayaq¡ nimujjanti pi
ummujjanti pi); 111,3 (sabba bhikkhave -i asima sabbo
samuddo asimo); III 11,27 (Payagapati!!hane Gali.gaq¡
-iq¡ uttaritva yena Barill_lasi tad avasari); D I 244,13
(ayaq¡ Aciravati -i pura udakassa samatittika
kakapeyya); SI 48,1* (yava na gadhaq¡ 1abhati -isu
ayühati sabbagattehijantu); III 202,11 (na vata vayanti na
najjo sandanti); V 53,4 (Ganga -i pacmaninna
pacinapo1_1a pacinapabbhara); A I 250,9 foil. (puriso
1ol_lapha1aq¡ Gali.gaya -iya pakkhipeyya . . . api nu sa
Ganga -i amuna 1o1_1aphalena 1o1_1a assa apeyya ti);
IV 137,18 (-i pabbateyya dürailgama slghasota
haraharini); Dhp 251 (natthi t~hasama -i); Sn 433
naddati
(-inam api sotani ay~ vato visosaye); Thi 243 (sace
ima -iyo te pap~ pubbekataJ11 vaheyyuJ11; see
Th App 11, p. 239,16foll.); Ja I 210,23 (kevaga -iya111
jal~ khipiJ11su); 313,11 (Baral)asiraja .. . -iya sisa111
nahayitva); 323,23 (so ... -iya vuyhamano); IV 438,29*
(sitodiya anuvicarama najjo); V 435,16* (sabba nadi
vaiJ.kagatl); 485,23* (na tappatl sagaro va -ihi); VI 121,6*
(najjo ca anupariyati nanapupphadumayuta; 121,22':
najjo ti vacanavipallaso, eka -i ta111 viman~
parikkhipitva gata ti); 250,13* (khara kharodika tatta
dugga Vetara!)!-!); 278,1* (najjayo suppatitthayo, Be, Ce
so; Se najayo; Ee supatighayo; 278,5·: najjayo ti -iyo)
quoted Sadd 649,14; Ja VI 359,7* (ya kaci najjo Gailgam
abhissavanti sabba va ta namagott~ jahanti); 508,17*
(nagga -i anodaka); 523,1* (na te brahmal)a gacchami
-i111 udakahariya); Ap 113,2 (Sindhuya -iya tire
cakkavako ahaJ11 tada); Bv 2:186 (yatha ya kaci -iyo
osaranti mahodadhiJ11); Mi1114,16/oll.; 277,29 (atipiirena
-i uttarati): Sp 1054,18 (-ito matikaJ11 niharanta -iya'!l
avaral)a'!l karonti); PsI 200,13 (ajja game telai]1 -i
maññe sandatl ti Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits telai]1); III 36,15
(itara tisso -iyo anupagamma); Ud-a 26,27 (nadati
sandati ti -i); Ap-a 443,33 (nadati saddai]1 karoti gacchatl
ti nadi, Be, Se so; Ee karontl; Ce omits gacchati);
Sadd 375,26/oll. (pabbatesu vanadisu nadatl ti -i, nada i
iti dhatudvayavasena pana nadantl gacchati ti -i ti pi
nibbacana111 vadanti); (nady)-ambujivana, mfn.
[S. lex. id.], thriving by river-water; Abh 188 (-o deso);
-
0
-kuñja, m. [nadi + kuñja3], a river-glen; Sv 209,27
(kandaran ti ... udakena bhinnai]1 pabbatapadesa111 ya111
nitamban ti pi -an ti pi vadanti) = Ps 11 215,23 = Mp III
201,7 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nadinikuñjan ti pi, perhaps wr)
t- Spk 11 54,22 (yo nitambo ti -o ti pi vuccati, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nikuñjo ti pi);- 0 -taral}.aka, mfn., who crosses a
river; Bv-a 98,28 (nadiJ11 taranta ti -a, naditaranta ti pi
patho); - 0 -nikuñja, m., a river-glen; Mp III 201,7
(kandaran ti ... yai]1 ... -an ti pi vadanti, Ce, E e so,
perhaps wr; Be, Se 0 -kuñjan ti pi; = Sv 209,27: eds
0
-kuñjan ti pi); - 0 -nivattana, n., a bend of the river;
Ja I 324,9 (ekasmi'!l -e pal)l)asalaJ11 mapetva vasati); -
o -püra, m., a swollen river, a river-flood; Sp 934,5 (-o
puna agato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nadi pura puna agata);
986,11 (-ena va coradihi va upaddavo); Mp 11 285,1
(udakavahako ti -o); 0
-matika, mfn. [S. lex.
nadimatrika], watered by rivers,well-watered; Abh 188;
- anadi,f, not a river; Ja 11 126,18*; - see also
anunaditire, kunnadi.
naddati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nardati, Wg § 3:19], makes a sound;
Sadd 377,4 (nadda gadda sadde: -ati gaddati).
naddha, mfn.,pp ofnayhati qv.
naddhi, nandhi,f. [cfS. naddhi, naddhñ], afastening (ofa
carriage); a strap, a thong; resentment, grudge;
Abh 526 (varatta vaddhika -i, Be so; Ce vattika nandhi);
SI 16,4* (chetva -i111 varatta111 ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nandiJ11; Spk I 53,s: -in ti upanah~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nandhin ti) t- Dhp 398 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nandhiJ11;
Dhp-a IV !6!,1: -in ti nayhanabhavena pavatt~
kodhai]1, Be, Se so; Ce nandhin ti; E e nandin ti)= Sn 622
(Be Ce, Se so; Ee nandhii]1); Ja I 175,21 (antepure kira
rathassa camm~ ca -i ca sunakhehi khadita ti, Be so;
sos nandaka
Ce nandi; Ee nandii]1; Se -ii]1); Dhp-a 1 44,6 (sakata-
dhura'!l vi ya -ina ... punappunai]1 vethenta upanayhanti,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nandina); Ps III 315,3 (-ito paghaya
rathasisa'!l paññasayojanani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nandhito); Mhv 23:6 (abajjha nandhiya).
nananda(r), nananda, f. [cf S. nanandr, nanandr], a
husband's sister; Abh 245 (-a samibhagini); Ja V
269 ,26* (ya ca bhariya ... samika'!l atimaññati sassu111 va
sasura'!l va pi jeghai]1 va pi -ar~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nanandan~); Thi-a 66,10 (attano -aya saddhiJ11 kalahaJ11
karontl).
nanipata, m., the privative prefix a- (see a3-); -
0
-pubbapada, mfn., (of a cpd.) having a- as the first
member; Sadd 751,24 (kammadharayo ... navavidho
visesanapubbapado .. . -o ... ); 752,16 (-o yatha na
brahmal)O abrahmal)O ev~ amanusso ... ); 759,3o
(bahubbihi .. . navavidho .. . -o ... ); 761,16 (-o yatha
natthi etassa samo ti asamo ).
nanu, ind. [ni+ nu 1; ts], not; is it nnt? certainly, surely:
Abh 1139 (nanu kacci nu kii]1); 1151 (virodhakathane
nanu); 1192; Vin III 16,6 (nanu nama tata Sudinna
sakai]1 gehai]1 gantabban ti); 19,34 (nanu avuso bhagavata
anekapariyayena viragaya dhammo desito no saragaya;
Sp 217,15: nanii ti anumatigahal)atthe nipato, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nanu iti); D 11 144,10 (nanu etai]1 Ananda maya
patikacc' eva akkhat~ sabbeh' eva piyehi manapehi
nanabhavo); MI 463,29 (nanu tumhe Anuruddha eva111
saddha agarasma anagariy~ pabbajita ti); Pv 8:4 (nanu
tv~ yeva dummati ti); Th 1108 (nanu ah~ citta
tayamhi yacito); Jai 151,15 (nanu maya tuyh~
abhayai]1 dinna!J1, kasma tva111 idha nipanno ti); 11 268,7*
(nanu ma!J1 suhadayo ti maññasi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
hadaye 'timaññasi); 350,15* (nanu passasi 'm~
ka)i!]1 ... kokila!J1); Bv 2:218 (nanu ritta sabbasaiJ.khara);
Mil 52,2 (nanu tal]1 ubhato chinna111 atthaJ11 gacchatl ti);
Vism 298,11 (nanu vutt~ bhagavata); Pv-a 136,27 (nanu
ca devan~ jivit~ paricchinnappamal)aJ11 vuttaJ11, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr nanüpadevan~); Bv-a 84,5 (ayutt~
nanii ti nayutt~); Sadd 93,1 (nanu vinayo buddha-
vacanaJ11); 896,3 (kacci nu nanu ice ete pucchanatthe);
902,11 (nanu ca iti accantavirodhe).
nanü in Ee at Ja II 383,12*: read na niina with Be, Ce.
nantaka, n. (pl. acc. also -e) [cf S. lex. naktaka], dirty or
ragged cloth; a rag; Abh 293 (-a111 kappato); M 11 7,15
(te susana va sailkarakuta va papal)ika va -ani uccinitva
sailghatiJ11 karitva dharenti; Ps III 239,11: -ani ti
antavirahitani vatthakhal)<;lilni yadi hi nesa111 anto
bhaveyya pilotika ti sailkhaJ11 gaccheyyuJ11, Be, Se so;
Ce, E e -ani ti na antakani antavirahitani ... sailkh~ na
gaccheyyuJ11); S V 342,16 (-ani ca dhareti); A III 187,11
(bhikkhu paJ11sukiiliko rathiyaya -a111 disva; Mp III
295,12: -an ti pi1otikakhal)<;[aJ11); Pv 27:14 (thero
saiJ.karakiitamha uccinitvana -e); Sadd 890,5 (anantakan
ti -a111 pi1otikam); - 0
-vasi(n), mfn. [nantaka +
1
vasi(n) ], wearing rags; A IV 376,12 (cal)<;iala-
kumarako ... -i, Be, Ce so; E e, Se wr nantika-); Ja III
22,1 * ( -ini);- se e al so anantaka2.
nanda in Ee at Pv-a 95,17* is wr for niina (Be, Ce, Se,
Pv 18:7 so).
nandaka, mfn. [ts], pleased, glad; Nidd-a I 418,25
nandati
(upaghakesu -esu socantesu ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nandantesu; = Vibh-a 491,14: eds nandantesu).
nandati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nandati], is pleased; is glad; enjoys;
Dhatup 136 (nanda samiddhiy3111); Dhatum 192; D II
267,8* (yatha pi muni -eyya patva sambodhim
uttama111); Ili 187,23foll. (abhaven' assa na -ati bhaven'
assa -ati); A II 239,28 (papabhikku sailghabhedena -ati);
III 40,23* (te tattha -anti ramanti modare samappita
kamagu¡;¡ehi pañcahi); IV 94,9 (na bhikkhave sapatto
sapattassa va¡;¡¡;¡avataya -ati); Dhp 18 (idha -ati pecca
-ati katapuñño ubhayattha -ati); Sn 33 (-ati puttehi
puttima; Pj II 44,11: -atl ti tussati modati); Vv 5:11
(ev3111 -e yatha aha111); Ja Ili 186,20* foil. (eva111luddaka
-assu . . . yathaham ajja -ami); 290,16* foil. (-anti
sañraghatino na ca -anti sañradharino); V 34,7* (sabbo
ca te -a tu ñatipakkho ); Patis I 58,15 (nibbindati no -a ti);
Mil 361,5 (sace so me bhante patisu¡;¡itva -ati oramati);
Sadd 380,6 (nanda samiddhiya111, akammika dhatu: -ati
puttehi ... ); - nandanti in Ee 1 at SI 110,9* is wr for
nadan ti (Be, Ce, Ei, Se so); -fu t. 3. sg. nandissati,
Spk I 32,6; 1 sg. nandissa111 1, Ap 531,28 (tasma yatha
'ha111 -iss3111 tatha tam anutitthatha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
uddissa); - part.pr. (a) nandanta, mfn., l. being glad;
Dhp-a I 153,2o; Vibh-a 491,14 (uparthakesu -antesu
socantesu ca; cfnandaka); - 2. [cf S. nandanta],
gladdening; Mp I 315,16 (ñatisailghaJ11 -anto tosento jato
ti Nandakumaro tveva nam3111 akaJ11SU, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
-ayanto) f. Th-a II 32,7 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -ento); -
(b) nandamana, mfn., Th 213 (nandamanagata111 citta111;
Th-a II 79,6foll.: -amana111 agata111, tatratatrabhinandinl
yaya111 ta¡;¡ha tassa ta111 t3111 bhava111 -aman3111
abhinandamanaJ11 citta111 im3111 bhava pi bhav3111
-amana111 anandamana111 agata111 uppannaJ11, Ce, Se so;
Ee ta111 ta111 bhava111 -amana . . . bhavavibhav3111
-amana111 ... , prob wr; Be dif.ferent); Dhp-a I 153,6; -
aor. 3 sg. nandi 2, nandittha, Ja VI 589,19' (vitta sumana
hutva ativiya anandi -ittha ti, Ce, Ee so; Be ativiya -1 ti;
Se ativiya -itva ti); 1 sg. nandissa111 2, SI 176,12* (yehi
jatehi -issa111; Spk I 261,16: nandijato turtho pamudito
ahosi111); 3 pl. nandi111su, Ja IV 357,3·; - absol.
nanditva, Mp IV 17,1 (abhinanditva ti cittena -itva); -
pp nandita, mfn., l. gladdening; liked, enjoyed; Pj II
399,7 ([vaca] patinandita ti hatthena hadayena
patimukha111 gantva -a piyayita); Th-a II !68,21
(abhinanditan ti ... aha111 maman ti abhinivissa -a111);-
ifc see bala-; - 2. (or from caus.) pleased, glad;
Ap 573,24 (-a111 asi ta111 kul3111) quoted Sadd 380,10; -
fpp nanditabba, mfn., V v-a 276,18 (sughu nanditabba-
ghoso); Sadd 848,16 (nandate nandana111 nanditabb3111 va
nandana111); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nandeti, -ayati, pleases,
makes glad; Ja IV 107,2* (tva111 ma111 -aya; 107,4·: m3111
-aya tosehi); Spk I 32,2 (pañca hi kamagu¡;¡a ... -ayanti);
Pv-a 139,18 (na pi toseti na -ayati);
part.pr. nandayanta (and nandenta), mfn., Ja VI 588,29*
(-ay anta); Mil 226,26 (-ayanto ñatisailgha111 socayanto
amittasailgha111); Mp I 315,16 (ñatisailghaJ11 -ayanto
tosento jato ti Nandakumaro tveva nam3111 ak3111su, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nandanto) f. Th-a II 32,7 (Be, Se -ento jato
ti; Ce, Ee nandanto tosento) f. Ud-a 168,4 (-ayanto jato
ti); Mhv 29:26 (-ayanto mahajanaJ11).
506 nandi
nandana, mfn., n. and -a,f rJrom nandati], l. mfn. [ts]
taking pleasure, enjoying; Th-a III 115,28 (vibhüta-
nandina ti ... vibhütai)1 va visu111bhavo bhedo ta111 -ena);
- 2. (nj) delight, pleasure, enjoyment; SI 6,10* (upadhl
hi narassa -a na hi so nandati yo nirüpadhi) = Sn 33;
Spk II 114,3 (rañjanavasena rago 0 -vasena nandi) =
Nidd-a I 96,s; - 0
-kara, mfn., producing delight;
Pv-a 190,4 (Nandane ti -e); - 0 -Vanajlitaqt in Ee at
Bv-a 275,7 is wrfor nandanavanaja ta (Be, Ce, Se so);-
0
-Vanlibhirlima , mfn., delightful as Nandanavana;
Spk lii 37,21 (-o viharo ); - o -sila, mfn., having the
habit of enjoyment; It-a II 164,3.
nandi\ nandi, .f [S. nandi, nandi], l.joy, enjoyment,
pleasure, delight; Abh 87 (santoso -i sammado); M 1
6,11 ( -i dukkhassa mülan ti, Ce, Se so; Be, E e -!); 266,32
(ya vedanasu -i tad upadanaJ11, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee -i);
Ili 32,18 (yo chando yo rago ya -i ya ta¡;¡ha, Ce, Se so;
Be, Ee -!); !88,2 (evarüpo ahosi111 atit3111 addhanan ti
tattha -i111 samanvaneti); S I 54,20* (kacci tv3111 anigho
bhikkhu atho -i na vijjati, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -I); IV 36,7
(-iya sati sarago hoti); Sn 1055 (etesu -i111 ca nivesana111
ca panujja); Th1 59 (sabbattha vihata -i tamokkhandho
padalito, E e, Se so; Be, Ce -I); Ja IV 396,27* (tattha ka -i
ka khi~~a ka rati ka dhanesana); VI 56,27* (missa111 -1hi
gacchantaJ11); 541 ,25* (-iyo mabhiklrare; 541 ,28': maJ11
somanassani abhiklranti); Patis I 58,5 (nibbindanto -i111
pajahati; Patis-a 259,23: -in ti sappltika111 ta¡;¡ha111);
Dhs 1059 (yo rago sarago anunayo anurodho -i nand1-
rago cittassa sarago, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se-!; As 362,29foll.:
yattha katthaci bhave satta etaya nandanti say3111 va
nandatl ti -1 . . . ekasmi111 aramma¡;¡e saki111 uppanna
ta¡;¡ha -1 punappuna uppajjamana nandirago ti vuccati);
Vism 289,31 (nibbidanupassanaya -ito .. . citta111
mocento); Spk II 262,2 (balavapatthanasailkhata -!);
Pj II 215,1 (tatratatrabhinandinita¡;¡hasailkhataya -iya);
Sadd 921,24 (tatra mattabhedo tava ... -i -!); - 2. a
drum announcing or accompanying proclamations;
V in III 108,3o (raja ... Licchaviyo parajesi sailgame ca -i
carati rañña Licchavl pabhagga ti; Sp 513,1: vijayabheri
ahi¡;¡~ati); Ja VI 156,33* (-i ppavesi nagaraJ11 bandhana-
mokkho aghosittha, Ce, Ee so; Be -i111 pavesi; Se
nandippavesanagar3111; 157,8'foll.: anandabheri cari, ki111
vatva ti ... sabbe bandhana muccantü ti, Be, Ce so; E e
anandabheri111 acari111su . . . sabbe bandhanani muñcantil
ti; Se anandabheri111 cari111su, kimatthaya ... sabbe
bandhanani muñcantü ti) f. 592,34* (Ce, Ee, Se nandi
ppavesi nagare; Be nandi111 pavesi nagare; 593,4·:
Vessantarassa maharajassa a¡;¡a ti nagare nandibher1 cari,
Be so; Ce bheñ cari; Ee bheri111 cari; Se nandibheri111
cari); - 3. a kind of auspicious vessel (or conch);
Sv 445,30 (satti sirivaccho -i sovatthiko vata111sako ... ;
Sv-pt II 47,1z: -I ti dakkhi¡;¡avatta111) = Ps IIl 375,12;-
see also nandiyavaga below; - nandi is a common wr
in Ee (and Ce) for naddhi (or nandhi); - 0 -y-livatta,
nandiyavatta, m. [cf S. nandyavarta, BHS nandikavarta],
l. a kind of auspicious vessel; Sp 75,11 (pahi¡;¡i ...
abhisekatthaya bahuvidha111 pa¡;¡¡;¡akara111 seyyathldaJ11
sailkha111 gailgodaka111 . . . bhiilkara111 -a111 sivika111 ... ;
Sp-t [Be] I 162,12: -an ti kakapadasa¡;¡thana
mailgalatthaJ11 kata suva¡;¡¡;¡abhajanavikati); - see also
nandi
nandi meaning 3. above; - 2. a kind of large fish; Mp II
36,8 (nava ... --macchapighen' eva gata; Mp-! III 47,14:
kujjakakulisakamacchasailghatapighen' eva); - 3. the
name of a guide-line or stategy for interpretation; (see
Ñtil;amoli, 1977, p. xlii, 'Conversion of Relishing');
Pet3,1s (pañca naya, nandiyavatto tipukkhalo ... ) =
Nett 2,9; Pe! 256,1 (nandiyavatto . . . catuhi dhammehi
neti avijjaya ca taf.!haya ca samathena ca vipassanaya
ca); Nett 7,28 (ye samathapubbailgamahi pa!ipadahi
niyyanti te nandiyavattena nayena hatabba); 113,17 (ariya
catukkamaggaJ11 paññapenti . . . nandiya bhavataf.!haya
avattanatthaJ11, ayal]1 vuccati nandiyavattassa nayassa
bhumi ti); - 0 '-üpasecana, mfn., with a sauce or
infusion of enjoying; D III 228,8 (viññaf.1al]1 ...
riipapatigha1]1 -al]1 ... vepulla1]1 apajjeyya, Be, Ce so; Ee
0
'-upavesanal]1; Se 0 '-upasevanal]1; Sv 1021,13: -an ti
lobhasahagatal]1 sampayuttaya nandiya va upasittal]1
hutva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee o• -upavesanan ti) = S III 53,11
(Be, Ce so; E e o• -upasevanal]1; Se o• -upasevana1]1)
quoted Nidd I 25,8 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se o• -upasevanaJ11;
Nidd-a I 96,2: -an ti sappitikataf.!hodakena asittaJ11
viññaf.1a1]1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee o• -upasevanan ti);
Nett 116,34 (-en a viññaf.!ena); 0
-janana, mfn.,
producing joy; Ap 45,9 (SakyiinaJ11 -o kappako ); 318,2o;
-
0
1]1-jaha,mfn., abandoning enjoying; Sn 1101 (-aJ11
oghatif.1f.1a1]1 vimuttal]1; Pj II 598,3o: anagata-
riipadipatthanajaha1]1); o -bheri,f, a drum
announcing or accompanying proclamations; Ja VI
593,4· (Vessantarassa maharajassa iif.!a ti nagare -i cari,
Be so; Ce bheñ; E e bheri1]1; Se -i1]1); Cp-a 100,3o (nagare
ca -i1]1 carapesu1]1); 0
-mukhi, (m)f(n). [cfS.
nandimukha; BHSD sv nandimukha: 'just befare the
beating of the (moming) drum'], brightjaced; ? - -i
ratti, daybreak; Vin I 288,12 (nikkhante pacchime yame
uddhate aruf.!e -iya rattiya) f. II 236,17 (Sp 1287,4:
aruf.!U!!hitakale pltimukha viya ratti khayati) f. A IV
205,9 (Mp IV 112,12: -iya ti tughamukhiya) f. Ud 27,6
(Ud-a 186,31/oll.: aruf.!appabhaya ... satte nandapana-
mukhiya vi ya rattiya jataya, vibhasamanaya ti attho ); -
0
-vattaka, n. [= nandiyavaga qv above], a kind of
auspicious vessel; Sp 75,16* (bhiilkiiraJ11 -aJ11); -
o -samanvanayana,f, the continuing, producing, of
enjoying; Ps V 3,22 (taf.!hadighippavattanasailkhata -a);
sunandighosa, mfn. [cf BHS nandigho~a,
AMg f.!andighosa], making a delightful noise; or with
noise of delight; or with a beautiful bell; Vv 64:3
(ratho ... -o; Vv-a 276,17 foll.: -o ti sughu nanditabba-
ghoso ... -o ti va sughu katanandighoso ... katapamoda-
ninnado ti attho);- sunandi in Ee at S II 53,9foll.: read
vedanasu nandi with Be, Ce, Se.
nandi2 , aor. 3 sg. ofnandati qv.
nandi(n), mfn. [S. nandin], taking delight; enjoying; A I
153,3* (-in o devalokasmi1]1 modanti kamakamino) =
It 112,11* (It-a II 164,3: -ino ti pltisomanassayogena
nandanasila); - anandi(n), 111;{n., not taking pleasure,
not delighting; SI 54,27* (-1 anigho bhikkhu, Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se -i); 54,29* (passami ... -i1]1 anigha1]1 bhikkhu1]1).
nandika, m., a kind of bird;? Ja VI 530,22* (-a jivaputta
ca; 531 ,19·; -a ti ad!ni teSaJ11 namani, teSaJ11 pa!hama
sami Vessantara 1masm11]1 vane vasanto nanda ti
507 nabha(s)
vadanti).
nandika in Ee at Ja IV 396,27*: read ka nandi ka khi<,Jqa.
*nandhati, see sv nayhati.
nandhana, n. rJrom *nandhati], binding, fastening; Ja VI
253,22' (silasa1]1varanandhano ti . . . 0 -rajjuya sam-
annagato ); - see also nayhana.
nandhi, see sv naddhi.
napmpsaka, m.n. and mfn. [ts], l. (m.n.) one who is
neither male nor female; sexless; a eunuch; Abh 242
(vassavaro vutto paf.!qako ca -a1]1); Ja VI 239,13' (n' ev'
itthl na puma ti 0 -ttal]1 sandhay' aba); Vibh417,14
(-iinaJ11 uppattikkhaf.!e); Sp 991,31 (paf.19aka ti
ussannakilesa avupasantapari!aha -a); Thi-a 241,26
(dasiya kucchismi1]1 -o hutva nibbatti); Vibh-a 22,32
(-assa pana bhavadasakal]1 natthi); Vin-vn 2520;
Sadd 566,8foll. (-o ti itthibhavapumbhavarahito
puggalo . . . keci pana na puma na itthl ti -o ti
vacanatthaJ11 vadanti tatha hi saddasatthavidü taJ11
puggala¡p 0 -liilgavasena -an ti vadanti); - 2. (n. and
mfn.) (gr.t.t.) a word in the neuter gender; the neuter
gender; neither masculine nor feminine, neuter;
Pa!is-a 239,11 (pavattan ti ca -e bhavavacanaJ11 eta1]1);
523,6 (aniddi!!he -an ti); Sadd 646,23 (-ani liilgani);
653,zs (-e al]1 va);- 0 -pal}«;;.aka, m., sexless, a eunuch
by birth, one of the five kinds of paf.!qaka; Sp 1O16,9 (yo
pana pa!isandhiyaJ11 yeva abhavako uppanno ayaJ11 -o);
0
- -linga, mfn. and n., of the neuter gender; a word in
the neuter gender; the neuter gender; Sadd 226,15
(niggahitantiinaJ11 hi -iinal]1 ); 629,15 (-e vattamanehi ya
ta eta ice etehi); 750,10 (so avyayibhavasamaso -o va
daghabbo); 877,2o (to napu1]1sake: bhavavacako
tapaccayo -e hoti gamanal]1 gataJ11 ... ); - 0 -vacana, n.,
an expression or word in the neuter; Nidd-a I 243,24
(taJ11 jival]1 taJ11 sariran ti ... jivo ti atta, liilgavipallasena
-al]1 kata1]1); - anapurpsaka, mfn., not neuter (ie
masculine or feminine ); Sadd 646,20 (-ani liilgani).
napparüpmp at Ja IV 260,1* and 337,6* is for
'nappariipa1]1 (ie anappariipa1]1 qv sv appa).
nabha(s), n. [S. nabhas] (nom. -a1]1, -o; acc. -aJ11;
instr. -asa; gen. -assa; abl. -a, -asa, -aso; loe. -asi,
-asmi1]1, -amhi, -e), the sky; the atmosphere; Abh 46
(akaso nitthiyal]1 -a1]1); D II 183,24 (adicco -a!11
abbhussukkamano); SI 102,19* (-am ahacca pabbata);
A I 215,10* (cando ca suriyo ca . . . -e pabhasanti);
Il 50,25 (-a!11 ca ... pa!havl ca, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr -a);
Vv 53:4 (na tatha tapati -asmi1]1 suriyo; Vv-a 236,4:
-asmin ti akase); Th 211 (suvalahakaJ11 -a1]1); 360 (araka
hoti saddhamma -aso pathavi yatha); Ja I 19,22* (yatha
khittal]1 -e leqqu dhuvaJ11 patati bhümiyaJ11); IV 462,20*
(-al]1 phaleyya); V 14,2o* (ko paturasi tidiva -amhi);
483,19* (-a!11 ca dure pa!havi ca düre, Be Ce, Se so; E e
-a; 484,c -an ti akaso, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a ti);
VI 218,10* (-a vijju-r-iv' uggata; 219,3·: -ato uggata vijju
vi ya); Ap 464,4 (-asa manusaJ11 1okal]1 gacchanto );
540,14 (-asa vijjuta pati); Bv 17:21 (so buddho
saghiratanaJ11 ahosi -am uggato); Vism 674,6 (so puriso
vigatavalahake -e candaJ11 disva nakkhattayogaJ11
aññasi); Sv 579,6 (majjhe -assa pUf.lf.!acando viya);
Ap-a266,14 (-asi akase uggataJ11); Bv-a89,z3foll.
(akasasailkhate -asi gata . . . -o ti hi saggo vuccati);
nabhati
Mhv 4:17 (thero uggamma -asa gantva); 17:43
(dhatu ... -asi qhita); - nabhasi-gama, mfn., going in
the sky; Sn 687 (tarasabhmp. va -aq¡ visuddhmp.); -
nabha-diri(n), mfn., moving in the sky; Ap 19,7; -
nabha-dirika, mfn., moving in the sky; Ps V 90,4 (-a
bhikkhil, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na pii).<;laya carika); -
nabha-ttala, n. [nabha(s) + tala 1], the surface, the vault,
ofthe sky; Ap 536,21 (orohitva -a); 541,23 (chaditaq¡ asi
vitanena -aq¡, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nabhattha1aq¡, proh.
wr).
nabhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup nabhate, nabhyati,
nabhnati, Wg §§ 18:13, 26:130, 31:48], injures;
Dhatum 546 (nabhadhatu vihiq¡sayaq¡); Sadd 409,31
(nabha ... hiq¡sayaq¡: -ati).
nabhya, see sv nabhi.
nama, m. [cfnamati and S. namas], howing; Dhatum 320
(nama name).
nama(s). n. [S. namas], oheisance, homage, veneration;
Abh 1154 (vandane -o); D II 250,4foll. (ye ... manussa
khipanti va upakkhalanti va te evaq¡ ahaq¡su nam' atthu
Mahagovindassa brahma!).assa); liT 195,27* (Vipassissa
nam' atthu); MI 143,12 (-o karohi nagassa ti); S 1
204,15* (ye appamatta viharanti -o tesam karom' ahaq¡);
Pv 38:55 (-o bhagavato katva); Th47 (-o te buddhav!r'
atthu); Ja II 409,12* (nam' atthu sailghanaq¡
samagatanmp.); 440,16* (migaraja -o ty atthu); IV 371 ,8*
(ko 'ymp. dhammo nam' atthu te; 372,zo·: -o tava atthu);
V 35,11* (nam' atthu te dukkarakarako si); VI 82,5*
(añja1iq¡ te paga!).hami Kasiraja nam' atthu te);- esp.
as exclamation (namo) ofveneration; Vinll 110,19 (-o
bhagavato -o sattannmp. sammasambuddhanan ti); D 11
288,16* (-o tassa bhagavato arahato samma-
sambuddhassa); Sn 544 (-o te purisajañña -o te
purisuttama); Ja 11 34,15* (-o vimuttanaq¡ -o vimuttiya);
Sv 402,17 (namassamana ti -o -o ti vadamana); 875,25
(1okiyamahajano ukkasitva pi khipitva pi -o buddhanan
ti); Sadd 413,4 (-o ti padaq¡ nipatesu pi 1abbhati); -
namaq¡ in Ee at Pv-a 67,28 is proh. wr for mamaq¡ (Be,
Ce, Se so); - (nama)-(k)kara, m., the exclamation
'namo'; homage, veneration; Abh 426 (namassa tu -o
vandana); Ja 11 148,8 (-aq¡ karonta pi satta buddhe
anussaratha ti); Th-a 1 206,1 (namo ti -o); 11 265,8
(namassiq¡sil ti kayena vacaya ca -aq¡ akaq¡su);
Ap-a 403,21 (añja1iq¡ paggayha pañcailgena -mp. akasi).
namataka, n. [cfS. lex., BHS namata], afelt covering for
a knife; V in 11 115,23 (bhikkhil hatthena vipatetva
civarmp. sibbenti, clvaraq¡ vi1omaq¡ hoti . . . anujanami
bhikkhave satthakaq¡ -an ti; Sp 1205,25: -an ti
satthakave!hanakapilotikakha!).<;laq¡); 123,28 (sailghassa
-mp. uppannaq¡ hoti; 1208,22: -an ti ejakalomehi katmp.
avayimmp. cammakha!).<;lapariharena paribhuñjitabbaiTl);
134,3 (anujanami bhikkhave khuraq¡ khurasilaq¡
khurasipatikmp. -mp. sabbaq¡ khurabha1,1<;lan ti); 267,22
(bhikkhuniya ... na -aq¡ dharetabbaq¡); Vin-vn 2964.
namati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. namati], (intrans.) hends; hows;
inclines; turns towards; Dhatup 225 (nama namane);
Dhatum 320; Vin 1 5,13 (iti ha bhagavato patisañcikkhato
appossukkataya cittaq¡ -ati no dhammadesanaya); M III
113,6 (tassa ce ... nisajjaya cittaiTl -a ti so nisldati); S 1
117 ,4* (kamesu so jantu kathaq¡ -eyya); Sn 806 (pa1,1<;lito
508 namati
na mamattaya -etha; Nidd I 125,21: na -eyya na
onameyya na taiTlninno assa na tapp01,10 ); Ja 11 205,9* (-e
-antassa; 205,Ir: yo attano -ati tass' eva patinameyya);
IV 209,17* (yassa sakha palambanti -anti na ca
bhañjare); Mil237,17 (yadi dutiyo buddho uppajjeyya
nayaq¡ dasasahassl lokadhatu dhareyya, caleyya
kampeyya -eyya ... ); Vism 117,7 (katarasmiq¡ va te
kammat!hane cittaiTl -atl ti); Sp 1,15* (tam ariyasailghaiTl
sirasa -ami); Dhp-a 1 419,8 (Visakhaya nanappakarani
kusalani katuiTl cittaiTl -atl ti); Patis-a 89,31 (-atl ti
namaq¡ namayatl ti va niimaiTl); 109,18 (cattaro kkhandha
namanaqhena nammp. te hi aramma!).abhimukha -anti) f.
As 392,24; Bv-a 113,13 (yatha tu1ada!).<;io samaq¡ tulito
sammp. tiqhati na -ati na unnamati); Mhv 17:25
(chattaq¡ -atu me sayaq¡); Sadd 412,27 (namu namane:
-ati); part.pr. (a) nama(t), mfn., Sadd 412,27;
(b) namanta, mfn., Sv 448,2 (te katiymp. -anta pacchato
-anti); Mp 1 146,17; - neg. anamanta, mfn., Sv 447,8;
(e) namamana,fn:fn., Sv 467,2 (mama appossukkataya
citte -amane); Sadd 412,28; - aor. 3 sg. nami, D II
36,21; Ja 1 314,15 (rañño ... pabbajjaya cittaiTl -i); -
ahsol. (a) namitva, Ps III 374,16; Dhp-a 11 249,4;
(b) namitvana, namitilna, Sadd 412,29; (e) natva,
natvana, Sadd412,28foll.; 412,32 (namo natva ti);--
PP nata, mfn., n. and -a,f,? l. (mfn.) [ts] hent;
inclined; turned towards; Sn 1143 (yaiTl yaiTl disaq¡
vajati bhilripañño sa tena ten' eva -o 'ham asmi; Pj 11
606,3: -o tanninno tapp01,10 ti); Dhp-a 11 249,11
(ekavaraq¡ -o, Ee so; Be nami; Ce, Se namito);
Patis-a 624,21 (vivekapo1,1an ti viveke -aq¡); - 2. (n.f)
inclination; Ud-a 393,13 (rilpadisu arammaJ).esu ...
namanato ta1,1ha -a nama, natthi ettha -a ti anatmp.);
398,18 (kamabhavad!su namanato -a ti 1addhanama
ta!).ha, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se natl ti);
Pa¡is-a 656,8 (-aiTl natl ti atthato ekmp., apagatanatan ti
apanataq¡);- neg. anata, mfn. and n. l. (mfn.) not hent;
without inclination; not turning towards; S I 186,26*
(nibbanatho anato sa hi bhikkhu; Spk I 269,27: anato ti
ta1,1haratirahito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ara1,1o ti)= Th 1214 (Se
so; Be, Ce nibbanatho avanatho sa bhikkhu; Ee wr
nibbanatha avanatho sa hi bhikkhu); Ps III 98,14
(anabhinatassa ti anatassa, Be, Se so; Ce arahantassa; Ee
arahattassa); - 2. (n.) what is free from what is hent;
free from inclination; ? S IV 368,24 (anatmp. ca vo
bhikkhave desissami anatagamiq¡ ca maggmp., Be, Se so;
Ce, E e antmp. .. . antagiimiiTl ca; Spk III 112,6:
ta1,1haratiya abhavena anataiTl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee antmp.);
Ud 80,19* (duddasaiTl anataq¡ nama na hi saccmp.
sudassanaq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anattmp.;
Ud-a 393,wfol/.: -an ti ... natthi ettha nata ti anataiTl,
nibbanan ti attho; Ee omits nibbanan ti attho);- anatan
ti in Ee at Ud-a 393,15 is wr for anantan ti (Be, Ce, Se
so);- anata-lso in Be, Ee at Ja VI 253,21' is proh. wr for
anata-lso (Ce, Se so); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nameti, -ayati,
nameti, namayati, hends, turns toward (trans.); corrects;
Vin II 266,1 foil. (bhikkhuniyo d!ghani kayabandhanani
dharenti teh' eva phasuke -en ti . . . ya -eyya apatti
dukka¡assa ti, Be so; Ce, E e, Se namenti ... nameyya;
Sp 1293,w: gihidarikayo viya thanapa¡akena
kayabandhanena phasuke namanatthaya bandhanti); M II
namati
105,5* (usukara namayanti tejanllJ!l; Ps III 342,5;
unnatunnataghane namenta uju111 karonti) = Dhp 80;
Ja IV 268,6 (pi~~hiJ11 -en ti); Vism 554,16 (tasmiJ11 visaye
tai_lha -eti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nameti); Sp 1095,21 (eva111
cittani -enti); Spk II 152,15 (hatthllJ!l pasaretva ima111
-etUJ11 vayamatha ti); Pa~is-a 109,20 (sabbllJ!l pi
namanaghena namllJ!l cattaro hi khandha arammal).e
aññamaññaJ11 -enti) f. As 392,26; Sadd 412,29 (namu
namane: . . . karite -eti -ayati); - part.pr. namenta,
namenta, mfn., Spk II 224,21 (kappasavagiJ11 viya -ento);
Ps III 342,5 (namenta); Sadd 690,24* (-enta); - neg.
anamenta, mfn., Spk III 226,20; - absol. (a) nametva,
nametva, Ja III 22,7· (sakhaJ11 nametva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
onametva); IV 91,26 (s!sa111 -etva nicca1o atthasi); Ps III
390,19 (-etva); Cp-a 59,26 (rajaputtaJ11 netva glvaya -etva
nisldapesuJ11); Sadd 412,3o (-etva); - neg. anametva,
Mp III 235,26; (b) namayitva, Sadd 412,3o; - pass.
part.pr. namiyamana, namlyamana, mfn., Vism 554,17
(tai_lhaya -iyamanaJ11, Be so; Se namiyamanllJ!l; Ce, Ee
namlyamanaJ11) Vibh-a 163,19; pp namita,
namita, mfn. [cfS. namita], bent, inclined; made to bend;
Spk II 305,22 (maya -itllJ!l sakha111 aññe khadanta natthl
ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee --itasakhaJ11); Nidd-a I 110,14 (tesu
kamesu ninna namita hutva); Dhp-a II 249,11 (ekaviiraJ11
namito, Ce, Se so; Be nami; Ee nato); Mhv 28:23
(pakkabharena -itllJ!l); Sadd 412,28 (namito .. . -itaJ11);
- fpp nametabba, nametabba, mfn., Vin II 266,8 (na ca
tena phasuka -etabba, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nametabba).
namati 2, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup namati, Wg § 23:12],
sounds; Sadd 412,12 (nama bahutte sadde, bahutto saddo
nama uggatasaddo: -ati).
namana, n., -a,f [S. namana, n.], bending; inclining;
tuming towards; Dhatup 225 (nama namane);
Sadd 412,27 (namu -e);- intrans.: Vism 558,24 (naman
ti arammai_labhimukhllJ!l -ato vedanadayo tayo
khandha); Sv 977,34 (0 '-aghenapi e' ettha cattaro
khandha nama111 te hi arammai_labhimukhaJ11 namanti,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se namanaghena) = As 392,23 (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee namanat~ena) f. Patis-a 109,17; Pa~is-a 516,22
(anamana ti pacchato -a); As 52,4 (namakaral).aghena
o• -a~~hena namanaghena ca namaJ11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
namaghena 0 '-aghena ca);- trans.: Sp 1293,Jo (kaya-
bandhanena phasuke o• -atthaya bandhanti); Sv 649,19
(pupphite paricchattake arOhai).akicCllJ!l va aiJ.kuSakllJ!l
gahetva o -kicca111 ... natthi); - see also namana 1.
namassati, pr. 3 sg. [S. namasyati], pays homage to;
reverences; prays to; D III 180,6 (gahapatiputto ...
allavattho allakeso pañja1iko puthuddisa -ati); SI
178,29* (te -a anuttare, Ce, Ee so; Be -e; Se tena
anusayena); 235,16* foil. (yaJ11 hi deva manussa ca ta111
-anti Vasava atha ko nama so yakkho YllJ!l tvllJ!l Sakka
-asi); A V 250,7 (te taJ11 rattiJ11 tikkhattu111 paccughaya
pañja1ika aggi111 -anti); Khp 6:15 (buddhllJ!l -ama
suvatthi hotu); Dhp 392 (yamha dhammllJ!l vijaneyya ...
sakkacca111 tllJ!l -eyya aggihuttllJ!l va brahmai_lo ); Sn 485
(bhakutiJ11 vinayitvana pañjalika -atha piljetha
annapanena); 995 (yattha gantva -emu sambuddhllJ!l
dipaduttamaJ11); Th 343 (juhami dakkhil).eyyaggiJ11 -ami
tathagataJ11); Ja III 24,10* (tasma -ami ima111 palasllJ!l);
83,22* (yo apiljaJ11 -ati, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
509 namassana
pasa111sati); IV 318,4 (puttllJ!l patthayamana nanadevata
-anti nanavatani caranti); V 330,1* (akaii.khamana
puttapha1aJ11 devataya -ati); Sv 838,5 (pañcatapaJ11
tappati ekapadena tighati suriyllJ!l -ati); 942,18 (disa tata
-ah! ti); Sadd 441,24 (namassa vandananatiyllJ!l: ... -ati);
1
- fut. 1 sg. (a) namassissaJ11 , Ap 156,7 (tahaJ11 disllJ!l
-issa111 jinllJ!l appa~pugga1aJ11, Be, Ce so; Se tahaJ11
disva; Ee wr na hi disvana passissaJ11); 320,8 (tattha
gantva -issaJ11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr kattha gantvana
passissa111); (b) namassissami, Ap 340,4;
part.pr. (a) namassa(t), mfn., Sn 344; Ja V 218,4*;
(b) namassanta, mf( -antl)n., D II 208,16*; Th! 143
(nakkhattani -anta ... bala); 144 (ahaJ11 ca kho -antl
sambuddhaJ11); Th-a II 210,10 (thera111 -anto yeva, Be, Se
so; Ce te -auto; Ee wr tena c'assanto);
(e) namassamana, mfn., Vin I 3,25 (Mucalindo naga-
raja ... bhagavato purato aghasi añjaliko bhagavantllJ!l
-amano); Sn192; Vv21:4; Jai 285,17 (araññllJ!l
pavisitva aggil]l hhagavantal]l -amano brahma1oka-
parayano hohi); Ap 48,8 (-amano vinayaJ11 viharissami
sabbada); Mi1156,5 (anekani devatasatasahassani ...
bhagavanta111 -amanani pañjalikani ~hitan! ti, Be, Se so;
Ce -amana; Ee -amana pañja1ika); Vism 93,3; Sv 402,17
(-amana ti namo namo ti vadamana); - neg.
anamassamana, mfn., Spk I 227,2;- aor. 3 sg. namassi,
Ja III 470,29; Mhv 1:36; 1 sg. (a) namassi(J11), Thi 87
(aggiJ11 candllJ!l ca silriyllJ!l ca devata ca -i 'haJ11);
Ap 20,23; (b) namassissaJ11 2, Ja VI 100,lo*; 562,15* (sabba
disa -issa111 api sotthi ito siya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -isllJ!l;
562,27': patthayantl -iJ11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -issa111);
3 pl. namassi111su, Sn 287; Th 628 (Th-a II 265,8: -iJ11sil
ti kayena vacaya ca namakkara111 aka111su); Ap 493,7
(samai_la brahmai_la e' eva -i111su katañjall, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -!su); - inf namassituJ11, Vv 16:3; Mp II 112,11;
Mhv 1:68; - absol. (a) namassitva, S 1 234,33*; Ja IV
16,28 (mahajano maral).abhayabh!to attano attano devata
-itva mahaviraval]l viravi); Ap 1,10 (dasali.gull -itva
sirasa abhivadayi1]1); (b) namassitvana, Ap 212,10; -
pass. part.pr. namassiyamana, mfn., Pj II 315,25; -
pp namassita, mfn., reverenced; Ja II 34,24·; V v-a 340,23
(abhivandito si ti -ito thomito va asi);
fpp (a) namassiya, mfn., Ap 48,6 (tasma ete -iya;
Ap-a 293,35/oll.: ete buddha -iya -itabba vanditabba ti
attho, eta111 -iyan ti pi pa~o, tassa etllJ!l isiddhajllJ!l
-itabban ti attho); 309,13 (-iyo kali.khacchedo, Ee, Se so;
Be, Ce na SllJ!lsayo); (b) namassitabba, mfn., D III
181,10; Ja VI 298,16' (raja yeva -itabbo ca aradhetabbo
ca ti); Mp I 410,12 (aggi paricaritabbo antodevata -itabba
ti); (e) namassanlya, namassaneyya, mfn., Mi1278,17
(bhikkhu atisllavantataya nagayakkhanaramarilhi
-aniyo); Pj I 139,2 (devatahi pi -anlyabhavahetuto);
Sadd 790,5 (-anlyo -aneyyo); - caus. pr. 3 sg.
namassiipeti, Sv 942,22 (ath' assa te na tuyha111 pita eta
disa -eti, ima pana disa -etl ti dhammllJ!l desessanti);
Mp I 415,16 (-eti).
namassana, n., -a,f rJrom namassati], venerating; paying
homage; Jai 1,6* (0 '-adino assa puññassa ratanattaye
pavattassanubhavena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 '-adito) f.
Sadd 1,10* (0 '-adipuññassa); Ap 42,5 (avañjha paricariya
amogha ca -a; Ap-a 281,12: pai).amakiriya); Bv1:41 (-a111
namassii
ca püjaJTI ca sabbam arahas! tuvaJTI; Bv-a 44,12:
añjalikara¡;¡~ manasa -aJTI va); Th-a Il 144,27
(ta-y-id~ mayhaJTI dakkhi¡;¡eyyaggiparicara¡;taJTI
dadhinavanHamathitasappi-adinirapekkh~ satthu -am
eva ti, Be, Se so; Ce arambhasamisasappi-adi-; Ee
barihisasamidhasappi-adi-); Sv 942,21 (disa -aJTI karoh!
ti); - anamassana, n., not paying homage; Dhp-a IV
151,2 (bhante mama disa namassanabhavam va
--bhav~ va tumhe va janatha ti).
namassa, f [S. namasya], reverence, homage; Abh 426
(-a tu namakkaro);- se e also namassiya.
namassiya, f [S. namasya], reverence; homage; Mil140,1
(-aJTI karoti); - see also namassa.
namucl, m. [cfS., S. lex. namuci], the name ofan asura; a
name ofMara; Abh 43 (maro -i); D Il 259,10' (vepacitti
sucitti ca paharado -1 saha); Sn 425 (m~
padhanapahitattaJTI . . . -1 karu¡;taJTI vacaJTI bhasamano
upagami; Pj 11 386,24: -1 ti maro, so hi attano visaya
nikkhamitukame devamanusse na muñcati ); 439 (esa -i
te sena); Th 336 Uetva -ino senaJTI viharami anasavo);
Ja V 455,w·; Nidd 1 489,6 (yo so maro ka¡;¡ho adhipati
antagü -i pamattabandhu); - 0 -pasavakara, n., the
snare and trap ofMara; Ja V 453,17* (ta ... oc;Jc;litaJTI -~
cakkhuma parivajje, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -vaguraJTI).
naya, m. [ts], l. way, way of proceeding; (right) method;
method of interpretation; inference; Vin 1 34,10 (etena
-ena ac;lc;lhuc;lc;Jhapatihariyasahassani honti); S 11 58,5 (so
imina dhammena dighena ... pariyogaJhena atHanagate
-aJTI neti); A Il 180,21 (tyassudaJTI Todeyyo brahma¡;¡o
imina -ena neti); Ja 1 115,15 (yena kenaci -ena
darakan~ ayyakaku1am eva daghuJTI vagan ti); 163,22"
(aparo -o); 252,11 (suraya lo¡;¡~ pakkhipitva imina va
-ena suraJTI vinasesi); 11 438,2· (akkhimha akkhigüthako
ti adina -ena pakasito); IV 266,31 (Sariputto ... maya -e
adinne kathetuJTI na sakkhissati); VI 244,25* (-ehi ñayehi
ca hetubh! ca; 244,zs·: -eh! ti kara¡;¡avacanehi); Ap 505,18
(saiJ.khepavitthar~ -aJTI, Be, Se so; Ce
sari.khepavittharanayaJTI; Ee wr saiJ.khepaJTI vittharay~
nar~); Nett 2,s (katame pañca -a); 7,28 (te
nandiyavattena -ena hatabba); Mil 339,25 (hetuna hetuJTI
kathayissami -ena -~ kathayissami); Vism 200,14
(etena -ena sabbapadani vittharetabbani); 274,17
(assasissam1 ti adina -ena anagatavacanavasena paJi
aropita ti); 391,11 (bhagava ajja ettak~ dhamm~
desesin ti therassa -~ deti); 712,24' (dassento
ku1aputtanaJTI -~ sllavisuddhiya); Sp 217,19 (esa -o
sabbapadesu); Sv 77,1 (anekehi pi -ehi vibhajantena);
Ps 11 351,27 (acariyanaJTI -e thatva); Pj 1 157,21 * (yena
vuttaJTI yada yattha yasma e' et~ imaJTI -~
pakasetvana); Il 177,13 (uttanena -ena bhasissam1 ti);
Pv-a 227,21 (dhammaJTI sutva va tadanusarena -aJTI nento
anuminanto); As 339,wfoll.; Sadd 396,wfoll. (-o ti
nayanaJTI gamanaJTI -o paJigati, atha va tattha tattha
netabbo ti -o ... ); 614,18 (sakkataganthato -aJTI gahetva);
- 2. wisdom, prudence, reason; Ja III 481 ,24* (n' eva
dughe -o atthi na dhammo na subhasit~; 482,r: -o ti
kara¡;¡~); V 351,24* (na h' eva akatattassa -o etadiso
siya; 352,z·: -o ti pañña);- nay~ in Ee at Sv 231,7 is
wr for tayaJTI (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0 iinucintana, n.,
considering the method (of interpretation); Ap-a 518,24;
510 na ya ti
-
0
-ggaha, m. [naya + gaha2], inference; (making a)
deduction; Sv 567,36 (attano mati nama -ena
anubuddhiya attano patibha¡;taJTI); 880,9 (anumanañii¡;taJTI
-o vidito ); Ps Il 164,19 (katakiriyaya -en a janati); Spk III
245,3 (imina ca kara¡;¡ena cakkad!n~ pi indriyan~
aññathattena bhavitabban ti -ato evaJTI aha); -
anaya, m., a wrong way or method; a wrong inference;
Ja IV 241 ,3* (-aJTI nayati dummedho; 242,4': akara¡;taJTI
kara¡;¡an ti ga¡;¡hati); Th 123 (na idaJTI -ena jivitaJTI;
Th-a 11 5,21: -ena añayena veJudanapupphadanadi-
anesanaya);- dunnaya, mfn. and m., l. (mfn.) (i) hard
to infer or interpret; A 1 59,3 (dunnikkhittassa bhikkhave
padavyañjanassa attho pi -o hoti; Mp 11 117 ,s:
parivattetva uppatipatiya gahitaya paJiya aghakatha
nama -a dunn!hara dukkatha nama hoti) = 11 147,22
(Mp III 137,1s: aghakatha n!haritva kathetuJTI na sakka
hoti) = Nett 21,tz; - (ii) hard to lead, troublesome;
Ja IV 242,9' (hitapatipattiya va -o hoti netuJTI
asakku¡;¡eyyo); VI 508,2* (nassa hessami -a); - 2. (m.)
[S. dumaya], bad or imprudent conduct; Ja IV 241 ,4' (-o
seyyaso hoti; 242,7' foil.: pañcadussllakammani
samadaya vattanam eva seyyo ti ga¡;¡hati);
sunaya, mfn. and m., l. (mfn.) easy to infer or interpret;
with a proper interpretation; well-reasoned; Al 59,s
(sunikkhittassa bhikkhave padavyañjanassa attho pi -o
hoti) = Il148,16 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee sunnayo); Ja III 444,1·
(sunHena ti -ena sutthukara¡;¡ena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
suvinltena ti);- 2. (m.) wise conduct; Ja IV 241,13'.
nayate, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nayate, Wg § 14:7], goes;
protects; Dhatup 235 (raya naya gamanattha);
Dhatum 335 (nayo . . . gatimhi); Sadd 420,4 (naya
rakkha¡;¡e ca, cakaro gatipekkhako: -ati nayo ... -anti va
rakkhanti atth~ etena ti nayo).
nayat¡2, neti, pr. 3 sg. [S. nayati] (jut. 3 sg. nayissati,
nessati 1), l. /eads, guides, conducts; takes; takes away;
takes away in marriage; carries off; Dhatup 362 (ni
papa¡;¡e); Dhatum 588; Vin 1 44,1 (dhammena kira
sama¡;¡a Sakyaputtiya nenti no adhammena ti); 75,7
(ayaJTI so karabhedako coro handa n~ nema ti);
lii 136,17 (agacchatu me mata m~ nessatü ti, eds so);
S 1 127,6* (nessati maccurajassa paraJTI); A 11 180,21
(tyassud~ Todeyyo brahma¡;¡o imina nayena neti;
Mp 111 165,6: imina kara¡;¡ena anuneti janapeti); Dhp 80
(udak~ hi -anti nettika); 179 (apad~ kena padena
nessatha); Pv 16:5 (ehi nessami taJTI ghar~); 21:1
(imaJTI yakkhaJTI -amase, Be, Ce so; Ee n!yamase; Se
niyamase; Pv-a 113,25: -issama); Th 304 (adhammo
nirayaJTI neti dhammo papeti suggatiJTI); Ja 1 298,7
(agantva maJTI netü ti); 11 159,14 (ahaJTI taJTI mama
pighiJTI aropetva nessam! ti); 166,4 (rañño m~ santik~
neh! ti); III 266,23* (catura nañ ... naraJTI nenti sa¡;¡hahi
vacahi; 267,4·: nentl ti attano vas~ upanenti); V 201,4*
(te t~ -issanti mamaJTI sakase); VI 104,19* (kena t~
nemi maggena rajasegha disampati); 381,29 (m~ netha
ti, Ce, Ee so; Be aneyyatha ti; Se neyyatha ti); 527,26* (na
ca tvaJTI rajaputtassa bhariyaJTI putte ca nessasi); 543,14*
(issaro -a brahma¡;¡a; 543,21'foll.: etto -a -ahi, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se ete -a); 545,9* (darake ca ah~ nessaJTI
brahma¡;¡iya paricarake; 545,11·: nessam! ti); Mil 48,4
(kissa pana me tvaJTI ambho purisa bhariy~ nes! ti);
nayati
Sp 682,24 (viharamajjhena va matikarp neti); Mp IV 15,s
(vinasessami ti adassanarp -issami); Sadd 395,28 (ni
naye: neti -ati); 397,5 (ni papal}e: neti -ati nayanarp);-
2.finds out, ascertains; decides; detennines; S II 58,5
(so imina dhammena dighena . . . atltiinugate nayarp
neti); Dhp 256 (attham sahasa -e; Dhp-a III 381,14:
sahasena musavadena vinicchineyya); Ja III 441,23*
(amucchito yo -ate nayanayarp; 442,z3·: -ati
upaparikkhati); Vl260,7* (kathan nu gathanarp
abhasitanarp attharp -eyyurp kusala); Vism 643,26*
(sarpvijjamanamhi visuddhadassano tadanvayarp neti
atltanagate); - part.pr. (a) naya(t), mfn., la III 443,23*
(dhammena ñayena upayaso -arp; 444,3·: -an ti -anto
rajjarp anusasanto); (b) nayanta, mf(-antl)n., Ja V 8,26'
(-antl); 365,18 (khipparp no rañño santikarp nehi, -anto
ca ma baddhe -i, pupphapañjare pana nisidapetva nehi);
Cp 2:4:8 (odapattakiya mayharp ... aka<;l<;lhitva -antiya,
eds so; Cp-a 136,6: -antJya ti niyantiya);
(e) nayamana, mfn., Vin I 43,zs• (dhammena -amananarp
ka usiiya vijanatarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niyamananarp;
Sp 976,31: -amananan ti -amanesu, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
niyamananan ti niyamanesu) = S I 127,8* (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee niyamananam); (d) nenta, mfn., Vism 278,n; Dhp-a I
176,24 (eko ajapalo anekasahassa aja gocararp nento);
Th-a I 77,2 (udakarp nente purise disva); - aor.
3 sg. nesi, Ja II 377,10 (so ekadivasarp rajanarp rathena
uyyanarp nesi); Sp 55,1s; Dhp-a I 174,14; 2 sg. nayi, Ja V
365,19; 3 pl. (a) nayirpsu, Thi 419; Ja II 429,23 (narp ...
coro ti gahetva rañño santikarp -irpsu); Sp 188,16
(vinasesurp adassanarp -irpsu); Dhp-a II 39,2 (rajapurisa
tarp pacchabaharp bandhitva kasahi ta)enta aghatanarp
-irpsu); Mhv 34:50; (b) nayurp, Mhv 37:11; (e) nesurp,
Vin III 126,34; Pj II 191,7; - inf (a) nayiturp, Ja V
309,4*; (b) neturp, Ja VI 506,12* (naharp akama dasirp pi
araññarp netum ussahe); Mhv 38:107; (e) netave,
Dhp 180 (yassa ... tal}ha natthi kuhiñci netave) = Ja I
79,28*; absol. (a) netva, Vin III 136,12 (te
ajivikasavaka tarp kumarikarp netva); D ll 340,9; Ja III
228,13 (hegha navarp netva); Mil169,23; Vism 73,1;
(b) netvana, V in I 43,17*; Ap 386,21 (bhikkhii netvana
sarp ghararp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se netva sakarp ghararp);
562,12;- pass. pr. 3 sg. niyati, niyyati, is led (away); is
taken off; is determined, is interpreted; Vin III 43,32
(kissa tvarp avuso bandho -as! ti, Se so; Be niyyasi ti; Ce
baddho niyyasi ti; Ee baddho niyyasi ti); S I 4,4* (yesarp
dhamma appa!ividita paravadesu -are); 39,s• foll.
(kenassu -ati 1oko .. . cittena -ati loko ); IV 318,1
(yarpbahularp yarpbahularp ca gamal}i viharati tena tena
-ati ti, Be so; Ce niyyatl ti; Ee, Se niyyatl ti); Sn 327
(tacchehi -etha subhasitehi, Be, Se so; Ee niyyetha; Ce
-etha tacchehi; c:fPj ll 334,10: -etha -eyya, kalarp
khepeyya ti attho, Be so; Ce, Se -etha nayeyya; Ee
niyyetha nayeyya); 580 (go vajjho viya -ati, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se niyyati); 851 (diqhisu ca na -ati, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se niyyati; Nidd I 223,3o: so dighiya na yayati na -ati na
vuyhati na sarphariyati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se niyyati; Pj II
549,18: dvasaghidighisu kayaci dighiya na -ati, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se niyyati); Pv 11:1 (kañña sivikaya -ati, Be so;
Ce, Ee niyyati; Se niyyati; Pv-a 56,22: -ati ti vahiyati);
Ja I 370,29 (tvarp ... bandhitva -as! ti, Be, Ce so; Ee
511 nayati
niyasi ti; Se niyyasi ti); IV 310,18* (ramma vana -atu
rajadhanirp, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee niyyatu); V 165,28* (kuhirp
ayarp -ati bhimakayo ); VI 144,24* (-anti Candasuriya
yaññatthaya; or to niyati qv sv niyyati ?); Ap 541,22
(bhikkhuniyo . . . devanarp khandham arii)ha niyyanti
anupubbaso, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce niyyanti); 542,10 (Gotami
-ate paccha sakkata buddhaposita, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
niyyate); Spk l 22,4 (yatha va gopalena gogal}o -ati);
Dhp-a II 221,4 (yada tvarp coro ti gahetva -asi, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee niyyasi); Th-a I 103,22 (gathapadassa attho ...
niyyati); Nidd-a I 42,14 (sunakha gaddulabaddha
yadicchakarp -anti, Ee so; Ce niyyanti; Be, Se niyyanti);
Saddh 292 (nirayarp -ati dummati); - niyamase in Ee
at Pv 21:1 is prob. wr for nayamase (Be, Ce so); -
part.pr. (a) n1yanta 1, niyyanta 1, mf(-anti)n., Ap 542,s
(piijayirpsu ca -antirp nibbutarp buddhamatararp, Ce so;
Be niyyantim; Ee piijayirpsu viniyantirp; Se piijayirpsu
viniyyanti); 562,7 (corarp vadhattharp -antarp disva);
1 1
(b) niyamana , niyyamana , mfn., Vin III 43,31 (addasa
kho . . . gal}akarp baddharp -amanarp, Ce so; Ee
niyyamanarp; Se bandharp; Be bandharp niyyamanarp);
SI 143,25* (gayhakarp -amanarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
sniyyamanarp); A IV 138,5 (gavi vajjha aghatanarp
-amana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niyyamana); Ja I 395,s
(-amanataya); 402,25 (so tarp ñatijanena a)ahanarp
-amanarp disva); VI 549,3* (-amane pisacena kinnu tata
udikkhasi); Sv 869,25 ([vadhuya] nibbuyhamanaya ti
-amanaya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niyyamanaya); -
pp nita, mfn. [ts], l. led, brought to; brought to a state;
taken away; carried off, Vin I 349,29* (yena -a na tarp
vidii; Sp 1151 ,s: yena kalahena imarp nillajjabhavarp -a)
= Ja III 488,4•; Vin III 67,16 (katharp hi nama ayasma
Pilindavaccho corehi -e darake anessati ti); Th 1112
(cittena -a); Ja I 355,7* (da<;l<;!hani gehani jano ca -o);
II 33,4 (so bhikkhu bhikkhiihi satthu santikarp -o);
VI 148,s (bodhisatto pi yaññava!arp -o); Ap 542,9
(sabbayo purato -a nibbuta sugatorasa); Vism 312,23 (so
pabbajanatthaya simarp -o); Ps ll 115,3o (apaññatti-
bhavarp -a); Pa!is-a413,3o (jaradi-upaddavaya -o); -
2. brought out; ascertained; detennined, settled; evident;
Nidd I 169,2 (neyyo va attho -o va attho) = Pa!is II
195,2; Nidd-a l 6,11 (pa!ho . . . yatha vacanarp tatha
avagantabbo -o aniccarp dukkharp anatta ti evamadi);
287,14 (-o va ti pa)iya !hitaniyamena kathetabbo);
Pa!is-a 647,24 (vacanamattena adhippayassa --tta -o);
Cp-a 158,s (imissa pa)iya attho ujukam eva -o hoti ti);
- -'-attha, mfn. and m. [nita + attha2], l. (mfn.) whose
meaning is brought out, detennined, evident, explicit;
A I 60,13 (yo ca neyyattharp suttantarp - '-attho suttanto
ti dipeti); It-a II 9,s (bhagavato vedanattayadesana
-'-attha yeva); Nett 21,16; - 2. (m.) an explicit,
straightforward meaning; Nidd-a I 7,9 (saddavasen' eva
veditabbo -'-attho);- dunnlta, mfn., badly or wrongly
detennined or interpreted; badly led; A I 59,1
(dunnikkhittarp ca padavyañjanarp attho ca dunnito;
Mp II 117,4 foll.: parivattetva uppa!ipa!iya gahita
a!!hakatha); Nidd I 165,4 (attho te dunnito; Nidd-a I
286,2: attho na samma upanito); Ap 533,6 (tattha ce atthi
dunnitarp khamassu); Saddh 366 (indriyassehi dunnito);
- sunita, mfn., well or properly detennined or inter-
na yana
preted; A I 59,7 (sunikkhitta~ ca padavyañjana~ attho
ca sunlto); Ja III 443,22* (eva~ sunltena subhasitena
dhammena, Be, Ce, Se so; E e suvinltena; 444,1-:
sunayena sughukaraJ).ena); - fpp (a) netabba, mfn,, to
be led or brought,- to be carried on,- to be brought
forward,- to be adduced; Vin III 114,17 (dumiilakadi pi
evam eva -~); Ja IV 450,22' (andh~ viya yaghiya
parena -a~); Vism 278,24 (dasann~ upari na -~);
431,10 (eva~ yava arahato -a~); Sp 779,23 (aññato
mañcapit}ladini anetva ___ tatth' eva -ani); Sv 1063,27
(eva~ sabbapadesu nayo -o); Mp II 118,7 (yassa attho
-o t~ netabbatthasuttanta~); It-a I 59,25 (tassa
avijjapaccaya sañkhara ti sabb~ -a~); Sadd 847,2o
(-a~ neyy~); - neg, anetabba, mfn., Ap-a 183,21
(anaññaneyyo ti aññehi ida~ saccan ti anetabbo, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se na netabbo);- (b) neyya2 , mfn., l. to be led,
to be brought to; A II 135,11 (cattaro 'me--· pugga1a --·
uggha~itaññü vipañcitaññü -o padaparamo, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr ñeyyo); Sn 846 (na kammana no pi sutena -o;
Pj II 547,29: so netabbo na hoti; Nidd I 206,12/oll.: na
yayati na niyati na vuyhati na s~hariyati ti, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se na niyyati); 1113 (katha~ -o tathavidho; Pj II
601 ,6 foil.: kath~ ca so netabbo kath~ assa uttari~
ñal}a~ uppadetabban ti); Pp 41,33 (yassa pugga1assa
uddesato . . . ka1yiil}amitte sevato . . . eva~ anupubbena
dhammabhisamayo hoti ay~ vuccati puggalo -o;
Pp-a 223,12: uddesadlhi netabbo ti -o); Pe~ 30,6;
Nett 125,13; ifc see ananna- (sv añña2);
2. requiring interpretation or bringing out; Nidd I 169,2
(-o va attho nito va attho) = Pa~is II 195,2; Nidd-a I 6,12
(pa~ho __ . yuttiya anussaritabbo -o); - -' -attha, mfn.
and m. [neyya + attha2], l. (mfn.) whose meaning is not
evident or straightforward, but requires interpretation
or bringing out; A I 60,13 (yo ca -' -atth~ suttanta~
nltattho suttanto ti dipeti; Mp II 118,12/oll.: cattaro 'me
bhikkhave pugga1a ti evarüpo suttanto -' -attho nama __ .
paramatthato pana pugga1o nama natthl ti ev~ assa
attho netabbo va hoti); Nett 21,16; - 2. (m.) a meaning
which requires interpretation or bringing out; Nidd-a I
7,11 (sammutivasena veditabbo -' -attho ); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. nayeti, Sadd 835,13; 841,24,
nayana, n. [ts], l. the eye; Abh 149 (-a~ tv akkhi nett~
ca); Vv 35:3 (musativa -~ saterata va); Th! 381 (tava
me -ani dakkhiya bhiyyo kamarati pava<;l<;lhati);
Ap 431,6 (sucir~ ama1a~ visodhita~ -~
ñiil}amaya~); 547,17 (sapha1a~ -a~ mama); Cp 1:8:9
(ubho pi netta -a andha upahata mama ek~ me -a~
dehi tva~ pi ekena yapaya); 1:8:13 (ubho pi -a~ dehi
uppa~etva val}ibbake, Be, Se so, split cpd? Ce, Ee -e;
Cp-a 69,1: ubho pi-an ti ubho pi -e, eds so); Vism 36,2*
(-a~ va ekak~ . . . anurakkhamanaka) = Saddh 621;
Sp 1316,31 (mettasinehasiniddhani pana -ani);
Bv-a 285,31 (mahapuriso .. , rüpasobhaya mahajanassa
-ani iika<;l<;lhento viya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee mahajana-
nayanani iika<;l<;lhanto ); Saddh 448 (-~ ekanetto va
rakkhe); Sadd 332,30* (cakkhakkhi -a~ nett~); - ifc
see caru-, dasasata- (sv dasa\ 2. leading;
conducting; Sadd 426,26 (nara -e); 697,6 CO-gatyattha-
kammani); - 0
alimlili(n), mfn., with a swarm of bees
that are eyes; ? Bv-a 274,34* (sada janana~ -in!
512 naraka
vi1umpinl vativiroci Lumbinl).
nayita, m., a kind of tree; Ap 16,15 (-a ambagandhl ca);
347,6 (kumuda ambagandhi ca -a dissare bahü),
nayito, nayida~, nayidha [na2 + ito, ida~, idha], see
sv na2 .
nayhati, *nandhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nahyati; cfupanayhati,
upanandhati], binds; Dhatum 537 (nandha vinandhane);
Sadd 490,28 (naha bandhane: -ati upanayhati); -
pp naddha, mfn, [ts], tied, fastened; bound round; Ja I
175,11 (ta~ rathavaratta~ yathanaddham eva rajailga!).e
~hapayi~su); Pa~is-a 281,31 (yuge -a viya ti yuganaddha,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee yuge nandha viya ti yuganandha); -
ifc see camma-, yuga-; - --pañcayudha, mfn., armed
with the five weapons; Mhv 7:16;- neg. anaddha, mfn.,
Sv 1007,23 = Pa~is-a 377,12.
nayhana, n. [from nayhati], binding, fastening; Dhp-a IV
161,1 (naddhin ti 0 -bhavena pavatta~ kodh~) = Pj II
467,12;- see also nandhana.
nara, m. [ts], aman,- a person; pl. men; people; Abh 227;
D III 167,3* (ay~ -o sukhabahu1o bhavissati); SI 13,20*
(slle patighaya -o sapañño; Spk I 50,1: -o ti satto); 79,16*
(na Va!).l}arüpena -o sujano); 141,22* (-an~ devana~ ca
dakkhil}eyyo); 206,15* (matukucchigato -o); A I 142,15*
(te d!gharatta~ socanti h!nakayüpaga -a); Dhp 125 (yo
appadughassa -assa dussati); 309 (cattari t}lanani -o
pamatto apajjati); 341 (te ve jatijarüpaga -a); Sn 33
(upadh! hi -assa nandana); 319 (yatha -o apaga~
otaritva); 776 (hina -a maccumukhe lapanti); 788
(di~t}lena sa~suddhi -assa hoti); Vv 33:7 (pavara hoti
-esu niirisu); Th 144 (y~ karoti -o kamm~ kalyiil}~
yadi papaka~); 237 (asma loka paramha ca ubhaya
dha~sate -o); Thl 487 (na e' atthi titti kaman~ atitta
va maranti -a); Ja I 326.7* (sacc~ kir' evam ah~su -a
ekacciya idha); IV 108,6* (nari~ -o nijjhapay~
dhanena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nañ); V 265,1* (k~ gati~
pecca gacchanti -a dhammaticarino); Nidd I 3,14 (maceo
ti satto -o manavo poso puggalo __ .); Ap 22,25 (matuya
namagottena paññayissati 'ya~ -o Sariputto ti namena);
496,4 (devo -o va brahma va pa~ivatta na vijjati);
V v-a 42,21 (ev~ nayanaghena -o ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr nara!!hena); Th-a III 170,36 (-ehi ca devehi ca
paramaya pujaya pujito); Sadd 426,27 (so hi narati neti ti
-o); 427,7 foll. (-o ti puriso -o ti satto -o ti manusso );
- ifc see ara!).!-, kin- (sv ka3); - narlisabha,
naravasabha, m. [S. narar~abha], a leader of men; SI
220,25* (no ce buddha~ sareyyatha 1okajegh~ -~);
Sn 684 (sabbasattuttamo aggapuggalo -o; Pj II 486,25:
naresu ca usabhasadisatta -o); Ap 52,25 (upagacchi~
-~; Ap-a 310,7: -a~ naravasabha~ upagacchi~. Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -a~ nara-usabh~); 230,22 (Siddhatthamhi
bhagavati nibbutamhi -e); Bv 9:9 (so -o, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se 0 -v-usabho); 13:10 (upasailkamanto -a~, Be so; Ce,
Ee naravasabh~; Se -v-usabh~); Sadd 74,1•;- see
0
also nisabha; - a -saddüla, m., a tiger among men;
Ap 573,4 (vyiikasi -o, Ce, Ee so; Be 0 -sarathi; Se
0
-sundharo); 606,12 (-o, Ce, Se so; Be 0 -Sara!).o; Ee
varasaddülo);- see also nara.
naraka, m.n., l. a pit,' a cleft; Vin III 74,16 (sobbhe va -e
va papate va papata ti; Sp 443,10: -o niima tattha tattha
pha1antiya bhümiya sayam eva nibbatta mahadar!); S I
narati
209,13* (-a ubbhato tata -aJT! patitum icchasi); Sn 706
(cakkhuma patipajjeyya tareyya -aJT! imaJT!); Pv 36:16
(cikkhallamagge -~ ahosi. .. gosls~ ... -asmiJT!
nikkhipiJT!); Th 869 (itv eva coro asiJT! avudhaJT! ca
sobbhe papate -e anvakasi); Ja III 14,5* (so dani dugge
-amhi khitto; 14,s-: -amhl ti avate); IV 271,5* (yo taJT!
vidugga -a samuddhari);- ifc see gi.itha-; - 2. [ts], a
pit in hell; a hell; Abh 656; Ja VI 114,32* (pade gahetva
kissa ime pun' eke avaJT!sira -e patayanti; 115,15·: -e ti
jalitailgarapu1_11_1e maha-avate); Vism 501,9* (jayetha no
ce -esu satto tatth' aggidahadikam appasayhaJT11abhetha
dukkh~); Sp 508,17 (yaya cetanaya -e patisandhi
janita); 515,19 (te hi anantara va -e nibbattanakasatta);
Ps IV 235,15 (kasma pan' esa -o avlcl ti sailkh~ gato
ti); Pj 11 480,18 (dhi.imaroruvaJT! nama -aJT! gacchanti);
Vv-a 335,23 (paralokena ti -ena tulyaJT! -aJT! hi ...
paraloko ti vuccati); Pv-a 52,14 (nirayan ti 1addhanam~
-~); Ap-a 489,6 (matughatakammavasena -e aggi-
jaladidukkh~ anubhavitva); Saddh 612; - see also
naraka.
narati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nfl.lati, Wg § 31:25], leads;
Dhatum 368; V v-a 42,18 (-ati netl ti naro puriso);
Nidd-a I 26,s (sugatiduggatiJT! -atl ti naro, Be, Se so; Ce,
E e nayatl ti); Sadd 426,26/oll. (nara nayane: -ati naro ...
so hi -ati netl ti naro); - pass. pr. 3 sg. narlyati,
Sadd 427,3 (-lyati sakena kammena niyyatl ti naro ).
narada, m. [S. na1ada, narada], Indian spikenard,
Nardostachys jatamansi DC; Ja VI 537,23* (padmaka -a
kuttha jhamaka ca hare1_1uka).
nariyo, me (or wr) for nariyo, pi. nom./acc. ofnañ qv.
nala, m., see sv nala.
nalaka, m., see sv ~a~aka .
2
nalati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nalati, Wg § 20:8], smells;
Sadd 438,9 (nala gandhe: -ati).
nalata (and 1a1ata, also written na1ata, na~ata), n.
[S. lalata], the forehead; the brow; MI 109,1 (s!saJT!
okampetva jivhaJT! nilla~etva tivisakhaJT! nalatik~ -e
vutthapetva da1_1«;l~ olubbha pakkami) t S I 118,2
(-ena); J a 11 219,8 (dasaba1assa ... suval_ll_lapanasadisaJT!
-~ca disva); III 393,13 (-a seda mucciJT!SU, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e -e); IV 417,4 (attano jlvitaJT! jahitva -ena macCUJT!
a:daya punagantva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -e); V 478,3
(ailguliJT! -e thapetva); VI 95,27 (pa1it~ oloketva
agantva -e laggaJT! vi ya mara1_1~ passamano, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nalatante); Ap 575,4 (tassa -e patita, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se lalate); Vism 185,21 (y~ sar!re unnatatthan~
ja1_11_1UkaJT! va uro va -~ va); Sp 999,3 (-e va i.iru-ad!su
va, Be so; Ce lalate; Ee, Se lalate va urad!su va); 1211,13
(bhamukaya va -e va, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se lalate); Spk I
215,21 (attano -e mahagal_l«;iaJT! apassanto sasapamattaya
pi!akaya m~ codetabbaJT! maññasl ti); Dhp-a III 116,4
(aho imissa kesa sobhana aho -aJT! sobhanan ti, Be, Ce
so; Ee -a sobha ti; Se lalat~ sobhan ti); Ud-a 258,22
(-en a macCUJT! ga1_1hant1 viya); Mhv 6:29 (saro -am
ahacca);- 0 '-anta, m. [nalata + anta 1], the edge of the
forehead; the forehead; Ja I 118,9 (nalatato sede
muccante parisuddhena satakena -~ puñchi);
VI 218,10* (sobhayanti -~; 219,3·: kass' ete evari.ipa
kesa -~ upasobhenti); 331,23 (t~ osadh~ ... -e
makkhesi, Ee, Se so; Be nalate; Ce lalatante);
513 naJina
Vism 249,13 (kesa ... purato -en a ... paricchinna).
nala!ika, f [cf S. !ex. lalatika], a gesture on the forehead;
a frown; V in III 180,35 (naccakiJT! evaJT! vadanti idha
bhagini naccassi.i ti -aJT! pi denti; Sp 622,3/oll.: sadhu
sadhu bhaginl ti attano nalate anguliJT! thapetva tassa
nalate thapenti); MI 109,1 (slsaJT! okampetva jivh~
nilla~etva tivisakhaJT! -aJT! nalate vutthapetva; Ps 11 74,26:
-an ti valibhailgaJT!, nalate tisso rajiyo dassento
valibhailgaJT! vutthapetva ti attho) t S I ll8,2 (nalatena
-aJT!; Spk I 182,4: -an ti bhakutiJT!, nalate utthit~
valittayan ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr valittacan ti).
naJa (and nala), m. [cf S. na«;!a, na~a, nala], a species of
reed (SAF: great reed, Arundo donax L.); reed, rushes
in general; Abh601 (-o ca dhamano); ViniV 35,7
(pha~ublj~ nama ucchu ve~u -o); S I 5,9* (etena bala
sussanti -o va harito luto); A 11 73,25 (-o attavadhaya
phalaJT! deti); Dhp 337 (ma vo -~ va soto va maro
bhañji punappunaJT!); Ja I 171,18* (-ena vanJT!
pivissama); 172,5 (bodhisatto ... sabbe pi -a ekacchidda
honti.i ti adhiqhasi); 11 220,14* (yo taJT! pada -am iva
pothayissati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nalam); IV 141,9· (-o ti
vicchikana~o kakkatakana~o pi so rattava1_11_10 hoti; Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nalo ti); Nidd I 409,22 (yatha -o asaro
nissaro sarapagato); Sv 856,9 (dve pitaputta 0 -kara
paccekabuddhassa -ehi ca udumbarehi ca Pal_ll_lasalaJT!
karapetva); - ifc see kakkataka-, vicchika-; -
0
agara, n., a hut of reeds; a hut roofed with reeds or
rushes; M III 61,14 (-a va ti1_1agara va aggi mukko; Ps IV
103,16: -a ti n~ehi channaparicchanna agara,
sesasambhara pan' ettha rukkhamaya honti); Th 256
(dhunatha maccuno senaJT! -aJT! va kuñjaro); Ja V 121,19*
(-aJT! va s!dati); Ap 278,25 (-~ karitvana ti1_1ena
chadayiJT! ahaJT!); - 0 -kalapi,f, a bundle or sheaf of
reeds; S 11 114,17 (dve -iyo aññamaññ~ nissaya
titrheyyuJT!); 114,22 (tasaJT! ... -In~, Be, Ce, Se so; E e
-in~); Vism 560.26 (vatabbhahata ... -iyo vi ya, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se -ino); 595,10 (-!su, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -isu);
-
0
-bhittika, mfn., with a wall of reeds; Ja IV 318,17
(-aJT! Pal_ll_lasalaJT! katva); - 0 -mala,f, 0 -mala, n., a
bunch of reeds; a reed-blossom;? Ap 143,17 (-~
gahetvana bandhitva vljaniJT! ahaJT! buddhassa
upanamesiJT!; Ap-a 416,8: na~assa mala pupphaJT! -aJT!
tena -ena vljaniJT! karesin ti); 412,zo; Th-a 11 89,27 (-aya
pi.ijaJT! akasi).
naJaka\ m. [na~a + ka2], a reed; Ap 212,28 (cankamaJT! ...
-ehi paticchannaJT! vatatapanivaral_laJT!).
naJaka 2 , nalaka, m. (or mfn.) [?],a kind of bird; (or of a
particular colour; ?); Ja VI 539,11* (halidda lohita seta
ath' ettha -a bahi.i).
naJa ti, pr. 3 sg. [?], ? Ap-a 416,6 (-ati asaro nissaro hutva
ve~uvaJT!sato pi tanuko sallahuko jato ti na~o, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee na~aJT! hi);
na!api, m. [?], a kind of water-animal; Ja VI 537,19*
(pahi.ita varigocara rohita -1 singi.i kumbhila ... , Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nalape) quoted Sadd 651,6 (na~ape).
naJamina, m. [S. lex. nalamlna], a kind offish; Abh 672.
na!ina, nalina, n., -a,f [S. nalina], a lotus flower; a
water-lily, Nelumbium speciosum; Abh 685 (nalina-
pokkharaJT!); Ja V 419,25 (in cpd; 419,27': -an ti
setapadumaJT!); Th-a III 143,15 (yatha nimmalaJT! virajaJT!
na}ini
-aJTl udakena na lippati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niluppalaJTl
virajaJTl udakena); Sadd 231,7•; - 0 -jalajiikii}.J].a, mfn.,
overspread with lo tus jlowers and water-lilies; Ap 1,18
(bhümi .. . -a, Be so; Ce na)ini-; E e, Se na)ina-
jalajakil).I).a; Ap-a 104,27: jalajanalinapadumehi akil).I).a).
naJini, nalini, f [S. nalini], a lotus-pond; Vv 84:19 (raja
yatha Vessaval).O na)inya, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se na!inya;
V v-a 340,25: na)inya ti evaJTlnamake kl)anaghane, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee na)iññan ti); Ja IV 90,15 (ekaJTl -irp
upanissaya thitaya pabbataguhaya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
ekanillnaJTl) = Cp-a 110,16; Ja IV 94,25 (-iya avidüre, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nillniya) = Cp-a 114,9; Sv 968,12
(Kuverassa -I padumasarabhüta, sa dharal).i nama
pokkharal).i sada nirantaraJTl sobhati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
sadharal).i nama).
nava 1, mfn. and m. [ts], l.(mfn.)new, fresh; recent;
young; (iic also: newly, recently); Abh 713; Vin V
176,26 (poral).ika sanghati paccuddharitabba -a sanghati
adhinhatabba); D I 224,14 (pur~arp bandhanarp
chinditva aññarp -arp bandhanarp kareyya); MI 93,6
(pural).anarp kammanaJTl tapasa vyantibhava -anaJTl
kammanarp akaral).a); 233,18 (passeyya ...
kadalikkhandharp ujuJTl -aJTl; Ps Il 279,16: -an ti
tarunaJTl) = S IV 167,32 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee navakaJTl);
A V 233,28 (brahmal).o tadahuposathe sisarp nahato -arp
khomayugaJTl nivattho); Khp 6:14 (khil).aJTl pural).aJTl
-aJTl natthisambhavarp; Pj I 194,15: -an ti sampati
vattamanarp); Ud 38,26 (appodakapayasarp patiyadap-
etva -aJTl ca sappi); Sn 944 (pur~arp nabhinandeyya -e
khantirp na kubbaye); Ja IV 181,16 (Sakko devaraja -e
devaputte apassanto); V 407,22* (-amhi kocchamhi yada
upavisi); VI 206,18* (sukkhesu karthesu -esu capi);
Vism 118,24 (0 -ttarp jil).I).attarp); Ps II 105,33 (jil).I).ani pi
-ani pi suddhani pi asuddhani pi vatthani); Spk II 167,17
(vu<;l<;lhe ca -e ca badhati); - ifc see nicca-; - 2. (mfn.
and m.) [BHS id.] new, having recently ente red the
sailgha; a novice; Vin I 40,2o (aharp kho avuso -o
acirapabbajito adhunagato imaJTl dhammavinayaJTl);
IV 142,33 (bahü bhikkhü thera ca -a ca majjhima ca);
M III 137,14 (-o ce pi ... bhikkhu akhii).asavo kalaJTl
karoti); S I 68,25 (kiJTl pana bhavarp Gotamo daharo
e' eva jatiya -o ca pabbajaya ti); Th 429 (yada -o
pabb:Dito jatiya sattavassiko); Spk I 43,31
(aparipUI).I).apañcavasso bhikkhu -o nama hoti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr nava); - o• -iivuta, mfn. [nava + avuta2],
newly woven; V in III 130,28 ( -arp kamba1arp, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se 0 -dhotarp);- 0 '-ubbhinna, mfn., (what is) newly
sprung up; Abh 543 (-e tu ankuro); - 0 -kamma, n.
l. building work; repairs; Vin II 159,zófoll. (manussa
sakkaccarp -aJTl karonti . . . bhikkhü -arp adhitthenti);
172,25 (anujanami bhikkhave akatarp va vihararp
vippakatarp va -aJTl datun ti); Ja IV 378,29
(sattabhümakapasadarp katurp arabhiJTlSU mahantaJTl
-aJTl ahosi); VI 429,1 (taJTl divasaJTl -en' eva
vitinametva); Ap 251,2o (nitthite -e); Mi1367,26;
Vism 119,18 (bhikkhü evarp vadanti ayasma
yathasukharp samal).adhammaJTl karotu mayaJTl -arp
karissama ti); Sp 282,2 (-'-attharp va pana itthakapuñjo
va mattikadinarp va rasi); Ps Il 91,21 (por~akapal).<;lita
pana -arp katva pi vitakkarp pacchindiJTlsu); Mp I 228,21
514 nava
(ayarp pi bhikkhu evarüpassa -assa karako kiJTl nama
samal).adhammaJTl karissatl ti); Dhp-a Il 78,2 (yarp kiñci
vihare uposathagaradikaranavasena katarp -arp); 116,z
(mahaparivel).arp nama arabhiJTlsu -assa mahantataya
dhane appahonte ... ); Th-a I 139,3o (ayarp kutika jil).I).a
aññaJTl kutikarp katurp vagati ti --vasena cittarp
uppadeti); - 2.fresh action, present acts; S IV 132,22
(yarp kho bhikkhave etarahi kammarp karoti kayena
vacaya manasa idaJTl vuccati bhikkhave -aJTl); -
0
-kammika, m(fn). [cf BHS navakarmika], (one) who is
in charge of building work; a builder. carpenter, Vin II
15,3o (ayasma Sudhammo Macchikasal).<;le Cittassa
gahapatino avasiko hoti -o dhuvabhattiko ); 160,10 (-o
bhikkhave bhikkhu ussukkarp apajjissati kinti nu kho
viharo khipparp pariyosanarp gaccheyya ti
khal).<;laphullarp patisankharissati); IV 211,K (iccham'
aharp ayye bhikkhul).Isailghassa vihararp katurp detha me
-aJTl bhikkhunin ti; Sp 900,w: -an ti navakamma-
adhighayikaJTl); Ja IV 310,14* (-o hotu Kajailgalayarp;
311 ,25·: tattha kira dabbasambhara sulabha); Spk I 264,24
(navakammaJTl nissaya jivatl ti -o); Mp I 31,15 (ekacco
-o hoti uposathagarabhojanasaladini kareti);
0
-ggaha, mfn. [nava + gaha2], recently caught; Th 357
(kuñjararp adantarp -arp; Th-a II 151,32: aciragahitarp);
-
0
-Canda, m., the new moon; Ja IV 117,13' (somayage
ti -e utthite somayagaJTl nama yakkhabalirp kariJTlSU, Be
so; Ee 0 -chande; Ce, Se 0 -chal).e upaghite); Spk II 204,zo;
- -o in Ee at Ja III 141,12' is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
cando; - 0 -Chandaka, n., a new (dif.ferent) joint gift;?
Ja III 288,13' (-edani diyyati, Ce, Ee so; Be
o -channakedani; Se o -cchaddakedani; 288,18': pub be
amhakarp kul).<;lakayagu va jhamabhattarp va diyyati ajja
pana -aJTl navakaraJTl danarp diyyati, Ce, Ee so; Be
0
-channakam; Se 0 -cchaddakarp ... dani diyyati) quoted
Sadd 635,26 (akaro ekararp thane); - 0 -dhota, mfn.,
newly washed; Sp 307,24; - 0 -nava, mfn., ever new;
quite new; one new ajieranother; Thi 473 (divase divase
tisattisata -a pateyyurp kayamhi, so read with Th App II,
p. 246,15*; Thi-a 259,3o: tava-d-eva pita-nisitabhavena
abhinavani); Vism 585,11 (-anaJTl uppadadassanato
sassataditthiJTl pajahati); Mp II 234,12 (-anarp
devaputtanarp apatubhavena); Ud-a 355,13 (ekasmirp
yeva atJlatva -ani diqhigatani ... paggayha): Th-a II 13,1
(dasabalassa -a dhammadesana patibhati, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee na tarp vina); - 0 -nivesa, m., a new residence;
Thi 518 (sailgharamamhi -amhi) = Ap 512,6 (Ce, Ee so;
Be o -nivesanamhi; Se nivesamhi); - o -nita, n., se e sv;
-
0
-ppiiya, m., being mainly novices; ~ S II 218,23
(olujjati kho te avuso Ánanda parisa palujjanti kho te
avuso -a; Spk Il 178,23joll.: avuso ete tuyharp payena
yebhuyyena navaka ekavassikaduvassika dahara e' eva
samal).era ca palujjanti bhijjanti); - 0 -ratta, mfn. [nava
+ ratta 1], newly dyed; Vin III 130,18; As 81,25; -
0
-Viiyima, mfn., newly woven; newly made; Sp 773,2;
Pp-a 216,5 (potthaküpamesu ... navo ti -o); 216,33
(kasika-vatthaJTl . . . -arp anaggharp hoti);
0
-vutfha, mfn., l. which has recently rained; Ja III484,9
(-e deve, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee vughe); Spk III 70,28 (gavo
-e deve bhümirp ghayitva) =As 315,7 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-vage); - 2. which has recently been rained on;
nava
Dhp-a I 19,24 (-aya bhümiya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
o -vaqhaya); - o -sassa, n., the first-fruits uf the harvest;
A III 41,16 (yani tani -ani navaphalani); Ap 387,17 (-arp
daditvana); Sp 680,23.
nava 2, num. [S. navan] (nom.!acc. nava; instr.labl. navahi;
gen.!dat. navannarp; loe. navasu), nine; Abh 61 (-a
ggaba); V in II 204,3 (-annarr va Upali atirekanavannarp
va sañgharaji e' eva hoti sailghabhedo ca); V 137,25foll.;
D II 14,6 (añña itthika -a va dasa va mase gabbharp
kucchina pariharitva vijayanti); III 262,25 (-a
aghatavatthüni); A IV 372,5 (yo so bhikkhu araham
khl~asavo . . . abhabbo so -a rhanani ajjhacariturr);
456,26 (-a bhikkhave dhamme pabaya bhabbo arahattarr
sacchikaturr); Sn 197 (ath' assa -ahi sotehi as u el savati
sabbada); Th 279 (-a sotani te kaye yani sandanti
sabbada); la III 128,12 (-ahi lokuttaradhammehi parisarr
rañjetl ti dhammaraja); V 253,13' (tarp abararr -annarp
parikulyanarp vasena paccavekkhitva); VI 486,5
(kumaro . . . dhatlnarp -a vare pilandhanam adasi);
Paris I 2,11 (-ahi samadhicariyahi); 5,12 (-a dhamma
abhiññeyya -a anupubbavihara); Vibh 92,38 (-a dhatuyo
anidassanasapparigha); Mil 92,25 (nav' ime puggala
mantitarr guyharr vivaranti na dharenti); Vism 254,5 (-a
slsakapalaqhlnl ti); 647,2o (-a ca sattavasa); Sp 6!,22
(ayarr sañglti -ahi masehi ninhita); Sv 473,25 (-annarp
brahmalokanarr sampattirr dassesi); PslV 111,26 (-ato
ünaparisaya); 112,1 (-annarp jananarr yo sañgharp
bhindati); Dhp-a I 146,8 (Devadatto pi kho -a mase
gilano pacchime kale satthararr daqhukamo hutva);
Pv-a 2,26 (-asu sasanailgesu); Ap-a 10,9 (pabbajitanarp hi
sarakasmirp -a dosa upaqhahanti); As 26,s (katharr -a
añganl ti); Sadd 297,sfoll.;- ifc see dvi- (sv dvi[r]); -
o• -aóga, mfn. [nava + añga2], with nine constituent
parts; Ap 45,3 (yavata buddhabha~itarp -arr satthu-
sasanarr): Dlp 4: 15; Sadd 926,8* (-am tu ogahetvana
sasanarr); - 0 aha, m. [nava + aha(n)], a period uf nine
days; - --paricchanna, mfn., concealed for nine days;
Vin II 51,21;- 0 iiha, within nine days; Vin III 204,29;-
0
-usabhika, mfn., measuring nine usabhas; Mp JI 216,6
(-o surpsumarapeto); - 0 -kkhattm:p, ind., nine times;
Sp 263,3!; Dhp-a III 377,12; Sadd 187,8;
0
-tthanika, mfn., connected with nine occasions or
matters; Vin V 225,23* (ñatti ca -a) i= Mp JI 165,22; -
0
-dha, ind., ninefold; in nine ways; Vism 561,15*;
Sp 1413,26;- 0 -navuti, num.,f, 99; Vism 195,!2 (-iya
1omaküpasahassehi); 560,!4 (-i dhamma); Sp 365,12 (-i
thullaccayani); - 0 -parikkharika, mfn., who has nine
requisites; Sv 207,1; - 0 -bhümaka, 0 -bhümika, mfn.,
having nine storeys; la I 58,14 (tayo pasade karesi ekarr
-arp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se o -bhümikarr); Ps II 254,23 (-assa,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -bhümikassa); - 0 -mlisika, mfn.,
being at the age uf nine months; lasting nine months;
Niddi 120,!3 (-o pi ... cavati); Sv727,JJ (chamasikarr
-arp va paripadarr ga~hati); - 0 -mülaka, mfn., with
nine bases, with nine roots; Vin III 97,7 (-arr pi
dasamülakarr pi); Tikap-a 234,3o; - 0
-yojana, mfn.,
nine yojanas in extent; la V 270,29' (-aya jalita-
ayaparhaviya); Sv 487,23 (mukharr -arr): Pj I 200,19 (-e
magge); 0
-yojanasatika, mfn., measuring 900
yojanas; Sp 197,1 (mahaman<;!a1arr -arr); Sv 488,3
515 navaka
(slsam -arr); - 0
-yojanika, mfn., nine yojanas in
extent; la V 272,19' (-ena ayakapalena); Spk I 284,6
(citako -o ahosi); - 0
-vassa, mfn., of nine years'
standing, one who has been ordained for nine years;
Sp 1085,7; - 0 -vassika, mfn., being nine years old;
lasting for nine years; Nidd I 120,!7 (-o pi ... cavati);
Sp 1246,s; - 0 -Vidha, mfn., of nine kinds; ninefold;
Vibh 389,36 (-a mana); Vism 213,14 (pariyatti-
dhammassa e' eva -assa ca lokuttaradhammassa gu~a);
Sp 16,21 (buddhavacanaq1 ... ailgavasena -arr);
Sv 569,21 (-a hi asaniyo);- -ena, in nine ways; in a
ninefold way; Nidd I 80,!5 (-ena mano); Dhs 592 (-ena
1
rüpasañgaho); - 0 -sata, num. and mfn. [nava + sata ],
(numbering) 900; Dhp-a IV 104,4 (-a cora); Sadd 801,s
(satassa navakarp -aq1); - 0 -sota, mfn. [nava + soti],
with nine apertures; Th 1152 (sarlraq1 -arr); -
0
-hattha, mfn., measuring nine hattha measures;
Vism 92,16 (-arr ca sarakarr); Sp 1246,8 (a<;i<;!hayogo ...
-o).
1
navaka 1, m. [nava + ka 2; cfS., BHS navaka], new; having
recently entered the sañgha; a novice; Vin II 208,!9 (sace
avasiko bhikkhu vu<;l<;iho hoti abhivadetabbo sace -o hoti
abhivadapetabbo); 214,38 (-ehi bhikkhühi pa!hamatararr
nivattitabbarp paccha therehi); III 160,!5
(Mettiyabhummajaka bhikkhü -a e' eva honti
appapuñña ca); SI 185,6 (ayasma Vailglso -o hoti
acirapabbajito ohiyyako viharapa1o, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
navo); la III 461,22 (0 -tta); Sp 358,7 (eko -o hoti
bahussuto pana bahunnarr dhammarr vaceti); Ps TI
302,31 (adhuna nibbatta 0 -devaputta); Pj JI 385,5 (0 -raja
hi niketl ti na vuccati); Ap-a 177,21 (vu<;l<;lha aggasanarp
ca aggapin<;larr ca labhanti -a yarr kiñci-d-eva asanarp
lükhabhojanarp ca); - ifc see nicca-; - 0 -tara, mfn.,
campar., newer; younger (in the sañgha); Vin JI 94,23
(avasika bhikkhü vu<;i<;ihatara honti agantuka bhikkhü
-a); V l66,1J (therataro 'mhl ti -o navajanitabbo); D II
154,12 (theratarena ... bhikkhuna -o bhikkhu namena va
gottena va avusovadena va samudacaritabbo; Sv 592,9:
navaka ti avatva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee navako ti); Sp 1295,1
(sa attano -arr uqhapetva nisldituq1 labhati); Mil 24,6
(ay asma Nagaseno . . . purato cattallsaya bhikkhu-
sahassanarr -o hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se navataro);
Vism 426,2.
2 2 2
navaka , m.n. and mfn. [nava + ka ], a set uf nine;
(being) a section consisting uf a set or sets of nine;
V in V 137,35 (adhammakamme dve -ani); 138,3 ( -arr
niqhitam); M III !,21 (mayarp ... antevas! labhitva
parhamarr evarr g~apema ekarp ekakarr . . . nava -a
dasa dasaka ti); Thp. 55,8* (-amhi nipatamhi gathayo pi
ima nava); Dhs p. 132,29; As 212,36 (dve -a aqharasa);
Vibh-a 397,5 (navamatika ekena -ena ... nikkhitta);
Sadd 801,8 (satassa -arp navasatarp);- 0 -nipata, m., a
section consisting of sets uf nine; A IV 466,5 (-o
samatto, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -arp samattarp; Be --paji
ni¡rhita); Th p. 55,9 (-o ni¡rhito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
navanipato) i= Th!p. 143,!8 (-o samatto, Ce, Se so; Ee
navanipato; Be navanipato nitrhito); la I 241,28 (tassa
lolabhavo -e kakajatake avibhavissati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
navanipate) i= II 41,5 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee navanipate);
Th-a I 3,17 (-e eko thero nava gatha).
nava ti
navati, pr. 3 sg., see sv no ti.
navanita, nonita, n. [S. navanita], fresh butter; Abh 500
(nonitm:p.); Vin I 244,34 (anujanami bhikkhave pañca
gorase khirm:p. dadhi111 takkm:p. -a111 sappi111); 11177,6
(bhesajja111 niima sappi111 va -m:p. va te1m:p. va ... deti);
DI 201,26 (gava khira111 khiramha dadhi dadhimhii -m:p.
-amha sappi); M III 141,2o (abhabbo nonitassa
adhigamaya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -assa); Pv 30:5
(nonitapil).<;lm:p. va pavedhamanm:p., Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-pil).<;lm:p. vi ya vedhamana111); Ja VI 206,14* (khirm:p. ...
dadhi bhavitva -m:p. pi hoti); Dhs 646 (odano
kummaso . . . sappi -m:p. tela111 . . . ida111 ta111 rupa111
kabajiilkiiro ah aro); Mil41 ,2 (-ato ghata111 parivatteyya);
Sadd 633,12 (-a111 nonita111); - nonita-sukhuma1a, mfn.,
soft as butter; Ap 466,27.
navama, mf(-a, -i)n. and -i, f [S. navama], l. (mfn.) the
ninth; Vin III 196,3 (kivacirm:p. pan' Ananda Sariputto
agacchissati ti -m:p. va bhagava divasm:p. dasamm:p. va ti);
IV 160,5 (aym:p. bhikkhave -o adinavo rajantepura-
ppavesane); D 11 167,19 (iti anha sarirathüpa -o
tumbathüpo dasamo ailgarathüpo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
kumbhathüpo); M III 255,6 (aym:p. -i patipuggalika
dakkhil).a); A IV 401,29 (aya111 -o sattavaso); Sn 109 (-o
so parabhavo); Ja IV 125,14 (Dasarathamahiiraja
puttasokena -e sm:p.vacchare kiilam akasi); V 450,21*
(ekamekaya itthiya anharrta patino siya ... kareyya -e
chanda111); Ap 62,7 (buddhena -e tattha samal).e aqha
bhojayi111); 169,15 (ito ca -e kappe); Bv 2:156
(tadadakkhi111 -a111 mettaparami111); Mi1113,13 (natth'
añño -o hetu mahato bhümica1assa patubhavaya); Pj 11
183,7 (-aya [gathaya]); Vibh-a 423,21 (-a
paccavekkhal).apañña); Mhv 1:19 (bodhito -e mase);
Sadd 795,6; - navamm:p. in Ee at M II 146,15 is wr for
na ca ma111 (Be, Ce, Se so);- 2. (j., scil. ratti) the ninth
day (night) of the lunar half-month; Ja VI 522,6*
(duyirrha111 te -iya111); Ps III 310,15; Vv-a 72,1 H).
navamalika,f [ts], a kind ofjasmine; SAF: multi-petalled
jasmine, Jasminum arborescens Roxb.; Abh 576 (satta1a
-a, Ce so; Be navamallika); Sadd 689,19.
navamiya, (m)j(n). [cfnavama], (an offering) belonging to
the ninth day of the lunar half-month; ? Ja VI 522,24' foil.
(taya navamiym:p. yaga111 duyyinhal11 bhavissati so te
yagapil).<;lo parhamm:p. mahallakakiikena gahito
bhavissati, duyyiqha te -a ti pi patho, -a taya duyyinha
bhavissati ti; ad 522,6*: duyinha111 te navamiya111).
naviya, mfn. [S. navya, naviya], new, fresh; Mi1389,11
(candüpama bhikkhave kulani upasailkamatha apakass'
eva kaya111 apakassa citta111 niccm:p. -a kulesu
appagabbha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be niccanavaka) quoting S 11
198,1 (eds niccanavaka; Spk II 166,6: niccanavaka ti
niccm:p. navaka va, agantukasadisa eva hutva ti attho, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee niccanaviya ti).
navuta, mfn. [cfS. navata], l. the 90th; Ap 180,8 (ekamhi
-e kappe, split cpd); - 2. characterised by 90, plus 90;
Tikap-a237,25 (-ani cattari satani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
cattajisa); - ifc see eka-, catu- (sv catu[r]), cha-
(sv cha2), dva-, dve- (sv dve 2), pañca-.
navuti, navuti111, f, num. [S. navati; AMg I).aui], 90; D III
290,9 (ime -i dhamma); Ud 92,3 (yesa111 -i piyani -i
tesa111 dukkhani); Ap 154,26 (gathayo -i vutta); 298,8
516 nassati
(kappe -i sm:p.sari111, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee kappa111); 298,16
(atita -i kappa, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -i); 585,7 (thina111
satasahassana111 -inm:p.); Bv 17:7 (kotisatanm:p. -inm:p.
asitiya ca kotina111, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -iya); Vibh 422,27
(catummaharajikiinal11 devanal11 ayuppamiil).a!11
manussagal).anaya kittakm:p. hoti, -i vassasatasahassani);
Mil349,29 H piil).akotiyo); Mhv 5:29 (saliviihasahassani
-i!11 tu suva pana ... aharil11su); Sadd !87,8foll.; 297,33;
- ifc see aqha- (sv arrha2), eka-, eküna-, catu-
(sv catu[r]), cha- (sv cha2), dva-, dve- (sv dve2), nava-
(sv nava2), pañca-, satta- (sv satta4); - 0 -kappa, m.n.,
the 90th aeon; Ap 159,7 (ito -amhi);- 0 -vassika, mjn.,
being 90 years old; Nidd 1 120,19; - 0 -hattha, n. and
mfn., 1. (n.) 90 hattha measures; Ja I 34,28 (-' -ubbedha111
sañrm:p.); Bv 5:29 (uccattanena so buddho --m-uggato,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --samuggato);- 2. (mfn.) measuring
90 hattha measures; Sv 488,26 (dhurapattani -ani);
Bv-a 83,4; - see also channavutima (sv cha2).
navutika, mjn., see sv navutika.
navutiya, mfn., see sv navutiya.
-nasa, [ts], the nose;- ifc see go-.
nasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nasate, Wg § 16:26], is
crooked; Sadd 448,26 (nasa kotille: -ati).
nassa in Ee at Ja V 203,21* and VI 189,3 is prob. wr for
tassa (Be, Ce, Se so).
nassati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nasyati], is lost; is lost from sight;
perishes; disappears, goes away; comes to nothing; is
lost from the memory, is forgotten; Dhatup 456 (nasa
adassane); Dhatum 696; V in I 5,15 (-ati vata bho loko
vinassati vata bho lo k o); 255,34 (tassa tm:p. civara111
kayiramanm:p. -ati); III 247,20 (patto -eyya va vinasseyya
va bhijjeyya va ti); IV 159,23 (rañño antepure aññatara111
ratanm:p. -ati); 163,1 (sace maym:p. gamissama
-issataym:p. ailgu1imuddika ti); D III 89,1 (aññe
gomaym:p. khipanti -a asuci -a asuci ti); S II 272,2o
(kataññuno bhavissama katavedino na ca no amhesu
appaka111 pi katm:p. -issati ti, Be so; Se vinassissati ti; Ce,
Ee katavedino amhesu appaka111 pi katm:p. ma -issati ti);
Sn 666 (na hi -ati kassaci kamma111); Ja I 116,21
(gahitagahitm:p. padm:p. upariiparipadm:p. gal).hantassa
-ati); IV 42,28 (ma esa balo mm:p. nissaya -atü ti); 203,6
(manto kho pana me pagul).O idani na -issati); V 418,1
( -atha tumhe vasaliyo vinassatha tumhe vasaliyo; 419,6·:
-atha ti gacchatha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); VI 483,1*
(palita -antu; 483,16': pa1itani pi me sirasmi111 -antu ma
paññayi111su); Ap 431,10 (na hi -anti katani Gotama);
Sp 871,7 (-a yattha te na pass ama tattha gaccha ti);
Sv 299,31 (-ati vata me dana111 yassa me evarüpa dussila
bhuñjanti ti); Mp III 236,25 (gahitanimitta111 pana rbitassa
pi nisinnassa pi nipannassa pi na -ati ti); Dhp-a 11 57,15
(aha111 vatam eva bhakkhiirni na aññm:p. aharm:p. añña111 hi
me khadantassa tapo -ati ti); Th-a lii 127,13 (arajakm:p.
rajja111 -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na nandati) = Ap-a 257,24
(-issati); Nidd-a I 243,17 (atta sariren' eva saha -ati ti
maññanti); Patis-a 368,9 (yasmi111 samaye kappo aggina
-ati); As 91,21 (gharo pi bhijjati udaka111 pi -ati);
Vibh-a 432,13 (partama111 abhidhammapitaka111 -ati);
Sadd 490,13 (nasa adassane: nassanadhammm:p. -ati); -
part.pr. (a) nassanta, mfn., Ja V 462,13; Vism 188,2;
Sv 96,26 (pal).akehi -ante); (b) nassamana, mfn., Ja III
nassati
301,21 (-amanarp. dhanarp. rakkhiturp.); Nidd-a 11 83,11;
- cond. 3 sg. nassissa, Ja 11 112,17 (sace hi imassa
nhapitassa 1mma upasakena saddhirp. sarp.saggo
nabhavissa samuddamajjhe yeva nassissa ti, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se -issatl ti); 3 pl. anassirp.su, nassissanti, Ja VI
586,22' (sace kira ettako assaso nabhavissa dve kumara
sukkhahadaya hutva anassirp.su, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be addha
-issanti); aor. 3 sg. (a) nassi, Vin III 57,18
(ma-y-idarp. c!vararp. -1 ti patisamesi); A III 54,1s
(nassanadhammarp. ma -1 ti alabbhan1yarp. thanarp.); Ja II
307,14 (tesarp. gahitagahitarp. na -i); (b) nassa, A III 122,3
(ma me yoggapatho -a ti; Mp III 277,6: ma -atu);
2 sg. nassi, Ja I 373,25 (tapasa taya gahitasatake cha<;i<;iehi
ma -1 ti); 1 sg. (a) nassarp., anassirp., anassarp., Sn 1120
(maharp. -arp.; Pj II 603,3: maharp. . . . anassirp.; =
Nidd-a II 82,8: Be anassirp.; Ce, Ee, Se anassarp.);
(b) anassasirp., nassasirp.,? S IV 43,17 (etthaharp. bhante
anassasirp., Ce, Ee so; Be anassasarp.; Se anassasarp.;
Spk TT 369,7: anassasin ti bhante aharp. ettha anassasirp.
nattho nama ahan ti vadati, Ce so; Ee ettha assassananho
nama; Be, Se anassasan ti ... anassasirp. ... ) = 44,7 (Ce,
Ee so; Be anassasarp. panassasarp.; Se panassasarp.; Spk II
369,2o: anassasin ti nassasirp. nanho nama asin ti attho,
Ce so; Ee assasanattho nama icchanattho; Be, Se
anassasan ti nassasirp., nanho namamhi ice eva attho) t
45,5 (Ee so; Ce panassassarp.; Be anassasarp. panassasarp.;
Se panassasarp.; Spk II 369,24: anassasan ti nagho
panassasan ti atinattho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee panassassan ti
panagho assarp. atinattho ); 3 pl. (a) nassirp.su, Ja III
361,n· (ma mayi passante -irp.sü ti); IV 137,16
(lol,laja1apahatani dve pi cakkhüni -irp.su): Dhp-a II 28,3
(putta me -irp.sü ti vihaññati -antl ti vihaññati -issantl ti
vihaññati); (b) anassurp., MI 393,35 (ettha bhante
anassurp. nig31,1tba ti; Ps III 109,22: nanha nig31,1tha); A I
65,3o (anassurp. kho Sariputta aññatitthiya paribbajaka ye
imarp. dhammapariyayarp. nassosun ti); 1 pl. anassama,
MI 177,2o (manarp. vata bho anassama; Ps 11 198,10/oll.:
sace mayarp. na upasaiJ.kameyyama imina thokena ...
apayirupasanamatten' eva nattha bhaveyyama); -
inf. nassiturp., Ja II 25,6 (tumhakarp. dinnarp. yava
padapuñchana pi -iturp. na labhat! ti); - pp natfha, mfn.
[S. na~ta], lost, lost to sight; disappeared; perished;
spoiled; cometo nothing,fruitless; Vin I 109,29 (c1varani
-ani pi da<;l<;lhani pi undurehi pi khayitani); III 44,23
(-arp. imesarp. samaññarp.); SI 170,11 (catuddasa
balivadda -a honti); A II 249,21 (-arp. na gavesanti);
III 55,11 (nassanadhamme -e); Ja I 379,26 (akkharp.
mukhe pakkhipitva akkho -o ti); II 122,23 (raja cü]am31,1i
me -o ti); 330,26 (-arp. jhanarp. puna uppadetva);
III 355,24 (Devadatto saha pansaya -o ti);
Mil 307,27 foll. (sassarp. kale -arp. udahu aka1e -an ti);
Vism 283,19 (-arp. dani me kammaghanan ti); 418,1 (yarp.
pi alokarp. labhimha so pi no -o ti); Mhv 38:62;
Sadd 490,14 (nasa adassane: ... -o vinattho); - ifc see
kriya- (sv kiriya); - natthayika, mfn. [from nanha +
aya], who has lost his goods or income; bereft;
Mil131,3o; 201,9;- natthac!varika, (m)fln)., whose robe
is lost; V in IV 278,25; - neg. anattha mfn., V in III
197,2o; JaiV 312,5* (yo ve anattharp. natthan ti caha);-
sunattha, mfn., completely lost; legitimately damaged;
517 nassati
Sp 355,13 (bha1,1<;lagarikarp. ca na sampaticchapeti
nattharp. sunattham eva); 1248,11 (saiJ.ghikaparibhogena
paribhuñjantassa nagharp. sunattharp. jil,ll,la!p. sujii,ll,larp.);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) naseti, -ayati [S. nasayati], brings
to naught; loses, lets disappear; spoils; destroys, ruins;
removes; drives away; MI 117,34 (ühaneyya okacararp.
-eyya okacarikarp.); S IV 248,2 (-ent' eva narp. kule na
vasenti; Spk III 87,21: g1vayarp. gahetva n1haranti); Ja IV
98,3o* (dh1ra ... pub be katarp. va pi na -ayanti); 445,2o
(gabbharp. -eyyurp); V 73,3o· (attana katakammarp. ma
-etha); 462,13 (attanarp. ca rattharp. ca -essas1 ti);
VI 417,27* (imarp. gaJe gahetvana -etha vijita mama);
Cp 2:5:6 (-eh' etarp. chavarp. paparp.); 3:10:7 (nidhirp.
kakassa -aya); Mil307,25 (taru1,1asassarp. kimayo ...
-entl ti); Dhp-a I 225,7 (nagh' amha natth' amha rañño
paccekabuddho jhayati raja ñatva amhe -essati);
Nidd-a II 115,7 (sandhivasen' ettha ekaro -o);
Cp-a 123,27 (tarp. -ay1ssam¡ ti); Mhv 37:9
(mahaviharam -eturp.); Sadd 490,15 (nasa dassane: ...
karite -eti -ayati); - esp. expels from the saiJ.gha
(permanently or temporarily ); Vin I 85,2o (anujanami
bhikkhave dasah' ali.gehi samannagatarp. sam31,1erarp.
-eturp.); III 163,1 (Mettiyarp. bhikkhunirp. -etha;
Sp 582,25: idha pana liii.ganasanarp. sandhay' aha);
IV 138,33 (saiJ.gho Ka1,1takarp. sam31,1uddesarp. -etu, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se K31,1<;lakarp.); A II 240,3 (bhikkhü ...
samagga marp. santa -essanti); IV 169,10 (tam enarp. iti
viditva bahiddha -enti, tarp kissa hetu, ma aññe
bhaddake bhikkhü düses1 ti); part.pr.
(a) nasenta, mfn., Ja IV 304,2·; Ap 369,12 (tam
andhakararp. -ento); - neg. anasenta, mfn., Sp 1360,22;
(b) nasaya(t), mfn., Sp 353,s; (e) nasayamana, mfn.,
Patis-a 173,19; - aor. 3 sg. (a) nasesi, Vin IV 139,4;
Ja VI 367,3; (b) nasayi, Vin I 310,10* (sattavassika-
abadharp natthukammena -ayi); 2 sg. nasayi, Ja V 383,2o
(ma attano pitupitamahanarp. varpsarp -ayi);
3 pl. (a) nasesurp, Vin III 163,3; (b) nasayurp, Ja V
117,2•; 2 pl. nasayittha, Dhp-a 11 112,8 (ma marp bhante
-ayittha ti); Pj II 186,2o; - absol. (a) nasetva, Vin I
173,22 (so ce bhikkhave cudito bhikkhu parajikarp.
ajjhapanno ti patijanati -etva saiJ.ghena pavaretabbarp.);
Ja II 105,s (ambaphalanarp rasarp. -etva); IV 69,9
(kulavarpsarp -etva); Ap 379,24; Vism 417,29 (nesarp.
bhayarp. -etva);- neg. anasetva, Ja III 319,12; Nidd-a I
263,16 (upadharayitva ti anasetva); (b) nasayitvana, A I
281 ,8* (-ayitvana makkhika); pass. part.pr.
nasiyamana, mfn., A IV 32,15* (api -iyamanena
bhajitabbo tathavidho); Sp 584,13 (detha dani imissa
setakan1 ti -iyamanarp. tarp. bhikkhunirp. disva); -
pp nasita, mfn. [S. nasita], removed; expelled; spoiled,
ruined; destroyed; Vin IV 217,13foll. (-ita nama sayarp.
va vibbhanta hoti aññehi va -ita); MI l18,2o (-ita
okacarika); Ja I 283,28 (dhantena satarp laddharp.
atidhantena -itarp.); 510,7 (pitughatakammassa katatta
sotapattiphala parih1no Devadattena -ito raja ti);
Sp 582,3ofoll. (kirp pana bhagavata Mettiya bhikkhun1
patiññaya -ita apatiññaya -ita ti); Spk III 65,17 (-itatta);
Ps III 253,13foll. (ten' assa n' eva atltani phalani -itani
honti na anagatapaccuppannani ca -itani, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -itani ... anasitani, prob. wr) = Mp II 48,5foll. (Be,
nassana
Ce so; Ee na anagata paccuppannani ca anasitani; Se na
paccuppannani na ca anagatani) = Vibh-a 300,19 foil.;
Mhv 36:90; - neg. anasita, mfn., Ps III 253,17 = Mp 11
48,1o = Vibh-a 300,23; - sunasita, mfn., properly
expelled; Vin V 216,32; Utt-vn 720;- see also nasitaka;
- fpp (a) nasetabba, nasitabba, mfn., Vin I 88,21
(matughatako bhikkhave anupasampanno na
upasampadetabbo upasampanno -etabbo ti); IV 138,34
(eva1p ca pana bhikkhave -etabbo); Ja III 465,26
(dhammo nama na kenaci karaJ_lena -etabbo ti);
Sp 1014,12 (yo piil).atipatadisu eka111 pi kamma111 karoti
so liñganasanaya -etabbo); 1014,15 (-etabbatarr yeva
papm_1ati); 1320,33 (-itabbo nasitako nama, Be, E e so;
Ce, Se nasito va nasitako);- (b) nasiya, mfn., Cp 3:2:10
(papo kumaro yatha -iyo; Cp-a 191,14: -iyo -etabbo
ghatapetabbo); - caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) nasapeti, Vin III
162,16 (sace kho tva111 bhagini iccheyyasi ajj' eva
bhagava Dabba111 Mallaputta111 nasapeyya ti); - aor.
3 sg. nasapesi, Sp 584,9 (tasma na111 bhagava asuddhatta
yeva nasapesi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nasesi).
nassana, n. [from nassati], loss; disappearance; perishing;
Ja IV !68,11 (dhanadhañña111 nama uppajjanakale
uppajjati 0 -kale nassati); Spk III 74,21; Pp-a 182,9
(aqhanna111 hi samapattina111 kuppana111 -a111 bhaveyya);
1
-
0
-dhamma, mfn. [nassana + dhamma ], liable to
perish, to disappear; A III 54,15 (-a111 ma nassi ti
alabbhaniya111 thana111 samm_1ena va brahmal).ena va
devena va... kenaci va lokasmil11); Ja IIl 162,12
(poral).akapaJ.lc;Jita pi putte mate -a111 naqhan ti na
soci111sil ti); Sadd 490,13;- neg. anassanadhamma, mfn.,
Ja IV !68,12 (kiñci sañkharagata111 anassanadhamma111
nama natthi); - 0 -pakatika, mfn., whose nature is to
perish; impermanent; Patis-a 453,27 (rilpa111 idh' eva
maral).adhamman ti ... taip imasmi111 yeva loke -an ti
attho); - anassana, n., non-disappearance; retention;
Mp II 44,8 (asammosaya ti -'-attha111, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
apamussanattha111) = Patis-a 168,15;- see also nasana.
2 (dakkho nahapako .. . ka1psathale -am akiritva
nassanaka, mfn. [nassana + ka ], perishable; delusive;
Ps IV S6,21 (musa ti -a, Ce, Ee Se so; Be nasanaka).
nahana, f [from nayhati], binding, tying; Vism 27,13
(unnahana ti .. . uddha111 uddha111 -a vethana ti vuttaip
hoti) = Nidd-a I 419,28.
nahata, mfn., pp ofnahayati qv.
nahataka, nhataka (so usual/y Be), m. [S. snataka], one
who has bathed (at the completion of his studies), one
whose knowledge is complete; one who is washed clean;
D III 195,32* (Vessabhussa nam' atthu -assa tapassino,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhatakassa); A IV 144,25 (sattanna1p
bhikkhave dhammanaip ... nahatatta -o hoti, Ce, se so;
Ee ninahatatta; Be nhatatta nhatako); Dhp 422 (aneja111
nhataka111 buddhaJP tam ahaJP brilmi brahmaJ_laip;
Dhp-a IV 232,3: nahatakilesataya -a111, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
nhatakilesataya nhataka111) = Sn 646 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-a111); Sn 521 (ninhaya sabbapapakani... tam ahu
nhatako, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -o); Th 221 (tevijjo nhatako
e' amhi sotthiyo e' amhi vedagii, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -o);
Ap 293,21 (Siddhatthassa bhagavato nhatakassa
tapassino); Sv 663,2foll. (divasassa dvikkhattu111 va
saya111 pato va nahayanti ti -a vatacariyapariyosane va
nahata tato paqhaya brahmal).ehi saddhi111 na khadanti na
518 nahapana
pivanti ti -a, Be, Ee so; Ce tikkhattu111 va saya111 va pato
va; Se tikkhattu111 ... nhayanti ti nhataka); Ps lii 98,2
(-assa ti nahatakilesassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhatakassa ti
nhatakilesassa).
nahati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nahayati.
nahana, nhana, n. [S. snana], bathing, washing; a bath;
Abh 299 (-aip ca sinane); V in I 47,9 (sace upajjhayo
nahayitukamo hoti -a111 patiyadetabbaip); 11 31,8 (-e
pit!hiparikammaip); III 195,9 (aññena ticivarena -a111
otaranti,); V 134,7 (cha -e anupaññattiyo, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se nhane); SI 183,23 (aha111 YaJP diva papakamma111
kata111 hoti ta111 saya1p -ena pavahemi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhanena); V 390,21 foil. (ala111 dani bhal).e etena bahirena
-ena ala111 ida111 ajjhatta111 -aip bhavissati, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se nhana111); Ja I 70,12 (na -a111 na mukhadhovana1p na
sañravalañjo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhana1p); Ud-a 251,8
(hatthinago mama -a111 icchati ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhana111); Pv-a S0,21 (-en a suddhasarira, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se nhanena); Sadd 491,5 (-a111 nhanaip); - aanulitto in
Ee at la I 266,2 is prob. wr for nahatanulitto; Be
nhatanulitto; Ce nahatvanulitto; Se nhananulitto ); -
0
0dakapatiyadana, n., the preparation, provision, of
water for bathing; Spk I 258,29; - 0
-kotthaka, m.
[nahana + koqhaka 1], a tub or trough in a cubicle for
bathing; a bath-house; Sp 615,32; Dhp-a III 88,3
(phalikamaya1p -a111 karesi); 119,1o (-a111 paviqha, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -koqhal11); - 0 -garuka, mfn., thinking
bathing important; V in I 197,35 (Avantidakkhil).apathe
bhikkhave -a manussa udakasuddhika);- 0 -coJa, m., a
bathing cloth; Vism 63,5 (-an ti YaJY! bhiltavejjehi
sasisa111 nahapita kalakaJ.ll).ico)an ti chac;Jc;Jetva gacchanti,
Ce so; E e nahapitva; Be, Se nhanaco)an ti ... nhapita);
-
0
-suddhika, mfn., believing in or seeking purification
through bathing; PsI 177,5 (-o, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
nhana- ); -se e also sinana.
nahaniya, nahaniya, nhanlya, mfn. [S. snaniya], used for
-CUI}I}3, n., bathing-powder; DI 74,2
0
bathing; -
udaka111 ... sanneyya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nhaniya-) =
M IIl 92,29 (Ee so; Be nhaniya-; Ce, Se nahaniya-) =
A lii 25,14 (Ce, Ee so; Be nhaniya-; Se nhaniya-); Ja VI
509,9· (-ena upaqhapitacchaviVaJ_ll).a, Ce, Ee so; Be
nhaniya-; Se -ehi); Vism 464,15 (-ana111, E e so; Ce
nahaniya-; Be, Se nhaniya-); - 0
-sambhara, n.,
material Jo r bathing; Mp II 217,24 (-ani, Ee so; Be
nhaniya-; Ce nahaniya-; Se nhaniya-).
nahapaka, nhapaka (and nhapika ?), m. [S. snapaka], a
bath-attendant; a barber; D I 51,11 (kappaka -a, Ce, E e
so; Be nhapaka; Se nhapika; Sv 157,16: -a ti ye
nahapenti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapaka ti ye nhapenti) =
52,1o (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapaka); MI 276,24 (dakkho -o
va 0 '-antevasi va ... , Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapako);
Ap 317,3 (ajarika kappaka ca -a malakaraka, E e so; Be,
Ce, Se nhapaka); 317,5 (cammakara ca nhapika, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be nhapita); Mil33!,6 ( ... alarika suda kappaka
-a ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nhapaka); Mhv 29:20
(!hapapayi nhapite nhapake e' eva kappake ca bahii
tatha); - see also nahapita 1.
nahapana, nhapana, n. [S. snapana], bathing, washing
(someone else); attending someone bathing; DI 7,19
nahapika
(ucchadan~ parimaddana111 -a111 sambahanaJ11, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be nhapanaJ11) f- Nidd I 380,1o (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
nhapan~); A I 132,16* (ucchadanena -ena padana111
dhovanena ca, Ce so; Be, E e, Se nhapanena) = It 111 ,3*
(Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nhapanena; It-a 11 l6l,12: sltakale
u~hodakena u~hakale sltodakena gattani parisiñcitva
-ena, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapanena); Ja VI 75,25
(u~hodakena nesa111 yatharuci111 -a111 va padadhovan~
va katva, Ce, E e, Se so; Be nhapanaJ11); Sv 98,5
(aññesa111 -aJ11, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapanarp);
nahapika, f [see nahapaka], a female bath-attendant; a
woman in a barber's family;? Pv 26:13 (c~gali kap~a
honti -a ca punappun~, Ce so; Be, Se kappaka; Ee
nhamin1, wr ?; Pv-a 176,1: -a ti kappakajatika, Ce so;
Be, Se kappaka ti; Ee nahamin1 ti).
nahapita 1, nhapita1, m. (from nahapeti, caus. of nahayati;
cf nahapaka, nahapika], a barber; a bath-attendant;
Abh 505; 508 (kappako tu -o); Vin IV 10,6 (cammakara
-a); D 1 225,6 (Bhesik~ -~ amantesi, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se Rosik~ nhapit~; Sv 395,16: ev~ itthiliñgavasena
laddhanama111 -arp amantesi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhapitaJ11); 225,16 (Bhesika -o, Ce so; Ee Bhesiko; Be
Rosika nhapito; Se Rosiko nhapiko); Ja 11 112,22*
(sotthiJ11 gacchati -o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhapito; 113,3-:
-o ti 0 -kutumbiko, nhapito ti pi patho, Ce, Se so; Ee -o ti
pi patho; Be nhapito ti nhapitakutumbiko, -o ti pi
patho ); III 315,3* (cirassarp -arp laddha lomant~
apaharayirp, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhapit~); Ap 309,2o (-e
bhattake sude sabbatth' eva labham' ah~, Ee so; Be,
Ce, Se nhapite); Sp 701,6 (-ena kese chindapeti, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be nhapitena); Sv 157,15 (kappaka ti -a, Ce, Ee
so; Be nhapika; Se nhapita); Dhp-a 11 53,1 (tumhakarp
kesoropanatthaya -arp anessami, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nhapitaJ11); Vv-a 207,9 (sa -sal~ gantva khuramu~g~
0
karetva agamasi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapita-); Mhv 29:20
(thapapayi nhapite nhapake e' eva kappake ca bahu
tatha); - 0 -pubbaka, m(jn)_, who was previously a
barber; Sp 1391,15; Sv 599,25; Vin-vn 2824,
nahapita 2 , mfn., caus. pp ofnahayati qv,
1 2
nahapitaka, nhapitaka, m. [nahapita + ka ], a barber, a
bath-attendant; Pv-a 127,12 (kappaka ti -a, Ce so; Be, Se
nhapitaka; Ee nahapaka).
nahamini, nhamin1, f (from nahayati ?], a female bath-
attendant;? Pv 26:13 (c~gall kap~a honti nhamin1 ca
punappunaJ11, Ee so, but perhaps wr; Be, Se kappaka; Ce
nahapika; Pv-a 176,1: nahamin1 ti kappajatika, E e so; Be,
Se kappaka ti; Ce nahapika ti).
nahayati, nhayati (and nahati ?), pr. 3 sg. [S. snati,
snayati], bathes; washes (onese/f); bathes, washes, with;
takes a ritual bath; Dhatup 461 (naha soceyye);
Dhatum 703 (naha soce); Vin I 279,31 (bhagava viritto
-issati); 293,2o (bhikkhuniyo .. , vesiyahi saddhiJ11 nagga
ekatitthe -anti); III 110,15 (yavadattharp -a, Ce, Se so;
Be, Ee nhaya); IV 116,33 (sis~ -issam! ti, Be, Ce so;
E e, Se nhayissaml ti); 117,23 (yo pana bhikkhu
orenaddhamas~ -eyya pacittiyaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nhayeyya); 279,14 (udakasatika nama yaya nivattha -ati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nhayati); SI 91,7 (piveyya pi -eyya pi,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nhayeyya); A III 57,26 (n' eva -aJi na
vilimpati na bhattarp bhuñjati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
519 nahayati
nhayati); Ud 6,22* (na udakena suci hoti bahv ettha
nhayatl jano); Th! 469 (chagguna narp susane
parabhattarp nhayare jigucchanta, Th App 11 p. 246,6* so;
eds nhayanti); Ja I 189,2o (so hatth! kukkura111 apassanto
n' eva khadati na pivati na -ati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhayati); 11 325,21 (nhayahi amma ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nahahi); IV 391,21 (yava m~ava -anti e' eva mukhani
ca dhovanti tava manussa payasarp vagghetva nibbatü ti
thapesuJ11, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhayanti); Kv 563,16 (atthi
keci buddhassa bhagavato uccarapassavarp -anti
vilimpenti ... , Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhayanti); Vism 18,26
(ghattayanto pi -ati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nhayati); 338,16
(sace udakaJ11 atthi abara nahanasatikarp -issama ti, Ce
so; Be, Se nhayissama ti; Ee wr nahahissama ti);
Sp 517,22 (yattakam nahan~ icchasi tattakarp nahahi,
Ce, E e, Se so; Be nhan~ . . . nhaya); Ps I 179,3
(phaggunamase kira uttaraphagguni-divase yo -ati so
sarpvaccharakat~ papaJ11 sodhetl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhayati); Spk I 174,19 (sace hi tathagato n' eva -eyya na
pacte dhoveyya naya111 manusso ti vadeyyuJ11, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nhayeyya); Dhp-a I 359,12joll. (kilitthagatto 'mhi
-issami tata ti aha, sadhu ayyaka -atha ti, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be nhayissaml ti ... nhayatha ti); Nidd-a 1 337,31 (-atl ti
sañr~ sineheti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhayatl ti);
Sadd 491,4 (nha soceyye: nhayati. .. -ati);
part.pr. (a) nahaya(t), nhaya(t), mfn., Ja IV 231,7
(gañgaya -ato Kaliñgakumarassa, Ee so; Be
nhayantassa; Ce, Se -antassa); Sp 865,12 (-ato, Ce, Se
so; Be, Ee nhayato); (b) nahayanta,
nhayanta, mfl-ant!)n., Vin 11 280,27 (bhikkhuniyo
jantaghare -antiyo ); III 116,32 (-antassa, Ce, Se so; Be,
E e nhayantassa); V 61 ,3o (naggaya -antiya, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se nhayantiya); Pv 36:21 (sahayanarp titthasmi111
-antan~, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhayantiinaJ11);
(e) nahayamana, nhayamana, mfn., Vin 11 105,5 (bhikkhu
-amana); Ja I 498,1o (sahayika vo velante -amana
ummiya hata ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhayamana); - aor.
3 sg. nahayi, nhayi, Vin I 280,s (bhagava u~hodak~
-i); III 110,21 (Ce, Se -i; Be, Ee nhayi); Ja V 134,26 H.
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhayi); 3 pl. nahayiJ11su, nhayiJ11su,
Vin III 23,3 (yavadattharp -ÍJ11SU, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
nhayiJ11su); IV 117,2 (-ÍJ11SU, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nhiiyÍJ11SU); Ja 11 20,4 ( -ÍJ11SU, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
nhayi111su); VI 176,22 (-irpsu, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
nhayi111su); - inf nahayiturp, nhayiturp, Vin 11 122,29
(-ituJ11); IV 117,31 (-iturp, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nhayitUJ11);
Vv 32:2 (-ituJ11, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nhayituJ11); Ja IV
12,22' (-ituJ11, Ce, E e, Se so; Be nhayiturp); -
absol. (a) nahayitva, nhayitva, Vin IV 265,9 (sls~
-itva, Be, Ce, Se so; E e nhayitva); Vv 32:2 (-itva, Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se nhayitva); Ja VI 367,14 (Ce, Ee -itva; Be
nhayitva; Se nahatva); Mi1366,1s (-itva); Mhv 38:102
(-itva); Sadd 491,5 (-itva nhayitva); - neg, anahayitva,
Mil 246,24 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anhayitva); Ja VI 374,12
(anahayitva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be anhayitva); (b) nahatva,
nahatva, nhatva, nhatva, D 11 135,7* (nahatva pitva
e' udatari sattha, Ee so; Be nhatva; Ce nahatva; Se
nhatva) = Ud 84,17* (Ce, Ee, Se nahatva; Be nhatva);
A III 190,9 (nahatva ca pivitva ca, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhatva); Pv 27:27 (tattha nahatva pivitva ca therassa
nahayita(r)
pa!idassayu111, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhatva); Ja IV 149,Y
(nahatva, Ce, Ee so; Be nhatva; Se nhatva); Ap 147,21
(nahatva pitva ca sambuddho, Ce, Ee so; Be nhatva; Se
nhatva); Vism 63,9 (ya111 manussa susana111 gantva
paccagata nahatva chaggenti, Ee so; Ce nahatva; Be
nhatva; Se nhatva); Dhp-a III 88,17 (nahatva, Ce, Ee Se
so; Be nhatva); Mhv 7:12 (nhatva); Sadd 852,2 (nhatva);
- pp nahiita, nhata, mfn. [S. snata], l. who has bathed,
who has washed; Vin I 279,31 (-~ bhagavant~ saki111
virecessati); III 68,18 (puriso ... s!sa111 -o, Ce, Se so; Be,
Ee nhato; Sp 399,1: slsena saddhi111 -o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nhato); Pv 15:6 (sls~ -a tva111 asi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
slsa111nhata); Ja I 185,14 (asso -o ca pito ca ti, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nhato ); Sp 518,11 (yava -assa bhikkhuno kesa na
sukkhanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhatassa); Sv 188,3
(gharasatena -o viya, Ce, Ee so; Be nhato; Se nhapito) t
Vv-a 244,7 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nhato); Sadd 491,6 (s!sa111
nhato ti sls~ dhovitva nhato ti attho gahetabbo); -
neg. anahata, mfn., Ps 11 137,22; - 2. who has been
washed; Ja VI 543,17* (tassa -e upaghate, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be nhate; 543,2Y: taya nahapite, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nhapite); - 3. washed off; cleansed; - iic see below;
- -iinulitta, mfn., bathed and anointed; Ja 11 253,15
(bodhisatto pi -iinu1itto, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhatanulitto );
V 350,6 (kappitakesamassu111 -iinu1ittal11, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be nhatanulitta111); Mil 358,19 (-iinulittassa);
-anuvilitta, mfn., id.; Ja I 398,9 (so -iinuvilitto, Ee so; Be
nhatavilitto; Ce -anulitto; Se nhatanuvi1itto); -
--ki1esa, mfn., with defilements washed away; Sv 962,38
(sabbe pi --kilesatta nahataka, Ee so; Ce nihataki1esatta;
Be, Se nhatakilesatta nhataka); Ps III 98,2 (nahatakassa ti
--ki1esassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhatakassa ti
nhatakilesassa); Dhp-a IV 232,2 (--kilesataya
nahataka111, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhata-ki1esataya
nhataka111); - sunahata, sunhata, mfn., well washed;
well bathed; DI 104,27 (sunahata suvilitta
kappitakesamassü, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se sunhata) t SI 79,11
(eds sunhata); Ja III 226,16* (sunhato suvilitto si, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee sunahato); Vism 109,15 (sunhata, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce sunahata); - fpp nahayitabba, nhayitabba, mfn.,
Vin 11 106,6 (na bhikkhave agane nahayitabb~);
IV 119,17 (nahayitabba111, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nhayitabba111); Spk 11 167,16 (nahayitabban ti, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nhayitabban ti); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nahiipeti,
nhapeti, nahapayati, nhapayati, [S. snapayati], washes
(someone else); helps to wash, attends while bathing;
gives a bath; Vin I 302,4 (gacch' Ánanda udaka111 abara
im~ bhikkhu111 -essama ti); DI 93,6 (dhovatha m~
amma -etha m~ amma, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nhapetha);
11 19,25 (añña [kumara111l suda111 payenti añña -enti, Ce,
E e so; Be, Se nhapenti); 179,21 foil. (nahapake purise
!hapeyya111 ye agatagata111 jan~ -essantl ti, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nhapake ... nhapessantl ti); Vv 79:8 (sadhu t~
bhante -eyya111, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nhapeyy~); Ja I
185,1 (-etha ca payetha ca ti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
nhapetha); 11 19,23 (hatthl -essama ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nhapessama ti); IV 361 ,25* (nhapayanti japanti ca, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nahayanti; 365,20': nhapayantl ti nhapan~
nama karonti, Se so; Be nhapayantl ti nahapan~ ... ; Ce
-ayantl ti nahapana111 ... ; Ee nahayantl ti
520 nahayita(r)
nahapana111 ... );V 313,2o (ubho pi bhataro ... matapitaro
khadapenti Ul,lhena va sitena va varina -enti, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be nhapenti); VI 90.31* (ko dani -ayissati, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be nhapayissati); 298,1* (ucchadaye ca -aye dhove
pade adhosir~, Ce, Ee so; Be nhapaye; Se nahapane);
Mil 241,5 (matapitaro puttana111 ucchadenti parimaddanti
-enti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nhapenti); Dhp-a I 209,16 (ma111
-eh! ti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce nhapehl ti); Pa!is-a 667,7 (t~
jataka!e ... dhat! nimmujjanummujjanavasena kltapentl
-eti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapeti); - part.pr. nahapenta,
nhapenta, mft -ent!)n., Ja I 286,5 (-ento, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se nhapento ); Dhp-a I 395,2o (-entiyo, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
nhapentiyo); IV117,13 (-ento); aor. 3sg.
(a) nahapesi, nhapesi, Ja VI 521,3 (Maddi devl...
nahatva putte -esi, Ce, Se so; Be nhatva putte nhapesi;
Ee nahatü ti putte -eti, prob. wr); Th-ai 131,7
(bodhirukkha111 gandhodakehi -esi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nhapesi); (b) nahapayl, nhapayl, Vv 79:1 O (naro -ay!
rukkhamülasmi111 chayaya ekac!vara111, Ce so; Be, Ee
nhapayl; Se thera111 nhapayi111); 3 pl. nahapesu111,
nhapesu111, V in III 83,12 (-esu111, Ce, Se so; Be, E e
nhapesu111); D 11 179,25 (agatagata111 jana111 -esu111, Ce
so; Be, Se nhapesu111; Ee wr -eyyu111); Ja VI 589,1*
(-esu111, E e, Se so; Be, Ce nhapesu111); Spk I 262,22
(sarlr~ telena abbhañjitva ubbagetva gandhaCUI,ll,ladihi
-esu111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapesu111); 2 pl. nahapayittha,
Ja I 184,24 (ka111 pa!ham~ -ayittha ti, Ce, Ee so; Be
nhapayittha ti; Se nhayittha ti); - absol. (a) nahapetva,
nhapetva, V in IV 85,14 (manussa ... bhikkhü passitva
-etva vilimpetva bhojetva khadan!ya111 ad~su, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se nhapetva); SI 175,11 (bhagavanta111
Ul,lhodakena -etva, Ce, E e so; Be, Se nhapetva); Ja I
50,14 (devi111 Anotattadaha111 netva manussamala-
haral,latth~ -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapetva);
VI 340,2o· (mailgala-usabh~ . . . telena makkhetva
haliddiya -etva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhapetva); Cp 3:6:14
(-etva anulimpitva, Ce so; Be, E e, Se nhapetva);
(b) nahapayitvana, nhapayitvana, Pv 10:6 (ta111 ca te
-ay1tvana, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee nhapayitvana);
(e) nahapiya, Mhv 23:37; pass. part.pr.
nahapiyamana, nhapiyamana, mfn., Vism 379,14 (nadiya
-iyamano, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapiyamano); Jai 190,11·
(-iyamano, Ce, E e so; Be, Se nhapiyamano); Spk III 15,1
(-iyamana, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nhapiyamana); -
pp nahapita2, nhapita2, mfn., Vv 79:11 (sama1,1o ca -ito,
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee nhapito); Ja I 184,21 (-ito, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nhapito); Vism 63,6 (nahanaco)an ti ya111
bhütavejjehi sas!sa111 -ita kalakal,ll,licotan ti chaggetva
gacchanti, Ce so; E e -itva; Be, Se nhanacotan ti ...
nhapita ... );- sunahapita, sunhapita, mfn., Ja VI 145,11'
(nahapakasunahata ti ... nahapakehi kataparikammataya
sunahapita, Ee so; Ce nhapakasunhapita ti ... ; Se
nahapakehi . . . sunahata; Be nhapakasunhapita ti ...
sunhapita); - fpp nahapetabba, nhapetabba, mfn., S IV
173,1 (-etabba, Ce, E e so; Be, Se nhapetabba); Sp 967,33
(-etabbo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nhapetabbo); - see also
sinayati.
nahiiyita(r), m. ffrom nahayati], one who washes, who
bathes; M III 126,28 (nabhijanami ... jantaghare -a ...
CUI,ll,lena -a, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nhayita; or rather
naharu
absol. ?).
naharu, nharu (so usual/y Be), m.fn.(?) [BHS naharu;
Pkt¡;¡haru; S. snayu], a sinew, a tendon; Abh 157
(tacassa ca -uno); 279 (pume -u ca sira, Ce so; Be pume
nharu e' itthl sira); V in I 83,3 (puttapemarp. bhante ...
marp.sarp. chetva -urp. chindati -urp. chetva aghirp.
chindati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nharurp.); D JI 164,5
(jhayamanassa pana bhagavato sarlrassa yarp. ah o si ...
-ii ti va 1asika ti va tassa n' eva charika paññayittha, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se nharu ti); MI 429,22 (yava na tarp. jiyarp.
janami ... yadi va sa¡;¡thassa yadi va -ussa ... , Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be nharussa); 429,31 (yava na tarp. ka¡;¡~arp. janami ...
yassa -una parikkhittarp., Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nharuna);
III 184,12 (tassa sighena javena dhavato .. . -urp. pi
~ayhati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nharurp.); S II 28,24 (kamarp.
taco ca -ii ca atthi ca avasissatu, Ee so; Ce, Se -u; Be
nharu); Khp p. 2,6 (atthi imasmirp. kaye kesa ... marp.sarp.
-u aghi ... , E e so; Ce -u; Be nharu; Se nharii); Ja IV
415,4 (-urp. chinditva paso atthirp. ahacca atthasi, Ce, E e
so; Be nharurp.; Se -u chijji); Patis I 6,33 (marp.sa111
abhiññeyyarp. -ii abhiññeyya aqhl abhiññeyya, Ce, Se
so; Ee -u; Be nharii); Ap 313,1 (susambandha ca -avo,
Ce so; Be nharavo; Ee -uyo; Se nharuyo); Mil26,8
( ... marp.sarp. -u aqhl ... , Ce, E e so; Se -u; Be nharu);
Vism 253,5foll. (-ii ti nava 0 -satani, va¡;¡¡;¡ato sabbe pi -ii
seta ... , Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nharu); 354,35foll. (-ii
sañrabbhantare aghini abandhamana thita . . . na aghlni
jananti mayarp. -iihi abaddhani ti, Ee so; Ce -u; Be
nharu .. . nhariihi; Se nharu .. . nhariihi); Sp 264,26
(chavimarp.se va -umhi va sati, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nharumhi); Sv 748,28' (kamarp. khadatu ma111 vyaggho
atthiya ca nharussa ca, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce aghiya -ussa
ca); Pj I 47,2ojoll.;- 0 -daddula, nharudaddula, m., a
strip or shred of sinew; MI 188,22 (-ena pi aggirp.
gavesanti; Ps 11 228,17: camma-nillekhanena); A IV 47,3
(kukkutapattal11 va -arp. va aggimhi pakkhitta111
patillyati; Mp IV 30,28: -kha¡;¡~al11 °-vilekhanarp. va).
0
nahuta, n., num. [cf S. niyuta, BHS nayuta, AMg ¡;¡aua,
¡;¡auya], l. ten thousand; Abh 474 (satarp. sahassa111
-arp.); Pv 42:7 (chat eva caturasiti vassani -ani ca, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be navutani); Ja IV 175,7• (na me attho
sahassehi satehi -ehi va); Vism 205,26' (duve
satasahassani cattari -ani ca ettaka111 bahalattena
sailkhata 'yarp. vasundhara; Vism-mht [Be] I 241,25: -ani
ti dasasahassani); Sp 972,14 (ekarp. -arp. dasa sahassani);
- ifc see dvadasa- (sv dva); - 2. a vast number; a very
high numeral; Sn 677 (-ani hi kotiyo pañca bhavanti
dvadasa kotisatani pun' añña); Spk I 219,5 (sata111
satasahassakotippakotiyo -a111 sata111 satasahassa-
nahutani ninnahuta111) = Mp V 62,11; Sadd 801,24
(kotipakotisatasahassanarp. sata111 -a111); - see also
ninnahuta.
na, ind. [= na2 qv], not; Pv 6:3 (vijayitvana khadami te pi
na honti me ala111; Pv-a 33,16: alarp. pariyatta na honti,
gathasukhattha111 h' ettha na iti d!gha111 katva vutta111).
naka, m. [ts], the vault of heaven, heaven; Abh 10
(devaloko divo -o); Sadd 238,6; 767,15 (natthi aka111
dukkharp. ettha ti -o saggo); Mhbv 2,26 (in cpd).
naga, m. [ts], l. a snake; a supematural serpent (usually
living in water or under the earth), one of a race of
521 naga
mythical snakes (the enemies of the garutas); Abh 849
(-o turagahatthisu); V in I 86,36 foll. (aññataro -o
nagayoniya agiyati harayati jigucchati); III 146,18 (ta111
-arp. ma¡;¡i111 yaca); IV 108,26 (jatilassa assame -o
pativasati iddhima asiviso ghoraviso); D 11 257,18*
(pacchima111 ca disa111 raja Virupakkho pasasati -anarp.
va adhipati); S I 143,29' (gahltanavarp. 1uddhena -ena);
III 240,18joll. (a¡;¡~aja -a jalabuja -a ... ); Ud 54,16 (asura
-a gandhabba); Thi 241 (-a ca su111sumara ca ye e' aññe
udakecara); Ja 1 66,10 (sace -o bhavissati pathaviyarp.
nimujjitva gamissati); 360,16joll. (-assa tejo therarp. na
badhati therassa tejo -a111 badhati); II 13,16 (-o pi
olokento supa¡;¡¡;¡arp. sañjanitva mara¡;¡abhayatajjito ...
palayi); 112,2o* (-o navaya va¡;¡¡;¡ena saddharp. vahati
upasakarp.); VI 171,18* (-o 'ham asmi iddhima tejassl
duratikkamo); 191,11 (evariipo nama -o kenaci
0
ahitu¡;¡~ikena kltapito ti); Nidd I 104,16 (alarp. -ttaya);
Ap 72,2 (manussa e' eva deva ca -a ca garu)a tatha);
Bv 1:20 (-a supa¡;¡¡;¡a atha va pi kinnara); Mil23,21
(garu)aparivarito vi ya -o . . . bhlto ); Ap-a 239,27 foll.
(bhiimigata -a pabbatattha -a gailgavaheyya -a
samuddika -a); Mhv 1:63; - 2. an elephant; Abh 360
(gajo -o); 849; D II 266,5* (accailkuso va -o); M 1415,2
(rañño -o Isadanto urii)havabhijato sailgamavacaro
sailgamagato); A 11 116,24 (catiihi bhikkhave ailgehi
samannagato rañño -o rajaraho hoti rajabhoggo );
Dhp 329 (eko care matailgaraññe va -o); Sn 29 (-o
piitilatarp. va dalayitva; Pj 11 40,25: -o ti hatthi); Thl49
(-o pasarayl pada111 puriso -am aruhi); JaiV 395,17'
(kaccharp. -ana111 bandhatha); V 259,21* (yatha
araññakarp. -a111 poto anveti pacchato ); VI 61 ,3* (-o
dantehi haññati); 450,2o (vajirailkusena -a111 codento );
Ap 53,19 (santi araññaka -a kuñjara saghihayana);
Sadd 345.32* (hatthi -o gajo); - 3. the best or most
excellent of its kind; a mighty being; Abh 849 (-o ...
tathottame); Vin 11 195,28* (ma kuñjara -am asado);
V 3,29* (ete -a mahapañña vinayaññü maggakovida
vinaya111 dipe pakasesu111 pitaka111 Tambapa¡;¡¡;¡iya); MI
386,15* (-assa ... bhagavato); A III 347,15* (sarlra111
vijaharp. -o parinibbissati anasavo ); Sn 522 (agurp. na
karoti kiñci loke ... -o tadi pavuccate tathatta); Nidd I
201,2ojoll. (agu111 na karoti ti -o na gacchatl ti -o
nagacchatl ti -o); Ap 20,13 (ayarp. -o mahavlro
dukkhass' antakaro muni); 460,26 (muni dhorayho
usabho -o siho); Th-a 11 122,3 (gatibalaparakkamadi-
sampattiya mahanagasadisatta -esu pi khl¡;¡asavesu);
III 9,35 (-o viya balava ti -o ti laddhanamo
sammasambuddho); - 4. a tree; SAF: iron-wood tree,
rose-chestnut; Mesua ferrea L.; Abh 572 (-o tu
0
-malika); 849 (-o ... 0 -rukkhe); Ap 362,12 (-a sala ca
pupphita); Bv 5:27 (so pi buddho ... 0 -miile abujjhatha);
- 5. a kind of bird; Ja VI 538,7* (cailkora kukkuta -a
annamannarp. pakiijino); ifc see hatthi-;
1
0
3palokita, 0 avalokita, n. [naga + apalokita ' avalokita],
an elephant's look (tuming the whole body); D 11 122,5
(bhagava ... -a111 Vesali111 apaloketva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nagavalokita111) quoted Sadd 520,14 (nagavalokitarp. ...
avaloketva ti); MI 337,3 (-arp. apalokesi; Ps 11
420,33foll.: yatha nama hatthinago ... glvarp.
aparivattetva sakalasañren' eva nivattitva apaloketi);-
nagara
0
-kesara, m.n., (m.) the ironwood tree, the rose-
chestnut; (n.) its blossom; Ap 3 71 ,4;
0
-kkhandhiitipati(n), mfn., attacking or shooting from
the back of an elephant; Ja VI 449,17* (tharuggaha ...
-in o, Ce, Ee so; Be dhanuggaha . . . nagakhandhe
nipatino; Se pharuggaha ... 0
-kkhandhanipatino;
450,!4'foll.: hatthikkhandhe khaggena chinditva
patanasamattha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nipatanasamattha); -
0
-danta, m. [naga + danta 1], l. elephant's tusk, ivory;
Ja VI 261,15* (cundo yatha -a~ kharena; 261,22'!oll.:
yatha dantakaro kakacena hatthidanta~ chindeyya); -
2. a peg; a hook; Vin II 117,35 (bhittikhlle va -e va, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -dantake); III 48,34; Ja VI 382,28
(bhary<;Iak~ ... -e o1ambesi~); Nidd I 23,14 (Nidd-a I
95,4: -e ti... hatthidantasadise vaitkadary<;Iake);
Ap 125,7; - 0 -dantaka, m., a peg; a hook; Abh 863
(niyyüho -e); Vin II 114,9 (bhikkhü bhittikhlle pi -e pi
patta~ 1aggenti); 152,35 (anujanami bhikkhave
bhittikhll~ -an ti); Sp 619,29; - -dhiima, m. [?], a
0
ray of light, light; Sadd 395,26* (-o ca a1oko ice ete
rasmivacaka); - 0 -nasa,f, an elephant's trunk; -
0
-nasasamüpama, mfn., like an elephant's trunk; Ja V
155,22* (anupubba va te ürü 0 -nasasamüpama); -
0
-nasüru, (m).f(n)., with thighs like an elephant's trunk;
Ja V 297,17* (sace m~ 0 -nasürü o1okeyya Pabhavatí, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se 0 -nasüru); Sadd 207,5 (0 -nasürü iti); -
0
-nasikaloha, n., a kind of (low-grade ?) metal;
Vibh-a 63,27 (-~ vijatiloha~ nama); - 0 -pacara, m.
[naga + pacara 1], an attendant on a naga; D III 203,10
(nagaparisajjo va -o va, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits); -
0
-puppha, m.n., (m.) a kind of naga shrub; (n.) the
blossom of the naga tree; Ap 179,19 (-a~ gahetvana
gatamaggamhi okiri~); 450,9 (-~ apüjayi~);
Mil 283,31 (--samaye); Th-a I 228,5 (-ani ocinapesi); -
0
-balii,f, a shrub; SAF: broom weed, Indian mallow,
Grewia orientali L., Sida spinosa L.; Abh 588 (-a e' eva
jhasa); Vism 261,2 (seta~ --p3J.11farasav31,11,1a~)
Vibh-a 244,8; - 0 -bhavana, n., a naga dwelling; the
home, the palace of a naga snake; Ja II 285,lo (so naga-
raja udake nimujjitva attano -am eva gantva); VI 170,3o
(bhümiya~ nimujjitva -am eva gata); Nidd I 448,16 (-e
ca sup3J.11,1abhavane ca); Bv 5:16; Mil276,2; Ap-a 251,22
(samuddike -e nibbatto); Mhv 1:48; - 0 -IDaJ}.'.fala, n.
[cf BHS nagam31,1<;lalika], a group of nagas; a naga
circle; a charm against nagas; Sp 937,2 (parittan ti
yakkhaparittanagamary<;laladibhed~; Sp-t [Be] III 127,6:
-an ti sappana~ pavesanivar31,1atth~ m3J.l<;la1a-
baddhamanto); Sv 163,18 (nagavasasate ti --satani) =
Ps III 231,13; - --manta, m., --paritta, n., a charm
against nagas; Vibh-a 410,2o (--parittasadis~); 411,18
(amanussasiri~sapadlhi upaddutana~ manussana~
tikicchanatthaya dhammikani --mantadlni vijjat!hanani);
0
- -malika,f, the iron-wood tree; Abh 572 (nago tu
-a); Ja VI 269,15* (campeyyaka -a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-mallika; cf270,18': campaka ca naga ca, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se campaka ca naga ca mallika ca);- -rukkha, m., the
0
iron-wood tree; Ja I 35,22; Bv 4:24 (bodhi tassa
bhagavato -o ti vuccati); Vism 39,12; - -lata,f, the
0
betel vine, Piper betle L.; Abh 589 (-a tu tambüll); Ja I
80,13 (Sakko yeva --dantakat!ha~ e' eva mukha-
522 nagaraka
dhovana-udaka~ ca adasi); Vism 391,7 ( --dantakanha~
khaditva); Mhv5:25 (--dantakanh~);- -loka,m., 0
the naga (underground) world; Abh 649 (-o rasatala~);
Ja VI 326,9; - 0 -vata,f(?) [naga + va(t) 1 + ta ?], the
being (like) an elephant;? SI 28,1 (nago vata bho
sam31,1o Gotamo -a ca samuppanna sañrika vedana
dukkha ... sato sampajano adhivaseti, Be, Ce, Ee 1, Se so;
Ei [58,8]: nago va taca pan' uppanna; Spk I 80,13: -a ti
nagabhavena; Spk-t [Be] I 115,n: nago viya vati
pavattatl ti nagavo tassa bhavo -a, vibhattilopena h' esa
niddeso, mahanagahatthisadisataya ti attho; see also
issaravata); - 0
-vatika, 0 -Vattika, mfn., undertaking
devotion to the nagas; ? Nidd I 89,22 (eke
samanabrahmana vatasuddhika . . . -a va honti, Be, Ce
so; E~, Se vatt~suddhika ... 0 -vattika);- 0 -vanika 1, m.,
a forester; an elephant tracker; MI 175,32 (-o
nagavana~ paviseyya); III 132,2foll.; Ps II 198.27 (-o ti
uggahitahatthisippo hatthivanacariko);- 0 -Vanika2 , m.,
a kind of naga tree; ? Ap 356,33 (campake -e
atimuttakaketake, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -malike); -
0
-Vallika, m. or -a,f, a kind of creeper or shrub;? Ja VI
536,34* (pupphita -a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -mallika; 537,12':
vallinaga, Ce, Ee so; Be vallinaga ca mallika ca; Se naga
ca mallika ca);- -vikkantacara, mfn., with the heroic
0
movement of a naga, moving with the prowess of a naga;
Ps III 24,5* (-o so gamane sobhate jino) = Spk III 49,!5*
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -caro) = Ud-a414,23*; -
0
-vikkantacaraJ].a, mfn., id.; Ps III 25,4* (-o, Ce, E e so;
Be, Se -car31,1o) = Spk III 50,Io* = Ud-a415,26* (Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee -cariko);- 0 -Vibhhpsika,f, a naga means of
terror, the terrorising by nagas; Cp-a 116,! t (ta~ datu~
anicchant~ -aya bhi~sapetva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
-bhi~sakaya);- -sadda, m., the word 'naga'; Mp III
0
369,25 (-o hatthimhi e' eva assagorya-uragarukkha-
manussesu capi vattati);- 0 -hata, mfn., who has struck
or killed the mighty being; Vin II 195,29* (na hi -assa
kuñjara sugatí hoti ito par~ yato; Sp 1275,26:
buddhanagaghatakassa) = Ja V 336,21*; - atinaga, m.,
the very best; the highest chief, Nidd-a II 28,2o
(nikkilesanhena mahantaghena va nagan~ -o); -
sunaga, m., an excellent elephant; Ap-a 570,25 (-o so
maya dinno ti . . . sundaro nago hatthiraja maya dinno
ahosi, Be, Ee, Se so; not in Ce; ad Ap [Be] II 183,!9:
varanago maya dinno = Ap 63,3: eds varanago); - see
also naginl, nagl.
nagara, mfn. and m. [ts], l. (mfn.) belonging to a town;
Ja VI 25,2r (catura nagara itthiyo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nagarakitthiyo); - 2. (m.) a citizen, a townsman; Ja III
330,3 (raja ... bheri~ carapetva -e sannipatetva); 436,2
(-a sannipatitva rañño upakkosi~su); VI401,zo (-an~
udakak!Janatthaya kata mahapokkhar31,1iyo ); 465,16 (-a
ca janapada ca); Mp I 141,29 (raja balavanto -a senapati
pi tes~ yeva pakkho ti ñatva); Mhv 14:59
(theradassan~ icchanta samagantvana -a); Dath 2:85;
- nagare in Ce, Ee at Ja I 150,4 is prob. wr; Be, Se
vagurani.
nagaraka, mfn. [nagara + ka 2; cf S. lex. nagaraka], living
in a town; sophisticated; fastidious; Ja VI 25,27'
(caturitthiyo ti catura o• -itthiyo, Ce, Ee so, but perhaps
wr; Be, Se catura vilasa itthiyo atha va catura nagara
nagarika
itthiyo atha va catura nama natakitthiyo); Ps II 416,31
(ayarp pana Maro -o paricokkho mahesakkho, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se nagariko);- see also nagarika.
niigarika, nagariya, mfn. [S. nagarika], living in a town;
(i) sophisticated; fastidious; Ja I 130,17* (garahissanti
tarp viññi.i asucirp -o yatha) f. Ap 67,25
(jigucchissanti ... -o yatha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
agariko); Vism 250,11 ( -manussanarp jegucchani);
0
Sv 282,23 (poriya o• -itthiya sukhuma1attanena sadisa ti
poñ); Ps II 416,3! (Maro -o paricokkho, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nagarako); Spk II 360,21 (te -ehi saddhirp ekato hutva
sammantayirpsu, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nagara tehi saddhim);
- (ii) cunning; Sp 268,7 (dhutta ti ... 0 -keratiyapurisa,
Be so; Ee nagariya-; Ce nagariya-keratika-; Se
nagariyakerajiya-);- -jiitiya, mfn. [nagarika + jatiya1],
0
by nature fastidious; Sp 205,31 (sukhumalo -o, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee nagariya-); - see also nagaraka.
niigariya, mfn., see sv nagarika.
niigini, f [from naga], a female snake; a female naga-
snake; D III 203,10 (yakkho va yakkhini va
yakkhapotako va yakkhapotika va . . . nago va -1 va
nagapotako va nagapotika va ... , Ce, Se so; Be nago va
nagi va ... ; Ee omits); Ja VI 168,5 (tava mata manusi na
-i ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nagi ti); Spk III 135,4 (-iyo kira
utusamaye patitthitagabbha); Sadd 677,Jo (yakkhini -i);
- se e also nagl.
niigi, f [ts], l. a female snake; a female naga-snake;
Vin III 37,zo (aññataro bhikkhu -1ya methunarp
dhammarp patisevi); Ja VI 319,25* (na e' amhi vyamhito
-i); Bv-a 215,2o (mahajanena sandissamanasariraya
-iya); Sadd 677,3 (yakkhi -!); - 2. a female elephant;
Ap 513,12 (-i va bandhanarp chetva viharami anasava);
- se e also nagini.
niitaka, m., n., nataki (and-a ?)f [cfS. nataka], l. (i) (m.)
a dancer; an acrobat; Ap 309,19 (dasidase gavasse ca
bhatake -e bahi.i , , . 1abham' aharp, Be, Se so; Ce
arakkhake; Ee arakkhe); 358,8 (nataka -a e' eva);
Sv 239,14 (Sakko devaraja -arp pesesi, so dibbanatakarp
dassetva va hasapesi); Dhp-a IV 59,17 (pañcasata kira -a
sarpvacchare va chamase va patte Rajagaharp gantva
rañño sattaharp samajjarp katva bahurp hiraññasuVffi!l,latp
1abhanti);- nataka in Ee at Sp 931,1 is wr for nataka
(Be, Ce, Se and Vin IV 285,16 so);- (ii) (j) a dancing
girl, a nautch girl; Ja I 58,15 (cattalisa sahassa ca -iyo
upatthapesi, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se natakitthiyo; = Ap-a 63,8:
eds natakitthiyo); Ps IV 192,13/oll. (-ani
paccupat!hapesurp . , . narp saddhirp -ahi aropenti, eds
so); Pj II 113,9 (ta -iyo rajanarp ramapessama ti ... ativa
manohararp naccagitavaditarp payojesurp, Ce, E e so; Be,
Se natakitthiyo; = Ap-a 188,28: eds natakitthiyo );
Mhv 29:24 (devakaññi.ipamahi ca -ihi paribbi.i)ho); -
2. (n.) a dancing or acrobatic performance; a play; Ja II
395,19 (raja ... sihasane nisinno -ani passanto, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se natakani); Nidd I 379,17 (-arp 1asarp gitarp
davakammarp ayarp vacasika khit;lt;!a, Ce so; Be -arp
1aparp; Ee, Se natikarp; Nidd-a I 411,29: -an ti
abhinayarp dassetva uggffi!hapanarp, nagakan ti pi patho,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits); Sp 832,5 (anekappakarani
natanatakani pavattanti . . . -ani avuso passissama ti);
Sp 931,1 (nata nama ye -arp natenti); Ps III 66,16 (kirp
523 nataputta
ettha samajjarp va -arp va atthi ti); Sadd 352,21 (nata
natiyarp ... -arp); - 3. (n.pl.) dancing girls, nautch
girls (esp. in attendance on a king or prince);
concubines; Ja I 59,!4 (sigharp puttassa -ani sajjetha);
V 279,19 (-ani vissatthani eka pi puttarp na 1abhi); 282,18
(mayharp n' eva rajjen' attho na -ehi); Sp 1116,26
(Abhayarajakumarassapi -anarp pi cittarp uppajji);
Sv 260,32 (Bara1,1asiraja kut!harogi orodhehi ca -ehi ca
jigucchiyamano); Ps II 300,31 (rajano ... ma gayatha ma
vadetha ma naccatha ti -ani pativinenti); III 349,12
(pasade va -esu va rajjasukhe va cittassadarp
a1abhamano ); Ap-a 188,24 foil. (raja .. . ti su pasadesu
tividhani -ani passati, tividha nama -a pubbarajato
agatarp anantararajato agatarp attano kale ughitan ti) =
Pj 11 113,5/oll. ( ... tividhanatakani passati, tividha-
natakani ti pubbarajato ... ); As 34,13 (niddavasena
-anarp vippakararp disva); - ifc see cuila- (sv cuila\
jet!ha-, dhamma- (sv dhamma\ majjhima-;
o• -itthi,f, a dancing girl, a nautch girl (esp. in
attendance on a prince or king); a concubine; Ja I 58,15
(raja bodhisattassa . . . tayo pasad e karesi . . . cattalisa
sahassa ca -iyo upatthapesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee natakiyo)
= Ap-a 63,8; Ja III 40,5 (gitavaditanaccesu cheka -iyo
gitadini payojayirpsu); Sp 620,27 (yada -i naccati);
Sv 558,34 (Sakkassa -iyo); Dhp-a III 297,7
(Bara1,1asirañño aggamahesi ekissa rañño -iya aghatarp
bandhitva); Pj II 79,5 (raja thapetva mahesirp avasesa
-iyo sattaharp dhammanatakarp karotha ti yathakamarp
bahi carapesi tatha pi puttarp na1attha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
natakiyo).
niitakini, f [cfnataka], a dancing girl, a nautch girl (in
attendance on a king); Ja III 409,31 (bodhisattassa -iyo
ca sesanatakagandhabbadayo, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
natakitthiyo); Sp511,17 (tassa kira rañño eka -i ...
gattato udakarp ca puñchati pa1,1ina ca sedarp karoti;
Sp-t [Be] 11 295,JJ: -i ti naccanakicce adhigata itthi) =
Spk II 222,2 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee natakitthi); Pj II 60,2
(orodha ca -iyo ca, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se natakitthiyo).
nataki,f, see sv nataka.
nataputta, m., se e sv nataputta.
nataputtiya, mj(n)., see sv nataputtiya.
natika in Ee, Se at Nidd I 379,!7 and in Ee at Sv 239,9
(nananatikadini) is wr for nataka (Be, Ce so).
niiteti, pr. 3 sg. [S. natayati], acts; per.forms; Sp 620,26
(1asiyanatakarp -enti; Sp-t [Be] II 373,2: abhinayarp
das sen ti ti attho) quoted Sadd 567,3; Sp 931,1 (nata nama
ye natakarp -enti).
natya, n. [ts], dancing; drama; Abh 100 (naccan tu
vaditarp gitam iti -am idarp tayarp); Dhatup 87 (nata
-e); - 0 -rasa, m. [natya + rasa1], a dramatic rasa;
Abh 102.
nataputta, nataputta (and nathaputta), m., Npr. [cf AMg
1,1ayaputta, nayaputta; S. jñataputra; BHS also jñatiputra],
Mahiiv!ra, leader of the Jains; Vin 11 111,7 (Makkhali
Gosalo Ajito Kesakambali , , , niga1,1tho -o, Ce, E e so;
Be, Se nata-) f. Sn p. 92,3 (Ce, E e so; Be, Se nata-; Pj 11
423,13: nigffi!!ho ti pabbajjanamena -o ti pitunamena
vuccati, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nata-) f. Mil4,18 (Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nata-); D I 49,t (ayarp deva niga1,1tho -o sañghi
e' eva ga1,1i ca gffi!acariyo ca ñato yasassi titthakaro ... ,
nataputtiya
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se na!a-); III 117,5/ol/, (nigm,1¡ho -o
Pavaya~ adhuna ka1akato hoti, tassa kalakiriyaya bhinna
niga!,l!ha dvedhikajata bha!,lqanajata ... , Ce so; Be, Se
na!a-; E e natha-); M I 92,36 (te niga!,l!ha mal)1 etad
avocu~, nigal).!ho avuso -o sabbaññü sabbadassavl
aparisesa~ ñal)adassana~ pa!ijanati, Ce so; Be, Se na!a-;
E e natha-) t A I 220,3o (Ce so; Be, Se na!a-; Ee natha- );
Ja 11 262,16 (na bhikkhave nigal)!ho na!aputto idan' eva
m~ uddissakatam~sakhadanena garahati, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee natha-); Ap 503,28 (pesito -ena buddhasetth~
upeccaha~, Ce so; Be, E e, Se na!a- ); Spk I 127,14
(nigal)!ho ti na!aputto, Be, Se so; Ce, E e natha-); Mp IV
93,19 (niga!,l!hasavako ti nigal)!hassa na!aputtassa
paccayadayako upatthako, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee natha- );
Sadd 480,4 (nata gattaviname . . . naccati nacca~
nigantho na!aputto ).
nataputtiya, na!aputtiya, mf(n). [from nataputta], a
follower of Mahavlra; D III 117,16 (niga!,lthesu -esu, Ce
so; Be, Se na!a-; Ee natha-; Sv 905,28: na!aputtassa
antevasikesu, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nathaputtassa) = M 11
244,4 (Ce, E e so; Be, Se na!a- ).
natha, m. [ts], a protector, patron, lord; a husband; a
prop, support; Dhp 160 (atta hi attano -o ko hi -o paro
siya; Dhp-a 111 148,22: -o ti pati!¡ha); Ja IV 253,13' (tva~
-o si maharaja -o 'ha~ bhariyaya me, Be so; Ce, Ee
tva~natho smi; Ce, Se amhanatha mama bhariya;
253,1rfoll.: tva~ mama patittha asi ... mama pana
bhariyaya aha~ -o aha~ assa patittha); V 92,23' (vane
-a~ apassantl; 93,12·: attano pati~ apassantl, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee patittha~); Sadd 365,22/oll. (nathat! ti -o); -
esp. the lord, a Buddha; Sn 1131 (nikkamo nibbano -o,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nago); Ja I 28,30* (dutiyabhisamaye -o
satasahassa~ abodhayi); Ap 390,19 (karavlkarudo -o
brahmaghoso tathagato); 472,13 (sasisse nibbute -e);
Vism 198,21 (sabbe pi arayo hata paññasatthena -ena);
Cp-a 335.26* (desesi -o cariyapi!aka~); Mhv 1:16;
Sadd 365,27 (paramissaro bhagava -o ti vuccatl ti);- ifc
see tva~-. amhanatha, nisa-, pajjunna-, pasu-; -
0
anatha, m.pl,, those with and those without a protector
or support; Bv 2:27 (dhana~ -an~ datvana;
Bv-a 75,13: sanathan~ anathana~ ca, aqqhan~ e' eva
dajiddan~ -karal}a, mfn., producing a
0
ca); -
support, making for protection; D III 266,27 (dasa -a
dhamma; Sv 1046,31: attano patinhakara dhamma); A V
23,13; - 0 -putta, m., see sv nataputta; - anatha, mfn.
and m., l. (mfn.) without a protector, without support;
helpless, poor; V in IV 231,13 (aya~ -a appaññata natthi
imissa kaci pativatta ti); SI 61 ,15*; Ja III 166,14 (itthiyo
nama patimhi mate vidhava honti -a); IV 377,9 (sami
kasma ma~ -a~ katva pabbajito si ti); VI 140,27'
(aputtaka hi rajan o -a nama honti); Pa!is I 129,11 (-o
1okasannivaso ); Ap 496,21 (-ana~ bhava~ natho ); 531,7
(-ayo vihaya no taya na yutta~ nibbatu~);- 2. (m.) not
a protector; nota lord; Pa!is-a 414,5 (natthi etassa natho
issaro saya~ va na natho issaro ti -o); Sadd 366,6/oll.
(na natho ti -o); - se e also K. R. Norman, 1966,
pp. 117-19; - sanatha, mfn., having a protector;
supported; A V 23,12 (-a bhikkhave viharatha ma
anatha; Mp V 5,1s: -a ti sañataka bahuñativagga hutva
viharatha); Ja VI 2,25 (maya~ pubbe anatha idani -a jata
524 nana
samiko no 1addho ti).
nathati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nathati, nathate; Wg § 2:6], asks, begs
for; pains; is master; wishes; Dhatup 129 (natha
yacanopatapissariyasi~sasu); Dhatum 185;
Sadd 35,1sfoll.; 365,2ofoll. (natha yacanopatapissariy-
asi~sasu: .. . -atl natho .. . ); 468,9; - see also
anathamana.
nada, m. [ts], a loud sound, a loud cry, a roar; roaring;
Abh 119 (keka -o sikha!,lqina~); 128; Vv 64:10
(khurassa -o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nadi; V v-a 279,8: -o ti
turagana~ khuranipatasaddo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nad!
ti .. . khuranipatasadda); Ja JI 108,21 (siga1ika~ -a~
nadi); IV 268,9 (raja . . . sarabho me viddho ti -~
muñci); Spk 11 285,2 (attano va -assa anunad~ sul)ati);
Bv-a 282,7 (tassa -o saka1akapilapura~ unnada~
kareyya); - ifc see koñca- (sv koñca\ jaya-, slha-; -
sunada, mfn., with lovely cries; Ap-a 536,20* (mayüra ...
-a);- see also slhanadika.
nadi(n), mfn. [S. nadin], roaring;- ifc see slhanada- .
nadiya, mfn. or m. [cf S. nadeya], growing in water; ora
kind of plant, a kind of garlic; Ja VI 536,30* (ath' ettha
sasapo bahuko -o haritayuto; 537,s·: haritena ayuto -o,
ime dve 1asul)ajatiyo ).
nadeti 1, nadete, see sv nadati.
nadhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nadhate, Wg § 2:5], asks,
begs for (gen.); pains; is distressed; is master; wishes
for; Ja V 90,11* (ya~ aharami ta~bhakkho tassa nün'
ajja -ati; cf90,1s-: tassa manne ajja ahara~
a1abhamanassa sañra~ atape pakkhittapaduma~ viya
-ati upatappati mi1ayati); Sadd 365,3o (-ate); 394,16
(nadha yacanadlsu: -ati nadhana~); 468,1o (natha nadha
yacanopatapissariyasi~sasu: nathati -ati).
nadhana, n. [from nadhati], asking, begging for; ?
Sadd 394,16 (nadhati -~).
nana, nana~, ind., nana, mfn. (and -a, n. ?) [S. nana],
variously, differently; separately; dif.ferent, separate;
various, of various kinds (jrequently iic); (difference,
diversity; ?) Abh 1137 (vina -a); 1198
(nananekatthavajjane); V in IV 240,34 (sa~sa!¡ha va ayye
tumhe viharatha ma tumhe -a viharittha); MI 206,28 (-a
hi kho no bhante kaya eka~ ca pana maññe cittan ti);
S IV 281 ,1s (ime dhamma nanattha nanavyañjana udahu
ekattha vyañjanam eva -an ti); Sn 886 (na h' eva saccani
bahüni -a; Nidd I 294,22: na h' eva saccani bahukani
-ani vividhani aññoññani puthünl ti); Ja I 136,14
(vatthu~ hi tasmi~ ca imasmi~ ca ekasadisam eva
gatha pana -a); IV 253,28* (-a jan a sevitabba janinda);
VI 34,2o (-a devata namassati); Sp 926,25 (pa!icchanne
okase ti idam eva -a~ sesa~ sabba~ purimasadisam
eva ti); 1370,36 (uppajjamana ekato uppajjanti
nirujjhamana -a nirujjhanti); Vism 534,2sfoll.
(vyañjanamattam eva h' ettha -a~ ... atthato pana -~
natthi); Sp 233,nfoll. (namamatto yeva hi ettha -a~
yojananaye -a~ natthi); Vibh-a 52,11 (ki~ pana
nibbana~ ca arahatta~ ca eka~ udahu -an ti);
Mhv 11:12 (kusumani... -ani nanavai,~l)iini);
Sadd 899,31 (-a puthu ice ete bahupakare); 900,1 (-~ iti
asadisatthe); - nana atthi/bhavati, is separated; is
dif.ferent, is distinct; Vin III 173,9 (katha~ ime -a assu
vina assu vagga assü ti); SI 19,5* (tasma sata~ ca
nana
asatarp. ca -a hoti ito gati); JaiV 112,23' (ete
aññamaññarp. jahanti -a honti); Vism 668,6 (sa panayarp.
patipada kassaci bhikkhuno -a hoti kassaci catusu pi
maggesu eka va); Sv 74,12 (iti ime -a bhavissati vina
bhavissanti ti); Nidd-a I 335,29 (puthujjanassa hi saddha
athavara padavare padavare -a hoti); - o• -atta, mfn
[nanatta 1], various,- different,- separated; Vin V 183,25
(ma 'harp. sali.ghena -o assan ti); M III 220,21 (upekha -a
nanattasita; Ps V 26,3: -a ti nana bahü anekappakara);
Th 143 (veghamissena -ena ca kammuna, Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se nanatthena; Th-a 11 21 ,32: -ena ca kammuna ti , , _
nanavidhena parüpaghatakammena, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nanatthena); Vism 330,16 (nanattasaññanarp. . . . nanatte
va gocare pavattanarp. saññanarp. -anarp. va saññanarp.);
- --katha,f, various sorts of talk, idle, trivial
conversation; Vin IV 164,21 (tiracchanakatharp. kathenti
seyyathidaf!1 pubbapetakatharp. --katharp. 1oka-
kkhayikarp. ... ,Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nanattha-) f:. MI 513,3o
(Ps III 223,13: -a ti ... nanasabhava niratthakakatha); -
--kaya, mfn., having bodies of differing nature, whose
bodies are not uniform; D 11 68,26 (satta --kaya
--saññino seyyatha pi manussa) f:. A IV 39,17 (Mp IV
25,18folL: manussanaf!1 VaJ_ll_laSaJ.lthanadivasena dve pi
ekasadisa natthi);- --VaJ_ll_li(n), mfn., ofvarious colours
or appearance; D 11 256,16* (yakkha --VaJ_ll_lino); -
--VaJ_lJ.ll, (m)f(n),, id.; Th 1190 (acchara ... --VaJ_ll_liyo);
- --saññi(n), mfn., having different perceptions or
notions; D 11 69,6 (satta ekattakaya --saññino seyyatha
pi deva abhassara) f:. A IV 40,4; -ananattakathika, mfn.,
not talking idly; Mp IV 71,23; - 0 ádhimuttikatli,f,
abstr., the state of having various inclinations or intents;
DI 2,12 (bhagavata ... sattanaf!1 -a suppatividita); MI
70,11; S V 305,3 (-af!1, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
0
adhimuttikarp.); Vibh 339,28; Nett 98,5 (--ñill_larp.); -
0
ánusandhika, mfn., having various applications;
having various subjects or sequences of meaning;
Vism 213,25 (-af!1 suttaf!1); - 0 -karaJ].a, n., [BHS id.]
difference; distinction; separation; MI 64,24 (ko viseso
ko adhippayo kif!1 -arp. yadidaf!1 tumhakaf!1 e' eva
amhakaf!1 ca ti); 11 87,2 (ime cattaro VaJ_ll_la samasama
honti na 'saf!1 ettha kiñci -al!'l samanupassami ti); 130,6
(siya nu kho tesaf!1 agginaf!1 nanadaruto abhinibbattanaf!1
kiñci -af!1 acciya va accif!1 VaJ.lJ.lena va VaJ.lJ.lafP. abhaya
va abhan ti); S 11 24,12 (kif!1 -arp. paJ.!<;litassa balena ti);
Ja 11 259,18 (kif!1 tassa amhehi -an ti); Pet 104,10 (kif!1
-al!'l hetussa ca paccayassa ca, Be, Ce so; Ee wr
0
-karai_laf!1); Mi163,7 (sakka imesarp. dhammanarp. , ..
-arp. paññapetuf!1 ayaf!1 phasso ayarp. vedana ... );
Vism 126,16 (dvinnarp. pana samadhinarp. idaf!1 -arp.);
Spk III 169,6 (kif!1 -an ti kif!1 nanattarp.);- -ehi in Ee,
Se at Ja IV 57,28' is prob. wr for 0 -karal_lehi (Be, Ce so);
- ifc see ninnanakara1_1a, sali.gha-; - 0
-khaQika,
1
nlina-kkhaQika, mfn. ffrom nana + khaJ_1a ], belonging
to a different moment or various moments; acting from a
different moment; Tikap 172,31; Vism 538,12;
0
-khantika, mfn. ffrom nana+ khanti 1], holding various
or different preferred views; S IV 348,21; Ud 67,1; Nidd I
108,11; - o -caya, nanaccaya, mfn,, consisting of various
mixtures; S V 149,28 (-ehi süpehi; Spkiii 201,15:
nanavidhehi ti attho) quoted Vism 150,31;
525 nana
0
-cittakkhaQika, mfn., belonging to various conscious
moments; Vibh-a 201,15; - 0
-jacca, mfn., belonging to
various families or classes; Vin III 8,12 (savaka
nananama nanagotta -a; Sp 187,3o: khattiyo brahmaJ.lo ti
adijativasena -a); D III 84,15; M 11 152,1 (-anarp.
purisanarp.); - (nana)-tli,f, abstr., diversity, variety;
difference; Abh 767 (vemattaf!1 tu ca -a); Vism 554,27*
(natthi ekata napi -a); Ps 11 353,28; - 0 -titthiya-
gatika, mfn., following various sectarians; Ap-a 230,22
(-a bahujjana, Ce so; Be, Se 0 -ditthigatika; Ee wr
0
-titthigata); - (nana)-tta, n. abstr. [nanatta2], diversity,
variety; difference; D III 289,16 (nava -a) f:. Ud-a 336,8
(-ani); MI 3,32foll.; A IV 385,18 (te pana ... kva -al!'l
gacchanti ti); Ja 11 149,19 (akkhitu1_1<;Iapadehi pi etassa ca
mayhaf!1 ca -al!'l natthi, Ce, Ee so; Be nanakaral_laf!1; Se
nanakaral_laf!1); Patis I 103,1 (kamacchando -al!'l
nekkhammaf!1 ekattaf!1); Vism 311 ,6 (atthato pi - am eva
iccheyyuf!1); Sp 297,28 (sabbabuddhanarp. hi
parajikavatthumhi va parajike va -af!1 natthi); Pj 11
246,8• (cittananatlaf!1 agamma -al!'l hoti vayuno); -
0
-difthika, mfn., holding various (false) views or
theories; holding different views; S IV 348,21 (cattaro
sattharo -a nanakhantika nanarucika); Ud 67,1; Ja III
173,1o*; Ap-a 276,7 (ye nigaJ.lthasavaka te sabbe -a); -
0
-ditthigatika, mfn., id.; Ap-a 230,22 (titthiya -a
bahujjana, Be, Se so; Ce 0 -titthiyagatika; Ee wr
0
-titthigata); - 0 -nlimika, mfn. ffrom nana + nama2],
having various names; Spk 11 157,25;
(nana)-ppaklira, mfn. [nana+ pakara3], ofvarious kinds;
S V 278,8 (püraf!1 -assa asucino); A III 50,19* (-ani ca
paccayani); Ja I 17,3 ( -ahi thutihi abhitthunitpsu, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr -ehi); 52,18 (-a ca saku1_1asali.gha); Patis II
207,17 (-arp. iddhividhaf!1 paccanubhoti, Be, Ce, E e so;
Se nanappakarakatp); PsI 71,12 (kakaJ.ltako viya --taf!1
na apajjati) f:. Vibh-a509,1s (--ttaf!1); Mhv 37:11; -
-arp., -ato, -ena, -ehi, adv., in various ways; Ja I 197,24
(mu1_1ikaf!1 ghatetva -ehi pacif!1su); 11438,7 (-ato
asucibhavaf!1 niccaturabhavarp. ca parigaJ_lhanto );
V 179,12' (mayi -arp. vi1apantiya, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
nanappakarakatp); Vism 505,27 (-ehi vibadhenta);
Sp 284,6 (-ehi anathabhavarp. sarp.vaJ_ll_lesi); Spk 11 236,22
(-al!'l kiJanti); Dhp-a III 152,17 (Devadatto -ena mayhaf!1
vadhaya parisakki ti); As 50,29 (-en a kandanti);
Sadd 2,1' (-ato);- (nana)-ppakliraka, mfn., ofvarious
kinds; V in III 239,15 (-arp. rüpiyasarp.voharaf!1
samapajjissanti); M 11 27 ,3o (sañña pi hi bah u anekavidha
-a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nanappakarika); S 11 81,1o (idarp.
anekavidharp. -arp. dukkhaf!1); Ja III 468,14' (vijjan ti -arp.
hatthisippadikarp. sippaf!1); Vism 84,2o (samadhi
bahuvidho -o); Mhv 18:67; - -af!1, adv., in various
ways; Sv 836,12; - 0 -phaladadli in Ee at Pv-a 157,9 is
prob. wr for 0 -pha1adhara (Be, Ce, Se, Pv 24:4 so); -
0
-bhliva, 0 -bhava, m. [BHS nanabhava], being apart;
separation; difference, diversity; Vin II 284,22 (sabbeh'
eva piyehi manapehi -o vinabhavo aññathabhavo ); M III
242,33 (dvinnarp. katthanaf!1-a); Th 574 (-o vipajjati, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se 0 -bhavo; Th-a 11 245,3o: -o ti vinabhavo
vippayogo); Ja IV 329,23* (0 -bhava vippayogena tassa,
Be, Ce, Ee so, me; Se -a); PsI 37,36 (ekabhavo ekattaf!1
-o nanattan ti);- 0 -bhüta, mfn., separated, apart; Ps 11
niiniirajja
283,12 (-a111 patta~ pa1.lito assa ti); - 0 -bhümaka,
0
-bhümika, mfn., belonging to various spheres;
Tikap-a 272,Io (-a, Be, Ce, E e so; Se o -bhümika); -
0
-rali.ga, mfn., of various colours; Ap 4,6;
0
-rucika, mfn. [from nana + ruci], having various
wishes; having dif.ferent aims; S IV 348,2! (sattharo ...
o -khantika -a); Ud 67,2; Nidd I 108,II; Pj II 511,13 (-a hi
brahmm:¡.a); - 0 -laddhika, mfn. [from nana + laddhi],
holding various theories; having a dif.ferent opinion; Ja I
209,n· (vagaka -a nanagaha hutva); Nidd I 108,II
(nanarucikesu -esu); Spk III 287,21 (bhagava
bhikkhusailghena -o hutva); - 0 -vatthuka, mfn. [from
nana + vatthu], having dif.ferent or various bases or
grounds; relating to various matters; Sp 1173,!2
(ekavatthuka va -a va apattiyo ); 1385,11 (pacittiyani ...
-ani); Kv-a 123,18; - 0 -Vlidaka, m(jn). [from nana +
vada], (one) who speaks dif.ferently; It-a I 17,33 (-a, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr 0 -vadaka);- 0 -vidha, mfn., ofvarious
kinds; Jaii 447,24 (-al11 ke!i~ dasseti); VI42l,Io
(-ahi ... upamahi); Ap 587,7 (-a111 bahu~ dukkha~);
Vism 120,7 (-a malagaccha); - -a~, -ena, adv. in
various ways; Ja VI 442,29" (-ena vilapati); Nidd-a 1
360,!9 (-a111 bha!:).anti);- --kacch' in E e at Spk III 31,24
is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se -a gaccha vuyhamana; -
--phaladayi(n), mfn., producing various kinds of fruit;
Pv-a 157,9 (--phaladayino, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se 0 -phala-
dharino); - --surabhikusumadayika, mfn., producing
various kinds of fragrant blossoms; Pv-a 157,II; -
0
-Vihita, mfn., of various kinds; D 11 293,!9;
Vibh-a 222,16; - 0
-verajjaka, mfn., from various
dif.ferent kingdoms; V in IV 73,28 (-e bhikkhü passitva;
Sp 812,2: nanavidhehi aññarajjehi agate); DI 113,4
(-ana~ brahmaJ:).ana~; Sv 280,16); Th 1037;
0
-Verajjagata, mfn., gone to various dif.ferent kingdoms;
S III 6,!5 (-a111 bhikkhu~); - 0 -Saipvlisaka, mf(n).
[BHS nanasa111vasika], who belongs to a dif.ferent
community (for carrying out official acts of the sailgha);
who is separated from the saii.gha community; V in I
134,2 (agantuka bhikkhü passanti avasike bhikkhü -e);
340,29 foil. (-a ete bhikkhü tumhehi tumhe ca tehi -a,
dve 'ma bhikkhu --bhümiyo, attana va attana~ -a111
karoti samaggo va na~ sailgho ukkhipati); Sp 1167,3
(-ehi saddhi~ vinayakamma~ katu~ na vagati);
Vin-vn 3107; anlina, mfn., not dif.ferent, not
separate;? Kv-a 44,17 (rüpa~ vedanaya vedana111 va
rüpena -a~ ekalakkhm:¡.am eva katva); - anlinli-
kathika, mfn., not talking idly, or of dif.ferent things;
V in V 163,6 (sailgamavacarena bhikkhuna. .. -ena
bhavitabba111 atiracchanakathikena; Sp 1363,26foll.:
nanavidha111 ta111 ta~ anatthakatha111 akathentena); A IV
153,7 (sailghagato ... -o hoti atiracchanakathiko).
nlinlirajja, m. or n. ? [?], a surgical probe; ? Th 756 (tal11
salla~ uddhare -ena satthena naññena; Th-a III 30,3:
-ena rajjusadisasailkhataya esanisalakaya pavesetvana
satthena kantitva naññena mantagadappayogena, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee pavesetva na satthena).
nlibhasa, mfn. [ts], celestial, being in the sky; D II 258,17*
(-a naga).
nlibhi, nlibhi, f [ts], Sadd 201 ,12joll.; 626,2 (-iyo
nabbho); l. the navel; Abh 1058 (piiJ.lyaii.ge -i); Vin III
526 niima
39,22 (ehi bhante -iya ghagehi); A III 240,3o (tii:¡.ajati
-iya uggantva); Ja III 459,Io (musavada~ katva -ito
pa!havi~ pavisi); V 155,24* (-i te sadhusa!:).thita); 203,4*
(akhllakani ca ava!:).takani het!ha nabhya katisamohitani,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nabhya); VI 73,28 (tassa utunikale -i~
paramasi); Mill23,I8 (dakkhii:¡.ena hatthaii.gughena -i
paramagha); Vism 303,9 (viiral).o ... sallena -iya111
viddho); Sv 254,29 (brahma!:).a brahmuno mukhato
nikkhanta ... vessa -ito); - ifc see adho-, Ul).l).a-; -
2. the nave of a wheel; Abh 374; 1058; A 1 112,15 (-1 pi
savaii.ka sadosa sakasava); Vv 64:4 (ima ca nabhyo;
V v-a 276,28: nabhyo ti rathacakkana111 -iyo, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee nabhyo ti); Ja IV 149,20 (rathacakka~ yava -ito
pathavi~ pavisi); Milll6,8 (sakatassa atibharabharitassa
-iyo ca nemiyo ca phalanti akkho bhijjati); Vism 198,29
(sa~saracakkan ti . . . tassa ca avijja -i mülatta);
Sp 335,29 (bhümiya111 -1ya thapitacakkassa);
-IDal}.~ala, n., l. the area of the navel; Vin IV 185,19
0
(parima!:).<,lalal11 nivasetabba~ -a~ januma!:).<,lala!11
paticchadentena); Dhp-a IV 189,2! (-ato candama!:).<,lala-
sadisa pabha ut!hahi); - 2. a central circle ( of a web ); ?
Dhp-a IV 58,19 (makkatako suttajala~ katva
majjhimat!hane -e nipanno); - see also UI).J).anabha,
sanabhika.
nlima\ ind. [ts], l. by name; called; Vin III 36,15 (Sundaro
-a bhikkhu); 167,2 (ima111 chakalaka~ Dabba~
Mallaputta~ -a karoma); DI 213,!4 (atthi kho bho
Gandhari -a vijja); II 23,6 (eso kho deva ji!).!).O -a ti, ki~
pana so samma sarathi jii).I).O -a ti); A 1 226,22
(asukasmi~ -a game va nigame va); Ud 84,21*
(amantayi Cundaka111 -a bhikkhu~); 89,3o (yen' ajja
samai).O Gotamo dvarena nikkhamissati ta111
Gotamadvara111 -a bhavissati); Ap 64,Io (Siddhattho -a
bhagava); Sv 649,1 (devaloke pana asavati -a lata atthi);
Mhv p. 61 ,4' (Vijayagamana111 -a chagho
paricchedo); 7:32 (Siñsavatthu nam' eta111 sam1
yakkhapura~ idha); Sadd 604,18 (ekacattallsa sadda
Va!:).l).a -a bhavanti); - 2. as a marker of emphasis (i) to
1
mark a word being defined or explained ( cf iti, ti ):
Vin III 28,8 (methunadhammo -a yo so asaddhammo
gamadhammo ... ); Khp p. 2,15 (tll).i -a ki~, tll).i tisso
vedana); Ap-a 153,4 (khaggavisiiJ.lal11 -a
khaggamigasili.ga~); Vibh-a 52,25 (ragakkhayo -a
ragass' eva khayo); Sadd 321,27 (nicagamana~ -a
hinagamana111 hinappavatti va); - (ii) to emphasise a
preceding word: V in III 73,34 (papaka~ -a jivita~);
181 ,Jo (tesa~ kho -a pii).<,IO databboti); M 1 137 ,Ifoll.
(ucchijjissami -a su vinassissami -a su na su -a
bhavissami ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ssu); S 1 33,9* (ujuko -a
so maggo); V 447,6foll. (ummatto smi namaha~ viceto
smi namaha~ ya~ loke natthi ta~ maya dit!han ti); A 1
149,27* (natthi loke raho -a papakamma~ pakubbato);
Dhp 396 (bhovadi -a so hoti); Ja 11 83,21 (ca!:).<,lalassa -a
me ucchighabhatta111 bhuttan ti); 326,II (eva111 arakkhiya
nam' itthiyo); III 126,19 (Baveruraghe sakul).a -a natthi);
V 181 ,6· (yasma caya111 pabbajja -a buddhadilii Va!:).l).ita);
VI 431,27 (bodhisattana111 adhippaya -a ijjhanti);
Mil 31,9 (n' eso jivo assasapassasa nam' ete
kayasaii.khara ti); Vism 388,15 (na sajjhaya~ katu~
asakkonto mama sasane abhabbo -a hoti); 707,8
nama
(evarp.garuka hi saiJ.ghassa a1,1a -a); Sv 408,1
(pubbenivasaJ11 -a ke anussaranti); Pv-a 6,24 (arahanto
-a anuttaraJ11 puññakkhettaJ11 1okassa); with
interrogatives or other particles (often expressing
astonishment or reproach): Vin III 89,26 (kudassu
namahaJ11 ... ahiJ.19issami hananto ghatento ... ); SI
235,17* (atha ko -a so yakkho); A I 107,3o (kudassu -a
marp. pi khattiya khattiyabhisekena abhisiñcissantl ti);
Ja I 221,32 (idan' ime maccha kiJ11 -a karissantl ti);
266,25 (katharp. -a tvaJ11 imarp. sayanapigharp. agato ti);
VI 209,16" (ko -a devalokarp. gamissati); Dhp-a IV 72,23
(kaJ11 -a uddiseyyan ti); Thi-a 259,2 (kena -a kara1,1ena
diyyatl ti); Ap-a 388,28 (ko -a satto na pasidatl ti);
Vibh-a 5,18 (ko -a tvarp. sappurisa ti); Sadd 897,13 (aho
-a ice ete garahatthe); 897,18 (aho -a sadhu ice ete
pasarp.sanatthe);- esp. app eva nama: Vin I 16,24 (app
eva -a idha nisinno idha nisinnaJ11 YasaJ11 ku1aputtarp.
passeyyasi ti); S IV 72,15joll. (app eva namahaJ11
bhagavato bhasitassa atthaJ11 ajaneyyaJ11 app eva
namahaJ11 bhagavato bhasitassa dayado assan ti); It 89,17
(app eva -a imassa keva1assa dukkhakkhandhassa
antakiriya paññayetha ti); Pv 14:6 (app eva -a
muñceyyarp. pubba1ohitabhojana); Ja I 168,4 (app eva -a
pa1_1atipatarp. na kareyyun ti);- katharp. hi nama: V in III
17,16 (ayasmato Sudinnassa pita anattamano ahosi
katharp. hi -a putto Sudinno evaJ11 vakkhat! ti); 20,20
(katharp. hi -a tvaJ11 moghapurisa . . . na sakkhissasi
yavajivarp. paripu1_11_1aJ11 parisuddharp. brahmacariyarp
carituJ11); 108,34 (bhikkhil ujjhayanti ... katharp. hi -a
ayasma Mahamoggallano evarp. vakkhati); - yatra hi
nama: MI 168,13 (vinassati vata bho 1oko yatra hi -a
tathagatassa ... appossukkataya cittaJ11 namati); II 47,29
(acchariyarp vata bho abbhutaJ11 vata bho yatra hi
namayaJ11 Gha!ikaro kumbhakaro ittarajacco samano
arnhakaJ11 sisanahatanarp kesesu paramasitabbarp.
maññissati); Ja I 59,9 (dhi-r-atthu vata bho jatiya yatra hi
-a jatassa jara paññayissatl ti); Ap-a 550,15 (mahiddhiko
mahasama1,1o mahanubhavo yatra hi -a cattaro pi
maharajano upasaiJ.kamissanti dhammasavanaya); -
seyyatha pi nama: Vin III 28,16 (seyyatha pi -a puriso
sisacchinno abhabbo ... jiviturp); D I 110,8 (seyyatha pi
-a suddharp vattharp. ... rajanaJ11 pa!iga1_1heyya); 222,14
(seyyatha pi -a balava puriso sammiñjitarp. va baharp
pasareyya ... ); MI 169,11 (seyyatha pi -a
uppa1iniyarp ... ); Snp. 15,11 (seyyatha pi -a phalo
divasasantatto); Vibh 272,25 (seyyatha pi -a ekarp.
pugga1aJ11 piyarp. manaparp. disva mettayeyya);
Vibh-a 222,12 (seyyatha pi -a cheko villvakarako ... ).
2
niima , n. [S. naman], l. a name; a personal name;
Abh 114 (abhidhanarp. -am avhayo); 1111; Viniii 19,8
(tassa darakassa Bljako ti -arp akarpsu); IV 6,13 (dve
-ani hinarp. ca -aJ11 ukkanhaJ11 ca -arp.); V 163,13 (najati
pucchitabba na -aJ11 pucchitabbaJ11 na gottarp
pucchitabbarp.); 224,26 (parajikan ti -arp e' eva apatti
ca); D II 154,12 (theratarena ... bhikkhuna navakataro
bhikkhu -ena va gottena va avusovadena va
samudacaritabbo); MI 150,26 (Upatisso ti kho me avuso
-arp. Sariputto ti ca pana marp. sabrahmacañ janantl ti);
III 68,31 (acikkhissami bhikkhave paccekabuddhanarp.
-ani); S I 78,9 (añjaliJ11 paJ.lametva tikkhattuJ11 -arp.
527 nama
savesi rajaharp. bhante Pasenadi Kosalo ... ); 212,11
(bhagava . . . etad avoca ehi Sudatta ti, atha kho
AnathapiJ.19iko gahapati -ena marp. bhagava alapatl
ti ... ); Sn 808 ( -arp evavasissati akkheyyarp. petassa
jantuno); Ja I 149,23 (-ena Nigrodharnigaraja nama);
402,28 (Jivako pi marati Ajivako pi marati -aJ11 nama
PaJ.ll_lattimattaJ11); IV 129,1· (hadayarp. manarp ca ti idarp.
ubhayarp. pi cittass' eva -arp); V 252,12* (Arindamo ti
me -aJ11 Kasiraja ti marp. vidil); VI 485,18 (ath' assa
namagaha1_1adivase vessavithiyarp. jatatta Vessantaro ti
-aJ11 kariJ11su); Ap 40,18 (Upa1i nama -ena hessati satthu
savako ); 532,11 foil. (rañño mata mahesi ti su1abhaJ11
-aJ11 itthinarp. buddhamata ti yarp. -arp etaJ11
paramadullabhaJ11); 608,24 (nanda -ena vissuta, Se so;
Be, Ce nandanama ti; Ee wr namo ti); Kv179,31
(araha ... ti1_1akaHhavanappat1narp. -arp. na janeyya ti);
Mi125,9 (matapitaro -arp karonti Nagaseno ti); 27,3o
(saiJ.kha samañña paññatti voharo -arp.); Vism 201,16*
(tasma jino arahati -am etarp); 209,28 (catubbidhaJ11 va
-arp avatthikaJ11 1iilgikaJ11 nemi ttikarp.
adhiccasamuppannan ti); 419,24 (raja ti tihi namehi
paññayittha); Pv-a 1,18 (petavatthil ti -ena); 145,19
(sabbattha upari -arp. 1ikhi); Ap-a 288,15 (-ena Añjaso
nama khattiyo); As 390,27 (catubbidhaJ11 -arp
samaññanamarp gul_lanamaJ11 kittimanamaJ11
opapatikanaman ti); Mhv 5:42 (nigrodhadevata taJ11
amantiya -ena); 33:83 (tasmabhayagiri tv eva viharo
-ato ahu); Sadd 878,14joll.; - namarp./namato ga1_1hati,
names; mentions or addresses by name; V in I 92,37
(naharp ussahami therassa -arp gahetuJ11 garu me thero
ti); Ja III 80,5 (rajjassa pana -aJ11 gahetuJ11 asakkonto);
IV 402,13 (sace me koci hadayamarpsassa -arp.
ga1_1heyya); Sp 1063,23 (thullaccayadisu ekissa -arp.
gahetva ... pacittiyarp apattin ti evarpvattabbarp); Ps IV
126,8 (desitasuttassa nama bhagavata -aJ11 na gahitaJ11
hand' assa -arp ga1,1hapessam1 ti); Pv-a 18,1 (te -ato
ga1,1hanto Kuveran ti adim aha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -arp.);
78,28 (yaJ11 yarp. asucijeguccharp. tassa tassa -aJ11
gahetva);- ifc see anoma- (sv oma), itthan- (sv ittharp),
isi-, kirpnama, kittima-, gu1_1a-, pakasa-; - 2. (as
associated with and contrasted with rilpa) the name,
which differentiates an individual by verbal means; "the
entire conceptual identity of the individual" (S.
Hamilton, 1996, p. 127); sometimes defined as what is
non-material in a person, the mental components; or as
the four (or three) non-material khandhas; Abh 1111
(arilpe cavhaye -aJ11); DI 223,10* (kattha -aJ11 ca rilparp.
ca asesarp. uparujjhatl ti); A III 400,21 (-arp. kho avuso
eko anto rilparp. dutiyo anto ); Sn 872 (-arp ca rilparp. ca
pa!icca phassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se phasso); Nidd I 435,11
(-an ti cattaro arilpino khandha); Vibh 146,15
(vedanillhandho saññakkhandho saiJ.kharakkhandho
idarp. vuccati viñña1_1apaccaya -arp.); Vism 558,23 ( -an ti
aramma1,1abhimukharp. namanato vedanadayo tayo
khandha); 595,24 (api ca kho bheriJ11 pa!icca saddo viya
rilparp pa!icca -aJ11 pavattati); 596,12 (-arp nissaya
rilparp pavattati rilparp nissaya -aJ11 pavattati); Yam 2,19
(ye keci -a dhamma; Y am-a 56,3o: namasailkhata
dhamma); Pj I 79,1 (sabbarp. pi arilparp. -an ti vuccati);
- nama and rilpa, namarilpa1, n., name and form, the
nama
name and the named; "the conceptual and apparitional
aspects" of an individual (N. Ross Reat, 1987, p. 17);
individuality; - (i) the individual person or identity; S I
12,11* (acchecchi t~harp idha 0 -rüpe) = Sn 355 =
Th 1275; S II 24,2 (ayarp e' eva kayo bahiddha ca
0
-rüparp; Spk II 38,28: paresarp saviñña1,1ako kayo);
Dhp 367 (sabbaso 0 -rüpasmirp yassa natthi mamayitarp;
Dhp-a IV 100,17: sabbasmirp pi vedanadlnarp catunnarp
rüpakkhandhassa ca ti pañcannarp khandhanarp vasena
pavatte 0 -rüpe); Sn 537 (pariyantam akasi 0 -rüparp; Pj II
0
434,2o: -rüpassa ca pariyantarp akasi); 756 (anattani
attamanirp passa 1okarp sadevakarp nivi~~arp
0
-rüpasmirp idarp saccan ti maññati; Pj II 508,26: anattani
0
-rüpe attamanirp); 909 (passarp naro dakkhiti 0 -rüparp);
Mi146,6foil. (0 -rüparp kho maharaja pa~isandahatl ti ...
1mma . . . o -rüpena kammarp karoti sobhanarp va
papakarp va tena kammena aññarp 0 -rüparp pa~isandahatl
ti); Vism 593,29 (evarp anekasatehi suttantehi -rüpam0
eva dlpitarp na satto na puggalo); 595,1 (idarp 0 -rüparp pi
suññarp nijjlvarp nirlhakarp); 595,5* (-arp ca rüparp ca
idh' atthi saccato na h' ettha satto manujo ca vijjati); -
interpreted as (a) the mental and physical aspects of an
individual; S II 3,34 (katamarp ca bhikkhave 0 -rüparp,
vedana sañña cetana phasso manasikaro idarp vuccati
namarp, cattaro ca mahabhüta catunnarp ca
mahabhütanarp upadaya rüparp idarp vuccati rüparp);
Mil49,14 (0 -rüpan ti tattha katamarp namarp katamarp
rüpan ti yarp tattha maharaja o!arikarp etarp rüparp ye
tattha sukhuma cittacetasika dhamma etarp -an ti); -
(b) the five khandhas; Nett 15,19foil. (ye pañcupadana-
kkhandha idarp 0 -rüparp .. . ye phassapañcamaka
dhamma idarp -arp yani pañcindriyani rüpani idarp
rüparp tadubhayarp 0 -rüparp viññiii_!asampayuttarp);
Vism 590,1 foil. (eko a~~arasadhatuvasena 0 -rüparp
vavatthapeti .. . eko pañcakkhandhavasena 0 -rüparp
vavatthapeti); Vibh-a 265,23 ( --vinimutta hi pañca-
kkhandha pañcakkhandhavinimuttarp va -arp natthi); -
(ii) esp. in the pa~iccasamuppada series: with viññai_!a
fumishing (the possibility of) individual identity
(conditioned by avijja and saiikhara) and experience (by
means of the senses); (the blueprint of) individuality, the
abstract identity (see S. Hamilton, 1996, p. 134:
"namarüpa represents the point at which that individual,
having become associated with the potential for being
conscious, acquires identity in terms of name and
form "); Vin I 1,11 (avijjapaccaya saitkhara
saitkharapaccaya viññiil,larp viññiii_!apaccaya 0 -rüparp
0
-rüpapaccaya sa!ayatanarp ... ); D II 56,31 foil.
vmn~arp vmn~apaccaya
0 0
( -rüpapaccaya -rüparp
0
-rüpapaccaya phasso ... ); 63,4 (viññiil,larp va hi Ananda
0
matu kucchismirp na okkamissatha api nu kho -rüparp
matu kucchismirp samuccissatha ti); 63,21 (viññiii_!arp va
hi Ananda o -rüpe patigharp na1abhissatha api nu kho
ayatirp jatijaramarai_ladukkhasamudayasambhavo
paññayetha ti); S II 8,29 (viñña1,1e kho asati 0 -rüparp na
hoti viññai_!anirodha -rüpanirodho ti); 66,12 (aramm~e
0
sati pati~~a viññai_!assa hoti, tasmirp patighite viñña1,1e
virü!he 0 -rüpassa avakkanti hoti); A I 176,31
(gabbhassavakkanti hoti okkantiya sati 0
-rüparp
0
-rüpapaccaya sa!ayatanarp); Pa~is I 52,23 (idha
528 nama
pa~isandhi viññanarp okkanti -rüparp ... ; Pa~is-a 241,35:
0
ya gabbhe rüparüpadhammanarp okkanti agantva
0
pavisanarp viya idarp -rüparp); Vism 199,6 (kamabhave
pa~isandhiviññai_!arp kamabhave -rüpassa paccayo hoti);
Vibh-a 137,27 (0 -rüparp viññiii_!asannissayato kamma-
paccayato ca ekavidharp, saramm~anarammai_lato
duvidharp atltadito tividharp yonigativasena
catubbidharp pañcavidharp ca); Tikap 36.5 (okkanti-
kkh~e ... -rüparp okkantarp vi ya pakkhandantarp vi ya
0
paralokato imarp 1okarp agantva pavisantarp viya
uppajjati); Spk II 31,15 (punabbhavabhinibbattisaiikhate
0
-rüpe);- 0 -rüpajatika, mfn., bomfrom name andform;
MI 67,24;- 0 -rüpahetuka, mfn., having name andform
as its cause; Vibh 140,11 (sa!ayatanarp 0 -rüpahetukarp);
- 3. (gr. t. t.) a no un; a substantive; Sadd 878,14 foil.
(atthabhimukharp namatl ti -arp attani ca attharp nametl
ti -arp); 0
-kamma, n., name-gzvmg; name,
appellation; Vin III 112,29 (tass' eva apattinikayassa
-arp adhivacanarp); Nidd I 124,19 ( ... 1okavoharo
0
namarp -arp -dheyyarp nimtti ... ); As 391,17; -
0
-karal}a, n., naming, name-gzvmg; Ps III 78,7
(kumarassa -arp karissama ti); Bv-a 182,26; Mhv 22:65;
- --maitgala, n., the name-giving ceremony; Ps III
312,10; Dhp-a II 87,5;- 0 -kaya, m., the nama group, the
group of non-material aspects (of an individual); D II
62,15 (-assa paññatti hoti; Sv 501,2: namasamühassa);
Sn 1074 (evarp munl -a vimutto attharp paleti na upeti
saitkharp); Pa~is I 183,15 (dve kaya -o ca rüpakayo ca);
Nett 41,13 (avijjaya -o padaghanarp t~haya rüpakayo
padaghanarp); 69,22 (yo -o imani pañca arüplni
indriyani); 78,2 (-o nama vedana sañña cetana cittarp
phasso manasikaro ti); Vism 163,33 (sukharp -ena
pa~isarpvedeti); 597,4* (yatha pi navarp nissaya manussa
yanti ai_li_lave evam eva rüparp nissaya -o pavattati);
Sp 141,15 (-e passaddhe rüpakayo passaddho yeva hoti);
As 377,3 (-arp gantheti cutipa~isandhivasena vagasmirp
gha~etl ti kayagantho); Dhp-a II 126,1&
(lokuttaradhammarp -ena phusanto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
kayena); - 0
-karo in Ee, Se at V v-a 22,7: read nama
karo with Be, Ce;- 0 -(g)gahal}a, n., 0 -gaha, m. [nama +
gah~a 1 , gaha2], naming, name-giving; mentioning by
name; Ja I 262,6 (tassa --divase); Sp 641,6 (apattiya
-arp); Ps III 328,22 (tassa -arp ga1,1hanta, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee 0 -gaharp); Vv-a 96,19; - 0 -gotta, n., the personal
name and clan name; Vin I 36,6 (appekacce bhagavato
santike -arp savetva ekamantarp nisldirpsu); II 239,16 (ya
kaci mahanadiyo . . . ta mahasamuddarp patta jahanti
purimani -ani mahasamuddo tv eva saiikharp gacchanti);
S l 43,12* (rüparp jlrati maccanarp -arp na jlrati); Ja VI
78,6*; Ap 22,25 (matuya -ena paññayissati ... naro);
Kv 179,29 (araha itthipurisanarp -arp na janeyya); Pj I
113,28 (sa hi-ato apaka~a);- 0 -dheyya, m.n., a name;
naming; Abh 114 (-iidhivacanarp); MI 337,6 (tassa ...
mahanirayassa tayo -a honti); Vv 84:45 (kirp -arp kirp
pana tassa gottarp); Ja III 305,17*; Nidd I 388,16
(puriii_larp matapitikarp -arp); Ap 485,4 (Radho ti -ena
hessati satthu savako ); Ap-a 422,2 (tassa rukkhassa -o);
Sadd 392,11 (-arp); - 0 -pada, n., l. a no un; Sv 26,13
(me ti adlni -ani); Th-a I 4,3o (sui_latha ti akkhyatapadarp
itarani -ani); - 2. the word 'nama'; Vibh-a 169,s; -
namaka
0
-mala,f, a series of nouns; a paradigm; Sadd 87,25*;
2
-
0
-n1pa 1, n., see above; - 0 -n1pa , n., the name;
Ja VI 407,18 (tesal!l gahapatiputtena attano -al!llikhitva
dinnesu vatthalailkarakhaggadisu akkharani disva); -
0
-sañña,f, a word of special (non-etymological)
meaning; Sp 208,5 (ekarattatikkantassa va -a esa
yadidal!l abhidosiko ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee namal!l sañña)
= Ps III 295,16; Sp 833,17 (-asu pana vuccamanasu talll
tal!l namalll ajanantanalll sammoho yeva hoti);
Sadd 379,14; - 0 -siddhika, mfn., attaching importance
or luck to a name; Ja I 402,1o (asuko kira bhikkhu -o
mailgalal!l namalll aharapetl ti); -
0
-hetuka, mfn.,
having name as its cause; Vibh 139,22 (chaghayatanalll
-al!l); 139,31 (namapaccaya phasso -o); - see also
anamika, isinamaka (sv isi), ekanamaka (sv eka),
evallln amaka, evalllnamika (sv eval!l). kil!lnamaka,
catunamaka (sv catu[r]), tal!lnamaka (sv ta[d]),
nananamika.
1 2 2 naraka, m. [ts], someone suffering in hell; Abh 658
namaka • mfn. [nama + ka ], havinf? the name; having
merely the name; D 1 240,3 (bhasital!l hassakal!l yeva
sampajjati -al!l yeva sampajjati; Sv 402,4: lamakal!l
yeva); Ap 578,15 (Vedeho nama -o seqhi); Mhv 23:5
(matulass' eva -o); 37:176 (asiti putta ... asltiya
savakanalll -a); - anamaka, mlfn)., without a name,
nameless; Spk I 95,10 (yassa pi hi rukkhassa va
pasat:Iassa va idal!l nama naman ti na jananti -o tv eva
tassa namam hoti) f. As 391,29.
namaka 2, ~. [?}, a kind of bird; Ja VI 538,11*
(bha1,1<;lutittiranamaka; 538,32·: bha~,~<;lu ca tittira ca -a ca).
1
namana 1, n. [from caus. ofnamati qv], bendinf?; turning
towards; Sv 977,35 ( ' -a!!hena sabbal!l pi namalll cattaro
0
hi khandha aramma1,1e aññamaññal!l namenti)
As 392,25 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee namaqhena) f. Pa!is-a 109,18
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee namanaqhena); As 52,4 (nama-
karaJ:.laghena namana!!hena o• -aghena ca namal!l, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee namaqhena namanaghena ca); - see also
namana.
namana2 , n. [cfnama], naming;? Sv 977,12foll. (cattaro
khandha o• -aghena namal!l. o• -a!!hena
namakarana!!hena).
namika, n. and mfn. [cf S. namika], l. (n.) (gr. t. t.) a noun;
a substantive; Sadd 59,33* foll. (namalll -am ice atra
ekam ev' atthato bhave tad eva -al!l ñeyyalll saliilgal!l
savibhattikal!l); 87 ,24* (bhudhatuto pavattanalll -anal!~);
521,2 ( -ttal!l); 831,18 (saññicchayam iikhyatal!l bhavati
0
namikal!l); - 2. (mfn.) (gr.t.t.) belonging to a noun;
Sadd 83!,3o (-a vibhatti labbhati);- 0 -pada, n., a noun;
a substantive; Sadd 831,19; 874,2s; 878,4foll.; -
--ma1a,f, a series of nouns; a paradigm; Sadd 94,1
(bhutasaddassa --mala vuccate: bhuto bhuta ... ); 248,11;
30!,15.
1 -I ... -Isu); Th 267 (-I turiye naccati nat!aki); Ja I 60,32*
nameti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnamati qv.
naya in Ee atA I 132,17* is prob. wr for taya (Be, Ce, Se
so).
nayaka, m., nayika, f [ts], a guide, a leader; a chief, a
lord; esp. a buddha; Abh 4 (sammasambuddho ... -o);
725 (issaro -o sami); Vin 1 24,14 (Uruvelakassapo ja!i1o
pañcannalll ja!ilasatanal!l -o hoti vinayako aggo
pamukho pamokkho); Ja VI 446,14* (senaya -o);
Ap 381,13 (mamal!l rogaparetassa tikicchal!l dehi -a);
529 nari
Bv 3:1 (Dipailkarassa aparena Ko1,1<;lañño nama -o;
Bv-a 134,32: -o ti vinayako); PsI 111,22 (pubbailgamo ti
purato gami -o); Thi-a 15,11 (sabbassapi bhavassa netti
nayika); Ap-a 332,26joll. (uttamo ti -o, sambharavante
satte nibbanal!l neti papen ti va -o); Mhv 1:8; Saddh 491
(dlpabhuto tilokassa -o); Sadd 845,6 (netl ti -o); -¡fe
see sal!lsara-; - anayaka, mfn., without a guide;
Ap 390,2o (uddharanto mahadugga vippanaqhe -e); -
ninnayaka, mfn., without a leader; Jaii 21,19 (--tta
sailgamassa mahantal!l pi ba1al!l yujjhamanalll
thokathokal!l osakkati, Be, Ee so; Ce --taya; Se
vinayakatta).
nayati, pass. pr. 3 sg. ofjanati qv.
nayassa in Ee at Sv 590,7 is wr for ñayassa (Be, Ce, Se,
D II 151,29* so).
2
nayeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnayati qv.
nara, mfn. and m. [ts], human; aman; Abh 741 (naradi tu
jalabuja).
(nerayiko tu -o); Cp-a 318,33 (disva ... dukkha tippa
khara katuka vedana nirantaralll ciraka1al!l vediyante
-e).
narailga, naraga, m. [S. narailga], a tree; SAF: mandarin
orange, tangerine, Citrus reticulata Blanco; Abh 560
(eravato tu -o); Sadd 922,19 (narago -o ... va~,~l,labhedo
'yal!l).
naraijo in Ee at Pe¡122,24 is prob. wr for naraco (Be, Ce
so).
naraca, m. [ts], an iron arrow; an arrow; MI 429,36 (yava
na tal!l sallal!l janami . . . yadi va sallal!l yadi va
khurappal!l ... yadi va -al!l yadi va vacchadantal!l ... );
Ja III 322,2s (sihal!l tikhi1,1ena -ena pacchabhage vijjhi);
V 129,22 (vajiraggal!l -al!l gahetva); Pe! 122,24 (khaggo
-o, Be, Ce so; Ee narajjo); Mi1105,27 (-assa sudhotassa
vimalassa . . . ajimhassa availkassa); Vism 503,11 *
(aggitatto va -o); Mp I 260,3 (jiyamutto vi ya -o); -
0
-puilkha, 0 -poilkha, m., the shaft or feathered part of
the arrow; Ja V 130,15 (-e rattasuttakal!l bandhitva, Be
so; Ce 0 -poilkhe; Ee 0 -pul!lkhake; Se -pokkhe); -
0
ti
0
-valaya, m. an iron ring or collar;? Mhv 7:20
(yakkhil!l adaya givaya -ena so vamahatthena).
nari, f [ts], l. a woman; a female; Abh 230 (itthi
simantini -I); DI 105,6 (te vethakanatapassahi -Ihi
paricarenti); A III 38,19* H bhattu chandavasanuga);
Dhp 284 (yaval!l hi vanatho na chijjati a1,1umatto pi
narassa -isu); Sn 299 (disvana ... -iyo sama1ailkata, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nariyo ca); 703 (-iyo munil!l palobhenti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nariyo, me ?); 836 (na icchasi -il!l
narindehi bahuhi patthital!l); Vv 33:7 (vatthuttamadayika
-I pavara hoti naresu -isu, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se -Isu; read
nañ ... -isu me?)= Ja II 255,19* foil. (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
(nibbuta nuna sa -I yassayal!l Idiso pati); III 266,22*
(catura -I ... naral!l nenti sa~,~hahi vacahi; 267,4·: -I ti
itthiyo); IV 241,25* (nara ca atha -iyo); 257,25* (mayhal!l
gamavaralll dehi -iyo ca alailkata); 285,25* (rajaku1e
pujita -I ti, Ce, Ee, L. Alsdoif, 1967, p. 29 so; Be, Se
-ibhi); 470,17* (tassa ca gayamanaya saddal!l sutvana
-iya); 495,3* (-iyo nara majjhimaporisa ca, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nariyo, me?); V 4,18* (ya santi -iyo devesu
nala
devana!!~ paricarika, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nariyo); 452,8*
(lokacittamathana hi -iyo); 453,5* (tejava pi hi naro
vicakkhaJ.lo ... -inaiT~ vasagato na bhasati); VI 361,19*
(-iyo ca iddhesu ku1esu jata, Se so; Ce, Ee nariyo; Be
thiyo); Ap 595,25 (upakara ca ya -1 ya ca -1 sukhe
dukhe); V v-a 42,23 (narassa esa ti -1 aya!!~ ca samañña
manussitth1su pavatta rtqhivasena itarasu pi tatha
vuccati); Sadd 427,2 (narena yogato narassayan ti va -1);
-2. (gr.t.t.)feminine (in gender); Abh 108 (iru -j); 939
(vithi -iyal!l);- 0 -sahaniimasavhaya, mfn., called by a
feminine name; M II 143,10* (-a kacci jivha na rassika,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be 0 -samanasavhaya; Ps III 396,llfoll.:
nañsahaniimaiT~ nama itthi1iilgaiT~ tena avhatabba ti -a
itthilili.gena vattabba ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nañsamananamal!l itthi1ili.gal!l ... o -samanasavhaya).
niila, m.n., see sv na!a.
niilapane in Ee at Ja I 392,4 is wr for ta1avane (Be, Ce, Se
so).
niili, niiJi, see sv n~l.
niilikii, na1iya, se e sv na!ika.
naJa, nala, m.n. [S. nala; S. lex. na<;ia], a hollow stalk, esp.
ofthe water-lily; a tube; Abh 453 (kal).<;io -am, Ce so; Be
nalam); 686 (dal).<;io tu nalam uccate); A IV 169,15
(tadisal!l yeva -al!l hoti seyyatha pi annesalTI
bhaddakanalTI yavanalTI, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nalaiT~);
Sp 329,6 (pupphesu va -esu Vel).il!l katva); Spki 297,26
(taiT~ bhikkhul!l -e gahetva padumal!l ghayamiinaiT~
disva); Dhp-a III 427,1 (pattehi e' eva nalehi ca
udabindilni muñcantal!l viya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ena);
Nidd-a 1 248,29 (tassa ca nabhito utthito -o matu
udarapatalena ekabaddho hoti); - ifc see akka-, us1ra-,
kaJ.l!iJa-, kumuda-; - saniiJa, saniila, mfn., with its
stalk; Ja IV 402,14 (-al!l padumalTI uddharanto) =
Cp-a 74,3;- see also na!ika, na!I.
niiJamayaq:t in Ee at Sp 176,13 is wr for nalam ayalTI (Be,
Ce, Se, Ja V 387,15* so).
nii!ikii, nalika, f, -a, n. (and n~iya, naliya, naliya) [cf S.
na<;lika, S. lex. nalika], l. a hollow stalk; a pipe or
cylinder (esp. used to blow, oras a container, oras a
small measure of capacity ); V in li 116,1 (-aya pi
[silciyo] kal).I).akitayo honti); DI 7,22
(maJ.l<;ianavibhüsanaghanuyogalTI anuyutta . . . dal).<;iakal!l
-al!~ khaggal!l chattal!l ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nalikaiT~;
Sv 89,6foll.: itthipurisarilpadivicitraiT~ bhesajjana!ikal!l
suparikkhittaiT~ vamapasse olaggital!l) f. Nidd I 380,12
(Ee nalikaiT~; Se naliyal!l; Be daJ.l<;iana!iyal!l; Ce
dal).<;ianaliyaiT~); Ja III 282,7 (taiT~ sucil!l -aya
pakkhipitva); Vism 345,21 (-e pakkhipamana-
PaJ.l<;iumattika viya); Sp 1091,13 (samasotahi dv1hi pi
-ahi ekal!l natthukaraJ.lil!l); Ps V 54,12 (aggil!l datva -aya
dhamento aggil!l jaleyya);- ifc se e añjana- (sv añjana\
eka-, gala- (sv gali), taJ.l<;iula-, tela-, dhamana-
(sv dhamana\ yanta-; - 2. a kind of plant; Sp 835,15
(pattakhadan1ye ... setavaraJ.lo -a, Be, Ce so; Ee nalika;
Se naliko); Sv 869,1 (kalambuka ti -a);
o• -odana, m.n., a na!ika mea su re of boiled rice; V in III
243,28 (majjhimo nama patto -al!l gaJ.lhati; Sp 703,2o:
-an ti Magadhana!iya ekaya tal).<;iulan~iya odanaiT~); D li
198,16 (--paramalTI bhuñjami); Dhp-a III 368,8
(pañcannal!l janiinaiT~ -o va pakko);- 0 -gabbha, m., a
530
kind of (oblong) inner room; Vin II 152,18 (anujanami
bhikkhave tayo gabbhe sivikagabbhal!l -aiT~
hammiyagabbhaiT~: Sp 1219,18: -o ti vittharato
dvigul).atigul).ayamo d1ghagabbho); - 0
-yanta, n., a
tubular instrument; PsI 161,28 = Mp III 30,3; -
(na!ika)-SaJ.u;liisa, n., a blowing pipe and tongs; A I
210,32 (ukkal!l ca paticca . . . -aiT~ ca paticca ...
upakiliqhassa jatarilpassa upakkamena pariyodapana
hoti, Be so; Ce nalika-; Se na¡i-; Ee na!ikal!l ca paticca
SaJ.l<;iasal!l ca paticca; Mp II 324,17: -an ti
dhamanana!ikaiT~ e' eva parivattanasal).<;iasal!l ca, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee na¡isal).<;iasan ti); - 0 -siika, n~iyasaka,
naliyasaka, n. [cf S. na<;i1saka], a kind of (prepared)
vegetable; A III 49,26 (manapalTI me bhante
nibaddhatelakal!l na!iyasakaiT~, Ce so; Ee naliya-; Be, Se
nibbattatelakal!l naliyasakaiT~; Mp III 253,13: salipit!iJena
saddhil!l madditva j1rakadisampayutte sappimhi pacitva
catumadhurena yojetva vasal!l gahapetva thapitaiT~ -aiT~.
Ce so; Ee thapitana!ikasakal!l; Be naliyasakaiT~; Se
na!iyasakal!l).
nii!ikera, m.n. [S. narikera, narikela, nalikera], (m.) the
coconut tree; SAF: Cocos nucifera L.; (n.) its fruit;
Abh 604; Vv 44:13 ( 0 -vanani); Ap 182,17 (-al!l ca
padasil!l kh~jakal!l abhisammatal!l; cf Ap-a 453,33:
na!ikakarena pavattaiT~ phalal!l -al!l, so read with Be,
Se); 447,26 ( -phalaiT~ gayha); Ja V 384,1 (sunakhena
0
laddhal!l -aiT~ viya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee laddhan~ikeral!l);
VI 529,32* (vibhedika -a); Sp 307,11 (-al!~ bhinditva
miñjal!l khaditva kapalal!l cha<;i<;Ienti); 1408,11 (ekaiT~
-al!l detha ambaiT~ detha labujal!l detha ti); -
0
-Sañciiriya, n., a grave of coconut trees; Ja V
417,22/oll. (dijakaññayo taiT~ Kul).alal!l sakunalTI aramen'
eva ariimal!l . . . -en' eva -al!~ . . . abhisambhonti
ratatthaya, Be, Ce, W.B. Bollée, 1970, so; Ee
0
-sañjadiyen' eva 0 -sañjadiyal!l; Se 0 -sañjaditavanen'
eva -sañjaditavanaiT~: 418,32foll.: 0 -vanen' eva aññaiT~
0
0
-VanaiT~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na¡ik1ravanen' eva aññal!l
na!ik1ravanal!l); 0
-siiJava, ? Th-a 1 219,7
(sumadhuraiT~ panasaphalaiT~ abhisali.khatal!l -aiT~ adasi,
Be, Se so; Ce 0 -phalasaluvanal!l; Ee abhisammatal!l);-
o -hira, m., a strip of coconut fibre; ? Sp 1242,18 (vake ca
-e ca vanetva).
nii!iya, see sv n~ika.
niiJi, niiJi, nall,f [S. na<;ll], a hollow stalk, a tube, a pipe; a
tubular container; a measure of capacity; Abh 484
(pattho tu-i); 1057 (patthe na!e ca nalitth1, Ce so; Be
na!itthl); V in I 249,22 (n~iyavapakena anugharakaiT~
anugharakal!l ahil).<;iatha lol).al!l pi telaiT~ pi ...
s~aratha; Sp 1103,15: -iya ca avapakena ca); Ja I
251,27 (suracatiyal!l na!imattaiT~ lol).aq:t pakkhipitva);
419,24 (-iyaiT~ tela!!~ pavesento viya); 468,8· (manan ti
anhannalTI -1naiT~ namalTI ... catasso -iyo tumbo nama);
IV 67,16 (etesalTI brahmal).iinal!l palapav1h1nal!l -il!l -il!l
deh1 ti); Vism 137,5 (yo tela!!~ acha<;i<;iento -il!l pilreti);
Sp 176,12 (pattho nama o -mattaiT~ hoti ekassa purisassa
ala!!~ yapanaya); 419,13 (dhaññamapako hi -il!l pilretva);
Patis-a 85,7 (naliya minamano viya); Mhv 32:45
(sappiphal).itasakkharal!l -il!l -il!l adapesil!l); - ifc see
añjana- (sv añjana2), us1ra-, kal).tha-, kaJ.l<;ia-, kumuda-,
kusa- (sv kusa 1), gaggara- (sv gaggara\ gala- (sv gala2),
návaka
capa-, chatta- (sv chatta\ tandula-, tela-;
(najin)-dhama, m., a goldsmith; Abh 506; - (naji)-
patta. nalipana, m., a head-covering, a cap; Abh 294
(nalipano ... uttamailgamhi kañcuko); Ja VI 370,22
(cattaro -e pesesi ime slsesu katva agacchantü ti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se najikapane); 444,15 (slsato -a111 apaneti, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se 0 -vattaJV., prob. wr); - (naji)-vatta, see
najipana above; - (naji)-sañkha,f, a tubular conch;
Ja VI 58l,r (-a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se najikasailkha);- see
also ekanalika (sv eka).
navaka, n. .[nava + ka2], a boat; Ap 51,21 (sambuddho
artihi ta111 ca -aJV., Be, Ce so; Ee navalañcakaJV.; Se
navalañjakaJV.; Ap-a 304,1: navaJV. uttama111 aruhl ti
sambandho ).
navalañcakaip in Ee and navalañjakaJV. in Se at Ap 51,21
are prob. wrr; Be, Ce ta111 ca navakaJV..
navasamakatii in Ee at Ja V 425,23* is wr; prob. read
yatha sikhi nadivaho anilo kamacarava Nerü va avisesa
ca with Ce, Se, W.B. Bollée, 1967, p. 24; Be neruna va
samagata.
nava, f [S. nau; Pkt 1,1ava; cf~V nava], a boat; a ship; a
trough; Abh 666 (tara1,11 tari -a); V in III 49,11 (-a nama
yaya tarati; Sp 332,4 foil.: idha antamaso rajakado1,1ika pi
ve1,1ukalapako pi -a tv eva veditabba . . . ekassa pi
vahanika -a tv eva vuccati); DI 222,25 (samuddika
vill,lija UradassiJV. saku1,1aJ11 gahetva -aya samuddaJV.
ajjhogahanti); M 1 135,3 (natthi ca -a santilral,ll uttarasetu
va apara paraJV. gamanaya); SI !06,1s (mahat!
ekarukkhika -a); A II 201,25 (-a111 katva ... phiyarittarp
bandhitva nadirp patareyya); Dhp 369 (siñca bhikkhu
imaJV. -aJV. sitta te lahum essati ); Sn 770 (tato narp
dukkham anveti -arp bhinnam ivodakarp); Pv 28:5 (-aya
ca tvaJV. avalamba tilthasi; Pv-a 189,13: -aya ti do1,1iyarp);
Ja III 126,18 (ekacce vill,lija disakakaJV. gahetva -aya
BaveruranhaJV. agama111su); IV 163,20* (karoma -aJV.
do1,1i111 dajharp sabbayantüpapannarp); 224,25 (gailgarp
tariturp -a111 abhirühi); VI 161,9 (-arp kha1,1itva saka~arp
aropetva udakassa puretva); 234,26' (va1,1ijanaJ11 yatha -a
appamill,labhara garu ... aJ:.lJ:.lave avasidati); 427,24
(tisatamatta -a mapetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ayo);
Ap 285,8 (-aya bhijjamanaya bhikkhu me saraJ:.laJV. ada);
324,5 (tarako tvarp yatha -a); Mill6l,12 (-a pi
nanadarusailgha~ita ümivegasampaharena bhijjati);
376,23 (-aya t11,1i ailgani gahetabbanl ti); Vism 194,11
(sighasotaya nadiya arittabalen' eva -a tilthati); 690,35
(-a apubbaJV. acarimaJV. ekakkha1,1e cattari kiccani karoti
orimat1ra111 pajahati sotarp chindati bha1,1<;iaJ11 vahati
parimaJV. tlrarp appeti); Sp 58,9 (raja . . . therassa -ato
otarantassa hattharp adasi); Ap-a 303,31 (bahu -ayo
samanetva); Mhv 7:40 (-aya bhumim oti1,11,1a);- ifc see
tittha-;- 0 -pajana, n., propelling the boat; Ap-a 304,8
(tena --kale uppannena somanassasahagata-
cittappasadena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee --kalena); -
0
-lagganaka, n., an anchor, an anchoring stone;
Mil 377,22 (-arp bahu-umijalakulavikkhobhitasalilatale
mahatimahasamudde navaJV. laggeti thapeti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee 0 -lakanakarp); - 0 -smighata, m., a raft; ? Ja II
20,6 (raja -ehi nadirp pakkhanditva); 332,2s
(Ko~igamavasino -e bandhirpsu, sattha -e ~hatva, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr sattha sailghatetva; Be 0 -sailghate); Sp 57,2o
531 násaka
(-arp bandhitva);- 0 -sañcaraJ]a, n., a place accessible
to boats, a port; Mil 359,3o (naviko ... mahasamuddarp
pavisitva . . . SUVaJ:.lJ:.labhumirp gacchati aññarp pi yarp
kiñci -arp).
navayika, m. [from nava], a sailor; Mil 365,18 (-assa
ekarp ailgarp gahetabbaJV.).
navariya, mfn. [na + *avariya, fpp of avarati qv; cf S.
varya], not to be warded off, not to be checked;
Mhv 20:58 (atisahasaJV. atibalarp -aJV. yo naro jananto pi
aniccataJV.).
navika, m., -!,f [cfS. navika], l. (m.) (i) a sea-captain; a
helmsman, a sailor; Abh 666 (ka1,11,1adharo tu -o); Ja I
121 ,27 (eka111 ailgu1imuddikarp -assa saccakararp datva,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee navaya); II 103,4 (ekarp pananagamarp
gantva -anarp kammakaro hutva); IV 142,26 (nava
nivattitva iddhima vi ya... -assa gharadvare aghasi);
Mil 359,27 (sadhano -o ... mahasamuddaJV. pavisitva);
Dhp-a III 39,1 (manussa kirp saml ti -assa mukharp
olokesurp); Bv-a 72,21 (-a nama jajjaraJV. navarp
udakagahinirp cha<;I<;Ietva anapekkha va gacchanti);
Da~h 4:43; - (ii) a ferryman; Vin IV 228,1o (ta
bhikkhuniyo -e upasailkamitva etad avocurp sadhu no
avuso taretha ti); Ja I 112,20 (so slgham eva nadltlraJV.
gantva -assa anha kahapa1,1e datva naVaJV. abhirühi);
II 111,5 (-e naVaJV. tire thapetva dhammasavanatthaya
gate); III 230,s• (gailgaya -o); Ap 51,16 (kutitthe -o
asirp); Sadd 786,19 (navaya taratl ti -o); - ifc see
tittha-; - 2. (f. or [m ]fin].) a female sailor;? or
belonging toa ship;? Sadd 677,6 (-!).
navuti, f, num. [from navuti], a number: 9000? Ja VI
449,4* (tiJV.sa me purisanavutyo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee tirpsa
me purisa navutyo; 449,3o-foll.: purisanarp tirpsa-
sahassani navutisatani tirpsanavutyo ti vuccanti, Be so;
Ce, Ee tirpsasahassani navuti ca satani; Se tirpsa-
sahassani ca navutisatani ca) quoted Sadd 307,2ofoll.
(tirpsa navutyo ti idaJV. lokasailketarüjharp vacanaJV.);
308,2* (tirpsa navutiyo nama vutta Ummaggajatake).
navutika, navutika, mfn. [from navuti], 90 years old; MI
82,28 (puriso jil,ll,lO hoti . . . asitiko va -o va vassasatiko
va jatiya, Be, Ce so; E e, Se asitiko va navutiko va) t A I
68,3 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se asltiko va navutiko va; Mp II
141,4: -o ti navutivassavayo); Ja III 395,6* (passami ...
narirp asitikarp -aJV. va jacca); Pj II 172,2o (yobbanarp
aticca asitiko va -o va hutva).
navutiya, navutiya, mfn. [from navuti], worth 90 (coins
etc); Ja V 485,11* (asitiya -a ca gatha sataraha capi
bhaveyya gatha, Be, Ce so; E e, Se asltiya navutiya).
nasa, m. [S. nasa], l.destruction; loss; Abh404 (-o);
Dhatum 670 (rupa -e); - ifc see jivita-, tamo-
(sv tama[s]), maha-, VaJ:.ll,la-; - 2. (temporary or
permanent) expulsion (from the sailgha); Vin-vn 1978
(-o bhikkhuniya siya);- 0 -mattaip in Ee at Ja I 278,15
is wr for tasamattaJV. (Be, Ce, Se so);
0
-sañki(n), mfn., dreading loss or destruction; Spk I
32,13.
nasati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nasate, Wg § 16:24], sounds;
Sadd 448,15 (nasu rasu sadde: -ati); 448,19 (-anti
avyattasaddarp karonti etaya ti nasa).
nasaka, mfn. [S. nasaka], destroying; - ifc see anasaka2,
cittappabha- (sv citta 1), tama- (sv tama[s]),
 nasana
siniddhabhava- (sv siniyhati).
nasana, n., -a,f [cf S. nasana], l. (m. [and f. ?])
destruction, removal; loss, disappearance; Abh 403
(ghato -rurt ca nisüdana~); Ja V 419,r (gehe
dhanadhaññadina~ -ena coriyo); Mi1165,16 (tathagato
yeva tattha adhikaro tesrurt -aya); Sp 1157,31
(upahananrurt vuccati, -a~ vinasanan ti attho ); It-a II
93,5 (o1okanaka1ato panhaya yava -a uppajjati);
Vin-vn 2709 (sannighanrurt ca -rurt); Dhatum 454
(prurtsa -e); Sadd 556,6 (jabhi -e);- ifc see dukkha-;-
2. (j.) (temporary or permanent) expulsion (from the
saftgha); Sp 582,19 (tisso -a liftganasana sa~vasanasana
dat:t<;lakammanasana ti); 584,6 (etehi -a natthi, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -rurt); 870,35foll.; Vin-vn 1713; - ifc see
kat:t~akanasana, 1iftga-, srurtvasa-; - o• -antika, mfn.,
defined by loss or destruction; Vin I 255,21 (anh' ima
bhikkhave matika ka~hinassa ubbharaya
pakkamanantika .. . -a ... ); 255,35 (bhikkhu atthata-
ka~hino civarrurt adaya pakkamati ... tassa trurt civarrurt
kayiramana~ nassati, tassa bhikkhuno -o
ka~hinuddharo); Sp 1113,w; Vin-vn2714;- see also
nas sana.
nasanaka, mfn., see sv nassanaka.
nasana,f., see sv nasana.
nasa,/ [S. nasa], the nos e (of man or animal); the trunk of
an elephant; Abh 150 (natthu tu -a ca nasika ghanrurt);
V in 11 188,4 (ca¡;¡<;Iassa kukkurassa -ayrurt pittrurt
bhindeyyu~); MI 243,6 (mukhato ca -ato ca
assasapassase uparundhi~); 111 185,24 (kat:tl)a~ pi
chindanti -rurt pi chindanti kat:t¡;¡anasa~ pi chindanti);
Sn 198 (siftghii¡;¡ika ca -ato); 608 (na mukhena na -aya);
Vv 52:16 (kat:t¡;¡e pi chindanti atho pi -rurt); Ja I 455,14
(maricacu¡;¡J)ani -rurt pavisitva khipitukamata~
uppadesu~); II 435,19* (-ayam akara~ vat:ta~);
Vism 182,2o (civarakat:t¡;¡ena -rurt pidahitva gantabbrurt);
Sp 744,16 (kakacchamana ti -aya ka:kasaddrurt viya
niratthakasaddrurt muñcamana); Dhp-a I 307,4 (-a
ghurughurayati); Sadd 448,16 (hatthiso¡;¡<;la pi -a ti
vuccati); - ifc see khura- (sv khura\ tuftga-, naga-; -
0
(a)-cchidda, n., a nostril; MI 423,7; Vibh 84,31; Pj II
248,23; - 0 (a)-cchinna, m(jn)., (one) whose nose has
been cut or cut off; V in I 91,9 (Sp 1026,20: -o ti yassa
ajapadake va agge va ekapu~e va yattha katthaci nasa
chinna hoti); 111 74,2 (dujjivitrurt nama ... -assa); Ja II
322,7; Kv 31,3o;- 0 -pufa, nasa-puta, m.n., the cavity of
the nose, the nostril; Ja 1116,8 (cu¡;¡¡;¡a agantva tassa -esu
pavisi); V 164,9 (-e vijjhitva rajjukrurt pavesetva);
Vism 362,19 (na -a jananti amhesu siftghal)ika ~hita ti);
Spk I 313,33 (duggandho -rurt abhihani); 11284,6 (-ani
0
pothetva); - (a)-va~sa, m., the bridge of the nose;
Spk I 192,14;- see also khuranasika (sv khura\ gonasa
(sv go ), cipi~anasa (sv cipi~a), cipi~akavirüpanasa
(sv cipi~aka), tuftganasa (sv tuftga).
nasika,f (and-a, m.), [S. nasika], a nostril; the nose; the
snout; Abh 150 (nasa ca -a); Vin II 134,32 (-a dukkha
honti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee hoti); Thi 258 (sa¡;¡hatuftgasadisi
ca -a sobhate); Ja I 455,18 (asi1akkhat:tapa~hako
asilakkha¡;¡a~ pa~hanto -a~ chindapesi ti); VI 554,22
(-aya appahontiya mukhena UI)he assasapassase
vissajjesi); Ap 321,7 (kat:t¡;¡asote ca -e pa~imasi);
532 nikattha
Kv 493,3o (ka¡;¡¡;¡o sa¡;¡~hati -a sa¡;¡~hati); Vism 280,8 (bahi
nikkhamanavatassa hi nabhi adi hadaya~ majjhrurt -a
pariyosana~, Se so; Be, Ce nasikaggrurt; Ee wr
nabhikaggrurt) = Sp 421,10 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
nasikagga~); Mil 397,28 (varaho. .. -aya pa~havi~
kha¡;¡itva); Sadd 448,n (manussadlnrurt -a pi nasa ti
vuccati); 608,26 (niggahitañañat:tanamanrurt va ~hana­
bhütaya -aya); - ifc see ka¡;¡¡;¡a-, tuftga-; - 0 -roga, m.,
catarrh, a cold in the head; Abh 324 (pinaso -o); -
0
-loma, n., nostril hair; Vin II 134,29 (na bhikkhave
dighrurt -rurt dharetabb~); - 0
-Sota, 0 (a)-sota, n.
2
[nasika + sota ], a nostril; DI 106,13 (ubho pi -ani
anumasi); Ps 111 382,7; - see also cipi~anasika,
cipi~avirüpanasika (sv cipi~a), tuftganasika (sv tuftga),
dighanasika (sv digha).
nasita, mfn., pp of nas eti qv sv nassati.
nasitaka, mfn. [nasita + ka2], (one) who is subject to
expulsion; V in IV 140.19 (ekacchanne -e samat:tuddese
nippanne); V 211,14 (-a kati vutta); Sp 1199,10 (sace
silava bhavissati vatt~ püretva pa~ipassaddhi~
labhissati no ce tatha -o va bhavissati); 1320,34
(1ingada¡;¡<;lakammasrurtvasanasanahi nasitabbo -o nama
sesa sabbe anasitaka, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se nasito va -o);-
anasitaka, mfn., not subject to expulsion; Vin IV 140,3o
(anapatti -o ti janati); Sp 1320,34.
naseti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnassati qv.
nasiviso in Ee at Ja I 504,14 is wr; Be, Ce ghanita-asiviso;
Se gha~itasiviso ..
ni\ ind. [ts], prefix to nouns and adjectives; preverb to
verbs; expressing: down; back; also sometímes
expressing a negative; Abh 1165-67; Sadd 885,8* foil.
(nissese niggate e' eva ... nisaddo iti);- 0 -kara, m., the
preverb 'ni'; Ja 111 121 ,3· (nipadamase ti nikarapakara
upasagga, damase ti attho, dadama ti vutta~ hoti, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se nipakara); Sadd 540,6 (yata nikaropakaresu).
ni2 , ni(s), ind. [S. nis] (befare vowels takíng the form nir-;
a followíng single consonant is doubled, or sometimes
ni(s) becomes ni-), prefix to nouns and adjectives;
preverb to verbs; as prefíx expressing: away; free from,
without; sometimes expressing: thoroughly; as preverb
expressing: away; out of; Abh 1165-7; Vism 495,7
(nisaddo abhavrurt ... dlpeti); Pa~is-a 265,27 (abhiniharo
ti . . . abhimukhattho hi ettha abhisaddo bhusattho
nisaddo, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nisaddo); Sadd 885,8• foil.
niipsati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nisati 1.
nikacca, instr. ofnikati qv, or absol. ofnikaroti qv.
nikafa, mfn. [ts], near; Abh 705 (samipa~ nika~asanno).
nikatfha\ mfn. and n. [S. nilq"~~a], near; nearness; -
loe. -e, adv., near (in place or time?); Ja III 103,15* (na
hi satthrurt sunisita~ ... evrurt -e pateti vaca dubbhasita
yatha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikka<;lhe; 103,zz·: tasmi~ yeva
kha¡;¡e appamattake ka1e); 438,11* (lahu~ ca vata
khippa~ ca -e samacetayi; 438,21·: santike ~hita va tassa
mara¡;¡upayrurt cintesi) f. Ap 563,1 (samacetayi~, Be, Ee
so; Ce nikitthe; Se nekatthe); - see also upakat¡ha,
nikittha.
nikafÍha 2, mfn. [cf S. nikar~ati, nikrHa], brought down,
controlled; ? (or = nikka~~a, pp of nikka<;l<;lhati qv); -
0
-kaya, mfn., physically controlled; A 11 137 ,nfoll.
(-o ... puggalo araññe vanapatthani pantani senasanani
nikal}l}ika
pa~isevati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikkagha-; cfMp III 132,22:
niggatakayo . . . kayen' eva gamato nikkhanto ); -
neg. anika~~akaya, mft¡., A II 137,17 foll.;
0
-citta, mft¡. [nikagha + citta1], mentally controlled; A II
13 7,17 foll. (-o .. . puggalo .. . nekkhammavitakkarp pi
vitakketi ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikka~~a-); -
neg. anika~hacitta, mft¡., A II 137,17 foll. (cfMp III
132,23foll.: cittena araññe vasanto pi gamam eva
pavi~~ho).
nikai}I}Íkii, f and/or -a, mft¡. [from ni 1 + kal).l,la],
(j.) whispering in the ear; secret discussion; (mft¡.) in the
ear; secret; Ja III 124,3* (ya mantana araññasmiJTI ya ca
game -a; 124,s-: -a ti kaJ.lJ.lamüle mantana); 124,8· (ya
esa tava attano upaghakehi saddhiJTI uyyane ca game ca
-a mantana);- acc. -aJTI, adv., in the ear; in whispers;
Vin IV 270,24 (Thullananda bhikkhuni . . . purisena
saddhiJTI ... -arp pi jappeti; 271,14: purisassa upakal).J.lake
aroceti; Sp 927,3: -an ti kaJ.lJ.lamülarp vuccatl kal).J.lamüle
jappeyya ti).
nikata, mft¡., pp of nikaroti qv.
nikati, f [S. nikrti], fraud, deceit, cheating; Abh 177 (-i
ku~aJTI); Vin III 90,24* (nikacca kitavasseva bhuttarp
theyyena tassa taJTI; or absol. ofnikaroti qv; cfSp 486,11:
nikacca ti vañcetva aññatha santarp aññatha dassetva) =
SI 24,4* (Spk I 64,3ofoll.: nikacca ti -iya vañcanaya,
vañcetva ti attho, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be vañcetva va ti); D II
243,1 • (kodho mosavajjarp -i ca dubbho, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -1 ca); Sn 242 (theyyaJTI musavado -i vañcanani ca,
Ee, Se so; Ce omits ca; Be nikativañcanani ca; Pj II
285,28: -i ti dassami karissami ti adina nayena asarp
uppadetva nirasaJT!karaJ.laJTI); Ja I 223,26* (naccantarp
o -ppañño nikatya sukham edhati; 223,2s'foll.: -i vuccati
vañcana .. . taya nikatya -iya); III 88,14* (na nikatya
dhanaJTI hare); Nidd I 79,24 (vañcana -i nikira1,1a
pariharal).a ... ) f. Vibh 358,3; Sv 80,11 H ti ... amaJ).iJTI
maJ).in ti asUVal).J.laJTI suVai.J.J.lan ti katva patirilpakena
vañcanaJTI); Pj I 248,4 (vañcanadihi -ihi); - ifc see
ukko~anavañcana- (sv ukko~ana);- see also nekatika.
nikati(n), m(jn). [S. nikrtin], (one) who is dishonest, a
cheat; Ja II 183,9• (bhavati capi -ino nikatya; 183,22':
-ino nekatikassa vañcanakassa pugga1assa).
nikatyii, f [S. nikrtya], dishonesty, cheating; Ja II 183,9•
(bhavati capi nikatino -a; 183,23': nikatino nekatikassa
vañcanakassa puggalassa -a aparo nikatikarako
vañcanapuriso bhavati yeva).
nikatviina in Ee at Ja III 466,2* is prob. wr for ninui.katva
(Be, Ce, Se so).
nikantati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nikrntati], cuts; cuts up; cuts off;
Ja II 53,26' (tarp mülarp pi -ati ti); Spk I 215,27 (chindati
ti ... müle yeva -ati); Pañca-g 29 (aññoññaJTI -anti); -
pp nikanta, nikkanta, mft¡. [cf S. nikrtta, BHS nikrnta],
cut; scraped; MI 364,14 (aghikailka1arp sunikantarp -aJTI
nimmaJT!SaJ!l . . . upacchubheyya; Ps IIl 43,2: -arp
nillikhitaJTI) quoted Nidd-a I 31,14 (Be, Se sunikkantarp
nikkantarp nimmaJT!sarp; Ce, Ee sunikkantarp
nimmaJT!salohitamakkhitarp); - sunikanta, sunikkanta,
mft¡., properly cut; well-scraped; MI 364,14.
nikantana, n. [S. nikrntana], cutting; Spk II 380,10
' -a~~ena sallarp).
0
( Ud 36,17 (evarilpiya kathaya -i); Vism 307,22* (na -i
nikanti, f [cfnikama and S. kanti], wanting, longing;
533 nikama
attachment, fondness; Abh 162 (tal).ha ... nikanty asa);
Th 20 (maral).e me bhayarp natthi -i natthi jivite; Th-a I
79,3: -i ti apekkha tal).ha); Ja II 336,27' (na hi jivite
alayarp kubbamano ti jivitasmiJTI hi -iJTI kurumano
purisakiccarp .. . na karoti); Nidd I 8,23 H nikamana
patthana pihana) = II 152,37 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikantika,
prob. wr); Pa~is I 52,20 (purimakammabhavasmiJTI ... -i
tal).ha); Vism 633,2o (dasa [vipassanupakkilesa] ti,
obhaso ... upekkha -i ti); 637,9 (so attano mu1a-
kammaghanaJTI vissajjetva -im eva assadento nisidati
ti); Sv 110,24 (sattanaJTI pakatiya vasita~~ane -i
uppajjati); Ps IV 98,8 (dibbarammaJ).e pi -iJTI na janeti);
Dhp-a IV 63,2 (atitesu khandhesu alayaJTI -iJTI
ajjhosanaJTI patthanaJTI ... tal).haJTI muñca); Da~ 3:40
(hitva -iJTI sakajivite pi); Sadd 556,22 (kamo kanti -i); -
ifc see jivita-;- see also anikantika, sanikantika.
nikantikii in Ee at Nidd II 152,37 is prob. wr for
nikanti qv.
nikara, nikara, m. [S. nikara], a collection, a multitude;
Abh 629 (vikaro nikaro cayo, eds so); Da~ 5:25 (tarp
jatipupphanikarena thakesi raja); Sadd 536,14* (kayo
nikayo -o).
nikaral}ii in Ee at Pp 19,3o is prob. wr for nikiral).a qv.
nikaroti, nikubbati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nikaroti], humiliates;
deceives, cheats; Khp 9:6 (na paro paraJTI nikubbetha;
Pj I 247,17: na vañceyya) = Sn 148; Nidd-a I 207,14
(etaya satta nikaronti ti nikati, miccha karonti ti attho );
Sadd 509,11; - neg. part.pr. anikubba(t), mft¡., Ja II
233,2• (paresaJTI anikubbato);- absol. nikacca (or instr.
of nikati qv ), Vin III 90,24* (nikacca kitavasseva bhuttaJTI
theyyena tassa tarp; Sp 486,11: nikacca ti vañcetva
aññatha santaJTI aññatha dassetva) = SI 24,4* (cfSpk I
64,3o: nikacca ti nikatiya vañcanaya, vañcetva ti attho,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be vañcetva va ti); - pp nikata, mft¡.
[S. nikrta], l. deceived, cheated; MI 511,23 (aharp imina
purisena telamasikatena sahuJacivarena -o vañcito
paluddho) f. S IV 307,31; - 2. dishonest, cheating;
Abh 737 (-o ca sa~hanuju); - nikatanto in Ee at Spk II
34,4foll. is prob. wr for niku~anto (Be, Ce, Se so).
nikasa, m. [S. nika~a], a touchstone; Abh 528 (s1iJ.lo tu
-o); 0
Ópala, m., a touchstone; Da~h 3:87
(sailghagayitva -amhi).
nikasati in Ee, Se atAs 325,32 is prob. wr for nikassati qv.
nikasiivo in Ee at Vin I 3,5* is wr for nikkasavo (Be, Ce,
Se so).
nikassati, pr. 3 sg. [pass. ofni + kasati3], is scratched; is
ploughed; Pa~is-a 80,6 (na kassati na -ati kasitUJTI ... na
sakka ti akaso) f. As 325,32 (Be, Ce so; E e, Se nikasati).
nikiima, m. [ts], desire, wanting; pleasure; Abh 826; PsI
161,19 (nikamalabhi ti -ena labhi attano icchavasena
labhi);- acc. nikamarp, adv., according to one's wish;
0
abundantly; Abh 469; - -liibhi(n), mft¡., obtaining
according to one's wish, at will; D III 113,24
(dighadhammasukhaviharanarp -i hoti akicchalabhi
akasiralabhi; Sv 897,19: yathakamalabhi); S V 316,6
(samadhissa -i); A lii 218,11 (pañca bhikkhusatani
imassa anuttarassa vimuttisukhassa -ino assu); IV 342,15
(devata .. . na... sambodhasukhassa -iniyo assu);
mettaya kusali ti pavuccati); Spk II 236,6 (icchiticchita-
nikamana
kkha~e samapajjanasamatthataya -I); - 0
-seyya,f,
sleeping (or a bed) as one wishes; Dhp 309 (naro
pamatto apajjati paradarupasevi apuññalabharp na -al]l,
Be, Ce, Ee so; better nanikamaseyyal]l with Se ?
cfPDhp 210: anikamaseyarp; GDhp 270: ani'amasaya;
Uv 4:14: anikamasayyiil]l; Dhp-a III 482,I9foll.: yatha
icchati eval]l seyyarp alabhitva anicchital]l parittakam
eva kalal]l seyyal]11abhati ).
nikamana,f [from nikameti], desire, wanting; Nidd I 8,23
(ta~ha yo rago ... nikanti -a patthana pihana ... ) f.
Dhs 1059 = Vibh 362,I; Vism 580,5 (ya kammarp
karontassa phale upapattibhave -a patthana sa t~ha
nama).
nikameti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nivkam], desires, wants
more of; takes pleasure in, enjoys; M III 116,!7
(muccharp -ayati gedhal]l apajjati, Be, Se so; Ce
mucchati -ayati; Ee mucchati kamayati; Ps IV 165,4:
muccharp -ayati ti mucchanata~hal]l pattheti pavatteti ti
attho, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be muccharp kamayati ti); S II
226,21 (bhikkhu uppannal]llabhasakkarasilokal]l assadeti
-eti); A II 126,2o (ekacco puggalo ... pathamajjhanarp
upasampajja viharati, so tal]l assadeti tal]l -eti tena ¡;a
vittil]l apajjati); IV 54, n (matugamassa ucchadana-
parimaddananahapanasambahanal]l sadiyati, so tal]l
assadeti tal]l -eti ... ); part.pr.
(a) neg. anikamaya(t), mfn., SI 122,20* (jivitam
anikamayal]l); Sn 210; (b) nikamayamana, mfn., V in I
183,3s (labhasakkarasilokarp niina ayal]l ayasma
-ayamano pavivekadhimutto ti); II 108,!8 (sarakuttil]l pi
-ayamanassa samadhissa bhaii.go hoti); A III 227,23 (tam
eva puttassadal]l -ay aman o).
nikaya, m., l. [ts] an assemblage, a class, a group;
Abh 632 (-o tu sadhamminal]l); 1104 (-o geharasisu);
Vism 498,28 (jatisaddo ... atthi Visakhe nig~tha nama
sam~ajati ti ettha -e); Sp 26,26 (samiihanivasa hi -o ti
vuccanti); Pa!is-a 151,4 (sattanikaye ti sattanal]l -e
sattaghatayal]l sattasamiihe ti attho); Sadd 536,14* (kayo
-o nikaro); - ifc see deva-, satta- (sv satta3); -
esp. (i) [BHS id.] a group of suttas, one of the 5
collections of the Suttapi!aka; Vin II 287,27 (pañca -e
pucchi put!ho pugho ayasma Anando vissajjesi);
Vism 242,2 (nesarp dve tayo -a pagu~a); Sp 28,I•joll.
(!hapetva caturo p' ete -e dighadike tadaññarp
buddhavacanal]l -o khuddako mato); Mp II 189,17 (eko
-o eko agamo nama); Dhp-a II 95,w (pañcahi -ehi
atthal]l ca kara~arp ca aka<;l<;lhitva); - ifc see anguttara-,
khuddaka- (sv khuddaka\ digha-, majjhima-, sal]lyutta-
(sv Sal]lyujjati); - (ii) [BHS id.] a school, an ordination
lineage; Spk III 38,27 (kocid eva dhammakathiko
agantva sabbesarp manarp bhinditva viharal]l attano
0
-santakal]l kareyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee santakarp); -
2. a house, a dwelling; Abh 205 (-o nilayalayo); 1104;
Sv 23,2 (samiihanivasa hi -o ti vuccanti);
o• -antara, n., another school, another lineage;
Vism 220,6 (tad etal]l -e ahavaniyo ti padal]l idha
ahuneyyo ti; Vism-mht [Be] I 280,!9: -e ti sabbatthika-
vadinikaye) It-a II 108,23; As 2,3* (--laddhihi
asammissal]l anakulaf!1 mahaviharavasinarp dipayanto
vinicchayal]l); - see also ekanikayika (sv eka),
catunikayika, catunekayika (sv catu[r)), pañcanekayika
534 nikujjati
(sv pañca).
nikasi(n), mfn. [cf S. nikasa], resembling, like; - ifc see
aggi-.
nikittha, mfn. [S. nikmaL low, vile; Abh 699 (patiki!!harp
-am).
nikh;¡;¡a (and nikki~~a), mfn. [pp of *ni 1 + kirati], thrown
down; put down, placed; D III 6,9 (Korakkhattiyo
kukkuravatiko catuku~9iko chama -al]l bhakkhasal]l
mukhen' eva khadati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikkinnam; or
prob. cpd of chama2 qv; Sv 819,22: bhiimiy~ ·-al]l
pakkhittarp !hapital]l, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikki~~arp) f.
MI 387,19 (Be, Ce, Ee chamanikkhittarp; Se chamayarp
nikkhittal]l); D IIl 11,8 (y asa nikki~~o kalal]l karissati ti,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nihino; Sv 823,3o: nikki~~o ti yal]l
labhaggayasaggarp patto tato parihino hutva, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nihino ti); Ja III 529,!6' (pakkhitta-
niki~~a-m-antare ti ... taya samugge pakkhitta saddhil]l
samuggena -a antare anto kucchiyal]l thapita ti attho );
VI 182,25* (hatthagatal]l pattagatarp -al]l khaditul]l
vararp, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nikki~~al]l; 182,28·: purato va
-al]l !hapital]l, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nikki~~arp); - ifc see
chama (sv chama2).
nikira¡;¡a, n. [from *ni 1 + kirati], scattering, dispersing;?
(counterfeiting; ?) Ja IV 223,7* (gogharp majjarp kiratarp
va sabha -ani ca araka parivajjehi, Be so; Ce sabha-
nikir~ani ca; Ee sabhani kir~ani ca; Se
sabhadhikara~ani ca; 223,25·: sabhayo ca hirañña-
suv~~anarp nikira~aghanani ca, Be so; Ce kar~a­
ghanal]l ca; E e kara~aghanani ca; Se nidhit!hiinal]l).
nikira¡;¡a, f [from *ni 1 + kirati ?], falsity; dishonesty;
Nidd I 79,24 (vañcana nikati -a parihara~a ... ; Nidd-a I
207,15: naharp evarp karomi ti papanarp vikkhipanato -a)
= 378,24 (Nidd-a I 410,8: nikkhipanato -a) f. Pp 19,3o (Ce
so; Be vikira~a; Ee nikati nikara~a. prob. wr; Se
vikir~a; f. Vibh 358,3: Be, Ce vikir~a; Ee, Se vikir~a;
Vibh-a 493,21: vikkhipanato vikira~a).
nikiJita, mfn. and n. [pp of *ni 1 + kijati; cf S. nikñ9a],
l. (mfn.) sported in; where there is enjoyment; Ja VI
313,tt * (tal]l [!hanal]l] . . . -arp niccam ah o ca rattil]l;
313,2o·: -an ti niccal]l abo ca rattil]l ca nagakaññahi
ki)itanuki)ital]l); - 2. (n.) experience;? concomitant;?
Bv 1:79 (atitabuddhanal]l jinanal]l desital]l -al]l
buddhaparamparagatal]l .. . pakasayi; Bv-a 62,22/oll.:
-an ti tesarp carital]l, kappajatigotta-ayubodhi-
savakasavikasannipata-upaghakamatapituputta-bhariya-
paricchedadikarp -al]l nama); - see also aniki!itavi(n).
nikujja, nikkujja, mfn. [prob. ni 1 + kujja 1; -kk- influenced
by ukkujja? BHS nikubja; cf S. nyubja], 'with the
(hollow side of the) curve facing down '; face
downwards, upside down; A I 130,!9 (kumbho -o tatra
udakarp asittal]l vivattati no s~thati, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
nikkujjo; Mp II 202,13: -o ti adhomukharp !hapito, Be,
Se so; Ce, E e nikkujjo ti) = Pp 31,23 (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
nikkujjo); Pv 42:8 (uttano pi ca paccittha -o
vamadakkhi~o ); -se e also avakujja, ukkujja, patikujja.
nikujjati 1, -eti, nikkujjati 1, nikkujjeti, pr. 3 sg. [prob.
denom. from nikujja qv; BHS nikubjayati; but cf S.
nyubjati], tums upside down, overtums; places face
downwards; Vin II 113,34 (bhikkhii chamaya pattal]l
nikkujjanti ogho gharpsiyati); D III 203,22 (api ssu
nikujjati
narp . . . amanussa rittarp pi 'ssa pattarp sise
nikkujjeyyurp);- esp. tums (a layman's bowl) upside
down, refuses alms (with a formal act of the saiJ.gha);
Vin II 125,29 (saiJ.gho Va¡;l¡;lhassa Licchavissa pattarp
nikkujjati asambhogarp saiJ.ghena karoti); A IV 344,25
(att)lahi bhikkhave angehi samannagatassa upasakassa
akailkhamano saiJ.gho pattarp nikkujjeyya; Mp IV 159,24:
tena dinnassa deyyadhammassa appatiggahal)attharp
pattanikujjanakammavacaya -eyya, na adhomukha-
tthapanena, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nikkujjeyya); Sadd 349,23
(kujja adhomukhikaral)e: kujjati -ati ukkujjati); -
part.pr. nikujjanta, nikkujjanta, mfn., Mp IV 94,25
(bhattabharitarp pattarp -anto, Be so; Se wr nikujjhanto;
Ce, Ee sabhattarp panirp nikkujjanto); - aor.
3 sg. nikujjesi, Vism 42,19 (pattarp mukhavagiyarp
gahetva ekamante -esi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nikkujjesi);-
absol. (a) nikujjiya, Thi 28 (saiJ.ghatirp nikkhipitvana
pattakarp ca -iya); (b) nikujjitva, -etva, nikkujjitva, MI
414,21 (udakadhanarp -itva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
nikkujjitva); Sp 333,7 (-itva thapitanavaya, Se so; Be
nikkujjitva; Ce, Ee nikkujjetva); Ps II 241,3o (avasesarp
udakarp chaQ¡;ietva ghate -itva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nikkujjitva); Pj II 190,3 (puttarp ca brahmal)e ca tassa
padamüle nikkujjitva nipajjapetva khamapesi, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se nikkujjetva); (e) nikujjitvana, nikkujjitvana,
Cp 1:6 (-itvana bhajanarp, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
1 nikujjanti); Ap-a 536,30* (-anti); - aor. 1 sg. niküji,
nikkujjitvana);- pp nikuijita\ nikkujjita , mfn., tumed
upside down, overtumed; face downwards; Vin II 125,33
(nikkujjito saiJ.ghena Va¡;l¡;lhassa Licchavissa patto );
III 6,6 (seyyatha pi bho Gotama nikkujjitarp va
ukkujjeyya; Sp 171,9: -an ti adhomukhat)lapitarp
heghamukhajatarp va, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nikkujjitan ti);
MI 414,22 (udakadhanarp -an ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
nikkujjitan ti); Ja III 277,1 (püvasakatarp nikkujjitarp);
Sp 1209,7 (evarp nikkujjite pana patte tassa gehe koci
deyyadhammo na gahetabbo ); Pj II 481,16 (--tta, Be, Se
so; Ce, E e nikkujjitatta); Mhv 22:49 (-arp navarp); -
neg. anikujjita, mfn., Spk II 48,14 (uttano ti anikujjito, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce anikkujjito); - fpp nikkujjitabba, mjn.,
Vin II 125,16 (att)lahi bhikkhave aiJ.gehi samannagatassa
upasakassa patto nikkujjitabbo); - see also avakujjati,
1 gambhire, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikku¡;l¡;le ti); Mp III 204,15
ukkujjati, patikujjati .
2 2 1 (desanaya arahattena -arp gal)hi, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
nikuijati , nikkuijati , pr. 3 sg. [= nikujjati ?], rejects;?
puts aside, stores; ? neg. part.pr. anikujjanta,
anikkujjanta, mfn., DI 53,13 (tam eva vacarp
anuggal)hanto anikujjanto, Ce so; Be, Ee anikkujjanto;
Se anikkujjento; cfSv 160,2ojoll.: anikkujjanto ti ...
hadaye aghapento, vyañjanarp pananena uggahitarp
e' eva nikkujjitarp ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anikkujjento ti);
2 nihinanto ).
- pp nikkujjita , mjn., put aside, stored; ? Sv 160,23
(vyañjanarp pananena uggahitarp e' eva nikkujjitarp ca;
cfSv-pt I 287,2o: nikujjanarp tassa addhaniya-
bhavapadanavasena cittena sandhiiral)arp).
nikuijate, pr. 3 sg., see sv niküjati.
1 ayarp dutiyo ti esa dutiyo sabbarp natthi ti uppajjanaka-
nikuijana, nikkujjana, f, -a, n. [from nikujjati qv;
BHS nikubjana], placing (the bowl of a layman) face
downwards; overtuming; Vin II 125,31 (khamati
Va¡;i¡;lhassa Licchavissa -a asambhogarp sanghena
karal)arp); - ifc se e patta- (sv patta\
1 habitation; where someone or something stays or settles
nikuijita\ mjn., pp ofnikujjati qv.
535 niketa
nikuijita 2 , mfn., see sv niküjati.
1
nikuijeti,pr. 3 sg., see sv nikujjati .
nikuñja, m.n. [ts], a bower, a glen; Abh 609 (kuñjarp -am
itthi na); Spk II 54,22 (udakabhinnapabbatapadeso yo
nitambo ti -o ti pi vuccati, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nadikuñjo)
f. Nidd-a I 98,9 (-an ti pi vadanti, Se so; Be, Ee nadi-
kuñjan ti pi; Ce nadikujjan ti pi; = Sv 209,27: eds nadi-
kuñjan ti pi); Dath 4:33 (ratanagirinikuñje nagarajarp
apassi);- ifc see nadi-.
nikuñjati in Ee at Ja V 304,20* is prob. wr; Be niküjati;
Ce, Se patikujjati.
nikute in Ee atVin IV 211,28 is wrforniküte (Be, Ce so).
nikubbati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nikaroti.
niküja, m. [cfniküjati and S. küja], calling; singing;
Th-a III 200,36 (tava -arp SUJ)Oma ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
niküjitarp; = Pj II 349,21: eds niküjitarp).
niküjati, nikujjati3, pr. 3 sg. [S. niküjati], makes an
inarticulate noise; calls; sings; Sn 350 (khipparp girarp
eraya vaggu vaggurp harpsa va paggayha Sal)ikarp -a,
Be, Ee so; Ce -arp; Se nikujja; Pj II 349,15foll.: yatha
suVal)l)aharpso . . . vaggurp girarp -ati nicchareti evam
eva tvarp pi sal)ikarp -a) = Th 1270 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
-arp); Ja III 323,7• (yatha capo ninnamati jiya capi -ati,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikujjati); VI 539,20* (sabbe mañjü
-anti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee mañjüni küjanti); 540,9·
(ekaninnadarp karonta -anti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
Thi 261 (kananamhi vanasal)¡;iacarini kokila va
madhurarp -i 'harp, Be, Ce, Thi-a 201,21 so; Ee, Se
niküjitarp; cf K.R. Norman, 1971, pp. 115-16);
2
pp niküjita, nikujjita , (mj)n. [cf S. niküjita], calling;
singing; Ja VI 562,11* (nanu tvarp saddam assosi ...
sihassa vinadantassa vyagghassa ca -arp, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee nikujjitarp; 562,22·: -arp ekaninnadarp saddarp, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nikujjitarp); Th-a III 200,36 (tava -arp SUJ)Oma
ti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se niküjarp) = Pj II 349,21; Thi-a 201,23
(tarp -arp alaparp).
niküta 1, n. [cfküta 1], projection; end, culmination; Vin IV
211,28 (paticchanne okase -e Sundañnandaya
bhikkhuniya asanarp paññapesi, Be, Ce so; Ee nikute; Se
niku¡;i¡;le; Sp 900,zz: -e ti kol)asadisarp katva dassite
kütarp); - ifc se e arahatta- (sv araha[t]);- o• -anta, m.,
end meaning an extreme;? Spk II 34,4foll. (ayarp eko
anto ti esa eko -o lamakanto pathamakarp sassatarp,
ayarp dutiyo ti esa dutiyo sabbarp natthi ti uppajjanaka-
dittJlisaiJ.khato -o lamakanto dutiyako ucchedo ti attho,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikatanto; cf Spk-t [Be] II 38,2o: -o ti
niküta2 , mfn. [cfS. nikfta], (according to ct) low, base;
0
Spk-t [Be] II 38,21 (nihinapariyayo hi ayarp -saddo);-
0
'-anta, m., a base extreme; Spk II 34,4foll. (ayarp eko
anto ti esa eko -o 1amakanto pathamakarp sassatarp,
dittJlisankhato -o 1amakanto dutiyako ucchedo ti attho,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikatanto; Spk-t [Be] II 35,2o: -o ti
nihinanto ).
niketa, m.n. [S., BHS id.], a home; a (temporary)
 niketana
or is attached; D III 145,23 (yaiTI pi bhikkhave tathagato
purimaiTI jatiiTt purim~ bhavaiTI purim~ -~ pubbe
manussabhuto samano dajhasamadano ahosi; Sv 919,9:
nivutthavasena alayaghena va -o ti); Dhp 91 (uyyuñjanti
satimanto na -e ramanti te); Sn 207 (-a jayate rajo);
Ja II 81 ,r foll. (-e alay~ katva añnatra agantva -ena
hato); IV 331,7* (sak~ -aiTt atihijayano); V 16,21*
(dhuttan~ gati -o; 19,6·: -o ti nivaso); 45,9*
(amodamano gacchati san -~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
saniketaiTt; 45,Ir: attano vasanaghan~); Mil 213,2 (na
tattha buddhaputtena alayo karaJ.liyo -e ti); Sp 10,23
(siriya -am iva) = Sv 9,10 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se niketanam);
Spk II 259,27 (rüpam eva . . . arammaJ.lakiriyasailkhata-
nivasanaghanaghena -an ti); 260,s (-an ti ajja
asukaghane kijissama ti katasailketa!(han~
nivasatJ:hanaiTI uyyanadi); Th-a I 106,Isfoll. (kilesan~
nivasana!(hanaghena pañcakamaguJ.la -a nama lokiya va
chalarammaJ.ladhamma . . . tes~ -an~ pahanatthaya
patipada aniketaviharo); Sadd 361,1 (-o);
0
-dirika, mfn., ranging from its home (in); Th 599
(apaJ.l<;iaro aJ,l<;lasambhavo sivathikaya -o; Th-a II 256,23:
tam eva nivasatJ:han~ katva vicaraJ.lako );
0
-Va(t), mfn., having a dwelling; - ifc see kamma-; -
0
-sari(n), mfn., keeping to a home; clinging, attached;
S III 10,21 (rüpanimittaniketavisaravinibandha kho ... -i
ti vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -niketasaravinibandha;
Spkii 259,25foll.: rüpam eva ... niketan ti ...
arammaJ.lakaraJ.lavasena nivasanaghanaiTI sari ti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nivasaghanasa ñ ti) = Nidd I 198,14 (Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se -niketasaravinibandh~); Nidd I 494,16
(ekacco kulapalibodhena samannagato hoti
gaJ.lapalibodhena avasapalibodhena ... samannagato hoti
ev~ -i hoti); - neg. aniketasari(n), mfn., S III 10,29
(rüpanimittaniketavisaravinibandha . . . tathagatassa
pahina . . . tasma tathagato aniketasañ ti vuccati) =
Nidd I 198,19; Sn 844 (ok~ pahaya aniketasari); 970
(aniketasari, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be aniketacañ; Nidd I 494,17:
kathaiTt aniketasari hoti, idha na kulapalibodhena
samannagato hoti ... , E e, Se so; Be, Ce aniketacañ; Pj II
573,26: aniketacañ ti apalibodhacari nittaJ,lhacañ, eds so);
- aniketa, mfn. and m., 1. (mfn.) without a ifzxed)
home; without ties; S I 199,22* (-a viharanti bhikkhavo)
quoted Nidd I 494,24* and Vism 76,4; Ja VI 61,15" (yo
pana niket~ pahaya pabbajitatta -o); Mi1212,I2
(araññako migo araññe pavane caramano niralayo -o
yathicchakaiTt sayati); - 2. (m.) not a home, lack of a
home; Sn 207 (-~ asanthav~ et~ ve
munidassan~); Mil212,24 (vihare vijjamane
bhikkhuniyo vyattasailketa bhavissanti . . . anikete
duddassana bhavissanti ti); - --cari(n), mfn., going
around, living, without a (fixed) home, without ties;
Sn 970 (sekho --cañ, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se --sañ; Nidd I
494,17: kath~ --cañ hoti ... , Be, Ce so; E e, Se --sari;
Pj II 573,26: --cari ti apalibodhacari nittaJ,lhacañ, eds so);
- --vasi(n), mfn. [aniketa + vasi(n) 2], not living in a
(fixed) home; Mi1201 ,17 (manusso ahosi vanacarm;w
--vasi); 385,23 (vayu niralayo --vasi).
niketana, n. [ts], a house, a home; Abh 206 (niketana-
nivesan~); Ja III 274,9* (migaraja pure asiiTt Kosalassa
-e, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se niketave; 274,16": Kosalassa rañño
536 nikka«J.«J.hati
-e vasanatJ:hane, Be so; Ce, Se nikete; Ee niketave);
Sv 9,10 (siriya -am iva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niketam =
Sp 10,23: eds niketam); Sadd 530,13 (-aiTt nivaso).
niketava, m. [?], a home, a habitation; Ja III 274,9*
(migaraja pure asiiTt Kosalassa -e, Ce, Ee, Se so,
perhaps wr; Be niketane; 274,16·: Kosalassa rañño -e
vasanaghane, Ee so; Ce, Se nikete; Be niketane).
niketi(n), mfn. (from niketa], having a home; (one) who
has a long connection with; Sn 422 (janapado ...
Kosalesu -in o; Pj II 385,4 foll.: -in o ti bha!,lanto
navakarajabhavaiTt patikkhipati, navakaraja hi -i ti na
vuccati yassa pana adikalato pabhuti anvayavasena so
eva janapado nivaso so -i ti vuccati); - ifc see
dumasakha- (sv duma).
nikkaiikha, mfn., nikkailkha,f., see sv kailkha.
nikka~h;lhati (and nikka<;l<;lheti), pr. 3 sg. [cf S. ni~kar~ati],
drags out; draws out; throws out, ejects; Vin IV
44,1sfoll. (kupita anattamana givayaiTI gahetva -anti ...
kath~ hi nama chabbaggiya bhikkhü . . . bhikkhü
sailghika vihara -issanti ti); 44,32 (yo pana bhikkhu
bhikkhuiTt . . . sailghika vihara -eyya va -apeyya va
pacittiyan ti); Sp 781,26 (imaiTt -a ti) 781,29 (-ahi ti);
Pj II 61,10 (im~ mama rajja -atha ti); 311,26 (hatthe va
sise va gahetva -atha); Sadd 357,3 (ka<;l<;lhati aka<;l<;lhati
-ati); part.pr. nikka<;l<;lhanta, nikka<;l<;lhenta,
mfi -anti)n., Vin V 38,19 (-anto ); 76,15 (-anti); Ja VI
426,15" ( -antassapi); Kkh2 330,25 (-eyya ti . . . -entiya
eka apatti); - aor. 3 sg. nikka<;l<;lhi, Vin IV 66,2s; Ja I
116,25 (nikkhama ito vihara ti -i); Dhp-a I 186,15 (asiiTt
-i); 3 pl. nikka<;l<;lhiiTtsu, Vin V l6,1; Ja l 234,28; Pj II
421,16 (t~ gabbhiniiTt disva paribbajaka -iiTtsu); -
absol. (a) nikka<;l<;lhitva, Ja II 440,II (mat~ jaraggav~
-itva); V 274,3· (tassa pitughatakassa jivh~ balisena
-itva); Sv 210,13 (mahapalalapuñjato hi palal~ -itva);
(b) nikka<;l<;lhitvana, Mhv 5:74; pass. part.pr.
nikka<;l<;lhiyamana, mfn., Vin IV 44,19 (te -iyamana
rodanti); Vism 500,29 (tajacchiggajena viya
-iyamanassa); Dhp-a IV 178,II; - pp (a) nikkattha
(and nikatJ:ha ?), mfn. [S. ni~kr~!a], drawn away; with-
drawn;- --kaya, mfn., physically withdrawn or apart;
A II 137,17 foll. (--kayo ... puggalo araññe vanapatthani
pantani senasanani patisevati, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
nika!(ha-; Mp III 132,22: --kayo ti niggatakayo ...
kayen' eva gamato nikkhanto, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
nikagha- ); - neg. anikka!J:hakaya, mfn., A II 137,17 foll.;
- --citta, mfn. [nikkatJ:ha + citta 1], mentally withdrawn
or apart; A II 137,17foll. (--citto ... puggalo ...
nekkhammavitakk~ pi vitakketi ... , Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
nikagha- ); - neg. anikkatthacitta, mfn., A II 13 7,17 foll.
(Mp III 132,23foll.: cittena araññe vasanto pi gamam eva
pavigho); - (b) nikkac;Ic;Ihita, mfn., dragged out;
ejected; Vin V 76,16; Ja III 99,1o· (-~. Ce, Se so; Be
nikka<;l<;lhapitaiTt; E e nikkhamitaiTt); Kv-a 3,19* (-a
papabhikkhü therehi Vajjiputtaka) quoting Dip 5:30 (Ee
prob. wr nikka<;l<;lhitva);- fpp (a) nikka<;l<;lhitabba, mfn.,
Vin II 166,34 (na bhikkhave ... bhikkhu sailghika vihara
nikka<;l<;lhitabbo); Sp 1014,19; (b) nikka<;l<;lhiya, mfn., -
ifc see dunnikka<;l<;lhiya; caus. pr. 3 sg.
nikkac;Ic;Ihapeti, Vin IV 45,25 (nikka<;l<;lhati va -eti va);
Sp219,3 (-essati nan ti); Dhp-ai 400,16 (naiTI imasma
nikka(.l(.lhana
geha -eh! ti);- aor. 3 sg. nikka<;I<;Ihapesi, Vin IV 274,t5
(nikka<;l<;lhatha ima mury<;!a bandhakiniyo ti gharato -esi);
Ja III 99,23; Dhp-a I 404,2t; - absol. nikka<;I<;Ihapetva,
Ja I 126,6; Spk III 285,2o; - pp nikka<;l<;lhapita, mfn.,
It-a I 86,t5 (viharato -ita, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr viharato
nikka<;l<;lhapíta).
nikkacJcJhana, n., -a,f [cfS., BHS ni~kar~arya], dragging
out; throwing out, ejecting; Vin V 87,tt* (in uddana:
-arp); Ja V 234,3- (pura niddhamana hoU ti yava givaya
gahetva -a na hoti); Sp 1318,3o (smi.ghika vihara -e
pacittiyarp.); - neg. anikka<;l<;lhana, n., Ja III 22,15
(imissa anikka<;l<;lhanarp karissaml ti).
nikkacJcJhiipana, n. [from caus. of nikka<;I<;Ihati], causing
2 nikkaya, m. [S. ni~kraya], compensation; redemption
to be ejected, having (someone) thrown out; Kkh 162,6;
162,t4 (kopena nikka<;I<;Ihanarp va -arp va),
nikka1,1taka, mfn., see sv kary~aka .
1
2
nikkathaqtkatha, nikkatharp.kathi(n), mfn. [from ni +
katharpkatha], free from doubt; Vibh 256,11
(akatharp.kathl hoti -o vigatakatharp.katho, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be nikkatharp.kathl; Vibh-a 37l,t: -o vigatakatharp.katho
ti .. , vacanattho pan' ettha katharpkathato nikkhanto ti
-o, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee nikkatharp.kathi vigatakatharpkatho
ti .' .. ).
nikkaddama, mfn., see sv kaddama.
nikkama, m. [from nikkamati; cfnikkhama and
S. ni~krama], exertion; endurance; Vv 18:6 (tassa me -o
asi sasane tassa tadino); Ja III 20,9- (saccanikkamo ti
sacce sabhavabhüte yathavutte stladhamme -ena
samannagato); 481,25* (-arp durthe yuñjetha, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nikkamme; 482,5-: durthapuggale parakkamo va
yujjeyya, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se parakkame va yuñjeyya);
Nidd 1 378,s (yo cetasiko viriyarambho -i parakkamo
uyyamo ... ; Nidd-a 1 408,3o: kosajjato nikkhamana-
vasena -o) f. Dhs 13; Mil 244,2t (n' etadiso aññatra
arambho ahosi -o kilesayuddharp ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nikkhamo); Mp 1 49,2 (arthakathayarp pana ... -o cetaso
palighuggha~anaya, Be, Ce so; Ee palighuggha~anataya;
Se pa~ighataya); V v-a 95,4 (-o ti laddhanamo
sammavayamo); Sadd 412,1 (parakkamo vikkamo -o);
-
0
-dhiitu,f, exertion; endurance; S V 104,17 (ko ca
bhikkhave aharo anuppannassa va viriyabojjhailgassa
uppadaya . . . atthi bhikkhave arambhadhatu -u
parakkamadhatu; Spk III 14l,t9: arambhadhatü ti
pa~hamaviriyarp., -ü ti kosajjato nikkhantatta tato
balavatararp); A I 4,25; - sunikkama, mfn., exerting
oneself well; Th 212 (-o sadhu subuddhasasane, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee sunikkhamo; Th-a II 78,6: sundaranikkamo
hutva, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -nikkhamo).
1 2
nikkamati, pr. 3 sg. [ni or ni + kamati; cfnikkhamati
and S, nikramati, ni~kramati], exerts oneself; SI 156,34*
(arabhatha -atha yuñjatha buddhasasane, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nikkhamatha; Spk I 222,5: -atha ti nikkamaviriyarp
karotha, Be, Se so; Ce nikkhamatha ti; Ee nikkhamatha ti
nikkhammaviriyarp) = Th 256 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
nikkhamatha; Th-a II 105,2o: -atha ti kosajjapakkhato
nikkhantatta nikkamadhatusañkhatarp. taduttarirp. viriyarp
karotha, Be, Se so; Ce, E e nikkhamatha ti ...
nikkhamadhatusañkhatarp. ... ) quoted Kv 203,20* (eds
-atha); Sv 261,17 (-a ti, Ee so; prob. better nikkhama ti
with Be, Ce, Se); Sadd 411,28 (kamu padavikkhepe: ...
537 nikketi
-ati).
nikkamana, n. [from nikkamati], exertion; endurance;
Ja III 7,22* (damo samadhi manaso adejjho avyaggata
-arp ca kale, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nikkhamanarp.); Vv-a 95,4
(sañkilesapakkhato -ena nikkamo ti laddhanamo
sammavayamo asi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikkhamanena
nikkamo ); - see also nikkhamana.
nikkampa, mfn., see sv kampa,
nikkamma, mfn., see sv kamma.
2 2
nikkammaka, mfi-ika)n. [ni + kamma + ka ], inactive;
Ja VI 439,6 (na kho pana ettakarp kalarp -o acchissati);
Dhp-a I 214,6 (itthiyo nikkammika vicaranti, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se nikkamma).
price, ransom; Ja V 24,13* (na e' atthi mokkho mama
-ena, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se vikkayena; 24,17': na ce mayharp
-ena vinimayena mokkho atthi, Ee so; Be -ena
vimokkho atthi; Ce, Se sace mayharp. vikkayena pi na
mokkho atthi); VI 577,13 (raja kumaranarp. -arp.
dapento ); 577,t6* (puttanarp. dehi -arp.); 577 ,20*
(puttanarp dasi -arp.; 577,21-: -an ti agghassa mülarp, Be,
Se so; Ce, E e omit).
nikkarisa, n., see sv karisa.
nikkaru1,1a, mfn., se e sv karurya.
nikkasata, mfn., see sv kasa~a.
nikkasiiva, mfn., see sv kasava.
2
nikkiica, mfn., see sv kaca .
nikkiima, mfn., see sv kama.
nikkiimi(n), mfn., see sv kami(n).
1
nikkiira1,1a, mfn., nikkararya, adv., see sv kararya ,
nikkiiru1,1ika, mfn. [BHS ni~karuryika; cfnikkarurya and
karuryika], pitiless; Ja II 199,15 (Devadatto kakkhaJo
pharuso -o); III 538,14 (eko -o dutthatapaso, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee niggatiko); Sp 864,31 (0 -taya),
nikki1,1iiti, nikklryati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~kriryati], redeems,
ransoms; Ja VI 576,29* (-issami dabbena, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se nikklryissami; 577,5-: dhanarp. datva mocessami);
Mil 284,9 (ayyako te ... tarp. nikkhasahassarp. datva -atu,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikkiryatu); part.pr.
nikkiryanta, mfn., Mil 284,9 (-anto, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
nikklryanto); - absol. nikkiryitva, Ja VI 577,29* (Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nikk:Iryitva); - pp nikkita, mfn,, redeemed,
ransomed; Ja VI 585,tO* (ubho kumara -a, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee nikkita; 585,12': nikkayarp. datva gahita) quoted
Sadd 286,23.
nikkil,ll,l3, mfn. see sv nikiryrya.
nikkiliisu, mfn., see sv kilasu.
nikkilesa, mfn., se e sv kilesa.
nikki1,1iiti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nikkiryati.
nikkita, mfn., pp ofnikkiryati qv.
nikkukkucca, mfn., see sv kukkucca,
nikku.üa, mfn., see sv nikujja.
1
nikku.üati\ pr. 3 sg,, see sv nikujjati ,
2 2
nikku.üati , pr. 3 sg,, see sv nikujjati ,
nikku.üanii,f, see sv nikujjana.
1
nikku.üeti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nikujjati .
nikknJ,lcJaka, mfn., see sv kury<;Iaka.
nikkuha, mfn., see sv kuha.
nikketi, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup ni~kayate,
Wg § 33:13], measures, weighs; Sadd 522,4 (nikka
nikkesika
parim~e: -eti -ayati).
nikkesika, (m)f(n). [from ni 2 + kesa], without hair; Mp I
207,6 (issaraseghiku1assa dh!ta -a).
nikkodha, mfn., see sv kodha.
nikkodhana, mfn., see sv kodhana.
nikkopa, mfn., see sv kopa.
nikkosa.üa, mfn., see sv kosajja.
nikkha\ n. [cf S. nik~a, mfn.; or = nikkha2], a kiss; ?
Sadd 329,26 (nikkha cumbane: nikkhati -arp).
nikkha 2 , m.n. [S. ni~ka], a golden omament; a golden
coin; a weight of gold (usually = five SUVaiJI).as);
Abh 480 (sUVaiJIJO pañcadharaiJarp -arp tv anitthi pañca
te); 888 (heme pañcasuval).l).e ca -o 'nitthi pasadhane);
Vv 20:8 (satarp -a; Vv-a 104,3: suval).l).assa pañcadasa-
dharaiJarp -an ti vadanti satadharaiJan ti apare); Ja II
443,16* (-arp e' uss!sake katarp, Ce, E e, Se so; Be -arp
e' uss!sakohitarp; 444,6·: -arp ca ti pañcahi sUVaiJIJehi
katarp angu1eyyakarp, Ce, Ee so; Be mi.gulimuddikarp;
Se angu1iyakarp); IV 224,24 (satta -e Jabhitva); 227,7*
(a1attharp satta -ani sUVaiJI).assa ... te me nagha); 227 ,22*
(tassadasi ... jatarüpamaye -e suVaiJIJassa catuddasa);
V 58,25* (-arp imarp suval).l).assa hararp, Be, E e, Se so;
Ce -arp rattasuvaiJI).assa; 58,27' foll.: -an ti pañcadasa-
SUVaiJI).a eko -o ayarp pana rattasUVaiJIJassa nikkha-
sahassarp datva evam aha, Ee so; Be pañcasuvai).IJO eko
-o; Ce, Se pañcatu1a sUVaiJIJa eko -o); VI 574,14* (kass'
etarp mukhmn abhati . . . -arp ca jatarüpassa); Ps IV
147,19 (nekkhan ti -ena katarp pi1andhanarp -arp nama
pañcasUVaJ.!IJarp ünakanikkhena katarp pasadhanarp hi
ghaganmnajjanakkhmnarp na hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nikkhan ti);- see also nekkha.
nikkha 3 , n. [from *ni2 + khaiJati? cfS. ni~khanati], a
water channel; Ja IV 358,29* (imani ta:ni khettani imarp
-arp sukul).¡;la1arp; 359,s·: imarp -an ti imarp tadisam eva
udakaniddhmnanmn).
nikkhal}.ati, pr. 3 sg.·, se e sv nikhaiJati 2•
nikkhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nik~ati, Wg § 17:7], kisses;
Sadd 329,26 (nikkha cumbane: -ati nikkharp).
nikkhanati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nikhaiJati 2.
nikkhanti, f [from nikkhamati; cf S. kranti], getting out
(from); emerging; Vin I 88,7 (kena nu kho aharp upayena
imassa papassa kmnmassa -irp kareyyan ti;
Sp 1022,3o foil.: nikkhamanarp niggamanarp
apavahanarp kareyyan ti attho); Sp 162,21 (tamha aiJ<;ia-
kosmnha abhinibbhida -i); Ud-a 212,25 (sabbabhavato
niggmnanarp -irp sarpsarasuddhirp vadirpsu).
nikkhama, m. [S. ni~krama], going out from; getting out;
escape; (exertion; ?) Ja II 208,17* (ka:Je nikkhamana
sadhu naka1e sadhu -o; 208,24·: -o ti akale ...
nikkhamanarp va parakkmnanarp va na sadhu, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee niggmnanarp va);- -malarp in Ee at Pv-a 80,7
0
is wr for nikkhantama1arp (Be, Ce, Se so); -
dunnikkhama, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) hard to get out;
Th 72 (kajlro susu va<;l¡;lhitaggo -o hoti, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se dunnikhaso; Th-a I 172,4: -o ti veJugumbato
nikkhameturp nlhariturp asakkul).eyyo, eds so);- 2. (n.)
a difficult escape; (it is) hard to escape; Cp-a 198,6
(rajjarp hi nama sabbesarp anatthanarp sannipatatthanarp
tattha thitaka1ato paghaya -arp hoti; t Ja IV 493,12:
dunnikkhamanarp); - sunikkhama, mfn., having an
538 nikkhamati
easy going-forth; Th 212 (-o sadhu subuddhasasane, Ce,
Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se sunikkamo; Th-a II 78,6:
sundaranikkhamo hutva, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se -nikkamo).
-nikkhama in Ee at Th 1246 (tibbanikkhmno) is wr for
-nikkmna (Be, Ce, SI 194,18* so).
nikkhamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~kramati], goes or comes out
(esp. out of a town or village ); comes forth (to fight etc);
emerges; gets out; escapes; leaves; esp. leaves the
household lije; sticks out, protrudes; Vin II 221,2 (yo
paccha jantaghara -ati sace jantaghararp cikkhallarp hoti
dhovitabbarp); IV 223,23 (-ath' ayye, amhakarp uddosito
ti); D 11 14,16 (yada bodhisatto matu kucchisma -ati);
MI 332,14 (-a papima -a papima); A II 33,2 (slho ...
sayaiJhasmnayarp asaya -ati asaya -itva vijmnbhati);
Th 223 (nasissarp na pivissami viharato na -e); Ja I
116,25 (-a ito vihara ti nikka¡;l¡;lhi); 162,16 (Rahu1o tava
vasanaghanarp janah! ti vutto nama aharp dasaba1assa
putto tumhakarp senasanmnha tumhe yeva -atha ti
ekabhikkhurp pi appatippharitva, Be so; Ce, Ee tumhe ke
senasanassa tumhe yeva -atha ti; Se tumhe ke tumhe
yeva -atha ti); 11147,15' (tassa hi nabhito Ul).l).aSadisarp
suttarp -ati); Ap 67,14 (-assu vana tuvarp; Ap-a 343,22:
-assu apagaccha ti); Mil 30,29 (yo so bhante abbhantare
vayo jlvo pavisati ca -ati ca so Nagaseno ti maññaml ti);
58,1o (puriso -itukamo bhaveyya katamena -eyya ti);
Sv 683,33 (bhagavato pi sañra chabbal).l).arasmiyo -anti);
PsI 268,31 (atibharita udakabhajana udakarp akamataya
-ati); Dhp-a III 195,17 (atha kimatthaya -as! ti
sabbaññutañ~atthaya ti); As 267,2o (ekasma ambablja
eko va mi.kuro -ati); Sadd 412,2 (-ati abhinikkhamati);
- part.pr. (a) nikkhama(t), mfn., Vism 501,26* (matu-
gabbhe satto vasarp ciram ato bahi -arp ca) = Nidd-a I
77,4* (Ce, Ee so; Be Se nikkhmnanarp ca, unmetrical);
Ud-a 170,31; (b) nikkhmnanta, mfi-antl)n., Vin II 155,37
(Anathapil).<;likassa gahapatissa nagaramha -antassa
a:Joko antaradhayi andhakaro paturahosi); D II 333,8 (app
eva nam' assa jlvarp -arp passeyyama ti); MI 279,14
(manusse geharp pavisante pi -ante pi); Ja 111 479,26
(ekarp eJikarp paccha -antirp disva); VI 514,19 (nagararp
pavisantiyo ca -antiyo ca itthiyo); Vism 279,2 (-anta ca
pavisanta ca assasapassasa pakata honti); Mp IV 90,2o
(kukkutacchapako aiJ<;iakosarp pada:Jetva tato -anto
sakim eva jayati);- -anto in Ee, Se at Vism 186,15 is
prob. wr for nikkhanto (Be, Ce so); - neg.
anikkhmnanta, mfi -I)n., Vism 235,32 (pavighe va
anikkhmnante); Sv 261 ,19; (e) nikkhmnmnana, mfn., Ja 11
380,21 (tassa . . . vinicchayato -amanaya); Sv 451,32
(suval).l).aghatato -amana khlradhara viya); - aor.
3 sg. nikkhami, Vin 11 215,16; SI 213,27; Ja II 104,9
(raja ... corarp gal).hissaml ti -i); 253,24 (tato saddo na
-i); Bv 2:209 (nimitte caturo disva hatthiyanena -i);
Vism 400,n; Mhv 33:63; 2 sg. nikkhami, Ja I 63,18
(maro . . . aha marisa ma -i ito te sattmne divase
cakkaratanarp patubhavissati); 1 sg. (a) nikkhmnirp,
Th 1123; JaVI 559,11* (ohaya putte -irp); Ap417,28
(agara -anto pi rathena -irp aharp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-am' aharp); (b) nikkhmnisarp, Ja IV 330,27* (tato aharp
-isarp bhadante, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -issarp; 331,17'/oll.:
-isan ti -im, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -issan ti);
3 pl. (a) nikkhamirpsu, Ja IV 353,26* (tato naga -1rpsu
nikkhamati
sannaddha); VI 554,24 (assüni lohitabindüni hutva
nettehi -üp.su); Ap 369,24 (-üp.su vana tada, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -urr pavana); Mill08,3 (cha ...
khattiyakumara ... bhagavantarr anupabbajanta -irrsu);
Dhp-a III 299,2 (kakkarakassa viya akkh!ni -irrsu ti);
(b) nikkhamurr, Ap 420,2; 2 pl. nikkhamittha,
Sp 1040,3o;- cond. 3 sg. nikkhamissa, Ja V 50, Ir (sace
idarr puratthimadisadlhi agatarr abhavissa ...
pacchimakayadlhi -issa, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se -issati); -
inf (a) nikkhamiturr, Pv 10:2; Ja V 315,17; Vism 504,23;
(b) nikkhanturr, Ja II 375,2 (nikkhantukamo, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee niggantu-); Ud-a 366,3o (nikkhanturr asakkonte
bahü macche passi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nigganturr); -
absol. (a) nikkhamma, DI 152,8 (bhagava vihara
nikkhamma viharapacchayaya paññatte asane nisldi); S I
193,1* (divavihara nikkhamma); Sn 337 (saddhaya ghara
nikkhamma dukkhass' antakaro bhava); Ja I 139,8·
(sabbabodhisatta hi jii_u:1avyadhimatapabbajite disva va
sarrvegarr apajjitva nikkhamma pabbajanti); Sv 489,9
(so nikkhamma core vüpasametva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
omit); Spk II 89,31 (so puttassa jatadivase va
mahabhinikkhamanarr nikkhamma pabbajitva);
Mhv 36:119 (dughamacce niggaheturr sayarr
nikkhamma bhüpati); Sadd 857,15 (nikkhamma -itva);
- adv., outside; Vv 19:5 (kevagadvara nikkhamma ahu
mayharr nivesanarr; V v-a 99,19 foll.: kevagadvarato
nikkhamanaghane); Ap 245,17 (aramadvara nikkhamma
goslsarr santhatarr maya; Ap-a 4 74,28 foll.: arama-
dvarato sailghassa nikkhamanadvaramagge ti attho );
(b) nikkhamitva, Vin IV 120,5foll. (antaramagge cara
-itva te acchindirrsu, Savatthiya rajabhara -itva te core
sabh~ge gahetva ... ); Ud 29,26 (ghara -itva); Ja III
159,14 (raja mahatiya senaya -itva); París I 176, I4 (-itva
bahi indakh!la sabbarr etarr araññarr); Ap61,19 (-itva
agaramha pabbajissati); Bv 23:11 (ah u Kapilavhaye
ramme -itva tathagato); Vism 174,33 (tena chiddena
d!paloko -itva bhittiyarr m~galarr karoti); - -itva in
E e at Sv 182,12 is wr for nikkhipitva (Be, Ce, Se so); -
neg. anikkhamitva, Ja III 416,2s; Vism 75,13; Spk I 48,II
(Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anikkhametva, prob. wr);
(e) nikkhamitvana, Th! 146 (gehato -itvana); Ja VI
445,19* (ummagga -itvana); Ap 52,7; (d) nikkhamituna,
Th 73 (tato aharr -ituna pabbajirr pahaya kamani); -
pp nikkhanta, mfn. and n. [S. ni~kranta], l. (mfn.)
(i) (act.) (who has) gone out, left; gone; sticking out,
protruding; outside, apart from; Vin I 87,15 (sabbo
viharo ahina pUI).l).O vatapanehi bhoga -a honti); D II
48,2! (ekamhi vasse -e); S 1 185,22* (-arr vata marr
santarr agarasmanagariyarr vitakka upadhavanti); A III
312,13 ([cittarrl -arr muttarr vughitarr gedhamha);
IV 204,27 (abhikkanta bhante ratti -o parhamo yamo);
Sn 991 (pura Kapilavatthumha -o lokanayako); Ja I
139,25 (na bhikkhave tathagato idan' eva
mahabhinikkhamanarr -o pubbe pi -o yeva ti); 149,18
(so matu kucchito -o SUV~l).aVal).l).O ahosi); IV 485,!2
(sapajapatiko pabbajjatthaya -o ti); V 255,5* (ye ca kame
pahatvana -a akutobhaya); VI 409,5 (Mahosadhap~gito
dvararr vivaritva -o bhavissati); Nidd I 55,24 (anupalitto
-o nissagho vippamutto; Nidd-a 1 172,2o: bahi -o
bandhanagarato palato viya); Ap 376,26 (vana pil).gaya
539 nikkhamati
-arr); Cp 3:9:10 (mata pita ca -a); Sp 1027,7 (yo urassa
va pirrbiya va passassa va --tta khujjasar!ro); Sv 780,15
(kosajjato --taya); Ps 1 102,3 (1il).abheriya -aya, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nikkhamantaya); Mil121,I5; Vism 293,33
(t~haya -o nissaro visarryutto); Dhp-a IV 222,3
(gahapatiko yuddhasajjo hutva balarr adaya -o ti);
Vibh-a 371,3 (katharrkathato -o ti nikkatharrkatho ); -
1
--danta, m. and mfn. [nikkhanta + danta ], l. (m.) a
protruding tooth; Ja VI 549,18' (k~aro ti sükaradarhehi
viya --dantasamannagato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits);-
2. (mfn.) with protruding teeth; Ja V 91,24' (darul).O
--danta); Sp 1029,24; --dantaka, mfn., with
protruding teeth; Vin-vn 2503; - --darha, mfn., with
protruding (canine) teeth; Ja IV 245,17;- --pada, mfn.,
with wandering feet;? going out;? Ja V 435,Io* (--pacta
visikhanucarinl; 437 ,w: jarassa upadhar~atthaya
--pada);- --bhikkha,f, almsfor (homeless) ascetics;?
Ja IV 364,1 * (--bhikkharr bhuñjanti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
nikkhitta-; 366,I9'foll.: gamapurohita hutva attano
atthaya nibaddhabhikkharr, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimantabhikkharr); - (ii) (pass.) left; gane from;
Bv 2:113 (yatha --sayanassa siliassa nadanarr dhuvarr;
cfBv-a 103,27: sayanato -assa); - 2. (n.) going out,
leaving, departure; Vin I 87,14 (so nago tassa bhikkhuno
-e vissagho niddarp okkami; Sp 1022,8: tasmirr
bhikkhusmirr -e, atha va tassa bhikkhuno nikkhamane ti
attho); Ja VI 514,9* (--divasen' eva Cetararrbarr
upagamurr); - --mülaka, mfn., rooted in emerging;
Nidd-a I 77,1 (idarr matukucchito bahi --mülakarp
dukkharr, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikkhamana-; = Vibh-a 97,8:
eds nikkhamana-); - anikkhanta, mfn., not gone out
(from), not left; Vin IV 95,II; 160,22; Ja II 198,!6" (yassa
puggalassa . . . [kasavo] anissagho anikkhanto ); III 94,28;
Vism 380,5; Mp I 73,12 (raja nikkhanto ti vutte sesa
rajasena nikkhanta anikkhanta ti pucchitabbakar~arr
natthi); - anikkhantarajake, when or where the king has
not left; Vin IV 160,15 (160,22: anikkhantarajake ti raja
sayanighara anikkhanto hoti; Sp 880,29 foll.: anikkhanto
raja ito ti anikkhantarajakarp, tasmirr anikkhantarajake
sayanlghare ti attho); - fpp nikkhamitabba, n. impers.,
one must go out; one must leave; V in I 47,22 (purato ca
pacchato ca paricchadetva jantaghara -itabbarr);
II 208,27 (karr kalarr -itabban ti); Ja II 209,7·; Mil 285,18
(nanu nama ñ1il).arp paripacetva paripakke ñ1il).e -itabban
ti); Vism 75,13 (deve vassamane anikkhamitva
vassüparame -itabbarp); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nikkhameti
(and nikkhameti), Vin III 51,16 (mariyadarp chinditva ...
udakarr -eti); S I 176,8 (te marr ... ghara -en ti ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nikkhamentl ti); Ja I 425,26 (yatha na koci
passati tatha nagara -eturr sakkosi, Be, Ce so; Ee
nikkhameturp; Se nikkhamapeturp); Sp 297,21 (pabbajeti
va ti raghato -eti); Spk I 325,31 (nikkhameturr sukharr
sam~arr) = Pj II 227,3 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce -eturr);
Sadd 412,3 (karite -eti); - part.pr. nikkhamenta, mfn.,
Vin I !88,1; Vism 346,12* (annarp ... bhuñjati
abhinandanto -ento jigucchati); aor. 3 sg.
nikkhamesi, Jaii 366,11"; V 131,7 (-esi, Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se nikkhamapesi); - 3 pl. nikkhamesurr, Ja 1 264,12
(Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nikkhamirrsu); Pj II 533,12; -
absol. nikkhametva, Vin II 237,1o (tarr puggalarr
nikkhamana
bahaylll!l gahetva bahi dvarakoghaka -etva); S II 128,7
(imlll!l purisa~ ... dakkhil:~ena dvarena -etva dakkhil).ato
nagarassa sislll!l chindatha ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nikkhametva); Ja II 112,12 (ubho pi jane samudda -etva,
Be, Ce so; Ee nikkhametva; Se nikkhamitva); Sp 636,22
(upanhakaku1ehi darake -etva pabbajetva);
pp nikkhamita, mfn., Vin II 237,12 (-ito so bhante
puggalo maya parisuddha parisa); Ja lii 99,10'
(nicchuddha~ -ita~, Ee so; Ce, Se nikka99hitlll!l; Be
nivughapita~ nikka99hapita~); Sp 1275,1.
nikkhamana (and nikkhamal).a), n. (and m. or mfn.),
-a,f, [BHS ni~kram3l).a], getting out; escaping; coming
out; going out, departing; Ja I 108,3 (idani ekaratten' eva
marukantara -a~ bhavissati ti); II 208,17* (kale -a
sadhu; 208,22': -a nama niggamana~ va parakkamana~
va, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -a~ va); IV 136,25 (tathagatassa
dhamma~ desetu~ -a~ agamayamana bhikkhü);
330,24* (na me ahil -aya maggo, Be, Ce so; Ee wr ahu~;
Se na me abhinikkhamanassa); Mil412,13 (aya~ kalo
pa~isallanassa aylll!l kalo -aya ti); Vism 343,32
(gamappavesanato pa~~haya yava -a); Sv 130,2o (matu
kucchito -ena); Cp-a 133.22 (-aya gehato nikkhami,
pabbaji ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nekkhammatthaya);
Nidd-a I 322,29 ([kodho] na ca tava pharusavaca~
nicchiir3l).O hoti ti paresa~ mammacchedaka-
pharusavaclll!l mukhato niharal).ena bahi -o na ca tava
hoti);- 0 -jutika, mfn., with light emerging; Pv-a 122,12
(Ailgirasassa ti ailgato -assa, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce
nikkhamanajutissa; Be, Se nikkhamanakajutissa); -
0
-mülaka, mfn., rooted in emerging; Nidd-a I 77,1 (idlll!l
matukucchito bahi -lll!l dukkha~. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nikkhanta-) = Pa~is-a 144,18 = Vibh-a 97,8;- 0 -vata, m.,
the emerging breath, the breath coming out; Vism 272,1
(assaso ti bahi -o); Mp III 352,5;- anikkhamana, n.,
not going out, not escaping; Ps II 347,3 (udakassa
-'-attha~);- dunnikkhamana, n .. a dijficult escape;
(it is) hard to escape; Ja IV 493,12 (ki~ me rajjena, rajje
~hitakalato paghaya -a~ hoti; f. Cp-a 198,6:
dunnikkhamam); - see also nikkamana.
nikkhamanaka: mfn. [nikkhamana + ka2], going out;
emerging; 0
-juti, mfn., with light emerging;
Pv-a 122,12 (Ailgirasassa ti ailgato -issa, Be, Se so; Ce
nikkhamanajutissa; Ee nikkhamanajutikassa);
anikkhamanaka, mfn., not going out; Dhp-a I 190,26
(tasmi~ pana nakkhatte bahi -a kuladhitaro pi ... nadi~
gantva nahayanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -ku1adhitaro).
*nikkhaya, m. [ni 2 + khaya 2; cf S. nii,J.vk~i], destruction;
- ifc see dunnikkhaya.
*nikkhasa, m. [cf S. ni~kar~a], drawing out, extracting;-
ifc see dunnikkhasa.
nikkhika, m. [cf S. lex. nai~kika], a royal treasurer or
master of the mint; Abh 343 (heraññiko tu -o).
nikkhitva in Ee at Ap-a 152,2 is wr for nikkhipitva (Be, Se
so; Ce omits passage).
nikkhipati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nik~ipati], l. throws or puts or
lays down; puts into; places, sets down; sets out; lays
(eggs); Vin II 211,2 (atra patta~ -ahi atra clvarlll!l-ahi);
216,7 (kamma~ va -ati asana va vughati); III 50,7
(samiko na mayha~ bhavissati ti dhurlll!l -ati); D II
157,3* (sabbe va -issanti bhilta 1oke samussaya~);
540 nikkhipati
III 146,9 (sama~ pada~ bhilmiya~ -ati); MI 423,21
(pathaviya suci~ pi -anti asuci~ pi -anti); S II 152,4
(puriso aditta~ til).ukka~ sukkhe til).adaye -eyya);
III 131,16 (tam ena~ samika gandhaparibhavite
karal).9ake -anti); IV 60,2 (yo . . . tlll!l ca kaylll!l -a ti
añña~ ca kaya~ upadiyati); A I 206,1o (ye puratthimaya
disaya piil).a . . . tesu d31).9lll!l -ahi): Th 1002 (-isslll!l
ima~ kaylll!l sampajano patissato ); Thi 370 (-a
kasayacivarlll!l ehi ramamase pupphite vane;
Thi-a 235,11: -a ti cha99ehi); Ja II 223,3 (gal).ha ti vutte
-i -a ti vutte gal).hi); Mi145,13foll. (hatthe tatta~
ayogu]a~ -eyya dutiye hatthe sitlll!l himapil).9a~
-eyya); 399,8 (hatthi sato padlll!l uddharati sato padlll!l
-ati); - 2. lays aside; sets aside; puts away, stores;
deposits; entrusts; Vin II 34,6 (anujanami bhikkhave
panvaslll!l -itu~); lii 203,15 (te aka1ac!varani
pa~iggahetva atirekamasa~ -anti); 257,19 (c!varam
vayapetva -a, agato ayya~ Upanandlll!l civarena
acchadessam! ti); 263,22 (akailkhamano til).l).a~
clvarana~ aññatara~ clvara~ antaraghare -eyya);
IV 99,6 ([khadaniylll!l] -atha yava Upanando agacchati
ti); 249,31 (amukassa ayye apal).ikassa ghare kahapal).a~
-issami tato Ylll!l iccheyyasi ta~ aharapeyyasi ti); A I
87,11 (yo ca 1addhlll!l laddha~ -ati yo ca laddha~
1addha~ vissajjeti); Ja V 254,2' (atirekatarani civarad!ni
antonagare upaghakakule -ati); Kv 563,17 (kar31).9aya
-anti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -enti, perhaps wr); -
part.pr.(a) nikkhipa(t), mfn., Sp 864,15 (-ato); Ps III
23,2o* (natidilre uddharati naccasanne ca -a~) = Spk III
49,9* = Ud-a 414,17* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee pakkhipa~);
(b) nikkhipanta, mfn., Vin I 46,37; Snp. 107,5 (appasadda
bhonto agacchantu pade padlll!l -anta) f. Ap 19,21;
(e) nikkhipamana, mfn., Ps III 401,8 (accasanne hi
atidüre va pacte -amane saddo unhati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nikkhippamane); - aor. 3 sg. nikkhipi, Vin III 57,13
(bhiirlll!l ... bhilmiylll!l -i); Vv 79:9; Ja II 104,15 (sisa~
aharitva padamille -i); 111,21 (nahapitassa bhariya ...
nahapitlll!l tassa upasakassa hatthe -i); III 174,16
(sakul).ika .. . al).9ani -i); Spk 11 103,2o (imaylll!l
atthuppattiya~ ima~ puttama~silpama-suttantlll!l -i);
3 pl. nikkhipi~su, D 11 161,7 (Maku~a-bandhanlll!l nama
Mallana~ cetiya~, ettha bhagavato sañra~ -i~su);
Ja TI 416,20'; - absol. (a) nikkhippa, Th 724 (nikkhippa
satthani ca avudhani ca); Ja IV 103,16* (idh' eva
nikkhippa sañradehlll!l); V 264,23 (nikkhippa pañca
kakudhani); VI 509,25* (ime te dahara putta ... nikkhippa
lakkhal).e gaccha maylll!l te posayamase, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se nikkhipa; 509,26': ime nikkhipitva thapetva gacchah!
ti); Ap 350,9 (dhanu~ tatth' eva nikkhippa pabbaji~
anagariya~); Mhv 14:10 (dhanu~ sara~ ca nikkhippa);
- nikkhippa-gami(n), mfn. [nikkhippa + gami(n) 1], laid
down when one goes; SI 93,6 (sabba~
nadayagantabblll!l sabba~ nikkhippagaminlll!l; Spk I
162,13: sabba~ eta~ nikkhepasabhavlll!l
pariccajitabbasabhavam eva ti); (b) nikkhipiya,
Vv-a 354,10; (e) nikkhipitva, Vin III 198,4 (bhikkhil
bhikkhilna~ hatthe clvara~ -itva santaruttarena
janapadacarika~ pakkamanti); D II 337,13 (sailkhlll!l
bhilmiya~ -itva); M I 206,26 (yannilnahlll!l saka~ cittlll!l
-itva imesa~ yeva ayasmantana~ cittassa vasena
nikkhipana
vatteyyan ti); S III 26,14* (-itva garu111 bhliraJ11); Ja I
336,18 (ima111 matikaJ11 -itva kathesi); III 102,19
(ai_!gakaJ11 -itva); 342,11 (kahapaQ.asahassaJ11 labhitva
ekasmi111 brahmai_!akule -itva); Ap 43,7 (vinaye
khandhake capi -itva padaJ11 ahaJ11); Mil48,16 (hatthe
-itva); Vism 711,5 (imaJ11 gatha111 -itva); Sv 77,4 (na
añña111 -itva añña111 bhasati ti); Ps 11 253,15 (sutta111 va
jatakaJ11 va -itva); Mp 11 275,17 (evaJ11 sattha matikaJ11
-itva idani taJ11 vibhajitva dassetu111 tatra bhikkhave ti
adiJ11 aha); Pj 11 179,8 (iQ.aJ11 adaya ti attano santakaJ11
kiñci -itva nikkhepagahai_!ena); Pa!is-a 660,32
(avibhavan ti pada111 -itva); - neg. anikkhipitva,
Sp 338,27 (dhuraJ11 anikkhipitva); Sv 453,6
(ukkhittapadaJ11 anikkhipitva va) i- Bv-a 62,5 (Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee anatikkamitva, prob. wr); PsI 142,6; Pj 11 15,8
(matikaJ11 anikkhipitva); - sunikkhipitva, placing
properly; Vv 85:6 (dunikkhittaJ11 malaJ11 sunikkhipitva);
(d) nikkhipitvana, Th 623 (-itvana vyabhañgiJ11);
Thi 28; Ap 160,29; - pass. pr. 3 sg. nikkhipiyati,
nikkhippati, Ud-a 30,5 foll. (-iyati ti va nikkhepo ... atha
va -iyati sutta111 etena ti nikkhepo) = It-a I 35,22foll.;
Ud-a 328,26 (aya111 dukkhabharo na cirass' eva -iyati ti);
Th-a 11 224,22 (bijaJ11 vuppati -iyati);
part.pr. nikkhippamana, mfn., Ps III 401,8 (accasanne hi
atidure va pade nikkhippamane saddo ughati, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nikkhipamane); - pp (a) nikkhitta, mfn.
[S. nik~ipta], cast down; put down, laid down; set down,
set out, set forth; set aside, laid aside; deposited;
installed; Vin 11 34,lo (-o hoti parivaso); 11143,16
(devagahadaruni nagarapa!isañkharikani apadatthaya
-ani); 198,6 (tani civarani ciraJ11 -ani kai_!Q.akitani honti);
IV 252,2 (pavarikassa ghare civaratthaya parikkharo -o);
D 11 14,28 (mai_!iratanaJ11 kasike vatthe -aJ11); MI 71,26
(-o evaJ11 niraye ); S I 112,15 (sambahu1a patta ajjhokase
-a honti); A I 135,5 (bijani ... bhumiya -ani; Mp 11
210,18: -ani ti !hapitani ropitani); Pv 31:8; Ja I 266,9
(ussisake -a111 mañga1akhaggaJ11); 111268,1 (maya dutiye
pade -e pa!havi dharetuJ11 na sakkoti ti); Ap 44,15
(paññaya aggo -o ... Sariputto); 298,17 (nabhijanami -e
pade bhumya asanthate); Mi156,Jo Givhaya rase -e);
Vism 180,1 (susane va uddhumatakasariraJ11 -an ti);
540,16 (sattadha matika -a); Sp 350,14 (attano hatthe
--tta); Sv 848,32 GivitaJ11 hi me tava hatthe -an ti); PsI
87,33 (kataraya pana idaJ11 aqhuppattiya -an ti); Spk 11
3,17 (pa!iccasamuppadaJ11 vo ti adina nayena bhagavata
-assa suttassa); Pj I 22,23 (camhi gathahi atthavaQ.Q.anaya
nayamatika -a); Bv-a 109,3o (taya vuttiya taya --taya va,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikhantiya); - ifc see agga-
2
(sv agga 1), chama- (sv chama ); - anikkhitta, mfn., not
laid down, not set out; Vibh-a 207,33 (matikaya
anikkhittatta); - dunnikkhitta, mfn., badly or wrongly
placed, poorly set out; not laid aside or stored properly;
Vin IV 124,3 (dunnikkhitta111 pa!isameti); A I 59,1
(dunnikkhittaJ11 ca padavyañjanaJ11 attho ca dunnito);
Ja 11 193,26' (taJ11 [maJ11SaJ11] dunnikkhittaJ11 sunakha
khadi111su); Vism 75,16 (bahi dunnikkhittani
mañcapi!hadini anto pavesetuJ11); Sv 495,16
(dunnikkhitta111 musikacchinna111 pesakarana111 tanta111
tahiJ11 tahiJ11 akulaJ11 hoti); Spk I 228,3 (dunnikkhitte
darubhai_!ge pakkhali); Mp III 137,16 (dunnikkhittassa ti
541 nikkhepa
dughu nikkhittassa uppa!ipa!iya !hapitassa);
sunikkhitta, mfn., well placed or set out; laid or set aside
properly; AI 59,8 (sunikkhittassa bhikkhave
padavyañjanassa attho pi sunayo hoti); Ja V 110,15
([aQ.gani] sunikkhittani na nassanti ti); Sp 1169,28
(parivaso dvihi pi sunikkhitto yeva); Sv 191,2
(sunikkhitta sammajjaniyo); - pp (b) nikkhipita, mfn.,
laid or set down; thrown down; D 11 198,25
(chakkhattu111 ... abhijanami imasmi111 padese sariraJ11
-aJ11, Be, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Ce nikkhipita); Nidd-a I
220,15 (ejaya panna patita ti tai_!haya nimugga ca -a ca);
- fpp nikkhipitabba, mjn., Vin III 247,18 (so patto na
adese -o); 261,23 (accekacivaraJ11 ... yava civaraka1a-
samayaJ11 -a111); A IV 45,24 (ka!!haggi ... ka1ena kalaJ11
nibbapetabbo kalena ka1aJ11 -o ti; Mp IV 30,19: yatha na
vinassati evaJ11 !hapetabbo); Mi1399,Jo (yogina ... satena
sampaJanena padaJ11 -aJ11); caus. aor.
3 sg. nikkhipapesi, Ja 11 36,21 (pa!!aJ11 mañjüsaya
nikkhipapesi); VI 402,5 (sesadhaññaJ11 pakarapasse
nikkhipapesi); Sp 1101,7; Pv-a 215,18 (gosisaqhiJ11
aharapetva nikkhipapesi); - absol. nikkhipapetva, Ja III
179,8; Sp 855,12; - pp nikkhipapita, mfn., Pj 11 244,22
(amakasusane rañña nikkhipapitaJ11 sañraJ11 dassanaya);
1
- see also agganikkhittaka sv agga .
nikkhipana, n., -a,f ffrom nikkhipati; BHS nik~ipai_!a],
putting down; placing; setting down; Sp 460,18
(upanikkhipanaJ11 nama samipe -aJ11); Ps IIl 158,17
(ukkhipane ca -e ca); Ud-a 30,3 (-an ti nikkhepo) i- It-a
35,23 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikkhepanaJ11); Th-a I 3,5
(nipatanaJ11 -an ti nipato); Cp-a 263,17 (udakagha!assa
bhümiyaJ11 -aJ11); Pp-a 171,16 (supaññattaJ11 mañcapi!han
ti agata!!hane !hapana -a paññatti nama); Sadd 550,14
(ñapeti ... papubbo -e); - anikkhipana, mfn., not
laying down, not laying aside; As 408,7
(anikkhittacchandata ti kusa1acchandassa -aJ11).
1 2
nikkhiJ1a, nikhil).a, mfn. [pp of ni or ni + khiQ.oti; cf S.
nil.rvk~i], hurt; - 0
-patta, mfn., with drooping or
crippled wings; Ja VI 499,5* (ha111so -o va, Ce, Se so;
Be, Ee nikhiQ.a-; 499,11': paggharitapatto).
nikkhepa, m. [S. nik~epa], l. (i) the putting down, setting
down, laying down; a deposit, pledge; V in I 298,21
(paccaya sañgha!iya -aya); D 11 305,17 (marai_!aJ11
kalakiriya khandhanaJ11 bhedo kaJevarassa -o); Ja VI
180,11* (-e dharai_!aya va); Bv 2:143 (pa!havi nama
suci111 pi asuci111 pi ca sabbaJ11 sahati -aJ11; Bv-a 109,28:
-an ti nikkhittaJ11); Mi191,18 (mahapa!havi -a111 arahati
-e upagate);- (ii) the trace, prints, of the setting down;
Vin I 16,15 (addasa kho seghi gahapati
suvaQ.Q.apadukanaJ11 -a111 disvana taJ11 yeva anugamasi);
- ifc see pada-; -2. the setting out, setting down (of a
matika); the setting forth, promulgation (oj a sutta); a
list of headings, a brief statement (to be developed);
Vism 536,29 (-e viseso hoti); Sv 51,22foll. (evaJ11 imesu
catusu -esu imassa suttassa a!!huppattiko -o
aghuppattiyaJ11 hi idaJ11 bhagavata nikkhittaJ11); Mp 11
336,30 (duvidho -o aghuppattiko pi pucchavasiko pi);
Ud-a 30,3foll. (nikkhipanan ti -o suttassa -o
suttanikkhepo suttadesana ti attho, nikkhipiyati ti va -o
suttam eva -o suttanikkhepo) i- It-a I 35,23 foll; As 6,33*
(mülato ... namato capi 1iñgato nikkhipitva desitatta -o
nikkhepana
ti pavuccati; cfDhs 981 foil.); - ifc se e matika-, sutta-
(sv sutta2); - 0 -gahal}.a, n. [nikkhepa + gahaJ).a1], the
taking of a deposit or pledge; Pj II 179,8 (-e na ... Ü).aJ11
gahetva).
nikkhepana, n. [S. nik~epal).a], putting down, setting
down; putting into; a place for putting down or into;
M III 95,15 (api nu so puriso labhetha udakassa -an ti;
Ps IV 145,19: -an ti nikkhipana~~anaq1); SI 203,3* (yarp.
kiñci dinhaJ11 va sutarp. va mutaq1 aññaya -am ah u santo;
Spk I 297,5: -an ti tassa dinhasutadino vissajjanaq1);
II 94,10 (imassa catummahabhütikassa kayassa acayo pi
apacayo pi adanaq1 pi -arp. pi; Spk II 98,11: -an ti bhedo,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikkhepan ti); Nidd I 343,17 (mahato
bharassa -aq1); Mil 356,8 (tula -aya, Ce, Ee so; Be
visamavikhepanaya; Se nikkhipanaya); It-a I 35,23
(nikkhiplyati ti nikkhepo ... atha va -aq1 nikkhepo, Ee
so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se nikkhipanaq1).
niklesa, mfn., see sv kilesa.
nikhal}.ati1, nikhanati 1 (and nikhal_layati ?), pr. 3 sg.
[cfkiil).eti and S. nikiil).am], clases (the eye); winks;
Vin III 53,13 (nimittaq1 karoti akkhirp. va -issami
bhamukarp. va ukkhipissami ... , Be, Ee so; Ce
nikhanissami; Se nikkhanissami) = 78,3o (Be, Ce so; Ee
nikhanissami; Se nikkhanissami); Ja V 434,6 (akkhirp.
-ati bhamukaq1 ukkhipati, Ce so; Be, Ee nikhanati; Se
nikkhanati) ::j: Dhp-a IV 197,9 (Be so; Ce, Se nikhanati;
Ee akkhi nikhanati); Sp 540,8 (akkhirp. va -ati, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nikhanati); Pj II 457,16 (yadaharp. akkhirp. va
-ami bhamukaq1 va ukkhipissami, Be, Se so; Ce
nikhanissami; Ee nikkhipissami); part.pr.
nikhal).iyamana, mfn., Vin III 188,34 (na sakka hoti
akkhirp. va -iyamane bhamukarp. va ukkhipiyamane ...
passiturp., Ce, Ee so; Be -lyamane; Se nikhaniyamane;
pass. acc. sg. or act. acc. pl. ?) =IV 69,2 (Ce, Ee so; Be
-iyamane; Se nikhaniyamane); fpp
nikhal).itabba, mfn., Vin V 163,25 (na akkhi -itabbarp.,
Be, Ee so; Ee akkhirp.; Se nikkhanitabbarp.; Ce na akkh!
-itabba).
nikhal}.ati2 , nikhanati2 (and nikkhal).ati, nikkhanati), pr. 3
sg. [S. nikhanati], digs (something) into (the ground),
buries; implants, erects; D 11 127,22 (yarp. te Cunda
sükaramaddavaq1 avasi~~a!11 tarp. sobbhe -ahi, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce nikhanahi) = Ud 82,13; Ja I 264,10 (imaq1
rajanarp. ... galappamiil).e ava~e khal_litva ... -atha, Ce,
Ee so; Be nikhanatha; Se nikkhal).atha); III 417,16
(sar!raq1 . . . bhümiyaq1 -ah! ti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
nikkhanahi ti); IV 46,16* (tam ajj' ahaq1 -issami sobbhe,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikkhanissami); Ap 94,26 (ma no jati
pabhijji ti -issanti khattiya); Sp 341,7 (daruni -ati, Be so;
Ce, Se nikhanati; Ee -a ti); 1199,21 (rukkhaq1 ...
nahanatitthe -ati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nikkhananti); - fut.
2 sg. nikhaññasi (and nighaññasi ?) [cfahañcharp.,
ahañhi, ahaññirp. sv ahanati ?], Cp-a 225,15* (Kasirañño
ahaq1 putto Ya!11 kasuya nikhaññasi, eds so) quoting
Ja VI 13,18* (Be, Se nihaññasi; Ce, Ee nighaññasi; 13,27':
nihaññasi ti nihanissasi, Be, Se so; Ce nighaññasl ti; Ee
nighaññasi ti nikhal_lissasi); part.pr.
nikhaJ).a(t), mfn.,? Ja VI 12.25* (so 'mhi ranna
samajjhi(tho puttarp. me -aq1 vane, Be, Ce so; Ee
samijjhi~~o; Se samijjhittho ... nikkhanarp.; part.pr. with
542 nikhaQati
cond.lopt. sense, so T. Oberlies, 1991, pp. 121-22; or
< opt. *nighane, see BSU § 230, K.R. Norman, 1981b,
p. 164; Ja VI 12,28·: -arp. vane ti vane -eyyasi, Be, Ce so;
Se nikkhaneyyasi; Ee van e -anto) quoted Cp-a 224,28*
(Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikhanarp.); Ja VI 12,31* (adhammaq1
sarathi kayira marp. ce tvaq1 -aq1 vane, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nikkhanarp.; 13,5·: maq1 vane -eyyasi adhammaq1
kareyyasl ti, Be, Ce so; Ee nikhaneyyasi; Se
nikkhaneyyasi); - aor. 3 sg. nikhal).i, nikhani, Ja III
420,5 (so ... imasmirp. ~ane tava pitararp. maretva -1 ti,
Be, Ce so; E e nikhan! ti; Se nikkhani ti); Cp 3:14:4
(kasuya -i mamaq1); 3 pl. nikhal).irp.su, Spk 11 108,12; -
inf (a) nikhaturp., Cp 3:6:16 (sarath! khal).atl kasurp.
nikhaturp. pa~haviya mamaq1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nikkhaturp.); (b) nikhal).iturp., nikhaniturp., Ja VI 11,3
(Kasiraja taq1 sve amakasusane -iturp. al_lapesi, Be, Ce
so; Ee nikhaniturp.; Se nikkhaniturp.); Cp-a 223,29
(nikhatun ti -iturp., Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikhaniturp.); -
absol. nikhal).itva, nikhanitva, Vin 11 116,8 (khllaq1 -itva,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikhanitva); D 11 127,28 = Ud 82,18;
M III 132,23 (mahantaq1 thambharp. pa~aviyarp. -itva,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikkhanitva); Ud 44,10 (naq1 jlvita
voropetva . . . parikhaküpe -itva, Ce, Ee so; Se
nikkhal_litva; Be nikkhipitva) t Pj 11 519,4 (parikhata~e
-itva, Ee so; Ce nikhanitva; Be, Se nikkhipitva); Ja III
417,27 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nikkhanitva); Vism 269,3 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nikhanitva); Cp-a 222,21 (amakasusane
bhümiyaq1 -itva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikkhanitva);
Sp 1199,17 (nahanatitthe -itva ~apitatthambhe, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se nikkhanitva); 1207,16 (udake cattaro khiil).uke
-itva, Be so; Ce nikhanitva; Ee nikkhal).itva; Se
nikkhanitva); Sv 84,28 (ekaccesu kira janapadesu
kalakate ñatake na jhapenti -itva ~apenti); - pass.
part.pr. nikhaññamana, mfn., Vism 302,14;
pp nikhiita, mfn. [ts], dug in; buried; fixed in the
ground; Vin III 47,35 (bhal).garp. bhümiyarp. nikkhittaq1
hoti -aq1 pa~icchannaq1, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se omits); D 11
171,1 (satta esika -a ahesurp.); Sn 28 (khlla -a
asampavedh!, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be khila; perhaps read
nikhata me with K.R. Norman, 2001, p. 159); Ja I 267,26
(ava~e -o, Be Ce, Ee so; Se nikkhato); III 24,28* (tass'
esa mülasmirp. nidhi -o adayado; 25,11': bhümirp.
khal).itva ~hapitatta -o); Vism 636,22 (-a acala
pabbatarajasadisa sati); - anikhata, mfn., not dug; -
anikhataküla, mfn., with natural, not steep, banks; Ja VI
109,27* (anikhataküla nadi; 110,7·: agambhiratira); -
sunikhata, mfn., securely fixed in the ground; D III 133,7
(indakhllo ... gambhiranemo sunikhato acalo ... , Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se sunikkhitto); SV 270,12
(Migaramatupasado ... sunikhato; Spk III 258,2/oll.:
konetva sunhu ~hapito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nissaya-
~hapito); 444,24 (sunikhatatta); Ud-a 213,17 (sakkaya-
bhümiyaJ11 sunikhate viparltadassanatthambhe);- caus.
aor. 3 sg. nikhal).apesi, Cp-a 265,29 (bodhisattarp.
gal).hapetva ava~e nikhal).apesi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nikhanapesi); 2 pl. nikhal).apayittha, Cp-a 266,31
(tumhe . . . nikhal).apayittha ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nikhanapayittha ti); - absol. nikhal).apetva, Ja IV 215,8
(si1athambhaJ11 nikhal).apetva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nikkhal).apetva); Ud-a 400,15 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nikhaQana
nikhanapetva); Dhp-a III 67,1o (Be, Ce so; Ee
khanapetva; Se nikkhanapetva) = Ap-a 242,11 (Be, Ee so;
Ce, Se nikhanapetva).
nikhaQana\ n. [from nikhru:tati 1], closing; - ifc see
akkhi-.
nikhaQana2, nikhanana, n. [from nikhru:tati2], digging into,
burying; Cp-a 222,1 (kumarassa bhümiyaf!l -e rañña
a1,1atte, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikhanane).
nikhaQI}.eti, pr. 3 sg. [ni + khru:t9eti], breaks up;
Sp-~ [Be] I 121,3 (vacaniyavacakabhavena atth~
saddaf!l ca nikha1,19eti bhindati vibhajja dasseti ti
nikhaJ?.!U, sa eva idha khakarassa ghakar~ katva
nighru:t9ü ti vutta; = Sv-p~ I 379,12: Be nikha9ati
bhindati ... ; Ee omits nikha9ati; f. Ps-~ [Be] III 166,17:
khaJ.19ati vibhajja dasseti ti).
nikhanati\pr. 3 sg., see sv nikhru:tati 1.
nikhanate,pr. 3 sg., see svnikhru:tati 2.
nikhanana. n., see sv nikhanana2.
nikhiita, mfn., pp of nikhru:t~ti 2 qv.
nikhiidana, n. [?], a sharp carpenter's tool, perhaps a
chisel; V in III 90,15 ( ... vasi pharasu ku~hañ kuddalo
-a111 valli ... );IV 211,19 (kuddal~ detha -a111 detha ti);
A II 201,21 (sala1anhif!1 ... ku~hañhi tacchetva vasihi
taccheyya vasihi tacchetva -~ adaya anto suvisodhita111
visodheyya ... ); Ja V 46,25 (rukkhe pharasuna
konetva ... -en a vijjhitva magg~ karonto ); VI 449,2w
(vacchadantamukha ti 0 -sadisamukha); Sp 1241,21 (-a111
caturassamukhaf!l va hotu do1,1imukh~ va vaii.k~ va
ujuk~ va antamaso sammuñjani-dru:t9akavedhan~ pi
dru:t9akabaddhaf!1 ce garubhru:t9am eva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
dru:t9akabandhan~ e' eva); Spk III 5,9 (-a111 pavesetva,
Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se nakhacchedan~).
nikhila, mfn. [ts], all, entire; complete; Abh 702 (-a111
saka1af!1); Pj II 110,29 (tisu pi~akesu atthato -o
pariyattibahussuto, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce niccalo) =
Nidd-a II 138,13 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nicca1o) =
Ap-a 186,33 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nicca1o); Da~h 5:40
(
0
-lokahitaya); - -ena, adv., complete/y; As 12,2o•
(-ena desit~).
nikhiQa, mfn., se e sv nikkhi1,1a.
niga in cpd in Ee atAs 331,24 (gavayagokaJ.lJ.lanigadin~)
is wr for miga (Be, Ce, Se so).
nigacchati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. nigacchati], comes to, undergoes,
incurs; Vin I 227,24 (dussilo ... mahati111 bhogajiinif!l
-ati); II 201,11 (na ca tatonidana111 marru:t~ va -anti
marru:tamatt~ va dukkhaJ11); SI 85,29* (yada ca paccati
papaJ11 atha balo dukkh~ -ati) = Dhp 69; A III 353,23*
(bandhana111 pi -ati); V 317,22 (vyasanaf!1 na -eyya);
Sn 278 (pecca dukkh~ -ati); 742 (upadanapaccaya
bhavo bhüto dukkhaf!l -ati); Pv 33:3 (kissa
kammavipakena idaf!l dukkh~ -asi); Ja II 402,9* (pecca
saggaf!l -eyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee na gaccheyya);
III 80,22* (dvay~ yacanako ... -ati; 81,2·: labhati
vindati); VI 233,22* (mü!ho hi mü!ham agamma bhiyyo
moh~ -ati); 292,13* (yasa111 poso -ati); 310,2• (ma ca
vas~ asatin~ -e); Sadd 462,26 (-ati ti labhati); - fut.
3 sg. nigacchati2, nigacchissati, MI 316,2 (pitva ca pana
marru:taf!l va -asi marru:tamattaJ11 va dukkhan ti; Ps II
376,28: -asi ti gamissasi, Be, Ce so; Se nigamissasi; Ee
-issasi ti gamissasi); S II 100,3 (im~ cahaJ11
543
ali.gii.rakasuf!1 papatissami tatonidana111 marru:taJ11 va
-ami ... ) f. IV 189,2 (Ce so; Be, Se -issami; Ee
gacchami); S IV 173,5 (asivisan~ . . . aññataro va
aññataro va kuppissanti tato tv~ . . . marru:taf!l va
-asi ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -issasi); Th 25 (tadisaf!l
bhikkhum asajja Ka1,1ha dukkhaf!l -así; Th-a I 87,4:
apayadukkhaf!l upagamissasi papu1,1issasi ti); Ja V 180,4*
(dukkh~ -anti; 180y: -anti ti -issanti); - aor. 3 sg.
nigacchittho, Pv 42:7 (bhusa111 dukkh~ -ittho niraye
katakibbiso, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -i~~o; Pv-a 266,3foll.:
ativiyadukkha111 papu1,1i); 1 sg. nigacchis~. Pv 51 :7; -
caus. pr. 3 sg. nigameti, sums up, recapitulates; refers
back to; restates; Ps lii 442,16 (tatiyena [padena] tam ev'
atth~ -eti); Spk I 273,15 (imehi kho ti adina ... taf!l
vac~ -eti); Cp-a 108,27 (idani Akittibriihmru:to ti adina
yathavutte dasa pi cariyavisese udanetva -eti); -
part.pr. nigamenta, mfn., Sp 257,6 (t~ sabbaf!l
ekajjh~ -ento aha eso methunadhammo nama ti); Ps I
106,16 (tam eva pa~ipad~ -ento); III 402,13
(vacanantarena -ento aha); Pj II 192,31; Nidd-ai 61,29
(ime vuccanti ti -ento aha); - absol. nigametva,
Sp 130.24 (attana sut~ diqhena -etva); PsI 195,6;
Pa~is-a 108,13; - neg. anigametva, Pa~is-a 477.3o; -
pp nigamita, mfn., summed up; recapitulated; Ps IV
22,25 (-entena pi pañc' eva -itani); Pa~is-a 635,35
(nibbanan ti sabhava1akkhru:tena -it~); - see also
niyyateti.
nigacchati2 ,fut. 3 sg. ofnigacchati 1 qv.
nigacchat¡3, pr. 3 sg., se e sv niggacchati.
nigaQtha, nigantha (and niggantha), m. [Pkt 1,1i~~ha;
AMg nigg~tha; BHS nirgrantha, nigrantha;
cf K.R. Norman, 1961, pp. 348-49], l. an ascetic,
specifically Mahiivira; V in I 233,24 (Siho senapati yena
-o Nataputto ten' upasaii.kami); II 111,7 (Makkhali
Gosalo Ajito Kesakamba!I ... -o Nataputto, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se niggaJ?.~ho) f. Snp. 92,3 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigantho; Pj II 423,12: -o ti pabbajjanamena Nataputto ti
pitunamena vuccati) f. Mil4,17 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
niggaJ?.~ho); DI 49,1 (ay~ deva -o Nataputto saii.ghi
e' eva gaJ?.I ca gaJ?.acariyo ca ñato yasassi titthakaro ... ;
Sv 144,26: kilesagru:t~arahita mayan ti eva111vaditaya
laddhanamavasena -o); MI 92,35 (te -a m~ etad
avocuf!1, -o avuso Nataputto sabbaññü sabbadassavi
aparisesa111 ñiil,ladassan~ pa~ijanati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigantha . . . nigantho ... ) f. A I 220,3o; M I 3 71,26 (-o
Nataputto Na!anday~ pa~ivasati mahatiya 0 -parisaya
saddhif!l, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nigantho); SI 66,22•
(Pakudhako Katiyano -o, Be, Ee so; Ce -a; Se nigantho;
Spk I 127,14: -o ti Na~aputto); Ap 503,27 (papamitta-
vas~ gantva -ena vimohito pesito Nataputtena
buddhasegh~ upeccah~); - 2. an ascetic, especially
one who is a follower of Mahiivira, a Jain; Abh 440
(ace!ako -o); DI 57,25 (idha maharaja -o
catuyamas~varas~vuto hoti); III 117,5 foil. (-o
Nataputto Pavaya111 adhuna kalakato hoti, tassa
kalakiriyaya bhinna -a dvedhikajata bhru:t9anajata ... );
117,16 (-esu Nataputtiyesu); A I 206,8 (atthi Visakhe -a
nama samru:tajatika); III 383,28 (Pürru:tena Kassapena
lohitabhijati paññatta -a ekasa~aka); V 150,2 (dasahi
bhikkhave asaddhammehi samannagata -a, Be, Ce, Ee
nigal}fhaka
so; Se nigantha); Ud 65,5 (satta ca jatila satta ca -a satta
ca acelaka satta ca ekasataka ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Ee
acela . . . ekasata; Se nigantha; Ud-a 330,2o: -a ti
setapataniga~tharüpadharino); Sn 381 (ye kec' ime
titthiya vadasi!a aj1vika va yadi va -a); Ja III l,s (eko
pañcasu vadasatesu vyatto -o Vesaliyffi11 papu~i, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nigg~tho); Ap 358,17 (-a pupphasataka
teda~<;lika ekasikha agacchanti mamaq¡ gharffi11, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nigantha); Sp 254,2 (-o ti maq¡ dharehi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nigg~tho ti); Ps lii 89,15 (-anffi11 santika);
Dhp-a I 309,4 (kadaci aj1vako kadaci -o kadaci tapaso,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nig~thako); 435,1 (Garahadinno
0
-savak:o, tffi11 -a abhikkha~aq¡ evaq¡ vadanti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nigg~thasavako ... nigg~tha ... ); III 208,12 (te
-a lajjamana hutva . . . palayiq¡su, Be, Ce so; E e
niggantha hutva; Se nigg~a hutva); 489,1s (sabbaso
apaticchannehi acelakehi ime -a varatara ye ekaq¡
purimapassaq¡ pi tava paticchadenti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigga~tha); Th-a II 118,33 (pañca jatisatani -o hutva);
Th1-a 105,9 (-esu pabbajjaya tiilaghina luñcitakesa);
Mhv 10:97 (Jotiyassa -assa gharaq¡ karesi);
o•uposatha, m., a fast-day, a day of purification for
Jains; A I 206,7 foil. (kathffi11 ca Visakhe -o hoti); -
0
-putta, m., a follower of Mahavfra, a Jain ascetic; MI
227,18 (Saccako -o); Sadd 80,19.
nigaJ.lthaka, m. [nig~tha + ka2; BHS nigranthaka], a
(Jain) ascetic; Dhp-a I 309,4 (kadaci aj1vako kadaci -o
kadaci tapaso, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se nig~tho).
nigal).thi, m. [cf ga~thi], the knot or joint in a reed; Ps III
231,22 (nig~thigabbha ti -imhi jatagabbha ucchuveju-
najadayo sandhaya vadati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nig~<;limhi;
= Sv 163,27 and Spk II 344,10: eds g~thimhi); -
0
-gabbha, m., (according to ct) offspring from a knot or
joint; DI 54,8 (satta saññ1gabbha satta asaññ1gabbha
satta -a ... ; Sv 163,27: -a ti g~thimhi jatagabbha, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nigg~thigabbha ti) = M I 518,3 (Be, Ee so;
Ce nig~th1-; Se nig~tha-) =S III 211,27.
nigaJ.lthi, niganth1, f [AMg niggaq¡th1], a female (Jain)
ascetic; MI 380,18 (ajjatagge samma dovarika avarami
dvaraq¡ niga~thanaq¡ -1naq¡, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
niganth1naq¡); Ja III 1,9 (apara pi evarüpa -1, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nigga~th1); Ps II 268,8 (eko nig~tho ca -1 ca
pañca pañca vadasatani uggahetva); Th1-a 105,12 (pubbe
-1 hutva evffi11 vicariq¡).
nigal}.(.iuya in Ee at Ap-a 219,31 is wr for nighan<;iuya (Be,
Ce, Se so).
nigal}.ha in Ee at Kv 459,15 is wr for nig~tha (Be, Ce, Se,
M I 94,29 so).
nigati, f [?], destiny; course; Ja VI 238,32* (th1bhava pi na
muccissaq¡ chattha nigatiyo ima, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
chagha va gatiyo ima; 240,6foll.: devaloke pana pañca
ayaq¡ ca eka ti ima cha gatiyo itthibhava na muccissan ti
vadati).
nigada, m. [ts], audible recitation; Abh 764 (nigado -o).
nigantha, m., se e sv nig~tha.
niganthi,f, see sv niga~thL
nigama\ m. [ts] (pl. acc. occasionally -ani), a small town,
a market town; the people of a town; Abh 225; 868
(v~ippathe ca nagare ... -o); Vin III 47,12 (gama va -a
va nagara va janapada va janapadapadesa va
544 nigamana
pabbajeyyuq¡); !84,9 (bhikkhu pan' eva aññataraq¡
giimffi11 va -aq¡ va upanissaya viharati); DI 193,13
(amukasmiq¡ game va -e va nagare va ti); II 55,4
(Kammassadhammaq¡ nama Kurünaq¡ -o); MI 187,15
(bahira apodhatu ... gamaq¡ pi vahati -aq¡ pi vahati ... );
S II 228,13 (pattac1varaq¡ adaya gamaq¡ va -aq¡ va
pi~<;laya pavisati); Sn 118 (yo hanti parirundhati gamani
-ani ca); 995 (katamarnhi game -amhi va puna);
Pv 25:18 (gama giimffi11 vicarantl -e rajadhaniyo);
Th1 304 (katamaq¡ gamaq¡ -aq¡ nagarffi11 rajadhaniyo );
Ja V 123,20* (dhammaq¡ cara maharaja gamesu -esu ca;
124,s·: gamanigamavasino d~<;labal!hi ap1jento va);
178,6* (amantayami -ffi11); VI 490,5* (kevalo capi -o
Sivayo capi samagata; 490,15·: -o ti negamakutumbika-
jano); Cp 3:14:4 (rajüpaj1ve -e sabalaghe saraghake
sabbaq¡ hatthagataq¡ katva; Cp-a 265,34: -e ti negame);
Kv 609,4 (katarasmiq¡ game va -e va nagare va ratthe va
janapade va ti); Mil 128,9; Sp 626,4 (apakaraparikkhepo
sa-ap~o -o veditabbo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
anupakara-); PsI 227,18 (taq¡ -aq¡ gocaragamaq¡ katva);
-
0
-gama, m. [nigama + gama2], a village associated
with a town; ? a large village; ? Ja I 356,12 (bodhisatto
ekasmiq¡ -e udiccabrahm~akule nibbattitva); II 209,28
(Jetavanato gavutaddhayojanamatte eko -o);
0
-ghata, m., plundering of a town, marauding; DI 135,8
(janapado sak~tako sa-upap1jo . . . -a pi dissanti);
III 68,4 (-aq¡ pi upakkamiq¡su katuq¡); Kv 173,32 (araha
añña~apakato .. . -aq¡ kareyya ti); 622,15
(ekadhippayena ... -o katabbo ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
0
-ghatak:o); - 0 -bandhana, n., restraint in a town;
restriction toa town; Vin III 47,10 (gamabandhanena va
-ena va bandheyyuq¡); Nidd I 403,3 (gamabandhanena
va -ena va nagarabandhanena va, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
omit); Kv 212,12; - 0
-vasi(n), mf(n). [nigama +
vasi(n) 2], (one) who lives in a town; Ja IV 121,16' (-1
mahajano ); Sv 850,29 (-ino negama janapadavasino ca
janapada); Mp III 286,1 ( -ino ca ratthavasino ca
janassa); - anigama, m., not a town; an uninhabited
place; M II 98,13 (coro Ailgulimalo nama ... tena gama
pi agama kata nigama pi -a kata janapada pi ajanapada
kata); A I 160,26 (manussanaq¡ khayo hoti tanuttffi11
paññayati gama pi agama honti nigama pi -a honti); -
sanigama, mfn., with the towns; Cp 3:3:3 (patipajja
kevalffi11 vasudhaq¡ imaq¡ saraghakffi11 -aq¡; Cp-a 197,7:
saha nigamehi mahagameh1 ti -ffi11);- see also negama.
nigama2 , m. [ts], l. the passage where a word occurs; the
word quoted; Mp III 33,3 (imina nayena sabbavaresu
tathagato ti -assa attho veditabbo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nigamanassa) = Nidd-a II 67,28 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nigamanassa; = Sv 915,27: eds nigamanassa); Vism 309,7
(puna mettasahagatena cetasa ti vuttaq¡, o -vasena va
etaq¡ vuttffi11, eds so, perhaps wr; = Nidd-a II 118,24,
Patis-a 555,14 and Vibh-a 378,7: eds nigamanavasena);
-2. the Vedas; Abh 868 (vede ca -o).
nigamana, n. [ts], summing up, conclusion;
recapitulation; reference back to, restatement; Nidd-a II
118,24 (puna mettasahagatena cetasa ti vuttffi11, 0 -vasena
va etaq¡ VUttffi11) = Patis-a 555,14 = Vism 309,7 (eds
nigamavasena; cfVism-mht [Be] I 365,7: vuttass' ev'
atthassa punavacanaq¡ -an ti aha 0 -vasena va elffi11
nigameti
vuttan ti?); Sp 190,1 (ayaq1 kho Siiriputta hetü ti adi
-aq1); 771,18 (taq1 visuq1 anuddharitva avibhajitva va
-aq1 eva ekato katan ti); Sv 434,15 (puna apparna1_1o ca ti
adi o• -atthaq1 vuttaqi) = Ps IV 179,3 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigamatthaq1); PsI 165,12 (evaq1 bhagava sllanisaqisa-
kathaqi yava arahatta kathetva idani sabbaq1 pi taq1
sllanisaqiSaqi sampiJ.l9etva dassento -aq1 aha);
Ud-a 46,13 foil. (pub be evaq1 me su tan ti nidanavasena
vutto yeva hi attho idha 0 -vasena iti me sutan ti puna
vutto, vuttass' eva hi atthassa punavacanaq1 -an ti);
It-a II 139,22 (evaq1 kho ti adi -aqi); Pj II 444,22
(ekanusandhikaq1 suttaq1 nidanena adikalyiil_laqi -ena
pariyosanakalyal_laqi); Pa~is-a 108,8 (tesaq1 evaq1
nidditthanaq1 dharnmanaq1 ... -aq1 karoti); 310,16 (itl ti
vuttappakarassa atthassa -aq1); Sadd 919,31 (pa~iññaya
punavacanaq1 -aq1: tasma aggi atra); - see also
niggarnana, niyyatana.
1 niguhitva); Ap-a 569,2 (Ee so; Be, Se niguhitva; not in
nigameti, pr. 3 sg., caus. ofnigacchati qv.
nigaral}a, n. [cf S. nigira1_1a, S. lex. nigalana ], swallowing;
Dhatum 360 (garo nigara1_1e); 558 (giro nigara1_1adisu;
vl nigira1_1adisu); -see also niggira1_1a.
nigaJa, m.n. [S. niga9a], l. an (iron) chain for the feet; a
fetter; Abh 364 (nitthi tu -o 'nduko); Ja I 394,26
(rajabandhanagara to ekaq1 purisaq1 pakkosapetva -ani
bhinditva); Kv 41,23 (yatha na -o nega)iko yassa -o so
nega)iko; Kv-a 28,29: -o ti saiJ.khalikabandhanaqi
nega)iko ti tena bandhako); - see also nega)ika; -
2. an (ankle) bracelet;? Ja VI 64,18* (kumiirike
upaseniye niccaq1 °-maJ.19ite, Ce so; Be, Se nigga)a-; Ee
0
-maJ.19ike; cf64,21": agalitarnal_l9anena mal_l9anasHike ti
vadati, Be so; Ee aga)ita-; Se aggalita-; Ce aga)ita-
maJ.l9ane); - 0 -bandhaka, mfn., bound with fetters;
Ja VI 138,12* (api -a pi hatthi asse ca palema; 138,19": api
nama mayaq1 mahaniga)ehi bandhaka pi hutva).
nigada, m. [S. lex. id.], audible recitation; Abh 764 (-o
nigado).
nigaJhika, nigaJhita, mfn. [cfga)ha, pp of gahati, and
ga)hita], (according to ct) emerged from; Th 568
(pubbaruhirasampUJ.lJ.lO güthaküpe niga)hiko . . . kayo
sada sandati pütikaq1, Ee, Se so, prob. wr; Be, Ce
güthaküpena ga)hito; Th-a II 244,12jo/l.: güthaküpena
ga)hito ti vaccaküpena vaccen' eva va bharito;
güthaküpaniga)hit o ti pi paji, vaccaküpato nikkhanto ti
attho, Be, Se so; Ce güthaküpe niga)hito ti pi paji ... ; E e
güthaküpe niga)hiko ti . . . güthaküpena ga)hito ti pi
paji ... ).
nigilati, niggilati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nigirati, nigi1ati] (-gg-
perhaps influenced by uggi1ati), swallows; Ja V 389,13*
(balisaq1 hi so nigi1ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niggi1ati); Mp II
123,7 (n' eva uggi1ituqi sakkhissati na niggilituq1);- see
also niggalati 2.
niguyha, mfn.,fpp ofnigühati qv.
niguyhati, niguhati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nigühati.
niguhana, n., see sv nigühana.
nigüJha, mfn., pp ofnigühati qv.
nigühati, niguhati (and niguyhati, nigguhati), pr. 3 sg.
[S. nigühati], conceals, hides; Pv 29:4 (sace santaq1
niguhami, Be so; Ce, Ee niguyhami; Se parigüyhami);
Ja III 392,18 (itthiyo nama itthinaq1 rahassaq1 na -anti,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be niguhanti); IV 202,6 (kiqlkara1_1a
545 niggacchati
-issami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niggahissami); V 379,23* (yaq1
bhavaq1 na -asi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niguyhasi); VI 423,18
(na dan' esa mayhaqi rahassaqi -issati, Ce, Ee so; Be
guhissati; Se guyhissati); 570,3· (vijjamanaq1 na -ami, Ce
so; Be na guyhami; Ee niguhami; Se niguyhami); Ps III
206,2 (attano laddhiq1 -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niguhati);
Mp IV 2,22 (-anti pa~icchadenti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
niguhanti); Sadd 458,28 (gühati ni[g]gühati, Ee so; Be
guhati nigguhati); - part.pr. (a) nigühanta, mfn., Spk I
127,1o (na -anto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niguhanto); -
neg. anigühanta, mfn., Ja 1 286,25 (anigühanto, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be aniguhanto ); Th-a II 276,22 (anigühanto, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se aniguhanto); (b) nigühamana, mfn., Ps II
140,25 (dhutaiJ.gaqi -amano) = Mp I 77,11 (Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se niguhamano); - aor. 2 sg. nigühittho, Ja IV 202,4
(maq1 ma -ittho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niggahi); -
absol. nigühitva, Dhp-a III 315,2 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
Ce); - neg. anigühitva, Spk I 149,9 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
aniguhitva) f. Ud-a 331,1s; Mp I 439,18 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
aniguhitva) It-a I 30,27; pp (a) nigüJha,
nigu)ha, mfn. and n. [S. nigü9ha; BHS nirgü9ha], hidden;
concealed; with a hidden meaning; Ja I 461,7* (-o
papam acare, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niguyho); Sv 930,9
(tacotthata ti tacena pariyonaddha nigujha, Be so; Ce
gü)ha; Se niggu)ha; Ee tacotata ti tacena pariyonaddhani
gü)ha, wr); Bv-a 285,9 (rahubhayena --kira1_1ajalo
pUJ.lJ.lacando); Da~h 3:39 (--pañhaq1 puttho);
anigü)ha, mfn., Ja V 77,10* (viki1_11_1avacaq1 anigü)ha-
mantaqi asaññatam, E e so; Be, Ce, Se aniguyha-); -
(b) nigühita, mfn., Abh 834;- fpp (a) niguyha, mfn.,-
neg. aniguyhamanta, mfn., not keeping discussions
secret; Ja V 77,10* (viki1_11_1avacaq1 aniguyharnantaq1, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee anigü)hamantaqi; 78,13·: appa~icchanna­
mantaqi); see also guyharnanta (sv gühati);
(b) nigühitabba, mfn., Sp 532,16.
nigühana, niguhana, n. [S. nigühana], concealing, hiding;
PsI 106,35 (maya ... o -rasa); As 376,22 (attasampattinaqi
0
-1akkhaJ_lata, Se so; Ee niguhana-; Be, Ce attasarnpatti-
nigühana-).
3
niggacchati, nigacchati , pr. 3 sg. [S. nirgacchati], goes
out; leaves; comes out, emerges, appears; Ja I 32,33
(pañcaiJ.gikass' eva turiyassa madhurasaddo -ati); 124,2
(naqi ... -a ito ti salakaggato nikka99hiqisu); VI 504,24"
(samba ra~~a nirajjati ti attano rattha -ati, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se nigacchati); Ap 61,11 (pabha -ate tassa); Sp 504,16
(vacanaq1 mukhato -ati); 764,19 (sace pi mülani ca upari
ailkuro ca -ati); Sv 156.27 (uppatitva -anti ti, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se nigacchantl ti)= Mp IV 54,16 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigacchanti ti); Sv 586,29 (divasaparibbayo ekaq1
kahapa1_1asaka~aq1 -ati sayaq1 dve pavisanti, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee nigacchati); 967,17 (yato vutthiyo avatthararnana
-anti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nigacchanti); Spk I 310,13
([saddo] bahiparisaya ail.gu1imattaqi pi na -ati, Be so; Se
nigacchati; Ce, Ee ekailgularnattaqi pi nigacchati);
II 80,8 (yava vapito udakaq1 na -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nigacchati) = Mp III 178,s (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigacchati); Mp I 245,23 (ekekabijato salakasataq1 pi
sa1akasahassaqi pi nigacchati, eds so) = Th-a I 146,25
(Be, Se -ati; Ce nigacchati; Ee nigacchanti) =
niggal}thi
Ap-a 522,2o (-ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nigacchati); Mp I
384,1 (cetiyato nllarasmiyo -anti, Be, Ce so; Ee
nllarasmi; Se nllarasmi -ati); II 303,3 (na niyyati na -ati
taiT~ atthaiTI na sadhetl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nigacchati);
Ud-a 118,19 (adhik~ plt~ sayam eva mukhato
niggamissatl ti); Paris-a 621,11 (nissarantl ti -anti);
Sadd 462,27 (-atl ti nikkhamati ); aor.
3 sg. (a) niragam~. Sn 695 (antepuramha niragama
brahmacari, Ee so, me; Ce, Se niragama; Be niggama;
Pj II 489,17: niragama ti niggato, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
niggama ti); (b) niggacchi, niggañchi, Ap 530,20 (-i, Ce
so; Be, Ee, Se niggañchi); Pj II 188,7 (-i); Cp-a226,1
(nagarato -i);- inf niggantuiT~, Ud-a 366,3o (Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nikkhantuiT~); Th-aii 151,11 (yena
manussagavassamahiiT~sadayo na niggantuiT~ sakka, Be,
Se so; Ce -mahisadihi n' eva niggantuiT~ sakka; Ee
-mahisadi yeva niggantuiT~ sakka hatthi na, prob. wr);
Mhv 36: 118; absol. niggantva, Th-a I 174,16
(pabbajjadhippayena gharato niggantva);
pp niggata, mfn. [S. nirgata], gane out, left; come out,
emerged; projecting; Th 934 (dhanaiTI ca putt~
bhariyaiTI ca cha<;i<;iayitvana -a; Th-a III 78,21: -a ti
gehato nikkhanta); Ja I 38,21 (upari -ahi mahasakhahi,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit) = Ap-a 42,7; Ja II 218,9·
(ja1adharassa mukhato -a vijjuta); VI 78,22'
(dakkhil).apassena pavisitva vamapassena -an ti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee viniggatan ti); Ap 559,4 (ekika -a geha);
Sv 517,36 (sannipatabheriya -aya); Pj II 189,18 (akkhihi
-ehi); As 409,4 (natthi ettha tal).hasañkhat~ van~ -aiTI
va tasma vana ti nibban~); - --kammaiTI in Ee at
Pv-a 223,14 is prob. wr for niggahakamm~ (Be, Ce, Se
so); - --pamukhasa1a,f, a hall with a projecting area
in front; ? Ap-a 104,33 (niyyiiha --pamukhasala Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee -a pamukhasa1a);- neg. aniggata, mfn., not
emerged; Sp 345,24; 764,27; - aniggataratanaka, mfn.,
from which the queen has not gane out; Vin IV 160,15
(anikkhantarajake aniggataratanake, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
anibhata-; 160,23: aniggataratanake ti mahesi sayani-
ghara anikkhanta hoti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anibhata-;
Sp 881,1/oll.: ratan~ vuccati mahesi, -an ti
nikkhant~, aniggat~ ratanaiTI ito ti aniggata-
ratanakaiT~, Be so; Ce, E e nibhatan ti ... anibhataiT~ ...
anibhata-; Se nibharan ti ... anibhar~ ... anibhara-);-
suniggata, mfn., properly emerging; well produced;
Sp 750,26 (suniggatena saddena).
niggal}thi, mfn., see sv gal).~i.
niggal}thigabbha ti in Ce, Ee at Sv 163,27 is prob. wr for
nigal).rhi- (Be, Se so).
niggal}hati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv niggal).hati.
niggal}hana, niggahal).i, n., -a,f [from niggal).hati; cf S.
nigrahal).a], l. holding down, restraining; reproving;
refuting; Ja V 245,9· (tes~ amaccanaiTI -~);
Vism 134,26 (samaye cittassa niggahal).ata samaye
cittassa paggahal).ata) = Ps I 298,18 (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
0
-ta) = Vibh-a 283,27 (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce 0 -ta); Sp 429,15
(yasmiiTI samaye cittaiTI niggahetabbaiTI tasmiiTI samaye
citt~ -a, Se so; Ee -aya; Be, Ce cittaniggal).hana);
Spk II 178,7 (dussllapugga1an~ o• -atth~. Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se niggahal).atthaiT~); III 171,7 (uddhatassa cittassa
-~. Be, Ce, Se so; E e niggahanaiTI); Dhp-a IV 24,3
546 niggaQhati
(cittassa -e yogo karai).Iyo ti); - 2. seizing, seizure;
(suppression, punishment; ?) A III 129,12 (mahacoro
ekeko niggahal).ani katta hoti, t~ kissa hetu, ma me
guyhamanta bahiddha sambhed~ agam~sii ti, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be gahal).iini; Mp III 279,1: niggahal).ani ti
parasantakanaiTI bhal).<;iiinaiTI gahal).ani, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
gahal).iini ti); - dunniggahal}ata,f, abstr., the being
hard to restrain; the difficulty of taming; Ja I 312,17'
(-aya, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be dunniggahataya).
niggal}hanaka, m(jn). [niggal).hana + ka2], (one) who
reproves, reprimands; Cp-a 312,3 (niggaharahan~
dhammen' eva -o yava-d-eva akusala vughapetva
kusale patighapanaya).
niggal}hati, niggal).hati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nigrhl).ati], l. holds
down, holds fast; holds back, restrains; humiliates; M I
134,18 (a1agaddaiTi ... ajapadena dal).<;lena suniggahit~
-eyya); A III 435,20 (yasmiiTI samaye citt~
niggahetabb~ tasmiiTI samaye citt~ -ati); Th 446
(sace dhavati te citt~ kamesu ca bhavesu ca khipp~
-a satiya kighadaiT~ viya duppasuiTI, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
niggayha; Th-a II 187,26: yatha kilesavigamena
nibbisevanaiTI hoti tatha damehi ti); Ja III 375,24'
(tasmiiTI tasmiiTI yeva khal).e uppannakilesaiTI -ati, Be,
Ce so; Ee -ati; Se -i); Kv 524,2 (paro parassa citt~ -atl
ti; Kv-a 159,9: sañkilesapattito nivareti); Sv 188,26
(gamane uppannakilesaiTI gamane yeva -atha);
Sadd 503,4 (-ati); - 2. refutes; reproves, reprimands;
Vin V 133,7 (paccatthike sahadhammena suniggahit~
-ati); JaV 116,28* (-e niggaharahaiTI; 118,17·: -e ti ...
poriil).akarajiihi rhapitadal).<;i~ oloketva dosanurüpaiTI
-eyya); VI 439,5 (tena m~ ativiya -ati, Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se -ati); Kv 2,26 (atha taiTI -ama suniggahito ca hosi);
Sp 224,13 (katamaiT~ apattiiT~ aropetva amhe -atha ti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se -atha ti)= Mp V 31,18; Ps II 105,19 (yatha
sattha Arigh~ -ati maiTI pi evaiTI -eyya ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -ati); Mp I 134,16 (vinicchayaghane nisiditva
niggahetabbe -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ati); - fut.
3 sg. (a) niggahessati, niggahissati, Dhp 326 (tad
[citt~] ajj' ah~ niggahessami yoniso) = Th 77 (Be, Ce
so; E e, Se niggahissami); Th 974 (bhikkhii ... dughacitta
anadara tadin~ mettacittanaiTI -issanty anagate); Ja IV
25,6 (kodhassa uppajjituiT~ na dassami uppann~ pi naiTI
khippam eva niggahissami ti, Se so; Be -issami ti; Ce,
Ee kopassa ... uppanne pi ... niggahessami ti); Mil 9,8
(ajja pabbajitaiTI musavadena niggahessami ti); Sp 224,15
(saii.gho . . . dhammena vinayena satthusasanena
niggahessati); (b) niggal).hissati, M II 10,16 (saha-
dhammena suniggahitaiT~ -issatl ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
niggahissatl ti); Ja IV 114,9 (imaiTI kilesaiTI -issami ti,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niggahessami ti); Ps II 90,28 (te vitakke
-issatl ti); Dhp-a I 443,12 (tumhe aii.garakasuyaiTI patetva
-issami ti); - part.pr. (a) niggal).ha(t), mfn., Sv 503,17
(rajaparisa rajanaiT~ -anto evaiTI vadeyyuiTI, Be, Ce so;
Ee vadeyya; Se -antaiT~); (b) niggal).hanta, mf(-antl)n.,
Ja I 313,19 (lobhaiT~ -anto); Mil186,6 (coro pana bhante
Nagasena -antena kathaiTI niggahetabbo ti); Dhp-a III
208,5 (suriyamal).<;ialaiTI -anto tapehi ti, Ce, Se so; Ee
tapahi ti; Be nika<;i<;ihanto tapeh1 ti); Thi-a 13,28 (-antl);
neg. aniggal).hanta, mfn., Dhp-a IV 24,2;
(e) niggal).hamana, mfn., Dhp-a III 301,2 (te ... uggataiT~
niggatika
kop~ . . . -amanaya ti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se niggayha-
manaya ti); - aor. 3 sg. (a) niggal)hi, niggahi, Ja III
464,6 (atha na111 so . . . alik~ tucchaka111 kathesí ti
musavadena -i); VI 439,3 (suniggahit~ -i, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee suniggahlt~ niggahi); Th-a II 161,32 (sattha mam
codesi -i); Mhv5:l34 (-i); (b)niggahesi, Psi! 80,2
(yatha 'ssa te vitakke uppajji111su yatha ca ne niggahesi);
1 sg. niggal)hil11, niggahi111, Ap 462,zo (niggahi111);
Cp 2:4:9 (kopa111 -i111); 3 pl. niggal_lhi111su, Ja I 312,19.
(ta111 Jobha111 -i111sil ti); - inf. (a) niggal)hitu111, Ja IV
191,19 (citt~ -itu111 asakkonto); Ps III 447,9 (Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se niggahitu111); Dhp-a III 301,11; (b) niggahetu111,
Ja IV 22,7 (kodha111 niggahetu111 nasakkhi); Spk I 40,7;
Mhv 36:119; (e) niggal_lhatu111, Mp II 309,s (sassatavadí
... pahoti ucchedavadi111 -atu111, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr;
1 Se so; Ee suniggahíto ); - 2. the nasal sound; a
Be, Se niggahetu111); - absol. (a) niggayha , M III
118,4; Sn 351; Th 1142 (yogena niggayha); Ja VI 66,10'
(eka111 ca cakkhu niggayha; 66,13·: niggayha ti
nimíletva): Sv 1060,13 (paccaníkadhamme niggayha, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee omits) = Vibh-a42l,14; - niggayha-
vadi(n), mfn., who speaks reprovingly; censuring:
Dhp 76 = Th 993 (Th-a III 102,6foll.: yo vajja111 disva ...
vajjanuriipa111 tajjento paJ:.lamento dal)gakamma111
karonto sikkhapeti); (b) niggal)hitva, Patis I 167,5
(atipaggahit~ citta111 ... -itva); Ja I 501,17 (kilese
-itva); lli 222,9 (eta111 -itva lajjapetva); Ap 43,15 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nihanitva); As 93,6; - neg. aniggal_lhitva,
Vibh-a468,16; (e)niggahetva, SIV 196,9; AIII 187,11
(nantaka111 ... vamena padena niggahetva; Mp III 295,13:
niggahetva ti akkamitva); Ja II 212,19 (im~ rajana111
niggahetva lajjapessamí ti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -itva);
IV 97,16 (hatthi111 vajirari.kusena niggahetva); Sp 1399,3o;
- neg. aniggahetva, Ja IV 326,w; Sp 1399,36; -pass.
pr. 3 sg. niggayhati, is restrained; is reproved; is
refuted; Dhp-a I 295,9 (citta111 nam' eta111 dukkhena -atl
ti dunniggaha111); - part.pr. (a) niggayhamana, mfn.,
Ja VI 246,15 (raja tena -amano appatibhano ahosi);
Sp 53,15; Mp II 310,14 (ah~ taya satakkhattu111 -amano
pi ucchedavadí yeva ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niggal_lhanto pi,
prob. wr); Th-a III 102,2; - neg. aniggayhamana, mfn.,
Ja IV 48,11; (b) niggal)hiyamana, mfn., Mp II 309,s
(niggal_lhiyamano, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -amano) t 310,13
(eds -amano); - pp niggahita, niggahíta, mfn.,
l. [S. nigrhíta, BHS nirgrhíta] held down; restrained;
reproved; refuted; DI 8,15 (aropito te vado -o tvam asi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niggahíto si); A V 189,8 (Anatha-
pil)<;iikena gahapatina -a ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niggahíta
ti); Th 126 (-o si paññaya, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee niggahíto);
Ja II 257,21 (ekapaden' eva vo bhante paribbajako -o ti);
VI 417,7 (so raja tena ativiya -o va, Be so; Se -o va
kujjhitva; Ce so atiniggal_lhanato kujjhitva; Ee wr so
atiniggal_lhanto); 493,25 (so devataya niggahíto hutva, Ee
so, prob. wr; Be, Ce devatadhiggahito; Se devata-
viggahito); Spk III 54,17 (kaci kilesa -a va honti, Be, Se
so; Ce jívitakilesa -a; Ee jívitakilesa niggahíta); Nidd-a I
234,4 (parajita ca ti -a ca); As 28,34 (ettakenapi paravadí
-o hoti); Kv-a l3,1s (sakena matena --tta suniggahito ca
bhavasi); Mhv 5:3 (tehi sari.gítikarehi therehi ...
niggahíta papabhikkhil); - aniggahita, aniggahíta, mfn.,
not refuted; A I 175,24 (maya dhammo desito aniggahito
547 niggamana
asari.kiliqho ... , Be, Se so; Ce, E e aniggahíto; Mp II
277,19: aññehi ... niggahetu111 asakkul_leyyo); Ps II
132,11;- dunniggahita, dunniggahíta, mfn., wrongly or
incorrectly refuted; not properly reproved; Kv 3,10 (ese
ce dunniggahite, Be, Se so; Ee dunniggahíte); -
suniggahita, suniggahíta, mfn., well held; properly
refuted or reproved; suniggahita111 niggal_lhati, holds
down or refutes or reproves well or properly; Vin V
133,7 (paccatthike sahadhammena suniggahita111
niggal_lhati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce suniggahíta111): MI 134,18
(alagadd~ . . . ajapadena dal_lgena suniggahit~
niggal_lheyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee suniggah1ta111); Ja VI
439,3 (idani ma111 kasma pucchasí ti eva111 suniggahit~
niggal_lhi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee suniggahít~ niggahi);
Kv 2,26 (atha ta111 niggal_lhama suniggahito ca hosi, Be,
nasalised vowel; Abh 1115 (niggahlte ... bindu);
Sp 1399,19* (garuk~ lahuka111 ca niggahít~, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se -a111) = Sv 177 ,2* (Be, Ce, E e so; Se -a111);
Sp 1399,3o ( -an ti y~ karal_lani niggahetva avissajjetva
avivatena mukhena sanunasik~ katva vattabba111, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee anunasika111,); 1400,14 (-e kattabbe
vimuttan ti); Sadd 606,17 (a111 i111 um iti ya111 sarato
par~ suyyati ta111 niggahít~, Ee so); 608,8
(niggahítasari.khatassa anusvarassapi); 628,23
(niggahít~ vaggakkhare pare yathasaka111 vaggant~
va pappoti); 632.12; - -' -agama, m., the insertion of a
nasal; Sadd 521,2; 630,7; 826,25; fpp
(a) niggahetabba, mfn., A III 435,7 (citta111
niggahetabba111); Ja IV 113,28 (bhikkhuna nama
uppannuppanna kilesa niggahetabba va); Kv 2,25;
Mil 186,7 (coro pana bhante Nagasena niggal_lhantena
kath~ niggahetabbo ti); Spk II 30,29 (so kasma id~
pucchatí ti na niggahetabbo); Th-a III 155,4 (cittass' eva
niggahetabbata111 dasseti); - neg. aniggahetabba, mfn.,
Kv-a 14,14; (b) niggal_lhitabba, mfn., Ja 1 177,15' (rajilhi
nama cora niggal)hitabba no acora); Sp 135,12 (aya111
vinetabbo niggal_lhitabbo ti); Ps II 93,24; Mp III 413,14
(yasmi111 samaye citt~ niggal_lhitabban ti; ad A III
2
435,7: eds niggahetabba111); (e) niggayha , mfn.; -
suniggayha, mfn., easily refuted; Mp II 275,23
(suniggayha, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se sunnigahita); - caus.
aor. 3 sg. niggahayi, Ap 354,18 (bhate e' eva balatthe ca
ari111 niggahayí tada, Ce so; Be, Se niggahayi; Ee
niggahayi111).
2
niggatika, mfn. [ni 2 + gati + ka ], ill-fated, unfortunate;
Ja III 538,14 (eko -o dughatapaso, Ee so, perhaps wr;
Be, Ce, Se nikkarul_liko); IV 48,23 (are -a, Ce, Ee so; Be
nikatika; Se omits); V 413,4 (ye anatha -a tiracchana
viya ko1arukkhe vasi111su) = Sv 673,10 = Spk I 68,17 (Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nigatika) = Dhp-a IIl 255,11.
niggantha, se e sv nigal_ltha.
niggandha, mfn., see sv gandha 1.
niggama, m. [S. nirgama], departure; outlet, exit;
Sadd 885,19* (níharal_le avaral_le niggamadisu dissati
nísaddo iti ... niggamane niyyanika111);- ifc see jala-.
niggamana, n. [S. nirgamana], l. (i) going out, leaving;
coming out, emerging; conclusion; Kv 4,19 ( -catukk~,
0
Be, Ee so; Ce nigamana-; Se niggama-); Sp 1022,31
(nikkhamana111 -~ apavahan~ kareyyan ti); Sv 94,31
niggamissati
(rañño -~ bhavissat! ti ev~ rajunarp pavasagaman~
vyakaroti); PsI 28,13 (pa~havito uppattirp va -arp va, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nigamanarp); Spk I 53,6 (etassa evarüpassa
sañrassa kath~ -arp bhavissati); Th-all 151,26
(gajanirodhato va -aya dvaravivar<UJ~ alabhamano
hatthl viya); Saddh 172 (tamha kath~ -~ siya); -
(ii) the way of leaving, escaping from, s~sara; ?
(cf Abh 988: bhavaniggamane ... nissar<UJ~); Sv 508,32
(tesarp hegha vuttan~ dvinnarp bhikkhunarp -~ ca
nam~ ca dasseturp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nigaman~;
Sv-p~ II 148,16: -an ti nissar<UJ~, Ee so; Be nigamanan
ti); 1020,19 (ekassa bhikkhuno -~ catusacca-
kammanhan~ kathitarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nigaman~;
Sv-p~ III 306,5: vagato niggacchati etena ti -~. Be so;
Ee nigacchati) f. Ps IV 104,19; Pa~is-a 538,5 (nissarai_lan
ti -~); 561,5 (tedhatulokato niyyanaya -aya
sarpvattanti); Vibh-a 251,25 (id~ vai_li_lavasena
abhinivi~~assa bhikkhuno yava arahatta -~. Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee nigamanarp); - 2. excretion; ? Spk II 51,21
(bhesajjamaiJq~ . . . pivantanarp pamai_larp va
uggaman~ va -arp va na janama ti asanka hoti); -
aniggamana, n., not going away; Vism 484,6
(anagamanato -ato ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anigamanato) =
Vibh-a 48,2;- dunniggamana, mfn., hard to get out of;
difficult to escape; PsI 71,24 (sa cayarp dinhi -' -aghena
gahanarp); Saddh 173;- see also nigamana.
niggamissati,fi¡t. 3 sg. ofniggacchati qv.
niggayha\ ind., absol. ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggayha2 , mfn.,fpp ofniggai_lhati qv.
niggayhati, pass. pr. 3 sg. ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggalati\ mfn. [ni 2 + galati 1; cf S. nirgalita], flows out;
Pv 40:3 (rudato ca me assuka -anti, Be Ce, Ee so; Se
durato ca me assukani galanti);- see also niggirai_la.
niggalati2 , pr. 3 sg. [prob. = nigilati qv; cf S. nigalati; or
possibly = ni 2 + gilati, cf S. nirglfi_la, BHS nirgarati],
swallows; or vomits, spits out; Ja IV 392,2
(cai_lqalabhasaya -a -a ti aha; cf39l,26foll.: so tassa
aditta-ayogulo vi ya mukharp qahi ... ).
niggaJa, mfn., see sv gala 1.
niggaha, m. [S. nigraha], l. restraining, control,
suppression; taking hold of; coercían; Ja IV 366,4·: (te
purisa aggahetva na gamissama ti -arp katva gaiJhanti
yeva); Sp 1262,16 (t~ pi tesu bhikkhusu ekassa -ena
datva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be etassa -ena; Sp-~ [Be] III 407,19:
-ena datva ti anicchantarp pi -ena sampa~iccchapetva;
Vmv [Be] II 250,22: durarp ganturp anicchantassa -ena
sampa~icchapetva datva); Pj II 317,18 (sampiyen' eva
aññamaññarp pemen' eva . . . na appiyena -en a ca ti
vutt~ hoti); - ifc see kodha-, raga-; - 2. (occasion
for) reft¡tation; reprimand; chastisement; punishment;
Vin I 359,17* (paccatthika yena vajanti -arp); III 2!,18
(dummali.kun~ puggalan~ -aya); A I 174,15 (ay~
kho me bhikkhave tesu samaiJabrahmai_lesu ev~vadlsu
ev~dit!hlsu pa~hamo sahadhammiko -o hoti); Ja I
355,18 (ath' assa raja dosanumparp -arp akasi);
VI 371 ,18* (-ena amittanarp mittan~ paggahena ca);
Nidd I 164,22 (kath~ -arp karissami kath~
pa~ikamm~ karissami); Ap 43,5 (-e pa~ikamme ca
~hana~hane ca kovido ); Kv 1,9 (ajanahi -~;
Kv-a !0,29joll.: sakavadivacan~ ... tarp -~ dos~
548 niggiral}a
aparadh~ sampa~icchahl ti attho); 4,I6joll. (ye kate -e
se -e dukkate sukate pa~ikamme); Mil28,33
(pai_lqitanarp ... sallape ... -o pi kayirati pa~ikamm~ pi
kayirati); 94,25 (tesu me pañhesu cakkhurp dehi
paravadanarp -aya ti); 185,1 (-o nama bhante Nagasena
hatthacchedo padacchedo vadho bandhan~ ... );
Sp 1412,7 (mülaya pa~ikassanakammavasena -o
veditabbo); Sv 524,24 (papabhikkhunarp vinayadharehi
-~ karapenti); Spk II 237,7 (ayarp balo mahajanarp
vihe~heti karissami 'ssa -an ti); Mp II 276,5 (bhagava
tesarp yeva laddhirp gahetva tesarp -arp aropeti);
Mhv 4:55 (-~ papabhikkhun~ ... mahathera akarpsu
te); 36:110 (papakanarp -ena sodhento sasanarp tu so);
112 (katvana -arp tesarp parat!re khipapayi);
Vin-vn 3008;- aniggaha, mfn., not subject to control;
unrestrained; Ja V 435,23* (narisu anekacittasu -asu ca;
437,22·: -asu ti niggahena vineturp asakkui_leyyasu); -
dunniggaha, mfn. and m., l. (mfn.) hard to control;
Dhp 35 (-assa ... cittassa; Dhp-a I 295,10: cittarp nam'
etarp dukkhena niggayhatl ti -arp); Ja 1 312,12; -
2. (m.) a poor, invalid, refi¡tation; Kv-a 14,I; -
saniggaha, mfn., vulnerable to reft¡tation; Mill19,I4;
224,25 (savajjarp bhaveyya t~ yeva kar<UJ~ sados~
-arp); - suniggaha, m., a good, valid, refutation;
Kv-a 16,13 (paravadissa sakavadina kato niggaho -o).
niggahal}a\ mfn., see sv gahaiJa 1.
niggahal}a2 , niggahana, n., see sv niggaiJhana.
niggahi, aor. 3 sg. ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggahissati,ft¡t. 3 sg. ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggahetabba, mfn.,fpp ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggahetmp, inf ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggahetva, absol. ofniggaiJhati qv.
niggahesi, aor. 3 sg. ofniggai_lhati qv.
niggahessati,fut. 3 sg. ofniggai_lhati qv.
niggathaka, mfn. [from ni 2 + gatha], without verses; not
containing verse; Sp 28,13 (-arp sutt~) = Ps II 106,14;
Sv 904,18 (0 -tta); Pa!is-a 612,19 (-o hi suttanto keval~
atthassa vyakaraiJato veyyakaraiJarp nama).
niggaha\ mfn., see sv gaha2.
niggaha 2 , m. [cf S. nigraha], coercían; chastisement;
0
-karaka, m., one who coerces; an oppressor; Ja IV
366,3· (niggahakasama ti -ehi balisadhakarajapurisehi
sama, Se so; Be, Ce niggaha-; Ee niggahaka-,prob. wr).
niggahaka, m. [cfS. nigrahaka], one who reprimands,
chastises; who coerces, enforces; Sn 118 (yo hanti
parirundhati gamani nigamani ca -o samaññato; Pj II
178,31 foll.: gamanigamanagarabadhako ti loke vidito,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -ghatako); Ja IV 362,18* (0 -sama;
366,rfoll.: niggahakarakehi balisadhakarajapurisehi
sama, yatha te purisa aggahetva na gamissama ti
niggah~ katva gaiJhanti yeva tatha game va vane va
aladdha may~ maranta pi na unhahissama ti
upavasanti, Be, Ce so; Se so; Ee niggahakakarakehi,
prob. wr; Se niggahakarakehi); Dhp-a I 82,4 (tada
hatthimarako Devadatto ahosi tassa -o hatthinago aham
eva ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niggahako); Cp-a 312,2 (-an~
dhammen' eva niggaiJhanako yava-d-eva akusala
vu~~apetva kusale patinhapanaya, Ce, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be, Se niggaharahan~).
niggiral}a, n. [cf S. nigirai_la and nirgalita], flowing out,
niggilati
oozing; ? Sadd 429,Io (gira -e, -aq¡ paggharaifaq¡); -
se e al so nigaraifa, nigga1ati 1.
niggilati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nigi1ati.
niggiliina, mfn., see sv gi1ayati.
niggul}a, mfn., see sv gul)a.
niggul}thipupphaip in Ee at Ap 263,2o is wr for niggul)<).i-
(Be, Ce so).
niggui}¡JI, f [S. nirgul)<).'í; S. lex. nirgul)!i], a plant; SAF:
Chinese chaste-tree, Vitex negundo L.; Abh 574
(niggul)<).itthi sinduvaro ); Ja VI 535,12* H siriniggul)<).i,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niggaif<).i siriniggaif<).l; 535,27·:
pakatiniggul)<).i e' eva kiijaniggul)<).i ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
. -niggaif<).l) f. Ap 362,24; Ap 205,8 (0 -pupphaq¡ paggayha)
f. 263,2o (Be, Ce so; E e niggul)!hi-; Se nigul)<).i-); 328,25
(-iyo bahii, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nigul)<).iyo); Vism 257,22
(pihakan ti .. . vai)I)ato nllaf)1 o -pupphaVaifl)aql) =
Vibh-a 240,30 (eds niggul)<).ika-).
niggui}¡Jikii,f [niggul)<).l +ka], a plant, Vitex negundo L.;
Vibh-a 240,30 (pihakan ti . . . vai)I)ato nllaf)1
0
-pupphaVaifl)aqJ.; = Vism 257,22: eds niggul)<).i- ).
niggumba, mfn., see sv gumba.
nigguhati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niguhati.
nigghiita 1, m. [S. nirghata], whirlwind, storm; - ifc see
vajira-.
2
nigghiita 2 , m., see sv nighata
2
nigghiitaka, mfn. [nigghata + ka2 ], removing, destroying;
- ifc see roga-.
nigghiitana, n. [cf S. nirghatana], destroying; rooting out;
- ifc see ki1esa-, taifha-.
nigghiiti(n), mfn., see sv nighati(n).
nigghiiteti, pr. 3 sg., caus. of nihanati qv.
1 ghaq¡santi; Ce ku<).<).e pi nakhaq¡ ghaq¡santi; Se ku<).<).e pi
nigghosa\ mfn., see sv ghosa .
nigghosa 2 , m. [S. nirgho~a], noise, sound; speech, what
someone says; Abh 128; DI 50,7 (kathaf)1 hi nama tava
mahato bhikkhusaiJ.ghassa . . . n' eva khipitasaddo
bhavissati ... na -o ti; Sv 151,8: -o ti kathasallapa-
nigghoso); SI 190,17 (sa1ikay' iva -o); Sn 818 (sutva
paresaq¡ -af)1 maiJ.ku hoti tathavidho; Nidd I 150,z3foll.:
tesaq¡ vacanaq¡ vyappathaf)1 desanaq¡ anusasanaq¡
anusi!!hif!1 sutva; Pj II 537,2: upajjhayadinaf)1
nindavacanaf)1); Ja II 8,20* (sutva sihassa -aq¡);
VI 133,21* (eko ahosi -o bhesma accuggato saddo);
497,8* (yada sossasi -af)1 sandamanaya sindhuya);
Ap 392,5 (ratanani pajjotif)1SU -o asi tavade); -
0
-nicchiiral}ii,f, uttering a noise; Ud-a 67,22 (-ayaq¡ Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr 0 -niccharaifayaq¡);- anigghosa, mfn.,
free from noise, quiet; Bv-a 100,8 (nissadda ti asadda
-a).
2 2
nigghosayiipsu, aor. 3 pl. [of ni + ghusati ; cf S.
nirghu~!a], cried aloud, shouted; Ja VI 588,!7
(mukhamaiJ.ga1ika maiJ.ga1ani nigghosayirp.su, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ghosayirp.su).
nigrodha, m. [S. nyagrodha], l. the banyan or Indian fig-
tree; SAF: Ficus benghalensis L.; Abh 551 (-o tu va!o
bhave); 1042; Vin IV 35,4 (khandhabijaf)1 nama assattho
-o pilakkho udumbaro ... ); D II 4,15 (Kassapo
bhikkhave bhagava . . . -assa mii1e abhisambuddho );
S IV 160,18 (khirarukkho assattho va -o va ... ); Sn 272
(snehaja attasambhiita -asseva khandhaja); Pv 38:9
(addasa -af)1 . . . chayasampannaq¡ nllabbhavai)I)a-
549 nighm;uJu
sadisaq¡); Ja III 397,22 (nagaraja ... -af)1 ve!hetva gaifhi);
IV 352,20* (-o kii)1 aparajjhati, Ee so; Be parajjhati; Ce,
Se -e kif)1 aparajjhatha); VI 526,22* (-af)1 va pathe jataq¡
sitacchayaq¡ manoramaq¡); Ap 344,27 (virii1ha-
miilasantiinaf)1 -am iva); Sp 957,24 (tassa kira -assa
chayaya ajapalaka gantva nisidanti ten' assa
ajapa1anigrodho tv eva namaf)1 udapadi); Ap-a 264,9
( -rukkhassa khandho pakatiya seto hoti pattani nllani
0
pakkani rattani); Mhv 10:89 (karayi ... Vessavaifassa
-aq¡); - 2. a fathom; Abh 1042 (va!avyamesu -o); -
0
-parimai}¡Jala, mfn. [cfS. nyagrodhaparimal)<).a1a],
circular as a banyan (one whose body and outstretched
arms make a circle like a banyan); peifectly
proportioned; D II 18,!4 (ayaf)1 hi deva kumaro -o
yavatakvassa kayo tavatakvassa vyamo; Sv 449,Izfoll.:
yatha . . . samakhandhasakho nigrodho dighato pi
vittharato pi ekappamai)O va hoti evaf)1 kayato pi
vyamato pi ekappamai)O ); M II 136,26 (-o kho pana so
bhavaf)1 Gotamo); Ja II 152,2* (catuppadayaf)1 puriso -o;
152,5·: sujato nigrodho viya parimal)<).a1o); Sadd 762,13.
nigha, m.n., see sv nigha.
nighmpsa, m. [cf S. nighar~a], l. rubbing, grinding;
impact; As 263,16 (kii!af!1 adhikaral)if)1 gaifhati -o balava
hoti); - ifc see pa!ighanana-; - 2. examination;
definition; limit; Ps IV 53,25 (nevasaññanasaññayatana-
1abhino adhimanikassa -af)1 dassento; Ps-! [Be] III
248,13: -an ti ettako ayan ti paricchedan ti attho); 54,4
(kh11fasavassa -aq¡ dassento ).
nighaipsati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nighar~ati], l. rubs, rubs against;
grinds; wears away; Vin II 133,25 (bhikkhii ... mukhena
pi nakhaf)1 chindanti ku<).<).e pi -anti, Ee so; Be
nakhaf)1 ghaq¡senti); Ja II 418,12* (yava yava -ama
bhiyyo vodayate IDaifi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se yavata IDaifÍI)1
ghaf)1sama so); Mp V 89,9 (ta aññamaññaf)1 -anti) =
Ps 11 259,17 (Be, Ce, Ee nighaf)1senti; Se nigghaf)1senti);
part.pr. nighaq¡santa, mf(-anfi)n., Vism 120,20
(kumbhadasiyo pi gha!ehi -antiyo gacchanti); Dhp-a I
396,10 (gaviyo aññamaññaq¡ -antiyo aqhaq¡su); - 2.
tries, examines;- pass. part.pr. nighaq¡siyamana, mfn.,
Ja III 75,2 (taq¡ hi -iyamanaq¡ upaparikkhiyamanaf)1);
Sp 1368,4 (puna pucchiyamano -iyamano, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee omits);- pp nighaipsita, mfn., rubbed; wom away;
ground; Ps II 217,2o (ñillfaphasukaya --nhanaf)1); -
sunighaf)1sita, mfn., well or properly ground; Ps II 325,22
(silaya ca sunighaq¡sitaq¡).
nighaipsana, n. [S. nighar~ana], rubbing; examination;
Sv 879,13 (eko sihanade anuyogaq¡ dapiyamano datuf)1
sakkoti -aq¡ khamati dhamamanaq¡ niddosajatariipaq¡
viya adhikataraf)1 sobhati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigghaf)1sanaf)1) = Spk III 209,7; Mil215,4 (majjana-
nighaf)1sanaparisodhanena); As 319,14 (rukkhanaq¡
aññamaññanighaq¡sanagal)<).ikako!anadisaddo, Ce so; Be
-ghaif!ika-; Ee rukkhadinaf)1; Se annamannaq¡
0
-galf<).ikakoqanadisaddo);- ifc see pa!ighaqana-.
nighaññasi, see sv nihanati.
nighal}te in Ee and nighaif<).e in Se at Ap 502,25 are wrr
for nighaif<).umhi (Be, Ce so).
nighai}¡JU, m. [S. nighaif!U], a collection of words;
lexicography; Abh 111; Ap 502,25 (niruttiya ca kusalo
nighara
-umhi visarado, Be, Ce so; Ee wr nighru:tte ca; Se
nighal)qe ca); Mill78,I6 ( ... itihasatrl puriil)aJT! -u
ketubhaJT! ... ); Sv 247,21/oll. (saha -una... -u ti
namanighru:t<;lu rukkhadinaJT! vevacanappakasakaJT!
satthaJT!; Sv-pt I 379,13: vacaniyavacakabhavena atthaJT!
saddaJT! ca nikhaqati bhindati vibhajja dasseti ti
nikhru:ttu, sa eva idha khakarassa ghakiiraJT! katva -u ti
vutta, Be so; Ee omits nikhaqati; = Sp-t [Be] I 121.3:
... nikhal)qeti bhindati vibhajja dasseti ti nikhal)tu ... ) =
Mp Il 26l,Is; Ap-a 219,31 (-uya saha vattati ti
sanighagqu, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nigal)<;iuya ...
sanigru:t<;lu); Sadd 622,23 (gho khassa -u);
sanighal}<}u, mfn., together with lexicography;
Ap-a219,3I (-u, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr sanigru:t<;lu);-
--ketubha, mfn., together with lexicography and ritual
science; DI 88,5 (til)l)aJT! vedanaJT! paragu
--ketubhiinatrl) f. A I 163,12 f. Snp. 105,1; Mil10,I3 (tisu
vedesu --ketubhesu);- --saketubha, mfn., id., Sn 1020;
Ap 160,3 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr sanighru:t<;lhu-;
Ap-a 219,32: --saketubhe vedattaye);- sanighal)<;iuna in
Ee at Sv 247,21 is wr for saha nighru:t<;luna (Be, Ce, Se
so).
nighara, n. [ni + ghara ?], a town; ? Sadd 922,29
(Pupphavatiya nagaratrl Pupphavatiya -aJT! . . . VaJ:~l)a­
bhedo 'yatrl).
nighata\ m. [S. nighata], a blow, a stroke; ifc see
vajira-.
2 2
nighiita , nigghata , m. [cf S. nighata, nirghata],
l. removal; destruction; MI 430,15 (santi sokaparideva-
dukkhadomanassupayasa yesahaJT! dinhe va dhamme
-aJT~ paññapemi; Ps III 142,26: -an ti upaghatatrl
vinasaJT!); Ap 43,21 (nigghatatthatrl amittiinatrl, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se nigghatatthatrl; Ap-a 284,28: patirajunatrl
patibahanatthatrl); Nett 189,2o (vasanabhagiyassa
suttassa -aya); - 2. depression; Pj II 541,29 (cittassa
ugghatatrl -atrl ca papul)anto) = Nidd-a I 287,3 (Ce, Ee
citta-ugghatatrl nigghiitatrl va; Be citta-ugghatanighataJT~;
Se citta-ugghatanigghatatrl);- see also nigghataka.
nighati,f [cfnighati], depression;- ifc see ugghati-.
2 ayatrl atta ... kammanaJT! vipakatrl patisaJT!vedeti so kho
nighati(n), nigghati(n), mfn. [from nighata ], being
depressed; Pj II 541,29 (cittassa ugghataJT! nighatatrl ca
papuganto ugghati -I ca hoti ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ugghatinighatima va, prob. wr) = Nidd-a 287,4 (Be -i;
Ce, Ee, Se nigghati) .
nighateti,pr. 3 sg., caus. ofnihanatiqv.
niñka, nikka, nika, m. [S. nyañku], a kind of deer or
antelope; Abh 619 (ruru railku ca -o ca);
0
-sükara, m. or -a, m.pl., a kind of deer; or deer and
pigs; Ja V 406,7* (el)eyya ca varaha ca gaJ:~ino -a, Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se nika-) =VI 277,24* (Ce, Ee so; Be nika-; Se
nikka-; 277,2s·: varaha ti eka migajati, tatha gagino
e' eva-a, Ce, E e so; Be nika-; Se nikka-).
nicaya, m. [ts], piling up, accumulation; store; provisions;
S I 72,20* (tasma kareyya kalyal)aJT! -atrl samparayikaJT!);
Cp 1:4:7 (na pi natthi -o mayi; Cp-a 44,3 foil.: mama
samipe dhananicayo dhanasañgaho napi natthi,
sallekhavuttisamru:to viya asailgaho pi na homi ti attho,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee dhanasañgaho pi natthi, wr);
Vism 630,Is (imassa namarupassa uppattito pubbe
anuppannassa rasi va -o va natthi);- se e also necayika.
550 nicea
1 1
nicayitva, ind. [absol. of ni + -/ci ], covering; piling up;
Ap 582,7 (catujjatena gandhena -itva tam ighakaJT!, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se temayitva);- see also nicita, nicetabba.
nica in Ee at Sv 450,Io is wr fornica (Be, Ce, Se so).
1
nicita, mfn. [pp of ni 1 + -/ci ; ts], heaped up; thick;
covered with; full (of); Abh 701 (acitatrl -atrl); Ja VI
47,7* (Vedehe phite -e, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niccite; 51,2s·:
dhaññanicayadisampanne); Ap 102,ts (hiraññaJT! tassa
-aJT~ kotisatam anappakatrl, Be so; Ce hiraññassa ca
-atrl; Se kotisatatrl pi anappakaJT!; Ee hiraññassa ca -atrl
kotisatan anappakaJT!); 497,22 (avocatrl mamanucchavatrl
kal)ikiiratrl va -atrl cittaJT! gathapadaJT! ahatrl, Be, Se so;
Ce khru:tikaJT! thanaracitaJT!; Ee kru:tl)ikaraparicitatrl);
Pv-a221,I6 (ussannatrl uparlipari -an ti, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce ni visitan ti); Thi-a 260,27 (ghanabhavena -e ... kese);
1
- ifc see kru:ttaka- (sv kal)taka ); - see also nicayitva,
nicetabba.
1
nicinitva, ind. [absol. of ni + -Id; cf S. niciketi],
observing; Nidd-a I 205,9 (nicchinitva ti ... nicinitva
viccinitva ti pi patho ).
1
nicintayitva, ind. [absol. of*ni + cinteti], thinking about,
considering; Ja VI 352,s• (rahasi gata atthatrl
nicintayitva, Be, Ce Ee so; Se atthani cintayitva).
nicula, m. [ts], a free; SAF: lndian oak, Barringtonia
racemosa (L.) Spreng.; Abh 563 (-o mucalindo); Mp III
323,4 (0 -vane ti muca1indavane, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
niceluvane ti, prob. wr) f. 366,22; Ud-a 100,5 (mucalindo
vuccati niparukkho, so -o ti pi vuccati); Sadd 922,28
ca -rukkho ).
1 1
nicetabba, mfn. [fpp ofni + ci ; cfS. niceya], to be piled
up; to be stored; Th-a IIl 39,13 (dhanatrl sannicayaJT!
sabbaso -atrl nidhetabbaJT! karonti); - see also
nicayitva, nicita.
nicelu, see sv nicu1a.
nicca, mfn. and n. [S. nitya], l. (mfn.) constant,
permanent, enduring; invariable; (iic often: constantly,
always); Abh 709 (dhuvo ca sassato -o); DI 18,35 (yo
kho so bhavatrl brahma mahabrahma abhibhu . . . so -o
dhuvo sassato aviparil)amadhammo); MI 8,25 (yo me
pana me ayatrl atta -o dhuvo sassato
aviparil)amadhammo; PsI 71,w: -o ti uppadavaya-
rahito); SI 22,17* (na santi kama manujesu -a); III 23,17
(aniccasambhuta bhikkhave vedana kuto -a bhavissati);
85,24 (anicca va kira bho mayaJT! samana niccamha ti
amaññimha); Th 121 (natthi koci bhavo -o sailkhara
vapi sassat:a); Ja V 180,14' (sakalasmiJT! pi lokasannivase
ekasailkharo pi -o nama natthi ti); Vibh 335,38 (atthanaJT!
etaJT! anavakaso Yatrl ditthisampanno puggalo kañci
sañkharatrl -ato upagaccheyya); Mil268,6 (sañkhiiriinatrl
0
-ta natthi); Vism 509,2 (nibbanassa 0 -tta); Spk I 30,3o
(ayatrl baladevata imatrl sampattiJT! -atrl acalatrl
maññati); Mp II 3,1 (puthujjano hi Yatrl yaJT! -atrl
sukhaJT! atta ti gaJ:~hati taJT! taJT! ariyasavako aniccatrl
dukkhaJT! anatta ti gru:thanto); Kv-a 90,27 (cattari saccani
-ani asailkhatani ti 1addhi seyyatha PubbaseliyanaJT!, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee omit); Sadd 810,26 (Vasinhadisu SaJ:~e -a
vuddhi: Vasettho); - acc. niccatrl, adv., perpetually,
constantly, always; Abh 41 (satatatrl -atrl); D III 185,9*
(na ... -atrl mattena sogqena sakka avasitUJT! gharatrl);
nicca
S I 205,3* (posassa -a111 sucigavesino ); A III 38,13* (-a111
atapi ussuko ); Dhp 23 (te jhayino satatika -a111
d~haparakkama); 146 (ko nu haso kim anando -a111
pajjalite sati); Ja I 290,2 (eva111 ki!anto pana raja -~
jinati); V 432,17 (kimpakkarukkho, so -am eva phalati
var_¡1_1adisampanno ca hoti); Ap 326,8 (vasami -~
sukhito anasavo ); Sp 270,3 (pittummattako -am eva
ummattako hoti pakatisañña111 na labhati); 811,8 (yagu-
adini hi -~ pi bhuñjitu111 vagati); Ps V 94,22 (kil11 -am
eva parassa dasakamm~ karissatha udahu dasabhavato
muccitu111 icchatha ti); Mhv 18:14 (-a111 vasati sa111yata);
Sadd 142,6 (keci [sadda] upayogavacanena saddhi111 -~
vattanti); 617,18 (ekasma idhassa dhassa do -~); -
2. (n.) what is constant or pennanent; permanency;
Patis 1 109,12 (cakkhu111 suññ~ attena va attaniyena va
-ena va dhuvena va sassatena va ... ; Patis-a 339,29:
bhailga111 atikkamitva titthantassa kassaci abhavato -ena
ca suññ~);- o• -aggini(n) or o• -aggini, mfn., having a
pennanent, constant, Jire; S 1 169.22* (ajjhattam ev'
ujjalayami joti111 -i niccasamahitatto; Spk 1 236,26foll.:
niccal11 pajjalitaggi);- 0tuka, mfn., (flourishing) at all
0
seasons; Ja V 168,27* (-a dharayanti phalani; 169,6·:
ambarukkha . . . -a ti channa111 pi utüna111 anurüpehi
pupphaphalehi samannagata ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ambarukkhe); - 0 -kapparp, adv., practically always;
constantly; M 1 249,31 (yena suda111 -a111 -a111 viharami
ti; quoted Sadd 551,2o: [kappasaddassa] ... kalo [attho]);
S IV 59,9 (id~ pi tassa bhagavato sasan~ -a111
sadhuk~ manasikatabba111; Spk II 372,17: -an ti
niccakala111); Th-a I 86,3o;- 0 -kalarp, adv., at all times,
always; Ja 1 478,29 (ki111 pana ekadivasam eva ma111s~
khaditukamo si udahu -an ti); II 53,6 (te ubho pi
ahinakula -~ kalaha111 karonti); Mil 9,24;
0
-kalikarp, adv., id.; Ap !8,15; 325,31 (madhuvasso me
vassate -~);- 0 -kale, adv., id., Ja IIl 475,Io (-e taya
yeva saddhi111 abhiramanto); Spk I 205,31;
1 sabbasaii.khata111); 566,18 (sabbassa lokassa sadevakassa
0
-nava, mfn. [nicca + nava ], constantly new; always
like a newcomer; Vism 68,23* (candüpamo -o kulesu);
632,36 (-a va hutva saii.khara ughahanti);
1 paticcasamuppanno ... ); Mp IV 101,14 (aya111 pi saggo
0
-navaka, mfn. [nicca + navaka ], constantly new;
always like a newcomer; S II 198,1 (candupama
bhikkhave kulani upasailkamatha . . . -a kulesu
appagabbha; Spk II 166,6: -a ti nicc~ navaka va,
agantukasadisa eva hutva ti attho; Ee niccanaviya ti)
quoted Mii389,II (Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nicc~ naviya);
Vism 68,19 (--ta); Spk II 169,II (--ttena); Ap-a 193,7
(candopamo -o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -vanako); -
0
0
-nimitta, n., the attribution of pennanence; Vism 695,7
(aniccanupassana va, taya -assa pahana111 hoti); Ps II
355,8 (vipassana -a111 sukhanimitt~ attanimitta111
ugghateti ti); Patis-a 553,18 (aniccanupassanavasena -~
na karoti); - 0 -phalika, mfn., bearing fruit constantly,
always in fruit; Kv 607,4 (-a rukkha hontu, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce 0 -phalita); - 0
-phalita, mfn., bearing fruit
constantly, always in fruit; Ja V 425,17 (visarukkho viya
-ayo ti); 432,19' (eta pi rüpadivasena -a rama1_1iya viya
khayanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -phalitaya); Sp 128,18
(--maharukkho ); - o -bhattaka, n., constant food, food
given always; Vin IV 78,28 (-e, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
0
-bhatte); 272,4foll. (-~ ucchindi111su ... -~
551 ni cea
paghapesmp., Ce so; Ee -bhattik~. prob. wr; Be, Se
0
0
-bhatt~); -
0
-bhattika, mfn., taking food (there)
always; Vin III 237,2 (Upanando ... aññatarassa kulassa
kulüpako hoti -o); IV 66,11 (Thullananda ... -a); Pj II
244,17 (-o bhikkhu);- -a111 in Ee at Vin IV 272,4foll.
is prob. wr for o -bhatta111 (Be, Se so) or o -bhattaka111 (Ce
so); - anicca, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) impennanent; not
enduring; transient; not invariable; -~. adv., not
always; occasionally; V in I 14,5 foll. (ta111 ki111 maññatha
bhikkhave rüp~ nicc~ va-~ va ti, -~ bhante, y~
pananicca111 dukkh~ ta111 va sukh~ va ti, dukkh~
bhante, y~ pananicc~ dukkha111 vipari1_1amadharnma111
kall~ nu ta111 samanupassitu111 et~ mama eso 'ham
asmi eso me atta ti); D II 67,12 (so ditthe va dhamme
-~ sukhadukkhavoki1_11_1a111 uppadavayadhamma111
attan~ samanupassamano); MI 185,3o (tassa ...
bahiraya pathavidhatuya tava mahallikaya --ta
paññayissati ti); 500,21 (sukha pi ... vedana -a saii.khata
paticcasamuppanna khayadhamma ... ); A II 52,20* (-e
niccasaññino dukkhe ca sukhasaññino anattani ca atta ti
asubhe subhasaññino micchadighigata satta); S I 6,4* (-a
sabbasaii.khara uppadavayadhammino uppajjitva
nirujjhanti tes~ vüpasamo sukho ); 61,11 * (loke --ta111
ñatva); III 76,18 (ya111 kho bhikkhu -a111 tatra te chando
pahatabbo); IV 133,23foll. (bhikkhu cakkhu111 -an ti
passati rüpa -a ti passati cakkhuviññil.l_la111 -an ti passati
cakkhusamphasso -o ti passati); V 410,17 (brahma-
loko ... -o adhuvo sakkayapariyapanno); Th 183 (-ani
gahakani tattha tattha punappun~ gahakar~
gavesanto); 1121 (ma111 -amhi cale niyuñjasi); Ja III
159,3· (ida111 pana -~ hutva abhavadhamm~);
V 410,3* (saddha -a); Patis I 191,32foll. (ki111 -a111,
pañcakkhandha -a, ken' atthena -a, uppadavayaghena
-a); Ap 274,4 (saddam assosi satthuno --t~
kathentassa); 274,14 (--tam udahari, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
--vatthudahari); 534,16 (Gotami nidhana111 yati -a111
eso va dhammo yadida111 --ta); Vism 637,27 (aya111 kho
me obhaso uppanno, so kho panaya111 -o saii.khato
-o addhuvo); It-ai 179,31 (-a--tta dukkha dukkhatta
anatta ti); Pv-a 60,15 (ittaran ti na cirakalaghayi -~
vipari1_1amadhamm~); Patis-a 638,35 (--tta yeva
sukhena suñña); Sadd 810,28 (vuddhi -a);- 2. (n.) what
is impennanent; impennanence; Vism 290,5 foll.
(aniccanupassi ti . . . -an ti pañcakkhandha ...
uppadavayaññathattabhava, --ta ti tes~ yeva uppada-
vayaññathatt~ hutva abhavo va nibbattana111); -
-ánupassana,f, the looking on as impennanent; the
seeing impennanence; Patis I 10,16 (-anupassana
abhiññeyya); 169,17 (-anupassanaya ko adi ki111 majjhe
ki111 pariyosana111); Vism 628,37 (-ánupassana111
bhavento niccasañña111 pajahati); 629,19 (ya ca
-ánupassana ya ca animittanupassana ime dhamma
ekattha vyañjanam eva nana111); - -ánupassi(n), mfn.,
looking on as impennanent; seeing impermanence;
Vin Ili 71,10 (-ánupassi assissami ti sikkhati); MI 336,24
(sabbasaii.kharesu -ánupassino); S IV 211,28 (so kaye ca
sukhaya ca vedanaya -anupassi viharati); Vism 290,11;
- -' -antika, mfn., inherently or ultimately impennanent
niccalika
or transient; Vism 611,26 (ekekam khandhaJTI
-' -antikataya adi-antavantataya ca aniccato, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se anaccantikataya) t Nidd-a I 169,7 (--antikataya);
Ud-a315,I4 (-'-antikatta, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-' -antikatatta); Th-a III 4,26 (adimajjhantavantato
-' -antikato tavakalikato ... na nicca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
anaccantikato); Cp-a 319,15 (dilre pal).ina khittasara viya
sati pi cirappavattiyaJTI -' -antikataya patapariyosana);-
--dassavi(n), mfn., not always seeing; S III 1,15 (ahaJTI
asmi bhante jil).l).O vuddho . . . --dassavl kho panahai)1
bhante bhagavato manobhavanlyanaJTI ca bhikkhilnaJTI;
Spk II 249,24: --dassavl ti taya aturataya icchiticchita-
kkhal).e agantuf)1 asakkonto kadaci-d-eva ctanhuf!1
labhami, na sabbakalan ti attho).
niccatta!isa, mfn. [cf S. niscatvarif)1sa, "more than 40" ?],
a term of praise for an ascetic; (without 40 ? not being
40 ?); Sv 1039,21foll. (niddaso bhikkhu nibb!so nittii)1SO
-o nippaññaso bhikkhil ti ... titthiya ... vlsativassadikale
pi mataJTI [nigal).!haf)1] nibbiso nittif)1SO -o nippaññaso ti
vadanti) = Mp IV 7,25 foil.
niccalika, mfn. ffrom ni 2 + cala ?], unwavering, steady; ?
Ps II 252,33 (ekaccassa hi uggahitabuddhavacanaf)1
dhataf)1 pagUI).aJTI -af)1 na hoti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
niccalitaJTI) = Mp III 28,18 (eds -aJT~).
niccaleti, pr. 3 sg. [cfkhaleti, Pkt l).iccalai ?], cleanses,
gets clean;? Sp 85l,I5foll. (samal).ero bhattaJTI
pacitukamo tal).~ule dhovitva niccaletuf)1 na sakkoti,
bhikkhuna tal).~ule ca bhajanaJTI ca pa!iggahetva tal).~ule
dhovitva niccaletva bhajanaJTI uddhanaJTI aropetabbo
aggi na katabbo; Sp-! [Be] III 74,13: niccaletuf)1 na
sakkoti ti niccaletva sakkhara apanetuf)1 na sakkoti).
niccitta, mfn., see sv citta1.
niccittaka, nicittaka, mfn. [ni 2 (or possibly ni 1) + citta 1 +
ka2], thoughtless; without understanding; Ja II 298,20
(ayaJTI -o vanaro vinicchayakammaf)1 katUI)1 na
sakkhissatl ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nicittako).
niccuddo in Ee at Vin II 251 ,9* is wr for nicchuddho (Be,
Ce so).
nicchamanaka, mfn. [na2 + part.pr. of icchati 1 + ka2 ?],
unwilling, reluctant; Mhv 36:118 (pi tu sarirasakkare
niggantuf)1 -e dunhamacce niggahetuf)1; or read
'nicchamanake);- see also anicchamanaka.
nicchaya, m. [S. niscaya], Abh 159 (adhimokkho tu -o);
171 (-o nil).l).ayo); l. ascertainment; conVlctwn,
certainty; Vism 494,9* (jati-ad!naf)1 -a); Pa!is-a 464,s
(sammasambuddho bhagava ti -a~T~ gata, nibbematika ti
attho); Sadd 363,19* (-a~T~ bho sul).atha me); - -aJT~,
-ena, -a, adv., certainly; Vin V 86,4* (-a); Ja IV 301,25
(-ena tVaJTI brahmal).o); VI472,¡· (-en' esa na
bhattakarakassa putto ti, Be, Ce so; Ee nissaJTlsayen'
eva; Se niccayen' esa); 482,21 (-ena attano maral).aJTI
ñatva); Pa!is-a 524,25 (-ena dada ti phalam iti nidanaJTI);
Mhv 38:20 (uttamo vata 'yaJTI satto raja hessati -af)1);-
2. resolve, fixed intention; Ap 507,12 (vanavasaya -o);
Dhp-a I 192,12 (sace te ekantena ayaJTI -o); Pj II 484,3
(raja tassa -a~T~ ñatva); Th-a III 93,35 (ekai)1 pabbajjaJTI
laddhuf!1 vagan ti -af)1 katva); Mhv 25:54 (suve
yuddhaJTI karissama iti te -a~T~ karuf)1);- 0 -mitta, m., a
firmfriend;? Ja I 441,4foll ..
nicchayana, n. [cfnicchaya], determining; ascertainment;
552 niccharati
Pa!is-a 19,32 (vavatthane -e sanni!!hapane pañña); 390,9
(vavatthane ti atthadinaf)1 -e).
niccharaka- in Ee at Ap-a 361,32 is prob. wr for
niccharal).aka qv.
niccharaJ}.a, n. [from niccharati], emanation, issuing; Ja V
145,8· (ailgehi rai)1sinaJTI -ato); Vism 303,17 (in cpd);
Sadd 376,13 (vacaya -ato); - niccharal).a in Ee at
Ud-a 67,9 is prob. wr for niccharal).a qv; - 0 -juti,f,
light issuing forth; Th-a III 197,37 (ailgehi -lhi jutimanta
tvaf)1 pi); - ifc see vijju-; - see also niccharal).a.
niccharal}.aka, mfn. [niccharal).a + ka2], going out;
issuing; Th-a II 226,26 (ailgamailgehi 0 -obhasassa ti) =
Ap-a 361,32 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niccharaka-, prob. wr) =
538,27 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niccharal).aka-).
niccharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. niscarati], goes out; issues; rises;
D II 211,26 (na e' assa bahiddha parisaya ghoso -ati);
M II 140,6 (anhangasamannagato ... bhoto Gotamassa
mukhato ghoso -ati); S I 106,22 (seyyatha pi ... vijjullata
-anti evaf)1 assa mukhato jivha -ati); 197 ,12* (atha te
mano -ati bahiddha; Spk I 288,8: bahiresu
puthuttarammal).esu carati); It 75,5 (tayo 'me bhikkhave
devesu devasadda -anti); Ja IV 12,5· (pharusavaca -ati,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nicchareti); V 14,22* (gattehi te rasmiyo
-anti); Bv 23:23 (kanakappabha -ati samanta
dasayojanaf)1, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -anti); Mil 117,22
(mahatimaha bhimo saddo -ati); part.pr.
(a) niccharanta, mf( -antl)n., D II 131,22 (vijjutasu
-antisu); Ja I 95,16 (-antiyo ghanabuddharasmiyo );
V 207 ,3· (-anta SUVal).l).aVal).l).a raf)1siyo ); Mp II 270,5
(-antaf)1 saddai)1 sutva); - (b) niccharamana, mfn.,
Ap-a 104,31; - aor. 3 sg. (a) nicchari, Mp II 304,9;
Th-a II 8,11 (vacaf)1 -i, Be, Ee, Se so, caus. ?; Ce vaca
niccharita); (b) nicchare, Ap 320,5 (piti me bahi -e);
3 pl. niccharif)1SU, Ja VI 486,16 (vijjullata -if)1su);
Mil419,23;- absol.niccharitva, Sv434,11; Psiii 22,1
(buddharasmiyo ... -itva, Be, Se so; Ce, E e niccharitva,
prob. wr) = Spk III 47,31; As 388,22foll.; - caus.
(a) pr. 3 sg. nicchareti, -aya ti, makes issue forth; emits,
utters; purges; Vin IV 15,6 (saddaJTI -eti); MI 97,36
(vacaf)1 -essami ti); 509,25 (attamano attamanavacaf)1
-eyya); Sn 388 (ajjhattacinti na mano bahiddha -aye);
Mil 259,9 (taJTI tesaf)1 garahaJTI paribhavaf)1 vinodehi
apanehi -eh! ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vija!ehi ti); -
part.pr. (a) niccharenta, mf(-enti)n., Ja II 177,14' (akale
vacaf!1 -ento ); Spk I 276,Io (madhuraJTI saraf)1 -en ti ya
salikasakuniya nigghoso); Th-a II 59,14 (maha-akala-
megho ... vijjullata -ento); Ap-a 58,6 (asabhif)1 vacaf)1
-ento sihanadaJTI nadi); - neg. aniccharenta, mfn., Ja I
332,s-; (b) niccharaya(t), mfn., Sp 208,26 (-ayato );
(e) niccharayamana, mfn., Sv 723,21; Dhp-a II 264,17;-
neg. aniccharayamana, mfn., Sv 150,2o (vacaf)1 pi uccaJTI
aniccharayamana accharasaññaya agacchanti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se anuccaramana); - aor. 3 sg. (a) niccharesi, Vin I
278,12 (tassa taJTI upaMhamalakai)1 khaditaJTI tatth' eva
-esi; Sp 1117,31: -es! ti virecesi); III 119,32
(attamanavacaJTI -esi); MI 125,3o; Ja V 378,19* (so
kuddho pharusaf)1 vacaJTI -esi); Vism 40,7;
(b) niccharayi, Da!h 1:28; - 3 pl. niccharesuf!1, Ja V
381,21' (Ce, Ee so; Se -if)1su; Be omits); Sp 215,6 (yatha
aññe pi deva sul).anti tatha -esuf!1); - absol.
ni e chata
(a) niccharetva, Ja 1 336,31 (megha . . . vijjuta -etva);
II 161,18 (kakkaro ... manusi!Tl vaca!Tl -etva); III 127,11
([mayuraraja] pakkhe vidhunitva madhurassar~ -etva
nacci); Sp 893,28 (jivhaniccharakan ti jivha!Tl -etva
-etva); - neg. aniccharetva, D 1 53,13; (b) (IJamul)
niccharaka!Tl; - ifc see jivha-; - pp niccharita, mfn.,
uttered; Ja VI 334,29·; Pj II 176,2; caus.
(b) absol. nicchlhapetva, causing to utter; Sp 686,8
(bhagavant~ ... brahmaghosa!Tl niccharapetva, Se so;
Ce, Ee niccharapetva; Be niccharetva); - see also
niccharapana.
nicchata, mfn., see sv chata.
nicchadeti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nicchodeti.
niccharakaq¡, ind., (prob.) IJamul absol. of caus. of
niccharati qv.
niccharaJ}a, m.n. or mfn., -a,f [from caus. of
niccharati qv ], uttering; letting out; Nidd 1 216,6 (atthi ...
kodho hanusañcopanamatto hoti na ca tava
pharusavaca!Tl -o hoti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se pharusavaca-
niccharaiJo); Ud-a 67,9 (yakkhagajjita!Tl gajji ... yassa
-ena pabbata papa~ika!Tl muñci!Tlsu, Ce so; Ee
nicchara~Jena; Be, Se yal!l ya!Tl niccharati tena tena
2 aor. 3 sg. nicchubhi, Ps 111 329,17 (gacchatha vasala ma
pabbata ... ); - ifc see nigghosa- (sv nigghosa ).
niccharika, mfn., se e sv charika.
nicchareta(r), m. [from caus. of niccharati qv], one who
utters, emits; MI 97,35 (yo khvay~ pugga1o kodhano
kodhasamantal!l vacal!l -a, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
kodhasamanta).
niccharapana, n. [from caus. of niccharati qv], making
0
utter; Spk 1 257,23 (bhagava pi etal!l vac~ '-attham
eva yavatatiya!Tl agamasi).
nicchinati, pr. 3 sg. [S. niscinoti], considers, ascertains;
determines; settles; Pa~is-a 554,14 (suqhu nicchital!l
-ati); - aor. 3 sg. nicchini, Mhv 35:10 (uposatha-
gharaq~ so -i); - inf nicchetu!Tl, Vism 515,18
(arammaiJ~ nicchetul!l na sakkoti); Ps II 132,31
(dvedhapathal!l patva imina nu kho gantabb~ imina
gantabban ti nicchetul!l asakkonto); As 267,24 (pañh~
samu~~hapetva nicchetul!l asakkonta); Mhv 4:45
(nicchetum tani vatthilni sailgho sannipatl tada); -
absol. (a) niccheyya, Dhp 256 (yo ca atthal!l anatthaq¡ ca
ubho niccheyya paiJ<.fito; Dhp-a III 382,6: atthanatthe
vinicchinitva); Sn 785 (dhammesu niccheyya
samuggahlt~; Nidd I 76,4: niccheyya ti -itva
vinicchinitva); (b) nicchinitva, Nidd I 76,4 (Nidd-a 1
205,6: -itva ti sassatavasena nicchaya!Tl katva); Nidd-a 1
369,1 (dighidhammesu idam eva saccan ti -itva);
Mhv 37:161; (e) nicchiya, Mhv 37:233;
pp nicchita, mfn. [S. niscita], determined; convinced;
Nidd-a 1 241,26 (sa ve viyattesil ti so puggalo -e su);
Patis-a 523,27 (adhimutto -o); Mhv 7:19 (yakkhii;~i tava
janati mamajati!Tl ti -o); 14:9;- ifc see ekeka- (sv eka);
- sunicchita, mfn., quite determined, fixed; ? Ap 559,2
(tadahal!l matapitaro dakkhami ti sunicchita, Ce so; Be
okkhami ti; Ee okkamiti; Se ikkhami ti); 570,23 (pha1am
etal!l sunicchital!l);- see also nicchaya, nicchayana.
nicchiya, ind., absol. ofnicchinati qv.
1 2
nicchindati, pr. 3 sg. [ni or ni + chindati], removes;
separates away; - inf nicchinditul!l, Nidd-a 1 240,31
(-itul!l dukkhatthena sailkha1ikadibandhanal!l vi ya, Be,
553 nicchodeti
Ce, Se so; Ee chinditul!l); - absol. nicchinditva, Ja III
164,23' (urago jiiJIJ~ tacal!l -itva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nivattitva); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nicchedeti, A III 365,3
(pabbajalayako pabbaj~ layitva agge gahetva odhunati
niddhunati -eti, E e so; Be, Ce, Se nicchadeti; Mp III
384,25: -eti ti bahaya va rukkhe va paharati, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nicchadetl ti) = S 111 155,27 (Be niccho~eti; Ee
nicchodeti; Ce, Se nippho~eti; Spk 11 332,1: -etl ti
pappho~etva cha<.f<.feti, Ce, Ee so; Be nicchotetl ti; Se
nipphoteti ti).
nicchuddha, mfn., pp of nicchubhati qv.
nicchubha, m., throwing out; Dhatum 550 (chubha -e).
2
nicchubhati, pr. 3 sg. [ni + -/chubh], throws out, expels;
Ja III 512,11* (sa ma!Tl ghara -ati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
niharati; 512,Ir: ghara niharati); V 387,5 (kil!l m~ -as!
ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se na nimantesi ti); Mill87,22
(mahasamuddo . . . matal!l kuiJap~ tal!l khippam eva
-ati); Bv 11:15 (raqhato -anti te; Bv-a 195,21: -antl ti
niharanti ussadenti, tesa!Tl nivasa!Tl na denti ti attho);-
part.pr. nicchubhamana, mfn., Cp 1:9:23 (cfCp-a 85,s:
tes~ -amanan ti tesu Sivisu nikka<.f<.fhantesu
pabbajentesil ti attho, tesal!l va nikkhamantanal!l); -
me putta!Tl mayha!Tl antare paribhindantha ti -i, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se nighubhi); - pp nicchuddha, mfn., thrown
out, expelled; V in II 251 ,9* (in uddana: Moggallanena
-o, Be, Ce so; Ee wr niccuddo; Se nivuttho); Ja III 99,10'
(nibbapitan ti -~ nikkhamital!l, Ee so; Be niddhavitan
ti nivuqhapit~ nikka<.f<.fhapital!l; Ce niddhapitan ti -a!Tl
nikka<.f<.fhit~; Se niddhapitan ti nicchu<.f<.fal!l
nikka<.f<.fhital!l); Mill30,19 (-a parappavada).
nicchubhana, n. [from nicchubhati], throwing out,
expelling; Mil 357,14 (nissara~Jal!l -aq¡ pavahanal!l
pabbajana!Tl patilabhati).
nicchetuq¡, ind., inf ofnicchinati qv.
nicchedana, n. [from nicchedetij, separating out,
removing; Spk li 332,2 (pabbajani viya kilesa layan~
-a!Tl viya aniccasaññañil~Jan ti, Ce, Ee so; Ee babbajani;
Be nicchotana!Tl; Se nippho~an~).
nicchedeti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nicchindati.
niccheyya, ind., absol. ~fnicchinati qv.
nicchotana, n. [from niccho~eti], striking against; shaking;
Spk 11 332,2 (pabbajani viya kilesa layan~ -a!Tl viya
aniccasaññañil~Jan ti, Be so; Ce, Ee nicchedanal!l; Se
nippho~an~).
nicchoteti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nicchodeti.
nicchodeti, niccho~eti, nicchadeti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S.
k~odayati], strikes against, knocks; shakes out; M 1 229,1
(val~ kai;~I;~e gahetva odhuneyya niddhuneyya -eyya ...
odhunissami niddhunissami -essami, Ce so; Ee
nicchadeyya . . . nicchadessami; Be nipphoteyya ...
nipphotessami; Se nippotheyya . . . nippothissami; Ps 11
272,3: -eyya ti punappunal!l papphoteyya, Ce, Ee so; Be
nipphoteyya ti; Se nippotheyya ti ... pappotheyya); S III
155,27 (pabbajalayako pabbaja!Tl layitva agge gahetva
odhunati niddhunati -eti, Ee so; Be nicchoteti; Ce, Se
nipphoteti; Spk II 332,1: nicchedetl ti papphotetva
cha<.f<.feti, Ce, Ee so; Be nicchotetl ti; Se nipphoteti ti ) =
A III 365,3 (Be, Ce, Se nicchadeti; Ee nicchedeti; Mp III
384,25: nicchadeti ti bahaya va paharati rukkhe va
 nicheka,
paharati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nicchedetl ti).
nicheka, m. [S. ni~eka], sprinkling, aspersion; ?
Sadd 430,25* ( 0 ' -adikaresu ... garusaddo pavattati).
nija, mfn. [ts], one's own; Abh 736 (-o sako attaniyo);
Da~h 2:68 (jahitvana -a¡p deha¡p); Sadd 622,17 (yo jassa:
niya¡p putta¡p -aq¡ puttaq¡ va);- 0 -cara, m., one's own
agent; Mhv 61:67 (bhümipatl gamavilopaq¡ ... karenta
-ehi);- see also niya.
nijanasambadha, nijjanasambadha, mfn., see sv jana1.
nijigiq¡sati, nijigisati, pr. 3 sg. [desid. of ni 1 or ni 2 +
jayati; cfS. nirjayati], wishes to acquire, covets; Sv 91,31
(labhena labha¡p -anti magganti pariyesantl ti, Ce, Ee,
Se so; Be nijigisanti) = Ps IV 134,7 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nijigisanti); - part.pr. (a) nijigiq¡sana, nijigisana, mfn.,
Sn 131 (kiñcikkhaq¡ -ano, Ce, E e, Se so; Be nijigisano );
(b) nijigisamana, mfn., Pj 11 181 ,3 (nijigisano ti
nijigisamano maggamano, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ano ti
jigiq¡samano).
nijighpsana, nijigisana, mfn. [from nijigiq¡sati], wishing to
acquire, covetous, greedy; Ps IV !34,8foll. (labhena
labha¡p -a tesaq¡ bhavo labhena labhaq¡ 0 -ta, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nijigisana ... nijigisanata);- 0 -ta, nijigisanata,f,
abstr., the wish to acquire, covetousnessfor; M III75,13
(kuhana . . . labhena labhaq¡ -a, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nijiglsanata); Nidd I 372,16 (-aya, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
nijigisanataya); Vibh 353,Io (katama labhena labha¡p
-a ... ya evarüpa amisena amisassa eghi ... pariyesana,
Ce so; Be nijigisanata; Ee, Se jigiq¡sanata) quoted
Vism 23,24 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nijigisanata; Vism 29,29:
-a ti maggana, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nijigisanata ti); -
--mukhena, because of a wish to acquire; Sv 533,10
(ya¡p ya¡p pai:IItaq¡ labhati taq¡ taq¡ n' eva labhena
labhaq¡ --mukhena gihina¡p deti na attana paribhuñjati,
Ce, Ee so; Be nijiglsanata-; Se jigiq¡sanata-) = Mp 111
340,15 (Be nijigisanata-; Ce, Se nijigiq¡sana-; Ee
nijigiq¡sata-, prob. wr; = Ps 11 396,27: Ce nijigiq¡sana-;
Ee nijigiq¡sana-; Be jiglsana-; Se jigiq¡sana-).
nijighpsanaka, nijigisanaka, mfn. [nijigiq¡sana + ka2],
wishing to acquire, covetous; D 111 107,1 (na ca labhena
labhaq¡ -o, Ce, Se so; Be nijigisanako; Ee nijigiq¡sita; f.
A III lll ,27: Ce, E e, Se nijigiq¡sita; Be nijiglsita).
nijighpsana, nijiglsana, f [from nijigiq¡sati], the wish to
acquire, covetousness; Vibh-a 485,25 (nijigiq¡sanata-
niddese -a ti maggana, Ee, Se so; Be nijiglsanataniddese
nijigisana ti; perhaps wrr; Ce nijigiq¡sanata ti; =
Vism 29,29: Ce, Ee, Se nijigiq¡sanata ti; Be nijiglsanata
ti); - 0 -mukhena, because of a wish to acquire; Ps 11
396,27 (ya¡p yaq¡ pai:IItaq¡ labhati taq¡ taq¡ n' eva labhena
labha¡p 0 -mukhena gihlnaq¡ deti, Ce so; Ee nijigi111sana-;
Be jigisana-; Se jigi111sana-) = Mp III 340,15 (Ce, Se so;
Be nijiglsanata-; Ee nijigif!lsata-, prob. wr; = Sv 533,10:
Ce, E e nijigi111sanata-; Be nijigisanata-; Se jigiq¡sanata-).
nijighpsita(r), nijiglsita(r), m. [from nijigi111sati], one who
wishes to acquire; who covets; DI 8,30 (eke bhonto
sam~abrahmana . . . kuhaka ca honti . . . labhena ca
labha¡p -aro, Ce, E e, Se so; Be nijigisitaro) f. lii 107 ,I
(na ca labhena labhaf!l -a, Ee so; Be nijiglsanako; Ce, Se
nijigi111sanako) f. A III lll ,27 (-a, Ce, E e, Se so; Be
nijigisita).
nijjafa, mfn., see sv ja~a.
554 nijjiyadhanu
nijjara\ mfn., see sv jara.
nijjara2 , n., nijjara, f [cf AMg I:Iijjara, S. nirjara, nirjara],
wearing away, destruction; S IV 339,16 (tisso ima ...
sandínhika -a akalika ehipassika opanayika paccatta¡p
veditabba viññühi; Spk lii 109,13: ettha eko pi maggo
tii:II:Iaf!l kilesana¡p nijjarai:Iataya tisso -a ti vutto ti); A I
221,3 (eva¡p etissa sandinhikaya -aya visuddhiya
samatikkamo hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nijjaravisuddhiya;
Mp 11 332,22foll.: kilese jirai:Iakapatipadaya kilese va
nijjlr~ato -aya sattanaq¡ visuddhipapanato visuddhiya
ti, Se so; Be kilesajlrai:Iakapa~ipadaya; Ee jarai:Iaka-
patipada .. . lllJJafai:Iato lllJJafa ... ; e e jar~aka­
pa~ipada ... nijjar~ato ... visuddhi ti); 221,5 (tisso kho
ima ... -a visuddhiyo); Pa~is-a 76,15 (micchadinhadini
nijjarayanti nasayanti ti -ani ... -ani ca tani vatthüni ca
ti nijjaravatthüni);
nijjaral)a, nijjir~a, n. [from nijjareti, nijjireti; cf AMg
I:Iijjar~a. S. ni!jarai:IaJ. wearing away, destruction;
Spk III 109,13 (ettha eko pi maggo tÍI:II:laJP kilesana111
o -taya tisso nijjara ti vutto ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nijjarataya, perhaps wr); Mp TI 332,23 (kilese va -ato
nijjaraya, Ce so; Ee nijjara; Be, Se nijjlrai:Iato).
nijjaral}aka, nijjirai:Iaka, mfn. [nijjarai:Ia, nijjir~a + ka2],
wearing away, destroying;- ifc see kilesa-.
nijjareti, -ayati, nijjlreti, pr. 3 sg. [caus. ofni 2 + jarati 1;
S. nirjarayati], wears away, destroys; MI 93,3
(nig~~ho . . . nataputto . . . evaf!l ah a, atthi kho vo
nig~~ha pubbe papaf!l kata111 ta111 imaya ka~ukaya
dukkarakarikaya -etha, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nijjiretha) =
11 218,6 (Ee so; Be, Ce nijjiretha; Se nijjiretha); Thi 431
(papa¡p hi maya pakataf!l kamma¡p ta¡p -essami, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce -issami; Thl-a 247,35: Jirapessamt
vinasessami); Pa~is-a 76,14 (micchadinhadini -ayanti
nasayantl ti nijjarani); - pp nijjil}l}a, mfn., wom away,
destroyed; D III 291,13 (das a nijjaravatthüni,
sammadi~~issa micchadiqhi -a hoti ... ) f. M 111 76,12 f.
Nett 51 ,9; MI 93,9 (vedanakkhaya sabbaf!l dukkhaf!l
-a¡p bhavissatl ti); Vibh-a 490,35 (ukku~ikappadhanadihi
dukkhe -e); - fpp nijjaretabba, nijjlretabba, mfn., MI
93,2o (kif!l pana tumhe avuso nig~~a janatha ettakaq¡
va dukkha111 nijjii:II:laq¡ ettaka¡p va dukkhaf!l
nijjaretabbaf!l, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nijjiretabbaf!l)
11 214,34 (Be, Ce nijjlretabbaf!l; Ee, Se nijjiretabbaf!l).
nijjalayitvana, ind. [absol. of ni 2 + jaleti 2], causing to
blaze up, kindling; Ja VI 495,28* (aggif!l nijjalayitvana
ekajalasamahita111 tattha me mar~a111 seyyo, Ce, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Se ujjalayitvana).
nijjil}l)a, mfn., pp of nijjareti qv.
nijjita\ mfn. [ni 2 + jita; or nijjita2 ?], unvanquished; ?
Mil 192,8 (loke varapavarabh~<;ia111 vatthaq¡ va ...
0
-kammasüra va, Ce, Ee so; Be vijita-); 332,3 (so
bhagava ... o -vijitasailgamo ).
nijjita 2 , mfn. [pp of ni 2 + jayati; S. niljita], vanquished; ?
Saddh 360 (mutta dantehi nijjita);- see also nijjinitva.
nijjinitva, ind. [absol. of ni 2 + jayati; cf S. nirjayati],
conquering, vanquishing; Bv 5:3 (nijjinitva kilese so
patva sambodhim uttama¡p; Bv-a 155,3: nijjinitva ti
vijinitva abhibhuyya);- see also nijjita2.
nijjiyadhanu, n. [ni 2 + jiya + dhanu], a bow without a
bowstring; Kkh2 267,6;- see also sajiyadhanu.
nijjiral}a
niijiraQa, n., see sv nijjaraJ)a.
niijiraQaka, mfn., see sv nijjara1,1aka
niijireti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nijjareti.
niijhatta, mfn., pp of caus. ofnijjhayati2 qv.
niijhatti, f [cf BHS nidhyapti], making scrutinise; making
understand; convincing; Vin V 165,12' (sanñattiya ca
kusalo -iya ca kovido); MI 320,32 (na ca aññamaññ~
nijjhapenti na ca -i~ upenti) f. A I 75,31 (Mp 11
149,26joll.: annamann~ nijjhapanatthaya na
sannipatanti); Mil210,1 (tathagato ... khamito upasanto
-i~ gato, Ce, Ee so; Be nijjhatta~; Se nijjhattakato);
Spk I 164,29 (eva~ sa katha -i~ na gaccheyya, Be so;
Ce, Ee niruddha~; Se nijjhaggi~); Sadd 350,5 Ghe
cintaya~: ... -i); -
0
-bala, n. and mfn., l. (n.) the
strength that is making (someone) understand; Patis 11
l68,1o (paññattibala~ -a~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
nijjhanti-; Patis-a 622,27: adhitassa atthassa
adhigamapan~ -~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nijjhanti-);
171,2o (kamacchand~ pajahanto nekkhammavasena
citt~ nijjhapetl ti -~.Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nijjhanti-);
- 2. (mfn.) whose strength is making (someone)
understand; A I 76,9; IV 223,2o (-a pa1,1¡;iita; Mp IV
115,17: -a ti na ida~ ev~ eva~ nam' etan ti
atthanatthanijjhapan~ yeva bala~); neg.
anijjhattibala, mfn., A I 75,32.
niijhantibala in Ee at Patis 11 168,10, 171,20, 176,28 and
Patis-a 622,27 is wr for nijjhatti- (Be, Ce, Se so).
niijhara, m. [S. nitjhara], a waterfall, a cascade;
Sadd 922,27 (-o jharo jhañ).
niijhati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nijjhayati 2.
niijhana\ n., buming;- ifc see anto-.
niijhana2 , n. [cf S. lex., BHS nidhyana], looking; scrutiny;
reflection, meditation; Abh 775 (alokana~ ca -a~
ikkhana~ dassana~); MI 133,28 (tes~ te dhamma
paññaya attha~ anupaparikkhata~ na -~ khamanti;
Ps 11 106,32: na upaghahanti na apatha~ agacchanti);
Sadd 350,4 Ghe cintay~: ... jhan~ -~ ... ); 679,29
(imani tlni -~ khamanti ce gahetabbani);
0
-kkhanti,f [nijjhana + khanti 1], receptlvlty to,
readiness to accept, reflection; preferring ajter
reflection; ? Thi-a 268,13 (sa eva idha satthu sasane
dhamme -i); Cp-a 319,28 (buddhadhammesu
sacchikara1,1ena visesappaccayo -i); - ifc see ditthi-,
dhamma- (sv dhamma 1); - 0 -(k)khama, mfn., which
stands up to, is subject to, scrutiny; Vv 84:17 (atlva -o
manuñño; Vv-a 340,16: pabhassarabhave pi ativiya
olokanakkhamo); Sadd 114,19 (yatha apasaddassa
pullili.gata paññayeyya --ata ca bhaveyya tatha sutta~
aharatha ti);- neg. anijjhanakhama, mfn., Ja VI 207,21'
(hass~ anijjhanakham~ ataccha~; 21 0,9' foll.:
brahmal)an~ vacan~ nama hasitabbayuttak~
pal)¡;!itana~ nijjhan~ na khamati).
niijhanaka, m. [nijjhana2 + ka2], one who reflects,
meditates; Spk II 126,34 (maya~ -a sukkhavipassaka).
niijhapana. nijjhapana, n. [from nijjhapeti], making
understand; convincing; winning over; Vin V 171,17' (in
uddana: -ena ca; cfl69,15joll.); JaiV 495,1o•foll.
(yakkhe pisace atha va pi pete kupite pi te nijjhapana~
karonti na maccuno nijjhapana~ karonti; 498,21':
balikammavasena khamapenti pasadenti); VI 516,29'
555 nijjháyati
(tasmi~ mama niddosabhava~ -e); Mp 11 149,26
(aññamaññ~ o• -atthaya na sannipatanti).
niijhapeta(r), m. [from nijjhapeti], one who makes
(someone) see, who convinces; Nidd I 178,3 (bhagava ...
paññapeta -a pekkheta pasadeta; Nidd-a I 293,31: tatha
paññapitana~ nicchayakaraJ)ena -a) f. Patis II 194,18.
2
niijhapeti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of nijjhayati qv.
1
niijhama, mfn., pp of nijjhayati qv.
1
niijhayati\ pr. 3 sg. [ni + jhayati ], bums, is on fire;
Ap-a 293,3 (¡;iayhati -atl ti attho); - part.pr.
nijjhayanta 1, mfn., Ud-a 428,33 (anto -antassa balassa
cittasantapalakkha1,1a .. . soka); - pp nijjhama, mfn.,
bumt; buming; A I 295,3 (tisso ima bhikkhave
patipada . . . aga)ha patipada -a patipada majjhima
patipada; Mp Il 383,21: -a ti attakilamathanuyogavasena
sughu jhama santattaparitatta); 296,8 (ekacco ...
anekavihita~ kayassa atapanaparitapananuyoga~
anuyutto viharati ay~ vuccati bhikkhave -a patipada);
Nett 77,17 (-a patipada);- --tal)ha, mfn. [= --ta1,1hika?
or --ta1,1hakhuppipasa ?], with a burning craving (and
hunger and thirst ); J a I 44,32*( --tal)ha khuppipasa na
honti kalakañjaka) = Ap-a49,7* = Bv-a271.18* =
Cp-a 330,16*;- --ta1,1hika, mfn., with a buming craving;
buming, wasted, with craving (a class of petas);
Mil 294,16 (tayo peta ... vantasika khuppipasino -a);
303,11 (yo pubbe pare pipasaya mareti so ... peto hutva
-o samano lükho kiso ... ); Vism 552,29
(--tal)hikapetesu); Ps II 36,17 (--tal)hika peta ...
opapatika).
niijhayati2 , nijjhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nidhyayati] looks at,
observes carefully; scrutinises; reflects on; meditates
(on); MI 334,18joll. (seyyatha pi nama uliiko
rukkhasakhaya~ miisik~ magayamano jhayati
pajjhayati -ati apajjhayati evam ev' ime mu1,1¡;iaka
sama1,1aka ... jhayino sma jhayino sma ti pattakkhandha
adhomukha madhurakajata jhayanti pajjhayanti -anti
apajjhayanti); III 14,5 (kath~riip~ ca ... so bhagava
jhan~ na Val)J.lesi . . . ekacco . . . kamaraga~ yeva
antar~karitva jhayati pajjhayati -ati apajjhayati) f. A V
323,18 (Mp V 79,2o: -atl ti nirantaravasena nibaddha~
jhayati); S III 140,27 (tam ena~ cakkhuma puriso
passeyya -ayeyya yoniso upaparikkheyya; Spk II 321,3:
-eyya ti o1okeyya); 142,32* (yatha yatha -ati yoniso
upaparikkhati rittak~ tucchak~ hoti yo na~ passati
yoniso); Nidd I 45,29 (passami ti ... dakkhami o1okemi
-ami upaparikkhami; Nidd-a I 158,22: -ami ti cintemi
buddhacakkhuna saddhapañcamakani indriyani);
Sv 702,28 (itthiyo na tikhi1,1~ -anti manda~ a1ocenti
olokenti); Saddh 84 (ya~ y~ nijjhati sadhetu~. ms so;
Ee ijjhati); Sadd 350,3 Ghe cintay~: jhayati -ati
upanijjhayati); - part.pr. (a) nijjhaya(t), mfn., S III
140,21 (passato -ato); (b) nijjhayanti, mfn., Vin V
212,31* (-antassa kati apatti, Be, Ce so; E e, Se
nijjhantassa); Nidd I 308,6 (passanto dakkhanto olokento
-anto upaparikkhanto); Spkii 122,21 (t~ kara1,1a~
-antassa); (e) nijjhayamana1, mfn., Ap 340,11 (mama
-amanassa paribhuñji tada jino ); 420,22 (uddh~
-amano 'ha~ addas~ lokanayak~); - aor. 3 sg.
nijjhayi, Vin 111 116,14' (in uddana; cf 118,15:
upanijjhayi); - absol. nijjhayitva, Mp II 305,25 (ma
nijjhayana
di!thinijjhanakkhantiya ti amhakaiTI -itva khamitva
gahitadighiya saddhi~T~ sametl ti pi ma g~hittha);
Sp-t [Be] 1 83,18 (na nijjhanaiTI khamantl ti
nijjhanapaññaiTI na kkhamanti, -itva paññaya disva
rocetva gahitabba na hontl ti adhippayo); - pass.
2 saññattigato;
part.pr. nijjhayamana , mfn. ? Vibh-a 412,12 (visesato ca
pañcakkhandhasañkhata dhamma punappun~ anicca-
dukkha-anattavasena -amana taiTI nijjhanaiTI khamanti ti
dhammanijjhanakhanti, eds so); - pp (a) nijjhata, mfn.
[cf S., BHS nidhyata], thought on; compre hended;- (fe
see paññanubhava-; (b) nijjhayita, mfn., scrutinised;
reflected on; Patis-a 645,12 (tatha -itassa atthassa
patipattiyojana-vasena pekkheta, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nijjhapitassa; = Nidd-a 1 293,31: eds nijjhapitassa); -
sunijjhayita, mfn., M 11 171 ,2; caus. pr. 3 sg.
ni.ühapeti, -ayati (and nijjhapeti, nijjhapayati me)
[cf BHS nidhyapayati], makes look at, scrutinise; shows;
makes understand; convinces; wins over; Vin 11 73,27
(adhammavadi puggalo dhammavadi~T~ pugga1aiTI
saññapeti -eti pekkheti . . . ayaiTI dhammo ayaiTI vinayo
idaiTI satthu sasanaiTI ... ; Sp 1191,21 foil.: -etl ti yatha so
taiTI atthaiTI nijjhayati oloketi evaiTI karoti, Be, Ce so; Ee,
Se -eti o1oketi, prob. wr); 96,2 (patibalo hoti ubho
attapaccatthike saññapetu~T~ -etuiTI pekkhetuiTI ... ); M I
320,32 (te na e' eva aññamaññaiTI saññapenti na ca
saññatti~Tl upenti na ca aññamañña~T~ -enti na ca
nijjhatti~T~ upenti); Sn 320 (ki~T~ so pare sakkhati
nijjhapetu~T~, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce sakkati -etu~T~; Pj 11
330,14: pekkhapetu~T~): 322 (so kho pare nijjhapaye
pajana~T~): Ja IV 495,17* (aparadhaka düsaka hethaka ca
labhanti te rajino nijjhapetu~T~: 498,24·foll.: sakkhihi
attano niraparadhabhavaiTI pakasetva pasadetu~T~);
VI 516,18* (-etuiTI maharaj~ SivinaiTI
ratthavac;Ic;IhanaiTI; 516,22·: tumhakaiTI niddosabhavaiTI
janapetu~T~); Patis ll 171 ,2o (kamacchandaiTI pajahanto
nekkhammavasena citta~T~ -etl ti nijjhattibalaiTI;
Patis-a 623,17: -eti ti cintapeti); Ap 46,7 (no ce taiTI
-essama attadant~ samahita~T~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nijjhapessama; Ap-a 289,32: no ce -essama
khamapessama); Spk I 164,3o (n~ -essami ti, Be, Se so;
Ce ta~T~ nirujjhapessami ti; Ee taiTI niruddhapessami ti);
308,12 (kassa mayaiTI ujjhapayama -ayama arocayama
ti); Mp 11 149,25 (na ca -entl ti na pekkhapenti); Pj 11
330,18 (balassa paraiTI -etu~T~ asamatthataya); Nidd-a 1
370,s (dunnijjhapayo ti .. . -ayituiTI dukkho); -
part.pr. (a) nijjhapenta, mfn., Ja IV 108,11· (-ento);
(b) nijjhapaya(t), mfn., Ja IV 108,6* (narim naro
nijjhapay~ dhanena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nari; !08,11·:
nariiTI ki1esaratikar~a dhanena -ento saññapento, Be,
Ee so; Ce santappento; Se -ay~ -ento saññapento);-
aor. 3 sg. (a) nijjhapesi, Ja III 245,21·; (b) nijjhapayl,
Ja III 245,17* (Darimukho -ayi sumedha~T~, Ce, Se so; Be
-ayi; Ee nijjhapayi, me? 245,21·: rajanaiTI -esi saññapesi
attano vacanaiTI g~hapesl ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-ayi ñapesi); (e) nijjhapaye ?, Ja IV 87,2* (yatha -aye
ajja Ghato purisapa~c;Iito; 87,s·: sokahara~atthaya -aye
-esi bodhesi); pp (a) nijjhatta, mfn. [cf BHS
nidhyapta], made to understand; convinced; Vv 63:19
(nijjhatto 'mhi subhaghena) quoted Sadd 442,23; Ja VI
528,4* (nijjhatta Sivayo sabbe; 528,s-: nijjhatta ti
556 nittha
saññatta); Mil 209,27 (bhagavanta~T~ pasadesuiTI
khamapesuiTI nijjhattaiTI aka~T~sü ti); (b) nijjhapita, mfn.,
convinced; convincingly demonstrated; Vv-a 265,24
(nijjhatto' mhl ti -ito dhammasaññaya paññattigato
amhi, Ee so; Ce saññattigato; Be, Se dhammojasaññaya
quoted Sadd 442,25: nijjhapito
dhammojapaññaya paññattigato amhi); Nidd-a 1 293,31
(tatha -itassa atthassa patipattiyojanavasena pekkheta) =
Patis-a 645,12 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nijjhayitassa); -
sunijjhapita, mfn., very convincingly demonstrated;
Mil 264,27 (sunijjhapito bhante Nagasena pañho); -
fpp (a) nijjhapaniya, (b) nijjhapetabba, mfn., Vin V 166,8
(nijjhapaniye thane nijjhapetabbaiTI): 169,16 (dhammaiTI
adhammo ti dipento nijjhapaniye thane nijjhapeti); -
see al so atinijjhayitatta, dunnijjhapaya.
ni.ühayana, n., buming;- ifc see anto-.
niñjati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. ,lnij, nenekti], washes; purifies;
Sadd 348.12 (niñji suddhiyaiTI: -ati paniñjati); -
absol. niñjitva, Sadd 348,12; - see also apaniñjitva,
onitta.
niñjat¡2, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. siñjati, Wg .§ 24:17: siji avyakte
sabde], utters an inarticulate sound; Sadd 348,15 (niji
avyattte sadde: -ati).
nitthahanto in Ee, Se at Sp 1201,28 is prob. wr; Be, Ce
nitthubhanto.
nitthli, f [S. ni~tha], l. (i) completion; culminating point;
end, object, aim; Abh 912 (-a nipphattiyaiTI
c'evavasanasmiiTI adassane); MI 64,26foll. (ki~T~ pan'
avuso eka -a udahu puthü -a ti; Ps 11 9,29 foll.: ya tassa
pasadassa pariyosanabhüta -a . . . brahma~anaiTI hi
brahmaloko -a) -t A I 278,5foll. (Mp 11 375,17: -a ti gati
nipphatti); Sn 864 (asa ca -a ca kutonidana; Pj 11 551,27:
asa tassasaya samiddhi ca); Sv 249,14 (dve va gatiyo ti
dve eva -a); 380,11 (bhagava paresaiTI -aya
aniyyanikattaiTI dassetva); Spk 11 24,14 (tes~ pan' aharo
sukhumo tv eva -a~T~ patto); 336,5 (nibbanaiTI assa
pariyosanaiTI nipphatti -a ti attho ); - -a~T~ gacchati,
reaches completion; achieves its aim or culminating
point; Dhp 351 (-a~T~ gato asan tasi; Dhp-a IV 70,14 foll.:
imasmi~T~ sasane pabbajitanaiTI arahatta~T~ -a nama, ta~T~
gato patto ti attho; or meaning 2. ?); Ja 1 201,20 (evaiTI
sante amhak~ kammaiTI -aiTI gamissatl ti); Mp 1 409,21
(mahalatapasadhan~ na tava -aiTI gacchati); Pj 11
463,15 (kevalino ti-~ gata); Ap-a476,12 (navakamme
-aiTI gate sati); - (ii) death; - iic see below; -
2. certain knowledge, decision, conclusion; - -~
gacchati, is decided, is certain; knows; concludes, is
convinced; ( -aiTI gata is often written nighañgata, or
occasionally there is nighagata); V in 1 294,1 (-~ ettha
gacchissami); D Il 124,11 (-~ ettha gantabbaiTI addha
idaiTI na e' eva tassa bhagavato vacan~); M 1 176,2foll.
(so -a~T~ gaccheyya maha vata bho nago ti ... athah~
-a~T~ agamaiTI sammasambuddho bhagava ... ); 11 169,13
(brahma~a eka~T~sena -aiTI gacchanti idam eva saccaiTI
mogh~ aññan ti); A 11 175,35 (akañkhl vat' amhi
avecikicchi -a~T~ gato saddhamme ti); V 119,24 (ye keci
bhikkhave mayi -aiTI gata; Mp V 44,1: -aiTI gata ti
nibbematika, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nighagata ti) = Patis 1
161,4 (Patis-a 464,9 foil.: nicchayaiTI gata, nibbematika ti
attho, nighagata ti patho samasapad~ hoti attho pana so
 557
yeva); Ja IV 146,4 (sa etassa dhlta ti -~ agamaq¡su);
Ap 20,19 (lakkha!)ani 'ssa disvana -aq¡ gacchiq¡
tathagate); Mil310,2 (okappetabb~ -~ gantabb~
saddahitabb~ suparinibbuto ay~ buddhaputto ti);
Vism 593,11 (namartipamattato uddh~ añño satto va
puggalo va ... natthi ti -aq¡ gacchati); Sadd 563,14 (-~
etthavagantabbaq¡);- 0 -gata, mfn., l. who has reached
completion, who has achieved his aim; Ps III 432,12
(kevalino 'smase ti t~ sakal~ jananato tattha -' amha
ti attho); - 2. (and nighaii.gata), decided, certain,
convinced; see above; - neg. anighangata, mfn., not
decided; uncertain; S III 99,22 (kankhita vicikicchita
anighangatata saddhamme, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
anighangata); A 11 17 4,2s (kankhi hoti vicikicchi
anighangato saddhamme); Nidd I 427,19; Patis I 81,4
(anitthangataya vicikicchaya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
anighagataya); As 412,18 (anighangatavasena Be, Ce so;
Se anit!ha-; Ee anighan~ gatavasena); - 0 -gamana,
nighaii.-gamana, n., 1. reaching completion, reaching
proficiency; Pj 11 584,29 (paramin ti -aq¡); Cp-a 111,31
(hatthin~ sikkhapanavijjaya nighaii.gamanena); -
2. definite knowledge, certainty; Ps 11 199,24 (maha-
hatthiq¡ disva nit!hangaman~); - 0 -pattagilána, mfn.,
ill with a terminal disease; Mp 11 191 ,1o (n' eva vughati
tamha abadha ti imina atekicchena . . . rogena
samannagato -o kathito, Ce so; Be, Se nighappatta-; Ee
ni!thapanagilano) = Pp-a 209,2 (eds nighappatto gilano);
-se e also accantanit!ha (sv accanta), nighana.
nitthati, nighayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nisti~thati], is finished,
comes to an end; is completed; reaches completion;
Vin 11 132,36 (ekamek~ sitthaq¡ kammasatena -ayatl
ti); Ja I 220,25 (civar~ avuso kayiraman~ cirena -ati);
436,15 (amhak~ sipp~ na -ayissatl ti); VI 363,2 (sace
pi so aññaq¡ karal)~ ahareyya na gathasahassena pi
im~ jatak~ -ayetha, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nit!hapeyya,
and omit na); Ps III 391,14 (bhatt~ pi vyañjanaq¡ pi
ekato va -anti); Dhp-a I 393,13 (pasadhanaq¡ pana na
tava -ati); - part.pr. nighayanta, mfn., Ap 582,5
(-ayantamhi cetiye, Ce, Ee so; Be nidhayantamhi; Se
nit!hapitarnhi); aor. 3 sg. nit!hasi, Ja I 94,7
(viharamaho navahi masehi -asi); VI 154,21 (yaññavate
sabbakamm~ -así); PsI 211,31 (tesaq¡ paññasa
yojanani gantva patheyy~ -asi); Spk I 293,21 (ten' eva
ticivaraq¡ -así); - pp nifthita, mfn. [cf S. niJ:l~thita,
ni~thita], brought or come to an end, finished,
completed; ready; Vin III 11,13 (kalo bho Gotama -~
bhattan ti); A I 111,14 (-aq¡ navaq¡ cakkayugan ti);
Snp. 3,s (uragasutt~ -aq¡); Ja V 46,6 (-~ te samma
panthüpakara!)aq¡); VI 459,7* (ummagg~ sadhu -~);
Ap 439,17 (daraken' eva santena kiriy~ -aq¡ maya);
Vism 51,12 (imesaq¡ pañhanaq¡ vissajjanaq¡ -aq¡);
Sp 49,12 (-ani deva caturas1tiviharasahassan1 ti); Mp III
225,16 (sabbanaq¡ kiccanaq¡ --tta); Mhv 3:17; -
anighita, mfn., not completed; Ja III 537,24 (acariyo no
sippe anighite yeva kalakato); Bv 2:45; Dhp-a III 172,4
(tassa vidatthimatt~ anighit~ taq¡ ajja nighapessami);
Ud-a 159,16 (tassa atthassa anit!hitatta); Mhv 32:2; -
sunighita, mfn., well finished; well prepared; Sn 48;
Thi 259 (kañka!)~ va sukataq¡ sunighitaq¡); Ja V
505,27* (m~saq¡ ... sukataq¡ sunit!hitaq¡; 506,17' foil.:
nitthapana
sambharayojanena t~ sughu yojit~, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nanasambharayojanena sutthu nighit~); Bv 1:11; -
caus. pr. 3 sg. nifthápeti, nitthapeti,finishes; completes;
brings to an end; Ja I 172,3 (na sakka -etuq¡, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se nitthapetum); 290,25 (tena hi khippaq¡ -eh! ti);
IV 474,21 (sace me rañño puttaq¡ na desi sve t~
-essaml ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nighapessami ti); Sp 805,8
(clvar~ -eti); Ps II 123,13 (kamm~ -entü ti, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nighapentü ti); Mhv 32:2 (thüpe anit!hit~
kammaq¡ -eh! ti); part.pr. nighapenta, mfn.,
Sp 811,33 (-ente, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nit!hapente);
Sv 772,34 (kayanupassan~ -ento, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
nit!hapento); - aor. 3 sg. nighapesi, A I 111,11 (ek~
cakkaq¡ -esi); Ja I 348,26 (sattha ... bhattakicc~ -esi,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nit!hapesi); Sp 49,8 (yaq¡ yaq¡
kammaq¡ na ni!thati taq¡ t~ attano anubhavena -esi);
Sv 8S8,11 (arahattanikütena desan~ nitthapesi); Dhp-a I
325.14 (imaq¡ dhammadesan~ sattha Soreyyanagare
samughitaq¡ Savatthiyaq¡ -esi); Vv-a 188,16 (navahi
masehi vihar~ -esi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nighapesi); -
3 pl. nighapesuq¡, Ap 185,21 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nighapetva ca); Bv-a 141,19; Mhv 4:64 (nighapesuq¡);
5:173 (-esuq¡); - absol. (a) nighapetva, nit!hapetva,
A I 111,22; Ja I 86,9 (attano kicc~ -etva, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nit!hapetva); II 279,11 (kumaro sipp~ -etva);
Vism 93,28 (-etva, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nitthapetva); Ps V
61,19 (desanaq¡ nit!hapetva); Mhv 35:91;
neg. anighapetva, Sv 418,9; Pj 11 114,18;
(b) nighapetvana, Ap 101,27 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nit!hapetvana); - pass. part.pr. nitthapiyamana, mfn.,
Sp 726,27; - pp nighapita, nighapita, mfn., finished,
completed; carried out; Ap 39,11 (-ito mayaramo ); Ps V
97,8 (desana nighapita); Spk I 205,16 (kataq¡ caritaq¡, -an
ti attho); - neg. anit!hapita, mfn., Mp V 34,2; -
fpp nighapetabba, nighapetabba, mfn., Vism 94,9 (sace
app~ avasitthaq¡ hoti -etabb~, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
nit!hapetabbaq¡); Sp 1109,3 (sabbeh' eva sannipatitva
dhovanasibbanarajanani -etabbani, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nit!hapetabbani).
nitthana, n. [from nit!hati], completion, culmination;
being finished; Vin III 144,27 (tayo [kutiyo] na -aq¡
gacchanti); V 142,2o (uposathakammassa samaggi adi
kiriya majjhe -~ pariyosan~; Sp 1346,15:
patimokkhanit!han~ pariyosanaq¡); DI 141,35 (sappi-
telanavanHadadhimadhuphi'il)itena e' eva so yañño -aq¡
agamasi); Ja IV 475,19 (idani te 0 -kalo ti); 492,9 (navahi
masehi . . . caturassasal~ -~ agamasi); Sv 860,6
(viharamaho catühi masehi -~ agamasi); Ps 11 156,16
(ayaq¡ anto ay~ koti ayaq¡ -~. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nit!ha);- 0 '-antika, mfn., defined by completion; V in I
255,21 (matika kathinassa ubbharaya ... -a); 255,28 (so
taq¡ civar~ kareti, tassa bhikkhuno -o ka!hinuddharo);
Sp lll2,28;- 0 -vacana, n., an expression for a finished
action; ? Patis-a 508,19 (nisidatl ti vattamanavacan~
kataq¡ ... nisinno ti -aq¡ kataq¡); - anitthana in Ee at
As 412,18 (anighanaq¡ gatavasena) is prob. wr; Be, Ce
anit!haii.gatavasena; Se anigha- ); - see also nit!ha.
nitthapana, n. [from caus. ofnit!hati],finishing; bringing
to completion; Ud-a 202,26 (bhattakiccassa 0 -vasena);
Patis-a 601,1 (papanat!hena ti [buddhiya] patighapitaya
nifthubha
o• -a~~ena).
nitthubha, nu~~ubha, m.n. [cf S. lex. ni~~hlva], spitting;
spitting out; Ja III 32,4 (saki~ jahita~ hi o -khe1asadis~
hot! ti, Be so; Ce, E e nughubha-; Se nu~~a- ); Pv-a 80,6
(khe!an ti -a~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee ninhubhana~).
nitthubhati, nu~~ubhati (and ninhuhati, nughuhati), pr. 3
sg. [cf S. ni~~lvati], spits; spits out; Vin 11 175,7 foll.
(bhikkhü parikammakataya bhümiya -anti .. . yo
-eyya ... , Be, Ce so; Ee nughuhanti ... nu~~uheyya ... ;
Se nughahanti ... nughaheyya ... ); Ja I 459,2foll. (ta~
khlra~ nughubhati nughubhanto pi udake anu~~ubhitva
segh!dh!taya sise nughubhati); 459,8 (ma nughubha, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se ma nu~~ubhi); VI 78,23' (dhimhaml ti
-ami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nitthumhami); Kv 472,23
(dinhisampanno puggalo buddhathüpe ohadeyya
omutteyya -eyya); Sadd 460,9 (-ami ti);
part.pr. nighubhanta, nu~~ubhanta, mfi -antl)n., Ja I
459,2 (nughubhanto); 11117,15 (-antl, Be so; Ce, Ee
nu~~ubhantl; Se nughahantl); V 134,8 (bahalakhe!~
-antl); - aor. 3 sg. nighubhi, nu~~ubhi, Ja I 507,8
(ek~ pa1,11,1a~ ... saha khe!ena bhümiya~ -i, Ce so; Be,
Ee, Se nughubhi); II 105,23 (kakkaretva -i, Be so; Ce, Ee
nughubhi; Se nu~~ahi); Ps III 329,17 (-i, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nicchubhi); - absol. nighubhitva, nughubhitva,
Vin I 271,35 (pa~iggahe -itva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nu~~uhitva); III 132.16 (ko im~ vasa1a~ duggandha~
amasissatl ti -itva pakkami, Be, Ce so; Ee ni~~uhitva; Se
nu~~uhitva); Ud 50,18 (kvaya~ ku~~~ kughiclvarena
vicaratl ti -itva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ni~~uhitva;
Ud-a 292,4: -itva ti kheJa~ patetva) f. Th-a I 185,26 (Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee nughubhitva); Ja VI 367,3 (-itva, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nughahitva); Sv 190,16 (gamadvare -itva yati)
= PsI 258,3o = Spk III 188,7 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nughubhitva) = Vibh-a 352,34 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nighuhitva); Dhp-a II 36,7 (-itva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nighuhitva);- neg. anu~~hubhitva, Ja I 459,3 (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee anughubitva); Vibh-a 452,17 (pubbalohit~
anu~~hubhitva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se anughuhitva); -
pp nughubhita, mfn., spat out; Saddh 121; - fpp
ni~~ubhitabba, n. impers., Vin II 175,9 (na bhikkhave
parikammakataya bhümiya -itabb~. Be, Ce so; Ee
nu~~uhitabb~; Se nu~~ahitabb~); - see also
oghubhati.
nitthubhana, nughubhana (and ninhuhana), n.
[cf S. ni~~! vana, Pkt 1,1i~~huhana], spitting out; spittle;
Jai 47,9 ( 0 '-adlhi); Sv 190,23 (-~ disva, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee nughubhana~) =PsI 259,2 = Spk III 188,13 (Be, Ce,
Se so; E e nu~~hubhan~) = Vibh-a 353,6 (Be, Ce
0
-ghan~; Ee, Se ni~~uhanaghan~); Pv-a 80,6 (khe!an
ti-~. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nighubh~); Sadd 404,11 (opa
-e: -~ khe!apatana~).
nitthura, mfn. [S. ni~~ura], harsh, rough, cruel; Abh 125
(pharusa~ -~ vaky~); 714 (kurüra~ ... -~
kakkha!a~); - -~. adv., harshly, cruelly; Pv-a 78,28
(y~ y~ asuci jeguccha~ tassa tassa nam~ gahetva
-~ vadati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nitthun~).
nitthuri(n), mfn. [cf S. ni~~hura, S. lex. ni~~hürin], harsh,
rough; cruel; (according to cts) resentful, spiteful;
Nidd I 440,24 (idh' ekacco -1 hoti paralabhasakkara-
garukaramananavandanapüjanasu issati ... , Ee, Se so;
558 nittarar,taka
Be, Ce ni~~uriyo ti); - anitthuri(n), mfn., not harsh,
not severe; (according to cts) not resentful, not spiteful;
Sn 952 (-1 ananugiddho, Be, Ce so; Ee -i; Se anughuri;
Pj 11 569,2foll. :-1 ti anissukl, aniddhuñ ti pi keci
pa~hanti, Be so; Ce, Ee anuddhañ ti ... -1 ti pi; Se
anu~~uñ ti anussukl, anuddharl ti pi; = Nidd-a I
436,8/oll.: Be, Se -1 ti anissukl, ani~~añ ti pi keci
pa~hanti; Ce anuddharl ti pi; E e anu~~añ ti pi).
nitthuriya, n. and mfn. rJrom nighura, ninhuri(n); cf S.
ni~~huratva; but also seen as connected to
ni~~ubhati qv ?], l. (n.) hardness, harshness;
resentment, spite; Nidd I 440.26 (-~ o -kamma~ issa
1ssayana issayitatt~ ... ; Nidd-ai 436,15/oll.:
nit!hurabhavo -~. ta~ nissaya ettak~ pi natthl ti
khe!apatan ti attho ... khe1~ patetva padena maddanto
viya -a~ nama karoti tassa t~ kamm~ o -kamman ti
vuccati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee khe!apatanan ti); Vibh 357,16
(yo makkho makkhiyana makkhiyatatt~ -~
0
-kammmp) = Pp 18,26 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niddhuniy~
niddhunlyakamm~, prob. wr); - 2. (mfn.) harsh;
resentful, spiteful; Nidd I 440,24 (katama~ -a~, idh'
ekacco -o hoti para1abhasakkaragarukaramanana-
vandanapujanasu issati ... , Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ninhuñ
hoti; Nidd-a I 436,15: -o ti issukl).
nitthuhati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nighubhati.
nitthuhana, n., see sv ni~~ubhana.
ni44a, m.n., see sv nl!a.
ni44áyati, ni44eti, pr. 3 sg., see sv niddayati 1.
ni44ha, m.n., see sv nl!a.
nh;n,1aya, ninnaya, m. [cf S. nifl,laya, BHS nifl,layana],
complete ascertainment, decision; a rejoinder; Abh 171
(nicchayo -o); Pj I 112,17 (kattha bhasitan ti pucchaya
0
-kar31,1a~, Ee so; Ce, Se ninnaya-; Be pucchaniyama-
kar31,1~); Sadd 920,6 (batti~sa tantiyuttiyo ...
pubbapakkho -o); 920,23 (so pubbapakkho tassa y~
uttara~ so -o).
nh,1háta, mfn., se e sv ninhata.
nitamba, nitumba, m. [S. nitamba], l. the buttocks;
Abh 272 (jaghana~ tu -o ca); - 2. the swelling side of
a mountain or bank of a river; Abh 608 (-o ka~ako);
Sv 209,26 (udakena bhinn~ pabbatapades~ ya~ -an ti
pi ... vadanti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se nadltumban ti pi) =
Mp III 201,7 = Vibh-a 367,4 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nitumban
ti pi) f. Spk II 54,22 (yo -o ti pi ... vuccati) = Mp II
357,27.
nitammati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. tamyati, niv'tam], is exhausted,
faints; is in great distress; Ja IV 284,11* (haday~ me
qayhate -ami; 284,w: -am! ti atiki1amami); Sadd 411,19
(nitami kilamane: -ati).
nitá!eti, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + ta!eti], strikes; Ja IV 347,27* (t~
seno -eti; 348,4·: paharitva ga1,1hati); VI 155,16*
(bujjhassu kho rajakali ma taha~ matthaka~ -emi, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se -esi~).
nitif}.f}.3, mfn., pp ofnittharati qv.
nitudana, n., see sv nittudana.
nittaca, mfn., see sv taca(s).
nittaf}.ha, mfn., see sv t31,1ha.
nittaddana, n. [cf S. niv'trd], paralysing; splitting; ? - ifc
see jivha-.
nittaraf}.aka, mfn., see sv nitthar31,1aka.
nittala
1 Sp 358,9 (sailghassa bhar~ -ati); Spk I 93,2o
nittala, mfn., see sv tala .
nittasa, mfn., see sv tasa.
nittareti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnittharati qv.
nitthpsa, mfn. [cf S. nistri~sa, "more than 30" ?], a term
of praise for an ascetic; (without 30; ? not being 30; ?)
Sv 1039,21 foil. (niddaso bhikkhu nibbiso -o niccattiJ1iso
nippaññaso bhikkhii ti ... titthiya ... visativassadikale pi
mata~ [nigaJ.ltha~] nibbiso -o niccattalJso nippaññaso ti
vadanti) =Mp IV 7,25foll.
nittil}a, mfn., se e sv tiJ?,a.
nittii}J}a, mfrl., pp of nittharati qv.
nittuddana, nitudana, n. [cf S. nitudati, nitoda, nistudati,
nistodana], pricking, piercing; - ifc see aragga-,
1 1
araggakoti- (sv ara ), valagga-, valaggakoti- (sv vala ).
nitteja, mfrl., see sv teja(s).
nitthanati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nitthunati.
nitthanana, n., se e sv nitthunana.
nittharaka, nittharaka, mfrl. [cf S. nistaraka], who
accomplishes, deals with;- ifc see sailghabhara-.
nittharal}a, n., mfn., and -a,f [cfS. nistaraJ_la], l. (i) (n.f)
getting across; escape (from), release; MI 134,3o
(kullupam~ vo bhikkhave dhamm~ desissami
o• -atthaya no gahaJ_latthaya); II 265,22 (bhagavata
oghassa -a akkhata); SI 193,16* (oghassa hi '-atth~
0
anekavihit~ maggam akkhasi) = Th 1243 (Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be nitaraJ?,atth~); S II 99,4 (kantarassa o• -atthaya
ahar~ ahareyyun ti); A Il 200,10 (santi bhante eke
samaJ_labrahmaJ?.a dvayena oghassa -~ paññapenti
s!lavisuddhiya ca tapojigucchahetu ca); Vism 347,11
(dukkhassa 0 '-atthaya); Cp-a 14,21 (ki~ mayh~
ekaken' eva s~saramahoghato -ena yanniinah~ pi
evariipo sammasambuddho hutva sadevak~ 1oka~
s~saramahaJ.I.J?.avato tareyyan ti); - ifc see 1oka-; -
(ii) (mfn.) connected with escape, with release; Ps Il
108,6 (puthujanassa hi pariyatti nama a1agadda va hoti
-a va); - 2. carrying out, accomplishing; dealing with;
S IV 177,3 (akkh~ abbhañjeyya yava-d-eva bharassa
o• -atthaya) = Nidd I 241 ,2; Mp I 392,23 (uppannesu
kiccesu tes~ -ena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -karaJ_lena);
0
IV 23,23 (uppannan~ sailghakiccana~ -ena bhar~
vahanfi ti bharavahino); Vv-a 131,17 (gehe kutumba-
bharassa 0 -samattha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niddharaJ_la-).
2 delivering;- ifc see sabba1oka- (sv sabba).
nittharal}aka, mfn. [nittharaJ?.a + ka ], carrying out;
taking up, dealing with; Sp 614,4 (uppanne kicce
0
-ghane pabbajitu~ vagan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nittaraJ_laka-); Ps II 84,8 (sailgam~ -yodhassa, Be, Se
0
so; Ce, Ee sailgamanittharaJ_lakayodhassa).
nittharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nistarati], l. crosses over; gets out
of, escapes; expiares; DI 73,6 (so . . . t~ kan tara~
-eyya) t- MI 276,4 (tamha kantara -eyya sotthina); S Il
98,26 (ta~ kantaravases~ -eyyu~); Ja V 71 ,8*
(kantara~ -issami); Sp 1157,17 (yena sakka nissaraJ_la
-itu~); Spk II 104,25 (kantara~ -ahi ti);
part.pr. nittharanta, mfn., Sp 1157,16 ( -antan~ etan ti
netthar~); - aor. 3 pl. nitthari~su, D II 346,17
(sotthina ta~ kantara~ -i~su);- 2.fulfils, carries out,
accomplishes; takes on, deals with; Ja I 357,13
(uppann~ kicca~ pan' assa bodhisatto va -ati); 441,15
(sabbe pi hi te attano patta~ bhara~ -anti yeva);
V 228,Jo (ko nu kho mama uppann~ bhaya~ -issati ti);
559 nitthuniiti
(uppannakiccassa yo t~ kicc~ vahati -ati); -
part.pr. nittharanta, mfi-anti)n., Ja III 386,15' (ta~ t~
kicca~ vahantl -anti);- aor. 3 sg. nitthari, Ja III 387,8
(sailgam~ -i, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ati);
absol. nittharitva, Ja I 443,8 (sahayan~ uppanna~
dukkh~ -itva sukhe patighapenti yeva ti); Sp 1018,4
(kantar~ -itva); - pp nitthii}J}a, nittiJ?,J?.a (and
nitiJ?,J?,a), mfn. [S. ni~tifl).a], who has crossed; who has got
out of, escaped; DI 73,Jo (so 'mhi etarahi ta~ kantara~
-o, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce tiJ?.J?.O) f- MI 276,8 (tamha kantara
-o); Vibh 256,5 (ima~ vicikiccha~ ÜJ?.J?.O hoti uttiJ?,J?.O
nittiJ?,J?.O); Ap 332,1 (-o si mahavira, Ee so; Be, Ce
nittiJ?,J?,O; Se vitiJ?,J?.O); 392,25 (nittiJ?,J?.O si mahamuni, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se ÜJ?.J?.O asi); Dhp-a IV 193,18 (kiva bahu~
vata imina dukkh~ -an ti, Be so; Ce, Ee nittiJ?,J?.an ti; Se
nitthinnan ti); - --ogha, nittiJ?,J?,a-ogha, mfrl., who has
crossed the torrent or flood; D II 275,7* ( --ogh~
vicikicchacchinn~, Ce so; Ee, Se nittiJ?,J?,a-; Be nitiJ?,J?,a-)
quoted Kv 187,6* (Be so; Se nittiJ?,J?,a-; Ce, Ee nitiJ?,J?,a-);
- neg. anitthiJ?,J?,a, anittiJ?,J?.a, mfn., not crossed; S II 98,15
(siya ca nesa~ kantaravaseso anitthiJ?.J?.O, Se so; Ee
anithinno; Be anatiJ?,J?,o; Ce anittiJ?,J?.O); 98,18
(kantaravaseso anitthiJ?.J?.O, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee anittiJ?,J?.O);
- fpp *nitthariya, mfn. ? - ifc see dunnitthariya; -
caus. pr. 3 sg. nitthareti, nittareti [S. nistarayati], helps
to cross; leads across; rescues, delivers (from); Nidd I
446,12 (satthavaho satthe kantar~ tareti ... uttareti -eti
patareti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nittareti; Be, Ce satte; Nidd-a I
439,JJ: nittareti ti akhemantaghanato nikkhamento tareti)
quoted Vism 208,18 (eds nittareti); Dhp-a III 235,2 (so pi
m~ samaJ_ladhammo -etu~ nasakkhi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
niddharetu~); Pj Il 444,1 (anusasati nittareti ca ti sattha);
Ap-a 350,9 (appabhakkhakantara ca tareti uttareti
patareti -eti khemantabhiimi~ papetl ti, Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se nittareti).
nitthara, m., se e sv netthara.
nittharal}aka, mfrl. [cf S. nistaraJ_la], releasing; leading to
release; Ps III 153.19 (0 -vattamhi na vattati apatti-
vutthanattha~ turitaturito chandajato na hoti, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce nittharaJ?,aka-).
nitthari(n), mfrl. [from caus. of nittharati qv], rescuing,
nitthii}J}a, mfn., pp ofnittharati qv.
nitthuna, m. [from nitthunati], groaning; Vin II 234,7• (in
uddana: -o).
nitthunana, nitthanana, n. [from nitthunati], groaning,
moaning; Vism 504,15 (upayaso . . . cittaparidahana-
1akkhaJ?.O 0 -raso); Sv 291,9 (therassa -saddo ti, Be, Se
0
so; Ce, Ee nitthanana-); Sadd 496,26 (thu -e: thunati, Be
so; Ee nitthu(na)ne).
2
nitthunati, nitthanati (and nitthunayati), pr. 3 sg. [ni +
2
thunati and!or thanati; S. nil).vl~tan], moans, groans;
V v-a 224,1 (nikkhamitu~ a1abhanta -anti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee nithunanti); part.pr. (a) nitthunanta,
nitthananta, mfn., Vin II 221,29 (-anta pi vacca~
karonti); Ja I 243,6 (kako .. . sve ... maya idam eva
khaditabban ti ratti~ -anto nipajji, Be so; Se
nitthunanto; Ce, Ee tintiJ?,anto) f- III 225,6 (-anto, Be so;
Ce, Se -ayanto; Ee tintiJ?,ayanto ); Il 362,18 (-anto nipajji,
nitthusa
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nitthananto); V 389,16 (dukkhayogena
-anto, Ce, Ee so; Be dukkhavedano; Se dukkhavegena);
Vism 311,35 (aññe -anta . . . dukkhaJ11 patibujjhanti);
Dhp-a I 425,11 (ubhohi hatthehi jmp:,mkani olambitva
-anto ughaya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nitthananto);
(b) nitthunamana, mfn., Ja I 463,6 (gilanalayarr dassetva
-amana nipajjati, Be so; Ce, Ee nitthanamana; Se
nighunamana); - absol. nitthunitva, nitthanitva, Ja V
295,5 (-itva, Be, Ce so; Ee nitthanitva; Se nighunitva);
- pp nitthunita, nitthanita, (mj)n., groaning; Ja V 295,6
(tassa --saddena, Be, Ce so; Ee nitthanita-; Se
nitthunita-).
nitthusa, mfn., see sv thusa.
nitthusakarp in Ee at Sp 43,2 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
nitthusakal).e.
nidarpsana, mf( -I)n. or -I,f rJrom nidarrseti; cf S.
nidarsana], showing;- ifc see kopina-.
nidarpseti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nidasseti.
nidati, nedati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nedati, Wg § 21 :8; cf S.
nindati, Wg § 3:28], blames; Sadd 385,18 (nida neda
kucchasannikarisesu: ... -ati nedati);- se e also nindati.
nidampaka, m. rJrom nidampati], one who picks off; ?
Sadd 404,2o.
nidampati, pr. 3 sg. [?], strips ( eg grain from a stalk); ?
Sadd 404,2o (nidapi nidampane: ... puriso vihisisarr -ati
rukkhapattarr -ati); - absol. nidampitva, Sadd 404,21;
(cf Sp 340,6: sajisisadini nirumbhitva va ekam ekarr
hatthen' eva chinditva ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nirappitva)
f. Vin-vn 155 (nirumbhitvana; vl nirampitvana;
Vin-vn-t [Be] I 99,5: -itvana ti yatha dhaññamattarr
hatthagata111 hoti tatha katva); - pp nidampita, mfn.,
Sadd 404,2o.
nidampana, n. rJrom nidampati], stripping ( eg grain from
a stalk); ? Sadd 404,16 (-a111 nama sassarukkhadisu
vihisisarr va varakasisarr va achinditva
khuddakasakharr va abhañjitva yathathitam eva hatthena
gahetva akac;lc;lhitva bijamattass' eva va PaJ?.J?.amattass'
eva va gahaJ?.arr; cfSp-t [Be] 11 144,14/oll.: nirumbhitva
gahal).aJ11 nama vihisisaJ11 acchinditva yathathitam eva
hatthena gahetva akac;lc;lhitva bijamattass' eva gahaJ?.arr).
nidassana, n. [S. nidarsana], l. showing; indicating;
Abh 1158 (-e itittharr ca); Vin V 164,n (opammaJ11
0
'-atthaya; Sp 1365,24/oll.: opammarr attha-
dassanatthaya); Vism 492,22 (so pana attabhavo yarr
dhammarr upadaya itthi ti va puriso ti va saitkhaJ11
gacchati ayarr so ti o• -atthaJ11); Sp 863,1o (bhikkhuna ti
yena laddhaJ11 tassa -aJ11); Sv 27,13 (evarrsaddo ... -e
[agato]); Thi-a 15,8 (yassa muttiya 0 -vasena); Nidd-a I
379,19 (ime ti dibbacakkhuna dighanaJ11 °-vacanarr); -
2. an example; an illustration; evidence; a comparison;
Abh 115; Sn 137 (yatha medarr -arr cai:J.c;!alaputto
sopako Matali.go iti vissuto); Vism 129,2o (Vakkalitthera-
vatthu e' ettha -aJ11); 554,3o (patighosapadipamudda-
patibimbappakara dhamma -ani siyurr); Mp IV 25,17
(seyyatha pi ti o• -atthe nipato ); Pj 11 184,3 (tam ev'
atthaJ11 -ena sadheturr); 371,2 (Nandamatu koghagararr
viya ti loke -arr ahosi); Vv-a 13,5 (vijju-r-iva ti
0
-vacanarr); Sadd 80,14 (paribhotabbo ti padassa
atthibhave khattiyo . . . na paribhotabbo ti pa)I -aJ11);
920,29 (ditthantasarryogo -a111);- 3. appearance, sight;
560 nidahati
visibility; Sv 997,14 (cakkhuviññiil).asaitkhatena saha
-ena ti sanidassanarr); 997,17 (cakkhuviññiil).asaitkhataJ11
nassa -an ti anidassanaJ11); As 46,26 (daghabbabhava-
saitkhatena saha -en a ti sanidassana); 46,29 (natthi
etesarr daghabbabhavasaitkhatarr -an ti anidassana); -
anidassana, mfn. and n., (what is) invisible; (what is)
not accessible to sight; D I 223,12* (viññaJ?.arr -a111
anantaJ11); M I 127,36 (aya111 .. . akaso arüpi -o; Ps 11
101,6: -o ti dassanassa cakkhuviññiil).assa anapatho);
S IV 3 70,11 (-a111 ca vo bhikkhave desissami --gamirr ca
maggarr; Spk III 112,11: cakkhuviññiil).ena apassitabbatta
-aJ11); Dhs 597 (yarr cakkhurr catunnarr mahabhütanaJ11
upadaya pasado attabhavapariyapanno -o sappatigho
yena cakkhuna . . . rüpaJ11 sanidassanarr sappatighaJ11
passi); Vibh 13,5 (atthi rüparr sanidassana111 atthi rüparr
-aJ11); 64,5 (cattaro khandha -a); Sadd 70,27; -
sanidassana, mfn., visible; accessible to sight; Vibh 13,4
(atthi rüpaJ11 -arr); Kv 333,2o (hañci passati cakkhurr
sotarr ghanarr jivharr kayarr tena vata re vattabbe
pañcindriyani -ani ti); Vism 8,14* (lakkhaJ?.arr ... --ttarr
rüpassa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -' -attharr); Sv 997,14;
As 317,1 (saddhirr nidassanena -a111 cakkhuviññai:J.ena
passitabban ti attho ).
nidasseti, -ayati, nidaJ11seti, nidarrsayati, pr. 3 sg.
[S. nidarsayati], shows; points out; teaches, instructs;
D III 154,12 (bahujanaJ11 -eti, Se so; Be, Ee nidarrseti;
Ce nidaJ11sesi); Ap 551,15 (iddhirr capi -ehi) =585,3 (Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -esi) f. 592,17 (-etha); Mil 73,11 (sakka
pana bhante Nagasena buddho -eturr idha va idha va ti);
Sv 27,31 (idani vattabbarr sakalaJ11 suttarr -eti); Ps 11
3,25* (khajjopanaka .. . -ayanti obhasarr); Pj 11 28,1
(ahan ti attanarr -eti); - part.pr. nidassenta, mfn., Pj I
207,12 (bahü pete rañño -ento); aor.
3 sg. (a) nidassesi, Ap 609,7 (tisso thiyo -esi iddhiya,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se tissitthiyo); (b) nidassayi, nidaJ11sayi,
D III 155,2* (bahujanaJ11 nidaJ11sayi); Bv 1:47 (patihirarr
-ayi); - absol. nidassetva, Th-a 11 48,21; - pass.
pr. 3 sg. nidass!yati, Ud-a 8,32 (vadanakaro idani
vattabbo eva111saddena -Iyati ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -iyati
ti); pp nidassita, mfn. [S. nidarsita], shown;
illustrated; Khp 7:13 (so ñatidhammo ca ayarr -o) =
Pv 5:12; Ap 552,19 f. 593,21; Sp 27,22 (pubbe -a);
Mhv 38:79; - fpp (a) nidassetabba, nidassitabba, mfn.,
Ud-a 13,2o (evan ti nidassitabbappakasanaJ11, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee niddisitabba-) f. It-a I 24,13 (Be, Se so; Ce
niddisitabba-; Ee nidassita-, prob. wr); Ud-a 13,21
(nidassetabbassa); Vv-a 12,27 (pithan ti nidassetabba-
vacanaJ11 etarr abbhakütan ti nidassanavacanarr); Th-a I
5,7 (sihanaJ11 va ti nidassanavacanarr nadantanan ti tassa
nidassitabbena sambandhadassanarr).
nidahaka, mfn., see sv nidahaka.
nidahati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. nidahati], bums; It-a 11 117,20
(yatha aggi yad eva indhanarr nissaya uppajjati tarr
-ati ... evam eva te pi ragadayo yasmirr santane sayaJ11
uppanna taJ11 -anti mahapari)aha ca honti
dunnibbapaya).
nidahati2 , nidheti (and nidhiyati 1 ?), pr. 3 sg.
[S. nidadhati; cf BHS nidahiya], puts or lays by;
deposits, stores, keeps; huríes; nidahati: Vin I 284,16
(civaranidahaka bhikkhü .. . nimbakose pi civara111
nidahana
-anti); II 113,21 (na bhikkhave UIJhe patto nidahitabbo,
yo -eyya apatti dukka~assa); 234,24* (in uddana: na ca
-e); Ja III 25,16 (asukasmiJ11 asukasmiJ11 ca ~hane
-issami); IV 280,3* (nidhiJ11 pi tattha -ami); VI 494,16*
(sabbaJ11 ta111 -eyyasi; 494,17': nidhiJ11 katva thapeyyasi);
Sv 611,18 ([dhatuyo] anagate Lankadlpe mahavihare
mahacetiyamhi -issantl ti, Be, Se so; Ce nidhayissantl ti;
Ee nidh!yissantl ti); Mp V 71,3 (manussa ñatake mate na
jhapenti ava~a111 kha~Jitva bhümiyaJ11 -anti); Dhp-a IV
34,16 (attano santakaJ11 bhümiyaJ11 va -anti pares~ va
vissajjenti); - nidheti: Khp 8:1 (nidhiJ11 nidheti puriso;
Pj I 217,n: thapeti pa~isameti gopeti); Ja V 118,u-
(nidhiJ11 nidhema); VI 494,21 (dhan~ nidhehl ti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se -eyyasl ti); Sp 864,11 (apanidhentl ti
apanetva nidhenti); Pv-a 132,2o (nidhana111 nidhessaml
ti); - nidh!yati 1: Ja IV 279,22* (kuhiJ11 saliJ11 nidh!yasi,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nidahasi; 279,25': nidhlyasl ti nidhesi
nidhana111 katva thapesl ti, Ce, Se so; Be nidahasl ti
nidhana¡p katva ~apesi, nidh!yasl ti pi pa~ho; Ee
nidhlyasl ti nidhesi only); - part_pr, (a) nidhenta, mjrz_,
Pj I 217,3; (b) nidahamana, mfrz_, Ja VI 494,28'; - aor,
3 sg, nidhesi, Ja I 225,10 (tava pita," dhana111 nidhesi);
Spk I 284,16 (sattha sahatthena cetiye dhatuyo nidhesi);
1 sg, (a) nidahissa(J11), Pv 36:21 (thale gahetva -issa
dussaJ11); (b) nidhesiJ11, Ja IV 313,11*;
inf (a) nidahituJ11, Ap-a 519,23 (sarlradhatuyo -ituJ11);
(b) nidhetUJ11, Sp 648,21; Ps II 331,24; (e) nidhetave,
Ja III 17 ,6* (mahanta111 kot~~ kayiratha duruttana111
nidhetave); - absoL (a) nidhaya, Dhp 142 (sabbesu
bhütesu nidhaya da~JgaJ11) f- Ja IV 452,23*; Dhp-a IV
175,22 (nidhaya ti nikkhipitva oropetva); Bv-a 2,16';
(b) nidahitva, Vin IV 87,19; Ja I 323,26 (eko seghl
nadltlre cattallsako~idhan~ -itva); III 155,21 (at~lni
aharitva . . . mattikathüp~ katva tani tattha -itva);
Mi1371,18 (kummo --· so~Jgipañcamani mi.gani sake
kapale -itva); Pv-a 97,17; - neg. anidahitva, Ja VI
494,27; (e) nidhetva, Sp 207,10; - pass. pr. 3 sg.
nidh!yati 2, nidhiyati, Khp 8:2 (nidhi nama nidh!yati, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nidhiyyati; Pj I 217,10; nidh!yatl ti nidhi
thaplyati rakkhlyati goplyatl ti attho, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
nidhiyatl ti); - part.pr. nidhlyamana, mjrz_, Pj I 222,26
(nidhlyamanassa puññamayanidhino, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nidhiyamanassa);- pp (a) nihita\ mfn. [ts], laid aside;
(what is) deposited, stored; hidden; laid down; Vin I
284,3 (nihitanihita111 ca janeyya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nidahitanidahitaJ11); S IV 324,29 (a~~a paccaya kulan~
upaghataya --·-~va nadhigacchanti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
-~ va thana vigacchati) f- Nidd I 4,24 (kath~ te kama
parihayanti __ . te bhoge rajan o va haranti __ . -a111 va
nadhigacchati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nihitatthana va
vigacchati); A I 254,6 (jatarüpaJ11 dhanta111 sandhanta111
niddhant~ -~ ninnltakasavaJ11, Ee, Se so; Ce
nikkhittakasavaJ11; Be niddhanta¡p niddhantakasava111; "1-
M III 243,19: Be, Ce, Ee nlhat~; Se nihata111; Ps V 54,15:
nlha~an ti nlha~ados~); Pv 28:7 (citta111 ca te idha -a111
bhavatu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Pv-a 190,15: -an ti idhüpanltaJ11,
idha ninnan ti va pa~o. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee natan ti idh'
upanat~); Ja III 25,s- ( --taya); !!6,18joll. (kaha111 nu
kho imina mama pitu santakaJ11 dhan~ -an ti manta111
parivattetva olokento uyyane --bhava111 ñatva); IV 256,5
561 nidana
(gaii.gatlre me -a111 kulasantaka111 dhana¡p atthi);
VI 236,33* (t~ kamm~ -a111 at~a bhasmacchanno va
pavako); Ap 68,12 (mattik~ pettikaJ11 capi natthi te -a111
dhan~, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nicitaJ11); Ps IV 111,17
(yasmiJ11 pana asanaghare dhatu -a hoti);
nihitadhikara~Jal11 in Ee at Sp 1349,13 is wr for
nihatadhikara~Jal11 (Be, Ce so; Se nlhata-);
--da~Jga, mfn., who has laid aside, eschewed, violence;
D I 4,2 (pii!Jatipata pativirato sama~Jo Gotamo --da~Jgo
--sattho 1ajjl); A I 211,19; Mil402,3; Dhp-a IV 175,17
(kh!IJasava nama --da~Jga); Pj II 65,2o (--da~Jgatta) =
Ap-a 153,12; - neg. anihitada~Jga, mfn., Pj II 65,21 =
Ap-a 153,13; - nihitapaccamitto in Ee at DI 69,34,
172,11 and 181,2o is wr for nihatapaccamitto (Be, Ce, Se
so); - anihita, mfn., not laid aside; A I 253,33
(jatarüpaJ11 dhant~ sandhant~ aniddhanta111 anihita111
aninnltakasav~, Ee so; Ce anikkhittakasav~; Be
niddhant~ aniddhantakasav~; Se adhant~
asandhant~ aniddhant~ anihita111 aninnltakasav~);
Nidd-a II 98,24 (da~Jgo __ . anihito); - sunihita, mfn.
and n., (what is) well or properly stored or laid down;
Khp 8:3 (see Pj I 219,19joll.); Pv 38:26;
pp (b) nidahita, mfn., Ja I 225,12 (atthi kiñci mayhaJ11
pitara dhana111 nidahitan ti);- fpp (a) nidahitabba, mfn.,
Vin I 46,28 (na ca UIJhe clvar~ nidahitabb~);
(b) nidhetabba, nidhatabba, mfn., Ja VI 494,22' (kuhiJ11
nu kho nidhetabb~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nidahetabb~);
Sp 839,31 (nidhetabbato); Sv 76,24 (hadaye nidhatabba-
yutt~ vac~ bhasita ti, Be so; Ee wr bhasatl ti; Ce
nidhetabba-; Se nidhatabbayuttak~) = Ps II 208,12 (Be,
Se so; Ce, E e nidhetabba-) = Nidd-a I 449,32 (Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nidhetabba-); Pj I 224,21 (nidhatabbo ti nidhi);-
caus, (a) pr. 3 sg. nidhapeti, D III 188,21 * (ekena bhoge
bhuñjeyya dv!hi kamma111 payojaye catutth~ ca -eyya
apadasu bhavissati; Sv 951,36: -eyya ti catutthaJ11
kotthasa111 -etva ~hapeyya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nidhetva);
Ja VI 297,12* (mita111 dhañña111 -eyya mit~ ca pacaye
ghare); - aor. 3 sg. nidhapesi, Mhv 20:12; - absol.
nidhapetva, Sv 951,36; - caus. (b) pp nidahapita, mfn.,
Ja II 38,3 (so me ratho manga1apokkhara~Jiya
antobhümiyaJ11 nidahapito ).
nidahana\ n, [from nidahati 1], buming; Ps III 90,1o
' -a~~hena aggi, Be, Se so; Ce, E e niddahan'- ).
0
(
nidahana2 , n. [from nidahati2], putting down; depositing,
storing; Sp 445,15 (0 ' -attha111 pavesantassapi).
nidagha, m. [S. nidagha], l. heat, warmth; the hot season;
Abh 80 (u~Jho -o gimhe); 954 (gimhe ghammo -o ca
U!Jhe); Ja I 221,31 (imasmiJ11 sare udakaJ11 paritt~
gocaro ca mando -o ca mahanto); 450,8 (tada himavante
ca~Jgo -o ahosi); IV 283,2o (kinnara vassarattasamaye
anotaritva pabbate yeva vasanti -e otaranti); V 404,3*
(kaja -e-r-iva); Vism 345,10 (-e aka1ameghena
abhivutthamhi Ca~Jga1agamadvare ava~e); Sp 345,4 (yo
pana -e sukkhavapiya mariyada¡p ... bhindati, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr -esu); Ps II 129,2 (-e pi tato p~sumughiJ11
gahetva tasmi111 mut~hina pljiyamane sineho
nikkhamati); - 2. perspiration; Abh 954 (-o ca , , .
sedaja1e).
nidana, n. [S,, BHS id.], l. cause, ground,- underlying and
determining factor; antecedent,' occasion; Abh 91 (-~
nidahaka
pabhavo hetu); Vin III 20,Js (bhagava etasmirp, -e
etasmirp, pakarar:te bhikkhusailgharp, sannipatapetva
ayasmantarp, Sudinnarp, pa~ipucchi; Sp 219,8: ettha
Sudinnassa ajjhacaravitikkamo sikkhapadapaññattiya
karar:tatta -arp, e' eva pakaraiJarp, ca ti vutto ); D II 57,16
(es' eva hetu etarp, -arp, esa samudayo esa paccayo
jaramarar:tassa yadidarp, jati); A I 134,Jsfoll, (t!IJ' imani
bhikkhave -ani kammanarp, samudayaya); Ja I 146,11
(kayo ... sokanarp, -arp, paridevanarp, vatthu); Mil 272,13
(roguppattirp, ca -arp, ca sabhavarp, ca . . . janitva);
Vism 104,21 (pa~isandhijanakarp, kammarp, cariyanarp,
-an ti); 478,36 ( 0 -tta); 533,3 (paccayo hetu kiiral)arp, -arp,
sambhavo pabhavo ti adi atthato ekarp, vyañjanato
nanarp,); Sv 471,34 (idarp, danarp, nama sukhanarp, -arp,);
Ps II l8,11 (kiiral)arp, hi yasma phalarp, nideti handa narp,
ga1,1hatha ti appeti viya tasma -an ti vuccati); Pv-a 253,9
(yarp, samaiJabrahmar:tanarp, danarp, nama anugamikarp,
-an ti vadanti, Ce, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Se
anugamikanidh! ti); Pa~is-a 524,26 (nicchayena dadati
phalam iti -arp,); Mhv 37:133 (-arp, tassa pucchiya);-
ifc see ito-, kuto-, chanda- (sv chanda\ tato-, yato-; -
2. preamble; introduction (giving occasion, setting,
context); Vin I 112.11 (-arp, uddisitva avasesarp, sutena
savetabbarp,; Sp 1057,15: suiJatu me bhante sailgho ...
avikata hi 'ssa phasu hot1 ti imarp, -arp, uddisitva; se e
Vin I 102,33/oll.); II 286,27 (ayasma Mahakassapo
ayasmantarp, Upalirp, pa~hamassa parajikassa vatthurp, pi
pucchi -arp, pi pucchi puggalarp, pi pucchi ... ); S V 172,5
(tarp, yeva -arp,); Ja I 2,2 (sa panayarp, jatakassa
atthavaiJIJana durenidanarp, avidurenidanarp,
santikenidanan ti imani tliJi -ani dassetva Va!,ll)iyamana);
Ap 43,14 (-e pariyosane sabbattha kovido aharp,);
Vism 213,23 (ekanusandhikarp, suttarp, -ena adikalyiil)arp,
nigamanena pariyosanakalyiil)arp, sesena majjhe
kalyiil)arp,); Sp 1367,8 (idarp, sikkhapadarp, asukasmirp,
nama nagare paññattan ti evarp, -arp, na janati); Sv 50,18
(imassa suttassa . . . kaladesadesakavatthuparisapadesa-
patimar:t<;litarp, -arp, bhasitarp,); PsI 3,1 (evarp, me sutan ti-
adikarp, -arp,); Pj II 580,3o (ayasma Anando sailgitikale
parayanavaggassa -arp, aropento ima gathayo abhasi);
Ap-a 284,2 (tena samayena ti-adike -e); As 29,32
(jatakasuttanipatadhammapadad!narp, evariiparp, -arp,
natthi); - ifc see avidure- (sv vidura), dure- (sv dura),
santike-; - 3. a rape, a ha/ter; ? - ifc see iccha-; -
0
-pafhanakusala, mfn., knowledgeable about preambles
and recitation; ? Mil 344,6 (bhikkhu vinayannu
vinayakovida -a, Ce, Ee so; Be ~hana~hanakusala; Se
0
-vatthukusala); - 0 -vatbp in Ee at A II 22,26 and
Nidd I 220,22 is wr for nidhanavatirp, (Be, Ce, Se so);-
anidana, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) without a cause; without
antecedents; M II 9,26; S V 213,17 (dukkhindriyarp, ...
animittarp, -arp, asailkhararp, appaccayarp,); A I 82,22; -
-arp,, adv., without a cause; S II 151,10;- 2. (n.) (what
is) not a cause; ? Nidd-a I 79,24 (-ena saha); -
anidanavatirp, in Ee atA II 22,21 is wr for anidhanavatirp,
(Be, Ce, Se so);- sanidana, mfn., l. with a cause, with
antecedents; M II 9,26 (-arp, samar:to Gotamo dhammarp,
deseti no anidanarp,; Ps III 241,17: -an ti sappaccayarp,);
S V 213,16; A I 82,21; - -arp,, adv., with a cause; S II
151,9 (-arp, bhikkhave uppajjati kamavitakko no
562 nidda
anidanarp,; Spk II 135,3o: -an ti bhavanapurp,sakarp, etarp,,
-o sappaccayo hutva uppajjat! ti attho); - 2. with its
introduction; Vin V 114,2 (upasampadarp, pucchissarp,
-arp, saniddesarp,); see also araññanidanaka
(sv arañña).
nidahaka, nidahaka, mfn. [[rom nidahati 2], (one) who puts
away; who deposits, stores;- ifc see clvara-.
nididdhika, f [S. nidigdhika], a plant; SAF: woody
nightshade, yellow-berried nightshade, Solanum
surattense Burm.f; Abh 585 (-a tu vyagghl ca).
nidisissami in Ee at Spk I 6,31 is wr for niddisissami (Be,
Ce, Se so).
nideti, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + deti; but cf S. nidyati], gives; Ps II
18,10 (karar:tarp, hi y asma phalarp, -e ti han da narp,
gal)hatha ti appeti viya tasma nidanan ti vuccati); Mp III
406,19 (kame -eti uppadanasamatthataya niyyadetl ti
nidanarp,); Nidd-a I 79,21 (attano phalarp, -etl ti
nidanam).
nidosa 1, ~fn., see sv dosa 1.
nidosa 2 , mfn., see sv dosa2.
nidda, m.n., see sv n!Ja.
niddaya, mfn., see sv daya.
niddara, mfn., se e sv dara 1.
niddasa, mfn. (and m. ?) [ni2 + dasa 1 ? (or ni 2 + dasa2 ?)] a
term of praise for an ascetic; (not ten ? without ten ?
more than ten?; not in a (conventional) stage of lije?);
D III 252,16 (satta 0 -vatthuni, idh' avuso bhikkhu
sikkhasamadane tibbacchando hoti ayatirp, ca
sikkhasamadane avigatapemo, dhammanisantiya ...
icchavinaye ... , Be, Ce Se so; Ee wr niddesa-;
Sv 1039,zJfoll.: niddasadivatthuni, -o bhikkhu nibblso
nittirp,so niccatta!Jso nippaññaso bhikkhu ti ... titthiya hi
dasavassakale matarp, niga1,1~harp, -o ti vadanti, so kira
puna dasavasso na hoti ... bhagava aha ... mama sasane
kh!IJasavass' etarp, adhivacanarp,, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
niddesadivatthuni ... niddeso ti ... ) = A IV 15,8; A IV
35,JJ (tesarp, aññatitthiyanarp, paribbajakanarp, .. . ayarp,
antarakatha udapadi yo hi koci avuso dvadasa vassani
paripul)l)arp, parisuddharp, brahmacariyarp, carati -o
bhikkhu ti alarp, vacanaya ti); 36,JJ (na kho . . . sakka
imasmirp, dhammavinaye kevalarp, vassagaiJamattena -o
bhikkhu paññapeturp,); Pa~is 1 5,Jo (satta 0 -vatthuni;
Pa~is-a 73,16/oll.: natthi etassa dasa ti -o, -assa
0
-bhavassa vatthuni karar:tani 0 -vatthuni, kh!IJasavo hi
dasavassakale parinibbuto puna pa¡isandhiya abhava
puna dasavasso na hotl ti -o ti vuccati).
niddahana, n. [[rom nidahati 1], buming; Ps III 90,10
(
0
' -a~~ena aggi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nidahan' -).
nidda,f [S. nidra], sleep; sleepiness, drowsiness; Abh 176
(-a tu supinarp, sopparp,); V in 1 15,7 (Yasassa
kulaputtassa ... -a okkami); III 112,8 (bhikkhu pa1,11tani
bhojanani bhuñjitva... -arp, okkamanti); M 1 249,36
(abhijanam' aharp, ... sato sampajano -arp, okkamita ti);
S I 43,2o* (-a tandl ca); 198,w• (ma -aya vasarp, gami);
Sn331 (aturanarp, hi ka -a); Th414 (maca -arp,
anuyuñjittha); Ja VI 32,9 (sa dibbasayane nipannamatta
va -arp, okkami); 294,3* (na -arp, bahurp, maññeyya, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee na niddannarp, bahurp, maññe); Nidd 1 423,9
(-a ti ya kayassa akalyata akammaññata ... pacalayika
supina supitattarp,); Sp 521,19 (makka¡assa -a
niddiina
lahuparivatta hoti); 1379,18 (sutto ti -al!l okkanto);
Mil 374,1 (yogina ... -al!l okkamitabb~); - ifc see
kapi-, kilesa-; - 0
-kilamathapativinodana, n., the
dispelling of weariness and drowsiness; M 1 83,6
(aññatra -a) t S 1 62,11 t A 1148,21.
1 not sleeping; Ja 1 108,7 (so digham addhanal!l --bhavena
niddana, n. [from niddayati ], l. cutting; weeding; SI
172,34* (sacc~ karomi -~; Spk I 253,31: -an ti
chedan~ 1unanal!l uppa!anal!l) = Sn 78; Spk I 254,4
(tv~ . . . sassadüsakan~ tü;¡anal!l hatthena va asitena
va -al!l karosi) = Pj II 148,1s; - ifc see kilesa-; - 2. a
weeder; Spk I 254,s foil. (atha va -an ti chedakal!l
lavak~ uppa!akan ti attho . . . tval!l dasal!l va
kammakar~ va -~ karosi niddehi tü;tani ti til)anal!l
chedak~ lavakal!l uppa!ak~ karosi) = Pj II 148,23fo/l.
2 refers to; defines, specifies; explains; proclaims,
niddayati\ niqqayati, niddeti, niqqeti, pr. 3 sg. [ni +
2
,/da ; cf S. nirdatr], cuts; weeds; Spk I 254,1o (niddehi
til)ani ti) = Pj II 148,26 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niddhehi);
Dhp-a III 284,2o (khettal!l vapami niddemi rakkhami ti,
Be, Ce so; Ee niddemi; Se niddhemi);
1 -issami maya eval!l sutan ti)= Spk 1 6,31 (Be, Ce, Se so;
absol. niddayitva , niqqayitva, Ja I 215,22 (-itva layitva
madditva, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se niqqayitva);
1 gahapatil!l -ati); PsI 10,26 (evan ti ca bhal)anto
fpp niddayitabba , niqqayitabba, mfn., DI 231,9 (sakal!l
khettal!l ohaya par~ khett~ -itabb~ maññeyya, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce niqqayitabbal!l; Sv 397,29: -itabban ti
sassadüsakani til)ani uppa!etva parisuddh~ katabbal!l,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niqqayitabban ti); - caus.
absol. niddapetva, niqqapetva, Vin II 180,27 (khett~ ...
niddapetva lavapetabbal!l, Be, Se so; Ce niqqapetva; Ee
niqqapetva); - fpp niddapetabba, niqqapetabba, mfn.,
V in II 180,26 (khettal!l . . . udakal!l ninnetva
niddapetabb~, Be, Se so; Ce niqqapetabb~; Ee
niqqapetabbal!l; Sp 1274,17: niddapetabban ti til)ani
uddharitabbani, Ee, Se so; Be niddhapetabban ti; Ce
niqqapetabban ti).
niddayate, pr. 3 sg. [S. nidrayati],falls asleep; sleeps; Ja 1
492,1o (sigalo kucchipüral!l mal!ls~ khaditva guh~
pavisitva -ati); IV 343,12foll. ( -atha tumhe ti na -ami
kil!l katabban ti); 431,24 (raja antarantara -ati e' eva
pabujjhati ca); Sp 360,20 (sace pi smikika -anti va jütal!l
va kijanti); Dhp-a II 183,15 (nipajjitva -issami);
Sadd 367,29 (da dane: ... supanakiriyal!l vadanto dayati
-ati nidda); 480,7 (da supane: dayati -ati); - part.pr.
(a) niddaya(t), mfn., Sp 1249,21 (-ato); (b) niddayanta,
mft-anti)n., Ja 161,22 (itthiyo ... -antiyo); Mil299,1o (yo
supin~ passati so -anto passati udahu jagganto passati
ti); Vism 73,14; Sadd 480,s; - neg. aniddayanta, mfn.,
Ja II 404,4; Dhp-a I 26l,!s; (e) niddayamana, mfn., Ja II
53,13; Cp 3:6:4 (-amano sayanavare); Dhp-a 1 307,13;
Th-a II 65,8 (idisal!l nama supina~!~ mughassatina
asampajanena -amanena maya dighan ti, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee mughassati asampajano hutva); Sadd 480,7; - aor.
3 sg. niddayi, Dhp-a III 175,17 (so nisinnako va -i);
3 pl. niddayil!lsu, Ja V 13,25; - 2 pl. niddayittha, Ja VI
408,25 (ajja raJa palayissati ma -ittha ti);
1 pl. niddayimha, Spk II 230,12 (ma ciral!l -imha ti); -
absol. niddayitvi, Ja V 110,1 (thokal!l -itva pabuddho);
Spk I 86,s (tavatil!lsabhavane mahavimanadvare -itva
pabujjhanto viya pa!isandhil!l aggahesi);
2 Cp-a 2,13 (bhajanattho pi hi pi!akasaddo -o); As 57,2o
neg. aniddayitva, Ja III 403,21; - fpp niddayitabba , n.
impers., Dhp-a 1 69,14 (diva na -itabbal!l).
563 niddisati
2
niddayana, n. [from niddayati ], sleeping; Ja II 267,24
0
(tassa -bhaval!l ñatva); III415,21 (etassa -kale);
0
Dhp-a II 54,13 (tadisaya iriyapathasampattiya sam-
annagatassa me ayyassa yava imamha kala -al!l nama
natthi); Sadd 480,7 (niddayati -~); - aniddayana, n.,
kilanto).
2
niddayita(r), m. [from niddayati ], one who sleeps;
Dhp 325 (middhi yada hoti mahagghaso ca -a
samparivattasayi) Th 17 (Th-a I 73,26: -a ti
supanasllo ).
niddalu, mfn. [S. nidralu], sleepy; sluggish; Abh 733 (-ü
niddasllo).
niddisati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirdisati], points out, indicates;
declares; D III 135,15 (tathagato ... yal!l etasmil!l antare
bhasati 1apati -ati sabbal!l tal!l tath' eva hoti no aññatha)
= It 122,1; Ja lii 297,1· (ayan ti bodhisattal!l -ati);
Nett 4,27* (nayehi tihi -e sutt~); Sv 29,6 (yal!l sutt~
Ee wr nidisissami); Sv 179,25 (kasma pa!hamal!l
desanasampattil!l -ati); Ud-a 5,12* (-e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr niddese); Vv-a 169,1o (Gotame ti bhagavantal!l
gottena -ati); Pv-a 87,14 (man ti attanal!l -ati, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr niddissati); - part.pr. niddisanta, mfn., Ja IV
373,15' (hatthal!l pasaretva te -anto); Vism 498,1o
(ariyasaccani -antena); Pj 11 162,23 (caturo pi samal)e
catuhi gathahi -anto ); Th-a I 240,14 (attanal!l paral!l vi ya
-anto); As 306,4 (upadarüp~ sailkhepato uddisitva
puna tad eva vittharato -anto); - aor. 3 sg. niddisi,
Vin III 220,12 (yal!l ... ay asma veyyavaccakaral!l -i);
Ap 595,24 (upakaral!l ca -i, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -i); Spk 1
337,16 (bhagava ca nal!l etadagge -i); PsI 24,2o;
Sadd 135,5; 3 pl. (a) niddisil!lsu, Pj II 61,7; (b) niddisul!l,
Mhv 37:191; absol. niddisitva, Pj II 163,16;
Pa!is-a 202,4 (saccacatukkal!l -itva); As 187,32 (-itva,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nisiditva); - neg. aniddisitva,
Vibh-a 123,1; - pass. pr. 3 sg. niddislyati, Ud-a 15,13
(paccayakaravasena nanappakara duppa!ividdha ca su tan
ti -iyanti, Se so; Be suttanta ti dipitan ti; Ce, Ee suttanta
ti dipiyanti) t It-a I 26,5 (Be, Se suttattha -Iyanti; Ee
sutan ti -iyanti; Ce omits); Pv-a 163,15 (eko pi
janapado ... Pañcalanan ti bahuvacanena -Iyati, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr niddissiyati); Sadd 376,25 (kasma vassita-
saddena manussabhasa -Iyati ti); - pp niddittha, mfn.
[S. nirdi~!a], pointed out, indicated; defined, specified;
explained; declared, proclaimed; foretold; Vin II 232,4*
(in uddana: -al!l satthavahena vatt~); Ap 298,2o (aggo
araddhaviriyan~ -o sabbadassina); 426,14 (-a no
mantapade cakkhumanto, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se di!!ha no
vo); Nett 5,3*; Mil3,25; Vism 3,2o; Sp 241,3 (te pana
vinayapi!ake pajiyal!l na --tta na vutta); Sv 133,29 (ajato
yeva rañño sattu bhavissati ti nemittikehi -o ti
Ajatasattu); Pj 11 110,21 (purisena mahapa!havil!l va
akasal!l va ailguliya niddisantena na ailgulimatto va
padeso -o hoti); Bv-a 296,1 (imasmil!l pana sakale pi
buddhaval!lse -anal!l pañcavisatiya buddhanal!l);
(aniyamato samayo -o hoti); - aniddi!!ha, mfn., not
niddisana
indicated; not specified; Sp 675,3 (aylll!l hi kappiya-
karako nama sailkhepato duvidho niddigho ca aniddigho
ca); Patis-a 393,26 (vajjan ti napu111sakavacana111 asuko ti
aniddighatta katlll!l); Sadd 300,32; - suniddigha, mfn.,
well or properly declared or explained; Mi1130,17
(suniddigha ... gabbhavakkanti); 273,1o (suniddigho eso
attho tathagatena); Dhp-a I 335,9 (sukathita111
suniddigha111 bodhipakkhiyadhammapada111);
fpp niddisitabba, mfn., Vin III 221,26; Nett 95,27
(tal_lhasaii.ki1eso tilii ta1_1hahi -o); Ud-a 13,2ofoll. (evan ti
-ppakasana111, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nidassitabba-) f. It-a I
24,13 foil. (Ce so; Be, Se nidassitabba-; Ee nidassita-);
Nidd-a I 10,21 (aya111 hi mahaniddeso pathato atthato ca
uddisantena niddisantena ca sakkacca111 uddisitabbo -o
ca); Patis-a 240,36 (--tta); Sadd 684,13 foll.; - see also
suniddise.
niddisana, n. ffrom niddisati], referring to, specifying;
proclaiming; It-a 11 190,!8 (suttageyyadippabhedlll!l
dhamma111 bhasati o -vasena); Patis-a 551,36
(aññavimokkhe -ato).
niddukkhayavibuddho in Ee at Pj I 15,23 is wr for
niddakkhayavibuddho (Be, Ce, Se so).
niddeti, pr. 3 sg., see sv niddayati 1.
niddesa, m. [S. nirdesa], l. instruction, arder; Ja V 238,12*
0
( -kañ puriso; 238,21·: tassa -lll!l a1_1attim eva yo koci
puriso karoti); - 2. (specific) mention or reading;
indication; Vism 514,26 (kiñcapi hi paFya111
sHakkhandhe ti bhummena -o kato attho pana
kara1_1avasen' eva veditabbo); Sp 107,23foll. (kasma
yatha suttante eka111 samayan ti upayogavacanena -o
kato . . . tatha akatva idha tena samayena ti
kara1_1avacanena -o kato ti); Vv-a 154,22 (puññapekkhana
pa1_1inan ti anunasika1oplll!l katva -o); Pv-a 147,26 (satta
ti vibhatti1opena -o); Thi-a 270,11 (katha111 ehibhikkhuni
ti vibhali.ge -o kato ti); Nidd-a I 1,16* (patho visittho -o);
- ifc see ukkagha- (sv ukka111sati); - 3. detailed
explanation; specification; Vism 267,17 (aylll!l ettha
p~iva1_11_1ana pubbailgamo -o); 498,24 (catunna111
saccanlll!l -e jati-adayo dhamma vutta); Nett 4,28*
(akkharlll!l padlll!l vyañjanlll!l niruttl tath' eva -o) f.
Sadd 907,3; Sp 534,28 (ummasanaya ca ullailghanaya ca
-e uddhlll!l uccarana ti ekam eva pada111 vutta111, so read
with Be, Ce, Se; see Vin III 121,18foll.); Nidd-a I
3,21 foll. (nibbacanavittharo nissesato deso ti -o ...
atthavittharo niravasesena kathitatta -o nama, Be, Se so;
Ce atthavittharassa; Ee atthavittharaniddharavasena);
5,!5 (bhagava ... niruttihi uttanikaroti -ehi paññapayati);
11,7 (kama111 kamayamanassa ti evamadi uddeso, kama ti
uddanato dve kama vatthukama kilesakama ca ti
evamadi -o); 287,27 (imassa gathaya -o uttanattho);
Patis-a 116,19 (tasa111 abhidhamme evlll!l -o kato); 553,7
(katamo ti-adike uddesassa -e); As 152,26 (tasmi111 kho
pana samaye cattaro khandha honti ti evamadiko uddeso
katame tasmi111 samaye cattaro khandha ti-adiko -o);
Vibh-a367,15 (ten' ev' assa -e; see Vibh251,23);
Sadd 920,14 (samasavacanam uddeso vittharavacanam
-o);- ifc see kattu-, kattllra- (svkatta[r]\- 4. th~
name of one of the texts making up the Khuddaka-nikaya
of the PaJi Canon; the Niddesa (the Mahaniddesa, a
commentary on Sn 766-975; and the Cii)aniddesa (or
564 niddhamati
Cullaniddesa), a commentary on Sn 976-1149 and
Sn 35-75); Nidd 11 73,7* (-a duvidha ñeyya, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr niddessa); Vism 24,4 (mahaniddese tividha111
kuhanavatthu agatal11); 209,22 (sabbo pi 0 -nayo va
patisambhidanayo va vittharetabbo); Sp 695,25
(mahabhaye kira ekass' eva bhikkhuno mahaniddeso
pagu1_1o ahosi); Sv 15,22 (tato para111 jataka111 -o
patisambhidamaggo apadana111 suttanipato ... , Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee mahaniddeso cii)aniddeso) f. Mp III 159,s f. Pj I
12,9; Sv 394,7 (sabblll!l cii)aniddese vuttanayen' eva
veditabba111, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee mahaniddese, prob. wr;
see Nidd 11 ad Sn 1037); Ps I 153,12 (aylll!l ettha
sailkhepo, vittharo pana mahaniddese vuttanayen' eva
veditabbo ); Pj 11 202,5 (sabblll!l -e vuttanayen' eva
gahetabblll!l); Nidd-a I 1,15* (Sariputto mahapañño ...
dhammacakka111 vibhajetva mahaniddesa111 abravi); 9,s
(maha ca so -o ca ti mahaniddeso ti vuccati); 11 28,4 (-e
apubblll!l natthi); Cp-a 11,3 (tatha hi vuttlll!l -e);
Dlp 5:37 (te bhikkhii ... parivarlll!l ... patisambhidlll!l ca
-a111 ... vissajjetvana aññani kari111su te); Sadd 13,6* (yo
patho -e); 389,s (ayasma pi Sariputto -e ...
vattamanavacanena attha111 niddisi); - niddese in Ee at
Ud-a 5,12* is wr for niddise (Be, Ce, Se so);- niddeslll!l
in Ee at Th-a 11 274,14 is wr for niddosa111 (Be, Ce, Se
so); - niddesavatthiini in Ee at D III 252,16 is wr for
niddasa- (Be, Ce, Se so);- mahliniddesatthakathli,f,
the commentary on the Mahaniddesa; Nidd-a I 91 ,30
(saddhammapajjotikaya -aya kamasuttaniddesava1_11_1ana
nighita); - mahliniddesaval}l}anli,f, the commentary
on the Mahaniddesa; Nidd-a I 471,16 (-a samatta); -
saniddesa, mfn., with the specification; Vin V 114,2
(upasampada111 pucchisslll!l sanidanlll!l -a111;
Sp-t [Be] III 470,4: pugga1adiniddesena).
niddessli in Ee at Nidd 11 73,7* is wr for niddesa (Be, Ce,
Se so).
niddosa\ mfn., see sv dosa 1.
niddosa 2 , mfn., see sv dosa2.
niddha, mfn. [cf S. snigdha], glossy; smooth; -
0
'-anta, mfn. [niddhanta 1; niddha + anta1], with glossy
ends; Ja VI 218,9* (kassa vatena chupita -a muduka)aka
sobhayanti na)atantlll!l, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se siniddhagga;
219,r: -a ti siniddha-anta ... kass' ete evariipa kesa
na)atanta111 upasobhenti, Be so; Ce -a ti siniddhanta; Ee
wr -a ti siniddharuta; Se siniddhagga ti siniddha-agga).
niddhana, mfn., see sv dhana.
niddhanta\ mfn., see sv niddha.
niddhanta2 , mfn.,pp ofniddhamati qv.
niddhanta111 kammapapaka111 in Ee at Ap 612,6 is prob.
wr; Se nudantlll!l; Be, Ce rundhantlll!l katapapaklll!l).
niddhamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirdhamati], l. blows on;
purifies (by jire); A I 253,32 (ta111 jatariipa111 miisaylll!l
pakkhipitva dhamati sandhamati -ati); - 2. (trans.)
blows off, blows away; gets rid of; A IV 169,1 (-ath'
eta111 bhikkhave pugga1a111); Dhp 239 (kammaro rajatass'
eva -e ma1am attano; Dhp-a III 340,2o: -eyya); Sn 281
(kara1_1<;lava111 -atha); Nidd I 478,26 (suva1_11_1akaro
jatariipassa o)ariklll!l pi ma1a111 dhamati sandhamati -ati;
Nidd-a I 453,31: -aH ti apunabhavappattiklll!l katva
niharati, jhapeti ti keci vadanti); PsI 201,16 (ki111 ime
ahirika anottappino ti vadanti, -atha ne ti); -
niddhamana
3. (intrans.) blows away, dissipates; disappears;
Mil43,19 (vejjo ... pañcamülabhesajjani ... gilanakarp.
payeyya tehi ca dosa -eyyurp); - absol. niddhamitvana,
A IV 172,9* (-itvana papicche) = Sn 282; Sp 69,15*
(pisace -itvana); - pass. pr. 3 sg. niddhamiyati,
Mil 43,29 (pañcindriyehi kilesa -iyanti);
pp (a) niddhanta2 , mfn., l. [BHS nirdhanta] purified (by
fire ); A I 254,5 (jatarüparp. dhantarp sandhantarp -arp.) f.
MIli 243,18; - --kanakattaca, mfn., with skin like
purified gold; Ap 464,15;- --suva1_11_1a, n., purified gold;
Pj Il 119,24 (--suva1_11_1am iva vigatüpakkilesan ti) =
Nidd-a II 145,13 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e niddhota-); -
neg. aniddhanta, mfn., not (properly) purified; A I 253,33
(tarp. hoti jatarüparp. dhantarp. sandhantarp. aniddhantarp
anihitarp. aninnitakasavarp, Ee so; Be niddhantarp.
aniddhantakasavarp.; Ce niddhantarp. anihitarp.
anikkhittakasavarp.; Se adhantarp asandhantarp
aniddhantarp. anihitarp aninnitakasavarp.; Mp II 362,6:
aniddhantan ti na nigga1_1hitva dhantarp., Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be aniddhantakasavan ti anihatadosarp. anapanita-
kasavarp); - 2. blown off, blown away; got rid of, A V
220,28 (sammadi~!hikassa bhikkhave micchaditthi -a
hoti); Mil43,28 (pañcamülabhesajjehi gilanassa dosa -a);
- --kasavamoha, mfn., with impurity and delusion got
rid of; Sn 56 (Pj II l08,12foll.: moharp !hapetva
pañcannarp kasavanarp. tesarp. ca sabbesarp mülabhütassa
mohassa --tta --kasavamoho, ti1_11_1am eva va
kayavacimanokasavanarp mohassa ca --tta);
--mala, mfn., with stains got rid of, without stain;
Dhp 236; - pp (b) niddhamita, mfn., blown away, got
rid of, Mil43,3o (niddhamita ca kilesa na puna
sambhavanti); Mp V 71,10 (niddhanta ti niddhamita);-
fpp (a) niddhamaniya, mfn., A V 220,26 (dasa. .. -a
dhamma; Mp V 71,10: -a ti niddhamitabba, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee omit); (b) niddhamitabba, mfn., Spk I 93,11
(gatagata~!hane niddhamitabbo va hoti ti, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se gatagatatthanena damitabbo va); - caus. (a) absol.
niddhametva, Pj II 434,11 (paribbajayitva ti nikkhametva
niddhametva); caus. (b) pr. 3 sg. niddhiipayati,
makes get rid of," chases away, expels; Ja IV 48,16* (-aye
tarp. saka agara, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niddhamase); - aor.
3 pl. niddhapayirpsu, Ja IV 41,26* (tato galavinitena
purisa -ayirpsu marp, Ee so, unmetrical; Be, Ce, Se
niharirpsu); - pp niddhapita, mfn., got rid of; expelled;
Ja Ili 99 ,8* (katharp nu sakharnigarp. dakkhisama -itarp.
rajakulato va jammarp, Ce, Se so; Be niddhavitarp.; Ee
nibbapitarp.; 99,10': -itan ti nicchuddharp nikka<;l<;lhitarp.,
Ce so; Se nicchu<;l<;larp.; Be niddhavitan ti nivu~!hapitarp
nikka<;l<;lhapitarp; Ee nibbapitan ti nicchuddharp.
nikkhamitarp).
niddhamana, n. [AMg 1_1iddhama1_1a, niddhama1_1a], a
drain; a gutter; a channel; Vin II 145,14* (in uddana:
santitthati -arp; cfl42,12: anujanami bhikkhave udaka-
niddhamanarp.); Ja I 425,14 (eko sigalo ... -ena nagararp
pavisitva); IV 28,27 (eko coro ... arakkhamanussehi ca
anubaddho -ena nikkhamitva); - ifc see udaka-; -
0
-tumba, m., a drainage pipe; Sp 330,2o (mahat¡¡Jakassa
-arp nissaya); 344,18; Spk II 79,25 (-e vivaritva); -
0
-paniiJi,f, a drainage-pipe or channel; Sp 344,24 (-irp
uggha~etva);- ifc see gütha-.
565 niddhunati
niddhamanii, f [from niddhamati; cf S. nirdhamana],
getting rid of; ejecting; Ja V 233,11* (pura -a hoti sayam
eva cajam' aharp.; 234,3·: yava givaya gahetva
nikka<;l<;lhana na hoti).
niddharaJ.Ia- in Ee at Vv-a 131,17 is wr for nittharal_la-
(Be, Ce, Se so).
*niddharati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirVdhf], settles, determines; -
absol. niddharitva, Nidd-a Il 32,27 (abhisari.kharonti ti
kho bhikkhave tasma sari.khara ti evarp. -itva, Ce, Ee so;
Be niddharitva; Se niddharetva; = As 51,34: Be, Ce
niddharetva; Ee nidharetva; Se vittharetva;
Sadd 911,22: niddharetva);- caus. pr. 3 sg. niddhiireti,
-ayati [S. nirdharayati], ascertains; determines; picks
out, singles out, particularizes; aor.
1 pl. niddharayimha, Cp-a 302,15 (cara1_1adinarp
danadisambharanarp. paccayabhavo yatharaharp. -etabbo
ativittharabhayena na -ayimha ti); absol.
niddharetva, Th-a I 34,11; II 279,12 (labhalabhadisu
seyyarp -etva); Nidd-a II 32,27 (abhisati.kharonti ti kho
bhikkhave tasma sari.khara ti evarp. -etva sahetukarp.
katva vuccamana abhilapa nirutti nama, Se so; Be -itva;
Ce, Ee niddharitva) = As 51,34 (Be, Ce so; Ee
nidharetva; Se vittharetva) Sadd 911 ,22;
fpp niddharetabba, mfn., It-a I 45,28 (itararp -etabbarp);
Cp-a 34,31 (mahakaru1_1adayo bodhisattagu1_1a idhapi
yatharaharp. -etabba);- see also aniddharita.
niddhiipayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofniddhamati qv.
niddhiimase in Ee at Ja IV 48,16* is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
niddhapaye.
niddhiiraJ.Ia, n. [S. nirdhara1_1a; cf Pa1_1 2:2:10, 2:3:41],
singling out, specifying one of many; particularising;
Pj I 224,4 (purimasmirp ca atthe -e bhummavacanarp.);
Ud-a 103,14 (imesarp. dvinnarp raJunan ti -e
samivacanarp.); It-a II 105,17 (-e e' etarp samivacanarp,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr tetarp); Bv-a 39,5 (0 -lakkha1_1aya
cha~!hiya samaso pa~isiddho); Sadd 724,22foll.
(ubbahanasari.khate -e chatthi vibhatti hoti sattami ca,
ettha ca ubbahanan ti sasane voharo -an ti
saddasatthe ... -arp nama ... ekassa puthakkara1_1arp.).
niddhiivati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirdhavati], streams or springs
(from); Ap 16,13 (-anti mu!aliyo; Ap-a215,2ojoll.: ito
kaddamabbhantarato hatthida~ha viya gacchanti ti attho);
83,15 (pabha -ate tuyharp.); Bv 4:26 (tato -ati rarp.si
anekasatasahassiyo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -anti; Bv-a 152,14:
-ati ti -anti, vacanavipariyaso da~!habbo); 10:27 (tassa
vyamappabha kaya -ati disodisarp.).
niddhunakarp, ind., (prob.) 1_1amul absol. of
niddhunati qv.
niddhunana, n. [from niddhunati], shaking off,· shaking
out; Sp 222,16 (kilesanarp sal1ekhanataya e' eva 0 -taya
ca); - ifc see kasa~a-, pa~ipakkha-.
2
niddhunanaka, mfn. [niddhunana + ka ], shaking off;-
ifc see kilesa-.
niddhuniiti, niddhünati, nidhunati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nidhiinoti,
nirdhünoti], shakes, shakes to and fro; shakes off;
Vin IV 196,26 (kacavararp cha<;l<;lento hattharp. -ati, Be,
Ce so; Ee -ati; Se niddhünati); D II 336,18 (imarp.
purisarp . . . -atha . . . te tarp. purisarp odhunanti
sandhunanti -anti; Sv 811,18: -atha ti aparapararp.
karotha); MI 229,1 foil. (valarp. ka1_11_1e gahetva
niddhuma
odhuneyya -eyya . . . vadena vad~ odhunissami
-issami; Ps II 272,3: uddhamukha~ katva dhuneyya);
S III 155,27 (pabbajalayako pabbaja~ layitva agge
gahetva odhunati -ati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nidhunati) =
A III 365,2 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nidhunati; Mp III 384,24:
ubhohi passehi dhunati); Th 416 (Mara~ indasagotta
-ahi; Th-a II 176,27: vidhamehi viddh~sehi); Th-a I
33,26 (sabbe pi sañkilesadhamme -ati samucchedavasena
pajahati); aor. 3 sg. niddhuni, Nidd I 83,4;
3 pl. niddhuni~su, D II 338,3 (te t~ sailkha~ ...
odhuni~su . . . sandhuni~su . . . -i~su); - absol.
(a) niddhunitva, Sp 893,26 (hatthaniddhunakan ti
hatth~ -itva -itva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se niddhünitva
niddhünitva); PsI 165,8 (sabbasave -itva, Be, Ce so; Ee
nidhunitva; Se nighailgametva); (b) (l).amu1)
niddhunak~, niddhünak~; - ifc see hattha-; -
fpp niddhunitabba, mfn., Sp 542,7 (na apehi mahallike ti
-itabba, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niddhünitabba).
niddhuniymp and niddhuniyakamma~ in Ee at Pp 18,26
are prob. wrr for nitthuriya~ and nighuriyakamma~
(Be, Ce, Se and Vibh 357,16 so).
1 S. nidanavat], containing treasure; ? (like treasure; ?)
niddhuma, mfn., see sv dhüma .
niddhuvana, n. [cf S. nidhuvana], sexual intercourse;
Sadd 408,7* (imani pana methunadhammassa namani:
s~vesanaiJ1 -ai]1 methunaiJ1 ... ).
niddhünati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niddhunati.
2 nidhatabbayutt~ vacaiJ1 bhasita ti attho) -¡. M I 180,3 -¡.
niddhüpana, mfn., see sv dhüpana .
niddhüma, mfn., see sv dhüma •
1
1
niddhümaka, mfn. [ni 2 + dhüma + ka ],freefrom smoke,
2
no longer smoking; Ja V 488,25* (-e pacilaiJ1 sadhu
pakk~; 488,29·: -e nijjale aggimhi, Ce so; Ee
nidhümake; Se niddhüme; Be niddhüme nijjhale
aggimhi).
niddhovati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 2 + dhovati], washes; washes off;
gets rid of; A I 253,21 (san ti . . . jatarüpassa o!arika
upakkilesa . . . tam enaiJ1 p~sudhovako . . . dol).iy~
akiritva dhovati sandhovati -ati; Mp II 362,5: -ati ti
niggal).hitva dhovati); pp niddhota, mfn.
[S. nirdhauta], l. washed off; got rid of, A V 217,7 foll.
(sammadighikassa bhikkhave micchadighi -a hoti);
Nidd I 78,2 (taya paññaya kayaduccaritaiJ1 dhulaiJ1 ca
dhotaiJ1 ca sandhot~ ca -~ ca; Nidd-a I 206,13:
visesena sughu -a~ ca) quoted Sadd 497,25; -
2. washed; purified; Dath 5:63 (--rüpiyamayaiJ1); -
--jatim3J).Í, m., a washed gem; Vism 256,29
(parisuddh~ --jatimal).i vi ya jutimanlaiJ1 khayati) = Pj I
54,5; - --SUV31).1).a, n., purified gold; Nidd-a II 145,13
( --suval).J).am iva vigatüpakkilesan ti, Ce, E e so; Be, Se
niddhanta- ); - suniddhota, mfn., very well cleansed;
Sp 727,32 (kocchena sughu vitacchit~, suniddhotan ti
attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee suviniddhotan ti; -¡.
Kkh 2 138,1foll.: sughu niddhotan ti attho).
nidveJhaka, mfn., see sv dve!haka.
nidhana, m.n. [ts], end, death; Abh 404 (-o nitthiyaiJ1);
Ap 534,16 (Gotami -aiJ1 yati anicc~ sabbasailkhat~);
Mhv 38:34 (Pithiyo Dami!o sattamasena -aiJ1 gato);
Sadd 401,8 (vinaso -an ti vuccati ti).
2 Mil 356,2 (-i assasakaral).aya); Sv 284,8 (tathagatassa
nidhatabba, mjn.,fpp ofnidahati qv.
nidhana, n. [ts], l. putting or laying by, depositing,
keeping; a place for depositing; a receptacle; Ja III
566 nidhi
17,11' (dhaññan~ 0 '-atthaya mahanta~ koghaiJ1 katva);
IV 280,23' (nidhinidhanan ti nidhino -~. nidhananidhin
ti pi patho ayam ev' attho, Be so; Ce, Ee
nidhiiJ1nidhanan ti; Ce nidhinidhanan ti pi patho; Se
nidahanti pi pa!ho); Vism 344,34 ([aharo] n' eva
suval).l).abhajane na mal).irajatadibhajanesu -aiJ1
gacchati); Sp 728,28 (civarassa 0 -ka1o); Sv 76,23 (-~
vuccati thapanokaso); 611,13 (tumbe dhatuyo aharatha
ah~ -aiJ1 karissami); Dhp-a I 366,12 (patilabhena pi
paribhogena pi -ena pi atitt~); - 2. anything stored
up; a store; treasure; Ja III 448,4 (mama -ai]1
uttaradvare pakarantare !hapitan ti); Sp 310,14
(mahant~ -~ na sakka ekena aharituiJ1); Ps III 245,16
(imasmiiJ1 cetiye viya aññatra ettak~ dhatün~ -ai]1
nama natthi); Pv-a 132,2o (anugamik~ -aiJ1 nidhessami
ti);- 0 -kusala, mfn., good, skilful at laying by, storing,
keeping; A IV 339,17 (na ca -o hoti; Mp IV 158,25foll.:
y~ 1addhaiJ1 laiJ1 dakkhil).eyye nidahitui]1 cheko na hoti
paralokamagg~ na sodheti); Ap 43,23 (arakkhatthaya
bhal).<!assa -~ naraiJ1; Ap-a 284,36: rakkhal).e kusai~
chekaiJ1);- 0 -Vati, (m)f(n). [but perhaps cfS. -val, or
(according to cts) worth storing or treasuring; DI 4,31
(sama~). o Gotamo kalavadi . . . dhammavadi vinayavadi
0
-vatiiJ1 vac~ bhasita; Sv 76,24: nidhan~ vuccati
thapanokaso, nidhanaiJ1 assa atthi ti 0 -vati hadaye
Nidd I 220,22 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nidanavatii]1) = 472,22;
- neg. anidhanavati, (m)f(n)., MI 287,3 (anidhanavatiiJ1
vac~ bhasita; Ps II 331,24: hadayamañjüsaya nidhetuiJ1
ayutt~ vac~ bhasita hoti) -¡. III 48,15 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr aniddhanavatiiJ1) -¡. A II 22,21 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
anidanavatim);- see also dhatunidhanaka (sv dhatu).
2
nidhanaka, nidhanika, n. [nidhana + ka ], depositing; -
ifc see dhatu-.
2
nidhapeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnidahati qv.
2
nidhaya, ind., absol. ofnidahati qv.
nidhayaka, n. (?) depositing; a place for depositing;- ifc
see dhatu-.
nidhi, m. [ts], a store, hoard; treasure; Vin I 150,21
(bhikkhu asamikaiJ1 -ii]1 passati); Khp 8:8 (eso -i
sunihito ajeyyo anugamiko ); Dhp 76 (-inaiJ1 va
pavattaraiJ1; Dhp-a II 107,6: -inan ti tattha tattha
nidahitva thapitan~ hiraññasUV31).1).adipüran~
-kumbhin~); Sn 285 (brahmaiJ1 -im apalayuiJ1); Ja I
0
332,1 * HIJ1 kakassa nasaya; 332,8·: kaka kalal~
pavisitva thite macche . . . niharitva khadanti tasma
nes~ antokalale maccha -i ti vuccanti) = Cp 3:10:7;
Ja I 91,2o (aya~ te pita etassa mahanta -ayo aheSUIJ1, Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se -iyo) = Sp 1009,7 = Ap-a 96,6 (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee -iyo); Ja II 414,16* (esa devamanussanaiJ1 sabba-
kamadado -i); III 24,28* (tass' eva mülasmi -i nikhato
adayado); IV 280,10' (nidhinidhanan ti -ino nidhan~.
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nidhiiJ1nidhanan ti); VI 37,26 (deva
tes~ no -in~ udanaiJ1 kathetha ti); 38,6 (-ihi
saddhiiJ1); 41,18 (tes~ paccuggamanat!hane -ina
bhavitabban ti); Ap 477,10 HIJ1 va laddha kapal).o);
pana jatadivase yeva ... cattaro -ayo upagata); Mp IV
120,10 (salta -i laddhapurisassa aghamaiJ1 dento viya);
nidhiyati
Pj I 224,s (etassa -issa); - ifc see kala-, jala-; -
0
-acikkhanaka, m(jn)., one who points out or gives
information about a hoard or treasure; Dhp-a II 106,22;
-
0
-dassaka, 0 -dassanaka, mfn., who shows or reveals a
treasure; (who sees a treasure ?); Pj I 21,3o (-o viya
buddho nidhi viya dhammo 0 -ppatto viya jano sangho,
0
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee -dassanako).
2
nidhiyati 1,pr. 3 sg., see sv nidahati .
2 ninda, f [ts], blame; criticism, fault-finding; Abh 121
nidhiyate, pass. pr. 3 sg. ofnidahati qv.
nidhunati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niddhunati.
2 7,23* (yo -am apabodhati, Be so; Ce, Ee appabodhati; Se
nidhetabba, mfn.,fpp ofnidahati qv.
2 niddam apabodheti; Spk I 37,14foll.: yo garaha111
nidheti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nidahati .
ninada, m., see sv ninnada.
ninahata, mfn., see sv ninhata.
ninada, m., see sv ninnada.
nindaka, m(jn). [ts], (one) who blames, criticises; Mp IV
72,8 (piyagarahl ti piyajanassa -o garahako).
nindati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nindati], blames; criticises; censures;
Dhatup 137 (ninda garahaymp); Dhatum 195; SI 149,20*
(tmp va -ati yo pasa111siyo); A II 8,5* (ko tmp -itum
arahati); Dhp 227 (-anti tm.J.hi'11 asma111 -anti
bahubha~inmp); Ja V 221,19* (-eyyu deva pitara ca
sabbe, Be, Ce, Se so; E e -eyyu111); 225,9· (-issati
pasa¡psissati va); VI 576,3" (darra111 pasa111sama na -ama
ti); Nidd I 320,9 (upavadati -ati garahati); Sp 876,27
(vinaya111 viva~~eti -ati garahati); As 404,16 (attano
kucchippama~a111 nama na jarrati ti -anti); Sadd 379,32
(nidi kucchaya111: . . . -ati ninda); part.pr.
(a) nindanta, mfn., Ja II 108,2·; Vism 106,27 (para111
-anta¡p sutva -ati); Pj II 324,6 (ta111 pasusamarambha111
-anto); (b)nindamana,mfn., JaVI63,13 (-amarra, Be,
Ce, E e so; Se nindiyamana); Sv 871,9 (attano
khattiyadhammmp -amarro); - aor. 3 sg. nindi, Ja V
8,8· (akkosi garahi -i); Sp 219,13; 3 pl. nindisu111,
Cp 3:6:11 (kalak~~~ ti -isu111, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -i111su,
unmetrical; Cp-a 221,19: -isun ti ... garahi111su, niddisun
ti pi pa~o, vadi111sil ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -i111sun
ti); - absol. ninditva, Pj II 284,12; - pp nindita, mfn.
and n., l. (mfn.) [ts], blamed; criticised; Dhp 228
(ekanta111 -o poso); Ja l 146,32* (-o cakkhubhütehi kayo
balabhinandito); VI 360,22* (so -o hoti sabhaya majjhe);
Nidd I 306,s (sabbe -a yeva honti); Mil277,31 (atidana111
nama loke vidühi -a111 garahita111); - 2. (n.) blame;
criticism; Nidd I 299,2 (--kar~a; Nidd-a I 363,16:
garahahetuna); - anindita, mfn., not blamed, not
criticised; irreproachable; A I 215,21* (puññani katvana
sukhudrayarri anindita saggam upenti ~ana111); Dhp 227
(natthi loke anindito); Ap 574,10 (cara dhammam
anindite, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr vara); Ja III 419,16"
(anindita ti agarahita uttamarilpadhara); V 57,18* (idha
e' evanindita yena pecca yena anindita);
aninditangl, (m)f(n)., of faultless limbs; beautiful in
body; JaiV 106,6• (eka nisinna ... aninditangi; 106,11·:
padantato yava kesanta aninditasarira paramasobhagga-
ppattasarira, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se kesagga); V 96,13*
(aninditangiyo khattiyakañña); - fpp (a) nindiya, mfn.,
SI 149,19* (yo -mp pasa111sati; Spk I 215,27: -an ti
ninditabbmp dussilapuggala111) = Sn 658; Ja VI 379,18*
(-am attha111 pasmpsiya111 va); Mp III 3,4 (-an ti
ninditabbayuttakmp);- pi nindiya in Ee at Pv-a 23,11 is
567 ninna
wr for pinindriya (Be, Ce, Se so);
(b) ninditabba, mfn., Ja V 80,7•; Spk I 215,28 = Mp V
60,17; (e) nindaniya, Pj II 477,18 (nindiyan ti nindaniymp,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se ninditabba111); - see also
anindilocana, nidati.
nindana, n. [from nindati], blaming; criticising; Dhp-a III
328,13 (ida111 -arp va pasa111sana111 va ajjatana111 adhuna
uppannmp vi ya na hoti).
(khepo -a tatha kuccha); 1055 (-a kucchapavadesu); SI
apaharanto bujjhati) = Dhp 143 (Ce so; Ee appabodhati;
Be, Se niddmp apabodheti); A IV 157 ,5* (-a pasmpsa
ca); Sn 826 (-aya so kuppati; Nidd I 165,14: -aya
garahaya akittiya av~~aharikaya); 895 (sabbe va te -am
anvarrayanti); Th 617 (idh' eva -a111 labhati peccapaye
ca dummano); Ja III 32,7* (mahi111 sagaraku~<;lalmp na
icche saha -aya); Nidd l 80,13 (pasa111saya mana111 janeti
-aya omana111 janeti); Vibh 387,4 (pasa111saya sarago
-aya pativirodho); Mil299,1; Dhp-a III 329,5 (balanarp
-a va pasa¡psa va appama~a111); Cp-a 270,22 (ayasesil ti
-asu); Sadd 380,4•;- ninda111 in Ee at Vism 607,14 is wr
for nandi111 (Be, Ce, Se so);- -rosa, m., fault-finding
0
and offending; MI 360,26 (anindarosmp nissaya -o
pahatabbo; Ps Ili 39,7: -o ti 0 -ghagana); 362,33; -
neg. anindarosa, m., MI 360,25;- 0 -rosi(n), mfn.,fault-
finding and offensive; M I 362,36 (-I assa111); - neg.
anindarosi(n), mfn., MI 363,7 (anindarosissa);
0
-vyarosa-uparambhab haya, n., fear of faultfinding,
insult and criticism; M III 78,16 = S Ili 73,7;
0
-vyarosana-uparambh abhaya, n., id.; A Il 31,24; -
see also anindilocana.
nindita(r), m. [cf S. nindiq-], one who blames, criticises;
Ja IV 254,2* (yen' eva eko labhati pasmpsa111 ten' eva
añño labhate -armp); VI 83,16' (vattaro ti -aro bhavanti).
ninna, n. and mfn. [S., BHS nimna], l. (n.) low ground; a
hollow, a depression; M l 79,4 (-ena -mp thalena thalmp
papatami); Khp 7:8 (unnáme udaka111 vut~a'11 yatha
-mp pavattati; Pj I 212,31: yQ bhümibhago -o onato ta111
pavattati gacchati papu~ati); Dhp 98 (-e va yadi va
thale); Sn 30 (-a111 ca thala111 ca pilrayanto mahamegho
pavassi); Thi 114 (padodakmp ca disvana thalato -am
agata111); Ja III 430,15* (ida111 pure -am ahu
bahumaccha111 mahodika111; 430,18·: idan ti
mangalapokkhara~i111 sandhaya vadati); V 446,24"
(visame padese rukkhacchaya -a111 pi orohati thala111 pi
abhirilhati); Mil57,23 (deve vassante katamena udaka111
gaccheyya ti yena bhante -a111 tena gaccheyya ti); 179,8
(bhagavato gacchantassa aymp acetana mahapathavi
-a111 unnamati unnata111 o~amati ti); - 2. (mfn.) (i) low,
low-lying, sunken; deep; Abh 669 (gabhiraninna-
gambhira); Vin III 147,29 (mahanta111 -mp pallala111);
Ja Il 3,6 (ekasmi111 -e sakatamagge); Vism 185,17 (yarp
sañre o -ghana111 akkhikilpo va antomukha111 va ... );
Sp331,21 (katthaci 0
-ghane udaka'11 tighati);
Ud-a414,13* (-a111 tharrmp unnamati gacchante
lokanayake); - (ii) bending towards; inclined towards;
S V 48,1 (yena bhante -o yena po~o yena pabbharo ti);
Sp 733,2 (pari~atan ti sanghassa -mp sanghassa po~mp
ninnadati
sali.ghassa pabbhiirf1111 hutva J:hitf1111); Sv 456,33 (cittf1111
pabbajjaya -arp.jatarp.); Ps II 367,28 (tasmirp. viveke -fll11
onatan ti vivekaninnarp.); Nidd-a I 342,lo (0 -taya);
As 278,24 CO-tta); - ifc see nibbana-, paccha-, pacina-,
viveka-; - 0
-ga,f, a river; Abh 681; Ud 91,11*;
Vism 10,5•; DaJ:h 4:28; - 0 -tara, mfn., lower; Th-a I
198,13 (mahasamudde --padesa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
ninnata padesa, prob. wr).
ninnadati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. ninadati], sounds, makes a
noise;- aor. 3 pl. ninnadurp., Ja V 49,16* (sabbe va naga
-urp. ghorarüpf1111, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ninnadu); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. ninnadayati [BHS nimadayati],fills with noise;
makes resound; Th-a II 131,31 (tf1111 th1inf1111 madhurena
vassitena -ayanti); - part.pr. ninnadayanta, mfn.,
Ap-a 537,5•;- pp ninnadita, mfn. [BHS nimadita],Jilled
with noise; resounding; Ja V 305,6·
(mattavaraJ.lakoñcanadena ca -ita); VI 568,3* (-ita te
pathavl); Ap 500,25 (-ita tada bhümi gajjirp.su ca
payodhara).
ninnamati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 2 + namati], bends; curves; Ja III
323,7• (capo -ati); - pp ninnata, mfn. [cf S. nin:tata],
bent; bowed; - -'-unnata, mfn., bent and prominent;
Ja V 69,7• (pi!!hi te -' -unnata); - ninnata in Ee at
Th-a I 198,13 (mahasamudde -a padesa) is prob. wr; Be,
Ce, Se ninnatarapadesa); - caus. pr. 3 sg. ninnameti,
-ayati [cf BHS nin:tamayati], puts out (the tongue); M II
143,12' (kacci pahütajivho si ... -ay' etf1111 tanukarp.); -
absol. (a) ninnametva, DI 106,12 (bhagava jivhf1111 -etva
ubho pi ka!,ll,lasotani anumasi patimasi; Sv 276,10: -etva
ti niharitva); Ja I 164,8 (sisf1111 patetva jivharp. -etva);
(b) ninnamayitva(na), Ap 321,7 (jivhf1111 -ayitva ca, E e,
Se so; Be, Ce -ayitvana).
ninnaya, m., see sv ni1,11,1aya.
ninnahuta, n., num. [cfnahuta], a very high numeral;
Abh 474; Spk I 219,5 (satf1111 satasahassanahutani -fll11
satarp. satasahassaninnahutani ekf1111 abbudf1111) = Mp V
62,12 = Pj II 477,4; Sadd 802,5.
ninnada (and ninada, ninada), m. [S. ninada, ninada;
BHS nimada], sound; noise; resonance; Abh 128 (ravo
-o ninado ca saddo ); Ap 105,24 (-o ca maha ah u asaniya
phalantiya); Mi1148,22 (in cpd: bhimabhaya-
janakaninnada-, Ce, Se so; Be, E e -ninada-); Spk II 367,6
(tesf1111 tesf1111 -anf1111 mahaghosassa abhavena
appanigghosani, Ee so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se ninnada-
mahanigghosassa); Ud-a 149,25 (sabbaturiyani sakf1111
sakarp. -arp. muñcirp.su); Dath 5:31 (muñcirp.su
dibbaturiyani ... ninadf1111, perhaps me); - ifc se e eka-;
-se e also ghananinnadasussara.
ninnadi(n), mfn. [cf S. ninadin], resounding, resonant; of
deep timbre; Abh 129; D II 211,24 (aghañgasamannagato
saro hoti vissagho ca ... gambhiro ca -i ca) f- M II 140,8
(Ps III 394,16: -i ti ninnadava).
ninnanakaral}a, mfn. and n. [ni2 + nanakaraJ.la qv
sv nana], l. (mfn.) [BHS nimanakaraJ.la] without a
difference; not different (from), the same; Ja III 104,2·
(same -e pi puggale, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr ti
nanakara1,1e); Ps III 219,2 (sadisarp. hoti -arp.); Spk II
254,22 (-f1111 hi etf1111 atthato) =As 353,2 (Be so; Ce, Ee,
Se -kara1,1arp.); It-a II 22.21 (arahattamaggato hi -fll11
arahattaphalarp.); 187,15 (tathagatasaddabuddhasaddanf1111
568 nipaka
atthato --tf1111 dasseturp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
-kiira!,latarp.); As 51,28 (tayo atthato -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr ninnakaraJ.la); Sadd 724,28 (ubhayf1111 pi pan' etf1111
vyañjanamattena nanarp. atthato pana -f1111);- 2. (n.) the
lack of a difference; identity; Spk III 247,10 (etesf1111-fll11
veditabbf1111); Sadd 541,16 (atJ:hakatha ti ca attha-
sarp.vaJ.ll,lana ti ca -arp.).
ninnama, m., or ninnami(n), mfn. ffrom ninnamati],
depression, low ground; or bending downwards, sinking;
- ifc see unnamaninnami(n).
ninnamana, n. ffrom ninnameti], putting out (the tongue);
- ifc se e jivha-.
ninnameti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofninnamati qv.
ninnayaka, mfn., see sv nayaka.
ninnita\ mfn. [pp of *ni2 + ;lnij; S. nin:tikta], washed off;
cleaned off; - 0 -kasava, mfn., with impurities cleaned
off; M III 243,19 (tf1111 hoti jatarüparp. . . . niddhantf1111
nihatf1111 -f1111, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nihata-; Ps V 54,16: -an
ti apanitakasavf1111, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nihatakasavan ti) f-
A I 254,6 (E e, Se so; Be niddhanta-; Ce nikkhitta- ).
ninnita2 , mfn., pp of *ninneti qv.
ninnejaka, m. [S. nin:tejaka], a washerman; Abh 510 (-o
ca rajako).
ninneta(r), m. ffrom ninneti; cf S. nin:tetrl. one who
ascertains, settles; a guide; MI 111,19 (bhagava ...
atthassa -a amatassa data; Ps II 76,29: atthf1111 niharitva
niharitva dassanasamatthataya atthassa -a) = Patis II
194,25 (Patis-a 646,27: atthf1111 niharitva niharitva
nayanato atthassa -a).
*ninneti, pr. 3 sg. [S. nin:tayati], leads or takes away;
takes out; drains; ascertains; - absol. ninnetva, Vin II
180,26 (khettf1111 kasapetabbarp. .. . udakf1111 atinetva
udakf1111 -etabbf1111 udakarp. -etva niddapetabbf1111);
Sv 276,8 (hadayamf1111Sfll11 -etva dasseyya
sammasambuddho ti, Be, Ce so; Ee wr nintetva; Se
niraharitva); - pp ninnita2, mfn., led down, led away;
Ja VI 146,17* (te dani ayyaputta cattaro vadhaya ninnita;
147,5·: vadhaya niyanti);- fpp ninnetabba, mfn., Vin II
180,26 (udakf1111 -etabbf1111; Sp 1274,16: -etabban ti yatha
udakam sabbatthane samam hoti evam katabbam).
ninhiita: ninah~ta, mfn. [p~ of *ni 1 .or ni2 + .nhayati],
washed, cleansed; A IV 144,25 (ninahatatta nahatako
hoti, Ee so, but prob. wr; Ce, Se nahatatta; Be nhatatta
nhatako); - 0
-papaka, mfn., cleansed of evil; A I
273,15* (sucirp. soceyyasampannf1111 ahu -f1111; Mp II
371 ,2o: sabbe pape nahapetva dhovetva !hitarp.) l-
It 56,12* (Be, Ce, Se so; E e ni1,1hata-) = Nidd I 58,6•; Pj II
428,13 (sabbapapakani maggañiil,lena ninhaya dhovitva
taya --taya); - 0 -sabbapapa, mfn., cleansed of all evil;
Th 348 (-o 'mhi; Th-a II 146,25: vikkhalitasabbapapo
amhi); - see also ninhaya.
ninhaya, ind. [absol. of *ni 1 or ni2 + nhayati], washing,
cleansing; Sn 521 (ninhaya sabbapapakani . . . tam ahu
nhatako, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se ninnahaya; Pj II 428,13:
ninhaya dhovitva) f- Nidd-a I 177 ,17;- se e also ninhata.
nipa in Ee, Se at Ja V 6,3* is prob. wr for nipa qv.
nipaka, mfn. [cf S. lex., BHS nipaka], intelligent, clever,
adept; Vin I 350,4• (sace 1abhetha -arp. sahayf1111) =
Sn 45 (Pj II 93,27: -an ti pakatinipul,lf1111 PaJ.19.itf1111
kasi1,1aparikammadikusa1arp.); D II 267,5• (Sakyaputto va
nipakka
jhanena ekodi -o sato) t Sn 962 (Nidd I 478,14: -o
Pa!!<:lito paññava buddhima ñiiJ.!I vibhavi medhavi); S I
13,21* (atapi -o bhikkhu) quoted Vism 1,6* (Vism 3,23:
-o ti nepakkarp vuccati pañña taya samannagato ti
attho); A IIl 24,10 (samadhi¡p bhikkhave bhavetha
appamiiJ.larp -a patissata); lt 28,1* (yo ca satima -o jhayi
atapi ottappi ca appamatto); Sn 1038 (tesarp me -o
iriyarp puqho pabrühi marisa); Th 85 (jhaya¡p -o
patissato adhigaccheyya sukharp niramisa¡p; Th-a I
192,23: -o ti kammaqhanapariharill!e kusa1o); Ja VI
293,28* (anuddhato acapa1o -o sa¡pvutindriyo; 293,31': -o
ti paripakkaña¡;¡o); 295,12* (appasi -o suro); Ap 327,29
(rukkhamüle vasantassa -assa satimato ); Vibh 426,11 *
(dhira -a nipu¡;¡a atthacintaka); Mi1342,21* (appiccha -a
dhira); Mp II 253,19 (-o ti sappañño); Pj II 93,3o ( 0 -ttena
dhitisampada vutta, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se o• -atthena) =
Nidd-a 11 128,4 (Be, Ce so; Ee -o ti ekantena; Se
0
-atthena) = Ap-a 173,13 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee o• -atthena);
Sadd 403,13joll. (pe sosane: payati payati va -o ...
nipayati visoseti pa!ipakkha¡p tato va attanarp nipati
rakkhati ti -o sampajano);- see also nepakka.
nipakka, mfn., see sv nippacati.
nipaeea, absol. ofnipatati qv.
nipaeeate, caus. pass. pr. 3 sg. ojnipatati qv.
nipaijati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nipadyate], lies down; Vin I 274,37
(dutiyena passena satta mase -ahi ti); III 131,22 (-a
bhagini); SI 61,13* (bhutva bhutva -anti paragaresu
mucchita); 11 230,22 (yattha yattha ti!!hati yattha yattha
nisidati yattha yattha -ati); A III 190,10 (rukkhacchayaya
nisideyya va -eyya va); Ja I 150,27 (migo gantva
dhammaga1_1<;likaya sisa¡p !hapetva -atu); II 368,7
(poriii_lakarajano . . . deve avassante . . . samadinnasila
sirigabbharp pavisitva dabbasanthare sattaha¡p -anti);
V 434,14 (parammukhi -ati); VI 25,2* (eko raja -ami
niyate Pal!¡;tasanthate); - fut. 1 sg, (a) nipajja¡p, ? D II
135,12* (catuggu¡;¡arp patthara me -a¡p, Ee so; Be
santhara; Ce nipaccha¡p; Se santhari me -i¡p) =
Ud 84,22* (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se santhara); (b) nipajjissami,
D II 137,14 (tvarp Ánanda antarena yamakasiilanarp
uttarasisaka¡p mañcaka¡p paññapehi, kilanto 'smi
Ánanda -issami ti); (e) nipajjissa¡p, Th-a III 160,4; -
part.pr. (a) nipajja(t), mfn., Sp 459,4 (nisidato va -ato
va); (b) nipajjanta, mj(-anti)n., Ap 372,1 (cari.kamanto
-anto nisinno uda va !hito); Sp 932,17 ( -antina¡p, Be, Ce,
Se so; E e nippajjantina¡p); Spk II 230,13 (sarira-
darathavinodanattharp -anta); (e) nipajjamana, mjn.,
Ps II 324,14; As 321,15 (tighamana -amana nisidamana);
- aor. 3 sg. (a) nipajji, Vin III 132,14 (mañcake uttana
-i); Ja I 391,25 (anu!!hanaseyyaya -i); Mil281,22
(Vessantaro raja puttadana¡p datva pa1_1¡;¡asiilarp pavisitva
-i); Vism 313,6; Mhv 36:75; (b) nipajjittha,
Mhv 37:118; 3 pl. nipajji¡psu, Vin IV 274,13; M II 124,7;
Ja V 22,24 (bhita manussa urena -i¡psu);
absol. nipajjitva, Vin II 155,33 (buddhagataya satiya
-itva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -i; =SI 211,4: eds -i); Sp 927,24
(nisiditva -itva gacchantiya dve, Be so; Ee nippajjitva;
Ce, Se nisiditva nipajjantiya dve); Mhv 32:7; -
neg. anipajjitva, Dhp-a I 40,10; - pass. pr. 3 sg.
nipajjiyati, is lain down on; ? is laid down; ? Nidd-a I
14,4 (attharitva -Iyanti ti atthara¡;¡a, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
569 nipajjii
-anti ti); - pp nipanna, mfn. and n. l. (mjn.) (i)
[BHS id.] lying down; Vin 111 14,17 (eso Sudinno
anantarahitaya bhiimiya -o); D II 14,12 (añña itthika
nisinna va -a va vijayanti); M I 75,2o (tassa rukkhassa
chayaya nisinnarp va -a¡p va); Ja I 15,13 (ka1a1api~!he
-arp Sumedhatapasa¡p disva); 266,zo (coraraja ...
sirisayanapi~!he -o niddayati); III 533.23 (mata1aya¡p
dassetva -o); Nidd I 381,1sjoll. (yo dakkhi1_1ena passena
-o yo vamena passena -o yo uttananipanno yo
avakujjanipanno); Bv 2:53 (pa~haviya¡p -assa); Sv 821,5
(acelo sunakho viya uddhanadvare -o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
uddhanaqhane); Ps 11 40,2o (--tta); Spk IIl 40,17 (sasane
tiriyarp --taya); Mhv 7:1 (parinibbanamañcamhi -o
1okanayako); - (ii) lain down on;? Sp 687,9 (saki¡p
nisinna¡p e' eva -arp ca; ad V in III 232,2o:
pura¡;¡asanthata¡p nama saki¡p nivattha¡p pi saki¡p
paruta¡p pi); - 2. (n.) lying down; Ja IV 445,7 (tassa
--kara¡;¡arp. ñatva); - -'-okasa, m., the place where
(someone) lies or is lying down; Vin III 263.33 (-'-okaso
dissati); IV 105,33 (bhikkhussa thitokasarp. va ...
-'-okasarp. va agacchati); Sp 310,18; 444,17 (eJakassa ca
-'-okase);- --ghana, n., the place where (someone) is
lying down or has lain down; Ja I 291,27 (sa tassa
--t!hanarp. gantva); 492,19 (tumhehi --ghane); Ps II 93,12
(sasakassa --tthanarp. addasa); - anipanna, mjn., not
lying down; Sp 12,12 (anipanno anisinno atthito) =
Sv 10,17; - fpp nipajjitabba, n. impers., Sp 282,7 (upari
sayantena nisse1_1i¡p aropetva nipajjitabbarp); Mp I 410,11
(sukharp. nipajjitabbarp); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nipajjapeti,
makes lie down; lays down; Ja V 308,6 (padamüle narp.
ka1a1e -essami ti); VI 74,8 (kumararp. ... Pal!¡;tasalaya
-en ti); Dhp-a I 176,3 (imarp. ... cakkamagge -ehi); -
part.pr. nipajjapenta, mjn., Mp II 91,21 (pañca-
kkhandhe . . . nisidapento pi -ento pi); - aor. 3 sg.
nipajjapesi, Ja 111 90,4 (mahajano . .. dussila-
brahma¡;¡arp. ... tesarp purato urena -esi, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee -esurp.); Dhp-a 1 26,4 (puttarp niharitva bahi aJinde
-esi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nippajjapesi); Mhv 9:25;
3 pl. nipajjapesurp., Ja II 123,1o; Vism 36,w;
absol. nipajjapetva, Vin I 274,17 (Jivako Komarabhacco
setthi¡p gahapatirp. mañcake -etva); Ja I 456.19
(mal!<;ia1apighikaya heghamañce matamanussarp. -etva);
VI 37,18 (narp ... dakkhi1_1apassena -etva); Dhp-a I 50,4;
V v-a 76,15; - pp nipajjapita, mjn., Sp 283,23; Dhp-a I
170,1o;- fpp nipajjapetabba, mjn., Spk III 8,27.
nipaijana, n. ffrom nipajjati], lying down; Sp 746,11 (tassa
utthayutthaya -ena); Sv 184,6 (-e pi es' eva nayo, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee nipajjaya; = PsI 253,12: eds nipajjaya) =
Spk III 182,6 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nipajjaya); Spk II 311,25
(sabbapaccha -ato pi pacchanipati); Mp I 113,23
(mahabodhima¡;¡qe manasa¡p bandhitva -arp. nama na
aññassa kassaci aci¡;¡¡;¡arp, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nisajjanarp.);
Dhp-a 11 53,2o (kutumbikena abhatamañce -ato
varatararp. bhumiyarp. nipajjitun ti).
2
nipaijanaka, mjn. [nipajjana + ka ], for lying down on;
Ja VI 413,5 (tassa -arp. ekarp. pat!amañcanakarp thapetva,
Ce, Ee so; Se -arp. ekarp. pana vatthamañcakarp; Be tassa
nipannamañcakarp. thapetva).
nipaija, f ffrom nipajjati], lying down; Vin 111 189,27 (so
ce evarp vadeyya naharp nisinno api ca kho nipanno ti
nipajjapana
-aya karetabbo); Sv 184,6 (-aya pi es' eva nayo, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se nipajjane) =PsI 253,12 = Spk III 182,6 (Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se nipajjane); Th-a II 175,15 (yasma -a nama
kosajjapakkhiya tasma ma sayi); Bv-a 78,28 (-aya ca
thanena ca cari.kamanena ca); Sadd 532,7 (tuvaga
-aya¡p); - nipajja- in Ee at Ja I 7,1* is wr for nisajja-
(Be, Ce, Se so).
nipaijapana, n. [from caus. of nipajjati qv], making lie
down; laying down; Spk II 263,21 (in long cpd:
thapanagamananisldapananipajj apana-).
nipaijita(r), m. [from nipajjati], one who lies down;
Sp 38,12 (asane va sayane va añño koci nisajjita va -a va
natthi).
nipatha, nipatha, m. [ts], reading; study; Abh 774
(nipatho -o).
nipatati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nipatati], l.falls down or off; falls
down into; sinks; falls upon; falls down befare; V in I
203,3o (apidhana¡p -ati; quoted Sadd 625,23: Ee
nipp<h>atati; vl nippatati); II 151,1 (ullokai)l akaritva
santharanti heghato -anti, Be so; Ce, Ee nipphatanti; Se
nippatenti); 271,6 (cojaka¡p -ati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nipphatati); III 106,14 (tassa te as! ... tass' eva kaye
-anti); M I 306,4 (maluvabijai)l aññatarasmii)l salamule
-eyya); II 104,7 (le<;l<;lu khitto ayasmato Ari.gulimalassa
kaye -ati); A IV 72,17 (papatika ... kaghapuñje va
-eyya); Pv 51 :3 (saghikutasahassani . . . sise mayha¡p
-anti); Th 118 (abhisattho va -ati vayo; cfTh-a I 245,6:
-an ti atipatati abhidhavati na tighati); Ja VI 142,31'
(ayyassa KhaJ!<;lahalassa padesu -atha); Ap 473,3 (-anti
khaJ!atlta anante dukkhasagare); Bv 1:18 (namassamana
-anti tughahagha pamodita; cfBv-a 37,6: -antl ti
sannipatanti); 1:56 (namassamana -anti satthuno
cakkalakkhaJ!e; Bv-a 48,37: -antl ti -ii)lSU vandii)lsi.i ti
attho); Mil 136,29 (akase khitto le<;l<;lu mahapathaviya
-ati); Vism 427,14 (vivasa -anti tattha dukkatakarino ti
vinipato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr vinasa); 646,15 (ye ye
ettha -issanti sabbe anappakai)l dukkha¡p anubhavissantl
ti); - 2.flies down; alights; comes down; settles; sits
down; lies down; Vinii 151,11 (pharusaya bhittiya
setaVaJ!J!O na -ati); Th 76 (uppatantesu -e -antesu
uppate); Ja IV 214,22* (idh' eva hai)lsa -a; 214,24·: -a ti
nislda); Sv l68,2o joll. (padadhovanadikattabbakiccai)l
katva paccha -ati nisldatl ti pacchanipatl . . . va ...
paccha -ati seyyai)l kappetl ti pacchanipati) f- 627,1o
(vljanadikiccai)l katva paccha -ati nisldan ti
pacchanipatinl) = Ps IV 228,16 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e patati);
Ps U 188,19 (isayo ettha -anti uppatanti ca ti tai)l thana¡p
Isipatanan ti sari.khai)l gatai)l); Spk II 311,21 (tasmii)l
nisinne paccha -ati nisldatl ti pacchanipatl); V v-a 11,12
(mano hi ... atidure pi visaye khaJ!en' eva -ati); -
3. comes upon; invites, entertains; A I 117,5 (te nai)l
bhogehi -anti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nimantanti; Mp II 189,6:
-antl ti nimantenti, nivattantl ti pi patho ayam eva attho,
Ce, Ee so; Be nipatentl pi patho; Se nipadantl ti pi
patho ); Ja IV 361 ,27* (tadise -amase; 365,24' foil.:
-amase ti vadehi dani kii)l tadise brahmaJ!e -ama
nimantanatthaya upasari.kamama atthi te etehi attho ti
pucchati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vedehi tadise brahmaJ!e
nimantanatthaya upasari.kamama ... ); see also
nipadati; - 4. happens, occurs; is inserted; Sv 977,27
570 nipatati
(opapatika paññatti -ati); As 391,23 (ekadhammo
sabbadhammesu -ati sabbadhamma ekadhammasmii)l
-anti); Sadd 677,28 (ekabavhatthesu bho iti nipato -atl ti
veditabbo); 904,21 (pisaddo padamajjhe padavasane ca
-ati); - part.pr. (a) nipata(t), mfn., SI 42,13*foll.
(kii)lSU -atai)l varai)l ... vughi -atai)l vara; Spk I 98,15:
-atan ti -antanai)l); (b) nipatanta, mfn., Th 76;
Vv-a 235,1 (bhagavato padesu sirasa -anto);
(e) nipatamana, mfn., Sv 649,31 = Mp IV 59,9; - aor.
3 sg. (a) nipatl, Sn 310 (sattha¡p -1 gave); Ja V 170,7*
(mai)l -i; 170,24': so nagaraja mai)l upasari.kami);
VI 192,1* (urago pacte te -1 bhusa¡p); Ap 421,7 (tato me
asanipato matthake -I tada); 471,23 (mama padami.ile -i,
Be, Se so; Ce-!; Ee patito); 539,18 (-i padesu); Cp 2:7:5
(-i); (b) nipatittha, Ja I 253,2 (magge -ittha);
3 pl. nipatii)lSU, Ja V 72,1* (udabinduni kayasmii)l -ii)lsu
me); Ap 198,3; Bv-a 100,37 (abhivassii)lSU -ii)lsi.i ti
attho); - absol. (a) nipacca [S. nipatya], Ap 466,7
(nipacca sirasa tassa); 479,21 (nipacca padami.ilamhi);
535,26 (tada nipacca sambuddhai)l); Mil 95,s (nipacca
guruno pade sirasi añjalii)l katva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nipatitva); - nipaccakara, nipaccakara, m., obeisance;
D III 83,28 (karonti ... Sakya raññe Pasenadimhi Kosale
nipaccakara¡p abhivadanai)l ... ); M II 124,1 (tatha mayi
nipaccakarai)l karonti yatha bhagavati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nipaccakara¡p); Ja II 397,6 (so pi rañño nipaccakarai)l
dassetva, Be so; Ce, Ee nipaccakarai)l; Se
nipaccanakarai)l) f- IV 133,22 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nipaccakara¡p) f- V 168,s (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nipaccakarai)l); Sv 186,27 (buddhassa bhagavato
sammukha viya nipaccakarai)l dassetva bodhi
vanditabbo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nipaccakarai)l) =
Vibh-a 349,33; Sv 519,3o (pi.ijentl ti nipaccakara¡p
dassenti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nipaccakara¡p); Spk II 198,7
(nipaccakaro, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nipaccakaro); As 1,15*
(nipaccakarass' etassa katassa ratanattaye anubhavena);
- ifc see parama-; - nipaccavadi(n), mfn., speaking
humbly; ? speaking hurtfully; ? Sn 217 (nalai)l thutui)l no
pi nipaccavadl; Pj II 272,17: dayakai)l nipatetva
appiyavacanani vatta pi na hoti);- absol. (b) nipatitva,
Vin II 192,12 (bhagavato padesu sirasa -itva); A III
188,15 (catukuJ!<;iiko -itva gopitakai)l pivitva); Pv 20:9
(tato ca raja -itva tavade, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -itva;
Pv-a 109,27: -itva ti nikkhamitva); Ap 46,16 (buddhassa
pade -itva); (e) nipatitvana, Ap 540,2;
pp nipatita, mfn. [S. nipatita], fallen down; Ja III 389,18*
(bhumya -o seti); Mil 296,18 (yattha ta¡p udabindu -ai)l
tatth' eva pariyadiyatl ti); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nipateti,
-aya ti, l. makes fall down (on), makes lie down; lowers;
throws down; fixes, fixes (the teeth) in; casts upon,
imputes; (brings together; ?) Vin II 151,13 (anujanami
bhikkhave . . . setaVaJ!J!ai)l -etun ti); D II 336,9 (ima¡p
purisa¡p uttanai)l -etha); M I 453,27 (puriso
divasasantatte ayokati.ihe dve va tlni va udakaphusitani
-eyya); Th 223 (na pi passai)l -essai)l: Th-a II 87,6foll.:
mama sañrassa dvlsu passesu ekai)l pi passai)l . . . na
-essai)l, ekapassena pi na nipajjissaml ti attho, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -issai)l); Ja III 539,2* foll. (tasmii)l dathai)l
-ehi ... padesai)l ta¡p na passami yattha dathai)l -ay e);
Sp 56,1o (sattha¡p -etui)l avisahanto); - 2. inlays,
nipatana
embosses; - 3. sets down as a special or irregular
form; - part.pr. nipatenta, mfn., Vin III 79,6* (in
uddana: uq:hapento -ento); Ap 355,4 (-enta, Be, Ce so;
Ee nivattanta; Se nivattenta); - aor. 3 sg. nipatesi, D I
91,9 (Ambaq:ho ma~avo idarr pathamarr Sakkesu
ibbhavadarp -esi); 3 pl. nipatesurp, Vin IV 109,35
(ayasmantaJ11 Sagatarr ... yena bhagava tena sisarp katva
-esuJ11); D II 337,23 (te tarr sankharr uttanarp -esuJ11);
- absol. (a) nipatetva, Sv 841,22 (manaddhajarp -etva);
Ps I 41 ,3o (etasmiJ11 hi atthe idaJ11 padarp -etva vuttan ti
veditabbarp); Pj II 1,13* (tatharüpani suttani -etva tato
tato sanglto ca ayaJ11; extracting, gathering ?); 272,17
(kirp etarp imina dinnan ti adina nayena dayakaJ11 -etva
appiyavacanani vatta); Pv-a 152,2o (tarr bhumiya111
-etva); Mhv 37:209 (devi satthaJ11 -etva tam aq:hanamhi
marayi); (b) nipatiya, Mhv 30:60; - pass. pr. 3 sg.
nipaccate [S. nipatyate], is set down as a special or
irregular form; Sadd 806,17 foil.; - pp nipatita, mfn.,
l. made to fall; cast down, lowered; discharged;
Kkh 2 119,18 (kosiyaJ11suna ... vatavegena -itenapi); Pj II
226,!! (nittejo nimmado nipatitamanaddhajo, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nipatita-); 517 ,s (ta~haya gatarr abhibhiitarr,
-itan ti); 2. inlaid, embossed; Ja V 408,28*
(suva~~acand' ettha bahii -ita).s
nipatana, n. [ts], falling down; falling into; alighting,
taking a place, settling down; ? Vism 60,!4 (pi~<;lapato,
parehi dinnanarp pi~<;lanarr patte -an ti vuttaJ11 hoti);
Ps IV 165,It (vinipataya ti suq:hu -aya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
vinipatanaya); Ud-a 103,7 (suq:hu samma ca 0 -vasena
sannipatitanarr); Th-a I 3,5 (-a111 nikkhipanan ti nipato,
Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nipatanarp);- 0 -sila, mfn., habitually
alighting; Dhp-a I 295,!2 (yatthakamanipatino ti yattha
katthaci-d-eva -assa, Be, Ce so; E e, Se nipatana-) i
300,4 (yattha katthaci -aJ11, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nipatana-).
nipadati, pr. 3 sg. [of ni 1 + pa5 + Vda], gives; presents;
Ja III 120,24* (asanarr udakarr pajjarp sabb' etarp
nipadamase; 121,3-: nipadamase ti nikarapakara
upasagga, damase ti attho, dadama ti vuttarp hoti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr pamada ti vuttarp hoti); Mp II 189,6
(nipatanti ti nimantenti, nipadanti ti pi patho, ayam eva
attho, Se so; Ce, Ee nivattanti ti pi pa~ho; Be nipatenti pi
pa~ho).
nipanna, mfn.,pp ofnipajjati qv.
nipannaka, mfn. [nipanna + ka2], lying down; Ja I 13,31
(so kalalapiq:he -o va puna akkhini ummiletva
Dipankaradasaba1assa buddhasiriJ11 sampassamano );
Pa!is II 209,t (so iddhima .. . nisinnako va -o va
candimasuriye avajjati); Ap 100,9 (-o va sambuddho
ima gatha abhasatha); 128,5 (so 'ha111 -o santo sire
katvana añja1iJ11); Spk III 199,9 (yo pana -o va
sajjhayarr va karonto kammaq:hanaJ11 va manasi-
karonto).
nipayati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + payati], dries up; Sadd 403,14 (pe
sosane: payati payati va nipako . . . -ati visoseti
pa~ipakkharp ... nipako sampajano).
nipalavita, mfn. [pp of caus. of *ni 1 + plavati], immersed;
(or brought to land; ?) Ja I 326,to- foil. (ka!tharp -arr
seyyo ti nadiya vuyhamana111 sukkhadarurp -arr
uttaretva thale thapitarr seyyo sundaratararr etan ti, Ee
so; Be niplavitaJ11; Ce viplavitarr; Se nipphavitarp;
571 nipatana
ad 326,8•: Ee ka~thavipalavitaJ11; Be nip1avitarr; Ce
vip1avitarr; Se nipphavitarr).
nipaka, mfn. [from *ni + pacati, cf S. lex. ni~pakva ? or me
for nipaka ?], fully matured; or intelligent, clever; Ja VI
327,16' (rukkho hi mayharp padvare sujato pañña
khandho silamay' assa sakha atthe ca dharnme ca !hito
-o; 328,to-: -o ti so paññamayarukkho patiq:hito).
nipatha, m., se e sv nipatha.
nipata, m. [ts], l.fall, falling; descent; settling; Abh 1121
(-o patane); MI 453,28 (dandho ... udakaphusitanarr -o;
Ps III 170,to: -o ti ayoka~ahamhi patanarp); Ap 575,5
(saha tassa -ena pqaka udapajjatha); Vism 235,15 (tesa111
pi upaddavanarr -ena mara~arr nigacchati yeva); Spk I
37,17 (kasaya attani -arp na deti); Dhp-a III 16,16
(ekekassa pi udabindussa -ena); - ifc see m-,
udabindu- (sv uda3); - 2. settling; ? or coming together
(cfsannipata);? Pj II 1,16' (ayarp tesarp -o ca yato
tato ... sankhaJ11 Suttanipato ti ... samajjhaga); Th-a I 3,6
(nipatanarr nikkhipanan ti -o, eko ekeko gathanarp -o
nikkhepo ettha ti ekanipato); - 3.letting fall;
discharge, shooting; Mil 105,32 (sudhotatta naracassa
-assa ca balavatta ti); - ifc see di!!hi-; - 4. (gr.t.t.) a
particle (including adverbs, conjunctions and
interjections); Abh 1121 (-o ... vyaye); Jai 155,13'
(dhiratthii ti garahanatthe -o); II 430,6' (kira ti
anussavatthe -o); Vism 349,31 (seyyathidan ti -o);
Sp 21 O,t5 (hi iti padapiira~amatte -o); Ps III 281,25
(yavetadohipi ti ettha dokarahikarapikara -a); Ud-a 83,26
(atha ti puccharambhe -o); Pj II 23,t6 (aq:hakathacariya
pana se ti -o ti v~~ayanti); Pv-a 11,19 (ma ti pa!isedhe
-o); Nidd-a I 295,5 (casaddo hetu-atthe -o); Ap-a 204,23*
(upasagga -a ca paccaya ca ime tayo); Sadd 886,22foll.
(idani 0 -vibhago vuccate ... ); - se e also nepatika; -
5. [BHS id.] a section of a book; (see Th-a I 3,6 above);
S III 188,II * (in uddana: -o ti pavuccati); Mp I 3,7
(ekadasa -a honti); Thp. 17,24* (in uddana: ekake va
-amhi); - ifc see catukka- (sv catukka 1), chakka-, tika-,
dasaka-, duka-, navaka- (sv navaka2 ), pañcaka-,
paññasa-; - 0 -tittha, n., see sv nipatana; - see also
atinipata.
nipataka, mfn. [nipata + ka2], divided into sections;
Dip 4:16 (vaggapaññasakarp nama sarpyutta111 ca -a111
agamapi!akarp nama akarpsu).
nipatana, m.n. [ts], l.falling upon, alighting on; settling,
lying down; Dhp-a I 295,t2 (yatthakamanipatino ti yattha
katthaci-d-eva o -silassa, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce nipatana-) i
300,4 (yattha katthaci 0 -silaJTl, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
nipatana-);- ifc see paccha-;- 2. (gr.t.t.) an irregular
form; an exception; Sadd 800,17 foil. (ye sadda
anidditthalakkha~a ... te -a sijjhanti ti); 852,zt foil.; -
3. going down, descent; ? - 0 -tittha, nipatatittha, n. [but
perhaps associated with Vpa, cf S. nipana; or with
sannipata], a place for going down into the water, for
drinking; Vism 284,26foll. ([balivaddanaJ11] -a111
gantva . . . go~e . . . -arp otaritva . . . paccuttaritva !hite
disva ... -e vi ya go~a. Be, E e, Se so; Ce ni pana-) =
Sp 426,I4foil. (Be nipata- ... nipata- ... nipata- ... ; Ce
sannipana- ... nipana- ... nipana- ... ; Ee sannipata- .. .
nipata- . . . nipata- ... ; Se nipata- . . . udapana- .. .
nipata- ... ) = Pa!is-a 499,t8foll. (Be, E e, Se so; Ce
nipa ti
nipana-); Sp 10,23 (ekanipatanatittham iva ca
devamanussanayanavihangana!J1, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
ekanipata-; Sp-~ [Be]1 57,13foll.: ekasmi!J1 panlyatitthe
sannipatanta pakkhino viya ... ) = Sv 9,10 (Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se ekanipata-).
nipati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nipati], guards, protects (from);
Sadd 402,5 (pa rakkha!).e: pati -ati); 403,14 (nipayati
visoseti pa~ipakkha!J1 tato va attana!J1 -ati rakkhat! ti
nipako sampajano).
nipati(n), mfn. [from nipatati; BHS id.], l.falling or
alighting on; settling, lying down; - ifc see paccha-,
yatthakama-; - 2. striking, attacking; Ja VI 449,17*
(nagakhandhe -ino, Be so; Ce, Ee
nagakkhandhatipatino; Se nagakkhandhanipatino;
450,14' foll.: hatthikkhandhe khaggena chinditva
nipatanasamattha, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se patanasamattha).
nipana, n. [ts], a place or trough for watering cattle;
Abh 680 (ahavo tu -a!J1).
nipaleti, pr. 3 sg. [S. nipa1ayati], guards, protects; Ja IV
126,27* (ya!J1 na sakka -etu!]1, Be so; Ce, Ee pa!etul]1; Se
na!J1 paletu!]1).
niphpsati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nipisati.
nipisati, nipi!J1sati, nippisati, nippi!J1sati, pr. 3 sg.
[S. ni~pina~~i; cf also S. nipi~~a], rubs, grinds;
Vism-mh~ [Be]1 38,19 (gandhadayo viya labhaya
paresa!J1 akkosanadina -atl ti nippeso );
part.pr. nipisamana, nipi!]1samana, mfn., Ja lll 207,24
(Mittavindakal]1 ... -amana!J1 tal]1 khuracakka!]1 bhassi,
Be so; Ee nipi!J1samana!J1; Ce, Se nippiliyamana!J1); -
absol. nipisitva, nipi!]1sitva, Vism 29,25foll. (gandha-
jatal]1 -itva gandhamaggana viya paragu~e -itva
vicu~~etva esa labhamaggana hoti, Be so; Ce nipi!]1sitva;
Ee nipi!J1sitva . . . nippi!J1sitva ... ; Se nippi!]1sitva) =
Nidd-a I 397,23 (Be, Se so; Ce, E e pi!]1sitva ...
nipi!]1sitva ... ) = Vibh-a 485,22foll. (Be so; Ce, Se
pi!J1sitva ... nippi!]1sitva; Ee pi!J1setva ... nippisitva ... );
- caus. pr. 3 sg. nippeseti [S. ni~pe~ayati], rubs,
crushes, grinds; Vism 29,25 (vetupesika viya abbhat'lgal]1
parassa gu~a!J1 -eti nipuñchati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
vetupesikaya) = Nidd-a I 397,22 = Vibh-a 485,21.
nipiJana, n., se e sv nippitana.
nipiJeti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nippJteti.
nipuñchati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + puñchati], wipes away;
removes; Vism 29,25 (yasma vetupesika viya abbhangal]1
parassa gu~a!J1 nippeseti -ati, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
vetupesikaya) = Nidd-a I 397,22 = Vibh-a 485,21.
nipm,Ia, mfn. [cf S., BHS nipu~a], l. clever, skilful; subtle,
acute; Abh 721 (-o ca paru cheko ); D I 26,23
(samaJ.labrahmaJ.la pa~9ita -a; Sv 117,7: -a ti SaJ.lha-
sukhumabuddhino sukhuma-atthantare pativijjhana-
jananasamattha); III 178,4* (-ebhi vidühi sabbhi
Va!).~itani, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ehi); MI 386,29*
(visaradassa -assa bhagavato); A III 18,20 (dullabho
bhikkhave vu99hapabbajito -o); Sn 317 (viññü vibhavl
-o ca hoti); Ja V 148,18* (sevetha vaddhe -e bahussute;
149,11': -e sukhumakaraJ.lajananasamatthe); Ap 545,6 (-a
cittakathika); Vibh426,11* (dh!ra nipaka -a
atthacintaka); Mil 22,8* (bahussuto citrakathi -o ca
visarado); - 2. (what is) subtle, abstruse; Abh 7
(nibbana!J1 ... -am anantam); Vin I 5,10* (pa~isotagami
572 nippatati
-al]1 gambhlra!J1 duddasa!J1 a~U!J1); DI 12,20 (dhamma
gambhlra duddasa ... atakkavacara -a paJ.19itavedaniya;
Sv 99,2o: -a ti SaJ.lhasukhumasabhavatta); Sn 1126
(pucchanta -e pañhe); Th 26 (paccavyadhi!J1 hi -al]1;
Th-a 1 89,1: -an ti SaJ.lha!J1 paramasukhuma!J1 nirodha-
sacca!J1 catusaccam eva va); Ja VI 362,21* (yal]1 pa~9ito
-al]1 Sa!J1Vidheti); Nidd I 226,30 (gambh!ra!J1 guyhal]1
-al]1 paticchanna!J1 ... katha!J1 katheti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nipu~~a!J1); Mil228,2o (pañho -o gambhlro); Dhp-a l
1,13* (-a atthava~~ana); Th-a I 41,12 ( 0 -tta); -
anipm,Ia, mfn., not clever, not acute; not subtle;
Mil 239,2s; Sp 221,10 (thüla!J1 ca asukhuma!J1, -an ti
vuttal]1 hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr anipunan ti); -
atinipul}a, mfn., very clever, very acute; Sv 936,1 (-a
sukhumapañña ... manussa); - sunipul}a, mfn., very
subtle; very acute; Dhp 36 (sududdasa!J1 -al]1 ... cittal]1);
Ap 327,17; Mill24,2 (aya!J1 pi ubhatokotiko pañho
sugambhiro -o); 227,2s (-o bhikkhu); - see also
abhinipu~a. nepuñña.
nipul}ati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + pu~ati], is subtle;? Sadd 358,24
(pu~a nipu~e: pu~ati -ati).
nippakara in Ee, Se at Ja I 340,19' is wr for tippakara (Be,
Ce so).
nippakka, mfn., pp ofnippacati qv.
nippacati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 2 + pacati], cooks; infuses; Vin I
276,35 (sappi!]1 deva -issami tal]1 devo pivissatl ti); 277,2
(yannünaha!J1 sappi!J1 -eyya!J1); - aor. 3 sg. nippaci,
Vin I 277,4; - absol. nippacitva, Vin I 271,32 (sappi!]1
nanabhesajjehi -itva); pp nippakka (and
nipakka ?), mfn. [cf S. ni~pakva], cooked; Abh 743 (-al]1
kathital]1); Vin 1 200,2s.{o/l. (ka!e -a!]1, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nipakkal]1); Sp 714,19foll.;- nippakkacamme in Ee at
Spk li 219,3 is wr for nippakkha- (Be, Ce, Se so); - see
also nippaka.
nippaijati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nipphajjati.
nippaijana, n., see sv nipphajjana.
nippaijitmp in Ee at Sp 280,25, 282,5 and Th-a 1 137,3 is
wr for nipajjitu!]1 (Be, Ce, Se so).
nippaijitva in Ee at Sp 927,24 is wr for nipajjitva (Be so;
Ce, Se nipajjantiya).
nippaijeyya ti in Be, Ee, Se at Nidd I 377,25 is prob. wr
fornipajjeyya ti (Ce so).
nippañña, mfn., see sv pañña.
nippaññattika, mfn. [ni 2 + paññatti + ki], not definable;
free from designation or manifestation; Ps Il 120,2
(tesa!J1 vatta!J1 appaññattibhava!J1 gata!J1 -al]1 jata!J1); -
se e also appaññattika2.
nippaññasa, mfn., [ni 2 + paññasa ?], a term of praise for
an ascetic; (without 50? not being 50?); Sv 1039,21foll.
(niddaso bhikkhu nibblso nittil]1SO niccattatJso -o
bhikkhü ti . . . titthiya . . . visativassadika!e pi mata!J1
[niga~tha!J1) nibbiso nittil]1SO niccatatiso -o ti vadanti) =
Mp IV 7 ,2s foil.
nippatati, pr. 3 sg., see svv nippatati, nipphatati.
2
nippal}l}eti, pr. 3 sg. [ni + PaJ.l9eti], mocks; ?
part.pr. nippan9enta, mfn., Th-a JI 163,29 (Maro
papima ... therassa santika!J1 gantva la!J1 -ento, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee uttajjento).
nippatati (and nippatati ?), pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~patati; cf S.
patati ?], flies out, rushes out; falls out; departs, hastens
nippatittha
away; Vin I 342,16 (yannünahaip patigacc' eva
nagaramha -eyyan ti); Ja V 467,21* (so vahaip -issami
na te vacchami santike; 467,25': -1ssam1 ti
nikkhamissami); Sp 783,10 (yattha nisidante pi na -anti,
Be so; Ce, Ee nippatanti; Se nipatanti); - aor.
3 sg. nippati, Vin I 277,25 (Jivako ... nagaramha -i);
342,Is; - absol. nippatitva, Vin IV 46,3 (mañcapado
-itva heghimassa bhikkhuno matthake avatthasi, Be so;
Ce nipatitva; Ee nippatitva; Se patitva; Sp 782,2o: -itva ti
nipatitva nikkhamitva va, Be, Ce so; Ee nippatitva ti; Se
patitva ti); Nidd-a I 455,26; - pp nippatita, mfn., flown
out; hastened away; Vin I 277,3o(nagaramha -o ti); Ja III
225,12* (-o kapoto); Ap473,I2 (mata mata citaru~ha tato
-o ahaip, Be so; Ce mata mata; Se nipatito; Ee mata pita
citarü~a tato nibbattito s' ahaip); - caus. aor.
3 sg. nippatesi, Vin IV 132,27 (nayyo so bhikkhu maip
nippatesi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nippadesi; Sp 869,3: maip na
nikkhamesi) quoted Sadd 105,Io (nippatesi);
pp nippatita, mfn., V in II 182,35 (ca!).qa kho Sakiya,
imina kumara nippatita ti ghatapeyyuip pi maip) =
Dhp-a I 137,2o (Be, Ce ghateyyuip; Ee nipphatita ti
ghateyyuip; Se nipatita ti ghateyyuip); - see also
nipphatati.
nippatittha, mfn., see sv patittha.
nippatta, mfn., see sv patta .
2 Sv 392,23 (telatthiko valikaip -iyamano viya, eds so);
nippada, mfn., see sv pada.
nippadii,f, see sv nipphada.
nippanna, mfn., see sv nipphajjati.
nippabha, mfn., see sv pabha.
nipparitassa, nipparitasa, mfn. [cf S. paritrasa, BHS
paritasa], free from fear, free from trepidation; Ja II
233,Is- (gharavasaip ahaip -o hutva ajjhavasissami ti);
Ps V 72,2 (patibhanaip deti -aip karoti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
nipparitasaip);- see also aparitassa.
nippiika, m. ffrom nippaccati; cf S. lex. nipaka], cooking,
boiling; Sadd 367,15 (katha -e: kathati).
nippiiva, m.n., see sv nipphava.
nippirp.sati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nipisati.
nippirp.sana, n. ffrom nippiipsati], rubbing, grinding
away; Mp III 273,15 (nippesiko ti 0
-kathaya
samannagato, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nippesanakataya).
nippitika, m., -a,f ffrom ni2 + pita(r); S. ni~piqka],
without a father, fatherless; Ja I 134,22 (tassa ...
ki~antassa evaip vattaro honti -en' amha pahata ti);
IV 146,25' (mataraip pucchi ... kiip tvaip nimmata -a ti,
Se so; Be nimmata nippita si ti; Ce, Ee nimmatapitika ti);
V 251 ,3o· (nimmatiko -o karuññappatto va jhayati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr nimmatapitiko); Sp 1114,23 (nimmatiko
-o, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr nippitiko ).
nippipiisa, mfn., see sv pipasa.
nippisati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nipisati.
2
nippitika, mfn. [ni2 + piti2 + ka ], not involving or
accompanied by joy; DI 75,Io (so imam eva kayaip -ena
sukhena abhisandeti ... ) =M III 93,28 (Be, Ce, Se so; E e
nippitisukhena, prob. wr); A I 81,22 (sappitikaip ca
sukhaip -aip ca sukhaip; Mp II 153,14: tatiyacatuttha-
jjhanasukhaip); Nidd I 373,26 (-ena pi jhanena jhayi);
Vism 86,2 (upacarasamadhi pana siya sappitiko siya -o
ti); Patis-a 133,Io (nandin ti sappitikaip taJ).haip ragan ti
-aip ta!).haip); - nippitiko in Ee at Sp 1114,23 is wr for
573 nippesika
nippitiko (Be, Ce, Se so);- se e also appitika, sappitika.
nippiJana, nipi~ana, n., -a,f [cf S. nipiqana, ni~piqana],
squeezing, pressing; pressing against; Vin III 121,23
(abhinippi~ana nama kenaci saha -a); IV 214,23
(patipljanaip va sadiyeyya ti aligaip gahetva -aip
sadiyati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nipi~anaip); Ja III 160,6
(ekamekaip rajanaip pakkosapetva -ena visaññaip
karetva).
2
nippiJanaka, mfn. [nippl~ana + ka ], who presses; ?,
Sadd 569,12 (pqanaip -o).
1 2
nippiJeti, -ayati, nipi~eti, pr. 3 sg. [ni or ni + pqeti; -pp-
perhaps influenced by uppi~eti; cf S. nipiqayati,
ni~piqayati], squeezes, presses; presses against;
oppresses; vexes, plagues; importunes; Ja III 508,21* (sa
me sisaip -eti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nipi~eti; 508,23':
nipatitva pi~eti bhindati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee patitva ... );
Ps II 289,4 (-eyyaip); Ap 304,15 (atibajhaip nipqesi
dadamanassa me sato); Sadd 569,11 (-eti -ayati); -
part.pr. (a) nippi~ayanta, mfn., Cp 2:4:7 (-anto balasa
antepuraip pavesayi; Cp-a 135,31: akaqqhana-
parikaqqhanadina -ayanto badhento );
1
(b) nippi~ayamana, nippiJiyamana , mfn., Ja III 207,24
(Mittavindakaip . . . -iyamanaip taip pi cakkaip bhassi,
Ce, Se so; Be nipisamanaip; Ee nipiipsamanaip);
(e) neg. anippilenta, mfn., As 315,26; - aor. 3 sg.
nippi~esi, Ja I 223,17 (sa!).qasena viya a~ehi tassa givaip
-esi); 281,17 (bodhisattaip aliliganto viya -esi); IV 457,18
(sisaip da~haip gahetva -esi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -i);
Dhp-a IV 132,16 (nagarajassa phaQ.e akkamitva
adhomukhaip -esi); 3 pl. nippi~ayiipsu, Spk II 191 ,22;
Ap-a 260,9; - absol. nippi~etva, Ja I 63,8 (Kanthakaip
ürühi -etva); II 83,17; pass. part.pr.
nippiFyamana2, mfn., Vin III 211,13 (so setthiputto
ayasmata Upanandena Sakyaputtena -iyamano ekaip
satakaip datva agamasi); Ja II 84,5· (so Ca!).qa1o na attano
ruciya adasi atha kho -iyamano kicchena kasirena
adasi); Vism 258,26 (ubhato -iyamanassa allasatakassa);
- ifc se e atinippqiyamana; - pp nippqita, mfn. [cf S.
nipiqita], pressed; importuned; Dhp-a III 413,4 (therena
hotu avuso kathehi ti -o aha); Cp-a 141,28; Vibh-a 454,3o
(parehi --tta karoti).
nippesa, nipphesa, m. [cf S. ni~pe~a], grinding, rubbing;
clashing together; one who rubs or grinds; Sv 91,31 (-o
silaip etesan ti nippesika; Sv-pt I 166,15: nippiipsanti ti
-a, -a yeva nippesika) = Ps IV 134,5; Vism-mht [Be] I
38,19 (gandhadayo viya 1abhaya paresaip akkosanadina
nipisati ti -o); - ifc se e vajira-.
nippesanaka, mfn. [cf S. ni~pe~a!).a], who grinds or
scrapes away; Mp III 273,15 (nippesiko ti 0 -taya
samannagato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nippiipsanakathaya).
nippesika, m. [cfnippesa], one who solicits gifts in an
inappropriate way; (according to cts: one who grinds or
scrapes away, who belittles or denies the good qualities
of others for his own advantage); DI 8,30 (te kuhaka ca
honti 1apaka ca nemittika ca -a ca 1abhena ca 1abhaip
nijigiipsitaro; Sv 91,31: nippeso silaip etesan ti -a); A III
111,26 (nemittiko ca -o ca; Mp III 273,15: -o ti
nippesanakataya samannagato, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
nippiipsanakathaya); -tii,f, abstr. [cfBHS
nippeseti
nai~pe~ikata, nai~pe~ikatva], soliciting gifts in an
inappropriate way; (according to cts: by grinding away,
belittling or denying others' good qualities); M III 75,13
(kuhana lapana nemittakata -a labhena labhaJ11
nijigiipsanata) t Ja V 253,15' t Vism l6,10; Vibh 353,9
(papicchassa icchapakatassa ya paresa111 akkosana
vambhana . . . avai.H.lahariya parapiHhima111sikata ayaJ11
vuccati -a) quoted Vism 23,23 (29,27: aya111 yasma
veJupesika viya abbhailga111 parassa gul)aJ1l nippeseti
nipuñchati yasma va gandhajata111 nipisitva gandha-
maggana viya paragul)e nipisitva vicUI)l)etva esa
labhamaggana hoti tasma -a ti vuccati).
nippeseti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnipisati qv.
nippofheti\ pr. 3 sg., see sv nippotheti.
nippothete, pr. 3 sg., see sv nipphoteti.
nippothana, mf( -I)n. and n. [from nippotheti], l. (mfn.)
dashing down; crushing; Pj II 390,18 (abhippahariní ti
samaJ]abrahmaJ]anaJ1l ghatanl -!) = Nidd-a I 233,28
(ghatiní -1, Se so; Be ghatiní nippothiní; Ce ghataní
nipphotaní; E e ghatiní nippothiní); - 2. (n.) striking,
dashing down; Spk III 82,4 (jal)l)Ukakapparamuggaradíhi
0
-upakkamaJ11 paccaya111 katva uppannani, Be, Se so; Ce
nippothana-; Ee nipphotana-).
nippothi(n), nippothi(n), mfn. [from nippotheti], dashing
down; crushing; Nidd-a I 233,28 (abhippahariní ti
samal)abrahmaJ]ilnaJ1l ghatiní -iní, Be so; Ee nippothinl;
Se nippothaní; Ce ghatanl nipphotanl; = Pj II 390,1s: eds
ghatanl nippothanl).
nippotheti, -ayati, nippotheti 1, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + potheti 1,
potheti 1; cfS. nipothayati], dashes down; crushes; -
part.pr. (a) nippothenta, nippothenta, mfn., SI 101,4
(sabbe pill)e -ento agacchati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ei
nippothento; Ee 1 nipphotento; Spk I 167,26: -ento
agacchati ti . . . sabbasatte . . . tilacUI)l)aJ11 vi ya karonto
pisanto agacchati, Be, Se so; Ce nippothento; Ee
nipphothento); 102,20* (pabbata ... -enta catuddisa, Se
so; Be -ento; Ce, Ei nippothenta; Ee 1 nipphotento)
quoted Vism 232,18* (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nippothenta) and
Sadd 367,18 (-enta); Thl-a 88,25 (-enta pabbata viya);
(b) nippothayanta, mfn., Ja IV 331,4* (vammlka-
thüpasmiJ1l kipillikani -ayanto; 331,18': -ayanto ti
khadamano); V 268,20* (ta111 ... -ayanta ... rakkhasa;
274,9-: jalitehi ayamuggarehi paharanta); - absol.
nippothetva, Cp-a 137,5 (purise -etva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nipphothetva).
nipphajjati, nippajjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~padyate], is brought
about, is accomplished; becomes ripe, ripens; achieves
its aim; Ja I 70,1 (yatha mayha111 manoratho nipphanno
eva111 tumhakaJ1l pi -atü ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nippajjatü
ti) = Ps II 182,33 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nippanno) =
Ap-a 75,5; Ja I 386,3 (kamma111 khippa111 -issati ti, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se nippajjissati ti); IV 173,6' (samijjhati ce va
-ati ce ti attho, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nippajjati); V 412,21
(amhakaJ11 pana sassa111 eka-udaken' eva -issati, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee nippajjissati) = Dhp-a III 254,13 (Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nippajjissati); Ja VI 426,22 (dve attha -issanti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee nippajjissanti); Vism 378,5 (YaJ11 hi -ati
patilabbhati ca taJ11 ijjhati ti vuccati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nippajjati) = Patis-a 50,25; Sp 42,12 (yena ... dantapol)a-
kiccaJ11 nippajjati); 1370,8 (te eva hi pannarasa
574 nipphajjati
dhamma ... ekato -anti ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e nippajjanti);
Sv 950,12 (nagare kamma111 nama ekakahapaJ]ena na -ati
dve gal)hahi, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nippajjati); Ps III 28,19
(thoka111 nipanne sayana111 -issati ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
-issanti) = Spk IIl 52,2o (Be, Ce, Se so; E e nipanno ...
nippajjissatl ti); Spk I 101,19 (gomaJ]t;ialehi saddhi111
kasikammadlni -anti); Dhp-a II 4,18 (kicca111 me na
-eyya ti, Be, Ce, E e so; Se nippajjeyya ti); 144,1o (-issati
nu kho assa pabbajjakiccan ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nippajjissati ti); Pv-a 19,3 (ta111 khal)al11 yeva -ati na
kalantare ti attho, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nippajjati);
Cp-a 191,17 (ki111 mama na -ati); Sadd 110,10
(okaradesa111 katva gavo ti -ati): 648,11 (aggimhi
abhidhatabbe agginí ti -ate; cfnipaccate sv nipatati); -
part.pr. nipphajjamana, mfn., Pj II 270,5 (-amanesu
sassesu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nippajjamanesu); -
neg. anipphajjamana, mfn., Mp IV 165,1 = Ud-a 218,13;
- aor. 3 sg. nipphajjittha, Vv-a 103,13 (dakkhil)a dana111
aho -ittha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nippajjittha); -
3 pl. nipphajji111su, Pj 11 512,2 (catumasaccayena yava
-i111su); pp nipphanna (and nippanna), mfn.
[S. ni~panna], brought about, effected; derived, derived
from a root; accomplished, successfully completed;
ripened, ripe; Ja III 329,16 (mama kamma111 -aJ1l);
IV 100,7· (mama manorathassa --tta); 167,12 (imasmi111
sasse -e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nippanne); 327,6 (idh' eva me
annapilnaJ11 ca sayana111 ca -a111); Ap 593,14 (tava
cirapabhavena -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nippanna);
Sp 1149,13 (yatha deve vunhe idani saSSaJ11 -an ti
vuccati avassa111 hi ta111 nipphajjissati); Ps IV 4,24
(paripakke -e attabhave); Mp 1 357,25 (yass' atthaya
maya111 gaccheyyama so attho antaramagge va -o);
Dhp-a I 23,8 (daru-adihi -ani tani tani bhaJ]t;iani
darumayadlni nama honti); II 71,18 ( -a111 te tata sippaJ11);
III 111,17 (pabbajitakicca111 no -a111); Pj II 270,12 (-esu
pana sassesu layitesu madditesu ca); Sadd 586,7* (-e api
dhatühi sadde);- --sobhana, --sobhi(n), mfn., splendid
when accomplished; S I 225,34* (--sobhano attho, Be, Se
so; Ee 1 nippannasobhal)o; Ce, Ei --sobhino attha) t
226,5* (Be so; Ce, Ei, Se --sobhino attha; Ee 1
nippannasobhino attha; Spk 1 345,22: --sobhino attha ti
ime attha nama nipphanna va sobhanti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
--sobhano attho ti); Spk 1 345,14 (--sobhanesu atthesu);
- neg. anipphanna, mfn., Vism 702,19 (nirodhasamapatti
ki¡p .. . nipphanna anipphanna ti); Patis-a 596,17
(anipphannatta); Vibh-a 29,13 (sabhavadhammesu hi
nibbanam ev' eka¡p aparinipphanna¡p anipphanna¡p ca);
Sadd 586,11* (anipphanna sadda); 586,14 (Vitatubho ...
lohita¡p ice evamadlni namikapadani anipphannani
bhavanti); - sunipphanna, mfn., well-ripened; Ja V
209,s-; Spk III 65,9; - caus. pr. 3 sg. nipphiideti
[S. ni~padayati], brings about, produces, effects; carries
out; brings to completion; makes ripen; Ja V 245,5' (so
attano nirayüpapatti¡p pasavati -eti); Mil 299,3 (ima¡p
nama maya¡p attha¡p -essama ti); Sv 956,5 (sabba¡p
kicca111 -eti); Dhp-a 1 178,11 (hiyyo kira me pitara
ill)altaJ11 kamma111 -ehí ti); IV 170,4 (aha¡p idha vasanto
pabbajitakicca¡p -etu¡p sakkhissamí ti); Pj II 48,8
(sassa111 . . . pakkhena va masen a va -es san ti);
Vv-a 100,16 (imissa saggasampatti¡p -essaml ti);
nipphajjana
Ap-a 379,10 (sukhette vuttabljani saduphalani -enti);
Cp-a 284,9 (sabbasattana111 hitasukha111 -eyyan ti);
Saddh 426 (yo -etu111 asamattho); part.pr.
(a) nipphadenta, mfn., Sp 721,16; Sv 958,19; It-a I 54,9;
neg. anipphadenta, mfn., Ja III 273,1;
(b) nipphadayamana, mfn., Y am-a 68,12; - aor. 3 sg.
nipphadesi, V v-a 282,25; Th-a II 24,5 (na cirass' eva
sadattha111 -e si); - absol. nipphadetva, Vism 331,24
(ta111 akasanañcayatana111 patva -etva); Sp 679,14
(sassa111 -etva); Ud-a 317,18 (Devadatto ca sabba111
sailghabhedassa pubbabhaga111 -etva); Th-a II 124,13
(sakattha111 -etva); Ap-a 482,29 (pañcailgikaturiye
-etva); pass. part.pr. nipphadiyamana, mfn.,
V v-a 20,16 (ayoghanena satthake -iyamane, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee nippadiyamane); - pp nipphadita, mfn., Ja IV
247,19 (attho tava me -ito ahosi); Mil370,6
(micchajlvena -ita111 bhojana111); Vism 537,6;
Vv-a 231 ,2o (kiccassa katatta -itatta katakicco ); Th-a I
11,33 (paricchinnakale -ita111 vi ya hi sassa111); Ap-a 394,7
(ighakakammasudhakammadihi -itan ti); - ifc see
citta- (sv citta 1); - neg. anipphadita, mfn., As 266,1o
(anipphaditatta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nipphaditatta); -
fpp (a) nipphadetabba, mfn., It-a II 88,23; Vv-a 72,7
(-etabbe hi ida111 bhumma111); As 284,2; Sadd 823,28;
(b) nipphadaniya, mfn., Bv-a 77,17 (mahasambharehi
-aniyata); - dunnipphadanlya, mfn., hard to bring
about or achieve; Thi-a 65,3; (e) nippajja, mfn. [cf S.
ni~padya], Abh 188 (deso vughinippajjasassako).
nipphajjana, nippajjana, n. rJrom nipphajjati], being
brought about, accomplished; achieving its aim;
ripening; Ja IV 83,13 (aya111 vo o• -upayo ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nippajjanupayo ti); Ps 11 72,21 (samaQ.adhammassa
0
-bhava111 janitva); Ud-a 328,25 (buddhakiccassa -ato);
Pa!is-a 97,26 (ijjhanagho ti o• -agho ); neg.
anipphajjana, n., not being brought about, not
accomplished; Ja VI 44,7· (bhoga cintaya -ato cintamaya
nama na honti, Be, Ce so; Ee anippajjanato; Se
anipajjanato); Ps II 72,20 (samaQ.adhammassa --bhava111
janitva); As 64,26 (-ato, Be so; E e anippajjanato; Ce, Se
abhinipphajjanato ).
2 nipphadanakakamma111); Pv-a 8,s (sa hi . . . phalassa
nipphajjanaka, mfn. [nipphajana + ka ], ripening; Pj II
48,5 (timasacatumasapañcamasaccayena -a111 sassa111) =
Ap-a 139,31.
nipphatati, nippa!ati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. pa!ati, CDIAL 7507;
but perhaps wrr], moves from its place, falls; Vin II
151,1 (ulloka111 akaritva santharanti he!!hato -anti, Ce,
Ee so; Be nipatanti; Se nippa!enti); 271,6 (co)aka111 -ati,
Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nipatati). Sp 783,10 (yattha nisidante pi
na nippa!anti, Ce, Ee so; Be nippatanti; Se nipatanti); -
absol. nippa!itva, V in IV 46,3 (mañcapado nippa!itva
heghimassa bhikkhuno matthake avatthasi, Ee so; Be
nippatitva; Ce nipatitva; Se patitva; Sp 782,2o: nippa!itva
ti nipatitva nikkhamitva va, Ee so; Be, Ce nippatitva ti;
Se patitva ti).
nipphatti, f [S. ni~patti; cf also BHS ni~padi], the being
brought about, accomplishment; complete
accomplishment or mastery; success; completeness,
peifection; ripening; issue, outcome; Abh 912 (ni!tha
-iya111); Ja I 262,7 (sabbasippesu -i111 patva); 344,9
(tumhehi dighasupinana111 -i111 kathessaml ti); II 221,18
575 nipphotana
(hatthisippe -i111 papuQ.i); 386,17 (katha111 me manoratho
-i111 gamissati); III 65,15" (ka nu kho bhante mama gati
ka -i bhavissati ti pucchi); 430,9 (tumhe maya
sutasaddana111 -i111 janatha ti); Vism 378,4 (ijjhana!!hena
iddhi 0 -a!!hena patilabha!!hena ca ti); Sv 442,31 (dve
gatiyo ti dve nigha dve -iyo ); Mp I 112,20 (patubhavo ti
uppatti -i); Spk II 336,4 (nibbana111 assa pariyosana111 -i
ni!tha ti); Pj I 218,11 (tassa me kiccassa -iya bhavissatl
ti); II 145,13 (sassa111 virühati na milayati -Í!1l gacchati);
Ap-a 172,21 (imassa sippassa ekibhavabhirati -i);
Cp-a 194,2 (vipako ti -i); Sadd 622,21 (pho passa: -i);
874,lo• (khandhasaddassa -i111); - anipphatti,f, lack
of success; failure to accomplish; Ja I 456,11 (taya
karontiya -i nfuna natthi); Sp 1390,1;- see also eval11-
nipphattika (sv eva111), mahanipphattika (sv maha[t]).
nipphada, nippada, f [cfnipphajjati and BHS ni~pad],
accomplishment; completion; S I 225,33* (vayameth' eva
1
puriso yava atthassa -a, Be, Ce, Ei so; Ee , Se nippada;
Spk I 345,11: -a ti nipphatti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nippada ti;
cfUv 16:2: yavad arthasya ni~padal,l); - see also
nipphada.
1
nipphala, mfn., see sv phala .
2
nipphalita, mfn. [pp of *ni + phalati], broken out, split
open; Ja I 493,s• (las! ca te -a matthako ca vidalito;
493,1w: -a ti nikkhanta) quoted Dhp-a I 145,1* and
Sadd 443.23.
*nipphiida, m. (or -a,f) rJrom nipphadeti],
accomplishment; completion; Ja VI 381 ,7* foil. (a -a
saheyya dhlro, so read with CPD sv anipphada ? Ce
anipphadaya; Ee anippadaya; Be anipphannata; Se
anipphannaya; 381 ,9'foll.: yava attano icchita111 na
nipphajjati tava paQ.qito adhivaseyya na kassaci
katheyya, Be, Se so; Ce na nipphajjassati; Ee na
nippajjissati) = 388,19* (Ce, Ee anipphadaya; Be
anipphannata; Se anipphannaya); see also
anipphadi(n), nipphada.
nipphadaka, m.f(-ika)n. [S. ni~padaka], accomplishing,
bringing about; Spk II 129,25 (mahato atthassa -o);
Dhp-a I 78,15 (maya imasa111 dvinna111 sampatt1na111 -a111
kamma111 katu111 vagatl ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nipphadika); As 47,26 (attano -ena saha paccayena ti
sappaccaya); 64,24 (tassa tassa cittassa -a111); - ifc see
hitasukha- (sv dahat¡3);- see also anipphadi(n).
nipphadana, n., -a,f [cfS. !ex. ni~padana], bringing
about, producing; accomplishing, completing;
Sp 1069,29 (tassa o• -attha111); Spk II 328,7 (aneka-
vidhanal11 cittana111 o -taya); Pa!is-a 642,29 (upasampada
ti -a); As 44,11 (0 -bhavena, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nipphadanaka-); Sadd 8,2o• (mahes!na111 va dehato santi
-a).
nipphadeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnipphajjati qv.
nipphava, nippava, m.n. [S. lex. ni~pava], l. winnowing;
Abh 773 (pavana111 pavanippava); - 2. a kind of pulse;
Vin-vn 1344 (rajamaso ca maso ca -o);- ifc see cü)a-
(sv cuila\ maha- (sv maha[t]).
2
nipphavaka, m.n. [nipphava + ka ], a kind of pulse;
Vin-vn 1348 (puppha111-assa).
nipphesa, m., see sv nippesa.
nipphotana, n. rJrom nippho!eti], shaking (off), removing;
nipphoteti
beating; Spk III 82,4 (jaiJI)ukakapparamuggaradihi
0
-upak:kamapaccayarp katva uppannani, Ee so; Be, Se
nippothana-; Ce nippothana-); - ifc se e pava!a-.
nipphoteti, nippotheti2 (and nipphotheti ?), pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 +
photeti, potheti2], shakes; shakes to and fro; (beats; ?)
MI 229,1 foil. (valarp ka!)I)e gahetva odhuneyya
niddhuneyya -eyya . . . odhunissami niddhunissami
-essami, Be so; Ce nicchodeyya ... nicchodessami; Ee
nicchadeyya . . . nicchadessami; Se nippotheyya ...
nippothissami; Ps II 272,3: -eyya ti punappunarp
papphoteyya, Be so; Ce, Ee nicchodeyya ti; Se
nippotheyya ti... pappotheyya); S III 155,27
(pabbaja1ayako pabbajarp 1ayitva agge gahetva odhunati
niddhunati -eti, Ce, Se so; Ee nicchodeti; Be nicchoteti;
= A III 365,3: Be, Ce, Se nicchadeti; Ee nicchedeti); -
part.pr. nipphotenta, mfn., SI 101,4 (sabbe plil)e -ento
agacchati, Ee 1 so, prob. wr; Be, Se nippothento; Ce, Ee2
nippothento; Spk I 167,26: nipphothento agacchati ti, Ee
so, prob. wr; Be, Se nippothento; Ce nippothento);
102,20* (pabbata ... -ento catuddisa, Ee 1 so, prob. wr; Be
nippothento; Ce, Ei nippothenta; Se nippothenta;
quoted Vism 232,1&*: Be, Ee, Se nippothenta; Ce
nippothenta);- absol. nipphothetva, Cp-a 137,5 (Ce, Ee
so, prob. wr; Be, Se nippothetva).
nipphothenta, nipphothetva, see sv nipphoteti.
niplavita, mfn. [pp of ni 1 + p1avati], floating; (or brought
to land; ?) Ja I 326,8* (katthal!l -arp seyyo na tv ev'
ekacciyo naro, Be so; Ce vip1avitarp; Ee
katthavipa1avitarp; Se nipphavitaf!1; 326,1o· foil.: -af!l
seyyo ti nadiya vuyhamlinaf!l sukkhadliruf!l -arp
uttaretva tha1e thapitarp seyyo sundarataro, Be so; Ce
vip1avitaf!1 ... viplavitaf!1 ... ; Ee kattharp nipalavitaf!l ...
nipalavitarp ... ; Se nipphavitarp ... nipphavitaf!1 ... ) =
IV 259,19* (Be so; Ce, Ee viplavitarp; Se nipavataf!1;
259,2o·: uttaritaf!l) quoted Cp-a 149,5* (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
viplavitarp) and Sadd 285,29 (Be, Ee so; Ce viplavitaf!l).
nibattentassa in Ee at Mp III 40,15 is prob wr; Ce, Se
nibbagentassa; Be nitthapentassa.
nibaddha, mfn.,pp ofnibandhati qv.
nibandha, m., l. [S. nibandha] binding, bond; attachment;
or grant of property or money, dowry;? Patis-a 671,31
(sa vayappatta Rajagahaseghino mahata -ena tassa
puttassa micchadinhikassa dinna); - 2. [S. nirbandha;
cf S. nirbandhaf!l vkrl persistence, insistence, urging;
Ja II 396,12 (devi ambaphalatthaya -arp katva nipajji
yeva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nibaddhaf!1); Vv-a 259,26
(kumaro . . . kanitthaya deviya -ena pitara ratthato
pabbajito, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nibandhanena); 260,15 (devi
punappunarp -arp karontl manarp alabhitva, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nibandhanarp);- nibandharp in Ee at Vism 42,5
and Vv-a 75,3 is wr for nibaddharp (Be, Ce, Se so); -
anibandho in Ee at Ps II 245,22 is wr for anibaddho (Be,
Ce so); and in Ce, Ee at Ps III 442,2o is wr for anibaddho
(Be, Se, Pj II 472,1o so); - anibandhatthane in Ee at
Pp-a 249,1 is wr for anibaddhatthano (Be, Ce so).
nibandhati (and nibbandhati), pr. 3 sg., l. [S. nibadhnati],
binds, ties; fetters; fixes; Th 359 (satiya tarp -issarp
payatatto va damessami; Th-a II 152,8: tarp -issami
niyamessami); 1141 (arammaiJe taf!l balasa -isarp
nagarp va thambhamhi daJhaya rajjuya; Th-a III 161,3:
576 nibandhati
bhavanabalena -issarp); Vism 269,15* (yatha thambhe
-eyya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nibbandheyya) = Sp 406,1•;
Vism 286,15* (dhiro assasapassase sakarp cittaf!l -ati);-
part.pr. nibandhanta, mfn., Th-a II 152,9; - pass.
part.pr. nibandhiyamana, mfn., Ap-a 344,22 (-iyamana-
sopanapanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -iyamana paslil)apanti);
- 2. [S. nirbadhnati], insists (upon), persists (in); does
continuaily, perseveringly; presses, urges; Mil 79,3 (yo
pakatiya mutthassatiko pare ca tarp sarapanattharp
-anti); Pj II 103,28 (so variyamano pi -ati yeva);
Thi-a 230,3 (so dhammakathaf!l sutva pi na patikkamati
-ati yeva); - part.pr. nibandhamana, mfn., Ps V 67,19
(-aman a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nimantayamana); - aor.
3 sg (a) nibandhi, Ja III 277,2o; Ps IV 196,9
(bhikkhusari.ghassa bhesajjavattaf!1 -i); Dhp-a I l78,2o
(-i, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nibbandhi); (b) nibandhittha,
Mhv 36:93 (bhattabhogaya raJanarp -ittha
punappunarp); 3 pl. nibandhif!1SU, Ja I 201,22
(yagubhattarp -if!1su, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se yagubhattadino
nibaddharp patthapesuf!1); - absol. nibandhitva, Ja I
433,9 (punappuna -itva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibbandhitva);
Sv 134,8 (tatha tatha -itva kathapesi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibbandhitva); Dhp-a I 234,z; pass.
part.pr. nibbandhiyamana, mfn., Th-a II 214,15
(nibbandhiyamana, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nibundhiyamana);
- pp nibaddha, mfn., l. [S. nibaddha] bound, fastened;
fixed, determined; constant; Ja IV 134,26* (tesaf!1 na
ppatibandhami -af!l bhattavetanaf!1, Ce, Ee so; Be
nivinhaf!1; Se nibbattharp; l35,w: yaf!l tehi sajjitaf!1
bhattaf!l ca vetanaf!l ca); 474,6 (sami imesarp
[darakanaf!l] pita nama -o natthl ti); Vism 261,22
(pubbassa okaso nama -o natthi); Sp 1138,31 (tena avaso
karito salakabhattadlni va -ani); Spk I 183,9
(parihlnajhanassa kalarp karoto anibaddha gati hoti
aparihlnajhanassa -a gati hoti); Mp IV l88,8foil.
(niyatayuka ti tesarp hi -af!l ayu vassasahassam eva, gati
pi -a); Dhp-a I 308,23 (cittaf!1 nam' etarp kassaci -af!l va
thavaraf!1 va natthi); As SI ,35 (imassa pana cittassa
arammanam -am, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se wr nibandham); -
ifc see. ctiua- .(sv dana\ - -arp, adv., constantly,
continuaily; persistently; Ja I 100,24 (-arp devo vassati);
150,12 (-arp migavarp gacchanta amhakarp kammarp
nasetha); III 294,7 (bodhisatto -arp khettaf!1 gacchati);
325,25 (kif!l ajj' eva khadissasi -arp khadissasl ti pucchi);
V 459,12 (-arp kuto labhissami ti); Vism 42,5 (mayarp
therlinaf!l -arp bhikkharp dema ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibandharp); Sp 1143,11 (yo -arp cetiyajaggako hoti);
Dhp-a II 52,16 (thero tassa gehe -arp bhuñjati); V v-a 75,3
(-af!l agha bhikkhu geharp agacchanti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
wr nibandharp); As 398,13 (tarp adaya -af!l pi!)<;laya
caritabbaf!1); - --carika,f., a fixed joumey, a joumey to
a specific place; Sv 243,10 foil. (sa pan' esa duvidha hoti
anibaddhacarika --carika ca ti tattha yarp
gamanigamanagarapatipa?vasen' eva carati ayarp
anibaddhacarika nama yarp pana ekass' eva
bodhaneyyasattassa atthaya gacchati ayarp --carika
nama) f. Ps II 151,34foll. (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibandha-,
anibandha-);- --jaggaka, m(jn)., (one) who looks after
constantly; Sp 1143,13 (--jaggake asati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
--jaggike); - --telaka, mfn., dressed with oil;? A III
nibandhana
49,26 (manapa111 me bhante --telaka111 n~iyasak~, Ce
so; Ee nibbaddha-; Be, Se nibbattatelaka111; Mp III
253,1o: --telakan ti vinivagitatela111, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nibbattatelakan ti vinivattitatelarp); neg.
anibaddha, mfn., notfastened; not fixed; not determined;
not constant; Ja 1 437,2o (jayaparajayo pi anibaddho);
Sv 105,22 (dighigatikassa dassana111 nama anibaddha111
thusarasimhi nikhatakhffi:!u viya cañcala111, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se na nibaddh~); Ps III 442,2o (yatha hi rathassa
yayato a~i nibandhana111 hoti na taya anibaddho yati, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee anibandho) = Pj li 472,10; Spk III 246,31
(naghe jhane gati anibaddha hoti anaghe pana nibaddha
ti, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr ighe jhanagati , . anighe ... );
Ud-a 217,16 (bhagavato hi pa~hamabodhiya111 upaghaka
anibaddha ahesurp); - anibaddhaghana, mfn., not
having a fixed position; Pp-a 249,1 (assapi~~hiyarp
~hapitakumbha~<;la111 viya ca anibaddha~~hano, Be, Ce so;
Ee anibandhaghane; Se anibandhaghano );
2. [S. nirbaddha] pressed, urged; Ja IIl 277,18
(punappuna -o kathesi); Sv 189,30 (-o, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nibandho) = Ps 1 258,14 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nibandho);-
pp (b) nibandhita, mfn., tied, bound together; Th-a li
244,31 (navahi naharusatehi -o); neg. fpp
anibandhaniya, mfn., not to be fixed; not adhering;
Vin JI 151,14foll. (setava!J~O anibandhaniyo hoti); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. nibandhiipeti (and nibaddhapeti ?), fixes;
specifies; Sp 1270,1o (agantukadina111 bhattarp -emi
mama bhatta111 ga~hantu ti, Be so; Ce nibaddha111
pesemi; Ee, Se nibaddhapemi); - absol. nibandhapetva,
Ja V 162,24 (pitu bhikkhahararp -etva, Ce so; Be, Ee
nibaddh~ dapetva; Se nibaddhapetva);
pp nibandhapita, nibaddhapita, mfn., fixed; speci.fied;
Sp 1268,3ofoll. (sace pana tarp vihare -it~ hoti vihare
gahetabba111 . . . asanasalaya -itarp asanasalaya
gahetabb~, Be, Ce so; Ee nibaddha pi t~ ... nibaddha
pi t~; Se nibaddhapita111 . . . nibaddha pi ... ;
Sp-~ [Be] III 409,16: -itan ti asukaviharassa ti
niyamit~); 1270,15 (yarp sail.ghassa dhurabhatt~ dema
ti -itarp, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nibaddhapita111).
nibandhana, n., l. [S. nibandhana111] (i)fastening;
binding, bond; permanency; Ps III 442,19 foll. (yatha hi
rathassa yayato a~i -a111 hoti na taya anibaddho yati
ev~ lokassa nibbattato ca pavattato ca kammarp -~
na tena anibaddho nibbattati ca pavattati ca) f:. Pj 11
472,9 foll.; - ifc see potthaka-; - (ii) cause, origin;
Abh 91 (kara~a111 ,. bijarp -a111);- 2. [cfS. nirbandha]
insisting upon, pressing, urging; persistence; Abh 919
(-e ca ghare gaho); Vv-a259,26 (kumaro ,. kani~~aya
deviya -ena pitara raghato pabbajito, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibandhena); 260,15 (devi punappuna111 -~ karonti
man~ alabhitva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nibandha111); -
anibandhana, mfn., not constant or permanent; Nidd-a 1
32,8 (tavakalikatthena ti -' -atthena); - anibandhano in
Ee at Ps III 442,22 is prob. wr for anibaddho (Be, Ce, Se
so).
nibadhayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nibadhate], oppresses;
harasses; Th 1097 (kada nu m~ tandikhudapipasa ...
-issanti na t~ giribbaje attatthiya111, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
na badhayissanti; Th-a III 152,11foll.: na badhayissanti ti
m~ na byadhayissanti, eds so).
577 nibbattaka
nibodhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nibodhati], leams; attends to;
listens to; Ja III 134,1* (yo ca uppatitarp atth~ khippam
eva -ati) = Ap 563,5; Ja III 151,12* (yo vac~
sandhibhedassa pisunassa -ati; 151 ,27': -ati ga~hati);
Bv-a 63,6 (su!Jatha ti nisametha -atha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
su~otha ti su!Jatha -atha); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nibodheti,
teaches, instructs; ro uses; Th 22 (te ... suttarp jhay~
-enti; Th-a I 82,15: -enti ti pabodhenti, ime pi nama
nidda111 anupagantva jagaranta attana kattabbarp karonti,
kimail.g~ panahan ti eva111 sampajaññuppadanena
sayanato vu~~apenti ti adhippayo ).
1
nibba, nimba , n. [S. lex. nivra], the eaves of a roof;
Abh 217 (-a111 tu chaddako~iy~); Sp 570,8 (eka111
cakkarp nibbodakapatanaghane ekarp bahi katva, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se nimbodaka-); Ps IV 195,1 (antaraghare ti,.
idha nimbodakapatanat~an~ adhippet~. Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nimbodakapatanaghanato paghaya);
1
0
-kosa, m. [nibba + kosa ], the gutter, the edge, of the
eaves; the shelter of the eaves; ? Vin I 152,22 (deve
vassante rukkhamularp pi -arp pi upadhavanti, Be so;
Ce, E e, Se nimba-); 284,16 (civaranidahako bhikkhu
maiJ<;iape pi rukkhamiile pi -e pi civararp nidahati, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se nimba-); Sp 299,21 (-assa udakapatatthane
thitassa majjhimassa purisassa, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
nimba-); Ps III 287,1 (-assa udakapatat~anabbhantare,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nimba-); Dhp-a I 52,7 (udakacatiy~
0
uddhane -e, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nimba-);- -p31}1}3Ip in
Ee at Sp 835,23 is wr for nimbapaiJ~~ (Be, Ce, Se so).
nibbaiika, mfn., see sv vailka.
nibbacana\ mfn., see sv vacana.
nibbacana2 , n. [S. nirvacana], an etymological (or
grammatical) explanation; Vism 494,26 (-ato tava idha
du iti ayarp saddo kucchite dissati ... kha111saddo pana
tucche . . . tasma kucchitatta tucchatta ca dukkhan ti
vuccati); PsI 105,21 (-~ pi nesarp samma passati ti
sammadi~~~ ti eten' eva nayena veditabbarp); Ud-a 58,14
(brahm~ aiJati ti brahma~o ti hi jatibrahmaiJanarp
-~); Nidd-a 1 3,18 (akarabhihitassa -arp nirutti);
Sadd 327,3o (imani -ani karitavasena vuttani ti
daghabbai!l); 607,16 (rupayati ti rupan ti -arp); 920,28
(lokappatit~ udaharaiJ~ -arp); 924,33 (0 ' -attho
dhatvatthavasena gahetabbo yatha rajati rañjati ti ca
raja).
nibbacaniya, (m!Jn. [S. nirvacaniya], (it is) to be
explained; Sadd l06,3o (0 -ta); 759,9; 770,12 (maha pañña
yassa so 'y~ mahapañño ti -~); 867,4; - see also
anibbacaniya.
2
nibbaijaya(t), mfn. [part.pr. of ni + vajjeti], shunning;
abandoning; Th 1105 (-arp sabbasukh~ nimitta111
jhane yuto; Th-a III 153,3o foil.: niravasesato vajjento ).
nibbafa, nibba!fa, se e nibbatta sv nibbattati.
nibbatteti, caus. pr. 3 sg. of nibbattati qv.
nibbatitvii in Ee at Ja II 131,13 is wr for nibbattitva (Be,
Ce, Se so).
nibbatta, mfn., pp ofnibbattati qv.
nibbattaka\ mft-I, -ika)n. [S. nirvartaka], (one) who or
which brings about, which causes (something) to come
into being; Ja II 261,4· (tena bhutapacani111 paci ti
vuccati, pajanin ti pi pa~o, janik~ -in ti attho, Be, Ce
so; Se janit~ nibbattitan ti attho; Ee pajatikin ti pi
nibbattaka
pa~ho, jatiki~ nibbattikin ti attho) = Ps 1 58,27 (eds
janika~ nibbattikan ti); Nidd 1 43,21 (yo pi -o so na
vijjati, na ca kenaci koci hayati; Nidd-a 1 154,1 foil.: yo
pi imesa~ uppadako dhammo so idani natthi);
Vism 599,1 (ime cattaro dhamma 0 -tta hetu); Sp 168,5
(tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattika~ tal).h~); Mp 1 73,9
(tes~ mano uppadako karako janako samughapako
-o); IV 38,14 (atlte attabhave -a~ kamma~ no ce
abhavissa); It-a 11 1,15 (nibbattetl ti -an ti vuccati);
Th-a 11 219,4 (dukkhassavahanin ti... dukkhassa
nibbattikan ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nipphattikan ti);
Cp-a 18,32 (ta~ mahabodhiya pacana~ sadhaka~ -an
ti);- ifc see dukkha-.
nibbattaka 2 , mfn. [nibbatta + ka2], come into being,
arisen; Ps III 108,7 (nerayiko ti niraye -o, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nibbattanako; = Mp V 35,9: eds nibbattanako) t
Nidd-a 1 212,10 (Be, Se 0 -satto, Ce, Ee nibbattanaka-);-
anibbattaka, mfn., not come or coming into being;
Mp 11 243,4 (anivatti bhavissaml ti pabbajjato e' eva
sabbaññutañal).ato ca na nivattissami anibbattako va
bhavissami, Ce, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Se anivattako).
nibbattati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirvartate], arises; comes into
being; appears; becomes; M III 66,10 (y~
kayaduccaritassa igho kanto manapo vipako -eyya); A 1
134,2o (yatth' assa attabhavo -ati tattha ta~ kamm~
vipaccati; Mp 11 210,1: khandha patubhavanti); Dhp 338
(eva~ pi tal).hanusaye anuhate -ati dukkham ida~
punappun~); Pv 1:1 (bljupama~ deyyadhamma~ etto
-ate phal~); Ja 1 49,5 (Usu d!pesu buddha na -anti
Jambud!pe yeva -antl ti); 11 398,12 (so devaloke yeva
-ati); Nidd 1 266,4 (jayati sañjayati -ati abhinibbattatl
ti); Ap 232,7 (bhave -amanamhi phala~ -ata~ tava, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -ate) t 253,15 (Be -atU; Ce, Ee, Se -atu);
377,7 (bhoga -are mama); 380,17 (paduddhare
paduddhare duss~ -ate mama); Mil 286,22 (yadi pi
maharaja sattame divase dibba~ cakkaratana~ -eyya
bodhisatto na nivatteyya); Vism 200,1 (bhavana-
paripuriya brahmaloke -ati); 603,26 (imasmi~ pi bhave
kammapaccayena nibbatta khandha nirujjhissanti
punabbhave aññe -issanti); Sp 928,9 (niraye -atu
avlcimhi -atu ti evamadina nayena akkosati); Dhp-a 111
65,15 (sace t~ maretu~ sakkhissama so labhasakkaro
amhaka~ -issatl ti); Th-a 11 199,11 (Sakkena devarañña
amukasmi~ kule -ah! ti al).atto tattha -i); -
part.pr. (a) nibbatta(t), mfn., Ps 111 442,21 (lokassa -ato
ca pavattato ca); (b) nibbattanta, mf( -ant!)n., Ap 336.24
(devaloka cavantassa -antassa jantuno); Vv-a 200,11 (sa
tava-d-eva tavati~sabhavane -antl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibbatta); neg. anibbattanta, mfn., Sv 1046,11
(buddhesu anibbattantesu) = Mp IV 190,25 (Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se anibbattesu); Dhp-a III 121,23 (taya tusitabhavane
anibbattantiya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se anibbattiya);
(e) nibbattamana, mfn., Ap 251,9 (bhave -amanamhi);
Vism 613,2s (sabbesa~ sattana~ ropa~ -amana~
pa~hama~ kammato -ati); - neg. anibbattamana, mfn.,
Nidd-a 1 256,29;- aor. 3 sg. nibbatti, A 11 172,13 (ma -1
ti); Ja 1 221,24 (bodhisatto ... rukkhadevata hutva -i);
Dhp-a III 47,1s; Pv-a 14,2 (na ciren' eva kala~ katva
avlcimhi -i); Mhv 1:56; 3 pl. nibbatti~su, Ja 1 30,17
(ekasmi~ yeva kappe cattaro buddha -i~su); IV 224,3;
578 nibbattati
Pj I 206,2; - inf nibbattitu~, Ja V 245,2· (sagge -itu~
na sakkot! ti); Sv 1045,14 (danamatten' eva hi
brahmaloke -itu~ na sakka); - absol. nibbattitva, A IV
70,2o (papa~ika -itva nibbayeyya); Ja 1 162,24 (bodhisatto
migayoniy~ -itva); 216,26 (aggi -itva); Mil306,19
(tassa ako~anena saddo -itva); - neg. anibbattitva, Ja V
58,2·; Mp 11 27,27 (tattha anibbattitva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
anibbattetva); - pp nibbatta (and nibbaga ?), mfn.
and n., l. (mfn.) (i) [S. nirvf(ta] arisen; originated; come
into being; developed; Vin 111 251,24 (phal).ita~ nama
ucchumha -a~); Vv 44:15 (vimana~ ... mama
kammehi -a~); Ja III 468,6* (-o sehi kammehi);
IV 111 ,11· (tavati~sabhavane Sakko hutva -o); Nidd 1
167,27 (ete di~~hikalaha ... samal).esu jata sañjata -a
abhinibbatta patubhuta ti); Ap 244,10 (abhiñña pañca
-a); 295,12 (uppajjate va ratana~ -assa tahi~ tahi~);
Cp 3:4:1 (bhaginl bhataro satta -a sotthiye kule);
Vibh 1,26 (katama~ rup~ paccuppanna~. y~ rup~
jata~ bhuta~ sañjat~ -a~ abhinibbatt~ ... );
Nett 79,7 (aya~ hi sa~saro sahetu sapaccayo -o);
Mil47,27 (api ca tato eva so aggi -o ti); Vism 379,22
(--tta); Sp 822,10 (odano ... tal).qulehi -o); 960,34
(taiJ.khal).e -asmin ti); Ud-a I80,21 (maccho hutva -o);
It-a 11 50,1o ([payogo] sahatthena -o sahatthiko);
Th!-a 198,22 (ambarukkhamUle --taya); Sadd 794,21
(gohi -a~ gomaya~); - neg. anibbatta, mfn., Ja V
100,22· (puna s~sare anibbattatta na mlyanti nama, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e anibbattanta); Pa~is Il 218,18 (anibbatta
yeva na nibbattanti); Vibh 1,2o; - sunibbatta, mfn.,
Ps III 402,7 (sujato ti ... sunibbatto) = Pj 11 453,2; -
(ii) [cfS. nivrta ?], removed;?- --bija, mfn., with the
seed removed; (or with the seed fully developed; ?) V in 1
215,24 (anujanami bhikkhave ablja~ --bija~
akatakapp~ pha1a~ paribhuñjitu111, Be, Ee so; Ce
nibbaga-; Se nibba~a-; Sp 1093,15: nibbagabljan ti blja111
nibbagetva apanetva paribhuñjitabba111 ambapanasadi-
pha1~. Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibba~ab!jan ti b!j~
nibba~etva) t 11 109,27 (anujanami bhikkhave ... pha1~
paribhuñjitu111 aggiparicita111 ... ab!ja111 --blj~. Be so;
Ce, Se nibbaga-; E e nivatta-) quoted Sp 767,7 (eds
nibbatta-) t Vin V 132,32 (Be so; Ce nibbatta-; Ee
nivatt~-; Se nibba~a- ); Kkh 2 154,7 (ya111 ca [phal~]
--blj~ blj~ apanetva paribhuñjitabba111);- 2. (n.) the
coming into being, arising; Ja 11 156,26 (tumhe deviya
--ghana~ janatha ti); VI 7,4 (niraye --kale); Ps III 216,24
(--kalo); Spk III 143,25 (eko --divase yeva arahatt~
papul).ati); Mp 1 253,18 (so --kkhal).e attano attabhava111
disva); - fpp nibbattitabba, n. impers., Ja 1 49,20 (ida111
e' ettha Kapilavatthu nama nagar~ tattha maya
nibbattitabban ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee Kapilavatthuka111) =
Ap-a 54,s; Vism 237,1 (ito cutena idha nibbattitabban ti);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) nibbatteti, -ayati, nibba~~eti,
l. brings into being; brings forth; produces; Vin V
172,16 (ka~hinadussa111 -essaml ti); Nidd 1 107,2 (na
janeyya na sañjaneyya na -eyya); Mil 98,19 (bheri~
ako~etva sadda~ -en ti); Sp 994,s (a~~a samapattiyo
-eti); 1082,2 (-eh! ti); Spk 11 292,31 (dhamme
abhisarikharoti -eti); Mp 11 16,1o (yatha
nimbabljakosataklb!jadlni madhur~ phala111 na -enti);
Pa~is-a 158,6 (punappun~ bhave -etl ti ponobhavika);
nibbattana
- part.pr. (a) nibbattenta, mfn., Vism 168,31 (pañcaka-
jjhan~ pana -entena); Spk III 228,27 (cattaro hi magge
tll).i ca phalani -entena); Mp III 40,15 (desan~
nibbatrentassa, Ce, Se so; Ee nibagentassa; Be
nighapentassa); Th-a Il 240,33 (manomaymp pana kaya¡p
-ento); Pa~is-a 464,3o (sotapanno satta bhave -ento); -
nibbattente in Ee, Se at Mp Il 27,26 is prob. wr for
nibbatte (Be, Ce so); - nibbattento in Ee, Se at It-a II
83,6 is prob. wr for nibbattanto (Be, Ce so); -
neg. anibbattenta, mfn., Vism 33,11; Spk Il 205,4;
(b) nibbattayamana, mfn., Nidd-a I 165,2; neg.
anibbattayamana, mfn., Nidd I 51,24 (asañjanayamano
anibbattaymnano); - aor. 3 sg. nibbattesi, Ja I 449,29
(mahant~ labhasakkara¡p -esi); IV 117,26 (jhan~
-esi); Nidd I 434,14 (ma -esi); Mil200,2s (vijjadharo ...
akale mnbaphalani -esi); 3 pl. (a) nibbattesu¡p, Ja III
376,6 (paccekabodhi¡p -esun ti); Sv 670,16;
(b) nibbattayi¡psu, PsI 88,3; IV 128,18;
inf nibbattetu¡p, A III 439,8; Ja 111 490,21; Vism 689,1;
- absol. nibbattetva, D II 340,25 (aggi¡p -etva); A I
233,18; Ja 11 45,6 (abhiñña ca samapattiyo ca -etva);
Mil 96,15 (ka~~ha¡p manthayitva aggi¡p -etva);
Vism 710,1 (manusaka¡p bhava¡p -etva); As 73,2
(buddharmnmal).a¡p plti¡p -etva); - nibbattetva in Ee at
Pv-a 73,23 is wr for nibbattitva (Be, Ce, Se so); -
neg. anibbattetva, Vibh-a 429,29; 2. tums out;
removes; - absol. nibbanetva, Sp 1093,15 (bija¡p
nibba~~etva apanetva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibba~etva); -
pass. pr. 3 sg. nibbattfyati, Spk III 93,28 (kayena
saiJ.khañyati -iyati ti kayasaiJ.kharo ); - part.pr.
nibbattlyamana, mfn., Ud-a 317,24 (eta¡p ... atekiccha¡p
Devadattena -iymnana¡p); Th-a I 140,10 (ku~i ...
-iyamana); - pp nibbattita, nibbanita, mfn., l. brought
into being; produced; Mil 98,13 (bherisaddo purisena
-ito ); Vism 667,24 (maggo -ito hoti); Sv 192,2o (atta
abhikkmnati attana abhikkamo -ito ti); 222,3
(manomayan ti manena -ita¡p) = Ps III 263,2 (Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nibbatta¡p); PsI 89,13 (-ita-dhammo, Be, Se so;
Ce, E e nibbanita-); Cp-a 258,6 (Sakkena -ito janito );
Kv-a 52,7 (yena hi kammena pa~isandhi -ita); -
neg. anibbattita, mfn., Pv-a 150,4; 2. removed; ?
Sp 712,31 (attana kata¡p nibbatritatta purebhatt~
niramisam eva vagati; Sp-~ [Be] 11 431,21Joll.:
nibbagitatta ti yavakalikavatthuto vivecitatta);
fpp (a) nibbattetabba, mfn., D 11 342,1 (aggi -etabbo);
Dhp-a II 222,13 (jhan~ -etabba¡p); It-a I 49,6;
Cp-a 316,19 (sutamaya panna -etabba);
(b) nibbattanlya, mfn., Th-a I 140,5 (idani -anlyataya
nava¡p); Sadd 692,w;- caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) nibbattapeti,
causes to come into being; la Ili 449,25 (aya¡p hi tal).ha
m~ apayesu -essati); Ps V 11,27 (catiisu yeva ta¡p
apayesu -eyya¡p); Mp II 27,19 (cattari hi
anantariyakammani niraye -enti ti); Vibh-a 444,31 (tani
kammani . . . kalena manussaloke -en ti kalena
devaloke);- see also anibbatteti.
nibbattana, n. [from nibbattati], coming into being;
ansmg; production; Vism 649,16 (nibbatti ti
khandhana¡p -a¡p); Spk II 205,4 (agha samapattiyo
anibbattento tasa¡p va pana o• -atthaya payoga¡p
akaronto); Mp III 211,17 (kal).havipakan ti apaye -ato
579 nibbasana
kalakavipaka¡p, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nibbattapanato );
Pv-a 199,18 (gal).ikaya kucchiya -~); Th-a 11 271,s
(catukkapañcakajjhanana¡p -ena); Vibh-a 305,16 (aha¡p
lokuttaradhamma¡p nibbattessiirni, natthi mayh~ etassa
-e bharo ti); - anibbattana, n., the not coming into
being; It-all 80,28 (-ato); Pjii 118,15 (aññassa
attabhavassa -ena).
2
nibbattanaka, mfn. [nibbattana + ka ], connected with
coming into being; liable to come into being; coming
into being, arising; Ja I 96,27 (upasaka va upasika va
nirayadisu -a niirna natthi); V 31 ,12· (sagge -ena
sukhena sampayutto, Ce, Se so; Be 0 -sukhena; Ee
nibbattanasukhena); Sv 128,15 (ayati¡p -a pañca-
kkhandha); Ps III 108,7 (nerayiko ti niraye -o, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nibbattako) = Mp V 35,9 f. Nidd-a I 212,10 (Ce,
Ee 0 -satto; Be, Se nibbattakasatto); Thi-a 240,22
(akkhida1esu -a pilaka); Nidd-a I 257,11 (niraye
0
-kammana¡p).
nibbattaniya, mfn.,fpp ofnibbatteti qv sv nibbattati.
nibbattapana, n. [from nibbattapeti, caus. of
nibbattati qv], causing to come into being; producing;
Mil 97,9 (uparato vato sadiyati puna -an ti);
Pa!is-a 154,13 (yattha katthaci -~ namajatiya kicca¡p).
2
nibbattapanaka, mfn. [nibbattapana + ka ], which cause
to come into being; Ps 11 325,11 (apaye -an~
kiiral).iina¡p ).
nibbatti, f [S. nirvrtti], coming into being; origination;
appearance; Abh 90 (uppatti -i jati); D Il 305,7 (jati
sañjati okkanti -i abhinibbatti khandhana¡p patubhavo,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee omit -i) f. M IIl 249,15 (Ee, Se so; Be,
Ce omit -i); Ja I 96,32 (apayesu -iya); VI 573,9
(tusitapure -i hotii ti, Ce, Ee so; Be nibbatto homi ti; Se
nibbatti homi ti); Pa!is 11 218,15 (uppado paccayo
kilesan~ -iya); Ap 361,26 (da1idde duggatimhi va -i¡p
me na passami); Mil97,31 (yatha talaval).~avidhiipanani
vatassa -iya paccaya honti); Vism 649,16 (-i ti
khandhana¡p nibbattana¡p); Sv 460,22 (iti mahapuriso
sakalassa vagadukkhassa -i¡p addasa); Mp I 155,2o
(amhak~ pana buddhassa -ito puretaram eva); - ifc
see opapaccayika-; - nibbatti in Ee at Spk III 18,25 is
wr for nibbattassa (Be, Ce, Se so);- nibbattissa in Ee at
Ap 481,23 is wr for nibbattassa (Be, Ce, Se so); -
anibbatti,f, the not coming into being; Pa!is I 12,11
(nibbatti dukkha¡p -i sukhan ti abhiññeyy~); Sv 461,13
(nirodho nirodho ti kho ti -i -i ti kho); - see also
anibbatti(n).
nibbattika, see sv nibbattaka 1.
nibbana, mfn., see sv vana 1.
nibbanatha, mfn., see sv vanatha.
nibbandhati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nibandhati.
nibbalika, mfn. [from ni 2 + vali], without wrinkles,
unwrinkled, smooth; Ps IV 153,9 (cmnm~
pasariymnan~ -a¡p na hoti).
nibbalipalita, mfn., see sv vali.
nibbasana, mfn. [ni 2 + vasana 1], wom-out, cast off (of
clothes); S II 202,13 (garukani ca te imani siil).ani
p~sukülani -ani; Spk II 170,9: -ani ti pubbe bhagavata
nivasetva apanitataya ev~ laddhanamani); 221,16
(dharessasi pana me tva¡p Kassapa siil).iini p~sukülani
-ani ti; Spk 11 199,29 foil.: tv~ imani paribhogajil).l).iini
nibbahati
pa!Tlsukillani parupitu!Tl sakkhissasl ti) quoted Sp 5,5
(Sp-~ [Be] I 36,6: ni~~hitavasanakiccani, paribhogajü,u:_¡anl
ti attho ).
nibbahati\ pr. 3 sg. [ni 2 + bahati 1], tears out; plucks out;
Ja V 269,27• (tassa vaiJ.kena jivhagga!Tl -anti
sabandhan~); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nibbiiheti, pulls out;
stretches out; Ja III 185,19* (asi!Tl -a luddaka, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee nibbaha; !85,n·: asi!Tl kosato nlhara); - aor.
3 sg. nibbiihi, Vin 1 347,4 (kosiya khagg~ -i); -
absol. nibbiihetva, Vin I 347,24; Ja V 76,19 (mukh~
-etva dante vivaritva supaJ_ll).e 9~situ!Tl acchama, Be
so; Ee gacchama; Ce, Se icchama).
nibbahatf, pr. 3 sg. [ni 2 + vahati; cf S. nirvahati], carries
out; carries along; flows out; A III 350,3 (im~ ...
puggal~ dhammasoto -ati; Mp III 375,21: vipassana-
ñaQ.~ -ati ariyabhilmi!Tl sampapeti) = V 140,17; -
caus. (a)fpp nibbiihitabba, mfn., to be accomplished; to
be dealt with successfully; Mil 134,28 (aya!Tl pi
ubhatoko~iko pañho tavanupatto so taya -o ti); - caus.
(b) absol. nibbiihapetva, having had carried off; causing
to be carried along; Vin II 159,2 (saka~ehi hirañña!Tl
nibbiihapetva); 11143,11 (tani daruni .. . saka~ehi
nibbiihapetva); M II 64,4 (im~ hiraññasuvaJ_lQ.assa
puñja!Tl saka~esu aropetva nibbiihapetva majjhe gaiJ.gaya
nadiya sote opilapeyyasi); -pass. pr. 3 sg. nibbuyhati,
is led out; is carried out or away; S 1 1,19 (yada sviiha!Tl
avuso ayilhami tadassu -ami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nivuyhami; cfSpk I 19,23 foll.: ~atu!Tl asakkonto
ativattami); Th! 468 (-ati susan~ acira!Tl kayo
apetaviññaQ.o; Th!-a 259,5: -ati upanlyati); - part.pr.
nibbuyhamana, mfn., D 111 89,4 (vadhuya -amanaya;
Sv 869,25: nlyamanaya).
nibbahana, mfn. and n. ffrom nibbahati 2], flowing out;
0
Sp 344,18 (ta!iikato -udak~; Sp-~ [Be] II 147,5: ta!iika-
rakkhaJ_latth~ tassa ekapassena vissajjita-udak~);
344,32 (udakanibbahana~~ana!Tl udakaniddhamana-
tumba!Tl va pidahati).
nibbati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nibbayati.
nibbana, n. [cf S. nirviil).a], l. the ceasing to burn, going
out; D II 157,15* (pajjotass' eva -a!Tl vimokkho cetaso
ahil) = Th 906;- ifc see aggi-, d!pa- (sv d!pa\ padlpa-;
- 2.freedom from care or passion, a sense of bodily
well-being; ease, happiness; MI 509,12 (ida!Tl ta!Tl bho
Gotama arogy~ id~ t~ -~. aha!Tl hi . . . etarahi
arogo sukhl na m~ kiñci abadhat! ti); Ja VI 98,31' (tena
brahmaloke upapajjati ta!Tl biihiraka -an ti kathenti); -
3. the ceasing to burn, going out (of the fires of pass ion
etc); the ceasing, coming toan end, of all that furnishes
JueZ for rebirth; the end of the possibility of rebirth;
freedom from all concerns and passions; the sense of
well-being, ease, happiness, experienced through the
knowledge of this freedom in oneself; Abh 6 (mokkho
nirodho -~); Vin 1 5,3 (id~ pi kho ~hiina!Tl
sududdas~ yadid~ sabbasaiJ.kharasamatho
sabbilpadhipa~inissaggo tm:_¡hakkhayo virago nirodho
-~); 10,17 (majjhima pa~ipada tathagatena
abhisambuddha . . . sambodhaya -aya sa!Tlvattati);
V 149,23* (vibhavo gati dhamman~ -~ arahato gati);
D II 42,10 (Vipassl bhagava ... saiJ.kharana!Tl adínav~
okiir~ saiJ.kiles~ -e anisa!Tls~ pakasesi); 251,14
580 nibbiina
(t~ . . . brahmacariy~ na nibbidaya . . . na -aya
sa!Tlvattati yavad eva brahmalokilpapattiya); 290,to
(ekayano aya!Tl ... maggo sattan~ visuddhiya ... -assa
sacchikiriyaya yadida!Tl cattaro satipaqhana); III 251,4
(ekacco kaJ.lhabhijatiko samano akaJ.lha!Tl asukk~ -a!Tl
abhijayati; Sv 1038,13: -a!Tl ca nama imasmi!Tl atthe
arahatta!Tl adhippeta!Tl, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits
arahatta!Tl): MI 73,36 (-a!Tl caha!Tl ... pajanami -gami!Tl
0
ca magga!Tl -gamini!Tl ca pa~ipada!Tl yathapa~ipanno ca
0
asavan~ khaya anasava!Tl cetovimutti!Tl paññavimutti!Tl
dighe va dhamme saya!Tl abhiñña sacchikatva
upasampajja viharati t~ ca pajanami); 163,1 (ekacco
attana jatidhammo samano . . . ajata!Tl anuttar~
yogakkhem~ -~ pariyesati); 493,26foll. (ay~ bhoto
Gotamassa parisa ... 0 -ninna 0 -poQ.a 0 -pabbhara -a!Tl
iihacca tinhati); S 1 39,21 * (taQ.haya vippahanena -am iti
vuccati); 199,34* (-~ hadayasmi!Tl opiya); II 117,14
(ah~ eta!Tl janami aha!Tl eta!Tl passami bhavanirodho
-an ti; Spk II 123,1 foil.: pañcakkhandhanirodho -a!Tl);
IV 251,20 (yo kho avuso ragakkhayo dosakkhayo
mohakkhayo id~ vuccati -an ti; Spk III 88,7 foil.: -~
agamma rago kh!yati tasma -a!Tl ragakkhayo ti vuccati);
252,4 (ayam eva . . . aghmi.giko maggo etassa -assa
sacchikiriyaya); V 80,5 (satt' ime . . . bojjhailga ...
bhiivita bahulíkata abhiññaya sambodhaya -aya
sa!Tlvattanti); A I 8,9 (avijja!Tl bhecchati V1JJaiP
uppiidessati -a!Tl sacchikarissatl ti); 159,7 (ratto ...
ragena abhibhilto . . . attavyabadhaya pi ceteti . . . rage
pah!ne n' eva attavyabadhaya pi ceteti ... na cetasika!Tl
dukkh~ domanassa!Tl pa~is~vedeti, ev~ ...
sandighika!Tl -~ hoti akalik~ ehipassik~
opanayika!Tl paccatt~ veditabb~ viññilhi); Dhp 23
(phusanti dhíra -a!Tl yogakkhema!Tl anuttara!Tl); 204
(-a!Tl parama!Tl sukha!Tl; cfDhp-a III 261,14 foil.: -ato
uttari!Tl añña!Tl sukh~ pi natthi, aññ~ hi sukh~
sukham eva -~ parama!Tl sukhan ti); 369 (chetva
rag~ ca dosa!Tl ca tato -am ehisi; Dhp-a IV 108,zo:
arahatt~ patto tato aparabhage anupadises~ -~ ehisl
ti); Ud 15,14 (susukh~ vata -a!Tl yadid~ evarilp~
dukkha!Tl na sa!Tlvijjatí ti); Sn 940 (nibbijjha sabbaso
kame sikkhe -am attano; Nidd 1 421,9 foll.: attano
ragassa -aya dosassa -aya . . . sabbiikusalabhi-
saiJ.kharana!Tl samaya upasamaya vilpasamaya -aya ... );
1094 (akiñcan~ anadiina!Tl eta!Tl dípa!Tl anapara!Tl -~
1t1 na!Tl brilmi jaramaccuparikkhay~); Vv 50,21
(ajjhaga amata!Tl santi!Tl -~ padam accut~); Th 138
(gacchama dani -a!Tl yattha gantva na socati); 389 (araka
hoti -a dhammarajassa sasane; Th-a 11 166,32: -a ti
kilesana!Tl nibbapanato, kilesakkhaya ti attho ); Th1517
(acchariyam abbhut~ t~ -~ asi rajakaññaya); Ja 1
4,6 (ragadín~ aggín~ vilpasamena -enapi
bhavitabb~); 11 130,15' (buddhiina!Tl ovadakara
s~sarapar~ -a!Tl gacchantl ti); III 358.22 (ito aññ~
loke nissaraJ_la!Tl -~ nama natthí ti eva!Tl di~~¡ uppajji);
IV 301,9· (danto hadayasantikar~ -a!Tl papuQ.ati);
V 176,13' (kamm~ ca phal~ ca -~ ca saddahitva);
Nidd I 292,10 (ek~ saccarp vuccati dukkhanirodho
-a!Tl); Pa~is 1 l5,4foll. (uppado sailkhara anuppado -an ti
abhiññeyy~ pavatt~ saiJ.khara appavatt~ -an ti ...
pa~isandhi sailkhara appa~isandhi -an ti ... gati saiJ.khara
nibbiina
agati -an ti ... ); II 238,17 foil. (pañcakkhandhe aniccato
passanto . . . pañcannarp. khandhanarp. nirodho niccarp.
-an ti passanto ... ); Ap 41,10 (ajaramararp. sitibhavarp.
-arp. phassayirp. aharp., Be, Ce so; Ee, Se passayirp.);
337,18 (-arp. kathayi buddho sabbadukkhappamocanarp.);
Bv 2:11 (evarp. tividhaggi vijjante -arp. icchitabbakarp.;
Bv-a 70,18: tassa tividhassa ragadi-aggissa nibbapanarp.
upasamarp. -arp. ca icchitabbarp.); Dhs 1367 (dve
vimuttiyo cittassa ca adhimutti -arp. ca; see Ps I 43,29:
araha ... -arp. adhimuttatta -e pi vimutto); 1416 (-arp. na
vattabbarp. afitan ti pi anagatan ti pi paccuppannan ti pi);
Mil 68,31 foil. (bhante Nagasena nirodho -an ti ... evarp.
etassa keva1assa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti, evarp.
kho maharaja nirodho -an ti); 69,25 (yo na 1abhati -arp.
janati so sukharp. -an ti); 269,28foil. (sakka -assa
sacchikiriyaya maggo akkhaturp. na sakka -assa
uppadaya hetu dasseturp.); 270,16foil. (tena hi Nagasena
tumhe natthidhammarp. -arp. apadisatha natthi -an ti);
271,12 (akaso ca -arp. ca ime dve akammaja ahetuja
anutuja); 313,3 (ekantasukharp. maharaja -arp. dukkhena
amissan ti); Vism 2,26 (visuddhi ti sabbamalavirahitarp.
accantaparisuddharp. -arp. veditabbarp.); 293,11 (sabba-
dukkhüpasamasari.khatassa -assa guJ;ta anussaritabba);
507,22 (paramatthato hi dukkhanirodharp. ariyasaccan ti
-arp. vuccati); 508,1 (asati hi -e ... sammapatipattiya
vañjhabhavo apajjati); 666,8 (yatha ca UJ;thasamphuttho
puriso sitarp. pattheti, evam evayarp. sarp.saravane
ekadasaggisantapasantatto yogavacaro ekadasaggi-
vüpasamarp. -arp. pattheti); Sp 139,6 (bodhi ti rukkho pi
maggo pi sabbaññutañi!J;larp. pi -arp. pi); 955,13
(paccayanarp. khayasari.khatarp. -arp. avedi); Sv 121,3
(ditthadhamme -arp. . . . imasmirp. yeva attabhave
dukkhavüpasamanan ti attho); 595,9 (tesarp. saii.kharanarp.
vüpasamo asari.khatarp. -am eva sukhan ti); 801,2 (ekam
eva hi -arp. namani pan' assa sabbasari.khatanarp.
namapatipakkhavasena anekani honti seyyathidarp.
asesavirago asesanirodho cago . . . amatarp. asokarp.
aparidevarp. anupayasarp. asari.ki1itthan ti); PsI 229,26
(ayanti va etena ti ayano, sarp.sarato -arp. gacchanti ti
attho); Spk I 37,25 (vattadukkhassa kop.rp. antabhütarp.
-arp. papuJ;titva); II 369,22 (ayatirp. apunabbhavo nama
-arp.); Mp III 153,4 (tebhümakavagasari.khatassa
sakkayassa nirodharp., -an ti attho); Dhp-a II 275,18 (ime
satta dipajala viya uppajjanti e' eva nirujjhanti ca -arp.
patva evarp. na paññayanti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
nibbanappatta eva); It-a I 164,33 (vanarp. vuccati taJ;tha
nikkhantarp. vanato natthi va ettha vanarp. imasmirp. va
adhigate vanassa abhavo ti -arp.); Pj I !52,22foil.
(nibbanasacchikiriya nama, idha arahattaphalarp. -an ti
adhippetarp., tarp. pi . . . vanasaññitaya taJ;thaya
nikkhantatta -an ti vuccati . . . itarassa pana -assa
ariyasaccanarp. dassanen' eva sacchikiriya siddha tena
tarp. idha anadhippetarp.); II 43,29 (jatimaraJ;tassa pararp.
nama -arp. tarp. arahattamaggena gacchama); 305,17
(apunabbhavaya ti -aya); 507,1o (paJ;t~ita upadanakkhaya
jatikkhayarp. -arp. abhiññaya); Th-a I 249,9 (-assa
adhigatatta yeva ayarp. mama samussayo attabhavo
antimo sabbapacchimako, natthi dani punabbhavo ti
attho ); Nidd-a I 304,25 (ajjhattasantisari.khatarp. -am eva);
Patis-a 67,32 (kehici paccayehi akatarp. -arp. asari.khata
581 nibbiina
dhatu); 93,32 (sari.khara hi aditta -arp. santan ti);
Vibh-a 51,21 foil. (asaii.khatadhatü ti asari.khatasabhavarp.
-arp., yasma pan' etarp. agamma ragadayo khlyanti tasma
ragakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo ti vuttarp., ayarp.
ettha acariyanarp. samanatthakatha, vitaJ;t~avadl pan' aha
patiyekkarp. -arp. nama natthi kilesakkhayo va -an ti;
ad Vibh 73,1); - 4. death (without the possibility of
rebirth); Ap 531,3 (-arp. Gotarni yati satehi saha
pañcahi); 533,8; - nibbanarp. in Ee, Se at A III 346,16'
and Ap 140,3 is prob. wr for nibbanarp. (Be, Ce so); -
o• -ogadaip in Ee at S V 218,2o is wr for o• -ogadharp. (Be,
Ce, Se so); - o• -ogadha, mfn. and m. [nibbana +
ogadha 1 or ogadha2], l. (mfn.) having a firm footing in
nibbana; or plunged into, immersed in, nibbana; M I
304,21 (-arp. . . . brahmacariyarp. o -parayanarp.
0
-pariyosanarp.; Ps II 370,28: o• -abbhantararp., nibbanarp.
anuppavittharp.) = S III 189,29 (Spk II 336,1 foil.: nibbane
patitthitarp., idarp. maggabrahmacariyarp. nama
o• -abbhantare vussati na nibbanarp. atikkamitva ti attho );
Mp III 351,24 ([maraJ;tasati] amatogadha ti -a -patittha ti
0
attho); - 2. (m.) the firm footing that is nibbana; or
immersion in nibbana; It-a I 112,19 (-o ti va ariyamaggo
vuccati); - --gami(n), mfn. [gami(n) 1], leading to that;
A II 26,11• (brahmacariyarp. ... adesayl so bhagava
--gaminarp.; Mp III 42,11 foil.: maggabrahmacariyarp. hi
nibbanarp. arammaJ;tarp. karitva nibbanassa anto yeva
vattati) = It28,16* (It-ai 1!2,11foil.: 0 -sari.khatarp.
ogadharp. patigharp. pararp. gacchati ti --gaml ... atha va
--gaminan ti nibbanassa anto gaminarp.); Vibh 426.13*
(bhavayitva sucimaggarp. --gaminarp.);- 0 -gama, mfn.,
going, leading to nibbana; S V 11,23 (kati . . . dhamma
bhavita bahuHkata -a honti 0 -parayana 0 -pariyosana ti);
Th 86 (ito bahiddha puthu-aññavadinarp. maggo na -o);
-
0
-gamana, n. and mfn., l. (n.) the going to nibbana;
Mp III 182,12; Nidd-a I 124,26 (-aya);- 2. (mfn.) going,
leading to nibbana; S I !86,2* (-arp. maggarp.; Spk I
269,13: vipassanarp. sandhay' aha); Dhp 289 (-arp.
maggarp. khippam eva visodhaye); Th 1023 (-e magge);
0
-garuka, mfn., pnzmg nibbana; Vism 117,1;
Nidd-a II 49,29;- 0 -giimi(n), mfn. [nibbana + gami(n) 1],
going to nibbana; leading to nibbana; Khp 6:12
(dhammavararp. adesayi -irp.); MI 73,37 (nibbanarp.
caharp. . . . paJanaml 0 -irp. ca maggarp. -inirp. ca
patipadarp.); Ja I 3,25 (avassarp. bhavato muñcitva -ina
ekena maggena bhavitabban ti); 4,23 (vijjamane yeva
-imhi sive magge); Vibh 339,16 (patipada -in! ti); Mp III
170,21 (visesagaml hoti ti -1 hoti ti attho); 361,13
(amatagaminan ti -inarp., ariyamaggarp. bhaventi ti attho,
eds so, gen. pl. or wr? ad A III 329,13*: bhavayanti
anussatirp. vivekapatisarp.yuttarp. khemarp. amata-
gaminirp.); Dhp-a III 429,1 (-irp. atthaii.gikarp. maggarp.);
It-a I 172,11 (jatiya maraJ;tassa ca paragarnino -ino
bhavatha ti); - 0
-dassiivi(n), mfn., who has seen
nibbana; Vv-a 85,22 (amatadasa -in! amhi, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr 0 -rasavini);- 0 -dhiitu,f, the domain ofnibbana;
nibbana; Vin II 239,27 foll. (bahü ce pi bhikkhü
anupadisesaya -uya parinibbayanti na tena -uya ünattarp.
va pürattarp. va paññayati); D II 109,1 (yada tathagato
anupadisesaya -uya parinibbayati); S V 8,11 (-uya ...
adhivacanarp. ragavinayo dosavinayo mohavinayo,
nibbapana
asavanaq1 khayo tena vuccati ti); It 38,5 foil. (dve 'ma
bhikkhave -u yo ... sa-upadisesa ca -u anupadisesa ca
-u; It-a 1 164,35: vanassa abhavo ti nibbanaq1 tad eva
nissattanijjlvaghena sabhavadhanu¡.aghena ca dhatu ti
-u); 38,24* (duve ima cakkhumata pakasita -u ... eka hi
dhatu idha dighadhammika sa-upadisesa ... anupadisesa
pana samparayika); Nett 38,5foll. (ya nittm¡.hata ayaq1
sa-upadisesa -u bheda kayassa ayaq1 anupadisesa -u);
69,3o (sa yeva sa-upadisesa -u vijja, vijjuppada avijja-
nirodho avijjanirodho sali.kharanirodho ... ); Mil 323,12
(api ca maharaja atth' esa -u yaq1 so samma pa!ipanno
sacchikaroti ti); Ud-a 396,7 (-u ya paramatthato
sambhavo ... sammasambuddhena desito); Pj 11 410,11
(saq1yojanakkhayantena e' ettha sa-upadisesa -u
jatikkhayantena anupadisesa vutta); - 0 -ninna, mfn.,
tending towards nibbana; M 1 493,27 (bhoto Gotamassa
parisa... -a 0 -pol).a 0 -pabbhara nibbanaq1 ahacca
titthati); S IV 180,2 (-a... sammadighi);
0
-patisarpyutta, mfn., connected with, concemed with,
nibbana; SI 114,28 (-aya dhammiya kathaya) = Ud 80,4
(Ud-a 388,5: -aya ti amatadhatusannissitaya asaii.khataya
dhatuya pavedanavasena pavattaya);
0
-pabbhara, mfn., bending, heading, towards nibbana;
MI493,27; SIV 180,3 (sammaditthi ... a); Vismll7,1;
2 Bv-a 117,6foll.: mano -i santiq1 agamasl ti attho; jano -1
-
0
-papaka, mfn. [nibbana + pitpaka ], who leads or
brings to nibbana, Ap-a 438,32 (taq1 -aq1 sattharaq1 ...
2 aggl, Be, Ce so; Ee nibbanti me; Se nibbuta me);
nimantesiq1); - 0
-pol}a, mfn. [nibbana + pol).a ],
inclining, moving, towards nibbana; M 1 493,27; S IV
180,3 (sammaditthi -a); - anibbana, n., what is not
nibbana; Kv 225,3; Ps 1 38,34;- see also parinibbana.
nibbapana, n. ffrom nibbapeti], extinguishing; cooling;
ailaying; SI 188,16* (kamaragena <;layhami ... sadhu
-aq1 bruhi; Spk 1 271,27: -an ti raganibbanakaral).aql) =
Th 1223; S V 440,8 (aditte ... cele... tass' eva
celassa... -aya adhimatto chando); Ja VI 62,26
(maqlSakhaJ).<;iaql . . . sülena angaresu pacapetva
o• -atthaya phalakako!iyaql !hapetva); Nidd I 343,18
(mahato santapassa -aq1); Mil 302,16 (aggigato maharaja
jhayamano -aq1 alabhamano); It-a 11 118,23 (aññasasane
ragaggi-ad!naql 0 abhavaql dasseti); - ifc see aggi-,
gimha- (sv gimha\
nibbapaniya, mfn. rJrom nibbapana], leading to cooling,
calming; Sv 96,25 ( -aq1 s!talaq1 bhesajjaq1 deti, Be, Se
so; Ce nigadhan!yaq1; Ee n!gadhaniyaq1); 98,18
(paccañjanan ti -aq1 s!talabhesajjañjanaq1, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee bhavanlyas!tala-).
nibbapeta(r), m. f!rom nibbapeti], one who extinguishes,
who cools; Pa!is I 129,6 (aditto lokasannivaso ... tassa
natth' añño koci -a aññatra maya ti); Ap 459,3o (-a
yatha megho); 460,22 (nibbuto isi -a ca).
nibbapeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnibbayati qv.
nibbayati, nibbati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nirvati, nirvayati],
l. (i) ceases to blow; ceases to bum, goes out; becomes
cool, cools; becomes calm, quiet; M III 245,6 (telaq1 ca
pa!icca vagiq1 ca pa!icca telappadlpo jhayati tass' eva
telassa ca vagiya ca pariyadana aññassa ca anupahara
anaharo -ati); A IV 70,2o (papa!ika nibbattitva -ayeyya);
Khp 6:14 (nibbanti dh!ra yathayaq1 pad!po; Pj 1 194,22:
nibbanti ti vijjhayanti) = Sn 235; Ja 11 235,5* (ativa
hadayaq1 nibbati; 235,8·: sltalaq1 hoti); IV 391,22
582 nibbayati
(manussa payasaq1 va<;l<;lhetva nibbatü ti thapesuq1);
Ap 427,1 (nibbati nirayo tada); Bv 2:92 (niraye pi
dasasahassl aggl nibbanti tavade; Bv-a 101,4: nibbanti ti
sammanti, santiq1 upenti ti attho); Mil96,7 (mahati
maha-aggikkhandho pajjalitva -eyya); Vism 272,7
(bahiravato . . . abbhantaraq1 pavisanto taluq1 ahacca
-ati); 298,7 (sace evaq1 pi vayamato [patighaq1] na
nibbati; Vism-t [Be] 1 355,15foll.: na vupasammati);
Sp 478,3 (aggi upadanaq1 alabhitva nibbati); 1093,s
(bhattaq1 va ma -ayatu ti pidahituq1 vattati); Mp III 74,17
(sabbapariJaha -ayanti); Dhp-a IV 209,21 (pasal).a
tava-d-eva pajjalitva bhatte pakkamatte -ayanti);
Pp-a 215,14 (tassa pi puggalassa kodho ... maral).en' eva
nibbati ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ati ti); - (ii) is refreshed,
delighted; ? J a I 61,2 (evarüpaq1 attabhavaq1 passantiya
matu hadayaql -ati); part.pr.
(a) neg. anibbayanta, mfn., Ja 1 285,12 (aggiq1 gahetva
anibbayantaq1 tbapayiq1su); (b) nibbayamana, mfn., D III
85,12 (payaso tattassa -amanassa);- aor. 3 sg. nibbayi,
D II 340,17 (ma ca te aggi -i); Ja 1 212,26 (udake
opilapitatil).ukka vi ya -i); VI 349,8 (raja ... na kujjhi
hadayaq1 assa -i); Ap 143,21 (yatha me kayo -i pariJaho
na vijjati tath' eva tividhagglhi cittaq1 tava vimuccatu);
Bv 2:175 (mano -i tavade, Be, Ce, E e so; Se nibbati;
ti pi patho ); 3 pl. nibbayiq1su, Ap 403,5 (-iq1su tayo
Vism 430,17 (pupphani ma milayiq1su d!pa ma -iq1su ti);
Ap-a 55,32 (sabbanarakesu aggl -iq1su); - absol.
nibbayitva, As 291,16 (ul).hakaro -ayitva); - 2. be comes
one in whom the fires (of passion etc) cease to burn;
becomes cool; Sn 915 (kathaq1 disva nibbati bhikkhu;
Nidd 1 344,1 foil.: attano ragaq1 nibbapeti dosaq1
nibbapeti mohaq1 nibbapeti ... ); Ap 87,19 (tava
dhammaq1 SUI).itvana -ati bahujjano); - 3. ceases to
burn, goes out (like a lamp or fire); ceases, dies (without
the possibility of rebirth); Th 919 (ahaq1 jlvita-
sankhaya .. . -issaq1 anasavo; Th-a III 73,23: -issami,
anupadisesaya nibbanadhatuya parinibbayissaml ti
attho); Ap 100,19 (Sakyaputto ... bodhayitva bahu satte
-issati cakkhuma); 196.3 (buddho ca loke nibbati); 459,2
(-ami anasavo ); 488,16 (sikhl va anupadano -issam
anasavo, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -issam' anasavo); 536,24
(alaq1 ettavata vira -issami nayaka); Sp 576,21 foil.
(thero ... ahaq1 imaq1 antimasarlraq1 dharemi taq1 ca kho
vatamukhe thitapadipo viya aniccatamukhe thitaq1 na
cirass' eva nibbayanadhammaq1 yava na -ati tava kiq1
nu kho ahaq1 sali.ghassa veyyavaccaq1 kareyyan ti
cintento); Ud-a 175,23 (ime pana pañcakkhandha ...
carimakacittanirodhena anupadano viya jatavedo
-issanti apa!).l).attikabhavaql gamissanti ti); - part.pr.
(a) nibbayanta, mfn., Ap 100,4 (-ante ca sambuddhe);
Nidd-a II 6,29 (nirindhanassa viya jatavedassa -antassa);
(b) nibbayamana, mfn., Ap 341,5 (buddhe -amanamhi);
- aor. 3 sg. nibbayi, Sn 354 (-i so adu sa-upadiseso );
Ap 10l,s H anupadano dlpo va telasaii.khaya); Dhp-a 1
363,6 (eka devadh!ta ... cuta sarlraq1 d!pasikha vi ya -i);
Mhv 5:226; 3 pl. nibbayiq1su, Mhv 5:227;
inf nibbatuq1, Ap 531,18 (nibbatuq1 tava kalo me ma
maq1 socatha puttika); Mhv 5:219 (thero ... nibbatuq1
nibbayana
manasai)l ak:a); - pp nibbuta, mfn., qv sv; - caus.
pr. 3 sg. nibbapeti, -ayati, extinguishes; cools; calms,
allays; refreshes; SI 188,20* (-ehi maharagai)l ma
"ayhittho punappun3I)l); II 153,1o (adittai]l til.mkk3I]l ...
hatthehi ca padehi ca khippam eva -eyya); A I 257,19
(sace bhikkhave SUVaiJI,lak:aro ... t3I)l jatariip3I]1 ekant3I]l
udak:ena paripphoseyya ~lil,lai]l t3I)l jatariipaf!l -eyya,
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nibbayeyya); It 93,5* (te -enti
ragaggii)l); Ja lii 443,24* (-aye sailkhubhit3I]1
mahajanai)l; 444,6·: -eyya); IV 128,21· (varina nai]l
-ayat' eva); Ap 126,18 (mocayissati mutto ca -essati
nibbuto; Ap-a 400,29 foll.: so ay3f!1 bhagava say3I)l
nibbuto kilesagglhi nibbuto paresai)l pi kilesagglhi
-essatl ti); 169,9 (mahavlro -eti mahajanai)l); Mil 318,3
(-ehi me hadayaparitahai]l); 410,16 (megho pa~aviya
Ul,lh3I]1 -eti); Dhp-a III 167,9 (bhante sok3I]l me -etha
ti); Mhv 37: !55 (pubbaveñ ay3I)l jatu, -essami tai)l);-
part.pr. (a) nibbapenta, mfn., Ja VI 23,22' (mahasattassa
karapaiJI,liilli pacitva -entassa); 349,28 (sarlre sed3I]l
-ente); Ap 109,21 (vassate amatai]l vu~~ii]l -ento
mahajanai)l); - neg. anibbapenta, mfn., Spk 11 137,n;
(b) nibbapaya(t), mfn., Ap 158,14 (-ay3I)l ca janatai]l
buddho loke bhavissati); Sp 86S,11 (u1,1hayagupatt3I]1
-ayato ); (e) nibbapayanta, mfn., Ap 175,21 (-ayant3I]l
janat3I)l; Ap-a 446,25: janasamüh3I]1 kilesa-
paritahabhavena -ayantai]l vüpasament3I)l, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee wr kilesaparitaha va); Bv 1:78 (-ayanto hadayai)l
hasayanto sadevak:ai)l); (d) nibbapayamana, mfn.,
Sv 723,2o (gha~asahassena paritahai]l -ayaman3I]l); -
aor. 3 sg. (a) nibbapesi, D 11 164,16 (antalikkha
udak:adhara ... bhagavato citak:ai]l -esi); Ap 47,6 (-e si
tayo aggl sltibhavai]l ca papayi); (b) nibbapayi, Ja III
157,15·; V v-a 327,13; (e) nibbapaye (or opt. with aor.
sense), Vv 83:8 (varina viya osiñc3f!1 sabbai]l -aye
dar3f!1; V v-a 327,13: -ayi darathai]l sokaparitahai]l) =
Pv 8:5 (Pv-a 41,23: sabbai]l cittadarath3I)l-esi, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee -eti) = Ja III 157,s• (157,15': -aye ti -ayi);
1 sg. nibbapayii]l, Ap 408,3; 3 pl. nibbapesuf!1, D 11
164,19 (sabbagandhodak:ena bhagavato citak:ai]l -esui)l);
Mhv 38:100 (aññamaññabhilapena -esuf!1 mahadar3f!1);
- inf nibbapetui)l, S V 114,9 (mahantai]l aggikhandh3f!1
-etun ti); Ja III 117,1o (nassa koci sok3I]l -etUI]l sak:koti);
Vism 305,24 (cittai]l -etui]l na sakkoti yeva); -
absol. (a) nibbapetva, It 93,11 •; Ja 11 44,19 (t3I]l aggii]l
udak:ena -etva sakhahi pothetva); III 350,1o (dlpaf!l
-etva); V 51,3 (tasmii]l citt3I]l -etva); Vism 706,2o;
(b) nibbapetvana, Cp 2:8:7; pp nibbapita, mfn.,
extinguished; cooled; Ja III 283,4 (gha~asahassena
-ita-daratha viya hutva); Nidd I 71,6 (ragassa -itatta
dosassa -itatta ... ); Nidd-a I 171,9 (uddhane udak:3I]l
siñcitva -ita-añgar3I]l viya vüpasanto); Mhv 3:42
(thera . . . lokandhak:arahananamhi mahapadlpa -ita
mara~Jaghoramahanilena); - fpp nibbapetabba, mfn.,
A IV 45,24 (kaghaggi ... kalena kal3f!1 -etabbo);
Mil410,1s (yogina ... mettabhavanaya sadevak:o loko
-etabbo ); - nibbapitai]l in Ee at Ja III 99,s• is prob. wr
for niddhapit3I]1 (Ce, Se so) or niddhavitai]l (Be so);-
see also dunnibbapaya.
nibbayana, n. [from nibbayati], going out; ceasing;
Sp 576,24 (thero ... ahai]l im3I]1 antimasarlr3I]1 dharemi
583 nibbijjhati
t3I]l ca kho vatamukhe ~hitapad!po viya aniccatamukhe
~it3I]1 na cirass' eva -dhamm3I)l);- ifc see aggi-.
0
nibbahana, n. [cf S. nirvaha, nirvaha1,1a; cf also S.
nibarha~Ja ?], carrying out; carrying away; the way out;
a channel; the way to deal with successfully, to achieve
one's aim;? Mil119,9 (samma laddh3I]1 jinaputtan3I)l
-3I)l; MiH 25,4foll.: paramicchavadahara~Je upaya-
sailkhatai]l 0 -mukh3I]1 jinaputtiinai]l jinaputtehi sughu
laddh3I]1); 198,27 (anagatiin3I]l jinaputtan3I]l cak:khuf!1
dehi -aya ti); 295,21 (nah3I]l t3I)l bhante Nagasena
vihesapekkho pucchami api ca o' -atthaya sandehassa
pucchami); 295,27 (manussa udak:anibbahanena udak:ai]l
suvidür3I]l pi haranti, api nu maharaja sak:ka
ghanamahaselapabbato -ena yathicchit3I]1 haritun ti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se udak:anibbahak:ena); 309,3 (aparapar3f!1
-3I]l sotukamo); 326,3 (puriso vippanagho ... 0 -maggai)l
disva); - see also anibbahak:a.
2
nibbahiipetvii, caus. absol. ofnibbahati qv.
2
nibbahitabba, mfn., caus. fpp ofnibbahati qv.
1
nibbiiheti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnibbahati qv.
nibbikappa, m. and mfn., see sv vikappa.
nibbikiira, mfn., see sv vikara.
nibbikkheparp, adv., see sv vikkhepa.
nibbicikieeha, mfn., and -a,f, see sv vicikiccha.
nibbiija, absol. ofnibbindati qv.
nibbiijati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nibbindati.
nibbiijhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirvidhyati], pierces through;
strikes; penetrates; S V 88,3 (anibbiddhapubb3I]l
appadalitapubb3f!l lobhak:khandh3f!1 -ati padrueti) f.
Pa~is 11 201,26; Vism 674,34 (issaso ... sar3f!1 khipitva
phalak:asat3I)l -ati); Saddh 153 (-anti patodehi); -
part.pr. (a) nibbijjhanta, mf( -antl)n., It-a I 155,29 (ayai)l
pañña ... lobhakkhandhadii]l -ann padalentl gacchatl ti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -anti); (b) nibbijjhamana, mfn.,
Vism 674,27 (mohakkhandhai]l -amano); - absol.
(a) nibbijjha, Sn 516 (-a imai]l parai]l ca lok3I)l, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nibbijja; Pj 11 426,10: -a ñatva pa~ivijjhitva);
940 (-a sabbaso kame sikkhe nibbanam attano, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nibbijja); Mhv 6:30 (khitto saro tassa kayai)l
-a nikkhami); (b) nibbijjhitva, Ps III 427,1 (paññaya ca
kilese -itva); Mp 11 368,19; - pp nibbiddha (and
nividdha), mfn. [cf S. nirviddha], l. pierced, penetrated;
having a way through, being a thoroughfare; Abh 202
(raccha ... -a tu pathaddhi); Ja VI 276,22' (pathaddhiyo
ti --vlthiyo, Be, Ce so; Ee wr patatthiyo ti; Se vlthiyo ti);
Mp 11 196,15 (vajirena --vedhassa); - --gatta, mfn. with
pierced limbs; Dhp-a I 60,s; - --piilgala mfn., of a
mottled tawny colour;? Ja 11 241,14' (tassa kira dve pi
akkhlni --piñgalani bitruak:khival,ll,liini ahesuf!1, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se nibbigha-); V 42,14 (tambada~ikai]l
--piilgalai]l dussaiJ~han3f!1 bh!bhacchai]l . . . nesad3f!1
disva); Dhp-a 11 203,7 (eko puriso --piñgalo
tambada~hiko);- neg. anibbiddha, mfn., not penetrated;
not being a thoroughfare; Abh 202 (vyüho raccha
anibbiddha); S V 88,2 (anibbiddhapubbai]l . . . lobha-
kkhandhai]l nibbijjhati) f. Pa~is 11 201,25; Ja VI 276,22'
(sandhivyühe ti gharasandhiyo ca anibbiddharaccha ca);
Spk III 287,7 (vyüha vuccanti anibbiddharacchayo ya
pavi~~amaggen' eva nigacchanti, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
avinibbiddha- ); Kkh 2 317,13 (vyühe ti anividdha-
nibbijjhana
racchay~, Be, Ee so; Ce avinibbiddha-); - 2. having
penetrated; ? Th 549 (cittaJ11 . . . -a111 paggahit~ ca
sabba obhasate disa, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nibaddh~;
Th-a 11 234,29 foll.: subhavit~, tato eva catusacc~
-~ pa~ivijjhit~ sak:alasankilesapak:khato paggahit~
ca hutva, Be, Se so; Ce cattari saccani pativijjhitani
sak:alasailkiles~ paccak:khato niggahita111 ca katva; Ee
cattari saccani pativijjhita sak:alasailkilesa111 paccak:khato
paggahit~ ca hutva); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nibbedhayati
[ef epie S. vedhayati], pierees; Mhv 23:88 (ayoloha-
may~ patt~ ... -ayati kar_1<;lena).
nibbiijhana, n. [from nibbijjhati], piereing through;
penetrating; Vism 675,4 (esa maggo lobha-
kkhandhadin~ -am eva karoti); Ps III 31,1 (sa [pañña]
yeva -ato nibbedhika ti vuccati).
nibbiijhanaka, mfn. [nibbijjhana + ka2], piereing through;
penetrating; Mp Ili 164,8 (nibbedhikapañño ti -pañño);0
407 ,2o (-~ setthacariy~ janati).
nibbittha, mfn., pp of nibbisati qv.
nibbh,n}a, mfn., pp of nibbindati qv.
nibbidati, pr. 3 sg ., see sv nibbindati.
nibbidii, f [S. nirvid], weariness (of); disenehantment,
dissatisfaetion, disgust (with); Vin I 15,13 (disvan' assa
adinavo paturahosi -aya citt~ sar_1thasi); DI 189,1 (na
-aya na viragaya na nirodhaya . . . na nibbanaya
s~vattati; Sv 377,28: na -aya ti s~saravaqe
nibbindanatthaya na sa111vattati); S 11 30,9 (ka ca
bhikkhave viragassa upanisa -a ti 'ssa vacaniy~);
IV 141,7 (cakkhussa ce bhikkhu -aya v1ragaya
nirodhaya dhamma111 deseti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibbindaya); A I 64,12 (so kaman~ yeva -aya viragaya
nirodhaya pa~ipanno hoti); V 311,25 (-a ... kimatthiya
kimanisa111sa ti . . . viragattha viraganisa111sa); Th 269
(adinavo paturahü -a samatiqhata); Ja IV 471,25* (isissa
-a ahu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -o; 473,3·: kamesu nibbedo
jato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -o jato); Pa~is 11 63,23 (ya ca
bhayatupaghane pañña y~ ca adinave ñfu.l~ ya ca -a
ime dhamma ekattha); Vibh 330,1o (katama pañña -aya
no pa!}vedhaya); Nett 29,25 (-a viragassa padaqhan~);
Vism 15,9* (atugho silamattena -a111 yo 'nuyuñjati);
Sp l366,2o (-a ti sikkhappatta vutthanagamini balava-
vipassana).
nibbiddha, mfn., pp ofnibbijjhati qv.
nibbino in Ee at Ap-a 175,1 is wr for nibbinno (Be, Ce so)
or nibbindo (Se so).
nibbinda, mfn. and m. [from nibbindati], l. (mfn.) [ef S.
vinda] being dissatisfied or disgusted; weary; tuming
away; A V 3,14 (nibbindati virajjati, -assa ... virattassa,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nibbinnassa); 3,17 (-o viratto, Ee so;
Be, Se nibbinno; Ce nibbi!)!JO ); 313,4 foil. (-assa
bhikkhave na cetanaya karar_1IyaJ11 virajjami ti dhmata
esa bhikkhave y~ -o virajjati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
nibbinnassa... nibbinno); Ja VI 62,28 (taJ11
anubandhanto yava bahidakkhi!Jadvar~ gantva -o
nivatti, Be so; Ce, Ee nibbi!J!JO; Se nibbinno );
Vism 652,27 (gahar_1e -o muñcitukamo hutva, Ee so; Be,
Ce nibbinno; Se nibbi!J!JO); Ap 534,8 (kalebare -a, Be so;
Ce nibbinna; Ee, Se nibbi!)!Ja); Pv-a 36,7 (0 -manaso, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se nibbinna-); Vibh-a4l8,9 (pa~hama­
jjhanapaññaya eva pana kilesesu pi 0 -tta no nibbidaya);
584 nibbindati
- 2. (m.) dissatisfaetion; disgust; tuming away; S IV
141,7 (cakkhussa ce bhikkhu -aya viragaya nirodhaya
dhamm~ deseti, Ee so, but perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se
nibbidaya); Thi-a 31,25 (0 -ggahar_1ena e' ettha taru~Ja­
vipassanaJ11 dasseti viragaggahar_1ena balavavipassan~);
- anibbinda, mfn., not dissatisfied; It-a I 59,33
(sattaJ11 ... bhavadisu -a111 katva).
nibbindati, nibbijjati (and nibbidati ?), pr. 3 sg. [ef S.
nirvindati, nirvidyate], is despondent; beeomes wearied,
fed up (with, loe., oeeasionally acc. or instr.), feels
disenehantment or dissatisfaction or disgust (with, loe.,
oeeasionally acc. or instr.); gives up, tums away from
(abl.); - nibbindati: V in I 14,27 foil. (ariyasavak:o
rüpasmiJ11 pi -ati vedanaya pi -ati saññaya pi -ati ... );
D III 288,13 (yathabhütaJ11 jana111 passa111 -ati); S 11 94,6
(puthujjano imasillÍJ11 catumahabhütikasmiJ11 kayasmiJ11
-eyya pi virajjeyya pi vimucceyya pi); IV 140,28
(cak:khundriye ce bhikkhu udayavyayanupassi viharanto
cak:khundriye -ati ... -~ virajjati); A I 260,7 (yasma ...
atthi loke adinavo tasma satta loke -anti); IV 387,3
(imasi111 kaye -atha ti; Mp IV 177,19: ukkar_1thatha,
pajahatha ima111 kayan ti); Dhp 277 (sabbe sañkhara
anicca ti yada paññaya passati atha -ati dukkhe);
Th 1207 (Mara -a buddharnha); Ja I 267,19* (asi111seth'
eva puriso na -eyya par_1<;lito; 267,24": na ukka!J~heyya
asacchedak:ammaJ11 na kareyyasi ti); V 368,8* (tasu ko
nibbide poso, me ?; 368,26·: nibbide ti -eyya); Pa~is I
58,1 ( -ati no nandati virajjati no rajjati); Nett 66,20
(yathabhüt~ pajananto -ati -anto virajjati); Mil 325,20
(so attfu_lo asarar_1o asara~Jibhüto bhavesu -ati);
Vism 650,22 (sailkharagate -ati ukkai_l~hati nabhiramati);
Cp-a 289,3o (paññaya ca dukkhe -ati karu~Jaya dukkh~
sampaticchati); Mhv 20:58 (jananto pi aniccat~
bhavagate -ate); Sadd 472,26 (vida tutthiy~: vindati
-ati); - part.pr. (a) nibbinda(t), mfn., V in I 14,29 (-~
virajjati viraga vimuccati); D III 288,14; Thi 26 (atha
nibbind' ahaJ11 rüpe -a111 ca virajj' ahaJ11, m. for f, or
~Jamul absol.; Thi-a 31,24: -antl cah~ tato par~
virag~ apajjiJ11); (b) nibbindanta, mfi -antl)n., A V
59,10; Vism 607,14 (-anto nandiJ11 virajjanto rag~ ...
pajahati ti); Th-a I 240,12 (kiJ11 me 1mma
sañkilighacittassa jivitena ti attabhav~ -anto ); 11 228,26
(sailgar_1ikavihar~ -anto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr -ato);
Thi-a 31,24 (-anti); (e) nibbindamana, mfn., A V 50,24
(samma -amano); Vism 651,10;- aor. 1 sg. nibbindiJ11,
Thi-a 31 ,22; nibbiijati: Pj 11 104,14 (attano
dhammataya -issati no ti, atha dhammataya
nibbindantena aticir~ bhavissati ti ñatva, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se nibbindanto) = Ap-a 181,25 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
nibbindanto); - aor. 3 sg. nibbijji, Pj 11 99,13 (so
katipahen' eva kiso dubbai).!JO hutva -i) = Ap-a 177,23
(Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nipajji); 2 sg. nibbijji, Pj 11 186,16 (ma
kho tv~ -i, addha dvihatihaccayena DighamailgalikaJ11
lacchasi ti); - absol. (a) nibbijja [cf S. nirvidya], MI
165,14 (t~ dhamm~ analailkaritva tasma dhamma
nibbijja apakkamiJ11; Ps 11 172,31: nibbijja ti nibbinditva);
247,14 (atha me te pañca bhikkhü nibbijja pakkamiJ11SU,
bahuliko sama!JO Gotamo padhanavibbhanto avatto
bahullaya ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nibbijjapakkamiJ11su); S I
124,8* (kako va sel~ asajja nibbijjapema Gotama; Spk I
nibbindana
186,17: Gotamarp nibbinditva apagacchama) = Sn 448
(eds Gotamaq¡; Pj 11 393,26: asajja tato Gotama nibbijja
aperna ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee Gotamaq¡); S IV 178,11 (atha
singa1o kummamha nibbijja pakkami otaraq¡
alabhamano); Vism 327,11 (so tasma ... kasi~arüpa
nibbijja pakkamitukamo); (b) nibbindiya, Ap 467,15
(nibbindiya tato rilpe);- nibbindiyakari(n), mfn., acting
out of disgust or dissatisfaction; Ja V 121,14* (na
nibbindiyakarissa samma-d-attho vipaccati; 122,31·:
nibbinditva ukk~!hitva karontassa); neg.
anibbindiyakari(n), mfn., Ja V 121,16*; (e) nibbinditva,
Th! 522 (nibbindanti bhavagate nibbinditva virajjanti);
Ja II 438,8 (kaye nibbinditva); Ap 597.18 (nibbinditva
agararnha); 602,14 (nibbinditva agare' harp); Mil244,27;
Vibh-a 430,2o (appamattake pi aramm~e nibbinditva
nibbutiq¡ papu~ati); (d) nibbinditvana, Ap 590,21
(nibbinditvana saq¡sare pabbajiq¡ anagariyaq¡);
(e) (~amu1) nibbindaq¡, Thi 26 (atha nibbind' aharp rilpe
nibbindarp ca virajj' ahaq¡; or part.pr. m. for f;
Thi-a 31,24: nibbindantl); (f) nibbijjitva, Ja I 82,2o (tarp
rattibhage nibbijjitva geharp pahaya nikkhantaq¡ ehi
Yasa ti pakkositva); Dhp-a 1 435,11 (bahil divase tu~hi
hutva nibbijjitva); Pj II 90,1 (raja ... nibbijjitva rajjarp
pahaya pabbajito); 102,5 (so [mahanago] yiltha
nibbijjitva pakkami); 484,1 (purohito tena nibbijjitva
pabbajam' ahaq¡ maharaja ti aha); - pp (a) nibbinna,
nibbi~~a, mfn. [S. nirvi~~a], l. disenchanted or
dissatisfied or disgusted (with); weary (of); A V 3,14
(nibbindati virajjati, -assa ... virattassa, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nibbindassa); 313,4 foil. ( -assa bhikkhave na
cetanaya kara~lyaq¡ vtraJJami ti dhammata esa
bhikkhave yarp -o virajjati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibbindassa ... nibbindo); Ja VI 62,28 (taq¡
anubandhanto yava bahidakkhi~advararp gantva -o
nivatti, Se so; Ce, Ee nibbi~~o; Be nibbindo);
Vism 652,27 (gah~e -o muñcitukamo hutva, Be, Ce so;
Ee nibbindo; Se nibbi~~o); Ap 534,8 (kalebare -a, Ce so;
Ee, Se nibbi~~a; Be nibbinda); 550,13 (-a
sabbasañkhare); Mi1245,4 (yaya pa!ipadaya attana -o
virattarüpo, Be so; Ce, Ee nibbi~~o; Se --rilpo);
Ud-a 297,32 (thero sayam eva-o oramissatl ti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nibbi~~o); Vv-a 207,1 (sa tena -a, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee nibbi~~a); Ap-a 175,1 (raja atisunhutaraq¡ -o, Be, Ce
so; Ee nibbino; Se nibbindo); 297,3 (Kondañño ... tassa
o!arikaharaparibhogena -o apakkamitva lsipatanarp
agamasi); Mhv 33:70 (amacca pi nibbi~~a tena rajina;
vl-a); Sadd 472,27 (nibbi~~o); - --rilpa, mfn., very
disgusted with; very weary of, D III 118,1 (ye pi
niga~!hassa Nataputtassa savaka gihi odatavasana te pi
nig~thesu Nataputtiyesu --rilpa virattarüpa
pativanarilpa, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nibbi~~arilpa) = M 11
244,6 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibbindarüpa); Vv-a 207,21
(--rilpa jlvite maritukama, Be, Ce, Se so; E e nibbi~~a- );
neg. anibbinnarüpa, mfn., Th!-a 221,1; neg.
anibbinna, mfn., unwearied; not giving up; Cp-a 285,32;
- 2. which has caused dissatisfaction or disgust; given
up, tumed away from; Th! 478 (-a me kama vantasama
talavatthukata, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibbi~~a); Vism 327,13
(idaq¡ maya -aq¡ rüpaq¡ aramma~aq¡ karotl ti, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee nibbi~~aq¡); - see also nibbinda; -
585 nibbisati
pp (b) nibbijjita, mfn., Th-a II 131,9 (tajjita ti ...
vu!thibhayena nibbijjita bhiq¡sapita, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nibbhaccita); - fpp nibbinditabba, mfn., Vism 670,15
(nibbinditabbe yeva vata nibbidañ~arp nibbinnan ti, Be,
Ce so; Se nibbi~~an ti; Ee wr nibbinditaña~arp
nibbindanti); - see also nibbejanl'ya.
nibbindana, n. ffrom nibbindati], dissatisfaction, disgust;
giving up, turning away from; Ap 574,16 (0 ' -attharp
rilpasmiq¡ mama cakkhupathe jino . . . itthiq¡ mapesi
sobhiniq¡); Vism 653,3 (gaha~e -aq¡ viya
nibbidanupassanaña~aq¡); Spk li 34,1o (nibbidaya ti
o• -atthaya, Be, Ce, Se so; E e nibbidanatthaya); Th-a 11
111,14 (-aq¡ adinavanupassananubhavasiddhaq¡ nibbida-
ña~aq¡); Vibh-a 418,15 (maggapañña sabbasmiq¡ pi vage
-ato nibbidaya chaHharp abhiññarp pativijjhanato
pativedhaya ca hoti); Sadd 472,26.
nibbinna, mfn.,pp ofnibbindati qv.
nibbiriya, mfn., se e sv viriya.
nibbivara, mfn., see sv vivara.
nibbisa 1, nibbesa, m. [cfS. nirvesa], l. earnings, wages;
Abh 531 (bhati ... nibbeso vetanarp); Th 606 (kalaq¡ ca
patikañkhami -aq¡ bhatako yatha; cfTh-a 11 257,2o: -an
ti nibbisanto, bhatiya kammaq¡ karonto) quoted Mil 45,4*
(Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vettanarp); - ifc see nibbittha-
(sv nibbisati); - 2. expiation; ? - anibbisaq¡, adv.,
without expiation;? (so K.R. Norman, 1969,
pp. 141-42); Dhp 153 (anekajatisaq¡saraq¡ sandhavissarp
anibbisaq¡ gahakarakaq¡ gavesanto; or part.pr. or ~amu1
absol. of nibbisati qv; cfDhp-a III 128,11: tarp ñ~arp
avindanto a1abhanto) f- Th 78 = Ja 1 76,24* quoted
Sp 17,12*.
nibbisa2 , mfn., see sv visa.
nibbisanka, mfn., see sv visañka.
nibbisati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nirvisati, nivisatej, settles; earns,
gains; A V 83,25 (puriso yena kenaci kammanhanena ...
divasarp ac.lc.lhakahap~aq¡ -eyya; Mp V 37,13: -eyya ti
uppadeyya acineyya); part.pr.
(a) neg. anibbisa(t), mfn., Dhp 153 (anekajatisaq¡saraq¡
sandhavissarp anibbisaq¡ gahakarakarp gavesanto; or
~amul absol.; cfDhp-a III 128,11: taq¡ ñ~aq¡ avindanto
alabhanto, and K.R. Norman, 1997, p. 100) = Ja 1 76,24*
quoted Sp 17,12* (17,17: idaq¡ pa!hamabuddhavacanarp) f-
Th 78 (Th-a I 182,19: tassa nivattakañ~arp avindanto
a1abhanto); Thl 159 (yathabhuccaq¡ ajanantl saq¡sari
'harp anibbisaq¡, m. for f [or ~amul absol.];
Th!-a 137,13foll.: sarpsarasamudde patiHhaq¡ avindantl
alabhantl); (b) nibbisanta, mfn., Th-a 11 257,2o (nibbisan
ti -anto, bhatiya kammaq¡ karonto);
(e) nibbisamana, mfn., A V 84,17;- absol. neg. (~amul)
anibbisaq¡, Dhp 153 (anekajatisarpsaraq¡ sandhavissarp
anibbisaq¡, or part.pr.; cfDhp-a lil 128,11 above) = Ja I
76,24* quoted Sp 17 ,12•; Thl 159 (yathabhuccaq¡ ajananti
saq¡sari 'haq¡ anibbisaq¡, [or part.pr. m. for f];
cfTh!-a 137,13foll. above, and K.R. Norman, 197Ja,
1
pp. 92-3); pp nibbiftha, nivinha , mfn. [cfS.
nirvi~!a], l. (what is) paid; paid off; eamed; Sn 25
(naharp bhatako 'smi kassaci ... -ena carami sabbaloke;
Pj II 38,27 foil.: ahaq¡ pi Dlpankarapadamillato yava
bodhi tava sabbaññutaña~assa bhatako ahosiq¡
sabbaññutappatto pana --nibbiso rajabha!o viya ten' eva
nibbisaya
-ena sabbaññubhavena lokuttarasamadhisukhena ca
jivami, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nibbigho nibbiso); Ja IV
134,26* (tesarp na ppa!ibandhami nivigharp bhatta-
vetanarp, Be so; Ce, Ee nibaddharp; Se nibbattharp;
135,14': yarp tehi sajjitarp bhattarp ca vetanarp ca);
Sp 924,8;- --nibbisa, mfr¡_, whose wages are paid,- who
has earned his wages; ? Pj II 38,28 (--nibbiso rajabha!o
viya, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nibbigho nibbiso); -
--rajabha!a, mfn., whose service to the king had been
recompensed or paid off; ? Vin IV 265,8 (aññataro
brahmai_Jo -o tarp yeva bha!apatharp yacissami ti .. ,
rajakularp gacchati; Sp 924,9: nibbirtha rañño bhati ke~i
etena ti -o, ekarp !hanantararp ke~iya gahetva tato
laddha-udayo ti attho . . . rañño ke~irp datva puna tarp
yeva !hananatararp yacissami ti cintento, Ce so; Ee
niviqha; Be, Se nibbiqho rajabha!o rañño bhati ... ); -
2. married; Sadd 364,21 (ya anibbiqha va hotu -a va
yava jararp na papu~ati tava sa kañña yeva nama ti);-
neg. anibbiqha, mfn,, Sadd 364,21; - see also nivighi
(sv nivisati).
nibbisaya, mfn., see sv visaya,
nibbisevana, mfn,, see sv visevana.
nibbisesa, mfn,, se e sv visesa,
nibbijaka, mfn, [ni 2 + bija + ka2; cf S. nirbija], seedless,
impotent; Ja VI 239,10' (vacchakakale yeva marp ... -arp
akarpsu).
nibbiriya, mfn., se e sv viriya.
nibbisa, mfn. [ni 2 + visa ?], a term of praise for an asee tic;
(without 20? not being 20 ?); Sv l039,21foll. (niddaso
bhikkhu -o nittirpso niccatta!Jso nippaññaso bhikkhu
ti ... titthiya . , . visativassadikale pi matarp [nigai_!!harp]
-o nittirpso niccatt~iso nippaññaso ti vadanti) = Mp IV
7,25foll.
nibbu.ijhati, pr. 3 sg. [< *nivujjhati ? cf S. niyudhyate and
O. von Hinuber, 1986, §§ 214, 216], wrestles; Vin II
10,28 (-anti pi mu!!hihi pi yujjhanti) = III 180,33
(Sp 622,2: mallayuddharp karonti); II 12,25 (-issanti pi) =
III 182,3o; - se e also nibbuddha.
nibbuta, mfn. [used as pp ofnibbayati qv; cfS. nirva~a, S.,
BHS nirv¡ta,], (the various meanings overlap, and
cannot (and should not) always be distinguished; see
Ja I 60,30* foll. below); l. ceased to hum, gane out;
become cool, cooled; ceased; D II 335,12 (so ayogujo
n' eva tejosahagato hoti ... sito -o); 341,11 (kacci te tata
aggi na -o ti); MI 487,22 (sace ... so aggi nibbayeyya
janeyyasi tvarp ayarp me purato aggi -o ti); A III 409,10
(aiJ.garani sitani -ani); Sn 19 (-o gini); Bv 2:92 (niraye
pi ... aggi nibbanti ... te p' ajja -a aggi); Mil 225,19
(papaka akusala dhamma tathagatassa bahita . . . khil)a
khayarp patta -a upasanta); 304,9 (mahatimaha-
aggikkhandho . . . upadanasañkhaya nibbayati so aggi
vuccati anitiko anuppadavo samaye -o nama ti);
346,22* foll. (-arp pa!havirp disva ... anumane jananti
mahameghena -arp); Pj I 195,7 (yathayarp padipo -o
evarp nibbanti); Th-a III 71,16foiL (yatha telarp ca
pa!icca vattirp ca pa!icca pajjalanto pajjoto padipo tesarp
parikkhaye nibbayati -o ca katthaci gantva na tiqhati
aññadatthu antaradhayati adassanam eva gacchati evarp
kilesabhisaiJ.khare nissaya pavattamano khandhasantano
tesarp parikkhaye nibbayati -o ca katthaci gantva na
586 nibbuta
ti!!hati ... ); Thi-a 114,22 (vagiteladike paccaye sati
uppajjanaraho padipo tadabhave anuppajjanato -o ti
vuccati); - 2. (i)free from care or passion; serene,
calm; happy; Sn 630 (aviruddharp viruddhesu
attadai_J9esu -arp; Pj II 468,19: -an ti nikkhittadai_J9arp);
Ja I 60,3o* foll. (-a nuna sa mata -o nuna so pita -a nuna
sa nañ yassayarp idiso pati); 61,3foll. (kasmirp nu kho
-e hadayarp -arp nama hoti ... ragaggimhi -e -arp nama
hoti dosaggimhi mohaggimhi -e .. , sabbakilesa-
darathesu -e su -arp nama hoti); V 119,11- (yada pan'
assa hadayarp -arp hoti mudukarp tada
vinicchayakammarp katabbarp); Mil347,18 (-o 'smi
bhante Nagasena tumhakarp paramavicittena
pañhaveyyakarai_Jena ti); Sv 14 7,6 (-assa kho pana
bhagavato santikarp -eh' eva yanehi gantabban ti);
Mp II 138,25 (indriyanarp santataya --taya pai_Jitataya);
Dhp-a I 223,3 (idani pana me cittarp -arp bhavissati
sukhena ca sayiturp labhissami ti); Ud-a 250,28
(hatthinago . , , gha!asahassena nibbapitasantapo viya -o
hutva pasannacitto); - esp. (ii) free jrom passion, in
whom the jires of passion (the fuel for rebirth) have
gane out; Vin I 8,24' (eko 'mhi sammasambuddho
sitibhuto 'smi -o; Sp 964,22: kilesanarp yeva --tta -o);
D II 136,24' (ragadosamohakkhaya sa -o); M II 237,13
(santo 'harp asmi -o 'harp asmi anupadano 'harp asmi
ti); S II 279,8* (anupadaya -o dhareti antimarp deharp);
A I 197,8 (diqhe va dhamme nicchato -o sitibhuto;
Mp II 308,2: abbhantare santapakaranarp kilesanarp
abhavena -o); Ud 33,20' (tassa -assa bhikkhuno anupada
punabbhavo na hoti); Th 1060 (jhayati anupadano
9ayhamanesu -o; Th-a III 139,36: ragaggi-adihi
ekadasahi aggihi sattesu 9ayhamanesu saiJ.kilesa-
parijahabhavena -o sitibhuto ); Thi lO l (pahasirp asave
sabbe sitibhutamhi -a); Ja V 251,10* (upadanesu lokesu
9ayhamanesu -o; 251 ,2o-: -o ti te aggi nibbapetva
sitalena hadayena jhayamano); Ap 244,22 (so ca
buddhattarp sampatto -o lokapujito); 298,19 (arahattarp
ca me pattarp sitibhuto 'mhi -o); Vism 513,3* (atthi
nibbuti na -o puma);- 3. gane out (like a lamp or jire),-
ceased, dead (without the possibility of rebirth); Vin V
216,16 (na jivati na mato na -o); Vv 47:12 (tighante -e
capi); Th 928 (sabbasavaparikkhil)a ... -a dani te thera);
Ap 230,22 (Siddhatthamhi bhagavati -amhi narasabhe);
244,24 ( -assa mahantassa citakam agamas' aharp); 542,8
(pujayirpsu . . . -arp buddhamatararp); Mhv 2:32
(Ajatasattuno vasse a!!hame muni -o); 3:2 (vesakha-
pu~~amayarp so dipo lokassa -o); 3:41 (te yavatayukarp
!hatva thera sabbe pi -a); - anibbuta, mfn., not cool,
not cooled; not calm; not free from passions; It 91,18*
(It-a II 116,20: ragadikilesaparijahabhibhavena -o); Ja IV
391,23 (tasmirp [payase] -e); Nidd I 448,6
(samai_Jabrahmai_Ja . , . -a nibbutavai_J~ena dissanti);
Dhp-a II 166,14 (kayikaparijaho -o va); Nidd-a I 457,18
(avupasantan ti -arp); - sunibbuta, mfn., l. well
cooled; Vism 45,19* (salikurarp -arp); - 2. completely
gane out, extinguished; completely free from (the jire of)
passions; Th 1022 (khil)asavo visarpyutto sail.gatito -o;
Th-a III ll6,28: sabbaso kilesaparijahassa vupasantatta
-o); Ap 543,6 (sitibhüta -a); Ps II 89,31 (udakarp pana
aggissa ujuvipaccanikarp tena nibbuto -o hoti).
nibbuti
nibbuti, f [cfnibbuta and S., BHS nirvp:i], l. ease,
happiness; allaying, calming; Abh 1015 (manotose ...
-itthiya!Tl); Pv 7:4 (pari~ayhati dhümayati khudaya
hadaya!Tl mama -i!Tl nadhigacchlimi; Pv-a 37,4: -in ti
khuppipasadukkhassa vüpasaman~); Ja VI 437,9•
(mukha!Tl ca parisussati -i!Tl nadhigacchami aggida~~ho
va atape); Cp 2:8:8 (katva cittassa -i!Tl; Cp-a 166,23foll.:
cittassa vüpasama!Tl katva); Ud-a 211,30 (keci ujarehi
pañcahi kamagul).ehi santappito atta dighe va dhamme
parama!Tl -i!Tl patto hoti ti vadanti); - 2. the ending of
concerns and passions (and therefore of rebirth);
nibbana; Abh 9 (mokkho . . . nibbiina!Tl ...
suddhinibbutiyo); 1015; D Ili 28,10 (aparamasato me
paccatt~ yeva -i vidita; Sv 830,1 foil.: attana yeva
attani kilesanibban~ vidita!Tl); Khp 6:7 H!Tl
bhuñjamana; Pj I 185,5: parippassaddhakilesadarath~
phalasamapatti!Tl); Sn 933 (santi ti -i!Tl ñatva; Nidd-a I
421,21: -i ragadin~ santi ti ñatva); Th 32 (ajar~
jiramanena tappamanena -i!Tl nimiss~ param~
santi!Tl); 586 (khiyanti asava sabbe -i!Tl cadhigacchati;
Th-a II 250,15: duvidha!Tl pi nibbiina!Tl adhigacchati
papul).ati); Nidd I 352,11 (upasanti!Tl vüpasanti!Tl -i!Tl
paripassaddhi!Tl na eseyya); Ap 75,28; 321,12 (sabbe patt'
amha -i!Tl); Bv 2:7 (ajara!Tl amar~ khema!Tl
pariyes1ssam1 -i!Tl; Bv-a 69,21: -in ti nibbana!Tl);
Vism 513,3• (atthi -i na nibbuto puma); Nidd-a I 373,28
(santapassa nibbapanan ti kilesasantapassa -i); -
3. death (without the possibility of rebirth); Abh 1015
(nibbane 'tthagame -Itthiy~); Ap 534,19 (nüna buddho
pi -i!Tl gacchati naciren' eva aggi viya nirindhano);
539,23 (ajja gacchami -i!Tl); 541,2 (gacch' Ánanda
nivedehi bhikkhün~ matu -i!Tl); Mhv 4:65 (thera
dosakkhay~ patta patta kalena -i!Tl); 5:222 (-i!Tl etassa
sutva); - 4.food;? Ja III 523,19' (appa!Tl pi ce -i!Tl
bhuñjati yadi; 523,29' foil.: appaka!Tl pi dhammaladdha!Tl
-i!Tl bhojan~ bhuñjati, Ce, Se so; Be 0 -bhojana!Tl; Ee
nibbutabhojana!Tl).
nibbutte in Ee at Ap 149,15 is wr for nibbute (Be, Ce, Se
so).
nibbuddha, n. [cfnibbujjhati and S. niyuddha], wrestling;
a wrestling match; Abh 402 (-~ mallayuddhamhi); DI
6,17 (dal).~ayuddha!Tl munhiyuddha!Tl -a!Tl uyyodhik~;
Sv 85,8: -an ti mallayuddh~) = Nidd I 366,27; Ap 301,3
(-e vattamanamhi); Mi1232,2o (mallo va mallantevasi va
bahuke divase -a!Tl sikkhitva sampatte mallayuddhe
osakkeyya); - 0 -malla, m., a wrestler; Nidd-a I 344,13
(--munhikamallacerakadayo susiniddhehi maccha-
m~sadihi sañra!Tl pii).enti, Be so; Ee -cetakadayo; Se
nibbaddha-; Ce omits) = As 403,13 (Ce so; Be
--munhikamalladayo; Ee nibbuddhamallaka-; Se
nivuddhamallamutthitamalla-).
nibbuyhati, pass. p~: 3 sg. ofnibbahati2 qv.
nibbusita, mfn., see sv nivasati 2.
nibbecikiccha, mfn., se e sv vecikiccha.
nibbejaniya, mfn. [from *nibbejana, associated with Vvij,
or with nibbijjati qv ?], connected with recoiling;
connected with despondency, giving up; S I 124,3 (Maro
papima bhagavato santike ima -a gathayo abhasi; Spk I
186,9: ukkal).~aniya); Pj II 393,8 (ima 0 -gathayo abhasi).
nibbethati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nibbe~eti.
587 nibbetheti
nibbethana, n. [from nibberheti; cf BHS nirve~ana],
unwinding; disentanglement; rebuttal (one of the
elements of a disputation); A I 202,21 (abhütena
vuccamano na atapp~ karoti tassa -aya iti p' et~
ataccha!Tl iti p' eta!Tl abhütan ti); Mi128,33
(pal).~itan~ . . . sallape ave~an~ pi kayirati -~ pi
kayirati); Sv 53,11 (avai).I).e yeva -~ katabb~ na
sabbattha); Spk III 145,19 (ev~ puccha hoti ev~
vissajjan~ eva!Tl gahal).a!Tl ev~ -an ti imina nayena
itivado hoti); Pv-a 253,28 (suttaguje ... 0 -vasena khitte);
Nidd-a I 285,25 (nibberhiyan ti mama -a!Tl mocan~
nikkhaman~); Sadd 355,18;- see also averhana.
nibbethiyii, nibbe~ika (and niverhiya ?), f [from
nibberheti], disentangling; rebuttal (one of the elements
of a disputation); Ja Il 9,25 (dehi me vinicchaya!Tl
ave~ikaye va nibbe~ikaye va niggahe va paggahe va,
Ce so; Be nivedhikaya va; Ee nibbedhikaye va; Se
nibbedhitaya va); Nidd I 164,25 (kath~ ave~iy~
karissami kath~ -~ karissami, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nibbedhiya!Tl, prob. wr; Nidd-a I 285,25: -an ti mama
nibberhana!Tl mocana!Tl nikkhamana!Tl); !66,16 (averhiya
te akata -a te dukkata, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibbedhiya,
prob. wr); 173,24 (-aya -a!Tl, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nibbedhiyaya nibbedhiya!Tl, prob. wr); - see also
averhika, dunnibberhiya, dunniverhiya.
nibbetheti, -ayati (and nibbe~ati, nive~eti), pr. 3 sg.
[S. !ex. nirve~rayati; cf BHS nirvethayati], unwinds
(trans. and intrans.), disentangles; explicares;
disentangles oneself; answers, rebuts (a charge); Vin II
79,17 (na kho Dabba dabba eva!Tl -enti, sace taya kat~
katan ti vadehi) = III 162,34 quoted Ap-a 505,29 (Be so;
Ee, Se wr nibbedhenti; Ce na kho Dabba eva!Tl
nibberhehi); D III 117,15 (cara vadappamokkhaya -ehi
va sace pahosi ti; Sv 905,24 foil.: maya aropitadosato
attana!Tl mocehi) = M II 3,30 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nibbedhehi) = Nidd I 173,12 (Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nibbedhehi); MI 230,33 (sak~ yeva vad~ -ehi ti, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nibbedhehi ti); A IV 192,20 (so bhikkhu
bhikkhühi apattiya codiyamano na sarami na sarami ti
asatiya va -eti); Mil 3,18 (pucchitapucchita!Tl sabb~
pañhaparibhan~ vijatetu!Tl -etu!Tl samattho bhaveyyan
ti); Saddh 153 (-ayanti); Sadd 355,18 (ve~a ve~ane:
ve~ati -ati); - part.pr.(a) nibbe~enta, mfn., Vin II
101,13 (tam en~ so -ent~ ativetheti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
niverhent~; Sp 1199,3foll.: -entan ti na sarami ti
vacanena -ayaman~. Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nive~entan
ti .. . -iyaman~) = M II 249,13; Pv 38:29 (yatha
suttaguje khitte -enta!Tl palayati evam ev~ pi so jivo
-ento palayati); Vism 27,17; Sp 326,4;
(b) nibbe~ayamana, mfn., Sp 1199,4 (-ayaman~. Be,
Ce so; Ee, Se -iyamana!Tl); - aor. 3 pl. nibberhesu!Tl,
Sv 715,5; 2 pl. nibberhayittha, Sv 715,3 (im~ vatth~
ma -ayittha ti); - absol. nibberhetva, Vism 652,28
(hattha!Tl -etva, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nibbedhetva) =
Patis-a 31,21; Ps II 276,23 (mahajanato -etva ekak~
yeva n~ niggal).hissami ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nivattetva);
Thi-a 207,16 (dos~ tava -etva); - pass. part.pr.
nibbe~iyamana, mfn. [or Atm.], DI 54,19 (suttaguje
khitte -iyamanam eva paleti); S III 212,13 (bale ca
pal).~ite ca -iyamana sukhadukkh~ palenti ti); -
nibbeda
pp nibbethita, mfn., unwound; unravelled; explicated;
Sp 326,5 Htamatte parajika111); - sunibbethita, mfn.,
well or properly explicated, answered; Mi1123,6
(sunibbethito pañho, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se suniverthito);
160,18 (sunibbethito pañho bahuvidhehi karaJ.!ehi, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se sunivedhito); 197,28 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
suniddi!rho); - fpp (a) nibbethetabba, mfn., DI 3,15
(tatra tumhehi abhütaip abhütato -etabbaip);
(b) *nibbethiya, *nivethiya, mfn.,? ifc see
dunnibbethiya, dunnivethiya; - see also dunnibbetha,
dunnivetha, dunnivethaya.
nibbeda, m. [S. nirveda], disenchantment, dissatisfaction,
disgust; Ja IV 473,3 (nibbida ahü ti kamesu -o jato, Be,
Ce, Ee so; Se nibbido ahü ti kamesu nibbido jato); It-a I
152,2s (nibbindatha -aip apajjatha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nibbedhaip, prob. wr); Th-a III 192,31 (attabhave
sabbasmiip ca 0 -bahu1o hohi).
nibbedana, mfn., se e sv vedana.
nibbedha, m. [BHS nirvedha], penetration; insight; S V
88,14 (evaip bhavita ... satta bojjhailga evaip bahul!kata
-aya saipvattanti ti); Nett 153,3o (ayaip -o); Sv 1038,18
(-o vuccati nibbanaip, taip bhajanti upagacchanti ti
0
-bhagiya); Patis-a 61,26 (mohakkhandhaip nibbijjhati
pada1eU ti ariyamaggo -o nama); - nibbedhaip in Ce,
Ee at It-a I 152,28 is prob. wr for nibbedaip (Be, Se so);
-
0
-bhagi(n), mfn., belonging to, conducing to,
penetration; Vibh 330,25 (-in! pañña); Thl-a 267,6
(kamesu -m1m dhammakathaip katheti);
0
-bhagiya, mfn., belonging to, conducing to,
penetration; D III 277,3 (-o samadhi); S V 87,23
(katamo ... -o maggo, yad idaip satta bojjhailga); Patis I
4,17 (ime dhamma -a ti); Nett 49,9 (-aip nama suttaip ya
catusaccapakasana); Vism 15,1o* (hoti -aip sllaip); 88,19
(--ta); Sp 404,1o (--tta); Ud-a 234,18 (nibbedhikaya ti
-aya); Patis-a 276,16 (anha samapattiyo -a eva); -
dunnibbedha, mfn., hard to penetrate; Mi1155,2 (pañho
sumahanto -o, Ee so; Be, Ce dunnibbetho; Se
dunnibodho); 233,13 (pañho gambhiro -o, Ee so; Be, Ce
dunnibbetho; Se dunnivedho).
nibbedhayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnibbijjhati qv.
nibbedhika, mfn. [cf BHS nirvedhika, nairvedhika],
piercing, penetrating; D III 237,17 (udayatthagaminiya
pannaya samannagato ariyaya -aya samma-
dukkhakkhayagaminiya; Sv 1029,23: -aya ti anibbiddha-
pubbalobhakkhandhadayo nibbijjhituip samatthaya) t
MI 356,20 (Ps III 31,1foll.: sa yeva nibbijjhanato -a ti
vuccati . . . maggapanna . . . dosamohakkhandhaip
nibbijjhati padaleU ti -a) t S V 197,2o; A III 412,6 (so
imaip -aip brahmacariya111 pajanati kamanirodhaip;
Mp III 407,19 foll.: ima111 chattiipsaya thanesu
nibbijjhanaka111 set!hacariyal11 janati); Patis JI 201,22
(katama 0 -pañña); Ud-a 234,18 (-aya ti nibbedha-
bhagiyaya); Patis-a 639,2o (sa hi nibbijjhati ti -a, -a ca
sa pañña ca ti nibbedhikapañña); - nibbedhikaye in Ee
at Ja JI 9,25 is prob. wr; Ce nibbethikaye; Be
nivedhikaya; Se nibbedhitaya.
nibbedhiyaip in Ee, Se at Nidd I 164,25 and 173,24,
nibbedhiya in Ee, Se at Nidd I 166,16, and nibbedhiyaya
in Ee, Se at 173,24 are prob. wrr for nibbethiyaip,
nibbethiya and nibbethiyaya (Be, Ce so).
588 nibhiisa
nibbedhetva in Ee, Se at Vism 652,28 is prob. wr for
nibbethetva (Be, Ce so); - nibbedhenti in Ee, Se at
Ap-a 505,29 is wr for nibbethenti (Be, V in lli 162,34 so;
Ce na kho Dabba evaip nibbethehi); - nibbedhehi in
Ee, Se at Nidd I 173,12 is prob. wr for nibbethehi (Be, Ce
so).
2
nibbematika, mfn. [from ni + vimati], not in doubt;
certain, assured; Vin I 126,s (ahaip avuso itthannamaya
apattiya vematiko yada -o bhavissami tada taip apattiip
patikarissaml ti); JI 57,31 (ekaip masaip -o ekaip masaip
vematiko); Vism 161,32 (purisassa ... sovatthikattayaip
disva -assa) = As 173,24 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
nibbematikassa); Sp 94,8 (buddhasasane -o); Mp V 44,1
(niqhaip gata ti -a); Dhp-a II 120,4 (ahaip -o hutva tiJJi
ratanani uddissa nikkhanto);- anibbematika, mfn., not
free from doubt; Dhp-a I 34,7 (mahajano na nibbematiko
hoti, ath' assa --bhavaip viditva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
mahajano vematiko ahosi);- see also vematika.
1
nibbesa, m., see sv nibbisa .
nibbyadhi,f, see sv vyadhi.
nibbhaccita, mfn., see sv nibbhaccheti.
nibbhaccheti, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirbhartsayati; cf BHS
nirbhatsayati], threatens; rebukes; Sv 616,3o ([saddo]
kamanlyo ti divasaip pi suyyamano khamateva na -eti,
Ee, Se so; Be na bibhaccheti; Ce na jigucchati); - aor.
3 sg. nibbhacchesi, Ja JI 338,5 (naip ... hatthe gahetva
apehi na me taya attho ti -esi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nikka99hesi); - pp nibbhaccita, mfn. [cf S. nirbhartsita,
BHS nibbhacchita], threatened, menaced; Th-a II 131,9
(tajjita ti ... vunhibhayena nibbhaccita bhil11Sapita, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se nibbijjita).
nibbhaya, mfn., see sv bhaya.
nibbhita, mfn., see sv bhayati.
nibbhujati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirbhujati], twists; distorts;
Mil 253,31 (cittaip parikupitaip kayaip abhujati -ati
samparivattakaip karoti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nibhuñjati);
1
-se e also nibbhoga .
nibbhoga\ mfn. [see nibbhujati], twisting, contortion; -
ifc see ortha- (sv oqha\
1
nibbhoga 2 , mfn., see sv bhoga .
nibha, mfn. [ts], resembling; like; Abh 530 (sailkaso
sannibho -o); 922;- ifc see ummapuppha- (sv umma),
tapanlya- (sv tapanlya\ meghaVaJ.IJJasiri- (sv megha),
ratana- (sv ratana\ sasi- (sv sasi[n]);- see also nibha.
nibhata in Ee at SI 209,15* is prob. wr for níhata qv
sv níharati.
nibha,f [BHS id.], appearance; shine, lustre; Vv-a 179,19
(nibhati dippati ti -a VaJ.IIJO va -a VaJ.IJJanibha) t
As 316,35foll.; Sadd 863,6; 864,24;- ifc see val).l).a-;-
0
-S3V31,.ll,.l3,mjn., similar in appearance; JaiV 439,1*
(miga manussa va -a; 439,s·: 0 -samanaval).l).a,
dissamanakasaríra ti); - see also nibha.
nibhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nirbhati], appears; shines;
V v-a 179,18 (-ati dippati ti nibha vaJJIJO va nibha
vaJJJJanibha); As 316,34 (-an ti va nibha, cakkhu-
viññill).assa pakara hon ti attho ).
nibhasa, m. [cf S. nirbhasa], appearance; - ifc se e odata-,
nlla-, píta- (sv p1ta2), lohitaka-; - 0
-rüpa, n., (merely)
an appearance; ? a reflected form; ? Spk II 308,21
(adasaip pana nissaya -aip nama ta111 paññayati ti); -
nibhita
see also ummapupphanibhasi(n) (sv umma).
nibhita, mfn., see nibbhíta sv bhayati.
nimajjhima, mfn. [?], (according to ct) not the middle one
( ie the best); J a V 3 71, 18' (okü:u:.uu11 ñatisaii.ghehi -a111
kath~ gahi; 371,23·: n' eva majjhim~ n' eva kanighal!l
uttama111 haJ11sarajanal!l; perhaps read nimajj' im~.
"having plunged in ( to the lake )" ?).
nimantaka, m. [S. nimantraka], one who invites; Ja 1
294,8' (asaddhammavasena hi amantakesu -esu
vijjamanesu matugamo nama na sakka rakkhitun ti);
IV 399,27' (dilta vidhavantu ... -a samar_¡abrahma¡;¡anal!l,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimantita; 400,13' foil.: dhammika-
samar_¡abrahmar_¡e nimantetva pakkosaka); Mil205,11*
(sace labhetha kha¡;t~ va raho va -al!l va pi labhetha
tadisa111; quoting Ja V 435,19': eds nivatak~;
cf 437,17' foil.: nivatake ti rahomantanake paribhedake).
nimantana (and, esp. in Ce, nimanta1,1a), n. (and m. and
-a,f) [cf S. nimantrar_¡a, BHS nimantrar_¡a,
nimantrar_¡aka], invitation; a meal to which one is
invited; Vin I 58,14 (atirekalabho saii.ghabhatt~
uddesabhatt~ -~ ... ); III 172,1 (yo icchati
pi¡;¡9apatiko hotu yo icchati -a111 sadiyatu); IV 78,23 (dve
tayo -e ekato bhuñjati; Sp 817,21: dve ti¡;ti -ani ekapatte
pakkhipitva); V 148,35* (-asu); M III 126,13
(nabhijanami -a111 sadita); S II 202,15 (ji¡;¡¡;¡o si tv~
Kassapa . . . tasmatiha tva111 Kassapa . . . -ani ca
bhuñjahi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ce -esu; Spk II 170,14:
pi¡;¡9apatikailg~ vissajjetva salakabhattadlni -am
bhuñjahl ti); Ja I 448,18 (-e ucchu1111abhitva); IV 368,9
(paccekabuddha ... -a111 adhivasayi111su); Sv 257,9 (id~
asana111 ettha nisldahl ti ev~ asanena -~ nama hoti);
Dhp-a II 245,5 (natthi upasaka -~, manussa devasik~
evarüpam eva ahar~ denti); Sadd 813,28 (a¡;tattiy~ ...
-e ... pañcaml vibhatti hoti); 814,14 (-~ adarapubbako
niyogo);- animantana, n., nota (meal by) invitation;
Sp 819,3;- se e also nemantanika.
nimantanaka, m(fn). [nimantana + ka2], (one) who
invites; Spk II 120,23foll. (apanlyak~sena 0 -puriso viya
loke piyarüpasatarüpena arammar_¡ena 0 -jano, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nimantanapuriso ... nimantakajano).
nimantanika, mfn. [nimantana + ika], concerned with an
invitation;- ifc see brahma- (sv brahma[n]).
nimantanti in Ee at A I 117,5 is prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
nipatanti; Mp II 189,6: nipatanti ti nimantenti.
nimanteti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nimantrayate], calls,
summons; invites (someone, acc.) to (instr.); offers, asks
(someone) to accept (instr.); Vin I 150,7 (bhikkhul!l itthi
-eti ehi bhante hiraññ~ va ti demi ... ); II 15,34 (Citto
gahapati ... saii.gh~ va gar_¡~ va puggal~ va -eti);
III 2,4 (na sama¡;¡o Gotamo brahmar_¡e ji¡;¡¡;¡e ... abhivadeti
va paccu¡theti va asanena va -etl ti); MI 448,32
(matugamo pi te asaddhammena -eti); III 126,14 (aho
vata ma111 koci -eyya ti); S IV 122,4 (samar_¡~ Udayil!l
-ehi svatanaya bhattena ti); Ja III 284,4* (taya ca ma111
-eyya ya111 e' atth' añña111 ghare dhan~); IV 305,2o (te
gharavasena -etha ti); 367,23* (khipp~ ca te -aya);
372,6* (tu¡;¡hl bhuñjasi ekako naññal!l kañci -esi);
V 404,27* (ahal!l -aye); VI 246,3* (dakkh~ ca pos~ ...
bhogehi -ayanti); 31 0,12* (yo asanenapi -ayeyya);
Cp 3:5:4 (ma -etha tehi ma111); Vism 26,33 (kimatthaya
589 nimitta
bhonto agata, kil!l bhikkhü -etul!l); Sp 812,1o (tumhe
bhante odanena -emi); Ps III 400,11 (brahmar_¡o
patiyekk~ -essati); Sadd 539,14 (-eti -ayati); -
part.pr. (a) nimantenta, mfi-enti)n., Ja II 231,19 (ther~
gihibhogena pañcakamagu¡;¡ehi -ento); IV !0,2
(mahasattal!l varena -ento); VI 25,14 (rajjena -ento);-
neg. animantenta, mfn., Sv 368,22 (animantento, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr animatento); (b) nimantayamana, mfn.,
Ps II 282,27; V 67,19 (-ayamana, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nibandhamana); - aor. 3 sg. (a) nimantesi, Vin IV 98,5
(bhattena -esi); DI 91,19 (na m~ koci asanena pi -esi);
Ja IV 356,11 (atha n~ Mata1i rathabhirühanatth~
-e si); Ap 553,4 (-esi, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr nimmantesi);
(b)nimantayi, Sn981 (asanena -ayi); Pv27:11;
Mhv 1:71; 3 pl. (a) nimantesul!l, Ja IV 305,25; Ap 96,3;
Sp 815,17 (te kathal!l -esu111 bhante ti te eva111 ah~su
amhakal!l bhante bhikkh~ gar_¡hatha ti);
(b) nimanti111su, Cp 3:5:4 (tada pi ma111 -i111su
kamabhogehi ñatayo); (e) nimantayi111su, Ja III 171,2o
(brahmar_¡avacanakatthaya acariy~ -ayi111su);
Sv 458,12; absol. (a) nimantetva, Vin IV 81,19
(aññataro brahmar_¡o bhikkhü -etva bhojesi); Ja I 324,31
(unduro tath' eva tapas~ -etva); III470,14 (ko nu kho
te -etva anessati); Ap 88,18; Vism 398,28;
neg. animantetva, Ja IV 370,23; Dhp-a II 113,6;
(b) nimantetvana, Ap 554,14; (e) nimantayitva, Ap 31,23;
Mhv 15:68; (d) nimantayitvana, Ap 572,27; - pass.
part.pr. nimantiyamana, mfn., Vin IV 78,27; M II 7,32
(asanena pi -iyamana na sadiyanti); Ja II 314,7·;
Cp-a 57,6 (raja . . . Sakkena . . . dibbehi kamehi
-iyamano, Be, Ce so; Ee nimantito; Se nimantayamano);
202,26 (te pi matapitühi gharavasena -iyamana na
icchi111su yeva); Mil 205,16 (sahassena -iyamana); -
pp nimantita, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) [S. nimantrita]
invited; V in III 187 ,2s (Visakha Migaramata -a tal!l
kul~ agamasi); MI 236,17 (samar_¡o Gotamo -o
svatanaya bhatt~); AIV 215,8; Ap301,2 (-o
brahmar_¡ena); Ja VI 127,30 (Sakkena dibbakamena -o
raja); Vism 24,7 (clvaradlhi -assa); Sp 818,23 (sabbehi
--tta); - neg. animantita, mfn., Vin IV 179,37; M II
158,17; Sp 814,6 (animantitatta); Vv-a 24,12 (nimantito ...
bhattena atithi animantito abbhagato);- 2. (mfn. and n.)
invited to, offered; what is offered, an offering;
invitation; Spk II 189,25 (deviya tath' eva-e, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nimantentiya) = Mp I 173,14 = Ap-a 258,34 (eds
nimantentiya); Mp I 246,19 (taya -a111 jlvitabhattam eva
maii.galabhattal!l bhavissati); - fpp nimantetabba, mfn.,
Vin II 33,17 (pakatatto bhikkhu asanena nimantetabbo);
269,21 (ya111 ca patte amis~ hoti tena ca bhikkhu
nimantetabbo ti); caus. pr. 3 sg. nimantiipeti,
Dhp-a I 440,19 (Garahadinno tumhe -eti, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -esi); Nidd-a 1 335,10 (-enti); - aor. 3 pl.
nimantapesu111, Dhp-a 1 71,18; - absol. nimantapetva,
Ja III 182,25; Dhp-a 1400,7 (pañcasate acelake -etva).
nimitta, m.n. [cfS., BHS nimitta], a sign, a mark; what
one notes or marks; l. (i) a sign or mark by which
something or someone is recognised or identified or
known or defined; a distinguishing mark or appearance;
a perceived (enduring) attribute, predicate (especial/y
that of permanence); an attribution; Abh 978 (-~ ...
nimitta
1añchane); V in I 106,5 foil. (pa~hamarp. -a kittetabba
pabbatanimittaqJ. pasiir).animittarp. vananimittarp. ...
yavata samanta -a kittita ... saiJ.gho etehi -ehi slmaqJ.
sammanneyya samanasarp.vasaq1. ekuposatharp.); III 27,25
(tehi 1ik1irehi tehi lingehi tehi -ehi vadati viññapeti;
Sp 254,25: sikkhapaccakkhanassa sañjananahetuto
manussanarp. ti1akadlni viya -anl ti vuccati); IV 163,32
(rüpena va -ena va saññiir).arp. katva nikkhipitva;
Sp 882,12: -an ti 1añchanadi, tasma 1añchitaya
bh~<;likaya mattikalañchanan ti va 11ikha1añchanan ti va
nllapi1otikaya bh~<;lika kata ti va . . . evamadi sabbarp.
sallakkhetabbarp.); M I 360,3 (te hi te gahapati akara te
1inga te -a yathatarp. gahapatissa ti; cfPs III 38,18: iikara
ti adlni sabban' eva kar~avevacanani ... gihibhavassa
sañjanananimittataya -a ti vutta); S V 150,2 (akusalo
sudo sakassa bhattu -arp. na uggaQhati idaqJ. va me ajja
bhattasupeyyarp. ruccati ... ); Nidd I 508,24* (kalena
kalaq1. cittassa -am upalakkhiye); Pa~is I 10,33 (uppado
abhiññeyyo pavattarp. abhiññeyyaqJ. -aqJ. abhiññeyyaq1.;
Vism 649,11: -an ti sabbaqJ. pi saiJ.kharanimittaqJ.); II 42,9
(-ato saññaya muccatl ti; Pa~is-a 559,14: -ato ti ca
niccanimittato); Mi1405,17 (taqJ. liramm~arp. V~Qato
ca . . . !in gato ca -ato ca da!harp. pati~~apetva);
Vism 152,26 (bhikkhü slmarp. bandhanta pa~amaq1. -ani
sallakkhetva paccha bandhanti); 649,24 (nibbatti jatl ti
idarp. hi dvayarp. uppadassa e' eva pa~isandhiya ca
vevacanaq1., gati uppattl ti idaqJ. dvayaqJ. pavattassa,
jaradayo -assa ti); As 321,8 (-an ti sañjananaq1.);
Mhv 15:192 (-e parikittiya);- ifc see khaQ<;!a-, nicca-,
sadda-, sukha-;- (ii) the organ of generation (of either
sex), the pudenda; Abh 273; 978 (-arp. ... vuttaqJ.
angajate); Vin III 28,11 (yo -ena -arp. aiJ.gajatena
aiJ.gajatarp. ... paveseti); Sp 528,5 (attano -arp. thaddharp.
mudukan ti janissaml ti); - ifc see itthi-, purisa-; -
-arp. karoti, makes a sign; marks; indicates;
distinguishes; V in III 53,12/all. (-aq1. karoti akkhiq1. va
nikh~issami bhamukaqJ. va ukkhipisslirni . . . tena -ena
tarp. bh~<;larp. avahara ti); 56,34 (aññataro bhikkhu diva
bh~<;larp. passitva -aqJ. akasi rattiqJ. avaharissaml ti);
A III 110,1 (o)arikarp. pi -aqJ. karissanti pa~haviya pi
haritagge pi); Nidd 1 355,20 (ekaqJ. ce ti1aphalarp. -aqJ.
katva ti1avahe pakkhipeyya tarp. yeva ti1aphalaqJ.
uddhareyya; Nidd-a 1 378.3/all.: sace ekati1abljarp.
saññiir).arp. katva); Ap 163,4 (padumaqJ. 1ihariq1.su me
tatha -arp. katva 'harp. buddhassa abhiropayiqJ.);
Sp 353,w (aparo bhikkhuq1. pahiQitukamo -aqJ. karoti ko
nu kho gahetva gamissatl ti); 729,1o (saññiir).arp. katva
nikkhipitabban ti kiñci -aqJ. katva ~hapetabbaq1.);
Ud-a 201,20 (ayarp. gatha ayasmantarp. Mahakassaparp.
-arp. katva bhasita); - 2. an object or appearance or
happening which is significant, which expresses more
than itself; (i) a sign, a significant appearance; an amen,
a portent; Vin I 343,2o (tatha deva -ani dissanti); DI 9,4
(aiJ.garp. -aqJ. uppadaqJ. supinaq1. ... ; Sv 92,12: -an ti
nimittasattharp.); 220,32 (yatha -a dissanti a1oko sañjayati
obhaso patubhavati brahma patubhavissati); A 1 170,3o
(ekacco -ena adisati evarp. pi te mano itthaqJ. pi te mano;
Mp II 269,4: -ena adisatl ti agatanimittena va
gatanimittena va ~itanimittena va idarp. nama bhavissatl
ti katheti); Ja I 59,31 (dighabhiir).aka pan' ahu cattari -ani
590 nimitta
ekadivasen' eva disva agamasl ti); III 238,20 (Dañmukho
tarp. -aqJ. disva ajja mayharp. sahayo Bariir).asiyarp. raja
bhavissati aharp. senapatl ti aññasi); IV 482,2o (ayaqJ.
daharakale marissati ayarp. mahallakaka1e ti kassaci
hatthe va pade va -aqJ. natthi); Ap 18,1 (uppatesu -esu
1akkh~esu ca kovida; Ap-a 285,8: uppatesü ti
ukkapatadisa<;Iahadi-uppatesu ca -esü ti müsika-
cchinnadisu); 158,13 (jayamane Vipassimhi -arp.
vyakariqJ. ahaq1. . . . buddho 1oke bhavissati); Bv 2:35
(caturo -e naddasarp.; Bv-a 84,1: caturo -e ti cattari
-ani); Mi1178,18 ( ... uppadarp. supinarp. -aqJ. ... ); Ps IV
171,1 (ukkapatabhümica1acandaggahadlni -ani);
Mhv 22:70 (sabbaqJ. -aqJ. disvana); - ifc see pubba-
(sv pubba2); - (ii) an indication, a hint; D II 103,w
(ayasma Anando bhagavata o)arike -e kayiramane
o)arike obhase kayiramane nasakkhi pa~ivijjhituq1.);
Vibh 353,1 (yaqJ. paresarp. -aqJ. 0 -kammaqJ. obhaso
obhasakammarp. samantajappa parikatha; Vism 28,5: -an
ti yaqJ. kiñci paresaq1. paccayadanasaññajanakarp.
kayavacikammarp.); Sv 563,35 (ojarikarp. -arp. akasiqJ. taqJ.
pi taya na pa~ividdhaq1.); Ud-a 167,26 (yarp. kiñci -arp.
dassetva); - 3. (i) what one notes or marks; an object of
thought or meditation or concentration; an image; M I
119,3foll. (pañca -ani kalena kalarp. manasikatabbani ...
yarp. -arp. agamma yaq1. -arp. manasikaroto uppajjanti
papaka akusala vitakka . . . tamba -a aññarp. -arp.
manasikatabbarp. kusalüpasarp.hitarp.; cfPs II 87,22: -anl
ti kar~ani); S 1 188,18* ( -arp. parivajjehi subharp.
ragüpasaqJ.hitarp.) = Sn 341 = Th 1224 (Th-a III 192,21:
-an ti ki1esajanakanimittarp.); S V 156,5 (tassa
kismiñci-d-eva pasadanlye -e cittarp. p~idahato
pamujjaqJ. jayati); Th ll 05 (nibbajjayarp. sabbasubharp.
-arp. jhane yuto ); Pa~is 1 164,22 (-arp. avajjato assase
cittarp. vikampati samadhissa paripantho; Pa~is-a 471,19:
-an ti assasapassasiinaqJ. phussana~~1inaq1.); Vibh 193,25
(idha bhikkhu ajjhattaqJ. kayaqJ. . . . paccavekkhati atthi
imasmiq1. kaye kesa . . . muttan ti, so taqJ. -aqJ. asevati
bhaveti bahullkaroti ... ; Vibh-a 260,24: so bhikkhu taqJ.
kamma~~ananimittarp.); Vism 155,21 (tad eva -arp.
pa~havl pa~havl ti punappunarp. manasikaroto ); 188,28
(tass' evarp. paccavekkhato tarp. -aqJ. piika~arp. hoti purato
nikkhittarp. viya upanhati); 591,8 (cakkhumato purisassa
aparisuddhe adase mukhanimittarp. o1okentassa -arp. na
paññayati); - ifc see pa!igha-, mukha-, subha-; -
(ii) an interna/ appearance or total awareness; a mental
impression (appearing asan early stage afjhana, a sign
of progress); A N 418,24 (ekacco bhikkhu balo ...
akusa1o ... pa!hamarp. jhanarp. upasampajja viharituq1., so
taqJ. -arp. na asevati na bhaveti na bahu1ikaroti ... ;
Mp IV 194,19: tarp. pa~hamajjhanasaiJ.khatarp. -arp.);
Mil 298,3 (-arp. etarp. maharaja supinaq1. nama yarp.
cittassa apathaq1. upagacchati); Vism 112,11 (thero pi
a!~ikasaññaya labhitta sabbadisasu upanhitarp. -aq1.
passanto keva1a pi pa~havl a~~ikabharita ti cintes! ti);
114,4 (pubbabhage cakkhuna o1oketva -arp. nesarp.
gahetabban ti attho); 123,22 (tassa kir' ayasmato
kasitanhanarp. o1okentassa tarp. ~anappamiir).am eva -arp.
udapadi); 135,32* (pa~iladdhe -asmiq1. appana
sampavattati); 150,4 (pa~avlm~<;lalarp. pana
sakalanhena pa~avlkasiQan ti vuccati, tarp. nissaya
nimitta
pa~iladdhanimittaq1 pi pa~avikasÜ.Iaql -e pa~iladdha­
jhanaql pi); 285,5 (punappunaq1 kammaghanaq1
anuyuñjitabbaq1, tass' evaq1 anuyuñjato na cirass' eva
-aq1 upaghati); Spk III 175,24 (aghikaql a~~ikan. ti
bhaventassa uppannasañña, taq1 pan' etaq1 bhavayato
yava -aq1 na uppajjati tava chavi pi cammaq1 pi
upa~~ati); - ifc see uggaha-, pa~ibhaga-, samatha-,
samadhi-; - 4. a ground, a cause, a reason; Abh 91
(-aq1 karm:¡.aq1 ~hanaq1); 978; MI 72,1 (tatra vata maq1
samm:¡.o va brahmm:¡.o va . . . saha dhammena
pa~icodessatl ti -aq1 etaq1 Sariputta na samanupassami);
III 157,27 (taq1 ca -aq1 na pa~ivijjhama ti; Ps IV
207,13foll.: taq1 ca klira!).aql najanama); Mp I 32,10 (-an
ti paccayassa namaq1); Ud-a 30,34 (paresaq1 pucchaya
vina ajjhasayam eva -aq1 katva desito parajjhasayo );
Nidd-a I 310,15 (rüpam eva kilesanaq1 paccayatthena
-aq1); Pa~is-a 315,16 (nivara!_le ti o• -atthe bhumma-
vacanaql, nivaraJ?.animittaql nivarai_J.apaccaya ti attho);
Sadd 691,2 (yaq1 ... kiriyabhinipphattiya -aq1 taq1 vatthu
karakaq1 nama bhavati); - ifc see tam- (sv ta[d]), tato-,
yaq1- (sv ya[d]); mm1ttaq1 gai_J.hati, l. marks,
apprehends the characteristic features; apprehends an
object or appearance (as distinguished in various ways );
distinguishes, identifies an object or appearance; Vin III
15,32 (ñatidasi ... ayasmato Sudinnassa ... hatthanaq1 ca
padanaq1 ca sarassa ca -aq1 aggahesi; Sp 208,27 foll.:
gihikale sallakkhitapubbaq1 akaraq1 aggahesi sañjani
sallakkhesi); A lii 423,1 (eko paviveke anabhiramanto
cittassa -aq1 gahessatl ti n' etaq1 ~hanaq1 vijjati);
Vism 117,21 (evaq1 kathiyamane pana kamma~~ane tena
yogina -aq1 gahetva sotabbaq1 ... idaq1 heghimapadaq1
idaq1 uparipadaq1 . . . idaq1 opamman ti evaq1 taq1 taq1
akaraq1 upanibandhitva ti attho ); 183,35 foll. (Va!).J?.ato pi
lingato pi saJ?.~hanato pi disato pi okasato pi paricchedato
pi ti chabbidhena -aq1 gahetabbaq1); 185,4
(patibhaganimittaql . . . chabbidhena -aq1 gai_J.hato
upatthati); Spk lii 201,23 (imaq1 me kammaghanaq1
anulomaq1 va gotrabhuq1 va ahacca ~itan ti na janati,
attano cittassa -aq1 gaJ?.hituql na sakkoti);
2. apprehends, responds emotionally to, an object or
appearance; grasps, occupies oneself with, externa/
features or characteristics; Mil 367,16 (andhena
badhirena miigena viya bhavitabbaq1 na -aq1
gahetabbaq1 nanuvyanJanaql gahetabbaq1); 403,9
(yogina . . . parakulaq1 upagatena tasmiq1 kule itthinaq1
va purisanaql va mañee va pi~he va ... bhojanavikatisu
va na -aq1 gahetabbaq1 majjhattena bhavitabbaq1);
Vism 20,24 (na nimittaggahi ti itthipurisanimittaq1 va
subhanimittadikaq1 va kilesavatthubhiitaq1 -aq1 na
gaJ?.hati dit~amatte yeva Sa!).~hati) t Nidd-a I 390,16
(nimittaggahi ti ... -aq1 chandaragavasena gai_J.hati); -
3. (+ loe.) marks, marks inwardly; takes as a sign;
concentrates exclusive/y on, is completely taken up by;
apprehends only; Ja I 433,16 (seghiputto oloketva
danta~thike -aq1 ga!).hi, atrhikasaññaql uppajji, sakalaq1
pi taq1 sañraq1 aWiikasailkhalika viya paññayi);
IV 223,21' (cakkhuq1 ummlletva itthirüpe -aq1 ma
gai_J.heyyasi ti); Vism 123,6 (pa~havikasiJ?.aql uggaJ?.hanto
pa~aviyaq1 -aq1 gai_J.hati kate va akate va santake no
anantake ... ); 125,7 (samena akarena cakkhiini
591 nimitta
ummlletva -aq1 gai_J.hantena bhavetabbaq1, na Va!).J?.O
paccavekkhitabbo na lakkhaJ?.aql manasikatabbaq1);
196,25 (yattha yattha asubhakaro paññayati tattha tatth'
eva -aq1 gahetva kamma~~anaq1 appanaq1 papetabban
ti); 208,30 (eko mai_J.9iiko bhagavato sare -aq1 aggahesi);
Ps III 68,7 (dighaditrhe arammaJ?.e -aq1 na gahetabbaq1);
Dhp-a I 15,15 (ekissa itthiya g1tasaddaq1 sutva sare -aq1
ga!).hi); 1149,3 (sa ... dipasikhaya -aq1 ga!).hitva ~ita va
punappuna olokayamana tejokasiJ?.arammaJ?.aql jhanaq1
nibbattetva); Ap-a 198,18 (jale vataq1 asailgam eva
gacchamanaq1 disva tasmiq1 -aq1 aggahesi);
0
íinusiiri(n), mfn., following attributes; D III 249,19
(animitta hi kho me cetovimutti bhavita ... atha ca pana
me -i viññl!J?.aql hot! ti; Sv 1036,28: raganimittadinaq1
e' eva rüpanimittadinaq1 cabhava animitta ti vutta ...
vuttappabhedaq1 nimittaq1 anusaratl ti -i ti) =A lii 292,7
t S IV 269,6 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nimittanusariviññl!J?.aql);
Nett 25,15;- o• -upalakkhal}a, n., -a,f, observation of,
attention to, marks or objects of note; Vism 179,28
(samanta -aq1 ekadasavidhena nimittaggaho ... sabbaq1
kathetabbaq1); 181,14 (samanta -a kimatthiya kim-
anisaq1sa ti; Vism-mht [Be] I 203,13: uddhumatakassa
0
samanta pasaJ?.adinimittasallakkhai_J.a); - -ggahal}a, n.
[nimitta + gahaJ?.a 1], apprehending an object or
appearance (as distinguished in various ways); marking
the characteristic features; Vism 186,34 (-' -aghaq1
cakkhuq1 ummlletva); 192,24 (ekadasavidhena -aq1);
Th-a I 192,15 (bhavanacittassa -e kusa1o );
0
-(g)giiha, m. [nimitta + gaha2], l. apprehending an
object or appearance (as distinguished in various ways );
marking the characteristic features; Vism 179,28
(ekadasavidhena -o); 613,18 (samadhissa ca -ena);
Sv 780,25 (atibhojane -o); 2. apprehending,
responding emotionally to, an object or appearance;
grasping, occupying oneself with, externa[ features or
characteristics; exclusive concentration (on, loe.); being
completely taken up (by, loe.); S IV 168,16
(cakkhuviññeyyesu rüpesu anuvyañjanaso -o; Spk III
4,15: hattha sobhana pada sobhana ti evaq1
anuvyañjanavasena -o); Vism 209,7 (aññatra bhagavato
sare -a); Spk III 4,16 (-o ti saq1sandetva gahaJ?.aql
anuvyañjanaggaho ti vibhattigahaJ?.aql); Dhp-a I 74,15
(yo hi pugga1o -aq1 anuvyañjanaggahaq1 gai_J.hanto
nakha sobhana ti gai_J.hati ... ); As 17.5 (sare --mattaken'
eva kalaq1 katva devaloke nibbattiq1su);
0
-(g)giihi(n), mjn., apprehending, responding
emotionally to, an object or appearance; grasping,
occupying oneself with, externa[ features or
characteristics; DI 70,9 (bhikkhu cakkhuna rüpaq1 disva
na -i hoti nanuvyañjanaggahl) = Nidd I 367,11 (Nidd-a I
392,23 foil.: chandaragavasena vuttappakaraq1 nimittaq1
na gai_J.hati);- 0 -piithaka, m., an interpreter of signs or
omens; Ja V 296,1s·; Mp IIl 320,2o;- -sattami,f [scil.
0
vibhatti], (gr.t.t.) a locative indicating cause or ground;
Bv-a 267,15; - 0 -sattha, n. [nimitta + sattha3], the
science of interpreting signs or omens; Sv 92,12; -
animitta, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) (i) free from (the
apprehension oj) marks or characteristics or attributes;
without identifying or defining marks; indefinable, not to
be predicated; Vin III 92,37 foll. (suññato vimokkho -o
nimittayana
vimokkho app~ihito -o . . . suññato samadhi -o
samadhi app~ihito samadhi ... ; Sp 493,25: vimokkho ...
ragadosamohehi suññatta suññato ragadosamoha-
nimittehi --tta -o ragadosamohapaJ.!idhanarp abhavato
appaJ.!ihito ti vuccati); V 221,8 (-arp slmarp
sammannati); D II 100,18 (yasmirp ... samaye tathagato
sabbanimittanarp amanasikara ekaccanarp vedananarp
nirodha -arp cetosamadhirp upasampajja viharati
phasukato . . . tasmirp samaye tathagatassa kayo hoti);
III 249,16 (-a hi kho me cetovimutti bhavita ... atha ca
pana me nimittanusari viññaJ.!arp hotl ti); MI 296,32joll.
(dve... paccaya -aya cetovimuttiya samapattiya
sabbanimittanarp ca amanasikaro -aya ca dhatuya
manasikaro); 298,23 (yavata kho avuso -a cetovimuttiyo
akuppa tasarp cetovimutti aggam akkhayati; Ps II
355,6foll.: -a cetovimuttiyo nama terasa dhamma
vipassana cattaro aruppa cattaro magga cattari pha1anl ti,
tattha vipassana niccanimittarp sukhanimittarp
attanimittarp ugghatetl ti -a nama, cattaro aruppa
rüpanimittassa abhava -a nama, maggaphalani
nimittakarakanarp kilesanarp abhavena -ani, nibbanarp
pi -am eva tarp pana cetovimutti na hoti); III 107,28
(bhikkhu . . . -arp cetosamadhirp paticca manasikaroti
ekattarp; Ps IV 153,25: vipassanacittasamadhirp, so hi
niccanimittadivirahito -o ti vuccati); 108,15 (ayarp pi
kho -o cetosamadhi abhisañkhato abhisañcetayito, yarp
kho pana kiñci abhisailkhatarp abhisañcetayitarp tad
aniccarp nirodhadhamman ti p¡yanati); Dhp 93 (suññato
-o ca vimokkho yesarp gocaro; Dhp-a II 172,7 foll.: tiJ.!i
pi e' etani nibbanass' eva namani, nibbanarp hi ...
ragadinimittabhavena -arp tehi ca vimuttan ti -o
vimokkho ); Sn 574 (-arp anaññatarp maccanarp idha
jlvitarp; Pj II 457,15: -an ti kiriyakaranimittavirahitarp);
Patis II 36,1o (suññarp idarp attena va attaniyena va ti so
tattha nimittarp na karotl ti -o vimokkho; Patis-a 553,18:
aniccanupassanavasena niccanimittam na karoti);
Dhs 506 (pathamarp jhanarp upasampajja viharati
dukkhapatipadarp dandhabhiññarp -arp);
Vism 236,13 foll. (-ato ti avavatthanato
paricchedabhavato ti attho, sattanarp hi jlvitarp vyadhi
kalo ca dehanikkhepanarp gati pañc' ete jlva1okasmirp
-a na nayare; cf230,25: -ato . . . maraJ.larp
anussaritabbarp) quoted Ja II 58,9·; Vism 658,14 (-o
vimokkho ti animittakarena nibbanarp aramm~arp katva
pavatto ariyamaggo); 668,26 (yasma pan' esa
aniccanupassanaya sañkharanarp ghanavinibbhogarp
katva niccanimitta-dhuvanimitta-sassatanimittani
pajahanto agato tasma -o); Kkh2 7,14 (-a nama ya [sima]
sabbena sabbarp nimittani akittetva sammata hoti) =
Sp 1401,21; Sv 1036,24 foll. (-a cetovimuttl ti
arahattapha1asamapatti, sa hi raganimittadlnarp e' eva
rüpanimittadlnarp cabhava -a ti vutta; cfMp III
347,17 foll: -a cetovimuttl ti balavavipassana,
dighabhaJ.laka pana arahattapha1asamapattl ti vadanti);
Spk III 90,18 (niccasukha-attanimittanarp amanasikarena
-arp . . . cetosamadhirp); - animittarp karoti, does not
mark or note or indicate; Vin III 238,37 (-arp katva
patetabbarp; Sp 693,7: nimittarp akatva ... patitokasarp
asamannaharantena patetabban ti attho); Kkh 2 125,6
(tena -arp katva va gütharp viya cha<,l<,!etabbarp); -
592 niminati
(ii) without pudenda; V in II 271,17 (upasampannayo
dissanti -a pi nimittamatta pi ... ); III 129,24 (akkosati
nama -a si nimittamatta si ... ; Sp 548,14joll. : -a si ti
nimittarahita si ... itthipai).<,Iaka ti -a va vuccati); -
(iii) without undesirable characteristics; ? D III 146,20
(so imarp pathavirp sagarapariyantarp akhilarp -arp
ak~takarp ... abhivijiya ajjhavasati; Sv 922,6foll.:
niccorarp, cara hi ... upaddavapaccayatthena nimitta ...
ti vuccanti); - 2. (n.) what is free from marks or
attributes; of which nothing can be predicated; S I
188,23' (-arp ca bhavehi; Spk I 272,3: niccadlnarp
nimittanarp ugghatitatta vipassana -a nama) = Sn 342 f.
Thl 105; París 1 15,6 (nimittarp sañkhara -arp nibbanan ti
abhiññeyyarp); 66,20 (nimittarp abhibhuyyitva -arp
pakkhandatl ti gotrabhü); Kv-a 180,5 (-an ti
sabbanimittarahitarp nibbanarp); - 3. (mfn.) without a
reason or cause; S V 213,17 (tarp ca -arp anidanarp
asailkhararp appaccayarp dukkhindriyarp uppajjissatl ti
n' etarp thanarp vijjati); A 1 82,19 (sanimitta bhikkhave
uppajjanti papaka akusala dhamma no -a); -
dunnimitta, n., a bad amen; a sign of trouble;
Bv-a 288,21 (idani Maro agamissatl ti pathamam eva
anekarüpani anighani -ani paturahesurp); Cp-a 93,1o
(ajja me dussupinarp diqharp -ani ca uppannani); -
sanimitta 1, mfn., l. having a cause; arising from a
cause; S V 213,16 (uppannarp kho me idarp
dukkhindriyarp, tarp ca kho -arp sanidanarp
sasañkhararp sappaccayarp); A I 82,18 (-a bhikkhave
uppajjanti papaka akusala dhamma no animitta; Mp 11
154,2: -a ti sakar~a);- 2. associated with attributes;?
As 223,15 (vipassana ... nimittadhammesu caratl ti -a va
hoti);- see also tannimittaka (sv ta[d]).
nimittayana, f [from a denom. from nimitta ?], acting as
a mental sign; ? being a cause; ? cf Ñtil;amoli, 1964,
p. 253: 'the employment of a sign'; Pet 187,6 (ya sllarp
upadaya pañcannarp bojjhañganarp upadayanulomata
-a ... ayarp satisambojjhañgo ).
niminati, nimminati 1, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. niv'me, nimayate],
barters, exchanges for (instr.); Ja III 63,10• (maya pi
Sama -eyya aññarp; 63,15' foll.: sa Sama maya pi aññarp
samikarp parivattetva g~heyya) f. III 222,1•; V 343,13•
(etena -a tuvarp; 343,19': parivattehi tvarp); - fut.
3 sg. nimissati, Ja V 453,21' (devatalli nirayarp nimissati;
455,15'foll.: devalokena parivattetva nirayarp gai_Ihissati,
so read ? Ce devaloke; Be parivattitva; Ee sadevalokena;
Se devalokato nivattitva); 1 sg. nimissarp, Th 32
(tappamanena nibbutirp nimissarp, so read? Be
nimisarp; Ce, Ee nimmissarp; Se niramisarp; Th-a I
98,13: nimissan ti parivatteyyarp cetapeyyarp, Ee so; Be
nimisan ti; Ce nimmissan ti; Se nimiyan ti); Ja V 27,22*
(piii).ena te piii).am aharp nimissarp); - aor. 3 sg. nimini
(and nimisi ?), Ja III 63,9* (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce nimlni, me)
f. 221,26* (Be nimlni; Ce nimlsi; Ee niminni; Se nimisi);
1 sg. nimminirp [or of nimminati 2], Cp 2:6:11
(nimminirp mama attana; Cp-a 150,27: mama attano
attabhavena tarp parivaqesirp); 1 pl. nimirnhase,
nimirnha, Ja II 369,17* (vai_JI_Jarp anJanav~I_Jena
Kaliilgasmirp nimimhase, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se vinimhase;
369,23' foll.: vinimayavasena g~hirnha paribhogavasena
va udare pakkhipirnha ti attho ... imina attano santakena
nimisa
vi ya anpnavai_ll)ena [nagena] . . . bahudhanadhaññarp
nimimhase parivattayimha ... aparo nayo ... Kalingassa
santike imina añjanaval)l)ena tava VaJ.ll)arp nimimhase
nimimha tulayimha, Be so; Se vinimhase; Ce, Ee imina
añjanaval)garp nagarp dhaññena nimimhase ... ); -
absol. (a) niminitva, Mil279,31 (api ca puttadararp
yacanena niminitva attanarp databban ti, Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se yacante; Se omits -itva);- (b) nimminitvana [or of
nimminati2], Cp 2:9:7 (nimminitvana attanarp, Be, Ee, Se
so; Ce nissajjitvana; cfCp-a 171,18: pitararp nivattetva
putto agato bhavissati).
nimisa, nimmisa, nimesa, m. [S. nimi~a, nime~a], blinking,
shutting one 's eyes; Mil 194,2 (paripakke ñage na sakka
nimesantararp pi agameturp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimmesantararp); Sadd 921,21 (mattabhedo tava ...
nimeso -o); 0
-janitandhakaraviraha, m., the
absence of darkness produced by blinking; Spk II 20,7
(antarantara -ena visuddharp passati ... Vipassl, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee wr anantara sujjhan ti andhakaravirahena) t
Sv 454,4 (Be nimlla-; Ce nimesa-; Se nimmisasañjanita-;
Ee wr antarantarani meghajanitandhakaravirahena) t
Bv-a 236,1 (Be, Se nimmisasañjanita-; Ce, Ee
nimesasañjanita-); -se e also animisa.
nimisati, nimmisati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nimi~ati], clases one's
eyes; blinks; Ja III 95,18* (yava byati -ati, Be so; Ee pati;
Ce pati nimmisati; Se yavuppatti nimissati) quoted
Sadd 586,27;- part.pr. neg. animisanta, mfn., D II 20,15
(jato ... Vi pass! kumaro animisanto pekkhati, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se animmissanto).
nimisana, nimmisana, n. [from nimisati], closing one's
eyes, blinking; Sadd 605,19 (yava hi kallasañro ekavararp
ni[m]misanarp karoti, Ee so; Be nimmlsanummlsanarp).
nimissati,fut. 3 sg. ofniminati qv.
nimllati, nimmllati (influenced by ummllati ?), pr. 3 sg.
[S. nimllati] clases (asan eye); Ap 520,10 (akkhi me na
-ati); Ja I 279,25 (kumbhllanarp hi mukhe vivate akkhlni
-anti, Ce. Ee so; Be nimmllanti; Se nimmilanti) =
Cp-a 229,3o (eds nimmllanti); Sadd 434,26 (mlla
nimelane: mllati -ati, Be so; Ee nimmllati); - aor.
3 pl. nimmllirpsu, Cp-a 229,31; caus. pr. 3 sg.
nimlleti, -ayati, nimmlleti, clases; clases one 's eyes;
MI 120,12 (so -eyya va aññena va apalokeyya, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nimmileyya); Mil l06,21 (ummlletva va -eyya
-etva va ummlleyya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmileyya
nimmilitva); Vism 292,16 (akkhlni -eti, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
nimmlleti); Sv 937,8 (tada nimmlleti na oloketi, Be so;
Ce, Ee nimllati, prob. wr; Se nimmileti); Spk III 260,15
(kalena -eti kalena ummlleti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nimmlleti); - part.pr. nimllenta, mfn., Spk III 260,16
(-entassapi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nimmllentassapi);- aor.
3 sg. nimllayi, Mhv 32:74; inf nimlleturp,
nimmlleturp, Dhp-a II 6,3 (akkhlni -eturp nasakkhi, Be
so; Ce nimmlleturp; Ee nimmlliturp; Se nimmiliturp); -
absol. nimlletva, nimmlletva, M III 299,16 (-etva va
ummlleyya, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmiletva); Ja I 279,27
(akkhlni -etva nipajji, Ce, Ee so; Be nimmlletva; Se
nimmiletva); VI 66,5 (ekarp akkhirp -etva ekena akkhina
olokento, Be, Ee so; Ce ummlletva; Se nimmiletva);
Vism 186,3 (ummlletva oloketabbarp nimmlletva
avajjiitabbarp); Ud-a 417,25 (so ummlletva idhalokarp
593 nimujjati
-etva paralokarp passati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nimmlletva)
t Dhp-a II 28,14 (Be, Ee so; Ce nimmlletva; Se
nimmiletva); pp nimllita, nimmllita, mfn.
[S. nimllita], closed; Ja VI 82,2o (akkhlni -ani, Be so; Ce,
Ee nimmnitani; Se nimmilitani); Vism 185,15 (akkhlnarp
pi nimmllitabhavo); Sv 140,14 (--mattesu yeva akkhlsu,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmilita-); Cp-a 230,1 (nimmllitakkhl
hutva nipajji); - ifc see ummllita- (sv ummllati).
nimllana, nimelana, nimmllana, n. [S. nimllana], closing;
closing the eyes; Dhatup 113 (kai_la -e) = Sadd 535,28;
Dhatum 382 (mlla -e); Sadd 434,26 (mlla nimelane:
mllati); 563,29 (mlla -e: mlleti, Be so; Ee nimmllane);-
ifc see ummllana-.
nimugga, mfn., pp ofnimujjati qv.
nimuccati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nirmucyate ], is released, is
freed; Spk I 21,1 (maggena hi satta kilesabandhanato
-anti tasma maggo sattanarp nimokkho ti vutto).
nimujja, nimmujja, n. [from nimujjati], sinking; diving in,
immersion; Vism 395,17 (-an ti sarpsldanarp, Be so; Ce,
Ee, Se nimmujjan ti) = Patis-a 349,4; - ifc see
ummujja-.
nimujjati, nimmujjati (influenced by ummujjati ?), pr. 3
sg. [S. nimajjati], l. sinks down; dives into, immerses
oneseif in; is submerged; Vin I 31,36 (jatila . . . najja
Nerañjarayarp -anti pi ummujjanti pi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nimmujjanti pi)= Ud 6,15 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmujjanti
pi; Ud-a 74,22jall.: saslsarp udake osldanti); Pp 71,13
(katharp ca puggalo ummujjitva -ati; Pp-a 251 ,3o: -ati
yeva Devadattadayo viya); Ja III 507,19' (sakirp
ummujjati sakirp -ati, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nimmujjati);
Mil 118,9 (taJ.19ularp santattarp ummujjati -ati); 370,25
(kummo udake uppilavanto slsarp ukkhipitva yadi koci
passati tatth' eva -ati); Nidd-a I 432,11 (na sldan ti na
-ati); Cp-a 159,33 (tapaso udake -atil ti); Sadd 349,29
(mujja osldane: ffiUJJatl -ati nimuggo);
part.pr. (a) nimujjanta, mfn., Ud 6,19 (-ante pi, Be, Ee
so; Ce, Se nimmujjante pi); Ja V 187,1· (kamapanke
-anta, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se nimmujjanta); Thl-a 259,11;
(b) nimujjamana, mfn., Sv 671,12 (pasannalakharase
-amano viya); Spk I 54,2o (navaya -amanaya, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nimmujjamanaya); Mhv 10:8; - aor. 3 sg.
(a) nimujji, Ja III 362,17' (udake -i, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimmujji); Pv-a 47,1; (b) nimujjatha, Ap 536,1
(bhilmiyarp pi -atha); 3 pl. nimujjirpsu, Spk II 246,27
(amhakarp ratha ma udake -irpsil ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimmujjirpsil ti) = Mp I 323,8 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -antil
ti); Dhp-a III 234,17; - inf nimujjiturp, D II 325,10
(tasmirp gilthakupe -itukamata assa ti, Be so; Ee
nimmujjitu-; Ce, Se nimmijjitukamyata); Ja III 133,15
(surpsumaro thokarp gantva -iturp arabhi, Be, Ee so; Ce,
Se nimmujjiturp); Sp 863,1 (bhamaradlhi anubaddhassa
udake -iturp vagan ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nimuñjiturp);
- absol. nimujjitva, V in I 180,7 (Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
nimmujjitva); Ja II 285,1o (nagaraja udake -itva attano
nagabhavanam eva gantva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimmujjitva); Vism 391,22 (thero ... mahapathaviyarp
-itva, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nimmujjitva); - 2. immerses,
submerges; Ja V 268,10* (khare -anti tathavidharp
nararp; 273,31': khare loha-udake -apenti);
pp nimugga, nimmugga, mfn. [cfS. nimagna], sunk
nimujjana
down; plunged, immersed in; submerged; Vin III 106,37
(addasarp_ purisarp_ giithakiipe sasisakaJ11 -arp_); Pp 71,9
(katharp_ ca puggalo sakiJ11 -o -o va hoti); Ja II 239,23
(Devadatte satthari aghata111 bandhitva . . . pathaviyaJ11
-e, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmugge); III 47,1 (lohakumbhisu
yeva -a); 416,1 (eko mattamanusso ... pokkharaJ?.iJ11
otaranto patitva -o nirussaso mari); VI 34,19 (nava
majjhe samudde -a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmugga);
Ap 500,28 (aho bhavasamuddamhi -e uddhari jino);
575,12 (mahadukkhe nimugg' amhi); Mil 262,2;
Vism 283,27 (ime assasapassasa ... udake -ana111 natthi);
Th-a III 168,15 (kamesu --taya); Saddh 573 (saraJ?.an ti
gata111 dukkharp_ na sakkoti patapituJ11 yatha tiJ?.ukka -a111
anotattamahasare, so read with ms ? Ee nimmugga); -
ifc see anta-; - fpp nimujjitabba, n. impers., Mil 370,27
(yogina ... arammai:J.asare nimujjitabbarp_); Spk I 39,27
(nimujjitabbarp_, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se nimmujjitabbarp_); -
caus. pr. 3 sg. nimujjapeti, nimmujjapeti, causes to
sink; immerses, submerges; Ja III 133,16 (kiJ11 bho ma111
udake -e si ti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se nimmujj-); PsI 94,29
(opilapessami ti -essami, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nimmujj-);
Dhp-a I 361,6 (catiisu apayasamuddesu -etl ti);
Ud-a 246,1 (pathaviyarp_ osidapeyya ti -eyya);
part.pr. nimujjapenta, mfn., Ja III 163,4 (-ento, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se nimmujj-); - aor. 3 sg. nimujjapesi, Spk I
236,11 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmujj-); - absol.
nimujjapetva, Ja IV 142,z (sampattanavarp_ -etva, Be,
Ce, E e so; Se nimmujj-); VI 216,r; Sp 318,22.
nimuijana, mfn. and n. [cf S. nimajjana], l. (mfn.) diving
in; immersing oneself; Pj II 391,3 (ummujjitva -puriso 0
viya); - 2. (n.) sinking; diving in; immersion; Ja VI
34,21 (navaya pana 0 -bhavarp_ ñatva, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimmujjana-); Sp 861,3 (0 '-atthaya orohantassa);
Ud-a 160,29 (sabbattha -assa hetubhiita kamayogadayo,
Be, Ee so; Ce nimajjanassa; Se nimmujjanassa);
Pp-a 253,7 (micchadighikassa vatte -arp_); - ifc see
ummujjana- (sv ummujjana\- see also nimmajjana 1.
nimuñjitmp in Ee at Sp 863,1 is wr for nimujjitu111 (Be,
Ce, Se so).
nimelana, n., see sv nimllana.
nimesa, m., see sv nimisa.
nimesana, n. [S. nime~aJ?.a], blinking, closing one 's eyes;
- ifc see akkhi- (sv akkhi 1).
nimokkha, m. [cf S. nirmok~a], release, deliverance; SI
2,9 (janasi no tvarp_ marisa sattanaJ11 -a111 pamokkharp_
vivekan ti; Spk I 20,33: -an ti adini maggadina111 namani,
maggena hi satta kilesabandhanato nimuccanti).
nimba\ n., see sv nibba.
nimba2 , m. [ts], a tree (with hard wood anda bitter leaf);
SAF: neem tree, Azadirachta indica A.Juss; Abh 570 (-o
arittho pucimando); Ja II 105,17 (anupubbena -a
va<;l<;lhiJ11su); III 34,4 (-o ca assattho ca ti); Ap 362,2o
0
( -rukkha ca pupphita, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nipa-);
Bv 12:24 (bodhi tassa bhagavato 0 -rukkho ti vuccati, Se
so; Be, Ce mahanipo; Ee mahanimbo); Vin-vn 1346
(-assa kutajassapi paJ?.J?.aJ11);- 0 -paJ,IJ,Ia, n., a leaf of the
neem tree; Vin I 201,21; As 320,19 (tittakan ti -'adi);-
0
-bija, n., a seed of the neem tree; A I 32,12; Vism 543,6
(na hi-ato ucchu uppajjatl ti);- 0 -süla, m.n., a stake of
neem wood; Ja III 34,26* (cora111 ... appenti -asmiJ11);
594 nimmadeti
IV 29,5;- 0 -sülaka, m.n., a small stake of neem wood;
Ap-a 563,15.
nimma~psa, mfn., see sv marp_sa.
nimmakkha, mfn., se e sv makkha.
nimmakkhika, mfn., se e sv makkhika.
nimmaijati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirVmrj], rubs or wipes off; D II
324,9 foil. (tassa purisassa kaya vejupesikahi giithaJ11
sunimmajjitarp_ -atha ti . . . sunimmajjitarp_ -eyyuJ11;
Sv 809,32: -atha apanetha ti); - pp nimmajjita, mfn.,
rubbed, wiped off; Sv 809,32; - sunimmajjita, mfn.,
well, thoroughly wiped off; D II 324,12 (Sv 809,32: yatha
sunhu nimmajjitarp_ hoti evaJ11 nimmajjatha apanetha ti
attho ).
nimmaijana\ n. [S. nimajjana], sinking; immersing;
Sadd 563,28 (vula -e: voleti volayati, Be so; Ee
nim[m]ajjane);- see also nimujjana.
nimmaijana2 , nimmajjani, see doJ?.inimmajjani.
nimmathati, nimmatheti, nimmantheti, pr. 3 sg.
[S. nirmanthati, nirmathati], rubs; produces Jire (by
rubbing); chums; crushes, destroys; Thi-a 88,26 (pabbata
viya jara vyadhi ca maddati -ati);
part.pr. nimmathenta, mfn., Spkii 183,11 (sagararp_ -ento
viya) = Th-a I1I 123,27 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
nimmatthento) = Ap-a 253,35 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nimmanthento); Spk II 296,1 (cailkamanto tmyarp_
-ento ?); - aor. 3 sg. nimmathesi, Ps III 64,1o (amitte
-esi); - absol. nimmathetva, Ja I 340,25' (paccaya-
loluppaJ11 -etva); Dhp-a II 246,4 (araJ?.isahitena aggiJ11
-etva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nibbattetva); Th-a III 29,29
(salla111 nama bahirato utthaya -etva badhati); - pass.
part.pr. nimmathiyamana, mfn., Pj I 234,5 (gandhena
-iyamanarp_ iva matthalungarp_); Ps II 301 ,33;
pp nimmathita, mfn. [S. nirmathita], chumed; agitated;
crushed; Ja III 89,15 (til).hena sikharena -arp_ viya); Ps II
298,6 (chadvarikehi arammaJ?.ehi -o); Mp IV 41,1o
( --tta); As 142,7 (divasa111 -anarp_ VaJ?.J?.agandharasanarp_);
fpp nimmanthya, mfn., Abh 419 (nimmanthya-
darumhi tv araJ?.i).
nimmathana, n. [S. nirmathana], rubbing; crushing;
chuming; Mp V 10,2 (sabbaparappavadinarp_ -ena);
Dhp-a III 404,3 (ragasalladinarp_ ... -arp_); Th-a III 142,18
(kilesamaradinaJ11-ena);- ifc see dadhi-.
nimmadana, m. f!rom nimmadeti], subduing; Bv-a 63,8
(madanimmadanan ti jatimadadinarp_ sabbamadana111
0
-kararp_); - ifc see mada-, riipamada-; - see also
nimmaddana.
nimmadeti, -ayati, nimmadeti, pr. 3 sg. [prob. denom.
from nimmada qv sv mada; but cfnimmaddeti], humbles;
subdues; DI 92,7 (atibalhaJ11 ayarp_ Ambattho miil).avo
Sakkesu ibbhavadena -eti, Ee, Se so; Be nimmadeti; Ce
nimmaneti; Sv 257,19: nimmadetl ti -eti nimmane karoti,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nimmadati); 96,5 (ma tumhe ...
dasiputtavadena nimmadetha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nimmanetha); Ja VI 84,2 (Samassa visa111 -issati, Ce, Ee
so; Be vinassissati; Se vinassati);
part.pr. (a) nimmadenta, mfn., Spk II 398.15
(brahmai:J.anaJ11 madarp_ -ento, Ce so; Se -anto; Be
manarp_ nimmaddento; Ee aguJ?.aJ11 kathento);
(b) nimmadayanta, mfn., Ps III 83,22 (bodhisatto ...
manajatike -ayanto vicarati); - aor. 3 sg. nimmadesi,
nimmaddana
D 1 93,19 (ma bhavarrt Gotamo Amba~~arrt mfu_lavarrt
atiba!harrt dasiputtavadena nimmadesi, Be, Se so; Ee
Gotama; Ce nimmanesi); - absol. nimmadetva, Spk II
399,15 (madarrt nimmadetva, Ce, Se so; Be manarrt
nimmadditva; Ee apavadarrt nipphadetva); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. nimmad!yati, It-a 11 106,34 (sabbo mado -iyati
pamadd!yati); - fpp nimmadetabba, mfn., Sv 666,7 (te
amagandha sunimmadaya sukhena nimmadetabba
pahatabba na honti); - see also dunnimmadaya,
sunimmadaya.
nimmaddana, n. [from nimmaddeti, but cf nimmadana],
crushing; squeezing; Mil 270,28 (na so vato
hatthagahal.J.arrt va -arrt va upeti);
dunnimmaddana, mfn., hard to crush or subdue;
Spk III 8,16 (ghoravisa ti --visa, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
dunnimmadana-).
nimmaddeti, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + maddeti? cf S. niv'mrd,
mardayati; but cfnimmadeti], crushes; Spk 198,3 (visarrt
pi -enti aggirrt pi pa~ibahanti); III 8,20 (parabalarrt -eturrt
asakkonta, Be, Se so; Ee -iturrt: Ce nimmathetuf!I).
nimmanussa, mfn., se e sv manussa.
nimmantheti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nimmathati.
nimmariyada, mfn., see sv mariyada.
nimmala, mfn., see sv mala.
nimmassu, mfn., see sv massu.
2 (Be, Ce, Se so).
nimmata\ mfn.,pp ofnimminati qv.
2
nimmata , mfn., see sv mata(r) . 1
nimmata(r), m. [S. nirmaq], a creator, a maker; D 1 18,s
(aharrt asmi brahma ... issaro katta -a, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nimmita) i- MI 327,2 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nimmita; Ps II
406,5: 1okassa katta ca -a ca).
nimmatika, mfn. [ni 2 + mata(r) + (i)ka], without a mother;
Ja V 251 ,30' (-o nippitiko karuññappatto va jhayati, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr nimmatapltiko); Sp 1114,22 (-o
nippitiko).
nimmadeti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nimmadeti.
nimmana\ n. [S., BHS nirmfu_la], l. (magical) creation;
magical transformation; Abh 911 (-e saggo ); Sv lOO 1,3
(sayarrt nimmite nimmite -e); Th-aiii 171,27 (tassa -e
na mayharrt bharo atthi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nimminane);
Pa~is-a 349,! (aññena iddhimata nimmite pana pa~hamarrt
-arrt balavarrt hoti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee pa~hama­
nimmanarrt); 666,3! (abbhantarato -am eva mano-
mayiddhi nama); Dhatum 89 (sajja -e);- ifc see issara-
(sv issara\ - 2. the world of the nimmanarati gods;
Ap 100,13 (-arrt so gamissati); 405,28; - 0 -rati, mfn.
and f [cf BHS nirma1,1arati ], l. (mfn.) belonging to the
group of nimmanarati gods; Vin III 18,38
(catumaharajika deva saddarrt anussavesurrt .. . tu sita
deva ... -1 deva ... paranimmitavasavattl deva ... ); D III
218,15 (te nimminitva nimminitva kamesu vasarrt vattenti
seyyatha pi deva -!; Sv 1001,4: sayarrt nimmite nimmite
nimmane rati etesan ti -i); M 11 194,2o (-Ihi ... devehi
paranimmitavasavattl deva seyyo ti); SI 133,!3 (-ino
deva); Vibh 423,16 (yani manusakani arrha vassasatani
-inarrt devanarrt eso eko rattindivo ); Thi-a 164,23
(yatharucite bhoge nimminitva ramantl ti -ino);- 2.(j.)
the world of the nimmanarati gods; A 1 228,1 (sahassarrt
jambud!panarrt . . . sahassarrt -lnarrt . . . sahassarrt
brahmalokanarrt): Ap 513,2 (tato ca -irrt [gata]);
595 nimminati
Kv 609,2o (-iya tighati); - 0 -ratino, 0 -rati, m.pl., the
name ofa group ofgods; D II 261,3* (-ino agu); Vv 20:5
(-ino nama san ti deva mahiddhika); Th-a 11 111,28 (so
tena puññakammena -isu nibbattitva); - see also
nimmita (sv nimminati2).
nimmana 2 , mfn., see sv mana 1.
nimmanayati, nimmanayati, pr. 3 sg. [denom. from
nimmana qv sv mana 1], be comes humble, subdued; is
humbled; Vin II 183,!8 (evarrt amhakarrt Sakiyanarrt
Sakiyamano -issati ti, Be so; Ce nimmaniyissati ti; Ee
nimmaniyissati ti; Se nimmadayissati ti) f- Dhp-a I 138,s
(Be so; Ce, Ee nimmanayissatl ti; Se nimmadayissatl ti).
nimmapanaka, nimmapaka, mfn. [from *nimmapeti,
caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnimminati2 qv], producing, creating;-
ifc see vividhavikubbaniddhi- (sv vividha).
nimmaya, absol. ofnimminati 2 qv.
2
nimmayi, aor. 3 sg. ofnimminati qv.
nimmayitva, ind. [? cf BHSD sv nirmadayati], washing;
having washed; ? Pj 11 53,!9 (bhattarrt va laddha pattarrt
-itva, Ee, Ce vl so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
bhattakiccarrt ni~~apetva) = Ap-a 144,15 (eds pattarrt
niharitva bhattakiccarrt ninhapetva).
nimmi.üana, nimmiñjana, se e sv do1,1inimmajjani.
nimmita, mfn.,pp ofnimminati 2 qv.
nimmitva in Ee at Sv 1001,1 is prob. wr for nimminitva
nimminati 1, pr. 3 sg., see sv niminati.
nimminati 2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. nirv'ma, BHS nirminoti,
nirminati], l. produces, forms, creates (by magic or
supernatural power ); Th 1183 (attabhavarrt kha1,1ena -e;
Th-a III 171,27: -eyya -iturrt samattho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nimmiturrt); Sp 579,16 (bahü attabhave -ati); 1335,3zfoll.
(buddhassa bhagavato attabhavasadisarrt attabhavarrt
-ah! ti, na sakka bhante tadisarrt rüparrt -ituf!I, api ca kho
pana tarrt sarikkhakarrt pa~irüpakarrt -issami ti);
Sv 1001,6 (yatharucitarrt kamabhogarrt -anti);
part.pr. nimminanta, mfn., Ud-a 344,32; - aor. 3 sg.
(a) nimmini, Ja 1 232,16 (Maro .. . ailgarakasurrt -i);
Dhp-a IV 57,2o (abhirüparrt itthirrt -i); (b) nimmayi,
1
Mhv 5:92; - 2. [or nimminati ] measures against,
matches; - aor. 1 sg. nimminirrt, Cp 2:6:11 (-irrt mama
attana; Cp-a 150,27: mama attano attabhavena tarrt
parivanesirrt); absol. (a) nimmaya [S. nirmaya],
Vv 16:3 (nimmaya nimmaya ramanti devata);
(b) nimminitva, D III 218,!4 (te -itva -itva kamesu
vasarrt vattenti seyyatha pi deva nimmanaratl, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee nimmetva nimmetva, prob. wr; Sv 1001,1:
yadisarrt yadisarrt attano rüpaf!I icchanti tadisarrt tadisarrt
-itva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nimmitva, prob. wr); Ja VI
201,13' (brahma kira brahma1,1adayo cattaro Val,lt,J.e -itva);
Ap 2,19 (at!te sabbabuddhe ... pakativat,J.t,J.arüpena -itva);
Bv 21:11 (hattbiyanarrt -itva; Bv-a 246,2!: -itva ti tassa
hatthino pamfu_lena tulayitva); Vism 404,32
(pa~havikasi1,1avasena akase maggarrt -itva);
(e) nimminitvana, Th 563 (sahassakkhattum attanarrt
-itvana); Ap 352,19 (pi~harrt -itvana); Cp 2:9:7 (-itvana
attanarrt. Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nissajjitvana; or to
1
nimminati ; cfCp-a 171,18: pitararrt nivattetva putto
agato bhavissati); pp (a) nimmita, mfn., m.n.
and-a, m.pl. [S., BHS nirmita], l. (mfn. and m.n.)
nimmisa
fonned, produced, created; (a fonn) created (by magic
or supematural power); a magical creation; Vin 1 32,3
(nissarp.saya111 kho mahasama1,1assa iddhanubhavo yatha
h' ima mandamukhiyo -a ti); D 1 18,9 (maya ime satta
-a); M 11 222,9 (addha bhikkhave niga1,1~a papakena
issarena -a); Vv 63:29 (slsffi11 e' idarp. ve!uriyassa -arp.;
Vv-a 269,6: ve!uriyama1,1imayan ti attho); Ja IV 453,26
(Vissakammena -aya Pal,ll,lasalaya); VI 275,20* (nagaraje
supa1,11,1e ca ma1,1imhi passa -a111; 275,23': -an ti idarp.
evarüpffi11 accherakffi11 ma1,1imhi -a111 passa); Nidd I
340,16 (so -o buddharp. bhagavanta111 upasali.kamitva
pañharp. pucchati; Nidd-a 1 373,4: so bhagavata -o
buddho); Pa~is 1 126,5 (bhagava cali.kamati -o ti~~ati va
nisldati va . "; Pa~is-a 406,7: -o ti iddhiya mapita-
buddharüpffi11); Ap 111,30 (thilpffi11 . . . sammukha viya
sambuddhffi11 -a111 abhivandi 'harp.; Ap-a 385,24: -arp.
uppaditarp. karitffi11 cetiyarp.); Vism 389,16 (sabbe -a
antaradhayirp.su); Sv 90,32 (ayarp. loko kena -o);
Bv-a 280,2 (bodhisatto uyyanarp. gacchanto tahi yeva
devatahi -arp. vyadhitffi11 ca purisarp. disva); Mhv 5:93;
- animmita, mfn., uncreated; not made; D 1 56,27 (ime
satta kaya ... animmita animmata ... ; Sv 167,10:
animmita ti iddhiya pi na nimmita, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
iddhiya pi animmita) =MI 517,19 =S III 211,13; Ja VI
207,20* (kimatthffi11 animmito nimmitffi11 vandit' assa);
- sunimmita, mfn., well made; Vv 35:1 (vyamharp.
sunimmitarp.); Ja VI 173,27* (pokkharañña sunimmita);
Ap 215,11 (tena kammenaya111 mayharp. attabhavo
sunimmito);- 2. -a111, adv., in a measured or matched
way; ? Vv-a 36,12 (mitan ti nimmitarp., nikkhepa-
padavitikkaman ti attho .. , vaggu caru padanikkhepffi11
katva gacchatl ti, Ee so; Be, Se nikkhepapadarp.
vltikkaman ti; Ce mmltffi11, padanikkhepapada-;
adVv 5:3: mitarp. gacchati vara1,1o); - 3. (m.pl.) the
nimmanarati gods; Ja VI 279,9* (yame ca tusite capi -e);
Ap 598,25 (tusita -a deva); Bv 1:6 (yama ca deva tu sita
ca -a); - pp (b) nimmata 1, mfn. [cfS. mata], created;
- neg. animmata, mfn., uncreated, not made; D 1 56,27
(ime satta kaya ... animmita animmata ... ; Sv 167,10:
animmata ti animmapita) = M 1 51 7,20 = S III 211,13; -
fpp (a) nimminitabba, mfn., Spk 11 341,22 (animmitabba
ti pi pa~ho, na nimminitabba ti attho, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
na nimmitabba ti); Pa~is-a 665,18; (b) neg.
animmitabba, mfn., Ps III 228,14 (animmata ti
animmapita, keci animmitabba ti padarp. vadanti, tarp.
n' eva pii!iYffi11 na a~~akathayarp. sandissati) t Spk 11
341,22; (e) neg. animmatabba, mfn., Sv 167,11 (animmata
ti animmapita, keci animmatabba ti padarp. vadanti, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se animmapetabba ti) t Ps III 228,14 t Spk 11
341,22 (animmitabba ti pi pa~ho); caus.
neg. pp animmapita, mfn., Sv 167,11 = Ps III 228,14 =
Spk 11 341,21;- see also nimmapanaka.
nimmisa, m., see sv nimisa.
nimmisati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nimisati.
nimmisana, n., see sv nimisana.
nimmissarp, se e sv niminati.
nimmilati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nimllati.
nimmilana, n., see sv nimllana.
nimmujja, n., see sv nimujja.
nimmujjati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nimujjati.
596 niyacchati
nimmujjana, n., see sv nimujjana.
nimmuhutta, nimuhutta, mfn. [ni 2 + muhutta ? see
niddasa], free of even a moment; ? Pa~is-a 73,23
(sattavassikakale parinibbuto pi nissatto niddaso -o na
hoti yeva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nimuhutto hoti yeva).
nimmüla, mfn., see sv mUla.
nimmetvii in Ee at D 111218,14 is prob. wr for nimminitva
(Be, Ce, Se so).
nimmoka, m. [S. nirmoka], the slough, the cast-off skin (of
a snake ); Abh 655 (-o kañcuko ); 962; Pv-a 63,3 (tacffi11
ji1,11,1an ti jajjarabhavena ji1,11,1arp. pora1,1a111 attano tacffi11
-arp.).
nimmoha, mfn., se e sv moha.
niya, mfn. [S. nija], one's own; Khp 9:7 (mata yatha -a111
puttarp. ayusa ekaputtam anurakkhe; Pj 1 248,12: attani
jatarp. orasaputtarp.) = Sn 149; J a VI 164,8* (V aru1,1assa
-arp. puttarp. Y amunarp. atimaññasi); Sadd 622,17 (yo
jassa: -arp. puttarp. nijarp. puttarp. va);- see also nija.
niyaka\ mfn. [niya + ka2], one's own; Th1469 (-a
matapitaro ); Ja VI 445,23* (-o bhata); Dhs 1044 (y e
dhamma tesarp. tesarp. sattanarp. ajjhattarp. paccatta111 -a
pa~ipuggalika upadi1,11,1a rüpa . . . ime dhamma ajjhatta,
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee ni y ata; As 361,24: -a ti attano jata, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be ni y ata ti) t Vibh 2,5 (Yffi11 rüpffi11 ... -a111
pa~ipuggalikffi11 upadinnarp.); Vibh 3,31 (vedana ... -a);
Vism 349,2o (-a111 nama attani jata111 sasantana-
pariyapannan ti attho);- 0 '-ajjhatta, mfn. and n., (what
is) interna/ as oneself; one's own self; -a111, adv., in
one's own self, Ja V 123,1' (attano -a111
aniccabhavanadivasena payuttassa); Vism 473,18 (-a111
pi ajjhatta111 parapuggalikarp. pi ca bahiddha ti
veditabbffi11); Spk 1 236,24 (-e attano santanasmirp. yeva
ñiil,lajotirp. jalemi); Mp 11 152,16 (--sali.khate attano citte);
III 380,5 (santarp. va ajjhattan ti -e vijjamanarp.);
Ud-a 189,28 (ajjhattarp. nama -arp., tasma attani
attasantane ti attho); It-a 11 141,3 (yo hi paro na hoti so
--sali.khato atta ahan ti vuccati); 168,11 (ajjhattffi11
sampasadanan ti agatarp. idarp. -arp. nama); Th-a 1 196,26
(attanan ti -a111 sandhaya vadati); Vibh-a 55,21 (ajjhattika
ti sattasantanapariyapanna -a); Sadd 906,8.
niyaka2 , mfn. [= niyata2 ? cf also niyata 1], detennined;
restricted; ? Sadd 622,18 (ko tassa: niyako niyato va).
niyacchati, niyamati, pr. 3 sg. [S. niyacchati], constrains,
restrains; fixes, detennines; Sadd 835,27 foil. (isu yamu
ice evamadlnarp. dhatunarp. anto echo hoti va; icchati
-ati . . . va ti kimatthffi11: esati niyamati);
pp niyata 2 , mfn. [S. niyata], l. constrained, bound;
restrained; disciplined; constant; Dhp 142 (santo danto
-o brahmacarl; Dhp-a III 83,2o: catumagganiyamena -o,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se catumagganiyamena); Vv 17:6
(sambodhidhamme -a); Ja 1 44,29* (bodhiya -a nara);
VI 225,27* (-ani hi bhutani yatha go~aviso tatha); 296,1 *
(vinlto sippava danto katatto -o mudu; 296,9': -o ti
yasadlni nissaya acalasabhavo); Pa~is I 130,11 (aqhahi
micchattehi -o lokasannivaso ti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
niyyato); 2. (whose outcome or course is)
detennined, fixed; restricted, limited, specified;
established, sure; inevitable, invariable; Vin 111 10,24 (so
sotapanno avinipatadhammo -o sambodhiparaya1,1o ti;
Sp 196,19: sammattaniyamena maggena --tta -o); Ja 1
niyacchati
274,17 (ekasmirp. hi attabhave ekarp. maral).arp. -am eva);
VI 24,3* (idh' eva te nisldassu -e PaiJIJasanthare; cf24,s-:
-e ti susanthate) t Ap 123,16 (Ap-a471,23: niyamite
patibaddhe PaiJIJasanthare sakhabhailgasane); Dhs 1290;
Vibh 121,27 foll. (maggasaccarp. -arp., nirodhasaccarp.
aniyatarp. dve sacca si ya -a siya aniyata); Pp 13,2o foil.
(pañca puggala anantarika ye ca micchadighika -a agha
ca ariyapuggala -a avasesa pugga1a aniyata; Pp-a 185,24:
sabbe pi h' ete nirayassa atthaya --tta -a nama);
Mil 193,23 foll. (pub be va bodhisattanarp. matapitaro -a
honti bodhi -a hoti aggasavaka -a honti putto -o hoti
upaghako -o hot! ti); Sp 1320,16 (pañcanantariya-
kammapatti -a sesa aniyata); Ps III 302,15
(bhijjanadhammata va -a); Dhp-a I 167,5 (jatassa nama
-o maccil ti); As 45,14 (khandhabhedanantaram eva
vipakadanato -a); - ifc see micchatta-, sammatta-; -
niyatarp., adv., always; invariably; Ja VI 226,2' (ime satta
-am eva anugacchanti ti); Mhv 34:62;
-'-ayuka, mfn., whose lifetime is fixed; A IV 396,11;-
--gatika, mfn., whose destiny or future course is certain;
Vism 605,6; Sp 397,23 (kh!IJasava appatisandhika itare
ariyasavaka --gatika sugatiparayal).a); Sv 739,18
(--gatikatta); Dhp-a III 173,5 (sotapattipha1arp. patva
--gatika hutva); Pp-a 185,31 (--gatikata);
neg. aniyatagatika, mfn., Dhp-a III 173,3;
--micchadighi,f, a false belief entailing inevitable
(bad) results; Tikap 168,19; Mp II 27,21 (--miccha-
dighiya pana paricchedo natthi); Pp-a 251,19 (natthika-
vada-ahetukavada-akiriyavadasailkhatehi --miccha-
dighidhammehi); - --micchadighika, mfn., one who
holds a false belief entailing inevitable (bad) results;
Vism 177,16; Mp II 27,26 (kappavinase mahajane
brahma1oke nibbatte pi --micchadighiko tattha
anibbattitva pighicakkava)e nibbattati); Vv-a 193,3o
(akkha~Ja nama tayo apaya . . . --micchadighikata, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee --micchadighigata); Kv-a 182,21; -
aniyata, mfn. and m., unrestrained; (whose course or
state is) not determined, not fixed; uncertain; not
restricted; not invariable; Vin V 115,22 (niyato puggalo
janitabbo aniyato puggalo janitabbo); D III 217,1
(micchattaniyato rasi sammattaniyato rasi aniyato rasi;
Nett 96,29: yo aniyato ras1 ayarp. sabbattha-
gaminipatipada); Ja V 452,17* (uddhata aniyata asaññata;
454,22': aniyatacitta); 453,25* (gacchati aniyato
ga)aga)arp.; 455,18' foll.: ettakarp. nama ka1arp. apayesu
paccissatl ti aniyato, Be, Ce, Se so); Vibh 63,3foll.
(rilpakkhandho aniyato cattaro khandha siya
micchattaniyata siya sammattaniyata siya aniyata);
324,2o (catilsu maggesu pañña niyata pañña); Kv 307,24
(aniyatassa niyamagamanaya atthi ña~Jan ti; Kv-a 82,14:
aniyatassa puthujjanass' eva sato pugga1assa);
Vism 469,16 (aniyatata); 560,15 (saddo aniyato
kadaci-d-eva patubhavato); Ps III 348,7 (senasanarp. pan'
ettha aniyatarp., Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anlyatarp.); Dhp-a I
431,10 (parihlnajjhanassa kho pana aniyata gati);
III 170,24 (jlvitam eva aniyatarp. mara~Jarp. niyatarp.); -
esp. a class of offence (at first unspecified); V in I 112,18
(terasa sailghadisese uddisitva dve aniyate uddisitva);
III 187,1 (dve aniyata dhanJma uddesarp. agacchanti);
190,28 (aniyato ti na niy ato parajikarp. va sailghadiseso va
597 niyacchati
pacittiyarp. va); V 7,19 (pathamo aniyato kattha
paññatto); 115,17 (niyata apatti janitabba aniyata apatti
janitabba); Sp 1351,34 (yasma na niyato tasma aniyato
ayarp. apattikkhandho ti attho); 1352,4 (til).l).arp.
dhammanarp. aññatarena karetabbo ti ... tasma aniyato ti
vuccati); Sv 12,33 (dve sikkhapadani aniyatanl ti
thapesurp.); - aniyata in Ee at Ud-a 8,5 is wr for
aniyamato (Be, Ce, Se so); - caus. pr. 3 sg. niyameti,
niyameti, niyamayati, constrains, restrains; governs;
determines; restricts, limits; specifies; Vism 668,14
(sankharupekkha patipadavisesarp. -eti); Sp 448,7
(okasarp. -eti); Sv 804,21 (evarp. padakajjhanam eva -eti)
= Vibh-a 121,1 (Ee so; Be, Ce, Se niyameti); Spk II 40,24
(paccayo dhamme -eti); It-a II 66,2joll. (idarp. pana
dussllanarp. dussllasevanam eva . . . ko niyametl ti,
ajjhasayadhatu niyameti); Th-a II 152,9 (tarp.
nibandhissami -essami); Patis-a 465,3 (tesam
mudumajjhimatikkhapaññatarp. pubbahetu -eti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee niyameti); Vibh-a 429,18 (esa niyato
sambodhiparayal).O ti vutto, kirp. pana tarp. niyameti);
Kv-a 137,18joll. (sammattaniyamo ariyamaggo so
avinipatadhammatarp. e' eva pha1uppattirp. ca -eti
micchattaniyamo anantariyakammarp. tarp. anantara
nirayilpapattirp. -eti); Sadd 640,22 (bhagava . . . tatha
tatha desanarp. niyametl ti); - part.pr. (a) niyamenta,
niyamenta, mfn., Sv 283,25 (mayam eva arahama ti evarp.
-ento, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niyamento); Pj II 199,27
(asa)hapm.n.1amadivasarp. yeva niy amento);
(b) niyamayamana, mfn., Mi1378,24 (yogina... cittarp.
niyamayamanena); - aor. 3 sg. niyamesi, Ps III 27,17;
- absol. (a) niyametva, niyamitva, niyametva, Ja V
437 ,3· (parapurisanarp. nimittarp. karoti niyametva va
aniyametva va, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit niyametva va);
Vism 666,27 (-etva); Sp 447,8 (game yeva ti -etva);
766,18 (niyametva pana imarp. rukkharp. chinda ti);
Ud-a 21,8 (na utusarp.vaccharadivasena -etva niddigho ti
ce, Be, Se so; Ce niyamitva; Ee omits); Patis-a 647,38
(-itva); - neg. aniyametva, aniyametva, Ja II 112,23
(kañci aniyametva, Be, Ce so; Ee aniyametva; Se
aniyamitva); III 330,17 (nesado aniyametva gijjhanarp.
pase o<;!<;!esi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se aniyamitva); Vism 389,21
(aniyametva); Pj I 182,1o (ye ti aniyametva uddeso, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee aniyametva); (b) niyametvana, As 57,7*;
- pass. part.pr. niyamiyamana, mfn., Dhp-a I 21,26;
Ud-a 8,28; - pp niyamita, niyamita, mfn. [S. niyamita],
restricted, limited; specified; Sp 381,32 (senasanatthaya
-itarp.) t 626,12 (niyamitarp.); 448,11 (okasassa -itatta);
Ps II 231,15 (asukaku1aputto ti na niyamito); Ud-a 367,28
(baddha ti -ita); Kv-a 137,23 (sattakkhattuparamo
sotapattimaggena avinipatadhamrnataya ca pha1uppattiya
ca -ito);- niyamitarp. in Ee at Th-a I 45,10 is prob. wr
for niyamattarp. (Be, Ce so); - niyamitamicchaditthiya
in Ee at Sv 992,17 is prob. wr for niyata- (Be, Ce, Se so);
- ifc see akkharapada (sv akkhara\ - niyamita-
vacana, n., an expression of restriction; a specifying
word or expression; Mp I 72,26 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
niyamavacanarp.); - neg. aniyamita, aniyamita, mfn.
Sp 448,6 (okasassa aniyarnitatta); 766,18 (aniyamitatta);
Ps II 327,13 (viharo pan' ettha aniyamito, Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se aniyamito); III 416,13 (aniyamitena ... kenaci kiccena,
niy ata
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee aniyamitena); Mp I 394,14 (tassa
jatakale nam~ aniyamita~);- aniyamitavacana, n., an
indefinite or non-specifying word or expression; Mp I
72,25 (ye keci ti aniyamitavacan~); Pj I 167,4
(aniyamitavacanena, Be, Se so; Ce, E e aniyamita- );
It-a II 36,7 (yassa kassaci ti aniyamitavacan~, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee aniyamita-); V v-a 231,8 (yo ti
aniyamitavacana~, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce aniyamita-); -
fpp niyametabba, niyametabba, mfn., Mil 378,22
(yatha . . . niyamako rattindiva~ . . . appamatto yatta-
payatto nava~ sareti evam eva ... yogina ... appamattena
yoniso manasikarena citt~ niyametabb~); Spk II
267,26 (-etabba, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niyametabba);
As 277,24 ( -etabban ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niyametabban
ti).
niyata\ mfn. [= niyaka 1 ? cf also niyaka2], one's own;?
Dhs 1044 (y e dhamma . . . ajjhatt~ paccatt~ -a
pa~ipuggalika upadil).l).a rupa . . . ime dhamma ajjhatta,
Be, Ee so; Ce, Se niyaka; As 361,24: -a ti attano jata, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se niyaka ti).
niyata 2 , mfn., pp ofniyacchati qv.
niyati, f [ts ], necessity, fate; Abh 90 (bhagy~ -i bhago );
Ja VI 226,22• ( -i~ nativattama velantam iva sagaro );
229,9• H~ kaiJ.kha Bljaka; 229,17·: -im eva olokehi);
229,!0* (sukha~ va yadi va dukkh~ -iya kira labbhati);
Sv 161,24 (-aH ti niyata, Be, Se so; Ce, E e ni y atta; wrr?
ad DI 53,32: niyatisaiJ.gatibhavaparil).ata) = Ps III 120,15
(Be, Ee, Se niyatata; Ce niyyatl ti -i) = Spk II 341,10 (eds
niyatata); 0
-paril}.iima, m., the development,
consequence, of fate; Pv 38:25 (laddheyya~ labhate
maceo --ja~. Be so; Se nlyati-; Ce, Ee --ja;
Pv-a 252,27 foil.: ay~ satto sukh~ va dukkh~ va
labhanto --vasena labhati, na kammassa katatta na
issaradina ca ti adhippayo, Be, Ce so; Ee niyati-; Se
0
-Viparil).amavasena); - 0
-Viida, m., the doctrine of
necessity or fate; Ps III 233,21 (-e, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -o).
niyanta(r), m. [S. niyantr], one who restrains or governs;
Abh 988 (niyamako potavahe tilingo so -ari).
niyante in E e at Ap 177,6 is wr for niyyante (Be, Se so) or
niyante (Ce so).
niyama, m. [ts], constraint; restraint; a practice or vow of
self-discipline; restriction, limitation; compulsion; a
fixed rule, necessity; an invariable practice or
experience; Abh 430 (-o tu vata~); 444 (agantu-
sadhan~ kammam anicca~ -o); 1078 (-o nicchaye
vate); Ap 228,23 (-e su ca s~vuto; Ap-a 470,2:
o -saññitesu piil).atipataveramal).i-adisu pañcasu
niccasllesu); Kv 469,34 (atthi so -o yena -ena
sattakkhattuparamo puggalo sattakkhattuparamataniyato
ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee so niyamo yena niyamena);
Mil 116,27 (s~vare yame -e); 293,!9 (pubbakehi
maharaja khattiyehi ~hapito eso -o yo pal).a~ hanati so
dal).qiiraho ); Vism 684,30 (yattha yattha evasaddena -a~
na karissama); Sv 432,2 (ay~ ettha matukucchi-
okkamane dhammata aya~ sabhavo aya~ -o ti vutt~
hoti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be niyamo); Spk III 123,2 (ayam eva
ti evasaddo o• -attho tena añña~ magga~ pa~ikkhipati);
Pv-a 166,5 (aya~ -o sa~sare natthi y~ itthi itthi yeva
hoti puriso puriso eva ti); Th-a I 45,Io (yo ti
aniyamitaniddeso tassa so ti imina -tta~ daghabb~.
0
598 niyassa
Be, Ce so; Ee niyamit~; Se niyamat~); Thl-a 169,3o
(sakalanagare ayam eva -o bhavissati) = Mp I 379,2o
(niyamo); Sadd 633,3 (garulahün~ -assa palanatthaya);
725,!2 (etthay~ -o kattari kitappaccayayoge); -
niyamena, adv., by necessity, necessarily; invariably;
Ja IV 397,!7·; Spk III 153,13; Pj I 181,10 (attano
pavattisamanantara~ -en' eva phalappadanato);
As 417,4;- niyamena in Ee at Pv-a 287,1* is prob. wr;
Be, Ce, Se ya desananiyamena; - niyamato, adv.,
invariably; necessarily; as a rule; as a restriction or
specification; Vism 433,14 (-ato pan eta~
atltarammalJam eva); Sp 145,!3 (yattha sukh~ tattha na
-ato plti); Spkiii 238,3o; As 107,II (samayassa -ato
pa~iniddesavacan~); 321,31 (-ato pana itthiya eva
indriyan ti itthindriya~); - aniyama, m., lack of
restriction or limitation or specification; indefiniteness,
generality; Abh 949 (-e ki~); Sp 978,3 (sace -~ katva
ya~ va t~ va gal).hati); Sv 589,19 (-ato vatva); PsI
44,27 (-ena hi vutt~ yo pi so ... ); Pv-a 175,26 (vasaddo
-' -attho ).
niyamati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv niyacchati.
niyamana, n. [ts], restriction, limitation; Sv 801,27 (ayam
eva ti aññamaggapa~ikkhepanatth~ -a~); Vv-a 231,9
(yo ti aniyamitavacanam, tassa tan ti imina -~
veditabba~); Pa~is-a 702,3o (samma jlvatl ti
akaranidassan~. no miccha ti tass' eva-a~);- ifc see
atippasaiJ.ga- (sv pasaiJ.ga), lakkha-.
niyameti,pr. 3 sg., caus. ofniyacchati qv.
niyasa 1, mfn., see sv niyassa.
niyasa2 , mfn., see sv yasa(s).
niyassa, niyasa 1, mfn. ffrom niyasa2 qv sv yasa(s) ? or
from *ni 1 + yassati or *niyassati [cfS. nyasyati] ?] (a
formal act of the saiJ.gha) conferring disgrace, loss o.f
status (see Vinmu lll, p. 212); (or requiring effort;) Vin I
49,33 (kata~ va pan' assa hoti sailghena kamm~
tajjanly~ va -a~ va pabbajaniy~ va ... , Be, Ce, Se
so; E e nissaya~); II 226,29 (saiJ.gho . . . kamma~
kattukamo hoti tajjaniya~ va -~ va pabbajaniya~
va ... , Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nissaya~); V 124,18* (in uddana:
tajjaniya -a ca, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nissaya); Sp 981,13
(lahukaya va paril).iimeyya ti ukkhepaniy~ akatva
tajjaniy~ va -~ va kareyya ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
niyyas~); 1156,16 (ali.ga~ -assa abhil).hapattika-
tta~ ... vutt~.. Be, Ce so; Ee, Se niyasassa);
Vin-vn 2748; - 0 -kamma, n., a formal act of the
saiJ.gha conferring loss of status; disgracing,
reprimanding; Vin II 7,37 foil. (saiJ.gho Seyyasakassa
bhikkhuno -a~ karotu nissaya te vatthabban ti, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee nissaya-); A I 99,5 (-~ paññatt~; Mp II
165,I: balassa avyattassa Seyyasakassa bhikkhuno -~
paññatt~. Be, Ce so; E e nissaya-; Se ni y asa-); Pv 36:13
(kareyyasi me yakkha -a~; Pv-a 223,14: mayh~ -a~
niggahakamm~ kareyyasi ti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -~
niggatakamm~); Sp 1292,II (tajjanlyakammarahassa
-~ karonti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se niyasa-); Sadd 490,7
(yena vinayakammena nissaya te vatthabban ti
niyassiyati bhajapiyatl ti niyasso balyan ta~ -a~ nama);
- --kata, mfn., dealt with by a formal act of the saiJ.gha
conferring loss of status; V in I 331,32 (bhikkhu saiJ.ghena
--kato, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nissayakamma~ kato).
niyassaka
niyassaka, n. [niyassa + ka2], a formal niyassa act; V in II
235,5• (in uddana: tajjanlya~ -~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
niyasaka~).
niyassiyati, pr. 3 sg. (pass. of ni 1 + yassati? or of
*niyassati, cfS. nyasyati], effort is made;? is turned (to),
entrusted; ? Sadd 490,6 (yasu payatane: yena
vinayakammena nissaya te vatthabban ti -ati bhlÜaplyatl
ti niyasso ba1yan ta~ vinayakamma~ nama).
niyama, m. [cf S. niyama, ni y ama; BHS niyama], a fixed
rule; a particular or specified way or manner; an
invariable practice or experience; a determined or
inevitable outcome, certainty; an assured state; what
leads to an inevitable outcome, the way to an end; A I
121,27 (n' eva okkamati -~ kusa1esu dhammesu
sammatta111; Mp II 192,10: magganiyamasari.khat~
sammatt~); Sn 55 (patto -~; Pj II !06,19:
avinipatadhammataya sambodhiparayanataya ca
niyatabhava111 adhigato sammattaniyamasari.khata111 va
pa!hamamaggan ti); Ja III 130,II (imina -ena cha divasa
vttivatta); IV 75,15' (kena -ena); Pa!is I 124,24 (abhabba
-a111 okkamitu111 kusa1esu dhammesu sammatta~;
Pa!is-a 402,28 foil.: kusa1esu dhammesu sammatta-
niyamasari.khat~ ariyamagg~ okkamitu~ abhabba;
Vism 177,nfoll.: kusa1esu dhammesu 0 -sari.khata111
sammattasari.khat~ ca ariyamagga111 okkamitu111
abhabba ti); Kv 317,2 (-o asari.khato ti; Kv-a 89,3: -o
ti ... ariyamaggo vuccati); Sp 227,zo (yena -ena yaya
kiriyaya); Sv 432,Ifoll. (ay~ ettha matukucchi-
okkamane dhammata ay~ sabhavo ay~ -o ti vutt~
hoti, -o ca nam' esa kammaniyamo utuniyamo ...
dhammaniyamo ti pañcavidho, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se aya111
niyamo ti ... -o ca ... ); Ps IV 136,12 (te imesu tlsu pi
dassanesu okkantaniyama ahesu111, kath~ pana tesu -o
hotl ti); Spk I 14,18 (-o kir' esa devatan~, Be, E e, Se
so; Ce niyamo); Mp I 225,13 (id~ kira rupa111 imina
-ena va1ittaccal11 bhavissati); II 241,8 (yatha ti yena
-ena); Pa!is-a 698,3 (anantarapha1adanaya
arahattuppattiya ca 0 -bhütatta -o, nicchayo ti attho);
Kv-a 137,18 (dve -a sammattaniyamo ca
micchattaniyamo ca, sammattaniyamo ariyamaggo ...
micchattaniyamo anantariyakarnma111); - ifc see gihi-
(sv gihi[n]), micchatta-, sammatta-; - 0 iivakkanti,f,
entering the state of an assured future course; Nidd I
313,33 (ka1yfu;laputhujjana -i~ patthenti; Nidd-a I 367,8:
-in ti maggapavisan~); - 0 -tii,f, the having an
inevitable outcome; a state of certainty, an assured or
determined state; a rule; A IV 228,3• (idha ce na~
viradheti saddhammassa -~) = Ja I 113,15* (Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se niyamaka111; 113,18': eta111 saddhammassa
--sari.khata111 sotapattimagg~. Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
niyamakasari.khat~);- -ratthp in Ee at Ps III 324,9 is
0
wr for tiyama- (Be, Ce, Se so);- aniyamena, without
specification; indiscriminately; Ja V 337,26; Pa!is-a
238,13 (aniyamena hi sabbasamadhayo idha vuccanti).
niyamaka\ m. [niyama + ka2], a way, manner; - ifc see
ai:~atti-; - dhammaniyamaka111 in Ce, Ee at D I 190,Io is
prob. wr for dhammaniyamata111 (Be, Se so).
niyamaka 2 , niyyamaka, m. [cf S. niyamaka, S. !ex.
niryama], a ship's captain; a pilot, a guide; Abh 667
(potavaho -o); 988 (-o potavahe tilingo so niyantari);
599 niyuñjati
Ja I 108,5 (-o purimasaka!e ... akase taraka olokento ito
pajetha ti vadamano nipajji); IV 138,22 (vfu;!ija nav~
sajjetva k~ -a111 karissama ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
niyyamaka111); Mill94,2I (-assa pubbe va anagat~
t1ra111 o1oketva nava pesetabba hoti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
niyyamakassa); 378,22 (yatha . . . -o rattindiva111 ...
appamatto yattapayatto nava~ sareti, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
niyyamako); Vism 137,1 (yatha ca aticheko -o, Be, Ee
so; Ce nlyyamako; Se niyyamako); - 0
-sutta, n.
[niyamaka + sutta2] a captain's manual; JaiV 139,10
(attano -ena s~sandetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
niyyamaka-).
niyameti, pr. 3 sg., caus. ofniyacchati qv.
niyuñjati, pr. 3 sg. [S. niyunakti], yokes; ties; impels,
directs; fixes the mind on; Th 1113 (iti ssu m~ citta
pure -asi; Th-a III 155,14: pubbe sammapatípattiya111
uyyojesl ti); 1121 (ma111 aniccamhi cale -asi); Ja III
441,19* (attha111 -eyya parassa dukka!~; 442,17·: -eyya
upaparikkheyya); IV 241,3• (anay~ nayati dummedho
adhuraya111 -ati); - part.pr. niyuñjanta, mfn., Ja III
442,18' (eva~ -anto); - pass. pr. 3 sg. niyujjati, is
assigned to; is directed to; Pv-a 49,14 (taya dinna~
mayh~ na upakappati na niyujjati, Ce, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be, Se na viniyujjati); - part.pr. niyujjamana,
niyuñjiyamana, mfn., Pj I 240,7 (gahanhehi
dütagamanapahii:~agamanadisu -amano, Be so; Ce, Ee
yujjamano; Se niyuñjamano) = Pj II 193 (Be, Se
niyunJiyamano; Ce yujjamano; Ee omits);
pp niyutta, mfn. [S. niyukta], bound, tied to; connected
with; fixed on, directed to; appointed, charged;
employed; Ja III 262,16* (rattindiva~ yo satat~ -o;
263,16·: attano kammesu -o); V 228,29 (te rañño
vinicchaye -a); Sp 607,11 (bahulle -o !hito ti bahulliko );
Spk I 169,11 (pape niyojeti saya111 va pape -o ti papima);
Vv-a341,9 (arakkhanattha111 kantare -o); Th-ai 71,31
(usabhajañño ... kasanakicce -o); III 29,34 (tikicchaya
--taya); 79,21 (nekatika ti nikatiy~ -a); Nidd-a I 199,1
(suttantiko ti suttante -o); II 37,10 (akusa1akamme --tta
kai:~ho); Sadd ?86,22 (dvare -o dovariko); - caus.
pr. 3 sg. niyojeti, -ayati, urges, directs to; incites;
employs; Vin JI 303,12 (adharnme m~ tva~ bhikkhu
-es! ti); A IV 32,12* (no e' anhane -aye, Ce, Ee, Se so;
Be niyojako; quoted Cp-a 288,17: eds niyojako); Pv 13:4
(ye m~ -eyyu111 dadahi dana111); Th 355 (na t~ pape
-essa111; Th-a JI 151,17: na -essa~ na -essami, Be so; Se
na -issami; Ce, Ee na -iss~ na yojissami); Ja III 322,6
(sigala nama dusslla papadhamma akicce -enti);
VI 139,26* (atavlsu va madise -enti); Mi1126,I3 (ma
tva~ amhe anatthe -ehi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -esi); Pj JI
421,32 (banda na111 buddhupasevanaya -emi ti); -
part.pr. (a) niyojenta, mfi:-entl)n., Pj II 147,25 (kamma-
ghane -entl); Thl-a 250,15 (ta111 matapitaro gharavase
-enta); Nidd-a 1 374,1 (ta111 devaparis~ ki1esappahane
-ento); (b) niyojaya(t), mjn., Mhv 18:3 (tasmi~ kamme
-ay~); aor. 3 sg. (a) niyojesi, Th-a I 117,7
(kammanhane -esi, Be, Ce Se so; Ee niyyojesi) =
Ap-a 304,33 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee kammanhanena yojesi);
Mhv38:101; (b)niyojayi, Thll25; Mhv29:17;
3 pl. niyojesu~, Th-a I 116,9 (bhikkhü t~
pabbajetva . . . kammanhane -esu111, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
niyuñjana
niyyojesurp) Ap-a 302,3o; absol. niyojetva,
Mil 204,29; Dhp-a I 268,11 (amhe akusalakiriyaya -etva);
- pp niyojita, mfn., urged; directed; incited; Ap 430,10
(-ito anacare); Sp 805,23 (itaresarp akappiye -itatta);
Vv-a 330,1 (devaputtena sar~agamane silasamadane ca
-ito brahmai_lo); Ap-a 423,29 (thüparp karohl ti -ito, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee thüpakarai_le); 506,2 (arnhehi -ita sa
bhikkhunl ti); Mhv 4:24; - fpp niyojetabba, mfn.,
Vism 286,8.
niyuñjana, n. [from niyuñjati], fixing; directing; Pj I
132,11 (tass' attano samma pai_!idhanarp -arp (hapanan
ti); - see also niyojana.
niyutta, mfn., pp ojniyuñjati qv.
niyuttaka, mfn. [niyutta + ka2 ; cf BHS niyuktaka],
appointed; employed; Pj 1 202,31 (te attano janapade
0
-purisassa lekharp pesesurp) = Pv-a 20,19; Pv-a 209,19
(eko adhikarai_le 0 -puriso).
niyura, nlyura, m. [cf Pkt I_!iura], a bracelet; Abh 285 (-o
valayo); Nidd-a 11 129,13 (nüpuran1 ti valayani, -a ti keci
vadanti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nlyüran1 ti); - see also
nidhura.
niyüha, see sv niyyüha.
niyoga, m. [ts], command, arder; necessity; certainty;
Abh 1162; Sadd 813,31 (ai_lattl ti ... sa eva saddasatthe
-o ti nama vuttarp); 920,3foll. (battirpsa tantiyuttiyo ...
nidassanarp -o vikappo . . . idam eva ti -o);
abl. niyoga, adv., necessarily; certainly; Dhs 1417 (-a
anagatarammai_la natthi); Sadd 61.29 (satto ti... -a
pullingan ti pi danhabbo); - 0
-vacana, n., an
expression of certainty; Nidd I 2,27 (addha ti ...
adve)hakavacanarp -arp ... ; cfNidd-a I !8,21: ekasmirp
atthe dve na yujjantl ti -arp, dvidhapathapatikkhepo) =
Patis II 21,11 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niyyanika-;
Patis-a 544,19 foil.: niyogena niy amena vacanarp -arp,
niyyogavacanan ti pi pa(hanti).
niyojaka, m(jn). [ts], (one) who impels, directs, urges;
Dhp-a II 111,15 (at!hane -a purisadhama nama, Be, Ce,
Se so; Ee niyojanika); Nidd-a I 8,14 (amaccharitta (hane
-o, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se na caghane -o); Cp-a 297,29 (tattha
-anarp ca papamittanarp).
niyojana, n., [ts], directing; urging; Abh 427; 1037;
Sv 996,32 (bhikkhusaiigho . . . kaly3I_ladhammesu -ena
bahüpakaro); Th-a I 5,1o (sui_latha ti savane -arp);
Thl-a 5,35 (appicchataya -arp); Cp-a 108,15 (viramane
-arp);- see also niyuñjana.
niyojanika, mfn. [niyojana + ika], who urges or directs;
Dhp-a II 111,15 (aghane -a purisadhama nama, Ee so,
perhaps wr; Be, Ce, Se niyojaka).
niyojeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofniyuñjati qv.
niyyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of nayati 2 qv.
niyyatta (and niyyata 1 ?), mfn. [pp ofni 2 + yatati], given;
yielded; M I 360,9 (yarp ahosi dhanarp va ... jatarüparp
va sabbarp tarp puttanarp dayajjarp niyyatarp; Ps III
38,23; niyyatan ti niyyatitarp; or pp of niyyati qv);
Cp p. 23,7* (jlvitarp yassa kassaci -arp, Be so; Ce, Ee
nlyantarp; Se niyyantarp; Cp-a 181,27: jlvitarp ekarpsen'
eva -arp nlyatitarp danamukhe nissagharp, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee nlyattarp nlyaditarp); - se e also niyyateti.
niyyanta 1, mfn., pass. part.pr. ofnayati 2 qv.
niyyanta2 , mfn., part.pr. of niyyati qv.
600 niyyati
niyyama, m. [me for niyama qv? or wr for nissama qv],
practice; exercise; J a II 166,25* (na -o tayati
appapaññarp; 167 ,3·: appapaññarp nama puggalarp -o
yoggarp cii_!I_!acarai_larp na tayati na rakkhatl ti).
niyyamana\ mfn., pass. part.pr. ofnayati 2 qv.
niyyamana 2 , mfn., part.pr. ofniyyati qv.
niyyata\ mfn., see sv niyyatta.
niyyata2 , mfn., pp ofniyyati qv.
niyyata(r), m. [from niyyati], one who leaves (sarpsara);
MI 523,31 (klvabahuka pana bho Ananda imasmirp
dhammavinaye -aro ti); 524,3 (ime pan' ajlvika ... tayo
e' eva -aro paññapenti seyyathidarp Nandarp Vaccharp
Kisarp Sankiccarp Makkhalirp Gosalan ti).
niyyatana, nlyatana, n. [cf S. niryatana, BHS niryatana],
l. giving back, restoring; paying back; giving,
dedicating; consigning; Abh 883 (nyasapp~e tu
danamhi -arp); Dhatup 580 (yata -e); Dhatum 813; Ja V
497,15 (tesarp khattiyanarp sakarattharp -vararp g~hi);
0
Vism 449,8 (rüpassa upacayo .. . 0
-paccupat(hano);
499,11 (jati ... 0 -rasa) f. Ud-a43,1o (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nlyatana-); Vism 556,5 (yo kassaci atthassa 0 -attharp
patibhogo hoti); - ifc see atta- (sv atta[n]); - 2. a
response, retum, restatement; Sv 976,13 (ayarp kho
avuso ti evarp -arp pi ... akatva); Spk II 19,15 (nanu
e' ettha patipada pucchitva nibbanarp bhajitarp -e pi
patipada va niyyatita; se e S II 5,1 foil.); Vibh-a 12,19
(--ghane pi idarp vuccati rüparp dure ti na niyyatitarp);
- ifc se e de sana-; -se e also nigamana.
niyyati, nlyati (and niyyayati), pr. 3 sg. [S., BHS niryati],
goes out, goes forth (to); leaves; esp. leaves sarpsara;
Vin V 93,4 (yayarp ditthi ariya niyyanika -ati takkarassa
sammadukkhakkhayaya) = A III 132,18 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee nlyati) f. A 1 187,21 (Mp 11 303,3: so dhammo na -ati
na niggacchati tarp attharp na sadheti ti); DI 237,13
(sabbani tani niyyanikani -anti takkarassa
brahmasahavyataya ti); MI 175,17 (brahmai_lo
sabbasetena vatabhirathena Savatthiya -ati divadivassa);
S V 6,16* (-anti dhira lokamha, Be, E e, Se so; Ce
nlyyanti) f. Dhp 175 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nlyanti; Dhp-a III
177,18: nissaranti nibbanarp papui_lantl ti); A I 242,24
(dvlhi dhammehi -ati abhijjhaya ca vyapadena ca);
V 194,12 (yarp . . . dhammarp desesi . . . sabbo va tena
loko -issati, Ee so; Be nlyati; Ce nlyissati; Se -assati);
195,12 (ye kho keci lokamha -irpsu va -anti va -issanti
va, Ee so; Se -assanti; Be, Ce nlyirpsu va nlyanti va
nlyissanti va); Ja V 183,1o* (yo 'harp pubbe -ami
uyyanarp); VI 154,2* (-atha Candasuriya yaññatthaya;
154,19': -atha ti gacchatha; cf 144,24*: nlyanti
Candasuriya); 193,22* (-ahi abhidassanarp, Ce, Ee so; Se
nlyahi; Be -ahi ahidassanarp); 222,1 * (-ama deva
yuddhaya); Nidd 1 I08,2o (na vaggehi dhammehi yayati
-ayati vuyhati, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce niyyati) f. 114,3 (na ...
neyyo ti na yayati na -ayati ... ,Se so; Be, Ce niyyati; Ee
niyyati); 395,4 (mosavajje na yayeyya na -ayeyya na
vaheyya, Be so; Ce na vuyheyya; Ee, Se only na
niyyeyya); Patis I 163,15 (tena ca nekkhammena ariya
-anti, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se nlyanti; Pa!is-a 469,28:
niggacchanti); II 66,1 (nirodharp nibbanarp -ati;
Patis-a 568,4 foll.: nirodhasankhatarp nibbanarp
upagacchatl ti); Ap 223,14 (-ati lokanayako); Nett 119,19
niyyateti
(sabbe 1okavattanusarino dhamma -anti te1oka tihi
vimokkhamukhehi); Sv 390,25 (addhiinaJTI titthanato
-ati); Ps III 116,7 (vina dassanena 1oko na -ati); Th-a Ili
209,18 (yo hi dukkhapatipadaya dandhabhiññaya -ati,
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -ati); - part.pr. (a) niyya(t),
nlya(t), mfn., Ja VI 223,17' (Vedeho sah' amaccehi -a¡p,
Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nlya¡p; 223,31': so tena rathena -anto,
Ce, Ee so: Be niggacchanto; Se rajatarathena gacchanto);
(b) niyyanta2, nlyanta2, mf(-antl)n., D II 22,1
(uyyiinabhiimi¡p -anto); Ap 542,s (piijayi¡psu ca -anti¡p
nibbuta¡p buddhamatara¡p, Be so; Ce nlyanti¡p; Ee
piijayi¡psu vinlyanti¡p; Se piijayi¡psu viniyyanti); Mp IV
96,25 (Vesiiliya -asi, -anto ca ... , Be, Se so; Ce -ayanto;
Ee nlyasi, nlyayanto); (e) niyyayanta, nlyayanta, mfn.,
S V 4,21 (Savatthiya -ayanta¡p); Sv 400,10 (-ayanto -ati
gacchanto gacchati ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce nlyyayanto
nlyyati; Ee -ayanto); (d) niyyamana2, nlyamiina2, mfn.,
Ap 350,16 (tato me -amiinassa, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
nlyamanassa); - aor. 3 sg. niyyasi, V in I 231,14
(Ambapa1i gal).ika... Vesa1iya -as1 bhagavantaJTI
dassanaya); D II 21,25 (Vipassl kumaro .. . uyyana-
bhiimi¡p -asi); Sn 417; Ja I 263,12; Ap 165,12
(bhagava ... pavanaggena -asi haJT!saraja va ambare, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -ati); - niyyasl ti in Se and nlyasl ti in Ee
at Ja I 370,29 are prob. wrr for nlyasl ti (Be, Ce so);
3 pl. (a) niyyasu¡p, V in I 231 ,3o (Licchavl .. . Vesaliya
-asu¡p, Be, Ee so; Ce nlyi¡psu; Se -i¡psu; = D II 96,4:
Be, Ee, Se -i¡psu; Ce nlya¡psu); (b) niyyi¡psu, Vin II
182,3o (yathii pure caturanginiya senaya uyyanabhiimi¡p
-anti evam eva ... -i¡psu, Be, E e, Se so; Ce nlyanti ...
nlya¡psu); D II 41,3 (Be -i¡psu; Ce -a¡psu; Ee nlyi¡psu;
Se niyi¡psu); (e) niyya¡psu, Ja VI 145,7• (ye hi ssu pubbe
-a¡psu, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se my1¡psu; 145,13·:
nikkhami¡psu); - inf niyyatu¡p, S V 351,5 (raja
Pasenadi Kosa1o uyyanabhiimi¡p -atukamo hoti); A I
68,23 (rañño na phasu hoti atiyatu¡p va -atu¡p va);
Sv 383,2 (-atu¡p arahattajayagiiha¡p gahetu¡p sakkoti);
- pp niyyata2 , mfn. [cfS. niryata], laid by; given,
handed over; gane forth; gane away; ? M I 360,9 (YaJTI
ahosi dhanaJTI va ... jatariipaJTI va sabba¡p taJT~ puttiinaJTI
dayajja¡p -a¡p; Ps III 38,23; -an ti niyyatitaJTI; or =
niyyatta qv); Patis I 130,11 (aqhahi micchattehi -o
1okasannivaso, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se niyato; Patis-a 421,9:
-o ti gato pakkhando abhibhiito ti attho, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee pakkhanto) quoted Ud-a 144,5 (Be, Se so; Ce nlyyati;
Ee niyyati) and It-a I 144,32 (Ce, E e so; Be niyato; Se
niyyato); - fpp niyyatabba, niyyayitabba, mfn., Ja VI
476,7' (imina nakkhattena niyyayitabba¡p 1mma
pavisitabban ti janati); Pj I 223,25 (ariya niyyanika ti
ettha niyyanta ti attho na niyyatabba ti, Be, Ce so; Ee
ettha niyyayanta ti attho; Se ettha niyyati attho ).
niyyateti, -ayati, niyyadeti, niyyadayati (and nlyateti,
nlyadeti), pr. 3 sg. [caus. of n¡l + yatati; cf S., BHS
niryatayati], l. hands back; resto res; pays back; S IV
181,12 (tena hi tva¡p Nanda samikana¡p gavo -eh! ti, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se niyyiidehl ti); Ja I 276,21 (aya¡p bhikkhu
aha¡p s!la¡p rakkhitu¡p na sakkhissiiml ti pattaclvara¡p
niyyadeti); Ap 372,19 (taJTI pattaJTI bhikkhusanghass'
adas' aharp, yo 'ttha therataro bhikkhu -esi mama¡p
tada, Ee so; Be, Ce niyyadesi; Se niyyademi ahaJTI tada);
601 niyyateti
part.pr. niyyatenta, niyyiidenta, mfn., Cp-a 98,28
(Sakko mahapurisassa ... Maddidevi¡p -ento, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee niyyadento); - 2. hands over (ownership or
responsibility ); entrusts; gives (formally ), dedica tes;
Vin II 95,16 (maya¡p ima¡p adhikara~aJTI ayasmantana¡p
niyyadessiima); 182,25 (yaviiha¡p putte ca bhatare ca
rajjaJTI niyyademl ti, Be, Ee so; Ce nlyyademl ti; Se
niyyadessiiml ti); D II 331,2 (pitu me bhoti dayajja¡p
-eh! ti, Ce so; Be, Se niyyadehl ti; Ee nlyyatehl ti);
III 189,13 (samaye dayajja¡p -enti, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se
niyyadenti); S I 131 ,10' (riipa sadda ... -ay ami tuyheva
Mara; Spk I 191,21: sabbe tuyhaJTI yeva demi); Thl 323
(ratha¡p niyyadayiihi 'ma¡p, Be so; Ce nlyadiyahi; Ee, Se
nlyadayahi; Thl-a 220,10: niyyadayiihi 'man ti imaJTI
ratha¡p brahma~iya niyyadehi, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nlyyadiyiihi .. . nlyyadehi); Ja I 281,23 (ima¡p yiithaJTI
tuyha¡p niyyademi); 385,19 (maharaja core amhakaJTI
niyyadetha mayaJTI taJT~ kiccaJTI sodhessama ti iiha);
V 258,5' (rajjaJTI niyyadayissiimi); Ap 39,12 (-essami, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se niyyadessiimi); 317,26 (upaqhanasa1a¡p
sukataJTI -enti taVaJTI, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niyyadenti);
Spk III 111,15 (dayajjaJTI -eti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
niyyadeti); Dhp-a I 139,25 (aha¡p bhikkhusanghaJTI
pariharissami niyyadetha me bhikkhusail.ghan ti, Be, Se
so; Ce, E e n!yiidetha); III 493,5 (ime diirake samill).assa
Gotamass' eva niyyadessama ti); It-a II 45,32 (ahaJTI
attana¡p buddhassa -emi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niyyademi);
Pv-a 25,23 (dadantl ti denti uddisanti -enti, Be, Se so; Ce
nlyyatenti; Ee nlyiidenti); 30,3 (dakkhi~a¡p dajja danaJTI
-eyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nlyateyya); Th-a Il 199,15
(aya¡p so bhante tumhe ayacitva 1addhadiirako, imaJTI
tumhiika¡p -ema ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nlyyatema ti);
Sadd 540,6foll. (yatadhatu ni-upasaggato paro patidane
vattati, -eti -ayati, takiirassa pana dakaratte kate
niyyadeti niyyadayati); part.pr. niyyatenta,
niyyadenta, mfn., Ja V 258,13 (rajja¡p niyyiidentassa);
Vism 115,27 (acariyassa -entenapi); Ps III 90,18 (attana¡p
-entena, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be niyyadentena); Mp IV 100,10
(sasabhiitena jalite aggikkhandhe attana¡p -entena, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se niyyadentena); Pj II 294,15 (tato ...
bhill).qagiiriko ... sapateyya¡p -ento, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nlyatento);- 3. answers; returns (to); sums up, restates
(the content of a previous question or discourse); PsI
206,2o (ettavata pi kho avuso ti desanaJTI -eti); -
part.pr. niyyatenta, niyyadenta, mfn., Sv 109,24 (evaJTI
pucchamiinenapi sabbaññutañ~am eva puqha¡p -entena
pi tad eva niyyatitaJTI, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niyyadentena
pi ... niyyadita¡p); 460,14 (ta¡p ettavata ti vutta¡p attha¡p
-ento, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niyyadento); 480,17
(anusandhidvayaJTI pi -ento iti kho bhikkhave ti adi¡p
iiha, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niyyadento); - aor. 3 sg.
(a) niyyatesi, niyyadesi, V in II 191,25 (Ajatasattussa
kumiirassa rajja¡p niyyadesi); Ja I 66,26 (bodhisattassa
sabba¡p issariya¡p niyyadesi); V 128,9 (ahaJTI mahallako
idiini tva¡p ime m~avake sikkhapehl ti pañcasate
m~avake pi tass' eva niyyadesi); Ap 241,11 (-esi, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be niyyadesi); Sv 268,21 (s!lavasen' eva -esi,
Be, Se so; Ce nlyyatesi; Ee nlyatesi); 976,15 (kasma pana
na -esi na uddharittha, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nlyyatesi);
Pv-a 42,31 (attano gehe issariya¡p niyyadesi, Be, Se so;
niyyadeti
Ce nlyyadesi; Ee nlyadesi); (b) niyyadayi, Bv 7:6
(aramlll!l ropayitvana buddhe niyyadayl tada, Be, Se so;
Ce niyadayi; Ee nlyadayl); 3 pl. (a) niyyatesuJ11,
niyyadesuJ11, Ja II 85,16 (poriit).akapaJ.!<;Iita pi danlll!l datva
evam evlll!l niyyadesun ti); Sv 481,21 (saka111 rajjlll!l
-esuJ11, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se niyyadesuJ11); Pj II 421,14
(tlll!l ... ekassa paribbajakassa -esuJ11, Be, Ce, E e so; Se
pa!iyadesuJ11); (b) niyyatayiJ11su, niyyadayi111su,
Pv 27:11 (-ayiJ11SU therassa, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
niyyadayi~su; Pv-a 184,11: ada111su); Mp V 58,7
(niyyadayi111su); - inf niyyadetUJ11, Vin II 261,14; Ja II
300,18 (go1_1e samikassa niyyadetu111 gehlll!l agamasi); -
absol. (a) niyyatetva, niyyadetva, Vin IV 54,15 (eso
bhaginiyo ovado ti niyyadetva, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nlyadetva); S IV 194,18 (yathabhütlll!l vacanlll!l -etva, Be
so; Ce niyyatetva; Ee niyyadetva; Se nlyadetva); A I
205,28 (gopalako sayaJ_lhasamaylll!l samikanaJ11 gavo
-etva, Be so; Ce nlyatetva; Ee, Se niyyadetva; Mp II
320.28: pa!icchapetva, eta vo gavo ti datva); III 225,4
(acariyassa acariyadhana111 niyyadetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nlyadetva); Vv-a 33,26 (therassa -etva, Be, Se so; Ce
nlyyatetva; Ee niyatetva); Mil 420,14 (puttassa rajja111
niyyadetva); Vism 115,11 (attana111 -etva,); 312,16 (so
attano bhogakkhandhaJ11 puttadarassa niyyadetva, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce n!yadetva); Sv 215,11 (sava<;l<;lhikaJ11 i1_1a111
-etva, Be so; Ce nlyyadetva; Ee, Se niyyadetva);
Th!-a l66,1o (puttlll!l ñat1na111 niyyadetva);
neg. aniyyatetva, aniyyadetva, V in IV 52,38 (ovadaJ11
aniyyadetva, Be Ee, Se so; Ce anlyadetva); Ja II 300,22
(aniyyadetva); Vism 115,15 (aniyyatetva); Sv 268,2o (Be,
Se aniyyatetva; Ce, Ee anlyatetva); (b) niyyatetvana,
niyyadetvana, Ap I06,16 (niyyadetvana); 271,7 (ku!iklll!l
-etvana, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se niyyadetvana);
(e) niyyatayitvana, niyyadayitvana, Ja VI 18,17* (ratha111
niyyadayitvana ana1_1o ehi sarathi) quoted Cp-a 225,3o*
(eds -ayitvana) and Sadd 540,9 (niyyadayitvana);
Bv 13:13 (niyyadayitvana); pass. part.pr.
niyyatiyamana, niyyadiyamana, mfn., Sv 976,16
(-iyamane pi uddhariyamane pi); Vv-a 190,19 (vihare ...
sailghassa niyyadiyamane, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nlyyadiyamane); pp niyyatita, niyyadita, mfn.,
l. handed back, restored; handed over, entrusted; given;
S IV 181,17 (-a bhante samikanlll!l gavo, Be so; Ce, Ee
niyyadita; Se niyyata; Spk III 43,3: Ee niyyadita ti
niyata; Be, Ce, Se niyyata ti -a); Ja II 301,2; Vism 115,21
(atta buddhanlll!l -o ti); PsI 60,26 (sailghassa niyyadito );
Mp I 15,15 (bhikkhusanghassa --tta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr
niyatitatta); Dhp-a I 158,1 (gopalakena niyyaditana111
gunnaJ11); Pv-a 196,6 (tena niyyaditlll!l dhanlll!l. Be, Se
so; Ce nlyyaditaJ11; Ee nlyaditaJ11); - neg. aniyyatita,
aniyyadita, mfn., Ja II 305,16 (gol_lanlll!l aniyyaditatta
go1_1a tava glva); Spk III 42,3o (gavlsu hi aniyyatitasu, Be,
Ce, Se so; E e anlyatitasu); - 2. answered; repeated,
restated; Spk II 19,15 (nanu e' ettha pa!ipada pucchitva
nibbanlll!l bhajitlll!l niyyatane pi pa!ipada va -a);
Vibh-a 12,20 (niyyatanaghane pi idaJ11 vuccati rüpaJ11
dure ti na -aJ11, kasma ... ); - fpp niyyatetabba,
niyyadetabba, mfn., V in II 95,21 (ta111 adhikarai_llll!l
avasikana111 bhikkhüna111 niyyadetabbaJ11); IV 52,14 (eso
bhaginiyo ovado ti niyyadetabbo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
602 niyyanika
nlyyadetabbo ); Vism 94,11 (navakamma111 sailghassa ...
niyyadetabbaJ11); 115,14 (buddhassa bhagavato atta
niyyatetabbo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nlyyatetabbo); - see
also niyyatta.
niyyadeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niyyateti.
niyyana (and ni yana, nlyyiit).a), n. [cf S., BHS niryiit).a],
going out, setting forth; (the way of) getting out, leaving
(sa111sara); Abh 395 (-a111 gamana111 yatra); DI 9,31
(raññaJ11 -a111 bhavissati rañña111 aniyyana111 bhavissati;
Sv 94,3ofoll.: asukadivase asukanakkhattena asukassa
nama rañño niggamana111 bhavissatl ti eva111 rajüna111
pavasagamanlll!l vyakaroti); Sn 170 (-lll!l pucchito brühi
kathlll!l dukkha pamuccati; Pj II 212,n: maggasacca111
pucchi, maggasaccena hi ariyasavako . . . magglll!l
bhavento 1okamha niyyati tasma -an ti vuccati); Ja VI
475,31* (uppade supine yutto -e ca pavesane; 476,6"joll.:
imina nakkhattena niyyayitabbaJ11 imina pavisitabban ti
janati); Nidd I 85,4 (-an ti paccetl ti; Nidd-a I 214,25:
nlyanan ti gahetva yatl ti yanlll!l -an ti va pa!ho, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se omit yatl ti; Ee nlyanan ti va); Pa!is I
!63,!3foll. (katame te -a, nekkhammlll!l ariyanlll!l -a111
tena ca nekkhammena ariya niyyanti; Pa!is-a469,26foll.:
0
-sankhatassa ariyamaggassa hetutta phalüpacarena
ar1yanaJ11 -a111); Nett 119,2o (tatr' idaJ11 -lll!l);
Vism 496,26* (magga añña111 na -lll!l aniyyano na capi
so); Sp 1315,4 (-a111 sinoti bandhati nivaretl ti setu);
Ud-a 188,22 (-an ti ca satiya ogahitabbaJ11 arammai_JaJ11
da!!habbaJ11, Be, Se so; Ce nlyyiit).anti; Ee nlyanan ti);
Pa!is-a 508,26 (anapanasatisamadhi yeva yava
arahattamagga -lll!l); 561,5 (tedhatu1okato -aya
niggamanaya slll!lvattanti); - aniyyana, n. and mfn.,
l. (n.) not setting forth; retuming; DI 9,31 (Sv 94,33: -an
ti vippavutthanlll!l puna agamanlll!l); - 2. (mjn.) not
being (the way of) leaving (sa111sara); Vism 496,26*
(magga añña111 na niyyana111 aniyyano na capi so).
niyyanika, niyanika (and nlyaniya ?), mfn. ffrom niyyana;
BHS niryiit).ika, nairyiit).ika], going out, setting forth;
being a good way, leading to good; conducive to leaving
(slll!lsara); Vin V 93,3 (yaya111 di!!hi ariya -a niyyati
takkarassa sammadukkhakkhayaya; Sp 1317,29: niyyatl
ti -a); DI 235,18 (aya111 añjasayano -o niyyati takkarassa
brahmasahavyataya; Sv 400,w: -o niyyatl ti niyyayanto
niyyati gacchanto gacchat! ti attho); III 120,16 (dhammo
ca svakkhato suppavedito -o upasamaslll!lvattaniko); SI
220,26* (atha dhamma111 sareyyatha -lll!l sudesitaJ11);
V 82,17 (bojjhailga ... -a niyyanti); Th418 (-o uttaral).O
taJ_lhamülavisosano; Th-a II 178,1: Slll!lsaracarakato
niyyanato -o); 1115 (bhavehi magglll!l amatassa pattiya
-lll!l; Th-a III 155,21: vagadukkhato niyyanavahlll!l);
Ja II 268,25 (-e buddhasasane pabbajitva); IV 452,26"
(sammadighi-saJ11yUttlll!l -lll!l pabbajja111 pabbaja);
Nidd I 103,5 (aya111 maggo -o); Dhs 277 (jhanlll!l
bhaveti -a111 apacayagamiJ11); 1288 (cattaro magga
apariyapanna ime dhamma -a; As 214,4foll.: 1okato
niyyati vagato niyyatl ti -aJ11, niyyati va etena ti -aJ11);
Nett29,11 ( 0 -1akkhai_Jo maggo); Th-ai 193,18
(dhammassa ca 0
-taJ11); II 89,34 (-am vata
buddhasasanlll!l, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nlyaniklll!l);
0
Pa!is-a 385.33 (maggass' eva kusa1atta -tta);
Sadd 804,17 foil. (niyatl ti nlyaniyo so eva nlkaragatassa
niyyiimaka
Ikarassa rassattaq¡ yakarassa ca dvittaq¡ katva dutiyassa
paua yakarassa kakaraq¡ katva -o ti bhavati); -
aniyyanika, mfn., not being a good way (to); not
conducive to leaving (saq¡sara); D III 119,4 (dhammo ca
durakkhato ... -o); Ja VI 287,16" (saggamagganaq¡
adayakaq¡ -aq¡); Dhs 1289 (katame dhamma -a);
Vibh 19,11; Ps III 58,4 (amhakaq¡ paua mahanigaJJthassa
katha -a ti); Sv 89,16 (--tta, Be, Se so; Ce aniyyanikatta;
Ee auiyanikatta) = Ps III 221 ,2o f. Spk III 294,3 (Be, Se
so; Ce auiyya~ikakathaq¡; Ee aniyanikatta) = Mp V
44,22; Thi-a l6l,22 (pasa~<;!a-vadanaq¡ --taq¡ dassetva).
niyyanitapannakare in Ee at Mp 1 319,16 is wr for
niyyatitapaJJ~akare (Be, Ce so).
2 gahetva paricarati); V 252,1* (yo ca dhammaq¡
niyyamaka, m., see sv niyamaka .
niyyayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niyyati.
niyyasa, m.n. [S. niryasa], any exudation (of plants or
trees); gum, resin; Abh 863; Vism 360,12 (na rukkhassa
paharadippadesa jananti amhesu -o thito ti na pi -o
janati ahaq¡ rukkhassa paharadippadesesu thito ti); Ps II
236,17 (yatha ... manussa ... pupphaq¡ va phalaq¡ va
-aq¡ va dabbasambharaq¡ va na haranti); Nidd-a I 434,18
(-aq¡ viya laggapanatthena palipo ); - ifc se e rukkha-.
niyyuha, se e sv niyyiiha.
niyyuhaka, see sv niyyiihaka.
niyyüsa, mfn., se e sv yiisa.
niyyüha, niyiiha, m.n. [S. niryiiha, nirvyiiha], l. a
projection, a projecting room; a pinnacle, a turret;
Abh 863 (sekhare ... -o); MI 253,R (pasadassa ekasataq¡
-aq¡ ekamekasmiq¡ -e satta satta kiitagarasatani);
Ap 1,21 (suvibhatta gharamukha -a sihapañjara, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se niyyuha; Ap-a 104,33: -a niggatapamukhasala
ca); 125,1 (cattari satasahassani -a ca sumapita, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se niyyuha); Sv-pt III 45,19 (niyiihani bahiini
niharitva katabbasenasanani duva<;l<;!hagehani ti vadauti);
- ifc see bhitti-; - 2. a door, a gate; Abh 863 (dvare
-o);- 3. a peg, a hook; Abh 863 (-o nagadautake);-
4. an exudation (ofplants or trees); Abh 863 (niyyase ...
-o).
niyyühaka, n. [niyyiiha + ka2], a turret; a projection;
Sp 1044,5 (pasadabhittito niggatesu o• -adisu, Be, Ce so;
Ee, Se niyyuhakadisu).
niyyojesi, niyyojesuq¡, se e sv niyuñjati.
nir- [ni 2 befare vowels],- most forms beginning nir- are
to be found under the primary word.
nirmpkaroti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nirailkaroti.
niragamil, aor. 3 sg. ofniggacchati qv.
niraggala, niragga!a, mfn., see sv aggala.
2
niraggika, mfn. [ni 2 + aggi + ka ; cf S. niragnika], free
from jire; - 0
'okasa, m., a place free from jire;
Mil 323,28 (puriso ... aggina <;layhamano vayamena tato
muñcitva -aq¡ pavisitva); 324,6 (yatha -o evaq¡
nibbanaq¡ datthabbaq¡).
nirañkaroti (also written niraq¡karoti), nirakaroti, pr. 3
sg. [S. nirakaroti], separates oneself from; repudiates;
rejects; removes; It 83,6* (tayo pana akusale nirakare;
It-a II 94,28: attauo sautanato nihareyya vinodeyya,
pajaheyya ti attho); Th-a III 191,3o (attauo gu~e puñchati
nirakaroti nama); Sadd 509,11 (nirakaroti);
absol. nirailkatva, nirakatva, Sn 315 (jativadaq¡
nirailkatva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nirakatva); 326 (thambhaq¡
603 nirati
nirailkatva nivatavutti); Pv 34:6 (atthaq¡ dhammaq¡
nirailkatva, Ce, Ee so; Be nirakatva; Se nirakatva;
Pv-a 211,25: cha<;!<;!etva pahaya); Th 478 (tato sattha
nirailkatva patisallanavutthito, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nirakatva; Th-a II 200,23: attaua samapaunaq¡ phala-
samapattiq¡ apanetva tato vutthaya; cf K.R. Norman,
2007, p. 225, who would read 'nirailkatva); Ja III 280,4*
(attaq¡ nirailkatva, Se so, me; Be, Ce, Ee nirailkatva;
280,9·: attanaq¡ cha<;!<;!etva); 466,2• (na kataq¡ ca
nirailkatva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikatvana, prob. wr;
466,w·: kataq¡ paua nipphaditaq¡ jhanasukhaq¡
nirailkatva vinasetva); IV 302,4* (nirailkatva aggim
adaya brahmaJJo; cf302,8· foil.: nirantaraq¡ katva aggiq¡
nirailkatva adhammam auuvattati; 252,6·: nirailkatva ti
attabhavato niliaritva); - pp nirañkata, nirakata, mfn.
(and n. ?) [S. niralqta], repudiated, rejected; removed;
(and rejection, removal; ?) Vin V 148,15 (saddhammehi
-o) quoted Sp 260,4 (Be, Se saddhamma hi -o; Ce, Ee
saddhammabhi -o); Th 1112 (cittena nita niraye -a, Ee,
Se so; Be, Ce nirakata; cfTh-a III 155,3: hitasukhato
nirakata hutva); Ja V 378,8* (adhammo me -o); Ps II
116,6 (tesaq¡ --tta bhinnatta, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nirakatatta); It-a I 168,18 (niharaJJaq¡ vinaso va ti idaq¡
nirakataq¡ nama; f. Ps 1 157,7: idaq¡ nirakaraJJaq¡ nama);
- anirakatajjhana, mfn. [cf S. auirakfta], who does not
repudiate or neglect jhana meditation; M 1 33,11 (PsI
157,6: bahi auihatajjhano avinasitajjhano va) = A V
131,14 f. It 39,11;- see also nirakaraua.
nirañkusa, mfn. [ni 2 + ailkusa; S. nir~kusa], unchecked,
uncontrolled; free; Ja V 119,25" (yaq¡ yaq¡ icchati taq¡
taq¡ karoti ... -o vi ya ca~<;!ahatthi hoti); Ps III 183,13
(seriviharena ti sacchaudaviharena 0 -viharena).
nirañgaJ]a, mfn. see sv ailga~a2 .
niraja, mfn., see sv raja(s).
2
nirajjati, pr. 3 sg. [pass. of ni + ajati; cf S. nirajati], is
driven out or away; Ja VI 502,34* (Vessantaro raja ...
samha ragha -ati; 504,24·: attauo ragha niggacchati;
cfSadd 479,wfoll.: rañja rage: rajjati ... upasaggavasena
añño attho bhavati samha ragha -ati); - aor.
1 sg. nirajji(q¡), Ja VI 505,17* (samha rattha nirajj' ahaq¡;
505,25·: nikkhanto ahaq¡); - nirajji in Ee, Se at Thi 93 is
prob. wr; Be, Ce na bujjhi 'haq¡; Thi-a 88,16: na bujjhiq¡
najaniq¡ ahaq¡, eds so.
nirata, mfn. [pp of *ni 1 + ramati; ts ], delighting in;
attached, devoted to; intent upon; SI 133,21* (agati
yattha Marassa tattha me -o mauo); Th 1212
(nibbanagamauaq¡ maggaq¡ tattha me -o mauo); Thi 201
(buddho dhammaq¡ me desesi tattha me -o mauo); Ja VI
37,8* (so tvaq¡ tatth' eva gacchahi yattha te -o mauo);
Ap 89,6 (sasaue -ass' ahaq¡ sailghassa lasu~aq¡ datva);
Pj II 335,24 (dhamme .. . rata -a appamatta
1
sataccanuyogino);- ifc see ekatta- (ekatta sv eka).
nirati, f. [ni 2 + rati], absence of delight or pleasure; Ps II
37,1 (0 -aghena nirassadaghena nirayo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
niratiyatthena) f. It-a I 102,3o; Patis-a 297,7 (sukha-
sailkhato ayo ettha natthi ti nirayo, o -atthena pi nirayo) =
As 387,17; - 0
-jatika, mfn., being essentially the
absence of pleasure; Thi-a 63,27 (tvaq¡ yaq¡
kamaratiq¡ . . . vadasi sa dani mama --tta rni!hasadisa,
 niratta
Be, Ee, Se so; Ce arati-).
niratta 1, n. niratta(n), m. [from ni 2 + atta(n); ? cf S.
niratman], the lack of an enduring self; ? the letting go
(of an enduring self);? Sn 787 (attarp -arp na hi tassa
atthi, Ce, Ee, Se so, prob to niratta2; Be atta -a; Nidd I
82,24foll.: atta ti sassatadighi natthi -a ti ucchedadighi
natthi atta ti gahitarp natthi -a ti muñcitabbarp natthi;
Pj II 523,9 foil.: tassa hi attaditthi va ucchedaditthi va
natthi, gahal).amuñcanarp va pi attanirattasaññitarp
natthi) i= 858 (Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atta va pi -a va); 919
(natthi atta kuto -arp va, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -a).
niratta2 , mfn., pp ofnirassati qv.
nirattha, mfn., see sv attha2.
niratthaka, mf( -a, -ika)n. [nirattha + ka2], unprofitable;
useless; meaningless; -ena, -arp, adv., uselessly; to no
purpose; Abh 715; D III 186,7 (-ena sañgal).hati); Th 569
(pütikayo -o; Th-a II 244,26: -o ti nippayojano); Th! 393
(sañña manusika niratthika, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se pañña);
Ja II 71,2 (aho papajanassa nama kato upakaro -o ti);
IV 108,17 (na -ena attharp nasemi); 128,16" (0 -tta
paridevitassa); 214,9 (mayharp suriyena saddhirp
javanarp nama -arp); 304,15" (nibbanappattito paghaya
jati nama -a ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce niratthika); Ap 437,23
(vanavaso -o); 503,1 (apattharp va -arp); Mi1152,s
(parittabhesajjakiriya niratthika ti); Sv 12,17 (na hi
tathagata ekavyañjanarp pi -am vadanti); 403,3 ( 0 -ttarp);
422,11 (abhisamaye asati -o buddhuppado aniyyanikarp
sasanarp hoti); 737,26 (aññesarp vacanarp mogharp
tuccharp -an ti); V v-a 324,9 (-arp ajahane rodati); -
0
-tara, mfn., more useless; Ja III 166,29·; - see also
niratthiya (sv atthiya).
niradhipati, mfn., see sv niradhipati.
niradhipatika, mfn., se e sv niradhipatika.
nirantara, mfn. [ni 2 + antara; ts], having no interval,
having no space (between); clase, dense, compact;
crammed full; continuous, uninterrupted; Abh 707 ( -arp
ghanarp); J a 1 460,26 (pub be amhakarp ayarp asayo na
ppahoti -a tighama); IV 267,27 (manusse bahaya baharp
dhanuna dhanurp ahacca -e !hite disva); 490,1o (assamo
-o paripüri); Bv 5:4 (-arp aku!i1arp ujurp ... mapesi so
mahav!thirp); Mi1238,2 (so dhato pll).ito paripUI).l).O -o);
382,15 (pa!havl -a acchidda asusira bahala ghana); Ps IV
156,1 (nirayo ... sattehi -o); 236,4 (jalanarp -taya avlci
0
nama); - nirantararp, nirantarena, adv., with no
interval; always, continuously; completely; immediately;
Ja I 2,29 (kiñcapi [Sumedhakatha] buddhavarpse -arp
agata yeva); 33,6 (sakalasarlrarp pañcaval).l).aya pltiya
-arp phutarp ahosi); 227,34 (seghino pi -arp danarp
dentassa); 283,18 (-arp avadetva maggapa!ipanna-
issarabherirp viya antarantara vadehl ti); Ap 563,1o
(sasamayarp acikkhirpsu -arp); Cp 2:2:8 (-arp jatisatarp
cajeyyarp mama jlvitarp); Vism 279,23 (kammaghanarp
-arp pavattarp viya upaghati); Nidd-a I 153,24
(niccadubbala ti -ena dubbala); 188,5 (yatha nama
kakal).!ako thokarp gantva thokarp tinhati na -arp
gacchati); Ap-a 208,33 (tapaso sattaharp -arp satthu
pupphacchattarp dharento atthasi); Bv-a 257,24 (-an ti
satatarp sabbakalarp); Mhv 22:3 (-arp).
nirapekkha, mfn., see sv apekkha.
nirabbuda\ mfu., see sv abbuda.
604 niraya
nirabbuda 2 , n.m. [cf abbuda], l. (n.) a certain high
numeral; a great number (ofyears); Abh 475 (abbudarp
ca -arp); S 1 143,14* (satarp sahassanarp -anarp ayurp
pajanami tavaharp brahme) = Ja III 360,3* (360,12·: vlsati
abbudani ekarp -arp); A V 171,23* (-anarp) = Sn660;
Sadd 801 ,27; - 2. (m.) [BHS nirarbuda], the name of a
hell, or place in Avlci, where one suffers for a nirabbuda
ofyears; SI 152,8 (seyyatha pi bhikkhu vlsati -a niraya
evarp eko ababo nirayo) = A V 173,11 = Sn p. 126,14
quoted Sadd 802,22.
niraya, m. (and n.) [ts], l. a place or state of punishment
and torture (after death); hell, a hell; Abh 656 (-o);
Vin III 20,37 (kayassa bheda pararp maral).a apayarp
duggatirp vinipatarp -arp upapajjeyya); 105,32 (bahüni
vassasatasahassani -e paccitva); D III 234,8 (pañca
gatiyo, -o tiracchanayoni pettivisayo manussa deva;
Sv 1026,25: -o ti nirassado, sahokasena khandha kathita)
i= MI 73,18 (Psii 37,2: nirati-anhena nirassada!!hena
-o); M II 186,31 (tam enarp adhammacariya-
visamacariyahetu -arp o -pala upaka~~heyyurp); 193,26
(-a ... tiracchanayoni seyyo ti); III 167,2o (na sukararp
akkhanena papul).iturp yava dukkha -a); SI 152,6foll.
(eko abbudo -o ... ; Spk I 218,31: abbudo nama
pa!iyekko -o natthi, avlcimhi yeva pana
abbudagananaya paccitabba!!hanass' etarp namarp,
nirabbudadlsu pi es' eva nayo); A III 213,19* (-esu
bhayarp disva papani parivajjaye); IV 228,2* (khal).atlta
hi socanti -amhi samappita); Dhp 311 (samaññarp
dupparamagharp -ay' upaka<Nhati); Sn 248 (patanti
satta -arp avarpsira); Vv 52:24 (khipirpsu -e ghore
uddhapadarp avarpsirarp); Pv 35:6 (paccama -e bhusarp;
Pv-a 214,15: ba1avadukkhataya pettivisayarp 0 -sadisarp
katva aha); Th 304 (adhammo -arp neti dhammo papeti
suggatirp); Th! 456 (na ca vinipatagatanarp pabbajja atthi
-esu); Ja IV 118,17* (ye kame patisevanti -arp te
upapajjare); V 144,7* (etani sutva -ani pal).qito aññani
papitthatarani e' ettha); 266,15* (ice ete agha -a akkhata
duratikkama akinna luddakammehi pacceka
sojasussada); 391,24 (marp -a uddharitva sagge
patighapetukama ti); VI 97,7 (devaloko paripüri -o
tuccho viya ahosi); 136,30* (-an' eso maggo; 137,3·:
nirassadatthena -anarp catunnarp apayanarp esa maggo);
248,24* (ul).ho ca vato -amhi dussaho ); Nidd 1 132,14
(nerayikanarp -o bhavanarp); Pa!is I 140,21 (miccha-
dighikassa purisapuggalassa dve va gatiyo -o va
tiracchanayoni va); Ap 516,2 (mahabhitaparp dukkharp
ghorarüparp sudarul).arp -arp nuna gacchami); Bv 2:92
(-e pi dasasahassl aggl nibbanti tavade); Mil108,13
(Devadatto pabbajitva sangharp bhindissati sañgharp
bhinditva kapparp -e paccissatl ti); Vism 427,25
(nirayaggahal).ena av!ci-adi-anekappakararp -am eva ti);
Sv 510,21 ( -esu hi kesañci gavutarp kesañci
a~~hayojanarp kesañci yojanarp attabhavo hoti); It-a II
118,14foll. (-an ti aghavidharp mahanirayarp
sojasavidharp ussadanirayan ti sabbarp pi -arp);
Pa!is-a 297,7 (sukhasañkhato ayo ettha natth! ti -o);
Saddh 7 (karento kammakaral).arp -e atidarul).arp
bhayanakarp bhusarp ghorarp); - ifc see ussada-,
gütha-, paccana-, maha- (sv maha[t]); - 2. something
like a hell: a pit; a womb; Ja I 233,9* (añgarakasuya ta!e
nirayikena
~hatva ... aha kama~p patami -a~p uddhapado ava~psiro);
III 243,17* (so ghorariipa~p -a111 upeti subhasubha111
muttakarisapüra~p; 243,2s·: matukucchi hi
nirassadaghena idha -o vutto); 438,4 (sataporise -e
khipi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se narake); -
0
-gamaniya,
2
0
-gamaniya, -gaminiya, mfn. [niraya + gamaniya ],
0
leading to hell; A II1 414,16 (atthi bhikkhave asava -a,
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se 0 -gamaniya) quoted Sv 989,12 (eds
0
-gaminiya), PsI 62,w (Be, Ce, Se -gaminiya; Ee
0
0
-gamaniya), Mp JI 183,31 (eds -gaminiya), It-a I 115,3
0
(Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -gaminiya) andAs 369,34 (Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee 0 -gaminiya); Mp III 124,17 (-assa kammassa);-
0 1
-gami(n), mfn. [niraya + gami(n) ], going to hell; MI
73,2o (niraya111 e' aha111 ... pajanami -i111 ca magga~p
-ini111 ca pa~ipada~p); Sn 277 (na janati magga111 -ina~p);
Ja IV 54,s· (papan! ti sabbani pi -Ini lamakakammani,
Ce, Ee so; Se -ini; Be -i-kammani); Dhp-a III 300,11
(devata ... cinte si aya111 bhikkhu silava sacaha~p ima111
maressami -ini bhavissami); Saddh 285 (-issa jantuno);
-
0
-gaminiya, mfn., see above sv 0 -gamaniya; -
0 4
-pa, m. [niraya + pa ], a guard, torturer, in hell;
Abh 658 (kar~iko -o);- -pala, m., a guard, torturer,
0
in hell; D JI 322.16 (niraya111 upapanna labhissanti -esu
agamentu tava bhavanto -a yava ... ; Sv 809,26: -esü ti
niraye kammakarm;tikasattesu); M JI 187,5 (atha kho na~p
vikandanta~p yeva niraye -a pakkhipeyyu111); III 166,19
(tam ena~p ... -a pañcavidhabandhana~p nama kar~a111
karonti); A I 138,13 (tam ena111 . . . -a nanabahasu
gahetva Yamassa rañño dassenti; Mp JI 227,24foll.:
ekacce thera -a nama natthi, yantarüpa111 viya kammam
eva kar~a111 kareti ti vadanti, ta111 . . . abhidhamme
pa~isedhitam eva, yatha hi manussaloke
kammakara1_1akaraka atthi evam eva niraye -a atthi ti);
Ja V 145,17" (tatra ta111 -a jalitehi avudhehi kogetva
jalita~p ayapabbata111 aropenti); 274,2· (rakkhasa ti -a);
VI 249,23" (Yamassa vacanakarehi -ehi ti attho ).
nirayikena in Ee at Nidd JI 199,s is prob. wr for
nerayikena (Be, Ce, Se so).
2
nirava, mfn., see sv rava .
1 2
niravaija, mfn., see sv avajja •
1
nirasa, mfn., se e sv rasa .
nirasana, n. [ts], rejection; sptttzng out; Abh 775
(paccadeso -a~p); Sadd 489,11 (khivu -e).
2 2 1
nirasanavasana, mfn., [ni + asana + vasana ], lacking
food and clothing; Ja IV 128,3· (-ana111 dajiddana111, Ce,
Ee so; Be niddhananam; Se niravasesanam).
2
nirassajati, pr. 3 sg. [~i + a + sajati ; ?. cfSadd index:
2
conflation of S. nirasyati and niJ:lsr.jati], lets go; Sn 791
(te uggahayanti -anti; Nidd I 92,6: g~hanti ca muñcanti
ca).
nirassati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nirasyati], throws off; lets go;
drives away; Sn 785 (-ati adiyati cea dhamma~p); 954
(nadeti na -ati; Pj JI 569,16foll.: rüpadisu kiñci
dhamma111 na g~hati na nissajjati); Nidd I 76,28foll.
(satthara111 -ati dhammakkhana111 -ati ... , Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr nidassati; Nidd-a I 205,19: -ati ti ni-assati
vikkhipati; Sadd 490,2: -ati ti chacNeti satthara~p); PsI
80,15 (sltadayo dhamme ... na asahamana hutva -ati);-
part.pr. nirassanta, mfn., Pj JI 522,19 (-anto ca adiyanto
ca) = Nidd-a I 204,27; - aor. 3 sg. nirassi, Sp 136,2 (te
605 nirasasa
tape assi -i pahasi vidha111sesi ti tapassi); -
pp niratta 2 , mfn. [S. nirasta], thrown off; let go; Sn 787
(atta111 -a~p na hi tassa atthi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be atta -a;
Nidd I 82,25 foil.: -a ti ucchedadighi natthi . . . -a ti
muñcitabba~p natthi; Pj JI 523,9 foil.: tassa hi attadighi
va ucchedadighi va natthi, gah~amuñcana~p va pi
attanirattasaññita111 natthi); 858 (atta~p va pi -a111 va na
tasmi111 upalabbhati, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce atta va pi -a va);
919 (natthi atta kuto -a~p va, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce -a); 1098
(uggahlta~p -a111 va ma te vijjittha kiñcana111; Pj JI
598,18: -am va nirassitabbam va, muñcitabban ti vuttam
hoti); . see also nir~tta ; -
1
JPp nirassitabb~,
nirasitabba, mfn., Pj JI 598,18: (nirassitabba~p, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nirasitabba111) Nidd-a JI 45,29 (eds
nirassitabbam).
nirassasaka, ~ftz. [ni + assasa + ka ], (consisting in) not
2 2
breathing; Ps JI 289,7 ([jhana111l app31_1akan ti -a~p).
nirakati,f [S. niriikrti], rejection, contradiction; Abh 775
(paccakkhana111 -i).
nirakaral}a, n. [ts], removing; repudiating; PsI 157,7
(nihar~avinasanattha~p hi ida111 -a111 nama) = Nidd-a I
405,21; - anirakaral}a, n., not repudiating, not
rejecting; ? Sadd 693,26 (kiñci diyamanassa -ena
sampadanasañña~p labhati yatha buddhassa puppha111
dadati).
nirakaroti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nirañkaroti.
nirakula, mfn., see sv akula.
niraga, mfn., see sv raga.
2
niradhipati, niradhipati, mfn. [ni + adhipati], without a
controller; without a dominant influence; Tikap-a 255,23
(sabbe pi kusaladayo -ino); 289,21 (pa~hamani nava
[gha~anani] -Ini pacchimani cha sadhipatini, Be, Ce, Se
so; E e niradhipatini).
2
niradhipatika, niradhipatika, mfn. [niradhipati + ka ],
without a controller; without a dominant influence;
As 289,15 (chandadina111 pana aññatara~p dhura~p katva
anuppadaniyatta -an' eva etani ti, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee
niradhipatikan'); Tikap-a 289,22foll.; 290,17 (dutiya111
-am).
2
nirapattika, mfn. [ni + apatti + ka ], free from offence;
Ps III 153,24 (apattibahulo ti sapattikakalo v'assa bahu
2
suddho 0 -kalo appo ti attho); Kkh 13,23 (dve -a honti);
- se e also anapattika, sapattika.
nirabadha, mfn., see sv abadha.
2
nirabhoga, mfn., see sv abhoga .
2
niramagandha, mfn., see sv ama •
nirayattavutti(n), mfn., see sv ayatati.
1
nirarambha\ mfn., see sv arambha •
2 2 2
nirarambha , mfn. [ni + arambha ; by cts also
2 1
interpreted as ni + arambha ], without killing; free from
slaughter; A JI 42,24 (aha~p brahma1_1a -a~p yañña~p
V~I_lemi yadidal11 niccadana~p; Mp m 83,19: -an ti
p3I_lasamarambharahita111); S I 76,24* (ye ca yañña -a;
Spk I 146,11: -a ti appagha appakicca).
1
nirasa, mfn., se e sv asa •
nirasaipsa, mfn., see sv nirasasa.
nirasañka, mfn., see sv asailka.
2
nirasasa (and nirasa111sa, nirasasa), mfn. [ni + *asasa,
*asasa = asa111sa ?; cf Pkt 1_1irasa~psa], without desire;
without expectation; Dhp 41 O (nirasasa111 visa111yutta111,
nirikkhita
Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nirasayarp; Dhp-a IV 185,Js: nirasasan
ti nittal).harp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nirasayan ti); Sn 369 (so
-o anasasano, Se so; Be niraso; Ce, Ee nirasayo); 1090
(-o so uda asasano, Be, Ce, Se so; E e nirasayo) = Nidd II
31,27* (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nirasarpso) = Pj II 597,4 (eds
-o); Nidd II 186,29 (-o sabbaloke bhavitva ti asa vuccati
tal).ha, Be, Ce, Se so; ad Sn 56: eds nirasayo; Nidd-a II
137,18: -o ti nittai).hO, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nirasayo ti; Pj II
l08,18: nirasayo ti nittal).ho ).
nirikkhita, mfn., or nirikkhita(r), m. [pp or agent noun of
*ni2 + ikkhati; cf S. niñk~ate, nirlk~aka, nirlk~in],
looking, who looks; Ap 497,2o (yugamattarp -arp tarp
disva, Ee so, perhaps wr; Ce yugamattanirikkhakarp; Be
nidakkhitarp; Se udikkhatarp).
niri.ühati in Ee at Sv 800,36 is wr for nirujjhati (Be, Ce, Se
so).
niriha, mfn., se e sv !ha.
nirihaka, mfn. [nirlha + ka2; cf BHS nirlhaka], without
activity; motionless; Ap 534,9 (ka!ebare . . . parayatte
-e); Vism 594,33joll. (yatha daruyantarp suññarp
nijjlvarp -arp . . . evam idarp namarüparp pi suññarp
nijjlvarp -arp); It-a II 51 ,Jo (-esu pi saii.kharesu); Pj Il
250,9 (mato ti aniccatarp dasseti setl ti o -ttarp).
nirujjanaka- in Ee at Spk II 41,19 is wr for nirujjhanaka-
(Be, Ce, Se so).
nirujjhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf*nirundhati, S. nivlrudh], ceases;
stops; is no more; dies; DI 180,32foll. (sahetii ...
sappaccaya purisassa sañña uppajjanti pi -anti pi, sikkha
eka sañña uppajjati sikkha eka sañña -ati, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee eka sañña -anti); 215,24 (kattha nu kho ime cattaro
mahabhiita aparisesa -anti); III 196,22* (yassa
e' uggacchamanassa sarpvarl pi -ati); M I 239,16 (tassa
sa sukha vedana -ati); 264,27 foil. (imasmirp asati idarp
na hoti imassa nirodha idarp -ati . . . jatinirodha
Jaramaral).arp sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupayasa
-anti evarp etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho
hoti); 302,4 (saññilvedayitanirodharp samapajjantassa ...
bhikkhuno pa!hamarp -ati vaclsaii.kharo tato
kilyasaii.kharo tato cittasaii.kharo ti); SI 6,s• (anicca
sabbasarikhara .. . uppajjitva -anti); 134,29* (evarp
khandha ca dhatuyo cha ca ayatana ime heturp pa~cca
sambhiita hetubhaii.ga -are); 135,9* (kuvarp satto
samuppanno kuvarp satto -ati); II 97,12 (ya tajja usma sa
-ati sa viipasammati); III 141,6 (udake bubbu!arp
uppaJJatl e' eva -ati); V 230,27 (imani kho cha
indriyani ... aparisesa -issanti); A V 9,28 (sakalikaggissa
jhayamanassa añña va acci uppajjati añña va acci -ati);
Th 227 (susukharp vata nibbanarp .. . yattha dukkharp
-ati); Ja III 181,19' (mayharp pi imarp sokarp dhareturp
asakkontiya jlvitarp -atl ti); IV 284,w• (pill,la me Cande
-anti); Pa!is I 193,6 (katamehi agh' akarehi avijja -ati);
Mil 31,29 (kinti maharaja idarp dukkharp -eyya aññarp
ca dukkharp na uppajjeyya ti etadattha maharaja
amhakarp pabbajja); 42,13 (moho kho maharaja ñill,le
uppannamatte tatth' eva -atl ti); Vism 506,29
(samudayanirodhena dukkhanirodho samudaya-
nirodhena hi dukkharp -ati na aññatha); 614,2
(bhavaii.gacittarp uppajjitva -ati); 646,12 (ama saii.khara
niruddha paccuppannani -anti anagata -issantl ti);
Sp 218,7 (nibbanarp ... y asma pana tarp agamma sabbaso
606 nirujjhati
tal).ha khayarp gacchati VIraJJati -ati ca tasma
tal).hakkhayo virago nirodho ti vuccati); Ud-a 47,9
(imassa avijjadikassa paccayassa nirodha . . . idarp
saii.kharadikarp phalarp -ati na ppavattatl ti attho ); Th-a I
187,3 (ime pana khandha ... anupadano viya jatavedo
carimakacittanirodhena appa!isandhika -antl ti); -
part.pr. (a) nirujjhanta, mfn., As 409,17 (khlyante -ante
viipasamente ... , E e so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce, Se
khl1,1ante niruddhante viipasamante ... ); Saddh 606
(cittarp ... uppajjitva -antarp api dipasikha viya); -
neg. anirujjhanta, mfn., Nidd-a I 148,!4 (anirujjhante);
(b) nirujjhamana, mfn., D II 310,9 (tal).ha ... kattha
-amana -ati); S II 17,18 (dukkham eva uppajjamanarp
uppajjati dukkharp -amanarp -ati); Vism 630,2! (vi1,1ilya
vadiyamanaya uppannasaddassa . . . na -amanassa
disavidisagamanarp atthi); - aor. 3 sg. (a) nirujjhi, Ja I
l80,2o (so .. . -i, raja tassa sañrakiccarp karetva ... );
Kv 456,3o (uppanno phasso ma -I ti labbha iddhiya
paggahetun ti); (b) nirujjhittha, Yam I 32,J4foll.; -
absol. nirujjhitva, Mp II 223,24; - pp niruddha, mfn.
and n. [cf S. niruddha], l. (mfn.) (i) ceased; no more;
D II 198,18 (sabbe te sarikhara ama -a vipari1,1ata);
III 266,7 (pa!hamajjhanarp samapannassa kamasañña -a
hoti); MI 296,13foll. (yvayarp ... mato kalakato tassa
kayasaii.khara -a . . . vacisaii.khara -a . . . cittasaii.khara
-a ... ); S III 112,21 (riiparp kho avuso aniccarp yad
aniccarp tarp dukkharp yarp dukkharp tarp -arp tarp
attharigatarp; Spk II 311,9: añño satto nirujjhanako nama
natthi); IV 217,sfoll. (pa!hamarp jhanarp samapannassa
vaca -a hoti ... khll,lasavassa bhikkhuno rago -o hoti
doso -o hoti moho -o hoti); Pa!is I 185,23 (-e pi o!arike
sadde); Dhs 1038 (dhamma ama -a vigata vipari1,1ata ...
Be, Ce, Se so; Ee niruddhaii.gata, prob. wr); Kv 38,wfoll.
(micchildi!!hiya -aya micchadighiyo puggalo -o ti
vattabbo ti); 152,18 (nanu anta avipakkavipaka dhammil
-a ti); Vism 238,18 (ekacittakkhal).ikarp sattanarp jivitarp
tasmirp citte --matte satto -o ti vuccati); 460,!8 foll. (yo
pan' ettha arahattarp papu1,1ati tassa cuticitte -e
[cittasantanarp] -am eva hot! ti); 603,22 (ye atlte
kammapaccaya nibbatta khandha te tatth' eva -a,
antakammapaccaya pana imasmirp bhave aññe khandha
nibbatta); Ps II 348,3 (vijjuppadena avijja -a va hoti);
Pa!is-a 688,3 (santanavasena punappunarp anuppattiya
-arp); Sadd 488,9* (--tte); - neg. aniruddha, mfn., MI
454,29 t A IV 450,!; Kv 117,6 (paccuppannarp atthi
paccuppannarp aniruddharp avigatarp ... ); Vism 644,!8
(aniruddham eva nirujjhati); Sp 499,!3* (aniruddhamhi
pa!hame na uppajjati pacchimarp); Spk III 95,6 (keci
nirodhasamapannassa cittasaii.kharo niruddho ti vacanato
cittarp aniruddharp hoti tasma sacittaka pi ayarp pana
samapattl ti vadanti); Mp III 151,Jo (aniruddhatta); -
(ii) dead; Ja IV 234,26 (maharaja tava nago -o aññarp
hatthirp saii.kama ti); VI 82,23 (so -o dani Samo ti);
Dhp-a III 79,22 (-a saml ti); - (iii) checked, held back,
obstructed; Mp IV 51,2 (dhammakarake -arp viya
udakarp hoti); Dhp-a III 47,4 (satthu bhikkhacara-
maggassa --velaya); - 2. (n.) cessatíon; As 409,17 (tarp
tarp maggaphalañill,larp pana tesarp tesarp kilesanarp
khi1,1ante niruddhante viipasamante ... uppannan ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nirujjhante ... uppannatta); - caus. fut.
nirujjhana
1 sg. nirujjhapessfuni (and niruddhapessiimi ?), Spk I
164,3o (sa katha niruddhaq1 na gaccheyya ... t~
nirujjhapessiimi ti, Ce so; Ee niruddhapessiimi ti, wr ?;
Be nijjhattiq1 na gaccheyya ... n~ nijjhapessiimi ti; Se
nijjhaggiq1 ... nijjhapessami ti);- see also nirodheti.
nirujjhana, n. ffrom nirujjhati], ceasing; being no more;
Ja V 239,26" (yato taq1 tiip~ sambhoti 0 -kale tatth' eva
gacchati); Spk 1I 34,11 (nirodhaya ti o• -atthaya);
Nidd-a II 2,14 (bhañgato -~ paññayati); 3,27 (nirodhena
ti . . . abhabbuppattikavasena -ena); Vibh-a 26,10
(so)asann~ cittanaq1 uppajjitva -~);
anirujjhana, n., not ceasing; Yam-a 104,8
(kusaliikusaliinaq1 ekato -ato).
nirujjhanaka, mfn. [nirujjhana + ka2 ], ceasing; about to
cease; Vism 707,28 (sattiihabbhantare -e ayusañkhare
anavajjitva); Sp 438,29 (pavattitva -~); Spk II 311,9
(y~ dukkh~ tad eva niruddhaq1 añño satto -o niima
natthi); Mp I 59,12 (lahuq1 uppajjitva lahuq1 -~).
nirutta, n. [S. nirukta], an explanation of the form of a
word (by connecting it with a root, or with an operation
such as elision or metathesis); grammatical analysis;
Nidd-a I 264,13* (Va!).l).agamo Va!).l).avipariyayo ca dve
Capare Va!).l).avikiiranasa dhatilnaq1 atthatisayena yogo
tad uccate pañcavidh~ -~, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se val).l).a-
vipariyayo ... niruttiq1; cf Kasikavrtti ad Piil). 6:3:109:
tad ucyate pañcavidh~ nirukt~) = Sadd 877,11*
quoted Ap-a 102,18; Sadd 336,13 (nirutti -~ neruttaq1);
-se e also nirutti, nerutta.
niruttara, mfn., se e sv uttara 1.
nirutti, f [cf S. nirukta, nirukti], l. (i) the explanation or
interpretation ofwords (one ofthe Vediiil.gas); Abh 110
( ... sikkha -i ca chandoviciti); Sadd 504,17 (aHhiirasa
mahasippiini suti ... chandoviciti -i jotisatth~ ... );
Sv 247,26 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkha ca -i ca);
Pv-a 97,27 (in cpd); - (ii) [BHS nirukti] an explanation
of the form of a word (by connecting it with a root, or by
operations such as elision or metathesis); Patis II 193,29
(tassa atthe ca dhamme ca -iya ca patibhiine ca na añño
koci sakkoti abhisambhavituq1); Ap 502,25 (-iya ca
kusalo nigha!).gumhi visiirado ); Nett 4,28* (akkhar~
pad~ vyañjan~ -i tath' eva niddeso); 105,5
(rakkhitaq1 paripiiliyati ti esa -i); Mil 340,5 (yo koci
m~ -patisambhide pañhaq1 pucchissati tassa -iya -iq1
0
kathayissiimi); Sp 111,14 (brahm~ al).ati ti briihma!).o ...
idam eva hi jatibriihma!).iinaq1 °-vacanaq1 ariya pana
biihitapapatta briihma!).a ti vuccanti); 243,26 (bhikkhako ti
iidayo 0 -vasena vutta); Nidd-a I 3,20 (phusati ti phasso
vedayati ti vedana ti niharitva vacan~ -i nama) f.
Sadd 907,2tfoll.; Nidd-a I 5,14 (bhagava akkharehi
sailkaseti ... -ihi uttiinikaroti ... ); 264,13* (Va!).l).agamo
Va!).l).avipanyayo ca dve capare Va!).l).avikaranasa
dhatiln~ atthatisayena yogo tad uccate pañcavidh~
-iq1, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce niruttaq1; = Sadd 877,lt*:
niruttam; cfKiiSikavrtti adPal). 6:3:109: tad ucyate
pañcavidh~ niruktam); Ap-a 128,15 (Va!).l).agamo ti
iidina o -nayena ikiirassa antaq1 puttasaddassa ca lopaq1
katva); As 51,34 (abhisañkharonti ti kho bhikkhave tasma
saiikhara ti evaq1 niddhiiretva sahetuk~ katva
vuccamiina abhilapa -i niima, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee omits -i
niima) = Sadd 911,22; Sadd 907,3 (akkharaq1 pad~
607 nirupadhika
vyañjanaq1 iikiiro -i niddeso ti cha vyañjanapadiini); -
2. an expression; aform ofwords; a way of speaking; an
altemative terminology, a gloss; Vin II 139,7 (bhikkhil
niiniiniima niinagotta niinajacca niiniikula pabbajita te
sakaya -iya buddhavacanaq1 dilsenti, handa may~
bhante buddhavacan~ chandaso iiropema ti;? cfSp
1214,t8: ettha saka -i niima sammasambuddhena
vuttappakiiro Magadhikavohiiro; J. Brough, 1980,
pp. 35-36; and K.R. Norman, 1980, pp. 61-63); Nidd I
124,19 (puriso ti saiikha samañña ... niimadheyy~ -i
vyañjanaq1 abhilapo); Dhs 1307 (ya tes~ tes~
dhammiin~ sailkha samañña paññatti vohiiro nfunaq1
namakamm~ namadheyy~ -i vyañjan~ abhilapo
ime dhamma -1; As 391,18: niimakamman ti
niimakara!).~ nfunadheyyan ti namathapanaq1 -i ti
niimanirutti); Vibh 295,4 (yaya -iya tes~ dhammiin~
paññatti hoti); Sv 382,15 (yasmiq1 samaye khir~ hoti na
tasmiq1 samaye dadhi ti . . . sailkh~ -iq1 nfun~
vohiir~ gacchati); - ifc see sabhava-; - 3. a
particular terminology or way of speaking; a dialect; a
language; Sp 1214,18 (ettha saka -i nama
sammasambuddhena vuttappakiiro Magadhikavoharo );
1377,9 (na o -kusalo ti bhasantaravohiire na kusalo );
Mhv 37:175 (suttani parivattesi Sihalaya -iya); 244
(parivattesi sabba pi Sihalatthakatha tada sabbes~
millabhasaya Magadhaya -iya); - ifc see janapada-; -
0
-patisambhidii,f, -a, n., analytic knowledge or
understanding of the form of words, of expressions;
Vin V 197,8 (na --ppatto hoti); A II 160,33; Patis I 88,4
(niruttiniinatte pañña -e ñiil).aq1); 119,26 (nirutnsu ñan~
-a); II 150,25 (pañca dhamme sandassetuq1
vyañjananiruttabhilapa ... -aya iiramma!).a e' eva honti
gocara ca); Vibh 293,7 (dhammaniruttabhilape ñiil).~
-a); Pet 33,24; - 0 -patha, m. (and mfn. ?), a way of
speaking; an expression; (merely using an expression; ?)
Vin III 57,22 (maya avahatan ti ... -o ahaq1 bhagava ti,
anapatti bhikkhu -e ti; Sp 374,18: -e ti vohiiravacana-
matte anapatti ti attho); D II 63,29; S III 71,15 (tayo ... -a
adhivacanapatha paññattipatha; Spk II 279,5foll.); -
dunnirutti,f, a wrong interpretation; bad grammar;
Sadd 301,12 (ariya -iq1 na vadanti); - see also nirutta,
nerutta, neruttika.
*nirundhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni.Jrudh], holds back, represses;
stops; - aor. 3 sg. nirundhi, Cp-a 220,3o (assasapassase
-i); -pass. aor. 3 sg. nirodhi, Ud 93,12* (abhedi kayo
nirodhi sanna; Ud-a 433,19 foll.: sabba pi sañña
appatisandhikena nirodhena nirujjhi);
fpp nirundhitabba, mfn., Sv 352,4 (cakkhu niima na
-itabb~, cakkhuna manap~ rüpaq1 datthabban ti); -
see also nirujjhati.
nirupaghata, mfn., se e sv upaghata 1.
2
nirupajjhayaka, mfn. [ni2 + upajjhaya + ka ], without a
preceptor; without a sponsor; Sp 1025,13 (upajjhaq1
agiihapetva -o na upasampadetabbo); - see also
anupajjhayaka.
nirupadhi, mfn., see sv upadhi 1.
2
nirupadhika, mfn. [ni 2 + upadhi 1 + ka ], free from
attachments; free from belongings; SI 141,18* (-o
atidevapatto, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nitiipadhiko);- see also
anupadhika, sa-upadhika, sopadhika.
nirupama
nirupama, mfo., see sv upama.
nirupalitta, mfo., se e sv upalimpati.
nirupasagga, nirupassagga, mfo., see sv upasagga.
*nirumbhati\ nirumhati, pr. 3 sg. [cf*nirundhati,
AMg rumbhai], holds back, suppresses; stops; - aor.
3 sg. nirumhi, Ja VI 9,17 (assasapassase nirumhi, Se so;
Be, Ce, E e sannirumbhi); - absol. nirumbhitva 1, Ja 1
62,11 (devata pana taJ11 saddaq¡ -itva na kassaci sotuq¡
adaJ11SU, Be so; Ce, Ee nirumhitva; Se pana
sannirumhitva; = Ap-a 67.4: Be, Ce, Se sannirumbhitva;
Ee sannirujjhitva); - see also sannirumbhati.
*nirumbhati2 , pr. 3 sg. [?], strips (eg grain from a stalk);
absol. nirumbhitva2, nirumbhitvana, Sp 340,6
(s~islsadlni -1tva va ekam ekaq¡ hatthen' eva
chinditva ... , Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nirappitva; Sp-t [Be] 11
144,14: -itva gah~a¡p nama vlhislsaJ11 acchinditva
yathathitam eva hatthena gahetva akac)c)hitva
bljamattass' eva gah~aq¡) i= Vin-vn 155 (-itvana;
vlnirampitvana; Vin-vn-t [Be] 1 99,5: nidampitvana ti
yatha dhaññamattaJ11 hatthagataq¡ hoti tatha katva); -
se e also nidampati, nidampana.
nirumhati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv *nirumbhati 1.
niruJha, mfo., se e sv nin1~ha.
nirussasa, mfo., se e sv ussasa1.
nirussaha, m. and mfo., see sv ussaha.
nirussukka, mfo., see sv ussukka 1.
nirü«Jha, mfo., see sv nirü~ha.
nirüdaka, mfo., se e sv udaka.
nirüpakara, mfo., see sv upakara.
nirüpakkilesa, mfo., se e sv upakkilesa.
nirüpaghata, mfo., see sv upaghata 1.
nirüpadhi, mfo., see sv upadhi 1.
nirüpanissaya, mfo., se e sv upanissaya.
nirüpabhoga,mfo., see sv upabhoga.
nirüpama, mfo., see sv upama.
nirüpalepa, m., see sv upalepa.
nirüJha, niru~ha, nin1c)ha, mfn. [pp of ni 1 + ruhati;
S. nin1c)ha], customary, conventional, accepted; It-a 11
l86,1 (upadanakkhandhesveva lokasaddo -o ti
veditabbo); Vv-a I08,16 (devaloke va idaJ11 acil).l).aJ11 ya¡p
manussaloke -aya samaññaya voharo, Ce so; Ee
niru~haya; Be, Se niru~hasamaññaya); Sadd 106,31
(lokasailketavasena ekasmiq¡ atthe o -tta ti); 923,15 foll.
(-o ti ca . . . Magadhika bhasa . . . niruc)ho ti ca
sakkatabhasato nayaJ11 gahetva vuttavacanaJ11).
nirokasa, mfo., see sv okasa.
niroga, mfo., see sv roga.
niroja, mfo., see sv oja.
nirodaka, mfo., see sv udaka.
nirodha, m. [cfS., BHS nirodha], l. ceasing, cessation;
the being no more; stopping, shutting off, Abh 6
(mokkho -o nibb1inaJ11); 989 (apavagge vinase ca -o
rodhane); Vin 1 2,1 (avijjaya tv eva asesaviraganirodha
sailkharanirodho . . . jatinirodha jaramar~aq¡
sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupayasa nirujjhanti, evaq¡
etassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa -o hotl ti;
Sp 954,8: anuppado hoti); 40,29* (ye dhamma
hetupabhava tesaq¡ hetuq¡ tathagato ah a tesaq¡ ca yo -o);
D 11 36,9 (idaq¡ pi kho thana¡p duddasa111 yadida¡p
sabbasailkharasamatho . . . t~hakkhayo virago -o
608 nirodha
nibbanaJ11); III 275,17 (yaJ11 kho pana kiñci bhiltaJ11
sailkhata¡p paticcasamuppannaJ11 -o tassa nissaral).a¡p;
Sv 1058,8: idha arahattaphala¡p -o ti adhippetaq¡); M I
6,13 (tathagato sabbaso t~h1inaJ11 khaya viraga -a caga
patinissagga anuttaraq¡ sammasambodhiq¡
abhisambuddho ti); S III 24,22 (katames1inaJ11 kho bhante
dhammana111 -o -o ti vuccatl ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -a -o
ti); IV 217,5 (maya anupubbaq¡ sailkharanaq¡ -o
akkhato); 384,15 (pubbe cahaJ11 ... etarahi ca dukkha¡p
e' eva paññapemi dukkhassa ca -an ti); A IV 186,19 (ya
buddhana¡p samukkaq¡sika dhammadesana ta¡p pakasesi
dukkhaJ11 samudayaJ11 -aq¡ magga¡p): V 184,s (imasmi¡p
asati idaq¡ na hoti imassa -a ida¡p nirujjhati; Mp V 63,1:
kiiral).assa appavattiya phalassa appavatti hoti); It 38,1 *
(-o dukkhadhammanaq¡ sailkharupasamo sukho ); 46,1 *
(-e ye vimuccanti te jana maccuhayino ); Th! 6 (Dhlre
-aq¡ phusehi saññavüpasama111 sukhaq¡; Th!-a 12,27:
ki1esanirodha¡p phussa patilabha); 458 (bhavat~haya -a
anujanatha pabbajissami); Patis 11 105,1 (-assa
nissaral).aqho vivekattho asañkhataqho amataqho); 221,1
(sammadi!!hiya katame pañca -a); Ap 531,12
(pariññata111 maya dukkha¡p dukkhahetu vivajjito -o me
sacchikato maggo capi subhavito); Nett 14,24 (Hl).i ca
saccani sailkhatani ... -o asailkhato); Mil69,1 (katha¡p
bhante Nagasena -o nibbanan ti); PsI ?2,21 (t~ha
dukkhasamudayo ubhinnaJ11 appavatti -o); II 299,9 (-o
pi hi khayanirodho accantanirodho ti duvidho yeva);
Mp III 19,15 (viveko virago -o ti tll).i pi nibbanassa
namani); Ud-a 38,23 (-o ti ca avijjadlnaJ11
viragadhigamena ayatiq¡ anuppado appavatti);
Pv-a 220,9 (imassa nama purisassa jlvitassa uparodho
-o); Nidd-a 1 177,1 (kayasailkharanirodho ti assasa-
passasana¡p -o avar~o); Patis-a 121,12 (nibbana¡p hi
agamma dukkhaJ11 nirujjhat! ti -o ti vuccati); Sadd 487,3o
(-o abhavagamanaJ11); - ifc see abhisañña-, dukkha-,
sakkaya-, saññavedayita-; - 2. (jor saññavedayita-
nirodha) the cessation of conception and feeling; D I
184,25 (ta e' eva sañña nirujjhanti añña ca o~arika sañña
na uppajjanti, so -aq¡ phusati; Sv 374,11: so
evaJ11patipanno bhikkhu saññavedayitanirodhaq¡ phusati
vindati pa!ilabhati); Ja 1 232,3 (eko paccekabuddho
sattahaccayena -a vuqhaya); Vism 707,36 (neva-
saññanasaññayatanaJ11 samapajjati, ath' eka¡p va dve va
cittavare atikkamitva acittako hoti -aq¡ phusati);
Sp 1337,13 (ayasma kira Sariputto ... -aq¡ samapajjitva
nisldi); Sv 417,21 (Sañjlvo ... araññe -a111 samapajji,
atha naq¡ vanakammikadayo mato ti sallakkhetva
jhapesuq¡); Ps IV 91,7foll. (Jambud!pavasl thera pana
vadanti Sariputtatthero samathavipassana111 yuga-
naddhaq¡ aharitva anagamipha1aq¡ sacchikatva -a¡p
samapajji -a vut!haya arahattaq¡ patto ti); Spk 1 223,22
(idani bhagava -a111 samapanno, antonirodhe ca
kalakiriya nama natthl ti); Th-a 1 22,16 (tathagate
sattahaq¡ -am samapajjitva nisinne);
0
-dhamma, mfo. [nirodha + dhamma 1], liable to
cessation; inevitably ceasing; V in I 11,35 (yaJ11 kiñci
samudayadhammaJ11 sabbaq¡ taq¡ -an ti); D 11 66,32
(vedan a anicca sailkhata ... khayadhamma vayadhamma
viragadhamma -a); S III 199,20 (yo ... -o tatra te chando
pahatabbo); IV217,1 (--taJ11 ... sandhaya); Patis-a 141,7
nirodhana
(--ttii);- anirodha, m. and mfn., 1. (m.) non-cessation;
(coming into) existen ce; Ud-a 38,28 (-o uppado nama);
39,4 (natthibhavo pi nirodho eva ti natthibhavaviruddho
atthibhavo -o ti dassitarp hoti);- 2. (mfn.) not ceasing;
Ud-a 393,15 (acavanadhammarp -arp amatan ti attho);-
sanirodha, mfn., having a ceasing, with its ceasing;
Ps II 307,32 (tarp sappaccayarp -arp khandhapañcakarp);
- se e also dukkhanirodhagaminl (sv dukkha).
nirodhana, mfn. and n. [cf S. nirodhana], l. (mfn.)
obstructing, making cease; Spk III 152,4
(paññanirodhika ti paññaya -a); - 2. (n.) cessation;
obstructing, making cease; S IV 127,20* (sukharp dinham
ariyehi sakkayassa -arp, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
sakkayassuparodhanarp); Pa~is-a 217,21 (nirodhaya ti
vanassa 0 '-atthaya); 517,15 (sukhumakanarp pi
assasapassasanarp -ato tesarp ca uppadana pavattana na
hotl ti).
nirodhi, pass. aor. 3 sg. of*nirundhati qv.
nirodhika, nirodhiya, mfn. [cf S. nirodhaka, nirodhin],
obstructing; stopping;- ifc see pañña-.
nirodheti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [caus. of nirujjhati or
*nirundhati qqv], suppresses; makes cease; brings toan
end; Nidd I 346,!7 (uparuddheyya -eyya
vüpasameyya ... ); Pa~is I 58,2 (virajjati no rajjati -e ti no
samudeti); 101,2sjoll. (nekkhammena kamacchandarp
-eti avyapadena vyapadarp -eti ... ); Kv 576,4 (at!te
ki1ese jahati ti amanta, niruddharp -eti vigatarp
vigameti ... ); Mi185,I9 (sakka assasapassase -etun ti);
Mp II 330,24 (ima tisso pañña appavattikar;u:¡ena -en ti
paññanirodhiko); Th-a III 155,37 (uparundha varehi
-ehi); - part.pr. (a) nirodhenta, mfn., Pa~is 1 184,3o (te
kayasailkhare passambhento -ento vüpasamento
sikkhati); Vism 507,8 (tathagata ... dukkharp -enta
dukkhanirodharp ca desenta); (b) nirodhaya(t), mfn.,
Vism 705,II (nevasaññanasaññayatanarp -ayato); -
absol. nirodhetva, A IV 411,7 (ettha kama nirujjhanti te
ca kame -etva -etva viharanti ti); Ps II 350,23
(bhikkhu . . . saññarp ca vedanarp ca -etva nirodharp
samapanno); - pp nirodhita, mfn., Ps III 270,10; It-a II
36,3o (ragadosavijja virajita aggamaggena -a);
Patis-a 217,22; - fpp nirodhetabba, (mj)n., S IV 298,22
(vatarp va so jalena badhetabbarp maññeyya yo
vitakkavicare nirodhetabbarp maññeyya).
niropenta, mfn. [caus. part.pr. of ni 1 + ruhati; cf S.
niropayati], applying; adducing; Pj I 167,31 (evarp etarp
kar;u:¡arp -o attano bhasitanisamane niyojetva); II 471,14
(jativadarp pa~ikkhipanto kammavadarp ca -o).
nilaccheti, nillaccheti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup 1acchati,
S. lak~ayati, lañchayati, 1uñcati], castrates; marks; -
aor. 3 sg. nilacchesi, nillacchesi, Thl 437 (sattaha-
jatakarp marp mahakapl yüthapo nilacchesi, Th App II
p. 243,II so; eds nillacchesi; Thl-a 248,19: purisa-
bhavassa lakkh;u:¡abhütani bljakani nillacchesi nlhari);
- pp nilacchita, nillacchita, niluñcita, nilicchita, mfn.,
castrated; Th! 440 (vaccho lakhatambo nilacchito,
Th App II p. 243,16 so; eds nillacchito); Ja VI 238,18*
(pasü ahurp niluñcito javo bhadro, Be so; Se nilucchito;
Ce, Ee nilicchito; 239,Io'foll.: vacchakale yeva marp ...
nibb!jakarp akarpsu so 'harp ni1uñcito uddhatabljo javo
bhadro ahosirp, Be so; Se nilucchito; Ce nilicchito Ee
609 niliyati
nilicchako, prob. wr); niluñcita-phala, mfn.,
castrated; Ja VI 238,12* (niluñcitaphalo yeva yüthapena,
Be so; Ce, Ee nilicchita-; Se nilucchita-; 238,!4' foll.:
yüthapatina luñcitva uppa~itaphalo yeva ahosin ti attho );
- se e also nilañchaka.
nila.ija, mfn., see sv lajja.
nilañchaka, m. [cf S. nirlañchana, AMg ¡;¡illañchana], one
who marks cattle; Ja IV 364,2* (gamesv eke purohita ...
;u:¡~accheda -a, Be, Ce so; Se nilañcaka; Ee tilañchaka;
366,zz·: balivaddadinarp ;u:¡~acchedaka e' eva tisüladi-
ailkakara¡;¡ena lañchaka ca, lakkh;u:¡akaraka ti attho);-
se e also nilaccheti.
nilaya, m. [ts], a resting-place, a habitation; a lair, a nest;
Abh 205 (nikayo nilayalayo ); Th-a II 131,11 (alayan ti
-arp attano kulavakarp); Ap-a 513,17 (siriya
lakkh;u:¡anuvyañjanasobhaya -arp); Bv-a 22,18*
(gu¡;¡alayanarp -arp dadati);- ifc see bhikkhuni-.
nilicchaka, nilicchita, mfn., see sv nilaccheti.
nilinati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nillyati.
nill, se e sv nlll.
nilina, mfn., pp ofnillyati qv.
nilinenta, mfn. fpart.pr. of caus. of nillyati or of denom.
from nillna ? cf S. Hnayati], making settle; keeping apart;
Nidd-a I 255,!9 (cittarp pa~il!nenta ti attano cittarp
niHnenta).
niliyati, nilinati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nillyate, linati], alights,
settles; keeps oneself apart or hidden, hides; lurks; Ja I
292,18 (purohite bahi nikkhante ubho abhiramanti,
tasmirp agate dhutto -ati); 342,30' (gahana~~hanesu
-issanti); Mil218,Io (rañño cakkavattissa antaradhanena
ma¡;¡iratanarp girisikharantare -ati); Vism 343,24
(makkhika ... patte pi sise pi -anti); 346,Io* (bhuñjati
saparivaro nikkhamento -ati); Sv 114,29 (saku¡;¡a ekarp
rukkharp jahitva aññasmirp -anti); Ps II 414,I6joll. (esa
kho Bako brahma vimane -ati kapparukkhe -ati
ukku~iko nis!dati); Ap-a 479,18 (le¡;¡an ti linante -ante
ettha ti le¡;¡arp vihararp, Be, Se so; Ce llyante satta ettha
ti; Ee wr li¡;¡ante nilarp yante satta ettha ti); Sv 265,12
(-anti ettha ti le¡;¡arp); Sadd 500,23 (11 sil ese: linati
nilinati Hnarp nillnarp); 704,26 (pa~icchanna~~ane
bhayena -ati);- part.pr. (a) nillyanta, mfn., Sadd 241,6
(khago yatha hi rukkhagge -anto va);
(b) nillyamana, mfn., As 72,2o (yatha hi saku¡;¡o akasena
agantva rukkhagge -amano va rukkhasakharp ghaneti);
- aor. 3 sg. nillyi, Ja III 26,14 (sakhagge -i); VI 163,11
(so tattha ekamante -i, Be, Ce so; Ee wr -e; Se niliyi);
Pv-a 274,3; 3 pl. nillyirpsu,Vin III 22,3 ([bhikkhü]
ekamantarp -irpsu; Sp 227,22foll.: ekasmirp okase
pa~icchanna acchirpsu); Ja I 164,13 (tasmirp tasmirp
~ane kaka -irpsu); Mhv 37:35; - absol. nillyitva, Ja I
222,16 (bako ... vara¡;¡arukkhe -itva); Mil157,23 (-itva
cora pantharp düsenti); 257,16 (itth! sapatika -itva
rahassen' eva paparp acarati); 369,zz* (yatha pi d!piko
nama -itva g;u:¡hat! mige) Vism 270,16';
pp nilina, mfn. [ts], who has alighted on, settled on;
perched; keeping apart; hidden; lurking, lying in wait;
Vin IV 203,34 (tarp ambarp abhirühitva -o acchi;
Sp 896,9: -o ti pa~icchanno hutva); Th 454 (migarp -arp
kü~ena ... badhayanti); Ja I 293,6 (tasmirp -e, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nillyante); II 350,5 (salarukkhe -a eka kokila
niliyana
madhurena sarena vassi); Sp 323,18 (ta~ hatthe -a~);
Spk I 139,6 (pa~isa1llnassa ti -assa ekibhütassa); Mp III
140,2 (gahana~~ane -an~ kicchen' eva dassan~. Be,
Se so; Ce, E e -~); Dhp-a II 49,14 (he~amañce -o);
Sadd 500,23 (lin~ -~); - caus. absol. niliyapetva,
concealing; Ja I 292,21 (dhutta~ niliyapetva);- see also
nilinenta, nillenaka.
niliyana, n. ffrom niliyati], alighting, settling; keeping
oneself apart; hiding; Ja III 295,8 (kakassa agantva
bodhisattassa ure -~); Vism 663,29 (vagguliya -a~
viya yogino khandhapañcake abhiniveso); Mp IV 57,23
(pa~isallanassa ti -assa ekibhavassa); Th-a II 131,12
(alayesini ti tattha alayan~ -am eva icchanti, Be, Se so;
Ce alaye nisidati tattha al ay e -am eva ... ; E e alaye
nisidati tattha alay~ -am eva ... ); - see also
nillenaka.
niluñcita, mfn., see sv nilaccheti.
nillagga, mfn., see sv laggati.
nillaccheti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nilaccheti.
nillajja, mfn., see sv lajja.
nillapa, mfn., see sv lapa.
nilliileti, nilliiJeti (and nilloleti ?), pr. 3 sg. [ni2 + laleti,
la)eti], makes (the tongue) wag; moves (the tongue) to
and fro; Ja V 434,7 Givha~ -eti) = Dhp-a IV 197,1o (Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nilloleti); - absol. nillaletva, nilla)etva,
MI 109,1 (Sakko sis~ okampetva jivha~ -etva; Ps II
74,25: niharitva ki)apetva) *" SI ll8,2 (Spk I 182,zfoll.:
kabara~ mahajivh~ niharitva uddh~ adho ubhaya-
passesu ca l~etva); Dhp-a IV 72,26 (jivha~ -etva, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nilloletva); - pp nilliilita, nillii!ita, mfn.,
wagging; made to wag; - --jivha, mfn., with tongue
wagging; Sv 42,26 (keci --jivha paggharitakhe)a).
*nillikhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirlikhati], scratches; scrapes off;
- absol. nillikhitva, Ps III 43,3 (yad ettha a1llnarp
m~s~ atthi tarp sabb~ -itva); - pp nillikhita, mfn.
[cf BHS nirlikhita], scraped; Ps III 43,2 (yatha
sunikant~ hoti ev~ nikanta~ -a~).
nilli,f, see sv nili.
nillekha, nillekhaka, mfn., see sv lekha.
nillekhana, n. [cfnillikhati, S. nirlekhana], scrapings; ? -
ifc see camma-.
nillenaka, n. [cf S. nilayana], a hiding-place, a refuge;
Ja V 102,26* (bhayana tava manava -ani kubbanti;
103,s-: -ani ti niliyana~~anani).
nillepa, mfn., see sv lepa.
nillehakmp,prob. l}amul absol. ofnillehati qv.
nillehati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nirvlih], licks, licks off; takes up
with the finger; Sp 894,5 (bhuñjantena hi añgulimatta~
pi -itu~ na vanati); - absol. (a) nillehitva, Vin IV
198,14 (anapatti ... parittake sese ekato s~a<,l<,lhitva
-itva bhuñjati); Sp 894,4 (hatthanillehakan ti hattharp
-itva -itva); (b) (l}amul) nillehaka~ (or adv.);- ifc see
onha (sv o~~a2 ), patta- (sv patta\ hattha-;
fpp nillehitabba, mfn., Sp 894,9 (ekai1guliya pi patto na
-itabbo eka-o~~ho pi jivhaya na -itabbo); Sv 927,6
(lehaniyani ti -itabbani pinhapayasad!ni).
nillehitabbaka, mfn. rJpp of nillehati + ka2], to be licked;
Vin-vn 1925 (eka-ogho pijivhaya na ca -o).
nillokana, mfn. and n. ffrom nilloketi], observing;
looking; - 0 -sila, mfn., habitually looking out; Ja V
610 nivattati
433,26* (ya ca -a ya ca padvara~ayinl; 436,1s-: -a ti
vatapanantarad!hi olokanaslla).
nilloketi, pr. 3 sg. [ni2 + -viok], observes, examines; D II
333,7 (sal}ikarp -ema app eva nam' assa j!v~
nikkhamant~ passeyyama ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
vilokema); - fpp nilloketabba, mfn., Vin II 208,29 (sace
viharo anajjhavuttho hoti . . . kava~~ paryametva bahi
~hitena -etabbo).
nillopa, m. [BHS nirlopa], plunder; D I 52,25 (sandhi~
chindato -~ harato; Sv-p~ I 286,9: kiñci pi asesetva
niravaseso lopo -o); MI 87,7 (kamanam eva hetu
sandhirp pi chindanti -~ pi haranti ... ; Ps II 58,13:
game paharitva mahavilopa~ karonti); A I 153,24
(mahacoro ... -~ pi harati); Kv 173,3o (araha ... -arp
hareyya);- nillopataya in Ce, Ee at Sv 215,14 is prob.
wr for nillepataya (Be, Se, Ps II 320,9 so).
nillobha, mfn., see sv lobha.
nilloma, mfn., see sv loma.
nilloleti, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nillaleti.
nillolupa, mfn., see sv lolupa.
nilloluppaciira, nilloluppacari(n), mfn., see sv loluppa.
nillohita, mfn., see sv lohita.
nivatta, mfn. (and m.), pp ofnivattati qv.
nivattaka, mfn. [S. nivartaka], l. tuming back, giving up;
- 2. causing to cease; abolishing; Th-a I 182,19
(sandhavissan ti sarpsarirp ... anibbisan ti tassa -ñary~
0
avindanto alabhanto); - anivattaka, mfn., not tuming
back, not giving up; Mp I 113,25 (buddhana~ santike
vyakaral)~ labhitva -ena hutva .. . buddhakaraka-
dhamman~ püral}~); II 243,4 (pabbajjato e' eva
sabbaññutañiil)ato ca na nivattissami, -o bhavissami, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee anibbattako, prob. wr); - see also
anivattika, nivattanaka.
nivattati (and nivatteti\ pr. 3 sg. [S. nivartate], (intrans.)
retums, tums round, tums back; gives up; stops, ceases;
tums away from; Vin I 278,16 (tenah~ na -ami ti);
II 182,33 (handa bharye Upali -assu); 215,27 (kath~ hi
nama piry<,lacarika bhikkhü . . . atilahuk~ -issanti ti);
DI 118,16 (ah~ ce ... adisva samal}arp Gotam~
-eyy~); S 1 15,14* (kuto sara -anti; Spk I 52,14: ki~
agamma na ppavattantl ti attho ); Dhp 390 (y ato yato
hi~samano -ati); Pv 26:7 (aladdha ca -are); Th 493
(yasmirp -ate dukkha~ s~sarasmirp anantak~, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr nibbattate; Th-a II 206,5: na ppavattati
ucchijjati); 637 (ujumaggamhi akkhate gacchatha ma
-atha; Th-a II 269,37: antara vosana~ mapajjatha); 1132
(nah~ al~ tuyha vase -iturp); Ja 1 189,5 (itaro pi na~
yava nagaradvar~ anugantva -ati); II 10,28* (ehi slha
-assu ki~ nu bh!to palayasi); 358,7* (etha vyaggha
-avho); IV 142,15* (etena saccavajjena sotthi~ nava
-atu); 148,16 (yadi ev~ gamanakicca~ natthi -a ti, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se -ah! ti); 494,2* (sa gacch~ na -ati);
Bv 1:73 (antara na -eti catuhatthe cañkame yatha;
Bv-a 57,21 foll.: sattha ubho ko~iyo patva va -ati antara
ubho ko~iyo apatva na -ati, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee patva -eti);
Mil 286,23 (yadi pi maharaja sattame divase dibb~
cakkaratana~ nibbatteyya bodhisatto na -eyya); Sp 40,10
(abhabbo dani sasanato -itu~); Sv ll8,16 (citt~ assa
cuticittanirodhena idh' eva -ati, rüpakkhandhamattam
eva tattha patubhavati); Mp IV 72,16 (lokato na -ant! ti);
nivattati
Dhp-a III 195,14 (Marena Siddhattha -a, ito te sattame
divase cakkaratanaip patubhavissati ti vutte, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se -assu); Ud-a 243,1o (-ahi upasaka ti); Ap-a 190,19
(yatha aggi da<;l<;lhaghanaip puna na -ati); - part.pr.
1
(a) nivattanta, mf(-anti)n., nivattenta , mf(-enti)n., Vin I
46,23; Ja VI 74,13 (-antanaip); Mp I 343,14 (sa devi ...
uyyane caritva -antl); V v-a 256,23 (thokaip maggaip
tbere anugantva -anto, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -ento);
Thi-a 122,25 (devi viharaip gantva ... -enti, eds so); -
neg. anivattanta, mfn., S I 173,2* = Sn 79; Ja III 505,3;
(b) nivattamana, mfn., Ja II 378,5; Vism 292,3o; - neg.
anivattamana, mfn., Sn 62 (aggi va da<;l<;ihaip
anivattamano) = Ap 11, 11; Vism 231 ,8; - aor. 3 sg.
(a) nivatti, Ja II 3,2; Bv 2:107 (ma -i abhikkama, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se -a; Bv-a 102,14: ma -1 ti ma patikkami, eds
so); Vism 39,5; (b) nivattatha, Ja IV 443,6* (-atha na
migavam acari); 3 pl. nivattiipsu, Ja VI 393,3o; Dhp-a I
15,1o (upa<;l<;lhapathaip gantva roditva -iipsu);
2 pl. nivattittha, Ja I 376,11 (kiip bhante -ittba ti);
Cp-a 188,12 (atikhippa!p -ittha); - absol. nivattitva,
Pv 21:35 (tato hi so -itva); Ja I 429,19 (yanassa saddaip
sutva -itva oloketva); Cp 1:9:27 (-itva vilokite); Ps II
421,1 (sakalasañren' eva -itva apa1oketi); Mhv 17:28
(tato nago -itva);- neg. anivattitva, Ja I 132,26 (Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se anuvattitva) = Dhp-a III 76,18 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee anuvattitva); Ja I 154,14; Ps V 27,n; Dhp-a I 172,1o;
- pp nivatta, mfn. (and m. ?) [S. nivrtta], l. (mfn.) gane
or come back, returned, turned back; turned away from,
giving up; ceased; V in I 278,21 (sughu bhai).e Jivaka
akasi YaJT! pi na -o); A V 65,8 (raja ... uyyodhikaya -o
hoti vijitasail.gamo ); Pv 36:43 (tam addasa samai).aip ...
gocarato -aip); Ja I 58,6 (sesarukkhanaip chaya -a tassa
pana rukkhassa chaya parimai).<;Iala hutva a!!hasi, Be, Se
so; Ce anativatta; Ee ativatta) = Ps 11 291,4; Ja I 203,23
(balaip labhitva ratho -o bhavissati ti); IV 33,19*
(saddhaya nikkhamma punaip -o); 172,21* (tato -a
patikkamma disva; 174,2'foll.: tato pana vatthu-
kamakilesakamato cittena nivatt1tva kayena
pa!ikkamma); Ap 559,13 (itaraip tara~ay' ahaip -a);
Mil 179,11 (kissa pana sa sakalika bhagavato pada na
-a); Sp 575,33 (raja pa!ibujjhi kai).hasappo -o); Sv 55,11
(udakaip patva aggi viya -o); 456,5 (kumaro uyyanaip
gacchanto antaramagge -o ti); Ps II 266,15 (gavo
mahavasabho -o mayaip pi nivattissama ti -a); Spk 11
71,18 (yo ... anusayo so -o); Vv-a 72,17 (p~atipata
virata orata, -a ti attho ); - --bija, mfn., whose seed is
inoperative; ? V in II 109,27 (anujanami bhikkhave ...
phalaip paribhuñjituip aggiparicitaip ... abijaip --bijaip,
Ee so; Be nibbatta-; Ce, Se nibbaga-; f. Vin I 215,24: Be,
Ee nibbatta-; Ce nibbaga-; Se nibba!a-) f. V 132,32 (Ee
so; Be nibbatta-; Ce nibba!!a-; Se nibba!a-); - 2. (m.) a
turning, a bend (of a river);? Ja IV 283,24 (ekasmiip
--ghane otaritva udake pupphani vikiritva, Ce, Ee, Se
so; Be nivattana- ); - anivatta, mfn., not turning back,
not giving up; steadfast; Bv 22:15 (anivattamanasaip
ñatva, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce anivatti-; Bv-a 252,5:
anivattamanasan ti anosakkiyamanamanasaip, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee anivatti- ); - anivattagamana, n., a going that is
not (to be) turned back or given up; Dhp-a I 63,9 (idaip
mama anivattagamanaip, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
611 nivattati
anivattaniya-) f. 413,17 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anivatti-);-
fpp nivattitabba, (mj)n., V in II 214,38 (nivattantena
navakehi bhikkhühi pa!hamataraip nivattitabbaip paccha
tberehi; Sp 1284,26: bhattaggato u!!haya nivattantena
sail.ghena evaip nivattitabban ti dasseti); Sp 816,16 (na va
nivattitabbaip, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivattitabba, prob. wr);
Sv 632,17 (kamavitakka taya ettavata nivattitabbaip, so
read with Be, Ce, Se); Mhv 15:9 (nivattitabbaip bhante);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) nivattet¡2, -ayati, (trans.) turns
back; turns round; turns away from; reverses; stops,
hinders, annuls, destroys; Pv 8:8 (-ayanti sokamha, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee vinivattayanti) = Ja IV 87,13* (Be, Ce, Se
so; E e vinivattayanti); Ja I 108,1o (niyamako ...
nakkhattaip oloketva saka!ani -etha sakatani -etha ti
aha); 113,5 (ambho navika navaip -eh! ti); 203,6 (-ay'
etaip ratban ti); V 209,24 (patibaddhacitto hutva cittaip
-etuip asakkonto); VI 55,28 (ayaip jano nivattituip na
icchati -essam1 nan ti); Mi1275,17 (a1aip tata
Kai).hajinaip -ehi); Vism 216,14 (1okuttaradhammo hi ...
vagabhayaip -eti); Spk I 98,3 (saccasmiip hi thita
sighavegaip nadi!p pi -enti); Mp IV 34,19 (sacahaip
dasabalaip -eyyaip); Pv-a 204,18 (taip ... papato -etuip
asakkonto); Th-a II 151,36 (-ayissami); 228,6
(pabbajjadhippayaip -etuip nasakkhi); - part.pr.
nivattenta2, m.f{-enti)n., Mp I 362,22 (theñ ... taip-enti);
Dhp-a II 100,24 (mayhaip upajjhaye maip adaya
gacchante gamissami -ente nivattissami bhante ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -ante); - aor. 3 sg. (a) nivattesi, Ja VI
408,1s; Th-a I 161,28; (b) nivattayi, Mhv 15:9 (thero
tattha -ayi; or intrans. ?); 2 sg. nivattayi, Ja I 113,6 (ma
-ay! ti pa!isedheti); 3 pl. nivattayiipsu, Ja I 198,3o;
2 pl. nivattayittha, Mp I 171,24 (paricayena
uyyanabhimukho gacchati -ema ti keci ahaipsu,
purohito ma -ayittha ti aha); - absol. (a) nivattetva,
Ja I 203,2o (rathaip -etva); II 369,12 (raja vajirari.kusena
viirai).aip -etva); V 46,14 Ganapade -etva); VI 447,28 (so
ki1ante hatthi-assarathe -etva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
!hapetva); Sv 514,29 (sabbaso rüpaJTl -etva); Ps III 87,11
(gaiigaip -etva uddhagaminiip karoti); It-a I 72,12
cittaip -etva); 1
(b) nivattiya ,
(akusa1appavattito
Mhv 10:47; (e) nivattayitvana, Ja VI 583,24* (-ayitvana
rathaip, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee vinivattayitva); - pass.
part.pr. nivattiyamana, mfn., Ja V 88,24 (-iyamana pi
anivattitva); Sv 187,9 (-iyamanehi pi manussehi
anugato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nivattamano); Dhp-a I 323,17
(tigha upasaka ti -iyamano vanditva nivatti); -
pp nivattita, mfn., turned back; turned away; hindered,
stopped; Ja IV 148,18 (dasaba1ena -it' amhi); 244,1Y;
Psii 137,11 (Pu~~aya kira bhagava -ito ti); -
neg. anivattita, mfn., not turned back or hindered or
stopped; persevering, steadfast; Th-a III 77,1; -
anivattitayodha, m., a soldier who is not turned back,
who does not retreat; Sv 157,7 (hatthi-adisu pi
abhimukhaip agacchantesu anivattitayodhanaip;
Mp IV 54,24: eds anivattiya-); fpp
(a) nivattetabba, mfn., Spk II 77,17 (desana -etabba
siya); Dhp-a II 167,18 (-etabbayuttake bhikkhü);
(b) nivattanl'ya, mfn., Th-a I 172,22 (nahaip taya -aniyo
ti); - neg. anivattaniya, mfn., It-a 11 99,23 (buddhehi pi
anivattaniyatta); Cp-a 202,12 (anivattaniyaip mama
nivattana
pabbajjachandarp viditva); - anivattanlyagamana, n., a
going that is not to be turned back or stopped; Dhp-a I
63,9 (idarp mama anivattanlyagamanarp, Ce, Ee so; Be,
Se anivatta-; :;1: 413,17: Ce, E e anivatti-; Be, Se anivatta-);
(e) nivattiya2, mfn., - neg. anivattiya, mfn., Saddh 13
(papikaq¡ dighiq¡ . . . anivattiyaq¡); anivattiya-
yodha, m., a soldier who is not to be turned back, not
made to retreat; Mp IV 54,24 (hatthi-adisu pi
abhimukhaq¡ agacchantesu anivattiyayodhanaq¡;
Sv 157,7: eds anivattita-);- dunnivattiya, mfn., hard to
turn back; Ps II 168,6;- caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) nivattapeti,
Vin I 277,34 (gaccha bha~e Kaka Jlvakarp vejjaq¡
nivattehi raja tarp acariya -etl ti); A V 82,34 (raja kale
senarp uyyojetva antaramaggato -eti); Dhp-a 1 37,2
(-etuq¡); II 16,5 (devata gacchati, -essaml ti);- part.pr.
nivattapenta, mfn., Ja II 143,14; It-a II 131,32 (akusalehi
dhammehi -ento); - aor. 3 sg. nivattapesi, Ja I 91,29
(bhagava kumararp na -e si); Sv 551,24 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nivattesi); Pj II 185,19; - absol. nivattapetva, Vin II
182,31 (senaq¡ -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivattetva); Ja II
89,15 (taq¡ [k~<;laq¡) gantva purimak~<;Iapuilke
paharitva -etva sayarp tavatiq¡sabhavanarp abhirühi, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee nivattitva); Mp I 430,10 (sesajanarp -etva,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nivattetva); Nidd-a I 433,15 (cittaq¡
-etva); -se e also anivatti(n), anivattika.
nivattana, n., l. [S. nivartana], return, returning; turning
back; turning round; turning away from; giving up;
stopping; Ja IV 424,11 (Sumukhassa haq¡sasenapatino ...
-arp ca); Sv 183,29 (abhikkantaq¡ vuccati gamanarp
patikkantaq¡ -aq¡); 230,27 (hite pavattanena ahíta ca
-ena); Vv-a 218,3o (thale m~<;lükassa -arp katarp hoti);
Th-a II 178,33 (ayatibhavabhinibbattiya -ena jaraya
maccuno ca patisedhako); Nidd-a I 289,8 (avethiyaya
avethiyan ti avethetva -ena -arp, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -ena
nivattarp); 368,1 (gamanagamanan ti ito gantva puna
-aq¡); II 24,31 (tassa diqhisailghatassa -aq¡); - 2. a
bend, a curve; Ja II 117,4 (ekasmiq¡ gailganivattane
assamapadarp mapetva); V 162,8 (K~~ape~~aya nadiya
-e); - ifc see nad!-; - anivattana, n., -a, f, l. not
returning; Spk II 154,20 (catuhi maggehi samucchinna-
kilesanaq¡ puna --taya); - 2. not turning back; not
retreating; not giving up; Ja I 263,13 (--dhamma ...
mahayodha); Spk II 128,1o (appativanl ti -a) = Mp III
116,16 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be --ta) :;1: Nidd-a I 406,17
(appativanl ti -arp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee anivattl); As 54,25
(arahattarp appatva padhanasmiq¡ --ta anosakkanata).
nivattanaka, mfn. [nivattana + ka2], turning back,
retreating; - anivattanaka, mfn., not turning back, not
retreating, steadfast; Pj II 390,24 (sailgamavacara
anivattino purisa attano anivattanakabhavaq¡
ñapanatthaq¡ sise va . . . avudhe va muñjati~arp
bandhanti).
nivattaniya, mfn., caus. fpp of nivattati qv.
nivatti, f [S. nivrtti], return; turning back; stopping,
cessation; Abh 1178 (vamadananivattisu . . . patl ti);
Vism 497,23 (api ca pavattiq¡ acikkhanto bhagava
sahetukarp acikkhi -iq¡ ca sa-upayaq¡); Ud-a 341,14 (ye
hi nama pavattimatte pi sammü~ha te kathaq¡ -iq¡
janissantl ti); Th-a 1 10,13foll. (sayambhüñ~ena pavatti-
pavattihetuq¡ nivattinivattihetuq¡ ca paricchinditva, Be,
612 nivattha
Se so; Ce nivuttinivuttihetuq¡ ca; Ee nibbattinibbatti-
hetuq¡ ca); Th!-a 257,5 (evarp pavatti evarp -i iti s!laq¡ iti
samadhi iti pañña ti);- zfc see gati-;- anivatti,f, not
turning back; lack or absence of cessation, continuance;
what is not cessation; Vism 492,25; Ud-a 213,3o
(vagadukkhassa -i); Nidd-a 1 406,17 (appativanl ti -1, Ee
so; Be, Ce, Se anivattanarp); Bv-a 173,6 (nivattiya
pavattiya patipakkhabhütarp nibbanam -1 ti vuccati); -
--gamana, mfn., (according to ct) going, leading, to
what is not cessation; (but perhaps rather anivatti(n) +
gamana); Bv 8:2 (--gamanaq¡ maggaq¡ desesi
devamanuse; Bv-a 173,5 foll.: nivattiya pavattiya
patipakkhabhütaq¡ nibbanaq¡ -1 ti vuccati, taq¡ -iq¡
gacchati anena ti --gamano, tarp --gamanarp
a¡thailgikaq¡ maggaq¡ desesl ti attho ); - see also nivutti.
nivattiya\ caus. absol. ofnivattati qv.
nivattiya 2 , mfn., caus. fpp ofnivattati qv.
nivattet¡l, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nivattati.
nivatteti2 , caus. pr. 3 sg. ojnivattati qv.
nivattha, mfn. and m.n. [used as pp of *nivasati 1 qv;
cf BHS nivasta, nivastra, S. vastra], l. (mfn.) (i) clothed
in or with; wearing (esp. an under-garment); Vin V
217,27 (-o antaravasakena); D II 160,7
(Mallapamokkha . . . ahatani vatthani -a); A V 233,2s
(brahm~o ... navarp khomayugarp -o); Ja 1 307,11
(samike hi asati sahassamülarp pi satakarp -a itthl nagga
yeva nama ti, so read with Be, Ce, Se); II 432,zs- (--tta);
Ap 91,21 (ajinena -o); - ifc see kasayavattha-; -
(ii) worn; used; Vin III 206,28 (pur~aclvararp nama
sakiq¡ -aq¡ pi sakiq¡ parutarp pi); 232,2o
(pur~asanthataq¡ nama sakiq¡ -aq¡ pi sakiq¡ parutarp pi;
Sp 687,9: sakiq¡ msmnaq¡ e' eva nipannaq¡ ca);
Mi1222,Io (1uddakena -arp kasavaq¡ püjitarp); Bv-a 37,36
(vatthani -ani e' eva parutani ca yehi); - 2. (m.n.)
clothing; an (under)garment; Vin IV 221,15 (sailghati-
k~~agaha~arp va sadiyeyya ti . . . -arp va parutarp va
gah~aq¡ sadiyati); Ja III 416,2 (-a pan' assa dve sataka);
IV 387,9* (ajina -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee ajinani vattha);
Th-a III 23,16 (yo koci itthiya -assa alailkarassa va ...
va~~o); Mhv 37:166; - ifc see gihi- (sv gihi[n)); -
0
-kañcanaciraka, n., the golden ascetic's garment worn
(by her); Ja V 206,3' (-aq¡, Be, Ce, Se so; E e -clraq¡);-
anivattha, mfn., l. without clothes; without an
undergarment; not wearing (clothes); Vin IV 278.23
(nagga nhayeyya ti -a va aparuta va nhayati); Sv 142,3o
(mayhaq¡ satakarp --bhavena idarp uppannan ti); PsI
151,21 (na hi so tato pubbe -o ahosi);- 2. not worn;
As 218,14 (--pubbarp vatthaq¡ nivasetva);
dunnivattha, mfn. and n., l. (mfn.) improperly dressed;
Vin 1 44,7 (bhikkhü ... -a dupparuta ... pi~<;laya caranti);
MI 462,9 (passati matugamaq¡ -aq¡ va dupparutarp va);
Sv 599,Io (clvararp cha<;ldetva ... ekavattha va -a va ...
parodissanti); - 2. (n.) improper, scanty dress; A III
69,s• (mutthasatiq¡ ta bandhanti ... -ena) :;1: Ja V 448,28*;
Sp 642,14 (-aq¡ va dupparutaq¡ va sa~thapentassa
anapatti); sunivattha, mfn., properly, decently
dressed; well-dressed; Vin IV 102,10 (pabbjitena -ena
bhavitabbarp suparutena); MI 237,8; Ja 1 505,32 (-o
suparuto tapasakappasampanno); VI 151,11' (-o sobhasi
rajaparisaya); Vism 19,8; Ap-a 64,18 (devatabhinimittarp
nivaddha
-arp supiirutarp. pabbajitarp disva); Spk I 245,23
(mahajano . . . -o supiiruto gandhapupphadlni adaya
vihare sannipatanti).
nivaddha- in Ee, Se at Sp 1145,23,1164,11 and 1264,23 is
wr for nibaddha- (Be, Ce so);- anivaddharp in Ee, Se
at Sp 1264,25 is wr for anibaddharp (Be, Ce so).
nivapati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + .;vap 2; cf S. nivapati], throws
down; scatters; MI 151,12 (nevapiko nivaparp -ati
migajatanarp.); - pp (a) nivutta2, mfn. [cf S. nyupta,
nivapta], thrown down, scattered; MI 151,13 (imarp. me
mvaparp nivuttarp migajata paribhuñjanta);
(b) nivapita, mfn., Ps II 160,2 (nivuttan ti nivapitarp., Ce
so; E e nivapitarp., perhaps wr; Be, Se vapitarp).
nivaretii in Ee at S IV 194,12 is wr for nivareta (Be, Ce, Se
so).
*nivasati\ pr. 3 sg. [S. nivaste], clothes, dresses oneself;
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (a) nivaseti\ -ayati [BHS nivasayati],
puts on (a garment), wears; dresses, clothes oneself (in
an [under]garment); makes put on, clothes; Vin II
137,6foll. (chabbaggiya bhikkhii gihinivattharp. -enti
hatthisOI.H;lakarp . . . yo -eyya apatti dukka~assa ti);
IV 185,18 (parimal)<,ia1arp. -essaml ti sikkha kara1,11ya);
Pv 10:3 (imarp dussarp. -aya); Ja VI 590,2 (mama su1,1ha
iman' eva vatthani -etu); Ap 91,2 (tamha dussarp.
gahetvana -ema mayarp sada); Mil 128,28 (keci rasmiyo
-enti); 246,2 (puriso kilinharp. sa~akarp -eyya); Sp 634,6
(nivasanarp -eti ... clvararp. piirupati); 800,11 (evarp -ehi
evarp parupahl ti); Dhp-a II 52,2o (bhante imarp. sa~akarp.
rajitva -eyyatha ti); Pj II 259,3 (abo appiccho sama1,1o
vattharp pi na -e ti); Th-a III 36,36 (therassa kira pita ...
purise 1il)apesi nikkhamiturp. ma detha, kasayani
apanetva setakani -etha ti) Ap-a 329,s (eds
nivasapetha ti); Cp-a 42,13 (paridahissatl ti -issati, eds
so); Mhv 5:57 (-enti hi Cal)<,ia1a kasayani sada);
Sadd 567,2o (nivasa acchadane: vattharp. -eti -ayati); -
part.pr. (a) nivasenta, mf( -ent!)n., Vin V 44,4; Ja IV
283,23 (pupphapa~e -ento); Sp 936,14 (-entiya); Sv 518,3
t- Mp IV 10,9; (b) nivasaya(t), mfn., Kkh 2 134,28;
(e) nivasayamana, mfn., Sv 518,4 (vattharp -ayamana) t-
Mp IV 10,s; - aor. 3 sg. nivasesi 1, Vin III 58,26
(ayasma Anando jantaghare aññatarassa bhikkhuno
antaravasakarp attano maññamano -esi); Ja IV 283,5;
Spk II 188,27 (turnhakarp. raja evariiparp -es! ti);
3 pi. nivasesurp., Vin V 28,3o; inf nivaseturp.,
nivasiturp., Vism 65,10 (saiJ.gha~irp. pana -eturp. na
vanati); Sp 804,32 (clvaran ti yarp -iturp. va parupiturp. va
sakka hoti, eds so) = 863,13 (eds -eturp.); Dhp-a II 55,s
(mahal1akaka1e pi vattharp. -eturp. na icchati naggo
vicarati); absol. (a) nivasetva 1, Vin I 46,16
(tima1,1<,1a1am pa~icchadentena parimal)<,ialarp. -etva ...
pacchasama1,1ena hotabbarp.); 47,24 (attano gattarp
vodakarp. katva -etva); IV 18,31 (sa~akarp. -etva); D II
88,16 (bhagava pubba1,1hasamayarp -etva pattaclvararp
adaya; Sv 541,33: gamapavisananlharena nivasanarp
-etva kayabandhanarp bandhitva); A li 207,18
(kesamassurp. oharetva kharajinarp -etva); Ja I 65,2o
(bodhisatto arahaddhajarp. -etva); 330,16' (ekarp
valahakarp -etva ekarp parupitva meghagltarp gayanto );
Mil 90,2o (Milindo raja pakatidussayugarp. apanetva ...
kasayarp -etva); Vism 65,9 (antaravasakarp va
613 nivasati
uttarasali.garp. va rajitva tarp. -etva itararp. rajitabbarp);
Sp 240,13 (ekarp. -etva ekarp. parupitva ekarp. arpse
~hapetva); neg. anivasetva, Kkh 2 252,16;
(b) nivasetvana, Mhv 6:15 (-etvana sakharp);
(e) nivasayitva, Ap 342,5 (-ayitva pubba1,1he );
pp nivasita, mfn., l. put on, wom; Ja I 91,1 (turnhehi
kasayani -itanl ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nivatthanl ti) =
Ap-a 95,20 f- Ja IV 283,4 (eds nivatthanl ti); -
2. wearing, dressed in; Ja VI 579,20* (pitan' eke -ita);
580,8· (nHavatthani -a hutva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nllavatthanivasita); - fpp nivasetabba, mfn. and n.
impers., Vin I 306,18 (na bhikkhave potthako -etabbo);
IV 185,19 (parima1,1<,ialarp -etabbarp); Spk I 124,2
(bhikkhuna nama evarp -etabbarp. evarp parupitabbarp);
- caus. pr. 3 sg. (b) nivasapeti 1 , clothes, dresses (in);
absol. nivasapetva 1, Ja I 50,15 (devirp. ...
dibbavattharp. -etva); II 289,5 (mahallikarp ahatavattharp.
-etva); III 292,15 (ubho pi te gandhodakena nahapetva
vatthani -etva, Se so; Ce, Ee nivasetva; Be omits);
V 282,28 (atha narp Mahasatto khomarp. -etva sirigabbhe
~hapapesi); Sv 601,25 (sace kho panaharp. imarp
mahallakarp. idh' eva pilotikarp -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nivasetva); Cp-a 60,1s (kasavarp. -etva); - see also
nivattha.
nivasati 2 , pr. 3 sg. [S. nivasati], passes or spends time;
dwells, lives (in), inhabits; Vin III 181,26 (riñcanti pesala
bhikkhii -anti papabhikkhii); Jai 413,12* (yattha veñ
-ati na vase tattha pa1,1<,iito, Ce so; Be, Ee nivisati; Se
nivlsati) = III 357,6•; III 262,18* (so me manapo -e ca
tamhi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nivise; 263,2o·: tasmirp. ca purise
aharp -ami ti, Ee so; Be nivisaml ti; Ce, Se niccarp.
vasaml ti); Ap 538,3 (pañcadasasataniina -anti tahirp.
tada); Vism 258,33 (yattha .. . kimayo akulavyakula
sal)<,iasal)<,iacarino hutva -anti); part.pr.
(a) nivasa(t), mfn., Vism 73,27* (eko araññe -arp.);
Pa~is-a 704,1* (theren' ettha -ata); (b) nivasanta, mfn.,
Ps II 162,33; Pj I 146,2o (yattha katthaci -anto pi
santu~~ho va hoti); - aor. 3 sg. nivasi, Bv-a 270,24*
(lokanandanakaro -1 ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vas! ti,
unmetrical); 1 sg. nivasirp., mvas1rp., Ap 494,20
(sattavassani -irp. matukucchimi, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -!);
505,16; Ap-a 239,29 (mahodadhi nivasahan ti . . . aharp.
mahodhadhirnhi samudde -irp. vasarp. kappesin ti attho,
Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nivasirp.); - pp (a) nivusita,
nibbusita, mfn. [prob. < ni 1 + u~ita; or ni 1 + vi + u~ita],
having lived, stayed; DI 17,31 (tassa tattha ekakassa
digharattarp. nibbusitatta anabhirati paritassana uppajjati,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nivusitatta) = III 29,5 (Ee so; Be, Ce,
Se nivusitatta); (b) nivuttha, nivurtha, mfn., 1. living;
staying; who has lived; Ja III 24,15' (addha ettha
mahesakkhadevata -a bhavissati, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nivurtha); 229,26 (aticirarp. -o 'smi, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
nivurtho); Dhp-a II 62,19 (ayarp ettakarp kalarp. ... idha
-o, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nivunho); Ap-a 125,24 (tatth' eva
-a assava1,1ija, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nivu~~a); - 2. lived;
lived in, inhabited; Vism 410,27 foll. (pub be atltajatlsu
--kkhandha pubbenivaso, -a ti ajjhavuttha anubhiita
attano santane uppajjitva niruddha, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nivunha); Spk I 189,11 (pañcahi corasatehi --tta); Mp III
323,7 (attana -arp khandhasantanarp anussaranto, Be,
 nivasana
Ce, Ee so; Se nivunharp); Mhv 37:60 (catubuddhehi -e
cetiyang~e); - nivunhanigamassapi in Ee, Se at
Sv 483,20 is prob. wr for nivinha- (Be, Ce, PsI 227,13
so);- fpp nivasitabba, n. impers., Vism 57,11*;- caus.
pr. 3 sg. (a) nivaseti2 , causes to stay; makes live; - aor.
3 sg. nivasesi 2, Ja II 208,7 (uyyane khandhavararp -esi,
Se so; Be nivesayi; Ce, Ee nivesesi); IV 189,28
(bahinagare khandhavararp -esi); 3 pl. nivasesurp, Ja V
75,19 (tassa assamapadarp katva tattha narp -esurp, Ce,
Se so; Be nivasapesurp; Ee vasesurp); - absol.
(a) nivasetva2, Ja I 453,14 (khandhavararp -etva);
IV 151 ,26' (aramato avidüre khandhavararp -etva, Be, Se
so; Ce, E e nivesetva); Ap 583,4 (satani pañcanunani
yavajivarp upanhahirp rajuyyane -etva); Mhv 38:5 (anto
yeva -etva); (b) nivasiya, Mhv 37:168;
(b) nivasapete, causes to stay; makes live, makes
inhabit;- aor. 3 sg. nivasapesi, Ja V 321,29 (assamassa
avidiire khandhavararp -esi, Ce, Se so; Be nivasesi; Ee
nivesapesi); 511,11 (bahiini ku1ani t}lapetva gamarp -esi,
Se so; Be, Ce, Ee pesetva gamarp nivesesi); VI 62,2o
(devi patiriipanhane khandhavararp -esi); - absol.
nivasapetva2, J a V 162,17 (ekamante khandhavararp
-etva, Ce, Se so; Be nivasetva; Ee nivesetva); 195,12
(tattha khandhavararp -etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nivasetva); 315,25 (nagarassa avidiire khandhavararp
-etva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivesetva); VI 582,5
(khandhavararp -etva); Dhp-a I 52,1 (imarp netva attano
gehe -etva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nivesetva); - see also
nivisati.
nivasana\ n. [ts], putting on a garment; a garment;
Sadd 882,5* (pari ... -e); 882,8 (-e vattharp parivasati);
-see also nivasana 1.
nivasana 2 , n. [S. lex. id.], a place to live; living in; Ja III
216,2o (tava 0 -pasadarp pavisanto, Be, Ce so; Ee nivasa-;
Se nivasana-); Spk II 313,24 (saca sala tesarp kammasala
na 0 -sala, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivesana-); Ap-a 212,23
(p~l)asa1a ti ... 0
-p~l)asala); Vibh-a 366,19 (sevatl ti
o -vasena sevati, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nivasana-);
Sadd 542,24 (nivaso -arp);- see also nivasana2.
nivaha, m. [ts], a multitude; Abh 629 (sandoho -o);- ifc
see vittharitamsu- (sv vittharati).
nivata\ mfn ..and n. [cf S. nivata 1, nivata2, nirvata],
l. (mfn.) sheltered from the wind; unrujjled, calm; free
from draughts; saje, secure; V in I 57,29 (-esu sayanesu
sayanti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nivatesu); A I 101,12
(kiitagarani . . . ullittavalittani -ant phussitagg~ani
pihitavatapanani; Mp II 168,6: nivaritavatappavesani);
III 396,18 (udakarahado -o vigata-ümiko); Th 1 (channa
me kutika sukha -a; Th-a I 27,23: vataparissayarahita ti
attho); Jai 390,28 (-e vanas~¡;ie); VI510,w• (kiitagare
sayitvana -e phussitagg~e, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nivase,
prob. wr); - 2. (n.) a place sheltered from the wind;
absence ofwind, calm, stillness; safety, security; Vin III
162,21 (yato -arp tato pavatarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nivatarp; Sp 581,1: yattha -arp appako pi vato natthi
tattha mahavato utt}lito ti adhippayo); S V 270,11 (-arp
ca ayarp ca Migaramatupasado . . . sunikhato acalo
asampakampi atha ca pana saii.kampito); It 92,1* (rahado
va -e ca, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -o; It-a II 117,6: -e ca ti
nivatanhane rahado vi ya); Ja III 399,8· (0 -ja ti mama
614 nivapita
sakhahi vatassa nivaritatta -e jata); V 88,19 (-e jalamana
dipasikha viya khayati);- see also nivataka.
nivata 2 , m. and mfn. [= nivata 1 ?], l. (m.) humility,
modesty; calmness; Khp 5:8 (garavo ca -o ca santut¡hi
ca kataññuta; Pj I 144,8: -o ti n!cavuttita, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee n!cavattanarp) Sn 265; Pv 42:12 (pahaya
issaramadarp -am anuvattaye); Ja VI 222,6*
(nikkhittasattha paccatta -am anuvattare); - 2. (mfn.)
[BHS id.] humble; modest; biddable; calm, mild; MI
125,11 (sorata Vedehika gahapataní -a Vedehika
gahapataní; Ps II 98,34: -a ti nivatavutti); Ps II 384,31
(c~¡;ialadarako viya ca sorato -o nlcacitto hutva); -
0
-Vutti, mfn., having a humble, biddable nature; D III
192,9* (-i atthaddho) i= Ap 53,16; Sn 326; Th 71 (-ina);
Ja III 262,22* (263,2s-: nicavutti p~¡;litanarp ovadakaro
hoti); VI 286,31 * (-i atthaddho surato sakhilo mudu;
287,2o-: atimanarp akatva nicavutti ovadanusasani-
paticchako); 296,3* (-i vu¡;i¡;ihesu); Mil90,26
(dasakammakaraporisajane pi -ina bhavitabbarp); Pj I
144,25 (nícamanata --ta); Patis-a 544,27 (patissavo,
--taya paravacanasavanan ti attho); - 0 -Vuttika, mfn.,
id.; Vv-a 347,25 (garut¡haniyesu --tta soraccarp); Th-a I
29,21;- anivata, mfn., not humble, not mild; MI 126,12.
nivataka, n. [nivata 1 + ka 2], a place where there is no
wind; a saJe place; (see O. van Hinüber, 1968,
pp. 21-28); Ja I 289,3o* (sabbitthiyo kare paparp
labhamana nivatake, Ce, Ee so; Be labhamane; Se
labbhamane) = V 435,17* (Be, Ce, Ee labhamane; Se
labbhamane; cf 437 ,17·: labhamane ti labbhamane,
sarpvijjamane ti attho, -e ti rahomantanake paribhedake,
Be, Ce so; Ee labhamane ti labhamane; Se labbhamane ti
sarpvijjamane) = VI 281, fn. 1 (Be labhamane; Ee
labbhamane nivadake; Ce, Se omit); V 435,19* (sace
labhetha khal)arp va raho va -arp va labhetha tadisarp)
quoted Mil 205,11 * (eds nimantakarp).
nivadakaro in Ee at Mp V 54,18 is prob. wr for
nicayakaro (Be, Ce, Se so, ad A V 149,21: necayiko).
nivapa, m. [ts], l. seed, grain; feed, fodder; a feeding-
place; MI 151,12 (nevapiko -arp nivapati migajatanarp;
Psii 160,1: -an ti vapparp); 151,2o (yathakamakarai)Iya
bhavissanti imasmirp -e ti; Ps II 160,s: imasmirp
0
-nhane); II 262,2 (Marass' esa visayo Marass' esa -o
Marass' esa gocaro); Th 774 (bhutva -arp gacchama
kandante migabandhake; Th-a III 36,16: -an ti miganarp
khadanatthaya khittarp til)adighasarp); Ja II 96,25 (ye
gadrabha sindhavanarp -arp vahirpsu); III 272,22* (bhutta
maya -ani rajino panabhojanarp, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a;
272,26': tesu tesu t}lanesu nivutani -ani, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nivutta -a); VI 86,7* (ayarp ... -o; 86,w: phalaphalanarp
-o sannicayo); Sp 575,26 (kalandakanarp e' ettha -arp
adarpsu tena Kalandakanivapo ti vuccati); Sv 835,13 (-o
vuccati bhattarp); Ps II 162,14 (kamagul)a Marassa -a
nama honti); Dhp-a I 233,25 (sami tava -arp datva yahi
aharp te pacissami ti); - 2. an offering (to a dead
relative); Abh 423 (pitudanarp tu -o, Be so; Ce nivapo);
-
0
-puttha, mfn., nourished on grain; Dhp 325
(mahavaraho va -o; Dhp-a IV !6,14: ku¡;¡¡;iakadina
siikarabhattena put¡ho) = Th 17; Sp 509,12 (-e sükare,
Be, Ce so; Ee 0 -phut¡he; Se 0 -vunhe) =Spk II 219,12.
nivapita, mfn., see sv nivapati.
 *ni vara
*nivara 1, m. [ts], warding off; restraining; - ifc see
dunnivara.
nivara 2 , m., see sv nlvara.
nivaraqa, n. (and mfn. ?) [ts], warding off, keeping out,
preventing; restrammg; obstructing; A I 134,1!*
(kukkuccanlll11 -lll11); Sn 1034 (sotanal!l kif!l -lll11; Pj II
586,9 foll.: tesaf!1 kif!1 avanll,llll11 ka rakkha ti); Ja V
41 0,22* (hiraylll11 hi papajanlll11 -I, Ce, Ee so, perhaps
wr; Be nivarinl; Se nivari1,1I); VI 169,!4 ( -bhayena 0
matapitunnal!l anarocetva); Sp 1013,9 (ma-y-idha pavisa
ti -lll11 katUf!l, Be, Ce so; Ee nlvara~,~lll11; Se nlvara~,~lll11);
Sv 960,5 (asurasen aya o• -atthaf!l ... arakkhlll11 thapetva);
PsI 96,26 (esa nayo asantutthiya asallekhassa ca
uppannassa -e); II 315,8 (kakanal!l 0 -vasena hatthlll11 ...
uggirati); Bv-a 22,7•; Sadd 410,7 (rubhi -e: rumbhati);-
anivaraqa, n., lack of prevention or obstruction;
Sp 1408,20; Th-a III 22,1 (cakkhundriya ssa -al!l nama,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anlvara~,~af!1); - dunnivaraqa, mfn.,
hard to hold back; hard to obstruct; Th-a III 31,17
(manomayo soto sukhumo -o).
nivari(n), mfn. [S. nivarin], restraining; holding back;
Ja V 410,22* (hirayaf!l hi papajanal!l -inl, Be so; Se -i1,1I;
Ce, Ee nivara~,~I; 410,3¡·: papato janlll11 -ini, ayam eva va
patho, Be so; Ee, Se -i1,1I; Ce nivara1,1I).
nivarita, mfn.,pp ofnivareti qv.
nivareta(r), m. [from nivareti qv], one who holds back or
restrains; one who keeps out; D II 83,11 (dovariko
pa~,~qito viyatto medhavi aññatanlll11 -a ñatanlll11
paveseta) =S IV 194,12 (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nivareta) =
V l60,2o (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivaretva) = A IV 107,19;
Cp-a 287,13 (akiccato satte -a kiccesu patitthapeta).
nivareti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [caus. of *ni 1 + varati 1;
S. nivarayati], keeps out; holds back from, restrains;
obstructs; prevents; forbids; V in I 25,20* (phasukamo va
tlll11 -emi); IV 177,14 (kathlll11 hi nama chabbaggiya
bhikkhü bhikkhuniyo vosasantiyo na -essantl ti); D III
187,18 (papa -eti kalyill,le niveseti); SI 14,8• (yato yato
ca papaklll11 tato tato mano -aye); 96,7• (dadamanlll11
-eti); IV 195,!7 (tato cittlll11 -eyya, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
-ay e); 195,21 (tato cittlll11 -aye cakkhuviññeyy ehi
rüpehi); Dhp 77 (asabbha ca -aye); Th 761 (te sote ko
-eyya); 1038 (karoti sattha okasal!l na -eti cakkhuma);
Ja I 146,30* (kake so1,1e -aye, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee ca
varaye) = Vism 196,22* (Be, Ee, Se so; Ce ca varaye);
Ja II 170,2o· (titthiyaramakara~,~lll11 -etha ti); IV 121,19*
(ma mal!l deva -ehi pabbajantlll11, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se
-esi) quoted Cp-a 184,8* (eds -ehi); Ja IV 296,27'
(kavacaf!1 sare abhihanati -eti); V 71 ,2* (te tvlll11 disva
nivaraya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee disvana varaya); 410,16*
(hiriya -en ti sacittam attano ); Pet 138,7 foll. (kuto
-ayantl ti); Mil 332,3o (ta~,~hasotlll11 -eti); 416,5*
(chattaf!l ... vatataplll11 -eti); Sp 383,5 (sükarassa
gamanlll11 -eti); Sv 850,22 (sabbüpaddave e' assa -aya,
Ce, Ee so; Be, Se -ehi); Pj II 98,3o (te -enti so tath' eva
nibandhati. Ce, Ee so; Be, Se te nlll11 varenti);
Sadd 560,10 (-eti -ayati); part.pr.
(a) nivarenta, mf( -enti)n., Sp 930,16 (-entiya); Sv 893,!!
(kilesuppattif!1 -ento ); Dhp-a I 397,2 (daharanaf!1 ca
sama~,~eranlll11 ca pattlll11 pidahitva allll11 alan ti -entanlll11
pi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee varentanlll11 pi); Cp-a 151,9 (raja
615 nivasa
bodhisatte attano jivitlll11 pariccajitva tassa purisassa
mara~,~e -ente tutthamanaso, Ce, Ee so; or pass. ? Be, Se
bodhisattena); (b) neg. anivaraya(t), mfn., Th 730
(cakkhundriyaf!l ce rüpesu gacchantaf!l anivaraylll11;
Th-aiii 21,31: gacchantlll11 nivaraye ... ti ca patho, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee anivaraye); (e) neg. anivarayanta, mfn.,
Th-a III 21,29 (anivarayaf!l, tlll11 ca anivarayanto
appatibahanto, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee anlvarento);
(d) nivarayamana, mfn., Spk II 394,12 (ma saddlll11
karittha ti aññamaññlll11 -ayamana, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nivariyamana, prob. wr); Mp II 179,12 (sabbopaddave
e' assa -ayamano);- aor. 3 sg. (a) nivaresi, Sn 139 (na
nlll11 jati -esi brahmaloküpapattiya); Pv 32:4; Ja II 324,7
(raja bhagineyyassa bahigehlll11 dapesi antopavesanlll11
-esi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se dhitarlll11 antonivesane nivasesi);
IV 388,24 (suriyuggamanlll11 -esi); (b) nivarayi,
Mhv 29:52; 2 sg. nivarayi, Ja IV 25,26*; Dhp-a III 378,5
(Ánanda ma Subhaddlll11 -ayi); 3 pl. (a) nivaresuf!1,
Vin V 28,6; Ja I 441 ,7; Cp-a 184,5; (b) nivarayif!1SU, Ja I
273,!4 (Se so; Be, Ce, Ee varayif!lsu); VI 429,27
(dovarika -ayif!1su, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee varayif!1su); -
inf. (a) nivaretuf!1, Ja IV 2,18 (ahaf!l gamissam' eva na
sakka ffilli11 -etun ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee varetun ti);
V 499,5• (n' amhi sakko -etuf!1); (b) nivarayituf!1,
Bv-a 211,1 (-ayituf!1 arabhif!lsu); - absol. nivaretva,
Vin V 28,3; Ja I 195,1! (sakatassa purato magglll11 -etva
atthasi); - nivaretva in Ee at S V 160,2o is wr for
nivareta (Be, Ce, Se so); - neg. anivaretva, Vin V
148,37;- pass. part.pr. nivariyamana, mfn., V in II 220,6
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü jantaghare therehi bhikkhühi
-iyamana); Sv 419,21 (bhagavata tikkhattul!l -iyamano
pi); Cp-a 174,27; - nivariyamana in Ee at Spk II 394,12
is prob. wr for nivarayamana (Be, Ce, Se so); -
pp nivarita, mfn. [ts], prevented; obstructed; forbidden;
Ja III 399,r (vatassa --tta); IV 244,26 (yavatatiyaf!l
satthara -o pi, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee varito pi); Sp 505,1
([kama] avata ti avarita -a patikkhitta ti attho ); Sv 898,!2
(aññassa buddhassa uppatti -o hoti); Mp III 92,!2
(avijjanivuto ti avlJJaya -a pihita);
neg. anivarita, mfn., Sv 914,4; Mp IV 136,2; Pj II 316,6;
Sadd 204,28; - fpp nivaretabba, mfn., Vin I 46,23
(upajjhayo apattisamanta bha~,~amano nivaretabbo );
Sp 374,8 (patisañkhanabalena cittaf!l nivaretabbam eva
ti); Spk I 50,34; - see also dunnivara, dunnivaraya,
nivuta, nivarati.
nivasa 1 , m. [ts], clothing; an undergarment; Sp 968,3!
(Ylll11 pana -lll11 va parupanaf!1 va ani'il,lattiya nivaseti va
parupati va, Ee, Se so, perhaps wr; Be, Ce nivasanaf!1).
nivasa 2 , m., l. [ts]living, dwelling; stay, residence; where
one lives, a dwelling-place, a home; V in I 312,2o (banda
maylll11 avuso idh' eva Vasabhagame -lll11 kappema ti);
S III 5,27 (icchama . . . pacchabhüme janapade -lll11
kappetun ti; Spk II 256,1!: -an ti temasaf!1 vassavaslll11);
Ja I 15,22 (Kapi1avatthu nama nagaral!l -o bhavissati);
115,17 (nagaradvare ekissa salaya -lll11 kappetva); 467,1
(-o kahlll11 gahito ti); III 510,10 (maharukkho ahosi
anekasahassanlll11 sakul,li'inlll11 -o); IV 80,3 (kass' eso
-o); V 233,24* (aticiraf!l -ena piyo bhavati appiyo);
Vism 80,4 (yassa hi araññe -o so araññako); Sv 23,2
(dlghappamill,lasuttanaf!1 samühato -ato ca,
 nivasana
samühanivasa hi nikayo ti vuccanti); Spk Il 401,29
(tebhümakavag~ Marassa -ghan~. Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
0
nivasana-); Mp I 114,14 (satassa sampajanassa matu
kucchiya~ -o pi); II 299,25 (eko satthavaho ekissa
mahallikaya gehe -~ ga¡;¡hi); Dhp-a II 23,15 (mama
puttassa Kassapassa evarüpena ba1ena saddhi~ vasanato
ekakass' eva -o seyyo ti); III 150,18 (amhak~ yeva
gehe aharo ca -o ca bhavissatl ti); V v-a 223,23
(macchar1na~ niraye -o); Pv-a 76,8 (uyyane 0 -qhanani
karetva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivasana-); 78,23 (addhikan~
pana o• -atthaya upagatan~); Th-a II 74,24 (Magadha
nama janapadino rajakumara, tes~ -o eko pi janapado
rüjhivasena Magadha tv eva bahuvacanavasena vuccati);
Bv-a 22,1* (accu¡;¡haslte vasato -e); Mhv 15:7 (idh' eva
Nandanuyyane -o phasuko iti); - nivase in Ce, Ee at
Ja VI 510,10* is prob. wr for nivate (Be, Se so); -
2. [BHS id.] where one is, a state of existence; D II
206,10* (-am abhijanami yattha me vusit~ pure;
Sv 638,16: jativasena -a~ jan ami) f. Th 915 (-am
abhijanissa~; Th-a III 72,31: pubbenivasa~ aññasi~);
D II 286,24* (te ... deva akani~~a ... so -o bhavissati);
- ifc see pubbe-;- see also nivasana2, nevasika.
nivasana 1, n. [BHS id.], dress, clothing; an undergannent;
wearing (an [under-]gannent); Abh292
(nivasanantañya); Vin I 46,12 (sace upajjhayo gam~
pavisitukamo -~ databb~ pa~inivasana~
pa~iggahetabb~); 47,25 (-aq1 databbaq1 sangha~i
databba); II 234,18* (in uddana: -a kayabandhana); A I
145,14 (kasik~ -~ kasiko uttarasailgo); Ja I 70,7
(anekabuddhasatasahassanaq1 -~ arahaddhajaq1
nivasetva); II 24,14 (tumhak~ -aq1 va parupan~ va
dadantl ti); III 82,4 (tassa kira cammam eva -~ ca
parupanaq1 ca); Bv 28:8 (-~ Kusaghare); Ps III 224,17
(puriso vajjapa~icchadanatth~ -~ sa¡;¡~apeti); - ifc
se e ajinuttara- (sv ajina);- see also nivasana 1, nivasa 1.
nivasana 2 , n. [cf S. nivasana], living, dwelling; stay,
residence; where one lives, a dwelling-place, a home;
Ja II 15,25 ( -qhan~ alabhanto); 160,19 (attano
0
0
-~~anam eva gato, Be, Se so; Ce nivasana-; Ee
nivesana-); IV 145,17 (Sakiya tes~ 0 -qhanaq1 dapetva);
Sv 257,11 (ku1avake ti 0 -qhane, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
nivasa-); 686,18 (tassa Vepullapabbate nivesanaq1
0
-~~anan ti attho); Spk II 401,29 (tebhümakavan~
0
Marassa -~~an~. Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nivasa-); Th-a I
27,19 (sa hi ku~i ... 0 -phasutaya sukha ti vutta); 48,25
(upaga ti 0 -vasena upagacchi); Vibh-a 366,19 (sevatl ti
0
-vasena sevati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nivasana-); -
0
-gama, n., a village to Uve in; Ja II 166,15 (-~ e' assa
brahmadeyy~ datva);- see also nivasana2, nivasa2.
nivasapeti 1, caus. pr. 3 sg. of*nivasati 1 qv.
nivasapeti 2, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnivasati 2 qv.
nivasi(n) 1, mfn. [S. nivasin], dressed (in); wearing; ?
Ap-a 473,24 (ajinuttaravasano ti ajinamigacammaq1
uttarasang~ katva -ino).
nivasi(ni, mfn. and m. [S. nivasin], living (in), dwelling,
staying; a (pennanent) inhabitant; D III 195,19 (tattha
santi ujara yakkha -ino; Sv 962,26: yakkha
nibaddhavasino); Ja VI 123,15 (tattha -ino devaputtassa);
529,2* (ramayant' eva agantuq1 modayanti -in~);
Ap141,7 (Tivaray~ -1 'h~ ahosiq1); Vism 610,26 (atta
616 ni visa ti
-1 karako vedako sayaq1vas1 ti); Sv 1.22* (theranaq1 ...
mahavihare -1naq1, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee maha-
viharadhivas1naq1); Nidd-a II 80,3o (araññako ti araññe
-1, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nivas~); - ifc see cira-, ciraratta-
(sv cira), tan- (sv ta[d]).
nivasika, mfn. [nivasi(n) + ki], staying, living, dwelling;
Ja II 435,14* (Barill).assaq1 maharaja kakaraja -o; 435,zo·:
-o ti nibaddhavasanako); Ap 483,15 (Kassapo nama
gottena Uruvelanivasiko, Be, Ce so; Ee -nivasita; Se
Uruvelaya n1vasiq1).
nivaseti 1 , -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. of *nivasati1qv.
nivaseti2 , caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnivasati 2 qv.
nivicikiccha,f, se e sv vicikiccha.
nivittha 1, mfn., see sv nibbisati.
nivittha 2 , mfn., pp ofnivisati qv.
nividdha, mfn., see sv nibbijjhati.
nivisati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nivisati], enters or penetrates into;
settles (on); is intent on; is convinced, insists on; is
founded; D II 308,7 (esa ... ta¡;¡ha kattha uppajjamana
uppajjati kattha -amana -ati) f. S II 108,28 (Spk II
119,27: punappun~ pavattivasena pati~~ahati); Ja I
413,12* (yattha veñ -atina vase tattha pa¡;¡<;lito, Be, Ee so;
Ce nivasati; Se niv1sati; = III 357,6•: eds nivasati);
III 259,19* (kiq1slle kiq1samacare purise -ase tuv~. Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee nivase; 259,21·: tava cittena -asi
patiqhahasi, Be, Ce so; Ee vasasi; Se citte); Sp 1050,26
(paccha gamo -ati); Spk III 171,5 (yatha hi
1o¡;¡adhüpanaq1 sabbavyañjanesu pi -ati, Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee pavisati); Cp-a 103,4 (kalyill).e abhinivissatha ti ...
kalya¡;¡e attano kayavacacittani abhimukhabhavena
nivissatha, eds so); - part.pr. nivisamana, mfn., D II
308,7 f. S II 108,28; - aor. 3 sg. nivisi, Vin III 249,18
(pa~iyekko gamo -i); - absol. nivissa, - nivissavada,
nivissavadi(n), mfn., speaking insistently, dogmatically;
Sn 910 (Nidd I 326,7: idam eva saccaq1 mogh~ aññan ti
nivissavad1; Pj II 560,26: janami passami tath' eva etan ti
evaq1 nivissavad1); 913 (na chandagü no pi nivissavadl,
Be, Ce, Nidd I so; Ee, Se -vado); - pp niviffha2 , mfn.
[S. nivi~~a], l. settled; encamped; Vin IV 105,15 (uyyutta
nama sena gamato nikkhamitva -a va hoti payata va);
Ja I 333,2o (ekasmiq1 araññaqhane satthe -e); Dhp-a I
199,1 (bahi -~ attano khandhavar~ papu¡;¡i, Ce, Ee so;
Be, Se nivutthaq1); Cp-a 252,19 (sena ... bahinagare yeva
-a);- 2. settled, founded; Ja II 444,21 (rama¡;¡1yo viharo
pighipasill).e -o); V 511,15 (kammasapadassa
damita~~ane --tta pana so gamo Kammasadamma-
nigamo nama jato, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nivu~~atta);
Sv 697,8 (so kira gamo ambasa¡;¡<;lan~ avidüre -o);
Cp-a 40,3 (Kusavatinamake nagare, yasmiq1 thane
etarahi Kusinara -a, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr n1vi!!ha); -
ifc see gonisadi- (sv go); - 3. resting or staying in;
tumed to, intent upon; D III 84,18 (yassa ... tathagate
saddha -a mülajata patighita ... ; Sv 864,9: -a ti
abhinivigha aca1aqhita); MI 286,15 (hatapahate -o); SI
67,4* (rüpe ca ye -ase); Ud 72,18* (dighe sute iti h' eke
-a); It 35,15* (passa lok~ ... -~ namarüpasmiq1; It-a I
155,!2foll.: ta¡;¡hadighivasena abhinivigh~ ajjhositaq1)
= Sn 756; Sn 781 (chandanun1to ruciya -o); Jai 259,19
(mahajano yebhuyyena adhammasmiq1 yeva -o);
V 218,6* (rañño mano Ummadantya -o); VI 111,33*
nivisana
(paresa111 hi111saya sada -a); - ifc see kasa-, nlca-; -
4. married; Ja Ili 527,16 (eka Kasiraghe kuladhita ...
paccantagame -a hoti, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nivuttha); -
see also nibbittha (sv nibbisati); - anivigha, mfn.,
unmarried; Sp 532,22 (kulakumariyo nama aniviqha
vuccanti, Ee, Se so; Ce anibbigha; Be anividdha) t
Sv 520,6 (kulaghara¡;¡iyo, kulakumariyo ti -a tasa111
dhltaro, Ee, Se so; Be, Se anividdha) = Mp IV 12,24 (Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be anividdha); Nidd-a I 451,13 (mahallika
aniviqhakumariyo, Ce, E e, Se so; Be anibbiddha-) =
Vibh-a 339,2! (eds so); - dunniviqha, mfn., badly
settled or established; Sv 90,21 (asuka visikha sunivittha
dunniviqha sura samattha ti; Sv-pr I 165,29 foil.:
visikhagaha¡;¡ena ca tannivasino gahita) = Ps III 223,4 t
Spk III 295,II (asukavisikha sunivigha dunniviqha ti va
asukavisikhaya vasino süra samattha ti va, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee omit dunnivirrha); - suniviqha, mfn., well or
properly settled or established; Ja VI 124,!4* (saddhaya
suniviqhaya); Sv 90,21 = Ps III 223,4 t Spk III 295,II;-
caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. niveseti, -ayati, makes en ter; directs
towards; causes to settle (on); establishes, founds; gives
m marriage; D III 189,!2 (matapitaro ... putta111
anukampanti papa nivarenti kalya¡;¡e -enti); SI 102,27*
(buddhe dhamme ca saiJ.ghe ca dhlro saddh3111 -aye);
A III 263,28 (dhammadassane -eti); Dhp 158 (attanam
eva parham3111 patirüpe -aye; Dhp-a III 142,Ijoll.:
anucchavike gu¡;¡e patirrhapeyya); 282 (tath' attan3111
-eyya yatha bhüñ pava<;l<;lhati); It 78,14' (aññe pi macee
saddhamme brahmacariye -aya, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -aye)
= Ap 195,4 (eds -aya); Ja III 441,21' (ath' assa da¡;¡<;la111
sadis3111 -aye; 442,21': -aye rhapeyya pavatteyya ti);
V 66,12* (kummagga111 na -eyya); Ap 575,! (ucchaiJ.ge
m3111 -aya, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nivasaya); Sv 273,7
(asukasmi111 padese ... gama111 va nigama111 va nagara111
va -etun ti); Dhp-a I 318,14 (tattha na -eyya a1aya111 na
kareyya ti); - part.pr. nivesenta, mfn., la II 137,Io
(dhltaro -entena patitthapentena kassa nu kho databba);
V 123,3¡·; Vism 76,18 (gama111 -enta, Se so; Ce -etva;
Be, Ee -anta); - aor. 3 sg. (a) nivesesi, DI 206,7
(kattha ca ima111 janata111 samadapesi -esi patirrhapesl
ti); Ja li 192,23* (so ma111 atthe -esi); 208,7 (uyyane
khandhavara¡p -esi, Ce, Ee so; Be -ayi; Se nivasesi);
V 511,11 (bahüni kulani pesetva gama¡p -esi, Be, Ce, E e
so; Se nivasapesi); Ap 502,15 (sara¡;¡agamane kañci -esi
tathagato); Dhp-a I 360,1 (khandhavar3111 -esi, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee nivasesi); Mhv 37:87; (b) nivesayi, SI 132,32* (so
ma¡p sacce -ayi); Pv 32:7; Ja VI 237,4* (so ma¡p atthe
-ayi); Mhv 6:35 (araññe ... game ... -ayi); 37:19
(khandhavara¡p -ayi); 3 pl. nivesesu111, Ap 610,2o
(ga¡;¡ikatte -esu¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -i¡psu); -
absol. (a) nivesetva, Ja II 336,! (satthaviihaputto
parakantare satth3111 -etva, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nivasetva);
IV 151 ,26' (aramato avidüre khandhavara¡p -etva, Ce, Ee
so; Be, Se nivasetva); V 35,27 (mahagama¡p -etva, Ce,
Ee, Se so; Be nivasetva); 315,25 (nagarassa avidüre
khandhavara¡p -etva, Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nivasapetva);
VI 23,24' (bahi khandhavara111 -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nivasapetva); Spk li 375,5 (sakarasatth3111 -etva); Mp I
348,7 (khandhavara¡p -etva); Dhp-a I 52,1 (ima¡p netva
attano gehe -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nivasapetva); 175,7
617 nivetheti
(taya na¡p saddhi111 -etva); 193,11 (bahi khandhavar3111
-etva acchi); Cp-a 248,16 (bodhisatto ... tassa pitar3111 ...
kammapha1asaddhaya -etva); Mhv 10:46
(khandhavara¡p -etva); - neg. anivesetva, Dhp-a III
142,6; (b) nivesetvana, Mhv 34:42; (e) nivesiya, Th 1142
(yogena niggayha pathe -iya; Th-a III 161,14:
vipassanav1thiy3111 -etva patitthapetva); - pass.
pr. 3 sg. niveslyati, Ud-a419,7 (-iyanti, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee -Iyanti); - pp nivesita, mfn., settled; founded;
Dhp-a I 391,21 (mahakula111 et3111 maya... Sakete
-ita111); Vv-a 82,26 (sumapite ti Mahagovindapa¡;¡<;litena
vatthuvijjavidhina samma-d-eva -ite); Mhv 10:95
(avasapa:Ii .. . asi -ita); - neg. anivesita, mfn., -
anivesitatthana, n., a place where (skulls) are not settled
or deposited; ? Ja II 55,24 (parhaviya¡p .. . asusana-
ghan3111 va sisana111 anivesitarrhana¡p va laddhu111 na
sakka ti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se aniverhita-, prob. wr); -
fpp nivesetabba, mfn., S V 189,6 (te vo bhikkhave
catunn3111 satipaghanana111 bhavanaya samadapetabba
-etabba patitthapetabba); A III 138,14 (te ... bhikkhü
pañcasu dhammesu samadapetabba -etabba
patinhapetabba);- caus. (b) aor. 3 sg. nivesapesi, Ja V
321,29 (assamassa avidüre khandhavara111 nivesapesi, Ee
so; Be nivasesi; Ce, Se nivasapesi);- see also nivasati 2.
mv1sana, n. ffrom nivisati], settling; Paris-a 161,33
0
( -paripakkhavasena nirujjhati ti); -se e also nivesana.
nivufa, mfn., se e sv nivuta.
nivutfha, mfn., pp ofnivasati2 qv.
nivuta, nivura, mfn. [S., BHS nivf!a, pp of ni.Vvrl.
hindered, obstructed; suppressed; surrounded,
enveloped; Abh 746 (parikkhitta¡p -3111); DI 246,22
(pañcahi nivara¡;¡ehi tevijja briihma¡;¡a avara -a, Ee so;
Be, Ce, Se nivura); M III 131 ,2o (avijjakhandhena ... -o,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nivuro; Ps IV 198,1s: -o ti nivarito, Be
so; Ce, Ee, Se nivuro ti); S IV 127,26' (-ana¡p tamo hoti);
Sn 1082 (jatijaraya -a); Th 572 (avijjaya -o kayo;
Th-a li 245,5: avijjanivara¡;¡ena -o paricchaditadinavo,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee paricchadito); Paris I 163,16
(kamacchandena 0 -tta); Ap 207,14 (-3111 hoti me papa¡p);
Kv 480,3o (-o nlvara¡;¡a¡p jahati ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nlvuto); Mil161,4 (etthaya¡p jano avato -o ovulo pihito
pariyonaddho ); Sv 665,2o (-o pihito brahmaloko assa ti);
Pj II 349,! (yatha abbhaghanena -o 1oko, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee abbhaghane); - 0 -brahmaloka, mfn., who is kept
from the brahma world; D 11 242,18* (apayika -a, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se nivuta-, prob. me; Sv 666,2: paricchanna-
brahmalokamagga); - see also nivareti, nivarati.
nivutta 1, mfn. [pp of ni 1 + .Vvap 1], shaved, cut off; -
0
-kesa, mfn. [cf S. uptakesa], whose hair has been
shaved off; Sn 456 (Pj II 403,5: apagatakeso,
oharitakesamassü ti vuttam hoti).
nivutta 2 , mfn.,pp ofnivapaÍi qv.
nivuttaip. in Ee at Pv-a 73,3 is wr for ti vutta¡p (Be, Ce, Se
so).
nivutti, f [S. nivrtti], cessation; - (fe see gati-; - see
also nivatti.
nivuttha, mfn., pp ofnivasati2 qv.
nivusita, mfn.,pp ofnivasati 2 qv.
nivethiya,f, se e sv nibberhiya.
nivetheti, pr. 3 sg., see sv nibberheti.
 nivedaka
nivedaka, m(fn). [ts], (one) who informs, reports, makes
known; Ja VI 22,r (puttanivedako ti puttassa -o ovadako
hutva gacchami, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nivadako) ;- ifc see
paramattha- (sv parama).
nivedana, n. [ts], informing, making known; Ap-a483,32
(t~ bhagavato -~); Mhv 5:216.
nivediya, mfn. or n. [cf S. nivedya], to be presented; oran
offering of food; Ja VI 516,12' (agghiyarp -arp katarp,
Ce, Ee so; Be nivedan~; Se nivedayarp).
nivedeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nivedayati], makes known,
reports, announces; informs; Ja I 60,21 (puttassa me
tughirp -etha ti); VI 165,4* (sabbe nage -aya); Ap 541,2
(gacch' Ánanda -ehi bhikkhün~ matu nibbutirp); Pj II
382,28 (sacaharp rañño Bimbisarass a attano agaman~
-eyy~); Th-a II 49,28 (vusitabrahm acariyatarp -essama
ti); part.pr. nivedenta, mi( -enti)n., Pj II 98,!7
(kumarena sltu¡;¡hadlni -entena, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee
veden tena) = Ap-a 176,34; Th-a II 93,!3 (-enti); - aor.
3 sg. (a) nivedesi, Ja I 301,28 (t~ kara¡;¡~ -e si);
II 313,3; Ps II 19,7; (b) nivedayi, Mhv 5:242;
(e) nivedayittha, Da~h 5:42; 3 pl. (a) nivedesurp, Spk I
321 ,14; Pv-a 278,32 (t~ pavattirp -esurp, Be, Se so; Ce,
Ee pavedesurp); (b) nivedayirpsu, Ja I 307,7; Spk III
283,28; (e) nivedayurp, Ap 4,16; Mhv 33:73;
absol. nivedetva, Ja I 92,3; Vism 28,13; Dhp-a I 213,!5;
- pp nivedita, mfn. [ts], informed; made known,
announced; Sv 91,6 (--tta); Dhp-a I 83,7 (aggasavakehi
-arp Sañjayassa anagaman~ arabbha); Th-a II 93,17
(ev~ taya devataya -ena sailghena katokaso thero, Be,
Se so; Ce omits devataya; Ee taya -o sailghena ... ); -
anivedita, mfn., not informed; Ud-a 159,8;
fpp nivedetabba, niveditabba, mfn., Pj I 39,26 (attano
adhippayo nivedetabbo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee niveditabbo);
- caus. absol. nivedapetva, Dhp-a I 213,!9;- see also
nivediya.
nivesa, m. [S. nivesa], l. settling (on or in); a settlement; a
house, a home; Sn 300 (disvana . . . nivesane -e ca
vibhatte bhagaso mite; Pj II 320,1: nivesane ti
gharavatthüni -e ti tattha patighapitag harani) t Ja VI
276,19* (276,21 ': gehani e' eva gehavatthüni ca); Vv 8:2
(ku~agara -a te vibhatta bhagaso mita; V v-a 50,6: -a ti
nivesanani; t Pv 27:21: Be, Ce, E e ku~agaranivesana; Se
kütagara nivesana); Sv 85,II (senavyuhan ti senaya -o,
saka!avyühadivasena senaya nivesanarp, Se so; Be, Ce,
Ee senaniveso );- ifc see nava- (sv nava 1);- 2. where
something establishes or settles itself; Mp III 385,22joll.
(abhiniveso ti pattharitva ~hitasakhan~ -o,
mülasantana kanan ti muJan~ -o).
nivesana, n. (and -a, f ?) [S. nivesana], l. settlement; a
dwelling-place, a house, a home; Abh 206
(niketananivesan~); Vin III 10,33 (bhagava . . . yena
Verañjassa brahma¡;¡assa -~ ten' upasailkami); 200,32
(nanakulassa -arp hoti); D II 180,17 (yannuna mayarp
rañño Mahasudass anassa -arp mapeyyama ti); M Il 50,8
(sake -e pa¡;¡ltarp khadanly~ bhojanlyarp
pa~iyadapetva); Ud 29,24 (Sakkassa devanam indassa
-arp); Su 305 ( -ani rammani suvibhattani bhagaso );
Vv 64:29 (pupphabhiki¡;¡¡;¡amhi sake -e, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se nivasane ); J a IV 341 ,22* (y e capi me saku¡;¡a atthi
baddha ... -asmirp); 462,8* (dakkhemu te naga -ani);
618 nisajjii
V 280,25 (idarp vo -an ti pucchi); VI 245,!8* (atthl ti ce
Narada saddahasi -~ paraloke matan~); 433,9* (ehi
dani maharaja mapit~ te -arp); 446,!6* (-amhi te deva
senailg~ parihapitarp; 446,!8': t~ nagararp sandhay'
aha); Ap305,22 (-am upehi me); Mil3l,I3 (ayasma
Nagaseno yena Milindassa rañño -arp ten' upasailkami);
Ud-a 51,12 (pakaraparikkhepayuttani -ani katva);
Mhv 37:86; Sadd 453,!8 (-arp vuccati geharp); -
2. settling (on or in), attachment (to); where one settles;
Sn 210 (aññaya sabbani -ani; Pj II 258,2jol/.: -anl ti
kamabhavadike bhave, nivisanti hi tesu salta tasma -anl
ti vuccanti); 470 (-~yo manaso ahasi; Pj II 409,J7joll.:
-an ti ta¡;¡hadighinivesan~, tena hi mano tlsu bhavesu
nivisati tena t~ -~ manaso ti vuccati); 801 (-a tassa
na santi keci; Nidd I 110,3: dve -a ta¡;¡hanivesana ca
ditthinivesana ca); 1055 (etesu nandirp ca -arp ca
panujja); - anivesana, mfn., without settling, without
attachment; Dhp 40 (anivesano siya; Dhp-a I 317,Is:
analayo bhaveyya); - see also nivisana, pacchanives ane
(sv paccha).
niveseti, -ayati, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnivisati qv.
nivodakarp in Ee at Ja II 57,20 is wr; Be, Ce vodakarp; Se
nirodak~.
nivyaggha, nibyaggha, mfn., see sv vyaggha.
nivyadhi,f and mfn., see sv vyadhi.
nivyapara, mfn., see sv vyapara.
nisakkati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + sakkati], goes down; settles
down; sits down; ? Ja VI 23,18* (pati~~apentu pallailkarp
yattha raja -ati; 23,35': yasmirp pallailke raja nisldissati);
Sadd 326,3 (kaki vaki sakka . . . gatyattha . . . kailkati
vailkati sakkati -ati ... ); 467,2 (sakka... lailgha
gatyattha: sakkati -ati ... ).
nisagga, m. [S. nisarga], a natural state, nature; Abh 177
(sabhavo tu -o).
nisaókharot i, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 + sarp + karoti], constructs;
accumulates; Pj II 569,Io (yasma -lyati -oti ca tasma
nisankhitl ti vuccati, Ce so; Be, Se -oti va; Ee -oti va) =
Nidd-a I 436,3o (Be, Ee, Se -oti va; Ce yasma visailkhati
sailkharoti va); - pass. pr. 3 sg. nisailkharl'yati, Pj II
569,1o =Nidd-a I 436,29.
nisaókhiti, nisailkhati, f [cfS. sarpskrti], formation;
accumulation; Su 953 (anejassa vijanato natthi kaci -i,
Ce so; Be, Se nisailkhati; Ee wr kacini sailkhiti; Nidd I
442,19: -iyo vuccanti puññabhisailkharo apuññabhi-
sailkharo aneñjabhisailkharo, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nisankhatiyo; Pj II 569,9 foil.: -1 ti puññabhi-
sailkharadisu yo koci sailkharo so hi yasma
nisailkhañyati nisailkharoti ca [Be, Se va] tasma -1 ti
vuccati, Ce, E e so; Be, Se nisailkhat! ti).
nisajja, n., see sv nisajja.
nisajjati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv nisldati.
nisajjana, n. (and -a,f) [cfnisajjati and S. ni~adana],
sitting, sitting down; Ja VI 224,28. (-ato anantaram eva
sara¡;¡lyakath~ kathesl ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nisajjato);
Nidd II 275,10 (yehi saha gaman~ phasu .. . -arp
phasu ... , Be, E e, Se so; Ce nisajja); Mp I 113,23
(mahabodhima¡;¡c;Ie manas~ bandhitva -~ nama na
aññassa kassaci aci¡;¡¡;¡~, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nipajjan~);
- ifc see go-.
nisajja,f (and-a, n.), [cfS. lex., BHS ni~adya] (iic often
nisajjita(r)
nisajja-) (the act of) sutmg, stttmg down; a session;
Vin IV 68,19 (ayasma Udayi tassa bhikkhuniya saddhirp
eko ekaya raho -arp kappesi); 92,33 (na me taya saddhirp
katha va -a va phasu hoti); M III 113,6 (tassa ce ...
bhikkhuno ... -aya cittarp namati so nisidati); S V 78,4
(p~a cattaro iriyapathe kappenti kalena gamanarp
kalena thanarp kalena -arp kalena seyyarp); Pv 36:2
(seyya -a na-y-imassa atthi; Pv-a 219,6: pirrhipasaral).a-
lakkhal).a seyya pallailkabhujanadilakkhal).a -a); Ja I
217,17 (ekasmirp rukkhamüle -aya cailkamena ca
vitinamesi); Vism117,11 (ekarp dve -ani sajjhayarp
karetva, Be, Ce so; Ee nissajjani; Se -a); 412,21
(sabbapacchima -a avajjitabba); Sp 1276,9 (pighi me
agilayati ti cirarp -aya vedanatikkhatta badhati);
Sv 193,9 (paramatthato hi dhatünarp yeva gamanarp
dhatunarp thanarp dhatunarp -a dhatünarp sayanarp, Ce,
Ee so; Be, Se nisajjanarp) =PsI 261,6 (Ce, Ee, Se so; Be
nisajjanarp); Sv 767,12 (heghimakayassa samiñjanarp
uparimakayassa ussitabhavo -a ti vuccati); Nidd-a I
309,4 (nisidi ti -arp kappesi); Mhv 14:50 (-arp na
karissanti pithakesu ti); Sadd 862,32 (nisidanarp -a); -
ifc see dukkha-.
nisajjita(r), m. rJrom nisajjati], one who sits; Sp 38,12
(asane va sayane va añño koci -a va nipajjita va natthi).
nisajjesi in Ee at Pv-a 105,21 is wr; read danupakaral).ani
sajjesi with Be, Ce, Se.
nisattha in Ee at Thi 484 is wr for nissarrha qv
sv nissajjati.
nisati 1, nirpsati, pr. 3 sg. [S. Dhatup nirpste, Wg § 24:15],
kisses; Sadd 452,5 (nisi cumbane: nisati, Be so; Ee
ni<m>sati).
nisatii, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. Dhatup mi~ati, Wg § 28:60: mi~a
spardhayarp], competes; is conceited; ? Sadd 453,28 (nisa
phaddhayarp, phaddha ti vinibandho, aharpkarass' etarp
adhivacanarp: -ati).
nisada, f, -a, n. [cf BHS nisada, ni~ida, S. dr~ad], a stone
for grinding, a (lower) millstone; Vin I 201,10
(gilanana111 bhikkhunarp mulehi bhesajjehi pirthehi attho
hoti ... anujanami bhikkhave -arp 0 -potan ti, E e, Se so;
Be, Ce 0 -potakan ti; Sp 1090,3: pirpsanasila ca
pirpsanapotako ca, Ee, Se so; Be pisanasila ca pisanapoto
ca; Ce omits); Ja VI 331,23 (tarp osadharp gahetva -aya
gharpsitva); Mi1149,2o (kharalaval).arp -aya
pirpsapeyya); Sp 1244,26 (udukkhalarp musalarp supparp
-arp 0 -potakarp ... , Ee, Se so; Be, Ce 0 -poto); Mhv 23:6
(katiya -amhi abandhisurp); 30:9 (pirpsapayitva -e); -
0
-pota, 0 -potaka, m. (and 0 -potaka,f ?) [cf BHS
nisadaputra, S. dr~atputra], a stone for grinding; an
(upper, smailer) millstone or stone roller; Vin I 201,10
(anujanami bhikkhave nisadarp -an ti, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
0
-potakan ti); Ps II 59,29 ( -ehi atrhini bhinditva, Be so;
Ce, Ee, Se 0 -potakehi) = Mp II 90,12 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
0
-potakehi) = Nidd-a I 279,12 (Ce, Ee 0 -potakehi; Be, Se
0
-potakahi); Paris-a 582,17 (yatha loke 0 -potako
--sarirassa anaññatte pi sati -assa sañran ti vuccati, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -potakasarirassa); Vism 252,27
(urumarpsarp --Sal).thanarp, Be, Ce, E e so; Se 0 -potaka-)
= Vibh-a 235,24 (eds 0 -potaka-) f. Pj I 46,20 (Ce -pota-;
Be, Se -potaka-; Ee -putta-; see also
1 saras or primary notes of music; Abh 132 (usabho ...
gandhapirpsanaka (sv gandha ).
619 nisada
nisanti, f [cfnisameti], (clase) observation; careful
attention; D III 128,23 (tassa ca atthassa tesarp ca
vyañjananarp -iya; Sv 912,6: -iya ti nisamanattharp
dharal).attharp); - ifc see khippa- (sv khippi), dhamma-
(sv dhamma 1);- see also nisamana.
nisandhetva in Ee at Ap 193,18 is wr; Be, Ce isimuggani
pirpsitva; Se isimuggarp nimantetva.
nisabha, m. [prob. <S. r~abha; possibly < *nr + r~abha], a
buil; a leader; the best or most excellent (of a group);
MI 386,12* (-assa appameyyassa . . . bhagavato ); S I
28,16 (-o vata bho samai).O Gotamo; Spk I 80,19: bhagava
pana appatisamaghena asabhaghanarp patijanati, ten' ev'
atthena idhapi -o ti vutto); 91,2o* (so ñatisailgharp -o
bharitva); Ja V 70,24* (-o etad abravi; 73,1·: -o ti
purisanisabho uttamavanarindo ); VI 526,10* (rajaputtarp
-arp); Ps II 26,31 (sabbagavasettho sabbaparissayasaho
seto pasadiko mahabharavaho asanisatasaddehi pi
asampakampiyo -o); Pj II 40,17 foil. (keci pana bhal).anti
gavasatajetrho usabho sahassajetrho vasabho
satasahassajetrho -o ti, apare ekagamakkhette jegho
usabho dvisu jegho vasabho sabbattha appatihato -o
ti ... api ca kho pana usabho ti va vasabho ti va -o ti va
sabbe v' ete appatisamaghena veditabba); Vv-a 83,5foll.
(isinisabho ti ... -o vi ya ti -o ... sekkhasekkha-isisu -o
isinarp va -o isi ca so -o ca ti va isinisabho); Ap-a 473,3
(usabho vasabho -o asabho ti cattaro gavajetrhaka);
0
Sadd 107,2 (puilgavo ti gunnarp yuthapati -sailkhato
usabho ); ifc se e patilina- (sv patiliyati);
0
-vatli,f(?) [nisabha + va(t) 1 + ta ?], the being (like) a
buil; ? S I 28,16 (nisabho vata bho samai).O Gotamo -a ca
samuppanna sañrika vedana dukkha ... sato sampajano
adhivaseti, Be, Ce, Ee 1, Se so; Ei [59,1]: nisabho va ta
ca pan' uppanna; cfSpk I 80,13: nagavata ti naga-
bhavena; Spk-t [Be] I 115,27: nago viya vati pavattati ti
nagavo tassa bhavo --vata, vibhattilopena h' esa
niddeso; see also issaravata); - see also usabha,
narasabha (sv nara).
nisamma, ind., absol. ofnisameti qv.
nisa, f (and -a, n. ?) [cf S. nis (nisi), nisa], night; Abh 69
(-a ca rajan! ratti); Vv 35:2 (jalam iva dhümasikho -e
nabhagge; V v-a 161 ,s: -e ti -i, rattiyan ti attho, Ce so;
Be, Ee, Se -e ti -ati); Ja IV 429,6* (-e aggi va bhasati;
429,26" foil.: rattirp aggikkhandho viya obhasati) quoted
Sadd 670,2o foil. ( -saddato ca smirpvacanassa ettarp hoti
0
va -e aggi va bhasati, va ti kirp -ayarp); Mi1388,31
(cando -aya carati); Darh 5:2 (disvana te dvijavaro
pathike -ayarp);- 0 -kara, m. [nisa + kara 1], the moon;
Abh 51 (cando... somo -o); Sadd 380,25*;
Samantak 437 (- '-abha); - sanisakara, mjil., together
with the moon; Ap 536,11; - 0 -natha, m., the moon;
2
Abh 52; Sadd 380,26*; - 0 -pati, m. [nisa + pati ], the
moon; Sadd 380,26*.
nisataka, m(jn). [cf S. nisatayati, visad; or cfnisada 1 ?],
(one) who hunts, who kills;?- ifc see koka-.
nisada 1, m. [cf S., BHS ni~ada], a hunter; a bandit; Ja IV
366,2s· (gopanisadehi ti gopalakehi e' eva -ehi ca
gamaghatakacorehi sama ti vuttarp, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nesadehi);- ifc see gopa- (sv go);- see also nesada.
nisada , m. [S. ni~ada], the first (or seventh) of the seven
2
 nisada 620 nisidati

pañcamo ca -o).
sallakkh etva rogatikicchanaf)l viya sabbaka mmani -etva
nisada3 , m. [cfnislda ti], sitting down, settling; ? - ifc see
upadhar etva karontas sa); Ja IIl 106,z*; IV 30,5 (rañña
go-.
nama nisamma karina bhavitabbaf)l); Mil 3,29; Cp-a 279,9
nisadana, n. [cf S. satana ?], sharpening, whetting; - !fe
(nisammakaritaf)l); - neg. anisamm akari(n), mfn., Ja III
se e satthaka- (sv satthaka \
441,26*; - nisamm akiriya, f, action after careful
nisadi, nisadika, mfn., [cfnislda ti; S. ni~adin], associated
consideration; Mil 59,15; - neg. anisamm a, Ja III
with sitting down, settling; ? - ifc see go-.
106,1*; IV 451,1* (452,1·: anoloket va anupadh aretva);
nisadi(n), mfn. [S. ni~adin], sitting, settling; - ifc see
(b)nisam etva, Jaiii 105,17 (-etva kammaf)l katuf)l
apathaka-, arama-.
vanan ti); IV 233,24* (veyyañjaniyaf)l vaco -etva); -
nisadeti, caus. pr. 3 sg. ofnislda ti qv.
neg. anisame tva, J a IV 29,29; Sp 1360,23; Dhp-a IV 58,3
nisana, n. [cf S. nisana], sharpening, whetting; being
(tathaga tassa kathasaddaf)l pi anisame tva);
sharp, sharpness; Dhatup 63 (tija -e); Dhatum 80;
(c)nisam ayitva, VinV 144,11: Vv63:7 (tava
Sadd 346,12 (-af)l tikkhatakara!)af)l); 385,19 (-af)l
vacanapathaf)l -ayitva) ; (d) neg. anisamaya, Sn 320
tejanaf)l tikkhata ); - ifc see buddhi-, satthaka (bahussutanaf)l anisama y' atthaf)l; Pj II 330,7:
(sv satthaka 1); - se e also niseti.
anisame tva atthaf)l); - neg. pp anisamita, mfn. [cf S.
nisamaka, mfn. [cfnisam eti], closely observing; attending
nisamita], not consider ed carefull y;? Pj II 330,13
carefully to; - 0
-jatika, 0 -jatiya, mfn., natural/y (anisamitatta); - fpp nisameta bba, n. impers., Pj I
disposed to attending carefully; given to closely
167,32.
observing; A V 166,2 (bhikkhu dhammanaf)l na -o hoti
nisara, m. ? mfn. ? [?], (a tree) of firm pith, or great
dhamma nisantiy a na vm:u¡.avad!, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
0
strength; ? hardwoo d;? Vv 63:1 (da!hadh amma -assa
-jatiyo; Mp V 56,3foll.: navannaf)l lokuttara- dhanuf)l olubbha tighasi; V v-a 261,12: -assa ti
dhammanaf)l na nisaman asabhav o na upadhara~a­
niratisay asarassa visitthas arassa rukkhas sa dhanu,
sabhavo) i' 168,10 ;- see also nisanti, nisaman a.
saratararukkhamayaf)l dhanun ti attho; cf S. lex.
nisamana, n., -a,f [S. nisaman a], (clase) observing;
sarataru ?) .
careful attention; Abh 942 (-af)l ... dassane savane pi
nisiñcati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~iñcati], pours upon; sprinkles;
ca); Mp V 56,4 (navannaf)l lokuttaradhammanaf)l na
0
Ja VI 195,17 (pathavi yaf)l-a ti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -ah! ti);
-sabhavo na upadhara!)asabhavo); Patis-a 253,1o 195,19* (chamayaf)l ca -issaf)l); 195,22' (na sakka
(anupass ana punappunaf)l -a); Sadd 421,23foll. (-af)l
pathaviyaf)l -itun ti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee siñcitun ti); -
olokanaf!l savanaf)l ca vuccati . . . api ca ña~ena
absol. nisiñciya, Mhv 7:8 (ku~<;likaya te jalen a -iya).
upaparikkha~af!l pi -am eva ti gahetabbaf)l);
885,17 nisiñcana, n. [from nisiñcati], pouring upon, sprinkling; Ja
(upadhara~e -af)l); - ifc see dhamma - (sv dhamm a\
VI 195,16 (imassa visassa 0 -tthanaf)l na passaml ti).
-se e also ni san ti.
nisita, mfn., pp ofniseti qv.
nisameti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nisamayati], hears; observes
nisiddha, mfn. pp ofnisedh ati qv.
(closely); attends carefully (to); Vin I 103,22
nisinna, mfn., pp ofnislda ti qv.
(manasi karoma ti ekaggac itta avikkhit tacitta nisinnaka, mfn. [nisinna + ka2; S., BHS ni~a~~aka],
avisahat acitta -ema); 156,16* (in uddana: tantimaggaf)l
sitting; seated; V in II 211 ,1; MI 333,26 (ayaf)l sama!)o
-aye); V 158,12 (anuyogavattaf)l -aya); SI 210,20*
-o va ka!akato); Pv 22:1 (divaviharagataf)l bhikkhuf!l
(dhamm am eva -ehi); Khp 6:2 (tasma hi bhiita -etha
gaiigatlre -af)l); Ja I 335,2 (mara~abhayatajjito
sabbe; Pj l 167,14: -etha ti su~atha); Th 832 (idaf)l
sayanapitthe -o va vltinamesi); V 287,13 (janahi kif)l
bhonto -etha yatha bhasati cakkhum a); Th! 434 (taf)l
purimas ane -o raja udahu pacchim asane ti); PatJs II
tava acikkhissaf)l taf)l ekamana -ehi); Ja V 435,5*
209,3 (so -o va nipanna ko va candima suriye p~ina
(saddaf!l -e ti parassa bhasato ); 486,1 * (tam eva sakkacc a
amasati); Vism 292,26 (amhehi asane -a va
-ayami) ; VI 45,16* (najja nacce -eti); 511,28* (iiigha
parinibb ayanta ditthapu bba ti); Sadd 384,14 (aslno
Maddi -ehi rammariipaf!l va dissati; 511 ,3o·: -eh! ti
nisinno -o);- see also gonisinnakaf)l (sv go).
olokehi); Ap 311 ,1o (sabbaf)l sippaf)l -emi); Vism 2,24*
nisippa, mfn .. see sv sippa.
(Visuddhimaggaf)l bhasissaf)l, taf)l me sakkacc a bhasato
nisitha, m. [S. nisltha], midnight, night; Abh 70 (-o
visuddh ikama sabbe pi -ayatha sadhavo ); Sv 933,18 (eke
majjhim a ratti); Th 3 (aggi yatha pajja1ito -e, Be, Ce, Ee
randhag avesino .. . -ayanti) ; Mp III 300,1o (khippaf!l
so; Se nislve); 524 (yada -e, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nislve;
-ayati upadhar etl ti khippanisant!); As 2,12* (avikkhitta
Th-a II 220,16: -e ti rattiyaf)l); Ja IV 432,10* (-e pi raho
-etha dullabha hi ayaf)l katha); Sadd 557,27 foil. (sama
dani sutto raja sasarathi, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nissive;
vitakke . . . -eti -ayati . . . -en ti vitakketi upadhareti ...
432,21·: yatha -e a<;l<;lharattasamaye, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
sama alocan e ... ettha pana -e ti ti pekkhat i oloketi); -
nissive); V 293,23* (diva ca ratto ca 0 -ka1e); 506,9*
aor. 3 sg. nisamayi, D III 158,17* (atthakathaf)l -ayi); -
(pa~issaraf)l kumbhathiinaf)l -e, Be, Ce, Ee
absol. (a) nisamm a [S. nisamya ], D II 274,17 (saf)lvega- so; Se
nissive).
jatassa vaco nisamma ); Sn 317 (tad aqhikatv ana
nisidati, nisajjati (influenced by nipajjati and nisajja ?) pr.
nisamm a dh!ro); Jaiii 106,1* (nisamm a khattiyo kayira
3 sg. [S. ni~!dati; cf BHS ni~edyati], sits down; is seated,
nanisam ma); IV 452,22* (nisamm a dhamme su sits; sits up; V in l 23,25 (tena hi vo kumara -atha
paribbajassu); - nisamma kari(n), mfn., acting after dhammaf)l vo desessam l ti); 180,26 (akase antalikk he
careful consideration; Dhp 24 (sucikam massa caiikamati pi titthati pi -ati pi seyyaf)l pi kappeti);
nisamma karino; Dhp-a l 238,24{oll.: nidanaf)l IV94,26 (-atha bhante ma agamitth a ti); DI 71,18 (so
nisidati
pacchabhattaq¡ pii.J<Japatapatikkanto -ati pallankaq¡
abhujitva ujuq¡ kayaq¡ pai.Jidhaya parimukhaq¡ satiq¡
upatthapetva); 179,18 (-atu bhante bhagava idaq¡ asanaq¡
paññattan ti); MI 359,2o (sace akankhasi -a ti);
II 142,27 foil. (alaq¡ bho -atha tumhe sake asane,
idhahaq¡ sama1_1assa Gotamassa santike -issami ti); S II
209,23 (ehi bhikkhu idaq¡ asanaq¡ -ahi ti); A II 82,33
(matugamo n' eva sabhaya -ati na kammantaq¡
payojeti); Sn 331 (uqhahatha -atha ko attho supitena
vo ); Pv 21 :3 (yassa rukkhassa chayaya -eyya sayeyya
va); Th 514 (na -e muhuttaq¡ pi tm_1hasalle anühate);
Ja VI 24,3' (idh' eva te -assu niyate Pai.JI.Jasanthare, Be
so; Ce, Ee nisinnassa; Se nisinnassu); 367,8 (dvare -a ti);
479,18 (mayaq¡ tumhakaq¡ pitthito -issama ti); Nidd I
466,8 (asanaq¡ vuccati yattha -ati); Ap 65,22 (sihasane -a
tvaq¡, Ce, Ee so; Be -ataq¡; Se -atu); 352,17 (asandisu
-are); Mil 83,12foll. (dve sakm_1a akasena gaccheyyuq¡
tesu eko ucce rukkhe -eyya eko nice rukkhe -eyya);
Pv-a 189,18 (tiqhasi ti ... nisajjasi ti pi patho, -asi tv ev'
assa attho daqhabbo ); Thi-a 115,22 (vivitte okase -atha
nisajjatha); Sadd 858,15 (sadadhatussa sidadeso hoti
nisinno -ati);- part.pr. (a) nisida(t), mfn., Vism 282,27;
Sv 587,2 (tighaq¡ -aq¡); PsI 225,32 (Sakkassa -ato);
(b) nisidanta, mfi -anti)n., V in III 79,20 (paticchannaq¡
darakaq¡ -anto ottharitva maresi); Ja V 197,14 (tassa ...
-antiya); Vism 264,24; Dhp-a I 161,14 (titthanta -anta
nipajjanta); - neg. anisldanta, mfn., Mp II 187 ,4;
As 315,26; (e) nisldamana, mfn., PsI 157,16 (suññagaraq¡
pavisitva -amano bhikkhu); It-a I l68,29; - aor.
3 sg. nisldi, Vin I 1,8 (bhagava bodhirukkhamüle
sattahaq¡ ekapallankena -i vimuttisukhapatisaq¡vedl);
MI 146,26 (bhagavantaq¡ abhivadetva ekamantaq¡ -i);
Ud ll,1o (paññatte asane -i); Th 563; Ja IV 106,1 (sllaq¡
avajjamana -i); Mil 5,3 (pattakkhandho tu1_1hlbhüto
pajjhayanto -i); PsI 111,4 (cha nisajjadose vajjetva -i);
3 pl. (a) nisidiipsu, Vin II 78,23; D II 209,23 (deva
tavatiq¡sa sakesu asanesu -iq¡su); Ud 26,26; Ja IV 391 ,23;
Vism 634,17; (b) nis!disuq¡. Ap 538,28; Mhv 7:40; -
absol. (a) nisajja [S. ni~adya], Vin III 70,18; M III 155,4
(nisajja pade pakkhalesi); Sn 419; Ja I 166,13 (pubbe
pai.J<Jita akase nisajja dhammaq¡ desetva); VI 486,2o*
(tada nisajja pasade danaq¡ datuq¡ vicintayiip);
Ap 157,24; Mhv 28:29; (b) nislditva 1, Vin II 161,32
(chamayaq¡ -itva); III 196,27 (ukkutikaq¡ -itva); D II
211,8 (pallankena -itva); Ja II 2,12 (amacca ...
vinicchayatthane -itva); VI 195,1o (aq¡saküte -itva);
Ap 22,4 (smi.ghamajjhe -itva); Mill23,15; Vism 43,19;-
nis!ditva in Ee at As 187,32 is wr for niddisitva (Be, Ce,
Se so); - neg. anislditva, Ja II 284,12; VI 24,6 (raja
garavena Pai.JI.Jasanthare pi anislditva bhümiyaq¡ -i);
Vism 69,5; (e) nisiditvana, Sn 1031 (-itvana pañjali);
Bv 1:28; Sadd 384,18; (d) nisldiya, nisldiyana, Bv 11:12
(sanghamajjhe -iya); Mhv 32:16 (-iya); Sadd 384,19
(-iya -iyana); (e) nislditüna, Sadd 384,19;
pp nisinna, mfn. and n. [cfS., BHS ni~a1_11_1a], l. (mfn.)
(i) sitting down; (being) seated; V in I 160,4
(chabbaggiya bhikkhü theresu bhikkhüsu ukkutikaq¡
-esu pavarayamanesu asanesu acchanti); III 12,2
(bhagava mahatiya parisaya parivuto dhammaq¡ desento
-o hoti); DI 50,18 (esa maharaja bhagava majjhimaq¡
621 nisidati
thambhaq¡ mssaya puratthabhimukho -o purakkhato
bhikkhusanghassa ti); 90,11 foll. (-o va hi . . . -ena
brahma1_1o brahma1_1ena saddhiq¡ sallapituq¡ arahati);
II 14,12 (añña itthika -a va nipanna va vijayanti);
III 17,1o (sama1_1o pi Gotamo mayhaq¡ arame
divaviharaq¡ -o ti); MI 21,16 (n' eva tava nipajjami na
titthami na cankamami yava -o va taq¡ bhayabheravaq¡
pativinemi); 246,32 (abhijanami kho panahaq¡ pitu
Sakkassa kammante sitaya jambucchayaya -o ...
pathamaq¡ jhanaq¡ upasampajja viharita); SI 237,18
(aññataro yakkho dubbai.Jl.JO . . . Sakkassa devanam
indassa asane -o ahosi); A IV 85,15 (ayasma
Mahamoggallano ... pacalayamano -o hoti); V 185,15
(aññatitthiya paribbajaka ... tiracchanakathaq¡ kathenta
-a honti); Sn 193 (caraq¡ va yadi va tighaq¡ -o uda va
sayaq¡); Pv 21:66 (atidüre -o si agaccha mama santike);
Th 197 (-o hatthiglvayaq¡); Ja II 304,21 (raja
vinicchayaqhane -o va ahosi); IV 114,25 (kutumbiko
apal_le -o); 451,21* (matucca ankasmi ahaq¡ -o);
Vism 99,2 (cammakhai.J<Jaq¡ paññapetva tattha
pallaii.kena -o kammaghanaq¡ kathesl ti); Sv 587,3o
(kenaci pana kara1_1!yena --tta); - ifc see cira-; -
(ii) sat upon; sat in; Sp 687,9 (sakiq¡ -aq¡ e' eva
nipannaq¡ ca; ad Vin III 232,2o: puriil.Jasanthataq¡ nama
sakiq¡ nivatthaq¡ pi sakiq¡ parutaq¡ pi); V v-a 38,19
(therena -assa asanassa samanta); - 2. (n.) the act of
sitting; DI 70,31 (gate thite -e sutte jagarite bhasite
tu1_1hlbhave sampajanakarl hoti; Sv 202,12: -e ti
nisajjaya); Sadd 384,15 (nisidanaq¡ -aq¡ nisajja); 385,4
(-an ti nisidanakiriya eva);- -'-okasa, m., the place
where (someone) sits or is sitting or has sat; Vin IV
105,33 (bhikkhussa thitokasaq¡ va -' -okasaq¡ va ...
agacchati); Sp 362,21; Pj II 543,23 (buddhanaq¡ ca
adhitthanaba1ena -' -okaso padanikkhepo ca avyaku1a
honti, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee vasitokaso);- --ghana, n, the
place where ( someone) is sitting or has sat; Ja V 93,16'
(sace me samikassa --ghanaq¡ janatha); 97,22;
Vism 188,27; Mp I 365,28;- --vattika, (m)f(n)., treating
each element separately in tum;? Ps II 258,4foll. (tisso
katha ekanaFka caturassa -a ti . . . apa1_1<;iitagopalakaq¡
dassetva pariyosanagamanaq¡ apa1_1<;iitabhikkhuq¡
dassetva pariyosanagamanaq¡ pai.J<Jitagopalakaq¡
dassetva pariyosanagamanaq¡ pai.J<Jitabhikkhuq¡ dassetva
pariyosanagamanan ti ayaq¡ -a nama; Ps-t [Be] II 193,1:
niyamato nisinnassa araddhassa vatto saq¡vatto etissa
atthi ti -a, yatharaddhassa atthassa visuq¡ visuq¡
pariyosapika ti attho) = Mp V 87,8joll.; - neg.
anisinna, mfn., not sitting down; not seated; Ja II 284,4;
Sp 12,12 (anipanno an1smno aqhito); Sv 597,3o
(anisinnatta); - sunisinna, mfn., sitting properly; well
poised; Th 65 (sunisinno utarapamojjo; Th-a I
159,3joll.: tasmiq¡ dhamme samma nicca1o nisinno);
Ap 431 ,24; - fpp nisiditabba, n. impers., Vin Il 280,6 (na
bhikkhave bhikkhuniya pallankena -itabbaq¡); M II
158,18; Vism 74,17 (rukkhamülikena ... paticchanne
thane -itabbaq¡); Dhp-a I 290,26 (dvihi ekaqhane na
thatabbaq¡ na -itabbaq¡); - caus. (a) pr. 3 sg. nisadeti
[S. ni~adayati], Sadd 836,13 (-eti nisidapeti va); -
absol. nisadetva, Sadd 836,15 (-etva ti nisidapetva,
nisidetva ti pi katthaci, so yev' attho);- caus. (b) aor.
 nisidana
3 sg. nisidayi, Ja V 169,25*; VI 313,23* (Pm¡.l_lako ...
kattuseqha¡p -ay! pacchato asanasmi¡p); - absol.
nisidetva, nisiditva2, Ja III 411 ,9* (te su citta¡p pasadetva
-etva Pal_ll_lasanthate, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nisiditva; 411,25':
-etva ti . . . nisidapetva, Be, Ce so; E e, Se -itva ti);
VI 17 ,3* (ucchari.ge ma¡p -etva, Ce, Ee so; Be nisadetva;
Se -itva) quoted Sadd 384,17 (ma¡p nisadetva ...
nisiditva ti pi pa~ho);- pp nisidita, mfn., Ja VI 154,27*
(-ite Candiyasmi¡p yaññatthaya); caus.
(e) pr. 3 sg. nisidapeti, causes to sit down, seats; invites
to sit; makes sit up; lets stay; places; makes kneel;
forces down; D 11 321,21 (ima¡p purisa¡p ... aghatane
-eyyu¡p); M 1383,17 (-eti); Ja 11 194,¡· (aha¡p putta¡p ...
rañño ilrumhi -eyya¡p, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se -essami);
V 271,26' (satte... jalita-ayasille -enti); VI 288,2o
(sattaha¡p pi addhamasa¡p pi -ehl ti); Mp IV 187,11
(ariyapuggale -eyya); Spk 111 219,6 (ma¡p ukkhipitva
-ehi Cunda ti); Dhp-a 11 133,2 (-essanti); 111 285,15
(sahaya¡p me anetva idha -etha ti);
part.pr. nisldapenta, m.f{-entl)n., Sp 1294,29 (-entiyo);
Spk 11 264,4 (ima¡p khandhabhara¡p . . . -ento
nipajjapento); - aor. 3 sg. nisidapesi, Ja 11 12,15
(asana1p paññapetva -esi); IV 45,27 (pitar<Up yanake
-esi); VI 131,15 (ta¡p kira raja pal_l<;lito ti vinicchaye
-esi); Vism 706,14; 3 pl. nisidapesu¡p, Ja V 287,8;
VI 154,21 (rajaputta¡p netva glva¡p nametva -esu¡p); -
absol. (a) nisidapetva, Vin 1 69,14 (bhikkhilna¡p pade
vandapetva ukku~ika¡p -etva añjali¡p paggal_lhapetva);
D 11 20.20 (Vipassikumara¡p ari.ke -etva); Ja 1 129,19
(bodhisatto asane nisiditva yakkha¡p padamille -etva);
111 392,7 (bodhisatta¡p pacchasane hatthipighe -etva);
IV 254,28 (raja kinnare suval_ll_lapañjare -etva); Mil20,25
(te panthike jane gahetva bandhitva -etva); Vism 48,I;
Dhp-a 1 193,19 (amhe dukkha¡p -etva jayapana¡p kira
pivatl ti); - neg. anisidapetva, Sv 625,5 = Ps IV 225,15;
(b) nisidapiya, Mhv 12:24; 28:25; - pass. pr. 3 sg.
nisidapiyati, Vin 11 78,w (maya¡p koqhake -iyama ti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee -eyyama ti) = 111 161,27 (Se so; Be
nisideyyama ti; Ce -iyeyyama ti; Ee -eyyama ti); -
pp nisidapita, mfn., A 111 270,17 (so sari.ghena ante -ito);
Ja 11 286,23; Vism 66,3o (eken' amhi bhante manussena
-ito ti); Mp 11 62,19 (etasmi¡p me rukkhamille eko ayyo
-ito ).
nisidana, n., -a,f [BHS ni~idana], l. sitting down; sitting;
Ps III 390,13 (bhikkhuno ... pallari.ka¡p abhujitva -a¡p);
Spk 1 140,14 (sattha o• -akara¡p dassesi); Pa~is-a 441,29 (na
payirupasitabbo upasari.kamitva -ena); Sadd 385,2 (-an
ti 0 -kiriya); 385,10 (nisajja ti -a); - 2. something to sit
on; a rug or mat for sitting on; Vin 1 295,25 (anujanami
bhikkhave kayaguttiya civaraguttiya senasanaguttiya
-an ti); 11294,8 (kappati adasaka¡p -a¡p); IV 41,28
(seyya¡p nama bhisi . . . taqika cammakhal_l<;lo -a¡p
paccattharal_la¡p ... ); 171,II (-a¡p pana bhikkhuna
karayamanena pamill_lika¡p karetabba¡p; 171,15: -a¡p
nama sadasa¡p vuccati); D 11 102,6 (gal_lhahi Ánanda
-a¡p yena Capala¡p cetiya¡p ten' upasari.kamissami
divaviharaya ti; Sv 554,19: ettha cammakhal_l<;la¡p
adhippeta¡p); Ja V 316,2 (attano -a¡p ajinacamma¡p
mahanta¡p katva, Be Ce, Se so; Ee attana nisinna¡p);
Ap 121,20 (til_la¡p gayha -am adas' aha¡p); Spk 1 72,5
622 nisedhati
(uqhaya -a¡p pappo~hetva); Sadd 385,2 (-an ti ...
mañcapi~hadika¡p va asana¡p); - nisidanassa in Ee at
Th-a 11 190,13 is wr for nisinnassa (Be, Se so; Ce omits).
nisidanaka, mfn. [nisidana + ka2], sitting down; for sitting
on; Sp 828,33 (tassa pana heqha pala!api~ha¡p va kiñci va
-a¡p databba¡p); Nidd-a 1 401,3o (na pi~hamaddikataya ti
na sahasa ghara¡p pavisitva pi~hake 0 -taya, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce na pighima¡psikataya ti).
nisidita(r), m. ffrom nisidati], one who sits; M III 126,16
(nabhijanami antaraghare -a).
nisumbhati , pr. 3 sg. [S. nisumbhati], knocks down;
treads down; Thi 302 (te ima¡p putta¡p dal_l<;lena ...
bhilmiya¡p va -eyya¡p, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be -issa¡p;
Thi-a 214,3o: pa~aviya¡p patetva pothanavijjhanadina
vibadhissami).
nisüdana, n. [S. ni~ildana], destroying; slaughter;
Abh 403 (maral_la¡p . . . nasana¡p ca -a¡p); - ifc see
marabala-.
niseti, pr. 3 sg. [cfS. nivlsi, nivlso], sharpens; Sp311,9
(vasi¡p va pharasu¡p va -eti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nigha1pseti) t 570,2o; 813,II (pippha1ika¡p -eti); As 90,4
(satti¡p -eti); - part.pr. nisenta, mfn., Sv 432,9 (vasi¡p
-ento, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nisedento); Th-a 1 9,22
(nisadasilaya¡p pharasu¡p -ento viya, Be, Se so; Ce
sunisadento viya; Ee nisedento viya); Vin-vn 391
(pharasu¡p va pi vasi¡p va -entassapi dukka~a¡p); -
pp nisita, mfn. [S. nisita], sharpened, sharp; Abh 744
(-a¡p tu ca tejita¡p); JaiV 57,4* (-a¡p va pa~icchanna¡p;
58,¡·: --khaggam iva); 352,27* (-ahi ku~arihi); Sp 308,4
(gha¡psitva va -a); Pv-a 259,25 (-ehi ... ucchupattehi);
Sv 911,Io (sadhunisitassa ti su~~u -assa tikhil_lassa);
Th-a 111 151,37 (samathavipassanavasena --taya tikkha-
teja¡p);- ifc see pita- (sv pibati);- atinisita, mfn., very
sharp; Sv 890,28 (atinisitena asina); sums1ta,
sunissita 1, mfn.. well-sharpened; very sharp; Ja IV
118,18* (asi yatha sunisito); V 299,2* (sunisitena satthena;
299,3·: suqhu nisitena tikhil_lena satthena); VI 449,II *
(netti¡psa ... samadhara sunissita, me; 450,8·: sunissita ti
sunisita atitikhil_la); Ap 313,19; Vism 4,3 (sama:dhi-
silaya¡p sunisita¡p vipassanapaññasattha¡p); Pv-a 192,14
(sunisitehi ... nakhehi); - see also nisana.
nisedento in Ee at Th-a 1 9,22 (and in Se at Sv 432,9) is
prob. wr for nisento qv sv niseti.
nisedha, m. [S. ni~edha], restraint; prevention,
prohibition; contradiction, denial; Abh 1167; Dhp 390
(yada -o manaso piyehi; Dhp-a IV 148,!5: cittassa
niggaho); Pj 11 472,1 (imissa dighiya -o veditabbo);
Sadd 881,18 (-e pa~isedheti); - ifc se e hiñ-; -
sunisedha¡p , adv., with a proper, thorough restraint or
prevention; D III 67,12 (yannilnaha¡p ima¡p purisa¡p -a¡p
nisedheyya¡p millaghacca¡p kareyya¡p sisa¡p assa
chindeyyanti; Sv 852,23: -a¡p nisedheyyan ti su~~u
nisiddha¡p katva nisedheyya¡p).
nisedhaka, m(jn). [cf S. ni~edhaka], one who restrains,
prohibits; Ja 11 220,12* (na hi labhase -<Up; 220,2o·:
madisa¡p pana pasayha abhibhavitva -a¡p tava na
labhasi).
nisedhati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~edhati], prevents; prohibits;
suppresses; S 1 121,17* (savako te mahavira maral_la¡p ...
akari.khati .. . ta¡p -a); Ja 11 280,17* (ariyo anariya¡p
j
nisedhana
kubbana111 yo daQ.<;iena -ati; 281 ,16': -atl ti ma su puna
evariipal11 kañ ti paharanto vareti); - pp nisiddha, mfrL
[S, ni~iddha], restrained,- checked; Sv 852,23
(sunisedha¡p nisedheyyan ti su~~u -a111 katva
nisedheyya111); Sadd 393,28 (siddho pasiddho -o
pa~isiddho __ .); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nisedheti, -aya ti,
restrains, disciplines; prevents, prohibits; suppresses;
D III 67,12 (yannüniiha¡p ima¡p purisa¡p sunisedha¡p
-eyya111 mülaghacca¡p kareyy a111 s1sa111 assa
chindeyyanti); SI 221,29* (dhiro bala¡p -aye); Ja II 386,2
(kasma imassa du~amakka~assa avamana¡p sahasi, -ehi
nan ti); III 102,15 (tassa ta¡p bahubhiil).ita¡p -essami ti);
Spk I 37,12 (hiriya akusale dhamme -etl ti hirinisedho);
100,17 (varentl ti ... -enti); II 13,5 (tena samuccheda-
maraQ.adini -eti); Mp II 142,9 (cora janapada111
vilumpanti maddanti te -essama ti); Mhv 4:25 (ta¡p ca
-ema ti abravi); - part.pr, (a) nisedhenta, mf(-ent!)n.,
Ja III 83,2; Vism 37,1; Sp 555,4 (serivihara¡p assa -entl);
(b) nisedhayanta, mfn., Ja III 442,7* (-ayanto janata111);
- aor, 3 sg. (a) nisedhesi, Thi-a 234,14 (mama
gamana111 -es! ti); (b) nisedhayi, Mhv 26:4;
1 sg, nisedhayi¡p, Ap 301,3 (nibbuddhe vattamanamhi
mallaputta¡p -ayi¡p); 3 pl. nisedhesu¡p, D III 67,26; -
absol. (a) nisedhetva, Ja II 422,17'; Vism 136,6*
(accaraddha111 -etva); Sv 52,28 (manopadosa111 -etva);
Dhp-a III 85,11 (attana¡p -etva); Vv-a 105,7
(nirayupapatti¡p -etva); (b) nisedhayitva, Ja IV 438,16*;
Cp 3:2:10 (-ayitva paccanta¡p; Cp-a 191,10/oll-:
paccanta¡p vüpasametva); - fpp nisedhetabba, mfn.,
Vin V 164,10 (bhiru assasetabbo CaQ.<;io -etabbo;
Sp 1365,14/oll.: apasadetabbo tajjetabbo); Spk II 31,1
(-etabba111, Be, Ce, E e so; Se nibodhetabba111).
nisedhana, n. [S. ni~edhana], restraining, disciplining,-
preventing; suppressing; Ja II 281 ,18' (-a¡p nama
imasmi¡p loke sasana111 anusatthi ovado); Vism 302,12
(pa~irañño ' .. rajja¡p gal).hantassa o• -atthaya unhitanal11
amaccana111); Ud-a 295,4 (ima111 papakiriyaya -a111
ad!navavibhavana111 ca udana¡p udanesi); Sadd 885,15
(-e nivareti);- anisedhanata,f, abstr., lack of restraint
or prevention; Mil 180,29 (ratto ragavasena apaciti¡p na
karoti ... atitthaddho anisedhanataya),
nisedhanaka, mfn. [nisedhana + ka2 ], who restrains,
prevents; Ja II 123,20' (imasmi¡p loke sllavantana111
olokanaka papana111 ca -a na san ti nüna deva).
nisevati, pr. 3 sg. [S. ni~evate],frequents, inhabits, resorts
to; serves, waits upon; practises, performs; indulges in;
Sn 821 (ekacariya¡p da)ha111 kayira na -etha methuna111;
Nidd I 157,19: methunadhamma111 na seveyya na -eyya
na sa111seveyya ... ); Pv 15:19 (papakamma111 -así);
Th 934 (ka~acchubhikkhahetü pi akiccani -are; Th-a III
78,23: pabbjitena akatabbani kammani -are karonti);
Ja II 106,6• (sakha sakha -are; 106,9-: pucimandassa
sakha ambarukkhassa sakhayo -anti); Vibh 251,16
(ima¡p vivitta111 senasana111 bhajati sambhajati sevati -ati
sa¡psevati); - nisevami in Ee at Ap 273,9 is wr for
nivasemi (Be, Ce, Se so); - part.pr. niseva(t), mfn.,
Nidd I 131,24 (ta¡p asana111 bhajato . . . -ato; Nidd-a I
256,25: nissaya¡p katva sevantassa); - pp nisevita, mfn.
and n., l. (mfn.) (i) visited, frequented; practised,
studied; waited upon; Th 1140 (pahomi magga111
623 nissagga
pa~ipajjitu¡p siva¡p cittanurakkhihi sada -a111); Mil 359,23
(terasahi dhutaguQ.ehi pub be asevitehi -ehi CÍQ.Q.ehi __ . );
Th-a III 31,32 (sattha isisanghena __ . -o payirupasito
isisailghanisevito ); Nidd-a I 2,8* (yoglhi 'nekehi -assa
attha111); Nett-a 214,7 (tena gocarabhavanasevaniihi -a¡p
bhajitan ti); - ifc see devayakkha-; - (ii)fumished
with, adomed with; Ja V 302,14* ([thane] -e kasika-
candanena); 302,18* (SOQ.ÍJP __ . -a111 kañcanamekhaliihi);
- 2. (n.) (i) resorting to; practice; Th 927 (tato
pasadika111 así gata¡p bhutta111 -a¡p; Th-a III 76,37: -an ti
gocaranisevana111); - (ii) (a sign of) frequenting,- a
trace; ? M I 178,22 (passati nagavane mahanta111
hatthipada111 . . . ucca ca -a¡p; Ps II 198,32: -an ti
sattagharatanubbedhe va~arukkhadina¡p khandhappadese
gha111sitaghana111); ifc see tathagata-;
fpp nisevitabba, mfn., Nett 52,16 (asevitabba kama
nisevitabba kama).
nisevanli,f, -a, n. [cf S. ní~evaQ.a],frequenting, resorting
to; use; Dhs 1326 (y e te puggala assaddha dusslla __ .
duppañña ya tesa111 sevana -a sa111sevana bhajana ...
aya111 vuccati papamittata; As 394,6: balavasevana -a);
Vibh 373,26 (ya imassa kummaggassa sevana -a
Sal11Sevana '". ); Saddh 406 (asankhaya aharadi-
nisevanal11).
nisneha, mfn., see sv sneha.
nisnehaka, mfn. [nisneha + ka2], without affection;
indifferent; Ja II 192,14* (-o aha¡p deva; 192,16': paresu
me sneho va kodho va na bhütapubbo ).
nissatpsaya, mfn., see sv sa¡psaya.
nissatpsena in Ee at Ap-a 365,16 (nirato nissa¡psena rato)
is prob. wr; Be, Se nissesena; Ce omits).
nissaka, mfn., see sv saka.
nissakka, m. [cfnissakkati ?], (gr.t.t.) (the sense of) the
ablative case; Spk III 77 ,s (karaQ.atthe -a111); 236,13
(pañca -ani nlharitabbani); Ud-a 294,28 (dukkhassa ti -e
samivacana111, dukkhasma ti attho); It-a I 74,23 (-e hi
ida111 samivacana111, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr nissake);
II 163,14 (-e ida111 bhummavacana¡p); Vv-a 152,1 (taya ti
-e karaQ.avacana¡p); Pv-a 147,26 (satta ti vibhattilopena
niddeso -e va eta111 paccattavacana111); Sadd 60,33*
(_.. sampadaniyal11 -al11 samivacanal11 '".); - o• -attha,
0
-attha, m., the meaning or sense of the ablative case;
Ja II 198,20' (-e karaQ.avacana¡p); V 498,5· (-e va
upayoga111); Bv-a 124,10;- 0 -vacana, n., the expression
ofthe ablative; the ablative case; Sp 808,12 (upayogatthe
-a111); Ud-a 40,26 (-assa pi hetu-atthata); It-a 1 155,6
(paññaya ti -a¡p, Be, Ce, Se so; E e wr nissaka-); II 147,23
(paccatte -a111, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nissaka-); Sadd 60,29
(-e pañcaml vibhatti bhavati),
nissakkati, pr. 3 sg, [ni 2 + sakkati], goes out, goes forth;
Sadd 467,2 (sakkati nisakkati parisakkati -ati
parisakkana111, so read with Ee? Be nisakko).
nissakkana, n. [cf nissakkati; cf S. nil,lsarpati ?], leaving,
slipping out;- ifc see bi~ara-.
nissagga, m. and mfn. [cf S. nil,lv"srj], l. (m.) letting go,
surrendering,- letting fly, discharging; Nidd-a I 171,19
(idal11 adinnapubbassa 0 -dassanavasena vutta¡p)
Vibh-a 370,8; - ifc see sabba-; - 2. (m. and mfn.) [=
nissaggiya qv], (i) (an offence) involving surrendering,
involving forfeiture; Utt-vn 811 (aniyatadvaya¡p dvadas'
 nissaggi
eva ca -a); - (ii) involving letting jly, throwing;
Vin-vn 41 ([avaharo] sahattha1,1attiko e' eva -o); -
nissagge in E e at Ap-a 4 71,32 is wr for nissakke (Be, Ce,
Se so);- anissagga, m., not letting go; Vin II 30,7• (in
uddana: -e ca di~~iya).
nissaggi, (mj)n. [= nissaggiya qv], (an offence) involving
surrendering, involving forfeíture; Utt-vn 46 (dukka~my¡
pa~hame pacte -i~ dutiye phuse).
nissaggiya, mfn. and n., l. [cf BHS nil)sargika,
nai~sargika], subject to forfeiture; required to be
surrendered; (an offence) involving surrendering,
involving forfeiture; Vin I 196,14 (mano -mp ahosi ti);
III 195,1 (ime kho panayasmanto ti~sa -a pacittiya
dhamma uddesmp agacchanti); 195,18 (yo pana bhikkhu
atirekaclvarmy¡ dhareyya -mp paCittlyan ti;
Sp 639,17 foil.: tmy¡ ca civara~ -a~ hoti pacittiyapatti
e' assa hotl ti attho, atha va nissajjana~ -mp
pubbabhage kattabbassa vinayakammass' eta~ nammy¡,
-a~ assa atthi ti -am ice eva, ki~ ta~, pacittiya~);
196,zs (ida~ me bhante civara~ dasahatikkantmy¡ -a~
imaha~ sailghassa nissajjaml ti); 235,35 (dhotani -ani
honti); V 147,4 (aniyata dve honti -ani ti~s· eva);
Vin-vn 611 (hoti -a~ vatthmy¡); - 2. involving letting
jly, throwíng; Sp 304,14 ([avaharo] -o nama anto
suiJ.kaghate ~hito bahi suiJ.kaghata~ pateti); 439,!9foil.
(piil,latipatassa cha ppayoga sahatthiko . . . -o . . . -o ti
dure ~hita~ maretukamassa . . . ususattiyanta-
pasal,liidina~ nissajjanmp); It-a II 50,12 (ususatti-adinmy¡
nissajjanavasena pavatto -o); - 3. something (to be)
discharged or thrown; Vin III 74,35 (saya~ hanati
kayena va kayapa~ibaddhena va -ena va; Sp 443,3o: -ena
ti kayato ca kayapa~ibaddhato ca mocitena ususatti-
adina); IV 215,Ifoll. (-ena kayapa~ibaddhmp amasati
apatti dukka~assa, -ena -a~ iirnasati apatti dukka~assa);
Thl-a 234,28 (ragavasen' assa -ena purisassa -assa pi
phusana na kappat' eva);- anissaggiya, mfn., (what is)
not subject to forfeiture; Vin I 255,!2 (-ena atthatmy¡ hoti
ka~ina~); Sp 713,23 (--tta); - se e also nissagga,
nissaggi.
nissañga, mfn., see sv sailga.
nissaja, nissajja, m. [cfnissajati], letting go, setting free;
Cp 3:12:3 (ki~ tva~ icchasi -a~; Cp-a 254,27: nissajjan
ti tva~ attano nagarmp gantu~ mama hatthato
nissajana~ ki~ icchasi, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nisajjan ti).
nissajati, pr. 3 sg., see sv nissajjati.
nissajana, n., see sv nissajjana.
nissajja, m., see sv nissaja.
nissajjati, nissajati, pr. 3 sg. [ni 1 or ni 2 + sajati 2; cf S.
nil)s[jati, nisr~~a], lets go; gives up; hands over;
surrenders; lets jly, throws; Vin I 336,!• (in uddana: yo
ca di~~¡~ na nissaje); II 188,3! (mama bhikkhusailghmy¡
-atu aha~ bhikkhusailgha~ pariharissami ti); 188,36
(bhikkhusailghmy¡ na -eyymp); III 196,29 (idmp me
bhante civara~ dasahatikkanta~ nissaggiya~ imahmy¡
sailghassa -ami ti, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nissajami ti); Ja V
325,22' (upanissaja ti ida~ mayhmp nissaja vissajehi
dehi); Sp 1015,!6 (sace eva~ vuccamano tmy¡ laddhi~
-ati); Pj II 569,17 (rüpadisu kiñci dhammmy¡ na ga1,1hati
na -ati, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nissajati); Cp-a 305,3 (koci
puriso ghasacchadanahetu attanmy¡ parassa -ati, Be, Se
624 nissajjana
so; Ce, Ee nissajati); part.pr. (a) nissajjanta,
nissajanta, mfn., Sv 73,6 (purato -anto pi, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce nissajanto) =As 99,22 (Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nissajanto);
neg. anissajjanta, anissajanta, mfn., Sp 1327,22;
(b) neg. anissajjamana, mfn., Ap-a 196,27 (ariñcamano
ajahamano anissajjamano, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
anissajamano) = Pj II 123,9 (Be, Se anisajjamano; Ce, Ee
omit); - aor. 3 sg. nissajji, Sp 699,!; 1 sg. nissajji~,
nissaji~, MI 149,26 (pa~ama~ rathavinlta~ -i~. Se so;
Ce, Ee nissaji~; Be vissajji~); - inf nissajjitu~,
nissajitu~. Ja III 489,!9' (attano veramattmy¡ pi -itu~ na
sakkotha, Se so; Ce, Ee nissajitu~; Be jahitu~) t
Vibh-a 492,13 (eds -itu~); - absol. (a) nissajja [cf S.
-s[jya], Sn 839 (ete ca nissajja anuggahaya; Pj II 545,33:
samugghatakara1,1ena nissajja); (b) nissajjitva, nissajitva,
Vin III 196,29 (-itva apatti desetabba, Be, E e, Se so; Ce
nissajitva); Vism 652,3o (gaccha durthasappa ti -itva, Be,
Ee, Se so; Ce nissajitva); Sp 1134,22 (so jivamano yeva
sabba~ attano parikkharmp -itva kassaci adasi, Be, Ee,
Se so; Ce nissajitva); Sv 677,29 (hatthagatmp
cakkavattirajjmp -itva pabbajito, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce
nissajitva); - neg. anissajjitva, anissajitva, V in III
202,24 (nissaggiya~ civarmy¡ anissajjitva, Be, Ee, Se so;
Ce anissajitva); IV 304,21 (ya pana bhikkhuni avasathmy¡
aniss~Jltva carikmy¡ pakkameyya; Sp 936,2ofoil.:
rakkha1,1atthaya adatva immy¡ jaggeyyasi ti eva~
anapucchitva ti attho); Ud-a 339,10; (e) nissajjitvana,
nissajitvana, V in V 148,28* (-itvana deseti, Be, E e so; Ce
nissajitvana; Se nissajjitva ymp); - pass. aor.
3 sg. nissajji, nissaji [cf S. asarji], Ud-a 95,2 ([asavehi
citta~] vimucci ti ... vimucci -i, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee
nissaji); - pp (a) nissattha, mfn. [cf S. nismaJ, let go;
set free; given up; handed over, surrendered; let jly,
thrown; Vin III 196,33 (ida~ civarmy¡ itthannamassa
bhikkhuno nissaggiya~ sailghassa -a~); MI 293,29
(-ena h' avuso pañcahi indriyehi parisuddhena
manovmna1,1ena; Ps II 345,6: -ena ti nissa~ena
pariccattena va); Thi 484 (-a~ te rajjmy¡, Be, Ce, Se so;
E e wr nisa~~my¡; Thi-a 261,11 foil.: mayha~ sabba~ pi
tiyojanika~ rajja~ tuyhmy¡ pariccattmp); Nidd I 55,25
(dhiro ... nikkhanto -o vippamutto ... , Ee, Se so; Be, Ce
nissa~o; Nidd-a I 172,zi: -o ti vippahino, Ee, Se so; Ce
nissato ti; Be nissato ti papapahino); Sp 540,5 (attana
-a~ pupphmp); Ps IV 26,3 (pañcakamagul,latal,lhiina~
--tta); It-a II 18,26 (-a pahina); Cp-a 172,14 (idmp
sarirmp maya te -a~. aggi~ jiiletva khada ti); -
neg. anissa~~a, mfn., Vin III 46,32; Sp 698,28 (mu1assa
anissaghatta);- pp (b) nissajjita, nissajita, mfn., Vin IV
304,33; As 297,6 (he~~a pana gahitam eva ti naya~
dassetva nissajjitmy¡, Be, Ce so; Ee nissajita~; Se
nissajji); Vin-vn 2302; - neg. anissajjita, mfn., Vin IV
304,3o; - fpp nissajjitabba, mfn., Vin III 196,2zfoil.
(ekadase aru1,1uggamane nissaggiymy¡ hoti nissajjitabbmp
sailghassa va ga1,1assa va puggalassa va, evmy¡ ca pana
bhikkhave nissajjitabba~ ... ); 238,8 (nissaggiymy¡ hoti
sailghamajjhe nissajjitabba~); 246,12 (tena bhikkhuna so
patto bhikkhuparisaya nissajjitabbo); - caus. pr. 3 sg.
nissajiipeti, Sp 1066,4 (ta~ di~~¡~ na -enti ti); - aor.
3 sg. nissajjapesi, Sp 699,3.
nissajjana, nissajana, n. [from nissajjati], letting go,
nissajjeta 625 nissaya

setting free: handing over; letting fly, throwing; nissandha in Ee at Vism 250,10 (gamanissandhena) is wr
Sp 439,24 (nissaggiyo ti dure thita111 maretukamassa ... fornissanda (Be, Ce, Se so).
ususattiyantapasfu:iadlnaJ11 -aJ11); 639,18 ( -a111 nissama, m. [S. nisrama], exertion, continued practice;
nissaggiyaJ11, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce nissajanaJ11); It-a II 50,12 Ja II 166,25* (na -o tayati appapaññaJ11, so read ? eds
(ususatti-ad!na111 °-vasena pavatto nissaggiyo); Nidd-a I niyyamo; 167,3·: appapaññarp nama pugga1aJ11 niyyamo
365,27 (maggena kilesanaJ11 o• -atthaya); Cp-a 254,28 yogga111 cil_ll_lacaraJ).aJ11 na tayati na rakkhat! ti);- ifc see
(tVaJ11 attano nagara111 ganturp mama hatthato -a111 kirp kata- (sv karoti).
icchasi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nissajanaJ11); nissaya, m.n. [BHS nisraya], l. support, what one depends
anissajjana, n., not letting go, not handing over; or relies on; refuge, shelter; dependence; reliance;
Kkh 2 338,3. Abh 962 (-e ... parayal_lapadaJ11); 1060 (okaJ11 tu -e
nissajjeta, mfn. [cfnissajjati], to be given up, renounced; ? gehe); 1130 (patittha -e); Sn 753 (etaJ11 adlnaVaJ11 ñatva
Vin I 335,16* (in uddana: datthabba patikatabba -a na -esu mahabbhaya111); 800 (ñfu:ie pi so -aJ11 no karoti;
vijjati, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -aJ11; cf323,7 foil.: idha pana Nidd I 108,5 foil.: tai_1hanissayaJ11 va di!thinissayaJ11 va na
bhikkhave bhikkhussa na hoti papika ditthi karoti na janeti ... ); 856 (yassa 0 -ta natthi ñatva
patinissajjeta; Sp !147,33foll.: patinissajjeta ti dhammaJ11 anissito, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nissayana; Pj II
pa!inissajjitabba). 550,2: 0 -ta ti tal).haditthinissaya, Ce, Se so; Be, Ee
nissata, mfn., pp ofnissarati qv. nissayana ti) = Nidd I 244,28*; Ja III 59,26 (aññatra
nissattha, mfn., pp ofnissajjati qv. Samaya añño etassa -o natthi); Nidd 1 245,2 (dve -a
3 tal).hanissayo ca di!thinissayo ca); Nett 7,16
nissatta, mfn., se e sv satta .
nissadda, mfn., see sv sadda. (satipaghanehi -ehi); Vism 477,17 (tesaJ11 vedanadlnaJ11
nissana, m. [S. nisvana], sound, noise; Abh 128 (ravo -aJ11 adhipatibhüta111 ca nesa111 viñña1_1an ti); Ps III 399,9
ninado ... -o). (kulasahassassa -o hutva); Spk I 251,24 (yuga111 ...
nissantapa, mfn. see sv santapa. yottana111 -a111 hoti); As 342,2 (pa!hav!-ad!narp hi -ana111
nissanda, m. [cf S. nisyanda, ni~yanda], discharge, bhave jati-adittayaJ11 paññayati); Vibh-a 22,8
outflow, issue; result, outcome; A III 32,2 (vatthurilpaJ11, tassa -ani cattari mahabhiltani); 23,17
(asitapltakhayitasayitassa . . . uccarapassavo eso tassa (papate patanto puriso aññassa -o bhavituJ11 na sakkoti);
-o); Ja III 407,10 (etesaJ11 -ena daFddagehe nibbatti 2. support, resource; requzslte; V in I 58,11
nama ma hotu); V 2,27 (ambapha1adanassa -ena (anujanami bhikkhave upasampadentena cattaro -e
tiyojanikaJ11 ambavanaJ11 pa!ilabhi); VI 227,15' (ekassa acikkhituJ11 pi1_1c;liyalopabhojanaJ11 nissaya pabbajja .. .
papakammassa -ena goghatakule nibbattitva); Ap 308,16 paJ11sukülaclvaraJ11 . . . rukkhamülasenasanaJ11 .. .
(koseyyakambal!yani ... pa!ilabhami tesa111 -ato ahaJ11); piltimuttabhesajjarp ... ; Sp 984,14: cattaro paccaye);
Mil20,11 (pubbe katassa papakammassa -ena samal).a 58,25foll. (tassa bhikkhil patigacc' eva-e acikkhiJ11SU, so
Sakyaputtiya pabbajanti); Vism 320,19 (yatha pana evarp aha sace me bhante pabbajite -e acikkheyyatha
kasii.lanaJ11 -o aruppa samadhinissando neva- abhirameyya111 svahaJ11, na dan' al!arp bhante
saññanasaññayatanaJ11); 346,15 (eva111 [kabalinkarahare] pabbajissami jeguccha me -a patiküla ti); II 274,23
-ato patikülata paccavekkhitabba) t Sv 201,17 (-ato, Be, (imissa tayo ca -e attha ca akaranlyani acikkheyyatha
Ee, Se so; Ce nissandanato); Dhp-a I 206,7 ti); Bv-a 77,35* (buddhasetthena -o ti ca bhasito); -
(upac;lc;lhilposathakammassa -ena esa sampatti maya 3. (a relation of) dependence and guidance and
1addha ti);- ifc see sarlra-;- see also nissandana. supervision (under an upajjhaya or acariya); V in I 60,32
nissandati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nisyandate], flows out, issues; (anujanami bhikkhave dasa vassani nissaya vatthuJ11
drips (down); discharges; Vism 345,3ofoll. dasavassena -a111 datuJ11); III 231,1 (yo maJ11 -aJ11 yacati
([kabalinkaraharo] ajjhohariyamano e' esa ekena taha111 evaJ11 vadami al!aJ11 kho avuso araññako
dvarena pavisitva -amano akkhimha akkhiguthako pi1.1c;!apatiko paJ11suküliko); M III 126,27 (nabhijanami
ka1_11.1amha kal).1_1aguthako ti adina pakarena anekehi -a111 deta); A III 106,25 (te abhavitakaya samana
dvarehi -ati); part.pr. (a) nissandanta, mfn., abhavitas!la ... aññesa111 -aJ11 dassanti); Sp 656,23 (yava
Vism 346,2 (-anto pihitanasiko hoti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se aru1_1uggamana sayanti c!vara111 ca nissaggiyarp hoti -o
-ento); (b) nissandamana, mfn., Vism 345,31; - caus. ca patippassambhati); 1032,9 (sace thero kiJ11 sattahaJ11
part.pr. nissandenta, mfn., discharging, excreting; vasantassa -ena ti vadati); Mp III 333,2o (-o databbo ti
Vism 346,2 ( -ento pihitanasiko hoti viku1_1itamukho acariyena hutva -o databbo ); Pj II 195,25 (tesa111 -ena
jegucchl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee -anto). viharituJ11 araddho); - nissaya111 in Ee at Vin I
nissandana, n. [from nissandati], flowing out, issuing; 49,29 foil., 143,34 and II 226,29 is wr for niyassa111 (Be,
dripping; Vism 345,34 ( 0 -samaye pana Ce, Se so); nissaya in Ee at Vin V 124,18* is wr for
uccarapassavadibhavaJ11 upagato ekaken' eva nlhañyati); niyassa (Be, Ce, Se so); - 0
'-antevasika, m., a
Sv 201,17 (gamanato pariyesanato ... pha1ato -ato dependent pupil, a pupil under (formal) guidance and
sammakkhanato ti eva111 dasavidhapa!ikülabhava- supervision; Sp 985,15 (-en a hi yava acariyaJ11 nissaya
paccavekkhal).ato, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nissandato) = vasati tava sabbaJ11 acariyavatta111 katabbaJ11); -
Spk III 197,26 (Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nissandato) = o• -acariya, m., the teacher who is a (formal) guide and
Vibh-a 362,23 (Ce so; Be, Ee, Se nissandato);- see also mentor; Sp 1085,4;- -kammaip in Ee at Vin 1 325,37,
0

nissanda. 331,32, II 7,37 foil. and Mp II 165,1 is wr for niyassa- (Be,

nissandeha, mfn., se e sv sandeha. Ce, Se so); - 0 -karaQiya, mfn., requiring (formally
nissayati
acquired) supervlSlon, requmng a mentor; Vin I 92,4
(Sp 1032,w: -o ti kanu.llyanissayo kanu.llyo maya
nissayo gahetabbo ti attho); - 0
-pal}limanli,f.,
dismissal from supervision; Sp 986,1s; 986,22 (yo -aya
paqamito hoti tena upajjhayo khamapetabbo ); -
0
-muccaka, mfn., released from (formal) supervision;
Spk II 331,1 (bhikkhuno -assa kammanhana!Tl gahetva
araññe vasanaka1o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee 0 -muttakassa; =
Mp IV 64,4: eds 0 -muttakassa);- 0 -muccanaka, m(fn.),
one being released from (formal) supervlSlon;
Sp 788,27 foll.; Sv 530,4; - 0
-muttaka, m(fn)., one
released from (formal) supervision; Sp 983,6; 1004,1
(yattaka!Tl sutta!Tl -assa icchitabba!Tl); Spk I 112,15; -
0
-sampanna, mfn., having a support; having supporters
or mentors; A I 116,34/oll. (kath~ ca ... papaqiko -o
hoti; Mp II 188,17: avassayasampanno patinha-
sampanno); 117,27 (katha!Tl ca ... bhikkhu -o hoti);
IV 353,zo (kittavata ... bhikkhu -o hot! ti, saddha!Tl ce
bhikkhu nissaya akusa1a!Tl pajahati ... ); Ja II 22,24' (-o
bhikkhu; 23,6·: ku1aputto -o ka1yal)amitta!Tl buddh~ va
buddhasavaka!Tl va nissaya!Tl1abhitva).
nissayati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nisrayati], leans on; relies on,
depends on; resorts to; MI 137,32 (t~ bhikkhave
ditthinissay~ -etha); Sn 798 (silabbat~ bhikkhu na
-eyya; Pj II 530,7: nabhiniviseyya ti vutt~ hoti);
V v-a 83,1 (sañrasobhaggadisampatti katapuññ~ -ati ...
ti siri ti vuccati); Nidd-a I 298,4 (asayanti -anti ettha ti
asayo, Be, Ee, Se so; Ce omits -anti) f. Pa¡is-a 57,23
(-anti eta!Tl iti); Patis-a 401,28 (sevantl ti -anti alliyanti);
- nissayanti in Ee at Ap 575,9 is wr for nissasantl (Be,
Ce, Se so); - part.pr. nissaya(t), mfn., MI 137,32; -
inf. (a) nissayitu!Tl, Nidd-a Il 21,24; (b) nissitu!Tl,
Patis-a 409,5 (a1el)O ti alliyitu!Tl nissitu!Tl anaraho); -
absol. (a) nissaya, see sv; - (b) nissayitva [cfBHS
nisrayitva], Pj II 555,3o; - pass. pr. 3 sg. nissiyati, is
supported; V v-a 83,1 (sañrasobhaggadisampatti ...
katapuññehi va -ati ti siri ti vuccati); - pp nissita, mfn.
[BHS nisrita], resorting to, inhabiting; dependent (on);
leaning on; attached to, supported by; clase to,
connected to; resorted to; M III 266,6 (-assa ca1it~
amss1tassa ca1ita!Tl natthi; Ps V 82,22: -assa ti
taqhadinhihi -assa); A I 153,29 (mahacoro nadividugg~
va -o hoti); 154,5 (mahacoro raJana!Tl va
rajamahamattan~ va -o hoti); Sn 1069 (arammal)~
brühi ... ya!Tl -o ogham im~ tareyya; Pj II 593,17: ya!Tl
dhamm~ va pugga1~ va -o); Ja III 510,13* (y~ -a
jagatiruh~); Nidd I 91,21 (purim~ magga!Tl pahaya
apar~ magg~ -a sannissita allina upagata ajjhosita
adhimutta ti); Pa¡is I 159,3* (eta!Tl dvaya!Tl takkita -ase,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se -a ye; Pa¡is-a 459,9: -ase ti -a ti attho
ekam eva pada!Tl, se ti nipatamatta!Tl va); Ap 91,1 (ye
keci mama -a, Ce, Ee so; Be mamavassita; Se
samavassika); Vism 121,9 (yo pi [viharo] udakapanana!Tl
va tha1apagan~ va -o hoti); 339,34 (athaparo agantva
t~ maq¡;lape 1agg~ puris~ -o); 536,1 (attano pha1ena
-o na pa¡ikkhitto ti nissayo); Sp 1356,14 (abhiññate
bhikkhil --tta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr bhikkhu); Sv 127,1o
(etasmi!Tl mama desanaja1e sita -a avassita va); 350,9
(aparo tadisa!Tl tapa!Tl -o); 914,13 (anatthas~hitan ti na
idha1okattha!Tl va para1okatth~ va -a!Tl); Patis-a 516,12
626 nissarar;ta
(kaya!Tl pa¡ibaddha kay~ -a); Mhv 36:112 (khittassa
therassa -o bhikkhu); Sadd 609,11 (sara nissaya vyañjana
-a); - ya nissitani in Ee at S II 62,14/oll. is wr for
yanissa tani (Be, Ce, Se so); - ifc see aññoñña-,
abbhaghata-, gahana- (sv gahana2), geha- (svv gedha2
and geha\ - --jappi(n), mfn., speaking only what
others say, relying on others' opinions; Vin V 183,33
(Sp 1372,12: aññ~ nissaya jappati); - anissita, mfn.,
without support; without a mentor; not dependent; not
attached; not clase to, not connected; Vin I 92,3
(bhagavata paññatta!Tl na anissitena vatthabban ti); D II
292,s (anissito ca viharati na ca kiñci 1oke upadiyati);
M III 25,23 (tesu dhammesu anupayo anapayo anissito
apa¡ibaddho vippamutto; Ps IV 89,7: taqhaditthinissayehi
anissito); S II 280,8 (poriya vacaya ... pariyapannaya
anissitaya) =A II 51,17 (Mp III 90,1o: van~ anissitaya,
vivananissitam eva katva katheti); Dhp 93 (ahare ca
anissito); Sn 66 (anissito chetva sinehados~); 1069
(mahanta!Tl ogha!Tl anissito no visahami taritu!Tl);
Mi1320,3o (akaso ... -o); Pj II 275,2o (anissitatta);
fpp nissayitabba, mfn., Ps II 375,16 (sevitabbe ti
nissayitabbe); Pa¡is-a 587,16.
nissayana, n., -a, f. [from nissayati], depending on,
relying on; dependence; Sn 856 (yassa -a natthi ñatva
dhamm~ anissito, Be so; Ce, Ee, Se nissayata; Pj II
550,2: -a ti tal)haditthinissaya, Be, Ee so; Ce, Se
nissayata ti; = Nidd-a I 349,8: Ee so; Be, Ce, Se nissayata
ti) = Nidd I 244,28* (eds nissayata); Pa¡is-a 544,26 (par~
garu!Tl katva -~ apassayanan ti).
nissara, mfn., see sv sara5.
nissaral}a, n. [S., BHS niJ:¡saral)a], going out, departure;
escape; separation (from), riddance; means, remedy to
get rid of or counteract something; Abh 988
(bhavaniggamane yane dvare -a!Tl); Vin I 104,19
(nekkhammana!Tl -an~ pavivekan~ kusa1an~
dhammana!Tl adhigamaya phasu hoti ti); D II 31,1
(imassa dukkhassa -a!Tl na pajanati jaramaraqassa); MI
85,13 (ko pan' avuso kamana!Tl assado ko adinavo ki!Tl
-a!Tl); 87,31 (yo .. . kamesu chandaragavinayo
chandaragappahan~ id~ kaman~ -a!Tl); 326,23
(id~ hi marisa nicc~ ida!Tl dhuv~ ... ito ca pan'
aññ~ uttari!Tl -a!Tl natthi ti); S I 128,24* (atthi -~ 1oke;
Spk I 189,15: -an ti nibban~) = Thi 57; A I 260,7 (no ce
t~ bhikkhave 1okarnha -~ abhavissa na-y-ida!Tl satta
1oke nissareyyu!Tl); III 317,31 (bhikkhu ... uppannassa ca
kamaragassa -~ yathabhilta!Tl na ppajanati; Mp III
356,12: -an ti niggaman~ vilpasaman~); Ud 33,9 (ye
va pana keci samaqa va brahmal)a va vibhavena
bhavassa -a!Tl aha!TlSU sabbe te anissata bhavasma ti
vadami; Ud-a 212,25: sabbabhavato niggamana!Tl
nikkhanti!Tl sa!Tlsarasuddhi!Tl vadi!Tlsu); 81,3 (yasma ...
atthi ajata!Tl ... asailkhata!Tl tasma jatassa ... sankhatassa
-~ paññayati ti; cfUd-a 396,17: sabbesa!Tl pi
sailkhatadhammana!Tl pa¡ipakkhabhiltena tabbidhura-
sabhavena -ena bhavitabb~); It 61,3 (kaman~ et~
-a!Tl yadida!Tl nekkhamm~; It-a II 41,5: -an ti
apagamo) f. Pa¡is I 26,29 (Pa¡is-a 120,28/oll.: kamato
rüpato sailkhatato nissaranti etena ti -~ tehi va
nissa¡atta -a!Tl, asubhajjhana!Tl, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee 0 -tta);
Thi 315 (sah~ -~ ñatva jatiya maral)assa ca;
nissarm;¡Iya
Th!-a 219,33: jatijaramarai.liina~ -bhüta~ nibbana~
0
maggañfu).ena pativijjhitva); Patis II 113,9 Uaramara!).a~
dukkhasacc~ jati samudayasacca~ ubhinna~ pi -a~
nirodhasacc~); 244,36 (sabbaki1esana~ arahattamaggo
-~); Mil326,1 (pati1addha~ kho me -an ti);
Vism 322,8 (vyapadad!n~ -tta; Vism-t [Be] I 385,29:
0
ettha y~ yassa -a~ ta~ tassa ujupatipakkhabhütam eva
hoti); Sv 1013,38 (0 -pañño ti yava-d-eva sltassa
patighataya ti vutta~ -am eva jananto); 1015,27
Uighacchaya pativinodan~ ida~ ettha -an ti eva~
paribhuñjana~ paribhogasantoso nama); It-a II 40,28
(kilesakamato hi -a vatthukamehi pi -a~ yeva hoti na
aññatha, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee -a yeva); Dhp-a I 229,23
(pamattassa vagato -~ natthi appamattassa atthl ti);
Patis-a 179,35 (kamadhatusamatikkamanato hi kamaraga-
patipakkhato ca ida~ jhana~ kamanam eva -~);
Ap-a 182,1o (samal).a nama attano -a~ katu~ ...
labhanti); - anissarm;ta, n., what is not escape or
separation; Ud-a 212,21 (-e nissaral).adi!!hlna~).
nissaral}lya (and nissaral).lya ?), mfn. [BHS nil_lsarai_llya],
connected with, conducive to, separation, getting rid of,
escape; D III 239,18 (pañca -a dhatuyo ... nekkhamme
citt~ pakkhandati . . . ye ca kamapaccaya uppajjanti
asava . . . mutto so tehi . . . ida~ akkhata~ kamana~
nissara!).a~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nissara!).lya; Sv 1031,31:
nissata visa~yutta) = A III 245,5 (Ee so; Be, Ce
nissara!).lya; Se nissaral).iya); D III 247,21 (cha -a
dhatuyo . . . nissaral).a~ h' eta~ avuso vyapadassa
yadida~ metta cetovimutti, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nissiira!).lya; = A III 290,21: Be, Ce, E e nissaral).lya; Se
nissaraniya): 275,13 (tisso -a dhatuyo kaman~ eta~
nissara!).am yadida~ nekkhamma~ ... ,Be, Ce so; Ee, Se
nissara!).lya) It 61,2 (It-a II 40,24: nissaral).a-
patisa~yutta); Patis-a 702,13 (-a dhatuyo pan' ettha
ujukam eva nekkhamman ti vutta~).
nissarati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nil_lsarati], goes out, departs;
escapes from; is rid of, is separated from; S II 172,24foll.
(no ced~ bhikkhave pathav!dhatuya nissara!).a~
abhavissa na-y-ida~ satta pathavldhatuya -eyyu~ ...
satta pathavldhatuya -anti); A I 260,9 (y asma ca kho
bhikkhave atthi loke nissara!).a~ tasma satta lokamha
-anti); Patis II 166,14 (loka -antl ti [dhamma) lokuttara;
Patis-a 621,11: -antl ti niggacchanti); Ap 533,9 (mama
bhikkhusailghe loka ito -itu~ khamante); Dhp-a III
177,18 (imamha vaqaloka nlyanti -anti, nibban~
papu!).antl ti attho);- part.pr. nissaranta, mfn., Dhp-a I
263,2 (vaqato -anto yati); - absol. nissaritva, Ps II
345,9 (pañcahi indriyehi -itva); - pp nissata, mfn.
[S. nil_lsrta], (who has) gane out, left; separated (from);
rid of, free from; S II 173,14 (satta sadevaka lo ka ... -a
visa~yutta vippayutta, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nissaqha) =
III31,1; A V 151,2o (katlhi ... dhammehi tathagato -o
visa~yutto vippamutto. .. viharatl ti); Th 122 (-o
sabbakamehi); Ja lii 530,24* (te sukhino vltasoka ye
matugamehi caranti -a); VI 269,29* (vijjutabbhaghana va
-a, Ce, Ee so; Be vijjuv' abbhaghana vinissata; Se
vijjuvabbhaghana va nissita); Nidd I 55,25 (dhlro ...
nikkhanto -o vippamutto ... , Be, Ce so; E e, Se
nissagho); Patis II 10,13 (adhimokkhatthena
saddhindriya~ asaddhiya -~ hoti); 180,33 foil.
627 nissaya
(nekkhammena kamacchando -o e' eva suñño ti ...
arahattamaggena sabbaki1esa -a e' eva sunna ca);
Ap 68,6foll. (tehi tva~ -o santo sukh~ sata~ na
lacchasi ... gajo yütha va -o); Mil95,13 (yadi
parinibbuto visa~yutto lokena -o sabbabhavehi); Ps II
386,29 (gal).ato -a visa~saqha); Spk III 209,33 (nibban~
ki1esehi --tta apagatatta düre !hitatta nissaral).avimuttl ti
sailkha~ gata~, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nissajjatta);
Vibh-a 12,26 (anupakatthe ti nissate, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nissaghe);- nissatakas~ in Ce, Ee atAs 326,5 is prob.
wr for nijjatakas~ (Be, Se so); - neg. anissata, mfn.,
A IV 430,25 (aya~ pi anissato 1okamha ti); Ud 33,9; -
sunissata, mfn., Patis II 13,2o; caus. pr. 3 sg.
nissiireti, expels (temporarily from the sailgha),
suspends; V in I 321,30 (atthi puggalo appatto
nissara!).a~, ta~ ce sailgho -eti ekacco sunissarito
ekacco dunnissarito; Sp 1147,11: pabbajanlyakammena
hi viharato -eti tasma t~ nissaral).a ti vuccati); Sp 908,5
(bhikkhuni~ sailghato -en ti nissiiral).lyo); Ps II 105,14
(Ariqh~ gal).ato -eti); - pass. pr. 3 sg. nissarlyati,
Vin IV 225,7; Sp 908,8 (ya~ apanna bhikkhunl sailghato
-lyatl ti so nissiiral).lyo ti); 1413,17 (bhal).<;lanakarakadayo
yena kammena -iyanti); - pp nissarita, mfn., expelled,
suspended; Vin I 359.29*; Sp 1403,8 (y~ aññe samal).era
labhanti bhikkhühi saddhi~ dirattatiratt~ sahaseyya~
tassa alabhaya -ito ); Ps II 105,23 (Arittho gal).ato -ito
nama hoti); - neg. anissarita, mfn., Sp 1402,3; -
dunnissarita, dunnisarita, mfn., incorrectly suspended;
Vin I 321,31 (ekacco sunissarito ekacco dunnissarito);
335,3* (in uddana: suddh' assa dunnisarito); -
sunissarita, mfn., correctly suspended; V in I 321,3o;
335,3* (balo hi sunisarito, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee sunissarito );
Sp 1147,15;- fpp nissaretabba, mfn., Sp 1402,28.
nissasati, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. niv'svas], breathes heavily, sighs;
Sv 428,1o (maral).akale pana -anti vijambhanti sake
asane nabhiramanti) = Ps IV 170,2o; - part.pr.
nissasanta, mf(-ant!)n., Ap 548,18 (natailgl dal).<;la-
dutiya ... -antl muhu~ muhu~) t 575,9 (Be, Ce, Se so;
Ee wr nissayanti);- se e also nissasa.
nissiimika, mfn., see sv samika.
nissiiya, ind. [prob. absol. of nissayati qv; BHS nisraya],
l. (i) depending on, relying on; using as one's support;
Vin I 58,12 (pi!).<;liyalopabhojan~ -a pabbajja); 183,31
(kevala~ saddhamattak~ nüna ay~ ayasma -a
nekkhammadhimutto ti); MI 135,5 (t~ kull~ -a ...
sotthina par~ uttareyyan ti); S II 218,14 (ma papiccha
pakkha~ -a sailgh~ bhindeyyu~); V 268,6 (chanda~
ce ... bhikkhu -a labhati samadhi~); A I 109,25 (raja
cakkavattl dhammiko dhammaraja dhamm~ yeva
-a ... ); 152,17 foll. (himavanta~ ... pabbataraja~ -a
mahasala . . . va<;l<;lhanti . . . saddh~ kulapati~ -a
antojan o . . . va<;l<;lhati); III 259,23 (bhoge -a attan~
sukheti); IV 422,8 (patham~ ... jhan~ -a asavana~
khaya~ vadami); Dhp 164 (dighi~ -a papika~);
Ud 66,13* (nañña~ -a jlveyya); Sn 1070 (natthl ti -a
tarassu ogha~; Pj II 593,23: ta~ natthi kiñcl ti
pavattasamapatti~ arammal).~ katva); Ja I 140,26
(rajana~ -a rajuyyane vasa~ kappesi); 225,1 (sa ta~ -a
putta~ patilabhi); Dhs 600 (y~ cakkhu~ -a rüp~
arabbha cakkhusamphasso uppajji); Kv 61,25 (puggalo
nissara
kirp -a tiqhati ti bhavarp -a tiqhati ti); Mil28,22 (marp
pana -a chaya pavattatl ti); 99,26 (tani b!jani pa!havirp -a
sarpvirühitva); Vism 5,11 (s!lasampattirp hi -a tisso vijja
papul)ati); 595,18 (dal)~abhihatarp bherirp -a sadde
pavattamane); 597,3 (navarp -a manussa yanti al)l)ave);
Sp 984,16 (yasma cattaro paccaye -a attabhavo pavattati
tasma te nissaya ti vuccanti); 1407,31 (ekarp
panasarukkharp -a sa!!hi pi jan a j!vanti); - (ii) because
of; for the sake of, Vin III 15,13 (ñatl marp -a danani
dassanti puññani karissanti); M II 185,16 (briihmal)O
rajanarp -a brahmal)agahapatike vilumpati); 265,21 (-a
-a kira no bhante bhagavata oghassa nittharal)a akkhata;
Ps IV 67,9: tarp tarp samapattirp -a); III 220,3 (tani -a
tani agamma); A III 220,12foll. (appicchatarp yeva -a
santuqhirp yeva -a ... pattapil)~iko hoti); Ja I 101,22
(evarp ekarp balasatthavahaputtarp -a sabbe te vinasarp
papul)irpsu); 196,21 (saccarp kira tvarp bhikkhu
ukkal)!hito ti ... ama bhante ti kirp -a ti); 203,3 (ma
amhe -a ete kilamantu); II 356,26 (ete no s!havyagghe -a
vanasal)~O asucikul)apagandho jato); III 232,26 (tassa
jatirp -a mahanto mano ahosi); Sp 13,10 (vinaya-
pariyattirp -a ayasmantarp Upalirp etadagge !hapesi);
224,26 (duss!lapuggale -a hi uposatho na tighati
pavfual)a na tiqhati, so read with Be, Ce, Se); Ps III 72,18
(na sakkoma mayarp tumhe -a Cal)~ala bhaviturp);
Pv-a 27,5 (yesarp hetü ti yesarp karal)a ye -a); Th-a I
122,3 (kirp -a rodas! ti); - 2. in (fonnal) dependence,
with support; having as mentor(+ gen. or acc.); Vin I
60,32 (anujanami bhikkhave dasa vassani -a vatthurp);
9l,3o (na bhikkhave alajjinarp -a vatthabbarp;
Sp 1031,26: upayogatthe samivacanarp, alajjipuggale -a
vasantl ti attho ); 92,31 (yada pa!irüpo nissayadayako
agacchissati tassa -a vasissami ti); Sp 252,29 (yo marp
pabbajesi yo marp anussavesi yiiharp -a vasami); 985,16
(yava acariyarp -a vasati); 1003,31 (acariyo me avuso
hohi ayasmato -a vacchami ti); - 3. leaning against;
beside; near; Vin III 15,38 (ayasma Sudinno tarp
abhidosikarp kummasarp aññatararp ku~~amülarp -a
paribhuñjati); IV 266,17 (aññatarassa brahmal)assa
bhikkhunüpassayarp -a yavakhettarp hoti); DI 50,18
(bhagava majjhimarp thambharp -a puratthabhimukho
nisinno); II 130,14 (pañcamattani saka!asatani Ajararp
Kalamarp -a -a atikkamirpsu); SI 145,2 (ayasma
Mahakassapo dakkhil)arp disarp -a ... nisidi); Jai 31,13
(yakkho cañkamanako!iyarp alambanaphalakarp -a
!hatva); 221,23 (aññatararp padumasararp -a !hite
rukkhe); Ap 235,14 (mahasamuddarp -a vasate);
Vism 595,11 (dv!su najakalapisu annamannarp -a
!hapitasu); Pv-a 154,11 (imarp khuddakanadirp -a
pa!isotarp gacchanto); - anissaya, not depending on;
not leaning against; without a mentor; Sn 474 (asarp -a;
Pj II 409,34: tal)harp anall!yitva); 839 (santo -a bhavarp
na jappe; Pj II 546,2: cakkhadisu kañci dhammarp -a);
Vism 340,1; Sp 968,22 (kalyiil)amittena acariyena
dinnanayarp nissaya no -a); 1325,4 (-a vasanto ); Th-a II
43,22foll. (yatha nama val!I rukkhad!su kiñci -a
vaMhiturp na sakkoti evarp ayarp pi kañci pal)~itarp -a
vaddhitum na sakkotl ti).
niss~~a\ mfo., see sv sara.
nissara 2 , m., l. [S. niJ:lsara], going out; separating oneself;
628 nissitaka
Nidd-a II 74,2o (vivittato ti -ato, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nissarato ); - 2. (for nissaral)a qv] expulsion; -
o• -osaraJ].li,fp/., expulsion and re-admittance;
Vin-vn 3000.
nissaraka, mfn. [nissara 1 + ka2], pithless; worthless;
Sp 612,12 (atha va til)arp ca -arp lahukarp kaqharp ca
til)aka!!harp).
nissarajja, mfn., see sv sarajja.
nissaraJ].li, f, -a, n. [cf S. niJ:lsfual)a], (temporary)
expulsion; suspension; Vin I 32l,z9foll. (dve 'ma
bhikkhave -a, atthi bhikkhave puggalo appatto -arp tarp
ce sailgho mssareti ekacco sunissarito ekacco
dunnissarito; Sp 1147,11: idarp pabbajan!yakammarp
sandhaya vuttarp, pabbajaniyakammena hi viharato
nissareti tasma tarp -a ti vuccati); V 117,25; Mil 344,8 (in
cpd); 357,14 (-arp nicchubhanarp . . . pa!ilabhati);
Sp ll54,2o (yani ca bhal)~anakarakadini acaranto
tajjan!yakammadivasena -arp gacchati); 1402,19 foil.
(ettha osfual)arp -an ti padasili!!hatay' etarp vuttarp,
pathamarp pana -a hoti paccha osiiral)a, tattha ya
Kal)!akasamal)erassa dal)~akammanasana, sa -a ti
veditabba); 1412,3 (tajjan!yakammad!narp sattanna111
kammanarp vasena -a); Vin-vn 2985 (-arp ca osaro ).
nissaraJ].iya, mfn. and n. f!rom nissaral)a], l. involving
suspension; (the fonnal act) connected with suspension;
Vin IV 224,28 (ayarp bhikkhuni pathamapattikarp
dhammarp apanna -arp saiJ.ghadisesan ti; 225,7: -an ti
sailghamha mssanyati; Sp 908,5foll.: bhikkhuni111
sañghato nissaretl ti -o . . . yarp apanna bhikkhuni
saiJ.ghato nissar!yati so -o ti); V 223,31 (osfual)Iya111
paññattarp -arp paññattarp; Sp !4!3,17foll.: yena
kammena nissariyanti tarp kammarp paññattan ti attho) t
A I 99,14 (Mp II 165,16: asammavattanadisu -a111
paññattarp); 2. to be got rid of; ? [or =
nissaraJ)rya qv], D III 239,18 (pañca -a dhatuyo ...
nekkhamme cittarp pakkhandati . . . y e ca kamapaccaya
uppajjanti asava . . . mutto so tehi . . . idarp akkhatarp
kamanarp nissaral)arp, Se so; Be, Ce, Ee nissaraJ)rya) =
A III 245,5 (Be, Ce so; E e nissaral)Iya; Se nissfual)iya);
D III 247,21 (cha -a dhatuyo ... nissaral)arp h' etarp
avuso vyapadassa yadida111 metta cetovimutti, Se so; Be,
Ce, Ee nissaral)rya) = A III 290,21 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nissaraniya); D III 275,13 (tisso -a dhatuyo kamana111
etarp nissaral)arp yadidarp nekkhammarp ... , E e, Se so;
Be, Ce nissaral)rya; = It 61,2: eds nissaraJ)rya).
nissarada, mfn., see sv sarada.
nissava, m. [S. !ex. niJ:!srava, nisrava], the water or scum
ofboiled rice; Abh 466 (-o ca tathacamo).
nissasa, m. [cfS. nisvasa], breath; Ap 461,19 (-o
mukhagandho ca); - see also nissasati.
nissita, mfn., pp of nissayati qv.
nissitaka, mfn. and m. [nissita + ka2], resorting to; relying
on; attached to, supported by; one under guidance and
supervision; a pupil; Ja I 142,24 (Sariputta tumhakarp -a
pañcasata bhikkhü); II 38,24 (ubho pi thera ... attano -e
adaya); Sp 805,13; 1149,3 (te tassa -e disva tumhakarp
upajjhayo apattirp apajjitva pi apattibhavarp na janatl ti
iiharpsu); Sv 13,24 (avuso ima111 tuyharp -e vacehi ti);
Mp I 329,1 (yo te maya Sariputta -o dinno); Ud-a 266,24
(attano -e dhutaiJ.gadhare eva katva); - ifc see canda-,
nissineha
tapa- (sv tapa[s]), nakkhatta-, suriya-.
nissineha, mfn., se e sv sneha.
nissippa, mfn., see sv sippa.
nissirika, nissirika, mfn. [S. nil_¡sñka], which has lost its
splendour or beauty; ugly; unfortunate; Ja V 82,28 (-o,
Ce, Se so; Be, Ee nissiriko); VI 225,14 (raja kiñci
ajanantaJ11 naggabhogga111 -a111 andhabalaJ11 ajivakaJ11
pucchi, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nissirikaJ11); 456,1
(cha<;l<;litagamasadisa111 susanabhümi111 viya -aJ11
rajabhavanaJ11 disva, Ce, Ee, Se so; Be nissirikaJ11);
Sp 229,14 (alak:khika ti -a, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nissirika);
Sv 41,17 (suriyuggamane khajjopanaka viya 0 -taJ11
apajjati); Spk III 100,7 (kasma naggabhoggaJ11 -aJ11
nigaJ.lrhaJ11 upasaii.kami ti, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se nissirikaJ11);
Dhp-a I 216,4 (ima pi -a dubbinita, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nissirika); Vibh-a 9,11 (akantan ti akamika111 -aJ11 va).
nissima, mfn., se e sv sima.
nissila, mfn., se e sv sila.
nissukka, mfn., see sv sukka 1.
nissuta 1, mfn., se e sv SUJ:.lati.
nissuta 2 , mfn. [S. nil_¡sruta ?], flowed out or away,
vanished; MI 280,25 (kathaJ11 ... bhikkhu sottiyo hoti, -a
'ssa honti papaka akusala dhamma ... ); A IV 144,24
(sattanna111 ... dhammilnaJ11 ... 0 -tta sottiyo hoti, Be, Ce
so; Ee, Se nissuttatta, prob. wr); Ps 11 324,31 (kilesanaJ11
sutatta sottiyo hoti 0 -tta apagatatta ti attho); Pj 11 432,17
(ariyo pana bahusaccena 0 -papataya ca paramattha-
sottiyo hoti).
nisseka, m. [S. ni~eka], sprinkling; - ifc see udaka-.
nissel}I (and nissenl), f [S. nisrayal)i, nisrel)i], a ladder;
Abh 2lq H sadhirohil,li); Vin III 151,21
(aparikkamanaJ11 nama na sakka hoti . . . -iya
anuparigantu111; Sp 570,11 foll.: -iya111 rhatva gehaJ11
chadentehi na sakka hoti samanta -iya avijjhituJ11); DI
194,19 (puriso ... -iJ11 kareyya pasadassa arohaJ_laya);
Ap 171,4 H111 mapayitvana thüpaseqha111 samaruhiJ11);
187,16 (arohatthaya pasadaJ11 -i karita maya); Ja 11 315,24
H111 bandhitva rajanaJ11 uttaretva); III477,22* (yada -im
aruyha candaJ11 khadeyyu111 müsika); Mil 263,26
(kaghaJ11 ca valliJ11 ca chinditva -i111 bandhitva); 356,8
H arohal)aya); Vism 244,3 (akusalo puriso
dvattiJ11sapadaJ11 -i111 ekantarikaya arohanto kilantakayo
patati); Dhp-a 11 211,2joll. H111 bandhitva sabbe pi laJ11
pabbataJ11 abhiruyha -i111 patetva samaJ_ladhammaJ11
kari111su); Ap-a 440,21 (nissaya taJ11 il,lanti gacchanti
arohanti upari ti -i); - 0 (i)-bahuka, m., the side poles
of a ladder; ? Vis m 340,31 * = As 211 ,26*.
nissel}ika, f [cf S. nil_¡srel,lika], a ladder; a framework; -
ifc se e baddha- (sv bandhati).
nissesa, mfn., see sv sesa.
nissesaka, mfn. [nissesa + ka2; cf S. nil_¡se~ita], completely
gane;? Ja III 153,18' ([sabbesu bhogesu] asesakesü ti
-esu, Be, Se so; Ce asesitesü ti; Ee asesitesü ti na
sesitesu nissesesü ti attho ).
nissoka, mfn., se e sv so ka.
nihanati, nihanti, pr. 3 sg. [cf S. nihanti, nirhanti], strikes;
hits, touches; throws (in); drops, lowers; knocks out,
removes; destroys; Th 744 (tacchanto iil)iya iil)iJ11 nihanti
balava yatha indriyan' indriyeh' eva nihanti k u salo tatha,
Be, Ce so; Ee, Se wr kusala; Th-a III 25,21 foll.: tacchako
629 nihanati
rukkhadai_1<;lagataJ11 iil)ÍJ11 niharitukamo tato ba1avatiJ11
iil)iJ11 kottento tato niharati . . . bhikkhu cakkhadini
indriyani vipassanabalena nihantukamo indriyehi eva
nihanti); Ja 11 386,6* (siilgena -ah' etaJ11, Be, Ce, Ee so;
Se niharasetaJ11); V 203,19* (nihanti so rukkhaphalaJ11
pathavya; cf206,17': nihanti ti paltarati); Vv-a 344,14
(atha kho attano pabhaya tama111 nihanti, 3 pl. ?); -
fut. (a) 2 sg. (?) [cf S. nihaJ11syati] nihaññasi, Ja VI 13,18*
(Kasirañño altaJ11 putto ya111 kasuya nihaññasi, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nighaññasi; 13,27': nihaññasi ti -issasi, Be, Se so;
Ce nighaññasi ti; Ee nighaññasi ti nikhaJ_lissasi) quoted
Cp-a 225,15* (eds nikhaññasi); (b) 2 sg. nihanissasi,
Ja VI 13,27' (Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nikhaJ_lissasi);
1 sg. nihanissami, Ja VI 13,27' (yaJ11 tvaJ11 ettha -issami ti
saññaya kasu111 khai_lasi, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nikhal)asi); -
pan.pr. (a) nihana(t), mfn., Ja 11 407,1* (varaJ11 vara111
tva111 -aJ11 pure cari); (b) nihananta, mfn., Ja 11 407,8·;-
nihani111 in Ee at M 11 82,23 is wr for nihini111 (Be, Ce, Se
so); - inf nihantuJ11, Th-a III 25,23 (nihantukamo); -
absol. (a) nihacca, S I 178,29* (nihacca mana111
atthaddho); Thi 109 (nihacca januJ11); Ja III 307,4•;
(b) nihantva, V in I 5,22 (braltma saltampati ...
dakkhil,laJ11 janumai_l<;lalaJ11 parhaviyaJ11 nihantva) f. D 11
37,11 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nidaltanto) f. SI 78,7 (Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nihanto) = Ud 65,13; Vv 84:32 (diva ca ratto ca
tama111 nihantva, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nihanta, prob. wr);
Ja VI 19,22* (ayaJ11 so sarathi eti nihantva mama atrajaJ11,
Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nihantvana mam'); Ap 505,9 (nihantva
jatijaJ11 madaJ11); (e) nihantvana, Bv 15:1 (maltatamaJ11
nihantvana; Bv-a 216,15: nihantvana ti -itva, ayam eva
va parho); Sadd 851,16; (d) nihanitva, Ja IV 103,11*
(hantva adhamma111 -itva bhümya, me; 103,28·:
bhümiyaJ11 -itva patetva); Ap 43,15 (-itva paran tape, Se
so; Be, Ce, Ee niggaJ_lhitva); Bv 17:1 (-itva tamaJ11
sabbaJ11, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nihantvana); (e) nihanitvana,
Ap 44,5 (titthiye -itvana Mara111 capi sasenakaJ11, Be, Ce,
Ee so; Se niharitvana); pass. part.pr.
nihaññamana, mfn., Ja VI 19,29* (tada nihaññamano
bhümiya); - pp nihata, mfn. [ts], struck, hit; struck
down; destroyed, ended; put down, thrown in; V in I
21 ,20* (-o tvam asi antaka) f. S I 103,22* (Spk I 170,13:
tva111 maya -o parajito, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nihato) f.
Thi 59; V in I 357,36 (-a sali.gharaji -o sali.ghabhedo, Ce,
Ee so; Be -o sailghabhedo -a sali.gharaji -aJ11
sali.ghavavatthana111 -aJ11 saii.ghananakaraJ_laJ11; Se
nihato .. . nihata .. . nihata111 .. . nihataJ11 ... ); 1198,34
( -a111 eta111 bhikkhave adhikaraJ:.lal11 santaJ11 vüpasantaJ11
suvüpasantan ti); Ja I 246,5* (eVaJ11 so -o seti);
IV 339,11* (etth' eva te -a hinavada, Ce, Ee so; Be, Se
nihata); VI 19 ,23* (-o nüna me putto pathavya
bhümiva<;l<;lhano); 277,18* (passa malle ... -e nihatamane
ca, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se nihate nihatamane ca; cf277,w: -e
ti nihanitva jinitva rhite nihatamane ti parajite, Be so; Ce,
Ee omit jinitva; Se nihate ti nihanitva . . . nihatamane
ti ... );- -ádhikaraJ:.la, n., a legal question or case which
has been settled; Vin IV 126,5 (yathadhammaJ11
-ádhikaraJ:.laJ11 punakammaya ukkorenti; Sp 865,31:
nihataJ11 adhikaraJ:.laJ11 . . . vüpasamita111 adhikaraJ:.lan ti
attho) f. V 22,31; Sp 1349,13; Utt-vn 129;
--paccamitta, mfn., whose enemies have been destroyed;
niharati
without enemies; DI 69,34 (khattiyo muddhavasitto
--paccamitto, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nihita-); Ja II 239,25
(--paccamitto dani sammasambuddho jato ti);
Mil 314,29; - --bhatto in Ee, Se at Sp 1165,2 is wr for
nihatabhatto (Be, Ce so); - --mana, mfn. [nihata +
mana 1], free from pride; S IV 203,27 (--manena cetasa
viharissama ti); Thi413; Jai 300,11 (dasi viya --mana
hoti); VI88,II' (--manataya); Mi1414,I4; Mpiii 185,28
( --manatta); - anihata, mfn., not settled; not removed;
Vin IV 126,25 (kammal11 anihatarp.) f. V 150,22;
Sp 1351,21 (anihate tasmirp. puggale puna . .. Sal1lvaso
natthi, Be, Ee so; Ce anihate; Se anihate); -
dunnihata, mfn., not properly settled; Vin IV 126,7 f.
V 150,22;- sunihata, mfn., properly settled; Kkh 2 213,9;
- fpp nihanitabba, mfn., Vin IV 126,7 (kammal11
anihatarp. dunnihatal11 puna nihanitabban ti, Be, Ce, Ee
so; Se nihanitabban ti) f. V 150,23 (Be, Ce, Ee so; Se
nihanitabbarp.); - caus. pr. 3 sg. nigghateti, nighateti,
removes, destroys; strikes; Thi-a 207,26 (dhunantí ti
-enti, pajahantí ti attho);- absol. nighatiya, Mhv 22:47
(nighatiya Damije); - pp nigghatita, nighatita, mfn.,
struck down; depressed; Nidd I 168,4 (jayena cittal11
ugghatital11 hoti parajayena cittal11 -itarp. hoti, Be, Se so;
Ce, Ee nighatital11); Nidd-a 468,27 (nihato setí ti -ito
sayati, Be, Se so; Ee nighatito; Ce nighatiko);- see also
nighata2.
niharati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niharati.
niharena in Ee at Vin I 13,4 is prob. wr (Be, Ce, Se omit),
and at Sp 1373,15 is wr for niharena (Be, Ce, Se so).
niv'Íli, [cf S. ;/hi], to set in motion, impel; -
aor. 1 sg. nihinirp., M II 82,23 (aharp. tarp. kalyfu;larp.
vattam nihinim, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr nihanim); -
pp.~ihita 2 , mfo., set in motion; impelled; M IÍ 75,n
(yena me idal11 kalyiil;lal11 vagarp. -al11 anuppavatteyyasi;
[or nihita1 ?] cfPs-t [Be] III 148,I8foll.: nihatan ti -arp.
thapitarp., pavattitan ti attho, nihatan ti va satatal11
patiWJitabhavena vajañjitan ti attho ); 82,24 (aharp. tarp.
kalyfu;lal11 vagarp. nihinirp., maya tarp. kalyiil;lal11 vattal11
-arp.); Ja III 131, 14' (porfu;lal11 nihitarp. vattarp. vattatal11
yeva, Be, Ce so; Ee vaggharp. va<;l<;lhatal11; Se nihatarp.).
nihita\ mfn., pp ofnidahati 2 qv.
nihita 2 , mfn., pp ofni;/bi qv.
nihitiidhikarar;taqi in Ee at Sp 1349,13 is wr for
nihatadhikaral)arp. (Be, Ce so; Se nihata-).
nihitapaccamitto in Ee at DI 69,34, 172,11 and 181,2o is
wr for nihatapaccamitto (Be, Ce, Se so).
nihina, mfn.,pp ofnihiyati qv.
nihinaka, mfn. and m. [nihina + ka2], (one) who is base,
inferior; Abh 516 (nico jammo -o); Ja I 443,11 • (kare
sarikkho atha vapi segho -o capi kareyya eko; 443,16·:
eko jati-adihi hino pi mittadhammal11 kareyy' eva).
nihiyati, pr. 3 sg. [S. nihiyate], decreases, grows less; falls
away, falls short (of); is deficient; Vin V 168,35' (-ati
tassa yaso kajapakkhe va candima) = A II l8,2o•; D III
185,2* (nihinasevi na ca vuddhasevi -are kajapakkhe va
cando, Ce so; Be -ate; Ee, Se -ati); A I 126,1* (-ati
puriso nihinasevi na ca hayetha kadaci tulyasevi, eds so;
read hiyati me?)= Ja III 324,11* (324,15': -ati parihayati
vinasarp. papul)ati); Th 555 (-atí Val)l)abalarp. mati ca, Ee
so; Be, Ce -ati; Se nihiyyyati; Th-a II 236,9: -ati
630 nica
parihayati); Cp-a 299,9 (kopena ca mayhal11 gul)ayasa
-antí ti); - part.pr. nihiyamana, mfn., Th-a I 179,22
(gul)ato -amanesu); - pp nihina, mfn., low, base,
mean; inferior; deprived of, deficient; Abh 699 (-o
hina1amaka); D III 11,8 (y asa -o kalarp. karissati ti, Be,
Se so; Ce, Ee nikkii)I)O; Sv 823,3ofoll.: yarp.
labhaggayasaggal11 patto tato parihlno hutva); M II 35,15
(Vai)I)O kimina khajjopanakena --taro ca patikighataro
ca, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee hinataro); SI 12,1* (samo visesi
atha va -o); Pv 26:14 (-ani kulani kapal)ani ca); Sn 132
(-o sena manen a; Pj II 181,8: -o ti gul)avuddhito
parihino adhamabhaval11 va gato); 797 (-ato passati
sabbam aññarp.); Ja II 97 ,5' (valodakarp. apparasal11 -al11
pitva); Nidd I 299,3 (balo hoti hino -o omako
lamako ... ); Mil201,7 (bodhisatto Devadattato jatiya -o
lamako tiracchanagato); Th-a II 262,3o (jatiya kammassa
ca --taya); 278,18 (bhogavipatti-adina --tal11 gata, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr nihinantarp.); III 154,13
(samathavipassanal11 cha<;i<;ietva -e alasiye niyojesi ti);
Thi-a 115,10 (kammarp. -al11 gammarp. pothujjanikal11
dukkharp. anatthasarp.hitarp. ca); Cp-a 197,32 (--tamo);-
-'-attho in Se at Pv 36:5 and in Ee at Pv-a218,17' and
220,3 is wr for nihinatto (Be, Ce so);- --jacca, mfn., of
inferior birth or family; Ja II 97,14'; VI 291,18*; -
--sevi(n), mfn., associating with inferior people; D III
185,2•; A I 126,1• =Ja III 324,11' quoted Sadd 441,3.
nihuiphmika, nihuhmi.ka, mfn., see sv hurp.hmi.ka.
ni- sometimes represents ni 2 befare a single consonant,
esp. befare r-, v-, h-; Abh 1167 f. Sadd 885,20' (niharal)e
avaral)e niggamadisu dissati nisaddo ); Patis-a 265,27
(abhiniharo ti .. . abhimukhattho hi ettha abhisaddo
bhusattho nisaddo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee nisaddo);- see eg
niraja (sv raja[s]), nibhata, niharati.
nika, m., see sv niilka.
nikara, see sv nikara.
nigadhaniyaqi in Ee (and nigadhaniyarp. in Ce) at
Sv 96,25 are prob. wrr; Be, Se nibbapaniyarp..
nigha, nigha, m.n. [perhaps from ni 1 or ni 2 + ;/han, but
prob. abstracted from anigha, anigha qqv; cf BHS nigha,
nigha], affliction; destroying; Abh 89 (-o ca vyasanal11
agharp.); S IV 292,11 (rago kho bhante -o doso -o moho
-o); V 57,I5foll. (tayo ... -a ... rago -o doso -o moho
-o, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee nigha . . . nigho ... ; Spk III
136,nfoll.: -a ti dukkha, vacanattho pan' ettha yassa
uppajjanti tal11 purisal11 nihananti ti -a, Be, Ce so; Se
niharantí ti -a; Ee nigha ti . . . nihananti ti nigha);
Thi 491 (sattisülüpama kama rogo gal)<;io aghal11 nigharp.;
Thi-a 262,12: maral)asampapanena nigharp.).
nica, mfn. [ts], low; lowly; inferior, base, mean; short;
Abh 516 (-o jammo nihinako); 708 (-o rasso vamano);
Vin I 228,34foll. (yasmirp. padese -a devata vatthüni
parigal)hanti -anarp. tattha rajünarp. rajamahamattanarp.
cittani namanti nivesanani mapeturp.); IV 204,22 (na -e
asane nisiditva ucce asane nisinnassa agilanassa
dhammal11 desessami ti); D I 109,36 (brahmal)o ... -arp.
asanal11 gahetva ekamantal11 nisidi); 194,23 (janasi tarp.
pasadal11 ... ucco va -o va majjhimo va ti); A II 85,15
(ekacco puggalo -e kuJe paccajato hoti Cal)gaiakule va
nesadaku1e va ... ); V 82,24 (raja uccaghaniyarp. -e thane
thapeti); Th 579 (-al11 manal11 karitvana); 620 (-e
niceyya
kulamhi jato 'harp.; Th-a II 264,6: -e ti lamake
sabbanihine); Ja V 56,26' (0 -tta); 434,z (uccarp. bhasati
-aJYI bhasati; 436,31-: mandasaddavasen a va amanapa-
vacanena va paribhavavacanav asena va -arp.); Nidd 1
388,7 (attanarp. va -aJYI thapento pararp. uccarp. thapento);
Vism 183,5 (ayarp. pasiiJ.!o ucco va -o va ___ ); Sv450,1o
(aññesam ca keci danta ucca keci -a ti visama honti, Be,
Ce, Se so; Ee wr nica); Pj II 563,1 (seyyo 'han ti va -o
'han ti va sarikkho 'han ti va); Sadd 321,28 ( 0 -saddo hi
hinavacako -e kule paccajato ti ettha viya); - ifc see
ucca-; - nicaJYI karoti, lowers; belittles; Vin I 46,9
(bhajanarp. patiggahetva -aJYI katva , , , dhovitva
patisametabbaJYI); 47,36 (mañeo -arp. katva __ _
ekamantaJTI nikkhipitabbo); II 208,1 (upahana omuñcitva
-arp. katva pappothetva); 213,36 (sace udakapatiggahako
hoti -arp. katva udakapatiggahe udakarp. asiñcitabbaJYI);
Pj II 181,7 (tehi yeva pare avajanati -arp. karoti, Be, Se
so; Ce, Ee tehi yo pararp. ___ ); 424,4 (na avajanitabbo na
-arp. katva janitabbo ti); Ap-a 224,9 (kañci puggalarp. na
vambhenti -arp. katva na maññanti ti); - nice, adv,
[cf S. nicais], low; downwards; Ja II 107,19* (-e oruyha
mantavho; 107 ,zz-: nice thane thatva); VI 554,30* (-e
e' olambate suriyo); 0
-kalambaka, nice-
kalambaka, m. [cfS. lex_ nicakadamba], a kind of low
kalambaka plant; Ja VI 536,4* (udakantasmiJYI ... bah u
nicekalambaka; 536,zz-: nicekalambaka ti -a); -
0
-kula, n., a family of low rank; M III 169,27; Sn 411
(nayarp. -a-m-iva); Ja VI 357,10-; Pj li 290,19
(--tadibhedarp. va tamarp. vajanti, Be, Ce so; Ee
nicakullnatadi-; Se 0 -kullnatadi-); - 0
-kuli(n), mfn,,
(one) who belongs to a family of low rank; Ps V 15,5
(-inaJYI va uccakulinarp. va sakka katuJTI, Be, Se so; Ce,
E e o -kullnarp. va uccakullnarp. uccakulinarp. va o -kullnaJYI
tarp. sakka katuJYI); Pet212,z3 (satta -ino);
0
-kulika, mfn., belonging to a family of low rank; Pj 1
174,27 (-anarp. omakapurisanarp.); Th-a 11 264,12; -
0
-kuliya, mfn,, leading to (birth in) a family of low rank;
Ps V 15,7 (-aJYI kammaJYI); 0
-kulina, nica-
kulina, mfn., born in a family of low rank; M III 202,24
(dissanti -a dissanti uccakullna, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se ni ca-);
206,17 (--ttaJTI upaneti, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nica- ); S 1
168,11' (nicakullno pi)= Sn462; Pj 11265,3 (uccakulina
pi -a pi ailgaJYI gharp.santi, Be, Ce so; Ee uccakulino pi
nicakulino pi; Se uccakulino pi 0 -kulino pi); Mil65,15
(aññe -a aññe mahakullna); - 0 -jacca, mfn., of low
birth; Ja IV 400,zz-; VI 509,4-; - 0 -jiitika, mfn., of low
birth; Ja 1 487,13; VI 547,2; - 0 -Hhiinika, mfn., of low
position or status; Sp 294,3o (bhaJ.le ti issaranarp.
--purisalapanarp.); - 0
-tara, mfn., campar., lower;
shorter; Vin 11 169,3 (samake va asane nisidituJTI -e va);
Ja V 365,22 (maJYI -aJYI katva adaya); VI 284,24 (kiJTI
rañño daso --jatiko, Be, Ce, Se so; Ee wr --jütiko);
Vism 124,z4; As 317,19 (digharp. ___ upanidhaya tato -aJYI
rassarp.); - -arp., adv., S I 145,4 (nisidi __ . -aJYI
bhagavato, Be, Ce, Ee so; Se 0 -tarakaJYI); - 0 -(t)til}a,
nica-til;¡a, mfn., covered with short grass; Ja V 168,22*
0
( -ttiiJa apparaja ca bhumi, Be so, me; Ce
0
-tiiJa; Ee, Se
nicatiiJa, me; 168,3o-: -tiiJehi sammannagata); -
0
0
-nivittha, mfn,, intent upon lowly things; humble;
Th 926 (-a subhara, Ee, Se so; Be, Ce nica nivittha;
631 nipa
cfTh-a 111 76,21 foil. : -a ti __ . nicavuttino nivatavuttino
ti attho nivittha ti sasane nivighasaddha);
0
-vattana, n,, humble, respectful behaviour; modest
conduct; Pj I 144,9 (nivato ti -arp., Ee so; Be, Ce, Se
0
-vuttita); - 0 -vatthuka, mfn,, with a low platform,- on
a low site; Vin 11 117,15 (kathinasala -a hoti udakena
otthariyati); 120,3; - 0
-vutti 1,f, humble, respectful
behaviour; modest conduct; Ja VI 555,zo- (apacitiJTI -iJTI
dassenta); Sv 853,17 (-iya akaraJ.labhavo); Ps 11 99,29;-
0
-Vutti2 , 0 -vutti(n), mfn., of humble or respectful
behaviour, mild; open to advice or instruction; abasing
oneself; Ja IV 44,3' (sa sasurassa ca samikassa ca
upakarika ahosi -i); VI 287,2o' (atimanarp. akatva -i
ovadanusanipaticchako); Vism 27,26 (catukamyata ti--ta
attanaJYI hetthato hetthato thapetva vattanaJYI); Spk I
354,18 (-ina pana khantiyarp. !hitena); 111 303,2o (ku1e
jetthanaJYI apacayino -ino ti attho); - neg. anicavutti,
anicavutti(n), mfn., Sp 741 ,6; 1315,z6; Vibh-a 494,27
(anicavuttitaya) - 0 -Vuttika, mfn., id.; JaiV 179,10';-
neg. anicavuttika, mfn., Spk 11 204,27; - anicatii,f,
abstr., not being low or base; Ja 1 367,12'; -
atinica, mfn., very low; too low; Ja IV 448,8 (bhavaggaJYI
-arp. tava doso atimaha); Vism 107,32; Sv 454,24 (vassiko
pasado nati-ucco hoti natinico); Vv-a 68,4.
niceyya, mfn. and n. [campar. of nica; cf S. -Iyas],
l. (mfn.) lower, inferior; Sn 855 (na vises! na -o); 918
(seyyo na tena maññeyya -o atha va pi sarikkho); -
2. (n.) lowness; inferiority; MI 329,7 (ahaJTI brahme
n' eva te samasamo abhiññaya kuto -aJYI, atha kho aham
eva taya bhiyyo; Ps 11 409,7: taya nicatarabhavo pana
mayharp. kuto; Ps-t [Be] 11 315,11: ayarp. imesarp.
atisayena nico ti -o, tassa bhavo -an ti).
nita, mfn., pp ofnayati 2 qv.
niti, f [ts], guidance; rules; conduct, prudent behaviour;
policy; moral philosophy; political science; Ja IV 226,12*
(nayarp. -i mayha sukhagamaya; 226,23': -i ti lokapaveiJi
atthalokadhamma ti attho); Mil3,31 (bahüni e' assa
satthani --· yoga -i visesika __ .); Pv-a 115,1o (taJYI -iJYI
niratthakarp. katukamo, Be, Se so; Ce, Ee omit -ÍJYI);
Sadd 504,19 (attharasa mahasippani __ . puriiJ.!aJYI itihaso
-i takko vejjakan cati); 842,z ( -i hettha amhehi thapita);
876,5 (ayaJYI -i atlva sukhuma sadhukarp.
manasikatabba); 925,24 (ya ca pana amhehi yathasatti
yathabalaJTI -iyo thapita); - ifc see daJ,l<;la-, sadda-; -
0
-kovida, mfn., knowledgeable about political science or
ethics; Ap 501,22 (vissattho -o); - 0 -cintaka, m., one
who considers and pronounces on political science or
ethics; Pv-a 130,22; - 0
-niradhi, m., an ocean of
guidance or rules; ? Sadd 926,16* (nitiniradhi); -
0
-ma(t), mfn., of prudent behaviour; politically astute;
Mhv 33:40;- 0 -Sattha, n, [niti + sattha3], the science of
política[ ethics or statecraft; Ja V 490,9- (tvaJYI
khattiyadhammasailkhate -e na kusalo si, Be, Se so; Ce
khattadhammasailkhate; Ee wr nakkhatthadhamm a-
sailkhate); Pv-a 129,25 (-e kataparicayo ); Sadd 926,20*.
nidha, [nu + idha] see sv nu 1.
nidhura, m. [cf Pkt IJiura], a bracelet;- ifc see eka-, du-
(sv du 2); - se e also niyura.
nipa, m.n. [ts], (m.) a tree; SAF: cadamba, Anthocephalus
chinensis (L.); Indian oak, Barringtonia racemosa (L.)
 nibhata
Spreng.; (n.) its flower; Abh 561 (kadambo piyako -o);
563 (niculo mucalindo ca -o); Ja V 6,3* (-a tala
e' udumbara, Be, Ce so; Ee, Se nipa, pro h. wr, but cf S.
lex. nipa); VI 530,5* (kutaja sala!a -a) f- Ap 17 ,13;
Bv 2:50 (campakarp sala!arp -arp .. . disodisarp
ukkhipanti; Bv-a 89,27: -an ti kadambapuppharp);
Ud-a 100,5 (mucalindo vuccati 0 -rukkho, so niculo ti pi
vuccati); Bv-a 297,25 (Sumedhassa -o [bodhi]).
nibhata, nibhata, mfn. [S. *nir + bhrta, or cf S. nibhrta ?],
taken out, removed; (hidden;) Ja III 471,23* (dinnarp hi
hoti -arp, Ee so, but prob. wr; Be, Ce dinnarp hoti
sunihatarp; Se dinnarp hoti sunibhatarp; =SI 31,26*: Be,
Ce, Ee dinnarp hoti sunihatarp; Se sunibbhatarp);
Sp 881,1 (-an ti nikkhantarp, Ce, Ee so; Se nibhatan ti;
Be niggatan ti); - neg. anibhata, mfn., not removed;
not hidden; - --ratanaka, mfn., where the queen is not
removed or hidden; Vin IV 160,15 (anikkhantarajake
--ratanake, Ce so; Be, Ee, Se aniggata-; 160,23:
--ratanake ti mahesi sayananighara anikkhanta hoti, Ce
so; Be, Ee, Se aniggata-; Sp 88l,1joll.: ratanarp vuccati
mahesi, nibhatan ti nikkhantarp, -arp ratanarp ito ti
--ratanakarp, Ce, E e, Se so; Be niggatan ti ...
aniggatarp ... aniggata-).
niyati, pass. pr. 3 sg. of nayati 2 qv.
niyatta, mfn., see sv niyyatta.
niyanta1 , mfn.,pass. part.pr. ofnayati2 qv.
niyanta 2, mfn.,part.pr. ofniyyati qv.
niyamana\ mfn., pass. part.pr. ofnayati 2 qv.
niyamana2 , mfn.,part.pr. ofniyyati qv.
niyatana, n., see sv niyyatana.
niyati, pr. 3 sg., se e sv niyyati.
niyateti, -ayati, niyadeti, -ayati, pr. 3 sg., see sv niyyateti.
niyana, n., see sv niyyana.
niyanika, niyaniya, mfn., see sv niyyanika.
niyura, m., se e sv niyura.
nira, n. [ts], water; Abh 661 (apo... a1,11,1arp -arp);
Vin-vn 111 (-ato uppatitva yo tire patati varijo );
Sadd 408,18*; - 0 -ja, (mj)n., 'bom in water', a lotus;
Sadd 75,23 (ambujan ti abhidhanarp paticca -arp kuñjan
ti adini abhisankharonti); - 0 -dhi, m. [nira + dhi 3], an
ocean; - ifc see niti-.
niraja, mfn., see sv raja(s).
nirava, mfn., see sv rava.
nirasa, mfn., se e sv rasa.
niraga, mfn., see sv raga.
niruja, mfn., see sv ruja.
niroga, mfn., see sv roga.
nila, mfn. and n. [ts], l. (mfn.) of a dark colour, esp. dark-
blue, blue-black; dark green; blue-green; Abh 96 (-o
ka1,1ho 'sito ka!o); Vin I 231,31 (appekacce Licchavi -a
0
honti -V~I,la
0
-vattha niliilankara) = D II 96,5
(Sv 545,w: na tesarp pakativa1,11,10 -o, 0 -vilepanavilittatta
pan' etarp vuttarp); DI 76,23 (suttarp ... -arp va pltarp va
lohitarp va odatarp va); II 110,25 (seyyatha pi nama
ummapuppharp -arp 0
-V~I,larp
0
-nidassanarp
0
-nibhasarp) = A V 61,21; Vv 22:1 (-a pita ca ka!a ca
mañjettha atha lo hita; Vv-a 111,23: -a ti
indanilamahanlladim~iratananarp vasena nilobhasa);
632 nila
nanaphaladhara duma); Nidd I 354,28 (marpsacakkhumhi
bhagavato pañca v~1,1a sarpvijjanti -o ca v~1,10
pitako ... lohitako ... k~ho ... odato ca v~1,1o ); Patis I
126,3 (channarp v~1,1iinarp -anarp pitakanarp
lohitakanarp odatanarp mañjetthanarp pabhassaranarp);
Ap 320,11 (udentarp va mahamegharp -arp
añjanasannibharp); Dhs 617; Cp 1:3:3 (dadahi pavararp
nagarp -arp); Mil 61 ,1o (-arp pi sañjanati pitarp pi
sañjanati ... ); Vism 75,1* (abhirattani -ani p~guni
patitani ca passanto tarupa1,11,1iini); 257,22 (pihakan ti
udarajivhamarpsarp, tarp va1,11,1ato -arp niggul,lgi-
pupphaval,ll,larp); Pv-a 46,24 (kesa -a digha); 158,1 (harite
ti -e); Nidd-a II 18,24 (sabbarp pi sassarp vapitakale
setarp hoti paccha -arp); Ap-a 264,10 (nigrodharukkhassa
khandho pakatiya seto hoti pattani -ani pakkani rattani);
- ifc see inda-, ghana-; - 2. (n.) a blue-green
substance or dye or mineral; Vin IV 120,23 (dubbal,ll,la-
karal,larp adatabbarp -arp va kaddamarp va ka!asamarp
va; 120,3o: -arp nfuna dve -ani katp.sanllarp.
palasanilarp); MI 127,31 (puriso agaccheyya lakharp va
haliddirp va -arp va mañjittharp va adaya); Thi-a20l,J
(cittakarena sippina -aya V~I,ladhatuya sunhu kata
lekha); - ifc see karpsa- (sv karpsa\ - 0 íibhijati,.f,
the blue-green class of being; A III 383,25 (Pura1,1ena
Kassapena -i paññatta bhikkhil k~taka-vuttika ye va
pan' aññe pi keci kammavada kiriyavada); Sv 162,17;-
0
0da, mfn. [nlla + uda3], with dark-blue water; Ja VI
172,7* (-arp; 172,12': 0 -salilarp) quoted Sadd 237,16;-
0
-kasil}a, n., meditation based on (something) dark blue;
a dark blue meditation object; (the jhana) which is or is
brought about by meditation based on (something) dark
blue; D III 268,23 (-arp eko sañjanati); A I 41,18 (-arp
bhaveti); Dhs 203; Vism 172,27/oll.; Sv 57,23 (0 -rasmi-
atthaya hi bhagava -arp samapajjati); - 0 -giva, mfn.
and m., blue-necked; a peacock; Abh 634 (moro ...
--sikha1,1gino); Sn 221 (sikhi yatha -o vihangamo); Ja VI
497,18* (-arp sikh~ginarp morarp dakkhisi); Ap-a
536,19* (mayilra -a te); - 0 -nibhasa, mfn., of dark-blue
appearance or lustre; D II 110,24; M II 13,3o (umma-
puppharp nilarp ... -arp); Dhs 246; - 0 -pupphi,.f, a
kind of convolvulus; Ja VI 536,10* (-i setavañ, Be, Ce so;
Se -i-; Ee -i-sekadhañ; 536,26': -1 ti adika
pupphavalliyo); - 0
-mañcaparayal}a, mfn., whose
resort is a dark couch;? Pv 14:5 (alena anagara ca -a;
Pv-a 80,22: -a ti susane chaggitamalamañcasayana, atha
va nila ti charikangarabahula susanabhilmi adhippeta,
tarp yeva mañcarp viya adhisayana ti attho, Be, Ce, Se
so; Ee chag~itamala mañcasayana); - 0 -mal}i, m., a
sapphire; Ja III 258,22 (--pilandhanarp); IV 140,24
(--ratanarp); Sv 545,13 (-lhi . . . alankata); 632,22; -
0
-Vatthika, m., a dealer in dark-blue cloth; Sadd 810,3o
(nilavattharp assa bh~garp -o); - 0 -vaddhika, mfn.,
with dark-blue straps; Sp 1084,4 (-a ti yasarp vaddha
yeva nlla, Ee, Se so; Be nllaka-; Ce nllakavaWka ti;
ad Vin I 186,1: Be, Se nllakavaddhika; Ce, Ee
nllakavattika);- 0 -sappa, m., a kind of snake (a whip-
snake ?); Abh 652 (-o silabhu ca); - anila, mfn., not